Bangladesh National Building Code: 2012 (BNBC 2012 Draft)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1
SCOPE AND DEFINITION
Chapter 1
TITLE, SCOPE AND GENERAL
1.1 TITLE
1.2 PURPOSE
1.3 SCOPE
1.4 EXISTING BUILDINGS
1.4.1 Addition and Alteration
1.4.2 Change of Use
1.5 HISTORIC OR ARCHITECTURALLY VALUABLE BUILDINGS
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
Chapter 2
DEFINITIONS
2.1 GENERAL
2.2 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
1-3
1-3
Chapter 3
ABBREVIATIONS
3.1 ABBREVIATIONS OF NAMES
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS OF WORDS
1-7
1-8
1-iii
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
1.1 TITLE
TITLE, SCOPE AND GENERAL
The provisions and regulations contained in this document shall constitute and be collectively known and
may be cited as the "Bangladesh National Building Code:2012", abbreviated, where desired, as BNBC, and
will hereinafter be referred to as the "Code".
1.2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Code is to establish minimum standards for design, construction, quality of materials,
use and occupancy, location and maintenance of all buildings within Bangladesh in order to safeguard,
within achievable limits, life, limb, health, property and public welfare. The installation and use of certain
equipment, services and appurtenances related, connected or attached to such buildings are also regulated
herein to achieve the same purpose.
The provisions of this Code are applicable to all persons of Bangladesh irrespective of class, creed, culture,
religion or sex. The Code does not in any way create or otherwise establish or designate any particular class
or group of persons who will or should be specially protected or benefited by the provisions of this Code.
The expressed intent of this Code is to insure public safety, health and general welfare insofar as they are
affected by the construction, alteration, repair, removal, demolition, use or occupancy of buildings,
structures or premises, through structural strength, stability, means of egress, safety from fire and other
hazards, sanitation, light and ventilation.
1.3 SCOPE
The provisions of this Code shall apply to the design, construction, use or occupancy, alteration, moving,
demolition and repair of any building or structure and to any appurtenances installed therein or connected
or attached thereto, except such matters as are otherwise provided for in other ordinances and statutes
controlling and regulating buildings.
If for any case different sections of this Code provide different specifications for materials, methods of
design or construction, or other requirements, the most restrictive specification shall govern.
In case of any conflict between a general requirement and a specific requirement, the specific requirement
shall be applicable.
Unless otherwise explicitly stated in this Code, all references to part, chapter or section numbers or to
provisions not specifically identified by number, shall be construed to refer to such part, chapter, section or
provision of this Code.
References made to a section without mentioning a part shall be construed to refer to that section of the
part in which the reference is made.
The provisions of any appendix in this Code shall not be mandatory unless they are referred to as such in
any section of the Code or they are specifically adopted by any regulation.
Inspection conducted or permission granted for any building or plan of building, under the provisions of this
Code, shall not be construed as a warranty of the physical condition of such building or the adequacy of
such plan. Neither the Authority administering the Code, nor any employee thereof shall be liable for
damages or any defect or hazardous or illegal condition or inadequacy in such building or plan, nor for any
failure of any component of such building which may occur subsequent to such inspection or granting of
permission under the provisions of the Code.
Part 1
Scope and Definition
1-1
Part 1

Buildings which are in existence on the date of promulgation of this Code may have their use or occupancy
continued without undergoing any alteration, abandonment or removal unless in the opinion of the
Authority such continued use is hazardous to life and property and provided such use or occupancy was
legal on the date of promulgation of this Code. Buildings approved before adoption of the present updated
Code and compliant with the previous version of the Code may continue to be used or occupied unless any
deviation is made thereafter or any deterioration has rendered the building unsafe in the opinion of the
Authority.
1.4.1
Addition and Alteration
Additions, alterations, modifications or repair to an existing building may be made without requiring the
existing building to comply with all the requirements of this Code, provided the additions, alterations,
modifications or repairs conform to that required for a new building. Such additions or alterations shall not
be permitted when the existing building is not in full compliance with the provisions of this Code except
when the addition or alteration will result in the existing building or structure being no more hazardous
based on life safety, fire safety and sanitation than it was before the addition or alteration was undertaken.
Any building together with the new additions shall not exceed the height, number of storeys and area
specified in this Code for new buildings having the relevant occupancy and type of construction. Nonstructural alterations or repairs to an existing building or structure which do not adversely affect any
structural member, nor reduce the strength of any part of the building or structure to result in an unsafe
condition shall be made with materials and components having the required fire resistance.
1.4.2
Change of Use
Change in use or occupancy in an existing building may be made when such change complies with the
requirements of this Code for a new building and provided such change does not render any part or the
whole of the affected building or structure any more hazardous based on life safety, fire safety and
sanitation than it was before such change was effected.
1.5 HISTORIC OR ARCHITECTURALLY VALUABLE BUILDINGS

A building or structure which has been designated by official action as having special historical or
archaeological interest, or a building or structure identified by a legally constituted authority as being
architecturally valuable, may be undertaken for repairs, alterations and additions necessary for its
preservation, restoration, rehabilitation or continued use provided:
a) the proposed repair, alteration or addition to buildings of historical or archaeological significance is
approved by the legally constituted authority, such as the Department of Archaeology;
b) the proposed repair, alteration or addition to buildings of architectural value does not impair the
aesthetic quality and architectural character of such buildings; and
c) the restored building or structure will be no more hazardous, if any, based on life safety, fire safety
and sanitation than the existing building.
1-2
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
2.1
GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise expressly stated, the abbreviations, terms, phrases, words and their derivations listed
below shall, for the purpose of this Code, be construed as set forth in this chapter. Words not explicitly
defined shall have their ordinarily accepted meanings as the context implies as provided in The Oxford
English Dictionary, second edition, Simpson, J. & Weiner, E., Ed., Oxford University Press, London, 1989; and
Chambers Science and Technology Dictionary, Chambers Harrap Publishers Ltd, New York,1999.
The terms defined in this part shall have a general applicability to the entire Code. Other than these, there
are other terminology and definitions provided in different parts, chapters and sections which shall be
applicable only to that particular part, chapter or section in which they are defined. In case of any conflict or
contradiction between a definition given in this part and that in any other part, chapter or section, the
meaning provided in that part, chapter or section shall govern for the interpretation of the provisions of
that particular part, chapter or section. In general, definitions given in a lower level shall override the
meanings of all upper levels for the interpretation of the provisions within the scope of that lower level.
2.2
DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
The terminologies used in this Code are defined in this section. Irrelevance of gender, tense and number is
implicit in these definitions and throughout the Code. Words in the masculine gender include the feminine
and the feminine the masculine. Verbs used in the present include the future. Words used in the singular
include the plural and the plural the singular.
ACCESSORY USE: Any use subordinate to the major use which is normally incidental to the major use.
ALTERATION: Any change, addition or modification in construction such as structural, dimensional, or any
removal of any part of a building or any change to or closing of any required means of ingress or egress or a
change to the fixtures or equipment or any change in land use or occupancy or use.
APPROVED: Approved by the Authority.
AUTHORIZED OFFICER: An officer appointed by the Government by notification in the Official Gazette to
exercise in any area the functions of an Authorized Officer.
AUTHORITY: The Authority which has been created by a statute and which, for the purpose of administering
this Code or part thereof, may authorize a committee or an official to act on its behalf. (This definition of
Authority shall apply to all appearances of the term in this Code written with a capital A).
BUILDING: Any permanent or semi-permanent structure which is constructed or erected for human
habitation or storage or for any other purpose and includes the foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs,
chimneys, fixed platform, verandah, balcony, cornice, projections, extensions, annexes and any land or
space enclosed by wall adjacent to it. The term building will also include the sanitary, plumbing, HVAC,
outdoor display structure, signs and all other building service installations which are constructed or erected
as an integral part of a building.
BUILDING LINE: The line up to which the plinth of a building may lawfully extend. Also known as SETBACK
LINE.
BUILDING OFFICIAL: Same as AUTHORIZED OFFICER above. Having meaning and authority of same as
AUTHORIZED OFFICER as defined in the Building Construction Act.
COMMITTEE: A Building Construction Committee constituted for any area in the prescribed manner, if
necessary.
Construct, To: See ERECT, TO.
Part 1
1-3
Part 1
CONVERSION: The change in occupancy or premises to any occupancy or use requiring new occupancy
permit.
COVERED AREA: The ground area above the plinth level which is covered by a building structure. The
covered area of a building shall exclude gardens, wells, uncovered water and swimming pool, fountains,
drainage structures, boundary wall, gates, single-storey open porch, uncovered staircase, watchman's cabin,
detached pump house, electrical substations, garbage chutes and other utility structures.
DEVELOPMENT: Carrying out construction of buildings, engineering, mining or other operations in, or over
or under land or water. Includes redevelopment and layout and subdivision of any land. 'To develop' and
other grammatical variations shall be interpreted accordingly.
DRAIN: A conduit or channel for conveying water, sewage, or other waste liquid for subsequent disposal.
DRAINAGE: The disposal of any liquid with a system meant for this purpose.
ERECT, TO: To erect a new building or re-erect an existing building or to convert a building from one
occupancy to another. Also known as CONSTRUCT, TO.
GOVERNMENT: The government of the People's Republic of Bangladesh.
GRADE: The lowest point of elevation of the finished surface of the ground, pavement or footpath within
the area between the building and a line which is the property line or a line 1.5 m from the building,
whichever is nearer the building.
HEIGHT OF BUILDING: The vertical distance from a reference datum to the highest point of the coping or the
parapet of a flat roof or to the deck line of a mansard roof or to the average height of the highest gable of a
pitched or whipped roof. The reference datum shall be the elevation of the nearest footpath, or the
elevation of the nearest road or street or public way at its centre line, whichever is higher.
HIGH RISE BUILDING: Any building which is more than 6 storeys or 20 m high.
OCCUPANCY OR USE GROUP: The purpose for which a building or a part thereof is used or intended to be
used.
OCCUPANCY, MAJOR: The major or principal occupancy of a building or a part thereof which has attached to
it subsidiary occupancy or occupancies contingent upon it.
OCCUPIER: A person paying or liable to pay rent or any portion of rent of a building in respect of which the
ward is used, or compensation or premium on account of occupation of such building and also a rent-free
tenant. Does not include a lodger and the words 'occupancy' and 'occupation' do not refer to the lodger. In
such cases the owner himself or herself is living in his or her own building, he or she shall be deemed to be
the occupier thereof.
OWNER, OF A BUILDING: The person, organization or agency at whose expenses the building is constructed
or who has the right to transfer the same and includes his or her heirs, assignees and legal representatives,
and a mortgagee in possession.
PERMIT: A written document or certificate issued by the Authority for carrying out a specific activity under
the provisions of this Code.
PLINTH AREA: Area of a building measured at the plinth level.
PLOT: See SITE.
PUBLIC WAY: See ROAD.
RELIABLE LITERATURE: See RELIABLE REFERENCE.
RELIABLE REFERENCE: Reference materials such as published article, codes, standards or other material
judged to be reliable by the professional users and specialists in the subject concerned. This may also be
referred to as RELIABLE LITERATURE.
ROAD: A thoroughfare or public way which has been dedicated or deeded to the public for public use. Also
known as STREET.
ROAD LINE: A line defining the side limits of a road.
ROOM HEIGHT: The clear head room between the finished floor surface and the finished ceiling surface or
the underside of the joists or beams, whichever is lower.
SANCTIONED PLAN: The set of plans, design and specifications of a building submitted to the Authority as
per provision of this Code and duly approved and sanctioned by the Authority.
SERVICE ROAD: A road or lane provided at the rear or side of a plot for service purposes.
1-4
Vol. 1
Definitions
Chapter 2
SETBACK LINE: See BUILDING LINE.

SITE: A piece or parcel of land on which a building is intended to be or has already been constructed. Also
known as PLOT.
SPECIALIST: A professional who by education, research, practice and experience specializes in a particular
branch of a broader discipline and is generally judged to be so by the professionals in the relevant discipline.
STOREY: That portion of a building included between the upper surface of any floor and the upper surface
of the floor above, except that the topmost storey shall be that portion of a building included between the
upper surface of the topmost floor and the ceiling or roof above. If the finished floor level directly above a
usable or unused under-floor space is more than 1.8 m above the grade, as defined herein, for more than 50
per cent of the total perimeter or is more than 3.6 m above grade at any point, such usable or unused
under-floor space shall be considered as a storey.
STOREY, FIRST: The lowest storey in a building which qualifies as a storey as defined herein, except that a
floor level in a building having only one floor level shall be classified as a first storey, provided such floor
level is not more than 1.25 m below grade, as defined herein, for more than 50 per cent of the total
perimeter, nor more than 2.5 m below grade at any point.
STREET: See ROAD.
STREET LEVEL: The elevation of the centre line of any road or street which a plot fronts.
STREET LINE: See ROAD LINE.
UNSAFE BUILDING: A building which, in the opinion of the Building Official, is structurally unsafe, or
insanitary, or lacks proper means of ingress or egress, or which constitutes a hazard to life or property.
Bangladesh National Building Code 2012
1-5
Chapter 3
3.1
ABBREVIATIONS OF NAMES
ABBREVIATIONS
Names of institutions, organizations and professional societies referred to in this Code are listed below in an
alphabetical order.
ACI: American Concrete Institute; Box 19150, Redford Station, Detroit, MI 48219, USA.
AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 400 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611, USA.
AISE: Association of Iron and Steel Engineers; Suite 2350, Three Gateway Center, Pittsburgh, PA 15222, USA.
AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute; Suite 300, 1133 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005, USA.
ANSI: American National Standards Institute; 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018, USA.
ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 345 East 47th
Street, New York, NY 10017, USA.
ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers; United Engineering Centre, 345 East 47th Street, New
York, NY 10017, USA.
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials; 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103, USA.
AWS: American Welding Society; 550 N.W. LeJeune Rd., P.O. Box 351040, Miami, FL 33135, USA.
BOCA: Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.; 1313 East 60th Street, Chicago,
IL 60637, USA.
BSI: British Standards Institution; 2 Park Street, London W1A 2BS, UK.
BSTI: Bangladesh Standards and Testing Institution; 116A Tejgaon Industrial Area, Dhaka 1208,
BANGLADESH.
BWDB: Bangladesh Water Development Board; WAPDA Building, Motijheel Commercial Area, Dhaka 1000,
BANGLADESH.
CGSM: Canadian General Standards Board; Technical Information Unit, Ottawa, CANADA K1A 1G6.
FM: Factory Manual; Standards Laboratories Department, 1151 Boston Providence Turnpike, Norwood, MA
02062, USA.
ICBO: International Conference of Building Officials; 5360 South Workman Mill Road, Whittier, CA 90601,
USA.
ISO: International Organization for Standardization; 1, Rue de Varemb, Case Postal 56, CH-1211, Genve
20, SWITZERLAND.
ISSMFE: International Society of Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering; University Engineering
Department, Trumpington St, Cambridge CB21PZ, UK.
NFPA, NFiPA : National Fire Protection Association; Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269, USA.
Part 1
1-7
Part 1
PDB: Power Development Board; WAPDA Building, Motijheel Commercial Area, Dhaka 1000, BANGLADESH.
PWD: Public Works Department; Poorta Bhaban, Segun Bagicha, Dhaka 1000, BANGLADESH.
RCSC: Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation; American Institute of
Steel Construction (AISC).
RMA: Rubber Manufacturing Association; 1400 K Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005, USA.
SBCCI: Southern Building Code Congress International; 3617 8th Ave, S. Birmingham, AL 35222, USA.
SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, 8224 Old Courthouse Road,
Tysons Corner, Vienna, VA 22180, USA.
SPRI: Single Ply Roofing Institute; 104 Wilmont Road, Suite 201, Deerfield, IL 600015-5195, USA.
UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc; 207 East Ohio Street, Chicago, IL 60611, USA.
3.2
ABBREVIATIONS OF WORDS
The abbreviations used in this Code are listed below in an alphabetical order. Abbreviations not explicitly
defined herein below shall be construed to have their usual meaning as the context implies.
BDS: Bangladesh Standards; published by the BSTI
BS: British Standard; published by the BSI
CBF: Concentric Braced Frame
CFC: Chlorofluorocarbon
CGI: Corrugated Galvanized Iron
cps: Cycles per second
CWPC: Cold Drawn Low Carbon Wire Prestressed Concrete
DCP: Dry Chemical Powder (fire extinguisher)
DDT: Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane
DPC: Damp-proof Course
EBF: Eccentric Braced Frame
FAR: Floor Area Ratio
FM: Fineness Modulus
FPA: Flood Prone Area
GI: Galvanized Iron
IMRF: Intermediate Moment Resisting Frame
IS: Indian Standard; published by the Bureau of Indian Standards
LFD: Load Factor Design
LPG: Liquefied Petroleum Gas
MCSP: Multipurpose Cyclone Shelter Programme
OMRF: Ordinary Moment Resisting Frame
1-8
Vol. 1
Abbreviations
Chapter 3
RC: Reinforced Concrete

RS: Rolled Steel
RSJ: Rolled Steel Joist
SMRF: Special Moment Resisting Frame
SPA: Surge Prone Area
SRSS: Square Root of the Sum of the Squares
UBC: Uniform Building Code; published by the ICBO
WSD: Working Stress Design
1-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 2
ADMINISTRATION AND ENFORCEMENT
Chapter 1
PURPOSE AND APPLICABILITY
1.1 PURPOSE
1.2 TERMINOLOGY
1.3 APPLICABILITY
1.3.1 Construction
1.3.2 Removal
1.3.3 Demolition
1.3.4 Alteration
1.3.5 Maintenance
1.3.6 Repair
1.3.7 Land Development
Chapter 2
ORGANIZATION AND ENFORCEMENT
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2-iii
CODE ENFORCEMENT AGENCY

ENFORCEMENT AT THE FIELD LEVEL
BUILDING OFFICIAL
ADMINISTRATIVE JURISDICTION OF BUILDING OFFICIALS
MERGING THE JURISDICTIONS UNDER SMALL LOCAL BODIES
QUALIFICATION OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL
RESTRICTIONS ON THE BUILDING OFFICIAL
DAMAGE SUIT
POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL
2.9.1 General
2.9.2 Deputies
2.9.3 Recognition of Professional Services
2.9.4 Application and Permits
2.9.5 Building Notices and Orders
2.9.6 Right of Entry
2.9.7 Inspection
2.9.8 Orders to Stop Work
2.9.9 Occupancy Violation
2.9.10 Maintenance of Records
2.9.11 Expert Opinion
APPEALATE AUTHORITY
REQUIREMENT OF CERTIFICATION OF WORK
LIMITS OF PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
VIOLATION AND PENALTIES
2.13.1
General
2.13.2
Professional Violation
2.13.3
Obligation of Offender
2.13.4
Conviction No Bar to Further Prosecution
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
Vol. 1
Part 2
Administration and Enforcement
2.14 POWER TO MAKE RULES

Chapter 3
PERMIT AND INSPECTIONS
2-8
3.1
3.2
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-16
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
2-iv
PERMITS
TYPES OF PERMIT
3.2.1 Validity of Permits from the Date of Issuance
3.2.2 Permits Obtained Prior to Adoption of Code
CONSTITUTION OF BUILDING PERMIT COMMITTEES
APPLICATION FOR PERMIT
DISPOSAL OF APPLICATION
PREPARATION AND SIGNING OF DRAWINGS
FEES
RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF THE OWNER
3.8.1 General
3.8.2 Employment of Technical Personnel
3.8.3 Right of Entry
3.8.4 Permits from Other Agencies
3.8.5 Information on Progressive Work
3.8.6 Safety Measures
3.8.7 Notice of Completion
3.8.8 Documents at Site
RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF TECHNICAL PERSONNEL
INSPECTION
UNSAFE BUILDINGS
3.11.1 General
3.11.2 Examination
3.11.3 Notification
3.11.4 Disregard of Notice
3.11.5 Cases of Emergency
DEMOLITION OF BUILDINGS
VALIDITY OF THIS CODE
3.13.1 Partial Invalidity
3.13.1 Invalidity of Existing Buildings
ARCHITECTURAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
MAKING IMPLEMENTATION PROCEDURES
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
1.1 PURPOSE
PURPOSE AND APPLICABILITY
The purpose of this part is to relate the provisions of the Code to different documents for administration and
enforcement of the Code. All legal issues shall be referred to the Building Construction Act.
1.2 TERMINOLOGY
ALTERATION : Any change, addition or modification in construction such as structural, dimensional, or any
removal of any part of a building or any change to or closing of any required means of ingress or egress or a
change to the fixtures or equipment or any change in occupancy or use.
APPLICANT : A person, a firm, a company, a corporation, or a government, semi-government or nongovernment agency who intends to undertake any work regulated by this Code and who has filed an application
to the Building Official for this purpose in a form prescribed in the Code.
APPROVED PLAN : The set of plans, designs and specification of a building submitted to the Authority as per
provision of this Code and duly approved and sanctioned by the Authority.
AUTHORIZED OFFICER : An officer appointed by the Government by notification in the Official Gazette to
BUILDING OFFICIAL : Same as AUTHORIZED OFFICER above. Having meaning and authority of AUTHORIZED
OFFICER as defined in the Building Construction Act.
BUILDER : A person, a firm, a company, a corporation or a government, semi-government or non-government
agency who undertakes construction of any work regulated by the Code. Owner of a building or structure in
connection to which the work is undertaken shall not be considered as a Builder.
CONSTRUCT, TO : To construct a new building or reconstruct an existing building or to convert a building from
one occupancy to another.
DEVELOPMENT : Carrying out construction of buildings, engineering, mining or other operations in, or over or
under land or water. Includes redevelopment and layout and subdivision of any land. 'To develop' and other
grammatical variations shall be interpreted accordingly.
ERECT, TO : See CONSTRUCT, TO.
OWNER (OF A BUILDING) : The person, organization or agency at whose expenses the building is constructed
and who has the legal right over the land on which it is constructed or one who has the right to transfer the
same and includes his or her heirs, assignees and legal representatives, and a mortgagee in possession.
PERMIT : A written document or certificate issued by the Authority for carrying out a specific activity under the
provisions of this Code.
UNSAFE BUILDING : A building which, in the opinion of the Building Official, is structurally unsafe, or insanitary,
or lacks proper means of ingress or egress, or which constitutes a hazard to life or property.
1.3 APPLICABILITY
The requirements of this Code shall be complied within any construction, addition, alteration or repair, use and
occupancy, location, maintenance, demolition and removal of a building or structure or any appurtenances
connected or attached to it as set forth herein below.
Part 2
2-1
Part 2
1.3.1
Construction
For construction of a new building, the provisions of this Code shall apply to its design and construction.
1.3.2
Removal
For removal of any portion or the whole of a building, the provisions of this Code shall apply to all parts of the
building whether removed or not.
1.3.3
Demolition
For dismantling or demolition of any part or the whole of a building, the provisions of this Code shall apply to
any remaining portion and to the work involved in the dismantling or demolition process.
1.3.4
Alteration
For alteration of a building, the provisions of this Code shall apply to the whole building whether existing or
new. If the portion of the building to which the alteration is made is completely self contained with respect to
the facilities and safety measures required by this Code, the provisions of this Code shall apply only to that
portion and not to the whole building.
1.3.5
Maintenance
Maintenance work shall be undertaken for all new and existing buildings and all parts thereof to continue their
compliance with the provisions of this Code. All devices, equipment and safeguards installed as per the
requirements of this Code shall be maintained in conformity with the edition of the Code under which installed.
The owner of the building or his designated agent shall at all times be responsible for the safe and sanitary
maintenance of the building or structure, its means of egress facilities and the safety devices, equipment and
services installed therein. The Authorized Officer or his delegated persons as described in relevant documents
mentioned in Chapter 2 may cause re-inspection of a building to determine its continued compliance with this
section.
1.3.6
Repair
Application or notice to the Authority administering the Code is not necessary for ordinary repairs to buildings
or structures, provided such repairs do not involve the cutting away of any wall or portion thereof, the removal
or cutting of any structural or bearing element, the removal or alteration of any required means of egress, or
the rearrangement of any parts of a structure affecting the access and exit facilities. All works involving addition
to, alteration or change of use of any building or structure shall conform to the requirements set forth in Part 9
of this Code.
1.3.7
Land Development
For development of a land for construction of a building, the provisions of this Code shall apply to the entire
development work. For land development purposes the following laws shall also be applicable:
a) The Town Improvement (TI) Act 1953
b) Land Development Rules for Private Housing 2004
2-2
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
ORGANIZATION AND ENFORCEMENT
2.1 CODE ENFORCEMENT AGENCY

2.1.1
The Government shall establish a new or designate an existing department/agency responsible for
enforcement of this Code throughout Bangladesh. Code enforcing agency shall have the authority of
the government and shall herein be referred to as the Building Regulatory Authority (BRA). This
Authority shall work as apex body to implement the provisions of the Bangladesh National Building
Code (BNBC) and will be administered under the Ministry of Housing and Public Works, Government of
Bangladesh.
2.1.2
Central Headquarters of BRA will be located in Dhaka or any other place as decided by the government.
Headed by one Chairman it will have Members not exceeding five. There will be necessary officers and
staff for smooth functioning of the office.
2.2
ENFORCEMENT AT THE FIELD LEVEL
2.2.1
The Building Regulatory Authority will designate a section/wing/part/branch/division of any public office
engaged in the development sector with specific geographical jurisdiction as sub-ordinate office of BRA.
These offices will be named as Office of the Building Official (OBA). OBAs will be established at various
local/regional development area or local government levels.
2.2.2
These Offices of Building Official will have necessary number of officers, technical assistants, inspectors,
and other employees as shall required for proper implementation and administration of the provisions
of the Code. All the officers and staff of these field offices shall be under administrative control of BRA.
They will be in the pay-roll of the office they will be serving and will be treated as on deputation to BRA.
2.3 BUILDING OFFICIAL

2.3.1
The administrative and operational chief of the code enforcing office shall be designated as the Building
Official who shall act on behalf of the Authority. The Building Official will exercise the power and
perform responsibilities and duties of Authorised Officer as laid down in the Building Construction Act.
The Building Official may designate an employee or employees who shall carry out the specified duty
and exercise the specified power of the Building Official.
2.3.2
The Authority may direct that power of Building Official may be exercised through a Building
Construction Committee (B.C.Committee). 75% or more members in such committees shall comprise of
professionals like architects, civil engineers and town planners. Building Official shall work as ex-officio
member-secretary of the B.C. Committee.
2.4
ADMINISTRATIVE JURISDICTION OF BUILDING OFFICIALS
2.4.1
The areas delineated below in the table shall be under the jurisdiction of the Building Officials located in
the offices /authorities mentioned in the right hand column:
Part 2
2-3
Part 2
Sl.
Area
Authority
Raj.U.K
Areas falling under the master plan control of Rajdhani Unnayan

Kartipokhkha (Raj.U.K)
Areas falling under the master plan control of Chittagong
Development Authority (C.D.A.)
Areas falling under the master plan control of Rajshahi Development
Authority (R.D.A)
Areas falling under the master plan control of Khulna Development
Authority (K.D.A)
Areas falling under the master plan control of any Development
Authority to be established in future
Areas falling under the geographical jurisdiction of any City
Corporation where no Development Authority exists
Areas falling under the geographical jurisdiction of any Municipality
where no Development Authority exists
Areas not falling under any of the above
Special areas, if any
2
3
4
5
6
7
2.4.2
C.D.A.
R.D.A
K.D.A
relevant development authority
relevant city corporation
Relevant municipality
PWD division office in each
administrative district
To be declared by the government as
and when necessary
There may be as many Building Officials as required depending upon the area of jurisdiction. But every
Building Official will be in charge of an independent and well demarcated area.
2.5 MERGING THE JURISDICTIONS UNDER SMALL LOCAL BODIES

Small local bodies like pourashavas and thanas located outside the larger city municipalities and having
insufficient funds for individually carrying out the task of a code enforcing agency may jointly appoint or
designate, with the approval of the authority, a Building Official who shall have a jurisdiction over the combined
area of jurisdiction of the concerned local bodies.
2.6 QUALIFICATION OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL

The person to be designated as the Building Official shall be at least an architect, civil engineer, or town
planner in addition to fulfilling any other requirement of the Authority. The employees of the Building Official
shall be adequately qualified to carry out the responsibilities assigned to them by the Building Official.
2.7 RESTRICTIONS ON THE BUILDING OFFICIAL

The Building Official or any of his employees shall not in any way, directly or indirectly, be engaged in planning,
design, construction, repair, maintenance, modification or alteration of a building, certification of any work or
materials, supply of materials, labour, equipment or appliances or any other work regulated by the provisions of
this Code. The Building Official or any of his employees shall not be interested in business, either directly or
indirectly, as planner, engineer, architect, builder or supplier or in any other private business transaction or
activity within the jurisdiction of the Authority which conflicts with his official duties or with the interest of the
code enforcing agency.
2.8 DAMAGE SUIT

In the process of discharging the official duties as required and permitted by the Code, the Building Official or
any of his employees shall not be personally liable for any damage that may be caused to any person or
property. Any suit filed against the Building Official or any of his employee because of an act performed by him
in the official discharge of his duties and under the provisions of the Code shall be defended by the legal
2-4
Vol. 1
Organization and Enforcement
Chapter 2
representative of the Authority until the final decision of the proceedings. In no case shall the Building Official or
any of his employees be liable for costs in any legal action, suit, or defence proceeding that may be filed in
pursuance of the provisions of the Code.
2.9 POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL

2.9.1
General
The Building Official shall be authorized to enforce all the provisions of this Code and for such purposes the
Building Official shall have the power of a law enforcing officer.
The Building Official shall be authorized to interpret this Code and to adopt and enforce rules and supplemental
regulations in order to clarify the application of its provisions in conformity with the intent and purpose of this
Code.
2.9.2
Deputies
The Building Official may appoint such number of technical officers and inspectors and other employees as shall
be authorized from time to time in accordance with the prescribed procedures and with the approval of the
Authority.
The Building Official may designate such officers or inspectors as may be necessary to carry out the functions of
the code enforcement agency.
2.9.3
Recognition of Professional Services
The Building Official may recognize the professional services provided by architects, engineers, planners and
supervisors. Such recognition may be withdrawn by the Building Official under the provisions set forth in Sec
2.6.3.
2.9.4
Application and Permits
Applications shall be made in writing to the Building Official for any erection, construction, addition, alteration,
modification, repair, improvement, removal, conversion or demolition of any building or structure regulated by
this Code. The Building Official shall receive such applications, examine the premises, enforce compliance with
this Code and issue permits for the intended work.
2.9.5
Building Notices and Orders
All necessary notices and orders to correct illegal or unsafe conditions, to require the specified safeguards
during construction, to require adequate access and exit facilities in existing buildings and to ensure compliance
with all the requirements of safety, health and general welfare of the public as included in this Code shall be
issued by the Building Official.
2.9.6
Right of Entry
The Building Official may enter a building or premises at reasonable times to inspect or to perform the duties
imposed by this Code if:
i) it is necessary to make an inspection to enforce the provisions of this Code; or
ii) the Building Official has reasonable cause to believe that a condition contrary to or in violation
of this Code exists making the building or the premises unsafe, hazardous or dangerous.
If the building or premises is occupied, the Building Official shall present credentials to the occupant and request
entry. If the building or premises is unoccupied, the Building Official shall first make a reasonable effort to locate
the owner or any other person having charge or control of the building or premises and request entry. If entry
into the building or premises is refused or the owner of the unoccupied building or premises cannot be located,
the Building Official shall secure entry as provided by the law.
2-5
Part 2
2.9.7
Inspection
The Building Official shall inspect all construction or work for which a permit is required or he shall accept
reports of inspection by an engineer, architect or planner and may approve or disapprove the work inspected.
The work or construction to be inspected shall remain accessible and exposed for inspection purposes until the
approval is obtained.
All reports of inspection shall be in writing and certified by the Building Official or the engineer or the architect
making the inspection.
Approval of work or construction as a result of such inspection shall not be interpreted to be an approval of a
violation of the provisions of this Code or of other ordinances of the jurisdiction.
The Building Official may require survey of the site and adjoining areas to verify that the structure is located in
accordance with the approved plans.
2.9.8
Orders to Stop Work
The Building Official may issue an order for immediate discontinuation of a work and cancellation of a previous
permit for such work at any stage if:
i) any work is being done contrary to the provision of this Code or other pertinent laws or
ordinances implemented through the enforcement of this Code; or
ii) it is determined by the Building Official that the construction is not proceeding according to the
approved plan.
In such cases the Building Official shall notify the owner in writing of such an order and all further construction
shall be stayed until correction has been effected and approved.
2.9.9
Occupancy Violation
The Building Official may order the current uses of a building discontinued and the building or portion thereof
vacated by serving a notice on any person if the Building Official determines that the building or structure or
equipment therein regulated by this Code is being used contrary to the provisions of this Code. Such person
shall discontinue the use within the time prescribed by the Building Official after receipt of such notice to make
the structure, or portion thereof, comply with the requirements of this Code.
2.9.10 Maintenance of Records
The Building Official shall maintain records of all applications and drawings received, permits and orders issued,
inspections made and reports prepared and submitted by other recognized agencies. Copies of all relevant
papers and documents for enforcement of the Code shall be preserved by the Building Official. All such records
shall be kept open to public inspection at all suitable times.
2.9.11 Expert Opinion
The Building Official may engage, subject to the approval of the Authority, an expert or a panel of experts for
opinion on unusual technical issues that may arise in administering the provisions of the Code.
2.10 APPEALATE AUTHORITY

There shall be an Appealate Authority to hear and decide appeals of orders, decisions or determinations made
by the Building Official related to the application and interpretation of this Code. It shall be constituted as per
the provision laid out in the Building Construction Act. The Appealate Authority shall provide reasonable
interpretation of the provisions of this Code and determine the suitability of alternative materials or methods of
design or construction. Such Board shall consist of members appointed by the Authority who are noted for their
education and experience in the relevant field of building construction and whose term of office shall be at the
pleasure of the Authority. This body shall, with the approval of the government, adopt rules of procedure for
conducting its business, and shall communicate all decisions and findings in writing to the appellant with a copy
to the Building Official.
2-6
Vol. 1
Organization and Enforcement
Chapter 2
This authority shall have no discretion for interpretation of the administrative provisions contained in Part 2 of
this Code nor shall the be empowered to waive any requirement of this Code.
2.11 REQUIREMENT OF CERTIFICATION OF WORK

Any planning, design, supervision of construction, repair, maintenance, modification and alteration of buildings,
or any other work regulated by the Code shall be certified by an engineer, architect or planner for its compliance
with the provisions of the Code.
2.12 LIMITS OF PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT

An architect, engineer or planner assisted if necessary by personnel working under his direct control, shall be
allowed to plan, design and supervise construction, repair, maintenance, alteration and modification of
buildings or structures regulated by this Code provided he certifies compliance of the work with the provisions
of the Code. Such a person may provide any such certificate as long as his or her services are recognized by the
Building Official as specified in Sec 2.9.3 and such recognition is not withdrawn under the provisions of Sec
2.13.2withdrawn under the provisions of Sec 2.13.2
2.13 VIOLATION AND PENALTIES

2.13.1 General
Any person, firm, corporation or government department or agency who as owner of the property erects,
constructs, enlarges, alters, repairs, moves, improves, removes, converts, demolishes, equips, uses, occupies or
maintains any building or structure or cause or permit the same to be done in violation of this Code shall be
guilty of an offence and the Authority shall take legal action against such offenders. The term owner shall, for
the purpose of these provisions include any developer who by appointment, contract or lease is or has been
responsible for the actions listed above.
2.13.2 Professional Violation
The engineer, architect or planner responsible for design, supervision or certification of any construction or
other work of a building or structure shall ensure compliance of such work with the provisions of this Code, any
violation of which or any other professional misconduct insofar as implementation of the provisions of this Code
is concerned including making false statements or issuing false certificates or any incidence of proven
professional incapability shall make him liable to penalties as prescribed by the Authority including withdrawal
of recognition.
2.13.3 Obligation of Offender

A person shall not be relieved from the duty of carrying out the requirements or obligations imposed on him or
her by virtue of the provisions of this Code even if such person is convicted for an offence under the provisions
of this section.
2.13.4 Conviction No Bar to Further Prosecution
If a person is convicted under the provisions of this Code for failing to comply with any of its requirements or
obligations such conviction shall not act as a bar for further prosecution for any subsequent failure on the part
of such person to comply.
2-7
Part 2
2.14 POWER TO MAKE RULES

The Authority may make rules for carrying out the provisions and intentions of this Code. Such rules shall not
contradict nor nullify any of the provisions of this Code. The Authority may fix and refix from time to time
application fees for issuance of permits for all works under the provisions of this Code.
2-8
Vol. 1
Chapter 3
3.1 PERMITS
PERMIT AND INSPECTIONS
No building or structure regulated by this Code shall be erected, constructed, enlarged, altered, repaired,
moved, improved, removed, converted or demolished without obtaining permit for each such work from the
Building official.
Exceptions:
The following works are exempted from the requirement of a permit unless they do not otherwise violate the
provisions of this Code, for the said work or any other adjacent property, regarding general building
requirements, structural stability and fire safety requirements of this Code:
a) Opening or closing of a window or a door or a ventilator;
b) Providing internal doors;
c) Providing partitions;
d) Providing false ceiling;
e) Gardening;
f)
Painting;
g) Plastering and patch work;

h) Re-flooring;
i)
Construction of sunshades on one's own land;
j)
Re-erection of portion of buildings damaged by earthquake or cyclone or other natural calamities, to

the extent and specification as existed prior to such damage; and
k) Solid boundary walls less than 1.5 m and open boundary wall less than 2.75 m in height.
3.2 TYPES OF PERMIT

Building permit shall comprise of the following 4(four) stages:
a)
Land use certificate
b)
Large and specialized project permit.
c)
Building permit
d)
Occupancy certificate.
Permit of all or any of the above may be necessary for a particular area/city/town/municipality. Requirement in
this regard shall be incorporated in the building construction byelaws/ rules/regulations valid for that particular
area/city/town/municipality.
3.2.1
Validity of Permits from the Date of Issuance

a)
24 months
b)
Lange and specialized project permit
24 months
c)
Building permit
36 months
Part 2
2-9
Part 2
(unless construction upto plinth level is done)

d)
Occupation certificate
Perpetual
(unless any change in use and physical properties.)

3.2.2
Permits Obtained Prior to Adoption of Code
If permit for a building or structure or a work regulated by this Code is obtained before adoption of this Code
and the building or structure or work for which the permit is obtained is not completed within three years from
the date of issuance of such permit, the said permit shall be deemed to have lapsed and fresh permit shall be
necessary to proceed further with the work in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
3.3 CONSTITUTION OF BUILDING PERMIT COMMITTEES

3.3.1
As per the provisions laid out in the Building Construction Act the government may constitute various
committees to examine and scrutinize applications mentioned in Clause 3.2 above and approve or
refuse permits thereby.
3.3.2
Each committee will have specific Terms of Reference and Work Procedure.
3.4 APPLICATION FOR PERMIT

3.4.1
Any person who intends to undertake any work on a building or structure or land regulated by this Code
shall file application in writing on the prescribed form furnished by the Building official for that purpose.
3.4.2
Application for permit for any work under the provisions of this Code shall be accompanied by
necessary documents, drawings, certificates, clearances and other relevant information as required by
the Building Official for that particular city/ town/municipality/ jurisdiction area etc.
3.4.3
The drawings shall have any of the sizes specified in the following table:
3.4.4
Notation (ISO Standard)
Size (mm)
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
841 x 1189
594 x 841
420 x 594
297 x 420
210 x 297
Operation and Maintenance of Utility Services
The government may undertake works for operation, maintenance, development or execution of any of the
following utility services without requiring obtaining permit from the Building official.
2-10
a)
Railways
b)
National Highways
c)
National Waterways
d)
National Gas grid
e)
National Power grid
f)
Major Ports
g)
Airways and Aerodromes
h)
Telecommunications
i)
Electronic Broadcasting Services
Vol. 1
Permit and Inspections
j)
Chapter 3
Any other services which the Government may, by notification, declare to be a service
for the purpose of this section if the Government is of the opinion that the operation,
maintenance, development or execution of such service is essential to the community.
Buildings constructed in connection with these services shall conform with the specifications of this
Code.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF APPLICATION

3.5.1
Subject to the submission of correct and complete application for the permits included in section 3.2.1
above, should be disposed by the Building Official within the time limit as below:
a.
b
c.
d.
Type of Permit
Maximum type allowed for

disposal (approval or refusal of
the Building official)

Large and Specialized Project permit
Building permit
Occupancy certificate
15 days
45 days
45 days
15 days
3.5.2
The Building Official shall notify the applicant according to above table as the case may be either
approval or refusal of the permit for any work. If the Building Official does not notify the applicant of
such approval or refusal within this specified period, the application shall be deemed to have been
approved provided the fact is brought to the notice of the Building Official. Such approval shall not be
interpreted to authorize any person to do anything in contravention of or against the terms of lease or
titles of the land or against any other regulations, bylaws or ordinance operating on the site of the work
or any of the provisions of this Code.
3.5.3
Refusal of permit shall be accompanied with reason and the Building Official shall quote the relevant
sections of this Code which the application/drawings/submissions contravene. The applicant may
correct or remove such reasons and reapply for permit with any fee if applicable. The Building Official
shall scrutinize the re-submitted application and if there be no further objection it shall be approved
and permit issued.
3.6 PREPARATION AND SIGNING OF DRAWINGS

3.6.1
All drawings submitted for approval shall be prepared and signed by relevant technical personnels
specified in this Code, which shall be considered as equivalent to certifying that the drawing on which
the signature appears conforms to all the requirements of this Code. Technical personnel shall put his
or her signature with date on the title box of the drawing along with his name, address, professional
society membership number and any other information required by the concerned Building Official.
3.6.2
The drawings shall also contain the signature, name and address of the owner.
3.6.3
Subject to the classification and use of buildings, all drawings for approval and execution shall be
prepared by the technical personnel specified in the following table corresponding to relevant work.
2-11
Part 2
Building
type
Qualification and
Competence of
Technical person
Job-wise list of authorized

Technical Personnel
Member/Associate
Member/Candidate Member
of relevant professional body
and enlisted to perform
design and related works.
up to 7500m
A, B, C, F1,
F2, G and H
Member of relevant
professional body and
enlisted to perform design
and related works
(1) Land Survey: Civil Engineer,

Diploma Civil Engineer or Certified
Surveyor.
(2) Soil Test report: Geological/Civil
Engineer or Qualified Person / Firm in
Soil Testing
(3)Architectural Design:
Architect/Civil Engineer/5-year
experienced Diploma Architect
(4)Structural Design:
Civil or Structural Engineer
(5) Plumbing and Sanitary Design:
Plumbing Engineer/Qualified Architect
or Engineer
(6)Mechanical (HVAC/Vertical
Transportation)Design:
Mechanical Engineer
(7) Electrical Design:
Electrical Engineer
(8)Construction Supervision:
Construction Supervisor, Architect and
Engineer
(9) Completion Report:
Architect / Engineer in charge
Surveyor.
Soil Testing
(3)Architectural Design: Architect
or Engineer
Mechanical Engineer
Electrical Engineer
Engineer
Building of Any
Size
All Types
Member/Fellow of relevant
professional body+8-years
work experience and enlisted
to perform design and
related works
Height of
building
(Floors)
Floor area
(Sq.Meter)
Up to 5
Storey
up to 1000m
Any
Height
Any Height
2-12

Surveyor.
Vol. 1
Chapter 3
Soil Testing
(3)Architectural Design: Architect
or Engineer
Mechanical Engineer
Electrical Engineer
Engineer
3.7 FEES
All applications shall be accompanied by fees as specified by the authority from time to time without which the
application shall be deemed to be incomplete.
3.8 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF THE OWNER

3.8.1
General
The owner of a building or structure regulated by the provisions of this Code shall be responsible for carrying
out the work in conformity with the provisions of this Code. Granting of permission for any work or approval of
plans or inspection by the Building Official or any of the deputies shall not relieve the owner from such
responsibility.
3.8.2
Employment of Technical Personnel
Design, execution and supervision work of any building shall be carried out by authorized technical personnel as
out lined in this Code. Owner shall take the services of as many professionals as required according to type and
size of the work.
3.8.3
Right of Entry
The owner shall allow the Building Officials to enter the site for the purpose of enforcing the Code as required
by the provision of Sec 2.2.4 and for the purpose of inspection as provided in Section 3.10 below.
3.8.4
Permits from Other Agencies
The owner shall obtain permit as may be applicable from other concerned agencies relating to building, zoning,
grades, sewers, water mains, plumbing, signs, blasting, street occupancy, gas, electricity, highways and all other
permits required in connection with the proposed work.
3.8.5
Information on Progressive Work
The owner shall inform the Building Official about attainment of construction work of different stages as
required by the Building Official in prescribed form.
3.8.6
Safety Measures
The owner shall take proper safety measures in and around the construction site.
2-13
Part 2
3.8.7
Notice of Completion
The owner shall notify the Building Official of the completion of the work for which permit was granted in
prescribed form. The work shall not be accepted as complete without such certification from the Building
Official.
3.8.8
Documents at Site
The owner shall preserve at the site a copy of all permits issued and all drawings approved by the Building
Official. Results of tests carried out for determination of conformity of the work with the provisions of this Code
shall also be preserved and made available for inspection during execution of the work.
3.9 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF TECHNICAL PERSONNEL

3.9.1
To qualify as Architect, Engineer, Supervisor of any building works one should have membership of the
respective professional body in the country. They should have permission to perform design and related
works to be granted by the professional institute.
3.9.2
All technical professionals are bound to design, execute and supervise any building which is subjected
to approval granted under this Code.
3.9.3
Any lapses on the part of the technical personnel in delivering just and correctness shall call for punitive
actions against him/her in the proper forum.
3.10 INSPECTION
All works relating to a building or structure regulated by the provisions of this Code for which permits are
required shall be subject to inspection by the Building Official. Modalities and frequency of such inspections
shall conform to the requirements put forward by the approving authority.
3.11 UNSAFE BUILDINGS

3.11.1 General
All buildings considered to constitute danger to public safety or property shall be declared unsafe and shall be
repaired or demolished as directed by the Building Official.
3.11.2 Examination
The Building Official shall examine or cause examination of every building reported to pose threat to safety or
be damaged by wear and tear or accident and shall make a written record of such examination.
3.11.3 Notification
If a building is found to be unsafe the Building Official shall notify the owner of the building and specify the
defects thereof. The notice shall require the owner within a stated time either to complete the required repair
or improvement or demolish and remove the building or portion thereof.
3.11.4 Disregard of Notice
In case the owner fails, neglects or refuses to carry out the repair or improvement of the unsafe building or
portion thereof as specified in the notice, the Building Official shall cause the danger to be removed either by
demolition or repair of the building or portion thereof or otherwise, the cost of which shall be borne by the
owner.
3.11.5 Cases of Emergency
If the Building Official considers that an unsafe building or structure constitute imminent danger to human life
or health or public property, the Building Official shall at once or with a notice as may be possible promptly
2-14
Vol. 1
Chapter 3
cause such building or structure or portion thereof to be rendered safe or removed. In such cases the decision
of the Building Official shall be final and binding and he or any of his assigned deputies may at once enter such
structure or land on which it stands or the abutting land or structure, with such assistance from and at such cost
to the owner as may be deemed necessary. The Building Official may also get the adjacent structures vacated
and protect the public by an appropriate fence or such other means as may be necessary.
3.12 DEMOLITION OF BUILDINGS

If a building or structure is to be demolished, the owner shall notify all agencies providing utility services to the
building. Such agencies shall remove all their appurtenances and equipment and dismantle all service
connections to ensure a safe condition. The Building Official shall not grant any permit for demolition of a
building until a release is obtained from the utility services stating that all service connections have been
removed in the proper manner.
3.13 VALIDITY OF THIS CODE

3.13.1 Partial Invalidity
In case any provision of this Code is held to be illegal or void, this shall have no effect on the validity of any other
provision of the Code nor on the same provision in different cases nor on the Code as a whole, and they shall
remain effective.
3.13.2 Invalidity of Existing Buildings
If any provision of this Code is held to be illegal or void by the Authority as applied to an existing building or
structure, validity of that provision or any other provision of the Code in its application to buildings hereafter
erected shall not be affected.
3.14 ARCHITECTURAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL

3.14.1 Besides enforcing the provisions of this Code for normal buildings and structures, the Building Official
shall, for special structures such as those listed in Section 3.14.2 below, also examine the aesthetics and
environmental issues vis-a-vis the existing structures and the characteristics of the area, and exercise
architectural and environmental control in accordance with the provisions of this section.
3.14.2 Special structures for which architectural and environmental control shall be exerted by the Building
Official shall include:
a) major public building complexes
b) buildings in the vicinity of monuments and major sculptures
c) buildings and structures near existing structures identified to be architecturally valuable.
d) buildings and structures near historic buildings or in a area of historical or archaeological significance.
e) buildings near any structures that represents the special characteristics of an area
f)
any proposed building or structure that represents the special characteristics or forms part of a larger
master plan of an area, and
g) any development that may have an effect on or mar the environment or characteristics of an area.
2-15
Part 2
3.14.3 The Authority shall, for the purpose of exercising the architectural and environmental control and for
identifying existing structures having architectural value, appoint a standing committee comprising
noted experts from the fields of Architecture, Archeology, Planning, History, Art, Literature, Engineering
or any other discipline which may be deemed relevant. The committee shall examine the aesthetic
quality of the proposed building, structure or development and the effect it may have on the
characteristics and environment of the area in order to ensure aesthetic continuance of the new
structure with the existing ones and aesthetic blending of the new structure with the surroundings. The
committee may require additional drawings and information for a detailed study of the proposed work.
The committee for the purpose of arriving at their decision, may at their discretion depending on the
magnitude of the project and impact it may have on public life, hear the architect of the proposed work
who may wish to explain the various features of the project, note comments of other experts in the
relevant disciplines, or in exceptional circumstances, institute a public hearing to assess public reaction
to the project.
3.14.4 The committee may approve the proposed work, recommend changes in the scheme, or disapprove the
scheme, for reasons of aesthetics and environmental control.
3.14.5 The Building Official shall not issue permit for undertaking the proposed work until obtaining a report
from the standing committee stating that the intended work is acceptable in respect of its effect on the
environment, landscape, architectural characteristics, historical feature or any other aesthetical quality
of the locality, area or landscape concerned.
3.15 MAKING IMPLEMENTATION PROCEDURES

Detailed byelaws and implementation procedure to enforce the provisions of this Code shall be prepared
and published by the relevant authorities.
Related Appendices
APPENDIX A
Form for Application of Land Use/Development/Building Permit
APPENDIX B
Form for Certificate of Supervision
APPENDIX C
Form for Sanction or Refusal of Land Use/Development/Building Permit
APPENDIX D
Form for Appeal against Refusal of any Permit
APPENDIX E
Form for Completion Certificate
APPENDIX F
Form for Occupancy Certificate
2-16
Vol. 1
CHAPTER
General Building Requirements

1.1
SCOPE
This part of thiscode puts forward classification of buildings based on occupancy or nature of use
and deals with the general and specific requirements of each of the occupancy groups. Fire
resistance requirements are expressed in terms of type of construction which shall conform to the
specified fire-resistive properties.
1.2
TERMINOLOGY
This section provides an alphabetical list of the terms used in and applicable to this part of
thiscode. In case of any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that
in any other part of this Code, the meaning provided in this part shall govern for interpretation of
the provisions of this part.
Accessibility
The provision in aplotor a building or a facility or any part thereof that can be
approached, entered and used without assistance by persons with temporary
or permanent physical limitations.
Accessibility
route
A continuous unobstructedpath that starts from the entry and shall continue
through all accessible elements and spaces within a plot and buildings or
facilities thereof up to the exit termination.
Adaptable
Spaces or features are designed for persons having physical limitation shall
have a prefixadaptablesuch as adaptable toilet, adaptable kitchen, and
adaptable lift and so on.
Area planning
authority
A government or semi-government agency or a local body which has been

legally designated to formulate land use or plans of the area under their
jurisdiction.
Assembly
In a building or a portion thereof used for gathering of 50 or more persons for

deliberation, worship, reading, entertainment, eating, drinking, awaiting
transportation, or similar uses not limited to these; or used as a special
amusement building, regardless of occupant load.
Atrium
A large volume space within a multistoried building having series of floor

openings or corridors or similar elements in and around and floors are
connected from there and series of openings or a glazing on roof or a portion
thereof constructed with glazing and having a minimum two stories high. The
word Atria or Atriums are the plural form of Atrium.
Part 3
General Building Requirements, Control and Regulation
3-1
Part 3
Balcony
A covered and hanging platform at a height of minimum 2.286m from the

plinth level of a building and having access from any floor level and which is
laterally open to outer air by three sides up to 2.06 m in height and edges are
protected with guards. Within an interior space, a balcony is a portion which
are positioned sidewise as similar as Mezzanine.
Baluster
Single vertical member of a guardrail or a Handrail or a member of both which

shall be complied with the provisions of this code.
Balustrade
Plural form of Baluster.
Barrier
A wall or a partition or a floor slab or a ceiling within a building which

confines and protects flow of smoke and fire from the exposed side of the
barrier. The fire rating of barriers shall be complied with the provisions of this
code.
A floor of a building or a portion thereof which is situated as a whole or
partially at depth of minimum 50% of ceiling height below formation level
shall be called as a basement.
Basement
Building line
The peripheral lines of a building mass or volume up to which the plinth area
or any floor area may be lawfully extended within a plot.
Ceiling height
Height measured from the top of finished surface of floor level up to the
bottom of roof or ceiling or suspended or false ceiling level or Beam drops. In
case of multistoried building, Vertical distance in between two slabs from
which deduction shall be made for any suspended or false ceiling or Beam
drops. For slope or pitch ceiling or roof, the minimum value shall be the ceiling
height.
A space or a room within a building enclosed by barriers with the fire rated
walls, floor and ceiling, where the quantity of hazardous material shall not be
exceeded the maximum allowable quantity per control area for storing,
displaying, handling, dispensing or using as per provisions of this code.
Control Area
Detached
Occupancy
A building separated by distance in a same plot to accommodate different type

of occupancies shall be termed as Detached Occupancy.
Development
authority
A government or semi-government agency or a local body which has been

legally designated to carry out and/or control any works of land development
of an area having jurisdiction.
FAR (Floor
Area Ratio)
FAR is a ratio between the area of a plot and the sum of floor areas of building
or buildings are erected or intended to be erected thereof. In the buildings,
there may have some specific and calculated floor areas which shall be treated
as bonus or exempted from the total floor area calculation and such areas shall
be specified by the authorities having jurisdiction.
Fire
An uncontrolled fire which poses threat to safety of life or property or both.
3-2
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
Fire
separation
distance
A minimum distance which to be maintained between potential sources and/or

between structures for fire safety. In case of differences between building
setback and the required minimum fire separation distance measurement; the
higher value shall be implied.
Flood
A Land or a plot normally dry but submerges or drowns as whole or partially

by overflown water from any source.
Flood level
A measurement of height from an existing ground level or from top level of

river water of an area or a locality recorded in a Flood Hazard Map by the
authorities having jurisdiction.
Flood Prone
Area
At least once in a year a dry ground of an area or a plot or a portion thereof

flooded at a height of 1m or more shall be designated as a Floor Prone Area.
Floor Height
In a multistoried building, floor height shall be measured from the top of

finished surface of the two successive floor slabs and the measurement of the
top most floor shall be from the top of finished surface of the floor slab and the
top of the finished roof, in case of the slope roof, measurement shall be taken
up to pick of that slope.
Frontage
Irrespective of the entry provision to a plot, full or partial length of any sides of
a plot which are abutted to roads or streets shall be designated as frontage.
Formation
level
Finished ground level of a plot. For hilly areas formation levels shall be the
gradient of the plot surface.
Gallery
A special type of seating arrangement where each and every row or tier of
seats are successively elevated to provide a clear view to audiences or
spectators within and around a playground or outdoor or indoor stadium or
within an auditorium or in a hall.
Guard
A vertical protective barrier erected up to a height along exposed edges of

stairways, balconies and similar areas.
Head room
Clearance
A vertical distance measured from the top of finished floor level up to the
bottom of ceiling or lowest roof level or bottom of beam drop or bottom of any
hanging element within a space. In case of a stairway, a vertical distance
measured from the bottom surface of flight or ceiling or beam drop to any
outer edge point of a tread below and for the landings ceiling height
measurement system shall be adopted to determine head room clearance.
Helistop
A designated area on ground or on water or on a portion of a building for

helicopter landing or takeoff without servicing, repairing and refueling
facilities.
High rise
building
A building is used for human occupancy and located at level more than 20m
high from the center of the adjacent road level or from lowest level of the fire
department access vehicle which is capable of reaching the floor or the
3-3
Part 3
protected openings of highest isolated refuge area located in a building.

Lighting shaft
A space within a building which is fully enclosed by all sides and shall be open
to the sky to provide daylight to adjacent interiors and less than the
dimensions that stipulated for minimum closed or internal courts of
corresponding to the building heights.
Loft
An intermediate space in-between a floor or a ceiling and under a pitch or a

slope roof of a building.
Mandatory
open space
Mezzanine
floor
The spaces within a plot which shall be remained uncovered up to the sky
from formation level of the building.
Within one space where more than one floor exists, the floor at the lowest level
shall be designated as main floor and each Intermediate floor is limited to an
area which is not more than one third of the main floor under one roof or one
ceiling, thus gives two or more useable floor levels. These types of intermediate
floors shall be designated as mezzanine floors. Mezzanine floor may be as
gallery or flat floor type and which also includes interior balcony.
Mixed
Occupancy
When two or more occupancies are amalgamated in a building shall be termed

as Mixed Occupancy.
Non separated
Space
Condition
Walls or partitions between compartments, rooms, spaces or areas within a

building or part of a building which are not separated by an approved fire
rated barrier walls or partitions shall be designated as non-separated space
condition or effective undivided single space.
Openings
Apertures or holes in any wall of a building that allow air to flow through and
which are designed as open.
Opening,
Vertical
An opening through a floor or roof of a building.
Plinth
Bases of the building and the elements that negotiate with the ground.
Plinth Level
Height of a covered finished floor which is just above the formation level and
measured from the formation level up to the top of that finished floor.
Plinth Area
The elements from the building bases which are exposed above the formation
level to form a covered floor area by joining the peripheral points of the
elements which are intersected finished floor plane at the height of plinth level
shall be designated as Plinth Area.
Plot
A scheduled piece or parcel of land which is classified and restricted to its

intended use.
A sloping walkway which is steeper than 1 in 20 but not steeper than 1 in 8 and
shall have guard and handrail.
Ramp
3-4
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
Ramp,
Accessibility
A sloping walkway not steeper than 1 in 12.
Ramped
Driveway
A sloping driveway or Ramped Driveway steeper than 1 in 8 shall not be

credited as a component of means of exit.
Road level
The road level means top surface at the center point of the road width which is
used for site entry and shall be considered as the reference point for measuring
height or depth of any development.
Roof
Weather exposed and uncovered surface of the topmost or the terminal ceiling
of a building which may be horizontal or pitched or may have slopes shall be
treated as the roof of a building.
Separated
Occupancy
A building or a portion thereof separated by barriers with wall or ceiling slab

that into two or more parts to accommodate different type of occupancies in
different parts.
Separate
Space
Condition
Separation
wall
Rooms, spaces or areas within a building when separated by approved barrier

wall.
Site
See : Plot
Smoke Draft
Barrier
A vertical panel dropped from the ceiling of a building or portion thereof to

protect and control the movement of smoke draft during fire. The construction
of such smoke draft barriers shall be complied with the provisions of this code.
Stage
An elevated platform which is designed or used for presentation of plays or

lectures or other entertainments in front an assembly of spectators or
audiences.
An elevated platform within a building which is designed or used for
presentation of plays or lectures or other entertainment in front an assembly of
spectators or audiences.
Stage, interior
This is a peripheral wall of a building or a building which shall be divided into

two or more or a common wall between two buildings to control spreading of
fire as per provisions of this code.
Stage,
Legitimate
Ceiling Height of a stage from the top surface of the platform is 15.24 m or
more shall be designated as a legitimate stage.
Storage
density
A storage or display of solid or liquid merchandises shall not be exceeded 976

kg/m2 or 814 L/m2 respectively and shall be limited to the exempted quantity of
an actually occupied net floor area. Maximum height of display or storing of
merchandises shall not be exceeded 1829mm or 2438mm respectively.
Allowable Height and Quantity may be less depending on the total area and
the ceiling height of a store or a display.
3-5
Part 3
Street or Road
The plots are situated opposite or face to face of each other and divided by a
space in between the plots which is unobstructed and open to outer air having
required width and used by the public as pedestrian or walkway or animal or
vehicular movement or any combination of these and is connected with the
national public transportation system other than railway track shall be
designated as street or road which may or may not be paved.
Street or Road
width
The width of any street or road shall be measured form any plot to its opposite
or face to face plot distance. For the determination of a road width,
measurements shall be taken up to the connection of the national public
transportation system other than railway track from any plot and the least
width shall be the road width.
Street Floor
Level
A story or floor level of a building which is accessible at the main entrance of a

building from the street or from the outside at ground level and the floor shall
not be more than three risers above or below the grade level.
Structural
frame
All members or elements such as columns, girders, beams, trusses and

spandrels which forms a frame and have direct connections with bearing and
transferring as an integral and essential elements for the stability of a building
or a structure as a whole.
Expected occurrence of a surge or wave of water may flow above 1 m or higher
from the formation level.
Surge Prone
Area
Tall structure
A building used for human occupancy located more than 80m high from the
center of the adjacent road level or from lowest level of the fire department
vehicle access.
Terrace
A paved surface not steeper than 1 in 20 and adjacent to a building which is

connected by a stairway or a walking ramp or at the same level of any floor
below the roof level of a building and at least one side of that area is exposed to
the weather and having the guards and open to the sky.
Universal
accessibility
Unprotected
See: accessibility
Ventilation
shaft, Natural
A space sidewise enclosed but open to sky used to provide ventilation as inlet
and/or outlet to adjacent interiors of dimensions less than that stipulated for
internal courts of corresponding to building heights.
Verandah
Portions of a building at any level which have ceiling or roof and at least one
side open up to 2.13 m height to the outside air and have guards as per
provisions of this code.
A multi storied building which does not have any mechanical means of vertical
circulation other than stairway shall be designated as a walkup building and
the maximum height of the walkup building shall be as per provision of this
code or as approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
Walkup
building
3-6
The element that shall have no prerequisites of fire protection rating.
Vol. 1
1.3
Chapter 1
Land use classification and permitted uses
A city or a township or a municipality or a unionor any other habitat development shall be

brought under a structured planningincluding detailed area planning to implement the intended
land use pattern, transportation and maintaining environmental conditions by the development or
planning authorities and shall be approved by the Government. This land use classification may
divide an area into zones such as residential, commercial, industrial, storage,Green Park,
agricultural land, reserved area etc. or any combination of these. The land use zones shall be
shown on the approved master plan of the area and the planning regulation shall clearly state the
following uses for each zone.
a. permitted occupancies
b. conditionally permitted occupancies and
c. restricted occupancies.
1.4
Occupancy and Construction Classification of Buildings
Every building or portion thereof shall be classified according to its use or character of occupancy.
A brief description of such occupancy groups is presented in Table 3.1.1. Details of alloccupancy
group and sub-divisions are set forth in Sec 2.1 of Chapter 2 of this Part. Types of construction
based on fire resistance are specified in Table 3.1.2. Details of such types of construction are set
forth in chapter 3 of this part.
Table 3.1.1
Summary of Occupancy Classification
Occupancy type
A: Residential
B: Educational
Facilities
C: Institution for
Care
D: Healthcare
facilities
E: Business
F: Mercantile
Subdivision
Nature of use or occupancy
Fire Index*
A1
Single family dwelling
A2
Two families dwelling
A3
Flats or apartments
A4
Mess, boarding houses, dormitories and hostels
A5
Hotels and lodging houses
B1
Educational facilities up to higher secondary levels
B2
Facilities for training and above higher secondary education
B3
Pre-school facilities
C1
Institution for care of children
C2
Custodial institution for physically capable adults
C3
Custodial institution for the incapable adults
C4
Penal and mental institutions for children
C5
Penal and mental institutions for adults
D1
Normal medical facilities
D2
Emergency medical facilities
E1
Offices
E2
Research and testing laboratories
E3
Essential services
F1
Small shops and market
F2
Large shops and market
F3
Refueling station
G: Industrial
buildings
G1
Low hazard industries
G2
Moderate hazard industries
H: Storage
H1
Low fire risk storage
3-7
Part 3
Occupancy type
Subdivision
Nature of use or occupancy
Fire Index*
buildings
H2
Moderate fire risk storage
I: Assembly
I1
Large assembly with fixed seats
I2
Small assembly with fixed seats
I3
Large assembly without fixed seats
I4
Small assembly without fixed seats
I5
Sports facilities
J1
Explosion hazard building
J2
Chemical hazard building
J3
Biological hazard building
J: Hazardous
building
K: Garage
J4
Radiation hazard building
K1
Parking garage
K2
Private garage
K3
Repair garage
Utility
M1
Special structures
M2
Fences, tanks and towers
L: Utility
M: Miscellaneous
*Fire Index: fire index is an absolute number,Occupancy group having same fire index may be permitted as mixed
occupancy and different fire index shall be separated or detached as per provisions of this code.
Table 3.1.2
Summary of Classification of Buildings Based on Types of Construction
Construction Group
Construction type
Description
Group I:
Type I-A
4 hour protected
Type I-B
3 hour protected
Type I-C
2 hour protected
Type I-D
1 hour protected
Type I-E
Unprotected
Type II-A
Heavy timber
Type II-B
Protected wood joist
Type II-C
Unprotected wood joist
Type II-D
Protected wood frame
Type II-E
Unprotected wood frame
Non-combustible
Group II: Combustible
1.5
1.5.1
3-8
REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS
General Requirements
1.5.1.1 No building shall be constructed on any plot which is waste water logged, or on
any part of which is deposited refuse, excreta or other objectionable material, until
such plot has been effectively drained and cleared to the satisfaction of the
Authority.
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
1.5.1.2 Provision shall be kept for any space within the plot left vacant after the erection of
the building to be effectively drained by means of surface or underground drainage
system.
1.5.1.3 Basic minimum sanitary waste and excreta disposal facility shall be created on the
premises, whether or not the plot is served by a disposal system provided by any
utility service authority or agency.
1.5.1.4 Written approval of the Authority or the appropriate drainage and sanitation
authority shall be obtained for connecting any soil or surface water drain to the
sewer line.
1.5.2
Clearance from Overhead Electric Lines

1.5.2.1 No building or any part thereof shall be erected within, nor any auxiliary part of
the building be allowed to come closer than, the distances shown in Table 3.1.3
from any overhead electric line.
Table 3.1.3
Minimum Distances from Overhead Electric Lines
Line Voltage
Vertically (m)
Horizontally (m)
Low to Medium voltage
line and service line
High voltage lines up to 33
kV
High voltage lines beyond
33 kV
1.5.3
2.5
1.25
3.5
1.75
3.5 Plus 0.3 m for each

additional 33 kV or part
thereof
1.75 Plus 0.3 m for each

additional 33 kV or part
thereof.
Road , Formationlevel andPlinth Levels

1.5.3.1 Road level shall be lower than the populated formation level of an area. When a
road is designed and designated as a part of national disaster management system
formation levels shall be determined by the authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5.3.1 The Development of a formation level of a plot shall not be lower than the adjacent
road levels. Areas are not susceptible to flood or water logging, the formation level
shall not be required to change in highs more than 450 mm from the surface level
of the center line of the adjacent roads.
1.5.3.2 The plinth level of a building shall be at least 450 mm above the surface level of the
center line of the adjacentroad. Flood or Surge prone area plinth level shall be
determined by the development authority having jurisdiction.
1.5.4
Boundary Wall
1.5.4.1 Solid boundary walls of a plotor in between plots shall not be higher than 1.5 m or a
boundary made of grill, screen, balustrade etc. with a maximum height of 2.75 m
shall not require the permission of the Authority. For boundary walls made of a
combination of solid wall and grill or screen, the solid wall portion shall not be
higher than 1.5 m. The Authority may, on specific application, permit the use of
higher boundary walls.
3-9
Part 3
1.5.4.2 Construction of aboundary wall shall be capable to resist collapsing as per provision
of this code.
1.6
1.6.1
MEANS OF ACCESS
The provision of means of access implied on a plot or an area when there is more than one
building intended to be erected or more than one plot intendedto be created respectively
where buildings or any plot do not have frontage or not approachable by a public or a
private road or street shall have anaccessfacilities which shall beconnected with national
road transportation system. The components of means of access shall be complied with the
followings:
a)
The access facilities shall meet the requirements of fire service vehicles and engines
movement for rescue and fire extinguishment operation.
b)
Where required for fire apparatus access roads shall have an unobstructed width of 4.5
m and the minimum vertical clearance shall be 5m. The width and vertical clearance of
fire apparatus access roads may be increased when in the opinion of the fire authority,
the clearances are not adequate to provide fire apparatus access.
c)
Access roads longer than 30 m having a dead end shall be provided with appropriate
provisions for turning around of the fire apparatus at the dead end.
d)
The provision of fire apparatus stall shall be marked by approved sign.
e)
The area fully covered by private hydrant system with street side hydrant points
and/or hydrants within the building equivalent to fire service and civil defense
departments specification and the buildings have fire stairsas per provisions of this
code sections 1.6 (a), (b) and (c) may be exempted.
Internal Road or Access Road

Access road or internal roadare legally limited and restricted for thoroughfareto the
citizens and/or reserved for a group of people of a plot or an area which shall have access
provisions for the department of fire service and civil defense.
1.6.1.1 The width of access roads and drive ways in a plot or an area shall be decided by
the number and height of the buildings served thereby.
Table 3.1.4
Permissible Length of Internal or Access Roads in a Non-Residential plot or an area
Width (m)
Maximum Permissible Length (m)
6
80
7
150
8
300
9 or more
Unlimited
1.6.2
3-10
Pedestrian or Walkways or Footpath

A path including over bridge or bridge which is open to the outer air and may or may not
be covered or roofed or an underpass design and designated for walkers only.
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
1.6.2.1
Anuncoveredpaved pedestrian that links buildings and the approach road shall not be
included as a floorarea of a building.
1.6.2.2
The walkways shall not be used for any other purpose.
1.6.2.3
The minimum width of the pedestrian shall not be less than the calculated width of
connected corridor or passage or walking ramp of a building for entry or exit provided it
is not enclosed by adjacent walls on both sides; otherwise the minimum width shall be
1.25 m.
1.6.2.4
Pedestrians or walkways as accessibility route in public buildings shall be complied with

the provisions of this code. Any changes in elevation in accessibility route shall be with
table 3.1.5
Table 3.1.5
Slope of accessibility route when changes in
elevation
Changes in Elevation
Gradient not steeper
(mm)
than
0 to 15
1:2
>15 to 50
1:5
>50 to 200
1:10
>200
1:12
1.7
OPEN SPACES WITHIN A PLOT

1.7.1
Minimum open space requirements for the sides, rear and frontages of a plot shall
be as per the provisions of this code or the authority having jurisdiction.
1.7.2
At least 50 per cent of the mandatory open space in a plot shall remain unpaved
with or without vegetation to allow water penetration.
1.7.3
The total open area in a plot on which a building of educational, institutional,

health care occupancy is constructed shall not be less than 50 per cent of the plot
area.
1.7.4
The total open area in a plot on which a building of any occupancy, except those
mentioned in 1.7.2 and 1.7.3, is constructed shall not be less than 33 per cent of the
plot area.
1.7.5
For the purpose of Sec 1.7.2 and 1.7.3, the total open area shall include all exterior
open spaces and interior courtyards, but exclude the area of any lighting and
ventilation shaft.
1.7.6
For approved row type or cluster type housing or site and service schemes, the
requirement of 1.7.3 shall be applicable.
1.7.7
Separation of Buildings in the Same Plot

1.7.8.1 More than one building in a plot shall comply with the requirements of
means of access and setback distances in relation with the corresponding
3-11
Part 3
building height and the occupancy classification as per provisions of this

code and laws of the land.
1.7.8.2 Equidistant imaginary lines shall be drawn between the buildings of same
height and shall comply with setback and fire separation distance.
1.7.8.3 The imaginary lines shall satisfy the setback distances for both the
buildings when heights of the buildings are not equal.
1.7.8.4 Due to the common walls of row or semidetached houses shall be treated as
one building. More than one row or semidetached houses shall comply
with setback distances and means of access requirements.
1.7.8
Frontage Open Space for All Buildings

1.7.8.1 Irrespective of the height of building frontagesshall be constructed at a distances
of at least 4.5 m from the midpoint of the public or private street or roadwidth or
at a distance of at least 1.5 m plot abuttingstreets or roads edgeswhichever is
greater.
1.7.8.2 When two frontages of a plot intersects each other and form a sharp corner shall
be transformed to provide a turning clearancewith a minimum radius of 2m.
1.7.9
Side and Rear Separation distances

1.7.9.1 The minimum side and rear open space requirements of a plot for buildings of
various occupancy classes shall be as specified in Table 3.1.6.
1.7.9.2 For approved row type residential, mercantile or office as may be permitted by
the respective city or development authority and for approved affordable row
type, cluster or site and service schemes, the requirement of side separation
distance may be waived as per provisions of this code.
1.7.9.3 For semidetached buildings approved by the city or development authority,

which are permitted to be constructed with one side on the property line, the
minimum requirements of open space, specified in Sec 1.7.9, 1.7.10.1 and 1.7.10.2,
for the side opposite to that property line shall be increased by 0.5 m. The
requirement of separation distance for the remaining sides shall remain
unchanged.
Table 3.1.6
Minimum rear and side separation distancerequirements for buildingsin a plot
Plot Size*
Rear separation
Side separation
Occupancy
(m)
distance (m)
distance a(m)
Residential (Row type, not
Not over 67
1.25
Nil b
higher than 15m or 4
Over 67 to below 134
1.5
Nil b
stories)
Residential (Semi134 to 268
2.5
PGc, 2.5
detached, not higher than
Over 268
3.0
PGc, 2.5
10 stories or 33 m)
Residential (Detached, Not
Over 268
3.0
1.25
higher than 10 stories or 33
m)
3-12
Vol. 1
Residential(Detached,
Higher than 10 stories or
33 m)
Institution for care
Educational,
Assembly
Business and Mercantile
(Not higher than 10
stories or 33 m) semidetached
(Not higher than 10
stories or 33 m) Detached
Business and Mercantile d
(Higher than 10 stories or
33 m) semi-detached
(Higher than 10 stories or
33 m) Detached
Industrial
Storage
Hazardous
Chapter 1
Over 268
3.0
3.0
As permitted for this

occupancy
occupancy
Any
Any
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.5
3.0
PGc, 3.0
Any
1.5
1.25, 2.5
Over 536
3.0
PGc, 6.0
Over 536
3.0
3.0

occupancy
occupancy
occupancy
As per provisions of
this code
this code
this code
this code
this code
this code
Note :
a The two dimensions separated by comma stands for each of side separation distance of a semi-detached
development.
bNo side separation distance is required between buildings up to 15m or 4 stories even for independent plots.
cPG stands for Pounding Gap, which is a calculated gap for safe distance to avoid pounding due to lateral loads as per
provisions of Part 6 of this code. This gap is not required if the adjoining plots are consolidated and built
monolithically.
dMercantile occupancies shared walls between adjacent plots will only be allowed by the development authority.
* For narrow plots (with site frontage below 12m) of size 268m or above in unplanned areas, the local regulatory
authority may allow semi-detached typology with a minimum side separation distance of 3m on the unattached
1.7.10 Courtyard and Interior Courtyard
An area having proper dimensions as per provision of this code and open to the sky from
the formation level and surrounded by a building or buildings or walls or combination
thereof shall be designated a Courtyard. Area of a Courtyard shall be measured from
clear cross-sectional dimensions. In relation with height of the surrounding building or
buildings the area shall not be shaded more than two third duringthe mid-daylight.
When a courtyard is fully surrounded by a building shall be designated as an Interior
courtyard or a close courtyard.
A courtyard has exposures to the outer air. Sum of the exposures shall be at least thirty
percent of its peripheral length shall be designated as open courtyard.
3-13
Part 3
1.7.10.1 If any room depends entirely on an interior open space for its natural light and
ventilation, such interior open space shall be in the form of an interior courtyard
open to the sky over its entire cross-section. The interior courtyard shall have the
minimum dimensions depending on the height of the building as specified in
Table 3.1.10. The shorter side dimension of such interior courtyard shall not be
less than one-third of the longer side dimension.
For buildings over 20 storeys high, the size of the interior courtyard shall not be
less than the square of one-third the height of the tallest wall abutting the
courtyard.
1.7.10.2 The courtyard shall not be interrupted by any form of construction at the
courtyard level, except landscaping, sculpture etc.
1.7.10.3 If the courtyard is to serve as a component of the means of egress, it shall be
accessible from all exit points at ground level.
1.7.11 Permitted Construction in the Open Space
1.7.11.1 Landscaping, sculpture,walkways, water body shall be permitted in the open

space. Any such construction shall comply with Sec 1.7.2 of this chapter.
1.7.11.2 A maximum of one-third of the open space in a plot required by the provisions
of Sec 1.7.9 and 1.7.10 may be used for construction of garage, ramps, caretaker
or guards quarter and other services auxiliary to and required for the main
occupancy of the building, provided that the requirement of community open
space in Occupancy A3 is attained, and the building is not higher than 10 storey
or 33 m, and provided further that conditions (a) to (g) below are satisfied:
3-14
a.
No such construction permitted in the open space shall be higher than

2.75 m from the formation level of the plot, except for the tops of
inverted beams or intermittent parapets, which may rise up to 3.25 m.
b.
No window, door or ventilator shall be placed on any wall adjacent to

the abutting plot or street.
c.
Entrance to the garage orsloping drivewayshall not be directly from a

public road or street. Distance between the entrance to a garage or a
sloping driveway and the plot line adjoining the road shall be kept at
least 2.15m or3.35m respectively.
d.
Drainage from the roof or any other part of such construction shall not
be allowed to discharge into the adjacent property. Drainage from any
part shall not discharge directly into the street through spouts.
e.
No structure or room shall be constructed over the garage or any other

permitted service structure within the limits of the mandatory open
space.
f.
The roof of any such construction permitted in the mandatory open

space shall not be used as a balcony or a terrace or in any such manner
that would interfere with the privacy of the occupants of the adjacent
property.
Vol. 1
g.
Chapter 1
No toilet, generator room or electrical substation shall be constructed

adjoining the abutting property or street.
Table 3.1.7
Minimum Area of Interior Courtyard
No. of Stories
Maximum Height
(m)
Minimum Net Area of

the Interior Courtyard,
m2
Up to 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12-13
14-15
16-17
18-20
11
14
17
20
23
26
29
32
36
42
48
54
63
9
16
25
36
49
64
81
100
121
144
196
256
361
Note: enclosed open to sky spaces used to provide ventilation as inlet/outlet or

daylight to adjacent interiors having dimensions less than that stipulated for
internal courts of corresponding storey height given in this Table will be
considered ventilation or lighting shafts and not interior courtyards and will
follow minimum requirements stipulated in
1.7.11.3 Edges of slope roof or cornice of the building may be projected into the mandatory
open space for a maximum distance of 750mm.Such extensions shall not be
accessible from the building at any level.The construction of a roof or a cornice
shall be as such that rain or other water shall not fall from there into the
adjacentplot or street.
1.7.11.4 Sunshades over exteriordoors or windows of the building may extend into the
mandatory open space for a maximum distance of 750mm, provided that such
sunshades are at least 2.5 m above the formation level of the ground.
1.7.11.5 Cantilever canopy at a clear height of at least 2.5 m above the formation level may
project into the mandatory open space provided that a clearance of at least 1.5 m is
maintained between the edge of the canopy and the property line. The top surface
of such canopy shall not be used as a balcony and shall not be accessible from the
building.
1.7.11.6 Balconies at levels higher than 6 m may project intothe mandatory open space by
not more than 0.9 m provided that a clearance of at least 1.5 m is maintained
between the edge of the balcony and the property line.Balcony shall be
constructed as per provisions of this code.
3-15
Part 3
1.7.11.7 Water reservoirs, septic tanks, inspection pits, sewer and other service lines shall
be permitted in the mandatory open space provided that no part of such
construction elevated more than 150 mm above the formation level and the 50
percent mandatoryopen space shall be unpaved green area.
1.8 GENERAL HEIGHT AND AREA LIMITATIONS
1.8.1.1 For buildings more than six storeys or 20 m high, the following arrangements shall be
provided:
a. Lifts of adequate size, capacity and number as per provisions of this code.
b. Adequate fire protection and firefighting arrangements shall be as per provisions of
this code.
Table 3.1.8
Minimum separation distance for Buildings of Unlimited Height
Minimum Separation distance from plot
Occupancy
Frontage
Rear
Side
(m)
(m)
(m)
Residential
4.0
6.0
4.0
Business, Mercantile
Educational, Institutional for
care, Medical facilities.
Others
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
As per provision of this code
1.8.1.2
For buildings in the vicinity of airports or aerodromes, the height shall be limited by the
requirements of the civil aviation authority, city or area development authority or other
concerned agencies of the Government.
1.8.1.3
Where more than one construction type permitted within a building as per provision of
this codeamong them the lowest fire resistance rated construction type shall be applicable
for FAR allotment,and lowest fire resistance rating shall be applicable for the whole
structure.
1.8.2
FARAllotment and Limitations
1.8.2.1
Fire separation distance in terms of building setback and buildingoccupancy type and
construction type shall governthe FAR to restrict fire hazard volume. FAR shall be
decided by the development authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8.2.2
For Occupancy for which unlimited FAR is permitted, the minimum open space
requirements specified in Table 3.1.10 shall be applicable.
1.8.2.3
For the purpose of calculating FAR, the area of any floor including basement, of which at
least two-third is used exclusively for car parking and the remaining one-third is used for
purposes such as mechanical plant room, electrical substation, security cabin, reception
booth, water tank, pump house, stairs and lifts, which are accessory to the main
occupancy, shall be excluded from the calculation of the total floor area of the building.
For area with high public transport accessibility and high FAR the requirement for
residential private parking should not be more than one car for every four dwellings.
3-16
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
OFF STREET PARKING SPACES
1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
Off street parking requirement for a building or an area shall be decided by the
development authority having jurisdiction.
Sloping drivewaysteeper than 1 vertical to 8 horizontal shall not be credited as a walking
ramp. When a sloping surface used for both driveway and walking ramp shall be
demarked and the minimum width and sloping ratio of walkways shall be as per
provisions of this code. Sloping driveway entering below grade level shall be protected to
prevent water flow into any level that they lead to.
1.10 STREET ENCROACHMENT

No part of any building shall project beyond the property line or building line established by the
provisions of this Code into the street, except the following:
a. Below Grade: The footing of the boundary wall adjacent to the street may encroach the
street land not more than 0.3 m at least 1.5 m below grade.
b. Above Grade: Marquee, canopy or other temporary projection of cantilever type from
buildings of business and mercantile occupancy may project on the footpath of a road,
provided that no part of such projection is below a height of 3 m from the footpath level
and that the outer edge of the canopy is at a minimum clear horizontal distance of 0.25 m
from the road side edge of the footpath. The canopy shall be so constructed as to be readily
removable without endangering the building structure. No canopy shall project into a
street without a footpath. Under no circumstances shall the top of the canopy be used by
any floor of the building.
1.11 COMMUNITY OPEN SPACE AND AMENITIES
Community open space for an area or a building shall be decided by the development
authority having jurisdiction.
1.12 MINIMUM STANDARD OF A DWELLING
Minimum standard of a dwelling shall be decided by the development authority having
jurisdiction.
1.13 REQUIREMENTS OF PARTS OF BUILDINGS
1.13.1 Plinth and Formation Levels
The plinth and formation levels of the building and the plot shall conform to the requirements
ofSec 1.5.3.
1.13.2 Room Dimensions
1.13.2.1 Ceiling Heights
a. All habitable rooms in non-air-conditioned residential and business & mercantile

buildings, apart from kitchen, store room, utility room, box room and garage, shall have a
ceiling height not less than 2.75 m measured from the finished surface of the floor to the
underside of the finished ceiling, or false ceiling. A maximum of one-third of the floor area
of such habitable rooms may, however, have a minimum ceiling height of 2.44 m. For airconditioned rooms in such buildings, the minimum ceiling height shall be 2.44 m.
3-17
Part 3
In the case of pitched roof without a horizontal ceiling the lowest point of the finished
ceiling shall be at least 2 m above the finished surface of the floor and the average height of
the ceiling shall not be less than 2.44 m.
b. The minimum clear head room under the ceiling, folded plate, shell etc. and under the false
ceiling or duct in an air-conditioned room shall not be less than 2.44 m. The minimum clear
distance between the floor below and the soffit of a beam shall not be less than 2.15 m.
c. The requirements of ceiling height for buildings of occupancy other than residential and
business & mercantile shall be as follows:
Table 3.1.9
Minimum Ceiling Heights for Different Occupancies
Occupancy
Minimum Ceiling Height
Educational, Institutional,
3 m for non-air-conditioned and 2.6 m for
Health Care, Assembly.
air-conditioned buildings.
Industrial, Storage, Hazardous.
3.5 m for non-air-conditioned and 3.0 m

for air-conditioned buildings.
1.13.2.2 Room Sizes
Sleeping room size of a dwelling unit shall not be less than 9.5 m of net floor area with a
minimum width of 2.9 m and shall be complied with indoor air quality requirement as
per provisions of this code.
Other non-habitable rooms in the dwelling unit shall have a minimum area of 5 m with a
minimum width of 2 m.
1.13.3 Kitchen
1.13.3.1 The minimum clear height of kitchen measured from the finished surface of the
floor to the finished ceiling shall be 2.75 m, except for any floor trap of the
upper floor which shall have a minimum clearance of 2.15 m above the finished
floor. The minimum clear height of kitchen shall be 2.15 m where mechanical
exhaust is installed.
1.13.3.2 The minimum floor area of kitchen without provision for dining shall be 4 m
with a minimum width of 1.5 m. The minimum floor area of a kitchen which is
intended to provide dining or occasional sleeping space shall be 7.5 m with a
minimum width of 2.2 m.
1.13.3.3 Every kitchen shall be provided with a kitchen sink or other means for washing
utensils. The waste water shall be discharged into the waste water pipe or
drain.
1.13.3.4 The floor of the kitchen shall be water tight.
1.13.3.5 Every kitchen shall be provided with window having a minimum area of 1 m
which shall open to the exterior or to an interior open space of adequate
dimensions.
3-18
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
1.13.3.6 Details for adaptable Kitchen for disabled persons are shown with minimum
dimensions in following figures:
Adaptable Kitchen with Minimum dimensions
1.13.4 Bathroom and Toilets
1.13.4.1 The height of any bathroom, toilet or water closet shall not be less than 2.15 m measured
from the finished floor surface to the finished ceiling or false ceiling or to the lowest point
of any trap of the upper floor's plumbing system.
1.13.4.2 The minimum requirement of floor area and width of a bathroom with 3 fixtures, 2
fixtures or single fixture shall conform to the space standards of Table 3.1.16.
3-19
Part 3
1.13.4.3 Details for adaptabletoilet for disabled persons are shown in following figures with
minimum dimensions.
Adaptable toilets with minimum details and dimensions
3-20
Vol. 1
Table 3.1.10
Bathroom space standards
Facility
Minimum
width
Water closet + bathing + hand
1.25m
washing
Water closet + bathing
1m
Bathing only
1m
Water closet only
1m
Toilet for Disabled persons
1.5m
Chapter 1
Floor area
3.0m2
2.8 m2
1.5 m2
1.2 m2
2.25 m2
1.13.4.4 No bathroom or toilet containing water closet shall open directly into any kitchen or
cooking space by a door, window, ventilator, fanlight or any other opening. Every such
bathroom or toilet shall have a door completely shutting it off from the exterior.
1.13.4.5 Every bathroom, toilet and water closet shall be located against an exterior wall or wall
on the interior open space (see Sec 1.7.11), except where they are ventilated through an
interior lighting and ventilation shaft. Such interior lighting and ventilation shafts shall
have the minimum dimensions specified in Table 3.1.12 for different heights of buildings.
In addition, shafts for buildings exceeding 6 storeys or a height of 20 m shall be
mechanically ventilated. All shafts must be accessible at the ground floor level for
cleaning and servicing purposes.
Table 3.1.11
Minimum Dimensions of Lighting and Ventilation Shaft
Minimum Width
Building Height
Minimum Net
of Shaft
Cross- sectional
(m)
Area of Shaft
2
(m )
No. of Stories
Height (m)
Up to 3
Up to11
1.5
1.0
4
14
3.0
1.2
5
17
4.0
1.5
6
20
5.0
2.0
Over 6*
Over 20
6.5
2.5
* Mechanical ventilation of the shaft shall be provided for buildings over 6 stories high.
Shaft dimensions shall conform to mechanical design considerations.
1.13.4.6 Floors of bathrooms, toilets or water closets shall be treated with water repellent material
and shall be water tight. All bathroom walls or partitions shall be treated with nonabsorbent water repellent smooth impervious finish material to a height of not less than 1
m above the finished floor level. The floor shall be sloped gently towards gratings or
openings of the floor traps.
1.13.4.7 All public buildings shall have adaptable toilet as per requirement of the development
authorities having jurisdiction. Each dwelling unit shall have atleast one adaptabletoilet.
3-21
Part 3
1.13.5 Stairways
1.13.5.1 Limiting Dimensions: The minimum width of the staircase for various occupancies shall
be as specified in Table 4.3.6 of Part 4.
1.13.5.2 Sum of tworisers and one tread excluding nosing dimension shall not be less than 610mm
and not more than 648mm.All Risers and Treads shall be identical in consecutive two
flights starting from one floor to another floor. Difference between two consecutive risers
or treads shall not be more than 5mm.
1.13.5.3 The maximum flight height between landings shall not be more than 3658mm. For
Assembly occupancy maximum flight height between landings shall not be more than
2439mm.
1.13.5.4 The minimum clear head room between flights of a staircase shall be 2.15 m. The clear
head room may be reduced to 2.03 m for not more than three flights in any staircase.
1.13.5.5 The minimum clear height of any passage below a landing providing access to nonhabitable and service spaces shall be 2.03 m. The minimum clear height of all other
passages and spaces below a landing shall be 2.15 m.
1.13.5.6 Handrails shall have a minimum height of 0.9 m measured from the nose of stair to the
top of the handrail.
1.13.6 Mezzanine Floor
1.13.6.1 Eachmezzanine floorarea in a space shall not exceed one-third of the main floorarea.
1.13.6.2 The clear headroom both over and under the mezzanine floor shall be at least 2.2 m.
1.13.6.3 The lighting and ventilation of the space both over and under the mezzanine floor shall
not be obstructed in any way.
1.13.7 Lofts
1.13.7.1 Space under slope roof termed lofts shall not be used as a habitable space where
minimum ceiling height is less than the requirement.
1.13.7.2 The minimum ceiling height requirements for various rooms specified under Sec 1.12.2,
1.12.3 and 1.12.4 shall be maintained under the loft.
1.13.7.3 A maximum of 25% of the floor area of any room may be covered by a loft, except
bathrooms, toilets, water closets, store rooms and corridors where the whole area may
have an overhead loft.
1.13.7.4 The loft shall not interfere with the lighting and ventilation of any room.
1.13.8 Cabins or Chambers
1.13.8.1 Cabins or Chambers created by removable partitions on an open floor shall have a
minimum area of 3 m.
1.13.8.2 Clear passages at least 0.75 m wide shall be maintained between the cabins leading to a
means of exit which shall in no case be further than 16 m from any cabin.
3-22
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
1.13.9 Store Room
A store room provided in a dwelling unit of a residential building shall have a minimum area of
1.5 m with a minimum width of 1 m. The clear height of the store room shall not be less than 2.2
m.
1.13.10 Private Garage
Private garagein a residential building shall have a minimum clear height of 2.03 m. The minimum
area of the parking stall in a garage shall not be less than 23 m2.
1.13.11 Basement
1.13.11.1
Subject to the provision of Sec 1.8.3.6, the area of the basement shall be included in
the calculation of FAR.
1.13.11.2
The walls and floors of the basement shall be damp-proof and water-proof as per
provision of this code. The basement shall be protected against surface and waste
water intrusion.
1.13.11.3
The basement shall be lighted and ventilated as per provision of this code.
1.13.11.4
The staircases of a building serving above grade level also entering into below
street floor level shall be enclosed bybarrier wall with two door smoke proof
vestibule shall have minimum 2 hours fire resistance time of.
1.13.11.5
Ramp provided as walkways shall not be steeper than 1 vertical in 8 horizontal.
1.13.11.6
The clear height of the basement below soffit of beams shall not be less than 2.03 m.
1.13.12 Entrance to the Building
All buildings shall have a covered entrance or other covered area for callers waiting
at the door. The main entrance door to the building shall not open into an
uncovered exterior.
All public buildings shall have universal accessibility as per provisions of this code.
1.13.13 Roof Drainage

1.13.13.1
The roof of a building shall be constructed in such a manner that rain water is
drained freely away from the building without causing dampness of the roof or the
walls of the building or of an adjacent building.
1.13.13.2
Water from the roof shall not be discharged into the adjacent property or street.
1.13.13.3
For one or two storey buildings with flat or pitched roof, rain water may be
discharged directly to the ground, in which case the roof shall have extended eaves
or cornices to direct the water away from the walls.
1.13.13.4
For other buildings, gutters or parapets shall be provided to direct the water to the
piping of an adequate rain water drainage system.
1.13.13.5
The roof shall be impermeable or shall be treated with an impervious material to

make it effectively water tight. Flat concrete roofs shall be topped with an
impervious layer of lime concrete or other effective means of waterproofing. All flat
3-23
Part 3
roofs shall be sloped gently towards gutters, gratings or mouths of the rain water
drainage pipes.
Parapet
1.13.14
All accessible flat roofs shall be enclosed by parapets or guardrails having a height
of at least 1 m. All such parapets and guardrails shall be designed to withstand the
lateral forces due to wind and occupancy in conformity with the provisions of Part
6 of this Code.
1.13.15 Septic Tank
A septic tank shall be provided within the premises for disposal of sewage, whether
any public sewer is available or not. The location, design and construction of the
septic tank shall conform with the requirements of this Code.
1.13.16 Landscaping
1.13.16.1
Plantation of trees and shrubs within the open spaces of a plot aimed at enhancing
the environmental quality of the building shall comply with the requirements of
this section.
1.13.16.2
Trees and shrubs shall be planted judiciously to meet the requirements of shade
and sunshine, to control noise and dust, to provide privacy and to improve visual
quality, without jeopardizing natural ventilation and lighting of a building.
Species of trees shall be so chosen and planted that their roots do not endanger the
building foundation and their branches do not interfere with the building
superstructure. This shall be achieved by maintaining sufficient distance between
the trees and the building depending on the species of the tree.
1.13.16.3
1.14 DAMP-PROOFING AND WATERPROOFING OF FLOORS AND WALLS

Foundation, floor slabs, walls and roof of a building shall be damp proof, water proof and
weather proof in accordance with the provisions of Part 6 of this code.
1.15.1 Existing buildings and structures in their present occupancy condition shall not be
required to be in full compliance with all the requirements of this part of this code.
Additions or alterations to such existing buildings or change of use thereof shall not be
permitted if such addition, alteration or change of use or occupancy is likely to render the
building more hazardous with respect to fire safety, life safety and sanitation than it was
before.
1.15.2 Any horizontal or vertical extension of an existing building or any change of use thereof
shall subject the altered building or occupancy to the provisions of this Code for a new
building. The building together with the additions and changes shall not exceed the
height, area and open space requirements for new buildings specified in this Code.
1.15.3 All buildings and structures, both new and existing shall be maintained in a safe and
sanitary condition as provided for in this Code. To determine compliance with this
3-24
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
requirement, the Authority may cause the building or structure to be periodically

inspected.
1.15.4 Any proposed change in an existing building or structure shall have to satisfy the
requirements set forth in Part 6 of this Code.
1.16 BUILDINGS AND PLACES OF HISTORICAL OR ARCHITECTURAL VALUE
Repairs, alterations and additions necessary for the preservation, restoration,
rehabilitation, continued use or adaptive reuse of such historic buildings and structures,
and of buildings and works of architectural value may be exempted by the Authority from
having to be in full compliance with all the requirements of this code, provided that the
restored building or structure will be no more hazardous, if any, than the existing
conditions in terms of life safety, fire protection and sanitation.
1.17 VENTILATION, LIGHTING AND SANITATION
1.17.1 All rooms and interior spaces designated for human occupancy shall be provided with
means of natural or artificial lighting and natural or mechanical ventilation as per
1.17.2 All buildings shall have water and sanitation facilities as per provisions of this code.
1.17.3 Every kitchen shall have facility for washing of utensils.
1.17.4 Every building or independent unit thereof shall be provided with at least one water
closet.
1.17.5 All naturally ventilated and illuminated interior spaces, staircases and other areas of
human occupancy in a building shall have windows or ventilators opening directly to the
exterior or an interior open space or to a verandah. Ventilation of bathrooms may also be
achieved through ventilation shafts as provided for in Sec 1.12.4.4.
1.17.6 All habitable and non-habitable spaces within a building shall have the following
minimum aggregate area of openings in the exterior wall, excluding doors, expressed as
percentage of the net floor area:
Table 3.1.12
Dimensions of openings for different uses
Use type
Opening % of net floor
area
Habitable rooms such as those used for
15%
sleeping, living, study, dining etc.
Kitchens*
18%
Non-habitable spaces such as
10%
bathrooms, store, staircase and other
utility
*Minimum height from of the window ceilof a kitchen shall be 450mm above
cooking range. Air flow on cooking range shall be restricted.
3-25
Part 3
1.17.6.1
An enclosed staircase shall have windows not less than 1 m in area on exterior
walls of every landings as per provisions of this code.
1.17.6.2
Toilet and bathroom windows shall open to the exterior or an approved

ventilation shaft and the openable area shall not be less than 1 m.
1.17.7 The required minimum average intensity of illumination in a habitable space at a height of
750 mm above the floor level shall be 65 lux.
1.17.7.1 The required intensity of illumination for various tasks in a building shall be as specified
in Chapter 1 of Part 8.
1.17.7.2 Whenever the illumination achieved by daylight is not sufficient or occupancy at night is
necessary, artificial lighting shall be installed to supplement daylight, or to provide the
required night lighting, in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 1 of Part 8.
1.17.8 Protected openings, when and where are installed shall not be normally openable form the
inside of a building. Such openings however, shall not be credited towards meeting any
ventilation requirements.
1.17.9 The requirements of opening areas specified in Sec 1.17.6 shall suffice for ventilation
provided that the windows or ventilators forming the opening are openable. When part of
a window area is made of fixed glazing, only the openable portion shall be counted in
aggregating the opening area.
1.17.9.1 To achieve the desired indoor air qualityby natural means, an interior space shallhave
minimum two openings of equal size; one ispositioned transverse to the direction of
outer air flow as an inlet and the other opening as an outlet is positioned opposite or
perpendicular to the inlet and the summation of the net opening area onwalls shall not be
less than 5% of the net floor area thereof.
1.17.9.2 Mechanical ventilation, when provided, shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 3
of Part 8.
1.18 AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING
When air-conditioning and heating system areinstalled, anindoor air quality shall be maintained
as per provisions of Chapter 3 of Part 8.
1.19 PROVISION OF LIFTS AND ESCALATORS
Wherever required by this Code or desired by the owner for comfort, lifts and escalator facilities
shall be planned, designed and installed in accordance with the provisions of Part 4 and Part 8 of
this code.
1.20 SOUND INSULATION
Acoustical design of a building to attain the desired noise levels shall be performed in accordance
with the provisions of Chapter 4 of Part 8.
3-26
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
1.21 THERMAL INSULATION

Thermal comfort in a building shall be achieved through adequate ventilation and thermal
insulation of walls and roof.
1.22 LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS
Lightning protection measures shall be installed on all buildings whose exposure conditions
indicate the likelihood of lightning strike and consequential hazard to life and property. The
requirement of lightning protection systems shall be assessed and they shall be designed and
installed in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2 of Part 8.
1.23 RAT PROOFING AND TERMITE PROOFING OF BUILDINGS
Rat proofing and termite proofing measures shall be undertaken on the basis of the degree of
protection desired from rats and termites. Any chemical used for the control of rats and termite
shall be free from environmental hazards. Periodic inspections shall be undertaken for effective
protection against rats and termites.
1.24 REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDINGS IN FLOOD PRONE AND COASTAL REGIONS OF
BANGLADESH
The specifications of this section shall be applicable to all buildings located in the flood or surge
prone areas in addition to other requirements of this Code.
a. The planning and development control authority of the city, township, municipality or
region where this Code is intended to be applied shall delineate any area having a potential
for being flooded under at least 1 m deep water due to flooding as Flood Prone Area (FPA).
The provisions of Sec 1.24.1 shall be applicable to areas designated as FPA. There shall be a
design flood level in the FPA's which shall be recommended by the Authority to be used in
interpreting the provisions of this section.
b. Similar delineation shall be made in the coastal regions on the basis of expected occurrence
of a surge or wave run-up of 1 m or higher. Such areas shall be designated as Surge Prone
Area (SPA). The provisions of Sec 1.24.2 shall be applicable to buildings located in the
SPA's. There shall be a design surge height in the SPA's which shall be recommended by
the Authority to be used in interpreting the provisions of this section.
1.24.1 Flood Prone Areas
1.24.1.1 Elevation: The habitable floors of a building located in the flood prone area shall be
elevatedabove the design flood level. Buildings up to two storeys high shall
haveaccessible roof with an exterior stair. Buildings having three storeys or more height,
the floor immediately above the design flood level shall be accessible with an exterior
stair.
Exceptions:
a. Except for Occupancy A (Residential), any occupancy may have floors below the
design flood level in accordance with the provisions of Sec 1.24.1.3.
b. Floors which are used only for building access, exits, foyers, storages or parking
garages may be located below the design flood level in accordance with the provisions
of Sec 1.24.1.2.
3-27
Part 3
1.24.1.2 Enclosures below Design Flood Level: There shall be no enclosed space below the
design flood level except for building access, exits, foyers, storages and parking garages.
There shall be vents, valves or other openings in the walls of the enclosed spaces which
shall equalize the lateral pressure of the water. The bottom of such openings shall not be
higher than 300 mm above the finished grade. There shall be at least one opening for each
enclosure in a building but the total number of such openings shall be at least two. The
total net area of openings for an enclosure shall be at least 0.4 m2, or 7 per cent of the floor
area of the enclosure, whichever is greater.
1.24.1.3 Flood-resistant Construction: Floors constructed below the design flood level under the
provisions of Exceptions in Sec 1.24.1.1 shall comply with the following requirements:
a. Floors and exterior walls of such floors shall have a construction impermeable to the
passage of water.
b. Structural components of such floors shall be capable of resisting the hydraulic and
buoyant forces resulting from the occurrence of floods at the design flood level.
Design requirements in such cases are specified in Chapter 1, Part 6.
c. Vents, openings and valves provided below the design level shall have water-tight
closures capable of resisting any structural forces resulting from the occurrence of the
design flood.
d. Penetrations made for electrical, mechanical or plumbing installations shall be made
water-tight to prevent any penetration of flood water. Sewerage systems having
opening below the design flood level shall have a closure device to prevent backwater
flow during the occurrence of floods.
1.24.2 Surge Prone Areas
1.24.2.1 Elevation: The habitable floorof any building in a surge prone area shall not be located
below the design surge height. For buildings of height two storeys or less the roof shall be
accessible with an exterior stair. For buildings three storeys or higher, the floor
immediately above the design surge level shall be accessible with an exterior stair.
Exception:
Footing, mat or raft foundations, piles, pile caps, columns, grade beams and bracings may
be constructed below the design surge height.
1.24.2.2 Enclosures below Design Surge Height:Spaces of a building in the SPA's below the
design surge height shall not obstruct any flow of water during the occurrence of surge.
Exception:
Structural or non-structural members serving as entries or exits may be constructed
below design surge height.
1.24.2.3 Foundations: Foundations of the buildings erected in the SPA's shall be located well
below the ground level so that they are protected from erosion or scour during the
occurrence of surge. If piled foundations are used, they shall be designed to withstand
with adequate factor of safety the loss of support due to scour. Design of the foundations
shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 3, Part 6.
3-28
Vol. 1
Chapter 1
1.25 REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDINGS IN HILLY AREAS

In hilly region, authority shall ask for a special site drainage plan conforming to the area drainage
network before approval of any building work. This shall apply for all buildings to be constructed
in hilly areas where there is the danger of failure of slopes, including mudslides, flash floods and
soil erosion. Such failures may occur in hilly areas, where the angle of slope is greater than 300.
Prevention of failure of slopes shall be achieved by the following measures:
a) Retaining walls to prevent soil erosion as per provisions of Part 6 of this code.
b) Weep holes to allow water pressure balancing from the water logged soil on the retaining
wall.
c) Adequate site drainage respecting the natural topography of the site and surrounds.
d) Use of vegetation to retain the top soil and bonding quality of the soil.
e) Protection of soil by catchment pools to prevent soil erosion due to discharge from roof
tops onto the ground.
1.26 Storage of dangerous goods and their classes and divisions:
Any substances including mixtures and solutions shall be assigned to one of the following
Classes. Some of these classes are subdivided into divisions also. The numerical order of the
classes or divisions is not the representative of the degree of danger. These classes including
their divisions are listed below:
Class 1: Explosives
Division 1.1: Substances and articles which have a mass explosion hazard.
Division 1.2: Substances and articles which have a projection hazard but not a mass
explosion hazard.
Division 1.3: Substances and articles which have a fire hazard and either a minor blast
hazards or a minor projection hazards, but not a mass explosion hazard.
Division 1.4: Substances and articles which present no significant hazard.
Division 1.5: Very insensitive substances which have a mass explosion hazard.
Division 1.6: Very insensitive substances which do not have a mass explosion hazard.
Class 2: Gases
Class 2.1: flammable gases
Class 2.2: non-flammable, non-toxic gases
Class 2.3: toxic gases
Class 3: Flammable liquids
Class 4: Flammable solids; substances liable to spontaneous combustion; substances
which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases:
Class 4.1: flammable solids, self-reactive substances and solid
Class 4.2: substances liable to spontaneous combustion
Class 4.3: substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases
Class 5: Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides
Class 5.1 oxidizing substances
3-29
Part 3
Class 5.2 organic peroxides

Class 6: Toxic and infectious substances
Class 6.1: toxic substances
Class 6.2: infectious substances
Class 7: Radioactive Material
Class 8: Corrosive substances
Class 9: Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles
1.25.1 HS code, Proper shipping names and UN Numbers

First Schedule of Bangladesh customstariff that is Harmonized system code shall be used for
thedescription of any substancesand its corresponding UN number shall be used for proper
shipping name and for the classifications of dangerous goods and shall be controlled for
storage and use as per provision of this code and explosive control act.
3-30
Vol. 1
CHAPTER
Classification of Buildings
Based on Occupancy
2.1
2.1.1
Occupancy Classification
Every building or portion thereof and land-use shall be classified according to its use or
the character of its occupancy as a building of Occupancy A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L
or M as defined below:
Occupancy A
Occupancy B
Occupancy C
Occupancy D
Occupancy E
Occupancy F
Occupancy G
Occupancy H
Occupancy I
Occupancy J
Occupancy K
Occupancy L
Occupancy M
Residential
Educational
Institution for care
Health Care
Business
Mercantile
Industrial
Storage
Assembly
Hazardous
Garages
Utilities
Miscellaneous
2.1.2
Utilities under Occupancy L is incidental to operation in all other type of occupancy

except Occupancy J shall be considered as non-separated use of the main occupancybut
shall be taken special safety measure as per provision of this code.
2.1.3
Any occupancy or use type not mentioned specifically inTable 3.2.6 (A-Z list) or
elsewhere in this code shall be classified by the Board of Appeals under the occupancy
group to which its use most closely resembles, considering the life safety and fire
hazard.
2.1.4
Each occupancy group shall be subdivided as detailed in the following sections. The
detail classification including mixed occupancy provided in the Table 3.2.6 (A-Z list)is
non-exhaustive. If there is any use or character of occupancy in a building which is not
mentioned here, it shall be classified as per provision of sub-section 2.1.3 of this chapter.
2.1.5
Occupancy A: Residential Buildings
This occupancy type shall include any building or portion thereof providing sleeping and living
accommodations to related or unrelated groups of people, with or without independent bathroom,
Part 3
3-31
Part 3
cooking or dining facilities, except any building classified under Occupancy C or D. This
Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
2.1.5.1
A1:Single Family Dwelling
These shall include any building, row type or semi-detached or detached from neighboring
buildings by distances required by this Code and having independent access to the plot, which is
used as private dwelling by members of a single family.
2.1.5.2
A2:Two Family Dwelling
These shall include any building, row type or semi-detached or detached from neighboring
buildings by distances required by this Code and having shared or independent access for two
families and having facilities for living, cooking and bathroom facilities independent of each other.
2.1.5.3
A3:Flats or Apartments
These shall include any building or portion thereof which is provided for more than two families,
having facilities for living, cooking and bathroom facilities independent of each other.
2.1.5.4
A4:Mess, Boarding Houses, Dormitories and Hostels
These shall include any building or portion thereof in which sleeping, living accommodations and
bathroom are provided for groups of related or unrelated persons, with or without common
dining and facilities, and with common cooking under single management control or with
individual or group cooking facilities.
2.1.5.5
A5:Hotels and Lodging Houses
These shall include any building, a portion thereof or group of buildings under single
management, in which sleeping, living accommodation and bathroom facilities are provided with
or without dining facilities but without cooking facilities for adult individuals, is provided for hire
on transient or permanent basis.
2.1.6
Occupancy B : Educational Facilities
This occupancy type shall include any building or portion thereof in which education, training
and care are provided to children or adults. This Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
2.1.6.1
B1: Educational Facilities up to Higher Secondary level
These shall include any building or portion thereof used for purposes involving assembly for
instruction, education and recreation of more than six persons on regular basis to fulfill the
requirement of an academic curriculum approved by the Government up to H.S.C (12th Grade),
and which is not covered by occupancy I.
2.1.6.2
B2: Facilities for Training and for Above-secondary level
These shall include any building or portion thereof used for purposes involving assembly for
instruction, education, training and recreation of more than six persons, and which is not covered
by occupancy I and B1.
2.1.6.3
B3: Pre-school Facilities
These shall include any building or portion thereof used for purposes involving care, recreation
and education of children more than six in number, who have not yet reached the age to attend
the school.
3-32
Vol. 1
Classification of Buildings Based on Occupancy
2.1.7
Chapter 2
Occupancy C : Institution for care
Buildings classified under this occupancy shall include those used for purposes of institutional
care of the occupants, such as detention for correctional or penal purposes, medical or nursing
care of persons suffering from illness or infirmity due to mental condition, or accommodation of
children or minor, where the personal liberty of the inmate is restricted. These buildings shall
ordinarily provide accommodation for sleeping, dining and other provisions approved by the
authority for the occupants. This occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
2.1.7.1
C1: Institution for care of Children
These shall include any building or portion thereof or group of buildings under single
management used as an institution for the full time care of children or minor, each providing
accommodation for sleeping, dining and other provisions approved by the authority for more
than six children.
2.1.7.2
C2: Custodial Institution for physically capable Adults
These shall include any building or portion thereof or group of buildings under single management
used for purposes of full time care and custody of adult or mentally disabled persons but physically
capable of responding to emergency.
2.1.7.3
C3: Custodial Institution for the incapable Adults
used for purposes of full time care and custody of persons physically or mentally incapable of
responding to emergency.
2.1.7.4
C4: Penal and Mental Institution for Children
used for housing children under restraint, or who are detained for penal and corrective purposes, in
which personal liberty of the inmates is restricted.
2.1.7.5
C5: Penal and Mental Institution for Adults
used for housing persons under restraint, or who are detained for penal and corrective purposes, in
which personal liberty of the inmates is restricted.
2.1.8
Occupancy D: Health Care Facilities
Buildings under this Occupancy group shall include those used for purposes of providing medical
care, diagnostic facilities and treatment to persons suffering from physical discomfort, in which
sleeping accommodation may or may not be provided. This Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
2.1.8.1
D1: Normal Medical Facilities
These shall include any building or portion thereof or group of buildings under single management in
which essential medical facilities having surgery, emergency and casualty treatment facilities, general
or specialized medical and other treatment is provided to persons suffering from physical discomfort.
2.1.8.2
D2: Emergency Medical Facilities
These shall include any building or portion thereof used for purposes of providing essential medical
facilities having surgery, emergency, casualty treatment facilities, general or specialized medical and
other treatment is provided to persons suffering from physical discomfort. This Type shall be equipped
and designated to handle post disaster emergency, by construction it is required to remain operational
during and after disasters, built as a part of disaster preparedness program.
3-33
Part 3
2.1.9
Occupancy E: Business
These shall include any building or portion thereof which is used for any business transaction
other than mercantile. This Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
2.1.9.1
E1: Office
These shall include any building or part thereof which is used for paper works,
documentations,only display of samples of Products but notfor direct sale, maintaining accounts
and records for administrative or consulting services, banking or activities for business purposes
and professional training.
2.1.9.2
E2: Research and Testing Laboratories
These shall include any building or portion thereof which is used as research establishment and/
or test laboratory involving hazardous materials within the limit of exempted quantity permitted
in this code.
2.1.9.3
E3: Essential Services
These shall include any building or portion thereof used for purposes of providing emergency
services and utilities which are required to remain operational during and after a disaster or other
emergency situations.
2.1.10 Occupancy F: Mercantile

This occupancy type shall include any building or portion thereof or group of buildings which is
used for display and sale of merchandises. This Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
2.1.10.1
F1: Small Shops and Market
These shall include any building or portion thereof with an area divided or undivided not
exceeding 300 m, used for purposes of display and sale of merchandise, either wholesale or retail,
with or without incidental storage and service facilities.
2.1.10.2
F2: Large Shops and Market
These shall include any building or portion thereof with an area divided or undivided more than
300 m used for purposes of display and sale of merchandise, either wholesale or retail, with or
without incidental storage and service facilities.
2.1.10.3
F3: Refueling Station
These shall include any building or portion thereof used for providing refueling and maintenance
without repair services for automobiles which is moderately hazardous in nature.
2.1.11 Occupancy G: Industrial Buildings

Buildings under this Occupancy shall be subdivided on the basis of hazard potential of the
contents and the processes of the industry. The hazard shall generally mean the relative danger of
the start of fire and the rapidity of its spread, the danger of smoke and gases generated that pose a
potential threat to the safety of the occupants of the building. Unless areas with different degrees
of hazard are effectively segregated and separated in accordance with the provisions of this Code,
the most hazardous area in a building shall govern its classification. This occupancy shall also
include facilities for public utility services at the producer or distributors end that deals with
generation and distribution of utility facilities.Any such building or portion thereof, which is not
3-34
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
using hazardous material quantified and categorized in occupancy group J, shall be subdivided as
follows:
2.1.11.1
G1: Low Hazard Industry
These shall include any industrial building in which the contents are of such low combustibility
and the processes conducted therein are of such low hazardous nature that danger of self-ignition
and self-propagation of fire is nonexistent, the only danger being an onset of fire from external
sources with the resulting danger to life and property.
2.1.11.2
G2: Moderate Hazard Industry
These shall include any industrial building in which the contents are moderately combustible and
the industrial processes conducted therein are liable to give rise to a fire which will spread with
moderate rapidity, giving off considerable smoke.
2.1.12 Occupancy H: Storage Buildings

Buildings under this Occupancy group shall include any building or portion thereof used
primarily for storage or sheltering of goods, wares, merchandises, vehicles or animals. Any such
building or portion thereof, which is not used for storing hazardous material quantified and
categorized in occupancy group J, shall be subdivided as follows:
2.1.12.1
H1: Low Fire-risk Storage
These shall include any building or portion thereof which is used for storage of materials or other
contents which do not constitute the danger of self-ignition, and in the event of fire the rate of
burning shall be less than moderate rapidity.
2.1.12.2
H2: Moderate Fire-risk Storage
These shall include any building or portion thereof which is used for storage of materials which
do not constitute the danger of self-ignition but which in the event of fire will burn with moderate
rapidity.
Items which shall be deemed to render a building hazardous are specified in Sec 2.14.3along with
the exempted amount for each item.
2.1.13 Occupancy I: Assembly

Buildings under this Occupancy group shall include any building or portion thereof in which
groups of people congregate or assemble for recreation, amusement, social, religious, political,
cultural, travel and similar purposes. This Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
2.1.13.1
I1:Large Assembly with Fixed seats
This occupancy shall include a building or a portion thereof for assembly in a space provided with
fixed seats for 1000 or more persons. Assembly buildings under this subdivision may be for
theatrical, operatic performances or cinema projection having or not a raised stage, proscenium
curtains, scenery loft or projection screen, lighting equipment, projection booth and necessary
theatrical and mechanical equipment.
2.1.13.2
I2: Small Assembly with Fixed seats
This occupancy type shall include any building or portion thereof primarily meant for use as
described for buildings under Occupancy I1, but with fixed seats for less than 1000 persons in a
space. These assembly buildings may or may not be provided with a legitimate theatrical stage or
related accessories or equipment.
3-35
Part 3
2.1.13.3
I3:Large Assembly without Fixed seats
This occupancy type shall include any building or portion thereof for assembly in a space, in
which there are no fixed seats, which may or may not be provided with a legitimate stage or
theatrical accessories, and which has accommodation for 300 or more persons.
2.1.13.4
I4:Small Assembly without Fixed seats
This occupancy type shall include any building or portion thereof primarily intended for use as
described in Occupancy I3, but with accommodation for less than 300 persons in a space.
2.1.13.5
I5:Sports Facilities
This occupancy type shall include any building or portion thereof meant for assembly of
spectators for recreational and amusement purpose mainly related to sports.
2.1.14 Occupancy J : Hazardous Buildings

Any Building or portion thereof used as storage, industrial, research and other facilities dealing
with hazardous material in excess of exempted quantity defined in the table 3.2.5 or any microbiological facilities shall be categorized in this Occupancy group.
Definition of hazard and the amount of such materials which shall be deemed to render a building
hazardous are set forth in Sec 2.14.3.This Occupancy shall be subdivided as follows:
2.1.14.1
J1: Explosion Hazard Buildings
These shall include any building or portion thereof which is used for storage, handling, processing
or manufacture of explosive materials and products that have explosion hazard.
2.1.14.2
J2: Chemical Hazard Buildings
or manufacture of materials and products that are highly corrosive, toxic, poisonous and
physically harmful including corrosive and toxic alkalis, acid or other liquids or chemicals,
producing flame, fumes, radiation, and explosive, poisonous, irritant and corrosive gases.
2.1.14.3
J3: Biological Hazard Buildings
or manufacture of materials and products that use biological processes and in which the risk of
harmful biological threat to the occupants exist.
2.1.14.4
J4: Radiation Hazard Buildings
or manufacture of materials and products that use nuclear and radioactive processes and in which
the risk of radioactive contamination exists.
2.1.15 Occupancy K : Garage

These occupancy types shall include any building or portion thereof used one or more vehicles
having containers of flammable liquid or compressed gas or carrying power or combination of any
of these as a supply source for self-propelling are kept for use, sale, rental purpose, storage, repair,
exhibition and all those floors of a building or portion thereof in which such vehicles are not
separated by suitable cutoff to prevent fire spreading.
3-36
Vol. 1
2.1.15.1
Chapter 2
K1: Parking Garage
This occupancy type shall include any building or portion thereof used solely for parking Motor
Vehicles for a limited period of time.
2.1.15.2
K2: Private Garage
This occupancy type shall include any building or portion thereof used as store of owner's or
tenant's Motor Vehicles for private use for unlimited period of time.
2.1.15.3
K3: Repair Garage and Showrooms
This occupancy type shall include any building or portion thereof wherein repair of electrical or
mechanical system or denting or painting works of body is performed on any type of vehicles
and includes associated floor spaces used as office, showrooms, incidental store and parking.
2.1.16 Occupancy L : Utility

This occupancy type shall include any building or portion thereof used to install any type of
equipment to provide support service to any building or portion thereof or group of buildings of
all occupancy groups and with special provisions for occupancy J.
This shall also include all public and private utility facilities of the consumers end that are located
within the consumers site and all installations are required special care to ensure life and property
safety as per provisions of this code.
2.1.17 Occupancy M : Miscellaneous

Buildings under this Occupancy group shall include special buildings not covered in other
Occupancy groups. These Occupancies shall be subdivided as follows:
2.1.17.1
M1: Special Structure
Any building or structure which is neither listed in the A-Z list nor covered in any occupancy
groupprovided in this code but unique in character may be categorized in this occupancy by the
Board of Appeals. Each and every individual M1 Structure shall be complied with NFPA or
equivalent standards for the life and fire safety.
M2: Fences, Tanks and Towers
These shall include fences and boundary walls over 1.5 m high, standalone structures for gravity
water tank and towers for telecommunication, power distribution, air-traffic control terminal or
observation towers.
2.2 Change of Use
2.2.1
Without prior permission from the Authorities having jurisdiction no change shall be
made in the type of occupancy or use of any building that would place it in a different
occupancy group or in a different subdivision of the same occupancy group. Such
changes shall be permitted only when the land use and the building complied with the
provisions of this Code and the laws of the land for such group of Occupancy.
2.1.17.2
2.3
Mixed Occupancy
The following occupancies shall not be required to designate as a separated occupancy
classification from uses to which they are accessory any occupancy Group other than
Occupancy Group J
a)
Assembly rooms having a floor area not more than 75 m.
3-37
Part 3
b)
c)
d)
e)
2.3.1
The administrative and clerical offices and similar offices not exceeding 25 per cent
of the floor area of the major occupancy and not related to Hazardous Buildings as
defined in Occupancy J.
Administrative offices, gift shops and other similar uses in Occupancy A provided
the uses do not exceed 10 per cent of the floor area of the major occupancy.
Kitchens associated with a dining area.
Carports having at least two sides entirely open associated with Occupancy A.
Forms of Occupancy Separations
A building is permitted to have multiple occupancytype, each type of occupancy shall be in

groups, which may have combination of different occupanciesand shall be separatedhorizontally
or vertically or bothaccordingly as specified in the Table 3.2.1.
2.3.2
Types of Occupancy Separation
The occupancy separations shall be classified as follows:

a) Four Hour Fire Resistive: The four hour fire resistive separation wall or slab shall have no
unprotected openings therein and shall provide a fire resistance for at least three hour.
3-38
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
b) Three Hour Fire Resistive: The three hour fire resistive separation wall or slab shall
provide a fire resistance of not less than three hour. The total width of all openings
inseparation wall of any one storey shall not exceed 25 per cent of the length of that wall
in that storey and no single opening shall have an area greater than 12 m. The openings
shall be protected with a fire resistance assembly doors or windows providing fire
resistance of at least three hour.
In case of a floor slab having three hour fire resistance rating, the openings on floor slab
shall be protected by vertical enclosures extended above and below such floor openings.
The walls of such vertical enclosures shall be at least two hour of fire resistance. All
openings in such enclosuresshall be protected with fire assembly door or window having
fire resistance rating of at least one and one-half hour.
c) Two Hour Fire Resistive: The two hour fire resistive separation shall be of a construction
having a fire resistance rating of not less than two hour. All openings in such separations
shall be protected with a fire assembly door or window of a fire protection rating of at
least one and one-half hour.
d) One Hour Fire Resistive: The one hour fire resistive separation shall be of at least one hour
fire protection construction. All openings in such separations shall be protected with a fire
protection assembly door or window of at least one-half hour fire resistance.
3-39
Part 3
2.4
General Requirements of all Occupancies
2.4.1
Location on Property
2.4.1.1
All plots for building construction shall have access to a public road from atleast one
side.
2.4.1.2
Fire separation distance shall be measured from the face of peripheral wall of a building
to the adjacent property line. For the purpose of this section, if a public road adjoining
all along a property line shall get the benefit of half of Road width as a part of Fire
separation distance. For two or more buildings on the same plot, distances of imaginary
lines equidistant from all side of buildings shall be considered as the required fire
separation distances.
2.4.1.3
The exterior walls of a building shall have a fire resistance and opening protection as
specified in Tables 3.3.1 (a), 3.3.1 (b) and 3.2.3.
2.4.1.4
Any outward projected elements from theperipheral wall of a building line shall be
limited to the sunshade line.
2.4.1.5
When openings in exterior walls are required to be protected due to distance from the
property line, the aggregate area of such openings shall not exceed 50 per cent of the
total area of the wall in each storey.
2.4.1.6
Dwellings separation walls in semi-detached or row type development shall comply

with sec. 2.4.3.
2.4.2
Allowable Floor Areas
2.4.2.1
The total area of the building shall comply with Sec 1.8.3. of Chapter 1 of this Part.
2.4.2.2
The floor area of the mezzanines shall be included in the area of the main floor where
the mezzanines are located.
2.4.2.3
Floor area calculation shall be divided in to two: a) All Floor areas at and above the
formation level which shall be generally included in the FAR calculation. b) Floor areas
below the formation level which shall be generally excluded in the FAR calculation
provided the Occupancy classifications remain within Utility or Private Garages.
Table 3.2.2
Fire Resistance Ratings in hours of Exterior Walls for Various Occupancy Groups
Fire Separation Distance
A1, A2, K2
, M2
Up to 1.5 m
Occupancy
A3, A4, A5,
E2, F3, F4,
B,C, D, E1,
E3, G2, H1
F1, F2, G1, I
2
H2, J
Greater than 1.5 m and up to 3 m
Greater than 3 m and up to 4.5 m
Greater than 4.5 m and up to 9 m
Greater than 9 m
N= No requirements
3-40
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
Table 3.2.3
Requirements for Opening Protection Assembly Based on Fire
Resistance Rating of ExteriorWalls.
2.4.3
Fire Resistance Ratings of Exterior

Walls (in hours)
Fire Resistance Ratings for Opening

Assembly (in hours)
Not permitted
3.0
1.5
0.5
No requirements
Permitted Types of Construction
2.4.3.1
The types of construction for any occupancy shall conform to the specifications set forth in Table
3.2.4.
2.4.3.2
Common walls in semi-detached or row type developmentshall not have any unprotected
openingsand shall beType I-A construction and all such wall shall comply with requirements of
Party wall or Fire wall or Separation wall.
2.4.3.3
Groundfloor or basement of a building used for car parking and utilities within the barriers by
at least three hour fire resistive construction shall be considered as non-separated occupancy
provided the building accommodate one or more of the following occupancies:
i.
A3, A5
ii.
I2, I3, I4
iii.
E1, F1, F2
2.4.3.4
Entry lobbies, mechanical and electrical rooms and other similar uses incidental to the
operation of the building may be provided in the car parking floors provided that the
total area of such uses remains within of the parking floor area.
Table 3.2.4
Permitted types of Construction and fire Zones for Various Occupancy Groups
Occupancy
Permitted Types of Construction
Fire Zones
Group I and Group II*
Group I or Group II*
A
B
C
D
E1
F1,F2
I
K1, K2, M2
E2, E3, F3, K3, M1
G
H
J
Group I
3
*Fire resistance rating of a building shall be credited in case of the mixed type of
constructionon the basis of lower rated construction elements among the same group or
same type used thereof.
3-41
Part 3
2.4.4
General provision for High-Rise Buildings
For the purpose of this Code, a building of any class of Occupancy will be considered as high-rise
when it has floors used for human occupancy located more than 23 m from ground level or the lowest
level of fire department vehicle access. The provisions of 2.9.6 shall be applicable to all such buildings.
2.4.4.1
Maintenance and Inspection
All fire protection systems shall be maintained and inspected on a regular basis to keep them in
operative condition. The maintenance inspection shall be performed quarterly.
All plumbing installations shall be maintained and inspected periodically to keep them in
operative conditions.
2.4.4.2
Type of Construction
All high-rise buildings shall be of Type I-Aor I-B construction.

2.4.4.3
Fire detection, Alarm , Evacuation and Extinguishment system
All high-rise buildings shall conform to regulations set forth in Part 4 of this code
2.4.5
2.4.5.1
Helipads
General
Helipads on the roof top of a building or other locations shall be constructed in accordance with
this section.
2.4.5.2
Size
The minimum dimension of the landing area for helicopters weighing less than 1600 kg shall be 6
m x 6 m. There shall be an average clearance of 4 m surrounding and at the level of the landing
area which shall not be less than 2 m at any point.
2.4.5.3
Construction
Helicopter landing areas and supports shall be constructed with non-combustible material.
2.4.5.4
Aviation Approval
Before helipads start operating formal approval shall be obtained from the civil aviation authority.
2.4.6
Universal Accessibility
2.4.6.1
All Building (except Occupancies G, H, M and J) shall have universal accessibility as per
2.4.6.2
Buildings have universal accessibility shall have accessible egress system.
2.5
3-42
Requirements for Occupancy A - Residential Buildings

Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy A in accordance with Sec 2.1.5.
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
2.5.1 Construction, Height and Allowable Area

2.5.1.1
Buildingsor parts thereof classified as Occupancy A shall be limited to the type of

construction set forth in Table 3.2.4 and shall not exceed in area or height as
specified in Sec 1.8 and 2.4.2 of this part.
2.5.1.2
Walls and floors separating dwelling units in the same building shall not be less
than Type I-D construction.
2.5.1.3
Storage or laundry rooms in Occupancy A2, A3, A4 or A5 that are used in common
by the occupants shall be at least Type I-D construction.
2.5.1.4
When a basement or a ground floor of a building of Occupancy A3 or A5 is used for

parking or storage of private cars of the occupants, the parking floor shall be of at
least Type I-B construction.
2.5.1.5
When the basement or ground floor of a building of Occupancy A is used wholly or

partly for generator or electrical substation, the walls and floors surrounding such
use shall be of at least Type I-B construction.
2.5.2 Location on Property

Buildings of Occupancy A shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire
resistive exterior walls and openings as specified in this code.
2.5.3
2.5.4
Access and Exit Facilities and Egress system

2.5.3.1
Facilities for access and exit and egress or escape shall comply with the provisions
set forth in this code.
2.5.3.2
Every sleeping room in ground, first and second floors shall have at least one
operable window or door for emergency escape which shall open directly into the
exterior or an interior courtyard. The units shall be openable from the inside
without the use of any tool to provide a minimum clear opening of 500 mm width
by 600 mm height with a maximum sill height of 1 m above the floor.
Lighting and Ventilation
All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy A shall conform to the provisions of
Part 3and Part 8, Chapters 1 and 3.
2.5.5
Sanitation
Sanitation facilities provided in all Occupancy A buildings shall conform to this Part and Part 8,
Chapter 7.
2.5.6
Minimum dimension of Habitable and Non-habitable Rooms
The minimum dimensions of habitable and non-habitable rooms are specified in Sec 1.12.2 of
Chapter 1, Part 3.
Fire detection, Alarm, Evacuation and Extinguishment
All buildings shall conform to regulations set forth in Part 4 of this code.
3-43
Part 3
2.5.7
Shaft and Exit Enclosure

Elevator shafts, vent shafts and other vertical openings shall be enclosed with a
construction as specified in Part 4. Exit requirements shall comply with Part 4 of this code.
2.6
Requirements for Occupancy B - Educational Buildings
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy B in accordance with Sec 2.1.6.
2.6.1
Construction, Height and Allowable area
Buildings or parts of buildings classified as Occupancy B shall be limited to type of construction

set forth in Table 3.2.4 and comply with the provisions of Part 3, Chapter 1, Sec 1.8 and 2.4.2, to
meet the requirements of height and area limitations.
2.6.1.1 Rooms or groups of rooms sharing a common space where flammable liquids,
combustible dust or hazardous materials are used, stored, developed or handled in

an amount exceeding that specified in Sec 2.14.3 shall be classified as Occupancy J.
Such rooms or groups of rooms shall comply with the requirements of fire
protection as specified in Part 4, Chapters 4 and 5.
2.6.1.2 Rooms or groups of rooms, sharing a common space or having separate spaces,
served by a common corridor or passage with less than 20 per cent outdoor
opening of wall in a building of height 11 m or less, or three storeys or less, need
not be provided with smoke detectors and standpipe or sprinkler system for fire
protection provided it conforms with the access and exit requirements specified in
Part 3, Chapter 1, Sec 1.6 and Part 4, Chapters 4 and 5.
2.6.1.3 Buildings of Occupancy B situated outside the jurisdiction of any municipality shall
have a construction of at least two hours fire resistance.
2.6.2
Location on Property
Buildings of Occupancy B shall comply with the requirements for location on property and
fire resistive exterior walls and openings as specified in Sec 2.4.1.
2.6.3
Access and Exit facilities and Egress system

Facilities for access and exit and Egress system shall comply with the provisions set forth
in Part 3, Chapter 1, Sec 1.6 and Part 4, Chapter 3.
2.6.4
Lighting, Ventilation and Sanitation

Lighting, ventilation and sanitation facilities provided in Occupancy Group B buildings
shall conform to Part 3, Chapter 1, Sec 1.16 and Part 8, Chapters 1 and 3.
2.6.5
Minimum Dimensions of Class Rooms, Common Toilets and Staircases

The dimension of a class room shall be not less than 4 m on any side and shall have an area
of not less than 0.75 m per student. Other provisions for minimum dimensions shall
comply with the requirements set forth in Sec 1.8. Chapter 1, Part 3.
3-44
Vol. 1
2.6.6
Chapter 2
Shaft and Exit Enclosure

Elevator shafts, vent shafts and other vertical openings shall be enclosed with a
construction of at least 3 hour fire resistance. Exit requirements shall comply with Chapter
3 Part 4.
2.6.7
Fire detection, Alarm, Evacuation and Extinguishment system

All buildings shall conform to regulations set forth in Part 4 of this code
2.7
Requirements for Occupancy C - Institutional Buildings
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy C in accordance with Sec 2.1.7.
2.7.1
Construction, Height and Allowable Area
The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy C shall be limited to the type of
construction set forth in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8 Chapter 1 Part
3 and 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height and area limitations.
2.7.2
Location On Property
Buildings of Occupancy C shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire
resistive exterior walls and openings as specified in Sec 2.4.1.
2.7.3
Facilities for access and exit and egress system shall comply with the provisions set forth in Sec
1.6, Chapter 1 Part 3 and Chapter 3, Part 4.
2.7.4
All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy C shall conformwith the provisions of
Sec 1.16, Chapter 1 Part 3 and Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8.
2.7.5
Shaft and Enclosure
Elevator shafts, vent shafts and other vertical openings shall be enclosed with a construction of at
least 4 hour fire resistance. Exit requirements shall comply with Chapter 3, Part 4.
2.7.6

2.8
Requirements for Occupancy DHealth Care Facilities
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy D in accordance with Sec 2.1.8.
2.8.1
The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy D shall be limited to the type of
construction set forth in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8 Chapter 1 Part
2.8.2
Buildings of Occupancy D shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire
3-45
Part 3
2.8.3
Facilities for access and exit and egress system shall comply with the provisions set forth in Sec 1.6
Chapter 1 Part 3; Chapter 3 of Part 4.
2.8.4
All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy D shall conform to the provisions of
Sec 1.16 Chapter 1 Part 3, Chapters 1 and 3 of Part 8.
2.8.5
Shaft and Enclosure
least three hour fire resistance. Exit requirements shall comply with Chapter 3 of Part 4.
2.8.6

2.9
Requirements for Occupancy EBusiness
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy E in accordance with Sec 2.1.9
2.9.1
The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy E shall be limited to the type of
construction set forth in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8, Chapter 1 Part
2.9.2
Buildings of Occupancy E shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire
2.9.3
Chapter 1 Part 3; Chapter 3 of Part 4.
2.9.4
All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy E shall conformto the provisions of
Sec 1.16 Chapter 1 Part 3; Chapters 1 and 3 of Part 8.
2.9.5
Shaft and Enclosure
2.9.6

2.10 Requirements for Occupancy FMercantile Buildings

Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy F in accordance with Sec 2.1.10.
3-46
Vol. 1
Chapter 2

The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy F shall be limited to the type of construction
set forth in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8, Chapter 1 of Part 3 and
2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height and area limitations.
2.10.2 Location On Property

Buildings of Occupancy F shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire
2.10.3 Access and Exit Facilities and Emergency Escapes

Facilities for access and exit and emergency escape shall comply with the provisions set forth in
Sec 1.6 Chapter 1 Part 3; Chapter 3, Part 4.
2.10.4 Lighting, Ventilation and Sanitation

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy F shall conform with the provisions of
Sec 1.16 Chapter 1 Part 3; Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8.
2.10.5 Shaft and Enclosure

2.10.6 Fire detection, Alarm, Evacuation and Extinguishment system

2.10.7 Special Hazards

Installations which are discharging exhaust, heating apparatus, boiler, central heating or airconditioning plant shall conform to the provisions of this Code as specified in this code.
2.11 Requirements for Occupancy GIndustrial Buildings
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy G in accordance with Sec 2.1.11. A non-exhaustive and
indicative list of low hazard and moderate hazard industrial uses are listed in A to Z list. Storage
and use of hazardous materials shall not exceed the exempt amount specified in Sec 2.14.3.

The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy G shall be limited to the type of
construction set forth in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8 of Chapter 1,
Part 3 and Sec 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height and floor area limitations.
The ceiling height of the production area, shall confirm to the minimum volume required per
workers as specified by the Bangladesh Labour Act, 2006 and other laws of the land.In any case
the ceiling height and the head room clearance of a production floor shall not be less than 3.3
meter and 2.286 meter respectively.

Buildings of Occupancy G shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire
3-47
Part 3
2.11.3 Access and Exit Facilities and Egress system

Sec 1.6 Chapter 1, Part 3 and Chapter 3, Part 4.

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy G shall conform to the provisions of
Sec 1.16 Chapter 1, Part 3 and Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8.
Special provisions: Industrial buildings having roof opening for day lighting and natural
ventilation shall comply with the following requirements:
i.
The aggregate opening in roof and external windows shall not be less than 10 per cent
of the floor area.
ii.
For natural ventilation by means of exterior window openings, the operable window
area shall not be less than 5 per cent of the total floor area.
Exception:
Industrial buildings wherein artificial lighting and mechanically operated ventilation
systems of approved quality are installed need not be provided with natural ventilation
or natural lighting.



Chimneys, vents and ventilation ducts shall be constructed with noncombustible materials. Every
bailer, central heating plants, electrical rooms, or hot water supply boiler shall be separated from
the rest of the occupancy or use by not less than two hour fire resistive construction.
2.12 Requirements for Occupancy HStorage Buildings
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy H in accordance with Sec 2.1.12.

The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy H shall be limited to the type of
construction set forth in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8 of Chapter 1,
Part 3 and Sec 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height and area limitations.

The location on property for Occupancy H shall conform with Sec 2.4.1.

of Chapter 1, Part 3 and Chapter 3, Part 4.
3-48
Vol. 1
Chapter 2

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy H shall conform with the provisions of
Sec 1.16 of Chapter 1, Part 3; Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8.
2.12.4.1
Special Provision: The provisions of Sec 1.16, does not apply to non-habitable spaces of
H1 and H2 occupancies unless otherwise required by this Code. Ventilators of size not
less than 0.25 m shall be provided where suitable 0.30 m above the floor level for floor
level ventilators and 0.30 m below the roof level for roof level ventilators. There shall be
one floor level ventilator and one roof level ventilator for every 0.25 m of the floor area.
Mechanized ventilation system of approved quality shall be installed where required.
2.12.4.2
Though inhabitable, the minimum air quality of such indoor spaces shall be maintained
in a way that it does not pose any health hazard to the occasional users of that space.

The storage of hazardous materials shall not exceed the exempt amount as specified in Table 3.2.5.
The storage of moderate and low hazardous materials shall be separated at least by a two hour fire
resistive construction.
2.13 Requirements for Occupancy IAssembly Buildings
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy I in accordance with Sec 2.1.13.

The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy I shall be limited to the type of construction
set forth in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8 Chapter 1 Part 3 and 2.4.2 to

Buildings of Occupancy I shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire

Facilities for access and exit and Egress system shall comply with the provisions set forth in Sec
1.6, Chapter 1 of Part 3 and Chapter 3 of Part 4 and universally accessibility as per provisions of
this code.

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy I shall conform to the provisions of
Sec 1.16 Chapter 1 Part 3, Part 3 and Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8.
3-49
Part 3

All buildings shall conform to regulations set forth in Part 4 of this code.
2.13.7 The specification of this section shall apply to all parts of buildings and structures that
contain stages or platforms and other similar appurtenances as herein defined.
a) Stages: A stage is a three side enclosed or partially enclosed portion of a building which is
designed or used for presentation of plays or lectures or other entertainment. A stage shall
be further classified as legitimate stage, regular stage and thrust stage.
b) Stage, Legitimate: A stage wherein curtains, drops, leg drops, scenery, lighting devices or
other stage effects are adjustable horizontally or vertically or suspended overhead.
c) Stage, Regular:A stage wherein curtains, fixed drops, valances, scenery and other stage
effects are suspended and are not adjustable or retractable.
d) Stage, Thrust: A stage or platform extended beyond the proscenium line and into the
audience.
2.13.5.1
Stage, Legitimate:
Legitimate stage shall be constructed as specified in Part 4, specifying the type of construction but
shall not be less than construction Type I-C. The position of the legitimate stage extending beyond
the proscenium opening line shall be permitted to be constructed with two hour fire-resistive
materials.
The floor of the stage may be constructed with one hour fire rating materials. Thickness of a
wooden floor shall not be less than 50 mm.
2.13.5.2
Stage, Regular and Thrust:
Regular stages and thrust stages shall be constructed by not less than two hour fire resistive
materials. Wooden floor when required in a stage shall not be less than 50 mm in thickness with
one hour fire resistive rating.
2.13.5.3
Trap Doors
All trap doors and any other opening in stage floors shall be equipped with tight fitting solid
wood trap doors with thickness not less than 50 mm.
2.13.5.4
Stage Rigging Loft
The grid iron frame in the loft, housing lighting and audio equipment, all the machinery for flying
scenery and fly galleries, along with their installations, shall be constructed of approved
noncombustible materials.
2.13.5.5
Foot Lights and Stage Electrical Equipment
Foot lights and border lights shall be installed in a protective cover constructed of noncombustible
materials.
2.13.5.6
Trim, Finish and Decorative Hangings
All materials used in moulding and decoration around the proscenium shall be of approved
3-50
Vol. 1
2.13.5.7
Chapter 2
Proscenium Curtain
The proscenium curtain shall be of approved fire retardant material and shall protect against
passage of flame and smoke for at least 30 minutes.
2.13.6 Motion Picture Projection Rooms

2.13.6.1
Every projection room shall be constructed in conformity with the construction

requirements for the type of the building in which the projection room is located. The
wall opening required for projection need not have a fire protection assembly but shall
be closed with glass or other approved materials.
2.13.6.2
The floor area of a projection room shall not be less than 8 m for a single machine. The
working space between the machines when more than one machine is used shall not be
less than 0.75 m.
2.13.6.3
The height of the projection room shall have a minimum clear space of 2.5 m.
2.13.7 Sports Facilities

2.13.7.1
Vomiters, Aisles and Exits of Seating Galleries
Tunnels, aisles and exits of galleries shall be constructed conforming to the following
requirements.
a) There shall be a minimum of two exits remotely located from each other immediately to
the outside for each balcony or tier. There shall be at least three exits when seating capacity
exceeds 1000 persons and four exits when it exceeds 4000 persons.For every additional
1000 persons the exit shall be designed to accommodate provision (f) given below.
b) There shall be at least 0.6 m2 of space per person in the gallery. Minimum width
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
2.13.7.2
considered for a seat in the gallery shall be 0.45 m.

There shall be a maximum of 33 seats on each side of any aisle. Minimum width of the
main aisles and the secondary aisles shall be 1.0 m and 0.7 m respectively.
Entrance and exits shall be protected by safety railings.
Back to back space between two rows of seats shall not be less than 0.80 m.
The evacuation time in the galleries shall not be more than 10 minutes.
All tunnels, aisles and exits shall conform to safety guidelines for means of escape set forth
in Part 4, Fire.
One percent of the total seat capacity shall have provisions for accommodation with
universal accessibility at the approach or exit level.
Swimming Pools
Any swimming pool used or constructed for exclusive use by Occupancy A1 and is available only
to the occupants and private guests shall be classified as a private swimming pool. Any swimming
pool other than private swimming pool shall be classified as a public swimming pool. Swimming
pools, will be constructed in conformity with the following requirements.
a) There shall be at least 1.5 m space between any side of a swimming pool and a rear or
side property line. For street property lines, this distance shall be at least 2.0 m.
b) Swimming pools shall be provided with overflow provision to remove scum and other
materials from the surface of the water. When water skimmers are used for private
pools there shall be one skimming device for each 50 m2 of surface area or fraction
thereof.
3-51
Part 3
c) The overflow gutters shall not be less than 75 mm deep and shall be pitched to slope of
one unit vertical to 50 units horizontal (1:50) toward drains.
d) Public swimming pools shall be so designed that the pool water turnover is at least
once every 8 hours.
e) Private swimming pools shall be designed so that there is a pool water turnover at least
once every 18 hours.
f) Public swimming pools shall be equipped with filters, the capacity of which shall be
controlled to filter 140 litres per minute per m2 of surface area. Private swimming pool
filters shall not filter more than 230 litres per minute per m2 of the surface area.
g) The acidity and alkalinity of the pool water shall be between 7.0 and 7.5.
h) All recirculating systems shall be equipped with an approved hair and lint strainer
installed in the system ahead of the pump.
i) All swimming pool and equipment shall be designed to be emptied completely of
water and the discharged water shall be disposed in an approved manner and shall not
create problems in the neighbouring property.
j) Pumps, filters and other mechanical and electrical equipment shall be placed in
enclosed spaces and shall not be accessible to the bathers.
k) Used water from the pool when being discarded shall be reused as grey water for the
building and its premises as per provision of Appendix G.
2.13.8 Amusement Building Fire protection system

As per provisions of this code.
2.14 Requirements for Occupancy JHazardous Buildings

Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy J in accordance with Sec 2.1.14
2.14.1 General
The plans for buildings and structures accommodating Occupancy J shall clearly indicate the type and
intended use of materials and its processing or handling methods so as to reflect the nature of use of
each portion of such buildings.
Occupancy J1
2.14.1.1
Any building or portion thereof containing any of the followingitems more than exempted quantity
shall be classified as Occupancy J1.
a. Combustible dusts and any similar solid material sufficiently comminuted for suspension in
still air which, when so suspended, is capable of self-sustained combustion.
b. Combustible liquids - Any liquid having a flash point at or above 40C shall be known as class
II and class III liquids. Combustible liquids shall be classified as follows:
c.
i.
Liquids having flash point at or above 40C and below 60C.
ii.
Liquids having flash points at or above 60C and below 95C.
Cryogenic liquids (flammable or oxidizing): Any liquid that has a boiling point below -130C.
d. Flammable Gases : Any gas when mixed with air in a proportion of 13% (by volume) forms a
flammable mixture under atmospheric temperature and pressure.
e. Flammable Liquids : Any liquid that has a flash point below 40C and has a net vapour
pressure exceeding 275 kPa at 40C. Flammable liquids shall be known as Class I liquid and
shall be further classified as follows:
i.
3-52
Liquids having flash point below 25C and having a boiling point below 40C.
Vol. 1
f.
Chapter 2
ii.
Liquids having flash point below 25C and having a boiling point at or above 40C.
iii.
Liquids having flash points at or above 25C and below 40C.
Oxidizers class 3: As determined in accordance with NFPA 43A.
g. Oxidizing gases: As determined in accordance with NFPA 43C.

h. Pyrophoric liquids, solids and gases that will ignite spontaneously in air at a temperature of
55C or below.
i.
Unstable (reactive) materials class 3, non-detonable as determined in accordance with NFPA

704.
j.
Combustible fibres: Includes readily ignitable fibres like cotton, sisal, jute hemp, tow, cocoa
fibre, oakum, baled waste, baled waste paper, kapok, hay, straw, excelsior, Spanish moss and
other similar materials.
k. Flammable solid: Any solid including blasting agent or explosive that is liable to cause fire
through absorption of moisture, spontaneous chemical change or retained heat from
manufacturing or processing, or which when ignited burns so vigorously and persistently as to
create a serious hazard.
l.
Organic peroxides, Class II and Class III as determined in accordance with NFPA 43B.
m. Oxidizers Class I and Class II as determined in accordance with NFPA 43A.

n. The bulk storage of unstable (reactive) materials Class 1 and Class 2 as determined in
accordance with NFPA 704, water reactive materials, Class 2 and Class 3 which react with
water to release a gas that is either flammable or present a health hazard as determined in
accordance with NFPA 704.
Occupancy J2
2.14.1.2
Any building or portion thereof containing the following shall be classified as Occupancy J2:
a. Corrosives: Any substance that causes visible destruction of or irreversible alteration in living
tissues by chemical action at the site of contact.
b. Highly toxic materials: The materials falling in this category are as follows:
c.
i.
Oral Toxicity: A chemical that has a median lethal dose of 50 mg or less per kg of body
weight when administered orally to albino rats weighing between 200 and 300 gms
each.
ii.
Toxicity of Inhalation: A chemical that has a median lethal concentration in air of

200 ppm or less by volume of gas or vapour, or 2 mg per litre or less of mist, fume or
dust, when administered by continuous inhalation for 1 hour (or less if death occurs
within 1 hour) to albino rats weighing between 200 and 300 grams each.
iii.
Toxicity by Skin Absorption : A chemical that has median lethal dose of 200 mg or less
per kg of body weight when administered by continuous contact for 24 hours (or less if
death occurs within 24 hours) with the bare skin of albino rabbits weighing between 2
and 3 kg each.
iv.
Irritants: Any noncorrosive chemical or substance which causes a reversible

inflammatory effect on living tissues by chemical action at the site of contact.
v.
Radioactive Material: Any material or combination of materials that spontaneously

emit ionizing radiation.
vi.
Sensitizers: A chemical or substance that causes a substantial proportion of exposed

people or animals to develop an allergic reaction in normal tissue after repeated
exposure to the chemical.
The Occupancy J2 shall also include among others the followings:

i.
Dry cleaning establishments using flammable solvents.
3-53
Part 3
2.14.1.3
ii.
Explosive manufacturing.
iii.
Paint or solvent manufacturing (flammable base).
iv.
Pyrexin plastic manufacturing.
v.
Sodium nitrate or ammonium nitrate
vi.
Storage of combustible film.
Occupancy J3
Any building or portion thereof which is used for storage, handling, processing or manufacture of
materials and products that use biological processes and in which the risk of harmful biological threat
to the occupants exist, shall comply with the guidelines specified by the Department of Health.
2.14.1.4
Occupancy J4
Any building or portion thereof which is used for storage, handling, processing or manufacture of
materials and products that use nuclear and radioactive processes and in which the risk of radioactive
contamination exists, shall comply with the guidelines specified by Bangladesh Atomic Energy
Commission.
2.14.2 Special Provisions

The following shall not be included in Occupancy J but shall be classified in the
occupancy group which they most nearly resemble and such classification shall be
approved by the Authority:
3-54
i.
All buildings and structures and parts thereof which contain less than the exempt
quantities as specified in Table 3.2.5, when such buildings comply with the fire protection
provisions of this Code.
ii.
Rooms containing flammable liquid in lightly closed containers of 4 litre capacity or less for
retail sales or private use on the premises and in quantities not exceeding 820 litre/m of
room area.
iii.
Retail paint sales rooms with quantities not exceeding 820 litre/m of room area.
i.
Closed systems housing flammable or combustible liquids or gases used for the operation
of machinery or equipment.
ii.
Cleaning establishments.
iii.
Liquor stores and distributors without bulk storage.
iv.
Tyre storage containing less than 10,000 vehicle tyres.
v.
The storage or use of materials for agricultural purposes for use on the premises.
vi.
Pyrophoric solids or liquids not exceeding 3 m3 in storage cabinet located in a building that
is equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system provided in accordance with
the fire protection provisions of this Code.
vii.
Pyrophoric solids or liquids not exceeding 3 kg in storage cabinet located in a building that
is provided with an automatic sprinkler system installed in accordance with the fire
protection provisions in accordance to Part 4 of this Code.
viii.
Class 2 water reactive materials not exceeding 100 kg in an approved storage cabinet
located in a building that is provided with automatic sprinkler installed in accordance with
the fire protection provisions in accordance to Part 4 of this Code.
Vol. 1
Chapter 2

2.14.3.1
The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy J shall be limited to the type of
construction set forth in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8 of
Chapter 1, Part 3 and 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height and area limitations.
2.14.3.2
Floors: The floors and spaces containing hazardous materials and in areas where motor
vehicles, boats, helicopters or airplanes are stored, repaired or operated shall be of
noncombustible, liquid-tight construction.
Exception: In floors and areas where no repair works are carried out may be surfaced or
waterproofed with asphaltic paving materials.
Table 3.2.5
Exempted amount of Hazardous materials in terms Physical Hazard in a control Area
Material
Flammable liquids
Class/State
Maximum quantities in
Use closed
Storage Limit
systems
Use Open
systems
Class I-A
115 litres *
115 litres *
38 litres
Class I-B & Class IC
454 litres *
454 litres *
115 litres
Class-II
454 litres*
454 litres*
114 litres
Combustible liquids
Class-III-A
1249 litres*
1249 litres*
320 litres
Class-III-B
49962 litres*
49962 litres*
12490 litres
Combination of
flammable liquids
Class I-A, Class I-B,

Class I-C
454 litres*
454 litres*
113 litres*
Gaseous
28 m3 at NTP
(Natural Temperature
and Pressure)
28 m3 at NTP
(Natural
Temperature and
Pressure)
Not
applicable
Liquefied
113 litres
113 litres
Not
applicable
Flammable gases
Class I-A
113 litres
113 litres
38 litres
Liquefied flammable
Class I-B and Class

I-C
454 litres
454 litres
113 litres
Combustible fibres
Loose
2.832 m3
2.832 m3
0.57 m3
Baled
28.32 m3
28.32 m3
5.7 m3
454 kg
454 kg
454 kg
57 kg
57 kg
57 kg
0.454 kg
0.454 kg
0.454 kg
Class 4
0.454kg or 0.28m3
(NTP)
0.113 kg or
0.057m3 (NTP)
Class 3
0.454kg or 0.28m3
(NTP)
0.113 kg or
0.057m3 (NTP)
Class 4
0.454kg or 0.28m3
(NTP)
0.113 kg or
0.057m3 (NTP)
Class 3
2.27 kg or 1.42m3
(NTP)
0.454kg or
0.2832m3 (NTP)
Flammable solids
Pigs, ingots, heavy

castings
Light castings, light
metallic products
Scraps, shavings,
powders, dusts
Unstable (reactive)
detonable
Unstable (reactive)
detonable
0.454kg or
0.28m3
(NTP)
0.454kg or
0.28m3
(NTP)
0.454kg or
0.28m3
(NTP)
0.454kg
3-55
Part 3
22.7kg or 70.8 m3
(NTP)
Not limited or
21.24m3 (NTP)
22.7kg or 70.8m3
(NTP)
4.54 kg
Not limited
Not limited
0.454 kg
11.25 kg
11.25 kg
0.454 kg
11.25 kg
11.25 kg
2.27 kg
2.27 kg
0.454 kg
Class 2
Class 1
10
Water-reactive
detonable
11
Water-reactive
nondetonable
12
13
14
15
16
22.7 kg
22.7 kg
4.54 kg
Not Limited
Not Limited
Not Limited
Class 4
0.454 kg,
0.1135kg
0.1135kg
Class 3
4.54 kg
0.227kg
0.227kg
Class 2
113 kg
113 kg
113 kg
Class 1
1816 kg
1816 kg
1816 kg
Gaseous
42.48 m3 (NTP)
42.48 m3 (NTP)
Liquefied
56.78 litres
56.78 litres
Not applicable
0.454 kg or 0.056 m3
(NTP)
0.056 m3 (NTP)
Not applicable
1.8 kg. or 1.4 m3(NTP)
0.28m3 (NTP)
Division 1.1
0.454 kg
0.1135 kg
0.1135 kg
Division 1.2
0.454 kg
0.1135 kg
0.1135 kg
Division 1.3
2.27 kg
0.454 kg
0.454 kg
Division 1.4
22.7 kg
22.7 kg
Division 1.4G
56.75 kg
Not applicable
Division 1.5
0.454 kg
0.1135 kg
Oxidizing Materials
Oxidizing Gas
Pyrophoric Material
detonable
Pyrophoric Material
nondetonable
Explosives**
Not
applicable
Not
applicable
0.1135 kg
Not
applicable
* The maximum quantities may be increased by 100 per cent in areas not accessible to the public in buildings
provided with automatic sprinkler system.
**see :Explosive control act .
Division 1.6
a)
Not
applicable
Not
applicable
0.454 kg
Not applicable
Table 3.2.5-b
Exempted amounts of Hazardous materials in terms Health Hazard in a controlArea
Maximum quantities in
Material
Single storage
Closed systems
Open systems
Corrosive
Not
applicable
2270 kg or 1892
litres or 23 m3 NTP
454kg or 379
litres
Highly toxic
Not
applicable
Not
applicable
4.54 kg or 0.57 m3
NTP
227 kg or 23 m3 NTP
227kg or 1892
litres or 23 m3
NTP
4.54 kg or 0.57 m3
NTP
227 kg
Toxic
3-56
Class/State
1.362 kg
56.75 kg
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
Table 3.2.5-c
Location and number of Control Areas
Grade Level
Above
Below
Fire Resistance Rating of Barriers in hours

Floor
Walls
Floors
Supporting
Members
2
1
2
Floor Level1
Number of Control
Areas per Floor2
Higher than 9
7-9
12.5
12.5
12.5
50
75
100
75
50
Lower than 2
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
Not applicable
The maximum allowable quantity per control area shown in table 3.2.5
3-57
Part 3
2.14.3.3
Spill Control: The floors containing hazardous repair or other works shall be recessed a
minimum of 100 mm so as to prevent flow of liquids to adjoining areas.
2.14.3.4
Drainage: The buildings and areas shall be provided with approved drainage system to
direct the flow of liquids to an approved location or room or area designed to provide
secondary containment of the hazardous materials and fire protection water.
The drains shall be designed with adequate slope and section to carry the design
discharge of the sprinkler system. The material used in the drains shall be suitable for
drainage of the storage materials.
Separate drainage system shall be designed for materials which react with each other
producing undesirable results. They may be combined when they have been provided
with approved means of discharge into the public sewer or natural stream or river.
2.14.3.5
Containment: The outflow from the drains shall be directed to a containment system or
other area that provide a secondary storage for the hazardous materials and liquids and
fire protection water. The containment capacity shall be capable of containing the
outflow from the drains for a period of at least one hour.
The overflow from secondary containment system shall be directed to a safe location
away from the building, adjoining properties and storm drain.
If the secondary containment storage area is open to rainfall it shall be designed to
accommodate 24 hour rainfall or a continuous rainfall of 100 mm per day.
2.14.3.6
Smoke and Heat Vents: Smoke and heat vents shall be provided in areas or rooms
containing hazardous materials exceeding the exempt amount of Table 3.2.5.
2.14.3.7
Standby Power: Standby power shall be provided in the occupancies where Class I, II
or III organic peroxides are stored.

The location on property for Occupancy J shall conform to Sec 2.4.1. andPart 4.

Facilities for access and exit and emergency escape shall comply with the provisions set forth in Sec 1.6
of Chapter 1 Part 3, and Chapter 3, Part 4.
3-58
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
2.14.6 Lighting and Ventilation

2.14.6.1
All spaces and rooms customarily occupied by human beings shall be provided with
natural light by means of exterior glazing with an area of not less than 10 per cent of the
floor area. Such rooms and spaces shall be provided with natural ventilation by means
of exterior openings with an openable area not less than 5 per cent of the total floor area
or artificial light and mechanically operated ventilation system as per provisions of this
Code.
2.14.6.2
Ventilation in Hazardous Locations : The rooms, spaces or areas where explosive,

corrosive, combustible, flammable or highly toxic dust, mists, fumes, vapours or gases
are stored or may be emitted due to the processing, use, handling or storage of materials
shall be mechanically ventilated.
The mechanical ventilation of all hazardous uses shall be segregated or separated from
the ventilation of other areas. The emissions generated at work areas shall be confined
to the area in which they are generated and shall be removed or discharged outside the
building and preventive measures against back flow of such hazardous fumes or gases
inside the building shall be installed.
2.14.6.3
Ventilation of Toilets : Toilets shall be provided with fully openable exterior window of
at least 0.3 m in area or a vertical duct not less than 62500 mm in cross-section for the
first water closet, with 31250 additional mm for each additional fixture or a
mechanically operated exhaust system equipped to provide a complete change of air in
every 15 minutes. Such system shall be connected to the outside air and the point of
discharge shall be at least 1.0 m away from any other opening into the building.
Other requirements of water closets are specified in Sec 1.12.4. of Chapter 1, Part 3
2.14.7 Sanitation
All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy J shall conform to the provisions of
Sec 1.16 of this chapter and Part 8 of this code.
2.14.8 Shaft and Exit Enclosures

2.14.10Explosion Control
Explosion control, equivalent protective devices or suppression systems or barricades shall be
installed to control or vent the gases resulting from deflagrations of dusts, gases or mists in a room
or area, building or other enclosures to minimize structural or mechanical damage.
Walls, floors and roofs separating a use from explosion exposure shall be designed according to
the provisions of Chapter 1, Part 6.
Explosion venting shall be designed in exterior walls or roof only. The venting shall be provided
to prevent serious structural damage and production of lethal projectiles. The venting design shall
recognize the natural characteristics and behaviours of building materials in an explosion. The
vents shall be designed to relieve at a maximum internal pressure of 1 kPa but not less than the
3-59
Part 3
loads required by Chapter 2, Part 6. One or more of the following systems shall be installed to
relieve explosion, where applicable:
a. Lightweight materials in walls
b. Light fastening devices with hatch covers
c. Light fastening with outward opening swing doors in exterior walls
d. Nonbearing walls with light ties
The venting devices shall discharge vertically or horizontally directly to an unoccupied yard
having a width of not less than 16 m on the same plot.
The releasing devices shall be so located that the discharge end shall not be less than 3 m vertically
and 6 m horizontally from window openings or exits in the same or adjoining buildings.
2.14.12 Special Hazard

Chimneys and vents and ventilation ducts shall be of noncombustible materials.
Every bailer, central heating plants, electrical rooms or hot water supply bailer shall be separated
from the rest of the occupancies or uses by not less than 2 hour fire resistive construction.
The devices that generate a spark, flame or glow capable of igniting gasoline shall not be installed
or used within 0.5 m of the floor.
Equipment or machinery that produces or emits combustible or explosive dust or fibers shall be
provided with an approved dust collecting and exhaust system.
The equipment or systems that are used to collect or process or convey combustible dust or fibers
shall be installed with explosion venting or containment system.
2.15
Requirements for Occupancy KGarage Buildings
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy K in accordance with Sec 2.1.15.

Exception: Non-separated use mentioned in 2.3.1.

The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy K shall be limited to the type of
construction set forth in Table 3.2.4and 2.4.4.2and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8,
Chapter 1 Part 3, Appendix F and 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height and area limitations.
With exception mentioned in Sec 2.4.3, all garage floors shall be constructed with not less than 4
hour fire resistance materials.
2.15.1.1
2.15.1.2
2.15.1.3
3-60
Floors: The floors and spaces where motor vehicles are stored, repaired or operated
shall be of noncombustible, liquid-tight construction.
Exception: In floors and areas where no repair works are carried out may be surfaced or
waterproofed with asphaltic paving materials.
Spill Control: The floors containing hazardous repair or other works shall be recessed a
minimum of 100 mm so as to prevent flow of liquids to adjoining areas.
Drainage: The buildings and areas shall be provided with approved drainage system to
direct the flow of liquids to an approved location or room or area designed to provide
secondary containment of the hazardous materials and fire protection water.
The drains shall be designed with adequate slope and section to carry the design
discharge of the sprinkler system. The material used in the drains shall be suitable for
drainage of the storage materials.
Vol. 1
2.15.1.4
Chapter 2
The quality of discharged liquids must attain approvedlevelbefore discharging into the
public sewer or natural stream or river.
Smoke and Heat Vents: Smoke and heat vents shall be provided in areas or rooms
containing hazardous materials exceeding the exempt amount of Table 3.2.5.

Buildings of Occupancy K shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire

Sec 1.6 Chapter 1 Part 3; Chapter 3, Part 4 and Appendix F.

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy K shall conform to the provisions of

2.16
Requirements for Occupancy L Utility Buildings
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy L in accordance with Sec 2.1.16.

The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy L shall be limited to the type of
construction set forth in Table 3.2.4 and Sec 2.4.3, and shall comply with the provisions of Sec 1.8,
Chapter 1 Part 3, and 2.4.2 to meet the requirements of height and area limitations.

Buildings of Occupancy L shall comply with the requirements for location on property and fire

Chapter 1 Part 3; Chapter 3, Part 4.

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy L shall conform to the provisions of
3-61
Part 3

2.16.6 Fire detector, Alarm, Evacuation and Extinguishment system

2.16.7 Special Hazard

2.16.7.1
Since the nature of use of this occupancy involves hazard, special consideration for
maintenance and operational safety must be ensured. Depending upon the degree of
hazard involved, this occupancy type may have separate and isolated structure.
2.16.7.2
Chimneys and vents and ventilation ducts shall be of noncombustible materials.

Every bailer, central heating plants, electrical rooms or hot water supply boiler shall be
separated from the rest of the occupancies or uses by not less than 2 hour fire resistive
construction.
The devices that generate a spark, flame or glow capable of igniting gasoline shall not be
installed or used within 0.5 m of the floor.
Equipment or machinery that produces or emits combustible or explosive dust or fibers
shall be provided with an approved dust collecting and exhaust system.
The equipment or system that is used to collect or process or convey combustible dust
or fibers shall be installed with explosion venting or containment system.
2.17
Requirements for Occupancy M Miscellaneous Buildings
Buildings shall be classified as Occupancy M in accordance with Sec 2.1.17.
2.17.1 General
The buildings or parts thereof classified as Occupancy M shall be limited to the type of
construction set forth in Table 3.2.4 and shall comply with the requirements of Sec 1.8 and 2.4.2 to
Any building or portion thereof that exceeds the limitations provided in this chapter shall be
classified in the occupancy group other than M that it most nearly resembles.

The location on property for Occupancy M shall conform with Sec 2.4.1.

Access and exit facilities for Occupancy M shall comply with the specification set forth in Sec 1.6;
Chapter 3, Part 4.

All buildings or part of a building classified as Occupancy M shall conform to the provisions of
Sec 1.16; Chapters 1 and 3, Part 8.
3-62
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
2.17.5 Shaft and Exit Enclosures

least 4 hour fire resistance. Exit requirements shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 3,
Part 4.
2.17.6 Fire detection, Alarm, Evacuation and Extinguishment System

Table 3.2.6: A-Z List of Occupancy Classification
Use or Occupancy
Brief description
Occupancy class/ sub-class
A
Adhesives manufacture
Excluding manufacture of basic components
G or J depending on nature
of materials involved
Advertising displays
manufacture
Agricultural machinery
manufacture,
Agriculture
G
Including repairs
Without nuisance or sales limitation
Agricultural
Small farm house, (limited to storage quantity)
Large farm house, storage quantity unlimited
H or J
Small grain processing unit, (limited to quantity)
Large grain processing unit, quantity

unlimited
G or J
Aircraft manufacture (including

parts)
of materials and process
involved
Airports
MIXED USE (depending on

detail requirement)
Amusement parks, children's
(See children's amusement parks)
Amusement park activities

Animal
I
Animal hospitals
Animal pound (for stray and lost animal)
Animal crematorium
Killing establishments, for retail sales
Slaughtering, processing and packing
Antique stores
Apartments
Apartment hotels
F
(see residential)
in walkup buildings
inhighrises
in housing complex
A
A5
3-63
Part 3
Apparel
(See clothing)
Appliances
Electrical appliance Manufacturing
Television, radio, phonograph or household

appliance stores, (Limited as to floor areas)
Television, radio, phonograph or household

appliance stores, (Unlimited)
Household appliance repair shops
See Assembly (Limited as to capacity)
See Assembly (Unlimited)
Commercial (sales included)
With exhibition open to public viewing for

limited period (sales included)
Arenas, auditoriums, or stadiums

Art Galleries
Art goods manufacture, religious

temple or church, excluding
foundry operations
Art metal craft shops
Art needle work
F
Six occupants or less
Non-separated use to A1
and A2 Occupancy
More than six occupants (see industrial)
Artist's supply stores
Asphalt or asphalt products
Manufacture
Asssembly
Large assembly with fixed seats
I1
Small assembly with fixed seats
I2
Large assembly without fixed seats
I3
Small assembly without fixed seats
I4
For sport facilities
I5
Athletic equipment
manufacture
Athletic goods stores
Auctions rooms, open to

public
Auditoriums
See assembly
Automatic laundries
Automobiles
3-64
I
G
Dead Storage
Driving Schools
Glass or mirror shops
Washing
Manufacture, including parts, or engine

rebuilding
Rental establishments
Repairs, body
Repairs, without body repairs
Sales, open or enclosed
Seat cover or convertible top establishments,

selling or installation
Showrooms, no repair services....
Vol. 1
Automotive service stations

Awnings
Chapter 2
Supply stores, no repair services ....
Tire sales establishments, limited to quantity
Tire sales establishments, unlimited
Wrecking establishments
Limited as to total area
Unlimited....
Custom shops
Manufacture, with no limitation on production

or on floor area
B
Bakeries
Banks,
Home-made, six or less occupants (baking

included)
non-separated use to main

occupancy
Large scale, more than six occupants (baking

included)
Sales only
including drive-in banks
Banquet halls
Bar, alcoholic
Barber shops
Barns
Barracks
(See residential)
A4
Baths, steam
Beaches, commercial
Not applicable
Beauty parlors
Beverages
Bicycle
Bottling works
Manufacture, Alcoholic
Non-alcoholic
Manufacture
Rental or repair shops
Sales
Billiard parlors
Blacksmith shops
I
small scale (limited to six occupants), repair or
making
unlimited
Blueprinting establishments
drawing printing
Boarding houses
(See residential)
Borstals
Boatels
Boats or ships
Bailer works at port or dock
Breaking
Building or repair, for boats less than 200 ft. in

length
3-65
Part 3
Building or repair, for boats 200 ft. or more in
length
Docks, for small pleasure boats
Not applicable
Fuel sales, open or enclosed

Un- restricted as to location
Restricted as to location
Rentals, opened or enclosed
Sales, opened or enclosed
Showrooms, with no repair services...
Storage, repair, or painting, including the

incidental sales of boats, boat parts, or
accessories, with restrictions on boat size and
setbacks...
Bone distillation
G or J depending on
process or material used
Botanical garden structures
Book
Bottling works, for all

beverages
Bowling alleys
Binding (see printing)

Hand binding or tooling
Store....
F
G
Limited as to number of lanes...
Unlimited
Breweries
Brick manufacture
Brush or broom manufacture...
Building materials sales
open or enclosed, limited as to lot area
Yards, for sales, storage, or handling, open or

enclosed, unlimited as to lot area except in the
case of lumber yards
Bungalow
(See residential)
Business
Offices
B1
Research and testing laboratories
B2
Essential services
B3
With less than 10 berths
K (bus area) and I

(passenger area)
With 10 or more berths
MIXED (as per detail

requirement including K
and I)
Bus stations
Bus stops
see Bus stations
Business machines
Manufacture
Small, repair shops
Stores, sales, or rentals...
Business schools or colleges

Buying house (garments)
3-66
B
storage restricted to sample
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
C
Caf
Cafeteria
Camera and photo equipment
Six persons or less
Non-separated use to main

Occupancy
More than six persons (see mercantile)
With commercial kitchen
MIXED (G and I)
Without commercial kitchen
manufacture
Camps, overnight or outdoor day
MIXED (A, I and other

depending on the nature of
use)
Candy stores
Canneries, including food

products
Canteen
Canvas or canvas products

manufacture
Cargo terminal
With or without cooking facility
I
G2
containing low fire-risk materials
containing moderate fire-risk materials
containing high fire-risk materials
Carnivals, temporary
I5
Carpentry shops
Carpet
Carport
Catering establishments
Cleaning establishments ....
J or G depending on the
nature of materials
involved
Manufacture
Carpet, rug, linoleum or other floor covering

stores Unlimited
Roofed wallless shelter for car
K or H depending on the
nature of use
Automated mechanichal parking
K or H depending on the
nature of use
Commercial kitchen
Office
Storage, open or enclosed
Storage for temporary structure's fabrication

material
Cattle shed, stables
Cement manufacture
G2
Cemeteries
Ceramic products
Chamber, doctors' or dentists',

(outpatient only)
Charcoal manufacture ....
Manufacture
G or J based on nature of
material used
Display and sales
50 or less occupants
above 50 occupants
D
G
3-67
Part 3
Chemicals
Compounding or packaging...
Manufacture
Child care home
Child care institution
Children's amusement parks
Churches, with fixed pews
Small
Medium size
Large size....
Unlimited as to size...
(See Assembly with fixed seats)
Cigar stores
Cinema hall
Cineplex
Circuses, temporary...
(See Assembly)
Class room
School, college or university
Clay manufacture
Clay pits
Not applicable
Cleaning or cleaning and dyeing

establishments
Clinics
(See dry cleaning)....

With inpatient
Only outpatient, limited to quantity (see

chambers, doctors' or dentists')
Only outpatient, unlimited
With diagnostic facilities (see diagnostic

facilities)
Coaching centre
(See educational facilities)
Cold storage
Composit textile mill
of material and process
used
Cottage industries
Clock
Clothing
3-68
Government community clinic
Small, fifty or less workers(see industrial

facilities)
G1
Large, more than fifty workers (see industrial

facilities)
G1 or G2 depending on the
nature of material and
process used
Manufacture
Stores or repair shops...
Accessory stores
Custom manufacture or altering for retail
Manufacture...
of the material involved
Vol. 1
Clubs Non-commercial
(members only)
Chapter 2
Rental establishments
Store, Limited as to floor area
Store, Unlimited
Including accommodation
MIXED (A and I)
Night-club
All types except those with outdoor swimming

pools
Clubs, for public use
Excluding accommodation
Including accommodation
MIXED (I and A or other

occupancies depending
upon nature of use)
Clubs, Sporting
MIXED (I and A or other

occupancies depending
upon nature of use)
Coal
Products manufacture
Sales, open or enclosed, Limited as to plot area
Unlimited (see coal storage)
Storage, open or enclosed
Coin stores...
Condensed and powdered milk
Manufacture...
Coke products
Manufacture...
Colleges or universities
See educational facilities
Colony, government or nongovernment
MIXED (A and other

occupancies depending on
use)
Commercial building
(see business and/ or mercantile)
Commercial parking garages or

plots
Community centers
(See garages)
With commercial kitchen
MIXED (G and I)
Without commercial kitchen
Concrete batching
Concrete products manufacture
Construction machinery
Manufacture, including repairs....
Container terminal
Contractors' establishments
Convalescent homes
G
H or J (According to the
hazard classification
regulation of the port
authority)
Electrical, glazing, heating, painting, paper

hanging, plumbing, roofing, or ventilating
Contractors' yards...
Not applicable
(See nursing homes)
Convents
MIXED (A, B and I)
Cork products
Manufacture
Cosmetics or toiletries
Manufacture...
Costume rental establishments
3-69
Part 3
Cottage, tourist
(See residential)
Cotton ginning or cotton

wadding or liner manufacture
Court houses
J
I
Crate manufacture
Crematoriums
A5
Animals.
G or J depending on the
material and process
involved
J
Human.
MIXED (J and I)
Cultural center
Mixed (depending on
detail requirement)
D
Dance halls
Public
Dance School
Dance studios
A
(see studios)
Day camps, outdoor

Day care Centre
Decorator's establishment
I
With six or less children
Non-separated use to
Residential Occupancy
More than six children
Office
Storage, separated
H or J depending upon the

material involved
Defense Buildings, for critical

national defense capabilities
Not Applicable
Delicatessen stores
(See food stores)
Dental
Instruments manufacture
Laboratories (See laboratories, medical or dental)

Department stores
Diagnostic facilities, medical
not exceeding 300 m
F1
more than 300 m
F2
Outpatients only
Diaper supply establishments...
Disinfectants manufacture
Dispensaries
Dormitories
Drafting instruments
Attached to hospital
See drug store
Universities or colleges (above 12 grade)
Schools (12 grade or below)
Manufacture
Dressmaking shops, custom...

Drinking places, non-alcoholic
(See cafe)
Drive-in theaters
Drug stores
Dry cleaning or clothes pressing

establishments
3-70
Limited as to floor area, solvents and machine

capacity
process and quantity of
material used
Vol. 1
Dry cleaning or cleaning and

dyeing establishments
Chapter 2
Without restrictions
Dry Cleaning, using other than

flammable liquids in cleaning or
dyeing operations
Dry goods stores
process and quantity of
material used
G
Limited as to floor area
Unlimited
Dumps
Not applicable
Dyeing facilities/ industries
E
Eating or drinking places
With restrictions on entertainment (see

Assembly)
Without restrictions on entertainment or dancing

but limited to location in hotels (see Assembly)
Without restrictions (See assembly)
Eco park structures
MIXED (depending upon

the nature of use)
Educational facilities
Upto higher secondary level
B1
Training and above-higher-secondary education
B2
B3
Power or steam generating plants ...
Substations, Public transit or railroad
Substations, as part of public distribution system
Substations, low to medium voltage step down,

at consumers' end
Manufacture
G or J depending upon the

process or material to be
used
Stores (including television, radio, phonograph

or household appliances)
Electric
Electrical Appliance
Contractors (See contractors' establishments)

Equipment assembly, not including electrical
machinery
Supplies, manufacturing.....
Electronics manufacturing
Electrolysis works
Electrotyping or stereotyping
Limited to quantity
Unlimited (see printing)
Embassy or High-commission or
Consulate
MIXED (depending on
detail requirement)
Engine
including rebuilding or reconditioning
Engraving or photo-engraving
Limited to quantity
Unlimited (see printing)
3-71
Part 3
Excelsior manufacture
Exhibition hall
See assembly
Exterminators
See pest control
F
Fabric stores
Factory
G or J (depending on
process and material
involved)
Fairs, temporary
MIXED (I and F)
Feathers
Felt
Bulk processing, washing, curing, or dyeing
Products manufacture, except washing , curing

or dyeing
Products manufacture, except washing, curing or

dyeing
Fertilizer manufacture
Field hospital, temporary
With provision for ambulance access (to parks

and play grounds)
Filling stations
(See refueling station)
Film, photographic
Manufacture
Fire Stations
Fish products, packing or

processing
Fishing tackle or equipment
rentalor sales
Flats
G
F
(see residential)
In walkup buildings
In high rises
in housing complex
MIXED (A and other

occupancies depending on
use)
Florist shops
Food
F
Products processing, except meat slaughtering or
preparation of fish for packing
Stores, including supermarkets, grocery stores,

meat markets, or delicatessen stores
Foundries
Ferrous or non-ferrous
involved)
Fraternity houses
(See colleges or universities)
Freight depot
See storage and hazardous buildings
H and/or J
Frozen food lockers
Fuel briquettes manufacture
Fuel sales, open or enclosed

Funeral establishments
3-72
Limited upto exempted quantity
Unlimited, See coal storage or petroleum storage
J
I
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
Fungicides manufacture
Fur
Furniture
G
Goods manufacture, not including tanning or
dyeing
Tanning, curing, finishing, or dyeing...
Custom shop, floor area of 100 m or less
Custom shop, floor area over 100 m
Manufacture
Store,Limited as to floor area
J or G depending upon
nature of materials
involved
F
Store, Unlimited
Furriers shops, custom
Freight depot
H or J depending on the
nature of material involved
G
Garages
Parking garage
K1
Private garage
K2
Repair garage and show-rooms
K3
Garbage incineration or
reduction
Garden shed
Garden supply stores
Gardens, truck
(See agriculture)
Garments industries
Gas, fuel
Gas manufacture for
Gasoline service stations
G
Manufacture
Distribution regulatory system (DRS)
Medical purpose
Hot-works (welding)
(See refueling stations)
Gelatin manufacture
Generating plants, electric or

steam
Gift stores
Glass
F
Cutting shops
Manufacture
Products manufacture frompreviously

manufactured glass
Glazing contractor's
establishment
Glue manufacture
(See contractors' establishments)
Godown
See storage buildings
Golf
Courses
Not applicable
Courses, miniature.....
Driving ranges
Milling or processing....
Storage
Manufacture
Grain
Graphite or graphite products
3-73
Part 3
Gravel pits
Not applicable
Grocery stores
Group homes
Segregation of occupants on the basis of age

group and disabilities (See institutional)
Gypsum production industry

Gymnasiums
C
J
Less than 300 occupants
300 or more occupants
Commercial without spectator gallery (max 50

occupants)
H
Hair
Hall, for incidental show

(picture, drama, theatre)
Hardware
Hazardous buildings
Health centers
Healthcare facilities
Products manufacture (except washing, curing,

or dyeing)
Products manufacture, custom
(See assembly)
Manufacture
Stores
Bodies manufacture
Repair shops
Explosion-hazard building
J1
Chemical-hazard building
J2
Biological-hazard building
J3
Nuclear-hazard building
J4
With inpatient
Without inpatient (not more than 50 occupants)
Government operated health centers
E or D (depending upon
the facilities)
Normal medical facilities
D1
Emergency medical facilities
D2
Health club
Heating contractor's
establishment
Heat, ventilation and airconditioning equipment
showrooms
Heliports
I
Without repair facilities
Hemp products manufacture
High Commission
See embassy
Home for care
of the old and infirm (see institution)

of mentally disabled (see institution)
Home office
Not more than 6 occupants
Hosiery manufacture
Hospital, except animal hospital
3-74
Non-separated use of
Occupancy A
G
As part of disaster preparedness program
Casualty unit
Vol. 1
Hostels
Hotels
Household
Chapter 2
Emergency unit
Non-profit or voluntary, and related facilities...
Proprietary and related facilities...
For adults
For children
Transient
Apartment hotel
Starred hotel
MIXED
Appliance repair shops...
Appliance stores (See appliances television,

radio, phonograph, or household appliance
stores)
Housing, complex multi-storied
MIXED (see appendix)
Housing, cluster
Housing, low-income
Housing, minimum standard
Housing, rehabilitation
I
Ice cream stores
Ice
Manufacture, dry or natural.....
G or J (depending on the
process or material used)
Sales, open or enclosed Limited as to lot area
Unlimited
Incineration or reduction of
garbage,offal, or dead animals
Indoor facility, for amusement

park
Industrial buildings
I
Low-hazard Industries
G1
Moderate-hazard Industries
G2
Infirmaries
Ink or inked ribbon manufacture
Inns
See residential
For care of children
C1
Custodial, for physically capable adults
C2
Custodial, for physically incapable adults
C3
Penal or mental, for children
C4
Penal or mental, for adults
C5
With sleeping accommodations......
Insecticides manufacture
Institution
Institutions, philanthropic or
non-profit
Without sleeping accommodations
Interior decorating
establishments
Limited as to floor area for processing, servicing,

or repairs
3-75
Part 3
Unlimited, see furniture, textiles or upholstering
Irradiation plant
F
J
J
Jail
see prisons
Jewelry
Manufacture
Costume
From precious metals
Shops
Junk Yards
Not applicable
Jute products manufacture
quantity or process)
Juvenile correctional center
For children (see assembly)
K
Kennels
Kindergarten
H
Knitwear industries
B
G2
L
Laboratories
Medical or dental, for research or testing, with

limitations on objectionable effects
Research, experimental, or testing, unlimited
(G or J) and H depending
on process or material used
in compliance with safety
standards
Radiological laboratory, see radiological facilities
Lampblack manufacture
Pathological laboratory
G (in compliance with

safety standards)
Microbiological laboratory, for diagnostic facility
G or J depending on
process or material used in
compliance with safety
standards
Microbiological laboratory, for research
G or J depending on
standards
Microbiological laboratory, for academic facility
G or J depending on
standards
G
Laundries, with no limitations

ontype of operation
Laundry establishments, hand

orautomatic self-service
3-76
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
Lavatory, public
see public toilet
Leather
Tanning, curing, finishing or dyeing
Goods stores
Reading area (see assembly)
Stack area (see storage)
Reading and stack area combined
MIXED (I and H)
For children (see institutional)
For adults (see residential)
Manufacture
Libraries...
Lillah boarding
Linen supply establishments
Linoleum
Stores (See carpet stores)

Liquor stores, package
Livestock
F
Storage, more than six castles
Slaughtering or preparation for packing...
Loan offices
Locksmith shops
Lodging
See residential
Luggage
Manufacture
Stores
Processing or woodwork, bulk
Sales, Limited as to lot area
Sales, Unlimited...
Yard, Limited as to lot area....
Yard, Unlimited...
Lumber
M
Machine
Machinery
Shops including tool, die or pattern making
Tools manufacture
Manufacture or repair, Heavy
G or J depending on
Miscellaneous or electrical equipment
G or J depending on
Rental or sales establishments
Repair shops
Machines, business
(See business machines)
Madrasa
(See institution)
Manure storage
Markets
H
Retail, including meat (See mercantile)
Wholesale, produce or meat (See mercantile)
Masseurs
Matches manufacture
Mattress manufacture, rebuilding

or renovating
Meat
Markets, Retail (See food stores)
3-77
Part 3
Medical
Markets, Wholesale
Slaughtering or preparation for packing...
Appliances, Custom manufacture
Appliances, Manufacture
Stores
Instruments, manufacture
Laboratories (See laboratories, medical)

Offices or group medical centers, Limited as to
location within building
Offices or group medical centers,Unlimited
Meeting halls
See Assembly
Mess houses
(See residential)
Metal Fabrication industry
Metal Assembly industry
Metals manufacture
Alloys or foil, miscellaneous
Casting or foundry products, heavy....
Finishing, plating, grinding, sharpening,

polishing, cleaning, rustproofing, heat treatment,
or similar processes
Ores reduction or refining
Products treatment or processing
Reduction, refining, smelting, or alloying
Stamping or extrusion
Treatment or processing
Mental institution
Without detention facilities
Mental hospitals
(See institution)
Mercantile
Small shops and markets
F1
Large shops and markets
F2
Refueling station
F3
(See industrial and/ or hazardous buildings)
material or process)
Mill
Mill works, and woodworking,
wood distillation and particle
boards manufacturing
Millinery shops
Mining machinery manufacture
F
including repairs
Mirror silvering shops

Miscellaneous buildings
G
Special structures
M1
Fences, tanks and towers
M2
Monasteries
Monument
3-78
MIXED
Sales establishments, with incidental processing
to order
Works, with no limitations on processing
Mosque
(See assembly)
Motels
(See residential)
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
Motion picture production and

filming facilities
MIXED (G and other

Occupancies as required)
Motorcycles
Manufacture
Repairs, body
Repairs, except body repairs
Showrooms, with no repair services(See garage)
Motor freight stations
See truck terminals
Motor vehicles
Dead storage
Moving or storage offices, Limited as to storage
Unlimited
Movie theatre
See assembly
Museums
See assembly
Music stores
Music studios
See studios
Musical instruments
Manufacture, Excluding pianos and organs
G1
Including pianos and organs
G2
Repair shops
G1
N
Newspaper publishing
MIXED (G and E)
Printing
Office
Newsstands, open or closed
Novelty products manufacture
Novitiates
See institution
Nuclear medicine facilities
see radiological facilities
Nuclear plant
A
J
Nurseries
See agriculture
Nursing homes
Philanthropic or non-profit
C or D depending on the
type of occupants and
nature of use
Private
C or D depending on the
type of occupants and
nature of use
See pre-school
Nursery schools
O
Oakum products manufacture....
Office equipment or machinery

repair shops
Office or business machine stores
F
sales or rental
Offices
General
Business, professional or Governmental(see

business occupancy)
3-79
Part 3
Offices, small
Dental, medical, or osteopathic (See medical

offices)
Wholesale, with storage restricted to samples
(see business occupancy)
Architect's/ engineer's/ consultant's (Limited to
six occupants)
Architect's/ engineer's/ consultant's ( more than
six occupants)
Oil cloth manufacture

Oil sales, open and enclosed
E
E
Non-seperated use of
Occupancy A
E
J
Limited as to lot area......
Unlimited (See petroleum or petroleum products

storage)
Old home
See institution
Optical
Equipment manufacture
Goods manufacture
See institution
Orphanage
Optician or
optometristestablishments
Orthopedic
Osteopathic offices
F
Appliances, Custom manufacture
Manufacture
Stores
Instruments, manufacture
(See medical offices)
P
Packing or crating establishments
G2
Packing materials manufacture....
G2
Pagoda
See Prayer hall
Paint
Manufacture
Stores, limited to quantity
Stores, unlimited
Painting contractors
Paper
Mills (See wood pulp or fiber)
Stock companies
Paper-hanging contractors
Parish houses
Parks, public or private
A
With provision for emergency vehicle access as
part of disaster preparedness program
Park structures
Not applicable
M
Parking garages, public
See garage, parking
Parking lots, public
See garage, parking
Passenger stations and terminals
Small, passenger station
MIXED (depending on
nature of use)
MIXED (depending on
nature of use)
Large, passenger station or terminal

Passenger and freight terminal
3-80
MIXED (depending on
nature of use)
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
Peat storage
Perfumed or perfumed soaps
compounding only, not including soap

manufacture
Pest control
Exempted quantity only
Pet shops
Petrol pump
See refueling station
Petroleum or petroleum products
Refining
Storage and handling
Pharmaceutical products
manufacture
of materials used
Philanthropic, religious or nonprofit activities
MIXED (depending on
nature of use)
Phonograph
Repair shops
Stores (See appliances)
Photocopying and book binding
Binding limited in quantity
Photographic
Developing or printing establishment,Retail
Developing or printing establishment,

Wholesale, Limited as to floor area
Developing or printing establishment,

Wholesale, Unlimited
Equipment, Manufacture (film)
Equipment, Manufacture (except film)
Stores
Studios
Supply stores (limited to exempted quantity)
Photostatting establishments
Physical culture establishments
Picture framing stores
Plants, Industrial
Plants, Refrigeration
Plastics
Products, manufacture........
Raw, manufacture........
Platemaking
(See printing)
Playgrounds
With provision for emergency vehicle access as

part of disaster preparedness program
Plots, parking
(See parking lots, public)
Plumbing
Contractors' establishments
Equipment manufacturer (See tools or hardware

manufacturing)
Showrooms, without repair facilities
Police Stations
Pool halls
Porcelain products manufacture
Post offices
Poultry
Storage (live)
3-81
Part 3
Killing establishments, for retail sales on the
same zoning lot only
Packing or slaughtering
Power plant
Power stations
G
As part of national grid power distribution
system
At consumer's end
Prayer hall
See assembly
Precision instruments
manufacture
Optical equipment, clocks, or similar products
Medical, dental, or drafting instruments, optical

goods, or similar products
See educational
Press club, for journalist
Press, printing
See printing
Primary schools
See educational
Printing
Custom
Unlimited
Printing, publishing, dyeing and

printing industries
Prisons
Produce or meat
markets,wholesale
Psychiatric sanatoria
J
See jail
C
F
With detention facilities (see institution)
Public auction rooms
MIXED (F and/or I)
Public transit yards
Not applicable
Publishing
Pumping stations
With printing
Without printing
Water or sewage (for city supply system)
Dedicated to consumer
Q
Quarter, Staff
Government or non-government
A or Mixed (See appendix)
R
Racetracks
Radio
I
Appliance repair shops
Stores
Studios, with less than six occupants
Non-seperated use to main

Occupancy
Studios, without transmission tower
Studios, with transmission tower(see radio

station)
Towers, non-accessory
Radio station
3-82
M
Mixed (depending on the
type of use)
Vol. 1
Radiological facilities, medical

Radioactive waste disposal
services
Railroad
Chapter 2
In compliance with the standard of atomic

energy commission
D
J
Equipment manufacture, including railroad cars

or locomotives
Passenger stations
material and hot-work
used
I
Right-of-way
Not applicable
Substations
Small or medium size
Large
Railroads, including rights-of-way,freight

terminals, yards orappurtenances, or facilities
orservices used or required inrailroad
operations, but notincluding passenger
stations
Not applicable
Rail station
Mixed (depending on the

type of use)
Record stores
Recreation centers, noncommercial

Recreation piers
I
See assembly
Recreational vehicles
manufacturing
Rectories
J
A
Reducing salons
Reformatories
See institutional facilities
Refreshments stands, drive-in
Refrigerating plants
Refuelling station
Petroleum product storage within exempted

quantity
Refuse incinerators
Religious or church art

goodsmanufacture.....
Research establishment
G
dealing with non-hazard or low hazard materials
only
Single-family detached
One-family semi-detached or two-family

detached or semi-detached
Boarding or rooming houses
Residences
Rest homes (See nursing homes)

Residential
Single family dwelling
A1
Two family dwelling
A2
Flats or apartments
A3
Mess, boarding house, dormitories and hostels
A4
Hotels and lodging houses
A5
Rest Houses
3-83
Part 3
Restaurant
Dining area
Performing area, limited
Kitchen and storage
Reviewing stand
Riding academies, open or

enclosed
Roofing
contractors'establishments
Rooming houses
E and H
See residential
Rubber
Processing or manufacture, natural or synthetic
Products manufacture (excluding all natural or

synthetic rubber processing)
Rug stores
(See carpet stores)
S
Sail-making establishments
Salvage storage
Sand pits
Not applicable
Saloon, hair dressing
Sanatoriums
With detention facilities (see institution)
Without detention facilities
Sawmills
Scenery construction
School (see educational)
Scrap metal, paper and rag

storage
Secondary school
Dormitories, for children
Nursery, kindergarten, elementary or secondary

schools
Trade or other schools for adults, limited as to

objectionable effects...
Trade schools for adults, unlimited....
For physically challenged, without

accommodation
For mentally challenged, without

accommodation
B
H
See educational
Seed stores
Seminar halls
F
For 50 or more occupants, See assembly
Seminaries
I
B
Settlement houses
(see housing)
MIXED (A and other

Occupancy depending on
the nature of use
Sewage
Disposal plants
Pumping stations
Sewing machine stores,

sellinghousehold machines
only.......
3-84
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
Ship chandlers, candle shops
Ship or boat building or repair

yards
Shipping, waterfront
For ships 200 ft. in length or over....
Shoes
Manufacture
G
Not applicable
Shops
Repair shops
involved
F
Stores
see definition
F or G (depending on the
involved)
mixed occupancy (A & F)
or (A, F & G)
Unlimited
Shop-house
Sign painting shops
Silk processing and spinning
Silo, for storage of grain
Silver plating shops, custom
Silverware manufacture, plate

orsterling
Sisal products manufacture
G
J
Skating rinks, roller
Indoor
Outdoor
Slag piles
Not applicable
Slaughtering of animals or
poultry
Soap or detergents
G
Manufacture, including fat rendering
Packaging only
Soldering shops
Solvent extracting
Sorority houses
(See hostel)
Sports centre
Sporting equipment
manufacture..
Sporting goods stores
Stable for horses
Stadiums
Indoor or outdoor, with access for emergency

vehicle as part of disaster preparedness program
Staff quarter
see quarter, staff
Stamp stores
Station
F
Rail, bus, air and water way
MIXED (I and other

Occupancy depending on
the nature of use
Stationary stores
Statuary, mannequins,
figurines,religious or church art
goodsmanufacture, excluding
foundryoperations
3-85
Part 3
Steel products
Stock yards or slaughtering of

animals or poultry
Stone processing or stone
products
Storage buildings
Miscellaneous fabrication or assembly (without

hot-work)
Structural products manufacture
J
G
G
Low-fire-risk storage
H1
Moderate-fire-risk storage
H2
Wholesale (see storage buildings)
Offices, limited to quantity
Non-separated use
For cotton/jute/ paper/textile
Stores
See definition
Students' halls of residence
For children
For adults
Music, dancing, or theatrical
Storage facilities
Studios
Radio (see radio studio)

Television, with spectator
MIXED (I, E or G)
Television, without spectator
MIXED (depending on
nature of material and
process involved)
Sugar
Production and Refining
Super market
See mercantile
Swimming pools
Commercial
Non-Commercial (See clubs)....
T
Table tennis halls
See assembly
Tailor shops, custom
Tanning (See leather or fur)
Tapestries manufacture
Tar products manufacture
Taxidermist shops
Telegraph offices
Telephone exchanges or
othercommunications
equipmentstructures
Television
Repair shops
Stores (See appliances)
Studios (see television studios)

Towers, non-accessory
Television station
See business
MIXED (E3 with other

Occupancies according to
detail requirement)
Temple
See prayer hall
Tennis courts, indoor.....
3-86
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
Terminal facilities at river

crossingsfor access to electric,
gas, orsteam lines
Test laboratory
involving low hazard material
Textiles
Bleaching (see industrial)
Products manufacture (see industrial)
Spinning, weaving, manufacturing, dyeing,

printing, knit goods, yarn, thread, or cordage
(see industrial)
Textile industries and jute mills
including canvas, cotton cloth, bagging burlap,

carpet and rags (see industrial)
Theater
See assembly
Theaters, drive-in......
(See studios)
Theatrical studios
without spectator
Tile
Manufacture
Tire sales establishments
Including installation services, Limited to

quantity
Including installation services, unlimited

quantity
Curing or manufacture, or tobacco products
manufacture....
Stores (retail)
Tobacco
Toilet, public
Toiletries manufacture
Tool or hardware manufacture
See industries
involved
G
Topsoil storage
See storage
Tourist cabins
See residential
Towel supply establishments

Toys
Trade or other schools for adults
Trade expositions
Trailer, truck, bus
Training center
F
Manufacture
Stores
Limited as to objectionable effects (see

educational)
Unlimited (see educational)...
Limited as to rated capacity
Unlimited
Manufacture, including parts
involved
Repairs, body
involved
F
Showrooms, with no repair services.
lecture based, limited to quantity(see

educational facilities)
E1 or B2
3-87
Part 3
vocational or demonstrative (see educational
facilities)
B2
Large
MIXED depending on nature

of use
Large
MIXED depending on nature

of use
Travel agency
(see business)
Travel bureaus
(see business)
Truck
Manufacture (including parts) or engine

rebuilding
Repairs, body
involved
G
Repairs, except body repairs
Showrooms, with no repair services
Trucking terminals or motor freight stations,

Limited as to lot area
K1
Trucking terminals or motor freight stations,

Unlimited
K1
More than six occupants (see educational)
Transit substations
Transport terminal
Tutorial homes
Turpentine manufacture....
Typewriter stores
Typewriter or other small

businessmachine repair shops
Typography
(See printing)
U
Umbrellas
Manufacture
Repair shops
University
B2
Upholstery
Manufacturing
Bulk, including shops not dealingdirectly with

consumers
Shops dealing directly with consumers, retail
Utility
V
Variety stores
Unlimited
Varnish manufacture
Vehicles
3-88
J
Dead storage of motor
Manufacture, children's
Storage, commercial or public utility, open or

enclosed
Vol. 1
Venetian blind, window shade,

or awning
Chapter 2
Custom shops, limited as to floor area
Manufacture, with no limitationon production or

on floor area
nature of materials
involved
Ventilating contractors
Ventilating equipment
showrooms
Video games shop
Without repair facilities.....
Vihara, Buddhist
with occasional or regular assembly
F
mixed use
W
Wallpaper stores
Limited to quantity
Warehouses
H or J (depending on the
nature of material stored)
Watch or clock stores or repair

shops
Watch making
F
G
Waterfront shipping
Not applicable
Water pumping stations
At distributor's end
At consumer's end
Water tank tower
Wax products manufacture
Weaving, hand
Up to six hand-weaving machines
Non- separated use to main

Occupancy
More than six hand-weaving machines
Wedding chapels
See assembly
Welding shops
Arc welding only
Gas welding within exempted quantity
G or J depending upon the

quantity of material and
process
Welfare centers
Wholesale establishments
H or J depending upon the

nature of material
Wholesale offices or showrooms,

withstorage restricted to
samples
Window manufacture
Window shades
Custom shops, limited as to floor area
Manufacture, without limitation on production

or on floor area
Bulk processing or woodworking...
Distillation
Pulp or fiber, reduction or processing,including

paper mill operations.
Sales, open or enclosed, Limited as to lot area
Unlimited (See lumber yards)
Wood
3-89
Part 3
Woodworking shops, custom
Wool scouring or pulling

Workshops
nature of materials
involved
G
With hot-works
Without hot-works
X
X-ray facilities
See radiological facilities
Y
Yard
Yard, ship
Not applicable
See ship or boat building or repair yards
Yarn, manufacturing
quantity (see table 3.2.5)
Z
Zoo structures
**The occupancy classification for any project, not included in this list, shall be determined through the following
process:
i. The functional requirements of the unidentified occupancy shall be compared with the Occupancy use type,
classification, sub classification categories and descriptions to match with the given occupancies to find the most
similar Occupancy,
ii. If process (i) fails to determine the Occupancy, the project will be referred to the Board of Appeal constituted as
per directives of Part 2 Chapter 2. The Board of Appeal shall determine the Occupancy, and
iii. The decision of Board of Appeal shall be considered as an explanatory material of this Code and shall be added
as addendum to this Code. For any future projects of similar nature this addendum will suffice and need not be
referred to the Board of Appeal again.
3-90
Vol. 1
Chapter 3
Classification of Building Construction Types Based on Fire Resistance
3.1
3.1.1
General
Classification by Type of Construction
For the purpose of this Code, every room or space of a building or a buildingitself
hereafter altered or erected shall be classified in one specific type of construction as
grouped as follows:
GROUP I- Noncombustible , subdivided as
follows :
Type I-A: 4 hour fire protected
Type I-B: 3 hour fire protected
Type I-C: 2 hour fire protected
Type I-D: 1 hour fire protected
Type I-E: Unprotected
GROUP II- Combustible , subdivided as follows :
Type II-A: Heavy timber
Type II-B: Protected wood joist
Type II-C: Unprotected wood joist
Type II-D: Protected wood frame
Type II-E: Unprotected wood frame
The fire resistance ratings of various types of construction for structural and
nonstructural members are specified in Table 3.3.1 (a) and (b). For hazardous
Occupancies involving an exceptionally high degree of fire risk or an exceptionally
high concentration of combustible or flammable content, the Authority may increase
the requirement of Table 3.3.1 (a).
Buildings having a height of more than 20 m shall be constructed with
The fire resistance ratings of various building components shall conform to ASTM
standards.
Part 3
3-91
No building or portion thereof shall be designated a given construction type unless

it fully conforms to the minimum requirements for that Construction type.
When a type of construction is utilized which is superior than the type of
construction required by this Code, there shall be no requirement to upgrade the
rest of the construction to comply to that higher type of construction and the
designated construction type shall be that of the lesser classification, unless all of the
requirements for the higher classification are met.
3.1.2
Group I. Non-combustible Construction

Buildings or portion thereof in Non-combustible Construction Group I are those in
which the walls, exit-ways, shafts, structural members, floors, and roofs are
constructed of non-combustible materials and assemblies having fire-resistance
ratings specified in Table 3.3.1 (a). The Non-combustible group consists of
Construction Type I-A, I-B, I-C, I-D and I-E.
3.1.2.1
Construction Type I-A

This construction type includes buildings in which the bearing walls and other
major structural elements are generally of four-hour-fire-resistance rating.
3.1.2.2
Construction Type I-B

major structural elements are generally of three-hour-fire-resistance rating.
3.1.2.3
Construction Type I-C

major structural elements are generally of two-hour-fire-resistance rating.
3.1.2.4
Construction Type I-D

major structural elements are generally of one-hour-fire-resistance rating.
3.1.2.5
Construction Type I-E

major structural elements generally have no fire-resistance rating.
3.1.3
Group II. Combustible Construction

Buildings or portion thereof in Combustible Construction Group II are those in
which the walls, exit-ways, shafts, structural members, floors, and roofs are
constructed wholly or partly of combustible materials having fire-resistance ratings
specified in Table 3.3.1 (b). The Non-combustible group consists of Construction
Type II-A, II-B, II-C, II-D and II-E.
3.1.3.1
Construction Type II-A

This Construction type includes heavy timber construction in which fire-resistance is
attained by-
Part 3
3-92
3.1.3.2
i.
Limiting the minimum sizes of wood structural members and the minimum
thickness and composition of wood floors and roofs;
ii.
Avoiding concealed spaces under floors and roofs or by providing firestopping protection for these spaces; and
iii.
Using fastening, construction details, and adhesives for structural members

as required by this chapter and Part 4.
iv.
The minimum dimensions for framing members shall be prescribed in this

chapter and Part 4, except that members are protected to provide a fireresistance rating of at least one hour need not comply with this requirement.
Construction Type II-B

This Construction type includes buildings and portion thereof in which-
3.1.3.3
i.
Exterior walls, fire walls, exit-ways, and shaft enclosures are of noncombustible materials having the required fire-resistance ratings; and
ii.
The floors, roofs and interior framing are wholly or partly of wood of smaller
dimensions than required for type II-A construction, or are of other
combustible or non-combustible materials, having the required fireresistance rating.
Construction Type II-C

This Construction type includes buildings and portion thereof in which
3.1.3.4
i.
Exterior walls, fire walls, exit ways, and shaft enclosures are of noncombustible materials having the required fire-resistance ratings; and
ii.
The floors, roofs and interior framing are wholly or partly of wood of smaller
dimensions than required for type II-A construction, or are of other
combustible or non-combustible materials, having no required fire-resistance
rating.
Construction Type II-D

This Construction type includes buildings and portion thereof in which exterior
walls, bearing walls, floors, roofs, and interior framings are generally of wood or
other combustible materials having the required fire-resistance ratings.
3.1.3.5
Construction Type II-E

This Construction type includes buildings and portion thereof in which
i.
The exterior walls are generally of wood or other combustible materials

having the required fire-resistance ratings, and
ii.
In which the bearing walls, floors, roofs, and interior framing are of wood or
other combustible materials, generally having no fire-resistance ratings.
Part 3
3-93
Part 3
3-94
3.1.4
Separated Occupancy and Construction

When two or more occupancies accommodated in a building, each such occupancy
shall be separated according to the provisions specified in Sec 2.3 of Chapter 2 of
Part 3 and Table 3.2.1.
When two or more types of construction used within a building, the entire building
shall be subject to the most restrictive construction type and shall comply with FAR
restrictions as per provisions of this code.
However if the Occupancies within the different Types of Construction are
completely separated by construction that meets the fire-resistance rating
Part 3
3-95
requirements for fire separation listed in Table 3.2.1 of Chapter 1, Part 3 then each
Occupancy so separated may, for the purpose of this Code, be considered as
separate building section.
3.1.4.1
Restriction for mixed construction

In buildings of mixed construction, no structural element shall be supported by
construction having a lower fire-resistance rating than that required for the element
being supported.
3.1.5
Fire Zones
The planning and development authority of the city, township, municipality or
region where this Code is intended to be implemented shall divide the area under
their jurisdiction into distinct fire zones. The basis for this zoning shall be the fire
hazard inherent in the buildings and the degree of safety desired for the occupancy
accommodated therein. The number of zones in an area shall depend on its size and
the strategies undertaken for its development.
3.1.5.1
Fire Zone 1
The following occupancy groups shall comprise this zone:
Occupancy A: Residential
Occupancy B: Educational
Occupancy C: Institutional for Care
Occupancy D: Health Care
Occupancy E: Offices
Occupancy F: Mercantile
Occupancy H: Livestock Storage Building
Occupancy I: Assembly
Occupancy K:K1 & K2 Parking
Occupancy M: Miscellaneous Buildings
3.1.5.2
Fire Zone 2
The following occupancy groups shall comprise this zone:
Occupancy G: Industrial Buildings
Occupancy H: Storage Buildings
Occupancy K: K3 Parking
3.1.5.3
Fire Zone 3
The only occupancy falling in this zone shall be Occupancy J, Hazardous Buildings
Part 3
3-96
3.1.5.4
Change in Fire Zone Boundaries

The demarcations of fire zones may be changed or new occupancies may be included
in any fire zone through the same procedure as for promulgating new rules or
ordinances or both.
3.1.5.5
Buildings on Overlapping Fire Zones

Buildings falling on more than one fire zones shall be considered to be situated on
the zone in which the major portion of the building falls. If a building is divided
equally between more than one fire zones, it shall be considered as falling in the fire
zone having more hazardous occupancy buildings.
3.1.5.6
Restrictions on Temporary Constructions

Permission may be granted by the Authority for temporary constructions only in fire
zones 1 and 2 and not in fire zone 3. Such temporary constructions shall adhere to
the conditions of the permission and shall be demolished and removed completely
after the expiry of the duration of the permission unless it is extended by the
Authority or a new permission is obtained.
3.1.6
3.1.6.1
Permissible Types of Construction for Various Occupancies

New Buildings
Types of constructions permitted for various buildings on the basis of fire zones are
specified in Table 3.2.4.
3.1.6.2
Existing Buildings
Existing buildings in any fire zone need not comply with the provision of this Code
for type of construction unless they are altered or in the opinion of the Authority
they constitute a hazard to the safety to the occupants of the buildings or the
adjacent properties.
3.1.7
Exterior Walls
The fire resistance rating of the exterior walls shall conform to the provisions set
forth in Table 3.2.2 and 3.2.3.
3.1.8
Basement Floor
Basement floor of a building shall be enclosed with a one hour fire resistive
construction. Doors in such constructions shall be made of noncombustible
materials.
3.1.9
Restricting Horizontal and Vertical Spread of Fire

Generally Walls restrict horizontal movement and slabs restrict Vertical movement
of fire
3.1.9.1
Interior or Barrier or enclosure wall

Propagation of fire, smoke, gas or fume through the openings or shafts or
penetrationsof fire resistive floors and walls shall be restricted by sealing with an
approved material which shall have a fire resistance rating of at least equal to that of
Part 3
3-97
the floor-wall assembly. The sealing material shall be capable of preventing passage
of flameand hot gases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when tested in accordance
with ASTM E119-8.
3.1.9.2
Exterior Walls
Permitted unprotected openings in the exterior wall in two consecutive floors lying
within 1.5 m laterally or vertically shall be separated with flame barriers as similar
as sunshades or cornices or projected wall at least 750mm from the external face of
the exterior wall. The flame barrier shall have a fire resistance rating of not less than
three-fourths hour.
3.1.10
Exceptions to Fire Resistance Requirements

The provisions of this section are exceptions to the occupation separation
requirements of Table 3.2.1.
3.1.10.1 Fixed Partitions

a. Stores and Offices: In such cases where offices, stores and similar places
occupied by one tenant are separated by non-load bearing walls that do not form
a corridor serving an occupant load, the partition walls may be constructed of
any one of the following:
i.
Noncombustible materials;
ii.
Fire retardant treated wood;
iii.
One hour fire resistive construction;
iv.
Wood panels or similar light construction up to three fourths the height

of the room in which placed; and
v.
Wood panels or similar light construction more than three-fourths the

height of the room in which placed with not less than upper one fourth of
the partition constructed of glass.
b. Hotels and Apartments: In such cases where non-load bearing walls act as
interior partitions in individual dwelling units in apartment houses and guest
rooms or suites in hotels when such dwelling units, guest rooms or suites are
separated from each other and from corridors by not less than one-hour fireresistive construction, the partition walls may be constructed of any one of the
following:
i.
Noncombustible materials of fire retardant treated wood in buildings of

any type of construction; or
ii.
Combustible framing with noncombustible materials applied to the

framing in buildings of Type II construction.
c. Folding, Portable or Movable Partitions: Folding, portable or movable

partitions need not have a fire resistance rating if the following conditions are
satisfied:
i.
Required exits are not blocked without providing alternative conforming

exits;
Part 3
3-98
ii.
Tracks, guides or other approved methods are used to restrict their

locations; and
iii.
Flammability shall be limited to materials having a flame-spread

classification as set forth in Tables 3.3.2 and 3.3.3 for rooms or areas.
Class
Table 3.3.2
Flame Spread Classification
Flame spread Index
I
II
III
0-25
26-75
76-200
d. Walls Fronting on Streets or Yards: For walls fronting on a street or yard having
a width of at least 12 m, certain elements of the wall may be constructed as
follows regardless of their fire-resistive requirements:
i.
Bulkheads below show windows, show window frames, aprons and

show-cases may be of combustible materials provided the height of such
construction does not exceed 5 m above grade.
ii.
Wood veneer of boards not less than 25 mm in nominal thickness or

exterior type panels not less than 10 mm in nominal thickness may be
used in walls provided:
a.
the veneer does not extend beyond 5 m above grade; and
b.
The veneer is placed either directly against noncombustible

surface or furred out from such surfaces not to exceed 40 mm
with all concealed spaces fire blocked.
e. Trim: Wood may be used to construct trim, picture moulds, chair rails,
baseboards, handrails and show window backing. If there is no requirement for
using fire protected construction, unprotected wood doors and windows may be
used.
f.
Loading Platform: Noncombustible construction of heavy timber may be used

for exterior loading platforms with wood floors not less than 50 mm in nominal
thickness. Such wood construction shall not be carried through the exterior
walls.
g. Insulating Boards: Combustible finished boards may be used under finished

flooring.
3.1.11
Shaft Enclosures
3.1.11.1 General
Construction requirement for shafts through floors shall conform to the provisions
of Table 3.3.1 (a) and (b).
Part 3
3-99
3.1.11.2 Extent of Enclosures

Shaft enclosures shall extend from the lowest floor opening through successive floor
openings and shall be enclosed at the top and bottom.
Exceptions:
i.
Shafts need not be enclosed at the top if it extends through or to the underside of
the roof sheathing, deck or slab.
ii.
Noncombustible ducts carrying vapours, dusts or combustion products may

penetrate the enclosure at the bottom.
iii.
Shafts need not be enclosed at the bottom when protected by fire dampers
conforming to "Test Methods for Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers" ,installed
at the lowest floor level within the shaft enclosure.
3.1.11.3 Special Provision

In groups other than Occupancies C and D, openings which penetrate only one floor
and are not connected with any other floor or basement and which are not concealed
within building construction assemblies need not be enclosed.
3.1.11.4 Protection of Openings
Openings in shaft enclosures shall be protected with a self-closing or an automaticclosing fire assembly having a fire resistance rating of
i.
one hour for one hour fire resistive walls
ii.
one and one-half hours for two hour fire resistive walls
3.1.11.5 Rubbish and Linen Chute Termination Rooms:

Rubbish and linen chute shall terminate in rooms separate from the remaining of the
building having the same fire resistance as required for shafts in Table 3.3.1 (a) and
(b) but not less than one hour.
3.1.12
Expansion and Contraction Joints

Expansion and contraction joints provided to accommodate expansion, contraction,
wind or seismic movement shall be protected with an approved material having the
same degree of fire resistance as that of the wall or floor in which it is installed.
3.1.13
Weather Protection
3.1.13.1 Weather Resistive Barrier:

All weather exposed surfaces shall have a weather barrier to protect the interior wall
from damping. Such weather barriers shall have a fire resistance rating of at least
equal to that of the wall or floor on which it is applied. Weather resistive barrier
need not be used in the following cases:
When exterior covering is of approved waterproof panels
In back plastered construction
When there is no human occupancy
Over water repellent panel sheathing
Part 3
3-100
Under approved paper backed metal or wire fabric lath

Behind lath and Portland cement plaster applied to the underside of roof and eave
projections.
3.1.13.2 Flashing and Counter Flashing
Exterior openings exposed to the weather shall be flashed to make them weather
proof. There shall be copings with all parapets. Corrosion resistant metals shall be
used for flashing, counter flashing and coping.
3.1.13.3 Waterproofing Weather-exposed Areas
Waterproofing shall be applied to exposed surfaces like balconies, external stairways
and landings.
3.1.13.4 Damp-proofing Foundation Walls
Outside of foundation walls enclosing a basement floor below finished grade shall
be damp-proofed from outside.
3.1.14
Members Carrying Walls

All members carrying masonry or concrete walls shall be fire protected as specified
in Table 3.3.1 (a) and (b).
3.1.15
Parapets
Parapets constructed on exterior wall of a building shall have the same degree of fire
resistance required for the wall upon which they are erected and there shall be
noncombustible faces on the side adjacent to the roof surface for the uppermost 405
mm including counter flashing and coping materials. The height of the parapet shall
be at least 750 mm from the upper surface of the roof.
3.1.16
Projections
Sunshades, cornices, projected balconies and overhanging beyond walls of Type I
construction shall be of noncombustible materials. Projections from walls of Type II
may be of combustible or noncombustible materials.
3.1.17
Guards and Stoppers

3.1.17.1
Guards
Guards or Guardrails shall be provided to protect edges of floor, roof, roof openings,
stairways, landings and ramps, balconies or terraces and certain wall, which are
elevated more than 750 mm above the grade and as per provisions of this code.
3.1.17.2
Stoppers
Stopper shall be provided in open parking garages located more than 450mmabove
the adjacent grade or back to back parking stall. The height of the stopper shall be at
least 300 mm and it shall be positioned at outer edgesof acar parking stall.
Part 3
3-101
3.1.18
Insulation
The provisions of this section are applicable to thermal and acoustical insulations
located on or within floor-ceiling and roof ceiling assemblies, crawl spaces, walls,
partitions and insulation on pipes and tubing.
Materials used for such insulation and covering shall have a flame spread rating not
more than 25 and a smoke density not more than 450.
3.1.19
Atrium
3.1.19.1 General
Atrium may be provided in all groups other than Occupancy J (Hazardous
Buildings). Such atrium shall have a minimum opening and are as specified in Table
3.3.4.
Table 3.3.4
Atrium Opening and Area
Height in stories
Minimum Clear
Minimum Area
Opening
m
m
2-4
6
40
5-7
9
90
8 or more
12
160
1 The specified dimensions are the diameters of inscribed circles
whose centers fall on a common axis for the full height of the
atrium.
3.1.19.2 Smoke Control System
A mechanically operated air-handling system shall be installed to exhaust the smoke
either entering or developed within the atrium.
a. Exhaust Openings: The location of the exhaust openings shall be in the
ceiling or in a smoke trap area immediately adjacent to the ceiling of the
atrium above the top of the highest portion of door openings into the atrium.
b. Supply Openings: Supply openings designed for a minimum of 50 per cent
of the exhaust volume shall be located at the lowest level of the atrium.
Supply air may be introduced by gravity provided the height of the atrium is
not more than 18 m and smoke control is established. For atria having height
greater than 18 m, supply air shall be introduced mechanically from the floor
of the atrium and directed vertically toward the exhaust outlets.
Supplemental air supply may be introduced at upper levels in atrium over
six storeys in height or when tenant spaces above the second storey are open
to the atrium.
c. Automatic Operation: The smoke control system for the atrium shall be
activated automatically by the automatic sprinkler system or smoke detectors
installed within the atrium or areas open to the atrium.
d. Manual Operation: The smoke control system shall also be manually
operable for use by the fire department. The smoke control system may be
Part 3
3-102
separate from or integrated with other air handling systems. Air handling
systems interfering with the smoke control system shall be shut down
automatically when the smoke control system is activated.
e. Smoke Detector Location: Smoke detectors which will automatically operate
the smoke control system of the atrium shall be accessible for maintenance,
testing and servicing. Their locations shall be as follows:
i. At the atrium ceiling, spaced in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
ii. On the underside of projections into the atrium, in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
iii. Around the perimeter of the atrium opening on all floors open to the
atrium. These detectors shall be spaced no more than 9 m on centre and
shall be located within 5 m of the atrium opening.
iv. If projected beam type smoke detectors are used, they shall be installed
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
f.
Enclosure of Atrium:Atrial shall be separated from the adjacent spaces with

fire resistive separation of at least one hour.
Fire windows may be provided in fixed glazed openings when the window
has a fire resistive rating of at least three-fourths hour and the area of the
opening does not exceed 25 per cent of the wall common to the atrium and
the room into which the opening is provided.
3.1.20
Mezzanine Floors
Construction of a mezzanine floor shall conform to the requirements of the main
floor in which it is constructed but the fire resistance rating need not exceed one
hour for unenclosed mezzanines.
Part 3
3-103
Appendix A
Fire Drill and Evacuation Procedure

A1
INTRODUCTION
Each and every building shall have an emergency evacuation protocol, first aid firefighting plan, training
and responsibilities of the occupants complemented with the provisions provided therein.
A2
EVACUTION PLAN
The egress system of a building shall be designed for systematic evacuation. The evacuation procedure of a
building is developed considering the fire design scenario. At the time of occurrence of fire the area of
incident shall be evacuated first and the probability of aggravation of fire beyond the area of incident shall
get the priority and so on. All evacuation procedures shall be performance based and documented as a fire
protection and evacuation in a manual with description in vernacular with appropriate diagrams. This
document shall be distributed among the occupants.
The fire protection and evacuation manual shall be approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
A3
FIRE REPORTING
Any occupant of a building discovered smoke or fire shall immediately act without any delay through
manual call points or voice communication system or as per instruction provided thereof. Buildings where
provisions of manual call points are not applicable occupant shall report directly to the fire service and civil
defense department.
A4
FIRST AID FIREFIGHTING

All occupants of buildings shall be trained for first aid firefighting where the equipment is installed to do
so.
A5
Part 4
A 4. 1
Buildings of Occupancy groups of Mercantile, Office, Industrial, Institutions of care shall have
formation of teams of first aid firefighters, evacuation leaders among the employees for each shift
of work schedule. List of such team members shall be submitted to the authorities having
jurisdiction with proper identification and the consent letter of the person, volunteered to perform
the responsibility in case of any emergency.
A 4. 2
Buildings of occupancy group of healthcare facilities shall have special formation of first aid
firefighter and evacuation leaders among all the doctors and the nursing and management staffs
complying with the performance based design scenarios and number of ambulatory patients to be
relocated.
A 4. 3
Buildings of occupancy group of Educational facilities shall have schemes at all levels to train all
students by forming first aid firefighting team including evacuation procedure. Duties and
responsibilities during any emergency situation.
FIRE DRILL
A 5. 1
Fire drill shall be conducted as per design scenarios in presence of the representative of
the authority having jurisdiction.
A 5. 2
The essence of a fire drill is orderly evacuation training not the time of evacuation.
A 5. 3
Simulation fire drill is an accepted method in health facilities and institution for care
occupancy group where patients or inmates shall not participate in evacuation drill only
the staff and all attending personnel shall follow the fire drill manual.
A 5. 4
Training of first aid firefighting is a part of fire drill.
Fire Protection
4-63
Part 4
Fire Protection
A 5. 5
A log book shall be maintained where each and every fire drill shall be recorded and duly
signed by the representative of the authorities having jurisdiction.
A 5. 6
Frequencies of fire drills shall be decided by the authorities having jurisdiction.

Recommended minimum frequency of fire drill shall be as follows:
Fire Drill Frequency
Occupancy Group
A: Residential
B: Educational Facilities
C: Institution for Care
D: Health Facilities
E: Business
F: Mercantile
G:Industrial Building
I: Assembly
J: Hazardous Building
K: Garage
M: Miscellaneous
A6
PRIVATE FIRE BRIGADE

In any private industrial zone or industrial park or any community of business or mercantile or private
housing society intends to establish a private fire bridge for advanced firefighting (more than first aid
firefighting) shall follow the guidelines stated below.
A 6.1
A 6.2
A 6.3
A 6.4
A 6.5
A 6.6
A 6.7
4-64
Frequency
Yearly
Monthly
Yearly
Quarterly
Twice a year
Yearly
As per laws of the land
Yearly
Yearly
The formation of such bridge shall be approved by the fire service and civil defense
department.
Organogram of the bridge shall be approved by the authority of jurisdiction.
Staff training of the bridge member shall be done according to the standard and
recommendations of fire service and civil defense department.
The list of equipment to be procured for the bridge shall be approved authority of
jurisdiction.
The size of the bridge depends on the area to be covered.
Attending any fire call the bridge shall inform instantaneously to the fire service and civil
defense department.
The formation of first aid firefighting and evacuation team of the inmates of the building
shall not be exempted by establishing such bridge.
Appendix B
Fire Protection Considerations for Venting in Industrial and Storage Buildings
B.1
SCOPE
B1.1
This appendix covers venting requirements in industrial buildings. Provisions contained herein shall be
applicable to factory and storage facilities requiring large floor areas without dividing walls and enclosures.
B1.2
This appendix shall not apply to ventilation designed for personnel comfort, commercial cooking operation,
regulating odor or humidity in toilet and bathing facilities, to regulate cooling equipment.
B1.3
This appendix shall apply to fire and smoke of two criteria (a) Fire or smoke layer that does not enhance the
burning rate. (b) Deflagration
B2 VENTING OF FIRE AND SMOKE THAT DOES NOT ENHANCE THE BURNING RATE
B2.1
Precise venting shall be based on fire dynamics and needs detail calculation, considering variables like rate
of combustion, composition of the combustion product, shape, size and packaging of the combustible
materials as well the size, height and disposition of the stacks of materials are involved with it.
B2.2
Vent system designs shall be computed by calculating the vent area required to achieve a mass rate of flow
through the vent that equals the mass rate of smoke production.
B2.3
Venting devices are to be so designed and installed that they operate automatically at the earliest sign of fire
or smoke.
B2.4
The smoke and fire venting system shall be so designed and installed as to keep the temperature of the
combustion product as low as possible, preferably below 150oC.
B2.5
To achieve full efficiency in vents total area of all vents must be more than the inlet area for cold air. Ideally
the inlets should be as close to the floor level as possible.
B2.6
The area of unit vent shall not exceed 2d2, where d is the design depth of the smoke layer. For vents with
length to width ratio more than two, the width shall not exceed the design depth of the smoke layer.
B2.7
The center-to-center spacing of vents within a curtained area shall not exceed 2.8 H, where H is the ceiling
height. For different shape of the roof the ceiling height can be calculated as per provision of NFPA 204.
B2.8
The spacing of vents shall be such that the horizontal distance from any point on a wall or draft curtain to
the center of the nearest vent, within a curtained area does not exceed 1.4 H.
B2.9
The total vent area per curtained area shall be sized to meet the design objectives and the performance
objectives relative to the design fire or smoke, determined in accordance with NFPA 204.
B2.10
The design of venting for sprinkled building shall be based on performance analysis acceptable to the
authority having jurisdiction, demonstrating that the established objectives are met.
B2.11
Smoke and heat venting systems and mechanical exhaust systems shall be inspected and maintained in
accordance with NFPA 204.
B2.12
Venting systems are complement to fire extinguishing system. Where automatic sprinklers are installed as
fire extinguishing system, the sprinklers shall operate before the vent system comes into operation.
B2.13
In industrial buildings exterior wall windows alone shall not be accepted as satisfactory means of venting,
but may be reckoned as additional means of venting when located close to the eaves and are provided with
ordinary glass or movable section arranged for both manual and automatic operation.
Part 4
Fire Protection
4-65
Part 4
Fire Protection
B2.14
Vents shall be automatic in operation unless where designed specifically for both manual and automatic
operation.
B2.15
Release mechanism of vent closure shall be simple in operation and shall not be dependent on electric
power.
B2.16
The automatic operation of vents can be achieved by actuation of fusible links or other heat or smoke
detectors or by interlacing with the operation of sprinkler system or any other automatic fire extinguishing
system covering the area. The vents can be so designed as to open by counterweights utilizing the force of
gravity or spring loaded level following its release.
B2.17
When vents and automatic sprinklers where installed together, sprinkler shall go into operation first before
vents open, in order to avoid delay in sprinkler operation.
B2.18
Materials used in hinges, hatches and other related parts in vents shall be noncorrosive in nature for long
trouble free operation.
B2.19
Vents shall be properly sited, at the highest point in each area to be covered.
B2.20
If possible, vents shall be sited right on top of the probable risk area to be protected to ensure free and
speedy removal of smoke and other combustion product.
B2.21
Minimum vent opening shall not be less than 1250 mm in any direction.
B2.22
Vent spacing shall be designed considering the fact that higher number of smaller vents is better than
smaller number of large vents.
B 3. DEFLAGRATION VENTING
B3.1
B3.2
B3.3
B3.4
B3.5
B3.6
B3.7
B3.8
B3.9
4-66
Deflagration is the propagation of a fire or smoke at a velocity less than the sound wave. When this velocity
of combustion increased beyond sound velocity then the combustion is said to be detonated and explosion
occurred with the rupture of an enclosure or a container due to the increase of internal pressure from a
deflagration.
The design of deflagration vents and vents closures necessitates consideration of many variables, only some
of which have been investigated in depth. No Venting recommendations are currently available for fastburning gases with fundamental burning velocities greater than 1.3 times that of propane, such as hydrogen.
Recommendations are unavailable and no venting data have been generated that addresses condition that
fast-burning gas deflagrations. The user is cautioned that fast-burning gas deflagrations can readily undergo
transition to detonation.
Deflagration venting is provided for enclosures to minimize structural damage to the enclosure itself and to
reduce the probability of damage to the other structures.
Venting shall be sufficient to prevent the maximum pressure that develops within the enclosure from
exceeding enclosure strength.
The vent area shall be distributed as symmetrically and as evenly as possible.
The need for deflagration vents can be eliminated by the application of explosion prevention techniques
described in NFPA 69.
The vent closure shall be designed to function as rapid as is practical. The mass of the closure shall be as low
as possible to reduce the effects of inertia. The total mass of the moveable part of the vent closure assembly
shall not be exceeded 12.2kg/m2.
When an enclosure is subdivided into compartments by walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings, then each
compartment that contains a deflagration hazard should be provided with its own vent closure(s).
It is possible to isolate hazardous operations and equipment outside of buildings with a pressure resisting
wall which will reduce risk of structural damage. Such operations and equipment may be housed in a single
storey building having appropriate venting facilities and a device to absorb explosion shock from blowing
through the duct back to the building.
Appendices
B3.10
B3.11
B3.12
B3.13
B3.14
B3.15
B3.16
B3.17
B3.18
B3.19
B3.20
Sometimes it may not be possible to house hazardous operations and equipment outside of the building, in
which case the separation from other parts and equipment shall be achieved by pressure resisting walls and
such units shall be ventilated outdoors. If suitable vents are integrated, external walls may be of heavy
construction or of heavy panel which may be blown off easily.
Unobstructed vent opening is the most effective pressure release vent structures.
Explosion relief vents may be provided with open or unobstructed vents, louvers, roof vents, hanger type
doors, building doors, windows, roof or wall panels or marble/fixed sash. Any or more than one of these
may be adopted depending on individual situations and requirements.
Roof vents covered with weather hoods shall be as light as possible and attached lightly, so that it is easily
blown off as and when an explosion occurs.
Doors and windows used as explosion vents shall be so fixed as to open outward. Doors shall be fitted with
friction, spring or magnetic, latches that function automatically at the slight increase in internal pressure.
Placed at the top or bottom, the hinged or projected movable sash shall be equipped with latch or friction
device to prevent accidental opening due to wind action or intrusion. Such latches or locks shall be well
maintained.
Venting shall be so planned as to prevent injury to inmates and damage to enclosure. In populated
locations, substantial ducts or diverts shall be provided to channelize the blast towards a pre-determined
direction.
If explosion are probable within the duct, they shall be equipped with diaphragm to rupture at
predetermined locations. The duct system shall not be physically connected to more than one collector.
Skylight with moveable sash that opens outward or fixed sash having panes of glass or plastic that blow out
readily under pressure from within can be used to supplement wall vents or windows, provided their
resistance to opening or displacement may be kept as low as possible consistent with structural requirement
of the building.
For equivalent explosion pressure release, larger closed vents will be required compared to open vents.
As far as possible hazardous areas shall be segregated be means of fire walls or party walls to prevent
spread of fire.
Bangladesh National Building Code
4-67
Part 4
Fire Protection
This page is intentionally left blank
4-68
Appendix C
Selection and Sitting of Fire Detection System

C1
GENERAL
This appendix provides information for selection and sitting of equipment for fire detection in buildings.
C2
CHOICE OF FIRE DETECTORS

Fire detectors may respond to any one manifestation of combustions such as heat generation, smoke and
flames.
Smoke detectors are not naturally suitable in places where the production process produces smokes.
Application of flame detectors are restricted due to the fact that all combustions do not necessarily
accompany flame and that clear line of sight is desirable as radiation from flames travel in straight lines for
actuation of sensitive element.
No single detector is able to meet the need of all types of fires and all types of occupancies. As such, based
on needs arising out of various situations and occupancies, judicious selection is extremely important for
the reduction of fire hazards.
C 2.1
Heat Detectors
"Point" or "Spot" type detectors are actuated by heat at layer adjacent to it over a limited area. "Line" type
detectors are sensitive to the effect produced by heated gas along any portion of the detector line. Both the
types operate on two broad principles: one, the heat sensitive elements is actuated by temperature rising
beyond a predetermined level; while the second system is actuated by predetermined rate of rise of
temperature.
C 2.2
Flame Detectors
Flame detectors are sensitive to radiation emitted by flames.
Since heat, smoke and flame are produced during a fire, detectors responding to all these are accepted as
general purpose detectors.
Fixed temperature heat detectors are suitable for use where ambient temperatures are high and or may rise
and fall rapidly over a short period.
C 2.3
Rate of Rise Heat Detectors

These are suitable for use where ambient temperatures are low and/or may rise over a wide range slowly.
Abnormally sharp rise in temperature during a fire actuates this alarm. As such it cannot be used with
confidence where ambient temperatures reaches in the neighborhood of 40oC, but are best used where
ambient temperatures are in the range of about 40oC.

C 2.4
Smoke Detectors
Three types of smoke detectors are commonly used. First type is actuated by absorption or scattering of
visible or near-visible light by combustion product and known as "optical detector". The second type is
actuated by the production on ionization current within the detector and referred to as "ionization detector".
The third type is sensitive to carbon monoxide or other products of combustion and is known as "chemically
sensitive detector". In general, these should be used at places where ambient temperature varies between 0o
to 35oC.
C 2.4.1
Part 4
Fire Protection
Optical Smoke Detectors
4-69
Part 4
Fire Protection
Invisible smoke from a clear burning shall not actuate such detectors. But they respond quickly
where smoke is optically dense and as such suitable for use in dust free clean atmosphere. Over a
period of time, due to dust and dirt, the sensitive surface of photo sensitive element and/or
executor lamp of optical detectors may loss its efficiency and as such optical detectors should be
cleaned and maintained regularly.
C 2.4.2 Ionization Chamber Smoke Detectors
These responds quickly to invisible smoke of clear burning, but may not respond to fire producing
dense smoke. These can be used in dust free, humidity controlled area. Smoke and other fumes,
dust including slow accumulated and disturbed aerial dust, fiber, steam and condensation
produced by normal processes and vehicle engines may cause false alarm. Warehouses exposed to
fast air flows can also cause false alarm. Burning of polyvinyl chloride will not sensitize the
detector in time and may provide late warning or no warning at all.
C 2.4.3
C3
Chemically Sensitive Smoke Detectors

Chemically coated sensitive elements react to carbon monoxide or other products of combustion
present in smoke. Dust or moisture adversely affects the sensitive elements and are not very
suitable for residential use.
SITING OF DETECTORS
Considering the prevailing weather condition of the occupancies and the problem of false alarm, the type of
detectors and the area of coverage shall be decided. Area of coverage of detectors is dependent on many
factors. The following aspects shall be taken into considerations in the design of detectors.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
4-70
Various forms of overhead heating

Exhaust air from air cooling equipment blowing out into the room or factory area
Deep beams
Roofs and ceiling of unusual shape
Building with ground areas above 10 m and up to 30 m in height
Staircases
Canteen and Restaurants
Plant Rooms
Ambulant air currents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 5
BUILDING MATERIALS
Chapter 1
SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
1.1 SCOPE
1.2 TERMINOLOGY
5-1
5-1
Chapter 2
BUILDING MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
2.2 MASONRY
2.3 CEMENT AND CONCRETE
2.4 PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE
2.5 BUILDING LIMES
2.6 GYPSUM BASED MATERIALS AND PLASTER
2.7 FLOORING MATERIALS
2.8 STEEL
2.9 TIMBER & WOOD PRODUCTS
2.10 DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
2.11 ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM ALLOYS
2.12 BUILDERS HARDWARE
2.13 ROOF COVERINGS
2.14 PAINTS AND VARNISHES
2.15 SANITARY APPLIANCES AND WATER FITTINGS
2.16 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.17 CGI SHEET ROOFING AND WALLING
5-3
5-4
5-10
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-24
5-39
5-42
5-45
5-47
5-49
5-54
5-60
5-71
5-88
5-i
Vol. 2
Chapter 1
1.1
SCOPE
SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
This part specifies the minimum requirements of materials to be complied with in buildings and works under the
provisions of the Code.
For each of the building materials the applicable standard specifications and test methods are listed. All materials
shall conform to these standards.
The list of standards given in this part of the Code would be augmented from time to time by amendments,
revisions and additions of which the Authority shall take cognizance. The latest version of a specification shall, as
far as practicable, be applied in order to fulfil the requirements of this part.
In view of the limited number of Bangladesh Standards for building materials available at the present time, a
number of standards of other countries have been referenced in this Code as applicable standards. As more
Bangladesh Standards regarding building materials become available, these after adoption by amendment of the
Code, shall supplement and/or replace the relevant standards listed in this part.
1.2
TERMINOLOGY
This section provides an alphabetical list of the terms used in and applicable to this part of the Code. In case of
any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in Part 1, the meaning provided in
this part shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of this part.
Actual dimensions: Measured dimensions of a designated item.
Admixture: Material other than water, aggregate, or hydraulic cement used as an ingredient of concrete and
added to concrete before or during its mixing to modify its properties.
Aggregate, Lightweight: Aggregate with a dry, loose weight of 11.25 kN/m3.
Aggregate: Granular material, such as sand, gravel, crushed stone, crushed brick and iron blast-furnace slag, when
used with a cementing medium forms a hydraulic cement concrete or mortar.
Concrete: A mixture of Portland cement or any other hydraulic cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and
water, with or without admixtures.
Deformed Reinforcement: Deformed reinforcing bars, bar and rod mats, deformed wire, welded smooth wire
fabric and welded deformed wire fabric.
Fibreboard: A fibre-felted, homogenous panel made from lignocellulosic fibres (usually wood or cane) and having
a unit weight of less than 5 kN/m3 but more than 1.6 kN/m3.
Grouted Hollow-unit Masonry: Form of grouted masonry construction in which certain designated cells of hollow
units are continuously filled with grout.
Hardboard: A fibre-felted homogenous panel made from lignocellulosic fibres consolidated under heat and
pressure in a hot press to a density not less than 4.9 kN/m3.
HOLLOW MASONRY Unit: A masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in every plane parallel to the bearing
surface is less than 75 per cent of the gross cross-sectional area in the same plane.
Masonry Unit: Brick, tile, stone, glass-block or concrete-block used in masonry constructions.
Nominal dimensions: Nominal dimensions of masonry units are equal to their specified dimensions plus the
thickness of the joint with which the unit is laid.
Part 5
Building Materials
5-1
Part 5
Building Materials
Particle board: A manufactured panel product consisting of particles of wood or combinations of wood
particles and wood fibres cemented together with synthetic resins or other suitable bonding system by
an appropriate bonding process.
Plain Concrete: Concrete that does not conform to the definition of reinforced concrete.
Plain ReinforcemenT: Reinforcement that does not conform to definition of deformed reinforcement.
Plywood: A built-up panel of laminated veneers
Precast Concrete: Plain or reinforced concrete element cast separately before they are fixed in position.
Prestressed Concrete: Reinforced concrete in which internal stresses have been introduced to reduce
potential tensile stresses in concrete resulting from loads.
Reinforced Concrete: Concrete containing adequate reinforcement, prestressed or non-prestressed, and
designed on the assumption that the two materials act together in resisting forces.
Reinforced Masonry: Form of masonry construction in which reinforcement acting in conjunction with
the masonry is used to resist designed forces.
Reinforcement: Reinforcing bars, plain or deformed, excluding prestressing tendons, bar and rod mats,
welded smooth wire fabric and welded deformed wire fabric used in concrete.
Solid Masonry Unit: A masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in every plane parallel to the bearing
surface is 75 per cent or more of the gross cross-sectional area in the same plane.
Spiral Reinforcement: Continuously wound reinforcement in the form of a cylindrical helix.
Stirrup: Reinforcement used to resist shear and torsion stresses in structural member; typically bars,
wires, or welded wire fabric (smooth or deformed) bent into L, U or rectangular shapes and located
perpendicular to or at an angle to longitudinal reinforcement. (The term "Stirrup" is usually applied to
lateral reinforcement in flexural members and the term "ties" to those in compression members).
Structural GLUED LAMINATED Timber: Any member comprising an assembly of laminations of lumber in
which the grain of all laminations is approximately parallel longitudinally in which the laminations are
bonded with adhesives.
Tendon: Steel element such as wire, cable, bar, rod or strand, or a bundle of such elements, used to
impart prestress to concrete.
Tie: A loop of reinforcing bar or wire enclosing longitudinal reinforcement.
Yield Strength: The stress at which plastic deformation takes place under constant or reduced load.
5-2
Vol. 1
Chapter 2
2.1 GENERAL
BUILDING MATERIALS
Materials used for the construction of buildings shall conform to standard specifications listed in this part of the
Code. Any deviation from the type design or architectural detail from those specified in these standards may be
accepted by the Building Official as long as the materials standards specified therein are conformed with.
2.1.1
New or Alternative Materials
The provisions of this part are not intended to prevent the use of any new and alternative materials. Any such
material may be approved provided it is shown to be satisfactory for the purpose intended and at least the
equivalent of that required in this part in quality, strength, effectiveness, fire resistivity, durability, safety,
maintenance and compatibility.
Approval in writing shall be obtained by the owner or his agent before any new, alternative or equivalent
materials are used. The Building Official shall base such approval on the principle set forth in the previous
paragraph and shall require that specified tests be made (Sec 2.1.4) or sufficient evidence or proof be submitted,
at the expense of the owner or his agent, to substantiate any claim for the proposed material.
2.1.2
Used Materials
The provisions of this partdo not preclude the use of used or reclaimed materials provided such materials meet
the applicable requirements as for new materials for their intended use.
2.1.3
Storage of Materials
All building materials shall be stored at the building site(s) in such a way as to prevent deterioration or the loss or
impairment of their structural and other essential properties (See Part 7, Construction Practices and Safety).
2.1.4
Methods of Test
Every test of material required in this part, or by the Building Official, for the control of quality and for the
fulfillment of design and specification requirements, shall be carried out in accordance with a standard method of
test issued by the Bangladesh Standards and Testing Institution. In the absence of Bangladesh Standards, the
Building Official shall determine the test procedures. Laboratory tests shall be conducted by recognized
laboratories acceptable to the Building Official.
If, in the opinion of the Building Official, there is insufficient evidence of compliance with any of the provisions of
the Code or there is evidence that any material or construction does not conform to the requirements of this
Code, the Building Official may require tests to be performed as proof of compliance. The cost of any such test
shall be borne by the owner.
The manufacturer or supplier shall satisfy himself that the materials conform to the relevant standards and if
requested shall furnish a certificate or guarantee to this effect.
Part 5
Building Materials
5-3
Part 5
Building Materials
2.2 MASONRY
2.2.1
Aggregates
Aggregates for masonry shall conform to the standards listed as follows: ASTM C144 - 04, Aggregates for Masonry
Mortar; ASTM C404 -07, Aggregates for Masonry Grout; ASTM C331 - 05, Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete
Masonry Units (the applicable standards for masonry are listed at the end of this section).
2.2.2
Cement
Cement for masonry shall conform to the standards listed as follows: BDS EN 197-1: 2003Cement Part-1
Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for common cements; or ASTM C150 / C150M - 09, Portland
Cement; ASTM C91 - 05, Masonry Cement; ASTM C595 / C595M - 10, Blended Hydraulic Cements.
2.2.3
Lime
Limes for masonry shall conform to the standards listed as follows: ASTM C5 - 03, Quicklime for Structural
Purposes; ASTM C207 - 06, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
2.2.4
Masonry Units
a) Clay : Masonry units of clay (or shale) shall conform to the standards listed as follows: BDS 208: 1980,
Common Building Clay Bricks (First Revision); BDS 1249:1989, Acid Resistant Bricks; BDS 1250: 1989,
Burnt Clay Facing Bricks; BDS 1263: 1990, Burnt Clay Hollow Bricks for Walls and Partitions; BDS 1264 :
1990, Glossary of terms relating to structural clay products; BDS 1432 : 1993, Burnt clay perforated
building bricks; BDS 1803 : 2008, Specification for Hollow Clay Bricks and Blocks; ASTM C34 09,
Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile; ASTM C212 00(2006), Structural Clay Facing Tile; ASTM C56 09
Structural Clay Non-Load-Bearing Tile; and IS 7556-1975 Burnt Clay Jallies.
b) Concrete: Concrete masonry units shall conform to the standards listed as follows:
BDS EN 771-3: 2009
Specification for masonry units Part: 3 Aggregate concrete masonry

units (dense and lightweight aggregates)
BDS EN 772-1: 2009
Methods of test for masonry units Part 1: Determination of

compressive strength
BDS EN 772-2: 2009
Methods of test for masonry units Part 2: Determination of percentage

area of voids in masonry units (by paper indentation)
BDS EN 772-6: 2009
Methods of test for masonry units Part 6: Determination of bending

tensile strength of aggregate concrete masonry units
BDS EN 772-11: 2009
Methods of test for masonry units Part 11: Determination of water

absorption of aggregate concrete, autoclaved aerated concrete,
manufactured stone and natural stone masonry units due to capillary
action and the initial rate of water absorption of clay masonry units
BDS EN 772-13: 2009
Methods of test for masonry units Part 13: Determination of net and
gross dry density of masonry units (except for natural stone)
BDS EN 772-14: 2009
Methods of test for masonry units Part 14: Determination of moisture

movement of aggregate concrete and manufactured stone masonry units
BDS EN 772-16: 2009

dimensions
BDS EN 772-20: 2009
Methods of test for masonry units Part 20: Determination of flatness of

faces of masonry units
5-4
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
BDS EN 1052-3: 2009
Methods of test for masonry Part 3: Determination of initial shear strength

BDS EN 1745: 2009 Masonry and masonry products Methods for
determining design thermal values
ASTM C90 09
Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units;
ASTM C129 06
Non-Load Bearing Units;
ASTM C90 09
Solid Load-Bearing Units;
ASTM C55 09
Concrete Building Bricks.
c) Others
2.2.5
I.
Calcium Silicate: Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-Lime Brick) shall conform to
ASTM C73 05 standardspecification.
II.
Glazed Masonry Units: Glazed Masonry building units shall conform to the
standards listed as follows: ASTM C126 09, Ceramic-Glazed Structural Clay
Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units; or ASTM C744 09, Prefaced
Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units.
III.
Glass Block: Glass block may be solid or hollow and contain inserts; all mortar
contact surfaces shall be treated to ensure adhesion between mortar and glass.
IV.
Unburnt Clay Masonry Units: Masonry of unburnt clay units including cement
stabilized and lime stabilized blocks shall not be used, in any building more than
one storey in height.
V.
Architectural Terra Cotta: All architectural terra cotta units shall be formed with
a strong homogeneous body of hard-burnt weather-resistant clay which gives
off a sharp metallic ring when struck. All units shall be formed to engage
securely with and anchor to the structural frame or masonry wall.
VI.
Natural Stone: Natural stone for masonry shall be sound and free from loose
friable inclusions. Natural stone shall have the strength and fire resistance
required for the intended use.
VII.
Cast Stone: All cast stone shall be fabricated of concrete or other approved
materials of required strength, durability and fire resistance for the intended
use and shall be reinforced where necessary.
VIII.
AAC Masonry: AAC (autoclaved Aerated Concrete) masonry units shall conform
to ASTM C1386 07 for the strength class specified.
IX.
Ceramic tile: Ceramic tile shall be as defined in, and shall conform to the
requirements of ANSI A137.1:2008
X.
Second Hand Units: Second hand masonry units shall not be used unless the
units conform to the requirements for new units. The units shall be of whole,
sound material and be free form cracks and other defects that would interfere
with proper laying or use. All old mortar shall be cleaned from the units before
reuse.
Mortar
Mortar shall consist of a mixture of cementitious material and aggregates to which sufficient water and approved
additives, if any, have been added to achieve a workable, plastic consistency. Cementitious materials for mortar
5-5
Part 5
Building Materials
shall be one or more of the following: lime, masonry cement, Portland cement and mortar cement. Mortar for
masonry construction other than the installation of ceramic tile shall conform to the requirements of BDS 1303 :
1990 Chemical resistant mortars; BDS 1304:1990 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars; ASTM C270
08a, Mortar for Unit Masonry.
2.2.6
Grout
Grout shall consist of a mixture of cementitious materials and aggregates to which water has been added such
that the mixture will flow without segregation of the constituents. Cementitious materials for grout shall be one
or both of the following: Lime and Portland cement. Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 13 Mpa.
Grout used in reinforced and nonreinforced masonry construction shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
C476 09, Grout for Masonry.
2.2.7
Mortar for Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile
Portland cement mortars for installing ceramic wall and floor tile shall comply with ANSI A 108.1-2005 listed in Sec
2.2.11 and be of the composition specified in Table 5.2.1.
2.2.7.1
Dry-set 6eveling cement mortars.
Premixed prepared 6eveling cement mortars, which require only the addition of water and are used in the
installation of ceramic tile, shall comply with ANSI A118.1-2009. The shear bond strength for tile set in such
mortar shall be as required in accordance with ANSI A118.1-2009. Tile set in dry-set Portland cement mortar shall
be installed in accordance with ANSI A108.5 -1999 (R2005).
2.2.7.2
Latex-modified 6eveling cement mortar.
Latex-modified 6eveling cement thin-set mortars in which latex is added to dry-set mortar as a replacement for all
or part of the gauging water that are used for the installation of ceramic tile shall comply with ANSI A118.4-2009.
Tile set in latex-modified 6eveling cement shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A108.5-2009.
2.2.7.3
Epoxy mortar.
Ceramic tile set and grouted with chemical-resistant epoxy shall comply with ANSI A118.3-2009. Tile set and
grouted with epoxy shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A108.6-2009.
2.2.7.4
Furan mortar and grout.
Chemical-resistant furan mortar and grout that are used to install ceramic tile shall comply with ANSI A118.52009. Tile set and grouted with furan shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A108.8-2009.
2.2.7.5
Modified epoxy-emulsion mortar and grout.
Modified epoxy-emulsion mortar and grout that are used to install ceramic tile shall comply with ANSI A118.82009. Tile set and grouted with modified epoxy-emulsion mortar and grout shall be installed in accordance with
ANSI A108.9-2009.
2.2.7.6
Organic adhesives.
Water-resistant organic adhesives used for the installation of ceramic tile shall comply with ANSI A136.1-2009.
The shear bond strength after water immersion shall not be less than 40 psi (275 kPa) for Type I adhesive and not
less than 20 psi (138 kPa) for Type II adhesive when tested in accordance with ANSI A136.1-2009. Tile set in
organic adhesives shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A108.4-2009.
5-6
Vol. 2
Building Materials
2.2.7.7
Chapter 2
Portland cement grouts.
Portland cement grouts used for the installation of ceramic tile shall comply with ANSI A118.6-2009. Portland
cement grouts for tile work shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A108.10-2009.
2.2.7.8
Mortar for AAC masonry.
Thin-bed mortar for AAC masonry shall comply with Article 2.1 C.1 of TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Mortar used for
the leveling courses of AAC masonry shall comply with Article 2.1 C.2 of TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
Table 5.2.1: Ceramic Tile Mortar Compositions
1
Scratch coat
1 cement; hydrated lime; *
Setting bed and 7eveling coat
4 dry or 5 damp sand

1 cement; 21 hydrated lime;
Walls
5 damp sand to 1 cement;

1 hydrated lime; 7 damp sand
Floors
Ceilings
Setting bed
1 cement;
Scratch coat and sand bed
5 dry or 6 damp sand; or 1

cement; 5 dry or 6 damp sand
1 cement; 21 hydrated lime;
1
10
hydrated lime;
2 12 dry sand or 3 damp sand
Note : *
2.2.8
Lime may be excluded from the mortar if trial mixes indicate that the desired
workability and performance are achieved without lime.
Metal Ties and Anchors
Metal ties and anchors shall conform to the standards listed as follows: ASTM A82 / A82M 07, Wire Anchor and
Ties; and ASTM A1008 / A1008M 10, Sheet Metal Anchors and Ties.
2.2.9
Reinforcement
Reinforcement in masonry shall conform to the standards listed as follows: ASTM A82 / A82M 07, Cold Drawn
Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement; ASTM A615 / A615M 09b, Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars; ASTM
A996 / A996M 09b, Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars; ASTM A996 / A996M 09b, Axle-Steel Deformed and
Plain Bars; ASTM A706 / A706M 09b, Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars; ASTM A767 / A767M 09, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Steel Bars; and ASTM A775 / A775M 07b, Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.
2.2.10
Water
Water used in mortar or grout shall be clean and free of deleterious amounts of acid, alkalis or organic material or
other harmful substances.
2.2.11
Applicable Standards for Masonry
The applicable standards for Masonry are listed below:

BDS EN 197-1:2003
(Reaffirmed 2010)
Cement Part-1 Composition, specifications and conformity

criteria for common cements.
BDS 208 : 2009
Specification for Common Building clay bricks (Third

revision)Specifies the dimensions, quality & strength of common
burnt clay bricks, methods of sampling, testing etc.
BDS 238
Fireclay refractory bricks and shapes for general purposes. This

Standard specifies the requirements for fireclay refractory bricks
5-7
Part 5
Building Materials
and shapes meant for general purpose; the products are

classified in four grades according to the duty for which they are
suitable.
BDS 1249 : 1989
Acid resistant bricks. It specifies the requirements for acidresistant bricks, dimensions, tolerances, test etc.
BDS 1250 : 1990
Burnt clay facing bricks. It specifies the dimensions, quality &

strength of burnt clay facing bricks used in building & other
structure, physical requirements etc.
BDS 1263 : 1990
Burnt Clay hollow bricks for walls & partitions it covers the
dimensions, quality & strength for hollow bricks made from
burnt clay & having perforations through & at right angle to the
bearing surface tests.
BDS 1264 : 1990
Glossary of terms relating to structural clay products. It covers

the definition of common terms applicable to structural clay
products, used in building & civil engineering works.
BDS 1432 : 1993
Burnt clay perforated building bricks. Specifies the requirements

in regard to dimensions, perforations, quality, strength and also
for quality of surface in case of special grade for facing bricks of
perforated burnt clay building bricks for use in walls and
partitions.
BDS 1433 : 1993
Dimensions quantities in general construction work. Specifies

the various dimensional values in S. I units used in general
construction work.
BDS 1803 : 2008
Specification for Hollow Clay Bricks and Blocks
BDS EN 1338: 2009

BDS EN 1339:2009
BDS EN 1340:2009
5-8
Concrete paving blocks Requirements and test methods

Concrete paving flags Requirements and test methods
Concrete kerb units Requirements and test methods
BDS EN 13369: 2009
Common rules for precast concrete products
BDS EN 771-3: 2009
Specification for masonry unitsPart: 3 Aggregate concrete

masonry units (dense and lightweight aggregates)
BDS EN 772-1: 2009

compressive strength
BDS EN 772-2: 2009

percentage area of voids in masonry units (by paper indentation)
BDS EN 772-6: 2009

bending tensile strength of aggregate concrete masonry units
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
BDS EN 772-11: 2009

water absorption of aggregate concrete, autoclaved aerated
concrete, manufactured stone and natural stone masonry units
due to capillary action and the initial rate of water absorption of
clay masonry units
BDS EN 772-13: 2009

net and gross dry density of masonry units (except for natural
stone)
BDS EN 772-14: 2009

moisture movement of aggregate concrete and manufactured
stone masonry units
BDS EN 772-16: 2009

dimensions
BDS EN 772-20: 2009

flatness of faces of masonry units
BDS EN 1052-3: 2009
Methods of test for masonry Part 3: Determination of initial

shear strength
BDS EN 1745: 2009
Masonry and masonry products Methods for determining

design thermal values
ANSI A108.1A2009
Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-set Method, with Portland

Cement Mortar
ANSI A108.1B2009
Installation of Ceramic Tile, quarry Tile on a Cured Portland

Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-set or Latex-portland
Mortar
ANSI
Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile with Portland

Cement Mortar;
A108.1-2009
ASTM A82 / A82M - 07
Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A1008 / A1008M 10
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy
with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake
Hardenable
ASTM A615 / A615M - 09b
Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars

for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A996 / A996M - 09b
Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed

Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A996 / A996M - 09b
Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed
5-9
Part 5
Building Materials
5-10
ASTM A706 / A706M - 09b
Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain

ASTM A183 - 03(2009)
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
ASTM A775 / A775M - 07b
Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars
ASTM C5-03
Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes
ASTM C34 - 09
Standard Specification for Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile
ASTM C55 - 09
Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick
ASTM C56 - 09
Standard Specification for Structural Clay Non load bearing Tile
ASTM C73 - 05
Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Brick (Sand-Lime

Brick)
ASTM C90 - 09
Standard Specification for Load bearing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM C91 - 05
Standard Specification for Masonry Cement
ASTM C126 - 09
Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing

Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units
ASTM C129 - 06
Standard Specification for Non-load bearing Concrete Masonry

Units
ASTM C144 - 04
Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
ASTM C90 - 09
Standard Specification for Load bearing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM C150 / C150M - 09
Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C207 - 06
Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
ASTM C212 - 00(2006)
Standard Specification for Structural Clay Facing Tile
ASTM C270 - 08a
Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
ASTM C331 - 05
Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete

Masonry Units
ASTM C404 - 07
Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout
ASTM C476 - 09
Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry
ASTM C595 / C595M - 10
Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C744 - 09
Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
Silicate Masonry Units
2.3 CEMENT AND CONCRETE

2.3.1
General
Materials used to produce concrete and admixtures for concrete shall comply with the requirements of this
section and those of Chapter 5, Part 6 of this Code.
2.3.2
Aggregates
Concrete aggregates shall conform to the following standards:

BDS 243 : 1963, Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete; ASTM C33 / C33M - 08, Concrete
Aggregates; ASTM C330 / C330M - 09, Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; ASTM C637 - 09,
Aggregates for Radiation-Shielding Concrete; ASTM C332 - 09 , Lightweight Aggregate for Insulating Concrete; IS:
9142 Artificial Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units.
2.3.2.1
Special Tests
Aggregates failing to meet the specifications listed in Sec 2.4.2 shall not be used unless it is shown by special test
or actual service experience to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability and approved by the
Building Official.
2.3.2.2
Nominal Size
Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be larger than:

a)
One-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms; or
b)
One-third the depth of slabs; or
c)
Three fourths the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires, bundles of
bars, or prestressing tendons or ducts.
Exception:
The above limitations regarding size of coarse aggregate may be waived if, in the judgment of the
Engineer, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without
honeycomb or voids.
2.3.3
Cement
Cement shall conform to the following standards: BDS EN 197-1:2003 (Reaffirmed 2010), Cement Part-1
Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for common cements; BDS 612, Sulphate Resisting Portland
Cement-Type A; ASTM C150 / C150M - 09, BDS 232 Portland Cement; ASTM C595 / C595M - 10, Blended
Hydraulic Cements; and to other such cements listed in ACI 318.
2.3.4
Water
Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, alkalies salts, organic
materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or reinforcement.Water shall conform to the
following standards:BDS ISO 12439:2011 Mixing water for concrete.
5-11
Part 5
Building Materials
2.3.4.1
Chloride Ions
Mixing water for prestressedconcrete, or for concrete that will contain aluminiumembededments, including the
portion of mixing water contributed in the form of free moisture on aggregates shall not contain deleterious
amounts of chloride ion. The maximum water-soluble chloride ion concentration in concrete shall not exceed the
limitations specified in Sec 5.5.3 of Part 6.
2.3.4.2
Potability
Nonpotable water shall not be used in concrete unless the following are satisfied:
a) Selection of concrete proportions shall be based on concrete mixes using water from such source.
b) Mortar test cubes made with nonpotable mixing water shall have 7-day and 28-day strengths equal
to at least 90 per cent of strengths of similar specimens made with potable water.
2.3.5
Admixtures
Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior approval by the Building Official and shall comply with
Sec. 2.4.5.1 through 2.4.5.5.Admixtures shall conform to the following standards:
BDS EN 934-1:2008
Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout Part 1: Common requirements
BDS EN 934-2:2008
Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout Part 2: Concrete admixtures

Definitions, requirements, conformity, marking and
2.3.5.1
Chloride
Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride from admixture ingredients shall not be used inprestressed
concrete, concrete containing embedded aluminium in concrete cast against permanent galvanized metal forms,
or in concrete exposed to severe or very severe sulphate-containing solutions (see Sec 5.5.2.1 of Part 6).
2.3.5.2
Standards
Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM C260 - 06. Water-reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures,
accelerating admixtures, water-reducing and retarding admixtures, and water-reducing and accelerating
admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494 / C494M - 10, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete, or ASTM C1017 /
C1017M - 07, Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete.
2.3.5.3
Pozzolanas
Fly ash (Pulverized Fuel Ash) or other pozzolanas used as admixtures shall conform to ASTM C618 - 08a.
2.3.5.4
Blast Furnace Slag
Ground granulated blast-furnace slag used as an admixture shall conform to ASTM C989 - 09a.
2.3.5.5
Pigment for Coloured Concrete
Pigment for integrally coloured concrete shall conform to ASTM C979 - 05.
2.3.6
Metal Reinforcement
Reinforcement and welding of reinforcement to be placed in concrete shall conform to the requirements of this
section.
a)
5-12
Deformed Reinforcement : Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to the following standards;BDS
ISO 6935-2:2010 (1st revision), Steel for the reinforcement of concrete - Part-2: Ribbed bars;
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
Reinforcement conforming to the ASTM, Standards: A615 / A615M, Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel
Bars; A616M, Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars; A617M, Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars;
A706M, Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars; A767M, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars; and A775M,
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel.
Deformed reinforcing bars with a specified yield strength exceeding 410 MPa may be used,
provided shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 per cent and the bars otherwise
conform to ASTM standards noted above. Fabricated deformed steel bar mats conforming to ASTM
A184 / A184M - 06 and deformed steel wire complying with ASTM A496 / A496M - 07 may be used.
Deformed wire for concrete reinforcement shall not be smaller than size D4 (Nominal diameter : 5.72
mm), and for wire with a specified yield strength , exceeding 410 MPa
shall be the stress
corresponding to a strain of 0.35 per cent.
Welded deformed steel wire fabric conforming to ASTM A497 / A497M - 07 may be used; for a wire
with a specified yield strength exceeding 410 MPa, shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of
0.35 per cent. Welded intersections shall not be spaced farther apart than 400 mm in direction of
calculated stress, except for wire fabric used as stirrups.
b) Plain Reinforcement : Plain reinforcement shall conform to the following BDS and ASTM
standards. BDS ISO 6935-1:2010 (1st revision); ASTM A615 / A615M - 09b; ASTM A996 / A996M - 09b
andASTM A996 / A996M - 09b. Steel welded wire, fabric plain reinforcement conforming to ASTM
A185 / A185M - 07 may be used, except that for wire with a specified yield strength exceeding 410
MPa, shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 per cent. Welded intersections shall not be
spaced farther apart than 300 mm in direction of calculated stress, except for wire fabric used as
stirrups.
Smooth steel wire conforming to ASTM A182 / A182M - 09a may be used in concrete; except that for
a wire with a specified yield strength exceeding 410 MPa, shall be the stress corresponding to a
strain of 0.35 per cent.
c) Cold-worked Steel Reinforcement : Cold-worked steel high strength bars shall conform to IS
1786 : 1985 or BS 4461 : 1978.
d) PrestressingTendons : Wire, strands and bars for tendons in prestressed concrete shall conform
to BDS : 240, Plain Cold Drawn Steel Wire; ASTM A416 / A416M - 06, Steel Strand Uncoated SevenWire Stress Relieved; ASTM A421 / A421M - 05, Uncoated Stress Relieved Steel Wire; and ASTM A722
/ A722M - 07, Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bar.
Wires, strands and bars not specifically listed in the above standards may be used, provided they
conform to minimum requirements of these specifications and do not have properties that make
them less satisfactory than those listed.
e) Stuctural Steel, Steel Pipe or Tubing : Structural steel used with reinforcing bars in
compositecompression members meeting the requirements of the Code shall conform to ASTM A36
/ A36M - 08, Structural Steel; ASTM A242 / A242M - 04(2009), High Strength Low-Alloy Structural
Steel; ASTM A572 / A572M - 07, High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel; and ASTM
A588 / A588M - 05, High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel.
Steel pipe or tubing for composite compression members composed of a steel-encased concrete core
meeting the requirements of this Code shall conform to ASTM A53 / A53M - 07, Pipe, Steel, Black
and Hot Dipped Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless; ASTM A500 / A500M - 10 Cold-Formed Welded
and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; and ASTM A501 - 07, HotFormed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
5-13
Part 5
Building Materials
2.3.7
Applicable Standards
Materials used in concrete shall comply with the applicable standards listed below.
5-14
BDS
279:1963
Specification for Abrasion of Coarse Aggregates by Use of Los

Angeles Machine (under revision);
BDS
281:1963
Specification for Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete (under

revision);
BDS
921:1980
Specification for Standard Sand for Testing of Cement;
BDS
240:1963
Specification for Plain Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Prestressed

Concrete;
BDS
243:1963
Specification for Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources

for Concrete;
BDS ISO 1920-8: 2010
Testing of Concrete Part 8: Determination of drying

shrinkage of concrete for samples prepared in the field or in
the laboratory
BDS ISO 1920-9: 2010
Testing of Concrete Part 9: Determination of creep of

concrete cylinders in compression
BDS ISO 1920-10: 2011
Testing of Concrete Part 10: Determination of static

modulus of elasticity in compression
BDS ISO 22965-1: 2008
Concrete Part 1: Methods of specifying and guidance for the

specifier
BDS ISO 22965-2: 2008
Concrete Part 2: Specification of constituent materials,

production of concrete and compliance of concrete
ASTM C31 / C31M - 09
Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens

in the Field
ASTM C39 / C39M - 09a
Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens
ASTM C42 / C42M - 04
Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
Sawed Beams of Concrete
ASTM C78 - 09
Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using

Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C94 / C94M - 09a
Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C172 - 08
Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C192 / C192M - 07
Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens

in the Laboratory
ASTM C317 / C317M 00(2005)
Standard Specification for Gypsum Concrete
Vol. 2
Building Materials
2.3.8
Chapter 2
ASTM C496 / C496M 04e1
Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens
ASTM C617 - 09a
Standard Practice for Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
ASTM C685 / C685M - 10
Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching

and Continuous Mixing
ASTM C989 - 09a
Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and

Mortars
Concrete Pipe and Precast Sections
Concrete pipes and precast sections shall conform to the standards listed below :
BDS 1626:1999
Concrete pipes (with and without) reinforcement
ASTM C14M - 07
Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm

Drain, and Culvert Pipe (Metric)
ASTM C76M - 10a
Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm

Drain, and Sewer Pipe (Metric)
ASTM C361M - 08
Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low-Head

Pressure Pipe (Metric)
ASTM C444M - 03(2009)
Standard Specification for Perforated Concrete Pipe (Metric)
ASTM C478M - 09
Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole

Sections (Metric)
ASTM C507M - 10a
Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert,

Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe (Metric)
ASTM C654M - 05a
Standard Specification for Porous Concrete Pipe (Metric)
ASTM C655M - 09
Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert,

Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe (Metric)
ASTM C1433M - 10
Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic

Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers (Metric)
ASTM C858 - 10
Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility

Structures
ASTM C891 - 09
Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast

Concrete Utility Structures
ASTM C913 - 08
Standard Specification
Wastewater Structures
for
Precast
Concrete
Water
and
5-15
Part 5
Building Materials
2.3.9
ASTM C924M - 02(2009)
Standard Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by LowPressure Air Test Method (Metric)
IS
458:2003
Specification for precast concrete pipes (with and without

reinforcement) (fourth revision)
IS
784:2001
Specification for prestressed concrete pipes (including specials)

(second revision)
IS
1916:1989
Specification for steel cylinder pipewith concrete lining and

coating(first revision)
IS
3597:1998
Methods of test for concrete pipes (second revision)
IS
4350:1967
Specification for concrete porous pipes for under drainage
IS
7319:1974
Specification for perforated concrete pipes
IS
7322:1985
Specification for specials for steel cylinder reinforced concrete

pipes (first revision)
Asbestos Cement Products
Asbestos cement products shall conform to the following standards:
5-16
BDS
428:1964
Specification for Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes (under revision);
BDS
429:1964
Specification for Asbestos Cement Building and Sanitary Pipes

(under revision);
BDS
430:1964
Specification for Asbestos Cement Corrugated Sheets for Roofing

and Cladding (under revision);
BDS
431:1964
Specification for Asymmetrical Section Corrugated Sheets in

Asbestos Cement for Roofing and Cladding (under revision);
BDS
579:1966
Specification for Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets (under revision);
BDS
1046:1983
Specification for Asbestos Cement Products-Corrugated Sheets and

Fittings for Roofing and Cladding;
ASTM C222 - 97(2008)
Standard Specification for Asbestos-Cement Roofing Shingles
ASTM C223 - 98(2008)
Standard Specification for Asbestos-Cement Siding
ASTM C500 - 07
Standard Test Methods for Asbestos-Cement Pipe
ASTM C508 / C508M 00(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Asbestos-Cement Underdrain Pipe
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
ASTM C663 - 98(2008)
Standard Specification for Asbestos-Cement Storm Drain Pipe
ASTM C875 - 98(2008)
Standard Specification for Asbestos-Cement Conduit
ASTM C966 - 98(2008)
Standard Guide for Installing Asbestos-Cement Nonpressure Pipe
2.4 PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE

2.4.1
Concrete for Pre-stressed Concrete
Cement and concrete required for pre-stressed concrete are elaborately described in section 2.3 of this part. BDS
and other standards for concrete as a material are also contained in the same section.
2.4.2
Steel for Pre-stressed Concrete
Steel and tendons for pre-stressed concrete along with the BDS and other standard requirements are included in
section 2.8 of this part.
Steel material for pre-stressed concrete shall also conform the following standards.
BDS ISO 6934 - 1 : 2008
Steel for the prestressing of concrete - Part 1: General

requirements
BDS ISO 6934 - 2 : 2008
Steel for the prestressing of concrete - Part 2 Cold-drawn wire
BDS ISO 6934 - 3 : 2008
Steel for the prestressing of concrete - Part 3 Quenched and

tempered wire
BDS ISO 6934 - 4 : 2008
Steel for the prestressing of concrete - Part 4 Strand
BDS ISO 6934- 5: 2008
Steel for the prestressing of concrete - Part 5 Hot-rolled steel

bars with or without subsequent processing
BDS ISO 6935 (Part-1): 2010

(1st revision)
Steel for the re-enforcement of concrete - Part-1: Plain bars
BDS ISO 6935 (Part-2): 2010

(1st revision)
Steel for the reinforcement of concrete - Part-2: Ribbed bars
BDS ISO 6935 (Part-3): 2006
Steel for the reinforcement of concrete - Part-3: Welded

Fabric. Specifies technical requirements for factory made
sheets or rolls welded fabric manufacture from steel wires or
bars with diameters from 4 mm to 16 mm and designed for
reinforcement in ordinary concrete structured and for nonprestressed reinforcement in prestressed concrete structures.
BDS ISO 10065: 2006
Steel bars reinforcement of concrete Bend and Rebend tests
BDS ISO 15835-1:2010
Steel for the reinforcement of concrete Reinforcement

couplers for mechanical splices of bars Part 1: Requirements
5-17
Part 5
Building Materials
BDS ISO 15835-2:2010
Steel for the reinforcement of concrete Reinforcement

couplers for mechanical splices of bars Part 2: Test methods
BDS ISO 10144:2006
Certification scheme for steel bars and wires for the

reinforcement of concrete structures.
BDS ISO 15630-1 : 2008
Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete

Test methods Part 1: Reinforcing bars, wire rod and wire
BDS ISO 15630-2 : 2008

Test methods Part 2: Welded fabric
BDS ISO 15630-3 : 2008

Test methods Part 3: Prestressing steel
BDS ISO 16020 : 2008

Vocabulary
2.5 BUILDING LIMES

2.5.1
Types of Lime
According to the degree of calcinations, slaking and setting actions and depending upon the nature and amount of
foreign matters associated with, the limes are classified as:
i. High calcium, fat, rich, common or pure lime
ii. Lean, meager or poor lime
iii. Hydraulic or water lime
2.5.2
Properties of Lime
A good lime shouid: slake readily in water, dissolve in soft water, free from fuel ashes and unburntparticles and
have good setting poer under water.
Building limes shall comply with the following ASTM standard specifications: ASTM C206 - 03, Finishing Hydrated
Lime; ASTM C207 - 06, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; ASTM C141 / C141M - 09, Hydraulic Hydrated Lime
for Structural Purposes; ASTM C977 - 03, Quicklime and Hydrated Lime for Soil Stabilization; and ASTM C5 - 03,
Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
The following Indian Standards may also be accepted for lime concrete and testing of building limes:
5-18
IS
712:1984
Specification for building limes (third revision)
IS
1624:1986
Method of field testing of building lime (first revision)
IS
712- 1984
Specification for building limes (third revision)
IS
1624 1986
Method of field testing of building lime ( first revision )
IS
2686-1977
Specification for Cinder Aggregates for Use in Lime Concrete

(First Revision);
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
IS
3068-1986
Specification for Broken Brick (burnt clay) Coarse Aggregates for

Use in Lime Concrete (Second Revision);
IS
3115-1992
Specification for Lime-based Blocks (Second Revision);
IS
3182-1986
Specification for Broken Brick (burnt clay) Fine Aggregates for

Use in Lime Mortar (second revision)
IS
4098-1983
Specification for Lime-Pozzolana Mixture (First Revision);
IS
4139-1989
Specification for Sand-lime Bricks (SecondRevision);
IS
6932 (Parts I to
X - 1973; Part XI-1983)
Method of Tests for Building Limes.
IS
10360-1982
Specification for Lime-Pozzolana Concrete Blocks for Paving;
IS
10772-1983
Specification for quick setting lime pozzolana mixture
IS
12894-2002
Specification for pulverized fuel ash lime bricks (First Revision)
2.6 GYPSUM BASED MATERIALS AND PLASTER

2.6.1
Gypsum Board
Gypsum wallboard, gypsum sheathing, gypsum base for gypsum veneer plaster, exterior gypsum soffitboard,
predecorated gypsum board or water-resistant gypsum backing board complying with the standards listed below
2.6.2
Gypsum Plaster
A mixture of calcined gypsum or calcined gypsum and lime and aggregate and other approved materials as
specified in this code.
2.6.3
Gypsum Veneer Plasteer
Gypsum plaster applied to an approved base in one or more coats normally not exceeding 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in
total thickness.
2.6.4
Cement Plaster
A mixture of portland or blended cement, portland cement or blended cement and hydrated lime, masonry
cement or plastic cement and aggregate and other approved materials as specified in this code.
Gypsum building materials shall conform to the standards listed below.
ASTM C22 / C22M 00(2005)e1
Standard Specification for Gypsum
ASTM C28 / C28M - 00(2005)
Standard Specification for Gypsum Plasters
5-19
Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM C35 - 01(2009)
Standard Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in

Gypsum Plaster
ASTM C1396 / C1396M - 09a
Standard Specification for Gypsum Board
ASTM C59 / C59M - 00(2006)
Standard Specification for Gypsum Casting Plaster and

Gypsum Molding Plaster
ASTM C1396 / C1396M - 09a
ASTM C317 / C317M 00(2005)
Standard Specification for Gypsum Concrete
ASTM C1396 / C1396M - 09a
ASTM C471M - 01(2006)e1
Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Gypsum and

Gypsum Products [Metric]
ASTM C472 - 99(2009)
Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum,

Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete
ASTM C473 - 09
Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel

Products
ASTM C474 - 05
Standard Test Methods for Joint Treatment Materials for

Gypsum Board Construction
ASTM C587 - 04
Standard Specification for Gypsum Veneer Plaster
ASTM C1396 / C1396M - 09a
ASTM C1396 / C1396M - 09a
IS
Specification for Non-Load Bearing Gypsum Partition Blocks

(Solid and Hollow Types)
2849-1983
2.7 FLOORING MATERIALS

2.7.1
General
Flooring materials are generally of two types; precast systems like tiles, bricks and cast insitu.
2.7.2
Concrete/Terrazzo Tiles
Concrete/Terrazzo tiles shall have good abrasion and impact resistance properties. Factors such as the type of
cement and the type and grading of aggregate used influence the resistance of such tiles to chemicals including
cleaning agents. Terrazzo tiles shall have a wear layer after grinding at least 6 mm composed of graded marble
chipping in white, tinted or grey Portland cement on a layer of fine concrete. They may be ground after
manufacture to expose the marble aggregate and subsequently grouted. Slip resisting grits may be incorporated.
These tiles shall conform to BDS EN 13748-1:2008 Terrazzo tiles Part 1: Terrazzo tiles for internal use; BDS EN
13748-2:2008 Terrazzo tiles Part 2: Terrazzo tiles for external use; BDS 1262 : 1990 Clay flooring tiles; BDS 1248
5-20
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
: 1989 Ceramic Unglazed Vitreous acid resistant tiles or IS : 1237-1980, Specification for Cement Concrete Flooring
Tile.
2.7.3
Asphalt Tiles/Flooring
Asphalt tiles/floorings are suitable for industrial flooring in areas where they will not be exposed to solvents,
grease, oil, corrosive chemicals and excessive heat. Bitumen mastic for flooring shall conform to IS: 1195-1978; IS :
8374-1977, Bitumen Mastic, Anti-static and Electrically Conducting Grade and IS : 9510-1980, Bitumen Mastic Acid
Resisting Grade.
2.7.4
Mosaic Tiles
Mosaic tiles of a variety of shapes and sizes may be used. Thickness of the wear layer is dependent on the sizes of
marble chips but shall not be less than 6 mm thick. The tiles shall be wet cured for sufficient time before laying
so that their surfaces are not damaged during grinding and polishing.
2.7.5
Clay Tile
Clay floor tiles shall have sufficient strength and abrasion resistant characteristics to withstand the impact and
abrasion they are likely to be subject to. When glazed earthenware tiles are used in flooring they shall conform to
IS : 777:1970, Glazed Earthenware Tiles.
2.7.6
Vinyl Tiles
The vinyl tiles shall consist of a thoroughly blended composition of thermoplastic binder, asbestos fibre, fillers and
pigments. The thermoplastic binder shall consist substantially of either or both of the following:
a) vinyl chloride polymer
b)vinyl chloride copolymers.
The polymeric material shall be compounded with suitable plasticizers and stabilizers. The tiles may be plain,
patterned or mottled. The thickness shall not be less than 1.5 mm.
2.7.7
Rubber Tiles
These tiles are composed of natural, synthetic or reclaimed rubber, or a combination of these,with reinforcing
fibres, pigments, and fillers, vulcanized and moulded under pressure. The tiles shall have excellent resilience and
resistance to indentation, and good resistance to grease, alkali and abrasion. The thickness shall not be less than 2
mm.
2.7.8
2.7.9
Cast Insitu Floor Coverings

a)
Terrazzo : Terrazzo is a marble mosaic with Portland cement matrix and is generally composed of two
parts marble chips to one part Portland cement. Colour pigments may be added. The thickness of
terrazzo topping may vary from 13 mm to 19 mm and may be applied to green concrete of the floor
or bonded with neat Portland cement, or over a sand cushion placed on the concrete floor.
b)
Concrete : A concrete topping may be applied to a concrete structural slab before or after the base
slab has hardened. Integral toppings may generally be 25 mm to 40 mm thick; independent toppings
about 25 mm to 50 mm thick. Aggregate sizes shall not exceed 6 mm.
Other Flooring Materials
Other flooring materials i.e. bricks, natural stone, etc. showing satisfactory performance in similar situations may
be allowed. Plastic flooring tile and ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resistant tiles, if used, shall conform to IS :
3464 and IS : 4357 respectively.
5-21
Part 5
Building Materials
Flooring compositions complying with IS : 657, Materials for Use in the Manufacture of Magnesium Oxychloride
Flooring Composition; and IS: 9197, Epoxy Resin Composition for Floor Topping may be allowed. Linoleum sheets
and tiles shall conform to IS : 653.
Flooring materials shall also conform to the standards listed below.
BDS 1248 : 1989
Ceramic Unglazed Vitreous acid resistant tilesIt covers the

requirements for ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resistant
tiles used in laying of floors & lining of tanks subjected to
corrosive conditions. Manufacture, Finish, Tests etc.
BDS 1262 : 1990
Clay flooring tilesIt specifies the requirements for dimensions,

quality & strength for clay flooring tiles & different types of
tests.
BDS ISO 10545 1 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Sampling and basis for acceptance. Specifies

rules
for
batching,
sampling,
inspection
and
acceptance/rejection of ceramic tiles.
BDS ISO 10545 2 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of dimensions and surface

quality Specifies methods for determining the dimensional
characteristics (length, width, thickness, straightness of sides,
rectangularity, and surface flatness) and the surface of
ceramic tiles.
BDS ISO 10545 3 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of water absorption, apparent

porosity, apparent relative density and bulk density.
Specifies methods for determining water absorption,
apparent porosity, apparent relative density and bulk density
of ceramic tiles.
BDS ISO 10545 4 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of modulus of rupture and

breaking strength
Defines a test method for determining the modulus of
rupture and breaking strength of all ceramic tiles.
BDS ISO 10545 5 : 2005
Ceramic tiles, Determination of impact resistance by

measurement of coefficient of restitution
Specifies methods for determining the impact resistance of
ceramic tiles by measuring the coefficient of restitution.
BDS ISO 10545 6 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of resistance to deep abrasion

for unglazed tiles.
BDS ISO 10545 7 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of resistance to surface abrasion

for glazed tiles.
Specifies a method for determining the resistance to surface
5-22
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
abrasion of all glazed ceramic tiles used for floor covering.

BDS ISO 10545 8 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of linear thermal expansion
Defines a test method for determining the coefficient of

linear thermal expansion of ceramic tiles.
BDS ISO 10545 9 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of resistance to thermal shock.

Defines a test method for determining the resistance to
thermal shock of all ceramic tiles under normal conditions of
use.
BDS ISO 10545 10 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of moisture expansion.

Specifies a method for determining the moisture expansion of
all ceramic tiles.
BDS ISO 10545 11 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of crazing resistance for glazed

tiles.
Defines a test method for determining the crazing resistance
of all glazed ceramic tiles except when the crazing is an
inherent decorative feature of the product.
BDS ISO 10545 12 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of frost resistance.

Specifies a method for determining the frost resistance of all
ceramic tiles intended for use in freezing conditions in the
presence of water.
BDS ISO 10545 13 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of chemical resistance.
Specifies a test method for determining the chemical

resistance of all ceramic tiles at room temperature. The
method is applicable to all types of ceramic tiles.
BDS ISO 10545 14 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of resistance to stains.
Specifies a method for determining the resistance to stains of

the proper surface of ceramic tiles.
BDS ISO 10545 15 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of lead and cadmium given off

by glazed tiles.
Specifies a method for the determination of lead and
cadmium given off by the glaze of ceramic tiles.
5-23
Part 5
Building Materials
BDS ISO 10545 16 : 2006
Ceramic tiles, Determination of small color differences.

Describes a method for utilizing color measuring instruments
for quantifying the small color differences between plain
colored glazed ceramic tiles, which are designed to be
uniform and consistent color It permits the specification of a
maximum acceptable value which depends only on the
closeness of match and not on the nature of the color
difference.
BDS EN 490: 2008
Concrete roofing tiles and fittings for roof covering and all
cladding Product specifications.
BDS ISO 13006 : 2006
Ceramic tiles Definitions, Classification, Characteristics and

Marking.
This Bangladesh Standard defines terms and establishes
classifications characteristics and marking requirements for
ceramic tiles of the best commercial quality (first quality).
BDS EN 491: 2008
Concrete roofing tiles and fittings for roof covering and wall
cladding Test methods
BDS EN 538: 2008
Clay roofing tiles for discontinuous laying Flexural strength

test
BDS EN 5391: 2008
Clay roofing tiles for discontinuous laying Determination of

physical characteristics Part 1: Impermeability test
BDS EN 1024: 2008

geometric characteristics
BDS EN 1304: 2008
Clay roofing tiles and fittings Product definitions and

specifications
BDS EN 137481: 2008
Terrazzo tiles Part 1: Terrazzo tiles for internal use
BDS EN 137482: 2008
Terrazzo tiles Part 2: Terrazzo tiles for external use
2.8 STEEL
2.8.1
Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing steel shall comply with the requirements specified in Sec 2.4.6 in this Part.
2.8.2
Structural Steel
Structural steel shall conform to Bangladesh Standards BDS 878 : 1978, Specification for Weldable Structural
Steels; BDS 1355 : 1992, Dimensions and Properties of Hot Rolled Steel Beam, Column, Channel and Angle
Sections. Where Bangladesh standards are not available, the relevant standards listed below shall be applicable.
5-24
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
BDS 1429:1993
Light gauge steel sections
BDS ISO 2566-1:2008
Steel Conversion of elongation values Part 1: Carbon

and low alloy steels
BDS ISO 2566-2:2008
Steel - Conversion of elongation values - Part 2: Austenitic

steels
BDS ISO 657-1:2008
Hot-rolled steel sections - Part 1: Equal-leg angles

Dimensions
BDS ISO 657-2:2008
Hot-rolled steel sections - Part 2: Unequal-leg angles

Dimensions
BDS ISO 657-5:2008
Hot-rolled steel sections -Part V Equal-leg angles and

unequal leg angles Tolerances for metric and inch series
BDS ISO 657-11:2008
Hot-rolled steel sections Part 11: Sloping flange channel

sections (Metric series) Dimensions and sectional
properties
BDS ISO 657-15:2008
Hot-rolled steel sections - Part 15 Sloping flange beam

sections (Metric series) - Dimensions and sectional
properties
BDS ISO 657-16:2008
Hot-rolled steel sections Part 16: Sloping flange column

sections (metric series) Dimensions and sectional
properties
BDS ISO 657-18:2008
Hot-rolled steel sections Part 18: L sections for

shipbuilding (metric series) 104 Dimensions, sectional
properties and tolerances
BDS ISO 657-19:2008
Hot-rolled steel sections Part 19: Bulb flats (metric series)

Dimensions, sectional properties and tolerances
BDS ISO 657-21:2008
Hot-rolled steel sections - Part 21 T-sections with equal

depth and flange width - Dimensions
BDS ISO 10474:2008
Steel and steel products Inspection documents
BDS ISO 14284:2008
Steel and iron Sampling and preparation of samples for

the determination of chemical composition
BDS ISO 9769:2008
Steel and iron Review of available methods of analysis
BDS ISO 6929:2008
Steel products Definition and classification
BDS ISO 20723:2008
Structural steels Surface condition of hot-rolled sections

Delivery requirements
5-25
Part 5
Building Materials
5-26
BDS ISO 24314:2008
Structural steels Structural steels for building with

improved seismic resistance Technical delivery conditions
BDS ISO 404:2008
Steel and steel productsGeneral technical delivery

requirements
BDS ISO 1127: 2006
Stainless steel tubes - Dimensions, tolerances and

conventional masses per unit length.
BDS ISO 4200: 2006
Plain end steel tubes, welded and seamless - General tables

of dimensions and masses per unit length.
BDS ISO 6761:2008
Steel tubes Preparation of ends of tubes and fittings for

welding
ASTM A27 / A27M - 08
Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General

Application
ASTM A36 / A36M - 08
Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A48 / A48M - 03(2008)
Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A53 / A53M - 07
Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A148 / A148M - 08
Standard Specification for Steel Castings, High Strength, for

Structural Purposes
ASTM A242 / A242M 04(2009)
Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural

Steel
ASTM A252 - 98(2007)
Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe

Piles
ASTM A283 / A283M 03(2007)
Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile

Strength Carbon Steel Plates
ASTM A307 - 07b
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60

000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A325 - 09ae1
Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat

Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A325M - 09
Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat

Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength [Metric]
ASTM A336 / A336M - 09
Standard Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure

and High-Temperature Parts
ASTM A653 / A653M - 09a
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A449 - 07b
Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs,

Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength, General Use
ASTM A490 - 09
Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat

Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A500 / A500M - 10
Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and

Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
Shapes
ASTM A501 - 07
Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
ASTM A514 / A514M 05(2009)
Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched

and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding
ASTM A529 / A529M 05(2009)
Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese

Steel of Structural Quality
ASTM A563 - 07a
Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A563M - 07
Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

[Metric]
ASTM A1011 / A1011M - 10
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,

Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High
Strength
ASTM A572 / A572M - 07
Standard Specification for High-Strength

Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel
ASTM A588 / A588M - 05
Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural

Steel, up to 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point, with
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
ASTM A606 / A606M - 09a
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, HighStrength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with
Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
ASTM A1008 / A1008M - 10

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy
with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake
Hardenable
ASTM A618 / A618M - 04

High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing
Low-Alloy
5-27
Part 5
Building Materials
2.8.3
ASTM A666 - 03
Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked

Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
ASTM A668 / A668M 04(2009)
Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy,

for General Industrial Use
ASTM A690 / A690M - 07
Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Nickel,

Copper, Phosphorus Steel H-Piles and Sheet Piling with
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance for Use in Marine
Environments
ASTM A852 / A852M 03(2007)
Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered LowAlloy Structural Steel Plate with 70 ksi [485 MPa] Minimum
Yield Strength to 4 in. [100 mm] Thick
Steel Plate, Sheet and Strips
These shall conform to the following standards.
5-28
BDS
868 : 1978
Code of Practice for Galvanized Corrugated Sheet Roof and Wall

Coverings;
BDS
1122 : 1985
Specification for Hot-dip Galvanized Steel Sheet and Coil;
BDS ISO 9328-1:2009
Steel flat products for pressure purposes Technical delivery

conditions Part 1: General requirements
BDS ISO 9328-2:2009

conditions Part 2: Non-alloy and alloy steels with specified
elevated temperature properties
BDS ISO 9328-3:2009

conditions Part 3: Weldable fine grain steels, normalized
BDS ISO 9328-4:2009

conditions Part 4: Nickel-alloy steels with specified low
temperature properties
BDS ISO 9328-5:2009

conditions Part 5: Weldable fine grain steels, thermo
mechanically rolled
BDS ISO 9328-6:2009

conditions Part 6: Weldable fine grain steels, quenched and
tempered
BDS ISO 9328-7:2009

conditions Part 7: Stainless steels
BDS ISO 4995:2006
Hot-rolled steel sheet of structural quality
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
BDS ISO 7452:2008
Hot-rolled structural steel plates Tolerances on dimensions and

shape
BDS ISO 7778:2008
Steel plate with specified through-thickness characteristics
BDS ISO 7788:2008
Steel Surface finish of hot-rolled plates and wide flats Delivery

requirements
BDS ISO 9034:2008
Hot-rolled structural steel wide flats Tolerances on dimensions

and shape
BDS ISO 9364:2011
Continuous hot-dip aluminium/zinc coated steel sheet of

commercial, drawing and structural qualities
BDS ISO 16160:2011
Continuously hot-rolled steel sheet products Dimensional and

shape tolerances
BDS ISO16162:2011
Continuously cold-rolled steel sheet products Dimensional and

shape tolerances
BDS ISO 16163:2011
Continuously hot-dipped coated steel sheet products

Dimensional and shape tolerances
IS
412 : 1975
Specification for Expanded Metal Steel Sheets for General

Purposes (Second Revision);
IS
1079 : 1994
Specification for hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip (fifth
revision)
IS
4030 : 1973
Specification for Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Strip for General

Engineering Purposes (First Revision);
IS
7226 : 1974
Specification for Cold-Rolled Medium, High Carbon and Low-Alloy

Steel Strip for General Engineering Purposes;
IS
3502 : 1994
Specification for steel chequered plates (second revision)
ASTM A109 / A109M - 08
Standard Specification for Steel, Strip, Carbon (0.25 Maximum

Percent), Cold-Rolled
ASTM A123 / A123M - 09
Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A167 - 99(2009)
Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
ASTM A176 - 99(2009)
Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
ASTM A240 / A240M - 10
Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel

Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for
5-29
Part 5
Building Materials
General Applications
5-30
ASTM A263 - 09
Standard Specification for Stainless Chromium Steel-Clad Plate
ASTM A264 - 09
Specification for Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel-Clad Plate
ASTM A285 / A285M 03(2007)
Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel,

Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength
ASTM A328 / A328M - 07
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Piling
ASTM A1008 / A1008M 10

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
ASTM A414 / A414M - 10
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and HighStrength, Low-Alloy for Pressure Vessels
ASTM A424 / A424M 09a
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling
ASTM A929 / A929M 01(2007)
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the

Hot-Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe
ASTM A463 / A463M 09a
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the

Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A480 / A480M - 10
Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled

Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
ASTM A505 - 00(2005)
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Alloy, Hot-Rolled

and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for
ASTM A506 - 05
Standard Specification for Alloy and Structural Alloy Steel, Sheet

and Strip, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled
ASTM A507 - 10
Standard Specification for Drawing Alloy Steel, Sheet and Strip,

Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled
ASTM A653 / A653M 09a
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A568 / A568M 09a
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and

High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General
Requirements for
ASTM A577 / A577M 90(2007)
Standard Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of

Steel Plates
ASTM A578 / A578M - 07
Standard Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination

of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
Vol. 2
Building Materials
2.8.4
Chapter 2
ASTM A879 / A879M - 06
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the

Electrolytic Process for Applications Requiring Designation of the
Coating Mass on Each Surface
ASTM A599 / A599M - 07
Standard Specification for Tin Mill Products, Electrolytic TinCoated, Cold-Rolled Sheet
ASTM A606 / A606M 09a
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength,

Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
ASTM A635 / A635M 09b
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness

Coils, Hot-Rolled, Alloy, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength LowAlloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
General Requirements for
ASTM A653 / A653M 09a

ASTM A653 / A653M 09a

ASTM A666 - 03
Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic

Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
ASTM A690 / A690M - 07
Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Nickel,

Copper, Phosphorus Steel H-Piles and Sheet Piling with
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance for Use in Marine
Environments
ASTM A775 / A775M 07b
Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars
ASTM A792 / A792M 09a
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc AlloyCoated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A857 / A857M - 07
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Piling, Cold Formed, Light

Gage
ASTM A875 / A875M 09a
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-5 % Aluminum AlloyCoated by the Hot-Dip Process
Steel Pipe, Tube and Fittings
These items shall conform to the following standards :

BDS ISO 49:2008
Malleable cast iron fittings threaded to ISO 7-1
BDS ISO 3545-3:2008
Steel tubes and fittings Symbols for use in specifications Part

3: Tubular fittings with circular cross-section
5-31
Part 5
Building Materials
5-32
BDS ISO 4144:2008
Pipe work Stainless steel fittings threaded in accordance with

ISO 7-1
BDS ISO 4145:2008
Non-alloy steel fittings threaded to ISO 7-1
BDS ISO 3419:2008
Non alloy and alloy steel buttwelding fittings
BDS ISO 5251:2008
Stainless steel buttwelding fittings
ASTM A53 / A53M - 07

ASTM A105 / A105M - 09
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping

Applications
ASTM A106 / A106M - 08
Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for HighTemperature Service
ASTM A134 - 96(2005)
Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over)
ASTM A139 / A139M - 04
Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded Steel

Pipe (NPS 4 and Over)
ASTM A181 / A181M - 06
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for GeneralPurpose Piping
ASTM A182 / A182M - 09a
Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless

Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for
High-Temperature Service
ASTM A234 / A234M - 07
Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon

Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature
Service
ASTM A252 - 98(2007)
Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe

Piles
ASTM A254 - 97(2007)
Standard Specification for Copper-Brazed Steel Tubing
ASTM A268 / A268M - 10
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic and

Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service
ASTM A269 - 10
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic

Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service
ASTM A270 - 03a(2008)e1

Stainless Steel Sanitary Tubing
ASTM A312 / A312M - 09
Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

ASTM A333 / A333M - 10
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for

Low-Temperature Service
ASTM A334 / A334M - 04a
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Carbon and

Alloy-Steel Tubes for Low-Temperature Service
ASTM A403 / A403M - 09
Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel

Piping Fittings
ASTM A420 / A420M - 07
Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon

Steel and Alloy Steel for Low-Temperature Service
ASTM A423 / A423M - 09
Standard Specification for Seamless and Electric-Welded LowAlloy Steel Tubes
ASTM A450 / A450M - 09
Standard Specification for General Requirements for Carbon

and Low Alloy Steel Tubes
ASTM A500 / A500M - 10
Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
ASTM A501 - 07

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
ASTM A522 / A522M - 07
Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled 8 and 9% Nickel

Alloy Steel Flanges, Fittings, Valves, and Parts for LowTemperature Service
ASTM A524 - 96(2005)
Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for

Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures
ASTM A530 / A530M - 04a
Standard Specification for General

Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe
ASTM A589 / A589M - 06
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Carbon Steel

Water-Well Pipe
ASTM A618 / A618M - 04

High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing
ASTM A632 - 04(2009)

Stainless Steel Tubing (Small-Diameter) for General Service
ASTM A707 / A707M 02(2007)
Standard Specification for Forged Carbon and Alloy Steel

Flanges for Low-Temperature Service
ASTM A733 - 03(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples
Requirements
for
5-33
Part 5
Building Materials
2.8.5
ASTM A778 - 01(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic

Stainless Steel Tubular Products
ASTM A807 / A807M 02(2008)
Standard Practice for Installing Corrugated Steel Structural

Plate Pipe for Sewers and Other Applications
ASTM A865 / A865M - 06
Standard Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel
Pipe Joints
Steel Bars, Wire and Wire Rods
These shall conform to the following standards.
5-34
BDS ISO 1035-1:2006
Hot-rolled steel bars-Part 1: Dimensions of round bars.
BDS ISO 1035-2:2006
Hot-rolled steel bars-Part 2: Dimensions of square bars.
BDS ISO 1035-3:2006
Hot-rolled steel bars-Part 3: Dimensions of flat bars.
BDS ISO 1035-4:2006
Hot-rolled steel bars-Part 4: Tolerances.
BDS ISO 4951-1:2008
High yield strength steel bars and sections Part 1: General

delivery requirements
BDS ISO 4951-2:2008
High yield strength steel bars and sections Part 2: Delivery

conditions for normalized, normalized rolled and as-rolled
steels
BDS ISO 4951-3:2008
High yield strength steel bars and sections Part 3: Delivery

conditions for thermo mechanically-rolled steels
ASTM A29 / A29M - 05
Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, HotWrought, General Requirements for
ASTM A49 - 01(2006)
Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Carbon Steel Joint

Bars, Microalloyed Joint Bars, and Forged Carbon Steel
Compromise Joint Bars
ASTM A108 - 07
Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, ColdFinished
ASTM A116 - 05
Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated, Steel Woven Wire

Fence Fabric
ASTM A185 / A185M - 07
Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,

Plain, for Concrete
ASTM A227 / A227M - 06
Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Cold-Drawn for
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
Mechanical Springs
ASTM A228 / A228M - 07
Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Music Spring Quality
ASTM A229 / A229M 99(2005)
Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Oil-Tempered for

Mechanical Springs
ASTM A276 - 08a
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
ASTM A311 / A311M - 04
Standard Specification for Cold-Drawn, Stress-Relieved Carbon

Steel Bars Subject to Mechanical Property Requirements
ASTM A322 - 07
Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades
ASTM A108 - 07
Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, ColdFinished
ASTM A368 - 95a(2009)
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire Strand
ASTM A434 - 06
Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought or

Cold-Finished, Quenched and Tempered
ASTM A475 - 03(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand
ASTM A478 - 97(2008)
Standard Specification for Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel

Weaving and Knitting Wire
ASTM A479 / A479M - 10
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for

Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels
ASTM A492 - 95(2009)
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Rope Wire
ASTM A499 - 89(2008)
Standard Specification for Steel Bars and Shapes, Carbon Rolled

from T Rails
ASTM A510 - 08
Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods

and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel
ASTM A575 - 96(2007)
Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant

Quality, M-Grades
ASTM A576 - 90b(2006)
Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought,

Special Quality
ASTM A580 / A580M - 08
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire
ASTM A586 - 04a(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Parallel and Helical Steel

Wire Structural Strand
ASTM A603 - 98(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire

Rope
5-35
Part 5
Building Materials
2.8.6
ASTM A627 - 03
Standard Test Methods for Tool-Resisting Steel Bars, Flats, and

Shapes for Detention and Correctional Facilities
ASTM A627 - 03
Standard Test Methods for Tool-Resisting Steel Bars, Flats, and

Shapes for Detention and Correctional Facilities
ASTM A663 / A663M 89(2006)
standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant

Quality, Mechanical Properties
ASTM A666 - 03
Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic

Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
ASTM A706 / A706M - 09b
Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain

ASTM A764 - 07
Standard Specification for Metallic Coated Carbon Steel Wire,

Coated at Size and Drawn to Size for Mechanical Springs
ASTM C933 - 09
Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath
Steel Fasteners
Steel fasteners shall conform to the following standards:
5-36
BDS 1373 : 1992
Slotted countersunk flat head tapping screws
BDS 1374 : 1992
Slotted raised counter
BDS 1375 : 1992
Fasteners hexagon products widths across flats
BDS 1405:1993
Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Accessories Terminology and

Nomenclature
BDS 1406:1993
Hexagon nuts style 2 products grades A and B.
BDS 1407:1993
Hexagon nuts style 3 products grades A and B.
BDS 1408:1993
General purpose screw threads general plan
BDS 1409:1993
General purpose screw threads selected sizes for screws, bolts

and nuts
BDS 1410:1993
Thread run-outs for fasteners thread of BDS 1408: 1995 and
BDS 1411:1993
Tapping screws thread
BDS 1412:1993
Thread undercuts of external metric thread fasteners
BDS 1413:1993
Head configuration and gauging of countersunk head screws
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
BDS 1428 : 1993
Fasteners-bolts, screws, studs

designations of dimensions
ASTM A31 - 04(2009)
Standard Specification for Steel Rivets and Bars for Rivets,

Pressure Vessels
ASTM A183 - 03(2009)
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
ASTM A193 / A193M - 09
Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel

Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure
Service and Other Special Purpose Applications
ASTM A194 / A194M - 10
Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts
for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
ASTM A307 - 07b
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000

PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A320 / A320M - 08
Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel

Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service
ASTM A325 - 09ae1
Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,

120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A354 - 07a
Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel

Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners
ASTM A437 / A437M - 10
Standard Specification for Stainless and Alloy-Steel TurbineType Bolting Specially Heat Treated for High-Temperature
Service
ASTM A449 - 07b
Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs,

Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,
General Use
ASTM A489 - 04e1
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes
ASTM A490 - 09
Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat

Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A502 - 03(2009)
Standard Specification for Rivets, Steel, Structural
ASTM A540 / A540M - 10
Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel Bolting for Special

Applications
ASTM A563 - 07a
Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM C954 - 07
Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application

of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs
and
nuts-symbols
and
5-37
Part 5
Building Materials
from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness
2.8.7
ASTM C955 - 09a
Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial)

Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw
Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases
ASTM F959 - 09
Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct

Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners
ASTM C1002 - 07
Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws

for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster
Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs
ASTM F436 - 09
Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
ASTM F593 - 02(2008)
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap

Screws, and Studs
ASTM F594 - 09
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts
ASTM F844 - 07a
Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat),

Unhardened for General Use
ASTM A574 - 08
Standard Specification for Alloy Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws
ASTM C514 - 04(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum

Board
Welding Electrodes and Wires
Welding electrodes and wires shall conform to the following standards :
5-38
BDS 1442-1:1994
Filler rods and wire for gas shielded arc-welding-Ferric steel
BDS 1442-2:1994
Filler rods and wire for gas shielded arc-welding-Austenitic

stainless steel
BDS 1442-3:1994
Filler rods and wires for gas shielded arc welding-copper and
copper alloy
BDS 1442-4:1994
Filler rods and wires for gas shielded arc welding-Aluminium

and Aluminium alloy and magnesium alloys
BDS 1442-5:1994
Filler rods and wires for gas shielded arc welding-Nickel and
nickel alloys
IS 814 - 1991
Specification for covered electrodes for manual metal arc

welding of carbon and carbon manganese steel (fifth revision)
IS
Classification and Coding of Covered Electrodes for Metal Arc

Welding of Structural Steels (Second Revision);
815-1974
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
IS
1278-1972
Specification for Filler Rods and Wires for Gas Welding (Second
Revision);
IS
1395-1982
Specification for Low and Medium Alloy Steel Covered

Electrodes for Manual Metal Arc Welding (Third Revision);
IS
3613-1974
Acceptance Tests for Wire Flux Combinations for SubmergedArc Welding of Structural Steel (First Revision);
IS
4972-1968
Specification for Resistance Spot-Welding Electrodes;
IS
6419-1996
Specification for welding rods and bare electrodes for gas

shielded arc welding of structural steel (first revision);
IS
6560-1996
Specification for molybdenum and chromium-molybdenum

low alloy steel welding rods and bare electrodes for gas
shielded arc welding (first revision);
IS
7280-1974
Specification for Base Wire Electrodes for Submerged-Arc

Welding of Structural Steels;
IS
8363-1976
Specification for Bare Wire Electrodes for Electroslag Welding

of Streels;
BDS
239: 1963
Specification for Soft Solder (under revision);
ISO
9453:1990
Soft Solder Alloys-Chemical Compositions and Forms;
ISO
9454:1990
Soft Soldering Fluxes-Classification and Requirements
Part 1 : Classification, Labelling and Packaging;

ISO
9455-1: 1990
Soft Soldering Fluxes- Test Methods

Part 1 : Determination of Non-volatile Matter, Gravimetric
Method;
ISO
9455-8:1991
Soft Soldering Fluxes-Test Methods

Part 8 : Determination of Zinc Content;
ISO
9455-11:1991

Part 11 : Solubility of Flux Residues;
ISO
9455-14:1991

Part 14 : Assessment of Tacriness of Flux Residues.
5-39
Part 5
Building Materials
2.9 TIMBER & WOOD PRODUCTS

2.9.1
Timber Types and Properties
Timber types for the structural purpose with their engineering characteristics are contained in Table 6.11.1 of
Part-6 of this code. Details of the uses of timber in structures or elements of structures including terminology,
material requirements, moisture content preferred cut sizes of sawn timbers, grading, permissible defects,
suitability in respect of durability and treatability, design criteria, and details of joints are also given in Chapter 11
of Part 6. Timber and timber constructions shall satisfy the requirements of that chapter and conform to the
following standards :
2.9.2
BDS
142: 1961
Specification for Wood Doors (under revision);
BDS
173: 1962
Specification for Wood Windows (under revision);
BDS
230: 1962
Glossary of Terms Applicable to Timber, Plywood and Joinery

(under revision);
BDS
803:1973
Trade Names and Abbreviated Symbols for Timber Species;
BDS
819:1975
Code of Practice for Preservation of Timber;
BDS
820:1978
Recommendation for Maximum Permissible Moisture Content

of Timber used for Different Purposes in Bangladesh;
BDS
857:1977
Specification for Grading Rules for Logs and Sawn Timbers;
BDS
1090:1984
Methods of Test for Plywood;
BDS
1256:1990
Classification of Commercial Timber;
BDS
1311:1990
Key for Identification of Commercial Timber.
Plywood
A wood structural panel comprised of plies of wood veneer arranged in cross-aligned layers. The plies are bonded
with waterproof adhesive that cures on application of heat and pressure.
Plywood shall conform to the following standards:
BDS
799:1983
Specification for Plywood for General Purposes (First Revision);
BDS
1158:1986
Specification for Veneered Decorative Plywood;
For sampling and testing of Plywood, the following Bangladesh Standards are applicable :
5-40
BDS
1087:1984
Specification for Method of Sampling of Plywood :
BDS
1090 : 1984
Methods of Test of Plywood.
IS
4990-1993
Specification for plywood for concrete shattering work (second

revision);
Vol. 2
Building Materials
2.9.3
Chapter 2
IS
5509-2000
Specification for fire retardant plywood (second revision);
IS
5539-1969
Specification for Preservative Treated Plywood.
Particle Boards and Fibre Boards
A panel primarily composed of cellulosic materials (usually wood), generally in the form of discrete pieces or
particles, as distinguished from fibers. The cellulosic material is combined with synthetic resin or other suitable
bonding system by a process in which the interparticle bond is created by the bonding system under heat and
pressure.
Fiber boards are fibrous, homogeneous panel made from lignocellulosic fibers (usually wood or cane) and having
a density of less than 497 kg per cubic meter but more than 160 kg per cubic meter.
These materials shall conform to the following standards:
BDS
619:1967
Specification for Particle Board (medium density) (under

revision);
BDS
620:1967
Specification for Hardboard (under revision);
BDS EN 316:2008
Wood Fiberboards Definition, Classification and Symbols
ISO
820:1975
Particle BoardsDefinition and Classification
ISO
821-1975
Particle BoardsDetermination of Dimensions of Test Pieces;
ISO
822:1975
Particle BoardsDetermination of Density;
ISO
823:1975
Particle BoardsDetermination of Moisture Content;
ISO
766: 1972
Fibre Building BoardsDetermination of Dimensions of Test

Pieces;
ISO
767:1975
Fibre Building BoardsDetermination of Moisture Content;
ISO
768:1972
Fibre Building BoardsDetermination of Bending Strength;
ISO
769:1972
Fibre Building BoardsHard and Medium BoardsDetermination

of
Water Absorption and of Swelling in Thickness after Immersion in Water;

ISO
818:1975
Fibre Building BoardsDefinition-Classification;
ISO
819:1975
Fibre Building Boards Determination of Density;
ISO
2695:1976
Fibre Building BoardsHard and Medium Boards for General
Purposes-Quality Specifications-Appearance, Shape and Dimensional Tolerances;

ISO
2696:1976
Fibre Building Boards-Hard and Medium Boards-Quality
5-41
Part 5
Building Materials
Specifications- Water Absorption and Swelling in Thickness;

ISO
3340:1976
Fibre Building Boards-Determination of Sand Content;
ISO
3346:1976
Fibre Building
(roughness);
ISO
3729:1976
Fibre Building Boards-Determination of Surface Stability;
ISO/TR 7469:1981
Boards-Determination
of
Surface
Finish
Dimensional Stability of Hardboards.
Wood based Laminates

Laminated boards having a core of strips, each not exceeding 7 mm in thickness, glued together face to face to
form a slab which in turn is glued between two or more veneers, with the direction of the grainof the core strips
running at right angles to that of the adjacent outer veneers.
Wood based laminates shall conform to the following standards :
IS
3513:1989
Specification for resin treated compressed wood laminates

(compregs):
Part 3 For general purposes (first revision)
IS
3513:1966
Specification for resin treated compressed wood laminates

(compregs):
Part 4 Sampling and Tests
IS
9307-1979
(Parts I to VIII)
Methods of Tests for Wood-based Structural Sandwich

Construction.
Part I
Flexure Test
Part II
Edgewise Compression Test
Part III Flatwise Compression Test

Part IV Shear Test
Part V Flatwise Tension Test
Part VI Flexure Creep Test
Part VII Cantilever Vibration Test
Part VIII Weathering Test
2.9.4
Adhesives and Glues
Adhesives and glues are used to join two or more parts so as to form a single unit.
Adhesives shall conform to the following standards :
5-42
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
IS
848-1974
Specification for Synthetic Resign Adhesives for Plywood

(Phenolic and aminoplastic) (First Revision);
IS
849-1994
Specification for cold setting case in glue for wood (first revision)
IS
851-1978
Specification for Synthetic Resin Adhesives for Construction

Work (non structural) in Wood (First Revision);
IS
852-1994
Specification for animal glue for general wood-working purposes

(second revision);
IS
4835-1979
Specification for Polyvinyl Acetate Dispersion-based Adhesives

for Wood (First Revision);
IS
9188-1979
Specification for Adhesive for Structural Laminated Wood

Products for Use Under Exterior Exposure Condition.
2.10 DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS

2.10.1
Wooden Doors, Windows and Ventilators
These shall conform to the following standards:

BDS
142:1961
Specification for Wood Door (under revision);
BDS
173:1962
Specification for Wood Windows (under revision);
BDS
820:1978
Recommendation for Maximum Permissible Moisture Content of

Timber Used for Different Purposes in Bangladesh;
BDS 1504:1996
Timber door window and ventilator frames
IS
Specification for Timber Panelled and Glazed Shutters;
1003-2003/1994
Part 1-2003 Door Shutters (Fourth Revision);

Part 2-1994 Window and Ventilator Shutters (Second Revision);
IS
1826-1961
Specification for Venetian Blinds for Windows;
IS
2191-1983
Specification for Wooden Flush Door Shutters (cellular and

hollow core type);
Part 1
Plywood Face Panels (Fourth Revision);
Part 2 Particle Board Face Panels and Hardboard Face Panels

(Third Revision);
5-43
Part 5
Building Materials
IS
2202-1991/83
Specification for Wooden Flush Door Shutters (solid core type);
Part 1
Plywood Face Panels (Fifth Revision);
Part 2 Particle Board Face Panels and Hardboard Face Panels

(Third Revision);
IS
4020-1998
Method of tests for door shutters:

(Part 1): 1998
General (third revision)
(Part 2): 1998 Measurement of dimensions and squareness (

Third revision)
(Part 3): 1998
Measurement of general flatness (third revision)
(Part 4): 1998
Local planeness test (third revision)
(Part 5): 1998
Impact indentation test (third revision)
(Part 6): 1998
Flexure test (third revision)
(Part 7): 1998
Edge loading test (third revision)
(Part 8): 1998
Shock resistance test (third revision)
(Part 9): 1998
Buckling resistance test (third revision)
(Part 10) :1998 Slamming test (third revision)

(Part 11) :1998 Misuse test (third revision)
(Part 12) :1998 Varying humidity test (third revision)
(Part 13) :1998 End immersion test (third revision)
(Part 14) :1998 Knife test (third revision)

(Part 15) :1998 Glue adhesion test (third revision)
(Part 16) :1998 Screw withdrawal resistance test (third revision)
5-44
IS
4021:1995
Specification for timber door, window and ventilator frames
IS
4962:1968
Specification for wooden side sliding doors
IS
6198:1992
Specification for ledged, braced and battened timber shutters

(second revision)Revision);
Vol. 2
Building Materials
2.10.2
Chapter 2
Metal Doors, Windows Frames and Ventilators
These shall conform to the following standards :
2.10.3
BDS
1270: 1990
Specification for Strong Room Door;
BDS
1273: 1990
Specification for Vault Doors;
IS
1038-1983
Specification for Steel Doors, Windows and Ventilators (Third

Revision);
IS
1361-1978
Specification for Steel Windows for Industrial Buildings (First

Revision);
IS
1948-1961
Specification for Aluminium Doors, Windows and Ventilators;
IS
1949-1961
Specification for Aluminium Windows for Industrial Buildings;
IS
4351-2003
Specification for Steel Door Frames (Second Revision);
IS
6248-1979
Specification for Metal Rolling Shutters and Rolling Grills (First

Revision);
IS
7452-1990
Specification for Hot Rolled Steel Sections for Doors, Windows

and Ventilators (Second Revision);
IS
10451-1983
Specification for Steel Sliding Shutters (top hung type);
IS
10521-1983
Specification for Collapsible Gates;
Plastic Doors and Windows
These shall conform to the following standards :

BDS EN 477: 2008
Unplasticized polyvinylchloride (PVC - U) profiles for the

fabrication of windows and doors Determination of the
resistance to impact of main profiles by falling mass
BDS EN 478: 2008

fabrication of windows and doors Determination of
appearance after exposure at 150 C
BDS EN 479: 2008

fabrication of windows and doors Determination of heat
reversion
BDS EN 513: 2008

resistance to artificial weathering
BDS EN 514: 2008

5-45
Part 5
Building Materials
strength of welded corners and T-joints

BDS EN 12608: 2008

fabrication of windows and doors Classification, requirements
and test methods
BDS ISO 1163-1:2008
Plastics Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC - U) moulding

and extrusion materials Part 1: Designation system and basis
for specifications
BDS ISO 1163-2:2008
Plastics Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC - U) moulding

and extrusion materials Part 2: Preparation of test specimens
and determination of properties
IS 14856:2000
Specification for glass fibre reinforced (GRP) panel type door

shutters for internal use
IS 15380:2003
Specification for moulded raised high density fibre (HDF) panel

doors
2.11 ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM ALLOYS

Aluminum used for structural purposes in buildings and structures shall comply with AA ASM 35 and AA ADM 1.
Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys shall also conform to the following standards:
5-46
BDS EN 755-9:2010
Aluminium and aluminium alloys Extruded rod/bar, tube and

profiles Part 9: Profiles, tolerances on dimensions and form
BDS EN 755-2:2010

profiles Part 2: Mechanical properties
BDS EN 755-1:2010

profiles Part 1: Technical conditions for inspection and
delivery
BDS EN 755-3:2010

profiles Part 3: Round bars, tolerances on dimensions and
form
BDS EN 755-4:2010

profiles Part 4: Square bars, tolerances on dimensions and
form
BDS EN 755-5:2010

profiles Part 5: Rectangular bars, tolerances on dimensions
and form
BDS EN 755-6:2010

profiles Part 6: Hexagonal bars, tolerances on dimensions and
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
form
BDS EN 755-7:2010

profiles Part 7: Seamless tubes, tolerances on dimensions
and form
BDS EN 755-8:2010

profiles Part 8: Porthole tubes, tolerances on dimensions and
form
BDS EN 12020-1:2010
Aluminium and aluminium alloys Extruded precision profiles

in alloys EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063 Part 1: Technical
conditions for inspection and delivery
BDS EN 12020-2:2010
Aluminium and aluminium alloys Extruded precision profiles

in alloys EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063 Part 2: Tolerances on
dimensions and form
BDS EN 515:2010
Aluminium and aluminium alloys Wrought products

Temper designations
ASTM B26 / B26M - 09
Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings
ASTM B85 / B85M - 09
Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings
ASTM B108 / B108M - 08
Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold

Castings
ASTM B209 - 07
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet

and Plate
ASTM B210 - 04
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Drawn Seamless Tubes
ASTM B211 - 03
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar,

Rod, and Wire
ASTM B221 - 08

Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM B241 / B241M - 02

Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube
ASTM B308 / B308M - 02
Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard

Structural Profiles
ASTM B313 / B313M - 09

Round Welded Tubes
ASTM B316 / B316M - 02
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rivet

and Cold-Heading Wire and Rods
5-47
Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM B429 / B429M - 06
Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural

Pipe and Tube
ASTM B483 / B483M - 03

Drawn Tube and Pipe for General Purpose Applications
ASTM B547 / B547M - 02

Formed and Arc-Welded Round Tube
ASTM B632 / B632M - 08
Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate
ASTM B745 / B745M 97(2005)
Standard Specification for Corrugated Aluminum Pipe for

Sewers and Drains
ASTM E34 - 94(2002)
Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Aluminum and

Aluminum-Base Alloys
2.12 BUILDERS HARDWARE

The applicable standards are listed below :
BDS
113:1986
Specification for Latches and Locks for Doors in Buildings;
IS
204-1991/1992
Specification for Tower Bolts;

Part 1 Ferrous Metals (Fifth Revision);
Part 2 Nonferrous metals (Fifth Revision);
5-48
IS
205-1992
Specification for Nonferrous Metal Butt Hinges (fourth

Revision);
IS
206-1992
Specification for Tee and Strap Hinges (Fourth Revision);
IS
208-1996
Specification for Door Handles (Fifth Revision);
IS
281-1991
Specification for Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts for Use with
Padlock (Third Revision);
IS
362-1991
Specification for Parliament Hinges (Fifth Revision);
IS
363-1993
Specification for Hasps and Staples (Fourth Revision);
IS
364-1993
Specification for Fanlight Catch (Third Revision);
IS
452-1973
Specification for Door Springs, Rat-tail Type (Second Revision);
IS
453-1993
Specification for Double Acting Spring Hinges (Third Revision);
IS
729-1979
Specification for Drawer Locks, Cupboard Locks and Box Locks

(Third Revision);
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
IS
1019-1974
Specification for Rim Latches (Second Revision);
IS
1341-1992
Specification for Steel Butt Hinges (Sixth Revision);
IS
1823-1980
Specification for Floor Door Stoppers (Third Revision);
IS
1837-1966
Specification for Fanlight Pivots (First Revision);
IS
2209-1976
Specification for Mortice Locks (vertical type) (Third Revision);
IS
2681-1993
Specification for Nonferrous Metal Sliding Door Bolts for Use

with Padlocks (Third Revision);
IS
3564-1995
Specification for Door Closers (hydraulically regulated) (Second

Revision);
IS
3818-1992
Specification for Continuous (piano) Hinges (Third Revision);
IS
3828-1966
Specification for Ventilator Chains;
IS
3843-1995
Specification for Steel Backflap Hinges; (First Revision)
IS
3847-1992
Specification for Mortice Night Latches; (First Revision)
IS
4621-1975
Specification for Indicating Bolts for use in Public Baths and

Lavatories (First Revision);
IS
4948-2002
Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for General Use

(Second Revision);
IS
4992-1975
Specification for Door Handles for Mortice Locks (vertical type)

(First Revision);
IS
5187-1972
Specification for Flush Bolts (First Revision);
IS
5899-1970
Specification for Bathroom Latches;
IS
5930-1970
Specification for Mortice Latch (vertical type);
IS
6315-1971
Specification for Floor Springs (hydraulically regulated) for

Heavy Doors;
IS
6318-1971
Specification for Plastic Window Stays and Fasteners;
IS
6343-1982
Specification for Door Closers (pneumatically regulated) for

Light Doors Weighing up to 40 kg (First Revision);
IS
6602-1972
Specification for Ventilator Poles;
IS
6607-1972
Specification for Rebated Mortice Locks (vertical type);
IS
7196-1974
Specification for Hold Fast;
5-49
Part 5
Building Materials
IS
7197-1974
Specification for Double Action Floor Springs (without oil check)

for Heavy Doors;
IS
7534-1985
Specification for sliding locking bolts for use with padlocks (first
revision);
IS
7540-1974
Specification for Mortice Dead Locks;
IS
8756-1978
Specification for Ball Catches for use in Wooden Almirah;
IS
8760-1978
Specification for Mortice Sliding Door Locks, with Lever

Mechanism;
IS
9106-1979
Specification for Rising Butt Hinges;
IS
9131-1979
Specification for Rim Locks;
IS
9460-1980
Specification Flush Drop Handle for Drawer;
IS
9899-1981
Specification for Hat, Coat and Wardrobe Hooks;
IS
10019-1981
Specification for Steel Window Stays and Fasteners;
IS
10090-1982
Specification for Numericals;
IS
10342-1982
Specification for Curtain Rail System
IS
12817:1997
Specification for stainless steel butt hinges (first revision)
IS
12867:1989
Specification for PVC hand rails covers
IS
14912:2001
Specification for door closers concealed type (hydraulically

regulated)
2.13 ROOF COVERINGS

2.13.1
Scope
The provisions of this section shall govern the materials used for roof coverings.
2.13.2
Compatibility of Materials
All roofs and roof coverings shall be of materials that are compatible with each other and with the building or
structure to which the materials are applied.
2.13.3
Material Specifications and Physical Characteristics
All materials to be used in the construction of roofs and roof coverings shall conform to the applicable standards
listed in this section. In the absence of applicable standards or when materials are of questionable suitability,
testing by an approved testing agency may be required by the building official to determine the character, quality
and limitations of use of the materials.
5-50
Vol. 2
Building Materials
2.13.4
Chapter 2
Weather Protection
All roofs shall be covered with approved roof coverings properly secured to the building or structure to resist wind
and rain. Roof coverings shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with approved manufacturer's
recommendations such that the roof covering shall serve to protect the building or structure.
2.13.5
Wind Resistance
All roofs and roof coverings shall be secured in place to the building or structure to withstand the wind loads.
2.13.6
Structural and Construction Loads
The structural roof components shall be capable of supporting the roof covering system and the material and
equipment loads that will be encountered during installation of the roof covering system.
2.13.7
Impact Resistance
Roof coverings shall resist impact damage based on the results of tests conducted in accordance
ASTMD4272 - 09 or D3746 - 85(2008).
2.13.8
with
Metal-Sheet Roof Coverings
Metal-sheet roof coverings installed over structural framing and decking shall comply with BDS 868, Galvanized
Corrugated Sheet Roof and Wall Coverings; BDS 1122, Hot-dip Galvainzed Steel Sheet and Coil; ASTMA755 /
A755M - 03(2008) or B101 - 07. Metal-sheet roof coverings shall be installed in accordance with approved
manufacturer's installation instructions.
2.13.9
Asbestos Sheet Roof Covering
Asbestos sheets used for roof coverings shall comply with BDS 430, Asbestos Cement Corrugated Sheets for
Roofing and Cladding; BDS 431, Asymmetrical Section Corrugated Sheets in Asbestos Cement Roofing and
Cladding; BDS 579, Abestos Cement Flat Sheets; BDS 1046, Asbestos Cement Products-Corrugated Sheets and
Fittings for Roofing and Cladding.
2.13.10 Interlocking Clay or Cement Tile

Interlocking clay or cement tile shall be installed only over solid sheathing or spaced structural sheathing boards.
Interlocking clay or cement tile shall not be installed on roof slopes below one unit vertical in 3 units horizontal
(1:3). Horizontal battens shall be required on roof slopes over one unit vertical in 2 units horizontal (1:2). Single
layer underlayment is required over solid sheathing on all roof slopes. Reinforced underlayment shall be required
when spaced sheathing is used. Regardless of roof slope, the first three tile courses and all tiles within 900 mm of
roof edges, tiles at changes in roof slope or changes in slope direction, shall be fastened to the roof. For the field
of the roof, fastening is not required on roof slopes below one unit vertical in 2 units horizontal (1:2). Every other
tile course shall be fastened on roof slopes 1:2 to less than 1:1; and every tile shall be fastened on roof slopes 1:1
and over. Tile overlap shall be in accordance with approved manufacturer's installation instructions.
2.13.11 Non-interlocking Clay or Cement Tile

Non-interlocking clay or cement tile shall not be installed on roof slopes below one unit vertical in 5 units
horizontal (1:5). Double layer underlayment is required on roof slopes below one unit vertical in 4 units horizontal
(1:4). Single layer underlayment is required on all other roof slopes. Non-interlocking clay or cement tile shall be
secured to the roof with two fasteners per tile. The minimum tile overlap shall be 75 mm.
5-51
Part 5
Building Materials
2.13.12 Roof Insulation

Rigid combustible roof insulation shall be permitted, provided the insulation is covered with approved roof
coverings directly applied thereto. Insitu lime concrete may be used on flat roofs of buildings. Minimum
compacted thickness of such a layer shall be 75 mm and have adequate slope for drainage. The materials used in
lime concrete shall conform to the standards specified in Sec 2.5 of this Part.
2.13.13 Recovering and Replacement of Roof Coverings

New roof coverings shall not be installed without first removing existing roof coverings when the existing roof or
roof covering is water soaked or has deteriorated to the point that the existing roof or roof covering is not
acceptable as a base for additional roofing.
2.13.14 Reuse of Materials

Existing slate, clay or cement tile shall be permitted for reuse, except that damaged, cracked or broken slate or
tile shall not be reused. Existing vent flashings, metal edgings, drain outlets, collars and metal counter flashings
shall not be reused where rusted, damaged or deteriorated. Aggregate surfacing materials shall not be reused.
2.13.15 Applicable Standards

The applicable standards for materials used in roofs and roof coverings are listed below:
5-52
BDS
430:1964
Specification for Asbestos Cement Corrugated Sheets for

Roofing and Cladding
BDS
431:1964
Specification for Asymmetrical Section Corrugated Sheets in

Asbestos Cement for Roofing and Cladding
BDS
579:1966
Specification for Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets (under revision);
BDS
868:1978
Code of Practice for Galvanized Corrugated Sheet Roof and Wall

Coverings;
BDS
1046:1983
Specification for Asbestos Cement Products - Corrugated Sheets

and Fittings for Roofing and Cladding;
BDS
1122:1985
Specification for Hot-dip Galvanized Steel and Coil.
BDS EN 490: 2008
Concrete roofing tiles and fittings for roof covering and all
cladding Product specifications
BDS EN 49l: 2008
Concrete roofing tiles and fittings for roof covering and wall
cladding Test methods
BDS EN 538: 2008
Clay roofing tiles for discontinuous laying Flexural strength

test
BDS EN 539-l: 2008

physical characteristics Part 1: Impermeability test
BDS EN 1024: 2008

geometric characteristics
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
BDS EN 1304: 2008
Clay roofing tiles and fittings Product definitions and

specifications
ASTM A755 / A755M 03(2008)
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the

Hot-Dip Process and Pre-painted by the Coil-Coating Process for
Exterior Exposed Building Products
ASTM B101 - 07
Standard Specification for Lead-Coated Copper Sheet and Strip

for Building Construction
ASTM C222 - 97(2008)
Standard Specification for Asbestos-Cement Roofing Shingles
ASTM C406 - 06e1
Standard Specification for Roofing Slate
ASTM C836 / C836M - 10
Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold LiquidApplied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with
Separate Wearing Course
ASTM C1029 - 09
Standard Specification for Spray-Applied

Polyurethane Thermal Insulation
ASTM D6380 - 03(2009)
Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt)
ASTM D225 - 07
Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles (Organic Felt)

Surfaced With Mineral Granules
ASTM D226 / D226M - 09
Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used

in Roofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D227 - 03
Standard Specification for Coal-Tar-Saturated Organic Felt Used

ASTM D6380 - 03(2009)
ASTM D312 - 00(2006)
Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing
ASTM D450 - 07
Standard Specification for Coal-Tar Pitch Used in Roofing,

Dampproofing, and Waterproofing
ASTM D1227 - 95(2007)
Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a

Protective Coating for Roofing
ASTM D1863 - 05
Standard Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used on Built-Up

Roofs
ASTM D2178 - 04
Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing

and Waterproofing
ASTM D2626 - 04
Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and Coated

Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing
Rigid
Cellular
5-53
Part 5
Building Materials
5-54
ASTM D2898 - 10
Standard Practice for Accelerated Weathering of FireRetardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing
ASTM D3161 - 09
Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles

(Fan-Induced Method)
ASTM D4897 / D4897M 01(2009)
Standard Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass-Fiber Venting

Base Sheet Used in Roofing
ASTM D3747 - 79(2007)
Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Adhesive for

Adhering Roof Insulation
ASTM D3909 97b(2004)e1
Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt)

Surfaced With Mineral Granules
ASTM D4272 - 09
Standard Test Method for Total Energy Impact of Plastic Films

By Dart Drop
ASTM D4434 / D4434M 09
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing
ASTM D4601 - 04
Standard Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base

Sheet Used in Roofing
ASTM D4637 - 08
Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used In Single-Ply Roof

Membrane
ASTM E108 - 10a
Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
ASTM G90 - 05
Standard Practice for Performing Accelerated Outdoor

Weathering of Nonmetallic Materials Using Concentrated
Natural Sunlight
ASTM G155 - 05a
Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for

Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials
ASTM G154 - 06
Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for

UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
RMA (Rubber
Manufacturer
Association, USA) RP - 4 88
Wind Design Guide for Ballasted Single-Ply Roofing Systems;
SPRI (Single Ply Roofing

Institute, USA) - 86
Wind Design Guide for Ballasted Single-Ply Roofing Systems;
FM ( Factory Manual)
4450 - 89
Standard Laboratories Department Approved Standard for Class

I Insulated Steel Deck Roofs;
Vol. 2
Building Materials
FM
Chapter 2
447 -86
Approval Standard for Class I Roof Coverings;

Membrane, Modified
Reinforced for Roofing;
CGSB (Canadian General

Standards Board) 37 - GP
- 56M - 80
Bituminous,
Prefabricated,
and
2.14 PAINTS AND VARNISHES

2.14.1
Water Based Paints and Pigments
Water based paints shall conform to the following standards:

BDS
500:1965
Specification for Distemper Dry (under revision);
BDS
1097:1984
Specification for Plastic Emulsion Paint.

Part I for Interior Use;
Part 2 for Exterior Use;
2.14.2
IS
427:1965
Specification for distemper, dry, colour as required (revised)
IS
428:2000
Specification for distemper, washable (second revision)
IS
5410:1992
Specification for cement paint, colour as required (first revision)
IS
5411
Specification for plastic emulsion paint:

(Part 1):1974
For interior use(first revision)
(Part 2): 1972
For exterior use
Ready Mixed Paints, Enamels and Powder Coatings
Ready mixed paints and enamels shall conform to the following standards:
BDS
13:1960
Specification for Ready Mixed Paints, Varnish, Lacquers and

Related Products (under revision);
BDS
14:1960
Specification for Black Bituminous Paint, Brushing for General

Purposes (under revision);
BDS
397:1964
Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Red Oxide Zinc

Chrome, Priming (under revision);
BDS
398:1964
Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Spraying, Red Oxide Zinc

Chrome, Priming (under revision);
BDS
399:1964
Specification for Aluminum Paint, Spraying for General

Purposes, in Dual Container (under revision);
5-55
Part 5
Building Materials
BDS
400:1964
Specification for Aluminium Paint, Brushing, for General

Purposes in Dual Container (under revision);
BDS
401:1964
Specification for Varnish, Finishing, Exterior, Type-I, (Synthetic)

(Tentative) (under revision);
BDS
402:1989
Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Finishing,

Semigloss, for General Purposes (First Revision);
BDS
499:1965
Specification for Ready Mixed Paints, Brushing, for Road

Marking (white, yellow and black) (under revision);
BDS 616:1966
Specification for Enamel, Brushing, Exterior (i) Undercoating, (ii)

Finishing, Colour as Required (under revision);
BDS
617:1966
Specification for Enamel, Brushing, Interior (i) Undercoating, (ii)

Finishing, Colour as Required (under revision);
BDS
926:1980
Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Petrol Resisting,

Air Drying, for Exterior Painting of Containers, Colour as
Required;
BDS
927:1980
Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Petrol Resisting,

Air Drying, for Interior Painting of Tanks and Containers, Red
Oxide (colour unspecified);
BDS
928:1980
Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Acid Resisting, for

Protection Against Acid Fumes, Colour as Required;
BDS
973:1981
Specification for Specification and Methods of Test for Linseed

Stand Oil for Paints and Varnishes;
BDS
974:1981
Specification and Methods of Test for Raw Tung Oils for Paints
and Varnishes;
BDS
1005:1981
Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Finishing, Stoving,

Enamel, Colour as Required;
BDS
1141:1986
Specification for Ready Mixed Aluminium Priming Paints for

Woodwork;
BDS
1151:1986
Specification for Pavement Marking Paints.
IS
101
Methods of sampling and test for paints, varnishes and related

products:
(Part l/See 1):1986
Test on liquid paints (general and
physical), Section 1 Sampling (third revision)
(Part l/See 2):1987
5-56
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
physical), Section 2 Preliminary examination and preparation of

samples for testing (third revision)
(Part l/See 3):1986
physical), Section 3 Preparation of panels (third revision)
(Part l/See 4) :1987
physical), Section 4 Brushing test (third revision)
(Part l/See 5):1989
physical), Section 5 Consistency (third revision)
(Part l/See 6):1987
physical), Section 6 Flash point (third revision)
(Part l/See 7):1987
physical), Section 7 Mass per 10 Iitres (third revision)
(Part 2/See 1):1988
Test on liquid paints (chemical
examination), Section 1 Water content (third revision)
(Part 2/See 2):1986
Test on liquid paints (chemical
examination), Section 2 Volatile matter (third revision)
(Part 3/See 1):1986
Tests on paint film formation, Section 1
Drying time (third revision)
(Part 3/See 2):1989
Film thickness (third revision)
(Part 3/See 4):1987
Finish (third revision)
(Part 3/See 5):1987

Fineness of grind (third revision)
(Part 4/See 1):1988
revision)
Optical test, Section 1 Opacity (third
(Part 4/See 2):1989

revision)
Optical test, Section 2 Colour (third
(Part 4/See 3):1988

test (third revision)
Optical test, Section 3 Light fastness
(Part 4/See 4):1986

revision)
Optical test, Section 4 Gloss (third
(Part 5/See 1):1988

Mechanical test on paint films, Section
1 Hardness tests (third revision)
5-57
Part 5
Building Materials
Part 5/See 2):1988

2 Flexibility and adhesion (third revision)
(Part 5/See 3):1986
3 Impact resistance (fourth revision)
(Part 5/See 4):1986
Mechanical test
Section4 Print free test (third revision)
on
paint
films,
(Part 6/See 1):1988

Durability tests, Section 1 Resistance to
humidity under conditions of condensation (third revision)
(Part 6/See 2):1989
Durability tests, Section 2 Keeping
properties (third revision)
(Part 6/See 3):1990
Durability tests, Section 3 Moisture
vapour permeability (third revision)
(Part 6/See 4):1991
Durability tests, Section 4 Degradation
of coatings (pictorial aids for evaluation)
(Part 6/See 5):1997
Durability tests, Section 5 Accelerated
weathering test (third revision)
(Part 7/See 1) :1989
Environmental tests on paint films,
Section 1 Resistance to water (third revision)
(Part 7/See 2):1990
Section 2 Resistance to liquids (third revision)
(Part 7/See 3) :1990
Section 3 Resistance to heat (third revision)
(Part 7/See 4) :1990
Section 4 Resistance to bleeding of pigments (third revision)
(Part 8/See 1):1989
Tests for pigments and other solids,
Section 1 Residue on sieve (third revision)
(Part 8/See 2):1990
Section 2 Pigments and nonvolatile matter (third revision)
(Part 8/See 3):1993
Section 3 Ash content
(Part 8/See 4):1993

Section 4 Phthalic anhydride
(Part 8/See 5):1993
Section 5 Lead restriction test (third revision)
5-58
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
(Part 8/See 6):1993

Section 6 Volume solids
(Part 9/See 1):1993
Acid value
Tests for lacquers and varnish, Section 1
(Part 9/See 2):1993

Rosin test
Tests for lacquers and varnish, Section 2
IS
104:1979
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, zinc chrome,

priming (second revision)
IS
109:1968
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, priming, plaster to

Indian Standard colours No. 361 and 631 (first revision)
IS
123:1962
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, finishing, semigloss, for general purposes, to Indian Standard colours No. 445,
446, 448, 449, 451 and 473; and red oxide (colour unspecified)
(revised)
IS
133:1993
Specification for enamel, interior (a) undercoating, (b) finishing

(third revision)
IS
137:1965
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, matt or egg-shell

flat, finishing, interior, to Indian Standard colour, as required
(revised)
IS
158:1981
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black,

lead-free, acid, alkali, and heat resisting (third revision)
IS
168:1993
Specification for ready mixed paint, air-drying semi-glossy/matt,

for general purposes (third revision)
IS
341:1973
Specification for black Japan, Types A, B and C first revision)
IS
2074:1992
Specification for ready mixed paint, air drying red oxide-zinc

chrome, priming (second revision)
IS
2075:2000
Specification for ready mixed paint, stoving, red oxide-zinc

chrome, priming (second revision)
IS
2339:1963
Specification for aluminium paint for general purposes, in dual

container
IS
2932:2003
Specification for enamel, synthetic, exterior, (a) undercoating,

(b) finishing (third revision)
IS
2933:1975
Specification for enamel, exterior, (a) undercoating, (b) finishing

(first revision)
IS
3536:1999
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, wood primer
5-59
Part 5
Building Materials
(first revision)
2.14.3
IS
3537:1966
Specification for ready mixed paint, finishing, interior for general

purposes, to Indian Standard colours No. 101, 216, 217, 219,
275:281, 352, 353, 358 to 361, 363,364,388,410,442, 444,628,
631,632,634,693,697, white andblack
IS
3539:1966
Specification for ready mixed paint, undercoating, for use under

oil finishes, to Indian Standard colours, as required
IS
3585:1966
Specification for ready mixed paint, aluminium, brushing,

priming, water resistant, for wood work
IS
3678:1966
Specification for ready mixed paint, thick white, for lettering
IS
8662:1993
Specification for enamel, synthetic, exterior, (a) undercoating,

(b) finishing, for railway coaches (first revision)
IS
9862:1981
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous black

lead free, acid, alkali, water and chlorine resisting
IS
11883:1986
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, red oxide, priming

for metals
IS
13183:1991
Specification for aluminium paints, heat resistant
IS
13213:1991
Specification for polyurethane full gloss enamel (two pack)
IS
13607:1992
Specification for ready mixed paint, finishing, general purposes,

synthetic
IS
13871:1993
Specification for powder coatings
Thinners and Solvents
5-60
IS
324-1959
Specification for Ordinary Denatured Spirit (revised);
IS
82:1992
Methods of sampling and test for thinners and solvents for

paints (first revision)
IS
324:1959
Specification for ordinary denatured spirit (revised)
IS
533:1998
Specification for gum spirit of turpentine (oil of turpentine)

(second revision)
IS
14314:1995
Specification for thinner general purposes for synthetic paints

and varnishes
Vol. 2
Building Materials
2.14.4
Chapter 2
Varnishes and Lacquers

BDS
401:1964
Specification for Varnish, Finishing, Exterior, Type-I, (synthetic)

(under revision);
BDS
1064:1983
Specification for Varnish, Stoving;
BDS
1065:1983
Specification for Varnish, Acid Resisting;
BDS
1066:1983
Specification for Varnish, Finishing, Interior;
IS
337:1975
Specification for varnish, finishing, interior (first revision)
IS
347-1975
Specification for Varnish, Shellac for general purposes (First

Revision);
IS
348-1968
Specification for French Polish (First Revision);
IS
524:1983
Specification for varnish, finishing, exterior, synthetic (second

revision)
IS
525:196
Specification for varnish, finishing, exterior and general purposes

(first revision)
IS
642:1963
Specification for varnish medium for aluminium paint (revised)
2.15 SANITARY APPLIANCES AND WATER FITTINGS

2.15.1
Sanitary Appliances
Sanitary appliances shall conform to the following standards:

BDS 1162 : 2006 (1st
revision)
Ceramic wash basin and pedestal, ceramic wash basin and

pedestals dimension, design & construction, type, permissible
deviation
BDS
Specification for Vitreous Sanitary Appliances,
1163 : 1987
Part-1, General Requirements;

Part-2, Specific Requirements for Water Closets;
Part-3, Specification Requirements for Urinal (Bowl type);
Part-4, Specific Requirements for Foot Rest;
Part-5, Specific Requirements for Integrated Squatting Pans.
BDS
1361:1992
Faucets
5-61
Part 5
Building Materials
BDS
1593:1998
ASHRA E90A-80
Energy Conservation in New Building Design;
ASHRA E 90B-75
Energy Conservation in New Building Design;
C700-09:
Cold-Water Meters--Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case;
C701-07:
Cold-Water Meters -- Turbine Type, for Customer Service;
C702-01:
Cold-Water Meters -- Compound Type;
BS
1125: 1987
Specification for WC Flushing Cisterns (Including Dual Flash Cisterns

and Flush Pipes);
BS
1244
Metal Sink for Domestic Purposes;
BS
1254:1981
Specification for C Seats (Plastics);
BS
1329:1974
Specification for Metal Hand Rinse Basins;
BS
1876:
1992(1977)
2.15.2
Plastic sanitary squatting pan
Specification for Automatic Flushing Cistern for Urinals
Pipes and Pipe Fittings for Water Supply and Sanitation
Pipes and pipe fittings for water supply and sanitation shall comply with the following standards.
BDS
428:1964
Specification for Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipe;
BDS
429:1964
Specification for Asbestos Cement Building and Sanitary Pipes

(under revision);
BDS
1111:1984
Centrifugally Cast (spun) Iron Pressure Pipes for Water, Gas and
Sewage;
BDS
1356:1992
Specification for Ferrules for Water Services;
BDS
1357: 1992
Specification for Washers with Fittings for Water Service;
BDS
1361 : 1992
Faucets
This standard specifies the technical requirements of various
types of Faucets.
BDS
1562:1997
Solvent cements for polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe and

fitting.
BDS
1593 : 1998
Plastic sanitary squatting pan

Pan lays down the requirement for material, dimension physical
5-62
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
requirements and testing for power flush type injection moulded

high density polyethylene (HDPE) or polypropylene (PP)
squatting pan.
BDS EN 12542: 2009
Copper and copper alloys Plumbing fittings Part 2: Fittings

with compression ends for use with copper tubes
BDS EN 1717: 2009
Protection against pollution of potable water in water

installations and general requirements of devices to prevent
pollution by backflow
BDS EN 14506: 2009
Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water

Automatic diverter Family H, type C
BDS ISO 3419: 2008
Non alloy and alloy steel buttwelding fittings
BDS ISO 5251: 2008
Stainless steel buttwelding fittings
BDS ISO 6761: 2008
Steel tubes Preparation of ends of tubes and fittings for

welding
BDS ISO 3822-1: 2009
Acoustics: Laboratory tests on noise emission from appliances

and equipment used in water supply installations Part 1:
Method of measurement
BDS ISO 3822-2: 2009

Mounting and operating conditions for drawoff taps and mixing
valves
BDS ISO 3822-4: 2009

Mounting and operating conditions for special appliances
BDS ISO 161-1 : 2008
Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids Nominal

outside diameters and Nominal Pressures- Part 1: Metric series
BDS ISO 161-2 : 2008
Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids- Nominal

outside diameters and Nominal Pressures- Part 2: Inch based
series
BDS ISO 265-1 : 2008
Pipes and fittings of plastics materials- fittings for domestic and

industrial waste pipes- Basic dimensions: Metric series- Part 1:
Unplasticized Poly (Vinyl chloride) (PVC-U)
BDS ISO 1167-1 : 2008
Thermoplastics pipes fittings and assemblies for the conveyance

of fluids - Determination of the resistance to internal pressurePart 1: General method
BDS ISO 1167-2 : 2008
Thermoplastics pipes fittings and assemblies for the conveyance

of fluids- Determination of the resistance to internal pressure-
5-63
Part 5
Building Materials
Part 2: Preparation of pipe test pieces
5-64
BDS ISO 1746 : 2008
Rubber or Plastics hoses and tubing-Bending tests
BDS ISO 2505 : 2008
Thermoplastics pipes- Longitudinal reversion Test method and

parameters
BDS ISO 2507-2 : 2008
Thermoplastics pipes and fittings Vicat softening temperaturePart 2: Test conditions for Unplasticized poly (Vinyl chloride)
(PVC-U) or chlorinated poly (Vinyl chloride) (PVC-C) pipes and
fittings and for high impact resistance poly (Vinyl chloride) (PVCHI) pipes
BDS ISO 3114: 2008
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes for potable water

supply-Extractability of lead and tin- Test method
BDS ISO 3126 : 2008
Plastics piping systems-Plastics components- Determination of

dimensions
BDS ISO 3127: 2008
Thermoplastics pipes- Determination of resistance to external

blows-Round the - clock method
BDS ISO 3501:2010
Assembled joints between fittings and polyethylene (PE)

pressure pipes Test of resistance to pull-out
BDS ISO 3503:2010

pressure pipes Test of leakproofness under internal pressure
when subjected to bending
BDS ISO 3633: 2008
Plastics piping systems for soil and waste discharge (Low and
high temperature ) inside buildings- Specifications
BDS ISO 6964:2010
Polyolefin pipes and fittings Determination of carbon black

content by calcination and pyrolysis Test method and basic
specification
BDS ISO 4065: 2008
Thermoplastics pipes- Universal wall thickness table
BDS ISO /TR 4191: 2008
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pipes for water supplyRecommended practice for laying
BDS ISO 4422-1: 2008
Pipes and fittings made of unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride)

(PVC-U) for water supply - Specifications - Part 1: General
BDS ISO 4422-2: 2008

(PVC-U) for water supply - Specifications - Part 2: Pipes (with or
without integral sockets)
BDS ISO 4422-3: 2008
Pipes and fittings made of unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride)(PVCU) for water supply- Specifications - Part 3: Fittings and joints
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
BDS ISO 4422-4: 2008

(PVC-U) for water supply- Specifications- Part 4: Valves and
ancillary equipment
BDS ISO 4422-5: 2008

(PVC- U) for water supply- Specifications- Part 5: Fitness for
purpose of the system
BDS ISO 4433-3: 2008
Thermoplastics pipes- Resistance to liquid chemicalsClassification-Part 3: Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-U),
high- impact poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-HI) and chlorinated poly
(vinyl chloride) (PVC C) pipes
BDS ISO 4435: 2008
Plastic piping systems for nonpressure underground drainage

and sewerage- Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-U)
BDS ISO 4439: 2008
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes and fittings

Determination and specification of density
BDS ISO 6259-1: 2008
Thermoplastics pipes- Determination of tensile properties- Part

1: General test method
BDS ISO 6259-2: 2008
Thermoplastics pipes- Determination of tensile properties- Part

2: Pipes made of unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-U),
Chlorinated poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-C), and high impact poly
(vinyl chloride) (PVC-HI)
BDS ISO 6992: 2008
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pipes for drinking

water supply - Extractability of cadmium and mercury occurring
as impurities
BDS ISO 9624:2010
Thermoplastics pipes for fluids under pressure Mating

dimensions of flange adapters and loose backing flanges
BDS ISO 11413:2010
Plastics pipes and fittings Preparation of test piece assemblies

between a polyethylene (PE) pipe and an electrofusion fitting
BDS ISO 11414, Plastics pipes and fittings Preparation of
polyethylene (PE) pipe/pipe or pipe/fitting test piece assemblies
by butt fusion
BDS ISO 12176-2:2010
Plastics pipes and fittings Equipment for fusion jointing

polyethylene systems Part 2: Electrofusion
BDS ISO 12176-3:2010

polyethylene systems Part 3: Operators badge
BDS ISO 12176-4:2010

polyethylene systems Part 4: Traceability coding
BDS ISO 13479:2010
Polyolefin pipes for the conveyance of fluids Determination of
5-65
Part 5
Building Materials
resistance to crack propagation Test method for slow crack

growth on notched pipes (notch test)
5-66
BDS ISO 13761:2010
Plastics pipes and fittings Pressure reduction factors for

polyethylene pipeline systems for use at temperatures above 20
C
BDS ISO 13951:2010
Plastics piping systems Test method for the resistance of

polyolefin pipe/pipe or pipe/fitting assemblies to tensile loading
BDS ISO 13953:2010
Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings Determination of the

tensile strength and failure mode of test pieces from a butt-fused
joint
BDS ISO 13954:2010
Plastics pipes and fittings Peel decohesion test for

polyethylene (PE) electrofusion assemblies of nominal outside
diameter greater than or equal to 90 mm
BDS ISO 13955:2010
Plastics pipes and fittings Crushing decohesion test for

polyethylene (PE) electrofusion assemblies
BDS ISO 13957:2010
Plastics pipes and fittings Polyethylene (PE) tapping tees

Test method for impact resistance
BDS ISO 14236:2010
Plastics pipes and fittings Mechanical-joint compression

fittings for use with polyethylene pressure pipes in water supply
systems
BDS ISO 18553:2010
Method for the assessment of the degree of pigment or carbon

black dispersion in polyolefin pipes, fittings and compounds
BDS ISO 18553:2010
Method for the assessment of the degree of pigment or carbon

black dispersion in polyolefin pipes, fittings and compounds
Amendment 1:2010
BDS ISO 4427-1:2010
Plastics piping systems Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings for

water supply Part 1: General
BDS ISO 4427-2:2010

water supply Part 2: Pipes
BDS ISO 4427-3:2010

water supply Part 3: Fittings
BDS ISO 4427-5:2010

water supply Part 5: Fitness for purpose of the system
BDS ISO 4427-1:2010

water supply Part 1: General Technical corrigendum 1: 2010
BDS ISO 3458:2010
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
pressure pipes Test of leakproofness under internal pressure

BDS ISO 3459:2010
Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipes Joints assembled with

mechanical fittings Internal under pressure test method and
requirement
ASTM A53 / A53M - 07

ASTM A74 - 09
Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM A377 - 03(2008)e1
Standard Index of Specifications for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe
ASTM B42 - 02e1
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes
ASTM B43 - 09
Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard

Sizes
ASTM B75 - 02
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube
ASTM B88 - 09
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
ASTM B251 - 02e1
Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wrought

Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube
ASTM B302 - 07
Standard Specification for Threadless Copper Pipe, Standard

Sizes
ASTM B306 - 09
Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)
ASTM B429 / B429M 06
Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural

Pipe and Tube
ASTM B447 - 07
Standard Specification for Welded Copper Tube
ASTM B745 / B745M 97(2005)
Standard Specification for Corrugated Aluminum Pipe for Sewers

and Drains
ASTM C14 - 07
Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm

Drain, and Culvert Pipe
ASTM C76 - 10a
Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm

Drain, and Sewer Pipe
ASTM C508 / C508M 00(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Asbestos-Cement Underdrain Pipe
ASTM C654 - 05a
Standard Specification for Porous Concrete Pipe
ASTM C700 - 09
Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength,

Standard Strength, and Perforated
5-67
Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM D1527 - 99(2005)
Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)

Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
ASTM D1785 - 06
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D2239 - 03
Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDRPR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter
ASTM D2241 - 09
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) PressureRated Pipe (SDR Series)
ASTM D2321 - 09
Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic

Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications ASTM
D2464 - 06 Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM D2466 - 06
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 40ASTM D2467 - 06 Standard Specification for
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM D2609 - 02(2008)
Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene

(PE) Plastic Pipe
ASTM D2661 - 08

Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2665 - 09
5-68
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2672 - 96a(2009)
Standard Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent
Cement
ASTM D2729 - 03
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe

and Fittings
ASTM D2737 - 03
Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing
ASTM D2751 - 05

Sewer Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2846 / D2846M 09b
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems
ASTM D2949 01a(2008)e1
Standard Specification for 3.25-in. Outside Diameter Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3034 - 08
Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Sewer Pipe and Fittings
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
ASTM F405 - 05
Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and

Fittings
ASTM F409 - 02(2008)
Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Accessible

Replaceable Plastic Tube and Tubular Fittings
ASTM F437 - 09
Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM F438 - 09
Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM B209 - 07
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet

and Plate
ASTM F441 / F441M - 09

(CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
ASTM F442 / F442M - 09

(CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDRPR)
ASTM F628 - 08

Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe With a Cellular
Core
ASTM F891 - 09
Standard Specification for Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Pipe With a Cellular Core
IS
404 (Part-I)-1993
Specification for Lead Pipes Part I for other than Chemical

Purpose (third Revision);
ISO
160: 1980
Asbestos-Cement Pressure Pipes and Joints;
ISO
392:1986
Asbestos-Cement Pipe Fittings for Building and Sanitary

Purposes;
ISO
881:1980
Asbestos-Cement Pipes, Joints and Fittings for Sewerage and

Drainage;
ISO
2531-1991
Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings and Accessories for Pressure Pipelines;
ASME/ANSI
2006
B16.3-
Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300;
ASME/ANSI
B16.485
Cast Iron Threaded Fittings;
ASME/ANSI
2007
B16.9-
Factory Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings;
ASME/ANSI
2009
B16.11-
Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded;
and
5-69
Part 5
Building Materials
ASME/ABSI
2009
B16.12-
Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings;
ASME/ANSI
2006
B16.15-
Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250;
ASME/ANSI
2001
B16.18-
Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings;
ASME/ANSI
2001
B16.22-
Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings;
ASME/ANSI
2002
B16.23-
Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings (DWV);
ASME/ANSI
1994
B16.28-
Wrought Steel Butt welding Short radius Elbows and Returns;
ASME/ANSI
2007
B16.29-
Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings

for solvent Drainage Systems;
ASME/ANSI
84
B16.32-
Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for Solvent Drainage

Systems;
AWWA C110-08
2.15.3
Standard for Grey Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings, 76 mm to 1220

mm (3 in. through 48 inches), for Water and Other Liquids.
Joints and Connections Between Pipes and Fittings
Applicable standards for joints and connections between pipes and fittings are listed below:
5-70
BDS EN 681-1: 2008
Elastomeric seals Materials requirements for pipe joint seals

used in water and drainage applications Part 1: Vulcanized
rubber
BDS EN 681-2 : 2008
Elastomeric seals Materials requirements for pipe joint seals

used in water and drainage applications Part 2: Thermoplastic
elastomers
ASTM B42 - 02e1
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes
ASTM C425 - 04(2009)
Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay

Pipe and Fittings
ASTM C443 - 05ae1
Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,

Using Rubber Gaskets
ASTM C564 - 09a
Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
ASTM
D1869
95(2005)e1
ASTM D2235 - 04
ASTM
D2564
04(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for AcrylonitrileButadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
-
Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
ASTM D2657 - 07
Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and

Fittings
ASTM D2661 - 08

Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2846 / D2846M 09b
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)

Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems
ASTM D2855 - 96(2010)
Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3139 - 98(2005)
Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using

Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D3212 - 07
Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM F402 - 05
Standard Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers,

and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F493 - 04
Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F628 - 08

Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe With a Cellular
Core
ASTM F656 - 08
Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement

Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASME/ANSI
1983 (R2006)
2.15.4
Standard Specification for Rubber Rings for Asbestos-Cement Pipe
B1.20.1-
Pillar taps used in water supply
Taps and Valves
Taps and valves shall conform to the following standards :

BDS 1507 : 1995
Bib taps used in water supply
5-71
Part 5
Building Materials
BDS 1508:1995
Stop taps used in water supply.
BDS 1509:1995
Pillar taps used in water supply
BDS 987 : 1981
Sand cast brass screw

down bib taps and stop taps for water
services.
It covers the requirements regarding materials, dimensions,
constructions, workmanship, finish and testing of tapes for water
services.
5-72
BDS 1508 : 1995
Stop taps used in water supply.Specifies the requirements,

dimensions construction, materials and test methods of stop taps
used in water supply.
BDS EN 200: 2009
Sanitary tapware Single taps and combination taps for water

supply systems of type 1 and type 2 General technical
specification
BDS EN 246: 2009
Sanitary tapware General specifications for flow rate regulators
BDS EN 248: 2009
Sanitary tapware General specification for electrodeposited

coatings of NiCr
BDS EN 1112: 2009
Sanitary tapware Shower outlets for sanitary tapware for water

specification
BDS EN 1113: 2009
Sanitary tapware Shower hoses for sanitary tapware for water

specification
BS
1212 3 (Parts)
Specification for Float Operated Valves (excluding floats);
BS
1010
Specification for Draw-Off Taps and Stopvalves for Water

Services;
BS
1968
Specification for Floats for Ball Valves (copper);
BS
5433: 1976
Specification for Underground Stop valves for Water Services

(copper);
BS
2456: 1973
Specification for Floats for Ball Valves (plastic) for Cold and Hot
Water
BS
1415 ( 2 parts)
Mixing Valves (Manullay Operated);
BS
5163: 1986
Specification for Predominantly Key-Operated Cast Iron Wedge

Gate Valve for Water Works;
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
BS
3377:1985
Specification for Boilers for Use with Domestic Solid Mineral Fuel
Appliances;
BS
843: 1976
Specification for Thermal Storage Electric Water Heaters;
BS
855:1976
Specification for Welded Steel Boilers for Central Heating and

Indirect Hot Water Supply.
2.16 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

2.16.1
Ferrocement
Details including material requirements are given in Chapter 12 of Part 6.
2.16.2
Plastics
Plastics may be used in buildings or structures as light transmitting materials such as glazing, skylights, lighting
lenses, luminous ceilings, roof panels, signs and similar purposes. Foam plastics are also used in buildings.
Applicants for approval of a plastic material shall furnish all necessary technical data required by the Building
Official. The data shall include chemical composition; applicable physical, mechanical and thermal properties such
as fire resistance, flammability and flame spread; weather resistance; electrical properties; products of
combustion; and coefficient of expansion.
The requirements for light transmitting plastics, including roof panels and foam plastics are given below.
2.16.2.1 Light Transmitting Plastics

An approved light transmitting plastic shall be any thermoplastic, thermosetting or reinforced thermosetting
plastic material which has a self-ignition temperature of 343oC or greater when tested in accordance with , Test
Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics; a smoke density rating not greater than 450 when tested in the manner
intended for use in accordance with ASTM E84 - 10, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; or not greater than 75 when tested in the thickness intended for use in accordance with ASTM D2843 10, Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics; and which conforms to one
of the following combustibility classifications:
Class C1 : Plastic materials which have a burning extent of 25 mm or less when tested at a nominal thickness of
1.5 mm, or in the thickness intended for use, in accordance with ASTM D635 - 06, Test Method for Rate of
Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in Horizontal Position; or
Class C2: Plastic materials which have a burning rate of 63 mm/min or less when tested at a nominal thickness of
1.5 mm, or in the thickness intended for use, in accordance with ASTM D635 - 06.
2.16.2.2 Foam Plastics

All foam plastics and foam plastic cores of manufactured assemblies shall have a flame spread rating of not more
than 75 and shall have a smoke developed rating of not more than 450 when tested in the maximum thickness
intended for use in accordance with ASTM E84 - 10.
All foam plastics, unless otherwise indicated in this section, shall be separated from the interior of a building by an
approved thermal barrier of 13 mm gypsum wall board or equivalent thermal barrier material which will limit the
average temperature rise of the unexposed surface to not more than 121oC after 15 minutes of fire exposure
complying with the standard time-temperature curve of ASTM E119 - 09c, Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials. The thermal barrier shall be installed in such a manner that it will stay in place for a
5-73
Part 5
Building Materials
minimum of 15 minutes under the same testing conditions. The thermal barrier is not required when the foam
plastic is protected by a 25 mm minimum thickness of masonry or concrete.
2.16.2.3 Applicable Standards

A list of applicable standards for plastics is given below:
5-74
BDS
885:1979
Method for Measuring Viscosity Number and K-Value of PVC Resins;
BDS
886:1978
Method for Direct Measuring the Specific Gravity of Plastics;
BDS
887:1978
Method for Measuring Deformation under Heat of Flexible Rigid

PVC Compounds;
BDS
888:1978
Method for Measuring Temperature of Deflection under Load;
BDS
889:1978
Method for Measuring the Vicat Softening Temperature (VST) of

Thermoplastics;
BDS
890:1978
Method for Measuring the Water Absorption at Room Temperature

and Bolling Water Absorption of Plastics;
BDS
891:1978
Method for Measuring the Flexural Modulus of Plastics;
BDS
892:1978
Method for Measuring the Resistance to Tear Propagation of

Flexible Plastics, Film or Sheeting;
ASTM D543 - 06
Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to

Chemical Reagents
ASTM D635 - 06
Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time
of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position
ASTM D638 - 08
Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D695 - 08
Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics
ASTM D882 - 09
Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting
ASTM D1003 - 07e1
Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance of

Transparent Plastics
ASTM D1044 - 08
Standard Test Method for Resistance of Transparent Plastics to

Surface Abrasion
ASTM D1204 - 08
Standard Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of Nonrigid
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated Temperature
2.16.3
ASTM D1593 - 09
Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Plastic Film and

Sheeting
ASTM D2103 - 08
Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting
ASTM D2126 - 09
Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to

Thermal and Humid Aging
ASTM D2842 - 06
Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular

Plastics
ASTM D2843 - 10
Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or

Decomposition of Plastics
ASTM D3294 - 09
Standard Specification for PTFE Resin Molded Sheet and Molded

Basic Shapes
ASTM D3678 97(2008)e1
Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) InteriorProfile Extrusions
ASTM D3679 - 09a
Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Siding
ASTM D3841 97(2008)e1
Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Plastic

Panels
ASTM D4802 - 02
Standard Specification for Poly(Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic

Sheet
ASTM E84 - 10
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials
ASTM E119 - 09c
Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials
Ballies and Wood Poles
Ballies of Sal/Gazari, Sundari and Garjan are used in building construction. These shall be free from rots, knots
and sap, and straight and uniform in size. These should conform to the following standards:
BDS
809:1973
Specification for Wood

Telecommunication Lines;
Poles
for
Overhead
Power
and
ASTM D25 - 99(2005)
Standard Specification for Round Timber Piles
IS
3337:1978
Specification for Ballies for General Purposes (First Revision);
IS
1900:1974
Method of Testing Wood Poles;
IS
6711:1972
Code of Practice for Maintenance of Wood Poles for Overhead

Power and Telecommunications Lines.
5-75
Part 5
Building Materials
2.16.4
Bamboos
The following standards shall be applicable for bamboos used for structural and nonstructural purposes:
2.16.5
IS
1902:1961
Code of Practice for Preservation of Bamboo and Cane for Nonstructural Purposes;
IS
6874:1973
Method of Tests for Round Bamboos;
IS
8242:1976
Methods of Tests for Split Bamboo;
IS
8295:1976
Specification for Bamboo Chicks, Part I Fine;
IS
9096:1979
Code of Practice for Preservation of

Purposes.
Bamboos for Structural
Fillers, Stoppers and Putties
2.16.6
IS
110:1968
Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Grey Filler, for

Enamels, for Use Over Primers (First Revision);
IS
345:1952
Specification for Wood Filler, Transparent, Liquid;
IS
419:1967
Specification for Putty for Use on Window Frames (First Revision);
IS
421:1953
Specification for Jointing Paste, for Bedding Moldings on Coaching

Stock;
IS
423:1961
Specification for Plastic Wood, for Joiners' Filler (revised);
IS
424:1965
Specification for Plastic Asphalt (revised);
IS
3709:1966
Specification for Mastic Cement for Bedding of Metal Windows;
IS
7164:1973
Specification for Stopper.
Wire Ropes and Wire Products
5-76
ASTM A116 - 05 ASTM

A121 - 07
Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed

Wire
ASTM A368 95a(2009)
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire Strand
ASTM A392 - 07
Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence

Fabric
Vol. 2
Building Materials
2.16.7
Chapter 2
ASTM A475 03(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand
ASTM A492 - 95(2009)
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Rope Wire
ASTM A510 - 08
Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods

and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel
ASTM A121 - 07
Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed

Wire
ASTM A586 04a(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Parallel and Helical Steel

Wire Structural Strand
ASTM A603 98(2009)e1
Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope
ASTM A817 - 07
Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Wire for ChainLink Fence Fabric and Marcelled Tension Wire
ASTM A824 - 01(2007)
Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension

Wire for Use With Chain Link Fence
ASTM F1183 96(2006)
Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Chain Link Fence Fabric
IS
Specification for Steel Wire Suspension Ropes for Lifts, Elevators

and Hoists (First Revision).
2365:1977
Waterproofing and Damp-proofing Materials
Waterproofing and damp-proofing materials shall conform to the following standards:

ASTM D41 - 05
Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp

proofing, and Waterproofing
ASTM D43 - 00(2006)
Standard Specification for Coal Tar Primer Used in Roofing, Damp

ASTM D146 - 04
Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing BitumenSaturated Felts and Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D173 - 03
Standard Specification for Bitumen-Saturated Cotton Fabrics Used

ASTM D6380 03(2009)
ASTM D226 / D226M 09
Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in

Roofing and Waterproofing
5-77
Part 5
Building Materials
2.16.8
ASTM D227 - 03
Standard Specification for Coal-Tar-Saturated Organic Felt Used in

ASTM D449 - 03(2008)
Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Damp proofing and

Waterproofing
ASTM D450 - 07
Standard Specification for Coal-Tar Pitch Used in Roofing, Damp

ASTM D1327 - 04
Standard Specification for Bitumen-Saturated Woven Burlap

Fabrics Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D1668 97a(2006)
Standard Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for

ASTM D2178 - 04
Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and

Waterproofing
ASTM D2626 - 04
Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and Coated Organic

Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing
ASTM D3468 99(2006)e1
Standard Specification for Liquid-Applied Neoprene and

Chlorosulfonated Polyethylene Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
Glazed Tiles and Tile-setting Mortars
Glazed tiles shall conform to the following standards:

BDS
1301:1990
Specification for Glazed Earthenware Wall Tiles;
ASTM C126 - 09

ANSI
Specification for Ceramic Tile;
A137.1-2008
BS
6431
to Part 23
Part 1
Ceramic Floor and Wall Tiles.
2.16.8.1 Mortars for Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile

a) Portland Cement Mortars: Portland cement mortars for installing ceramic wall and floor tile shall comply
with ANSI A108.1-2009 and be of the compositions indicated in Table 5.2.1.
b) Dry-set Portland Cement Mortars: Premixed prepared Portland cement mortars, which require only the
addition of water and which are used in the installation of ceramic tile, shall comply with ANSI A 118.12009. The shear bond strength for tile set in such mortar shall be as required in accordance with that
standard. Tile set in dry-set Portland cement mortar shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A 108.52009.
c) Electrically Conductive Dry-Set Mortars: Premixed prepared Portland cement mortars, which require only
the addition of water and which comply with ANSI A118.2-2009, shall be used in the installation of
5-78
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
electrically conductive ceramic tile. Tile set in electrically conductive dry-set mortar shall be installed in
accordance with ANSI A 108.7-2009.
d) Latex-modified Portland Cement Mortars: Latex-modified Portland cement thin set mortars in which
Lalex is added to dry-set mortar as a replacement for all or part of the gauging water which are used for
the installation of ceramic tile shall comply with ANSI A 118.4-2009. Tile set in latex-modified Portland
cement mortar shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A 108.5-2009.
e) Epoxy Mortar: Chemical-resistant epoxy for setting and grouting ceramic tile shall comply with ANSI A
118.3-2009. Tile set and grouted with epoxy shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A 108.6-2009.
f)
Furan Mortar and Grout: Chemical resistant furan mortar and grout which are used to install ceramic tile
shall comply with ANSI A 118.5-2009. Tile set and grouted with furan shall be installed in accordance with
ANSI A 108.8-2009.
g) Modified Epoxy-Emulsion Mortar and Grout: Modified epoxy-emulsion mortar and grout which are used
to install ceramic tile shall comply with ANSI A 118.8-2009. Tile set and grouted with modified epoxyemulsion mortar and grout shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A 108.9-2009.
h) Organic Adhesives: Water-resistant organic adhesives used for the installation of ceramic tile shall comply
with ANSI A 136.1-2009. The shear bond strength after water immersion shall not be less than 0.25
kN/mm2 for Type I adhesive, and not less than 0.13 kN/mm2 for Type II adhesive when tested in
accordance with ANSI A 136.1-2009. Tile set in organic adhesive shall be installed in accordance with
ANSI A 108.4-2009.
i)
Portland Cement Grouts: Portland cement grouts used for the installation of ceramic tile shall comply
with ANSI A 118.6-2009. Portland cement grouts for tilework shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A
108.10-2009.
2.16.8.2 Applicable Standards

A list of applicable standards for tiles, mortars and adhesives is given below.
BDS
1301 : 1990
ASTM C126 - 09
Specification for Glazed Earthenware Wall Tiles;

ANSI
A108.1-2009
Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile with Portland

Cement Mortar;
ANSI
A108.4-2009
Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water

Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive;
ANSI
A108.5-2009
Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or

Latex-Portland Cement Mortar;
ANSI
A108.6-2009
Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water

Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy;
ANSI
A108.7-2009
Specification for Electrically Conductive Ceramic Tile Installed with

Conductive Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar;
5-79
Part 5
Building Materials
ANSI
A108.8-2009
Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Mortar

and Grout;
ANSI
A108.9-2009
Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion

Mortar/Grout;
ANSI
A108.10-2009
Installation of Grout in Tilework;
ANSI
A118.1-2009
Specification for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar;
ANSI
A118.2-2009
Specifications for Conductive Dry-set Portland Cement Mortar;
ANSI
A118.3-2009
Specifications for Chemical Resistant Water Cleanable Tile Setting

and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy
Adhesive;
ANSI
A118.4-2009
Specifications Furan Latex - Portland Cement Mortar;
ANSI
A118.5-2009
Specifications for Chemical Resistant Furan;
ANSI
A118.6-2009
Specifications for Ceramic Tile Grouts;
ANSI
A118.8-2009
Specifications for Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout;
ANSI
A136.1-2009
Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile;
ANSI
A137.1-2008
Specifications for Ceramic Tile;
BS
6431
Floor and Wall Tiles;
BS
1983
6431 Part 1
Specification for Classification and Making, Including Definitions

and Characteristics;
BS
1984
6431 Part 2
Specification for Struded Ceramic Tiles with Low Water Absorption

(E< 3%) Group A1;
BS
6431 Part 3
Extruded Ceramic Tiles with a Water Absorption of 3% < 6%. Group

A 11a;
BS
6431 Part 3
Specification for General Products;
Section 3.1 1986

BS
6431 Part 3
Specification for Products Terre Cuite, Cotto, Baldosion Catalan;
Section 3.2 1986
5-80
BS
6431 Part 4
Extruded Ceramic Tiles with a Water Absorption of 6% <E< 10%.

Group A11b;
BS
6431 Part 4
Specification for General Products;
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
1986
BS
6431 Part 4
Section 4.2
Specification for Specific Products (Terre Cuite, Cotto, Baldosion

Catalan);
1986
BS
1986
6431 Part 5
Specification for Extruded Ceramic Tiles with a Water Absorption of

E>10%, Group A111;
BS
1984
6431 Part 6
Specification for Dust-prestressed Ceramic Tiles with a Low-Water

Absorption (E<3%)Group B1;
BS
1986
6431 Part 7
Specification for Dust-prestressed Ceramic Tiles with a Water

Absorption of 3% <E
6%. Group B11a;
BS
1986
6431 Part 8
Specification for Dust-prestressed Ceramic Tiles with Water

Absorption of 6% < E
10%. Group B11b;
BS
1984
6431 Part 9
Specification for Dust-Prestressed Ceramic Tiles with a Water

Absorption of E >10%. Group B111;
BS
1984
6431 Part 10
Method for Determination of Dimensions and Surface Quality;
BS
1983
6431 Part 11
Method for Determination of Water Absorption;
BS
1983
6431 Part 12
Method for Determination of Modulus of;
BS
1986
6431 Part 13
Method for Determination of Scratch Hardness of Surface

According to Mhos;
BS
1983
6431 Part 14
Method for Determination of Resistance to Abrasion of Unglazed

Tiles;
BS
1983
6431 Part 15
Method for Determination of Linear Thermal Expansion;
BS
1983
6431 Part 16
Method for Determination of Resistance to Thermal Shock;
BS
1983
6431 Part 17
Method for Determination of Crazing Resistance-Glazed Tiles;
BS
1983
6431 Part 18
Method for Determination of Chemical Resistance-Unglazed Tiles;
BS
1984
6431 Part 19
Method for Determination of Chemical Resistance-Unglazed Tiles;
5-81
Part 5
Building Materials
2.16.9
BS
1984
6431 Part 20
Method for Determination of Resistance to Surface AbrasionGlazed Tiles;
BS
1986
6431 Part 23
Specification for Sampling and Basis for Acceptance;
Refractories
Refractories shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 1493:1994
Glossary of terms used in refractory
BDS 1494:1994
Dimension of refractory bricks
BDS 1495:1994
5-82
High aluminium refractory bricks
ISO
528:1983
Refractory Products-Determination of Pyrometric Cone Equivalent

(refractoriness);
ISO
1109:1975
Refractory Products-Classification of Dense Shaped Refractory

Products;
ISO
1146:1988
Pyrometric Reference Cones for Laboratory Use-Specification;
ISO
1893:1989
Refractory Products-Determination of Refractoriness-Under-Load

(differential with rising temperature);
ISO
1927:1984
Prepared Unshaped Refractory Materials (Dense and Insulating)

Classification;
ISO
2245:1990
Shaped Insulating Refractory Products-Classification;
ISO
2477:1987
Shaped Insulating Refractory Products-Determination

Permanent Change in Dimensions on Heating;
ISO
2478:1987
Dense Shaped Refractory Products-Determination of Permanent

Change in Dimensions on Heating;
ISO
3187:1989
Refractory Products-Determination of Creep in Compression;
ISO
5013:1985
Refractory Products-Determination of Modulus of Rupture at

Elevated Temperatures;
ISO
5014:1986
Refractory Products-Determination of Modulus of Rupture at

Ambient Temperature;
ISO
5016:1986
Shaped Insulating Refractory Products-Determination of Bulk

Density and True Porosity;
ISO
5017:1988
Dense Shaped Refractory Products-Determination of Bulk Density,
of
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
Apparent Porosity and True Porosity;

ISO
5018:1983
Refractory Materials-Determination of True Density;
ISO
5019-1:1984
Refractory Bricks-Dimensions-Part I: Rectangular Bricks;
ISO
5019-2:1984
Refractory Bricks-Dimensions-Part 2: Arch Bricks;
ISO
5019-3:1984
Refractory Bricks-Dimensions-Part 3: Rectangular Checker Bricks

for Regenerative Furnace;
ISO
5419-4:1988
Refractory Bricks-Dimensions-Part 4: Dome Bricks for Electric arc

Furnace Roofs;
ISO
5015-6:1984
Refractory Bricks-Dimensions-Part 6: Basic Bricks for Oxygen Steel

Making Converters;
ISO
5022:1979
Shaped Refractory Products-Sampling and Acceptance Testing;
ISO
5417-1986
Refractory Bricks for Use in Rotary Kilns-Dimensions;
ISO
8656:1988
Refractory Products-Sampling of Raw Materials and Unshaped

Products;
Part 1; Sampling Scheme;
ISO
8840:1987
Refractory Materials-Determination of Bulk Density of Granular

Materials (Grain Density);
ISO
8890:1988
Dense Shaped Refractory Products-Determination of Resistance to

Sulfuric Acid;
ISO
8894-1:1987
Refractory Materials-Determination of Thermal ConductivityPart 1: Hot-Wire Method (Cross-Array);
ISO
8894-2:1990
Refractory Materials-Determination of Thermal ConductivityPart 2: Hot-Wire Method (Parallel);
ISO
8895:1986
Shaped Insulating Refractory Products-Determination of Cold

Crushing Strength;
ISO
9205:1988
Refractory Bricks for Use in Rotary Kilns-Hot-face Identification

Marking;
ISO
10080:1990
Refractory Products-Classification of Dense, Shaped Acid-Resisting

Products;
ISO
10081:1991
Basic Refractory Products-Classification-Part I: Products Containing

Less Than 7% Residual Carbon.
5-83
Part 5
Building Materials
2.16.10 Thermal Insulating Materials

Thermal insulation may be in the following physical forms:
Loose fill dry granules or nodules poured or below in place;
Flexible or semi rigid blankets and bolts of wool like material;
Rigid boards and blocks;
Membrane reflective insulation;
Spray applied mineral fibre or insulating concrete;
Poured in plain-insulating concrete;
Foamed in place-polyurethane;
Gypsum plaster.
Thermal insulating materials shall conform to the standards listed below.
5-84
ASTM C167 - 09
Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Blanket or

Batt Thermal Insulations
ASTM C177 - 04
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements

and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the GuardedHot-Plate Apparatus
ASTM C195 - 07
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating

Cement
ASTM C196 - 00(2005)
Standard Specification for Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite

Thermal Insulating Cement
ASTM C208 - 08a
Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board
ASTM C209 - 07ae1
Standard Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board
ASTM C1363 - 05
Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building

Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box
Apparatus
ASTM C240 - 08e1
Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block
ASTM C335 - 05ae1
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of

Pipe Insulation
ASTM C411 - 05
Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of HighTemperature Thermal Insulation
ASTM C449 - 07
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal

Insulating and Finishing Cement
ASTM C516 - 08
Standard Specification for Vermiculite Loose Fill Thermal Insulation
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
ASTM C518 - 04
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission

Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
ASTM C520 - 04
Standard Test Methods for Density of Granular Loose Fill

Insulations
ASTM C533 - 09
Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal

Insulation
ASTM C534 / C534M 08
Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form
ASTM C547 - 07e1
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
ASTM C549 - 06
Standard Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation
ASTM C552 - 07
Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation
ASTM C553 - 08
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal

Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications
ASTM C578 - 09e1
Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal

Insulation
ASTM C591 - 09
Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular

Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation
ASTM C592 - 08a
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and

Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial
Type)
ASTM C610 - 09e1
Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe

Thermal Insulation
ASTM C612 - 09
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal

Insulation
ASTM C665 - 06
Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal

Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing
ASTM C726 - 05e1
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Roof Insulation Board
ASTM C728 - 05(2010)
Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board
ASTM C739 - 08
Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal

Insulation
ASTM C764 - 07
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal

Insulation
ASTM C916 - 85(2007)
Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation
5-85
Part 5
Building Materials
ASTM C991 - 08e1
Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Insulation for

Metal Buildings
ASTM C1014 - 08
Standard Specification for Spray-Applied Mineral Fiber Thermal

and Sound Absorbing Insulation
ASTM C1029 - 09
Standard Specification for Spray-Applied

Polyurethane Thermal Insulation
ASTM C1071 - 05e1
Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation

(Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)
Rigid
Cellular
2.16.11 Screw Threads and Rivets

IS
554:1975
Dimensions for Pipe Threads where Pressure Tight Joints are

Required on the Threads (Second Revision);
IS
1929:1982
Specification for Hot Forged Steel Rivets for Hot Closing (12 to 36
mm diameter) (First Revision);
IS
2155:1982
Specification for Cold-Forged Solid Steel Rivets for Hot Closing (6

to 16 mm diameter) (First Revision);
IS
2643:1975
Dimensions for Pipe Threads for Fastening Purposes;

Part I - Basic Profile and Dimensions (First Revision);
Part II - Tolerances (First Revision);
Part III - Limits of Sizes;
IS
2907:1964
Specification for Non-ferrous Rivets (1.6 mm to 10 mm)
IS
2998:1981
Specification for Cold Forged Steel Rivets for Cold Closing (1 to 16

mm diameter) (First Revision);
IS
10102:1982
Technical supply conditions for Rivets.
2.16.12 Sealants
Sealants shall conform to the following standards:
5-86
ASTM C509 - 06
Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket

and Sealing Material
ASTM C542 - 05
Standard Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
ASTM C564 - 09a
Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings
ASTM C716 - 06
Standard Specification for Installing Lock-Strip Gaskets and Infill

Glazing Materials
ASTM C719 - 93(2005)
Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric

Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle)
ASTM C1193 - 09
Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants
ASTM C794 - 06
Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint

Sealants
ASTM C834 - 10
Standard Specification for Latex Sealants
ASTM C864 - 05
Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal

Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers
ASTM C919 - 08
Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications
ASTM C920 - 08
Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C1193 - 09
Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants
ASTM D2628 - 91(2005)
Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric

Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements
ASTM D6690 - 07
Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied,

for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements
ASTM D3406 - 95(2006)
Standard Specification for Joint Sealant, Hot-Applied, ElastomericType, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
ASTM D3667 - 05
Standard Specification for Rubber Seals Used in Flat-Plate Solar

Collectors
ASTM D3771 - 03(2007)
Standard Specification for Rubber Seals Used in Concentrating

Solar Collectors
ASTM D3832 - 79(2006)
Standard Specification for Rubber Seals Contacting Liquids in Solar

Energy Systems
ISO
3934:1978
Rubber Building Gaskets-Materials in Preformed Solid

Vulcanizates Used for Sealing Glazing and Panels-Specification;
ISO
4633:1983
Rubber Seals-Joint Rings for Water Supply, Drainage and

Sewerage Pipelines-Specifications for Materials;
ISO
4635:1982
Rubber, Vulcanized-Preformed Compression Seals for Use
5-87
Part 5
Building Materials
Between Concrete Motorway Paving Sections-Specifications for

Material;
ISO
5892:1981
Rubber Building Gaskets-Materials for Preformed Solid Vulcanized

Structural Gaskets-Specification;
ISO
6447:1991
Rubber Seals-Joint Rings Used for Gas Supply Pipes and FittingsSpecification for Material;
ISO
9331:1991
Rubber Seals Joint Rings for Hot Water Supply Pipelines up to

110oC Specifications for the Material.
2.16.13 Joints and Jointing Products

Joints and jointing products shall conform to the following standards:
5-88
ISO
2444 : 1988
Joints in Buildings-Vocabulary;
ISO
3867:1982
Agglomerated Cork-Material of Expansion Joints for Construction

and Building Test-Methods;
ISO
3869:1981
Agglomerated Cork-Filler Material of Expansion Joints for

Construction and Buildings -Characteristics, Sampling and Packing;
ISO
3934:1978
Rubber Building Gaskets-Materials in Preformed Solid

Vulcanizates Used for Sealing Glazing and Panels-Specification;
ISO
4633:1983
Rubber Seals-Joint Rings for Water Supply, Drainage and

Sewerage Pipelines-Specification for Materials;
ISO
4635:1982
Rubber, Vulcanized-Preformed Compression Seals for Use

Between Concrete Motorway Paving Sections-Specification for
Material;
ISO
5892:1981
Rubber Building Gaskets-Materials for Preformed Solid Vulcanized

Structural Gaskets-Specification;
ISO
6447:1983
Rubber Seals-Joint Rings Used for Gas Supply Pipes and FittingsSpecification for Material;
ISO
6589:1983
Joints in Building-Laboratory Method of Test for Air Permeability

of Joints;
ISO
7389:1987
Building Construction-Jointing Products-Determination of Elastic

Recovery;
ISO
7390:1987
Building Construction-Jointing
Resistance to Flow;
ISO
7727:1984
Joints in Building-Principles for Jointing of Building ComponentsAccommodation of Dimensional Deviations During Construction;
Products-Determination
of
Vol. 2
Building Materials
Chapter 2
ISO
8339:1984
Building Construction-Jointing Products-Sealants-Determination of

Tensile Properties;
ISO
8340:1984
Building Construction-Jointing Products-Sealants-Determination of

Tensile Properties at Maintained Extension;
ISO
8394:1988
Building Construction-Jointing Products-Determination

Extrudability of One-Component Sealants;
ISO
9046:1987
Building Construction-Sealants-Determination
Cohesion Properties at Constant Temperature;
of
Adhesion/
ISO
9047:1989
Building Construction-Sealants-Determination
Cohesion Properties at Variable Temperatures;
of
Adhesion/
ISO
9631:1991
Rubber Seals-Joint Rings for Hot Water Supply Pipelines up to

110oC Specifications for the Material;
ISO
10563:1991
Building Construction-Sealants for Joints-Determination of Change

in Mass and Volume;
ISO
10590:1991
Building
Construction-Sealants-Determination
of
Adhesion/Cohesion Properties at Maintained Extension after
Immersion in Water;
10591 : 1991
Building
Construction-Sealants-Determination
Adhesion/Cohesion Properties after Immersion in Water.
ISO
of
of
2.16.14 Glass and Glazing

The applicable standards for glass and glazing are listed below :
ASTM C1036 - 06
Standard Specification for Flat Glass
ASTM C1048 - 04
Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat GlassKind HS,

Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass
ANSI
Z 97.1-2009
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Tests for

Transport Safety Glazing Materials Used in Building;
CPSC
16 CFR
Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.

Part 1201A
2.17 CGI SHEET ROOFING AND WALLING

Galvanized corrugated steel sheets conforming to BDS 868, Galvanized Corrugated Sheet Roof and Wall
Coverings, may be used over structural framing for construction of roofs and walls. Requirements for various
roofing materials including CGI sheet have been specified in Sec 2.13 above.
5-89
Part 5
Building Materials
5-90
Vol. 2
Chapter 1
DEFINITIONSANDGENERALEQUIREMENTS
1.1
INTRODUCTION
1.1.1
SCOPE
The definitions providing meanings of different terms and general requirements for the structural design of
buildings, structures, and components thereof are specified in this chapter. These requirements shall apply to all
buildings and structures or their components regulated by this code. All anticipated loads required for structural
design shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2. Design parameters required for the
structuraldesignoffoundationelementsshallconformtotheprovisionsofChapter3.Designofstructuralmembers
using various construction materials shall comply with the relevant provisions of Chapters 4 through 13. The FPS
equivalentsoftheempiricalexpressionsusedthroughoutPart6arelistedinAppendixA.
ThisCodeshallgoverninallmatterspertainingtodesign,construction,andmaterialpropertieswhereverthisCode
is in conflict with requirements contained in other standards referenced in this Code. However, in special cases
wherethedesignofastructureoritscomponentscannotbecoveredbytheprovisionsofthiscode,otherrelevant
internationallyacceptedcodesreferredinthiscodemaybeused.
1.1.2
DEFINITIONS
Thefollowingdefinitionsshallprovidethemeaningofcertaintermsusedinthischapter.
BASESHEAR:Totaldesignlateralforceorshearatthebaseofastructure.
BASIC WIND SPEED : Threesecond gust speed at 10 metres above the mean ground level in terrain ExposureB
definedinSec2.4.8andassociatedwithanannualprobabilityofoccurrenceof0.02.
BEARINGWALLSYSTEM:Astructuralsystemwithoutacompleteverticalloadcarryingspaceframe.
BRACEDFRAME:Anessentiallyverticaltrusssystemoftheconcentricoreccentrictypewhichisprovidedtoresist
lateralforces.
BUILDINGFRAMESYSTEM:Anessentiallycompletespaceframewhichprovidessupportforloads.
CONCENTRICBRACEDFRAME(CBF):AsteelbracedframedesignedinconformancewithSec10.20.13.or10.20.14.
COLLECTOR : A member or element used to transfer lateral forces from a portion of a structure to the vertical
elementsofthelateralforceresistingelements.
BUILDINGS:Structuresthatencloseaspaceandareusedforvariousoccupancies.
DEADLOAD:Theloadduetotheweightofallpermanentstructuralandnonstructuralcomponentsofabuildingor
astructure,suchaswalls,floors,roofsandfixedserviceequipment.
DIAPHRAGM : A horizontal or nearly horizontal system acting to transmit lateral forces to the vertical resisting
elements.Theterm"diaphragm"includeshorizontalbracingsystems.
Part6
DUALSYSTEM:AcombinationofMomentResistingFramesandShearWallsorBracedFramestoresistlateralloads
designedinaccordancewiththecriteriaofSec1.3.2.
ECCENTRICBRACEDFRAME(EBF):AsteelbracedframedesignedinconformancewithSec10.20.15.
HORIZONTAL BRACING SYSTEM : A horizontal truss system that serves the same function as a floor or roof
diaphragm.
INTERMEDIATE MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (IMRF) : A concrete moment resisting frame designed in accordance
withSec8.3.10.
LIVELOAD:Theloadsuperimposedbytheuseandoccupancyofabuilding.
MOMENT RESISTING FRAME : A frame in which members and joints are capable of resisting forces primarily by
flexure.
ORDINARY MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (OMRF) : A moment resisting frame not meeting special detailing
requirementsforductilebehaviour.
PRIMARYFRAMINGSYSTEM:Thatpartofthestructuralsystemassignedtoresistlateralforces.
SHEARWALL:Awalldesignedtoresistlateralforcesparalleltotheplaneofthewall(sometimesreferredtoasa
verticaldiaphragmorastructuralwall).
SLENDER BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES : Buildings and structures having a height exceeding five times the least
horizontal dimension, or having a fundamental natural frequency less than 1 Hz. For those cases where the
horizontaldimensionsvarywithheight,theleasthorizontaldimensionatmidheightshallbeused.
SOFTSTOREY:Storeyinwhichthelateralstiffnessislessthan70percentofthestiffnessofthestoreyabove.
SPACEFRAME:Athreedimensionalstructuralsystemwithoutbearingwallscomposedofmembersinterconnected
soastofunctionasacompleteselfcontainedunitwithorwithouttheaidofhorizontaldiaphragmsorfloorbracing
systems.
SPECIAL MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (SMRF) : A moment resisting frame specially detailed to provide ductile
behaviourcomplyingwiththerequirementsofChapter8or10forconcreteorsteelframesrespectively.
SPECIAL STRUCTURAL SYSTEM : A structural system not listed in Table 1.3.1 and specially designed to carry the
lateralloads.SeeSec1.3.2.5.
STOREY:Thespacebetweenanytwofloorlevelsincludingtheroofofabuilding.Storeyxisthestoreybelowlevel
x.
STOREYSHEAR,Vx:Thesummationofdesignlateralforcesabovethestoreyunderconsideration.
STRENGTH:Theusablecapacityofanelementoramembertoresisttheloadasprescribedintheseprovisions.
TERRAIN:Thegroundsurfaceroughnessconditionwhenconsideringthesizeandarrangementofobstructionsto
thewind.
THREESECONDGUSTSPEED:Thehighestaveragewindspeedovera3seconddurationataheightof10m.The
threesecondgustspeedisderivedusingDurst'smodelintermsofthemeanwindspeedandturbulenceintensity.
TOWER:Atall,slimverticalstructure.
VERTICALLOADCARRYINGFRAME:Aspaceframedesignedtocarryallverticalgravityloads.
WEAKSTOREY:Storeyinwhichthelateralstrengthislessthan80percentofthatofthestoreyabove.
Chapter1
1.1.3
SYMBOLSANDNOTATION
Thefollowingsymbolsandnotationshallapplytotheprovisionsofthischapter:
D
=dead load on a member including self weight and weight of components, materials and
permanentequipmentssupportedbythemember
E
=earthquakeload
Fi
=lateralforceappliedatleveliofabuilding
=heightofabuildingorastructureabovegroundlevelinmetres
hi,hn,hx
=heightinmetresabovegroundleveltoleveli,norxrespectively
leveli
=ithlevelofastructureabovethebase;i=1designatesthefirstlevelabove
thebase
leveln
=uppermostlevelofastructure
levelx
=xthlevelofastructureabovethebase;x=1designatesthefirstlevelabovethebase.
=liveloadduetointendeduseoroccupancy
=spanofamemberorcomponent.
Mx
=overturningmomentatlevelx
=thetotaldesignlateralforceorshearatthebase
Vx
=thestoreyshearatstoreylevelx
=response modification or reduction coefficient for structural system given in Table 2.5.7 for
seismicdesign.
=Snowload
=Fundamentalperiodofvibrationinseconds
=Loadduetowindpressure.
=Weightofanelementorcomponent
=SeismiczonecoefficientgiveninFig2.5.1orTables2.5.2or2.5.3
=Storeylateraldrift.
1.2
BASICCONSIDERATIONS
1.2.1
GENERAL
Allbuildingsandstructuresshallbedesignedandconstructedinconformancewiththeprovisionsofthissection.
Thebuildingsandportionsthereofshallsupportallloadsincludingdeadloadspecifiedinthischapterandelsewhere
inthisCode.Impact,fatigueandselfstrainingforcesshallbeconsideredwheretheseforcesoccur.
1.2.2
BUILDINGSANDSTRUCTURES
A structure shall ordinarily be described as an assemblage of framing members and components arranged to
support both gravity and lateral forces. Structures may be classified as building and nonbuilding structures.
Structuresthatencloseaspaceandareusedforvariousoccupanciesshallbecalledbuildingsorbuildingstructures.
Structuresotherthanbuildings,suchaswatertanks,bridges,communicationtowers,chimneysetc.,shallbecalled
Part6
nonbuildingstructures.Whenusedinconjunctionwiththewordbuilding(s),thewordstructure(s)shallmeannon
buildingstructures,e.g.'buildingsandstructures'or'buildingsorstructures'.Otherwisetheword'structures'shall
includebothbuildingsandnonbuildingstructures.
1.2.3
BUILDINGANDSTRUCTUREOCCUPANCYCATEGORIES
Buildingsandotherstructuresshallbeclassified,basedonthenatureofoccupancy,accordingtoTable1.2.1forthe
purposes of applying flood, surge, wind and earthquake provisions. The occupancy categories range from I to IV,
whereOccupancyCategoryIrepresentsbuildingsandotherstructureswithalowhazardtohumanlifeintheevent
of failure and Occupancy Category IV represents essential facilities. Each building or other structure shall be
assignedtothehighestapplicableoccupancycategoryorcategories.Assignmentofthesamestructuretomultiple
occupancycategoriesbasedonuseandthetypeofloadconditionbeingevaluated(e.g.,windorseismic)shallbe
permissible.
Whenbuildingsorotherstructureshavemultipleuses(occupancies),therelationshipbetweentheusesofvarious
partsofthebuildingorotherstructureandtheindependenceofthestructuralsystemsforthosevariouspartsshall
beexamined.Theclassificationforeachindependentstructuralsystemofamultipleusebuildingorotherstructure
shallbethatofthehighestusagegroupinanypartofthebuildingorotherstructurethatisdependentonthatbasic
structuralsystem.
1.2.4
SAFETY
Buildings, structures and components thereof, shall be designed and constructed to support all loads, including
deadloads,withoutexceedingtheallowablestressesorspecifiedstrengths(underapplicablefactoredloads)forthe
materialsofconstructioninthestructuralmembersandconnections.
1.2.5
SERVICEABILITY
Structuralframingsystemsandcomponentsshallbedesignedwithadequatestiffnesstohavedeflections,vibration,
or any other deformations within the serviceability limit of building or structure. The deflections of structural
members shall not exceed the more restrictive of the limitations provided in Chapters 2 through 13 or that
permittedbyTable1.2.2orthenotesthatfollow.Forwindandearthquakeloading,storydriftandswayshallbe
limitedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec1.5.6.
1.2.6
RATIONALITY
Structuralsystemsandcomponentsthereofshallbeanalyzed,designedandconstructedbasedonrationalmethods
whichshallinclude,butnotbelimitedto,theprovisionsofSec1.2.7
1.2.7
ANALYSIS
Analysis of the structural systems shall be made for determining the load effects on the resisting elements and
connections,basedonwellestablishedprinciplesofmechanicstakingequilibrium,geometriccompatibilityandboth
shortandlongtermpropertiesoftheconstructionmaterialsintoaccountandincorporatingthefollowing:
1.2.7.1
MATHEMATICALMODEL
A mathematical model of the physical structure shall represent the spatial distribution of stiffness and other
propertiesofthestructurewhichisadequatetoprovideacompleteloadpathcapableoftransferringallloadsand
forces from their points of origin to the loadresisting elements for obtaining various load effects. For dynamic
analysis,mathematicalmodelshallalsoincorporatetheappropriatelydistributedmassanddampingpropertiesof
Chapter1
thestructureadequateforthedeterminationofthesignificantfeaturesofitsdynamicresponse.Allbuildingsand
structures shall be thus ananlyzed preferably using a three dimensional computerized model incorporating these
featuresofmathematicalmodel.Itisessentialtousethreedimensionalcomputermodeltorepresentastructure
havingirregularplanconfigurationsuchasthoselistedinTables1.3.2and1.3.3andhavingrigidorsemirigidfloor
and roof diaphragms. Requirements for twodimensional model and three dimensional models for earthquake
analysisaredescribedinSec.2.5.11to2.5.14.
Table1.2.1 OccupancyCategoryofBuildingsandOtherStructuresforFlood,Surge,WindandEarthquakeLoads
Occupancy
Category
NatureofOccupancy
Buildingsandotherstructuresthatrepresentalowhazardtohumanlifeintheeventoffailure,including,butnotlimited
to:
Agriculturalfacilities
Certaintemporaryfacilities
Minorstoragefacilities
AllbuildingsandotherstructuresexceptthoselistedinOccupancyCategoriesI,III,andIV
Buildingsandotherstructuresthatrepresentasubstantialhazardtohumanlifeintheeventoffailure,including,butnot
limitedto:
Buildingsandotherstructureswheremorethan300peoplecongregateinonearea
Buildingsandotherstructureswithdaycarefacilitieswithacapacitygreaterthan150
Buildingsandotherstructureswithelementaryschoolorsecondaryschoolfacilitieswithacapacitygreaterthan250
Buildingsandotherstructureswithacapacitygreaterthan500forcollegesoradulteducationfacilities
Healthcarefacilitieswithacapacityof50ormoreresidentpatients,butnothavingsurgeryoremergency
treatmentfacilities
Jailsanddetentionfacilities
Buildingsandotherstructures,notincludedinOccupancyCategoryIV,withpotentialtocauseasubstantialeconomic
impactand/ormassdisruptionofdaytodaycivilianlifeintheeventoffailure,including,butnotlimitedto:
Powergeneratingstationsa
Watertreatmentfacilities
Sewagetreatmentfacilities
Telecommunicationcenters
II
III
BuildingsandotherstructuresnotincludedinOccupancyCategoryIV(including,butnotlimitedto,facilitiesthat
manufacture,process,handle,store,use,ordisposeofsuchsubstancesashazardousfuels,hazardouschemicals,
hazardouswaste,orexplosives)containingsufficientquantitiesoftoxicorexplosivesubstancestobedangeroustothe
publicifreleased.
Buildingsandotherstructuresdesignatedasessentialfacilities,including,butnotlimitedto:
Hospitalsandotherhealthcarefacilitieshavingsurgeryoremergencytreatmentfacilities
Fire,rescue,ambulance,andpolicestationsandemergencyvehiclegarages
Designatedearthquake,hurricane,orotheremergencyshelters
Designatedemergencypreparedness,communication,andoperationcentersandotherfacilitiesrequiredfor
emergencyresponse
Powergeneratingstationsandotherpublicutilityfacilitiesrequiredinanemergency
Ancillarystructures(including,butnotlimitedto,communicationtowers,fuelstoragetanks,coolingtowers,
electricalsubstation structures,firewaterstoragetanksorotherstructureshousingorsupportingwater,orother
firesuppressionmaterialorequipment) requiredforoperationofOccupancyCategoryIVstructuresduringan
emergency
Aviationcontroltowers,airtrafficcontrolcenters,andemergencyaircrafthangars
Waterstoragefacilitiesandpumpstructuresrequiredtomaintainwaterpressureforfiresuppression
Buildingsandotherstructureshavingcriticalnationaldefensefunctions
IV
Buildingsandotherstructures(including,butnotlimitedto,facilitiesthatmanufacture,process,handle,store,use,or
dispose of such substances as hazardous fuels, hazardous chemicals, or hazardous waste) containing highly toxic
substances where the quantity of the material exceeds a threshold quantity established by the authority having
jurisdiction.
aCogenerationpowerplantsthatdonotsupplypoweronthenationalgridshallbedesignatedOccupancyCategoryII.
1.2.7.2
LOADSANDFORCES
Allprescribedloadsandforcestobesupportedbythestructuralsystemsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewith
theapplicableprovisionsofthischapterandChapter2.Loadsshallbeappliedonthemathematicalmodelspecified
inSec.1.2.7.1atappropriatespatiallocationsandalongdesireddirections.
Part6
Table1.2.2DeflectionLimits(Exceptearthquakeload)
Intheabovetable lstandsforspanofthememberunderconsideration; Lstandsforliveload, Wstandsfor

windloadandDstandsfordeadload.
Notes:
a. For structural roofing and siding made of formed metal sheets, the total load deflection shall not exceed l/60. For secondary roof
structural members supporting formed metal roofing, the live load deflection shall not exceed l/150. For secondary wall members
supporting formed metal siding, the design wind load deflection shall not exceed l/90. For roofs, this exception only applies when the
metalsheetshavenoroofcovering.
b.Interiorpartitionsnotexceeding2min heightand flexible,foldingand portablepartitionsarenot governedbytheprovisionsofthis
section.
c.Forcantilevermembers,lshallbetakenastwicethelengthofthecantilever.
d.Forwoodstructuralmembershavingamoisturecontentoflessthan16percentattimeofinstallationandusedunderdryconditions,
thedeflectionresultingfromL+0.5DispermittedtobesubstitutedforthedeflectionresultingfromL+D.
e.Theabovedeflectionsdonotensureagainstponding.Roofsthatdonothavesufficientslopeorcambertoassureadequatedrainageshall
beinvestigatedforponding.SeeSection1.6.5forrainandpondingrequirements.
f.Thewindloadispermittedtobetakenas0.7timesthecomponentandcladdingloadsforthepurposeofdeterminingdeflectionlimits
herein.
g.Forsteelstructuralmembers,thedeadloadshallbetakenaszero.
h. For aluminum structural members or aluminum panels used in skylights and sloped glazing framing, roofs or walls of sunroom
additionsorpatiocovers,notsupportingedgeofglassoraluminumsandwichpanels,thetotalloaddeflectionshallnotexceedl/60.For
continuousaluminumstructuralmemberssupportingedgeofglass,thetotalloaddeflectionshallnotexceed l/175foreachglassliteor
l/60fortheentirelengthofthemember,whicheverismorestringent.Foraluminumsandwichpanelsusedinroofsorwallsofsunroom
additionsorpatiocovers,thetotalloaddeflectionshallnotexceedl/120.
1.2.7.3
SOILSTRUCTUREINTERACTION
Soilstructure interaction effects, where required, shall be included in the analysis by appropriately including the
properlysubstantiatedpropertiesofsoilintothemathematicalmodelspecifiedinSec.1.2.7.1above.
1.2.8
DISTRIBUTIONOFHORIZONTALSHEAR
Thetotallateralforceshallbedistributedtothevariouselementsofthelateralforceresistingsysteminproportion
totheirrigiditiesconsideringtherigidityofthehorizontalbracingsystemsordiaphragms.
Chapter1
1.2.9
HORIZONTALTORSIONALMOMENTS
Structural systems and components shall be designed to sustain additional forces resulting from torsion due to
eccentricity between the centre of application of the lateral forces and the centre of rigidity of the lateral force
resisting system. Forces shall not be decreased due to torsional effects. For accidental torsion effects on seismic
forces,requirementsshallconformtoSec2.5.9.6
1.2.10
STABILITYAGAINSTOVERTURNINGANDSLIDING
Everybuildingorstructureshallbedesignedtoresisttheoverturningandslidingeffectscausedbythelateralforces
specifiedinthischapter.
1.2.11
ANCHORAGE
Anchorageoftherooftowallandcolumns,andofwallsandcolumnstofoundations,shallbeprovidedtoresistthe
upliftandslidingforcesresultingfromtheapplicationoftheprescribedloads.Additionalrequirementsformasonry
orconcretewallsshallbethosegiveninSec1.7.3.6.
1.2.12
GENERALSTRUCTURALINTEGRITY
Buildingsandstructuralsystemsshallpossessgeneralstructuralintegrity,thatistheabilitytosustainlocaldamage
caused due to misuse or accidental overloading, with the structure as a whole remaining stable and not being
damagedtoanextentdisproportionatetotheoriginallocaldamage.
1.2.13
PROPORTIONINGOFSTRUCTURALELEMENTS
Structuralelements,componentsandconnectionsshallbeproportionedanddetailedbasedonthedesignmethods
provided inthe subsequent chapters for variousmaterials ofconstruction, such as reinforced concrete, masonry,
steeletc.toresistvariousloadeffectsobtainedfromarationalanalysisofthestructuralsystem.
1.2.14
WALLSANDFRAMING
Walls and structural framing shall be erected true and plumb in accordance with the design. Interior walls,
permanent partitions and temporary partitions exceeding 1.8 m of height shall be designed to resist all loads to
whichtheyaresubjected.IfnototherwisespecifiedelsewhereinthisCode,wallsshallbedesignedforaminimum
load of 0.25 kN/m2 applied perpendicular to the wall surfaces. The deflection of such walls under a load of 0.25
kN/m2shallnotexceed 1/240ofthespanforwallswithbrittlefinishesand 1/120ofthespanforwallswithflexible
finishes. However, flexible, folding or portable partitions shall not be required to meet the above load and
deflectioncriteria,butshallbeanchoredtothesupportingstructure.
1.2.15
ADDITIONSTOEXISTINGSTRUCTURES
Whenanexistingbuildingorstructureisextendedorotherwisealtered,allportionsthereofaffectedbysuchcause
shallbestrengthened,ifnecessary,tocomplywiththesafetyandserviceabilityrequirementsprovidedinSec1.2.4
and1.2.5respectively.
1.2.16
PHASEDCONSTRUCTION
Whenabuildingorstructureisplannedoranticipatedtoundergophasedconstruction,structuralmemberstherein
shallbeinvestigatedanddesignedforanyadditionalstressesarisingduetosuchconstruction.
Part6
1.2.17
LOADCOMBINATIONSANDSTRESSINCREASE
Every building, structure, foundation or components thereof shall be designed to sustain, within the allowable
stress or specified strength (under factored load), the most unfavourable effects resulting from various
combinationsofloadsspecifiedinsection2.7.Exceptotherwisepermittedorrestrictedbyanyothersectionofthis
Code,maximumincreaseintheallowablestressshallbe33%whenallowableorworkingstressmethodofdesignis
followed.Forsoilstressesduetofoundationloads,loadcombinationsandstressincreasespecifiedinSec2.7.4for
allowablestressdesignmethodshallbeused.
1.3
STRUCTURALSYSTEMS
1.3.1
GENERAL
EverystructureshallhaveoneofthebasicstructuralsystemsspecifiedinSec1.3.2oracombinationthereof.The
structuralconfigurationshallbeasspecifiedinSec1.3.4withthelimitationsimposedinSec2.5.7.4.
1.3.2
BASICSTRUCTURALSYSTEMS
StructuralsystemsforbuildingsandotherstructuresshallbedesignatedasoneofthetypesAtoGlistedinTable
1.3.1. Each type is again classified as shown in the table by the types of vertical elements used to resist lateral
forces.Abriefdescriptionofdifferentstructuralsystemsarepresentedinfollowingsubsections.
Table1.3.1:BasicStructuralSystems
A.BEARINGWALLSYSTEMS(noframe)
1. Special reinforced concrete shear walls
2. Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
3. Ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls
4. Ordinary plain masonry shear walls
B.BUILDINGFRAMESYSTEMS(withbracingorshearwall)
1. Steel eccentrically braced frames, moment resisting connections at
columns away from links
2. Steel eccentrically braced frames, non-moment-resisting, connections at
3. Special steel concentrically braced frames
4. Ordinary steel concentrically braced frames
C.MOMENTRESISTINGFRAMESYSTEMS(noshearwall)
1. Special steel moment frames

2. Intermediate steel moment frames
3. Ordinary steel moment frames
4. Special reinforced concrete moment frames
5. Intermediate reinforced concrete moment frames
6. Ordinary reinforced concrete moment frames
D.DUALSYSTEMS:SPECIALMOMENTFRAMESCAPABLEOFRESISTINGATLEAST25%OF
PRESCRIBEDSEISMICFORCES(withbracingorshearwall)
1. Steel eccentrically braced frames
E.DUALSYSTEMS:INTERMEDIATEMOMENTFRAMESCAPABLEOFRESISTINGATLEAST25%
OFPRESCRIBEDSEISMICFORCES(withbracingorshearwall)
F.DUALSHEARWALLFRAMESYSTEM:ORDINARYREINFORCEDCONCRETEMOMENT
FRAMESANDORDINARYREINFORCEDCONCRETESHEARWALLS
G.STEELSYSTEMSNOTSPECIFICALLYDETAILEDFORSEISMICRESISTANCE
Chapter1
1.3.2.1
BEARINGWALLSYSTEM
A structural system having bearing walls or bracing systems without a complete vertical load carrying frame to
supportgravityloads.Resistancetolateralloadsisprovidedbyshearwallsorbracedframes.
1.3.2.2
BUILDINGFRAMESYSTEM
A structural system with an essentially complete space frame providing support for gravity loads. Resistance to
lateralloadsisprovidedbyshearwallsorbracedframesseparately.
1.3.2.3
MOMENTRESISTINGFRAMESYSTEM
Astructuralsystemwithanessentiallycompletespaceframeprovidingsupportforgravityloads.Momentresisting
framesalsoprovideresistancetolateralloadprimarilybyflexuralactionofmembers,andmaybeclassifiedasone
ofthefollowingtypes:
a)
SpecialMomentResistingFrames(SMRF)
b) IntermediateMomentResistingFrames(IMRF)
c)
OrdinaryMomentResistingFrames(OMRF).
The framing system, IMRF and SMRF shall have special detailing to provide ductile behaviour conforming to the
provisions of Sec 8.3 and 10.20 for concrete and steel structures respectively. OMRF need not conform to these
specialductilityrequirementsofChapter8or10.
1.3.2.4
DUALSYSTEM
Astructuralsystemhavingacombinationofthefollowingframingsystems:
a)
Momentresistingframes(SMRF,IMRForsteelOMRF),and
b) Shearwallsorbracedframes.
Thetwosystemsspecifiedin(a)and(b)aboveshallbedesignedtoresistthetotallateralforceinproportiontotheir
relativerigiditiesconsideringtheinteractionofthedualsystematalllevels.However,themomentresistingframes
shallbecapableofresistingatleast25%oftheapplicabletotalseismiclateralforce,evenwhenwindoranyother
lateralforcegovernsthedesign.
1.3.2.5
SPECIALSTRUCTURALSYSTEM:
AstructuralsystemnotdefinedabovenorlistedinTable1.3.1andspeciallydesignedtocarrythelateralloads,such
astubeintube,bundledtube,etc.
1.3.2.6
NONBUILDINGSTRUCTURALSYSTEM
AstructuralsystemusedforpurposesotherthaninbuildingsandconformingtoSec1.5.4.8,1.5.4.9,2.4and2.5.
1.3.3
COMBINATIONOFSTRUCTURALSYSTEMS
WhendifferentstructuralsystemsofSec1.3.2arecombinedforincorporationintothesamestructure,designof
thecombinedseismicforceresistingsystemshallconformtotheprovisionsofSec2.5.7.5.
1.3.4
STRUCTURALCONFIGURATIONS
Based on the structural configuration, each structure shall be designated as a regular or irregular structure as
definedbelow:
Part6
1.3.4.1
REGULARSTRUCTURES
Regularstructureshavenosignificantphysicaldiscontinuitiesorirregularitiesinplanorverticalconfigurationorin
theirlateralforceresistingsystems.TypicalfeaturescausingirregularityaredescribedinSec1.3.4.2.
1.3.4.2
IRREGULARSTRUCTURES
Irregularstructureshaveeitherverticalirregularityorplanirregularityorbothintheirstructuralconfigurationsor
lateralforceresistingsystems.
1.3.4.2.1
VerticalIrregularity
StructureshavingoneormoreoftheirregularfeatureslistedinTable1.3.2shallbedesignatedashavingavertical
irregularity.
Table1.3.2:VerticalIrregularitiesofStructures
Type
Definition
Reference*
Section
StiffnessIrregularity(SoftStorey):
Asoftstoreyisoneinwhichthelateralstiffnessislessthan70percentofthat
in the storey above or less than 80 per cent of the average stiffness of the
threestoreysabove.
MassIrregularity:
Massirregularityshallbeconsideredtoexistwheretheeffectivemassofany
storeyismorethan150percentoftheeffectivemassofanadjacentstorey.A
roofwhichislighterthanthefloorbelowneednotbeconsidered.
VerticalGeometricIrregularity:
Verticalgeometricirregularityshallbeconsideredtoexistwherehorizontal
dimensionofthelateralforceresistingsysteminanystoreyismorethan130
per cent of that in an adjacent storey, onestorey penthouses need not be
considered.
InPlaneDiscontinuityinVerticalLateralForceResistingElement:
An inplane offset of the lateral loadresisting elements greater than the
lengthofthoseelements.
DiscontinuityinCapacity(WeakStorey):
Aweakstoreyisoneinwhichthestoreystrengthislessthan 80percentof
that in the storey above. The storey strength is the total strength of all
seismicresisting elements sharing the storey shear for the direction under
consideration.
ExtremeDiscontinuityinCapacity(VeryWeakStorey):
Averyweakstoreyisoneinwhichthestoreystrengthislessthan65percent
ofthatinthestoreyabove.
2.5.7to2.5.14
and2.5.19
II
III
IV
Va
Vb
2.5.7to2.5.14
2.5.7to2.5.14
2.5.7to2.5.14
2.5.7to2.5.14
and2.5.19
2.5.7to2.5.14
and2.5.19
1.3.4.2.2
PlanIrregularity
Structures having one or more of the irregular features listed in Table 1.3.3 shall be designated as having a plan
irregularity.
Table1.3.3:PlanIrregularitiesofStructures
PlanIrregularity
Reference*
Section
Type Definition
I
Torsional Irregularity (to be considered when diaphragms are not

flexible):
2.5.7to2.5.14
Torsional irregularity shall be considered to exist when the maximum storey
drift,computedincludingaccidentaltorsion,atoneendofthestructureismore
than1.2timestheaverageofthestoreydriftsatthetwoendsofthestructure.
10
Chapter1
II
ReentrantCorners:
Planconfigurationsofastructureanditslateralforceresistingsystemcontain
reentrantcorners,wherebothprojectionsofthestructurebeyondareentrant
corner are greater than 15 per cent of the plan dimension of the structure in
thegivendirection.
DiaphragmDiscontinuity:
Diaphragms with abrupt discontinuities or variations in stiffness, including
those having cutout or open areas greater than 50 per cent of the gross
enclosedareaofthediaphragm,orchangesineffectivediaphragmstiffnessof
morethan50percentfromonestoreytothenext.
OutofplaneOffsets:
Discontinuities in a lateral force path, such as outofplane offsets of the
verticalelements.
NonparallelSystems:
The vertical lateral loadresisting elements are not parallel to or symmetric
aboutthemajororthogonalaxesofthelateralforceresistingsystem.
III
IV
V
2.5.7to2.5.14
2.5.7to2.5.14
2.5.7to2.5.14
2.5.7to2.5.14
1.4
DESIGNFORGRAVITYLOADS
1.4.1
GENERAL
Design of buildings and components thereof for gravity loads shall conform to the requirements of this section.
Gravity loads, such as dead load and live loads applied at the floors or roof of a building shall be determined in
accordancewiththeprovisionsofChapter2.
1.4.2
FLOORDESIGN
FloorslabsanddecksshallbedesignedforthefulldeadandliveloadsasspecifiedinSec2.2and2.3respectively.
Floor supporting elements such as beams, joists, columns etc. shall be designed for the full dead load and the
appropriately reduced live loads set forth by the provisions of Sec 2.3.13. Design of floor elements shall also
conformtothefollowingprovisions:
a)
UniformlyDistributedLoads:Whereuniformfloorloadsareinvolved,considerationmaybe
limitedtofulldeadloadonallspansincombinationwithfullliveloadonadjacentspansand
on alternate spans to determine the most unfavourable effect of stresses in the member
concerned.
b) ConcentratedLoads:Provisionshallbemadeindesigningfloorsforaconcentratedloadas
set forth in Sec 2.3.5 applied at a location wherever this load acting upon an otherwise
unloaded floor would produce stresses greater than those caused by the uniform load
requiredtherefore.
c)
Partition Loads : Loads due to permanent partitions shall be treated as a dead load applied
overthefloorasauniformlineloadhavinganintensityequaltotheweightpermetrerunof
thepartitionsasspecifiedinSec2.2.5.Loadsforlightmovablepartitionsshallbedetermined
inaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec2.3.6.
d) Design of Members : Floor members, such as slabs or decks, beams, joists etc. shall be
designedtosustaintheworsteffectofthedeadplusliveloadsoranyotherloadcombinations
asspecifiedinSec2.7.Wherefloorsareusedasdiaphragmstotransmitlateralloadsbetween
various resisting elements, those loads shall be determined following the provisions of Sec
1.7.3.8. Detailed design of the floor elements shall be performed using the procedures
providedinChapters4through13forvariousconstructionmaterials.
11
Part6
1.4.3
ROOFDESIGN
Roofs and their supporting elements shall be designed to sustain, within their allowable stresses or specified
strengthlimits,alldeadloadsandliveloadsassetoutbytheprovisionsofSec2.2and2.3respectively.Designof
roofmembersshallalsoconformtothefollowingrequirements:
a)
Application of Loads : When uniformly distributed loads are considered for the design of
continuousstructuralmembers,loadincludingfulldeadloadsonallspansincombinationwith
fullliveloadsonadjacentspansandonalternatespan,shallbeinvestigatedtodeterminethe
worst effects of loading. Concentrated roof live loads and special roof live loads, where
applicable,shallalsobeconsideredindesign.
b) UnbalancedLoading:Effectsduetounbalancedloadsshallbeconsideredinthedesignofroof
membersandconnectionswheresuchloadingwillresultinmorecriticalstresses.Trussesand
archesshallbedesignedtoresistthestressescausedbyuniformliveloadsononehalfofthe
span if such loading results in reverse stresses, or stresses greater in any portion than the
stressesproducedbythisunitliveloadwhenappliedupontheentirespan.
c)
RainLoads:Roofs,wherepondingofrainwaterisanticipatedduetoblockageofroofdrains,
excessive deflectionor insufficient slopes, shall be designedto support suchloads.Loads on
roofs due to rain shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Sec 2.6.3. In
additiontothedeadloadoftheroof,eithertheroofliveloadortherainload,whicheverisof
higherintensity,shallbeconsideredindesign.
1.4.4
REDUCTIONOFLIVELOADS
ThedesignliveloadsspecifiedinSec2.3,maybereducedtoappropriatevaluesaspermittedbytheprovisionsof
Sec2.3.13.andSec.2.3.14.
1.4.5
POSTINGOFLIVELOADS
Ineverybuilding,ofwhichthefloorsorpartsthereofhaveadesignliveloadof3.5kN/m2ormore,andwhichare
used as library stack room, file room, parking garage, machine or plant room, or used for industrial or storage
purposes,the ownerofthe buildingshall ensurethattheliveloadsforwhichsuchspace has beendesigned,are
postedondurablemetalplatesasshowninFig1.1,securelyaffixedinaconspicuousplaceineachspacetowhich
theyrelate.Ifsuchplatesarelost,removed,ordefaced,theownershallberesponsibletohavethemreplaced.
1.4.6
RESTRICTIONSONLOADING
The building owner shall ensure that the live load for which a floor or roof is or has been designed, will not be
exceededduringitsuse.
1.4.7
SPECIALCONSIDERATIONS
Intheabsenceofactualdeadandliveloaddata,theminimumvaluesoftheseloadsshallbethosespecifiedinSec
2.2and2.3.Inaddition,specialconsiderationshallbegiventothefollowingaspectsofloadinganddueallowances
shallbemadeindesignifoccurrenceofsuchloadingisanticipatedafterconstructionofabuilding:
a)
IncreaseinDeadLoad:Actualthicknessoftheconcreteslabsorothermembersmaybecome
largerthanthedesignedthicknessduetomovementsordeflectionsoftheformworkduring
construction.
12
Chapter1
b) Future Installatio
ons: Changes iin the numbeers, types and positions of partitions and
d other
ding.
insttallationsmayincreaseactuaalloadontheffloorsofabuild
c)
OcccupancyChangges:Increasein
nliveloadsdue
etochangeso
ofoccupancyin
nvolvingloadsheavier
thanthatbeingdesignedfor.
Figure1.1:SampleLiveLoadSign
1.4.8
DEFLECT
TIONANDC
CAMBER
Structural systems and members thereof shall be designed to have

h
adequatee stiffness to limit
l
deflections. The
Chapters2thro
ough13
deflectionssofstructural membersshallnotexceedtthemorerestrrictiveofthelimitationsofC
orthatperrmittedbyTab
ble1.2.2.orpro
ovisionsofSecc1.2.5.Incalcu
ulatingdeflectionsduetograavityloads,lon
ngterm
effects(e.gg.creep,shrinkkageorstressrrelaxation)sho
ouldalsobeco
onsidered.
1.5
DESIGNFORLAT
TERALLOA
ADS
1.5.1
GENERAL
L
Everybuild
ding,structureorportionsth
hereofshallbedesignedtoresistthelateraalloadeffects,,suchasthoseedueto
windorearthquakeforcees,incomplian
ncewiththereequirementsprrescribedinthissection.
1.5.2
SELECTIO
ONOFLATE
ERALFORC
CEFORDES
SIGN
Any of the
e lateral loadss prescribed in
n Chapter 2, cconsidered eitther alone or in combinatio
on with other forces,
whicheverproducesthemostcriticale
effect,shallgovvernthedesign.However,th
hestructuraldetailingrequirements
plywiththose prescribedin Sec1.7.When
nadualstructturalsystemisusedtoresisttlateralloads,,design
shallcomp
shallalsocconformtoSecc1.3.2.4.
1.5.3
DESIGNF
FORWINDL
LOAD
Design of buildings and their comp

ponents to reesist wind ind
duced forces shall complyy with the fo
ollowing
requirements:
13
Part6
1.5.3.1
DIRECTIONOFWIND
Structural design for wind forces shall be based on the assumption that wind may blow from any horizontal
direction.
1.5.3.2
DESIGNCONSIDERATIONS
Designwindloadontheprimaryframingsystemsandcomponentsofabuildingorstructureshallbedeterminedon
thebasisoftheproceduresprovidedinSec2.4consideringthebasicwindspeed,shapeandsizeofthebuilding,and
theterrainexposure conditionofthesite.Forslenderbuildingsandstructures, dynamicresponse characteristics,
such as fundamental natural frequency, shall be determined for calculating the gust response coefficient. Load
effects, such as forces, moments, deflections etc. on various components of the building due to wind shall be
determinedfromastaticanalysisofthestructureasspecifiedinSec1.2.7.1.
1.5.3.3
SHIELDINGEFFECT
Reductions in wind pressure on buildings and structures due to apparent direct shielding effects of the up wind
obstructions,suchasmanmadeconstructionsornaturalterrainfeatures,shallnotbepermitted.
1.5.3.4
DYNAMICEFFECTS
Dynamic wind forces such as that from alongwind vibrations caused by the dynamic windstructure interaction
effects, as set forth by the provisions of Sec 2.4.10, shall be considered in the design of regular shaped slender
buildings.Forotherdynamiceffectssuchascrosswindortorsionalresponsesasmaybeexperiencedbybuildings
orstructureshavingunusualgeometricalshapes(i.e.verticalorplanirregularitieslistedinTables1.3.2and1.3.3),
responsecharacteristics,orsitelocations,structuraldesignshallbemadebasedontheinformationobtainedeither
from other reliable references or from windtunnel test specified in Sec 1.5.3.5 below, complying with the other
requirementsofthissection.
1.5.3.5
WINDTUNNELTEST
Properlyconductedwindtunneltestsshallberequiredforthosebuildingsorstructureshavingunusualgeometric
shapes,responsecharacteristics,orsitelocationsforwhichcrosswindresponsesuchasvortexshedding,galloping
etc. warrant special consideration, and for which no reliable literature for the determination of such effects is
available. This test is also recommended for those buildings or structures for which more accurate windloading
informationisdesiredthanthosegiveninthissectionandinSec2.4.
Testsforthedeterminationofmeanandfluctuatingcomponentsofforcesandpressuresshallbeconsideredtobe
properlyconductedonlyifthefollowingrequirementsaresatisfied:
a) Thenaturalwindhasbeenmodelledtoaccountforthevariationofwindspeedwithheight,
b) The intensity of the longitudinal components of turbulence has been taken into consideration in the
model,
c) The geometric scale of the structural model is not more than three times the geometric scale of the
longitudinalcomponentofturbulence,
d) Theresponsecharacteristicsofthewindtunnelinstrumentationareconsistentwiththemeasurements
tobemade,and
e) The Reynolds number is taken into consideration when determining forces and pressures on the
structuralelements.
14
Chapter1
Tests for the purpose of determining the dynamic response of a structure shall be considered to be properly
conducted only if requirements (a) through (e) above are fulfilled and, in addition, the structural model is scaled
withdueconsiderationtolength,distributionofmass,stiffnessanddampingofthestructure.
1.5.3.6
WINDLOADSDURINGCONSTRUCTION
Buildings, structures and portions thereof under construction, and construction structures such as formwork,
stagingetc.shallbeprovidedwithadequatetemporarybracingsorotherlateralsupportstoresistthewindloadon
themduringtheerectionandconstructionphase.
1.5.3.7
MASONRYCONSTRUCTIONINHIGHWINDREGIONS
Designandconstructionofmasonrystructuresinhighwindregionsshallconformtotherequirementsofrelevant
sectionsofChapter7.
1.5.3.8
HEIGHTLIMITS
UnlessotherwisespecifiedelsewhereinthisCode,noheightlimitsshallbeimposed,ingeneral,onthedesignand
constructionofbuildingsorstructurestoresistwindinducedforces.
1.5.4
DESIGNFOREARTHQUAKEFORCES
Design of structures and components thereof to resist the effects of earthquake forces shall comply with the
1.5.4.1
BASICDESIGNCONSIDERATION
Forthepurposeofearthquakeresistantdesign,eachstructureshallbeplacedinoneoftheseismiczonesasgivenin
Sec 2.5.6.2 and assigned with a structure importance category as set forth in Sec 2.5.7.1. The seismic forces on
structuresshallbedeterminedconsideringseismiczoning,sitesoilcharacteristics,structureimportance,structural
systemsandconfigurations,heightanddynamicpropertiesofthestructureasprovidedinSec2.5.Thestructural
systemandconfigurationtypesforabuildingorastructureshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththeprovisions
ofSec2.5.7.4.Otherseismicdesignrequirementsshallbethosespecifiedinthissection.
1.5.4.2
REQUIREMENTSFORDIRECTIONALEFFECTS
Thedirectionsofapplicationofseismicforcesusedinthedesignshallbethosewhichwillproducethemostcritical
loadeffects.Earthquakeforcesactinbothprincipaldirectionsofthebuildingsimultaneously.Designprovisionsfor
consideringearthquakecomponentinorthogonaldirectionshavebeenprovidedinSec2.5.15.1.
1.5.4.3
STRUCTURALSYSTEMANDCONFIGURATIONREQUIREMENTS
Seismicdesignprovisionsimposethefollowinglimitationsontheuseofstructuralsystemsandconfigurations:
a)
The structural system used shall satisfy requirements of the Seismic Design Category (defined in
Sec.2.5.7.2)andheightlimitationsgiveninSec2.5.7.4.
b) StructuresassignedtoSeismicDesignCategoryDhavingverticalirregularityTypeVbofTable1.3.2
shall not be permitted. Structures with such vertical irregularity may be permitted for Seismic
DesignCategoryBorCbutshallnotbeovertwostoriesor9minheight.
c)
Structures having irregular features described in Table 1.3.2 or 1.3.3 shall be designed in
compliancewiththeadditionalrequirementsofthesectionsreferencedintheseTables.
15
Part6
d) Special Structural Systems defined in Sec 1.3.2.5 may be permitted if it can be demonstrated by
analytical and test data to be equivalent, with regard to dynamic characteristics, lateral force
resistance and energy absorption, to one of the structural systems listed in Table 2.5.7, for
obtaininganequivalentRandCdvalueforseismicdesign.
1.5.4.4
METHODSOFANALYSIS
Earthquake forces and their effects on various structural elements shall be determined by using either a static
analysismethodoradynamicanalysismethodwhicheverisapplicablebasedonthelimitationssetforthinSec2.5.7
through2.5.14andconformingtoSec1.2.7.
1.5.4.5
MINIMUMDESIGNSEISMICFORCE
The minimum design seismic forces shall be those determined in accordance with the Sec 2.5.7 through 2.5.14
whicheverisapplicable.
1.5.4.6
DISTRIBUTIONOFSEISMICFORCES
Thetotallateralseismicforcesandmomentsshallbedistributedamongvariousresistingelementsatanyleveland
alongtheverticaldirectionofabuildingorstructureinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec2.5.7through2.5.14
asappropriate.
1.5.4.7
VERTICALCOMPONENTSOFSEISMICFORCES
DesignprovisionsforconsideringverticalcomponentofearthquakegroundmotionisgiveninSec2.5.15.2
1.5.4.8
HEIGHTLIMITS
HeightlimitationsfordifferentstructuralsystemsaregiveninTable2.5.7ofSec2.5.7.4ofPart6ofthiscodeasa
functionofseismicdesigncategory.
1.5.4.9
NONBUILDINGSTRUCTURES
SeismiclateralforceonnonbuildingstructuresshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofChapter15
ofASCE705.However,provisionsofChapter15ofASCE705maybesimplified,consistentwiththeprovisionsof
Section2.5ofPart6ofthiscode.Otherdesignrequirementsshallbethoseprovidedinthischapter.
1.5.5
OVERTURNINGREQUIREMENTS
Everystructureshallbedesignedtoresisttheoverturningeffectscausedbywindorearthquakeforcesspecifiedin
Sec2.4and2.5respectivelyaswellotherlateralforceslikeearthpressure,tidalsurgeetc.Theoverturningmoment
Mxatanystoreylevelxofabuildingshallbedeterminedas:
1.5.1
where,
hi,hx,hn =
Heightinmetresatleveli,xornrespectively.
Fi
Lateralforceappliedatleveli,i=1ton.
16
Chapter1
Atanylevel,theincrementofoverturningmomentshallbedistributedtothevariousresistingelementsinthesame
mannerasthedistributionofhorizontalshearprescribedinSec2.5.9.5.Overturningeffectsoneveryelementshall
becarrieddowntothefoundationlevel.
1.5.6
DRIFTANDBUILDINGSEPARATION
1.5.6.1
STOREYDRIFTLIMITATION
Storeydriftisthehorizontaldisplacementofonelevelofabuildingorstructurerelativetothelevelaboveorbelow
duetothedesigngravity(deadandliveloads)orlateralforces(e.g.windandearthquakeloads).Exceptotherwise
permitted in Sec 1.3.4.2.1 calculated storey drift shall include both translational and torsional deflections and
conformtothefollowingrequirements:
1.
Storeydrift,,forloadsotherthanearthquakeloads,shallbelimitedasfollows:
0.005h
forT<0.7second.
0.004h
forT0.7second.
0.0025h
forunreinforcedmasonrystructures.
where,h=heightofthebuildingorstructure.
TheperiodTusedinthiscalculationshallbethesameasthatusedfordeterminingthebaseshear
inSec2.5.9.2.
2.
Thedriftlimitssetoutin(1)abovemaybeexceededwhereitcanbedemonstratedthatgreater
driftcanbetoleratedbybothstructuralandnonstructuralelementswithoutaffectinglifesafety.
3.
Forearthquakeloads,thestorydrift,,shallbelimitedinaccordancewiththelimitssetforthin
Sec2.5.16.1
1.5.6.2
SWAYLIMITATION
The overall sway (horizontal deflection) at the top level of the building or structure due to wind loading shall be
1
limitedto /500timesofthetotalheightofthebuildingabovebase.
1.5.7
BUILDINGSEPARATION
Allcomponentsofastructureshallbedesignedandconstructedtoactasanintegralunitunlesstheyareseparated
structurallybyadistancesufficienttoavoidcontactunderthemostunfavourableconditionofdeflectionsdueto
lateralloads.Forseismicloads,designguidelinesaregiveninSec2.5.16.3.
1.5.8
PDELTAEFFECTS
TheresultingmemberforcesandmomentsandthestoreydriftsinducedbyPDeltaeffectsneednotbeconsidered
whenthestabilitycoefficient()remainswithin0.10.Thiscoefficient(describedinSec2.5.9.9)maybeevaluated
foranystoreyastheproductofthetotalverticaldeadandliveloadsabovethestoreyandthelateraldriftinthat
storeydividedbytheproductofthestoreyshearinthatstoreyandtheheightofthatstorey.
1.5.9
UPLIFTEFFECTS
Uplifteffectscausedduetolateralloadsshallbeconsideredindesign.Whenallowable(working)stressmethodis
usedfordesign,deadloadsusedtoreduceupliftshallbemultipliedbyafactorof0.85.
17
Part6
1.6
DESIGNFORMISCELLANEOUSLOADS
1.6.1
GENERAL
Buildings, structuresand components thereof, whensubject toloads other than dead,live, wind and earthquake
loads,shallbedesignedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthissection.Miscellaneousloads,suchasthosedueto
temperature,rain,floodandsurgeetc.onbuildingsorstructures,shallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSec2.6.
Structuralmemberssubjecttomiscellaneousloads,notspecifiedinSec2.6shallbedesignedusingwellestablished
methodsgiveninanyreliablereferences,andcomplyingwiththeotherrequirementsofthisCode.
1.6.2
SELFSTRAININGFORCES
Selfstraining forces such as those arising due to assumed differential settlements of foundations and from
restraineddimensionalchangesduetotemperature,moisture,shrinkage,creep,andsimilareffects,shallbetaken
intoconsiderationinthedesignofstructuralmembers.
1.6.3
STRESSREVERSALANDFATIGUE
Structural members and joints shall be investigated and designed against possible stress reversals caused due to
various construction loads. Where required, allowance shall be made in the design to account for the effects of
fatigue.Theallowablestressmaybeappropriatelyreducedtoaccountforsucheffectsinthestructuralmembers.
1.6.4
FLOOD,TIDAL/STORMSURGEANDTSUNAMI
Buildings, structures and components thereof shall be designed, constructed and anchored to resist flotation,
collapseoranypermanentmovementduetoloadsincludingflood,tidal/Stormsurgeandtsunami,whenapplicable.
Structuralmembersshallbedesignedtoresistbothhydrostaticandsignificanthydrodynamicloadsandeffectsof
buoyancyresultingfromfloodorsurge.Floodandsurgeloadsonbuildingsandstructuresshallbedeterminedin
accordance with Sec 2.6.4. Load combination including flood and surge loads shall conform to Sec 2.7. Design of
foundationstosustaintheseloadeffectsshallconformtotheprovisionsofSec1.8.
Stability against overturning and sliding caused due to wind and flood or surge loads simultaneously shall be
investigated,andsucheffectsshallberesistedwithaminimumfactorofsafetyof1.5,consideringdeadloadonly.
1.6.5
RAINLOADS
Roofsofthebuildingsandstructuresaswellastheirothercomponentswhichmayhavethecapabilityofretaining
rainwatershallbedesignedforadequategravityloadinducedbyponding.Roofsandsuchothercomponentsshall
beanalysedanddesignedforloadduetopondingcausedbyaccidentalblockageofdrainagesystemcomplyingwith
Sec.2.6.3.
1.6.6
OTHERLOADS
Buildingsandstructuresandtheircomponentsshallbeanalyzedanddesignedforstressescausedbythefollowing
effects
a.
TemparatureEffects(Sec2.6.5).
b.
SoilandHydrostaticPressure(Sec2.6.6).
c.
ImpactsandCollisions
d.
Explosions(Sec2.6.7).
18
Chapter1
e.
Fire
f.
VerticalForcesonAirRaidShelters(Sec2.6.8).
g.
LoadsonHelicopterLandingAreas(Sec2.6.9).
h.
ErectionandConstructionLoads(Sec2.6.10).
i.
MovingLoadsforCraneMovements
j.
CreepandShrinkage
k.
DynamicLoadsduetoVibrations
l.
ConstructionLoads
Designofbuildingsandstructuresshallincludeloadingandstressescausedbytheaboveeffectsinaccordancewith
theprovisionssetforthinChapter2.
1.7
DETAILEDDESIGNREQUIREMENTS
1.7.1
GENERAL
All structural framing systems shall comply with the requirements of this section. Only the elements of the
designated lateral force resisting systems can be used to resist design lateral forces specified in Chapter 2. The
individualcomponentsshallbedesignedtoresisttheprescribedforcesactingonthem.Designofcomponentsshall
alsocomplywiththespecificrequirementsforthematerialscontainedinChapters4through13.Inaddition,such
framingsystemsandcomponentsshallcomplywiththedesignrequirementsprovidedinthissection.
1.7.2
STRUCTURALFRAMINGSYSTEMS
ThebasicstructuralsystemsaredefinedinSec1.3.2andshowninTable1.3.1,andeachtypeissubdividedbythe
typesofframingelementsusedtoresistthelateralforces.Thestructuralsystemusedshallsatisfyrequirementsof
seismicdesigncategoryandheightlimitationsindicatedinTable2.5.7.Specialframingrequirementsaregivenin
thefollowingsectionsinadditiontothoseprovidedinChapters4through13.
1.7.3
DETAILINGREQUIREMENTSFORCOMBINATIONSOFSTRUCTURAL
SYSTEMS:
Forcomponentscommontodifferentstructuralsystems,amorerestrictivedetailingshallbeprovided.
1.7.3.1
CONNECTIONSTORESISTSEISMICFORCES
Connections which resist prescribed seismic forces shall be designed in accordance with the seismic design
requirements provided in Chapters 4 through 13. Detailed sketches for these connections shall be given in the
structuraldrawings.
1.7.3.2
DEFORMATIONCOMPATIBILITY
Allframingelementsnotrequiredbydesigntobepartofthelateralforceresistingsystem,shallbeinvestigatedand
showntobeadequateforverticalloadcarryingcapacitywhensubjectedtolateraldisplacementsresultingfromthe
seismic lateral forces. For designs using working stress methods, this capacity may be determined using an
allowablestressincreaseof30percent.PDeltaeffectsonsuchelementsshallbeaccountedfor.
19
Part6
a.
AdjoiningRigidElements:Momentresistingframesmaybeenclosed oradjoinedbymorerigid
elementswhichwouldtendtopreventaspaceframefromresistinglateralforceswhereitcanbe
shownthattheactionorfailureofthemorerigidelementswillnotimpairtheverticalandlateral
loadresistingabilityofthespaceframe.
b.
ExteriorElements:Exteriornonbearing,nonshearwallpanelsorelementswhichareattachedto
orenclosetheexteriorofastructure,shallbedesignedtoresisttheforcesaccordingtoSec.2.5.17
of Chapter 2, if seismic forces are present, and shall accommodate movements of the structure
resulting from lateral forces or temperature changes. Such elements shall be supported by
structural members or by mechanical connections and fasteners joining them to structural
membersinaccordancewiththefollowingprovisions:
i.
Connectionsandpaneljointsshallallowforarelativemovementbetweenstoreysofnotless
than two times the storey drift caused by wind forces or design seismic forces, or 12 mm,
whicheverisgreater.
ii.
Connections to permit movement in the plane of the panel for storey drift shall be either
slidingconnectionsusingslottedoroversizedholes,connectionswhichpermitmovementby
bendingofsteel,orotherconnectionsprovidingequivalentslidingandductilitycapacity.
iii.
Bodies of connections shall have sufficient ductility and rotation capability to preclude any
fractureoftheanchoringelementsorbrittlefailuresatornearweldings.
iv.
Bodies of the connection shall be designed for 1.33 times the seismic force determined by
Sec.2.5.17ofChapter2,orequivalent.
v.
All fasteners in the connection system, such as bolts, inserts, welds, dowels etc. shall be
designedfor4timestheforcesdeterminedbySec.2.5.17ofChapter2orequivalent.
vi.
Fastenersembeddedinconcreteshallbeattachedto,orhookedaroundreinforcingsteel,or
otherwiseterminatedsoastotransferforcestothereinforcingsteeleffectively.
1.7.3.3
TIESANDCONTINUITY
Allpartsofastructureshallbeinterconnected.Theseconnectionsshallbecapableoftransmittingtheprescribed
lateralforcetothelateralforceresistingsystem.Individualmembers,includingthosenotpartoftheseismicforce
resisting system, shall be provided with adequate strength to resist the shears, axial forces, and moments
determined in accordance with this standard. Connections shall develop the strength of the connected members
andshallbecapableoftransmittingtheseismicforce(Fp)inducedbythepartsbeingconnected.
1.7.3.4
COLLECTORELEMENTS
Collector elements shall be provided which are capable of transferring the lateral forces originating in other
portionsofthestructuretotheelementprovidingtheresistancetothoseforces.
1.7.3.5
CONCRETEFRAMES
Whenconcreteframesareprovidedbydesigntobepartofthelateralforceresistingsystem,theyshallconformto
thefollowingprovisions:
a)
InSeismicZones3and4theseframesshallbedesignedasspecialmomentresistingframes(SMRF).
b) InSeismicZone2theyshall,asaminimum,beintermediatemomentresistingframes(IMRF).
20
Chapter1
1.7.3.6
ANCHORAGEOFCONCRETEANDMASONRYSTRUCTURALWALLS
The concrete and masonry structural walls shall be anchored to supporting construction. The anchorage shall
provide a positive direct connection between the wall and floor or roof and shall be capable of resisting the
horizontal forces specified in Secs 2.4.13 and 2.5.17, or a minimum force of 4.09 kN/m of wall. Walls shall be
designedtoresistbendingbetweenanchorswheretheanchorspacingexceeds1.2m.Inmasonrywallsofhollow
units or cavity walls, anchors shall be embedded in a reinforced grouted structural element of the wall.
Deformations of the floor and roof diaphragms shall be considered in the design of the supported walls and the
anchorageforcesinthediaphragmsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSec1.7.3.9below.
1.7.3.7
BOUNDARYMEMBERS
Specially detailed boundary members shall be considered for shearwalls and shearwall elements whenever their
designisgovernedbyflexure.
1.7.3.8
FLOORANDROOFDIAPHRAGMS
Deflection in the plane of the diaphragm shall not exceed the permissible deflection of the attached elements.
Permissible deflection shall be that deflection which will permit the attached element to maintain its structural
integrityundertheindividualloadingandcontinuetosupporttheprescribedloads.Designofdiaphragmsshallalso
complywiththefollowingrequirements.
a)
DiaphragmForces:DiaphragmsshallbedesignedtoresisttheseismicforcesgiveninSec2.5or
forsimilarnonseismiclateralforces,whicheverisgreater.
b) DiaphragmTies:Diaphragmssupportingconcreteormasonrywallsshallhavecontinuousties,or
struts between the diaphragm chords to distribute the anchorage forces specified in Sec 1.7.3.6
above.Addedchordsmaybeprovidedtoformsubdiaphragmstotransmittheanchorageforcesto
themaincrossties.
c)
Wood Diaphragms : Where wood diaphragms are used to laterally support concrete or masonry
walls,theanchorageshallconformtoSec1.7.3.6above.InseismicZones2,3and4thefollowing
requirementsshallalsoapply:
i. Anchorageshallnotbeaccomplishedbyuseoftoenailsornailssubjecttowithdrawal,
norshallwoodledgersorframingbeusedincrossgrainbendingorcrossgraintension.
ii. The continuous ties required by paragraph (b) above, shall be in addition to the
diaphragmsheathing.
d) Structureshavingirregularities
i)
ForstructuresassignedtoSeismicDesignCategoryDandhavingaplanirregularityofType
I,II,III,orIVinTable1.3.3oraverticalstructuralirregularityofTypeIVinTable1.3.2,the
designforcesdeterminedfromSection2.5.9shallbeincreased25percentforconnections
of diaphragms to vertical elements and to collectors and for connections of collectors to
the vertical elements. Collectors and their connections also shall be designed for these
increased forces unless they are designed for the load combinations with overstrength
factor.
ii)
For structures having a plan irregularity of Type II in Table 1.3.3, diaphragm chords and
collectorsshallbedesignedconsideringindependentmovementofanyprojectingwingsof
21
Part6
thestructure.Eachofthesediaphragmelementsshallbedesignedforthemoresevereof
thefollowingcases:
1.
Motionoftheprojectingwingsinthesamedirection.
2.
Motionoftheprojectingwingsinopposingdirections.
Exception:
ThisrequirementmaybedeemedtobesatisfiediftheproceduresofSec2.5.10whenseismicforcesarepresent,in
conjunctionwithathreedimensionalmodel,havebeenusedtodeterminethelateralseismicforcesfordesign.
1.7.3.9
FRAMINGBELOWTHEBASE
Whenstructuralframingscontinuebelowthebase,thefollowingrequirementsshallbesatisfied.
a.
FramingbetweentheBaseandtheFoundation:Thestrengthandstiffnessoftheframingbetween
thebaseandthefoundationshallnotbelessthanthatofthesuperstructure.Thespecialdetailing
requirements of Sec 8.3 or 10.20, as appropriate for reinforced concrete or steel, shall apply to
columns supporting discontinuous lateral force resisting elements and to SMRF, IMRF, and EBF
system elements below the base which are required to transmit the forcesresulting fromlateral
loadstothefoundation.
b.
Foundations: The foundation shall be capable of transmitting the design base shear and the
overturning forces from the superstructure into the supporting soil, but the short term dynamic
nature of the loads may be taken into account in establishing the soil properties. Sec 1.8 below
prescribestheadditionalrequirementsforspecifictypesoffoundationconstruction.
1.8
FOUNDATIONDESIGNREQUIREMENTS
1.8.1
GENERAL
The design andconstruction of foundation, foundation components and connection between thefoundation and
superstructureshallconformtotherequirementsofthissectionandapplicableprovisionsofChapter3andother
portionsofthisCode.
1.8.2
SOILCAPACITIES
Thebearingcapacityofthesoil,orthecapacityofthesoilfoundationsystemincludingfooting,pile,pierorcaisson
andthesoil,shallbesufficienttosupportthestructurewithallprescribedloads,consideringthesettlementofthe
structure. For piles, this refers to pile capacity as determined by pilesoil friction and bearing which may be
determinedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofChapter3.Fortheloadcombinationincludingearthquake,thesoil
capacity shall be sufficient to resist loads at acceptable strains considering both the short time loading and the
dynamicpropertiesofthesoil.Thestressandsettlementofsoilunderappliedloadsshallbedeterminedbasedon
establishedmethodsofSoilMechanics.
1.8.3
SUPERSTRUCTURETOFOUNDATIONCONNECTION
Theconnectionofsuperstructureelementstothefoundationshallbeadequatetotransmittothefoundationthe
forcesforwhichtheelementsarerequiredtobedesigned.
22
Chapter1
1.8.4
FOUNDATIONSOILINTERFACE
For regular buildings the base overturning moments for the entire structure or for any one of its lateral force
resisting elements, shall not exceed twothirds of the dead load resisting moment. The weight of the earth
superimposedoverfootingsmaybeusedtocalculatethedeadloadresistingmoment.
1.8.5
SPECIALREQUIREMENTSFORFOOTINGS,PILESANDCAISSONSINSEISMIC
ZONES2,3AND4
1.8.5.1
PILESANDCAISSONS
Piles and caissons shall be designed for flexure whenever the top of such members is anticipated to be laterally
displacedbyearthquakemotions.ThecriteriaanddetailingrequirementsofSec8.3forconcreteandSec10.20for
steelshallapplyforalengthofsuchmembersequalto120percentoftheflexurallength.
1.8.5.2
FOOTINGINTERCONNECTION
a.
Footingsandpilecapsshallbecompletelyinterconnectedbystruttiesorotherequivalentmeans
torestraintheirlateralmovementsinanyorthogonaldirection.
b.
Thestruttiesorotherequivalentmeansasspecifiedin(a)above,shallbecapableofresistingin
tensionorcompressionaforcenotlessthan10%ofthelargerfootingorcolumnloadunlessitcan
bedemonstratedthatequivalentrestraintcanbeprovidedbyfrictionalandpassivesoilresistance
orbyotherestablishedmeans.
1.8.6
RETAININGWALLDESIGN
Retainingwallsshallbedesignedtoresistthelateralpressureoftheretainedmaterial,underdrainedorundrained
conditions and including surcharge, in accordance with established engineering practice. For such walls, the
minimumfactorofsafetyagainstbaseoverturningandslidingduetoappliedearthpressureshallbe1.5.
1.9
DESIGNANDCONSTRUCTIONREVIEW
Everybuildingorstructuredesignedshallhaveitsdesigndocumentspreparedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsof
Sec1.9.1.Theminimumrequirementsfordesignreviewandconstructionobservationshallbethosesetforthunder
Sec1.9.2and1.9.3respectively.
1.9.1
DESIGNDOCUMENT
The design documents shall be prepared and signed by the engineer responsible for the structural design of any
building or structure intended for construction. The design documents shall include a design report, material
specificationsandasetofstructuraldrawings,whichshallbepreparedincompliancewithSec1.9.2and1.9.3below
forsubmittaltotheconcernedauthority.Forthepurposeofthisprovision,theconcernedauthorityshallbeeither
personsfromthegovernmentapprovalagencyfortheconstruction,ortheownerofthebuildingorthestructure,or
oneofhisrepresentatives.
1.9.2
DESIGNREPORT
Thedesignreportshallcontainthedescriptionofthestructuraldesignwithbasic designinformationasprovided
below,sothatanyotherstructuraldesignengineerwillbeabletoindependentlyverifythedesignparametersand
themembersizesusingthesebasicinformation.Thedesignreportshallinclude,butnotbelimitedto,thefollowing
:
23
Part6
a)
Name and governing edition of this Code and other referenced standards, and the specific
portions, stating chapter, section, clause etc. of these Code and standards including any
specialistreportusedforthestructuraldesign.
b) Methodsusedforthecalculationofallappliedloadsalongwithbasicloadcoefficientsand
other basic information including any assumption or judgment made under special
circumstances.
c)
A drawing of the complete mathematical model prepared in accordance with Sec 1.2.7.1 to
represent the structure and showing on it the values, locations and directions of all applied
loads,andlocationofthelateralloadresistingsystemssuchasshearwalls,bracedframesetc.
d) Methodsofstructuralanalysis,andresultsoftheanalysissuchasshear,moment,axialforce
etc., used for proportioning various structural members and joints including foundation
members.
e) Methods of structural design including types and strength of the materials of construction
usedforproportioningthestructuralmembers.
f)
Reference of the soil report or any other documents used in the design of the structure,
foundationorcomponentsthereof.
g)
Statementsupportingthevalidityoftheabovedesigndocumentswithdateandsignatureof
theengineerresponsibleforthestructuraldesign.
h) When computer programs are used, to any extent, to aid in the analysis or design of the
structure,thefollowingitems,inadditiontoitems(a)through(g)above,shallberequiredto
beincludedinthedesignreport:
i.
Asketchofthemathematicalmodelusedtorepresentthestructureinthecomputer
generatedanalysis.
ii.
The computer output containing the date of processing, program identification,

identification of structures being analysed, all input data, units and final results. The
computer input data shall be clearly distinguished from those computed in the
program.
iii.
A program description containing the information necessary to verify the input data
and interpret the results to determine the nature and extent of the analysis and to
checkwhetherthecomputationscomplywiththeprovisionsofthisCode.
iv.
Thefirstsheetofeachcomputerrunshallbesignedbytheengineerresponsibleforthe
structuraldesign.
1.9.3
STRUCTURALDRAWINGSANDMATERIALSPECIFICATIONS
Thestructuraldrawingsshallinclude,butnotbelimitedto,thefollowing:
a)
Thefirstsheetshallcontain:(1)identificationoftheprojecttowhichthebuildingorthestructure,
orportionthereofbelongs,(2)referencetothedesignreportspecifiedinSec1.9.2above,(3)date
ofcompletionofdesign,and(4)identificationandsignaturewithdateoftheengineerresponsible
forthestructuraldesign.
24
Chapter1
b) The second sheet shall contain detail material specifications showing : (1) Specified compressive
strength of concrete at stated ages or stages of construction for which each part of structure is
designed (2) Specified strength or grade of reinforcement (3) Specified strength of prestressing
tendonsorwires(4)Specifiedstrengthorgradeofsteel(5)Specifiedstrengthsforbolts,weldsetc.
(6) Specified strength of masonry, timber, bamboo, ferrocement (7) Minimum concrete
compressivestrengthattimeofposttensioning(8)Stressingsequenceforposttensioningtendons
(9) General notes indicating clear cover, development lengths of reinforcements, or any other
design parameter relevant to the member or connection details provided in drawings to be
followed,asapplicable,and(10)identificationandsignaturewithdateoftheengineerresponsible
forthestructuraldesign.
c)
Drawing sheets, other than the first two, shall include structural details of the elements of the
structure clearly showing all sizes, crosssections and relative locations, connections,
reinforcements, laps, stiffeners, welding types, lengths and locations etc. whichever is applicable
for a particular construction. Floor levels, column centres and offset etc., shall be dimensioned.
Camber of trusses and beams, if required, shall be shown on drawings. For bolt connected
members,connectiontypessuchasslip,critical,tensionorbearingtype,shallbeindicatedonthe
drawing.
d) Drawingsshallbepreparedtoascalelargeenoughtoshowtheinformationclearlyandthescales
shallbemarkedonthedrawingsheets.Ifanyvariationfromthedesignspecificationsprovidedin
sheettwooccurs,thedrawingsheetshallbeprovidedadditionallywiththedesignspecifications
includingmaterialtypesandstrength,clearcoveranddevelopmentlengthsofreinforcements,or
anyotherdesignparameterrelevanttothememberorconnectiondetailsprovidedinthatdrawing
sheet.Eachdrawingsheetshallalsocontainthesignaturewithdateoftheengineerresponsiblefor
thestructuraldesign.
1.9.4
DESIGNREVIEW
ThedesigndocumentsspecifiedinSec1.9.1shallbeavailableforreviewwhenrequiredbytheconcernedauthority.
Review shall be accomplished by an independent structural engineer qualified for this task and appointed by the
concernedauthority.Designreviewshallbeperformedthroughindependentcalculations,basedontheinformation
provided in the design documents prepared and signed by the original structural design engineer, to verify the
designparametersincludingappliedloads,methodsofanalysisanddesign,andfinaldesigndimensionsandother
detailsof the structural elements. The reviewing engineer shall also check thesufficiency andappropriateness of
thesuppliedstructuraldrawingsforconstruction.
1.9.5
CONSTRUCTIONOBSERVATION
Construction observation shall be performed by a responsible person who will be a competent professional
appointedbytheownerofthebuildingorthestructure.Constructionobservationshallinclude,butnotbelimited
to,thefollowing:
a.
Specificationofanappropriatetestingandinspectionschedulepreparedandsignedwithdateby
theresponsibleperson;
b.
c.
Reviewoftestingandinspectionreports;and
Regular site visit to verify the general compliance of the construction work with the structural
drawingsandspecificationsprovidedinSec1.9.3above.
25
Chapter 2
LOADSONBUILDINGSANDSTRUCTURES
2.1
INTRODUCTION
2.1.1
SCOPE
This chapter specifies the minimum design forces including dead load, live load, wind and earthquake loads,
miscellaneousloadsandtheirvariouscombinations.Theseloadsshallbeapplicableforthedesignofbuildings
andstructuresinconformancewiththegeneraldesignrequirementsprovidedinChapter1.
2.1.2
LIMITATIONS
Provisionsofthischaptershallgenerallybeappliedtomajorityofbuildingsandotherstructurescoveredinthis
code subject to normally expected loading conditions. For those buildings and structures having unusual
geometricalshapes,responsecharacteristicsorsitelocations,orforthosesubjecttospecialloadingincluding
tornadoes, special dynamic or hydrodynamic loads etc., sitespecific or casespecific data or analysis may be
required to determine the design loads on them. In such cases, and all other cases for which loads are not
specifiedinthischapter,loadinginformationmaybeobtainedfromreliablereferencesorspecialistadvicemay
besought.However,suchloadsshallbeappliedincompliancewiththeprovisionsofotherpartsorsectionsof
thisCode.
2.2
DEADLOADS
2.2.1
GENERAL
Theminimumdesigndeadloadforbuildingsandportionsthereofshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththe
provisionsofthissection.Inaddition,designoftheoverallstructureanditsprimaryloadresistingsystemsshall
conformtothegeneraldesignprovisionsgiveninChapter1.
2.2.2
DEFINITION
DeadLoadistheverticalloadduetotheweightofpermanentstructuralandnonstructuralcomponentsand
attachmentsofabuildingsuchaswalls,floors,ceilings,permanentpartitionsandfixedserviceequipmentetc.
2.2.3
ASSESSMENTOFDEADLOAD
Deadloadforastructuralmembershallbeassessedbasedontheforcesdueto:
weightofthememberitself,
weightofallmaterialsofconstructionincorporatedintothebuildingtobesupportedpermanentlyby
themember,
weightofpermanentpartitions,
weightoffixedserviceequipment,and
neteffectofprestressing.
Part6
2.2.4
WEIGHTOFMATERIALSANDCONSTRUCTIONS
Inestimatingdeadloads,theactualweightsofmaterialsandconstructionsshallbeused,providedthatinthe
absenceofdefiniteinformation,theweightsgiveninTables2.2.1and2.2.2shallbeassumedforthepurposes
ofdesign.
Table2.2.1:UnitWeightofBasicMaterials
Material
Unitweight
(kN/m3)
Material
Aluminium
27.0
Granite,Basalt
Asphalt
21.2
Ironcast
Brass
83.6
wrought
Bronze
87.7
Lead
Brick
18.9
Limestone
Cement
14.7
Marble
Coal,loose
8.8
Sand,dry
Concretestoneaggregate(unreinforced) 22.8*
Sandstone
brickaggregate(unreinforced) 20.4*
Slate
Copper
86.4
Steel
Cork,normal
1.7
StainlessSteel
Cork,compressed
3.7
Timber
Glass,window(sodalime)
25.5
Zinc
*forreinforcedconcrete,add0.63kN/m3foreach1%byvolumeofmainreinforcement
2.2.5
Unit
Weight
(kN/m3)
26.4
70.7
75.4
111.0
24.5
26.4
15.7
22.6
28.3
77.0
78.75
5.911.0
70.0
WEIGHTOFPERMANENTPARTITIONS
When partition walls are indicated on the plans, their weight shall be considered as dead load acting as
concentratedlineloadsintheiractualpositionsonthefloor.Theloadsduetoanticipatedpartitionwalls,which
arenotindicatedontheplans,shallbetreatedasliveloadsanddeterminedinaccordancewithSec2.3.2.4.
2.2.6
WEIGHTOFFIXEDSERVICEEQUIPMENT
Weights of fixed service equipment and other permanent machinery, such as electrical feeders and other
machinery,heating,ventilatingandairconditioningsystems,liftsandescalators,plumbingstacksandrisersetc.
shallbeincludedasdeadloadwheneversuchequipmentaresupportedbystructuralmembers.
2.2.7
ADDITIONALLOADS
In evaluating the final dead loads on a structural member for design purposes,allowances shall be made for
additional loads resulting from the (i) difference between the prescribed and the actual weights of the
membersandconstructionmaterials;(ii)inclusionoffutureinstallations;(iii)changesinoccupancyoruseof
buildings;and(iv)inclusionofstructuralandnonstructuralmembersnotcoveredinSec2.2.2and2.2.3.
2.3
LIVELOADS
2.3.1
GENERAL
Theliveloadsusedforthestructuraldesignoffloors,roofandthesupportingmembersshallbethegreatest
appliedloadsarisingfromtheintendeduseoroccupancyofthebuilding,orfromthestackingofmaterialsand
the use of equipment and propping during construction, but shall not be less than the minimum design live
loads set out by the provisions of this section. For the design of structural members for forces including live
loads,requirementsoftherelevantsectionsofChapter1shallalsobefulfilled.
Chapter2
Table2.2.2DeadLoad
Material/Component/Member
Weightper
UnitArea
(kN/m2)
Material
Floor
Asphalt,25mmthick
0.526
Claytiling,13mmthick
0.268
Concreteslab(stoneaggregate)*
solid,100mmthick
2.360
solid,150mmthick
3.540
Galvanizedsteelfloordeck(excl.topping)
0.1470.383
Magnesiumoxychloride
normal(sawdustfiller),25mmthick
0.345
heavyduty(mineralfiller),25mmthick 0.527
Terrazzopaving16mmthick
0.431
Roof
Acrylicresinsheet,corrugated
3mmthick,standardcorrugations
0.043
3mmthick,deepcorrugations
0.062
Asbestoscement,corrugatedsheeting
(incl.lapandfastenings)
6mmthick(standardcorrugations)
0.134
6mmthick(deepcorrugations)
0.158
Aluminium,corrugatedsheeting
1.2mmthick
0.048
0.8mmthick
0.028
0.6mmthick
0.024
Aluminiumsheet(plain)
1.2mmthick
0.033
1.0mmthick
0.024
0.8mmthick
0.019
Bituminousfelt(5ply)andgravel
0.431
Slates
4.7mmthick
0.335
9.5mmthick
0.671
Steelsheet,flatgalvanized
1.00mmthick
0.082
0.80mmthick
0.067
0.60mmthick
0.053
Steel,galvanizedstd.corrugatedsheeting
1.0mmthick
0.120
0.8mmthick
0.096
0.6mmthick
0.077
Tiles
terracotta(Frenchpattern)
0.575
concrete,25mmthick
0.527
claytiles
0.60.9
*forbrickaggregate,90%ofthelistedvaluesmaybeused.
2.3.2
WallsandPartitions
Acrylic resin sheet, flat, per mm
thickness
Asbestoscementsheeting
4.5mmthick
6.0mmthick
Brickmasonrywork,excl.plaster
burnt clay, per 100 mm

thickness
sandlime, per 100 mm

thickness
Concrete(stoneaggregate)*
100mmthick
150mmthick
250mmthick
Fibre insulation board, per 10 mm
thickness
Fibrous plaster board, per 10 mm
thickness
Glass,per10mmthickness
Hardboard,per10mmthickness
Particle or flake board, per 10 mm
thickness
Plasterboard,per10mmthickness
Plywood,per10mmthickness
Ceiling
Fibrousplaster,10mmthick
Cementplaster,13mmthick
Suspendedmetallathandplaster
(twofacedincl.studding)
Miscellaneous
Felt(insulating),per10mmthickness
Plaster
cement,per10mmthickness
lime,per10mmthickness
PVCsheet,per10mmthickness
Rubberpaving,per10mmthickness
TerracottaHollowBlockMasonry
75mmthick
100mmthick
150mmthick
Weight
per
UnitArea
(kN/m2)
0.012
0.072
0.106
1.910
1.980
2.360
3.540
5.900
0.034
0.092
0.269
0.961
0.075
0.092
0.061
0.081
0.287
0.480
0.019
0.230
0.191
0.153
0.151
0.671
0.995
1.388
DEFINITION
Live load is the load superimposed by the use or occupancy of the building not including the environmental
loadssuchaswindload,rainload,earthquakeloadordeadload.
2.3.3
MINIMUMFLOORLIVELOADS
The minimum floor live loads shall be the greatest actual imposed loads resulting from the intended use or
occupancyofthefloor,andshallnotbelessthantheuniformlydistributedloadpatternsspecifiedinSec2.3.4
ortheconcentratedloadsspecifiedinSec2.3.5whicheverproducesthemostcriticaleffect.Theliveloadsshall
beassumedtoactverticallyupontheareaprojectedonahorizontalplane.
Part6
Table2.3.1 MinimumUniformlyDistributedLiveLoads,AndMinimumConcentratedLiveLoads
Uniform
OccupancyorUse
kN/m2
Apartments(seeResidential)
Accessfloorsystems
2.4
Officeuse
4.79
Computeruse
Armoriesanddrillrooms
Assemblyareasandtheaters
Fixedseats(fastenedtofloor)
Lobbies
Movableseats
Platforms(assembly)
Stagefloors
7.18
2.87
4.79
4.79
4.79
7.18
Balconies(exterior)
Ononeandtwofamilyresidencesonly,andnotexceeding19.3m2
4.79
2.87
Bowlingalleys,poolrooms,andsimilarrecreationalareas
Catwalksformaintenanceaccess
Corridors
Firstfloor
Otherfloors,sameasoccupancyservedexceptasindicated
3.59
1.92
4.79
Dancehallsandballrooms
Decks(patioandroof)
Sameasareaserved,orforthetypeofoccupancyaccommodated
Diningroomsandrestaurants
Dwellings(seeResidential)
Elevatormachineroomgrating(onareaof2,580mm2)
4.79
Conc.
kN
8.9
8.9
1.33
4.79
1.33
0.89
Fireescapes
Onsinglefamilydwellingsonly
4.79
1.92
Fixedladders
Garages(passengervehiclesonly)Trucksandbuses
SeeSection2.3.11
1.92a,b
Grandstands(seeStadiumsandarenas,Bleachers)
Gymnasiumsmainfloorsandbalconies
Handrails,guardrails,andgrabbars
Hospitals
Operatingrooms,laboratories
Patientrooms
Corridorsabovefirstfloor
4.79
SeeSection2.3.11
2.87
4.45
1.92
4.45
3.83
4.45
Hotels(seeResidential)
Libraries
Readingrooms
Stackrooms
2.87
7.18c
3.83
4.45
4.45
4.45
Manufacturing
Light
Heavy
6.00
11.97
8.90
13.40
Marquees
OfficeBuildings
Fileandcomputerroomsshallbedesignedforheavierloads basedonanticipated
occupancy
3.59
Finishlightfloorplateconstruction (onareaof645mm2)
4.79
2.40
3.83
Lobbiesandfirstfloorcorridors
Offices
8.90
8.90
8.90
Chapter2
Table2.3.1 MinimumUniformlyDistributedLiveLoads,AndMinimumConcentratedLiveLoads(Contd.)
PenalInstitutions
Cellblocks
1.92
Corridors
4.79
Residential
Dwellings(oneandtwofamily)
Uninhabitableatticswithoutstorage
Uninhabitableatticswithstorage
Habitableatticsandsleepingareas
Allotherareasexceptstairsandbalconies
0.48
0.96
1.44
1.92
Hotelsandmultifamilyhouses
Privateroomsandcorridorsservingthem
Publicroomsandcorridorsservingthem
1.92
4.79
Reviewingstands,grandstands,andbleachers
4.79d
Roofs
Ordinaryflat,pitched,andcurvedroofs
Roofsusedforpromenadepurposes
Roofsusedforroofgardensorassemblypurposes
Roofsusedforotherspecialpurposes
Awningsandcanopies
Fabricconstructionsupportedbyalightweightrigidskeletonstructure
Allotherconstruction
Primaryroofmembers,exposedtoaworkfloor
Singlepanelpointoflowerchordofrooftrussesoranypointalongprimary
structuralmemberssupportingroofsovermanufacturing,storage
warehouses,andrepairgarages
Allotheroccupancies
Allroofsurfacessubjecttomaintenance workers
Schools
Classrooms
Firstfloorcorridors
0.96h
2.87
4.79
i
Scuttles,skylightribs,andaccessibleceilings
Sidewalks,vehiculardriveways,andyardssubjecttotrucking
Stadiumsandarenas
Bleachers
Fixedseats(fastenedtofloor)
Stairsandexitways
Oneandtwofamilyresidencesonly
0.24(nonreduceable)
0.96
1.92
3.83
4.79
8.9
1.33
1.33
4.45
4.45
4.45
0.89
11.97e
4.79d
2.87d
4.79
1.92
35.60f
0.96
Storageareasaboveceilings
Storagewarehouses(shallbedesignedforheavierloadsifrequiredfor
anticipatedstorage)
Light
Heavy
6.00
11.97
Stores
Retail
Firstfloor
Upper loors
Wholesale,allfloors
4.79
3.59
6.00
Vehiclebarriers
SeeSection2.3.11
4.45
4.45
4.45
Walkwaysandelevatedplatforms(otherthanexitways)
2.87
Yardsandterraces,pedestrian
4.79
aFloorsingaragesorportionsofabuildingusedforthestorageofmotorvehiclesshallbedesignedfortheuniformly
distributedliveloadsofTable2.3.1orthefollowingconcentratedload:(1)forgaragesrestrictedtopassengervehicles
accommodatingnotmorethanninepassengers,13.35kNactingonanareaof114mmby114mmfootprintofajack;
and(2)formechanicalparkingstructureswithoutslabordeckthatareusedforstoringpassengercaronly,10kNper
wheel.
Part6
bGaragesaccommodatingtrucksandbusesshallbedesignedinaccordancewithanapprovedmethod,whichcontains
provisionsfortruckandbusloadings.
cTheloadingappliestostackroomfloorsthatsupportnonmobile,doublefacedlibrarybookstackssubjecttothe
followinglimitations:(1)Thenominalbook stackunitheightshallnotexceed2290mm;(2)thenominalshelfdepth
shallnotexceed305mmforeachface;and(3)parallelrowsof doublefacedbookstacksshallbeseparatedbyaisles
notlessthan914mmwide.
dInadditiontotheverticalliveloads,thedesignshallincludehorizontalswayingforcesappliedtoeachrowofthe
seatsasfollows:0.350kNperlinearmeterofseatappliedinadirectionparalleltoeachrowofseatsand0.15kNper
linearmeterofseatappliedinadirectionperpendiculartoeachrowofseats.Theparallelandperpendicular
horizontalswayingforcesneednotbeappliedsimultaneously.
eOtheruniformloadsinaccordancewithanapprovedmethod,whichcontainsprovisionsfortruckloadings,shallalso
beconsideredwhereappropriate.
fTheconcentratedwheelloadshallbeappliedonanareaof114mmby114mmfootprintofajack.
gMinimumconcentratedloadonstairtreads(onareaof2,580mm2)is1.33kN.
hWhereuniformroofliveloadsarereducedtolessthan1.0kN/m2inaccordancewithSection2.3.14.1andare
appliedtothedesignofstructural membersarrangedsoastocreatecontinuity,thereducedroofliveloadshallbe
appliedtoadjacentspansortoalternatespans,whicheverproducesthegreatest unfavorableeffect.
iRoofsusedforotherspecialpurposesshallbedesignedforappropriateloadsasapprovedbytheauthorityhaving
jurisdiction.
2.3.4
UNIFORMLYDISTRIBUTEDLOADS
The uniformly distributed live load shall not be less than the values listed in Table 2.3.1, reduced as may be
specifiedinSec2.3.13,applieduniformlyovertheentireareaofthefloor,oranyportionthereoftoproduce
themostadverseeffectsinthememberconcerned.
2.3.5
CONCENTRATEDLOADS
The concentrated loadto beappliednonconcurrently with the uniformly distributed load givenin Sec 2.3.4,
shall not be less than that listed in Table 2.3.1. Unless otherwise specified in Table 2.3.1 or in the following
paragraph,theconcentratedloadshallbeappliedoveranareaof300mmx300mmandshallbelocatedsoas
toproducethemaximumstressconditionsinthestructuralmembers.
Inareaswherevehiclesareusedorstored,suchascarparkinggarages,ramps,repairshopsetc.,provisionshall
bemadeforconcentratedloadsconsistingoftwoormoreloadsspacednominally1.5moncentresinabsence
oftheuniformliveloads.Eachloadshallbe40percentofthegrossweightofthemaximumsizevehicletobe
accommodated and applied over an area of 750 mm x 750 mm. For the storage of private or pleasuretype
vehicles without repair or fuelling, floors shall be investigated in the absence of the uniform live load, for a
minimumconcentratedwheelloadof9kNspaced1.5moncentres,appliedoveranareaof750mmx750
mm. The uniform live loads for these cases are provided in Table 2.3.1 The condition of concentrated or
uniformliveloadproducingthegreaterstressesshallgovern.
2.3.6
PROVISIONFORPARTITIONWALLS
Whenpartitions,not indicatedonthe plans,areanticipatedtobeplacedonthefloors,theirweightshallbe

included as an additional live load acting as concentrated line loads in an arrangement producing the most
severeeffectonthefloor,unlessitcanbeshownthatamorefavourablearrangementofthepartitionsshall
prevailduringthefutureuseofthefloor.
Inthecaseoflightpartitions,whereinthetotalweightpermetrerunisnotgreaterthan5.5kN,auniformly
distributedliveloadmaybeappliedonthefloorinlieuoftheconcentratedlineloadsspecifiedabove.Such
uniformliveloadpersquaremetreshallbeatleast33%oftheweightpermetrerunofthepartitions,subject
toaminimumof1.2kN/m2.
Chapter2
2.3.7
MORETHANONEOCCUPANCY
Whereanareaofafloorisintendedfortwoormoreoccupanciesatdifferenttimes,thevaluetobeusedfrom
Table2.3.1shallbethegreatestvalueforanyoftheoccupanciesconcerned.
2.3.8
MINIMUMROOFLIVELOADS
Roofliveloadsshallbeassumedtoactverticallyovertheareaprojectedbytherooforanyportionofitupona
horizontalplane,andshallbedeterminedasspecifiedinthefollowingsections:
2.3.8.1
REGULARPURPOSEFLAT,PITCHEDANDCURVEDROOFS
Liveloadsonregularpurposeroofsshallbethegreatestappliedloadsproducedduringusebymovableobjects
suchasplantersandpeople,andthoseinducedduringmaintenancebyworkers,equipmentandmaterialsbut
shallnotbelessthanthosegiveninTable2.3.2.
2.3.8.2
SPECIALPURPOSEROOFS
Forspecialpurposeroofs,liveloadsshallbeestimatedbasedontheactualweightdependingonthetypeof
use,butshallnotbelessthanthefollowingvalues:
a)roofsusedforpromenadepurposes
3.0kN/m2
b)roofsusedforassemblypurposes
5.0kN/m2
c)roofsusedforgardens
5.0kN/m2
d)roofsusedforotherspecialpurposestobedeterminedasperSec2.3.9
2.3.8.3
ACCESSIBLEROOFSUPPORTINGMEMBERS
Rooftrussesoranyotherprimaryroofsupportingmemberbeneathwhichafullceilingisnotprovided,shallbe
capableofsupportingsafely,inadditiontootherroofloads,aconcentratedloadatthelocationsasspecified
below:
a)
b)
2.3.9
Industrial, Storage and Garage Buildings Any single panel point of the
lowerchordofarooftruss,oranypointofotherprimaryroofsupporting
member
BuildingwithOtherOccupanciesAnysinglepanelpointofthelowerchord
ofarooftruss,oranypointofotherprimaryroofsupportingmember
9.0kN
1.3kN
LOADSNOTSPECIFIED
Liveloads,notspecifiedforusesoroccupanciesinSec2.3.3,2.3.4and2.3.5,shallbedeterminedfromloads
resultingfrom:
a)
weightoftheprobableassemblyofpersons;
b)
weightoftheprobableaccumulationofequipmentandfurniture,and
c)
weightoftheprobablestorageofmaterials.
2.3.10
PARTIALLOADINGANDOTHERLOADINGARRANGEMENTS
The full intensity of the appropriately reduced live load applied only to a portion of the length or area of a
structure or member shall be considered, if it produces a more unfavourable effect than the same intensity
appliedoverthefulllengthorareaofthestructureormember.
Where uniformly distributed live loads are used in the design of continuous members and their supports,
considerationshallbegiventofulldeadloadonallspansincombinationwithfullliveloadsonadjacentspans
andonalternatespanswhicheverproducesamoreunfavourableeffect.
Part6
Table2.3.2:MinimumRoofLiveLoads(1)
TypeandSlopeofRoof
Distributed
Load,kN/m2
1.5
Flatroof(slope=0)
II
III
IV
VI
1.Pitchedorslopedroof(0<slope<1/3)
2Archedroofordome(rise<1/8span)
1.0
Concentrated
Load,kN
1.8
0.9
1.Pitchedorslopedroof(1/3slope<1.0)
2.Archedroofordome(1/8rise<3/8span)
0.8
0.9
1.Pitchedorslopedroof(slope1.0)
2.Archedroofordome(rise3/8span)
0.6
0.9
Greenhouse,andagriculturebuildings
0.5
0.9
Canopiesandawnings,exceptthosewith
clothcovers
sameasgiveninIthroughIV
abovebasedonthetypeand
slope.
Note:(1) GreaterofthisloadandrainloadasspecifiedinSec2.6.3shallbetakenasthedesignliveload
forroof.Thedistributedloadshallbeappliedovertheareaoftheroofprojecteduponahorizontalplane
and shall not be applied simultaneously with the concentrated load. The concentrated load shall be
assumedtoactupona300mmx300mmareaandneednotbeconsideredforroofscapableoflaterally
distributingtheload,e.g.reinforcedconcreteslabs.
2.3.11
OTHERLIVELOADS
Liveloadsonmiscellaneousstructuresandcomponents,suchashandrailsandsupportingmembers,parapets
and balustrades, ceilings, skylights and supports, and the like, shall be determined from the analysis of the
actualloadsonthem,butshallnotbelessthanthosegiveninTable2.3.3.
2.3.12
IMPACTANDDYNAMICLOADS
The live loads specifiedin Sec 2.3.3shall be assumed to include allowances for impacts arising from normal
usesonly.However,forcesimposedbyunusualvibrationsandimpactsresultingfromtheoperationofinstalled
machineryandequipmentshallbedeterminedseparatelyandtreatedasadditionalliveloads.Liveloadsdueto
vibrationorimpactshallbedeterminedbydynamicanalysisofthesupportingmemberorstructureincluding
foundations, or from the recommended values supplied by the manufacture of the particular equipment or
machinery.Inabsenceofadefiniteinformation,valueslistedinTable2.3.4forsomecommonequipment,shall
beusedfordesignpurposes.
2.3.13
REDUCTIONOFLIVELOADS
Exceptforroofuniformliveloads,allotherminimumuniformlydistributedliveloads,LoinTable2.3.1,maybe
reducedaccordingtothefollowingprovisions.
2.3.13.1 GENERAL
SubjecttothelimitationsofSections2.3.13.2through2.3.13.5,membersforwhichavalueofKLLATis37.16m2
ormorearepermittedtobedesignedforareducedliveloadinaccordancewiththefollowingformula:
0.25
(2.3.1)
where,L=reduceddesignliveloadperm ofareasupportedbythemember;L0=unreduceddesignliveload
perm2ofareasupportedbythemember(seeTable2.3.1);KLL=liveloadelementfactor(seeTable2.3.5);AT=
tributaryareainm2.Lshallnotbelessthan0.50L0formemberssupportingonefloorandLshallnotbelessthan
0.40L0formemberssupportingtwoormorefloors.
Chapter2
Table2.3.3:MiscellaneousLiveLoads
StructuralMemberorComponent
1.
Handrails,parapetsandsupports:
a)Lightaccessstairs,gangwaysetc.
i)
width0.6m
ii)
width>0.6m
b)Staircasesotherthanin(a)above,ramps,balconies:
i)
Singledwellingandprivate
ii)
Staircasesinresidentialbuildings
iii)
Balconiesorportionthereof,standsetc.having
fixedseatswithin0.55mofthebarrier
vi)
Publicassemblybuildingsincludingtheatres,
cinemas,assemblyhalls,stadiums,mosques,
churches,schoolsetc.
vi)
Buildingsandoccupanciesotherthan(i)through(iv)above
2.
Vehiclebarriersforcarparksandramps:
a)
Forvehicleshavinggrossmass2500kg
b)
Forvehicleshavinggrossmass>2500kg
c)
Forrampsofcarparksetc.
Note:
(1)
(2)
(3)
LiveLoad(1)
(kN/m)
0.25
0.35
0.35
0.35
1.5
3.0
0.75
100(2)
165(2)
seenote(3)
Theseloadsshallbeappliednonconcurrentlyalonghorizontalandverticaldirections,
exceptasspecifiedinnote(2)below.
Theseloadsshallbeappliedonlyinthehorizontaldirection,uniformlydistributedover
anylengthof1.5mofabarrierandshallbeconsideredtoactatbumperheight.Forcase
2(a)bumperheightmaybetakenas375mmabovefloorlevel.
Barrierstoaccessrampsofcarparksshallbedesignedforhorizontalforcesequalto
50%ofthosegivenin2(a)and2(b)appliedatalevelof610mmabovetheramp.
Barrierstostraightexitrampsexceeding20minlengthshallbedesignedfor
horizontalforcesequaltotwicethevaluesgivenin2(a)and2(b).
Table2.3.4:MinimumLiveLoadsonSupportsandConnectionsofEquipmentduetoImpact(1)
EquipmentorMachinery
Additionalloadduetoimpactaspercentage
ofstaticloadincludingselfweight
Vertical
Horizontal
1.
Lifts,hoistsandrelatedoperating
100%
machinery
2.
Lightmachinery(shaftormotordriven)
20%
3.
Reciprocatingmachinery,orpowerdriven
50%
units.
4.
Hangerssupportingfloorsandbalconies
33%
5.
Cranes:
a)Electricoverheadcranes
25%of
i)Transversetotherail:
maximum
20%oftheweightoftrolley
wheelload
andliftedloadonly,applied
onehalfatthetopofeachrail
ii)Alongtherail:
10%ofmaximumwheelload
appliedatthetopofeachrail
b)Manuallyoperatedcranes
50%ofthe
50%ofthe
valuesin(a) valuesin(a)above
above
c)Caboperatedtravellingcranes
25%
Notapplicable
Note:(1)
Alltheseloadsshallbeincreasedifsorecommendedbythemanufacturer.For
machineryandequipmentnotlisted,impactloadsshallbethoserecommendedby
themanufacturers,ordeterminedbydynamicanalysis.
Part6
2.3.13.2 HEAVYLIVELOADS.
2
Liveloadsthatexceed4.79kN/m shallnotbereduced.
EXCEPTION:Liveloadsformemberssupportingtwoormorefloorsmaybereducedby20percent.
2.3.13.3 PASSENGERCARGARAGES.
Theliveloadsshallnotbereducedinpassengercargarages.
EXCEPTION:Liveloadsformemberssupportingtwoormorefloorsmaybereducedby20percent.
2.3.13.4 SPECIALOCCUPANCIES.
Liveloadsof4.79kN/m2orlessshallnotbereducedinpublicassemblyoccupancies.
Thereshallbenoreductionofliveloadsforcycloneshelters.
2.3.13.5 LIMITATIONSONONEWAYSLABS.
Thetributaryarea,AT,foronewayslabsshallnotexceedanareadefinedbytheslabspantimesawidthnormal
tothespanof1.5timestheslabspan.
2.3.14
REDUCTIONINROOFLIVELOADS
Theminimumuniformlydistributedroofliveloads,LoinTable2.3.1,arepermittedtobereducedaccordingto
thefollowingprovisions.
2.3.14.1 FLAT,PITCHED,ANDCURVEDROOFS.
Ordinaryflat,pitched,andcurvedroofsarepermittedtobedesignedforareducedroofliveload,asspecified
inEq.2.3.2 orothercontrolling combinationsof loads, as discussed laterin this chapter, whichever produces
the greater load. In structures such as greenhouses, where special scaffolding is used as a work surface for
workmenandmaterialsduringmaintenanceandrepairoperations,alowerroofloadthanspecifiedinEq.2.3.2
shallnotbeusedunlessapprovedbytheauthorityhavingjurisdiction.Onsuchstructures,theminimumroof
liveloadshallbe0.58kN/m2.
Lr=LoR1R2where0.58Lr0.96
where
Lr=reducedroofliveloadperm2ofhorizontalprojectioninkN/m2
ThereductionfactorsR1andR2shallbedeterminedasfollows:
R1=1forAt18.58m2
=1.20.011Atfor18.58m2<At<55.74m2
=0.6forAt55.74m2
whereAt=tributaryareainm2supportedbyanystructuralmemberand
R2=1forF4
=1.20.05Ffor4<F<12
=0.6forF12
10
(2.3.2)
Chapter2
where,forapitchedroof,F=0.12slope,withslopeexpressedinpercentagepointsand,foranarchordome,
F=risetospanratiomultipliedby32.
2.3.14.2 SPECIALPURPOSEROOFS.
Roofsthathaveanoccupancyfunction,suchasroofgardens,assemblypurposes,orotherspecialpurposesare
permittedtohavetheiruniformlydistributedliveloadreducedinaccordancewiththerequirementsofSection
2.3.13.
Table2.3.5LiveLoadElementFactor,KLL
Element
KLL
Interiorcolumns
Exteriorcolumnswithoutcantileverslabs
4
4
Edgecolumnswithcantileverslabs
Cornercolumnswithcantileverslabs
Edgebeamswithoutcantileverslabs
Interiorbeams
2
2
2
Allothermembersnotidentifiedincluding:
Edgebeamswithcantileverslabs
Cantileverbeams
Onewayslabs
Twowayslabs
Memberswithoutprovisionsforcontinuous
sheartransfernormaltotheirspan
aInlieuoftheprecedingvalues,KL L ispermittedtobecalculated.
2.4
WINDLOADS
2.4.1
GENERAL
Scope: Buildings and other structures, including the Main WindForce Resisting System (MWFRS) and all
componentsandcladdingthereof,shallbedesignedandconstructedtoresistwindloadsasspecifiedherein.
Allowed Procedures: The design wind loads for buildings and other structures, including the MWFRS and
componentandcladdingelementsthereof,shallbedeterminedusingoneofthefollowingprocedures:
(1) Method1Simplified Procedure as specified in Section 2.4.4 for buildings and structures meeting the
requirementsspecifiedtherein;
(2) Method 2Analytical Procedure as specified in Section 2.4.5 for buildings and structures meeting the
requirementsspecifiedtherein;
(3)Method3WindTunnelProcedureasspecifiedinSection2.4.18.
WindPressures:Actingonoppositefacesofeachbuildingsurface.Inthecalculationofdesignwindloadsfor
the MWFRS and for components and cladding for buildings, the algebraic sum of the pressures acting on
oppositefacesofeachbuildingsurfaceshallbetakenintoaccount.
2.4.1.1
MINIMUMDESIGNWINDLOADING
Thedesignwindload,determinedbyanyoneoftheproceduresspecifiedinSection2.4.1,shallbenotlessthan
specifiedinthissection.
MainWindForceResistingSystem:ThewindloadtobeusedinthedesignoftheMWFRSforanenclosedor
partially enclosed building or other structure shall not be less than 0.5kN/m2 multiplied by the area of the
11
Part6
building or structure projected onto a vertical plane normalto the assumed wind direction. Thedesign wind
forceforopenbuildingsandotherstructuresshallbenotlessthan0.5kN/m2)multipliedbytheareaAf.
ComponentsandCladding:Thedesignwindpressureforcomponentsandcladdingofbuildingsshallnotbeless
thananetpressureof0.5kN/m2actingineitherdirectionnormaltothesurface.
2.4.2
DEFINITIONS
ThefollowingdefinitionsapplyonlytotheprovisionsofSection2.4:
APPROVED:Acceptabletotheauthorityhavingjurisdiction.
BASICWINDSPEED,V:Threesecondgustspeedat10mabovethegroundinExposureB(seeSection2.4.8.3)
havingareturnperiodof50years.
BUILDING, ENCLOSED: A building that does not comply with the requirements for open or partially enclosed
buildings.
BUILDING ENVELOPE: Cladding, roofing, exterior walls, glazing, door assemblies, window assemblies, skylight
assemblies,andothercomponentsenclosingthebuilding.
BUILDINGANDOTHERSTRUCTURE,FLEXIBLE:Slenderbuildingsandotherstructuresthathaveafundamental
naturalfrequencylessthan1Hz.
BUILDING,LOWRISE:Enclosedorpartiallyenclosedbuildingsthatcomplywiththefollowingconditions:
1.Meanroofheighthlessthanorequalto18.3m.
2.Meanroofheighthdoesnotexceedleasthorizontaldimension.
BUILDING,OPEN:Abuildinghavingeachwallatleast80percentopen.Thisconditionisexpressedforeachwall
bytheequationAo0.8Agwhere
Ao=totalareaofopeningsinawallthatreceivespositiveexternalpressure(m2).
Ag=thegrossareaofthatwallinwhichAoisidentified(m2).
BUILDING,PARTIALLYENCLOSED:Abuildingthatcomplieswithbothofthefollowingconditions:
1.Thetotalareaofopeningsinawallthatreceivespositiveexternalpressureexceedsthesumoftheareasof
openingsinthebalanceofthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof)bymorethan10percent.
2.Thetotalareaofopeningsinawallthatreceivespositiveexternalpressureexceeds0.37m2or1percentof
the area of that wall, whichever is smaller, and the percentage of openings in the balance of the building
envelopedoesnotexceed20percent.
Theseconditionsareexpressedbythefollowingequations:
1.Ao>1.10Aoi
2.Ao>0.37m2or>0.01Ag,whicheverissmaller,
andAoi/Agi0.20
where
Ao,AgareasdefinedforOpenBuilding
Aoi=thesumoftheareasofopeningsinthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof)notincludingAo,inm2.
Agi=thesumofthegrosssurfaceareasofthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof)notincludingAg,inm2.
12
Chapter2
BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURE, REGULAR SHAPED: A building or other structure having no unusual
geometricalirregularityinspatialform.
BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURES, RIGID: A building or other structure whose fundamental frequency is
greaterthanorequalto1Hz.
BUILDING, SIMPLE DIAPHRAGM: A building in which both windward and leeward wind loads are transmitted
throughfloorandroofdiaphragmstothesameverticalMWFRS(e.g.,nostructuralseparations).
COMPONENTSANDCLADDING:ElementsofthebuildingenvelopethatdonotqualifyaspartoftheMWFRS.
DESIGNFORCE,F:Equivalentstaticforcetobeusedinthedeterminationofwindloadsforopenbuildingsand
otherstructures.
DESIGNPRESSURE,p:Equivalentstaticpressuretobeusedinthedeterminationofwindloadsforbuildings.
EAVE HEIGHT, h: The distance from the ground surface adjacent to the building to the roof eave line at a
particularwall.Iftheheightoftheeavevariesalongthewall,theaverageheightshallbeused.
EFFECTIVE WIND AREA, A: The area used to determine GCp. For component and cladding elements, the
effectivewindareainFigs.2.4.11through2.4.17and2.4.19isthespanlengthmultipliedbyaneffectivewidth
thatneednotbelessthanonethirdthespanlength.Forcladdingfasteners,theeffectivewindareashallnotbe
greaterthantheareathatistributarytoanindividualfastener.
ESCARPMENT:Alsoknownasscarp,withrespecttotopographiceffectsinSection2.4.9,aclifforsteepslope
generallyseparatingtwolevelsorgentlyslopingareas(seeFig.2.4.4).
FREEROOF:Roof(monoslope,pitched,ortroughed)inanopenbuildingwithnoenclosingwallsunderneaththe
roofsurface.
GLAZING:Glassortransparentortranslucentplasticsheetusedinwindows,doors,skylights,orcurtainwalls.
GLAZING, IMPACT RESISTANT: Glazing that has been shown by testing in accordance with ASTM E1886 and
ASTM E1996 or other approved test methods to withstand the impact of windborne missiles likely to be
generatedinwindbornedebrisregionsduringdesignwinds.
HILL:WithrespecttotopographiceffectsinSection2.4.9,alandsurfacecharacterizedbystrongreliefinany
horizontaldirection(seeFig.2.4.4).
HURRICANE PRONE REGIONS: Areas vulnerable to hurricanes; in Bangladesh these areas include the
Sundarbans,southernpartsofBarisalandPatuakhali,Hatia,Bhola,easternpartsofChittagongandCoxsBazar
IMPACT RESISTANT COVERING: A covering designed to protect glazing, which has been shown by testing in
accordance with ASTM E1886 and ASTM E1996 or other approved test methods to withstand the impact of
windbornedebrismissileslikelytobegeneratedinwindbornedebrisregionsduringdesignwinds.
IMPORTANCEFACTOR,I:Afactorthataccountsforthedegreeofhazardtohumanlifeanddamagetoproperty.
MAIN WINDFORCE RESISTING SYSTEM (MWFRS): An assemblage of structural elements assigned to provide
supportandstabilityfortheoverallstructure.Thesystemgenerallyreceiveswindloadingfrommorethanone
surface.
MEANROOFHEIGHT,h:Theaverageoftheroofeaveheightandtheheighttothehighestpointontheroof
surface,exceptthat,forroofanglesoflessthanorequalto10o,themeanroofheightshallbetheroofheave
height.
OPENINGS:Aperturesorholesinthebuildingenvelopethatallowairtoflowthroughthebuildingenvelopeand
thataredesignedasopenduringdesignwindsasdefinedbytheseprovisions.
RECOGNIZEDLITERATURE:Publishedresearchfindingsandtechnicalpapersthatareapproved.
13
Part6
RIDGE:WithrespecttotopographiceffectsinSection2.4.9,anelongatedcrestofahillcharacterizedbystrong
reliefintwodirections(seeFig.2.4.4).
WINDBORNEDEBRISREGIONS:Areaswithinhurricaneproneregionslocated:
1.Within1.6kmofthecoastalmeanhighwaterlinewherethebasicwindspeedisequaltoorgreaterthan180
km/hor
2.Inareaswherethebasicwindspeedisequaltoorgreaterthan200km/h.
2.4.3
SYMBOLSANDNOTATION
ThefollowingsymbolsandnotationapplyonlytotheprovisionsofSection2.4:
A=effectivewindarea,inm2
Af=areaofopen buildings andotherstructureseither normaltothe winddirectionorprojected ona plane
normaltothewinddirection,inm2.
Ag=thegrossareaofthatwallinwhichAoisidentified,inm2.
Agi=thesumofthegrosssurfaceareasofthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof)notincludingAg,inm2
Ao=totalareaofopeningsinawallthatreceivespositiveexternalpressure,inm2.
Aoi=thesumoftheareasofopeningsinthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof)notincludingAo,inm2
Aog=totalareaofopeningsinthebuildingenvelopeinm2
As=grossareaofthesolidfreestandingwallorsolidsign,inm2
a=widthofpressurecoefficientzone,inm.
B=horizontaldimensionofbuildingmeasurednormaltowinddirection,inm.
b=meanhourlywindspeedfactorinEq.2.4.14fromTable2.4.3
=3sgustspeedfactorfromTable2.4.3
Cf=forcecoefficienttobeusedindeterminationofwindloadsforotherstructures
CN=netpressurecoefficienttobeusedindeterminationofwindloadsforopenbuildings
Cp=externalpressurecoefficienttobeusedindeterminationofwindloadsforbuildings
c=turbulenceintensityfactorinEq.2.4.5fromTable2.4.3
D=diameterofacircularstructureormemberinm.
D=depthofprotrudingelementssuchasribsandspoilersinm.
F=designwindforceforotherstructures,inN.
G=gusteffectfactor
Gf=gusteffectfactorforMWFRSsofflexiblebuildingsandotherstructures
GCpn=combinednetpressurecoefficientforaparapet
GCp=productofexternalpressurecoefficientandgusteffectfactortobeusedindeterminationofwindloads
forbuildings
GCpf=productoftheequivalentexternalpressurecoefficientandgusteffectfactortobeusedindetermination
ofwindloadsforMWFRSoflowrisebuildings
14
Chapter2
GCpi=productofinternalpressurecoefficientandgusteffectfactortobeusedindeterminationofwindloads
forbuildings
gQ=peakfactorforbackgroundresponseinEqs.2.4.4and2.4.8
gR=peakfactorforresonantresponseinEq.2.4.8
gv=peakfactorforwindresponseinEqs.2.4.4and2.4.8
H=heightofhillorescarpmentinFig.2.4.4,inm.
h=meanroofheightofabuildingorheightofotherstructure,exceptthateaveheightshallbeusedforroof
o
angleoflessthanorequalto10 ,inm.
he=roofeaveheightataparticularwall,ortheaverageheightiftheeavevariesalongthewall
I=importancefactor
Iz=intensityofturbulencefromEq.2.4.5
K1,K2,K3=multipliersinFig.2.4.4toobtainKzt
Kd=winddirectionalityfactorinTable2.4.5
Kh=velocitypressureexposurecoefficientevaluatedatheightz=h
Kz=velocitypressureexposurecoefficientevaluatedatheightz
Kzt=topographicfactorasdefinedinSection2.4.9
L=horizontaldimensionofabuildingmeasuredparalleltothewinddirection,inm.
Lh=distanceupwindofcrestofhillorescarpmentinFig.2.4.4towherethedifferenceingroundelevationis
halftheheightofhillorescarpment,inm.
L=integrallengthscaleofturbulence,inm.
Lr=horizontaldimensionofreturncornerforasolidfreestandingwallorsolidsignfromFig.2.4.20,inm.
l=integrallengthscalefactorfromTable2.4.3inm.
N1=reducedfrequencyfromEq.2.4.12
n1=buildingnaturalfrequency,Hz
p=designpressuretobeusedindeterminationofwindloadsforbuildings,inN/m2
pL=windpressureactingonleewardfaceinFig.2.4.9,inN/m2
Pnet=netdesignwindpressurefromEq.2.4.2,inN/m2
Pnet30=netdesignwindpressureforExposureAath=9.1mandI=1.0fromFig.2.4.3,inN/m2.
Pp=combinednetpressureonaparapetfromEq.2.4.20,inN/m2.
Ps=netdesignwindpressurefromEq.2.4.1,inN/m2.
Ps30=simplifieddesignwindpressureforExposureAath=9.1mandI=1.0fromFig.2.4.2,inN/m2.
PW=windpressureactingonwindwardfaceinFig.2.4.9,inN/m2.
Q=backgroundresponsefactorfromEq.2.4.6
q=velocitypressure,inN/m2.
qh=velocitypressureevaluatedatheightz=h,inN/m2
15
Part6
qi=velocitypressureforinternalpressuredetermination,inN/m2.
qp=velocitypressureattopofparapet,inN/m2.
qz=velocitypressureevaluatedatheightzaboveground,inN/m2.
R=resonantresponsefactorfromEq.2.4.10
RB,Rh,RL=valuesfromEq.2.4.13
Ri=reductionfactorfromEq.2.4.16
Rn=valuefromEq.2.4.11
s=verticaldimensionofthesolidfreestandingwallorsolidsignfromFig.2.4.20,inm.
r=risetospanratioforarchedroofs.
V= basicwindspeedobtainedfromFig.2.4.1orTable2.4.1,inm/s.Thebasicwindspeedcorrespondstoa3s
gustspeedat10mabovegroundinExposureCategoryBhavinganannualprobabilityofoccurrenceof
0.02.
Vi=unpartitionedinternalvolumem3
V Z =meanhourlywindspeedatheight ,m/s.
W=widthofbuildinginFigs.2.4.12and2.4.14AandBandwidthofspaninFigs.2.4.13and2.4.15,inm.
X=distancetocenterofpressurefromwindwardedgeinFig.2.4.18,inm.
x=distanceupwindordownwindofcrestinFig.2.4.4,inm.
z=heightabovegroundlevel,inm.
z=equivalentheightofstructure,inm.
zg=nominalheightoftheatmosphericboundarylayerusedinthisstandard.ValuesappearinTable2.4.3
zmin=exposureconstantfromTable2.4.3
=3sgustspeedpowerlawexponentfromTable2.4.3
=reciprocaloffromTable2.4.3
=meanhourlywindspeedpowerlawexponentinEq.2.4.14fromTable2.4.3
=dampingratio,percentcriticalforbuildingsorotherstructures
=ratioofsolidareatogrossareaforsolidfreestandingwall,solidsign,opensign,faceofatrussedtower,or
latticestructure
=adjustmentfactorforbuildingheightandexposurefromFigs.2.4.2and2.4.3
=integrallengthscalepowerlawexponentinEq.2.4.7fromTable2.4.3
=valueusedinEq.2.4.13(seeSection2.4.10.2)
=angleofplaneofrooffromhorizontal,indegrees
v=heighttowidthratioforsolidsign
16
Chapter2
2.4.4
METHOD1SIMPLIFIEDPROCEDURE
2.4.4.1
SCOPE
Abuildingwhosedesignwindloadsaredeterminedinaccordancewiththissectionshallmeetalltheconditions
of Sections 2.4.4.2 or 2.4.4.3. If a building qualifies only under 2.4.4.2 for design of its components and
cladding,thenitsMWFRSshallbedesignedbyMethod2orMethod3.
Limitations on Wind Speeds: Variation of basic wind speeds with direction shall not be permitted unless
substantiatedbyanyestablishedanalyticalmethodorwindtunneltesting.
2.4.4.2
MAINWINDFORCERESISTINGSYSTEMS
ForthedesignofMWFRSsthebuildingmustmeetallofthefollowingconditions:
1.ThebuildingisasimplediaphragmbuildingasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
2.ThebuildingisalowrisebuildingasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
3. The building is enclosed as defined in Section 2.4.2 and conforms to the windborne debris provisions of
Section2.4.11.3.
4.ThebuildingisaregularshapedbuildingorstructureasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
5.ThebuildingisnotclassifiedasaflexiblebuildingasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
6. The building does not have response characteristics making it subject to across wind loading, vortex
shedding,instabilityduetogallopingorflutter;anddoesnothaveasitelocationforwhichchannelingeffectsor
buffetinginthewakeofupwindobstructionswarrantspecialconsideration.
7. The building has an approximately symmetrical crosssection in each direction with either a flat roof or a
gableorhiproofwith45.
8.ThebuildingisexemptedfromtorsionalloadcasesasindicatedinNote5ofFig.2.4.10,orthetorsionalload
casesdefinedinNote5donotcontrolthedesignofanyoftheMWFRSsofthebuilding.
2.4.4.3
COMPONENTSANDCLADDING
Forthedesignofcomponentsandcladdingthebuildingmustmeetallthefollowingconditions:
1.Themeanroofheighthmustbelessthanorequalto18.3m(h18.3m).
2. The building is enclosed as defined in Section 2.4.2 and conforms to the windborne debris provisions of
Section2.4.11.3.
3.ThebuildingisaregularshapedbuildingorstructureasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
4. The building does not have response characteristics making it subject to across wind loading, vortex
shedding,instabilityduetogallopingorflutter;anddoesnothaveasitelocationforwhichchannelingeffectsor
buffetinginthewakeofupwindobstructionswarrantspecialconsideration.
5.Thebuildinghaseitheraflatroof,agableroofwith45o,orahiproofwith27o.
2.4.4.4
DESIGNPROCEDURE
1.ThebasicwindspeedVshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.6.Thewindshallbeassumedto
comefromanyhorizontaldirection.
2.AnimportancefactorIshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.7.
3.AnexposurecategoryshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.8.3.
17
Part6
4.Aheightandexposureadjustmentcoefficient,,shallbedeterminedfromFig.2.4.2.
2.4.4.4.1
MainWindForceResistingSystem.
Simplifieddesignwindpressures,ps,fortheMWFRSsoflowrisesimplediaphragmbuildingsrepresentthenet
pressures (sum of internal and external) to be applied to the horizontal and vertical projections of building
surfaces as shown in Fig. 2.4.2. For the horizontal pressures (zones A, B, C, D), ps is the combination of the
windwardandleewardnetpressures.psshallbedeterminedbythefollowingequation:
ps=KztIpS30
(2.4.1)
where
=adjustmentfactorforbuildingheightandexposurefromFig.2.4.2
Kzt=topographicfactorasdefinedinSection2.4.9evaluatedatmeanroofheight,h
I=importancefactorasdefinedinSection2.4.7
pS30=simplifieddesignwindpressureforExposureA,ath=9.1m,andforI=1.0,fromFig.2.4.2
MinimumPressures:Theloadeffectsofthedesignwindpressuresfromthissectionshallnotbelessthanthe
minimumloadcasefromSection2.4.4.1assumingthepressures,ps,forzonesA,B,C,andDallequalto+0.5
kN/m2,whileassumingzonesE,F,G,andHallequaltozerokN/m2.
2.4.4.4.2
ComponentsandCladding
Net design wind pressures, Pnet, for the components and cladding of buildings designed using Method 1
represent the net pressures (sum of internal and external) to be applied normal to each building surface as
showninFig.2.4.3.
pnetshallbedeterminedbythefollowingequation:
pnet=KztIPnet30
(2.4.2)
where
=adjustmentfactorforbuildingheightandexposurefromFig.2.4.3
Kzt=topographicfactorasdefinedinSection2.4.9evaluatedatmeanroofheight,h
I=importancefactorasdefinedinSection2.4.7
pnet30=netdesignwindpressureforExposureA,ath=9.1m,andforI=1.0,fromFig.2.4.3
Minimum Pressures : The positive design wind pressures, pnet, from this section shall not be less than +0.5
kN/m2,andthenegativedesignwindpressures,pnet,fromthissectionshallnotbelessthan0.5kN/m2.
2.4.4.4.3
AirPermeableCladding
DesignwindloadsdeterminedfromFig.2.4.3shallbeusedforallairpermeablecladdingunlessapprovedtest
data or the recognized literature demonstrate lower loads for the type of air permeable cladding being
considered.
2.4.5
METHOD2ANALYTICALPROCEDURE
2.4.5.1
SCOPESANDLIMITATIONS
A building or other structure whose design wind loads are determined in accordance with this section shall
meetallofthefollowingconditions:
1.ThebuildingorotherstructureisaregularshapedbuildingorstructureasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
18
Chapter2
2. The building or other structure does not have response characteristics making it subject to across wind
loading, vortex shedding, instability due to galloping or flutter; or does not have a site location for which
channelingeffectsorbuffetinginthewakeofupwindobstructionswarrantspecialconsideration.
Theprovisionsofthissectiontakeintoconsiderationtheloadmagnificationeffectcausedbygustsinresonance
withalongwindvibrationsofflexiblebuildingsorotherstructures.Buildingsorotherstructures notmeeting
therequirementsofSection2.4.4,orhavingunusualshapesorresponsecharacteristicsshallbedesignedusing
recognizedliteraturedocumentingsuchwindloadeffectsorshallusethewindtunnelprocedurespecifiedin
Section0.
2.4.5.2
SHIELDING.
There shall be no reductions in velocity pressure due to apparent shielding afforded by buildings and other
structuresorterrainfeatures.
2.4.5.3
AIRPERMEABLECLADDING
DesignwindloadsdeterminedfromSection2.4.5shallbeusedforairpermeablecladdingunlessapprovedtest
dataorrecognizedliteraturedemonstratelowerloadsforthetypeofairpermeablecladdingbeingconsidered.
2.4.5.4
DESIGNPROCEDURE
1. The basic wind speed V and wind directionality factor Kd shall be determined in accordance with Section
2.4.6.
2.AnimportancefactorIshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.7.
3. An exposure category or exposure categories and velocity pressure exposure coefficient Kz or Kh, as
applicable,shallbedeterminedforeachwinddirectioninaccordancewithSection2.4.8.
4.AtopographicfactorKztshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.9.
5.AgusteffectfactorGorGf,asapplicable,shallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.10.
6.AnenclosureclassificationshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.11.
7.InternalpressurecoefficientGCpishallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.12.1.
8. External pressure coefficients Cp or GCpf, or force coefficients Cf, as applicable, shall be determined in
accordancewithSection2.4.12.2or2.4.12.3,respectively.
9.Velocitypressureqzorqh,asapplicable,shallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.11.5.
10.DesignwindloadporFshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSections2.4.13.
2.4.6
BASICWINDSPEED
Thebasicwindspeed,V,usedinthedeterminationofdesignwindloadsonbuildingsandotherstructuresshall
be as given in Fig.2.4.1 except as provided in Section 2.4.6.1. The wind shall be assumed to come from any
horizontaldirection.
2.4.6.1
SPECIALWINDREGIONS
Thebasicwindspeedshallbeincreasedwhererecordsorexperienceindicatethatthewindspeedsarehigher
than those reflected in Fig. 2.4.1. Mountainous terrain, gorges, and special regions shall be examined for
unusualwindconditions.Theauthorityhavingjurisdictionshall,ifnecessary,adjustthevaluesgiveninFig.2.4.1
to account for higher local wind speeds. Such adjustment shall be based on adequate meteorological
informationandothernecessarydata.
19
Part6
2.4.6.2
LIMITATION
Tornadoeshavenotbeenconsideredindevelopingthebasicwindspeeddistributions.
2.4.6.3
WINDDIRECTIONALITYFACTOR
Thewinddirectionalityfactor,Kd,shallbedeterminedfromTable2.4.5.Thisfactorshallonlybeappliedwhen
usedinconjunctionwithloadcombinationsspecifiedinChapter2ofPart6ofthiscode.
2.4.7
IMPORTANCEFACTOR
An importance factor, I, for the building or other structure shall be determined from Table 2.4.2 based on
buildingandstructurecategorieslistedinSection1.2.4.
2.4.8
EXPOSURE
Foreachwinddirectionconsidered,theupwindexposurecategoryshallbebasedongroundsurfaceroughness
thatisdeterminedfromnaturaltopography,vegetation,andconstructedfacilities.
2.4.8.1
WINDDIRECTIONSANDSECTORS
Foreachselectedwinddirectionatwhichthewindloadsaretobeevaluated,theexposureofthebuildingor
o
structure shall be determined for the two upwind sectors extending 45 either side of the selected wind
direction.
TheexposuresinthesetwosectorsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSections2.4.8.2and2.4.8.3andthe
exposureresultinginthehighestwindloadsshallbeusedtorepresentthewindsfromthatdirection.
2.4.8.2
SURFACEROUGHNESSCATEGORIES
A ground surface roughness within each 45o sector shall be determined for a distance upwind of the site as
defined in Section 2.4.8.3 from the categories defined in the following text, for the purpose of assigning an
exposurecategoryasdefinedinSection2.4.8.3.
SurfaceRoughnessA:Urbanandsuburbanareas,woodedareas,orotherterrainwithnumerouscloselyspaced
obstructionshavingthesizeofsinglefamilydwellingsorlarger.
SurfaceRoughnessB:Openterrainwithscatteredobstructionshavingheightsgenerallylessthan9.1m.This
categoryincludesflatopencountry,grasslands,andallwatersurfacesinhurricaneproneregions.
Surface Roughness C: Flat, unobstructed areas and water surfaces outside hurricane prone regions. This
categoryincludessmoothmudflatsandsaltflats.
2.4.8.3
EXPOSURECATEGORIES
Exposure A: Exposure A shall apply where the ground surface roughness condition, as defined by Surface
Roughness A, prevails in the upwind direction for a distance of at least 792 m or 20times the height of the
building,whicheverisgreater.
EXCEPTION:Forbuildingswhosemeanroofheightislessthanorequalto9.1m,theupwinddistancemaybe
reducedto457m.
ExposureB:ExposureBshallapplyforallcaseswhereExposuresAorCdonotapply.
ExposureC:ExposureCshallapplywherethegroundsurfaceroughness,asdefinedbySurfaceRoughnessC,
prevailsintheupwinddirectionforadistancegreaterthan1,524mor20timesthebuildingheight,whichever
isgreater.ExposureCshallextendintodownwindareasofSurfaceRoughnessAorBforadistanceof200mor
20timestheheightofthebuilding,whicheverisgreater.
20
Chapter2
Forasitelocatedinthetransitionzonebetweenexposurecategories,thecategoryresultinginthelargestwind
forcesshallbeused.
EXCEPTION: An intermediate exposure between the preceding categories is permitted in a transition zone
providedthatitisdeterminedbyarationalanalysismethoddefinedintherecognizedliterature.
2.4.8.4
EXPOSURECATEGORYFORMAINWINDFORCERESISTINGSYSTEM.
BuildingsandOtherStructures:Foreachwinddirectionconsidered,windloadsforthedesignoftheMWFRS
determinedfromFig.2.4.6shallbebasedontheexposurecategoriesdefinedinSection2.4.8.3.
LowRiseBuildings:WindloadsforthedesignoftheMWFRSsforlowrisebuildingsshallbedeterminedusinga
velocitypressureqhbasedontheexposureresultinginthehighestwindloadsforanywinddirectionatthesite
whereexternalpressurecoefficientsGCpfgiveninFig.2.4.10areused.
2.4.8.5
EXPOSURECATEGORYFORCOMPONENTSANDCLADDING
Componentsandcladdingdesignpressuresforallbuildingsandotherstructuresshallbebasedontheexposure
resultinginthehighestwindloadsforanydirectionatthesite.
2.4.8.6
VELOCITYPRESSUREEXPOSURECOEFFICIENT
BasedontheexposurecategorydeterminedinSection2.4.8.3,avelocitypressureexposurecoefficientKzorKh,
asapplicable,shallbedeterminedfromTable2.4.4.Forasitelocatedinatransitionzonebetweenexposure
categories, that is, near to a change in ground surface roughness, intermediate values of Kz or Kh, between
those shown in Table 2.4.4, are permitted, provided that they are determined by a rational analysis method
definedintherecognizedliterature.
2.4.9
TOPOGRAPHICEFFECTS
2.4.9.1
WINDSPEEDUPOVERHILLS,RIDGES,ANDESCARPMENTS
Wind speedup effects at isolated hills, ridges, and escarpments constituting abrupt changes in the general
topography, located in any exposure category, shall be included in the design when buildings and other site
conditionsandlocationsofstructuresmeetallofthefollowingconditions:
i.
Thehill,ridge,orescarpmentisisolatedandunobstructedupwindbyothersimilartopographic
featuresofcomparableheightfor100timestheheightofthetopographicfeature(100H)or
3.22km,whicheverisless.Thisdistanceshallbemeasuredhorizontallyfromthepointat
whichtheheightHofthehill,ridge,orescarpmentisdetermined.
ii.
Thehill,ridge,orescarpmentprotrudesabovetheheightofupwindterrainfeatureswithina
3.22kmradiusinanyquadrantbyafactoroftwoormore.
iii. ThestructureislocatedasshowninFig.2.4.4intheupperonehalfofahillorridgeornearthe
crestofanescarpment.
iv. H/Lh0.2.
v.
2.4.9.2
Hisgreaterthanorequalto4.5mforExposuresBandCand18.3mforExposureA.
TOPOGRAPHICFACTOR
Thewindspeedupeffectshallbeincludedinthecalculationofdesignwindloadsbyusingthe
factorKzt:
Kzt
1 K1K2K3 2
2.4.3
whereK1,K2,andK3aregiveninFig.2.4.4.
21
Part6
IfsiteconditionsandlocationsofstructuresdonotmeetalltheconditionsspecifiedinSection2.4.9.1thenKzt=
1.0.
2.4.10
GUSTEFFECTFACTOR
2.4.10.1 RIGIDSTRUCTURES
ForrigidstructuresasdefinedinSection2.4.2,thegusteffectfactorshallbetakenas0.85orcalculatedbythe
formula:
0.925
1 1.7
1 1.7
(2.4.4)
(2.4.5)
10
where
theintensityofturbulenceatheight where theequivalentheightofthestructuredefined
as 0.6h, but not less than zmin for all building heights h. zmin and c are listed for each exposure in Table
2.4.3;gQandgvshallbetakenas3.4.ThebackgroundresponseQisgivenby
2.4.6
1
1
0.63
whereB,haredefinedinSection2.4.3;and =theintegrallengthscaleofturbulenceattheequivalentheight
givenby
(2.4.7)
10
inwhichland areconstantslistedinTable2.4.3.
2.4.10.2 FLEXIBLEORDYNAMICALLYSENSITIVESTRUCTURES
ForflexibleordynamicallysensitivestructuresasdefinedinSection2.4.2 naturalperiodgreaterthan1.0
second ,thegusteffectfactorshallbecalculatedby
1
0.925
2.4.8
1.7
1
1.7
gQandgvshallbetakenas3.4andgRisgivenby
0.577
2 ln 3600
2.4.9
2 ln 3600
R,theresonantresponsefactor,isgivenby
1
0.53
7.47
10.3
0.47
(2.4.10)
(2.4.11)
22
Chapter2
(2.4.12)
1
2
1for
for
(2.4.13a)
2.4.13b
wherethesubscriptinEq.2.4.13shallbetakenash,B,andL,respectively,whereh,B,andLaredefinedin
Section2.4.3.
n1=buildingnaturalfrequency
R=Rhsetting=4.6
R=RBsetting=4.6
R=RLsetting=15.4
=dampingratio,percentofcritical
=meanhourlywindspeedatheight determinedfromEq.2.4.14.
10
(2.4.14)
where and areconstantslistedinTable2.4.3andV isthebasicwindspeedinkm/h.
2.4.10.3 RATIONALANALYSIS
InlieuoftheproceduredefinedinSections2.4.10.1and2.4.10.2,determinationofthegusteffectfactorbyany
rationalanalysisdefinedintherecognizedliteratureispermitted.
2.4.10.4 LIMITATIONS
Where combined gusteffect factors and pressure coefficients (GCp, GCpi, and GCpf ) are given in figures and
tables,thegusteffectfactorshallnotbedeterminedseparately.
2.4.11
ENCLOSURECLASSIFICATIONS.
2.4.11.1 GENERAL
For the purpose of determining internal pressure coefficients, all buildings shall be classified as enclosed,
partiallyenclosed,oropenasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
2.4.11.2 OPENINGS
Adeterminationshallbemadeoftheamountofopeningsinthebuildingenvelopetodeterminetheenclosure
classificationasdefinedinSection2.4.11.3.
2.4.11.3 WINDBORNEDEBRIS
Glazinginbuildingslocatedinwindbornedebrisregionsshallbeprotectedwithanimpactresistantcoveringor
beimpactresistantglazingaccordingtotherequirementsspecifiedinASTME1886andASTME1996orother
approvedtestmethodsandperformancecriteria.ThelevelsofimpactresistanceshallbeafunctionofMissile
LevelsandWindZonesspecifiedinASTME1886andASTME1996.
EXCEPTIONS:
23
Part6
i.
GlazinginCategoryII,III,orIVbuildingslocatedover18.3mabovethegroundandover9.2m
aboveaggregatesurfaceroofslocatedwithin458mofthebuildingshallbepermittedtobe
unprotected.
ii.
GlazinginCategoryIbuildingsshallbepermittedtobeunprotected.
2.4.11.4 MULTIPLECLASSIFICATIONS
If a building by definition complies with both the open and partially enclosed definitions, it shall be
classifiedasanopenbuilding.Abuildingthatdoesnotcomplywitheithertheopenorpartiallyenclosed
definitionsshallbeclassifiedasanenclosedbuilding.
2.4.11.5 VELOCITYPRESSURE
Velocitypressure,qz,evaluatedatheightzshallbecalculatedbythefollowingequation:
;(kN/m2),Vinm/s
0.000613
(2.4.15)
where Kd is the wind directionality factor, Kz is the velocity pressure exposure coefficient defined in Section
2.4.8.6,KztisthetopographicfactordefinedinSection2.4.9.2,andqh isthevelocitypressurecalculatedusing
Eq. 2.4.15 at mean roof height h. The numerical coefficient 0.000613 shall be used except where sufficient
climaticdataareavailabletojustifytheselectionofadifferentvalueofthisfactorforadesignapplication.
2.4.12
PRESSUREANDFORCECOEFFICIENTS.
2.4.12.1 INTERNALPRESSURECOEFFICIENTS
InternalPressureCoefficient.Internalpressurecoefficients,GCpi,shallbedeterminedfromFig.2.4.5basedon
buildingenclosureclassificationsdeterminedfromSection2.4.11.
Reduction Factor for Large Volume Buildings, Ri: For a partially enclosed building containing a single,
unpartitioned large volume, the internal pressure coefficient, GCpi, shall be multiplied by the following
reductionfactor,Ri:
1.0or
0.5 1
1
1.0
(2.4.16)
6951
where
Aog=totalareaofopeningsinthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof,inm2)
Vi=unpartitionedinternalvolume,inm3
2.4.12.2 EXTERNALPRESSURECOEFFICIENTS.
Main WindForce Resisting Systems: External pressure coefficients for MWFRSs Cp are given in Figs. 2.4.6,
2.4.7,and2.4.8.Combinedgusteffectfactorandexternalpressurecoefficients,GCpf,aregiveninFig.2.4.10for
lowrisebuildings.ThepressurecoefficientvaluesandgusteffectfactorinFig.2.4.10shallnotbeseparated.
24
Chapter2
ComponentsandCladding:Combinedgusteffectfactorandexternalpressurecoefficientsforcomponentsand
claddingGCparegiveninFigs.2.4.11through2.4.17.Thepressurecoefficientvaluesandgusteffectfactorshall
notbeseparated.
2.4.12.3 FORCECOEFFICIENTS
ForcecoefficientsCfaregiveninFigs.2.4.20through2.4.23.
2.4.12.4 ROOFOVERHANGS
Main WindForce Resisting System: Roof overhangs shall be designed for a positive pressure on the bottom
surfaceofwindwardroofoverhangscorrespondingtoCp=0.8incombinationwiththepressuresdetermined
fromusingFigs.2.4.6and2.4.10.
ComponentsandCladding:Forallbuildings,roofoverhangsshallbedesignedforpressuresdeterminedfrom
pressurecoefficientsgiveninFigs.2.4.11B,C,D.
2.4.12.5 PARAPETS
MainWindForceResistingSystem:ThepressurecoefficientsfortheeffectofparapetsontheMWFRSloads
aregiveninSection2.4.14.2
Components and Cladding: The pressure coefficients for the design of parapet component and cladding
elementsaretakenfromthewallandroofpressurecoefficientsasspecifiedinSection2.4.14.3.
2.4.13
DESIGNWINDLOADSONENCLOSEDANDPARTIALLYENCLOSED
BUILDINGS.
2.4.13.1 GENERAL
SignConvention:Positivepressureactstowardthesurfaceandnegativepressureactsawayfromthesurface.
CriticalLoadCondition:Valuesofexternalandinternalpressuresshallbecombinedalgebraicallytodetermine
themostcriticalload.
TributaryAreasGreaterthan65m2:Componentandcladdingelementswithtributaryareasgreaterthan65m2
shallbepermittedtobedesignedusingtheprovisionsforMWFRSs.
2.4.13.2 MAINWINDFORCERESISTINGSYSTEMS
Rigid Buildings of All Heights: Design wind pressures for the MWFRS of buildings of all heights shall be
determinedbythefollowingequation:
k Nm
(2.4.17)
where
q= qzforwindwardwallsevaluatedatheightzabovetheground
q= qhforleewardwalls,sidewalls,androofs,evaluatedatheighth
qi = qh forwindwardwalls,sidewalls,leewardwalls,androofsofenclosedbuildingsandfornegativeinternal
pressureevaluationinpartiallyenclosedbuildings
qi = qz forpositiveinternalpressureevaluationinpartiallyenclosedbuildingswhereheightzisdefinedasthe
levelofthehighestopeninginthebuildingthatcouldaffectthepositiveinternalpressure.Forbuildingssitedin
windbornedebrisregions,glazingthatisnotimpactresistantorprotectedwithanimpactresistantcovering,
25
Part6
shallbetreatedasanopeninginaccordancewithSection2.4.11.3.Forpositiveinternalpressureevaluation, qi
mayconservativelybeevaluatedatheighth(qi=qh)
G= gusteffectfactorfromSection2.4.10
Cp=externalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.6or2.4.8
(GCpi)=internalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.5
qandqishallbeevaluatedusingexposuredefinedinSection2.4.8.3.Pressureshallbeappliedsimultaneously
onwindwardandleewardwallsandonroofsurfacesasdefinedinFigs.2.4.6and2.4.8.
LowRise Building: Alternatively, design wind pressures for the MWFRS of lowrise buildings shall be
determinedbythefollowingequation:
kNm
(2.4.18)
where
qh=velocitypressureevaluatedatmeanroofheighthusingexposuredefinedinSection2.4.8.3
(GCpf)=externalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.10
(GCpi)=internalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.5
Flexible Buildings: Design wind pressures for the MWFRS of flexible buildings shall be determined from the
followingequation:
k Nm
(2.4.19)
whereq,qi,Cp,and(GCpi)areasdefinedinSection2.4.13.2andGf=gusteffectfactorisdefinedasinSection
2.4.10.
Parapets:ThedesignwindpressurefortheeffectofparapetsonMWFRSsofrigid,lowrise,orflexiblebuildings
withflat,gable,orhiproofsshallbedeterminedbythefollowingequation:
kNm
(2.4.20)
where
pp = combinednet pressure on the parapet due tothe combination ofthe net pressuresfromthe frontand
back parapet surfaces. Plus (and minus) signs signify net pressure acting toward (and away from) the front
(exterior)sideoftheparapet
qp= velocitypressureevaluatedatthetopoftheparapet
GCpn= combinednetpressurecoefficient
= +1.5forwindwardparapet
= 1.0forleewardparapet
2.4.13.3 DESIGNWINDLOADCASES
The MWFRS of buildings of all heights, whose wind loads have been determined under the provisions of
Sections2.4.13.2,shallbedesignedforthewindloadcasesasdefinedinFig.2.4.9.Theeccentricitye forrigid
structuresshallbemeasuredfromthegeometriccenterofthebuildingfaceandshallbeconsideredforeach
principalaxis(eX,eY ).Theeccentricitye forflexiblestructuresshallbedeterminedfromthefollowingequation
andshallbeconsideredforeachprincipalaxis(eX,eY ):
26
Chapter2
1.7
(2.4.21)
1.7
where
eQ= eccentricityeasdeterminedforrigidstructuresinFig.2.4.9
eR= distancebetweentheelasticshearcenterandcenterofmassofeachfloor
,
gQ,Q,gR,R shallbeasdefinedinSection2.4.3
Thesignoftheeccentricitye shallbeplusorminus,whichevercausesthemoresevereloadeffect.
EXCEPTION:Onestorybuildingswithhlessthanorequalto9.1m,buildingstwostoriesorlessframedwith
lightframe construction, and buildings two stories or less designed with flexible diaphragms need only be
designedforLoadCase1andLoadCase3inFig.2.4.9.
2.4.13.4 COMPONENTSANDCLADDING.
LowRise Buildings and Buildings with h 18.3 m: Design wind pressures on component and cladding
elementsoflowrisebuildingsandbuildingswithh 18.3mshallbedeterminedfromthefollowingequation:
k Nm
(2.4.22)
where
qh= velocitypressureevaluatedatmeanroofheighthusingexposuredefinedinSection2.4.8.5
(GCp)= externalpressurecoefficientsgiveninFigs.2.4.11through2.4.16
(GCpi )= internalpressurecoefficientgiveninFig.2.4.5
Buildingswithh>18.3m:Designwindpressuresoncomponentsandcladdingforallbuildingswithh > 18.3m
shallbedeterminedfromthefollowingequation:
kN/m
(2.4.23)
where
q=qzforwindwardwallscalculatedatheightzabovetheground
q=qhforleewardwalls,sidewalls,androofs,evaluatedatheighth
qi =qh forwindwardwalls,sidewalls,leewardwalls,androofsofenclosedbuildingsandfornegativeinternal
pressureevaluationinpartiallyenclosedbuildings
qi =qz forpositiveinternalpressureevaluationinpartiallyenclosedbuildingswhereheightzisdefinedasthe
levelofthehighestopeninginthebuildingthatcouldaffectthepositiveinternalpressure.Forbuildingssitedin
windbornedebrisregions,glazingthatisnotimpactresistantorprotectedwithanimpactresistantcovering,
shallbetreatedasanopeninginaccordancewith Section2.4.11.3.Forpositiveinternalpressureevaluation,qi
mayconservativelybeevaluatedatheighth(qi=qh)
(GCp)=externalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.17.
(GCpi )=internalpressurecoefficientgiveninFig.2.4.5.qandqi shallbeevaluatedusingexposuredefinedin
Section2.4.8.3.
27
Part6
2.4.13.5 ALTERNATIVEDESIGNWINDPRESSURESFORCOMPONENTSAND
CLADDINGINBUILDINGSWITH18.3M< h < 27.4M
AlternativetotherequirementsofSection2.4.13.2,thedesignofcomponentsandcladdingforbuildingswitha
meanroofheightgreaterthan18.3mandlessthan27.4mvaluesfromFigs.2.4.11through2.4.17shallbeused
onlyiftheheighttowidthratioisoneorless(exceptaspermittedbyNote6ofFig.2.4.17)andEq.2.4.22is
used.
Parapets:Thedesignwindpressureonthecomponentsandcladdingelementsofparapetsshallbedesignedby
thefollowingequation:
(2.4.24)
where
qp=velocitypressureevaluatedatthetopoftheparapet
GCp=externalpressurecoefficientfromFigs.2.4.11through2.4.17
GCpi=internalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.5,basedontheporosityoftheparapetenvelope.
Twoloadcasesshallbeconsidered.LoadCaseAshallconsistofapplyingtheapplicablepositivewallpressure
fromFig.2.4.11Aor2.4.17tothefrontsurfaceoftheparapetwhileapplyingtheapplicablenegativeedgeor
corner zone roof pressure from Figs.2.4.11 through 2.4.17 to the back surface. Load Case B shall consist of
applying theapplicable positivewall pressure from Fig.2.4.11A or2.4.17 tothe back ofthe parapet surface,
andapplyingtheapplicablenegativewallpressurefromFig.2.4.11Aor2.4.17tothefrontsurface.Edgeand
cornerzonesshallbearrangedasshowninFigs.2.4.11through2.4.17.GCp shallbedeterminedforappropriate
roof angle and effective wind area from Figs.2.4.11 through 2.4.17. If internal pressure is present, both load
casesshouldbeevaluatedunderpositiveandnegativeinternalpressure.
2.4.14
DESIGNWINDLOADSONOPENBUILDINGSWITHMONOSLOPE,
PITCHED,ORTROUGHEDROOFS.
2.4.14.1 GENERAL
Sign Convention: Plus and minus signs signify pressure acting toward and away from the top surface of the
roof,respectively.
CriticalLoadCondition:Net pressurecoefficientsCN includecontributionsfromtopandbottomsurfaces.All
loadcasesshownforeachroofangleshallbeinvestigated.
2.4.14.2 MAINWINDFORCERESISTINGSYSTEMS
ThenetdesignpressurefortheMWFRSsofmonoslope,pitched,ortroughedroofsshallbedeterminedbythe
followingequation:
(2.4.25)
where
qh = velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof height h using the exposure as defined in Section 2.4.8.3 that
resultsinthehighestwindloadsforanywinddirectionatthesite
CN= netpressurecoefficientdeterminedfromFigs.2.4.18Athrough2.4.18D.
28
Chapter2
Forfreeroofswithanangle ofplaneofrooffromhorizontal lessthanorequalto 5o andcontainingfascia

panels,thefasciapanelshallbeconsideredaninvertedparapet.Thecontributionofloadsonthefasciatothe
MWFRSloadsshallbedeterminedusingSection2.4.13.5withqp equaltoqh .
2.4.14.3 COMPONENTANDCLADDINGELEMENTS
Thenetdesignwindpressureforcomponentandcladdingelementsofmonoslope,pitched,andtroughedroofs
shallbedeterminedbythefollowingequation:
(2.4.26)
where
qh = velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof height h using the exposure as defined in Section 2.4.8.3 that
resultsinthehighestwindloadsforanywinddirectionatthesite
CN= netpressurecoefficientdeterminedfromFigs.2.4.19Athrough2.4.19C.
2.4.15
DESIGNWINDLOADSONSOLIDFREESTANDINGWALLSANDSOLID
SIGNS
Thedesignwindforceforsolidfreestandingwallsandsolidsignsshallbedeterminedbythefollowingformula:
kN
(2.4.27)
where
qh= thevelocitypressureevaluatedatheighth(definedinFig.2.4.20)usingexposuredefinedinSection2.4.8.3
Cf= netforcecoefficientfromFig.2.4.20
AS= thegrossareaofthesolidfreestandingwallorsolidsign,inm2
2.4.16
DESIGNWINDLOADSONOTHERSTRUCTURES
Thedesignwindforceforotherstructuresshallbedeterminedbythefollowing
equation:
kN
(2.4.28)
where
qz= velocitypressureevaluatedatheightzofthecentroidofareaAfusingexposuredefinedinSection2.4.8.3
Cf= forcecoefficientsfromFigs.2.4.21through2.4.23.
Af= projectedareanormaltothewindexceptwhereCfisspecifiedfortheactualsurfacearea,m
29
Part6
2.4.17
ROOFTOPSTRUCTURESANDEQUIPMENTFORBUILDINGSWITHH
18.3M
TheforceonrooftopstructuresandequipmentwithAflessthan(0.1Bh)locatedonbuildingswithh18.3m
shallbedeterminedfromEq.2.4.28,increasedbyafactorof1.9.Thefactorshallbepermittedtobereduced
linearlyfrom1.9to1.0asthevalueofAfisincreasedfrom(0.1Bh)to(Bh).
2.4.18
METHOD3WINDTUNNELPROCEDURE
2.4.18.1 SCOPE
Windtunneltestsshallbe usedwhererequiredbySection2.4.5.1.Windtunneltestingshall bepermittedin
lieuofMethods1and2foranybuildingorstructure.
2.4.18.2 TESTCONDITIONS
Windtunneltests,orsimilartestsemployingfluidsotherthanair,usedforthedeterminationofdesignwind
loads for any building or other structure, shall be conducted in accordance with this section. Tests for the
determinationofmeanandfluctuatingforcesandpressuresshallmeetallofthefollowingconditions:
i.
Thenaturalatmosphericboundarylayerhasbeenmodeledtoaccountforthevariationof
windspeedwithheight.
ii.
Therelevantmacro(integral)lengthandmicrolengthscalesofthelongitudinalcomponent
ofatmosphericturbulencearemodeledtoapproximatelythesamescaleasthatusedtomodel
thebuildingorstructure.
iii. Themodeledbuildingorotherstructureandsurroundingstructuresandtopographyare
geometricallysimilartotheirfullscalecounterparts,exceptthat,forlowrisebuildings
meetingtherequirementsofSection2.4.5.1,testsshallbepermittedforthemodeledbuilding
inasingleexposuresiteasdefinedinSection2.4.8
iv. Theprojectedareaofthemodeledbuildingorotherstructureandsurroundingsislessthan8
percentofthetestsectioncrosssectionalareaunlesscorrectionismadeforblockage.
v.
Thelongitudinalpressuregradientinthewindtunneltestsectionisaccountedfor.
vi. Reynoldsnumbereffectsonpressuresandforcesareminimized.
vii. Responsecharacteristicsofthewindtunnelinstrumentationareconsistentwiththerequired
measurements.
2.4.19
DYNAMICRESPONSE
Tests for the purpose of determining the dynamic response of a building or other structure shall be in
accordance with Section 2.4.18.2. The structural model and associated analysis shall account for mass
distribution,stiffness,anddamping.
30
Chapterr2
Fig. 22.4.1 Basic wind speed (Vb) map of B

Bangladesh
31
Part6
MainWindForceResistingSystem Method1
Figure2.4.2
DesignWindPressures
h 18.3 m
Walls&Roofs
EnclosedBuildings
Notes:
1.Pressuresshownareappliedtothehorizontalandverticalprojections,forexposureA,ath=9.1m,I=1.0,andKzt=
1.0.AdjusttootherconditionsusingEquation2.4.1.
2.Theloadpatternsshownshallbeappliedtoeachcornerofthebuildinginturnasthereferencecorner.(SeeFigure
2.4.10)
3.ForthedesignofthelongitudinalMWFRSuse=0,andlocatethezoneE/F,G/Hboundaryatthemidlengthofthe
building.
4.Loadcases1and2mustbecheckedfor25<45.Loadcase2at25isprovidedonlyforinterpolationbetween
25to30.
5.Plusandminussignssignifypressuresactingtowardandawayfromtheprojectedsurfaces,respectively.
6.Forroofslopesotherthanthoseshown,linearinterpolationispermitted.
7.Thetotalhorizontalloadshallnotbelessthanthatdeterminedbyassumingps=0inzonesB&D.
8.Thezonepressuresrepresentthefollowing:
HorizontalpressurezonesSumofthewindwardandleewardnet(sumofinternalandexternal)pressureson
verticalprojectionof:
AEndzoneofwall
CInteriorzoneofwall
BEndzoneofroof
DInteriorzoneofroof
VerticalpressurezonesNet(sumofinternalandexternal)pressuresonhorizontalprojectionof:
EEndzoneofwindwardroofGInteriorzoneofwindwardroof
FEndzoneofleewardroof
HInteriorzoneofleewardroof
9. WherezoneEorGfallsonaroofoverhangonthewindwardsideofthebuilding,useEOHandGOHforthepressure
onthehorizontalprojectionoftheoverhang.Overhangsontheleewardandsideedgesshallhavethebasiczone
pressureapplied.
10.Notation:
a:10percentofleasthorizontaldimensionor0.4h,whicheverissmaller,butnotlessthaneither4%ofleast
horizontaldimensionor0.9m.
h:Meanroofheight,infeet(meters),exceptthateaveheightshallbeusedforroofangles<10.
:Angleofplaneofrooffromhorizontal,indegrees.
32
Chapter2
Figure2.4.2(contd)
DesignWindpressures
h 18.3m
Walls&Roofs
EnclosedBuildings
AdjustmentFactor
forBuildingHeightandExposure,
Mean roof height Exposure
(m)
A
4.6
1.00
1.21
1.47
1.00
1.29
1.55
7.6
1.00
1.35
1.61
9.1
1.00
1.40
1.66
10.7
1.05
1.45
1.70
12.2
1.09
1.49
1.74
13.7
1.12
1.53
1.78
15.2
1.16
1.56
1.81
16.8
1.19
1.59
1.84
18.3
1.22
1.62
1.87
33
Part6
ComponentsandCladdingMethod1
Figure2.4.3
DesignWindPressures
h 18.3m
Walls&Roofs
EnclosedBuildings
Notes:
1.Pressuresshownareappliednormaltothesurface,forexposureA,ath=9.1m,I=1.0,andKzt=1.0.Adjustto
otherconditionsusingEquation2.4.2.
2.Plusandminussignssignifypressuresactingtowardandawayfromthesurfaces,respectively.
3.Forhiproofswith25,Zone3shallbetreatedasZone2.
4.Foreffectivewindareasbetweenthosegiven,valuemaybeinterpolated,otherwiseusethevalueassociated
withthelowereffectivewindarea.
5.Notation:
a:10percentofleasthorizontaldimensionor0.4h,whicheverissmaller,butnotlessthaneither4%ofleast
horizontaldimensionor0.9m.
h:Meanroofheight,infeet(meters),exceptthateaveheightshallbeusedforroofangles<10.
34
Chapter2
Figure2.4.3(cont'd)
NetDesignWindPressures
h18.3m
Walls&Roofs
EnclosedBuildings
RoofOverhangNetDesignWindPressure,Pnet30(kN/m2)
(ExposureAath=9.1mwithl=1.0)
Roof>27to45
degrees
Roof>7to27
degrees
Roof0to7degrees
Zone
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
Effective
Wind
Area
(m2)
0.930
1.860
4.648
9.296
0.930
1.860
4.648
9.296
0.930
1.860
4.648
9.296
0.930
1.860
4.648
9.296
0.930
1.860
4.648
9.296
0.930
1.860
4.648
9.296
BasicWindSpeedV(m/s)
40.23 44.7
49.17 53.64
58.11
1.005
0.986
0.962
0.947
1.656
1.297
0.828
0.479
1.302
1.302
1.302
1.302
2.187
1.971
1.689
1.479
1.182
1.148
1.101
1.062
1.182
1.148
1.101
1.062
2.096
2.058
2.010
1.971
3.450
2.708
1.727
0.986
2.713
2.713
2.713
2.713
4.560
4.115
3.526
3.082
2.464
2.393
2.292
2.220
2.464
2.393
2.292
2.220
1.239
1.220
1.191
1.168
2.043
1.603
1.024
0.584
1.603
1.603
1.603
1.603
2.699
2.436
2.086
1.823
1.460
1.416
1.359
1.311
1.460
1.416
1.359
1.311
1.502
1.473
1.440
1.412
2.470
1.938
1.240
0.708
1.943
1.943
1.943
1.943
3.268
2.948
2.526
2.206
1.766
1.713
1.641
1.587
1.766
1.713
1.641
1.589
1.785
1.756
1.713
1.680
2.943
2.311
1.474
0.842
2.311
2.311
2.311
2.311
3.885
3.507
3.005
2.627
2.101
2.038
1.952
1.890
2.101
2.038
1.952
1.890
62.58
2.431
2.388
2.330
2.287
4.005
3.144
2.005
1.144
3.144
3.144
3.144
3.144
5.292
4.775
4.091
3.574
2.861
2.775
2.660
2.574
2.861
2.775
2.660
2.574
AdjustmentFactor
forBuildingHeightandExposure,
Mean roof Exposure
height(m)
A
B
4.6
6.1
7.6
9.15
10.7
12.2
13.7
15.2
16.8
18.3
1.47
1.55
1.61
1.66
1.70
1.74
1.78
1.81
1.84
1.87
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.05
1.09
1.12
1.16
1.19
1.22
1.21
1.29
1.35
1.40
1.45
1.49
1.53
1.56
1.59
1.62
UnitConversion1.0ft=0.3048m;1.0psf=0.0929m2;1.0psf=0.0479KN/m
35
67.05
2.790
2.742
2.675
2.627
4.594
3.609
2.302
1.311
3.613
3.613
3.613
3.613
6.072
5.479
4.694
4.106
3.282
3.182
3.052
2.952
3.283
3.182
3.053
2.952
75.99
3.584
3.522
3.436
3.373
5.905
4.632
2.957
1.684
4.637
4.637
4.637
4.637
7.800
7.039
6.034
5.268
4.216
4.091
3.924
3.795
4.216
4.091
3.923
3.795
Part6
TopographicFactor,KztMethod2
Figure2.4.4
H/Lh
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
Topographic Multipliers for Exposure B

z/Lh
x/Lh 2-DK2 Multiplier
All
2-D
2-D
Ridge
K1 Multiplier
2-D
3-D
Escarp.
Axisym.
Hill
0.29
0.36
0.43
0.51
0.58
0.65
0.72
0.17
0.21
0.26
0.30
0.34
0.38
0.43
0.21
0.26
0.32
0.37
0.42
0.47
0.53
0.00
0.50
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
Escarp.
Other
Cases
1.00
0.88
0.75
0.63
0.50
0.38
0.25
0.13
0.00
1.00
0.67
0.33
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Ridge
0.00
0.10
0.20
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
1.00
1.50
2.00
1.00
0.74
0.55
0.41
0.30
0.22
0.17
0.12
0.09
0.07
0.05
0.01
0.00
K3 Multiplier
2-D
3-D
Escarp.
Axisym.
Hill
1.00
0.78
0.61
0.47
0.37
0.29
0.22
0.17
0.14
0.11
0.08
0.02
0.00
1.00
0.67
0.45
0.30
0.20
0.14
0.09
0.06
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.00
0.00
Notes:
1.ForvaluesofH/Lh,x/Lhandz/Lhotherthanthoseshown,linearinterpolationispermitted.
2.ForH/Lh>0.5,assumeH/Lh=0.5forevaluatingK1andsubstitute2HforLhforevaluatingK2and
K3.
3. Multipliers are based on the assumption that wind approaches the hill or escarpment along the
directionofmaximumslope.
4.Notation:
H:Heightofhillorescarpmentrelativetotheupwindterrain,inmeters.
Lh:Distanceupwindofcresttowherethedifferenceingroundelevationishalftheheightof
hillorescarpment,inmeters.
K1:Factortoaccountforshapeoftopographicfeatureandmaximumspeedupeffect.
K2:Factortoaccountforreductioninspeedupwithdistanceupwindordownwindofcrest.
K3:Factortoaccountforreductioninspeedupwithheightabovelocalterrain.
x:Distance(upwindordownwind)fromthecresttothebuildingsite,inmeters.
z:Heightabovelocalgroundlevel,inmeters.
W:Horizontalattenuationfactor.
:Heightattenuationfactor.
36
Chapter2
TopographicFactor,KztMethod2
Figure2.4.4(contd)
Equation:
1
K1 determined from table below

| |
1
/
ParametersforSpeedUpOverHillsandEscarpments
HillShape
K1/(H/Lh)
Exposure
A
B
1.30
1.45
2dimensionalridges
(or valleys with negative H in
K1/(H/Lh)
2dimensionalescarpments
0.75
C
1.55
Upwind of Downwindof
crest
Crest
1.5
1.5
0.85
0.95
2.5
1.5
3dimensionalaxisym.Hill
1.05
1.15
1.5
1.5
0.95
MainWindForceRes.Sys./CompandClad. Method2
AllHeight
Figure2.4.5
Walls&Roofs
Internal PressureCoefficient,GCpi
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosed,andOpenBuildings
Notes:
1.
Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the internal surfaces,
respectively.
EnclosureClassification
GCpi
OpenBuilding
PartiallyEnclosedBuilding
0.00
+0.55
0.55
EnclosedBuilding
+0.18
0.18
2.
ValuesofGCpishallbeusedwithqzorqhasspecifiedin2.4.13.
3.
Twocasesshallbeconsideredtodeterminethecriticalloadrequirementsfortheappropriate
condition:
(i)apositivevalueofGCpiappliedtoallinternalsurfaces
(ii)anegativevalueofGCpiappliedtoallinternalsurfaces.
37
Part6
Figure2.4.6
ExternalPressureCoefficients,Cp
AllHeights
Walls&Roofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings
38
Chapter2
Figure2.4.6(cont)
AllHeights
Walls&Roofs
WallPressureCoefficients,Cp
Surface
L/B
WindwardWall
Allvalues
LeewardWall
01
2
>4
SideWall
Allvalues
Cp
0.8
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.7
UseWith
qz
qh
qh
RoofPressureCoefficients,Cp,forusewithqh
Wind
Windward
Direction Angle,(degrees)
h/L
10
15
Normal
Toridge
0
for>10
0.7
<0.25 0.18
0.5
>1.0
Normal
Toridge
for
<10o
and
Parallel
Toridge
forall
<0.5
0.9
0.18
0.5
0.0*
0.7
0.18
1.3** 1.0
0.18
0.18
Horizontal
distancefrom
Windwardedge
0toh/2
h/2toh
Hto2h
>2h
0toh/2
Leeward
Angle,(degrees)
10
15 >20
20
25
30
35
45
>60#
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.0*
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.01
0.5
0.6
0.4
0.0*
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.0*
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.01
0.7 0.5 0.3
0.0* 0.2
0.18
Cp
0.2
0.2
0.0*
0.3
0.7
0.01
0.6
0.6
0.9,0.18
0.9,0.18
0.5,0.18
0.3,0.18
1.3**,0.18
*Valueisprovidedforinterpolationpurposes
**Valuecanbereducedlinearlywitharea
overwhichitisapplicableasfollows
Area(m2)
ReductionFactor
< 9.3sqm
1.0
>h/2
0.7,0.18
23,2sqm
0.9
>92.9sqm
0.8
Notes:
1.Plusandminussignssignifypressuresactingtowardandawayfromthesurfaces,respectively.
2.LinearinterpolationispermittedforvaluesofL/B,h/Landotherthanshown.Interpolationshallonlybe
carriedoutbetweenvaluesofthesamesign.Wherenovalueofthesamesignisgiven,assume0.0for
interpolationpurposes.
3.WheretwovaluesofCparelisted,thisindicatesthatthewindwardroofslopeissubjectedtoeither
positiveornegativepressuresandtheroofstructureshallbedesignedforbothconditions.Interpolationfor
intermediateratiosofh/LinthiscaseshallonlybecarriedoutbetweenCpvaluesoflikesign.
4.Formonosloperoofs,entireroofsurfaceiseitherawindwardorleewardsurface.
5.ForflexiblebuildingsuseappropriateGfasdeterminedbySection2.4.10.
6.RefertoFigure2.4.7fordomesandFigure2.4.8forarchedroofs.
7.Notation:
B:Horizontaldimensionofbuilding,inmeter,measurednormaltowinddirection.
L:Horizontaldimensionofbuilding,inmeter,measuredparalleltowinddirection.
h:Meanroofheightinmeters,exceptthateaveheightshallbeusedfore10degrees.
z:Heightaboveground,inmeters.
G:Gusteffectfactor.
qz,qh:Velocitypressure,inN/m2,evaluatedatrespectiveheight.
8.Formansardroofs,thetophorizontalsurfaceandleewardinclinedsurfaceshallbetreatedasleeward
surfacesfromthetable.
9.ExceptforMWFRS'sattheroofconsistingofmomentresistingframes,thetotalhorizontalshearshallnot
belessthanthatdeterminedbyneglectingwindforcesonroofsurfaces.
#Forroofslopesgreaterthan80,useCp=0.8
>1.0
39
Part6
Figure2.4.7
AllHeights
Domed Roofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings andStructures
Note:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Twoloadcasesshallbeconsidered:
CaseA.CpvaluesbetweenAandBandbetweenBandCshallbedeterminedbylinear
interpolationalongarcsonthedomeparalleltothewinddirection;
CaseB.CpshallbetheconstantvalueofAfor25degrees,andshallbedeterminedbylinear
interpolationfrom25degreestoBandfromBtoC.
wherehD+fistheheightatthetopofthedome.
ValuesdenoteCptobeusedwith
Plusandminussignssignifypressuresactingtowardandawayfromthesurfaces,respectively.
Cpisconstantonthedomesurfaceforarcsofcirclesperpendiculartothewinddirection;for
example,thearcpassingthroughBBBandallarcsparalleltoBBB.
ForvaluesofhD/Dbetweenthoselistedonthegraphcurves,linearinterpolationshallbe
permitted.
=0degreesondomespringline,=90degreesatdomecentertoppoint.fismeasuredfrom
springlinetotop.
Thetotalhorizontalshearshallnotbelessthanthatdeterminedbyneglectingwindforcesroof
surfaces.
Forf/Dvalueslessthan0.05.useFigure2.4.6.
40
Chapter2
MainWindForceRes.Sys./CompandClad. Method2
AllHeight
Figure2.4.8
ArchedRoofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildingsandStructures
Condition
Roofonelevatedstructure
Risetospan
ratio,r
0<r<0.2
0.2 r<0.3*
0.3r0.6
Roof springing from ground

0<r0.6
level
Cp
Windward
quarter
Center
half
Leeward
quarter
0.9
0.7r
0.5
l.5r0.3
0.7r
0.5
2.75r0.7
0.7r
0.5
1.4r
0.7r
0.5
*Whentherisetospanratiois0.2r0.3,alternatecoefficientsgivenby6r2.1shallalsobeusedfor
thewindwardquarter.
Notes:
1.
Valueslistedareforthedeterminationofaverageloadonmainwindforceresistingsystems.
2.
3.
Forwinddirectedparalleltotheaxisofthearch,usepressurecoefficientsfromFig.2.4.6with
winddirectedparalleltoridge.
4.
Forcomponentsandcladding:(1)Atroofperimeter,usetheexternalpressurecoefficientsinFig.
2.4.11withebasedonspringlineslopeand(2)forremainingroofareas,useexternalpressure
coefficientsofthistablemultipliedby0.87.
41
Part6
Figure2.4.9
DesignWindLoadCases
AllHeights
Case1.Fulldesignwindpressureactingontheprojectedareaperpendiculartoeachprincipalaxis
ofthestructure,consideredseparatelyalongeachprincipalaxis.
Case2.Threequartersofthedesignwindpressureactingontheprojectedareaperpendicularto
eachprincipalaxisofthestructureinconjunctionwithatorsionalmomentasshown,
consideredseparatelyforeachprincipalaxis.
Case3.WindloadingasdefinedinCase1,butconsideredtoactsimultaneouslyat75%ofthe
specifiedvalue.
Case4.WindloadingasdefinedinCase2,butconsideredtoactsimultaneouslyat75%ofthe
specifiedvalue.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
Designwindpressuresforwindwardandleewardfacesshallbedeterminedinaccordance
withtheprovisionsof2.4.13asapplicableforbuildingofallheights.
Diagramsshowplanviewsofbuilding.
Notation:
Pwx,PwY:Windwardfacedesignpressureactinginthex,yprincipalaxis,respectively.
PLX,PLY:Leewardfacedesignpressureactinginthex,yprincipalaxis,respectively.
e(eX+ey):Eccentricityforthex,yprincipalaxisofthestructure,respectively.
MT:Torsionalmomentperunitheightactingaboutaverticalaxisofthebuilding.
42
Chapter2
Figure2.4.10
ExternalPressureCoefficients,GCpf
h 18.3m
LowriseWalls&
Roofs
43
Part6
Figure2.4.10(contd)
ExternalPressureCoefficients,GCpf
Roof
BuildingSurface
Angle
1
2
3
4
h 18.3m
LowriseWalls&
Roofs
1E
2E
3E
4E
(degrees)
05
0.40 0.69
0.37
0.29
0.45
0.45
0.61
1.07
0.53
0.43
20
0.53 0.69
0.48
0.43
0.45
0.45
0.80
1.07
0.69
0.64
3045
0.56 0.21
0.43
0.37
0.45
0.45
0.69
0.27
0.53
0.48
90
0.56 0.56
0.37
0.37
0.45
0.45
0.69
0.69
0.48
0.48
Notes:
1. Plusandminussignssignifypressuresactingtowardandawayfromthesurfaces,respectively.
2. Forvaluesofotherthanthoseshown,linearinterpolationispermitted.
3. Thebuildingmustbedesignedforallwinddirectionsusingthe8loadingpatternsshown.Theload
patternsareappliedtoeachbuildingcornerinturnastheReferenceCorner.
4. Combinationsofexternalandinternalpressures(seeFigure2.4.5)shallbeevaluatedasrequiredto
obtainthemostsevereloadings.
5. Forthetorsionalloadcasesshownbelow,thepressuresinzonesdesignatedwithaT(1T,2T,3T,
4T)shallbe25%ofthefulldesignwindpressures(zones1,2,3,4).
Exception: One story buildings with h less than or equal to 9.1m, buildings two stories or less
framed with light frame construction, and buildings two stories or less designed with flexible
diaphragmsneednotbedesignedforthetorsionalloadcases.
Torsionalloadingshallapplytoalleightbasicloadpatternsusingthefiguresbelowappliedateach
referencecorner.
6. Except for momentresisting frames, the total horizontal shear shall not be less than that
determinedbyneglectingwindforcesonroofsurfaces.
7. ForthedesignoftheMWFRSprovidinglateralresistanceinadirectionparalleltoaridgelineorfor
flatroofs,use=0andlocatethezone2/3boundaryatthemidlengthofthebuilding.
8. TheroofpressurecoefficientGCpf,whennegativeinZone2or2E,shallbeappliedinZone2/2Efor
adistancefromtheedgeofroofequalto0.5timesthehorizontaldimensionofthebuildingparallel
to the direction of the MWFRS being designed or 2.5 times the eave height, he, at the windward
wall, whichever is less; the remainder of Zone 2/2E extending to the ridge line shall use the
pressurecoefficientGCpfforZone3/3E.
9. Notation:
a:10percentofleasthorizontaldimensionor0.4h,whicheverissmaller,butnotlessthaneither
4%ofleasthorizontaldimensionor0.9m.
h:Meanroofheight,inmeters,exceptthateaveheightshallbeusedfor10.
44
Chapter2
Figure2.4.11.A
ExternalPressureCoefficients,GCp
h18.3m
Walls
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
VerticalscaledenotesGCPtobeusedwithqh
Horizontalscaledenoteseffectivewindarea,insquaremeters.
Plusandminussignssignifypressuresactingtowardandawayfromthesurfaces,
respectively.
Eachcomponentshallbedesignedformaximumpositiveandnegativepressures.
ValuesofGCPforwallsshallbereducedby10%when100.
Notation:
a:10percentofleasthorizontaldimensionor0.4h,whicheverissmaller,butnotlessthan
either4%ofleasthorizontaldimensionor0.9m.
45
Part6
Figure2.4.11.B
h 18.3m
GableRoofs70
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
respectively.
Ifaparapetequaltoorhigherthan0.9misprovidedaroundtheperimeteroftheroofwith
70,thenegativevaluesofGC0inZone3shallbeequaltothoseforZone2andpositive
valuesofGCPinZones2and4shallbesetequaltothoseforwallZones4and5respectively
infigure2.4.11A.
ValuesofGCPforroofoverhangsincludepressurecontributionsfrombothupperandlower
surfaces.
Notation:
h:Eaveheightshallbeusedfor100.
46
Chapter2
Figure2.4.11.C
h 18.3m
Gable/HipRoofs70<270
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Horizontalscaledenoteseffectivewindarea,insquarefeet(squaremeters).
respectively.
ValuesofGCPforroofoverhangsincludepressurecontributionsfrombothupperand
lowersurfaces.
Forhiproofswith70<270,edge/ridgestripsandpressurecoefficientsforridgesof
gabledroofsshallapplyoneachhip.
Forhiproofswith70<250,Zone3shallbetreatedasZone2.
Notation:
47
Part6
Figure2.4.11.D
h 18.3m
0
0
GableRoofs27 <45
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Horizontalscaledenoteseffectivewindarea,insquarefeet(squaremeters).
respectively.
ValuesofGCPforroofoverhangsincludepressurecontributionsfrombothupperandlower
surfaces.
Notation:
h:Meanroofheight,inmeters.
48
Chapter2
Figure2.4.12
h 18.3m
SteppedRoofs
Notes:
On the lower level of flat, stepped roofs shown in Fig. 2.4.12, the zone designations and pressure
coefficientsshowninFig.2.4.11Bshallapply,exceptthatat theroofupperwallintersection(s),Zone3
shallbetreatedasZone2andZone2shallbetreatedasZone1.PositivevaluesofGCp equaltothosefor
wallsinFig.2.4.11AshallapplyonthecrosshatchedareasshowninFig.2.4.12.
Notation:
b:1.5h1inFig.2.4.12,butnotgreaterthan30.5m.
h:Meanroofheight,inmeters.
hi:h1orh2inFig.2.4.12;h=h1+h2;h13.1m;hi/h=0.3to0.7.
W:BuildingwidthinFig.2.4.12.
Wi:W1orW2orW3inFig.2.4.12.W=W1+W2orW1+W2+W3;Wi/W=0.25to0.75.
e:Angleofplaneofrooffromhorizontal,indegrees.
49
Part6
Figure2.4.13
h 18.3m
MultispanGableRoofs
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
respectively.
For100ValuesofGCPfromFig.2.4.11shallbeused.
Notation:
h:Meanroofheight,infeet(meters),exceptthateaveheightshallbeusedfor100.
W:Buildingmodulewidth,inmeters.
50
Chapter2
Figure2.4.14.A
h 18.3m
MonoslopeRoofs
30<100
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
HorizontalscaledenoteseffectivewindareaA,insquaremeters.
respectively.
For30ValuesofGCPfromFig.2.4.11Bshallbeused.
Notation:
h:Eaveheightshallbeusedfor100.
W:Buildingwidth,inmeters.
51
Part6
Figure2.4.14.B
h 18.3m
MonoslopeRoofs
100<300
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
HorizontalscaledenoteseffectivewindareaA,insquarefeet(squaremeters).
Notation:
a:10percentofleasthorizontaldimensionor0.4h,whicheverissmaller,butnotlessthaneither
4%ofleasthorizontaldimensionor0.9m.
h:Meanroofheightinmeters.
52
Chapter2
Figure2.4.15
h 18.3m
SawtoothRoofs
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
HorizontalscaledenoteseffectivewindareaA,insquarefeet(squaremeters).
0
For10 ValuesofGCPfromFig.2.4.11shallbeused.
Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than
h:Meanroofheightinmetersexceptthateaveheightshallbeusedfor00100.
53
Part6
Figure2.4.16
AllHeights
DomedRoofs
ExternalPressureCoefficientsforDomeswithacircularBase
NegativePressures
PositivePressures
,degrees
GCp
090
0.9
060
+0.9
PositivePressures
6190
+0.5
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ValuesdenoteCptobeusedwithq(hD+f)wherehD+fistheheightatthetopofthedome.
respectively.
Valuesapplyto0hDD0.5,0.2f/D0.5.
=0degreesondomespringline,=90degreesatdomecentertoppoint.fismeasuredfrom
springlinetotop.
54
Chapter2
Figure2.4.17
h >18.3m
Walls &Roofs
Notes:
1. VerticalscaledenotesGCptobeusedwithappropriateqzorqh.
2. HorizontalscaledenoteseffectivewindareaA,insquarefeet(squaremeters).
3. Plusandminussignssignifypressuresactingtowardandawayfromthesurfaces,respectively.
4. UseqzwithpositivevaluesofGCpandqhwithnegativevaluesofGCp
5. Eachcomponentshallbedesignedformaximumpositiveandnegativepressures.
6.
Coefficientsareforroofswithangle10.Forotherroofanglesandgeometry,useGCpvaluesfrom
Fig.2.4.11andattendantqhbasedonexposuredefinedin2.4.8.
7.
Ifaparapetequaltoorhigherthan0.9misprovidedaroundtheperimeteroftheroofwith10,
Zone3shallbetreatedasZone2.
Notation:
a:10percentofleasthorizontaldimension,butnotlessthan0.9m.
h:Meanroofheight,inmeters,exceptthateaveheightshallbeusedfor10o.
z:heightaboveground,in(meters.
8.
55
Part6
MainWindForceResistingSystem
0.25< h/L<1.0
Figure2.4.18A
OpenBuildings
MonoslopeFreeRoofs
q<45,=0,180
NetPressureCoefficient,CN
Roof
Angle
Load
Case
CNW
CNL
CNW
CNL
CNW
CNL
CNW
CNL
A
B
A
1.2
1.1
0.6
0.3
0.1
1
0.5
1.1
1
1.2
0.6
1.5
1.2
1.1
0.9
0.3
0.1
1.5
0.5
1.1
0.2
1.2
0.6
1.2
B
A
B
A
1.4
0.3
1.9
1.5
0
1.3
0
1.6
1.7
1.1
2.1
1.5
0.8
1.5
0.6
1.7
1.6
1.3
1.8
1.7
0.3
1.6
0.6
1.8
0.8
0.4
1.2
0.5
0.3
1.1
0.3
1
B
A
B
A
2.4
1.8
2.5
1.8
0.3
1.8
0.6
1.8
2.3
1.5
2.3
1.5
0.9
1.8
1.1
1.8
2.2
2.1
2.6
2.1
0.7
2.1
1
2.2
1.3
0.6
1.6
0.7
0
1
0.1
0.9
B
A
B
2.4
1.6
2.3
0.6
1.8
0.7
2.2
1.3
1.9
1.1
1.8
1.2
2.7
2.2
2.6
1.1
2.5
1.4
1.9
0.8
2.1
0.3
0.9
0.4
7.5
15
22.5
30
37.5
45
WindDirection,=0
WindDirection,=180
ClearWindFlow
ClearWindFlow
ObstructedWindFlow
ObstructedWindFlow
Notes:
CNWandCNLdenotenetpressures(contributionsfromtopandbottomsurfaces)forwindwardand
leewardhalfofroofsurfaces,respectively.
Clearwindflowdenotesrelativelyunobstructedwindflowwithblockagelessthanorequalto50%.
Obstructedwindflowdenotesobjectsbelowroofinhibitingwindflow(>50%blockage).
Forvaluesofebetween7.5and45,linearinterpolationispermitted.Forvaluesofelessthan7.5,use
Monosloperoofloadcoefficients.
Plusandminussignssignifypressuresactingtowardsandawayfromthetoproofsurface,respectively.
Allloadcasesshownforeachroofangleshallbeinvestigated.
Notation:
L
:horizontaldimensionofroof,measuredinthealongwinddirection,m
h
:meanroofheight,m
:directionofwind,degrees
:angleofplaneofrooffromhorizontal,degrees
56
Chapter2
Figure2.4.18B
NetPressureCoefficients,CN
0.25h/L1.0
PitchedFreeRoofs
45o,=0o,180o
OpenBuildings
Roof
Angle,
7.5o
15o
22.5o
30o
37.5o
45o
Load
Case
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
WindDirection,
ClearWindFlow
CNW
1.1
0.2
1.1
0.1
1.1
0.1
1.3
0.1
1.3
0.2
1.1
0.3
=0o,180o
CNL
0.3
1.2
0.4
1.1
0.1
0.8
0.3
0.9
0.6
0.6
0.9
0.5
ObstructedWindFlow
CNW
CNL
1.6
1
0.9
1.7
1.2
1
0.6
1.6
1.2
1.2
0.8
1.7
0.7
0.7
0.2
1.1
0.6
0.6
0.3
0.9
0.5
0.5
0.3
0.7
Notes:
CNWandCNLdenotenetpressures(contributionsfromtopandbottomsurfaces)forwindwardandleeward
halfofroofsurfaces,respectively.
Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%.
Forvaluesof between7.5 and 45,linear interpolationispermitted.Forvaluesof lessthan 7.5,use
monosloperoofloadcoefficients.
Notation:
L
h
:meanroofheight,m
57
Part6
Figure2.4.18C
0.25h/L1.0
TroughedFreeRoofs
45o,=0o,180o
OpenBuildings
Roof
Angle,
Load
Case
7.5o
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
15o
22.5o
30o
37.5o
45o
WindDirection,=0o,180o
ClearWindFlow
CNW
CNL
1.1
0.3
0.2
1.2
1.1
0.4
0.1
1.1
1.1
0.1
0.1
0.8
1.3
0.3
0.1
0.9
1.3
0.6
0.2
0.6
1.1
0.9
0.3
0.5
ObstructedWindFlow
CNW
CNL
1.6
0.5
0.9
0.8
1.2
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.2
0.6
0.8
0.8
1.4
0.4
0.2
0.5
1.4
0.3
0.3
0.4
1.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
Notes:
CNWandCNLdenotenetpressures(contributionsfromtopandbottomsurfaces)forwindwardandleeward
halfofroofsurfaces,respectively.
For values of between 7.5 and 45, linear interpolation is permitted. For values of less than 7.5, use
monosloperoofloadcoefficients.
Notation:
L
h
:meanroofheight,m
58
Chapter2
Figure2.4.18D
0.25h/L1.0
TroughedFreeRoofs
45o,=0o,180o
OpenBuildings
Horizontal
Distancefrom
WindwardEdge
h
>h,2h
>2h
Roof
Angle
LoadCase
ClearWindFlow
AllShapes
45o
AllShapes
45o
AllShapes
45o
A
B
A
B
A
B
CN
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.5
0.3
0.3
Obstructed Wind
Flow
CN
1.2
0.5
0.9
0.5
0.6
0.3
Notes:
CNdenotesnetpressures(contributionsfromtopandbottomsurfaces).
Formonosloperoofswiththetalessthan5degrees,CNvaluesshownapplyalsoforcaseswheregamma=0
degreesand0.05lessthanorequaltoh/Llessthanorequalto0.25.SeeFigure2.4.18Aforotherh/Lvalues.
Notation:
L
h
:meanroofheight,m
y
59
Part6
Figure2.4.19A
NetPressureCoefficient,CN
OpenBuildings
0.25< h/L< 1.0

MonoslopeFreeRoofs
<45
Roof
Angle
Effective
WindArea
<a2
>a2,<4.0a2
>4.0a2
<a2
>a2,<4.0a2
>4.0a2
<a2
>a2,<4.0a2
>4.0a2
<a2
>a2,<4.0a2
>4.0a2
<a2
>a2,<4.0a2
>4.0a2
7.5
15
30
45
CN
ClearWindFlow
Zone3
Zone2
Zone1
ObstructedWindFlow
Zone3
Zone2
2.4
3.3
1.8
1.7
1.2
1.1
3.6
0.8
1.8
0.5
1.2
1.8
1.2
3.2
1.7
1.1
4.2
1.8
1.2
2.4
1.7
1.1
2.1
1.2
1.2
1.6
1.1
1.1
1.4
0.8
0.5
1.6
1.8
1.2
5.1
0.8
0.5
0.5
1.8
1.2
2.6
0.5
0.5
0.8
1.2
1.2
1.7
2.4
1.6
3.6
2.1
1.4
3.8
2.4
1.6
2.7
2.1
1.4
2.9
1.6
1.6
1.8
1.4
1.4
1.9
1.2
0.8
2.4
2.6
1.7
4.2
1.2
0.8
1.8
2.6
1.7
3.2
0.8
0.8
1.2
1.7
1.7
2.1
2.7
1.8
5.2
2.9
1.9
5
2.7
1.8
3.9
2.9
1.9
3.8
1.8
1.8
2.6
1.9
1.9
2.5
1.8
1.2
3.2
3.2
2.1
4.6
1.8
1.2
2.4
3.2
2.1
3.5
1.2
1.2
1.6
2.1
2.3
2.3
3.9
2.6
5.2
3.8
2.5
4.6
3.9
2.6
3.9
3.8
2.5
3.5
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.5
2.5
2.3
2.4
1.6
4.2
3.5
2.3
3.8
2.4
1.6
3.2
3.5
2.3
2.9
1.6
1.6
2.1
2.3
2.3
1.9
3.9
2.6
3.5
2.3
3.9
2.6
3.5
2.3
2.6
2.6
2.3
2.3
3.2
2.1
2.9
1.9
3.2
2.1
2.9
1.9
2.1
2.1
1.9
1.9
Zone1
Notes:
1.CNdenotesnetpressures(contributionsfromtopandbottomsurfaces).
2.Clearwindflowdenotesrelativelyunobstructedwindflowwithblockagelessthanorequalto50%.
windflowdenotesobjectsbelowroofinhibitingwindflow(>50%blockage).
3.Forvaluesofeotherthanthoseshown,linearinterpolationispermitted.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface,
respectively.
5. Components and cladding elements shall be designed for positive and negative pressure
coefficientsshown.
6.Notation:
a : 10% of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller but not less than 4% of least
horizontaldimensionor0.9m
h:meanroofheight,m
L:horizontaldimensionofbuilding,measuredinalongwinddirection,m
60
Chapter2
Figure2.4.19B
OpenBuildings
Roof Effective CN
Angle WindArea ClearWindFlow
Zone3
Zone2
0o
a2
2.4 3.3 1.8 1.7
7.5o
>a2,4.0a2 1.8
>4.0a2
1.2
a2
2.2
1.7
1.1
3.6
1.8
1.2
1.7
1.7
1.1
1.8
15o
>a2,4.0a2 1.7
>4.0a2
1.1
a2
2.2
1.8
1.2
2.2
1.7
1.1
1.7
1.8
1.2
1.7
30o
>a2,4.0a2 1.7
>4.0a2
1.1
a2
2.6
1.7
1.1
1.8
1.7
1.1
2
1.7
1.1
1.4
45o
>a2,4.0a2 2
>4.0a2
1.3
a2
2.2
1.4
0.9
1.6
2
1.3
1.7
1.4
0.9
1.2
>a2,4.0a2 1.7
>4.0a2
1.1
1.2
0.8
1.7
1.1
1.2
0.8
Zone1
1.2 1.1
1.2 1.1
1.2 1.1
1.1 1.2
1.1 1.2
1.1 1.2
1.1 1.1
1.1 1.1
1.1 1.1
1.3 0.9
1.3
0.9
1.3 0.9
1.1 0.8
1.1 0.8
1.1 0.8
0.25h/L1.0
MonoslopeFreeRoofs
45o
ObstructedWindFlow
Zone3
Zone2
1
3.6 0.8 1.8
08 1.8 0.8 1.8
0.5 1.2 0.5 1.2
1
5.1 0.8 26
0.8 2.6 0.8 26
0.5 1.7 0.5 1.7
1
3.2 0.8 2.4
0.8 2.4 0.8 2.4
0.5 1.6 0.5 1.6
1
2.4 0.8 1.8
0.8 1.8 0.8 1.8
0.5 1.2 0.5 .1.2
1
2.4 0.8 1.8
0.8 1.8 0.8 1.8
0.5 1.2 0.5 1.2
Zone1
0.5 1.2
0.5 1.2
0.5 1.2
0.5 1.7
0.5 1.7
as
1.7
0.5 1.6
0.5 1.6
0.5 1.6
0.5 1.2
0.5 1.2
0.5 1.2
0.5 1.2
0.5 1.2
0.5 1.2
Notes:
2.Clearwindflowdenotesrelativelyunobstructedwindflowwithblockagelessthanorequalto50%.
3.Forvaluesofotherthanthoseshown,linearinterpolationispermitted.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface,
respectively.
5.Componentsandcladdingelementsshallbedesignedforpositiveandnegativepressurecoefficients
shown.
6.Notation:
a:10%ofleasthorizontaldimensionor0.411,whicheverissmallerbutnotlessthan4%ofleast
h:meanroofheight,m
61
Part6
Figure2.4.19C
0.25h/L1.0
TroughedFreeRoofs
45o
OpenBuildings
Roof Effective
CN
Angle WindArea ClearWindFlow
ObstructedWindFlow
Zone3
Zone2
Zone1
Zone3
Zone2
Zone1
0o
a2
2.4 3.3 1.8 1.7 1.2 1.1 1
3.6 0.8 1.8 0.5 1.2
>a2,4.0a2 1.8 1.7 1.8 1.7 1.1 1.1 0.8 1.8 0.8 1.8 0.5 1.2
>4.0a2
1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 0.5 1.2 0.5 1.2 0.5 1.2
7.5o a2
2.4 3.3 1.8 1.7 1.2 1.1 1
4.8 0.8 2.4 0.5 1.6
>a2,4.0a2 1.8 1.7 1.8 1.7 1.2 1.1 0.8 2.4 0.8 2.4 0.5 1.6
>4.0a2
1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 0.5 1.6 0.5 1.6 0.5 1.6
15o
a2
2.2 2.2 1.7 1.7 1.1 1.1 1
2.4 0.8 1.8 0.5 1.2
>a2,4.0a2 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.1 1.1 0.8 1.8 0.8 1.8 0.5 1.2
>4.0a2
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 0.5 1.2 0.5 12 0.5 1.2
30o
a2
1.8 2.6 1.4 2
0.9 1.3 1
2.8 0.8 2.1 0.5 1.4
>a2,4.0a2 1.4 2
1.4 2
0.9 1.3 0.8 2.1 0.8 2.1 0.5 1.4
>4.0a2
0.9 1.3 1.9 1.3 0.9 1.3 0.5 1.4 0.5 1.4 0.5 1.4
45o
a2
1.6 2.2 1.2 1.7 0.8 1.1 1
2.4 0.8 1.8 0.5 1.2
2
2
>a ,4.0a 1.2 1.7 1.2 1.7 0.8 1.1 0.8 1.8 0.8 1.8 0.5 1.2
>4.0a2
0.8 1.1 1.8 1.1 0.8 1.1 0.5 1.2 0.5 1.2 0.5 1.2
Notes:
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%.
3.Forvaluesofotherthanthoseshown,linearinterpolationispermitted.
4.Plusandminussignssignifypressuresactingtowardsandawayfromthetoproofsurface,respectively.
5. Components and cladding elements shall be designed for positive and negative pressure coefficients
shown.
6.Notation:
a:10%ofleasthorizontaldimensionor0.411,whicheverissmallerbutnotlessthan4%ofleast
h:meanroofheight,m
62
Chapter2
OtherStructuresMethod2
Figure2.4.20
ForceCoefficient, Cf
Clearance
Ratio, s/h
1
0.9
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.16
Region
(horizontal
distance from
windward edge)
0 to s
s to 2s
2s to 3s
3s to 10s
*Values shall be
multiplied by the
following
reduction
factor when a
return
corner is present:
AllHeight
SolidFreestandingWalls&SolidSigns
Cf , CASE A & CASE B
0.05
1.80
1.85
1.90
1.95
1.95
1.95
1.95
2
2.25
1.50
Lr/s
0.3
1.0
2
0.1
1.70
1.75
1.85
1.85
1.90
1.90
1.90
3
2.60
1.70
1.15
0.2
1.65
1.70
1.75
1.80
1.85
1.85
1.85
4
2.90
1.90
1.30
1.10
5
3.10*
2.00
1.45
1.05
Aspect Ratio, B/s

1
2
4
1.45
1.40
1.35
1.55
1.50
1.45
1.65
1.60
1.60
1.75
1.70
1.70
1.80
1.80
1.80
1.80
1.80
1.80
1.80
1.80
1.85
Cf, CASE C
Aspect Ratio, B/s
0.5
1.55
1.60
1.70
1.75
1.80
1.80
1.85
6
3.30*
2.15
1.55
1.05
7
3.40*
2.25
1.65
1.05
8
3.55*
2.30
1.70
1.05
Reduction
Factor
0.9
0.75
0.60
9
3.65*
2.35
1.75
1.00
5
1.35
1.45
1.55
1.70
1.80
1.80
1.85
10
3.75*
2.45
1.85
0.95
10
1.30
1.40
1.55
1.70
1.80
1.85
1.85
20
1.30
1.40
1.55
1.70
1.85
1.90
1.90
30
1.30
1.40
1.55
1.70
1.85
1.90
1.90
Region
(horizontal
distance from
windward edge)
0 to s
s to 2s
2s to 3s
3s to 4s
4s to 5s
5s to 10s
>10s
45
1.30
1.40
1.55
1.75
1.85
1.95
1.95
Aspect Ratio, B/s

13
4.00*
2.60
2.00
1.50
1.35
0.90
0.55
45
4.30*
2.55
1.95
1.85
1.85
1.10
0.55
Notes:
1.Theterm"signs"innotesbelowalsoappliesto"freestandingwalls".
2.Signswithopeningscomprisinglessthan30%ofthegrossareaareclassifiedassolidsigns.Forcecoefficientsforsolid
signswithopeningsshallbepermittedtobemultipliedbythereductionfactor(1(1)1.5).
3.Toallowforbothnormalandobliquewinddirections,thefollowingcasesshallbeconsidered:
Fors/h<1:
CASEA:resultantforceactsnormaltothefaceofthesignthroughthegeometriccenter.
CASE B: resultant force acts normal to the face of the sign at a distance from the geometric center toward the
windwardedgeequalto0.2timestheaveragewidthofthesign.
ForB/s2,CASECmustalsobeconsidered:
CASEC:resultantforcesactnormaltothefaceofthesignthroughthegeometriccentersofeachregion.
Fors/h=1:
The same cases as above except that the vertical locations of the resultant forces occur at a distance above the
geometriccenterequalto0.05timestheaverageheightofthesign.
4.ForCASECwheres/h>0.8,forcecoefficientsshallbemultipliedbythereductionfactor(1.8s/h).
5.Linearinterpolationispermittedforvaluesofs/h,B/sandLr/sotherthanshown.
6.Notation:
B:horizontaldimensionofsign,inmeters;
h:heightofthesign,inmeters;
s:verticaldimensionofthesign,inmeters;
:ratioofsolidareatogrossarea;
Lr:horizontaldimensionofreturncorner,inmeters
63
Part6
Figure2.4.21
AllHeight
ForceCoefficient,Cf
Chimneys,Tanks,Rooftop
Equipment,&SimilarStructures
CrossSection
TypeofSurface
h/D
Square(windnormaltoface)
All
1
1.3
7
1.4
25
2.0
Square(windalongdiagomal)
All
1.0
1.1
1.5
Hexagonaloroctagonal
All
1.0
1.2
1.4
Round
in Nm
Moderately
smooth
0.5
0.6
0.7
Rough
(D/D=0.02)
Veryrough
(D/D=0.08)
All
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.8
1.0
0.2
0.7
0.8
1.2
Round
in Nm
5.3, inm,
5.3, inm,
Notes:
Thedesignwindforceshallbecalculatedbasedontheareaofthestructureprojectedonaplanenormal
tothewinddirection.Theforceshallbeassumedtoactparalleltothewinddirection.
Linearinterpolationispermittedforh/Dvaluesotherthanshown.
Notation:
D: diameterofcircularcrosssectionandleasthorizontaldimensionofsquare,hexagonaloroctagonal
crosssectionatelevationunderconsideration,inmeters;
D: depthofprotrudingelementsuchasribsandspoilers,inmeters;
H: heightofstructure,metersand
qz: velocitypressureevaluatedatheightzaboveground,inN/m 2
64
Chapter2
Figure2.4.22
ForceCoefficient,Cf
AllHeight
OpenSigns&Lattice
Frameworks
FlatSided
Members
RoundedMembers
5.3,
5.3,
<0.1
2.0
1.2
0.8
0.1to0.29
1.8
1.3
0.9
0.3to0.7
1.6
1.5
1.1
Notes:
Signswithopeningscomprising30%ormoreofthegrossareaareclassifiedasopensigns.
Thecalculationofthedesignwindforcesshallbebasedontheareaofallexposedmembersandelements
projectedonaplanenormaltothewinddirection.Forcesshallbeassumedtoactparalleltothewind.
TheareaAfconsistentwiththeseforcecoefficientsisthesolidareaprojectednormalthewinddirection.
Notation:
:ratioofsolidareatogrossarea;
D:diameterofatypicalroundnumber,inmeters
qz:velocitypressureevaluatedatheightzabovegroundinN/m2.
Figure2.4.23
OpenStructures
AllHeight
ForceCoefficient,Cf
TrussedTower
TowerCrossSection
Cf
Square
4.025.9+4.0
Triangle
3.424.7+3.4
Notes:
1. Forallwinddirectionsconsidered,theareaAfconsistentwiththespecifiedforcecoefficientsshallbe
the solid area of a tower face projected on the plane of that face for the tower segment under
consideration.
2. Thespecifiedforcecoefficientsarefortowerswithstructuralanglesorsimilarflatsidedmembers.
3. Fortowerscontainingroundedmembers,itisacceptabletomultiplythespecifiedforcecoefficients
bythefollowingfactorwhendeterminingwindforcesonsuchmembers:0.512+0.571.0
4. Windforcesshallbeapplied inthedirectionsresultingin maximummemberforcesandreactions.
Fortowerswithsquarecrosssections,windforcesshallbemultipliedbythefollowingfactorwhen
thewindisdirectedalongatowerdiagonal:
1+0.751.2
5. Wind forces on tower appurtenances such as ladders, conduits, lights, elevators, etc., shall be
calculatedusingappropriateforcecoefficientsfortheseelements.
6. LoadsduetoiceaccretionasdescribedinSection11shallbeaccountedfor.
7. Notation:
:ratioofsolidareatogrossareaofonetowerfaceforthesegmentunderconsideration.
65
Part6
Table2.4.1:BasicWindSpeedsforSelectedLocationsinBangladesh
Location
BasicWind
Speed(m/s)
Location
BasicWind
Speed(m/s)
Angarpota
Bagerhat
Bandarban
Barguna
Barisal
Bhola
Bogra
Brahmanbaria
Chandpur
ChapaiNawabganj
Chittagong
Chuadanga
Comilla
CoxsBazar
Dahagram
Dhaka
Dinajpur
Faridpur
Feni
Gaibandha
Gazipur
Gopalganj
Habiganj
Hatiya
Ishurdi
Joypurhat
Jamalpur
Jessore
Jhalakati
Jhenaidah
Khagrachhari
Khulna
Kutubdia
Kishoreganj
Kurigram
Kushtia
Lakshmipur
47.8
77.5
62.5
80.0
78.7
69.5
61.9
56.7
50.6
41.4
80.0
61.9
61.4
80.0
47.8
65.7
41.4
63.1
64.1
65.6
66.5
74.5
54.2
80.0
69.5
56.7
56.7
64.1
80.0
65.0
56.7
73.3
80.0
64.7
65.6
66.9
51.2
Lalmonirhat
Madaripur
Magura
Manikganj
Meherpur
Maheshkhali
Moulvibazar
Munshiganj
Mymensingh
Naogaon
Narail
Narayanganj
Narsinghdi
Natore
Netrokona
Nilphamari
Noakhali
Pabna
Panchagarh
Patuakhali
Pirojpur
Rajbari
Rajshahi
Rangamati
Rangpur
Satkhira
Shariatpur
Sherpur
Sirajganj
Srimangal
St.MartinsIsland
Sunamganj
Sylhet
Sandwip
Tangail
Teknaf
Thakurgaon
63.7
68.1
65.0
58.2
58.2
80.0
53.0
57.1
67.4
55.2
68.6
61.1
59.7
61.9
65.6
44.7
57.1
63.1
41.4
80.0
80.0
59.1
49.2
56.7
65.3
57.6
61.9
62.5
50.6
50.6
80.0
61.1
61.1
80.0
50.6
80.0
41.4
66
Chapter2
ImportanceFactor,I(WindLoads)
Table2.4.2
Categoryor
ImportanceClass
NonHurricaneProne
Regionsand
HurricaneProneRegions
with
V=3844m/s
HurricaneProneRegions
withV>44m/s
0.87
0.77
II
1.0
1.00
III
1.15
1.15
IV
1.15
1.15
Note:
1. The building and structure classification categories are listed in Table 1.2.1
TerrainExposureConstants
Table2.4.3
Exposure
Zg(m)
7.0
365.76
1/7
0.84
1/4.0
9.5
274.32
1/9.5
1.00
11.5
213.36
1/11.5
1.07
*zmin =
(m)
0.45
0.30
97.54
1/3.0
9.14
1/6.5
0.65
0.20
152.4
1/5.0
4.57
1/9.0
0.80
0.15
198.12
1/8.0
2.13
minimum height used to ensure that the equivalent height z is

greater of 0.6h or zmin.
For buildings with h zmin,
shall be taken as zmin.
67
Zmin(m)*
Part6
VelocityPressureExposureCoefficients,KhandKz
Table2.4.4
Heightabovegroundlevel,z
Exposure(Note1)
A
(m)
Case1
Case2
Case1&2
Case1&2
04.6
6.1
7.6
9.1
12.2
15.2
18
21.3
24.4
27.41
30.5
36.6
42.7
48.8
54.9
61.0
76.2
91.4
106.7
121.9
137.2
152.4
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.76
0.81
0.85
0.89
0.93
0.96
0.99
1.04
1.09
1.13
1.17
1.20
1.28
1.35
1.41
1.47
1.52
1.56
0.57
0.62
0.66
0.70
0.76
0.81
0.85
0.89
0.93
0.96
0.99
1.04
1.09
1.13
1.17
1.20
1.28
1.35
1.41
1.47
1.52
1.56
0.85
0.90
0.94
0.98
1.04
1.09
1.13
1.17
1.21
1.24
1.26
1.31
1.36
1.39
1.43
1.46
1.53
1.59
1.64
1.69
1.73
1.77
1.03
1.08
1.12
1.16
1.22
1.27
1.31
1.34
1.38
1.40
1.43
1.48
1.52
1.55
1.58
1.61
1.68
1.73
1.78
1.82
1.86
1.89
Notes:
1.Case1:a.Allcomponentsandcladding.
b.MainwindforceresistingsysteminlowrisebuildingsdesignedusingFigure2.4.10.
Case 2: a. All main wind force resisting systems in buildings except those in lowrise
buildingsdesignedusingFigure2.4.10.
b.Allmainwindforceresistingsystemsinotherstructures.
2.
ThevelocitypressureexposurecoefficientKzmaybedeterminedfromthefollowingformula:
K =2.01(z/z )2/
For4.57mzz :
g
3.
4.
5.
Kz=2.01(4.57/zg)2/a
Forz<4.57m:
Note:zshallnotbetakenlessthan9.1mforCase1inexposureA.
andzgaretabulatedinTable2.4.3.
Linearinterpolationforintermediatevalues.ofheightzisacceptable.
Exposurecategoriesaredefinedin2.4.8.3.
68
Chapter2
WindDirectionalityFactor,Kd
Table2.4.5
StructureType
Buildings
ArchedRoofs
Chimneys,Tanks,andSimilarStructures
Square
Hexagonal
Round
SolidSigns
OpenSignsandLatticeFramework
TrussedTowers
Triangular,square,rectangular
Allothercrosssections
DirectionalityFactorKd*
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.90
0.95
0.95
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.95
*DirectionalityFactorKdhasbeencalibratedwithcombinationsofloadsspecifiedinSection2.7.This
factorshallonlybeappliedwhenusedinconjunctionwithloadcombinationsspecifiedin2.7.4and
2.7.5.
69
Part6
2.5
EARTHQUAKELOADS
2.5.1
GENERAL
Minimumdesignearthquakeforcesforbuildings,structuresorcomponentsthereofshallbedeterminedin
accordance with the provisions of section 2.5. Some definitions and symbols relevant for earthquake
resistant design for buildings are provided in Sections 2.5.2 and 2.5.3. Section 2.5.4 presents basic
earthquake resistant design concepts. Section 2.5.5 describes procedures for soil investigations, while
Section 2.5.6 describes procedures for determining earthquake ground motion for design. Section 2.5.7
describesdifferenttypesofbuildingsandstructuralsystemswhichpossessdifferentearthquakeresistant
characteristics. Static analysis procedures for design are described in Sections 2.5.8, 2.5.9 and 2.5.14.
Dynamic analysis procedures are dealt with in Sections 2.5.10 to 2.5.13. Section 2.5.15 presents
combinationofearthquakeloadingeffectsindifferentdirectionsandwithotherloadingeffects.Section
2.5.16dealswithallowabledriftanddeformationlimits.Section2.5.17addressesdesignofnonstructural
componentsinbuildings.Section2.5.18presentsdesignconsiderationsforbuildingswithseismicisolation
systems.DesignforsoftstoreyconditioninbuildingsisaddressedinSection2.5.19.
2.5.2
DEFINITIONS
ThefollowingdefinitionsoftermsshallbeapplicableonlytotheprovisionsofSection2.5:
BASE:Thelevelatwhichtheearthquakemotionsareconsideredtobeimpartedtothestructuresorthe
levelatwhichthestructureasadynamicvibratorissupported.
BASESHEAR:Totaldesignlateralforceorshearduetoearthquakeatthebaseofastructure.
BEARINGWALLSYSTEM:Astructuralsystemwithoutacompleteverticalloadcarryingspaceframe.
BRACEDFRAME:Anessentiallyverticaltrusssystemoftheconcentricoreccentrictypeprovidedtoresist
lateralforces.
BUILDINGFRAMESYSTEM:Anessentiallycompletespaceframewhichprovidessupportforgravityloads.
CAPACITYCURVE:Aplotofthetotalappliedlateralforce,Vj,versusthelateraldisplacementofthecontrol
point,j,asdeterminedinanonlinearstaticanalysis.
CONTROL POINT: A point used to index the lateral displacement of the structure in a nonlinear static
analysis.
CRITICALDAMPING:Amountofdampingbeyondwhichthefreevibrationwillnotbeoscillatory.
DAMPING: The effect of inherent energy dissipation mechanisms in a structure (due to sliding, friction,
etc.)thatresultsinreductionofeffectofvibration,expressedasapercentageofthecriticaldampingfor
thestructure.
DESIGNACCELERATIONRESPONSESPECTRUM:Smoothenedidealizedplotofmaximumaccelerationofa
singledegreeoffreedomstructureasafunctionofstructureperiodfordesignearthquakegroundmotion.
DESIGNEARTHQUAKE:Theearthquakegroundmotionconsidered(fornormaldesign)astwothirdsofthe
correspondingMaximumConsideredEarthquake(MCE).
70
Chapter2
DIAPHRAGM:Ahorizontalornearlyhorizontalsystemofstructuresactingtotransmitlateralforcestothe
vertical resisting elements. The term "diaphragm" includes reinforced concrete floor slabs as well as
horizontalbracingsystems.
DUALSYSTEM:AcombinationofaSpecialorIntermediateMomentResistingFrameandShearWallsor
BracedFramesdesignedinaccordancewiththecriteriaofSec1.3.2.
DUCTILITY: Capacity of a structure, or its members to undergo large inelastic deformations without
significantlossofstrengthorstiffness.
ECCENTRICBRACEDFRAME(EBF):AsteelbracedframedesignedinconformancewithSec10.20.15.
EPICENTRE:Thepointonthesurfaceofearthverticallyabovethefocus(pointoforigin)oftheearthquake.
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES : Buildings and structures which are necessary to remain functional during an
emergencyorapostdisasterperiod.
FLEXIBLE DIAPHRAGM : A floor or roof diaphragm shall be considered flexible, for purposes of this
provision,whenthemaximumlateraldeformationofthediaphragmismorethantwotimestheaverage
storey drift of the associated storey. This may be determined by comparing the computed midpoint in
plane deflection of the diaphragm under lateral load with the storey drift of adjoining vertical resisting
elementsunderequivalenttributarylateralload.
FLEXIBLE ELEMENT OR SYSTEM : An element or system whose deformation under lateral load is
significantlylargerthanadjoiningpartsofthesystem.
HORIZONTALBRACINGSYSTEM:Ahorizontaltrusssystemthatservesthesamefunctionasafloororroof
diaphragm.
IMPORTANCE FACTOR: It is a factor used to increase the design seismic forces for structures of
importance.
INTENSITYOFEARTHQUAKE:Itisameasureoftheamountofgroundshakingataparticularsiteduetoan
earthquake
INTERMEDIATE MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (IMRF): A concrete or steel frame designed in accordance
withSec8.3or10.20.10respectively.
LIQUEFACTION: State in saturated cohesionless soil wherein the effective shear strength is reduced to
negligible value due to pore water pressure generated by earthquake vibrations, when the pore water
pressureapproachesthetotalconfiningpressure.Inthiscondition,thesoiltendstobehavelikealiquid.
MAGNITUDEOFEARTHQUAKE:Themagnitudeofearthquakeisanumber,whichisameasureofenergy
releasedinanearthquake.
MAXIMUMCONSIDEREDEARTHQUAKE(MCE):Themostsevereearthquakegroundmotionconsideredby
thiscode.
MODALMASS:partofthetotalseismicmassofthestructurethatiseffectiveinmodekofvibration.
MODAL PARTICIPATION FACTOR: Amount by which mode k contributes to the overall vibration of the
structureunderhorizontalandverticalearthquakegroundmotions.
71
Part6
MODAL SHAPE COEFFICIENT: When a system is vibrating in a normal mode, at any particular instant of
time, the vibration amplitude of mass i expressed as a ratio of the vibration amplitude of one of the
massesofthesystem,isknownasmodalshapecoefficient
MOMENTRESISTINGFRAME:Aframeinwhichmembersandjointsarecapableofresistinglateralforces
primarilybyflexure.Momentresistingframesareclassifiedasordinarymomentresistingframes(OMRF),
intermediatemomentresistingframes(IMRF)andspecialmomentresistingframes(SMRF).
NUMBEROFSTOREYS(n):Numberofstoreysofabuildingisthenumberoflevelsabovethebase.This
excludes the basement storeys, where basement walls are connected with ground floor deck or fitted
betweenthebuildingcolumns.But,itincludesthebasementstoreys,whentheyarenotsoconnected.
ORDINARYMOMENTRESISTINGFRAME(OMRF):Amomentresistingframenotmeetingspecialdetailing
requirementsforductilebehaviour.
PDELTAEFFECT:Itisthesecondaryeffectonshearsandmomentsofframemembersduetoactionofthe
verticalloadsduetothelateraldisplacementofbuildingresultingfromseismicforces.
PERIOD OF BUILDING: Fundamental period (for 1st mode) of vibration of building for lateral motion in
directionconsidered.
RESPONSEREDUCTIONFACTOR:Itisthefactorbywhichtheactualbaseshearforcethatwoulddevelopif
the structure behaved truly elastic during earthquake, is reduced to obtain design base shear. This
reduction is allowed to account for the beneficial effects of inelastic deformation (resulting in energy
dissipation)thatcanoccurinastructureduringamajorearthquake,stillensuringacceptableresponseof
thestructure.
SEISMICDESIGNCATEGORY:Aclassificationassignedtoastructurebasedonitsimportancefactorandthe
severityofthedesignearthquakegroundmotionatthesite.
SEISMICFORCERESISTING SYSTEM: That part of the structural system that has been considered in the
designtoprovidetherequiredresistancetotheseismicforces.
SHEAR WALL : A wall designed to resist lateral forces acting in its plane (sometimes referred to as a
verticaldiaphragmorastructuralwall).
SOFTSTOREY:Storeyinwhichthelateralstiffnessislessthan70percentofthestiffnessofthestorey
aboveorlessthan80percentoftheaveragelateralstiffnessofthethreestoreysabove.
SITECLASS:Siteisclassifiedbasedonsoilpropertiesofupper30meters.
SPACE FRAME : A threedimensional structural system without bearing walls composed of members
interconnectedsoastofunctionasacompleteselfcontainedunitwithorwithouttheaidofhorizontal
diaphragmsorfloorbracingsystems.
SPECIAL MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (SMRF) : A moment resisting frame specially detailed to provide
ductilebehaviourcomplyingwiththeseismicrequirementsprovidedinChapters8and10forconcrete
andsteelframesrespectively.
STOREY:Thespacebetweenconsecutivefloorlevels.Storeyxisthestoreybelowlevelx.
STOREYSHEAR:Thetotalhorizontalshearforceataparticularstorey(level).
STOREYDRIFT:Thehorizontaldeflectionatthetopofthestoryrelativetobottomofthestorey.
72
Chapter2
STRENGTH : The usable capacity of an element or a member to resist the load as prescribed in these
provisions.
TARGET DISPLACEMENT: An estimate of the maximum expected displacement of the control point
calculatedforthedesignearthquakegroundmotioninnonlinearstaticanalysis.
VERTICALLOADCARRYINGFRAME:Aspaceframedesignedtocarryallverticalgravityloads.
WEAKSTOREY:Storeyinwhichthelateralstrengthislessthan80percentofthatofthestoreyabove.
2.5.3
SYMBOLSANDNOTATION
Thefollowingsymbolsandnotationshallapplytotheprovisionsofthissection:
Ax =
torsionamplificationfactoratlevelx.
Cd =
Deflectionamplificationfactor.
Cs =
Normalizedaccelerationresponsespectrum.
Ct =
numericalcoefficienttodeterminebuildingperiod
eai =
Accidentaleccentricityoffloormassatleveli
Fi,Fn,Fx=
designlateralforceappliedtoleveli,n,orxrespectively.
lateralforcesonanelementorcomponentoronequipmentsupports.
accelerationduetogravity.
hi,hn,hx=
Heightinmetresabovethebasetoleveli,norxrespectively
hsx =
StoreyHeightofstoreyx(belowlevelx)
Importancefactor
Leveli =
floorlevelofthestructurereferredtobythesubscripti,e.g.,i=1designates
thefirstlevelabovethebase.
Leveln =
Uppermostlevelinthemainportionofthestructure.
Mx =
Overturningmomentatlevelx
Ni =
StandardPenetrationNumberofsoillayeri
Px =
Totalverticaldesignloadatlevelx
Responsereductionfactorforstructuralsystems
Soilfactor.
Sa =
DesignSpectralAcceleration(inunitsofg)
Sui =
Undrainedshearstrengthofcohesivelayeri
Fundamentalperiodofvibrationofstructure,inseconds,ofthestructureinthe
directionunderconsideration.
Te =
Effective fundamental period of the structure in the direction under

consideration,asdeterminedfornonlinearstaticanalysis
73
Part6
Totaldesignbaseshearcalculatedbyequivalentstaticanalysis
V1 =
Total applied lateral force at the first increment of lateral load in nonlinear
staticanalysis.
Vy =
Effectiveyieldstrengthdeterminedfromabilinearcurvefittedtothecapacity
curve
Vrs =
Totaldesignbaseshearcalculatedbyresponsespectrumanalysis
Vth =
Totaldesignbaseshearcalculatedbytimehistoryanalysis
Vsi =
Shearwavevelocityofsoillayeri
Vx =
Designstoreyshearinstoreyx
W =
Totalseismicweightofbuilding
wi,wx = PortionofWwhichisassignedtoleveliandxrespectively
Z
Seismiczonecoefficient.
i =
Horizontal displacement at leveli relative to the base due to applied lateral
j =
Thedisplacementofthecontrolpointatloadincrementj.
T =
Thetargetdisplacementofthecontrolpoint.
1 =
Thedisplacementofthecontrolpointatthefirstincrementoflateralload.
y =
Theeffectiveyielddisplacementofthecontrolpointdeterminedfromabilinear
forces.
curvefittedtothecapacitycurve
a =
Maximumallowablestoreydrift
x =
Designstoreydriftofstoreyx
Dampingcorrectionfactor
ik =
Modalshapecoefficientatleveliformodek
StabilitycoefficienttoassessPdeltaeffects
Viscousdampingratioofthestructure
2.5.4
EARTHQUAKERESISTANTDESIGNBASICCONCEPTS
2.5.4.1
GENERALPRINCIPLES
Thepurposeofearthquakeresistantdesignprovisionsinthiscodeistoprovideguidelinesforthedesign
andconstructionofnewstructuressubjecttoearthquakegroundmotionsinordertominimizetheriskto
lifeforallstructures,toincreasetheexpectedperformanceofhigheroccupancystructuresascompared
to ordinary structures, and to improve the capability of essential structures to function after an
earthquake. Itis not economically feasible to design andconstructbuildings withoutany damage for a
majorearthquakeevent.Theintentisthereforetoallowinelasticdeformationandstructuraldamageat
74
Chapter2
preferred locations in the structure without endangering structural integrity and to prevent structural
collapseduringamajorearthquake.
Theexpectedearthquakegroundmotionatthesiteduetoallprobableearthquakesmaybeevaluatedin
deterministic or probabilistic terms. The ground motion at the site due to an earthquake is a complex
phenomenaanddependsonseveralparameterssuchasearthquakemagnitude,focaldepth,earthquake
sourcecharacteristics,distancefromearthquakeepicenter,wavepathcharacteristics,aswellaslocalsoil
conditionsatthesite.Theseismiczoningmapdividesthecountryintofourseismiczoneswithdifferent
expected levels of intensity of ground motion. Each seismic zone has a zone coefficient which provides
expected peak ground acceleration values on rock/firm soil corresponding to the maximum considered
earthquake(MCE).Thedesignbasisearthquakeistakenas2/3ofthemaximumconsideredearthquake.
Theeffectsoftheearthquakegroundmotiononthestructureisexpressedintermsofanidealizedelastic
design acceleration response spectrum, which depends on (a) seismic zone coefficient and local soil
conditionsdefininggroundmotionand(b)importancefactorandresponsereductionfactorrepresenting
building considerations. The earthquake forces acting on the structure is reduced using the response
modification/reduction factor R in order to take advantage of the inelastic energy dissipation due to
inherent ductility and redundancy in the structure as well as material overstrength. The importance
factor I increases design forces for important structures. If suitable lateral force resisting systems with
adequateductilityanddetailingandgood constructionareprovided,thebuildingcanbedesignedfora
response reduction factor R which may be as high as 5 to 8. Because of this fact, the provisions of this
Code for ductility and detailing need to be satisfied even for structures and members for which load
combinations that do not contain the earthquake effect indicate larger demands than combinations
including earthquake. The elastic deformations calculated under these reduced design forces are
multipliedbythedeflectionamplificationfactor,Cd,toestimatethedeformationslikelytoresultfromthe
designearthquake.
The seismic design guidelines presented in this section are based on the assumption that the soil
supporting the structure will not liquefy, settle or slide due to loss of strength during the earthquake.
Reinforcedandprestressedconcretemembersshallbesuitablydesignedtoensurethatprematurefailure
due to shear or bond does not occur. Ductile detailing of reinforced concrete members is of prime
importance. In steel structures, members and their connections should be so proportioned that high
ductilityisobtained,avoidingprematurefailureduetoelasticorinelasticbucklingofanytype.
The building structure shall include complete lateral and vertical forceresisting systems capable of
providing adequate strength, stiffness, and energy dissipation capacity to withstand the design ground
motions within the prescribed limits of deformation and strength demand. The design ground motions
shall be assumed to occur along any horizontal direction of a building structure. The adequacy of the
structural systems shall be demonstrated through the construction of a mathematical model and
evaluation of this model for the effects of design ground motions. The design seismic forces, and their
distributionovertheheightofthebuildingstructure,shallbeestablishedinaccordancewithoneofthe
applicableproceduresindicatedinSection2.5andthecorrespondinginternalforcesanddeformationsin
themembersofthestructureshallbedetermined.Thedeformationofthestructureshallnotexceedthe
prescribedlimitsundertheactionofthedesignseismicforces.
2.5.4.2
CHARACTERISTICSOFEARTHQUAKERESISTANTBUILDINGS
Thedesirablecharacteristicsofearthquakeresistantbuildingsaredescribedbelow:
75
Part6
StructuralSimplicity,UniformityandSymmetry:
Structuralsimplicity,uniformityandplansymmetryischaracterizedbyanevendistributionofmassand
structural elements which allows short and direct transmission of the inertia forces created in the
distributedmassesofthebuildingtoitsfoundation.Themodelling,analysis,detailingandconstructionof
simple (regular) structures are subject to much less uncertainty, hence the prediction of its seismic
behaviourismuchmorereliable.
A building configuration with symmetrical layout of structural elements of the lateral force resisting
system, and welldistributed inplan, is desirable. Uniformity along the height of the building is also
important,sinceittendstoeliminatetheoccurrenceofsensitivezoneswhereconcentrationsofstressor
largeductilitydemandsmightcauseprematurecollapse.
Somebasicguidelinesaregivenbelow:
(i)
Withrespecttothelateralstiffnessandmassdistribution,thebuildingstructureshallbe
approximatelysymmetricalinplanwithrespecttotwoorthogonalaxes.
(ii)
Boththelateralstiffnessandthemassoftheindividualstoreysshallremainconstantor
reduce gradually, without abrupt changes, from the base to the top of a particular
building.
(iii) All structural elements of the lateral load resisting systems, such as cores, structural
walls, or frames shall run without interruption from the foundations to the top of the
building.
(iv) Anirregularbuildingmaybesubdividedintodynamicallyindependentregularunitswell
separatedagainstpoundingoftheindividualunitstoachieveuniformity.
(v)
Thelengthtobreadthratio(=Lmax/Lmin)ofthebuildinginplanshallnotbehigherthan
4, where Lmax andLmin are respectivelythe larger and smaller inplan dimension ofthe
building,measuredinorthogonaldirections.
StructuralRedundancy:
A high degree of redundancy accompanied by redistribution capacity through ductility is desirable,
enabling a more widely spread energy dissipation across the entire structure and an increased total
dissipated energy. The use of evenly distributed structural elements increases redundancy. Structural
systemsofhigherstaticindeterminacymayresultinhigherresponsereductionfactorR.
HorizontalBidirectionalResistanceandStiffness:
Horizontal earthquake motion is a bidirectional phenomenon and thus the building structure needs to
resisthorizontalactioninanydirection.Thestructuralelementsoflateralforceresistingsystemshouldbe
arrangedinanorthogonal(inplan)pattern,ensuringsimilarresistanceandstiffnesscharacteristicsinboth
main directions. The stiffness characteristics of the structure should also limit the development of
excessive displacements that might lead to either instabilities due to second order effects or excessive
damages.
TorsionalResistanceandStiffness
Besides lateral resistance and stiffness, buildingstructures shouldpossess adequate torsional resistance
and stiffness in order to limit the development of torsional motions which tend to stress the different
76
Chapter2
structural elements in a nonuniform way. In this respect, arrangements in which the main elements
resistingtheseismicactionaredistributedclosetotheperipheryofthebuildingpresentclearadvantages.
DiaphragmBehaviour
Inbuildings,floors(includingtheroof)actashorizontaldiaphragmsthatcollectandtransmittheinertia
forces to the vertical structural systems and ensure that those systems act together in resisting the
horizontalseismicaction.Theactionoffloorsasdiaphragmsisespeciallyrelevantincasesofcomplexand
nonuniform layouts of the vertical structural systems, or where systems with different horizontal
deformabilitycharacteristicsareusedtogether.
Floor systems and the roof should be provided with inplane stiffness and resistance and with effective
connectiontotheverticalstructuralsystems.Particularcareshouldbetakenincasesofnoncompactor
veryelongatedinplanshapesandincasesoflargeflooropenings,especiallyifthelatterarelocatedinthe
vicinity of the main vertical structural elements, thus hindering such effective connection between the
verticalandhorizontalstructure.
Theinplanestiffnessofthefloorsshallbesufficientlylargeincomparisonwiththelateralstiffnessofthe
vertical structural elements, so that the deformation of the floor shall have a small effect on the
distributionoftheforcesamongtheverticalstructuralelements.
Foundation
The design and construction of the foundation and of its connection to the superstructure shall ensure
that the whole building is subjected to a uniform seismic excitation. For buildings with individual
foundation elements (footings or piles), the use of a foundation slab or tiebeams between these
elementsinbothmaindirectionsisrecommended,asdescribedinChapter3.
2.5.5
INVESTIGATIONANDASSESSMENTOFSITECONDITIONS
2.5.5.1
SITEINVESTIGATION
Appropriate site investigations should be carried out to identify the ground conditions influencing the
seismicaction.
The ground conditions at the building site should normally be free from risks of ground rupture, slope
instabilityandpermanentsettlementscausedbyliquefactionordensificationduringanearthquake.The
possibilityofsuchphenomenashouldbeinvestigatedinaccordancewithstandardproceduresdescribed
inSection3.
TheintentofthesiteinvestigationistoclassifytheSiteintooneoftypesSA,SB,SC,SD,SE,S1andS2as
definedinSection2.5.5.2.Suchclassificationisbasedonsiteprofileandevaluatedsoilproperties(shear
wavevelocity,StandardPenetrationResistance,undrainedshearstrength,soiltype).Thesiteclassisused
todeterminetheeffectoflocalsoilconditionsontheearthquakegroundmotion.
ForsitesrepresentingspecialsoiltypeS1orS2,sitespecificspecialstudiesforthegroundmotionshould
be done. Soil type S1, having very low shear wave velocity and low material damping, can produce
anomalous seismicsite amplification and soilstructure interaction effects. ForS2soils,possibility of soil
failureshouldbestudied.
ForastructurebelongingtoSeismicDesignCategoryCorD(Section2.5.7.2),siteinvestigationshouldalso
includedeterminationofsoilparametersfortheassessmentofthefollowing:
77
Part6
a. Slopeinstability.
b. PotentialforLiquefactionandlossofsoilstrength.
c. Differentialsettlement.
d. Surfacedisplacementduetofaultingorlateralspreading.
e. Lateral pressures on basement walls and retaining walls due to earthquake ground
motion.
Liquefaction potential and possible consequences should be evaluated for design earthquake ground
motionsconsistentwithpeakgroundaccelerations.AnySettlementduetodensificationofloosegranular
soils under design earthquake motion should be studied. The occurrence and consequences of geologic
hazardssuchasslopeinstabilityorsurfacefaultingshouldalsobeconsidered.Thedynamiclateralearth
pressureonbasementwallsandretainingwallsduringearthquakegroundshakingistobeconsideredas
anearthquakeloadforuseindesignloadcombinations
2.5.5.2
SITECLASSIFICATION
Site will be classified as type SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, S1 and S2 based on the provisions of this section.
ClassificationwillbedoneinaccordancewithTable2.5.1basedonthesoilpropertiesofupper30meters
ofthesiteprofile.
Averagesoilpropertieswillbedeterminedasgiveninthefollowingequations:
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
where,
n=numberofsoillayersinupper30m
di=thicknessoflayeri
Vsi=shearwavevelocityoflayeri
Ni=Field(uncorrected)StandardPenetrationValueforlayeri
k=numberofcohesivesoillayersinupper30m
dci=thicknessofcohesivelayeri
Sui=Undrainedshearstrengthofcohesivelayeri
Thesiteprofileuptoadepthof30misdividedintonnumberofdistinctsoilorrocklayers.Wheresome
ofthelayersarecohesive,kisthenumberofcohesivelayers.Hence
=30m,while
<30
78
Chapter2
m if k < n in other words if there are both cohesionless and cohesive layers. The standard penetration
valueNasdirectlymeasuredinthefieldwithoutcorrectionwillbeused.
The site classification should be done using average shear wave velocity
if this can be estimated,
otherwisethevalueof maybeused.
Table2.5.1:
Site
Class
Siteclassificationbasedonsoilproperties
Descriptionofsoil profile upto30

AverageSoilPropertiesintop30meters
metersdepth
Shear
wave
velocity
(m/s)
Standard
Penetration
Value,
(blows/30cm)
Undrained
shear
strength,
(kPa)
SA
Rock or other rocklike geological >800

formation, including at most 5 m of
weakermaterialatthesurface.
SB
Depositsofverydensesand,gravel,or 360800
very stiff clay, at least several tens of
metresinthickness,characterisedbya
gradual increase of mechanical
propertieswithdepth.
>50
>250
SC
Deep deposits of dense or medium 180360

dense sand, gravel or stiff clay with
thickness from several tens to many
hundredsofmetres.
1550
70250
SD
Deposits
of
loosetomedium <180
cohesionless soil (with or without
some soft cohesive layers), or of
predominantly softtofirm cohesive
soil.
A soil profile consisting of a surface
alluviumlayerwithVsvaluesoftypeC
or D and thickness varying between
about 5 m and 20 m, underlain by
stiffermaterialwithVs>800m/s.
<15
<70
SE
S1
Deposits consisting, or containing a <

100
layer at least 10 m thick, of soft (indicative)
clays/siltswithahigh plasticityindex
(PI>40)andhighwatercontent
1020
S2
Deposits of liquefiable soils, of

sensitive clays, or any other soil
profile not included in types SA to SE
orS1
2.5.6
EARTHQUAKEGROUNDMOTION
2.5.6.1
REGIONALSEISMICITY
Bangladeshcanbeaffectedbymoderatetostrongearthquakeeventsduetoitsproximitytothecollision
boundary of the Northeast moving Indian plate and Eurasian Plate. Strong historical earthquakes with
magnitude greater than 7.0have affected parts of Bangladesh in the last 150 years, some of them had
79
Part6
their epicenters within the country. A brief description of the local geology, tectonic features and
earthquakeoccurrenceintheregionisgiveninAppendixC.
Fig.2.5.1:SeismicZoningMapofBangladesh
2.5.6.2
SEISMICZONING
The intent of the seismic zoning map is to give an indication of the Maximum Considered Earthquake
(MCE)motionatdifferentpartsofthecountry.Inprobabilisticterms,theMCEmotionmaybeconsidered
tocorrespondtohavinga2%probabilityofexceedancewithinaperiodof50years.Thecountryhasbeen
80
Chapter2
dividedintofourseismiczoneswithdifferentlevelsofgroundmotion.Table2.5.2includesadescriptionof
thefourseismiczones.Fig.2.5.1presentsamapofBangladeshshowingtheboundariesofthefourzones.
Each zone has a seismic zone coefficient (Z) which represents the maximum considered peak ground
acceleration(PGA)onverystiffsoil/rock(siteclassSA)inunitsofg(accelerationduetogravity).Thezone
coefficients(Z)ofthefourzonesare:Z=0.12(Zone1),Z=0.20(Zone2),Z=0.28(Zone3)andZ=0.36(Zone
4). Table 2.5.3 lists zone coefficients for some important towns of Bangladesh. The most severe
earthquakepronezone,Zone4isinthenortheastwhichincludesSylhetandhasamaximumPGAvalueof
0.36g.DhakacityfallsinthemoderateseismicintensityzonewithZ=0.2,whileChittagongcityfallsina
severeintensityzonewithZ=0.28.
Table2.5.2DescriptionofSeismicZones
Seismic
Location
Zone
Seismic
Intensity
SouthwesternpartincludingBarisal,
Khulna,Jessore,Rajshahi
Seismic
Zone
Coefficient,
Z
Low
0.12
LowerCentralandNorthwestern
partincludingNoakhali,Dhaka,
Pabna,Dinajpur,aswellas
Southwesterncornerincluding
Sundarbans
Moderate
0.20
UpperCentralandNorthwestern
partincludingBrahmanbaria,
Sirajganj,Rangpur
Severe
0.28
NortheasternpartincludingSylhet,
Mymensingh,Kurigram
VerySevere
0.36
Table2.5.3
Town
Bagerhat
Bandarban
Barguna
Barisal
Bhola
Bogra
Brahmanbaria
Chandpur
Chittagong
Chuadanga
Comilla
Cox'sBazar
Dhaka
SeismicZoneCoefficientZforSomeImportantTownsofBangladesh
Z
0.12
0.28
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.28
0.28
0.20
0.28
0.12
0.20
0.28
0.20
Town
Dinajpur
Faridpur
Feni
Gaibandha
Gazipur
Habiganj
Jaipurhat
Jamalpur
Jessore
Khagrachari
Khulna
Kishoreganj
Kurigram
Town
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.28
0.20
0.36
0.20
0.36
0.12
0.28
0.12
0.36
0.36
Kushtia
0.20
0.28
0.20
0.20
0.12
0.20
0.36
0.28
0.20
0.20
0.36
0.20
0.20
Lalmanirhat
Madaripur
Manikganj
Mongla
Munshiganj
Mymensingh
Narsingdi
Natore
Naogaon
Netrakona
Noakhali
Pabna
81
Town
Panchagarh
Patuakhali
Rajbari
Rajshahi
Rangamati
Rangpur
Satkhira
Sirajganj
Srimangal
Sunamganj
Sylhet
Tangail
Thakurgaon
Z
0.20
0.12
0.20
0.12
0.28
0.28
0.12
0.28
0.36
0.36
0.36
0.28
0.20
Part6
2.5.6.3
DESIGNRESPONSESPECTRUM
The earthquake ground motion for which the building has to be designed is represented by the design
responsespectrum.Bothstaticanddynamicanalysismethodsarebasedonthisresponsespectrum.This
spectrumrepresentsthespectralaccelerationforwhichthebuildinghastobedesignedasafunctionof
the building period, taking into account the ground motion intensity. The spectrum is based on elastic
analysis but in order to account for energy dissipation due to inelastic deformation and benefits of
structuralredundancy,thespectralaccelerationsarereducedbytheresponsemodificationfactorR.For
importantstructures,thespectralaccelerationsareincreasedbytheimportancefactorI.Thedesignbasis
earthquake (DBE) ground motion is selected at a ground shaking level that is 2/3 of the maximum
consideredearthquake(MCE)groundmotion.Theeffectoflocalsoilconditionsontheresponsespectrum
isincorporatedinthenormalizedaccelerationresponsespectrumCs.
Thespectralaccelerationforthedesignearthquakeisgivenbythefollowingequation:
Sa =
2 ZI
C s
3 R
(2.5.4)
where,
Sa=Designspectralacceleration(inunitsofg),whichshallnotbelessthan2/3*ZI*.
=coefficientusedtocalculatelowerboundforSa.Recommendedvalueforis0.2.
Z=Seismiczonecoefficient,asdefinedinSection2.5.6.2
I=Structureimportancefactor,asdefinedinSection2.5.7.1
R=ResponsereductionfactorwhichdependsonthetypeofstructuralsystemgiveninTable2.5.7.The
ratioI/Rcannotbegreaterthanone.
Cs=Normalizedaccelerationresponsespectrum,whichisafunctionofstructure(building)periodandsoil
type(siteclass)asdefinedbyEquations2.5.5ad
T
(2.5 1 )
C s = S 1 +
TB
C s = 2.5S
for 0 T TB (2.5.5a)
for TB T TC (2.5.5b)
T
C s = 2.5S C
T
T T
C s = 2.5S C D
T2
for TC T TD (2.5.5c)
for TD T 4 sec
(2.5.5d )
CsdependsonSandvaluesofTB,TCandTD,(Fig.2.5.2)whichareallfunctionsofthesiteclass.ConstantCs
valuebetweenperiodsTBandTCrepresentsconstantspectralacceleration.
S=SoilfactorwhichdependsonsiteclassandisgiveninTable2.5.4
T=Structure(building)periodasdefinedinSection2.5.9.2
TB = Lower limit of the period of the constant spectral acceleration branch given in Table 2.5.4 as a
functionofsiteclass.
82
Chapterr2
TC = Upper
U
limit off the period of
o the constan
nt spectral accceleration bran
nch given in Table
T
2.5.4 as a
functio
onofsiteclasss
TD = Lower
L
limit of the period off the constantt spectral disp
placement branch given in Table
T
2.5.4 as a
functio
onofsiteclasss
= Damping correcction factor ass a function off damping witth a referencee value of =1
1 for 5% viscous
ngexpression:
dampiing.Itisgivenbythefollowin
= 10 /( 5 + ) 0 .5
55
(2.5.6)
wheree,isthevisco
ousdampingraatioofthestru
ucture,expresssedasaperceentageofcriticaldamping.Th
he
valueofcannotbe
esmallerthan0
0.55.
Figure2..5.2:TypicalSha
apeoftheElasticResponseSpe
ectrumCoefficieentCs
ersdefiningelassticresponsesp
pectrum
Table2.5.4:Sitedependenttsoilfactorandotherparamete
Soiltyype
TB(s)
SA
S
1..0
0.15
TC
(s)
0.40
S
SB
1..2
0.15
0.50
2.00
S
SC
1.1
15
0.20
0.60
2.00
SD
S
1.3
35
0.20
0.80
2.00
S
SE
1..4
0.15
0.50
2.00
TD
(s)
2.00
nticipated(dessignbasiseartthquake)peakgroundacceleeration(PGA) forrockorveerystiffsoil(site
Thean
class SA)
S is 2/3*Z. However, for design, the ground
g
motion
n is modified through the use
u of response
reducttionfactorRandimportanceefactorI,resulltinginPGArockk=2/3*Z*I/R.Fiig.2.5.3showssthenormalizeed
acceleeration response spectrum Cs for 5% dam
mping, which may
m be defined
d as the 5% damped
d
spectrral
acceleeration (obtain
ned by Eq.2.5..4) normalized
d with respectt to PGArock. This figure deemonstrates th
he
significcantinfluenceofsiteclasson
ntheresponseespectrum.
83
Part6
Figure2..5.3:
NormalizzedDesignAcce
elerationRespon
nseSpectrumfo
ordifferentsite
eclasses.
nSpectrumforrElasticAnalyssis
Design
For sitte classes SA to SE, the de
esign acceleraation response
e spectrum fo
or elastic analysis methods is
obtain
nedusingEq.(2
2.5.4)tocomp
puteSa(inunittsofg)asafu
unctionofperiiodT.Thedessignacceleratio
on
respon
nse spectrum represents th
he expected ground motion
n (Design Basiss Earthquake) divided by th
he
factorR/I.
nSpectrumforrInelasticAnalysis
Design
Forinelasticanalysissmethods,theeanticipatedggroundmotion
n(DesignBasissEarthquake) isdirectlyuseed.
designacceleraationresponseespectrumisu
used,whichisobtainedbyussingR=1andI==1
Corresspondingreald
in Eq.((2.5.4). The reeal design acceleration resp
ponse spectrum
m is equal to design acceleeration response
spectrrummultiplied
dbyR/I.
SiteSp
pecificDesignSSpectrum
ForsitteclassS1andS2,sitespecificstudiesaren
neededtoobtaaindesignresp
ponsespectrum
m.Forimportant
projeccts,sitespecificstudiesmayyalsobecarrieedouttodeteerminespectru
uminsteadof usingEq.(2.5.4
4).
Theob
bjectiveofsuchsitespecificgroundmotionanalysisisto
odeterminegro
oundmotionsforlocalseism
mic
andsitteconditionsw
withhighercon
nfidencethanispossibleusin
ngsimplifiedequations.
2.5.7
7
BUILD
DINGCATEG
GORIES
2.5.7
7.1
IMPOR
RTANCEFA
ACTOR
Buildin
ngs are classified in four occupancy
o
cattegories in Ch
hapter 1 (Tab
ble 1.2.1), dep
pending on th
he
conseq
quencesofcollapseforhum
manlife,ontheeirimportanceeforpublicsaffetyandcivilp
protectioninth
he
immed
diateposteartthquakeperiod
d,andonthessocialandeconomicconsequ
uencesofcollaapse.Dependin
ng
on occupancy categgory, buildingss may be designed for high
her seismic fo
orces using im
mportance factor
Chapter2
greater than one. Table 2.5.5 defines different occupancy categories and corresponding importance
factor.
Table2.5.5ImportanceFactorsforBuildingsandStructuresforEarthquakedesign
Occupancy
Category
IorII
III
IV
Importance
factorI
1.0
1.25
1.5
2.5.7.2
SEISMICDESIGNCATEGORY
Buildings shall be assigned a seismic design category among B, C or D based on seismic zone, local site
conditions and importance class of building, as given in Table 2.5.6. Seismic design category D has the
most stringent seismic design detailing, while seismic design category B has the least seismic design
detailingrequirements.
Table2.5.6SeismicDesignCategoryofBuildings
OccupancyCategoryI,IIandIII OccupancyCategoryIV
Site
Class
SA
SB
SC
SD
SE,S1,S2
Zone Zone Zone

1
2
3
B
B
B
C
D
C
C
C
D
D
Zone
4
Zone
1
Zone
2
Zone
3
Zone
4
D
D
D
D
D
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
C
D
D
D
D
2.5.7.3
BUILDINGIRREGULARITY:
Buildings with irregularity in plan or elevation suffer much more damage in earthquakes than buildings
with regular configuration. A building may be considered as irregular, if at least one of the conditions
givenbelowareapplicable:
2.5.7.3.1
PlanIrregularity
i) Torsionirregularity
To be considered for rigid floor diaphragms, when the maximum storey drift (max) as
showninFig.2.5.4a,computedincludingaccidentaltorsion,atoneendofthestructureis
morethan1.2timestheaverage(avg=(max+min)/2)ofthestoreydriftsatthetwoendsof
the structure. If max>1.4avg then the irregularity is termed as extreme torsional
irregularity.
ii) Reentrantcorners
Bothprojectionsofthestructurebeyondareentrantcomer(Fig.2.5.4b)aregreaterthan
15percentofitsplandimensioninthegivendirection.
iii) DiaphragmDiscontinuitv
85
Part6
Diaphragms with abrupt discontinuities or variations in stiffness, including those having

cutout(Fig.2.5.4c)oropenareasgreaterthan50%ofthegrossencloseddiaphragmarea,
orchangesineffectivediaphragmstiffnessofmorethan50%fromonestoreytothenext.
iv) OutOfPlaneOffsets
Discontinuities in a lateral force resistance path, such as out ofplane offsets of vertical
elements,asshowninFig.2.5.4d.
v) NonparallelSystems
The vertical elements resisting the lateral force are not parallel to or symmetric (Fig.
2.5.4e)aboutthemajororthogonalaxesofthelateralforceresistingelements.
Fig.2.5.4aTorsionalIrregularity
Fig.2.5.4bReentrantcorners(A/L>0.15)
Fig.2.5.4cDiaphragmDiscontinuitv
86
Chapter2
Fig.2.5.4dOutOfPlaneOffsetsofShearWall
Fig.2.5.4eNonparallelSystemsofShearWall
2.5.7.3.2
i) StiffnessIrregularitySoftStorey
Asoftstoreyisoneinwhichthelateralstiffnessislessthan70%ofthatinthestoreyabove
orlessthan80%oftheaveragelateralstiffnessofthethreestoreysaboveirregularity(Fig.
2.5.5a).Anextremesoftstoreyisdefinedwhereitslateralstiffnessislessthan60%ofthat
inthe storeyaboveorlessthan70%oftheaveragelateralstiffnessofthethreestoreys
above.
ii) MassIrregularity
The seismic weight of any storey is more than twice of that of its adjacent storeys (Fig.
2.5.5b).Thisirregularityneednotbeconsideredincaseofroofs.
iii) VerticalGeometricIrregularity
ThisirregularityexistsforbuildingswithsetbackswithdimensionsgiveninFig.2.5.5c.
iv) VerticalInPlaneDiscontinuityinVerticalElementsResistingLateralForce
Aninplaneoffsetofthelateralforceresistingelementsgreaterthanthelengthofthose
elements(Fig.2.5.5d).
v) DiscontinuityinCapacityWeakStorey
A weak storey is one in which the storey lateral strength is less than 80% of that in the
storeyabove.Thestoreylateralstrengthisthetotalstrengthofallseismicforceresisting
elements sharing the storey shear in the considered direction (Fig. 2.5.5e). An extreme
weakstoreyisonewherethestoreylateralstrengthislessthan65%ofthatinthestorey
above.
87
Part6
Fig.2.5.5aSoftStorey
Fig.2.5.5bMassIrregularity
L2>1.3L1
Fig.2.5.5cVerticalGeometricIrregularity(SetbackStructures)
88
Chapter2
Fig.2.5.5dVerticalInPlaneDiscontinuityinVerticalElementsResistingLateralForce
Fig.2.5.5eWeakStorey
2.5.7.4
TYPEOFSTRUCTURALSYSTEMS
The basic lateral and vertical seismic forceresisting system shall conform to one of the types A to G
indicated in Table 2.5.7. Each type is again subdivided by the types of vertical elements used to resist
lateralseismicforces.AcombinationofsystemsmayalsobepermittedasstatedinSection2.5.7.5.
ThestructuralsystemtobeusedshallbeinaccordancewiththeseismicdesigncategoryindicatedinTable
2.5.6. Structural systems that are not permitted for a certain seismic design category are indicated by
NP. Structural systems that do not have any height restriction are indicated by NL. Where there is
heightlimit,themaximumheightinmetersisgiven.
Theresponsereductionfactor,R,andthedeflectionamplificationfactor,Cd,indicatedinTable2.5.7shall
beusedindeterminingthedesignbaseshearanddesignstorydrift.
Theselectedseismicforceresistingsystemshallbedesignedanddetailedinaccordancewiththespecific
requirementsforthesystem.
89
Part6
Seis.Design
CategoryD
Seis.Design
CategoryC
Seis.Design
CategoryB
Deflection
Amplification
Factor,Cd
SeismicForceResistingSystem
Response
Reduction
Factor,R
Table2.5.7Responsereductionfactor,deflectionamplificationfactorfordifferentStructuralSystems
andheightlimitations(m)fordifferentseismicdesigncategories
Heightlimit(m)
A.BEARINGWALLSYSTEMS(noframe)
NL
NL
50
NL
NL
NP
1.75
NL
50
NP
1.5
1.25
18
NP
NP
B.BUILDINGFRAMESYSTEMS(with
bracingorshearwall)
1. Steel eccentrically braced frames,

moment resisting connections at
NL
NL
50
2. Steel eccentrically braced frames,

non-moment-resisting, connections at
NL
NL
50
3. Special steel concentrically braced

frames
NL
NL
50
3.25
3.25
NL
NL
11
NL
50
50
4.25
NL
NL
NP
NL
50
NP
1.5
1.25
18
NP
NP
4. Ordinary steel concentrically braced

frames
C.MOMENTRESISTINGFRAMESYSTEMS
(noshearwall)
1. Special steel moment frames
5.5
NL
NL
2. Intermediate steel moment frames
4.5
NL
NL
35
3. Ordinary steel moment frames
3.5
NL
NL
NP
4. Special reinforced concrete moment frames
5.5
NL
NL
NL
5. Intermediate reinforced concrete moment

frames
6. Ordinary reinforced concrete moment
frames
4.5
NL
NL
NP
2.5
NL
NP
NP
D.DUALSYSTEMS:SPECIALMOMENT
FRAMESCAPABLEOFRESISTINGAT
LEAST25%OFPRESCRIBEDSEISMIC
FORCES(withbracingorshearwall)
1. Steel eccentrically braced frames
NL
NL
NL
5.5
NL
NL
NL
90
Seis.Design
CategoryD
Seis.Design
CategoryC
Seis.Design
CategoryB
Deflection
Amplification
Factor,Cd
SeismicForceResistingSystem
Response
Reduction
Factor,R
Chapter2
Heightlimit(m)

5.5
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NP
E.DUALSYSTEMS:INTERMEDIATE
MOMENTFRAMESCAPABLEOF
RESISTINGATLEAST25%OFPRESCRIBED
SEISMICFORCES(withbracingorshear
wall)
NL
NL
11
6.5
NL
NL
50
NL
50
NP
5.5
4.5
NL
NL
NP
F.DUALSHEARWALLFRAMESYSTEM:
ORDINARYREINFORCEDCONCRETE
MOMENTFRAMESANDORDINARY
REINFORCEDCONCRETESHEARWALLS
G.STEELSYSTEMSNOTSPECIFICALLY
DETAILEDFORSEISMICRESISTANCE
4.5
NL
NP
NP
NL
NL
NP
NOTE:
1.
Under seismic design category, NL = No height restriction, NP = Not permitted,

Number represents maximum allowable height (m).
2.
Dual Systems include buildings which consist of both moment resisting frame
and shear walls (or braced frame) where both systems resist the total design
forces in proportion to their lateral stiffness.
3.
See Table 10.C.3.1 of Sec. 10 for additional values of R and Cd and height
limitsforsomeothertypesofsteelstructuresnotcoveredinTable2.5.7
SeismicforceresistingsystemsthatarenotgiveninTable2.5.7maybepermittedifsubstantialanalytical
andtestdataaresubmittedthatestablishthedynamiccharacteristicsanddemonstratethelateralforce
resistanceandenergydissipationcapacitytobeequivalenttothestructuralsystemslistedinTable2.5.7
forequivalentresponsemodificationcoefficient,R,anddeflectionamplificationfactor,Cd,values.
2.5.7.5
COMBINATIONOFSTRUCTURALSYSTEMS
2.5.7.5.1
CombinationsofStructuralSystemsinDifferentDirections:
Differentseismicforceresistingsystemsarepermittedtobeusedtoresistseismicforcesalongeachof
the two orthogonal axes of the structure. Where different systems are used, the respective R and Cd
coefficientsshallapplytoeachsystem,includingthelimitationsonsystemusecontainedinTable2.5.7.
2.5.7.5.2
CombinationsofStructuralSystemsintheSameDirection:
Where different seismic forceresisting systems are used in combination to resist seismic forces in the
same direction of structural response, other than those combinations considered as dual systems, the
91
Part6
morestringentsystemlimitationcontainedinTable2.5.7shallapply.ThevalueofRusedfordesigninthat
directionshallnotbegreaterthantheleastvalueofRforanyofthesystemsutilizedinthatdirection.The
deflectionamplificationfactor,Cdinthedirectionunderconsiderationatanystoryshallnotbelessthan
thelargestvalueofthisfactorfortheRfactorusedinthesamedirectionbeingconsidered
2.5.8
STATICANALYSISPROCEDURE
Although analysis of buildings subjected to dynamic earthquake loads should theoretically require
dynamic analysis procedures, for certain type of building structures subjected to earthquake shaking,
simplifiedstaticanalysisproceduresmayalsoprovidereasonablygoodresults.Theequivalentstaticforce
methodissuchaprocedurefordeterminingtheseismiclateralforcesactingonthestructure.Thistypeof
analysismaybeappliedtobuildingswhoseseismicresponseisnotsignificantlyaffectedbycontributions
from modes higher than the fundamental mode in each direction. This requirement is deemed to be
satisfiedinbuildingswhichfulfillthefollowingtwoconditions:
a.
Thebuildingperiodinthetwomainhorizontaldirectionsissmallerthanboth4TC(TCis
definedinSection2.5.6.3)and2sec.
b.
2.5.9
ThebuildingdoesntpossessirregularityinelevationasdefinedinSection2.5.7.3.
EQUIVALENTSTATICANALYSIS
Theevaluationoftheseismicloadsstartswiththecalculationofthedesignbaseshearwhichisderived
from the design response spectrum presented in Section 2.5.6.3. This section presents different
computationsrelevanttotheequivalentstaticanalysisprocedure.
2.5.9.1
DESIGNBASESHEAR
Theseismicdesignbaseshearforceinagivendirectionshallbedeterminedfromthefollowingrelation:
V = SaW
(2.5.7)
where,
Sa = Lateral seismic force coefficient calculated using Eq.2.5.4 (Section 2.5.6.3). It is the design spectral
acceleration(inunitsofg)correspondingtothebuildingperiodT(computedasperSection2.5.9.2).
W=TotalseismicweightofthebuildingdefinedinSection2.5.9.3
2.5.9.2
BUILDINGPERIOD
The fundamental period T of the building in the horizontal direction under consideration shall be
determinedusingthefollowingguidelines:
a)
Structuraldynamicsprocedures(suchasRayleighmethodormodaleigenvalueanalysis),
usingstructuralpropertiesanddeformationcharacteristicsofresistingelements,maybe
used to determine the fundamental period T of the building in the direction under
consideration. This period shall not exceed the approximate fundamental period
determinedbyEquation(2.5.8)bymorethan40%.
b)
ThebuildingperiodT(insecs)maybeapproximatedbythefollowingformula:
T = Ct (hn )m
2.5.8
92
Chapter2
where,
hn
= Height of building in metres from foundation or from top of rigid basement.

Thisexcludesthebasementstoreys,wherebasementwallsareconnectedwith
the ground floor deck or fitted between the building columns. But it includes
thebasementstoreys,whentheyarenotsoconnected.
CtandmareobtainedfromTable2.5.8
Table2.5.8Valuesforcoefficientstoestimateapproximateperiod
Structuretype
Ct
Concrete moment-resisting frames
0.0466
0.9
Steel moment-resisting frames
0.0724
0.8
Eccentrically braced steel frame
0.0731
0.75
All other structural systems
0.0488
0.75
NOTE:
Consider moment resisting frames as frames which resist
100% of seismic force and are not enclosed or adjoined by
componentsthataremorerigidandwillpreventtheframes
fromdeflectingunderseismicforces.
c)
Formasonryorconcreteshearwallstructures,theapproximatefundamentalperiod,Tin
secsmaybedeterminedasfollows:
T=
0.0062
hn
Cw
(2.5.9)
where,
2
Cw =
Ai
100 x hn

AB i =1 hi
1 + 0.83 hi
D
(2.5.10)
where,
AB=areaofbaseofstructure
Ai=webareaofshearwalli
Di=lengthofshearwalli
hi=heightofshearwalli
x = number of shear walls in the building effective in resisting lateral forces in the
2.5.9.3
SEISMICWEIGHT
Seismic weight, W, is the total dead load of a building or a structure, including partition walls, and
applicableportionsofotherimposedloadslistedbelow:
93
Part6
a) For live load upto andincluding 3kN/m2, a minimumof 25%of thelive load shall be
applicable.
b) Forliveloadabove3kN/m2,aminimumof50%oftheliveloadshallbeapplicable.
c) Totalweight(100%)ofpermanentheavyequipmentorretainedliquidoranyimposed
loadsustainedinnatureshallbeincluded.
Where the probable imposed loads (mass) at the time of earthquake are more correctly
assessed,thedesignermaygoforhigherpercentageofliveload.
2.5.9.4
VERTICALDISTRIBUTIONOFLATERALFORCES
In the absence of a more rigorous procedure, the total seismic lateral force at the base level, in other
wordsthebaseshearV,shallbeconsideredasthesumoflateralforcesFxinducedatdifferentfloorlevels,
theseforcesmaybecalculatedas:
Fx = V
w x hx k
w i hi
(2.5.11)
i =1
where,
Fx=partofbaseshearforceinducedatlevelx
wi and wx = part of the total effective seismic weight of the structure (W) assigned to
leveliorx
hiandhx=theheightfromthebasetoleveliorx
k=1forstructureperiod0.5s
=2forstructureperiod2.5s
=linearinterpolationbetween1and2forotherperiods.
n=numberofstories
2.5.9.5
STOREYSHEARANDITSHORIZONTALDISTRIBUTION
ThedesignstoreyshearVx,atanystoreyxisthesumoftheforcesFxinthatstoreyandallotherstories
aboveit,givenbyEq.2.5.12:
n
Vx = Fi
(2.5.12)
i=x
where,Fi=Portionofbaseshearinducedatleveli,asdeterminedbyEq.2.5.11
Ifthefloordiaphragmscanbeconsideredtobeinfinitelyrigidinthehorizontalplane,theshearVxshallbe
distributed to the various elements of the lateral force resisting system in proportion to their relative
lateralstiffness.Forflexiblediaphragms,thedistributionofforcestotheverticalelementsshallaccount
forthepositionanddistributionofthemassessupported.
94
Chapter2
Allowance shall also be made for the increased shear arising due to horizontal torsional moment as
specifiedinSec2.5.9.6
2.5.9.6
HORIZONTALTORSIONALMOMENTS:
Design shall accommodate increase in storey shear forces resulting from probable horizontal torsional
momentsonrigidfloordiaphragms.Computationofsuchmomentsshallbeasfollows:
2.5.9.6.1
InbuiltTorsionalEffects:
Whenthereisinbuilteccentricitybetweencentreofmassandcentreofrigidity(lateralresistance)atthe
floorlevels,rigiddiaphragmsateachlevelwillbesubjectedtotorsionalmomentMt.
2.5.9.6.2
AccidentalTorsionalEffects:
Inordertoaccountforuncertaintiesinthelocationofmassesandinthespatialvariationoftheseismic
motion, accidental torsional effects need to be always considered. The accidental moment Mta is
determinedassumingthestoreymasstobedisplacedfromthecalculatedcentreofmassadistanceequal
to 5% of the building dimension at that level perpendicular to the direction of the force under
consideration.TheaccidentaltorsionalmomentMtaiatleveliisgivenas:
M tai = eai Fi
(2.5.13)
where,
eai= accidentaleccentricityoffloormassatleveliappliedin thesame directionatall
floors=0.05Li
Li=floordimensionperpendiculartothedirectionofseismicforceconsidered.
Wheretorsionalirregularityexists(Section2.5.7.3.1)forSeismicDesignCategoryCorD,theirregularity
effects shall be accounted for by increasing the accidental torsion Mta at each level by a torsional
amplificationfactor,AxasillustratedinFigure2.5.6determinedfromthefollowingequation:
Ax = max 1.2 avg
)]2 3.0
2.5.14
where,
max=MaximumdisplacementatlevelxcomputedassumingAx=1.
avg = Average of the displacements at extreme points of the building at levelx computed
assumingAx=1.
Theaccidentaltorsionalmomentneednotbeamplifiedforstructuresoflightframeconstruction.Alsothe
torsionalamplificationfactor(Ax)shouldnotexceed3.0.
2.5.9.6.3
DesignforTorsionalEffects
ThetorsionaldesignmomentatagivenstoreyshallbeequaltotheaccidentaltorsionalmomentMtaplus
the inbuilt torsional moment Mt (if any). Where earthquake forces are applied concurrently in two
orthogonaldirections,therequired5percentdisplacementofthecenterofmass(foraccidentaltorsion)
neednotbeappliedinbothoftheorthogonaldirectionsatthesametime,butshallbeappliedinonlyone
directionthatproducesthegreatereffect.
95
Part6
Figure2.5.6TorsionalamplificationfactorAxforplanirregularity.
2.5.9.7
DEFLECTIONANDSTOREYDRIFT:
The deflections (x) of level x at the center of the mass shall be determined in accordance with the
followingequation:
x
C d xe
(2.5.15)
where,
Cd=DeflectionamplificationfactorgiveninTable2.5.7
xe=Deflectiondeterminedbyanelasticanalysis
I=ImportancefactordefinedinTable2.5.5
Thedesignstoreydriftatstoreyxshallbecomputedasthedifferenceofthedeflectionsatthecentersof
massatthetopandbottomofthestoryunderconsideration:
2.5.9.8
x = x x 1
(2.5.16)
OVERTURNINGEFFECTS:
Thestructureshallbedesignedtoresistoverturningeffectscausedbytheseismicforcesdeterminedin
Section2.5.9.4.Atanystory,theincrementofoverturningmomentinthestoryunderconsiderationshall
bedistributedtothevariousverticalforceresistingelementsinthesameproportionasthedistributionof
thehorizontalshearstothoseelements.
Theoverturningmomentsatlevelx,Mx,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
96
Chapter2
M x = Fi (hi hx )
(2.5.17)
i =x
where,
Fi=theportionoftheseismicbaseshear,V,inducedatleveli
hi,hx=theheightfromthebasetoleveliorx.
The foundations of structures, except inverted pendulumtype structures, shall be permitted to be
designed for threefourths of the foundation overturning design moment, Mo, determined using above
equation.
2.5.9.9
PDELTAEFFECTS:
The Pdelta effects on story shears and moments, the resulting member forces and moments, and the
story drifts induced by these effects are not required to be considered if the stability coefficient ()
determinedbythefollowingequationisnotmorethan0.10:
PX
(2.5.18)
Vx hsxCd
Where,
Px=thetotalverticaldesignloadatandabovelevelx;wherecomputingPx,noindividualload
factorneedexceed1.0
=thedesignstorydriftoccurringsimultaneouslywithVx
Vx=thestoreyshearforceactingbetweenlevelsxandx1
hsx=thestoryheightbelowlevelx
Cd=thedeflectionamplificationfactorgiveninTable2.5.7
Thestabilitycoefficient()shallnotexceedmaxdeterminedasfollows:
max =
0.5
Cd
0.25
(2.5.19)
whereistheratioofsheardemandtoshearcapacityforthestorybetweenlevelsxandx1.Thisratio
ispermittedtobeconservativelytakenas1.0.
Where the stability coefficient () is greater than 0.10 but less than or equal to max , the incremental
factor related to Pdelta effects on displacements and member forces shall be determined by rational
analysis.Alternatively,itispermittedtomultiplydisplacementsandmemberforcesby1.0/(1).
Whereisgreaterthanmax,thestructureispotentiallyunstableandshallberedesigned.
WherethePdeltaeffectisincludedinanautomatedanalysis,Eq.2.5.19shallstillbesatisfied,however,
thevalueofcomputedfromEq.2.5.18usingtheresultsofthePdeltaanalysisispermittedtobedivided
by(1+)beforecheckingEq.2.5.19.
97
Part6
2.5.10
DYNAMICANALYSISMETHODS
Dynamicanalysismethodinvolvesapplyingprinciplesofstructuraldynamicstocomputetheresponseof
thestructuretoapplieddynamic(earthquake)loads.
2.5.10.1 REQUIREMENTFORDYNAMICANALYSIS
Dynamicanalysisshouldbeperformedtoobtainthedesignseismicforce,anditsdistributiontodifferent
levelsalongtheheightofthebuildingandtothevariouslateralloadresistingelements,forthefollowing
buildings:
a)Regularbuildingswithheightgreaterthan40minZones2,3,4andgreaterthan90min
Zone1.
b)Irregularbuildings(asdefinedinSection2.5.7.3)withheightgreaterthan12minZones2,
3,4andgreaterthan40minZone1.
For irregular buildings, smaller than 40 m in height in Zone 1, dynamic analysis, even though not
mandatory,isrecommended.
2.5.10.2 METHODSOFANALYSIS
Dynamicanalysismaybecarriedoutthroughthefollowingtwomethods:
(i) Response Spectrum Analysis method is a linear elastic analysis method using modal
analysis procedures, where the structure is subjected to spectral accelerations
correspondingtoadesignaccelerationresponsespectrum.Thedesignearthquakeground
motioninthiscaseisrepresentedbyitsresponsespectrum.
(ii) Time History Analysis method isanumerical integrationprocedure where design ground
motiontimehistories(accelerationrecord)areappliedatthebaseofthestructure.Time
historyanalysisprocedurescanbetwotypes:linearandnonlinear.
2.5.11
RESPONSESPECTRUMANALYSIS(RSA)
Aresponsespectrumanalysisshallconsistoftheanalysisofalinearmathematicalmodelofthestructure
todeterminethemaximumaccelerations,forces,anddisplacementsresultingfromthedynamicresponse
to ground shaking represented by the design acceleration response spectrum (presented in Section
2.5.6.3). Response spectrum analysis is also called a modal analysis procedure because it considers
differentmodesofvibrationofthestructureandcombineseffectsofdifferentmodes.
2.5.11.1 MODELING(RSA)
A mathematical model of the structure shall be constructed that represents the spatial distribution of
massandstiffnessthroughoutthestructure.Forregularstructureswithindependentorthogonalseismic
forceresisting systems, independent twodimensional models are permitted to be constructed to
representeachsystem.Forirregularstructuresorstructureswithoutindependentorthogonalsystems,a
threedimensional model incorporating a minimum of three dynamic degrees of freedom consisting of
translation in two orthogonal plan directions and torsional rotation about the vertical axis shall be
included at each level of the structure. Where the diaphragms are not rigid compared to the vertical
elements of the lateralforceresisting system, the model should include representation of the
diaphragmsflexibilityandsuchadditionaldynamicdegreesoffreedomasarerequiredtoaccountforthe
98
Chapter2
participationofthediaphragminthestructuresdynamicresponse.Thestructureshallbeconsideredto
befixedatthebaseor,alternatively,itshallbepermittedtouserealisticassumptionswithregardtothe
stiffnessoffoundations.Inaddition,themodelshallcomplywiththefollowing:
1.Stiffnesspropertiesofconcreteandmasonryelementsshallconsidertheeffectsofcrackedsections
2.Thecontributionofpanelzonedeformationstooverallstorydriftshallbeincludedforsteelmoment
frameresistingsystems.
2.5.11.2 NUMBEROFMODES(RSA)
An analysis shall be conducted using the masses and elastic stiffnesses of the seismicforceresisting
systemtodeterminethenaturalmodesofvibrationforthestructureincludingtheperiodofeachmode,
themodalshapevector,themodalparticipationfactorPandmodalmassM.Theanalysisshallincludea
sufficientnumberofmodestoobtainacombinedmodalmassparticipationofatleast90percentofthe
actualmassineachoftwoorthogonaldirections.
2.5.11.3 MODALSTORYSHEARSANDMOMENTS(RSA)
For each mode, the story shears, story overturning moments, and the shear forces and overturning
moments in vertical elements of the structural system at each level due to the seismic forces shall be
computed.ThepeaklateralforceFikinducedatleveliinmodekisgivenby:
Fik = Akik PkWi
(2.5.20)
where,
Ak=DesignhorizontalspectralaccelerationcorrespondingtoperiodofvibrationTkofmodek,obtained
fromdesignresponsespectrum(Section2.5.6.3)
ik=Modalshapecoefficientatleveliinmodek
Pk=Modalparticipationfactorofmodek
Wi=Weightoffloori.
2.5.11.4 STRUCTURERESPONSE(RSA)
Intheresponsespectrumanalysismethod,thebaseshearVrs;eachofthestoryshear,moment,anddrift
quantities; and the deflection at each level shall be determined by combining their modal values. The
combinationshallbecarriedoutbytakingthesquarerootofthesumofthesquares(SRSS)ofeachofthe
modal values or by the complete quadratic combination (CQC) technique. The complete quadratic
combinationshallbeusedwherecloselyspacedperiodsinthetranslationalandtorsionalmodesresultin
crosscorrelationofthemodes.
The distribution of horizontal shear shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 2.5.9.5. It
should be noted that amplification of accidental torsion as per Section 2.5.9.6 is not required where
accidentaltorsionaleffectsareincludedinthedynamicanalysismodelbyoffsettingthecentreofmassin
eachstorybytherequiredamount.
A base shear, V, shall also be calculated using the equivalent static force procedure in Section 2.5.9.
Where the base shear, Vrs, is less than 85% of V, all the forces but not the drifts obtained by response
spectrumanalysisshallbemultipliedbytheratio0.85V/Vrs.
99
Part6
ThedisplacementsanddriftsobtainedbyresponsespectrumanalysisshallbemultipliedbyCd/Itoobtain
designdisplacementsanddrifts,asdoneinequivalentstaticanalysisprocedure(Section2.5.9.7).
ThePdeltaeffectsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.5.9.9.
2.5.12
LINEARTIMEHISTORYANALYSIS(LTHA)
A linear time history analysis (LTHA) shall consist of an analysis of a linear mathematical model of the
structuretodetermineitsresponse,throughdirectnumericalintegrationofthedifferentialequationsof
motion,toanumberofgroundmotionaccelerationtimehistoriescompatiblewiththedesignresponse
spectrumforthesite.Theanalysisshallbeperformedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthissection.
Forthepurposesofanalysis,thestructureshallbepermittedtobeconsideredtobefixedatthebaseor,
alternatively,itshallbepermittedtouserealisticassumptionswithregardtothestiffnessoffoundations.
The acceleration time history (ground motion) is applied atthe base ofthe structure.The advantage of
thisprocedureisthatthetimedependentbehaviorofthestructuralresponseisobtained.
2.5.12.1 MODELING(LTHA)
MathematicalmodelsshallconformtotherequirementsofmodelingdescribedinSection2.5.11.1.
2.5.12.2 GROUNDMOTION(LTHA)
Atleastthreeappropriategroundmotions(accelerationtimehistory)shallbeusedintheanalysis.Ground
motionshallconformtotherequirementsofthissection.
Twodimensional analysis: Where twodimensional analyses are performed, each ground motion shall
consist of a horizontal acceleration time history selected from an actual recorded event. Appropriate
acceleration histories shall be obtained from records of events having magnitudes, fault distance, and
source mechanisms that are consistent with those that control the maximum considered earthquake.
Where the required number of appropriate ground motion records are not available, appropriate
simulatedgroundmotiontimehistoriesshallbeusedtomakeupthetotalnumberrequired.Theground
motionsshallbescaledsuchthatforeachperiodbetween0.2Tand1.5T(whereTisthenaturalperiodof
the structure in the fundamental mode for the direction considered) the average of the fivepercent
damped response spectra for the each acceleration time history is not less than the corresponding
ordinateofthedesignaccelerationresponsespectrum,determinedinaccordancewithSection2.5.6.3.
Threedimensionalanalysis:Wherethreedimensionalanalysisisperformed,groundmotionsshallconsist
ofpairsofappropriatehorizontalgroundmotionaccelerationtimehistories(intwoorthogonalhorizontal
directions)thatshallbeselectedandscaledfromindividualrecordedevents.Appropriategroundmotions
shall be selected from events having magnitudes, fault distance, and source mechanisms that are
consistentwiththosethatcontrolthemaximumconsideredearthquake.Wheretherequirednumberof
recordedgroundmotionpairsarenotavailable,appropriatesimulatedgroundmotionpairsshallbeused
tomakeupthetotalnumberrequired.Foreachpairofhorizontalgroundmotioncomponents,anSRSS
spectrum shall be constructed by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the fivepercent
damped response spectra for the components (where an identical scale factor is applied to both
componentsofapair).Eachpairofmotionsshallbescaledsuchthatforeachperiodbetween0.2Tand
1.5T (where T is the natural periodof the fundamental mode ofthe structure) the average ofthe SRSS
spectrafromallhorizontalcomponentpairsisnotlessthan1.3timesthecorrespondingordinateofthe
designresponsespectrum,determinedinaccordancewithSection2.5.6.3.
100
Chapter2
2.5.12.3 STRUCTURERESPONSE(LTHA)
Foreachscaledaccelerationtimehistory,themaximumvaluesofbaseshearandotherstructureresponse
quantitiesshallbeobtainedfromthetimehistoryanalysis.Forthreedimensionalanalysis,orthogonalpair
ofscaledmotionsareappliedsimultaneously.Abaseshear,V,shallalsobecalculatedusingtheequivalent
static force procedure described in Section 2.5.9.1. Where the maximum base shear, Vth computed by
linear time history analysis, is less than V, all response quantities (storey shear, moments, drifts, floor
deflections,memberforcesetc)obtainedbytimehistoryanalysisshallbeincreasedbymultiplyingwith
the ratio V/Vth. If number of earthquake records (or pairs) used in the analysis is less than seven, the
maximumstructuralresponseobtainedcorrespondingtodifferentearthquakerecordsshallbeconsidered
asthedesignvalue.Ifthenumberisatleastseven,thentheaverageofmaximumstructuralresponsesfor
differentearthquakerecordsshallbeconsideredasthedesignvalue.
The displacements and drifts obtained as mentioned above shall be multiplied by Cd/I to obtain design
displacementsanddrifts,asdoneinequivalentstaticanalysisprocedure(Section2.5.9.7).
2.5.13
NONLINEARTIMEHISTORYANALYSIS(NTHA)
Nonlineartimehistoryanalysis(NTHA)shallconsistofanalysisofamathematicalmodelofthestructure
which incorporates the nonlinear hysteretic behavior of the structures components to determine its
response, through methods of numerical integration, to ground acceleration time histories compatible
withthe designresponse spectrum for the site. The analysisshall beperformed inaccordancewiththe
requirements of this section. For the purposes of analysis, the structure shall be permitted to be
consideredtobefixedatthebaseor,alternatively,itshallbepermittedtouserealisticassumptionswith
regardtothestiffnessoffoundations.Theaccelerationtimehistory(groundmotion)isappliedatthebase
ofthestructure.Theadvantageofthisprocedureisthatactualtimedependentbehaviorofthestructural
responseconsideringinelasticdeformationsinthestructurecanbeobtained.
2.5.13.1 MODELING(NTHA)
A mathematical model of the structure shall be constructed that represents the spatial distribution of
mass throughout the structure. The hysteretic behavior of elements shall be modeled consistent with
suitablelaboratorytestdataandshallaccountforallsignificantyielding,strengthdegradation, stiffness
degradation,andhystereticpinchingindicatedbysuchtestdata.Strengthofelementsshallbebasedon
expectedvaluesconsideringmaterialoverstrength,strainhardening,andhystereticstrengthdegradation.
As a minimum, a bilinear forcedeformation relationship should be used at the element level. In
reinforced concrete and masonry buildings, the elastic stiffness should correspond to that of cracked
sections.Linearproperties,consistentwiththeprovisionsofChapter5shallbepermittedtobeusedfor
those elements demonstrated by the analysis to remain within their linear range of response. The
structure shall be assumed to have a fixed base or, alternatively, it shall be permitted to use realistic
assumptions with regard to the stiffness and load carrying characteristics of the foundations consistent
withsitespecificsoilsdataandrationalprinciplesofengineeringmechanics.
For regular structures with independent orthogonal seismicforceresisting systems, independent two
dimensionalmodelsshallbepermittedtobeconstructedtorepresenteachsystem.Forstructureshaving
plan irregularity or structures without independent orthogonal systems, a threedimensional model
incorporatingaminimumofthreedynamicdegreesoffreedomconsistingoftranslationintwoorthogonal
plandirectionsandtorsionalrotationabouttheverticalaxisateachlevelofthestructureshallbeused.
101
Part6
Where the diaphragms are not rigid compared to the vertical elements of the lateralforceresisting
system,themodelshallincluderepresentationofthediaphragmsflexibilityandsuchadditionaldynamic
degreesoffreedomasarerequiredtoaccountfortheparticipationofthediaphragminthestructures
dynamicresponse.
2.5.13.2 GROUNDMOTION(NTHA)
The actual timedependent inelastic deformation of the structure is modeled. For inelastic analysis
method,therealdesignaccelerationresponsespectrum(Section2.5.6.3)isobtainedusingEq.2.5.4with
R=1andI=1.Therealdesignaccelerationresponsespectrumisthetruerepresentationoftheexpected
ground motion (design basis earthquake) including local soil effects and corresponds to a peak ground
acceleration(PGA)valueof2/3*Z*S.
Atleastthree appropriateaccelerationtimehistoriesshall be usedintheanalysis.Groundmotionshall
conformtotherequirementsofthissection.
Twodimensional analysis: Where twodimensional analyses are performed, each ground motion shall
consist of a horizontal acceleration time history selected from an actual recorded event. Appropriate
acceleration histories shall be obtained from records of events having magnitudes, fault distance, and
source mechanisms that are consistent with those that control the maximum considered earthquake.
Where the required number of appropriate ground motion records are not available, appropriate
simulatedgroundmotiontimehistoriesshallbeusedtomakeupthetotalnumberrequired.Theground
motionsshallbescaledsuchthatforeachperiodbetween0.2Tand1.5T(whereTisthenaturalperiodof
the structure in the fundamental mode for the direction considered) the average of the fivepercent
dampedresponsespectraforeachaccelerationtimehistoryisnotlessthanthecorrespondingordinateof
therealdesignaccelerationresponsespectrum,asdefinedhere.
Threedimensionalanalysis:Wherethreedimensionalanalysisisperformed,groundmotionsshallconsist
ofpairsofappropriatehorizontalgroundmotionaccelerationtimehistories(intwoorthogonalhorizontal
directions)thatshallbeselectedandscaledfromindividualrecordedevents.Appropriategroundmotions
shall be selected from events having magnitudes, fault distance, and source mechanisms that are
consistentwiththosethatcontrolthemaximumconsideredearthquake.Wheretherequirednumberof
recordedgroundmotionpairsarenotavailable,appropriatesimulatedgroundmotionpairsshallbeused
tomakeupthetotalnumberrequired.Foreachpairofhorizontalgroundmotioncomponents,anSRSS
spectrum shall be constructed by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the fivepercent
damped response spectra for the components (where an identical scale factor is applied to both
componentsofapair).Eachpairofmotionsshallbescaledsuchthatforeachperiodbetween0.2Tand
1.5T (where T is the natural periodof the fundamental mode ofthe structure) the average ofthe SRSS
spectrafromallhorizontalcomponentpairsisnotlessthan1.3timesthecorrespondingordinateofthe
realdesignaccelerationresponsespectrum.
2.5.13.3 STRUCTURERESPONSE(NTHA)
Foreachscaledaccelerationtimehistory,themaximumvaluesofbaseshearandotherstructureresponse
quantities shall be obtained from the nonlinear time history analysis. For three dimensional analysis,
orthogonalpairofscaledmotionsareappliedsimultaneously.Ifnumberofearthquakerecords(orpairs)
used in the analysis is less than seven, the maximum structural response obtained corresponding to
differentearthquakerecordsshallbeconsideredasthedesignvalue.Ifthenumberisatleastseven,then
102
Chapter2
theaverageofmaximumstructuralresponsesfordifferentearthquakerecordsshallbeconsideredasthe
design value. Since real expected earthquake motion input and model incorporating real nonlinear
behaviorofthestructureisused,theresultsasobtainedaredirectlyused(noscalingasinLTHAorRSAis
required)forinterpretationanddesign.
2.5.13.4 STRUCTUREMEMBERDESIGN(NTHA)
The adequacy of individual members and their connections to withstand the design deformations
predicted by the analyses shall be evaluated based onlaboratory testdataforsimilar components. The
effects of gravity and other loads on member deformation capacity shall be considered in these
evaluations.Memberdeformationshallnotexceedtwothirdsofthesmallerof:thevaluethatresultsin
lossofabilitytocarrygravityloadsorthevalueatwhichmemberstrengthhasdeterioratedtolessthan
67%ofpeakstrength.
2.5.13.5 DESIGNREVIEW(NTHA)
Specialcareandexpertiseisneededintheuseofnonlineardynamicanalysisbaseddesign.Checkingof
thedesignbycompetentthirdpartyisrecommended.Areviewofthedesignoftheseismicforceresisting
systemandthesupportingstructuralanalysesshallbeperformedbyanindependentteamconsistingof
design professionals with experience in seismic analysis methods and the theory and application of
nonlinear seismic analysis and structural behavior under extreme cyclic loads. The design review shall
includethefollowing:(i)Reviewofdevelopmentofgroundmotiontimehistories(ii)Reviewofacceptance
criteria (including laboratory test data) used to demonstrate the adequacy of structural elements and
systemstowithstandthecalculatedforceanddeformationdemands(iii)Reviewofstructuraldesign.
2.5.14
NONLINEARSTATICANALYSIS(NSA)
Nonlinear static analysis (NSA), also popularly known as pushover analysis, is a simplified method of
directly evaluating nonlinear response of structures to strong earthquake ground shaking. It is an
alternative to the more complex nonlinear time history analysis (NTHA). The building is subjected to
monotonicallyincreasingstatichorizontalloadsunderconstantgravityload.
2.5.14.1 MODELING(NSA)
Amathematicalmodelofthestructureshallbeconstructedtorepresentthespatialdistributionofmass
and stiffness of the structural system considering the effects of element nonlinearity for deformation
levelsthatexceedtheproportionallimit.PDeltaeffectsshallalsobeincludedintheanalysis.
For regular structures with independent orthogonal seismicforceresisting systems, independent two
dimensional models may be used to represent each system. For structures having plan irregularities or
structureswithoutindependentorthogonalsystems,athreedimensionalmodelincorporatingaminimum
of three degrees of freedom for each level of the structure, consisting of translation in two orthogonal
plandirectionsandtorsionalrotationabouttheverticalaxis,shallbeused.Wherethediaphragmsarenot
rigid compared to the vertical elements of the seismicforceresisting system, the model should include
representationofthediaphragmflexibility.
Unless analysis indicates that a element remains elastic, a nonlinear force deformation model shall be
usedtorepresentthestiffnessoftheelementbeforeonsetofyield,theyieldstrength,andthestiffness
properties of the element after yield at various levels of deformation. Strengths of elements shall not
exceed expected values considering material overstrength and strain hardening. The properties of
103
Part6
elements and components after yielding shall account for strength and stiffness degradation due to
softening,buckling,orfractureasindicatedbyprinciplesofmechanicsortestdata.
A control point shall be selected for the model. For normal buildings, the control point shall be at the
centerofmassofthehighestlevel(roof)ofthestructure.
2.5.14.2 ANALYSISPROCEDURE(NSA)
The lateral forces shall be applied at the center of mass of each level and shall be proportional to the
distributionobtainedfromamodalanalysisforthefundamentalmodeofresponseinthedirectionunder
consideration.Thelateralloadsshallbeincreasedincrementallyinamonotonicmanner.
Atthejthincrementoflateralloading,thetotallateralforceappliedtothemodelshallbecharacterized
bythetermVj.Theincrementalincreasesinappliedlateralforceshouldbeinstepsthataresufficiently
smalltopermitsignificantchangesinindividualelementbehavior(suchasyielding,bucklingorfailure)to
be detected.The first increment in lateral loading shall resultin linear elastic behavior. At eachloading
step,thetotalappliedlateralforce,Vj,thelateraldisplacementofthecontrolpoint,j,andtheforcesand
deformationsineachelementshallberecorded.Theanalysisshallbecontinueduntilthedisplacementof
thecontrolpointisatleast150%ofthetargetdisplacementdeterminedinaccordancewithSec.2.5.14.3.
The structure shall be designed so that the total applied lateral force does not decrease in any load
incrementforcontrolpointdisplacementslessthanorequalto125percentofthetargetdisplacement.
2.5.14.3 EFFECTIVEPERIODANDTARGETDISPLACEMENT(NSA)
A bilinear curve shall be fitted to the capacity curve, such that the first segment of the bilinear curve
coincides with the capacity curve at 60% of the effective yield strength, the second segment coincides
withthecapacitycurveatthetargetdisplacement,andtheareaunderthebilinearcurveequalsthearea
underthecapacitycurve,betweentheoriginandthetargetdisplacement.Theeffectiveyieldstrength,Vy,
correspondstothetotalappliedlateralforceattheintersectionofthetwolinesegments.Theeffective
yielddisplacement,y,correspondstothecontrolpointdisplacementattheintersectionofthetwoline
segments.Theeffectivefundamentalperiod,Te,ofthestructureinthedirectionunderconsiderationshall
bedeterminedusingEq.2.5.21asfollows:
Te = T1
V1 1
V y y (2.5.21)
whereV1,1,andT1aredeterminedforthefirstincrementoflateralload.
Thetargetdisplacementofthecontrolpoint,T,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
2
T
T = C 0 C1 S a e g
2
(2.5.22)
wherethespectralacceleration,Sa,isdeterminedattheeffectivefundamentalperiod,Te,usingEq.(2.5.4),
gistheaccelerationduetogravity.
ThecoefficientC0shallbecalculatedas:
104
Chapter2
C0 =
w
i =1
n
w
i =1
2
i
(2.5.23)
where:
wi=theportionoftheseismicweight,W,atleveli,and
i=theamplitudeoftheshapevectoratleveli.
Wheretheeffectivefundamentalperiod,Te,isgreaterthanTC(definedinSec.2.5.6.3),thecoefficientC1
shallbetakenas1.0.Otherwise,thevalueofthecoefficientC1shallbecalculatedasfollows:
C1 =
1
Rd
(Rd 1)Ts
1 +
Te
(2.5.24)
(2.5.25)
whereRdisgivenasfollows:
Rd =
Sa
Vy W
2.5.14.4 STRUCTUREMEMBERDESIGN(NSA)
Foreachnonlinearstaticanalysisthedesignresponseparameters,includingtheindividualmemberforces
andmemberdeformationsshallbetakenasthevaluesobtainedfromtheanalysisatthestepatwhichthe
targetdisplacementisreached.
Theadequacyofindividualmembersandtheirconnectionstowithstandthememberforcesandmember
deformations shall be evaluated based on laboratory test data for similar components. The effects of
gravity and other loads on member deformation capacity shall be considered in these evaluations. The
deformationofamembersupportinggravityloadsshallnotexceed(i)twothirdsofthedeformationthat
results in loss of ability to support gravity loads, and (ii) twothirds of the deformation at which the
memberstrengthhasdeterioratedtolessthan70%ofthepeakstrengthofthecomponentmodel.The
deformationofamembernotrequiredforgravityloadsupportshallnotexceedtwothirdsofthevalueat
whichmemberstrengthhasdeterioratedtolessthan70%ofthepeakstrengthofthecomponentmodel.
2.5.14.5 DESIGNREVIEW(NSA)
Checkingofthedesignbycompetentthirdpartyisrecommended.Anindependentteamcomposedofat
least two members with experience in seismic analysis methods and the theory and application of
nonlinearseismicanalysisandstructuralbehaviorunderearthquakeloading,shallperformareviewofthe
designoftheseismicforceresistingsystemandthesupportingstructuralanalyses.Thedesignreviewshall
include(i)reviewofanysitespecificseismiccriteria(ifdeveloped)employedintheanalysis(ii)reviewof
thedeterminationofthetargetdisplacementandeffectiveyieldstrengthofthestructure(iii)reviewof
adequacyofstructuralelementsandsystemstowithstandthecalculatedforceanddeformationdemands,
togetherwithlaboratoryandotherdata(iv)reviewofstructuraldesign.
105
Part6
2.5.15
EARTHQUAKELOADCOMBINATIONS
2.5.15.1 HORIZONTALEARTHQUAKELOADING
Thedirectionsofapplicationofseismicforcesfordesignshallbethosewhichwillproducethemostcritical
loadeffects.Earthquakeforcesactinbothprincipaldirectionsofthebuildingsimultaneously.Inorderto
accountforthat,
(a) ForstructuresofSeismicDesignCategoryB,thedesignseismicforcesarepermittedtobeapplied
independently in each of two orthogonal directions and orthogonal interaction effects are
permittedtobeneglected
(b) StructuresofSeismicDesignCategoryCandDshall,asaminimum,conformtotherequirements
of (a) for Seismic Design Category B and in addition the requirements of this section. The
structure shall be designed for 100% of the seismic forces in one principal direction combined
with30%oftheseismicforcesintheorthogonaldirection.Possiblecombinationsare:
100% in x-direction 30% in y-direction or
30% in x-direction 100% in y-direction

Thecombinationwhichproducesmost unfavourableeffectfortheparticularactioneffectshall
be considered. This approach may be applied to equivalent static analysis, response spectrum
analysisandlineartimehistoryanalysisprocedure.
(c)
Wherethreedimensionalanalysisofaspatialstructuremodelisperformedasin3Dtimehistory
analysis,simultaneousapplicationofaccelerationsintwodirectionsshallbeconsideredwheretheground
motionsshallsatisfytheconditionsstatedinSections2.5.12.2or2.5.13.2.
2.5.15.2 VERTICALEARTHQUAKELOADING
Themaximumverticalgroundaccelerationshallbetakenas50%oftheexpectedhorizontalpeakground
acceleration(PGA).TheverticalseismicloadeffectEvmaybedeterminedas:
Ev=0.5(ah)D
(2.5.26)
where,
ah=expectedhorizontalpeakgroundacceleration(ing)fordesign=(2/3)ZS
D=effectofdeadload
2.5.15.3 COMBINATIONOFEARTHQUAKELOADINGWITHOTHERLOADINGS
Whenearthquakeeffectisincludedintheanalysisanddesignofabuildingorstructure,theprovisionsset
forth in section 2.7 shall be followed to combine earthquake load effects with other loading effects to
obtaindesignforcesetc.
106
Chapter2
2.5.16
DRIFTANDDEFORMATION
2.5.16.1 STOREYDRIFTLIMIT
The design storey drift () of each storey, as determined in Sections 2.5.9 (equivalent static analysis),
2.5.11(responsespectrumanalysis)or2.5.12(lineartimehistoryanalysis)shallnotexceedtheallowable
storeydrift(a)asobtainedfromTable2.5.9foranystory.
Forstructureswithsignificanttorsionaldeflections,themaximumdriftshallincludetorsionaleffects.For
structuresassignedtoSeismicDesignCategoryCorDhavingtorsionalirregularity,thedesignstoreydrift,
shallbecomputedasthelargestdifferenceofthedeflectionsalonganyoftheedgesofthestructureat
the top and bottom of the storey under consideration. For seismic forceresisting systems comprised
solelyofmomentframesinSeismicDesignCategoriesD,theallowablestoreydriftforsuchlinearelastic
analysisproceduresshallnotexceed a/whereistermedasastructuralredundancyfactor.Thevalue
ofredundancyfactormaybeconsideredas1.0withtheexceptionofstructureswithverylowlevelof
redundancywheremaybeconsideredas1.3.
Fornonlineartimehistoryanalysis(NTHA),thestoreydriftobtained(Section2.5.13)shallnotexceed1.25
timesthestoreydriftlimitspecifiedaboveforlinearelasticanalysisprocedures.
Table2.5.9AllowableStoreyDriftLimit(a)
Structure
Occupancy Category
I andII
III
Structures,otherthanmasonryshearwall
structures,4storiesorlesswithinteriorwalls,
partitions,ceilingsandexteriorwallsystemsthat
havebeendesignedtoaccommodatethestory
drifts.
Masonrycantilevershearwallstructures
Othermasonryshearwallstructures
Allotherstructures
IV
0.025hsx
0.020hsx
0.015hsx
0.010hsx
0.010hsx
0.010hsx
0.007hsx
0.020hsx
0.007hsx
0.015hsx
0.007hsx
0.010hsx
NOTES:
1. hsxisthestoryheightbelowLevelx.
2. Thereshallbenodriftlimitforsinglestorystructureswithinteriorwalls,partitions,ceilings,
andexteriorwallsystemsthathavebeendesignedtoaccommodatethestoreydrifts.
3. Structuresinwhichthebasicstructuralsystemconsistsofmasonryshearwallsdesignedas
verticalelementscantileveredfromtheirbaseorfoundationsupportwhichareso
constructedthatmomenttransferbetweenshearwalls(coupling)isnegligible.
4.
OccupancycategoriesaredefinedinTable1.2.1
2.5.16.2 DIAPHRAGMDEFLECTION
Thedeflectionintheplaneofthediaphragm,asdeterminedbyengineeringanalysis,shallnot
exceed the permissible deflection of the attached elements. Permissible deflection shall be
thatdeflectionthatwillpermittheattachedelementtomaintainitsstructuralintegrityunder
theindividualloadingandcontinuetosupporttheprescribedloads.
2.5.16.3 SEPARATIONBETWEENADJACENTSTRUCTURES
Buildings shallbe protected from earthquakeinduced pounding from adjacentstructuresor
between structurally independent units of the same building maintaining safe distance
betweensuchstructuresasfollows:
107
Part6
(i)
forbuildings,orstructurallyindependentunits,thatdonotbelongtothesameproperty,
the distance from the property line to the potential points of impact shall not be less
than the computed maximumhorizontal displacement (Section 2.5.9.7) of the building
atthecorrespondinglevel.
(ii) for buildings, or structurally independent units, belonging to the same property, if the
distancebetweenthemisnotlessthanthesquarerootofthesumofthesquares(SRSS)
of the computed maximum horizontal displacements (Section 2.5.9.7) of the two
buildingsorunitsatthecorrespondinglevel.
(iii) Ifthefloorelevationsofthebuildingorindependentunitunderdesignarethesameas
those of the adjacent building or unit, the above referred minimum distance may be
reducedbyafactorof0.7
2.5.16.4 SPECIAL DEFORMATION REQUIREMENT FOR SEISMIC DESIGN

CATEGORYD
For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, every structural component not included in the
seismicforceresistingsysteminthedirectionunderconsiderationshallbedesignedtobeadequatefor
thegravityloadeffectsandtheseismicforcesresultingfromdisplacementtothedesignstorydrift()as
determinedinaccordancewithSection2.5.9.7.Evenwhereelementsofthestructurearenotintendedto
resist seismic forces, their protection may be important. Where determining the moments and shears
inducedincomponentsthatarenotincludedintheseismicforceresistingsysteminthedirectionunder
consideration, the stiffening effects of adjoining rigid structural and nonstructural elements shall be
consideredandarationalvalueofmemberandrestraintstiffnessshallbeused.
2.5.17
SEISMICDESIGNFORNONSTRUCTURALCOMPONENTS
This section establishes minimum design criteria for nonstructural components that are permanently
attachedtostructuresandfortheirsupportsandattachments.
Thefollowingcomponentsareexemptfromtherequirementsofthissection.
1.ArchitecturalcomponentsinSeismicDesignCategoryB,otherthanparapetssupportedby
bearingwallsorshearwalls,wherethecomponentimportancefactor,Ic,isequalto1.0.
2.MechanicalandelectricalcomponentsinSeismicDesignCategoryB.
3. MechanicalandelectricalcomponentsinSeismicDesignCategoryCwheretheimportance
factor,Ic,isequalto1.0.
4. MechanicalandelectricalcomponentsinSeismicDesignCategoryDwherethecomponent
importance factor, Ic, is equal to 1.0 and either (a) flexible connections between the
components and associated ductwork, piping, and conduit are provided, or (b)
componentsaremountedat1.2morlessaboveafloorlevelandweigh1780Norless.
5. Mechanical and electrical components in Seismic Design Category C or D where the
componentimportancefactor,Ic,isequalto1.0and(a)flexibleconnectionsbetweenthe
components and associated ductwork, piping, and conduit are provided, and (b) the
componentsweigh95Norlessor,fordistributionsystems,whichweigh7N/morless.
108
Chapter2
Where the individual weight of supported components and nonbuilding structures with periods greater
than0.06secondsexceeds25%ofthetotalseismicweightW,thestructureshallbedesignedconsidering
interactioneffectsbetweenthestructureandthesupportedcomponents.
Testingshallbepermittedtobeusedinlieuofanalysismethodsoutlinedinthischaptertodeterminethe
seismiccapacityofcomponentsandtheirsupportsandattachments.
2.5.17.1 COMPONENTIMPORTANCEFACTOR
Allcomponentsshallbeassignedacomponentimportancefactor.Thecomponentimportancefactor,Ic,
shallbetakenas1.5ifanyofthefollowingconditionsapply:
1.Thecomponentisrequiredtofunctionafteranearthquake,
2.Thecomponentcontainshazardousmaterials,or
3.ThecomponentisinorattachedtoaoccupancycategoryIVbuildinganditisneededfor
continuedoperationofthefacility.
Allothercomponentsshallbeassignedacomponentimportancefactor,Ic,equalto1.0.
2.5.17.2 COMPONENTFORCETRANSFER
Components shall be attached such that the component forces are transferred to the structure.
Componentattachmentsthatareintendedtoresistseismicforcesshallbebolted,welded,orotherwise
positively fastened without consideration of frictional resistance produced by the effects of gravity. A
continuous load path of sufficient strength and stiffness between the component and the supporting
structureshallbeverified.Localelementsofthesupportingstructureshallbedesignedforthecomponent
forces where such forces control the design of the elements or their connections. In this instance, the
component forces shallbe thosedetermined inSection 2.5.17.3, exceptthat modifications to Fp and Rp
due to anchorage conditions need not be considered. The design documents shall include sufficient
informationconcerningtheattachmentstoverifycompliancewiththerequirementsoftheseProvisions.
2.5.17.3 SEISMICDESIGNFORCE
The seismic design force, Fc, applied in the horizontal direction shall be centered at the components
centerofgravityanddistributedrelativetothecomponent'smassdistributionandshallbedeterminedas
follows:
Fc =
c a hW c I c
Rc
z
1 + 2
h
(2.5.27)
Where,
0.75WcIcFc1.5WcIc
c=componentamplificationfactorwhichvariesfrom1.0to2.5(Table2.5.10orTable2.5.11).
ah=expectedhorizontalpeakgroundacceleration(ing)fordesign=2/3*Z*S
Wc=weightofcomponent
Rc=componentresponsereductionfactorwhichvariesfrom1.0to12.0(Table2.5.10orTable2.5.11)
109
Part6
z=heightabovethebaseofthepointofattachmentofthecomponent,butzshallnotbetakenlessthan
0andthevalueofz/hneednotexceed1.0
h=roofheightofstructureabovethebase
TheforceFcshallbeindependentlyappliedinatleasttwoorthogonalhorizontaldirectionsincombination
withserviceloadsassociatedwiththecomponent.Inaddition,thecomponentshallalsobedesignedfora
concurrentverticalforceof0.5ahWc.
Where nonseismic loads on nonstructural components exceed Fc, such loads shall govern the strength
design,buttheseismicdetailingrequirementsandlimitationsshallapply.
2.5.17.4 SEISMICRELATIVEDISPLACEMENTS
Therelativeseismicdisplacement,Dc,fortwoconnectionpointsonthesamestructureA,oneataheight
hxandotheratheighthy,foruseincomponentdesignshallbedeterminedasfollows:
Dc = xA yA
(2.5.28)
(2.5.29)
DcshallnotexceedDcmaxgivenby:
Dc max =
(h
h y ) aA
hsx
where,
xA=DeflectionatlevelxofstructureA
yA=DeflectionatlevelyofstructureA
aA=AllowablestorydriftforstructureA
hx=Height(abovebase)oflevelxtowhichupperconnectionpointisattached.
hy=Height(abovebase)oflevelytowhichlowerconnectionpointisattached.
hsx=Storyheightusedinthedefinitionoftheallowabledrifta
Fortwoconnectionpointsonseparatestructures,AandB,orseparatestructuralsystems,oneatlevelx
andtheotheratlevely,Dcshallbedeterminedasfollows:
Dc = xA + yB
(2.5.30)
DcshallnotexceedDcmaxgivenby:
Dc max =
X aA Y aB
+
hsx
hsx
(2.5.31)
Where,
yB=DeflectionatlevelyofstructureB
aB=AllowablestorydriftforstructureB
The effects of relative seismic relative displacements shall be considered in combination with
displacementscausedbyotherloadsasappropriate.
110
Chapter2
Table2.5.10CoefficientscandRcforArchitecturalComponents
ArchitecturalComponentorElement
c a
Rc
InteriorNonstructuralWallsand Partitions
Plain(unreinforced)masonrywalls
Allotherwallsandpartitions
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
CantileverElements(Unbracedor braced to structural frame below itscenter of mass)

Parapetsandcantileverinteriornonstructuralwalls
2.5
Chimneysandstackswherelaterallybracedorsupportedbythestructuralframe
2.5
CantileverElements(Bracedtostructuralframeaboveitscenterofmass)Parapets
ChimneysandStacks
ExteriorNonstructuralWalls
1.0
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
ExteriorNonstructuralWallElementsandConnections
WallElement
Bodyofwallpanelconnections
F
t
f th
ti
t
Veneer
1.0
1.0
2.5
2.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
1.5
2.5
3.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1.0
3.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
1.5
2.5
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1.5
a Alowervalueforcispermittedwherejustifiedbydetaileddynamicanalysis.Thevalueforcshall
not be less than 1.0. The value of c equal to 1.0 is for rigid components and rigidly attached
components.Thevalueofcequalto2.5isforflexiblecomponentsandflexiblyattachdcomponents.
Limiteddeformabilityelementsandattachments
Lowdeformabilityelementsandattachments
Penthouses(exceptwhereframedbyanextensionofthebuildingframe)
Ceilings
All
Cabinets
Storagecabinetsandlaboratoryequipment
AccessFloors
Specialaccessfloors
Allother
AppendagesandOrnamentations
SignsandBillboards
OtherRigidComponents
Highdeformabilityelementsandattachments
Lowdeformabilitymaterialsandattachments
OtherFlexibleComponents
Highdeformabilityelementsandattachments
Lowdeformabilitymaterialsandattachments
111
Part6
Table2.5.11CoefficientscandRcforMechanicalandElectricalComponents
MechanicalandElectricalComponents
c a Rc
AirsideHVAC,fans,airhandlers,airconditioningunits,cabinetheaters,air
distributionboxes,andothermechanicalcomponentsconstructedofsheetmetal
fWetsideHVAC,boilers,furnaces,atmospherictanksandbins,chillers,waterheaters,
i
2.5
6.0
1.0
2.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
1.0
2.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
6.0
2.5
3.0
2.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.5
12.0
6.0
2.5
9.0
2.5
4.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
9.0
6.0
2.5
1.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
2.5
3.0
6.0
heatexchangers,evaporators,airseparators,manufacturingorprocessequipment,
Engines,turbines,pumps,compressors, and pressure vessels not supported on skirts
Skirtsupportedpressurevessels
Elevatorandescalatorcomponents.
Generators,batteries,inverters,motors,transformers,andotherelectricalcomponents
Motorcontrolcenters,panelboards,switchgear,instrumentationcabinets,andother
Communicationequipment,computers, instrumentation, and controls.
Roofmountedchimneys,stacks,coolingandelectricaltowerslaterallybracedbelow
Roofmounted chimneys,stacks, cooling and electrical towers laterally braced above
Lightingfixtures.
Othermechanicalorelectricalcomponents.
VIBRATION ISOLATED COMPONENTS AND SYSTEMSb
Componentsandsystemsisolatedusingneopreneelementsandneopreneisolated
floorswithbuiltinorseparateelastomeric snubbing devicesor resilient perimeter
Springisolatedcomponentsand systems and vibration isolated floors closely
restrainedusingbuiltinorseparate elastomeric snubbing devicesor resilient
Internallyisolatedcomponentsand systems.
Suspendedvibrationisolatedequipmentincludinginlineductdevicesandsuspended
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
PipinginaccordancewithASME B31, including inline components with joints made
PipinginaccordancewithASMEB31,includinginlinecomponents,constructedof
highorlimiteddeformabilitymaterials, with joints madeby threading, bonding,
PipingandtubingnotinaccordancewithASMEB31,includinginlinecomponents,
constructedofhighdeformability materials, with jointsmade by welding or brazing.
Pipingandtubingnotinaccordance with ASME B31, including inline components,
constructedofhighorlimiteddeformability materials,with joints made by threading,
Pipingandtubingconstructedoflowdeformabilitymaterials,suchascastiron,glass,
Ductwork,includinginlinecomponents,constructedofhighdeformabilitymaterials,
Ductwork,includinginlinecomponents, constructed of high or limiteddeformability
materialswith jointsmadebymeans other than weldingor brazing.
Ductwork,includinginlinecomponents,constructedoflowdeformabilitymaterials,
Electricalconduit,busducts,rigidly mounted cable trays, and plumbing.
Manufacturingorprocessconveyors(nonpersonnel).
Suspendedcabletrays.
a
A lower value for c is permitted where justified by detailed dynamic analysis. The value for c shall not be less than
1.0. The value of c equal to 1.0 is for rigid components and rigidly attached components. The value of c equal to 2.5 is
for flexible components and flexibly attached components.
b
Components mounted on vibration isolators shall have a bumper restraint or snubber in each horizontal direction. The
design force shall be taken as 2Fc if the nominal clearance (air gap) between the equipment support frame and restraint is
greater than 6 mm. If the nominal clearance specified on the construction documents is not greater than 6 mm, the design
force may be taken as Fc.
112
Chapter2
2.5.18
DESIGNFORSEISMICALLYISOLATEDBUILDINGS
Buildings that use special seismic isolation systems for protection against earthquakes shall be called
seismically isolated or base isolated buildings. Seismically isolated structure and every portion thereof
shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of provisions presented in this
section.
2.5.18.1 GENERALREQUIREMENTSFORISOLATIONSYSTEM
Theisolationsystemtobeusedinseismicallyisolatedstructuresshallsatisfythefollowingrequirements:
1.
Designofisolationsystemshallconsidervariationsinseismicisolatormaterialproperties
over the projected life of structure including changes due to ageing, contamination,
exposuretomoisture,loadings,temperature,creep,fatigue,etc.
2.
Isolatedstructuresshallresistdesignwindloadsatalllevelsabovetheisolationinterface.
At the isolation interface, a wind restraint system shall be provided to limit lateral
displacementintheisolationsystemtoavalueequaltothatrequiredbetweenfloorsof
thestructureabovetheisolationinterface.
3.
The fire resistance rating for the isolation system shall be consistent with the
requirementsofcolumns,walls,orothersuchelementsinthesameareaofthestructure.
4.
Theisolationsystemshallbeconfiguredtoproducealateralrestoringforcesuchthatthe
lateralforceatthetotaldesigndisplacementisatleast0.025Wgreaterthanthelateral
forceat50%ofthetotaldesigndisplacement.
5.
Theisolationsystemshallnotbeconfiguredtoincludeadisplacementrestraintthatlimits
lateral displacement due to the maximum considered earthquake to less than the total
maximum displacement unless it is demonstrated by analysis that such engagement of
restraintdoesnotresultinunsatisfactoryperformanceofthestructure.
6.
Each element of the isolation system shall be designed to be stable under the design
vertical load when subjected to a horizontal displacement equal to the total maximum
displacement.
7.
The factor of safety against global structural overturning at the isolation interface shall
not be less than 1.0 for required load combinations. All gravity and seismic loading
conditionsshallbeinvestigated.Seismicforcesforoverturningcalculationsshallbebased
onthemaximumconsideredearthquakeandtheverticalrestoringforceshallbebasedon
theseismicweightabovetheisolationinterface.
8.
Localupliftofindividualunitsofisolationsystemispermittediftheresultingdeflections
do not cause overstress or instability of the isolator units or other elements of the
structure.
9.
Accessforinspectionandreplacementofallcomponentsoftheisolationsystemshallbe
provided.
10. Thedesigneroftheisolationsystemshallestablishaqualitycontroltestingprogramfor
isolatorunits.Eachisolatorunitbeforeinstallationshallbetestedunderspecifiedvertical
andhorizontalloads.
113
Part6
11. After completion of construction, a design professional shall complete a final series of
inspectionsorobservationsofstructureseparationareasandcomponentsthatcrossthe
isolation interface. Such inspections and observations shall confirm that existing
conditionsallowfreeandunhindereddisplacementofthestructuretomaximumdesign
levels and that all components that cross the isolation interface as installed are ableto
accommodatethestipulateddisplacements.
12. Thedesigneroftheisolationsystemshallestablishaperiodicmonitoring,inspection,and
maintenanceprogramforsuchsystem.
13. Remodeling,repair,orretrofittingattheisolationinterface,includingthatofcomponents
that cross the isolation interface, shall be performed under the direction of a design
professionalexperiencedinseismicisolationsystems.
2.5.18.2 EQUIVALENTSTATICANALYSIS
The equivalent static analysis procedure is permitted to be used for design of a seismically isolated
structureprovidedthat:
1.ThestructureislocatedonSiteClassSA,SB,SC,SDorSEsite;
2.Thestructureabovetheisolationinterfaceisnotmorethanfourstoriesor20minheight
4.Theeffectiveperiodoftheisolatedstructureatthemaximumdisplacement,TM,islessthanorequalto
3.0sec.
5.Theeffectiveperiodoftheisolatedstructureatthedesigndisplacement,TD,isgreaterthanthreetimes
theelastic,fixedbaseperiodofthestructureabovetheisolationsystemasdeterminedinSec.2.5.9.2
6.Thestructureabovetheisolationsystemisofregularconfiguration;and
7.Theisolationsystemmeetsallofthefollowingcriteria:
a.Theeffectivestiffnessoftheisolationsystematthedesigndisplacementisgreaterthanonethirdofthe
effectivestiffnessat20%ofthedesigndisplacement,
b.TheisolationsystemiscapableofproducingarestoringforceasspecifiedinSec.2.5.18.1,
c.Theisolationsystemdoesnotlimitmaximumconsideredearthquakedisplacementtolessthanthetotal
maximumdisplacement.
Where the equivalent lateral force procedure is used to design seismically isolated structures, the
requirementsofthissectionshallapply.
2.5.18.2.1 DisplacementofIsolationSystem
Theisolationsystemshallbedesignedandconstructedtowithstandminimumlateralearthquake
displacementsthatactinthedirectionofeachofthemainhorizontalaxesofthestructureand
suchdisplacementsshallbecalculatedasfollows:
DD =
Sa g
4 2
T D2
B
D
(2.5.32)
where,
114
Chapter2
Sa= Design spectral acceleration (in units of g), calculated using Eq.(2.5.4) for period TD and
assumingR=1,I=1,=1(Section2.5.6.3)forthedesignbasisearthquake(DBE).
g= accelerationduetogravity
BD= damping coefficient related to the effective damping D of the isolation system at the
designdisplacement,assetforthinTable2.5.12.
TD=effectiveperiodofseismicallyisolatedstructureatthedesigndisplacementinthedirection
underconsideration,asprescribedbyEq.2.5.33:
TD = 2
k D min g
(2.5.33)
where,
W=seismicweightabovetheisolationinterface
kDmin = minimum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design displacement in the
horizontaldirectionunderconsideration.
Table2.5.12DampingCoefficient,BD orBM
EffectiveDamping,DorM
BDorBM
a,b
(%)
2
5
10
20
30
40
50
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.7
1.9
2.0
The damping coefficient shall be based on the effective

damping of the isolation system
b
The damping coefficient shall be based on linear interpolation

for effective damping values other than those given.
The maximum displacement of the isolation system, DM, in the most critical direction of horizontal
responseshallbecalculatedinaccordancewiththefollowingformula:
DM =
S aM g TM2
4 2 B M
(2.5.34)
where:
SaM= Maximum spectral acceleration (in units of g), calculated using Eq.(2.5.4) for period TD and
assumingR=1,I=1,=1(Section2.5.6.3)forthemaximumconsideredearthquake(MCE).
BM= numericalcoefficientrelatedtotheeffectivedampingMoftheisolationsystematthemaximum
displacement,assetforthinTable2.5.12
TM= effectiveperiodofseismicisolatedstructureatthemaximumdisplacementinthedirectionunder
considerationasprescribedby:
115
Part6
T M = 2
W
k M min g
(2.5.35)
where,
kMmin=minimumeffectivestiffnessoftheisolationsystematthemaximumdisplacementinthehorizontal
Thetotaldesigndisplacement,DTD,andthetotalmaximumdisplacement,DTM,ofelementsoftheisolation
systemshallincludeadditionaldisplacementduetoinherentandaccidentaltorsioncalculatedconsidering
the spatial distribution of the lateral stiffness of the isolation system and the most disadvantageous
locationofeccentricmass.
2.5.18.2.2 LateralSeismicforces
The structure above the isolation system shall be designed and constructed to withstand a minimum
lateralforce,Vs,usingalloftheappropriateprovisionsforanonisolatedstructure.Theimportancefactor
forallisolatedstructuresshallbeconsideredas1.0,alsotheresponsereductionfactorRIconsideredhere
(forcomputingdesignseismicforces)isintherangeof1.0to2.0.Vsshallbedeterminedinaccordance
withEq.2.5.36asfollows:
Vs =
k D max D D
RI
(2.5.36)
where:
kDmax=maximumeffectivestiffnessoftheisolationsystematthedesigndisplacementinthehorizontal
DD= design displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction under
considerationasprescribedbyEq.2.5.32.
RI= responsereductionfactorrelatedtothetypeofseismicforceresistingsystemabovetheisolation
system.RIshallbebasedonthetypeofseismicforceresistingsystemusedforthestructureabove
theisolationsystemandshallbetakenasthelesserof3/8*R(Table2.5.7)or2.0,butneednotbe
takenlessthan1.0.
InnocaseshallVsbetakenlessthanthefollowing:
1.ThelateralforcerequiredbySection2.5.9forafixedbasestructureofthesameweight,W,anda
periodequaltotheisolatedperiod,TD;
2.Thebaseshearcorrespondingtothefactoreddesignwindload;and
3.Thelateralforcerequiredtofullyactivatetheisolationsystem(e.g.,theyieldlevelofasoftening
system,theultimatecapacityofasacrificialwindrestraintsystem,orthebreakawayfrictionlevelof
aslidingsystem)multipliedby1.5.
Theisolationsystem,thefoundation,andallstructuralelementsbelowtheisolationsystemshallbe
designed and constructed to withstand a minimum lateral force, Vb, using all of the appropriate
provisions for a nonisolated structure. Vb shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 2.5.37 as
follows:
116
Chapter2
Vb=kDmaxDD
(2.5.37)
In all cases, Vb shall not be taken less than the maximum force in the isolation system at any
displacementuptoandincludingthedesigndisplacement.
2.5.18.2.3 VerticalDistributionofLateralForces
Thetotallateralforceshallbedistributedovertheheightofthestructureabovetheisolationinterfacein
accordancewithEq.2.5.38asfollows:
Fx = V s
w x hx
n
w h
i =1
(2.5.38)
where:
Vs=totalseismiclateraldesignforceonelementsabovetheisolationsystem.
hi,hx=heightabovethebase,toLeveliorLevelx,respectively.
wi,wx=portionofWthatislocatedatorassignedtoLeveliorLevelx,respectively.
At each Level x the force, Fx, shall be applied over the area of the structure in accordance with the
distributionofmassatthelevel.Stressesineachstructuralelementshallbedeterminedbyapplyingtoan
analyticalmodelthelateralforces,Fx,atalllevelsabovethebase.
2.5.18.2.4 StoreyDrift
ThestoreydriftshallbecalculatedasinSection2.5.9.7exceptthatCdfortheisolatedstructureshallbe
takenequaltoRIandimportancefactorequalto1.0.Themaximumstoreydriftofthestructureabovethe
isolationsystemshallnotexceed0.015hsx.
2.5.18.3 DYNAMICANALYSIS
Responsespectrumanalysismaybeconductedifthebehavioroftheisolationsystemcanbeconsidered
asequivalentlinear.Otherwise,nonlineartimehistoryanalysisshallbeusedwherethetruenonlinear
behaviour of the isolation system can be modeled. The mathematical models of the isolated structure
includingtheisolationsystemshallbealongguidelinesgiveninSections2.5.11.1and2.5.13.1,andother
requirementsgiveninSection2.5.18.
The isolation system shall be modeled using deformational characteristics developed and verified by
testing.Thestructuremodelshallaccountfor:(i)spatialdistributionofisolatorunits;(ii)considerationof
translation in both horizontal directions, and torsion of the structure above the isolation interface
considering the most disadvantageous location of eccentric mass; (iii) overturning/uplift forces on
individualisolatorunits;and(iv)effectsofverticalload,bilateralload,andtherateofloadingiftheforce
deflectionpropertiesoftheisolationsystemaredependentonsuchattributes.
A linear elastic model of the isolated structure (above isolation system) may be used provided that: (i)
stiffness properties assumed for the nonlinear components of the isolation system are based on the
maximum effective stiffness of the isolation system, and (ii) all elements of the seismicforceresisting
systemofthestructureabovetheisolationsystembehavelinearly.
117
Part6
2.5.18.3.1 ResponseSpectrumAnalysis
Responsespectrumanalysisshallbeperformedusingamodaldampingvalueforthefundamentalmode
inthedirectionofinterestnotgreaterthantheeffectivedampingoftheisolationsystemor30percentof
critical,whicheverisless.Modaldampingvaluesforhighermodesshallbeselectedconsistentwiththose
that would be appropriate for response spectrum analysis of the structure above the isolation system
assumingafixedbase.
Response spectrum analysis used to determine the total design displacement and the total maximum
displacementshallincludesimultaneousexcitationofthemodelby100percentofthegroundmotionin
thecriticaldirectionand30percentofthegroundmotionintheperpendicular,horizontaldirection.The
design basis earthquake shall be used for the design displacement, while the maximum considered
earthquake shall be used for the maximum displacement. The maximum displacement of the isolation
systemshallbecalculatedasthevectorialsumofthetwoorthogonaldisplacements.
Forthedesigndisplacement,structuresthatdonotrequiresitespecificgroundmotionevaluation,shall
be analyzed using the design acceleration response spectrum in accordance with Section 2.5.6.3. The
maximumdesignspectrumtobeusedforthemaximumconsideredearthquakeshallnotbelessthan1.5
timesthedesignaccelerationresponsespectrum.
The response spectrum procedure is based on an equivalent linear model, where the effective stiffness
andeffectivedampingisafunctionofthedisplacement,thisformulationisthusaniterativeprocess.The
effective stiffness must be estimated, based on assumed displacement, and then adjusted till obtained
displacementagreewithassumeddisplacement.
Thedesignshearatanystoryshallnotbelessthanthestoryshearresultingfromapplicationofthestory
forcescalculatedusingEq.2.5.38withavalueofVsequaltothebaseshearobtainedfromtheresponse
spectrumanalysisinthedirectionofinterest.
2.5.18.3.2 NonlinearTimeHistoryAnalysis
Whereatimehistoryanalysisprocedureisperformed,notfewerthanthreeappropriategroundmotions
shallbeusedintheanalysisasdescribedbelow.
Groundmotionsshallconsistofpairsofappropriatehorizontalgroundmotionaccelerationcomponents
that shall be selected and scaled from individual recorded events. Appropriate ground motions shall be
selectedfromeventshavingmagnitudes,faultdistance,andsourcemechanismsthatareconsistentwith
thosethatcontrolthemaximumconsideredearthquake.Ifrequirednumberofrecordedgroundmotion
pairs are not available, appropriate simulated ground motion pairs shall be used to make up the total
numberrequired.Foreachpairofhorizontalgroundmotioncomponents,asquarerootofthesumofthe
squares (SRSS) spectrum shall be constructed by taking the SRSS of the 5 percent damped response
spectra for the scaled components (where an identical scale factor is applied to both components of a
pair).Eachpairofmotionsshallbescaledsuchthatforeachperiodbetween0.5TDand1.25TM(whereTD
andTMaredefinedinSection2.5.18.2.1)theaverageoftheSRSSspectrafromallhorizontalcomponent
pairsdoesnotfallbelow1.3timesthecorrespondingordinateofthedesignresponsespectrum(Section
2.5.18.4),bymorethan10percent.
Each pair of ground motion components shall be applied simultaneously to the model considering the
most disadvantageous location of eccentric mass. The maximum displacement of the isolation system
shallbecalculatedfromthevectorialsumofthetwoorthogonaldisplacementsateachtimestep.
118
Chapter2
Theparametersofinterestshallbecalculatedforeachgroundmotionusedforthetimehistoryanalysis.If
atleastsevengroundmotionsareusedforthetimehistoryanalysis,theaveragevalueoftheresponse
parameterofinterestispermittedtobeusedfordesign.Iffewerthansevengroundmotionsareanalyzed,
themaximumvalueoftheresponseparameterofinterestshallbeusedfordesign.
2.5.18.3.3 StoreyDrift
Maximum story drift corresponding to the design lateral force including displacement due to vertical
deformationoftheisolationsystemshallnotexceedthefollowinglimits:
1.Themaximumstorydriftofthestructureabovetheisolationsystemcalculatedbyresponsespectrum
analysisshallnotexceed0.015hsx.
2. The maximum story drift of the structure above the isolation system calculated by nonlinear time
historyanalysisshallnotexceed0.020hsx.
ThestoreydriftshallbecalculatedasinSection2.5.9.7exceptthatCdfortheisolatedstructureshallbe
takenequaltoRIandimportancefactorequalto1.0.
2.5.18.4 TESTING
The deformation characteristics and damping values of the isolation system used in the design and
analysisofseismicallyisolatedstructuresshallbebasedontestresultsofisolatorunits.Thetestsarefor
establishing and validating the design properties of the isolation system and shall not be considered as
satisfyingthemanufacturingqualitycontroltests.
Thefollowingsequenceoftestsshallbeperformedonisolatorunitsfortheprescribednumberofcyclesat
averticalloadequaltotheaveragedeadloadplusonehalftheeffectsduetoliveloadonallisolatorunits
ofacommontypeandsize:
1.Twentyfullyreversedcyclesofloadingatalateralforcecorrespondingtothewinddesignforce.
2. Three fully reversed cycles of loading at each of the following increments of the total design
displacement0.25DD,0.5DD,1.0DD,and1.0DMwhereDDandDMareasdeterminedinSections2.5.18.2.1.
3.Threefullyreversedcyclesofloadingatthetotalmaximumdisplacement,1.0DTM.
4.Notlessthantenfullyreversedcyclesofloadingat1.0timesthetotaldesigndisplacement,1.0DTD.
For each cycle of each test, the forcedeflection and hysteretic behavior of each isolator unit shall be
recorded.Theeffectivestiffnessisobtainedasthesecantvalueofstiffnessatdesigndisplacementwhile
theeffectivedampingisdeterminedfromtheareaofhystereticloopatthedesigndisplacement.
2.5.18.5 DESIGNREVIEW
Adesignreviewoftheisolationsystemandrelatedtestprogramsshallbeperformedbyanindependent
team of design professionals experienced in seismic analysis methods and the application of seismic
isolation.Isolationsystemdesignreviewshallinclude,butneednotbelimitedto,thefollowing:
1. Review of sitespecific seismic criteria including the development of sitespecific spectra and ground
motiontimehistoriesandallotherdesigncriteriadevelopedspecificallyfortheproject;
2.Reviewofthepreliminarydesign includingthedeterminationofthe totaldesigndisplacementofthe
isolationsystemandthelateralforcedesignlevel;
119
Part6
3.Overviewandobservationofprototype(isolatorunit)testing
4.Reviewofthefinaldesignoftheentirestructuralsystemandallsupportinganalyses;and
5.Reviewoftheisolationsystemqualitycontroltestingprogram.
2.5.19
BUILDINGSWITHSOFTSTOREY
Buildings with possible soft storey action at ground level for providing open parking spaces belong to
structures with major vertical irregularity (Fig.2.5.5a). Special arrangement is needed to increase the
lateralstrengthandstiffnessofthesoft/openstorey.Thefollowingtwoapproachesmaybeconsidered:
1.
Dynamic analysis of such building may be carried out incorporating the strength and
stiffness ofinfill walls and inelastic deformations in the members, particularly thosein
thesoftstorey,andthemembersdesignedaccordingly.
2.
Alternatively, the following design criteria are to be adopted after carrying out the
earthquake analysis, neglecting the effect of infill walls in other storeys. Structural
elements(e.gcolumnsandbeams)ofthesoftstoreyaretobedesignedfor2.5timesthe
storey shears and moments calculated under seismic loads neglecting effect of infill
walls. Shear walls placed symmetrically in both directions of the building as far away
fromthecentreofthebuildingasfeasiblearetobedesignedexclusivelyfor1.5times
thelateralshearforcecalculatedbefore.
2.5.20
NONBUILDINGSTRUCTURES
Calculation of seismic design forces on nonbuilding structures (e.g. chimney, self supported overhead
water/fluid tank, silo, trussed tower, storage tank, cooling tower, monument and other structures not
covered in the preceding part of Section 2.5) shall be in accordance with "Chapter 15: Seismic Design
RequirementsforNonBuildingStructures,MinimumDesignLoadsforBuildingsandOtherStructures,ASCE
StandardASCE/SEI705"complyingwiththerequirementsofSection2.5ofthisCode.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUSLOADS
2.6.1
GENERAL
Theproceduresandlimitationsforthedeterminationofselectedmiscellaneousloadsareprovidedinthis
section.Loadsthatarenotspecifiedinthissectionorelsewhereinthischapter,maybedeterminedbased
oninformationfromreliablereferencesorspecialistadvicemaybesought.
2.6.2
DEFINITIONS
Thefollowingdefinitionsandnotationshallapplytotheprovisionsofthissectiononly.
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES: Buildings and structures which are necessary to remain functional during an
emergencyorapostdisasterperiod.
RATIONALANALYSIS:Ananalysisbasedonestablishedmethodsortheoriesusingmathematicalformulae
andactualorappropriatelyassumeddata.
SITESPECIFICDATA:Dataobtainedeitherfrommeasurementstakenatasiteorfromsubstantiatedfield
informationrequiredspecificallyforthestructureconcerned.
120
Chapter2
2.6.3
RAINLOADS
Rainloadsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththefollowingprovisions.
2.6.3.1
BLOCKEDDRAINS
Eachportionofaroofshallbedesignedtosustaintheloadfromallrainwaterthatcouldbeaccumulated
onitiftheprimarydrainagesystemforthatportionisundersizedorblocked.Pondinginstabilityshallbe
consideredinthissituation.
2.6.3.2
CONTROLLEDDRAINAGE
Roofs equipped with controlled drainage provisions shall be designed to sustain all rainwater loads on
them to the elevation of the secondary drainage system plus 0.25 kN/m2. Ponding instability shall be
consideredinthissituation.
2.6.4
LOADSDUETOFLOODANDSURGE
For the determinationof flood andsurge loads on a structural member, consideration shall be givento
bothhydrostaticandhydrodynamiceffects.Requiredloadingshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththe
established principles of mechanics based on site specific criteria and in compliance with the following
provisionsofthissection.Foressentialfacilitieslikecycloneandfloodsheltersandforhazardousfacilities
specifiedinTable1.2.1,valuesofmaximumfloodelevation,surgeheight,windvelocitiesetc.,requiredfor
the determination of flood and surge load, shall be taken corresponding to 100year return period. For
structures other than essential and hazardous facilities, these values shall be based on 50year return
period.
2.6.4.1
FLOODLOADSONSTRUCTURESATINLANDAREAS:
Forstructures sitedatinlandareassubject toflood,loadsduetoflood shall bedeterminedconsidering

hydrostatic effects which shall be calculated based on the flood elevation of 50year return period. For
riversidestructuressuchasthatunderExposureCspecifiedinSec2.4.8.3,hydrodynamicforces,arising
duetoapproachingwindgeneratedwavesshallalsobedeterminedinadditiontothehydrostaticloadon
them.Inthiscase,theamplitudeofsuchwindinducedwaterwavesshallbeobtainedfromsitespecific
data.
2.6.4.2
FLOODANDSURGELOADSONSTRUCTURESATCOASTALAREAS:
For structures sited at coastal areas, the hydrostatic and hydrodynamic loads shall be determined as
follows:
2.6.4.2.1
HydrostaticLoads
Thehydrostaticloadsonstructuralelementsandfoundationsshallbedeterminedbasedonthemaximum
staticheightofwater,Hmproducedbyfloodsorsurgesasgivenbytherelation:
Hm=max(hs,hf)
(2.6.1)
where,hf=yTygand
(2.6.2)
hs
Maximumsurgeheightasspecifiedina(i)below.
121
Part6
yT
ElevationoftheextremesurfacewaterlevelcorrespondingtoaTyear
returnperiodspecifiedin(ii)below,metres
yg
Elevationofgroundlevelatsite,metres.
i)
Maximum Surge Height, hs : The maximum surge height, hs, associated with cyclones, shall be
thatcorrespondingtoa50yearora100yearreturnperiodasmaybeapplicable,basedonsitespecific
analysis.Intheabsenceofamorerigoroussitespecificanalysis,thefollowingrelationmaybeused:
hs=hT(x1)k
where,hT
(2.6.3)
designsurgeheightcorrespondingtoareturnperiodofTyearsatseacoast,in
metres,giveninTable2.6.1.
x
distanceofthestructuresitemeasuredfromthespringtidehighwaterlimitonthesea
coast,inkm;x=1,ifx<1.
k
rate of decrease in surge height in m/km; the value of k may be taken as 1/2 for
ChittagongCox'sBazarTeknafcoastandas1/3forothercoastalareas.
ii)
ExtremeSurfaceWaterLevel,yT :Theelevationoftheextremesurfacewaterlevel,yT forasite,
which may not be associated with a cyclonic storm surge, shall be that obtained from a site specific
analysiscorrespondingtoa50yearora100yearreturnperiod.ValuesofyT aregiveninTable2.6.2for
selectedcoastallocationswhichmaybeusedintheabsenceofanysitespecificdata.
2.6.4.2.2
HydrodynamicLoads:
Thehydrodynamicloadappliedonastructuralelementduetowindinducedlocalwavesofwater,shallbe
determined by a rational analysis using an established method and based on site specific data. In the
absenceofasitespecificdatatheamplitudeofthelocalwave,tobeusedintherationalanalysis,shallbe
takenashw=hs/41m,where,hsisgiveninSec2.6.4.2.1.Suchforcesshallbecalculatedbasedon50
yearor100yearreturnperiodoffloodorsurge.Thecorrespondingwindvelocitiesshallbe260km/hor
289km/hrespectively.
2.6.4.3
BREAKAWAYWALLS
When nonstructural walls, partitions or other nonstructural elements located below the maximum flood or surge
elevation,arerequiredtobreakawayunderhightidesorwaveaction,suchnonstructuralelementsshallbedesigned
to sustain a maximum uniformly distributed load of 1.0 kN/m2 but not less than 0.5 kN/m2 applied on a vertical
projectionofthearea.
2.6.5
TEMPERATUREEFFECTS
Temperatureeffects,ifsignificant,shallbeconsideredinthedesignofstructuresorcomponentsthereof
inaccordancewiththeprovisionofthissection.
Indeterminingthetemperatureeffectsonastructure,thefollowingprovisionsshallbeconsidered:
a)
Thetemperaturesindicated,shallbetheairtemperatureintheshade.Therangeofthevariation
intemperatureforabuildingsiteshallbetakenintoconsideration.
122
Chapter2
Table2.6.1:DesignSurgeHeightsattheSeaCoast,hT*
CoastalRegion
SurgeHeightattheSeaCoast,hT(m)
T=50year(1)
T=100year(2)
TeknaftoCox'sBazar
ChakariatoAnwara,andMaheshkhaliKutubdiaIslands
ChittagongtoNoakhali
Sandwip,Hatiyaandallislandsinthisregion
BholatoBarguna
SarankholatoShyamnagar
4.5
7.1
7.9
7.9
6.2
5.3
5.8
8.6
9.6
9.6
7.7
6.4
*ValuespreparedfrominformationobtainedfromAnnexD3,MCSP.
Note:(1) Thesevaluesmaybeusedintheabsenceofsitespecificdataforstructuresotherthanessential
facilitieslistedinTable6.1.1.
(2) ThesevaluesmaybeusedintheabsenceofsitespecificdataforessentialfacilitieslistedinTable
1.2.1.
b)
Effects of the variation of temperature within the material of a structural element shall be
accountedforbyoneofthefollowingmethods.
i)
relievethestressesbyprovidingadequatenumbersofexpansionorcontraction
joints,
ii)
designthestructuralelementtosustainadditionalstressesduetotemperature
effects.
c)
whenthemethodb(ii)aboveisconsideredtobeapplicable,thestructuralanalysisshalltakeinto
accountthefollowing:
i)
the variation in temperature within the material of the structural element,

exposureconditionoftheelementandtherateatwhichthematerialabsorbor
radiateheat.
ii)
the warping or any other distortion caused due to temperature changes and
temperaturegradientinthestructuralelement.
d)
Whenitcanbedemonstratedbyestablishedprincipleofmechanicsorbyanyothermeansthat
neglectingsomeoralloftheeffectsoftemperature,doesnotaffectthesafetyandserviceabilityofthe
structure,thetemperatureeffectcanbeconsideredinsignificantandneednotbeconsideredindesign.
2.6.6
SOILANDHYDROSTATICPRESSURE
For structures or portions thereof, lying below ground level, loads due to soil and hydrostatic pressure
shallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthissectionandappliedinadditiontoallother
applicableloads.
123
Part6
Table2.6.2:ExtremeSurfaceWaterLevelsDuringMonsoonatSelectedLocationsoftheCoastalArea
abovePWDDatum,yT*
CoastalArea
Location
yT(m)
Thana
T=50years(1)
T=100
years(2)
Teknaf
Teknaf
2.33
2.44
Cox'sBazar
Cox'sBazar
3.84
3.88
Shaflapur
Moheshkhali
4.67
4.87
Lemsikhali
Kutubdia
4.95
5.19
Banigram
Patiya
5.05
5.24
Chittagong
Bandar
4.72
4.88
Patenga
Bandar
4.08
4.16
Sonapur
Sonagazi
7.02
7.11
Sandwip
Sandwip
6.09
6.2
Companyganj
Companyganj
7.53
7.94
Hatiya
Hatiya
5.55
5.76
Daulatkhan
Daulatkhan
4.62
4.72
Dashmina
Dashmina
3.60
3.73
Galachipa
Galachipa
3.79
3.92
Patuakhali
Patuakhali
2.87
3.03
Khepupara
Kalapara
2.93
3.02
Bamna
Bamna
3.32
3.37
Patharghata
Patharghata
3.65
3.84
Raenda
Sarankhola
3.66
3.75
Chardouni
Patharghata
4.41
4.66
Mongla
Monglaport
3.23
3.36
Kobodak
Shyamnagar
3.51
3.87
(riverestuary)
Kaikhali
Shyamnagar
3.94
4.12
*ValuespreparedfrominformationobtainedfromAnnexD3,MCSP
Note:(1)ThesevaluesmaybeusedintheabsenceofsitespecificdataforstructuresinStructure
OccupancyCategoryIVlistedTable1.2.1.
(2)ThesevaluesmaybeusedintheabsenceofsitespecificdataforstructuresinStructure
OccupancyCategoriesI,IIandIIIlistedinTable1.2.1.
2.6.6.1
PRESSUREONBASEMENTWALL:
In the design of basement walls and similar vertical or nearly vertical structures below grade, provision
shallbemadeforthelateralpressureofadjacentsoil.Allowanceshallbemadeforpossiblesurchargedue
tofixedormovingloads.Whenaportionorthewholeoftheadjacentsoilisbelowthesurroundingwater
table,computationsshallbebasedonthesubmergedunitweightofsoil,plusfullhydrostaticpressure.
2.6.6.2
UPLIFTONFLOORS:
Inthedesignofbasementfloorsandsimilarhorizontalornearlyhorizontalconstructionbelowgrade,the
upwardpressureof water, if any, shall be takenas the full hydrostatic pressure applied over the entire
area.Thehydrostaticheadshallbemeasuredfromtheundersideoftheconstruction.
124
Chapter2
2.6.7
LOADSDUETOEXPLOSIONS
Loadsonbuildingsorportionsthereof,shallbeassessedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthissection.
2.6.7.1
a)
EXPLOSIONEFFECTSINCLOSEDROOMS:
Determination of Loads and Response : Internal overpressure developed from an internal
explosion such as that due to leaks in gas pipes, evaporation of volatile liquids, internal dust explosion
etc.,inroomsofsizescomparabletoresidentialroomsandwithventilationareasconsistingofwindow
glass breaking at a pressure of 4 kN/m2 (34 mm machine made glass) may be calculated from the
followingmethod:
i)
The overpressure, qo provided in Fig 2.6.1(a) shall be assumed to depend on a factor

Ao/v,where,Aoisthetotalwindowareainm2andvisthevolumeinm3oftheroom
considered,
ii)
Theinternalpressureshallbeassumedtoactsimultaneouslyuponallwallsandfloorsin
oneclosedroom,and
iii)
TheactionqoobtainedfromFig2.6.1(a)maybetakenasstaticaction.
When a time dependent response is required, an impulsive force function similar to that shown in Fig
2.6.1(b) shall be used in a dynamic analysis, where t1 is the time from the start of combustion until
maximumpressureisreachedandt2isthetimefrommaximumpressuretotheendofcombustion.Fort1
Fig.2.6.1Magnitudeanddistributionofinternalpressureinabuildingduetointernalgasexplosion
and t2 the most unfavourable values shall be chosen in relation to the dynamic properties of the
structures.However,thevaluesshallbechosenwithintheintervalsasgiveninFig2.6.1(b).
Thepressuremaybeappliedsolelyinoneroomorinmorethanoneroomatthesametime.Inthelatter
case,allroomsareincorporatedinthevolumev.Onlywindowsorothersimilarlyweakandlightweight
125
Part6
structuralelementsmaybetakenasventilationareaseventhoughcertainlimitedstructuralpartsbreakat
pressureslessthanqo.
b)
Limitations : Procedure for determining explosion loads given in (a) above shall have the
followinglimitations:
i)
Valuesofqo giveninFig2.6.1(a)arebasedontestswithgasexplosionsinroom
corresponding to ordinary residential flats, and may be applied to considerably
different conditions with caution after appropriate adjustment of the values
basedonmoreaccurateinformation.
ii)
Fig 2.6.1 shall be taken as a guide only, and probability of occurrence of an

explosionshallbecheckedineachcaseusingappropriatevalues.
2.6.7.2
MINIMUMDESIGNPRESSURE:
Walls,floorsandroofsandtheirsupportingmembersseparatingausefromanexplosionexposure,shall
be designed to sustain the anticipated maximum load effects resulting from such use including any
dynamiceffects,butforaminimuminternalpressureorsuctionof5kN/m2,inadditiontoallotherloads
specifiedinthischapter.
2.6.7.3
DESIGNPRESSUREONRELIEFVENTS:
When pressurerelief vents are used, such vents shall be designed to relieve at a maximum internal
pressureof1.0kN/m2.
2.6.7.4
LOADSDUETOOTHEREXPLOSIONS:
Loadsarisingfromothertypesofexplosions,suchasthosefromexternalgascloudexplosions,external
explosions duetohighexplosives(TNT)etc.shallbe determined,for specific cases, byrationalanalyses
basedoninformationfromreliablereferencesorspecialistadviceshallbesought.
2.6.8
VERTICALFORCESONAIRRAIDSHELTERS
For the design of air raid shelters located in a building e.g. in the basement below ground level, the
characteristicverticalloadshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithprovisionsofSec2.6.8.1below.
Table2.6.3:CharacteristicVerticalLoadsforanAirRaidShelterinaBuilding
No.ofStoreys(1)
AbovetheAirRaidShelter
VerticalLoad
kN/m2
<2
28
34
34
>4
41
Buildingsofparticularlystableconstruction
28(2)
irrespectiveofthenumberofstoreys
Note: Storeysshallmeaneveryusablestoreyabovetheshelterfloor
(1) Buildings of particularly stable construction shall mean buildings
(2) having bearing structural elements made from reinforced insitu
concrete.
126
Chapter2
2.6.8.1
CHARACTERISTICVERTICALLOADS
Buildingsinwhichtheindividualfloorsareacteduponbyatotaldistributedliveloadofupto5.0kN/m2,
vertical forces on air raid shelters generally located below ground level, such as a basement, shall be
consideredtohavethecharacteristicvaluesprovidedinTable2.6.3.Inthecaseofbuildingshavingfloors
thatareacteduponbyaliveloadlargerthan5.0kN/m2,abovevaluesshallbeincreasedbythedifference
betweentheaverageliveloadsonallstoreysabovetheoneusedastheshelterand5.0kN/m2.
2.6.9
LOADSONHELICOPTERLANDINGAREAS
Inadditiontoallotherapplicableloadsprovidedinthischapter,includingthedeadload,theminimumlive
load on helicopter landing or touch down areas shall be one of the loads L1, L2 or L3 as given below
producingthemostunfavourableeffect:
i)L1=W1
(2.6.4a)
ii)L2=kW2
(2.6.4b)
iii)L3=w
(2.6.4c)
where,W1
ActualweightofthehelicopterinkN,
W2
FullyloadedweightofthehelicopterinkN,
Adistributedloadof5.0kN/m2,
0.75forhelicoptersequippedwithhydraulictypeshock
absorbers,and
1.5forhelicopterswithrigidorskidtypelandinggear.
Theliveload,L1 shallbeappliedovertheactualareasofcontactoflanding.Theload,L2 shallbeasingle

concentratedloadincludingimpactappliedovera300mmx300mmarea.TheloadsL1 andL2 maybe
appliedanywherewithinthelandingareatoproducethemostunfavourableeffectsofload.
2.6.10
ERECTIONANDCONSTRUCTIONLOADS
All loads required to be sustained by a structure or any portion thereof due to placing or storage of
constructionmaterialsanderectionequipmentincludingthoseduetooperationofsuchequipmentshall
beconsideredaserectionloads.Provisionsshallbemadeindesigntoaccountforallstressesduetosuch
loads.
2.7
COMBINATIONSOFLOADS
2.7.1
GENERAL
Buildings, foundations and structural members shall be investigated for adequate strength to resist the
most unfavourable effect resultingfrom the various combinations ofloads provided in thissection. The
combination of loads may be selected using the provisions of either Sec 2.7.4 or 2.7.5 whichever is
applicable.However,onceSec2.7.4or2.7.5isselectedforaparticularconstructionmaterial,itmustbe
usedexclusivelyforproportioningelementsofthatmaterialthroughoutthestructure.Inadditiontothe
loadcombinationsgiveninSec2.7.4and2.7.5anyotherspecificloadcombinationprovidedelsewherein
thisCodeshallalsobeinvestigatedtodeterminethemostunfavourableeffect.
127
Part6
The most unfavourable effect of loads may also occur when one or more of the contributing loads are
absent,oract inthereverse direction.LoadssuchasF,HorSshallbeconsideredindesignwhen their
effects are significant. Floor live loads shall not be considered where their inclusion results in lower
stresses in the member under consideration. The most unfavourable effects from both wind and
earthquake loads shall be considered where appropriate, but they need not be assumed to act
simultaneously.
2.7.2
DEFINITIONS
ALLOWABLESTRESSDESIGNMETHOD(ASD):Amethodforproportioningstructuralmemberssuchthat
themaximumstressesduetoserviceloadsobtainedfromanelasticanalysisdoesnotexceedaspecified
allowablevalue.ThisisalsocalledWorkingStressDesignMethod(WSD).
DESIGNSTRENGTH:Theproductofthenominalstrengthandaresistancefactor.
FACTOREDLOAD:Theproductofthenominalloadandaloadfactor.
LIMIT STATE : A condition in which a structure or component becomes unfit for service and is judged
eithertobenolongerusefulforitsintendedfunction(serviceabilitylimitstate)ortobeunsafe(strength
limitstate).
LOADEFFECTS:Forces,moments,deformationsandothereffectsproducedinstructuralmembersand
componentsbytheappliedloads.
LOAD FACTOR : A factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the actual load from the nominal
valueandforuncertaintiesintheanalysisthattransformstheloadintoaloadeffect.
LOADS : Forces or other actions that arise on structural systems from the weight of all permanent
constructions, occupants and their possessions, environmental effects, differential settlement, and
restraineddimensionalchanges.Permanentloadsarethoseloadsinwhichvariationsintimearerareorof
smallmagnitude.Allotherloadsarevariableloads.
NOMINAL LOADS : The magnitudes of the loads such as dead, live, wind, earthquake etc. specified in
Sec2.2through2.6ofthischapter.
NOMINAL STRENGTH : The capacity of a structure or component to resist the effects of loads, as
determined by computations using specified material strengths and dimensions and formulas derived
from accepted principles of structural mechanics or by field tests or laboratory tests of scaled models,
allowingformodellingeffectsanddifferencesbetweenlaboratoryandfieldconditions.
RESISTANCEFACTOR:Afactorthataccountsforunavoidabledeviationsoftheactualstrengthfromthe
nominal value and the manner and consequences of failure. This is also known as strength reduction
factor.
STRENGTH DESIGN METHOD : A method of proportioning structural members using load factors and
resistancefactorssatisfyingboththeapplicablelimitstateconditions.ThisisalsoknownasLoadFactor
DesignMethod(LFD)orUltimateStrengthDesignMethod(USD).
WORKINGSTRESSDESIGNMETHOD(WSD):SeeALLOWABLESTRESSDESIGNMETHOD.
128
Chapter2
2.7.3
D
SYMBOLSANDNOTATION
=
deadloads,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Deadloadconsistsof:a)weight
of the member itself, b) weight of all materials of construction incorporated into the building to be
permanentlysupportedbythemember,includingbuiltinpartitions,c)weightofpermanentequipment.
E
load effects of earthquake, or related internal moments and forces, For specific
definitionoftheearthquakeloadeffectE,seeSection2.5
F
loadsduetoweightandpressuresoffluidswithwelldefineddensitiesandcontrollable
maximumheightsorrelatedinternalmomentsandforces.
Fa
loadsduetofloodortidalsurgeorrelatedinternalmomentsandforces.
loads due to weight and pressure of soil, water in soil, or other materials, or related
internalmomentsandforces,
L
live loads due tointended use andoccupancy, including loads due to movable objects
andmovablepartitionsandloadstemporarilysupportedbythestructureduringmaintenance,orrelated
internalmomentsandforces,.Lincludesanypermissiblereduction.Ifresistancetoimpactloadsistaken
intoaccountindesign,sucheffectsshallbeincludedwiththeliveloadsL.
Lr
roofliveloads,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,
rainload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces
selfstrainingforcesandcumulativeeffectoftemperature,creep,shrinkage,differential
settlement,andshrinkagecompensatingconcrete,orcombinationsthereof,orrelatedinternalmoments
andforces.
W
windload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,
2.7.4
COMBINATIONSOFLOADEFFECTSFORALLOWABLESTRESS
DESIGNMETHOD
2.7.4.1
BASICCOMBINATIONS
Provisions of this section shall apply to all construction materials permitting their use in proportioning
structuralmembersbyallowablestressdesignmethod.Whenthismethodisusedindesigningstructural
members,allloadslistedhereinshallbeconsideredtoactinthefollowingcombinations.Thecombination
thatproducesthemostunfavourableeffectshallbeusedindesign.
1.
2.
D+L
3.
D+F
4.
D+H+F+L+T
5.
D+H+F+(LrorR)
6.
D+H+F+0.75(L+T)+0.75(LrorR)
7.
D+H+F+(Wor0.7E)
129
Part6
8.
D+H+F+0.75(Wor0.7E)+0.75L+0.75(LrorR)
9.
D+L+(Wor0.7E)
10. 0.6D+W+H
11. 0.6D+0.7E+H
Whenastructureislocatedinafloodzoneorintidalsurgezone,thefollowingloadcombinationsshallbe
considered:
1.InCoastalZonesvulnerabletotidalsurges,1.5Fashallbeaddedtootherloadsincombinations(7),(8),
(9),and(10)andEshallbesetequaltozeroin(7),(8)and(9).
2. In noncoastal Zones, 0.75Fa shall be added to combinations (7), (8), (9), and (10) and E shall be set
equaltozeroin(7),(8)and(9).
2.7.4.2
STRESSINCREASE
UnlesspermittedelsewhereinthisCode,increasesinallowablestressshallnotbeusedwiththeloadsor
loadcombinationsgivenaboveinSection2.7.4.1.
2.7.5
COMBINATIONSOFLOADEFFECTSFORSTRENGTHDESIGN
METHOD
When strength design method is used, structural members and foundations shall be designed to have
strengthnotlessthanthatrequiredtoresistthemostunfavorableeffectofthecombinationsoffactored
loadslistedinthefollowingsections:
2.7.5.1
BASICCOMBINATIONS
1.
1.4(D+F)
2.
1.2(D+F+T)+1.6(L+H)+0.5(LrorP)
3.
1.2D+1.6(LrorP)+(1.0Lor0.8W)
4.
1.2D+1.6W+1.0L+0.5(LrorP)
5.
1.2D+1.0E+1.0L
6.
0.9D+1.6W+1.6H
7.
0.9D+1.0E+1.6H
Exception:
1.TheloadfactoronliveloadLincombinations(3),(4),and(5)ispermittedtobereducedto0.5forall
occupanciesinwhichminimumspecifieduniformlydistributedliveloadislessthanorequalto5.0kN/m2,
withtheexceptionofgaragesorareasoccupiedasplacesofpublicassembly.
2.TheloadfactoronHshallbesetequaltozeroincombinations(6)and(7)ifthestructuralactiondueto
HcounteractsthatduetoWorE.Wherelateralearthpressureprovidesresistancetostructuralactions
fromotherforces,itshallnotbeincludedinHbutshallbeincludedinthedesignresistance.
130
Chapter2
3.ForstructuresdesignedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofChapter6,Part6ofthisCode(reinforced
concrete structures), where wind load W has not been reduced by a directionality factor, it shall be
permittedtouse1.3Winplaceof1.6Win(4)and(6)above.
Whenastructureislocatedinafloodzoneorintidalsurgezone,thefollowingloadcombinationsshallbe
considered:
InCoastalZonesvulnerabletotidalsurges,1.6Wshallbereplaced by 1.6W+2.0Fain
1.
combinations(4)and(6).
2.
InNoncoastalZones,1.6Wshallbereplacedby0.8W+1.0Faincombinations(4)and
(6).
2.7.6
LOADCOMBINATIONSFOREXTRAORDINARYEVENTS
Where required by the applicable code, standard, or the authority having jurisdiction, strength and
stabilityshallbecheckedtoensurethatstructuresarecapableofwithstandingtheeffectsofextraordinary
(i.e.,lowprobability)events,suchasfires,explosions,andvehicularimpact.
RelatedAppendix
AppendixA
ConversionofExpressionsfromSItoFPSUnits
131
CHAPTER3
SOILSANDFOUNDATIONS
3.1
INTRODUCTION
TheSoilsandFoundationschapterofthecodeisdividedintothefollowingthreemajorparts:
PartA:
GeneralRequirements,MaterialsandFoundationTypes
PartB:
ServiceLoadDesignMethodofFoundations
PartC:
AdditionalConsiderationsinPlanning,DesignandConstructionofBuildingFoundations.
PartA(GeneralRequirements,MaterialsandFoundationTypes)consistsofthefollowingsections:
Scope
Terminology
SiteInvestigations
Identification,ClassificationandDescriptionofSoils
GeotechnicalInvestigationreport
Materials
TypesofFoundation
PartB(ServiceLoadDesignMethodofFoundations)hasthesectionsasunder:
ShallowFoundations
GeotechnicalDesignofshallowFoundations
GeotechnicalDesignofshallowFoundations
FieldTestsforDrivenPilesandDrilledShafts
Part C (Additional Considerations in Planning, Design and Construction of Building Foundations) deals with the
followingsections:
Excavation
Dewatering
SlopeStabilityofAdjoiningBuildings
Part6
StructuralDesign
6151
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fills
RetainingWallsforFoundations
WaterproofingandDampproofing
FoundationonSlopes
FoundationsonFillandProblematicSoils
FoundationDesignforDynamicForces
GeohazardsforBuildings
PARTA:GENERALREQUIREMENTS,MATERIALSANDFOUNDATIONTYPES(Sections3.2
to3.8)
3.2
SCOPE
The provisions of this chapter shall be applicable to the design and construction of foundations of buildings and
structures for the safe support of dead and superimposed loads without exceeding the allowable bearing stresses,
permissiblesettlementsanddesigncapability.
3.3
TERMINOLOGY
Forthetermsusedinthischapter,thefollowingdefinitionsshallapply.
ALLOWABLE LOAD: The maximum load that may be safely applied to a foundation unit, considering both the
strengthandsettlementofthesoil,underexpectedloadingandsoilconditions.
DESIGNLOAD:Theexpectedunfactoredloadtoafoundationunit.
GROSSPRESSURE:Thetotalpressureatthebaseofafootingduetotheweightofthesuperstructureand
theoriginaloverburdenpressure.
NETPRESSURE:Thegrosspressureminusthesurchargepressurei.e.theoverburdenpressureofthesoilat
thefoundationlevel.
SERVICELOAD:Theexpectedunfactoredloadtoafoundationunit.
BEARING CAPACITY: The general term used to describe the load carrying capacity of foundation soil or rock in
termsofaveragepressurethatenablesittobearandtransmitloadsfromastructure.
BEARING SURFACE: The contact surface between a foundation unit and the soil or rock upon which the
foundationrests.
DESIGNBEARINGCAPACITY:Themaximumnetaveragepressureappliedtoasoilorrockbyafoundation
unitthatthefoundationsoilorrockwillsafelycarrywithouttheriskofbothshearfailureandpermissible
settlement. Itis equal to the least of the two values of net allowable bearing capacity and safe bearing
pressure.ThismayalsobecalledALLOWABLEBEARINGPRESSURE.
GROSSALLOWABLEBEARINGPRESSURE:Themaximumgrossaveragepressureofloadingthatthesoilcan
safely carry with a factor of safety considering risk of shear failure. This may be calculated by dividing
grossultimatebearingcapacitywithafactorofsafety.
GROSS ULTIMATE BEARINGCAPACITY: The maximum average gross pressure of loading at the base of a
foundationwhichinitiatesshearfailureofthesupportingsoil
6152
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
ALLOWABLEBEARINGCAPACITY:Themaximumnetaveragepressureofloadingthatthesoilwillsafelycarry
withafactorofsafetyconsideringriskofshearfailureandthesettlementoffoundation.Thisistheminimum
ofsafebearingcapacityandsafebearingpressure.
NETULTIMATEBEARINGCAPACITY:Theaveragenetincreaseofpressureatthebaseofafoundationdueto
loadingwhichinitiatesshearfailureofthesupportingsoil.Itisequaltothegrossultimatebearingcapacity
minustheoverburdenpressure.
PRESUMPTIVE BEARING CAPACITY: The net approximate pressure prescribed as appropriate for the
particulartypeofgroundtobeusedinpreliminarydesignsoffoundations
SAFEBEARINGCAPACITY:Themaximumaveragepressureofloadingthatthesoilwillsafelycarrywithoutthe
riskofshearfailure.Thismaybecalculatedbydividingnetultimatebearingcapacitywithafactorofsafety.
SAFEBEARINGPRESSURE:Themaximumaveragepressureofloadingthatthesoilwillsafelycarrywithout
theriskofpermissiblesettlement.
CAISSON: A deep foundation unit, relatively large section, sunk down (not driven) to the ground. This is also
calledWELLFOUNDATION.
CLAYMINERAL:Asmallgroupofminerals,commonlyknownasclayminerals,essentiallycomposedofhydrous
aluminiumsilicateswithmagnesiumorironreplacingwhollyorinpartsomeofthealuminium.
CLAYSOIL:Anaturalaggregateofmicroscopicandsubmicroscopicmineralgrainsthatareproduct ofchemical
decompositionanddisintegrationofrockconstituents.Itisplasticinmoderatetowiderangeofwatercontents.
DOWNDRAG: The transfer of load (drag load) to a deep foundation, when soil settles in relation to the
foundation.ThisisalsoknownasNEGATIVESKINFRICTION.
DRILLED PIER/DRILLED SHAFT:Adeep foundationgenerally of largediameter shaft usually morethan 600mm
andconstructedbydrillingandexcavatingintothesoil.
EFFECTIVESTRESS/ EFFECTIVE PRESSURE: The pressure transmittedthrough grainto grain at the contact point
throughasoilmassistermedaseffectivestressoreffectivepressure.
ENDBEARING:Theloadbeingtransmittedtothetoeofadeepfoundationandresistedbythebearingcapacityof
thesoilbeneaththetoe.
EXCAVATION:Thespacecreatedbytheremovalofsoilorrockforthepurposeofconstruction.
FACTOROFSAFETY:Theratiooftheultimatecapacitytothedesign(working)capacityofthefoundationunit.
FILL:Manmadedepositsofnaturalearthmaterials(soil,rock)and/orwastematerials.
FOOTING:Afoundationconstructedofmasonry,concreteorothermaterialunderthebaseofawalloroneor
morecolumnsforthepurposeofspreadingtheloadoveralargerareaatshallowerdepthofgroundsurface.
FOUNDATION: Lower part of the structure which is in direct contact with the soil and transmits loads to the
ground.
DEEPFOUNDATION:Afoundationunitthatprovidessupportforastructuretransferringloadsbyendbearing
and/orbyshaftresistanceatconsiderabledepthbelowtheground.Generally,thedepthisatleastfivetimes
theleastdimensionofthefoundation.
SHALLOWFOUNDATION:Afoundationunitthatprovidessupportforastructuretransferringloadsatasmall
depthbelowtheground.Generally,thedepthislessthantwotimestheleastdimensionofthefoundation.
FOUNDATION ENGINEER: A graduate Engineer with at least five years of experience in civil engineering
particularlyinfoundationdesignorconstruction.
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012
6153
Part6
StructuralDesign
GEOTECHNICALENGINEER:EngineerwithMastersdegreeingeotechnicalengineeringhavingatleastthreeyears
ofexperienceingeotechnicaldesignorconstruction.
GROUND WATER LEVEL/ GROUND WATER TABLE: The level of water at which porewater pressure is equal to
atmosphericpressure.Itisthetopsurfaceofafreebodyofwater(peizometricwaterlevel)intheground.
MATFOUNDATION:SeeRAFT.
NEGATIVESKINFRICTION:SeeDOWNDRAG.
OVERCONSOLIDATIONRATIO(OCR):Theratioofthepreconsolidationpressure(maximumpastpressure)tothe
existingeffectiveoverburdenpressureofthesoil.
PILE:A slenderdeep foundationunit made of materialssuch as steel, concrete, wood, or combination thereof
thattransmitstheloadtothegroundbyskinfriction,endbearingandlateralsoilresistance.
BATTERPILE:Thepilewhichisinstalledatanangletotheverticalinordertocarrylateralloadsalongwith
theverticalloads.ThisisalsoknownasRAKERPILE.
BOREDPILE/CASTINSITUPILE/REPLACEMENTPILE:Apileformedintoapreformedholeofground,usuallyof
reinforcedconcretehavingadiametersmallerthan600mm.
DRIVEN PILE/DISPLACEMENT PILE: A plie foundation premanufactured and placed in ground by driving,
jacking,jettingorscrewing.
LATERALLYLOADEDPILE:Apilethatisinstalledverticallytocarrymainlythelateralloads.
PILECAP:Apilecapisaspecialfootingneededtotransmitthecolumnloadtoagrouporclusterofpiles.
PILEHEAD/PILETOP:Theuppersmalllengthofapile.
PILESHOE:Aseparatereinforcementorsteelformattachedtothebottomend(piletoe)ofapiletofacilitate
driving,toprotectthepiletoe,and/ortoimprovethetoeresistanceofthepile.
PILETOE/PILETIP:Thebottomendofapile.
SCREWPILE/AUGURPILE:Apremanufacturedpileconsistingofsteelhelicalbladesandashaftplacedinto
groundbyscrewing.
POREWATERPRESSURE:Thepressureinducedinthewaterorvapourandwaterfillingtheporesofsoil.Thisis
alsoknownasneutralstress.
RAFT:Arelativelylargespreadfoundationsupportinganarrangementofcolumnsorwallsinaregularorirregular
layout transmitting the loads to the soil by means of a continuous slab and/or beams, with or without
depressionsoropenings.ThisisalsoknownasMATFOUNDATION.
RAKERPILE:SeeBATTERPILE.
ROCK: A natural aggregate of one or more minerals that are connected by strong and permanent cohesive
forces.
ROTATION:Itistheanglebetweenthehorizontalandanytwofoundationsortwopointsinasinglefoundation.
RELATIVEROTATION/ANGULARDISTORTION:Anglebetweenthehorizontalandanytwofoundationsortwo
pointsinasinglefoundation.
TILT:Rotationoftheentiresuperstructureoratleastawelldefinedpartofit.
SETTLEMENT:Thedownwardverticalmovementoffoundationunderload.Whensettlementoccursoveralarge
area,itissometimescalledsubsidence.
6154
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
CONSOLIDATIONSETTLEMENT:Atimedependentsettlementresultingfromgradualreductionofvolumeof
saturated soils because of squeezing out of water from the pores due to increase in effective stress and
hence pore water pressure. It is also known as primary consolidation settlement. It is thus a time related
processinvolvingcompression,stresstransferandwaterdrainage.
DIFFERENTIALSETTEMENT:Thedifferenceinthetotalsettlementsbetweentwofoundationsortwopoints
inthesamefoundation.
ELASTIC/DISTORTION SETTLEMENT: It is attributed due to lateral spreading or elastic deformation of dry,
moistorsaturatedsoilwithoutachangeinthewatercontentandvolume.
IMMEDIATE SETTLEMENT: This vertical compression occurs immediately after the application of loading
either on account of elastic behaviour that produces distortion at constant volume and on account of
compressionofairvoid.Forsands,eventheconsolidationcomponentisimmediate.
SECONDARY CONSOLDATION SETTLEMENT: This is the settlement speculated to be due to the plastic
deformation of the soil as a result of some complex colloidalchemical processes or creep under imposed
longtermloading.
TOTALSETTLEMENT:Thetotaldownwardverticaldisplacementofafoundationbaseunderloadfromitsas
constructedposition.Itisthesummationofimmediatesettlement,consolidationsettlementandsecondary
consolidationsettlementofthesoil.
SHAFTRESISTANCE:Theresistancemobilizedontheshaft(side)ofadeepfoundation.Upwardresistanceiscalled
positiveshaftresistance.Downwardforceontheshaftiscallednegativeshaftresistance.
SOIL:Alooseorsoftdepositofparticlesofmineraland/ororganicoriginthatcanbeseparatedbysuchgentle
mechanicalmeansasagitationinwater.
COLLAPSIBLE SOIL: Consists predominant of sand and silt size particles arranged in a loose honeycomb
structure. These soils are dry and strong in their natural state and consolidate or collapse quickly if they
becomewet.
DISPERSIVESOIL:Soilsthatarestructurallyunstableanddisperseinwaterintobasicparticlesi.e.sand,silt
and clay. Dispersible soils tend to be highly erodible. Dispersive soils usually have a high Exchangeable
SodiumPercentage(ESP).
EXPANSIVESOIL:Theseareclaysoilsexpandwhentheybecomewettedandcontractwhendried.Theseare
formedofclaymineralslikemontmorilloniteandillite.
INORGANIC SOIL: Soil of mineral origin having small amount usually less than 5 percent of organic matter
content.
ORGANIC SOIL: Soil having appreciable/significant amount of organic matter content to influence the soil
properties.
PEATSOIL:Anorganicsoilwithhighorganiccontent,usuallymorethan75%byweight,composedprimarily
ofvegetabletissueinvariousstagesofdecompositionusuallywithanorganicodor,adarkbrowntoblack
color, a spongy consistency, and a texture ranging from fibrous to amorphous. Fully decomposed organic
soilsareknownasMUCK.
SOILPARTICLESIZE:Thesizesofparticlesthatmakeupsoilvaryingoverawiderange.Soilparticlesaregenerally
gravel,sand,siltandclay,thoughthetermsboulderandcobblecanbeusedtodescribelargersizesofgravel.
BOULDER:Particlesofrockthatwillnotpassa12in.(300mm)squareopening.
Cobbles:Particlesofrockthatwillpassa12in.(300mm)squareopeningandberetainedona3in.(75mm)
sieve.
6155
Part6
StructuralDesign
Clay:Anaturalaggregateofmicroscopicandsubmicroscopicmineralgrainslessthan0.002mminsizeand
plasticinmoderatetowiderangeofwatercontents.
GRAVEL:Particlesofrockthatwillpassa3in.(75mm)sieveandberetainedonaNo.4(4.75mm)sieve.
SAND:Aggregatesofrounded,subrounded,angular,subangularorflatfragmentsofmoreorlessunaltered
rockormineralswhichislargerthan75mandsmallerthan4.75mminsize.
Silt:SoilpassingaNo.200(75m)sievethatisnonplasticorveryslightlyplasticandthatexhibitslittleorno
strengthwhenairdry.
3.4
SITEINVESTIGATIONS
3.4.1 SubSurfaceSurvey
Dependingonthetypeofprojectthoroughinvestigationshastobecarriedoutforidentification,location,alignment
anddepthofvariousutilities,e.g.,pipelines,cables,seweragelines,watermainsetc.belowthesurfaceoftheexisting
groundlevel.Detailedsurveymayalsobeconductedtoascertainthetopographyoftheexistingground.
3.4.2 SubSoilInvestigations
Subsoilinvestigationshallbedonedescribingthecharacter,nature,loadbearingcapacityandsettlementcapacityof
thesoilbeforeconstructinganewbuildingandstructureorforalterationofthefoundationofanexistingstructure.
Theaimsofageotechnicalinvestigationaretoestablishthesoil,rockandgroundwaterconditions,todeterminethe
properties of the soil and rock, and to gather additional relevant knowledge about the site. Careful collection,
recording and interpretation of geotechnical information shall be made. This information shall include ground
conditions,geology,geomorphology,seismicityandhydrology,asrelevant.Indicationsofthevariabilityoftheground
shallbetakenintoaccount.
An engineering geological study may be an important consideration to establish the physiographic setting and
stratigraphicsequencesofsoilstrataofthearea.Geologicalandagriculturalsoilmapsoftheareamaygivevaluable
informationofsiteconditions.
During the various phases of subsoil investigations, e.g. drilling of boreholes, field tests, sampling, groundwater
measurements,etc.acompetentgraduateengineerhavingexperiencesinsupervisingsubsoilexplorationworksshall
beemployedbythedrillingcontractor.
3.4.2.1 MethodsofExploration
Subsoil exploration process may be grouped into three types of activities such as: reconnaissance, exploration and
detailedinvestigations.Thereconnaissancemethodincludesgeophysicalmeasurements,soundingorprobing,while
exploratorymethodsinvolvevariousdrillingtechniques.Fieldinvestigationsshouldcomprise
(i) drillingand/orexcavations(testpitsincludingexploratoryboreholes)forsampling;
(ii) groundwatermeasurements;
(iii) fieldtests.
Examplesofthevarioustypesoffieldinvestigationsare:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
fieldtesting(e.g.CPT,SPT,dynamicprobing,WST, pressuremetertests,dilatometertests,plateload
tests,fieldvanetestsandpermeabilitytests);
soilsamplingfordescriptionofthesoilandlaboratorytests;
groundwatermeasurementstodeterminethegroundwatertableortheporepressureprofileandtheir
fluctuations
6156
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
(iv)
geophysical investigations(e.g. seismic profiling, ground penetratingradar, resistivity measurements
(v)
anddownholelogging);
largescaletests,forexampletodeterminethebearingcapacityorthebehaviourdirectlyonprototype
elements,suchasanchors.
Where groundcontaminationorsoilgasisexpected,informationshallbegatheredfromtherelevantsources. This

informationshallbetakenintoaccountwhenplanningthe groundinvestigation.Someofthe commonmethods of
exploration,methodsofsamplingandgroundwatermeasurementsinsoilsaredescribedinAppendix6.3.A.
3.4.2.2 NumberandLocationofInvestigationPoints
The locations of investigation points, eg., pits and boreholes shall be selected on the basis of the preliminary
investigations as a function of the geological conditions, the dimensions of the structure and the engineering
problemsinvolved.Whenselectingthelocationsofinvestigationpoints,thefollowingshouldbeobserved:
(i)
the investigation points should be arranged in such a pattern that the stratification can be
assessedacrossthesite;
(ii)
theinvestigationpointsforabuildingorstructureshouldbeplacedatcriticalpointsrelativetothe
shape, structural behaviour and expected load distribution (e.g. at the corners of the foundation
area);
(iii)
forlinearstructures,investigationpointsshouldbearrangedatadequateoffsetstothecentreline,
dependingontheoverallwidthofthestructure,suchasanembankmentfootprintoracutting;
(iv)
forstructuresonornearslopesandstepsintheterrain(includingexcavations),investigationpoints
should also be arranged outside the project area, these being located so that the stabilityof the
slopeorcutcanbeassessed.Whereanchoragesareinstalled,dueconsiderationshouldbegivento
thelikelystressesintheirloadtransferzone;
(v)
theinvestigationpointsshouldbearrangedsothattheydonotpresentahazardtothestructure,the
constructionwork,orthesurroundings(e.g.asaresultofthechangestheymaycausetotheground
andgroundwaterconditions);
(vi)
the area considered in the design investigations should extend into the neighbouring area to a
distancewherenoharmfulinfluenceontheneighbouringareaisexpected.
Where ground conditions are relatively uniform or the ground is known to have sufficient strength and stiffness
properties,widerspacingorfewerinvestigationpointsmaybeapplied.Ineithercase,thischoiceshouldbejustified
bylocalexperience.
Thelocationsandspacingofsounding,pitsandboreholesshallbesuchthatthesoilprofilesobtainedwillpermita
reasonably accurate estimate of the extent and character of the intervening soil or rock masses and will disclose
importantirregularitiesinsubsurfaceconditions.Forbuildingstructures,thefollowingguidelinesshallbefollowed:
(i)
For large areas covering industrial and residential colonies, the geological nature of the terrain will
helpindecidingthenumberofboreholesortrialpits.Thewholeareamaybedividedintogridpattern
withConePenetrationTests(seeAppendix6.3.B)performedatevery100mgridpoints.Thenumber
ofboreholes or trial pits shall be decided by examining the variation inpenetration curves. At least
67%oftherequirednumberofboringsortrialpitsshallbelocatedwithintheareaunderthebuilding.
(ii)
Incompactbuildingsitescoveringanareaof0.4hectare(43,000squarefeet),oneboreholeortrialpit
ineachcornerandoneincentreshallbeadequate.
(iii)
Forwidelyspacedbuildingscoveringanareaoflessthan90m2 (1000squarefeet)andaheightless
thanfourstoreys,atleastoneboreholeortrialpitinthecentreshallbedone.
6157
Part6
StructuralDesign
3.4.2.3
DepthofExploration
The depth of investigations shall be extended to all strata that will affect the project or are affected by the
construction.Thedepthofexplorationshalldependtosomeextentonthesiteandtypeoftheproposedstructure,
and on certain design considerations such as safety against foundation failure, excessive settlement, seepage and
earth pressure. Cognizance shall be taken of the character and sequence of the subsurface strata. The site
investigationshouldbecarriedtosuchadepththattheentirezoneofsoilorrockaffectedbythechangescausedby
thebuildingortheconstructionwillbeadequatelyexplored.Aruleofthumbusedforthispurposeistoextendthe
boringstoadepthwheretheadditionalloadresultingfromtheproposedbuildingislessthan10%oftheaverageload
of the structure, or less than 5% of the effective stress in the soil at that depth. Where the depth of investigation
cannot be related to background information, the following guide lines are suggested to determine the depth of
exploration:
(a) Wheresubstructure units will be supported onspread footings, the minimum depth boring should extend
belowtheanticipatedbearinglevelaminimumoftwofootingwidthsforisolated,individualfootingswhere
length two times width, and four footing widths for footings where length > five times width. For
intermediate footing lengths, the minimum depth of boring may be estimated by linear interpolation as a
functionoflengthbetweendepthsoftwotimeswidthandfivetimeswidthbelowthebearinglevel.Greater
depthmayberequiredwherewarrantedbylocalconditions.
(b) Formoreheavilyloadedstructures,suchasmultistoriedstructuresandforframedstructures,atleast50%of
theboringsshouldbeextendedtoadepthequalto1.5timesthewidthofthebuildingbelowthelowestpart
ofthefoundation.
(c) Normallythedepthofexplorationshallbeoneandahalftimestheestimatedwidthortheleastdimension
ofthefootingbelowthefoundationlevel.Ifthepressurebulbsforanumberofloadedareasoverlap,the
wholeareamaybeconsideredasloadedandexplorationshallbecarrieddowntooneandahalftimesthe
least dimension. In weak soils, the exploration shall be continued to a depth at which the loads can be
carriedbythestratuminquestionwithoutundesirablesettlementorshearfailure.
(d) Where substructure units will be supported on deep foundations, the depth boring should extend a
minimumof6mbelowtheanticipatedpileofshafttipelevation.Wherepileorshaftgroupswillbeused,
the boring should extend at least two times the maximum pile or shaft group dimension below the
anticipatedtipelevation,unlessthefoundationwillbeendbearingonorinrock.
(e) Forpiles bearingonrock,a minimumof1.5mofrockcoreshould be obtainedateach boringlocationto
ensuretheboringhasnotbeenterminatedinaboulder.
(f) Forshaftssupportedonorextendingintorock,aminimumof1.5mofrockcore,oralengthofrockcore
equaltoatleastthreetimestheshaftdiameterforisolatedshaftsortwotimesthemaximumshaftgroup
dimensionforashaftgroup,whicheverisgreater,shouldbeobtainedtoensurethattheboringhadnotbeen
terminated in a boulder and to determine the physical properties of rock within the zone of foundation
influencefordesign.
(g) The depth, to which weathering process affects the deposit, shall be regarded as the minimum depth of
explorationforasite.However,innocaseshallthisdepthbelessthan2m,butwhereindustrialprocesses
affectthesoilcharacteristics,thisdepthmaybemore.
(h) Itisgoodpracticetohaveatleastoneboringcarriedtobedrock,ortowellbelowtheanticipatedlevelof
influenceofthebuilding.Bedrockshouldbeprovedbycoringintoittoaminimumdepthof3m.
6158
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
3.4.2.4
Chapter3
SoundingandPenetrationTests
Subsurface soundings are used for exploring soil strata of an erratic nature. They are useful to determine the
presenceofanysoftpocketsbetweendrillholesandalsotodeterminethedensityindexofcohesionlesssoilsandthe
consistency of cohesive soils at desired depths. A field test called Vane Shear Test may be used to determine the
shearingstrengthofthesoillocatedatadepthbelowtheground.
Penetrationtestsconsistofdrivingor pushingastandardsamplingtubeora cone.Thedevicesarealsotermed as
penetrometers,sincetheypenetratethesubsoilwithaviewtomeasuringtheresistancetopenetratethesoilstrata.
Ifasamplingtubeisusedtopenetratethesoil,thetestisreferredtoasStandardPenetrationTest(orsimplySPT).Ifa
cone is used, the test is called a Cone Penetration Test. If the penetrometer is pushed steadily into the soil, the
procedureisknownasStaticPenetrationTest.Ifdrivenintothesoil,itisknownasDynamicPenetrationTest.Details
ofsoundingandpenetrationstestsarepresentedinAPPENDIX6.3.A.
3.4.2.5
GeotechnicalInvestigationReport
The results of a geotechnical investigationshall be compiled in the Geotechnical Investigation Reportwhichshall

formapartoftheGeotechnicalDesignReport.TheGeotechnicalInvestigationReportshallconsistofthefollowing:
(i)
(ii)
apresentationofallappropriategeotechnicalinformationonfieldandlaboratorytestsincluding
geologicalfeaturesandrelevantdata;
a geotechnical evaluation of the information, stating the assumptions made in the
interpretationofthetestresults.
TheGeotechnicalInvestigationReportshallstateknownlimitationsoftheresults,ifappropriate.TheGeotechnical
InvestigationReportshouldproposenecessaryfurtherfieldandlaboratoryinvestigations,withcommentsjustifying
the need for this further work. Such proposals should be accompanied by a detailed programme for the further
investigationstobecarriedout.
The presentation of geotechnical information shall include a factual account of all field and laboratory
investigations.Thefactualaccountshouldincludethefollowinginformation:
thepurposeandscopeofthegeotechnicalinvestigationincludingadescriptionofthesiteanditstopography,
oftheplannedstructureandthestageoftheplanningtheaccountisreferringto;
thenamesofallconsultantsandcontractors;
thedatesbetweenwhichfieldandlaboratoryinvestigationswereperformed;
thefieldreconnaissanceofthesiteoftheprojectandthesurroundingareanotingparticularly:
i) evidenceofgroundwater;
ii)behaviourofneighbouringstructures;
iii) exposuresinquarriesandborrowareas;
iv)areasofinstability;
v) difficultiesduringexcavation;
vi) historyofthesite;
vii)geologyofthesite,
viii)surveydatawithplansshowingthestructureandthelocationofallinvestigationpoints;
ix)localexperienceinthearea;
x) informationabouttheseismicityofthearea.
6159
Part6
StructuralDesign
The presentation of geotechnical information shall include documentation of the methods, procedures and
resultsincludingallrelevantreportsof:
deskstudies;
fieldinvestigations,suchassampling,fieldtestsandgroundwatermeasurements;
laboratorytests.
The results of the field and laboratoryinvestigations shall be presented and reported according to the
requirementsdefinedintheASTMorequivalentstandardsappliedintheinvestigations.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION,CLASSIFICATIONANDDESCRIPTIONOFSOILS
3.5.1 IdentificationofSoil
Samplesandtrialpitsshouldbeinspectedvisuallyandcomparedwithfieldlogsofthedrillingssothatthepreliminary
groundprofilecanbeestablished.Forsoilsamples,thevisualinspectionshouldbesupportedbysimplemanualtests
to identify the soil and to give a first impression of its consistency and mechanical behaviour. A standard visual
manualprocedureofdescribingandidentifyingsoilsmaybefollowed.
Soilclassificationtestsshouldbeperformedtodeterminethecompositionandindexpropertiesofeachstratum.Thesamplesfor
theclassificationtestsshouldbeselectedinsuchawaythatthetestsareapproximatelyequallydistributedoverthecomplete
areaandthefulldepthofthestratarelevantfordesign.
3.5.2 SoilClassification
3.5.2.1
ParticleSizeClassification
Dependingonparticlesizes,mainsoiltypesaregravel,sand,siltandclay.However,thelargergravelscanbefurther
classifiedascobbleandboulder.ThesoilparticlesizeshallbeclassifiedinaccordancewithTable6.3.1.
Table6.3.1:ParticleSizeRangesofSoils
ParticleSize
Range,mm
SoilType
3.5.2.2
RetainedonMesh
Size/SieveNo.
Boulder
Cobble
>300
12
30075
Gravel:
Coarse
7519
3/4
Medium
199.5
3/8
Fine
9.54.75
No.4
Sand:
Coarse
4.752.00
No.10
Medium
2.000.425
No.40
Fine
0.4250.075
No.200
Silt
0.0750.002
Clay
<0.002
EngineeringClassification
Soilsaredividedintothreemajorgroups,coarsegrained,finegrainedandhighlyorganic.Theclassificationisbased
onclassificationtestresultsnamelygrainsizeanalysisandconsistencytest.Thecoarsegrainedsoilsshallbeclassified
usingTable6.3.2.OutlinesoforganicandinorganicsoilseparationsarealsoprovidedinTable6.3.2.Thefinegrained
6160
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
soils shall be classified using the plasticity chart shown in Fig. 6.3.1. For details, reference can be made to ASTM
D2487.Inadditiontotheseclassifications,asoilshallbedescribedbyitscolour,particleangularity(forcoarsegrained
soils)andconsistency.Furthertotheaboveclassificationsoilsexhibitingswellingorcollapsingcharacteristicshallbe
recorded.
For undisturbed soils information on stratification, degree of compactness, cementation, moisture conditions and
drainagecharacteristicsshallbeincluded.
3.5.2.2.1IdentificationandClassificationofOrganicSoils
Thepresenceoforganicmattercanhaveundesirableeffectsontheengineeringbehaviourofsoil.Forexample,the
bearing capacity is reduced, the compressibility is increased, swelling and shrinkage potential is increased due to
organiccontent.Organiccontenttestsareusedtoclassifythesoil.Insoilwithlittleornoclayparticlesandcarbonate
content,theorganiccontentisoftendeterminedfromthelossonignitionatacontrolledtemperature.Othersuitable
tests can also be used. For example, organic content can be determined from the mass loss on treatment with
hydrogen peroxide (H2O2), which provides a more specific measure of organics. Organic deposits are due to
decompositionoforganicmattersandfoundusuallyintopsoilandmarshyplace.Asoildepositinorganicoriginissaid
topeatifitisatthehigherendoftheorganiccontentscale(75%ormore),organicsoilatthelowend,andmuckin
between. Peat soil is usually formed of fossilized plant minerals and characterized by fiber content and lower
decomposition. The peats have certain characteristics that set them apart from moist mineral soils and required
special considerations for construction over them. This special characteristic includes, extremely high natural
moisture content, high compressibility including significant secondary and even tertiary compression and very low
undrainedshearstrengthatnaturalmoisturecontent.
However, there are many other criteria existed to classify the organic deposits and it remains still as controversial
issuewithnumerousapproachesavailableforvaryingpurposeofclassification.Soilfromorganicdepositsanditrefers
to a distinct mode of behavior different than traditional soil mechanics in certain respects. A possible approach is
beingconsideredbytheAmericansocietyforTestingandMaterialsforclassifyingorganicsoilshavingvaryingamount
oforganicmattercontents.TheclassificationisgiveninTable6.3.3.
3.5.2.2.2IdentificationandClassificationofExpansiveSoils
Expansive soils are those which swell considerably on absorption of water and shrink on the removal of water. In
monsoonseasons,expansivesoilsimbibewater,becomesoftandswell.Indrierseasons,thesesoilsshrinkorreduce
in volume due to evaporation of water and become harder. As such, the seasonal moisture variation in such soil
depositsaroundandbeneaththestructureresultsintosubsequentupwardanddownwardmovementsofstructures
leading to structural damage, in the form of wide cracks in the wall and distortion of floors. For identification and
classification of expansive soils parameters like free swell, free swell index, linear shrinkage, swelling potential,
swellingpressureandvolumechangeshouldbeevaluatedexperimentallyorfromavailablegeotechnicalcorrelation.
3.5.2.2.2IdentificationandClassificationofCollapsibleSoils
Soildepositsmostlikelytocollapseare;(i)loosefills,(ii)alteredwindblownsands,(iii)hillwashoflooseconsistency,
and(iv)decomposedgraniteorotheracidigneousrocks.
Averysimpletestforrecognizingcollapsiblesoilisthesaugestest.Twoundisturbedcylindricalsamples(sausages)
ofthesamediameterandlength(volume)arecarvedfromthesoil.Onesampleisthenwettedandkneadedtoforma
cylinderoftheoriginaldiameter.Adecreaseinlengthascomparedtotheoriginal,undisturbedcylinderwillconfirma
collapsiblegrainstructure.Collapseisprobablewhenthenaturalvoidratio,eiishigherthanacriticalvoidratio,ec
thatdependsonvoidratioseLandepatliquidlimitandplasticlimitsrespectively.
6161
Part6
StructuralDesign
Table6.3.2: EngineeringClassificationofSoils(CriteriaforAssigningGroupSymbolsandGroupNamesusing
LaboratoryTestsA)
Classification(Forparticlessmaller
than75mmandbasedonestimated
weights)
Gravels
(Morethan
50%of
coarse
fraction
retainedon
No.4sieve
(4.75mm)
Coarse
grainedsoils
(Morethan50%
ofthematerial
retainedonNo.
200sieve(0.075
mm)
Sands
Clean
gravels
Group
Symbol
GroupName B
GW
Wellgradedgravels,sandy
gravels,sandgravelmixture,
D
littleornofines.
GP
Clayeygravels,siltyclayey
D,F,G
gravels..
>12
Clean
Sands
SW
Wellgradedsand,gravelly
H
sand,littleornofines.
SP
Poorlygradedsands,gravelly
H
sand,littleornofines.
SM
Siltysand,poorlygradedsand
F,G,H
siltmixtures.
Inorganic
wL50
Organic
Soilsofhighorganicorigin
ML
Siltoflowtomedium
compressibility,veryfine
sands,rockflour,siltwith
K,L,M
sand.
CL
Claysoflowtomedium
plasticity,gravellyclay,sandy
K,L,M
clay,siltyclay,leanclay.
IP<4orthe
limitvalues
below'A'lineof
plasticitychart
IP>7andthe
limitvalues
above'A'lineof
PlasticityChart
For4>IP>7
andlimit
values
above
'A'line,dual
symbol
required*
Cu6and
1Cz3C
<5
Cu<6and/or
1>Cz>3C
>12E
Clayeysand,sandclay
F,G,H
mixtures.
IP<4orthe
limitvalues
below'A'lineof
Plasticitychart
IP>7andthe
limitvalues
above'A'lineof
plasticitychart
For4>IP>7
andlimit
values
aboveA
line,dual
symbols
required.
Limitvaluesonorbelow'A'lineofplasticity
chart&IP<4
Limitvaluesabove'A'lineof
plasticitychartand/orIP>4
K,L,M,N
OL
Organicclay
and
K,L,M,O
Organicsilt
oflowtomediumplasticity
Silts&
Clays
1>Cz>3
GC
Organic
Cu<4and/or
Siltygravels,siltysandy
D,F,G
gravels.
Inorganic
Poorlygradedgravels,sandy
gravels,Sandgravelmixture,
D
littleornofines.
GM
Finegrained
wL<50
soils
(Over
50%ofthe
material
smallerthan
0.075mm)
Cu4and
1Cz3
Gravel
withfines
(over50%of
coarse
fraction
Sandswith
smallerthan
fines
4.75mm)
Silts&
Clays
<5
SC
LaboratoryClassification
Percent
OtherCriteria
finer than
0.075mm
Liquidlimit(ovendried)
Liquidlimit(undried) <0.75
Limitvaluesonorbelow'A'lineofplasticity
chart
MH
Siltofhighplasticity,
micaceousfinesandyorsilty
K,L,M
soil,elasticsilt.
CH
Highplasticclay,fatclay.
M
OH
Organicclayofhighplasticity.
K,L,M,P
Liquidlimit(ovendried)
Liquidlimit(undried) <0.75
PT
Peatandhighlyorganicsoils.
K,L,M,Q
Identifiedbycolour,odour,fibroustexture
andspongycharacteristics.
K,L,
Limitvaluesabove'A'lineof
plasticitychart
6162
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
NOTES:
A Based on the material passing the 3-in. (75-mm) sieve

B If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add with cobbles or boulders, or both to group name.
C Cu = D60/D10, CZ = (D30)2 / (D10 D60)
D If soil contains 15 % sand, add with sand to group name.
E Gravels with 5 to 12 % fines require dual symbols:
GW-GM well-graded gravel with silt
GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay
GP-GM
poorly graded gravel with silt
GP-GC
poorly graded gravel with clay
F If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM, or SC-SM.

G If fines are organic, add with organic fines to group name.
H If soil contains 15 % gravel, add with gravel to group name.
I Sands with 5 to 12 % fines require dual symbols:
SW-SM well-graded sand with silt
SW-SC well-graded sand with clay
SP-SM
poorly graded sand with silt
SP-SC
poorly graded sand with clay.
J If Atterberg limits plot in hatched area, soil is a CL-ML, silty clay.

K If soil contains 15 to 29 % plus No. 200, add with sand or with gravel, whichever is predominant.
L If soil contains 30 % plus No. 200, predominantly sand, add sand to group name.
M If soil contains 30 % plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add gravelly to group name.
N PI 4 and plots on or above A line.
O PI < 4 or plots below A line.
P PI plots on or above A line.
Q PI plots below A line.
If desired, the percentages of gravel, sand, and fines may be stated in terms indicating a range of percentages, as follows:
Trace
Particles are present but estimated to be less than 5 %
Few
5 to 10 %
Little
15 to 25 %
Some
30 to 45 %
Mostly
50 to 100 %
Fig.6.3.1:PlasticityChart(basedonmaterialspassing425mSieve)
6163
Part6
StructuralDesign
Table6.3.3:ClassificationandDescriptionofOrganicSoils(afterEdil,1997)
OrganicContent
(TestMethod:ASTMD2974)
<5%
Description
Littleeffectonbehavior;consideredinorganicsoil.
6~20%
Effectspropertiesbutbehaviorisstilllikemineralsoils;organic
siltsandclays.
21~74%
Organicmattergovernsproperties;traditionalsoilmechanics
maybeapplicable;siltyorclayeyorganicsoils.
Displaysbehaviordistinctfromtraditionalsoilmechanics
especiallyatlowstress.
>75%
Thefollowingformulashouldbeusedtoestimatethecriticalvoidratio.
ec = 0.85 e L + 015 e P
(6.3.1)
Collapsiblesoils(withadegreeofsaturation,Sr0.6)shouldsatisfythefollowingcondition:
e L ei
0.10
1 + ei
(6.3.2)
Aconsolidationtestistobeperformedonanundisturbedspecimenatnaturalmoisturecontentandtorecordthe
thickness,Honconsolidationunderapressurepequaltooverburdenpressureplustheexternalpressurelikelyto
beexertedonthesoil.ThespecimenisthensubmergedunderthesamepressureandthefinalthicknessHrecorded.
Relativesubsidence,Isubsisfoundas:
I subs =
H H
H
(6.3.3)
SoilshavingIsubs0.02areconsideredtobecollapsible.
3.5.2.2.4IdentificationandClassificationofDispersiveSoils
Dispersivenatureofasoilisameasureoferosion.Dispersivesoilisduetothedispersedstructureofasoilmatrix.An
identificationofdispersivesoilscanbemadeonthebasisofpinholetest.
Thepinholetestwasdevelopedtodirectlymeasure dispersibilityof compactedfinegrainedsoilsinwhichwateris
madeto flow through a smallhole in a soil specimen, wherewater flow through the pinhole simulates waterflow
throughacrackorotherconcentratedleakagechannelintheimperviouscoreofadamorotherstructure.Thetestis
rununder50,180,380and1020mmheadsandthesoilisclassifiedasfollowsinTable6.3.4.
Table6.3.4:ClassificationofDispersiveSoilOntheBasisofPinholeTest(Sherardet.al.1976)
TestObservation
Failsrapidlyunder50mmhead.
Erodeslowlyunder50mmor180mmhead
Nocolloidalerosionunder380mmor1020mm
head
TypeofSoil
ClassofSoil
Dispersivesoils
D1andD2
Intermediatesoils
ND4andND3
Nondispersivesoils
ND2andND1
AnothermethodofidentificationistofirstdeterminethepHofa1:2.5soil/watersuspension.IfthepHisabove7.8,
thesoilmaycontainenoughsodiumtodispersethemass.Thendetermine:(i)totalexcahangablebases,thatis,K+,
Ca2+, Mg2+ and Na+ (milliequivalent per 100g of air dried soil) and (ii) cation exchange capacity (CEC) of soil
(milliequivalentper100gofairdriedsoil).TheExchangeableSodiumPercentageESPiscalculatedfromtherelation:
6164
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
ESP =
Chapter3
Na
100(%)
CEC
(6.3.4)
(6.3.5)
EmgPisgivenby:
EMgP =
Mg
100(%)
CEC
IftheESPisabove8percentandESPplusEMgPisabove15,dispersionwilltakeplace.ThesoilswithESP=7to10are
moderatelydispersiveincombinationwithreservoirwatersoflowdissolvedsalts.SoilswithESPgreaterthan15have
serious piping potential. Dispersive soils do not actually present any problems with building structures. However,
dispersive soil can lead to catastrophic failures of earth embankment dams as well as severe distress of road
embankments.
3.5.2.2.5IdentificationandClassificationofSoftInorganicSoils
Nostandarddefinitionexistsforsoftclaysintermsofconventionalsoilparameters,mineralogyorgeologicalorigin.It
is, however, commonly understood that soft clays give shear strength, compressibility and severe time related
settlement problems. In near surface clays, where form a crust, partial saturation and overconsolidation occur
togetherandtheoverconsolidationisaresultofthedryingoutoftheclayduetochangesinthewatertable.
In below surface clays, overconsolidation may have taken place when the clay was previously at, or close to the
ground surface and above the water table, but due to subsequent deposition the strata may now be below the
surface, saturated and overconsolidated. Partial saturation does not in itself cause engineering problems, but may
leadtolaboratorytestingdifficulties.Softclayshaveundrainedshearstrengthsbetweenabout10kPaand40kPa,in
otherwords,fromexudingbetweenthefingerswhensqueezedtobeingeasilymouldedinthefingers.
Softclayspresentveryspecialproblemsofengineeringdesignandconstruction.Foundationfailuresinsoftclaysare
comparativelycommon.Theconstructionofbuildingsinsoftclayshasalwaysbeenassociatedwithstabilityproblems
andsettlement.Shallowfoundationsinevitablyresultsinlargesettlementswhichmustbeaccommodatedforinthe
design, and which invariably necessitate longterm maintenance of engineered facilities. The following relationship
amongNvaluesobtainedfromSPT,consistencyandundrainedshearstrengthofsoftclaysmaybeusedasguides.
Nvalue(blows/300mmofpenetration)
Consistency
UndrainedShearStrength(kN/m2)
Below2
24
Verysoft
Soft
Lessthan20
2040
Undrainedshearstrengthishalfofunconfinedcompressivestrengthasdeterminedfromunconfinedcompression
testorhalfofthepeakdeviatorstressasobtainedfromunconsolidatedundrained(UU)triaxialcompressiontest.
3.6
MATERIALS
AllmaterialsfortheconstructionoffoundationsshallconformtotherequirementsofPart5:BuildingMaterials.
3.6.1 Concrete
All concrete materials and steel reinforcement used in foundations shall conform to the requirements specified in
Chapter 5 unless otherwise specified in this section. For different types of foundation the recommended concrete
properties are shown in Table 6.3.5. However, special considerations should be given for hostile environment
(salinity,acidicenvironment).
6165
Part6
StructuralDesign
Table6.3.5:PropertiesofConcreteforDifferentTypesofFoundations
Minimumcement
content
3
(kg/m )
SpecifiedMin.
28daysCylinder
Strength(MPa)
Slump
(mm)
Remarks
Footing/raft
350
20
25to125
Drilledshaft/Castinsitupile
(tremieconcrete)
400
18
125to200
Retarderand
plasticizer
recommended.
Drivenpile
350
25
25to125
FoundationType
3.6.2 Steel
3.7.2.1General
Corrosion in soil, water or moist outdoor environment is caused by electrochemical processes. The process takes
placeincorrosioncellsonthesteelsurface,whichconsistsofananodicsurface(wherethecorrosiontakesplace),a
cathodic surface (where oxygen is reduced) and the electrolyte, which reacts with these surfaces. In the case of
general corrosion, the surface erosion is relatively even across the entire surface. Local corrosion however is
concentratedtoalimitedsurfacearea.Pronouncedcavityerosionisratherunusualonunprotectedcarbonsteelin
soilorwater.
In many circumstances, steel corrosion rates are low and steel piles may be used for permanent works in an
unprotected condition. The degree of corrosion and whether protection is required depend upon the working
environmentwhichcanbevariable,evenwithinasingleinstallation.Undergroundcorrosionofsteelpilesdriveninto
undisturbed soils is negligible irrespective of the soi1 type and characteristics. The insignificant corrosion attack is
attributedtothelowoxygenlevelspresentinundisturbedsoil.Forthepurposeofcalculations,amaximumcorrosion
rateof0.015mmpersideperyearmaybeused.Inrecentfillsoilsorindustrialwastesoils,wherecorrosionrates
maybehigher,protectionsystemsshouldbeconsidered.
3.7.2.2AtmosphericCorrosion
AtmosphericcorrosionofsteelintheUKaveragesapproximately0035mm/sideperyearandthisvaluemaybeused
formostatmosphericenvironments.
3.7.2.3CorrosioninFreshWaters
Corrosionlossesinfreshwaterimmersionzonesaregenerallylowerthanforseawatersotheeffectivelifeofsteel
piles is normally proportionately longer. However, fresh waters arevariable and no general advice can begiven to
quantifytheincreaseinthelengthoflife.
3.7.2.4CorrosioninMarineEnvironments
Marine environments may include several exposure zones with different aggressivity and different corrosion
performance.
(a) Belowthebedlevel:Wherepilesarebelowthebedlevellittlecorrosionoccursandthecorrosionrategiven
forundergroundcorrosionisapplicable,thatis,0.015mm/sideperyear.
(b) Seawaterimmersionzone:Corrosionofsteelpi111nginimmersionconditionsisnormallylow,withamean
corrosionrateof0035mm/sideperyear.
(c) Tidalzones:Marinegrowthsinthiszonegivesignificantprotectiontothepiling,byshelteringthesteelfrom
waveactionbetweentidesandbylimitingtheoxygensupplytothesteelsurface.Thecorrosionrateofsteels
6166
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
in the tidal zone is similar to that of immersion zone corrosion, i.e. 0 035 mm/side per year. Protection
shouldbeprovidedwherenecessary,tothesteelsurfacestopreventtheremovalordamageofthemarine
growth.
(d) Lowwaterzone:Intidalwaters,thelowwaterlevelandthesplashzonearereasonsofhighestthickness
losses,whereameancorrosionrateof0075mm/sideperyearoccurs.Occasionallyhighercorrosionrates
areencounteredatthelowerwaterlevelbecauseofspecificlocalconditions.
(e) Splash and atmospheric zones: In the splash zone, which is a more aggressive environment than the
atmosphericzone,corrosionratesaresimilartothelowwaterlevel,i.e.0.075mm/sideperyear.Inthiszone
thickstratifiedrustlayersmaydevelopandatthicknessesgreaterthan10mmthesetendtospallfromthe
steelespeciallyoncurvedpartsofthepilessuchastheshouldersandtheclutches.Rusthasamuchgreater
volumethanthesteelfromwhichitisderivedsothatthesteelcorrosionlossesarerepresentedbysome10
%to20%oftherustthickness.
The boundary between the splash and atmospheric zones is not well defined, however, corrosion rates
diminishrapidlywithdistance above peakwave heightand themean atmosphericcorrosion rateof 0.035
mm/sideperyearcanbeusedforthiszone.
3.7.2.5MethodsofIncreasingEffectiveLife
Theeffectivelifeofunpaintedorotherwiseunprotectedsteelpilingdependsuponthecombinedeffectsofimposed
stressesandcorrosion.Wheremeasuresforincreasingtheeffectivelifeofastructurearenecessary,thefollowing
shouldbeconsidered;introductionofacorrosionallowance(i.e.oversizedcrosssectionsofpiles,highyieldsteeletc),
anticorrosionpainting,applicationofapolyethylene(PE)coating(onsteeltubepiles),zinccoating,electrochemical
(cathodic)protection,castingincementmortarorconcrete,anduseofatmosphericcorrosionresistantsteelproducts
insteadofordinarycarbonsteelinanyfoundationworkinvolvingsteel.
(a) Use of a heavier section: Effective life may be increased by the use of additional steel thickness as a
corrosion allowance. Maximum corrosion seldom occurs at the same position as the maximum bending
moment.Accordingly,theuseofacorrosionallowanceisacosteffectivemethodofincreasingeffectivelife.
Itispreferabletouseatmosphericcorrosionresistanthighstrengthlowalloysteel.
(b) Useofahighyieldsteel:Analternativetousingmildsteelinaheaviersectionistouseahigheryieldsteel
andretainthesamesection.
(c) Zinccoatings:Steelpilesshouldnormallybecoatedundershopconditions.Paintsshouldbeappliedtothe
cleaned surfaceby airless spraying and then cured rapidly to produce the required coatingthickness in as
few coats as possible. Hot zinccoating of steel piles in soil can achieve normally longlasting protection,
providedthatthezinclayerhassufficientthickness.Insomesoils,especiallythosewithlowpHvalues,the
corrosionofzinccanbehigh,therebyshorteningtheprotectionduration.LowpHvaluesoccurnormallyin
theaeratedzoneabovethelowestgroundwaterlevel.Insuchacase,itisrecommendedtoapplyprotection
paintontopofthezinclayer.
(d) Concreteencasement:Concreteencasementmaybeusedtoprotectsteelpilesinmarineenvironment.The
useofconcretemayberestrictedtothesplashzonebyextendingtheconcretecopetobelowthemeanhigh
waterlevel,bothsplashandtidalzonesmaybeprotectedbyextendingthecopetobelowthelowestwater
level.Theconcreteitselfshouldbeaquantitysufficienttoresistseawaterattack.
(e) Cathodicprotection:Thedesignandapplicationofcathodicprotectionsystemstomarinepilesstructuresisa
complex operation requiring the experience of specialist firms. Cathodic protection with electric current
applied to steel sheet pile wall. Rodtype anodes are connected directly with steel sheet pile Cathodic
protection is considered to be fully effective only up to the halftide mark. For zones above this level,
6167
Part6
StructuralDesign
including the splash zone, alternative methods of protection may be required, in addition to cathodic
protection.Wherecathodicprotectionisusedonmarinestructures,provisionshouldbemadeforearthing
shipsandburiedservicestothequay.
(f) Polyetheline coating: Steel tube piles can be protected effectively by application of a PEcover of a few
millimeter thickness. This cover can be applied in the factory and is usually placed on a coating of epoxy.
Steel tube piles in water, where the mechanical wear is low, can in this way be protected for long time
periods. When the steel tube piles with the PEcover are driven into coarsegrained soil, the effect of
damagingtheprotectionlayermustbetakenintoconsideration.
(g) Properly executed anticorrosion measures, using highquality methods can protect steel piles in soil or
wateroverperiodsof15to20years.PEcoverincombinationwithepoxycoatingcanachieveevenlonger
protectiontimes.
3.6.3 Timber
TimbermaybeusedonlyforfoundationoftemporarystructureandshallconformtothestandardsspecifiedinSec
2.9ofPart5.Wheretimberisexposedtosoilorusedasloadbearingpileabovegroundwaterlevel,itshallbetreated
inaccordancewithBDS819:1975.
3.7
TYPESOFFOUNDATION
3.7.1 ShallowFoundation
Shallow foundations spread the load to the ground at shallow depth. Generally, the capacity of this foundation is
derivedfrombearing.
3.7.1.1 Footing
Footings are foundations that spread the load to the ground at shallow depths. These include individual column
footings,continuouswallfootings,andcombinedfootings.Footingsshallbeprovidedunderwalls,pilasters,columns,
piers,chimneysetc.bearingonsoilorrock,exceptthatfootingsmaybeomittedunderpierormonolithicconcrete
wallsifsafebearingcapacityofthesoilorrockisnotexceeded.
3.7.1.2 Raft/Mat
Afoundationconsistingofcontinuousslabthatcoverstheentireareabeneaththestructureandsupportsallwalls
andcolumnsisconsideredasaraftormatfoundation.Araftfoundationmaybeoneofthefollowingtypes:
(a) Flatplateorconcreteslabofuniformthicknessusuallysupportingcolumnsspaceduniformlyandrestingon
soilsoflowcompressibility.
(b) Flatplatesasin(a)butthickenedundercolumnstoprovideadequateshearandmomentresistance.
(c) Twowayslabandbeamsystemsupportinglargelyspacedcolumnsoncompressiblesoil.
(d) Cellularraftorrigidframesconsistingofslabsandbasementwalls,usuallyusedforheavystructures.
3.7.2 DeepFoundation
Acylindrical/boxfoundationhavingaratioofdepthtobasewidthgreaterthan5isconsideredaDeepFoundation.
Generally,itscapacityisderivedfromfrictionandendbearing.
6168
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
3.7.2.1 Drivenpiles
A slender deep foundation unit made of materials such as steel, concrete, wood, or combination thereof, which is
premanufacturedandplacedbydriving,jacking,jettingorscrewinganddisplacingthesoil.
(a)Driven Precast Concrete Piles: Pile structure capable of being driven into the ground and able to resist
handlingstressesshallbeusedforthiscategoryofpiles.
(b) DrivenCastinsituConcretePiles:Apileformedbydrivingasteelcasingorconcreteshellinoneormore
pieces,whichmayremaininplaceafterdrivingorwithdrawn,withtheinsidefilledwithconcrete,fallsinthis
categoryofpiles.Sometimesanenlargedbasemaybeformedbydrivingoutaconcreteplug.
(c) Driven Prestressed Concrete Pile: A pile constructed in prestressed concrete in a casting yard and
subsequentlydriveninthegroundwhenithasattainedsufficientstrength.
(d) Timber Piles: structural timber (see Sec 2.9 of Part 5) shall be used as piles for temporary structures for
directlytransmittingtheimposedloadtosoil.Whendriventimberpolesareusedtocompactandimprove
thedeposit.
3.8.2.2 Boredpiles/castinsitupiles
A deep foundation of generally small diameter, usually less than 600 mm, constructed using percussion or rotary
drillingintothesoil.Theseareconstructedbyconcretingboreholesformedbyauguring,rotarydrillingorpercussion
drillingwithorwithoutusingbentonitemudcirculation.Excavationordrillingshallbecarriedoutinamannerthat
will not impair the carrying capacity of the foundations already in place or will not damage adjacent foundations.
Thesefoundationsmaybetestedforcapacitybyloadtestorforintegritybysonicresponseorothersuitablemethod.
Underreamingdrilledpierscanbeconstructedincohesivesoilstoincreasetheendbearing.
3.8.2.3 Drilledpier/drilledshafts
Thedrilledpierisatypeofboredpilehavingalargerdiameter(morethan600mm)constructedbyexcavatingthesoil
orsinkingthefoundation.
3.8.2.4
Caisson/well
Acaissonorwellfoundation isadeepfoundationoflargediameterrelativetoitslengththatisgenerallyahollow
shaftorboxwhichissunktoposition.Itdiffersfromothertypesofdeepfoundationinthesensethatitundergoes
rigidbodymovementunderlateralload,whereastheothersareflexiblelikeabeamundersuchloads.Thistypeof
foundationisusuallyusedforbridgesandmassivestructures.
PARTB:SERVICELOADDESIGNMETHODOFFOUNDATIONS(SECTIONS3.9to3.12)
3.8
SHALLOWFOUNDATION
ShallbeapplicabletoisolatedFootings,CombinedFootingsandRaft/Mats.
3.8.1 DistributionofBearingPressure
Footing shall be designed to keep the maximum imposed load within the safe bearing values of soil and rock. To
preventunequalsettlementfootingshallbedesignedtokeepthebearingpressureasnearlyuniformaspractical.
6169
Part6
StructuralDesign
For raft design, distribution of soil pressures should be consistent with the properties of the foundation materials
(subsoil) and the structure (raft thickness) and with the principles of geotechnical engineering. Mat or raft and
floatingfoundationsshallonlybeusedwhentheappliedloadofbuildingorstructureissoarrangedastoresultin
practicallyuniformlybalancedloading,andthesoilimmediatelybelowthematisofuniformbearingcapacity.
3.8.2 FootingsinFillSoil
Footings located in fill are subject to the same bearing capacity, settlement, and dynamic ground stability
considerationsasfootingsinnaturalsoil.Thebehaviorofbothfillandunderlyingnaturalsoilshouldbeconsidered.
3.8.3 SoilandRockPropertySelection
Soilandrockpropertiesdefiningthestrengthandcompressibilitycharacteristicsoffoundationmaterialsarerequired
for footing design. Foundation stability and settlement analysis for design shall be conducted using soil and rock
propertiesbasedontheresultsoffieldandlaboratorytesting.
3.8.4 MinimumDepthofFoundation
Theminimumdepthoffoundationshallbe1.5mforexteriorfootingofpermanentstructuresincohesivesoilsand2
mincohesionlesssoils.Fortemporarystructurestheminimumdepthofexteriorfootingshallbe400mm.Incaseof
expansiveandsoilssusceptibletoweatheringeffects,theabovementionedminimumdepthswillbenotapplicable
andmayhavetobeincreased.
3.8.5 Scour
Footingssupportedonsoilshallbeembeddedsufficientlybelowthemaximumcomputedscourdepthorprotected
withascourcountermeasure.
3.8.6 MassMovementofGroundinUnstableAreas
In certain areas mass movement of ground may occur from causes independent of the loads applied to the
foundation. These include mining subsidence, landslides on unstable slopes and creep on clay slopes. In areas of
groundsubsidence,foundationsandstructuresshouldbemadesufficientlyrigidandstrongtowithstandtheprobable
worstloadingconditions.Theconstructionofstructuresonslopeswhicharesuspectedofbeingunstableandsubject
to landslip shall be avoided. Spread foundations on such slopes shall be on a horizontal bearing and stepped. For
foundationsonclayslopes,thestabilityofthefoundationshouldbeinvestigated.
3.8.7 FoundationExcavation
Foundationexcavationbelowgroundwatertableparticularlyinsandshallbemadesuchthatthehydraulicgradient
atthebottomoftheexcavationisnotincreasedtoamagnitudethatwouldcasethefoundationsoilstoloosendueto
upwardflowofwater.Further,footingexcavationsshallbemadesuchthathydraulicgradientsandmaterialremoval
do not adversely affect adjacent structures. Seepage forces and gradients may be evaluated by standard flow net
procedures.Dewateringorcutoffmethodstocontrolseepageshallbeusedwhennecessary.
Incaseofsoilexcavationforraftfoundations,thefollowingissuesshouldbeadditionallytakenintoconsideration:
(a) Protectionfortheexcavationusingshoreorsheetpilesand/orretainingsystemwithorwithoutbracing,
anchorsetc.
(b) Considerationoftheadditionalbearingcapacityoftheraftforthedepthofthesoilexcavated.
(c) Considerationofthereductionofbearingcapacityforanyupwardbuoyancypressureofwater.
6170
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
3.9
Chapter3
GEOTECHNICALDESIGNOFSHALLOWFOUNDATIONS
3.9.1 General
Shallow foundations on soil shall be designed to support the design loads with adequate bearing and structural
capacityandwithtolerablesettlements.Inaddition,thecapacityoffootingssubjectedtoseismicanddynamicloads
shall be appropriately evaluated. The location of the resultant pressure on the base of the footings should be
maintainedpreferablywithinB/6ofthecentreofthefooting.
3.9.2 DesignLoad
Shallowfoundationdesign(consideringbearingcapacityduetoshearstrength)shallconsiderthemostunfavourable
effectofthefollowingcombinationsofloading:
(a)
FullDeadLoad+NormalLiveLoad
(b)
FullDeadLoad+NormalLiveLoad+WindLoadorSeismicLoad
(c)
0.9(FullDeadLoad)+BuoyancyPressure
Shallow foundation design (considering settlement) shall consider the most unfavourable effect of the following
combinationsofloading:
SAND
(a)
FullDeadLoad+NormalLiveLoad
(b)
FullDeadLoad+NormalLiveLoad+WindLoadorSeismicLoad
CLAY
FullDeadLoad+0.5NormalLiveLoad
3.9.3 Bearingcapacity
When physical characteristics such as cohesion, angle of internal friction, density etc. are available, the bearing
capacity shall be calculated from stability considerations. Established bearing capacity equations shall be used for
calculating bearing capacity. A factor of safety of between 2.0 to 3.0 (depending on the extent of soil exploration,
qualitycontrolandmonitoringofconstruction)shallbeadoptedtoobtainallowablebearingpressurewhendeadload
andnormalliveloadisused.Thirtythreepercentoverstressingaboveallowablepressureshallbeallowedincaseof
designconsideringwindorseismicloading.Allowableloadshallalsolimitsettlementbetweensupportingelementsto
atolerablelimit.
3.9.4 PresumptiveBearingCapacityforPreliminaryDesign
Forlightlyloadedandsmallsizedstructures(twostoriedorlessinoccupancycategoryA,B,C&D)andforpreliminary
design of any structure, the presumptive bearing values (allowable) as given in Table 6.3.6 may be assumed for
uniformsoilintheabsenceoftestresults.
Table6.3.6:PresumptiveValuesofBearingCapacityforLightlyLoadedStructures*
SoilType
SoilDescription
SoftRockorShale
Gravel,sandygravel,siltysandygravel;verydenseandofferhighresistanceto
penetrationduringexcavation(soilshallincludethegroupsGW,GP,GM,GC)
SafeBearingCapacity,kPa
440
400**
6171
Part6
StructuralDesign
SoilType
SoilDescription
SafeBearingCapacity,kPa
Sand(otherthanfinesand),gravellysand,siltysand;dry(soilshallincludethe
groupsSW,SP,SM,SC)
200**
Finesand;loose&dry(soilshallincludethegroupsSW,SP)
100**
Silt,clayey silt,clayeysand;drylumpswhichcanbeeasilycrushedbyfinger(soil
shallincludethegroupsML,,SC,&MH)
150
Clay,sandyclay;canbeindentedwithstrongthumbpressure(soilshallincludethe
groupsCL,&CH)
150
Softclay;canbeindentedwithmodestthumbpressure(soilshallincludethe
groupsCL,&CH)
100
Very soft clay; can be penetrated several centimeters with thumb pressure (soil
shallincludethegroupsCL&CH)
50
Organicclay&Peat(soilshallincludethegroupsOH,OL,Pt)
10
Fills
Tobedeterminedafter
investigation.
Tobedeterminedafter
investigation.
* Twostoriesorless(OccupancycategoryA,B,CandDasperBNBC)
** 50%ofthesevaluesshallbeusedwherewatertableisabovethebase,orbelowitwithinadistanceequaltothe
leastdimensionoffoundation
3.9.5 AllowableIncreaseofBearingPressureduetoWindandEarthquakeForces
Theallowablebearingpressureofthesoildeterminedinaccordancewiththissectionmayaybeincreasedby33per
centwhenlateralforcesduetowindorearthquakeactsimultaneouslywithgravityloads.Noincreaseinallowable
bearingpressureshallbepermittedforgravityloadsactingalone.Inazonewhereseismicforcesexist,possibilityof
liquefactioninloosesand,siltandsandysoilsshallbeinvestigated.
3.9.6 SettlementofFoundation
Foundationshallbeso designedthattheallowable bearingcapacity is notexceeded,andthetotal anddifferential
settlementarewithinpermissiblevalues.Foundationscansettleinvariouswaysandeachaffectstheperformanceof
thestructure.Thesimplestmodeconsistsoftheentirestructuresettlinguniformly.Thismodedoesnotdistortthe
structure. Any damage done is related to the interface between the structure and adjacent ground or adjacent
structures. Shearing of utility lines could be a problem. Another possibility is that one side of the structure settles
muchmorethantheoppositesideandtheportionsinbetweensettleproportionately.Thiscausesthestructureto
tilt,butitstilldoesnotdistort.Anominaltiltwillnotaffecttheperformanceofthestructure,althoughitmaycreate
aestheticandpublicconfidenceproblems.However,asaresultofdifferenceinfoundationsettlementthestructure
maysettleanddistortcausingcracksinwallsandfloors,jammingofdoorsandwindowsandoverloadingofstructural
members.
3.9.7 TotalSettlement
Totalsettlement()istheabsoluteverticalmovementofthefoundationfromitsasconstructedpositiontoitsloaded
position.Totalsettlementoffoundationduetonetimposedloadshallbeestimatedinaccordancewithestablished
engineeringprinciple.Anestimateofsettlementwithrespecttothefollowingshallbemadewhereapplicable:
6172
(i)
Elasticcompressionoftheunderlyingsoilbelowthefoundationandofthefoundation.
(ii)
Consolidationsettlement.
(iii)
Secondaryconsolidation/compressionoftheunderlyingsoil.
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
(iv)
Compression and volume changedue to change ineffective stress or soil migration associatedwith
loweringormovementofgroundwater.
(v)
Seasonalswellingandshrinkageofexpansiveclays.
(vi)
Groundmovementonearthslopes,suchassurfaceerosion,creeporlandslide.
(vii)
Settlementduetoadjacentexcavation,miningsubsidenceandundergrounderosion.
Innormalcircumstancesofinorganicandorganicsoildepositsthetotalsettlementisattributedduetothefirstthree
factorsasmentionedabove.Theotherfactorsareregardedasspecialcases.Becausesoilsettlementcanhaveboth
timedepended and noontimedependent components, it is often categorized in terms shortterm settlement (or
immediate settlement) which occurs as quickly as the load is applied, and longterm settlement (or delayed
settlement), whichoccurs over some longer period. Many engineersassociate consolidation settlement solelywith
thelongtermsettlementofclay.However,thisisnotstrictlytrue.Consolidationisrelatedtovolumechangedueto
changeineffectivestressregardlessofthetypeofsoilorthetimerequiredforthevolumechange.
3.9.7.1
Elastic/DistortionSettlement
Elastic Settlement (d) of foundation soils results from lateral movements of the soil without volume change in
responsetochangesineffectiveverticalstress.ThisisnontimedependentphenomenonandsimilartothePoissons
effectwhereanobjectisloadedintheverticaldirectionexpandslaterally.Elasticordistortionsettlementsprimarily
occurwhentheloadisconfinedtoasmallarea,suchasastructuralfoundation,orneartheedgesoflargeloaded
areasuchasembankments.
3.9.7.2
ImmediateSettlement/ShortTermSettlement
Thisverticalcompressionoccursimmediatelyaftertheapplicationofloadingeitheronaccountofelasticbehaviour
thatproducesdistortionatconstantvolumeandonaccountofcompressionofairvoid.Thisissometimesdesignated
asi.forsandysoils,eventheconsolidationcomponentisimmediate.
3.9.7.3
PrimaryConsolidationSettlement
Primaryconsolidationsettlementorsimplytheconsolidationsettlement(c)offoundationisduetoconsolidationof
theunderlyingsaturated or nearly saturated soil especially cohesivesiltor clay. The full deal load and 50%of the
totalliveloadshouldbeconsideredwhencomputingtheconsolidationsettlementoffoundationsonclaysoils.
3.9.7.4
SecondaryConsolidationSettlement
Secondaryconsolidationsettlement(s)ofthefoundationisduetosecondarycompressionorconsolidationofthe
underlyingsaturatedornearlysaturatedcohesivesiltorclay.Thisisprimarilyduetoparticlereorientation,creep,and
decompositionoforganicmaterials.Secondarycompressionisalwaystimedependentandcanbesignificantinhighly
plasticclays,organicsoils,andsanitarylandfills,butitisnegligibleinsandsandgravels.
3.9.7.5
DifferentialSettlementanditsEffectontheStructure
Differential settlement is the difference in total settlement between two foundations or two points in the same
foundation.Itoccursasaresultofrelativemovementbetweentwopartsofabuilding.Therelatedtermsdescribing
the effects of differential settlement on the structural as a whole or on parts of it are tilt, rotation and angular
distortion/relativerotationwhicharedefinedbelow.
6173
Part6
StructuralDesign
3.9.7.6
Tilt
It is rotation of the entire superstructure or a well defined part of it as a result of nonuniform or differential
settlementoffoundationasaresultofwhichonesideofthebuildingsettlesmorethantheotherthusaffectingthe
verticalityofthebuilding.
3.9.7.7
Rotation
It is the angle between the horizontal line and an imaginary straight line connecting any two foundations or two
pointsinasinglefoundation.
3.9.7.8
AngularDistortion/RelativeRotation
Angular distortion or relative rotation is the angle between imaginary straight line indicating the overall tilt of a
structureandtheimaginaryconnectinglineindicatingtheinclinationofaspecificpartofit.Itismeasuredastheratio
ofdifferentialsettlementtothedistancebetweenthetwopoints..
3.9.8 CausesofDifferentialSettlement
Dueconsiderationshallbegiventoestimatethedifferentialsettlementthatmayoccurunderthebuildingstructure
underthefollowingcircumstances:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Nonuniformityinsubsoilformationwithintheareacoveredbythebuildingduetogeologicorman
madecauses,oranomaliesintype,structure,thicknessanddensityoftheformation.
Nonuniformpressuredistributionduetononuniformandincompleteloading.
Groundwaterconditionduringandafterconstruction.
Loadinginfluenceofadjacentstructures.
(v)
Unevenexpansionandcontractionduetomoisturemigration,unevendrying,wettingorsoftening.
3.9.9 TolerableSettlement,TiltandRotation
Allowableorlimitingsettlementofabuildingstructurewilldependonthenatureofthestructure,thefoundationand
the soil. Different types of structures have varying degrees of tolerance to settlements and distortions. These
variations depend on the type of construction, use of the structure, rigidity of the structure and the presence of
sensitive finishes. As a general rule, a total settlement of 25 mm and a differential settlement of 20 mm between
columns in most buildings shall be considered safe for buildings on isolated pad footings on sand for workingload
(unfactored). A total settlement of 40 mm and a differential settlement of 20 mm between columns shall be
considered safe for buildings on isolated pad footings on clay soil for working load. Buildings on raft can usually
tolerate greater total settlements. Limiting tolerance for distortion and deflections introduced in a structure is
necessarily a subjective process, depending on the status of the building and any specific requirements for
serviceability.Thelimitingvalues,giveninTable6.3.7maybefollowedasguidelines.
3.9.10 DynamicGroundStabilityorLiquefactionAnalysis
Soilliquefactionisaphenomenoninwhichasaturatedsoildepositloosesmost,ifnotall,ofitsstrengthandstiffness
duetothegenerationofexcessporewaterpressureduringearthquakeinducedgroundshaking.Ithasbeenamajor
cause for damage of structures during past earthquakes (e.g., 1964 Niigata Earthquake). Current knowledge of
liquefactionissignificantlyadvancedandseveralevaluationmethodsareavailable.Hazardsduetoliquefactionare
routinelyevaluatedandmitigatedinseismicallyactivedevelopedpartsoftheworld.
6174
Vol.2
Table6.3.7:PermissibleTotalSettlement,DifferentialSettlementandAngularDistortion(tilt)forShallowFoundationsinSoils(AdaptedfromNBCI,2005)
TypeofStructure
IsolatedFoundations
SandandHardClay
RaftFoundation
PlasticClay
SandandHardClay
PlasticClay
Maximum
Settlement
(mm)
Differential
Settlement
(mm)
Angular
Distortion
(mm)
Maximum
Settlement
(mm)
Differential
Settlement
(mm)
Angular
Distortion
(mm)
Maximum
Settlement
(mm)
Differential
Settlement
(mm)
Angular
Distortion
(mm)
Maximum
Settlement
(mm)
Differential
Settlement
(mm)
Angular
Distortion
(mm)
SteelStructure
50
0.0033L
1/300
50
0.0033L
1/300
75
0.0033L
1/300
100
0.0033L
1/300
RCCStructures
50
0.0015L
1/666
75
0.0015L
1/666
75
0.0021L
1/500
100
0.002L
1/500
60
0.002L
1/500
75
0.002L
1/500
75
0.0025L
1/400
125
0.0033L
1/300
(i)L/H=2*
60
0.0002L
1/5000
60
0.0002L
1/5000
Notlikelytobeencountered
(ii)L/H=7*
60
0.0004L
1/2500
60
0.0004L
1/2500
Notlikelytobeencountered
Silos
50
0.0015L
1/666
75
0.0015L
1/666
100
0.0025L
1/400
125
0.0025L
1/400
WaterTank
50
0.0015L
1/666
75
0.0015L
1/666
100
0.0025L
1/400
125
0.0025L
1/400
MultistoriedBuilding
(a)RCCorsteelframed
buildingwithpanel
walls
(b)Loadbearingwalls
Note:ThevaluesgivenintheTablemaybetakenonlyasaguideandthepermissibletotalsettlement,differentialsettlementandtilt(angulardistortion)ineachcaseshouldbedecidedasper
requirementsofthedesigner.
Ldenotesthelengthofdeflectedpartofwall/raftorcentretocentredistancebetweencolumns.
Hdenotestheheightofwallfromfoundationfooting.
*ForintermediateratiosofL/H,thevaluescanbeinterpolated.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6175
LiquefactionAnalysis
Liquefaction can be analyzed by a simple comparison of the seismically induced shear stress with the similarly
expressedshearstressrequiredtocauseinitialliquefactionorwhateverlevelofshearstrainamplitudeisdeemed
intolerableindesign.Usually,theoccurrenceof5%doubleamplitude(DA)axialstrainisadoptedtodefinethecyclic
strengthconsistentwith100%porewaterpressurebuildup.Thecorrespondingstrength(CRR)canbeobtainedby
severalprocedures.
Thus,theliquefactionpotentialofasanddepositisevaluatedintermsoffactorofsafetyFL,definedasinEquation
(6.3.6).Theexternallyappliedcyclicstressratio(CSR)canbeevaluatedbyEquations(6.3.7a,6.3.7band6.3.8).
FL =
CRR
CSR
(6.3.6)
IfthefactorofsafetyFLis<1,liquefactionissaidtotakeplace.Otherwise,liquefactiondoesnotoccur.Thefactorof
safetyobtainedinthiswayisgenerallyusedtoidentify thedepthtowhichliquefactionisexpectedtooccurina
futureearthquake.Thisinformationisnecessaryifsomecountermeasureistobeimplementedinaninsitudeposit
ofsands.
Thecyclicshearstressinducedatanypointinlevelgroundduringanearthquakeduetotheupwardpropagationof
shearwavescanbeassessedbymeansofasimpleprocedureproposed.Ifasoilcolumntoadepthzisassumedto
movehorizontallyandifthepeakhorizontalaccelerationonthegroundsurfaceis amax ,themaximumshearstress
max actingatthebottomofthesoilcolumnisgivenby
max = amax rd ( t )(z / g )
and,
rd = 1 0.015z
(6.3.7a)
(6.3.7b)
Wheretisunitweightofthesoil,gisthegravitationalaccelerationandrdisastressreductioncoefficienttoallow
forthedeformabilityofthesoilcolumn(rd<1).ItisrecommendedtousetheempiricalformulagiveninEquation
(6.3.7b)tocomputestressreductioncoefficientrd,wherezisinmeters.DivisionofbothsidesofEquation(6.3.7a)
bytheeffectiveverticalstress v gives
CSR =
max a max v
=
rd '
g
v'
v
(6.3.8)
Where,v=tz isthe total vertical stress. Equation (6.3.8) has been used widelyto assessthe magnitude of shear
stressinducedinasoilelementduringanearthquake.OneoftheadvantagesofEquation(6.3.8)isthatallthevast
amountofinformationonthehorizontalaccelerationsthathaseverbeenrecordedonthegroundsurfacecanbe
useddirectlytoassesstheshearstressinducedbyseismicshakinginthehorizontalplanewithintheground.
The second step is to determine the cyclic resistance ratio (CRR) of the in situ soil. The cyclic resistance ratio
represents the liquefaction resistance of the in situ soil. The most commonly used method for determining the
liquefactionresistanceistousethedataobtainedfromthestandardpenetrationtest.Acyclictriaxialtestmayalso
beusedtoestimateCRRmoreaccurately.
SiteAmplificationFactor
Site response analysis of a site may be carried out to estimate the site amplification factor. For this purpose,
dynamic parameters such as shear modulus and damping factors need to be estimated. The site amplification
factorisrequiredtoestimatetheamaxforagivensiteproperly.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6176
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
3.9.11 PrinciplesofStructuralDesignofFoundations
3.9.11.1
LoadsandReactions
3.9.11.1.1 DeterminationofLoadsandReactions
Footingsshallbeconsideredasundertheactionofdownwardforces,duetothesuperimposedloads,resistedbyan
upwardpressureexertedbythefoundationmaterialsanddistributedovertheareaofthefootingsasdetermined
by the eccentricity of the resultant of the downward forces. Where piles are used under footings, the upward
reactionofthefoundationshallbeconsideredasaseriesofconcentratedloadsappliedatthepilecenters,eachpile
beingassumedtocarrythecomputedportionofthetotalfootingload.
3.9.11.1.2 IsolatedandMultipleFootingReactions
Whenasingleisolatedfootingsupportsacolumn,pierorwall,thefootingshallbeassumedtoactasacantilever
element. When footings support more than one column, pier, or wall, the footing slab shall be designed for the
actualconditionsofcontinuityandrestraint.
RaftFoundationReactions
3.9.11.1.3
Fordeterminingthedistributionofcontactpressurebelowaraftitisanalysedeitherasarigidorflexiblefoundation
consideringtherigidityoftheraft,andtherigidityofthesuperstructureandthesupportingsoil.Considerationshall
begiventotheincreasedcontactpressuredevelopedalongtheedgesofraftoncohesivesoilsandthedecreasein
contact pressure along the edges on granular soils. Any appropriate analytical method reasonably valid for the
conditionmaybeused.Choiceofaparticularmethodshallbegovernedbythevalidityoftheassumptionsinthe
particularcase.Numericalanalysisofraftsusingappropriatesoftwaremaybeusedfordeterminationofreactions,
shearsandmoments.
Analyticalmethods(basedonbeamsonelasticfoundation)andnumericalmethodsrequirevaluesofthemodulus
of subgrade reaction of the soil. For use in preliminary analysis and design, indicative values of the modulus of
subgradereactionforcohesionlesssoilsandcohesivesoilsishowninTable6.3.7andTable6.3.8,respectively.
(6.3.9)
Table6.3.7:ModulusofSubgradeReaction(k)forCohesionlessSoils
SoilCharacteristic
*ModulusofSubgradeReaction(k)Soil
3
Characteristic(kN/m )
Relative
Density
StandardPenetrationTest
Value(N)(Blowsper300
mm)
ForDryorMoistState
Loose
<10
15000
9000
Medium
10to30
15000to47000
9000to29000
Dense
30andover
47000to180000
29000to108000
ForSubmergedState
*Theabovevaluesapplytoasquareplate300mmx300mmorbeams300mmwide.
6177
Part6
StructuralDesign
Table6.3.8ModulusofSubgradeReaction(k)forCohesiveSoils
SoilCharacteristic
Consistency
UnconfinedCompressiveStrength
2
(kN/m )
Stiff
100to200
ModulusofSubgradeReaction,k
(kN/m3)
27000
VeryStiff
200to400
27000to54000
Hard
400andover
54000to108000
*Thevaluesapplytoasquareplate300mmx300mm.Theabovevaluesarebasedontheassumption
thattheaverageloadingintensitydoesnotexceedhalftheultimatebearingcapacity.
3.9.11.2
Moment
3.9.11.2.1
CriticalSection
Externalmomentonanysectionofafootingshallbedeterminedbypassingaverticalplanethroughthefootingand
computingthemomentoftheforcesactingovertheentireareaofthefootingononesideofthatverticalplane.
Thecriticalsectionforbendingshallbetakenatthefaceofthecolumn,pier,orwall.Inthecaseofcolumnsthatare
not square or rectangular, the section shall be taken at the side of the concentric square of equivalent area. For
footingsundermasonrywalls,thecriticalsectionshallbetakenhalfwaybetweenthemiddleandedgeofthewall.
Forfootingsundermetalliccolumnbases,thecriticalsectionshallbetakenhalfwaybetweenthecolumnfaceand
theedgeofthemetallicbase.
3.9.11.2.2
DistributionofReinforcement
Reinforcementofsquarefootingsshallbedistributeduniformlyacrosstheentirewidthoffooting.Reinforcementof
rectangular footings shall be distributed uniformly across the entire width of footing in the long direction. In the
shortdirection,theportionofthetotalreinforcementgivenbythefollowingequationshallbedistributeduniformly
overabandwidth(centeredoncenterlineofcolumnorpier)equaltothelengthoftheshortsideofthefooting.
(6.3.10)
Here,istheratioofthefootinglengthtowidth.Theremainderofreinforcementrequiredintheshortdirection
shallbedistributeduniformlyoutsidethecenterbandwidthoffooting.
3.9.11.2.3 Shear
3.9.11.2.4 CriticalSection
Computationofshearinfootings,andlocationofcriticalsectionshallbeinaccordancewithrelevantsectionsofthe
structuraldesignpartofthecode.Locationofcriticalsectionshall be measuredfromthefaceof column,pieror
wall, for footings supporting a column, pier, or wall. For footings supporting a column or pier with metallic base
plates, the critical section shall be measured from the location defined in the critical section for moments for
footings.
3.9.11.2.5 CriticalSectionforFootingsonDrivenPiles/BoredPiles/DrilledPiers
Shearonthecriticalsectionshallbeinaccordancewiththefollowing.Entirereactionfromanydrivenpileorbored
piles,anddrilledpierwhosecenterislocateddP/2(dP=diameterofthepile)ormoreoutsidethecriticalsectionshall
be considered as producing shear on that section. Reaction from any driven pile or drilled shaft whose center is
locateddP/2ormoreinsidethecriticalsectionshallbeconsideredasproducingnoshearonthatsection.Forthe
intermediate position of driven pile or drilled shaft centers, the portion ofthe driven pile or shaft reactionto be
6178
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
considered as producing shear on the critical section shall be based on linear interpolation between full value at
dP/2outsidethesectionandzerovalueatdP/2insidethesection.
3.9.11.3
ReinforcementandDevelopmentLength
3.9.11.3.1
DevelopmentLength
Computationofdevelopmentlengthofreinforcementinfootingsshallbeinaccordancewiththerelevantsections
ofthestructuraldesignpartofthecode.
3.9.11.3.2
CriticalSection
Criticalsectionsfordevelopmentlengthofreinforcementshallbeassumedatthesamelocationsasdefinedabove
asthecriticalsectionformomentsandatallotherverticalplaneswherechangesinsectionorreinforcementoccur.
3.9.11.4
TransferofForceatBaseofColumn
3.9.11.4.1
TransferofForce
All forces and moments applied at base of column or pier shall be transferred to top of footing by bearing on
concreteandbyreinforcement.
3.9.11.4.2
LateralForce
Lateralforcesshallbetransferredtosupportingfootinginaccordancewithsheartransferprovisionsoftherelevant
sectionsofthestructuraldesignpartofthecode.
3.9.11.4.3
BearingStrengthofConcrete
Bearing on concrete at contact surface between supporting and supported member shall not exceed concrete
bearingstrengthforeithersurface.
3.9.11.4.4
Reinforcement
Reinforcementshallbeprovidedacrossinterfacebetweensupportingandsupportedmembereitherbyextending
main longitudinal reinforcement into footings or by dowels. Reinforcement across interface shall be sufficient to
satisfyallofthefollowing:
(i)
Reinforcement shall be provided to transfer all force that exceeds concrete bearing strength in
supportingandsupportedmember.
(ii)
If it is required that loading conditions include uplift, total tensile force shall be resisted by
reinforcement.
(iii)
3.9.11.4.5
Area of reinforcement shall not be less than 0.005 times gross area of supported member, with a
minimumof4bars.
DowelSize
Diameterofdowels,ifused,shallnotexceedthediameteroflongitudinalreinforcements.
3.9.11.4.6
DevelopmentLengthandSplicing
Fortransferofforcebyreinforcement,developmentlengthofreinforcementinsupportingandsupportedmember,
requiredsplicingshallbeinaccordancewiththerelevantsections(Part.6,Chapter6)ofthestructuraldesignpartof
thecode.
6179
Part6
StructuralDesign
3.10 GeotechnicalDesignofDeepFoundations
3.10.1 DrivenPiles
Theprovisionsofthisarticleshallapplytothedesignofaxiallyandlaterallyloadeddrivenpilesinsoil.Drivenpile
foundation shall be designed and installed on the basis of a site investigation report that will include subsurface
exploration at locations and depths sufficient to determine the position and adequacy of the bearing soil unless
adequatedataisavailableuponwhichthedesignandinstallationofthepilescanbebased.Thereportshallinclude:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Recommendedpiletypeandcapacities
Drivingandinstallationprocedure
Fieldinspectionprocedure
Pileloadtest,integritytestrequirements
Durabilityandqualityofpilematerial
Designationofbearingstratumorstrata
Aplanshowingclearlythedesignationofallpilesbyanidentifyingsystemshallbefiledpriortoinstallationofsuch
piles.Alldetailedrecordsforindividualpilesshallbearanidentificationcorrespondingtothatshownontheplan.A
copyofsuchplanshallbeavailableatthesiteforinspectionatalltimesduringtheconstruction.
Thedesignandinstallationofdrivenpilefoundationsshallbeunderthedirectsupervisionofacompetentengineer
whoshallcertifythatthepilesasinstalledsatisfythedesigncriteria
3.10.1.1
Application
Pile driving may be considered when footings cannot be founded on granular or stiff cohesive soils within a
reasonable depth. At locations where soil conditions would normally permit the use of spread footings but the
potential for scour exists, piles may be driven as a protection against scour. Piles may also be driven where an
unacceptableamountofsettlementofspreadfootingsmayoccur
3.10.1.2
Materials
Driven piles may be castinplace concrete, precast concrete, prestressed concrete, timber, structural steel
sections,steelpipe,oracombinationofmaterials.
3.10.1.3
Penetration
Pilepenetrationshallbedetermined basedonverticalandlateralloadcapacitiesof boththepileandsubsurface

materials. In general, the design penetration for any pile shall be not less than 3m into hard cohesive or dense
granularmaterial,norlessthan6mintosoftcohesiveorloosegranularmaterial.
3.10.1.4
EstimatedPileLength
Estimatedpilelengthsofdrivenpilesshallbeshownonthedrawingandshallbebaseduponcarefulevaluationof
availablesubsurfaceinformation,axialandlateralcapacitycalculations,and/orpastexperience.
3.10.1.5
DrivenPileTypes
Drivenpilesshallbeclassifiedas"friction"or"endbearing"oracombinationofbothaccordingtothemannerin
which load transfer is developed. The ultimate load capacity of a pile consists of two parts. One part is due to
frictioncalledskinfrictionorshaftfrictionorsideshear,andtheotherisduetoendbearingatthebaseortipofthe
pile.Iftheskinfrictionisgreaterthanabout80%oftheendbearingloadcapacity,thepileisdeemedafrictionpile
and,ifthereverse,anendbearingpile.Iftheendbearingisneglected,thepileiscalledafloatingpile.
6180
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
3.10.1.6
Chapter3
BatterPiles
When the lateral resistance of the soil surrounding the piles is inadequate to counteract the horizontal forces
transmittedtothefoundation,orwhenincreasedrigidityoftheentirestructureisrequired,batterpilesshouldbe
used in the foundation. Where negative skin friction loads are expected, batter piles should be avoided, and an
alternatemethodofprovidinglateralrestraintshouldbeused.
Freestandingbatterpilesaresubjecttobendingmomentsduetotheirownweight,orexternalforcesfromother
sources. Batter piles in loose fill or consolidating deposits may become laterally loaded due to settlement of the
surroundingsoil.Inconsolidatingclay,specialprecautions,likeprovisionofpermanentcasing,shallbetaken.
3.10.1.7
SelectionofSoilandRockProperties
Soil and rock properties defining the strength and compressibility characteristics of the foundation materials, are
requiredfordrivenpiledesign.
3.10.1.8
DesignofPileCapacity
The design pile capacity is the maximum load that the driven pile shall support with tolerable movement. In
determiningthedesignpilecapacitythefollowingitemsshallbeconsidered:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Ultimategeotechnicalcapacity(axialandlateral).
Structuralcapacityofpilesection(axialandlateral).
Theallowableaxialloadonapileshallbetheleastvalueoftheabovetwocapacities.
Indeterminingthedesignaxialcapacity,considerationshallbegiventothefollowing:
(i)
Theinfluenceoffluctuationsintheelevationofgroundwatertableoncapacity.
(ii)
Theeffectsofdrivingpilesonadjacentstructureandslopes.
(iii)
Theeffectsofnegativeskinfrictionordownloadsfromconsolidatingsoilandtheeffectsofliftloads
fromexpansiveorswellingsoils.
(iv)
Theinfluenceofconstructiontechniquessuchasaugeringorjettingonpilecapacity.
(v)
Thedifferencebetweenthesupportingcapacitysinglepileandthatofagroupofpiles.
(vi)
Thecapacityofanunderlyingstratatosupportloadofthepilegroup;
(vii)
Thepossibilityofscouranditseffectonaxiallateralcapacity.
3.10.1.9
UltimateGeotechnicalCapacityofDrivenPileforAxialLoad
Theultimateloadcapacity,Qult,ofapileconsistsoftwoparts.Onepartisduetofrictioncalledskinfrictionorshaft
friction or side shear, Qs andthe other is due to endbearing atthe base or tip ofthe pile,Qb The ultimate axial
capacity(Qult)ofdrivenpilesshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththefollowingforcompressionloading.
Qult
= Qs + Qb W
(6.3.11)
(6.3.12)
6.3.13
Forupliftloading;
Qult 0.7Qs + W
Theallowableorworkingaxialloadshallbedeterminedas:
Qallow = Qult / FS
Where,WistheweightofthepileandFSisagrossfactorofsafetyusuallygreaterthan2.5.Often,forcompression
loading,theweighttermisneglectediftheweight,W,isconsideredinestimatingimposedloading.
6181
Part6
StructuralDesign
Theultimatebearingcapacity(skinfrictionand/orendbearing)ofasingleverticalpilemaybedeterminedbyanyof
thefollowingmethods.
(i)
Bytheuseofstaticbearingcapacityequations
(ii)
BytheuseofSPTandCPT
(iii)
Byfieldloadtests
(iv)
Bydynamicmethods
3.10.1.10
StaticBearingCapacityEquationsforPileCapacity
Theskinfriction,QsandendbearingQbcanbecalculatedas:
QS
= AS f S
(6.3.14a)
(6.3.14b)
and;
Qb = Ab f b
Where,
As= skinfrictionarea(perimeterarea)ofthepile=PerimeterLength
fs= skin frictional resistance on unit surface area of pile, that depends on soil properties and loading
conditions(drainedorundrained)
Ab= endbearingareaofthepile=Crosssectionalareaofpiletip(bottom)
fb= endbearingresistanceonunittipareaofpile,thatdependsonsoilpropertiestoadepthof2B(Bis
thediameterforacircularpilesectionorlengthofsidesforasquarepilesection)fromthepiletip
andloadingconditions(drainedorundrained)
Foralayeredsoilsystemcontainingnnumberoflayers,endbearingresistancecanbecalculatedconsideringsoil
propertiesofthelayeratwhichthepilerests,andtheskinfrictionresistanceconsidersallthepenetratinglayers
calculatedas:
(6.3.15)
Where,Zi representsthethicknessofany(ith)layerand(Perimeter)iistheperimeterofthepileinthatlayer.The
mannerinwhichskinfrictionistransferredtotheadjacentsoildependsonthesoiltype.Infinegrainedsoils,the
loadtransferisnonlinearanddecreaseswithdepth.Asaresult,elasticcompressionofthepileisnotuniform;more
compressionoccursonthetoppartthanonthebottompartofthepile.Forcoarsegrainedsoils,theloadtransferis
approximatelylinearwithdepth(higherloadsatthetopandlowerloadsatthebottom).
Inordertomobilizeskinfrictionandendbearing,somemovementofthepileisnecessary.Fieldtestshaverevealed
that to mobilize the full skin friction a vertical displacement of 5 to 10 mm is required. The actual vertical
displacementdependsonthestrengthofthesoilandisindependentofthepilelengthandpilediameter.Thefull
end bearing resistance is mobilized in driven piles when the vertical displacement is about 10% of the pile tip
diameter.Forboredpilesordrilledshafts,averticaldisplacementofabout30%ofthepiletipdiameterisrequired.
Thefullendbearingresistanceismobilizedwhensliporfailurezonessimilartoshallowfoundationsareformed.The
endbearingresistancecanthenbecalculatedbyanalogywithshallowfoundations.Theimportantbearingcapacity
factorisNq.
Thefullskinfrictionandfullendbearingarenotmobilizedatthesamedisplacement.Theskinfrictionismobilized
ataboutonetenthofthedisplacementrequiredtomobilizetheendbearingresistance.Thisisimportantindecid
6182
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
ing on the factor of safety to be applied to the ultimate load. Depending on the tolerable settlement, different
factorsofsafetycanbeappliedtoskinfrictionandtoendbearing.
Generally,pilesdrivenintoloose,coarsegrainedsoilstendtodensitytheadjacentsoil.Whenpilesaredriveninto
dense, coarsegrained soils, the soil adjacent to the pile becomes loose. Pile driving usually remolds finegrained
soilsnearthepileshaft.Theimplicationofpileinstallationisthattheintactshearstrengthofthesoilischangedand
onemustaccountforthischangeinestimationsoftheloadcapacity.
3.10.1.11 AxialCapacityofDrivenPilesinCohesiveSoilusingStaticBearingCapacity
Equations
The ultimate axial capacity of driven piles in cohesive may be calculated from static formula, given by (6.3.14a),
(6.3.14b)and(6.3.15),usingatotalstressmethodforundrainedloadingconditions,oraneffectivestressmethod
fordrainedloadingconditions.Appropriatevaluesofadhesionfactor()andcoefficientofhorizontalsoilstress(ks)
for cohesive soils that are consistent with soil condition and pile installation procedure may be used. There are
basicallytwoapproachesforcalculatingskinfriction:
(i)
Themethodthatisbasedontotalstressanalysisandisnormallyusedtoestimatetheshorttermload
capacity of piles embedded in fine grained soils. In this method, a coefficient is used to relate the
undrainedshearstrengthcuorsutotheadhesivestress(fs)alongthepileshaft.Assuch,
Qs = cu As
=1.0
forclayswithcu25kN/m2
=0.5
forclayswithcu70kN/m2
(6.3.16)
forclayswith25kN/m2<cu<70kN/m2
Theendbearinginsuchacaseisfoundbyanalogywithshallowfoundationsandisexpressedas:
Qb = (cu ) b ( N c ) b Ab
(6.3.17)
Nc isabearingcapacityfactor,usually9.cuistheundrainedshearstrengthofsoilatthebaseofthepile.
Thesuffixbsareindicativesofbaseofpile.ThegeneralequationforNcis,however,asfollows.
6 1
0.2
(6.3.18)
ThesymbolDbrepresentsthediameteratthebaseofthepile.Theskinfrictionvalue,fb=(cu)b(Nc)bshould
notexceed4.0MPa.
(ii)
Themethodisbasedonaneffectivestressanalysisandisusedtodetermineboththeshorttermand
long term pile load capacities. The friction along the pile shaft is found using Coulombs friction law,
.Thelateraleffectivestress,xisproportional
wherethefrictionstressisgivenby
toverticaleffectivestress,zbyacoefficient,K.Assuch,
f s = K z tan = z
Where,
(6.3.19a)
(6.3.19b)
is the effective angle of internal friction of soil and OCR is the over-consolidation ratio. Fornormally
consolidated clay, varies from 0.25 to 0.29. The value of decreases for very long piles, as such a
correctionfactorisused.
0.5
(6.3.19c)
6183
Part6
StructuralDesign
The end bearing capacity is calculated by analogy with the bearing capacity of shallow footings and is
determinedfrom:
f b = ( v ) b ( N q ) b
(6.3.20)
Where,Nqisabearingcapacityfactorthatdependsonangleofinternalfriction of the soil at the base

of the pile, aspresentedinFig.6.3.2.Subscriptbdesignatestheparametersatthebasesoil.
BearingCapacityFactor,Nq
1000
100
10
20
25
30
35
40
45
AngleofInternalFriction, (Degree)
50
Fig.6.3.2:BearingCapacityFactorNqforDeepFoundation(AfterBerezantzev,1961)
3.10.1.12 Axial Capacity of Driven Piles in Cohesive Soil and Nonplastic Silt using
SPTValues
StandardPenetrationTestNvalueisameasureofconsistencyofclaysoilandindirectlythemeasureofcohesion.
The skin friction of pile can thus be estimated from Nvalue. The following relation may be used for preliminary
designofpilesinclayandsiltsoils.TheNvalueusedshouldbecorrectedforoverburden.
Forclayandsilt:
f s = 1.67 N (in kPa)
70 kPa
(6.3.21)
Forendbearing,therelationshipisasunder.
Forclay:
f b = 45 N
(6.3.22)
Forsilt:
L
f b = 40 N (in kPa) 300 N and 10000 kPa
D
(6.3.23)
(in kPa)
3.10.1.13 Axial Capacity of Driven Piles in Cohesionless Soil using Static Bearing
CapacityEquations
Pilesincohesionlesssoilsshallbedesignedbyeffectivestressmethodsofanalysisfordrainedloadingconditions.
The ultimate axial capacity of piles in cohesionless soils may also be calculated using empirical effective stress
6184
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
method or from insitu methods and analysis such as the cone penetration or pressure meter tests. Dynamic
formula may be used for driven piles in cohesionless soils such as gravels, coarse sand and deposits where pore
pressuredevelopedduetodrivingisquicklydissipated.
Forpilesincohesionlesssoil,theultimatesideresistancemaybeestimatedusingthefollowingformula:
f s = z
(6.3.24)
Where,zistheeffectiveverticalstressatthelevelunderconsideration.Thevaluesforareasunder.
=0.10
for=33o
=0.20
for=35o
=0.35
for=37o
Foruncementedcalcareoussandthevalueofvariesfrom0.05to0.10.
Thefollowingequation,asusedforcohesivesoil,maybeusedtocomputetheultimateendbearingcapacityofpiles
insandysoilinwhich,themaximum effectivestress,vallowedforthecomputationis240kPa
f b = ( v ) b ( N q ) b
Nq=8to12
forloose sand
Nq=12to40
formedium sand
Nq=40
fordense sand
(6.3.25)
Fig.6.3.2mayalsobeusedtoestimatethevalueofNq.
CriticalDepthforEndBearingandSkinFriction
The vertical effective stress (v or z) increases with depth. Hence the skin friction should increase with depth
indefinitely. In reality skin friction does not increase indefinitely. It is believed that skin friction would become a
constant at a certain depth. This depth is named critical depth. Pile end bearing in sandy soils is also related to
effective stress. Experimental data indicates that end bearing capacity does not also increase with depth
indefinitely.Duetolackofavalidtheory,Engineersusethesamecriticaldepthconceptadoptedforskinfrictionfor
end bearing capacity as well. Both the skin friction and the end bearing capacity are assumed to increase till the
criticaldepth,dcandthenmaintainaconstantvalue.Followingapproximationsmaybeusedforthecriticaldepthin
relationtodiameterofpile,D.
dc=10D
forloose sand
dc=15D
formedium dense sand
dc=20D
fordense sand
3.10.1.14 AxialCapacityofDrivenPilesinCohesionlessSoilusingSPTValues
TheskinfrictionofpilecanthusbeestimatedfromNvalue.Thefollowingrelationmaybeusedforclaysoils.
Forlargedisplacementpiles:
fb = 2 N
Forlargedisplacementpiles:
f b = 1N
(in kPa)
(in kPa)
(6.3.26a)
(6.3.26b)
6185
Part6
StructuralDesign
3.10.1.15
L
D
(6.3.27)
AxialCapacityofDrivenPileusingPileLoadTest
Generally, the total test load is twice the design load. The pile load test has considered to have failed, if the
settlementintothesoil,thatisthegrosssettlementminuselasticshortening,isgreaterthan25mmatfulltestload
orthesettlementintothesoilisgreaterthan13mm,attheendofthetestafterremovaloftheload.
3.10.1.16
SelectionofFactorofSafety
Afactorofsafetyshallbeappliedtoallestimatesoffailureloadafterconsidering:
i)
Thereliabilityofthevalueoftheultimatebearingcapacity,
ii)
Controlofthepileinstallationprocedure
ii)
Thetypeofsuperstructureandtypeofloading,and
iii)
Allowabletotalanddifferentialsettlementofthestructure.
Whenultimatebearingcapacityiscalculatedfromeitherstaticformulaordynamicformula,theabovefactorsshall
be considered. The minimum factor of safety on static formula shall be 3.0. The factor of safety shall actually
dependonthereliabilityoftheformula,dependingonaparticularsiteandthereliabilityofthesubsoilparameters
employed in the calculations. The assumption of a factor of safety shall also consider the load settlement
characteristicsofthestructureasawholeonagivensite.Thedesignpilecapacityshallbespecifiedontheplansso
thefactorofsafetycanbeadjustedifthespecifiedconstructioncontrolprocedureisaltered.Whensafeloadona
drivenpileisassessedbyapplyingafactorofsafetytoloadtestdata,theminimumsafetyfactorshallbe2.
Settlementistobelimitedordifferentialsettlementavoided(i.e.,foraccuratelyalignedmachineryorafragilefinish
ofsuperstructure)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
largeimpactorvibratingloadsareexpected
soilstrengthormodulusmaybeexpectedtodeterioratewithtime
liveloadonastructurecarriedbyfrictionpilesisaconsiderableportionofthetotalloadand
approximatethedeadloadinduration.
Theallowableaxialloadonapileshallbetheleastvaluepermittedbyconsiderationofthefollowingfactors:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Thecapacityofthepileasastructuralmember.
Theallowablebearingpressureonsoilstrataunderlyingthepiletip.
Theresistancetopenetrationofthepile,includingresistancetodriving,resistancetojacking,the
rateofpenetration,orotherequivalentcriteria.
(iv)
Thecapacityasindicatedbyloadtest,whereloadtestsarerequired.
Drivenpileinsoilshallbedesignedforaminimumoverallfactorofsafetyof2.0againstbearingcapacityfailure(end
bearing,sideresistanceorcombined)whenthedesignisbasedontheresultsofaloadtestconductedatthesite.
Otherwise, it shall be designed for a minimum overall factor of safety 3.0. The minimum recommended overall
factorofsafetyisbasedonanassumednormalleveloffieldqualitycontrolduringconstruction.Ifanormallevelof
fieldqualitycontrolcannotbeassured,higherminimumfactorsofsafetyshallbeused.Therecommendedvaluesof
overallfactorofsafetyonultimateaxialloadcapacitybasedonspecifiedconstructionControlispresentedinTable
6.3.8.
Partialfactorofsafetymaybeusedindependentlyforskinfrictionandendbearing.Thevaluesofpartialfactorof
safetymaybetakenas1.5and3.0respectivelyforskinfrictionandendbearing.Thedesign/allowableloadmaybe
takenastheminimumofthevaluesconsideringoverallandpartialfactorofsafety.
6186
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
Table6.3.8:DesignFactorofSafetyforDeepFoundationforDownwardandUpwardLoad
Structure
Design
Life(yrs.)
Probability
ofFailure
GoodControl
Monument
Permanent
Temporary
>100
25100
<25
105
DesignFactorofSafety
NormalControl PoorControl
V.PoorControl
2.30
3.00
3.50
4.00
2.00
2.50
2.80
3.40
1.40
2.00
2.30
2.80
10
10
Forupliftload,factorofsafetyishigher.Usually1.5to2.0timesofthevaluesinthischartfordownwardloading
3.10.1.17
GroupPilesandGroupCapacityofDrivenPiles
Allpilesshallbebracedtoprovidelateralstabilityinalldirections.Threeormorepilesconnectedbyarigidcapshall
be considered as being braced, provided that the piles are located in a radial direction from the centroid of the
group, notless than60 degrees apartcircumferentially. A two pile group inarigidcap shall be considered to be
bracedalongtheaxisconnectingthetwopiles.Pilessupportingwallsshallbedrivenalternatelyinlinesatleast300
mm apart and located symmetrically under the centre of gravity of the wall load, unless effective measures are
takentocaterforeccentricityandlateralforces,orthewallpilesareadequatelybracedtoprovidelateralstability.
Grouppilecapacityofdrivenpilesshouldbedeterminedastheproductofthegroupefficiency,numberofpilesin
the group and the capacity of a single pile. In general, a group efficiency value of 1.0 should be used except for
frictionpilesdrivenincohesivesoils.Theminimumcentertocenterpilespacingof2.5Bisrecommended.
3.10.1.17.1 PileCaps
Pilecapsshallbeofreinforcedconcrete.Thesoilimmediatelybelowthepilecapshallnotbeconsideredascarrying
anyverticalload.Thetopsofallpilesshallbeembeddednotlessthan75mmintopilecapsandthecapshallextend
atleast100mmbeyondtheedgeofallpiles.Thetopsofallpilesshallbecutbacktosoundmaterialbeforecapping.
Thepilecapshallberigidenough,sothattheimposedloadcanbedistributedonthepilesinagroupequitably.The
cap shall generally be cast over a 75 mm thick levelling course of concrete. The clear cover for the main
reinforcementinthecapslabundersuchconditionshallnotbelessthan60mm.
3.10.1.18
LateralLoads(Capacity)onDrivenPiles
Thedesignoflaterallyloadedpilesisusuallygovernedbylateralmovementcriteria.Thedesignoflaterallyloaded
piles shall account for the effects of soilstructure interaction between the pile and ground. Methods of analysis
evaluatingtheultimatecapacityordeflectionoflaterallyloadedpilesmaybeusedforpreliminarydesignonlyasa
meanstoevaluateappropriatepilesections.Lateralcapacityofverticalsinglepilesshallbetheleastofthevalues
calculatedonthebasisofsoilfailure,structuralcapacityofthepileanddeflectionofthepilehead.
Deflectioncalculationsrequirehorizontalsubgrademodulusofthesurroundingsoil.Whenconsideringlateralload
onpiles,theeffectofothercoexistentloads,includingaxialloadonthepile,shallbetakenintoconsiderationfor
checkingstructuralcapacityoftheshaft.
Forestimatingthedepthoffixity,establishedmethodofanalysisshallbeused.Todeterminelateralloadcapacity,
lateralloadtesttoatleasttwicetheproposeddesignworkingloadshallbemade.Theresultingallowableloadshall
notbemorethanonehalfofthetestloadthatproducesagrosslateralmovementof25mmatthegroundsurface.
Lateral load tests shall be performed. All piles standing unbraced in air, water or soils not capable of providing
lateralsupportshallbedesignedascolumnsinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthisCode.
6187
Part6
StructuralDesign
3.10.1.19
VerticalGroundMovement
Thepotentialforexternalloadingonapilebyverticalgroundmovementsshallbeconsideredaspartofthedesign.
Vertical ground movements may result in negative skin friction or downdrag loads due to settlement of
compressible soils or may result in uplift loads due to heave of expansive soils. For design purposes, the full
magnitudeofmaximumverticalgroundmovementshallbeassumed.
3.10.1.19.1 NegativeSkinFriction(DownwardMovement)
Drivenpilesinstalledincompressiblefillorsoftsoilsubjecttocompressionshallbedesignedagainstdownwardload
duetodowndragknownasthenegativefrictionofthecompressiblesoil.Thepotentialforexternalloadingonapile
by negative skin friction/downdrag due to settlement of compressible soil shall be considered as a part of the
design.Evaluationofnegativeskinfrictionshallincludealoadtransfermethodofanalysistodeterminetheneutral
point (i.e., point of zero relative displacement) and load distribution along shaft. Due to the possible time
dependence associated with vertical ground movement, the analysis shall consider the effect of time on load
transfer between the ground and shaft and the analysis shall be performed for the time period relating to the
maximum axial load transfer to thepile.Ifnecessary, negative skin frictionloads that cause excessivesettlement
may be reduced by application of bitumen or other viscous coatings to the pile surfaces before In estimating
negativeskinfrictionthefollowingfactorsshallbeconsidered:
(i)
Relativemovementbetweensoilandpileshaft.
(ii)
Relativemovementbetweenanyunderlyingcompressiblesoilandpileshaft.
(iii)
Elasticcompressionofthepileundertheworkingload.
(iv)
Therateofconsolidationofthecompressiblelayer.
Negativeskinfrictionismobilizedonlywhentendencyforrelativemovementbetweenpileshaftandsurrounding
soilexists.
3.10.1.19.2 ExpansiveSoils(UpwardMovement)
Pilesdriveninswellingsoilsmaybesubjectedtoupliftforcesinthezoneofseasonalmoisturechange.Pilesshall
extend a sufficient distance into moisturestable soils to provide adequate resistance to swelling uplift forces. In
addition,sufficientclearanceshallbeprovidedbetweenthegroundsurfaceandtheundersideofpilecapsorgrade
beams to preclude the application of uplift loads at the pile cap. Uplift loads may be reduced by application of
bitumenorotherviscouscoatingstothepilesurfaceintheswellingzone.
3.10.1.20
Dynamic/SeismicDesignofPiles
In case of submerged loose sands, vibration caused by earthquake may cause liquefaction or excessive total and
differentialsettlements.Thisaspectoftheproblemshallbeinvestigatedandappropriatemethodsofimprovements
should be adopted to achieve suitable values of N. Alternatively, large diameter drilled pier foundation shall be
providedandtakentodepthswellintothelayerswhicharenotlikelytoliquefy.
3.10.1.21
ProtectionagainstCorrosionandAbrasion
Whereconditionsofexposurewarrant,concreteencasementorothercorrosionprotectionshallbeusedonsteel
pilesandsteelshells.Exposedsteel pilesorsteelshellsshall nothe usedinsaltor brackish water, andonlywith
cautioninfreshwater.DetailsaregiveninSection3.7.2.
3.10.1.22
DynamicMonitoring
Dynamic monitoring may be specified for piles installed in difficult subsurface conditions such as soils with
obstructions and boulders to evaluate compliance with structural pile capacity. Dynamic monitoring may also be
6188
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
consideredforgeotechnicalcapacityverification,wherethesizeoftheprojectorotherlimitationsdetersstaticload
testing.
3.10.1.23
MaximumAllowableDrivingStresses
Maximumallowabledrivingstressesinpilematerialfortopdrivenpilesshallnotexceed0.9Fy(compression),0.9Fy
(tension)forsteelpiles,0.85f cconcrete(compression)and0.7Fy (steelreinforcement(tension)for concrete piles

and0.85fcfpc(compression)forprestressedconcretepiles.
3.10.1.24
Buoyancy
The effects ofhydrostatic pressure shall be considered in the design of driven piles, where used with foundation
subjectedtobuoyancyforces.
3.10.1.25
ProtectionagainstDeterioration
3.10.1.25.1 SteelPiles
Asteelpilefoundationdesignshallconsiderthatsteelpilesmaybesubjecttocorrosion,particularlyinfillsoilslow
pHsoils(acidic)andmarineenvironments.AfieldelectricresistivitysurveyorresistivitytestingandpHtestingof
soil and ground water samples should be used to evaluate the corrosion potential. Methods of protecting steel
piling in corrosive environments include use of protective coatings, cathodic protection, and increased pile steel
area.
3.10.1.25.2 ConcretePiles
Aconcretepilefoundationdesignshallconsiderthatdeteriorationofconcretepilescanoccurduetosulfatesinsoil,
groundwater,orseawater;chloridesinsoilsandchemicalwastes;acidicgroundwateranorganicacids.Laboratory
testing of soil and ground water samples for sulfates and ph is usually sufficient to assess pile deterioration
potential. A full chemical analysis of soil and round water samples is recommended when chemical wastes are
suspected. Methods of protecting concrete piling can include dense impermeable concrete, sulfate resisting
portlandcement,minimumcoverrequirementsforreinforcingsteel,anduseofepoxies,resins,orotherprotective
coatings
3.10.1.25.3 TimberPiles
Atimberpilefoundation(usedfortemporarystructures)designshallconsiderthatdeteriorationoftimberpilescan
occurduetodecayfromwettinganddryingcyclesorfrominsectsormarineborersMethodsofprotectingtimber
pilingincludepressuretreatingwithcreosoteorotherwoodpreservers
3.10.1.26
PileSpacing,ClearanceandEmbedment
3.10.1.26.1 PileSpacing
Endbearingdrivenpilesshallbeproportionedsuchthattheminimumcentertocenterpilespacingshallexceedthe
greaterof750mmor2.5pilediameters/widths.Thedistancefromthesideofanypiletothenearestedgeofthe
pilecapshallnotbelessthan100mm.Thespacingofpilesshallbesuchthattheaverageloadonthesupporting
strata will not exceed the safe bearing value of those strata as determined by test boring or other established
methods.
Pilesderivingtheircapacityfromfrictionalresistanceshallbesufficientlyaparttoensurethatthezonesofsoilfrom
which the piles derive their support do not overlap to such an extent that their bearing values are reduced.
Generally,insuchcases,thespacingshallnotbelessthan3.0timesthediameteroftheshaft.
6189
Part6
StructuralDesign
3.10.1.26.2 MinimumProjectionofPileintothePileCap
Thetopsofpilesshallprojectnotlessthan100mmintoconcreteafteralldamagedpilematerialhasbeenremoved.
3.10.1.27
StructuralCapacityofDrivenPileSection
The crosssection of driven piles shall be of sufficient size and pile material shall have the necessary structural
strengthtoresistallhandlingstressesduringdrivingorinstallationandthenecessarystrengthtotransmittheload
imposedonthemtotheunderlyingandsurroundingsoil.Pilediameter/crosssectionofapileshaftatanylevelshall
notbelessthanthedesignatednominaldiameter/crosssection.Thestructuraldesignofpilesmustconsidereachof
thefollowingloadingconditions.
Handlingloadsarethoseimposedonthepilebetweenthetimeitisfabricatedandthetimeitisinthe
piledriverleadsandreadytobedriven.Theyaregeneratedbycranes,forklifts,andotherconstruction
equipment.
Drivingloadsareproducedbythepilehammerduringdriving.
Serviceloadsarethedesignloadsfromthecompletedstructures.
The maximum allowable stress on a pile shall not exceed 0.33 f c for precast concrete piles and 33 f c f pc for
prestressedconcretepilesand 0 .25 f y forsteelHpiles.Theaxialcarryingcapacityofapilefullyembeddedinsoil
withundrainedshearstrengthgreaterthan10kN/m2shallnotbelimitedbyitsstrengthaslongcolumn.Forweaker
soils(undrainedshearstrengthlessthan10kN/m2),considerationshallbegiventodeterminewhethertheshaft
wouldbehaveasalongcolumn.Ifnecessary,suitablereductionsshallbemadeinitsstructuralstrengthconsidering
buckling.Theeffectivelengthofapilenotsecuredagainstbucklingbyadequatebracingshallbegovernedbyfixity
conditionsimposedonitbythestructureitsupportsandbythenatureofthesoilinwhichitisinstalled.
3.10.1.28
DrivenCastinPlaceConcretePiles
Driven castinplace concrete piles shall be in general cast in metal shells driven into the soil that will remain
permanently in place. However, other types of castinplace piles, plain or reinforced, cased or uncased, may be
usedifthesoilconditionspermittheiruseandiftheirdesignandmethodofplacingaresatisfactory.
3.10.1.28.1 Shape
Castinplaceconcretepilesmayhaveauniformcrosssectionormaybetaperedoveranyportion.
3.10.1.28.2 MinimumArea
Theminimumareaatthebuttofthepileshallbe650squarecmsandtheminimumdiameteratthetipofthepile
shallbe200mm.
3.10.1.28.3 GeneralReinforcementRequirements
Dependingonthedrivingandinstallationconditionsandtheloadingcondition,theamountofreinforcementandits
arrangement shall vary. Castinplace piles, carrying axial loads only, where the possibility of lateral forces being
appliedtothepilesisinsignificant,neednotbereinforcedwherethesoilprovidesadequatelateralsupport.Those
portions of castinplace concrete piles that are not supported laterally shall be designed as reinforced concrete
columnsandthereinforcingsteelshallextend3000mmbelowtheplanewherethesoilprovidesadequatelateral
restraint.Wheretheshellissmoothpipeandmorethan3mminthickness,itmaybeconsideredasloadcarryingin
theabsenceofcorrosion.Wheretheshelliscorrugatedandisatleast2mminthickness,itmaybeconsideredas
providingconfinementintheabsenceofcorrosion.
6190
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
3.10.1.28.4 ReinforcementintoSuperstructure
Sufficient reinforcement shall be provided at the junction of the pile with the superstructure to make a suitable
connection.Theembedmentofthereinforcementintothecapshallbeasspecifiedforprecastpiles
3.10.1.28.5 ShellRequirements
The shell shall be of sufficient thickness and strength, so that it will hold its original form and show no harmful
distortionafteritandadjacentshellshavebeendrivenandthedrivingcore,ifany,hasbeenwithdrawn.Theplans
shallstipulatethatalternativedesignsoftheshellmustbeapprovedbytheEngineerbeforeanydrivingisdone.
3.10.1.28.6 Splices
Piles may be spliced provided the splice develops the full strength of the pile. Splices should be detailed on the
contractplans.Anyalternativemethodofsplicingprovidingequalresultsmaybeconsideredforapproval.
3.10.1.28.7 ReinforcementCover
Thereinforcementshallbeplacedacleardistanceofnotlessthan50mmfromthecasedoruncasedsides.When
piles are in corrosive or marine environments, or when concrete is placed by the water or slurry displacement
methods, the clear distance shall not be less than 75 mm for uncased piles and piles with shells not sufficiently
corrosionresistant.Reinforcementsshallextendtowithin100mmoftheedgeofthepilecapReinforcementsshall
extendtowithin100mmoftheedgeofthepilecap.
3.10.1.28.8 Installation
Steel cased piles shall have the steel shell mandrel driven their full length in contact with surrounding soil, left
permanentlyinplaceandfilledwithconcrete.Nopileshallbedrivenwithin4.5timestheaveragepilediameterofa
pilefilledwithconcretelessthan24hoursold.Concreteshallnotbeplacedinsteelshellswithintheheaverangeof
driving
3.10.1.28.9 Concreting
Forboredordrivencastinsitupiles,concreteshallbedepositedinsuchawayastoprecludesegregation.Concrete
shallbedepositedcontinuouslyuntilitisbroughttotherequiredlevel.Thetopsurfaceshallbemaintainedaslevel
aspossibleandtheformationofseamsshallbeavoided.
Forunderreamedpiles,theslumpofconcreteshallrangebetween100mmand150mmforconcretinginwater
free holes. For large diameter holes concrete may be placed by tremie or by drop bottom bucket; for small
diameterboreholesatremieshallbeutilized.
Aslumpof125mmto150mmshallbemaintainedforconcretingbytremie.Incaseoftremieconcretingforpilesof
smallerdiameterandlengthupto10m,theminimumcementcontentshallbe350kg/m3 ofconcrete.Forlarger
diameterand/ordeeperpiles,theminimumcementcontentshallbe400kg/m3ofconcrete.
Forconcretingunderwater,theconcreteshallcontainatleast10percentmorecementthanthatrequiredforthe
samemixplacedinthedry.Theamountofcoarseaggregateshallbenotlessthanoneandahalftimes,normore
thantwotimes,thatofthefineaggregate.Thematerialsshallbesoproportionedastoproduceaconcretehavinga
slumpofnotlessthan100mm,normorethan150mm,exceptwhereplasticizingadmixturesisusedinwhichcase,
theslumpmaybe175mm
3.10.1.28.10 StructuralIntegrity
Bored piles shall be installed in such a manner and sequence as to prevent distortion or damage to piles being
installedoralreadyinplace,totheextentthatsuchdistortionordamageaffectsthestructuralintegrityofthepiles.
6191
Part6
StructuralDesign
3.10.1.29
PrestressedConcretePiles
3.10.1.29.1 SizeandShape
Prestressed concrete piles that are generally octagonal, square or circular shall be of approved size and shape..
Concrete in prestressed piles shall have a minimum compressive strength (cylinder), fc of 35 MPa at 28 days.
Prestressed concrete piles may be solid or hollow. For hollow piles, precautionary measures should be taken to
preventbreakageduetointernalwaterpressureduringdriving.
3.10.1.29.2 MainReinforcement
Mainreinforcementshallbespacedandstressedsoastoprovideacompressivestressonthepileafterlosses;fpc,
generallynotlessthan5MPatopreventcrackingduringhandlingandinstallation.Pilesshallbedesignedtoresist
stressesdevelopedduringhandlingaswellasunderserviceloadconditions.Bendingstressesshallbeinvestigated
forallconditionsofhandling,takingintoaccounttheweightofthepileplus50percentallowanceforimpact,with
tensilestresseslimitedto5fc.
3.10.1.29.3 VerticalandSpiralReinforcement
The fulllength of verticalreinforcementshall beenclosed within spiral reinforcement.For pilesup to 600 mm in
diameter,spiralwireshallbeNo.5(U.S.SteelWireGage).Spiralreinforcementattheendsofthesepilesshallhavea
pitchof75mmforapproximately16turns.
Inaddition,thetop150mmofpileshallhavefiveturnsofspiralwindingat25mmpitch.Fortheremainderofthe
pile,theverticalsteelshallbeenclosedwithspiralreinforcementwithnotmorethan150mmpitch.Forpileshaving
diametersgreaterthan600mm.spiralwireshallbeNo.4(U.S.SteelWireGage).Spiralreinforcementattheendof
thesepilesshallhaveapitchof50mmforapproximately16turns.Inaddition,thetop150mmofpileshallhave
fourturnsofspiralwindingat38mmpitch.Fortheremainderofthepile,theverticalsteelshallbeenclosedwith
spiralreinforcementwithnotmorethan100mmpitch.Thereinforcementshallbeplacedatacleardistancefrom
thefaceoftheprestressedpileofnotlessthan50mm.
3.10.1.29.4 DrivingandHandlingStresses
Aprestressedpileshallnotbedrivenbeforetheconcretehasattainedacompressivestrengthofatleast28MPa,
butnotlessthansuchstrengthsufficienttowithstandhandlinganddrivingforces.
3.10.2
BoredPiles
Inboredcastinplacepiles,theholesarefirstboredwithapermanentortemporarycasingorbyusingbentonite
slurrytostabilizethesidesofthebore.Aprefabricatedsteelcageisthenloweredintotheholeandconcretingis
carriedbytremiemethod.
3.10.2.1
UltimateGeotechnicalCapacityofBoredPileforAxialLoad
Thebasicconceptofultimatebearingcapacityandusefulequationsforaxialloadcapacityareidenticaltothatof
drivenpileasdescribedinSection3.11.1.9.
3.10.2.2
AxialCapacityofBoredPilesinCohesiveSoilusingStaticBearingCapacity
Equations
Theultimateaxialcapacityofboredpilesincohesivemaybecalculatedfromthesamestaticformulaasusedfor
drivenpiles,givenbyEquations(6.3.14a),(6.3.14b)and(6.3.15),usingatotalstressmethodforundrainedloading
conditions,oraneffectivestressmethodfordrainedloadingconditions.Theskinfriction(fs)maybetakenas0.67
timesthevalueofdrivenpilesandtheendbearing(fb)maybetakenas1/3rdofdrivenpile.
6192
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
3.10.2.3
Chapter3
AxialCapacityofBoredPilesinCohesiveSoilandNonplasticSiltusingSPT
Values
Thefollowingrelationmaybeusedforpreliminarydesignofpilesinclayandsiltsoils.TheNvalueusedshouldbe
correctedforoverburden.
Forclayandsilt:
f s = 1.11 N (in kPa)
70 kPa
(6.3.28)
Forclay:
f b = 15 N
f b = 10 0 N
(in kPa)
(6.3.29)
(6.3.30)
Forsilt:
3.10.2.4
(in kPa)
Axial Capacity of Bored Piles in Cohesionless Soil using Static Bearing

CapacityEquations
Theultimateaxialcapacityofboredpilesincohesivemaybecalculatedfromthesamestaticformulaasusedfor
drivenpilesdescribedsection3.1.11.13.Theskinfriction(fs)maybetakenas0.67timesthevalueofdrivenpiles
andtheendbearing(fb)maybetakenas1/3rdofdrivenpile.
CriticalDepthforEndBearingandSkinFriction
Similartodrivenpiles,followingapproximationsmaybeusedforthecriticaldepthinrelationtodiameterofpile,D.
3.10.2.5
dc=10D
forloose sand
dc=15D
formedium dense sand
dc=20D
fordense sand
AxialCapacityofBoredPilesinCohesionlessSoilusingSPTValues
TheskinfrictionofpilecanthusbeestimatedfromNvalue.Thefollowingrelationmaybeusedforclaysoils.
f s = 1.33N (in kPa)
60 kPa
(6.3.31)
3.10.2.6
L
D
(6.3.32)
AxialCapacityofBoredPileusingPileLoadTest
Theproceduresandprinciplesofpileloadtestforultimatecapacityaresimilartothatofdrivenpiles.
3.10.2.7
SelectionofFactorofSafety
Selectionoffactorofsafetyforaxialcapacityofboredpileissimilartothatusedfordrivenpiles.
6193
Part6
StructuralDesign
3.10.2.8
GroupCapacityofBoredPilesandother
The behavior of group bored piles is almost similar to that of driven piles. For the pile cap, lateral load capacity,
vertical ground movement, negative skin friction, piles in expansive soil, dynamic and seismic design, corrosion
protection,dynamicmonitoringandbuoyancy,Sections3.11.1.17shouldbeconsultedastheyaresimilarforboth
drivenandboredpiles.
3.10.3
SettlementofDrivenandBoredPiles
Thesettlementofaxiallyloadedpilesandpilegroupsattheallowableloadsshallbeestimated.Elasticanalysis,load
transferand/orfiniteelementtechniquesmaybeused.Thesettlementofthepileorpilegroupshallnotexceedthe
tolerablemovementlimitsasrecommendedforshallowfoundations(Table6.3.7).
Whenapileisloadedtwothingswouldhappeninvolvingsettlement.
Thepilewouldsettleintothesoil
Thepilematerialwouldcompressduetoload
Thesettlementofasinglepilecanbebrokendownintothreedistinctparts.
Settlementduetoaxialdeformation,Sax
Settlementatthepiletip,Spt
Settlementduetoskinfriction,Ssf
Thus,
(6.3.33)
Moreover,pilesactinginagroupcouldundergolongtermconsolidationsettlement.
Settlementduetoaxialdeformationofasinglepilecanbeestimatedas:
Where,
Qp=
(6.3.34)
(6.3.35)
Loadtransferredtothesoilattiplevel
Qs=
Totalskinfrictionload
L=
Lengthofthepile
A=
Crosssectionareaofthepile
Ep=
Youngsmodulusofpilematerial
a=
0.5forclayandsiltsoils
a=
0.67forsandysoil
Piletipsettlement,Stpcanbeestimatedas:
Where,
6194
Qp=
Loadtransferredtothesoilattiplevel
D=
Diameterofthepile
qo=
Ultimateendbearingcapacity
Cp=
EmpiricalcoefficientasgiveninTable6.3.9
a=
0.67forsandysoil
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
Table6.3.9:TypicalValuesofCpforSettlementCalculationofSinglePile
SoilType
ValuesofCP
DenseSand
DrivenPile
0.02
BoredPile
0.09
LooseSand
0.04
0.18
StiffClay
0.02
0.03
SoftClay
0.03
0.06
DenseSilt
0.03
0.09
LooseSilt
0.05
0.12
Skinfrictionactingalongtheshaftwouldstressthesurroundingsoil.Skinfrictionactsupwarddirectionalongthe
pile.Theforceduetopileonsurroundingsoilwouldbeindownwarddirection.Whenthepileisloaded,thepile
wouldslightlymovedown.Thepilewoulddragthesurroundingsoilwithit.Hence,thepilesettlementwouldoccur
duetoskinfrictionasgivenby:
Where,
0.93
0.16
Cs=
Empiricalcoefficient
Cp=
EmpiricalcoefficientasgiveninTable6.3.9
Qs=
Totalskinfrictionload
D=
Diameterofthepile
qo=
Ultimateendbearingcapacity
(6.3.36)
ShortTermPileGroupSettlement
Shorttermorelasticpilegroupsettlementcanbeestimatedusingthefollowingrelation.
.
Where,
Sg=
(6.3.37)
Settlementofthepilegroup
St(single)= Totalsettlementofasinglepile
B=
Smallestdimensionofthepilegroup
D=
Diameterofthepile
Interestingly, geometry of the group does not have much of an influence on the settlement. As such, Group
SettlementRatio,Rsofapilegroupconsistingofnnumberofpilescanbeapproximatedasfollows.
.
(6.3.38)
SettlementofthegroupcanbeestimatedasthehighestvalueasobtainedfromEquations(6.3.37)and(6.3.38).
LongTermSettlementforPileGroup
Forpilegroups,settlementduetoconsolidationismoreimportantthanforsinglepiles.Consolidationsettlementof
pilegroupinclaysoiliscomputedusingthefollowingsimplifiedassumptions.
Thepilegroupisassumedtobeasolidfoundationwithadepth2/3rdthelengthofthepiles
Effectivestressatmidpointoftheclaylayerisusedtocomputesettlement
If soil properties are available consolidation settlement may obtained from the following equation. The depth of
significant stress increase (10%) or the depth of bed rock whichever is less should be taken for computation of
settlement.Stressdistributionmaybeconsideredas2verticalto1horizontal.
6195
Part6
StructuralDesign
Where,
Cc=
Compressionindexofsoil
eo=
initialvoidratio
(6.3.39)
H=
Thicknessoftheclaylayer
o=
Initialeffectivestressatmidpointoftheclaylayer
p=
Increaseineffectivestressatmidpointoftheclaylayerduetopileload.
Inabsenceofsoilpropertiesthefollowingempiricalequationsmaybeusedtoestimatethelongterm(consolidation
settlementofclaysoils.
Forclay:
Forsand:
Ln
(6.3.40)
(6.3.41)
Where,
H=
Thicknessoftheclaylayer
o=
Initialeffectivestressatmidpointoftheclaylayer
1=
Neweffectivestressatmidpointoftheclaylayerafterpileload.
r=
Referencestress(100kPa)
M=
DimensionlessmodulusnumberasobtainedfromTable6.3.10
j=
StressexponentasobtainedfromTable6.3.10.
Table6.3.10:SettlementParameters
Soil
Density
Modulus
Number,M
Stress
Exponent,j
1000300
1.0
Till
V.DensetoDense
Gravel
40040
0.5
Sand
Dense
400250
0.5
Sand
MediumDense
250150
0.5
Sand
Loose
150100
0.5
Silt
Dense
20080
0.5
Silt
MediumDense
8060
0.5
Silt
Loose
6040
0.5
SiltyClay
Stiff
6040
0.5
SiltyClay
MediumStiff
2010
0.5
SiltyClay
Soft
105
0.5
MarineClay
Soft
205
0.0
OrganicClay
Soft
205
0.0
Peat
51
0.0
3.10.4 DrilledShafts/DrilledPiers
3.10.4.1
General
Largediameter(morethan400mm)boredpilesaresometimesclassifiedasdrilledshaftordrilledpiers.Theyare
usuallyprovidedwithenlargedbasecalledbell.Theprovisionsofthisarticleshallapplytothedesignofaxiallyand
laterallyloadeddrilledshafts/drilledpiersinsoilorextendingthroughsoiltoorintorock.
6196
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
3.10.4.2
Chapter3
Application
Drilled shafts may be considered when spread footings cannot be founded on suitable soil within a reasonable
depthandwhenpilesarenoteconomicallyviableduetohighloadsorobstructionstodriving.Drilledshaftsmaybe
used in lieu of spread footings as a protection against scour. Drilled shafts may also be considered to resist high
lateralorupliftloadswhendeformationtolerancesaresmall.
3.10.4.3
Material
Shaftsshallbecastinplaceconcreteandmayincludedeformedbarsteelreinforcement,structuralsteelsections,
and/orpermanentsteelcasingasrequiredbydesign.
3.10.4.4
Embedment
Shaft embedment shall be determined based on vertical and lateral load capacities of both the shaft and sub
surfacematerials.
3.10.4.5
BatterShafts
Theuseofbatteredshaftstoincreasethelateralcapacityoffoundationsisnotrecommendedduetotheirdifficulty
ofconstructionandhighcost.Instead,considerationshouldfirstbegiventoincreasingtheshaftdiametertoobtain
therequiredlateralcapacity.
3.10.4.6
SelectionofSoilProperties
Soil and rock properties defining the strength and compressibility characteristics of the foundation materials are
requiredfordrilledshaftdesign.
3.10.4.7
GeotechnicalDesign
Drilledshaftsshallbedesignedtosupportthedesignloadswithadequatebearingandstructuralcapacity,andwith
tolerable settlements. In addition, the response of drilled shafts subjected to seismic and dynamic loads shall be
evaluated.
Shaftdesignshallbebasedonworkingstressprinciplesusingmaximumunfactoredloadsderivedfromcalculations
ofdeadandliveloadsfromsuperstructures,substructures,earth(i.e.,slopingground),windandtraffic.Allowable
axialandlateralloadsmaybedeterminedbyseparatemethodsofanalysis.
The design methods presented herein for determining axial load capacity assume drilled shafts of uniform cross
section,withverticalalignment,concentricaxialloading,andarelativelyhorizontalgroundsurface.Theeffectsof
anenlargedbase,groupaction,andslopinggroundaretreatedseparately
3.10.4.7.1
BearingCapacityEquationsforDrilledShaft
Theultimateaxialcapacity(Qult)ofdrilledshaftsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththeprincipleslaidforbored
piles.
CohesiveSoil
Skinfrictionresistanceincohesivesoilmaybedeterminedusingeitherthemethodorthemethodasdescribed
intherelevantsectionofdrivenpiles.However,forclaysoil,methodhaswidebeenusedbytheengineers.This
methodgives:
(6.3.42)
Where,
fs=
Skinfriction
su=
undrainedshearstrengthofsoilalongtheshaft
6197
Part6
StructuralDesign
adhesionfactor=0.55forundrainedshearstrength190kPa(4000psf)
For higher values of su the value of may be taken from Fig. 6.3.3 as obtained from test data of previous
investigators.Theskinfrictionresistanceshouldbeignoredintheupper1.5moftheshaftandalongthebottom
one diameter of straight shafts because of interaction with the end bearing. If end bearing is ignored for some
reasons,theskinfrictionalongthebottomonediametermaybeconsidered.Forbelledshaft,skinfrictionalongthe
surfaceofthebellandalongtheshaftforadistanceofoneshaftdiameterabovethetopofbellshouldbeignored.
Fig.6.3.3AdhesionFactorforDrilledShaft(afterCoduto,1994)
Forendbearingofcohesivesoil,thefollowingrelationsgivenbyEquations(6.3.43)and(6.3.44)arerecommended.
f b = N c su
4000 kPa
6 1
Where,
0.2
fb=
Endbearingstress
(6.3.43)
(6.3.18)
su=
undrainedshearstrengthofsoilalongtheshaft
Nc=
Bearingcapacityfactor
L=
Lengthofthepile(Depthtothebottomoftheshaft)
Db=
Diameteroftheshaftbase
If the base diameter is more than 1900 mm, the value of fb from Equation (6.3.43) could produce settlements
greaterthan25mm,whichwouldbeunacceptableformostbuildings.Tokeepsettlementwithintolerablelimits,
thevalueoffbshouldbereducedtofbbymultiplyingafactorFrsuchthat:
f b = Fr f b
6198
0.0071
(6.3.44a)
(6.3.44b)
0.0015
(6.3.44c)
1.0
0.0021
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Where,
1.59
Chapter3
0.521.5
Br=
Referencewidth=1ft=0.3m=12inch=300mm
r=
Referencestress=100kPa=2000psf
(6.3.44d)
CohesionlessSoil
Skin friction resistance in cohesionless soil is usually determined using the method. The relevant equation is
reproducedagain:
Where,
fs=
f s = z
(6.3.45)
= K tan S
(6.3.46)
Skinfriction
z=
Effectiveverticalstressatmidpointofsoillayer
K=
Coefficientoflateralearthpressure
s=
Soilshaftinterfacefrictionangle
ThevaluesofKand scanbeobtainedfromthechartofTables6.3.11,fromthesoilfrictionangle, and
preconstruction coefficient of lateral earth pressure Ko. However, Ko is very difficult to determine. An
alternative is to compute directly using the following empirical relation.
1.5
Where,
0.135
Br=
z=
Depthfromthegroundsurfacetothemidpointofthestrata
(6.3.47)
Table6.3.11:TypicalS/ and K/KoValuesfortheDesignofDrilledShaft

S/
ConstructionMethod
ConstructionMethod
K/Ko
Openholeortemporarycasing
1.0
Dryconstructionwithminimalsidewall
disturbanceandpromptconcreting
Slurrymethodminimalslurrycake
1.0
Slurryconstructiongoodworkmanship
Slurrymethodheavyslurrycake
0.8
Slurryconstructionpoorworkmanship
2/3
Permanentcasing
0.7
Casingunderwater
5/6
Theunitendbearingcapacityfordrilledshaftincohesionlesssoilswillbelessthanthatfordrivenpilesbecauseof
variousreasonslikesoildisturbanceduringaugering,temporarystressreliefwhiletheholeisopen,largerdiameter
anddepthofinfluenceetc.Thereasonsarenotwelldefined,assuchthefollowingempiricalformuladevelopedby
ReeseandONell(1989)maybesuggestedtousetoestimateendbearingstress.
0.60
Where,
4500 kPa
(6.3.48)
fb=
Unitbearingresistance
r=
Referencestress=100kPa=2000psf
N=
MeanSPTvalueforthesoilbetweenthebaseoftheshaftandadepthequaltotwotimes
thebasediameterbelowthebase.Nooverburdencorrectionisrequired(N=N60)
If the base diameter is more than 1200 mm, the value of fb from Equation (6.3.48) could produce settlements
greaterthan25mm,whichwouldbeunacceptableformostbuildings.Tokeepsettlementwithintolerablelimits,
thevalueoffbshouldbereducedtofbbymultiplyingafactorFrsuchthat:
6199
Part6
StructuralDesign
f b = Fr f b
Where,
3.10.4.7.2
4.17
(6.3.49a)
1.0
(6.3.49b)
Br=
Db=
Basediameterofdrilledshaft
OtherMethodsofEvaluatingAxialLoadCapacity
A number of other methods are available to estimate the ultimate axial load capacity of drilled shafts. These
methodsarebasedonNvaluesobtainedfromStandardPenetrationTest(SPT)andonangleofinternalfrictionof
sand. These methods may alsobe used to estimatethe ultimate load carryingcapacity of drilled shafts.Three of
thesemethodsareasfollows:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
MethodbasedontheStandardPenetrationTest(CanadianFoundationEngineeringManual,1985)
MethodbasedonTheoryofPlasticity(CanadianFoundationEngineeringManual,1985)
Tomlinson(1995)Method
ThesemethodsaresummarizedinAppendix6.3.C.
3.10.4.7.3
FactorofSafety
Similartoboredandrivenpiles,drilledshaftsshallbedesignedforaminimumoverallfactorofsafetyof2.0against
bearingcapacityfailure(endbearing,sideresistanceorcombined)whenthedesignisbasedontheresultsofaload
testconductedatthesite.Otherwise,itshallbedesignedforaminimumoverallfactorofsafety3.0.Theminimum
recommended overall factor of safety is based on an assumed normal level of field quality control during
construction.Ifanormalleveloffieldqualitycontrolcannotbeassured,higherminimumfactorsofsafetyshallbe
used. The recommended values of overall factor of safety on ultimate axial load capacity based on specified
constructionControlispresentedinTable6.3.8.
3.10.4.7.4
DeformationandSettlementofAxiallyLoadDrilledShaft
Similar to driven and bored piles, settlement of axially loaded shafts at working or allowable loads shall be
estimated using elastic or load transfer analysis methods. For most cases, elastic analysis will be applicable for
design provided thestress levels inthe shaftare moderaterelative toQult. Analytical methods are similar to that
providedinSection3.11.3fordrivenandboredpiles.ThechartsprovidedinAppendix6.3.Cmayalsobeusedto
estimatethesettlementofdrilledshaft.
3.10.4.7.5
LayeredSoilProfile
The shortterm settlement of shafts in a layered soil profile may be estimated by summing the proportional
settlementcomponentsfromlayersofcohesiveandcohesionlesssoilcomprisingthesubsurfaceprofile
3.10.4.7.6
TolerableMovement
Tolerable axial displacement criteria for drilled shaft foundations shall be developed by the structural designer
consistentwiththefunctionandtypeofstructure,fixityofbearings,anticipatedservicelife,andconsequencesof
unacceptabledisplacementsonthestructureperformance.Drilledshaftdisplacementanalysesshallbebasedon
the results of insitu and/or laboratory testing to characterize the loaddeformation behavior of the foundation
materials.
6200
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
3.10.4.8
3.10.4.8.1
Chapter3
GroupLoadingofDrilledShaft
CohesiveSoil
Evaluation of group capacity of shafts in cohesive soil shall consider the presence and contact of a cap with the
groundsurfaceandthespacingbetweenadjacentshafts.
Forashaftgroupwithacapinfirmcontactwiththeground,Qultmaybecomputedasthelesserof(1)thesumof
theindividualcapacitiesofeachshaftinthegroupor(2)thecapacityofanequivalentpierdefinedintheperimeter
areaofthegroup.Fortheequivalentpier,theshearstrengthofsoilshallnotbereducedbyanyfactor(e.g.,(1)to
determinetheQscomponentofQult,thetotalbaseareaoftheequivalentpiershallbeusedtodeterminetheQT
componentofQultandtheadditionalcapacityofthecapshallbeignored.
Ifthecapisnotinfirmcontactwiththeground,orifthesoilatthesurfaceislooseorsoft,theindividualcapacityof
eachshaftshouldbereducedtotimesQTforanisolatedshaft,where=0.67foracentertocenter(CTC)spacing
of3B(whereBistheshaftdiameter)and=1.0foraCTCspacingof6B.Forintermediatespacings,thevalueof
maybedeterminedbylinearinterpolation.Thegroupcapacitymaythenbecomputedasthelesserof(1)thesum
ofthemodifiedindividualcapacitiesofeachshaftinthegroup,or(2)thecapacityofanequivalentpierasdescribed
above.
3.10.4.8.2
CohesionlessSoil
Evaluation of group capacity of shafts in cohesion soil shall consider the spacing between adjacent shafts.
Regardlessofcapcontactwiththeground,theindividualcapacityofeachshaftshouldbereducedtotimesQTfor
anisolatedshaft,where=0.67foracenterlocenter(CTC)spacingof3Band=1.0foraCTCspacingof8B.For
intermediate spacings, the value of may be determined by linear interpolation. The group capacity may be
computed as the lesser of (I) the sum of the modified individual capacities of each shaft in the group or (2) the
capacity of an equivalent pier circumscribing the group including resistance over the entire perimeter and base
areas.
3.10.4.8.3
StrongSoilOverlyingWeakSoil
Ifagroupofshaftsisembeddedinastrongsoildepositwhichoverliesaweakerdeposit(cohesionlessandcohesive
soil),considerationshallbegiventothepotentialforapunchingfailureofthelipintotheweakersoilstrata.Forthis
case,theunittipcapacityoftheequivalentshaft(qE)maybedeterminedusingthefollowing:
qE =
HBt
(qUP q Lo )
10
qUp
(6.3.50)
IntheaboveequationqUPistheultimateunitcapacityofanequivalentshaftbearinginthestrongerupperlayerand
qLOistheultimateunitcapacityofanequivalentshaftbearingintheweakerunderlyingsoillayer.Iftheunderlying
soilunitisaweakercohesivesoilstrata,carefulconsiderationshallbegiventothepotentialforlargesettlementsin
theweakerlayer.
3.10.4.9
LateralLoadsonDrilledShaft
3.10.4.9.1
SoilLayering
The design of laterally loaded drilled shafts in layered soils shall be based on evaluation of the soil parameters
characteristicoftherespectivelayers
3.10.4.9.2
GroundWater
Thehighestanticipatedwaterlevelshallbeusedfordesign
6201
Part6
StructuralDesign
3.10.4.9.3
Scour
Thepotentialforlossoflateralcapacityduetoscourshallbeconsideredinthedesign.Ifheavyscourisexpected,
considerationshallbegiventodesigningtheportionoftheshaftthatwouldbeexposedasacolumn.Inallcases,
theshaftlengthshallbedeterminedsuchthatthedesignstructuralloadcanbesafelysupportedentirelybelowthe
probablescourdepth.
3.10.4.9.4
GroupAction
There is no reliable rational method for evaluating the group action for closely spaced, laterally loaded shafts.
Therefore,asageneralguide,drilledshaftwithdiameterBinagroupmaybeconsideredtoactindividuallywhen
the centertocenter (CTC) spacing is greater than 2.5B in the direction normal to loading, and CTC > 8B in the
directionparalleltoloading.Forshaftlayoutnotconformingtothesecriteria,theeffectsofshaftinteractionshall
beconsideredinthedesign.Asageneralguide,theeffectsofgroupactionforinlineCTC<8Bmaybeconsidered
usingtheratios(CGS,1985)appearingasbelow:
3.10.4.9.5
CentretoCentreShaftSpacing
forInlineLoading
RatioofLateralResistanceof
ShaftinGrouptoSingleShaft
8B
1.00
6B
0.70
4B
0.40
3B
0.25
CyclicLoading
The effects of traffic, wind, and other nonseismic cyclic loading on the loaddeformation behavior of laterally
loadeddrilledshaftsshallbeconsideredduringdesign.Analysisofdrilledshaftssubjectedtocyclicloadingmayhe
consideredintheCOM624analysis(Reese.1984).
3.10.4.9.6
CombinedAxialandLateralLoading
Theeffectsoflateralloadingincombinationwithaxialloadingshallbeconsideredinthedesign.Analysisofdrilled
shaftssubjectedtocombinedloadingmaybeconsideredintheCOM624analysis(Reese.1984)
3.10.4.9.7
SlopingGround
Fordrilledshaftswhichextendthroughorbelowslopingground.thepotentialforadditionallateralloadingshallbe
consideredinthedesign.ThegeneralmethodofanalysisdevelopedbyBordenandGabr(1987)maybeusedforthe
analysisofshaftsinstableslopes.Forshaftsinmarginallystableslopes.Additionalconsiderationshouldbegivenfor
smallerfactorsofsafetyagainstslopefailureorslopesshowinggroundcreep,orwhenshaftsextendthroughfills
overlying soft foundation soils and bear into more competent underlying soil or rock formations. For unstable
ground.detailedexplorations,testingandanalysisarerequiredtoevaluatepotentialadditionallateralloadsdueto
slopemovements
3.10.4.9.8
TolerableLateralMovements
Tolerable lateral displacement criteria for drilled shaft foundations shall be developed by the structural designer
consistentwiththefunctionandtypeofstructure,fixity,anticipatedservicelife,andconsequencesofunacceptable
displacementsonthestructureperformance.Drilledshaftlateraldisplacementanalysisshallbebasedontheresults
ofinsituand/orlaboratorytestingtocharacterizetheloaddeformationbehaviorofthefoundationmaterials.
6202
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
3.10.4.9.9
Chapter3
UpliftLoadsonDrilledShaft
Upliftcapacityshallrelyonlyonsideresistanceinconformancewithrelatedarticlesfordrivenpiles.Iftheshafthas
anenlargedbase,Qsshallbedeterminedinconformancewithrelatedarticlesfordrivenpiles.
3.10.4.9.10 ConsiderationofVerticalGroundMovement
Thepotentialforexternalloadingonashaftbyverticalgroundmovement(i.e.,negativeskinfrictiondowndragdue
tosettlementofcompressiblesoilorupliftduetoheaveofexpansivesoil)shallbeconsideredasapartofdesign.
Fordesignpurposes,itshallbeassumedthatthefullmagnitudeofmaximumpotentialverticalgroundmovement
occurs.
NegativeSkinFriction
Evaluationofnegativeskinfrictionshallincludealoadtransfermethodofanalysistodeterminetheneutralpoint
(i.e.,pointofzerorelativedisplacement)andloaddistributionalongshaft(e.g.,ReeseandO'Neill,1988).Duetothe
possibletimedependenceassociatedwithverticalgroundmovement,theanalysisshallconsidertheeffectoftime
onloadtransferbetweenthegroundandshaftandtheanalysisshallbeperformedforthetimeperiodrelatingto
the maximum axial load transfer to the shaft. Evaluation of negative skin friction shall include a loadtransfer
methodofanalysisto determinetheneutralpoint(i.e.,pointofzerorelativedisplacement)andloaddistribution
along shaft (e.g., Reese and O'Neill, 1988) Due to the possible time dependence associated with vertical ground
movement, the analysis shall consider the effect of time on load transfer between the ground and shaft and the
analysisshallbeperformedforthetimeperiodrelatingtothemaximumaxialloadtransfertotheshaft..
ExpansiveSoils
Shaftsdesignedforandconstructedinexpansivesoilshallextendtoasufficientdepthintomoisturestablesoilsto
provideadequateanchoragetoresistupliftmovementInaddition;sufficientclearanceshallbeprovidedbetween
thegroundsurfaceandundersideofcapsorbeamsconnectingshaftstoprecludetheapplicationofupliftloadsat
theshaft/capconnectionfromswellinggroundconditions.
3.10.4.9.11 Dynamic/SeismicDesignofDrilledShaft
RefertoSeismicDesignsectionofthiscodeandLamandMartin(1986a;1986b)forguidanceregardingthedesign
ofdrilledshaftssubjectedtodynamicandseismicloads.
3.10.4.10
StructuralDesign,ShaftDimensionsandShaftSpacing
3.10.4.10.1 Design
Drilled shafts shall be designed to resist failure loads to insure that the shaft will not collapse or suffer loss of
serviceabilityduetoexcessivestressand/ordeformation.
3.10.4.10.2 Dimensions
All shafts should be sized in 150 mm increments with a minimum shaft diameter of 450 mm. The diameter of
columnssupportedbyshaftsshallbelessthanorequaltotheshaftdiameterB
3.10.4.10.3 CentertoCenterSpacing
ThecentertocenterspacingofdrilledshaftsofdiameterBshouldbe3Borgreatertoavoidinterferencebetween
adjacentshaftsduringconstruction.Ifcloserspacingisrequired,thesequenceofconstructionshallbespecifiedand
theinteractioneffectsbetweenadjacentshaftsshallbeevaluatedbythedesigner
6203
Part6
StructuralDesign
3.10.4.10.4 ReinforcementSpacing,ClearanceandEmbedment
Reinforcement
Wherethepotentialforlateralloadingisinsignificant,drilledshaftsneedtobereinforcedforaxialloadsonly.Those
portions of drilled shafts that are not supported laterally shall be designed as reinforced concrete columns in
accordance with relevant sections in structural design part of the code and the reinforcing steel shall extend a
minimumof5mbelowtheplanewherethesoilprovidesadequatelateralrestraint.Wherepermanentsteelcasing
isusedandtheshellissmoothpipeandmorethan3mminthickness,itmaybeconsideredasloadcarryinginthe
absenceofcorrosion.
Thedesignoflongitudinalandspiralreinforcementshallbeinconformancewiththerequirementsoftherelevant
sections of the structural design part of the code. Development of length of deformed reinforcement shall be in
conformancewiththerelevantsectionsofthestructuraldesignpartofthecode.
LongitudinalBarSpacing
Theminimumcleardistancebetweenlongitudinalreinforcementshallnothelessthan3timesthebardiameternor
3 times the maximum aggregate size. If bars arc bundled in forming the reinforcing cage, the minimum clear
distancebetweenlongitudinalreinforcementshallnotbelessthan3timesthediameterofthebundledbars.Where
heavyreinforcementisrequired,considerationmaybegiventoaninnerandouterreinforcingcage.
Splices
Splices shall develop the full capacity of the bar in tension and compression. The location of splices shall be
staggeredaroundtheperimeterofthereinforcingcagesoasnottooccuratthesamehorizontalplane.Splicesmal
be developed by lapping, welding, and special approved connectors. Splices shall be in conformance with the
relevantsectionsofthestructuraldesignpartofthecode.
TransverseReinforcement
Transversereinforcementshallbedesignedtoresiststressescausedbyfreshconcreteflowingfrominsidethecage
tothesideoftheexcavatedhole.Transversereinforcementmaybeconstructedofhoopsorspiralsteel.
HandlingStresses
Reinforcementcagesshallbedesignedtoresisthandlingandplacementstresses.
ReinforcementCover
Thereinforcementshallbeplacedacleardistanceofnotlessthan50mmfromthepermanentlycasedor75mm
from the uncased sides. When shafts are constructed in corrosive or marine environments, or when concrete is
placedbythewaterorslurrydisplacementmethods,thecleardistanceshallnotbelessthan100mmforuncased
shaftsandshaftswithpermanentcasingsnotsufficientlycorrosionresistant.
The reinforcement cage shall be centered in the hole using centering devices. All steel centering devices shall be
epoxycoated.
ReinforcementintoSuperstructure
Sufficient reinforcement shall be provided at tit junction of the shaft with the superstructure to make a suitable
connection.Theembedmentofthereinforcementintothecapshallbeinconformancewithrelevantarticlesofthe
structuraldesignpartofthecode.
6204
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
3.10.4.10.5 EnlargedBases
Enlargedbasesshallbedesignedtoinsurethatplainconcreteisnotoverstressed.Theenlargedbaseshallslopeata
sideanglenotlessthan30degreesfromtheverticalandhaveabottomdiameternotgreaterthan3timesdiameter
oftheshaft.Thethicknessofthebottomedgeofenlargedbaseshallnotbelessthan150mm.
3.10.4.11
ConstructionandConcretingofDrilledShafts
3.10.4.11.1 MethodofConstruction
Drilled shafts may be constructed using the dry, casing, or wet method of construction, or a combination of
methods.Ineverycase,excavationofhole,placementofconcrete,andallotheraspectsofshaftconstructionshall
beperformedinconformancewiththeprovisionsofthiscode.
Theloadcapacityanddeformationbehaviorofdrilledshaftscanbegreatlyaffectedbythequalityandmethodsof
construction. The effects of construction methods are incorporated in design by application of factor of safety
consistent with the expected construction methods and level of field quality control measures undertaken as
describedintherelevantsectionsfordrivenpiles.
Where the spacing between shafts in a group is restricted, consideration shall be given to the sequence of
constructiontominimizetheeffectofadjacentshaftconstructionoperationsonrecentlyconstructedshafts.
Thefollowingconstructionprocedureshallbefollowed:
(i) Placepermanent/temporarysteelcasinginpositionandembedcasingtoeintofirmstrata.
(ii) Boreandexcavateinsidethesteelcasingdowntocasingtoelevel,ortoalevelapproved,andcontinue
excavationto finalpiletiplevelusingdrillingmud.Thefluidlevelinsidecasingsshallatalltimes beat
least2metreshigherthanoutsidethecasings.
(iii) Carefullycleanupallmudorsedimentationfromthebottomofborehole.
(iv) Placereinforcementcage,inspectionpipesetc.
(v) Concretecontinuouslyunderwater,ordrillingfluid,byuseofthetremiemethod.
(vi) Afterhardening,breakoutthetopsectionoftheconcretepiletoreachsoundconcrete.
Indrillingofholesforallpiles,bentoniteandanyothermaterialshallbemixedthoroughlywithcleanwatertomake
asuspensionwhichshallmaintainthestabilityofthepileexcavationfortheperiodnecessarytoplaceconcreteand
complete construction. The control tests shall cover the determination of' density, viscosity, gel strength and pH
values.BentoniteslurryshallmeettheSpecificationsasshowninTable6.3.12.
Table6.3.12SpecificationsofBentoniteSlurry
ItemtobeMeasured
RangeofResultsat20C
TestMethod
Densityduringdrillingtosupport
excavation
greaterthan1.05g/ml
MuddensityBalance
Densitypriortoconcreting
lessthan1.25g/ml
MuddensityBalance
Viscosity
3090seconds
MarshConeMethod
pH
9.5to12
pHindicatorpaperstripsor
electricalpHmeter
Temporarycasingofapprovedqualityoranapprovedalternativemethodshallbeusedtomaintainthestabilityof
pileexcavations,whichmightotherwisecollapse.Temporarycasingsshallbefreefromsignificantdistortion.
Whereaboreholeisformedusingdrillingfluidformaintainingthestabilityofaboring,thelevelofthewaterorfluid
intheexcavationshallbemaintainedsothatthewaterorfluidpressurealwaysexceedsthepressureexertedbythe
6205
Part6
StructuralDesign
soilsandexternalgroundwater.Thewaterorfluidlevelshallbemaintainedatalevelnotlessthan2metresabove
thelevelofgroundwater.
The reinforcement shall be placed as indicated on the Drawings. Reinforcement in the form of a cage shall be
assembledwithadditionalsupport,suchasSpreaderforksandlacings,necessarytoformarigidcage.Hoops,links
orhelicalreinforcementshallfitcloselyaroundthemainlongitudinalbarsandbeboundtothembyapprovedwire,
theendsofwhichshallbeturnedintotheinteriorofthepileorpour.Reinforcementshallbeplacedandmaintained
inposition.Thecovertoallreinforcementforpilecapandboredcastinplacepileshallbenotlessthan75mm.
Jointsinlongitudinalsteelbarsshallbepermittedunlessotherwisespecified.Jointsinreinforcementshallbesuch
that the full strength of the bar is effective across the joint and shall be made so that there is no relative
displacementofthereinforcementduringtheconstructionofthepile.
Jointsinlongitudinalbarsinpileswithtension(forinstancefortestloading)shallbecarriedoutbyweldingorother
approvedmethod.
Concretetobeplacedunderwaterordrillingfluidshallbeplacedbytremieequipmentandshallnotbedischarged
freely into the water or drilling fluid. The tremie equipment shall be designed to minimize the occurrence of
entrappedairandothervoids,sothatitcausesminimalsurfacedisturbance,whichisparticularlyimportantwhena
concretewaterinterfaceexists.Itshallbesodesignedthatexternalprojectionsareminimised,allowingthetremie
topassthroughreinforcingcageswithoutcausingdamage.Theinternalfaceofthepipeofthetremieshallbefree
fromprojections.Thetremiepipesshallmeetthefollowingrequirements:
(i)
The tremie pipes shall be fabricated of heavy gage steel pipe to withstand all anticipated handling
stress.Aluminiumpipeshallnotbeusedforplacingconcrete.
(ii)
Tremiepipesshouldhaveadiameterlargeenoughtoensurethataggregatescausedblockagewillnot
occur.Thediameterofthetremiepipeshallbe200mmto300mm.
(iii)
Thetremiepipesshallbesmoothinternally.
(iv)
Since deep placement of concrete will be carried out, the tremie shall be made in sections/lengths
with detachable joints that allow the upper sections/lengths to be removed as the placement
progresses.
(v)
Sections may be joined by flanged, bolted connections (with gaskets) or may be screwed together.
Whatever joint technique is selected, joints between tremie sections must be watertight. The joint
systemselectedshallbetestedforwatertightnessbeforebeginningofconcreteplacement.
(vi)
ThejointsystemtobeusedshallneedapprovaloftheEngineer.
(vii)
Thetremiepipeshouldbemarkedtoallowquickdeterminationofthedistancefromthesurfaceofthe
watertothemouthofthetremie.
(viii) The tremie should be provided with adequately sized funnel or hopper to facilitate transfer of
sufficientconcretefromthedeliverydevicetothetremie.
Before placing concrete, it shall be ensured that there is no accumulation of silt, other material, or heavily
contaminatedbentonitesuspensionatthebaseoftheboring,whichcouldimpairthefreeflowofconcretefromthe
pipeofthetremie.Flushingofboreholesbeforeconcretingwithfreshdrillingfluid/mudispreferred..Asampleof
the bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the boring using an approved sampling device. If the
specific gravity of the suspension exceeds 1.25, the placing of concrete shall not proceed. In this event the
Contractorshallmodifythemudquality.
During and after concreting, care shall be taken to avoid damage to the concrete from pumping and dewatering
operations.
6206
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
Thehopperandpipeofthetremieshallbecleanandwatertightthroughout.Thepipeshallextendtothebaseof
theboringandaslidingplugorbarriershallbeplacedinthepipetopreventdirectcontactbetweenthefirstcharge
of concrete in the pipe of the tremie and the water or drilling fluid. The pipe shall at all times penetrate the
concrete, which has previously been placed and shall not be withdrawn from the concreteurrtil completion of
concreting. The bottom of the tremie pipe shall be embedded in the fresh concrete at least 2.0 metres and
maintainedatthatdepththroughoutconcreting.Atalltimesasufficientquantityofconcreteshallbemaintained
withinthepipetoensurethatthepressurefromitexceedsthatfromthewaterordrillingfluid.
Toensurethequalityofconcretebeingfreefrommud,claylumpsoranyotherundesirablematerialsmixedwith
concreteatthetopportionofthepile,freshconcreteshallbeoverflowedsufficientlyattheendoftheeachpour.
Thelevelofconcretepouredattheendofconcretingoperationshallbeatleast600mmhigherthantheelevation
ofthepileatcutoff.
3.10.4.11.2 Concreting
In drilled shafts/castinsitu bored piles, concrete shall be placed only after excavation has been completed,
inspected and accepted, and steel reinforcement accurately placed and adequately supported. Concrete shall be
placedinonecontinuousoperationinsuchamannerastoensuretheexclusionofanyforeignmatterandtosecure
afullsizedshaft.Concreteshallnotbe placedthroughwaterexceptwheretremiemethodsareapproved.When
depositingconcretefromthetopofpile,theconcreteshallnotbechuteddirectlyintothepilebutshallbepoured
inarapidandcontinuousoperationthroughafunnelhoppercentredatthetopofthepile.
Forlargediameterholesconcretemaybeplacedbytremieorbydropbottombucket;forsmalldiameterboreholes
atremieshallbeutilized.Intremieconcreting,toeofthetremieshallbesetatamaximumof150mmabovethe
bottom of the borehole. Maximum permissible siltation in bore hole prior to start of concrete operation shall be
75mm.Aslumpof125mmto150mmshallbemaintainedforconcretingbytremie.Incaseoftremieconcretingfor
pilesofsmallerdiameterandlengthupto10m,theminimumcementcontentshallbe350kg/m3 ofconcrete.For
larger diameter and/or deeper piles, the minimum cement content shall be 400kg/m3 of concrete. See relevant
sectionsofthecodeforfurtherspecification
For uncased concrete piles, if pile shafts are formedthrough unstable soiland concrete is placed in an open drill
hole, a steel liner shall be inserted in the hole prior to placing concrete. If the steel liner is withdrawn during
concreting,thelevelofconcreteshallbemaintainedabovethebottomofthelinertoasufficientheighttooffset
anyhydrostaticorlateralearthpressure.
Ifconcreteis placedbypumpingthroughahollowstemauger,the augershallnotbe permittedtorotateduring
withdrawalandshallbewithdrawninasteadycontinuousmotion.Concretepumpingpressuresshallbemeasured
andshallbemaintainedhighenoughatalltimestooffsethydrostaticandlateralearthpressure.Concretevolumes
shall be measured to ensure that the volume of concrete placed in each pile is equal to or greater than the
theoreticalvolumeoftheholecreatedbytheauger.Iftheinstallationprocessofanypileisinterruptedoralossof
concretingpressureoccurs,theholeshallberedrilledtooriginaldepthandreformed.
Auguredcastinsitupileshallnotbeinstalledwithin6pilediameterscentretocentreofapilefilledwithconcrete
lessthan24hoursold.Ifconcretelevelinanycompletedpiledrops,thepileshallberejectedandreplaced.Bored
castinsitu concrete piles shall not be drilled/bored within a clear distance of 3 m from an adjacent pile with
concretelessthan48hoursold.
Forunderreamedpiles,theslumpofconcreteshallrangebetween100mmand150mmforconcretinginwater
freeholes.
3.10.4.11.3 ConcretingunderWater
Forconcretingunderwater,theconcreteshallcontainatleast10percentmorecementthanthatrequiredforthe
samemixplacedinthedry.Theamountofcoarseaggregateshallbenotlessthanoneandahalftimes,normore
6207
Part6
StructuralDesign
thantwotimes,thatofthefineaggregate.Thematerialsshallbesoproportionedastoproduceaconcretehavinga
slumpofnotlessthan100mm,normorethan150mm,exceptwhereplasticizingadmixturesisusedinwhichcase,
theslumpmaybe175mm.
Successfulplacementofconcreteunderwaterrequirespreventingflowofwateracrossorthroughtheplacement
site.Onceflowiscontrolled,thetremieplacementconsistsofthefollowingthreebasicsteps:
i)
Thefirstconcreteplacedisphysicallyseparatedfromthewaterbyusingarabbitorgodevilinthe
pipe,orbyhavingthepipemouthcappedorsealedandthepipedewatered.
ii)
Oncefilledwithconcrete,thepipeisraisedslightlytoallowtherabbittoescapeortobreaktheend
seal.Concretewillthenflowoutanddevelopamoundaroundthemouthofthepipe.Thisistermedas
establishingaseal.
iii) Oncethesealisestablished,freshconcreteisinjectedintothemassofexistingconcrete.
Twomethodsarenormallyusedfortheplacementofconcreteusingtremiepipe,namely,thecappedtremiepipe
approach and the rabbit plug approach. In the capped tremie approach the tremie pipe should have a seal,
consistingofabottomplateorapprovedequal,thatsealsthebottomofthepipeuntilthepipereachesthebottom
ofexcavation.Thetremiepipeshouldbefilledwithenoughconcretebeforebeingraisedoffthebottom.Thetremie
pipe should then be raised a maximum of 150 mm (6 inch) to initiate flow. The tremie pipe should not be lifted
furtheruntilamoundisestablishedaroundthemouthofthetremiepipe.Initialliftingofthetremieshouldbedone
slowlytominimizedisturbanceofmaterialsurroundingthemouthofthetremie.
Intherabbitplugapproach,opentremiepipeshouldbesetonthebottom,therabbitpluginsertedatthetop
andthenconcreteshouldbeaddedtothetremieslowlytoforcetherabbitdownwardseparatingtheconcrete
fromthewater.Oncethetremiepipeisfullychargedandtherabbitreachesthemouthofthetremie,thetremie
pipeshouldbeliftedamaximumof150mm(6inch)offthebottomtoallowtherabbittoescapeandtostartthe
concreteflowing.Afterthis,atremiepipeshouldnotbeliftedagainuntilasufficientmoundisestablishedaround
themouthofthetremie.
Tremiesshouldbeembeddedinthefreshconcreteaminimumof1.0to1.5m(3to5ft)andmaintainedatthat
depththroughoutconcretingtoprevententryofwaterintothepipe.Rapidraisingorloweringofthetremiepipe
shouldnotbeallowed.Allverticalmovementsofthetremiepipemustbedoneslowlyandcarefullytopreventloss
ofseal.Iflossofsealoccursinatremie,placementofconcretethroughthetremiemustbehaltedimmediately.
Thetremiepipemustberemoved,theendplatemustberestartedusingthecappedtremieapproach.Inorderto
preventwashingofconcreteinplace,arabbitplugapproachmustnotbeusedtorestartatremieafterlossof
seal.
Means of raising or lowering tremie pipes and of removing pipes smoothly without loss of concrete and without
disturbingplacedconcreteortrappingairintheconcreteShallbeprovided.Pipesshallnotbemovedhorizontally
whiletheyareembeddedinplacedconcreteorwhiletheyhaveconcretewithinthem.
Underwater concrete shall be placed continuously for the whole of a pour to its full depth approved by the
Engineer,withoutinterruptionbymealbreaks,changeofshift,movementsofplacingpositions,andthelike.Delays
in placement may allow the concrete to stiffen and resist flow once placement resumes. The rate of pour from
individualtremieshallbearrangedsothatconcretedoesnotriselocallytoalevelgreaterthan500mmabovethe
averagelevelofthesurroundingconcrete.
Tremieblockageswhichoccurduringplacementshouldbeclearedextremelycarefullytopreventlossofseal.Ifa
blockageoccurs,thetremieshouldbequicklyraised150to600mm(6inchto2ft)andthenloweredinanattempt
todislodgetheblockage.Thedepthofpipeembedmentmustbecloselymonitoredduringallsuchattempts.Ifthe
blockagecannotbeclearedreadily,thetremieshallberemoved,cleared,resealed,andrestarted.
6208
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
Thevolumeofconcreteinplaceshouldbemonitoredthroughouttheplacement.Underrunsareindicativeoflossof
tremiesealsincethewashedandsegregatedaggregateswilloccupyagreatervolume.Overrunsareindicativeof
lossofconcretefromtheinsideofthesteelpile.
3.11 FIELDTESTSFORDRIVENPILESANDDRILLEDSHAFTS
3.11.1 IntegrityTest
Lowstrainintegritytestingofpilesisatoolforqualitycontroloflongstructuralelementsthatfunctioninamanner
similartofoundationpiles,regardlessoftheirmethodofinstallation,providedthattheyarereceptivetolowstrain
impacttesting.Thetestprovidesvelocity(andoptionallyforce)data,whichassistsevaluationofpileintegrityand
pilephysicaldimensions(i.e.,crosssectionalarea,length),continuityandconsistencyofpilematerial.Thetestdoes
not give any information regarding the pile bearing capacity or about pile reinforcement. Integrity test principles
havebeenwelldocumentedinliterature(ASTM588296;Klingmuller,1993).Thereexisttwomethodsofintegrity
testing,namely,PulseEchoMethod(PEM)andTransientResponseMethod(TRM).InPulseEchoMethod,thepile
head motion is measured as a function of time. The time domain record is then evaluated for pile integrity. In
Transient Response Method, the pile head motion and force (measured with an instrumented hammer) are
measuredasafunctionoftime.Thedataarethenevaluatedusuallyinthefrequencydomain.
InordertocheckthestructuralintegrityofthepilesIntegritytestsshallbeperformedonthepilesinaccordance
withtheprocedureoutlinedinASTMD5882.Thetestiscarriedoutbypressingatransducerontoapiletopwhile
striking the pile head with a hand hammer. The Sonic Integrity Testing (SIT)system registers the impact of the
hammerfollowedbytheresponseofthepileandshowsthedisplay.Ifinstructedbytheoperator,thesignalwillbe
stored in the memory of the SITsystem together with other information, such as pile number, date, time, site,
amplication factor, filter length etc. The reflectograms are horizontally scaled and vertically amplified to
compensate external soil friction, which facilitate the interpretation. Consequently, the reflection of the pile toe
matchesthelengthofthepilewhichwillbeconfirmedbytheSITsystem.Incaseofanydefects,theexactlocation
canbedeterminedfromthegraphonthedisplay.
For any project where pile has been installed, integrity tests shall be performed on 100% of the piles. Integrity
testingmaynotidentifyallimperfections,butitcanbeusedinidentifyingmajordefectswithintheeffectivelength.
Inliterature,therearemanyexamplesthathighlightthesuccessoflowstrainintegritytesting(Klingmuller,1993).
3.11.1.1 SomeFactorsInfluencingImplicationofPileIntegrityTest
(a) Thissonicechopileintegritytestingordynamicresponsemethodisbasedonmeasuring(orobservingonan
oscilloscope)thetimeittakesforareflectedcompressionstresswavetoreturntothetopofthepile.Somewaves
willbereflectedbyadiscontinuityinthepileshaft.Whenthecompressivestrengthisknownforthepilematerial
involved,thedepthtothediscontinuityandthepilelengthcanbedetermined.
(b) Ontheotherhand,areaofpileshaftandhenceitsdiameter,isdeterminedfromimpedanceofwaveresponse,
while impedance in any section is a function of elastic modulus of pile material, shaft area and wave velocity
propagating through that section. If the concrete material is uniform throughout the pile length, elastic modulus
andthewavevelocity(provideddisturbancefromothersourceofvibrationnearbyisinsignificant)areconstantfor
thatpile.Inthatcase,changesinimpedanceusuallyindicatechangesofpilecrosssectionalarea.
(c) Whileevaluatingpileintegrity(i.e.,pilelengthandshaftdiameter),thewavevelocityisusuallyassumedtobe
constant throughout pile length. Therefore, the reliability of integrity evaluation entirely depends on the pile
materialanditsuniformitythroughoutshaftlengthwhilecastingwasdone.Thusthelengthanddiameterobtained
frompileintegritytestismerelyanindicationoftheactuallengthanddiameterofthetestedpiles.
6209
Part6
StructuralDesign
(d) Besides, this test can only assess shaft integrity and gives no information for pile bearing capacity
determination.However,ifalargenumberofpilesaretested,itisgenerallyeasytofocusthepileshavingunusual
responses.Therefore,wheneveranintegritytestingiscontemplated,considerationmustbegiventothelimitations
of the various methods/process of pile installation (i.e. pile driving or casting) and the possible need for further
investigation(suchaspileloadtest)tochecktheresultsofsuchtesting.
Itshouldbenotedherethatpileintegritytestisanindicativetestaboutthelengthandqualityofconcreteinthe
pile. This test does not give any idea about its actual load capacity. It is usually suggestive to substantiate the
findings of integrity test by excavation or pull out of the pile to facilitate decisions about final acceptance or
rejectionofanypile.Becauseofthelargecostinvolvedinapileloadtest,thenecessityofintegritytestinfacilitating
theselectionofpilesforloadtestisarationalapproachforqualityandsafetyassuranceofpiledfoundations.
3.11.2 AxialLoadTests
Whereaccurateestimateofaxialloadcarryingcapacityofapileisrequiredtestsinaccordancewith"StandardTest
Method for Piles Under Static Compressive Load", (ASTM D1143) or equivalent shall be performed on individual
piles.Foramajorproject,atleast2%ofpiles(testpilesplusservicepiles)shallbetestedineachareaofuniform
subsoilconditions.Wherenecessary,additionalpilesmaybeloadtestedtoestablishthesafedesigncapacity.The
ultimateloadcarryingcapacityofasinglepilemaybedeterminedwithreasonableaccuracyfromloadtesting.The
loadtestonapileshallnotbecarriedoutearlierthanfourweeksfromthedateofcastingthepile.Aminimumof
onepileateachprojectshallbeloadtestedforboredcastinsitupiles.
Twoprincipaltypesoftestmaybeusedforcompressionloadingonpilestheconstantrateofpenetration(CRP)
test and the maintained load (ML) test. The CRP test was developed by Whitaker (1953). The CRP method is
essentiallyatesttodeterminetheultimateloadonapileandisthereforeappliedonlytopreliminarytestpilesor
researchtypeinvestigationswherefundamentalpilebehaviourisbeingstudied.Inthistestthecompressiveforceis
progressively increased to cause the pile to penetrate the soil at constant rate until failure occurs. The rate of
penetration selected usually corresponds to that of shearing soil samples in unconfined compression tests.
However, rate does not affect results significantly. In CRP test the recommended rates of penetration are 0.75
mm/minforfrictionpilesinclayand1.55mm/minforpilesendbearingingranularsoil.TheCRPtestshallnotbe
used for checking compliance with specification requirements for the maximum settlement at given stages of
loading.
Maintainedload(ML)testissofarthemostusualoneinpractice.IntheMLtesttheloadisincreasedinstagesto
1.5timesortwicetheworkingloadwithtimesettlementcurverecordedateachstageofloadingandunloading.
Thegeneralprocedureistoapplystaticloadsinincrementsof25%oftheanticipateddesignload.TheMLtestmay
alsobetakentofailurebyprogressivelyincreasingtheloadinstages.IntheMLtest,theloadtestarrangementsas
specifiedin"StandardTestMethodforPilesunderStaticAxialCompressiveLoad",(ASTMD1143),shallbefollowed.
AccordingtoASTMD1143eachloadincrementismaintaineduntiltherateofsettlementisnotgreaterthan0.25
mm/hror2hoursiselapsed,whicheveroccursfirst.Afterthatthenextloadincrementisapplied.Thisprocedureis
followedforallincrementsofload.Afterthecompletionofloadingifthetestpilehasnotfailedthetotaltestloadis
removed any time after twelve hours if the butt settlement over one hour period is not greater than 0.25 mm
otherwise the total test load is kept on the pile for 24 hours. After the required holding time, the test load is
removedindecrementof25%ofthetotaltestloadwith1hourbetweendecrement.Iffailureoccurs,jackingthe
pile is continued until the settlement equals 15% of the pile diameter or diagonal dimension. Details of the test
procedurehavebeenoutlinedinASTMD1143.
Selectionofanappropriateloadtestmethodshallbebasedonanevaluationoftheanticipatedtypesandduration
ofloadsduringservice,andshallincludeconsiderationofthefollowing:
(a) Theimmediategoalsoftheloadtest(i.e.,toproofloadthefoundationandverifydesigncapacity)
6210
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
(b) Theloadsexpectedtoactontheproductionfoundation(compressiveand/oruplift,deadand/orlive),and
thesoilconditionspredominantintheregionofconcern.
(c) Thelocalpracticeortraditionalmethod
Asaminimum,thewrittentestproceduresshouldincludethefollowing:
(a) Apparatusforapplyingloadsincludingreactionsystemandloadingsystem.
(b) Apparatusformeasuringmovements.
(c) Apparatusformeasuringloads.
(d) Proceduresforloadingincludingratesofloadapplication,loadcyclingandmaximumload.
(e) Proceduresformeasuringmovements.
(f) Safetyrequirements.
(g) Datapresentationrequirementsandmethodsofdataanalysis.
(h) Drawingsshowingtheproceduresandmaterialstobeusedtoconstructtheloadtestapparatus.
3.11.2.1
LoadTestEvaluationMethods
Anumberofarbitraryorempiricalmethodsareusedtoserveascriteriafordeterminingtheallowableandultimate
load carrying capacity from pile load test. Some are based on maximum permissible gross or net settlement as
measuredatthepilebuttwhiletheothersarebasedontheperformanceofthepileduringtheprogressoftesting
(Chellis, 1961; Whitaker, 1976; Poulos and Davis, 1980; Fuller, 1983). It is recommended to evaluate the load
carryingcapacityofpilesanddrilledshaftusinganyofthefollowingmethods:
(a)
DavissionOffsetLimit
(b)
BritishStandardInstitutionCriterion
(c)
IndianStandardCriteria
(d)
ButlerHoyCriterion
(e)
BrinchHansen90%Criterion
(f)
Othermethodsapprovedbyengineer
Therecommendedcriteriatobeusedforevaluatingtheultimateandallowableloadcarryingcapacityofpilesand
drilledshaftaresummarizedbelow.
(a) A very useful method of computing the ultimate failure load has been reported by Davisson (1973). This
methodisbasedonoffsetmethodthatdefinesthefailureload.Theelasticshorteningofthepile,consideredas
point bearing, free standing column, is computed and plotted on the loadsettlement curve, with the elastic
shorteninglinepassingthroughtheorigin.Theslopeoftheelasticshorteninglineis20.Anoffsetlineisdrawn
parallel to the elastic line. The offset is usually 0.15 inch plus a quake factor, which is a function of pile tip
diameter.Fornormalsizepiles,thisfactorisusuallytakenas0.1Dinch,whereDisthediameterofpileinfoot.
Theintersectionoftheoffsetlinewiththegrossloadsettlementcurvedeterminesthearbitraryultimatefailure
load.
(b) Terzaghi(1942)reportedthattheultimateloadcapacityofapilemaybeconsideredasthatloadwhichcausesa
settlement equal to 10% of the pile diameter. However, this criterion is limited to a case where no definite
failure point or trend is indicated by the loadsettlement curves (Singh, 1990). This criterion has been
incorporatedinBS8004:1986ofBritishStandardInstitution(1986)whichrecommendsthattheultimateload
capacityofpileshouldbethatwhichcausesthepiletosettleadepthof10%ofpilewidthordiameter.
6211
Part6
StructuralDesign
(c) AccordingtotheCodeofPractice2004ofBritishStandardsInstitution(1972),theallowableloadcapacity
of pile should be 50% of the final load, which causes the pile to settle a depth of 10% of pile width or
diameter.
(d) AccordingtoIS:2911(PartVI)1979ultimateloadcapacityofpileissmallerofthefollowingtwo:
(i) Load corresponding to a settlement equal to 10% of the pile diameter in the case of normal
uniformdiameterpileor7.5%ofbasediameterincaseofunderreamedorlargediametercastin
situpile.
(ii) Loadcorrespondingtoasettlementof12mm.
(e) AccordingtoIndianStandardCodeofpractice(IS:29111979),allowableloadcapacityofpileissmallerof
thefollowing:
(i) Twothirdsofthefinalloadatwhichthetotalsettlementattainsavalueof12mm.
(ii) Half ofthe final load atwhichtotal settlement equal to 10%of the pile diameter in the case of
normaluniformdiameterpileor7.5%ofbasediameterincaseofunderreamedpile.
(f) ButlerandHoy(1976)statedthattheintersectionofthetangentattheinitialstraightportionoftheload
settlementcurveandthetangentataslopepointof1.27mm/tondeterminesthearbitraryultimatefailure
load.
(g) TheBrinchandHansen(1963)proposedadefinitionforultimateloadcapacityasthatloadforwhichthe
settlementistwicethesettlementunder90percentofthefulltestload.
(h) Where failure occurs, the ultimate load may be taken to calculate the allowable load using a factor of
safetyof2.0to2.5.
3.11.2.2
SomeFactorsInfluencingInterpretationsofLoadTestResults
Thefollowingfactorsshouldbetakenintoaccountwhileinterpretingthetestresultsfrompileloadtests:
(a) Potentialresidualloads(strains)inthepilewhichcouldinfluencetheinterpreteddistributionofloadalong
thepileshaft.
(b) Possible interaction of friction loads from test pile with downward friction transferred to the soil from
reactionpilesobtainingpartoralloftheirsupportinsoilatlevelsabovethetiplevelofthetestpile.
(c) Changesinporewaterpressureinthesoilcausedbypiledriving,constructionfillandotherconstruction
operationswhichmayinfluencethetestresultsforfrictionalsupportinrelativelyimpervioussoilssuchas
clayandsilt.
(d) Differences between conditions at time of testing and after final construction such as changes in grade
groundwaterlevel.
(e) Potentiallossofsoilresistancefromeventssuchasexcavation,orscour,orbothofsurroundingsoil.
(f) Possibledifferenceintheperformanceofapileinagrouporofapilegroupfromthatofasingleisolated
pile.
(g) Affect on long term pile performance of factors such as creep, environmental effects on pile material,
frictionloadsfromswellingsoilsandstrengthlosses.
(h) Type of structure to be supported, including sensitivity ofstructureto movement andrelations between
liveanddeadloads.
(i) Special testing procedures which may be required for the application of certain acceptance criteria or
methodsofinterpretation.
6212
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
(j) Requirement that all conditions for non tested piles be basically identical to those for test pile including
suchthingassubsurfaceconditions,piletype,length,sizeandstiffness,andpileinstallationmethodsand
equipmentsothatapplicationorextrapolationofthetestresultstosuchotherpilesisvalid
3.11.3
UpliftCapacityofPileandDrilledShaft
Where required by the design, the uplift capacity of pile and drilled shaft shall be determined by an approved
method or analysis based on a minimum factor of safety of three or by load tests conducted in accordance with
ASTMD3689(StandardTestMethodforIndividualPilesUnderStaticAxialTensileLoad).Themaximumallowable
uplift load shall not exceed the ultimate load capacity as determined using the results of load test conducted in
accordancewithASTMD3689,dividedbyafactorofsafetyof2.0.Whereupliftisduetowindorseismicloading,
the minimum factor of safety shall be 2.0 where capacity is determined by an analysis and 1.5 where capacity is
determinedbyloadtests.
Forgrouppilesubjectedtouplift,theallowableworkingupliftloadforthegroupshallbecalculatedbyanapproved
methodofanalysiswherethepilesinthegroupareplacedatcentretocentrespacingofatleast2.5timestheleast
horizontaldimensionofthelargestpile,theallowableworkingupliftloadforthegroupispermittedtobecalculated
asthelesserofthetwo:
(a) Theproposedindividualworkingloadtimesthenumberofpilesinthegroup.
(b) Twothirds of the effective weight of the group and the soil contained within a block defined by the
perimeterofthegroupandtheembeddedlengthofthepile.
(c) Onehalf the effective weight of the pile group and the soil contained within a block defined by the
perimeterofthegroupandtheembeddedpilelengthplusonehalfthetotalsoilshearontheperipheral
surfaceofthegroup
Upliftortensiontestonpilessubjecttotension/upliftshallbeperformedbyacontinuousrateofuplift(CRU)oran
incrementalloading(i.e.ML)test.Whereupliftloadsareintermittentorcyclicincharacter,asinwaveloadingona
marine structure,it is recommended toadoptrepetitive loading on the test pile. The testsshall be performed in
accordancewith"StandardTestMethodforIndividualPilesUnderStaticAxialTensileLoad",(ASTMD3689).
PART C: ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS IN PLANNING, DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF

BUILDINGFOUNDATIONS(SECTIONS3.13to3.22)
3.12 EXCAVATION
Excavationforbuildingfoundationorforotherpurposeshallbedoneinasafemannersothatnodangertolifeand
propertyprevailsatanystageoftheworkoraftercompletion.Therequirementsofthissectionshallbesatisfiedfor
allsuchworksinadditiontothoseofSec3.3ofPart7.
Permanent excavations shall have retaining walls of sufficient strength made of steel, masonry, or reinforced
concretetoretaintheembankment,togetherwithanysurchargeload.
Excavationsforanypurposeshallnotextendwithin300mmunderanyfootingorfoundation,unlesssuchfootingor
foundationisfirstproperlyunderpinnedorprotectedagainstsettlement.
3.12.1 NoticetoAdjoiningProperty
Prior to any excavation close to an adjoining building in another property, a written notice shall be given to the
owner of the adjoining property at least 10 days ahead of the date of excavation. The person undertaking the
excavationshall,wherenecessary,incorporateadequateprovisionsandprecautionarymeasurestoensuresafetyof
the adjoining property and shall supply the details of such measures in the notice to the owner of the adjoining
6213
Part6
StructuralDesign
property.HeshallobtainapprovaloftheAuthorityregardingtheprotectiveprovisions,andpermissionoftheowner
oftheadjoiningpropertyregardingtheproposedexcavationinwriting.
Theprotectivemeasuresshallincorporatethefollowing:
(a) Wherethelevelofthefoundationsoftheadjoiningstructureisatorabovethelevelofthebottomofthe
proposedexcavation,theverticalloadoftheadjoiningstructureshallbesupportedbyproperfoundations,
underpinning,orotherequivalentmeans.
(b) Where the level of the foundations of the adjoining structure is below the level of the bottom of the
proposed excavation, provision shall be made to support any increased vertical or lateral load on the
existingadjoiningstructurecausedbythenewconstruction.
Ifongivingtherequirednotice,incorporatingorproposingtoincorporatetheprotectiveprovisionswhichhaveduly
beenapprovedbytheAuthority,theowneroftheadjoiningpropertyrefusestopermittheproposedexcavationor
toallownecessaryaccessandotherfacilitiestothepersonundertakingtheexcavationforprovidingthenecessary
andapprovedprotectiontotheadjoiningproperty,theresponsibilityforanydamagetotheadjoiningpropertydue
toexcavationshallbethatoftheowneroftheadjoiningproperty.
3.12.2 ExcavationWork
Everyexcavationshallbeprovidedwithsafemeansofentryandexitkeptavailableatalltimes.Whenanexcavation
hasbeencompleted,orpartlycompletedanddiscontinued,abandonedorinterrupted,ortherequiredpermitshave
expired, the lot shall be filled and graded to eliminate all steep slopes, holes, obstructions or similar sources of
hazard.Fillmaterialshallconsistofclean, noncombustiblesubstances.Thefinalsurfaceshallbegradedinsucha
mannerastodrainthelot,eliminatepockets,preventaccumulationofwater,andprecludeanythreatofdamageto
thefoundationsonthepremisesorontheadjoiningproperty.
3.12.2.1
MethodsofProtection
3.12.2.1.1
Shoring,BracingandSheeting
Withtheexceptionofrockcuts,thesidesofallexcavations,includingrelatedorresultingembankments,1.5mor
greater in depth or height measured from the level of the adjacent ground surface to the deepest point of
excavation, shall be protected and maintained by shoring, bracing and sheeting, sheet piling, or other retaining
structures. Alternatively, excavated slopes may be inclined not steeper than 1:1, or stepped so that the average
slope is not steeper than forty five degrees with no step more than 1.5 m high, provided such slope does not
endangeranystructure,includingsubsurfacestructures.Allsidesorslopesofexcavationsorembankmentsshallbe
inspectedafterrainstorms,oranyotherhazardincreasingevent,andsafeconditionsshallberestored.Sheetpiling
andbracingneededintrenchexcavationsshallhaveadequatestrengthtoresistthepossibleforcesresultingfrom
earthorsurchargepressure.DESIGNOFPROTECTIONSYSTEMSHALLBECHECKEDBYAGEOTECHNICALENGINEER.
3.12.2.1.2
GuardRail
Aguardrailorasolidenclosureatleast1mhighshallbeprovidedalongtheopensidesofexcavations,exceptthat
such guard rail or solid enclosure may be omitted from a side or sides when access to the adjoining area is
precluded,orwheresideslopesareoneverticaltothreehorizontalorflatter.
3.12.2.2
PlacingofConstructionMaterial
Excavatedmaterialsandsuperimposedloadssuchasequipment,trucks,etc.shallnotbeplacedclosertotheedge
of the excavation than a distance equal to one and onehalf times the depth of such excavation, unless the
excavationisinrockorthesideshavebeenslopedorsheetpiled(orsheeted)andshoredtowithstandthelateral
force imposed by such superimposed load. When sheet piling is used, it shall extend at least 150 mm above the
6214
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
naturalleveloftheground.Inthecaseofopenexcavationswithsideslopes,theedgeofexcavationshallbetaken
asthetoeoftheslope.
3.12.2.3
SafetyRegulations
Wheneversubsurfaceoperationsareconductedthatmayimposeloadsormovementonadjoiningproperty,suchas
drivingofpiles,compactionofsoils,orsoildensification,theeffectsofsuchoperationsonadjoiningpropertyand
structures shall be considered. The owner of the property that may be affected shall be given 48 hours written
noticeoftheintentiontoperformsuchoperations.Whereconstructionoperationswillcausechangesintheground
water level under adjacent buildings, the effects of such changes on the stability and settlement of the adjacent
foundationshallbeinvestigatedandprovisionmadetopreventdamagetosuchbuildings.Whenapotentialhazard
exists,elevationsoftheadjacentbuildingsshallberecordedatintervalsoftwentyfourhoursorlesstoascertainif
movementhasoccurred.Ifso,necessaryremedialactionshallbeundertakenimmediately.
Wheneveranexcavationorfillistobemadethatwillaffectsafety,stability,orusabilityofadjoiningpropertiesor
buildings,theadjoiningpropertiesorbuildingsshallbeprotectedasrequiredbytheprovisionsofSec3.13.
On excavation, the soil material directly underlying footings, piers, and walls shall be inspected by an
engineer/architectpriortoconstructionofthefooting.Ifsuchinspectionindicatesthatthesoilconditionsdonot
conform to those assumed for the purposes of design and described on the plans, or are unsatisfactory due to
disturbance,thenadditionalexcavation,reductioninallowablebearingpressure,orotherremedialmeasuresshall
beadopted.
Exceptincaseswhereaproposedexcavationwillextendlessthan1.5mbelowgrade,allunderpinningoperations
andtheconstructionandexcavationoftemporaryorpermanentcofferdams,caissons,bracedexcavationsurfaces,
orotherconstructionsorexcavationsrequiredfororaffectingthesupportofadjacentpropertiesorbuildingsshall
besubjecttocontrolledinspection.Thedetailsofunderpinning,andconstructionofcofferdams,caissons,bracing
orotherconstructionsrequiredforthesupportofadjacentpropertiesorbuildingsshallbeshownontheplansor
preparedintheformofshopordetaildrawingsandshallbeapprovedbytheengineerwhopreparedtheplans.
3.13 DEWATERING
Allexcavationsshallbedrainedandthedrainagemaintainedaslongastheexcavationcontinuesorremains.Where
necessary, pumping shall be used. No condition shall be created as a result of construction operations that will
interfere with natural surface drainage. Water courses, drainage ditches, etc. shall not be obstructed by refuse,
waste building materials, earth, stones, tree stumps, branches, or other debris that may interfere with surface
drainageorcausetheimpoundmentofsurfacewater.
3.14 SLOPESTABILITYOFADJOININGBUILDINGS
Thepossibilityofoverturningandslidingofthebuildingshallbeconsidered.Theminimumfactorofsafetyagainst
overturningofthestructureasawholeshallbe1.5.Stabilityagainstoverturningshallbeprovidedbythedeadload
ofthebuilding,theallowableupliftcapacityofpiling,anchors,weightofthesoildirectlyoverlyingfootingsprovided
thatsuchsoilcannotbeexcavatedwithoutrecoursetomajormodificationofthebuilding,orbyanycombinationof
thesefactors.
Theminimum factorofsafetyagainstslidingofthestructureunder lateralloadshall be1.5.Resistancetolateral
loadsshallbeprovidedbyfrictionbetweenthefoundationandtheunderlyingsoil,passiveearthpressure,batter
pilesorbyplumbpiles,subjecttothefollowing:
(a) Theresistancetolateralloadsduetopassiveearthpressureshallnotbetakenintoconsiderationwhere
theabuttingsoilcouldberemovedinadvertentlybyexcavation.
6215
Part6
StructuralDesign
(b) Incaseofpilesupportedstructures,frictionalresistancebetweenthefoundationandtheunderlyingsoil
shallbediscounted.
(c) Theavailableresistancetofrictionbetweenthefoundationandtheunderlyingsoilshallbepredictedonan
assumed friction factor of 0.5. A greater value of the coefficient of friction may be used subject to
verificationbyanalysisandtest.
The faces of cut and fill slopes shall be prepared and maintained to control erosion. The control may consist of
effective planting. The protection for slopes shall be installed as soon as practicable. Where cut slopes are not
subjecttoerosionduetoerosionresistantcharacterofthematerials,suchprotectionmaybeomitted.
Wherenecessary,checkdams,cribbing,ripraporotherdevicesormethodsshallbeemployedtocontrolerosion.
3.15 FILLS
3.15.1 QualityofFill
The excavation outside the foundation shall be backfilled with soil that is free of organic material, construction
debris and large rocks. The backfill shall be placed in lifts and compacted in a manner which does not damage
foundation,thewaterproofingordampproofingmaterial.
3.15.2 PlacementofFill
Fillstobeusedtosupportthefoundationofanybuildingorstructureshallbeplacedinaccordancewithestablished
engineering principle. Before placement of the fill, the existing ground surface shall be stripped off all organic
growth,timber,rubbishanddebris.Afterstripping,thegroundsurfaceshallbecompacted.Materialsforfillshall
consist of sand, gravel, crushed stone, crushed earth, or a mixture of these. The fill material shall contain no
particles exceeding 100 mm in the largest dimension. A soil investigation report and a report of satisfactory
placementoffill,bothacceptabletotheBuildingOfficialshallbesubmitted.Inanuncontrolledfill,thesoilwithin
thebuildingareashallbeexploredusingtestpits.Atleastonetestpitpenetratingatleast2mbelowthelevelofthe
bottomoftheproposedfoundationshall beprovidedforevery200m2ofbuildingarea.Whereversuchtest pits
consistentlyindicatethatthefilliscomposedofmaterialthatisfreeofvoidsandfreeofextensiveinclusionofmud,
organic materials such as paper, garbage, cans, metallic objects, or debris, the fill material shall be acceptable.
Wherethefillshowsvoidsorinclusionsasdescribedabove,eitherthefillshallbetreatedashavingnopresumptive
bearingcapacity,orthebuildingshallincorporateadequatestrengthandstiffnesstobridgesuchvoidsorinclusions
orshallbearticulatedtopreventdamageduetodifferentialorlocalizedsettlementofthefill.
3.15.3 Specifications
Wherefoundationsaretobeplacedoncontrolledfillmaterials,thefillmustbecompactedinlayersnotexceeding
300 mm. Clear specifications shall be provided for the range of water content, the degree of compaction to be
achieved and the method of compaction that shall be followed. Such specifications shall be based on the shear
strengthrequirementforthefillsoilandallowablesettlementestimate.Theminimumdensityofcontrolledfillshall
be95%oftheoptimumdensityobtainedfrom"StandardTestMethodforMoistureDensityRelationofSoilandSoil
AggregateMixtureusing10lb(4.54kg)Rammerand18in(457mm)Drop",(ASTMD1557).
Thedegreeofcompactionachievedinafillshallbeobtainedfrominsitudensitymeasurements.Nonewlayershall
beplacedunlessasatisfactorydensityisattainedineachlayer.
3.16 PROTECTIVERetainingStructuresforFoundations/ShorePiles
A retaining wall is a wall designed to resist lateral earth and/or fluid pressures, including any surcharge, in
accordancewithacceptedengineeringpractice.Retainingwallsforfoundationsshallbedesignedtoensurestability
6216
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Chapter3
againstoverturning,sliding,excessivefoundationpressureandwateruplift;andthattheybedesignedforasafety
factorof 1.5 against lateralslidingand overturning. Generally sheet pileretainingwalls are used for construction
raftfoundationsforbuildings.Tallersheetpilesmayneedatiebackanchordrivenandanchoredbehindthesoilof
thesheetpileretainingwall.
3.17 WATERPROOFINGANDDAMPPROOFING
Walls or portions thereof that retain earth and enclose interior spaces, and floors below grade shall be
waterproofedanddampproofed,withtheexceptionofthosespaceswheresuchomissionisnotdetrimentaltothe
building or occupancy. The roof is also required to be waterproofed. The owner shall perform a subsurface
investigationtodeterminethepossibilityofthegroundwatertablerisingabovetheproposedelevationofthefloor
orfloorsbelowgradeunlesssatisfactorydatafromadjacentareasdemonstratethatgroundwaterhasnotbeena
problem.
Theremayarisetwosituations:(i)wherenohydrostaticpressureoccursand(ii)wherehydrostaticpressureoccurs.
Wherehydrostaticpressureconditionsexist,floorsandwallsbelowfinishedgroundlevelshallbewaterproofedin
accordance with Sec 3.13.1 below. Where hydrostatic pressure conditions do not exist, dampproofing and
perimeter drainage shall be provided in accordance with Sec 3.13.2 below. In addition, the dampproofing and
waterproofingshallalsomeettherequirementsofSec3.13.3.Alldampproofingandwaterproofingmaterialsshall
conformtotherequirementsofSec2.16.7ofPart5.
3.17.1.1
WaterproofingwhereHydrostaticPressureOccurs
Wheregroundwaterinvestigationindicatesthatahydrostaticpressureconditionexists,orislikelytooccur,walls
andfloorsshallbewaterproofedinaccordancewiththissection.
3.17.1.2
FloorWaterproofing
Floors required to be waterproofed shall be of concrete and shallbe designed and constructed towithstand the
anticipatedhydrostaticpressure.
Waterproofingofthefloorshallbeaccomplishedbyplacingundertheslabamembraneofrubberizedasphalt,or
butyl rubber, or polymer modified asphalt, or neoprene, or not less than 0.15 mm polyvinyl chloride or
polyethylene,orotherapprovedmaterials,capableofbridgingnonstructuralcracks.Jointsinthemembraneshall
belappednotlessthan150mmandsealedinanapprovedmanner.
3.17.1.3
WallWaterproofing
Walls required to be waterproofed shall be of concrete or masonry designed to withstand the anticipated
hydrostaticpressureandotherlateralloads.Priortotheapplicationofwaterproofingmaterialsonconcretewalls,
allholesandrecessesresultingfromtheremovalofformtiesshallbesealedwithabituminousmaterialorother
approvedmethodsormaterials.Unitmasonrywallsshallbepargeted ontheexteriorsurfacebelowgroundlevel
withnotlessthan10mmofPortlandcementmortar.Thepargetingshallbecontinuedtothefoundation.Pargeting
ofunitmasonrywallsisnotrequiredwhereamaterialisapprovedfordirectapplicationtothemasonry.
Waterproofingshallbeappliedfromapoint300mmabovethemaximumelevationofthegroundwatertabledown
tothetopofthespreadportionofthefoundation.Theremainderofthewalluptoalevelnotlessthan150mm
abovefinishedgradeshallbedampproofed.
Wallwaterproofingmaterialsshallconsist oftwoplyhotmoppedfelts,notlessthan0.15mmpolyvinylchloride,
1.0 mm polymer modified asphalt, 0.15 mm polyethylene or other approved methods or materials capable of
bridging nonstructural cracks. Joints in the membrane shall be lapped not less than 150 mm and sealed in an
approvedmanner.
6217
Part6
StructuralDesign
Jointsinwallsandfloors,jointsbetweenthewallandthefloor,andpenetrationsofthewallandfloorshallbemade
watertightutilizingestablishedmethodsandmaterials.
3.17.1.4
DampproofingwithnoHydrostaticPressure
Where hydrostatic pressure willnot occur, floorsand walls shall be dampproofedand a subsoil drainage system
shallbeinstalledasdescribedbelow:
3.17.1.5
FloorDampproofing
Forfloors,dampproofingmaterialsshallbeinstalledbetweenthefloorandbasematerials.Thebasematerialshall
notbelessthan100mminthicknessconsistingofgravelorcrushedstonecontainingnotmorethan10percent
materialthatpassesa4.76mmsieve.Whereasiteislocatedinwelldrainedgravelorsand/gravelmixture,afloor
base is not required. When the finished ground level is below the floor level for more than 25 per cent of the
perimeter of the building, the base material need not be provided. Where a separate floor is provided above a
concreteslabthedampproofingmaybeinstalledontopoftheslab.
Dampproofingmaterials,whereinstalledbeneaththeslab,shallconsistofnotlessthan0.15mmpolyethylenewith
jointslappednotlessthan150mm,orotherapprovedmethodsormaterials.Wherepermittedtobeinstalledon
topoftheslab, dampproofingshallconsistofmopped onbitumen,notlessthan0.1mmpolyethylene,orother
approved methods or materials. Joints in membranes shall be lapped not less than 150 mm and sealed in an
approvedmanner.
3.17.1.6
WallDampproofing
Forwalls,dampproofingmaterialsshallbeinstalledandshallextendfromapoint150mmabovegrade,downto
thetopofthespreadportionofthefoundation.
Wall dampproofing material shall consist of a bituminous material, acrylic modified cement base coating,
rubberized asphalt, polymermodified asphalt, butyl rubber, or other approved materials capable of bridging
nonstructuralcracks.
3.17.1.7
PerimeterDrain
Adrainshallbeplacedaroundtheperimeterofafoundationthatconsistsofgravelorcrushedstonecontainingnot
morethan10percentmaterialthatpassesthrougha4.76mmsieve.Thedrainshallextendaminimumof300mm
beyondtheoutsideedgeofthefoundation.Thethicknessshallbesuchthatthebottomofthedrainisnothigher
thanthebottomofthebaseunderthefloor,andthatthetopofthedrainisnotlessthan150mmabovethetopof
thefoundation.Thetopofthedrainshallbecoveredwithanapprovedfiltermembranematerial.Whereadraintile
orperforatedpipeisused,theinvertofthepipeortileshallnotbehigherthanthefloorelevation.Thetopofjoints
orthetopofperforationsshallbeprotectedwithanapprovedfiltermembranematerial.Thepipeortileshallbe
placedonnotlessthan50mmofgravelorcrushedstonecomplyingwiththissection,andshallbecoveredwithnot
lessthan150mmofthesamematerial.
The floor base and foundation perimeter drain shall discharge by gravity or mechanical means into an approved
drainagesystem.Whereasiteislocatedinwelldrainedgravelorsand/gravelmixture,adedicateddrainagesystem
isnotrequired.Whenthefinishedgroundlevelisbelowthefloorlevelformorethan25percentoftheperimeter
ofthebuilding,thefoundationdrainneedbeprovidedonlyaroundthatportionofthebuildingwheretheground
levelisabovethefloorlevel.
6218
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
3.17.2
OtherDampproofingandWaterproofingRequirements
3.17.2.1
PlacementofBackfill
Chapter3
The excavation outside the foundation shall be backfilled with soil that is free of organic material, construction
debrisandlargerocks.Thebackfillshallbeplacedinliftsandcompactedinamannerwhichdoesnotdamagethe
waterproofingordampproofingmaterialorstructurallydamagethewall.
3.17.2.2
SiteGrading
Thegroundimmediatelyadjacenttothefoundationshallbeslopedawayfromthebuildingataslopenotlessthan
1unitverticalin12unitshorizontal(1:12)foraminimumdistanceof2.5mmeasuredperpendiculartothefaceof
thewalloranalternativemethodofdivertingwaterawayfromthefoundationshallbeused.Considerationshallbe
given to possible additional settlement of the backfill when establishing the final ground level adjacent to the
foundation.
3.17.2.3
ErosionProtection
Where water impacts the ground from the edge of the roof, down spout, scupper, valley or other rainwater
collectionordiversiondevice,provisionsshallbeusedtopreventsoilerosionanddirectthewaterawayfromthe
foundation.
3.18 FOUNDATIONONSLOPES
3.18.1 FootingsonSlopes
Wherefootingsaretobefoundedonaslope,thedistanceoftheslopingsurfaceatthebaselevelofthefooting
measuredfromthecentreofthefootingshallnotbelessthantwicethewidthofthefooting.
When adjacent footings are to be placed at different levels, the distance between the edges of footings shall be
suchastopreventundesirableoverlappingofstructuresinsoilanddisturbanceofthesoilunderthehigherfooting
duetoexcavationofthelowerfooting.
On a sloping site, footing shall be on a horizontal bearing and stepped. At all changes of levels, footings shall be
lappedforadistanceofatleastequaltothethicknessoffoundationorthreetimestheheightofstep,whicheveris
greater.Adequateprecautionsshallbetakentopreventtendencyfortheupperlayersofsoiltomovedownhill.
3.19 FOUNDATIONSONFILLSANDPROBLEMATICSOILS
3.19.1 FootingsonFilledupGround
Footings shall not be constructed on loosely filled up ground with non uniform density or consistency, unless
adequatestrengtheningofthesoilismadebyapplyinggroundimprovementtechniques.
3.19.2 GroundImprovement
Inpoorandweaksubsoils,thedesignofshallowfoundationforstructuresandequipmentmaypresentproblems
withrespecttobothsizingoffoundationaswellascontroloffoundationsettlements.Aviablealternativeincertain
situations developed over recent years is to improve the subsoil to an extent that the subsoil would develop an
adequate bearing capacity and foundations constructed after subsoil improvement would have resultant
settlementswithinacceptablelimits.Selectionofgroundimprovementtechniquesmaybedoneinaccordancewith
goodpractice.
6219
Part6
StructuralDesign
3.19.3 SoilReinforcement
Use of suitable geosynthetics/geotextilesmay be made in an approvedmanner for ground improvement where
applicablebasedongoodpractice.
3.20 FOUNDATIONDESIGNFORDYNAMICFORCES
3.20.1 EffectofDynamicForces
Wheremachineryoperationsorothervibrationsaretransmittedthroughfoundation,considerationshallbegivenin
thefoundationdesigntopreventdetrimentaldisturbanceofthesoil.
Impact forces shall be neglected in foundation design except for foundations bearing on loose granular soils,
foundationssupportingcranes,heavymachineryandmovingequipment,orwheretheratioofliveloadcausingthe
impacttothedeadloadexceeds50%.
3.20.2 MachineFoundation
Machine foundations are subjected to the dynamic forces caused by the machine. These dynamic forces are
transmitted to the foundation supporting the machine. Although the moving parts of the machine are generally
balanced,thereisalwayssomeunbalanceinpracticewhichcausesaneccentricityofrotatingparts.Thisproduces
an oscillating force. The machine foundation must satisfy the criteria for dynamic loading in addition to that for
staticloading.
3.20.2.1
TypesofMachineFoundations
Basically,therearethreetypesofmachinefoundation:
(a) Machineswhichproduceaperiodicunbalancedforce,suchasreciprocatingenginesandcompressors.The
speedofsuchmachinesisgenerallylessthan600rpm.Inthesemachines,therotarymotionofthecrankis
convertedintothetranslatorymotion.Theunbalancedforcevariessinusoidal.
(b) Machineswhichproduceimpactloads,suchasforgehammersandpunchpresses.Inthesemachines,the
dynamic force attains a peak value in a very short time and then dies out gradually. The response is a
pulsating curve. It vanishes before the next pulse. The speed is usually between 60 to 150 blows per
minute.
(c) Highspeedmachines,suchasturbines,androtarycompressors.Thespeedofsuchmachinesisveryhigh;
sometimes,itisevenmorethan3000rpm.
Thefollowingfourtypesofmachinefoundationsarecommonlyused.
(a) BlockType:Thistypeofmachinefoundationconsistsofapedestalrestingonafooting(Fig.6.3.3a).The
foundationhasalargemassandasmallnaturalfrequency.
(b) BoxType:Thefoundationconsistsofahollowconcreteblock(Fig.6.3.3b).Themassofthefoundationis
lessthanthatintheblocktypeandthenaturalfrequencyisincreased.
(c) WallType:Awalltypeoffoundationconsistsofapairofwallshavingatopslab.Themachinerestsonthe
topslab(Fig6.3.3c).
(d) FramedType:Thistypeoffoundationconsistsofverticalcolumnshavingahorizontalframeattheirtops.
Themachineissupportedontheframe(Fig.6.3.3d).
Machines which produce periodical and impulsive forces at low speeds are generally provided with a block type
foundation.Framedtypefoundationsaregenerallyusedforthemachinesworkingathighspeedsandforthoseof
6220
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Ch
hapter3
the rotatin
ng types. Somee machines wh
hich induce veery little dynam
mic forces, succh as lathes, need
n
not be prrovided
withamacchinefoundatio
on.Suchmach
hinesmaybedirectlyboltedttothefloor.
3.20.2.2
2
Design
nConsiderrations
For satisfaactory perform

mance, machin
ne foundationss should satissfy the following requiremeents: (i) resonance is
avoided,(ii)bearingcapacityandsettlementaresaffe,and(iii)theereisanadeq
quatevibration
nandshockiso
olation.
Avoidanceofresonanceisdiscussedinthissection.
(I)Resonan
nce:Basedon theiroperatin
ngfrequenciess,themachinesareclassified
das(i)lowspe
eedhavingfreequency
less than 300
3 revolution
ns per minute (rpm),(ii) med
dium speed, frrequency 300 to 1000 rpm, and (iii) high speed,
frequency greater than 1000 rpm. To avoid resonan
nce, the naturral frequency (or the resonaant frequency)) of the
machine fo
oundationsoil system must be either veryy large or veryy small compaared to the op
perating speed
d of the
machine.
(a) Loow speed macchines (f1 <3000 rpm): Proviide a foundation with a natural frequenccy at least tw
wice the
op
peratingfrequency,i.e.,the frequencyratiior(=f1/fn)is lessthan0.5.N
Naturalfrequeencycanbeinccreased
(i))byincreasinggbaseareaor reducingtotaalstaticweighttofthefoundation,(ii)byin
ncreasingmod
dulusof
sh
hear rigidity off the soil by compaction, grrouting or injection, (iii) by u
using piles to provide the reequired
fo
oundationstiffn
ness.
(b) Highspeedmacchines(f1>1000rpm):Providdeafoundationnwithnaturalfrequencynotthigherthanoonehalf
offtheoperatinggvalue,i.e.,freequencyratio r2.Naturalffrequencycanbedecreased
dbyincreasing weight
offfoundation.D
Duringstartinggandstoppingg,themachinewilloperateb
brieflyatreson
nantfrequencyy(fr)of
th
hefoundation. Probableamp
plitudeiscomp
putedatbothffrandf1and comparedwithallowablevaaluesto
de
etermineiftheefoundationarrrangementmustbealtered.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fig.6.3.3.Tyypesofmachin
nefoundationss(a)BlockType
e(b)BoxType(c)WallType((d)FramedTyp
pe.
(2) Types of foundation

ns. Considerin
ng their structtural forms, th
he machine fo
oundations, in
n general, are of the
following types:
t
(i)boxffoundation consistingof a p
pedestal ofcon
ncrete, (ii) boxx foundation consisting
c
of a hollow
concreteb
block,(iii)wallffoundationcon
nsistingofapaairofwallssup
pportingthemachine.(iv)fraamedfoundatio
oncon
sistingofvverticalcolumn
nsandatopho
orizontalframeeworkwhichfo
ormstheseato
ofessentialmaachinery.
Part6
StructuralDesign
Lowspeedmachines(e.g.,forgehammers,presses,lowspeedreciprocatingenginesandcompressors)aregenerally
supportedon blockfoundationhavingalargecontactareawithsoil.Mediumspeedmachines(e.g.,reciprocating
diesel and gas engines) also have, in general, block foundations resting on springs or suitable elastic pads. High
speed and rotating type of machines (e.g., internal combustion engines, electric motors, and turbo generator
machines) are generally mounted on framed foundations. Other high speed machines are placed on block
foundations.Asfaraspossible,theC.G.ofthewholesystemandthecentroidofthebaseareashouldbeonthesame
verticalaxis.Atthemostaneccentricityof5%couldbeallowed.
(3) Permissible amplitude. Many times the permissible amplitude at operating speed is specified by the
manufactures.Ifnotspecified,thefollowingvaluesmaybeadoptedforguidance(i)lowspeedmachines.(f1<500
rpm),horizontalandverticalvibrations,A=0.25run:.(ii)operatingspeedf1 =5001500rpm,A=0.4mmto
0.6mmforhorizontal,andA=0.7mmto0.9mmforverticalmodeofvibration;(iii)operatingspeedf1upto3000
rpm,A=0.2mmforhorizontalandA=0.5mmforverticalvibrations(iv)hammerfoundations,A=10mm.
3.20.2.3
DesignMethods
The various design methods can be grouped as follows: (i) empirical and semiempirical methods, (ii) methods
considering soil as a spring and (iii) methods considering soil as a semiinfinite elastic mass (elastic halfspace
approach)anditsequivalentlumpedparametermethod.Thelumpedparametermethodiscurrentlypreferredand
willbedescribedhere.
Agoodmachinefoundationshouldsatisfythefollowingcriteria.
(a) Likeordinaryfoundations,itshouldbesafeagainstshearfailurecausedbysuperimposedloads,andalso
thesettlementsshouldbewithinthesafelimits.
(b) Thesoilpressureshouldnormallynotexceed80%oftheallowablepressureforstaticloading.
(c) There should be no possibility of resonance. The natural frequency of the foundation should be either
greaterthanorsmallerthantheoperatingfrequencyofthemachine.
(d) Theamplitudesunderserviceconditionshouldbewithinthepermissiblelimitsforthemachine.
(e) Thecombinedcentreofgravityofthemachineandthefoundationshouldbeontheverticallinepassing
throughthecentreofgravityofthebaseplane.
(f) Machine foundation should be taken to a level lower than the level of the foundation of the, adjacent
buildingsandshouldbeproperlyseparated.
(g) Thevibrationsinducedshouldneitherbeannoyingtothepersonsnordetrimentaltootherstructures.
(h) Richart(1967)developedaplotforverticalvibrations,whichisgenerallytakenasaguideforvariouslimits
offrequencyandamplitudewhichhasbeenpresentedinFig.6.3.4.
(i) Thedepthofthegroundwatertableshouldbeatleastonefourthofthewidthofthefoundationbelow
thebaseplace.
3.20.2.4 VibrationAnalysisofaMachineFoundation:
Althoughamachine foundationhas6 degree offreedom, itis assumed tohave a single degreeoffreedom for a
simplifiedanalysis.Fig6.3.5showsamachinefoundationsupportedonasoilmass.Inthiscase,themassmflumps
togetherthemassofthemachineandthemassoffoundation.Thetotalmassmfactsatthecentreofgravityofthe
system.Themassisunderthesupportingactionofthesoil.Theelasticactioncanbelumpedtogetherintoasingle
elasticspringwithastiffnessk.Likewise;alltheresistancetomotionislumpedintothedampingcoefficientc.Thus
the machine foundationreducesto a singlemass having one degree of freedom.The analysis of damped,forced
vibrationis,therefore,applicabletothemachinefoundation.
6222
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
Ch
hapter3
Fig.6.3.4.Limitsoffrequeencyandampliitudes(Richarttschart)
5.Machinefou
undationsuppo
ortedonasoilmass
Fig.6.3.5
3.20.2.4
4.1 DetermiinationofP
Parameterss
Forvibratio
onanalysisof amachinefou
undation,the parametersm
m,candkare required.Thesseparameters canbe
determinedasunder.
W
a machine vibrates, ssome portion of the suppo
orting soil masss also vibratees. The
(a) Mass (m): When
vibratingsoil isknownasth
heparticipatin
ngmassorinp
phasesoilmasss.Therefore, thetotalmasssofthe
undation blocck and machin
ne (mf) and th
he mass (ms) of the
system is equal to the maass of the fou
participatingssoil.Thus
(6.3.51)
m = m f + ms
Part6
StructuralDesign
Unfortunately,thereisnorationalmethodtodeterminethemagnitudeofms.Itisusuallyrelatedtothe
mass of the soil in the pressure bulb. The value of ms generally varies between zero and mf. In other
words,thetotalmass(m)variesbetweenmfand2mfinmostcases.
(b) Spring stiffness (k): The spring stiffness depends upon the type of soil, embedment of the foundation
block,thecontactareaandthecontactpressuredistribution.Thefollowingarethecommonmethods.
i)
Laboratorytest:AtriaxialtestwithverticalvibrationsisconductedtodetermineYoungsmodulus
E. Alternatively, the modulus of rigidity (G) is determined conducting the test under torsional
vibration, and E is obtained indirectly from the relation, E = 2G( 1 + ) , where is Poissons
ratio.Thestiffness(k)isdeterminedas
k=
AE
L
(6.3.52)
where,A crosssectionalareaofthespecimen,andL lengthofthespecimen.

ii)
Barkans method: The stiffness can also be obtained from the value of E using the following
relationgivenbyBarken.
k=
1.13E
A
1
(6.3.53)
Where,A baseareaofthemachine,i.e.areaofcontact.
iii) Plateloadtest:Arepeatedplateloadtestisconductedandthestiffnessofthesoil(kp)isfoundas
theslopeoftheloaddeformationcurve.Thespringconstantkofthefoundationisasunder.
Forcohesivesoils:
B
k = k P
BP
Forcohesionlesssoil:
B + 0.3
k = k P
BP + 0.3
(6.3.54)
(6.3.55)
Where, B is the width of foundation. Alternatively, spring constant can be obtained

fromthesubgrademodulus(ks),as
k = K s A
(6.3.56)
Where,A=areaoffoundation.
iv) Resonancetest:Theresonancefrequency(fn)isobtainedusingavibratorofmassmsetupon
asteelplatesupportedontheground.Thespringstiffnessobtainedfromtherelation
II.
fn =
n
1
=
k m = 4 2 f n m
2 2
6.3.57
Dampingconstant(c):Dampingisduetodissipationofvibrationenergy,whichoccursmainlybecauseof
thefollowingreasons.
i)
Internalfrictionlossduetohysterisisandviscouseffects.
ii)
Radiationallossduetopropagationofwavesthroughsoil.
The damping factor D for an underdamped system can be determined in the laboratory. Vibration response is
plottedandthelogarithmicdecrementisfoundfromtheplot,as
6224
Vol.2
SoilsandFoundations
2D
1 D
Chapter3
D=
6.3.58
ThedampingfactorDmayalsobeobtainedfromtheareaofthehysteresisloopoftheloaddisplacementcurve,as
D=
6.3.59
Where,W totalworkdone;andW worklosthysteresis.ThevalueofDformostsoilsgenerallyvaries

between0.01and0.1.
3.21
GEOHAZARDANALYSISFORBUILDINGS
Geohazard analysis of buildings include design considerations for possible landslides, ground subsidence,
earthquakes and other seismic events, erosion and scour, construction in toxic and/or contaminated landfills,
groundwatercontaminationetc.Apreliminaryreviewoftheselectedsiteshouldbecarriedoutforexistenceofany
oftheabovementionedgeohazardinthearea.Adetailedanalysismaybecarriedoutonlyifthepreliminaryreview
indicatesasignificantthreatforthebuildingwhichmayexistfromanyoftheabovementionedpotentialgeohazard
attheselectedlocationforthebuilding.Seerelevantsectionfordetails.
6225
Chapter 4
BAMBOO
4.1
SCOPE
ThisSectionrelatestotheuseofbambooinconstructionasstructuralelements,nonstructuralelementsandalso
fortemporaryworksinstructuresorelementsofthestructure,ensuringqualityandeffectivenessofdesignand
constructionusingbamboo.Itcoversminimumstrengthdata,dimensionalandgradingrequirements,seasoning,
preservativetreatment,designandjointingtechniqueswithbamboowhichwouldfacilitatescientificapplication
andlongtermperformanceofstructures.Italsocoversguidelinessoastoensureproperprocurement,storage,
precautionsanddesignlimitationsonbamboo.
4.2
TERMINOLOGY
ForthepurposeofthisSection,thefollowingdefinitionsshallapply.
4.2.1 AnatomicalPurposeDefinitions
BambooTallperennialgrassesfoundintropicalandsubtropicalregions.TheybelongtothefamilyPoaceae
andsubfamilyBambusoidae.
BambooCulmAsingleshootofbamboousuallyhollowexceptatnodeswhichareoftenswollen.
BambooClumpAclusterofbambooculmsemanatingfromtwoormorerhizomerinthesameplace.
CelluloseAcarbohydrate,formingthefundamentalmaterialofallplantsandamainsourceofthemechanical
propertiesofbiologicalmaterials.
Cell A fundamental structural unit of plant and animal life, consisting of cytoplasm and usually enclosing a
centralnucleusandbeingsurroundedbyamembrane(animal)orarigidcellwall(plant).
Cross Wall A wall at the node closing the whole inside circumference and completely separating the hollow
cavitybelowfromthatabove.
Hemi Cellulose The polysaccharides consisting of only 150 to 200 sugar molecules, also much less than the
10000ofcellulose.
LigninApolymerofphenylpropaneunits,initssimpleform(C6H5CH3CH2CH3).
SliverThinstripsofbambooprocessedfrombambooculm.
TissueGroupofcells,whichinhigherplantsconsistof(a)Parenchymaasoftcellofhigherplantsasfoundin
stempithorfruitpulp,(b)Epidermistheoutermostlayerofcellscoveringthesurfaceofaplant,whenthere
areseverallayersoftissue.
4.2.2 StructuralPurposeDefinitions
BambooMatBoardAboardmadeoftwoormorebamboomatsbondedwithanadhesive.
BeamAstructuralmemberwhichsupportsloadprimarilybyitsinternalresistancetobending.
BreakingStrengthAtermlooselyappliedtoagivenstructuralmemberwithrespecttotheultimateloaditcan
sustainunderagivensetofconditions.
BundleColumnAcolumnconsistingofthreeormorenumberofcuhuboundasintegratedunitwithwireor
straptypeoffastenings.
CentreInternodeAtestspecimenhavingitscentrebetweentwonodes.
CharacteristicLoadThevalueofloadswhichhasa95percentprobabilityofnotexceedingduringthelifeofthe
structure.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6227
Part6
StructuralDesign
CharacteristicStrengthThestrengthofthematerialbelowwhichnotmorethan5percentofthetestresults
areexpectedtofall.
Cleavability The ease with which bamboo can be split along the longitudinal axis. The action of splitting is
knownascleavage.
Column A structural member which supports axial load primarily by inducing compressive stress along the
fibres.
Common Rafter A roof member which supports roof battens and roof coverings, such as boarding and
sheeting.
CurvatureThedeviationfromthestraightnessoftheculm.
DelaminationSeparationofmatsthroughfailureofglue.
EndDistanceThedistancemeasuredparalleltothefibresofthebamboofromthecentreofthefastenertothe
closestendofthemember.
Flatten Bamboo Bamboo consisting of culms that have been cut and unfolded till it is flat. The culm thus is
finallyspreadopen,thediaphragms(crosswalls)atnodesremovedandpressedflat.
FullCulmThenaturallyavailablecircularsection/shape.
FundamentalorUltimateStressThestresswhichisdeterminedonaspecifiedtype/sizeofculmsofbamboo,in
accordance with standard practice and does not take into account the effects of naturally occurring
characteristicsandotherfactors.
InnerDiameterDiameterofinternalcavityofahollowpieceofbamboo.
InsideLocationPositioninbuildingsinwhichbambooremainscontinuouslydryorprotectedfromweather.
JointAconnectionbetweentwoormorebamboostructuralelements.
JoistAbeamdirectlysupportingfloor,ceilingorroofofastructure.
LengthofInternodeDistancebetweenadjacentnodes.
Loaded End or Compression End Distance The distance measured from the centre of the fastner to the end
towardswhichtheloadinducedbythefasteneracts.
MatchetAlightcuttingandslashingtoolintheformofalargeknife.
MatAwovensheetmadeusingthinslivers.
MortiseandTenonAjointinwhichthereducedend(tenon)ofonememberfitsintothecorrespondingslot
(mortise)oftheother.
NetSectionSectionobtainedbydeductingfromthegrosscrosssection(A),theprojectedareasofallmaterials
removedbyboring,groovingorothermeans.
NodeTheplaceinabambooculmwherebranchessproutandadiaphragmisinsidetheculmandthewallson
bothsidesofnodearethicker.
OuterDiameterDiameterofacrosssectionofapieceofbamboomeasuredfromtwooppositepointsonthe
outersurface.
OutsideLocationPositioninbuildinginwhichbamboosareoccasionallysubjectedtowettinganddryingasin
caseofopenshedsandoutdoorexposedstructures,
PermissibleStressStressobtainedafterapplyingfactorofsafetytotheultimateorbasicstress.
PrincipalRafterAroofmemberwhichsupportspurlins.
PurlinsAroofmemberdirectlysupportingroofcoveringorcommonrafterandroofbattens.
RoofBattensAroofmemberdirectlysupportingtiles,corrugatedsheets,slatesorotherroofingmaterials.
RoofSkeletonTheskeltonconsistingofbambootrussorrafteroverwhichsolidbamboopurlinsarelaidand
lashedtotherafterortopchordofatrussbymeansofgalvanizedironwire,cane,grass,bambooleaves,etc.
SlendernessRatioTheratioofthelengthofmembertotheradiusofgyrationisknownasslendernessratioof
member.(Thelengthofthememberistheequivalentlengthduetoendconditions).
SplitsThepiecesmadefromquartersbydividingthequartersradiallyandcuttinglongitudinally.
TaperTheratioofdifferencebetweenminimumandmaximumouterdiametertolength.
UnloadedEndDistanceTheenddistanceoppositetotheloadedend
6228
Vol.2
Bamboo
Chapter4
Wall Thickness Half the difference between outer diameter and inner diameter of the piece at any cross
section.
WetLocationPositioninbuildingsinwhichthebamboosarealmostcontinuouslydamp,wetorincontactwith
earthorwater,suchaspilesandbamboofoundations.
4.2.3 DefinitionsRelatingtoDefects
BambooBore/GHOONHoleThedefectcausedbybambooGHOONbeetle(Dinoderusspp.Bostychdae),which
attacksfelledculms.
CrookednessAlocalizeddeviationfromthestraightnessinapieceofbamboo.
DiscolorationAchangefromthenormalcolourofthebamboowhichdoesnotimpairthestrengthofbamboo
orbamboocompositeproducts.
4.2.4 DefinitionsRelatingtoDryingDegrades
CollapseThedefectoccurringonaccountofexcessiveshrinkage,particularlyinthickwalledimmaturebamboo.
Whenthebamboowallshrinks,theouterlayerscontainingalargerconcentrationofstrongfibrovascularbundles
set the weaker interior portion embedded in parenchyma in tension, causing the latter to develop cracks. The
interiorcrackdevelopsintoawidesplitresultinginadepressionontheoutersurface.Thisdefectalsoreducesthe
structuralstrengthofroundbamboo.
EndSplittingAsplitattheendofabamboo.Thisisnotsocommonadefectasdryingoccursbothfromouter
andinteriorwallsurfacesofbambooaswellastheendattheopenends.
SurfaceCracking Fine surface cracksnot detrimental tostrength, However, the crackingwhich occursat the
nodesreducesthestructuralstrength.
WrinkledandDeformedSurfaceDeformationincrosssection,duringdrying,whichoccursinimmatureround
bamboosofmostspecies;inthickwalledpieces,besidesthisdeformationtheoutersurfacebecomesunevenand
wrinkled.Veryoftentheinteriorwalldevelopsacrackbelowthesewrinkles,runningparalleltotheaxis.
4.3
SYMBOLS
ForthepurposeofthisSection,thefollowinglettersymbolsshallhavethemeaningindicatedagainsteach,unless
otherwisestated:
A=Crosssectionalareaofbamboo(perpendiculartothedirectionoftheprincipalfibresandvessels),mm2
A=
(D
d2
D=Outerdiameter,mm
d=Innerdiameter,mm
E=Modulusofelasticityinbending,N/mm2
fc=Calculatedstressinaxialcompression,N/mm2
fcp=Permissiblestressincompressionalongthefibres,N/mm2
I=Momentofinertia,mm4=
(D
64
d2
l=Unsupportedlengthofcolumn
M=Moisturecontent,percent
r=Radiusofgyration=
(I A)
R=Modulusofrupture,N/mm2
W=Wallthickness,mm
Z=Sectionmodulus,mm3
=Deflectionordeformation,mm.
6229
Part6
StructuralDesign
4.4
MATERIALS
4.4.1 SpeciesofBamboo
InBangladesh,fourspeciesarewidelyused,hencestudiedforthemechanicalpropertiesastabulatedinTable
6.4.16.4.4fortop,bottomandmiddlepositions.Table6.4.5furthersummarizetheaveragemechanical
propertiesof21bamboospecies.
Table6.4.1:Moisturecontentandspecificgravityvaluesoffourbamboosspeciesatdifferentheightpositions
(averageoffivebamboospecimens)
Species
Moisturecontent(%)
bottom
middle
SpecificGravity
(basedonovendryweightandatdifferentvolumes)
top
Greenvolumes
Kali(Oxytenanthera
Ovendryvolumes
bottom
middle
top
bottom
middle
top
129
118
104
0.48
0.49
0.51
0.66
0.69
0.74
108
92
86
0.54
0.58
0.61
0.75
0.79
0.83
104
93
79
0.55
0.57
0.61
0.79
0.81
0.54
100
84
66
0.57
0.64
0.74
0.79
0.84
0.85
nigrociliata)
Mitinga(Bambusa
tulda)
Bethua(Bambusa
polymorpha)
Borak(Bambusa
balcooa)
Table6.4.2:Shrinkagesofwallthicknessandindiameteroffourbamboospeciesatdifferentheightpositions
Species
Shrinkageinwallthickness(%)
Fromgreento12%mc
bottom middle
Kali(Oxytenanthera
top
Shrinkageindiameter(%)
Fromgreentoovendry
condition
bottom middle
10.7
top
8.7
Fromgreento12%mc
bottom middle
4.8
3.0
top
9.6
8.1
5.9
13.2
2.4
Mitinga(Bambusatulda)
11.9
7.3
4.9
14.9
9.6
7.6
3.9
3.5
2.6
Bethua(Bambusa
10.7
6.5
5.1
12.1
10.1
8.2
7.3
5.5
4.1
11.1
7.6
4.8
13.7
11.1
8.4
4.2
3.4
2.5
nigrociliata)
polymorpha)
Borak(Bambusa
balcooa)
Table6.4.3:Compressivestrengthoffourbamboospeciesatdifferentheightpositions
Compressionparalleltothegrain(kg/cm2)
Species
green
airdry
bottom
middle
top
bottom
middle
top
257
287
301
346
387
417
403
466
513
529
596
620
Bethua(Bambusa
320
361
419
452
512
534
Kali(Oxytenanthera
nigrociliata)
polymorpha)
6230
Vol.2
Bamboo
Borak(Bambusa
394
Chapter4
459
506
510
536
573
balcooa)
Table6.4.4:Modulusofelasticityandmodulusofrupturevaluesoffourbamboospeciesatdifferentheight
positions
Modulusofelasticity(1000kg/cm2)
Species
green
Modulusofrapture(kg/cm2)
airdry
green
airdry
bottom middle top bottom middle top bottom middle top bottom middle top
Kali(Oxytenantheranigrociliata)
119
131
169
131
150
224
541
459
415
721
580
530
105
138
147
114
140
168
710
595
542
883
745
671
Bethua(Bambusapolymorpha)
61
65
82
60
70
96
469
426
373
566
468
414
Borak(Bambusa
72
92
103
93
108
127
850
712
624
926
787
696
balcooa)
4.4.2 Grouping
Sixteenspeciesofbambooaresuitableforstructuralapplicationsandclassifiedintothreegroups,namely,Group
A,GroupBandGroupCasgiveninTable6.4.6.
Table6.4.6:SafeWorkingStressesofBamboosforStructuralDesigning(1)
Sl
Species
No.
Extreme
Fibre
Stress
Modulusof
Allowable
Elasticity
Compressive
Stress
10 N/mm
in
N/mm
Bending
N/mm2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
GROUPA
i)
Barnbusaglancescens(syn.
20.7
3.28
15.4
B.nana)
ii)
Dendrocalamusstrictus
18.4
2.66
10.3
iii)
Oxytenantheraabyssinicia
20.9
3.31
13.3
GROUPB
iv)
Bambusabalcooa
16.05
1.62
13.3
v)
B.pallida
13.8
2.87
15.4
vi)
B.nutans
13.2
1.47
13.0
vii)
B.tulda
13.3
1.77
11.6
viii)
B.auriculata
16.3
3.34
10.5
ix)
B.burmanica
14.9
2.45
11.4
x)
Cephalostachyumpergraci[e
13.2
2.48
10.5
xi)
Melocannabaccifera(Syn.
13.3
2.53
15.4
M.bambusoides)
xii)
Thyrsotachysoliveri
15.5
2.16
13.4
GROUPC
xiii)
Bambusaarundinacea(Syn.
14.6
1.32
10.1
B.bambos)
xiv)
B.polymorpha
9.15
1.71
8.97
6231
Part6
StructuralDesign
xv)
B.ventricosa
8.5
0.75
10.3
xvi)
B.vulgaris
10.4
0.64
11.0
xvii)
Dendrocalamuslongispathus
8.3
1.22
12.0
Oxytenantheranigrociliata
10.18
2.6
7.2
xviii)
NOTEThevaluesofstressinN/mm havebeenobtainedbyconvertingthe
2
valuesinkgf/cm bydividingthesameby10.
1)
Thevaluesgivenpertaintotestingofbambooingreencondition.
ThecharacteristicsofthesegroupsareasgiveninTable6.4.6.
Species of bamboo other than those listed in the Table 6.4.6 may be used, provided the basic strength
characteristics are determined and found more than the limits mentioned therein. However, in the absence of
testingfacilitiesandcompulsionforuseofotherspecies,andforexpedientdesigning,allowablestressesmaybe
arrivedatbymultiplyingdensitywithfactorsasgiveninTable6.4.5.
4.4.3 MoistureContentinBamboo
With decrease of moisture content (M) the strength of bamboo increases exponentially and bamboo has an
intersection point (fibre saturation point) at around 25 percent moisture content depending upon the species.
Maturedculmsshallbeseasonedtoabout20percentmoisturecontentbeforeuse.
Table6.4.7LimitingStrengthValues(inGreenCondition)
ModulusofRupture(R)
N/mm2
ModulusofElasticity(E)in
Bending
103N/mm2
(1)
(2)
(3)
GroupA
R>70
E>9
GroupB
70R>50
9E>6
GroupC
50R>30
6E>3
Table6.4.8AllowableLongTermStress(N/mm2)perUnitDensity(kg/m3)
Condition
Axial
Compression
Bending
(nobuckling)
Shear
Green
0.011
0.015
Airdry(12%)
0.013
0.020
0.003
NOTEInthelaboratoryregime,thedensityofbambooisconvenientlydetermined.Havingknown
thedensityofanyspeciesofbamboo,permissiblestressescanbeworkedoutusingfactorsindicated
above. For example, if green bamboo has a density of 600 kg/m3, the allowable stress in bending
wouldbe0.015x600=9N/mm2.
References:IS6874:1973,MethodofTestforRoundBamboo,BureauofIndianStandards,India,1974.
6232
Vol.2
Table6.4.5PhysicalandMechanicalPropertiesofBamboos(inRoundForm)
Sl
No.
Species
Properties
InGreenCondition
Density
kg/m3
Modulusof
Rupture
InAirDryConditions
Maximum
Compressive
strengthN/mm2
Density
kg/m3
N/mm2
Modulusof
Elasticity103
N/mm2
Modulus
ofRupture
N/mm2
Modulusof
Elasticity103
N/mm2
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
i)
Bambusaauriculata
594
65.1
15.01
36.7
670
89.1
21.41
ii)
B.balcooa
740
64.2
7.06
38.6
850
68.3
9.12
iii)
B.bambos(Syn.B.atwndinacea)
559
58.3
5.95
35.3
663
80.1
8.96
iv)
B.burmanica
570
59.7
11.01
39.9
672
105.0
17.81
v)
B.glancescens(Syn.B.nana)
691
82.8
14.77
53.9
vi)
B.nutans
603
52.9
6.62
45.6
673
52.4
10.72
vii)
B.pallida
731
55.2
12.90
54.0
viii)
B.polymorpha
610
36.6
6.0
31.4
840
40.6
5.89
ix)
B.tulda
610
53.2
10.3
39.5
830
65.8
11.18
x)
B.ventricosa
626
34.1
3.38
36.1
xi)
B.vulgaris
626
41.5
2.87
38.6
xii)
Cephalostachyumpergracile
601
52.6
11.16
36.7
640
71.3
19.22
xiii)
Dendrocalamusgiganteous
597
17.2
0.61
35.2
xiv)
D.hamiltonii
515
40.0
2.49
43.4
xv)
D.longispathus
711
33.1
5.51
42.1
684
47.8
6.06
xvi)
D.membranacaus
551
26.3
2.44
40.5
664
37.8
3.77
xvii)
D.strictus
631
73.4
11.98
35.9
728
119.1
15.00
xviii)
Melocannabaccifera
817
53.2
11.39
53.8
751
57.6
12.93
xix)
688
83.6
14.96
46.6
xx)
Oxytenantheranigrociliata
510
40.70
11.7
25.2
830
51.98
12.85
xxi)
Thyrsostachysoliveri
733
61.9
9.72
46.9
758
90.0
12.15
NOTES
Part6
StructuralDesign
6233
Part6
StructuralDesign
1Asthestrengthofsplitbambooismorethanthatofroundbamboo,theresultsoftestsonromdbarnboCaIIbesafelyusedfordesigningwithspitbamboo.
2ThevaluesofstressinN/mm2havebeenobtainedbyconvertingthevaluesinkgf/cm2bydividingthesameby10.
6234
Vol.2

4.4.3.1
Airseasoningofsplitorhalfroundbamboodoesnotposemuchproblembutcarehastobetakento
prevent fungal discoloration and decay. However, rapid drying in open sun can control decay due to
fungalandinsectattack.Seasoninginroundformpresentsconsiderableproblemasregardsmechanical
degradeduetodryingdefects.
NOTEAgeneralobservationhasbeenthatimmaturebamboogetsinvariablydeformedincrosssectionduringseasoningandthick
walledimmaturebamboogenerallycollapses.Thickmaturebambootendstocrackonthesurface,withthecracksoriginatingatthe
nodesandatthedecayedpoints.Moderatelythickimmatureandthinandmoderatelythickmaturebamboosseasonwithmuchless
degrade.Bamboohavingpoorinitialconditiononaccountofdecay,borerholes,etcgenerallysuffersmoredryingdegrades.
4.4.3.2
Acceleratedairseasoningmethodgivesgoodresults.Inthismethod,thenodaldiaphragms(septa)are
punctured to enable thorough passage of hot air from one end of the resulting bamboo tube to the
otherend.
References:1.
2.
4.4.4
IS6874:1973,MethodofTestforRoundBamboo,BureauofIndianStandards,
India,1974.
Salehuddin,A.B.M.,UnnotoPoddhotiteBashShongrokkhonoBabohar,
BangladeshAgricultureResearchInstitute,2004.
GradingofStructuralBamboo
Gradingissortingoutbambooonthebasisofcharacteristicsimportantforstructuralutilizationasunder:
(a) Diameterandlengthofculm,
(b) Taperofculm,
(c)
Straightnessofculm,
(d) Internodallength,
(e) Wallthickness,
(f)
Densityandstrength,and
(g) Durabilityandseasoning.
Oneoftheabovecharacteristicsorsometimescombinationof2or3characteristicsformthebasisofgrading.The
culmsshallbesegregatedspecieswise.
4.4.4.1
DiameterandLength
4.4.4.1.1
GradationaccordingtotheMeanOuterDiameter
ForstructuralGroupAandGroupBspecies,culmsshallbesegregatedinstepsof10mmofmean
outerdiameterasfollows:
SpecialGrade70mm<Diameter<100mm
GradeI50mm<Diameter<70mm
GradeII30mmeDiameter<50mm
GradeIIIDiameter<30mm
ForstructuralGroupCspeciesculmsshallbesegregatedinstepsof20mmofmeanouterdiameter
GradeI80mm<Diameter<100mm
GradeII60mm<Diameter<80mm
GradeIIIDiameter<60mm
4.4.4.1.2
4.4.5
Theminimumlengthofculmsshallbepreferably6mforfacilitatingclosefittingsatjoints.
Taper
Thetapershallnotbemorethan5.8mmpermetrelength(or0.58percent)ofbambooinanygradeofbamboo.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6235
Part6
StructuralDesign
4.4.5.1
Curvature
Themaximumcurvatureshallnotbemorethan75mminalengthof6mofanygradeofbamboo.
4.4.5.2
WallThickness
Preferablyminimumwallthicknessof8mmshallbeusedforloadbearingmembers.
4.4.5.3
DefectsandPermissibleCharacteristics
4.4.5.3.1
Dead and immature bamboos, bore/GHOON holes, decay,collapse, checks more than 3 mm in
depth,shallbeavoided.
4.4.5.3.2
Protrudedportionofthenodesshallbeflushedsmooth.Bambooshallbeusedafteratleastsix
weeksoffelling.
References:1.
IS9096:1979,CodeofPracticeforPreservationofBambooforStructural
Purposes,BureauofIndianStandards,India,1974.
4.4.5.3.3
Broken,damagedanddiscoloredbambooshallberejected.
4.4.5.3.4
Maturedbambooofatleast4yearsofageshallbeused.
4.4.6 DurabilityandTreatability
4.4.6.1
Durability
Thenaturaldurabilityofbambooislowandvariesbetween12monthsand36monthsdependingon
thespeciesandclimaticconditions.Intropicalcountriesthebiodeteriorationisverysevere,Bamboos
are generally destroyed in about one to two years time when used in the open and in contact with
groundwhileaservicelifeoftwotofiveyearscanbeexpectedfrombamboowhenusedundercover
and out of contact with ground. The mechanical strength of bamboo deteriorates rapidly with the
onset of fungal decay in the sclerenchymatous fibres. Split bamboo is more rapidly destroyed than
roundbamboo.Formakingbamboodurable,suitabletreatmentshallbegiven.
Treatability
Due to difference in the anatomical structure of bamboo as compared to timber, bamboo behaves
entirely differently from wood during treatment with preservative. Bamboos are difficult to treat by
normal preservation methods in dry condition and therefore treatment is best carried out in green
condition.
BoucherieProcess
Inthisprocessofpreservativetreatment,waterbornepreservativeisappliedtoendsurfaceofgreen
bamboothroughasuitablechamberandforcedthroughthebamboobyhydrostaticorotherpressure.
References:1.
Salehuddin,A.B.M.,UnnotoPoddhotiteBashShongrokkhonoBabohar,
BangladeshAgricultureResearchInstitute,2004.
4.4.6.1.1
Performanceoftreatedbamboo
Trialswithtreatedbambooshaveindicatedvarieddurabilitydependingupontheactuallocationof
use.Theperformanceinpartiallyexposedandundercoveredconditionsisbetter.
4.4.6.1.2
4.5
Forprovisionsonsafetyofbamboostructuresagainstfire,seePart7ConstructionalPractices
andSafety.
PERMISSIBLESTRESSES
4.5.1 FactorofSafety
Thesafetyfactorforderivingstressesofbambooshallbeasunder:
Extremefibrestressinbeams
6236
Vol.2
BambooChapter8
Modulusofelasticity
4.5
Maximumcompressivestressparallel
3.5
tograin/fibres
4.5.2
CoefficientofVariation
Thecoefficientofvariation(inpercent)shallbeasunder:
Property
Mean
Range
Maximum
Expected
Value
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Modulusofrupture
Modulusof
15.9
5.728.3
23.4
21.1
12.731.7
27.4
14.9
7.622.8
20.0
elasticity
Maximum
compressivestress
Themaximumexpectedvaluesofcoefficientofvariationwhicharetheupperconfidencelimitsundernormality
assumptionsuchthatwith97.5percentconfidencetheactualstrengthofthebambooculmswillbeatleast53
percentoftheaveragereportedvalueofmodulusofruptureinTable6.4..
4.5.3
Solid bamboos or bamboos whose wall thickness (w) is comparatively more and bamboos which are generally
knownasmalebambooshavingnodesverycloserandgrowingonridgesareoftenconsideredgoodforstructural
purposes.
4.5.4
Thesafeworkingstressesfor16speciesofbamboosaregiveninTable6.4..
4.5.5
Forchangeindurationofloadotherthancontinuous(longterm),thepermissiblestressesgiveninTable6.4.shall
bemultipliedbythemodificationfactorsgivenbelow:
4.6
4.6.1
Forimposedormediumtermloading
1.25
Forshorttermloading
1.50
Allstructuralmembers,assembliesorframeworkinabuildingshallbecapableofsustaining,withoutexceeding
the limits of stress specified, the worst combination of all loadings. A fundamental aspect of design will be to
determinetheforcestowhichthestructure/structuralelementmightbesubjectedto,startingfromtheroofand
working down to the soil by transferring the forces through various components and connections. Accepted
principles of mechanics for analysis and specified design procedures shall be applied (see Part 6 Structural
Design,Chapter11TimberStructures).
4.6.2
Unlike timber, bamboo properties do not relate well to species, being dependent among other factors, on
positionoftheculm,geographiclocationandage.Thepracticeintimberengineeringistobasedesignsonsafe
workingstressesandthesamemaybeadoptedtobamboowiththelimitationsthatpracticalexperiencerather
thanprecisecalculationsgenerallygovernthedetailing.
6237
Part6
StructuralDesign
4.6.3 NetSection
Itisdeterminedbypassingaplaneoraseriesofconnectedplanestransverselythroughthemembers.Leastnet
sectionalareaisusedforcalculatingloadcarryingcapacityofamember.
4.6.4 Loads
TheloadsshallbeinaccordancewithPart6StructuralDesign,Chapter2Loads.
4.6.5 StructuralForms
4.6.5.1
Main structural components in bamboo may include roof and floor diaphragms, shear walls, wall
panellings,beams,piles,columns,etc.Bothfromthepointofviewofcapacityanddeformation,trusses
andframedskeltonsaremuchbetterapplicationsofbamboo.
4.6.5.2
SchematizationofBambooasaStructuralMaterial
Thisshallbebasedontheprinciplesofengineeringmechanicsinvolvingthefollowingassumptionsand
practices:
(a) Theelasticbehaviourofbamboo,tillfailure;(plasticbehaviourbeingconsideredinsignificant);
(b) Bambooculmsareanalysedonmeanwallthicknessbasisashollowtubestructure(notperfectly
straight)memberonmeandiameterbasis:
(c)
Thestructuralelementsofbambooshallbeappropriatelysupportednearthenodesofculmas
andwherethestructuralsystemdemands.Thejointsinthedesignshallbelocatednearnodes;
and
(d) Bamboostructuresbedesignedlikeanyotherconventionalstructuralelementstakingcareof
detailswithregardstosupportsandjoints;theyshallbeconsideredtogenerallyactasahinge,
unlesssubstantiatingdatajustifyafixedjoint.
4.6.6 FlexuralMemders
4.6.6.1
Allflexuralmembersmaybedesignedusingtheprinciplesofbeamtheory.
4.6.6.2
The tendency of bamboo beams to acquire a large deflection under long continuous loadings due to
possibleplastic flow,if any shallbetakencare of.Permanent load maybedoubledfor calculation of
deflection under sustained load (including creep) in case of green bamboo having moisture content
exceeding15percent.
4.6.6.3
Themomentofinertia,Ishallbedeterminedasfollows:
(a) Theoutsidediameterandthewallthicknessshouldbemeasuredatbothends,correctupto1mmfor
diameterofculmand0.1mmforthewallthickness.(Foreachcrosssectionthediametershallbetaken
twice,indirectionperpendiculartoeachotherandsothewallthicknessshallbetakenasfourtimes,in
thesameplacesasthediameterhasbeentakentwice.)
(b) With these values the mean diameter and the mean thickness for the middle of the beam shall be
calculatedandmomentofinertiadetermined.
4.6.6.4
Themaximumbendingstressshallbecalculatedandcomparedwiththeallowablestress.
4.6.6.5
Forshearchecks,conventionaldesignprocedureinaccordancewithPart6StructuralDesign,Chapter
11TimberStructuresshallbefollowed.
NOTEThebasicshearstressvalues(N/mm2)forfivespeciesofbambooinsplitformingreenconditioncanbeassumedasunder:
Bambusapallida
6238
9.77
B.Vulgaris
9.44
Dedroculumusgiganteous
8.86
Vol.2
BambooChapter8
4.6.6.6
4.6.7
D.humiltonii
7.77
11.2
Forces acting on a beam, being loads or reaction forces at supports, shall act in nodes or as near to
nodesasbyanymeanspossible.
BambooColumn(PredominantlyLoadedinAxialDirection)
4.6.7.1
Columns and struts are essential components sustaining compressive forces in a structure. They
transferloadtothesupportingmedia.
4.6.7.2
Designofcolumnsshallbebasedononeofthefollowingtwocriteria:
(a) Fullscalebucklingtestsonthesamespecies,sizeandotherrelevantvariables.
(b) Calculations,basedonthefollowing:
i)
Themomentofinertiashallbeasper6.6.3.
ii) For bamboo columns the best available straight bamboo culms shall be selected.
Structuralbamboocomponentsincompressionshouldbekeptunderaslendernessratio
of50.
iii) Thebendingstressesduetoinitialcurvature,eccentricitiesandinduceddeflectionshallbe
takenintoaccount,inadditiontothoseduetoanylateralload.
4.6.7.3
BucklingcalculationshallbeaccordingtoEuler,withareductionto90percentofmomentofinertia,to
takeintoaccounttheeffectofthetaper,providedthereduceddiameterisnotlessthan0.6percent.
4.6.7.4
Forstrengthandstability,largerdiameterthickwalledsectionsofbamboowithcloselyspacednodes
shallbeused,Alternatively,smallersectionsmaybetiedtogetherasabundlecolumn.
4.6.8
Assemblies,RoofTrusses
4.6.8.1
Atrussisessentiallyaplanestructurewhichisverystiffintheplaneofthemembers,thatistheplane
in which it is expected to carry load, but very flexible in every other direction. Roof truss generally
consistsofanumberoftriangulatedframes,themembersofwhicharefastenedatendsandthenature
of stresses at joints are either tensile or compressive and designed as pinended joints (see Fig.
6.4.1.(a)). Bamboo trusses may also be formed using bamboo mat board or bamboo matveneer
compositeorplywoodgusset(seeFig.6.4.1.(b)).
4.6.8.2
Trussshallbeanalysedfromprinciplesofstructuralmechanicsforthedeterminationofaxialforcesin
members.Fortheinfluenceofeccentricities,dueallowanceshallbemadeindesign.
4.6.8.3
Thetrussheightshallexceed0.15timesthespanincaseofatriangulartruss(pitchedroofing)and0.10
timesthespanincaseofarectangular(parallel)truss.
4.6.8.4
Formembersincompression,theeffectivelengthforinplanestrengthverificationshallbetakenasthe
distancebetweentwoadjacentpointsofcontraflexure.Forfullytriangulatedtrusses,effectivelength
forsimplespanmemberswithoutespeciallyrigidendconnectionshallbetakenasthespanlength.
4.6.8.5
Forstrengthverificationofmembersincompressionandconnections,thecalculatedaxialforcesshould
beincreasedby10percent.
4.6.8.6
Thespacingoftrussesshallbeconsistentwithuseofbamboopurlins(2mto3m).
6239
Part6
StructuralDesign
4.6.8.7
4.7
Theendsinopenbeams,joists,rafters,purlinsshallbesuitablyplugged.Bambooroofcoveringsshall
be considered as nonstructural in function. The common roof covering shall include bamboo mat
board, bamboo mat corrugated sheet, bamboo tiles/ strings, plastered bamboo reeds, thatch,
corrugatedgalvanizedironsheeting,plainclaytilesorpantiles,etc.
DESIGNANDTECHNIQUESOFJOINTS
4.7.1 BambooJoints
Round, tubular form of bamboo requires an approach different to that used for sawn timber. Susceptibility to
crushingattheopenends,splittingtendency,variationindiameter,wallthicknessandstraightnessaresomeof
theassociatedissueswhichhavetobetakencareofwhiledesigninganddetailingtheconnectionswithbamboo.
4.7.1.1
TraditionalPractices
Suchjoiningmethodsrevolvearoundlashingortyingbyropeorstringwithorwithoutpegsordowels.
Suchjointslackstiffnessandhavelowefficiency.
4.7.1.1.1
LengtheningJoints(EndJoints)
LapJoint
Inthiscase,endofonepieceofbambooismadetolapoverthatoftheotherinlineandthewholeis
suitablyfastened.Itmaybefulllappingorhalflapping.Fullsectionculmsareoverlappedbyatleast
one internode and tied together in two or three places. Efficiency could be improved by using
bambooorhardwooddowels.Inhalflapping,culmsshallpreferablybeofsimilardiameterandcut
longitudinallytohalfdepthoveratleastoneinternodelengthandfastenedasperfulllapjoint(see
Fig.6.4.2).
ButtJoint
Culms of similar diameter are butted end to end, interconnected by means of side plates made of
quarterroundculmofslightlylargediameterbamboo,fortwoormoreinternodelengths.Assembly
shallbefixedandtiedpreferablywithdowelpins.Thisjointtransfersbothcompressiveandtensile
forcesequallywell(seeFig.6.4.3).
SleevesandInserts
Shortlengthofbambooofappropriatediametermaybeusedeitherexternallyorinternallytojoin
twoculmstogether(seeFig.6.4.4).
6240
Vol.2
BambooChapter8
Fig.6.4.1SometypicalconfigurationsforsmallandlargetrussesinBamboo
ScarfJoint
Ascarfjointisformedbycuttingaslopingplane1in4to6onoppositesidesfromtheendsoftwo
similardiameterbambooculmstobejoined.Theyshallbelappedtoformacontinuouspieceandthe
assembly suitably fastened by means of lashings. Using hooked splays adds to the strength and
properlocationofjoints(seeFig.6.4.5).
4.7.1.1.2
BearingJoints
For members which either bear against the other or cross each other and transfer the loads at an
angleotherthanparalleltotheaxis,bearingjointsareformed.
6241
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fig.6.4.2LapjointinBamboo
Fig:6.4.3ButtjointwithsideplatesinBamboo
ButtJoint
Thesimplestformconsistsofahorizontalmembersupporteddirectlyontopofaverticalmember.The
topofthepostmaybecuttoformasaddletoensureproperseatingofbeamforgoodloadtransfer.
Thesaddleshouldbeclosetoanodetoreduceriskofsplitting(seeFig.6.4.6).
TenonJoint
It is formed by cutting a projection (tenon) in walls of one piece of bamboo and filling it into
corresponding holes (mortise) in another and keyed. It is a neat and versatile joint for maximum
strengthandresistancetoseparation(seeFig.6.4.7).
6242
Vol.2
BambooChapter8
Fig:6.4.4SleevesandinsertsforBamboojoint
Fig:6.4.5Scarfjoint
Fig:6.4.6ButtjointsinBamboo
6243
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fig:6.4.7Tenonjoint
CrossOverJoint
Itisformedwhentwoormorememberscrossatrightanglesanditsfunctionistolocatethemembers
andtoprovidelateralstability.Incaseofthejointconnectingfloorbeamtopost,itmaybeloadbearing
(seeFig.6.4.8).Suchjointsarealsousedtotransmitanglethrust.
AngledJoint
When two ormoremembers meet orcrossother thanatrightangles,angled jointsare formed. For
butt joints, the ends of the members may be shaped to fit in as saddle joints. Tenons would help in
strengtheningsuchjoints(seeFig.6.4.9).
4.7.1.2
ModernPractices
Followingaresomeofthemodernpracticesforbamboojointing(seeFig.6.4.10):
6244
(a)
Plywood or solid timber gusset plates maybe used at joint assemblies of web and chord
connectioninatrussandfixedwithbamboopinsorbolts.Hollowcavitiesofbambooneedtobe
stuffedwithwoodenplugs.
(b)
Use of wooden inserts to reinforce the ends of the bamboo before forming the joints.
Alternativelysteelbandsclampswithintegralbolt/eyemaybefittedaroundbamboosectionsfor
jointing.
Vol.2
BambooChapter8
Fig:6.4.8Crossoverjoints(Bearingjoints)
Fig:6.4.9Angledjointswithintegraltenons
6245
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fig:6.4.10Gussetplatedjoint
4.7.1.3
FixingMethodsandFasteningDevices
Incaseofbuttjointsthetiemaybepassedthroughapredrilledholeoraroundhardwoodorbamboo
pegsordowelsinsertedintoprefomedholestoactashorns.Pegsaredrivenfromoneside,usuallyat
anangletoincreasestrengthanddowelspassrightthroughthemember,usuallyatrightangles.
4.7.1.3.1
Normally1.60mmdiametergalvanizedironwiremaybeusedfortightlashing.
4.7.1.3.2
WireBoundJoints
Usually galvanized iron 2.00 mm diameter galvanized iron wire is tightened around the joints by
bindingtherespectivepiecestogether.Atleasttwoholesaredrilledineachpieceandwireispassed
throughthemforgoodresults.
4.7.1.3.3
PinAndWireBoundJoints
Generally12mmdiabamboopinsarefastenedtoculmsandboundby2.00mmdiametergalvanized
ironwire.
4.7.1.3.4
FishPlates/GussetPlatedJoints
Atleast25mmthickhardwoodspliceplateor12mmthickstructuralgradeplywoodareused.Solid
bamboopinshelpinfasteningtheassembly.
4.7.1.3.5
HornedJoints
Twotonguesmadeatoneendofculmmaybefastenedwithacrossmemberwithitsmortisegrooves
toreceivehorns,theassemblybeingwirebound.
4.7.1.4
Foranycompletejointalternativeforagivenloadandgeometry,descriptionofallfasteningelements,
theirsizesandlocationshallbeindicated.Datashallbebasedonfullscaletests.
4.7.1.5
Testsonfullscalejointsoroncomponentsshallbecarriedoutinarecognizedlaboratory.
4.7.1.6
In disaster high wind and seismic areas, good construction practice shall be followed taking care of
joints, their damping and possible ductility. Bracings in walls shall be taken care of in bamboo
structures.
4.8
STORAGEOFBAMBOO
Procurementandstorageofbamboostocksareessentialforanyprojectworkandshallbedoneinaccordance
withPart7ConstructionalPracticesandSafety.
6246
Vol.2
Chapter 5
CONCRETEMATERIAL
5.1
GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope
Theprovisionsofthischaptershallapplytothedesignofreinforcedandprestressedconcretestructuresspecified
inchapters6,8,9shallbeapplicablefornormalweightaggregateonlyunlessotherwisespecified.
5.1.2 Notation
Cc = creepcoefficient
Ec = modulusofelasticityofconcrete
Es = modulusofelasticityofreinforcement
Et = modulusofelasticityofconcreteattheageofloadingt
= specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete
= requiredaveragecompressivestrengthofconcreteused
asthebasisforselectionofconcreteproportions
y = specifiedyieldstrengthofreinforcement
K = coefficientofshrinkage
wc = unitweightofconcrete
cc = creepstraininconcrete
sh = shrinkageofplainconcrete
= areaofsteelrelativetothatoftheconcrete.
5.2
= standarddeviation
CONSTITUENTSOFCONCRETE
5.2.1 Cement
5.2.1.1
Cementshallconformtooneofthefollowingspecifications:
(a) "BDSEN1971:2003
(b) "SpecificationforPortlandCement"(ASTMC150/C150M09)
(c) "SpecificationforBlendedHydraulicCement"(ASTMC595/C595M10),
(d) "ASTMC1157/C1157M10"
5.2.1.2
Cementusedintheconstructionshallbethesameasthatusedintheconcretemixdesign.
5.2.2 Aggregates
5.2.2.1
5.2.2.2
ConcreteaggregatesshallconformtothestandardsCoarseandFineAggregatesfromNaturalSources
forConcrete(BDS243:1963);SpecificationforConcreteAggregates(ASTMC33/C33M08).
Maximumnominalsizeofcoarseaggregateshallbetheminimumofthefollowing:
(a)
Part6
StructuralDesign
1
5
thenarrowestdimensionbetweensidesofforms,
6247
Part6
StructuralDesign
(b)
1
3
(c)
3
4
thedepthofslabs,
the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars, or bundles of bars, or
prestressingtendonsorducts.
Theabovelimitationsmayberelaxedif,inthejudgmentoftheengineer,workabilityandmethodsof
consolidationaresuchthatconcretecanbeplacedwithouthoneycomborvoids.
5.2.2.3
CoarseaggregatemadefromGradeAbricksasspecifiedinBDS208"SpecificationforCommonBuilding
Clay Bricks" may be used in different types slab and non structural elements, except in applications
where the ambient environmental conditions may impair the performance of concrete made of such
aggregates.
5.2.3 Water
5.2.3.1
Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis,
salts,organicmaterials,orothersubstancesthatmaybeharmfultoconcreteorreinforcement.
5.2.3.2
For concretewhereinaluminium members will be embedded, mixingwatershall notcontain harmful

amountsofchlorideionasindicatedinSec5.5.3.
5.2.3.3
Nonpotablewatershallnotbeusedinconcreteexceptthefollowingconditions:
(a)
Selectionofconcreteproportionsshallbebasedonconcretemixesusingwaterfromthesame
source.
(b)
Nonpotable water is permitted only if specified comparative mortar test cubes made with
nonpotablewaterproduceatleast90percentofthestrengthachievedwithpotablewater.
5.2.4 Admixtures
5.2.4.1
Priorapprovaloftheengineershallberequiredfortheuseofadmixturesinconcrete.Alladmixtures
shallconformtotherequirementsofthissectionandSec2.4.5ofPart5.
5.2.4.2
Admixtureusedintheworkshallbethesameasthatusedintheconcretemixdesign.
5.2.4.3
Admixturescontainingchlorideotherthanimpuritiesfromadmixtureingredientsshallnotbeusedin
concrete containing embedded aluminium, or in concrete cast against permanent galvanized metal
forms(seeSec5.5.1.2and5.5.2.1).
5.2.4.4
Air entraining admixtures, if used in concrete, shall conform to "Specification for Air entraining
AdmixturesforConcrete"(ASTMC26006).
5.2.4.5
Water reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures, water reducing and
retarding admixtures, and water reducing and accelerating admixtures, if used in concrete, shall
conform to "Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete" ( ASTM C494 / C494M 10) or
"SpecificationforChemicalAdmixturesforuseinProducingFlowingConcrete"(ASTMC1017/C1017M
07).
5.2.4.6
Fly ash orother pozzolans used asadmixtures shall conform to "Specificationfor FlyAsh andRaw or
CalcinedNaturalPozzolanforuseasaMineralAdmixtureinPortlandCementConcrete"(ASTMC618
08a).
5.2.4.7
Groundgranulatedblastfurnaceslagusedasanadmixtureshallconformto"SpecificationforGround
IronBlastFurnaceSlagforuseinConcreteandMortar"(ASTMC98909a).
6248
Vol.2
ConcreteMaterialsChapter5
5.3
STEELREINFORCEMENT
5.3.1 General
5.3.1.1
SteelreinforcementforconcreteshallconformtotheprovisionsofthissectionandthoseofSec2.4.6of
Part5.
5.3.1.2
ModulusofelasticityEsforreinforcementshallbetakenas200kN/mm2.
5.3.1.3
Reinforcing bars to be welded shall be indicated on the drawings and welding procedure to be used
shall be specified.Reinforcing bars otherwise conformingto BDS ISO69352:2006, shall also possess
materialpropertiesnecessarytoconformtoweldingproceduresspecifiedin"StructuralWeldingCode
ReinforcingSteel"(AWSD1.4)oftheAmericanWeldingSociety.
5.3.2 DeformedReinforcement
5.3.2.1
Deformedreinforcingbarsshallconformtooneofthefollowingspecifications:
(a)
"SpecificationforSteelBarsandWiresfortheReinforcementofConcrete"(BDS1313),
(b)
"Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" ( ASTM
A615/A615M09b),
(c)
"Specification for Rail Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" Including
SupplementaryRequirementsS1(ASTMA996/A996M09bincludingS1),
(d)
"SpecificationforAxleSteelDeformedandPlainBarsforConcreteReinforcement"(ASTMA996
/A996M09b),
(e)
"Specification for Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for ConcreteReinforcement" ( ASTM A706 /
A706M09b),
(f)
"SpecificationforColdWorkedSteelBarsfortheReinforcementofConcrete"(BS4461).
5.3.2.2
Deformedreinforcingbarswithaspecifiedyieldstrengthyexceeding410N/mm2shallbepermitted,
provided y shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent and the bars otherwise
conformtooneoftheASTMspecificationslistedinSec5.3.2.1(AlsoseeSec6.1.2.5).
5.3.2.3
Galvanizedreinforcingbarsshallcomplywith"SpecificationforZincCoated(Galvanized)SteelBarsfor
ConcreteReinforcement"(ASTMA767/A767M09).Epoxycoatedreinforcingbarsshallcomplywith
"Specifications for Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars" ( ASTM A775 / A775M 07b). Galvanized or
epoxycoatedreinforcementshallalsoconformtooneofthestandardslistedinSec5.3.2.1above.
5.3.3 PlainReinforcement
5.3.3.1
PlainbarsshallconformtooneofthespecificationslistedinSection5.3.2.1(a),(b),(c)or(d).
5.3.3.2
Plainwireshallconformto"SpecificationforSteelWire,Plain,forConcreteReinforcement"(ASTMA82
/A82M07)exceptthatforwirewithaspecifiedyieldstrengthyexceeding410N/mm2,yshallbe
thestresscorrespondingtoastrainof0.0035.
5.3.3.3
Plain bars and wire may be used as ties, stirrups and spirals for all structural members and for all
reinforcementinstructuresupto4storeyhigh.
5.3.4 StructuralSteel,SteelPipeorTubing
5.3.4.1
Structural steel used with reinforcing bars in composite compression members meeting the
requirementsofSec6.3.10.8or6.3.10.9shallconformtooneofthefollowingspecifications:
(a)
"SpecificationforStructuralSteel"(ASTMA36/A36M08),
6249
Part6
StructuralDesign
(b)
"SpecificationforHighStrengthLowAlloyStructuralSteel"(ASTMA242/A242M04(2009)),
(c)
"SpecificationforHighStrengthLowAlloyStructuralManganeseVanadiumSteel"(ASTMA572/
A572M07),
(d)
"Specification for High Strength Low Alloy ColumbiumVanadium Steels of Structural Quality"
(ASTMA572/A572M07),
(e)
"SpecificationofHighStrengthLowAlloyStructuralSteelwith50ksi(345Mpa)MinimumYieldPoint
to4in(100mm)Thick"(ASTMA588/A588M05).
5.3.4.2 Steel pipe or tubing for composite compression members composed of a steel encased
concrete core meeting the requirements of Sec 6.3.10.7 shall conform to one of the following
specifications:
5.4
(a)
Grade B of "Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and
Seamless"(ASTMA53/A53M07).
(b)
"SpecificationforColdFormedWeldedandSeamlessCarbonSteelStructuralTubinginRounds
andShapes"(ASTMA500/A500M10).
(c)
"Specification for Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing " (ASTM
A50107).
WORKABILITYOFCONCRETE
Concrete mix proportions shall be such that the concrete is of adequate workability and can properly be
compacted.Suggestedrangesofvaluesofworkabilityofconcreteforsomeplacingconditions,aregiveninTable
6.5.1.
Table6.5.1:SuggestedWorkabilityofConcreteforVariousPlacingConditions
PlacingConditions
Degreeof
Workability
ValuesofWorkability
Concretingofthinsections
Verylow
2010secondsVeeBeetime
withvibration
or
0.750.80compactingfactor
Concretingoflightly
Low
105secondsVeeBeetime
reinforcedsectionswith
or
vibration
Concretingoflightly
Medium
52secondsVeeBeetime
reinforcedsectionswithout
or
vibrationorheavily
reinforcedsectionwith
or
vibration
2575mmslumpfor20*mm
aggregate
Concretingofheavilyrein
High
Above0.92compactingfactor
forcedsectionswithout
or
vibration
75125mmslumpfor20*mm
aggregate
*Forsmalleraggregatesthevalueswillbelower
6250
Vol.2
5.5
DURABILITYOFCONCRETE
5.5.1
SpecialExposures
5.5.1.1
Forconcreteintendedtohavelowpermeabilitywhenexposedtowater,thewatercementratioshall
notexceed0.50.
5.5.1.2
Forcorrosionprotectionofreinforcedconcreteexposedtobrackishwater,seawaterorsprayfrom
thesesources,thewatercementratioshallnotexceed0.4.
Ifminimumconcretecoverrequiredby Sec8.1.8isincreasedby12mm,watercementratiomaybe
increasedto0.45.
5.5.1.3
ThewatercementratiorequiredinSec5.5.1.1and5.5.1.2aboveandTable6.5.2shallbecalculated
usingtheweightofcementmeetingtherequirementsofBDSEN1971orASTMC595/C595M10
orC1157/C1157M10,plustheweightofflyashorpozzolansatisfyingASTMC61808aand/orslag
satisfyingASTMC98909a,ifany.
5.5.2
SulphateExposures
5.5.2.1
Concretetobeexposedtosulphatecontainingsolutionsorsoilsshallconformtotherequirements
ofTable6.5.2orbemadewithacementthatprovidessulphateresistancewiththemaximumwater
cementratioprovidedinTable6.5.2.
5.5.2.2
Calciumchlorideshallnotbeusedasanadmixtureinconcreteexposedtosevereorverysevere
sulphatecontainingsolutions,asdefinedinTable6.5.2.
5.5.3
CorrosionofReinforcement
5.5.3.1
Forcorrosionprotection,maximumwatersolublechlorideionconcentrationsinhardenedconcrete
atagesfrom28to42dayscontributedfromtheingredientsincludingwater,aggregates,
cementitiousmaterials,andadmixtures,shallnotexceedthelimitsofTable6.5.3.Whentestingis
performedtodeterminewatersolublechlorideioncontent,testprocedureshallconformtoAASHTO
T260,"MethodsofSamplingandTestingforTotalChlorideIoninConcreteandConcreteRaw
Materials".
5.5.3.2
Whenreinforcedconcretewillbeexposedtobrackishwater,seawater,orsprayfromthesesources,
requirementsofSec5.5.1.1and5.5.1.2forwatercementratio,orconcretestrengthandminimum
coverrequirementsofSec8.1.8shallbesatisfied.
5.5.4
MinimumConcreteStrength
Minimumconcretestrengthforstructuraluseofreinforcedconcreteshallbe20N/mm2.However,forbuildings
upto4storey,theminimumconcretestrengthmayberelaxedto17N/mm2.
Table6.5.2:RequirementsforNormalWeightAggregateConcreteExposedtoSulphateContainingSolutions
Sulphate
WaterSoluble
Sulphate
Exposure
Sulphate(SO4)
(SO4)
CementType
inSoil,percent
inWater,
byWeight
(ppm)
Maximum
1
WaterCement
Ratio,by
Weight
Negligible
0.000.10
0150
6251
Part6
StructuralDesign
Moderate2
0.100.20
1501500
OtherthanCEMI
0.50
andBtype
Severe
0.202.00
1500
OtherthanCEMI
0.45
10,000
andBtype
Very
Over2.00
Over10,000
OtherthanCEMI
0.45
severe
Note:
andBtype
1
FortypesofcementseeASTMC150andC595
Seawater
Pozzolanthathasbeendeterminedbytestorservicerecordtoimprovesulphate
resistancewhenusedinconcretecontainingTypeVcement.
Table6.5.3:MaximumChlorideIonContentforCorrosionProtection
TypeofMember
MaximumWaterSolubleChlorideIon
(Cl)inConcrete,PerCentbyWeight
ofCement
Prestressedconcrete
0.06
Reinforcedconcreteexposedtochloridein
0.15
service
Reinforcedconcretethatwillbedryor
1.00
protectedfrommoistureinservice
Otherreinforcedconcreteconstruction
5.6
0.30
CONCRETEMIXPROPORTION
5.6.1 General
5.6.1.1
Proportionsofmaterialsforconcreteshallbesuchthat:
(a)
Workability and consistency are achieved for proper placement into forms and around
reinforcement,withoutsegregationorexcessivebleeding;
(b)
ResistancetospecialexposurestomeetthedurabilityrequirementsofSec5.5areprovided;and
(c)
ConformancewithstrengthtestrequirementsofSec5.12isensured.
5.6.1.2
Wheredifferentmaterialsaretobeusedfordifferentportionsoftheproposedwork,eachcombination
shallbeevaluated.
5.6.1.3
Concreteproportions,includingwatercementratio,shallbeestablishedonthebasisoffieldexperience
and/or trial mixtures with materials to be employed (Sec 5.6.2) except as permitted in Sec 5.6.3 or
requiredbySec5.5.
5.6.2
ProportioningConcreteMixontheBasisofFieldExperienceand/orTrialMixtures
5.6.2.1
6252
StandardDeviation
Vol.2
(a) Astandarddeviationshallbeestablishedwheretestrecordsareavailableinaconcreteproduction
facility. Test records from which a standard deviation is calculated shall meet the following
requirements:
i)
Theseshallrepresentmaterials,qualitycontrolprocedures,andconditionssimilartothose
expectedfortheproposedwork.Deviationsinmaterialsandproportionsfortheproposed
workshallbemorerestrictedthanthosewithinthetestrecords.
ii) Test records shall represent concrete produced to meet a specified strength
N/mm2ofthatspecifiedfortheproposedwork.
within 7
iii) Therecordshallconsistofatleast30consecutivetestsortwogroupsofconsecutivetests
totalingatleast30testsasdefinedinSec5.12.2.4exceptasprovidedin(b)below.
(b) Where a concrete production facility does not have test records meeting the requirements of (a)
above but does have a record based on 15 to 29 consecutive tests, a standard deviation shall be
establishedastheproductofthecalculatedstandarddeviationandthemodificationfactorspecified
in Table 6.5.4. However, the test records shall meet the requirements (i) and (ii) of (a) above and
represent only a single record of consecutive tests that span a period of not less than 45 calendar
days.
Table6.5.4:ModificationFactorforStandardDeviationwhenLessThan30TestsareAvailable
No.ofTests*
ModificationFactorforStandardDeviation**
Lessthan15
seeSec5.6.2.2(b)
15
1.16
20
1.08
25
1.03
30ormore
1.00
Interpolateforintermediatenumbersoftests
**
from
Modifiedstandarddeviationtobeusedtodeterminetherequiredaveragestrength f cr
5.6.2.2(a).
5.6.2.2
RequiredAverageStrength
(a)
Required average compressive strength used as the basis for selection of concrete
proportions shall be the larger of the values given by Eq (5.6.1) and (5.6.2) using a standard
deviationcalculatedinaccordancewithSec5.6.2.1(a)or5.6.2.1(b)above.
f cr = f c + 1.34 s
5.6.1
f = f + 2.33s 3.5
c
cr

5.6.2
(b) b) Whenaconcreteproductionfacilitydoesnothavefieldstrengthtestrecordsforcalculation
of standard deviation meeting the requirements of Sec 5.6.2.1(a) or 5.6.2.1(b), the required
average strength shall be determined from Table 6.5.5 and documentation of the average
strengthshallbeinaccordancewiththerequirementsofSec5.6.2.3below.
Table 6.5.5 : Required Average Compressive Strength when Data are not Available to Establish a
StandardDeviation
SpecifiedCompressiveStrength f c
N/mm2
RequiredAverageCompressive
Strength,
f cr
N/mm2
6253
Part6
StructuralDesign
f c +7.0
Lessthan20
f c +8.5
f c +10.0
20to35
Over35
5.6.2.3
DocumentationofAverageStrength
Documentationshallbepreparedtodemonstratethattheproposedconcreteproportionswillproduce
anaveragecompressivestrengthequaltoorgreaterthantherequiredaveragecompressivestrength
(Sec 5.6.2.2). Such documentation shall consist of one or more field strength test records or trial
mixtures.
(a)
Whentestrecordsareusedtodemonstratethatproposedconcreteproportionswillproducethe
requiredaveragestrength (Sec5.6.2.2)suchrecordsshallrepresentmaterialsandconditions
similar to those expected. Deviations in materials, conditions and proportions within the test
recordsshallnothavebeenmorerestrictedthanthoseforproposedwork.Forthepurposeof
documentingaveragestrengthpotential,testrecordsconsistingoflessthan30butnotlessthan
10 consecutive tests are acceptable provided the test records encompass a period of time not
less than 45 days. Required concrete proportions shall be permitted to be established by
interpolationbetweenthestrengthsandproportionsoftwoormoretestrecordseachofwhich
meetsotherrequirementsofthissection.
(b)
When an acceptable record of field test results is not available, concrete proportions may be
establishedbasedontrialmixturesmeetingthefollowingrestrictions:
i)
Combinationofmaterialsshallbethosefortheproposedwork.
ii) Trialmixtureshavingproportionsandconsistenciesrequiredfortheproposedworkshallbe
made using at least three different water cement ratios or cement contents that will
producearangeofstrengthsencompassingtherequiredaveragestrength.
iii) Trial mixtures shall be designed to produce a slump within 20 mm of the maximum
permitted,andforairentrainedconcretetheaircontentshallbewithin0.5percentofthe
maximumallowable.
iv) For each water cement ratio or cement content, at least three test cylinders for each test
age shall be made and cured in accordance with "Method of Making and Curing Concrete
TestSpecimensintheLaboratory"(ASTMC192/C192M07).Cylindersshallbetestedat28
daysorattestagedesignatedforthedeterminationof .
v) Fromtheresultsofcylindertests,acurveshallbeplottedshowingtherelationshipbetween
thewatercementratioorcementcontentandthecompressivestrengthatdesignatedtest
age.
vi) Maximum water cement ratio or minimum cement content for concrete to be used in the
proposed work shall be that shown by the above curve to produce the average strength
requiredby Sec5.6.2.2unlessalowerwatercementratioorhigherstrengthisrequiredby
Sec5.5.
5.6.3 ProportioningbyWaterCementRatio
5.6.3.1
If the data required in Sec 5.6.2 are not available, concrete proportions shall be based on water
cementratiolimitsspecifiedinTable6.5.6whenapprovedbytheengineer.
Table 6.5.6 : Maximum Permissible Water Cement Ratios for Concrete when Strength Data from Field
ExperienceorTrailMixersarenotAvailable
6254
SpecifiedCompressive
Strength*, f c
AbsoluteWaterCementRatiobyWeight
Vol.2
N/mm2
Concreteotherthan
airentrained
Airentrained
17
0.66
0.54
20
0.60
0.49
25
0.50
0.39
30
0.40
**
35
**
**
concrete
28daystrength.Withmostmaterials,watercementratiosshownwillprovideaverage
strengthsgreaterthanthatrequiredinSec5.6.2.2.
** Forstrengthsabove30N/mm2(25N/mm2forairentrainedconcrete)concrete
proportionsshallbeestablishedbymethodsofSec5.6.2.
5.6.3.2
Table6.5.6shallbeusedonlyforconcretetobemadewithcementsmeetingstrengthrequirementsfor
Types I,IA,II,IIA,III,IIIA,orV of "Specification for Portland Cement" (ASTM C150/C150M 09),or
Types IS, ISA, IS (MS), ISA(MS), I(SM), I(SM)A, IP, IPA, I(PM), I(PM)A, IP(MS), IPA(MS), or P of
"SpecificationforBlendedHydraulicCements"(ASTMC595/C595M10),andshallnotbeappliedto
concretecontaininglightweightaggregatesoradmixturesotherthanthoseforentrainingair.
5.6.3.3
Concrete proportioned by water cement ratio limits prescribed in Table 6.5.6 shall also conform to
specialexposurerequirementsofSec5.5andtocompressivestrengthtestcriteriaofSec5.12.
5.6.4 AverageStrengthReduction
Asdatabecomeavailableduringconstruction,amountbywhichvalueof mustexceedspecifiedvalueof
maybereduced,provided:
(a) 30 or more test results are available and the average of test results exceeds that required by Sec
5.6.2.2(a)usingastandarddeviationcalculatedinaccordancewithSec5.6.2.1(a),or
(b) 15 to 29 test results are available and the average of test results exceeds that required by Sec
5.6.2.2(a) using a standard deviation calculated in accordance with Sec 5.6.2.1(b), and provided
furtherthatspecialexposurerequirementsofSec5.5aremet.
5.7
PreparationofEquipmentandPlaceofDeposit
Preparationbeforeconcreteplacementshallincludethefollowing:
(a) Allequipmentformixingandtransportingconcreteshallbeclean.
(b) Alldebrisshallberemovedfromspacestobeoccupiedbyconcrete.
(c) Formsshallbeproperlycleanedandcoated.
(d) Masonryfillerunitsthatwillbeincontactwithconcreteshallbesoakedthoroughly.
(e) Reinforcementshallbethoroughlycleanofdeleteriouscoatings.
(f) Watershallberemovedfromplaceofdepositbeforeconcreteisplacedunlessatremieisusedor
unlessotherwisepermittedbytheengineer.
(g) Alllaitanceandotherunsoundmaterialshallberemovedbeforeadditionalconcreteisplacedagainst
hardenedconcrete.
5.8
5.8.1
MIXING
Allconcreteshallbemixedthoroughlyuntilthereisauniformdistributionofmaterialsandshallbedischarged
completelybeforethemixerisrecharged.
6255
Part6
StructuralDesign
5.8.2
Ready mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the requirements of "Specification for
ReadyMixedConcrete"(ASTMC94)or"SpecificationforConcreteMadebyVolumetricBatchingandContinuous
Mixing"(ASTMC685).
5.8.3
Jobmixedconcreteshallbemixedinaccordancewiththefollowing:
(a) Mixingshallbedoneinabatchmixerofapprovedtype.
(b) Mixershallberotatedataspeedrecommendedbythemanufacturer.
(c) Mixingshallbecontinuedforatleast90secondsafterallmaterialsareinthedrum,unlessashorter
time is shown to be satisfactory by the mixing uniformity tests of "Specification for Ready Mixed
Concrete"(ASTMC94).
(d) Materialshandling,batching,andmixingshallconformtotheapplicableprovisionsof"Specification
forReadyMixedConcrete"(ASTMC94).
(e) Adetailedrecordshallbekepttoidentify:
i)
numberofbatchesproduced;
ii) proportionsofmaterialsused;
iii) approximatelocationoffinaldepositinstructure;
iv) timeanddateofmixingandplacing.
5.9
CONVEYING
5.9.1
Concreteshallbeconveyedfromthemixertotheplaceoffinaldepositbymethodsthatwillpreventsegregation
orlossofmaterials.
5.9.2
Conveying equipment shall be capable of providing a supply of concrete to the place of deposit without
segregation of ingredients and without interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between successive
increments.
5.10
DEPOSITING
5.10.1
Concrete shall be deposited as near its final position as practical to avoid segregation due to rehandling or
flowing.
5.10.2
Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces
betweenandaroundthereinforcement.
5.10.3
Concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials shall not be deposited in the
structure.
5.10.4
Retemperedconcreteorconcretethathasbeenremixedafterinitialsetshallnotbeused.
6256
Vol.2
5.10.5
Afterconcretingisstarted,itshallbecarriedonasacontinuousoperationuntilplacingofapanelorsection,as
definedbyitsboundariesorpredeterminedjoints,iscompletedexceptaspermittedorprohibitedbySec5.16.4.
5.10.6
Topsurfacesofverticallyformedliftsshallbegenerallylevel.
5.10.7
Whenconstructionjointsarerequired,jointsshallbemadeinaccordancewithSec5.16.4.
5.10.8
Allconcreteshallbethoroughlyconsolidatedbysuitablemeansduringplacementandshallbethoroughlyworked
aroundreinforcementandembeddedfixturesandintocornersofforms.
5.11
CURING
5.11.1
Concrete(otherthanhighearlystrength)shallbemaintainedabove10oCandinamoistconditionforatleastthe
first7daysafterplacement,exceptwhencuredinaccordancewithSec5.11.3.
5.11.2
Highearlystrengthconcreteshallbemaintainedabove10oCandinamoistconditionforatleastthefirst3days,
exceptwhencuredinaccordancewithSec5.11.3.
5.11.3 AcceleratedCuring
5.11.3.1 Curing by high pressure steam, steam at atmospheric pressure, heat and moisture or other accepted
processes,shallbepermittedtoacceleratestrengthgainandreducetimeofcuring.
5.11.3.2 Acceleratedcuringshallprovideacompressivestrengthoftheconcreteattheloadstageconsidered,at
leastequaltotherequireddesignstrengthatthatloadstage.
5.11.3.3 Curing process shall be such as to produce concrete with a durability at least equivalent to that
obtainedforconcretecuredbythemethodofSec5.11.1or5.11.2.
5.11.4
Whenrequiredbytheengineer,supplementarystrengthtestsinaccordancewithSec5.12.4shallbeperformed
toassurethatcuringissatisfactory.
5.12
EVALUATIONANDACCEPTANCEOFCONCRETE
5.12.1 General
5.12.1.1 ConcreteshallbeproportionedtoprovideanaveragecompressivestrengthasprescribedinSec5.6.2.2
aswellastosatisfythedurabilitycriteriaofSec5.5.Concreteshallbeproducedtolimitfrequencyof
strengthsbelow tothatprescribedinSec5.12.3.3.
5.12.1.2 RequirementsofshallbebasedontestsofcylindersmadeandtestedasprescribedinSec5.12.3.
5.12.1.3 Unless otherwise specified, shall be based on 28 day tests. Test age for
designdrawingsorspecifications,ifitisdifferentfrom28days.
shall be indicated in
6257
Part6
StructuralDesign
5.12.1.4 Splittingtensilestrengthtestsshallnotbeusedasabasisforfieldacceptanceofconcrete.
5.12.2 FrequencyofTesting
5.12.2.1 Samplesforstrengthtestsofeachclassofconcreteplacedeachdayshallbetakennotlessthanoncea
day,norlessthanonceforeach60m3ofconcrete,norlessthanonceforeach250m2surfaceareafor
slabsorwalls.
5.12.2.2 On a given project, if the total volume of concrete is such that frequency of testing required by Sec
5.12.2.1abovewouldprovidelessthanthreestrengthtestsforagivenclassofconcrete,testsshallbe
madefromatleastthreerandomlyselectedbatchesorfromeachbatchifthreeorfewerbatchesare
used.
5.12.2.3 Whenthetotalquantityofagivenclassofconcreteislessthan20m3,strengthtestsarenotrequired
whenevidenceofsatisfactorystrengthissubmittedtoandapprovedbytheengineer.
5.12.2.4 Astrengthtestresultshallbetheaverageofthestrengthsoftwocylindersmadefromthesamesample
ofconcreteandtestedat28daysoratthetestagedesignatedinaccordancewithSec5.12.1.3.
5.12.3 LaboratoryCuredSpecimens
5.12.3.1 Samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with "Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed
Concrete"(ASTMC17208).
5.12.3.2 Cylinders for strength tests shall be moulded and laboratory cured in accordance with "Practice for
Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM C31 / C31M 09) and tested in
accordancewith"TestMethodforCompressiveStrengthofCylindricalConcreteSpecimens"(ASTMC39
/C39M09a).
5.12.3.3 Strengthlevelofanindividualclassofconcreteshallbeconsideredsatisfactoryifbothofthefollowing
requirementsaremet:
(a)
Averageofthreeconsecutivestrengthtests(seeSec5.12.2.4)equalsorexceeds
(b)
Noindividualstrengthtest(averageoftwocylinders)fallsbelowbymorethan3.5N/mm2.
5.12.3.4 IfeitheroftherequirementsofSec5.12.3.3arenotmet,stepsshallbetakentoincreasetheaverageof
thesubsequentstrengthtestresults.RequirementsofSec5.12.5shallbesatisfiediftherequirementof
Sec5.12.3.3(b)isnotmet.
5.12.4 FieldCuredSpecimens
5.12.4.1 Theengineermayrequirestrengthtestsofcylinderscuredunderfieldconditionstocheckadequacyof
curingandprotectionofconcreteinthestructure.
5.12.4.2 Fieldcuredcylindersshallbecuredunderfieldconditionsinaccordancewith"PracticeforMakingand
CuringConcreteTestSpecimensintheField"(ASTMC31/C31M09).
5.12.4.3 Fieldcuredtestcylindersshallbemouldedatthesametimeandfromthesamesamplesaslaboratory
curedtestcylinders.
5.12.4.4 Procedures for protecting and curing concrete shall be improved when the strength of field cured
cylinders at the test age designated for determination of is less than 85 per cent of that of
companionlaboratorycuredcylinders.The85percentlimitationshallnotapplyiffieldcuredstrength
exceeds bymorethan3.5N/mm2.
6258
Vol.2
5.12.5 InvestigationofLowStrengthTestResults
5.12.5.1 Iftheresultofanystrengthtest(Sec5.12.2.4)oflaboratorycuredcylindersfallsbelowthespecified
value of by more than 3.5 N/mm2 (Sec 5.12.3.3(b)) or if tests of field cured cylinders indicate
deficienciesinprotectionandcuring(Sec5.12.4.4),stepsshallbetakentoassurethattheloadcarrying
capacityofthestructureisnotjeopardized.
5.12.5.2 If the likelihood of low strength concrete is confirmed and computations indicate that load carrying
capacitymayhavebeensignificantlyreduced,testsofcoresdrilledfromtheareainquestionmaybe
required in accordance with "Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete" (ASTM C42 / C42M 04). In such cases, three cores shall be taken for each strength test
morethan3.5N/mm2belowthespecifiedvalueof .
5.12.5.3 Ifconcreteinthestructureisexpectedtobedryunderserviceconditions,coresshallbeairdriedfor7
days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the structure is expected to be more than
superficiallywetunderserviceconditions,coresshallbeimmersedinwaterforatleast40hoursandbe
testedwet.
5.12.5.4 Concreteinanarearepresentedbycoretestsshallbeconsideredstructurallyadequateiftheaverage
ofthreecoresisequaltoatleast85percentof andifnosinglecoreislessthan75percentof .
Additionaltestingofcoresextractedfromlocationsrepresentedbyerraticcorestrengthresultsshallbe
permitted.
5.12.5.5 If the criteria of Sec 5.12.5.4 above are not met, and if structural adequacy remains in doubt, the
responsibleauthoritymayorderloadtestsforthequestionableportionofthestructure,ortakeother
appropriateaction.
5.13
PROPERTIESOFCONCRETE
5.13.1 Strength
Strengthofconcreteshallbebasedon determinedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec5.12.1.
5.13.2 ModulusofElasticity
5.13.2.1 Modulus of elasticity Ec for stone aggregate concrete may be taken as 44 wc1.5
f c
(N/mm2) for
valuesofwcbetween15and25kN/m3and f c inN/mm2.Fornormaldensityconcrete,Ecmaybe
takenas4700 f c .
5.13.2.2 ModulusofelasticityEcforbrickaggregateconcretemaybetakenas3750
5.13.3 Creep
Thefinal(30year)creepstraininconcrete cc shallbepredictedfrom
cc =
stress
cc
Et
where
Etisthemodulusofelasticityoftheconcreteattheageofloadingt,
(5.13.1)
ccisthecreepcoefficient.
6259
Part6
StructuralDesign
ThecreepcoefficientmaybeestimatedfromFig6.5.1.Inthisfigure,foruniformsections,theeffectivesection
thicknessisdefinedastwicethecrosssectionalareadividedbytheexposedperimeter.Ifdryingispreventedby
immersioninwaterorbysealing,theeffectivesectionthicknessshallbetakenas600mm.
Itcanbeassumedthatabout40%,60%and80%ofthefinalcreepdevelopsduringthefirstmonth,6monthsand
30monthsunderloadrespectively,whenconcreteisexposedtoconditionsofconstantrelativehumidity.
5.13.4 Shrinkage
An estimate of the drying shrinkage of plain concrete may be obtained from Fig 6.5.2. Recommendations for
effectivesectionthicknessandrelativehumidityaregiveninSec5.13.3.
Fig6.5.2relatestoconcreteofnormalworkabilitymadewithoutwaterreducingadmixtures;suchconcretesshall
haveanoriginalwatercontentofabout190l/m3.Whereconcreteisknowntohaveadifferentwatercontent,
shrinkageshallberegardedasproportionaltowatercontentwithintherange150l/m3to230l/m3.
The shrinkage of plain concrete is primarily dependent on the relative humidity of the air surrounding the
concrete, the surface area from which moisture can be lost relative to the volume of concrete and on the mix
proportion.Itisincreasedslightlybycarbonationandselfdesiccationandreducedbyprolongedcuring.
Fig.6.5.2DryingShrinkageofNormalWeightConcrete
Anestimateoftheshrinkageofsymmetricallyreinforcedconcretesectionsmaybeobtainedfrom:
sh
1 + K
Where
6260
sh

5.13.2
istheshrinkageoftheplainconcrete;
istheareaofsteelrelativetothatoftheconcrete;
Vol.2
isacoefficient,takenas25forinternalexposureandas15forexternalexposure.
5.13.5 ThermalStrains
Thermal strains shall be calculated from the product of a suitable coefficient of thermal expansion and a
temperature change. The temperature change can be determined from the expected service conditions and
climaticdata.Externallyexposedconcretedoesnotrespondimmediatelytoairtemperaturechange,andclimatic
temperaturerangesmayrequireadjustmentbeforeuseinmovementcalculations.
The coefficient of thermal expansion of concrete is dependent mainly on the expansion coefficients for the
aggregate and the cement paste, and the degree of saturation of the concrete. The thermal expansion of
aggregateisrelatedtomineralogicalcomposition(SeeTable6.5.7)
Table6.5.7:ThermalExpansionofRockGroupandRelatedConcrete
AggregateType
TypicalCoefficientofExpansion(1 106/oC)
Aggregate
Concrete
Flint,quartzite
11
12
Granite,basalt
10
Limestone
Cementpastehasacoefficientofthermalexpansionthatisafunctionofmoisturecontent,andthisaffectsthe
concreteexpansionasshowninFig6.5.3.Itmaybeseenthatpartiallydryconcretehasacoefficientofthermal
expansionthatisapproximately2106/oCgreaterthanthecoefficientforsaturatedconcrete.
Fig. 6.5.3 Effect of Dryness upon the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Hardened
CementandConcrete
6261
Part6
StructuralDesign
5.14
CONCRETINGINADVERSEWEATHER
5.14.1
Concretingshallbeavoidedduringperiodsofnearfreezingweather.
5.14.2
During hot weather, proper attention shall be given to ingredients, production methods, handling, placing,
protection, and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation that could impair
requiredstrengthorserviceabilityofthememberorstructure.
5.14.3
Duringrainyweather,properprotectionshallbegiventoingredients,productionmethods,handlingandplacing
of concrete.If required inthe opinion of the engineer, the concreting operation shall be postponed and newly
placedconcreteshallbeprotectedfromrainafterformingproperconstructionjointforfuturecontinuation.
5.15
SURFACEFINISH
5.15.1 TypeofFinish
Awidevarietyoffinishescanbeproduced.Surfacecastagainstformsmaybeleftascast,e.g.plainorprofiled,
theinitialsurfacemayberemoved,e.g.bytoolingorsandblasting,ortheconcretemaybecovered,e.g.bypaint
ortiles;combinationsofthesetechniquesmayalsobeadopted,e.g.aribbedprofilewithbushhammeredribs.
Uppersurfacesnotcastagainstformsmaybetrowelledsmoothorprofiled,e.g.bytamping;theinitialsurface
mayberemoved,e.g.byspraying,oritmaybecovered,e.g.byascreedorplasticfloorfinish.Whenselecting
thetypeoffinish,considerationshallbegiventotheeaseofproducingafinishoftherequiredstandard,the
viewingdistanceandthechangeofappearancewithtime.Inthecaseofexternalsurfaces,accountshallbetaken
of the weather pattern at the particular location, any impurities in the air and the effect of the shape of the
structureupontheflowofwateracrossitssurface.Suchconsiderationswilloftenprecludethespecification of
surfacesofuniformcolourastheseareverydifficulttoproduceanddeterioratewithtime,particularlyifexposed
totheweather.
5.15.2 QualityofFinish
Ahighqualityfinishisonethatisvisuallypleasing;itmayincludecolourvariationsandphysicaldiscontinuitiesbut
these are likely to be distributed systematically or randomly over the whole surface rather than being
concentratedinparticularareas.Whendecidingonthequalityoffinishtobespecified,considerationshouldbe
giventotheviewingdistanceandtheexposureconditions.
Thereisnomethodwherebythequalityoffinishthatwillbeacceptedcanunequivocallybedefined.Toachieve
the quality required calls for good communication between experienced personnel conversant with the
productionoffinishesandclosecollaborationwiththesite.Thequalityoffinishcanbeidentifiedinthefollowing
verybroadterms:
(a) Class2appliestosurfacesthataretobeexposedtoviewbutwhereappearanceisnotcritical;such
surfacesmightbethewallsoffireescapestairsorplantroomsandcolumnsandbeamsofstructures
thatarenormallyviewedintheshade,e.g.carparksandwarehouses;
(b) Class 1 is appropriate to most surfaces exposed to view including the external walls of industrial,
commercialanddomesticbuildings;
(c) Special class is appropriate to the highest standards of appearance, such as might be found in
prestigiousbuildings,whereitispossibletojustifythehighcostoftheirproduction.
(d) These broad descriptions may be amplified by written descriptions of the method of finish, by
photographs,bysamplesorbyreferencetoexistingstructures.
5.15.3 TypeofSurfaceFinish
Smooth offtheform and board marked finishes are not recommended for external use, but where they are
specifiedforinteriorusethefollowingtypesmaybequotedfortheguidanceofbothdesignersandcontractor.
6262
Vol.2
Designersshouldappreciatethatitisvirtuallyimpossibletoachievedense,flat,smooth,evencolouredblemish
freeconcretesurfacesdirectlyfromtheformwork.Somedegreeofmakinggoodisinevitable,evenwithprecast
work.
(a) TypeAfinish:Thisfinishisobtainedbytheuseofproperlydesignedformworkormoulds
oftimber,plywood,plastics,concreteorsteel.Smallblemishescausedbyentrappedairor
watermaybeexpected,butthesurfaceshouldbefreefromvoids,honeycombingorother
blemishes.
(b) Type B finish : This finish can only be obtained by the use of high quality concrete and
formwork.Theconcreteshallbethoroughlycompactedandallsurfacesshallbetrue,with
clean arises. Only very minor surface blemishes shall occur, with no staining or
discolorationfromthereleaseagent.
(c) TypeCfinish:ThisfinishisobtainedbyfirstproducingatypeBfinish.Thesurfaceisthen
improvedbycarefullyremovingallfinsandotherprojections,thoroughlywashingdown,
andthenfillingthemostnoticeablesurfaceblemisheswithacementandfineaggregate
pastetomatchthecolouroftheoriginalconcrete.Thereleaseagentshouldbecarefully
chosentoensurethattheconcretesurfacewillnotbestainedordiscoloured.Afterthe
concrete has been properly cured, the face shall be rubbed down, where necessary, to
produceasmoothandevensurface.
5.15.4 Production
Thequalityofasurfacedependsontheconstituentsandproportionsoftheconcretemix,theefficiencyofmixing,
thehandlingandcompactionoftheconcreteanditscuring.Thecharacteristicsoftheformworkandtherelease
agentmayalsobeofcriticalimportance.Requirementsmaybestatedforanyaspectofproductionthatmight
contributetowardstheachievementoftherequiredtypeofqualityoffinish.
5.15.5 InspectionandMakingGood
Thesurfaceoftheconcreteshallbeinspectedfordefectsandforconformitywiththespecificationand,where
appropriate, for comparison with approved sample finishes. Subject to the strength and durability of the
concrete being unimpaired, the making good of surface defects may be permitted but the standard of
acceptance shall be appropriate to the type and quality of the finish specified and ensure satisfactory
performance and durability. On permanently exposed surfaces great care is essential in selecting the materials
andthemixproportionstoensurethatthefinalcolourofthefacedareablendswiththeparentconcreteinthe
finishedstructure.
Voidscanbefilledwithfinemortar,preferablyincorporatingstyrenebutadienerubber(SBR)orpolyvinylacetate
(PVA), while the concrete is still green or when it has hardened. Fine cracks can be filled by wiping a cement
grout, an SBR, PVA or latex emulsion, a cement/SBR or a cement/PVA slurry across them. Fins and other
projectionsshallberubbeddown.
5.15.6 Protection
Highqualitysurfacefinishesaresusceptibletodamageduringsubsequentconstructionoperationsandtemporary
protection may have to be provided in vulnerable areas. Examples of such protective measures include the
strapping of laths to arrises and the prevention of rust being carried from exposed starter bars to finished
surfaces.
5.16
FORMWORK
5.16.1 DesignofFormwork
5.16.1.1 Formsshallresultinafinalstructurethatconformstoshapes,lines,anddimensionsofthemembersas
requiredbythedesigndrawingsandspecifications.
5.16.1.2 Formsshallbesubstantialandsufficientlytighttopreventleakageofmortar.
5.16.1.3 Formsshallbeproperlybracedortiedtogethertomaintainpositionandshape.
6263
Part6
StructuralDesign
5.16.1.4 Formsandtheirsupportsshallbedesignedsoasnottodamagepreviouslyplacedstructure.
5.16.1.5 Designofformworkshallincludeconsiderationofthefollowingfactors:
(a)
Rateandmethodofplacingconcrete;
(b)
Constructionloads,includingvertical,horizontalandimpactloads;
(c)
Special form requirements for construction of shells, folded plates, domes, architectural
concrete,orsimilartypesofelements.
5.16.1.6 Formsforprestressedconcretemembersshallbedesignedandconstructedtopermitmovementofthe
memberwithoutdamageduringapplicationofprestressingforce.
5.16.2 RemovalofFormsandShores
5.16.2.1 Noconstructionloadsshallbesupportedon,noranyshoringremovedfrom,anypartofthestructure
underconstructionexcept whenthatportionof thestructureincombinationwithremainingforming
andshoringsystemhassufficientstrengthtosupportsafelyitsweightandloadsplacedthereon.
5.16.2.2 Sufficientstrengthshallbedemonstratedbystructuralanalysisconsideringproposedloads,strengthof
formingandshoringsystem,andconcretestrengthdata.Structuralanalysisandconcretestrengthtest
datashallbefurnishedtotheengineerwhensorequired.
5.16.2.3 Noconstructionloadsexceedingthecombinationsofsuperimposeddeadloadplusspecifiedliveload
shall be supported on any unshored portion of the structure under construction, unless analysis
indicatesadequatestrengthtosupportsuchadditionalloads.
5.16.2.4 Formsshallberemovedinsuchamannerasnottoimpairsafetyandserviceabilityofthestructure.All
concretetobeexposedbyformremovalshallhavesufficientstrengthnottobedamagedthereby.
5.16.2.5 Formssupportingprestressedconcretemembersshallnotberemoveduntilsufficientprestressinghas
been applied to enable prestressed members to carry their dead load and anticipated construction
loads.
5.16.3 ConduitsandPipesEmbeddedinConcrete
5.16.3.1 Conduits, pipes and sleeves of any materials not harmful to concrete and within the limitations
specified herein shall be permitted to be embedded in concrete with the approval of the engineer,
providedtheyarenotconsideredtoreplacestructurallythedisplacedconcrete.
5.16.3.2 Conduitsandpipesofaluminiumshallnotbeembeddedinstructuralconcreteunlesseffectivelycoated
orcoveredtopreventaluminiumconcretereactionorelectrolyticactionbetweenaluminiumandsteel.
5.16.3.3 Conduits, pipes, and sleeves passing through a slab, wall, or beam shall not impair significantly the
strengthoftheconstruction.
5.16.3.4 Conduits and pipes, with their fittings, embedded within a column shall not displace more than 4
percent of the area of crosssection on which strength is calculated or which is required for fire
protection.
5.16.3.5 Except when drawings for conduits and pipes are approved by the engineer, conduits and pipes
embedded within a slab, wall or beam (other than those merely passing through) shall satisfy the
following:
(a)
6264
Theyshallnotbelargerinoutsidedimensionthan 3 theoverallthicknessofslab,wall,orbeam
inwhichtheyareembedded.
Vol.2
(b)
Theyshallnotbespacedcloserthan3diametersorwidthsoncentre.
(c)
Theyshallnotimpairsignificantlythestrengthoftheconstruction.
5.16.3.6 Conduits,pipesandsleevesshallbepermittedtobeconsideredasreplacingstructurallyincompression
thedisplacedconcreteprovided:
(a) Theyarenotexposedtorustingorotherdeterioration.
(b) Theyhavenominalinsidediameternotover50mmandarespacednotlessthan3diameterson
centres.
5.16.3.7 Pipesandfittingsshallbedesignedtoresisteffectsofthematerial,pressure,andtemperaturetowhich
theywillbesubjected.
5.16.3.8 Noliquid,gas,orvapour,exceptwaternotexceeding30oCnor0.3N/mm2pressure,shallbeplacedin
thepipesuntiltheconcretehasattaineditsdesignstrength.
5.16.3.9 In solid slabs, piping, unless it is for radiant heating, shall be placed between the top and bottom
reinforcements.
5.16.3.10 Concretecoverforpipes,conduits,andfittingsshallbenotlessthan40mmforconcreteexposedto
earthorweather,nor20mmforconcretenotexposedtoweatherorincontactwithground.
5.16.3.11 Reinforcementwithanareanotlessthan0.002timestheareaofconcretesectionshallbeprovided
normaltopiping.
5.16.3.12 Piping and conduit shall be so fabricated and installed that cutting, bending, or displacement of
reinforcementwillnotberequired.
5.16.4 ConstructionJoints
5.16.4.1 Surfaceofconcreteconstructionjointsshallbecleanedandlaitanceremoved.
5.16.4.2 Immediatelybeforenewconcreteisplaced,allconstructionjointsshallbewettedandstandingwater
removed.
5.16.4.3 Construction joints shall be so made and located as not to impair the strength of the structure.
Provision shall be made for transfer of shear and other forces through construction joints. SeeSec
6.13.3.15(j).
5.16.4.4 Construction joints in floors shall be located within the middle third of spans of slabs, beams and
girders. Joints in girders shall be offset a minimum distance of two times the width of intersecting
beams.
5.16.4.5 Beams,girders,orslabssupportedbycolumnsorwallsshallnotbecastorerecteduntilconcreteinthe
columnsorwallsisnolongerplastic.
5.16.4.6 Beams, girders, haunches, drop panels and capitals shall be placed monolithically as part of a slab
systemunlessotherwiseshowninthedesigndrawingsorspecifications.
6265
Part6
StructuralDesign
5.17
SHOTCRETE
5.17.1 General
Shotcreteshallbedefinedasmortarorconcretepneumaticallyprojectedathighvelocityontoasurface.Except
asspecifiedinthissection,shotcreteshallconformtotheprovisionsofthisCoderegardingplainconcreteor
reinforcedconcrete.
5.17.2 ProportionsandMaterials
Shotcreteproportionsshallbesuchthatsuitableplacementisensuredusingthedeliveryequipmentselected,and
shallresultinfinishedinplacehardenedshotcretemeetingthestrengthrequirementsofChapter6.
5.17.3 Aggregate
Coarseaggregate,ifused,shallnotexceed20mminsize.
5.17.4 Reinforcement
The maximum size of reinforcement shall be 16 mm bars unless it can be demonstrated by preconstruction
teststhatadequateembedmentoflargerbarscanbeachieved.When16mmorsmallerbarsareused,there
shallbeaminimumclearanceof60mmbetweenparallelreinforcingbars.Whenbarslargerthan16mmare
permitted, there shall be a minimum clearance between parallel bars equal to six diameters of the bars used.
When two curtains of steel are provided, the curtain nearest the nozzle shall have a spacing equal to 12 bar
diametersandtheremainingcurtainshallhaveaminimumspacingof6bardiameters.
Lap splices in reinforcing bars shall be by the noncontact lap splice method with at least 50 mm clearance
between bars. The engineer may permit the use of contact lap splices when necessary for the support of the
reinforcement,provideditcanbedemonstratedbymeansofpreconstructiontestingthatadequateembedment
of the bars at the splice can be achieved and provided further that the splices are placed so that the plane
containing the centres of the two spliced bars isperpendicular to the surface of the shotcrete work. Shotcrete
shallnotbeappliedtospirallytiedcolumns.
5.17.5 PreconstructionTests
When required by the engineer a test panel shall beshot, cured, cored or sawn, examined and tested prior to
commencement of the project. The sample panel shall be representative of the project and simulate job
conditionsascloselyaspossible.Thepanelthicknessandreinforcingshallreproducethethickestandthemost
congestedareaspecifiedinthestructuraldesign.Itshallbeshotatthesameangle,fromasimilardistance,using
thesamenozzlemanandwiththesameconcretemixdesignthatwillbeusedontheproject.
5.17.6 Rebound
Anyreboundoraccumulatedlooseaggregateshallberemovedfromthesurfacestobecoveredpriortoplacing
theinitialoranysucceedinglayersofshotcrete.Reboundshallnotbereusedasaggregate.
5.17.7 Joints
Exceptwherepermitted,unfinishedworkshallnotbeallowedtostandformorethan30minutesunlessalledges
areslopedthin.Beforeplacingadditionalmaterialadjacenttopreviouslyappliedwork,slopingandsquareedges
shallbecleanedandwetted.
5.17.8 Damage
Aninplaceshotcretewhichexhibitssagsorsloughs,segregation,honeycombing,sandpocketsorotherobvious
defectsshallberemovedandreplaced.
5.17.9 Curing
During the curing periods, shotcrete shall be maintained above 5oC and in moist condition. In initial curing,
shotcreteshallbekeptcontinuouslymoistfor24hoursafterplacementiscomplete.Finalcuringshallcontinue
for seven days after shotcreting, for three days if high early strength cement is used, or until the specified
strength is obtained. Final curing shall consist of a fog spray or an approved moisture retaining cover or
membrane.Insectionsofadepthinexcessof300mm,finalcuringshallbethesameasthatforinitialcuring.
6266
Vol.2
5.17.10
StrengthTest
Strengthtestforshotcreteshallbemadebyanapprovedagencyonspecimenswhicharerepresentativeofthe
workandwhichhavebeenwatersoakedforatleast24hourspriortotesting.Whenthemaximumsizeaggregate
islargerthan10mm,specimensshallconsistofnotlessthanthree75mmdiametercoresor75mmcubes.
Whenthemaximumsizeaggregateis10mmorsmaller,specimensshallconsistofnotlessthanthree50mm
diametercoresor50mmcubes.Specimensshallbetakeninaccordancewithoneofthefollowing:
(a) From the work: taken at least one from each shift but not less than one for each 20 m3 of
shotcrete;
(b) From test panels: taken not less than once each shift nor less than one for each 20 m3 of
shotcreteplaced.Whenthemaximumsizeaggregateislargerthan10mm,thetestpanelsshall
haveaminimumdimensionof450mmby450mm.Whenthemaximumsizeaggregateis10mm
orsmaller,thetestpanelsshallhaveaminimumdimensionof300mmby300mm.Panelsshall
be gunned in the same position as the work, during the course of the work and by the same
nozzlemendoingthework.Theconditionunderwhichthepanelsarecuredshallbethesameas
thework.
Theaveragestrengthofthreecoresfromasinglepanelshallbeequaltoorexceed0.85 withnosinglecore
lessthan0.75 .Theaveragestrengthofthreecubestakenfromasinglepanelmustequalorexceed with
noindividualcubelessthan .Tochecktestingaccuracy,locationsrepresentedbyerraticcorestrengthsmaybe
retested.
5.17.11
Inspections
5.17.11.1 InspectionDuringPlacement
Whenshotcreteisusedforcolumnsandbeams,aspecialinspectorisrequired.Thespecialinspector
shall providecontinuous inspection to the placement of the reinforcement and shotcreting and shall
submitastatementindicatingcompliancewiththeplansandspecifications.
5.17.11.2 VisualExaminationforStructuralSoundnessofInplaceShotcrete
Completedshotcreteworkshallbecheckedvisuallyforreinforcingbarembedment,voids,rockpocket,
sandstreaksandsimilardeficienciesbyexaminingaminimumofthree75mmcorestakenfromthree
areaschosenbytheengineerwhichrepresenttheworstcongestionofreinforcingbarsoccurringinthe
project. Extra reinforcing bars may be added to noncongested areas and cores may be taken from
these areas. The cores shall be examined by the special inspector and a report submitted to the
engineerpriortofinalapprovaloftheshotcrete.
5.17.12
Equipment
Theequipmentusedinconstructiontestingshallbethesameequipmentusedintheworkrequiringsuchtesting
unlesssubstituteequipmentisapprovedbytheengineer.
6267
Chapter6
StrengthDesignofReinforcedConcrete
Structures
6.1
AnalysisandDesignGeneralConsiderations
6.1.1
ConventionandNotation
Unlessotherwiseexplicitlystated,thefollowingunitsshallbeimplicitforthecorrespondingquantitiesin
thedesignandotherexpressionsprovidedinthischapter:
Lengths
mm
Areas
m m 2
Secondmomentsofarea
m m 4
Force(axial,shear)
Moment,torsion
Nmm
Stress,strength
MPa,N/mm 2
6.1.1.1 Notation
= Depthofequivalentrectangular stress blockasdefinedin6.3.2.7.1,mm,
= Shearspan,equaltodistance from center ofconcentratedloadtoeither:(a)faceofsupport
for continuous or cantilevered members, or (b) center of support for simply supported
members,mm,Sec6.4,AppendixA
= Areaofanindividualbarorwire,mm2,Sec6.3,Sec8.2
= Net bearing area of the head of stud, anchorbolt, or headed deformed bar, mm2, Sec8.2,
AppendixD
= Crosssectionalarea of concrete section resisting sheartransfer,mm2,Sec6.4,Sec8.3
= Crosssectional area of a structural member measured to the outside edges of transverse
reinforcement,mm2,Sec6.3,Sec8.3
= Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross section, mm2, see 6.4.4.1, Sec 6.4,
8.3.8.3
= Crosssectionalareaat one end of a strut inastrutandtiemodel,takenperpendiculartothe
axisofthestrut,mm2,AppendixA
= Gross area of concrete section bounded by web thickness and length of section in the
directionofshearforceconsidered,mm2,Sec8.3
= Area of concrete section of an individual pier, horizontal wall segment, or coupling beam
resistingshear,mm2,Sec8.3
= Area of reinforcement in bracket or corbelresistingfactoredmoment,mm2,see6.4.7,Sec
6.4
= Gross area of concrete section, mm2 For ahollowsection, istheareaoftheconcreteonly
anddoesnotincludetheareaofthevoid(s), see 6.4.4.1, Secs6.2to6.4,6.6,6.7,6.10,8.3,
= Total area of shear reinforcement parallel to primary tension reinforcement in a corbel or
bracket,mm2,see6.4.7,Sec6.4
= Effective crosssectional area within a joint in a plane parallel to plane of reinforcement
generating shear in the joint, mm2, seeSec8.3
= Totalareaoflongitudinalreinforcementtoresisttorsion,mm2,Sec6.4,8.3
= Minimumareaoflongitudinalreinforcementtoresisttorsion,mm2,see6.4.4.5.3,Sec6.4
Part6
StructuralDesign
61
Part6
StructuralDesign
= Area of reinforcement in bracket or corbelresisting tensile force

, mm2, see 6.4.7,Sec
6.4
= Areaofa faceofa nodal zone or a sectionthroughanodalzone,mm2,AppendixA
= Projected concrete failure area of a single anchor or group of anchors, for calculation of
strengthintension,mm2,seeD.5.2.1,AppendixD
= Projected concrete failure area of a singleanchor, for calculation of strength in tensionif
not limited by edge distance orspacing,mm2,seeD.5.2.1,AppendixD
= Grossareaenclosedbyshearflowpath,mm2,Sec6.4
= Areaenclosedbycenterlineoftheoutermostclosedtransversetorsionalreinforcement,mm2,
Sec6.4
= Area of nonprestressed longitudinal tensionreinforcement,mm2,Sec6.3,6.4,6.6,6.8,
= Areaoftensionreinforcementcorrespondingtomomentofresistance
,see6.3.15.1(b)
= Areaofadditionaltensionsteel,see6.3.15.1(b)
= Areaofcompressionreinforcement,mm2,AppendixA
= Area of primary tension reinforcement in acorbelorbracket,mm2,see6.4.7.3.5,Sec6.4

= Effective crosssectional area of anchorintension,mm2,AppendixD
,
= Effective crosssectional area of anchorinshear,mm2,AppendixD
,
= Area of reinforcement required to balance the longitudinal compressive force in the

overhangingportionoftheflangeofaTbeam,see6.3.15.2(b)
= Total crosssectional area of transverse reinforcement (including crossties) within spacing s

andperpendicular to dimension ,mm2,Sec8.3
= Total area of surface reinforcement atspacing si in the ith layer crossinga strut,with
reinforcementatanangle totheaxisofthestrut,mm2,AppendixA
= Minimumareaofflexuralreinforcement,mm2,see6.3.5,Sec6.3
,
= Total area of nonprestressed longitudinalreinforcement (bars or steel shapes), mm2,Sec

6.3,8.3
= Areaofstructuralsteelshape,pipe,ortubinginacompositesection,mm2,Sec6.3
= Area of one leg of a closed stirrup resistingtorsionwithinspacings,mm2,Sec6.4

= Areaofprestressingsteelinatie,mm2,AppendixA
= Total crosssectional area of all transversereinforcement within spacingsthatcrossesthe

potential plane of splitting through thereinforcement being developed,mm2,Sec8.2
= Area of nonprestressed reinforcement in atie,mm2,AppendixA
= Areaofshearreinforcementspacings,mm2,Sec6.4,6.12
= Projected concrete failure area of a single anchor or group of anchors, for calculation of
strengthinshear,mm2,seeD.6.2.1,AppendixD
= Projected concrete failure area of a singleanchor, for calculation of strengthinshear,ifnot
limitedbycornerinfluences,spacing,ormemberthickness,mm2, see D.6.2.1,AppendixD
= Total area of reinforcement in each group ofdiagonalbarsinadiagonallyreinforcedcoupling

beam,mm2,Sec8.3
= Areaofshearfrictionreinforcement,mm2,Sec6.4,8.3
= Area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement within spacing ,

mm2,Sec6.4
2
,
= Minimum area of shear reinforcement within spacing s, mm , see 6.4.3.5.1 and 6.4.3.5.3,
Sec6.4
= Loadedarea,mm2,Sec6.3
= Area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
containedwhollywithinthesupportandhavingforitsupperbasetheloadedarea,andhaving
sideslopesof1verticalto2horizontal,mm2,Sec6.3
= Width of compression face of member, mm,Sec6.3
= Perimeterofcriticalsectionforshear in slabsand footings, mm, see 6.4.10.1.2,Sec6.4
= Widthofstrut,mm,AppendixA
= Width of that part of cross section containing the closed stirrupsresisting torsion, mm, Sec
62
Vol.2
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
6.4
= Width of cross section at contact surfacebeinginvestigatedforhorizontalshear,mm,Sec
6.12
= Web width, or diameter of circular section,mm,Sec6.3,6.4,8.2,8.3
= Dimension of the critical section measuredinthedirectionofthespanforwhichmoments

aredetermined,mm,Sec6.5
= Dimensionofthecritical section
measuredin the direction perpendicularto ,mm,Sec6.5
= Distance from extreme compression fiber toneutralaxis,mm,Sec6.2,6.3,6.6,8.3
= Critical edge distance required to develop the basic concrete breakout strength of a post
installed anchor in uncracked concrete without supplementary reinforcement to control
splitting,mm,seeD.8.6,AppendixD
= Maximumdistancefrom center of an anchorshaft to the edge of concrete,mm,Appendix D
,
= Minimumdistancefrom center of an anchorshaft to the edge of concrete,mm,Appendix D
,
= Distance from the center of an anchor shafttotheedgeofconcreteinonedirection,mm.If

shear is applied to anchor, is taken in the direction of the applied shear. If tension is
appliedtotheanchor,
istheminimumedgedistance,appendixd
= Distance from center of an anchor shaft to the edgeofconcrete in thedirectionperpen

dicularto ,mm,AppendixD
= Smaller of: (a) the distance from center of abarorwiretonearestconcretesurface,and(b)

onehalfthecentertocenterspacingofbarsorwiresbeingdeveloped,mm,Sec8.2
= Clearcoverofreinforcement, mm, see6.3.6.4,Sec6.3
= Distancefromtheinterior face of the columnto the slab edge measuredparalleltoc1,butnot

exceeding ,mm,Sec8.3
= Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket

measuredinthe direction ofthespanforwhichmomentsarebeingdetermined,mm,Sec
6.4,6.5,8.3
= Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket

measured in the direction perpendicular to ,mm,Sec6.5
= Crosssectional constant to define torsionalproperties of slabandbeam,see6.5.6.4.2,Sec

6.5
= Factorrelatingactualmoment diagram to anequivalentuniformmomentdiagram,Sec6.3
= Distance from extreme compression fiber tocentroidoflongitudinaltensionreinforce ment,

mm,Sec6.26.4,6.6,6.12,8.18.3,
= Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal compression

reinforcement,mm,Sec6.2
= Outside diameter of anchor or shaft diameterof headed stud, headed bolt, or hooked bolt,
mm,seeD.8.4,AppendixD
= Valuesubstitutedfor whenanoversizedanchorisused,mm,seeD.8.4,AppendixD
= Nominal diameter of bar, wire, or prestressing strand, mm, Sec 8.1-8.3
= Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressing steel, mm, Sec
6.4
= Diameter of pile at footing base, mm, Sec 6.8
= Distance from extreme compression fiber tocentroidofextremelayeroflongitudinaltension

steel,mm,Sec6.2,6.3
= Deadloads,orrelated internal moments andforces,Sec6.1,6.2,6.11,8.3
= Distancefromtheinner surface of the shaft of aJ orLbolttotheoutertipoftheJorLbolt,mm,

AppendixD
= Distance between resultant tension load on a group of anchors loaded in tension and
the
Centroid of the group of anchors loaded in tension, mm; is always positive,
appendix d
= Distance between resultant shear load on a group of anchors loaded in shear in the
same
Direction, and the centroid of the group of anchors loaded in shear in the same
direction, mm; is always positive, appendix d
= Loadeffectsofearthquake,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2,8.3
= Modulusofelasticityofconcrete,mpa,see6.1.7.1,Sec6.16.3,6.6,6.9
63
Part6
StructuralDesign
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
64
Modulusofelasticityofbeamconcrete,mpa,Sec6.5
Modulusofelasticityofslabconcrete,mpa,Sec6.5
Flexuralstiffnessofcompressionmember,N mm2,see6.3.10.6,Sec6.3
Modulusofelasticityofprestressingsteel,mpa,see6.1.7.3,Sec6.1
Modulusofelasticityofreinforcementandstructuralsteel,mpa,see6.1.7.2,Sec6.1,6.3,6.6
Specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete,mpa,Sec6.16.4,6.6,6.9,8.2,8.3,AppendixesA,
D
Squarerootofspecifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete,mpa,Sec6.1,6.2,6.4,6.9,8.2,8.3,
AppendixD
Effective compressive strength of the concrete in a strut or a nodal zone, mpa, Sec 6.8,
AppendixA
Averagesplittingtensilestrengthoflightweightconcrete,mpa,See6.1.8.1Sec6.1,6.4,8.2.3.4
(d),Sec8.2
Stressduetounfactoreddeadload,atextremefiberofsectionwheretensilestressiscaused
byexternallyappliedloads,mpa,Sec6.4
Compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for all prestress losses) at centroid of cross
sectionresistingexternallyappliedloadsoratjunctionofwebandflangewhenthecentroid
lieswithintheflange,mpa.(Inacompositemember, istheresultantcompressivestressat
centroidofcompositesection,oratjunctionofwebandflangewhenthecentroidlieswithin
theflange,duetobothprestressandmomentsresistedbyprecastmemberactingalone),Sec
6.4
Compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress forces only (after allowance for all
prestress losses) at extreme fiber of section where tensile stress is caused by externally
appliedloads,mpa,Sec6.4
Stressinprestressingsteelatnominalflexuralstrength,mpa,Sec8.2
Specifiedtensilestrengthofprestressingsteel,mpa,Sec6.4
Modulusofruptureofconcrete,mpa,see6.2.5.2.3,Sec6.2,6.6
Calculatedtensilestressinreinforcementatserviceloads,mpa,Sec6.3
Stressincompressionreinforcementunderfactoredloads,mpa,AppendixA
Effective stress in prestressing steel (after allowance for all prestress losses), mpa, Sec 8.2,
AppendixA
Specifiedtensilestrengthofanchorsteel,mpa,AppendixD
Specifiedyieldstrengthofreinforcement,mpa,Sec6.26.4,6.6,6.9,6.12,8.18.3,AppendixA
Specifiedyieldstrengthofanchorsteel,mpa,AppendixD
Specifiedyieldstrength oftransversereinforcement,mpa,Sec6.3,6.4,8.28.3
Loads due to weight and pressures of fluids with welldefined densities and controllable
maximumheights,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2
Nominalstrengthofastrut,tie,ornodalzone,N,AppendixA
Nominalstrengthatfaceofanodalzone,N,AppendixA
Nominalstrengthofastrut,N,AppendixA
Nominalstrengthofatie,N,AppendixA
Factored force acting in a strut, tie, bearing area, or nodal zone in a strutandtie model, N,
AppendixA
Overallthicknessorheightofmember,mm,Sec6.26.4,6.6,6.11,6.12,8.2,8.3,AppendixA
Thickness of member in which an anchor is located, measured parallel to anchor axis, mm,
AppendixD
Crosssectional dimension of member core measured to the outside edges of the trans
versereinforcementcomposingarea ,mm,Sec8.3
Effectiveembedmentdepthofanchor,mm,seeD.8.5,AppendixD
ThicknessofoverhangingportionoftheflangeofaTbeam,see6.3.15.2(b)
Depthofshearheadcrosssection,mm,Sec6.4
Heightofentirewallfrombasetotoporheightofthesegmentofwallconsidered,mm,Sec
6.4,8.3
Maximum centertocenter horizontal spacing of crossties or hoop legs on all faces of the
column,mm,Sec8.3
Vol.2
Chapter1
= Loadsduetoweightandpressureofsoil,waterinsoil,orothermaterials,orrelatedinternal
momentsandforces,Sec6.2
= Momentofinertiaofsectionaboutcentroidalaxis,mm4,Sec6.3,6.4
= Momentofinertiaofgrosssectionofbeamaboutcentroidalaxis,mm4,see6.5.6.1.6,Sec6.5
= Momentofinertiaofcrackedsectiontransformedtoconcrete,mm4,Sec6.2
= Effectivemomentofinertiaforcomputationofdeflection,mm4,see6.2.5.2.3,Sec6.2
= Momentofinertiaofgrossconcretesectionaboutcentroidalaxis,neglectingreinforcement,
mm4,Sec6.2,6.3,6.6
= Momentofinertiaofgrosssectionofslababoutcentroidalaxisdefinedforcalculating and
,mm4,Sec6.5
= Momentofinertiaofreinforcementaboutcentroidalaxisofmembercrosssection,mm4,Sec
6.3
= Momentofinertiaofstructuralsteelshape,pipe,ortubingaboutcentroidalaxisofcomposite
membercrosssection,mm4,Sec6.3
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Effectivelengthfactorforcompressionmembers,Sec6.3,6.6
Coefficientforbasicconcretebreakoutstrengthintension,AppendixD
Coefficientforpryoutstrength,AppendixD
Transversereinforcementindex,see8.2.3.3,Sec8.2
Spanlengthofbeamoronewayslab;clearprojectionofcantilever,mm,Sec6.2
Additionalembedmentlengthbeyondcenterlineofsupportorpointofinflection,mm,Sec8.2
Length of compression member in a frame, measured centertocenter of the joints in the
frame,mm,Sec6.3,6.6
Developmentlengthintensionofdeformedbar,deformedwire,plainanddeformedwelded
wirereinforcement,orpretensionedstrand,mm,Sec6.9,8.18.3
Developmentlengthincompressionofdeformedbarsanddeformedwire,mm,Sec8.2
Development length in tension of deformed bar or deformed wire with a standard hook,
measured from critical section to outside end of hook (straight embedment length between
critical section and start of hook [point of tangency] plus inside radius of bend and one bar
diameter),mm,seeSec.8.2and8.3,Sec8.2,8.3
Developmentlengthintensionofheadeddeformedbar,measuredfromthecriticalsectionto
thebearingfaceofthehead,mm,Sec8.2
Loadbearinglengthofanchorforshear,mm,seeD.6.2.2,AppendixD
Lengthofclearspanmeasuredfacetofaceofsupports,mm,Sec6.16.5,6.10,8.2.9.3, Sec8.2,
8.3
Length, measured from joint face along axis of structural member, over which special
transversereinforcementmustbeprovided,mm,Sec8.3
Span of member under load test, taken as the shorter span for twoway slab systems, mm.
Span is the smaller of: (a) distance between centers of supports, and (b) clear distance
between supportsplus thickness of member. Span for a cantilever shall be taken as twice
thedistancefromfaceofsupporttocantileverend,Sec6.11
Unsupportedlengthofcompressionmember,mm,see6.3.10.1.1,Sec6.3
Lengthofshearheadarmfromcentroidofconcentratedloadorreaction,mm,Sec6.4
Lengthofentirewallorlengthofsegmentofwallconsideredindirectionofshearforce,mm,
Sec6.4,6.6,8.3
Lengthofspanindirectionthatmomentsarebeingdetermined,measuredcentertocenterof
supports,mm,Sec6.5
Lengthofspanindirectionperpendicularto ,measuredcentertocenterofsupports,mm,
see6.5.6.2.3and6.5.6.2.4,Sec6.5
Liveloads,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.1,6.2,6.11,8.3
Roofliveload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2
Maximum moment in member due to service loads at stage deflection is computed, N mm,
Sec6.2,6.6
Factored moment amplified for the effects of member curvature used for design of
compressionmember,N mm,see6.3.10.6,Sec6.3
Crackingmoment,N mm,see6.2.5.2.3,Sec6.2,6.6
65
Part6
StructuralDesign
= Momentcausingflexuralcrackingatsectiondue toexternallyappliedloads,N mm,Sec6.4

= Factored moment modified to account for effect of axial compression, N mm, see 6.4.2.2.2,
Sec6.4
= Maximumfactoredmomentatsectionduetoexternallyappliedloads,N mm,Sec6.4
= Nominalflexuralstrengthatsection,N mm,Sec6.4,6.6,8.2,8.3
= Nominalflexuralstrengthatsectionwithoutcompressionsteel,see6.3.15.1(b),andmoment
ofresistancedevelopedbycompressionintheoverhangingportionoftheTflange,see
6.3.15.2(b)
= Additional nominal flexural strength at section due to added compression steel and
additionaltensionsteel ,see6.3.15.1(b),andmomentofresistancedevelopedbytheweb
ofaTbeam,see6.3.15.2(b)
= Nominal flexural strength of column framing into joint, calculated for factored axial force,
consistentwiththedirectionoflateralforcesconsidered,resultinginlowestflexuralstrength,
N mm,Sec8.3
= Totalfactoredstaticmoment,N mm,Sec6.5
= Requiredplasticmomentstrengthofshearheadcrosssection,N mm,Sec6.4
= Probable flexural strength of members, with or without axial load, determined using the
propertiesofthememberatthejointfacesassumingatensilestressinthelongitudinalbarsof
atleast1.25 andastrengthreductionfactor, ,of1.0,N mm,Sec8.3
= Factoredmomentduetoloadscausingappreciablesway,N mm,Sec6.3
= Portionofslabfactoredmomentbalancedbysupportmoment,N mm,Sec8.3
= Factoredmomentatsection,N mm,Sec6.36.6,8.3
= Momentatmidheightofwallduetofactoredlateralandeccentricverticalloads,notincluding
effects,N mm,Sec6.6
= Momentresistancecontributedbyshearheadreinforcement,N mm,Sec6.4
= Smallerfactoredendmomentonacompressionmember,tobetakenaspositiveifmemberis
bentinsinglecurvature,andnegativeifbentindoublecurvature,N mm,Sec6.3
= Factored endmoment on a compressionmember at the end at which M1 acts, due to loads
thatcausenoappreciablesidesway,calculatedusingafirstorderelasticframeanalysis,N mm,
Sec6.3
= Minimumvalueof ,N mm,Sec6.3
,
= Factoredendmomentoncompressionmemberattheendatwhich M2 acts,duetoloadsthat
causenoappreciablesidesway,calculatedusingafirstorderelasticframeanalysis,N mm,Sec
6.3
= Factoredendmomentoncompressionmemberattheendatwhich acts,duetoloadsthat
causeappreciablesidesway,calculatedusingafirstorderelasticframeanalysis,N mm,Sec6.3
= Numberofitems,suchasstrengthtests,bars,wires,monostrandanchoragedevices,anchors,
orshearheadarms,Sec6.4,8.2,AppendixD
= Basic concrete breakout strength in tension of a single anchor in cracked concrete, N, see
D.5.2.2,AppendixD
= Nominalconcretebreakoutstrengthintensionofasingleanchor,N,seeD.5.2.1,AppendixD
= Nominalconcretebreakoutstrengthintensionofagroupofanchors,N,seeD.5.2.1,Appendix
D
= Nominalstrengthintension,N,AppendixD
= Pulloutstrengthintensionofasingleanchorincrackedconcrete,N,seeD.5.3.4andD.5.3.5,
AppendixD
= Nominalpulloutstrengthintensionofasingleanchor,N,seeD.5.3.1,AppendixD
= Nominalstrengthofasingleanchororgroupofanchorsintensionasgovernedbythesteel
strength,N,seeD.5.1.1andD.5.1.2,AppendixD
= Sidefaceblowoutstrengthofasingleanchor,N,AppendixD
= Sidefaceblowoutstrengthofagroupofanchors,N,AppendixD
= Factoredaxialforcenormaltocrosssectionoccurringsimultaneouslywith or ;tobetaken
aspositiveforcompressionandnegativefortension,N,Sec6.4
= Factoredtensileforceappliedtoanchororgroupofanchors,N,AppendixD
= Factoredhorizontaltensileforceappliedattopofbracketorcorbelactingsimultaneouslywith
66
Vol.2
Chapter1
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Vu,tobetakenaspositivefortension,N,Sec6.4
Outsideperimeterofconcretecrosssection,mm,see6.4.4.1,Sec6.4
Perimeterofcenterlineofoutermostclosedtransversetorsionalreinforcement,mm,Sec6.4
Nominalaxialstrengthatbalancedstrainconditions,N,see6.3.3.2,Sec6.2,6.3
Criticalbucklingload,N,see6.3.10.6,Sec6.3
Nominalaxialstrengthofcrosssection,N,Sec6.2,6.3,6.6
Maximumallowablevalueof ,N,see6.3.3.6,Sec6.3
Nominalaxialstrengthatzeroeccentricity,N,Sec6.3
Unfactoredaxialloadatthedesign(midheight)sectionincludingeffectsofselfweight,N,Sec
6.6
Factoredaxialforce;tobetakenaspositiveforcompressionandnegativefortension,N,Sec
6.3,6.6,8.3
Factoreddeadloadperunitarea,Sec6.5
Factoredliveloadperunitarea,Sec6.5
Factoredloadperunitarea,Sec6.5
Stabilityindexforastory,see6.3.10.5.2,Sec6.3
Radiusofgyrationofcrosssectionofacompressionmember,mm,Sec6.3
Rainload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2
Centertocenter spacing of items, such as longitudinal reinforcement, transverse
reinforcement,prestressingtendons,wires,oranchors,mm,Sec6.3,6.4,6.9,6.11,6.12,8.2,
8.3,AppendixD
Centertocenter spacing of reinforcement in the ith layer adjacent to the surface of the
member,mm,AppendixA
Centertocenterspacingoftransversereinforcementwithinthelength ,mm,Sec8.3
Samplestandarddeviation,mpa,AppendixD
Centertocenterspacingoflongitudinalshearortorsionreinforcement,mm,Sec6.4
Snowload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2,8.3
Moment, shear, or axial force at connection corresponding to development of probable
strength at intended yield locations, based on the governing mechanism of inelastic lateral
deformation,consideringbothgravityandearthquakeloadeffects,Sec8.3
Nominalflexural,shear,oraxialstrengthofconnection,Sec8.3
Yieldstrengthofconnection,basedon ,formoment,shear,oraxialforce,Sec8.3
Wallthicknessofhollowsection,mm,Sec6.4
Cumulative effect of temperature, creep, shrinkage, differential settlement, and shrinkage
compensatingconcrete,Sec6.2
Nominaltorsionalmomentstrength,N mm,Sec6.4
Factoredtorsionalmomentatsection,N mm,Sec6.4
Requiredstrengthtoresistfactoredloadsorrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2
Nominalshearstress,mpa,see6.4.10.6.2,Sec6.4,8.3
Basicconcretebreakoutstrengthinshearofasingleanchorincrackedconcrete,N,seeD.6.2.2
andD.6.2.3,AppendixD
Nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyconcrete,N,Sec6.1,6.4,6.5,8.3
Nominalconcretebreakoutstrengthinshearofasingleanchor,N,seeD.6.2.1,AppendixD
Nominalconcretebreakoutstrengthinshearofagroupofanchors,N,seeD.6.2.1,AppendixD
Nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyconcretewhendiagonalcrackingresultsfromcombined
shearandmoment,N,Sec6.4
Nominalconcretepryoutstrengthofasingleanchor,N,seeD.6.3.1,AppendixD
Nominalconcretepryoutstrengthofagroupofanchors,N,seeD.6.3.1,AppendixD
Nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking results from high
principaltensilestressinweb,N,Sec6.4
Shearforceatsectionduetounfactoreddeadload,N,Sec6.4
Designshearforcecorrespondingtothedevelopmentoftheprobablemomentstrengthofthe
member,N,Sec8.3
Factoredshearforceatsectionduetoexternallyappliedloadsoccurringsimultaneouslywith
,N,Sec8.3
Nominalshearstrength,N,Sec6.1,6.3,6.4,8.3,AppendixD
Nominalhorizontalshearstrength,N,Sec6.12
67
Part6
StructuralDesign
= Verticalcomponentofeffectiveprestressforceatsection,N,Sec6.4
= Nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyshearreinforcement,N,Sec6.4
= Nominal strength in shear of a single anchor or group of anchors as governed by the steel
strength,N,seeD.6.1.1andD.6.1.2,AppendixD
= Factoredshearforceatsection, N,Sec6.4,6.5,6.12,8.2,8.3
= Factoredshearforceappliedtoasingleanchororgroupofanchors,N,AppendixD
= Factoredshearforceontheslabcriticalsectionfortwowayactionduetogravityloads,N,see
Sec.8.3
= Factoredhorizontalshearinastory,N,Sec6.3
= Density(unitweight)ofnormalweightconcreteorequilibriumdensityoflightweightconcrete,
kg/m3,Sec6.1,6.2
= Factoredloadperunitlengthofbeamoronewayslab,Sec6.1
= Windload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2
= Shorteroveralldimensionofrectangularpartofcrosssection,mm,Sec6.5
= Longeroveralldimensionofrectangularpartofcrosssection,mm,Sec6.5
= Distancefromcentroidalaxisofgrosssection,neglectingreinforcement,totensionface,mm,
Sec6.2,6.4
= Angledefiningtheorientationofreinforcement,Sec6.4,8.3,AppendixA
68
= Coefficient defining the relative contribution of concrete strength to nominal wall shear
strength,Sec8.3
= Ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
laterallybycenterlinesofadjacentpanels(ifany)oneachsideofthebeam,see6.5.6.1.6,Sec
6.2,6.5
= Averagevalueof forallbeamsonedgesofapanel,Sec6.2
=
indirectionofl1,Sec6.5
=
indirectionof ,Sec6.5
= Anglebetweentheaxisofastrutandthebarsinthe ithlayerofreinforcementcrossingthat
strut,AppendixA
= Constantusedtocompute inslabsandfootings,Sec6.4
= Ratioofflexuralstiffnessofshearheadarmtothatofthesurroundingcompositeslabsection,
see6.4.10.4.5,Sec6.4
= Ratiooflongtoshortdimensions:clearspansfortwowayslabs,see6.2.5.3.3;sidesofcolumn,
concentratedloadorreactionarea,see6.4.10.2.1;orsidesofafooting,see6.8.4.4.2,Sec6.2,
6.4,6.8
= Ratioofareaofreinforcementcutofftototalareaoftensionreinforcementatsection,Sec8.2
= Ratio used to account for reduction of stiffness of columns due to sustained axial loads, see
6.3.10.6.2,Sec6.3
= Ratiousedtoaccountforreductionofstiffnessofcolumnsduetosustainedlateralloads,see
6.3.10.4.2,Sec6.3
= Factortoaccountfortheeffectoftheanchorageoftiesontheeffectivecompressivestrength
ofanodalzone,AppendixA
= Factorusedtocompute inprestressedslabs,Sec6.4
= Factor to account for the effect of cracking and confining reinforcement on the effective
compressivestrengthoftheconcreteinastrut,AppendixA
= Ratiooftorsionalstiffnessofedgebeamsectiontoflexuralstiffnessofawidthofslabequalto
spanlengthofbeam,centertocenterofsupports,see6.5.6.4.2,Sec6.5
= Factorrelatingdepthofequivalentrectangularcompressivestressblocktoneutralaxisdepth,
see6.3.2.7.3,Sec6.3
= Factor used to determine the unbalanced moment transferred by flexure at slabcolumn
connections,see6.5.5.3.2,Sec6.4,6.5,8.3
= Factorusedtodeterminetheportionofreinforcementlocatedincenterbandoffooting,see
6.8.4.4.2,Sec6.8
= Factorusedtodeterminetheunbalancedmomenttransferredbyeccentricityofshearatslab
columnconnections,see6.4.10.7.1,Sec6.4
Vol.2
Chapter1
= Moment magnification factor to reflect effects of member curvature between ends of

compressionmember,Sec6.3
= Moment magnification factor for frames not braced against sidesway, to reflect lateral drift
resultingfromlateralandgravityloads,Sec6.3
= Designdisplacement,mm,Sec8.3
= Computed, outofplane deflection at midheight of wall corresponding to crackingmoment,
,mm,Sec6.6
= Increaseinstressinprestressingsteelduetofactoredloads,mpa,AppendixA
= Computed, outofplane deflection at midheight of wall corresponding to nominal flexural
strength, ,mm,Sec6.6
= Relative lateral deflection between the top and bottom of a story due to lateral forces
computed using a firstorder elastic frame analysis and stiffness values satisfying 6.3.10.5.2,
mm,Sec6.3
= Differencebetweeninitialandfinal(afterloadremoval)deflectionsforloadtestorrepeatload
test,mm,Sec6.11
= Computed,outofplanedeflectionatmidheightofwallduetoserviceloads,mm,Sec6.6
= Computeddeflectionatmidheightofwallduetofactoredloads,mm,Sec6.6
= Measuredmaximumdeflectionduringfirstloadtest,mm,see6.11.5.2,Sec6.11
= Maximumdeflectionmeasuredduringsecondloadtestrelativetothepositionofthestructure
atthebeginningofsecondloadtest,mm,see6.11.5.2,Sec6.11
= Nettensilestraininextremelayeroflongitudinaltensionsteelatnominalstrength,excluding
strainsduetoeffectiveprestress,creep,shrinkage,andtemperature,Sec6.16.3
= Anglebetweenaxisofstrut,compressiondiagonal,orcompressionfieldandthetensionchord
ofthemember,Sec6.4,AppendixA
= Modification factor reflecting the reduced mechanical properties of lightweight concrete, all
relative to normalweight concrete of the same compressive strength, see 6.1.8.1, 6.4.5.4.3,
8.2.3.4(d),8.2.6.2,8.2.10.2(b),Sec6.2,6.4,6.9,8.2,8.3andAppendixesA,D
= Multiplierforadditionaldeflectionduetolongtermeffects,see6.2.5.2.5,Sec6.2
= Coefficientoffriction,see6.4.5.4.3,Sec6.4,8.3
= Timedependentfactorforsustainedload,see6.2.5.2.5,Sec6.2
= Ratioof
to
,Sec6.4,6.5,8.3
= Ratioof
to
,see6.3.15.1(b), Sec6.2
= Ratioof to producingbalancedstrainconditions,see6.3.3.2,Sec6.3,6.5,6.6
= Ratioof
to
,see6.3.15.2(b)
= Ratioofareaofdistributedlongitudinalreinforcementtogrossconcreteareaperpendicularto
thatreinforcement,Sec6.4,6.6,8.3
= Maximum reinforcement ratio allowed for beams corresponding to
0.004 , see
6.3.15.1(a)
= Ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total volume of core confined by the spiral
(measuredouttooutofspirals),Sec6.3,8.3
= Ratio of area distributed transverse reinforcement to gross concrete area perpendicular to

thatreinforcement,Sec6.4,6.6,8.3
= Ratiooftiereinforcementareatoareaofcontactsurface,see6.12.5.3.3,Sec6.12
= Ratioof to
,see6.3.15.2(b),Sec6.4
=
Strengthreductionfactor,see6.2.3,Sec6.16.6,6.9,6.11,6.12,8.3,AppendixesA&D
= Factorusedtomodifytensilestrengthofanchorsbasedonpresenceorabsenceofcracksin
,
concrete,seeD.5.2.6,AppendixD
= Factorusedtomodifypulloutstrengthofanchorsbasedonpresenceorabsenceofcracksin
,
concrete,seeD.5.3.6,AppendixD
= Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors based on presence or absence of cracks in
,
concreteandpresenceorabsenceofsupplementaryreinforcement,seeD.6.2.7foranchorsin
shear,AppendixD
= Factorusedtomodifytensilestrengthofpostinstalledanchorsintendedforuseinuncracked
,
concretewithoutsupplementaryreinforcement,seeD.5.2.7,AppendixD
= Factorusedtomodifydevelopmentlengthbasedonreinforcementcoating,Sec8.2
= Factorusedtomodifytensilestrengthofanchorsbasedoneccentricityofappliedloads,see
,
69
Part6
StructuralDesign
D.5.2.4,AppendixD
= Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors based on eccentricity of applied loads, see
D.6.2.5,AppendixD
= Factor used to modify tensile strength of anchors based on proximity to edges of concrete
member,seeD.5.2.5,AppendixD
= Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors based on proximity to edges of concrete
member,seeD.6.2.6,AppendixD
= Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors located in concrete members with
1.5 ,seeD.6.2.8,AppendixD
= Factorusedtomodifydevelopmentlengthbasedonreinforcementsize,Sec8.2
= Factorusedtomodifydevelopmentlengthbasedonreinforcementlocation,Sec8.2
= Factor used to modify development length for welded deformed wire reinforcement in
tension,Sec8.2
= Effectivetensionareaofconcretesurroundingtheflexuraltensionreinforcementandhaving
the same centroid as that of the reinforcement, divided by the number of bars. When the
flexural reinforcement consists of different bar sizes the number of bars or wires shall be
computedasthetotalareaofreinforcementdividedbytheareaofthelargestbarused
= Areaofskinreinforcementperunitheightinasideface
= Factorrelatingshearandtorsionalstressproperties=
= Thickness of concrete cover measured from extreme tension fibre to centre of bar or wire
locatedclosestthereto
= Momentofresistanceofasectionwithoutcompressionsteel
= Additional moment of resistance due to added compression steel and additional tension
steelas2
= Spacingofshearortorsionreinforcementindirectionparalleltolongitudinalreinforcement
= Torsionalmomentstrengthprovidedbyconcrete
= Torsionalmomentstrengthprovidedbytorsionreinforcement
= Shortercentretocentredimensionofclosedrectangularstirrup
= Longercentretocentredimensionofclosedrectangularstirrup
= Quantitylimitingdistributionofflexuralreinforcement,seeEq(6.2.35)
3 butnotmorethan1.5
= Coefficientequalto 2
= Factordefinedin6.2.3.7
= Timedependentfactorforsustainedload
= Minimumratiooftensionreinforcement
6.1.2
610
General
6.1.2.1
Membersshallbedesignedforadequatestrengthinaccordancewiththeprovisions
ofthischapter,usingloadfactorsspecifiedin2.6.5.1andstrengthreductionfactors
in6.2.3.1.
6.1.2.2
Design of reinforced concrete members using Working Stress Design method

(AppendixB)isalsopermitted.
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.2.3
Structures and structural members shall be designed to have design strength at all
sectionsatleastequaltotherequiredstrength(U)calculatedforthefactoredloads
and forces in such combinations as are stipulated in Chapter 2, Loads. The nominal
strengthprovidedforthesectionmultipliedbythestrengthreductionfactor shall
beequaltoorgreaterthanthecalculatedrequiredstrengthU.
6.1.2.4
MembersshallalsomeetalltheotherrequirementsofthisCodetoensureadequate
performanceatserviceloads.
6.1.2.5
Design strength of reinforcement represented by the values of and used in

design calculations shall not exceed 550 MPa, except for prestressing steel and for
transversereinforcementin6.3.9.3andSec.8.3. or mayexceed420MPa,only
iftheratiooftheactualtensilestrengthtotheactualyieldstrengthisnotlessthan
1.20,andtheelongationpercentageisnotlessthan16.
6.1.2.6
Forstructuralconcrete, shallnotbelessthan17MPa.Nomaximumvalueof
shallapplyunlessrestrictedbyaspecificCodeprovision.
Loading
6.1.3.1
Loadsandtheircombinationsshallbeinaccordancewiththerequirementsspecified
inChapter2,Loads.
6.1.3.2
Structuresshallbedesignedtoresistallapplicableloads.
6.1.3.3
Effects of forces due to prestressing, crane loads, vibration, impact, shrinkage,

temperature changes, creep, expansion of shrinkagecompensating concrete, and
unequalsettlementofsupportsshallbedulyconsidered.
Methodsofanalysis
6.1.4.1
Members of frames or continuous construction (beams or oneway slabs) shall be

designedforthemaximumeffectsoffactoredloadsasdeterminedbythetheoryof
elastic analysis, except as modified for redistribution of moments in continuous
flexuralmembersaccordingto6.1.5.Designispermittedtobesimplifiedbyusingthe
assumptionsspecifiedin6.1.6&6.1.9through6.1.12.
6.1.4.2
Frame analysis by approximate methods shall be permitted for buildings of usual

typesofconstruction,spans,andstoryheights.
6.1.4.3
Provided (a)through (e) below aresatisfied, the approximate moments and shears
given here shall be permitted for design of continuous beams and oneway slabs
(slabs reinforced to resist flexural stresses in only one direction), as an alternate to
frameanalysis:
a) Therearetwoormorespans;
b) Spansareapproximatelyequal,withthelargeroftwoadjacentspansnotgreaterthan
theshorterbymorethan20percent;
c) Loadsareuniformlydistributed;
d) Unfactoredliveload, ,doesnotexceedthreetimesunfactoreddeadload, ;and
e) Membersareprismatic.
Forcalculatingnegativemoments, istakenastheaverageoftheadjacentclearspanlengths.
Positivemoment
Endspans
611
Part6
StructuralDesign
Discontinuousendunrestrained
11
Discontinuousendintegralwithsupport
14
Interiorspans
16
Negativemomentsatexteriorfaceoffirstinteriorsupport
Twospans
Morethantwospans
10
Negativemomentatotherfacesofinterior
11
Supports
Negativemomentatfaceofallsupportsfor
Slabswithspansnotexceeding3.048m;
andbeamswhereratioofsumofcolumnstiffnessestobeamstiffnessexceeds8
12
ateachendofthespan
Negativemomentatinteriorfaceofexteriorsupportformembersbuiltintegrallywith
supports
Wheresupportisspandrelbeam
24
Wheresupportisacolumn
16
Shearinendmembersatfaceoffirst
1.15
interiorsupport
Shearatfaceofallothersupports
6.1.4.4
6.1.5
Strutandtiemodels,providedinAppendixA,shallbepermittedtobeusedinthedesignof
structuralconcrete.
Redistributionofmomentsincontinuousflexuralmembers
6.1.5.1
Itshallbepermittedtodecreasefactoredmomentscalculatedbyelastictheoryatsectionsof
maximumnegativeormaximumpositivemomentinanyspanofcontinuousflexuralmembers
foranyassumedloadingarrangementbynotmorethan1000 percent,withamaximumof
20percent,exceptwhereapproximatevaluesformomentsareused.
6.1.5.2
Redistributionofmomentsshallbemadeonlywhen isequaltoorgreaterthan0.0075at
thesectionatwhichmomentisreduced.
612
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.1.5.3
6.1.6
Atallothersectionswithinthespans,thereducedmomentshallbeusedforcalculating
redistributedmoments.Staticequilibriumshallhavetobemaintainedafterredistributionof
momentsforeachloadingarrangement.
Spanlength
6.1.6.1
Thespanlengthofasimplysupportedbeamshallbetakenasthesmallerofthedistance
betweenthecentresofbearings,orthecleardistancebetweensupportsplustheeffective
depth.
6.1.6.2
Fordeterminationofmomentsinanalysisofframesorcontinuousconstruction,spanlength
shallbetakenasthedistancecentertocenterofsupports.
6.1.6.3
Designonthebasisofmomentsatfacesofsupportshallbepermittedforbeamsbuilt
integrallywithsupports.
6.1.6.4
Itshallbepermittedtoanalyzesolidorribbedslabsbuiltintegrallywithsupports,withclear
spansnotmorethan3m,ascontinuousslabsonknifeedgesupportswithspansequaltothe
clearspansoftheslabandwidthofbeamsotherwiseneglected.
6.1.7
6.1.7.1
Modulusofelasticity
Modulusofelasticity, ,forconcreteshallbepermittedtobetakenas . 0.043

(in
MPa)forvaluesof between1440and2560kg/m3.Fornormalweightconcrete, shallbe
permittedtobetakenas4700
6.1.7.2
Modulusofelasticity,
,forreinforcementshallbepermittedtobetakenas200,000MPa.
613
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.1.8
6.1.8.1
Lightweightconcrete
Toaccountfortheuseoflightweightconcrete,unlessspecificallynotedotherwise,a
inallapplicableequationsandsectionsof
modificationfactor appearsasamultiplierof
thisCode,where 0.85 forsandlightweightconcreteand0.75foralllightweight
concrete.Linearinterpolationbetween0.75and0.85shallbepermitted,onthebasisof
volumetricfractions,whenaportionofthelightweightfineaggregateisreplacedwith
normalweightfineaggregate.Linearinterpolationbetween0.85and1.0shallbepermitted,
onthebasisofvolumetricfractions,forconcretecontainingnormalweightfineaggregateand
ablendoflightweightandnormalweightcoarseaggregates.Fornormalweightconcrete,
1.0.Ifaveragesplittingtensilestrengthoflightweightconcrete, ,isspecified,
/ 0.56
6.1.9
1.0.
Stiffness
6.1.9.1
Forcomputingrelativeflexuralandtorsionalstiffnessesofcolumns,walls,floors,androof
systems,useofanysetofreasonableassumptionsshallbepermitted.Theassumptions
adoptedshallbeconsistentthroughoutanalysis.
6.1.9.2
Bothindeterminingmomentsandindesignofmembers,effectofhaunchesshallbe
considered.
6.1.10 Effectivestiffnessfordetermininglateraldeflections
6.1.10.1
Lateraldeflectionsresultingfromservicelateralloadsforreinforcedconcretebuildingsystems
shallbecomputedbyeitheralinearanalysiswithmemberstiffnessdeterminedusing1.4
timestheflexuralstiffnessdefinedin6.1.10.2and6.1.10.3orbyamoredetailedanalysis.
Memberpropertiesshallnotbetakengreaterthanthegrosssectionproperties.
6.1.10.2
Lateraldeflectionsresultingfromfactoredlateralloadsforreinforcedconcretebuilding
systemsshallbecomputedeitherbylinearanalysiswithmemberstiffnessdefinedby(a)or
(b),orbyamoredetailedanalysisconsideringthereducedstiffnessofallmembersunderthe
loadingconditions:
a) Bysectionpropertiesdefinedin6.3.10.4.1(a)through(c);or
b) 50percentofstiffnessvaluesbasedongrosssectionproperties.
6.1.10.3
Lateraldeflectionsresultingfromfactoredlateralloadsshallbepermittedtobecomputedby
usinglinearanalysis,wheretwowayslabswithoutbeamsaredesignatedaspartofthe
seismicforceresistingsystem.Thestiffnessofslabmembersshallbedefinedbyamodelthat
isinsubstantialagreementwithresultsofcomprehensivetestsandanalysisandthestiffness
ofotherframemembersshallbeasdefinedin6.1.10.2.
6.1.11
ConsiderationsforColumns
6.1.11.1
Columnsshallbedesignedtoresisttheaxialforcesfromfactoredloadsonallfloorsorroof
andthemaximummomentfromfactoredloadsonasingleadjacentspanofthefloororroof
underconsideration.Loadingconditionresultingthemaximumratioofmomenttoaxialload
shallalsobeconsidered.
6.1.11.2
Inframesorcontinuousconstruction,considerationshallbegiventotheeffectofunbalanced
floororroofloadsonbothexteriorandinteriorcolumnsandofeccentricloadingduetoother
causes.
614
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.1.11.3
Itshallbepermittedtoassumefarendsofcolumnsbuiltintegrallywiththestructuretobe
fixed,whilecomputinggravityloadmomentsincolumns.
6.1.11.4
Resistancetomomentsatanyfloororrooflevelshallbeprovidedbydistributingthemoment
betweencolumnsimmediatelyaboveandbelowthegivenfloorinproportiontotherelative
columnstiffnessesandconditionsofrestraint.
6.1.12 Liveloadarrangement
6.1.12.1
Thefollowingshallbepermittedtoassume:
a) Theliveloadisappliedonlytothefloororroofunderconsideration;and
b) Thefarendsofcolumnsbuiltintegrallywiththestructureareconsideredtobefixed.
6.1.12.2
Arrangementofliveloadshallbepermittedtobeassumedtobelimitedtocombinationsof:
a) Factoreddeadloadonallspanswithfullfactoredliveloadontwoadjacentspans;and
b) Factoreddeadloadonallspanswithfullfactoredliveloadonalternatespans.
6.1.13 ConstructionofTbeam
6.1.13.1
IntheconstructionofTbeam,theflangeandwebshallbebuiltintegrallyorotherwise
effectivelybondedtogether.
6.1.13.2
WidthofslabeffectiveasaTbeamflangeshallnotexceedonequarterofthespanlengthof
thebeam,andtheeffectiveoverhangingflangewidthoneachsideofthewebshallnot
exceed:
a) Eighttimestheslabthickness;and
b) Onehalfthecleardistancetothenextweb.
6.1.13.3
Theeffectiveoverhangingflangewidthforbeamswithaslabononesideonlyshallnot
exceed:
a) Onetwelfththespanlengthofthebeam;
b) Sixtimestheslabthickness;and
c) Onehalfthecleardistancetothenextweb.
6.1.13.4
Isolatedbeams,inwhichtheTshapeisusedtoprovideaflangeforadditionalcompression
area,shallhaveaflangethicknessnotlessthanonehalfthewidthofwebandaneffective
flangewidthnotmorethanfourtimesthewidthofweb.
6.1.13.5
WhenprimaryflexuralreinforcementinaslabthatisconsideredasaTbeamflange
(excludingjoistconstruction)isparalleltothebeam,reinforcementshallbeprovidedinthe
topoftheslabinthedirectionperpendiculartothebeamandinaccordancewiththe
following:
6.1.13.5.1
Transversereinforcementshallbedesignedtocarrythefactoredloadontheoverhanging
slabwidthassumedtoactasacantilever.Forisolatedbeams,thefullwidthofoverhanging
flangeshallbeconsidered.ForotherTbeams,onlytheeffectiveoverhangingslabwidthneed
beconsidered.
6.1.13.5.2 Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall be not farther apart than five times the slab
thickness,norfartherapartthan450mm.
6.1.14 Constructionofjoist
6.1.14.1
Constructionofjoistconsistsofamonolithiccombinationofregularlyspacedribsandatop
slabarrangedtospaninonedirectionortwoorthogonaldirections.
615
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.1.14.2
Widthofribsshallnotbelessthan100mm,andtheribsshallhaveadepthofnotmorethan
31/2timestheminimumwidthofrib.
6.1.14.3
Clearspacingbetweenribsshallnotexceed750mm.
6.1.14.4
Joistconstructionnotmeetingthelimitationsof6.1.14.1through6.1.14.3shallbedesignedas
slabsandbeams.
6.1.14.5
Whenpermanentburnedclayorconcretetilefillersofmaterialhavingaunitcompressive
strengthatleastequalto inthejoistsareused:
6.1.14.5.1
Forshearandnegativemomentstrengthcomputations,theverticalshellsoffillersincontact
withtheribsshallbepermittedtoinclude.Otherportionsoffillersshallnotbeincludedin
strengthcomputations.
6.1.14.5.2
Slabthicknessoverpermanentfillersshallbenotlessthanonetwelfththecleardistance
betweenribs,norlessthan40mm.
6.1.14.5.3 Reinforcementnormaltotheribsshallbeprovidedintheslabinonewayjoists,asrequired
by8.1.11
6.1.14.6
Whenremovableformsorfillersareused,whichdonotcomplywith6.1.14.5,then:
6.1.14.6.1 Slabthicknessshallbenotlessthanonetwelfththecleardistancebetweenribs,norlessthan
50mm.
6.1.14.6.2
Reinforcementnormaltotheribsshallbeprovidedintheslabasrequiredforflexure,
consideringloadconcentrations,ifany,butnotlessthanrequiredby8.1.11
6.1.14.7
Whereconduitsorpipesaspermittedbyrelevantprovisionsofembedmentsinconcreteare
embeddedwithintheslab,slabthicknessshallbeatleast25mmgreaterthanthetotaloverall
depthoftheconduitsorpipesatanypoint.Conduitsorpipesshallnotimpairsignificantlythe
strengthoftheconstruction.
6.1.14.8
Forjoistconstruction,
6.4.
shallbepermittedtobe10percentmorethanthatspecifiedinSec
6.1.15 Separatefloorfinish
6.1.15.1
Unlessplacedmonolithicallywiththefloorslabordesignedinaccordancewithrequirements
ofSec.6.12,floorfinishshallnotbeincludedaspartofastructuralmember.
6.1.15.2
Allconcretefloorfinishesshallbepermittedtobeconsideredaspartofrequiredcoveror
totalthicknessfornonstructuralconsiderations.
6.2
STRENGTHANDSERVICEABILITYREQUIREMENTS
6.2.1
6.2.1.1
616
General
Structuresandstructuralmembersshallbedesignedtohavedesignstrengthsatallsections
atleastequaltotherequiredstrengthscalculatedforthefactoredloadsandforcesinsuch
combinationsasarestipulatedinthisCode.
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.2.1.2
6.2.2
MembersalsoshallmeetallotherrequirementsofthisCodetoensureadequateperformance
atserviceloadlevels.
Requiredstrength
6.2.2.1
Requiredstrength shallbeatleastequaltotheeffectsoffactoredloadsinsuch
combinationsasarestipulatedinChapter2,Loads.
6.2.2.2
Ifresistancetoimpacteffectsistakenintoaccountindesign,sucheffectsshallbeincluded
with .
6.2.2.3
Estimationsofdifferentialsettlement,creep,shrinkage,expansionofshrinkagecompensating
concrete,ortemperaturechangeshallbebasedonarealisticassessmentofsucheffects
occurringinservice.
6.2.3
DesignStrength
6.2.3.1
Designstrengthprovidedbyamember,anditsconnectionstoothermembers,intermsof
flexure,axialload,shear,andtorsion,shallbetakenasthenominalstrengthcalculatedin
accordancewiththerequirementsandassumptionsofthischapter,multipliedbyastrength
reductionfactors asstipulatedin6.2.3.2,6.2.3.3,and6.2.3.4.
6.2.3.2
Strengthreductionfactor shallbeasgivenin6.2.3.2.1through6.2.3.2.6:
6.2.3.2.1
Tensioncontrolledsectionsasdefinedin6.3.3.4...............................................0.90
6.2.3.2.2
Compressioncontrolledsections,asdefinedin6.3.3.3:
Memberswithspiralreinforcementconformingto6.3.9.3........................
0.75
Otherreinforcedmembers.......................................................................... 0.65
Forsectionsinwhichthenettensilestrainintheextremetensionsteelatnominalstrength, ,isbetween
thelimitsforcompressioncontrolledandtensioncontrolledsections, shallbepermittedtobelinearly
increased from that for compressioncontrolled sections to 0.90 as increases from the compression
controlledstrainlimitto0.005(AlsoseeFig. 6.2.3.1). While interpolating, it shallbepermittedtoround
toseconddigitafterdecimal.
Fig.6.2.3.1Variationof withnettensilestraininextremetensionsteel, and

forGrade420reinforcementandforprestressingsteel(seesec.6.2.3.2.2)
617
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.2.3.2.3
Itshallbepermittedforcompressioncontrolledsections,asdefinedin6.3.3.3,thefollowing
optional, more conservative alternative values of strength reduction factor , where less
controlled construction environment justifies such selection according to engineering
judgmentofthedesigner:
Memberswithspiralreinforcementconformingto6.3.9.3
0.70
Otherreinforcedmembers
0.60
Forsectionsinwhichthenettensilestrainintheextremetensionsteelatnominalstrength, ,isbetween
thelimitsforcompressioncontrolledandtensioncontrolledsections, shallbepermittedtobelinearly
increased from that for compressioncontrolled sections to 0.90 as increases from the compression
controlledstrainlimitto0.005(AlsoseeFig. 6.2.3.2). While interpolating, it shallbepermittedtoround
toseconddigitafterdecimal.
Fig. 6.2.3.2Variation of with net tensile strain in extreme tension steel, and for Grade 420
reinforcementandforprestressingsteelwithreducedvaluesof(0.6and0.7)forcompression
controlled sections (see sec.6.2.3.2.3, Optional application in case of less controlled
environmentasperengineeringjudgment)
6.2.3.2.4
Shearandtorsion
6.2.3.2.5
Bearingonconcrete(exceptforposttensionedanchoragezonesandstrutandtiemodels:
0.65
6.2.3.2.6
Strutandtiemodels(AppendixA),andstruts,ties,nodalzones,andbearingareasinsuch
models:0.75
6.2.3.2.7
CalculationofdevelopmentlengthspecifiedinSec8.2doesnotrequirea strengthreduction
factor.
6.2.3.3
ForstructuresrelyingonintermediateprecaststructuralwallsinSeismicDesignCategoryD,
specialmomentframes,orspecialstructuralwallstoresistearthquakeeffects, , shallbe
modifiedasgivenin(a)through(c):
0.75
a) Foranystructuralmemberthatisdesignedtoresist ,ifthenominalshearstrengthof
thememberislessthantheshearcorrespondingtothedevelopmentofthenominal
flexuralstrengthofthemember, forshearshallbe0.60.Thenominalflexuralstrength
shallbedeterminedconsideringthemostcriticalfactoredaxialloadsandincluding ;
618
Vol.2
Chapter1
b) Fordiaphragms, forshearshallnotexceedtheminimum forshearusedforthe

verticalcomponentsoftheprimaryseismicforceresistingsystem;
c) Forjointsanddiagonallyreinforcedcouplingbeams, forshearshallbe0.85.
6.2.3.4
6.2.4
Strengthreductionfactor
structuralplainconcrete.
shallbe0.60forflexure,compression,shear,andbearingof
Designstrengthforreinforcement
The values of and

used in design calculations shall not exceed 550 MPa, except for transverse
reinforcementin6.3.9.3andSec.8.3.
6.2.5
Controlofdeflections
6.2.5.1
Reinforcedconcretememberssubjectedtoflexureshallbedesignedtohaveadequate
stiffnesstolimitdeflectionsoranydeformationsthatmayadverselyaffectstrengthor
serviceabilityofastructure.
6.2.5.2
Onewayconstruction(nonprestressed)
6.2.5.2.1
MinimumthicknessstipulatedinTable6.2.5.1shallapplyforonewayconstructionnot
supportingorattachedtopartitionsorotherconstructionlikelytobedamagedbylarge
deflections,unlesscomputationofdeflectionindicatesalesserthicknesscanbeusedwithout
adverseeffects.
6.2.5.2.2
Wheredeflectionsaretobecomputed,deflectionsthatoccurimmediatelyonapplicationof
load shall be computed by usual methods or formulas for elastic deflections, considering
effectsofcrackingandreinforcementonmemberstiffness.
TABLE 6.2.5.1 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF NONPRESTRESSED BEAMS OR ONEWAY SLABS UNLESS
DEFLECTIONSARECALCULATED
Minimumthickness,
Simplysupported
Member
Solidoneway
slabs
Beamsorribbed
onewayslabs
Oneend
continuous
Bothends
continuous
Cantilever
Membersnotsupportingorattachedtopartitionsorotherconstructionlikelytobe
damagedbylargedeflections
/20
/24
/28
/10
/16
/18.5
/21
/8
Notes:
Values given shall be used directly for members with normalweight concrete and Grade 420
reinforcement.Forotherconditions,thevaluesshallbemodifiedasfollows:
a) For lightweight concrete having equilibriumdensity, , in the range of1440 to1840kg/m3, the
valuesshallbemultipliedby 1.65 0.0003
butnotlessthan1.09.
b)For otherthan420MPa,thevaluesshallbemultipliedby 0.4
6.2.5.2.3
Ifnotstiffnessvaluesareobtainedbyamorecomprehensiveanalysis,immediatedeflection
shallbecomputedwiththemodulusofelasticityforconcrete, ,asspecifiedin6.1.7.1
(normalweightorlightweightconcrete)andwiththeeffectivemomentofinertia, ,as
follows,butnotgreaterthan
1
/700 .
6.2.1
619
Part6
StructuralDesign
where
6.2.2
and
0.62
6.2.3
6.2.5.2.4
shallbepermittedtobetakenforcontinuousmembersastheaverageofvaluesobtained
fromEq.(6.2.1)forthecriticalpositiveandnegativemomentsections.Forprismatic
members, shallbepermittedtobetakenasthevalueobtainedfromEq.(6.2.1)atmidspan
forsimpleandcontinuousspans,andatsupportforcantilevers.
6.2.5.2.5
Ifthevaluesarenotobtainedbyamorecomprehensiveanalysis,additionallongterm
deflectionresultingfromcreepandshrinkageofflexuralmembers(normalweightor
lightweightconcrete)shallbedeterminedbymultiplyingtheimmediatedeflectioncausedby
thesustainedloadconsidered,bythefactor
6.2.4
where shallbethevalueatmidspanforsimpleandcontinuousspans,andatsupportfor
cantilevers.Itshallbepermittedtoassume ,thetimedependentfactorforsustainedloads,
tobeequalto:
5yearsormore
2.0
12months
1.4
6months
1.2
3months
1.0
6.2.5.2.6
Thevalueofdeflectioncomputedinaccordancewith6.2.5.2.2through6.2.5.2.5shallnot
exceedlimitsstipulatedinTable6.2.5.2.
6.2.5.3
Twowayconstruction(nonprestressed)
6.2.5.3.1
Theminimumthicknessofslabsorothertwowayconstructiondesignedinaccordancewith
theprovisionsofSec.6.5andconformingwiththerequirementsof6.5.6.1.2shallbegoverned
bySection6.2.5.3.Thethicknessofslabswithoutinteriorbeamsspanningbetweenthe
supportsonallsidesshallsatisfytherequirementsof6.2.5.3.2or6.2.5.3.4.Thethicknessof
slabswithbeamsspanningbetweenthesupportsonallsidesshallsatisfyrequirementsof
6.2.5.3.3or6.2.5.3.4.
6.2.5.3.2
Ifslabsarewithoutinteriorbeamsspanningbetweenthesupportsandhavearatiooflongto
shortspannotgreaterthan2,theminimumthicknessshallbeinaccordancewiththe
provisionsofTable6.2.5.3andshallnotbelessthanthefollowingvalues:
Slabswithoutdroppanelsasdefinedin6.5.2.5
125mm;
Slabswithdroppanelsasdefinedin6.5.2.5
100mm.
TABLE6.2.5.2MAXIMUMALLOWABLECOMPUTEDDEFLECTIONS
Typeofmember
Deflectiontobeconsidered
Deflection
Flatroofsnotsupportingorattachedto
nonstructuralelementslikelytobedamaged
bylargedeflections
Immediatedeflectionduetoliveload
/180
620
Vol.2
Chapter1
Floorsnotsupportingorattachedto
nonstructuralelementslikelytobedamaged
bylargedeflections
Immediatedeflectionduetoliveload
Rooforfloorconstructionsupportingor
attachedtononstructuralelementslikelyto
bedamagedbylargedeflections
Thatpartofthetotaldeflection
occurringafterattachmentof
nonstructuralelements(sumofthe
longtermdeflectionduetoall
sustainedloadsandtheimmediate
deflectionduetoanyadditionallive
load)
Rooforfloorconstructionsupportingor
attachedtononstructuralelementsnotlikely
tobedamagedbylargedeflections
/360
/480
l /240
*Limit notintendedtosafeguardagainstponding.Pondingshouldbecheckedbysuitablecalculations
ofdeflection,includingaddeddeflectionsduetopondedwater,andconsideringlongtermeffectsofall
sustainedloads,camber,constructiontolerances,andreliabilityofprovisionsfordrainage.
Longtermdeflectionshallbedeterminedinaccordancewith6.2.5.2.5,butmaybereducedbyamount
ofdeflectioncalculatedtooccurbeforeattachmentofnonstructuralelements.Thisamountshallbe
determinedonbasisofacceptedengineeringdatarelatingtotimedeflectioncharacteristicsof
memberssimilartothosebeingconsidered.
Limitmaybeexceededifadequatemeasuresaretakentopreventdamagetosupportedorattached
elements.
Limitshallnotbegreaterthantoleranceprovidedfornonstructuralelements.Limitmaybeexceeded
TABLE6.2.5.3MINIMUMTHICKNESSOFSLABSWITHOUTINTERIORBEAMS*
, MPa
Without drop panels

Exteriorpanels
Interior
l
Without Withedge
edgebeams beams
With drop panels

Exteriorpanels
Interior
l
Without Withedge
edgebeams beams
280
/33
/36
/36
/36
/40
/40
420
/30
/33
/33
/33
/36
/36
520
/28
/31
/31
/31
/34
/34
*For twoway construction, is the length of clear span in the long direction,
measuredfacetofaceofsupportsinslabswithoutbeamsandfacetofaceofbeamsor
othersupportsinothercases.
For between the values given in the table, minimum thickness shall be
determinedbylinearinterpolation.
Droppanelsasdefinedin6.5.2.5.
Slabs withbeamsbetweencolumnsalongexterioredges.Thevalueof
fortheedge
beamshallnotbelessthan0.8.
6.2.5.3.3
Theminimumthickness, forslabswithbeamsspanningbetweenthesupportsonallsides,
shallbeasfollows:
a) For
b) For
equaltoorlessthan0.2,theprovisionsof6.2.5.3.2shallapply;
greaterthan0.2butnotgreaterthan2.0, shallnotbelessthan
.
(6.2.5)
621
Part6
StructuralDesign
andnotlessthan125mm;
greaterthan2.0, shallnotbelessthan
c) For
6.2.6
andnotlessthan90mm;
not less than 0.80 shall be provided at
d) An edge beam with a stiffness ratio
discontinuousedges,ortheminimumthicknessrequiredbyEq.(6.2.5)or(6.2.6)shallbe
increasedbyatleast10percentinthepanelwithadiscontinuousedge.
Term in(b)and(c)islengthofclearspaninlongdirectionmeasuredfacetofaceofbeams.
Term in(b)and(c)isratioofclearspansinlongtoshortdirectionofslab.
6.2.5.3.4
WhencomputeddeflectionsdonotexceedthelimitsofTable6.2.5.2,slabthicknesslessthan
the minimum required by 6.2.5.3.1, 6.2.5.3.2, and 6.2.5.3.3 shall be permitted. Deflections
shallbecomputedtakingintoaccountsizeandshapeofthepanel,conditionsofsupport,and
natureofrestraintsatthepaneledges.Themodulusofelasticityofconcrete, ,shallbeas
specified in 6.1.7.1. The effective moment of inertia, , shall be that given by Eq. (6.2.1);
othervaluesshallbepermittedtobeusediftheyresultincomputeddeflectionsinreasonable
agreement with results of comprehensive tests. Additional longterm deflection shall be
computedinaccordancewith6.2.5.2.5.
6.2.5.4
Compositeconstruction
6.2.5.4.1
Shoredconstruction
Where composite flexural members are supported during construction so that, after removal of
temporarysupports,deadloadisresistedbythefullcompositesection,itshallbepermittedtoconsider
the composite member equivalent to a monolithically cast member for computation of deflection. For
nonprestressedmembers,theportionofthememberincompressionshalldeterminewhethervaluesin
Table6.2.5.1fornormalweightorlightweightconcreteshallapply.Ifdeflectioniscomputed,accountshall
betakenofcurvaturesresultingfromdifferentialshrinkageofprecastandcastinplacecomponents,and
ofaxialcreepeffectsinaprestressedconcretemember.
6.2.5.4.2
Unshoredconstruction
When the thickness of a nonprestressed precast flexural member meets the requirements of Table
6.2.5.1,deflectionneednotbecomputed.Ifthethicknessofanonprestressedcompositemembermeets
the requirements of Table 6.2.5.1, it is not required to compute deflection occurring after the member
becomes composite, but the longterm deflection of the precast member shall be investigated for
magnitudeanddurationofloadpriortobeginningofeffectivecompositeaction.
6.2.5.4.3
The computed deflection in accordance with 6.2.5.4.1 or 6.2.5.4.2 shall not exceed limits
stipulatedinTable6.2.5.2.
6.3
AXIALLOADSANDFLEXURE
6.3.1
Scope
TheprovisionsofSec.6.3shallbeapplicabletothedesignofmemberssubjecttoflexureoraxialloadsor
acombinationthereof.
622
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.3.2
Designassumptions
6.3.2.1
Theassumptionsgivenin6.3.2.2through6.3.2.7,andsatisfactionofapplicableconditionsof
equilibriumandcompatibilityofstrainsshallformthebasisofstrengthdesignofmembersfor
flexureandaxialloads.
6.3.2.2
It shallbe assumed that strain inreinforcement and concrete is directly proportional to the
distancefromtheneutralaxis,exceptthat,fordeepbeamsasdefinedin6.3.7.1,ananalysis
that considers a nonlinear distribution of strain shall be used. Alternatively, it shall be
permittedtouseastrutandtiemodel.See6.3.7,6.4.6,andAppendixA.
6.3.2.3
Itshallbeassumedthatthemaximumusablestrainatextremeconcretecompressionfiberis
equalto0.003.
6.3.2.4
times steel strain. For strains

For stress in reinforcement below , it shall be taken as
greater than that corresponding to , stress in reinforcement shall be considered
independentofstrainandequalto .
6.3.2.5
Inaxialandflexuralcalculationsofreinforcedconcrete,thetensilestrengthofconcreteshall
beneglected.
6.3.2.6
Therelationshipbetweenconcretecompressivestressdistributionandconcretestrainshall
be assumed to be rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic, or any other shape that results in
predictionofstrengthinsubstantialagreementwithresultsofcomprehensivetests.
6.3.2.7
Anequivalentrectangularconcretestressdistributiondefinedby6.3.2.7.1through6.3.2.7.3
belowshallsatisfytherequirementsof6.3.2.6.
6.3.2.7.1
Concrete stress of 0.85 shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an equivalent

compressionzoneboundedbyedgesofthecrosssectionandastraightlinelocatedparallelto
theneutralaxisatadistance
fromthefiberofmaximumcompressivestrain.
6.3.2.7.2
Distance from the fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis, , shall be measured in a
directionperpendiculartotheneutralaxis.
6.3.2.7.3
For between17and28MPa, shallbetakenas0.85.For above28MPa, shallbe

reducedlinearlyatarateof0.05foreach7MPaofstrengthinexcessof28MPa,but shall
notbetakenlessthan0.65.For between28and56MPa, maybecalculatedfromEq.
(6.3.1).
0.85
0.007143
28
0.65
0.85
6.3.1
623
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.3.3
Generalprinciplesandrequirements
6.3.3.1
Stressandstraincompatibilityusingassumptionsin6.3.2shallbethebasisfordesignofcross
sectionssubjecttoflexureoraxialloads,oracombinationthereof.
6.3.3.2
A cross section shall be considered to be in balanced strain conditions when the tension
reinforcementreachesthestraincorrespondingto justasconcreteincompressionreaches
itsassumedultimatestrainof0.003.
6.3.3.3
Sectionsarecompressioncontrolledifthenettensilestrainintheextremetensionsteel, ,is
equal to or less than the compressioncontrolled strain limit when the concrete in
compression reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003 (Fig.6.3.3.1). The compression
controlled strain limit is the net tensile strain in the reinforcement at balanced strain
conditions. For Grade 420 reinforcement, it shall be permitted to set the compression
controlled strain limit equal to 0.002. For other grades compressioncontrolled strain limit
maybedeterminedbydividingtheyieldstrengthbymodulusofelasticityEandthenrounding
the value obtained to four significant digits after the decimal. For example, for Grade 500
reinforcement,thecompressioncontrolledstrainlimitshallequalto0.0025.
Fig.6.3.3.1Straindistributionandnettensilestrain
624
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.3.3.4
Sections are tensioncontrolled if the net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel, , is
equaltoorgreaterthan0.005whentheconcreteincompressionreachesitsassumedstrain
limit of 0.003. Sections with between the compressioncontrolled strain limit and 0.005
constitute a transition region between compressioncontrolled and tensioncontrolled
sections.
6.3.3.5
Nettensilestrainintheextremetensionsteelatnominalstrength, shallnotbelessthan
0.004fornonprestressedflexuralmembersandnonprestressedmemberswithfactoredaxial
compressiveloadlessthan0.10
6.3.3.5.1
Useofcompressionreinforcementshall bepermittedinconjunctionwithadditionaltension
reinforcementtoincreasethestrengthofflexuralmembers.
6.3.3.6
Forcompressionmembers,designaxialstrength
computedbyEq.(6.3.2)or(6.3.3).
6.3.3.6.1
FornonprestressedmemberswithspiralreinforcementconformingtoSec.8.1orcomposite
membersconformingto6.3.13:
,
6.3.3.6.2
6.3.4
0.85
0.85
(6.3.2)
FornonprestressedmemberswithtiereinforcementconformingtoSec.8.1:
,
6.3.3.7
shallnotbetakengreaterthan
0.80
0.85
(6.3.3)
Memberssubjecttocompressiveaxialloadshallbedesignedforthemaximummomentthat
canaccompanytheaxialload.Thefactoredaxialforce atgiveneccentricityshallnotexceed
thatgivenin6.3.3.6.Themaximumfactoredmoment
shallbemagnifiedforslenderness
effectsinaccordancewith6.3.10.
Spacingoflateralsupportsforflexuralmembers
6.3.4.1
Distancebetweenlateralsupportsforabeamshallnotexceed50times ,theleastwidthof
compressionflangeorface.
6.3.4.2
Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be taken into account in determining spacing of
lateralsupports.
6.3.5
6.3.5.1
Minimumreinforcementformembersinflexure
At every section of a flexural member where tensile reinforcement is required by analysis,

except as provided in 6.3.5.2, 6.3.5.3, and 6.3.5.4,
provided shall not be less than that
givenby
.
,
andnotlessthan1.4
6.3.4
/ .
625
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.3.5.2
Forstaticallydeterminatememberswithaflangeintension, ,
valuegivenbyEq.(6.3.4),exceptthat isreplacedbyeither2
whicheverissmaller.
6.3.5.3
If,ateverysection, providedisatleastonethirdgreaterthanthatrequiredbyanalysis,the
requirementsof6.3.5.1and6.3.5.2neednotbeapplied.
6.3.5.4
Forstructuralslabsandfootingsofuniformthickness, ,
inthedirectionofthespanshall
be the same as that required by 8.1.11. Maximum spacing of this reinforcement shall not
exceedthreetimesthethickness,nor450mm.
6.3.6
shallnotbelessthanthe
orthewidthoftheflange,
Distributionofflexuralreinforcementinonewayslabsandbeams
6.3.6.1
Rules for distribution of flexural reinforcement to control flexural cracking in beams and in
onewayslabs(slabsreinforcedtoresistflexuralstressesinonlyonedirection)areprescribed
inthissection.
6.3.6.2
Distributionofflexuralreinforcementintwowayslabsshallbeasrequiredby6.5.3.
6.3.6.3
As prescribed in 6.3.6.4, flexural tension reinforcement shall be well distributed within

maximumflexuraltensionzonesofamembercrosssection.
6.3.6.4
Thespacingofreinforcementclosesttothetensionface, ,shallbelessthanthatgivenby
380
2.5
(6.3.5)
but shall not exceed 300 280/ , where

is the least distance from surface of
reinforcement to the tension face. If there is only one bar or wire nearest to the extreme
tensionface, usedinEq.(6.3.5)isthewidthoftheextremetensionface.
Calculated stress in reinforcement closest to the tension face at service load shall be
computedbasedontheunfactoredmoment.Itshallbepermittedtotake as2/3 .
6.3.6.5
Forstructuressubjecttoveryaggressiveexposureordesignedtobewatertight,provisionsof
6.3.6.4 are not sufficient. For such structures, special investigations and precautions are
required.
6.3.6.6
When flanges of Tbeam construction are in tension, part of the flexural tension
reinforcement shall be distributed over an effective flange width as defined in 6.1.13, or a
widthequaltoonetenththespan,whicheverissmaller.Iftheeffectiveflangewidthexceeds
onetenththespan,somelongitudinalreinforcementshallbeprovidedintheouterportions
oftheflange.
6.3.6.7
Longitudinal skin reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed along both side faces of a
member(Fig.6.3.6.1),where ofabeamorjoistexceeds900mm.Skinreinforcementshall
extendforadistance 2 fromthetensionface.Thespacing shallbeasprovidedin6.3.6.4,
where istheleastdistancefromthesurfaceoftheskinreinforcementtothesideface.It
shall be permitted to include such reinforcement in strength computations if a strain
compatibilityanalysisismadetodeterminestressintheindividualbarsorwires.
626
Vol.2
Chapter1
Fig.6.3.6.1Skinreinforcementforbeamsandjoistswithh >900mm.
6.3.7
6.3.7.1
Deepbeams
Deep beams are members loaded on one face and supported on the opposite face so that
compressionstrutscandevelopbetweentheloadsandthesupports,andhaveeither:
a) clearspans, ,equaltoorlessthanfourtimestheoverallmemberdepth;or
b) regions with concentrated loads within twice the member depth from the face of the
support.
Deepbeamsshallbedesignedeithertakingintoaccountnonlineardistributionofstrain,orby
AppendixA.(Seealso6.4.6.1and8.2.7.6)Lateralbucklingshallbeconsidered.
6.3.7.2
ofdeepbeamsshallbeinaccordancewith6.4.6.
6.3.7.3
Minimumareaofflexuraltensionreinforcement,
6.3.7.4
Minimumhorizontalandverticalreinforcementinthesidefacesofdeepbeamsshallsatisfy
eitherA.3.3or6.4.6.4and6.4.6.5.
6.3.8
6.3.8.1
,shallconformto6.3.5.
Designdimensionsforcompressionmembers
Isolatedcompressionmemberwithmultiplespirals
Outerlimitsoftheeffectivecrosssectionofacompressionmemberwithtwoormoreinterlockingspirals
shallbetakenatadistanceoutsidetheextremelimitsofthespiralsequaltotheminimumconcretecover
requiredby8.1.7.
6.3.8.2
Monolithicallybuiltcompressionmemberwithwall
Outerlimitsoftheeffectivecrosssectionofaspirallyreinforcedortiedreinforcedcompressionmember
builtmonolithicallywithaconcretewallorpiershallbetakennotgreaterthan40mmoutsidethespiral
ortiereinforcement.
6.3.8.3
Equivalentcircularcompressionmemberreplacingothershapes
Inlieuofusingthefullgrossareafordesignofacompressionmemberwithasquare,octagonal,orother
shaped cross section, it shall be permitted to use a circular section with a diameter equal to the least
lateraldimensionoftheactualshape.Grossareaconsidered,requiredpercentageofreinforcement,and
designstrengthshallbebasedonthatcircularsection.
6.3.8.4
Limitsofsection
Foracompressionmemberwithacrosssectionlargerthanrequiredbyconsiderationsofloading,itshall
notless
bepermittedtobasetheminimumreinforcementandstrengthonareducedeffectivearea
627
Part6
StructuralDesign
thanonehalfthetotalarea.Thisprovisionshallnotapplytospecialmomentframesorspecialstructural
wallsdesignedinaccordancewithSec.8.3.
6.3.9
Limitsofreinforcementforcompressionmembers
6.3.9.1
Fornoncompositecompressionmembers,theareaoflongitudinalreinforcement, ,shallbe
not less than 0.01
or more than 0.06 . To avoid practical difficulties in placing and
compactingofconcreteaswellastodeliverductilitytononcompositecompressionmembers,
unlessabsolutely
areaoflongitudinalreinforcement, ,ispreferrednottoexceed0.04
essential.
6.3.9.2
Minimum number of longitudinal bars in compression members shall be 4 for bars within
rectangularorcircularties,3forbarswithintriangularties,and6forbarsenclosedbyspirals
conformingto6.3.9.3.
6.3.9.3
Volumetricspiralreinforcementratio,
0.45
,shallbenotlessthanthevaluegivenby
wherethevalueof
usedinEq.(6.3.6)shallnotexceed700MPa.For
MPa,lapsplicesaccordingto8.1.9.3(e)shallnotbeused.
6.3.6
greaterthan420
6.3.10 Slendernesseffectsincompressionmembers
6.3.10.1
Slendernesseffectsshallbepermittedtobeneglectedinthefollowingcases:
a) forcompressionmembersnotbracedagainstsideswaywhen:
22
6.3.7
b) forcompressionmembersbracedagainstsideswaywhen:
34
12
40
6.3.8
where ispositiveifthecolumnisbentinsinglecurvature,andnegativeifthememberisbentin
doublecurvature.
Compressionmembersmaybeconsideredtobebracedagainstsideswaywhenbracingelementshavea
total stiffness, resisting lateral movement of that story, of at least 12 times the gross stiffness of the
columnswithinthestory.
TheJacksonandMorelandAlignmentCharts(Fig.6.3.10.1),whichallowagraphicaldeterminationof for
acolumnofconstantcrosssectioninamultibayframemaybeusedastheprimarydesignaidtoestimate
theeffectivelengthfactor .
628
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.3.10.1.1 The unsupported length of a compression member, , shall be taken as the clear distance
between floor slabs, beams, or other members capable of providing lateral support in the
direction being considered. Where column capitals or haunches are present,
shall be
measuredtothelowerextremityofthecapitalorhaunchintheplaneconsidered.
6.3.10.1.2 It shall be permitted to take the radius of gyration, , equal to 0.30 times the overall
dimensioninthedirectionstabilityisbeingconsideredforrectangularcompressionmembers
and0.25timesthediameterforcircularcompressionmembers.Forothershapes,itshallbe
permittedtocompute forthegrossconcretesection.
Fig.6.3.10.1Effectivelengthfactorsk.
629
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.3.10.2
When slenderness effects are not neglected as permitted by 6.3.10.1, the design of
compressionmembers,restrainingbeams,andothersupportingmembersshallbebasedon
thefactoredforcesandmomentsfromasecondorderanalysissatisfying6.3.10.3,6.3.10.4,or
6.3.10.5.Thesemembersshallalsosatisfy6.3.10.2.1and6.3.10.2.2.Thedimensionsofeach
membercrosssectionusedintheanalysisshallbewithin10percentofthedimensionsofthe
membersshownonthedesigndrawingsortheanalysisshallberepeated.
6.3.10.2.1 Totalmomentincludingsecondordereffectsincompressionmembers,restrainingbeams,or
otherstructuralmembersshallnotexceed1.4timesthemomentduetofirstordereffects.
6.3.10.2.2 Secondordereffectsshallbeconsideredalongthelengthofcompressionmembers.Itshall
bepermittedtoaccountfortheseeffectsusingthemomentmagnificationprocedureoutlined
in6.3.10.6.
6.3.10.3
Nonlinearsecondorderanalysis
Secondorderanalysisshallconsidermaterialnonlinearity,membercurvatureandlateraldrift,durationof
loads,shrinkageandcreep,andinteractionwiththesupportingfoundation.Theanalysisprocedureshall
have been shown to result in prediction of strength in substantial agreement with results of
comprehensivetestsofcolumnsinstaticallyindeterminatereinforcedconcretestructures.
6.3.10.4
Elasticsecondorderanalysis
Elastic secondorder analysis shall consider section properties determined taking into account the
influenceofaxialloads,thepresenceofcrackedregionsalongthelengthofthemember,andtheeffects
ofloadduration.
6.3.10.4.1 Itshallbepermittedtousethefollowingpropertiesforthemembersinthestructure:
a) Modulusofelasticity......................
b) Momentsofinertia,
from6.1.7.1
Compressionmembers:
0.70
Columns
WallsUncracked
0.70
Cracked
0.35
Flexuralmembers:
Beams
0.35
Flatplatesandflatslabs
0.25
c) Area
1.0
Alternatively, the moments of inertia of compression and flexural members, , shall be

permittedtobecomputedasfollows:
Compressionmembers:
0.80
25
0.5
0.875
(6.3.9)
where
and
shall be determined from the particular load combination under
determinedinthesmallestvalueof . need
consideration,orthecombinationof and
notbetakenlessthan0.35 .
Flexuralmembers:
0.10
630
25
1.2
0.2
0.5
(6.3.10)
Vol.2
Chapter1
For continuous flexural members, shall be permitted to be taken as the average of values
obtainedfromEq.(6.3.10)forthecriticalpositiveandnegativemomentsections. neednot
betakenlessthan0.25 .Thecrosssectionaldimensionsandreinforcementratiousedinthe
aboveformulasshallbewithin10percentofthedimensionsandreinforcementratioshown
onthedesigndrawingsorthestiffnessevaluationshallberepeated.
6.3.10.4.2 When sustained lateral loads are present, for compression members shall be divided by
. The term
shall be taken as the ratio of maximum factored sustained shear
1
within a story to the maximum factored shear in that story associated with the same load
combination,butshallnotbetakengreaterthan1.0.
6.3.10.5
Procedureformomentmagnification
Columnsandstoriesinstructuresshallbedesignatedasnonswayorswaycolumnsorstories.Thedesign
ofcolumnsinnonswayframesorstoriesshallbebasedon6.3.10.6.Thedesignofcolumnsinswayframes
orstoriesshallbebasedon6.3.10.7.
6.3.10.5.1 A column in a structure shall be permitted to be assumed as nonsway if the increase in
column end moments due to secondorder effects does not exceed 5 percent of the first
orderendmoments.
6.3.10.5.2 Astorywithinastructureispermittedtobeassumedasnonswayif:
0.05
(6.3.11)
where and
arethetotalfactoredverticalloadandthehorizontalstoryshear,respectively,inthe
storybeingevaluated,and isthefirstorderrelativelateraldeflectionbetweenthetopandthebottom
.
ofthatstorydueto
6.3.10.6
ProcedureformomentmagnificationNonsway
Compressionmembersshallbedesignedforfactoredaxialforce
fortheeffectsofmembercurvature where
andthefactoredmomentamplified
(6.3.12)
where
1.0
(6.3.13)
and
6.3.10.6.1
6.3.14
shallbetakenas
.
(6.3.15)
or
.
Asanalternative,
.
1
(6.3.16)
shallbepermittedtobecomputedusingthevalueof fromEq.(6.3.9)dividedby
631
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.3.10.6.2 Theterm
shallbetakenastheratioofmaximumfactoredaxialsustainedloadto
maximumfactoredaxialloadassociatedwiththesameloadcombination,butshallnotbe
takengreaterthan1.0.
6.3.10.6.3 Theeffectivelengthfactor, ,shallbepermittedtobetakenas1.0.
6.3.10.6.4 Formemberswithnotransverseloadbetweensupports,
0.6
shallbetakenas
0.4
(6.3.17)
ispositiveifthecolumnisbentinsinglecurvature,andnegativeifthememberisbentin
where
doublecurvature.Formemberswithtransverseloadsbetweensupports,
shallbetakenas1.0.
6.3.10.6.5 Factoredmoment,
,inEq.(6.3.12)shallnotbetakenlessthan
15 0.03
(6.3.18)
abouteachaxisseparately,where0.6and areinmm.Formembersinwhich ,
exceeds ,the
in Eq. (6.3.17) shall either be taken equal to 1.0, or shall be based on the ratio of the
value of
computedendmoments, .
,
6.3.10.7
ProcedureformomentmagnificationSway
Moments
and
attheendsofanindividualcompressionmembershallbetakenas
(6.3.19)
(6.3.20)
where
iscomputedaccordingto6.3.10.7.3or6.3.10.7.4.
6.3.10.7.1 Flexuralmembersshallbedesignedforthetotalmagnifiedendmomentsofthecompression
membersatthejoint.
and given in 6.3.10.4 shall be used for determining the effective length
6.3.10.7.2 The values of
factor anditshallnotbelessthan1.0.
6.3.10.7.3 Themomentmagnifier
shallbecalculatedas
(6.3.21)
If calculated by Eq.(6.3.21)exceeds1.5,
6.3.10.7.4.
shall be calculated using secondorderelastic analysis or
6.3.10.7.4 Alternatively,itshallbepermittedtocalculate
as
(6.3.22)
where isthesummationforallthefactoredverticalloadsinastoryand isthesummationforall

swayresistingcolumnsinastory. iscalculatedusingEq.(6.3.14)with determinedfrom6.3.10.7.2and
from6.3.10.6.1.
6.3.11 Axiallyloadedmemberssupportingslabsystem
Axiallyloadedmemberssupportingaslabsystemincludedwithinthescopeof6.5.1shallbedesignedas
providedinSec.6.3andinaccordancewiththeadditionalrequirementsofSec.6.5.
6.3.12 Columnloadtransmissionthroughfloorsystem
If ofacolumnisgreaterthan1.4timesthatofthefloorsystem,transmissionofloadthroughthefloor
systemshallbeprovidedby6.3.12.1,6.3.12.2,or6.3.12.3.
632
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.3.12.1
Concrete of strength specified for the column shall be placed in the floor at the column
location. Top surface of the column concrete shall extend 2 ft into the slab from face of
column.Columnconcreteshallbewellintegratedwithfloorconcrete,andshallbeplacedin
accordancewithrelevantprovisionsforconstructionjointsofcolumns,wallsetc.withbeams,
slabsetc.Toavoidaccidentalplacingoflowerstrengthconcreteinthecolumns,thestructural
designershallindicateon thedrawingwherethehighandlowstrengthconcretesaretobe
placed.
6.3.12.2
Strength of acolumn through afloor system shallbebased on thelowervalueof concrete

strengthwithverticaldowelsandspiralsasrequired.
6.3.12.3
Forcolumnslaterallysupportedonfoursidesbybeamsofapproximatelyequaldepthorby
slabs,itshallbepermittedtobasestrengthofthecolumnonanassumedconcretestrengthin
the column joint equal to 75 percent of column concrete strength plus 35 percent of floor
concretestrength.Intheapplicationof6.3.12.3,theratioofcolumnconcretestrengthtoslab
concretestrengthshallnotbetakengreaterthan2.5fordesign.
6.3.13 Compositecompressionmembers
6.3.13.1
All members reinforced longitudinally with structural steel shapes, pipe, or tubing with or
withoutlongitudinalbarsshallbeincludedincompositecompressionmembers.
6.3.13.2
Acompositememberstrengthshallbecomputedforthesamelimitingconditionsapplicable
toordinaryreinforcedconcretemembers.
6.3.13.3
Anyaxialloadstrengthassignedtoconcreteofacompositemembershallbetransferredto
theconcretebymembersorbracketsindirectbearingonthecompositememberconcrete.
6.3.13.4
Allaxialloadstrengthnotassignedtoconcreteofacompositemembershallbedevelopedby
directconnectiontothestructuralsteelshape,pipe,ortube.
6.3.13.5
Forevaluationofslendernesseffects,radiusofgyration, ,ofacompositesectionshallbenot
greaterthanthevaluegivenby
(6.3.23)
and,asanalternativetoamoreaccuratecalculation,
or
inEq.(6.3.14)shallbetakeneitherasEq.(6.3.15)
6.3.13.6
(6.3.24)
Concretecoreencasedbystructuralsteel
6.3.13.6.1 Whenacompositememberisastructuralsteelencasedconcretecore,thethicknessofthe
foreachfaceofwidth nor
steelencasementshallbenotlessthan
forcircular
sectionsofdiameter
and
6.3.13.6.2 Whencomputing
bepermittedtobeused.
6.3.13.7
,longitudinalbarslocatedwithintheencasedconcretecoreshall
Spiralreinforcementaroundstructuralsteelcore
A composite member with spirally reinforced concrete around a structural steel core shall conform to
6.3.13.7.1through6.3.13.7.4.
633
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.3.13.7.1 Designyieldstrengthofstructuralsteelcoreshallbethespecifiedminimumyieldstrengthfor
thegradeofstructuralsteelusedbutnottoexceed350MPa.
6.3.13.7.2 Spiralreinforcementshallconformto6.3.9.3.
6.3.13.7.3 Longitudinalbarslocatedwithinthespiralshallbenotlessthan0.01normorethan0.06times
netareaofconcretesection.
6.3.13.7.4 Longitudinalbarslocatedwithinthespiralshallbepermittedtobeusedincomputing
.
6.3.13.8
and
Tiereinforcementaroundstructuralsteelcore
Laterally tied concrete around a structural steel core forming a composite member shall conform to
6.3.13.8.1through6.3.13.8.7.
6.3.13.8.1 Designyieldstrengthofstructuralsteelcoreshallbethespecifiedminimumyieldstrengthfor
thegradeofstructuralsteelusedbutnottoexceed350MPa.
6.3.13.8.2 Lateraltiesshallextendcompletelyaroundthestructuralsteelcore.
6.3.13.8.3 Lateral ties shall have a diameter not less than 0.02 times the greatest side dimension of
compositemember,exceptthattiesshallnotbesmallerthan 10mmandarenotrequired
tobelargerthan16mm.Weldedwirereinforcementofequivalentareashallbepermitted.
6.3.13.8.4 Vertical spacing of lateral ties shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar diameters, 48 tie bar
diameters,or0.5timestheleastsidedimensionofthecompositemember.
6.3.13.8.5 Longitudinalbarslocatedwithinthetiesshallbenotlessthan0.01normorethan0.06times
netareaofconcretesection.
6.3.13.8.6 Alongitudinalbarshallbelocatedateverycornerofarectangularcrosssection,withother
longitudinal bars spaced not farther apart than onehalf the least side dimension of the
compositemember.
6.3.13.8.7 Longitudinalbarslocatedwithinthetiesshallbepermittedtobeusedincomputing
.
and
6.3.14 Bearingstrength
6.3.14.1
Design bearing strength of concrete shall not exceed 0.85

, except when the
supportingsurfaceiswideronallsidesthantheloadedarea,thenthedesignbearingstrength
of theloadedareashallbepermittedtobemultipliedby
(Fig.6.3.14.1).
butbynotmorethan2
634
Vol.2
Chapter1
45 deg
45 deg
Loaded area
A1
Plan
Loaded area A 1
Load
2
1
A 2 is measured on this plane
Elevation
Fig.6.3.14.1DeterminationorareaA2insteppedorslopedsupportsusingfrustum(6.3.14.1).
6.3.15 DesignforFlexure
6.3.15.1
a)
DesignofRectangularBeams
Formula for singly reinforced beams : The following equations which are based on the
simplifiedstressblockof6.3.2.7,areapplicabletosinglyreinforcedrectangularbeams
alongwithTbeamswheretheneutralaxislieswithintheflange.
(6.3.25)
where
(6.3.26)
635
Part6
StructuralDesign
Byestimatinganinitialvalueofa,Eq(6.3.25)canbeusedtodetermineanapproximate
valueof .ThatvaluecanbesubstitutedinEq(6.3.26)togetabetterestimateof and
henceanew /2 canbedeterminedforsubstitutioninEq(6.3.25).
InEq(6.3.25),nominalflexuralstrengthofsection, maybetakenasfactoredmoment
0.9 as a preliminary value.
at section, dividedby strengthreduction factor,
determined from Eq (6.3.25) shall have to give a reinforcement ratio,
not
,where
exceeding
Above,
Additionally, determined from Eq (6.3.25) shall have to satisfy the requirements of

minimumreinforcementformembersinflexureasper6.3.5.
Revised shallbedeterminedfrom6.2.3.2basedoneither
1 or ,where
isthenettensilestraininthereinforcementfurthestfromthecompressionfaceofthe
concrete at the depth . Strain, may be calculated from Eq. (6.3.27) by replacing
by .
0.004by and
b) Design formulae for doublyreinforced beams: A doubly reinforced beam shall be designed
0.85
0.004
(6.3.27)
0.003
onlywhenthereisarestrictionondepthofbeamandmaximumtensilereinforcementallowed
cannotproducetherequiredmoment .
Toestablishifdoublyreinforcedbeamisrequiredthefollowingapproachcanbefollowed:
Determine,
0.85
0.005
0.005
(6.3.28)
(6.3.29)
0.005
is less than required moment with 0.9 , a doubly reinforced beam is needed and
If
thentakingvaluesof and
fromabove,put
and
Then,thefollowingvaluesaretobeevaluated,
(6.3.30)
Assumingcompressionsteelyields(needstobecheckedlater),
Check
0.85
If
636
forcompressionsteelyielding,where
(6.3.31)
(i.e.compressionsteelyields),
Vol.2
Chapter1

find
0.9intheaboveequations.Valueof shall
andfind , andconfirm
be determined from 6.2.3.2 based on either

rectangularbeams.
or
, as stated above for
If compression steel does not yield, is to be found from concrete section force equilibrium
condition,C=Twhichwillresultinaquadraticequationof . needstobecalculatedfromstrain
diagramand revised.

shallbecalculatedfrom forfinding .
6.3.15.2
DesignofTBeams
a) General:
For effective widths and other parameters for T, L or isolated beams, 6.1.13.2 to
6.1.13.4shallapply.
b) FormulaeforTbeams:ATbeamshallbetreatedasarectangularbeamif
where
isobtainedfromEq(6.3.26).InusingEq(6.3.26),if isnotknown,itmaybeinitially
assumedas:
(6.3.32)
If , thus obtained, is greater than the beam shall be considered as a Tbeam, in

whichcasethefollowingformulaeshallbeapplicable:
0.85
(6.3.33)
(6.3.34)
(6.3.35)
and
(6.3.36)
(6.3.37)
Byestimatingan initialvalueof a,Eq(6.3.36)canbeusedtoobtainan approximatevalueof

.Thatvalueof
canbesubstitutedinEq(6.3.37)togetabetterestimateof .
Nettensilestrainrequirementswillbesatisfiedaslongasdepthtoneutralaxis,
Thiswilloccurif
And,
Again,
Where,
0.429 .
(6.3.38)
(6.3.40)
(6.3.39)
637
Part6
StructuralDesign
And
is as defined by Eq. (6.3.27). For ratios between 0.429 and 0.375, equivalent to
betweenthe , fromEq.(6.3.39)and , calculatedbysubstituting fromEq.(6.3.27)with
,thestrengthreductionfactor, mustbeadjustedfor in
0.005inplaceof0.004and for
accordancewith6.2.3.2.
6.4
6.4.1
SHEARANDTORSION
Shearstrength
6.4.1.1
ExceptformembersdesignedinaccordancewithAppendixA,designofcrosssectionssubject
toshearshallbebasedon
6.4.1
where
is the factored shear force at the section considered and
is nominal shear
strengthcomputedby
6.4.2
where isnominalshearstrengthprovidedbyconcretecalculatedinaccordancewith6.4.2,
or 6.4.10, and is nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement calculated in
accordancewith6.4.3,6.4.8.9,or6.4.10.
6.4.1.1.1
Theeffectofanyopeningsinmembersshallbeconsideredindetermining .
6.4.1.1.2
Inevaluating ,wheneverapplicable,effectsofaxialtensiondueto creepandshrinkagein

restrained members shall be considered and effects of inclined flexural compression in
variabledepthmembersshallbepermittedtobeincluded.
6.4.1.2
Except as allowed in 6.4.1.2.1, the values of

MPa.
6.4.1.2.1
greater than 8.3 MPa shall be permitted in computing ,

, and
for
Values of
reinforced concrete beams and concrete joist construction having minimum web
reinforcementinaccordancewith6.4.3.5.3,or6.4.4.5.2.
6.4.1.3
Computationofmaximum atsupportsinaccordancewith6.4.1.3.1shallbepermittedifall
conditions(a),(b),and(c)aresatisfied:
used in this chapter shall not exceed 8.3
a) Support reaction, in direction of applied shear, introduces compression into the end
regionsofmember;
b) Loadsareappliedatornearthetopofthemember;
c) No concentrated load occurs between face of support and location of critical section
definedin6.4.1.3.1.
638
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.4.1.3.1
Sectionslocatedlessthanadistance fromfaceofsupportshallbepermittedtobedesigned
for computedatadistance .
6.4.1.4
Fordeepbeams,bracketsandcorbels,walls,andslabsandfootings,thespecialprovisionsof
6.4.6through6.4.10shallapply.
6.4.2
Contributionofconcretetoshearstrength
6.4.2.1
shall be computed by provisions of 6.4.2.1.1 through 6.4.2.1.3, unless a more detailed

calculation is made in accordance with 6.4.2.2. Throughout this chapter, except in 6.4.5,
shallbeasdefinedin6.1.8.1.
6.4.2.1.1
Formemberssubjecttoshearandflexureonly,
0.17
6.4.2.1.2
6.4.3
Formemberssubjecttoaxialcompression,
0.17 1
Quantity
6.4.4
shallbeexpressedinMPa.
6.4.2.1.3
For members subject to significant axial tension,

detailedanalysisismadeusing6.4.2.2.3.
6.4.2.2
shall be permitted to be computed by the more detailed calculation of 6.4.2.2.1 through

6.4.2.2.3.
6.4.2.2.1
Formemberssubjecttoshearandflexureonly,
0.16
17
butnotgreaterthan0.29
takengreaterthan1.0,where
6.4.2.2.2
shall be taken as zero unless a more
6.4.5
.Whencomputing byEq.(6.4.5),
/
shallnotbe
occurssimultaneouslywith atsectionconsidered.
For members subject to axial compression, it shall be permitted to compute

(6.4.5)with
substitutedfor
and
/
notthenlimitedto1.0,where
However,
6.4.6
shallnotbetakengreaterthan
0.29
6.4.7
shallbeexpressedinMPa.When
computedbyEq.(6.4.7).
6.4.2.2.3
ascomputedbyEq.(6.4.6)isnegative, shallbe
Formemberssubjecttosignificantaxialtension,
0.17 1
butnotlessthanzero,where
using Eq.
6.4.8
isnegativefortension.
shallbeexpressedinMPa.
639
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.4.2.3
For circular members, the area used to compute shall be taken as the product of the
diameterandeffectivedepthoftheconcretesection.Itshallbepermittedtotake as0.80
timesthediameteroftheconcretesection.
6.4.3
Shearstrengthcontributionofreinforcement
6.4.3.1
Typesofshearreinforcement
6.4.3.1.1
Thefollowingtypesofshearreinforcementshallbepermitted:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
6.4.3.2
Stirrupsperpendiculartoaxisofmember;
Weldedwirereinforcementwithwireslocatedperpendiculartoaxisofmember;
Spirals,circularties,orhoops.
Stirrupsmakinganangleof45degreesormorewithlongitudinaltensionreinforcement;
Longitudinalreinforcementwithbentportionmakinganangleof30degreesormore
withthelongitudinaltensionreinforcement;
Combinationsofstirrupsandbentlongitudinalreinforcement.
usedindesignofshearreinforcementshallnotexceed420MPa,exceptthevalue
Thevaluesof and
shallnotexceed550MPaforweldeddeformedwirereinforcement.
6.4.3.3
Stirrupsandotherbarsorwiresusedasshearreinforcementshallextendtoadistance
compressionfiberandshallbedevelopedatbothendsaccordingto8.2.10.
6.4.3.4
Limitsinspacingforshearreinforcement
6.4.3.4.1
fromextreme
Spacing of shear reinforcement placed perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed 2, nor 600
mm.
6.4.3.4.2
The spacing of inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement shall be such that every 45degree
line, extending toward the reaction from middepth of member 2 to longitudinal tension
reinforcement,shallbecrossedbyatleastonelineofshearreinforcement.
6.4.3.4.3
Where exceeds 0.33

onehalf.
, maximum spacings given in 6.4.3.4.1 and6.4.3.4.2shall be reduced by
6.4.3.5
Minimumshearreinforcement
6.4.3.5.1
A minimum area of shear reinforcement, , , shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural
members,where exceeds0.5 ,exceptinmemberssatisfyingoneormoreof(a)through(f):
a) Footingsandsolidslabs;
b) Hollowcoreunitswithtotaluntoppeddepthnotgreaterthan315mmandhollowcore
unitswhere isnotgreaterthan0.5
;
c) Concretejoistconstructiondefinedby6.1.14;
d) Beamswith notgreaterthan250mm;
e) Beamintegralwithslabswith notgreaterthan600mmandnotgreaterthanthelarger
of2.5timesthicknessofflange,and0.5timeswidthofweb;
640
Vol.2
Chapter1
f)
6.4.3.5.2
Beams constructed of steel fiberreinforced, normalweight concrete with

exceeding40MPa, notgreaterthan600mm,and notgreaterthan 0.17
not
.
Minimumshearreinforcementrequirementsof6.4.3.5.1shallbepermittedtobewaivedifshownbytest
and
can be developed when shear reinforcement is omitted. Such tests shall
that required
simulateeffectsofdifferentialsettlement,creep,shrinkage,andtemperaturechange,basedonarealistic
assessmentofsucheffectsoccurringinservice.
6.4.3.5.3
Whereshearreinforcementisrequiredby6.4.3.5.1orforstrengthandwhere6.4.4.1allowstorsiontobe
neglected, ,
shallbecomputedby
,
0.062
(6.4.9)
butshallnotbelessthan 0.35
6.4.3.6
Designofshearreinforcement
6.4.3.6.1
exceeds
, shear reinforcement shall be provided to satisfy Eq. (6.4.1) and
Where
(6.4.2),where shallbecomputedinaccordancewith6.4.3.6.2through6.4.3.6.9.
6.4.3.6.2
Whereshearreinforcementperpendiculartoaxisofmemberisused,
where
6.4.10
istheareaofshearreinforcementwithinspacing .
6.4.3.6.3
Wherecircularties,hoops,orspiralsareusedasshearreinforcement, shallbecomputed
usingEq.(6.4.10)where isdefinedin6.4.2.3forcircularmembers, shallbetakenastwo
times theareaof the barina circulartie,hoop, or spiral at aspacing , is measuredin a
direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement, and
is the specified yield strength of
circulartie,hoop,orspiralreinforcement.
6.4.3.6.4
Whereinclinedstirrupsareusedasshearreinforcement,
6.4.11
where is angle between inclined stirrups and longitudinal axis of the member, and
directionparalleltolongitudinalreinforcement.
6.4.3.6.5
Whereshearreinforcementconsistsofasinglebarorasinglegroupofparallelbars,allbent
upatthesamedistancefromthesupport,
sin
but not greater than 0.25
axisofthemember.
6.4.12
is measured in
, where is angle between bentup reinforcement and longitudinal
641
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.4.3.6.6
Whereshearreinforcementconsistsofaseriesofparallelbentupbarsorgroupsofparallel
bentupbarsatdifferentdistancesfromthesupport, shallbecomputedbyEq.(6.4.11).
6.4.3.6.7
Only the center threefourths of the inclined portion of any longitudinal bent bar shall be
consideredeffectiveforshearreinforcement.
6.4.3.6.8
Wheremorethanonetypeofshearreinforcementisusedtoreinforcethesameportionofa
member, shall be computed as the sum of the values computed for the various types of
shearreinforcement.
6.4.3.6.9
6.4.4
shallnotbetakengreaterthan0.66
Designfortorsion
Design for torsion shall be in accordance with 6.4.4.1 through 6.4.4.6. A beam subjected to torsion is
idealizedasathinwalledtubewiththecoreconcretecrosssectioninasolidbeamneglectedasshownin
Fig.6.4.4.1.
Shear flow (q)
(a) Thin-walled tube
(b) Area enclosed by shear flow path

Fig.6.4.4.1(a)Torsionalresistancebythinwalledtube(6.4.4);(b)Ineffectiveinnerareaenclosedbyshear
flowpath(6.4.4)
6.4.4.1
Thresholdtorsion
Itshallbepermittedtoneglecttorsioneffectsifthefactoredtorsionalmoment
islessthan:
a) Formembersnotsubjectedtoaxialtensionorcompression
0.083
b) Formemberssubjectedtoanaxialcompressiveortensileforce
642
Vol.2
Chapter1
0.083
0.33
Theoverhangingflangewidthusedincomputing
and
formemberscastmonolithicallywithaslab
shallconformto6.5.2.4.Forahollowsection,
shallbeusedinplaceof
in6.4.4.1,andtheouter
boundariesofthesectionshallconformto6.5.2.4.
6.4.4.1.1
For members cast monolithically with a slab and for isolated members with flanges, the
overhangingflangewidthusedtocompute
and
shallconformto6.5.2.4,exceptthat
theoverhangingflangesshallbeneglectedincaseswheretheparameter
calculated
forabeamwithflangesislessthanthatcomputedforthesamebeamignoringtheflanges.
6.4.4.2
Evaluationoffactoredtorsionalmoment
6.4.4.2.1
If the factored torsional moment, , in a member is required to maintain equilibrium (Fig.

6.4.4.2) and exceeds the minimum value given in 6.4.4.1, the member shall be designed to
carry inaccordancewith6.4.4.3through6.4.4.6.
6.4.4.2.2
Inastaticallyindeterminatestructurewherereductionofthetorsionalmomentinamember
canoccurduetoredistributionofinternalforcesuponcracking(Fig.6.4.4.3),themaximum
shallbepermittedtobereducedtothevaluesgivenin(a),or(b)asapplicable:
a) Formembers,atthesectionsdescribedin6.4.4.2.4andnotsubjectedtoaxialtensionor
compression
0.33
b) Formemberssubjectedtoanaxialcompressiveortensileforce
0.33
0.33
In (a), or (b), the correspondingly redistributed bending moments and shears in the adjoining members
shallnotbereplacedwith
in
shallbeusedinthedesignofthesemembers.Forhollowsections,
6.4.4.2.2.
643
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.4.4.2.3
Itshallbepermittedtotakethetorsionalloadingfromaslabasuniformlydistributedalong
themember,ifnotdeterminedbyamoreexactanalysis.
6.4.4.2.4
Sectionslocatedcloserthanadistance fromthefaceofasupportshallbedesignedfornot
lessthan computedatadistance .Ifaconcentratedtorqueoccurswithinthisdistance,
thecriticalsectionfordesignshallbeatthefaceofthesupport.
Designtorque may not be

reduced because moment
redistribution is notpossible
Fig.6.4.4.2Designtorquemaynotbereduced(6.4.4.2.1)
Designtorque for this spandrel

beam may be reduced because
moment redistribution is possible
Fig.6.4.4.3Designtorquemaybereduced(6.4.4.2.2)
6.4.4.3
Torsionalmomentstrength
6.4.4.3.1
Thecrosssectionaldimensionsshallbesuchthat:
a) Forsolidsections
0.66
6.4.13
b) Forhollowsections
.
644
0.66
6.4.14
Vol.2
Chapter1
Superpositionofshearstressesduetoshearandtorsioninhollow sectionsgivenbytheleftsideofthe
inequality 6.4.14 is illustrated by Fig. 6.4.4.4(a) and that in solid sections given by the left side of the
inequality6.4.13isillustratedbyFig.6.4.4.4(b).
6.4.4.3.2
If the wall thickness varies around the perimeter of a hollow section, Eq. (6.4.14) shall be
evaluatedatthelocationwherethelefthandsideofEq.(6.4.14)isamaximum.
6.4.4.3.3
If the wall thickness is less than
, the second term in Eq. (6.4.14) shall be taken as
where is the thickness of the wall of the hollow section at the location where the stresses are being
checked.
6.4.4.3.4
Thevaluesof
6.4.4.3.5
Where
and
usedfordesignoftorsionalreinforcementshallnotexceed420MPa.
exceedsthethresholdtorsion,designofthecrosssectionshallbebasedon
6.4.4.3.6
6.4.15
shallbecomputedby
6.4.16
where
shallbedeterminedbyanalysisexceptthatitshallbepermittedtotake
equalto0.85
;
shallnotbetakensmallerthan30degreesnorlargerthan60degrees.Itshallbepermittedtotake
equalto45degrees.
6.4.4.3.7
Theadditionalareaoflongitudinalreinforcementtoresisttorsion, ,shallnotbelessthan
6.4.17
where shallbethesame valueusedinEq.(6.4.16)and / shallbe takenastheamountcomputed

from Eq. (6.4.16) not modified in accordance with 6.4.4.5.2 or 6.4.4.5.3;
refers to closed transverse
torsionalreinforcement,and referstolongitudinaltorsionalreinforcement.
645
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.4.4.3.8
Reinforcement required for torsion shall be added to that required for the shear, moment,
andaxialforcethatactincombinationwiththetorsion.Themostrestrictiverequirementsfor
reinforcementspacingandplacementshallbemet.
6.4.4.3.9
Itshallbepermittedtoreducetheareaoflongitudinaltorsionreinforcementintheflexural
compression zone by an amount equal to 0.9 , where occurs at the section
simultaneously with , except that the reinforcement provided shall not be less than that
requiredby6.4.4.5.3or6.4.4.6.2.
Torsional stresses
Shear stresses
(a) Hollow section
Shear stresses
Torsional stresses
(b) Solid section
Fig.6.4.4.4Superpositionoftorsionalandshearstresses(6.4.4.3.1)
6.4.4.4
Detailsoftorsionalreinforcement
6.4.4.4.1
Torsionreinforcement shall consist of longitudinal bars or tendons and one or more of the
following:
a) Closedstirrupsorclosedties,perpendiculartotheaxisofthemember;
b) Aclosedcageofweldedwirereinforcementwithtransversewiresperpendiculartothe
axisofthemember;
c) Spiralreinforcement.
6.4.4.4.2
Transversetorsionalreinforcementshallbeanchoredbyoneofthefollowing:
a) A135degreestandardhook,orseismichookasdefinedin8.1.1(d),aroundalongitudinal
bar;
b) Accordingto8.2.10.2a,8.2.10.2b,or8.2.10.2cinregionswheretheconcretesurrounding
theanchorageisrestrainedagainstspallingbyaflangeorslaborsimilarmember.
646
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.4.4.4.3
Longitudinaltorsionreinforcementshallbedevelopedatbothends.
6.4.4.4.4
For hollow sections in torsion, the distance from the centerline of the transverse torsional
reinforcement to the inside face of the wall of the hollow section shall not be less than
.
0.5
6.4.4.5
Minimumtorsionreinforcement
6.4.4.5.1
Aminimumareaoftorsionalreinforcementshallbeprovidedinallregionswhere
thethresholdtorsiongivenin6.4.4.1.
6.4.4.5.2
Where torsional reinforcement is required by 6.4.4.5.1, the minimum area of transverse

closedstirrupsshallbecomputedby
0.062
butshallnotbelessthan 0.35
6.4.4.5.3
6.4.18
.
Where torsional reinforcement is required by 6.4.4.5.1, the minimum total area of

longitudinaltorsionalreinforcement, , ,shallbecomputedby
,
6.4.19
where / shall not be taken less than 0.175 ;

reinforcement,and referstolongitudinalreinforcement.
exceeds
refers to closed transverse torsional
647
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.4.4.6
Spacingoftorsionreinforcement
6.4.4.6.1
Thespacingoftransversetorsionreinforcementshallnotexceedthesmallerof
mm.
6.4.4.6.2
Thelongitudinalreinforcementrequiredfortorsionshallbedistributedaroundtheperimeter
of the closed stirrups with a maximum spacing of 300 mm. The longitudinal bars shall be
insidethestirrups.Thereshallbeatleastonelongitudinalbarineachcornerofthestirrups.
Longitudinalbarsshallhaveadiameteratleast0.042timesthestirrupspacing,butnotless
than10mm.
6.4.4.6.3
Torsionalreinforcementshallbeprovidedforadistanceofatleast
requiredbyanalysis.
6.4.5
8 or300
beyondthepoint
Shearfriction
6.4.5.1
Applicationofprovisionsof6.4.5shallbeforcaseswhereitisappropriatetoconsidershear
transfer across a given plane, such as: an existing or potential crack, an interface between
dissimilarmaterials,oraninterfacebetweentwoconcretescastatdifferenttimes.
6.4.5.2
Designofcrosssectionssubjecttosheartransferasdescribedin6.4.5.1shallbebasedonEq.
(6.4.1),where iscalculatedinaccordancewithprovisionsof6.4.5.3or6.4.5.4.
6.4.5.3
A crack shall be assumed to occur along the shear plane considered. The required area of
shearfrictionreinforcement
acrosstheshearplaneshallbedesignedusingeither6.4.5.4
oranyothersheartransferdesignmethodsthatresultinpredictionofstrengthinsubstantial
agreementwithresultsofcomprehensivetests.
6.4.5.3.1
Provisionsof6.4.5.5through6.4.5.10shallapplyforallcalculationsofsheartransferstrength.
6.4.5.4
Designmethodforshearfriction
6.4.5.4.1
Whereshearfrictionreinforcementisperpendiculartotheshearplane,
by
shallbecomputed
where iscoefficientoffrictioninaccordancewith6.4.5.4.3.
6.4.5.4.2
6.4.20
Where shearfriction reinforcement is inclined to the shear plane,such that the shear force
producestensioninshearfrictionreinforcement(Fig.6.4.5.1), shallbecomputedby
6.4.21
where isanglebetweenshearfrictionreinforcementandshearplane.
6.4.5.4.3
648
Thecoefficientoffriction inEq.(6.4.20)andEq.(6.4.21)shallbetakenas:
Concreteplacedmonolithically
1.4
Concrete placed against hardened concrete with surface

intentionallyroughenedasspecifiedin6.4.5.9
1.0
Concrete placed against hardened concrete not intentionally

roughened
0.6
Concreteanchoredtoasrolledstructuralsteelbyheadedstuds
orbyreinforcingbars(see6.4.5.10)
0.7
Vol.2
Chapter1
where 1.0 for normalweight concrete and 0.75 for all lightweight concrete. Otherwise, shall be
determinedbasedonvolumetricproportionsoflightweightandnormalweightaggregatesasspecifiedin
6.1.8.1,butshallnotexceed0.85.
6.4.5.5
Fornormalweightconcreteeitherplacedmonolithicallyorplacedagainsthardenedconcrete
withsurfaceintentionallyroughenedasspecifiedin6.4.5.9, shallnotexceedthesmallest
of0.2
, 3.3 0.08
and11 ,where isareaofconcretesectionresistingshear
or5.5 . Where
transfer.Forallothercases, shallnotexceedthesmallerof0.2
concretesofdifferentstrengthsarecastagainsteachother,thevalueof usedtoevaluate
shallbethatofthelowerstrengthconcrete.
6.4.5.6
Thevalueof
6.4.5.7
Nettensionacrossshearplaneshallberesistedbyadditionalreinforcement.Permanentnet
,theforce
compressionacrossshearplaneshallbepermittedtobetakenasadditiveto
.
intheshearfrictionreinforcement,whencalculatingrequired
6.4.5.8
Shearfrictionreinforcementshallbeappropriatelyplacedalongtheshearplaneandshallbe
anchoredtodevelop onbothsidesbyembedment,hooks,orweldingtospecialdevices.
6.4.5.9
Forthepurposeof6.4.5,whenconcreteisplacedagainstpreviouslyhardenedconcrete,the
interfaceforsheartransfershallbecleanandfreeoflaitance.If isassumedequalto1.0 ,
interfaceshallberoughenedtoafullamplitudeofapproximately6mm.
6.4.5.10
Whenshearistransferredbetweenasrolledsteelandconcreteusingheadedstudsorwelded
reinforcingbars,steelshallbecleanandfreeofpaint.
usedfordesignofshearfrictionreinforcementshallnotexceed420MPa.
Assumed crack
and shear plane
Applied shear
Vu
Shear friction
reinforcement, Avf
Fig.6.4.5.1Shearfrictionreinforcementatanangletoassumedcrack(6.4.5.4.2).
649
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.4.6
Deepbeams
6.4.6.1
Theprovisionsof6.4.6shallapplytomemberswith notexceedingfourtimestheoverall
memberdepthorregionsofbeamswithconcentratedloadswithintwicethememberdepth
fromthesupportthatareloadedononefaceandsupportedontheoppositefacesothat
compressionstrutscandevelopbetweentheloadsandsupports.Seealso8.2.7.6.
6.4.6.2
Deepbeamsshallbedesignedusingeithernonlinearanalysisaspermittedin6.3.7.1,or
AppendixA.
6.4.6.3
fordeepbeamsshallnotexceed0.83
6.4.6.4
Theareaofshearreinforcementperpendiculartotheflexuraltensionreinforcement,
notbelessthan0.0025
,and shallnotexceedthesmallerof /5 and300mm.
6.4.6.5
,shallnot
Theareaofshearreinforcementparalleltotheflexuraltensionreinforcement,
belessthan0.0015
,and shallnotexceedthesmallerof /5 and300mm.
6.4.6.6
ItshallbepermittedtoprovidereinforcementsatisfyingA.3.3insteadoftheminimum
horizontalandverticalreinforcementspecifiedin6.4.6.4and6.4.6.5.
6.4.7
6.4.7.1
,shall
Provisionsforbracketsandcorbels
Bracketsandcorbels(Fig.6.4.7.1&Fig.6.4.7.2)withashearspantodepthratio less
than2shallbepermittedtobedesignedusingAppendixA.Designshallbepermittedusing
6.4.7.3and6.4.7.4forbracketsandcorbelswith:
notgreaterthan1,and
a)
b) subjecttofactoredhorizontaltensileforce,
,notlargerthan .
Therequirements of 6.4.7.2, 6.4.7.3.2.1, 6.4.7.3.2.2, 6.4.7.5,6.4.7.6,and6.4.7.7shall applyto designof

bracketsandcorbels.Effectivedepth shallbedeterminedatthefaceofthesupport.
Fig.6.4.7.1Structuralactionofacorbel
650
Vol.2
Chapter1
Fig.6.4.7.2NotationusedinSection6.4.7
6.4.7.2
Depthatoutsideedgeofbearingareashallnotbelessthan0.5 .
6.4.7.3
Sectionat faceofsupport shallbedesigned to resist simultaneously
,andafactoredhorizontaltensileforce,
,a factored moment
6.4.7.3.1
Inalldesigncalculationsinaccordancewith6.4.7, shallbetakenequalto0.75.
6.4.7.3.2
Designofshearfrictionreinforcement,
6.4.7.3.2.1Fornormalweightconcrete,
.
and11
,toresist
shallbeinaccordancewith6.4.5.
shallnotexceedthesmallestof0.2
6.4.7.3.2.2Foralllightweightorsandlightweightconcrete,
and 5.5 1.9 /
.
of 0.2 0.07 /
, 3.3
0.08
shallnotbetakengreaterthanthesmaller

6.4.7.3.3
to resist factored moment

Reinforcement
accordancewith6.3.2and6.3.3.
6.4.7.3.4
shallbedeterminedfrom
.
Reinforcement toresistfactoredtensileforce
Factoredtensileforce,
,shallnotbetakenlessthan0.2 unlessprovisionsaremadeto
shallberegardedasaliveloadeveniftensionresultsfromrestraint
avoidtensileforces.
ofcreep,shrinkage,ortemperaturechange.
6.4.7.3.5
Areaofprimarytensionreinforcement
2
6.4.7.4
/3
Totalarea,
6.4.7.6
shallnotbelessthanthelargerof
and
.
,ofclosedstirrupsortiesparalleltoprimarytensionreinforcementshallnotbe
lessthan 0.5
reinforcement.
6.4.7.5
shall be computed in
uniformlywithin 2/3
.Distribute
shallnotbelessthan0.04
adjacent toprimarytension
Atfrontfaceofbracketorcorbel,primarytensionreinforcementshallbeanchoredbyoneof
thefollowing:
a) Byastructuralweldtoatransversebarofatleastequalsize;weldtobedesignedto
develop ofprimarytensionreinforcement;
b) Bybendingprimarytensionreinforcementbacktoformahorizontalloop;or
c) Bysomeothermeansofpositiveanchorage.
6.4.7.7
Bearing area on bracket or corbel shall not project beyond straight portion of primary tension
reinforcement,norprojectbeyondinteriorfaceoftransverseanchorbar(ifoneisprovided).
651
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.4.8
Provisionsforwalls
6.4.8.1
Designofwallsforshearforcesperpendiculartofaceofwallshallbeinaccordancewith
provisionsforslabsin6.4.10.Designforhorizontalinplaneshearforcesinawallshallbein
accordancewith6.4.8.2through6.4.8.9.Alternatively,itshallbepermittedtodesignwalls
withaheightnotexceedingtwotimesthelengthofthewallforhorizontalshearforcesin
accordancewithAppendixAand6.4.8.9.2through6.4.8.9.5.
6.4.8.2
DesignofhorizontalsectionforshearinplaneofwallshallbebasedonEq.(6.4.1)and(6.4.2),
where shallbeinaccordancewith6.4.8.5or6.4.8.6and shallbeinaccordancewith
6.4.8.9.
atanyhorizontalsectionforshearinplaneofwallshallnotbetakengreaterthan
6.4.8.3
0.83
,where isthicknessofwall,and isdefinedin6.4.8.4.
6.4.8.4
Fordesignforhorizontalshearforcesinplaneofwall, shallbetakenequalto0.8 .Alarger

valueof ,equaltothedistancefromextremecompressionfibertocenterofforceofall
reinforcementintension,shallbepermittedtobeusedwhendeterminedbyastrain
compatibilityanalysis.
6.4.8.5
Ifamoredetailedcalculationisnotmadeinaccordancewith6.4.8.6,
shallnotbetaken
forwallssubjecttoaxialcompression,or shallnotbetaken
greaterthan0.17
greaterthanthevaluegivenin6.4.2.2.3forwallssubjecttoaxialtension.
6.4.8.6
shallbepermittedtobethelesserofthevaluescomputedfromEq.(6.4.22)and(6.4.23)
0.27
6.4.22
or
0.05
6.4.23
where istheoveralllengthofthewall,and ispositiveforcompressionandnegativefor

/ /2 isnegative,Eq.(6.4.23)shallnotapply.
tension.If
6.4.8.7
Sectionslocatedclosertowallbasethanadistance /2 oronehalfthewallheight,
whicheverisless,shallbepermittedtobedesignedforthesame asthatcomputedata
distance /2 oronehalftheheight.
6.4.8.8
Where islessthan0.5 ,reinforcementshallbeprovidedinaccordancewith6.4.8.9orin

accordancewithSec.6.6.Where exceeds0.5 ,wallreinforcementforresistingshear
shallbeprovidedinaccordancewith6.4.8.9.
6.4.8.9
Designofshearreinforcementforwalls
6.4.8.9.1
,horizontalshearreinforcementshallbeprovidedtosatisfyEq.(6.4.1)
Where exceeds
and(6.4.2),where shallbecomputedby
6.4.24
where
isareaofhorizontalshearreinforcementwithinspacing ,and isdeterminedinaccordance
with6.4.8.4.Verticalshearreinforcementshallbeprovidedinaccordancewith6.4.8.9.4.
652
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.4.8.9.2
Ratioofhorizontalshearreinforcementareatogrossconcreteareaofverticalsection,
notbelessthan0.0025.
6.4.8.9.3
Spacingofhorizontalshearreinforcementshallnotexceedthesmallestof /5,3 ,and450

mm,where istheoveralllengthofthewall.
6.4.8.9.4
Ratioofverticalshearreinforcementareatogrossconcreteareaofhorizontalsection,
shallnotbelessthanthelargerof
0.0025
0.5 2.5
0.0025
shall
6.4.25
and0.0025,Thevalueof calculatedbyEq.(6.4.25)neednotbegreaterthan requiredby6.4.8.9.1.

InEq.(6.4.25), istheoveralllengthofthewall,and istheoverallheightofthewall.
6.4.8.9.5
6.4.9
Spacingofverticalshearreinforcementshallnotexceedthesmallestof /3,3 ,and450

mm,where istheoveralllengthofthewall.
Transferofmomentstocolumns
6.4.9.1
Whengravityload,wind,earthquake,orotherlateralforcescausetransferofmomentat
connectionsofframingelementstocolumns,theshearresultingfrommomenttransfershall
beconsideredinthedesignoflateralreinforcementinthecolumns.
6.4.9.2
Exceptforconnectionsnotpartofaprimaryseismicloadresistingsystemthatarerestrained
onfoursidesbybeamsorslabsofapproximatelyequaldepth,connectionsshallhavelateral
reinforcementnotlessthanthatrequiredbyEq.(6.4.9)withinthecolumnforadepthnotless
thanthatofthedeepestconnectionofframingelementstothecolumns.SeealsoSec.8.1.13.
6.4.10 Provisionsforfootingsandslabs
6.4.10.1
Theshearstrengthoffootingsandslabsinthevicinityofcolumns,concentratedloads,or
reactionsisgovernedbythemoresevereofthefollowingtwoconditions:
6.4.10.1.1 Beamactionwhereeachcriticalsectiontobeinvestigatedextendsinaplaneacrosstheentire
width.Theslaborfootingshallbedesignedinaccordancewith6.4.1through6.4.3forbeam
action.
6.4.10.1.2 Fortwowayaction,eachofthecriticalsectionstobeinvestigatedshallbelocatedsothatits
perimeter isaminimumbutneednotapproachcloserthan /2 to:
a) Edgesorcornersofcolumns,concentratedloads,orreactionareas;and
b) Changesinslabthicknesssuchasedgesofcapitals,droppanels,orshearcaps.
Fortwowayaction,theslaborfootingshallbedesignedinaccordancewith6.4.10.2through6.4.10.6.
6.4.10.1.3 Forsquareorrectangularcolumns,concentratedloads,orreactionareas,thecriticalsections
withfourstraightsidesshallbepermitted.
6.4.10.2
Fortwowayaction,thedesignofaslaborfootingisbasedonEq.(6.4.1)and(6.4.2). shall
becomputedinaccordancewith6.4.10.2.1,or6.4.10.3.1. shallbecomputedinaccordance
with6.4.10.3.Forslabswithshearheads, shallbeinaccordancewith6.4.10.4.Where
momentistransferredbetweenaslabandacolumn,6.4.10.6shallapply.
6.4.10.2.1 Forslabsandfootings,
a)
0.17 1
shallbethesmallestof(a),(b),and(c):
(6.4.26)
where istheratiooflongsidetoshortsideofthecolumn,concentratedloadorreactionarea;
653
Part6
StructuralDesign
b)
where
(6.4.27)
is40forinteriorcolumns,30foredgecolumns,20forcornercolumns;and
c)
6.4.10.3
0.083
0.33
(6.4.28)
Barsorwiresandsingleormultiplelegstirrupsasshearreinforcementshallbepermittedin
slabs and footings with greater than or equal to 150 mm, but not less than 16 times the
shearreinforcementbardiameter.Shearreinforcementshallbeinaccordancewith6.4.10.3.1
through6.4.10.3.4.
6.4.10.3.1 For computing
, Eq. (6.4.2) shall be used and
shall not be taken greater than
,and shallbecalculatedinaccordancewith6.4.3.InEq.(6.4.10), shallbe

0.17
taken as the crosssectional area of all legs of reinforcement on one peripheral line that is
geometricallysimilartotheperimeterofthecolumnsection.
6.4.10.3.2
6.4.10.3.3 The distance from the column face to thefirstlineof stirrup legsthat surround thecolumn
shall not exceed /2. The spacing between adjacent stirrup legs in the first line of shear
reinforcementshallnotexceed2 measuredinadirectionparalleltothecolumnface.The
spacingbetweensuccessivelinesofshearreinforcementthatsurroundthecolumnshallnot
exceed /2 measured in a direction perpendicular to the column face. In a slabcolumn
connection for which the moment transfer is negligible, the shear reinforcement should be
symmetrical about the centroid of the critical section (Fig. 6.4.10.1). Spacing limits defined
abovearealsoshowninFig.6.4.10.1forinteriorcolumnandinFig.6.4.10.2foredgecolumn.
At edge columns or for interior connections where moment transfer is significant, closed
stirrupsarerecommendedinapatternassymmetricalaspossible.
6.4.10.3.4 Slabshearreinforcementshallsatisfytheanchoragerequirementsof8.2.10andshallengage
thelongitudinalflexuralreinforcementinthedirectionbeingconsidered.
654
Vol.2
Chapter1
Critical section
through slab shear
reinforcement
(first line of
stirrup legs)
Critical section
outside slab shear
reinforcement
d/2
d/2
d/2
Plan
d/2
Slab
d
Elevation
< 2d
< d/2
s < d/2
Column
Fig.6.4.10.1Arrangementofstirrupshearreinforcementaroundinteriorcolumn(6.4.10.3.3).
Critical section outside

slab shear reinforcement
Slab
edge
d/2
B
Critical section through
slab shear reinforcement
(first line of stirrup legs)
d/2
Plan
d
< 2d
< d/2
s < d/2
Elevation
Fig.6.4.10.1Arrangementofstirrupshearreinforcementaroundedgecolumn(6.4.10.3.3).
6.4.10.4
ShearreinforcementconsistingofstructuralsteelIorchannelshapedsections(shearheads)
shallbepermittedinslabs.Theprovisionsof6.4.10.4.1through6.4.10.4.9shallapplywhere
655
Part6
StructuralDesign
shear due to gravity load is transferred at interior column supports. Where moment is
transferredtocolumns,6.4.10.7.3shallapply.
6.4.10.4.1 Eachshearheadshallconsistofsteelshapesfabricatedbyweldingwithafullpenetrationweld
intoidenticalarmsatrightangles.Shearheadarmsshallnotbeinterruptedwithinthecolumn
section.
6.4.10.4.2 Ashearheadshallnotbedeeperthan70timesthewebthicknessofthesteelshape.
6.4.10.4.3 Theendsofeachshearheadarmshallbepermittedtobecutatanglesnotlessthan30
degreeswiththehorizontal,providedtheplasticmomentstrengthoftheremainingtapered
sectionisadequatetoresisttheshearforceattributedtothatarmoftheshearhead.
6.4.10.4.4 Allcompressionflangesofsteelshapesshallbelocatedwithin0.3 ofcompressionsurfaceof
slab.
6.4.10.4.5 Theratio betweentheflexuralstiffnessofeachshearheadarmandthatofthesurrounding
compositecrackedslabsectionofwidth
shallnotbelessthan0.15.
6.4.10.4.6 Plasticmomentstrength,
,requiredforeacharmoftheshearheadshallbecomputedby
6.4.29
where isfortensioncontrolledmembers, isnumberofshearheadarms,and isminimumlengthof

eachshearheadarmrequiredtocomplywithrequirementsof6.4.10.4.7and6.4.10.4.8.
6.4.10.4.7 Thecriticalslabsectionforshearshallbeperpendiculartotheplaneoftheslabandshallcross
/
fromthecolumnfacetothe
eachshearheadarmatthreequartersthedistance
endoftheshearheadarm.Thecriticalsectionshallbelocatedsothatitsperimeter isa
minimum,butneednotbecloserthantheperimeterdefinedin6.4.10.1.2(a).
6.4.10.4.8
shallnotbetakenlargerthan0.33
onthecriticalsectiondefinedin6.4.10.4.7.
Whenshearheadreinforcementisprovided, shallnotbetakengreaterthan0.58
onthecriticalsectiondefinedin6.4.10.1.2(a).
6.4.10.4.9 Momentresistance
takengreaterthan
contributedtoeachslabcolumnstripbyashearheadshallnotbe
6.4.30
where is for tensioncontrolled members, is number of shearhead arms, and is length of each
shearheadarmactuallyprovided.However,
shallnotbetakenlargerthanthesmallestof:
a) 30percentofthetotalfactoredmomentrequiredforeachslabcolumnstrip;
b) Thechangeincolumnstripmomentoverthelength ;
c)
computedbyEq.(6.4.29).
6.4.10.4.10 Whenunbalancedmomentsareconsidered,theshearheadmusthaveadequateanchorageto
transmit
tothecolumn.
6.4.10.5
656
Headedshearstudreinforcement,placedperpendiculartotheplaneofaslaborfooting,shall
bepermittedinslabsandfootingsinaccordancewith6.4.10.5.1through6.4.10.5.4.The
overallheightoftheshearstudassemblyshallnotbelessthanthethicknessofthemember
lessthesumof:(1)theconcretecoveronthetopflexuralreinforcement;(2)theconcrete
coveronthebaserail;and(3)onehalfthebardiameterofthetensionflexuralreinforcement.
Vol.2
Chapter1
Whereflexuraltensionreinforcementisatthebottomofthesection,asinafooting,the
overallheightoftheshearstudassemblyshallnotbelessthanthethicknessofthemember
lessthesumof:(1)theconcretecoveronthebottomflexuralreinforcement;(2)theconcrete
coverontheheadofthestud;and(3)onehalfthebardiameterofthebottomflexural
reinforcement.
6.4.10.5.1 Forthecriticalsectiondefinedin6.4.10.1.2,
shallbecomputedusingEq.(6.4.2),with
and notexceeding0.25
and0.66
,respectively. shallbecalculated
usingEq.(6.4.10)with equaltothecrosssectionalareaofalltheshearreinforcementon
oneperipherallinethatisapproximatelyparalleltotheperimeterofthecolumnsection,
where isthespacingoftheperipherallinesofheadedshearstudreinforcement.
/
shallnotbelessthan0.17
6.4.10.5.2 Thespacingbetweenthecolumnfaceandthefirstperipherallineofshearreinforcementshall
notexceed /2.Thespacingbetweenperipherallinesofshearreinforcement,measuredina
directionperpendiculartoanyfaceofthecolumn,shallbeconstant.Forallslabsandfootings,
thespacingshallbebasedonthevalueoftheshearstressduetofactoredshearforceand
unbalancedmomentatthecriticalsectiondefinedin6.4.10.1.2,andshallnotexceed:
a) 0.75 wheremaximumshearstressesduetofactoredloadsarelessthanorequalto
;and
0.5
b) 0.5 wheremaximumshearstressesduetofactoredloadsaregreaterthan0.5
.
6.4.10.5.3 Thespacingbetweenadjacentshearreinforcementelements,measuredontheperimeterof
thefirstperipherallineofshearreinforcement,shallnotexceed2 .
atthe
6.4.10.5.4 Shearstressduetofactoredshearforceandmomentshallnotexceed0.17
criticalsectionlocated /2 outsidetheoutermostperipherallineofshearreinforcement.
6.4.10.6
Openingsinslabs
If openings in slabs are located at a distance less than 10 times the slab thickness from a concentrated
loadorreactionarea,orwhenopeningsinflatslabsarelocatedwithincolumnstripsasdefinedinSec.6.5,
thecriticalslabsectionsforsheardefinedin6.4.10.1.2and6.4.10.4.7shallbemodifiedasfollows:
657
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.4.10.6.1 Forslabswithoutshearheads,thatpartoftheperimeterofthecriticalsectionthatisenclosed
by straight lines projecting from the centroid of the column, concentrated load, or reaction
area and tangent to the boundaries of the openings shall be considered ineffective (Fig.
6.4.10.3).
6.4.10.6.2 Forslabswithshearheads,theineffectiveportionoftheperimetershallbeonehalfofthat
definedin6.4.10.6.1.
Ineffective
Opening
d (Typ.)
2
(a)
Critical
Section
(b)
Free corner
Regard
as free
edge
(C)
(d)
Fig. 6.4.10.3 Effective perimeter (in dashed lines) to consider effect of openings and free edges
(6.4.10.6.1).
6.4.10.7
Transferofmomentinslabcolumnconnections
6.4.10.7.1 Wheregravityload,wind,earthquake,orotherlateralforcescausetransferofunbalanced
moment
betweenaslabandcolumn,
shallbetransferredbyflexureinaccordance
,shallbeconsideredtobe
with6.5.5.3.Theremainderoftheunbalancedmoment,
transferredbyeccentricityofshearaboutthecentroidofthecriticalsectiondefinedin
6.4.10.1.2where
6.4.31
6.4.10.7.2 Theshearstressresultingfrommomenttransferbyeccentricityofshearshallbeassumedto
varylinearlyaboutthecentroidofthecriticalsectionsdefinedin6.4.10.1.2.Themaximum
shearstressdueto and
shallnotexceed
:
(a)Formemberswithoutshearreinforcement,
where
658
isasdefinedin6.4.10.2.1.
6.4.32
Vol.2
Chapter1
(b)Formemberswithshearreinforcementotherthanshearheads,
6.4.33
where and aredefinedin6.4.10.3.1.Thedesignshalltakeintoaccountthevariationofshearstress
around the column. The shear stress due to factored shear force and moment shall not exceed
atthecriticalsectionlocated /2 outsidetheoutermostlineofstirruplegsthatsurround
0.17
thecolumn.
Themaximumfactoredshearstressmaybeobtainedfromthecombinedshearstressesontheleftandright
facesofthecolumn(Fig.6.4.10.4),
=areaofconcreteofassumedcriticalsection=2
Where,
distancesfromcentroidofcriticalsectiontoleftandrightfaceofsectionrespectively
, =widthanddepthofthecolumn
=propertyofassumedcriticalsectionanalogoustopolarmomentofinertia
Foraninteriorcolumn,thequantity is
))
659
Part6
StructuralDesign
Vu
T
c
Mu
(a)
b1 = c1 + d
Vl
c1
Vr
b 2 = c2 + d c2
cr
cl
cl
cr
(C)
(b)
b1 = c1 +
d
2
c1
Vl
Vr
b 2 = c2 + d c2
cl
cl
cr
(e)
(d)
cr
Fig. 6.4.10.4 Transfer of moment from slab to column: (a) forces resulting from vertical load and
unbalancedmoment;(b)criticalsectionforaninteriorcolumn;(c)shearstressdistributionfor
an interior column; (d) critical section for an edge column; (e) shear stress distribution for an
edgecolumn(6.4.10.7.2).
660
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.4.10.7.3 WhenshearreinforcementconsistingofstructuralsteelIorchannelshapedsections
(shearheads)isprovided,thesumoftheshearstressesduetoverticalloadactingonthe
criticalsectiondefinedby6.4.10.4.7andtheshearstressesresultingfrommoment
transferredbyeccentricityofshearaboutthecentroidofthecriticalsectiondefinedin
6.4.10.1.2(a)and6.4.10.1.3shallnotexceed 0.33
6.5
6.5.1
TWOWAY SLAB SYSTEMS: FLAT PLATES, FLAT SLABS AND EDGE

SUPPORTEDSLABS
Scope
Theprovisionsofthissectionshallapplytoallslabs,solid,ribbedorhollow,spanninginmorethanone
direction,withorwithoutbeamsbetweenthesupports.Flatplateisatermnormallyattributedtoslabs
withoutbeamsandwithoutdroppanels,columncapitals,orbrackets.Ontheotherhand,slabswithout
beams, but with drop panels, column capital or brackets are commonly known as flat slabs. While this
sectioncoverstherequirementsforalltypesofslabs,theprovisionsof6.5.8,AlternativeDesignofTwo
wayEdgeSupportedslabs,maybeusedasanalternativeforslabssupportedonallfouredgesbywalls,
steelbeamsormonolithicconcretebeamshavingatotaldepthnotlessthan3timestheslabthickness.
6.5.1.1
Foraslabsystemsupportedbycolumnsorwalls,dimensions , ,and shallbebasedon

aneffectivesupportareadefinedbytheintersectionofthebottomsurfaceoftheslab,orof
thedroppanelorshearcapifpresent,withthelargestrightcircularcone,rightpyramid,or
taperedwedgewhosesurfacesarelocatedwithinthecolumnandthecapitalorbracketand
areorientednogreaterthan45degreestotheaxisofthecolumn.
6.5.1.2
MinimumthicknessofslabsdesignedinaccordancewithSec.6.5shallbeasrequiredby
6.2.5.3.
6.5.2
General
6.5.2.1
Columnstripisadesignstripwithawidthoneachsideofacolumncenterlineequalto0.25
or0.25 ,whicheverisless.Columnstripincludesbeams,ifany.
6.5.2.2
Middlestripisadesignstripboundedbytwocolumnstrips.
6.5.2.3
Apanelisboundedbycolumn,beam,orwallcenterlinesonallsides.
6.5.2.4
Formonolithicorfullycompositeconstruction,abeamincludesthatportionofslaboneach
sideofthebeamextendingadistanceequaltotheprojectionofthebeamaboveorbelowthe
slab,whicheverisgreater,butnotgreaterthanfourtimestheslabthickness(Fig.6.5.2.1).
6.5.2.5
Whenusedtoreducetheamountofnegativemomentreinforcementoveracolumnor
minimum
requiredslabthickness,adroppanelshall:
a) projectbelowtheslabatleastonequarteroftheadjacentslabthickness;and
b) extendineachdirectionfromthecenterlineofsupportadistancenotlessthanonesixth
thespanlengthmeasuredfromcentertocenterofsupportsinthatdirection.
6.5.2.6
Whenusedtoincreasethecriticalconditionsectionforshearataslabcolumnjoint,ashear
capshallprojectbelowtheslabandextendaminimumhorizontaldistancefromthefaceof
thecolumnthatisequaltothethicknessoftheprojectionbelowtheslabsoffit.
661
Part6
StructuralDesign
hb < 4hf
bw + 2hb < bw + 8hf
hf
hb
hb
bw
bw
Fig.6.5.2.1Portionofslabtobeincludedwiththebeamaccordingto6.5.2.4.
6.5.3
Slabreinforcement
6.5.3.1
Areaofreinforcementineachdirectionfortwowayslabsystemsshallbedeterminedfrom
momentsatcriticalsections,butshallnotbelessthanrequiredbySec.8.1.11.2.
6.5.3.2
Spacingofreinforcementatcriticalsectionsshallnotexceedtwotimestheslabthickness,
exceptforportionsofslabareaofcellularorribbedconstruction.Intheslabovercellular
spaces,reinforcementshallbeprovidedasrequiredbySec.8.1.11.
6.5.3.3
Positivemomentreinforcementperpendiculartoadiscontinuousedgeshallextendtothe
edgeofslabandhaveembedment,straightorhooked,atleast150mminspandrelbeams,
columns,orwalls.
6.5.3.4
Negativemomentreinforcementperpendiculartoadiscontinuousedgeshallbebent,
hooked,orotherwiseanchoredinspandrelbeams,columns,orwalls,andshallbedeveloped
atfaceofsupportaccordingtoprovisionsofSec.8.2.
6.5.3.5
Whereaslabisnotsupportedbyaspandrelbeamorwallatadiscontinuousedge,orwherea
slabcantileversbeyondthesupport,anchorageofreinforcementshallbepermittedwithin
theslab.
6.5.3.6
Atexteriorcornersofslabssupportedbyedgewallsorwhereoneormoreedgebeamshavea
valueof greaterthan1.0,topandbottomslabreinforcementshallbeprovidedatexterior
cornersinaccordancewith6.5.3.6.1through6.5.3.6.4andasshowninFig.6.5.3.1.
662
Vol.2
Chapter1
L Long
(L Long )/5
As top per 6.5.3.6

B-2
As bottom per 6.5.3.6
LShort
(LLong )/5
B-1
Choice-1
L Long
(L Long )/5
Notes:
B-2
As per 6.5.3.6
top and bottom
LShort
(LLong )/5
B-1
Choice-2
1. Applies if B-1or B-2 has f >1.0

2. Max. bar spacing 2h, where h = slab thickness
3. Reinforcement same as maximum +ve reinforcement of the panel
Fig.6.5.3.1Cornerreinforcementinslabs(6.5.3.6)
6.5.3.6.1
Cornerreinforcementinbothtopandbottomofslabshallbesufficienttoresistamomentper
unitofwidthequaltothemaximumpositivemomentperunitwidthintheslabpanel.
663
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.5.3.6.2
Themomentshallbeassumedtobeaboutanaxisperpendiculartothediagonalfromthe
cornerinthetopoftheslabandaboutanaxisparalleltothediagonalfromthecornerinthe
bottomoftheslab.
6.5.3.6.3
Cornerreinforcementshallbeprovidedforadistanceineachdirectionfromthecornerequal
toonefifththelongerspan.
6.5.3.6.4
Cornerreinforcementshallbeplacedparalleltothediagonalinthetopoftheslaband
perpendiculartothediagonalinthebottomoftheslab.Alternatively,reinforcementshallbe
placedintwolayersparalleltothesidesoftheslabinboththetopandbottomoftheslab.
6.5.3.7
Whenadroppanelisusedtoreducetheamountofnegativemomentreinforcementoverthe
columnofaflatslab,thedimensionsofthedroppanelshallbeinaccordancewith6.5.2.5.In
computingrequiredslabreinforcement,thethicknessofthedroppanelbelowtheslabshall
notbeassumedtobegreaterthanonequarterthedistancefromtheedgeofdroppanelto
thefaceofcolumnorcolumncapital.
6.5.3.8
Detailsofreinforcementinslabswithoutbeams
6.5.3.8.1
Inadditiontotheotherrequirementsof6.5.3,reinforcementinslabswithoutbeamsshall
haveminimumextensionsasprescribedinFig.6.5.3.2.
6.5.3.8.2
Whereadjacentspansareunequal,extensionsofnegativemomentreinforcementbeyondthe
faceofsupportasprescribedinFig.6.5.3.2shallbebasedonrequirementsofthelongerspan.
Fig. 6.5.3.2Minimum extensions for reinforcement in slabs without beams. (See 8.2.8.1 for reinforcement
extensionintosupports
664
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.5.3.8.3
Bentbarsshallbepermittedonlywhendepthspanratiopermitsuseofbendsof45degrees
orless.
6.5.3.8.4
Inframeswheretwowayslabsactasprimarymembersresistinglateralloads,lengthsof
reinforcementshallbedeterminedbyanalysisbutshallnotbelessthanthoseprescribedin
Fig.6.5.3.2.
6.5.3.8.5
Allbottombarsorwireswithinthecolumnstrip,ineachdirection,shallbecontinuousor
splicedwithClassBtensionsplicesorwithmechanicalorweldedsplicessatisfyingSec.
8.2.12.3.SplicesshallbelocatedasshowninFig.6.5.3.2.Atleasttwoofthecolumnstrip
bottombarsorwiresineachdirectionshallpasswithintheregionboundedbythe
longitudinalreinforcementofthecolumnandshallbeanchoredatexteriorsupports.
6.5.3.8.6
Inslabswithshearheadsandinliftslabconstructionwhereitisnotpracticaltopassthe
bottombarsrequiredby6.5.3.8.5throughthecolumn,atleasttwobondedbottombarsor
wiresineachdirectionshallpassthroughtheshearheadorliftingcollarasclosetothecolumn
aspracticableandbecontinuousorsplicedwithaClassAsplice.Atexteriorcolumns,the
reinforcementshallbeanchoredattheshearheadorliftingcollar.
6.5.4
Openingsinslabsystems
6.5.4.1
Openingsofanysizeshallbepermittedinslabsystemsifshownbyanalysisthatthedesign
strength is at least equal to the required strength set forth in 6.2.2 and 6.2.3, and that all
serviceabilityconditions,includingthelimitsondeflections,aremet.
6.5.4.2
Asanalternatetoanalysisasrequiredby6.5.4.1,openingsshallbepermittedinslabsystems
withoutbeamsonly,inaccordancewith6.5.4.2.1through6.5.4.2.4.
6.5.4.2.1
Openings of any size shall be permitted in the area common to intersecting middle strips,
provided total amount of reinforcement required for the panel without the opening is
maintained.
6.5.4.2.2
In the area common to intersecting column strips, not more than oneeighth the width of
column strip in either span shall be interrupted by openings. An amount of reinforcement
equivalenttothatinterruptedbyanopeningshallbeaddedonthesidesoftheopening.
6.5.4.2.3
Intheareacommontoonecolumnstripandonemiddlestrip,notmorethanonequarterof
the reinforcement in either strip shall be interrupted by openings. An amount of
reinforcementequivalenttothatinterruptedbyanopeningshallbeaddedonthesidesofthe
opening.
6.5.4.2.4
Shearrequirementsof6.4.10.6shallbesatisfied.
6.5.5
Designprocedures
6.5.5.1
A slab system shall be designed by any procedure satisfying conditions of equilibrium and
geometriccompatibility,ifshownthatthedesignstrengthateverysectionisatleastequalto
the required strength set forth in 6.2.2 and 6.2.3, and that all serviceability conditions,
includinglimitsondeflections,aremet.
6.5.5.1.1
Design of a slab system for gravity loads, including the slab and beams (if any) between
supports and supporting columns or walls forming orthogonal frames, by either the Direct
DesignMethodof6.5.6ortheEquivalentFrameMethodof6.5.7,shallbepermitted.
665
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.5.5.1.2
For lateral loads, analysis of frames shall take into account effects of cracking and
reinforcementonstiffnessofframemembers.
6.5.5.1.3
Combiningtheresultsofthegravityloadanalysiswiththeresultsofthelateralloadanalysis
shallbepermitted.
6.5.5.2
The slab and beams (if any) between supports shall be proportioned for factored moments
prevailingateverysection.
6.5.5.3
When gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral forces cause transfer of moment
between slab and column, a fraction of the unbalanced moment shall be transferred by
flexureinaccordancewith6.5.5.3.2through6.5.5.3.4.
6.5.5.3.1
The fraction of unbalanced moment not transferred by flexure shall be transferred by

eccentricityofshearinaccordancewith6.4.10.7.
6.5.5.3.2
Afractionoftheunbalancedmomentgivenby
shallbeconsideredtobetransferredby
flexure within an effective slab width between lines that are one and onehalf slab or drop
is the
panel thickness 1.5 outside opposite faces of the column or capital, where
factoredmomenttobetransferredand
6.5.5.3.3
6.5.1
Forslabswithunbalancedmomentstransferredbetweentheslabandcolumns,itshallbe
permittedtoincreasethevalueof givenbyEq.(6.5.1)inaccordancewiththefollowing:
a) For edge columns with unbalanced moments about an axis parallel to the edge,
1.0providedthat atanedgesupportdoesnotexceed0.75
,oratacorner
supportdoesnotexceed0.5 .
b) For unbalanced moments at interior supports, and for edge columns with unbalanced
momentsaboutanaxisperpendiculartotheedge,increase toasmuchas1.25times
thevaluefromEq.(6.5.1),butnotmorethan 1.0,providedthat atthesupport
doesnotexceed0.4 .Thenettensilestrain calculatedfortheeffectiveslabwidth
definedin6.5.5.3.2shallnotbelessthan0.010.
Thevalueof
initems(a)and(b)shallbecalculatedinaccordancewith6.4.10.2.1.
6.5.5.3.4
Concentration of reinforcement over the column by closer spacing or additional

reinforcementshallbeusedtoresistmomentontheeffectiveslabwidthdefinedin6.5.5.3.2.
6.5.5.4
Design for transfer of load from slabs to supporting columns or walls through shear and
torsionshallbeinaccordancewithSec.6.4.
6.5.6
6.5.6.1
Directdesignmethod
Limitations
Design of slab systems within the limitations of 6.5.6.1.1 through 6.5.6.1.8 by the direct design method
shallbepermitted.
666
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.5.6.1.1
Thereshallbeaminimumofthreecontinuousspansineachdirection.
6.5.6.1.2
Panelsshallberectangular,witharatiooflongertoshorterspancentertocenterofsupports
withinapanelnotgreaterthan2.
6.5.6.1.3
Successivespanlengthscentertocenterofsupportsineachdirectionshallnotdifferbymore
thanonethirdthelongerspan.
6.5.6.1.4
Offsetofcolumnsbyamaximumof10percentofthespan(indirectionofoffset)fromeither
axisbetweencenterlinesofsuccessivecolumnsshallbepermitted.
6.5.6.1.5
All loads shall be due to gravity only and uniformly distributed over an entire panel. The
unfactoredliveloadshallnotexceedtwotimestheunfactoreddeadload.
6.5.6.1.6
Forapanelwithbeamsbetweensupportsonallsides,Eq.(6.5.2)shallbesatisfiedforbeams
inthetwoperpendiculardirections
0.2
where
and
5.0
6.5.2
arecalculatedinaccordancewithEq.(6.5.3).
6.5.3
6.5.6.1.7
Momentredistributionaspermittedby8.4shallnotbeappliedforslabsystemsdesignedby
thedirectdesignmethod.See6.5.6.7.
6.5.6.1.8
Variationsfromthelimitationsof6.5.6.1shallbepermittedifdemonstratedbyanalysisthat
requirementsof6.5.5.1aresatisfied.
6.5.6.2
Totalfactoredstaticmomentforaspan
6.5.6.2.1
Totalfactoredstaticmoment,
,foraspanshallbedeterminedinastripboundedlaterally
bycenterlineofpaneloneachsideofcenterlineofsupports.
6.5.6.2.2
Absolutesumofpositiveandaveragenegativefactoredmomentsineachdirectionshallnot
belessthan

where
islengthofclearspanindirectionthatmomentsarebeingdetermined.
6.5.4
667
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.5.6.2.3
Wherethetransversespanofpanelsoneithersideofthecenterlineofsupportsvaries,
Eq.(6.5.4)shallbetakenastheaverageofadjacenttransversespans.
6.5.6.2.4
Whenthespanadjacentandparalleltoanedgeisbeingconsidered,thedistancefromedge
topanelcenterlineshallbesubstitutedfor inEq.(6.5.4).
6.5.6.2.5
Clearspan shallextendfromfacetofaceofcolumns,capitals,brackets,orwalls.Valueof
usedinEq.(6.5.4)shallnotbelessthan0.65 .Circularorregularpolygonshapedsupports
shallbetreatedassquaresupportswiththesamearea.
6.5.6.3
Negativeandpositivefactoredmoments
6.5.6.3.1
Negative factored moments shall be located at face of rectangular supports. Circular or

regularpolygonshapedsupportsshallbetreatedassquaresupportswiththesamearea.
6.5.6.3.2
Inaninteriorspan,totalstaticmoment,
6.5.6.3.3
in
,shallbedistributedasfollows:
Negativefactoredmoment
0.65
Positivefactoredmoment
0.35
Inanendspan,totalfactoredstaticmoment,
below:
,shallbedistributedasinTable6.5.6.1
Table6.5.6.1DistributionofTotalFactoredStaticMoment,
inanEndSpan
(1)
Exterior
edge
unrestrained
(2)
Slabwith
beams
betweenall
supports
Interiornegative
factoredmoment
Positivefactored
moment
Exteriornegative
factoredmoment
0.75
0.70
0.63
0.57
0.52
0.50
0.35
0.16
0.26
0.30
0.65
(3)
(4)
Slabwithoutbeamsbetween
interiorsupports
Withoutedge
Withedge
beam
beam
0.70
0.70
(5)
Exterioredge
fullyrestrained
0.65
6.5.6.3.4
Negativemomentsectionsshallbedesignedtoresistthelargerofthetwointeriornegative
factoredmomentsdeterminedforspansframingintoacommonsupportunlessananalysisis
made to distribute the unbalanced moment in accordance with stiffnesses of adjoining
elements.
6.5.6.3.5
Edgebeamsoredgesofslabshallbeproportionedtoresistintorsiontheirshareofexterior
negativefactoredmoments.
6.5.6.3.6
Thegravityloadmomenttobetransferredbetweenslabandedgecolumninaccordancewith
6.5.5.3.1shallbe0.3 .
6.5.6.4
Factoredmomentsincolumnstrips
6.5.6.4.1
Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the portions in percent of interior negative
factoredmomentsasshowninTable6.5.6.2below:
Table6.5.6.2PortionsofInteriorNegativeMomentstobeResistedbyColumnStrip
668
Vol.2
Chapter1
/
/
/
0.5
1.0
2.0
0
75
75
75
1
90
75
45
Note:Linearinterpolationsshallbemadebetweenvaluesshown.
Interpolationfunctionfor%ofMoment=75 30
1
6.5.6.4.2
Columnstripsshallbeproportionedtoresisttheportionsinpercentofexteriornegative
factoredmomentsasshowninTable6.5.6.3:
Table6.5.6.3PortionsofExteriorNegativeMomentstobeResistedbyColumnStrip
/
/
=0
2.5
=0
2.5
0
/
1
0.5
100
075
100
090
1.0
100
075
100
075
2.0
100
075
100
045
Linearinterpolationsshallbemadebetweenvaluesshown,where
calculatedinEq.(6.5.6).
iscalculatedinEq.(6.5.5)and
is
6.5.5
0.63
6.5.6
Theconstant forTorLsectionsshallbepermittedtobeevaluatedbydividingthesectionintoseparate
rectangularparts,asdefinedin6.5.2.4,andsummingthevaluesof foreachpart.
Interpolationfunctionfor%ofMoment=100
10
12
6.5.6.4.3
Wheresupportsconsistofcolumnsorwallsextendingforadistanceequaltoorgreaterthan
0.75
used to compute
, negative moments shall be considered to be uniformly
distributedacross .
6.5.6.4.4
Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the portions in percent of positive factored
momentsshowninTable6.5.6.4:
Table6.5.6.4PortionsofPositiveMomenttobeResistedbyColumnStrip
/
/
/
0.5
1.0
2.0
0
60
60
60
1
90
75
45
Note:Linearinterpolationsshallbemadebetweenvaluesshown.
1.5
Interpolationfunctionfor%ofMoment=60 30
669
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.5.6.4.5
For slabs with beams between supports, the slab portion of column strips shall be
proportionedtoresistthatportionofcolumnstripmomentsnotresistedbybeams.
6.5.6.5
Factoredmomentsinbeams
6.5.6.5.1
Beamsbetweensupportsshallbeproportionedtoresist85percentofcolumnstripmoments
if
/ isequaltoorgreaterthan1.0.
6.5.6.5.2
/ between1.0andzero,proportionofcolumnstripmomentsresistedby
Forvaluesof
beamsshallbeobtainedbylinearinterpolationbetween85andzeropercent.
6.5.6.5.3
In addition to moments calculated for uniform loads according to 6.5.6.2.2, 6.5.6.5.1, and
6.5.6.5.2,beamsshallbeproportionedtoresistallmomentscausedbyconcentratedorlinear
loadsapplieddirectlytobeams,includingweightofprojectingbeamstemaboveorbelowthe
slab.
6.5.6.6
Factoredmomentsinmiddlestrips
6.5.6.6.1
Thatportionofnegativeandpositivefactoredmomentsnotresistedbycolumnstripsshallbe
proportionatelyassignedtocorrespondinghalfmiddlestrips.
6.5.6.6.2
Eachmiddlestripshallbeproportionedtoresistthesumofthemomentsassignedtoitstwo
halfmiddlestrips.
6.5.6.6.3
Amiddlestripadjacenttoandparallelwithawallsupportededgeshallbeproportionedto
resist twice the moment assigned to the half middle strip corresponding to the first row of
interiorsupports.
6.5.6.7
Modificationoffactoredmoments
Modificationofnegativeandpositivefactoredmomentsby10percentshallbepermittedprovidedthe
,inthedirectionconsideredisnotlessthanthatrequiredbyEq.
totalstaticmomentforapanel,
(6.5.4).
6.5.6.8
Factoredshearinslabsystemswithbeams
6.5.6.8.1
/ equaltoorgreaterthan1.0shallbeproportionedtoresistshearcaused
Beamswith
by factored loads on tributary areas which are bounded by 45degree lines drawn from the
cornersofthepanelsandthecenterlinesoftheadjacentpanelsparalleltothelongsides(Fig.
6.5.6.1).
6.5.6.8.2
In proportioning beams with

assumingbeamscarrynoloadat
6.5.6.8.3
In addition to shears calculated according to 6.5.6.8.1 and 6.5.6.8.2, beams shall be

proportionedtoresistshearscausedbyfactoredloadsapplieddirectlyonbeams.
6.5.6.8.4
Computationofslabshearstrengthontheassumptionthatloadisdistributedtosupporting
beamsinaccordancewith6.5.6.8.1or6.5.6.8.2shallbepermitted.Resistancetototalshear
occurringonapanelshallbeprovided.
6.5.6.8.5
ShearstrengthshallsatisfytherequirementsofSec.6.4.
670
/ less than 1.0 to resist shear, linear interpolation,

0,shallbepermitted.
Vol.2
Chapter1
Fig.6.5.6.1Tributaryareaforshearonaninteriorbeam.
6.5.6.9
Factoredmomentsincolumnsandwalls
6.5.6.9.1
Columnsandwallsbuiltintegrallywithaslabsystemshallresistmomentscausedbyfactored
loadsontheslabsystem.
6.5.6.9.2
Ataninteriorsupport,supportingelementsaboveandbelowtheslabshallresistthefactored
moment specified by Eq. (6.5.7) in direct proportion to their stiffnesses unless a general
analysisismade.
0.07
Where
6.5.7
0.5
6.5.7
, ,and
refertoshorterspan.
Equivalentframemethod
6.5.7.1
Designofslabsystemsbytheequivalentframemethodshallbebasedonassumptionsgiven
in 6.5.7.2 through 6.5.7.6, and all sections of slabs and supporting members shall be
proportionedformomentsandshearsthusobtained.
6.5.7.1.1
Where metal column capitals are used, it shall be permitted to take account of their
contributionstostiffnessandresistancetomomentandtoshear.
6.5.7.1.2
Itshallbepermittedtoneglectthechangeinlengthofcolumnsandslabsduetodirectstress,
anddeflectionsduetoshear.
6.5.7.2
Equivalentframe
6.5.7.2.1
Thestructureshallbeconsideredtobemadeupofequivalentframesoncolumnlinestaken
longitudinallyandtransverselythroughthebuilding(Fig.6.5.7.1).
671
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fig.6.5.7.1Definitionsofequivalentframe.
6.5.7.2.2
Each frame shall consist of a row of columns or supports and slabbeam strips, bounded
laterallybythecenterlineofpaneloneachsideofthecenterlineofcolumnsorsupports.
6.5.7.2.3
Columns or supports shall be assumed to be attached to slabbeam strips by torsional

members(see6.5.7.5)transversetothedirectionofthespanforwhichmomentsarebeing
determinedandextendingtoboundinglateralpanelcenterlinesoneachsideofacolumn.
6.5.7.2.4
Framesadjacentandparalleltoanedgeshallbeboundedbythatedgeandthecenterlineof
adjacentpanel.
6.5.7.2.5
Analysisofeachequivalentframeinitsentiretyshallbepermitted.Alternatively,forgravity
loading, a separate analysis of each floor or roof with far ends of columns considered fixed
shallbepermitted.
6.5.7.2.6
Where slabbeams are analyzed separately, determination of moment at a given support

assuming that the slabbeam is fixed at any support two panels distant therefrom, shall be
permitted,providedtheslabcontinuesbeyondthatpoint.
6.5.7.3
Slabbeams
6.5.7.3.1
Determinationofthemomentofinertiaofslabbeamsatanycrosssectionoutsideofjointsor
columncapitalsusingthegrossareaofconcreteshallbepermitted.
6.5.7.3.2
Variationinmomentofinertiaalongaxisofslabbeamsshallbetakenintoaccount.
6.5.7.3.3
Momentofinertiaofslabbeamsfromcenterofcolumntofaceofcolumn,bracket,orcapital
shallbeassumedequaltothemomentofinertiaoftheslabbeamatfaceofcolumn,bracket,
/
,where and aremeasuredtransverseto
orcapitaldividedbythequantity 1
thedirectionofthespanforwhichmomentsarebeingdetermined.
672
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.5.7.4
Columns
6.5.7.4.1
Determinationofthemomentofinertiaofcolumnsatanycrosssectionoutsideofjointsor
columncapitalsusingthegrossareaofconcreteshallbepermitted.
6.5.7.4.2
Variationinmomentofinertiaalongaxisofcolumnsshallbetakenintoaccount(Fig.6.5.7.2).
6.5.7.4.3
Moment of inertia of columns from top to bottom of the slabbeam at a joint shall be
assumedtobeinfinite.
6.5.7.5
Torsionalmembers
6.5.7.5.1
Torsional members (see 6.5.7.2.3) shall be assumed to have a constant cross section
throughouttheirlengthconsistingofthelargestof(a),(b),and(c):
a) A portion of slab having awidth equal to that of the column, bracket, or capital in the
directionofthespanforwhichmomentsarebeingdetermined;
b) For monolithic or fully composite construction, the portion of slab specified in (a) plus
thatpartofthetransversebeamaboveandbelowtheslab;
c) Thetransversebeamasdefinedin6.5.2.4.
6.5.7.5.2
Wherebeamsframeintocolumnsinthedirectionofthespanforwhichmomentsarebeing
determined,thetorsionalstiffnessshallbemultipliedbytheratioofthemomentofinertiaof
theslabwithsuchabeamtothemomentofinertiaoftheslabwithoutsuchabeam.
Fig.6.5.7.2Equivalent column (column plus torsionalmembers).
6.5.7.5.3
Stiffness ofthetorsionalmembersshallbecalculatedbythefollowingexpression:
6.5.8
where and relatetothetransversespanoneachsideofcolumn.

6.5.7.6
Arrangementofliveload
6.5.7.6.1
Whentheloadingpatternisknown,theequivalentframeshallbeanalyzedforthatload.
6.5.7.6.2
When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed threequarters of the
unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that all panels will be loaded
673
Part6
StructuralDesign
simultaneously,itshallbepermittedtoassumethatmaximumfactoredmomentsoccuratall
sectionswithfullfactoredliveloadonentireslabsystem.
6.5.7.6.3
Forloadingconditionsotherthanthosedefinedin6.5.7.6.2,itshallbepermittedtoassume
thatmaximumpositivefactoredmomentnearmidspanofapaneloccurswiththreequarters
ofthefullfactoredliveloadonthepanelandonalternatepanels;anditshallbepermittedto
assumethatmaximumnegativefactoredmomentintheslabatasupportoccurswiththree
quartersofthefullfactoredliveloadonadjacentpanelsonly.
6.5.7.6.4
Factoredmomentsshallbetakennotlessthanthoseoccurringwithfullfactoredliveloadon
allpanels.
6.5.7.7
Factoredmoments
6.5.7.7.1
At interior supports, the critical section for negative factored moment (in both column and
middlestrips)shallbetakenatfaceofrectilinearsupports,butnotfartherawaythan0.175
fromthecenterofacolumn.
6.5.7.7.2
At exterior supports with brackets or capitals, the critical section for negative factored
moment in the span perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at a distance from face of
supportingelementnotgreaterthanonehalftheprojectionofbracketorcapitalbeyondface
ofsupportingelement.
6.5.7.7.3
Circularorregularpolygonshapedsupportsshallbetreatedassquaresupportswiththesame
areaforlocationofcriticalsectionfornegativedesignmoment.
6.5.7.7.4
Where slab systems within limitations of 6.5.6.1 are analyzed by the equivalent frame
method,itshallbepermittedtoreducetheresultingcomputedmomentsinsuchproportion
thattheabsolutesumofthepositiveandaveragenegativemomentsusedindesignneednot
exceedthevalueobtainedfromEq.(6.5.4).
6.5.7.7.5
Distribution of moments at critical sections across the slabbeam strip of each frame to
column strips, beams, and middle strips as provided in 6.5.6.4, 6.5.6.5, and 6.5.6.6 shall be
permittediftherequirementof6.5.6.1.6issatisfied.
6.5.8
ALTERNATIVEDESIGNOFTWOWAYEDGESUPPORTEDSLABS
6.5.8.1
Notation
The notations provided below are applicable for Section 6.5.8 only. Also see Section 6.1.1.1 for other
notations.
674
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Momentcoefficients
Lengthofclearspaninshortdirection
Lengthofclearspaninlongdirection
Momentintheshortdirection
Momentinthelongdirection
Uniformload
Lengthofclearspanindirectionthatmomentarebeingdetermined
Lengthofclearspantransverseto
Ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
laterallybycentrelineofadjacentpanels(ifany)oneachsideofthebeam.See6.4.2.1
= inthedirectionof .
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.5.8.2
ScopeandLimitations
6.5.8.2.1
Theprovisionsofthissectionmaybeusedasalternativetothoseof6.5.1through6.5.7for
twoway slabs supported on all four edges by walls, steel beams or monolithic concrete
beamshavingatotaldepthnotlessthan3timestheslabthickness.
6.5.8.2.2
Panelsshallberectangularwitharatiooflongertoshorterspancentretocentreofsupports
notgreaterthan2.
6.5.8.2.3
Thevalueof
6.5.8.3
AnalysisbytheCoefficientMethod
6.5.8.3.1
The negative moments and dead load and live load positive moments in the two directions
shallbecomputedfromTables6.5.8.1,6.5.8.2and6.5.8.3respectively.Shearintheslaband
loadsonthesupportingbeamsshallbecomputedfromTable6.5.8.4.
6.5.8.4
ShearonSupportingBeam
/ shallbegreaterthanorequalto1.
Theshearrequirementsprovidedin6.5.6.8shallbesatisfied.
6.5.8.5
Deflection
Thicknessofslabssupportedonwallsorstiffbeamsonallsidesshallsatisfytherequirementsof6.2.5.3.
Table6.5.8.1CoefficientsforNegativeMomentsinSlabs
,
where =totaluniformdeadplusliveloadperunitarea
Ratio
Case1 Case2 Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7 Case8
1.00
,
,
0.95
,
,
0.90
,
,
0.85
,
,
0.80
,
,
0.75
,
0.045
0.045
0.050
0.041
0.055
0.037
0.060
0.031
0.065
0.027
0.069
0.022
0.076
0.072
0.070
0.065
0.061
0.056
0.050
0.050
0.055
0.045
0.060
0.040
0.066
0.034
0.071
0.029
0.076
0.024
0.075 0.071
0.079 0.075
0.080 0.079
0.082 0.083
0.083 0.086
0.085 0.088
0.071
0.067
0.062
0.057
0.051
0.044
Case9
0.033
0.061
0.038
0.056
0.043
0.052
0.049
0.046
0.055
0.041
0.061
0.036
0.061
0.033
0.065
0.029
0.068
0.025
0.072
0.021
0.075
0.017
0.078
0.014
675
Part6
StructuralDesign
0.074
0.081 0.086 0.091
0.068
0.081
0.017 0.050 0.019

0.038 0.029
0.011
,
0.077
0.085
0.087
0.093
0.074
0.083
,
0.65
0.014 0.043 0.015

0.031 0.024
0.008
,
0.081
0.089
0.088
0.095
0.080
0.085
,
0.60
0.010
0.035
0.011
0.024
0.018
0.006
,
0.084
0.092 0.089 0.096
0.085
0.086
,
0.55
0.007 0.028 0.008

0.019 0.014
0.005
,
0.094 0.090 0.097
0.089
0.088
0.086
,
0.50
0.014 0.010
0.003
0.006 0.022 0.006
,
Acrosshatchededgeindicatesthattheslabcontinuesacross,orisfixedatthesupport;
anunmarkededgeindicatesasupportatwhichtorsionalresistanceisnegligible.
,
0.70
Table6.5.8.2CoefficientsforDeadLoadPositiveMomentsinSlabs
,
,
,
where =uniformdeadloadperunitarea
Ratio
1.00
,
,
0.95
,
,
0.90
,
,
0.85
,
,
0.80
,
,
0.75
,
,
0.70
,
,
676
Case1 Case2 Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7
0.036
0.036
0.040
0.033
0.045
0.029
0.050
0.026
0.056
0.023
0.061
0.019
0.068
0.016
Case8
0.018
0.018
0.020
0.016
0.022
0.014
0.024
0.012
0.026
0.011
0.028
0.009
0.030
0.007
Case9
0.018
0.027
0.021
0.025
0.025
0.024
0.029
0.022
0.034
0.020
0.040
0.018
0.046
0.016
0.027
0.027
0.030
0.024
0.033
0.022
0.036
0.019
0.039
0.016
0.043
0.013
0.046
0.011
0.027
0.018
0.028
0.015
0.029
0.013
0.031
0.011
0.032
0.009
0.033
0.007
0.035
0.005
0.033
0.027
0.036
0.024
0.039
0.021
0.042
0.017
0.045
0.015
0.048
0.012
0.051
0.009
0.027
0.033
0.031
0.031
0.035
0.028
0.040
0.025
0.045
0.022
0.051
0.020
0.058
0.017
0.020
0.023
0.022
0.021
0.025
0.019
0.029
0.017
0.032
0.015
0.036
0.013
0.040
0.011
0.023
0.020
0.024
0.017
0.026
0.015
0.028
0.013
0.029
0.010
0.031
0.007
0.033
0.006
Vol.2
Chapter1
0.65
,
,
0.60
,
,
0.55
,
,
0.50
,
0.074 0.032 0.054 0.050 0.036 0.054 0.065 0.044

0.034
0.013 0.006 0.014 0.009 0.004 0.007 0.014 0.009

0.005
0.036
0.081 0.034 0.062 0.053 0.037 0.056 0.073 0.048
0.010 0.004 0.011 0.007 0.003 0.006 0.012 0.007

0.004
0.088 0.035 0.071 0.056 0.038 0.058 0.081 0.052
0.037
0.008 0.003 0.009 0.005 0.002 0.004 0.009 0.005

0.003
0.095 0.037 0.080 0.059 0.039 0.061 0.089 0.056
0.038
0.006 0.002 0.007 0.004 0.001 0.003 0.007 0.004

0.002
,
Table6.5.8.3CoefficientsforLiveLoadPositiveMomentsinSlabs
wherew=uniformliveloadperunitarea
Ratio
Case1 Case2 Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7 Case8
,
1.00
,
,
0.95
,
,
0.90
,
,
0.85
,
,
0.80
,
,
0.75
,
,
0.70
,
,
0.65
,
0.036
0.036
0.040
0.033
0.045
0.029
0.050
0.026
0.056
0.023
0.061
0.019
0.068
0.016
0.074
0.013
Case9
0.027
0.027
0.030
0.025
0.034
0.022
0.037
0.019
0.041
0.017
0.045
0.014
0.049
0.012
0.053
0.010
0.027
0.032
0.031
0.029
0.035
0.027
0.040
0.024
0.045
0.022
0.051
0.019
0.057
0.016
0.064
0.014
0.032
0.032
0.035
0.029
0.039
0.026
0.043
0.023
0.048
0.020
0.052
0.016
0.057
0.014
0.062
0.011
0.032
0.027
0.034
0.024
0.037
0.021
0.041
0.019
0.044
0.016
0.047
0.013
0.051
0.011
0.055
0.009
0.035
0.032
0.038
0.029
0.042
0.025
0.046
0.022
0.051
0.019
0.055
0.016
0.060
0.013
0.064
0.010
0.032
0.035
0.036
0.032
0.040
0.029
0.045
0.026
0.051
0.023
0.056
0.020
0.063
0.017
0.070
0.014
0.028
0.030
0.031
0.027
0.035
0.024
0.040
0.022
0.044
0.019
0.049
0.016
0.054
0.014
0.059
0.011
0.030
0.028
0.032
0.025
0.036
0.022
0.039
0.020
0.042
0.017
0.046
0.013
0.050
0.011
0.054
0.009
677
Part6
StructuralDesign
,
0.60
,
,
0.55
,
,
0.50
,
0.081 0.058 0.071 0.067 0.059 0.068 0.077

0.065
0.059
0.010 0.007 0.011 0.009 0.007 0.008 0.011 0.009

0.007
0.088 0.062 0.080 0.072 0.063 0.073 0.085
0.070
00.063
0.008 0.006 0.009 0.007 0.005 0.006 0.009 0.007

0.006
0.095 0.066 0.088 0.077 0.067 0.078 0.092
0.076
0.067
0.006 0.004 0.007 0.005 0.004 0.005 0.007 0.005

0.004
6.5.8.6
Reinforcement
6.5.8.6.1
Areaofreinforcementineachdirectionshallbedeterminedfrommomentsatcriticalsections
butshallnotbelessthanthatrequiredby8.1.11.
6.5.8.6.2
Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall not exceed two times the slab thickness,
exceptforportionsofslabareathatmaybeofcellularorribbedconstruction.Intheslabover
cellularspaces,reinforcementshallbeprovidedasrequiredby8.1.11.
6.5.8.6.3
Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall extend to the

edgeofslab andhaveembedment,straightorhooked,atleast150mminspandrelbeams,
columns,orwalls.
Table6.5.8.4RatioofTotalLoadwin and Directions(
Supports
Ratio
678
and
)forShearinSlabandLoadon
Case1 Case2 Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7
Case8
Case9
1.00
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.17
0.83
0.50
0.50
0.83
0.17
0.71
0.29
0.29
0.71
0.33
0.67
0.67
0.33
0.95
0.55
0.45
0.55
0.45
0.20
0.80
0.55
0.45
0.86
0.14
0.75
0.25
0.33
0.67
0.38
0.62
0.71
0.29
0.90
0.60
0.40
0.60
0.40
0.23
0.77
0.60
0.40
0.88
0.12
0.79
0.21
0.38
0.62
0.43
0.57
0.75
0.25
0.85
0.66
0.34
0.66
0.34
0.28
0.72
0.66
0.34
0.90
0.10
0.83
0.17
0.43
0.57
0.49
0.51
0.79
0.21
Vol.2
Chapter1
0.80
0.71
0.29
0.71
0.29
0.33
0.67
0.71
0.29
0.92
0.08
0.86
0.14
0.49
0.51
0.55
0.45
0.83
0.17
0.75
0.76
0.24
0.76
0.24
0.39
0.61
0.76
0.24
0.94
0.06
0.88
0.12
0.56
0.44
0.61
0.39
0.86
0.14
0.70
0.81
0.19
0.81
0.19
0.45
0.55
0.81
0.19
0.95
0.05
0.91
0.09
0.62
0.38
0.68
0.32
0.89
0.11
0.65
0.85
0.15
0.85
0.15
0.53
0.47
0.85
0.15
0.96
0.04
0.93
0.07
0.69
0.31
0.74
0.26
0.92
0.08
0.60
0.89
0.11
0.89
0.11
0.61
0.39
0.89
0.11
0.97
0.03
0.95
0.05
0.76
0.24
0.80
0.20
0.94
0.06
0.55
0.92
0.08
0.92
0.08
0.69
0.31
0.92
0.08
0.98
0.02
0.96
0.04
0.81
0.19
0.85
0.15
0.95
0.05
0.89
0.97
0.94 0.94 0.76 0.94 0.99 0.97 0.86
0.50
0.11
0.03
0.06 0.06 0.24 0.06 0.01 0.03 0.14
6.5.8.6.4
Negative moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall be bent,

hooked,orotherwiseanchored,inspandrelbeams,columns,orwalls,andshallbedeveloped
atfaceofsupportaccordingtoprovisionsofSec8.2.
6.5.8.6.5
CornerReinforcement
a) Cornerreinforcementshallbeprovidedatexteriorcornersinbothbottomandtopofthe
slab,foradistanceineachdirectionfromthecornerequaltoonefifththelongerspanof
thecornerpanelasperprovisionsof6.5.3.6.
6.5.9
6.5.9.1
RIBBEDANDHOLLOWSLABS
General
Theprovisionsofthissectionshallapplytoslabsconstructedinoneofthewaysdescribedbelow:
a) Asaseriesofconcreteribswithtoppingcastonformswhichmayberemovedafterthe
concretehasset;
b) Asaseriesofconcreteribsbetweenprecastblockswhichremainpartofthecompleted
structure; the top of the ribs may be connected by a topping of concrete of the same
strengthasthatusedintheribs;and
c) Slabswithacontinuoustopandbottomfacebutcontainingvoidsofrectangular,ovalor
othershape.
679
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.5.9.2
AnalysisandDesign
Anymethodofanalysiswhichsatisfiesequilibriumandcompatibilityrequirementsmaybeusedforribbed
andhollowslabs.Approximatemomentsandshearsincontinuousonewayribbedorhollowslabsmaybe
obtainedfrom6.1.4.3.Fortwowayslabs,theunifieddesignapproachspecifiedinSec6.5FlatPlates,Flat
SlabsandEdgesupportedSlabs,shallbeused.
6.5.9.3
Shear
6.5.9.3.1
Whenburnttileorconcretetilefillersofmaterialhavingthesamestrengthasthespecified
strengthofconcreteintheribbedandhollowslabsareusedpermanently,itispermittedto
include the vertical shells of fillers in contact with the ribs for shear and negativemoment
strengthcomputations,providedadequatebondbetweenthetwocanbeensured.
6.5.9.3.2
Adequate shear strength of slabs shall be provided in accordance with the requirements
of6.4.10.Foronewayribbedandhollowslabconstruction,contributionofconcretetoshear
strength ispermittedtobe10percentmorethanthatspecifiedin6.4.2.Itispermittedto
increaseshearstrengthusingshearreinforcementorbywideningtheendsofribs.
6.5.9.4
Deflection
Therecommendationsfordeflectionwithrespecttosolidslabsmaybeappliedtoribbedandhollowslab.
Total depth of oneway ribbed and hollow slabs shall not be less than those required by Table6.2.5.1
in6.2.5.2.Forotherslabstheprovisionsof6.2.5.3shallapply.
6.5.9.5
SizeandPositionofRibs
Insituribsshallbenotlessthan100mmwide.Theyshallbespacedatcentresnotgreaterthan750mm
apartandtheirdepth,excludinganytopping,shallbenotmorethanthreeandhalftimestheirwidth.Ribs
shallbeformedalongeachedgeparalleltothespanofonewayslabs.
6.5.9.6
Reinforcement
The recommendations given in 8.1.6 regarding maximum distance between bars apply to areas of solid
concreteinthisformofconstruction.Thecurtailment,anchorageandcovertoreinforcementshallbeas
specifiedbelow:
a) Atleast50percentofthetotalmainreinforcementshallbecarriedthroughthebottom
ontothebearingandanchoredinaccordancewith8.2.8.
b) Whereaslab,whichiscontinuousoversupports,hasbeendesignedassimplysupported,
reinforcementshallbeprovidedoverthesupporttocontrolcracking.Thisreinforcement
shall have a crosssectional area of not less than one quarter of that required in the
middleoftheadjoiningspansandshallextendatleastonetenthoftheclearspaninto
adjoiningspans.
c) Inslabswithpermanentblocks,thesidecovertothereinforcementshallnotbelessthan
10mm.Inallothercases,covershallbeprovidedaccordingto8.1.7.
6.6
6.6.1
WALLS
Scope
6.6.1.1
ProvisionsofSec.6.6 shall apply fordesignof walls subjected toaxial load, with or without
flexure.
6.6.1.2
CantileverretainingwallsaredesignedaccordingtoflexuraldesignprovisionsofSec.6.3with
minimumhorizontalreinforcementaccordingto6.6.3.3.
6.6.2
680
General
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.6.2.1
Walls shall be designed for eccentric loads and any lateral or other loads to which they are
subjected.
6.6.2.2
Wallssubjecttoaxialloadsshallbedesignedinaccordancewith6.6.2,6.6.3,andeither6.6.4,
6.6.5,or6.6.8.
6.6.2.3
Designforshearshallbeinaccordancewith6.4.8.
6.6.2.4
Unless otherwise demonstrated by an analysis, the horizontal length of wall considered as

effective for each concentrated load shall not exceed the smaller of the centertocenter
distancebetweenloads,andthebearingwidthplusfourtimesthewallthickness.
6.6.2.5
Compressionmembersbuiltintegrallywithwallsshallconformto6.3.8.2.
6.6.2.6
Walls shall be anchored to intersecting elements, such as floors and roofs; or to columns
pilasters,buttresses,ofintersectingwalls;andtofootings.
6.6.2.7
Quantity of reinforcement and limits of thickness required by 6.6.3 and 6.6.5 shall be
permittedtobewaivedwherestructuralanalysisshowsadequatestrengthandstability.
6.6.2.8
Transferofforcetofootingatbaseofwallshallbeinaccordancewith6.8.8.
6.6.3
Minimumreinforcement
6.6.3.1
Minimumverticalandhorizontalreinforcementshallbeinaccordancewith6.6.3.2and6.6.3.3
unlessagreateramountisrequiredforshearby6.4.8.8and6.4.8.9.
6.6.3.2
Minimumratioofverticalreinforcementareatogrossconcretearea, ,shallbe:
a) 0.0012fordeformedbarsnotlargerthan16mmwith notlessthan420MPa;or
b) 0.0015forotherdeformedbars;or
c) 0.0012forweldedwirereinforcementnotlargerthanMW200orMD200.
6.6.3.3
Minimumratioofhorizontalreinforcementareatogrossconcretearea, ,shallbe:
a) 0.0020fordeformedbarsnotlargerthan16mmwith notlessthan420MPa;or
b) 0.0025forotherdeformedbars;or
c) 0.0020forweldedwirereinforcementnotlargerthanMW200orMD200.
6.6.3.4
Walls more than 250 mm thick, except basement walls, shall have reinforcement for each
directionplacedintwolayersparallelwithfacesofwallinaccordancewiththefollowing:
a) One layer consisting of not less than onehalf and not more than twothirds of total
reinforcementrequiredforeachdirectionshallbeplacednotlessthan50mmnormore
thanonethirdthethicknessofwallfromtheexteriorsurface;
b) The other layer, consisting of the balance of required reinforcement in that direction,
shallbeplacednotlessthan20mmnormorethanonethirdthethicknessofwallfrom
theinteriorsurface.
6.6.3.5
Verticalandhorizontalreinforcementshallnotbespacedfartherapartthanthreetimesthe
wallthickness,norfartherapartthan450mm.
6.6.3.6
Vertical reinforcement need not be enclosed by lateral ties if vertical reinforcement area is
not greater than 0.01 times gross concrete area, or where vertical reinforcement is not
requiredascompressionreinforcement.
6.6.3.7
Inadditiontotheminimumreinforcementrequiredby6.6.3.1,notlessthantwo16mm
barsinwallshavingtwolayersofreinforcementinbothdirectionsandone16mmbarin
681
Part6
StructuralDesign
walls having a single layer of reinforcement in both directions shall be provided around
in
window, door, and similar sized openings. Such bars shall be anchored to develop
tensionatthecornersoftheopenings.
6.6.4
Designofwallsascompressionmembers
Exceptasprovidedin6.6.5,wallssubjecttoaxialloadorcombinedflexureandaxialloadshallbedesigned
as compression members inaccordancewith provisions of 6.3.2, 6.3.3, 6.3.10, 6.3.11,6.3.14,6.6.2,and
6.6.3.
6.6.5
Empiricalmethodofdesign
6.6.5.1
Walls of solid rectangular cross section shall be permitted to be designed by the empirical
provisionsof6.6.5iftheresultantofallfactoredloadsislocatedwithinthemiddlethirdofthe
overallthicknessofthewallandalllimitsof6.6.2,6.6.3,and6.6.5aresatisfied.
6.6.5.2
ofawallsatisfyinglimitationsof6.6.5.1shallbecomputedbyEq.
Designaxialstrength
(6.6.1)unlessdesignedinaccordancewith6.6.4.
0.55
6.6.1
where shallcorrespondtocompressioncontrolledsectionsinaccordancewith6.2.3.2.2andeffective
lengthfactor shallbe:
Forwallsbracedtopandbottomagainstlateraltranslationand
a) Restrainedagainstrotationatoneorbothends(top,bottom,or
b) Unrestrainedagainstrotationatbothends
Forwallsnotbracedagainstlateraltranslation
0.8
1.0
2.0
6.6.5.3
Minimumthicknessofwallsdesignedbyempiricaldesignmethod
6.6.5.3.1
Thickness of bearing walls shall not be less than 1/25 the supported height or length,
whicheverisshorter,norlessthan100mm.
6.6.5.3.2
Thicknessofexteriorbasementwallsandfoundationwallsshallnotbelessthan190mm.
6.6.6
6.6.6.1
6.6.7
Nonbearingwalls
Thickness of nonbearing walls shall not be less than 100 mm, nor less than 1/30 the least
distancebetweenmembersthatprovidelateralsupport.
Wallsasgradebeams
6.6.7.1
Walls designed as grade beams shall have top and bottom reinforcement as required for
moment in accordance with provisions of 6.3.2 through 6.3.7. Design for shear shall be in
accordancewithprovisionsofSec.6.4.
6.6.7.2
Portionsofgradebeamwallsexposedabovegradeshallalsomeetrequirementsof6.6.3.
6.6.8
Alternativedesignofslenderwalls
6.6.8.1
Whenflexuraltensioncontrolstheoutofplanedesignofawall,therequirementsof6.6.8are
consideredtosatisfy6.3.10.
6.6.8.2
Wallsdesignedbytheprovisionsof6.6.8shallsatisfy6.6.8.2.1through6.6.8.2.6.
682
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.6.8.2.1
Thewallpanelshallbedesignedasasimplysupported,axiallyloadedmembersubjectedtoan
outofplane uniform lateral load, with maximum moments and deflections occurring at
midspan.
6.6.8.2.2
Thecrosssectionshallbeconstantovertheheightofthepanel.
6.6.8.2.3
Thewallshallbetensioncontrolled.
6.6.8.2.4
ReinforcementshallprovideadesignStrength
where
shallbeobtainedusingthemodulusofrupture,
6.6.8.2.5
6.6.2
,givenbyEq.(6.2.3).
Concentrated gravity loads applied to the wall above the design flexural section shall be
assumedtobedistributedoverawidth:
a) Equal to the bearing width, plus a width on each side that increases at a slope of 2
verticalto1horizontaldowntothedesignsection;but
b) Notgreaterthanthespacingoftheconcentratedloads;and
c) Notextendingbeyondtheedgesofthewallpanel.
6.6.8.2.6
Verticalstress
6.6.8.3
Designmomentstrength
where
atthemidheightsectionshallnotexceed0.06 .
forcombinedflexureandaxialloadsatmidheightshallbe
6.6.3

6.6.4
isthemaximumfactoredmomentatmidheightofwallduetolateralandeccentricverticalloads,not
including effects,and is
6.6.5
shallbeobtainedbyiterationofdeflections,orbyEq.(6.6.6).
6.6.6
where
andthevalueof /
6.6.8.4
6.6.7
shallnotbetakenlessthan6.
Maximumoutofplanedeflection,
exceed /150.
,duetoserviceloads,including effects,shallnot
If ,maximummomentatmidheightofwallduetoservicelateralandeccentricverticalloads,including
effects,exceeds 2/3
, shallbecalculatedbyEq.(6.6.8)
If
doesnotexceed 2/3
2/3
2/3
6.6.8
shallbecalculatedbyEq.(6.6.9)
6.6.9
where
6.6.10
6.6.11
shallbecalculatedbyEq.(6.6.7),and
shallbeobtainedbyiterationofdeflections.
683
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.7
Stairs:
Stairs are the structural elements designed to connect different floors. The stairs shall be designed to
meet the minimum load requirements. The flight arrangements, configuration and support conditions
(Figure6.7.1.1)shallgovernthedesignproceduretofollow.
Figure6.7.1.1:Differentformsofstairsandlandingarrangements
6.7.1
6.7.1.1
Stairssupportedatlandinglevel
Effectivespan
Theeffectivespanofstairswithoutstringerbeamsshallbetakenasthefollowinghorizontaldistances:
a) Centretocentredistanceofbeams,wheresupportedattopandbottomrisersbybeams
spanningparallelwiththerisers,
b) Where supported at the edge of a landing slab, which spans parallel with the risers,
(Figure 6.7.1.2a)a distanceequal tothe going of thestairsplus at each endeither half
the width of the landing or 1.0m whichever is smaller. The going shall be measured
horizontally.
c) Where the landing spans in the same direction of the stairs (Figure 6.7.1.2b), the span
shallbethedistancecentretocentreofthesupportingbeamsorwalls.
d) Wherethelandingslabs,runningatrightangletothedirectionoftheflight,supportedby
wallsorbeamsonthreesides(Figure6.7.1.2c),theeffectivespanshallbegoingofthe
stairmeasuredhorizontally.Bothpositiveandnegativemomentsalongthedirectionof
8,wherewistheintensityofthetotaldeadandlive
theflightshallbecalculatedas
loadperunitareaonahorizontalplane.
684
Vol.2
Chapter1
Figure6.7.1.2:EffectiveSpanforStairsSupportedatEachEndbyLandings
6.7.1.2
Loading
Staircases shall be designed to support the design ultimate load according to the load combinations
specifiedinChapter2,loads.
6.7.1.3
Distributionofloading
6.7.1.3.1
Whereflightsorlandingareembeddedatleast110mmintowallsandaredesignedtospan
inthedirectionoftheflight,a150mmstripmaybedeductedfromtheloadedareaandthe
effective breadth of the section may be increased by 75 mm for the purpose of design
(Figure6.7.1.3)
6.7.1.3.2
In the case of stairs with open wells, where spans cross at right angles, the load on areas
commontoanytwosuchspansmaybetakenasonehalfineachdirectionasshowninFigure
6.7.1.4.
685
Part6
StructuralDesign
Figure6.7.1.3:LoadingonstairsBuiltinawall
Figure6.7.1.4:LoadingofStairswithopenwells
6.7.1.4
Depthofsection
The depth of the section shall be taken as the minimum thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the
staircase.
6.7.1.5
Design
6.7.1.5.1
Strength,DeflectionandCrackControl
The recommendations given in Sec 6.1 & 6.2 for beams and oneway slabs shall apply, except for the
span/depthratioofstaircaseswithoutstringerbeamwheretheprovisionof6.7.1.5.2belowshallapply.
6.7.1.5.2
6.7.2
6.7.2.1
Permissiblespan/effectivedepthratioforstaircasewithoutstringerbeams.Providedthestair
flightoccupiesatleast60%ofthespan,theratiocalculatedinaccordancewith6.2.5.2shallbe
increasedby15%.
Freestandingstair(landingunsupported)
EffectiveSpan
TheeffectivespanforflightsandlandingsoffreestandingstairsaregiveninFigure6.7.2.1.Intakingthese
distances, the spans shall be measured as the centre to centre distance between the stinger beams. In
stairswithoutstingerbeams,spanshallbemeasuredinbetweentheedges.
686
Vol.2
Chapter1
Figure6.7.2.1:FreeStandingStairSlabGeometry,(a)Elevation,(b)Plan
6.7.2.2
Loading
Staircases shall be designed to support the design ultimate load according to the load combinations
specifiedinChapter2,loads.
6.7.2.3
DistributionofLoading
Thestairshallbedesignedforuniformlydistributedloading.
6.7.2.4
DepthofSection
The depth of the section shall be taken as the minimum thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the
staircase.
6.7.3
DESIGN
6.7.3.1.1
Empirical expressions for deflections, and forces and moments at critical locations of free
standingstairsaregivenintermsofthevariousdimensionsofthestairwayinTable6.7.3.1.
Theseexpressions,whichareexplicitandofempiricalnature,arevalidwithintheapplicable
range of the geometric parameters (see Figure 6.7.2.1) and concrete strength. In these
equations, the unit of force is Kilo Newton (kN) and the unit of length is millimeter (mm).
Thicknessoftheflightandlandingslabsareassumedtobeequal.
6.7.3.1.2
TheequationsinTable6.7.3.1giveworkingvaluesofmomentsandforcescorrespondingto
0.48x102MPaliveloadandappropriatedeadloadofslabandstepsbasedonunitweightof
2.356x105 N/mm3. Forces and moments for other values of live load shall be calculated by
simpleproportioning.
6.7.3.1.3
To convert from working to ultimate design values, the working values of moments and
forcesinTable6.7.1shallbemultipliedbyaconversionfactorequaltotheratiooffactored
ultimateloadandunfactoredserviceload.
6.7.3.1.4
Apart from maintaining the standard code provisions in detailing the reinforcement as
stipulated elsewhere in this code, additional detailing as describedbelow (6.7.3.1.5 through
6.7.3.1.9)shallbedoneto takecareoftheimportant featureswhicharespecialtothefree
standingstairway.
6.7.3.1.5
To account for the nonuniform distribution of the total bending moment at support across
thewidthofthesection,threefourthsofthetotalnegativesteelshallbedistributedacross
the outer half of the width of support section and the rest of the negative steel shall be
distributedwithintheinnerhalfofthewidthofsupportsection.
687
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.7.3.1.6
Similarproportioningofreinforcementlayoutasto6.7.3.1.5,butinreverseordershallalsobe
doneatflightlandingjunction(kink).
6.7.3.1.7
Atmidspanofflights,thepositivesteelshallbedistributeduniformlyacrossthesection.
6.7.3.1.8
Ofthetotalsteelrequiredtoresistthenegativebendingatmidlandingsection,50percent
shallbeplacedwithintheinneronethirdofthewidthofsection.Therestshallbedistributed
acrossoftheoutertwothirdsofthewidth.
6.7.3.1.9
The suggested bar curtailment scheme for the free standing stairway is shown in Figure
6.7.3.1.Halfofthenegativesteelatsupportmaybeterminatedatadistanceof /4fromthe
support.Another25percentmaybebentdownwardatadistanceof /4toprovidepartof
the flight midspan positive steel. The rest 25 percent is recommended to continue straight
towardstheflightlandingjunction.This25percentmaybemergedwiththenegativesteelat
kink.Fiftypercentoftheflightmidspanpositivesteelshouldspanfromkinkandterminateat
apoint /5fromthesupportunlesstheyarebentupfornegativesteel.Therestshouldstart
fromapointatadistanceof /5fromkinkandwouldterminateat /4fromsupport.Ofthe
totalnegativesteelatmidlandingsection,halfofitwillterminateatadistance /2fromfree
edgeandtherestwillcoverthewholelengthoflanding.Halfofthenegativesteelatkinkwill
projectintolandinguptothefreeedgeandtherestmaybeterminatedatadistanceof /2.
Figure6.7.3.1:RecommendedBarCurtailmentDetailsforFreeStandingStairs
688
Vol.2
Table6.7.3.1EXPRESSIONSFORDEFLECTION,FORCES&MOMENTSINFREESTANDINGSTAIRS
f c
=_____mm.
150< <1000
=______mm
900< <1875
=_______mm.
915< <1900
Vertical Consta
deflectionat nt
landing
2.03
corner,mm
1+0.00545(A
125)0.94
1+0.00114(B
914)1.1
1+0.00165(C
914)0.93
17.87x106(L
2030)
119.68x106(H
2440)
10.161(T
100)0.334
11.074x106( f c
14).93
1.2+0.00276(C
864)
1+0.000748(L
2030)
1+5.9x106(H
2440)
0.39+0.00173(T
90)
1.0
170.11x106(B
915)1.365
1.0
1+0.128x106(L
2030)2.66
1+0.899x109(H
2440)2.77
1.00165(T
100)1.17
1.0
1.0
0.95+0.00447(T
100)1.03
Support Consta 1.555+0.000787( 1.060.00022(B

nt
A50)
860)
negative
moment,kN 4.712
m
Flight
midspan
positive
moment,
kNm
Consta 1.131.48x106(A
nt
150)1.52
1.526
Negative Consta 1.23+0.000512(A 1.01+0.00323(B .85+0.000709(C

momentat
nt
125)
915)
915)
kink,kNm 3.447
=_______mm.
=_______mm.
2030< <3550 2440< <4320
=_______mm.
100< <280
Value
Negative Consta
nt
momentat
midsectionof 6.14
landing,kNm
1+0.000303(A
150)
1+0.00118(B915)
1+0.00106(C
915)
1+0.000409(L
2030)
Axialforcein Consta
flights,kN
nt
1+0.000236(A
125)
1+0.000787(B
915)
1+0.000827(C
915)
1+0.000354(L
2030)
10.000157(H
2440)
1+0.00276(T100)
34.69
Part6
StructuralDesign
1+26.37x10 (H 1+0.00185(T100)
2040)
=________MPa.
14< f c <40
689
Part6
StructuralDesign
1+0.00268(C
915)
18.0x106(L
2030).75
1.0
1+0.00358(T100)
1+0.000984(B
915)
1+0.00157(C
915)
1+0.00059(L
2030)
10.000197(H
2440)
1+0.0026(T100)
1+0.00138(B915) 1+0.000709(C
915)
1+0.000669(L
2030)
10.00024(H
2440)
1+0.000746(T
100)1.3
Torsionin Consta 1+0.00177(A125) 1+0.00063(B915)

flights,kNm. nt
2.312
Inplane
Consta 1.1+0.000866(A
momentin
nt
150)
flights,kNm 14.35
Lateralshear Consta
inmidsection nt
oflanding,kN 30.17
690
10.000276(A
150)
Vol.2
6.7.4
6.7.4.1
Sawtooth(slabless)stair
Loading
The stairshall be designedto support thedesign ultimate loadaccording to theload combinations specifiedin
Chapter2,Loads.
6.7.4.2
Distributionofloading
Whereflightsorlandingareembeddedatleast110mmintothewallsandaredesignedtospaninthedirectionof
theflight,a150mmstripmaybedeductedfromtheloadedareaandtheeffectivebreadthofthesectionmaybe
increasedby75mmforthepurposeofdesign(Figure6.7.1.3).
6.7.4.3
Effectivespan
Sawtoothstairsshall be supported with stringer beams at landing levels(Figure6.7.4.1). Theeffective span for
thestairshallbethegoingofthestairmeasuredhorizontally(Figure6.7.4.1)fromthefaceofthestringerbeams.
Figure6.7.4.1:Elementsofsawtoothstairandtypicalreinforcementarrangements
6.7.4.4
Design
Themidspanmomentsforsawtoothstairsaregivenby:
6.7.1
Part6
StructuralDesign
691
Part6
StructuralDesign
Where,
=stiffnessoftread/stiffnessofriserandjisthenumberoftreads(Figure6.7.4.1).
If is odd:
,
2 ,
3 ,
1 .
If
is even:
2 ,
3 ,
1 ,
ThechartonFigure6.7.4.2givesthesupportmomentcoefficientsforvariousratiosofstiffnessoftread/stiffness
ofriserandnumbersoftreads.Havingfoundthesupportmoment,themaximummidspanbendingmomentshall
bedeterminedbyusingtheappropriateexpressionontheFigure6.7.4.2andsubtractingthesupportmoment.
Figure6.7.4.2:Supportmomentcoefficientsforsawtoothstair
6.7.4.5
Detailing
Typical bendingmoment and shearingforce diagrams for a stair are shown on Figure 6.7.4.1 together with
suggestedarrangementsofreinforcement.Thereentrantcornersofthestairprofileshallbedesignedforstress
concentrations.ThishastobefacilitatedbyprovidingtwiceofthereinforcementscalculatedfromEqn.6.7.1and
Figure6.7.4.2.Filletsorhaunchescanalsobeincorporatedinlieuatthesejunctions.Themethodofreinforcing
thestairshownindiagram(a)ofFigure6.7.4.1isverysuitablebutisgenerallyonlypracticableifhaunchesare
provided.Otherwisethearrangementshownindiagram(b)shouldbeadopted.
6.7.5
6.7.5.1
Helicoidalstair
Loading
The stairshall bedesignedto supportthe design ultimateload accordingto the load combinations specified in
Chapter2,Loads.
692
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.7.5.2
Geometry
ThepertinentgeometryoftheHelicoidalstairisgivenatFigure6.7.5.1where:
, :secondmomentofareaofstairsectionabouthorizontalaxisandaxisnormaltoslope,respectively
: totalloadingperunitlengthprojectedalongcentrelineofload
: radiusofcentrelineofloading= 2/3
: radiusofcentrelineofsteps= 1/2
thestair,respectively
,where
and
aretheinternalandexternalradiiof
: anglesubtendedinplanbetweenpointconsideredandmidpointofstair
: totalanglesubtendedbyhelixinplan
: slopeoftangenttohelixcentrelinemeasuredfromhorizontal
Figure6.7.5.1:Elementsofhelicoidalstair(a)Plan;(b)Elevation
6.7.5.3
Effectivespan
Helicoidalstairsshallbesupportedwithstringerbeamsatlandinglevels(Figure6.7.1.1).Theeffectivespanfor
thestairshallbethetotalangle, subtendedbyhelixinplanmeasuredhorizontally(Figure6.7.5.1)fromtheface
ofthestringerbeams.
6.7.5.4
Depthofsection
Thedepthofthesectionshallbetakenastheminimumthicknessperpendiculartothesoffitofthestairunless
otherwise the large geometric dimensions warrant calculating the deflections through a suitable numerical
analysis.
6.7.5.5
Design
The design forces and moments for helicoidal stairs are given in Figure 6.7.5.2. Typical shear force, thrust,
momentandtorsiondiagramsareprovidedinFigure6.7.5.2.Themoments,thrust,torsionandshearforcesshall
beobtainedfromthefollowingequations:
Lateralmoment:
sin
Torsionalmoment
sin
Verticalmoment:
cos
cos
cos tan
sin
tansin
sin cos
cos
cos
sin
sin
sin sin
6.7.2
6.7.3
6.7.4
Thrust:
sin cos
sin
Lateralshearingforceacrossstair:
cos
6.7.5
sin sin
6.7.6
693
Part6
StructuralDesign
Radialhorizontalshearingforce:
cos
Where,
6.7.7
Redundantmomentactingtangentiallyatmidspan:
Horizontalredundantforceatmidspan:
Verticalmomentatsupports:
Valuesofcoefficients ,
fordifferent
6.7.8
6.7.9
6.7.10
and ,shallbeobtainedfromFigures6.7.5.3ad.
Figure6.7.5.2:Typicalforce,momentandtorsiondiagramsforhelicoidalstair.
694
Vol.2
Chapter1
2.4
R1/R2 = 1.05
b/h = 5
2.0
= 200
25
1.6
30
1.2
Values of k
0
0
Curves for k2
0.8
0.4
0.0
30
-0.4
= 200
-0.8
20
Curves for k1
Curves for k3
-1.2
-1.6
90
180
270
360
Values of
Figure6.7.5.3a:Designchartsforhelicoidalstairslabs(R1/R2=1.05;b/h=5)
2.4
R1/R2 = 1.05
b/h = 13
2.0
= 20
25
1.6
30
Curves for k2
Values of k
1.2
0.8
0.4
0.0
Curves for k1
= 200
-0.4
Curves for k3
-0.8
30
= 20
-1.2
-1.6
90
180
270
360
Values of
Figure6.7.5.3b:Designchartsforhelicoidalstairslabs(R1/R2=1.05;b/h=13)
695
Part6
StructuralDesign
2.4
2.0
R1/R2 = 1.1
b/h = 5
= 20
25
1.6
30
Values of k
1.2
Curves for k2
0.8
0.4
0.0
30
-0.4
= 20
= 200
Curves for k1
-0.8
Curves for k3
-1.2
-1.6
90
180
270
360
Values of
Figure6.7.5.3c:Designchartsforhelicoidalstairslabs(R1/R2=1.1;b/h=5)
2.4
2.0
= 200
R1/R2 = 1.1
b/h = 13
25
30
1.6
Curves for k2
Values of k
1.2
0.8
0.4
0.0
Curves for k1
-0.4
= 200
Curves for k3
-0.8
30
0
0
= 20
-1.2
-1.6
90
180
270
30
360
Values of
Figure6.7.5.3d:Designchartsforhelicoidalstairslabs(R1/R2=1.1;b/h=13)
696
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.8
6.8.1
FOOTINGS
Scope
6.8.1.1
ProvisionsofSec.6.8shallapplyfordesignofisolatedfootingsand,whereapplicable,tocombined
footingsandmats.
6.8.1.2
Additionalrequirementsfordesignofcombinedfootingsandmatsaregivenin6.8.10.
6.8.2
Loadsandreactions
6.8.2.1
Footingsshallbeproportionedtoresistthefactoredloadsandinducedreactions,inaccordancewith
theappropriatedesignrequirementsofthisCodeandasprovidedinSec.6.8.
6.8.2.2
Baseareaoffootingornumberandarrangementofpilesshallbedeterminedfromunfactoredforces
andmomentstransmittedbyfootingtosoilorpilesandpermissiblesoilpressureorpermissiblepile
capacitydeterminedthroughprinciplesofsoilmechanics.
6.8.2.3
Forfootingsonpiles,computationsformomentsandshearsshallbepermittedtobebasedonthe
assumptionthatthereactionfromanypileisconcentratedatpilecenter.
6.8.3
Equivalentsquareshapesforcircularorregularpolygonshapedcolumnsorpedestalssupported
byfootings
For location of critical sections for moment, shear, and development of reinforcement in footings, it shall be
permittedtotreatcircularorregularpolygonshapedconcretecolumnsorpedestalsassquarememberswiththe
samearea.
6.8.4
Momentinfootings
6.8.4.1
Externalmomentonanysectionofafootingshallbedeterminedbypassingaverticalplanethrough
thefooting,andcomputingthemomentoftheforcesactingoverentireareaoffootingononesideof
thatverticalplane.
6.8.4.2
Maximumfactoredmoment, ,foranisolatedfootingshallbecomputedasprescribedin6.8.4.1at
criticalsectionslocatedasfollows:
a) Atfaceofcolumn,pedestal,orwall,forfootingssupportingaconcretecolumn,pedestal,orwall;
b) Halfwaybetweenmiddleandedgeofwall,forfootingssupportingamasonrywall;
c) Halfwaybetweenfaceofcolumnandedgeofsteelbaseplate,forfootingssupportingacolumn
withsteelbaseplate.
6.8.4.3
Inonewayfootingsandtwowaysquarefootings,reinforcementshallbedistributeduniformlyacross
entirewidthoffooting.
6.8.4.4
Intwowayrectangularfootings,reinforcementshallbedistributedinaccordancewith6.8.4.4.1and
6.8.4.4.2.
6.8.4.4.1
Reinforcementinlongdirectionshallbedistributeduniformlyacrossentirewidthoffooting.
6.8.4.4.2
,shallbedistributed
Forreinforcementinshortdirection,aportionofthetotalreinforcement,
uniformly over a band width (centered on centerline of column or pedestal) equal to the length of
short side of footing. Remainder of reinforcement required in short direction 1
distributeduniformlyoutsidecenterbandwidthoffooting.
, shall be
6.8.1
697
Part6
StructuralDesign
where isratiooflongtoshortsidesoffooting.
6.8.5
Shearinfootings
6.8.5.1
Shearstrengthoffootingssupportedonsoilorrockshallbeinaccordancewith6.4.10.
6.8.5.2
Location of critical section for shear in accordance with Sec. 6.4 shall be measured from face of
column,pedestal,orwall,forfootingssupportingacolumn,pedestal,orwall.Forfootingssupporting
a column or pedestal with steel base plates, the critical section shall be measured from location
definedin6.8.4.2(c).
6.8.5.3
Wherethedistancebetweentheaxisofanypiletotheaxisofthecolumnismorethantwotimesthe
distancebetweenthetopofthepilecapandthetopofthepile,thepilecapshallsatisfy6.4.10and
6.8.5.4. Other pile caps shall satisfy either Appendix A, or both 6.4.10 and 6.8.5.4. If Appendix A is
used, the effective concrete compression strength of the struts, , shall be determined using
A.3.2.2(b).
6.8.5.4
Computation of shear on any section through a footing supported on piles (Fig. 6.8.5.1) shall be in
accordancewith6.8.5.4.1,6.8.5.4.2,and6.8.5.4.3.
6.8.5.4.1
Entire reaction from any pile with its center located

consideredasproducingshearonthatsection.
6.8.5.4.2
Reactionfromanypilewithitscenterlocated
asproducingnoshearonthatsection.
6.8.5.4.3
For intermediate positions of pile center, the portion of the pile reaction to be considered as
producing shear on the section shall be based on straightline interpolation between full value at
/2outsidethesectionandzerovalueat
/2insidethesection.
/2 or more outside the section shall be
/2ormoreinsidethesectionshallbeconsidered
Fig.6.8.5.1Modifiedcriticalperimeterforshearwithoverlappingcriticalperimeters.
6.8.6
Developmentofreinforcementinfootings
6.8.6.1
DevelopmentofreinforcementinfootingsshallbeinaccordancewithSec.8.2.
6.8.6.2
Calculatedtensionorcompressioninreinforcementateachsectionshallbedevelopedoneachside
of that section by embedment length, hook (tension only) or mechanical device, or a combination
thereof.
698
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.8.6.3
6.8.7
Criticalsectionsfordevelopmentofreinforcementshallbeassumedatthesamelocationsasdefined
in6.8.4.2formaximumfactoredmoment,andatallotherverticalplaneswherechangesofsectionor
reinforcementoccur.Seealso8.2.7.6.
Minimumfootingdepth
Depthoffootingabovebottomreinforcementshallnotbelessthan150mmforfootingsonsoil,norlessthan300
mmforfootingsonpiles.
6.8.8
Forcetransferatbaseofcolumn,wall,orreinforcedpedestal
6.8.8.1
Forcesandmomentsatbaseofcolumn,wall,orpedestalshallbetransferredtosupportingpedestal
orfootingbybearingonconcreteandbyreinforcement,dowels,andmechanicalconnectors.
6.8.8.1.1
Bearingstressonconcreteatcontactsurfacebetweensupportedandsupportingmembershallnot
exceedconcretebearingstrengthforeithersurfaceasgivenby6.3.14.
6.8.8.1.2
Reinforcement,dowels,ormechanicalconnectorsbetweensupportedandsupportingmembersshall
beadequatetotransfer:
a) Allcompressiveforcethatexceedsconcretebearingstrengthofeithermember;
b) Anycomputedtensileforceacrossinterface.
Inaddition,reinforcement,dowels,ormechanicalconnectorsshallsatisfy6.8.8.2or6.8.8.3.
6.8.8.1.3
Ifcalculatedmomentsaretransferredtosupportingpedestalorfooting,thenreinforcement,dowels,
ormechanicalconnectorsshallbeadequatetosatisfy8.2.15.
6.8.8.1.4
Lateralforcesshallbetransferredtosupportingpedestalorfootinginaccordancewithshearfriction
provisionsof6.4.5,orbyotherappropriatemeans.
6.8.8.2
In castinplace construction, reinforcement required to satisfy 6.8.8.1 shall be provided either by

extendinglongitudinalbarsintosupportingpedestalorfooting,orbydowels.
6.8.8.2.1
Forcastinplacecolumnsandpedestals,areaofreinforcementacrossinterfaceshallbenotlessthan
0.005 ,where isthegrossareaofthesupportedmember.
6.8.8.2.2
Forcastinplacewalls,areaofreinforcementacrossinterfaceshallbenotlessthanminimumvertical
reinforcementgivenin6.6.3.2.
6.8.8.2.3
Atfootings,itshallbepermittedtolapsplice43mmand57mmlongitudinalbars,incompression
only,withdowelstoprovidereinforcementrequiredtosatisfy6.8.8.1.Dowelsshallnotbelargerthan
36mmbarandshallextendintosupportedmemberadistancenotlessthanthelargerof
,of
43mmor57mmbarsandcompressionlapsplicelengthofthedowels,whicheverisgreater,and
intothefootingadistancenotlessthan ofthedowels.
6.8.8.2.4
Ifapinnedorrockerconnectionisprovidedincastinplaceconstruction,connectionshallconformto
6.8.8.1and6.8.8.3.
6.8.8.3
In precast construction, anchor bolts or suitable mechanical connectors shall be permitted for
satisfying6.8.8.1.AnchorboltsshallbedesignedinaccordancewithAppendixD.
6.8.8.3.1
Connection between precast columns or pedestals and supporting members shall meet the
requirementsof6.10.5.1.3(a).
6.8.8.3.2
Connection between precast walls and supporting members shall meet the requirements of
6.10.5.1.3(b)and(c).
699
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.8.8.3.3
6.8.9
Anchor bolts and mechanical connections shall be designed to reach their design strength before
anchorage failure or failure of surrounding concrete. Anchor bolts shall be designed in accordance
withAppendixD.
Steppedorslopedfootings
6.8.9.1
Inslopedorsteppedfootings,angleofslopeordepthandlocationofstepsshallbesuchthatdesign
requirementsaresatisfiedateverysection.(Seealso8.2.7.6.)
6.8.9.2
Slopedorsteppedfootingsdesignedasaunitshallbeconstructedtoensureactionasaunit.
6.8.10 Combinedfootingsandmats
6.8.10.1
Footings supporting more than one column, pedestal, or wall (combined footings or mats) shall be
proportioned to resist the factored loads and induced reactions, in accordance with appropriate
designrequirementsofthecode.
6.8.10.2
ThedirectdesignmethodofSec.6.5shallnotbeusedfordesignofcombinedfootingsandmats.
6.8.10.3
Distributionofsoilpressureundercombinedfootingsandmatsshallbeconsistentwithpropertiesof
thesoilandthestructureandwithestablishedprinciplesofsoilmechanics.
6.8.10.4
Minimumreinforcing steel inmatfoundationsshall meet the requirementsofSec. 8.1.11.2ineach

principaldirection.Maximumspacingshallnotexceed450mm.
6.9
FOLDED PLATESANDSHELLS
6.9.1
Scopeanddefinitions
6.9.1.1
ProvisionsofSec.6.9shallapplytothinshellandfoldedplateconcretestructures,includingribsand
edgemembers.
6.9.1.2
All provisions of this Code not specifically excluded, and not in conflict with provisions of Sec. 6.9,
shallapplytothinshellstructures.
6.9.1.3
Thinshells
Threedimensionalspatialstructuresmadeupofoneormorecurvedslabsorfoldedplateswhosethicknessesare
smallcomparedtotheirotherdimensions.Thinshellsarecharacterizedbytheirthreedimensionalloadcarrying
behavior,whichisdeterminedbythegeometryoftheirforms,bythemannerinwhichtheyaresupported,andby
thenatureoftheappliedload.
6.9.1.4
Foldedplates
Aclassofshellstructureformedbyjoiningflat,thinslabsalongtheiredgestocreateathreedimensionalspatial
structure.
6.9.1.5
Ribbedshells
Spatialstructureswithmaterialplacedprimarilyalongcertainpreferredriblines,withtheareabetweentheribs
filledwiththinslabsorleftopen.
6.9.1.6
Auxiliarymembers
Ribsoredgebeamsthatservetostrengthen,stiffen,orsupporttheshell;usually,auxiliarymembersactjointly
withtheshell.
6.9.1.7
6100
Elasticanalysis
Vol.2
Chapter1
Ananalysisofdeformationsandinternalforcesbasedonequilibrium,compatibilityofstrains,andassumedelastic
behavior,andrepresentingtoasuitableapproximationthethreedimensionalactionoftheshelltogetherwithits
auxiliarymembers.
6.9.1.8
Inelasticanalysis
An analysis of deformations and internal forces based on equilibrium, nonlinear stressstrain relations for
concreteandreinforcement,considerationofcrackingandtimedependenteffects,andcompatibilityofstrains.
The analysis shall represent to a suitable approximation threedimensional action of the shell together with its
auxiliarymembers.
6.9.1.9
Experimentalanalysis
An analysis procedure based on the measurement of deformations or strains, or both, of the structure or its
model;experimentalanalysisisbasedoneitherelasticorinelastic
behavior.
6.9.2
Analysisanddesign
6.9.2.1
Elasticbehaviorshallbeanacceptedbasisfordetermininginternalforcesanddisplacementsofthin
shells.Thisbehaviorshallbepermittedtobeestablishedbycomputationsbasedonananalysisofthe
uncracked concrete structure in which the material is assumed linearly elastic, homogeneous, and
isotropic.Poissonsratioofconcreteshallbepermittedtobetakenequaltozero.
6.9.2.2
Inelasticanalysesshallbepermittedtobeusedwhereitcanbeshownthatsuchmethodsprovidea
safebasisfordesign.
6.9.2.3
Equilibriumchecksofinternalresistancesandexternalloadsshallbemadetoensureconsistencyof
results.
6.9.2.4
Experimentalor numericalanalysis procedures shallbepermitted whereitcan beshown that such

proceduresprovideasafebasisfordesign.
6.9.2.5
Approximate methods of analysis shall be permitted where it can be shown that such methods
provideasafebasisfordesign.
6.9.2.6
The thickness of a shell and its reinforcement shall be proportioned for the required strength and
serviceability,usingeitherthestrengthdesignmethodof6.1.2.1orthedesignmethodof6.1.2.2.
6.9.2.7
Shellinstabilityshallbeinvestigatedandshownbydesigntobeprecluded.
6.9.2.8
Auxiliary members shall be designed according to the applicable provisions of the Code. It shall be
permittedtoassumethataportionoftheshellequaltotheflangewidth,asspecifiedin6.1.13,acts
with the auxiliary member. In such portions of the shell, the reinforcement perpendicular to the
auxiliarymembershallbeatleastequaltothatrequiredfortheflangeofaTbeamby6.1.13.5.
6.9.2.9
Strengthdesignofshellslabsformembraneandbendingforcesshallbebasedonthedistributionof
stressesandstrainsasdeterminedfromeitheranelasticoraninelasticanalysis.
6.9.2.10
Inaregionwheremembranecrackingispredicted,thenominalcompressivestrengthparalleltothe
cracksshallbetakenas0.4 .
6.9.3
Designstrengthofmaterials
6.9.3.1
Specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete at28daysshallnotbelessthan21MPa.
6.9.3.2
Specifiedyieldstrengthofreinforcement
shallnotexceed420MPa.
6101
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.9.4
Shellreinforcement
6.9.4.1
Shell reinforcement shall be provided to resist tensile stresses from internal membrane forces, to
resist tension from bending and twisting moments, to limit shrinkage and temperature crack width
andspacing,andasreinforcementatshellboundaries,loadattachments,andshellopenings.
6.9.4.2
Tensilereinforcementshallbeprovidedintwoormoredirectionsandshallbeproportionedsuchthat
its resistanceinany direction equals orexceedsthe componentof internal forces inthat direction.
Alternatively, reinforcement for the membrane forces in the slab shall be calculated as the
reinforcement required to resist axial tensile forces plus the tensile force due to shearfriction
required to transfer shear across any cross section of the membrane. The assumed coefficient of
friction, ,shallnotexceedthatspecifiedin6.4.5.4.3.
6.9.4.3
Theareaofshellreinforcementatanysectionasmeasuredintwoorthogonaldirectionsshallnotbe
lessthantheslabshrinkageortemperaturereinforcementrequiredby8.1.11.
6.9.4.4
Reinforcement for shear and bending moments about axes in the plane of the shell slab shall be
calculatedinaccordancewithSec.6.3,6.4and6.5.
6.9.4.5
The area of shell tension reinforcement shall be limited so that the reinforcement will yield before
eithercrushingofconcreteincompressionorshellbucklingcantakeplace.
6.9.4.6
In regions of high tension, membrane reinforcement shall, if practical, be placed in the general
directionsoftheprincipaltensilemembraneforces.Wherethisisnotpractical,itshallbepermitted
toplacemembranereinforcementintwoormorecomponentdirections.
6.9.4.7
Ifthedirectionofreinforcementvariesmorethan10degreesfromthedirectionofprincipaltensile
membrane force, the amount of reinforcement shall be reviewed in relation to cracking at service
loads.
6.9.4.8
Wherethemagnitudeoftheprincipaltensilemembranestresswithintheshellvariesgreatlyoverthe
area of the shell surface, reinforcement resisting the total tension shall be permitted to be
concentratedintheregionsoflargesttensilestresswhereitcanbeshownthatthisprovidesasafe
basisfordesign.However,theratioofshellreinforcementinanyportionofthetensilezoneshallbe
notlessthan0.0035basedontheoverallthicknessoftheshell.
6.9.4.9
Reinforcementrequiredtoresistshellbendingmomentsshallbeproportionedwithdueregardtothe
simultaneous action of membrane axial forces at the same location. Where shell reinforcement is
required in only one face to resist bending moments, equal amounts shall be placed near both
surfacesoftheshelleventhoughareversalofbendingmomentsisnotindicatedbytheanalysis.
6.9.4.10
Shellreinforcementinanydirectionshallnotbespacedfartherapartthan450mmnorfartherapart
than five times the shell thickness. Where the principal membrane tensile stress on the gross
concreteareaduetofactoredloadsexceeds0.33
apartthanthreetimestheshellthickness.
6.9.4.11
6102
,reinforcementshallnotbespacedfarther
Shellreinforcementatthejunctionoftheshellandsupportingmembersoredgemembersshallbe
anchored in or extended through such members in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 8.2,
exceptthattheminimumdevelopmentlengthshallbe1.2 butnotlessthan450mm.
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.9.4.12
6.9.5
SplicelengthsofshellreinforcementshallbegovernedbytheprovisionsofSec.8.2,exceptthatthe
minimumsplicelengthoftensionbarsshallbe1.2timesthevaluerequiredbySec.8.2butnotless
than 450 mm. The number of splices in principal tensile reinforcement shall be kept to a practical
minimum.Wheresplicesarenecessarytheyshallbestaggeredatleast withnotmorethanone
thirdofthereinforcementsplicedatanysection.
Construction
6.9.5.1
When removal of formwork is based on a specific modulus of elasticity of concrete because of

stability or deflection considerations, the value of the modulus of elasticity,
, used shall be
determined from flexural tests of fieldcured beam specimens. The number of test specimens, the
dimensionsoftestbeamspecimens,andtestproceduresshallbespecifiedbytheEngineer.
6.9.5.2
Contractdocumentsshallspecifythetolerancesfortheshapeoftheshell.Ifconstructionresultsin
deviations from the shape greater than the specified tolerances, an analysis of the effect of the
deviationsshallbemadeandanyrequiredremedialactionsshallbetakentoensuresafebehavior.
6.10
PRECASTCONCRETE
6.10.1 Scope
6.10.1.1
All provisions of this Code, not specifically excluded and not in conflict with the provisions of Sec.
6.10,shallapplytostructuresincorporatingprecastconcretestructuralmembers.
6.10.2 General
6.10.2.1
Designofprecastmembersandconnectionsshallincludeloadingandrestraintconditionsfrominitial
fabricationtoenduseinthestructure,includingformremoval,storage,transportation,anderection.
6.10.2.2
When precast members are incorporated into a structural system, the forces and deformations
occurringinandadjacenttoconnectionsshallbeincludedinthedesign.
6.10.2.3
Tolerancesforbothprecastmembersandinterfacingmembersshallbespecified.Designofprecast
membersandconnectionsshallincludetheeffectsofthesetolerances.
6.10.2.4
In addition to the requirements for drawings and specifications in Sec. 1.9, (a) and (b) shall be
includedineitherthecontractdocumentsorshopdrawings:
a) Details of reinforcement, inserts and lifting devices required to resist temporary loads from
handling,storage,transportation,anderection;
b) Requiredconcretestrengthatstatedagesorstagesofconstruction.
6.10.3 Distributionofforcesamongmembers
6.10.3.1
Distributionofforcesthatareperpendiculartotheplaneofmembersshallbeestablishedbyanalysis
orbytest.
6.10.3.2
Where the system behavior requires inplane forces to be transferred between the members of a
precastfloororwallsystem,6.10.3.2.1and6.10.3.2.2shallapply.
6.10.3.2.1 Inplaneforcepathsshallbecontinuousthroughbothconnectionsandmembers.
6.10.3.2.2 Wheretensionforcesoccur,acontinuouspathofsteelorsteelreinforcementshallbeprovided.
6.10.4 Memberdesign
6103
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.10.4.1
Inonewayprecastfloorandroofslabsandinonewayprecast,prestressedwallpanels,allnotwider
than3.7m,andwheremembersarenotmechanicallyconnectedtocauserestraintinthetransverse
direction,theshrinkageandtemperaturereinforcementrequirementsofSec.8.1.11inthedirection
normaltotheflexuralreinforcementshallbepermittedtobewaived.Thiswaivershallnotapplyto
membersthatrequirereinforcementtoresisttransverseflexuralstresses.
6.10.4.2
For precast, nonprestressed walls the reinforcement shall be designed in accordance with the
provisionsofSec.6.3or6.6,exceptthattheareaofhorizontalandverticalreinforcementeachshall
is the gross crosssectional area of the wall panel. Spacing of
be not less than 0.001 , where
reinforcementshallnotexceed5timesthewallthicknessnor750mmforinteriorwallsnor450mm
forexteriorwalls.
6.10.5 Structuralintegrity
6.10.5.1
Except where the provisions of 6.10.5.2 govern, the minimum provisions of 6.10.5.1.1 through
6.10.5.1.4forstructuralintegrityshallapplytoallprecastconcretestructures.
6.10.5.1.1 Longitudinal and transverse ties required by Sec. 8.1.12.3 shall connect members to a lateral load
resistingsystem.
6.10.5.1.2 Where precast elements form floor or roof diaphragms, the connections between diaphragm and
those members being laterally supported shall have a nominal tensile strength capable of resisting
notlessthan4.4kNperlinearm.
6.10.5.1.3 VerticaltensiontierequirementsofSec.8.1.12.3shallapplytoallverticalstructuralmembers,except
cladding, andshall be achieved byprovidingconnections at horizontal jointsinaccordance with (a)
through(c):
a) Precastcolumnsshallhaveanominalstrengthintensionnotlessthan1.4 ,inlb.Forcolumns
with a larger cross section than required by consideration of loading, a reduced effective area
,basedoncrosssectionrequiredbutnotlessthanonehalfthetotalarea,shallbepermitted;
b) Precastwallpanelsshallhaveaminimumoftwotiesperpanel,withanominaltensilestrength
notlessthan44kNpertie;
c) Whendesignforcesresultinnotension atthebase,thetiesrequiredby6.10.5.1.3(b)shallbe
permittedtobeanchoredintoanappropriatelyreinforcedconcretefloorslabonground.
6.10.5.1.4
Connectiondetailsthatrelysolelyonfrictioncausedbygravityloadsshallnotbeused.
6.10.5.2
Forprecastconcretebearingwallstructuresthreeormorestoriesinheight,theminimumprovisions
of6.10.5.2.1through6.10.5.2.5shallapply(Fig.6.10.5.1).
6.10.5.2.1 Longitudinal and transverse ties shall be provided in floor and roof systems to provide a nominal
strengthof22kNpermeterofwidthorlength.Tiesshallbeprovidedoverinteriorwallsupportsand
betweenmembersandexteriorwalls.Tiesshallbepositionedinorwithin600mmoftheplaneofthe
floororroofsystem.
6104
Vol.2
Chapter1
Fig.6.10.5.1Typicalarrangementoftensiletiesinlargepanelstructures.
6.10.5.2.2 Longitudinal ties parallel to flooror roof slabspans shallbe spaced not more than3 m on centers.
Provisionsshallbemadetotransferforcesaroundopenings.
6.10.5.2.3 Transversetiesperpendiculartofloororroofslabspansshallbespacednotgreaterthanthebearing
wallspacing.
6.10.5.2.4 Tiesaroundtheperimeterofeachfloorandroof,within1.2moftheedge,shallprovideanominal
strengthintensionnotlessthan71kN.
6.10.5.2.5 Vertical tension ties shall be provided in all walls and shall be continuous over the height of the
building. They shall provide a nominal tensile strength not less than 44 kN per horizontal meter of
wall.Notlessthantwotiesshallbeprovidedforeachprecastpanel.
6.10.6 Connectionandbearingdesign
6.10.6.1
Forces shall be permitted to be transferred between members by grouted joints, shear keys,
mechanicalconnectors,reinforcingsteelconnections,reinforcedtopping,oracombinationofthese
means.
6.10.6.1.1 Theadequacyofconnectionstotransferforcesbetweenmembersshallbedeterminedbyanalysisor
by test. Where shear is the primary result of imposed loading, it shall be permitted to use the
provisionsof6.4.5asapplicable.
6.10.6.1.2 When designing a connection using materials with different structural properties, their relative
stiffnesses,strengths,andductilitiesshallbeconsidered.
6.10.6.2
Bearingforprecastfloorandroofmembersonsimplesupportsshallsatisfy6.10.6.2.1and6.10.6.2.2.
6.10.6.2.1 Theallowablebearingstressatthecontactsurfacebetweensupportedandsupportingmembersand
betweenanyintermediatebearingelementsshallnotexceedthebearingstrengthforeithersurface
orthebearingelement,orboth.Concretebearingstrengthshallbeasgivenin6.3.14.
6105
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.10.6.2.2 Unlessshownbytestoranalysisthatperformancewillnotbeimpaired,(a)and(b)shallbemet(Fig.
6.10.6.1):
a) Each member and its supporting system shall have design dimensions selected so that, after
considerationoftolerances,thedistancefromtheedgeofthesupporttotheendoftheprecast
memberinthedirectionofthespanisatleast /180,butnotlessthan:
Forsolidorhollowcoreslabs
50mm
Forbeamsorstemmedmembers
75mm
b) Bearingpadsatunarmorededgesshallbesetbackaminimumof13mmfromthefaceofthe
support,oratleastthechamferdimensionatchamferededges.
6.10.6.2.3 The requirements of 8.2.8.1 shall not apply to the positive bending moment reinforcement for
staticallydeterminateprecastmembers,butatleastonethirdofsuchreinforcementshallextendto
the center of the bearing length, taking into account permitted tolerances in Sec. 8.1.5.2c and
6.10.2.3.
Fig.6.10.6.1Bearinglengthonsupport
6.10.7 Itemsembeddedafterconcreteplacement
6.10.7.1
When approved by the designer, embedded items (such as dowels or inserts) that either protrude
from the concrete or remain exposed for inspection shall be permitted to be embedded while the
concreteisinaplasticstateprovidedthat6.10.7.1.1,6.10.7.1.2,and6.10.7.1.3aremet.
6.10.7.1.1 Embeddeditemsarenotrequiredtobehookedortiedtoreinforcementwithintheconcrete.
6.10.7.1.2 Embeddeditemsaremaintainedinthecorrectpositionwhiletheconcreteremainsplastic.
6.10.7.1.3 Theconcreteisproperlyconsolidatedaroundtheembeddeditem.
6.10.8 Markingandidentification
6.10.8.1
Each precast member shall be marked to indicate its location and orientation in the structure and
dateofmanufacture.
6.10.8.2
Identificationmarksshallcorrespondtoplacingdrawings.
6.10.9 Handling
6106
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.10.9.1
Memberdesignshallconsiderforcesanddistortionsduringcuring,stripping,storage,transportation,
anderectionsothatprecastmembersarenotoverstressedorotherwisedamaged.
6.10.9.2
Duringerection,precastmembersandstructuresshallbeadequatelysupportedandbracedtoensure
properalignmentandstructuralintegrityuntilpermanentconnectionsarecompleted.
6.10.10 Evaluationofstrengthofprecastconstruction
6.10.10.1 Aprecastelementtobemadecompositewithcastinplaceconcreteshallbepermittedtobetested
inflexureasaprecastelementaloneinaccordancewith6.10.10.1.1and6.10.10.1.2.
6.10.10.1.1 Testloads shall be appliedonly whencalculationsindicate the isolated precast elementwill not be
criticalincompressionorbuckling.
6.10.10.1.2 Thetestloadshallbethatloadwhich,whenappliedtotheprecastmemberalone,inducesthesame
totalforceinthetensionreinforcementaswouldbeinducedbyloadingthecompositememberwith
thetestloadrequiredby6.11.3.2.
6.10.10.2 Theprovisionsof6.11.5shallbethebasisforacceptanceorrejectionoftheprecastelement.
6.11
EVALUATIONOFSTRENGTHOFEXISTINGSTRUCTURES
6.11.1 StrengthevaluationGeneral
6.11.1.1
IfthereisdoubtthatapartorallofastructuremeetsthesafetyrequirementsofthisCode,astrength
evaluationshallbecarriedoutasrequiredbytheEngineer.
6.11.1.2
If the effect of the strength deficiency is well understood and if it is feasible to measure the
dimensionsandmaterialpropertiesrequiredforanalysis,analyticalevaluationsofstrengthbasedon
thosemeasurementsshallsuffice.Requireddatashallbedeterminedinaccordancewith6.11.2.
6.11.1.3
Iftheeffect ofthestrengthdeficiencyisnotwellunderstoodorifitisnotfeasibletoestablishthe
required dimensions and material properties by measurement, a load test shall be required if the
structureistoremaininservice.
6.11.1.4
If the doubt about safety of a part or all of a structure involves deterioration, and if the observed
responseduringtheloadtestsatisfiestheacceptancecriteria,thestructureorpartofthestructure
shall be permitted to remain in service for a specified time period. If deemed necessary by the
Engineer,periodicreevaluationsshallbeconducted.
6.11.2 Determinationofmaterialpropertiesandrequireddimensions
6.11.2.1
Dimensionsofthestructuralelementsshallbeestablishedatcriticalsections.
6.11.2.2
Locations and sizes of the reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, or tendons shall be
determined by measurement. It shall be permitted to base reinforcement locations on available
drawingsifspotchecksaremadeconfirmingtheinformationonthedrawings.
6.11.2.3
Ifrequired,concretestrengthshallbebasedonresultsofcylindertestsfromtheoriginalconstruction
or tests of cores removed from the part of the structure where the strength is in question. For
strength evaluation of an existing structure, cylinder or core test data shall be used to estimate an
equivalent .ThemethodforobtainingandtestingcoresshallbeinaccordancewithASTMC42M.
6107
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.11.2.4
If required, reinforcement or prestressing steel strength shall be based on tensile tests of

representativesamplesofthematerialinthestructureinquestion.
6.11.2.5
If the required dimensions and material properties are determined through measurements and
testing,andifcalculationscanbemadeinaccordancewith6.11.1.2,itshallbepermittedtoincrease
fromthosespecifiedin6.2.3,but shallnotbemorethan:
Tensioncontrolledsections,asdefinedin6.3.3.4
1.0
Compressioncontrolledsections,asdefinedin6.3.3.3:
Memberswithspiralreinforcementconformingto6.3.9.3
0.9
Otherreinforcedmembers
0.8
Shearand/ortorsion
0.8
Bearingonconcrete
0.8
6.11.3 Loadtestprocedure
6.11.3.1
Loadarrangement
Thenumberandarrangementofspansorpanelsloadedshallbeselectedtomaximizethedeflectionandstresses
in the critical regions of the structural elements of which strength is in doubt. More than one test load
arrangementshallbeusedifasinglearrangementwillnotsimultaneouslyresultinmaximumvaluesoftheeffects
(suchasdeflection,rotation,orstress)necessarytodemonstratetheadequacyofthestructure.
6.11.3.2 Loadintensity
Thetotaltestload(includingdeadloadalreadyinplace)shallnotbelessthanthelargerof(a),(b),and(c):
a) 1.15 1.5 0.4
b) 1.15 0.9 1.5
c) 1.3
The load factor on the live load in (b) shall be permitted to be reduced to 0.45 except for garages, areas
occupiedasplacesofpublicassembly,andallareaswhere isgreaterthan4.8kN/m2.Itshallbepermittedto
reduce inaccordancewiththeprovisionsoftheapplicablegeneralbuildingcode.
6.11.3.3
Aloadtestshallnotbemadeuntilthatportionofthestructuretobesubjectedtoloadisatleast56
days old. If the owner of the structure, the contractor, and all involved parties agree, it shall be
permittedtomakethetestatanearlierage.
6.11.4 Loadingcriteria
6.11.4.1
The initial value for all applicable response measurements (such as deflection, rotation, strain, slip,
crackwidths)shallbeobtainednotmorethan1hourbeforeapplicationofthefirstloadincrement.
Measurements shall be made at locations where maximum response is expected. Additional
measurementsshallbemadeifrequired.
6.11.4.2
Testloadshallbeappliedinnotlessthanfourapproximatelyequalincrements.
6.11.4.3
Uniformtestloadshallbeappliedinamannertoensureuniformdistributionoftheloadtransmitted
tothestructureorportionofthestructurebeingtested.Archingoftheappliedloadshallbeavoided.
6.11.4.4
A set of response measurements shall be made after each load increment is applied and after the
totalloadhasbeenappliedonthestructureforatleast24hours.
6.11.4.5
Total test load shall be removed immediately after all response measurements defined in 6.11.4.4
aremade.
6.11.4.6
Asetoffinalresponsemeasurementsshallbemade24hoursafterthetestloadisremoved.
6108
Vol.2
Chapter1
6.11.5 Acceptancecriteria
6.11.5.1
The portion of the structure tested shall show no evidence of failure. Spalling and crushing of
compressedconcreteshallbeconsideredanindicationoffailure.
6.11.5.2
MeasureddeflectionsshallsatisfyeitherEq.(6.11.1)or(6.11.2):
6.11.1
6.11.2
Ifthemeasuredmaximumandresidualdeflections,
permittedtorepeattheloadtest.
and
,donotsatisfyEq.(6.11.1)or(6.11.2),itshallbe
Therepeattestshallbeconductednotearlierthan72hoursafterremovalofthefirsttestload.Theportionofthe
structuretestedintherepeattestshallbeconsideredacceptableifdeflectionrecovery satisfiesthecondition:
6.11.3
where isthemaximumdeflectionmeasuredduringthesecondtestrelativetothepositionofthestructureat
thebeginningofthesecondtest.
6.11.5.3
Structuralmemberstestedshallnothavecracksindicatingtheimminenceofshearfailure.
6.11.5.4
Inregionsofstructuralmemberswithouttransversereinforcement,appearanceofstructuralcracks
inclined to the longitudinal axis and having a horizontal projection longer than the depth of the
memberatmidpointofthecrackshallbeevaluated.
6.11.5.5
Inregionsofanchorageandlapsplices,theappearancealongthelineofreinforcementofaseriesof
shortinclinedcracksorhorizontalcracksshallbeevaluated.
6.11.6 Provisionforlowerloadrating
If the structure under investigation does not satisfy conditions or criteria of 6.11.1.2, 6.11.5.2, or 6.11.5.3, the
structure shall be permitted for use at a lower load rating based on the results of the load test or analysis, if
approvedbytheEngineer.
6.11.7 Safety
6.11.7.1
Loadtestsshallbeconductedinsuchamannerastoprovideforsafetyoflifeandstructureduringthe
test.
6.11.7.2
Safetymeasuresshallnotinterferewithloadtestproceduresoraffectresults.
6.12
COMPOSITECONCRETEFLEXURALMEMBERS
6.12.1 Scope
6.12.1.1
Provisions of Sec. 6.12 shall apply for design of composite concrete flexural members defined as
precast concrete, castinplaceconcrete elements, orboth,constructed in separateplacementsbut
sointerconnectedthatallelementsrespondtoloadsasaunit.
6.12.1.2
AllprovisionsoftheCodeshallapplytocompositeconcreteflexuralmembers,exceptasspecifically
modifiedinSec.6.12.
6.12.2 General
6.12.2.1
Theuseofanentirecompositememberorportionsthereofforresistingshearandmomentshallbe
permitted.
6109
Part6
StructuralDesign
6.12.2.2
Individualelementsshallbeinvestigatedforallcriticalstagesofloading.
6.12.2.3
If the specified strength, unit weight, or other properties of the various elements are different,
propertiesoftheindividualelementsorthemostcriticalvaluesshallbeusedindesign.
6.12.2.4
Instrengthcomputationsofcompositemembers,nodistinctionshallbemadebetweenshoredand
unshoredmembers.
6.12.2.5
All elements shall be designed to support all loads introduced prior to full development of design
strengthofcompositemembers.
6.12.2.6
Reinforcement shall be provided as required to minimize cracking and to prevent separation of

individualelementsofcompositemembers.
6.12.2.7
Compositemembersshallmeetrequirementsforcontrolofdeflectionsinaccordancewith6.2.5.4.
6.12.3 Shoring
Whenused,shoringshallnotberemoveduntilsupportedelementshavedevelopeddesignpropertiesrequiredto
supportallloadsandlimitdeflectionsandcrackingattimeofshoringremoval.
6.12.4 Verticalshearstrength
6.12.4.1
Whereanentirecompositememberisassumedtoresistverticalshear,designshallbeinaccordance
withrequirementsofSec.6.4asforamonolithicallycastmemberofthesamecrosssectionalshape.
6.12.4.2
Shearreinforcementshallbefullyanchoredintointerconnectedelementsinaccordancewith8.2.10.
6.12.4.3
Extendedandanchoredshearreinforcementshallbepermittedtobeincludedastiesforhorizontal
shear.
6.12.5 Horizontalshearstrength
6.12.5.1
Inacompositemember,fulltransferofhorizontalshearforcesshallbeensuredatcontactsurfacesof
interconnectedelements.
6.12.5.2
For the provisions of 6.12.5, shall be taken as the distance from extreme compression fiber for
entirecompositesectiontocentroidoflongitudinaltensionreinforcement,ifany.
6.12.5.3
Unless calculated in accordance with 6.12.5.4, design of cross sections subject to horizontal shear
shallbebasedon
where
6.12.1
isnominalhorizontalshearstrengthinaccordancewith6.12.5.3.1through6.12.5.3.4.
6.12.5.3.1 Wherecontactsurfacesareclean,freeoflaitance,andintentionallyroughened,
0.55.
takengreaterthan0.55
6.12.5.3.2
shallnotbe
Whereminimumtiesareprovidedinaccordancewith6.12.6,andcontactsurfacesarecleanandfree
oflaitance,butnotintentionallyroughened,
.
6.12.5.3.3 Wheretiesareprovidedinaccordancewith6.12.6,andcontactsurfacesareclean,freeoflaitance,
andintentionallyroughenedtoafullamplitudeofapproximately6mm,
shallbetakenequalto
1.8 0.6
,butnotgreaterthan3.5
.Valuesfor in6.4.5.4.3shallapplyand is
/
.
6110
Vol.2
Chapter1
3.5
6.12.5.3.4 Where atsectionconsideredexceeds

accordancewith6.4.5.4.
6.12.5.4
,designforhorizontalshearshallbein
Asanalternativeto6.12.5.3,horizontalshearshallbepermittedtobedeterminedbycomputingthe
actualchangeincompressiveortensileforceinanysegment,andprovisionsshallbemadetotransfer
thatforceashorizontalsheartothesupportingelement.Thefactoredhorizontalshearforce shall
notexceedhorizontalshearstrength
asgivenin6.12.5.3.1through6.12.5.3.4,whereareaof
.
contactsurfaceshallbesubstitutedfor
6.12.5.4.1 Wheretiesprovidedtoresisthorizontalsheararedesignedtosatisfy6.12.5.4,thetieareatotie
spacingratioalongthemembershallapproximatelyreflectthedistributionofshearforcesinthe
member.
6.12.5.5
Wheretensionexistsacrossanycontactsurfacebetweeninterconnectedelements,sheartransferby
contactshallbepermittedonlywhenminimumtiesareprovidedinaccordancewith6.12.6.
6.12.6 Tiesforhorizontalshear
6.12.6.1
Wheretiesareprovidedtotransferhorizontalshear,tieareashallnotbelessthanthatrequiredby
6.4.3.5.3,andtiespacingshallnotexceedfourtimestheleastdimensionofsupportedelement,nor
exceed600mm.
6.12.6.2
Tiesforhorizontalshearshallconsistofsinglebarsorwire,multiplelegstirrups,orverticallegsof
weldedwirereinforcement.
6.12.6.3
Alltiesshallbefullyanchoredintointerconnectedelementsinaccordancewith8.2.10.
6111
Chapter 7
MASONRYSTRUCTURES
7.1
INTRODUCTION
7.1.1 Scope
ThischapteroftheCodecoversthedesign,constructionandqualitycontrolofmasonrystructures.
7.1.2 SymbolsandNotation
Thefollowingunitsshallbegenerallyimplicitinthischapterforthecorrespondingquantities:
Lengths
m m
Areas
mm2
Momentofinertia
mm4
Force
Moment,torsion
Nmm
Stress,strength
N/mm2
a = depthofequivalentrectangularstressblockforstrengthdesign
Ab = crosssectionalareaofanchorbolt
Ae = effectiveareaofmasonry
Ag = grossareaofwall
Amv= netareaofmasonrysectionboundedbywallthicknessandlengthofsectioninthedirectionof
shearforceconsidered
Ap = area of tension (pullout) cone of an embedded anchor bolt projected into the surface of
masonry
As = effectivecrosssectionalareaofreinforcementinaflexuralmember
Av = areaofsteelrequiredforshearreinforcementperpendiculartothelongitudinalreinforcement
As = effectivecrosssectionalareaofcompressionreinforcementinaflexuralmember
b = effectivewidthofrectangularmemberorwidthofflangeforTandIsection
bt = computedtensionforceonanchorbolt
bv = allowableshearforceonanchorbolt
bw = widthofwebinTandImember
Bt = allowabletensionforceonanchorbolt
Bv = computedshearforceonanchorbolt
c
= distancefromtheneutralaxistoextremefibre
Cd = masonryshearstrengthcoefficient
d = distancefromthecompressionfaceofaflexuralmembertothecentroidoflongitudinaltensile
reinforcement
db = diameterofthereinforcingbar,diameterofbolt
e
= eccentricityofPu
emu = maximumusablecompressivestrainofmasonry
Part6
StructuralDesign
6365
Part6
StructuralDesign
Em = modulusofelasticityofmasonry
Es = modulusofelasticityofsteel
fa = computedaxialcompressivestressduetodesignaxialload
fb = computedflexuralstressintheextremefibreduetodesignbendingloadonly
fmd = computedcompressivestressinmasonryduetodeadloadonly
fr = modulusofrupture
fs = computedstressinreinforcementduetodesignload
fy = tensileyieldstressofreinforcement
fv = computedshearstressduetodesignload
fm

= specifiedcompressivestrengthofmasonryattheageof28days
= loadsduetoweightandpressureoffluidsorrelatedmomentsandforces
Fa = allowableaverageaxialcompressivestressforcentroidallyappliedaxialloadonly
Fb = allowableflexuralcompressivestressifmemberswerecarryingbendingloadonly
Fbr = allowablebearingstress
Fs = allowablestressinreinforcement
Fsc = allowablecompressivestressincolumnreinforcement
Ft = allowableflexuraltensilestressinmasonry
Fv = allowableshearstressinmasonry
G = shearmodulusofmasonry
h = heightofwallbetweenpointsofsupport
h = effectiveheightofawallorcolumn
H = actualheightbetweenlateralsupports
H' = heightofopening
I
= momentofinertiaabouttheneutralaxisofthecrosssectionalarea
Ig,Icr= gross,crackedmomentofinertiaofthewallcrosssection
j = ratioordistancebetweencentroidofflexuralcompressiveforceandcentroidoftensileforces
to
depth,d
k
= ratioofdepthofthecompressionzoneinflexuralmembertodepth,d;stiffeningcoefficient
l = lengthofawallorsegment
lb = embedmentdepthofanchorbolt
lbe = anchorboltedgedistance,theleastlengthmeasuredfromtheedgeofmasonrytothesurface
of
theanchorbolt
ld = requireddevelopmentlengthofreinforcement
L
= actuallengthofwall
M = designmoment
Mc = moment capacity of the compression steel in a flexural member about the centroid of the
tensile
force
Mcr = crackingmomentstrengthofthemasonrywall
Mm = themomentofthecompressiveforceinthemasonryaboutthecentroidofthetensileforcein
thereinforcement
Mn = nominalmomentstrengthofthemasonrywall
6366
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
Ms = themomentofthetensileforceinthereinforcementaboutthecentroidofthecompressive
forceinthemasonry
Mser = servicemomentatthemidheightofthepanel,includingPDeltaeffects
Mu = factoredmoment
n = modularratio=Es/Em
P = designaxialload
Pa = allowablecentroidalaxialloadforreinforcedmasonrycolumns
Pb = nominalbalanceddesignaxialstrength
Pf = loadfromtributaryfloororroofarea
Po = nominalaxialloadstrengthwithbending
Pu = factoredaxialload
Puf = factoredloadfromtributaryfloororroofloads
Puw = factoredweightofthewalltributarytothesectionunderconsideration
Pw = weightofthewalltributarytothesectionunderconsideration
rb = ratiooftheareaofbarscutofftothetotalareaofbarsatthesection
s
= spacingofstirrupsorbentbarsinadirectionparalleltothatofthemainreinforcement
= sectionmodulus
= effectivethicknessofawythe,wallorcolumn
u = bondstressperunitofsurfaceareaofbar
V = totaldesignshearforce
Vn = nominalshearstrength
Vm = nominalshearstrengthprovidedbymasonry
Vs = nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyshearreinforcement
u = horizontaldeflectionatmidheightunderfactoredload;PDeltaeffectsshallbeincludedin
deflectioncalculation
= steelratio=As/bd
n = ratioofdistributedshearreinforcementonaplaneperpendiculartotheplaneofAmv
o = sumoftheperimetersofallthelongitudinalreinforcement
= strengthreductionfactor.
7.1.3 Definitions
Forthepurposeofthischapter,thefollowingdefinitionsshallbeapplicable.
BEDBLOCK:Ablockbeddedonawall,columnorpiertodisperseaconcentratedloadonamasonry
element.
BEDJOINT:Ahorizontalmortarjointuponwhichmasonryunitsareplaced.
BOND : Arrangement of masonry units in successive courses to tie the masonry together both
longitudinallyandtransversely;thearrangementisusuallyworkedouttoensurethatnoverticaljointof
onecourseisexactlyovertheoneinthenextcourseaboveorbelowitandthereismaximumpossible
amountoflap.
BONDBEAM:Ahorizontalgroutedelementwithinmasonryinwhichreinforcementisembedded.
BUTTRESS : A pier of masonry built as an integral part of wall and projecting from either or both
surfaces, decreasing in crosssectional area from base to top and conforming to the requirement of
Sec4.3.3(c)(ii).
CAVITYWALL:Awallcomprisingtwolimbseachbuiltupassingleormultiwytheunitsandseparated
bya50115mmwidecavity.Thelimbsaretiedtogetherbymetaltiesorbondingunitsforstructural
integrity.
6367
Part6
StructuralDesign
CELL:Avoidspacehavingagrosscrosssectionalareagreaterthan1000mm2.
COLUMN:Anisolatedverticalloadbearingmemberthewidthofwhichdoesnotexceedthreetimesthe
thickness.
CROSSJOINT:Averticaljointnormaltothefaceofthewall.
CROSSSECTIONAL AREA OF MASONRY UNIT: Net crosssectional area of masonry unit is the gross
crosssectionalareaminustheareaofcellularspace.
CURTAINWALL:Anonloadbearingselfsupportingwallsubjecttotransverselateralloads,andlaterally
supportedbyverticalorhorizontalstructuralmemberwherenecessary.
DIMENSIONS:
Actualdimensionsthemeasureddimensionsofadesignateditem;suchasadesignatedmasonryunit
or wall used in the structures. The actual dimension shall not vary from the specified dimension by
morethantheamountallowedintheappropriatestandardmentionedinSec2.2.4ofPart5.
Nominaldimensions;specifieddimensionsplusthethicknessofthejointwithwhichtheunitislaid.
Specified dimensions the dimensions specified for the manufacture or construction of masonry,
masonryunits,jointsoranyothercomponentsofastructure.Unlessotherwisestated,allcalculations
shallbemadeusingorbasedonspecifieddimensions.
FACED WALL: A wall in which facing and backing of two different materials are bonded together to
ensurecommonactionunderload.
GROUT : A mixture of cementitious materials and aggregate to which water is added such that the
mixturewillflowwithoutsegregationoftheconstituents.
GROUTEDMASONRY:
Groutedhollowunitmasonrythatformofgroutedmasonryconstructioninwhichcertaindesignated
cellsofhollowunitsarecontinuouslyfilledwithgrout.
Groutedmultiwythemasonrythatformofgroutedmasonryconstructioninwhichthespacebetween
thewythesissolidlyorperiodicallyfilledwithgrout.
HOLLOW UNIT: A masonry unit of which net crosssectional area in any plane parallel to the bearing
surfaceislessthan75percentofitsgrosscrosssectionalareameasuredinthesameplane.
JAMB:Sideofanopeninginwall.
JOINTS:
Bedjoints;themortarjointthatishorizontalatthetimethemasonryunitsareplaced.
Collarjoint;thevertical,longitudinal,mortarorgroutedjoints.
Headjoint;themortarjointhavingaverticaltransverseplane.
LATERALSUPPORT:Asupportwhichenablesamasonryelementtoresistlateralloadand/orrestrains
lateraldeflectionofamasonryelementatthepointofsupport.
LIMB:Innerorouterportionofacavitywall.
LOADBEARINGWALL:Awalldesignedtocarryanimposedverticalloadinadditiontoitsownweight,
togetherwithanylateralload.
MASONRY:Anassemblageofmasonryunitsproperlybondedtogetherwithmortar.
MASONRY UNIT : Individual units, such as brick, tile, stone or concrete block, which are bonded
togetherwithmortartoformamasonryelementsuchaswalls,columns,piers,buttress,etc.
PANEL WALL : An exterior non load bearing wall in framed structure, supported at each storey but
subjecttolateralloads.
PARTITIONWALL:Aninteriornonloadbearingwall,onestoreyorpartstoreyinheight.
PIER : A projection from either or both sides of a wall forming an integral part of the wall and
conformingtotherequirementofSec4.4.3.3.c(ii).
PILASTER : A thickened section forming integral part of a wall placed at intervals along the wall, to
increase the stiffness of the wall or to carry a vertical concentrated load. Thickness of a pier is the
overall thickness including the thickness of the wall or, when bounded into a limb of cavity wall, the
thicknessobtainedbytreatingthatlimbasanindependentwall.
6368
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
PRISM : An assemblage of masonry units bonded by mortar with or without grout used as a test
specimenfordeterminingpropertiesofmasonry.
REINFORCEDMASONRY:Themasonryconstruction,inwhichreinforcementactinginconjunctionwith
themasonryisusedtoresistforcesandisdesignedinaccordancewithSec4.6.
SHEARWALL : Aload bearing wall designed to carry horizontal forces acting initsown plane with or
withoutverticalimposedloads.
SOLIDUNIT:Amasonryunitwhosenetcrosssectionalareainanyplaneparalleltothebearingsurface
is75percentormoreofthegrosscrosssectionalareainthesameplane.
STACKBOND:Abondinbearingandnonbearingwalls,exceptveneeredwalls,inwhichlessthan75per
centof theunitsinanytransverseverticalplanelaptheendsoftheunitsbelowadistancelessthan
onehalftheheightoftheunit,orlessthanonefourththelengthoftheunit.
VENEEREDWALL:Awallinwhichthefacingisattachedtothebackingbutnotsobondedastoresultin
acommonactionunderload.
WALLJOINT:Averticaljointparalleltothefaceofthewall.
WALLTIE:Ametalfastenerwhichconnectswythesofmasonrytoeachotherortoothermaterials.
WYTHE:Portionofawallwhichisonemasonryunitinthickness.
7.2
Materials
7.2.1 General
AllmaterialsusedinmasonryconstructionshallconformtotherequirementsspecifiedinPart5ofthisCode.If
norequirementsarespecifiedforamaterial,qualityshallbebasedongenerallyacceptedgoodpractice,subject
totheapprovalofthebuildingofficial.
7.2.2 MasonryUnits
ThefollowingtypesofmasonryunitswhichconformtothestandardsmentionedinSec2.2.4ofPart5maybe
usedinmasonryconstruction:
(a) Commonbuildingclaybricks
(b) Burntclayhollowbricks
(c) Burntclayfacingbricks
(d) Hollowconcreteblocks
OthertypesofmasonryunitsconformingtoSec2.2.4ofPart5mayalsobeused.
7.2.3
MortarandGrout
Mortar and grout for masonry construction shall conform to the requirements specified in Part 5. Mix
proportionsandcompressivestrengthofsomecommonlyusedmortarsaregiveninTable6.7.1.
7.3
AllowableSTRESSES
7.3.1 General
Stressesinmasonryshall notexceed the valuesgivenin this section. Allallowable stresses forworkingstress
designmaybeincreasedonethirdwhenconsideringwindorearthquakeforceseitheractingaloneorcombined
withverticalloads.Noincreaseshallbeallowedforverticalloadsactingalone.
7.3.2 SpecifiedCompressiveStrengthofMasonry, f m
Theallowablestressesformasonryconstructionshallbebasedonthevalueof f m asdeterminedbySec7.3.3
below.
6369
Part6
StructuralDesign
Table6.7.1:MixProportionandStrengthofCommonlyusedMortars
Gradeof
Mortar
MixProportionbyVolume1,2
MinimumCompressive
Strengthat28days,
N/mm2
Cement
Sand
M1
10
M2
7.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
1.Sandandcementshallbemeasuredinloosevolumeandsandshallbewellgradedwitha
minimumF.M.of1.2.
2.Limetoamaximumof 1 thpartbyvolumeofcementmaybeusedtoincreaseworkability.
4
7.3.3 Compliancewith
Compliancewiththerequirementsforthespecifiedcompressivestrengthofmasonry, f m shallbeinaccordance
withthefollowing:
7.3.3.1
Masonry Prism Testing : The compressive strength of masonry based on tests at 28 days in
accordancewith"StandardTestMethodforCompressiveStrengthofMasonryPrisms",(ASTME447)
.Verificationbymasonryprismtestingshallmeetthe
foreachsetofprismsshallequalorexceed f m
following:
(a)
Testing Prior to Construction: A set of five masonry prisms shall be built and tested in
accordancewithASTME447priortothestartofconstruction.Materialsusedforprisms
shallbesameasusedintheproject.Prismsshallbeconstructedundertheobservationof
theengineeroranapprovedagencyandtestedbyanapprovedagency.
(b)
Testing During Construction: When full allowable stresses are used in design, a set of
threeprismsshallbebuiltandtestedduringconstructioninaccordancewith(ASTME447)
for each 500 square meters of wall area, but not less than one set of three masonry
prismsforanyproject.Notestingduringconstructionshallberequiredwhen50%ofthe
allowablestressesareusedindesign.
7.3.4 QualityControl
Qualitycontrolshallinclude,butnotbelimitedtoassurethat:
(a) Masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime, aggregate and all other materials meet the
requirements of the applicable standard of quality and that they are properly stored and
preparedforuse.
(b) Mortarandgroutareproperlymixedusingspecifiedproportionsofingredients.Themethodof
measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that proportions of materials are
controlled.
(c) Construction details, procedures and workmanship are in accordance with the plans and
specification.
(d) Placement,splicesandbardiametersareinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthischapterand
theplansandspecifications.
7.3.5 AllowableStressesinMasonry
When the quality control provisions specified in Sec 7.3.4 above do not include requirements for special
inspection,theallowabledesignstressesinthissectionshallbereducedby50percent.
6370
(a) CompressiveStress,Axial
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
i) Unreinforcedmasonrywalls,columnsandreinforcedmasonrywall
Fa =
3
f m h
1
5 42t
(7.3.1)
ii) Reinforcedmasonrycolumns
3
f m
h
As
Fa = +
Fsc 1
5 1.5 Ae
42t
(7.3.2)
(b) CompressiveStress,Flexural
Fb = 0.33 f m
10N mm 2
(7.3.3)
(c) TensileStressforWalls,Flexure
The allowable tensile stress for walls in flexure of masonry structures without tensile
reinforcementusingmortarTypeM1orM2 shallnotexceedthevaluesspecifiedinTables
6.7.2and6.7.3.ForTypeM3andM4mortar,thevalueshallbereducedby25percent.
Notensionisallowedacrossheadjointsinstackbondmasonry.Valuesfortensionnormal
toheadjointsareforrunningbond.Thesevaluesshallnotbeusedforhorizontalflexural
memberssuchasbeams,girdersorlintels.
Table6.7.2:FlexuralTension,Ft
Masonry
NormaltoBedJoints
N/mm2
NormaltoHeadJoints
N/mm2
SolidUnits
0.20
0.40
HollowUnits
0.12
0.25
Table6.7.3:TensionNormaltoHeadJoints,Ft
Masonry
ClayUnits
ConcreteUnits
N/mm2
N/mm2
SolidUnits
0.35
0.40
HollowUnits
0.22
0.25
(d) ReinforcingBondStress,u
PlainBars 0.30N/mm2
DeformedBars 1.0N/mm2
(e) ShearStressforFlexuralMembers,Fv
i) Whennoshearreinforcementisused
Fv = 0.083 f m 0.25
N/mm2
(7.3.4)
ii) Whenshearreinforcementisdesignedtotakeentireshearforce
Fv = 0.25 f m 0.75
(f) ShearStressforShearWalls,Fv
N/mm2
(7.3.5)
i) Unreinforcedmasonry
Forclayunits:
6371
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fv = 0.025 f m 0.40
N/mm2
Forconcreteunits:
M1orM2Mortar0.20N/mm2
M3Mortar 0.12N/mm2
(7.3.6)
ii) TheallowableshearstressforreinforcedmasonryshearwallsshallbeaccordingtoTable6.7.4.
7.3.6 AllowableStressesinReinforcement
(a) TensileStress
i Deformedbars,
Fs = 0.5 f y , 165
N/mm2
(7.3.7)
ii)Ties,anchorsandplainbars,
Fs = 0.4 f y , 135
N/mm2
(7.3.8)
Table6.7.4:AllowableShearStressforReinforcedMasonryShearWalls,Fv
Fv,N/mm2
M/Vd
MaximumAllowable
N/mm2
Masonry
<1
M
1
f m
4
Vd
36
0.083 f m
0.4 0.2
Vd
takingall
shear
0.17
Reinforceme
nttakingall
<1
1
M
4
f m
Vd
24
0.125 f m
0.6 0.2
Vd
shear
(b) CompressiveStress
0.37
i) Deformedbarsincolumnsandshearwalls,
Fsc = 0.4 f y 165
N/mm2
(7.3.9)
ii) Deformedbarsinflexuralmembers
Fsc = 0.5 f y 165
N/mm2
(7.3.10)
7.3.7 CombinedCompressiveStress
Members subject to combined axial and flexural stresses shall be designed in accordance with accepted
principlesofmechanicsorinaccordancewiththefollowingformula:
fa
f
+ b 1
Fa Fb
(7.3.11)
7.3.8 ModulusofElasticity
The modulus of elasticity of masonry shall be determined by the secant method. The slope of the line
connectingthepoints0.05 f m and0.33 f m onthestressstraincurveshallbetakenasthemodulusofelasticity
6372
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
ofmasonry.Ifrequired,actualvaluesshallbeestablishedbytests.Thesevaluesarenottobereducedby50
percentasspecifiedinSec7.3.5(a).
(a) ModulusofElasticityforMasonry
E m =750 f m 15,000
N/mm2
(7.3.12)
(b) ModulusofElasticityforSteel
Es = 200,000
N/mm2
(7.3.13)
(7.3.14)
(c) ShearModulusofMasonry
G = 0.4 Em
7.3.9 ShearandTensiononEmbeddedAnchorBolts
7.3.9.1
Allowable loads and placement requirements for anchor bolts shall be in accordance with the
following:
(a)
Bentbaranchorboltsshallhaveahookwitha90degreebendwithaninsidediameterof3db
plusanextensionof1.5dbatthefreeend.
(b)
Headedanchorboltsshallhaveastandardbolthead.
(c)
Plateanchorboltsshallhaveaplateweldedtotheshanktoprovideanchorageequivalentto
headedanchorbolts.
7.3.9.2
The effective embedment length, l b for bent bar anchors shall be the length of embedment
measured perpendicular from the surface of the masonry to the bearing surface of the bent end
minus one anchor bolt diameter. For plate or headed anchor bolts l b shall be the length of
embedmentmeasuredperpendicularfromthesurfaceofthemasonrytothebearingsurfaceofthe
plate or head of the anchorage. All bolts shall be grouted in place with at least 25 mm of grout
between the bolt and the masonry except that 6 mm diameter bolts may be placed in bed joints
whichareatleasttwiceasthickasthediameterofthebolt.
7.3.9.3
AllowableShearForce
Allowable loads in shear shall be according to Table 6.7.5 or lesser of the value obtained from the
followingformulae:
Bv = 1070( f m Ab )
(7.3.15)
Bv = 0.12 Ab f y
(7.3.16)
1/ 4
Whenthedistance l beislessthan12db,thevalueofBvinEq(7.3.15)shallbereducedtozeroata
distance l be equal to 40 mm. Where adjacent anchors are spaced closer than 8db, the allowable
shear of the adjacent anchors determined by Eq (7.3.15) shall be reduced by interpolation to 0.75
timestheallowableshearvalueatacentretocentrespacingof4db.
Table6.7.5:AllowableShear,BvforEmbeddedAnchorBoltsforMasonry,kN*
BentBarAnchorBoltDiameter,mm
fm

N/mm2
10
12
16
20
22
25
28
10
2.0
3.7
5.9
7.9
8.5
9.1
9.6
12
2.0
3.7
5.9
8.2
8.3
9.5
10.1
13
2.0
3.7
5.9
8.5
9.2
9.8
10.4
17
2.0
3.7
5.9
8.5
9.7
10.3
11.0
6373
Part6
StructuralDesign
fm

N/mm2
10
12
16
20
22
25
28
20
2.0
3.7
5.9
8.5
10.1
10.8
11.5
27
2.0
3.7
5.9
8.5
10.9
11.6
12.3
*ValuesareforboltsofatleastASTMA307quality.BoltsshallbethosespecifiedinSec
4.3.9.1.
7.3.9.4
AllowableTension
Allowable tension shall be the lesser value selected from Table 6.7.6 and Table 6.7.7 or shall be
determinedfromlesserofthevaluesobtainedfromthefollowingformulae:
Bt = 0.04 A p
Bt = 0.2 Ab f y
f m
(7.3.17)
(7.3.18)
The area Ap shall be the lesser of the area obtained from Eq (7.3.17) and (7.3.18) and where the
projectedareasofadjacentanchorboltsoverlap,Apofeachanchorboltshallbereducedby50per
centoftheoverlappingarea.
A p = l b
(7.3.19)
A p = l be
(7.3.20)
Table6.7.6:AllowableTension,BtforEmbeddedAnchorBoltsforMasonry,kN1,2
EmbedmentLength,lb,orEdgeDistance,lbe,mm
fm

N/mm2
50
75
100
125
150
200
250
10
1.0
2.4
4.3
6.7
9.7
17.3
27.0
12
1.2
2.6
4.7
7.4
10.6
18.9
29.6
13
1.2
2.8
5.0
7.8
11.2
20.0
31.2
17
1.3
3.1
5.6
8.7
12.6
22.4
35.0
20
1.5
3.4
6.7
9.5
13.8
24.5
38.2
27
1.7
3.9
7.0
11.0
15.9
28.3
44.1
Theallowabletensionvaluesarebasedoncompressivestrengthofmasonryassemblages.Whereyield
strengthofanchorboltsteelgoverns,theallowabletensionisgiveninTable6.7.7.
2
ValuesareforboltsofatleastASTMA307quality.BoltsshallbethosespecifiedinSec7.3.9.1.
Table6.7.7:AllowableTension,BtforEmbeddedAnchorBoltsforMasonry,kN1
6
10
12
16
20
22
25
28
1.5
3.5
6.2
9.8
14.1
19.2
25.1
31.8
7.3.9.5
ValuesareforboltsofatleastASTMA307quality.BoltsshallbethosespecifiedinSec7.3.9.
CombinedShearandTension
Anchor bolts subjected to combined shear and tension shall be designed in accordance with the
formulagivenbelow:
6374
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
bt bv
+
1.00
Bt Bv
7.3.9.6
Chapter7
7.3.22
MinimumEdgeDistance, l be
Theminimumvalueof l bemeasuredfromtheedgeofthemasonryparalleltotheanchorbolttothe
surfaceoftheanchorboltshallbe40mm.
7.3.9.7
MinimumEmbedmentDepth, l b
Theminimumembedmentdepth l bshallbe4dbbutnotlessthan50mm.
7.3.9.8
MinimumSpacingBetweenBolts
Theminimumcentretocentrespacingbetweenanchorsshallbe4db.
7.3.10 LoadTest
Forloadtest,themembershallbesubjecttoasuperimposedloadequaltotwicethedesignliveloadplusone
halfofthedeadload.Thisloadshallbemaintainedforaperiodof24hours.If,duringthetestoruponremoval
oftheload,themembershowsevidenceoffailure,suchchangesormodificationsasarenecessarytomakethe
structureadequatefortheratedcapacityshallbemade;orwherepossible,alowerratingshallbeestablished.A
flexural member shall be considered to have passed the test if the maximum deflection at the end of the 24
2
hourperiodneitherexceeds0.005 l nor0.00025 l t andthebeamandslabsshowarecoveryofatleast75per

centoftheobserveddeflectionwithin24hoursafterremovaloftheload.
7.3.11 ReuseofMasonryUnits
Masonryunitsmaybereusedwhenclean,unbrokenandconformstotherequirementsofPart5.Allstructural
propertiesofmasonryofreclaimedunits,especiallyadhesionbond,shallbedeterminedbyapprovedtest.The
allowable working stress shall not exceed 50 per cent of that permitted for new masonry units of the same
properties.
7.4
BASICDESIGNREQUIREMENTS
7.4.1 General
Masonrystructuresshallbedesignedaccordingtotheprovisionsofthissection.Therequireddesignstrengths
ofmasonrymaterialsandanyspecialrequirementsshallbespecifiedintheplansubmittedforapproval.
7.4.2 DesignConsiderations
7.4.2.1
Masonry structures shall be designed based on working stress and linear stressstrain distribution.
Requirements for working stress design of unreinforced and reinforced masonry structures are
providedinSec4.5and4.6respectively.Inlieuoftheworkingstressdesignmethod,slenderwallsand
shearwallsmaybedesignedbythestrengthdesignmethodspecifiedinSec7.7.
Thestructureshall be proportionedsuchthat eccentricityof loadingon themembers isas small as
possible.Eccentricloadingshallpreferablybeavoidedbyproviding:
(a) adequatebearingoffloor/roofonthewalls
(b) adequatestiffnessinslabs,and
(c) fixityatthesupports.
6375
Part6
StructuralDesign
7.4.2.2
EffectiveHeight
(a)
Wall : The effective height of a wall shall be taken as the clear height between the lateral
supportsattopandbottominadirectionnormaltotheaxisconsidered.Formembersnot
supportedatthetopnormaltotheaxisconsidered,theeffectiveheightistwicetheheightof
the member above the support. Effective height less than the clear height may be used if
justified.
(b)
Column:Effectiveheightofthecolumnshallbetakenasactualheightforthedirectionitis
laterallysupportedandtwicetheactualheightforthedirectionitisnotlaterallysupported
atthetopnormaltotheaxisconsidered.
(c)
OpeninginWall:Whenopeningsoccurinawallsuchthatmasonrybetweentheopeningsis
bydefinitionacolumn,effectiveheightofmasonrybetweentheopeningsshallbeobtained
asfollows:
i)
When wall has full restraint at the top, effective height for the direction
perpendicular to the plane of wall equals 0.75H plus 0.25H', where H is the
distance between supports and H' is the height of the taller opening; and
effectiveheightforthedirectionparalleltothewallequalsH.
ii) When wallhaspartial restraintat the topandbottom, effective height for the
direction perpendicular to the plane of wall equals H when height of neither
openingexceeds0.5Handitisequalto2Hwhenheightofanyopeningexceeds
0.5H; and effective height for the direction parallel to the plane of the wall
equals2H.
7.4.2.3
EffectiveLength
EffectivelengthofawallfordifferentsupportconditionsshallbeasgiveninTable6.7.8.
7.4.2.4
EffectiveThickness
Theeffectivethicknessofwallsandcolumnsforuseinthecalculationofslendernessratio,shallbe
definedasfollows:
(a)
SolidWalls:Theeffectivethicknessofsolidwalls,facedwallsorgroutedwallsshallbethe
specifiedthicknessofthewall.
(b)
Solid Walls with Raked Mortar Joints: The effective thickness of solid walls with raked
mortarjointsshallbetheminimumthicknessmeasuredatthejoint.
(c)
Cavity Walls: When both limbs of a cavity wall are axially loaded, each limb shall be
consideredindependentlyandtheeffectivethicknessofeachlimbshallbedeterminedasin
(a)or(b)above.Ifoneofthelimbsisaxiallyloaded,theeffectivethicknessofthecavitywall
shallbetakenasthesquarerootofthesumofthesquaresoftheeffectivethicknessesof
thelimbs.
(d)
WallsStiffenedbyPilasters:Whensolidorcavitywallsarestiffenedbypilastersatintervals,
the effective thickness to be used for the calculation of h'/t ratio shall be determined as
follows:
i)
Solid Walls: For stiffened solid walls the effective thickness shall be the specified
thicknessmultipliedbythestiffeningcoefficient,k,valuesofwhicharegivenbelow:
l p wp
6376
StiffeningCoefficient,k*
t p tw
1.0
1.4
2.0
1.0
1.3
1.7
10
1.0
1.2
1.4
15
1.0
1.1
1.2
20ormore
1.0
1.0
1.0
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
*Linearinterpolationispermittedforobtainingintermediatevaluesofk
where, l p = centretocentrespacingofpilasters
ii)
tp = thicknessofpilasterincludingthewall
tw = specifiedthicknessofmainwall
wp = widthofpilasterinthedirectionofwall
Cavity Walls: When one or both limbs of a cavity wall are adequately bonded into
pilasters at intervals, the effective thickness of each limb shall be determined
separatelyasin(a),(b)ord(i)aboveandtheeffectivethicknessofthestiffenedcavity
wallshallbedeterminedinaccordancewith(c)above.
Where slenderness ratio of the wall is based on the effective length, the effective
thicknessshallbethesameasthatwithoutpilasters.
(e)
Columns: The effective thickness for rectangular columns in the direction considered is the
actualthicknessprovidedinthatdirection.Theeffectivethicknessfornonrectangularcolumns
is the thickness of a square column with the same moment of inertia about its axis as that
abouttheaxisconsideredintheactualcolumn.
Table6.7.8:EffectiveLengthofWalls
SupportCondition
EffectiveLength
Whereawalliscontinuousandissupportedbycrosswallandthere
isnoopeningwithinadistanceofH/8fromthefaceofcrosswall,
0.8L
Or
Whereawalliscontinuousandissupportedbypier/buttresses
conformingtoSec7.4.3.3(c)(ii).
Whereawallissupportedbycrosswallatoneendandcontinuous
withcrosswallatotherend,
0.9L
Or
Whereawallissupportedbypier/buttressesatoneendand
continuouswithpier/buttressesatotherendconformingto
Sec7.4.3.3(c)(ii).
Whereawallissupportedateachendbycrosswall,
Or
1.0L
Whereawallissupportedateachendbypier/buttresses
conformingtoSec7.4.3.3(c)(ii).
Whereawallisfreeatoneendandcontinuouswithacrosswallat
theotherend,
1.5L
Or
Whereawallisfreeatoneendandcontinuouswitha
pier/buttressesattheotherendconformingtoSec7.4.3.3(c)(ii).
Whereawallisfreeatoneendandsupportedattheotherendby
acrosswall,
2.0L
Or
Whereawallisfreeatoneendandsupportedattheotherendbya
pier/buttressesconformingtoSec7.4.3.3(c)(ii).
6377
Part6
StructuralDesign
7.4.2.5
7.4.2.6
SlendernessRatio
(a)
Walls: For a wall, slenderness ratio shall be the ratio of effective height to effective
thickness or effective length to effective thickness whichever less is. In case of a load
bearingwall,slendernessratioshallnotexceed20.
(b)
Column: For a column, slenderness ratio shall be taken to be the greater of the ratio of
effective heights to the respective effective thickness in the two principal directions.
Slendernessratioforaloadbearingcolumnshallnotexceed12.
EffectiveArea
Theeffectivecrosssectionalareashallbebasedontheminimumbeddedareaofthehollowunits,or
the gross area of solid units plus any grouted area. If hollow units are used perpendicular to the
direction of stress, the effective area shall be lesser of the minimum bedded area or the minimum
crosssectional area. If bed joints are raked, the effective area shall be correspondingly reduced.
Effectiveareasforcavitywallsshallbethatoftheloadedwythes.
7.4.2.7
FlexuralResistanceofCavityWalls
For computing the flexural resistance, lateral loads perpendicular to the plane of the wall shall be
distributedtothewythesaccordingtotheirrespectiveflexuralrigidities.
7.4.2.8
EffectiveWidthofIntersectingWalls
Whereashearwallisanchoredtoanintersectingwallorwalls,thewidthoftheoverhangingflange
formedbytheintersectedwallsoneithersideoftheshearwallshallnotexceed6timesthethickness
of the intersected wall. Limits of the effective flange may be waived if justified. Only the effective
areaofthewallparalleltotheshearforcesmaybeassumedtocarryhorizontalshear.
7.4.3 Supports
7.4.3.1
VerticalSupport
Structural members providing verticalsupport of masonryshall provide a bearingsurfaceon which
theinitialbedjointshallnotbelessthan6mmormorethan25mmandshallbeofnoncombustible
materials,exceptwheremasonryisanonstructuraldecorativefeatureorwearingsurface.
7.4.3.2
VerticalDeflection
Elements supporting masonry shall be designed so that their vertical deflection does not exceed
1/600oftheclearspanundertotalloads.Lintelsshallbesupportedoneachendsuchthatallowable
stressesinthesupportingmasonryarenotexceeded.Theminimumbearinglengthshallbe100mm.
7.4.3.3
LateralSupport
(a)
Lateralsupportofmasonrymaybeprovidedbycrosswalls,columns,piers,counterfortsor
buttresses when spanning horizontally or by floors, beams or roofs when spanning
vertically.
(b)
Lateral supports for a masonry element such as load bearing wall or column shall be
providedto
i) limit the slenderness of a masonry element so as to prevent or reduce possibility of
bucklingofthememberduetoverticalloads;and
ii)
(c)
resist the horizontal components of forces so as to ensure stability of a structure

againstoverturning.
From consideration of slenderness (i.e. requirement b(i) above), masonry elements may be
consideredtobelaterallysupportedif
i) incaseofawall,whereslendernessratioisbasedoneffectiveheight,floor/roofslab
(orbeamsandslab)irrespectiveofthedirectionofspan,bearsonthesupportedwall
aswellascrosswalls,totheextentofatleast100mm;
6378
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
ii) in case of a wall, when slenderness ratio is based on its effective length, a cross
wall/pier/buttress of thickness equal to or more than half the thickness of the
supported wall or 125 mm, whichever is more and average length equal to or more
thanonefifthoftheheightofthewall,isbuiltatrightangletothewallandproperly
bonded;
iii) in case of a column, an RC or timber beam/R S joist/roof truss, is supported on the
column.Inthiscase,thecolumnwillnotbeconsideredtobelaterallysupportedinthe
directionatrightangletoit;and
iv) in case of a column, an RC beam forming a part of beam and slab construction, is
supported on the column, and the slab adequately bears on stiffening walls. This
construction will provide lateral support to the column, in the direction of both
horizontalaxes.
7.4.4 Stability
A wall or column subject to vertical and lateral loads may be considered to provide adequate lateral support
from consideration of stability, if the construction providing the support is capable of resisting the following
forces:
7.4.4.1
(a)
Simplestaticreactionsatthepointoflateralsupporttoallthelateralloads;plus
(b)
A lateral load equal to 2.5% of the total vertical load that the wall or column is
designatedtocarryatthepointoflateralsupport.
Incaseofloadbearingbuildingsuptofivestoreys,stabilityrequirementsmaybeconsideredtohave
beensatisfiedifthefollowingconditionsaremet.
(a)
Heighttowidthratioofbuildingdoesnotexceed2.
(b)
Crosswallsactingasstiffeningwallscontinuousfromouterwalltoouterwallorouterwalltoa
loadbearinginnerwall,andofthicknessandspacingasgiveninTable6.7.9areprovided.
Note:Ifstiffeningwallorwallsthatareinaline,areinterruptedbyopenings,lengthofsolidwallorwallsinthezoneofthe
wallthatistobestiffenedshallbeatleastonefifthoftheheightoftheopening.
(c)
Floorsandroofeitherbearoncrosswallsorareproperlyanchoredtothosewallssuchthatall
lateralloadsaresafelytransmittedtothosewallsandthroughthemtothefoundation.
(d)
Crosswallsarebuiltjointlywiththebearingwallsandjointlymortared,orinterconnectedby
toothing.
Note:Cross walls may be anchored to walls to be supported by ties of noncorrosive metal of minimum section 6 x 35 mm and
length60mmwithendsbentatleast50mm,maximumverticalspacingoftiesbeing1.2m.
Table6.7.9:ThicknessandSpacingofStiffeningWalls
Thicknessof
StoreyHeight
Load
not
BearingWallto
be
toExceed
Stiffened
(mm)
(m)
StiffeningWall*
Thicknessnotlessthan
Maximum
spacing
1to3
storeys
4and5
storeys
(mm)
(mm)
(m)
100
3.2
100
4.5
200
3.2
100
200
6.0
300
3.4
100
200
8.0
above300
5.0
100
200
8.0
*Storeyheightandmaximumspacingasgivenarecentretocentredimensions.
6379
Part6
StructuralDesign
7.4.4.2
Incaseofwallsexceeding8.0minlength,safetyandadequacyoflateralsupportsshallalwaysbe
checkedbystructuralanalysis.
7.4.4.3
Atrussedroofingmaynotprovidelateralsupportunlessspecialmeasuresareadoptedtobraceand
anchortheroofing.However,incaseofresidentialandsimilarbuildingsofconventionaldesignwith
trussedroofinghavingcrosswalls,itmaybeassumedthatstabilityrequirementsaremetbythecross
wallsandstructuralanalysisforstabilitymaybedispensedwith.
7.4.4.4
Incaseofwallsexceeding8.0minlength,safetyandadequacyoflateralsupportsshallalwaysbe
checkedbystructuralanalysis.
7.4.4.5
Atrussedroofingmaynotprovidelateralsupportunlessspecialmeasuresareadoptedtobraceand
anchortheroofing.However,incaseofresidentialandsimilarbuildingsofconventionaldesignwith
trussedroofinghavingcrosswalls,itmaybeassumedthatstabilityrequirementsaremetbythecross
wallsandstructuralanalysisforstabilitymaybedispensedwith.
7.4.4.6
In case of external walls of basement and plinth, stability requirements of Sec 7.4.4 may be
consideredtobesatisfiedif:
(a)
Bricksusedinbasementandplinthhaveaminimumcrushingstrengthof5N/mm2 andmortar
usedinmasonryisofTypeM3orbetter,
(b)
Clearheightofceilinginbasementdoesnotexceed2.6m,
(c)
Inthezoneofactionofsoilpressureonbasementwalls,trafficloadexcludinganysurcharge
duetoadjoiningbuildingsdoesnotexceed5kN/m2,
(d)
MinimumthicknessofbasementwallsisinaccordancewithTable6.7.10.
In case there is surcharge on basement walls from adjoining buildings, thickness of basement walls
shallbebasedonstructuralanalysis.
Table6.7.10:MinimumThicknessofBasementWall
MinimumThicknessof
HeightoftheGroundaboveBasement
BasementWall
FloorLevelwithWallLoading
(Nominal),mm
(PermanentLoad),m
Lessthan50kN/m
Morethan50kN/m
375
2.0
2.5
250
1.4
1.8
7.4.4.7
FreeStandingWall
Free standing walls, subject to wind pressure or seismic forces shall be designed on the basis of
permissible tensile stress in masonry or stability consideration. However in Seismic Zones 1 and 2,
free standing walls may be proportioned without making any design calculations with the help of
Table6.7.11providedthemortarusedisoftypenotleanerthanM3.ForparapetwallseeSec7.4.9.4.
7.4.5 StructuralContinuity
Intersectingstructuralelementsintendedtoactasaunitshallbeanchoredtogethertoresistthedesignforces.
Wallsshallbeanchoredtogethertoallfloors,roofsorotherelementswhichprovidelateralsupportforthewall.
Wherefloorsorroofsaredesignedtotransmithorizontalforcestowalls,theanchoragestothewallsshallbe
designedtoresistthehorizontalforces.
6380
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
Table6.7.11:HeighttoThicknessRatioofFreeStandingWall
DesignWindPressure,N/m2
HeighttoThicknessRatio
Upto300
10
600
900
1100
Note:
Heightistobetakenfrom150mmbelowgroundlevelortopoffooting/foundation
block,whicheverishigher,anduptothetopedgeofthewall.
7.4.5.1
MultiwytheWalls
All wythes shall be bonded by grout or tied together by corrosion resistant wall ties or joint
reinforcementasfollows:
(a)
Wall Ties in Cavity Wall Construction: Wall ties shall be of sufficient length to engage all
wythes. The portion of the wall ties within the wythe shall be completely embedded in
mortar or grout. The ends of the wall ties shall be bent to 90 degree angles with an
extensionnotlessthan50mmlong.Walltiesnotcompletelyembeddedinmortarorgrout
betweenwythesshallbeasinglepiecewitheachendengagedineachwythe.
Thereshallbeatleastone6mmdiameterwalltieforeach0.45m2ofwallarea.Forcavity
wallsinwhichthewidthofthecavityisgreaterthan75mm,butnotmorethan115mm,at
leastone6mmdiameterwalltieforeach0.3m2ofwallareashallbeprovided.
Ties in alternate courses shall be staggered. The vertical distance between ties shall not
exceed600mm.Thehorizontaldistancebetweentiesshallnotexceed900mm.
Additional ties spaced not more than 900 mm apart shall be provided around and within
300mmoftheopening.
Wall ties of different size and spacing may be used if they provide equivalent strength
betweenwythes.
(b)
WallTiesforGroutedMultiwytheConstruction:Thetwowythesshallbebondedtogether
withatleast6mmdiametersteelwalltiesforeach0.20m2 ofarea.Walltiesofdifferent
sizeandspacingmaybeusediftheyprovideequivalentstrengthbetweenwythes.
(c)
Joint Reinforcement: Prefabricated joint reinforcement for masonry walls shall have a
minimumofonecrosswireofatleast3mmdiametersteelforeach0.2m2ofwallarea.The
verticalspacingofthejointreinforcementshallnotexceed400mm.Thelongitudinalwires
shallbethoroughlyembeddedinthebedjointmortar.Thejointreinforcementshallengage
allwythes.
Wherethespacebetweentiedwythesisfilledwithgroutormortar,theallowablestresses
and other provisions for masonry bonded walls shall apply. Where the space is not filled,
tiedwallsshallconformtotheallowablestress,lateralsupport,thickness(excludingcavity),
heightandtierequirementsofcavitywalls.
7.4.6 JointReinforcementandProtectionofTies
The minimum mortar cover between ties or joint reinforcement and any exposed face shall be 15 mm. The
thicknessofgroutormortarbetweenmasonryunitsandjointreinforcementshallnotbelessthan6mm,except
thatsmallerdiameterreinforcementorboltsmaybeplacedinbedjointswhichareatleasttwiceasthickasthe
diameterofthereinforcement.
7.4.7 PipesandConduits
Pipeorconduitshallnotbeembeddedinanymasonrysoastoreducethecapacitytolessthanthatnecessary
forrequiredstabilityorrequiredfireprotection,exceptthefollowing:
(a) Rigid electrical conduit may be embedded in structural masonry when their location has been
detailedontheapprovedplan.
6381
Part6
StructuralDesign
(b) Anypipeorconduitmaypassverticallyorhorizontallythroughanymasonrybymeansofasleeve
atleastlargeenoughtopassanyhuborcouplingonthepipeline.Suchsleevesshallnotbeplaced
closer than three diameters, centre to centre, nor shall they unduly impair the strength of
construction.
(c) Placementofpipesorconduitsinunfilledcoresofhollowunitmasonryshallnotbeconsideredas
embedment.
7.4.8 LoadsandLoadCombination
7.4.8.1
DesignLoads
Alldesignloadsandotherforcestobetakenforthedesignofmasonrystructuresshallconformto
Chapter2,Loads.
7.4.8.2
LoadDispersion
Theangleofdispersionofverticalloadonwallsshallbetakenasnotmorethan30ofromthevertical.
7.4.8.3
DistributionofConcentratedVerticalLoadsinWalls
The length of wall, laid up in running bond, which may be considered capable of working at the
maximumallowablecompressivestressestoresistverticalconcentratedloads,shallnotexceedthe
centretocentredistancebetweensuchloads,northewidthofbearingareaplusfourtimesthewall
thickness. Concentrated vertical loads shall not be assumed distributed across continuous vertical
mortar or control joints unless elements designed to distribute the concentrated vertical loads are
employed.
7.4.8.4
LoadsonNonbearingWall
Masonrywallsusedasinteriorpartitionorasexteriorsurfacesofbuildingwhichdonotcarryvertical
loadsimposedbyotherelementsofthebuildingshallbedesignedtocarrytheirownweightplusany
superimposedfinishandlateralforces.Bondingoranchorageofnonbearingwallsshallbeadequate
tosupportthewallsandtotransferlateralforcestothesupportingstructures.
7.4.8.5
LoadCombinations
LoadcombinationfordesignofmasonrystructuresshallconformtotherequirementsofSec2.7.5.1.
7.4.9 MinimumDesignDimensions
7.4.9.1
MinimumThicknessofLoadBearingWalls
Thenominalthicknessofmasonrybearingwallsinbuildingshallnotbelessthan250mm.
Exception:
Stiffenedsolidmasonrybearingwallsinonestoreybuildingsmayhaveaminimumeffectivethicknessof165mmwhennot
over3minheight,providedthatwhengableconstructionisusedanadditional1.5mheightmaybepermittedatthepeakof
thegable.
7.4.9.2
VariationinThickness
Whenachangeinthicknessduetominimumthicknessrequirementsoccursbetweenfloorlevels,the
greaterthicknessshallbecarrieduptothehigherfloorlevel.
7.4.9.3
DecreaseinThickness
Whenwallsofmasonryofhollowunitsormasonrybondedhollowwallsaredecreasedinthickness,a
courseorcoursesofsolidmasonryshallbeconstructedbetweenthewallsbelowandthethinnerwall
above,orspecialunitsorconstructionshallbeusedtotransmittheloadsfromwythestothewalls
below.
7.4.9.4
ParapetWall
Parapetwallsshallbeatleast200mmthickandheightshallnotexceed4timesthethickness.The
parapetwallshallnotbethinnerthanthewallbelow.
6382
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
7.5
Chapter7
DESIGNOFUNREINFORCEDMASONRY
7.5.1 General
The requirements of this section are applicable to unreinforced masonry in addition to the requirements of
Sec7.4.
7.5.2 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoAxialCompression
The stresses due to compressive forces applied at the centroid of any load bearing wall, column and pilaster
maybecomputedbyEq(7.5.1)belowassuminguniformdistributionovertheeffectivearea.
fa =
7.5.3
P
Ae
7.5.1
DesignofMembersSubjectedtoCombinedBendingandAxialCompression
(a)
Compressive stresses dueto combined bendingand axial load shallsatisfy the requirements of
Sec7.3.5.
(b)
Resultant tensilestressduetocombinedbendingandaxialloadshallnotexceedtheallowable
flexuraltensilestress,FtasspecifiedinSec7.3.
7.5.4 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoFlexure
StressesduetoflexurecalculatedbyEq(7.5.2)belowshallnotexceedthevaluesgiveninSec7.3.5.
fb =
Mc
I
7.5.2
7.5.5 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoShear
ShearcalculationsinflexuralmembersandshearwallsshallbebasedonEq(7.5.3)below.
fv =
V
Ae
7.5.3
7.5.6 DesignofArches
Geometrical form and the crosssectional dimensions of masonry arch shall be selected such that the line of
thrustatanysectionofthearchiskeptwithinthemiddlethirdofthesectionofthearchrib.Theelastictheory
of arches shall be permitted for the analysis of unreinforced masonry arches. All supports of arches shall be
capableofdevelopingtherequiredhorizontalthrustwithoutsufferingunacceptabledisplacements.Everyarch
mustbedesignedtoresistthestressesduetothefollowingloads:
(a) GravityLoads:
i. Deadloadsshallbeplacedinconformitywiththeiractualdistribution.
ii. Liveloadsshallbepositionedtocoverentirespanorpartofthespanasnecessaryto
produce the maximum stresses at the crown, springing and all other sections of the
archrib.
(b) Loadsduetotemperaturechange.
(c) Shrinkageloadduetosettingandhardening.
(d) Shorteningofarchribunderthrustcausedbyloads.
7.5.7 FootingsandCorbels
Theslopeoffootingandcorbelling(measuredfromthehorizontaltothefaceofthecorbelledsurface)shallnot
belessthan60degrees.
The maximum horizontal projection of corbelling from the plane of the wall shall be such that stress at any
sectiondoesnotexceedtheallowablevalue.
6383
Part6
StructuralDesign
7.6
DESIGNOFREINFORCEDMASONRY
7.6.1 General
TherequirementsofthissectionareinadditiontothosespecifiedinSec7.4andareapplicabletoreinforced
masonry.Plainbarslargerthan6mmindiametershallnotbeused.
7.6.1.1
Assumptions
Thefollowingassumptionsshallbeapplicableforthissection.
(a)
Masonrycarriesnotensilestress.
(b)
Reinforcementiscompletelysurroundedbyandbondedtomasonrymaterialsothattheywork
togetherasahomogeneousmaterialwithintherangeofworkingstresses.
7.6.2 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoAxialCompression
Stresses due to compressive forces applied at the centroid of load bearing wall, column and pilaster may be
computed assuming uniform distribution over the effective area. Stress shall be calculated from Eq(7.6.1)
below:
fa =
P
Ae
7.6.1
7.6.3 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoCombinedBendingandAxialCompression
StressduetocombinedbendingandaxialloadsshallsatisfytherequirementsofSec7.3.5.Columnsandwalls
subjectedtobendingwithorwithoutaxialloadsshallmeetallapplicablerequirementsforflexuraldesign.
Thedesignofwallswithan(h//t)ratiolargerthan30shallbebasedonforcesandmomentsdeterminedfrom
analysis of structure. Such analysis shall take into account influence of axial loads and variable moment of
inertia on member stiffness and fixed end moments, effect of deflections on moments and forces, and the
effectsofdurationofloads.
7.6.4 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoShearForce
Shearingstressesinflexuralmembersandshearwallsshallbecomputedby
fv =
V
bjd
7.6.2
When the computed shear stress exceeds the allowable value, web reinforcement shall be provided and
designedtocarrythetotalshearforce.Bothverticalandhorizontalshearstressesshallbeconsidered.Thearea
requiredforshearreinforcementplacedperpendiculartothelongitudinalreinforcementshallbecomputedby
Eq(7.6.3)below:
Av =
sV
Fs d
7.6.3
Spacing of vertical shear reinforcement shall not exceed d/2, nor 600 mm. Inclined shearreinforcement shall
have a maximum spacing of 0.375 d (1+ cot ), but not greater than 600 mm, where is the acute angle
betweeninclinedbarandthehorizontal.
7.6.5 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoFlexuralStress
7.6.5.1
RectangularElements
Rectangularflexuralelementsshallbedesignedinaccordancewiththefollowingequationsorother
methodsbasedonthesimplifiedassumptions.
(a)
Compressivestressinthemasonry:
fb =
6384
M 2

bd 2 jk
7.6.4
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
(b)
Tensilestressinthelongitudinalreinforcement:
fs =
(c)
M
As jd
7.6.5
Designcoefficients:
k = (np ) + 2np
Chapter7
1/ 2
np
7.6.6
or
k=
1+
fs
nf b
k
j = 1
3
7.6.5.2
7.6.7
7.6.8
NonrectangularSections
Flexural elements of nonrectangular crosssection shall be designed in accordance with the
assumptionsgiveninSec7.4.2.1and7.6.1.1.
7.6.5.3
LateralSupport
Thecleardistancebetweenlateralsupportsofabeamshallnotexceed32timestheleastdepthof
compressionarea.
7.6.5.4
EffectiveWidth
Incomputingflexuralstressesinwallswherereinforcementoccurs,theeffectivewidthassumedfor
running bond masonry shall not exceed 6 times the nominal wall thickness or the centre to centre
distancebetweenreinforcement.Wherestackbondisused,theeffectivewidthshallnotexceed3
times the nominal wall thickness or the centre to centre distance between reinforcement or the
lengthofoneunit,unlessgroutedsolidusingopenendedjoints.
7.6.5.5
Bond
In flexural members in which tensile reinforcement is parallel to the compressive face, the bond
stressshallbecomputedbytheformula:
u=
jd
7.6.9
7.6.6 ReinforcementRequirementsandDetails
7.6.6.1
ColumnReinforcement
(a)
VerticalReinforcement: The areaofvertical reinforcement shallnot be less than 0.005 Ae

andnotmorethan0.04Ae.Atleastfour10mm barsshallbeprovided.
(b)
Lateral Ties: All longitudinal bars for columns shall be enclosed by lateral ties. Lateral
supportshallbeprovidedtothelongitudinalbarsbythecornerofacompletetiehavingan
includedangleofnotmorethan135degreesorbyahookattheendofatie.Thecorner
bars shall have such support provided by a complete tie enclosing the longitudinal bars.
Alternatelongitudinalbarsshallhavesuchlateralsupportprovidedbytiesandnobarshall
befartherthan150mmfromsuchalaterallysupportedbar.
Lateral ties and longitudinal bars shallbe placed not less than 40 mm and not more than
125mm,fromthesurfaceofthecolumn.Lateraltiesmaybeagainstthelongitudinalbarsor
placedinthehorizontalbedjointiftherequirementsofSec4.4.6aremet.Spacingofties
shallnotbemorethan16timeslongitudinalbardiameter,48timestiebardiameterorthe
leastdimensionofthecolumnbutnotmorethan450mm.
6385
Part6
StructuralDesign
Tiesshallbeatleast6mmindiameterfor22mmdiameterorsmallerlongitudinalbarsand
10mm indiameterfor larger longitudinal bars.Tieslessthan 10 mm in diameter may be
usedforlongitudinalbarslargerthan22mmindiameter,providedthetotalcrosssectional
areaofsuchsmallertiescrossingalongitudinalplaneisequalto thatofthelargertiesat
theirrequiredspacing.
(c)
7.6.6.2
AnchorBoltTies:Additionaltiesshallbeprovidedaroundanchorboltswhicharesetinthe
top of the column. Such ties shall engage at least four bolts or, alternatively at least four
verticalcolumnbarsoracombinationofboltsandbarstotalingfourinnumber.Suchties
shall be located within the top 125 mm of the column and shall provide a total of 250
squaremillimetersormoreincrosssectionalarea.Theuppermosttiesshallbewithin50
mmofthetopofthecolumn.
MaximumReinforcementSize
Themaximumsizeofreinforcingbarsshallbe35mm.Maximumsteelareaincellshallbe6percent
ofthecellareawithoutsplicesand12percentofcellareawithsplices.
7.6.6.3
SpacingofLongitudinalReinforcement
The clear distance between parallel bars, except in columns, shall not be less than the nominal
diameter of the bars or 25 mm, except that bars in a splice may be in contact. This clear distance
requirementappliestothecleardistancebetweenacontactspliceandadjacentsplicesorbars.The
minimum clear distance between parallel bars in columns shall be two and onehalf times the bar
diameter.
Theclear distance betweenthe surface of abar and anysurfaceofa masonry unit shallnot be less
than 6 mm for fine grout and 12 mm for coarse grout. Cross webs of hollow units may be used as
supportforhorizontalreinforcement.
All reinforcing bars, except joint reinforcing, shall be completely embedded in mortar or grout and
haveaminimumcover,includingthemasonryunit,asspecifiedbelow:
(a) 20mmwhennotexposedtoweather
(b) 40mmwhenexposedtoweather
(c) 50mmwhenexposedtosoil
7.6.6.4
AnchorageofFlexuralReinforcement
(a)
The tension or compression in any bar at any section must be developed on each side of
thatsectionbytherequireddevelopmentlength.Thedevelopmentlengthofthebarmay
be achieved by a combination of an embedment length, anchorage or, for tension only,
hooks.
Therequireddevelopmentlengthfordeformedbarsordeformedwiresshallbecalculated
by:
ld
= 0.29db f s forbarsintension
(7.6.10)
ld
= 0.22db f s forbarsincompression
(7.6.11)
Developmentlengthforplainbarsshallbe2.0timesthelengthcalculatedbyEq(7.6.10).
(b)
Exceptatsupports,oratthefreeendofcantilevers,everyreinforcingbarshallbeextended
beyondthepointatwhichitisnolongerneededtoresisttensilestressforadistanceequal
to12bardiametersorthedepthoftheflexuralmember,whicheverisgreater.Noflexural
barsshallbeterminatedinatensilezoneunlessoneofthefollowingconditionsissatisfied:
i) The shear is not over onehalf of that permitted, including allowance for shear
reinforcement,ifany.
ii) Additional shear reinforcement in excess of that required is provided each way
fromthecutoffadistanceequaltothedepthofthebeam.Theshearreinforcement
6386
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
spacingshallnotexceedd/8rb,whererbistheratiooftheareaofbarscutofftothe
totalareaofbarsatthesection.
iii) The continuing bars provide double the area required for flexure at that point or
doubletheperimeterrequiredforreinforcingbond.
7.6.6.5
(c)
Atleastonethirdofthetotalreinforcementprovidedfornegativemomentatthesupport
shall be extended beyond the extreme position of the point of inflection a distance
sufficient to develop one half the allowable stress in the bar, one sixteenth of the clear
span,orthedepthdofthemember,whicheverisgreater.
(d)
Tensile reinforcement of negative moment in any span of a continuous restrained or

cantilever beam, or in any member of a rigid frame, shall be adequately anchored by
reinforcingbond,hooksormechanicalanchorsinorthroughthesupportingmember.
(e)
Atleastonethirdoftherequiredpositivemomentreinforcementinsimplebeamsoratthe
freely supported end of continuous beams shall extend along the same face of the beam
into the support at least 150 mm. At least one fourth of the required positive moment
reinforcementatthecontinuousendofcontinuousbeamsshallextendalongthesameface
ofthebeamintothesupportatleast150mm.
(f)
Compression reinforcement in flexural members shall be anchored by ties or stirrups not

less than 6 mm in diameter, spaced not farther apart than 16 bar diameters or 48 tie
diameterswhicheverissmaller.Suchtiesorstirrupsshallbeusedthroughoutthedistance
wherecompressionsteelisrequired.
(g)
Inregionsofmomentwherethedesigntensilestressesinthesteelaregreaterthan80per
centoftheallowablesteeltensilestress(Fs),thelaplengthofsplicesshallbeincreasednot
less than 50 per cent of the minimum required length. Other equivalent means of stress
transfertoaccomplishthesame50percentincreasemaybeused.
AnchorageofShearReinforcement
(a)
Singleseparatebarsusedasshearreinforcementshallbeanchoredateachendbyoneofthe
followingmethods:
i)
Hookingtightlyaroundthelongitudinalreinforcementthrough180degrees.
ii) Embedment above or below the middepth of the beam on the compression side a
distancesufficienttodevelopthestressinthebarforplaneordeformedbars.
iii) Byastandardhook(seeSec4.6.6.6)consideredasdeveloping50N/mm2,plusembedment
sufficient to develop the remainder of the stress to which the bars are subject. The
effectiveembeddedlengthshallnotbeassumedtoexceedthedistancebetweenthemid
depthofthebeamandthetangentofthehook.
7.6.6.6
(b)
The ends of bars forming single U or multiple U stirrups shall be anchored by one of the
methods specified above or shall be bent through an angle of at least 90 degrees tightly
aroundalongitudinalreinforcingbarnotlessindiameterthanthestirrupbar,andshallproject
beyondthebendatleast12diametersofthestirrup.
(c)
TheloopsorclosedendsofsingleUormultipleUstirrupsshallbeanchoredbybendingaround
thelongitudinalreinforcementthroughanangleofatleast90degreesandprojectbeyondthe
endofthebendatleast12diametersofthestirrup.
Hooks
(a)
Theterm"standardhook"shallmeanoneofthefollowing:
i. A180degreeturnplusanextensionof atleast4bardiametersbutnotlessthan65
mmatthefreeendofthebar.
ii. 90 degree turn plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free end of the
bar.
6387
Part6
StructuralDesign
iii. For stirrup and tie anchorage only either a 90 degree or a 135 degree turn, plus an
extensionofatleast6bardiametersbutnotlessthan65mmatthefreeendofthe
bar.
(b)
Thediameterofbendmeasuredontheinsideofthebarotherthanstirrupsandties,shall
notbelessthanthatsetforthinTable6.4.12.
(c)
Inside diameter of bend for 12 mm diameter or smaller stirrups and ties shall not be less
than4bardiameters.Insidediameterofbendfor16mmdiameterorlargerstirrupsandties
shallnotbelessthanthatgiveninTable6.4.12.
(d)
Hooks shall not be permitted in the tension portion of any beam, except at the ends of
simple or cantilever beams or at the freely supported ends of continuous or restrained
beams.
Table6.4.12:MinimumDiameterofBend
BarDiameter
7.6.6.7
MinimumDiameterofBend
6mmthrough25mm
6bardiameters
8mm through35mm
8bardiameters
(e)
Hooksshallnotbeassumedtocarryaloadwhichwouldproduceatensilestressinthebar
greaterthan50N/mm2.
(f)
Hooksshallnotbeconsideredeffectiveinaddingtothecompressiveresistanceofbars.
(g)
Anymechanicaldevicecapableofdevelopingthestrengthofthebarwithoutdamagetothe
masonrymaybeusedinlieuofahook.Datamustbepresentedtoshowtheadequacyof
suchdevices.
Splices
The amount of lap of lapped splices shall be sufficient to transfer the allowable stress of the
reinforcementasinSec4.6.6.4.Innocaseshallthelengthofthelappedsplicebelessthan30bar
diametersforcompressionand40bardiametersfortension.
Weldedormechanicalconnectionsshalldevelop125percentofthespecifiedyieldstrengthofthe
barintension,exceptforconnectionsofcompressionbarsincolumnsthatarenotpartoftheseismic
systemandarenotsubjecttoflexure,wherethecompressivestrengthonlyneedbedeveloped.
When adjacent splices in grouted masonry areseparated by 75 mm or less, the lap length shall be
increasedby30percentorthesplicemaybestaggeredatleast24bardiameterswithnoincreasein
laplength.
7.7
StrengthDesignofSlenderWallsandShearWalls
7.7.1 DesignofSlenderWalls
In lieu of the procedure set forth in Sec 4.6, the procedures prescribed in this section, which consider the
slenderness of walls by representing effects of axial forces and deflection in calculation of moments, may be
usedwhentheverticalloadstressatthelocationofmaximummomentcomputedbyEq(7.7.1)doesnotexceed
0.04 f m .Thevalueof f m
shallnotexceed40N/mm2.
Pw + Pf
Ag
0.04 f m
7.7.1
Slendermasonrywallsshallhaveaminimumnominalthicknessof150mm.
7.7.1.1
SlenderWallDesignProcedure
(a)
6388
Maximum Reinforcement: The reinforcement ratio shall not exceed 0.5b, where b is the
balancedsteelratio.
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
(b)
7.7.1.2
Chapter7
Moment and Deflection Calculation: All moments and deflections of slender walls shall be
calculatedbasedonsimplesupportconditionsattopandbottom.Forothersupportandfixity
conditions, moments and deflections shall be calculated using established principles of
mechanics.
StrengthDesign
(a)
Loads:FactoredloadsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithChapter2,Loads.
(b) RequiredMoment:Requiredmomentandaxialforceshallbedeterminedatthemidheight
ofthewallandshallbeusedfordesign.Thefactoredmoment,Mu,atthemidheightofthe
wallshallbedeterminedbyEq(7.7.2).
wu h2
e
+ Pu + (Puw + Puf ) u
8
2
Mu =
where:
u
horizontal deflectionatmidheightunderfactoredload;P Deltaeffectsshallbeincluded

indeflectioncalculation.
eccentricityofPu
Pu

(7.7.2)
axialloadatmidheightofwall,includingtributarywallweight.
Puw + Puf
(c) DesignStrength:Designstrengthinflexureisthenominalmomentstrength,Mn,multiplied
bythestrengthreductionfactor,andshallequalorexceedthefactoredmoment,Mu.
M u M n

7.7.3
where:
Mn= nominalmomentstrength
Ase = effectiveareaofsteel
a = depthofstressblockduetofactoredloads.
Ase f y (d a 2 )
As f y + Pu
=
fy
, and
Pu + As f y

0.85 f m b
Thestrengthreductionfactorforflexureshallbe0.80.
(d) DesignAssumptions:Thefollowingarethedesignassumptionsforcalculationof nominal
strength.
i)
Nominal strength of singly reinforced masonry wall crosssections subject to

combined flexure and axial load shall be based on applicable conditions of
equilibriumandcompatibilityofstrains.
ii)
Straininreinforcementandmasonrywallsshallbeassumeddirectlyproportionalto
thedistancefromtheneutralaxis.
iii)
Maximum usable strain at extreme masonry compression fibre shall be assumed

equalto0.003.
iv) StressinreinforcementbelowspecifiedyieldstrengthfyshallbetakenasEstimessteel
strain. Forstrains greater thanthat correspondingto fy, stress inreinforcement shall
beconsideredindependentofstrainandequaltofy.
v) Tensilestrengthofmasonrywallsshallbeneglectedinflexuralcalculationsofstrength,
exceptfordeflectioncalculation.
6389
Part6
StructuralDesign
vi) Relationship between masonry compressive stress and masonry strain may be
assumedtoberectangularasdefinedbythefollowing:
7.7.1.3
1.
Masonry stress of 0.85 f m shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an

equivalent compression zone bounded by edges of the crosssection and a
straightlinelocatedparalleltotheneutralaxisatadistancea=0.85cfromthe
fibreofmaximumcompressivestrain.
2.
Distancecfromfibreofmaximumstraintotheneutralaxisshallbemeasured
inadirectionperpendiculartothataxis.
DeflectionCalculation
Themidheightdeflection,s,underservicelateralandverticalloads(withoutloadfactors)shallbe
limitedto:
s 0.007h
7.7.4
Themidheightdeflectionshallbecomputedby:
s =
5M s h 2
48E m I g
whenMserMcr
(7.7.5)
s =
(M M cr )h 2
5M cr h 2
+ 5 ser
48E m I g
48E m I cr
when M cr < M ser < M n
(7.7.6)
ThecrackingmomentstrengthofthewallMcrshallbedeterminedby:
Mcr = Sf r
7.7.7
Themodulusofrupture,fr,shallbedeterminedformTable6.7.13.
Table6.7.13:ValuesoftheModulusofRupture,r
TypeofMasonry
SolidMasonry
FullyGrouted
0.17 f m 0.65
HollowUnitMasonry
N/mm2
PartiallyGrouted
Notallowed
0.33 f m 1.2 N/mm2
0.21 f m 0.65 N/mm2
7.7.2 DesignofShearWalls
Based on ultimate strength design, the procedures described below may be used as an alternative to the
procedure specified in Sec 4.6 for the design of reinforced hollow unit masonry shear walls. Provisions for
qualitycontrolduringconstructionoftheshearwallarespecifiedinSec7.3.4
7.7.2.1
RequiredStrength
The required strength to resist different combinations of loads shall be determined in accordance
withSec2.7.5.1.
7.7.2.2
DesignStrength
Shearwallsshallbeproportionedsuchthatthedesignstrengthexceedstherequiredstrength.Design
strength in terms of axial force, shear force and moment provided by the shear wall shall be
computedasthenominalstrengthmultipliedbythestrengthreductionfactor.
Strengthreductionfactorshallbeasfollows:
(a) =0.65foraxialloadandaxialloadwithflexure
Formemberswithfylessthan410N/mm2andwithsymmetricalreinforcement,may
beincreasedlinearlyto0.85asPndecreasesfrom 0.10 f m Aeor0.25Pbtozero.
6390
ForsolidgroutedwallsPbmaybecalculatedby
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
Pb = 0.85 f mbab
where
ab = 0.85[emu (emu + f y
7.7.8
Es ) d
(b) =0.60forshear
Theshearstrengthreductionfactormaybe0.80foranyshearwallwhenitsnominal
shearstrengthexceedstheshearcorrespondingtodevelopmentofitsnominalflexural
strengthforthefactoredloadcombination.
7.7.2.3
DesignAssumptionsforNominalStrength
(a)
Nominal strength of shear wall crosssections shall be based on assumptions specified in

Sec7.7.1.2(d).
(b)
Themaximumusablestrainemu ,attheextrememasonrycompressionfibreshallnotexceed
0.003.
fm
shallnotbelessthan7N/mm2orgreaterthan20N/mm2.
(c)
7.7.2.4
AxialStrength
ThenominalaxialstrengthofshearwallssupportingaxialloadsonlyshallbecalculatedbyEq(7.7.9)
Po = 0.85 f m ( Ae As ) + f y As
(7.7.9)
TheshearwallshallbedesignedfortheaxialstrengthPu,suchthat
Pu (0.80)Po
7.7.2.5
7.7.10
ShearStrength
(a)
Thenominalshearstrengthshallbedeterminedbytheprovisionsasspecifiedin(b)or
(c)below.ThemaximumnominalshearstrengthvaluesaregiveninTable6.7.14.
Table6.7.14:MaximumNominalShearStrengthValues
M*
Vd
Vn
Ae
f m
0.25
72.0
1.00
48.0
MisthemaximumbendingmomentthatoccurssimultaneouslywiththeshearloadVatthe
sectionunderconsideration.InterpolationmaybebystraightlineforM/Vdvaluesbetween0.25
and1.00.
(b) Thenominalshearstrengthofshearwallsexceptforshearwallsspecifiedin(c)below
shallbedeterminedbyEq(7.7.11).
where:
Vn = Vm + V s
(7.7.11)
Vm = 0.083C d Amv
( f m )
(7.7.12)
ThevalueofCdinEq(7.7.12)isgivenas:
M
0.25
Vd
M
= 1.2for 1.0
Vd
C d = 2.4for
and
6391
Part6
StructuralDesign
Vs = Amv n f y
(c)
(7.7.13)
For a shear wall whose nominal shear strength exceeds the shear corresponding to
developmentofitsnominalflexuralstrength,twoshearregionsexist.
i)
Forallcrosssectionswithintheregiondefinedbythebaseoftheshearwall
and a plane at a distance Lw above the base of the shear wall, the nominal
shearstrengthshallbedeterminedbyEq(7.7.14)
Vn = Amv n f y
(7.7.14)
The required shear strength for this region shall be calculated at a distance
Lw/2 above the base of the shear wall but not to exceed onehalf storey
height.
ii)
7.7.2.6
For the other region, the nominal shear strength of the shear wall shall be
determinedbyEq(7.7.11).
Reinforcement
Reinforcementshallbeinaccordancewiththefollowing:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
7.7.2.7
MinimumreinforcementshallbeprovidedinaccordancewithSec7.8.5.1forallseismicareas
usingthismethodofanalysis.
Whentheshearwallfailuremodeisinflexure,thenominalflexuralstrengthoftheshearwall
shallbeatleast1.8timesthecrackingmomentstrengthofafullygroutedwallor3.0timesthe
crackingmomentstrengthofapartiallygroutedwallasobtainedfromEq(7.7.7).
AllcontinuousreinforcementshallbeanchoredorsplicedinaccordancewithSec7.6.6.4with
fs=0.5fy
Verticalreinforcementshallnotbelessthan50percentofthehorizontalreinforcement.
SpacingofhorizontalreinforcementwithintheregiondefinedinSec7.7.2.5(c)shallnotexceed
threetimesthenominalwallthicknessor600mm,whicheverissmaller.
BoundaryMember
Boundarymembersshallbeasfollows:
7.8
(a)
The need for boundary members at boundaries of shear wall shall be determined using the
provisionssetforthin(b)or(c)below.
(b)
Boundary members shall be provided when the failure mode is flexure and the maximum
extreme fibre stress exceeds 0.2 f m . The boundary members may be discontinued where the
calculated compressive stresses are less than 0.15 f m . Stresses may be calculated for the
factoredforcesusingalinearlyelasticmodelandgrosssectionproperties.
(c)
When the failure mode is flexure, boundary member shall be provided to confine all vertical
reinforcementwhosecorrespondingmasonrycompressivestressexceeds0.4 f m .
(d)
Theminimumlengthoftheboundarymembershallbe3timesthethicknessofthewall.
(e)
Boundarymembersshallbeconfinedwithminimumof10mmdiameterbarsatamaximumof
200mmspacingorequivalentwithinthegroutedcoreandwithintheregiondefinedbythebase
oftheshearwallandaplaneatadistanceLwabovethebaseoftheshearwall.
EarthquakeResistantDesign
7.8.1 General
All masonry structures constructed in the Seismic Zones 2, 3 and 4 shown in Fig 2.5.1 shall be designed in
accordancewiththeprovisionsofthisSection.
6392
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
7.8.2 Loads
SeismicforcesonmasonrystructuresshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec2.5ofthis
Part.
7.8.3 Materials
(a)
Well burnt clay bricks and concrete hollow blocks having a crushing strength not less than
12N/mm2shallbeused.
(b)
MortarnotleanerthanM3shallbeusedformasonryconstructions.
7.8.4 ProvisionsforSeismicZone2and3
7.8.4.1
WallReinforcement
Verticalreinforcementofatleast12mm shallbeprovidedcontinuouslyfromsupporttosupportat
eachcorner,ateachsideofeachopening,attheendsofwallsandatamaximumspacingof1.2m
horizontallythroughoutthewall.Horizontalreinforcementnotlessthan12mmshallbeprovided:
7.8.4.2
(a)
at the bottom and top of wall openings and shall extend at least 40 bar diameters, with a
minimumof600mm,pasttheopening,
(b)
continuouslyatstructurallyconnectedroofandfloorlevelsandatthetopofwalls,
(c)
atthebottomofthewallorinthetopofthefoundationswhendowelledtothewall,
(d)
at maximum spacing of 3.0 m unless uniformly distributed joint reinforcement is provided.

Reinforcementatthetopandbottomofopeningswhencontinuousinthewallmaybeusedin
determiningthemaximumspacingspecifiedinitem(a)above.
StackBond
Wherestackbondisused,theminimumhorizontalreinforcementratioshallbe0.0007bt.Thisratio
shallbesatisfiedbyuniformlydistributedjointreinforcementorbyhorizontalreinforcementspaced
notmorethan1.2mandfullyembeddedingroutormortar.
7.8.4.3
Columns
ColumnsshallbereinforcedasspecifiedinSec7.6.6.1.
7.8.5 ProvisionsforSeismicZone4
All masonry structures built in Seismic Zone 4 shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
requirementsforSeismicZone2andwiththefollowingadditionalrequirementsandlimitations.
Reinforcedhollowunitstackbondconstructionwhichispartoftheseismicresistingsystemshalluseopenend
unitssothatallheadjointsaremadesolid,shallusebondbeamunitstofacilitatetheflowofgroutandshallbe
groutedsolid.
7.8.5.1
WallReinforcement
Reinforced masonry walls shall be reinforced with both vertical and horizontal reinforcement. The
sumoftheareasofhorizontalandverticalreinforcementshallbeatleast0.002timesthegrosscross
sectional area of the wall and the area of reinforcement in either direction shall not be less than
0.0007timesthegrosscrosssectionalareaofthewall.Thespacingofreinforcementshallnotexceed
1.20m.Thediameterofreinforcingbarshallnotbelessthan10mmexceptthatjointreinforcement
may be considered as part of all of the requirements for minimum reinforcement. Reinforcement
shall be continuous around wall corners and through intersections. Only reinforcement which is
continuous in the wall or element shall be considered in computing the minimum area of
reinforcement. Reinforcement with splices conforming to Sec 7.6.6.7 shall be considered as
continuousreinforcement.
7.8.5.2
ColumnReinforcement
Thespacingofcolumntiesshallbenotmorethan225mmforthefullheightofcolumnsstressedby
tensileorcompressiveaxialoverturningforcesduetotheseismicloads,and225mmforthetopsand
6393
Part6
StructuralDesign
bottomsofallothercolumnsforadistanceofonesixthoftheclearcolumnheight,butnotlessthan
450 mm or maximum column dimension. Tie spacing for the remaining column height shall be not
morethan16bardiameters,48tiediametersortheleastcolumndimension,butnotmorethan450
mm.
7.8.5.3
StackBond
Wherestackbondisused,theminimumhorizontalreinforcementratioshallbe0.0015bt.Ifopenend
unitsareusedandgroutedsolid,theminimumhorizontalreinforcementratioshallbe0.0007bt.
7.8.5.4
7.8.5.5
MinimumDimension
(a)
BearingWalls:Thenominalthicknessofreinforcedmasonrybearingwallsshallbenotlessthan
150mmexcept thatnominal 100 mm thick loadbearingreinforced hollowclayunitmasonry
wallsmaybeused,providednetareaunitstrengthexceeds55N/mm2,unitsarelaidinrunning
bond,barsizesdonotexceed12mmwithnomorethantwobarsoronespliceinacell,and
jointsareflushcut,concaveoraprotrudingVsection.
(b)
Columns: The least nominal dimension of a reinforced masonry column shall be 375 mm
exceptthatiftheallowablestressesarereducedto50percentofthevaluesgiveninSec4.3,
theminimumnominaldimensionshallbe250mm.
ShearWall
(a)
When calculating shear or diagonal tension stresses, shear walls which resist seismic forces
shallbedesignedtoresist1.5timestheforcesspecifiedinChapter2,Loads.
(b)
The portion of the reinforcement required to resist shear shall be uniformly distributed and
shall be joint reinforcing,deformedbars,or a combinationthereof. The maximumspacing of
reinforcement in each direction shall be not less than the smaller of onehalf the length or
heightoftheelementormorethan1.20m.
Joint reinforcement used in exterior walls and considered in the determination of the shear
strengthofthemembershallconformtotherequirement"JointReinforcementforMasonry"
(UBC Standard No. 2415) or "Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement",(ASTM,A82).
Reinforcement required to resist inplane shear shall be terminated with a standard hook or
withanextensionofproperembedmentlengthbeyondthereinforcingattheendofthewall
section. The hook or extension may be turned up, down or horizontally. Provisions shall be
madenot to obstructgroutplacement. Wallreinforcementterminatingin columnsor beams
shallbefullyanchoredintotheseelements.
(c)
7.8.5.6
Multiwythegroutedmasonryshearwallsshallbedesignedwithconsiderationoftheadhesion
bond strength between the grout and masonry units. When bond strengths are not known
fromprevioustests,thebondstrengthshallbedeterminedbytest.
Hook
Thestandardhookfortieanchorageshallhaveaminimumturnof135degreesplusanextensionof
atleast 6bar diameters,but not less than100mmat the free endofthe bar.Wherethe ties are
placedinthehorizontalbedjoints,thehookshallconsistofa90degreebendhavingaradiusofnot
lessthan4tiediametersplusanextensionof32tiediameters.
7.8.5.7
MortarJointsBetweenMasonryandConcrete
Concreteabuttingstructuralmasonrysuchasatstartercoursesoratwallintersectionsnotdesigned
astrueseparationjointsshallberoughenedtoafullamplitudeof`1.5mmandshallbebondedtothe
masonryaspertherequirementsofthissectionasifitweremasonry.
7.8.6 AdditionalRequirements
7.8.6.1
6394
OpeninginBearingWalls
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
7.8.6.2
Chapter7
(a)
Tops of all openings in a storey shall preferably be at the same level so that a continuous
bandcouldbeprovidedoverthem,includingthelintelsthroughoutthebuilding.
(b)
The total width of the openings shall not be more than half of the length of the walls
betweentheadjacentcrosswalls,exceptasprovidedin(f)below.
(c)
Theopeningshallpreferablybelocatedawayfromthecornerbyacleardistanceequaltoat
leastoneeighthoftheheightoftheopeningforSeismicZone2and3andonefourthofthe
heightforSeismicZone4.
(d)
Thehorizontaldistancebetweentwoopeningsshallnotbelessthanonefourthoftheheight
oftheshorteropeningforSeismicZone2and3andonehalfoftheheightforSeismicZone4.
(e)
Theverticaldistancebetweenopeningsoneabovetheothershallbenotlessthan600mm.
(f)
Where openings do not comply with the requirements of (b) and (c) above, they shall be
strengthenedinaccordancewithSec7.8.6.5.
(g)
Ifawindoworventilatoristobeprojectedout,theprojectionshallbeinreinforcedmasonry
orconcreteandwellanchored.
(h)
Ifanopeningistallsay,forthefullheightofwall,dividingthewallintotwoportions,these
portions shall be reinforced with horizontal reinforcement of 6 mm diameter bars at not
morethan600 mm intervals, oneon innerandone on outerface,properly tied to vertical
steelatjambsandcornersorjunctionsofwallswhereused.
(i)
The use of arches to span over the openings is a source of weakness and shall be avoided
unlesssteeltiesareprovided.
StrengtheningArrangements
AllmasonrybuildingsshallbestrengthenedbythemethodsspecifiedinTable6.7.15.
Table6.7.15:StrengtheningofMasonryBuildingsforEarthquake
SeismicZones
No.of
Storey
StrengtheningArrangementstobe
Provided.
Upto4
a)MasonrymortarshallnotbeleanerthanM3
Upto2with
a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than
pitchedroof
M3
b) Bylintelandroofband(Sec7.8.6.3)
c) By vertical reinforcement at corners and
junctionsofwalls(Sec7.8.6.4)
d) Bracinginplanattielevelforpitchedroof*
3to4

M3
c)
By vertical reinforcement at corners and
d) Verticalreinforcementatjambsofopenings
(Sec7.8.6.5)
e) Bracinginplanattielevelforpitchedroof*
6395
Part6
StructuralDesign
M3
c) By vertical reinforcement at corners and
d) Verticalreinforcementatjambsofopenings
(Sec7.8.6.5)
e) Bracinginplanattielevelforpitchedroof*
Attielevelallthetrussesandthegableendshallbeprovidedwithdiagonal
bracinginplansoastotransmitthelateralshearduetoearthquakeforceto
thegablewallsactingasshearwallsattheends.
7.8.6.3
Upto4
Bands
Roof band need not be provided underneath reinforced concrete or brickwork slabs resting on
bearing walls, provided the slabs are continuous over parts between crumple sections, if any, and
coverthewidthofendwallsfully.
The band shall be made of reinforced concrete with f c not less than 20 N/mm2 or reinforced
brickworkincementmortarnotleanerthan1:4.Thebandsshallbetothefullwidthofthewalland
not less than 75 mm in depth and shall be reinforced as indicated in Table 6.7.16. In case of
reinforcedbrickwork,thethicknessofjointscontainingsteelbarsshallbeincreasedsoastohavea
minimummortarcoverof6mmaroundthebar.Inbandsofreinforcedbrickwork,theareaofsteel
providedshallbeequaltothatspecifiedaboveforreinforcedconcretebands.
Table6.7.16:BandReinforcement
Seismic
Zones
2
Reinforcement
PlainMildSteel
Bars
HighStrength
DeformedBars
Links
212mm,oneon
210mm,oneoneach
6mmdia,
eachfaceofthewall
faceofthewallwith
150mmc/c
withsuitablecover
suitablecover
7.8.6.4
216mm,oneon
212mm,oneoneach
6mmdia,
eachfaceofthewall
faceofthewallwith
150mmc/c
withsuitablecover
suitablecover
StrengtheningofCornerandJunctions
Vertical steel at corners and junctions of walls which are up to one and a half bricks thick shall be
provided either with mild steel or high strength deformed bars as specified in Table 6.7.17. For
thickerwalls,reinforcementshallbeincreasedproportionately.Thereinforcementshallbeproperly
embeddedintheplinthmasonryoffoundationsandroofslaborroofbandsoastodevelopitstensile
strengthinbondandpassingthroughthelintelbandsinallstoreys.Barsindifferentstoreysmaybe
weldedorsuitablylapped.
(a) Typicaldetailsofverticalsteelinbrickworkandhollowblockatcorners,Tjunctionsandjambs
ofopeningareshowninFig6.7.1andFig6.7.2.
(b) Details of vertical reinforcement given in Table 6.7.17 are applicable to brick masonry and
hollowblockmasonry.
6396
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
Fig.6.7.1:Typicaldetailsofverticalreinforcementinbrickmasonry
6397
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fig.6.7.2:Typicaldetailsofverticalreinforcementinhollowblockmasonry
Table6.7.17:VerticalReinforcementforBrickandHollowBlockMasonry
No.of
Storeys
DiameterofSingleBar
Storeys orEquivalentAreaofPlain orEquivalentAreaofHigh

MildSteelBartobe
StrengthDeformedBarto
Provided
DiameterofSingleBar
beProvided
Zone2&3
Zone4
Zone2&3
Zone4
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
nil
12
nil
10
Top
nil
12
nil
10
Bottom
nil
16
nil
12
Top
12
12
10
10
Middle
12
16
10
12
Bottom
16
16
12
12
Top
12
12
10
10
Third
12
16
10
12
Second
16
20
12
16
Bottom
16
25
12
20
7.8.6.5
StrengtheningofJambsofOpenings
Openingsinbearingwallsshallbestrengthened,wherenecessary,byprovidingreinforcedconcrete
membersorreinforcingthebrickworkaroundthemasshowninFig6.7.3.
7.8.6.6
WallsAdjoiningStructuralFraming
Wherewallsaredependentonthestructuralframeforlateralsupporttheyshallbeanchoredtothe
structuralmemberswithmetaltiesorkeyedtothestructuralmembers.Horizontaltiesshallconsist
of6mmdiameterUbarsspacedatamaximumof450mmoncentreandembeddedatleast250mm
intothemasonryandproperlytiedtotheverticalsteelofthesamemember.
6398
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
2&3
4)
Fig.6.7.3:MinimumreinforcementinwallsandaroundopeningsinSeismicZones2,3and4
7.9
PROVISIONSFORHIGHWINDREGIONS
7.9.1 General
Theprovisionsofthissectionshallapplytomasonrystructureslocatedatregionswherethebasicwindspeedis
greaterthan200km/h.
7.9.2 Materials
MaterialsformasonrystructuresshallgenerallycomplywiththeprovisionsofPart5;however,therearesome
specialrequirementsformasonryconstructioninhighwindregions,whicharegivenbelow:
(a)
Burntclaybricksshallhaveacompressivestrengthnotlessthan15N/mm2,
(b)
Groutshallhaveaminimumcompressivestrengthof12.5N/mm2,
(c)
(d)
MortarforexteriorwallsandinteriorshearwallsshallbetypeM1orM2,
Unburntclaymasonryunitsshallnotbeused.
7.9.3 ConstructionRequirements
MasonryconstructionshallcomplywiththeprovisionsofSec7.10.
6399
Part6
StructuralDesign
7.9.4 Foundation
Footingsshallhaveathicknessofnotlessthan375mmandshallbeextended450mmbelowtheundisturbed
groundsurface.Foundationstemwallshallhavethesamewidthandreinforcementasthewallitsupports.
7.9.5 Drainage
Wallsretainingmorethan1mofearthandenclosinginteriorspacesorfloorsbelowgradeshallhaveminimum
100mmdiameterfootingdrain.Aslopeof1:50awayfromthebuildingshallbeprovidedaroundthebuilding.
7.9.6 WallConstruction
7.9.6.1
MinimumthicknessofdifferenttypesofwallshallbeasgiveninTable6.7.18.
Table6.7.18:MinimumthicknessofWallsinHighWindRegion
TypeofWall
MinimumThickness
(mm)
Unreinforcedgroutedbrickwall
250
Reinforcedexteriorbearingwall
200
Unreinforcedhollowandsolidmasonrywall
200
Interiornonbearingwall
150
7.9.6.2
All walls shall be laterally supported at the top and bottom. The maximum unsupported height of
bearingwallsorothermasonrywallsshallbe3.5m.Gableendwallsmaybe4.5mhighattheirpeak.
7.9.6.3
The span of lintels over openings shall not exceed 3.5 m. All lintels shall be reinforced and the
reinforcement bars shall extend not less than 600 mm beyond the edge of opening and into lintel
supports.
7.9.6.4
Wallsshallbeadequatelyreinforced.
7.9.6.5
Anchors between walls and floors or roofs shall be embedded in grouted cells or cavities and shall
conformtoSec7.9.7below.
7.9.7 FloorandRoofSystems
Floorsandroofsofallmasonrystructuresshallbeadequatelyanchoredwiththewallitsupportstoresistlateral
andupliftforcesduetowindspecifiedinSec2.4ofthisPart.
7.9.8 LateralForceResistance
7.9.8.1
Strapping, approved framing anchors and mechanical fasteners, bond beams and vertical
reinforcement shall be installed to provide a continuous tie from the roof to foundation system as
showninFig6.7.4.Inaddition,roofandfloorsystems,masonryshearwalls,ormasonryorwoodcross
wallsshallbeprovidedforlateralstability.
7.9.8.2
Floor and roof diaphragms shall be properly connected to masonry walls. Gable and sloped roof
membersnotsupportedattheridgeshallbetiedbytheceilingjoistorequivalentlateraltieslocated
asclosetowheretheroofmembersbearonthewallaspracticallypossibleandnotatmorethan1.2
moncenters.Collartiesshallnotbeusedfortheselateralties.
7.9.8.3
Masonry walls shall be provided around all sides of floor and roof systems in accordance with
Fig6.7.5.Thecumulativelengthofexteriormasonrywallsalongeachsideofthefloororroofsystems
6400
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
shallbeatleast20percentoftheparalleldimension.Requiredelementsshallbewithoutopenings
andshallnotbelessthat1.25minwidth.
Interiorcrosswallsatrightanglestobearingwallsshallbeprovidedwhenthelengthofthebuilding
perpendiculartothespanofthefloorofroofframingexceedstwicethedistancebetweenshearwalls
or10m,whicheverisgreater.
7.9.8.4
Whenrequiredinteriorcrosswall shallbe at least1.8mlong and reinforcedwith2 mm wirejoint

reinforcementspacednotmorethan400mmoncentre.
Fig.6.7.4:Continuoustiefromrooftofoundationofmasonrystructure
Fig.6.7.5:Masonrywallsrequiredinhighwindregions
6401
Part6
StructuralDesign
7.10
CONSTRUCTION
7.10.1 General
Masonryshallbeconstructedaccordingtotheprovisionsofthissection.
7.10.2 StorageandPreparationofConstructionMaterials
Storage,handlingandpreparationatthesiteshallconformtothefollowing:
7.10.3
(a)
Masonrymaterialsshallbestoredinsuchawaythatatthetimeofusethematerialsareclean
andstructurallysuitablefortheintendeduse.
(b)
b) Allmetalreinforcementshallbefreefromlooserustandothercoatingsthatwouldinhibit
reinforcingbond.
(c)
Burntclayunitsshallhavearateofabsorptionperminutenotexceedingonelitrepersquare
metre at the time of lying. In the absorption test the surface of the unit shall be held 3 mm
belowthesurfaceofthewater.
(d)
Burntclayunitsshallbethoroughlywettedbeforeplacing.Concretemasonryunitsshallnotbe
wettedunlessotherwiseapproved.
(e)
Materialsshallbestoredinsuchamannerthatdeteriorationorintrusionofforeignmaterialsis
preventedandatthetimeofmixingthematerialconformstotheapplicablerequirements.
(f)
Themethodofmeasuringmaterialsformortarandgroutshallbesuchthatproportionsofthe
materialscanbeeasilycontrolled.
(g)
Mortarorgroutmixedatthejobsiteshallbemixedforaperiodoftimenotlessthan3minutes
ormorethan10minutesinamechanicalmixerwiththeamountofwaterrequiredtoprovide
thedesiredworkability.Handmixingofsmallamountsofmortarispermitted.Mortarmaybe
retempered.Mortarorgroutwhichhashardenedorstiffenedduetohydrationofthecement
shallnot be used, but under no caseshallmortarbeused twoandonehalf hours, nor grout
used one and onehalf hours, after the initial mixing water has been added to the dry
ingredientsatthejobsite.
PlacingMasonryUnits
(a)
Themortarshallbesufficientlyplasticandunitsshallbeplacedwithsufficientpressureto
extrude mortar from the joint and produce a tight joint. Deep furrowing which produces
voidsshallnotbeused.
Theinitialbedjointthicknessshallnotbelessthan5mmormorethan25mm;subsequent
bedjointsshallbenotlessthan5mmormorethan15mminthickness.
(b)
Allsurfacesincontactwithmortarorgroutshallbecleanandfreeofdeleteriousmaterials.
(c)
Solidmasonryunitsshallhavefullheadandbedjoints.
(d)
Allheadandbedjointsshallbefilledsolidlywithmortarforadistancefromthefaceofthe
unitnotlessthanthethicknessoftheshell.
Headjointsofopenendunitswithbeveledendsneednotbemortared.Thebeveledends
shallformagroutkeywhichpermitsgroutwithin16mmofthefaceoftheunit.Theunits
shallbetightlybuttedtopreventleakageofgrout.
7.10.4 VerticalityandAlignment
Allmasonryshallbebuilttrueandplumbwithinthetolerancesprescribedbelow.Careshallbetakentokeep
theperpendsproperlyaligned.
(a) Deviationfromverticalwithinastoreyshallnotexceed6mmper3mheight.
(b) Deviation in verticality in total height of any wall of a building more than one storey in
heightshallnotexceed12mm.
(c) Deviationfrompositionshownonplanofanybrickworkshallnotexceed12mm.
(d) Relative displacement between load bearing walls in adjacent storeys intended to be in
verticalalignmentshallnotexceed6mm.
6402
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
(e) Deviationofbedjointfromhorizontalinalengthof12mshallnotexceed6mmsubjecttoa
maximumdeviationof12mm.
(f) Deviation from the specified thickness of bed joints, cross joints and perpends shall not
exceedonefifthofthespecifiedthickness.
7.10.5 ReinforcementPlacing
Reinforcing details shall conform to the requirements of Sec 4.6.6. Metal reinforcement shall be located in
accordance with the plans and specifications. Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement prior to
groutingbywirepositionersorothersuitabledevicesatintervalsnotexceeding20bardiameters.
Tolerancesfortheplacementofsteelinwallsandflexuralelementsshallbe12mmford200mm,25mm
for200mmd600mmand30mmford>600mm.Toleranceforlongitudinallocationofreinforcement
shallbe50mm.
7.10.6 GroutedMasonry
Groutedmasonryshallbeconstructedinsuchamannerthatallelementsacttogetherasastructuralelement.
Space to be filled with grout shall be clean and shall not contain any foreign materials. Grout materials and
watercontentshallbecontrolledtoprovideadequateworkabilityandshallbemixedthoroughly.Thegrouting
ofanysectionofwallshallbecompletedinonedaywithnointerruptionsgreaterthanonehour.
SizeandheightlimitationsofthegroutspaceorcellshallnotbelessthanthoseshowninTable6.7.19.Higher
groutpoursorsmallercavitywidthsorcellsizethanshowninTable6.7.19maybeusedwhenapproved,ifitcan
bedemonstratedthatgroutspacesareproperlyfilled.
Cleanoutsarerequiredforallgroutpoursover1.5minheight.Whenrequired,cleanoutsshallbeprovidedin
thebottomcourseateveryverticalbarbutshallnotbespacedmorethan800mmoncentreforsolidlygrouted
masonry. When cleanouts are required, they shall be sealed after inspection and before grouting. When
cleanoutsarenotprovided,specialprovisionsmustbemadetokeepthebottomandsidesofthegroutspaces,
aswellastheminimumtotalclearareaasrequiredbyTable6.7.19,cleanandclearpriortogrouting.
Table6.7.19:GroutingLimitations
GroutType
Groutpour
Maximum
MinimumDimensionsoftheTotalClear
AreaswithinGroutSpacesandCells
Height(m)
Multiwythe
HollowUnit
Masonry(m m )
Masonry
(mm)
Fine
0.30
20
40 50
Fine
1.50
40
40 50
Fine
2.40
40
40 75
Fine
3.65
40
45 75
Fine
7.30
50
75 75
Coarse
0.30
40
40 75
Coarse
1.50
50
60 75
Coarse
2.40
50
75 75
Coarse
3.65
60
75 75
Coarse
7.30
75
75 100
7.10.7 Chases,RecessesandHoles
(a) Chases,recessesandholesmaybepermittedinmasonryprovidedeithertheyareconsidered
in thestructuraldesignor they are not cutintowalls made of hollow orperforatedunits, or
verticalchasesareplannedinsteadofhorizontalchases.
6403
Part6
StructuralDesign
(b) Depth of vertical and horizontal chases in load bearing walls shall not exceed onethird and
onesixthofthewallthicknessrespectively.
(c) Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2 m in any stretch of wall and shall not be located
within350mmofanopeningorwithin230mmofacrosswallthatservesasstiffeningwallfor
stability.Widthofaverticalchaseshallnotexceedthethicknessofwallinwhichitoccurs.
(d) Horizontal chases shall be located in the upper or lower middle third height of wall at a
distance not less than 600 mm from lateral support. No horizontal chase shall exceed one
metreinlengthandthereshallnotbemorethan2chasesinanyonewall.Horizontalchases
shallhaveminimummutualseparationdistanceof500mm.Sumoflengthsofallchasesand
recessesinanyhorizontalplaneshallnotexceedonefourththelengthofthewall.
(e) Lintelshallnotbeusedtosupportmasonrydirectlyabovearecessoraholewiderthan300
mm.Nolintelhowever,isnecessaryincaseofacircularrecessorholeexceeding300mmin
diameterprovidedupperhalfoftherecessorholeisbuiltasasemicirculararchofadequate
thickness and there is adequate length of masonry on the sides of openings to resist the
horizontalthrust.
(f) Recesses and holes in masonry shall be kept at the time of construction so as to avoid
subsequent cutting.Ifcuttingis necessary,it shallbedone using sharp tools without causing
heavyimpactanddamagetothesurroundingareas.
(g) No chase, recess or hole shall be provided in halfbrick load bearing wall, excepting the
minimumnumberofholesneededforscaffolding.
7.11
CONFINEDMASONRY
7.11.1 General
Confinedmasonryconstructionconsistsofmasonrywalls(madeeitherofclaybrickorconcreteblockunits)and
horizontalandverticalRCconfiningmembersbuiltonallfoursidesofamasonrywallpanel.Verticalmembers,
calledtiecolumnsorpracticalcolumns,resemblecolumnsinRCframeconstructionexceptthattheytendtobe
offarsmallercrosssection.Horizontalelements,calledtiebeams,resemblebeamsinRCframeconstruction.
Toemphasizethatconfiningelementsarenotbeamsandcolumns,alternativetermshorizontaltiesandvertical
tiescouldbeusedinsteadoftiebeamsandtiecolumns.
Theconfiningmembersareeffectivein
(a) Enhancing the stabilityand integrity of masonrywalls for inplaneand outofplane earthquakeloads
(confiningmemberscaneffectivelycontaindamagedmasonrywalls),
(b) Enhancingthestrength(resistance)ofmasonrywallsunderlateralearthquakeloads,and
(c) Reducing the brittleness of masonry walls under earthquake loads and hence improving their
earthquakeperformance.
Thestructuralcomponentsofaconfinedmasonrybuildingare(seeFigure6.7.6):
(a) Masonrywallstransmitthegravityloadfromtheslab(s)abovedowntothefoundation.Thewallsact
as bracing panels, which resist horizontal earthquake forces. The walls must be confined by concrete
tiebeamsandtiecolumnstoensuresatisfactoryearthquakeperformance.
(b) Confiningelements(tiecolumnsandtiebeams)providerestrainttomasonrywallsandprotectthem
fromcompletedisintegrationeveninmajorearthquakes.
These elements resist gravity loads and have important role in ensuring vertical stability of a building in an
earthquake.
(a) Floor and roof slabs transmit both gravity and lateral loads to the walls. In an earthquake, slabs
behavelikehorizontalbeamsandarecalleddiaphragms.
(b) Plinth band transmits the load from the walls down to the foundation. It also protects the ground
floorwallsfromexcessivesettlementinsoftsoilconditions.
(c) Foundationtransmitstheloadsfromthestructuretotheground.
6404
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
The design of confined masonry members shall be based on similar assumptions to those set out for
unreinforced and for reinforced masonry members. Confined masonry shall be constructed according to the
provisionsofthissection.
Fig.6.7.6:Atypicalconfinedmasonrybuilding
7.11.2 DifferenceofConfinedMasonryfromRCFrameConstruction
TheappearanceofafinishedconfinedmasonryconstructionandaRCframeconstructionwithmasonryinfills
may look alike, however these two construction systems are substantially different. The main differences are
related to the construction sequence, as well as to the manner in which these structures resist gravity and
lateralloads.ThesedifferencesaresummarizedinTable6.7.20andareillustratedbydiagramsinFigure6.7.7.
Inconfinedmasonryconstruction,confiningelementsarenotdesignedtoactasamomentresistingframe;asa
result, detailing of reinforcement is simple. In general, confining elements have smaller crosssectional
dimensionsthanthecorrespondingbeamsandcolumnsinaRCframebuilding.Itshouldbenotedthatthemost
importantdifferencebetweentheconfinedmasonrywallsandinfillwallsisthatinfillwallsarenotloadbearing
walls,whilethewallsinaconfinedmasonrybuildingare.
AtransitionfromRCframetoconfinedmasonryconstructioninmostcasesleadstosavingsrelatedtoconcrete
cost,sinceconfiningelementsaresmallerinsizethanthecorrespondingRCframemembers.
Table6.7.20.AcomparisonbetweentheconfinedmasonryandRCframeconstruction
Confined masonry
Gravityand
Masonrywallsarethemain
RC frame construction
RCframesresistboth
lateralload
loadbearingelementsandare gravityandlateralloads
resisting
expectedtoresistbothgravity throughtheirrelatively
system
andlateralloads.Confining
largebeams,columns,and
elements(tiebeamsandtie
theirconnections.
columns)aresignificantly
Masonryinfillsarenotload
smaller in size than RC beams
bearing walls
Foundation
Stripfootingbeneaththewall
Isolatedfootingbeneath
construction
andtheRCplinthband
eachcolumn
6405
Partt6
Stru
ucturalDesign
Confin
ned masonry
Superstructurre 1.Masonrywallsare
RC fram
me construction
1.Thefram
meis
construction
constructed
dfirst.
constructeedfirst.
sequence
2.Subsequeently,tiecolumn
ns
2.Masonrrywallsare
arecastinp
place.
constructeedatalater
3.Finally,tieebeamsare
stageandarenot
constructed
dontopofthe
bondedto
otheframe
walls,simulttaneouslywithtthe members;thesewallsare
floor/roofsllabconstruction
n.
nonstructu
ural,thatis,non
n
Fig.6.7.7:RC
Cframeconstruction(top)andconfinedmason
nryconstruction
n(bottom)
7.1
11.3 Mecha
anismofRe
esistingEarrthquakeEffects
A confined
c
maso
onry building subjected to earthquake gground shakin
ng can be mo
odeled as a veertical truss, as
sho
own in Figure 6.7.8 (left). Masonry
M
wallss act as diago
onal struts subjected to co
ompression, while
w
reinforceed
con
ncrete confiniing memberss act in tenssion and/or ccompression, depending o
on the direcction of laterral
earthquake forcees. This mode
el is appropriaate before the cracking in the walls takkes place. Sub
bsequently, th
he
entratedatthegroundfloo
orlevelandsiggnificantlaterraldeformatio
onstakeplacee.Undersevere
cracckingisconce
earthquakegroundshaking,th
hecollapseof
f confinedmassonrybuildinggsmaytakeplaceduetoso
oftstoreyeffeect
sim
milartotheoneeobservedinRCframeswitthmasonryin
nfills,asshowninFigure6.77.8(right).
The
efollowingfailuremodesarrecharacteristticofconfined
dmasonrywalls:
(a) Sheaarfailuremod
de,and
(b) Flexuralfailuremode.
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
Note that, in confined masonry structures, shear failure mode develops due to inplane seismic loads (acting
alongintheplaneofthewall),whereasflexuralfailuremodemaydevelopeitherduetoinplaneoroutofplane
loads(actingperpendiculartothewallplane).
Fig.6.7.8:Confinedmasonrybuilding:verticaltrussmodel
(left)andcollapseatthegroundfloorlevel(right)
Shearfailuremodeischaracterizedbydistributeddiagonalcrackinginthewall.Thesecrackspropagateintothe
tiecolumnsathigherloadlevels,asshowninFigure6.7.9.Initially,amasonrywallpanelresiststheeffectsof
lateral earthquake loads by itself while the confining elements (tiecolumns) do not play a significant role.
However, once the cracking takes place, the wall pushes the tiecolumns sideways. At that stage, vertical
reinforcement in tiecolumns becomes engaged in resisting tension and compression stresses. Damage in the
tiecolumnsattheultimateloadlevelisconcentratedatthetopandthebottomofthepanel.Theselocations,
characterized by extensive crushing of concrete and yielding of steel reinforcement, are called plastic hinges
(Figure 6.7.10). Note that the term plastic hinge has a different meaning in the context of confined masonry
componentsthanthatreferredtoinrelationtoRCbeamsandcolumns,wherethesehingesformduetoflexure
andaxialloads.Inconfinedmasonryconstruction,tiebeamsandtiecolumnsresistaxialloads.Shearfailurecan
leadtoseveredamageinthemasonrywallandthetopandbottomofthetiecolumns.
Fig.6.7.9:Shearfailureofconfinedmasonrywalls
Fig.6.7.10:Plastichingedevelopedinaconfinedmasonrywall
Flexuralfailurecausedbyinplanelateralloadsischaracterizedbyhorizontalcrackinginthemortarbedjoints
on the tension side of the wall, as shown in Figure 6.7.11. Extensive horizontal cracking, which usually takes
placeintiecolumns,aswellasshearcrackingcanbeobserved.
6407
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fig.6.7.11:Flexuralfailureofconfinedmasonrywalls
Irrespectiveofthefailuremechanism,tiecolumnsresistthemajorportionofgravityloadwhenmasonrywalls
sufferseveredamage(thisisduetotheirhighaxialstiffnessandloadresistance).Thefailureofatiecolumn
usually takes place when cracks propagate from the masonry wall into the tiecolumn and shear it off.
Subsequently,theverticalstabilityoftheentirewalliscompromised.Verticalstrainsintheconfinedmasonry
walls decrease at an increased damage level, thereby indicating that a major portion of the gravity load is
resisted by tiecolumns. This finding confirms the notion that tie columns have a critical role in resisting the
gravityloadindamagedconfinedmasonrybuildingsandensuringtheirverticalstability.
7.11.4 KeyFactorsInfluencingSeismicResistance
7.11.4.1 WallDensity
Wall density is believed to be one of the key parameters influencing the seismic performance of
confined masonry buildings. It can be determined as the transverse area of walls in each principal
directiondividedbythetotalfloorareaofthebuilding.
7.11.4.2 MasonryUnitsandMortar
The lateral load resistance of confined masonry walls strongly depends on the strength of the
masonry units and the mortar used. The walls built using lowstrength bricks or un grouted hollow
blockunitshadtheloweststrengthwhiletheonesbuiltusinggroutedorsolidunitshadthelargest
strength. However, the use of grouted and solid units results in an increase both in wall mass and
seismicloads.Also,theweakerthemortarthelowerthemasonrystrength(duetotheunitmortar
interaction, the masonry strength is always lower than the unit strength). There is no significant
difference in strength between unreinforced and confined masonry wall specimens with the same
geometryandmaterialproperties.
7.11.4.3 TieColumns
Tiecolumnssignificantlyinfluencetheductilityandstabilityofcrackedconfinedmasonrywalls.The
provisionofcloselyspacedtransversereinforcement(ties)atthetopandbottomendsoftiecolumns
resultsinimprovedwallstabilityandductilityinthepostcrackingstage.
7.11.4.4 HorizontalWallReinforcement
Horizontal reinforcement has a beneficial effect on wall ductility. Specimens with horizontal
reinforcement showed a more uniform distribution of inclined shear cracks than the unreinforced
specimens. Horizontal re bars should be anchored into the tiecolumns; the anchorage should be
provided with 900 hooks at the far end of the tiecolumn (see Figure 6.7.12). The hooks should be
embedded in the concrete within the tiecolumn (note that the tiecolumn reinforcement was
omittedfromthefigure).Thebardiametershouldbelargerthan3.5mmandlessthanthejoint
thickness.
6408
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
Fig.6.7.12:Horizontalreinforcementinconfinedmasonrywalls
7.11.4.5 Openings
When the opening area is less than approximately 10% of the total wall area, the wall lateral load
resistance is not significantly reduced as compared to a solid wall (i.e. wall without openings). The
walls with larger openingsdevelopdiagonalcracks (same assolidwalls),except thatthe cracksare
formedinthepiersbetweentheopenings;thus,diagonalstrutsforminthepiers,asshowninFigure
6.7.13.
Fig.6.7.13:Failuremodesintheconfinedmasonrywallswithopenings
7.11.5 VerificationofMembers
7.11.5.1 In the verification of confined masonry members subjected to bending and/or axial loading, the
assumptionsforreinforcedmasonrymembersshouldbeadopted.Indeterminingthedesignvalueof
themomentofresistanceofasectionarectangularstressdistributionmaybeassumed,basedonthe
strengthofthemasonry,only.Reinforcementincompressionshouldalsobeignored.
7.11.5.2 In theverification of confined masonrymemberssubjectedto shearloading the shearresistanceof
themembershouldbetakenasthesumoftheshearresistanceofthemasonryandoftheconcreteof
theconfiningelements.Incalculatingtheshearresistanceofthemasonrytherulesforunreinforced
masonry walls subjected to shear loading should be used, considering the length of the masonry
element.Reinforcementofconfiningelementsshouldnotbetakenintoaccount.
7.11.5.3 Intheverificationofconfinedmasonrymemberssubjectedtolateralloading,theassumptionssetout
forunreinforcedandreinforcedmasonrywallsshouldbeused.Thecontributionofthereinforcement
oftheconfiningelementsshouldbeconsidered.
7.11.6 ConfinedMasonryMembers
7.11.6.1 Confined masonry members shall not exhibit flexural cracking nor deflect excessively under
serviceabilityloadingconditions.
6409
Part6
StructuralDesign
7.11.6.2 Theverificationofconfinedmasonrymembersattheserviceabilitylimitstatesshallbebasedonthe
assumptionsgivenforunreinforcedmasonrymembers.
7.11.7 ArchitecturalGuideline
7.11.7.1 BuildingLayout
(a) The building shouldnotbe excessivelylong relative toitswidth; ideally,the lengthtowidth

ratioshouldnotexceed4.
(b) Thewallsshouldbecontinuousupthebuildingheight.
(c)
Openings(doorsandwindows)shouldbeplacedinthesamepositionupthebuildingheight.
7.11.7.2 Walls
(a) Atleasttwofullyconfinedwallsshouldbeprovidedineachdirection.
(b) ForSeismicZone1and2,walldensityofatleast2%ineachoftwoorthogonaldirectionsis
requiredtoensuregoodearthquakeperformanceofconfinedmasonryconstruction.Thewall
densityforSeismicZones3and4shouldbeatleast4%and5%respectively.Walldensitycan
bedefinedasthetotalcrosssectionalareaofallwallsinonedirectiondividedbythesumof
thefloorplanareasforallfloorsinabuilding.
7.11.7.3 BuildingHeight
Confinedmasonryissuitableforlowtomediumrisebuildingconstruction.Confinedmasonrybuildingswillbe
subjecttothefollowingheightrestrictions:
(a) Upto4storeyhighforSeismicZone1and2
(b) Upto3storeyhighforSeismicZone3
(c)
Upto2storeyhighforSeismicZone4
7.11.8 ConfinedMasonryDetails
7.11.8.1 Confined masonry walls shall be provided with vertical and horizontal reinforced concrete or
reinforcedmasonryconfiningelementssothattheyacttogetherasasinglestructuralmember.
7.11.8.2 Topandsidesconfiningelementsshallbecastafterthemasonryhasbeenbuiltsothattheywillbe
dulyanchoredtogether.
7.11.8.3
Verticalconfiningelementsshouldbeplaced:
(a) atthefreeedgesofeachstructuralwallelement;
(b) atbothsidesofanywallopeningwithanareaofmorethan1.5m2;
(c)
within the wall if necessary in order not to exceed a spacing of 5 m between the confining
elements;
(d) attheintersectionsofstructuralwalls,wherevertheconfiningelementsimposedbytheabove
rulesareatadistancelargerthan1.5m.
7.11.8.4 Horizontalconfiningelementsshallbeplacedintheplaneofthewallateveryfloorlevelandinany
casewithaverticalspacingofnotmorethan4m.
6410
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
7.11.8.5 Confining elements should have a crosssectional area not less than 0.02 m2, with a minimum
dimensionof150mmintheplanofthewall.Indoubleleafwallsthethicknessofconfiningelements
shouldassuretheconnectionofthetwoleavesandtheireffectiveconfinement.
7.11.8.6 The longitudinal reinforcement of confining elements may not have a crosssectional area less than
300 mm2, nor than 1% of the crosssectional area of the confining element. The detailing of the
reinforcementsshouldbeinaccordancewithChapter8.
7.11.8.7 Stirrups not less than 6 mm in diameter and spaced not more than 300 mm should be provided
aroundthelongitudinalreinforcement.Columntiesshouldpreferablyhave135hooks theuseof
90hooksisnotrecommended.Ataminimum,6mmtiesat200mmspacing(6mm@200mm)should
beprovided.Itisrecommendedtouse6mmtiesat100mmspacing(6mm@100mm)inthecolumn
endzones(topandbottom).
7.11.8.8 Toensuretheeffectivenessoftiebeamsinresistingearthquakeloads,longitudinalbarsshouldhavea
90hookedanchorageattheintersections,asshowninFigure6.7.14.Thehooklengthshouldbeat
least500mm.
a)
b)
Fig.6.4.14:Tiebeamconstruction:a)wallintersections;
b)hookedanchoragetolongitudinalreinforcement
7.11.8.9 Proper detailing of the tiebeamtotiecolumn connections is a must for satisfactory earthquake
performanceoftheentirebuilding.Reinforcingbarsmustbeproperlyanchored.Atypicalconnection
detailattherooflevelisshowninFigure6.7.15.Notethatthetiecolumnreinforcementneedstobe
extendedintothetiebeamasmuchaspossible,preferablyuptotheundersideofthetoptiebeam
reinforcement.Ahookedanchorageneedstobeprovided(90hooks)bothforthetiecolumnandtie
beamreinforcement.
6411
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fig.6.7.15:Detailingrequirementforthetiebeamtotiecolumn
connection
7.11.8.10 Special lintel beams may be required across larger openings having a width exceeding 1.5 m.
Additionalreinforcementbarsneedtobeprovided.Lintelbeamscanbeintegratedwiththetiebeams
atthefloorlevel.
7.11.8.11 Lapsplicesmaynotbelessthan60bardiametersor500mminlength.Splicingshouldtakeplaceat
columnmidheight,exceptforthegroundfloorlevel(wheresplicingisnotpermitted).
7.11.8.12 Theminimumwallthicknessshouldnotbelessthan100mm.Thewallheight/thicknessratioshould
notexceed30.
7.11.8.13 Toothededgesshouldbeleftoneachsideofthewall,asshowninFigure6.7.16a.Toothededgesare
essentialforadequatewallconfinement,whichcontributestosatisfactoryearthquakeperformance.
Alternatively, when the interface between the masonry wall and the concrete tiecolumn needs to
remainsmoothforappearancessake,steeldowelsshouldbeprovidedinmortarbedjointstoensure
interactionbetweenthemasonryandtheconcreteduringanearthquake(Figure6.7.16b).
a)
b)
Fig. 6.7.16: a) Toothed wall construction; b) horizontal dowels at the

walltocolumninterface
7.11.8.14 Concrete in the tiecolumns can be poured once the desired wall height has been reached. The
masonry walls provide formwork for the tiecolumns on two sides; however the formworkmust be
placedontheremainingtwosides.
7.11.9 FoundationandPlinthConstruction
Thefoundationshouldbeconstructedasintraditionalbrickmasonryconstruction.Eitheranuncoursedrandom
rubblestonemasonryfootingoraRCstripfootingcanbeused.ARCplinthbandshouldbeconstructedontop
6412
Vol.2
MasonryStructures
Chapter7
ofthefoundation.Inconfinedmasonryconstruction,plinthbandisessentialforpreventingbuildingsettlements
insoftsoilareas.AnalternativefoundationsolutionwithRCstripfootingisalsoillustratedinFigure6.7.17.
a)
b)
Fig.6.7.17:Foundationconstruction:a)RCplinthbandandstone
masonryfoundation;b)RCstripfooting
6413
Chapter 8
DetailingofReinforcmentinConcreteStructures
8.1
Scope
Provisions of Sec. 8.1 and 8.2 of Chapter 8 shall apply for detailing of reinforcement in reinforced concrete
members, in general. For reinforced concrete structures, subject to earthquake loadings in seismic design
categoriesB,CandD,specialprovisionscontainedinSec.8.3ofthischaptershallapply.FornotationsusedinSec.
8.1and8.2andnotexplainedtherein,see6.1.1.1.
8.1.1 StandardHooks
Theterm"standardhook"asusedinthisCodeshallmeanoneofthefollowing:
(a) 180obendplusanextensionofatleast4bardiameters,butnotlessthan65mmatthefreeendof
thebar.
(b) 90obendplusanextensionofatleast12bardiametersatthefreeendofthebar.
(c) Forstirrupandtieanchorage
i.
For16mm barandsmaller,a90obendplusanextensionofatleast6bardiametersatthefree
endofthebar,
ii.
For19mmto25mmbars,a90obendplusanextensionofatleast12bardiametersatthefree
endofthebar,
iii. For25mm barandsmaller,a135obendplusanextensionofatleast6bardiametersatthe

freeendofthebar,
iv. Forclosedtiesandcontinuouslywoundties,a135obendplusanextensionofatleast6bar
diameters,butnotlessthan75mm.
(d) Seismichooksasdefinedin2.2.
8.1.2 MinimumBendDiameters
8.1.2.1
Theminimumdiameterofbendmeasuredontheinsideofthebar,forstandardhooksotherthanfor
stirrupsandtiesinsizes10mm through16mm ,shallnotbelessthanthevaluesshowninTable
8.1.1.
Table8.1.1MinimumDiametersofBend
BarSize
MinimumDiameterofBend
10mmdb25mm
6db
25mm<db40mm
8db
40mm<db57mm
10db
8.1.2.2
Forstirrupsandtiehooks,insidediameterofbendshallnotbelessthan4bardiametersfor16mm
barandsmaller.Forbarslargerthan16mm,diameterofbendshallbeinaccordancewithTable8.1.1.
8.1.2.3
Insidediameterofbendinweldedwirereinforcementforstirrupsandtiesshallnotbelessthan4bar
diameters for deformed wire larger than MD40 and 2 bar diameters for all other wires. Bends with
insidediameteroflessthan8bardiametersshallnotbelessthan4bardiametersfromnearestwelded
intersection.
Part6
StructuralDesign
61
Part6
StructuralDesign
8.1.3 Bending
8.1.3.1
Unlessotherwisepermittedbytheengineer,allreinforcementshallbebentcold.
8.1.3.2
Reinforcement partiallyembeddedinconcrete shall notbebent in place, except aspermitted by the

engineerorasshowninthedesigndrawings.
8.1.4 SurfaceConditionsofReinforcement
8.1.4.1
Whenconcreteisplaced,metalreinforcementshallbefreefrommud,oil,orothernonmetalliccoatings
thatdecreasebond.Epoxycoatingofsteelreinforcementinaccordancewithstandardsreferencedin
thiscodeshallbepermitted.
8.1.4.2
Metal reinforcement with rust, mill scale, or a combination of both, shall be considered satisfactory,
provided the minimum dimensions (including height of deformations) and weight of a handwire
brushedtestspecimenarenotlessthanapplicableASTMspecificationrequirements.
8.1.5 PlacingofReinforcement
8.1.5.1
Reinforcementshallbeaccuratelyplacedandadequatelysupportedbeforeconcreteisplaced,andshall
besecuredagainstdisplacementwithintolerancespermittedin8.1.5.2below.
8.1.5.2
Reinforcement shall be placed within the following tolerances unless otherwise specified by the
engineer:
(a) Tolerances for depth d, and minimum concrete cover in flexural members, walls and compression
membersshallbeassetforthinTable8.1.2.
Table8.1.2TolerancesforPlacingReinforcement
Toleranceford
ToleranceforMinimum
ConcreteCover
d200mm
10mm
10mm
d>200mm
13mm
13mm
(b) Notwithstandingtheprovisionof(a)above,toleranceforthecleardistancetoformedsoffitsshallbe
minus 6 mm and tolerance for cover shall not exceed minus 1/3 the minimum concrete cover
specifiedinthedesigndrawingsorspecifications.
(c) Toleranceforlongitudinallocationofbendsandendsofreinforcementshallbe50mm,exceptat
discontinuousendsofbracketsandcorbels,wheretoleranceshallbe13mmandatdiscontinuous
ends of other members, where tolerance shall be 25 mm. The tolerance for concrete cover of
8.1.5.2ashallalsoapplyatdiscontinuousendsofmembers.
8.1.5.3
Welded wire reinforcement (with wire size not greater than MW30 or MD30) used in slabs not
exceeding 3 m in span shall be permitted to be curved from a point near the top of slab over the
support to a point near the bottom of slab at midspan, provided such reinforcement is either
continuousover,orsecurelyanchoredatsupport.
8.1.5.4
Weldingofcrossingbarsshallnotbepermittedforassemblyofreinforcementunlessauthorizedbythe
engineer.
8.1.6 SpacingofReinforcement
8.1.6.1
62
Theminimumclearspacingbetweenparallelbarsinalayershallbeequaltoonebardiameter,butnot
lessthan25mm,or4/3themaximumnominalsizeofcoarseaggregate,whicheverislarger.
Vol.2
Chapter1
8.1.6.2
Whereparallelreinforcementisplacedintwoormorelayers,barsintheupperlayersshallbeplaced
directlyabovethoseinthebottomlayerwithcleardistancebetweenlayersnotlessthan25mm.
8.1.6.3
Forcompressionmembers,thecleardistancebetweenlongitudinalbarsshallbenotlessthan1.5bar
diametersnor40mmnor4/3themaximumnominalsizeofcoarseaggregate.
8.1.6.4
Clear distance limitation between bars shall apply also to the clear distance between a contact lap
spliceandadjacentsplicesorbars.
8.1.6.5
Inwallsandonewayslabsthemaximumbarspacingshallnotbemorethanthreetimesthewallorslab
thicknesshnor450mm.
8.1.6.6
Fortwowayslabs,maximumspacingofbarsshallnotexceedtwotimestheslabthicknesshnor450
mm.
8.1.6.7
Fortemperaturesteelonly,maximumspacingshallnotexceedfivetimestheslabthicknesshnor450
mm.
8.1.6.8
BundledBars
(a) Groupsofparallelreinforcingbarsbundledincontacttoactasaunitshallbelimitedtofourinany
onebundle.
(b) Bundledbarsshallbeenclosedwithinstirrupsorties.
(c) Barslargerthan32mmshallnotbebundledinbeams.
(d) Individualbarswithinabundleterminatedwithinthespanofflexuralmembersshallterminateat
differentpointswithatleast40dbstagger.
(e) Wherespacinglimitationsandminimumconcretecoverarebasedonbardiameterdb,aunitof
bundledbarsshallbetreatedasasinglebarofadiameterderivedfromtheequivalenttotalarea.
8.1.7 ExposureConditionandCovertoReinforcement
8.1.7.1
The nominal concrete cover to all reinforcement (including links), maximum free watercement ratio
and minimum cement content required for various minimum concrete strengths used in different
exposureconditionsshallbeasspecifiedinTable8.1.3.However,formildenvironment,theminimum
concretecoverspecifiedin8.1.7.2and8.1.7.3forvariousstructuralelementsmaybeused.
8.1.7.2
CastinplaceConcrete:
(a)Minimumconcretecoverforconcretecastagainstandpermanentlyexposedtoearthshallbe75mm.
(b)Concreteexposedtoearthorweather:
Minimumcover,mm
19mmthrough57mm
50
16mmbarandsmaller
40
(c)Thefollowingminimumconcretecovermaybeprovidedforreinforcementforconcretesurfacesnotexposed
toweatherorincontactwithground:
Minimumcover,mm
Slabs,Walls:
40mm to57mm
40
36mm barandsmaller
20
63
Part6
StructuralDesign
Minimumcover,mm
Beams,Columns:
40
Primaryreinforcement, Ties,
stirrups,spirals
Shells,foldedplatemembers:
19mmbarandlarger
20
16mm barandsmaller
16
Table8.1.3*ConcreteCoverandotherRequirementsforVariousExposureConditions
Environment
ExposureConditions
Mild
Concretesurfacesprotectedagainst
MinimumfcN/mm2
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
30
25
20
20
20**
20**
20**
40
35
30
25
20
20
20
45
40
30
25
25
20
50
40
30
30
25
60
50
40
30
0.65
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.42
315
325
350
375
400
410
420
weatheroraggressiveconditions
Moderate
Concretesurfaceawayfromsevererain
Concretesubjecttocondensation
Nominalcover(mm)
Concretesurfacescontinuouslyunder
water
Concreteincontactwithnonaggressive
soil
Severe
Concretesurfacesexposedtosevere
rain,alternatewettinganddryingor
severecondensation
Verysevere
Concretesurfacesexposedtoseawater
spray,corrosivefumes
Extreme
Concretesurfacesexposedtoabrasive
action,e.g.seawatercarryingsolidsor
flowingwaterwithpH<4.5ormachinery
orvehicles
Maximumwater/cementratio
3
Minimumcementcontent,(kg/m )
*Thistablerelatestoaggregateof20mmnominalmaximumsize.
**Maybereducedto15mmprovidedthenominalmaximumaggregatesizedoesnotexceed15mm.
8.1.7.3
PrecastConcrete(manufacturedunderplantcontrolconditions):
(a)Concreteexposedtoearthorweather:
64
Minimumcover,mm
WallPanels:
40mmto57mm
40
36mmbarandsmaller
20
OtherMembers:
40mmto57mm
50
19mm through36mm
40
16mmbarandsmaller
30
Vol.2
Chapter1
(b)Concretenotexposedtoweatherorincontactwithground:
Minimumcover,mm
Slabs,Walls:
4ommto57mm
30
36mmbarandsmaller
16
Beams,columns:
Primaryreinforcement
20
Ties,stirrups,spiral
15
Shells,foldedplatemembers:
40
19mmbarandlarger
16
16mmbarandsmaller
10
8.1.7.4
For concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth, minimum cover shall be 75 mm. If,
concretecoverspecifiedin8.1.7.1(Table8.1.3)conflictswiththosespecifiedin8.1.7.2or8.1.7.3,the
largervalueshallbetaken.
8.1.7.5
BundledBars:Minimumconcretecovershallbeequaltotheequivalentdiameterofthebundle,but
neednotbegreaterthan50mm.
8.1.7.6
Future Extension : Exposed reinforcement, inserts, and plates intended for bonding with future
extensionsshallbeprotectedfromcorrosion.
8.1.7.7
FireProtection:Ifathicknessofcoverforfireprotectiongreaterthantheconcretecoversspecifiedin
8.1.7.1through8.1.7.6isrequired,suchgreaterthicknessesshallbespecified.
8.1.7.8
Corrosive Environments: If a thickness of cover for corrosive environment or other severe exposure
conditionsgreaterthantheconcretecoversspecifiedin8.1.7.1through8.1.7.6isrequired,suchgreater
thicknesses shall be specified. For corrosion protection, a specified concrete cover for reinforcement
notlessthan50mmforwallsandslabsandnotlessthan65mmforothermembersmaybeused.For
precastconcretemembersaspecifiedconcretecovernotlessthan40mmforwallsandslabsandnot
lessthan50mmforothermembersmaybeused.
8.1.8 ReinforcementDetailsforColumns
8.1.8.1
OffsetBars:Offsetbentlongitudinalbarsshallconformtothefollowing:
(a) Themaximumslopeofinclinedportionofanoffsetbarwithaxisofcolumnshallnotexceed1in6.
(b) Portionsofbaraboveandbelowanoffsetshallbeparalleltotheaxisofcolumn.
(c) Horizontalsupportatoffsetbendsshallbeprovidedbylateralties,spirals,orpartsofthefloor
construction.Horizontalsupportprovidedshallbedesignedtoresist1.5timesthehorizontal
componentofthecomputedforceintheinclinedportionoftheoffsetbars.Lateraltiesorspirals,if
used,shallbeplacednotmorethan150mmawayfrompointsofbend.
(d) Offsetbarsshallbebentbeforeplacementintheforms(see8.1.3).
(e) Wherethefaceofthecolumnaboveisoffset75mmormorefromthefaceofthecolumnbelow,
longitudinalbarsshallnotbepermittedtobeoffsetbent.Thelongitudinalbarsadjacenttotheoffset
columnfacesshallbelapsplicedusingseparatedowels.Lapsplicesshallconformto8.2.14.
8.1.8.2
Steel Cores: Load transfer in structural steel cores of composite compression members shall be
providedbythefollowing:
(a) Endsofstructuralsteelcoresshallbeaccuratelyfinishedtobearatendbearingsplices,withpositive
provisionforalignmentofonecoreabovetheotherinconcentriccontact.
65
Part6
StructuralDesign
(b) Atendbearingsplices,bearingshallbeconsideredeffectivetotransfernotmorethan50percentof
thetotalcompressivestressinthesteelcore.
(c) Transferofstressbetweencolumnbaseandfootingshallbedesignedinaccordancewith6.8.8.
(d) Baseofstructuralsteelsectionshallbedesignedtotransferthetotalloadfromtheentirecomposite
membertothefooting;or,thebaseshallbedesignedtotransfertheloadfromthesteelcoreonly,
providedampleconcretesectionisavailablefortransferoftheportionofthetotalloadcarriedby
thereinforcedconcretesectiontothefootingbycompressionintheconcreteandbyreinforcement.
8.1.9 LateralReinforcementforColumns
8.1.9.1
Lateralreinforcementforcompressionmembersshallconformtotheprovisionsof8.1.9.3and8.1.9.4
belowandwhereshearortorsionreinforcementisrequired,shallalsoconformtoprovisionsofSec6.4.
8.1.9.2
Lateralreinforcementrequirementsforcompositecolumnsshallconformto6.3.13.7and6.3.13.8.
8.1.9.3
Spirals:Spiralreinforcementforcolumnsshallconformto6.3.9.3andtothefollowing:
(a) Spiralsshallconsistofevenlyspacedcontinuousbarorwireofsuchsizeandsoassembledasto
permithandlingandplacingwithoutdistortionfromdesigneddimensions.
(b) Sizeofspiralsshallnotbelessthan10mmdiameterforcastinplaceconstruction.
(c) Theminimumandmaximumclearspacingbetweenspiralsshallbe25mmand75mmrespectively.
(d) Anchorageofspiralreinforcementshallbeprovidedby1.5extraturnsofspiralbarorwireateach
endofaspiralunit.
(e) Splicesinspiralreinforcementshallbelapsplicesof48spiraldiameterfordeformeduncoatedbaror
wireand72spiraldiameterforothercases,butnotlessthan300mm.
(f) Spiralsshallextendfromthetopoffootingorslabinanystoreytothelevelofthelowesthorizontal
reinforcementinmemberssupportedabove.
(g) Spiralsshallextendaboveterminationofspiraltobottomofslabordroppanel,wherebeamsor
bracketsdonotframeintoallsidesofacolumn.
(h) Spiralsshallextendtoalevelatwhichthediameterorwidthofcapitalis2timesthatofthecolumn,
incaseofcolumnswithcapitals.
(i) Spiralsshallbeheldfirmlyinplaceandtruetoline.
8.1.9.4
Ties:Tiereinforcementforcompressionmembersshallconformtothefollowing:
(a) Allbarsshallbeenclosedbylateralties,atleast10mminsizeforlongitudinalbars32mmor
smaller,andatleast12mminsizefor36mmto57mmandbundledlongitudinalbars.
(b) Verticalspacingoftiesshallnotexceed16longitudinalbardiametersor48tiediameters,ortheleast
dimensionofthecompressionmembers.
(c) Tiesshallbearrangedsuchthateverycornerandalternatelongitudinalbarshallhavelateralsupport
providedbythecornerofatiewithanincludedanglenotmorethan135deg.Noverticalbarshallbe
fartherthan150mmclearoneachsidealongthetiefromsuchalaterallysupportedbar.Where
longitudinalbarsarelocatedaroundtheperimeterofacircle,acompletecirculartieisallowed.
(d) Thelowesttieinanystoreyshallbeplacedwithinonehalftherequiredtiespacingfromthetop
mosthorizontalreinforcementintheslaborfootingbelow.Theuppermosttieinanystoreyshallbe
withinonehalftherequiredtiespacingfromthelowesthorizontalreinforcementintheslabordrop
panelabove.
(e) Wherebeamsorbracketsprovideconcreteconfinementatthetopofthecolumnonall(four)sides,
thetoptieshallbewithin75mmofthelowesthorizontalreinforcementintheshallowestofsuch
beamsorbrackets.
(f) Whereanchorboltsareplacedinthetopofcolumnsorpedestals,theboltsshallbeenclosedby
lateralreinforcementthatalsosurroundsatleastfourverticalbarsofthecolumnorpedestal.The
lateralreinforcementshallbedistributedwithin125mmofthetopofthecolumnorpedestal,and
shallconsistofatleasttwo12mm barsorthree10mmbars.
(g) Wherelongitudinalbarsarearrangedinacircularpattern,individualcirculartiesperspecified
spacingmaybeused.
66
Vol.2
Chapter1
8.1.10 LateralReinforcementforBeams
8.1.10.1 Compressionreinforcementinbeamsshallbeenclosedbytiesorstirrupssatisfyingthesizeandspacing
limitations in 8.1.9.4 above. Such ties or stirrups shall be provided throughout the distance where
compressionreinforcementisrequired.
8.1.10.2 Lateralreinforcementforflexuralframingmemberssubjecttostressreversalsortotorsionatsupports
shallconsistofclosedties,closedstirrups,orspiralsextendingaroundtheflexuralreinforcement.
8.1.10.3 Closed ties or stirrups shall be formed in one piece by overlapping standard stirrup or tie end hooks
aroundalongitudinalbar,orformedinoneortwopieceslapsplicedwithaClassBsplice(lapof 1. 3 l d )
oranchoredinaccordancewith8.2.10.
8.1.11 ShrinkageandTemperatureReinforcement
8.1.11.1 Where the flexural reinforcement extends in one direction only, reinforcement for shrinkage and
temperature stresses shall be provided perpendicular to flexural reinforcement in structural slabs.
Shrinkageandtemperaturereinforcementshallbeprovidedinaccordancewith8.1.11.2below.
8.1.11.2 Deformedreinforcementconformingto5.3.2shallbeprovidedinaccordancewiththefollowing:
a) Areaofshrinkageandtemperaturereinforcementshallprovideatleastthefollowingratiosof
reinforcementareatogrossconcretearea:
0.0020
forslabswherereinforcementwith =275N/mm2or350N/mm2areused,
0.0018
forslabswherereinforcementwith =420N/mm2areused,
0.0018
420
orslabswherereinforcementwith exceeding420N/mm2areused.
Inanycase,thereinforcementratioshallnotbelessthan0.0014.
b) Areaofshrinkageandtemperaturereinforcementforbrickaggregateconcreteshallbeatleast1.5times
thatprovidedin(a)above.
c) Shrinkageandtemperaturereinforcementshallbespacednotfartherapartthan5timestheslab
thickness,nor450mm.
d) Atallsectionswhererequired,reinforcementforshrinkageandtemperaturestressesshalldevelopthe
specifiedyieldstrength intensioninaccordancewithSec8.2.
8.1.12 RequirementsforStructuralIntegrity
8.1.12.1 In the detailing of reinforcement and connections, members of a structure shall be effectively tied
togethertoimproveintegrityoftheoverallstructure.
8.1.12.2 Theminimumrequirementsforcastinplaceconstructionshallbe:
(a) Inonewayslabconstruction,atleastonebottombarshallbecontinuousorshallbesplicedoverthe
supportwithaClassAtensionsplice.Atnoncontinuoussupports,thebarsmaybeterminatedwitha
standardhook.
(b) Beams at the perimeter of the structure shall have at least onesixth of the tension reinforcement
required for negative moment at the support, but not less than two bars and onequarter of the
positive moment reinforcement required at midspan, but not less than two bars made continuous
overthespanlengthpassingthroughtheregionboundedbythelongitudinalreinforcementofthe
column around the perimeter and tied with closed stirrups. Closed stirrups need not be extended
throughanyjoints.Therequiredcontinuitymaybeprovidedwithtopreinforcementsplicedatmid
spanandbottomreinforcementsplicedatornearthesupportwithClassBtensionsplices.
(c) Whenclosedstirrupsarenotprovided,inotherthanperimeterbeams,atleastonequarterofthe
positivemomentreinforcementrequiredatmidspan,butnotlessthantwobarsshallpassthrough
theregionboundedbythelongitudinalreinforcementofthecolumnandshallbecontinuousorshall
67
Part6
StructuralDesign
besplicedoverthesupportwithaClassBtensionsplice.Atnoncontinuoussupportsthebarsshall
beanchoredtodevelop atthefaceofthesupportusingastandardhook.
8.1.12.3 Toeffectivelytieelementstogether,tensiontiesshallbeprovidedinthetransverse,longitudinal,and
verticaldirectionsandaroundtheperimeterofthestructureforprecastconcreteconstruction.
8.1.13 Connections
8.1.13.1 Enclosure shall be provided for splices of continuing reinforcement and for anchorage of terminating
reinforcementatconnectionsofprincipalframingelements(suchasbeamsandcolumns),
8.1.13.2 Externalconcreteorinternalclosedties,spirals,orstirrupsshallbeusedasenclosuresatconnections.
8.2
DEVELOPMENTANDSPLICESOFREINFORCEMENT
8.2.1 DevelopmentofReinforcementGeneral
Calculatedtensionorcompressionstressinreinforcementateachsectionofreinforcedconcretemembersshall
bedevelopedoneachsideofthatsectionbyembedmentlength,hookormechanicaldevice,oracombination
thereof.Hooksmaybeusedindevelopingbarsintensiononly.
8.2.2 ScopeandLimitation
Thevaluesof
usedinSec8.2shallnotexceed8.3MPa.Inadditiontorequirementsstatedherethataffect
detailingofreinforcement,structuralintegrityrequirementsof8.1.12shallbesatisfied.
8.2.3 DevelopmentofDeformedBarsandDeformedWiresinTension
8.2.3.1
Development length for deformed bars and deformed wire in tension, shall be determined from
either8.2.3.2or8.2.3.3andapplicablemodificationfactorsof8.2.3.4and8.2.3.5,but shallnotbe
lessthan300mm.
8.2.3.2
Fordeformedbarsordeformedwire, shallbeasfollows:
19mm andsmallerbars 20mmandlargerbars
anddeformedwires
Spacingandcover
Clear spacing of bars or wires being
developed or spliced not less than
,clearcovernotlessthan ,and
stirrupsortiesthroughout notless
thantheCodeminimum
or
Clear spacing of bars or wires being
developed or spliced not less than
2 andclearcovernotlessthan
Othercases
8.2.3.3
Fordeformedbarsordeformedwire, shallbe
inwhichtheconfinementterm
8.2.1
68
shallnotbetakengreaterthan2.5,and
8.2.2
Vol.2
Chapter1
where is the number of bars or wires being spliced or developed along the plane of splitting. It shall be
permittedtouse
0asadesignsimplificationeveniftransversereinforcementispresent.
8.2.3.4
Thefactorsusedintheexpressionsfordevelopmentofdeformedbarsanddeformedwiresintensionin
8.2.3areasfollows:
(a) Wherehorizontalreinforcementisplacedsuchthatmorethan300mmoffreshconcreteiscast
1.3.Forothersituations,
1.0.
belowthedevelopmentlengthorsplice,
(b) Forepoxycoatedbarsorwireswithcoverlessthan3 ,orclearspacinglessthan6 ,
1.5.For
allotherepoxycoatedbarsorwires,
1.2.Foruncoatedandzinccoated(galvanized)
reinforcement,
1.0.However,theproduct neednotbegreaterthan1.7.
(c) For19mm andsmallerbarsanddeformedwires, =0.8.For20mm andlargerbars,
1.0.
(d) Wherelightweightconcreteisused, shallnotexceed0.75unless isspecified(see6.1.8.1).
Wherenormalweightconcreteisused,
1.0.
8.2.3.5
Excess Reinforcement : Development length may be reduced by the factor
where
reinforcementinaflexuralmemberisinexcessofthatrequiredbyanalysisexceptwhereanchorageor
developmentfor isspecificallyrequiredorthereinforcementisdesignedundertheprovisionsof
8.3.3.1(c).
8.2.4 DevelopmentofDeformedBarsandDeformedWiresinCompression
8.2.4.1
Development length for deformed bars and deformed wire in compression, , shall be determined
from8.2.4.2andapplicablemodificationfactorsof8.2.4.3,but shallnotbelessthan200mm.
8.2.4.2
For deformed bars and deformed wire,

.
8.2.4.3
Length
shall be taken as the larger of 0.24
and
,with asgivenin8.2.3.4(d)andtheconstant0.043carriestheunitofmm /N.
in8.2.4.2shallbepermittedtobemultipliedbytheapplicablefactorsfor:
(a) Reinforcementinexcessofthatrequiredbyanalysis ..
,
,
(b) Reinforcementenclosedwithinspiralreinforcementnotlessthan6mmdiameterandnotmorethan100
mmpitchorwithin12mm tiesinconformancewith8.1.9.4andspacedatnotmorethan100mmon
center ...0.75
8.2.5 DevelopmentofBundledBars
8.2.5.1
Developmentlengthofindividualbarswithinabundle,intensionorcompression,shallbethatforthe
individualbar,increased20percentfor3barbundlesand33percentfor4barbundles.
8.2.5.2
Fordeterminingtheappropriatespacingandcovervaluesin8.2.3.2,theconfinementtermin8.2.3.3,
and the factor in 8.2.3.4(b), a unit of bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar of a diameter
derived fromthe equivalent total area and having a centroid that coincides with that of the bundled
bars.
8.2.6 DevelopmentofStandardHooksinTension
8.2.6.1
Developmentlength fordeformedbarsintensionterminatinginastandardhookshallbecomputed
as the product of the basic development length for deformed bars, of 8.2.6.2 below and the
applicablemodificationfactororfactorsof8.2.6.3,but shallbenotlessthan8 norlessthan150
mm.
69
Part6
StructuralDesign
8.2.6.2
For deformed bars,

shall be 0.24
with taken as 1.2 for epoxycoated
reinforcement,and takenas0.75forlightweightconcrete.Forothercases, and shallbetakenas
1.0.
8.2.6.3
Length
in8.2.6.2shallbepermittedtobemultipliedbythefollowingapplicablefactors:
(a) For36mm barandsmallerhookswithsidecover(normaltoplaneofhook)not

less than 65 mm, and for 90degree hook with cover on bar extension beyond
0.7
hooknotlessthan50mm
(b) For 90degree hooks of 36 mm bar and smaller bars that are either enclosed
within ties or stirrups perpendicular to the bar being developed, spaced not
greaterthan3 along ;orenclosedwithintiesorstirrupsparalleltothebar
being developed, spaced not greater than 3 along the length of the tail
0.8
extensionofthehookplusbend
(c) For180degreehooksof36mm barandsmallerbarsthatareenclosedwithin
tiesorstirrupsperpendiculartothebarbeingdeveloped,spacednotgreaterthan
0.8
3 along
(d) Whereanchorageordevelopmentfor isnotspecificallyrequired,reinforcement
inexcessofthatrequiredbyanalysis
In 8.2.6.3(b) and 8.2.6.3(c), is the diameter of the hooked bar, and the first tie or stirrup shall
enclosethebentportionofthehook,within2 oftheoutsideofthebend.
8.2.6.4
Forbarsbeingdevelopedbyastandardhookatdiscontinuousendsofmemberswithbothsidecover
andtop(orbottom)coveroverhooklessthan65mm,thehookedbarshallbeenclosedwithintiesor
stirrupsperpendiculartothebarbeingdeveloped,spacednotgreaterthan3 along .Thefirsttie
orstirrupshallenclosethebentportionofthehook,within2 oftheoutsideofthebend,where is
thediameterofthehookedbar.Forthiscase,thefactorsof8.2.6.3(b)and(c)shallnotapply.
8.2.6.5
Hooksshallnotbeconsideredeffectiveindevelopingbarsincompression.
8.2.7 DevelopmentofFlexuralReinforcementGeneral
8.2.7.1
Tension reinforcement may be developed by bending across the web to be anchored or made
continuouswithreinforcementontheoppositefaceofmember.
8.2.7.2
Criticalsectionsfordevelopmentofreinforcementinflexuralmembersareatpointsofmaximumstress
and at points within the span where adjacent reinforcement terminates, or is bent. In addition, the
provisionsof8.2.8.3shallalsobesatisfied.
8.2.7.3
Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point at which it is no longer required to resist flexure for a
distance not less than nor less than 12 , except at supports of simple spans and at free end of
cantilevers.
8.2.7.4
Continuing reinforcement shall have an embedment length not less than the development length
beyond the point where the bent or terminated tension reinforcement is no longer needed to resist
bending.
8.2.7.5
Noflexuralbarshallbeterminatedinatensionzoneunlessoneofthefollowingconditionsissatisfied:
(a)
.
atthelocationofterminationisnotovertwothirdsof
(b) Stirrupareainexcessofthatnormallyrequiredforshearandtorsionisprovidedoveradistance
alongeachterminatedbarorwireequalto0.75dfromthepointofcutoff.ExcessstirrupareaAv
.
.Spacingsshallnotexceed ,where istheratioofareaof
shallbenotlessthan
reinforcementcutofftototalareaoftensionreinforcementatthesection.
610
Vol.2
Chapter1
(c) For36mm barandsmaller,thecontinuingbarsprovidetwicethearearequiredforflexureatthe

cutoffpointandtheshear doesnotexceedthreequarterof
.
8.2.7.6
Wherethereinforcementstressisnotdirectlyproportionaltomoment,suchasinsloped,stepped,or
taperedfootings,brackets,deepflexuralmembers,ormembersinwhichtensionreinforcementisnot
paralleltothecompressionface,adequateanchorageshallbeprovidedforthetensionreinforcement.
See8.2.8.4and8.2.9.4fordeepflexuralmembers.
8.2.8 DevelopmentofPositiveMomentReinforcement
8.2.8.1
At least onethird of the positive moment reinforcement in simple members and onefourth of the
positivemomentreinforcementincontinuousmembersshallextendalongthe samefaceofmember
intothesupport.Inbeams,suchreinforcementshallextendintothesupportatleast150mm.
8.2.8.2
When the flexural member is a part of the primary lateral load resisting system, positive moment
reinforcementextendedintothesupportby8.2.8.1aboveshallbeanchoredtodevelopthespecified
yieldstrength intensionatthefaceofsupport.
8.2.8.3
Atsimplesupportsandatpointsofinflection,positivemomenttensionreinforcementshallbelimited
toadiametersuchthat computedfor by8.2.3satisfiesEq(8.2.3),exceptthatEq(8.2.3)neednot
besatisfiedforreinforcementterminatingbeyondthecentrelineofsimplesupportsbyastandardhook
oramechanicalanchorageatleastequivalenttoastandardhook.
(8.2.3)
where
= nominalmomentstrengthassumingallreinforcementatsectiontobestressedto .
= factoredshearforceatsection
= atasupport,embeddedlengthofbarbeyondcentreofsupport;atpointofzeromoment,shall
belimitedtodor12 ,whicheverisgreater.
The value of may be increased 30 per cent when the ends of reinforcement are confined by a
compressivereaction.
8.2.8.4
At simple supports of deep beams, positive moment tension reinforcement shall be anchored to
develop intensionatthefaceofthesupportexceptthatifdesigniscarriedoutusingAppendixA,
the positive moment tension reinforcement shall be anchored in accordance with A.4.3. At interior
supportsofdeepbeams,positivemomenttensionreinforcementshallbecontinuousorbesplicedwith
thatoftheadjacentspans.
8.2.9 DevelopmentofNegativeMomentReinforcement
8.2.9.1
Negativemomentreinforcementinacontinuous,restrained,orcantilevermember,orinanymember
ofarigidframe,shallbeanchoredinorthroughthesupportingmemberbyembedmentlength,hooks
ormechanicalanchorage.
8.2.9.2
Negativemomentreinforcementshallhaveanembedmentlengthintothespanasrequiredby8.2.1,
8.2.2.and8.2.7.3.
8.2.9.3
Atleastonethirdofthetotaltensionreinforcementprovidedfornegativemomentatthesupportshall
be extended beyond the point of inflection a distance not less than , 16, or 12 , whichever is
greater.
611
Part6
StructuralDesign
8.2.9.4
At interior supports of deep flexural members, negative moment tension reinforcement shall be
continuouswiththatoftheadjacentspans.
8.2.10 DevelopmentofShearReinforcement
8.2.10.1 Shearreinforcementshallbecarriedasclosetocompressionandtensionsurfacesofmemberascover
requirementsandproximityofotherreinforcementpermits.
8.2.10.2 The ends of single leg, simple U, or multiple Ustirrups shall be anchored by one of the following
means:
(a) ByastandardhookaroundlongitudinalreinforcementforMD200wires,and16mmbarsand
smallerandfor19mm through25mm barswith
280 N/mm2.
(b) For19mm through25mm stirrupswith greaterthan280N/mm2,astandardstirruphook

aroundalongitudinalbarplusanembedmentbetweenmidheightofthememberandtheoutside
endofthehookequaltoorgreaterthan
(c) ForeachlegofweldedplainwirereinforcementformingsimpleUstirrups,either:(i)Two
longitudinalwiresspacedata50mmspacingalongthememberatthetopoftheU;or(ii)One
longitudinalwirelocatednotmorethan /4fromthecompressionfaceandasecondwirecloserto
thecompressionfaceandspacednotlessthan50mmfromthefirstwire.Thesecondwireshallbe
permittedtobelocatedonthestirruplegbeyondabend,oronabendwithaninsidediameterof
bendnotlessthan8 .
(d) Foreachendofasinglelegstirrupofweldedwirereinforcement,twolongitudinalwiresata
minimumspacingof50mmandwiththeinnerwireatleastthegreaterof /4or50mmfrom /2.
Outerlongitudinalwireattensionfaceshallnotbefartherfromthefacethantheportionofprimary
flexuralreinforcementclosesttotheface.
(e) Injoistconstruction,for13mmbarandMD130wireandsmaller,astandardhook.
8.2.10.3 Each bend in the continuous portion of a simple Ustirrup or multiple Ustirrup shall enclose a
longitudinalbarbetweenanchoredends.
8.2.10.4 If extended into the region of tension, longitudinal bars bent to act as shear reinforcement shall be
continuous with longitudinal reinforcement and, if extended into a region of compression, shall be
anchored beyond middepth /2 as specified for development length in 8.2.3 for that part of
requiredtosatisfyEq(6.4.12).
8.2.10.5 PairsofUstirrupsortiessoplacedastoformaclosedunitshallbeconsideredproperlysplicedwhen
lengthoflapsare1.3 .Inmembersatleast450mmdeep,suchspliceswith notmorethan40
kNperlegshallbeconsideredadequateifstirruplegsextendthefullavailabledepthofmember.
8.2.11 DevelopmentofPlainBars
Forplainbars,theminimumdevelopmentlengthshallbetwicethatofdeformedbarsspecifiedin8.2.1through
8.2.10above.
8.2.12 SplicesofReinforcementGeneral
8.2.12.1 Splices of reinforcement shall be made only as required or permitted on design drawings, or in
specifications,orasauthorizedbytheengineer.
8.2.12.2 LapSplices
(a) Lapsplicesshallnotbeusedfor36mm barsandlarger,exceptasprovidedin8.2.14.2&6.8.8.2.3.
(b) Lapsplicesofbundledbarsshallbebasedonthelapsplicelengthrequiredforindividualbarswithin
thebundle,increasedinaccordancewith8.2.5.Individualbarspliceswithinabundleshallnot
overlap.Entirebundlesshallnotbelapspliced.
612
Vol.2
Chapter1
(c) Barssplicedbynoncontactlapsplicesinflexuralmembersshallnotbespacedtransverselyfarther
apartthanonefifththerequiredlapsplicelength,nor150mm.
8.2.12.3 WeldedSplicesandMechanicalConnections
(a) Weldedsplicesandothermechanicalconnectionsareallowed.
(b) ExceptasprovidedinthisCode,allweldingshallconformto"StructuralWeldingCodeReinforcing
Steel"(AWSD1.4).
(c) Weldedsplicesshallbebuttedandweldedtodevelopintensionatleast125percentofspecified
yieldstrength ofthebar.
(d) Afullmechanicalconnectionshalldevelopintensionorcompression,asrequired,atleast125per
centofspecifiedyieldstrength ofthebar.
(e) Weldedsplicesandmechanicalconnectionsnotmeetingtherequirementsof(c)or(d)aboveare
allowedonlyfor16mm barsorsmallerandinaccordancewith8.2.13.4.
8.2.13 SplicesofDeformedBarsandDeformedWireinTension
8.2.13.1 TheminimumlengthoflapfortensionsplicesshallbeasrequiredforClassAorBsplice,butnotless
than300mm,wheretheclassificationshallbeasfollows:
ClassAsplice1.0
ClassBsplice1.3
Where iscalculatedinaccordancewith8.2.3todevelop ,butwithoutthe300mmminimumof

8.2.3.1andwithoutthemodificationfactorof8.2.3.5.
8.2.13.2 LapsplicesofdeformedbarsanddeformedwireintensionshallbeclassBsplicesexceptthatClassA
splicesareallowedwhentheareaofreinforcementprovidedisatleasttwicethatrequiredbyanalysis
overtheentirelengthofthesplice,andonehalforlessofthetotalreinforcementissplicedwithinthe
requiredlaplength.
8.2.13.3 Where area of reinforcement provided is less than twice that required by analysis, welded splices or
mechanicalconnectionsusedshallmeettherequirementsof8.2.12.3(c)or8.2.12.3(d)above.
8.2.13.4 Welded splices or mechanical connections not meeting the requirements of 8.2.12.3(c) or8.2.12.3(d)
shallbepermittedfor16mm barsorsmallerifthefollowingrequirementsaremet:
(a) Splicesshallbestaggeredatleast600mmandinsuchmannerastodevelopateverysectionatleast
twicethecalculatedtensileforceatthesectionbutnotlessthan140N/mm2fortotalareaof
reinforcementprovided.
(b) Splicedreinforcementstressshallbetakenasthespecifiedsplicestrength,incomputingtensileforce
developedateachsection,butnottoexceed .Unsplicedreinforcementstressshallbetakenasa
fractionof definedbytheratiooftheshortestactualdevelopmentlengthprovidedbeyondthe
sectionto butnottobetakengreaterthan .
8.2.13.5 Whenbarsofdifferentsizearelapsplicedintension,splicelengthshallbethelargerof oflargerbar
andtensionlapsplicelengthofsmallerbar.
8.2.13.6 Splicesintensiontiemembersshallbemadewithafullweldedspliceorfullmechanicalconnectionin
accordance with 8.2.12.3(c) or8.2.12.3(d)andsplices in adjacentbarsshallbestaggeredat least750
mm.
8.2.14 SplicesofDeformedBarsinCompression
8.2.14.1 Theminimumlengthoflapforcompressionspliceshallbe0.071
for equalto420N/mm2orless
or 0.13
24
for greater than 420 N/mm2, but not less than 300 mm. For
2
N/mm ,lengthoflapshallbeincreasedbyonethird.
less than 21
613
Part6
StructuralDesign
8.2.14.2 Whenbarsofdifferentdiametersarelapsplicedincompression,thesplicelengthshallbethelargerof
thedevelopmentlength, ofthelargerbar,andthecompressionsplicelengthofthesmallerbar.Lap
splices of 40 mm , 43 mm , 50 mm and 57 mm bars to 36 mm and smaller bars shall be
permitted.
8.2.14.3 Welded splices or mechanical connections used in compression shall satisfy the requirements of
8.2.12.3(c)or8.2.12.3(d).
8.2.14.4 EndBearingSplices
(a) Compressionsplicesforbarsrequiredtotransmitcompressivestressonlymayconsistofendbearing
ofsquarecutendsheldinconcentriccontactbyasuitabledevice.
(b) Barendsshallterminateinflatsurfaceswithin1.5degreesofarightangletotheaxisofthebars,and
shallbefittedwithin3degreesoffullbearingafterassembly.
(c) Endbearingsplicesshallbeusedonlyinmemberscontainingclosedties,closedstirrupsorspirals.
8.2.15 SpecialSpliceRequirementsforColumns
8.2.15.1 Lapsplices,buttweldedsplices,mechanicalconnections,orendbearingsplicesshallbeusedwiththe
limitations of 8.2.15.2 through 8.2.15.4 below. A splice shall satisfy the requirements for all load
combinationsforthecolumn.
8.2.15.2 LapSplicesinColumns
(a) Lapsplicesshallconformto8.2.14.1,8.2.14.2,andwhereapplicableto8.2.15.2(d)or8.2.15.2(e)
below,wherethebarstressduetofactoredloadsiscompressive.
(b) Wherethebarstressduetofactoredloadsistensileanddoesnotexceed0.5 intension,lap
splicesshallbeClassBtensionlapsplicesifmorethanonehalfofthebarsaresplicedatanysection,
orClassAtensionlapsplicesifhalforfewerofthebarsaresplicedatanysectionandalternatelap
splicesarestaggeredby .
(c) Wherethebarstressduetofactoredloadsisgreaterthan0.5 intension,lapsplicesshallbeClass
Btensionlapsplices.
(d) Intiedreinforcedcompressionmembers,ifthroughoutlapsplicelengthtieshaveaneffectivearea
ofatleast0.0015 inbothdirections,lapsplicelengthispermittedtobemultipliedby0.83,but
laplengthshallnotbelessthan300mm.Tielegsperpendiculartodimension shallbeusedin
determiningeffectivearea.
(e) Forspirallyreinforcedcompressionmembers,lapsplicelengthofbarswithinaspiralispermittedto
bemultipliedby0.75,butlaplengthshallnotbelessthan300mm.
8.2.15.3 Welded Splices or Mechanical Connectors in Columns: Welded splices or mechanical connectors in
columnsshallmeettherequirementsof8.2.12.3(c)or8.2.12.3(d).
8.2.15.4 EndBearingSplicesinColumns:Endbearingsplicescomplyingwith8.2.14.4maybeusedforcolumn
barsstressedincompressionprovidedthesplicesarestaggeredoradditionalbarsareprovidedatsplice
locations.Thecontinuingbarsineachfaceofthecolumnshallhaveatensilestrengthatleast0.25
timestheareaoftheverticalreinforcementinthatface.
8.2.16 SplicesofPlainBars
Forplainbars,theminimumlengthoflapshallbetwicethatofdeformedbarsspecifiedin8.2.12through8.2.15
above.
8.2.17 Developmentofheadedandmechanicallyanchoreddeformedbarsintension
8.2.17.1 Developmentlengthforheadeddeformedbarsintension, l,shallbedeterminedfrom8.2.17.2.Use
ofheadstodevelopdeformedbarsintensionshallbelimitedtoconditionssatisfying(a)through(f):
(a) Bar shallnotexceed420MPa;
614
Vol.2
Chapter1
Barsizeshallnotexceed36mm;
Concreteshallbenormalweight;
Netbearingareaofhead
;
shallnotbelessthan4
Clearcoverforbarshallnotbelessthan2 ;and
Clearspacingbetweenbarsshallnotbelessthan4 .
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
8.2.17.2 Forheadeddeformedbars,developmentlengthintension shallbe 0.19

/
,wherethe
valueof usedtocalculate shallnotexceed40MPa,andfactor shallbetakenas1.2forepoxy
coated reinforcement and 1.0 for other cases. Where reinforcement provided is in excess of that
requiredbyanalysis,exceptwheredevelopmentof isspecificallyrequired,afactorof ,
/
maybeappliedtotheexpressionfor .Length shallnotbelessthanthelargerof8
,
and150mm.
8.2.17.3 Headsshallnotbeconsideredeffectiveindevelopingbarsincompression.
8.2.17.4 Any mechanical attachmentor devicecapableofdeveloping ofreinforcement is allowed, provided
that test results showing the adequacy of such attachment or device are approved by the Engineer.
Developmentofreinforcementshallbepermittedtoconsistofacombinationofmechanicalanchorage
plus additional embedment length of reinforcement between the critical section and the mechanical
attachmentordevice.
8.2.18 Developmentofweldeddeformedwirereinforcementintension
8.2.18.1 Developmentlengthforweldeddeformedwirereinforcementintension, ,measuredfromthepoint
ofcriticalsectiontotheendofwireshallbecomputedastheproductof ld,from8.2.3.2or8.2.3.3,
timesweldeddeformedwirereinforcementfactor, ,from8.2.18.2or8.2.18.3.Itshallbepermitted
toreduce inaccordancewith8.2.3.5whenapplicable,but shallnotbelessthan200mmexceptin
computation of lap splices by 8.2.20. When using from 8.2.18.2, it shall be permitted to use an
epoxycoating factor of 1.0 for epoxycoated welded deformed wire reinforcement in 8.2.3.2 and
8.2.3.3.
8.2.18.2 Forweldeddeformedwirereinforcementwithatleastonecrosswirewithin andnotlessthan50mm
fromthepointofthecriticalsection, shallbethegreaterof
And
butnotgreaterthan1.0,wheresisthespacingbetweenthewirestobedeveloped.
8.2.18.3 Forweldeddeformedwirereinforcementwithnocrosswireswithin orwithasinglecrosswireless
than50mmfromthepointofthecriticalsection, shallbetakenas1.0,and shallbedetermined
asfordeformedwire.
8.2.18.4 Whereanyplainwires,ordeformedwireslargerthanD31,arepresentintheweldeddeformedwire
reinforcement in the direction of the development length, the reinforcement shall be developed in
accordancewith8.2.19.
8.2.19 Developmentofweldedplainwirereinforcementintension
Yield strength of welded plain wire reinforcement shall be considered developed by embedment of two cross
wireswiththeclosercrosswirenotlessthan50mmfromthepointofthecriticalsection.However, lshallnot
belessthan
615
Part6
StructuralDesign
8.2.4
where ismeasuredfromthepointofthecriticalsectiontotheoutermostcrosswire, isthespacingbetween

the wires to be developed, and as given in 8.2.3.4(d). Where reinforcement provided is in excess of that
required, may be reduced in accordance with 8.2.3.5. Length, , shall not be less than 150 mm except in
computationoflapsplicesby8.2.21.
8.2.20 Splicesofweldeddeformedwirereinforcementintension
8.2.20.1 Minimum lap splice length of welded deformed wire reinforcement measured between the ends of
each reinforcement sheet shall be not less than the larger of 1.3 and 200 mm, and the overlap
measuredbetweenoutermostcrosswiresofeachreinforcementsheetshallbenotlessthan50mm,
where iscalculatedinaccordancewith8.2.18todevelop .
8.2.20.2 Lap splices of welded deformed wire reinforcement, with no cross wires within the lap splice length,
shallbedeterminedasfordeformedwire.
8.2.20.3 Whereanyplainwires,ordeformedwireslargerthanMD200,arepresentintheweldeddeformedwire
reinforcement in the direction of the lap splice or where welded deformed wire reinforcement is lap
splicedtoweldedplainwirereinforcement,thereinforcementshallbelapsplicedinaccordancewith
8.2.21.
8.2.21 Splicesofweldedplainwirereinforcementintension
Minimumlengthoflapforlapsplicesofweldedplainwirereinforcementshallbeinaccordancewith8.2.21.1and
8.2.21.2.
8.2.21.1 Where provided is less than twice that required by analysis at splice location, length of overlap
measuredbetweenoutermostcrosswiresofeachreinforcementsheetshallbenotlessthanthelargest
ofonespacingofcrosswiresplus50mm,1.5 ,and150mm,where iscalculatedinaccordancewith
8.2.19todevelop .
8.2.21.2 Where provided is at least twice that required by analysis at splice location, length of overlap
measuredbetweenoutermostcrosswiresofeachreinforcementsheetshallnotbelessthanthelarger
of1.5 ,and50mm,where iscalculatedinaccordancewith8.2.19todevelop .
8.3
EARTHQUAKERESISTANTDESIGNPROVISIONS
8.3.1 Notation
= crosssectionalareaofastructuralmembermeasuredouttooutoftransversereinforcement,mm2
= areaofconcretesectionresistingshearofanindividualpierorhorizontalwallsegment,mm2
= net area of concrete section bounded by web thickness and length of section in the direction of
shearforceconsidered,mm2
= grossareaofsection,mm2
= effectivecrosssectionalareawithinajoint,see8.3.7.3,inaplaneparalleltoplaneofreinforcement
generating shear in the joint. The joint depth shall be the overall depth of the column. Where a
beam frames into a support of larger width, the effective width of the joint shall not exceed the
smallerof:
a) Beamwidthplusthejointdepth
b) twice the smaller perpendicular distance from the longitudinal axis of the
beamtothecolumnside(See8.3.7.3)
616
Vol.2
Chapter1
= total crosssectional area of transverse reinforcement (including cross ties) within spacing and
perpendiculartodimension
= effectivecompressiveflangewidthofastructuralmember,mm
= webwidthordiameterofcircularsection,mm
= bardiameter,mm
= loadeffectsofearthquakeorrelatedinternalmomentsandforces
= specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete
= specifiedyieldstrengthofreinforcement
= specifiedyieldstrengthoftransversereinforcement
= crosssectionaldimensionofcolumncoremeasuredcentretocentreofconfiningreinforcement
= heightofentirewall(diaphragm)orofthesegmentofwall(diaphragm)considered
= developmentlengthforastraightbar
= developmentlengthforabarwithastandardhook
= minimumlength,measuredfromjointfacealongaxisofstructuralmember,overwhichtransverse
reinforcementmustbeprovided,mm
= lengthofentirewall(diaphragm)orofsegmentofwall(diaphragm)consideredinthedirectionof
shearforce
= probableflexuralmoment strength of members, with orwithout axialload,determinedusing the

propertiesofthememberatthejointfacesassumingatensilestrengthinthelongitudinalbarsofat
least1.25 andastrengthreductionfactor of1.0
= portionofslabmomentbalancedbysupportmoment
= spacingoftransversereinforcementmeasuredalongthelongitudinalaxisofthestructuralmember,
mm
= maximumspacingoftransversereinforcement,mm
= nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyconcrete
= designshearforce
= nominalshearstrength
= factoredshearforceatsection
= coefficientdefiningtherelativecontributionofconcretestrengthtowallstrength
= ratiooftensionreinforcement=
= ratiooftotalreinforcementareatocrosssectionalareaofcolumn
= ratioofdistributedshearreinforcementonaplaneperpendiculartoplaneof
= ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to the core volume confined by the spiral reinforcement
(measuredouttoout)
;where
planeof
istheprojectionon
ofareaofdistributedshearreinforcementcrossingthe
= strengthreductionfactor.
8.3.2 Definitions
BASEOFSTRUCTURE:Thelevelatwhichearthquakemotionsareassumedtobeimpartedtoastructure.This
leveldoesnotnecessarilycoincidewiththegroundlevel.
617
Part6
StructuralDesign
BOUNDARYMEMBERS:Membersalongwallanddiaphragmedgesstrengthenedbylongitudinalandtransverse
reinforcement.Thesemembersdonotnecessarilyrequireanincreaseinthethicknessofthewallordiaphragm.If
required,edgesofopeningswithinwallsanddiaphragmsshallbeprovidedwithboundarymembers.
COLLECTORELEMENTS:Elementsthatareusedtotransmittheinertialforceswithinthediaphragmstomembers
ofthelateralforceresistingsystems.
CROSSTIE:Acontinuousbarhavingahooknotlessthan135degwithatleastasixdiameterextensionatone
endbutnotlessthan75mm,andahooknotlessthan90degwithatleastasixdiameterextensionattheother
end.Thehooksshallengageperipherallongitudinalbars.The90deghooksoftwosuccessivecrosstiesengaging
thesamelongitudinalbarsshallbealternatedendforend.
DEVELOPMENTLENGTHFORABARWITHASTANDARDHOOK:Theshortestdistancebetweenthecriticalsection
andatangenttotheouteredgeofthe90deghook.
HOOP : A hoop is a closed tie or continuously round tie. A closed tie can be made up of several reinforcing
elements with 135 deg hooks having a six diameter extension at each end (but not less than 75 mm). A
continuously round tie shall have at each end a 135 deg hook with a six diameter extension that engages the
longitudinalreinforcementbutnotlessthan75mm.
LATERAL FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM : That portion of the structure composed of members designed to resist
forcesrelatedtoearthquakeeffects.
SHELLCONCRETE:Concreteoutsidethetransversereinforcementconfiningtheconcrete
STRUCTURALDIAPHRAGMS:Structuralmembers,suchasfloorandroofslabs,whichtransmitinertialforcesto
lateralforceresistingmembers.
STRUCTURAL WALLS : Walls designed to resist combinations of shears, moments, and axial forces induced by
earthquakemotions.Ashearwallisastructuralwall.
STRUT:Anelementofastructuraldiaphragmusedtoprovidecontinuityaroundanopeninginthediaphragm.
TIEELEMENTS:Elementsusedtotransmitinertialforcesandpreventseparationofbuildingcomponents.
8.3.3 GeneralRequirements
8.3.3.1
Scope
(a) Thissectioncontainsspecialrequirementsfordesignandconstructionofreinforcedconcrete
membersofastructureforwhichthedesignforces,relatedtoearthquakemotions,havebeen
determinedonthebasisofenergydissipationinthenonlinearrangeofresponse.
(b) TheprovisionsofChapter6,shallapplyexceptasmodifiedbytheprovisionsofthissection.
(c) StructuresassignedtoseismicdesigncategorySDCD(seeChapter2),allreinforcedconcrete
structuresshallsatisfytherequirementsofspecialmomentframesasgivenin8.3.3through8.3.8in
additiontotherequirementsofChapter6.
(d) StructuresassignedtoSDCC(seeChapter2),allreinforcedconcretestructuresshallbebuiltto
satisfytherequirementsofintermediatemomentframesasgivenin8.3.10inadditiontothe
requirementsofChapter6.
(e) StructuresassignedtoSDCB(seeChapter2),allreinforcedconcretestructuresshallbebuiltto
satisfytherequirementsofordinarymomentframesasgivenin8.3.9inadditiontotherequirements
ofChapter6.
(f) StructuresinlowerSDCsarepermittedtodesignwithdetailingprovisionsofhigherSDCstotake
advantageoflowerdesignforcelevels.
8.3.3.2
AnalysisandProportioningofStructuralMembers
(a) Theinteractionofallstructuralandnonstructuralmembersshallbeconsideredintheanalysis.
(b) Rigidmemberswhicharenotapartofthelateralforceresistingsystemareallowedprovidedtheir
effectontheresponseofthesystemisconsideredandaccommodatedinthestructuraldesign.
Consequencesoffailureofstructuralandnonstructuralmemberswhicharenotapartofthelateral
forceresistingsystemshallalsobeconsidered.
(c) Structuralmembersbelowbaseofstructurerequiredtotransmitforcesresultingfromearthquake
effectstothefoundationshallalsocomplywiththerequirementsofthissection.
(d) Allstructuralmemberswhicharenotapartofthelateralforceresistingsystemshallconformto
8.3.9.
618
Vol.2
Chapter1
8.3.3.3
StrengthReductionFactors
Strengthreductionfactorsshallbeinaccordancewith6.2.3.2to6.2.3.4.
8.3.3.4
ConcreteinSpecialMomentFramesandSpecialStructuralWalls
Compressivestrength oftheconcreteshallbenotlessthan21N/mm2.Specifiedcompressivestrengthoflight
weightconcrete, ,shallnotexceed35MPaunlessdemonstratedbyexperimentalevidence.Modificationfactor
forlightweightconcreteinSec8.3shallbeinaccordancewith6.1.8unlessnotedotherwise.
8.3.3.5
ReinforcementinSpecialMomentFramesandSpecialStructuralWalls
Reinforcementresistingearthquakeinducedflexuralandaxialforcesinframesandwallboundarymembersshall
complywithASTMA706M,ASTMA615MandBDSISO69352:2007(E).Reinforcementwith =275N/mm2and
=420N/mm2areallowedinthesemembersif(a)theactualyieldstrengthbasedonmilltestsdoesnotexceed
the specified yield strength by more than 125 N/mm2 (retests shall not exceed this value by more than an
additional20N/mm2),and(b)theratiooftheactualultimatetensilestrengthtotheactualtensileyieldstrength
is not less than 1.25. The value of used to compute the amount of confinement reinforcement shall not
exceed700MPa.Thevalueof or usedinthedesignofshearreinforcementshallconformto6.4.3.2.
8.3.3.6
Welding
Reinforcement required by factored load combinations which include earthquake effect shall not be welded
except as specified in 8.3.4.2(d) and 8.3.5.3(b). In addition, welding shall not be permitted on stirrups, ties,
inserts,orothersimilarelementstolongitudinalreinforcementrequiredbydesign.
8.3.4 FlexuralMembersofSpecialMomentFrames
8.3.4.1
Scope
Requirements of this section shall apply to special moment frame members; (i) resisting earthquake induced
forces, and (ii) proportioned primarily to resist flexure. These frame members shall also satisfy the following
conditions:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Factoredaxialcompressiveforceonframemembershallnotexceed0.1
.
Clearspanforthemember, shallnotbelessthanfourtimesitseffectivedepth.
Thewidthtodepthratioshallbeatleast0.3.
Thewidthshallnotbe(i)lessthan250mmand(ii)morethanthewidthofthesupportingmember
(measuredonaplaneperpendiculartothelongitudinalaxisoftheflexuralmember)plusdistances
oneachsideofthesupportingmembernotexceedingthreefourthsofthedepthoftheflexural
member.
TheserequirementsareshowninFig.8.3.1.
8.3.4.2
LongitudinalReinforcement
(a) Atanysectionofaflexuralmemberandforthetopaswellasforthebottomreinforcement,the
andthereinforcementratio, shallnot
amountofreinforcementshallbenotlessthan1.4
exceed0.025(Fig.8.3.2).Atleasttwobarsshallbeprovidedcontinuouslybothtopandbottom.
(b) Thepositivemomentstrengthatthefaceofthejointshallbenotlessthanonehalfofthenegative
momentstrengthprovidedatthatfaceasshowninFig.8.3.2.Neitherthenegativenorthepositive
momentstrengthatanysectionalongthememberlengthshallbelessthanonefourththemaximum
momentstrengthprovidedatthefaceofeitherjoint.
(c) Lapsplicesofflexuralreinforcementshallbepermittedonlyifhooporspiralreinforcementis
providedoverthelaplength.Maximumspacingofthetransversereinforcementenclosingthelapped
barsshallnotexceed /4nor100mm.Lapsplicesshallnotbeused(i)withinthejoints,(ii)withina
distanceoftwicethememberdepthfromthefaceofthejoint,and(iii)atlocationswhereanalysis
indicatesflexuralyieldingcausedbyinelasticlateraldisplacementsoftheframe.Theserequirements
areshowninFig.8.3.3.
(d) Weldedsplicesandmechanicalconnectionsconformingto8.2.12.3(a)through8.2.12.3(d)are
allowedforsplicingprovidednotmorethanalternatebarsineachlayeroflongitudinal
reinforcementaresplicedatasectionandthecentretocentredistancebetweensplicesofadjacent
barsis600mmormoremeasuredalongthelongitudinalaxisoftheframemember.Weldedsplices
619
Part6
StructuralDesign
andmechanicalconnections(Type1)shallnotbeusedwithinadistanceequaltotwicethemember
depthfromthecolumnorbeamfacesforspecialmomentframesorfromsectionswhereyieldingof
thereinforcementislikelytooccurasaresultofinelasticlateraldisplacement.
8.3.4.3
(a) Hoopsshallbeprovidedinthefollowingregionsofframemembers:
i. Atbothendsoftheflexuralmember,overalengthequaltotwicethememberdepth
measuredfromthefaceofthesupportingmembertowardmidspan(Fig.8.3.4).
ii. Overlengthsequaltotwicethememberdepth(Fig.8.3.4),onbothsidesofasectionwhere
flexuralyieldingislikelytooccurinconnectionwithinelasticlateraldisplacementsofthe
frame.
(b) Thefirsthoopshallbelocatednotmorethan50mmfromthefaceofthesupportingmember(Fig.
8.3.4).Maximumspacingofthehoopsshallnotexceed(i) /4,(ii)eighttimesthediameterofthe
smallestlongitudinalbars,(iii)24timesthediameterofthehoopbars,and(iv)300mm.
(c) Wherehoopsarerequired,longitudinalbarsontheperimetershallhavelateralsupportconforming
to8.1.9.4(c),andwherehoopsarenotrequired,stirrupswithseismichooksshallbespacednot
morethan /2throughoutthelengthofthemember(Fig.8.3.4).
(d) Hoopsinflexuralmembersareallowedtobemadeupoftwopiecesofreinforcementconsistingofa
Ustirruphavinghooksnotlessthan135degwith6diameterbutnotlessthan75mmextension
anchoredintheconfinedcoreandacrosstietomakeaclosedhoop(Fig.8.3.5).Consecutivecross
tiesengagingthesamelongitudinalbarshallhavetheir90deghooksatoppositesidesoftheflexural
member.Ifthelongitudinalreinforcingbarssecuredbythecrosstiesareconfinedbyaslabonlyon
onesideoftheflexuralframemember,the90deghooksofthecrosstiesshallallbeplacedonthat
side.
Fig.8.3.1.GeneralrequirementforFlexuralMembersofSpecialMomentFrames
620
Vol.2
Chapter1
8.3.5 SpecialMomentFrameMembersSubjectedtoBendingandAxialLoad
8.3.5.1
Scope
Therequirementsofthissectionshallapplytocolumnsandotherframemembersservingtoresistearthquake
forcesandhavingafactoredaxialforceexceeding0.1
.Theseframemembersshallalsosatisfythefollowing
conditions:
(a) Theshortestcrosssectionaldimensionshallnotbelessthan300mm.
(b) Theratiooftheshortestcrosssectionaldimensiontotheperpendiculardimensionshallnotbeless
than0.4.
Fig.8.3.2FlexuralRequirementsforFlexuralMembersofSpecialMomentFrames
Fig.8.3.3LapSpliceRequirementsforFlexuralMembersofSpecialMomentFrames
8.3.5.2
MinimumFlexuralStrengthofColumns
621
Part6
StructuralDesign
(a) Flexuralstrengthofanycolumndesignedtoresistafactoredaxialcompressiveforceexceeding
0.1
shallsatisfy(b)or(c)below.Lateralstrengthandstiffnessofcolumnsnotsatisfying(b)
belowshallbeignoredincalculatingthestrengthandstiffnessofthestructurebutshallconformto
8.3.9.
(b) Theflexuralstrengthofthecolumnsshallsatisfythefollowingrelation:

1.2 (8.3.1)
where
= sum of moments, at the centre of the joint, corresponding to the design flexural
strength of the columns framing into that joint. The lowest flexural strength of the columns,
calculated for the factored axial force, consistent with the direction of the lateral forces
considered,shallbeused.
= sum of moments, at the centre of the joint, corresponding to the design flexural
strengthsofthegirdersframingintothatjoint.
Flexuralstrengthsshallbesummedsuchthatthecolumnmomentsopposethebeammoments.
Eq(8.3.1)shallbesatisfiedforbeammomentsactinginbothdirectionsintheverticalplaneof
theframeconsidered.
(c) Iftherequirementsof(b)aboveisnotsatisfiedatajoint,columnssupportingreactionsfromthat
jointshallbeprovidedwithtransversereinforcementasspecifiedin8.3.5.4overtheirentireheight.
Fig. 8.3.4 Transverse Reinforcement Requirements for Flexural Members of Special Moment
Frames
622
Vol.2
Chapter1
Fig.8.3.5HoopReinforcementRequirementsforFlexuralMembersofSpecialMomentFrames
Fig.8.3.6GeneralRequirementsforframessubjectedtobendingandaxialload
8.3.5.3
LongitudinalReinforcement
(a) Thereinforcementratio, ,shallnotbelessthan0.01andshallnotexceed0.06.
(b) Lapsplicesarepermittedonlywithinthecentrehalfofthememberlengthandshallbedesignedas
tension splices. Welded splices and mechanical connections conforming to 8.2.12.3(a) through
8.2.12.3(d) are allowed for splicing the reinforcement at any section provided not more than
alternate longitudinal bars are spliced at a section and the distance between splices is 600 mm or
morealongthelongitudinalaxisofthereinforcement.
TheseprovisionsareshowninFig.8.3.7.
623
Part6
StructuralDesign
8.3.5.4
(a) TransversereinforcementshallbeprovidedasspecifiedbelowandshowninFig.8.3.8andFig.8.3.9
unlessalargeramountisrequiredby8.3.8.
i)
Thevolumetricratioofspiralorcircularhoopreinforcement,
indicatedbythefollowingequation:
.
shallnotbelessthanthat
(8.3.2)
andshallnotbelessthanthatrequiredbyEq(6.3.6).
ii) Thetotalcrosssectionalareaofrectangularhoopreinforcementshallnotbelessthanthat
givenbythefollowingequations:
0.3
.
(8.3.3)
(8.3.4)
iii)
Transversereinforcementshallbeprovidedbyeithersingleoroverlappinghoopsorcross
tiesofthesamebarsizeandspacing.Eachendofthecrosstiesshallengageaperipheral
longitudinal reinforcing bar. Consecutive cross ties shall be alternated end for end along
thelongitudinalreinforcement.
iv)
Ifthedesignstrengthofmembercoresatisfiestherequirementsofthespecifiedloading
combinationsincludingearthquakeeffect,Eq(8.3.3)and(6.3.6)neednotbesatisfied.
Fig.8.3.7LongitudinalReinforcementRequirements
(b) Transverse reinforcement shall not be spaced more than onequarter of the minimum member
dimensionnor100mm.
(c) Spacingofcrosstiesorlegsofoverlappinghoopsshallnotbemorethan350mmoncentreinthe
directionperpendiculartothelongitudinalaxisofthemember.
624
Vol.2
Chapter1
(d) The volume of transverse reinforcement in amount specified in (a) through (c) above shall be
provided over a length from each joint face and on both sides of any section where flexural
yieldingislikelytooccurinconnectionwithinelasticlateraldisplacementsoftheframe.Thelength
shallnotbelessthan(i)thedepthofthememberatthejointfaceoratthesectionwhereflexural
yieldingislikelytooccur,(ii)onesixthoftheclearspanofthemember,and(iii)450mm.
(e) Ifthefactoredaxialforceincolumnssupportingreactionsfromdiscontinuedstiffmembers,suchas
walls, exceeds 0.1
they shall be provided with transverse reinforcement as specified in (a)
through (c) above over their full height beneath the level at which the discontinuity occurs.
Transversereinforcement shall extend into the discontinued member for atleast the development
lengthofthelargestlongitudinalreinforcementinthecolumninaccordancewith8.3.7.4.Ifthelower
end of the column terminates on a wall, transverse reinforcement as specified above shall extend
into the wall for at least the development length of the largest longitudinal reinforcement in the
column at the point of termination. If the column terminates on a footing or mat, transverse
reinforcementasspecifiedinaboveshallextendatleast300mmintothefootingormat.
(f) Wheretransversereinforcementasspecifiedin(a)through(c)above,isnotprovidedthroughoutthe
full length of the column, the remainder of the column length shall contain spiral or hoop
reinforcementwithcentretocentrespacingnotexceedingthesmallerof6timesthediameterofthe
longitudinalcolumnbarsor150mm.
625
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fig.8.3.8TransverseReinforcementRequirementsRectangularHoop
626
Vol.2
Chapter1
Fig.8.3.9TransverseReinforcementRequirementsSpiralHoop
8.3.6 SpecialStructuralWallsandDiaphragms
8.3.6.1
Scope
The requirements of this section apply to structural walls serving as parts of the earthquake force resisting
systems as well as to diaphragms, struts, ties, chords and collector members which transmit forces induced by
earthquake.
8.3.6.2
Reinforcement
(a) Thereinforcementratio, forstructuralwallsshallnotbelessthan0.0025alongthelongitudinal
andtransversedirections.Reinforcementspacingeachwayshallnotexceed450mm.Reinforcement
providedforshearstrengthshallbecontinuousandshallbedistributedacrosstheshearplane.Ifthe
designshearforcedoesnotexceed0.083
,theshearreinforcementmayconformto6.6.3.
(b) Atleasttwolayersofreinforcementshallbeusedinawalliftheinplanefactoredshearforce
assignedtothewallexceeds0.17
.
(c) Structuraltrussmembers,struts,ties,andcollectormemberswithcompressivestressesexceeding
0.2 shallhavespecialtransversereinforcement,asspecifiedin8.3.5.4overthetotallengthofthe
member.Thespecialtransversereinforcementisallowedtobediscontinuedatasectionwherethe
calculatedcompressivestressislessthan0.15 .Stressesshallbecalculatedforthefactoredforces
usingalinearelasticmodelandgrosssectionpropertiesofthemembersconsidered.
a) Allcontinuousreinforcementinstructuralwalls,diaphragms,trusses,struts,ties,chords,and
collectormembersshallbeanchoredorsplicedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsforreinforcement
intensionasspecifiedin8.3.7.4.
8.3.6.3
BoundaryMembersforStructuralWallsandDiaphragms
(a) Boundarymembersshallbeprovidedatboundariesandedgesaroundopeningsofstructuralwalls
anddiaphragmsforwhichthemaximumextremefibrestressexceeds0.2 unlesstheentirewallor
diaphragmmemberisreinforcedtosatisfy8.3.5.4(a)through8.3.5.4(c).Theboundarymembersmay
bediscontinuedwherethecalculatedcompressivestressislessthan0.15 .Stressesshallbe
calculatedforthefactoredforcesusingalinearlyelasticmodelandgrosssectionproperties.
(b) Whererequired,boundarymembersshallhavetransversereinforcementasspecifiedin8.3.5.4(a)
through8.3.5.4(c).
(c) Boundarymembersofstructuralwallsshallbedesignedtocarryallfactoredgravityloadsonthe
wall,includingtributaryloadsandselfweight,aswellastheverticalforcerequiredtoresist
overturningmomentcalculatedfromfactoredforcesrelatedtoearthquakeeffect.
(d) Boundarymembersofstructuraldiaphragmsshallbeproportionedtoresistthesumofthefactored
axialforceactingintheplaneofthediaphragmandtheforceobtainedfromdividingthefactored
momentatthesectionbythedistancebetweentheedgesofthediaphragmatthatsection.
(e) Transversereinforcementinwallswithboundarymembersshallbeanchoredwithintheconfined
coreoftheboundarymembertodevelopthetensileyieldstress.
(f) Transversereinforcementterminatingattheedgesofstructuralwallswithoutboundaryelements
shallhaveastandardhookengagingtheedgereinforcementortheedgereinforcementshallbe
627
Part6
StructuralDesign
enclosedintheUstirrupshavingthesamesizeandspacingas,andsplicedto,thetransverse
reinforcement,exceptwhen Vuintheplaneofthewallislessthan0.083
.
8.3.6.4
ConstructionJoints
Allconstructionjointsinwallsanddiaphragmsshallconformto5.16.4andcontactsurfacesshallberoughenedas
specifiedin6.4.5.9.
8.3.6.5
DiscontinuousWalls
Columnssupportingdiscontinuouswallsshallbereinforcedinaccordancewith8.3.5.4(e).
8.3.7 JointsofSpecialMomentFrames
8.3.7.1
GeneralRequirements
(a) Forcesinlongitudinalbeamreinforcementatthefacesofjointsofreinforcedconcreteframesshall
bedeterminedforastressof1.25 inthereinforcement.
(b) Jointstrengthshallbecalculatedbytheappropriatestrengthreductionfactorsspecifiedin6.2.3.1.
(c) Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminated in a column shall be extended to the far face of the
confined column core and anchored in tension according to 8.3.7.4 below and in compression
accordingtoSec8.2.
8.3.7.2
(a) Asspecifiedin8.3.5.4,transversehoopreinforcementshallbeprovidedwithinthejoint,unlessthe
jointisconfinedbystructuralmembersasspecifiedin(b)below.
(b) Withinthedepthoftheshallowestframingmember,transversereinforcementequaltoatleastone
halftheamountrequiredby8.3.5.4(a)shallbeprovidedwheremembersframeintoallfoursidesof
the joint and where each member width is at least threefourths the column width. At these
locations,thespacingspecifiedin8.3.5.4(b)maybeincreasedto150mm.
(c) As required by 8.3.5.4, transverse reinforcement shall be provided through the joint to provide
confinementforlongitudinalbeamreinforcementoutsidethecolumncoreifsuchconfinementisnot
providedbyabeamframingintothejoint.
TheseprovisionsareshowninFig.8.3.10andFig.8.3.11.
Fig.8.3.10GeneralRequirementsandTransverseReinforcementRequirementsforJointsnotconfinedbyStructural
member
628
Vol.2
Chapter1
Fig.8.3.11TransverseReinforcementRequirementsforJointsConfinedbyStructuralmember
8.3.7.3
ShearStrength
Thenominalshearstrengthforthejointshallbetakennotgreaterthantheforcesspecifiedbelow:
1.7
forjointsconfinedonallfourfaces
1.2
forjointsconfinedonthreefacesorontwooppositefaces
1.0
forothers
Amemberthatframesintoafaceisconsideredtoprovideconfinementtothejointifatleastthreequartersof
the face of the joint is covered by the framing member. A joint is considered to be confined if such confining
membersframeintoallfacesofthejoint.
8.3.7.4
DevelopmentLengthofBarsinTension
(a) Thedevelopmentlength, ,forabarwithastandard90ohookshallbenotlessthan(i)8
150mm,and(iii)thelengthrequiredbyEq(8.3.5).
.
,(ii)
(8.3.5)
forbarsizes10mm through36mm.
629
Part6
StructuralDesign
(b) Forbarsizes10mm through36mm,thedevelopmentlength, ,forastraightbarshallbenot

lessthan(i)2.5timesthelengthrequiredby(a)above,ifthedepthoftheconcretecastinonelift
beneaththebardoesnotexceed300mm,and(ii)3.5timesthelengthrequiredby(a)above,ifthe
depthoftheconcretecastinoneliftbeneaththebarexceeds300mm.
(c) Straightbarsterminatedatajointshallpassthroughtheconfinedcoreofacolumnorofaboundary
member.Anyportionofthestraightembedmentlengthnotwithintheconfinedcoreshallbe
increasedbyafactorof1.6.
8.3.8 ShearStrengthRequirements
8.3.8.1
DesignForces
(a) FrameMembersSubjectedPrimarilytoBending:Thedesignshearforce shallbedeterminedfrom
considerationofthestaticalforcesontheportionofthememberbetweenfacesofthejoints.Itshall
beassumedthatmomentsofoppositesigncorrespondingtoprobablestrength
actatthejoint
faces,andthatthememberisloadedwiththefactoredtributarygravityloadalongitsspan.
(b) FrameMembersSubjectedtoCombinedBendingandAxialLoad:Thedesignshearforce shallbe
determinedfromconsiderationofthemaximumforcesthatcanbegeneratedatthefacesofthe
jointsateachendofthemember.Thesejointforcesshallbedeterminedusingthemaximum
probablemomentstrengths
ofthememberassociatedwiththerangeoffactoredaxialloadson
themember.Themembershearsneednotexceedthosedeterminedfromjointstrengthsbasedon
theprobablemomentstrength
ofthetransversemembersframingintothejoint.Innocase,
shallbelessthanthefactoredsheardeterminedbytheanalysisofthestructure.
(c) StructuralWallsandDiaphragms:Thedesignshearforce shallbeobtainedfromthelateralload
analysisinaccordancewiththefactoredloadsandcombinationsspecifiedinChapter2,loads.
8.3.8.2
TransverseReinforcementinFrameMembers
(a) Fordeterminingtherequiredtransversereinforcementinframemembers,thequantity shallbe
assumedtobezeroifthefactoredaxialcompressiveforceincludingearthquakeeffectsislessthan
0.05
whentheearthquakeinducedshearforces,calculatedinaccordancewith8.3.8.1(a),
representsonehalformoreoftotaldesignshear.
(b) Stirrupsortiesrequiredtoresistshearshallbeclosedhoopsoverlengthsofmembersasspecifiedin
8.3.4.3,8.3.5.4and8.3.7.2.
8.3.8.3
ShearStrengthofSpecialStructuralWallsandDiaphragms
(a) Nominalshearstrengthofstructuralwallsanddiaphragmsshallbedeterminedusingeither(b)or(c)
below.
(b) Nominalshearstrength, ofstructuralwallsanddiaphragmsshallbeassumednottoexceedthe
shearforcecalculatedfrom
0.17
(8.3.6)
(c) Forwallsandwallsegmentshavingaratioof
anddiaphragmshallbedeterminedfrom
lessthan2.0,nominalshearstrengthofwall
(8.3.7)
1.5to0.17for
2.0.
wherethecoefficient varieslinearlyfrom0.25for
1.5, 0.25.
usedin(c)abovefordetermining forsegmentsofawallordiaphragmshall
(d) Valueofratio
bethelargeroftheratiosfortheentirewall(diaphragm)andthesegmentofwall(diaphragm)
considered.
(e) Wallsanddiaphragmsshallhavedistributedshearreinforcementprovidingresistanceintwo
doesnotexceed2.0,
orthogonaldirectionsintheplaneofthewall.Iftheratio
reinforcementratio, shallnotbelessthanreinforcementratio .
(f) Nominalshearstrengthofallwallpierssharingacommonlateralforceshallnotbeassumedto
exceed0.67
,where isthetotalcrosssectionalarea,andthenominalshearstrengthof
anyoneoftheindividualwallpiersshallnotbeassumedtoexceed0.83
where
representsthecrosssectionalareaofthepierconsidered.
For
630
Vol.2
Chapter1
(g) Nominalshearstrengthofhorizontalwallsegmentsshallbeassumednottoexceed0.83
where representsthecrosssectionalareaofahorizontalwallsegment.
8.3.9 OrdinaryMomentFrameMembersnotProportionedtoResistForcesInducedby
EarthquakeMotion
8.3.9.1
Inducedmoments
Frame members assumed not to contribute to lateral resistance shall be detailed according to (a) or (b) below
depending on the magnitude of moments induced in those members when subjected to twice the lateral
displacementunderthefactoredlateralforces.
(a) Memberswithfactoredgravityaxialforcesnotexceeding0.1
shallsatisfy8.3.4.2(a)and
shallsatisfy8.3.5.4,
8.3.8.1(a)andmemberswithfactoredgravityaxialforcesexceeding0.1
8.3.7.2(a)and8.3.8.1(b)whentheinducedmomentexceedsthedesignmomentstrengthofthe
framemember.
(b) Themembershallsatisfy8.3.4.2(a)whentheinducedmomentdoesnotexceedthedesignmoment
strengthoftheframemembers.
8.3.9.2
Tierequirements
All frame members with factored axial compressive forces exceeding 0.1
requirementsunlesstheycomplywith8.3.5.4.
shall satisfy the following special
(a) Tiesshallhavehooksnotlessthan135owithextensionsnotlessthan6tiebardiameteror60mm.
Crosstiesasdefinedin8.3.2areallowed.
(b) Themaximumtiespacingshallbe overalength measuredfromthejointface.Thespacing
shallbenotmorethan(i)eightdiametersofthesmallestlongitudinalbarenclosed,(ii)24tiebar
diameters,and(iii)onehalftheleastcrosssectionaldimensionofthecolumn.Thelength shallnot
belessthan(i)onesixthoftheclearheightofthecolumn,(ii)themaximumcrosssectional
dimensionofthecolumn,and(iii)450mm.
(c) Thefirsttieshallbewithinadistanceequalto0.5 fromthefaceofthejoint.
(d) Thetiespacingshallnotexceed2 inanypartofthecolumn.
8.3.10 RequirementsforIntermediateMomentFrames
8.3.10.1 Scope
ForstructuresassignedtoSDCC,structuralframesproportionedtoresistforcesinducedbyearthquakemotions
shallsatisfytherequirementsof8.3.10inadditiontothoseofChapter6.
8.3.10.2 ReinforcementRequirements
Reinforcementdetailsinaframemembershallsatisfy8.3.10.4belowifthefactoredcompressiveaxialloadfor
. If the factored compressive axial load is larger, frame reinforcement
the member does not exceed 0.1
detailsshallsatisfy8.3.10.5belowunlessthememberhasspiralreinforcementaccordingtoEq(6.3.6).Ifatwo
wayslabsystemwithoutbeamsistreatedaspartofaframeresistingearthquakeeffect,reinforcementdetailsin
anyspanresistingmomentscausedbylateralforceshallsatisfy8.3.10.6below.
8.3.10.3 Shearrequirements
Design shear strength of beams, columns, and twoway slabs resisting earthquake effect shall not be less than
either (a) the sum of the shear associated with development of nominal moment strengths of the member at
each restrained end of the clear span and the shear calculated for factored gravity loads, or (b) the maximum
shearobtainedfromdesignloadcombinationswhichincludeearthquakeeffect.
8.3.10.4 Beams
(a) Thepositivemomentstrengthatthefaceofthejointshallnotbelessthanonethirdthenegative
momentstrengthprovidedatthatface(Fig.8.3.12).Neitherthenegativenorpositivemoment
strengthatanysectionalongthelengthofthemembershallbelessthanonefifthofthemaximum
momentstrengthprovidedatthefaceofeitherjoint.
631
Part6
StructuralDesign
(b) Atbothendsofthemember,stirrupsshallbeprovidedoverlengthsequaltotwicethemember
depthmeasuredfromthefaceofthesupportingmembertowardmidspan(Fig.8.3.13).Thefirst
stirrupshallbelocatednotmorethan50mmfromthefaceofthesupportingmember.Maximum
stirrupspacingshallnotexceed(a) /4,(b)8timesthediameterofthesmallestlongitudinalbar
enclosed,(c)24timesthediameterofthestirrupbar,and(d)300mm.
(c) Stirrupsshallbeplacedatnotmorethan /2throughoutthelengthofthemember.
Fig.8.3.12FlexuralRequirementsforBeams
Fig.8.3.13TransversereinforcementRequirementsforBeams
8.3.10.5 Columns
(a) Maximumtiespacingshallnotexceed sooveralength measuredfromthejointface.The
spacing soshallnotexceed(i)8timesthediameterofthesmallestlongitudinalbarenclosed,(ii)24
timesthediameterofthetiebar,(iii)onehalfofthesmallestcrosssectionaldimensionoftheframe
member,and(iv)300mm.Thelength shallnotbelessthan(i)onesixthoftheclearspanofthe
member,(ii)maximumcrosssectionaldimensionofthemember,and(iii)450mm.
(b) Thefirsttieshallbelocatednotmorethan /2fromthejointface.
(c) Jointreinforcementshallconformto6.4.9.
632
Vol.2
Chapter1
(d) Tiespacingshallnotexceed2 throughoutthelengthofthemember.

Fig.8.3.14TransverseReinforcementRequirementsforColumns
8.3.10.6 TwowaySlabswithoutBeams
(a) Thefactoredslabmomentatthesupportsrelatingtoearthquakeeffectshallbedeterminedforload
combinationsspecifiedinChapter2,Loads.Allreinforcementprovidedtoresisttheportionofslab
momentbalancedbysupportmomentshallbeplacedwithinthecolumnstripdefinedin6.5.2.1
(Fig.8.3.15).
(b) Thefractionalpartofthecolumnstripmomentshallberesistedbyreinforcementplacedwithinthe
effectivewidth(Fig.8.3.15)specifiedin6.5.5.3.2.
(c) Notlessthanonehalfofthetotalreinforcementinthecolumnstripatthesupportshallbeplaced
withintheeffectiveslabwidth(Fig.8.3.15)specifiedin6.5.5.3.2.
(d) Notlessthanonequarterofthetopsteelatthesupportinthecolumnstripshallbecontinuous
throughoutthespan(Fig.8.3.16).
(e) Continuousbottomreinforcementinthecolumnstripshallbenotlessthanonethirdofthetop
reinforcementatthesupportinthecolumnstrip.
(f) Notlessthanonehalfofallbottomreinforcementatmidspanshallbecontinuousandshalldevelop
itsyieldstrengthatthefaceofsupport(Fig.8.3.17).
633
Part6
StructuralDesign
(g) Atdiscontinuousedgesoftheslaballtopandbottomreinforcementatthesupportshallbe
developedatthefaceofthesupport(Fig.8.3.16andFig.8.3.17).
Fig.8.3.15ReinforcementDetailsatSupportofTwowaySlabswithoutbeams
Fig.8.3.16ReinforcementDetailsinTwowaySlabswithoutbeams:ColumnStrip
Fig.8.3.17ReinforcementDetailsinTwowaySlabswithoutbeams:MiddleStrip
634
Vol.2
Chapter 9
PRESTRESSEDCONCRETESTRUCTURES
PartADesign
9.1
Scope
9.1.1
Provisionsofthischaptershallapplytomembersprestressedwithwires,strands,orbarsconformingto
thespecificationsofprestressingtendonsgiveninArticle9.5.1.3.
9.1.2
Allprovisionsofthiscodenotspecificallyexcluded,andnotinconflictwithprovisionsofthisChapter9,
shallapplytoprestressedconcrete.
9.2
Definitions
ACTION: Mechanical force or environmental effect to which the structure (or structural component) is
subjected.
AERODYNAMIC SHAPE FACTOR: Factor to account for the effect of geometry of structure on the surface
pressureduetowind.
ANALYSIS (ASSESSMENT): Acceptable methods of evaluating the performance indices or verifying the
complianceofspecificcriteria.
ANCHORAGE: In posttensioning, a mechanical device used to anchor the tendon to the concrete; in
pretensioning,adeviceusedtoanchorthetendonuntiltheconcretehasreachedapredeterminedstrength,
andtheprestressingforcehasbeentransferredtotheconcrete;forreinforcingbars,alengthofreinforcement,
oramechanicalanchororhook,orcombinationthereofattheendofabarneededtotransfertheforcecarried
bythebarintotheconcrete.
ANCHORAGE BLISTER: A buildup area on the web, flange, or flangeweb junction for the incorporation of
tendonanchoragefittings.
ANCHORAGE ZONE: The portion of the structure in which the prestressing force is transferred from the
anchoragedeviceontothelocalzoneoftheconcrete,andthendistributedmorewidelyinthegeneralzoneof
thestructure.
ATJACKING:Atthetimeoftensioningtheprestressingtendons.
ATLOADING:Thematurityoftheconcretewhenloadsareapplied.Suchloadsincludeprestressingforcesand
permanentloadsbutgenerallynotliveloads.
ATTRANSFER:Immediatelyafterthetransferofprestressingforcetotheconcrete.
AUTOGENEOUS SHRINKAGE: Volume decrease due to loss of water in the hydration process causing negative
porepressureinconcrete.
BIOLOGICAL DEGRADATION: The physical or chemical degradation of concrete due to the effect of organic
matterssuchasbacteria,lichens,fungi,moss,etc.
BLEEDING: Segregation between water and the other ingredients in concrete causing water to rise up to the
surfaceofthefreshlyplacedconcrete.
BONDEDMEMBER:Aprestressedconcretememberinwhichtendonsarebondedtotheconcreteeitherdirectly
orthroughgrouting.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6449
Part6
StructuralDesign
BONDED POSTTENSIONING: Posttensioned construction in which the annular space around the tendons is
groutedafterstressing,therebybondingthetendontotheconcretesection.
BONDEDTENDON:Prestressingtendonthatisbondedtoconcreteeitherdirectlyorthroughgrouting.
BURSTING FORCE: Tensile forces in the concrete in the vicinity of the transfer or anchorage of prestressing
forces.
CARBONATION:Actioncausedbychemicalreactionbetweencalciumhydroxideinconcreteandcarbondioxide
intheenvironment,resultinginadensersurfaceforthecarbonatedconcreteandreductionofalkalinityinthe
carbonatedportion.
CASTINPLACECONCRETE:Concreteplacedinitsfinalpositioninthestructurewhilestillinaplasticstate.
CHARACTERISTICSTRENGTH:Unlessotherwisestatedinthiscode,thecharacteristicstrengthofmaterialrefers
tothevalueofthestrengthbelowwhichnoneofthetestresultsshouldfallbelowbymorethan15%or3.5MPa
for35MPaconcrete,and10%or3.5MPafor35Mpaconcrete,whicheverislarger.
CHEMICAL ADMIXTUREs: Admixtures which are usually used in small quantities typically in the form of liquid
andcanbeaddedtotheconcretebothatthetimeofmixingandbeforeplacingtoimprovevariousconcrete
propertiessuchasworkability,aircontentanddurability,etc.
CLOSELY SPACED ANCHORAGES: Anchorage devices are defined as closely spaced if their centre to centre
spacingdoesnotexceed1.5timesthewidthoftheanchoragedevicesinthedirectionconsidered.
CLOSURE: A placement of castinplace concrete used to connect two or more previously cast portions of a
structure.
COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION: Concrete components or concrete and steel components interconnected to
respondtoforceeffectsasaunit.
COMPRESSIONCONTROLLED SECTION: A crosssection in which the net tensile strain in the extreme tension
steelatnominalresistanceislessthanorequaltothecompressioncontrolledstrainlimit.
COMPRESSIONCONTROLLEDSTRAINLIMIT:Thenettensilestrainintheextremetensionsteelatbalancedstrain
conditions.
CONCRETECOVER:Thespecifiedminimumdistancebetweenthesurfaceofthereinforcingbars,strands,post
tensioningducts,anchorages,orotherembeddeditems,andthesurfaceoftheconcrete.
CONFINEMENT: A condition where the disintegration of the concrete under compression is prevented by the
developmentoflateraland/orcircumferentialforcessuchasmaybeprovidedbyappropriatereinforcingsteel
orcompositetubes,orsimilardevices.
CONFINEMENT ANCHORAGE: Anchorage for a posttensioning tendon that functions on the basis of
containmentoftheconcreteintheanchoragezonebyspecialreinforcement.
CREEP:Timedependentdeformationofconcreteunderpermanentload.
CREEPCOEFFICIENT:Theratioofcreepstraintoelasticstraininconcrete.
CREEPINCONCRETE:Increaseinstrainwithtimeinconcretesubjectedtosustainedstress.
CURVATUREFRICTION:Frictionresultingfrombendsorcurvesinthespecifiedprestressingtendstageatwhich
thecompressivestressesonprofile.
DAMAGECONTROL:Ameanstoensurethatthelimitstaterequirementismetforrestorabilityorrepairability
ofastructure.
DECOMPRESSION:Thestageatwhichthecompressivestresses,inducedprestress,areovercomebythetensile
stresses.
DEEPCOMPONENT:componentsinwhichthedistancefromthepointof0.0sheartothefaceofthesupportis
lessthan2dorcomponentsinwhichaloadcausingmorethanonethirdoftheshearatasupportiscloserthan
2dfromthefaceofthesupport.
DEFORMABILITY:Atermexpressingtheabilityofconcretetodeform.
DEGREEOFDETERIORATION:Theextenttowhichtheperformanceofastructureisdegradedortheextentto
which the deterioration has progressed from the time of construction, as a result of its exposure to the
environment.
DESIGN LIFE: Assumed period for which the structure is to be used satisfactorily for its intended purpose or
functionwithanticipatedmaintenancebutwithoutsubstantialrepairbeingnecessary.
6450
Vol.2
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9
DETERIRATIONFACTOR:Thefactoraffectingthedeteriorationprocess.
DETERIRATIONINDEX:Anindexselectedforestimatingandevaluatingtheextentofthedeteriorationprocess.
DETERIORATIONPREDICTION:Prediction of the future rateofdeterioration of a structurebased on resultsof
inspectionandrelevantrecordsmadeduringthedesignandconstructionstages.
DEVIATION SADDLE: A concrete block buildout in web, flange, or webflange junction used to control the
geometryofortoprovideameansforchangingdirectionof,externaltendons.
DRYING SHRINKAGE: Volume decrease due to loss of moisture from concrete in the hardened state which is
usuallyseriousinhotanddryenvironment.
DURABILITYDESIGN:Designtoensurethatthestructurecanmaintainitsrequiredfunctionsduringservicelife
underenvironmentalactions.
DURABILITYGRADE:Theextentofdurabilitytowhichthestructureshallbemaintainedinordertosatisfythe
requiredperformanceduringitsdesignlife.Thisaffectsthedegreeandfrequencyoftheremedialactionstobe
carriedoutduringthatlife.
DURABILITYLIMITSTATE:Themaximumdegreeofdeteriorationallowedforthestructureduringitsdesignlife.
DURABILITYPREDICTION:Predictionofthefuturedegreeofdeteriorationofthestructurebasedondatausedin
itsdesign.
DYNAMICAPPROACH:Anapproachbasedondynamicanalysistoassesstheoverallforcesonastructureliable
tohavearesonantresponsetowindaction.
DYNAMICRESPONSEFACTOR:Factortoaccountfortheeffectsofcorrelationandresonantresponse.
EARLYAGESTATE:Thestateofconcretefromfinalsettinguntiltheachievementoftherequiredcharacteristic
strength.
EFFECTIVEPRESTRESS:Stressremaininginprestressingtendonsafteralllosseshaveoccurred,excludingeffects
ofdeadloadandsuperimposedload.
ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIONS: An assembly of physical, chemical or biological influences which may cause
deterioration to the materials making up the structure, which in turn may adversely affect its serviceability,
restorabilityandsafety.
FATIGUE LOADS: Repetitive loads causing fatigue in the material which reduces its strength, stiffness and
deformability.
FINALPRESTRESS:Stresswhichexistsaftersubstantiallyalllosseshaveoccurred.
FINALTENSION:Thetensioninthesteelcorrespondingtothestateofthefinalprestress.
FORMWORK: Total system of support for freshly placed concrete including the mould or sheathing, all
supportingmembers,hardwareandnecessarybracings.
FRESHSTATEOFCONCRETE:Thestateofconcreteaftermixinguntilthecompletionofplacing.
FUNCTION:Thetaskwhichastructureisrequiredtoperform.
GENERALZONE:Regionadjacenttoaposttensionedanchoragewithinwhichtheprestressingforcespreadsout
toanessentiallylinearstressdistributionoverthecrosssectionofthecomponent.
GROUT:Amixtureofcementitiousmaterialandwaterwithorwithoutadmixtures.
HARDENEDSTATEOFCONCRETE:Thestateofconcreteafterachievingtherequiredstrength.
IMPORTANCE: rank assigned to a structure according to the likely overall impact caused by its failure, due to
deterioration,tosatisfactorilyperformitsfunctionsasdeterminedatthetimeofdesign.
INITIALPRESTRESS:Theprestressintheconcreteattransfer.
INITIALTENSION:Themaximumstressinducedintheprestressingtendonatthetimeofstressingoperation.
IRREGULAR STRUCTURES: Structures having unusual shapes such as open structures, structures with large
overhangsorotherprojections,andanybuildingwithacomplexshape.
JACKINGFORCE:Temporaryforceexertedbydevicethatintroducestensionintoprestressingtendons.
LIMITSTATE:Acriticalstatespecifiedusingaperformanceindex,beyondwhichthestructurenolongersatisfies
thedesignperformancerequirements.
LIMITSOFDISPLACEMENT:Allowabledeformationofstructureintermsofsuchparametersasinterstoreydrift
andrelativehorizontaldisplacement,tocontrolexcessivedeflection,crackingandvibration.
6451
Part6
StructuralDesign
Longterm performance index: Index defining the remaining capacity of a structure in performing its design
functionsduringthedesignlife.
LOCAL ZONE: The volume of concrete that surrounds and is immediately ahead of the anchorage device and
thatissubjectedtohighcompressivestresses.
MAINTENANCE: A set of activities taken to ensure that the structure continues to perform its functions
satisfactorilyduringthedesignlife.
MECHANICALFORCES:Anassemblyofconcentratedordistributedforcesactingonastructure,ordeformations
imposedonit.
MODEL: Mathematical description or experimental setup simulating the actions, material properties and
behaviorofastructure.
MONITORING:Continuousrecordingofdatapertainingtodeteriorationand/orperformanceofstructureusing
appropriateequipment.
NOMINALSTRENGTHOFMATERIAL:Thecharacteristicvaluesofthestrengthofmaterialsusedforcalculation,in
absenceoftheavailablestatisticaldata.
NORMALCONCRETE:Concretewhichiscommonlyusedinconstruction;itdoesnotincludespecialconstituent
materials other than Portland cement, water, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and common mineral and
chemicaladmixtures;itdoesnotrequireanyspecialpracticeforitsmanufacturingandhandling.
OVERALLPERFORMANCEINDEX:Indexindicatingtheoverallperformanceofthestructure.
specialpracticeforitsmanufacturingandhandling.
PARTIALPERFORMANCEINDEX:Indexindicatingapartialperformanceofthestructure.
PARTIALSAFETYFACTORFORMATERIAL:Foranalysispurposes,thedesignstrengthofamaterialisdetermined
asthecharacteristicstrengthdividedbyapartialsafetyfactor.
PERFORMANCE:Ability(orefficiency)ofastructuretoperformitsdesignfunctions.
PERFORMANCEINDEX:Indexindicatingstructuralperformancequantitatively.
PERMANENTACTIONS:Selfweightsofstructuresinclusiveofpermanentattachments,fixturesandfittings.
PLASTIC SHRINKAGE: Shrinkage arising from loss of water from the exposed surface of concrete during the
plasticstate,leadingtocrackingattheexposedsurface.
PLSTICSTATE:Thestateofconcretefromjustafterplacinguntilthefinalsettingofconcrete.
POSTTENSIONING:Methodofprestressinginwhichtendonsaretensionedafterconcretehashardened.
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE : Reinforced concrete in which internal stresses have been introduced to reduce
potentialtensilestressesinconcreteresultingfromloads.
PRETENSIONING:Methodofprestressinginwhichtendonsaretensionedbeforeconcreteisplaced.
SHRINKAGELOSS:Thelossofstressintheprestressingsteelresultingfromtheshrinkageofconcrete.
RELIABILITY:Abilityofastructuretofulfillspecifiedrequirementsduringitsdesignlife.
REMAINING SERVICE LIFE: Period from the point of inspection to the time when the structure is no longer
useable,ordoesnotsatisfactorilyperformthefunctionsdeterminedatthetimeofdesign.
REMEDIAL ACTION: Maintenance action carried out with the objective of arresting or slowing down the
deteriorationprocess,restoringorimprovingtheperformanceofastructure,orreducingthedangerofdamage
orinjurytotheusersoranythirdparty.
REPAIR:Remedialactiontakenwiththeobjectiveofarrestingorslowingdownthedeteriorationofastructure,
orreducingthepossibilityofdamagetotheusersorthirdparty.
RESTORABILTY (OR REPAIRABILIY): Ability of a structure to be repaired physically and economically when
damagedundertheeffectsofconsideredactions.
ROBUSTNESS (OR STRUCTURAL INSENSITIVITY): Ability of a structure to withstand damage by events like fire,
explosion,impact,instabilityorconsequencesofhumanerrors.
SAFETY:Abilityofastructuretoensurethatnoharmwouldcometotheusersandtopeopleinthevicinityof
thestructureunderanyaction.
SEGREGATION:Separationofoneormoreconstituentmaterialsfromtherestoftheconcrete,suchasbleeding,
aggregateblocking,etc.
6452
Vol.2
SERVICELIFE:Thelengthoftimefromthecompletionofastructureuntilthetimewhenitisnolongerusable
becauseofitsfailuretoadequatelyperformitsdesignfunctions.
SERVICEABILITY:Abilityofastructuretoprovideadequateservicesorfunctionalityinuseundertheeffectsof
consideredactions.
SETTLEMENTOFCONCRETE:Sinkingoftheconcretesurfaceafterplacingduetobleedingand/orescapingofthe
entrappedandentrainedairintheconcrete.
SPECIAL CONCRETE: Concrete other than normal concrete including light weight concrete, roller compacted
concrete,selfcompactingconcrete,fiberreinforcedconcrete,antiwashoutunderwaterconcrete,etc.
STIFFANDFLEXIBLESTRUCURES:Stiffstructuresrefertothosethatarenotsensitivetodynamiceffectsofwind,
whileflexibleonesarethosethataresensitivetosucheffects.
STRENGTHENING: Remedial action applied to a structure with the objective of restoring or improving its load
bearingcapacitytoalevelwhichisequalto,orhigherthan,theoriginaldesignlevel.
STRESS AT TRANSFER : The stress in both the prestressing tendon and the concrete at the stage when the
prestressingtendonisreleasedfromtheprestressingmechanism.
SURFACE FINISHING: Action, such as troweling, applied to the exposed portion of concrete to obtain a neat
surface.
TEMPERATURECRACKING:Crackingcausedbythermalstresswhicharisesfromdifferentialtemperaturesinthe
concretemass.
TENDON:Steelelementsuchaswire,cable,bar,rod,orstrand,orabundleofsuchelements,usedtoimpart
prestresstoconcrete.
THRESHOLDLEVELOFPERFORMANCE:Minimumacceptablelevelofperformanceofastructure.
TRANSFER: Act of transferring stress in prestressing tendons from jacks or pretensioning bed to concrete
member.
TRIBUTARYAREA:Areaofbuildingsurfacecontributingtotheforcebeingconsidered,duetowindactions,and
projectedonaverticalplanenormaltothewinddirection.
TRANSMISSION LENGTH : The distance required at the end of a pretensioned tendon for developing the
maximumtendonstressbybond.
ULTIMATELIMITSTATE:Limitstateforsafety.
VARIABLE ACTION: Action due to a moving object on the structure as well as any load whose intensity is
variable,includingtrafficload,waveload,waterpressure,andloadinducedbytemperaturevariation.
WOBBLE FRICTION: Friction caused by unintended deviation of prestressing sheath or duct from its specified
profile.
WORKABILITY:Thetermexpressingtheeasewithwhichconcretecanbeplaced,compactedandfilled.
9.3
Notations
a
= depthofequivalentrectangularstressblock,mm
= areaofthepartofcrosssectionbetweenflexuraltensionfaceandcentre
Aps
2
= areaofprestressedreinforcementintensionzone,mm
As
2
= areaofnonprestressedtensionreinforcement,mm
A's
2
= areaofcompressionreinforcement,mm
= widthofcompressionfaceofmember,mm
= distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of nonprestressed
ofgravityofgrosssection,mm2
tensionreinforcement,mm
d
= distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of compression
reinforcement,mm
6453
Part6
StructuralDesign
db
= nominaldiameterofbar,wire,orprestressingstrand,mm
dp
= distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed
reinforcement,mm
= deadloads,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces
= baseofNapierianlogarithm
f c
2
= specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete,N/mm
f ci
2
= compressivestrengthofconcreteattransferofprestress,N/mm
fd
= stress due to unfactored dead load, at extreme fiber of section where

tensilestressiscausedbyexternallyappliedloads,N/mm2
fpe
= compressivestressinconcreteduetoeffectiveprestressforcesonly(after
fpc
= averagecompressivestressinconcreteduetoeffectiveprestressforceonly
fps
= stressinprestressedreinforcementatnominalstrength,N/mm2
fpu
= specifiedtensilestrengthofprestressingtendons,N/mm2
fpy
= specifiedyieldstrengthofprestressingtendons,N/mm2
fr
= modulusofruptureofconcrete,N/mm2
fse
= effective stress in prestressed reinforcement (after allowance for all
fy
= specifiedyieldstrengthofnonprestressedreinforcement,N/mm2
= overallthicknessofmember,mm
hf
= overallthicknessofflangeofflangedsection,mm
= moment of inertia of crosssection resisting externally applied factored
allowanceforallprestresslosses)atextremefiberofsectionwheretensile
stressiscausedbyexternallyappliedloads,N/mm2
(afterallowanceforallprestresslosses),N/mm2
prestress
loads,mm4
= wobblefrictioncoefficientpermeterofprestressingtendon
= length of span of twoway flat plates in direction parallel to that of the

reinforcementbeingdetermined,mm
lx
= length of prestressing tendon element from jacking end to any point x,

metre
= liveloads,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces
Mcr
= momentcausingflexuralcrackingatsectionduetoexternallyappliedloads,
kNm
Mmax
= maximum factored moment at section due to externally applied loads,

kNm
Mu
= factoredmomentatsection,kNm
Nc
= tensileforceinconcreteduetounfactoreddeadloadplusliveload(D+L),
kN
Pj
6454
= prestressingtendonforceatjackingend,kN
Vol.2
PIP
= Inherentorpossessedperformanceindex
PIR
= Inherentorpossessedperformanceindex
Px
= prestressingtendonforceatanypointx
= spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction parallel to

longitudinalreinforcement,mm
Vc
= nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyconcrete,kN
Vci
= nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking

resultsfromcombinedshearandmoment,kN
Vcw
= nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking

resultsfromexcessiveprincipaltensilestressinweb,kN
Vd
= shearforceatsectionduetounfactoreddeadload,kN
Vi
= factored shear force at section due to externally applied loads occurring

simultaneouslywithMmax,kN
Vn
= nominalshearstrength,kN
Vp
= verticalcomponentofeffectiveprestressforceatsection,kN
Vs
= nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyshearreinforcement,kN
Vu
= factoredshearforceatsection,kN
= shorteroveralldimensionofrectangularpartofcrosssection
= totalangularchangeofprestressingtendonprofileinradiansfromtendon
jackingendtoanypointx
= longeroveralldimensionofrectangularpartofcrosssection
yt
= distancefromcentroidalaxisofgrosssection,neglectingreinforcement,to
extremefibreintension
= factordefinedinSec9.5.5(c)
= factorfortypeofprestressingtendon
= 0.55for f py f pu notlessthan0.80
= 0.40for f py f pu notlessthan0.85
=
0.28for
f py f pu
notlessthan0.90
= curvaturefrictioncoefficient
= ratioofnonprestressedtensionreinforcement= As bd
= ratioofcompressionreinforcement= As bd
= ratioofprestressedreinforcement= A ps bd p
= strengthreductionfactor
= f y f c
= f y f c
= p f ps f c
6455
Part6
StructuralDesign
w , pw , w = reinforcement indices for flanged sections computed for w, wp, and w'
except that b shall be the web width, and reinforcement area shall be
thatrequiredtodevelopcompressivestrengthofwebonly.
For other symbols and units of quantities, reference shall be made to
Chapter6.
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.1.1
Analysisanddesign
Requirement
General
(a) Prestressed members shall be designed for adequate strength in accordance with the
provisionsofthischapter.
(b) Unless specifically excluded or superseded by the provisions of this chapter, all other
relevantprovisionsofthiscodeshallapplytoprestressedconcrete.
(c) Designofprestressedmembersshallbebasedonstrengthandonthebehavioratservice
conditions at all critical load stages during the life of the structure from the time of
prestressisfirstapplied.
(d) Stressconcentrationsduetoprestressingshallbeconsideredindesign.
(e) Provisions shall be made for effects on adjoining construction of elastic and plastic
deformations, deflections,changes inlengthand rotationsdue to prestressing.Effects of
temperatureandshrinkageshallalsobeconsidered.
(f) Thepossibilityofbucklinginamemberbetweenpointswherethereisintermittentcontact
between prestressing steel and an oversized duct and buckling in thin webs and flanges
shallbeconsidered.
(g) Incomputingsectionpropertiesbeforebondingofprestressingsteel,effectoflossofarea
duetoopenductsshallbeconsidered.
(h) Thermalgradientanddifferentialshrinkageshallbeconsideredincompositeconstruction
usingprestressedconcretemembers.
(i) Inevaluatingtheslendernesseffectsduringliftingofslenderbeams,considerationshallbe
given to beam geometry, location of lifting points, method of lifting and tolerances in
construction.Allbeamswhichareliftedonverticalorinclinedslingsshallbecheckedfor
lateralstabilityandlateralmomentonaccountoftiltingofbeam.Referencemaybemade
tospecialistliteratureinthisregard.
9.4.1.2
DesignAssumptions
(a) Strength design of prestressed members for flexure and axial loads shall be based on
assumptions given in Sec 9.4.1.2 b. to g. and shall satisfy the applicable conditions of
equilibriumandcompatibilityofstrains.
(b) Strainsinsteelandconcreteshallbeassumedtobedirectlyproportionaltothedistance
fromtheneutralaxisexceptforDeepBeams.
(c) Stressinnonprestressedreinforcement(ifused)belowfy,shallbetakenasEstimessteel
strain. For strains greater than that corresponding to fy, stress in reinforcement shall be
consideredindependentofstrainandequaltofy.
(d) Maximum usable strain at extreme concrete compression fiber shall be assumed to be
0.003.
(e) The relationship between concrete compressive stress distribution and concrete strain
shallbeassumedtoberectangular,trapezoidal,parabolic,oranyothershapethatresults
inpredictionofstrengthinsubstantialagreementwithresultsofcomprehensivetests
6456
Vol.2
(f) Requirements of 9.4.1.2e. are satisfied by an equivalent rectangular concrete stress

distributiondefinedbythefollowing:
i)
Concrete stress of 0.85fc shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an

equivalentcompressionzoneboundedbyedgesofthecrosssectionandastraight
linelocatedparalleltotheneutralaxis at a distance a = 1c from the fiber of
maximumcompressivestrain.
ii) Distance from the fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis, c, measured in a
directionperpendiculartotheneutralaxis.
iii) Forfc'between17.5and28MPa,1shallbetakenas0.85.Forfc'above28MPa,
1shallbereducedlinearlyatarateof0.05foreach7MPaofstrengthinexcess
of28MPa,but1shallnotbetakenlessthan0.65.
(g) Forinvestigationofstressesattransferofprestress,atserviceloads,andatcrackingloads,
elastictheoryshallbeusedwiththefollowingassumptions:
i)
Strainsvarylinearlywithdepththroughtheentireloadrange.
ii) Atcrackedsections,concreteresistsnotension.
9.4.1.3
Classificationofprestressedconcretemembers
PrestressedconcreteflexuralmembersshallbeclassifiedasClassU(uncracked),ClassT(transition)andClassC
(cracked)basedonextremefiberstressintensionintheprecompressedtensilezoneasfollows:
(a) ClassU:Permissibleflexuraltensilestresses
(b) ClassT:
(c) ClassC:
f t 0.62 f c
0.62 f c f t 1.0 f c
f t >1.0 f c
(d) d. Prestressedtwowayslabsystemsshallbedesignedas f t 0 . 50
9.4.1.4
f c
Shapesofbeamsandgirders
Forprestressedconcretenoncompositebeams/girders,thefrequentlyusedshapesare:
(a) SymmetricalIsection,(b)UnsymmetricalIsection,(c)Tsection,
(d)InvertedTsection,(e)Boxsection,(f)solidrectangularsection.
Commentary:
The suitability of selecting a particularshape will depend on the specific design requirementand
economyofconstruction.Ingeneral,toachieveeconomyinsteelandconcrete,itisbesttoputthe
concreteneartheextremefibersofthecompressionflange.Tosuitthiscondition,Isectionisthe
mostnaturalchoice.TheinvertedTsectionmayonlybeselectedforcompositeconstructionwhen
tensionflangeisprecastandthecompressionflangeispouredinplace.
9.4.2
9.4.2.1
Inchoosingbeam/girdershapes,dueconsiderationshouldbegiventothesimplicityofformwork.
Whenformworkistobeusedonce,itmayconstitutethemajorcostofbeam/girder.Anyirregular
shape of beam/girder is generally unjustifiable on this ground. Rectangular solid sections are an
obvious choice for flat slabs for floor and roof. Precast Tee or double Tee sections with a light
concretetappingmaybemoreeconomicalchoiceforfloorconstructionofmultistoriedresidential,
commercialandfactorybuildingswithmoderatecolumnspacing.
Materialpropertiesfordesign
Concrete
(a)
Class
TheClassofconcreteisdefinedbythecharacteristicstrengthofconcreteincylinderat28days,
f'c. For example, Class 10 concrete indicates concrete with fc' = 10 N/mm2. The classes of
concretecommonlyusedare:Class10,15,20,25,30,35,40,45and50,althoughconcretein
betweentheseclassesmayalsobeused.
(b)
Modulusofelasticity,Ec
6457
Part6
StructuralDesign
9.4.2.2
Modulus of elasticity, Ec for concrete shall be permitted to be taken as wc1.50.043(fc')0.5 (in

N/mm2)forvaluesofwcbetween1440and2560kg/m3.Fornormalweightconcrete,Ecmaybe
permittedtobetakenas4700(fc')0.5.
Reinforcingsteel
a. Modulusofelasticity,Es
Whereitisnotpossibletoascertainthemodulusofelasticityofreinforcing steel by test and
fromthemanufacturerofsteel,themodulusofelasticityof reinforcing steel may be permitted
tobetakenasEs=200,000N/mm2.
9.4.2.3
Prestressingsteel
(a) Modulusofelasticity,Es
Whereitisnotpossibletoascertainthemodulusofelasticityofreinforcingandprestressing steel
bytestandfromthemanufacturerofsteel,thevaluesofEs giveninTable9.4.1maybeused:
Table9.4.1 Modulusofelasticityofprestressingsteelandcolddrawnwire
Typeofsteel
Modulusofelasticity,Es
(kN/mm2)
9.4.3
9.4.3.1
Plain/indentedcolddrawnwire
200
Hightensilesteelbarsrolledorheattreated
205
Strands
195
Nominalstrengthsofbondedreinforcementandofconcreteattransfer
Bondedreinforcement
(a)
Tensilestressatnominalstrengthofbondedreinforcementislimitedtofyfornonprestressed
reinforcementandtofpyforprestressedreinforcement.Tensilestressatnominalstrengthof
unbondedprestressedreinforcementforresistingtensileforcesintheanchoragezoneshallbe
limitedtofps=fse+70.
(b)
Exceptforconcreteconfinedwithinspiralsorhoopsprovidingconfinementequivalenttothat
correspondingtoEq.(9.4.31),compressivestrengthinconcreteinthegeneralzoneshallbe
limitedto0.7fci.
Commentary:
Eq.(9.4.31)isgivenbelow.
s = 0.45(
Ag
Ach
1)
fc '
f yt
(9.4.31)
wherethevalueof f yt usedinEq.(9.4.31)shallnotexceed700N/mm2.For f yt greaterthan

420N/mm2normallapsplicesasshowninChapter6shallnotbeapplied.
9.4.3.2
Concretestrengthattransfer
Compressive strength of concrete at time of posttensioning shall be specified in the contract
documents. Unless oversize anchorage devices are sized to compensate for the lower compressive
strength or the prestressing steel is stressed to no more than 50 percent of the final prestressing
force,prestressingsteelshallnotbestresseduntilcompressivestrengthofconcreteasindicatedby
testsconsistentwiththecuringofthemember,isatleast28N/mm2formultistrandtendonsorat
least17N/mm2forsinglestrandorbartendons.
9.4.4
9.4.4.1
6458
ServiceabilityRequirementsFlexuralMembers
Stressesinconcreteimmediatelyafterprestresstransfer
Vol.2
Stressesinconcreteimmediatelyafterprestresstransfer(beforetimedependentprestresslosses
occur)areasfollows:
(a) Extremefiberstressincompressionexceptas
permittedin(b)shallnotexceed................0.60fci
(b) Extremefiberstressincompressionatendsof
simplysupportmembersshallnotexceed...0.70fci
(c) Where computed concrete tensile strength, ft , exceeds 0

supportedmembers,or 0.25
.5
f c at ends of simply
f c atotherlocations,additionalbondedreinforcementshall
beprovidedinthetensilezonetoresistthetotaltensileforceinconcretecomputedwiththe
assumptionofanuncrackedsection.
9.4.4.1.1
Stressesinconcreteatserviceloadsandreinforcementspacing
9.4.4.1.2
Allowablestressesinconcrete
ForClassUandClassTprestressedflexuralmembers,stressesinconcreteatserviceloads(based
on uncracked section properties and afterallowancefor allprestress losses)shallnot exceed the
following:
(a) Extremefiberstressincompressiondue
toprestressplussustainedload....................0.45fc
(b) Extremefiberstressincompressiondue
9.4.4.1.3
toprestressplustotalload.............................0.60fc
(c) Permissiblestressesin9.4.3.2and9.4.4.1shallbepermittedtobeexceededif shown by test

oranalysisthatperformancewillnotbeimpaired.
Reinforcementspacing
(a) For Class C prestressed flexural members not subject to fatigue or to aggressive exposure, the
spacingofbondedreinforcementnearesttheextremetensionfaceshallnotexceedthatfornormal
ReinforcedConcrete,asgivenbelow:
s 380 280/fs 2.5cc
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(9.4.41)
but not greater than 300 (280/fs), where cc is the least distance from the surface of
reinforcementorprestressingsteeltothetensionface.Ifthereisonlyonebarorwirenearest
totheextremetensionface,susedintheaboveequationisthewidthoftheextremetension
face.
Calculatedstressfsinreinforcementclosesttothetensionfaceatserviceloadsshallbecomputed
basedontheunfactoredmoment.Itshallbepermittedtotakefsas2/3fy.
For structures subject to fatigue or exposed to corrosive environments, investigations, judgment
andprecautionsarerequired.
Thespacingrequirementsshallbemetbynonprestressedreinforcementandbondedtendons.The
spacing of bonded tendons shall not exceed 2/3rd of the maximum spacing permitted for
nonprestressedreinforcement.
Where both reinforcement and bonded tendons are used to meet the spacing requirement, the
spacingbetweenabarandatendonshallnotexceed5/6ofthatpermittedby9.4.3.2.2a.,b.andc.
InapplyingEq.9.4.41toprestressingtendons,fpsshall besubstitutedforfs,where fpsshall be
takenasthecalculatedstressintheprestressingsteelatserviceloadsbasedonacrackedsection
analysisminusthedecompressionstressfdc .Itshallbepermittedtotakefdcequaltotheeffective
stressintheprestressingsteelfse.Seealso9.4.4.2.2g.below.
InapplyingEq.(9.4.41)toprestressingtendons,themagnitudeoffpsshallnotexceed250N/mm2.
Whenfpsislessthanorequalto140N/mm2,thespacingrequirementsof9.4.4.2.2a.andb.shall
notapply.
6459
Part6
StructuralDesign
(h)
9.4.5
Where h of a beam exceeds 900 mm, the area of longitudinal skin reinforcement consisting of
untensioned reinforcing steel or bonded tendons shall be uniformly distributed along both side
facesofthemember.Skinreinforcementshallextendforadistanceofh/2fromthetensionface.
Thespacingsshallbeasprovidedin9.4.4.2.2,whereccistheleastdistancefromthesurfaceofthe
skin reinforcement or prestressing steel to the side face. It shall be permitted to include such
reinforcement or prestressing steel to the side face. It shall be permitted to include such
reinforcement in strength computations if a strain compatibility analysis is made to determine
stressintheindividualbarsorwires.
Permissiblestressesinprestressingsteel
Tensilestressinprestressingtendonsshallnotexceedthefollowing:
(a) Duetoprestressingsteeljackingforce......0.94fpy
but not greater than the lesser of 0.80fpu and the maximum value recommended by the
manufacturerofprestressingsteeloranchoragedevices.
(b) Immediatelyafterprestresstransfer........0.82fpy
butnotgreaterthan0.74fpu.
(c) Posttensioningtendons,atanchoragedevicesand
9.4.6
couplers,immediatelyafterforcetransfer.......0.70fpu
Lossesofprestress
To determine effective stress in the prestressing steel, fse, allowance for the following sources of
lossofprestressshallbeconsidered:
9.4.6.1
Immediatelosses
(a) Lossduetoelasticshorteningofconcrete;
(b) Lossduetoprestressingsteelseatingattransfer(Anchorageslip);
(c) Lossduetofriction(forposttensionedconcreteonly).
9.4.6.2
Longtermlosses
(a) Lossduetorelaxationofprestressingsteelstress;
(b) Lossduetocreepofconcrete;
(c) Lossduetoshrinkageofconcrete.
Unless otherwise determined by actual tests, allowance for these losses shall be made in
accordancewiththeprovisionsofSec9.4.6.3through9.4.6.8.
9.4.6.3
Lossduetoelasticshorteningofconcrete
(a) Thelossofprestressduetoimmediateelasticshorteningofadjacentconcreteupontransferof
initial prestress shall be calculated as specified in this section. For pretensioning, the loss of
prestressinthetendonsattransfershallbecalculatedonamodularratiobasisusingthestress
intheadjacentconcrete.
(b) For members with posttensioned tendons which are not stressed simultaneously, there is a
progressivelossofprestressduringtransferduetothegradualapplicationoftheprestressing
forces.Thislossofprestressshallbecalculatedonthebasisofhalftheproductofthestressin
the concrete adjacent to the tendons averaged along their lengths and the modular ratio.
Alternatively, the loss of prestress may be exactly computed based on the sequence of
tensioning.
9.4.6.4
LossDuetoprestressingsteelseatingattransfer(Anchorageslip)
a. Anylossofprestresswhichmayoccurduetoslipofwireorstrandduring anchoring or due
tostrainingoftheanchorageshallbeallowedforinthedesign. Necessaryadditionalelongation
maybeprovidedforatthetimeoftensioningto compensateforthisloss.
9.4.6.5
6460
Lossduetofriction(forposttensionedtendonsonly)
Vol.2
(a) Thedesignshalltakeintoconsiderationalllossesinprestressthatmayoccurduringtensioning
due to friction between the posttensioning tendons and the surrounding concrete or any
fixtureattachedtothesteelorconcrete.
(b) ThevalueofprestressingforcePx atadistance l x metresfromthejackingendandactingin
thedirectionofthetangenttothecurveofthecable,shallbecalculatedfromtherelation:
(K l +
x
P = Pje
x
When(klx+)isgreaterthan0.3,Pxmaybecomputedfrom
Px =
9.4.51
Pj
1 + Kl x +
9.4.52
For use in Eq. (9.4.51) and Eq. (9.4.52), the values of wobble friction coefficient K and
curvature friction coefficient shall be experimentally determined or obtained from the
tendonmanufacturer,andverifiedduringtendonstressingoperations.
(c) Inabsenceoftestresultsormanufacturer'srecommendation,thefollowingvaluesof and
K showninTable9.4.2maybetakenasaguide:
coefficient,Kper
meter
Curvaturecoefficient,per
radian
0.00330.0049
0.150.25
coated
Wiretendons
Pre
greased
Tendonsin
metal
Mastic sheathing
tendons
Unbonded
Grouted
Table9.4.2FrictionCoefficients(K&)forposttensionedtendons
Highstrengthbars
0.00030.0020
0.080.30
7wirestrand
0.00160.0066
0.150.25
Wiretendons
0.00330.0066
0.050.15
7wirestrand
0.00330.0066
0.050.15
Wiretendons
0.0010.0066
0.050.15
7wirestrand
0.0010.0066
0.050.15
Values of wobble and curvature friction coefficients used in designshall be shown on design
drawings.
(e) The effectof reversefriction shallbetakenintoconsiderationin suchcaseswherethe initial
tension applied to a prestressing tendon is partially released and action of friction in the
reverse direction causes significant alteration in the distribution of stress along the length of
thetendon.
(f) Where loss of prestress in a member occurs due to connection of member to adjoining
construction,suchlossofprestressshallbeallowedforindesign.
9.4.6.6
Lossduetorelaxationofpretressingsteelstress
(a) The relaxation losses in prestressing steel shall be determined from experiments. When
experimental values are not available, the relaxation losses, considering normal relaxation
steel,maybeassumedasgiveninTable9.4.3.
6461
Part6
StructuralDesign
Table9.4.3RelaxationLossesforprestressingsteelat1000hoursat27oC
InitialStress
RelaxationLoss
N/mm2
0.5fpu
0.6fpu
35
0.7fpu
70
0.8fpu
90
Fortendonsathighertemperatureorsubjecttolargelateralloads,greaterrelaxationlossesmay
beallowed,subjecttotheadviceofthemetallurgyspecialist.
(b) No reduction in the value of the relaxation losses should be made for a tendon with a load
equaltoorgreaterthantherelevantjackingforcethathas been applied for a short
durationpriortotheanchoringofthetendon.
9.4.6.7
Lossduetocreepofconcrete
(a)Creep occurs due to superimposed permanent dead load added to the member after it has
beenprestressed.Creepofconcretemaybeassumedtobeproportionaltothestressprovided
thestressinconcretedoesnotexceed40percentofitscompressivestrength.
(b) In the absence of test data, the ultimate creep strain may be estimated from the following
valuesofcreepcoefficient,whichistheratiooftheultimatecreepstraintotheelasticstrainat
theageofloading.Table9.4.4showsthevaluesatdifferentdays.
Table9.4.4Creepcoefficientofconcrete
AgeatLoading
Creepcoefficient
7days
2.2
28days
1.6
1year
1.1
(c) The ultimate creep strain estimated as above does not include the elastic strain.
Forthecalculationofdeformationatsomestagebeforethetotalcreepisreached,itmaybe
assumed that 50 per cent of the total creep takes place in the first month after loading and
about75percentofthetotalcreeptakesplace in the first six months after loading. For post
tensioningthecreep coefficientsshallbetakenas80%ofthosegivenhere.
(d) The loss of prestress due to creep of concrete shall be determined for all the permanently
appliedloadsincludingtheprestress.Lossduetostressesofshortdurationincludingliveload
anderectionstressesmaybeignored.
(e) Thelossofprestressduetocreepofconcreteshallbeobtainedastheproductofthemodulus
of elasticity of the prestressing steel and the ultimate creep strain of the concrete fiber
integratedalongthecentrelineoftheprestressingsteeloveritsentirelength.
(f) Thetotalcreepstrainduringanyspecificperiodshallbeassumedtobethecreepstraindueto
sustainedstressequaltotheaverageofthestressesatthebeginningandendoftheperiod.
9.4.6.8
Lossduetoshrinkageofconcrete
(a) In the absence of test data, the approximate value of shrinkage strain in concrete for design
purposesshallbeassumedasfollows:
Forpretensioning :
0.0003
Forposttensioning :
where,t=ageofconcreteattransferindays.
0.0002
log10 (t + 2 )
(b) Forthecalculationofdeformationofconcreteatsomestagebeforethemaximumshrinkage
occursitmaybeassumedthat50percentoftheshrinkagetakesplaceduringthefirstmonth
6462
Vol.2
andabout75percentoftheshrinkage takes place in the first six months after drying of

concretestarts.
(c) The loss of prestress due to shrinkage of concrete shall be obtained as the product of the
modulusofelasticityofsteelandtheshrinkagestrainofconcrete.
9.4.7
ControlofDeflection
9.4.7.1
For prestressed concrete flexural members, designed in accordance with the provisions of this
chapter,immediatedeflectionshallbecomputedbyusualmethodsorformulasforelasticdeflections,
and the moment of inertia of gross concrete section, Ig, shall be permitted to be used for Class U
flexuralmembers.
9.4.7.2
For Class C and Class T flexural members, deflection calculations shall be based on cracked
transformed section analysis. It shall be permitted to base calculations on an effective moment of
inertia,IeasgiveninEq.9.4.71.
3
M
I g + 1 cr
M a
M
Ie = cr
Ma
M cr =
fr I g
I cr
9.4.71
f r = 0.62 f c '
Where,
Deflectioncomputedinaccordancewith9.4.7.1shallnotexceedthelimitsstipulatedin6.5.9.4.
9.4.7.3
9.4.8
yt
and
Additional longterm deflection of prestressed concrete members shall be computed taking into
account stresses in concrete and steel under sustained load and including effects of creep and
shrinkageofconcreteandrelaxationofsteel.
FlexuralStrength
9.4.8.1
Design moment strength of flexural members shall be computed by the strength methods of the
Code.Forprestressingsteel,fpsshallbesubstitutedforfyinstrengthcomputations.
9.4.8.2
Asanalternativetoamoreaccuratedeterminationoffpsbasedonstraincompatibility,thefollowing
approximatevaluesoffpsshallbepermittedtobeusediffseisnotlessthan0.5fpu.
(a) Formemberswithbondedtendons
ps
= f
p
1
pu
pu d
+
( )
f d

c
p
(9.4.81)
whereisfy/fc,isfy/fc,andpis0.55forfpy/fpunotlessthan0.80;
lessthan0.85;and0.28forfpy/fpunotlessthan0.90.
If any compression reinforcement is taken into account when calculating fps by Eq. (9.4.81), the
termshallbetakennotlessthan0.17andd'shallbenogreaterthandp.
0.40 for fpy /fpu not
f pu d
+ ( )
p
d
f
p
c
(b) Formemberswithunbondedtendonsandwithaspantodepthratioof35orless:
f ps = f se + 70 +
f c'
100 p
(9.4.72)
but fps in Eq. (9.4.7.2) shall not be taken greater than the lesser of fpy and (fse + 420).
6463
Part6
StructuralDesign
c. Formemberswithunbondedtendonsandwithaspantodepthratiogreaterthan35:
f ps = f se + 70 +
9.4.8.3
9.4.9
9.4.9.1
f c'
300 p
(9.4.73)
butfpsinEq.(9.4.7.3)shallnotbetakengreaterthanthelesseroffpyand(fse+210)
Nonprestressed reinforcement conforming to 9.4.4.2.2, if used with prestressing steel, shall be
permittedtobeconsideredtocontributetothetensileforceandtobeincludedinmomentstrength
computations at a stress equal to fy. Other nonprestressed reinforcement shall be permitted to be
included in strength computations only if a strain compatibility analysis is performed to determine
stressesinsuchreinforcement.
Limitsforflexuralreinforcement
Prestressed concrete sections shall be classified as either tensioncontrolled, transition, or
compressioncontrolledsections,inaccordancewitha.andb.below.
(a) Sectionsarecompressioncontrolledifthenettensilestrainintheextremetensionfibert,is
equaltoorlessthanthecompressioncontrolledstrainlimitwhentheconcreteincompression
reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003. The compressioncontrolled strain limit is the net
tensilestraininthereinforcementatbalancedstrainconditions.ForGrade420reinforcement,
andforallprestressedreinforcement,itshallbepermittedtosetthecompressioncontrolled
strainlimitto0.002.
(b) Sectionsaretensioncontrolledifthenettensilestrainintheextremetensionsteel,t,isequal
toorgreaterthan0.005whentheconcreteincompression reaches its assumed strain limit of
0.003.Sectionswithtbetweenthecompressioncontrolledstrainlimitand0.005constitutea
tension region between the compressioncontrolled and tensioncontrolled sections.
Appropriatestrengthreductionfactor, ,from 9.4.9.2shallapply.
9.4.9.2
Theappropriatestrengthreductionfactor,,shallapplyasgivenina.tof.below.
(a) Tensioncontrolledsections
0.90
(b) Forcompressioncontrolledsections
i.
Memberswithspiralreinforcementas
definedin9.4.9.4
0.75
ii. Otherreinforcedmembers
0.65
0.75
(c) Shearandtorsion
(d) Posttensionedanchoragezones
0.85
(e) Strutandtiemodels
0.75
(f) Flexuralsectionsinpretensioned
memberswherestrandembedmentlengthisless
thanthedevelopmentlength
i.
Fromtheendofthemember
totheendofthetransferlength
ii.
Fromtheendofthetransferlength
totheendofthedevelopment
length,shallbetakenas
0.75
0.75to0.90
Wherebondingofthestranddoesnotextendtotheendofthemember,strandembedmentshall
beassumedtobeginattheendofthedebondedlength.
9.4.9.3
6464
Totalamountofprestressedandnonprestressedreinforcementinmemberswithbondedprestressed
reinforcement shall be adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2 times the cracking load
Vol.2
computed on the basis of the modulus of rupture fr, as given in 9.4.6.2. This provision shall be
permitted to be waived for flexural members with shear and flexural strength at least twice that
requiredby9.4.8.
9.4.9.4
Volumetricspiralreinforcementratio,s,shallbenotlessthanthevaluegivenby
Ag
f '
1 c
Ach
f yt
s = 0.45
(9.4.91)
where the value of f yt in Eq. (9.4.91) shall not exceed 700 N/mm . For f yt greater than 420
N/mm2wherelapsplicesshallnotexceedinaccordancewith9.4.9.4a.thisshallnotbeused.
(a) Spiralreinforcementshallbespliced,ifneeded,byanyoneofthefollowingmethods:
Lapsplicesnotlessthanthelargerof300mmandthelengthindicatedinoneof(1)through(5)
below:
deformeduncoatedbarorwire
48db
ii)
plainuncoatedbarorwire
72db
iii)
epoxycoateddeformedbarorwire
iv)
plainuncoatedbarorwirewithastandard
i)
72db
stirruportiehookinaccordancewith
9.4.8.5c.atendsoflappedspiralreinforcement.
(b) Thetermstandardhookasusedinthiscodeshallmeanoneofthefollowing:
i)
180degreebendplus4dbextension,butnotlessthan65mmatfreeend ofbar.
ii) 90degreebendplus12dbextensionatfreeendofbar.
(c) Forstirrupandtiehooks
i)
No.16barandsmaller,90degreebendplus6dbextensionatfreeendof bar;or
ii) No.19,No.22barandNo.25bar,90degreebendplus12dbextensionat free end of

bar;or
iii) No.25barandsmaller,135degreebendplus6dbextensionatfreeend
9.4.9.5
ofbar.
Part or all of the bonded reinforcement consisting of bars or tendons shall be provided as close as
practicable to the tension face in prestressed flexural members. In members prestressed with
unbondedtendons,theminimumbondedreinforcementconsistingofbarsortendonsshallbe
asrequiredby9.4.10.
9.4.10 Minimumbondedreinforcement
9.4.10.1 Aminimumareaofbondedreinforcementshallbeprovidedinallflexuralmemberswithunbonded
tendonsasrequiredby9.4.10.2and9.4.10.3.
9.4.10.2 Exceptasprovidedin9.4.10.1,minimumareaofbondedreinforcementshallbecomputedby

As=0.004Act
(9.4.101)
where Act is area of that part of cross section between the flexural tension face and center of
gravityofgrosssection.
(a) Bonded reinforcement required by Eq. (9.4.101) shall be uniformly distributed over pre
compressedtensilezoneascloseaspracticabletoextremetensionfiber.
(b) Bondedreinforcementshallberequiredregardlessofserviceloadstress
conditions.
9.4.10.3 For twoway flat slab systems, minimum area and distribution of bonded reinforcement shall be as
requiredina.,b.,andcbelow.
6465
Part6
StructuralDesign
(a) Bondedreinforcementshallnotberequiredinpositivemomentareaswhereft, the

extremefibrestressintensionintheprecompressedtensilezoneatservice loads
(after
allowanceforallprestresslosses),doesnotexceed0.17fc.
(b) Inpositivemomentareaswherecomputedtensilestressinconcreteatservice load
0.17f'cminimumareaofbondedreinforcementshallbe computedby
As Nc/0.5fy
exceeds
(9.4.102)
wherethevalueoffyusedinEq.(9.4.102)shallnotexceed420MPa. Bonded reinforcement

shallbeuniformlydistributedoverprecompressedtensilezone as close as practicable to the
extremetensionfiber.
(c) Innegativemomentareasatcolumnsupports,theminimumareaofbonded reinforcement
Asinthetopoftheslabineachdirectionshallbecomputedby
As 0.00075Acf
(9.4.103)
where, Acf is the larger gross crosssectional area of the slabbeam strips in two orthogonal
equivalentframesintersectingatacolumninatwowayslab.
9.4.10.4 BondedreinforcementrequiredbyEq.(9.4.103)shallbedistributedbetweenlinesthatareoutside
oppositefacesofthecolumnsupport.Atleastfourbarsorwiresshallbeprovidedineachdirection.
Spacingofbondedreinforcementshallnotexceed300mm.
9.4.10.5 Minimum length of bonded reinforcement required by 9.4.10.2 and 9.4.10.3 shall be as required in
9.4.10.5a.,b.,andc.
(a)
Inpositivemomentareas,minimumlengthofbondedreinforcementshallbe onethird the

clearspanlength,ln,andcenteredinpositivemomentarea.
(b)
Innegativemomentareas,bondedreinforcementshallextendonesixththe
oneachsideofsupport.
(c)
WherebondedreinforcementisprovidedforMninaccordancewith9.4.7.8,or for tensile

stressconditionsinaccordancewith9.4.9.3b.,minimumlengthalso shall
conform
to
provisionsofChapter6.
clear span, ln ,
9.4.11 Staticallyindeterminatestructures
9.4.11.1 Frames and continuous construction of prestressed concrete shall be designed for satisfactory
performanceatserviceloadconditionsandforadequatestrength.
9.4.11.2 Performanceatserviceloadconditionsshallbedeterminedbyelasticanalysis,consideringreactions,
moments, shears, and axial forces induced by prestressing, creep, shrinkage, temperature change,
axialdeformation,restraintofattachedstructuralelements,andfoundationsettlement.
9.4.11.3 Moments used to compute required strength shall be the sum of the moments due to reactions
induced by prestressing (with a load factor of 1.0) and the moments due to factored loads.
Adjustmentofthesumofthesemomentsshallbepermittedasallowedin9.4.11.4.
9.4.11.4 Redistributionofmomentsincontinuousprestressedflexuralmembersshallbeas
follows:
(a) Where bonded reinforcement is provided at supports in accordance with 9.4.11, it shall be
permitted to decrease negative or positive moments calculated by elastic theory for any
assumedloading,inaccordancewith9.4.11.4b.,c.andd.below.
(b) Except where approximate values for moments are used, it shall be permitted to decrease
factoredmomentscalculatedbyelastictheoryatsectionsofmaximumnegativeormaximum
positive moment in any span of continuous flexural members for any assumed loading
arrangementbynotmorethan1000tpercent,withamaximumof20percent.
6466
Vol.2
(c) Redistributionofmomentshallbemadeonlywhent isequaltoorgreaterthan0.0075atthe

sectionatwhichmomentisreduced.
(d) Thereducedmomentshallbeusedforcalculatingredistributedmomentsatallothersections
within the spans. Static equilibrium shall be maintained after redistribution of moments for
eachloadingarrangement.
9.4.12 CompressionmembersCombinedflexureandaxialload
9.4.12.1 Prestressed concrete members subject to combined flexure and axial load, with or without non
prestressedreinforcement,shallbeproportionedbythestrengthdesignmethodsofthisCode.Effects
ofprestress,creep,shrinkage,andtemperaturechangeshallbeincluded.
9.4.12.2 Limitsforreinforcementofprestressedcompressionmembersshallbeasfollows:
(a) Members with average compressive stress in concrete less than 1.6 N/mm2, due to effective
prestressforceonly,shallhaveminimumreinforcementinaccordancewithChapter6.
(b) Except for walls, members with average compressive stress in concrete due to effective
prestress force only, equal to or greater than 1.6 N/mm2 shall have all tendons enclosed by
spiralsorlateraltiesinaccordancewithc.throughg.
(c) SpiralsshallconformtoChapter6.
(d) LateraltiesshallbeatleastNo.10insizeorweldedwirereinforcementofequivalentarea,and
shallbespacedverticallynottoexceed48tiebarorwirediameters,ortheleastdimensionof
thecompressionmember.
(e) Tiesshallbelocatedverticallynotmorethanhalfatiespacingabovetopoffootingorslabin
anystory,andnotmorethanhalfatiespacingbelowthelowesthorizontalreinforcementin
memberssupportedabove.
(f) Wherebeamsorbracketsframeintoallsidesofacolumn,tiesshallbeterminatednotmore
than75mmbelowlowestreinforcementinsuchbeamsorbrackets.
(g) For walls with average compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress force only
equaltoorgreaterthan1.6N/mm2,minimumreinforcementrequiredbyChapter6shallnot
applywherestructuralanalysisshowsadequatestrengthandstability.
9.4.13 Slabsystems
9.4.13.1 Factoredmomentsandshearsinprestressedslabsystemsreinforcedforflexureinmorethanone
direction shall be determined in accordance with provisions of 6.5 or by more detailed design
procedures.
9.4.13.2 Mn of prestressed slabs with loads and load combinations required by Chapter 2 and 6 at every
section shall be greater than or equal to Mu considering 9.4.11.3 and 9.4.11.4. Vn of prestressed
slabsatcolumnsrequiredbyChapter6shallbegreaterthanorequaltoVu.
9.4.13.3 At service load conditions, all serviceability limitations, including limits on deflections, shall be met,
withappropriateconsiderationofthefactorslistedin9.4.11.2.
9.4.13.4 Foruniformlydistributedloads,spacingoftendonsorgroupsoftendonsinatleastonedirectionshall
not exceed the smaller of eight times the slab thickness and 1.5 m. Spacing of tendons also shall
provide a minimum average effective prestress of 0.9 N/mm2 on the slab section tributary to the
tendon or tendon group. For slabs with varying cross section along the slab span, either parallel or
perpendicular to the tendon or tendon group, the minimum average effective prestress of 0.9
N/mm2MPaisrequiredateverycrosssectiontributarytothetendonortendongroupalongthespan.
Concentratedloadsandopeninginslabsshallbeconsideredwhendeterminingtendonspacing.
6467
Part6
StructuralDesign
9.4.13.5 Inslabswithunbondedtendons,bondedreinforcementshallbeprovidedinaccordancewith9.4.9.3
and9.4.9.5.
Except as permitted in 9.4.13.6, in slabs with unbonded tendons, a minimum of two 12.7 mm
diameter or larger, sevenwire posttensioned strands shall be provided in each direction at
columns,eitherpassingthroughoranchoredwithintheregionboundedbythelongitudinal
reinforcement of the column. Outside column and shear cap faces, these two structural integrity
tendons shall pass under any orthogonal tendons in adjacent spans. Where the two structural
integritytendonsareanchoredwithintheregionboundedbythelongitudinalreinforcementofthe
column,theanchorageshallbelocatedbeyondthecolumncentroidandawayfromtheanchored
span.
9.4.13.6 Prestressed slabs not satisfying 9.4.13.5 shall be permitted provided they contain bottom
reinforcementineachdirectionpassingwithintheregionboundedbythelongitudinalreinforcement
of the column and anchored at exterior supports as required by bar detailing requirement of slabs
giveninChapter6.Theareaofbottomreinforcementineachdirectionshallbenotlessthan1.5times
thatrequiredbyEq.(9.4.131)asgivenbelow.
As, min =
0.25 f c '
bw d
fy
(9.4.131)
and not less than 2.1bwd/fy, where bw is the width of the column face through which the
reinforcementpasses.Minimumextensionofthesebarsbeyondthecolumnorshearcapfaceshall
beequaltoorgreaterthanthebardevelopmentlengthrequiredbyChapter6.
9.4.13.7 Inliftslabs,bondedbottomreinforcementshallbedetailedinaccordancewith9.4.13.8.
9.4.13.8 In slabs with shear heads and in lift slab construction where it is not practical to pass to pass the
bottombars,requiredbybardetailingrequirementofChapter6,atleasttwobondedbarsorwiresin
eachdirectionshallpassthroughtheshearheadorliftingcollarasclosetothecolumnaspracticable
andbecontinuousorsplicedwithaClassAsplice.Attheexteriorcolumns,thereinforcementshallbe
anchoredthespearheadorliftingcollar.
9.4.14 Posttensionedtendonanchoragezones
9.4.14.1 Divisionintozones
Theanchoragezoneshallbeconsideredascomposedoftwozonesasdescribedbelowandshownin
Fig.9.4.141.
(a) Thelocalzoneistherectangularprism(orequivalentrectangularprismforcircularoroval
anchorages)ofconcreteimmediatelysurroundingtheanchoragedeviceandanyconfining
reinforcement;
(b) Thegeneralzoneistheanchoragezonebeyondthelocalzone.
6468
Vol.2
Fig.9.4.141
Anchoragezones
9.4.14.2 Localzone
(a) Design of local zones shall be based upon the factored prestressing force, Ppu, and the
requirementsof9.4.14.2b.andc.below.
(b) For posttensioned anchorage zone design, a load factor of 1.2 shall be applied to the
maximumsteeljackingforce.
(c) Whiledesignstrengthprovidedbyamember,itsconnectionstoothermembers,anditscross
sections in terms of flexure, axial load, shear and torsion, shall be taken as the nominal
strengthcalculatedinaccordancewithrequirementsandassumptionsofthiscode,multiplied
bythestrengthreductionfactor, ,forposttensionedanchoragezonethisshallbetakenas
0.85.
(d) Localzone reinforcement shall be provided where required for proper functioning of the
anchoragedevice.
9.4.14.3 Generalzone
(a) Design of general zones shall be based upon the factored prestressing force, Ppu, and the
requirementsof9.4.14.3b.andc.
(b) Generalzonereinforcementshallbeprovidedwhererequiredtoresistbursting,spalling,and
longitudinal edge tension forces induced by anchorage devices. Effects of abrupt change in
sectionshallbeconsidered.
(c) Thegeneralzonerequirementsof9.4.14.3b.aresatisfiedby9.4.3,9.4.14.4,and9.4.14.5and
whicheveroneof9.4.15.2or9.4.15.3or9.4.16.3isapplicable.
9.4.14.4 Designmethods
6469
Part6
StructuralDesign
The following methods shall be permitted for the design of the general zones of the prestressed
componentsprovidedthatthespecificproceduresusedresultinpredictionofstrengthinsubstantial
agreementwithresultsofcomprehensivetests:
a. Equilibriumbasedplasticitymodels(strutandtiemodels);
b. Linearstressanalysis(includingfiniteelementanalysisorequivalent);or
c.
Simplifiedequationswhereapplicable.
Simplified equations shall not be used where member cross sections are nonrectangular, where
discontinuitiesinornearthegeneralzonecausedeviationsintheforceflowpath,whereminimum
edgedistanceislessthan11/2timestheanchoragedevicelateraldimensioninthatdirection,or
wheremultipleanchoragedevicesareusedinotherthanonecloselyspacedgroup.
e. Thestressingsequenceshallbeconsideredinthedesignandspecifiedonthedesign drawings.
f. Threedimensional effects shall be considered in design and analyzed using threedimensional
proceduresorapproximatedbyconsideringthesummationofeffectsfortwoorthogonalplanes.
g. Foranchoragedeviceslocatedawayfromtheendofthemember,bondedreinforcementshallbe
provided to transfer at least 0.35Apsfpu into the concrete section behind the anchor. Such
reinforcement shall be placed symmetrically around the anchorage devices and shall be fully
developedbothbehindandaheadoftheanchoragedevices.
h. Wheretendonsarecurvedinthegeneralzone,exceptformonostrandtendonsinslabsorwhere
analysisshowsreinforcementisnotrequired,bondedreinforcement shall be provided to resist
radialandsplittingforces.
i. Except for monostrand tendons in slabs or where analysis shows reinforcement is not required,
minimum reinforcement with a nominal tensile strength equal to 2 percent of each factored
prestressing force shall be provided in orthogonal directions parallel to the back face of all
anchoragezonestolimitspalling.
j. Tensilestrengthofconcreteshallbeneglectedincalculationsofreinforcementrequirements.
d.
9.4.14.5 Detailingrequirements
Selection of reinforcement sizes, spacing, cover, and other details for anchorage zones shall make
allowancesfortolerancesonthebending,fabrication,andplacementofreinforcement,forthesizeof
aggregate,andforadequateplacementandconsolidationoftheconcrete.
9.4.15 Designofanchoragezonesformonostrandorsingle16mmbartendons
9.4.15.1 Localzonedesign
Monostrand or single 16 mm or smaller diameter bar anchorage devices and local zone
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of ACI 423.7 or the special anchorage device
requirementsof9.4.16.2.
9.4.15.2 Generalzonedesignforslabtendons
(a) Foranchoragedevicesof 12.7mmorsmallerdiameterstrandsinnormalweightconcrete
slabs, minimum reinforcement meeting the requirements of 9.4.15.2 b. and c. shall be
provided unless a detailed analysis satisfying 9.4.14.4 shows such reinforcement is not
required.
(b) TwohorizontalbarsatleastNo.13insizeshallbeprovidedparalleltotheslabedge.Theyshall
bepermittedtobeincontactwiththefrontfaceoftheanchoragedeviceandshallbewithina
distanceofh/2aheadofeachdevice.Thosebarsshallextendatleast150mmeithersideofthe
outeredgesofeachdevice.
(c) Ifthecentertocenterspacingofanchoragedevicesis300mmorless,theanchoragedevices
shallbeconsideredasagroup.Foreachgroupofsixormoreanchoragedevices,n+1hairpin
barsorclosedstirrupsatleastNo.10insizeshallbeprovided,wherenisthenumberof
anchoragedevices.Onehairpinbarorstirrupshallbeplacedbetweeneachanchoragedevice
and one on each side of the group. Thehairpin bars orstirrups shall be placed with the legs
extending into the slab perpendicular to the edge. The center portion of the hairpin bars or
6470
Vol.2
stirrupsshallbeplacedperpendiculartotheplaneoftheslabfrom3h/8toh/2aheadofthe
anchoragedevices.
(d) For anchorage devices not conforming to 9.4.15.1, minimum reinforcement shall be based
uponadetailedanalysissatisfying9.4.14.4.
9.4.15.3 Generalzonedesignforgroupsofmonostrandtendonsinbeamsandgirders
Design of general zones for groups of monostrand tendons in beams and girders shall meet the
requirementsof9.4.13.3,9.4.14.2or9.4.14.3or9.4.15.3.
9.4.16 Designofanchoragezonesformultistrandtendons
9.4.16.1 Localandgeneralzonedesign
Basicmultistrandanchoragedevicesandtherelatedlocalandgeneralzonereinforcementshallmeet
the requirements of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (SI), 2007, Articles 5.10.9.6,
ApproximateStressAnalysisandDesign,and5.10.9.7,DesignofLocalZones.
9.4.16.2 Specialanchoragedevices
(a)
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (SI), 2007, Articles 5.10.9.7.3, Special Anchorage
Devicesrequiresthatspecialanchoragedevicesthatdonotsatisfythe requirements specified
in9.4.16.1,theyhavebeentestedbyanindependenttesting agency acceptable to the
EngineerandhavemettheacceptancecriteriaspecifiedinArticles10.3.2and 10.3.2.3.10 of
AASHTOLRFDBridgeConstruction Specifications.
(b)
Where special anchorage devices are to be used, supplemental skin reinforcement shall be
furnished in the corresponding regions of the anchorage zone, in addition to the confining
reinforcement specified for the anchorage device. This supplemental reinforcement shall be
similar in configuration and at least equivalent in volumetricratio to any supplementary skin
reinforcementusedinthequalifyingacceptancetestsoftheanchoragedevice.
9.4.17 ColdDrawnLowCarbonWirePrestressedConcrete(CWPC)
CWPC(Colddrawnwireprestressedconcrete)istermedasprestressedconcretetechnologyofchinesepattern.
This technology is a modification of conventional prestressed concrete. In the conventional prestressed
concretehighstrengthwireisusedasreinforcementwhileinChinesepatterncolddrawnlowcarbonmildsteel
wireisusedassuchthistechnologyisnamedascolddrawnwireprestressedconcrete.Inshortitistermedas
CWPC. CWPC technology is a process whereby cold drawn low carbon steel wire has been adopted as
reinforcementforprefabricatedprestressedconcretemembersofmediumandsmallsizeasproducedbypre
tensioningmethod.Intheotherhandlargesizesstructuralmembersareproducedbyconventionalprestressed
concrete.
ThemainfeaturesandadvantagesofCWPCtechnologycanbesummarisedasfollows:
(a) Availability(Availabilityofmaterials):Therawmaterialofcolddrawnwireismadefromlowcarbon
mild steel which can be supplied by the local mills. The tensioning process of colddrawn wire and
productionofprecastmembersarealsosimpleandveryeasytohandle.
(b) Simplicity(Simplicityofequipmentanddevicesforproduction):Thecoldprocessoflowcarbonmild
steel and prefabrication process of members are done using simple equipments and devices. The
precise and large sized equipments are not necessary. The production techniques of manufacturing
membersarerathersimple.
(c) Quality(Goodinquality):Thememberssomanufacturedhavehighcrackresistanceandstiffness.After
pretensioning no crack would occur under the service load, thus the wires within the concrete
membersarewellprotected.InContrasttoconventionalreinforcedconcretemembersunderthesame
serviceconditions,theyhavecomparativelyhighdurabilitytoensurelongtermquality.
(d) Economy(Lowcost):Thecolddrawnlowcarbonsteelwireusedforprestressingismadeofordinary
hotrolledcarbonsteelcoilrod.Thisisprocessedatroomtemperaturethroughaspecialwiredrawing
die. The low carbon coil rods are manufactured by the steel mills; the wires are processed at the
construction site or in a prefabrication plant; or are supplied by the cold drown wire plants as ready
madeproducts.Bycolddrawingthelowcarbonrodintowiresthestrengthisenhancedabouttwiceas
6471
Part6
StructuralDesign
much as that of the coil rod. This reduces the amount of steel required in prefabricating prestressed
concretemembers.
(e) Therefore,incomparisonwithconventionalreinforcedconcretereinforcedwithcommoncarbonsteel,
a prestressed concrete member reinforced with cold drawn wire would have saving of steel
consumption by 3050%. Furthermore, since prestressed concrete members have high stiffness a
reductionofcrosssectionofmembersispossible.Aconsiderableamountofconcretecanalsobesaved
andhenceworkincludingtransportation,handlinganderectioncanbereduced.
(f) Lightweightedness(Lightinweight):Asalreadymentionedthatthestiffnessofprestressedconcrete
membersmaybeenhanced,thedimensionofit'scrosssectioncanbereducedcrosspondingly.These
resultnotonlyreductionofconcretevolumebutalsoitsdeadweightwhichisestimatedas1030%.
9.4.17.1 Materials
BasicallythematerialsusedinCWPCtechnologyaresteelandconcrete.
(a) Steel:steelusedforCWPCisobtainedbycolddrawing.Colddrawingasalreadymentionedis
aprocessofreducingthediameterofthecoilrodbyforcingittopassthroughaconicaldie.
Bythisprocess,thesteelcanbestrengthenedby100%.
(b) Concrete: The requirement of concrete in CWPC is same as that of ordinary reinforced
concrete.
9.4.17.2 Design
Similar to other reinforced concrete structures, CWPC structures have a complete set of design
specificationandcomputationalapproachesbywhichvariousmembersoftheCWPCcanbedesigned.In
thedesignofprestressedmembersthefunctionofprestressingforceandprestressinglossesshouldbe
calculated. CWPC members should be checked for its strength, stability and cracking resistance
respectively atdifferent stagesincluding service, manufacturing, erection and construction.Indesigning
membersconformitytolocalspecificationsshouldbeconsidered.
Cold drawn low carbon wire conforming to ASTM A615 or equivalent may be permitted for
prestressingprovidedthemechanicalrequirementsshowninTable9.4.5aresatisfied.
Table9.4.5TensileStrengthandElongationofColdDrawnWire
Diameterofwire
Minimumtensilestrength
2
Minimumelongation
(mm)
(N/mm )
(percent)
650
2.0
600
2.5
550
3.0
9.4.18 Externalposttensioning
9.4.18.1 Posttensioningtendonsshallbepermittedtobeexternaltoanyconcretesectionofamember.The
strength and serviceability design methods of this Code shall be used in evaluating the effects of
externaltendonforcesontheconcretestructure.
9.4.18.2 Externaltendonsshallbeconsideredasunbondedtendonswhencomputingflexuralstrengthunless
provisionsaremadetoeffectivelybondtheexternaltendonstotheconcretesectionalongitsentire
length.
9.4.18.3 Externaltendonsshallbeattachedto theconcretememberinamannerthatmaintainsthedesired
eccentricitybetweenthetendonsandtheconcretecentroidthroughoutthefullrangeofanticipated
memberdeflection.
9.4.18.4 Externaltendonsandtendonanchorageregionsshallbeprotectedagainstcorrosion,andthedetails
oftheprotectionmethodshallbeindicatedonthedrawingsorintheprojectspecifications.
6472
Vol.2
9.4.19 Performancerequirementofprestressedconcretedesign
9.4.19.1 Classificationofperformancerequirement
Aftertheoutlineofthememberdimensionsaredeterminedandthemostsuitablekindandtypeof
prestressing options are selected at the structural planning stage, the prestressed concrete
noncompositeandcompositestructuresandmembersshallsatisfyalloftherequiredperformances
such as safety, serviceability, restorability, durability, reparability, societal and environmental
compatibility,etc.ateverystageofdesign,constructionandmaintenancethroughoutthedesignlife
ofthestructure.
Table9.4.8givestheperformancerequirementofprestressedconcretestructuresandcomponents
andrelatedperformanceitems.
9.4.19.2 Performanceverificationmethod
(a)
(b)
Performanceverificationshallbebasedonthepartialfactormethodonthebasis of
reliabilitytheoryandasastandarddesignprocedure,itshallbebasedonthe limit
method.
state
Ingeneralverificationshallbebasedondesignresponsestodesignactions, designlimitsas
determinedbydesignmaterialstrengths,andindividualpartial factors. The performance
ofthestructureshall,ingeneral,beverifiedusingEquations9.4.191and9.4.192:
Table9.4.8 Classificationofperformancerequirementforprestressedconcretestructures
Performance
requirements
Performance item
Examples of check items
Example
index
Safety
Structuralsafety
Resistanceofwholestructure,
Stressresultant,stress
of
verification
components,stability,
deformationperformance
Publicsafety
Serviceability
Injurytousersandthirdparties
Liveloadoperating
Soundnessandrigidityof
Floorflatness,deformationof
performance
structures/membersunder
maingirder
usualconditions
Usercomfort
Restorability
Usercomfortunderwalking
Naturalfrequencyofmain
inducedvibrations
girders
Restorabilityafter
Levelofdamage(easeof
Responsevalue(damagelevel)/
earthquake,
restoration)
limitvalueofperformance
cyclone,tidalbore,
(damagelevel)
fire,etc.
Durability
Fatigueresistance
Fatiguedurabilityagainst
Equivalentstress
variableactions
range/allowablestressrange
Corrosion
Rustpreventionandcorrosion
Corrosionenvironmentand
resistance
protectionperformanceofsteel
surfacefinish,paint
material
specification
Resistanceto
Concretedeterioration
material
Watercementratio,coverof
concrete
deterioration
Maintainability
Easeofmaintenance
(inspection,easeofrepair,etc.)
andeaseofrestoration
Socialand
Socialcompatibilty
Appropriatenessofpartialfactor Partialfactor,structuralfactor,
6473
Part6
StructuralDesign
Performance
requirements
Performance item
Examples of check items
Example
index
environmental
(considerationofsocial
etc.
compatibility
importanceofstructure)
of
verification
Economic
Socialutilityduringlifecycleof
Lifecyclecost(LCC),lifecycle
rationality
structure
utility(LTU)
Environmental
Noise,vibration,environmental
Noiseandvibrationlevelsfor
compatibility
impact,aesthetics,etc.
surroundingresidents,
aestheticreactiontostructural
shapeandcolor,monumental
aspect,etc.
Constructability/
Safetyduring
workability
construction
Initialsoundness
Easeofconstruction
Safetyduringconstruction
Stressresultant,stress,
deformation
Materialquality,welding
Materialproperties,
quality,etc.
workmanship
Easeoffabricationand
Userfriendlyconstruction
constructionwork
methodologyconceivedat
designstage
Sd
1 .0
Rd
(9.14.191)
a .S ( f .Fk )
1.0
R( f k / m )
(9.14.192)
where, Rd
:designresistance
fk
:characteristicvalueofmaterialstrength
:materialfactor
:structuralmemberfactor
R()
:functionforcalculatinglimitvalueofstructurefrommaterial strength
Sd
:designresponse
Fk
:individualcharacteristicvalueofaction
:structuralanalysisfactor
f
S()
i
:actionfactorcorrespondingtoeachaction(loadfactor)
:functionforcalculatingresponsevalueofstructurefromaction
:structuralfactor
(a)
During design, a verification shall be carried out for every limit state that can be
considered.
(b)
TheflowchartexplainingtheconceptofverificationofsafetyisgiveninFig.9.4.19.
6474
Design resistance R
Design action effect
Characteristicvalueofmaterialstrength:fk
m
Characteristicvalueofaction:Fk
Designvalueofmaterialstrength:fd=fk/m
Designvalueofaction:Fd=fFk
Vol.2
Resistance:R(fd)
Actioneffect:S(Fd)
Designresistance: Rd=R(fd)/b
Designactioneffect:Sd= aS(Fd)
Verification:
Sd
1.0
Rd
9.4.19.3 Partialfactors
(a) Partialfactorsshallbedeterminedontheconceptgiveni.andii.below.
i)
Thematerialfactor,structuralmemberfactor,structuralanalysisfactor,andactionfactor
shall be determined in consideration of (i) unfavorabledeviations from characteristic
values,(ii)uncertaintiesincomputationalaccuracy,and(iii)discrepanciesbetweendesign
andpracticewithrespecttoactionsorstructuresandmaterials.
Table9.4.9showsthe
standardvaluesofpartialfactors.
ii) Thestructuralfactorishallbedeterminedaccordingtostructuralimportanceandalsothe
socialandeconomicalimpactofthestructurereachingitslimitstate.
Table9.4.10showsthestandardvaluesofstructuralfactorifordifferentperformanceitems.
Table9.4.9Standardvaluesofpartialfactors
Performanceitem
Actionfactor
f
Structuralanalysis
factora
Materialfactor
m
Structuralmember
Factorb
Structuralsafety
1.01.6
1.01.1
1.01.05
1.01.3
Serviceability(user
1.0
1.0
1.01.05
1.0
1.01.1
1.0
1.0
1.01.1
comfort)
Durability(fatigue
resistance)
Table9.4.10Standardvaluesofstructuralfactors
Performanceitem
Structuralfactori
Structuralsafety
1.01.2
Serviceability(Usercomfort)
1.0
Durability(fatigueresistance)
1.0
6475
Part6
StructuralDesign
PartBMaterialandConstruction
9.5
9.5.1
MaterialandConstruction
Materials
9.5.1.1
ConcreteingredientsandapplicableASTMstandards
Table9.5.1showsthelistofcommonlyapplicablestandardsforcement,coarseandfineaggregates,
admixturesandmixingwater.
Table9.5.1Cement,coarseandfineaggregates,admixtures,waterandapplicablestandards
Designationofthe
Material
Concrete
Cement
Fine&coarseaggregates
TitleoftheStandard
Standard
ASTMC39
Compressiontestingofcylindricalconcretespecimens
BDSEN1971,issued
Part1:Composition,specificationsandconformitycriteriaforcommon
April2003
cements
ASTMC13606
Standardtestmethodforsieveanalysisoffineandcoarseaggregates
Standardtestmethodfororganicimpuritiesinfineaggregatesfor
ASTMC4004
concrete
Claylumpsandfriableparticles
ASTMC142
Specificgravityandabsorptionofcoarseaggregate
ASTMC127
Specificgravityandabsorptionoffineaggregate
ASTMC128
DegradationofsmallsizecoarseaggregatebyL.A.abrasiontest
ASTMC131
Unitweightsandvoidsinaggregates
SurfacemoistureinfineaggregateSoundnessofaggregatesbyuseof
ASTMC29
sodiumsulfateormagnesiumsulfate
ASTMC70
Soundnessofaggregatesbyuseofsodiumsulfateormagnesiumsulfate
Alkalireactivity,potentialofcementaggregatecombinations
Potentialalkalireactivityofaggregates(Mortarbarmethod)
ASTMC88
Sandequivalentvalueofsoilsandfineaggregate
ASTMC227
ASTMC1260
ASTMD2419
Admixtures
ASTMC494
TypeAWaterreducing
TypeBRetarding
TypeCAccelerating
TypeDWaterreducingandretarding
TypeEWaterreducingandaccelerating
TypeFWaterreducing,highrange
TypeGWaterreducing,highrangeandretarding
TypeSSpecificperformanceadmixture
6476
Vol.2
Designationofthe
Material
TitleoftheStandard
Standard
Mixing
ASTMC1602/
Water
C1602M06
productionofhydrauliccementconcrete
Standardspecificationformixingwaterusedin
the
9.5.1.2
Reinforcingsteelandapplicablestandards
Table 9.5.2 shows the types of reinforcing steel with the ASTM and BDS Designation standard
specifications.
Table9.5.2ListofStandardsforthereinforcingsteel
Material
DesignationoftheStandard
ReinforcingSteel
ASTMA615/A615M04a
TitleoftheStandard
Standardspecificationsfor
deformedandplaincarbonsteel
barsforconcretereinforcement
ASTMA706/A706M04a
Standardspecificationsforlow
alloysteeldeformedandplain
carbonsteelbarsforconcrete
reinforcement
BDSISO69352:2009/ISO69352:
Bangladeshstandard,Steelfor
2007
thereinforcementofconcrete,
Part2:Ribbedbars(1strevision)
9.5.1.3
PrestressingsteelandapplicableASTMstandards
Table 9.5.3 shows the types of high tensile prestressing steel and cold drawn wires used for
prestressing,withtheASTMDesignationstandardspecifications.
Table9.5.3ListofStandardsforthepretressingsteel
Material
Designationofthe
Standard
TitleoftheStandard
Prestressing
ASTMA416416M02
Standardspecificationforsteel,wire,harddrawnforprestressing
ASTMA64804a
Standardspecificationforuncoatedhighstrengthsteelbarsfor
prestressingconcrete
Steel
9.5.2
concretepipe
Constructionofprestressedconcretestructures
9.5.2.1
9.5.2.1.1
Posttensioningducts
Corrosionprotectionforunbondedtendons
(a) Unbondedprestressingsteelshallbeencasedwithsheathing.Theprestressing steel shall be
completelycoatedandthesheathingaroundtheprestressingsteelfilled with suitable material
toinhibitcorrosion.
(b)
Sheathingshallbewatertightandcontinuousoverentirelengthtobeunbonded.
(c)
Forapplicationsincorrosiveenvironments,thesheathingshallbeconnectedtoall
intermediateandfixedanchoragesinawatertightfashion.
(d)
Unbondedsinglestrandtendonsshallbeprotectedagainstcorrosionin
ACI423.7.
stressing,
accordance
with
6477
Part6
StructuralDesign
9.5.2.2
9.5.2.3
9.5.2.3.1
Posttensioningducts
(a)
Ductsforgroutedtendonsshallbemortartightandnonreactivewith concrete, prestressing

steel,grout,andcorrosioninhibitor.
(b)
Ductsforgroutedsinglewire,singlestrand,orsinglebartendonsshallhaveaninsidediameter
atleast6mmlargerthantheprestressingsteeldiameter.
(c)
Ductsforgroutedmultiplewire,multiplestrand,ormultiplebartendonsshall have an inside

crosssectionalareaatleasttwotimesthecrosssectional area oftheprestressingsteel.
(d)
Ductsshallbemaintainedfreeofpondedwaterifmemberstobegroutedare exposed
temperaturesbelowfreezingpriortogrouting.
to
Groutforbondedtendons
Materialsforgrouts
(a) GroutshallconsistofPortlandcementandwater;orPortlandcement,sand,andwater.
(b) Materialsforgroutshallconformto9.5.2.2.1c.,d.,e.andf.below.
(c) Portlandcementshallconformto9.5.1.1.
(d) Watershallconformto9.5.1.1.
(e) Sand,ifused,shallconformto9.5.1.1exceptthatgradationshallbepermittedtobemodified
asnecessarytoobtainsatisfactoryworkability.
(f) Admixtures conforming to 9.5.1.1 and known to have no injurious effects on grout, steel, or
concreteshallbepermitted.Calciumchlorideshallnotbeused.
9.5.2.3.2
9.5.2.3.3
Selectionofgroutproportions
Proportionsofmaterialsforgroutshallbebasedoneithera.orb.below.
(a)
Resultsoftestsonfreshandhardenedgroutpriortobeginninggrouting
(b)
Prior documented experience with similar materials and equipment and under comparable
fieldconditions.
operations;or
(c)
CementusedintheWorkshallcorrespondtothatonwhichselectionofgroutproportionswas
based.
(d)
Water content shall be minimum necessary for proper pumping of grout; however, water
cementratioshallnotexceed0.45byweight.
(e)
Watershallnotbeaddedtoincreasegroutflowabilitythathasbeendecreasedbydelayeduse
ofthegrout.
Mixingandpumpingofgrout
(a) Groutshallbemixedinequipmentcapableofcontinuousmechanicalmixingandagitationthat
will produce uniform distribution of materials, passed through screens, and pumped in a
mannerthatwillcompletelyfilltheducts.
(b) Temperatureofmembersattimeofgroutingshallbeabove2Candshallbemaintainedabove
2C until fieldcured 50 mm cubes of grout reach a minimum compressive strength of 5.5
N/mm2.
(c) Grouttemperaturesshallnotbeabove32Cduringmixingandpumping.
9.5.2.4
Protectionforprestressingsteelduringwelding
Burning or welding operations in the vicinity of prestressing steel shall be performed so that
prestressingsteelisnotsubjecttoexcessivetemperatures,weldingsparks,orgroundcurrents.
9.5.2.5
Applicationandmeasurementofprestressingforce
9.5.2.5.1
6478
Prestressingforceshallbedeterminedbybothof(a)and(b):
(a) Measurementofsteelelongation.Requiredelongationshallbedeterminedfromaverageload
elongationcurvesfortheprestressingsteelused;
Vol.2
(b) Observation of jacking force on a calibrated gage or load cell or by use of a calibrated
dynamometer.
9.5.2.5.2
Causeofanydifferenceinforcedeterminationbetween9.5.2.4.1(a)and(b)thatexceeds5
percent for pretensioned elements or 7 percent for posttensioned construction shall be
ascertainedandcorrected.
9.5.2.5.3
Where the transfer of force from the bulk heads of pretensioning bed to the concrete is
accomplishedbyflamecuttingprestressingsteel,cuttingpointsandcuttingsequenceshallbe
predeterminedtoavoidundesiredtemporarystresses.
9.5.2.5.4
Longlengthsofexposedpretensionedstrandshallbecutnearthemembertominimizeshock
toconcrete.
9.5.2.5.5
Totallossofprestressduetounreplacedbrokenprestressingsteelshallnotexceed2percentof
totalprestress.
9.5.2.6
Posttensioninganchoragesandcouplers
9.5.2.6.1
Anchoragesandcouplersforbondedandunbondedtendonsshalldevelopatleast95percentof
the fpu when tested in an unbonded condition, without exceeding anticipated set. For bonded
tendons,anchoragesandcouplersshallbelocatedsothat100percentoffpushallbedeveloped
atcriticalsectionsaftertheprestressingsteelisbondedinthemember.
9.5.2.6.2
Couplersshallbeplacedinareasapprovedbythelicenseddesignprofessionalandenclosedin
housinglongenoughtopermitnecessarymovements.
9.5.2.6.3
Inunbondedconstructionsubjecttorepetitiveloads,attentionshallbegiventothepossibility
offatigueinanchoragesandcouplers.
9.5.2.6.4
Anchorages,couplers,andendfittingsshallbepermanentlyprotectedagainstcorrosion.
9.5.3
9.5.3.1
Performancerequirementofmaterial
Performancerequirementofmaterial
(a) Thefundamentalperformancerequirementofmaterialsformingthestructureisthattheyshould
beabletoresistactionssuchasthevariousloadingstowhichthestructureisexposed.
(b) Materials forming the structure should not reach unexpected limit states as a result of
deteriorationphenomenaduringtheworkinglifeofthestructure.
(c) Materialsrelated energy consumption and CO2 discharges should be minimized, while
recyclabilityshouldbehigh.
(d) Any materials that escape into the surrounding environment during construction and service
shouldnothaveastrongimpactonhumanbeings,animalsandplants.
Commentary:
Corresponding to design requirements, the materials should be evaluated to ensure that their
propertiesaresuitablewithrespecttostrength(tensile,compressiveandshear),deformation(e.g.
elasticmodulus),heatresistanceandwatertightness.
The characteristic values obtained from the tests, complying appropriate BDS, ASTM, BS, or
equivalentstandards,onsuchspecimensshouldbeconvertedtosuitthedesigncalculationmodels
usingappropriateconversionfactorsorfunctions.
ThecharacteristicvalueofmaterialstrengthfkiscalculatedfromtestresultsusingEq.9.5.31.
9.5.31
fk fmk
wherefm:meanoftestvalues,:standarddeviationoftestvalues,andk: coefficient of variance.
The coefficient k is determined from the probability of obtaining a test value less than the
characteristic value and the probability distribution of test results. The 5% fractile value is often
taken as the characteristic value. In this case, the value of k is 1.64 if the normal distribution is
assumedforthetestvalues.
6479
Part6
StructuralDesign
Atthestructuraldesignstage,verificationshallbeperformedsothatresponsevalueislessthanor
equaltothelimitvalueofperformancethroughoutbothconstructionperiodandworkinglife.Atthe
end of construction stage, just completed structure shall fulfill the all required performances
consideredinitsdesign.
6480
Vol.2
9.6
PartCMaintenance
Maintenance
9.6.1
General
Iftheprestressedconcretestructureisdesignedandconstructedinaccordancewiththeappropriateconcepts
describedinPartIandIIofthisChapter,basedonwhichthedurabilityischeckedbyverifyingtheperformance
requirements of the concrete and its constituent materials, it is not likely that structural deterioration would
become so significant as to degrade the performance of the structure. On the other hand it is not easy to
estimate the performance degradation process of the structure during its service life accurately. Also, it is
difficulttocompletelyavoidconstructiondefectsatallconstructionstages.Therefore,thenewstructureshould
be appropriately maintained by routine and regular inspections, based on an adequate maintenance plan
formulatedatthedesignstage.
For existing structures, deterioration may be evident in some cases, with the performance having been
degraded.Thedefectsofsuchstructuresshouldbeaccuratelyassessedandidentifiedasinitialdefects,damage,
ordeteriorations.Majorcausesforsuchdefectsshouldbeidentifiedsubsequentlysothatappropriateremedial
actionscanbeselected.Theinitialdefectsanddamageshouldbetreatedpromptlyandappropriatelyincluding
emergency treatments. When the deterioration that would degrade the performance is evident, the
deteriorationmechanismsshouldbeidentifiedandappropriatemaintenance,carriedoutbasedontheresults
ofdeteriorationpredictionandperformancedegradationevaluation.
9.6.2
ClassificationofMaintenanceAction
Maintenanceactionsshallbeclassifiedintodifferentcategoriesdependingonsuchfactorsastheimportanceof
thestructure,designlife,impactonathirdparty,environmentalconditions,easeofmaintenance,andcost.
Intheviewoftheabove,fourcategoriesarerecommendedfortheclassificationsofthemaintenanceactions:
CategoryAPreventivemaintenance
Maintenancetopreventdeteriorationwhichwouldotherwiseleadtounsatisfactorystructuralperformance.
CategoryAstructuresarethose
-
forwhichremedialactionsaredifficulttotakeafterdeteriorationbecomesapparent;
ofwhichdeteriorationmustnotbeapparent;
havingalongdesignlife.
Structuresinthiscategorygenerallyhaveahighdegreeofimportancewhichinmanycasesrequiremonitoring.
CategoryBCorrectivemaintenance
Maintenance to restore the performance level and/or to reduce the rate of deterioration so as to maintain
satisfactorystructuralperformance.
CategoryBstructuresarethoseforwhich
remedialmeasurescanbetakenafterdeteriorationbecomesapparent;
apparentdeteriorationcausesnoappreciableinconvenience.
CategoryCObservationalmaintenance
Maintenanceinwhichvisualinspectionisnecessarywithoutanyremedial action
deteriorationlevel.
regardless
of
the
CategoryCstructuresarethose
-
foruseaslongastheyareusable;
forwhichensuringsafetyfromthreatsposedtothirdpartiesistheonlyrequirement.
CategoryDIndirectmaintenance
Maintenanceinwhichnodirectinspectionisnecessaryorpossible.
6481
Part6
StructuralDesign
Category D structures are those for which direct inspection is extremely difficult. For these reasons, non
inspection maintenance after the initial inspection is carried out not as routine or regular inspection, but as
extraordinaryinspectionfollowingnaturaldisasters,accidents,etc.
9.6.3
MaintenanceRecord
Records,drawingsandrelateddocumentspreparedduringthetimeofplanning,designandconstructionshall
be referred to and made use of while developing an appropriate methodology for maintenance covering
inspectionandrepairs.
Commentary:
A thorough study of the planning, design and construction related documents often provide insights into the
inherent weaknesses of the structure which in turn often serve as pointers for further detailed inspection
and/orrepairs.
Furthermore, a clear record should be kept of the difficulties encountered, remedial actions taken and any
deviation from the design drawings. These record also serve as a valuable reference in the design and
constructionofsimilarstructuresandtheirsubsequentinspections.
9.6.4
9.6.4.1
Inspection
General
Onthebasisofthemethodsusedinthefrequencyandtiming,inspectionshallbeclassifiedasinitial
inspection,routineinspection,regularinspection,detailedinspection,extraordinaryinspection,and
monitoring.
9.6.4.2
Initialinspection
Initial inspection is intended to examine whether the structure is adequately constructed. It also
allowsthecollectionofbasicdataforinitiatingamaintenanceprogram.Initialinspectionshallalsobe
carriedoutjustafterthecompletionofremedialactions.
Initialinspectionshouldcovertheexternalappearanceofthestructure,variationofconcretequality,
existence of construction defects, construction errors on reinforcing and pretsressing bar
arrangement,andsoon.
9.6.4.3
Routineinspections
It shall be carried out on a routine basis at certain intervals without making any specific effort to
identify signs of deterioration, if any, and the time of their first appearance. The exact tools to be
usedandthefrequencyofsuchinspectionsmaybedecidedonthebasisofsuchfactorsasthelikely
mechanisms of such deterioration, environmental conditions, importance of the structure, and the
maintenanceactionclassification.
Aroutineinspectionshouldcovertheexternalappearanceofthestructureincludingcracks,spalling,
delamination,colorchanges,ruststainfromreinforcement,andisolationoffreelimefromconcrete.
9.6.4.4
Regularinspection
Itshallbecarriedoutatregularintervalsusingappropriatetoolstoidentifysignsofdeteriorationand
the time of their first appearance. Efforts shall be made during a regular inspection to observe the
structurecloselytoobtaindetailswhichwillbedifficulttogatherduringaroutineinspection.
Visualinspectionand/orhammeringinspectionarecarriedoutmainlytoobtainmoredetailsonthe
itemsinspectedinaroutineinspection.Inaddition,inspectionsbyusingappropriatenondestructive
testsortakingconcretecoresetc.canbeeffectivelycombinedwiththevisualinspection.
9.6.4.5
Detailedinspection
Detailedinspectionshallbedonewhen
(a) somesignsofdeteriorationorachangeintheperformancelevelareobservedduringaroutine
and/orregularinspection;
(b) it is difficult to obtain reliable and accurate information during a routine and/or regular
inspection;
6482
Vol.2
(c) itisfoundthatthestructuralintegrityofthestructurehasbeenadverselyaffectedbytheextent
ofthedeterioration;
(d) more detailed information is required before deciding on the necessity and scope for
undertakingamajorrepair,rehabilitationorstrengtheningwork.
9.6.4.6
Extraordinaryinspection
Itshallbecarriedoutafterastructurehasbeensubjectedtoanaccidentalloadtoassesstheextent
ofthedamageandtheneedforremedialactions.Suchaccidentalloadsmayincludethosecausedby
anearthquake,storm,flood,fire,explosion,etc.
9.6.5
Monitoring
Thedeteriorationand/orperformanceoftheconcernedstructureasdeterminedin9.6.2,shallbemonitored,
throughcontinuousrecordingoftheappropriatedata,togetherwithroutineandregularinspections,sothatthe
appropriateremedialactionscanbetakenbeforethedeteriorationbecomesdetrimentaltotheappearanceand
otherperformanceofthestructure.
9.6.6
DeteriorationMechanismandPrediction
9.6.6.1
General
Theprevailingstateoftheconcernedstructureshallbeevaluatedasproperlyaspossibleaccordingto
the inspection results, design and construction records, environmental conditions, and any other
relevantinformation.Thenwhenanydeteriorationisfound,thepossiblecausesofthedeterioration
andthecorrespondingmechanismcanbeappropriatelyestimated.
9.6.6.2
Identificationofdeteriorationmechanisms
Deterioration of a structure is caused by the environmental actions and loading conditions.

Environmentoriented deterioration includes carbonationinduced deterioration, chlorideinduced
deterioration, chemical attack, alkaliaggregate reaction, etc. On the other hand external force
orienteddeteriorationincludesfatigue,excessiveloading,anddifferentialsettlementofthesupport.
9.6.6.3
Deteriorationfactors
Deteriorationfactorsmaybeclassifiedintothose
(a)
external to structures such as temperature, humidity and any other environmental

characteristics;and
(b)
internaltothestructuresuchasdesignparametersandqualitycontrolduringconstruction.
Commentary:
Designfactorsincludethegeometryofthemembers/segments, crackwidthspecifications,concrete
covertoreinforcingbarandpretressingsteel/ducts,anddesignstrength.Constructionfactorsinclude
materialselection,mixproportions,transportation,placement,andcuringmethods.
9.6.6.4
Determinationofdeteriorationlevelsandrates
The level of deterioration and/or performance shall be determined based on the results of
inspectionsandsimulationsusingappropriatemodelsforthemechanismsofdeterioration.
The following features appearing on the surface of the structure may be used for evaluating the
degreeofdeteriorationandthelevelofperformance:
(a)
crackpattern,lengthandwidth;
(b)
theextentofdelamination,peelingandspallingofconcretecover,andscalinganddegradation
areas;
(c)
abnormalhammertappingsoundandtheextentofabnormality;
(d)
presenceanddegreeofexudationofrustandefflorescenceandwaterleakage.
6483
Part6
StructuralDesign
9.6.7
EvaluationandDecisionMaking
9.6.7.1
General
Ingeneral,thedeteriorationandperformancedegradationofastructureprogressmonotonically.The
decision, therefore, should be made based on the evaluation outcome of the performance of the
structureatthetimeofinspectionandattheendofitsdesignlife.
9.6.7.2
Thresholdlevel
Thethresholdlevelofthestructuresdegradedperformanceshallbespecifiedinaccordancewiththe
requirementsofsafety,functionality,appearance,societalfriendlinessandsuchotherfactors,taking
into consideration the type, importance and maintenance level of the structure and the
environmentalconditions.
9.6.7.3
Evaluationofinspectionresults
The results from routine and regular inspections shall be evaluated and a decision shall be made
whetheradetailedinspectionisrequiredorotherwise.
Theresultsfromthedetailedand/orextraordinaryinspectionsshallbeevaluatedandadecisionshall
bemadewhetheraremedialactionisrequiredorotherwise.
Immediate remedial actions shall be taken in cases where deterioration, damage and/or initial
defectsarefoundtobehazardoustothirdparties.
9.6.8
RemedialAction
9.6.8.1
General
A remedial action on a deteriorated structure shall be taken on the basis of the inspection results,
importance of the structure, maintenance classification, and the threshold level of deterioration
and/orperformance.
Commentary:
Repairandstrengtheningarethemaintechniquesofremedialactionsofwhichdetailsaredescribed
in9.6.8.3and9.6.8.4respectively.Thefollowingmeasuresarealsoincludedintheremedialactions.
Intensified inspection: inspection may be carried out by suitably increasing one or more of the
following:frequencyofinspection,numberofinspectionitems,andthelocationsforinspection.
Usagerestriction:suitablerestrictionshallbeimposedonthemaximumliveloadthatthestructure
maycarry,dependingonthelevelofdeteriorationobserved.
Functionalimprovementorrestoration:thismayincludeanappearanceimprovementthatbeautifies
astructurewithsuitablypaintingorplacingadditionalconcrete,andsoon.
Dismantlingandremoval:inacasewhenthedeteriorationofastructureistoosevereforits
structural performance to be sufficiently restored, and dismantling or the removal is one of the
choicesastheremedialmeasures.
Special care for emergency: when a deteriorated structure poses an immediate threat to the
environment,itsusers,orthirdparties,suitableemergencyactionshallbetakenimmediately.
9.6.8.2
Selectionofremedialaction
Selectionofmethodsandmaterialssuitablefortherelevantdeteriorationmechanismanddegreeof
performancedegradationisparticularlyimportantformeasuresforwhichwidevarietiesofmethods
andmaterialsareavailable.Careshouldbetakenasthemethodofrestoringtheperformancemay
varydependingonthedeteriorationmechanism,venifthelevelofperformanceisthesame.
9.6.8.3
Repair
9.6.8.3.1
6484
General
Repair of a structure refers to the remedial action taken to prevent or slow down its further
deteriorationandreducethepossibilityofdamagetoitsusersorthirdparties.
Vol.2
Types of repair include (i) repair of defects such as cracking and peeling; (ii) removal of concrete
damaged by deterioration due to carbonation and such like; (iii) surface coating to prevent re
intrusionofhazardoussubstances.
9.6.8.3.2
Preparationandexecution
Acompleteplanfortherepairworkincludingmethodsofrepair,materialstobeused,andteststo
ensurethequalityofwork,shallbedevelopedbeforetherepairworkcommences.
Repair works shall be carried out with minimum disturbances to the surrounding environment.
Necessaryteststoensurethequalityoftherepairworkshallbecarriedout.Detailedrecordofthe
repairworkshallbemaintainedforfuturereference.
9.6.8.3.3
Methodsandmaterials
Somecurrentrepairmethodsandassociatedmaterialsare
-
crackrepairbyinjectingepoxy;
sectionrepairincludingpatchingusingpolymercementmortar;
surfaceprotectionbyresinormortar;
cathodicprotection;
realkalization;
desalinationwhereverrequired.
Commentary:
Development of a repair plan comprises the selection of a repair method suitable for the
deterioration mechanism, establishment of the required repair level, and decisions on the repair
policy, specifications for the repair materials, sectional dimensions after repair, and execution
methods.
9.6.8.4
9.6.8.4.1
Strengthening
General
Strengtheningofastructurereferstotheremedialactiontakentorestoreorimproveitsstructural
propertiesincludingloadcarryingcapacityandstiffness,toalevelwhichisequaltoorhigherthan
thatoftheoriginaldesign.
Commentary:
Strengthening methods include (i) replacement of members; (ii) an increase in the crosssectional
area of concrete; (iii) addition of members; (iv) an increase of the support points; (v) addition of
strengtheningmembers;(vi)externalprestressing,etc.
9.6.8.4.2
Preparationandexecution
Strengthening of a structure shall be preceded by a thorough investigation of its deterioration
consideringsuchfactorsastheremainingdesignlife,deteriorationmechanism,possiblecausesand
extentofdeterioration,theremaininganddesiredloadcarryingcapacityorstiffness,importanceof
thestructure,maintenanceclassification,andanyremedialactionstakenpreviously.
A complete plan for the strengthening work including design calculations, methods of
strengthening, materials to be used, and tests to ensure quality of the work, shall be developed
beforeworkcommences.
Strengtheningworkshallbecarriedoutwithminimumdisturbancetothesurroundingenvironment
andtheserviceconditionofthestructure.
9.6.8.4.3
Methodsandmaterials
Somecurrentmethodsandassociatedmaterialsforstrengtheningare
-
external bonding viz plate or sheet bonding and over or underlaying using steel or carbon
sheets;
6485
Part6
StructuralDesign
externalprestressingusingadditionaltensioncables;
additionofgirders,bracesand/orsupports;
replacementofmembers;
seismicisolation.
Commentary:
When selecting a strengthening method, it is necessary to consider effects of strengthening,
constructability,costeffectiveness,andimpactonthecommunity/environmentduringexecution.
Itisalsoimportanttoconsidertheeaseofmaintenanceafterstrengtheningandanyinfluenceon
thelandscape.
9.6.8.5
Record
9.6.8.5.1
General
Records shall be kept and preserved for future reference. Such records shall include details
concerning the design, inspection and evaluation procedures, plans and execution of any repair
and/orstrengtheningworkundertaken,andothersuchinformation.
9.6.8.5.2
Preservation
Themaintenancerecordsofastructureshallbepreservedwhilethestructureremainsinservice.It
isalsodesirablethatsuchrecordsbepreservedforanindefiniteperiodasausefulreferenceforthe
constructionandmaintenanceofothersimilarstructures.
Commentary:
It is important to devise a format that makes it easy to understand the history of a structure by
simplyreferringtorecords.Therecordsshouldbemadeaccessibleatalltimes.
9.6.8.5.3
Methodanditemofrecording
Recordsshallbekeptinaneasytounderstandformat.
Theitemstoberecordedshallincludereferencestoconcernedagencies,drawings,immediateand
nearbyenvironment,classificationofstructure,resultsofdeteriorationrateestimation,resultsof
anyinspectionscarriedout,evaluationofthestructure,anddetailsoftheplanandactualexecution
ofremedialandotheractions.
6486
Vol.2
Chapter 10
STEELSTRUCTURES
10.1 GeneralProvisionsforStructuralSteelBuildingsandStructures
This section states the scope of the Specification, summarizes referenced specification, code, and standard
documents,andprovidesrequirementsformaterialsandcontractdocuments.
10.1.1 Scope
Thespecificationcontainedinchapter10ofPart6ofthiscodesetsforthcriteriaforthedesign,fabrication,and
erection of structural steel buildings and other structures, where other steelstructures are defined as those
structuresdesigned,fabricated,anderectedinamannersimilartosteelbuildings,withbuildinglikeverticaland
lateralloadresistingelements.Whereconditionsarenotcoveredbythisspecification,designsarepermittedto
bebasedontestsoranalysis,subjecttotheapprovaloftheauthorityhavingjurisdiction.Alternatemethodsof
analysis and design shall be permitted, provided such alternate methods or criteria are acceptable to the
authorityhavingjurisdiction.
10.1.1.1 LowSeismic Applications: When the seismic response modification coefficient, R, (as specified in
Chapter2ofPart6)istakenequaltoorlessthan3,thedesign,fabrication,anderectionofstructural
steelframedbuildingsandothersteelstructuresshallcomplywiththisspecificationexceptthatsuch
structuresneednottocomplywiththespecificationssetforthinSection10.20SeismicProvisions.
10.1.1.2 HighSeismic Applications: When the seismic response modification coefficient, R, (as specified in
Chapter2ofPart6)istakengreaterthan3,thedesign,fabricationanderectionofstructuralsteel
framed buildings and other structures shall comply with the requirements in the Section 10.20
Seismic Provisions, in addition to the provisions of other sections (whichever applicable) this
specification.
10.1.2 ReferencedSpecifications,CodesandStandards
Thefollowingspecifications,codesandstandardsarereferencedinthisSpecification:
ACIInternational(ACI)
ACI31802BuildingCodeRequirementsforStructuralConcreteandCommentary
ACI318M02MetricBuildingCodeRequirementsforStructuralConcreteandCommentary
AmericanInstituteofSteelConstruction,Inc.(AISC)
AISC30305CodeofStandardPracticeforSteelBuildingsandBridges
ANSI/AISC34105SeismicProvisionsforStructuralSteelBuildings
ANSI/AISC N6901994(R2004) Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel SafetyRelated
StructuresforNuclearFacilities,includingSupplementNo.2
ANSI/AISC N690L03 Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel SafetyRelated Structures for
NuclearFacilities
AmericanSocietyofCivilEngineers(ASCE)
SEI/ASCE702MinimumDesignLoadsforBuildingsandOtherStructures
ASCE/SFPE2999StandardCalculationMethodsforStructuralFireProtection
AmericanSocietyofMechanicalEngineers(ASME)
ASMEB18.2.696FastenersforUseinStructuralApplications
ASMEB46.195SurfaceTexture,SurfaceRoughness,Waviness,andLay
Part6
StructuralDesign
6487
Part6
StructuralDesign
AmericanIronandSteelInstitute(AISI)
NorthAmericanSpecificationfortheDesignofColdFormedSteelStructuralMembers(AISI/COS/NASPEC2001).
CodeofStandardPracticeforColdFormedSteelStructuralFraming,2005
ASTMInternational(ASTM)
A6/A6M04a Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes,
andSheetPiling
A36/A36M04StandardSpecificationforCarbonStructuralSteel
A53/A53M02StandardSpecificationforPipe,Steel,BlackandHotDipped,ZincCoated,WeldedandSeamless
A193/A193M04a Standard Specification for AlloySteel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High
TemperatureService
A194/A194M04 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High
TemperatureService,orBoth
A216/A216M93(2003)StandardSpecificationforSteelCastings,Carbon,SuitableforFusionWelding,forHigh
TemperatureService
A242/A242M04StandardSpecificationforHighStrengthLowAlloyStructuralSteel
A283/A283M03StandardSpecificationforLowandIntermediateTensileStrengthCarbonSteelPlates
A30703StandardSpecificationforCarbonSteelBoltsandStuds,60,000PSITensileStrength
A32504StandardSpecificationforStructuralBolts,Steel,HeatTreated,120/105ksiMinimumTensileStrength
A325M04StandardSpecificationforHighStrengthBoltsforStructuralSteelJoints(Metric)
A35403a Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally
ThreadedFasteners
A37003aStandardTestMethodsandDefinitionsforMechanicalTestingofSteelProducts
A44904StandardSpecificationforQuenchedandTemperedSteelBoltsandStuds
A49004StandardSpecificationforHeatTreatedSteelStructuralBolts,150ksiMinimumTensileStrength
A490M04 Standard Specification for HighStrength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel
Joints(Metric)
A50003a Standard Specification for ColdFormed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
RoundsandShapes
A50101StandardSpecificationforHotFormedWeldedandSeamlessCarbonSteelStructuralTubing
A50203StandardSpecificationforSteelStructuralRivets
A514/A514M00a Standard Specification for HighYield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate,
SuitableforWelding
A529/A529M04StandardSpecificationforHighStrengthCarbonManganeseSteelofStructuralQuality
A56304StandardSpecificationforCarbonandAlloySteelNuts
A563M03StandardSpecificationforCarbonandAlloySteelNuts[Metric]
A568/A568M03StandardSpecificationforSteel,Sheet,Carbon,andHighStrength,LowAlloy,HotRolledand
ColdRolled,GeneralRequirementsfor
A572/A572M04Standard
Steel
Specification
for HighStrength LowAlloy ColumbiumVanadium Structural
A588/A588M04 Standard Specification for HighStrength LowAlloy Structural Steel with 345 MPa Minimum
YieldPointto100mmThick
A60604StandardSpecificationforSteel,SheetandStrip,HighStrength,LowAlloy,HotRolledandColdRolled,
withImprovedAtmosphericCorrosionResistance
A618/A618M04 Standard Specification for HotFormed Welded and Seamless HighStrength LowAlloy
StructuralTubing
A673/A673M04StandardSpecificationforSamplingProcedureforImpactTestingofStructuralSteel
A668/A668M04StandardSpecificationforSteelForgings,CarbonandAlloy,forGeneralIndustrialUse
6488
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
A709/A709M04StandardSpecificationforCarbonandHighStrengthLowAlloyStructuralSteelShapes,Plates,
andBarsandQuenchedandTemperedAlloyStructuralSteelPlatesforBridges
A75101StandardTestMethods,Practices,andTerminologyforChemicalAnalysisofSteelProducts
A84799a(2003) Standard Specification for ColdFormed Welded and Seamless HighStrength, LowAlloy
StructuralTubingwithImprovedAtmosphericCorrosionResistance
A852/A852M03 Standard Specificationfor Quenched and TemperedLowAlloy Structural SteelPlatewith485
MPaMinimumYieldStrengthto100mmThick
A913/A913M04StandardSpecificationforHighStrengthLowAlloySteelShapesofStructuralQuality,Produced
byQuenchingandSelfTemperingProcess(QST)
A992/A992M04StandardSpecificationforStructuralSteelShapes
A1011/A1011M04 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, HotRolled, Carbon, Structural, High
StrengthLowAlloyandHighStrengthLowAlloywithImprovedFormability
C3303StandardSpecificationforConcreteAggregates
C33004StandardSpecificationforLightweightAggregatesforStructuralConcrete
E11900aStandardTestMethodsforFireTestsofBuildingConstructionand
Materials
E70901StandardGuideforMagneticParticleExamination
F43603StandardSpecificationforHardenedSteelWashers
F95902StandardSpecificationforCompressibleWasherTypeDirectTensionIndicatorsforUsewithStructural
Fasteners
F155499StandardSpecificationforAnchorBolts,Steel,36,55,and105ksiYieldStrength
F185204 Standard Specification for TwistOff Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies,
Steel,HeatTreated,120/105ksiMinimumTensileStrength
AmericanWeldingSociety(AWS)
AWSD1.1/D1.1M2004StructuralWeldingCodeSteel
AWSA5.12004SpecificationforCarbonSteelElectrodesforShieldedMetalArcWelding
AWSA5.596SpecificationforLowAlloySteelElectrodesforShieldedMetalArcWelding
AWSA5.17/A5.17M97SpecificationforCarbonSteelElectrodesandFluxesforSubmergedArcWelding
AWSA5.18:2001SpecificationforCarbonSteelElectrodesandRodsforGasShieldedArcWelding
AWSA5.2095SpecificationforCarbonSteelElectrodesforFluxCoredArcWelding
AWSA5.23/A5.23M97SpecificationforLowAlloySteelElectrodesandFluxesforSubmergedArcWelding
AWS A5.25/A5.25M97 Specification for Carbon and LowAlloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Electroslag
Welding
AWSA5.26/A5.26M97SpecificationforCarbonandLowAlloySteelElectrodesforElectrogasWelding
AWSA5.2896SpecificationforLowAlloySteelElectrodesandRodsforGasShieldedArcWelding
AWSA5.29:1998SpecificationforLowAlloySteelElectrodesforFluxCoredArcWelding
ResearchCouncilonStructuralConnections(RCSC)
SpecificationforStructuralJointsUsingASTMA325orA490Bolts,2004
BangladeshStandardsandTestingInstitute(BangladeshStandardsorBDS)
10.1.3 Material
10.1.3.1 StructuralSteelMaterials
a) Regular Structural Steel: Material test reports from an acceptable testing laboratory shall constitute
sufficientevidenceofconformitywithoneoftheabovelistedASTMstandards.Forhotrolledstructural
shapes,plates,andbars,suchtestsshallbemadeinaccordancewithASTMA6/A6M;forsheets,such
tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM A568/A568M; for tubing and pipe, such tests shall be
made in accordance with the requirements of the applicable ASTM standards listed above for those
6489
Part6
StructuralDesign
product forms. If requested, the fabricator shall provide an affidavit stating that the structural steel
furnishedmeetstherequirementsofthegradespecified.
Structural steel material conforming to one of the following specifications is approved for use under this
Specification:
(i)Hotrolledstructuralshapes
ASTM A36/A36M, ASTM A529/A529M, ASTM A572/A572M, ASTM A588/A588M, ASTM
A709/A709M,ASTMA913/A913M,ASTMA992/A992M
(ii)Structuraltubing
ASTMA500,ASTMA501,ASTMA618,ASTMA847,BDS1031:2006
(iii)Pipe
ASTMA53/A53M,Gr.B,BDS1031:2006
(iv)Plates
ASTM A36/A36M, ASTM A242/A242M, ASTM A283/A283M, ASTM A514/A514M, ASTM
A529/A529M, ASTM A572/A572M,ASTMA588/A588M,ASTM A709/A709M, ASTM A852/A852M,
ASTMA1011/A1011M,BDS1122:1987Reaffirmed2007
(v)Bars
ASTM A36/A36M, ASTM A529/A529M, ASTM A572/A572M, ASTM A709/A709M, BDS ISO 6935
1:2006,BDSISO69352:2006
(vi)Sheets
ASTMA606,A1011/A1011MSS,HSLAS,ANDHSLASF,BDS1122:1987Reaffirmed2007
b) UnidentifiedSteel:Unidentifiedsteelfreeofinjuriousdefectsispermittedtobeusedforunimportant
membersordetails,wheretheprecisephysicalpropertiesandweldabilityofthesteelwouldnotaffect
thestrengthofthestructure.
c) RolledHeavyShapes:ASTMA6/A6Mhotrolledshapeswithaflangethicknessexceeding50mm,used
as members subject to primary (computed) tensile forces due to tension or flexure and spliced using
completejointpenetration groove welds that fuse through the thickness of the member, shall be
specifiedasfollows.ThecontractdocumentsshallrequirethatsuchshapesbesuppliedwithCharpyV
Notch (CVN) impact test results in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M, SupplementaryRequirement S30,
CharpyVNotchImpactTestforStructuralShapesAlternateCoreLocation.Theimpacttestshallmeet
aminimumaveragevalueof27Jabsorbedenergyat+210C.
The above requirements do not apply if the splices and connections are made by bolting. The above
requirements do not apply to hotrolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 50 mm that have
shapes with flange or web elements less than 50 mm thick welded with completejointpenetration
grooveweldstothefaceoftheshapeswiththickerelements.
d) BuiltUpHeavyShapes:Builtupcrosssectionsconsistingofplateswithathicknessexceeding50mm,
usedasmemberssubjecttoprimary(computed)tensileforcesduetotensionorflexureandsplicedor
connected to other members using completejoint penetration groove welds that fuse through the
thicknessoftheplates,shallbespecifiedasfollows.Thecontractdocumentsshallrequirethatthesteel
besuppliedwithCharpyVNotchimpacttestresultsinaccordancewithASTMA6/A6M,Supplementary
RequirementS5,CharpyVNotch ImpactTest. The impact test shallbeconductedinaccordance with
ASTMA673/A673M,FrequencyP,andshallmeetaminimumaveragevalueof27Jabsorbedenergyat
+210C.
Theaboverequirementsalsoapplytobuiltupcrosssectionsconsistingofplatesexceeding50mmthat
areweldedwithcompletejointpenetrationgrooveweldstothefaceofothersections.
e) ColdFormSections:Specificationsforcoldformshapesregardingtheiruseasstructuralmembersisnot
covered in Section 10. For such type of structural steel, AISI standard (AISI/COS/NASPEC 2001) or
equivalentmaybefollowed.
10.1.3.2 Steel Castings and Forgings: Cast steel shall conform to ASTM A216/A216M, Gr. WCB with
Supplementary Requirement S11. Steel forgings shall conform to ASTM A668/A668M. Test reports
6490
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
produced in accordance with the above reference standards shall constitute sufficient evidence of
conformitywithsuchstandards.
10.1.3.3 Bolts, Washers and Nuts: Bolt, washer, and nut material conforming to one of the following ASTM
specificationsisapprovedforuseunderthisSpecification:
(1)Bolts:ASTMA307,ASTMA325,ASTMA325M,ASTMA449,ASTMA490,ASTMA490M,ASTMF1852
(2)Nuts:ASTMA194/A194M,ASTMA563,ASTMA563M
(3)Washers:ASTMF436,ASTMF436M
(4)CompressibleWasherTypeDirectTensionIndicators:ASTMF959,ASTMF959M
10.1.3.4 Anchor rods and Threaded rods: Anchor rod and threaded rod material conforming to one of the
followingASTMspecificationsisapprovedforuseunderthisSpecification:
ASTMA36/A36M,ASTMA193/A193M,ASTMA354,ASTMA449,ASTMA572/A572M,ASTMA588/A588M,
ASTMF1554
A449materialisacceptableforhighstrengthanchorrodsandthreadedrodsofanydiameter.
Threads on anchor rods and threaded rods shall conform to the Unified Standard Series of ASME
B18.2.6andshallhaveClass2Atolerances.
10.1.3.5 Filler metal and Flux for Welding: Filler metals and fluxes shall conform to one of the following
specifications of the American Welding Society: AWS A5.1, AWS A5.5, AWS A5.17/A5.17M, AWS
A5.18, AWS A5.20, AWS A5.23/A5.23M,AWS A5.25/A5.25M, AWS A5.26/A5.26M, AWS A5.28, AWS
A5.29,AWSA5.32/A5.32M
10.1.3.6 StudShearConnectors:SteelstudshearconnectorsshallconformtotherequirementsofStructural
WeldingCodeSteel,AWSD1.1.
10.1.4 StructuralDesignDrawingsandSpecifications
Thedesigndrawingsandspecificationsshallmeettherequirementsspecifiedinthisspecification(Sections10.1
through10.20)andshallbepreparedandpresentedinaninternationallyapprovedstandardinaccordancewith
the provisions of Section 10.13, except for deviations specifically identified in the design drawings and/or
specificationsandapprovedbyanappropriateauthority.
10.2
GeneralDesignRequirements
Thegeneralrequirementsfortheanalysisanddesignofsteelbuildingsandstructuresthatareapplicabletoall
sectionsofChapter10ofPart6aregiveninthissection.
10.2.1 GeneralProvisions
Thedesignofmembersandconnectionsshallbeconsistentwiththeintendedbehavioroftheframingsystem
and the assumptions made in the structural analysis. Unless restricted by the applicable code, lateral load
resistanceandstabilitymaybeprovidedbyanycombinationofmembersandconnections.
10.2.2 LoadsandLoadCombinations
TheloadsandloadcombinationsshallbeasstipulatedinChapter2ofPart6ofthiscode.Fordesignpurposes,
thenominalloadsshallbetakenastheloadsstipulatedintheChapter2
10.2.3 DesignBasis
Designs shall be made according to the provisions for Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) or to the
provisionsforAllowableStrengthDesign(ASD).
10.2.3.1 RequiredStrength:Therequiredstrengthofstructuralmembersandconnectionsshallbedetermined
by structural analysis for the appropriate load combinations as stipulated in Chapter 2 of Part 6.
Designbyelastic,inelasticorplasticanalysisispermitted.Provisionsforinelasticandplasticanalysis
6491
Part6
StructuralDesign
are as stipulated in Section 10.15, Inelastic Analysis and Design. The provisions for moment
redistributionincontinuousbeamsinSection10.15.3arepermittedforelasticanalysisonly.
10.2.3.2 LimitStates:Designshallbebasedontheprinciplethatnoapplicablestrengthorserviceabilitylimit
stateshallbeexceededwhenthestructureissubjectedtoallappropriateloadcombinations.
10.2.3.3 Design for Strength Using Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD): Design according to the
provisions for Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) satisfies the requirements of this
Specificationwhenthedesignstrengthofeachstructuralcomponentequalsorexceedstherequired
strengthdeterminedonthebasisoftheLRFDloadcombinationsasspecifiedinChapter2ofPart6.All
provisionsofthisSpecification,exceptforthoseinSection10.2.3.4,shallapply.
DesignshallbeperformedinaccordancewithEquation10.2.1:
(10.2.1)
where
=requiredstrength(LRFD)
=nominalstrength,specifiedinSections10.2through10.20
=resistancefactor,specifiedinSections10.2through10.20
=designstrength
10.2.3.4 DesignforStrengthUsingAllowableStrengthDesign(ASD):Designaccordingtotheprovisionsfor
AllowableStrengthDesign(ASD)satisfiestherequirementsofthisSpecificationwhentheallowable
strength of each structural component equals or exceeds the required strength determined on the
basis of the ASD load combinations as specified in Chapter 2 of Part 6. All provisions of this
Specification,exceptthoseofSection10.2.3.3,shallapply.
DesignshallbeperformedinaccordancewithEquation10.2.2:

(10.2.2)
where
=requiredstrength(ASD)
=nominalstrength,specifiedinSections10.2through10.20
=safetyfactor,specifiedinSections10.2through10.20
=allowablestrength
10.2.3.5 DesignforStability:Stabilityofthestructureanditselementsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewith
Section10.3.
10.2.3.6 Design forConnection: Connection elements shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of
Section 10.10 and 10.11. The forces and deformations used in design shall be consistent with the
intendedperformanceoftheconnectionandtheassumptionsusedinthestructuralanalysis.
10.2.3.6.1 Simple Connection: A simple connection transmits a negligible moment across the
connection. In the analysis of the structure, simple connections may be assumed to allow
unrestrainedrelativerotation between the framing elementsbeing connected.A simple connection
shall have sufficient rotation capacity to accommodate the required rotation determined by the
analysisofthestructure.Inelasticrotationoftheconnectionispermitted.
10.2.3.6.2MomentConnection:Amomentconnectiontransmitsmomentacrosstheconnection.Two
typesofmomentconnections,FRandPR,arepermitted,asspecifiedbelow.
a) FullyRestrained(FR)MomentConnections:Afullyrestrained(FR)momentconnectiontransfers
moment with a negligible relative rotation between the connected members. In the analysis of
the structure, the connection may be assumed to allow no relative rotation. An FR connection
shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to maintain the angle between the connected
membersatthestrengthlimitstates.
b) PartiallyRestrained (PR) Moment Connections: Partiallyrestrained (PR) moment connections
transfermoments,buttherelativerotationbetweenconnectedmembersisnotnegligible.Inthe
analysisofthestructure,theforcedeformationresponsecharacteristicsofthe connectionshall
6492
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
beincluded.TheresponsecharacteristicsofaPRconnectionshallbedocumentedinthetechnical
literatureorestablishedbyanalyticalorexperimental means.ThecomponentelementsofaPR
connectionshallhavesufficientstrength,stiffness,anddeformationcapacityatthestrengthlimit
states.
10.2.3.7 DesignforConnection:Theoverallstructureandtheindividualmembers,connectionsandconnectors
shall be checked for serviceability. Performance requirements for serviceability design are given in
Section10.12.
10.2.3.8 Design for Ponding: The roof system shall be investigated through structural analysis to assure
adequatestrengthandstabilityunderpondingconditions,unlesstheroofsurfaceisprovidedwitha
slope of 20 mm per meter or greater toward points of free drainage or an adequate system of
drainageisprovidedtopreventtheaccumulationofwater.Methodsofcheckingpondingaregivenin
section10.16.
10.2.3.9 DesignforFatigue:FatigueshallbeconsideredinaccordancewithSection10.17,DesignforFatigue,
formembersandtheirconnectionssubjecttorepeatedloading.Fatigueneednotbeconsideredfor
seismiceffectsorfortheeffectsofwindloadingonnormalbuildinglateralloadresistingsystemsand
buildingenclosurecomponents.
10.2.3.10 DesignforFireConditions:TwomethodsofdesignforfireconditionsareprovidedinSection10.18,
StructuralDesignforFireConditions:QualificationTestingandEngineeringAnalysis.Compliancewith
thefireprotectionrequirementsinPart4ofthiscodeshallberequiredinadditiontosatisfyingthe
requirementsofSection10.18.
10.2.3.11 DesignforCorrosionEffects:Wherecorrosionmayimpairthestrengthorserviceabilityofastructure,
structuralcomponentsshallbedesignedtotoleratecorrosionorshallbeprotectedagainstcorrosion.
10.2.3.12 DesignWallThicknessforHSS:Thedesignwallthickness,t,shallbeusedincalculationsinvolvingthe
wallthicknessofhollowstructuralsections(HSS).Thedesignwallthickness,t,shallbetakenequalto
0.93 times the nominal wall thickness for electricresistancewelded (ERW) HSS and equal to the
nominalthicknessforsubmergedarcwelded(SAW)HSS.
10.2.3.13 GrossandNetAreaDetermination
10.2.3.13.1GrossArea:Thegrossarea, ,ofamemberisthetotalcrosssectionalarea.
10.2.3.13.2 Net Area: The net area, of a member is the sum of the products of the thickness and the net
widthofeachelementcomputedasfollows:
Incomputingnetareafortensionandshear,thewidthofaboltholeshallbetakenas2mmgreaterthanthe
nominaldimensionofthehole.
For a chain of holes extending across a part in any diagonal or zigzag line, the net width of the part shall be
obtainedbydeductingfromthegrosswidththesumofthediametersorslotdimensionsasprovidedinSection
2
10.10.3.2,ofallholesinthechain,andadding,foreachgagespaceinthechain,thequantitys /(4g)
where
s=longitudinalcentertocenterspacing(pitch)ofanytwoconsecutiveholes,mm.
g=transversecentertocenterspacing(gage)betweenfastenergagelines,mm.
Forangles,thegageforholesinoppositeadjacentlegsshallbethesumofthegagesfromthebackoftheangles
lessthethickness.
ForslottedHSSweldedtoagussetplate,thenetarea, ,isthegrossareatheproductofthethicknessandthe
totalwidthofmaterialthatisremovedtoformtheslot.
Indeterminingthenetareaacrossplugorslotwelds,theweldmetalshallnotbeconsideredasaddingtothe
netarea.
6493
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.2.4 ClassificationofSectionsforLocalBuckling
Sectionsareclassifiedascompact,noncompact,orslenderelementsections.Forasectiontoqualifyascompact
its flanges must be continuously connected to the web or webs and the widththickness ratios of its
compressionelementsmustnotexceedthelimitingwidththicknessratios fromTable10.2.1.Ifthewidth
thicknessratioofoneormorecompressionelementsexceeds ,butdoesnotexceed fromTable10.2.1,
thesectionisnoncompact.Ifthewidththicknessratioofanyelementexceeds ,thesectionisreferredtoasa
slenderelementsection.
10.2.4.1 Unstiffened Elements: For unstiffened elements supported along only one edge parallel to the
directionofthecompressionforce,thewidthshallbetakenasfollows:
(a)ForflangesofIshapedmembersandtees,thewidthbisonehalfthefullflangewidth, .
(b)Forlegsofanglesandflangesofchannelsandzees,thewidthbisthefullnominaldimension.
(c)Forplates,thewidthbisthedistancefromthefreeedgetothefirstrowoffastenersorlineof
welds.
(d)Forstemsoftees,distakenasthefullnominaldepthofthesection.
10.2.4.2 StiffenedElements:Forstiffenedelementssupportedalongtwoedgesparalleltothedirectionofthe
compressionforce,thewidthshallbetakenasfollows:
a) For webs of rolled or formed sections, h is the clear distance between flanges less the fillet or
cornerradiusateachflange;hc istwicethedistancefromthecentroidtotheinsidefaceofthe
compressionflangelessthefilletorcornerradius.
b) Forwebsofbuiltupsections,histhedistancebetweenadjacentlinesoffastenersortheclear
distancebetweenflangeswhenweldsareused,andhcistwicethedistancefromthecentroidto
the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression
flangewhenweldsareused;hpistwicethedistancefromtheplasticneutralaxistothenearest
line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression flange when
weldsareused.
c) Forflangeordiaphragmplatesinbuiltupsections,thewidthbisthedistancebetweenadjacent
linesoffastenersorlinesofwelds.
d) For flanges of rectangular hollow structural sections (HSS), the width b is the clear distance
between webs less the inside corner radius on each side. For websof rectangular HSS, h is the
cleardistancebetweentheflangeslesstheinsidecornerradiusoneachside.Ifthecornerradius
isnotknown,bandhshallbetakenasthecorrespondingoutsidedimensionminusthreetimes
thethickness.Thethickness,t,shallbetakenasthedesignwallthickness,perSection10.2.3.12.
e) For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the thickness is the nominal value halfway between the
freeedgeandthecorrespondingfaceoftheweb.
10.2.5 Fabrication,ErectionandQuality
Shopdrawings,fabrication,shoppainting,erection,andqualitycontrolshallmeettherequirementsstipulated
inSection10.13,Fabrication,Erection,andQualityControl.
10.3
StabilityAnalysisandDesign
Thissectionaddressesgeneralrequirementsforthestabilityanalysisanddesignofmembersandframesofsteel
buildingsandstructures.
10.3.1 StabilityDesignRequirements
GeneralRequirements:Stabilityshallbeprovidedforthestructureasawholeandforeachofitselements.Any
methodthatconsiderstheinfluenceofsecondordereffects(includingPandPeffects),flexural,shearand
axial deformations, geometric imperfections, and member stiffness reduction due to residual stresses on the
stability of the structure and its elements is permitted. The methods prescribed in this Section and Section
10.14: Direct Analysis Method, satisfy these requirements. All component and connection deformations that
contributetothelateraldisplacementsshallbeconsideredinthestabilityanalysis.
6494
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
6495
Part6
StructuralDesign
6496
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Instructuresdesignedbyelasticanalysis,individualmemberstabilityandstabilityofthestructureasawhole
areprovidedjointlyby:
a) Calculationoftherequiredstrengthsformembers,connectionsandotherelementsusingoneof
themethodsspecifiedinSection10.3.2.2,and
f) Satisfactionofthememberandconnectiondesignrequirementsinthisspecificationbasedupon
thoserequiredstrengths.
Instructuresdesignedbyinelasticanalysis,theprovisionsofSection10.15shallbesatisfied.
10.3.1.1 Member Stability Design Requirements: Individual member stability is provided by satisfying the
provisions of Section 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, 10.10 and 10.11 etc. Where elements are designed to
functionasbracestodefinetheunbracedlengthofcolumnsandbeams,thebracingsystemshallhave
sufficient stiffness and strength to control member movement at the braced points. Methods of
satisfyingthisrequirementareprovidedinSection10.19.
10.3.1.2 SystemStabilityDesignRequirements
Lateral stability shall be provided by moment frames, braced frames, shear walls, and/or other equivalent
lateral load resisting systems. The overturning effects of drift and the destabilizing influence of gravity loads
shall be considered. Force transfer and load sharing between elements of the framing systems shall be
considered. Bracedframe and shearwall systems, moment frames, gravity framing systems, and combined
systemsshallsatisfythefollowingspecificrequirements:
10.3.1.3.1 BracedFrame and ShearWall Systems: In structures where lateral stability is provided solely by
diagonalbracing,shearwalls,orequivalentmeans,theeffectivelengthfactor,K,forcompressionmembersshall
betakenas1.0,unlessstructuralanalysisindicatesthatasmallervalueisappropriate.Inbracedframesystems,
it is permitted to design the columns, beams, and diagonal members as a vertically cantilevered, simply
connectedtruss.
10.3.1.3.2 Moment Frame Systems: In frames where lateral stability is provided by the flexural stiffness of
connected beams and columns, the effective length factor K or elastic critical buckling stress, , for columns
andbeamcolumnsshallbedeterminedasspecifiedinSection10.3.2.
6497
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.3.1.3.3GravityFramingSystems:Columnsingravityframingsystemsshallbedesignedbasedontheiractual
length(K=1.0)unlessanalysisshowsthatasmallervaluemaybeused.Thelateralstabilityofgravityframing
systemsshallbeprovidedbymomentframes,bracedframes,shearwalls,and/orotherequivalentlateralload
resistingsystems.Peffectsduetoloadonthegravitycolumnsshallbetransferredtothelateralloadresisting
systemsandshallbeconsideredinthecalculationoftherequiredstrengthsofthelateralloadresistingsystems.
10.3.1.3.4CombinedSystems:Theanalysisanddesignofmembers,connectionsandotherelementsincombined
systemsofmomentframes,bracedframes,and/orshearwallsandgravityframesshallmeettherequirementsof
theirrespectivesystems.
10.3.2 CalculationofRequiredStrengths
ExceptaspermittedinSection10.3.2.2.2,requiredstrengthsshallbedeterminedusingasecondorderanalysis
as specified in Section 10.3.2.1. Design by either second order or firstorder analysis shall meet the
requirementsspecifiedinSection10.3.2.2.
10.3.2.1 MethodsofSecondorderAnalysis:Secondorderanalysisshallconformtotherequirementsinthis
Section.
10.3.2.1.1GeneralSecondOrderElasticAnalysis
AnysecondorderelasticanalysismethodthatconsidersbothPandPeffectsmaybeused.TheAmplified
FirstOrderElasticAnalysisMethoddefinedinSection10.3.2.1.2isanacceptedmethodforsecondorderelastic
analysisofbraced,moment,andcombinedframingsystems.
10.3.2.1.2SecondOrderAnalysisbyAmplifiedfirstOrderElasticAnalysis
Thefollowingisanapproximatesecondorderanalysisprocedureforcalculatingtherequiredflexuralandaxial
strengths in members of lateral load resisting systems. The required secondorder flexural strength, Mr , and
axialstrength,Pr,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
Mr = B1Mnt + B2 M lt
(10.3.2.1a)
Pr = Pnt + B 2 Plt
(10.3.2.1b)
Where,
B1 =
Cm
1
1 Pr Pe1
(10.3.2.2)
Formemberssubjectedtoaxialcompression,B1maybecalculatedbasedonthefirstorderestimatePr=Pnt +
Plt.
FormembersinwhichB11.05,itisconservativetoamplifythesumofthenonswayandswaymoments(as
obtained,forinstance,byafirstorderelasticanalysis)bytheB2amplifier,inotherwords,Mr=B2(Mnt+Mlt).
1
B2 =
1
Pnt
Pe2
(10.3.2.3)
And
1.00(LRFD)
1.60(ASD)
Mr=requiredsecondorderflexuralstrengthusingLRFDorASDloadcombinations,Nmm
Mnt =firstordermomentusingLRFDorASDloadcombinations,assumingthereisnolateraltranslationofthe
frame,Nmm
Mlt =firstordermomentusingLRFDorASDloadcombinationscausedbylateraltranslationoftheframeonly,
Nmm
Pr=requiredsecondorderaxialstrengthusingLRFDorASDloadcombinations,N
Pnt=firstorderaxialforceusingLRFDorASDloadcombinations,assumingthereisnolateraltranslationofthe
frame,N
=totalverticalloadsupportedbythestoryusingLRFDorASDloadcombinations,includinggravitycolumn
loads,N
6498
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Plt =firstorderaxialforceusingLRFDorASDloadcombinationscausedbylateraltranslationoftheframeonly,
N
Cm=acoefficientassumingnolateraltranslationoftheframewhosevalueshallbetakenasfollows:
Forbeamcolumnsnotsubjecttotransverseloadingbetweensupportsintheplaneofbending,
C m = 0.6 0.4(M1 M 2 )
(10.3.2.4)
whereM1andM2,calculatedfromafirstorderanalysis,arethesmallerandlargermoments,respectively,at
the ends of that portion of the member unbraced in the plane of bending under consideration. M1 / M2 is
positivewhenthememberisbentinreversecurvature,negativewhenbentinsinglecurvature.
For beamcolumnssubjected to transverse loading between supports, the value of Cm shall be determined
eitherbyanalysisorconservativelytakenas1.0forallcases.
Pe1 = elastic critical buckling resistance of the member in the plane of bending, calculated based on the
assumptionofzerosidesway,N
Pe1 =
2 EI
(K1L)2
(10.3.2.5)
=elasticcriticalbucklingresistanceforthestorydeterminedbysidewaybucklinganalysis,N
Formomentframes,wheresideswaybucklingeffectivelengthfactorsK2aredeterminedforthecolumns,itis
permittedtocalculatetheelasticstorysideswaybucklingresistanceas
2 EI
Pe 2 = (K L)2
2
(10.3.2.6a)
Foralltypesoflateralloadresistingsystems,itispermittedtouse
Pe 2 = RM
HL
(10.3.2.6b)
where
E=modulusofelasticityofsteel=200000MPa
RM=1.0forbracedframesystems;
=0.85formomentframeandcombinedsystems,unlessalargervalueisjustifiedbyanalysis
I=momentofinertiaintheplaneofbending,mm4
L=storyheight,mm
K1=effectivelengthfactorintheplaneofbending,calculatedbasedontheassumptionofnolateraltranslation,
setequalto1.0unlessanalysisindicatesthatasmallervaluemaybeused
K2=effectivelengthfactorintheplaneofbending,calculatedbasedonasidewaybucklinganalysis
H=firstorderinterstorydriftduetolateralforces,mm.WhereHvariesovertheplanareaofthestructure,
Hshallbetheaveragedriftweightedinproportiontoverticalloador,alternatively,themaximumdrift.
=storyshearproducedbythelateralforcesusedtocomputeH,N
10.3.2.2DesignRequirements
Theserequirementsapplytoalltypesofbraced,moment,andcombinedframingsystems.Wheretheratioof
secondorderdrifttofirstorderdriftisequaltoorlessthan1.5,therequiredstrengthsofmembers,connections
andotherelementsshallbedeterminedbyoneofthemethodsspecifiedinSections10.3.2.2.1or10.3.2.2.2,or
by the Direct Analysis Method of Section 10.14. Where the ratio of secondorder drift to firstorder drift is
greaterthan1.5,therequiredstrengthsshallbedeterminedbytheDirectAnalysisMethodofSection10.14.
ForthemethodsspecifiedinSections10.3.2.2.1or10.3.2.2.2:
Analyses shall be conducted according to the design and loading requirements specified in either Section
10.2.3.3(LRFD)orSection10.2.3.4(ASD).
Thestructureshallbeanalyzedusingthenominalgeometryandthenominalelasticstiffnessforallelements.
10.3.2.2.1DesignBySecondOrderAnalysis
6499
Part6
StructuralDesign
Whererequiredstrengthsaredeterminedbyasecondorderanalysis:
TheprovisionsofSection10.3.2.1shallbesatisfied.
FordesignbyASD,analysesshallbecarriedoutunder1.6timestheASDloadcombinationsandtheresultsshall
bedividedby1.6toobtaintherequiredstrengths.
Allgravityonlyloadcombinationsshallincludeaminimumlateralloadappliedateachlevelofthestructureof
0.002Yi , where Yi is the design gravity load applied at level i. This minimum lateral load shall be considered
independentlyintwoorthogonaldirections.
Wheretheratioofsecondorderdrifttofirstorderdriftislessthanorequalto1.1,membersarepermittedto
bedesignedusingK=1.0.Otherwise,columnsandbeamcolumnsinmomentframesshallbedesignedusingaK
factor or column bucklingstress, Fe , determined from a sidesway buckling analysis of the structure. Stiffness
reductionadjustment duetocolumninelasticity ispermitted inthe determination of the K factor.For braced
frames, K for compression members shall be taken as 1.0, unless structural analysis indicates a smaller value
maybeused.
10.3.2.2.2DesignRequirements
Requiredstrengthsarepermittedtobedeterminedbyafirstorderanalysis,withallmembersdesignedusingK
=1.0,providedthat
Therequiredcompressivestrengthsofallmemberswhoseflexuralstiffnessesareconsideredtocontributeto
thelateralstabilityofthestructuresatisfythefollowinglimitation:
Pr 0.5P y
(10.3.2.7)
Where,
1.0(LRFD)
1.6(ASD)
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthunderLRFDorASDloadcombinations
Py=memberyieldstrength(=AFy),N.
All load combinations include an additional lateral load, Ni , applied in combination with other loads at each
levelofthestructure,where
N i = 2.1( L) Yi 0.0042Yi
(10.3.2.8)
Yi=gravityloadfromtheLRFDloadcombinationor1.6timestheASDloadcombinationappliedatleveli,N
/L=themaximumratiooftoLforallstoriesinthestructure
=firstorderinterstorydriftduetothedesignloads,mm.Wherevariesovertheplanareaofthestructure,
shallbetheaveragedriftweightedinproportiontoverticalloador,alternatively,themaximumdrift.
L=storyheight,mm
Thisadditionallateralloadshallbeconsideredindependentlyintwoorthogonaldirections.
The nonsway amplification of beamcolumn moments is considered by applying the B1 amplifier of Section
10.3.2.1tothetotalmembermoments.
10.4
DesignofMembersforTension
ThisSectionappliestosteelmemberssubjecttoaxialtension caused bystaticforcesactingthroughthecentroidal

axis.
10.4.1 SlendernessLimitations
The maximum slenderness (KL/r) limit for design of structural members (except cables and hanger rods) in
tension shall be 300 unless it is justified by a comprehensive dynamic analysis (including 2nd order effects if
applicable)thatahigherslendernessratioissatisfactory.
Here,
L=laterallyunbracedlengthofthemember,mm
r=governingradiusofgyration,mm
K=theeffectivelengthfactordeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.3.2.
6500
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.4.2 TensileStrength
Thedesigntensilestrength,
,andtheallowabletensilestrength, ,oftensionmembers,shallbethe
lowervalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesoftensileyieldinginthegrosssectionandtensilerupturein
thenetsection.
a) Fortensileyieldinginthegrosssection:
Pn=FyAg
(10.4.2.1)
=0.90(LRFD) t=1.67(ASD)
g) Fortensileruptureinthenetsection:
Pn=FuAe
(10.4.2.2)
t=0.75(LRFD) t=2.00(ASD)
where
Ae=effectivenetarea,mm2
Ag=grossareaofmember,mm2
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthetypeofsteelbeingused,MPa
Fu=specifiedminimumtensilestrengthofthetypeofsteelbeingused,MPa
Whenmemberswithoutholesarefullyconnectedbywelds,theeffectivenetareausedinEquation
10.4.2.2 shall be as defined in Section 10.4.3. When holes are present in a member with welded
endconnections,or at the weldedconnection in the caseofplug orslot welds,the effective net
areathroughtheholesshallbeusedinEquation10.4.2.2.
10.4.3 AreaDetermination
10.4.3.1 GrossArea:Thegrossarea,Ag,ofamemberisthetotalcrosssectionalarea.
10.4.3.2 NetArea:Thenetarea,An,ofamemberisthesumoftheproductsofthethicknessandthenetwidth
ofeachelementcomputedasfollows:
Incomputingnetareafortensionandshear,thewidthofaboltholeshallbetakenas2mmgreater
thanthenominaldimensionofthehole.
Forachainofholesextendingacrossapartinanydiagonalorzigzagline,thenetwidthofthepart
shallbeobtainedbydeductingfromthegrosswidththesumofthediametersorslotdimensionsas
providedinSection10.10.3.2,ofallholesinthechain,andadding,foreachgagespaceinthechain,
thequantitys2/(4g)
where
s=longitudinalcentertocenterspacing(pitch)ofanytwoconsecutiveholes,mm.
g=transversecentertocenterspacing(gage)betweenfastenergagelines,mm.
Forangles,thegageforholesinoppositeadjacentlegsshallbethesumofthegagesfromthebackof
theangleslessthethickness.
ForslottedHSSweldedtoagussetplate,thenetarea,An,isthegrossareaminustheproductofthe
thicknessandthetotalwidthofmaterialthatisremovedtoformtheslot.
Indeterminingthenetareaacrossplugorslotwelds,theweldmetalshallnotbeconsideredasadding
tothenetarea.
10.4.3.3 EffectiveNetArea:Theeffectiveareaoftensionmembersshallbedeterminedasfollows:
Ae=AnU
(10.4.3.1)
whereU,theshearlagfactor,isdeterminedasshowninTable10.4.3.1.
Memberssuchassingleangles,doubleanglesandWTsectionsshallhaveconnectionsproportioned
such that U is equal to or greater than 0.60. Alternatively, a lesser value of U is permitted if these
tensionmembersaredesignedfortheeffectofeccentricityinaccordancewithSections10.8.1.2or
10.8.2.
6501
Part6
StructuralDesign
6502
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.4.4 BuiltUpMembers
Forlimitationsonthelongitudinalspacingofconnectorsbetweenelementsincontinuouscontactconsistingof
aplateandashapeortwoplates,seeSection10.10.3.5.
Eitherperforatedcoverplatesortieplateswithoutlacingarepermittedtobeusedontheopensidesofbuiltup
tensionmembers.Tieplatesshallhavealengthnotlessthantwothirdsthedistancebetweenthelinesofwelds
orfastenersconnectingthemtothecomponentsofthemember.Thethicknessofsuchtieplatesshallnotbe
less than onefiftieth of the distance between these lines. The longitudinal spacing of intermittent welds or
fastenersattieplatesshallnotexceed150mm.
10.4.5 PinConnectedMembers
10.4.5.1 TensileStrength:Thedesigntensilestrength,
andtheallowabletensilestrength, ,ofpin
connectedmembers,shallbethelowervalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesoftensilerupture,
shearrupture,bearing,andyielding.
a) Fortensileruptureontheneteffectivearea:
Pn=2tbeffFu
t=0.75(LRFD)
(10.4.5.1)
t=2.00(ASD)
h) Forshearruptureontheeffectivearea:
Pn=0.6FuAsf
sf=0.75(LRFD)
(10.4.5.2)
sf=2.00(ASD)
where
Asf=2t(a+d/2),mm2
a=shortestdistancefromedgeofthepinholetotheedgeofthemembermeasuredparallel
tothedirectionoftheforce,mm
beff =2t+ 16,mmbut not more thanthe actual distancefromthe edge of the hole to the
edgeofthepartmeasuredinthedirectionnormaltotheappliedforce
d=pindiameter,mm
t=thicknessofplate,mm
i)
j)
Forbearingontheprojectedareaofthepin,seeSection10.10.7.
Foryieldingonthegrosssection,useEquation10.4.2.1.
10.4.5.2 DimensionalRequirements:Thepinholeshallbelocatedmidwaybetweentheedgesofthemember
in the direction normal to the applied force. When the pin is expected to provide for relative
movementbetweenconnectedpartswhileunderfullload,thediameterofthepinholeshallnotbe
morethan1mmgreaterthanthediameterofthepin.
Thewidthoftheplateatthepinholeshallnotbelessthan2beff+dandtheminimumextension,a,
beyondthebearingendofthepinhole,paralleltotheaxisofthemember,shallnotbelessthan1.33
beff.
Thecornersbeyondthepinholearepermittedtobecutat450totheaxisofthemember,provided
thenetareabeyondthepinhole,onaplaneperpendiculartothecut,isnotlessthanthatrequired
beyondthepinholeparalleltotheaxisofthemember.
10.4.6 Eyebars
10.4.6.1 Tensile Strength: The available tensile strength of eyebars shall be determined in accordance with
Section10.4.2,withAgtakenasthecrosssectionalareaofthebody.
For calculation purposes, the width of the body of the eyebars shall not exceed eight times its
thickness.
10.4.6.2 DimensionalRequirements:Eyebarsshallbeofuniformthickness,withoutreinforcementatthepin
holes,andhavecircularheadswiththeperipheryconcentricwiththepinhole.
6503
Part6
StructuralDesign
Theradiusoftransitionbetweenthecircularheadandtheeyebarbodyshallnotbelessthanthehead
diameter.
Thepindiametershallnotbelessthanseveneighthstimestheeyebarbodywidth,andthepinhole
diametershallnotbemorethan1mmgreaterthanthepindiameter.
For steels having Fy greater than 485 MPa, the hole diameter shall not exceed five times the plate
thicknessandthewidthoftheeyebarbodyshallbereducedaccordingly.
Athicknessoflessthan13mmispermissibleonlyifexternalnutsareprovidedtotightenpinplatesand
filler plates into snug contact. The width from the hole edge to the plate edge perpendicular to the
directionofappliedloadshallbegreaterthantwothirdsand,forthepurposeofcalculation,notmorethan
threefourthstimestheeyebarbodywidth.
10.5
DesignofMembersforCompression
ThisSectionaddressesmemberssubjecttoaxialcompressionthroughthecentroidalaxis.
The design compressive strength, c Pn, and the allowable compressive strength, Pn /c , are determined as
follows:
The nominal compressive strength, Pn , shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of
flexuralbuckling,torsionalbucklingandflexuraltorsionalbuckling.
Fordoublysymmetricandsinglysymmetricmembersthelimitstateofflexuralbucklingisapplicable.
Forsinglysymmetricandunsymmetricmembers,andcertaindoublysymmetricmembers,suchascruciformor
builtupcolumns,thelimitstatesoftorsionalorflexuraltorsionalbucklingarealsoapplicable.
c=0.90(LRFD)c=1.67(ASD)
10.5.2 SlendernessLimitationsandeffectiveLength
Theeffectivelengthfactor,K,forcalculation ofcolumnslenderness,KL/r,shallbedeterminedinaccordance
withSection10.3,
where
L=laterallyunbracedlengthofthemember,mm
r=governingradiusofgyration,mm
K=theeffectivelengthfactordeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.3.2.
Themaximumlimitofslenderness,KL/r,forcompressionmembersshallbe150unlessacomprehensiveanalysis
includingsecondordereffects(includingdynamiceffectsifany)showsthatahighervalueisjustified.
10.5.3 Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling of Members without Slender

elements
This section applies to compression members with compact and noncompact sections, as defined in Section
10.2.4,foruniformlycompressedelements.
Thenominalcompressivestrength,Pn,shallbedeterminedbasedonthelimitstateofflexuralbuckling.
Pn=FcrAg
(10.5.3.1)
Theflexuralbucklingstress,Fcr,isdeterminedasfollows:
4.71
(a)When
(orFe0.44Fy)
0.658
4.71
(b)When
(10.5.3.2)
(orFe 0.44Fy)
0.877
(10.5.3.3)
where
6504
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Fe=elasticcriticalbucklingstressdeterminedaccordingtoEquation10.5.3.4,Section10.5.4,ortheprovisions
ofSection10.3.2,asapplicable,
2
(10.5.3.4)
10.5.4 Compressive Strength for Torsional and FlexuralTorsional Buckling of

MemberswithoutSlenderelements
This section applies to singly symmetric and unsymmetric members, and certain doubly symmetric members,
suchascruciformorbuiltupcolumnswithcompactandnoncompactsections,asdefinedinSection10.2.4for
uniformly compressed elements. These provisions are not required for single angles, which are covered in
Section10.5.5.
The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be determined based on the limit states of flexuraltorsional and
torsionalbuckling,asfollows:
Pn=FcrAg
(10.5.4.1)
Fordoubleangleandteeshapedcompressionmembers:

(10.5.4.2)
whereFcryistakenasFcrfromEquation10.5.3.2or10.5.3.3,forflexuralbuckling
abouttheyaxisofsymmetryand
20
,and
(10.5.4.3)
For all other cases, Fcr shall be determined according to Equation 10.5.3.2 or 10.5.3.3, using the torsional or
flexuraltorsionalelasticbucklingstress,Fe,determinedasfollows:
Fordoublysymmetricmembers:
2

2
(10.5.4.4)
Forsinglysymmetricmemberswhereyistheaxisofsymmetry:

(10.5.4.5)
Forunsymmetricmembers,Feisthelowestrootofthecubicequation:
0 2
0
0 2
0
(10.5.4.6)
where
Ag =grossareaofmember,mm2
Cw =warpingconstant,mm6
2
20
0
2 2
0
0
2
1
2
(10.5.4.7)
(10.5.4.8)
(10.5.4.9)
(10.5.4.10)
2

2
(10.5.4.11)
G =shearmodulusofelasticityofsteel=77200MPa
Ix,Iy=momentofinertiaabouttheprincipalaxes,mm4
J
=torsionalconstant,mm4
Kz=effectivelengthfactorfortorsionalbuckling
xo,yo=coordinatesofshearcenterwithrespecttothecentroid,mm
6505
Part6
StructuralDesign
=polarradiusofgyrationabouttheshearcenter,mm
ry =radiusofgyrationaboutyaxis,mm
10.5.5 SingleAngleCompressionMembers
Thenominalcompressivestrength,Pn,ofsingleanglemembersshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection
10.5.3orSection10.5.7,asappropriate,foraxiallyloadedmembers,aswellasthosesubjecttotheslenderness
modificationofSection10.5.5(a)or10.5.5(b),providedthemembersmeetthecriteriaimposed.
The effects of eccentricity on single angle members are permitted to be neglected when the members are
evaluatedasaxiallyloadedcompressionmembersusingoneoftheeffectiveslendernessratiosspecifiedbelow,
providedthat:(1)membersareloadedattheendsincompressionthroughthesameoneleg;(2)membersare
attachedbyweldingorbyminimumtwoboltconnections;and(3)therearenointermediatetransverseloads.
a) Forequalleganglesorunequalleganglesconnectedthroughthelongerlegthatareindividual
membersorarewebmembersofplanartrusseswithadjacentwebmembersattachedtothe
samesideofthegussetplateorchord:
80
(i)When0
72
0.75
80
(ii)When
32
(10.5.5.1)
1.25
200
(10.5.5.2)
Forunequallegangleswithleglengthratioslessthan1.7andconnectedthroughtheshorter
leg,KL/rfromEquations10.5.5.1and10.5.5.2shallbeincreasedbyadding4[(bl/bs)21],but
KL/rofthemembersshallnotbelessthan0.95L/rz.
k) Forequalleganglesorunequalleganglesconnectedthroughthelongerlegthatareweb
membersofboxorspacetrusseswithadjacentwebmembersattachedtothesamesideofthe
gussetplateorchord:
75
(i)When0
60
0.8
75
(ii)When
45
(10.5.5.3)
200
(10.5.5.4)
Forunequallegangleswithleglengthratioslessthan1.7andconnectedthroughtheshorter
leg,KL/rfromEquations10.5.5.3and10.5.5.4shallbeincreasedbyadding6[(bl/bs)21],but
KL/rofthemembersshallnotbelessthan0.82L/rz.
where
L=lengthofmemberbetweenworkpointsattrusschordcenterlines,mm
bl=longerlegofangle,mm
bs=shorterlegofangle,mm
rx=radiusofgyrationaboutgeometricaxisparalleltoconnectedleg,mm
rz=radiusofgyrationfortheminorprincipalaxis,mm
SingleanglememberswithdifferentendconditionsfromthosedescribedinSection10.5.5(a)
or(b),withleglengthratiosgreaterthan1.7,orwithtransverseloadingshallbeevaluatedfor
combined axial load and flexure using the provisions of Section 10.8. End connection to
differentlegsoneachendortobothlegs,theuseofsingleboltsortheattachmentofadjacent
web members to opposite sides of the gusset plate or chord shall constitute different end
conditionsrequiringtheuseofSection10.8provisions.
10.5.6 BuiltupMembers
10.5.6.1 CompressiveStrength
6506
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
a) Thenominalcompressivestrengthofbuiltupmemberscomposedoftwoormoreshapesthatare
interconnectedbyboltsorweldsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSections10.5.3,10.5.4,
or10.5.7subjecttothefollowingmodification.Inlieuofmoreaccurateanalysis,ifthebuckling
modeinvolvesrelativedeformationsthatproduceshearforcesintheconnectorsbetween
individualshapes,KL/risreplacedby(KL/r)mdeterminedasfollows:
(i)Forintermediateconnectorsthataresnugtightbolted:
(10.5.6.1)
(ii)Forintermediateconnectorsthatareweldedorpretensionedbolted:
0.82
1 2
(10.5.6.2)
Where
=modifiedcolumnslendernessofbuiltupmember
= column slenderness of builtup member acting as a unit in the buckling direction being
considered
a=distancebetweenconnectors,mm
ri=minimumradiusofgyrationofindividualcomponent,mm
rib=radiusofgyrationofindividualcomponentrelativetoitscentroidalaxisparalleltomember
axisofbuckling,mm
=separationratio=h/2rib
h = distance between centroids of individual components perpendicular to the member axis of
buckling,mm
l)
Thenominalcompressivestrengthofbuiltupmemberscomposedoftwoormoreshapesor
plateswithatleastoneopensideinterconnectedbyperforatedcoverplatesorlacingwithtie
platesshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSections10.5.3,10.5.4,or10.5.7subjecttothe
modificationgiveninSection10.5.6.1(a).
10.5.6.2 DimensionalRequirements
Individualcomponentsofcompressionmemberscomposedoftwoormoreshapesshallbeconnectedtoone
another at intervals, a, such that the effective slenderness ratio Ka/ri of each of the component shapes,
between the fasteners, does not exceed threefourths times the governing slenderness ratio of the builtup
member.Theleastradiusofgyration,ri,shallbeusedincomputingtheslendernessratioofeachcomponent
part.TheendconnectionshallbeweldedorpretensionedboltedwithClassAorBfayingsurfaces.
At the ends of builtup compression members bearing on base plates or milled surfaces, all components in
contactwithoneanothershallbeconnectedbyaweldhavingalengthnotlessthanthemaximumwidthofthe
memberorbyboltsspacedlongitudinallynotmorethanfourdiametersapartforadistanceequalto1 times
themaximumwidthofthemember.
Alongthelengthofbuiltupcompressionmembersbetweentheendconnectionsrequiredabove,longitudinal
spacingforintermittentweldsorboltsshallbeadequatetoprovideforthetransferoftherequiredforces.For
limitationsonthelongitudinalspacingoffastenersbetweenelementsincontinuouscontactconsistingofaplate
and a shape or two plates, see Section 10.10.3.5. Where a component of a builtup compression member
consistsofanoutsideplate,themaximumspacingshallnotexceedthethicknessofthethinneroutsideplate
times0.75 ,nor305mm,whenintermittentweldsareprovidedalongtheedgesofthecomponentsor
when fasteners are provided on all gage lines at each section. When fasteners are staggered, the maximum
spacingoneachgagelineshallnotexceedthethicknessofthethinneroutsideplatetimes1.12 nor460
mm.
Open sides of compression members built up from plates or shapes shall be provided with continuous cover
platesperforatedwithasuccessionofaccessholes.Theunsupportedwidthofsuchplatesataccessholes,as
defined in Section 10.2.4, is assumed to contribute to the available strength provided the following
requirementsaremet:
6507
Part6
StructuralDesign
ThewidththicknessratioshallconformtothelimitationsofSection10.2.4.
Theratiooflength(indirectionofstress)towidthofholeshallnotexceedtwo.
The clear distance between holes in the direction of stress shall be not less than the transverse distance
betweennearestlinesofconnectingfastenersorwelds.
Theperipheryoftheholesatallpointsshallhaveaminimumradiusof38mm.
Asanalternativetoperforatedcoverplates,lacingwithtieplatesispermittedateachendandatintermediate
points if the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates shall be as near the ends as practicable. In members providing
available strength, the end tie plates shall have a length of not less than the distance between the lines of
fasteners or welds connecting them to the components of the member. Intermediate tie plates shall have a
lengthnotlessthanonehalfofthisdistance.Thethicknessoftieplatesshallbenotlessthanonefiftiethofthe
distance between lines of welds or fasteners connecting them to the segments of the members. In welded
construction,theweldingoneachlineconnectingatieplateshalltotalnotlessthanonethirdthelengthofthe
plate. In bolted construction, the spacing in the direction of stress in tie plates shall be not more than six
diametersandthetieplatesshallbeconnectedtoeachsegmentbyatleastthreefasteners.
Lacing,includingflatbars,angles,channels,orothershapesemployedaslacing,shallbesospacedthattheL/r
ratio of the flange included between their connections shall not exceed threefourths times the governing
slenderness ratio for the member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to provide a shearing strength
normaltotheaxisofthememberequalto2percentoftheavailablecompressivestrengthofthemember.The
L/r ratio for lacing bars arranged in single systemsshall not exceed 140. For double lacing this ratio shall not
exceed200.Doublelacingbarsshallbejoinedattheintersections.Forlacingbarsincompression,Lispermitted
to be taken as the unsupported length of the lacing bar between welds or fasteners connecting it to the
componentsofthebuiltupmemberforsinglelacing,and70percentofthatdistancefordoublelacing.
Foradditionalspacingrequirements,seeSection10.10.3.5.
10.5.7 MemberswithSlenderElements
Thissectionappliestocompressionmemberswithslendersections,asdefinedinSection10.2.4foruniformly
compressedelements.
Thenominalcompressivestrength,Pn,shallbedeterminedbasedonthelimitstatesofflexural,torsionaland
flexuraltorsionalbuckling.
Pn=FcrAg
a) When
4.71
0.44
(or
0.658
m) When
(10.5.7.1)
(10.5.7.2)
4.71
0.44
(or
0.877
(10.5.7.3)
Where
Fe = elastic critical buckling stress, calculated using Equations 10.5.3.4 and 10.5.4.4 for doubly symmetric
members, Equations 10.5.3.4 and 10.5.4.5 for singly symmetric members, and Equation 10.5.4.6 for
unsymmetricmembers,exceptforsingleangleswhereFeiscalculatedusingEquation10.5.3.4.
Q = 1.0 for members with compact and noncompact sections, as defined in Section 10.2.4, for uniformly
compressedelements
= Qs Qa for members with slenderelement sections, as defined in Section 10.2.4, for uniformly compressed
elements.
10.5.7.1 SlenderUnstiffenedElements,
ThereductionfactorQsforslenderunstiffenedelementsisdefinedasfollows:
Forflanges,angles,andplatesprojectingfromrolledcolumnsorothercompressionmembers:
When
0.56
6508
1.0
(10.5.7.4)
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
When0.56
1.415
When
1.03
0.74
(10.5.7.5)
1.03
0.69
(10.5.7.6)
Forflanges,angles,andplatesprojectingfrombuiltupcolumnsorothercompressionmembers:
0.64
When
1.0
(10.5.7.7)
When0.64
1.415
when
1.17
Where
1.17
0.65
(10.5.7.8)
0.90
2
(10.5.7.9)
,andshallnotbetakenlessthan0.35norgreaterthan0.76forcalculationpurposes.
Forsingleangles
When
0.45
When0.45
When
1.0
(10.5.7.10)
1.34
0.76
(10.5.7.11)
0.91
0.91
0.53
2

(10.5.7.12)
Where
b=fullwidthoflongestangleleg,mm
Forstemsoftees
When
0.75
1.0
(10.5.7.13)
When0.75
When
1.908
1.03
1.03
1.22
(10.5.7.14)
0.69
2

(10.5.7.15)
Where
b=widthofunstiffenedcompressionelement,asdefinedinSection10.2.4,mm
d=thefullnominaldepthoftee,mm
t=thicknessofelement,mm
6509
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.5.7.2 SlenderUnstiffenedElements,
Thereductionfactor,Qa,forslenderstiffenedelementsisdefinedasfollows:
(10.5.7.16)
A =totalcrosssectionalareaofmember,mm2
Aeff=summationoftheeffectiveareasofthecrosssectionbasedonthereducedeffectivewidth,
be,mm2
Thereducedeffectivewidth,be,isdeterminedasfollows:
1.49
Foruniformlycompressed slenderelements,with
, exceptflangesofsquareandrectangular
sectionsofuniformthickness:
1.92
0.34
(10.5.7.17)
Where
fistakenasFcrwithFcrcalculatedbasedonQ=1.0.
Forflangesofsquareandrectangularslenderelementsectionsofuniformthicknesswith
Where
1.92
0.38
1.40
(10.5.7.18)
Foraxiallyloadedcircularsections:
0.45
When0.11
0.038

2
3
(10.5.7.19)
Where
D=outsidediameter,mm
t=wallthickness,mm
10.6
DesignofMembersforFlexure
This section applies to members subject to simple bending about one principal axis. For simple bending, the
member is loaded in a plane parallel to a principal axis that passes through the shear center or is restrained
againsttwistingatloadpointsandsupports.
Thedesignflexuralstrength,
,andtheallowableflexuralstrength,
,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
a) ForallprovisionsinthisSection10.6
b=0.90(LRFD)b=1.67(ASD)
and the nominal flexural strength, Mn , shall be determined according to Sections 10.6.2
through10.6.12.
n) Theprovisionsinthischapterarebasedontheassumptionthatpointsofsupportforbeamsand
girdersarerestrainedagainstrotationabouttheirlongitudinalaxis.
6510
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Thefollowingtermsarecommontotheequationsinthischapterexceptwherenoted:
Cb = lateraltorsional buckling modification factor for nonuniform moment diagrams when
bothendsoftheunsupportedsegmentarebraced
2.5
12.5
3
3.0
(10.6.1.1)
Where
Mmax=absolutevalueofmaximummomentintheunbracedsegment,Nmm
MA =absolutevalueofmomentatquarterpointoftheunbracedsegment,Nmm
6511
Part6
StructuralDesign
MB =absolutevalueofmomentatcenterlineoftheunbracedsegment,Nmm
MC =absolutevalueofmomentatthreequarterpointoftheunbracedsegment,Nmm
Rm =crosssectionmonosymmetryparameter
=1.0,doublysymmetricmembers
=1.0,singlysymmetricmemberssubjectedtosinglecurvaturebending
0.5
,singlysymmetricmemberssubjectedtoreversecurvaturebending
Iy =momentofinertiaabouttheprincipalyaxis,mm4
Iyc = moment of inertia about yaxis referred to the compression flange, or if reverse
curvaturebending,referredtothesmallerflange,mm4
In singly symmetric members subjected to reverse curvature bending, the lateral torsional
buckling strength shall be checked for both flanges. The available flexural strength shall be
greaterthanorequaltothemaximumrequiredmomentcausingcompressionwithintheflange
underconsideration.
Cb is permitted to be conservatively taken as 1.0 for all cases. For cantilevers or overhangs
wherethefreeendisunbraced,Cb=1.0.
10.6.2 Doubly Symmetric Compact IShaped Members and Channels Bent about Their
MajorAxis
ThissectionappliestodoublysymmetricIshapedmembersandchannelsbentabout theirmajoraxis,having
compactwebsandcompactflangesasdefinedinSection10.2.4.
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of yielding
(plasticmoment)andlateraltorsionalbuckling.
10.6.2.1Yielding
Mn=Mp=FyZx
(10.6.2.1)
where
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthetypeofsteelbeingused,MPa
Zx=plasticsectionmodulusaboutthexaxis,mm3
10.6.2.2LateralTorsionalBuckling
a) WhenLbLp,thelimitstateoflateraltorsionalbucklingdoesnotapply.
o) WhenLp<LbLr
0.7
p)
(10.6.2.2)
WhenLb>Lr
(10.6.2.3)
Where
Lb=lengthbetweenpointsthatareeitherbracedagainstlateraldisplacementofcompressionflangeorbraced
againsttwistofthecrosssection,mm
1
0.078
(10.6.2.4)
andwhere
E=modulusofelasticityofsteel=200000MPa
J=torsionalconstant,mm4
Sx=elasticsectionmodulustakenaboutthexaxis,mm3
ThelimitinglengthsLpandLraredeterminedasfollows:
6512
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
1.76
1.95
(10.6.2.5)
0.7
6.76
0.7
(10.6.2.6)
where
(10.6.2.7)
and
ForadoublysymmetricIshape:c=1
Forachannel:
(10.6.2.8a)
(10.6.2.8b)
Where
ho=distancebetweentheflangecentroids,mm
10.6.3 Doubly Symmetric IShaped Members with Compact Webs and Noncompact or
SlenderFlangesBentaboutTheirMajorAxis
ThissectionappliestodoublysymmetricIshapedmembersbentabouttheirmajoraxishavingcompactwebs
andnoncompactorslenderflangesasdefinedinSection10.2.4.
The nominal flexural strength, Mn , shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of lateral
torsionalbucklingandcompressionflangelocalbuckling.
Forlateraltorsionalbuckling,theprovisionsofSection10.6.2.2shallapply.
10.6.3.2CompressionFlangeLocalBuckling
a) Forsectionswithnoncompactflanges
0.7
(10.6.3.1)
q) Forsectionswithslenderflanges
0.9
(10.6.3.2)
Where
2
isthelimitingslendernessforacompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
isthelimitingslendernessforanoncompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
andshallnotbetakenlessthan0.35norgreaterthan0.76forcalculationpurposes
10.6.4 Other IShaped Members with Compact or Noncompact Webs Bent about Their
MajorAxis
Thissectionappliesto:(a)doublysymmetricIshapedmembersbentabouttheirmajoraxiswithnoncompact
webs; and (b) singly symmetric Ishaped members with webs attached to the midwidth of the flanges, bent
abouttheirmajoraxis,withcompactornoncompactwebs,asdefinedinSectionB4.
6513
Part6
StructuralDesign
The nominal flexural strength, Mn , shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of
compression flange yielding, lateraltorsional buckling, compression flange local buckling and tension flange
yielding.
10.6.4.1CompressionFlangeYielding
(10.6.4.1)
r) WhenLp<LbLr
(10.6.4.2)
s)
WhenLb>Lr
(10.6.4.3)
Where
(10.6.4.4)
1
For
0.078
(10.6.4.5)
0.23,Jshallbetakenaszero.
Thestress,FL,isdeterminedasfollows:
For
0.7
0.7
For
(10.6.4.6a)
0.7
(10.6.4.6b)
0.5
Thelimitinglaterallyunbracedlengthforthelimitstateofyielding,
1.1
is,
(10.6.4.7)
Thelimitingunbracedlengthforthelimitstateofinelasticlateraltorsionalbuckling,Lr,is
1.95
6.76
(10.6.4.8)
Thewebplastificationfactor,Rpc,isdeterminedasfollows:
For
For
(10.6.4.9a)
6514
(10.6.4.9b)
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Where
1.6
elasticsectionmodulusreferredtotensionandcompressionflanges,respectively,mm3
limitingslendernessforacompactweb,Table10.2.4.1
limitingslendernessforanoncompactweb,Table10.2.4.1
Theeffectiveradiusofgyrationforlateraltorsionalbuckling,rt,isdeterminedasfollows:
ForIshapeswitharectangularcompressionflange:
1
6
12
(10.6.4.10)
Where
(10.6.4.11)
=compressionflangewidth,mm
=compressionflangethickness,mm
ForIshapeswithchannelcapsorcoverplatesattachedtothecompressionflange:
rt = radius of gyration of the flange components in flexural compression plus onethird of the web area in
compressionduetoapplicationofmajoraxisbendingmomentalone,mm
aw=theratiooftwotimesthewebareaincompressionduetoapplicationofmajoraxisbendingmomentalone
totheareaofthecompressionflangecomponents.
10.6.4.1 CompressionFlangeLocalBuckling
a) Forsectionswithcompactflanges,thelimitstateoflocalbucklingdoesnotapply.
t) Forsectionswithnoncompactflanges
(10.6.4.12)
u) Forsectionswithslenderflanges
0.9
(10.6.4.13)
Where
isdefinedinEquations10.6.4.6aand10.6.4.6b
isthewebplastificationfactor,determinedbyEquations10.6.4.9
limitingslendernessforacompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
limitingslendernessforanoncompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
10.6.4.4TensionFlangeYielding
a) WhenSxtSxc,thelimitstateoftensionflangeyieldingdoesnotapply.
v) WhenSxt<Sxc
(10.6.4.14)
Where
6515
Part6
StructuralDesign
The web plastification factor corresponding to the tension flange yielding limit state, Rpt , is determined as
follows:
For
For
(10.6.4.15a)
(10.6.4.15b)
Where
,thelimitingslendernessforacompactweb,definedinTable10.2.4.1
,thelimitingslendernessforanoncompactweb,definedinTable10.2.4.1
10.6.5 DoublySymmetricandSinglySymmetricIShapedMemberswithSlenderWebs
BentaboutTheirMajorAxis
ThissectionappliestodoublysymmetricandsinglysymmetricIshapedmemberswithslenderwebsattachedto
themidwidthoftheflanges,bentabouttheirmajoraxis,asdefinedinSection10.2.4.
The nominal flexural strength, Mn , shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of
compression flange yielding, lateraltorsional buckling, compression flange local buckling and tension flange
yielding.
10.6.5.1CompressionFlangeYielding
(10.6.5.1)
(10.6.5.2)
WhenLp<LbLr
w)
0.3
x)
(10.6.5.3)
WhenLb>Lr
(10.6.5.4)
where
LpisdefinedbyEquation10.6.4.7
(10.6.5.5)
0.7
Rpgisthebendingstrengthreductionfactor:
(10.6.5.6)
1
1200
300
5.7
1.0
awisdefinedbyEquation10.6.4.11butshallnotexceed10and
rtistheeffectiveradiusofgyrationforlateralbucklingasdefinedinSection10.6.4.
6516
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.6.5.3CompressionFlangeLocalBuckling
(10.6.5.7)
a) Forsectionswithcompactflanges,thelimitstateofcompressionflangelocalbucklingdoesnot
apply.
y) Forsectionswithnoncompactflanges
0.3
z)
(10.6.5.8)
Forsectionswithslenderflanges
0.9
(10.6.5.9)
2
Where
,thelimitingslendernessforacompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
,thelimitingslendernessforanoncompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
10.6.5.4TensionFlangeYielding
(a)WhenSxtSxc,thelimitstateoftensionflangeyieldingdoesnotapply.
(b)WhenSxt<Sxc
Mn=FySxt
(10.6.5.10)
10.6.6 IShapedMembersandChannelsBentaboutTheirMinorAxis
ThissectionappliestoIshapedmembersandchannelsbentabouttheirminoraxis.
Thenominalflexuralstrength,Mn,shallbethelowervalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofyielding(
plasticmoment)andflangelocalbuckling.
10.6.6.1 Yielding
Mn=Mp=FyZy1.6FySy
(10.6.6.1)
10.6.6.2 FlangeLocalBuckling
a) Forsectionswithcompactflangesthelimitstateofyieldingshallapply.
aa) Forsectionswithnoncompactflanges
0.7
(10.6.6.2)
bb) Forsectionswithslenderflanges
Mn=FcrSy
(10.6.6.3)
where
0.69
(10.6.6.4)
,thelimitingslendernessforacompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
,thelimitingslendernessforanoncompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
6517
Part6
StructuralDesign
Syforachannelshallbetakenastheminimumsectionmodulus
10.6.7 SquareandRectangularHSSandBoxShapedMembers
This section applies to square and rectangular HSS, and doubly symmetric boxshaped members bent about
either axis, having compact or noncompact webs and compact, noncompact or slender flanges as defined in
Section10.2.4.
Thenominalflexuralstrength,Mn,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofyielding
(plasticmoment),flangelocalbucklingandweblocalbucklingunderpureflexure.
10.6.7.1 Yielding
Mn=Mp=FyZ
(10.6.7.1)
Where
Z=plasticsectionmodulusabouttheaxisofbending,mm3
10.6.7.2 FlangeLocalBuckling
a) Forcompactsections,thelimitstateofflangelocalbucklingdoesnotapply.(b)Forsectionswith
noncompactflanges
(10.6.7.2)
3.57
4.0
cc) Forsectionswithslenderflanges
Mn=FySeff
(10.6.7.3)
where
Seffistheeffectivesectionmodulusdeterminedwiththeeffectivewidthofthecompressionflangetakenas:
1.92
(10.6.7.4)
0.38
10.6.7.3 WebLocalBuckling
a) Forcompactsections,thelimitstateofweblocalbucklingdoesnotapply.
dd) Forsectionswithnoncompactwebs
0.305
0.738
(10.6.7.5)
10.6.8 RoundHSS
ThissectionappliestoroundHSShavingD/tratiosoflessthan
The nominal flexural strength, Mn ,shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of yielding
(plasticmoment)andlocalbuckling.
10.6.8.1Yielding
Mn=Mp=FyZ
(10.6.8.1)
10.6.8.2LocalBuckling
a) Forcompactsections,thelimitstateofflangelocalbucklingdoesnotapply.(b)Fornoncompact
sections
0.021
6518
(10.6.8.2)
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
ee) Forsectionswithslenderwalls
Mn=FcrS
(10.6.8.3)
where
0.33
(10.6.8.4)
S=elasticsectionmodulus,mm3
10.6.9 TeesandDoubleAnglesLoadedinthePlaneofSymmetry
Thissectionappliestoteesanddoubleanglesloadedintheplaneofsymmetry.Thenominalflexuralstrength,
Mn,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofyielding(plasticmoment),lateraltorsional
bucklingandflangelocalbuckling.
10.6.9.1 Yielding
Mn=Mp
(10.6.9.1)
Mp=FyZx1.6Myforstemsintension
(10.6.9.2)
Myforstemsincompression
(10.6.9.3)
Where
10.6.9.2 LateralTorsionalBuckling
1
(10.6.9.4)
Where
(10.6.9.5)
2.3
The plus sign for B applies when the stem is in tension and the minus sign applies when the stem is in
compression.Ifthetipofthestemisincompressionanywherealongtheunbracedlength,thenegativevalueof
Bshallbeused.
10.6.9.3 FlangeLocalBucklingofTees
Mn=FcrSxc
(10.6.9.6)
Sxcistheelasticsectionmodulusreferredtothecompressionflange.
Fcrisdeterminedasfollows:
Forcompactsections,thelimitstateofflangelocalbucklingdoesnotapply.
Fornoncompactsections
(10.6.9.7)
1.19
0.50
Forslendersections
0.69
(10.6.9.8)
10.6.10
SingleAngle
Thissectionappliestosingleangleswithandwithoutcontinuouslateralrestraintalongtheirlength.
6519
Part6
StructuralDesign
Singleangleswithcontinuouslateraltorsionalrestraintalongthelengthshallbepermittedtobedesignedon
thebasisofgeometricaxis(x,y)bending.Singleangleswithoutcontinuouslateraltorsionalrestraintalongthe
lengthshallbedesignedusingtheprovisionsforprincipalaxisbendingexceptwheretheprovisionforbending
aboutageometricaxisispermitted.
Thenominalflexuralstrength,Mn,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofyielding
(plasticmoment),lateraltorsionalbucklingandleglocalbuckling.
10.6.10.1 Yielding
Mn=1.5My
(10.6.10.1)
where
My=yieldmomentabouttheaxisofbending,Nmm
Forsingleangleswithoutcontinuouslateraltorsionalrestraintalongthelength
WhenMeMy
0.92
0.17
(10.6.10.2)
WhenMe>My
(10.6.10.3)
1.92
1.17
1.5
Where
Me,theelasticlateraltorsionalbucklingmoment,isdeterminedasfollows:
Forbendingaboutoneofthegeometricaxesofanequalleganglewithnolateraltorsionalrestraint
Withmaximumcompressionatthetoe
(10.6.10.4a)
0.66
0.78
0.78
Withmaximumtensionatthetoe
(10.6.10.4b)
0.66
Myshallbetakenas0.80timestheyieldmomentcalculatedusingthegeometricsectionmodulus.
Forbendingaboutoneofthegeometricaxesofanequalleganglewithlateraltorsionalrestraintatthepointof
maximummomentonly
Meshallbetakenas1.25timesMecomputedusingEquation10.6.10.4aor10.6.10.4b.
Myshallbetakenastheyieldmomentcalculatedusingthegeometricsectionmodulus.
Forbendingaboutthemajorprincipalaxisofequallegangles:
0.46
(10.6.10.5)
Forbendingaboutthemajorprincipalaxisofunequallegangles:
4.9
(10.6.10.6)
0.052
Where
6520
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
CbiscomputedusingEquation10.6.1.1withamaximumvalueof1.5.
L=laterallyunbracedlengthofamember,mm
Iz=minorprincipalaxismomentofinertia,mm4
rz=radiusofgyrationfortheminorprincipalaxis,mm
t
=anglelegthickness,mm
=asectionpropertyforunequallegangles,positiveforshortlegsincompressionandnegativeforlonglegs
in compression. If the long leg is in compression anywhere along the unbraced length of the member, the
negativevalueofwshallbeused.
10.6.10.3 LegLocalBuckling
Thelimitstateofleglocalbucklingapplieswhenthetoeofthelegisincompression.
a) Forcompactsections,thelimitstateofleglocalbucklingdoesnotapply.
ff) Forsectionswithnoncompactlegs
(10.6.10.7)
2.43
1.72
Forsectionswithslenderlegs
(10.6.10.8)
Where
0.71
(10.6.10.9)
b=outsidewidthoflegincompression,mm
Sc=elasticsectionmodulustothetoeincompressionrelativetotheaxisofbending,mm3.Forbendingabout
one of the geometric axes of an equalleg angle with no lateraltorsional restraint, Sc shall be 0.80 of the
geometricaxissectionmodulus.
10.6.11
RectangularBarsandRounds
Thissectionappliestorectangularbarsbentabouteithergeometricaxisandrounds.
Thenominalflexuralstrength,Mn,shallbethelowervalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofyielding(
plasticmoment)andlateraltorsionalbuckling,asrequired.
10.6.11.1 Yielding
.
Forrectangularbarswith
bentabouttheirmajoraxis,rectangularbarsbentabouttheirminoraxis
androunds:
1.6
(10.6.11.1)
a) Forrectangularbarswith
1.52
0.274
gg) Forrectangularbarswith
bentabouttheirmajoraxis:
(10.6.11.2)
bentabouttheirmajoraxis:
(10.6.11.3)
Where
6521
Part6
StructuralDesign
1.9
(10.6.11.4)
t=widthofrectangularbarparalleltoaxisofbending,mm
d=depthofrectangularbar,mm
Lb=lengthbetweenpointsthatareeitherbracedagainstlateraldisplacementofthecompressionregionor
bracedagainsttwistofthecrosssection,mm
(c)Forroundsandrectangularbarsbentabouttheirminoraxis,thelimitstateoflateraltorsionalbucklingneed
notbeconsidered.
10.6.12
UnsymmetricalShapes
Thissectionappliestoallunsymmetricalshapes,exceptsingleangles.
Thenominalflexuralstrength,Mn ,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofyielding
(yieldmoment),lateraltorsionalbucklingandlocalbucklingwhere
(10.6.12.1)
Where
S=lowestelasticsectionmodulusrelativetotheaxisofbending,mm3
10.6.12.1Yielding
(10.6.12.2)
(10.6.12.3)
Where
Fcr=bucklingstressforthesectionasdeterminedbyanalysis,MPa
10.6.12.3LocalBuckling
(10.6.12.4)
Where
10.6.13
ProportionsofBeamsandGirders
10.6.13.1 Holereductions
This section applies to rolled or builtup shapes, and coverplated beams with holes, proportioned on the basis of
flexuralstrengthofthegrosssection.
InadditiontothelimitstatesspecifiedinothersectionsofthisChapter,thenominalflexuralstrength,Mn,shallbe
limitedaccordingtothelimitstateoftensileruptureofthetensionflange.
ForFuAfnYtFyAfg,thelimitstateoftensilerupturedoesnotapply.
ForFuAfn<YtFyAfg ,thenominalflexuralstrength,Mn,atthelocationoftheholesinthetensionflangeshallnotbe
takengreaterthan:
(10.6.13.1)
Where
Afg=grosstensionflangearea,calculatedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSection10.4.3.1,mm2
Afn=nettensionflangearea,calculatedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSection10.4.3.2,mm2
Yt=1.0forFy/Fu0.8
=1.1otherwise
6522
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.6.13.2 ProportioningLimitsforIShapedMembers
SinglysymmetricIshapedmembersshallsatisfythefollowinglimit:
0.1
(10.6.13.2)
0.9
Ishapedmemberswithslenderwebsshallalsosatisfythefollowinglimits:
For
1.5
(10.6.13.3)
11.7
For
1.5
0.42
(10.3.13.4)
Where
a=cleardistancebetweentransversestiffeners,mm
Inunstiffenedgirdersh/twshallnotexceed260.Theratioofthewebareatothecompressionflangeareashallnot
exceed10.
10.6.13.3 CoverPlates
Flangesofweldedbeamsorgirdersmaybevariedinthicknessorwidthbysplicingaseriesofplatesorbythe
useofcoverplates.
Thetotalcrosssectionalareaofcoverplatesofboltedgirdersshallnotexceed70percentofthetotalflange
area.
Highstrengthboltsorweldsconnectingflangetoweb,orcoverplatetoflange,shallbeproportionedtoresist
thetotalhorizontalshearresultingfromthebendingforcesonthegirder.Thelongitudinaldistributionofthese
boltsorintermittentweldsshallbeinproportiontotheintensityoftheshear.
However, the longitudinal spacing shall not exceed the maximum permitted for compression or tension
members in Section 10.5.6 or 10.4.4, respectively. Bolts or welds connecting flange to web shall also be
proportioned to transmit to the web any loads applied directly to the flange, unless provision is made to
transmitsuchloadsbydirectbearing.
Partiallengthcoverplatesshallbeextendedbeyondthetheoreticalcutoffpointandtheextendedportionshall
be attached to the beam or girder by highstrength bolts in a slipcritical connection or fillet welds. The
attachmentshallbeadequate,at theapplicablestrengthgiveninSections10.10.2.2,10.10.3.8,or10.2.3.9to
developthecoverplatesportionoftheflexuralstrengthinthebeamorgirderatthetheoreticalcutoffpoint.
For welded cover plates, the welds connecting the cover plate termination to the beam or girder shall have
continuousweldsalongbothedgesofthecoverplateinthelengtha,definedbelow,andshallbeadequateto
developthecoverplatesportionofthestrengthofthebeamorgirderatthedistanceafromtheendofthe
coverplate.
Whenthereisacontinuousweldequaltoorlargerthanthreefourthsoftheplatethicknessacrosstheendof
theplate
(10.6.13.5)
Where
w=widthofcoverplate,mm.
Whenthereisacontinuousweldsmallerthanthreefourthsoftheplatethicknessacrosstheendoftheplate
1.5
(10.6.13.6)
Whenthereisnoweldacrosstheendoftheplate
(10.6.13.7)
6523
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.6.13.4 BuiltUpBeams
Where two or more beams or channels are used sidebyside to form a flexural member, they shall be
connectedtogetherincompliancewithSection10.5.6.2.Whenconcentratedloadsarecarriedfromonebeam
toanother,ordistributedbetweenthebeams,diaphragmshavingsufficientstiffnesstodistributetheloadshall
beweldedorboltedbetweenthebeams.
10.7
DesignofMembersforShear
Thissectionaddresseswebsofsinglyordoublysymmetricmemberssubjecttoshearintheplaneoftheweb,
singleanglesandHSSsections,andshearintheweakdirectionofsinglyordoublysymmetricshapes.
Twomethodsofcalculatingshearstrengtharepresentedbelow.ThemethodpresentedinSection10.7.2does
not utilize the post buckling strength of the member (tension field action). The method presented in Section
10.7.3utilizestensionfieldaction.
andtheallowableshearstrength, ,shallbedeterminedasfollows.
Thedesignshearstrength,
ForallprovisionsinthissectionexceptSection10.7.2.1a:
1.67(ASD)
0.90(LRFD)
10.7.2 MemberswithUnstiffenedorStiffenedWebs
10.7.2.1 NominalShearStrength
Thissectionappliestowebsofsinglyordoublysymmetricmembersandchannelssubjecttoshearintheplane
oftheweb.
Thenominalshearstrength,Vn,ofunstiffenedorstiffenedwebs,accordingtothelimitstatesofshearyielding
andshearbuckling,is
0.6
(10.7.2.1)
ForwebsofrolledIshapedmemberswith
2.24
1.50(ASD)
1.00(LRFD)
And
1.0
(10.7.2.2)
Forwebsofallotherdoublysymmetricshapesandsinglysymmetricshapesandchannels,exceptroundHSS,
thewebshearcoefficient,Cv,isdeterminedasfollows:
For
1.10
1.0
For1.10
(10.7.2.3)
1.37
1.10
For
1.37
1.51
(10.7.2.4)
(10.7.2.5)
Where
Aw=theoveralldepthtimesthewebthickness,dtw,mm2
Thewebplatebucklingcoefficient,kv,isdeterminedasfollows:
260,
5exceptforthestemofteeshapeswherekv=1.2.
Forunstiffenedwebswith
Forstiffenedwebs,
6524
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
5when
3.0or
Where
a=cleardistancebetweentransversestiffeners,mm
h=forrolledshapes,thecleardistancebetweenflangeslessthefilletorcornerradii,mm
=forbuiltupweldedsections,thecleardistancebetweenflanges,mm
=forbuiltupboltedsections,thedistancebetweenfastenerlines,mm
=fortees,theoveralldepth,mm.
10.7.2.2 TransverseStiffeners
Transversestiffenersarenotrequiredwhere
2.46 ,orwheretherequiredshearstrengthisless
thanorequaltotheavailableshearstrengthprovidedinaccordancewithSection10.7.2.1forkv=5.
Transverse stiffeners used to develop the available web shear strength, as provided in Section 10.7.2.1, shall
haveamomentofinertiaaboutanaxisinthewebcenterforstiffenerpairsoraboutthefaceincontactwiththe
,where
webplateforsinglestiffeners,whichshallnotbelessthan
2.5
0.5
(10.7.2.6)
Transversestiffenersarepermittedtobestoppedshortofthetensionflange,providedbearingisnotneededto
transmitaconcentratedloadorreaction.Theweldbywhichtransversestiffenersareattachedtothewebshall
beterminatednotlessthanfourtimesnormorethansixtimesthewebthicknessfromtheneartoetotheweb
toflangeweld.Whensinglestiffenersareused,theyshallbeattachedtothecompressionflange,ifitconsistsof
arectangularplate,toresistanyuplifttendencyduetotorsionintheflange.Whenlateralbracingisattachedto
a stiffener, or a pair of stiffeners, these, in turn, shall be connected to the compression flange to transmit 1
percentofthetotalflangeforce,unlesstheflangeiscomposedonlyofangles.
Boltsconnectingstiffenerstothegirderwebshallbespacednotmorethan305mmoncenter.Ifintermittent
filletweldsareused,thecleardistancebetweenweldsshallnotbemorethan16timesthewebthicknessnor
morethan250mm.
10.7.3 TensionFieldAction
10.7.3.1 LimitsontheUseofTensionFieldAction
Considerationoftensionfieldactionispermittedforflangedmemberswhenthewebplateissupportedonallfour
sidesbyflangesorstiffeners.Considerationoftensionfieldactionisnotpermittedfor:
endpanelsinallmemberswithtransversestiffeners;
;
memberswhena/hexceeds3.0or 260
2
2.5; or
or
6.0
where
Afc=areaofcompressionflange,mm2
Aft=areaoftensionflange,mm2
bfc=widthofcompressionflange,mm
bft=widthoftensionflange,mm
Inthesecases,thenominalshearstrength,Vn,shallbedeterminedaccordingtotheprovisionsofSection10.7.2.
10.7.3.2 NominalShearStrengthwithTensionFieldAction
When tension field action is permitted according to Section 10.7.3.1, the nominal shear strength, Vn , with tension
fieldaction,accordingtothelimitstateoftensionfieldyielding,shallbe
For
1.10
6525
Part6
StructuralDesign
0.6
For
1.10
(10.7.3.1)
0.6
1.15 1
(10.7.3.2)
Where
kvandCvareasdefinedinSection10.7.2.1.
10.7.3.3 TransverseStiffeners
TransversestiffenerssubjecttotensionfieldactionshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.7.2.2andthefollowing
limitations:
0.15
18
0.56
(10.7.3.3)
Where
(b/t)st=thewidththicknessratioofthestiffener
Fyst =specifiedminimumyieldstressofthestiffenermaterial,MPa
Cv =coefficientdefinedinSection10.7.2.1
Ds =1.0forstiffenersinpairs
=1.8forsingleanglestiffeners
=2.4forsingleplatestiffeners
Vr =requiredshearstrengthatthelocationofthestiffener,N
Vc =availableshearstrength; , (LRFD)or (ASD)withVnasdefinedinSection10.7.3.2,N
10.7.4 SingleAngles
Thenominalshearstrength,Vn,ofasingleanglelegshallbedeterminedusingEquation10.7.2.1withCv=1.0,
Aw=btwhereb=widthofthelegresistingtheshearforce,mmandkv=1.2.
10.7.5 RectangularHSSandBoxMembers
Thenominalshearstrength,Vn ,ofrectangularHSSandboxmembersshallbedeterminedusingtheprovisions
ofSection 10.7.2.1 with Aw = 2ht whereh for the widthresistingthe shearforce shallbetakenas theclear
distancebetweentheflangeslesstheinsidecornerradiusoneachsideandtw=tandkv=5.Ifthecorner
radiusisnotknown,hshallbetakenasthecorrespondingoutsidedimensionminusthreetimesthethickness.
10.7.6 RoundHSS
Thenominalshearstrength,Vn,ofroundHSS,accordingtothelimitstatesof
shearyieldingandshearbuckling,is
/2
(10.7.6.1)
Where
shallbethelargerof
1.60
(10.7.6.2a)
and
6526
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
0.78
(10.7.6.2b)
butshallnotexceed0.6Fy
Ag=grossareaofsectionbasedondesignwallthickness,mm2
Lv=thedistancefrommaximumtozeroshearforce,mm
T=designwallthickness,equalto0.93timesthenominalwallthicknessforERWHSSandequaltothenominal
thicknessforSAWHSS,mm
10.7.7 WeakAxisShearinSinglyandDoublySymmetricShapes
Forsinglyanddoublysymmetricshapesloadedintheweakaxiswithouttorsion,thenominalshearstrength,Vn
,foreachshearresistingelementshallbedeterminedusingEquation10.7.2.1andSection10.7.2.1bwithAw=
bftfandkv=1.2.
10.7.8 BeamsandgirderswithWebOpenings
Theeffectofallwebopeningsonthenominalshearstrengthofsteelandcompositebeamsshallbedetermined.
Adequate reinforcement shall be provided when the required strength exceeds the available strength of the
memberattheopening.
10.8
DesignofMembersforCombinedForcesandTorsion
This section addresses members subject to axial force and flexure about one or both axes, with or without
torsion,andtomemberssubjecttotorsiononly.
10.8.1 DoublyandSinglySymmetricMembersSubjecttoFlexureandAxialForce
10.8.1.1 DoublyandSinglySymmetricMembersinFlexureandCompression
The interaction of flexure and compression indoubly symmetricmembers and singlysymmetric members for
which0.1(Iyc/Iy)0.9,thatareconstrainedtobendaboutageometricaxis(xand/ory)shallbelimitedby
Equations 10.8.1.1a and 10.8.1.1b, where Iyc is the moment of inertia about the yaxis referred to the
compressionflange,mm4.
For
0.2
8
9
For
(10.8.1.1a)
1.0
0.2
2
(10.8.1.1b)
1.0
Where
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrength,N
Pc=availableaxialcompressivestrength,N
Mr=requiredflexuralstrength,Nmm
Mc=availableflexuralstrength,Nmm
x
=subscriptrelatingsymboltostrongaxisbending
=subscriptrelatingsymboltoweakaxisbending
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
6527
Part6
StructuralDesign
Pc=cPn=designaxialcompressivestrength,determinedinaccordancewithSection10.5,N
Mr=requiredflexuralstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm
Mc=bMn=designflexuralstrengthdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
c=resistancefactorforcompression=0.90
b=resistancefactorforflexure=0.90
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
Pc=Pn/c=allowableaxialcompressivestrength,determinedinaccordancewithSection10.5,N
Mr=requiredflexuralstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,Nmm
Mc=Mn/b=allowableflexuralstrengthdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
c=safetyfactorforcompression=1.67
b=safetyfactorforflexure=1.67
10.8.1.2 DoublyandSinglySymmetricMembersinFlexureandTension
The interaction of flexure and tension in doubly symmetric members and singly symmetric members
constrainedtobendaboutageometricaxis(xand/ory)shallbelimitedbyEquations10.8.1.1aand10.8.1.1b,
Where
Pr=requiredtensilestrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
Pc=tPn=designtensilestrength,determinedinaccordancewithSection10.4.2,N
Mc=bMn=designflexuralstrengthdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
t=resistancefactorfortension(seeSection10.4.2)
For doubly symmetric members, Cb in Section 10.6 may be increased by 1
for axial tension that acts
concurrentlywithflexure,
Where
Pr=requiredtensilestrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
Pc=Pn/t=allowabletensilestrength,determinedinaccordancewithSection10.4.2,N
Mc=Mn/b=allowableflexuralstrengthdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
t=safetyfactorfortension(seeSection10.4.2)
b=safetyfactorforflexure=1.67
Fordoublysymmetricmembers,CbinSection10.6maybeincreasedby 1
foraxialtensionthatacts
concurrentlywithflexure
Where
AmoredetailedanalysisoftheinteractionofflexureandtensionispermittedinlieuofEquations10.8.1.1aand
10.8.1.1b.
10.8.1.3 DoublySymmetricMembersinSingleAxisFlexureandCompression
6528
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
For doubly symmetric members in flexure and compression with moments primarily in one plane, it is
permissible to consider the two independent limit states, inplane instability and outofplane buckling or
flexuraltorsionalbuckling,separatelyinlieuofthecombinedapproachprovidedinSection10.8.1.1.
a) Forthelimitstateofinplaneinstability,Equations10.8.1.1shallbeusedwithPc,Mr,andMc
determinedintheplaneofbending.
hh) Forthelimitstateofoutofplanebuckling
(10.8.1.2)
1.0
Where
=availablecompressivestrengthoutoftheplaneofbending,N
=availableflexuraltorsionalstrengthforstrongaxisflexuredeterminedfromSection10.6,Nmm
Ifbendingoccursonlyabouttheweakaxis,themomentratioinEquation10.8.1.2shallbeneglected.
For members with significant biaxial moments (Mr/Mc 0.05 in both directions), the provisions of Section
10.8.1.1shallbefollowed.
10.8.2 UnsymmetricandOtherMembersSubjecttoFlexureandAxialForce
ThissectionaddressestheinteractionofflexureandaxialstressforshapesnotcoveredinSection10.8.1.Itis
permittedtousetheprovisionsofthisSectionforanyshapeinlieuoftheprovisionsofSection10.8.1.
(10.8.2.1)
1.0
Where
fa =requiredaxialstressatthepointofconsideration,MPa
Fa =availableaxialstressatthepointofconsideration,MPa
fbw,fbz=requiredflexuralstressatthepointofconsideration,MPa
Fbw,Fbz=availableflexuralstressatthepointofconsideration,MPa
w =subscriptrelatingsymboltomajorprincipalaxisbending
z
=subscriptrelatingsymboltominorprincipalaxisbending
fa =requiredaxialstressusingLRFDloadcombinations,MPa
Fa =cFcr=designaxialstress,determinedinaccordancewithSection10.5forcompressionorSection10.4.2
fortension,MPa
fbw,fbz=requiredflexuralstressatthespecificlocationinthecrosssectionusingLRFDloadcombinations,MPa
,
design flexural stress determined in accordance with Section 10.6, MPa. Use the section
modulusforthespecificlocationinthecrosssectionandconsiderthesignofthestress.
c =resistancefactorforcompression=0.90
t =resistancefactorfortension(Section10.4.2)
b =resistancefactorforflexure=0.90
fa=requiredaxialstressusingASDloadcombinations,MPa
=allowableaxialstressdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.5forcompression,orSection10.4.2
fortension,MPa
fbw,fbz=requiredflexuralstressatthespecificlocationinthecrosssectionusingASDloadcombinations,MPa
,
allowable flexural stress determined in accordance with Section 10.6, MPa. Use the section
modulusforthespecificlocationinthecrosssectionandconsiderthesignofthestress.
c =safetyfactorforcompression=1.67
6529
Part6
StructuralDesign
t =safetyfactorfortension(Section10.4.2)
b =safetyfactorforflexure=1.67
Equation10.8.2.1shallbeevaluatedusing theprincipal bending axes by considering thesense of the flexural
stressesatthecriticalpointsofthecrosssection.Theflexuraltermsareeitheraddedtoorsubtractedfromthe
axialtermasappropriate.Whentheaxialforceiscompression,secondordereffectsshallbeincludedaccording
totheprovisionsofSection10.3.
AmoredetailedanalysisoftheinteractionofflexureandtensionispermittedinlieuofEquation10.8.2.1.
10.8.3 Members under Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or Axial
Force
10.8.3.1 TorsionalStrengthofRoundandRectangularHSS
Thedesign torsional strength,
andthe allowable torsionalstrength,
HSSshallbedeterminedasfollows:
0.90(LRFD)
, forround andrectangular
1.67(ASD)
Thenominaltorsionalstrength,Tn,accordingtothelimitstatesoftorsionalyieldingandtorsionalbucklingis:
(10.8.3.1)
Where
CistheHSStorsionalconstant
Fcrshallbedeterminedasfollows:
ForroundHSS,Fcrshallbethelargerof
1.23
(10.8.3.2a)
and
0.60
(10.8.3.2b)
butshallnotexceed0.6Fy,
where
L=lengthofthemember,mm
ForrectangularHSS
For
2.45

0.6
For2.45
For3.07
(10.8.3.3)
3.07
0.6
2.45
260
0.458
(10.8.3.4)
(10.8.3.5)
10.8.3.2 HSSSubjecttoCombinedTorsion,Shear,FlexureandAxialForce
Whentherequiredtorsionalstrength,Tr,islessthanorequalto20percentoftheavailabletorsionalstrength,
Tc,theinteractionoftorsion,shear,flexureand/oraxialforceforHSSshallbedeterminedbySection10.8.1and
thetorsionaleffectsshallbeneglected.WhenTrexceeds20percentofTc,theinteractionoftorsion,shear,
flexureand/oraxialforceshallbelimitedby
6530
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
(10.8.3.6)
1.0
Where
Pr=requiredaxialstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
Pc=
,designtensileorcompressivestrengthinaccordancewithSection10.4or10.5,N
Mc=
,designflexuralstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
Vr=requiredshearstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
Vc=
,designshearstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.7,N
Tr=requiredtorsionalstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm
Tc=
,designtorsionalstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.8.3.1,Nmm
Pr=requiredaxialstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
Pc=Pn/,allowabletensileorcompressivestrengthinaccordancewithSection10.4or10.5,N
Mr =requiredflexuralstrengthusingASDloadcombinationsdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.2.5,N
mm
Mc=Mn/ ,allowableflexuralstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
Vr=requiredshearstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
Vc=Vn/ ,allowableshearstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.7,N
Tr=requiredtorsionalstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,Nmm
Tc=Tn/ ,allowabletorsionalstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.8.3.1,Nmm
10.8.3.3StrengthofNonHSSMembersunderTorsionandCombinedStress
,andtheallowabletorsionalstrength, ,fornonHSSmembersshallbe
Thedesigntorsionalstrength,
the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of yielding under normal stress, shear yielding under
shearstress,orbuckling,determinedasfollows:
=0.90(LRFD)
=1.67(ASD)
a) Forthelimitstateofyieldingundernormalstress
Fn=Fy
(10.8.3.7)
ii) Forthelimitstateofshearyieldingundershearstress
Fn=0.6Fy
(10.8.3.8)
jj) Forthelimitstateofbuckling
Fn=Fcr
(10.8.3.9)
where
Someconstrainedlocalyieldingispermittedadjacenttoareasthatremainelastic.
10.9 EVALUATIONOFEXISTINGSTRUCTURES
Thissectionappliestotheevaluationofthestrengthandstiffnessunderstaticvertical(gravity)loadsofexisting
structuresbystructuralanalysis,byloadtests,orbyacombination of structuralanalysisand load tests when
specifiedbytheengineerofrecordorinthecontractdocuments.Forsuchevaluation,thesteelgradesarenot
limited to those listedinSection10.1.3.1.Thissectiondoesnotaddressloadtestingfortheeffects ofseismic
loadsormovingloads(vibrations).
10.9.1 GENERALPROVISIONS
These provisions shall be applicable when the evaluation of an existing steel structure is specified for (a)
verificationof a specificset of design loadings or(b)determinationoftheavailablestrengthofaloadresisting
6531
Part6
StructuralDesign
member or system. The evaluation shall be performed by structural analysis (Section 10.9.3), by load tests
(Section 10.9.4), or by a combination of structural analysis and load tests, as specified in the contract
documents.Where load tests are used, the engineerofrecordshallfirstanalyzethestructure,prepareatesting
plan,anddevelopawritten procedure to prevent excessive permanent deformation or catastrophic collapse
duringtesting.
10.9.2 MATERIALPROPERTIES
Determinationof Required Tests: The engineer of record shall determine the specific tests that are required
fromSection10.9.2.2through10.9.2.6andspecifythelocationswheretheyarerequired.Whereavailable,the
useofapplicableprojectrecordsshallbepermittedtoreduceoreliminatetheneedfortesting.
10.9.2.1 TensileProperties
Tensilepropertiesofmembersshallbe consideredin evaluation by structuralanalysis (Section10.9.3)orload

tests (Section 10.9.4). Such properties shall include the yield stress, tensile strength and percent elongation.
Whereavailable,certified mill test reports or certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or a testing
laboratory in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M or A568/A568M, as applicable, shall be permitted for this
purpose. Otherwise, tensile tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM A370 from samples cut from
componentsofthestructure.
10.9.2.2 ChemicalComposition
Whereweldingis anticipatedfor repairor modificationof existing structures,thechemicalcompositionofthe

steelshallbedeterminedforuseinpreparingaweldingprocedurespecification(WPS).Whereavailable,results
from certified mill test reports or certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or a testing laboratory in
accordancewithASTMproceduresshallbepermittedforthispurpose.Otherwise,analysesshallbeconductedin
accordancewithASTMA751fromthesamplesusedtodeterminetensileproperties,orfromsamplestakenfrom
thesamelocations.
10.9.2.3 BaseMetalNotchToughness
Where welded tension splices in heavy shapes and plates as defined in Section 10.1.3.1d are criticalto the
performance of the structure, the Charpy VNotch toughness shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions of Section 10.1.3.1d. If thenotchtoughnesssodetermineddoesnotmeettheprovisionsofSection
10.1.3.1d,theengineerofrecordshalldetermineifremedialactionsarerequired.
10.9.2.4 WeldMetal
Wherestructuralperformanceisdependentonexistingweldedconnections,representativesamplesofweldmetal
shall be obtained. Chemical analysis and mechanical tests shall be made to characterize the weld metal. A
determinationshallbemadeofthemagnitudeandconsequencesofimperfections.IftherequirementsofAWS
D1.1arenotmet,theengineerofrecordshalldetermineifremedialactionsarerequired.
10.9.2.5 BoltsandRivets
Representative samples of bolts shall be inspected to determine markings and classifications. Where bolts
cannotbeproperlyidentifiedvisually,representativesamplesshallberemovedandtestedtodeterminetensile
strength in accordance with ASTMF606 or ASTMF606Mand the bolt classifiedaccordingly.Alternatively, the
assumptionthattheboltsareASTMA307shallbepermitted.RivetsshallbeassumedtobeASTMA502,Grade1,
unlessahighergradeisestablishedthroughdocumentationortesting.
10.9.3 EVALUATIONBYSTRUCTURALANALYSIS
10.9.3.1 DimensionalData
Alldimensionsusedintheevaluation,suchasspans,columnheights,memberspacings,bracinglocations,cross
sectiondimensions,thicknessesandconnection details, shall be determined from a fieldsurvey. Alternatively,
when available, it shall be permitted to determine such dimensions from applicable project design or shop
drawingswithfieldverificationofcriticalvalues.
6532
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.9.3.2 StrengthEvaluation
Forces (load effects) in membersand connectionsshall be determinedby structuralanalysisapplicabletothe
typeofstructureevaluated.Theloadeffectsshallbe determinedfortheloadsandfactoredloadcombinations
stipulatedinSection10.2.2.
TheavailablestrengthofmembersandconnectionsshallbedeterminedfromapplicableprovisionsofSections
10.2through10.19ofthisSpecification.
10.9.3.3 ServiceabilityEvaluation
Whererequired,thedeformationsatserviceloadsshallbecalculatedandreported.
10.9.4 EVALUATIONBYLOADTESTS
10.9.4.1 DeterminationofLoadRatingbyTesting
To determine the load rating of an existing floor or roof structure by testing, a test load shall be applied
incrementally in accordance with the engineer of records plan. The structure shall be visually inspected for
signsofdistressorimminentfailureateachloadlevel.Appropriatemeasuresshallbetakeniftheseoranyother
unusualconditionsareencountered.
Thetestedstrengthofthestructureshallbetakenasthemaximumappliedtestloadplustheinsitudeadload.
The live load ratingof a floorstructureshall bedetermined by setting the tested strength equal to 1.2D+
1.6L, where D isthe nominal dead load and L is the nominal live load rating for the structure.Thenominal
liveloadratingofthefloorstructureshallnotexceedthatwhichcanbecalculatedusingapplicableprovisionsof
thespecification.Forroofstructures,Lr , S, or R as definedin the Symbols, shall be substituted for L. More
severeloadcombinationsshallbeusedifrequiredbyspecificationsofChapter2ofPart6.
Periodic unloading shall be considered once the service load level is attained and after the onsetof inelastic
structuralbehaviorisidentifiedtodocumenttheamount of permanentset and the magnitudeof the inelastic
deformations. Deformations of the structure, such as member deflections, shall be monitored at critical
locations during the test, referenced to the initial position before loading. It shall be demonstrated, while
maintainingmaximumtestloadforonehourthatthedeformation ofthestructuredoesnotincreasebymore
than10percentabovethatatthe beginning of the holdingperiod.It is permissibleto repeatthe sequenceif
necessarytodemonstratecompliance.
Deformationsofthestructureshallalsoberecorded24hoursafterthetestloadingisremovedtodeterminethe
amountofpermanentset.Becausetheamountofacceptablepermanentdeformationdependsonthespecific
structure,no limit is specifiedforpermanentdeformationatmaximumloading.Whereitisnotfeasibleto load
test the entire structure, a segment or zone of not less than one complete bay, representative of the most
criticalconditions,shallbeselected.
10.9.4.2 ServiceabilityEvaluation
When load tests are prescribed, the structure shall be loaded incrementally to the service load level.
Deformations shall be monitored for a period of one hour. The structure shall then be unloaded and the
deformationrecorded.
10.9.5 EVALUATIONREPORT
Aftertheevaluationofanexistingstructurehasbeencompleted,theengineerofrecordshallprepareareport
documenting the evaluation. The report shall indicate whether the evaluation was performed by structural
analysis,byloadtestingorbyacombinationofstructuralanalysisandloadtesting.Furthermore,whentestingis
performed,thereportshallincludetheloadsandloadcombination used and the loaddeformationand time
deformationrelationshipsobserved.Allrelevantinformationobtainedfromdesigndrawings,milltestreportsand
auxiliarymaterialtestingshallalsobereported.Finally,thereportshallindicatewhetherthestructure,including
allmembersandconnections,isadequatetowithstandtheloadeffects.
10.10
Connections
Thissectionaddressesconnectingelements,connectors,andtheaffectedelementsoftheconnectedmembers
notsubjecttofatigueloads.
6533
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.10.1
GeneralProvisions
10.10.1.1 DesignBasis
Thedesignstrength, Rn,andtheallowablestrengthRn/,ofconnectionsshallbedeterminedinaccordance
withtheprovisionsofthissectionandtheprovisionsofSection10.2.
The required strength of the connections shall be determined by structural analysis for the specified design
loads,consistentwiththetypeofconstructionspecified,orshallbeaproportionoftherequiredstrengthofthe
connectedmemberswhensospecifiedherein.
Where the gravity axes of intersecting axially loaded members do not intersect at one point, the effects of
eccentricityshallbeconsidered.
10.10.1.2 SimpleConnection
Simple connections of beams, girders, or trusses shall be designed as flexible and are permitted to be
proportioned for the reaction shears only, except as otherwise indicated in the design documents. Flexible
beam connections shall accommodate end rotations of simple beams. Some inelastic, but selflimiting
deformationintheconnectionispermittedtoaccommodatetheendrotationofasimplebeam.
10.10.1.3 MomentConnection
End connections of restrainedbeams,girders,andtrusses shallbe designedfor thecombined effectofforces
resulting from moment and shear induced by the rigidity of the connections. Response criteria for moment
connectionsareprovidedinSection10.2.6.3.2.
10.10.1.4 CompressionMemberswithBearingJoints
a) Whencolumnsbearonbearingplatesorarefinishedtobearatsplices,thereshallbesufficient
connectorstoholdallpartssecurelyinplace.
b) Whencompressionmembersotherthancolumnsarefinishedtobear,thesplicematerialandits
connectorsshallbearrangedtoholdallpartsinlineandshallbeproportionedforeither(i)or(ii)
below.Itispermissibletousethelesssevereofthetwoconditions:
(i)Anaxialtensileforceof50percentoftherequiredcompressivestrengthofthemember;or
(ii)Themomentandshearresultingfromatransverseloadequalto2percentoftherequired
compressive strength of the member. The transverse load shall be applied at the location of
the splice exclusive of other loads that act on the member. The member shall be taken as
pinnedforthedeterminationoftheshearsandmomentsatthesplice.
10.10.1.5 SplicesinHeavySections
Whentensileforcesduetoappliedtensionorflexurearetobetransmittedthroughsplicesinheavysections,as
definedinSection10.1.3.1cand10.1.3.1d,bycompletejointpenetrationgroove(CJP)welds,materialnotch
toughnessrequirementsasgiveninSection10.1.3.1cand10.1.3.1d,weldaccessholedetailsasgiveninSection
10.10.1.6 and thermal cut surface preparation and inspection requirements as given in 10.1.3.2.2 shall apply.
The foregoing provision is not applicable to splices of elements of builtup shapes that are welded prior to
assemblingtheshape.
10.10.1.6 BeamCopesandWeldAccessHoles
All weld access holes required to facilitate welding operations shall have a length from the toe of the weld
preparation not lessthan 1 times the thickness of thematerial in whichthe hole is made.Theheightofthe
accessholeshallbe1 timesthethicknessofthematerialwiththeaccesshole,tw,butnotlessthan25mmnor
doesitneedtoexceed50mm.Theaccessholeshallbedetailedtoprovideroomforweldbackingasneeded.
Forsectionsthatarerolledorweldedpriortocutting,theedgeofthewebshallbeslopedorcurvedfromthe
surfaceoftheflangetothereentrantsurfaceoftheaccesshole.Inhotrolledshapes,andbuiltupshapeswith
CJPgrooveweldsthatjointhewebtoflange,allbeamcopesandweldaccessholesshallbefreeofnotchesand
sharpreentrantcorners.Noarcoftheweldaccessholeshallhavearadiuslessthan10mm.
In builtup shapes with fillet or partialjointpenetration groove welds that join the webtoflange, all beam
copes and weld access holes shall be free of notches and sharp reentrant corners. The access hole shall be
6534
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
permittedtoterminateperpendiculartotheflange,providingtheweldisterminatedatleastadistanceequalto
theweldsizeawayfromtheaccesshole.
For heavy sections as defined in 10.1.3.1c and 10.1.3.1d, the thermally cut surfaces of beam copes and weld
access holes shall be ground to bright metal and inspected by either magnetic particle or dye penetrant
methods prior to deposition of splice welds. If the curved transition portion of weld access holes and beam
copes are formed by predrilled or sawed holes, that portion of the access hole or cope need not be ground.
Weld access holes and beam copes in other shapes need not be ground nor inspected by dye penetrant or
magneticparticlemethods.
10.10.1.7 PlacementofWeldsandBolts
Groupsofweldsorboltsattheendsofanymemberwhichtransmitaxialforceintothatmembershallbesized
sothatthecenterofgravityofthegroupcoincideswiththecenterofgravityofthemember,unlessprovisionis
madefortheeccentricity.Theforegoingprovisionisnotapplicabletoendconnectionsofstaticallyloadedsingle
angle,doubleangle,andsimilarmembers.
10.10.1.8 BoltsinCombinationwithWelds
Boltsshallnotbeconsideredassharingtheloadincombinationwithwelds,exceptthatshearconnectionswith
any grade of bolts permitted by Section 10.1.3.3 installed in standard holes or short slots transverse to the
directionoftheloadarepermittedtobeconsideredtosharetheloadwithlongitudinallyloadedfilletwelds.In
such connections the available strength of the bolts shall not be taken as greater than 50 percent of the
availablestrengthofbearingtypeboltsintheconnection.
Inmakingweldedalterationstostructures,existingrivetsandhighstrengthboltstightenedtotherequirements
forslipcriticalconnectionsarepermittedtobeutilizedforcarryingloadspresentatthetimeofalterationand
theweldingneedonlyprovidetheadditionalrequiredstrength.
10.10.1.9 HighStrengthBoltsinCombinationwithRivets
In both new work and alterations, in connections designed as slipcritical connections in accordance with the
provisions of Section 10.10.3, highstrength bolts are permitted to be considered as sharing the load with
existingrivets.
10.10.1.10 LimitationsonBoltedandWeldedConnections
Pretensionedjoints,slipcriticaljointsorweldsshallbeusedforthefollowingconnections:
Columnsplicesinallmultistorystructuresover38minheight
Connections of all beams and girders to columns and any other beams and girders on which the bracing of
columnsisdependentinstructuresover38minheight
Inallstructurescarryingcranesofover50kNcapacity:rooftrusssplicesandconnectionsoftrussestocolumns,
columnsplices,columnbracing,kneebraces,andcranesupports
Connectionsforthesupportofmachineryandotherliveloadsthatproduceimpactorreversalofload
SnugtightenedjointsorjointswithASTMA307boltsshallbepermittedexceptwhereotherwisespecified.
10.10.2
Welds
All provisions of AWS D1.1apply under this Specification, with the exception that the provisions of the listed
sectionsapplyunderthisspecificationinlieuofthecitedAWSprovisionsasfollows:
Section10.10.1.6inlieuofAWSD1.1Section5.17.1
Section10.10.2.2.1inlieuofAWSD1.1Section2.3.2
Table10.10.2.2inlieuofAWSD1.1Table2.1
Section10.2.3.9andSection10.17inlieuofAWSD1.1Section2,PartC
Section10.13.2.2inlieuofAWSD1.1Sections5.15.4.3and5.15.4.4
10.10.2.1 GrooveWelds
6535
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.10.2.1.1EffectiveArea
The effective area of groove welds shall be considered as the length of the weld times the effective throat
thickness.
The effective throat thickness of a completejointpenetration (CJP) groove weld shall be the thickness of the
thinnerpartjoined.
Table10.10.2.1:EffectiveThroatofPartialJointPenetrationGrooveWelds
WeldingProcess
WeldingPositionF(flat),H
(horiz.),V(vert.),OH
GrooveType(AWS
D1.1,Figure3.3)
EffectiveThroat
All
JorUGroove
All
60 V
DepthofGroove
JorUGroove
(overhead)
ShieldedMetalArc(SMAW)
GasMetalArc(GMAW)
FluxCoredArc(FCAW)
SubmergedArc(SAW)
60 BevelorV
GasMetalArc(GMAW)
DepthofGroove
45 Bevel
DepthofGroove
450Bevel
DepthofGroove
F,H
45 Bevel
ShieldedMetalArc(SMAW)
All
GasMetalArc(GMAW)
V,OH
FluxCoredArc(FCAW)
Minus3mm
FluxCoredArc(FCAW)
Minus3mm
The effective throat thickness of a partialjointpenetration (PJP) groove weld shall be as shown in Table
10.10.2.1.
Theeffectiveweldsizeforflaregroovewelds,whenfilledflushtothesurfaceofaroundbar,a900bendina
formed section, or rectangular HSS shall be as shown in Table 10.10.2.2, unless other effective throats are
demonstratedbytests.TheeffectivesizeofflaregrooveweldsfilledlessthanflushshallbeasshowninTable
10.10.2.2,lessthegreatestperpendiculardimensionmeasuredfromalineflushtothebasemetalsurfacetothe
weldsurface.
TABLE10.10.2.2:EffectiveWeldSizesofFlareGrooveWelds
WeldingProcess
FlareBevelGroove[a]
FlareVGroove
GMAWandFCAWG
5/8R
3/4R
SMAWandFCAWS
SAW
5/16 R
5/8 R
5/16R
1/2R
[a]ForFlareBevelGroovewithR<10mmuseonlyreinforcingfilletweldonfilledflushjoint.GeneralNote:R=radius
ofjointsurface(canbeassumedtobe2tforHSS),mm
Larger effective throat thicknesses than those in Table 10.10.2.2 are permitted, provided the fabricator can
establishbyqualificationtheconsistentproductionofsuchlargereffectivethroatthicknesses.Qualificationshall
consistofsectioningtheweldnormaltoitsaxis,atmidlengthandterminalends.Suchsectioningshallbemade
onanumberofcombinationsofmaterialsizesrepresentativeoftherangetobeusedinthefabrication.
10.10.2.1.2Limitations
Theminimumeffectivethroatthicknessofapartialjointpenetrationgrooveweldshallnotbelessthanthesize
requiredtotransmitcalculatedforcesnorthesizeshowninTable10.10.2.3.Minimumweldsizeisdetermined
bythethinnerofthetwopartsjoined.
6536
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
TABLE10.10.2.3:MinimumEffectiveThroatThicknessofPartialJointPenetrationGrooveWelds
MaterialThicknessofThinnerPartJoined,mm
MinimumEffectiveThroatThickness,[a]mm
To6inclusive
Over6to13
Over13to19
Over19to38
Over38to57
10
Over57to150
13
[a]SeeTable10.10.2.1.
10.10.2.2 FilletWelds
Theeffectiveareaofafilletweldshallbetheeffectivelengthmultipliedbytheeffectivethroat.Theeffective
throat of a fillet weld shall be the shortest distance from the root to the face of the diagrammatic weld. An
increaseineffectivethroatispermittedifconsistentpenetrationbeyondtherootofthediagrammaticweldis
demonstratedbytestsusingtheproductionprocessandprocedurevariables.
Forfilletweldsinholesandslots,theeffectivelengthshallbethelengthofthecenterlineoftheweldalongthe
centeroftheplanethroughthethroat.Inthecaseofoverlappingfillets,theeffectiveareashallnotexceedthe
nominalcrosssectionalareaoftheholeorslot,intheplaneofthefayingsurface.
Theminimumsizeoffilletweldsshallbenotlessthanthesizerequiredtotransmitcalculatedforcesnorthesize
asshowninTable10.10.2.4.Theseprovisionsdonotapplytofilletweldreinforcementsofpartialorcomplete
jointpenetrationgroovewelds.
TABLE10.10.2.4:MinimumSizeofFilletWelds
MaterialThicknessofThinner
d
MinimumSizeofFillet
ld [a]
Over6to13
Over13to19
To6inclusive
[a]Legdimensionoffilletwelds.Singlepassweldsmustbeused.
Themaximumsizeoffilletweldsofconnectedpartsshallbe:
Alongedgesofmateriallessthan6mmthick,notgreaterthanthethicknessofthematerial.
Alongedgesofmaterial6mmormoreinthickness,notgreaterthanthethicknessofthematerialminus2mm,
unlesstheweldisespeciallydesignatedonthedrawingstobebuiltouttoobtainfullthroatthickness.Intheas
weldedcondition,thedistancebetweentheedgeofthebasemetalandthetoeoftheweldispermittedtobe
lessthan2mmprovidedtheweldsizeisclearlyverifiable.
Theminimumeffectivelengthoffilletweldsdesignedonthebasisofstrengthshallbenotlessthanfourtimes
the nominal size,or else thesizeofthe weldshall be considered not to exceed 1 /4ofits effective length.If
longitudinalfilletweldsareusedaloneinendconnectionsofflatbartensionmembers,thelengthofeachfillet
weldshallbenotlessthantheperpendiculardistancebetweenthem.Fortheeffectoflongitudinalfilletweld
lengthinendconnectionsupontheeffectiveareaoftheconnectedmember,seeSection10.4.3.3.
Forendloadedfilletweldswithalengthupto100timesthelegdimension,itispermittedtotaketheeffective
length equal to the actual length. When the length of the endloaded fillet weld exceeds 100 times the weld
size,theeffectivelengthshallbedeterminedbymultiplyingtheactuallengthbythereductionfactor,,
1.2
0.002
1.0
(10.10.2.1)
where
6537
Part6
StructuralDesign
=actuallengthofendloadedweld,mm
=weldlegsize,mm
Whenthelengthoftheweldexceeds300timesthelegsize,thevalueof shallbetakenas0.60.
Intermittentfilletweldsarepermittedtobeusedtotransfercalculatedstressacrossajointorfayingsurfaces
whentherequiredstrengthislessthanthatdevelopedbyacontinuousfilletweldofthesmallestpermittedsize,
andtojoincomponentsofbuiltupmembers.Theeffectivelengthofanysegmentofintermittentfilletwelding
shallbenotlessthanfourtimestheweldsize,withaminimumof38mm.
Inlapjoints,theminimumamountoflapshallbefivetimesthethicknessofthethinnerpartjoined,butnotless
than25mm.Lapjointsjoiningplatesorbarssubjectedtoaxialstressthatutilizetransversefilletweldsonlyshall
be fillet welded along the end of both lapped parts, except where the deflection of the lapped parts is
sufficientlyrestrainedtopreventopeningofthejointundermaximumloading.
Filletweldterminationsarepermittedtobestoppedshortorextendtotheendsorsidesofpartsorbeboxed
exceptaslimitedbythefollowing:
Forlapjointsinwhichoneconnectedpartextendsbeyondanedgeofanotherconnectedpartthatissubjectto
calculatedtensilestress,filletweldsshallterminatenotlessthanthesizeoftheweldfromthatedge.
Forconnectionswhereflexibilityoftheoutstandingelementsisrequired,whenendreturnsareused,thelength
ofthereturnshallnotexceedfourtimesthenominalsizeoftheweldnorhalfthewidthofthepart.
Fillet welds joining transverse stiffeners to plate girder webs 19 mm thick or less shall end not less than four
timesnormorethansixtimesthethicknessofthewebfromthewebtoeofthewebtoflangewelds,except
wheretheendsofstiffenersareweldedtotheflange.
Filletweldsthatoccuronoppositesidesofacommonplaneshallbeinterruptedatthecornercommontoboth
welds.
Filletweldsinholesorslotsarepermittedtobeusedtotransmitshearinlapjointsortopreventthebucklingor
separationoflappedpartsandtojoincomponentsofbuiltupmembers.Suchfilletweldsmayoverlap,subject
totheprovisionsofSection10.10.2.Filletweldsinholesorslotsarenottobeconsideredplugorslotwelds.
10.10.2.3 PlugandSlotWelds
Theeffectiveshearingareaofplugandslotweldsshallbeconsideredasthenominalcrosssectionalareaofthe
holeorslotintheplaneofthefayingsurface.
Plugorslotweldsarepermittedtobeusedtotransmitshearinlapjointsortopreventbucklingoflappedparts
andtojoincomponentpartsofbuiltupmembers.
Thediameteroftheholesforaplugweldshallnotbelessthanthethicknessofthepartcontainingitplus8mm,
roundedtothenextlargeroddevenmm,norgreaterthantheminimumdiameterplus3mmor2 timesthe
thicknessoftheweld.
Theminimumcentertocenterspacingofplugweldsshallbefourtimesthediameterofthehole.
Thelengthofslotforaslotweldshallnotexceed10timesthethicknessoftheweld.Thewidthoftheslotshall
benotlessthanthethicknessofthepartcontainingitplus8mmroundedtothenextlargeroddevenmm,nor
shallitbelargerthan2 timesthethicknessoftheweld.Theendsoftheslotshallbesemicircularorshallhave
thecornersroundedtoaradiusofnotlessthanthethicknessofthepartcontainingit,exceptthoseendswhich
extendtotheedgeofthepart.
Theminimumspacingoflinesofslotweldsinadirectiontransversetotheirlengthshallbefourtimesthewidth
oftheslot.Theminimumcentertocenterspacinginalongitudinaldirectiononanylineshallbetwotimesthe
lengthoftheslot.
Thethicknessofplugorslotweldsinmaterial16mmorlessinthicknessshallbeequaltothethicknessofthe
material.Inmaterialover16mmthick,thethicknessoftheweldshallbeatleastonehalfthethicknessofthe
materialbutnotlessthan16mm.
10.10.2.4 Strength
6538
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Thedesignstrength, Rnandtheallowablestrength,Rn/,ofweldsshallbethelowervalueof thebase

materialandtheweldmetalstrengthdeterminedaccordingtothelimitstatesoftensilerupture,shearrupture
oryieldingasfollows:
TABLE10.10.2.5:AvailableStrengthofWeldedJoints,N
LoadTypeandDirection
Pertine
Nominal
Effective
RelativetoWeldAxis
nt
Metal
and
Strength
(FBMor
Fw)
Area
(ABMorAw)mm2
RequiredFillerMetalStrength
[a][b]
Level
COMPLETEJOINTPENETRATIONGROOVEWELDS
Tension
Matchingfillermetalshallbeused.
Normaltoweldaxis
ForTandcornerjointswithbacking
Strengthofthejointiscontrolledbythebasemetal
leftinplace,notchtoughfillermetal
isrequired.SeeSection10.10.2.6.
Compression
Fillermetalwithastrengthlevel
Normaltoweldaxis
equaltooronestrengthlevelless
thanmatchingfillermetalis
permitted.
TensionorCompression
Tensionorcompressioninpartsjoinedparalleltoaweld
Paralleltoweldaxis
neednotbeconsideredindesignofweldsjoiningthe
equaltoorlessthanmatchingfiller
Shear
parts.
metalispermitted.
Matchingfillermetalshallbe
used.[c]
PARTIALJOINTPENETRATIONGROOVEWELDSINCLUDINGFLAREVEEGROOVEANDFLAREBEVELGROOVEWELDS
Tension
Normaltoweldaxis
=0.90
See
=0.80
See
CompressionColumnto
BasePlateandcolumn
Compressivestressneednotbeconsideredindesignof
splicesdesignedper
weldsjoiningtheparts.
10.10.1.4(a)
CompressionConnections
Base
ofmembersdesignedto
=0.90
See
10.10.4
Fy
=1.67
bearother
=0.80
0.60
See
thancolumnsasdescribed
Weld
=1.88
FEXX
10.10.2.1.1
notfinishedtobear
in10.10.1.4(b)
CompressionConnections
=0.90
See
=0.80
See
Tensionorcompressioninpartsjoinedparalleltoaweld
equaltoorlessthanmatchingfiller
Paralleltoweldaxis
neednotbeconsideredindesignofweldsjoiningthe
metalispermitted.
Shear
Base
Governedby10.10.4
=
0.60FEXX
See
6539
Part6
StructuralDesign
TABLE10.10.2.5(Contd..):AvailableStrengthofWeldedJoints,N
Load Type and Direction Relative to Weld
Axis
Pertinent
Metal
Nominal
Strength
and
Effective
Area
RequiredFillerMetal
StrengthLevel[a][b]
FILLETWELDSINCLUDINGFILLETSINHOLESANDSLOTSANDSKEWEDTJOINTS
Base
Shear
Governedby10.10.4
Weld
0..75
See
Fillermetalwithastrengthlevelequaltoor
10.10.2.2.1
lessthanmatchingfillermetalispermitted.
0.60
2.00
Tensionorcompressioninpartsjoinedparallel
Paralleltoweldaxis
toaweldneednotbeconsideredindesignof
weldsjoiningtheparts.
PLUGANDSLOTWELDS
ShearParalleltofaying
Base
surfaceontheeffective
Governedby10.10.4
=
0.60
Fillermetalwithastrengthlevelequaltoor
lessthanmatchingfillermetalispermitted.
FormatchingweldmetalseeAWSD1.1,Section3.3.
Fillermetalwithastrengthlevelonestrengthlevelgreaterthanmatchingispermitted.
Fillermetalswithastrengthlevellessthanmatchingmaybeusedforgrooveweldsbetweenthewebsandflangesofbuilt
up sections transferring shear loads, or in applications where high restraint is a concern. In these applications, the weld
jointshallbedetailedandtheweldshallbedesignedusingthethicknessofthematerialastheeffectivethroat,=0.80,=
1.88and0.60FEXXasthenominalstrength.
Forthebasemetal
(10.10.2.2)
Fortheweldmetal
(10.10.2.3)
Where
FBM=nominalstrengthofthebasemetalperunitarea,MPa
Fw=nominalstrengthoftheweldmetalperunitarea,MPa
ABM=crosssectionalareaofthebasemetal,mm2
Aw=effectiveareaoftheweld,mm2
Thevaluesof,,FBM,andFwandlimitationsthereonaregiveninTable10.10.2.5.
Alternatively,forfilletweldsloadedinplanethedesignstrength, Rnandtheallowablestrength,Rn/,of
weldsispermittedtobedeterminedasfollows:
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
Foralinearweldgrouploadedinplanethroughthecenterofgravity
(10.10.2.4)
where
0.60
1.0
0.50sin .
(10.10.2.5)
And
=electrodeclassificationnumber,MPa
=angleofloadingmeasuredfromtheweldlongitudinalaxis,degrees
=effectiveareaoftheweld,mm2
6540
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Forweldelementswithinaweldgroupthatareloadedinplaneandanalyzedusinganinstantaneouscenterof
rotation method, the components of the nominal strength, Rnx and Rny , are permitted to be determined as
follows:
(10.10.2.6)
where
Awi=effectiveareaofweldthroatofanyithweldelement,mm2
1.0
0.60
1.9
0.50sin .
.
0.9
(10.10.2.7)
(10.10.2.8)
Fwi=nominalstressinanyithweldelement,MPa
Fwix=xcomponentofstress,Fwi
Fwiy=ycomponentofstress,Fwi
p =i/m,ratioofelementideformationtoitsdeformationatmaximumstress
w =weldlegsize,mm
rcrit=distancefrominstantaneouscenterofrotationtoweldelementwithminimum /riratio,mm
I = deformation of weld elements at intermediate stress levels, linearly proportioned to the critical
deformationbasedondistancefromtheinstantaneouscenterofrotation,ri,mm=riu/rcrit
m=0.209(+2)0.32w,deformationofweldelementatmaximumstress,mm
u=1.087(+6)0.65w0.17w,deformationofweldelementatultimatestress(fracture),usuallyinelement
furthestfrominstantaneouscenterofrotation,mm
Forfilletweldgroupsconcentricallyloadedandconsistingofelementsthat
areorientedbothlongitudinallyandtransverselytothedirectionofappliedload,thecombinedstrength,Rn,of
thefilletweldgroupshallbedeterminedasthegreaterof
(10.10.2.9a)
or
0.85
1.5
(10.10.2.9b)
where
=thetotalnominalstrengthoflongitudinallyloadedfilletwelds,asdeterminedinaccordancewithTable
10.10.2.5,N
= the total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet welds, as determined in accordance with Table
10.10.2.5withoutthealternateinSection10.10.2.4(a),N
10.10.2.5 CombinationofWelds
Iftwoormoreofthegeneraltypesofwelds(groove,fillet,plug,slot)arecombinedinasinglejoint,thestrength
ofeachshallbeseparatelycomputedwithreferencetotheaxisofthegroupinordertodeterminethestrength
ofthecombination.
10.10.2.6 FillerMetalRequirements
Thechoiceofelectrodeforusewithcompletejointpenetrationgrooveweldssubjecttotensionnormaltothe
effectiveareashallcomplywiththerequirementsformatchingfillermetalsgiveninAWSD1.1.
FillermetalwithaspecifiedCharpyVNotch(CVN)toughnessof27.12Nm(27J)at4 0 Cshallbeusedinthe
followingjoints:
CompletejointpenetrationgrooveweldedTandcornerjointswithsteelbackingleftinplace,subjecttotension
normaltotheeffectivearea,unlessthejointsaredesignedusingthenominalstrengthandresistancefactoror
safetyfactorasapplicableforaPJPweld.
Completejointpenetration groove welded splices subject to tension normal to the effective area in heavy
sectionsasdefinedin10.1.3.1cand10.1.3.1d.
6541
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.10.2.7 MixedWeldMetal
WhenCharpyVNotchtoughnessisspecified,theprocessconsumablesforallweldmetal,tackwelds,rootpass
andsubsequentpassesdepositedinajointshallbecompatibletoensurenotchtoughcompositeweldmetal.
10.10.3
BoltsandThreadedParts
10.10.3.1 HighStrengthBolts
UseofhighstrengthboltsshallconformtotheprovisionsoftheSpecificationforStructuralJointsUsingASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts, hereafter referred to as the RCSC Specification, as approved by the Research Council on
StructuralConnections,exceptasotherwiseprovidedinthisSpecification.
Whenassembled,alljointsurfaces,includingthoseadjacenttothewashers,shallbefreeofscale,excepttight
millscale.AllASTMA325orA325MandA490orA490Mboltsshallbetightenedtoabolttensionnotlessthan
thatgiveninTable10.10.3.1,exceptasnotedbelow.Exceptaspermittedbelow,installationshallbeassuredby
anyofthefollowingmethods:turnofnutmethod,adirecttensionindicator,calibratedwrenchoralternative
designbolt.
Boltsarepermittedtobeinstalledtoonlythesnugtightconditionwhenusedin
bearingtypeconnections.
tensionorcombinedshearandtensionapplications,forASTMA325orA325Mboltsonly,wherelooseningor
fatigueduetovibrationorloadfluctuationsarenotdesignconsiderations.
TABLE10.10.3.1:MinimumBoltPretension,kN
BoltSize,mm
A325MBolts
A490MBolts
M16
91
114
M20
142
179
M22
176
221
M24
205
257
M27
267
334
Equal to0.70timestheminimumtensilestrengthofbolts,roundedofftonearestkN,asspecifiedinASTM
Thesnugtightconditionisdefinedasthetightnessattainedbyeitherafewimpactsofanimpactwrenchorthe
fulleffortofaworkerwithanordinaryspudwrenchthatbringstheconnectedpliesintofirmcontact.Boltsto
betightenedonlytothesnugtightconditionshallbeclearlyidentifiedonthedesignanderectiondrawings.
When ASTMA490 orA490Mbolts over25 mm in diameter are usedinslotted or oversized holes in external
plies,asinglehardenedwasherconformingtoASTMF436,exceptwith8mmminimumthickness,shallbeused
inlieuofthestandardwasher.
In slipcritical connections in which the direction of loading is toward an edge of a connected part, adequate
availablebearingstrengthshallbeprovidedbasedupontheapplicablerequirementsofSection10.10.3.10.
When bolt requirements cannot be provided by ASTM A325 and A325M, F1852, or A490 and A490M bolts
becauseofrequirementsforlengthsexceeding12diametersordiametersexceeding38mm,boltsorthreaded
rodsconformingtoASTMA354Gr.BC,A354Gr.BD,orA449arepermittedtobeusedinaccordancewiththe
provisionsforthreadedrodsinTable10.10.3.2.
WhenASTMA354Gr.BC,A354Gr.BD,orA449boltsandthreadedrodsareusedinslipcriticalconnections,the
bolt geometry including the head and nut(s) shall be equal to or (if larger in diameter) proportional to that
provided by ASTM A325 and A325M, or ASTM A490 and A490M bolts. Installation shall comply with all
applicable requirements of the RCSC Specification with modifications as required for the increased diameter
and/orlengthtoprovidethedesignpretension.
10.10.3.2 SizeandUseofHoles
The maximum sizes of holes for bolts are given in Table 10.10.3.3, except that larger holes, required for
toleranceonlocationofanchorrodsinconcretefoundations,arepermittedincolumnbasedetails.
Standardholesorshortslottedholestransversetothedirectionoftheloadshallbeprovidedinaccordancewith
the provisions of this specification, unless oversized holes, shortslotted holes parallel to the load or long
slotted holes are approved by the engineer of record. Finger shims up to 6 mm are permitted in slipcritical
6542
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
connections designed on the basis of standard holes without reducing the nominal shear strength of the
fastenertothatspecifiedforslottedholes.
Oversized holes are permitted in any or all plies of slipcritical connections, but they shall not be used in
bearingtypeconnections.Hardenedwashersshallbeinstalledoveroversizedholesinanouterply.
Shortslotted holes are permitted in any or all plies of slipcritical or bearingtype connections. The slots are
permittedwithoutregardtodirectionofloadinginslipcriticalconnections,butthelengthshallbenormalto
thedirectionoftheloadinbearingtypeconnections.Washersshallbeinstalledovershortslottedholesinan
outerply;whenhighstrengthboltsareused,suchwashersshallbehardened.
Longslotted holes are permitted in only one of the connected parts of either a slipcritical or bearingtype
connection at an individual faying surface. Long slotted holes are permitted without regard to direction of
loading in slipcritical connections, but shall be normal to the direction of load in bearingtype connections.
Where longslotted holes are used in an outer ply, plate washers, or a continuous bar with standard holes,
havingasizesufficienttocompletelycovertheslotafterinstallation,shallbeprovided.Inhighstrengthbolted
connections,suchplatewashersorcontinuousbarsshallbenotlessthan8mmthickandshallbeofstructural
gradematerial,butneednotbehardened.Ifhardenedwashersarerequiredforuseofhighstrengthbolts,the
hardenedwashersshallbeplacedovertheoutersurfaceoftheplatewasherorbar.
10.10.3.3 MinimumSpacing
The distance between centers of standard, oversized, or slotted holes, shall not be less than 2 times the
nominaldiameter,d,ofthefastener;adistanceof3dispreferred.
10.10.3.4 MinimumEdgeDistance
Thedistancefromthecenterofastandardholetoanedgeofaconnectedpartinanydirectionshallnotbeless
thaneithertheapplicablevaluefromTable10.10.3.4,orasrequiredinSection10.10.3.10.Thedistancefrom
thecenterofanoversizedorslottedholetoanedgeofaconnectedpartshallbenotlessthanthatrequiredfor
astandardholetoanedgeofaconnectedpartplustheapplicableincrementC2fromTable10.10.3.5.
TABLE10.10.3.2:NominalStressofFastenersandThreadedParts,MPa
DescriptionofFasteners
NominalTensile
Stress,Fnt,MPa
NominalShearStressinBearingType
Connections,Fnv,MPa
A307bolts
310[a][b]
165[b][c][f]
A325orA325Mbolts,whenthreads
620 [e]
330 [f]
620 [e]
414 [f]
780 [e]
414 [f]
780 [e]
520 [f]
arenotexcludedfromshearplanes
areexcludedfromshearplanes
arenotexcludedfromshearplanes
areexcludedfromshearplanes
Threadedpartsmeetingthe
0.75 Fu
[a][d]
0.40Fu
0.75 Fu
[a][d]
0.50Fu
requirementsofSection10.1.3.4,
whenthreadsarenotexcludedfrom
shearplanes
Threadedpartsmeetingthe
requirementsofSection10.1.3.4,
whenthreadsareexcludedfrom
shearplanes
6543
Partt6
Stru
ucturalDesign
[a]Subjecttotherequiremen
ntsofSection10
0.17.
[b]ForA307b
boltsthetabulattedvaluesshallbereducedby11percentforeacch2mmover5diametersoflen
ngthinthe
grip.
[c]Threadspeermittedinsheaarplanes.
[d]Thenomin
naltensilestrenggthofthethreadedportionofaanupsetrod,basseduponthecro
osssectionalare
eaatits
majorthreaddiameter,AD,w
whichshallbelaargerthanthenominalbodyare
eaoftherodbefforeupsettingtimesFy.
TAB
BLE10.10.3.3:N
NominalHoleDimensions,mm
m
Boltt
Diame
eter
HoleDimensio
ons
Stan
ndard
(Dia.)
Ovversize(Dia.)
ShortSlot
(WidthLength)
LongSlo
ot
(WidthLe
ength)
M16
6
18
1
20
18 22
18 40
0
M20
0
22
2
24
22 26
22 50
0
M22
2
28
24 30
24 55
5
M24
4
24
2
27[a]
30
27 32
27 60
0
M27
7
30
3
35
30 37
30 67
7
M30
0
33
3
38
33 40
33 75
5
[a]Clearanceprovidedallo
owstheuseofa25mm.boltifdeesirable.
[a]
TABLE10.1
10.3.4:Minimum
mEdgeDistancce,
mm,from
mCenterofStandardHole
[b]
to
oEdgeofConneectedPart
BoltDiameter
B
(mm)
AtShearedEdge
es
AtRolledEdggesof
orBars,orTheermallyCutEd
dges[c]
Plates,Shapeso
16
28
22
20
34
26
22
38 [d]
28
24
42 [d]
30
27
48
34
[aa]Lesseredged
distancesareperrmittedtobeusedprovidedpro
ovisionsofSectio
on10.10.3.10,asappropriate,aresatisfied.
[b
b]Foroversized
dorslottedholess,seeTable10.1
10.3.5.
[cc]Alledgedistancesinthiscolu
umnarepermitteedtobereduced3mmwhenth
heholeisatapo
ointwhererequiredstrength
do
oesnotexceed2
25percentofth
hemaximumstreengthintheelem
ment.
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.10.3.5 MaximumSpacingandEdgeDistance
Themaximumdistancefromthecenterofanyboltorrivettothenearestedgeofpartsincontactshallbe12
timesthethicknessoftheconnectedpartunderconsideration,butshallnotexceed150mm.Thelongitudinal
spacingoffastenersbetweenelementsincontinuouscontactconsistingofaplateanda
Forpaintedmembersorunpaintedmembersnotsubjecttocorrosion,thespacingshallnotexceed24timesthe
thicknessofthethinnerplateor305mm.
Forunpaintedmembersofweatheringsteelsubjecttoatmosphericcorrosion,thespacingshallnotexceed14
timesthethicknessofthethinnerplateor180mm.
10.10.3.6 TensionandShearStrengthofBoltsandThreadedParts
Thedesigntensionorshearstrength,Rnandtheallowabletensionorshearstrength,Rn/,ofasnugtightened
orpretensionedhighstrengthboltorthreadedpartshallbedeterminedaccordingtothelimitstatesoftensile
ruptureandshearruptureasfollows:
(10.10.3.1)
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
where
Fn=nominaltensilestressFnt,orshearstress,FnvfromTable10.10.3.2,MPa
Ab =nominalunthreadedbodyareaofboltorthreadedpart(forupsetrods,seefootnoted,Table10.10.3.2,
mm2
Therequiredtensilestrengthshallincludeanytensionresultingfrompryingactionproducedbydeformationof
theconnectedparts.
10.10.3.7CombinedTensionandShearinBearingTypeConnection
Theavailabletensilestrengthofaboltsubjectedtocombinedtensionandshearshallbedeterminedaccording
tothelimitstatesoftensionandshearruptureasfollows:
(10.10.3.2)
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
where
=nominaltensilestressmodifiedtoincludetheeffectsofshearingstress,MPa
1.3
1.3
LRFD
(10.10.3.3a)
ASD
(10.10.3.3b)
Fnt=nominaltensilestressfromTable10.10.3.2,MPa
Fnv=nominalshearstressfromTable10.10.3.2,MPa
fv=therequiredshearstress,MPa
Theavailableshearstressofthefastenershallequalorexceedtherequiredshearstrengthperunitarea,fv.
10.10.3.7 HighStrengthBoltsinSlipCriticalConnections
Highstrength bolts in slipcritical connections are permitted to be designed to prevent slip either as a
serviceabilitylimitstateorattherequiredstrengthlimitstate.Theconnectionmustalsobecheckedforshear
strengthinaccordancewithSections10.10.3.6and10.10.3.7andbearingstrengthinaccordancewithSections
10.10.3.1and10.10.3.10.
Slipcritical connections shall be designed as follows, unless otherwise designated by the engineer of record.
Connectionswithstandardholesorslotstransversetothedirectionoftheloadshallbedesignedforslipasa
serviceabilitylimitstate.Connectionswithoversizedholesorslotsparalleltothedirectionoftheloadshallbe
designedtopreventslipattherequiredstrengthlevel.
Thedesignslipresistance,Rnandtheallowableslipresistance,Rn/,shallbedeterminedforthelimitstate
ofslipasfollows:
6545
Part6
StructuralDesign
(10.10.3.4)
Forconnectionsinwhichpreventionofslipisaserviceabilitylimitstate
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
Forconnectionsdesignedtopreventslipattherequiredstrengthlevel
=0.85(LRFD) =1.76(ASD)
Where
=meanslipcoefficientforClassAorBsurfaces,asapplicable,orasestablishedbytests
= 0.35 for Class A surfaces (unpainted clean mill scale steel surfaces or surfaces with Class A coatings on
blastcleanedsteelandhotdippedgalvanizedandroughenedsurfaces)
=0.50forClassBsurfaces(unpaintedblastcleanedsteelsurfacesorsurfaceswithClassBcoatingsonblast
cleanedsteel)
Du=1.13;amultiplierthatreflectstheratioofthemeaninstalledboltpretensiontothespecifiedminimumbolt
pretension.Theuseofothervaluesmaybeapprovedbytheengineerofrecord.
hsc=holefactordeterminedasfollows:
a) Forstandardsizeholes h sc = 1.00
c) Foroversizedandshortslottedholes
h sc = 0.85
d) Forlongslottedholes h sc = 0.70
Ns=numberofslipplanes
Tb=minimumfastenertensiongiveninTable10.10.3.1,kN
10.10.3.8 CombinedTensionandShearinSlipCriticalConnections
When a slipcritical connection is subjected to an applied tension that reduces the net clamping force, the
availableslipresistanceperbolt,fromSection10.10.3.8,shallbemultipliedbythefactor,ks,asfollows:
1
1
1.5
LRFD
(10.10.3.5a)
ASD
(10.10.3.5b)
where
Nb=numberofboltscarryingtheappliedtension
Ta=tensionforceduetoASDloadcombinations,kN
Tb=minimumfastenertensiongiveninTable10.10.3.1,kN
Tu=tensionforceduetoLRFDloadcombinations,kN
10.10.3.10BearingStrengthatBoltHoles
Theavailablebearingstrength,RnandRn/,atboltholesshallbedeterminedforthelimitstateofbearingas
follows:
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
For a bolt in a connection with standard, oversized, and shortslotted holes, independent of the direction of
loading,oralongslottedholewiththeslotparalleltothedirectionofthebearingforce:
a) Whendeformationattheboltholeatserviceloadisadesignconsideration
1.2
2.4
(10.10.3.6a)
e) Whendeformationattheboltholeatserviceloadisnotadesignconsideration
1.5
3.0
(10.10.3.6b)
Foraboltinaconnectionwithlongslottedholeswiththeslotperpendiculartothedirectionofforce:
1.0
6546
2.0
(10.10.3.6c)
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
ForconnectionsmadeusingboltsthatpasscompletelythroughanunstiffenedboxmemberorHSSseeSection
10.10.7andEquation10.10.7.1,
where
d=nominalboltdiameter,mm
Fu=specifiedminimumtensilestrengthoftheconnectedmaterial,MPa
Lc=cleardistance,inthedirectionoftheforce,betweentheedgeoftheholeandtheedgeoftheadjacenthole
oredgeofthematerial,mm
t=thicknessofconnectedmaterial,mm
For connections, the bearing resistance shall be taken as the sum of the bearing resistances of the individual
bolts.
Bearingstrengthshallbecheckedforbothbearingtypeandslipcriticalconnections.Theuseofoversizedholes
andshortandlongslottedholesparalleltothelineofforceisrestrictedtoslipcriticalconnectionsperSection
10.10.3.2.
10.10.3.9 SpecialFasteners
ThenominalstrengthofspecialfastenersotherthantheboltspresentedinTable10.10.3.2shallbeverifiedby
tests.
10.10.3.10 TensionFasteners
WhenboltsorotherfastenersintensionareattachedtoanunstiffenedboxorHSSwall,thestrengthofthewall
shallbedeterminedbyrationalanalysis.
10.10.4
AffectedElementsofMembersandConnectingElements
Thissectionappliestoelementsofmembersatconnectionsandconnectingelements,suchasplates,gussets,
angles,andbrackets.
10.10.4.1 StrengthofElementsinTension
Thedesignstrength, Rnandtheallowablestrength,Rn/,ofaffectedandconnectingelementsloadedin
tensionshallbethelowervalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesoftensileyieldingandtensilerupture.
Fortensileyieldingofconnectingelements:
(10.10.4.1)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
Fortensileruptureofconnectingelements:
(10.10.4.2)
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
where
Ae=effectivenetareaasdefinedinSection10.4.3.3,mm2;forbolted
spliceplates,Ae=An0.85Ag
10.10.4.2 StrengthofElementsinShear
The available shear yield strength of affected and connecting elements in shear shall be the lower value
obtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofshearyieldingandshearrupture:
Forshearyieldingoftheelement:
0.60
(10.10.4.3)
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
Forshearruptureoftheelement:
0.60
(10.10.4.4)
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
6547
Part6
StructuralDesign
where
Anv=netareasubjecttoshear,mm2
10.10.4.3BlockShearStrength
The available strength for the limit state of block shear rupture along a shear failure path or path(s) and a
perpendiculartensionfailurepathshallbetakenas
0.60
0.6
(10.10.4.5)
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
where
Agv=grossareasubjecttoshear,mm2
Ant=netareasubjecttotension,mm2
Anv=netareasubjecttoshear,mm2
Wherethetensionstressisuniform,Ubs=1;wherethetensionstressisnonuniform,Ubs=0.5.
10.10.4.3 StrengthofElementsinCompression
Theavailablestrengthofconnectingelementsincompressionforthelimitstatesofyieldingandbucklingshall
bedeterminedasfollows.
For
25
(10.10.4.6)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
For
25theprovisionsofSection10.5apply.
10.10.5
Fillers
Inweldedconstruction,anyfiller6mmormoreinthicknessshallextendbeyondtheedgesofthespliceplate
andshallbeweldedtothepartonwhichitisfittedwithsufficientweldtotransmitthespliceplateload,applied
atthesurfaceofthefiller.Theweldsjoiningthespliceplatetothefillershallbesufficienttotransmitthesplice
plateloadandshallbelongenoughtoavoidoverloadingthefilleralongthetoeoftheweld.Anyfillerlessthan
6mmthickshallhaveitsedgesmadeflushwiththeedgesofthespliceplateandtheweldsizeshallbethesum
ofthesizenecessarytocarrythespliceplusthethicknessofthefillerplate.
Whenaboltthatcarriesloadpassesthroughfillersthatareequaltoorlessthan6mmthick,theshearstrength
shallbeusedwithoutreduction.Whenaboltthatcarriesloadpassesthroughfillersthataregreaterthan6mm
thick,oneofthefollowingrequirementsshallapply:
Forfillersthatareequaltoorlessthan19mmthick,theshearstrengthoftheboltsshallbemultipliedbythe
factor[10.0154(t6)],wheretisthetotalthicknessofthefillersupto19mm;
The fillers shall be extended beyond the joint and the filler extension shall be secured with enough bolts to
uniformlydistributethetotalforceintheconnectedelementoverthecombinedcrosssectionoftheconnected
elementandthefillers;
Thesizeofthejointshallbeincreasedtoaccommodateanumberofboltsthatisequivalenttothetotalnumber
requiredin(2)above;or
ThejointshallbedesignedtopreventslipatrequiredstrengthlevelsinaccordancewithSection10.10.3.8.
10.10.6
Splices
Groovewelded splices in plate girders and beams shall develop the nominal strength of the smaller spliced
section.Othertypesofsplicesincrosssectionsofplategirdersandbeamsshalldevelopthestrengthrequired
bytheforcesatthepointofthesplice.
10.10.7
BearingStrength
The design bearing strength, Rn and the allowable bearing strength, Rn/ , of surfaces in contact shall be
determinedforthelimitstateofbearing(localcompressiveyielding)asfollows:
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
6548
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Thenominalbearingstrength,Rn,isdefinedasfollowsforthevarioustypesofbearing:
Formilledsurfaces,pinsinreamed,drilled,orboredholes,andendsoffittedbearingstiffeners:
1.8
(10.10.7.1)
where
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstress,MPa
Apb=projectedbearingarea,mm2
Forexpansionrollersandrockers:
Ifd635mm
1.2
90
/20
(10.10.7.2)
Ifd>635mm
30.2
90 /20
(10.10.7.3)
where
d=diameter,mm
l=lengthofbearing,mm
10.10.8
ColumnBasesandBearingonConcrete
Properprovisionshallbemadetotransferthecolumnloadsandmomentstothefootingsandfoundations.
Intheabsenceofcoderegulations,thedesignbearingstrength,cPp,andtheallowablebearingstrength,Pp
/c,forthelimitstateofconcretecrushingarepermittedtobetakenasfollows:
c=0.60(LRFD)c=2.50(ASD)
Thenominalbearingstrength,Pp,isdeterminedasfollows:
Onthefullareaofaconcretesupport:
0.8
(10.10.8.1)
Onlessthanthefullareaofaconcretesupport:
0.8
1.7
(10.10.8.2)
where
A1=areaofsteelconcentricallybearingonaconcretesupport,mm2
A2=maximumareaoftheportionofthesupportingsurfacethatisgeometricallysimilartoandconcentricwith
theloadedarea,mm2
10.10.9
AnchorRodsandEmbedments
Anchor rods shall be designed to provide the required resistance to loads on the completed structure at the
base of columns including the net tensile components of any bending moment that may result from load
combinations stipulated in Section 10.2.2. The anchor rods shall be designed in accordance with the
requirementsforthreadedpartsinTable10.10.3.2.
Largeroversizedandslottedholesarepermittedinbaseplateswhenadequatebearingisprovidedforthenut
byusingstructuralorplatewasherstobridgethehole.
Whenhorizontalforcesarepresentatcolumnbases,theseforcesshould,wherepossible,beresistedbybearing
against concrete elements or by shear friction between the column base plate and the foundation. When
anchorrodsaredesigned to resist horizontal force thebaseplate hole size, the anchorrodsetting tolerance,
andthehorizontalmovementofthecolumnshallbeconsideredinthedesign.
10.10.10 FlangesandWebswithConcentratedForces
This section applies to single and doubleconcentrated forces applied normal to the flange(s) of wide flange
sectionsandsimilarbuiltupshapes.Asingleconcentratedforcecanbeeithertensileorcompressive.Double
6549
Part6
StructuralDesign
concentrated forces are one tensile and one compressive and form a couple on the same side of the loaded
member.
When the required strength exceeds the available strength as determined for the limit states listed in this
section,stiffenersand/ordoublersshallbeprovidedandshallbesizedforthedifferencebetweentherequired
strength and the available strength for the applicable limit state. Stiffeners shall also meet the design
requirementsinSection10.10.10.8.DoublersshallalsomeetthedesignrequirementinSection10.10.10.9.
StiffenersarerequiredatunframedendsofbeamsinaccordancewiththerequirementsofSection10.10.10.7.
10.10.10.1 FlangeLocalBending
This section applies to tensile singleconcentrated forces and the tensile component of doubleconcentrated
forces.
Thedesignstrength, Rnandtheallowablestrength,Rn/,forthelimitstateofflangelocalbendingshallbe
determinedasfollows:
6.25
(10.10.10.1)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
where
Fyf=specifiedminimumyieldstressoftheflange,MPa
tf =thicknessoftheloadedflange,mm
If the length of loading across the member flange is less than 0.15bf , where bf is the member flange width,
Equation10.10.10.1neednotbechecked.
Whentheconcentratedforcetoberesistedisappliedatadistancefromthememberendthatislessthan10tf,
Rnshallbereducedby50percent.
Whenrequired,apairoftransversestiffenersshallbeprovided.
10.10.10.2 WebLocalYielding
Thissectionappliestosingleconcentratedforcesandbothcomponentsofdoubleconcentratedforces.
Theavailablestrengthforthelimitstateofweblocalyieldingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
Thenominalstrength,Rn,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
Whentheconcentratedforcetoberesistedisappliedatadistancefromthememberendthatisgreaterthan
thedepthofthememberd,
5
(10.10.10.2)
Whentheconcentratedforcetoberesistedisappliedatadistancefromthememberendthatislessthanor
equaltothedepthofthememberd,
2.5
(10.10.10.3)
where
k=distancefromouterfaceoftheflangetothewebtoeofthefillet,mm
Fyw=specifiedminimumyieldstressoftheweb,MPa
N =lengthofbearing(notlessthankforendbeamreactions),mm
tw=webthickness,mm
Whenrequired,apairoftransversestiffenersoradoublerplateshallbeprovided.
10.10.10.3 WebCrippling
This section applies to compressive singleconcentrated forces or the compressive component of double
concentratedforces.
Theavailablestrengthforthelimitstateofweblocalcripplingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
6550
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Whentheconcentratedcompressiveforcetoberesistedisappliedatadistancefromthememberendthatis
greaterthanorequaltod/2:
.
0.80
(10.10.10.4)
Whentheconcentratedcompressiveforcetoberesistedisappliedatadistancefromthememberendthatis
lessthand/2:
ForN/d0.2
.
0.40
(10.10.10.5a)
(10.10.10.5b)
ForN/d>0.2
0.40
0.2
where
d=overalldepthofthemember,mm
tf=flangethickness,mm
Whenrequired,atransversestiffenerorpairoftransversestiffeners,oradoublerplateextendingatleastone
halfthedepthofthewebshallbeprovided.
10.10.10.4 WebSideswayBuckling
ThisSectionappliesonlytocompressivesingleconcentratedforcesappliedtomemberswhererelativelateral
movement between the loaded compression flange and the tension flange is not restrained at the point of
applicationoftheconcentratedforce.
Theavailablestrengthofthewebshallbedeterminedasfollows:
=0.85(LRFD) =1.76(ASD)
Thenominalstrength,Rn,forthelimitstateofwebsideswaybucklingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
Ifthecompressionflangeisrestrainedagainstrotation:
For
2.3
1
For
0.4
(10.10.10.6)
2.3,thelimitstateofwebsideswaybucklingdoesnotapply.
Whentherequiredstrengthofthewebexceedstheavailablestrength,locallateralbracingshallbeprovidedat
thetensionflangeoreitherapairoftransversestiffenersoradoublerplateshallbeprovided.
Ifthecompressionflangeisnotrestrainedagainstrotation
For
1.7
0.4
For
(10.10.10.7)
1.7thelimitstateofwebsideswaybucklingdoesnotapply.
Whentherequiredstrengthofthewebexceedstheavailablestrength,locallateralbracingshallbeprovidedat
bothflangesatthepointofapplicationoftheconcentratedforces.
InEquations10.10.10.6and10.10.10.7,thefollowingdefinitionsapply:
bf=flangewidth,mm
Cr=6.62106MPawhenMu<My(LRFD)or1.5Ma<My(ASD)atthelocationoftheforce
6551
Part6
StructuralDesign
=3.31106MPawhenMuMy(LRFD)or1.5MaMy(ASD)atthelocationoftheforce
h=cleardistancebetweenflangeslessthefilletorcornerradiusforrolledshapes;distancebetweenadjacent
linesoffastenersorthecleardistancebetweenflangeswhenweldsareusedforbuiltupshapes,mm
l
=largestlaterallyunbracedlengthalongeitherflangeatthepointofload,mm
tf=flangethickness,mm
tw=webthickness,mm
10.10.10.5 WebCompressionBuckling
ThisSectionappliestoapairofcompressivesingleconcentratedforcesorthecompressivecomponentsinapair
ofdoubleconcentratedforces,appliedatbothflangesofamemberatthesamelocation.
Theavailablestrengthforthelimitstateofweblocalbucklingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
24
(10.10.10.8)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
Whenthepairofconcentratedcompressiveforcestoberesistedisappliedatadistancefromthememberend
thatislessthand/2,Rnshallbereducedby50percent.
Whenrequired,asingletransversestiffener,apairoftransversestiffeners,oradoublerplateextendingthefull
depthofthewebshallbeprovided.
10.10.10.6 WebPanelZoneShear
This section applies to doubleconcentrated forces applied to one or both flanges of a member at the same
location.
Theavailablestrengthofthewebpanelzoneforthelimitstateofshearyieldingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
Whentheeffectofpanelzonedeformationonframestabilityisnotconsideredintheanalysis:
For
0.4
0.60
For
(10.10.10.9)
0.4
0.60
1.4
(10.10.10.10)
Whenframestability,includingplasticpanelzonedeformation,isconsideredintheanalysis:
For
0.75
0.60
For
(10.10.10.11)
0.75
0.60
1.9
1.2
(10.10.10.12)
InEquations10.10.10.9through10.10.10.12,thefollowingdefinitionsapply:
A=columncrosssectionalarea,mm2
bcf=widthofcolumnflange,mm
db=beamdepth,mm
dc=columndepth,mm
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthecolumnweb,MPa
Pc=Py,N(LRFD)
Pc=0.6Py,N(ASD)
6552
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Pr=requiredstrength,N
Py=FyA,axialyieldstrengthofthecolumn,N
tcf=thicknessofthecolumnflange,mm
tw=columnwebthickness,mm
Whenrequired,doublerplate(s)orapairofdiagonalstiffenersshallbeprovidedwithintheboundariesofthe
rigidconnectionwhosewebslieinacommonplane.
SeeSection10.10.10.9fordoublerplatedesignrequirements.
10.10.10.7 UnframedEndsofBeamsandGirders
Atunframedendsofbeamsandgirdersnototherwiserestrainedagainstrotationabouttheirlongitudinalaxes,
apairoftransversestiffeners,extendingthefulldepthoftheweb,shallbeprovided.
10.10.10.8 AdditionalStiffenersRequirementsforConcentratedForces
Stiffenersrequiredtoresisttensileconcentratedforcesshallbedesignedinaccordancewiththerequirements
of Section 10.4 and welded to the loaded flange and the web. The welds to the flange shall be sized for the
differencebetweentherequiredstrengthandavailablelimitstatestrength.Thestiffenertowebweldsshallbe
sizedtotransfertothewebthealgebraicdifferenceintensileforceattheendsofthestiffener.
Stiffeners required to resist compressive concentrated forces shall be designed in accordance with the
requirementsinSections10.5.6.2and10.10.4.4andshalleitherbearonorbeweldedtotheloadedflangeand
weldedtotheweb.Theweldstotheflangeshallbesizedforthedifferencebetweentherequiredstrengthand
the applicable limit state strength. The weld to the web shall be sized to transfer to the web the algebraic
differenceincompressionforceattheendsofthestiffener.Forfittedbearingstiffeners,seeSection10.10.7.
Transversefulldepthbearingstiffenersforcompressiveforcesappliedtoabeamorplategirderflange(s)shall
bedesignedasaxiallycompressedmembers(columns)inaccordancewiththerequirementsofSections10.5.6.2
and10.10.4.4.
Thememberpropertiesshallbedeterminedusinganeffectivelengthof0.75handacrosssectioncomposedof
two stiffeners and a strip of the web having a width of 25tw at interior stiffeners and 12tw at the ends of
members.Theweldconnectingfulldepthbearingstiffenerstothewebshallbesizedtotransmitthedifference
incompressiveforceateachofthestiffenerstotheweb.
Transverseanddiagonalstiffenersshallcomplywiththefollowingadditionalcriteria:
Thewidthofeachstiffenerplusonehalfthethicknessofthecolumnwebshallnotbelessthanonethirdofthe
widthoftheflangeormomentconnectionplatedeliveringtheconcentratedforce.
The thickness of a stiffener shall not be less than onehalf the thickness of the flange or moment connection
platedeliveringtheconcentratedload,andgreaterthanorequaltothewidthdividedby15.
Transverse stiffeners shall extend a minimum of onehalf the depth of the member except as required in
10.10.10.5and10.10.10.7.
10.10.10.9AdditionaldoublerPlateRequirementsforConcentratedForces
Doubler plates required for compression strength shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of
Section10.5.
DoublerplatesrequiredfortensilestrengthshallbedesignedinaccordancewiththerequirementsofSection
10.4.
Doubler plates required for shear strength (see Section 10.10.10.6) shall be designed in accordance with the
provisionsofSection10.7.
Inaddition,doublerplatesshallcomplywiththefollowingcriteria:
Thethicknessandextentofthedoublerplateshallprovidetheadditionalmaterialnecessarytoequalorexceed
thestrengthrequirements.
Thedoublerplateshallbeweldedtodeveloptheproportionofthetotalforcetransmittedtothedoublerplate.
6553
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.11 DesignofHSSandBoxMemberConnections
ThissectioncoversmemberstrengthdesignconsiderationspertainingtoconnectionstoHSSmembersandbox
sectionsofuniformwallthickness.SeealsoSection10.10foradditionalrequirementsforboltingtoHSS.
10.11.1
ConcentratedForcesonHSS
10.11.1.1 DefinitionsofParameters
B=overallwidthofrectangularHSSmember,measured90degreestotheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
Bp=widthofplate,measured90degreestotheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
D=outsidediameterofroundHSSmember,mm.
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstressofHSSmembermaterial,MPa.
Fyp=specifiedminimumyieldstressofplate,MPa.
Fu=specifiedminimumtensilestrengthofHSSmaterial,MPa.
H=overallheightofrectangularHSSmember,measuredintheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
N=bearinglengthoftheload,measuredparalleltotheaxisoftheHSSmember,(ormeasuredacrossthe
widthoftheHSSinthecaseofloadedcapplates),mm.
t
=designwallthicknessofHSSmember,mm.
tp =thicknessofplate,mm.
10.11.1.2 LimitsofApplicability
The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection configuration is within the following limits of
applicability:
Strength:Fy360MPa.forHSS
Ductility:Fy/Fu0.8forHSS
Otherlimitsapplyforspecificcriteria
10.11.1.3 ConcentratedForceDistributedTransversely
10.11.1.3.1CriterionforRoundHSS
WhenaconcentratedforceisdistributedtransverselytotheaxisoftheHSSthedesignstrength,Rnandthe
allowablestrength,Rn/,forthelimitstateoflocalyieldingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
5.5/ 1
0.81
10.11.1.1
0.90(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
whereQfisgivenbyEquation10.11.2.1.Additionallimitsofapplicabilityare
0.2<Bp/D1.0
D/t50forTconnectionsandD/t40forcrossconnections
10.11.1.3.2CriterionforRectangularHSS
WhenaconcentratedforceisdistributedtransverselytotheaxisoftheHSSthedesignstrength,Rnandthe
allowablestrength,Rn/,shallbethelowestvalueaccordingtothelimitstatesoflocalyieldingduetouneven
loaddistribution,shearyielding(punching)andsidewallstrength.
Additionallimitsofapplicabilityare
0.25<Bp/B1.0
B/tfortheloadedHSSwall35
Forthelimitstateoflocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistributionintheloadedplate,
10/
10.11.1.2
0.95(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
Forthelimitstateofshearyielding(punching),
6554
Vol.2
SteelStructures
0.6
Chapter10
10.11.1.3
0.95(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
Where
10
ThislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhenBp>(B2t),norwhenBp<0.85B.
For the limit state of sidewall under tension loading, the available strength shall be taken asthe strength for
sidewall local yielding. For the limit state of sidewall under compression loading, available strength shall be
takenasthelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofsidewalllocalyielding,sidewalllocalcrippling
andsidewalllocalbuckling.
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedunlessthechordmemberandbranchmember(connectingelement)have
thesamewidth(=1.0).
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalyielding,
10.11.1.4
1.0(LRFD)=1.50(ASD)
where
k=outsidecornerradiusoftheHSS,whichispermittedtobetakenas1.5tifunknown,mm.
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalcrippling,inTconnections,
1.6
3 /
10.11.1.5
0.75(LRFD)=2.0(ASD)
whereQfisgivenbyEquation10.11.2.10.
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalbucklingincrossconnections,
48 /
10.11.1.6
0.90(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
whereQfisgivenbyEquation10.11.2.10
Thenonuniformityofloadtransferalongthelineofweld,duetotheflexibilityoftheHSSwallinatransverse
platetoHSSconnection,shallbeconsideredinproportioningsuchwelds.Thisrequirementcanbesatisfiedby
limitingthetotaleffectiveweldlength,Le,ofgrooveandfilletweldstorectangularHSSasfollows:
2 10/
10.11.1.7
where
Le=totaleffectiveweldlengthforweldsonbothsidesofthetransverseplate,mm.
InlieuofEquation10.11.17,thisrequirementmaybesatisfiedbyotherrationalapproaches.
10.11.1.4 Concentrated Force Distributed Longitudinally at the Center of the HSS Diameter or Width and
ActingPerpendiculartotheHSSAxis
When a concentrated force is distributed longitudinally along the axis of the HSS at the center of the HSS
diameter or width, and also acts perpendicular to the axis direction of the HSS (or has a component
perpendicular to the axis direction of the HSS), the design strength, Rn and the allowable strength, Rn / ,
perpendiculartotheHSSaxisshallbedeterminedforthelimitstateofchordplastificationasfollows.
10.11.1.4.1CriterionforRoundHSS
Anadditionallimitofapplicabilityis:
D/t50forTconnectionsandD/t40forcrossconnections
5.5
10.11.1.8
0.25 /
0.90(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
whereQfisgivenbyEquation10.11.2.1.
6555
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.11.1.4.2CriterionforRectangularHSS
Anadditionallimitofapplicabilityis:
B/tfortheloadedHSSwall40
/ 1
2 /
4 1
10.11.1.9
1.00(LRFD)=1.50(ASD)
where
Qf=(1U2)0.5
UisgivenbyEquation10.11.2.12
10.11.1.5 ConcentratedForceDistributedLongitudinallyattheCenteroftheHSSWidthandActingParallelto
theHSSAxis
WhenaconcentratedforceisdistributedlongitudinallyalongtheaxisofarectangularHSSandalsoactsparallel
buteccentrictotheaxisdirectionofthemember,theconnectionshallbeverifiedasfollows:
10.11.1.10
10.11.1.6 ConcentratedAxialForceontheEndofaRectangularHSSwithaCapPlate
WhenaconcentratedforceactsontheendofacappedHSSandtheforceisinthedirectionoftheHSSaxis,the
design strength, Rn and the allowable strength, Rn/ , shall be determined for the limit states of wall local
yielding (due to tensile or compressive forces) and wall local crippling (due to compressive forces only), with
considerationforshearlag,asfollows.
If(5tp+N)B,theavailablestrengthoftheHSSiscomputedbysummingthecontributionsofallfourHSSwalls.
If(5tp+N)<B,theavailablestrengthoftheHSSiscomputedbysummingthecontributionsofthetwowallsinto
whichtheloadisdistributed.
Forthelimitstateofwalllocalyielding,foronewall,
10.11.1.11
1.00(LRFD)=1.50(ASD)
Forthelimitstateofwalllocalcrippling,foronewall,
0.8
6 /
10.11.1.12
0.75(LRFD)=2.00(ASD)
10.11.2
HSSToHSSTrussConnections
HSStoHSStrussconnectionsaredefinedasconnectionsthatconsistofoneormorebranchmembersthatare
directlyweldedtoacontinuouschordthatpassesthroughtheconnectionandshallbeclassifiedasfollows:
a) Whenthepunchingload(Prsin)inabranchmemberisequilibratedbybeamshearinthe
chordmember,theconnectionshallbeclassifiedasaTconnectionwhenthebranchis
perpendiculartothechordandaYconnectionotherwise.
b) Whenthepunchingload(Prsin)inabranchmemberisessentiallyequilibrated(within20
percent)byloadsinotherbranchmember(s)onthesamesideoftheconnection,the
connectionshallbeclassifiedasaKconnection.Therelevantgapisbetweentheprimary
branchmemberswhoseloadsequilibrate.AnNconnectioncanbeconsideredasatypeofK
connection.
c) Whenthepunchingload(Prsin)istransmittedthroughthechordmemberandisequilibrated
bybranchmember(s)ontheoppositeside,theconnectionshallbeclassifiedasacross
connection.
d) Whenaconnectionhasmorethantwoprimarybranchmembersorbranchmembersinmore
thanoneplane,theconnectionshallbeclassifiedasageneralormultiplanarconnection.
6556
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
e) WhenbranchmemberstransmitpartoftheirloadasKconnectionsandpartoftheirloadasT,
Y,orcrossconnections,thenominalstrengthshallbedeterminedbyinterpolationonthe
proportionofeachintotal.
For the purposes of this Specification, the centerlines of branch members and chord members shall lie in a
common plane. Rectangular HSS connections are further limited to have all members oriented with walls
parallel to the plane. For trusses that are made with HSS that are connected by welding branch members to
chord members, eccentricities within the limits of applicability are permitted without consideration of the
resultingmomentsforthedesignoftheconnection.
B=overallwidthofrectangularHSSmainmember,measured90degreestotheplaneoftheconnection,
mm.
Bb = overall width of rectangular HSS branch member, measured 90 degrees to the plane of the
connection,mm.
D=outsidediameterofroundHSSmainmember,mm.
Db=outsidediameterofroundHSSbranchmember,mm.
E=eccentricityinatrussconnection,positivebeingawayfromthebranches,mm.
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstressofHSSmainmembermaterial,MPa.
Fyb=specifiedminimumyieldstressofHSSbranchmembermaterial,MPa.
Fu=specifiedminimumtensilestrengthofHSSmaterial,MPa.
G=gapbetweentoesofbranchmembersinagappedKconnection,neglectingthewelds,mm.
H=overallheightofrectangularHSSmainmember,measuredintheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
Hb=overallheightofrectangularHSSbranchmember,measuredintheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
t
=designwallthicknessofHSSmainmember,mm.
tb =designwallthicknessofHSSbranchmember,mm.
=thewidthratio;theratioofbranchdiametertochorddiameter=Db/DforroundHSS;theratioof
overallbranchwidthtochordwidth=Bb/BforrectangularHSS
eff=theeffectivewidthratio;thesumoftheperimetersofthetwobranchmembersinaKconnection
dividedbyeighttimesthechordwidth
=thechordslendernessratio;theratioofonehalfthediametertothewallthickness=D/(2t)forround
HSS;theratioofonehalfthewidthtowallthickness=B/(2t)forrectangularHSS
=theloadlengthparameter,applicableonlytorectangularHSS;theratioofthelengthofcontactofthe
branchwiththechordintheplaneoftheconnectiontothechordwidth=N/B,whereN=Hb/sin
=acuteanglebetweenthebranchandchord(degrees)
=thegapratio;theratioofthegapbetweenthebranchesofagappedKconnectiontothewidthofthe
chord=g/BforrectangularHSS
10.11.2.2 CriteriaforRoundHSS
The interaction of stress due to chord member forces and local branch connection forces shall be
incorporatedthroughthechordstressinteractionparameterQf.
Whenthechordisintension,
1
Whenthechordisincompression,
1.0
0.3
10.11.2.1
whereUistheutilizationratiogivenby
10.11.2.2
and
6557
Part6
StructuralDesign
Pr=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,N;forKconnections,Pristobedeterminedonthesideofthejointthat
hasthelowercompressionstress(lowerU)
Mr=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,Nmm.
Ag=chordgrossarea,mm2
Fc=availablestress,MPa.
S=chordelasticsectionmodulus,mm3
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD):
Pr=Pu=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,usingLRFDloadcombinations,N
Mr=Mu=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
Fc=Fy,MPa.
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD):
Pr=Pa=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,usingASDloadcombinations,N
Mr=Ma=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
Fc=0.6Fy,MPa.
10.11.2.2.1LimitsofApplicability
applicability:
Jointeccentricity:0.55De0.25D,whereDisthechorddiameterandeispositiveawayfromthebranches
Branchangle: 300
Chordwallslenderness:ratioofdiametertowallthicknesslessthanorequalto50forT,YandKconnections;
lessthanorequalto40forcrossconnections
Tensionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofdiametertowallthicknesslessthanorequalto50
Compressionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofdiametertowallthicknesslessthanorequalto0.05E/Fy
Widthratio:0.2<Db/D1.0ingeneral,and0.4Db/D1.0forgappedKconnections
Ifagapconnection:ggreaterthanorequaltothesumofthebranchwallthicknesses
If an overlap connection: 25% Ov 100%, where Ov = (q / p) 100%. P is the projected length of the
overlapping branch on the chord; q is the overlap length measured along the connecting face of the chord
beneath the two branches. For overlap connections, the larger (or if equal diameter, the thicker) branch is a
thrumemberconnecteddirectlytothechord.
Branchthicknessratioforoverlapconnections:thicknessofoverlappingbranchtobelessthanorequaltothe
thicknessoftheoverlappedbranch
Strength:Fy360MPa.forchordandbranches
Ductility:Fy/Fu0.8
10.11.2.2.2BrancheswithAxialLoadsinT,YandCrossConnections
ForTandYconnections,thedesignstrengthofthebranch Pnortheallowablestrengthofthebranch,Pn/
, shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of chord plastification and shear yielding
(punching).
ForthelimitstateofchordplastificationinTandYconnections,
sin
3.1
15.6
10.11.2.3
0.90(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
0.6
10.11.2.4
sin /2sin
0.95(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen>(11/ ).
Forthelimitstateofchordplastificationincrossconnections,
sin
6558
5.7/ 1
10.11.2.5
0.81
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
0.90(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
10.11.2.2.3BrancheswithAxialLoadsinKConnections
ForKconnections,thedesignstrengthofthebranch,Pnandtheallowablestrengthofthebranch,Pn/,shall
be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of chord plastification for gapped and overlapped
connectionsandshearyielding(punching)forgappedconnectionsonly.
Forthelimitstateofchordplastification,
=0.90(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
Forthecompressionbranch:
sin
2.0
10.11.2.6
11.33
whereDbreferstothecompressionbranchonly,and
.
0.024
10.11.2.7
1
In gapped connections, g(measured along the crown of the chord neglecting weld dimensions)is positive.In
overlappedconnections,gisnegativeandequalsq.
Forthetensionbranch,
sin
sin
10.11.2.8
Forthelimitstateofshearyielding(punching)ingappedKconnections,
0.6
10.11.2.9
sin /2sin
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
10.11.2.3 CriteriaforRectangularHSS
Theinteractionofstressduetochordmemberforcesandlocalbranchconnectionforcesshallbeincorporated
throughthechordstressinteractionparameterQf.
Qf=1
WhenthechordisincompressioninT,Y,andcrossconnections,
1.3
0.4 /
10.11.2.10
WhenthechordisincompressioningappedKconnections,
1.3
0.4 /
10.11.2.11
10.11.2.12
and
Pr =requiredaxialstrengthinchord,N.ForgappedKconnections,Pristobedeterminedonthesideofthe
jointthathasthehighercompressionstress(higherU).
Fc=Fy,MPa.
Pr=Pa=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,usingASDloadcombinations,N.
6559
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fc=0.6Fy,MPa.
Thecriteriahereinareapplicableonlywhentheconnectionconfigurationiswithinthefollowinglimits:
Jointeccentricity:0.55He0.25H,whereHisthechorddepthandeispositiveawayfromthebranches
Branchangle:300
Chord wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall width to thickness less than or equal to 35 for gapped K
connectionsandT,Yandcrossconnections;lessthanorequalto30foroverlappedKconnections
Tensionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofoverallwallwidthtothicknesslessthanorequalto35
Compressionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofoverallwallwidthtothicknesslessthanorequalto1.25(E/Fyb)0.5
and also less than 35 for gapped Kconnections and T, Y and crossconnections; less than or equal to
1.1(E/Fyb)0.5foroverlappedKconnections
Widthratio:ratioofoverallwallwidthofbranchtooverallwallwidthofchordgreaterthanorequalto0.25for
T,Y,crossandoverlappedKconnections;greaterthanorequalto0.35forgappedKconnections
Aspectratio:0.5ratioofdepthtowidth2.0
Overlap:25%Ov100%,whereOv =(q/p)100%.pistheprojectedlengthoftheoverlappingbranchon
thechord;qistheoverlaplengthmeasuredalongtheconnectingfaceofthechordbeneaththetwobranches.
Foroverlapconnections,thelarger(orifequalwidth,thethicker)branchisathrumemberconnecteddirectly
tothechord
Branch width ratio for overlap connections: ratio of overall wall width of overlapping branch to overall wall
widthofoverlappedbranchgreaterthanorequalto0.75
Branchthicknessratioforoverlapconnections:thicknessofoverlappingbranchtobelessthanorequaltothe
thicknessoftheoverlappedbranch
Ductility:Fy/Fu0.8
10.11.2.3.2BrancheswithAxialLoadsinT,YandCrossConnections
For T, Y and crossconnections, the design strength of the branch, Pn or the allowable strength of the
branch,Pn/,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofchordwallplastification,shear
yielding(punching),sidewallstrengthandlocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistribution.Inadditiontothelimits
ofapplicabilityinSection10.11.2.3a,shallnotbelessthan0.25.
Forthelimitstateofchordwallplastification,
sin
2/ 1
4/ 1
10.11.2.13
=1.00(LRFD)=1.50(ASD)
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen>0.85.
sin
0.6
10.11.2.14
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
InEquation10.11.2.14,theeffectiveoutsidepunchingparametereop=5/shallnotexceed.
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen>(11/),norwhen<0.85andB/t10.
For the limit state of sidewall strength, the available strength for branches in tension shall be taken as the
availablestrengthforsidewalllocalyielding.Forthelimitstateofsidewallstrength,theavailablestrengthfor
branchesincompressionshallbetakenasthelowerofthestrengthsforsidewalllocalyieldingandsidewalllocal
crippling.Forcrossconnectionswithabranchanglelessthan90degrees,anadditionalcheckforchordsidewall
shearfailuremustbemadeinaccordancewithSection10.7.5.
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedunlessthechordmemberandbranchmemberhavethesamewidth(=
1.0)
Forthelimitstateoflocalyielding,
6560
Vol.2
SteelStructures
sin
Chapter10
10.11.2.15
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
where
k=outsidecornerradiusoftheHSS,whichispermittedtobetakenas1.5tifunknown,mm.
N=bearinglengthoftheload,paralleltotheaxisoftheHSSmainmember,Hb/sin,mm.
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalcrippling,inTandYconnections,
sin
1.6
3 /
10.11.2.16
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalcripplingincrossconnections,
sin
48 /
10.11.2.17
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
Forthelimitstateoflocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistribution,
10.11.2.18
=0.95(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
where
10/
10.11.2.19
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen<0.85.
10.11.2.3.3BrancheswithAxialLoadsinGappedKConnections
ForgappedKconnections,thedesignstrengthofthebranch,Pnortheallowablestrengthofthebranch,Pn/,
shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of chord wall plastification, shear yielding
(punching), shear yielding and local yielding due to uneven load distribution. In addition to the limits of
applicabilityinSection10.11.2.3a,thefollowinglimitsshallapply:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Bb/B 0.1+ /50

eff 0.35
0.5(1eff)
Gap:ggreaterthanorequaltothesumofthebranchwallthicknesses
ThesmallerBb 0.63timesthelargerBb
sin
9.8
10.11.2.20
=0.90(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
sin
0.6
10.11.2.21
=0.95(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
Intheaboveequation,theeffectiveoutsidepunchingparametereop=5/shallnotexceed.
ThislimitstateneedonlybecheckedifBb<(B2t)orthebranchisnotsquare.
Forthelimitstateofshearyieldingofthechordinthegap,availablestrengthshallbecheckedinaccordance
withSection10.7.Thislimitstateneedonlybecheckedifthechordisnotsquare.
10.11.2.22
=0.95(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
where
10/
10.11.2.23
6561
Part6
StructuralDesign
ThislimitstateneedonlybecheckedifthebranchisnotsquareorB/t<15.
10.11.2.3.4BrancheswithAxialLoadsinOverlappedKConnections
ForoverlappedKconnections,thedesignstrengthofthebranch,Pnortheallowablestrengthofthebranch,
Pn/shallbedeterminedfromthelimitstateoflocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistribution,
=0.95(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
Fortheoverlappingbranchandforoverlap25%Ov50%measuredwithrespecttotheoverlappingbranch,
/50 2
10.11.2.24
Fortheoverlappingbranch,andforoverlap50%Ov<80%measuredwithrespecttotheoverlappingbranch,
10.11.2.25
Fortheoverlappingbranchandforoverlap80%Ov100%measuredwithrespecttotheoverlappingbranch,
10.11.2.26
where
beoiistheeffectivewidthofthebranchfaceweldedtothechord,
10/
10.11.2.27
beovistheeffectivewidthofthebranchfaceweldedtotheoverlappedbrace,
10/
10.11.2.28
Bbi=overallbranchwidthoftheoverlappingbranch,mm.
Bbj=overallbranchwidthoftheoverlappedbranch,mm.
Fybi=specifiedminimumyieldstressoftheoverlappingbranchmaterial,MPa.
Fybj=specifiedminimumyieldstressoftheoverlappedbranchmaterial,MPa.
Hbi=overalldepthoftheoverlappingbranch,mm.
Tbi =thicknessoftheoverlappingbranch,mm.
tbj =thicknessoftheoverlappedbranch,mm.
For the overlapped branch, Pn shall not exceed Pn of the overlapping branch, calculated using Equation
10.11.2.24,10.11.2.25,or10.11.2.26,asapplicable,multipliedbythefactor(AbjFybj/AbiFybi),
where
Abi=crosssectionalareaoftheoverlappingbranch
Abj=crosssectionalareaoftheoverlappedbranch
10.11.2.3.5WeldstoBranches
Thenonuniformityofloadtransferalongthelineofweld,duetodifferencesinrelativeflexibilityofHSSwallsin
HSStoHSSconnections,shallbeconsideredinproportioningsuchwelds.Thiscanbeconsideredbylimitingthe
totaleffectiveweldlength,Le,ofgrooveandfilletweldstorectangularHSSasfollows:
InT,Yandcrossconnections,
for 50degrees
1.2
sin
10.11.2.29
1.2
for 60degrees
1.2
10.11.2.30
sin
LinearinterpolationshallbeusedtodetermineLeforvaluesofbetween50and60degrees.
IngappedKconnections,aroundeachbranch,
for 50degrees
6562
Vol.2
SteelStructures
1.2
sin
Chapter10
10.11.2.31
1.2
for 60degrees
1.2
10.11.2.32
1.2
sin
LinearinterpolationshallbeusedtodetermineLeforvaluesofbetween50and60degrees.
InlieuoftheabovecriteriainEquations10.11.2.29to10.11.2.32,otherrationalcriteriaarepermitted.
10.11.3
HSSToHSSMomentConnections
HSStoHSSmomentconnectionsaredefinedasconnectionsthatconsistofoneortwobranchmembersthatare
directlyweldedtoacontinuouschordthatpassesthroughtheconnection,withthebranchorbranchesloaded
bybendingmoments.Aconnectionshallbeclassified
As aTconnection when there is onebranch andit isperpendicularto thechord andas a Yconnection when
thereisonebranchbutnotperpendiculartothechord.
Asacrossconnectionwhenthereisabranchoneach(opposite)sideofthechord.
ForthepurposesofthisSpecification,thecenterlinesofthebranchmember(s)andthechordmembershalllie
inacommonplane.
B=overallwidthofrectangularHSSmainmember,measured90degreestotheplaneoftheconnection,
mm.
Bb = overall width of rectangular HSS branch member, measured 90 degrees to the plane of the
connection,mm.
D=outsidediameterofroundHSSmainmember,mm.
Db=outsidediameterofroundHSSbranchmember,mm.
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstressofHSSmainmember,MPa.
Fyb=specifiedminimumyieldstressofHSSbranchmember,MPa.
Fu=ultimatestrengthofHSSmember,MPa.
H=overallheightofrectangularHSSmainmember,measuredintheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
Hb=overallheightofrectangularHSSbranchmember,measuredintheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
t
=designwallthicknessofHSSmainmember,mm.
tb =designwallthicknessofHSSbranchmember,mm.
=thewidthratio;theratioofbranchdiametertochorddiameter=Db/DforroundHSS;theratioof
overallbranchwidthtochordwidth=Bb/BforrectangularHSS
=thechordslendernessratio;theratioofonehalfthediametertothewallthickness=D/(2t)forround
HSS;theratioofonehalfthewidthtowallthickness=B/(2t)forrectangularHSS
=theloadlengthparameter,applicableonlytorectangularHSS;theratioofthelengthofcontactofthe
branchwiththechordintheplaneoftheconnectiontothechordwidth=N/B,whereN=Hb/sin
=acuteanglebetweenthebranchandchord(degrees)
10.11.3.2 CriteriaforRoundHSS
Qf=1
1.0
0.3
10.11.3.1
6563
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.11.3.2
and
Pr=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,N.
Fc=Fy,MPa.
Fc=0.6Fy,MPa.
applicability:
Branchangle: 300
Chordwallslenderness:ratioofdiametertowallthicknesslessthanorequalto50forTandYconnections;
lessthanorequalto40forcrossconnections
Tensionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofdiametertowallthicknesslessthanorequalto50
Compressionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofdiametertowallthicknesslessthanorequalto0.05E/Fy
Widthratio:0.2 Db/D 1.0
Strength:Fy 360MPa.forchordandbranches
Ductility:Fy/Fu 0.8
10.11.3.2.2BrancheswithInPlaneBendingMomentsinT,YandCrossConnections
Thedesignstrength, Mnandtheallowablestrength,Mn/,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothe
limitstatesofchordplastificationandshearyielding(punching).
sin
5.39
10.11.3.3
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
0.6
10.11.3.4
3 sin /4sin
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen (11/ ).
10.11.3.2.3BrancheswithOutofPlaneBendingMomentsinT,YandCrossConnections
Thedesignstrength,Mnandtheallowablestrength,Mn/,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothe
limitstatesofchordplastificationandshearyielding(punching).
sin
3.0/ 1
10.11.3.5
0.81
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
0.6
6564
10.11.3.6
sin /4sin
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen (11/ ).
10.11.3.2.4BrancheswithCombinedBendingMomentandAxialForceinT,YandCrossConnections
Connections subject to branch axial load, branch inplane bending moment, and branch outofplane bending
moment,oranycombinationoftheseloadeffects,shouldsatisfythefollowing.
10.11.3.7
1.0
where
Pr =Pu=requiredaxialstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,N
Pn=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.2.2.2
Mrip=requiredinplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
Mnip=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.2.2
Mrop=requiredoutofplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
Mnop=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.2.3
1.0
10.11.3.8
where
Pr=Pa=requiredaxialstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,N
Pn/
=allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.2.2.2
Mrip=requiredinplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
Mnip/=allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.2.2
Mrop
=requiredoutofplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
Mnop/=allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.2.3
10.11.3.3 CriteriaforRectangularHSS
Qf=1
1.3
0.4 /
10.11.3.9
10.11.3.10
and
Pr=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,N.
S=chordelasticsectionmodulus,mm3.
Fc=Fy,MPa.
6565
Part6
StructuralDesign
Fc=0.6Fy,MPa.
Thecriteriahereinareapplicableonlywhentheconnectionconfigurationiswithinthefollowinglimits:
Branchangleisapproximately900
Chordwallslenderness:ratioofoverallwallwidthtothicknesslessthanorequalto35
Tensionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofoverallwallwidthtothicknesslessthanorequalto35
Compressionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofoverallwallwidthtothicknesslessthanorequalto1.25(E/Fyb)0.5
andalsolessthan35
Widthratio:ratioofoverallwallwidthofbranchtooverallwallwidthofchordgreaterthanorequalto0.25
Aspectratio:0.5ratioofdepthtowidth2.0
Ductility:Fy/Fu0.8
10.11.3.3.2BrancheswithInPlaneBendingMomentsinTandCrossConnections
limitstatesofchordwallplastification,sidewalllocalyieldingandlocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistribution.
1/2
2/ 1
/ 1
10.11.3.11
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
0.5
10.11.3.12
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
where
=FyforTconnections
=0.8Fyforcrossconnections
10.11.3.13
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
Where
10/
10.11.3.14
/
3
Zb=branchplasticsectionmodulusabouttheaxisofbending,mm .
10.11.3.3.3BrancheswithOutofPlaneBendingMomentsinTandCrossConnections
limitstatesofchordwallplastification,sidewalllocalyielding,localyieldingduetounevenloaddistributionand
chorddistortionalfailure.
0.5
/ 1
/ 1
10.11.3.15
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
6566
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.11.3.16
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
where
=FyforTconnections
=0.8Fyforcrossconnections
0.5 1
10.11.3.17
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
where
10/
10.11.3.18
Zb=branchplasticsectionmodulusabouttheaxisofbending,mm3.
Forthelimitstateofchorddistortionalfailure,
.
10.11.3.19
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
This limit state need not be checked for crossconnections or for Tconnections if chord distortional failure is
preventedbyothermeans.
10.11.3.3.4BrancheswithCombinedBendingMomentandAxialForceinTandCrossConnections
Connections subject to branch axial load, branch inplane bending moment and branch outofplane bending
moment,oranycombinationoftheseloadeffects,shouldsatisfy
1.0
10.11.3.20
where
Pr =Pu=requiredaxialstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,N
Pn=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.2.3.2
Mrip=requiredinplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
Mnip=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.3.2
Mrop=requiredoutofplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
Mnop=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.3.3
1.0
10.11.3.21
where
Pr=Pa=requiredaxialstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,N
Pn/
=allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.2.3.2
Mrip=requiredinplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
Mnip/=allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.3.2
Mrop
=requiredoutofplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
Mnop/=allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.3.3
6567
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.12
DesignforServiceability
Thischapteraddressesserviceabilityperformancedesignrequirements.
10.12.1
GeneralProvisions
Serviceability is a state in which the function of a building, its appearance, maintainability, durability, and
comfort of its occupants are preserved under normal usage. Limiting values of structural behavior for
serviceability (for example, maximum deflections, accelerations) shall be chosen with due regard to the
intendedfunctionofthestructure.Serviceabilityshallbeevaluatedusingappropriateloadcombinationsforthe
serviceabilitylimitstatesidentified.
10.12.2
Camber
Wherecamberis usedto achieveproperposition and location of thestructure, themagnitude, direction and

locationofcambershallbespecifiedinthestructuraldrawingsinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofChapter1.
10.12.3
Deflections
Deflectionsinstructuralmembersandstructuralsystemsunderappropriateserviceloadcombinationsshallnot
impairtheserviceabilityofthestructure.Limitingvaluesofdeflectionsofvariousstructuralmembersshallbein
accordancewiththosespecifiedinSection1.4ofChapter1.
10.12.4
Drift
Driftofastructureshallbeevaluatedunderserviceloadstoprovideforserviceabilityofthestructure,including
theintegrityofinteriorpartitionsandexteriorcladding.Driftunderstrengthloadcombinationsshallnotcause
collisionwithadjacentstructuresorexceedthelimitingvaluesspecifiedinSection1.5.6ofChapter1.
10.12.5
Vibration
Theeffectofvibrationonthecomfortoftheoccupantsandthefunctionofthestructureshallbeconsidered.
Sourcesofvibrationtobeconsideredincludepedestrianloading,vibratingmachineryandothersidentifiedfor
thestructure.Itmustbeshownbyanyrationalmethodofanalysisthatthevibrationsinducedbyanysource
including the above mentioned ones is within tolerable limit and shall not cause any adverse effect on the
safety,stabilityanddurabilityofthestructure.
10.12.6
WindInducedMotion
The effect of windinduced motion of buildings on the comfort of occupants shall be considered. For flexible
building and structures as defined in Sec. 2.4.2, it must be shown by a rational dynamic analysis that wind
inducedvibrationdoesnotcauseanydiscomforttooccupantsaswellasthewindinduceddynamiceffectdoes
notcauseanyadverseeffectonthesafety,stabilityanddurabilityofthestructure.
10.12.7 ExpansionandContraction
Theeffectsofthermalexpansionandcontractionofabuildingshallbeconsidered.Damagetobuildingcladding
cancausewaterpenetrationandmayleadtocorrosion.
10.12.8 ConnectionSlip
The effects of connection slip shall be included in the design where slip at bolted connections may cause
deformations that impair the serviceability of the structure. Where appropriate, the connection shall be
designedtoprecludeslip.ForthedesignofslipcriticalconnectionsseeSections10.10.3.8and10.10.3.9.
10.13
Fabrication,ErectionandQualityControl
This chapter addresses requirements for design and shop drawings, fabrication, shop painting, erection and
qualitycontrol.
10.13.1
DESIGNDRAWINGSANDSPECIFICATIONS
StructuralDesignDrawingsandSpecifications
6568
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Unless otherwise indicated in the contract documents, the structural design drawings shall be based upon
consideration of the design loads and forces to be resisted by the structural steel frame in the completed
project.
Thestructuraldesigndrawingsshallclearlyshowtheworkthatistobeperformedandshallgivethefollowing
informationwithsufficientdimensionstoaccuratelyconveythequantityandnatureofthestructuralsteeltobe
fabricated:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Thesize,section,materialgradeandlocationofallmembers;
Allgeometryandworkingpointsnecessaryforlayout;
Floorelevations;
Columncentersandoffsets;
Thecamberrequirementsformembers;
Joiningrequirementsbetweenelementsofbuiltupmembers;and,
TheinformationthatisrequiredinSections10.13.1.1.1through10.13.1.1.6.
Thestructuralsteelspecificationsshallincludeanyspecialrequirementsforthefabricationanderectionofthe
structuralsteel.
The structural design drawings, specifications and addenda shall be numbered and dated for the purposesof
identification.
10.13.1.1 DetailingofComponents
Permanentbracing,columnstiffeners,columnwebdoublerplates,bearingstiffenersinbeamsandgirders,
web reinforcement, openings for other trades and other special details, where required, shall be shown in
sufficientdetailinthestructuraldesigndrawingssothatthequantity,detailingandfabricationrequirementsfor
theseitemscanbereadilyunderstood.
10.13.1.2 Designer'sResponsibility
The owners designated representative for design shall indicate one of the following options for each
connection:
(1)Thecompleteconnectiondesignshallbeshowninthestructuraldesigndrawings;
(2)Inthestructuraldesigndrawingsorspecifications,theconnectionshallbedesignatedtobeselectedor
completedbyanexperiencedsteeldetailer;or,
(3)Inthestructuraldesigndrawingsorspecifications,theconnectionshallbedesignatedtobedesignedby
alicensedprofessionalengineerworkingforthefabricator.
Inalloftheaboveoptions,
(a)TherequirementsofSection10.13.1.1shallapply;and,
(b)TheapprovalsprocessinSection10.13.2.4shallbefollowed.
Whenoption(2)aboveisspecified:
Theexperiencedsteeldetailershallutilizetablesorschematicinformationprovidedinthestructuraldesign
drawingsintheselectionorcompletionoftheconnections.Whensuchinformationisnotprovided,standard
referenceinformationasapprovedbytheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesign,shallbeused.
Whenoption(2)or(3)aboveisspecified
Theownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesignshallprovidethefollowinginformationinthestructural
designdrawingsandspecifications:
a) Anyrestrictionsonthetypesofconnectionsthatarepermitted;
b) Dataconcerningtheloads,includingshears,moments,axialforcesandtransferforces,thatare
toberesistedbytheindividualmembersandtheirconnections,sufficienttoallowthe
selection,completion,ordesignoftheconnectiondetailswhilepreparingtheshopand
erectiondrawings;
c) Whetherthedatarequiredin(b)isgivenattheserviceloadlevelorthefactoredloadlevel;
d) WhetherLRFDorASDistobeusedintheselection,completion,ordesignofconnection
details;and,
e) Whatsubstantiatingconnectioninformation,ifany,istobeprovidedwiththeshopand
erectiondrawingstotheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesign.
6569
Part6
StructuralDesign
Whenoption(3)aboveisspecified:
a) Thefabricatorshallsubmitinatimelymannerrepresentativesamplesoftherequired
substantiatingconnectioninformationtotheownersdesignatedrepresentativesfor
designandconstruction.Theownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesignshallconfirmin
writinginatimelymannerthattheserepresentativesamplesareconsistentwiththe
requirementsinthecontractdocuments,orshalladvisewhatmodificationsarerequiredto
bringtherepresentativesamplesintocompliancewiththerequirementsinthecontract
documents.ThisinitialsubmittalandreviewisinadditiontotherequirementsinSection
10.13.2.4.
b) Thelicensedprofessionalengineerinresponsiblechargeoftheconnectiondesignshallreview
andconfirminwritingaspartofthesubstantiatingconnectioninformation,thattheshopand
erectiondrawingsproperlyincorporatetheconnectiondesigns.However,thisreviewbythe
licensedprofessionalengineerinresponsiblechargeoftheconnectiondesigndoesnotreplace
theapprovalprocessoftheshopanderectiondrawingsbytheownersdesignated
representativefordesigninSection10.13.2.4.
c) Thefabricatorshallprovideameansbywhichthesubstantiatingconnectioninformationis
referencedtotherelatedconnectionsontheshopanderectiondrawingsforthepurposeof
review.
10.13.1.2.1
LevellingPlates
When leveling plates are to be furnished as part of the contract requirements, their locations and required
thicknessandsizesshallbespecifiedinthecontractdocuments.
10.13.1.2.2
NonStructuralElements
Whenthestructuralsteelframe,inthecompletelyerectedandfullyconnectedstate,requiresinteractionwith
nonstructuralsteelelements(seeSection2)forstrengthand/orstability,thosenonstructuralsteelelements
shallbeidentifiedinthecontractdocumentsasrequiredinSection10.13.5.10.
10.13.1.2.3
Camber
Whencamberisrequired,themagnitude,directionandlocationofcambershallbespecifiedinthestructural
designdrawings.
10.13.1.2.4
PaintingInformation
Specific members or portions thereof that are to be left unpainted shall be identified in the contract
documents. When shop painting is required, the painting requirements shall be specified in the contract
documents,includingthefollowinginformation:
a) Theidentificationofspecificmembersorportionsthereoftobepainted;
b) Thesurfacepreparationthatisrequiredforthesemembers;
c) Thepaintspecificationsandmanufacturersproductidentificationthatarerequiredforthese
members;and,
d) Theminimumdryfilmshopcoatthicknessthatisrequiredforthesemembers.
10.13.1.3
Architectural,ElectricalandMechanicalDesignDrawingsandSpecifications
All requirements for the quantities, sizes and locations of structural steel shall be shown or noted in the
structural design drawings. The use of architectural, electrical and/or mechanical design drawings as a
supplementtothestructuraldesigndrawingsispermittedforthepurposesofdefiningdetailconfigurationsand
constructioninformation.
10.13.1.4
Discrepancies
When discrepancies exist between the design drawings and specifications, the design drawings shall govern.
Whendiscrepanciesexistbetweenscaledimensionsinthedesigndrawingsandthefigureswritteninthem,the
figures shall govern. When discrepancies exist between the structural design drawings and the architectural,
electrical or mechanical design drawings or design drawings for other trades, the structural design drawings
shallgovern.
6570
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
When a discrepancy is discovered in the contract documents in the course of the fabricators work, the
fabricatorshallpromptlynotifytheownersdesignatedrepresentativeforconstructionsothatthediscrepancy
canberesolvedbytheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesign.Suchresolutionshallbetimelysoasnotto
delaythefabricatorswork.SeeSections10.13.1.5and10.13.7.3.
10.13.1.5
LegibilityofDesignDrawings
Designdrawingsshallbeclearlylegibleanddrawntoanidentifiedscalethatisappropriatetoclearlyconveythe
information.
10.13.1.6
RevisionstotheDesignDrawingsandSpecifications
Revisions to the design drawings and specifications shall be made either by issuing new design drawings and
specifications or by reissuing the existing design drawings and specifications. In either case, all revisions,
includingrevisionsthatarecommunicatedthroughresponsestoRFIsortheannotationofshopand/orerection
drawings (see Section 10.13.2.4.2), shall be clearly and individually indicated in the contract documents. The
contractdocumentsshallbedatedandidentifiedbyrevisionnumber.Eachdesigndrawingsshallbeidentified
bythesamedrawingnumberthroughoutthedurationoftheproject,regardlessoftherevision.SeealsoSection
10.13.7.3.
10.13.2
ShopandErectionDrawings
Shop drawings shall be prepared in advance of fabrication and give complete information necessary for the
fabrication of the component parts of the structure, including the location, type and size of welds and bolts.
Erectiondrawingsshallbepreparedinadvanceoferectionandgiveinformationnecessaryforerectionofthe
structure.Shopanderectiondrawingsshallclearlydistinguishbetweenshopandfieldweldsandboltsandshall
clearlyidentifypretensionedandslipcriticalhighstrengthboltedconnections.Shopanderectiondrawingsshall
bemadewithdueregardtospeedandeconomyinfabricationanderection.
10.13.2.1
OwnerResponsibility
Theownershallfurnish,inatimelymannerandinaccordancewiththecontractdocuments,completestructural
design drawings and specifications that have been released for construction. Unless otherwise noted, design
drawingsthatareprovidedaspartofacontractbidpackageshallconstituteauthorizationbytheownerthatthe
designdrawingsarereleasedforconstruction.
Records of the meetings should be written and distributed to all parties. Subsequent meetings to
discussprogressandissuesthatariseduringconstructionalsocanbehelpful,particularlywhentheyare
heldonaregularschedule.
10.13.2.2
FabricatorResponsibility
ExceptasprovidedinSection10.13.2.5,thefabricatorshallproduceshopanderectiondrawingsforthe
fabricationanderectionofthestructuralsteelandisresponsibleforthefollowing:
(a) The transfer of information from the contract documents into accurate and complete shop and erection
drawings;and,
(b)Thedevelopmentofaccurate,detaileddimensionalinformationtoprovideforthefitupofpartsinthefield.
Eachshopanderectiondrawingshallbeidentifiedbythesamedrawingnumberthroughoutthedurationofthe
projectandshallbeidentifiedbyrevisionnumberanddate,witheachspecificrevisionclearlyidentified.
When the fabricator submits a request to change connection details that are described in the contract
documents, the fabricator shall notify the owners designated representatives for design and construction in
writinginadvanceofthesubmissionoftheshopanderectiondrawings.Theownersdesignatedrepresentative
fordesignshallreviewandapproveorrejecttherequestinatimelymanner.
Whenrequestedtodosobytheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesign,thefabricatorshallprovideto
theownersdesignatedrepresentativesfordesignandconstructionitsscheduleforthesubmittalofshopand
erectiondrawingssoastofacilitatethetimelyflowofinformationbetweenallparties.
6571
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.13.2.3
UseofCADFilesand/orCopiesofDesignDrawings
Thefabricatorshallneitherusenorreproduceanypartofthedesigndrawingsaspartoftheshoporerection
drawingswithoutthewrittenpermissionoftheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesign.WhenCADfilesor
copies of the design drawings are made available for the fabricators use, the fabricator shall accept this
informationunderthefollowingconditions:
a) AllinformationcontainedintheCADfilesorcopiesofthedesigndrawingsshallbeconsidered
instrumentsofserviceoftheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesignandshallnotbe
usedforotherprojects,additionstotheprojectorthecompletionoftheprojectbyothers.
CADfilesandcopiesofthedesigndrawingsshallremainthepropertyoftheowners
designatedrepresentativefordesignandinnocaseshallthetransferoftheseCADfilesor
copiesofthedesigndrawingsbeconsideredasale.
b) TheCADfilesorcopiesofthedesigndrawingsshallnotbeconsideredtobecontract
documents.IntheeventofaconflictbetweenthedesigndrawingsandtheCADfilesorcopies
thereof,thedesigndrawingsshallgovern;
c) TheuseofCADfilesorcopiesofthedesigndrawingsshallnotinanywayobviatethe
fabricatorsresponsibilityforpropercheckingandcoordinationofdimensions,details,member
sizesandfitupandquantitiesofmaterialsasrequiredtofacilitatethepreparationofshopand
erectiondrawingsthatarecompleteandaccurateasrequiredinSection4.2;and,
d) Thefabricatorshallremoveinformationthatisnotrequiredforthefabricationorerectionof
thestructuralsteelfromtheCADfilesorcopiesofthedesigndrawings.
10.13.2.4
Approval
Except as provided in Section 10.13.2.5, the shop and erection drawings shall be submitted to the owners
designated representatives for design and construction for review and approval. The shop and erection
drawingsshallbereturnedtothefabricatorwithin14calendardays.
Finalsubstantiatingconnectioninformation,ifany,shallalsobesubmittedwiththeshopanderectiondrawings.
Theownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesignisthefinalauthorityintheeventofadisagreementbetween
partiesregardingconnectiondesign.
Approvedshopanderectiondrawingsshallbeindividuallyannotatedbytheownersdesignatedrepresentatives
fordesignandconstructionaseitherapprovedorapprovedsubjecttocorrectionsnoted.Whensorequired,the
fabricatorshallsubsequentlymakethecorrectionsnotedandfurnishcorrectedshopanderectiondrawingsto
theownersdesignatedrepresentativesfordesignandconstruction.
10.13.2.4.1
ConstituentsofApproval
Approvaloftheshopanderectiondrawings,approvalsubjecttocorrectionsnotedandsimilarapprovalsshall
constitutethefollowing:
a) Confirmationthatthefabricatorhascorrectlyinterpretedthecontractdocumentsinthe
preparationofthosesubmittals;
b) Confirmationthattheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesignhasreviewedand
approvedtheconnectiondetailsshownontheshopanderectiondrawingsandsubmittedin
accordancewithSections10.13.1and10.13.2,ifapplicable;and,
c) Releasebytheownersdesignatedrepresentativesfordesignandconstructionforthe
fabricatortobeginfabricationusingtheapprovedsubmittals.
Such approval shall not relieve the fabricator of the responsibility for either the accuracy of the detailed
dimensionsintheshopanderectiondrawingsorthegeneralfitupofpartsthataretobeassembledinthefield.
Thefabricatorshalldeterminethefabricationschedulethatisnecessarytomeettherequirementsof
thecontract.
10.13.2.4.2
AuthorizationbyOwner
Unlessotherwisenoted,anyadditions,deletionsorrevisionsthatareindicatedinresponsestoRFIsoronthe
approvedshopanderectiondrawingsshallconstituteauthorizationbytheownerthattheadditions,deletions
or revisions are released for construction. The fabricator and the erector shall promptly notify the owners
designatedrepresentativeforconstructionwhenanydirectionornotationinresponsestoRFIsorontheshop
6572
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
orerectiondrawingsorotherinformationwillresultinanadditionalcostand/oradelay.SeeSections10.13.1.5
and10.13.7.3.
10.13.2.5 Shopand/orErectionDrawingsNotFurnishedbytheFabricator
Whentheshopanderectiondrawingsarenotpreparedbythefabricator,butarefurnishedbyothers,theyshall
bedeliveredtothefabricatorinatimelymanner.Theseshopanderectiondrawingsshallbeprepared,insofar
asispractical,inaccordancewiththeshopfabricationanddetailingstandardsofthefabricator.Thefabricator
shallneitherberesponsibleforthecompletenessoraccuracyofshopanderectiondrawingssofurnished,nor
forthegeneralfitupofthemembersthatarefabricatedfromthem.
10.13.2.6 TheRFIProcess
Whenrequestsforinformation(RFIs)areissued,theprocessshallincludethemaintenanceofawrittenrecord
ofinquiriesandresponsesrelatedtointerpretationandimplementationofthecontractdocuments,including
theclarificationsand/orrevisionstothecontractdocumentsthatresult,ifany.RFIsshallnotbeusedforthe
incrementalreleaseforconstructionofdesigndrawings.WhenRFIsinvolvediscrepanciesorrevisions,see
Sections10.13.1.3,10.13.1.5,and10.13.2.4.2.
10.13.2.7 ErectionDrawings
Erectiondrawingsshallbeprovidedtotheerectorinatimelymannersoastoallowtheerectortoproperlyplan
andperformthework.
10.13.3
MATERIALS
10.13.3.1 MillMaterials
Unlessotherwisenotedinthecontractdocuments,thefabricatorispermittedtoorderthematerialsthatare
necessary for fabrication when the fabricator receives contract documents that have been released for
construction.
Unless otherwise specified by means of special testing requirements in the contract documents, mill
testingshallbelimitedtothoseteststhatarerequiredforthematerialintheASTMspecificationsindicatedin
the contract documents. Materials ordered to special material requirements shall be marked by the
supplierasspecifiedinASTMA6/A6MSection12priortodeliverytothefabricatorsshoporotherpointofuse.
Suchmaterialnotsomarkedbythesupplier,shallnotbeuseduntil:
a) ItsidentificationisestablishedbymeansoftestinginaccordancewiththeapplicableASTM
specifications;and,
b) Afabricatorsidentificationmark,asdescribedinSection10.13.2hasbeenapplied.
WhenmillmaterialdoesnotsatisfyASTMA6/A6Mtolerancesforcamber,profile,flatnessor
sweep,thefabricatorshallbepermittedtoperformcorrectiveprocedures,includingtheuseof
controlledheatingand/ormechanicalstraightening,subjecttothelimitationsintheAISC
Specification.
10.13.3.2 StockMaterials
Ifusedforstructuralpurposes,materialsthataretakenfromstockbythefabricatorshallbeofaquality
thatisatleastequaltothatrequiredintheASTMspecificationsindicatedinthecontractdocuments.
Materialtestreportsshallbeacceptedassufficientrecordofthequalityofmaterialstakenfromstockbythe
fabricator. The fabricator shall review and retain the material test reports that cover such stock materials.
However, the fabricator need not maintain records that identify individual pieces of stock material against
individualmaterialtestreports,providedthefabricatorpurchasesstockmaterialsthatmeettherequirements
formaterialgradeandqualityintheapplicableASTMspecifications.
Stockmaterialsthatarepurchasedundernoparticularspecification,underaspecificationthatislessrigorous
thantheapplicableASTMspecificationsorwithoutmaterialtestreportsorotherrecognizedtestreportsshall
notbeusedwithouttheapprovaloftheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesign.
10.13.4
Fabrication
10.13.4.1 Cambering,CurvingandStraightening
6573
Part6
StructuralDesign
Localapplicationofheatormechanicalmeansispermittedtobeusedtointroduceorcorrectcamber,curvature
andstraightness.Thetemperatureofheatedareas,asmeasuredbyapprovedmethods,shallnotexceed5930C
forA514/A514MandA852/A852Msteelnor1,2000F(6490C)forothersteels.
10.13.4.2 ThermalCutting
ThermallycutedgesshallmeettherequirementsofAWSD1.1,Sections5.15.1.2,5.15.4.3and5.15.4.4withthe
exception that thermally cut free edges that will be subject to calculated static tensile stress shall be free of
roundbottom gouges greater than 5 mm deep and sharp Vshaped notches. Gouges deeper than 5 mm and
notchesshallberemovedbygrindingorrepairedbywelding.
Reentrantcorners,exceptreentrantcornersofbeamcopesandweldaccessholes,shallmeettherequirements
of AWS D1.1, Section A5.16. If another specified contour is required it must be shown on the contract
documents.
BeamcopesandweldaccessholesshallmeetthegeometricalrequirementsofSection10.10.1.6.Beamcopes
andweldaccessholesinshapesthataretobegalvanizedshallbeground.Forshapeswithaflangethicknessnot
exceeding50mmtheroughnessofthermallycutsurfacesofcopesshallbenogreaterthanasurfaceroughness
value of 50m as defined in ASME B46.1 Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay). For beam
copesandweldaccessholesinwhichthecurvedpartoftheaccessholeisthermallycutinASTMA6/A6Mhot
rolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 50 mm and welded builtup shapes with material thickness
greaterthan50mm,apreheattemperatureofnotlessthan660Cshallbeappliedpriortothermalcutting.The
thermallycutsurfaceofaccessholesinASTMA6/A6Mhotrolledshapeswithaflangethicknessexceeding50
mmandbuiltupshapeswithamaterialthicknessgreaterthan50mmshallbegroundandinspectedforcracks
usingmagneticparticleinspectioninaccordancewithASTME709.Anycrackisunacceptableregardlessofsize
orlocation.
10.13.4.3 PlaningofEdges
Planingorfinishingofshearedorthermallycutedgesofplatesorshapesisnotrequiredunlessspecificallycalled
forinthecontractdocumentsorincludedinastipulatededgepreparationforwelding.
10.13.4.4 WeldedConstruction
The technique of welding, the workmanship, appearance and quality of welds, and the methods used in
correctingnonconformingworkshallbeinaccordancewithAWSD1.1exceptasmodifiedinSectionJ2.
10.13.4.5 BoltedConstruction
Partsofboltedmembersshallbepinnedorboltedandrigidlyheldtogetherduringassembly.Useofadriftpinin
boltholesduringassemblyshallnotdistortthemetalorenlargetheholes.Poormatchingofholesshallbecause
forrejection.
BoltholesshallcomplywiththeprovisionsoftheRCSCSpecificationforStructuralJointsUsingASTMA325or
A490Bolts,Section10.13.3.3exceptthatthermallycutholesshallbepermittedwithasurfaceroughnessprofile
notexceeding25masdefinedinASMEB46.1.Gougesshallnotexceedadepthof2mm.
Fullyinsertedfingershims,withatotalthicknessofnotmorethan6mmwithinajointarepermittedinjoints
without changing the strength (based upon hole type) for the design of connections. The orientation of such
shimsisindependentofthedirectionofapplicationoftheload.
TheuseofhighstrengthboltsshallconformtotherequirementsoftheRCSCSpecificationforStructuralJoints
UsingASTMA325orA490Bolts,exceptasmodifiedinSection10.10.3.
10.13.4.6 CompressionJoints
Compressionjointsthatdependoncontactbearingaspartofthesplicestrengthshallhavethebearingsurfaces
ofindividualfabricatedpiecespreparedbymilling,sawing,orothersuitablemeans.
10.13.4.7 DimensionalTolerances
DimensionaltolerancesshallbeinaccordancewithASTMA6/A6M.
10.13.4.8 FinishofColumnBases
Columnbasesandbaseplatesshallbefinishedinaccordancewiththefollowingrequirements:
6574
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
(1)Steelbearingplates50mmorlessinthicknessarepermittedwithoutmilling,providedasatisfactorycontact
bearing is obtained. Steel bearing plates over 50 mm but not over 100 mm in thickness are permitted to be
straightened by pressing or, if presses are not available, by milling for bearing surfaces (except as noted in
subparagraphs2and3ofthissection),toobtainasatisfactorycontactbearing.Steelbearingplatesover100
mminthicknessshallbemilledforbearingsurfaces(exceptasnotedinsubparagraphs2and3ofthissection).
(2) Bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column bases that are grouted to ensure full bearing contact on
foundationsneednotbemilled.
(3) Top surfaces of bearing plates need not be milled when completejoint penetration groove welds are
providedbetweenthecolumnandthebearingplate.
10.13.4.9 HolesforAnchorRods
Holes for anchor rods shall be permitted to be thermally cut in accordance with the provisions of Section
10.13.2.2.
10.13.4.10 DrainHoles
WhenwatercancollectinsideHSSorboxmembers,eitherduringconstructionorduringservice,themember
shallbesealed,providedwithadrainholeatthebase,orprotectedbyothersuitablemeans.
10.13.4.11 RequirementsforGalvanizedMembers
Membersandpartstobegalvanizedshallbedesigned,detailedandfabricatedtoprovideforflowanddrainage
ofpicklingfluidsandzincandtopreventpressurebuildupinenclosedparts.
10.13.5
ShopPainting
10.13.5.1 GeneralRequirements
Shoppaintisnotrequiredunlessspecifiedbythecontractdocuments.
10.13.5.2 InaccessibleSurfaces
Except for contact surfaces, surfaces inaccessible after shop assembly shall be cleaned and painted prior to
assembly,ifrequiredbythedesigndocuments.
10.13.5.3 ContactSurfaces
Paint is permitted in bearingtype connections. For slipcritical connections, the faying surface requirements
shallbeinaccordancewiththeRCSCSpecificationforStructuralJointsUsingASTMA325orA490Bolts,Section
3.2.2(b).
10.13.5.4 FinishedSurfaces
Machinefinishedsurfacesshallbeprotectedagainstcorrosionbyarustinhibitivecoatingthatcanberemoved
priortoerection,orwhichhascharacteristicsthatmakeremovalpriortoerectionunnecessary.
10.13.5.5 SurfacesAdjacenttoFieldWelds
Unlessotherwisespecifiedinthedesigndocuments,surfaceswithin50mmofanyfieldweldlocationshallbe
freeofmaterialsthatwouldpreventproperweldingorproduceobjectionablefumesduringwelding.
10.13.6
Erection
10.13.6.1 AlignmentofColumnBases
Columnbasesshallbesetlevelandtocorrectelevationwithfullbearingonconcreteormasonry.
10.13.6.2 Bracing
Theframeofsteelskeletonbuildingsshallbecarrieduptrueandplumb.Temporarybracingshallbeprovided,
wherevernecessarytosupporttheloadstowhichthestructuremaybesubjected,includingequipmentandthe
operationofsame.Suchbracingshallbeleftinplaceaslongasrequiredforsafety.
6575
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.13.6.3 Alignment
Nopermanentboltingorweldingshallbeperformeduntiltheadjacentaffectedportionsofthestructurehave
beenproperlyaligned.
10.13.6.4 FitofColumnCompressionJointsandBasePlates
Lack of contact bearing not exceeding a gap of 2 mm, regardless of the type of splice used ( partialjoint
penetrationgrooveweldedorbolted),ispermitted.Ifthegapexceeds2mm,butislessthan6mm,andifan
engineering investigation shows that sufficient contact area does not exist, the gap shall be packed out with
nontaperedsteelshims.Shimsneednotbeotherthanmildsteel,regardlessofthegradeofthemainmaterial.
10.13.6.5 FieldWelding
Shoppaintonsurfacesadjacenttojointstobefieldweldedshallbewirebrushedifnecessarytoassureweld
quality.
Fieldweldingofattachmentstoinstalledembedmentsincontactwithconcreteshallbedoneinsuchamanner
as to avoid excessive thermal expansion of the embedment which could result in spalling or cracking of the
concreteorexcessivestressintheembedmentanchors.
10.13.6.6 FieldPainting
Responsibilityfortouchuppainting,cleaningandfieldpaintingshallbeallocatedinaccordancewithaccepted
localpractices,andthisallocationshallbesetforthexplicitlyinthedesigndocuments.
10.13.6.7 Connections
Aserectionprogresses,thestructureshallbesecurelyboltedorweldedtosupportthedead,windanderection
loads.
10.13.7
QualityControl
The fabricator shall provide quality control procedures to the extent that the fabricator deems necessary to
assurethattheworkisperformedinaccordancewiththisSpecification.Inadditiontothefabricatorsquality
controlprocedures,materialandworkmanshipatalltimesmaybesubjecttoinspectionbyqualifiedinspectors
representingthepurchaser.Ifsuchinspectionbyrepresentativesofthepurchaserwillberequired,itshallbeso
statedinthedesigndocuments.
10.13.7.1 Cooperation
Asfaraspossible,theinspectionbyrepresentativesofthepurchasershallbemadeatthefabricatorsplant.The
fabricatorshallcooperatewiththeinspector,permittingaccessforinspectiontoallplaceswhereworkisbeing
done.Thepurchasersinspectorshallschedulethisworkforminimuminterruptiontotheworkofthefabricator.
10.13.7.2 Rejections
Materialorworkmanshipnotinconformancewith theprovisionsofthisSpecificationmayberejectedatany
timeduringtheprogressofthework.
Thefabricatorshallreceivecopiesofallreportsfurnishedtothepurchaserbytheinspectionagency.
10.13.7.3 InspectionofWelding
TheinspectionofweldingshallbeperformedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofAWSD1.1exceptasmodified
inSection10.10.2.
WhenvisualinspectionisrequiredtobeperformedbyAWScertifiedweldinginspectors,itshallbesospecified
inthedesigndocuments.
When nondestructive testing is required, the process, extent and standards of acceptance shall be clearly
definedinthedesigndocuments.
10.13.7.4 InspectionofSlipCriticalHighStrengthBoltedConnections
Theinspectionofslipcriticalhighstrengthboltedconnectionsshallbeinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthe
RCSCSpecificationforStructuralJointsUsingASTMA325orA490Bolts.
6576
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.13.7.5 IdentificationofSteel
Thefabricatorshallbeabletodemonstratebyawrittenprocedureandbyactualpracticeamethodofmaterial
identification,visibleatleastthroughthefitupoperation,forthemainstructuralelementsofeachshipping
piece.
10.14
DirectAnalysisMethod
Thissectionaddressesthedirectanalysismethodforstructuralsystemscomprisedofmomentframes,braced
frames,shearwalls,orcombinationsthereof.
10.14.1
GeneralRequirements
MembersshallsatisfytheprovisionsofSection10.8.1withthenominalcolumnstrengths,Pn,determinedusing
K = 1.0. The required strengths for members, connections and other structural elements shall be determined
using a secondorder elastic analysis with the constraints presented in Section 10.14.3. All component and
connectiondeformationsthatcontributetothelateraldisplacementofthestructureshallbeconsideredinthe
analysis.
10.14.2
NotionalLoads
Notional loads shall be applied to the lateral framing system to account for the effects of geometric
imperfections,inelasticity,orboth.Notionalloadsarelateralloadsthatareappliedateachframingleveland
specifiedintermsofthegravityloadsappliedatthatlevel.Thegravityloadusedtodeterminethenotionalload
shall be equal to or greater than the gravity load associated with the load combination being evaluated.
Notional loads shall be applied in the direction that adds to the destabilizing effects under the specified load
combination.
10.14.3
NotionalLoads
(1)ThesecondorderanalysisshallconsiderbothPandPeffects.Itispermittedtoperformtheanalysisusing
anygeneralsecondorderanalysismethod, or by the amplified firstorder analysis method of Section 10.3.2,
provided thatthe B1 and B2 factors are based on the reduced stiffnesses definedin Equations 10.14.3.2and
10.14.3.3. Analyses shall be conducted according to the design and loading requirements specifiedin either
Section10.2.3.3(LRFD)orSection10.2.3.4(ASD). ForASD,thesecondorderanalysisshallbecarriedoutunder
1.6timestheASDloadcombinationsandtheresultsshallbedividedby1.6toobtaintherequiredstrengths.
MethodsofanalysisthatneglecttheeffectsofPonthelateraldisplacementofthestructurearepermitted
where the axial loads in all members whose flexural stiffnesses are considered to contribute to the lateral
stabilityofthestructuresatisfythefollowinglimit:
0.15
10.14.3.1
where
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthunderLRFDorASDloadcombinations,N
PeL 2EI/L2,evaluatedintheplaneofbending
And=1.0(LRFD)=1.6(ASD)
(2)Anotionalload,Ni=0.002Yi,appliedindependentlyintwoorthogonaldirections,shallbeappliedasalateral
loadinallloadcombinations.Thisloadshallbeinadditiontootherlateralloads,ifany,
where
Ni=notionallateralloadappliedatleveli,N
Yi=gravityloadfromtheLRFDloadcombinationor1.6timestheASDloadcombinationappliedatleveli,N
The notional load coefficient of 0.002 is based on an assumed initial story outofplumbness ratio of 1/500.
Where a smaller assumed outofplumbness is justified, the notional load coefficient may be adjusted
proportionally.
Forframeswheretheratioofsecondorderdrifttofirstorderdriftisequaltoorlessthan1.5,itispermissible
to apply the notional load, Ni , as a minimum lateral load for the gravityonly load combinations and not in
combinationwithotherlateralloads.
6577
Part6
StructuralDesign
Forallcases,itispermissibletousetheassumedoutofplumbnessgeometryintheanalysisofthestructurein
lieuofapplyinganotionalloadoraminimumlateralloadasdefinedabove.
(3)Areducedflexuralstiffness,EI*,
0.08
10.14.3.2
shallbeusedforallmemberswhoseflexuralstiffnessisconsideredtocontributetothelateralstabilityofthe
structure,
where
I=momentofinertiaabouttheaxisofbending,mm4
B=1.0forPr/Py0.5
=4 Pr/Py 1 Pr/Py forPr/Py>0.5
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthunderLRFDorASDloadcombinations,N
Py=AFy,memberyieldstrength,N
And=1.0(LRFD)=1.6(ASD)
Inlieuofusingb<1.0wherePr /Py>0.5,b=1.0maybeusedforallmembers,providedthatanadditive
notionalloadof0.001Yiisaddedtothenotionalloadrequiredin(2).
(4)Areducedflexuralstiffness,EA*,
0.8
10.14.3.3
shall be used for members whose axial stiffness is considered to contribute to the lateral stability of the
structure,whereAisthecrosssectionalmemberarea.
10.15
InelasticAnalysisandDesign
10.15.1
GeneralProvisions
InelasticanalysisispermittedfordesignaccordingtotheprovisionsofSection10.2.3.3(LRFD).Inelasticanalysis
isnotpermittedfordesignaccordingtotheprovisionsofSection10.2.3.4(ASD)exceptasprovidedinSection
10.15.3.
10.15.2
Materials
Membersundergoingplastichingingshallhaveaspecifiedminimumyieldstressnotexceeding450MPa.
10.15.3
MomentRedistribution
Beams and girders composed of compact sections as defined in Section 10.2.4 and satisfying the unbraced
lengthrequirementsofSection10.15.7,includingcompositemembers,maybeproportionedforninetenthsof
thenegativemomentsatpointsofsupport,producedbythegravityloadingcomputedbyanelasticanalysis,
providedthatthemaximumpositivemomentisincreasedbyonetenthoftheaveragenegativemoments.This
reductionisnotpermittedformomentsproducedbyloadingoncantileversandfordesignaccordingtoSections
10.15.4through10.15.8ofthissection.
Ifthenegativemomentisresistedbyacolumnrigidlyframedtothebeamorgirder,theonetenthreduction
may be used in proportioning the column for combined axial force and flexure, provided that the axial force
doesnotexceed0.15cFyAgforLRFDor0.15FyAg/cforASD,
where
Ag=grossareaofmember,mm2
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthecompressionflange,MPa.
c=resistancefactorforcompression=0.90
c=safetyfactorforcompression=1.67
6578
Vol.2
SteelStructures
10.15.4
Chapter10
LocalBuckling
Flangesandwebsofmemberssubjecttoplastichingingincombinedflexureandaxialcompressionshallbe
compactwithwidththicknessratioslessthanorequaltothelimitingpdefinedinTable10.2.4.1orasmodified
asfollows:
a) ForwebsofdoublysymmetricwideflangemembersandrectangularHSSincombinedflexure
andcompression
(i)For /
0.125
/
(ii)For /
3.76
10.15.4.1
2.75
0.125
10.15.4.2
/
1.12
2.33
1.49
where
E=modulusofelasticityofsteel200000MPa.
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthetypeofsteelbeingused,MPa.
h=asdefinedinSection10.2.4.2,mm.
Pu=requiredaxialstrengthincompression,N.
Py=memberyieldstrength,N.
tw=webthickness,mm.
b) Forflangesofrectangularboxandhollowstructuralsectionsofuniformthicknesssubjectto
bendingorcompression,flangecoverplates,anddiaphragmplatesbetweenlinesoffasteners
orwelds
0.94
10.15.4.3
where
b=asdefinedinSection10.2.4.2,mm.
t=asdefinedinSection10.2.4.2,mm.
(c)Forcircularhollowsectionsinflexure
0.045
10.15.4.4
where
D=outsidediameterofroundHSSmember,mm.
10.15.5
StabilityandSecondOrderEffects
Continuous beams not subjected to axial loads and that do not contribute to lateral stability of framed
structuresmaybedesignedbasedonafirstorderinelasticanalysisoraplasticmechanismanalysis.
Braced frames and moment frames may be designed based on a firstorder inelastic analysis or a plastic
mechanismanalysisprovidedthatstabilityandsecondordereffectsaretakenintoaccount.
Structures may be designed on the basis of a secondorder inelastic analysis. For beamcolumns, connections
and connected members, the required strengths shall be determined from a secondorder inelastic analysis,
where equilibrium is satisfied on the deformed geometry, taking into account the change in stiffness due to
yielding
10.15.5.1BracedFrames
Inbracedframesdesignedonthebasisofinelasticanalysis,bracesshallbedesignedtoremainelasticunderthe
designloads.Therequiredaxialstrengthforcolumnsandcompressionbracesshallnotexceedc 0.85FyAg ,
6579
Part6
StructuralDesign
where
c=0.90(LRFD)
10.15.5.2MomentFrames
Inmomentframesdesignedonthebasisofinelasticanalysis,therequiredaxialstrengthofcolumnsshallnot
exceedc 0.75FyAg
where
c=0.90(LRFD)
10.15.6
ColumnsandOtherCompressionMembers
InadditiontothelimitssetinSections10.15.5.1and10.15.5.2,therequiredaxialstrengthofcolumnsdesigned
on the basis of inelastic analysis shall not exceed the design strength, c Pn , determined according to the
provisionsofSection10.5.3.
Designbyinelasticanalysisispermittedifthecolumnslendernessratio,L/r,doesnotexceed4.71
where
L=laterallyunbracedlengthofamember,mm.
r=governingradiusofgyration,mm.
10.15.7
BeamsandOtherFlexuralMembers
The required moment strength, Mu, of beams designed on the basis of inelastic analysis shall not exceed the
designstrength,Mn,where
1.6
10.15.7.1
0.90
a) FordoublysymmetricandsinglysymmetricIshapedmemberswiththecompressionflange
equaltoorlargerthanthetensionflangeloadedintheplaneoftheweb:
0.12
10.15.7.2
0.076
where
M1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced length of beam, N-mm

M2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length of beam, N-mm
ry = radius of gyration about minor axis, mm
(M1 /M2) is positive when moments cause reverse curvature and negative for single curvature.
b) Forsolidrectangularbarsandsymmetricboxbeams:
0.17
0.10
0.10
10.15.7.3
There is no limit on Lbfor members with circular or square cross sections or for any beam bent about its minor axis.
10.15.8
BeamsandOtherFlexuralMembers
When inelastic analysis is used for symmetric members subject to bending and axial force, the provisions in
Section10.8.1apply.
Inelasticanalysisisnotpermittedformemberssubjecttotorsionandcombinedtorsion,flexure,shearand/or
axialforce.
6580
Vol.2
SteelStructures
10.15.9
Chapter10
Connections
Connectionsadjacenttoplastichingingregionsofconnectedmembersshallbedesignedwithsufficientstrength
andductilitytosustaintheforcesanddeformationsimposedundertherequiredloads.
10.16
DesignforPonding
This section provides methods for determining whether aroof system hasadequate strength and stiffness to
resistponding.
10.16.1
SimplifiedDesignforPonding
The roof system shall be considered stable for ponding and no further investigation is needed if both of the
followingtwoconditionsaremet:
0.9
3940
0.25
10.16.1.1
10.16.1.2
where
504
504
Lp=columnspacingindirectionofgirder(lengthofprimarymembers),m.
Ls=columnspacingperpendiculartodirectionofgirder(lengthofsecondarymembers),m.
S=spacingofsecondarymembers,m.
Ip=momentofinertiaofprimarymembers,mm4.
Is=momentofinertiaofsecondarymembers,mm4
Id=momentofinertiaofthesteeldecksupportedonsecondarymembers,mm4perm.
For trusses and steel joists, the moment of inertia Is shall be decreased 15 percent when used in the above
equation. A steel deck shall be considered a secondary member when it is directly supported by the primary
members.
10.16.2
ImprovedDesignforPonding
Theprovisionsgivenbelowarepermittedtobeusedwhenamoreexactdeterminationofframingstiffnessis
neededthanthatgiveninSection10.16.1.
Forprimarymembers,thestressindexshallbe
0.8
10.16.2.1
Forsecondarymembers,thestressindexshallbe
0.8
10.16.2.2
where
fo=stressduetotheloadcombination(D+R)
D=nominaldeadload
R=nominalloadduetorainwaterorsnow,exclusiveofthepondingcontribution,MPa.
Forroofframingconsistingofprimaryandsecondarymembers,thecombinedstiffnessshallbeevaluatedas
follows: enter Figure 10.16.1 at the level of the computed stress index Up determined for the primary
beam; move horizontally to the computed Cs value of the secondary beams and then downward to the
6581
Part6
StructuralDesign
abscissascale.Thecombinedstiffnessoftheprimaryandsecondaryframingissufficienttopreventponding
if theflexibility constant read from thislatter scale is more thanthe value of Cp computed for thegiven
primarymember;ifnot,astifferprimaryorsecondarybeam,orcombinationofboth,isrequired.
Fig.10.16.1. Limitingflexibilitycoefficientfortheprimarysystems
Fig.10.16.2.Limitingflexibilitycoefficientforthesecondarysystems.
AsimilarproceduremustbefollowedusingFigure10.16.2.
6582
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Forroofframingconsistingofaseriesofequallyspacedwallbearingbeams,thestiffnessshallbeevaluatedas
follows.Thebeamsareconsideredassecondarymemberssupportedonaninfinitelystiffprimarymember.For
thiscase,enterFigure10.16.2withthecomputedstressindexUs.ThelimitingvalueofCsisdeterminedbythe
interceptofahorizontallinerepresentingtheUsvalueandthecurveforCp=0.
Forroofframingconsistingofmetaldeckspanningbetweenbeamssupportedoncolumns,thestiffnessshallbe
evaluatedasfollows.EmployFigure10.16.1or10.16.2usingasCstheflexibilityconstantfora1mwidthofthe
roofdeck(S=1.0).
10.17
DesignforFatigue
This section applies to members and connections subject to high cyclic loading within the elastic range of
stresses of frequency and magnitude sufficient to initiate cracking and progressive failure, which defines the
limitstateoffatigue
10.17.1
General
TheprovisionsofthisSectionapplytostressescalculatedonthebasisofserviceloads.Themaximumpermitted
stressduetounfactoredloadsis0.66Fy.
Stressrangeisdefinedasthemagnitudeofthechangeinstressduetotheapplicationorremovaloftheservice
liveload.Inthecaseofastressreversal,thestressrangeshallbecomputedasthenumericalsumofmaximum
repeated tensile and compressive stresses or the numerical sum of maximum shearing stresses of opposite
directionatthepointofprobablecrackinitiation.
Inthecaseofcompletejointpenetrationbuttwelds,themaximumdesignstressrangecalculatedbyEquation
10.17.3.1appliesonlytoweldswithinternalsoundnessmeetingtheacceptancerequirementsofSection6.12.2
or6.13.2ofAWSD1.1.
Noevaluationoffatigueresistanceisrequirediftheliveloadstressrangeislessthanthethresholdstressrange,
FTH.SeeTable10.17.1.
No evaluation of fatigue resistance is required if the number of cycles of application of live load is less than
20,000.
ThecyclicloadresistancedeterminedbytheprovisionsofthisSectionisapplicabletostructureswithsuitable
corrosionprotectionorsubjectonlytomildlycorrosiveatmospheres,suchasnormalatmosphericconditions.
ThecyclicloadresistancedeterminedbytheprovisionsofthisSectionisapplicableonlytostructuressubjectto
temperaturesnotexceeding150oC.
The engineer of record shall provide either complete details including weld sizes or shall specify the planned
cyclelifeandthemaximumrangeofmoments,shearsandreactionsfortheconnections.
10.17.2
CalculationofMaximumStressesandStressRanges
Calculatedstressesshallbebaseduponelasticanalysis.Stressesshallnotbeamplifiedbystressconcentration
factorsforgeometricaldiscontinuities.
Forboltsandthreadedrodssubjecttoaxialtension,thecalculatedstressesshallincludetheeffectsofprying
action,ifany.Inthecaseofaxialstresscombinedwithbending,themaximumstresses,ofeachkind,shallbe
thosedeterminedforconcurrentarrangementsoftheappliedload.
Formembershavingsymmetriccrosssections,thefastenersandweldsshallbearrangedsymmetricallyabout
the axis of the member, or the total stresses including those due to eccentricity shall be included in the
calculationofthestressrange.
Foraxiallyloadedanglememberswherethecenterofgravityoftheconnectingweldsliesbetweenthelineof
thecenterofgravityoftheanglecrosssectionandthecenteroftheconnectedleg,theeffectsofeccentricity
shall be ignored. If the center of gravity of the connecting welds lies outside this zone, the total stresses,
includingthoseduetojointeccentricity,shallbeincludedinthecalculationofstressrange.
10.17.3
DesignStressRange
Therangeofstressatserviceloadsshallnotexceedthedesignstressrangecomputedasfollows.
6583
Part6
StructuralDesign
(a) For stress categories A, B, B, C, D, E and E (see table 10.17.1) the design stress range, FSR, shall be
determinedbyEquation10.17.3.1or10.17.3.2.
.
329
10.17.3.1
where
FSR=designstressrange,MPa.
Cf=constantfromTable10.17.1forthecategory
N=numberofstressrangefluctuationsindesignlife
=numberofstressrangefluctuationsperday365yearsofdesignlife
FTH=thresholdfatiguestressrange,maximumstressrangeforindefinitedesignlifefromTable10.17.1,MPa.
(b)ForstresscategoryF,thedesignstressrange,FSR,shallbedeterminedbyEquation10.17.3.2.
11
10
10.17.3.2
(c)Fortensionloadedplateelementsconnectedattheirendbycruciform,T,orcornerdetailswithcomplete
jointpenetration (CJP) groove welds or partial jointpenetration (PJP) groove welds, fillet welds, or
combinationsofthepreceding,transversetothedirectionofstress,thedesignstressrangeonthecrosssection
ofthetensionloadedplateelementatthetoeoftheweldshallbedeterminedasfollows:
(i) Based upon crack initiation from the toe of the weld on the tension loaded plate element the design
stressrange,FSR,shallbedeterminedbyEquation10.17.3.3forstresscategoryCwhichisequalto
14.4
10
10.17.3.3
68.9
(ii)Baseduponcrackinitiationfromtherootoftheweldthedesignstressrange,FSR,onthetensionloaded
plateelementusingtransversePJPgroovewelds,withorwithoutreinforcingorcontouringfilletwelds,the
designstressrangeonthecrosssectionatthetoeoftheweldshallbedeterminedbyEquation10.17.3.4,
stresscategoryCasfollows:
14.4
10
10.17.3.8
where
RPJP is the reduction factor for reinforced or nonreinforced transverse PJP groove welds determined as
follows:
1.12
1.01
10.17.3.9
1.24
1.0
IfRPJP=1.0,usestresscategoryC.
2a = the length of the nonwelded root face in the direction of the thickness of the tensionloaded plate,
mm.
W=thelegsizeofthereinforcingorcontouringfillet,ifany,inthedirectionofthethicknessofthetension
loadedplate,mm.
tp=thicknessoftensionloadedplate,mm.
(iii)Baseduponcrackinitiationfromtherootsofapairoftransversefilletweldsonoppositesidesofthe
tensionloadedplateelementthedesignstressrange,FSR,onthecrosssectionatthetoeoftheweldsshall
bedeterminedbyEquation10.17.3.5,stresscategoryCasfollows:
6584
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
14.4
10
10.17.3.10
where
RFIListhereductionfactorforjointsusingapairoftransversefilletweldsonly.
0.10
1.24
.
10.17.3.11
1.0
IfRFIL=1.0,usestresscategoryC.
10.17.4
BoltsandThreadedParts
Therangeofstressatserviceloadsshallnotexceedthestressrangecomputedasfollows.
a) Formechanicallyfastenedconnectionsloadedinshear,themaximumrangeofstressinthe
connectedmaterialatserviceloadsshallnotexceedthedesignstressrangecomputedusing
Equation10.17.3.1whereCfandFTHaretakenfromSection2ofTable10.17.1.
b) Forhighstrengthbolts,commonbolts,andthreadedanchorrodswithcut,groundorrolled
threads,themaximumrangeoftensilestressonthenettensileareafromappliedaxialload
andmomentplusloadduetopryingactionshallnotexceedthedesignstressrangecomputed
usingEquation10.17.3.1.ThefactorCfshallbetakenas3.9108(asforstresscategoryE).
Thethresholdstress,FTHshallbetakenas48MPa(asforstresscategoryD).Thenettensile
areaisgivenbyEquation10.17.4.1.
10.17.4.1
0.9382
where
P=pitch,mmperthread
db=thenominaldiameter(bodyorshankdiameter),mm.
n=threadspermm.
Forjointsinwhichthematerialwithinthegripisnotlimitedtosteelorjointswhicharenottensionedtothe
requirementsofTable10.10.3.1,allaxialloadandmomentappliedtothejointpluseffectsofanypryingaction
shallbeassumedtobecarriedexclusivelybytheboltsorrods.
Forjointsinwhichthematerialwithinthegripislimitedtosteelandwhicharetensionedtotherequirementsof
Table10.10.3.1,ananalysisoftherelativestiffnessoftheconnectedpartsandboltsshallbepermittedtobe
used to determine the tensile stress range in the pretensioned bolts due to the total service live load and
moment plus effects of any prying action. Alternatively, the stress range in the bolts shall be assumed to be
equaltothestressonthenettensileareadueto20percentoftheabsolutevalueoftheserviceloadaxialload
andmomentfromdead,liveandotherloads.
10.17.5
SpecialFabricationandErectionRequirements
Longitudinal backing bars are permitted to remain in place, and if used, shall be continuous. If splicing is
necessaryforlongjoints,thebarshallbejoinedwithcompletepenetrationbuttjointsandthereinforcement
groundpriortoassemblyinthejoint.
In transversejointssubject totension, backingbars, if used,shall be removedand thejoint back gougedand
welded.
IntransversecompletejointpenetrationTandcornerjoints,areinforcingfilletweld,notlessthan6mminsize
shallbeaddedatreentrantcorners.
Thesurfaceroughnessofflamecutedgessubjecttosignificantcyclictensilestressrangesshallnotexceed25
m,whereASMEB46.1isthereferencestandard.
6585
Part6
StructuralDesign
Reentrantcornersatcuts,copesandweldaccessholesshallformaradiusofnotlessthan10mmbypredrilling
orsubpunchingandreamingahole,orbythermalcuttingtoformtheradiusofthecut.Iftheradiusportionis
formedbythermalcutting,thecutsurfaceshallbegroundtoabrightmetalsurface.
Fortransversebuttjointsinregionsofhightensilestress,runofftabsshallbeusedtoprovideforcascadingthe
weldterminationoutsidethefinishedjoint.Enddamsshallnotbeused.Runofftabsshallberemovedandthe
endoftheweldfinishedflushwiththeedgeofthemember.
SeeSection10.10.2.2forrequirementsforendreturnsoncertainfilletweldssubjecttocyclicserviceloading.
TABLE 10 17 1 F ti
Stress
Description
Category
D i
Constant Threshold
Cf
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
FTH(MPa)
SECTION 1 PLAIN MATERIAL AWAY FROM ANY WELDING
1.1 Base metal, except non coated
250 108
165
Away from all welds or
weathering steel, with rolled or
structural connections
cleaned surface. Flamecut edges with

surface roughness value of 25 m or less,
butwithoutreentrantcorners.
1.2 Non-coated
metal
with
weathering steel
base
120 108
110
Away from all welds or
rolled or cleaned surface.
structural connections
Flame-cut edges with surface roughness

value of 25 m or less, but without reentrant
corners.
1.3
Member
with
drilled
or reamed
120 108
110
At any external edge or at hole
holes. Member with reentrant corners at
perimeter
copes, cuts, block-outs or other geometrical

discontinuities made to requirements
Section 10.17.3.5, except
of
weld access
holes.
1.4 Rolled cross sections with weld access
44 108
69
At reentrant corner of weld
holes made to requirements of Section
access hole or at any small hole
10.10.1.6 and Section 10.17.3.5. Members
(may contain bolt for minor
with drilled or
reamed holes containing
connections)
bolts for attachment of light bracing where

there is a small longitudinal component of
brace force.
SECTION 2 CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
2.1 Gross area of base metal inlapjoints
120 108
110
connected by high strength bolts in
Throughgrosssectionnear
hole
jointssatisfying all requirementsforslip

criticalconnections.
2.2 Base metal at net section of high
120 108
110
Innet sectionoriginatingat
sideofhole
strength bolted joints, de signed on the

basisofbearingresistance, butfabricated
and installed to all requirements for slip
criticalconnections.
6586
Vol.2
SteelStructures
2.3Basemetalatthenetsectionofother
Chapter10
22 108
48
sideofhole
mechanically fas tened joints except eye

barsandpinplates.
2.4 Base metal at net section of eyebar
11 108
31
sideofhole
headorpinplate.
6587
Part6
StructuralDesign
TABLE 10 17 1 (cont ) Fatigue Design Parameters

Description
Stress Constant Threshold

Category
Cf
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
FTH(MPa)
SECTION 3 WELDED JOINTS JOINING COMPONENTS OF BUILT-UP MEMBERS
3.1Base metal and weldmetalin members
120 108
110
Fromsurfaceorinternal
withoutattachmentsbuiltup ofplatesor
discontinuitiesinweldawayfrom
shapesconnectedbycontinuouslongitudinal
endofweld
completejointpenetrationgroovewelds, back
gougedand weldedfromsecondside,orby
3.2Base metal and weldmetalin members
61 108
83
Fromsurfaceorinternal
withoutattachmentsbuiltup ofplatesor
discontinuitiesinweld,including
shapes,connectedbycontinuouslongitudinal
weldattachingbackingbars
completejointpenetrationgroovewelds with
backingbars not removed, orbycontinuous
3.3Basemetalandweldmetaltermination of
22 108
48
longitudinal welds atweldaccess holes in

t d b ilt
b
3.4 Base metal at endsoflongitudinal
Fromtheweldtermination into
the web orflange
11 108
31
Inconnectedmaterialatstartand
intermittentfilletweldsegments.
stoplocationsofanywelddeposit
3.5Base metal at endsofpartiallength
Inflange at toe ofendweldorin
weldedcoverplatesnarrowerthantheflange
flangeatterminationof
havingsquareortaperedends,with orwithout
longitudinalweldorinedgeof
weldsacrosstheendsofcoverplateswiderthan
flangewithwidecoverplates
theflangewithweldsacrosstheends.
Flangethickness 20mm
Flangethickness> 20mm
3.6Basemetalatendsofpartiallength welded
3.9 108
18
coverplates widerthantheflange without

ld
th
Inedgeofflangeatendof
coverplateweld
SECTION 4 LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDED END CONNECTIONS
4.1 Basemetalatjunction ofaxially loaded
memberswithlongitudinallyweldedend
connections.Welds shallbe on each side of
Initiatingfrom endofanyweld
theaxisofthemembertobalanceweldstresses.
terminationextendingintothe
t 20mm
11 108
31
basemetal
t > 20mm
3.9 108
18
6588
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
6589
Part6
StructuralDesign
TABLE10.17.1 (cont.):FatigueDesign Parameters

Description
Stress
Category
Constant Threshold
Cf
FTH(MPa)
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
SECTION 5 WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
5.1Basemetalandweldmetalinoradjacent
Frominternaldiscon
tocompletejointpenetrationgroovewelded
tinuitiesinfillermetalor
splicesinrolledorweldedcrosssectionswith
120108
110
alongthefusionboundary
weldsgroundessentiallyparalleltothedirection
ofstress.
5.2Basemetalandweldmetalinoradjacent
Frominternaldisconti
tocompletejointpenetrationgroovewelded
nuitiesinfillermetaloralong
spliceswithweldsgroundessentiallyparallelto
fusionboundaryoratstartof
thedirectionofstressattransitionsinthickness
transitionwhenFy620
orwidthmadeonaslopenogreaterthan
MPa
8to20%.
Fy<620MPa
120108
110
Fy620MPa
61108
83
5.3BasemetalwithFyequaltoorgreater
Frominternaldiscon
than620MPaandweldmetalinoradjacentto
tinuitiesinfillermetalor
completejointpenetrationgroovewelded
discontinuitiesalongthe
spliceswithweldsgroundessentiallyparallelto
fusionboundary
B
thedirectionofstressattransitionsinwidth
120108
110
madeonaradiusofnotlessthan600mmwith
thepointoftangencyattheendofthegroove
weld.
5.4Basemetalandweldmetalinoradjacentto
Fromsurfacediscontinuity
thetoeofcompletejointpenetrationTorcorner
attoeofweldextendinginto
jointsorsplices,withorwithouttransitionsin
44108
69
thicknesshavingslopesnogreaterthan8to20%,
basemetaloralongfusion
boundary.
whenweldreinforcementisnotremoved.
5.5Basemetalandweldmetalattransverse
Initiatingfromgeometrical
endconnectionsoftensionloadedplate
discontinuityattoeofweld
elementsusingpartialjointpenetrationbuttorT
extendingintobasemetalor,
orcornerjoints,withreinforcingorcontouring
44108
69
initiatingatweldroot
fillets,FSRshallbethesmallerofthetoecrackor
subjecttotensionextending
rootcrackstressrange.
Crackinitiatingfromweldtoe:Crackinitiating
fromweldroot:
upandthenoutthrough
Eqn.
None
weld
10.17.3.4
provided
6590
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
6591
Part6
StructuralDesign
TABLE10.17.1(cont.):FatigueDesignParameters
Stress
Description
Threshold
Category Constant F TH(MPa)
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
SECTION 5 WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS (contd)
5.6Base metal and fillermetalat
Initiatingfromgeometrical
transverseendconnectionsoftension
discontinuityattoeofweld
loadedplateelementsusinga pair offillet
extendingintobasemetalor,
welds onoppositesidesoftheplate. FSR
initiatingatweldrootsubject
shallbe the smaller ofthetoecrackor

rootcrackstressrange.
totensionextendingupand
44 108
69
thenoutthroughweld
Crackinitiatingfromweldtoe:
5.7Basemetaloftensionloadedplate
Eqn.
None
10.17.3.5
provided
44 108
69
Fromgeometricaldis
elementsand on girdersandrolledbeam
continuityattoeoffillet
websorflangesattoeoftransversefillet
extendingintobasemetal
weldsadjacenttoweldedtransverse
stiffeners.
SECTION 6 BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS
6.1
Base metal at details attached

by complete-jointpenetration
groove
welds subject to
longitudinal loading only when the detail
embodies a transition radius R with the
weld termination ground smooth.
Near point of tangency of

radius at edge of member
R 600 mm
120 108
110
600 mm > R 150 mm
44 108
69
150 mm > R 50 mm
22 108
48
50 mm > R
11 108
31
6592
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
6593
Part6
StructuralDesign
TABLE 10.17.1 (cont.): Fatigue Design Parameters

Description
Stress
Category
Constant Threshold
Cf
FTH(MPa)
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
SECTION 6 BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS (contd)
6.2 Base metal atdetails ofequal

thicknessattachedbycompletejoint
penetrationgrooveweldssubjecttotrans
verse loadingwithor without
longitudinalloadingwhenthe detail
embodies a transitionradiusR withthe
weldterminationgroundsmooth:
When weld reinforcement isremoved:
R 600mm
120 108
110
44
600mm> R 150mm
108
22108
150mm> R 50mm
D
50mm> R
69
Nearpointsoftangency
48
ofradiusorintheweld
oratfusionboundaryor
31
memberorattachment
11
108
44
108
44
108
Attoeoftheweldeither
22
108
48
along edgeofmember
ortheattachment
11 108
31
When weld reinforcement isnotremoved:

R 600mm
600mm> R 150mm
150mm> R 50mm
50mm> R
69
69
6.3 Basemetalatdetailsofunequal
thicknessattachedbycompletejoint
penetrationgrooveweldssubjecttotrans
verse loadingwithorwithoutlongitudinal
loadingwhen thedetailembodiesa
transitionradius Rwiththeweld termina
tiongroundsmooth.
At toeofweldalong
When weld reinforcementisremoved:
edgeofthinnermaterial
D
R> 50mm
22 108
R 50mm
48
In weldterminationin
smallradius
11
108
31
11 108
31
When reinforcementisnotremoved:
At toeofweldalong
Anyradius
6594
edgeofthinnermaterial
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
6595
Part6
StructuralDesign
TABLE 10 17 1 (
t ) F ti
Stress
Description
D i
Constant Threshold
Category
Cf
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
FTH(MPa)
SECTION 6 BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS (contd)
6.4Base metal subjecttolongitudinal stressat
transversemembers,withorwithouttransverse
the toe of the weld
stress,attachedbyfilletorpartialpenetrationgroove
extending into member
weldsparallel todirection of stresswhenthe
detailembodiesatransitionradius,R,withweld
terminationgroundsmooth:
R> 50mm
22
11
108
R 50mm
In weld termination or from
108
SECTION 7 BASE METAL AT SHORT ATTACHMENTS1
7.1Basemetalsubjecttolongitudinalloadingat
In thememberat theend
detailsattachedby filletweldsparallelortrans
oftheweld
versetothedirectionofstresswherethedetail
embodies notransition radiusandwithdetaillength
indirectionofstress, a,andattachmentheight
normaltothesurfaceofthemember,b:
a< 50mm
50mm a 12b
or100mm
a> 12bor100mm
44 108
69
22
108
11
108
48
whenbis 25mm
a> 12bor100mm
3.9 108
whenbis> 25mm
31
18
7.2Basemetalsubjecttolongitudinalstressatdetails
Inweldterminationex
attachedbyfilletorpartialjointpenetrationgroove
tendingintomember
welds,withorwithouttransverse loadondetail,
whenthedetail embodiesatransitionradius, R,with
weldterminationgroundsmooth:
R> 50mm
22 108
R 50mm
11 108
1 Attachmentasusedherein,isdefinedasanysteeldetailweldedtoamemberwhich,byitsmerepresenceandindependentofitsloading,causesa
discontinuityinthestressflowinthememberandthusreducesthefatigueresistance.
6596
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
6597
Part6
StructuralDesign
TABLE 10 17 1 (cont ): Fatigue Design Parameters
Stress
Description
Constant Threshold
Cf
F TH(MPa)
44 108
69
Category
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
SECTION 8 - MISCELLANEOUS
8.1 Base metal atstudtypeshear
connectorsattachedbyfilletorelectricstud
Attoeofweldinbase
metal
welding.
8.2Shearonthroatof continuousor
150 1010
welds.
8.3Base metal at plugorslotwelds.
55
Inthroatofweld
31
Atendofweldinbase
(Eqn.
intermittentlongitudinalortransversefillet
10.17.3.2)
11 108
metal
8.4Shearonplugorslotwelds.
150
1010
55
Atfayingsurface
48
At therootofthe
(Eqn.
10.17.3.2)
8.5Notfullytightenedhighstrengthbolts,
3.9 108
commonbolts,threadedanchorrods
threadsextendinginto
andhangerrodswithcut,groundorrolled
thetensilestressarea
threads.Stressrangeontensilestressarea
duetoliveloadpluspryingactionwhen
applicable.
6598
Vol.2
SteelStructures
10.18
Chapter10
StructuralDesignforFireConditions
Thissectionprovidescriteriaforthedesignandevaluationofstructuralsteelcomponents,systemsandframesfor
fireconditions.Thesecriteriaprovideforthedeterminationoftheheatinput,thermalexpansionanddegradation
inmechanicalpropertiesofmaterialsatelevatedtemperaturesthatcauseprogressivedecreaseinstrengthand
stiffnessofstructuralcomponentsandsystemsatelevatedtemperatures.
10.18.1
GeneralProvisions
Themethodscontainedinthissectionprovideregulatoryevidenceofcomplianceinaccordancewiththedesign
applicationsoutlinedinthissection.
ThesectionusesthefollowingtermsinadditiontothetermsintheGlossary.
Activefireprotection:Buildingmaterialsandsystemsthatareactivatedbyafiretomitigateadverseeffectsor
tonotifypeopletotakesomeactiontomitigateadverseeffects.
Compartmentation:Theenclosureofabuildingspacewithelementsthathaveaspecificfireendurance.
Convectiveheattransfer:Thetransferofthermalenergyfromapointofhighertemperaturetoapointoflower
temperaturethroughthemotionofaninterveningmedium.
Designbasis fire: A set of conditions that define the development of a fire and the spread of combustion
productsthroughoutabuildingorportionthereof.
Elevated temperatures: Heating conditions experienced by building elements or structures as a result of fire,
whichareinexcessoftheanticipatedambientconditions.
Fire:Destructiveburning,asmanifestedbyanyorallofthefollowing:light,flame,heat,orsmoke.
Fire barrier: Element of construction formed of fireresisting materials and tested in accordance with ASTM
Standard E119, or other approved standard fireresistance test, to demonstrate compliance with the Building
Code.
Fire endurance: A measure of the elapsed time during which a material or assembly continues to exhibit fire
resistance.
Fireresistance:Thatpropertyofassembliesthatpreventsorretardsthepassageofexcessiveheat,hotgases
orflamesunderconditionsofuseandenablesthemtocontinuetoperformastipulatedfunction.
Fireresistancerating:Theperiodoftimeabuildingelement,componentorassemblymaintainstheabilityto
contain a fire, continues to perform a given structural function, or both, as determined by test or methods
basedontests.
Flashover:Therapidtransitiontoastateoftotalsurfaceinvolvementinafireofcombustiblematerialswithin
anenclosure.
Heatflux:Radiantenergyperunitsurfacearea.
Heatreleaserate:Therateatwhichthermalenergyisgeneratedbyaburningmaterial.
Passivefireprotection:Buildingmaterialsandsystemswhoseabilitytoresisttheeffectsoffiredoesnotrelyon
anyoutsideactivatingconditionormechanism.
Performancebased design: An engineering approach to structural design that is based on agreedupon
performance goals and objectives, engineering analysis and quantitative assessment of alternatives against
thosedesigngoalsandobjectivesusingacceptedengineeringtools,methodologiesandperformancecriteria.
Prescriptivedesign:Adesignmethodthatdocumentscompliancewithgeneralcriteriaestablishedinabuilding
code.
Restrainedconstruction:Floorandroofassembliesandindividualbeamsinbuildingswherethesurroundingor
supportingstructureiscapableofresistingsubstantialthermalexpansionthroughouttherangeofanticipated
elevatedtemperatures.
Unrestrainedconstruction:Floorandroofassembliesandindividualbeamsinbuildingsthatareassumedtobe
freetorotateandexpandthroughouttherangeofanticipatedelevatedtemperatures.
10.18.1.1 PerformanceObjective
Structural components, members and building frame systems shall be designed so as to maintain their load
bearing function during the designbasis fire and to satisfy other performance requirements specified for the
building occupancy. Deformation criteria shall be applied where the means of providing structural fire
6599
Part6
StructuralDesign
resistance,orthedesigncriteriaforfirebarriers,requiresconsiderationofthedeformationoftheloadcarrying
structure.Withinthecompartmentoffireorigin,forcesanddeformationsfromthedesignbasisfireshallnot
causeabreachofhorizontalorverticalcompartmentation.
10.18.1.2 DesignbyEngineeringAnalysis
TheanalysismethodsinSection10.18.2arepermittedtobeusedtodocumenttheanticipatedperformanceof
steel framing when subjected to designbasis fire scenarios. Methods in Section 10.18..2 provide evidence of
compliancewithperformanceobjectivesestablishedinSection10.18.1.1.
The analysis methods in Section 10.18.2 are permitted to be used to demonstrate an equivalency for an
alternativematerialormethod,aspermittedbythebuildingcode.
10.18.1.3 DesignbyQualificationTesting
ThequalificationtestingmethodsinSection10.18.3arepermittedtobeusedtodocumentthefireresistanceof
steelframingsubjecttothestandardizedfiretestingprotocolsrequiredbybuildingcodes.
10.18.1.4 LoadCombinationsandRequiredStrength
The required strength of the structure and its elements shall be determined from the following gravity load
combination:
0.9
1.2
0.5
0.2
10.18.1.1
where
D=nominaldeadload
L=nominaloccupancyliveload
S=nominalsnowload
T=nominalforcesanddeformationsduetothedesignbasisfiredefinedinSection4.2.1
A lateral notional load, Ni = 0.002Yi, as defined in Section 10.20, where Ni = notional lateral load applied at
framing level i and Yi = gravity load from combination 10.18.1.1 acting on framing level i, shall be applied in
combination with the loads stipulated in Equation 10.18.1.1. Unless otherwise stipulated by the authority
havingjurisdiction,D,LandSshallbethenominalloadsspecifiedinChapter2ofPart6ofthiscode.
10.18.2
StructuralDesignforFireConditionsByAnalysis
It is permitted to design structural members, components and building frames for elevated temperatures in
accordancewiththerequirementsofthissection.
10.18.2.1 DesignBasisFire
A designbasis fire shall be identified to describe the heating conditions for the structure. These heating
conditions shall relate to the fuel commodities and compartment characteristics present in the assumed fire
area.Thefuelloaddensitybasedontheoccupancyofthespaceshallbeconsideredwhendeterminingthetotal
fuelload.Heatingconditionsshallbespecifiedeitherintermsofaheatfluxortemperatureoftheuppergas
layercreatedbythefire.Thevariationoftheheatingconditionswithtimeshallbedeterminedfortheduration
ofthefire.
When the analysis methods in Section 10.18.2 are used to demonstrate an equivalency as an alternative
material or method as permitted by a building code, the designbasis fire shall be determined in accordance
withASTME119.
10.18.2.1.1LocalizedFire
Where the heat release rate from the fire is insufficient to cause flashover, a localized fire exposure shall be
assumed.Insuchcases,thefuelcomposition,arrangementofthefuelarrayandfloorareaoccupiedbythefuel
shallbeusedtodeterminetheradiantheatfluxfromtheflameandsmokeplumetothestructure.
10.18.2.1.2PostFlashoverCompartmentFires
Where the heat release rate from the fire is sufficient to cause flashover, a postflashover compartment fire
shallbeassumed.Thedeterminationofthetemperatureversustimeprofileresultingfromthefireshallinclude
6600
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
fuel load, ventilation characteristics to the space (natural and mechanical), compartment dimensions and
thermalcharacteristicsofthecompartmentboundary.
10.18.2.1.3ExteriorFires
The exposure of exterior structure to flames projecting from windows or otherwall openings as aresult of a
postflashovercompartmentfireshallbeconsideredalongwiththeradiationfromtheinteriorfirethroughthe
opening.Theshapeandlengthoftheflameprojectionshallbeusedalongwiththedistancebetweentheflame
andtheexteriorsteelworktodeterminetheheatfluxtothesteel.ThemethodidentifiedinSection10.18.2.1.2
shallbeusedfordescribingthecharacteristicsoftheinteriorcompartmentfire.
10.18.2.1.4FireDuration
Thefiredurationinaparticularareashallbedeterminedbyconsideringthetotalcombustible mass,inother
words,fuelloadavailableinthespace.Inthecaseofeitheralocalizedfireorapostflashovercompartmentfire,
the time duration shall be determined as the total combustible mass divided by the mass loss rate, except
wheredeterminedfromSection10.18.2.1.2.
10.18.2.1.5ActiveFireProtectionSystems
Theeffectsofactivefireprotectionsystemsshallbeconsideredwhendescribingthedesignbasisfire.
Whereautomaticsmokeandheatventsareinstalledinnonsprinkleredspaces,theresultingsmoketemperature
shallbedeterminedfromcalculation.
10.18.2.2 TemperaturesinStructuralSystemsunderFireConditions
Temperatureswithinstructuralmembers,componentsandframesduetotheheatingconditionsposedbythe
designbasisfireshallbedeterminedbyaheattransferanalysis.
10.18.2.3 MaterialStrengthsatElevatedTemperatures
Materialpropertiesatelevatedtemperaturesshallbedeterminedfromtestdata.Intheabsenceofsuchdata,it
ispermittedtousethematerialpropertiesstipulatedinthissection.Theserelationshipsdonotapplyforsteels
withayieldstrengthinexcessof448MPaorconcreteswithspecifiedcompressionstrengthinexcessof55MPa.
10.18.2.3.1ThermalElongation
Thermal expansion of structural and reinforcing steels: For calculations at temperatures above 65oC, the
coefficientofthermalexpansionshallbe1.4105/oC.
6601
Part6
StructuralDesign
Thermalexpansionofnormalweightconcrete:Forcalculationsattemperaturesabove65 oC,thecoefficientof
thermalexpansionshallbe1.8105/oC.
Thermal expansion of lightweight concrete: For calculations at temperatures above 65oC, the coefficient of
thermalexpansionshallbe7.9106/oC.
10.18.2.3.2MechanicalPropertiesatElevatedTemperatures
Thedeteriorationinstrengthandstiffnessofstructuralmembers,components,andsystemsshallbetakeninto
accountinthestructuralanalysisoftheframe.
ThevaluesFym,Fum,Em,fcm,Ecm andcuatelevatedtemperaturetobeusedinstructuralanalysis,expressedas
theratiowithrespecttothepropertyatambient,assumedtobe20o C,shallbedefinedasinTables10.18.2.1
and10.18.2.2.Itispermittedtointerpolatebetweenthesevalues.
10.18.2.4 StructuralDesignRequirements
10.18.2.4.1GeneralStructuralIntegrity
Thestructuralframeshallbecapableofprovidingadequatestrengthanddeformationcapacitytowithstand,as
a system, the structural actions developed during the fire within the prescribed limits of deformation. The
structural system shall be designed to sustain local damage with the structural system as a whole remaining
stable.
Continuous load paths shall be provided to transfer all forces from the ex posed region to the final point of
resistance. The foundation shall be designed to resist the forces and to accommodate the deformations
developedduringthedesignbasisfire.
10.18.2.4.2StrengthRequirementsandDeformationLimits
Conformance of the structural system to these requirements shall be demonstrated by constructing a
mathematicalmodelofthestructurebasedonprinciplesofstructuralmechanicsandevaluatingthismodelfor
theinternalforcesanddeformationsinthemembersofthestructuredevelopedbythetemperaturesfromthe
designbasisfire.
Individual members shall be provided with adequate strength to resist the shears, axial forces and moments
determinedinaccordancewiththeseprovisions.
Connections shall develop the strength of the connected members or the forces indicated above. Where the
means of providing fire resistance requires the consideration of deformation criteria, the deformation of the
structuralsystem,ormembersthereof,underthedesignbasisfireshallnotexceedtheprescribedlimits.
6602
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.18.2.4.3MethodsofAnalysis
10.18.2.4.3aAdvancedMethodsofAnalysis
The methods of analysis in this section are permitted for the design of all steel building structures for fire
conditions. The designbasis fire exposure shall be that determined in Section 10.18.2.1. The analysis shall
includebothathermalresponseandthemechanicalresponsetothedesignbasisfire.
Thethermalresponseshallproduceatemperaturefieldineachstructuralelementasaresultofthedesignbasis
fire and shall incorporate temperature dependent thermal properties of the structural elements and fire
resistivematerialsasperSection10.18.2.2.
The mechanical response results in forces and deflections in the structural sys tem subjected to the thermal
response calculated from the designbasis fire. The mechanical response shall take into account explicitly the
deteriorationinstrengthandstiffnesswithincreasingtemperature,theeffectsofthermalexpansionsandlarge
deformations. Boundary conditions and connection fixity must represent the proposed structural design.
MaterialpropertiesshallbedefinedasperSection10.18.2.3.
Theresultinganalysisshallconsiderallrelevantlimitstates,suchasexcessivedeflections,connectionfractures,
andoverallorlocalbuckling.
10.18.2.4.3aAdvancedMethodsofAnalysis
The methods of analysis in this section are applicable for the evaluation of the performance of individual
membersatelevatedtemperaturesduringexposuretofire.
The support and restraint conditions (forces, moments and boundary conditions) applicable at normal
temperaturesmaybeassumedtoremainunchangedthroughoutthefireexposure.
(1)Tensionmembers
It is permitted to model the thermal response of a tension element using a onedimensional heat transfer
equationwithheatinputasdirectedbythedesignbasisfiredefinedinSection10.18.2.1.
ThedesignstrengthofatensionmembershallbedeterminedusingtheprovisionsofSection10.4,withsteel
propertiesasstipulatedinSection10.18.2.3andassumingauniformtemperatureoverthecrosssectionusing
thetemperatureequaltothemaximumsteeltemperature.
(2)Compressionmembers
Itispermittedtomodelthethermalresponseofacompressionelementusingaonedimensionalheattransfer
equationwithheatinputasdirectedbythedesignbasisfiredefinedinSection10.18.2.1.
The design strength of a compression member shall be determined using the provisions of Section 10.5 with
steelpropertiesasstipulatedinSection10.18.2.3.
(3)Flexuralmembers
It is permitted to model the thermal response of flexural elements using a onedimensional heat transfer
equation to calculate bottom flange temperature and to assume that this bottom flange temperature is
constantoverthedepthofthemember.Thedesignstrengthofaflexuralmembershallbedeterminedusingthe
provisionsofSection10.6withsteelpropertiesasstipulatedinSection10.18.2.3.
(4)Compositefloormembers
It is permitted to model the thermal response of flexural elements supporting a concrete slab using a one
dimensionalheattransferequationtocalculatebottomflangetemperature.Thattemperatureshallbetakenas
constantbetweenthebottomflangeandmiddepthofthewebandshalldecreaselinearlybynomorethan25
percentfromthemiddepthofthewebtothetopflangeofthebeam.
ThedesignstrengthofacompositeflexuralmembershallbedeterminedusingtheprovisionsofChapter13of
Part6ofthiscode,withreducedyieldstressesinthesteelconsistentwiththetemperaturevariationdescribed
underthermalresponse.
10.18.2.4.4DesignStrength
The design strength shall be determined as in Section 10.2.3.3. The nominal strength, Rn , shall be calculated
usingmaterialproperties,asstipulatedinSection10.18.2.3,atthetemperaturedevelopedbythedesignbasis
fire.
6603
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.18.3
DesignByQualificationTesting
10.18.3.1 DesignStrength
Structuralmembersandcomponentsinsteelbuildingsshallbequalifiedfortheratingperiodinconformance
with ASTM E119. It shall be permitted to demonstrate compliance with these requirements using the
proceduresspecifiedforsteelconstructioninSection5ofASCE/SFPE29.
10.18.3.2 RestrainedConstruction
For floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in buildings, a restrained condition exists when the
surroundingorsupportingstructureiscapableofresistingactionscausedbythermalexpansionthroughoutthe
rangeofanticipatedelevatedtemperatures.
Steel beams, girders and frames supporting concrete slabs that are welded or bolted to integral framing
members(inotherwords,columns,girders)shallbeconsideredrestrainedconstruction.
10.18.3.3 UnrestrainedConstruction
Steelbeams,girdersandframesthatdonotsupportaconcreteslabshallbeconsideredunrestrainedunlessthe
membersareboltedorweldedtosurroundingconstructionthathasbeenspecificallydesignedanddetailedto
resistactionscausedbythermalexpansion.
A steel member bearing on a wall in a single span or at the end span of multiple spans shall be considered
unrestrainedunlessthewallhasbeendesignedanddetailedtoresisteffectsofthermalexpansion.
10.19
StabilityBracingForColumnsandBeams
Thissectionaddressestheminimumbracestrengthandstiffnessnecessarytoprovidememberstrengthsbased
ontheunbracedlengthbetweenbraceswithaneffectivelengthfactor,K,equalto1.0.
10.19.1
GeneralProvisions
Bracingisassumedtobeperpendiculartothememberstobebraced;forinclinedordiagonalbracing,thebrace
strength (force or moment) and stiffness (force per unit displacement or moment per unit rotation) shall be
adjusted for the angle of inclination. The evaluation of the stiffness furnished by a brace shall include its
memberandgeometricproperties,aswellastheeffectsofconnectionsandanchoringdetails.
Two general types of bracing systems are considered, relative and nodal. A relative brace controls the
movementofthebracepointwithrespecttoadjacentbracedpoints.Anodalbracecontrolsthemovementat
thebracedpointwithoutdirectinteractionwithadjacentbracedpoints.Theavailablestrengthandstiffnessof
thebracingshallequalorexceedtherequiredlimitsunlessanalysisindicatesthatsmallervaluesarejustifiedby
analysis.
Asecondorderanalysisthatincludesaninitialoutofstraightnessofthemembertoobtainbracestrengthand
stiffnessispermittedinlieuoftherequirementsofthissection.
10.19.2
Columns
Itispermittedtobraceanindividualcolumnatendandintermediatepointsalongitslengthbyeitherrelativeor
nodalbracingsystems.Itisassumedthatnodalbracesareequallyspacedalongthecolumn.
10.19.2.1 RelativeBracing
Therequiredbracestrengthis
0.004
10.19.2.1
Therequiredbracestiffnessis
1 2
10.19.2.2
where
=0.75(LRFD)
6604
=2.00(ASD)
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.19.2.2 NodalBracing
0.01
10.19.2.3
1 8
10.19.2.4
where
=0.75(LRFD)
=2.00(ASD)
WhenLbislessthanLq,whereLqisthemaximumunbracedlengthfortherequiredcolumnforcewithKequal
to1.0,thenLbinEquation10.19.2.4ispermittedtobetakenequaltoLq.
10.19.3
Beams
Atpointsofsupportforbeams,girdersandtrusses,restraintagainstrotationabouttheirlongitudinalaxisshall
be provided. Beam bracing shall prevent the relative displacement of the top and bottom flanges, in other
words,twistofthesection.Lateralstabilityofbeamsshallbeprovidedbylateralbracing,torsionalbracingora
combination of the two. Inmembers subjected todouble curvature bending,the inflection pointshall not be
consideredabracepoint.
10.19.3.1 LateralBracing
Bracingshallbeattachednearthecompressionflange,exceptforacantileveredmember,whereanendbrace
shallbeattached nearthe top(tension) flange. Lateral bracingshall be attached to both flangesatthe brace
point nearest the inflection point for beams subjected to double curvature bending along the length to be
braced.
a. RelativeBracing
0.008
10.19.3.1
10.19.3.2
Where,
=0.75(LRFD)
=2.00(ASD)
ho=distancebetweenflangecentroids,mm.
Cd=1.0forbendinginsinglecurvature;2.0fordoublecurvature;Cd=2.0onlyappliestothebraceclosesttothe
inflectionpoint.
Lb=laterallyunbracedlength,mm.
6605
Part6
StructuralDesign
b. NodalBracing
0.02
10.19.3.3
10.19.3.4
where
=0.75(LRFD)
=2.00(ASD)
WhenLbislessthanLq,themaximumunbracedlengthforMr,thenLbinEquation10.19.3.4shallbepermitted
tobetakenequaltoLq.
10.19.3.2 TorsionalBracing
Itispermittedtoprovideeithernodalorcontinuoustorsionalbracingalongthebeamlength.Itispermittedto
attachthebracingatanycrosssectionallocationanditneednotbeattachednearthecompressionflange.The
connectionbetweenatorsionalbraceandthebeamshallbeabletosupporttherequiredmomentgivenbelow.
a. NodalBracing
Therequiredbracingmomentis
0.024
10.19.3.5
Therequiredcrossframeordiaphragmbracingstiffnessis
10.19.3.6
where
.
3.3
1.5
12
12
10.19.3.7
10.19.3.8
where
=0.75(LRFD)
=3.00(ASD)
L=spanlength,mm
n=numberofnodalbracedpointswithinthespan
E=modulusofelasticityofsteel200000MPa
Iy=outofplanemomentofinertia,mm4
Cb=modificationfactordefinedinSection10.6
tw=beamwebthickness,mm
ts=webstiffenerthickness,mm
bs=stiffenerwidthforonesidedstiffeners(usetwicetheindividualstiffenerwidthforpairsofstiffeners),mm.
T=bracestiffnessexcludingwebdistortion,Nmm/radian
sec=webdistortionalstiffness,includingtheeffectofwebtransversestiffeners,
ifany,Nmm/radian
6606
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Ifsec<T,Equation10.19.3.6isnegative,whichindicatesthattorsionalbeambracingwillnotbeeffective
duetoinadequatewebdistortionalstiffness.
Whenrequired,thewebstiffenershallextendthefulldepthofthebracedmemberandshallbeattachedtothe
flange if the torsional brace is also attached to the flange. Alternatively, it shall be permissible to stop the
stiffenershortbyadistanceequalto4twfromanybeamflangethatisnotdirectlyattachedtothetorsional
brace.WhenLbislessthanLq,thenLbinEquation10.19.3.5shallbepermittedtobetakenequaltoLq.
b. ContinuousTorsionalBracing
Forcontinuousbracing,useEquations10.19.3.5,10.19.3.6and10.19.3.8withL/ntakenas1.0andLbtakenas
Lq;thebracingmomentandstiffnessaregivenperunitspanlength.Thedistortionalstiffnessforanunstiffened
webis
3.3
12
10.19.4
10.19.3.9
SlendernessLimitations
The slenderness ratio, L/r, of any stability bracing shall not exceed 180 unless a comprehensive analysis
includingsecondordereffectsjustifiesahighervalue.
10.20
10.20.1
SeismicProvisionsforStructuralSteelBuildings
Scope
TheSeismicProvisionsforStructuralSteelBuildings,hereinafterreferredtoastheseProvisionsasoutlineinthis
Section10.20, shall govern the design, fabrication and erection of structuralsteel members and connections
in the seismic load resisting systems (SLRS) and splices in columns that are not part of the SLRS, in
buildings and other structures, where other structures are defined as those structures designed, fabricated
anderectedinamannersimilartobuildings,withbuildinglikeverticalandlateralloadresistingelements.
TheseProvisionsshallapplywhentheseismicresponsemodificationcoefficient,R,(asspecifiedinChapter2of
Part 6) is taken greater than 3, regardless of the seismic design category. When the seismic response
modificationcoefficient,R,istakenas3orless,thestructureisnotrequiredtosatisfytheProvisionsthisSection
10.20,unlessspecificallyrequiredbytheapplicableauthority
TheseProvisionsshallbeappliedinconjunctionwiththespecificationsetforthinSections10.1through10.19
whicheverisapplicable.
Loads,loadcombinations,systemlimitationsandgeneraldesignrequirementsshallbethoseinChapter2ofPart
6ofthiscodeaswellasthosementionedinSection10.2.
10.20.2
ReferencedSpecifications,CodesandStandards
The documents referenced in these Provisions shall include those listed in Section 10.1.2 with the following
additionsandmodifications:
AmericanInstituteofSteelConstruction(AISC):
SpecificationforStructuralSteelBuildings,ANSI/AISC36005
6607
Part6
StructuralDesign
PrequalifiedConnectionsforSpecialandIntermediateSteelMomentFramesforSeismicApplications,ANSI/AISC
35805
AmericanSocietyforNondestructiveTesting(ASNT):
RecommendedPracticefortheTrainingandTestingofNondestructiveTestingPersonnel,ASNTSNTTC1a2001
StandardfortheQualificationandCertificationofNondestructiveTestingPersonnel,ANSI/ASNTCP1892001
AmericanWeldingSociety(AWS):
Standard Methods for Determination of the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic, and Ferritic
SteelWeldMetalProducedbyArcWelding,AWSA4.393R
StandardMethodsforMechanicalTestingofWeldsU.S.Customary,ANSI/AWSB4.098
StandardMethodsforMechanicalTestingofWeldsMetricOnly,ANSI/AWSB4.0M:2000
StandardfortheQualificationofWeldingInspectors,AWSB5.1:2003
OxygenCuttingSurfaceRoughnessGaugeandWallChartforCriteriaDescribingOxygenCutSurfaces,AWSC4.1
FederalEmergencyManagementAgency(FEMA)
RecommendedSeismicDesignCriteriaforNewSteelMomentFrameBuildings,FEMA350,July2000
Symbols
Symbolsusedinthissectionarelistedbelow.Numbersinparenthesesafterthedefinitionrefertothesectionin
theseProvisionsinwhichthesymbolisfirstused.
Symbol
Section
Ab
Crosssectionalareaofahorizontalboundaryelement(HBE),
(mm2)
10.20.17.2.1
Ac
Crosssectional area of a vertical boundary element (VBE),

(mm2)
10.20.17.2.1
A f
Flangearea,(mm2)
10.20.8
10.20.9
10.20.16
Ag
Asc
6608
Description
Grossarea, (mm )
Areaoftheyieldingsegmentofsteelcore, (mm )
Ast
Areaoflinkstiffener, (mm )
10.20.15
Aw
Linkwebarea,(mm2)
10.20.15
Ca
Ratioofrequiredstrengthtoavailablestrength
Table10.20.8.1
Cd
Coefficientrelatingrelativebracestiffnessandcurvature
10.20.9
Cd
Deflectionamplificationfactor
10.C.2
Cr
Parameter used for determining

fundamentalperiod
approximate
10.C.2
Dead load due to the weight of the structural elements and

permanentfeaturesonthebuilding,(N)
10.20.9
OutsidediameterofroundHSS,(mm)
Table10.20.8.1
Earthquakeload
10.20.4
Effectofhorizontalandverticalearthquakeinducedloads
10.20.9
Modulusofelasticityofsteel,E=200,000MPa
10.20.8
EI
Flexuralelasticstiffnessofthechordmembersofthespecial
segment,(Nmm2)
10.20.12
Fy
Specifiedminimumyieldstressofthetypeofsteeltobeused,
(MPa). As used in the Specification, yield stress denotes
either the minimum specified yield point (for those steels
that have a yield point) or the specified yield strength (for
thosesteelsthatdonothaveayieldpoint)
10.20.6
Fyb
Fyofabeam,(MPa)
10.20.9
the
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Symbol
Description
Section
Fyc
Fyofacolumn,(MPa)
10.20.9
Fysc
Specified minimum yield stress of the steel core, or actual

yield stress of the steel core as determined from a coupon
test,(MPa).
10.20.16
Fu
Specifiedminimumtensilestrength,(MPa)
10.20.6
Heightofstory,whichmaybetakenasthedistancebetween
thecenterlineoffloorframingateachofthelevelsaboveand
below,orthedistancebetweenthetopoffloorslabsateach
ofthelevelsaboveandbelow,(mm)
10.20.8
Momentofinertia,(mm4)
10.20.12
Ic
Moment of inertia of a vertical boundary element (VBE)

taken perpendicular to the direction of the web plate line,
(mm4)
10.20.17
Effectivelengthfactorforprismaticmember
10.20.13
Spanlengthofthetruss,(mm)
10.20.12
DistancebetweenVBEcenterlines,(mm)
10.20.17
Lb
Length between points which are either braced against

lateraldisplacementofcompressionflangeorbracedagainst
twistofthecrosssection,(mm)
10.20.13
Lb
Linklength,(mm)
10.20.15
Lcf
CleardistancebetweenVBEflanges,(mm)
10.20.17
Lh
Distancebetweenplastichingelocations,(mm)
10.20.9
Lp
Limiting laterally unbraced length for full plastic flexural

strength,uniformmomentcase,(mm)
10.20.12
Lpd
Limitinglaterallyunbracedlengthforplasticanalysis,(mm)
10.20.13
Ls
Lengthofthespecialsegment,(mm)
10.20.12
Ma
Required flexural strength, using ASD load combinations,

(Nmm)
10.20.9
Mav
Additional moment due to shear amplification from the

location of the plastic hinge to the column centerline based
onASDloadcombinations,(Nmm)
10.20.9
Mn
Nominalflexuralstrength,(Nmm)
10.20.11
Mnc
Nominalflexuralstrengthofthechordmemberofthespecial
segment,(Nmm)
10.20.12
Mp
Nominalplasticflexuralstrength,(Nmm)
Table10.20.8.1
Mpa
Nominalplasticflexuralstrengthmodifiedbyaxialload,(N
mm)
10.20.15
Mpb
Nominalplasticflexuralstrengthofthebeam,(Nmm)
10.20.9
Mp,exp
Expectedplasticmoment,(Nmm)
10.20.9
Mpc
Nominalplasticflexuralstrengthofthecolumn,(Nmm)
10.20.8
Mr
Expectedflexuralstrength,(Nmm)
10.20.9
Muv
Additional moment due to shear amplification from the

location of the plastic hinge to the column centerline based
onLRFDloadcombinations,(Nmm)
10.20.9
Mu
Required flexural strength, using LRFD load combinations,

(Nmm)
10.20.9
Mu,exp
Expectedrequiredflexuralstrength,(Nmm)
10.20.15
6609
Part6
StructuralDesign
Symbol
Description
Pa
Required axial strength of a column using ASD load

combinations,(N)
10.20.8
Pac
RequiredcompressivestrengthusingASDloadcombinations,
(N)
10.20.9
Pb
Requiredstrengthoflateralbraceatendsofthelink,(N)
10.20.15
Pc
Availableaxialstrengthofacolumn,(N)
10.20.9
Pn
Nominalaxialstrengthofacolumn,(N)
10.20.8
Pnc
Nominalaxialcompressivestrengthofdiagonalmembersof
thespecialsegment,(N)
10.20.12
Pnt
Nominal axial tensile strength of diagonal members of the

specialsegment,(N)
10.20.12
Pr
Requiredcompressivestrength,(N)
10.20.15
Prc
Required compressive strength using ASD or LRFD load

combinations,(N)
10.20.9
Pu
RequiredaxialstrengthofacolumnoralinkusingLRFDload
combinations,(N)
10.20.8
Puc
Required compressive strength

combinations,(N)
10.20.9
Py
Nominalaxialyieldstrengthofamember,equaltoFyAg,(N)
Table10.20.8.1
Pysc
Axialyieldstrengthofsteelcore,(N)
10.20.16
Qb
Maximum unbalanced vertical load effect applied to a beam

bythebraces,(N)
10.20.13
Q1
Axial forces and moments generated by at least 1.25 times

theexpectednominalshearstrengthofthelink
10.20.15
Seismicresponsemodificationcoefficient
10.20.1
Rn
Nominalstrength,(N)
10.20.6
Rt
Ratio of the expected tensile strength to the specified

minimum tensile strength Fu, as related to overstrength in
materialyieldstressRy
10.20.6
Ru
Requiredstrength
10.20.9
Rv
Panelzonenominalshearstrength
10.20.9
Ry
Ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified minimum

yieldstress,Fy
10.20.6
Snowload,(N)
10.20.9
Va
RequiredshearstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,(N)
10.20.9
Vn
Nominalshearstrengthofamember,(N)
10.20.15
Vne
Expectedverticalshearstrengthofthespecialsegment,(N)
10.20.12
Vp
Nominalshearstrengthofanactivelink,(N)
Table10.20.8.1
Vpa
Nominalshearstrengthofanactivelinkmodifiedbytheaxial
loadmagnitude,(N)
10.20.15
Vu
RequiredshearstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,(N)
10.20.10
10.20.9
10.20.9
10.20.9
Z
Zb
Zc
6610
using
LRFD
Plasticsectionmodulusofamember,(mm )
3
Plasticsectionmodulusofthebeam,(mm )
3
Plasticsectionmodulusofthecolumn,(mm )
load
Section
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Symbol
Chapter10
Description
3
Section
Zx
Plasticsectionmodulusxaxis,(mm )
10.20.8
ZRBS
Minimum plastic section modulus at the reduced beam

section,(mm3)
10.20.9
Anglethatdiagonalmembersmakewiththehorizontal
10.20.12
Width of compression element as defined in Specification

Section10.2.4.1,(mm)
Table10.20.8.1
bcf
Widthofcolumnflange,(mm)
10.20.9
bf
Flangewidth,(mm)
10.20.9
Nominalfastenerdiameter,(mm)
10.20.7
Overallbeamdepth,(mm)
10.20.15
dc
Overallcolumndepth,(mm)
10.20.9
dz
Overallpanelzonedepthbetweencontinuityplates,(mm)
10.20.9
EBFlinklength,(mm)
10.20.15
Cleardistancebetweenflangeslessthefilletorcornerradius
for rolled shapes; and for builtup sections, the distance
between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear distance
between flanges when welds are used; for tees, the overall
depth; and for rectangular HSS, the clear distance between
theflangeslesstheinsidecornerradiusoneachside,(mm)
Table10.20.8.1
Distance between horizontal boundary element centerlines,

(mm)
10.20.17
ho
Distancebetweenflangecentroids,(mm)
10.20.9
Unbraced length between stitches of builtup bracing

members,(mm).
10.20.13
Unbracedlengthofcompressionorbracingmember,(mm)
10.20.13
Governingradiusofgyration,(mm)
10.20.13
ry
Radiusofgyrationaboutyaxis,(mm)
10.20.9
Thicknessofconnectedpart,(mm)
10.20.7
Thicknessofelement,(mm)
Table10.20.8.1
Thicknessofcolumnwebordoublerplate,(mm)
10.20.9
tbf
Thicknessofbeamflange,(mm)
10.20.9
tcf
Thicknessofcolumnflange,(mm)
10.20.9
tf
Thicknessofflange,(mm)
10.20.17
tp
Thicknessofpanelzoneincludingdoublerplates,(mm)
10.20.9
tw
Thicknessofweb,(mm)
Table10.20.8.1
wz
Widthofpanelzonebetweencolumnflanges,(mm)
10.20.9
Parameter used for

fundamentalperiod
zb
Minimum plastic section modulus at the reduced beam

section,(mm3)
10.20.9
M*pc
Moment at beam and column centerline determined by

projecting the sum of the nominal column plastic moment
strength,reducedbytheaxialstressPuc /Ag,fromthetopand
bottomofthebeammomentconnection
10.20.9
M*pb
Moment at the intersection of the beam and column

centerlines determined by projecting the beam maximum
10.20.9
determining
the
approximate
10.C.2
6611
Part6
StructuralDesign
Symbol
Description
Section
developed moments from the column face. Maximum

developedmomentsshallbedeterminedfromtestresults
Compressionstrengthadjustmentfactor
10.20.16
Designstorydrift
10.20.15
Deformation quantity used to control loading of test

specimen (total brace end rotation for the subassemblage
testspecimen;totalbraceaxialdeformationforthebracetest
specimen)
10.E.2
bm
Value of deformation quantity, b, corresponding to the

designstorydrift
10.E.6
by
Valueofdeformationquantity,b,atfirstsignificantyieldof
testspecimen
10.E.6
Safetyfactor
10.20.6
Safetyfactorforflexure=1.67
10.20.8
Safetyfactorforcompression=1.67
10.20.8
Horizontalseismicoverstrengthfactor
10.20.4
Safety factor for shear strength of panel zone of beamto

columnconnections
10.20.9
Angleofdiagonalmemberswiththehorizontal
10.20.12
Angleofwebyieldinginradians,asmeasuredrelativetothe
vertical
10.20.17
Deformation quantity used to control loading of test

specimen
10.D.6
Value of deformation quantity at first significant yield of

testspecimen
10.D.6
RatioofrequiredaxialforcePu torequiredshearstrengthVu
ofalink
10.20.15
p,ps
Limitingslendernessparameterforcompactelement
10.20.8
Resistancefactor
10.20.6
Resistancefactorforflexure
10.20.8
Resistancefactorforcompression
10.20.8
Resistancefactorforshearstrengthofpanelzoneofbeamto
columnconnections
10.20.9
Resistancefactorforshear
10.20.15
Interstorydriftangle,radians
10.D.3
total
Linkrotationangle
10.D.2
Strainhardeningadjustmentfactor
10.20.16
Glossary
Notes:
(1) Terms designated with * are usually qualified by the type of load effect, for example,nominal tensilestrength,
availablecompressivestrength,designflexuralstrength.
(2) Termsdesignatedwith**areusuallyqualifiedbythetypeofcomponent,forexample,weblocalbuckling,flange
localbending.
Adjustedbrace strength. Strength of a brace in a bucklingrestrained bracedframeatdeformationscorresponding

to2.0timesthedesignstorydrift.
6612
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Allowablestrength*.Nominalstrengthdividedbythesafetyfactor,Rn / .
Applicablebuildingcode(ABC).Buildingcodeunderwhichthestructureisdesigned.
Amplified seismic load. Horizontal component of earthquake load E multiplied by o, where E and the horizontal
componentofEarespecifiedintheapplicablebuildingcode.
Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). Organization, political subdivision, office or individual charged with the
responsibility of administering and enforcing theprovisions of thisstandard.
Availablestrength*.Designstrengthorallowablestrength,asappropriate.
ASD (Allowable Strength Design). Method of proportioning structural components such that the allowable strength
equalsorexceedstherequiredstrengthofthecomponentundertheactionoftheASDloadcombinations.
ASD load combination. Load combination in the applicable building code intended for allowable strength design
(allowablestressdesign).
Bucklingrestrained braced frame (BRBF). Diagonally braced frame safisfyingtherequirements of Section 16
in which all members of the bracing system are subjectedprimarilytoaxialforcesandinwhichthelimitstateof
compressionbucklingofbracesisprecludedatforcesanddeformationscorrespondingto 2.0timesthe designstory
drift.
Bucklingrestraining system. System of restraints that limits buckling of the steel core inBRBF.Thissystemincludes
thecasingonthesteelcoreandstructuralelementsadjoining its connections. The bucklingrestraining system is
intended to permit the transverse expansion and longitudinal contraction of the steel core for deformations
correspondingto2.0timesthedesignstorydrift.
Casing. Element that resists forces transverse to the axis of the brace thereby restrainingbucklingofthecore.The
casing requires a means of delivering this force to the remainder of the bucklingrestraining system. The casing
resists little or noforce in the axis ofthebrace.
Columnbase.Assemblageofplates,connectors,bolts,androdsatthebaseofacolumnusedtotransmitforcesbetween
thesteelsuperstructureandthefoundation.
Continuityplates.Columnstiffenersatthetopandbottomofthepanelzone;alsoknownastransversestiffeners.
Contractor.Fabricatororerector,asapplicable.
Demandcriticalweld.WeldsodesignatedbytheseProvisions.
Designearthquake.Theearthquakerepresentedbythedesignresponsespectrumasspecifiedintheapplicablebuilding
code.
Design story drift.Amplified story drift (drift under the design earthquake, including theeffectsofinelasticaction),
determinedasspecifiedintheapplicablebuildingcode.
Designstrength*.Resistancefactormultipliedbythenominalstrength,Rn.
Diagonal bracing. Inclined structural members carrying primarily axial load that are employed to enable a
structuralframetoactasatrusstoresistlateralloads.
Dual system. Structural system with the following features: (1) an essentially complete space frame that provides
support for gravity loads; (2) resistance to lateral load provided by moment frames (SMF, IMF or OMF) that are
capable of resisting at least 25 percent ofthe base shear, and concrete or steel shear walls, or steel braced frames
(EBF, SCBF or OCBF); and (3) each system designed to resist the total lateral load in proportion to its relative
rigidity.
Ductile limit state. Ductile limit states include member and connection yielding, bearingdeformation at bolt holes,
as well as buckling of members that conform to the width thickness limitations of Table I81. Fracture of a
memberorofaconnection,orbucklingofaconnectionelement,isnotaductilelimitstate.
Eccentrically braced frame (EBF). Diagonally braced frame meeting the requirements ofSection15thathasatleast
oneendofeachbracingmemberconnectedtoabeamashortdistancefromanotherbeamtobraceconnectionora
beamtocolumnconnection.
Exemptedcolumn.ColumnnotmeetingtherequirementsofEquation93forSMF.
Expectedyieldstrength.Yieldstrengthintensionofamember,equaltotheexpectedyieldstressmultipliedbyAg.
Expected tensile strength *. Tensile strength of a member, equal to the specified minimum tensile strength, Fu,
multipliedbyRt.
Expected yield stress.Yield stress of the material, equal to the specified minimumyieldstress,Fy,multipliedbyRy .
Intermediate momentframe(IMF).MomentframesystemthatmeetstherequirementsofSection10.20.10
Interstorydriftangle.Interstorydisplacementdividedbystoryheight,radians.
InvertedVbracedframe.SeeVbracedframe.
karea. The karea is the region of the web that extends from the tangent point of the web andtheflangewebfillet
(AISCkdimension)adistanceof38mmintothewebbeyondthekdimension.
6613
Part6
StructuralDesign
Kbracedframe.Abracingconfigurationinwhichbracesconnecttoacolumnatalocationwithnodiaphragmorother
outofplanesupport.
Lateral bracing member. Member that is designed to inhibit lateral buckling or lateral torsional buckling of
primaryframingmembers.
Link.InEBF,thesegmentofabeamthatislocatedbetweentheendsoftwodiagonalbracesorbetweentheendofa
diagonalbraceandacolumn.Thelengthofthelinkisdefinedasthecleardistancebetweentheendsoftwodiagonal
bracesorbetweenthediagonalbraceandthecolumnface.
Linkintermediatewebstiffeners.VerticalwebstiffenersplacedwithinthelinkinEBF.
Linkrotationangle.Inelasticanglebetweenthelinkandthebeamoutsideofthelinkwhenthetotalstorydriftisequal
tothedesignstorydrift.
Link shear design strength. Lesser of the available shear strength of the link developed from the moment or shear
strengthofthelink.
Lowest Anticipated Service Temperature (LAST). The lowest 1hour average temperature with a 100year mean
recurrenceinterval.
LRFD (Load and Resistance Factor Design). Method of proportioning structural components such that the
design strength equals or exceeds the required strength of the component under the action of the LRFD load
combinations.
LRFD Load Combination. Load combination in the applicable building code intended for strength design (load and
resistancefactordesign).
Measuredflexuralresistance.Bendingmomentmeasuredinabeamatthefaceofthecolumn,forabeamtocolumntest
specimentestedinaccordancewithAppendixS.
Nominalload.Magnitudeoftheloadspecifiedbytheapplicablebuildingcode.
Nominal strength*. Strength of a structure or component (without the resistance factor or safety factor applied) to
resisttheloadeffects,asdeterminedinaccordancewiththisSpecification.
Ordinaryconcentricallybracedframe(OCBF).Diagonallybracedframemeetingtherequirements of Section 14 in
which all members of the bracing system are subjectedprimarilytoaxialforces.
Ordinary moment frame (OMF). Moment frame system that meets the requirementsofSection10.20.11.
Overstrengthfactor,o.Factorspecifiedbytheapplicablebuildingcodeinordertodeterminetheamplifiedseismicload,
whererequiredbytheseProvisions.
Prequalifiedconnection.ConnectionthatcomplieswiththerequirementsofAppendix10.A
Protectedzone.Areaofmembersinwhichlimitationsapplytofabricationandattachments.
Prototype.Theconnectionorbracedesignthatistobeusedinthebuilding(SMF,IMF,EBF,andBRBF).
Qualityassuranceplan.Writtendescriptionofqualifications,procedures,qualityinspections,resources,andrecordsto
beusedtoprovideassurancethatthestructurecomplieswiththeengineersqualityrequirements,specificationsand
contractdocuments.
Reduced beam section. Reduction in cross section over a discrete length that promotes a zone of inelasticity in the
member.
Required strength*. Forces, stresses, and deformations produced in a structural component, determined by either
structural analysis, for the LRFD or ASD loadcombinations, asappropriate,orasspecifiedbytheSpecificationand
theseProvisions.
Resistancefactor,.Factorthataccountsforunavoidabledeviationsofthenominalstrength
fromtheactualstrengthandforthemannerandconsequencesoffailure.
Safetyfactor,.Factorthataccountsfordeviationsoftheactualstrengthfromthenominalstrength,deviationsofthe
actualloadfromthenominalload,uncertaintiesintheanalysisthattransformstheloadintoaloadeffect,andforthe
mannerandconsequencesoffailure.
Seismic design category. Classification assigned to a building by the applicable buildingcode based upon its seismic
use group and the design spectral responseaccelerationcoefficients.
Seismic load resisting system (SLRS). Assembly of structural elements in the building that resists seismic loads,
includingstruts,collectors,chords,diaphragmsandtrusses.
Seismic response modification coefficient, R. Factor that reduces seismic loadeffectstostrengthlevelasspecifiedby
theapplicablebuildingcode.
Seismicusegroup.Classificationassignedtoastructurebasedonitsuseasspecifiedbytheapplicablebuildingcode.
Special concentrically braced frame (SCBF). Diagonally braced frame meeting the requirements of Section
1 0 . 2 0 . 13 in which all members of the bracing system are subjectedprimarilytoaxialforces.
Specialm o m e n t frame(SMF).MomentframesystemthatmeetstherequirementsofSection10.20.9.
Special plate shear wall (SPSW). Plate shear wall system that meets the requirements ofSection10.20.17.
6614
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Special truss moment frame (STMF). Truss moment frame system that meetstherequirementsofSection
10.20.12.
Static yield strength. Strength of a structural member or connection determined on the basis of testing conducted
underslowmonotonicloadinguntilfailure.
Steelcore.AxialforceresistingelementofbracesinBRBF.Thesteelcorecontainsayieldingsegment and connections to
transfer its axial force to adjoining elements; it may also contain projections beyond the casing and transition
segments between the projectionsandyieldingsegment.
Testedconnection.ConnectionthatcomplieswiththerequirementsofAppendix10.B.
Vbraced frame. Concentrically braced frame (SCBF, OCBF or BRBF) in which a pair ofdiagonalbraceslocatedeither
aboveorbelowabeamisconnectedtoasinglepointwithintheclearbeamspan.Wherethediagonalbracesarebelow
thebeam,thesystemisalsoreferredtoasaninvertedVbracedframe.
Xbracedframe.Concentricallybracedframe(OCBForSCBF)inwhichapairofdiagonalbracescrossesnearthemid
lengthofthebraces.
Ybracedframe.Eccentricallybracedframe(EBF)inwhichthestemoftheYisthelinkoftheEBFsystem.
10.20.3
GeneralSeismicDesignRequirements
Therequiredstrengthandotherseismicprovisionsandthelimitationsonheightandirregularityarespecifiedin
Chapter2ofPart6ofthiscode.
ThedesignstorydriftshallbeinaccordancewiththerequirementssetforthinChapter2ofPart6ofthiscode.
10.20.4
Loads,LoadCombinations,andNominalStrengths
10.20.4.1 LoadsandLoadCombinations
The loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated in Chapter 2 of Part 6 of this code. Where amplified
seismic loads are required by these Provisions, the horizontal portion of the earthquake load E (as definedin
Chapter2ofPart6)shallbemultipliedbytheoverstrengthfactor,o,asapplicable.
10.20.4.2 NominalStrength
The nominal strength of s y s t e m s , members and connections shall comply with the Specification, except as
modifiedthroughouttheseProvisions.
10.20.5 StructuralDesignDrawingsandSpecifications,ShopDrawings,andErection
Drawings
10.20.5.1StructuralDesignDrawingsandSpecifications
Structural design drawings and specifications shall show the work to be performed, and include items
requiredbytheSpecificationandthefollowing,asapplicable:
(1)Designationoftheseismicloadresistingsystem(SLRS)
(2)DesignationofthemembersandconnectionsthatarepartoftheSLRS
(3) Configurationoftheconnections
(4)Connectionmaterialspecificationsandsizes
(5)Locationsofdemandcriticalwelds
(6) Lowestanticipatedservicetemperature(LAST)ofthesteelstructure,ifthe structure is not enclosed
andmaintainedatatemperatureof10Corhigher.
(7)Locationsanddimensionsofprotectedzones
(8)Locationswheregussetplatesaretobedetailedtoaccommodateinelasticrotation
(9)WeldingrequirementsasspecifiedinAppendix10.F,Section10.F.2.1.
ShopDrawings
ShopdrawingsshallincludeitemsrequiredbytheSpecificationandthefollowing,asapplicable:
(2) Connectionmaterialspecifications
(3)Locationsofdemandcriticalshopwelds
6615
Part6
StructuralDesign
(5)Gussetplatesdrawntoscalewhentheyaredetailedtoaccommodateinelasticrotation
WeldingrequirementsasspecifiedinAppendix10.F,Section10.F.2.2.
10.20.5.2ErectionDrawings
ErectiondrawingsshallincludeitemsrequiredbytheSpecificationandthefollowing,asapplicable:
(2) Fieldconnectionmaterialspecificationsandsizes
(3)Locationsofdemandcriticalfieldwelds
(5)Locationsofpretensionedbolts
(6)FieldweldingrequirementsasspecifiedinAppendix10.F,Section10.F.2.3
10.20.6
Materials
10.20.6.1 MaterialSpecifications
Structural steel used in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall meet the requirements of Section
10.1.3.1a, except as modified in present Section10.20. The specified minimum yield stress of steel to be
used for membersin which inelastic behavior is expected shall not exceed 345 MPa forsystems defined in
Sections 10.20.9, 10.20.10, 10.20.12, 10.20.13, 10.20.15, 10.20.16, and 10.20.17 nor 380 MPafor systems
defined in Sections 10.20.11 and 10.20.14, unless the suitability of the materialis determined by testing or
otherrationalcriteria.Thislimitationdoesnotapplytocolumnsforwhichtheonlyexpectedinelasticbehavior
isyieldingatthecolumnbase.
The structural steelusedintheSLRSdescribedin Sections10.20.9through10.20.17shallmeetoneofthefollowing
ASTM Specifications: A36/ A36M, A53/A53M, A500 (Grade B or C), A501, A529/A529M, A572/A572M [Grade
290, 345 or 380], A588/A588M, A913/A913M [Grade 345, 415 or 450], A992/A992M, or A1011 HSLAS Grade
380. The structural steel used for columnbaseplatesshall meetone of the precedingASTMspecifications or
ASTMA283/A283MGradeD.
Other steels and nonsteel materials in bucklingrestrained braced frames arepermittedtobeusedsubjectto

therequirementsofSection10.20.16andAppendix10.E.
MaterialPropertiesforDeterminationofRequiredStrengthofMembersandConnections
Therequiredstrengthofanelement(amemberoraconnection)shallbedetermined from the expected yield
stress,Ry Fy,ofanadjoiningmember,whereFy isthespecifiedminimumyieldstressofthegradeofsteeltobe
used in theadjoiningmembers andRy is the ratio of theexpectedyieldstresstothespecifiedminimumyield
stress,Fy ,ofthatmaterial.
Theavailablestrengthoftheelement, RnforLRFDandRn/forASD,shallbeequaltoorgreaterthanthe
requiredstrength,whereRnisthenominalstrengthoftheconnection.Theexpectedtensilestrength,RtFu,and
theexpected yieldstress,RyFy,arepermittedtobeusedinlieuofFuandFy,respectively,indeterminingthe
nominal strength, Rn, of rupture and yielding limit states within the same member for which the required
strengthisdetermined.
ThevaluesofRy andRt forvarioussteelsaregiveninTable10.20.1.OthervaluesofRy andRt shallbepermittedif
thevaluesaredeterminedbytestingofspecimenssimilarinsizeandsourceconductedinaccordancewiththe
requirementsforthespecifiedgradeofsteel.
10.20.6.2 HeavySectionCVNRequirements
For structural steel in the SLRS, in addition to the requirements of Section 10.1.3.1c, hot rolled shapes with
flangethickness38mmandthickershallhaveaminimumCharpyVNotchtoughnessof27Jat21C,testedin
thealternatecorelocationasdescribedinASTMA6SupplementaryRequirementS30.Plates50mmthickand
thickershallhaveaminimumCharpyVNotchtoughnessof27Jat21C,measuredatanylocationpermittedby
ASTMA673,wheretheplateisusedinthefollowing:
1. Membersbuiltupfromplate
2. Connectionplateswhereinelasticstrainunderseismicloadingisexpected
3. Asthesteelcoreofbucklingrestrainedbraces
6616
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
TABLE10.20.1:RyandRt ValuesforDifferentMemberTypes
Application
Hot-rolled structural shapes and bars:
Ry
Rt
1.2
ASTM A36/A36M
1.5
ASTM A572/572M Grade 42 (290)
1.3
1.1
ASTM A572/572M Grade 50 (345) or 55 (380),
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
ASTM A913/A913M Grade 50 (345), 60 (415), or 65 (450),

ASTM A588/A588M,
ASTM A992/A992M, A1011 HSLAS Grade 55 (380)
ASTM A529 Grade 50 (345)
ASTM A529 Grade 55 (380)
Hollow structural sections (HSS):
ASTM A500 (Grade B or C), ASTM A501
Pipe:
ASTM A53/A53M
Plates:
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.3
1.6
1.2
1.2
ASTM A36/A36M
1.3
ASTM A572/A572M Grade 50

(345), ASTM A588/A588M
1.1
1.2
10.20.7
Connections,JointsandFasteners
10.20.7.1 Scope
Connections, joints and fasteners that are part of the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall comply with
Section10.10,andwiththeadditionalrequirementsofthisSection.
ThedesignofconnectionsforamemberthatisapartoftheSLRSshallbeconfigured such that a ductile limit
state in eithertheconnection or themembercontrolsthedesign.
10.20.7.2 BoltedJoints
All bolts shall be pretensioned high strength bolts and shall meet the requirements for slipcritical faying
surfacesinaccordancewithSection10.10.3.8withaClassAsurface.Boltsshallbeinstalledinstandardholesor
in shortslotted holes perpendicular to the applied load. For brace diagonals, oversized holes shall be
permitted when the connection is designed as a slipcritical joint, and the oversized hole is in one ply only.
Alternative hole types are permitted if determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with
Appendix 10.A, or ifdeterminedinaprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.Dor10.E.
The available shear strength of bolted jointsusing standard holes shallbecalculated as that for bearingtype
joints in accordance with Sections 10.10.3.7 and 10.10.3.10,except thatthe nominalbearingstrength atbolt
holesshallnotbetakengreaterthan2.4dtFu.
Exception:Thefayingsurfacesforendplatemomentconnectionsarepermittedtobecoatedwithcoatingsnot
testedforslipresistance,orwithcoatingswithaslipcoefficientlessthanthatofaClassAfayingsurface.
Boltsandweldsshallnotbedesignedtoshareforceinajointorthesameforcecomponentinaconnection.
6617
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.20.7.3 WeldedJoints
WeldingshallbeperformedinaccordancewithAppendix10.F.Weldingshallbeperformed in accordance with
a welding procedure specification (WPS) as required in AWS D1.1. The WPS variables shall be within the
parametersestablishedbythefillermetalmanufacturer.
GeneralRequirements
All welds used in members and connections in the SLRS shall be made with a filler metal that can produce
weldsthathaveaminimumCharpyVNotchtoughnessof27Jatminus18C,asdeterminedbytheappropriate
AWSA5 classification test method or manufacturer certification. This requirement for notch toughness shall
also apply in other cases as required in theseProvisions.
DemandCriticalWelds
Whereweldsaredesignatedasdemandcritical,theyshallbemadewithafillermetal capable of providing a
minimum Charpy VNotch (CVN) toughness of 27 J at 29 C as determined by the appropriate AWS
classification test method or manufacturer certification, and 54 J at 21CasdeterminedbyAppendix10.Gor
otherapprovedmethod,whenthesteelframeisnormallyenclosedandmaintainedatatemperatureof10Cor
higher. For structures with service temperatures lower than 10 C, thequalificationtemperatureforAppendix
10.Gshallbe11Cabovethelowestanticipatedservicetemperature,oratalowertemperature.
SMAW electrodes classified in AWS A5.1 as E7018 or E7018X, SMAW electrodes classified in AWS A5.5 as
E7018C3L orE8018C3,andGMAW solidelectrodesareexemptedfromproductionlottestingwhentheCVN
toughnessoftheelectrodeequalsorexceeds27Jatatemperaturenotexceeding29CasdeterminedbyAWS
classification test methods. The manufacturers certificate of compliance shall be considered sufficient
evidenceofmeetingthisrequirement.
ProtectedZone
WhereaprotectedzoneisdesignatedbytheseProvisions,itshallcomplywiththefollowing:
(1) Within the protected zone, discontinuities created by fabrication or erection operations, such as tack
welds, erection aids, airarc gouging and thermalcuttingshallberepairedasrequiredbytheengineerof
record.
(2) Weldedshearstudsanddeckingattachmentsthatpenetratethebeamflangeshall not be placed on
beam flanges within the protected zone. Decking arc spot welds as required to secure decking shall be
permitted.
(3)Welded,bolted,screwedorshotinattachmentsforperimeteredgeangles,exteriorfacades,partitions,
ductwork,pipingorotherconstructionshallnotbeplacedwithintheprotectedzone.
Exception:Weldedshearstudsandotherconnectionsshallbepermittedwhendetermined in accordance with
a connection prequalification in accordance withAppendix10.A,orasdeterminedinaprogramofqualification
testinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
Outsidetheprotectedzone,calculationsbasedupontheexpectedmomentshallbemadetodemonstratethe
adequacyofthemembernetsectionwhenconnectorsthatpenetratethememberareused.
ContinuityPlatesandStiffeners
Corners of continuity plates and stiffeners placed in the webs of rolled shapes shall be clipped as described
below.Alongtheweb,theclipshallbedetailedsothattheclipextendsadistanceofatleast38mmbeyondthe
publishedkdetaildimensionfortherolledshape.Alongtheflange,theclipshallbedetailedsothattheclipdoes
notexceedadistanceof12mmbeyondthepublishedk1 detaildimension.Theclipshallbedetailedtofacilitate
suitableweldterminationsfor boththe flange weld and thewebweld.If acurved clip is used, it shallhavea
minimumradiusof12mm.
At the end of the weld adjacent to the column web/flange juncture, weld tabsfor continuity plates shall not
beused,exceptwhenpermittedbytheengineerofrecord.Unlessspecifiedbytheengineerofrecordthatthey
beremoved,weldtabsshallnotberemovedwhenusedinthislocation.
10.20.8
Members
10.20.8.1 Scope
Members in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall comply with the specifications of Sections 10.1
through10.11andSection10.20.8.ForcolumnsthatarenotpartoftheSLRS,seeSection10.20.8.4.2.
6618
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.20.8.2 ClassificationofSectionsforLocalBuckling
Compact
WhenrequiredbytheseProvisions,membersoftheSLRSshallhaveflangescontinuouslyconnectedtotheweb
orwebsandthewidththicknessratiosofitscompressionelementsshallnotexceedthelimitingwidththickness
ratios,p,fromSpecificationTableB4.1.
SeismicallyCompact
WhenrequiredbytheseProvisions,membersoftheSLRSmusthaveflangescontinuouslyconnectedtotheweb
orwebsandthewidththicknessratiosofitscompressionelementsshallnotexceedthelimitingwidththickness
ratios,ps,fromProvisionsTable10.2.4.1.
ColumnStrength
WhenPu/cPn(LRFD)>0.4orcPa/Pn(ASD)>0.4,asappropriate,withoutconsiderationoftheamplifiedseismic
load,
where
c =0.90(LRFD) c=1.67(ASD)
Pa =requiredaxialstrengthofacolumnusingASDloadcombinations,N
Pn =nominalaxialstrengthofacolumn,N
Pu =requiredaxialstrengthofacolumnusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
Thefollowingrequirementsshallbemet:
The required axial compressive and tensile strength, considered in the absence of any applied moment, shall
be determined using the load combinationsstipulatedbytheapplicablebuildingcodeincludingtheamplified
seismicload.
Therequiredaxialcompressiveandtensilestrengthshallnotexceedeitherofthefollowing:
(a) The maximum load transferred to the column considering 1.1Ry (LRFD) or (1.1/1.5)Ry (ASD), as
appropriate,timesthenominalstrengthsoftheconnectingbeamorbraceelementsofthebuilding.
(b) Thelimitasdeterminedfromtheresistanceofthefoundationtooverturninguplift.
TABLE10.20.2:LimitingWidthThicknessRatiosforCompressionElements
Limiting Width- Thickness Ratios
Description of Element
Width- Thickness
Ratio
ps
(seismicallycompact)
Flexure in flanges of rolled or built-up

I-shaped sections [a], [c], [e], [g], [h]
Unstiffened Elements
Uniform compression in flanges of rolled

or built-up I-shaped sections [b], [h]
Uniform compression in flanges of rolled
or built-up I-shaped sections [d]
b/t
0.30(E/Fy)
b/t
0.30(E/Fy)
b/t
0.38(E/Fy)
Uniform compression in flanges of

channels, outstanding legs of pairs of
angles in continuous contact, and braces
[c] [g]
Uniform compression in flanges of
b/t
0.30(E/Fy)
H-pile sections
b/t
0.45(E/Fy)
Flat bars [f]
b/t
2.5
b/t
0.30(E/Fy)
d/t
0.30(E/Fy)
Uniform compression in legs of single

angles, legs of double angle members with
separators, or flanges of tees [g]
Uniform compression in stems of tees [g]
Note: See continued Table 10.20.2 for stiffened elements.
6619
Part6
StructuralDesign
6620
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
10.20.8.3 ColumnSplices
General
The required strength of column splices in the seismic load resistingsystem(SLRS) shall equal the required
strength of the columns, including that determinedfromSections10.20.8.3,10.20.9.9,10.20.10.9,10.20.11.9,
10.20.13.5and10.20.16.5.2.
In addition, welded column splices that are subject to a calculated net tensileload effect determined using
the load combinations stipulated by the applicable building code including the amplified seismic load, shall
satisfybothofthefollowingrequirements:
(1) Theavailablestrengthofpartialjointpenetration(PJP)grooveweldedjoints,ifused,shallbeatleast
equalto200percentoftherequiredstrength.
(2) The available strength for each flange splice shall be at leastequalto0.5Ry Fy Af (LRFD) or
(0.5/1.5)Ry Fy Af (ASD),asappropriate,whereRyFy istheexpectedyieldstressofthecolumnmaterialandAf
istheflangeareaofthesmallercolumnconnected.
Beveled transitions are not required when changes in thickness and width of flanges and webs occur in
column splices where PJP groovewelded jointsareused.
Column web splices shall be either bolted or welded, or welded to one column and bolted to the other. In
momentframesusingboltedsplices,platesorchannelsshallbeusedonbothsidesofthecolumnweb.
The centerline of column splices made with fillet welds or partialjointpenetration groove welds shall be
located1.2mormoreawayfromthebeamtocolumn connections. When the column clear height between
beamtocolumnconnectionsislessthan2.4m,splicesshallbeathalftheclearheight.
ColumnsNotPartoftheSeismicLoadResistingSystem
SplicesofcolumnsthatarenotapartoftheSLRSshallsatisfythefollowing:
(1) Splices shall be located 1.2m or more away from the beamtocolumn connections. When the
columnclearheightbetweenbeamtocolumn connections is less than 2.4m, splices shall be at half the
clearheight.
(2)The required shear strength of column splices with respect to bothorthogonalaxesofthecolumn
shall be Mpc /H (LRFD) or Mpc /1.5H (ASD), as appropriate, where Mpc is the lesser nominal plastic flexural
strengthofthecolumnsectionsforthedirectioninquestion,andHisthestoryheight.
10.20.8.4 ColumnBases
The required strength of column bases shall be calculated in accordance with Sections 1 0 . 2 0 . 8.5.1,
1 0 . 2 0 . 8.5.2, and 1 0 . 2 0 . 8.5.3. The available strength of anchor rods shall be determined in accordance
withSpecificationSection10.10.3.
The available strength of concrete elements at the column base, including anchor rod embedment and
reinforcing steel, shall be in accordancewith AppendixDofChapter6ofPart6ofthiscode.
Exception:ThespecialrequirementsinAppendixDofChapter6ofPart6ofthiscode,forregionsofmoderate
or high seismic risk, or for structures assigned to intermediate or high seismic performance or design
categoriesneednotbeapplied.
RequiredAxialStrength
The required axial strength of column bases, including their attachment to the foundation, shall be the
summation of the vertical components of the requiredstrengthsofthesteelelementsthatareconnectedto
thecolumnbase.
RequiredShearStrength
The required shear strength of column bases, including their attachments to the foundations, shall be the
summationofthehorizontalcomponentoftherequiredstrengthsofthesteelelementsthatareconnected
tothecolumnbaseasfollows:
(1) For diagonal bracing, the horizontal component shall be determined from the required strength o f
bracingconnectionsfortheseismicloadresistingsystem(SLRS).
(2)Forcolumns,thehorizontalcomponentshallbeatleastequaltothelesserofthefollowing:
(a) 2Ry Fy Zx /H(LRFD)or(2/1.5)Ry Fy Zx /H(ASD),asappropriate,ofthecolumn
6621
Part6
StructuralDesign
where
H =height of story, which may be taken as the distance betweenthecenterlineoffloorframingat
eachofthelevelsaboveandbelow,orthedistancebetweenthetopoffloorslabsateachofthelevels
aboveandbelow,mm.
(b) The shear calculated using the load combinations of theapplicablebuildingcode,includingthe
amplifiedseismicload.
RequiredFlexuralStrength
Therequired flexural strength of column bases, including theirattachmentto the foundation, shall be the
summationoftherequiredstrengthsofthesteelelementsthatareconnectedtothecolumnbaseasfollows:
(1) For diagonal bracing, the required flexural strength shall be at least equal to the required strength of bracing
connectionsfortheSLRS.
(2)For columns, the required flexural strength shall be at least equal tothelesserofthefollowing:
(a)1.1Ry Fy Z (LRFD) or (1.1/1.5)Ry Fy Z (ASD), as appropriate, ofthecolumnor
(b) the moment calculated using the load combinations of the applicable building code, including the
amplifiedseismicload.
10.20.8.5 HPiles
DesignofHPiles
DesignofHpilesshallcomplywiththeprovisionsoftheSpecificationregarding design of members subjected
to combined loads. Hpilesshall meet therequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
BatteredHPiles
Ifbattered(sloped)andverticalpilesareusedinapilegroup,thevertical pilesshall be designed to support
the combined effects of the dead andlive loadswithouttheparticipationofthebatteredpiles.
TensioninHPiles
Tension in each pile shall be transferred to the pile cap by mechanical meanssuch as shear keys, reinforcing
barsorstudsweldedtotheembeddedportionofthepile.Directlybelowthebottomofthepilecap,eachpile
shallbefreeofattachmentsandweldsforalengthatleastequaltothedepthofthepilecrosssection.
10.20.9
SpecialMomentFrames(SMF)
10.20.9.1 Scope
Specialmomentframes(SMF)areexpectedtowithstandsignificantinelasticdeformationswhensubjectedtothe
forcesresultingfromthemotionsofthedesignearthquake.SMFshallsatisfytherequirementsinthisSection.
10.20.9.2 BeamtoColumnConnections
Requirements
Beamtocolumn connections used in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall satisfy the following three
requirements:
(1)Theconnectionshallbecapableofsustaininganinterstorydriftangleofatleast0.04radians.
(2) The measured flexural resistance of the connection, determined at the column face, shall equal at least
0.80Mp oftheconnectedbeamataninterstorydriftangleof0.04radians.
(3) The required shear strength of the connection shall be determined using the following quantity for the
earthquakeloadeffectE:
E 2 1.1RyMp /Lh
10.20.9.1
where
Ry = ratiooftheexpectedyieldstresstothespecifiedminimumyieldstress,Fy
Mp= nominalplasticflexuralstrength,(Nmm)
Lh = distancebetweenplastichingelocations,(mm)
6622
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
WhenEasdefinedinEquation10.20.9.1isusedinASDloadcombinationsthatareadditivewithothertransient
loadsand that arebased on Chapter2(ofPart6), the0.75combinationfactorfortransientloadsshallnotbe
appliedtoE.
Connections that accommodate the required interstory drift angle within the connection elements and
provide the measured flexural resistanceandshearstrengths specified above are permitted. In addition to
satisfying the requirements noted above, the design shall demonstrate that any additional drift due to
connectiondeformationcanbeaccommodatedbythestructure.Thedesignshall include analysisforstability
effectsoftheoverallframe,includingsecondordereffects.
ConformanceDemonstration
BeamtocolumnconnectionsusedintheSLRSshallsatisfytherequirementsof Section 10.20.9.2.1byoneofthe
following:
(a)UseofSMFconnectionsdesignedinaccordancewithANSI/AISC358.
(b) UseofaconnectionprequalifiedforSMFinaccordancewithAppendix10.A.
(c)ProvisionofqualifyingcyclictestresultsinaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
Results of at least two cyclic connection tests shall be provided andarepermittedtobebasedononeof
thefollowing:
(i) Testsreportedintheresearchliteratureordocumentedtestsperformedforotherprojects
thatrepresenttheprojectconditions,withinthelimitsspecifiedinAppendix10.D.
(ii) Tests that are conducted specifically for the project and are representative of project
member sizes, material strengths, connection configurations, and matching connection
processes,withinthelimitsspecifiedinAppendix10.D.
Welds
Unless otherwise designated by ANSI/AISC 358, or otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
accordance with Appendix 10.A, or as determined in a program of qualification testing in accordance with
Appendix 10.D, completejointpenetration groove welds of beam flanges, shear plates, and beam webs to
columnsshallbedemandcriticalweldsasdescribedinSection10.20.7.3.2.
ProtectedZones
Theregionateachendofthebeamsubjecttoinelasticstrainingshallbedesignated as a protected zone, and
shallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.7.4.Theextent of the protected zone shall be as designated in
ANSI/AISC 358, or asotherwisedeterminedinaconnectionprequalificationinaccordancewithAppendix10.A,
orasdeterminedinaprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
10.20.9.3 PanelZoneofBeamtoColumnConnections(beamwebparalleltocolumnweb)
ShearStrength
The required thickness of the panel zone shall be determined in accordance with the method used in
proportioning the panel zone of the tested or prequalified connection. As a minimum, the required shear
strength of the panel zone shallbe determined from the summation of the moments at the column faces as
determined by projecting the expected moments at the plastic hinge points to the column faces. The design
shearstrengthshallbevRvandtheallowableshearstrengthshallbeRv/vwhere
v=1.0(LRFD)
v=1.50(ASD)
and the nominal shear strength, Rv, according to the limit state of shear yielding, is determined as specified in
SpecificationSection10.10.10.6.
PanelZoneThickness
The individual thicknesses, t, of column webs and doubler plates, if used, shall conform to the following
requirement:
t dz wz /90
10.20.9.2
where
t
=thicknessofcolumnwebordoublerplate,mm
6623
Part6
StructuralDesign
dz =panelzonedepthbetweencontinuityplates,mm
wz =panelzonewidthbetweencolumnflanges,mm
Alternatively,whenlocalbucklingofthecolumnwebanddoublerplateispreventedbyusingplugweldsjoining
them,thetotalpanelzonethicknessshallsatisfyEquation10.20.9.2.
PanelZoneDoublerPlates
Doublerplatesshallbeweldedtothecolumnflangesusingeithera completejointpenetrationgroovewelded
orfilletweldedjointthatdevelopstheavailableshearstrengthofthefulldoublerplatethickness.Whendoubler
platesareplacedagainstthecolumnweb,theyshallbeweldedacrossthetopandbottomedgestodevelopthe
proportion of the total force that is transmitted to the doubler plate. When doubler plates are placed away
fromthecolumnweb,theyshallbeplacedsymmetricallyinpairsandweldedtocontinuityplatestodevelopthe
proportionofthetotalforcethatistransmittedtothedoublerplate.
BeamandColumnLimitations
TherequirementsofSection10.20.8.1shallbesatisfied,inadditiontothefollowing.
WidthThicknessLimitations
BeamandcolumnmembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2,unlessotherwisequalifiedby
tests.
BeamFlanges
Abruptchangesinbeamflangeareaarenotpermittedinplastichinge regions.The drilling of flange holes or
trimming of beam flange width is permitted if testing or qualification demonstrates that the resulting
configuration can develop stable plastic hinges. The configuration shall be consistent with a prequalified
connection designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
accordancewithAppendix10.A,orinaprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
ContinuityPlates
Continuity plates shall be consistent with the prequalified connection designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as
otherwisedeterminedinaconnectionprequalificationinaccordancewithAppendix10.A,orasdeterminedina
programofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
ColumnBeamMomentRatio
The following relationship shall be satisfied at beam-to-column connections:
M pc* > 1.0

M pb*
10.20.9.3
Mpc* =thesumofthemomentsinthecolumnaboveandbelowthejointattheintersectionofthebeamand
*
columncenterlines. Mpc
isdeterminedbysummingtheprojectionsofthenominalflexuralstrengthsofthe
columns(includinghauncheswhereused)aboveandbelowthejointtothebeamcenterlinewithareductionfor
*
theaxialforceinthecolumn.Itispermittedtotake M pc
=Zc(Fyc Puc /Ag)(LRFD)orZc[(Fyc/1.5) Pac/Ag]
(ASD),asappropriate.Whenthecenterlinesofopposingbeamsinthesamejointdonotcoincide,themidline
betweencenterlinesshallbeused.
Mpb* =thesumofthemomentsinthebeamsattheintersectionofthebeamandcolumncenterlines. Mpb*

isdeterminedbysummingtheprojectionsoftheexpectedflexuralstrengthsofthebeamsattheplastichinge
*
locations to the column centerline. It is permitted to take Mpb
= (1.1RyFybZb + Muv) (LRFD) or
[(1.1/1.5)RyFybZb + Mav] (ASD), as appropriate. Alternatively, it is permitted to determine
Mpb* consistent
with a prequalified connection design as designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a

connection prequalification in accordance with Appendix 10.A, or in a program of qualification testing in
accordancewithAppendix10.D.Whenconnectionswithreducedbeamsectionsareused,itispermittedtotake
Mpb* =(1.1RyFybZRBS+Muv)(LRFD)or[(1.1/1.5)RyFybZRBS+Mav](ASD),asappropriate.
Ag =grossareaofcolumn,mm
Fyc =specifiedminimumyieldstressofcolumn,MPa
Mav =theadditionalmomentduetoshearamplificationfromthelocationoftheplastichingetothecolumn
centerline,basedonASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
6624
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Muv =theadditionalmomentduetoshearamplificationfromthelocationoftheplastichingetothecolumn
centerline,basedonLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm
Pac=requiredcompressivestrengthusingASDloadcombinations,(positivenumber)N.
Puc=requiredcompressivestrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,(positivenumber)N
Zb =plasticsectionmodulusofthebeam,mm3
Zc =plasticsectionmodulusofthecolumn,mm3
ZRBS
=minimumplasticsectionmodulusatthereducedbeamsection,mm3
Exception:Thisrequirementdoesnotapplyifeitherofthefollowingtwoconditionsissatisfied:
(a) Columns with Prc < 0.3Pc for all load combinations other thanthose determined using the amplified
seismic load that satisfy either of thefollowing:
(i)Columnsusedinaonestorybuildingorthetopstoryofamultistorybuilding.
(ii) Columns where: (1) the sum of the available shear strengths ofallexempted columns in the story is
less than 20 percent of the sum of the available shear strengths of all moment frame columns in the story
acting in the same direction; and (2) the sum of theavailable shearstrengthsofallexemptedcolumnson
eachmomentframecolumnlinewithinthatstoryislessthan33percentoftheavailableshearstrengthofall
moment frame columns on that column line. For the purpose ofthis exception, a column line is defined as a
single line of columns or parallel lines of columns located within 10 percent of the plan dimension
perpendiculartothelineofcolumns.
where
FordesignaccordingtoSpecificationSection10.2.3.3(LRFD),
Pc =Fyc Ag,N
Prc = Puc,requiredcompressivestrength,usingLRFDloadcombinations,N
FordesignaccordingtoSpecificationSection10.2.3.4(ASD),
Pc =Fyc Ag /1.5,N
Prc =Pac,requiredcompressivestrength,usingASDloadcombinations,N
(b)Columnsinanystorythathasaratioofavailableshearstrengthtorequiredshearstrengththatis50percent
greaterthanthestoryabove.
10.20.9.4 LateralBracingatBeamtoColumnConnections
BracedConnections
Column flanges at beamtocolumn connections require lateral bracing only atthe level of the top flanges of
the beams, when the webs of the beams and columnarecoplanar,andacolumnisshowntoremainelastic
outside of the panel zone. It shall be permitted to assume that the column remains elastic when the ratio
calculatedusingEquation10.20.9.3isgreaterthan2.0.
Whenacolumncannotbeshowntoremainelasticoutsideofthepanelzone,thefollowingrequirementsshall
apply:
The column flanges shall be laterally braced at the levels of both the top and bottom beam flanges. Lateral
bracingshallbeeitherdirectorindirect.
Eachcolumnflangelateralbraceshallbedesignedforarequired strengththat is equal to 2 percent of the
available beam flangestrength Fy bf tbf(LRFD)orFy bf tbf /1.5(ASD),asappropriate.
UnbracedConnections
Acolumncontainingabeamtocolumnconnectionwithnolateralbracingtransversetotheseismicframeatthe
connection shall be designed using the distance between adjacent lateral braces as the column height for
bucklingtransversetotheseismicframeandshallconformtoSpecificationSection10.8,exceptthat:
(1) Therequiredcolumnstrengthshallbedeterminedfromtheappropriateloadcombinations,exceptthatE
shallbetakenasthelesserof:
(a) Theamplifiedseismicload.
(b) 125percentoftheframeavailablestrengthbaseduponeitherthebeamavailableflexuralstrengthorpanel
zoneavailableshearstrength.
6625
Part6
StructuralDesign
(2)TheslendernessL/rforthecolumnshallnotexceed60.
Thecolumnrequiredflexuralstrengthtransversetotheseismicframeshallinclude that moment caused by the
application of the beam flange force specified in Section 10.20.9.7.1.(2) in addition to the secondorder
momentduetotheresultingcolumnflangedisplacement.
LateralBracingofBeams
Both flanges of beams shall be laterally braced, with a maximum spacing of Lb =0.086ry E/Fy.Bracesshall
meettheprovisionsofEquations10.19.3.3and10.19.3.4ofSection10.19,whereMr =Mu =Ry ZFy(LRFD)orMr
=Ma=Ry ZFy /1.5(ASD),asappropriate,ofthebeamandCd =1.0.
In addition, lateral braces shall be placed near concentrated forces, changes in crosssection, and other
locationswhereanalysisindicatesthataplastichingewill form during inelastic deformations of the SMF. The
placement of lateral bracing shall be consistent with that documented for a prequalified connection
designated inANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a connectionprequalificationinaccordancewith
Appendix10.A,orinaprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
TherequiredstrengthoflateralbracingprovidedadjacenttoplastichingesshallbePu =0.06Mu /ho (LRFD)orPa
= 0.06Ma /ho (ASD), as appropriate, where ho is the distance between flange centroids; and the required
stiffnessshallmeettheprovisionsofEquation10.19.3.4ofSection10.19.
ColumnSplices
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of Section 1 0 . 2 0 . 8.4.1.Wheregrooveweldsareused
to make the splice, they shall be completejointpenetration groove welds that meet the requirements of
Section10.20.7.3.2.Weldtabsshallberemoved.Whencolumnsplicesarenotmadewithgroovewelds,they
shallhavearequiredflexuralstrengththatisatleastequaltoRy Fy Zx (LRFD)orRy Fy Zx /1.5(ASD),asappropriate,of
thesmallercolumn.TherequiredshearstrengthofcolumnwebsplicesshallbeatleastequaltoMpc/H(LRFD)
or Mpc /1.5H (ASD), as appropriate, where Mpc is the sum of the nominal plastic flexural strengths of the
columnsaboveandbelowthesplice.
Exception:Therequired strength of the column spliceconsidering appropriatestress concentration factors or
fracturemechanicsstressintensityfactorsneednotexceedthatdeterminedbyinelasticanalyses.
10.20.10 IntermediateMomentFrames(IMF)
10.20.10.1 Scope
Intermediatemomentframes(IMF)areexpectedtowithstandlimited inelasticdeformations in their members
and connections when subjected to the forcesresultingfromthemotionsofthedesignearthquake.IMFshall
meettherequirementsinthisSection.
Requirements
Beamtocolumnconnectionsusedintheseismicloadresistingsystem (SLRS)shallsatisfytherequirementsof
Section10.20.9.2.1,withthefollowingexceptions:
(1)Therequiredinterstorydriftangleshallbeaminimumof0.02radian.
(2)TherequiredstrengthinshearshallbedeterminedasspecifiedinSection10.20.9.2.1, except that a lesser
value of Vu or Va, as appropriate, is permitted if justified by analysis.The required shear strength need not
exceed the shear resulting from the application of appropriate load combinations using the amplified
seismicload.
ConformanceDemonstration
ConformancedemonstrationshallbeasdescribedinSection10.20.9.2.2tosatisfytherequirementsofSection
10.20.10.2.1 for IMF, except that a connection prequalified for IMF in accordance with ANSI/AISC 358, or as
otherwisedeterminedinaconnection prequalification in accordance withAppendix 10.A, or as determined in
aprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
Welds
Unless otherwise designated by ANSI/AISC 358, or otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
accordance with Appendix 10.A, or as determined in a program of qualification testing in accordance with
6626
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Appendix 10.D, complete joint penetration groove welds of beam flanges, shear plates, and beam webs to
columnsshallbedemandcriticalweldsasdescribedinSection10.20.7.3.2.
ProtectedZone
Theregionateachendofthebeamsubjecttoinelasticstrainingshallbetreatedasaprotectedzone,andshall
meet the requirements of Section 10.20.7.4. The extent of the protected zone shall be as designated in
ANSI/AISC 358, or as other wise determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with Appendix
10.A,orasdeterminedinaprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
PanelZoneofBeamtoColumnConnections(beamwebparalleltocolumnweb)
NoadditionalrequirementsbeyondtheSpecification.
BeamandColumnLimitations
TherequirementsofSection10.20.8.1shallbesatisfied,inadditiontothefollowing.
BeamandcolumnmembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.1,unlessotherwisequalifiedby
tests.
BeamFlanges
Abrupt changes in beam flange area are not permitted in plastic hinge regions. Drilling of flange holes or
trimming of beam flange width is permitted if testing or qualification demonstrates that the resulting
configuration can develop stable plastic hinges. The configuration shall be consistent with a prequalified
connection designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in accordance
with Appendix 10.A, or in a program of qualification testing in accordance with Appendix 10.D.
ContinuityPlates
Continuityplatesshallbeprovidedtobeconsistentwiththeprequalifiedconnections designatedinANSI/AISC
358, or as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with Appendix 10.A, or as
determinedinaprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
LateralBracingatBeamtoColumnConnections
Bothflangesshallbelaterallybraceddirectlyorindirectly.Theunbracedlengthbetweenlateralbracesshallnot
exceed 0.17ry E/Fy. Braces shall meet the provisions of Equations 10.19.3.3 and 10.19.3.4 of Section 10.19,
whereMr =Mu =Ry ZFy (LRFD)orMr =Ma =Ry ZFy /1.5(ASD),asappropriate,ofthebeam,andCd =1.0.
In addition, lateral braces shall be placed near concentrated loads, changes in crosssection and other
locations where analysis indicates that a plastic hinge will form during inelastic deformations of the IMF.
Where the design is baseduponassembliestestedinaccordancewithAppendix10.D,theplacementoflateral
bracing for the beams shall be consistent with that used in the tests or as required for prequalification in
Appendix10.A.TherequiredstrengthoflateralbracingprovidedadjacenttoplastichingesshallbePu =0.06Mu
/ho (LRFD)orPa =0.06Ma /ho (ASD),asappropriate,whereho =distancebetweenflangecentroids;andthe
requiredstiffnessshallmeettheprovisionsofEquation10.19.3.4ofSection10.19.
ColumnSplices
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of Section10.20.8.4.1.Wheregrooveweldsareusedto
makethesplice,theyshallbecompletejointpenetrationgrooveweldsthatmeettherequirementsofSection
10.20.7.3.2.
10.20.11 OrdinaryMomentFrames(OMF)
10.20.11.1 Scope
Ordinary moment frames (OMF) are expected to withstand minimalinelasticdeformations in their members
and connections when subjected to the forcesresulting from the motions of the design earthquake.OMF
shall meet the requirements of this Section. Connections in conformance with Sections 10 . 20 . 9.2.1 and
6627
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.20.9.5 or Sections 10.20.10.2.1 and 10.20.10.5 shall be permitted for use in OMF withoutmeetingthe
requirementsofSections10.20.11.2.1,10.20.11.2.3,and10.20.11.5
Beamtocolumn connections shall be made with welds and/or highstrength bolts. Connections are
permittedtobefullyrestrained(FR)orpartiallyrestrained(PR)momentconnectionsasfollows.
RequirementsforFRMomentConnections
FRmomentconnectionsthatarepartoftheseismicloadresistingsystem(SLRS)shallbedesignedforarequired
flexuralstrengththatisequalto1.1RyMp (LRFD)or(1.1/1.5)Ry Mp (ASD),asappropriate,ofthebeamorgirder,or
themaximummomentthatcanbedevelopedbythesystem,whicheverisless.
FRconnectionsshallmeetthefollowingrequirements.
(1) Where steel backing is used in connections with completejointpenetration (CJP) beam flange groove
welds, steel backing and tabs shall be removed, except that topflange backing attached to the column by a
continuousfilletweldontheedgebelowtheCJPgrooveweldneednotberemoved.Removalofsteelbackingand
tabsshallbeasfollows:
(i) Following the removal of backing, the root pass shall be backgouged to sound weld metal and
backweldedwithareinforcingfillet.Thereinforcingfilletshallhaveaminimumlegsizeof8mm.
(ii)Weldtabremovalshallextendtowithin3mmofthebasemetalsurface,exceptatcontinuityplateswhere
removaltowithin6mmoftheplateedgeisacceptable.Edgesoftheweldtabshallbefinishedtoasurface
roughnessvalueof13morbetter.Grindingtoaflushconditionisnotrequired.Gougesandnotchesare
notpermitted.Thetransitionalslopeofanyareawheregougesandnotcheshavebeenremovedshallnot
exceed 1:5. Material removed by grinding that extends more than 2 mm below the surface of the base
metalshallbefilledwithweldmetal.Thecontouroftheweldattheendsshallprovideasmoothtransition,
freeofnotchesandsharpcorners.
(2)Whereweldaccessholesareprovided,theyshallbeasshowninFigure10.20.11.1.Theweldaccesshole
shallhaveasurfaceroughnessvaluenottoexceed13m,andshallbefreeofnotchesandgouges.Notchesand
gougesshallberepairedasrequiredbytheengineerofrecord.Weldaccessholesareprohibitedinthebeam
webadjacenttotheendplateinboltedmomentendplateconnections.
(3)The required strength of doublesided partialjointpenetration groovewelds and doublesided fillet
welds that resist tensile forces in connections shall be 1.1Ry Fy Ag (LRFD) or (1.1/1.5)Ry Fy Ag (ASD), as
appropriate,oftheconnectedelementorpart.Singlesidedpartialjointpenetration grooveweldsand
singlesidedfilletweldsshallnotbeusedtoresisttensileforcesintheconnections.
(4)ForFRmomentconnections,therequiredshearstrength,Vu orVa,asappropriate,oftheconnectionshallbe
determinedusingthefollowingquantityfortheearthquakeloadeffectE:
E 2 1.1Ry Mp /Lh
10.20.11.1
WherethisEisusedinASDloadcombinationsthatareadditivewithothertransient loads and that are based

onChapter2(ofPart6),the 0.75combinationfactorfortransientloadsshallnotbeappliedtoE.
Alternatively,alesservalueofVu orVa ispermittedifjustifiedbyanalysis.Therequiredshearstrengthneednot
exceedtheshearresultingfromtheapplicationofappropriateloadcombinationsintheapplicablebuildingcode
usingtheamplifiedseismicload
RequirementsforPRMomentConnections
PRmomentconnectionsarepermittedwhenthefollowingrequirementsaremet:
(1)SuchconnectionsshallbedesignedfortherequiredstrengthasspecifiedinSection10.20.11.2.1above.
(2)Thenominalflexuralstrengthoftheconnection,Mn,shallbenolessthan50percentofMp oftheconnected
beamorcolumn,whicheverisless.
(3)ThestiffnessandstrengthofthePRmomentconnectionsshallbe consideredinthedesign,includingthe
effectonoverallframestability.
(4) For PR moment connections, Vu or Va, as appropriate, shall be determined from the load combination
aboveplustheshearresultingfromthemaximumendmomentthattheconnectioniscapableofresisting.
6628
Vol.2
SteelStructu
ures
C
Chapter10
Fig.10.20.111.1.Weldaccesssholedetail(FEMA350)
Notes:1.Bevelasrequireedforselectedggrooveweld.
2.Largeroftbf or13mm(plustbf,orminustbf)
mum(6mm)
3.tbf totbf
b ,19mmminim
4.10mmm
minimumradius((plusnotlimited,minus0)
5.3tbf (13
3mm)
Tolerancessshallnotaccum
mulatetotheexttentthatthean
ngleoftheaccesssholecuttoth
heflangesurfacceexceeds25.
Welds
Completejointpenetraation groove welds
w
of beam
m flanges, she
ear plates, and beam webss to columns shall be
demandcrriticalweldsasdescribedin
nSection10.20
0.7.3.2.
PanelZoneeofBeamtoColumnConn
nections(beam
mwebparallelltocolumnweeb)
Noadditio
onalrequirementsbeyondttheSpecificatiion.
Beamand
dColumnLimiitations
Norequire
ementsbeyon
ndSection10.20.8.1.
ContinuityyPlates
When FR moment con
nnections aree made by m
means of weld
ds of beam fflanges or beamflange connection
plates directly to column flanges, continuity pla
ates shall be provided in accordance
a
with Section J1
10 of the
Specificatiion.Continuityyplatesshallaalsoberequiredwhen:
tcf<0.54(bftbfFyb/Fyc)1/2
orwhen,
tcf<bf/6
Wherecontinuityplatesarerequired
d,thethicknessoftheplateesshallbedeterminedasfollows:
For onesiided connectiions, continuity plate thickkness shall bee at least oneehalfofthe thickness
t
of th
hebeam
flange.
Fortwosiidedconnectionsthecontinuityplatessshallbeatleaastequalinth
hicknesstothethickerofthebeam
flanges.
The weldeed joints of th
he continuity plates to thee column flan
nges shall be made with either
e
compleetejoint
penetratio
on groove weelds, twoside
edpartialjointpenetration groove welds combined with reinforccing fillet
welds, or twosidedfillet welds. The required sttrength of theese jointsshall not be le
ess than thea
available
Part6
StructuralDesign
strengthofthecontactareaoftheplatewiththecolumnflange.Therequiredstrengthoftheweldedjointsof
thecontinuityplatestothecolumnwebshallbetheleastofthefollowing:
Thesumoftheavailablestrengthsattheconnectionsofthecontinuityplatetothecolumnflanges.
Theavailableshearstrengthofthecontactareaoftheplatewiththecolumnweb.
Theweldavailablestrengththatdevelopstheavailableshearstrengthofthecolumnpanelzone.
Theactualforcetransmittedbythestiffener.
Norequirements.
LateralBracingatBeamtoColumnConnections
ColumnSplices
ColumnsplicesshallcomplywiththerequirementsofSection10.20.8.4.1.
10.20.12 SpecialTrussMomentFrames(STMF)
10.20.12.1 Scope
Special truss moment frames (STMF) are expected to withstand significant inelastic deformation within a
specially designed segment of the truss when subjected to the forces from the motions of the design
earthquake.STMFshallbelimitedtospanlengthsbetweencolumnsnottoexceed20mandoveralldepthnot
toexceed1.8m.Thecolumnsandtrusssegmentsoutsideofthespecialsegmentsshallbedesignedtoremain
elasticundertheforcesthatcanbegeneratedbythefullyyieldedandstrainhardenedspecialsegment.STMF
shallmeettherequirementsinthisSection.
10.20.12.2 SpecialSegment
Eachhorizontaltrussthatispartoftheseismicloadresistingsystem(SLRS)shallhave a special segment thatis
located between the quarter points of the span of the truss. The length of the special segment shall be
between0.1and0.5timesthetrussspanlength.Thelengthtodepthratioofanypanelinthespecialsegment
shallneitherexceed1.5norbelessthan0.67.
Panels within a special segment shall either be all Vierendeel panels or all Xbraced panels; neither a
combinationthereofnortheuseofothertrussdiagonalconfigurations is permitted.Where diagonal members
are usedin the specialsegment,theyshallbearrangedinanXpatternseparatedbyverticalmembers.Such
diagonal members shall be interconnected at points where they cross. The interconnection shall have a
required strength equal to 0.25 times the nominal tensile strength of the diagonal member. Bolted
connections shall not be usedforwebmemberswithinthespecialsegment.Diagonalwebmemberswithinthe
specialsegmentshallbemadeofflatbarsofidenticalsections.
Splicingofchordmembersisnotpermittedwithinthespecialsegment,norwithinonehalfthepanellengthfrom
the ends of the special segment. The required axial strength of the diagonal web members in the special
segment due to dead and live loads within the special segment shall not exceed 0.03FyAg (LRFD) or
(0.03/1.5)FyAg(ASD),asappropriate.
The special segment shall be a protected zone meeting therequirementsofSection 10.20.7.4.
StrengthofSpecialSegmentMembers
The available shear strength of the special segment shall be calculated as the sum of the available shear
strengthofthechordmembersthroughflexure,andtheshearstrengthcorrespondingtotheavailabletensile
strengthand0.3timestheavailablecompressivestrengthofthediagonalmembers,whentheyareused.Thetop
andbottomchordmembersinthespecialsegmentshallbemadeofidenticalsectionsandshallprovideatleast
25 percent of the required vertical shear strength. The required axial strength in the chord members,
determined according to the limit state of tensile yielding, shall not exceed 0.45 times Pn (LRFD) or Pn /
(ASD),asappropriate,
=0.90(LRFD)
=1.67(ASD)
where,
6630
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Pn=FyAg
The endconnectionofdiagonal webmembers in the specialsegment shall havearequiredstrengththatisat
leastequaltotheexpectedyieldstrength,intension,ofthewebmember,Ry Fy Ag (LRFD)orRy Fy Ag/1.5(ASD),as
appropriate.
StrengthofNonSpecialSegmentMembers
MembersandconnectionsofSTMF,exceptthoseinthespecialsegmentspecified in Section 1 0 . 2 0 . 12.2, shall
have a required strength based on theappropriateloadcombinationsintheapplicablebuildingcode,replacing
theearthquakeloadterm Ewiththe lateral loads necessary to developthe expectedverticalshearstrengthof
thespecialsegmentVne (LRFD)orVne/1.5(ASD),asappropriate,atmidlength,givenas:
Vne =
3.75 R y M nc
Ls
+ 0.075 EI
L Ls
+ R y ( Pnt + 0.3Pnc ) sin
L3s
10.20.12.1
where
Mnc=nominalflexuralstrengthofachordmemberofthespecialsegment,Nmm
EI=flexuralelasticstiffnessofachordmemberofthespecialsegment,Nmm2
L=spanlengthofthetruss,mm
Ls=lengthofthespecialsegment,mm
Pnt =nominal tensile strength ofa diagonalmember of thespecialsegment,N
Pnc=nominalcompressivestrengthofadiagonalmemberofthespecialsegment,N
=angleofdiagonalmemberswiththehorizontal
Chord members and diagonal web members within the special segment shall meet the requirements of
Section10.20.8.2.2.
LateralBracing
The topandbottomchordsofthetrussesshallbelaterallybracedattheendsofthespecialsegment,andat
intervals not to exceed Lp according to Specification Section 10.6 along the entire length of the truss. The
required strength ofeachlateralbraceattheendsofandwithinthespecialsegmentshallbe
Pu =0.06Ry Pnc (LRFD)or
Pa =(0.06/1.5)Ry Pnc (ASD),asappropriate,
where Pnc is the nominal compressive strength of the special segment chord member. Lateral braces
outsideofthespecialsegmentshallhavearequiredstrengthof
Pu =0.02Ry Pnc (LRFD)or

Pa =(0.02/1.5)Ry Pnc (ASD),asappropriate.
The required brace stiffness shall meet the provisions of Equation 10.19.2.4ofSection 10.19, where
Pr=Pu =Ry Pnc (LRFD)or
Pr=Pa =Ry Pnc /1.5(ASD),asappropriate.
10.20.13 SpecialConcentricallyBracedFrames(SCBF)
10.20.13.1 Scope
Specialconcentricallybracedframes(SCBF)areexpectedtowithstandsignificant inelastic deformations when
subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. SCBF shall meet the
requirements in thisSection.
10.20.13.2 MembersSlenderness
BracingmembersshallhaveKl/r4(E/Fy).
Exception: Braces with 4(E/Fy) < Kl/r 200 are permitted in frames in which the available strength of the
column is at least equal to the maximum load transferred to the column considering Ry (LRFD) or (1/1.5)Ry
(ASD), as appropriate, times the nominal strengths of the connecting brace elements of the building. Column
6631
Part6
StructuralDesign
forces need not exceed those determined by inelastic analysis, nor the maximum load effects that can be
developedbythesystem.
RequiredStrength
Wheretheeffectivenetareaofbracingmembersislessthanthegrossarea,therequiredtensilestrengthofthe
bracebaseduponthelimitstateoffractureinthenetsectionshallbegreaterthanthelesserofthefollowing:
(a)Theexpectedyieldstrength,intension,ofthebracingmember,determinedasRy Fy Ag (LRFD)orRy Fy Ag /1.5
(ASD),asappropriate.
(b)Themaximumloadeffect,indicatedbyanalysisthatcanbetransferredtothebracebythesystem.
LateralForceDistribution
Alonganylineofbracing,bracesshallbedeployedinalternatedirectionssuchthat,foreitherdirectionofforce
paralleltothebracing,atleast30percentbutnomorethan70percentofthetotalhorizontalforcealongthat
lineisresistedbybraces in tension, unless the available strength of each brace in compression islarger than
the required strength resulting from the application of the appropriate load combinations stipulated by the
applicable building code including the amplified seismic load. For the purposes of this provision, a line of
bracing is defined as a single line or parallel lines with a plan offset of 10 percent or less of the building
dimensionperpendiculartothelineofbracing.
ColumnandbracemembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
BuiltupMembers
Thespacingofstitchesshallbesuchthattheslendernessratiol/rof individualelementsbetweenthestitches
doesnotexceed0.4timesthegoverningslendernessratioofthebuiltupmember.
Thesumoftheavailableshearstrengthsofthestitchesshallequalorexceedtheavailabletensilestrengthofeachelement.
The spacing of stitches shall be uniform.Notlessthantwostitchesshallbeusedinabuiltupmember.Boltedstitchesshall
notbelocatedwithinthemiddleonefourthoftheclearbracelength.
Exception:Wherethebucklingofbracesabouttheircriticalbuckingaxis doesnotcauseshearinthestitches,thespacing
of the stitches shall be such that the slenderness ratio l/r of the individual elements between the stitches does not
exceed0.75timesthegoverningslendernessratioofthebuiltupmember.
RequiredStrengthofBracingConnections
RequiredTensileStrength
The required tensile strength of bracing connections (including beamtocolumn connections if part of the
bracingsystem)shallbethelesserofthefollowing:
(a)Theexpectedyieldstrength,intension,ofthebracingmember,determinedasRy Fy Ag (LRFD)orRy Fy Ag /1.5
(ASD),asappropriate.
(b)Themaximumloadeffect,indicatedbyanalysisthatcanbetransferredtothebracebythesystem.
RequiredFlexuralStrength
Therequiredflexuralstrengthofbracingconnectionsshallbeequalto1.1RyMp (LRFD) or(1.1/1.5)Ry Mp (ASD),
asappropriate,ofthebraceaboutthecriticalbucklingaxis.
Exception:BraceconnectionsthatmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.13.3.1 andcan accommodate the
inelastic rotations associated with bracepostbucklingdeformationsneednotmeetthisrequirement.
RequiredCompressiveStrength
Bracingconnectionsshallbedesignedforarequiredcompressivestrengthbasedonbucklinglimitstatesthatisat
least equalto 1.1RyPn (LRFD) or(1.1/1.5)RyPn (ASD), as appropriate, where Pn is the nominalcompressive
strength of thebrace.
SpecialBracingConfigurationRequirements
VTypeandInvertedVTypeBracing
VtypeandinvertedVtypeSCBFshallmeetthefollowingrequirements:
(1)Therequiredstrengthofbeamsintersectedbybraces,theirconnections,andsupportingmembersshallbe
determinedbasedontheloadcombinationsofthe applicable building code assuming that the braces provide
no support for dead and live loads. For load combinations that include earthquake effects, the earthquake
effect,E,onthebeamshallbedeterminedasfollows:
6632
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
(a) The forces in all braces in tension shall be assumed to be equaltoRy Fy Ag.
(b) Theforcesinalladjoiningbracesincompressionshallbeassumedtobeequalto0.3Pn.
(2) Beams shall be continuous between columns. Both flanges of beams shall be laterally braced, with a
maximum spacing of Lb = Lpd, as specified byEquation10.15.7.2and10.15.7.3ofSection10.15.Lateralbraces
shallmeettheprovisionsofEquations10.19.3.3and10.19.3.4ofSection10.19,whereMr =Mu =Ry ZFy (LRFD)
orMr =Ma =Ry ZFy /1.5(ASD),asappropriate,ofthebeamandCd =1.0.
Asaminimum,onesetoflateralbracesisrequiredatthepointofintersectionoftheVtype(orinvertedVtype)
bracing,unlessthebeamhassufficientoutofplanestrengthandstiffnesstoensurestabilitybetweenadjacent
bracepoints.
KTypeBracing
KtypebracedframesarenotpermittedforSCBF.
ColumnSplices
In addition to meeting the requirements in Section 10.20.8.4, column splices in SCBF shall be designed to
develop 50 percent of the lesser available flexural strength of the connected members. The required shear
strength shall be Mpc /H (LRFD) or Mpc /1.5H (ASD), as appropriate, where Mpc is the sum of the nominal
plasticflexuralstrengthsofthecolumnsaboveandbelowthesplice.
ProtectedZone
TheprotectedzoneofbracingmembersinSCBFshallincludethecenteronequarterofthebracelength,anda
zoneadjacenttoeachconnectionequaltothebracedepthintheplaneofbuckling.TheprotectedzoneofSCBF
shallincludeelementsthatconnectbracestobeamsandcolumnsandshallsatisfytherequirementsofSection
10.20.7.4.
10.20.14 OrdinaryConcentricallyBracedFrames(OCBF)
10.20.14.1 Scope
Ordinaryconcentricallybracedframes(OCBF)areexpectedtowithstand limitedinelasticdeformationsintheir
members andconnections whensubjected totheforcesresultingfromthemotionsofthedesignearthquake.
OCBF shall meet the requirements in this Section. OCBF above the isolation system in seismically isolated
structures shall meet the requirements of Sections 10.20.14.4 and 10.20.14.5 and need not meet the
requirementsofSections10.20.14.2and10.20.14.3.
10.20.14.2 BracingMembers
BracingmembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
Exception:HSSbracesthatarefilledwithconcreteneednotcomplywiththisprovision.
BracingmembersinK,V,orinvertedVconfigurationsshallhaveKL/r4(E/Fy).
SpecialBracingConfigurationRequirements
Beams in Vtype and inverted Vtype OCBF and columns in Ktype OCBF shall be continuous at bracing
connectionsawayfromthebeamcolumnconnectionandshallmeetthefollowingrequirements:
(1) Therequiredstrengthshallbedeterminedbasedontheloadcombinationsoftheapplicablebuildingcode
assuming that the braces provide no support of dead and live loads. For load combinations that include
earthquakeeffects,theearthquakeeffect,E,onthemembershallbedeterminedasfollows:
(a) TheforcesinbracesintensionshallbeassumedtobeequaltoRy Fy Ag.ForVtypeandinvertedVtype
OCBF,theforcesinbracesintensionneed not exceed the maximum force that can be developed by the
system.
(b) Theforcesinbracesincompressionshallbeassumedtobeequalto0.3Pn.
(2)Bothflangesshallbe laterallybraced, witha maximum spacing ofLb =Lpd,asspecifiedbyEquations
10.15.7.2 and10.15.7.3 ofSection10.15.. Lateral braces shall meet the provisions of Equations10.19.3.3and
10.19.3.4 ofSection10.19,whereMr= Mu = Ry ZFy(LRFD)orMr=Ma=Ry ZFy /1.5(ASD),asappropriate,ofthe
beam and Cd = 1.0. As a minimum, one set of lateral braces is required at the point of intersection of the
bracing, unless the member has sufficient outofplane strength and stiffness to ensure stability between
adjacentbracepoints.
6633
Part6
StructuralDesign
BracingConnections
Therequiredstrengthofbracingconnectionsshallbedeterminedasfollows.
(1)For the limit state of bolt slip, the required strength of bracingconnectionsshallbethatdetermined
usingtheloadcombinationsstipulatedbytheapplicablebuildingcode,notincludingtheamplifiedseismicload.
(2) For other limit states, the required strength of bracing connections is the expected yield strength, in
tension, of the brace, determined asRyFyAg(LRFD)orRyFyAg/1.5(ASD),asappropriate.
Exception:Therequiredstrengthofthebraceconnectionneednotexceedeitherofthefollowing:
(a)Themaximumforcethatcanbedevelopedbythesystem
(b)Aloadeffectbaseduponusingtheamplifiedseismicload
OCBFaboveSeismicIsolationSystems
BracingMembers
BracingmembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2andshallhave
KL/r4(E/Fy).
KTypeBracing
Ktypebracedframesarenotpermitted.
VTypeandInvertedVTypeBracing
Beamsin Vtype and inverted Vtype bracing shall be continuousbetweencolumns.
10.20.15 EccentricallyBracedFrames(EBF)
10.20.15.1 Scope
Eccentrically braced frames (EBFs) are expected to withstand significantinelastic deformations in the links
when subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. The diagonal braces,
columns,andbeamsegments outside of the links shall be designed toremain essentially elasticunderthe
maximumforcesthatcanbegeneratedbythefullyyieldedandstrainhardened links, except where permitted
in this Section. In buildings exceedingfive stories in height, the upper story of an EBF system is permitted to
be designed as an OCBF or a SCBFand still be considered to be part of an EBFsystemforthepurposesof
determiningsystemfactorsintheapplicablebuildingcode.EBFshallmeettherequirementsinthisSection.
10.20.15.2 Links
Limitations
LinksshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
The web of a link shall be single thickness. Doublerplate reinforcement and web penetrations are not
permitted.
ShearStrength
Exceptaslimitedbelow,thelinkdesignshearstrength, vVn,andtheallowableshearstrength,Vn/v,according
tothelimitstateofshearyieldingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
Vn =nominalshearstrengthofthelink,equaltothelesserofVp or2Mp/e,N
v=0.90(LRFD)
v=1.67(ASD)
where
Mp=FyZ,Nmm
Vp=0.6FyAw,N
e=linklength,mm
Aw=(d2tf)tw
Theeffectofaxialforceonthelinkavailableshearstrengthneednotbeconsideredif
Pu0.15Py(LRFD)orPa(0.15/1.5)Py(ASD),asappropriate.
Where,
Pu=requiredaxialstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
Pa=requiredaxialstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
6634
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
Py=nominalaxialyieldstrength=FyAg,N
IfPu >0.15Py (LRFD)orPa > (0.15/1.5)Py (ASD), as appropriate, the following additional requirements
shallbemet:
(1)Theavailableshearstrengthofthelinkshallbethelesserof
vVpaand2 vMpa/e(LRFD)
or
Vpa/vand2(Mpa/e)/v(ASD),asappropriate,where
v=0.90(LRFD),v=1.67(ASD)
Vpa = VP (1 ( Pr / Pc ) 2
(10.20.15.1)
M pa = 1 .18 M p [1 ( Pr / Pc )]
(10.20.15.2)
(a)[1.150.5(Aw/Ag)]1.6Mp/Vpwhen(Aw/Ag)0.3
(10.20.15.3)
(10.20.15.4)
Pr=Pu(LRFD)orPa(ASD),asappropriate
Pc=Py(LRFD)orPy/1.5(ASD),asappropriate
(2)Thelengthofthelinkshallnotexceed:
Nor,
(b)1.6Mp/Vpwhen(Aw/Ag)<0.3
Where,
Aw=(d2tf)tw
=Pr/Vr
andwhere,
Vr=Vu(LRFD)orVa(ASD),asappropriate
Vu=requiredshearstrengthbasedonLRFDloadcombinations.
Va=requiredshearstrengthbasedonASDloadcombinations.
LinkRotationAngle
Thelinkrotationangleistheinelasticanglebetweenthelinkandthebeamoutsideofthelinkwhenthetotal
storydriftisequaltothedesignstorydrift,.Thelinkrotationangleshallnotexceedthefollowingvalues:
(a)0.08radiansforlinksoflength1.6Mp /Vp orless.
(b)0.02radiansforlinksoflength2.6Mp /Vp orgreater.
(c) The value determined by linear interpolation between the above values for links of length between
1.6Mp /Vp and2.6Mp /Vp .
LinkStiffeners
Fulldepthwebstiffenersshallbeprovidedonbothsidesofthelinkwebatthediagonalbraceendsofthelink.
Thesestiffenersshallhaveacombinedwidthnotlessthan(bf2tw)andathicknessnotlessthan0.75twor10
mm,whichever is larger, where bf and tw are the link flangewidth and linkwebthickness,respectively.
Linksshallbeprovidedwithintermediatewebstiffenersasfollows:
(a)Linksoflengths1.6Mp /Vp orlessshallbeprovidedwithintermediatewebstiffeners spaced atintervals not
exceeding (30twd/5) for a link rotation angle of 0.08 radian or (52twd/5) for link rotation angles of 0.02
radianorless. Linearinterpolation shall beusedforvaluesbetween 0.08 and 0.02radian.
(b)Linksoflengthgreaterthan2.6Mp /Vp andlessthan5Mp /Vpshallbeprovidedwithintermediateweb
stiffenersplacedatadistanceof1.5timesbffromeachendofthelink.
(c) Links of length between 1.6Mp /Vp and 2.6Mp /Vp shall be providedwithintermediatewebstiffeners
meetingtherequirementsof(a)and(b)above.
6635
Part6
StructuralDesign
(d)Intermediatewebstiffenersarenotrequiredinlinksoflengthsgreaterthan5Mp/Vp.
(e)Intermediatewebstiffenersshallbefulldepth.Forlinksthatareless than635mmindepth,stiffenersare
requiredononlyonesideofthelinkweb.The thickness of onesided stiffenersshallnot be less than tw or10
mm,whicheverislarger,andthewidthshallbenotlessthan(bf /2)tw .For links that are 635 mm in depth or
greater,similarintermediatestiffenersarerequiredonbothsidesoftheweb.
TherequiredstrengthoffilletweldsconnectingalinkstiffenertothelinkwebisAstFy (LRFD)orAstFy/1.5(ASD),
as appropriate, where Ast is the area of the stiffener. The required strength of fillet welds connecting the
stiffenertothelinkflangesisAstFy/4(LRFD)orAstFy/4(1.5)(ASD).
LinktoColumnConnections
Linktocolumn connections must be capable of sustaining the maximum link rotation angle based on the
lengthofthelink,asspecifiedinSection10.20.15.2.3.Thestrengthoftheconnectionmeasuredatthecolumn
face shall equal at least thenominalshearstrengthofthelink,Vn ,asspecifiedinSection10.20.15.2.2atthe
maximumlinkrotationangle.
Linktocolumnconnectionsshallsatisfytheaboverequirementsbyoneofthefollowing:
(a)UseaconnectionprequalifiedforEBFinaccordancewithAppendix10.A.
(b) Provide qualifying cyclic test results in accordance with Appendix 10.D. Results of at least two cyclic
connectiontestsshallbeprovidedandarepermittedtobebasedononeofthefollowing:
(i) Testsreportedinresearchliteratureordocumentedtestsperformed forother projects
thatarerepresentativeofprojectconditions,withinthelimitsspecifiedinAppendix10.D.
(ii) Tests that are conducted specifically for the project and are representative of project
member sizes, material strengths, connection configurations, and matching connection
processes,withinthelimitsspecifiedinAppendix10.D.
Exception:Wherereinforcementatthe beamtocolumnconnection at the linkend precludes yielding of the
beam over the reinforced length, the link is permitted to be the beam segment from the end of the
reinforcement to the brace connection. Where such links are used and the link length does not exceed
1.6Mp /Vp,cyclictestingofthereinforcedconnectionisnotrequirediftheavailablestrengthofthereinforced
sectionandtheconnectionequalsorexceedstherequiredstrengthcalculatedbaseduponthestrainhardened
linkasdescribedinSection10.20.15.6.FulldepthstiffenersasrequiredinSection10.20.15.3shallbeplacedat
thelinktoreinforcementinterface.
LateralBracingofLink
Lateralbracingshallbeprovidedatboththetopandbottomlinkflangesat theends of the link. The required
strength of each lateral brace at the ends of the link shall be Pb = 0.06 Mr /ho, where ho is the distance
betweenflangecentroidsinmm.
FordesignaccordingtoSpecificationSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
Mr =Mu,exp =RyZFy
FordesignaccordingtoSpecificationSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
Mr =Mu,exp/1.5
The required brace stiffness shall meet the provisions of Equation 10.19.3.4 of Section 10.19, where Mr is
definedabove,Cd =1,andLb isthelinklength.
10.20.15.3 DiagonalBraceandBeamOutsideofLink
DiagonalBrace
The required combined axial and flexural strength of the diagonal brace shall be determined based on load
combinationsstipulatedbytheapplicablebuildingcode.Forloadcombinationsincludingseismiceffects,aload
Q1shallbesubstitutedforthetermE,whereQ1 isdefinedastheaxialforcesandmomentsgeneratedbyat
least 1.25 times the expected nominal shear strength of the link RyVn, where Vn is as defined in Section
10.20.15.2.2.TheavailablestrengthofthediagonalbraceshallcomplywithSpecificationSection10.10.Brace
membersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.1.
BeamOutsideLink
6636
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
The required combined axial and flexural strength of the beam outside of thelinkshallbedeterminedbased
on load combinations stipulated by the applicable building code. For load combinations including seismic
effects,aloadQ1 shallbesubstitutedforthetermEwhereQ1 isdefinedastheforcesgeneratedbyatleast
1.1 times the expected nominal shear strength of the link, RyVn, where Vn is as defined in Section
10.20.15.2.2.The available strength of the beam outside of the link shall be determined by the Specification,
multipliedbyRy .
At the connection between the diagonal brace and the beam at the link end ofthebrace,theintersectionof
thebraceandbeamcenterlinesshallbeattheendofthelinkorinthelink.
BracingConnections
The required strength of the diagonal brace connections, at both ends ofthebrace, shall be at least equal
to the required strength of the diagonal brace, as defined in Section 10.20.15.6.1. The diagonal brace
connectionsshallalsosatisfytherequirementsofSection10.20.13.3.3.
Nopartofthediagonalbraceconnectionatthelinkendofthebraceshallextendover the link length. If the
brace is designed to resist a portion of the link endmoment,thenthediagonalbraceconnectionatthelink
endofthebraceshallbedesignedasafullyrestrainedmomentconnection.
BeamtoColumnConnections
IftheEBFsystemfactorsintheapplicablebuildingcoderequiremomentresisting connections awayfrom the
link, then the beamtocolumn connections away from the link shall meet the requirements for beamto
columnconnectionsforOMFspecifiedinSections10.20.11.2and10.20.11.5.
If the EBF system factors in the applicable building code do not require moment resisting connections away
fromthelink,thenthebeamtocolumnconnectionsawayfromthelinkarepermittedtobedesignedaspinned
intheplaneoftheweb.
RequiredStrengthofColumns
In addition to the requirements in Section 10.20.8.3, the required strength of columns shall be determined
from load combinations as stipulated bythe applicablebuildingcode,exceptthattheseismicloadEshallbe
the forces generated by 1.1 times the expected nominal shear strength of all links above the level under
consideration. The expected nominal shear strength of a link is RyVn, where Vn is as defined in Section
10.20.15.2.2.ColumnmembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
ProtectedZone
LinksinEBFsareaprotectedzone,andshallsatisfytherequirementsofSection 10.20.7.4. Welding on links is
permittedforattachmentoflinkstiffeners,asrequiredinSection10.20.15.3.
DemandCriticalWelds
Completejointpenetrationgrooveweldsattachingthelinkflangesandthelinkwebtothecolumnaredemand
criticalwelds,andshallsatisfytherequirementsofSection10.20.7.3.2.
10.20.16 BucklingRestrainedBracedFrames(BRBF)
10.20.16.1 Scope
Bucklingrestrained braced frames (BRBF) are expected to withstand significant inelastic deformations when
subjectedtotheforcesresultingfromthemotionsofthedesignearthquake.BRBFshallmeettherequirementsin
thisSection.WheretheapplicablebuildingcodedoesnotcontaindesigncoefficientsforBRBF,theprovisionsof
Appendix10.Cshallapply.
10.20.16.2 BracingMembers
Bracingmembersshallbecomposedofastructuralsteelcoreandasystemthatrestrainsthesteelcorefrom
buckling.
SteelCore
Thesteelcoreshallbedesignedtoresisttheentireaxialforceinthebrace.
6637
Part6
StructuralDesign
The brace design axial strength, Pysc (LRFD), and the brace allowable axialstrength,Pysc/ (ASD),intension
andcompression,accordingtothelimitstateofyielding,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
Pysc=Fysc Asc (10.20.16.1)
=0.90(LRFD)
=1.67(ASD)
where
Fysc=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthesteelcore,oractualyieldstressofthesteelcoreasdetermined
fromacoupontest,MPa
A=netareaofsteelcore,mm2
Plates used in the steel core that are 50 mm thick or greater shall satisfy the minimum notch toughness
requirementsofSection10.20.6.3.
Splicesinthesteelcorearenotpermitted.
BucklingRestrainingSystem
The bucklingrestraining system shall consist of the casing for the steel core. In stability calculations, beams,
columns,andgussetsconnectingthecoreshallbeconsideredpartsofthissystem.
The bucklingrestraining system shall limit local and overall buckling of the steel core for deformations
correspondingto2.0timesthedesignstorydrift.Thebucklingrestrainingsystemshallnotbepermittedtobuckle
withindeformationscorrespondingto2.0timesthedesignstorydrift.
Testing
Thedesignofbracesshallbebaseduponresultsfromqualifyingcyclictestsinaccordancewiththeprocedures
andacceptancecriteriaofAppendix10.E.Qualifyingtestresultsshallconsistofatleasttwosuccessfulcyclictests:
one is required to be a test of a brace subassemblage that includes brace connection rotational demands
complyingwithAppendix10.E,Section10.E.4andtheothershallbeeitherauniaxial orasubassemblagetest
complying with Appendix 10.E, Section 10.E.5. Both test types are permitted to be based upon one of the
following:
(a)Tests reported in research or documented tests performed forotherprojects.
(b)Teststhatareconductedspecificallyfortheproject.
Interpolation or extrapolation of test results for different member sizes shall be justified by rational analysis
that demonstrates stress distributions and magnitudes of internal strains consistent with or less severe than
thetested assembliesandthatconsiderstheadverseeffectsofvariationsinmaterialproperties.Extrapolation
of test results shall be based upon similar combinations of steel core and bucklingrestraining system sizes.
TestsshallbepermittedtoqualifyadesignwhentheprovisionsofAppendix10.Earemet.
AdjustedBraceStrength
Where required by these Provisions, bracing connections and adjoining members shall be designed to resist
forcescalculated based onthe adjusted bracestrength.
The adjusted brace strengthincompressionshallbeRyPysc.Theadjustedbracestrengthintensionshallbe
RyPysc.
Exception:ThefactorRyneednotbeappliedifPyscisestablishedusingyieldstressdeterminedfromacoupon
test.
Thecompressionstrengthadjustment factor, ,shall be calculated asthe ratio of themaximum compression
force to the maximum tension force of the test specimen measured from the qualification tests specified in
Appendix10.E,Section10.E.6.3fortherangeofdeformationscorrespondingto2.0timesthedesignstorydrift.
Thelargervalueoffromthetworequiredbracequalificationtestsshallbeused.Innocaseshallbetakenas
lessthan1.0.Thestrainhardeningadjustmentfactor,,shallbecalculatedastheratioofthemaximumtension
force measured from the qualification tests specified in Appendix 10.E, Section 10.E.6.3 (for the range of
deformationscorrespondingto2.0timesthedesignstorydrift)toFyscofthetestspecimen.Thelargervalueof
fromthetworequiredqualificationtestsshallbeused.Wherethetestedsteelcorematerialdoesnotmatch
thatoftheprototype,shallbebasedoncoupontestingoftheprototypematerial.
10.20.16.3 BracingConnections
RequiredStrength
6638
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
The required strength of bracing connections in tension and compression (including beamtocolumn
connectionsifpartofthebracingsystem)shallbe1.1timestheadjustedbracestrengthincompression(LRFD)
or1.1/1.5timestheadjustedbracestrengthincompression(ASD).
GussetPlates
Thedesignofconnectionsshallincludeconsiderationsoflocalandoverallbuckling.Bracingconsistentwiththat
usedinthetestsuponwhichthedesignisbasedisrequired.
SpecialRequirementsRelatedtoBracingConfiguration
VtypeandinvertedVtype braced frames shall meet thefollowingrequirements:
(1)Therequiredstrengthofbeamsintersectedbybraces,theirconnections,andsupportingmembersshallbe
determinedbasedontheloadcombinationsofthe applicable building code assuming that the braces provide
no support for dead and live loads. For load combinations that include earthquake effects, the vertical and
horizontalearthquakeeffect,E,onthebeamshallbedeterminedfromtheadjustedbracestrengthsintension
andcompression.
(2) Beams shall be continuous between columns. Both flanges of beams shall be laterally braced. Lateral
bracesshallmeetthe provisions of Equations10.19.3.3 and 10.19.3.4 of Section10.19,where Mr= Mu=RyZFy
(LRFD)orMr =Ma =RyZFy/1.5(ASD),asappropriate,ofthebeamandCd =1.0.Asaminimum,onesetoflateral
bracesisrequiredatthepointof intersection of theVtype (or invertedVtype) bracing, unless the beamhas
sufficientoutofplanestrengthandstiffnesstoensurestabilitybetweenadjacentbracepoints.
Forpurposesofbracedesignandtesting,thecalculatedmaximumdeformationofbracesshallbeincreasedby
includingtheeffectoftheverticaldeflectionofthebeamundertheloadingdefinedinSection10.20.16.4(1).
KtypebracedframesarenotpermittedforBRBF.
BeamsandColumns
BeamsandcolumnsinBRBFshallmeetthefollowingrequirements.
BeamandcolumnmembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
RequiredStrength
TherequiredstrengthofbeamsandcolumnsinBRBFshallbedeterminedfromloadcombinationsasstipulated
intheapplicablebuildingcode.Forloadcombinationsthatincludeearthquakeeffects,theearthquakeeffect,E,
shallbedeterminedfromtheadjustedbracestrengthsintensionandcompression.
The required strength of beams and columns need not exceed themaximumforcethatcanbedevelopedby
thesystem.
Splices
In addition to meeting the requirements in Section 10.20.8.4, column splices in BRBF shall be designed to
develop 50 percent of the lesser available flexural strengthof the connected members, determined basedon
the limit state of yielding. The required shear strength shall be Mpc /H (LRFD) or Mpc /1.5H (ASD), as
appropriate,whereMpc isthesumofthenominalplasticflexuralstrengthsofthe columnsaboveandbelowthe
splice.
ProtectedZone
Theprotectedzoneshallincludethesteelcoreofbracingmembersandelementsthatconnectthesteelcoreto
beamsandcolumns,andshallsatisfytherequirementsofSection10.20.7.4.
10.20.17 SpecialPlateShearWalls(SPSW)
10.20.17.1 Scope
Specialplateshearwalls(SPSW)areexpectedtowithstandsignificantinelasticdeformationsinthewebswhen
subjectedtotheforcesresultingfromthemotionsofthedesignearthquake.Thehorizontalboundaryelements
(HBEs) and vertical boundary elements (VBEs) adjacent to the webs shall be designed to remain essentially
elasticunderthemaximumforcesthatcanbegeneratedbythefullyyieldedwebs,exceptthatplastichingingat
theendsofHBEsispermitted.SPSWshallmeettherequirementsofthisSection.Wheretheapplicablebuilding
codedoesnotcontaindesigncoefficientsforSPSW,theprovisionsofAppendix10.Cshallapply.
6639
Part6
StructuralDesign
10.20.17.2 Webs
ShearStrength
The panel design shear strength, Vn (LRFD), and the allowable shear strength, Vn/ (ASD), according to the
limitstateofshearyielding,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
V n = 0 .42 F y t w L cf sin 2
10.20.17.1
=0.90(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
where
tw=thicknessoftheweb,mm.
Lcf=cleardistancebetweenVBEflanges,mm
istheangleofwebyieldinginradians,asmeasuredrelativetothevertical,anditisgivenby:
1+
tan 4 =
twL
2 Ac
1
h3
+
1 + t w h
A
b 360I c L
10.20.17.2
h =distancebetweenHBEcenterlines,mm
Ab =crosssectionalareaofaHBE,mm2
Ac =crosssectionalareaofaVBE,mm2
Ic =momentofinertiaofaVBEtakenperpendiculartothedirectionofthewebplateline,mm4
L =distancebetweenVBEcenterlines,mm
PanelAspectRatio
Theratioofpanellengthtoheight,L/h,shallbelimitedto0.8<L/h2.5.
OpeningsinWebs
Openings in webs shall be bounded on all sides by HBE and VBE extendingthefullwidthandheightofthe
panel,respectively,unlessotherwisejustifiedbytestingandanalysis.
ConnectionsofWebstoBoundaryElements
The required strength of web connections to the surrounding HBE and VBE shall equal the expected yield
strength,intension,ofthewebcalculatedatanangle,definedbyEquation10.20.17.2.
10.20.17.3 HorizontalandVerticalBoundaryElements
RequiredStrength
In additiontotherequirementsofSection10.20.8.3,therequiredstrengthofVBEshallbebasedupontheforces
correspondingtotheexpectedyieldstrength,intension,ofthewebcalculatedatanangle.
TherequiredstrengthofHBEshallbethegreateroftheforcescorrespondingtotheexpectedyieldstrength,in
tension,ofthewebcalculatedatanangleorthatdeterminedfromtheloadcombinationsintheapplicable
buildingcodeassumingthewebprovidesnosupportforgravityloads.
The beamcolumn moment ratio provisions in Section 10.20.9.6 shall be met for all HBE/VBE intersections
withoutconsiderationoftheeffectsofthewebs.
HBEtoVBEConnections
HBEtoVBE connections shall satisfy the requirements of Section 1 0 . 2 0 . 11.2. Therequiredshearstrength,
Vu,ofaHBEtoVBEconnectionshallbedeterminedinaccordance with the provisions of Section 10.20.11.2,
except that the required shearstrength shall not be less than the shear corresponding to moments at each
endequalto1.1Ry Mp (LRFD)or(1.1/1.5)Ry Mp (ASD),asappropriate,togetherwiththeshearresultingfromthe
expectedyieldstrengthintensionofthewebsyieldingatanangle.
HBEandVBEmembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
LateralBracing
6640
Vol.2
SteelStructures
Chapter10
HBE shall be laterally braced at all intersections with VBE and at aspacingnottoexceed0.086ry E/Fy .Both
flanges of HBEshall be bracedeither directlyor indirectly.Therequiredstrengthoflateral bracingshall beat
least2percentoftheHBEflangenominalstrength,Fy bf tf .Therequiredstiffnessofalllateralbracingshallbe
determinedinaccordancewithEquation10.19.3.4ofSection10.19.Intheseequations,Mr shallbecomputedas
Ry ZFy (LRFD)orMr shallbecomputedasRy ZFy/1.5(ASD),asappropriate,andCd =1.0.
VBESplices
VBEsplicesshallcomplywiththerequirementsofSection10.20.8.4.
PanelZones
TheVBEpanelzonenext tothetopandbaseHBEoftheSPSWshall complywiththerequirementsinSection
10.20.9.3.
StiffnessofVerticalBoundaryElements
TheVBEshallhavemomentsofinertiaaboutanaxistakenperpendiculartotheplaneoftheweb,Ic,notless
than0.00307twh4/L.
10.20.18 QualityAssurancePlan
Scope
When required by the applicable building code or the engineer of record, a quality assurance plan shall be
provided.ThequalityassuranceplanshallincludetherequirementsofAppendix10.B.
6641
Chapter 11
TIMBER
11.1
SCOPE
11.1.1 This Section relates to the use of structural timber instructures or elements of structures connected
togetherbyfasteners/fasteningtechniques.
11.1.2 Thisshallnotbeinterpretedtopreventtheuseofmaterialormethodsofdesignorconstructionnot
specificallymentionedherein;andthemethodsofdesignmaybebasedonanalyticalandengineering
principles,orreliabletestdata,orboth,thatdemonstratethesafetyandserviceabilityoftheresulting
structure.Noristheclassificationoftimberintostrengthgroupstobeinterpretedaspreventingtheuse
ofdesigndatadesiredforaparticulartimberorgradeoftimberonthebasisofreliabletests.
11.2
TERMINOLOGY
11.2.1 ThissectionprovidesanalphabeticallistofthetermsusedinthischapteroftheCode.Incaseofany
conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in Part 1, the meaning
providedinthissectionshallgovernforinterpretationoftheprovisionsofthischapter.
11.2.2 StructuralPurposeDefinitions
11.2.2.1
Beam,BuiltUpLaminated
Abeammadebyjoininglayersoftimbertogetherwithmechanicalfastenings,sothatthegrainofalllayersis
essentiallyparallel.
11.2.2.2
Beam,GluedLaminated
A beam made by bonding layers of veneers or timber with an adhesive, so that grain of all laminations is
essentiallyparallel.
11.2.2.3
Diaphragm,Structural
Astructuralelementoflargeextentplacedinabuildingasawall,orroof,andmadeuseoftoresisthorizontal
forcessuchaswindorearthquakesactingparalleltoitsownplane.
11.2.2.4
DurationofLoad
Periodduringwhichamemberoracompletestructureisstressedasaconsequenceoftheloadsapplied.
11.2.2.5
EdgeDistance
Thedistancemeasuredperpendiculartograinfromthecentreoftheconnectortotheedgeofthemember.
11.2.2.6
EndDistance
Thedistancemeasuredparalleltograinofthememberfromthecentreoftheconnectortotheclosestendof
timber.
11.2.2.7
FingerJoint
Jointproducedbyconnectingtimbermembersendtoendbycuttingprofiles(taperedprojections)intheform
of Vshaped grooves to the ends of timber planks or scantlings to be joined, gluing the interfaces and then
matingthetwoendstogetherunderpressure.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6643
Part6
StructuralDesign
11.2.2.8
FundamentalorUltimateStress
Thestresswhichisdeterminedonsmallclearspecimenoftimber,inaccordancewithgoodpractice;anddoes
nottakeintoaccounttheeffectofnaturallyoccurringcharacteristicsandotherfactors.
11.2.2.9
InsideLocation
Positioninbuildingsinwhichtimberremainscontinuouslydryorprotectedfromweather.
11.2.2.10
LaminatedVeneerLumber
Astructuralcompositemadebylaminatingveneers,1.5mmto4.2mmthick,withsuitableadhesiveandwith
thegrainofveneersinsuccessivelayersalignedalongthelongitudinal(length)dimensionofthecomposite.
11.2.2.11
LoadedEdgeDistance
Thedistancemeasuredfromthecentretotheedgetowardswhichtheloadinducedbytheconnectoracts,and
theunloadededgedistanceistheoneoppositetotheloadededge.
11.2.2.12
Location
Atermgenerallyreferredtoasexactplacewhereatimberisusedinbuilding.
11.2.2.13
OutsideLocation
Positioninbuildingsinwhichtimbersareoccasionallysubjectedto wettinganddryingasinthecaseofopen
shedsandoutdoorexposedstructures.
11.2.2.14
PermissibleStress
Stressobtainedbyapplyingfactorofsafetytotheultimatestress.
11.2.2.15
Sandwich,Structural
Alayeredconstructioncomprisingacombinationorrelativelyhighstrengthfacingmaterialintimatelybonded
toandactingintegrallywithalowdensitycorematerial.
11.2.2.16
SpacedColumn
Twocolumnsectionsadequatelyconnectedtogetherbyglue,bolts,screwsorotherwise.
11.2.2.17
Structure,Permanent
Structural units in timber which are constructed for a long duration and wherein adequate protection and
designmeasureshaveinitiallybeenincorporatedtorenderthestructureserviceablefortherequiredlife.
11.2.2.18
Structure,Temporary
Structureswhichareerectedforashortperiod,suchashutmentsatprojectsites,forrehabilitation,temporary
defenceconstructions,exhibitionstructures,etc.
11.2.2.19
StructuralElement
Thecomponenttimbermembersandjointswhichmakeuparesultingstructuralassembly.
11.2.2.20
StructuralGrades
Grades defining the maximum size of strength reducing natural characteristics (knots, sloping grain, etc)
deemedpermissibleinanypieceofstructuraltimberwithindesignatedstructuralgradeclassification.
11.2.2.21
StructuralTimber
Timber in which strength is related to the anticipated inservice use as a controlling factor in grading and
selectionand/orstiffness.
11.2.2.22
Termite
An insect of the order Isopteran which may burrow in the wood or wood products of a building for food or
shelter.
6644
Vol.2
Timber
11.2.2.23
Chapter11
WetLocation
Positioninbuildingsinwhichtimbersarealmostcontinuouslydamporwetincontactwiththeearthorwater,
suchaspilesandtimberfoundations.
11.2.3 DefinitionsofDefectsinTimber
11.2.3.1
Check
Aseparationoffibresextendingalongthegrainwhichisconfinedtoonefaceofapieceofwood.
11.2.3.2
CompressionWood
Abnormal wood which is formed on the lower sides of branches and inclined stems of coniferous trees. It is
darkerandharderthannormalwoodbutrelativelylowinstrengthforitsweight.Itcanbeusuallyidentifiedby
wideeccentricgrowthringswithabnormallyhighproportionofgrowthlatewood.
11.2.3.3
DeadKnot
Aknotinwhichthelayersofannualgrowtharenotcompletelyintergrownwiththoseoftheadjacentwood.Itis
surroundedbypitchorbark.Theencasementmaybepartialorcomplete.
11.2.3.4
DecayorRot
Disintegrationofwoodtissuecausedbyfungi(wooddestroying)orothermicroorganisms.
11.2.3.5
DecayedKnot
Aknotsofterthanthesurroundingwoodandcontainingdecay.
11.2.3.6
DiameterofKnot
Themaximumdistancebetweenthetwopointsfarthestapartontheperipheryofaroundknot,onthefaceon
whichitbecomesvisible.Inthecaseofaspikeorasplayknot,themaximumwidthoftheknotvisibleonthe
faceonwhichitappearsshallbetakenasitsdiameter.
11.2.3.7
Discoloration
Achangefromthenormalcolourofthewoodwhichdoesnotimpairthestrengthofthewood.
11.2.3.8
Knot
Abranchbaseorlimbembeddedinthetreeortimberbynaturalgrowth.
11.2.3.9
KnotHole
Aholeleftasaresultoftheremovalofaknot.
11.2.3.10
LiveKnot
A knot free from decay and other defects, in which the fibres are firmly intergrown with those of the
surroundingwood.Syn.Integrownknot;cf.DeadKnot.
11.2.3.11
LooseGrain(LoosenedGrain)
Adefectona6flatsawnsurfacecausedbytheseparationorraisingofwoodfibresalongthegrowthrings;C$
RaisedGrain.
11.2.3.12
LooseKnot
Aknotthatisnotheldfirmlyinplacebygrowthorposition,andthatcannotbereliedupontoremaininplace;
cfTightKnot.
11.2.3.13
Mould
A soft vegetative growth that forms on wood in damp, stagnant atmosphere. It is the least harmful type of
fungus,usuallyconfinedtothesurfaceofthewood.
6645
Part6
StructuralDesign
11.2.3.14
PitchPocket
Accumulationofresinbetweengrowthringsofconiferouswoodasseenonthecrosssection.
11.2.3.15
SapStain
Discolorationofthesapwoodmainlyduetofungi.
11.2.3.16
Sapwood
Theouterlayeroflog,whichinthegrowingtreecontainlivingcellsandfoodmaterial.Thesapwoodisusually
lighterincolourandisreadilyattackedbyinsectsandfungi.
11.2.3.17
Shake
Apartialorcompleteseparationbetweenadjoininglayersoftissuesasseeninendsurfaces.
11.2.3.18
SlopeofGrain
Theinclinationofthefibrestothelongitudinalaxisofthemember.
11.2.3.19
SoundKnot
Atightknotfreefromdecay,whichissolidacrossitsface,andatleastashardasthesurroundingwood.
11.2.3.20
Split
Acrackextendingfromonefaceofapieceofwoodtoanotherandmnsalongthegrainofthepiece.
11.2.3.21
TightKnot
Aknotsoheldbygrowthorpositionastoremainfirminpositioninthepieceofwood;C$LooseKnot.
11.2.3.22
Wane
Theoriginalroundedsurfaceofatreeremainingonapieceofconvertedtimber.
11.2.3.23
Warp
Adeviationinsawntimberfromatrueplanesurfaceordistortionduetostressescausingdeparturefromatrue
plane.
11.2.3.24
WarmHoles
Cavitiescausedbyworms.
11.3
SYMBOLS
11.3.1 ForthepurposeofthisSection,thefollowinglettersymbolsshallhavethemeaningindicatedagainst
each:
a=Projectedareaofboltinmainmember(tXd3),mm2
B=Widthofthebeam,mm
C=Concentratedload,N
D=Depthofbeam,mm
D1=Depthofbeamatthenotch,mm
D2=Depthofnotch,mm
d=Dimensionofleastsideofcolumn,mm
d1=Leastoverallwidthofboxcolumn,mm
d2=Leastoveralldimensionofcoreinboxcolumn,mm
d3=Diameterofbolt,mm
df=Boltdiameterfactor
6646
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
e=Lengthofthenotchmeasuredalongthebeamspanfromtheinneredgeofthesupporttothefarthestedge
ofthenotch,mm
E=Modulusofelasticityinbending,N/mm2
F=Loadactingonaboltatanangletograin,N
fab=Calculatedbendingstressinextremefibre,N/mm2
fac=Calculatedaverageaxialcompressivestress,N/mm2
fat=Calculatedaxialtensilestress,N/mm2
fb=Permissiblebendingstressontheextremefibre,N/mm2
fc=Permissiblestressinaxialcompression,N/mm2
fcn=Permissiblestressincompressionnormal(perpendicular)tograin,N/mm2
fcp=Permissiblestressincompressionparalleltograin,N/mm2
fc=Permissiblecompre~sivestressinthedirectionofthelineofactionoftheload,N/mm2
ft=Permissiblestressintensionparalleltograin,N/mm2
H=Horizontalshearstress,N/mm2
I=Momentofinertiaofasection,mm4
K=Coefficientindeflectiondependingupontypeandcriticalityofloadingonbeam
K1=Modificationfactorforchangeinslopeofgrain
K2=Modificationfactorforchangeindurationofloadings
K 3,
K 4,
K 5, = Formfactors
and
K 6
K7=Modificationfactorforbearingstress
K8=Constantequalto 0.584
K9=Constantequalto
f cp
UE
5qf cp
K10=Constantequalto 0.584
2.5 E
f cp
L=Spanofabeamortruss,mm
M=MaximumbendingmomentinbeamN/mm2
N=Totalnumberofboltsinthejoint
n=Shankdiameterofthenail,mm
P=Loadonboltparalleltograin,N
P1=Ratioofthethicknessofthecompressionflangetothedepthofthebeam
Q=Staticalmomentofareaaboveorbelowtheneutralaxisaboutneutralaxis,mm3
q=Constantforparticularthicknessofplank
q1=Ratioofthetotalthicknessofweborwebstotheoverallwidthofthebeam
R=Loadonboltperpendicular(normal)tograin,N
S=Unsupportedoveralllengthofcolumn,mm
t=Nominalthicknessofplanksusedinformingboxtypecolumn,mm
6647
Part6
StructuralDesign
t=Thicknessofmainmember,mm
U=Constantforaparticularthicknessoftheplank
V=Verticalendreactionorshearatasection,N
W=Totaluniformload,N
x=Distancefromreactiontoload,mm
=AfactordeterminingthevalueofformfactorK4
=Deflectionatmiddleofbeam,mm
=Angleofloadtograindirection
Z=Sectionmodulusofbeam,mm3
1=Percentagefactorfort/d3ratio,paralleltograin
2=Percentagefactorfort/d3ratio,perpendiculartograin
11.4
MATERIALS
11.4.1 SpeciesofTimber
ThespeciesoftimberrecommendedforstructuralpurposesaregiveninTable11.4.1.
11.4.1.1
Grouping
Speciesoftimberrecommendedforconstructionalpurposesareclassifiedinthreegroupsonthebasisoftheir
strengthproperties,namely,modulusofelasticity(E)andextremefibrestressinbendingandtension(fb).
Thecharacteristicsofthesegroupsareasgivenbelow:
GroupAEabove12.6x103N/mm2andfbabove18.0N/mm2.
Group B Eabove 9.8 x 103N/mm2 and up to 12.6 x 103 N/mm2 and fb above12.0N/mm2and up to 18.0
N/mm2.
Group C E above 5.6 x 103 N/mm2 and up to 9.8 x 103 N/mm2 and fb above 8.5 N/mm2 and up to 12.0
N/mm2.
NOTEModulusofelasticitygivenaboveisapplicableforalllocationsandextremefibrestressinbendingis
forinsidelocation.
11.4.2
ThegeneralcharacteristicslikedurabilityandtreatabilityofthespeciesarealsogiveninTable11.4.1.
Species of timber other than those recommended in Table 11.4.1 may be used, provided the basic strength
propertiesaredeterminedandfoundinaccordancewith11.5.1.
NOTE For obtaining basic stress figures of the unlisted species, reference may be made to the Forest
ResearchInstitute,DebraDun.
11.4.3
Thepermissiblelateralstrength(indoubleshear)ofmildsteelwireshallbeasgiveninTable11.4.2andTable
11.4.3fordifferentspeciesoftimber.
11.4.4
MoistureContentinTimberThepermissiblemoisturecontentoftimberforvariouspositionsinbuildingsshall
beasgiveninTable11.4.4.
6648
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
Table11.4.1SafePermissibleStressesfortheSpeciesofTimber
Densityat12 Elasticityx
103N/mm2
Content
Shearall
Compression
Compression
Durability
Treatability
Refracterinesto
TensionAlong
Location
ParalleltoGrain
Perpendicularto
Class
Grade
AllSeasoning
Grains,Extreme
Kg/m
Grain
wetLocation
outsideLocation
InsideLocation
wetLocation
outsideLocation
InsideLocation
FibreStress
InsideLocation
PreservativeCharacters
Bendingand
AlongGrain
Name
percent
Horizontal
Trade
PermissibleStressinN/mm forGradeI
Modulusof
wetLocation
BotanicalName
Average
outsideLocation
Species
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Acacianilotica
Babla
797
12.9
10.3
1.4
2.1
8.9
7.9
6.4
5.2
4.0
3.3
Aglaia odulis
Aglaia
815
12.56
18.2
15.2
12.1
1.4
2.0
10.1
8.9
7.3
4.4
3.4
2.8
Ailantahus grandis
Gokul
404
7.94
8.3
6.9
5.5
0.6
0.8
5.3
4.7
3.9
1.1
0.9
0.7
III
Altingia excelsa
Jutili
795
11.37
17.1
14.3
11.4
1.2
1.8
11.0
9.8
8.0
6.8
5.3
4.4
II
Amoora rehituka
Pitraj
668
8.98
12.3
10.2
8.2
1.1
1.5
8.0
7.1
5.8
4.0
3.1
2.6
Amoorawallichii
Lali
583
Amooraspp.
Arnari
625
1.05
13.4
1.1
9.2
0.9
1.3
8.4
7.4
6.0
3.7
2.9
2.4
II
Anisopleraglabra
Boilam
573
III
Aphenamixispolystachya
Pitraj
583
III
Arlocarpuschaplasha
Chapalish
515
9.11
13.2
11.0
8.8
0.9
1.2
8.5
7.5
6.2
3.6
2.8
2.3
III
Artocarpusintegrifolia
Kanthal
537
III
Azadirachtaindica
Neem
836
8.52
14.6
12.1
9.7
1.3
1.8
10.0
8.9
7.3
5.0
3.9
3.2
Betula lnoides
Birch
625
9.23
9.6
8.0
6.4
0.8
1.1
5.7
5.0
4.1
2.2
1.7
1.4
Bischofiajavanica
Bhadi
769
8.84
9.6
8.2
6.5
0.8
1.1
5.9
5.3
4.3
3.6
2.8
2.3
III
Bruguieraconjugata
Kankra
879
6649
Part6
StructuralDesign
Average
Bendingand
Shearall
Compression
Compression
Durability
Treatability
Refracterinesto
TensionAlong
Location
ParalleltoGrain
Perpendicularto
Class
Grade
AllSeasoning
outsideLocation
wetLocation
FibreStress
InsideLocation
Kg/m3
Grain
wetLocation
Grains,Extreme
outsideLocation
Content
InsideLocation
AlongGrain
10 N/mm
Horizontal
Name
percent
wetLocation
Trade
outsideLocation
BotanicalName
PermissibleStressinN/mm2forGradeI
Modulusof
InsideLocation
Species
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
10.7
8.6
1.1
1.5
7.9
7.0
5.7
3.5
2.7
2.2
III
Bucklandiapopulnea
Plpli
672
9.89
12.8
Canarium strictum
White dhup
569
10.54
10.1
8.4
6.7
0.7
1.1
6.2
5.5
4.5
2.1
1.6
1.3
III
Cassiafistula
Sonalu
865
11.80
19.2
16.0
12.8
1.4
2.0
12.3
10.9
8.9
7.2
5.6
4.6
Castanopsis hystrix
Chestanut
624
9.85
10.6
8.8
7.0
0.8
1.2
6.4
5.7
4.6
2.7
2.1
1.7
II
Carallia lucida
Maniawaga
748
12.60
18.4
15.3
12.3
1.2
1.7
11.4
10.1
8.3
5.9
4.6
3.8
Cassiasiamea
Minjiri
695
Chukrasiatabularis
Chickrassy
666
8.35
11.8
9.8
7.9
1.1
1.5
7.1
6.3
5.2
3.9
3.1
2.5
II
Dalbergiasissoo
Sissoo
808
Dillemiaindica
Dillenia
617
8.61
12.1
10.0
8.0
0.8
1.2
7.3
6.5
5.3
2.7
2.1
1.7
III
Dilleniapentagyne
Dillenia
622
7.56
11.8
9.9
7.9
0.9
1.3
7.1
6.3
5.2
3.5
2.7
2.2
III
Dipterocarpusalatus
Garjan
721
III
Dipterocarpus rnacrocarpus
Hollong
726
13.34
14.5
12.0
9.6
0.8
1.1
8.8
7.9
6.4
3.5
2.7
2.2
III
Banderhol
485
8.38
9.8
8.2
6.5
0.6
0.9
6.4
5.7
4.7
1.8
1.4
1.1
III
Garugapiannata
Garuga
571
7.58
11.7
9.7
7.8
1.0
1.5
7.2
6.4
5.3
3.4
2.6
2.1
Geriopsroxbarghiana
Goran
869
gGmelinearborea
Garnar
501
7.02
9.8
8.2
6.6
0.8
1.4
5.7
5.0
4.1
4.2
3.2
2.7
Grewiaveslita
Dhaman
758
12.00
15.4
12.6
10.3
1.4
2.0
9.1
8.1
6.6
4.1
3.2
2.6
III
Heritieraspp.
Sundri
872
13.37
17.9
14.9
11.9
1.3
1.8
11.0
9.8
8.0
6.5
5.0
4.1
Duabangasonneratioides
6650
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
Species
Average
BotanicalName
Trade
Name
percent
PermissibleStressinN/mm forGradeI
Modulusof
103N/mm2
Content
Bendingand
Shearall
Compression
Compression
Durability
Treatability
Refracterinesto
TensionAlong
Location
ParalleltoGrain
Perpendicularto
Class
Grade
AllSeasoning
Grains,Extreme
Kg/m
wetLocation
Horizontal
AlongGrain
InsideLocation
outsideLocation
wetLocation
InsideLocation
outsideLocation
wetLocation
FibreStress
outsideLocation
Grain
InsideLocation
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
III
Hopeaodorata
Telsur
711
Kayeafloribund
Karal
813
10.88
16.8
14.0
1.1
1.1
1.6
10.1
9.0
7.3
4.4
3.4
2.8
III
Lagerstrocmiaspp.
Jarul
654
III
Machilusmacrantha
Machilus
692
10.00
12.4
10.3
8.3
1.0
1.5
8.2
7.3
6.0
3.5
2.7
2.2
III
B/C
Manglietiainsignia
449
10.37
10.9
9.1
7.3
0.7
1.4
8.0
7.1
5.8
3.4
2.6
2.1
Manilota polyandra
Ping
903
13.20
19.1
15.9
12.7
1.3
1.8
1.2
10.0
8.5
5.7
4.4
3.6
III
Mesua assamica
Keyea
842
12.83
17.4
14.5
11.6
1.0
1.4
11.7
10.4
8.5
5.3
4.1
3.3
II
Mesua ferrea
Mesua
965
16.30
23.3
19.4
15.5
1.2
1.8
15.5
13.8
11.3
5.9
4.6
3.7
Micheliachampaca
Champa
644
Champ
512
8.25
10.9
9.1
7.3
0.7
1.0
6.6
5.9
4.8
2.8
2.2
1.8
Champ
513
10.12
9.8
8.2
6.5
0.7
1.0
6.1
5.5
4.5
1.6
1.3
1.0
II
Dakroom
651
7.82
12.6
10.5
8.4
1.0
1.5
7.9
7.0
5.7
3.7
2.9
2.4
III
Palaquiumpolyanthum
Tali
734
11.24
14.9
12.4
10.0
1.1
1.6
9.9
8.8
7.2
4.7
3.7
3.0
Phoebe hainesiana
Bonsum
566
9.5
13.2
11.0
8.8
0.8
1.2
8.8
7.8
6.4
2.8
2.1
1.8
II
Phoebe goalperansis
Bonsum
511
7.65
9.7
8.1
6.5
0.7
1.0
6.6
5.9
4.8
2.2
1.7
1.4
II
Plerygotaalata
Narikel
593
10.95
13.4
11.8
8.9
0.8
1.2
8.2
7.3
6.0
2.7
2.1
1.7
III
Prunus napeulensis
Arupati
548
9.41
4.4
8.7
69.6
0.9
1.2
6.7
6.0
4.9
2.4
1.9
1.6
Pterespermum acerifolium
Hattipaila
607
9.55
13.5
11.3
9.0
0.9
1.2
8.7
7.7
6.3
3.2
2.5
2.0
III
Michelia montana
Michelia excelsa
Mitragynapervifolia
6651
Part6
StructuralDesign
Average
Bendingand
Shearall
Compression
Compression
Durability
Treatability
Refracterinesto
TensionAlong
Location
ParalleltoGrain
Perpendicularto
Class
Grade
AllSeasoning
outsideLocation
wetLocation
FibreStress
InsideLocation
Kg/m3
Grain
wetLocation
Grains,Extreme
outsideLocation
Content
InsideLocation
AlongGrain
10 N/mm
Horizontal
Name
percent
wetLocation
Trade
outsideLocation
BotanicalName
PermissibleStressinN/mm2forGradeI
Modulusof
InsideLocation
Species
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
874
12.63
15.2
12.7
10.1
1.2
1.7
9.6
8.6
7.0
5.3
4.1
3.4
II
Quercuslineate
Oak
Quercuslamellosa
Oak
87
12.44
14.5
12.1
9.7
1.2
1.7
8.7
7.8
6.4
3.8
2.9
2.4
II
Schima wallichii
Chilauni
693
9.57
11.1
9.3
7.4
0.9
1.3
6.6
5.9
4.8
2.3
1.8
1.4
III
Seritierafomes
Sundri
1073
III
Shotea assamica
Makai
548
9.27
11.1
9.2
7.4
0.9
1.3
7.1
6.3
5.2
2.9
2.2
1.8
III
Shorearobusta
Sal
889
III
Sonneralia apetale
Keora
617
8.63
12.8
10.7
8.5
0.9
1.3
7.4
6.6
5.4
4.8
3.7
3.0
II
Swintoniafloribunda
Civit
665
III
Syzygiumcumini
Jamun
841
10.55
14.8
12.4
9.9
1.1
1.6
9.0
8.0
6.5
6.9
5.4
4.4
II
Syzygiumspp.
Jam
823
III
Taxus buccata
Yew
705
7.79
14.3
11.9
9.5
1.2
1.7
8.7
7.8
6.4
4.7
3.7
3.0
Tectonagrandis
Teak
660
9.97
15.5
12.9
10.3
1.2
1.6
9.4
8.3
6.8
4.5
3.5
2.8
Toenaciliata
Toon
487
6.40
8.7
7.3
5.8
0.7
1.0
5.4
4.8
3.9
2.4
1.8
1.5
II
Terminalia citrna
755
11.89
17.1
14.3
11.4
1.1
1.6
10.8
9.6
7.9
5.0
3.9
3.2
Terminalia myriocarpa
Hollock
615
9.62
11.9
9.9
8.0
0.9
1.2
7.6
6.7
5.5
2.9
2.2
1.8
III
Xyliadolabriformis
Lohakat
1007
Xylocarpusrolloensis
Passur
757
Mullilam
587
10.65
14.7
12.2
9.8
0.9
1.2
9.5
8.4
6.9
3.4
2.6
2.1
Zanthoxylum budranga
6652
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
Classificationforpreservationbasedondurabilitytests,etc.
Class
IAveragelifemorethan120months;
IIAveragelife60monthsorabovebutlessthan120months;and
IIIAveragelifelessthan60months.
TreatabilityGrades
aHeartwoodeasilytreatable;
bHeartwoodtreatable,butcompletepenetrationnotalwaysobtained;incasewheretheleastdimensionismorethan60mm;
cHeartwoodonlypartiallytreatable;
dHeartwoodrefractorytotreatment;and
eHeartwoodveryrefractorytotreatment,penetrationofpreservativebeingpracticallynilevenfromtheends.
Databasedonstrengthpropertiesatthreeyearsofageoftree.
Classificationsbasedonseasoningbehavioroftimberandrefractorinessw.r.t.cracking,splittinganddryingrate.
AHighlyrefractory(slowanddifficultytoseasonfreefromsurfaceandendcracking);
BModeratelyrefractory(maybeseasonedfreefromsurfaceandendcrackingwithinreasonablyshortperiods,givenalittleprotectionagainstrapiddryingconditions);and
CNonrefractory(mayberapidlyseasonedfreefromsurfaceandendcrackingevenintheopenairandsun.Ifnotrapidlydried,theydevelopbluestainandmouldonthesurface.
6653
Table11.4.2PermissibleLateralStrengths(inDoubleShear)ofNails3.55mmDia,80mmLong
Sl
SpeciesofWood
ForPermanentConstruction
ForTemporary
StrengthperNail
No.
BotanicalName
Tradename
Lengthening
Joints
StructuresStrength
perNail(forBoth
LengtheningJointsand
NodeJoints
NodeJoints)Nx102
2
Nx10
Nx102
1
Acacianilotica
Babla
15
11
34
Aphenamixispolystachya
Pitraj
19
19
Canarium strictum
White dhup
10.5
Castanopsis hystrix
Chestanut
18
10.5
23.5
Chukrasiatabularis
Chickrassy
24
27
Dilleniapentagyne
Dillenia
16.5
12
16
Dipterocarpus rnacrocarpus
Hollong
17
20
Grewiaveslita
Dhaman
13
24
Hopeaodorata
Telsur
31.5
13
28.5
Lagerstrocmiaspp.
Jarul
24.5
21.5
22.5
Maniltoa polyandra
Ping
26
23.5
32
Mesua ferrea
Mesua
26
41
Michelia excelsa
Champ
13
20
Phoebe hainesiana
Bonsum
12
13
Shorearobusta
Sal
23
15.5
19.5
Syzygiumspp.
Jam
15
12
25
Tectonagrandis
Teak
14
13
Hollock
13
10
19
Toonaciliata
Toon
16
21
NOTES
1.
2.
11.4.4.1
Nailsof3.55mmdiameteraremostcommonlyused.Theabovevaluescanalsobeusedfor4mmdiameter100mmlong
nails.
ThevaluesinNareapproximateconvertedvaluesfromkgf.Forexactconversionthevalueis1kgf=9.80665N.
Tolerances
Permissibletolerancesinmeasurementsofcutsizesofstructuraltimbershallbeasfollows:
a)Forwidthandthickness:
1)Uptoandincluding100mm
2)Above100mm
b)Forlength
Part6
StructuralDesign
+6
mm
3
+ 10
+3
mm
0
mm
6654
Timber
Chapter11
11.4.5 GradingofStructuralTimber
Cutsizesofstructuraltimbershallbegraded,afterseasoning,intothreegradesbasedon
permissibledefectsgiveninTable11.4.8:
11.4.5.1
a) SelectGrade
b) GradeI
c) GradeII
Table11.4.3PermissibleLateralStrengths(inDoubleShear)ofNails5.00mmDia,125mmand150mmLong
SpeciesofWood
ForPermanentConstruction
StrengthperNail
BotanicalName
Tradename
Lengthening
Joints
2
Nx10
2
4
27
ForTemporaryStructures
StrengthperNail(for
BothLengtheningJoints
andNodeJoints)Nx102
Node
Joints
Nx102
Acacianilotica
Babla
13.5
53
Dalbergiasissoo
Sissoo
17
15
43
Mesua ferrea
Mesua
24
15.5
57.5
Michelia excelsa
Champ
26
12.5
39
Phoebe hainesiana
Bonsum
20
7.5
30
Shorearobusta
Sal
Syzygiumspp.
Jam
Tectonagrandis
Teak
Hollock
19.5
17
37
18
14.5
38.5
28
13
30
27.5
41
Table11.4.4PermissiblePercentageMoistureContentValues
Sl
No.
Use
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
Zones(seeNote)
(2)
Structuralelements
Doorsandwindows
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
12
14
17
20
50mmandaboveinthickness
10
12
14
16
Thinnerthan50mm
10
12
14
Flooringstripsforgeneralpurposes
10
10
12
NOTEThecountryhasbeenbroadlydividedintothefollowingfourzonesbasedonthehumidityvariationsinthecountry:
ZoneIAverageannualrelativehumiditylessthan40percent.
ZoneIIAverageannualrelativehumidity40to50percent.
ZoneIIIAverageannualrelativehumidity50to67percent.
ZoneIVAverageannualrelativehumiditymorethan67percent.
Fordetailedzonalclassification,tolerances,etcreferencemaybemadetogoodpractice[63A(4)].
6655
Part6
StructuralDesign
11.4.6 SawnTimber
11.4.6.1
Sizes
PreferredcutsizesoftimberforuseinstructuralcomponentsshallbeasgiveninTables11.4.5to11.4.7.
Table11.4.5PreferredCutSizesofStructuralTimbersforRoofTrusses(Spanfrom3mto20m)
Thickness
Width
mm
mm
20
40
50
60
80
100
25
40
50
60
80
100
120
160
180
30
40
50
60
80
100
120
160
180
35
60
80
100
120
160
180
40
60
80
100
120
160
180
50
60
80
100
120
160
180
60
80
100
120
160
180
80
100
120
160
180
NOTES
1 For truss spans marginally above 20 m, preferred cut sizes of structural timber may be allowed.
2 Preferred lengths of timhec 1, 1.5,2,2.5 and 3 m.
Table11.4.6PreferredCutSizesofStructuralTimberforRoofPurlins,Rafters,FloorBeams,Etc
Thickness
Width
mm
mm
50
80
100
120
60
80
100
120
140
140
160
80
100
100
120
140
160
140
160
180
200
NOTE Preferred lengths of timber: 1.5,2,2.5 and 3 m.
Table11.4.7PreferredCutSizesofStructuralTimbersforPartitionFramingandCovering,andforCentering
Thickness
Width
mm
mm
10
10
40
50
60
80
15
40
50
60
80
100
20
40
50
60
80
100
120
160
200
25
40
50
60
80
100
120
160
200
240
30
40
50
60
80
100
120
160
200
240
40
40
60
80
100
120
160
200
240
50
50
80
100
120
160
200
240
60
60
80
100
120
160
200
240
80
80
100
120
160
200
240
6656
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
Table11.4.8PermissibleDefectsforCutSizesofTimberforStructuralUse
Sl
No.
Defects
i)
SelectGrade
Grade I
Grade II
Wane
Shallbepermissibleatitsdeepest
Shallbepermissibleatitsdeepest
Shallbepermissibleatits
portionuptoalimitof1/8ofthe
portionuptoalimitof1/6ofthe
deepest
widthofthesurfaceonwhichit
widthofthesurfaceonwhichit
portionuptoalimitof1/4of
occurs
occurs
the
widthofthesurfaceon
whichit
occurs
ii)
iii)
iv)
Wormholes
Otherthanthoseduetopowder
Otherthanthoseduetopowder
Otherthanthosedueto
postbeetlesarepermissible
postbeetlesarepermissible
powderpost
beetlesarepermissible
Slopeofgrain
Shallnotbemorethan1in20
Shallnotbemorethan1in15
Shallnotbemorethan1in
12
Live knots:
WidthofWide
Permissible Maximum Size of Live
Permissible Maximum Size of
Permissible Maximum Size
Faces ofCut
Knot on
Live Knot on
of Live Knot on
Sizes
of Timber
Max
Narrow
Remaining
centralhalfof
facesand
central
thewidthofthe
1Aofthe
halfofthe
widefaces
Narrowfaces
Remaining
Narrowfaces
Remaining
and
centralhalfof
and
1/4ofthe
thewidthofthe
1/4ofthe
width
widefaces
width
width
width
facecloseto
facecloseto
faceclose
ofthewide
faces
edgesofcut
edgesofcut
to
size
size
edgesofcut
oftimber
oftimber
size
oftimber
v)
75
10
10
19
19
29
30
100
13
13
25
25
38
39
150
19
19
38
38
57
57
200
22
25
44
50
66
75
250
25
29
50
57
66
87
300
27
38
54
75
81
114
350
29
41
57
81
87
123
400
32
44
63
87
96
132
450
33
47
66
93
99
141
500
35
50
69
100
105
150
550
36
52
72
103
108
156
600
38
53
75
106
114
Checksand
159
shakes:
6657
Part6
StructuralDesign
Widthofthe
PermissibleDepth
PermissibleDepth
PermissibleDepth
Faceof
Max
Max
Max
theTimber
Max
75
12
25
36
100
18
35
54
150
25
50
75
200
33
65
99
250
40
81
120
300
50
100
150
350
57
115
171
400
66
131
198
450
76
150
225
500
83
165
249
550
90
181
270
600
100
200
300
11.4.6.2 Theprohibiteddefectsgivenin4.6.2.1andpermissibledefectsgivenin4.6.2.2shallapplytostructural
timber.
11.4.6.2.1
Prohibiteddefects
Loosegrains,splits,compressionwoodinconiferousspecies,heartwoodrot,saprot,crookedness,wormholes
madebypowderpostbeetlesandpitchpocketsshallnotbepermittedinallthethreegrades.
11.4.6.2.2 DefectstotheextentspecifiedinTable11.4.8shallbepermissible.
NOTE Wanes are permitted provided they are not combined with knots and the reduction in strength on
accountofthewanesisnotmorethanthereductionwithmaximumallowableknots.
11.4.6.3
LocationofDefects
Theinfluenceofdefectsintimberisdifferentfordifferentlocationsinthestructuralelement.Therefore,these
should be placed during construction in such a way so that they do not have any adverse effect on the
members.
11.4.7
Suitability
11.4.7.1
SuitabilityinRespectofDurabilityandTreatabilityforPermanentStructures
Therearetwochoicesasgivenin11.4.7.1.1and11.4.7.1.2.
11.4.7.1.1 Firstchoice
Thespeciesshallbeanyoneofthefollowing:
a) Untreatedheartwoodofhighdurability.Heartwoodifcontainingmorethan15percentsap
wood,mayneedchemicaltreatmentforprotection;
b) Treatedheartwoodofmoderateandlowdurabilityandclassaandclassbtreatability;
c) Heartwoodofmoderatedurabilityandclassctreatabilityafterpressureimpregnation,and
d) Sapwoodofallclassesofdurabilityafterthoroughtreatmentwithpreservative.
11.4.7.1.2 Secondchoice
Thespeciesoftimbershallbeheartwoodofmoderatedurabilityandclassdtreatability.
11.4.7.2
Choiceofloadbetingtemporarystructuresorsemistructuralcomponentsatconstructionsite
a) Heartwoodoflowdurabilityandclassetreatability;or
6658
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
b) Thespecieswhosedurabilityand/ortreatabilityareyettobeestablished,aslistedinTable
11.4.1.
11.4.8
Fastenings
All structural members shall be framed, anchored, tied and braced to develop the strength and rigidity
necessaryforthepurposesforwhichtheyareused.
Allowable stresses or loads on joints and fasteners shall be determined in accordance with recognized
principles.Commonmechanicalfasteningsareofbartypesuchasnailsandspikes,woodscrewsandbolts,and
timber connectors including metallic rings or wooden discdowels. Chemical fastenings include synthetic
adhesivesforstructuralapplications.
11.5
PERMISSIBLESTRESSES
11.5.1
ThepermissiblestressesforGroupsA,BandCfordifferentlocationsapplicabletoGradeIstructural
timbershallbeasgiveninTable11.5.1providedthatthefollowingconditionsaresatisfied:
a) Thetimbersshouldbeofhighormoderatedurabilityandbegiventhesuitabletreatment
wherenecessary.
b) Timberoflowdurabilityshallbeusedafterproperpreservativetreatmentand
c) Theloadsshouldbecontinuousandpermanentandnotofimpacttype.
Table11.5.1MinimumPermissibleStressLimits(N/mm2)inThreeGroupsofStructuralTimbers(forGradeI
Material)
Sl
StrengthCharacter
LocationofUse
Group
Group
Group
(4)
(5)
(6)
Inside
18.0
12.0
8.5
No.
(1)
i)
(2)
(3)
1)
Bendingandtensionalonggrain
2)
ii)
iii)
Shear
Alllocations
1.05
0.64
0.49
Horizontal
Alonggrain
Alllocations
15
0.91
0.70
Compressionpe4rpendiculartograin
Inside
11.7
7.8
4.9
1)
1)
iv)
Compressionperpendiculartograin
Inside
4.0
2.5
1.1
v)
Modulusofelasticity(103N/mm2)
Alllocationsand
12.6
9.8
5.6
1)
2)
grade
Forworkingstressesforotherlocationsofuse,thatis,outsideandwet,generallyfactorsof5/6and2/3areapplied.
Thevaluesofhorizontalsheartobeusedonlyforbeams.Inallothercasesshearalonggraintobeused.
11.5.2
Thepermissiblestresses(exceptingE)giveninTable11.5.1shallbemultipliedbythefollowing
factorstoobtainthepermissiblestressesforothergradesprovidedthattheconditionslaiddownin
5.2aresatisfied:
a) ForSelectGradeTimber1.16
b) ForGradeIITimber0.84
When low durability timbers are to be used [see 5.2(b)] on outside locations, the permissible stresses for all
gradesoftimber,arrivedatby5.2and5.3shallbemultipliedby0.80.
6659
Part6
StructuralDesign
11.5.3 ModificationFactorsforPermissibleStresses
11.5.3.1 DuetoChangeinSlopeofGrain
Whenthetimberhasnotbeengradedandhasmajordefectslikeslopeofgrain,knotsandchecksorshakesbut
not beyond permissible value, the permissible stress given in Table 11.4.1 shall be multiplied by modification
factorK1fordifferentslopesofgrainasgiveninTable11.5.2.
Table11.5.2ModificationsFactorK1toAllowforChangeinSlopeofGrain
slope
ModificationFactorK1
StrengthofBeams,
Strengthof
JoistsandTies
PostsorColumns
1in10
0.80
0.74
1in12
0.90
0.82
0.98
0.8
1.00
1.00
1in14
1in15andfla~
NOTEForintermediaryslopesofgrains,valuesofmodificationfactormaybeobtainedbyinterpolation.
11.5.3.2 DuetoDurationofLoad
For different durations of design load, the permissible stresses given in Table 1 shall be multiplied by the
modificationfactorK2giveninTable11.5.3.
Table11.5.3ModificationsFactorK2,forChangeinDuratiouofLoading
DurationofLoading
ModificationFactorK2
Continuous(Normal)
1.0
Twomonths
1.15
Sevendays
1.25
Windandearthquake
1.33
Instantaneousorimpact
2.00
NOTEThestrengthpropertiesoftimberunderloadaretimedependent.
6660
Vol.2
Timber
11.5.3.2.1
11.5.3.2.2
Chapter11
The factor K2 is applicable to modulus of elasticity when used to design timber columns,
otherwisetheydonotapplythereto.
If there are several duration of loads (in addition to the continuous) to be considered, the
modification factorshall be basedonthe shortest durationload inthe combination, thatis, the
one yielding the largest increase in the permissible stresses, provided the designed section is
foundadequateforacombinationofotherlargerdurationloads.
[Explanation:Inanystructuraltimberdesignfordeadloads,snowloadsandwindorearthquake
forces, membersmay be designed onthe basis of total of stressesdueto dead,snowandwind
loadsusingK2=1.33,factorforthepermissiblestress(ofTable11.4.1)toaccommodatethewind
load,thatis, the shortest of duration and giving thelargest increase in the permissible stresses.
The section thus found is checked to meet the requirements based on dead loads alone with
modificationK2=1.00].
11.5.3.2.3
11.6
ModificationfactorK2shallalsobeappliedtoallowableloadsformechanicalfastenersindesign
ofjoints,whenthewoodandnotthestrengthofmetaldeterminetheloadcapacity.
11.6.1 Allstructuralmembers,assembliesorframeworkinabuilding,incombinationwiththefloors,wallsand
otherstructuralpartsofthebuildingshallbecapableofsustaining,withduestabilityandstiffnessthe
wholedeadandimposedloadingsasperPart6StructuralDesign,Section1Loads,ForcesandEffects,
withoutexceedingthelimitsofrelevantstressesspecifiedinthisSection.
11.6.2 Buildings shall be designed for all dead and imposed loads or forces assumed to come upon them
duringconstructionoruse,includingupliftsorhorizontalforcesfromwindandforcesfromearthquakes
orotherloadings.Structuralmembersandtheirconnectionsshallbeproportionedtoprovideasound
and stable structure with adequate strength and stiffness. Wooden components in construction
generallyincludepanelsforsheathinganddiaphragms,siding,beams,girder,columns,lightframings,
masonry wall and joist construction, heavyframes, glued laminated structural members, structural
sandwiches,prefabricatedpanels,lamellaarches,portalframesandotherauxiliaryconstructions.
11.6.3 NetSection
11.6.3.1 Thenetsectionisobtainedbydeductingfromthegrosssectionalareaoftimbertheprojectedareaof
allmaterialremovedbyboring,groovingorothermeansatcriticalplane.Incaseofnailing,theareaof
thepreboredholeshallnotbetakenintoaccountforthispurpose.
11.6.3.2 The net section used in calculating load carrying capacity of a member shall be at least net section
determined as above by passing a plane or a series of connected planes transversely through the
members.
11.6.3.3 Notchesshallbeinnocaseremovemorethanonequarterofthesection.
11.6.3.4 In the design of an intermediate or a long column, gross section shall be used in calculating load
carryingcapacityofthecolumn.
11.6.4 Loads
11.6.4.1 TheloadsshallconformtothosegiveninPart6StructuralDesign,Chapter2LoadsonBuildingsand
Structures.
11.6.4.2 Theworstcombinationandlocationofloadsshallbeconsideredfordesign.Windandseismicforces
shallnotbeconsideredtoactsimultaneously.
6661
Part6
StructuralDesign
11.6.5 FlexuralMembers
11.6.5.1 Suchstructuralmembersshallbeinvestigatedforthefollowing:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Bendingstrength,
Maximumhorizontalshear,
Stressatthebearings,and
Deflection.
11.6.5.2 EffectiveSpan
Theeffectivespanofbeamsandotherflexuralmembersshallbetakenasthedistancefromfaceofsupports
plusonehalfoftherequiredlengthofbearingateachendexceptthatforcontinuousbeamsandjoiststhespan
maybemeasuredfromcentreofbearingatthosesupportsoverwhichthebeamiscontinuous.
11.6.5.3 Usualformulaforflexuralstrengthshallapplyindesign:
f ab
M
fb
Z
11.6.5.4 FormFactorsforFlexuralMembers
Thefollowingformfactorsshallbeappliedtothebendingstress:
a) RectangularSectionForrectangularsections,fordifferentdepthsofbeams,theformfactor
K3shallbetakenas:
D 2 + 89400
K3 = 0.81 2
D + 55000
NOTEFormfactor(K3)shallnotbeappliedforbeamshavingdepthlessthanorequalto300mm.
b) BoxBeamsandIBeamsForboxbeamsandIbeams,theformfactorKAobtainedbyusing
theformula:
D 2 + 89400 1
K 4 = 0.8 + 0.8 y
2
D + 55000
where
y = p12 + (6 8 p1 + 3 p12 )(1 q1 ) + q1

c) SolidCircularCrossSectionsForsolidcircularcrosssectionstheformfactorKSshallbetaken
as1.18.
d) SquareCrossSectionsForsquarecrosssectionswheretheloadisinthedirectionof
diagonal,theformfactorKGshallbetakenas1.414.
11.6.5.5 Width
The minimum width of the beam or any flexural member shall not be less than 50 mm or 1/50 of the span,
whicheverisgreater.
11.6.5.6 Depth
Thedepthofbeamoranyflexuralmembershallnotbetakenmorethanthreetimesofitswidthwithoutlateral
stiffening.
11.6.5.6.1
Stiffening
Allflexuralmembershavingadepthexceedingthreetimesitswidthoraspanexceeding50timesitswidthor
bothshallbe laterallyrestrainedfromtwistingorbucklingandthedistancebetweensuchrestraintsshallnot
exceed50timesitswidth.
6662
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
11.6.5.7 Shear
11.6.5.7.1
Thefollowingformulaeshallapply:
a) Themaximumhorizontalshear,whentheloadonabeammovesfromthesupporttowardsthe
centreofthespan,andtheloadisatadistanceofthreetofourtimesthedepthofthebeam
fromthesupport,shallbecalculatedfromthefollowinggeneralformula:
H=
VQ
Ib
b) Forrectangularbeams:
H=
3V
2bD
c) Fornotchedbeams,withtensionnotchatsupports:
D1
3VD
2bD12
H=
SQUARE NOTCH
(BOTTM SIDE NOTCHED)
d) Fornotchedatupper(compression)face,wheree>D:
H=
3V
2bD1
D1
D2
SPLAYED NOTCH
(UPPER SIDE NOTCHED)
e) Fornotchedatupper(compression)face,wheree<D
H=
11.6.5.7.2
3V
D
2b D 2 e
D
Forconcentratedloads:
V=
10C ( I x)( x / D ) 2
9 I 2 + ( x / D) 2
andforuniformlydistributedloads,
6663
Part6
StructuralDesign
W 2D
V = 1
2
I
AfterarrivingatthevalueofV,itsvaluewillbesubstitutedintheformula:
11.6.5.7.3
H=
VQ
Ib
Indeterminingtheverticalreactionfollowingdeductionsinloadsmaybemade:
a) Considerationshallbegiventothepossibledistributionofloadtoadjacentparallelbeams,if
any;
b) Alluniformlydistributedloadswithinadistanceequaltothedepthofthebeamfromtheedge
oftheearnestsupportmaybeneglectedexceptincaseofbeamhangingdownwardsfroma
particularsupport,and
c) Allconcentratedloadsinthevicinityofthesupportsmaybereducedbythereductionfactor
applicableaccordingtoTable11.6.1.
Table11.6.1ReductionFactorforConcentratedLoadsintheVicinityofSupports
DistanceofLoadfrom
theNearestSupport
LSDorLess
2D
2.5D
3DorMore
Reductionfactor
0.6
0.4
0.2
NoReduction
NOTEForintermediatedistances,factormaybeobtainedbylinearinterpolation.
11.6.5.7.4
Unless the local stress is calculated and found to be within the permissible stress, flexural
membershallnotbecut,notchedorboredexceptasfollows:
a)Notchesmaybecutinthetoporbottomneitherdeeperthanonefifthofthedepthofthebeamnorfarther
fromtheedgeofthesupportthanonesixthofthespan;
b)Holesnotlargerindiameterthanonequarterofthedepthmaybeboredinthemiddlethirdofthedepthand
length;and
c)Ifholesornotchesoccuratadistancegreaterthanthreetimesthedepthofthememberfromtheedgeofthe
nearestsupport,thenetremainingdepthshallbeusedindeterminingthebendingstrength.
Net
Depth
NOTCHED AT MIDDLE
Fig.11.6.1NotchedBeams
11.6.5.8 Bearing
11.6.5.8.1
Theendsofflexuralmembersshallbesupportedinrecesseswhichprovideadequateventilation
to prevent dry rot and shall not be enclosed. Flexural members except roof timbers which are
supporteddirectlyonmasonryorconcreteshallhavealengthofbearingofnotlessthan75mm.
Memberssupportedoncorbels,offsetsandrooftimbersonawallshallbearimmediatelyonand
befixedtowallplatenotlessthan75mmx40mm.
11.6.5.8.2
Timberjoistsor floorplanks shallnot be supported on thetop flange ofsteel beamsunlessthe

bearingstress,calculatedonthenetbearingasshapedtofitthebeam,islessthanthepermissible
compressivestressperpendiculartothegrain.
6664
Vol.2
Timber
11.6.5.8.3
Chapter11
Bearingstress
Lengthandpositionofbearing
a) Atanybearingonthesidegrainoftimber,thepermissiblestressincompressionperpendicular
tothegrain,fcn,isdependentonthelengthandpositionofthebearing.
b) ThepermissiblestressesgiveninTable11.4.1forcompressionperpendiculartothegrainare
alsothepermissiblestressesforanylengthattheendsofamemberandforbearings150mm
ormoreinlengthatanyotherposition.
c) Forbearingslessthan150mminlengthlocated75mmormorefromtheendofamemberas
showninFig.11.6.2,thepermissiblestressmaybemultipliedbythemodificationfactorK7
giveninTable11.6.2.
d) Noallowanceneedbemadeforthedifferenceinintensityofthebearingstressduetobending
ofabeam.
e) Thebearingareashouldbecalculatedasthenetareaafterallowancefortheamountofwane.
f) Forbearingsstressunderawasherorasmallplate,thesamecoefficientspecifiedinTable
11.6.2maybetakenforabearingwithalengthequaltothediameterofthewasherorthe
widthofthesmallplate.
g) Whenthedirectionofstressisatangletothedirectionofthegraininanystructuralmember,
thenthepermissiblebearingstressinthatmembershallbecalculatedbythefollowing
formula:
f c =
f cp f cn
f cp sin + f cn cos 2
2
Table11.6.2:ModificationfactorK7forbearingstresses
Lengthofbearinginmm
15
25
40
50
75
100
150ormore
ModificationfactorK7
1.67
1.40
1.25
1.20
1.13
1.10
1.00
75mm
min
150 mm max
Bearing
Fig.11.6.2PositionOfEndBearings
11.6.5.9 Deflection
Thedeflectioninthecaseofallflexuralmemberssupportingbrittlematerialslikegypsumceilings,slates,tiles
andasbestossheetsshallnotexceed1/360ofthespan.Thedeflectioninthecaseofotherflexuralmembers
shallnotexceed1/240ofthespanand1/150ofthefreelyhanginglengthinthecaseofcantilevers.
11.6.5.9.1
Usualformulafordeflectionshallapply:
KWL3
EI (ignoringdeflectionduetoshearstrain)
6665
Part6
StructuralDesign
Kvalues= 1/3forcantileverswithloadatfreeend,
1/8forcantileverswithuniformlydistributedload,
1/48forbeamssupportedatbothendswithpointloadatcentre,and
5/384forbeamssupportedatbothendswithuniformlydistributedload.
11.6.5.9.2
InordertoallowtheeffectoflongdurationloadingonE,forcheckingdeflectionincaseofbeams
andjoiststheeffectiveloadsshallbetwicethedeadloadiftimberisinitiallydry.
11.6.5.9.3
Selfweightofbeamshallbeconsideredindesign.
11.6.6 Columns
NOTETheformulaegivenareforcolumnswithpinendconditionsandthelengthshallbemodifiedsuitably
withotherendconditions.
11.6.6.1 SolidColumns
Solid columns shallbeclassified intoshort,intermediateand longcolumns dependingupontheir slenderness
ratio(S/d)asfollows:
a) ShortcolumnswhereS/ddoesnotexceed11.
b) IntermediatecolumnswhereS/disbetween11andKg,and
c) LongcolumnswhereS/disgreaterthanKg.
11.6.6.1.1
Forshortcolumns,thepermissiblecompressivestressshallbecalculatedasfollows:
11.6.6.1.2
f c = f cp
Forintermediatecolumns,thepermissiblecompressivestressiscalculatedbyusingthefollowing
formula:
1 S 4

f c = f cp 1
3 K g d
11.6.6.1.3
For long columns, the permissible compressive stress shall be calculated by using the following
formula:
fc =
0.329 E
(S / d )2
11.6.6.1.4
Incaseofsolidcolumnsoftimber,S/dratioshallnotexceed50.
11.6.6.1.5
The permissible loadon a column of circularcrosssection shallnot exceed that permitted for a
squarecolumnofanequivalentcrosssectionalarea.
11.6.6.1.6
FordeterminingS/dratioofataperedcolumn,itsleastdimensionshallbetakenasthesumofthe
corresponding least dimensions at the small end of the column and onethird of the difference
betweenthisleastdimensionatthesmallendandthecorrespondingleastdimensionatthelarge
end,butinnocaseshalltheleastdimensionforthecolumnbetakenasmorethanoneandahalf
times the least dimension at the small end. The induced stress at the small end of the tapered
columnshallnotexceedthepermissiblecompressivestressinthedirectionofgrain.
11.6.6.2 BuiltupColumns
11.6.6.2.1
Boxcolumn
Boxcolumnsshallbeclassifiedintoshort,intermediateandlongcolumnsasfollows:
6666
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
a) Shortcolumnswhere
d + d 22
2
1
b) Intermediatecolumnswhere
c) Longcolumnswhere
11.6.6.2.2
d12 + d 22
islessthan8;
S
d + d 22
2
1
isbetween8andK9;and
isgreaterthanK9.
Forshortcolumns,thepermissiblecompressivestressshallbecalculatedasfollows:
f c = qf cp
11.6.6.2.3
For intermediate columns, the permissible compressive stress shall be obtained using the
followingformula
1
S
f c = qf cp 1
3 d2 + d2
1
1
11.6.6.2.4
For long columns, the permissible compressive stress shall be calculated by using the following
formula:
fc =
11.6.6.2.5
0.329UE
2
d + d2
2
1
ThefollowingvaluesofUandq,dependinguponplankthickness(t)in11.6.6.2.3and11.6.6.2.4,
shallbeused:
t(mm)
25
0.80
1.00
30
0.60
1.00
11.6.6.3 SpacedColumns
11.6.6.3.1
The formulae for solid columns as specified in 6.6.1 are applicable to spaced columns with a
restraintfactorof2.5or3,dependingupondistancesofendconnectorsinthecolumn.
NOTEArestrainedfactorof2.5forlocationofcentroidgroupoffastenersatS/20fromendand
3forlocationatS/10toS/20fromendshallbetaken.
11.6.6.3.2
Forintermediatespacedcolumn,thepermissiblecompressivestressshallbe:
1 S 4

f c = f cp 1
3 k10d
11.6.6.3.3
Forlongspacedcolumns,theformulashallbe:
fc =
0.329 E 2.5
(S / d )2
6667
Part6
StructuralDesign
11.6.6.3.4
Forindividualmembersofspacedcolumns,S/dratioshallnotexceed80.
11.6.6.4 Compression members shall not be notched. When it is necessary to pass services through such a
member,thisshallbeeffectedbymeansofaboredholeprovidedthatthelocalstressiscalculated
andfoundtobewithinthepermissiblestressspecified.Thedistancefromtheedgeoftheholetothe
edgeofthemembershallnotbelessthanonequarterofwidthoftheface.
11.6.7 StructuralMembersSubjecttoBendingandAxialStresses
11.6.7.1 Structural members subjected both to bending and axial compression shall be designed to comply
withthefollowingformula:
f ac f ab
+
fb
fc
11.6.7.2 Structuralmemberssubjectedbothtobendingandaxialtensionshallbedesignedtocomplywiththe
followingformula:
f at f ab
+
ft
fb
11.7
DESIGNOFCOMMONSTEELWIRENAILJOINTS
11.7.1 General
Nailjointedtimberconstructionissuitableforlightandmediumtimberframings(trusses,etc)upto15mspans.
With the facilities of readily available materials and simpler workmanship in monochord and split chord
constructions,thistypeoffabricationhasalargescope.
11.7.2 DimensionsofMembers
11.7.2.1 Thedimensionofartindividualpieceoftimber(thatis,anysinglemember)shallbewithintherange
givenbelow:
a) Theminimumthicknessofthemainmembersinmonochordconstructionshallbe30mm.
b) Theminimumthicknessofanindividualpieceofmembersinsplitchordconstructionshall
c) Thespacebetweentwoadjacentpiecesoftimbershallberestrictedtoamaximumof3times
thethicknessoftheindividualpieceoftimberofthechordmember.Incaseofwebmembers,
itmaybegreaterforjoiningfacilities.
11.7.3 No lengthening joint shall preferably be located at a panel point. Generally not more than two, but
preferablyone,lengtheningjointshallbepermittedbetweenthetwopanelpointsofthemembers.
11.7.4 SpecificationandDiameterofNails
11.7.4.1 ThenailsusedfortimberjointsshallconformtoPart5BuildingMaterials.Thenailsshallbediamond
pointed.
11.7.4.2 Thediameterofnailshall bewithinthelimitsof oneeleventhto onesixthof theleast thicknessof
membersbeingconnected.
11.7.4.3 Wherethenailsareexposedtobesalineconditions,commonwirenailsshallbegalvanized.
11.7.5 ArrangementofNailsintheJoints
The end distances, edge distances and spacings of nails in a nailed joint should be such as to avoid undue
splittingofthewoodandshallnotbelessthanthosegivenin11.7.5.1and11.7.5.2.
6668
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
11.7.5.1 LengtheningJoints
Therequirementofspacingofnailsinalengtheningjointshallbeasfollows(seealsoFig.11.7.1):
Sl.
No.
SpacingofNails
TypeofStressinthe
Joint
Requirement
Min
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Tension
12n
Compression
10n
Tension
10n
Compression
5n
i)
Enddistance
ii)
Indirectionofgrain
iii)
Edgedistance
5n
iv)
Betweenrowofnails
5n
perpendiculartothegrain
Notes:
1.
nisshankdiameterofnails
2.
The5ndistancebetweentherowsofnailsperpendiculartothegrainmay
beincreasedsubjecttotheavailabilityofwidthofthememberkeeping
edgedistanceconstant.
11.7.5.2 NodeJoints
TherequirementforspacingofnailsinnodejointsshallbeasspecifiedinFig.11.7.2wherethemembersareat
rightangleandasinFig.11.7.3wherethemembersareinclinedtooneanotheratanglesotherthan90and
subjectedtoeitherpurecompressionorpuretension.
11.7.6 PenetrationofNails
11.7.6.1 For a lap joint when the nails are driven from the side of the thinner member, the length of
penetrationofnailsinthethickermembershallbeoneandahalftimesthethicknessofthethinner
membersubjecttomaximumofthethicknessofthethickermember.
11.7.6.2 Forbuttjointsthenailsshallbedriventhroughtheentirethicknessofthejoint.
11.7.7.1 Whereanumberofnailsareusedinajoint,theallowableloadinlateralresistanceshallbethesumof
theallowableloadsfortheindividualnails,providedthatthecentroidofthegroupofthesenailslies
ontheaxisofthememberandthespacingsconformto7.5.Wherealargenumberofnailsaretobe
providedatajoint,theyshouldbesoarrangedthattherearemoreofrowsratherthanmorenumber
ofnailsinarow.
11.7.7.2 Nailsshall,asfaraspracticable,bearrangedsothatthelineofforceinamemberpassesthroughthe
centroid of the group of nails. Where this is not practicable, allowance shall be made for any
eccentricity in computing the maximum load on the fixing nails as well as the loads and bending
momentinthemember.
11.7.7.3 Adjacentnailsshallpreferablybedrivenfromoppositefaces,thatis,thenailsaredrivenalternatively
fromeitherfaceofjoint.
6669
Part6
StructuralDesign
11.7.7.4 Forarigidjoint,aminimumof2nailsfornodaljointsand4nailsforlengtheningjointshallbedriven.
11.7.7.5 Twonailsinahorizontalrowarebetterthanusingthesamenumberofnailsinaverticalrow.
11.7.8 SpecialConsiderationinNailJointedTrussConstruction
11.7.8.1 The initial upward camber provided at the centre of the lower chord of nailjointed timber trusses
shall be not less than 1/200 of the effective span for timber structures using seasoned wood and
1/100forunseasonedorpartiallyseasonedwood.
11.7.8.2 Thetotalcombinedthicknessofthegussetorspliceplatesoneithersideofthejointinamonochord
type construction shall not be less than one and a half times the thickness of the main members
subjecttoaminimumthicknessof25mmofindividualgussetplate.
10n
5n
5n
Effective end
Distance, 10n min
10n
5n
5n
5n
5n
2A MONOCHORD TYPE BUTT JOINT SUBJECT TO COMPRESSION
10n
12n
10n
12n min
12n min
5n min
5n min
5n min
Effective end
Distance, 5n min
n = SHANK DIAMETER OF NAIL

2B MONOCHORD TYPE BUTT JOINT SUBJECT TO TENSION
Fig.11.7.1SpacingofNailsInALenghtheningJointContinued
6670
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
5n
10n
5n
Effective end
Distance, 10n min
10n min
5n min
5n min
5n min
5n min
5n min
Effective end
Distance, 5n min
2C SPLIT - CHORD TYPE BUTT JOINT SUBJECT TO COMPRESSION
10n min
12n min
10n min
12n min
Effective end
Distance, 12n min
5n min
5n min
5n min
5n min

2C SPLIT - CHORD TYPE BUTT JOINT SUBJECT TO TENSION
Effective end
Distance, 5n min
Fig.11.7.1SpacingofNailsInALenghtheningJoint
6671
Part6
StructuralDesign
5n min
5n min
Loaded
Edge
Unloaded
Edge
5n
5n
10n
5n
5n
5n
10n
5n
5n
3A
3B
5n min
10n
5n
5n
10n

*5n MAY BE INCREASED TO 10n, IF THE DESIGNED WIDTH OF
CORD MEMBER PERMITS. OTHERWISE THE END OF THE LOADED
WEB MEMBER MAY BE EXTENDED BY 5n min
3C
Fig.11.7.2SpacingOfNailsWhereMembersAreAtRightAnglesToOneAnother
6672
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
5n
5n
Loaded
Edge
Unloaded
Edge
5n
10n
5n
5n
5n
5n
5n *
10n
5n
Loaded
Edge
4A
4B
Uploaded
Edge
Timber fish
Plate
Bottom
Chord
Web
Members
5n
5n
10n
5n
10n
5n
5n
10n
10n
10n
5n
10n
5n
5n
5n
5n
4C
*5n MAY BE INCREASED TO 10n, IF THE DESIGNED WIDTH OF CHORD MEMBER PERMITS.
OTHERWISE THE END OF THE LOADED WEB MEMBER MAY BE EXTENDED BY 5n min
Fig.11.7.3SpacingOfNailsAtNodeWhereMembersAreInclinedToOneAnother
6673
Part6
StructuralDesign
11.7.8.3 Thetotalcombinedthicknessofallspacerblocksorplatesorbothincludingouterspliceplates,atany
jointinasplitchordtypeconstructionshallnotbelessthanoneandahalftimesthetotalthicknessof
allthemainmembersatthatjoint.
11.8
DESIGNOFNAILLAMINATEDTIMBERBEAMS
11.8.1 MethodofArrangement
11.8.1.1 Thebeamismadeupof20mmto30mmthickplanksplacedverticallywithjointsstaggeredinthe
adjoiningplankswithaminimumdistanceof300mm.Theplanksarelaminatedwiththehelpofwire
nails at regular intervals to take up horizontal shear developed in the beam besides keeping the
planksinposition(seeFig.11.8.1).
11.8.1.2 The advantage in laminations lies in dimensional stability, dispersal of defects and better structural
performance.
11.8.2 SizesofPlanksandBeams
11.8.2.1 Theplankthicknessforfabricationofnailedlaminatedbeamsrecommendedare20,25and30mm.
11.8.2.2 Incaseofnailedlaminatedtimberbeamthemaximumdepthandlengthofplanksshallbelimitedto
250mmand2000mm,respectively.
11.8.2.3 Inordertoobtaintheoverallwidthofthebeam,thenumberandthicknessofplankstoformvertical
nailedlaminatedbeams,andalsotypeandsizeofwirenailshallbeasmentionedinTable10.8.1.The
protrudingportionofthenailshallbecutofforclenchedacrossthegrains.
11.8.3.1 Naillaminatedbeamsshallbedesignedinaccordancewith11.6.
Table10.8.1:Numberandsizeofplanksandnailsfornailedlaminatedbeams
Sl.
No.
OverallWidth
ofBeam
No.of
Planks
(mm)
Thicknessof
eachPlank
No.andSizeof
Nailtobeused
(mm)
(mm)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
i)
50
25
80long3.55dia
ii)
60
20
do
iii)
70
(2x25)
do
(1x20)
iv)
80
20
100long4.0dia
v)
90
30
do
vi)
100
25
125long5.0dia
vii)
110
(3x30)
do
viii)
120
30
do
ix)
150
30
150long5.0dia
(1x20)
Notes:Anumberofcombinationsofdifferentthicknessofplanksmaybe
adoptedaslongastheminimumandmaximumthicknessoftheplanksare
adheredto.
6674
Vol.2
Timber
11.8.3.1.1
Chapter11
The deflection in the case of nailed laminated timber beams, joists, purlins, battens and other
flexuralmemberssupportingbrittlematerialslikegypsum,ceilingslates,tilesandasbestossheets
shall not exceed 1/480 of the span. The deflection in case of other flexural members shall not
exceed1/360ofthespaninthecaseofbeamsandjoists,and1/225ofthefreelyhanginglengthin
caseofcantilevers.
11.8.3.2 PermissiblelateralstrengthofmildsteelwirenailsshallbeasgiveninTable11.4.2andTable11.4.3
forIndianSpeciesoftimber,whichshallapplytonailsthathavetheirpointscutflushwiththefaces.
Fornailsclenchedacrossthegrainsthestrengthmaybeincreasedby20percentoverthevaluesfor
nailswithpointscutflush.
11.8.3.3 ArrangementofNails
11.8.3.3.1
Aminimumnumberoffournailsinaverticalrowatregularintervalnotexceeding75mmtotake
uphorizontalshearaswellastokeeptheplanksinpositionshallbeused.Nearthejointsofthe
planksthisdistancemay,however,belimitedto5cminsteadof75mm.
11.8.3.3.2
Shearshallbecalculatedatvariouspointsofthebeamand[henumberofnailsrequiredshallbe
accommodatedwithinthedistanceequaltothedepthofthebeam,withaminimumof4nailsina
rowatastandardspacingasshowninFig.11.8.2.
11.8.3.3.3
Ifthedepthofthebeamismore,thentheverticalintermediatespacingofnailsmaybeincreased
proportionately.
11.8.3.3.4
If the nails required at a point are more than that can be accommodated in a row, then these
shallheprovidedlengthwiseofthebeamwithinthedistanceequaltothedepthofthebeamat
standardlengthwisespacing.
11.8.3.3.5
Fornailedlaminatedbeamminimumdepthof100mmfor3.55mmand4mmdiameternails,and
125mmfor5mmdiameternailsshallbeprovided.
11.9
DESIGNOFBOLTEDCONSTRUCTIONJOINTS
11.9.1 General
Boltedjointssuittherequirementsofprefabricationinsmallandmediumspantimberstructuresforspeedand
economy in construction. Bolt jointed construction units offer better facilities as regards to workshop ease,
massproductionofcomponents,transportconvenienceandreassemblyatsiteofworkparticularlyindefence
sectorforhighaltitudesandfaroffsituations.
Designingismainlyinfluencedbythespecies,sizeofbolts,moistureconditionsandtheinclinationofloadingsto
thegrains.Inprincipleboltedjointsfollowthepatternofrivettedjointsinsteelstructures.
11.9.2.1 Boltedtimberconstructionshallbedesignedinaccordancewith6.Theconceptofcriticalsection,that
is, the net section obtained by deducting the projected area of boltholes from the crosssectional
areaofmemberisveryimportantforthesuccessfuldesignandeconomyintimber.
11.9.2.2 BoltBearingStrengthofWood
Theallowableloadforaboltinajointconsistingoftwomembers(singleshear)shallbetakenasonehalfthe
allowableloadscalculatedforathreememberjoint(doubleshear)forthesamet/d3ratio.Thepercentageof
safeworkingcompressive stressoftimber onbolted joints fordifferent t/d3 ratios shall be as given in Table
11.9.1.
6675
Part6
StructuralDesign
4000
800
1600
1600
1200
1200
1600
800
1600
400
1600
1600
400
100
1600
25mm THICK TIMBER PLANKS
4 @ 75mm = 300mm
25
175
25
50
25 CAMBER
All dimensions in millimetres.
Fig.11.8.1PlanAndElevationOfATypicalNailedLaminatedTimberBeam
6676
Vol.2
Chapter11
20 20 20 20 20
100
Timber
50
75
75
25
25
25
125
25
25
6A FOR 3.55 mm AND 4 mm DIAMETER NAILS
50
75
75
6B FOR 5 mm DIAMETER NAILS

All dimensions in millimetres.
FIG.11.8.2StandardLengthwiseSpacingInNailedLaminatedBeam
11.9.2.2.1
Whereanumberofboltsareusedinajoint,theallowableloadsshallbethesumoftheallowableloadsforthe
individualbolts.
11.9.2.2.2
he factors for different bolt diameter used in calculating safe bearing stress perpendicular to grain in the joint
shallbeasgiveninTable11.9.2.
11.9.2.3 DimensionsofMembers
a) Theminimumthicknessofthemainmemberinmonochordconstructionshallbe40mm.
b) Theminimumthicknessofsidemembersshallbe20mmandshallbehalfthethicknessofmain
members.
c) Theminimumindividualthicknessofspacedmemberinsplitchordconstructionshallbe20mm
and25mmforwebsandchordmembersrespectively.
11.9.2.4 BoltsandBolting
a) Thediameterofboltinthemainmembershallbesochosentogivelargerslenderness(t/d3)
ratioofbolt.
b) Thereshallbemorenumberofsmalldiameterboltsratherthansmallnumberoflargediameter
boltsinajoint.
c) Aminimumoftwoboltsfornodaljointsandfourboltsforlengtheningjointsshallbeprovided.
d) Thereshallbemorenumberofrowsratherthanmoreboltsinarow.
e) Theboltholesshallbeofsuchdiameterthattheboltcanbedriveneasily.
f) Washersshallbeusedbetweentheheadofboltandwoodsurfaceasalsobetweenthenutand
wood.
11.9.3 ArrangementofBolts
11.9.3.1 Thefollowingspacinginboltedjointsshallbefollowed(seeFig.11.9.1):
6677
Part6
StructuralDesign
a) SpacingofBoltsinaRowForparallelandperpendiculartograinloading=4d3
b) SpacingBetweenRowsofBolts
Table11.9.1:Percentageofsafeworkingcompressivestressoftimberforboltedjointsindoubleshear
t//d3ratio
StressPercentage
Parallelto
Perpendicularto
Grain
Grain
(1)
(2)
(3)
1.0
100
100
1.5
100
96
2.0
100
88
2.5
100
80
3.0
100
72
3.5
100
66
4.0
96
60
4.5
90
56
5.0
80
52
5.5
72
49
6.0
65
46
6.5
58
43
7.0
52
40
7.5
46
39
8.0
40
38
8.5
36
36
9.0
34
34
9.5
32
33
10.0
30
31
10.5
31
11.0
30
11.5
30
12.0
28
1) Forperpendiculartograinloading2.5d3,to5d3(2.5d3,fort/d3,ratioof2and5d3fort/d3ratioof6or
more.Forratiosbetween2to6thespacingshallbeobtainedbyinterpolation.
2) For parallel to grain loading At least (N 4) d3, with a minimumof 2.5 d3. Also governed by net areaat
criticalsectionwhichshouldbe80percentofthetotalareainbearingunderallbolts.
c) EndDistance7d3forsoftwoodsintension,5d3forhardwoodsintensionand4d3forall
speciesincompression.
d) EdgeDistance
1) Forparalleltograinloading1.5d3orhalfthedistancebetweenrowsofbolts,whicheverisgreater.
2) Forperpendiculartograinloading,(loadededgedistance)shallbeatleast4d3.
11.9.3.2 Forinclinedmembers,thespacinggivenaboveforperpendicularandparalleltograinofwoodmaybe
usedasaguideandboltsarrangedatthejointwithrespecttoloadingdirection.
6678
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
11.9.3.3 Theboltsshallbearrangedinsuchamannersoastopassthecentreofresistanceofboltsthroughthe
intersectionofthegravityaxisofthemembers.
11.9.3.4 Staggering of bolts shall be avoided as far as possible in case of members loaded parallel to grain of
wood.Forloadsactingperpendiculartograinofwood,staggeringispreferabletoavoidsplittingdueto
weathereffects.
Table11.9.2:Boltdiameterfactor
Sl.No.
DiameterofBolt
DiameterFactor
(mm)
(dr)
(2)
(3)
(1)
i)
5.70
ii)
10
3.60
iii)
12
3.35
iv)
16
3.15
v)
20
3.05
vi)
22
3.00
vii)
25
2.90
11.9.3.5 Bolting
Theboltholesshallbeboredordrilledperpendiculartothesurfaceinvolved.Forcibledrivingoftheboltsshallbe
avoidedwhichmaycausecrackingorsplittingofmembers.Aboltholeof1.0mmoversizemaybeusedasaguide
forpreboring.
11.9.3.5.1
Boltsshallbetightenedafteroneyearofcompletionofstructureandsubsequentlyatanintervalof
twotothreeyears.
11.9.4 OutlineforDesignofBoltedJoints
Allowable load on one bolt (unit bearing stress) in a joint with wooden splice plates shall not be greater than
valueofP,R,Fasdeterminedbyoneofthefollowingequations:
a) ForLoadsParalleltoGrain
11.10
P = f cp a1
b) ForLoadsPerpendiculartoGrain
R = f cp a2 d f
c) ForLoadsatanAngletoGrain
F=
PR
P sin + R cos 2
2
DESIGNOFTIMBERCONNECTORJOINTS
11.10.1
Inlargespanstructures,themembershavetotransmitveryheavystressesrequiringstrongerjointingtechniques
with metallic rings or wooden discdowels. Improvised metallic ring connector is a split circular band of steel
madefrommildsteelpipes.Thisisplacedinthegroovescutintothecontactfacesofthetimbermemberstobe
joined,theassemblybeingheldtogetherbymeansofaconnectingbolt.
11.10.1.1 Dimensions of Members Variation of thickness of central (main) and side members affect the load
carryingcapacityofthejoint.
6679
Part6
StructuralDesign
HEAD
HEXAGONAL
LENGTH OF BOLT
d3
WASHER
4d 3
B
NUT
A
B
4d 3
UNLOADED
EDGE
2d 3min.
4d 3
4d
7d
4d
7d
LOADED
EDGE
1.5d 3 min
1.5d3 min
2.5 d3 for t/d3 RATIO 2
5 d3 for t/d3 RATIO 6

B
LOADED
EDGE
7A SPACING OF BOLTS IN LENTHENING JOINTS

(JOINTS LOADED PARALLEL TO GRAIN)
4d 3
4d 3
2d 3 min.
UNLOADED
EDGE
1.5d3 min
1.5d3 min
2.5 d3 for t/d3 ratio 2
5 d3 for t/d3 ratio 6
7B SPACING OF BOLTS AT NODE JOINTS
Fig.11.9.1TypicalSpacingOfBoltsInStructuralJoints
Thethicknessofmainmembershallbeatleast57mmandthatofsidemember38mmwithlengthand
widthfmembersgovernedbyplacementofconnectoratjoint.
Themetallicconnectorshallbesoplacedthattheloadededgedistanceisnotlessthanthediameterof
theconnectorandtheenddistancenotlessthan1.75timesthediameterontheloadedside.
6680
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
11.10.1.2 DesignConsiderations
Figure 11.10.1 illustrates the primary stresses in a split ring connector joint under tension. The shaded areas
representthepartofwoodinshear,compressionandtension.RelatedformulaeforthesameareindicatedinFig.
11.10.1.
For fabrication of structural members, a hole of the required size of the bolt is drilled into the member and a
grooveismadeonthecontactfacesofthejoint.
SPLIT RING CONNECTOR
t1
d1
d2
b
a/2
t 1- a
t2
d2
W
t2
a/2
Fig.11.10.1StressDistributionInASplitRingConnector
11.10.2 WoodenDiscDowel
11.10.2.1 It is a circular hardwood disc general] y tapered each way from the middle so as to form a double
conicalfrustum.Suchadiscismadetofitintopreformedholes(recesses),halfinonememberandthe
otherhalfinanother,theassemblybeingheldbyonemildsteelboltthroughthecentreofthediscto
actasacouplingforkeepingthejointedwoodenmembersfromspreadingapart.
11.10.2.2 DimensionsofMembers
Thethicknessofdowelmayvaryfrom25mmto35mmantidiameterfrom50mmto150mm.Thediameterof
dowelshallbe3.25to3.50timesthethickness.
Theedgeclearanceshallrangefrom12mmto20mmasperthesizeofthedowel.Theendclearanceshallbeat
least equal to the diameter of dowel for joints subjected to tension and threefourth the diameter for
compressionjoints.Discdowelshallbeturnedfromquartersawnplanksofseasonedmaterial.
6681
Part6
StructuralDesign
11.10.2.3 ChoiceofSpecies
Woodusedformakingdowelsshallbefairlystraightgrained,freefromexcessiveliabilitytoshrinkandwarp,and
retainshapewellafterseasoningspeciesrecommendedinclude:
Babul
Sissoo
Pyinkado
Yon
NOTE Data on the above species as per Table 11.4.1 except for the species Pyinkado, which is not an
indigenousspecies.
11.10.2.4 DesignConsiderations
Figure11.10.2illustratestheforcesondowelinalapjointandbuttjoint.Dowelissubjectedtoshearingatthe
midsection, and compression along the grain at the bearing surfaces. For equal strength in both the forces,
formulaequationsaregiveninFig.11.10.2todeterminethesizeofdowel.
Themakingofwoodendiscsmaypresentsomeproblemsinthefield,buttheymaybemadeinsmallworkshopto
thespecificationsofthedesigner.Thisisalsoeconomicallyimportant.Oncethewoodfittingsareshoptailored
andmade,theconstructionprocessinthefieldisgreatlysimplified.
Theoreticalsafeloadsindesignshallbeconfirmedthroughsampletests.
11.11
GLUEDLAMINATEDCONSTRUCTIONANDFINGERJOINTS
11.11.1 Developments in the field of synthetic adhesive have brought glueing techniques within the range of
engineeringpractice.Timbermembersoflargercrosssectionsandlonglengthscanbefabricatedfrom
smallsizedplanksbytheprocessofgluelam.Thetermgluedlaminatedtimberconstructionasappliedto
structuralmembersreferstovariouslaminationsgluedtogether,eitherinstraightorcurvedform,having
grainofalllaminationsessentiallyparalleltothelengthsofthemember.
11.11.1.1 ChoiceofGlue
Theadhesiveusedforgluedlaminatedassemblyaregapfillingtype.Afillerinpowderformisintroducedinthe
adhesive. Structural adhesives are supplied either in powder form to which water is added or in resin form to
which a hardener or catalyst is added. However, it is important that only boiling water proof (BWP) grade
adhesivesshallbeusedforfabricationofgluelamintropical,highhumidclimateslikeIndia.
11.11.1.2 ManufacturingSchedule
In absence of a systematic flowline in a factory, provisions of intermediate technology shall be created for
manufacturingstructuralelements.Thescheduleinvolvessteps:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Dryingofplanks;
Planning;
Endjointingbyscarfsorfingers;
Machiningoflaminations;
Settingupdryassemblyofstructuralunit;
Applicationofglue;
Assemblyandpressingthelaminations;
Curingthegluelines,asspecified;and
Finishing,protectionandstorage.
11.11.2
Fingerjointsaregluedjointsconnectingtimbermembersendtoend(Fig.11.11.1).Suchjointsshallbeproduced
bycuttingprofiles(taperedprojections)intheformofVshapedgroovestotheendsoftimberplanksorscantling
tobejoined,glueingtheinterfacesandthenmeetingthetwoendstogetherunderpressure.Fingerjointsprovide
long lengths of timber, ideal for upgrading timber by permitting removal of defects, minimizing warping and
reducingwastagebyavoidingshortoffcuts.
6682
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
DOWEL
LAP JOINT
BUTT JOINT
LapJoint:Boltinsimpletensionduetoclockwiseturningmomentondowel:
ButtJoint:Notiltingmomentindowelduetobalancingeffect[dowelsareinshear(nobending,shearing
andtensilestressonbolts)]
Sizeofdowelforequalstrengthinbothshearingandbearing.
d 2
t
S = d c
4
2
Where
d=Middiameterofthedowel
t=Thicknessofdowel
s=Safeworkingstressinshearalonggrain,and
c=Safecompressivestressalonggrain.
NOTESymbolsareexclusiveinthisfigure.
Fig.11.10.2DistributionOfForcesInDoewlJoint
11.11.2.1 Infingerjointsthegluedsurfacesareonthesidegrainratherthanontheendgrainandthegluelineis
stressedinshearratherintension.
11.11.2.1.1 The figures can be cut from edgetoedge or from facetoface. The difference is mainly in
appearance, although bending strength increases if several fingers share the load. Thus a joist is
slightly stronger with edgetoedge finger joints and a plank is stronger with facetoface finger
joint.
11.11.2.1.2 For structural finger jointed members for interior dry locations, adhesives based on melamine
formaldehyde cross linked polyvinyl acetate (PVA) are suited. For high humid and exterior
conditions, phenol formaldehyde and resorcinol formaldehyde type adhesives are recommended.
Properadhesivesshouldbeselectedinconsultationwiththedesignerandadhesivemanufacturers.
11.11.2.2 ManufacturingProcess
In the absence of sophisticated machinery, the finger joints shall be manufactured through intermediate
technologywiththefollowingsteps:
6683
Part6
StructuralDesign
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Dryingofwood,
Removalofknotsandotherdefects,
Squaringtheendsofthelaminatingplanks,
Cuttingtheprofileoffingerjointintheendgrain,
Applyingadhesivesonthefingerinterfaces,
Pressingthejointtogetheratspecifiedpressure,
Curingofadhesivelineatspecifiedtemperature,and
Planningoffingerjointedplanksforsmoothsurface.
11.11.2.3 Strength
Strengthoffingerjointsdependsuponthegeometryoftheprofileforstructuralpurpose;thisisgenerally50mm
long,12mmpitch.
11.11.2.3.1 End joints shall be scattered in adjacent laminations, which shall not be located in very highly
stressedouterlaminations.
11.11.2.4 Tipthicknesswillbeassmallaspracticallypossible.
TIP GAP
L
L = FINGER LENGTH
P = PITCH
t = TIP THICKNESS
e = 6
ORIENTATION OF FINGER JOINTS
Fig.11.11.1TypicalFingerJointGeometry
6684
Vol.2
Timber
11.12
Chapter11
LAMINATEDVENEERLUMBER
11.12.1 Certain reconstituted lignocellulosic products with fibre oriented along a specific direction have been
developed and are being adopted for load bearing applications. Laminated veneer lumber is one such
productdevelopedasaresultofresearchesinplantationgrownspeciesofwood.Densityoflaminated
veneerlumberrangesfrom0.6to0.75.
11.12.1.1 Dimensions
Sizes of laminated veneer lumber composite shall be inclusive of margin for dressing and finishing unless
manufacturedtoorder.Themarginfordressingandfinishingshallnotexceed3mminthewidthandthickness
and12mminthelength.
11.12.1.2 PermissibleDefects
Jointing gaps Not more than 3 mm wide, provided they are well staggered in their spacing and position
betweenthesuccessiveplies.
SlopeofgrainNotexceeding1in10inthefacelayers.
TightknotThreenumbersupto25mmdiameterinonesquaremetreprovidedtheyarespaced300mmor
moreapart.
WarpNotexceeding1.5mmpermetrelength.
11.12.1.3 StrengthRequirements
ThestrengthrequirementsforlaminatedveneerlumbershallbeasperTable11.12.1.
Table11.12.1:Requirementsoflaminatedveneerlumber
Sl.No.
Properties
Requirement
(1)
(2)
(3)
i)
50
ii)
Modulusofelasticity(N/mm ),Min
iii)
Compressivestrength:
iv)
a)
b)
7500
Paralleltograin(N/mm ),Min
2
Perpendiculartograin(N/mm ),Min
Horizontalshear:
35
50
a)
Paralleltolaminac(N/mm ),Min
b)
Perpendiculartolaminac(N/mm2),Min
v)
Tensilestrengthparalleltograin(N/mm2),Min
vi)
Screwholdingpower:
6
8
55
a)
Edge(N),Min
2300
b)
Face(N),Min
2700
vii)
11.13
Modulusofrupture(N/mm ),Min
Thicknessswellingin2hwatersoaking(percent),Max
DESIGNOFGLUEDLAMINATEDBEAMS
11.13.1 General
Glued laminated structural members shall be fabricated only where there are adequate facilities for accurate
sizing and surfacing of planks, uniform application of glue, prompt assembly, and application of adequate
pressure and prescribed temperature for setting and curing of the glue. Design and fabrication shall be in
accordance with established engineering principles and good practice. A glued laminated beam is a straight
membermadefromanumberoflaminationsassembledbothwayseitherhorizontallyorvertically.Whilevertical
6685
Part6
StructuralDesign
laminations have limitations in restricting the crosssection of a beam by width of the plank, horizontally
laminatedsectionofferswiderscopetothedesignerincreatingeventhecurvedmembers.
Simplestraightbeamsandjoistsareusedformanystructuresfromsmalldomesticraftersorridgestothelight
industrialstructures.
11.13.2 Design
Thedesignofgluelaminatedwoodelementsshallbeinaccordancewithgoodengineeringpracticeandshalltake
intoconsiderationthespeciesandgradeoftimberused,presenceofdefects,locationofendjointsinlaminations,
depthofbeamsandmoisturecontentsexpectedwhileinservice.Beamsoflargespansshallbedesignedwitha
suitable camber toassist in achieving themost cost effective section where deflectiongovernsthe design. The
strengthandstiffnessoflaminatedbeamsisoftengovernedbythequalityofouterlaminations.Gluedlaminated
beamscanbetaperedtofollowspecificroofslopesacrossabuildingand/ortocommensuratewiththevarying
bendingmoments.
11.13.3 Material
Laminatingboardsshallnotcontaindecay,knotsorotherstrengthreducingcharacteristicsinexcessofthosesizes
oramountspermittedbyspecifications.Themoisturecontentshallapproachthatexpectedinserviceandshallin
nocaseexceed15percentatthetimeofglueing.Themoisturecontentofindividuallaminationsinastructural
member shall not differ by more than 3 percent at the time of glueing. Glue shall be of type suitable for the
intendedserviceofastructuralmember.
11.13.4 Fabrication/Manufacture
Inordertoassureawellbondedandwellfinishedmemberoftrueshapeandsize,allequipments,endJointing,
glue spread, assembly, pressing, curing or any other operation in connection with the manufacture of glued
structural members shall be in accordance with the available good practices and as per glue manufacturers
instructionsasapplicable.
11.14
STRUCTURALUSEOFPLYWOOD
Unlike sawn timber, plywood is a layered panel product comprising veneers of wood bonded together with
adjacent layers usually at right angles. As wood is strongest when stressed parallel to grain, and weak
perpendicularto grain, thelay up orarrangement of veneersinthepanel determines itsproperties. When the
facegrainoftheplywoodisparalleltothedirectionofstress,veneersparalleltothefacegraincarryalmostall
theload.Someinformation/guidelinesforstructuraluseofplywoodaregivenin11.14.1to11.14.3.
11.14.1 Theplywoodhasahighstrengthtoweightratio,andisdimensionallystablematerialavailableinsheets
ofanumberofthicknessesandconstruction.Plywoodcanbesawn,drilledandnailedwithordinarywood
workingtools.Thegluesusedtobondtheseveneerstogetherarederivedfromsyntheticresinswhichare
setandcuredbyheating.Thepropertiesofadhesivescandeterminethedurabilityofplywood.
11.14.2 Ingluedplywoodconstruction,structuralplywoodisgluedtotimberresultinginhighlyefficientandlight
structuralcomponentslikewebbeams(Iandboxsections),(Fig.11.15.1andFig.11.15.2)stressedskin
panels(Fig.11.15.3)usedforflooringandwallingandprefabricatedhouses,cabins,etc.
WOODEN FLANGE
(TYPICAL)
PLYWOOD
WEB
PLYWOOD
WEB
I - SECTION
DOUBLE - I
PLYWOOD
BOX
Fig.11.15.1TypicalCrossSectionOfWebBeams
6686
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
Glueingcanbecarriedoutbynailglueingtechniqueswithspecialclamps.Highshearstrengthofplywood
incombinationwithhighflexuralstrengthandstiffnessofwoodresultinstructurescharacterizedbyhigh
stiffness for even medium spares. Plywood can act as web transmitting shear stress in web bearing or
stressedskinorsandwichconstruction.Theeffectivemomentofinertiaofwebbeamandstressedskin
constructiondependsonmodularratiothatis,EofwoodtoEofplywood.
11.14.3 Structuralplywoodisalsoveryefficientascladdingmaterialinwoodframeconstruction,suchashouses.
Thistype ofsheathing is capable of resistingrackingdue to wind and quackforces. Structuralplywood
hasbeenwidelyusedasdiaphragm(horizontal)asinroofingandflooringintimberframeconstruction.It
hasbeenestablishedthat6mmthickplywoodcanbeusedforsheathingandevenforwebandstressed
skin construction, 912 mm thick plywood is suitable for beams, flooring diaphragms, etc. Phenol
formaldehyde(PF)andPRFadhesivearesuitableforfabricationofgluedplywoodcomponents.6mm12
mm thick structural plywood can be very well used as nailed or bolded gussets in fixing members of
trussesorlatticegridersortrussedrafters.
Normally,scarfjointsareusedforfixingplywoodtorequiredlengthandtimbercanbejoinedbyusing
eitherfingerorscarfjoints.Archpanels,foldedplates,shelvesareotherpossibilitieswiththistechnique.
11.15
TRUSSEDRAFTER
11.15.1 General
Arooftrussisessentiallyaplanestructurewhichisverystiffintheplaneofthemembers,thatis,theplanein
which it is expected to carry loads, but very flexible in every other direction. Thus it can virtually be seen as a
deep, narrow girder liable to buckling and twisting under loads. In order, therefore, to reduce this effect,
eccentricity of loading and promote prefabrication for economy, lowpitched trussed rafters are designed with
boltply/nailplyjoints.Plywoodasgussets,besidesbeingsimplehaveinherentconstructionaladvantageofgrain
over solid wood for joints, and a better balance is achievable between the joint strength and the member
strength.
Trussedraftersarelightweighttrussunitsspacedatclosecentresforlimitedspanstocarrydifferenttypesofroof
loads.Theyaremadefromtimbermembersofuniformthicknessfastenedtogetherinoneplane.Theplywood
gussetsmaybenailedorgluedtothetimbertoformthejoints.Conceptuallyatrussedrafterisatriangularpin
jointedsystem,traditionallymeanttocarrythecombinedroofweight,claddingservicesandwindloads.Thereis
considerable scope for saving timber by minimizing the sections through proper design without affecting
structuralandfunctionalrequirements.
Trussedraftersrequiretobesupportedonlyattheirendssothatthereisnoneedtoprovideloadbearinginternal
walls, Purlins,etc are dispensed with and incomparison with traditionalmethods of constructiontheyuseless
timber and considerably reduces of site labour, Mass production or reliable units can be carried out under
workshopcontrols.
11.15.2 Design
Trussed rafter shall be designed to sustain the dead and imposed loads specified in Part 6 Structural Design:
Chapter2LoadsonBuildingsandStructuresandthecombinationsexpectedtooccur.Extrastresses/deflections
during handling, transportation and erection shall be taken care of. Structural analysis, use of loadslip and
moment,rotationcharacteristicsoftheindividualjointsmaybeusediffeasible.Alternativelythemaximumdirect
forceinamembermaybeassessedtobegivenbyanidealizedpinjointedframework,fullyloadedwithmaximum
deadandimposedloadinthecombinationinwhichtheymayreasonablybeexpectedtooccur.
11.15.3 Timber
Thespeciesoftimberincludingplantationgrownspecieswhichcanbeusedfortrussedrafterconstructionand
permissible stresses thereof shall be in accordance with Table 11.4.1. Moisture contents to be as per zonal
requirementsinaccordancewith11.4.4.
11.15.4 Plywood
Boilingwaterresistant(BWR)gradepreservativetreatedplywoodshallbeused.Introductionofaplywoodgusset
simplifies the jointing and in addition provides rigidity to the joint. Preservation of plywood and other panel
6687
Part6
StructuralDesign
products shall be done in accordance with good practice prescribed by Bangladesh Forest Research Institute,
Chittagong.
STIFFNER
WOODEN
FLANGE
PLYWOOD
SECTION XX
SPAN UPTO 6 - 9m
STRAIGHT
SPAN UPTO 9m
DOUBLE TAPERD
SPAN UPTO 9m
HAUNCHED
Fig.11.15.2WebBeamConfigurations
UPPER SKIN
WEBS
BLOCKING
LOWER SKIN
Fig.11.15.3StressedSkinPanelConstruction(SingleSkinOrDoubleSkin)
6688
Vol.2
Timber
11.16
Chapter11
STRUCTURALSANDWICHES
11.16.1 General
Sandwichconstructionsarecompositesofdifferentmaterialsincludingwoodbasedmaterialsformedbybonding
two thin facings of high strength material to a light weight core which provides a combination of desirable
properties that are not attainable with the individual constituent materials (Fig. 11.16.1). The thin facings are
usuallyofstrongdensematerialsincethataretheprincipalloadcarryingmembersoftheconstruction.Thecore
mustbestiffenoughtoensurethefacesremainatthecorrectdistanceapart.Thesandwichesusedasstructural
elementsinbuildingconstructionshallbeadequatelydesignedfortheirintendedservicesandshallbefabricated
onlywherethereareadequatefacilitiesforglueingorotherwisebondingcorestofacingstoensureastrongand
durableproduct.Theentireassemblyprovidesastructuralelementofhighstrengthandstiffnessinproportionto
itsmass.
Nonstructural advantages can also be derived by proper selection of facing and core material for example, an
impermeablefacingscanbeusedtoserveasamoisturebarrierforwallsandroofpanelsandcoremayalsobe
selectedtoprovidethermaland/oracousticinsulation,fireresistance,etc,besidesthedimensionalstability.
CO
FACE SHEETS
RE
E
AT
R IA
ADHESIVE
Fig.11.16.1:Sandwitchconstructioninstructuralapplications
11.16.2 Cores
Sandwichcoresshallbeofsuchcharacteristicsastogivetotherequiredlateralsupporttothestressedfacingsto
sustainortransmittheassumedloadsorstresses.Coregenerallycarriesshearingloadsandtosupportthethin
facingsduetocompressiveloads.Coreshallmaintainthestrengthanddurabilityundertheconditionsofservice
forwhichtheiruseisrecommended.AmaterialwithlowEandsmallshearmodulusmaybesuitable.
11.16.3 Facings
Facingsshallhavesufficientstrengthandrigiditytoresiststressesthatmaycomeuponthemwhenfabricatedinto
a sandwich construction. They shall be thick enough to carry compressive and tensile stresses and to resist
punctureordentingthatmaybeexpectedinnormalusages.
6689
Part6
StructuralDesign
11.16.4 Designing
Structural designing may be comparable to the design of Ibeams, the facings of the sandwich represent the
flangesoftheIbeamandthesandwichcoreIbeamweb.
11.16.5 Tests
Testsshallinclude,asapplicable,oneormoreofthefollowing:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
11.17
Flexuralstrengtldstiffness,
Edgewisecompressions,
Flatwisecompression,
Shearinflatwiseplane,
Flatwisetensions,
Flexuralcreep(creepbehaviourofadhesive),
Cantilevervibrations(dynamicproperty),and
Weatheringfordimensionalstability.
LAMELLAROOFING
11.17.1 General
The Lamella roofing offers an excellent architectural edifice in timber, amenable to prefabrication, light weight
structure with high central clearance. It is essentially an arched structure formed by a system of intersecting
skewedarchesbuiltupofrelativelyshorttimberplanksofuniformlengthandcrosssection.Roofisdesignedasa
two hinged arch with a depth equal to the depth of an individual lamella and width equal to the span of the
building. The curved lamellas (planks) are bevelled and bored at the ends and bolted together at an angle,
forming a network (grid) pattern of mutually braced and stiffened members (Fig. 11.17.1). The design shall be
basedonthebalancedorunbalancedassumedloaddistributionusedforroofarches.Effectofdeformationorslip
ofjointsunderloadontheinducedstressesshallbeconsideredindesign.Thrustcomponentsinbothtransverse
andlongitudinaldirectionsofthebuildingduetoskewnessofthelamellaarchshallbeadequatelyresisted.Thrust
at lamella joints shall be resisted by the moment of inertia in the continuous lamella and roof sheathening
(decking)oflamellaroofing.Theinteractionofarchesintwodirectionsaddstothestrengthandstabilityagainst
horizontal forces. For design calculations several assumption tested and observed derivations, longduration
loadingfactors,seasoningadvantagesandeffectsofdefectsaretakenintoaccount.
11.17.2 Lamellas
Planking shall be of a grade of timber that is adequate in strength and stiffness to sustain the assumed loads,
forces,thrustandbendingmomentsgeneratedinLamellaroofing.Lamellaplanksshallbeseasonedtoamoisture
content approximating that they will attain in service. Lamella joints shall be proportioned so that allowable
stresses at bearings of the noncontinuous lamellas on the continuous Iamellas or bearings under the head or
washerofboltsarenotexceeded.
11.17.3 Construction
DesignandconstructionoflamellaroofsinIndiaassumestheroofsurfacestobecylindricalwitheveryindividual
lamella an elliptic segment of an elliptical arch of constant curved length but of different curvature. Lamella
constructionisthusmoreofanartthanscienceasthereisnoanalyticalmethodavailablefortruegenerationof
schedule of cutting lengths and curvature of curved members forming the lamella grid. Dependence of an
engineeronthepracticalingenuityofmastercarpenterisalmostfinal.Allthelamellajointsshallbeaccuratelycut
andfittedtogivefullbearingwithoutexcessivedeformationorslip.Boltsatlamellasplicesshallbeadequateto
holdthe members intheir proper position andshall not be over tightened tocause bendingofthe lamellas or
mashingofwoodundertheboltheads.Connectionoflamellastotheendarchesshallbeadequatetotransmit
thethrustoranyotherforce.Sufficientfalseworkorslidingjigshallbeprovidedforthesupportoflamellaroof
duringactualconstruction/erection.
6690
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
LAMELLA GRID
WIND BLOCK
LAMELLA
NODAL JOINT
BRESSUMMER
LAMELLS GRID
MIDDLE LAMELLA
OUTER LAMELLA
H
38 to 42
I
OUTER
LAMELLA
BOLT
r
V
LAMELLA NODAL JOINT
LOAD REACTION DIAGRAM

Fig.11.17.1:TypicalarrangementofLamellaroofing
6691
Part6
StructuralDesign
11.18
NAILANDSCREWHOLDINGPOWEROFTIMBER
11.18.1 General
Oneof themostcommonwaysofjoiningtimberpiecestooneanotherisbymeansofcommonwirenailsand
wood screws. Timber is used for structural and nonstructural purposes inform of scantlings, rafters, joists,
boarding,cratingandpackingcases,etcneedingsuitablemethodsofjoiningthem.Neverthelessitisthetimber
whichholdsthenailsorscrewsandassuchpullingofthenails/screwsisthechieffactorwhichcomeintoplay
predominantly.Instructuralnailedjoints,nailsareessentiallyloadedlaterally,thedesigndataforwhichisalready
availableasstandardcodeofpractice.Dataonholdingpowerofnails/screwsindifferentspeciesisalsousefulfor
common commercial purposes. The resistance of mechanical fastenings is a function of the specific gravity of
wood, direction of penetration with respect to the grain direction, depth of penetration and the diameter of
fastenerassumingthatthespacingoffastenersshouldbeadequatetoprecludesplittingofwood.
11.18.2 Nails
Nailsareprobablythemostcommonandfamiliarfastener.Theyareofmanytypesandsizesinaccordancewith
theacceptedstandards[63A(16)].
Ingeneralnailsgivestrongerjointswhendrivenintothesidegrainofwoodthanintotheendgrain.Nailsperform
bestwhenloadedlaterallyascomparedtoaxialwithdrawalsothenailedjointsshouldbedesignedforlateralnail
bearinginstructuraldesign.Informationonwithdrawalresistanceofnailsisavailableandjointsmaybedesigned
forthatkindofloadingasandwhennecessary.
11.18.3 Screw
Nexttothehammerdrivennails,thewoodscrewmaybethemostcommonlyusedfastener.Woodscrewsare
seldomusedinstructuralworkbecauseoftheirprimaryadvantageisinwithdrawalresistance,forexample,for
fixing of ceiling boards to joists, purlin cleats, besides the door hinges etc. They are of considerable structural
importanceinfixturedesignandmanufacture.Woodscrewsaregenerallyfinishedinavarietyofheadshapesand
manufacturedinvariouslengthsfordifferentscrewdiametersorgauges.
Thewithdrawalresistanceofwoodscrewsisafunctionofscrewdiameter,lengthofengagementofthethreaded
portion into the member, and the specific gravity of the species of wood. Withdrawal load capacity of wood
screwsareavailableforsomespeciesandjointsmaybedesignedaccordingly.Endgrainloadonwoodscrewsare
unreliableandwoodscrewsshallnotbeusedforthatpurpose.
11.19
PROTECTIONAGAINSTTERMITEATTACKINBUILDINGS
11.19.1 Two groups of organisms which affect the mechanical and aesthetic properties of wood in houses are
fungiandinsects.Themostimportantwooddestroyinginsectsbelongtotermitesandbeetles.Ofabout
250speciesofwooddestroyingtermitesrecordedinIndia,notmorethanadozenspeciesattackbuilding
causingabout90percentofthedamagetotimberandothercellulosicmaterials.Subterraneantermites
arethemostdestructiveoftheinsectsthatinfestwoodinhousesjustifyingpreventionmeasurestobe
incorporatedinthedesignandconstructionofbuildings.
11.19.1.1 Control measures consist in isolating or sealing off the building from termites by chemical and non
chemicalconstructiontechniques.Itisrecognizedthat95percentdamageisduetointernaltravelof
the termites from ground upwards rather than external entry through entrance thus calling upon for
appropriatecontrolmeasuresinaccordancewithgoodpractices[63A(18)].
11.19.2 ChemicalMethods
Termitesliveinsoilinlargecoloniesanddamagethewoodenstructureinthebuildingsbyeatingupthewoodor
buildingnestsinthewood.Poisoningthesoilunderandaroundthebuildingisanormalrecommendedpractice.
Sprayingofchemicalsolutioninthetrenchesoffoundationsinandaroundwalls,areasunderfloorsbeforeand
afterfillingofearth,etc.Inalreadyconstructedbuildingthetreatmentcanbegivenbydiggingtrenchesallaround
thebuildingandthengivingaliberaldoseofchemicalsandthenclosingthetrenches.
6692
Vol.2
Timber
Chapter11
11.19.3 WoodPreservatives
Natural resistance against organisms of quite a few wood species provides durability of timber without special
protection measure. It is a property of heartwood while sapwood is normally always susceptible to attack by
organisms.Preservativesshouldbewellappliedwithsufficientpenetrationintotimber.Forengineers,architects
andbuilders,thefollowingareprimeconsiderationsforchoiceofpreservatives:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Inflammabilityoftreatedtimberisnotincreasedandmechanicalpropertiesarenotdecreased;
Compatibilitywiththeglueinlaminatedwood,plywoodandboardmaterial;
Waterrepellenteffectispreferred;
Possiblesuitabilityforprimingcoat;
Possibilityofpaintingandotherfinishes;
Noncorrosivenaturefasteners;and
Influenceonplastics,incaseofmetalrubber,tilesandconcrete.
11.19.4 ConstructionalMethod
Protectionagainstpotentialproblemof termiteattackcansimplybecarriedoutbyordinarygoodconstruction
whichpreventsacolonyfromgainingaccessby:
a) periodicvisualobservationsontermitegalleriestobebrokenoff;
b) speciallyformedandproperlyinstalledmetalshieldatplinthlevel;and
c) continuousfloorslabs,apronfloorsandtermitegroovesonperipheryofbuildings.
6693
Chapter 12
FerrocementStructures
12.1
SCOPE
Thischaptercoversselection,standardsandtestingofferrocementmaterials,designcriteriaandapproaches,
constructionmethods,andmaintenanceandrepairproceduresofferrocementstructures.Theprovisionsofthis
chapter are consistent with those of Chapter 6, except for the special requirements of ferrocement, such as
reinforcementcoverandlimitsondeflection.
12.2
TERMINOLOGY
12.2.1 ReinforcementParameters
Forthepurposeofthischapter,thefollowingparameterscharacterizingthereinforcementinferrocementshall
havethedefinitionsgiven:
VOLUME FRACTION OF REINFORCEMENT (Vf): Volume fraction of reinforcement is the total volume of
reinforcementdividedbythevolumeofcomposite(reinforcementandmatrix).Foracompositereinforcedwith
meshes with square openings, Vf shall be equally divided into Vfl and Vft for the longitudinal and transverse
directions,respectively.Forothertypesofreinforcement,suchasexpandedmetal,VflandVftmaybeunequal.
ProceduresforcomputationofVfareshowninAppendix6.12.A.
SPECIFICSURFACEOFREINFORCEMENT(Sr):Sristhetotalbondedareaofreinforcement(interfaceareaorarea
ofthesteelthatcomesincontactwiththemortar)dividedbythevolumeofthecomposite.
Foraferrocementplateofwidthbanddepthh,thespecificsurfaceofreinforcementcanbecomputedfrom
Sr =
o
bh
12.2.1
inwhich o isthetotalsurfaceareaofbondedreinforcementperunitlength.
TherelationbetweenSrandVfwhensquaregridwiremeshesareusedis
Sr =
4V f
db
12.2.2
wheredbisthediameterofthewire.Forothertypesofreinforcement,suchasexpandedmetal,SrlandSrtmay
beunequal.
EFFECTIVE MODULUS OF THE REINFORCEMENT: For welded steel meshes, effective modulus of the
reinforcingsystem,Ershallbetakenequaltotheelasticmodulusofthesteelwires.Forothermeshes,Ershallbe
determinedfromtensiletestsontheferrocementcompositeasspecifiedinSec12.8.
12.2.2 Notation
Ac
crosssectionalareaofferrocementcomposite
As
totaleffectivecrosssectionalareaofreinforcementinthedirectionconsidered
As =
A si
i =1
Asi
effective crosssectional area of reinforcement of mesh layer i in the direction

considered
widthofferrocementsection
distancefromextremecompressionfibretoneutralaxis
Part6
StructuralDesign
6695
Part6
StructuralDesign
Cc
resultantofthecompressivestressblockinferrocement
Csi
compressiveforceinferrocementlayeri
d c
clearcoverofmortaroverfirstlayerofmesh
db
diameterorequivalentdiameterofreinforcementused
di
distancefromextremecompressionfibretocentroidofreinforcinglayeri
Ec
elasticmodulusofmortarmatrix
Er
effectivemodulusofthereinforcingsystem
f c
specifiedcompressivestrengthofferrocementmortar
fy
yieldstrengthofmeshreinforcementorreinforcingbars
thicknessofferrocementsection
Mn
nominalmomentstrength
Nn
nominaltensilestrength
numberoflayersofmesh;nominalresistance
nr
modularratioofreinforcement
meshopeningorsize
Sr
specificsurfaceofreinforcement
Srl
specificsurfaceofreinforcementinthelongitudinaldirection
Srt
specificsurfaceofreinforcementinthetransversedirection
Tsi
tensileforceintheferrocementlayeri
Vf
volumefractionofreinforcement
minimumrequireddesignstrength
Vfi
volumefractionofreinforcementformeshlayeri
Vfl
volumefractionofreinforcementinthelongitudinaldirection
Vft
volumefractionofreinforcementinthetransversedirection
factordefiningdepthofrectangularstressblock
global efficiency factor of embedded reinforcement in resisting tension or tensile

bendingloads
value of when the load or stress is applied along the longitudinal direction of the
meshsystemorrodreinforcement
valueofwhentheloadorstressisappliedalongthetransversedirectionofthemesh
reinforcementsystemorrodreinforcement
valueof whentheloadorstressisappliedalongadirectionformingananglewith
thelongitudinaldirection
si =
strainofmeshreinforcementatlayeri
nominalyieldstrainofmeshreinforcement=
fy
Er
o =
totalsurfaceareaofbondedreinforcementperunitlength
strengthreductionfactor.
12.2.3 Definitions
ARMATURE:Thetotalreinforcementsystemorskeletalreinforcementandmeshforaferrocementelement.
LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION: The roll direction (longer direction) of the mesh as produced in plant (see Fig
12.2.1).
SKELETAL REINFORCEMENT: A planar framework or widely spaced tied steel bars that provides shape and
supportforlayersofmeshorfabricattachedtoeitherside.
SPRITZING:Sprayingorsquirtingamortarontoasurface.
6696
Vol.2
Chapter12
Longitudinal Direction
TRANSVERSEDIRECTION:Directionofmeshnormaltoitslongitudinaldirection;alsowidthdirectionofmeshas
producedinplant(seeFig12.2.1)
Bar
Square Mesh
Expanded Mesh
Transverse Direction
Hexagonal Mesh
Fig.12.2.1AssumedLongitudinalandTransverseDirectionsofReinforcement
12.3
MATERIALS
ThematerialusedinferrocementconsistsprimarilyofmortarmadewithPortlandcement,waterandaggregate
andthereinforcingmesh.
12.3.1 Cement
ThecementshallcomplywithASTMC15085a,ASTMC59585,oranequivalentstandard.Thecementshallbe
fresh,ofuniformconsistency,andfreeoflumpsandforeignmatter.Itshallbestoredunderdryconditionsfor
asshortadurationaspossible.
Thechoiceofaparticularcementshalldependontheserviceconditions.Serviceconditionscanbeclassifiedas
electrochemicallypassiveoractive.Landbasedstructuressuchasferrocementsilos,bins,andwatertankscan
beconsideredaspassivestructures,exceptwhenincontactwithsulphatebearingsoils,inwhichcasetheuseof
sulphateresistantcement,suchasASTMTypeIIorTypeV,maybenecessary.
Blended hydraulic cement conforming to ASTM C59585 Type 1 (PM), IS, 1 (SM), ISA, IP, or IPA can also be
used.
Mineraladmixtures,suchasflyash,silicafumes,orblastfurnaceslag,maybeusedtomaintainahighvolume
fractionoffinefillermaterial.Whenused,mineraladmixturesshallcomplywithASTMC61885andC98985a.
In addition to the possible improvement of flow ability, these materials also benefit long term strength gain,
lowermortarpermeability,andinsomecasesimprovedresistancetosulphatesandchlorides.
12.3.2 Aggregates
Aggregateusedinferrocementshallbenormalweightfineaggregate(sand).ItshallcomplywithASTMC3386
requirements(forfineaggregate)oranequivalentstandard.Itshallbeclean,inert,freeoforganicmatterand
deleterioussubstances,andrelativelyfreeofsiltandclay.
ThegradingoffineaggregateshallbeinaccordancewiththeguidelinesofTable12.3.1.However,themaximum
particle size shall be controlled by construction constraints such asmesh size and distance between layers. A
maximumparticlesizepassingsieveNo.16(1.18mm)maybeconsideredappropriateinmostapplications.The
sandshallbeuniformlygradedunlesstrialtestingofmortarworkabilitypermitstheuseofagapgradedsand.
Aggregatesthatreactwiththealkalisincementshallbeavoided.Whenaggregatesmaybereactive,theyshall
betestedinaccordancewithASTMC22781.Ifprovenreactive,theuseofapozzolantosuppressthereactivity
shallbeconsideredandevaluatedinaccordancewithASTMC44181.
6697
Part6
StructuralDesign
Table12.3.1GuidelinesforGradingofSand
SieveSize
PercentPassingbyWeight
U.S.StandardSquareMesh
No.8(2.36mm)
80100
No.16(1.18mm)
5085
No.30(0.60mm)
2560
No.50(0.30mm)
1030
No.100(0.15mm)
210
12.3.3 Water
Themixingwatershallbefresh,clean,andpotable.Thewatershallberelativelyfreefromorganicmatter,silt,
oil, sugar, chloride, and acidic material. It shall have a pH 7 to minimize the reduction in pH of the mortar
slurry.Saltwaterisnotacceptable,butchlorinateddrinkingwatercanbeused.
12.3.4 Admixtures
Conventional and high range water reducing admixtures (super plasticizers) shall conform to ASTM C49486.
Waterreducingadmixturesmaybeusedtoachieveanincreaseinsandcontentforthesamedesignstrengthor
adecreaseinwatercontentforthesameworkability.Decreasesinwatercontentresultinlowershrinkageand
less surface crazing. Retarders may be used in large time consuming plastering projects, especially in hot
weatherconditions.
Ifwatertightnessisimportant,suchasinwaterorliquidretainingstructures,specialprecautionsshallbetaken.
Toachievewatertightness,thewatercementratioshallpreferablybekeptbelow0.4,crackwidthslimited(see
Sec12.4)and,ifnecessary,waterproofingcoatingsapplied(seeSec12.6.3).
Mineral admixtures such as fly ash (ASTM C61885) can be added to the cement to increase workability and
durability.Normally,15percentofthecementcanbereplacedwithmineraladmixtureswithoutappreciably
reducingthestrength.Pozzolanicadmixturesmaybeaddedtoreplacepartofthefineaggregatestoimprove
plasticity.Thetendencyforsomenaturalpozzolanstoabsorbwaterandthusadverselyaffecthydrationofthe
cementphaseshallbecheckedbymeasuringthewaterofabsorption.
A quality matrix can be obtained without using any admixtures if experience has shown its applicability.
AdmixturesnotcoveredinASTMstandardsshallnotbeused.
12.3.5 MixProportioning
Therangesofmixproportionsforcommonferrocementapplicationsshallbesandcementratiobyweight,1.5
to 2.5, and water cement ratio by weight, 0.35 to 0.5. The higher the sand content, the higher the required
watercontenttomaintainthesameworkability.Finenessmodulusofthesand,watercementratio,andsand
cementratioshallbedeterminedfromtrialbatchestoensureamixthatcaninfiltrate(encapsulate)themesh
anddevelopastronganddensematrix.
The moisture content of the aggregate shall be considered in the calculation of required water. Quantities of
materialsshallpreferablybedeterminedbyweight.
The mix shall be as stiff as possible, provided it does not prevent full penetration of the mesh. Normally the
slumpoffreshmortarshallnotexceed50mm.Formostapplications,the28daycompressivestrengthof75by
150mmmoistcuredcylindersshallnotbelessthan35N/mm2.
12.3.6 Reinforcement
Thereinforcementshallbecleanandfreefromdeleteriousmaterialssuchasdust,looserust,coatingofpaint,
oil,orsimilarsubstances.
Wire mesh with closely spaced wires is the most commonly used reinforcement in ferrocement. Expanded
metal, welded wire fabric, wires or rods, prestressing tendons, and discontinuous fibers may also be used in
specialapplicationsorforreasonsofperformanceoreconomy.
6698
Vol.2
Chapter12
12.3.6.1 WireMesh:
Reinforcingmeshesforuseinferrocementshallbeevaluatedfortheirsusceptibilitytotakeandholdshapeas
wellasfortheirstrengthperformanceinthecompositesystem.Commontypesandsizesofsteelmeshesthat
maybeusedinferrocementareprovidedinAppendix6.12.B.
12.3.6.2 WeldedWireFabric:
Welded wire fabric may be used in combination with wire mesh to minimize the cost of reinforcement. The
fabric shall conform to ASTM A49685 and A49786. The minimum yield strength of the wire measured at a
strainof0.035shallbe410N/mm2.Weldedwirefabricnormallycontainslargerdiameterwires(2mmormore)
spacedat25mmormore.
12.3.6.3 ExpandedMetalMeshReinforcement:
Expandedmeshreinforcement(metallath),formedbyslittingthingaugesteelsheetsandexpandingthemina
direction perpendicular to the slits, may be used in ferrocement. Punched or otherwise perforated sheet
productsmayalsobeused.Expandedmeshissuitablefortanksifproperconstructionproceduresareadopted.
12.3.6.4 Bars,WiresandPrestressingStrands:
Reinforcingbarsandprestressingwiresorstrandsmaybeusedincombinationwithwiremeshesinrelatively
thickferrocementelementsorintheribsofribbedorTshapedelements.
Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A61586, A61686 or A61784. Reinforcing bars shall be steel with a
minimum yield strength of 410 N/mm2 and a tensile strength of about 615 N/mm2. Prestressing wires and
strands,whetherprestressedornotshallconformtoASTMA42180andA41686,respectively.
12.3.6.5 DiscontinuousFibresandNonmetallicReinforcement:
Fibrereinforcementconsistingofirregularlyarrangedcontinuousfilamentsofsyntheticornaturalorganicfibres
such as jute and bamboo may be used in ferrocement. If organic materials are used, care shall be taken to
conductappropriateinvestigationstoensurethestrengthanddurabilityofthefinishedferrocementproduct.
12.4
DESIGN
12.4.1 GeneralPrinciplesandRequirements
12.4.1.1 The analysis of a ferrocement crosssection subject to either bending, or to bending and axial load,
whether based on strength or working stresses, is similar to the analysis of a reinforced concrete
beamorcolumnhavingseverallayersofsteel(Fig12.4.1).
Fig.12.4.1StrainandForceDistributionatUltimateinaFerrocementSectionUnderBending
6699
Part6
StructuralDesign
12.4.1.2 In the design of ferrocement structures, members shall be proportioned for adequate strength in
accordance with the provisions of this chapter using load factors and strength reduction factors
specifiedinChapter6.
12.4.1.3 Ferrocementmembersmayalternativelybedesignedusingserviceloadsandpermissibleserviceload
stressesinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec12.4.3.
12.4.1.4 Allmembersshallalsobedesignedtosatisfyserviceabilitycriteriainaccordancewiththeprovisions
ofSec12.4.4.
12.4.2 StrengthRequirements
Ferrocementstructuresandstructuralmembersshallhaveadesignstrengthatallsectionsatleastequaltothe
required strengths for the factored load and load combinations stipulated in Chapter 1, General Design
Requirements.RequiredstrengthUtoresistdeadloadDandliveloadLshallbedeterminedinaccordancewith
Chapter2,Sec2.7.5.1.
Designstrengthprovidedbyamemberorcrosssectionintermsofaxialload,bendingmoment,shearforce,or
stressshall betaken as thenominal strength calculatedinaccordance with requirements andassumptionsof
Chapter6,Sec6.1.4multipliedbythestrengthreductionfactor tosatisfythegeneralrelationship.
U N
12.4.1
where U is the factored load equal to the minimum required design strength , N is the nominal
resistance,and isastrengthreductionfactordefinedinSec6.2.3.1.
Design strength for the mesh reinforcement shall be based on the yield strength fy of the reinforcement but
shallnotexceed690N/mm2.Designyieldstrengthsofvariousmeshreinforcementshallbeinaccordancewith
Table12.4.1.Theseshallbeusedfordesignonlywhentestdataarenotavailable.Whentestsfordetermination
ofyieldstrengthareneeded,theyshallbeconductedinaccordancewithSec12.8.2.3and12.8.2.4.
Table 12.4.1 Minimum Values of Yield Strength and Effective Modulus for Steel Meshes and Bars
RecommendedforDesign
Yield
Strength
fy
Woven
Square
Mesh
Welded
Square
Mesh
Hexa
Gonal
Mesh
Expanded
Metal
Mesh
Longitu
dinal
Bars
450
450
310
310
410
138000
200000
104000
138000
200000
165000
200000
69000
69000
N/mm
Effective
(Er)long.
Modulus
(N/mm )
(Er)tran.
2
(N/mm )
12.4.2.1 Flexure:
The strain distribution at nominal moment resistance shall be assumed to be linear, and a rectangular stress
blockshallbeusedincomputingtheresultantcompressiveforceactingontheconcrete.
a) AssumptionsStrengthdesignofferrocementmembersforflexureandaxialloadsshallbe
basedonthefollowingassumptionsandonsatisfactionofequilibriumandcompatibilityof
strains.
i) Straininreinforcementandmortar(concrete)shallbeassumeddirectlyproportionaltothe
distancefromtheneutralaxis.
ii) Maximumstrainatextrememortar(concrete)compressionfibreshallbeassumedequalto
0.003.
iii) Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strength fy shall be taken as Er times steel
strain. For strains greater than that corresponding to fy, stress in reinforcement shall be
consideredindependentofstrainandequaltofy.
6700
Vol.2
Chapter12
iv) Tensilestrengthofmortar(concrete)shallbeneglectedinflexuralstrengthcalculations.
v) Relationshipbetweenmortar(concrete)compressivestressdistributionandmortar
(concrete) strain may be considered satisfied by the use of the equivalent rectangular
concretestressdistribution.
b) EffectiveareaofreinforcementTheareaofreinforcementperlayerofmeshconsidered
effectivetoresisttensilestressesinacrackedferrocementsectionshallbedeterminedas
follows:
A si = V fi A c
12.4.2
where
Asi
effectiveareaofreinforcementformeshlayeri
globalefficiencyfactorofmeshreinforcementintheloadingdirectionconsidered
Vfi =
volumefractionofreinforcementformeshlayeri
Ac
grosscrosssectionalareaofmortar(concrete)section.
The global efficiency factor when multiplied by the volume fraction of reinforcement, gives the equivalent
volumefraction(orequivalentreinforcementratio)intheloadingdirectionconsidered.Ineffect,itleadstoan
equivalent(effective)areaofreinforcementperlayerofmeshinthatloadingdirection.Forsquaremeshes, =
0.5whenloadingisappliedinoneoftheprincipaldirections.Forareinforcingbarloadedalongitsaxis, =
1.0.
Intheabsenceofvaluesderivedfromtestsforaparticularmeshsystem,thevaluesof giveninTable12.4.2
forcommontypesofmeshandloadingdirectionmaybeused.Theglobalefficiencyfactorshallapplywhether
thereinforcementisinthetensionzoneorinthecompressionzone.
The value of =0.2 forexpandedmetalmesh (Table12.4.2)maynot always beconservative,particularlyin
thickersectionsinflexurewiththemeshorientedintheshortwaydiamond.ThevaluesinTable12.4.2shallbe
usedforsections50mmorlessinthickness,andtestsconductedforglobalefficiencyvaluesforsectionsmore
than50mminthickness.
Table12.4.2RecommendedDesignValuesoftheGlobalEfficiencyFactorofReinforcementforaMember
inUniaxialTensionorBending
Longitudina, l
Global
Woven Welded
Square Square
Mesh
Mesh
0.50
Transverse t
efficiency
factor
At45
=45
0.50
Hexa
gonal
Mesh
0.45
Expanded Longi
Metal
tudinal
Mesh
Bars
0.65
0.50
0.50
0.30
0.20
0.35
0.35
0.30
0.30
0.70
12.4.2.2 Tension:
Thenominalresistanceofcrackedferrocementelementssubjecttopuretensileloadingshallbeapproximated
by the load carrying capacity of the mesh reinforcement alone in the direction of loading by the following
equation:
Nn = A s f y
12.4.3
where
Nn = nominaltensileloadresistanceindirectionconsidered
As = effectivecrosssectionalareaofreinforcementindirectionconsidered
fy = yieldstressofmeshreinforcement
ThevalueofAsisgivenby
As =
A si
i =1
12.4.4
6701
Part6
StructuralDesign
where
N = numberofmeshlayers
Asi = effectiveareaofreinforcementformeshlayeri(Eq12.4.2)
12.4.2.3 Compression:
Asafirstapproximation,thenominalresistanceofferrocementsectionssubjecttouniaxialcompressionshallbe
derivedfromtheloadcarryingcapacityoftheunreinforcedmortar(concrete)matrixassumingauniformstress
distributionof 0. 85 f c where f c isthedesigncompressivestrengthofthemortarmatrix.However,thetransverse
component of the reinforcement can contribute additional strength when square or rectangular wire meshes
are used. Expanded mesh contributes virtually no strengthening beyond that achieved by the mortar alone.
Slendernesseffectsofthinsections,whichcanreducetheloadcarryingcapacitybelowthatbasedonthedesign
compressivestrengthshallbeconsidered.
12.4.3
ServiceLoadDesign
12.4.3.1
Flexure:
Forinvestigationofstressesatserviceloads,straightlinetheory(forflexure)shallbeusedwiththefollowing
assumptions.
a) Strainsvarylinearlywithdistancefromtheneutralaxis.
b) Stressstrainrelationshipsofmortar(concrete)andreinforcementarelinearforstresseslessthanorequal
topermissibleserviceloadstresses.
c) Mortar(concrete)resistsnotension.
d) Perfectbondexistsbetweensteelandmortar(concrete).
Tocomputestressesandstrainsforagivenloading,thecrackedtransformedsectionshallbeused.Theeffective
areaofeachlayerofmeshreinforcementshallbedeterminedfromEq(12.4.2).Thesamevalueofmodularratio
nr=Er/Ec,maybeusedforbothtensileandcompressivereinforcement.RecommendeddesignvaluesofErare
giveninTable12.4.1.Oncetheneutralaxisisdetermined,theanalysisshallproceedasforreinforcedconcrete
beamsorcolumnshavingseverallayersofsteelandsubjecttopurebending.
12.4.3.2
AllowableTensileStress:
Theallowabletensilestressinthemeshreinforcementunderserviceconditionsshallbetakenas0.60fywhere
fyistheyieldstrength.Forliquidretainingandsanitarystructures,theallowabletensilestressshallbelimitedto
200N/mm2.Considerationshallbegiventoincreasetheallowabletensilestressesifcrackwidthmeasurements
onamodeltestindicatethatahigherstresswillnotimpairperformance.
12.4.3.3
AllowableCompressiveStress:
Theallowablecompressivestressineitherthemortar(concrete)ortheferrocementcompositeshallbetakenas
whereisthespecifiedcompressivestrengthofthemortar.Measurementsofthemortarcompressivestrength
shallbeobtainedfromtestson75mmx150mmcylinders.
12.4.4
ServiceabilityRequirements
FerrocementstructuresshallgenerallysatisfytheintentoftheserviceabilityrequirementsofChapter6except
fortheconcretecover.
12.4.4.1
CrackWidthLimitations:
Themaximumvalueofcrackwidthunderserviceloadconditionsshallbelessthan0.10mmfornoncorrosive
environmentsand0.05mmforcorrosiveenvironmentsand/orwaterretainingstructures.
12.4.4.2
FatigueStressRange:
For ferrocement structures to sustain a minimum fatigue life of two million cycles, the stress range in the
reinforcementshallbelimitedto200N/mm2.Astressrangeof350N/mm2shallbeusedforonemillioncycles.
Highervaluesmaybeconsideredifjustifiedbytests.
6702
Vol.2
12.4.4.3
Chapter12
CorrosionDurability:
Particularcareshallbetakentoensureadurablemortarmatrixandoptimizetheparametersthatreducethe
riskofcorrosion.
12.4.4.4
DeflectionLimitation:
Sinceferrocementinthinsectionsisveryflexibleanditsdesignisverylikelytobecontrolledbycriteriaother
thandeflection,noparticulardeflectionlimitationisrecommended.
12.4.5
ParticularDesignParameters
12.4.5.1 The cover of the reinforcement shall be about twice the diameter of the mesh wire or thickness of
otherreinforcementused.Asmallercoverisacceptableprovidedthereinforcementisnotsusceptible
torapidcorrosion,thesurfaceisprotectedbyanappropriatecoating,andthecrackwidthislimited
to0.05mm.Forferrocementelementsofthicknesslessthan25mm,acoveroftheorderof2mm
shallbeprovided.
12.4.5.2 Foragivenferrocementcrosssectionoftotalthicknessh,themeshopeningshallnotbelargerthan
h.
12.4.5.3 Fornonprestressedwaterretainingstructuresthetotalvolumefractionofreinforcementshallnotbe
less than 3.5 per cent and the total specific surface of reinforcement shall not be less than 0.16
mm2/mm3.
12.4.5.4 Incomputingthespecificsurfaceofthereinforcement,thecontributionoffibresaddedtothematrix
shallbeconsidered,whilethefibrecontributionmaybeignoredincomputingthevolumefractionof
reinforcement.
12.4.5.5 Ifskeletalreinforcementisused,theskeletalreinforcementshallnotoccupymorethan50percentof
thethicknessoftheferrocementcomposite.
12.4.5.6 For a given volume fraction of reinforcement, better performance in terms of crack widths, water
tightness,andductilitymaybeachievedbyuniformdistributionofthereinforcementthroughoutthe
thicknessandbyincreasingitsspecificsurface.Aminimumoftwolayersofmeshshallbeacceptable,
butmorethantwolayersofreinforcementarepreferable.
12.4.6 DesignAids
The following nondimensional equation can be used to predict the nominal moment strengthof ferrocement
beamssubjectedtopurebending:
Mn
= 0.005 + 0.422 V f f y / f c 0.0772 V f f y / f c
f c bh2
12.4.5
AdesigngraphrepresentingEq(12.4.5)isgiveninFig12.4.2.
12.5
FABRICATION
12.5.1 GeneralRequirements
Thissectionspecifiestherequirementsforthemixing,placing,andhandlingofmaterialsusedinferrocement
construction.
12.5.1.1 Planning:
Plasteringforfabricationwithferrocementshallbecontinuousthroughthecompletionofthejob.Thisrequires
alargenumberofworkersinvolvedinplasteringandinmaintainingaconstantsupplyofmaterialsduringwork,
6703
Part6
StructuralDesign
mostofteninconfinedworkspaces.Adequatebondatcoldjointsmaybeachievedthroughsurfaceroughness
or treatment with bonding agents. Retarders may be useful in large time consuming plastering projects,
especiallyinhotweatherconditions.Planningforthejobshalltakeintoaccountalltheserequirements.
0.4
0.3
2.
Y = M n / 1'c bh ?
0.2
Y = 0.005+0.422X-0.077X
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
X = Vf fy / f'c
Fig.12.4.2ChartforStrengthDesignofFerrocementinBending
12.5.1.2 Mixing:
Anymethod,includinghandmixing,whichassuresahomogeneousmixtureofingredientsshallbesatisfactory.
Mixingmaybeaccomplishedinamortarmixerwithaspiralbladeorpaddlesinsideastationarydrumorina
pan type mixer. The use of rotating drum mixers with fins affixed to the sides shall not be permitted. Mix
ingredientsshallbecarefullybatchedbyweight,includingthewater,andaddedorchargedinthemixersothat
thereisnocaking.Mixwatershallbeaccuratelyweighedsothatthewatercementratioiscontrolled.Thewater
cementratioshallbeaslowaspossiblebutthesandcementratioshallbeadjustedtoprovideafluidmixfor
initialpenetrationofthearmaturefollowedbyastiffermoreheavilysandedmixatthefinish.Mortarshallbe
mixedinbatches so thatmortaris plastered within an hour after mixing.Retemperingofthe mortarshallbe
prohibited.
12.5.1.3 MortarPlacement:
Mortar shall generally be placed by hand plastering. In this process, the mortar is forced through the mesh.
Alternatively,themortarmaybeshotthroughaspraygundevice.
12.5.1.4 Finishing:
Surfaces shall be finished to assure proper cover to the last mesh layer. The surface finish shall be slightly
roughenedifasurfacecoatingistobebondedlater.
Surfaces that are too smooth shall be mechanically abraded by sandblasting or other means of mechanical
abrasion. Alternatively,such surfaces maybeetched with phosphoric acid,provided theresidue leftby itwill
not interfere with specified finishes. Mild solutions of muriatic acid may be applied with proper attention to
corrosionpotential.Additionalcareshallbetakenwhenplasteringaroundopenings.
12.5.1.5 Curing:
Moist or wet curing is essential for ferrocement concrete construction. The low water cement ratio and high
cement factors create a demand for large quantities of free water in the hydration process, and the amount
permittedtoevaporateintotheairshallbekepttoanabsoluteminimum.Theuseoffoggingdevicesundera
moistureretainingenclosureisdesirable.Adoublelayerofsoakedburlapcoveredwithpolyethyleneorasoaker
hosemayalsobeused.Continuouswettingofthesurfaceorofwetburlaporthelikeshallbemaintainedto
avoiddryspots.Curingshallstartwithinareasonabletimeafterapplicationofthefinishinglayer.
12.5.2 ConstructionMethods
Allmethodsshallhavehighlevelqualitycontrolcriteriatoachievethecompleteencapsulationofseverallayers
ofreinforcingmeshbyawellcompactedmortarorconcretematrixwithaminimumofentrappedair.Themost
6704
Vol.2
Chapter12
appropriate fabrication technique shall be decided on the basis of the nature of the particular ferrocement
application,theavailabilityofmixing,handling,andplacingmachinery,andtheskillandcostofavailablelabour.
Severalrecommendedconstructionmethodsareoutlinedinthefollowingsubsections.
12.5.2.1 ArmatureSystem:
Thearmaturesystemisaframeworkoftiedreinforcingbars(skeletalsteel)towhichlayersofreinforcingmesh
areattachedoneachside.Mortaristhenappliedfromonesideandforcedthroughthemeshlayerstowards
theotherside,asshowninFig12.5.1.
The skeletal steel can assume any shape. Diameter of the steel bars depends on the size of the structure.
Skeletalsteelshallbecuttospecifiedlengths,benttotheproperprofile,andtiedinpropersequence.Sufficient
embedmentlengthsshallbeprovidedtoensurecontinuity.Forbarsizes6mmorless,laplengthsfrom230to
300mmmaybesufficient.Therequirednumberoflayersofmeshshallbetiedtoeachsideoftheskeletalsteel
frame.
12.5.2.2 ClosedmouldSystem:
The mortaris applied fromone sidethroughseveral layers of mesh ormesh androd combinationsthat have
beenstapledorotherwiseheldinpositionagainstthesurfaceofaclosedmould,i.e.amalemouldorafemale
mould. The mould may remain as a permanent part of the finished ferrocement structure. If removed,
treatmentwithreleaseagentsmaybeneeded.TheuseoftheclosedmouldsystemrepresentedinFig12.5.2
tendstoeliminatetheuseofrodsorbars,thuspermittinganessentiallyallmeshreinforcement.Itrequiresthat
plasteringbedonefromonesideonly.
12.5.2.3 IntegralmouldSystem:
An integral mould is first constructed by application of mortar from one or two sides onto a semirigid
framework made with a minimum number of mesh layers. This forms, after mortar setting, a rigid but low
quality ferrocement mould onto which further layer of reinforcingmesh and mortar shall beapplied on both
sides.Alternatively,theintegralmouldmaybeformedusingrigidinsulationmaterials,suchaspolystyreneor
polyurethane,asthecore.AschematicdescriptionofthissystemisgiveninFig12.5.3.
12.5.2.4 OpenmouldSystem:
Intheopenmouldsystem,mortarisappliedfromonesidethroughlayersofmeshormeshandrodsattached
toanopenmouldmadeofalatticeofwoodstrips.Theform,showninFig12.5.4,iscoatedwithareleaseagent
orentirelycoveredwithpolyethylenesheeting(therebyformingaclosedbutnonrigidandtransparentmould)
tofacilitatemouldremovalandtopermitobservationand/orrepairduringthemortarapplicationprocess.
Thissystemissimilartotheclosedmouldsysteminwhichthemortarisappliedfromoneside,atleastuntilthe
mouldcanberemoved.Itenablesatleastpartoftheundersideofthemouldtobeviewedandrepaired,where
necessary,toensurecompleteandthoroughimpregnationofthemesh.
12.6
MAINTENANCE
12.6.1 General
Terrestrialstructuresaresusceptibletodeteriorationfrompollutantsingroundwaterandthosethatprecipitate
fromtheair(acidrain).Environmentaltemperatureandhumidityvariationsalsoaffectferrocementdurability
andmaintenanceprocedures.
Maintenanceshallinvolvedetectingandfillingvoids,replacingspalledcover,providingprotectivecoatings,and
cosmetictreatmentofsurfaceblemishes.Duetothethincoverinferrocement,muriaticacid(hydrochloricacid)
shall be used with extreme caution. Phosphoric acid and other nonchloride cleaners shall be the specified
alternative(seeSec12.5.1.4).
Repairsnotinvolvinglargequantitiesofmaterialsshallbeaccomplishedbyhand.Emphasisshallbeplacedon
theabilityoftherepairmaterialtopenetratethemeshcage,tofullycoatthereinforcingtoinhibitcorrosion,
andtobondtothesubstrate.Rapidsetandstrengthgainshallbetheoverridingconsiderationsforemergency
repairs. Protective coatings shall bond well and be alkali tolerant, thermally compatible, and resistant to
environmentalpollutantsandultravioletradiation,ifexposed.
6705
Part6
StructuralDesign
12.6.2 BlemishandStainRemoval
12.6.2.1 General:
Sinceferrocementisusuallylessporousthanconventionalconcrete,stainsdonotpenetrateverydeepinthe
mortar matrix. Care shall be taken when preparing the surface not to diminish the thin cover of mortar over
ferrocementreinforcement.
12.6.2.2 ConstructionBlemishes:
Constructionblemishesareoftencausedbyimproperselectionoruseofmaterials,faultyworkmanship,uneven
evaporation, and uneven curing. Care shall be exercised to minimize these and the following causes of
blemishesinferrocement.
Fig.12.5.1ArmatureSystem
Fig.12.5.2ClosedmouldSystem
6706
Vol.2
Chapter12
Fig.12.5.3IntegralmouldSystem
Fig.12.5.4OpenmouldSystem
a) Cementfromdifferentmillswillcausecolourvariation,althoughmostofthecolourinmortaris
duetothesandcomponent.Whereappearanceiscritical,careshallbetakentoobtainsand
fromasinglesourceandhaveitthoroughlywashed.
b) Mottlingresultsfromtheuseofcalciumchlorideorhighalkalicementcombinedwithuneven
curing.
c) Theuseofpolyethylenesheetmaterialtocoversurfacespromotesunevencuring.
6707
Part6
StructuralDesign
d) Thewatercementratioaffectstoneandsurfaceappearance.Lowwatercementratiowill
resultinadarkerappearance.
e) Hardsteeltowelingdensifiesthesurface,causingmorerapiddryingandalsoleavinga
darkenedsurface.
12.6.2.3 StainRemoval:
Treatmentofstainsshallbedonepromptlyafterdiscolorationappears.Thoroughflushingandbrushingwitha
stiffbristlebrushanddetergentisthefirstapproach.Ifthisisineffective,adilute(aboutthreepercent)solution
of phosphoric or acetic acid shall be applied. Another chemical treatment that may be considered safe and
effectiveisa20to30percentsolutionofdiammoniumcitrate,amildacidthatattackscalciumcarbonatesand
calciumhydroxides.Thistreatmentmakesthesurfacemoreporousandpromoteshydration.
When a stain has penetrated too deeply to be removed by surface chemical application and scrubbing, a
poultice or a bandage may be needed. A poultice is intended to dissolve the stain and absorb it into the
poultice.Thepoulticeismadebymixingoneormorechemicalssuchasasolutionofphosphoricacidwithafine
inertpowersuchastalc,whiting,hydratedlime,ordiatomaceousearthtoformapaste.Thepasteisspreadina
thicklayeroverthestainandallowedtodry.Abandagemayconsistofafewlayersofclothorpapertoweling
soakedinachemicalsolution.Morethanoneapplicationofapoulticeorbandagemaybeneededforstubborn
stains.
Caution:
Most of the chemicals used to remove stains are toxic and require safeguards against skin contact and
inhalation.Wheneveracidsareused,surfacesshallfirstbesaturatedwithwaterorthedissolvedstainmaterial
maymigratedeeperintotheconcreteandreappearatalaterdateasefflorescence.
12.6.2.4 Efflorescence:
Efflorescenceiscausedbydepositionofsaltsonthesurfaceduetotheevaporationofmigratingwaterbearing
saltsfromwithinferrocement;itistypicallyassociatedwithaporousferrocement.Watercementratioshallbe
limited to within 0.4 and the mortar well compacted to minimize efflorescence. Voids, if present, may be
treatedbybreakingintowithahammerandreplastering.Alternatively,voidsmaybedrilledintowithamasonry
bitandrepairedbyinjectinganonshrinkingcementgrout.
12.6.3 ProtectiveSurfaceTreatments
12.6.3.1 General:
Goodqualitymortarhasexcellentresistancetoweathering.Theapplicationofprotectivesurfacetreatments
canimprovetheperformanceofferrocementandextenditsusefulservicelife.Surfacetreatmentsshallbeused
toimproveappearance,hardenthesurface,andreducepermeability,thusguardingagainstthecorrosiveaction
ofacids,alkalinesalts,andorganicsubstances.
12.6.3.2 Hardeners:
Hardenersmaybeusedtoprotecttheferrocementsurfaceortosealandprepareitforapplicationofpaints.
When asodium silicate hardenerisused,itshall be diluted with water. The actual proportion of water to be
usedshalldependonthemanufacturer'srecommendation.Thehardenershallbeappliedinmultiplecoatswith
thefirstcoatbeingmoredilutethanthesubsequentones.Eachcoatmustbecompletelydrybeforethenext
coatisapplied.
Otherhardenersthatsealandpreparethesurfaceforapplicationofoilbasepaintsaremagnesiumfluorosilicate
andzincfluorosilicate.Thetreatmentshallconsistoftwoormoreapplications.Asolutioncontainingabout1kg
offluorosilicatecrystalsper10litresofwatershallbeusedforthefirstapplication;andasolutioncontaining2.4
kg per 10 litres of water shall be used for subsequent applications. After the last application has dried, the
surfaceshallbebrushedandwashedwithwatertoremoveanycrystalsthatmayhaveformed.
12.6.3.3 Coatings:
When resistance to abrasion is desired, ferrocement surfaces may be coated with polyurethanes, especially
thosefurnishedintwopartmixtures.Coatingsformulatedfromacrylicsmaybeusedtoprovideresistanceto
sunlightandweathering.Waterbasedacryliclatexhousepaintsmaybeusedforapplicationtodampsurfaces.
6708
Vol.2
Chapter12
Foranysurfaceoppositeasurfacesealedwithanimpermeablecoating,anacryliccoatingformulatedtoallow
theescapeofwatervapourshallbespecified.
12.7
DAMAGEREPAIR
12.7.1 CommonTypesofDamage
Ferrocementstructuresshallbeinspected,aspartofaregularmaintenanceprogramme,todetectanyofthe
followingtypesofdamage.Appropriaterepairmeasuresshallthenbetaken.
12.7.1.1 Delaminations:
Delaminationsoccurwhenferrocementsplitsbetweenlayersinlaminatedconstructionsduetospringingback
orbridgingofthemeshduringconstruction.Delaminationsometimesoccursatorneartheneutralaxisunder
impact or flexure when there are manyvoids in the interior layers. Such areas give off a hollow sound when
tappedwithahammerorstrokedwithasteelbar.
12.7.1.2 Spalls:
Aspallisdefinedasadepressionresultingwhenafragmentisdetachedfromalargermassbyablow,bythe
actionofweather,bypressure,orbyexpansionwithinthemass.Spallsshallbeconsideredlargewhentheirsize
exceedsapproximately20mmindepthor150mminanydimension,andshallberepairedbyreplastering.
Spalls are usually caused by corrosion of steel, which causes an expansive pressure within the ferrocement.
Chlorides in the concrete greatly increase the potential for corrosion of the steel. Under such conditions,
continued spalling is likely and the repair of local spall areas may even promote the deterioration of the
concretebecauseofthepresenceofdissimilarmaterials.
An area of steel corrosion and chloride contaminated concrete may be considerably larger than the area of
spalledconcrete,andthefullareaofcontaminationratherthanthespallitselfshallbebrokenandreplastered.
12.7.1.3 FireDamage:
Ferrocementmaybemoresusceptibletofiredamagethanconventionalconcretebecauseofthethincover.
If the fire were intense enough to release the amount of chemically bound water in the cement, destroy the
bondbetweenthecementandtheaggregate,oroxidizethereinforcement,thesurfacewouldbecharredand
spalledsothatthedamagecouldbeeasilyidentified.Fullscaleremovalandrepairshallthenberequired.
12.7.1.4 CracksandLocalFractures:
Hairline cracks and crazing due to temperature changes or drying shrinkage in the cover coat do not require
repair.Continuouswetcuringwillcauseautogenoushealing,andaflexiblecoatingwillconcealthecrackfrom
view.Ifcracksarecausedbycontinuingoverloadsorareduetostructuralsettlementandthecausecannotbe
removed, replacement or a structural overlay shall be required. Cracks due to occasional impact or overload
may be repaired. Local fractures are cracks in which displacement of the section has occurred as a result of
impact.
12.7.2 EvaluationofDamage
12.7.2.1 Evaluationofdamageshalltakeintoconsiderationitsextent,cause,andlikelihoodofthecausestill
beingactive.Themethodofrepairshallbedictatedbythetypeofdamage,theavailabilityofspecial
equipmentandrepairmaterials,andthelevelofskilloftheworkersemployed.Economicfactorsmay
influencethedecisionastowhethertherepairshallbeextensiveandpermanent,orlimitedinscope
inresponsetoanimmediateproblem.
12.7.2.2 Repairmaterialsshallbondtotheoriginalstructure,resistpollutantsinthesurroundingsoil,wateror
air, and respond the same way to changes in temperature, moisture, and loads. Removal of
deteriorated or chloride contaminated mortar trapped within the reinforcing mesh requires a large
amountofhandlabour,soitmaybeeconomical(andbetterforlongtermdurability)toreconstructor
6709
Part6
StructuralDesign
replaceanentireareausingtheoriginalstructureasaformthatcanbeleftinplaceorremovedafter
the overlaid structure has cured. Complete reconstruction shall be undertaken when chloride
contamination,meshcorrosion,anddeteriorationofthemortarareextensive.
12.7.2.3 Testingfordamageinferrocementmaybedonebytappingwithahammertobreakintoanyvoids
underthesurface,orbydrawingametalbaroverthesurfaceandlisteningforsoundsindicatingvoids
orthepresenceofdeterioratedconcrete.Ahighqualityferrocementshouldproduceabelllikesound
andresistmoderatelyseverehammerblowswithoutdamage.
12.7.3 SurfacePreparationforRepairofDamage
12.7.3.1 General:
Theprimaryobjectiveistoremoveanydeterioratedmortarormortarcontaminatedwithcorrosiveagentsand
toprovideasurfacetowhichtherepairmaterialscanbebondedproperly.Therougherthesurface,thegreater
istheareaavailableforbonding.
12.7.3.2 RemovalofDeterioratedConcrete:
Asafirststepinanyrepairalldisintegrated,unsound,andcontaminatedmortarshallberemoved.Sawsand
chippinghammersusedforconventionalconcreteshallnotbeusedforferrocementunlesslargesectionsareto
becompletelyremoved.
Smallareasshallbepreparedbyhandhammeringjusthardenoughtopulverizedeterioratedorcrackedmortar,
butnottothepointofdamagingthereinforcingmesh.
Apneumaticneedlegunmaybeusedforcleaningoutbrokenferrocement,openingoutcracks,androughening
thesurface.
Particlesofsoundmortarembeddedinthemeshneednotberemovedprovidedtheyaresmallenoughnotto
interferewiththepenetrationofnewmortarandtheywillnotprojectfromthefinishedsurface.
12.7.3.3 Reinforcement:
Anyloose,scalycorrosionrevealedoncleaningoutthemortarshallberemovedbysandblasting,waterjet,air
blasting,orvacuummethods.
Analternativemethodforremovingrustistobrushnavaljellyorspraydilutephosphoricacidovertherepair
areaandflushthoroughly.
Where the mesh cage has been displaced but is still intact, it may be pushed or jacked back in place and
supported securely to withstand the pressure of applying the repair material. Where the reinforcement has
beentorn,theoldmeshshallbelacedbacktoclosetheopening.
Whenrodssupportingthemeshcagearetorntheyshallbesplicedbya15diameteroverlapofthepartnerrod
oranchoredbyhooks.
12.7.3.4 Cleaning:
Looseparticlesanddustresiduefromhammeringorsandblastingshallbeairjettedorvacuumcleanedifepoxy
ormethymethacrylate(MMA)istherepairmaterial.Waterjettingmaybeusediftherepairistobemadewith
hydrauliccementorlatexmodifiedmortar.
Ifanairjetisused,thecompressorshallbeequippedwithanoiltraptopreventcontaminationofthesurface.
Surfaceoilordirtshallberemovedbytrisodiumphosphateorotherstrongdetergents.
12.7.3.5 Cracks:
Cracks may be cleaned by hammering out the mortar on each side of the crack and replastered with latex
mortar.
Ifopeningthecrackisnotfeasible,epoxyorMMAinjectionsystemsshallbeattemptedinaccordancewiththe
productdirections.Thecrackshallbecleanedfirstwithoilfreecompressedair,andsmall(about2to3mm)drill
holesshallbemadeatthehighestandlowestpointsinthecrack.Thesurfacebetweentheholesshallbesealed
with strong coatings or a pressure pad. Catalyzed epoxy or MMA shall be injected at the lower hole until it
comesoutattheupperhole.
6710
Vol.2
Chapter12
Wherelatexcementgroutistobeused,theinteriorofthecrackshallbethoroughlysaturatedwithwaterand
allowedtodrain.
12.7.4 RepairMaterials
12.7.4.1 PortlandCementandSand:
PortlandcementusedforrepairshallconformtotherequirementsofSec12.3.1.
Sand which matches that used in the original construction may be used unless the need for the repair arose
because of reactive or contaminated sand. Neat Portland or blended cement paste shall be used to fill small
cracks,andamortarwithfinesandshallbeusedtofilllargercracksorvoids.Bothshallbeusedincombination
withlatexforthinpatchesandoverlays.Largercracksshallbecoatedwithneat cementslurry,andthendry
packedwithaverylowwatercementratiomortar.
The addition of latex to Portland cement mortar markedly improves bond to the substrate and the tensile
strength of the patch. Of the synthetic latexes, polyvinyl acetate and polyvinylidene are unsuitable for wet
environments.Acrylicsmaybeusedasadmixturestoimprovebondingandascuringcompounds.Acryliclatexin
concentratedformshallbedilutedto10to20percentsolidsandthenusedasthemixingwaterforthemortar.
Latexmortarsmaybeappliedtoadampsurface,butthepatchshallbeallowedtodrythoroughlybeforebeing
immersedinwater.
12.7.4.2 PolymerMortars:
Nonlatex polymer mortars shall require the use of surface dried and, preferably, oven dried sand. The
monomershaveverylowviscosityandsoshallbemixedwiththickeningagentstobeplacedinanyareathat
cannotbesealedtightly.Epoxyresinsthataremoisturetolerantmaybeusedondampsurfaces.
Careshallbeexercisedinapplyingpolymersorthepromotersandhardenersusedwiththemwhicharetoxic.
12.7.4.3 Admixture:
Accelerators may be employed where cement alone is the repair material. Since chloride compounds may
promotecorrosion,nonchlorideacceleratorsshallbepreferredforallferrocement.Emergencyrepairsofsmall
areas below the waterline with hot plug, which is neat cement moistened to a putty consistency with a
concentratedsolutionofcalciumchloridemaybepermitted.Thehotplugmaybecarriedinthehandorina
plasticbagtothesiteoftheleak,pressedintothehole,andheldafewminutesuntilset.Permanentrepairshall
beaccomplishedassoonaspossibleusingmaterialswithoutchlorides.
12.7.5 RepairProcedure
12.7.5.1 Mixing:
Small quantitiesofmaterialsrequiredfor ferrocementrepairs may be hand mixed on flatsurfaceor in atray
usingpremixeddryingredients.Forlargequantities,aplasterorpanmixerratherthanarotatingdrumtype
mixershallbeused.Formachinemixingwatershallbeputinfirst;thenthecement,toformslurry;thenthe
pozzolan,ifused;andfinally,enoughsandtobringthemortartothedesireddegreeofworkability.
The consistency of the mortar shall be selected according to the nature of the repair. A slurry of cream
consistency shall be used first to paint the moistened edges of the repair area, fill cracks or small voids, and
thoroughly coat all the interior mesh and rods. After this, more sand shall be added until the mortar is stiff
enoughtoholditsshapewhenbroughtoutflushwiththefinishedsurface.
Toavoid excessive amounts of entrainedair,mortarscontaining acrylics orepoxies shallnot be mixed longer
thantwominutes.Theyshallbeappliedwithinthirtyminutesofmixing.
12.7.5.2 FullDepthRepair:
Whenbothfacesareaccessible,afluidmortarshallbepushedthroughthemeshcagefromonesideuntilan
excessappearsontheoppositeface.Thisexcessshallthenbepushedbackandfinishedflush.Avibratingfloat
ortrowelmaybeusedtoplaceandfinishaverystiffmortar.Penciltypevibratorsshallnotbeused.
12.7.5.3 PartialDepthPatches:
6711
Part6
StructuralDesign
Theareatobepatchedshallfirstbesaturatedwithwater,thenairblownorblottedfreeofstandingwateruntil
onlysurfacemoist.Cementslurryofnotmorethan0.4watercementratioandofpaintlikeconsistencyshallbe
brushedoverthewholeareaandintoanyopeningsinthemesh.Thisshallbeimmediatelyfollowedbyaheavily
sandedmortarofthesamewatercementratio,whichshallbevibratedortampedintothepatchandfinished
flush.
12.7.5.4 Overlays:
ThesubstrateshallbepreparedinthemannerprescribedinSec12.7.5.3forpatches.Theoldsurfaceshallbe
thoroughly cleaned or scarified by mechanical means and the repair materials shall match the thermal
characteristicsofthesubstrate.
Chemical etching shall be followed by mechanical abrasion, unless the surface is flushed with high pressure
waterjetequipment.
Forthinoverlays,velocityplacementsuchasspritzingorcastingbyhand,andshotcreting,shallbeused.
12.7.5.5 Shotcrete:
Shotcrete may be used in ferrocement repair when a large area is involved. Small, low cost portable plaster
pumpsoperatingontheMoynoprogressivecavityprinciplewitharotorinsideastatortubeshallbeadequate
forbothoriginalferrocementconstructionandrepair.
Shotcreteorplasteringequipmentmaybeusedforlargeoverlaysincorporatingadditionallayersofreinforcing
mesh by laminating techniques. Existing surfaces shall be scarified or sandblasted, then saturated with water
andallowedtodampdryjustbeforetheshotcreteormortarsprayisapplied.Aninitialapplicationofcement
slurry is not needed with shotcrete but a latex or wet to dry epoxy bonding compound may be used to
advantagewithrepairsmadewithplasteringequipment.
12.7.5.6 Curing:
AllPortlandcementpatchesandoverlaysshallbethoroughlycuredunlesslatexcompoundsareusedtosealthe
surface and furnish water for hydration. Curing shall be instituted immediately for thin patches and overlays.
Several layers of paper or cloth soaked in water and covered with a plastic sheet that is well secured at the
edges may be used on patches. A full plastic film covering overlays may be used but it may produce
discolorationwhereittouchesthesurface.
12.8
TESTING
12.8.1 TestRequirement
Testsandobservationsthatarecommonlymadeduringthedesign,construction,andsubsequentservicelifeof
concretestructuresshallalsobeapplicabletoferrocementstructures.Thetestprogrammeshallinclude
a) testsonphysical,chemicalandmechanicalpropertiesoftheferrocementingredients,suchas
waterpurity,sieveanalysis,meshstrengthetc.,
b) controltestsforfreshmortarmix,suchasslump,aircontentetc.,
c) testsonthemechanicalpropertiesofthehardenedferrocement,suchasbending,crackingand
fatiguestrengths,permeabilityetc.,and
d) inserviceconditiontests,suchaspotentialforcorrosion,cracking,durabilityetc.
For predicting the mechanical properties of ferrocement, the tests specified in Sec 12.8.2.1 through 12.8.2.4
shallbeconducted.
12.8.2 TestMethods
12.8.2.1 CompressiveStrengthandStaticModulusofElasticityofMortar:
Thecompressivestrengthandstaticmodulusofelasticityofthemortarusedforthefabricationofferrocement
shall be determined from 75 mm x 150 mm cylinders tested in accordance with ASTM C3986 and C46983,
respectively.
12.8.2.2 FlexuralStrengthofFerrocement:
6712
Vol.2
Chapter12
Ferrocementspecimensshallbetestedasasimplysupportedbeamwiththirdpointloading.Thespantodepth
ratio of the beam specimen shall not be less than 20 and its width shall not be less than six times the mesh
openingorwirespacingmeasuredatrightanglestothespandirection.
12.8.2.3 TensilePropertiesoftheMeshReinforcement:
Squareorrectangularmeshesmaybetesteddirectlyintension;hexagonalmeshesandexpandedmetalmeshes
shallbetestedonlywhileencapsulatedinmortar.Inthelattercasethetensiletestshallbeperformedonthe
ferrocementmaterialasdescribedinSec12.8.2.4below.
Forsquareandrectangularmeshes,theyieldstrength,elasticmodulus,andultimatetensilestrengthshallbe
obtainedfromdirecttensiletestsonsamplesofwiresorflatcouponscutfromthemesh.Thetestshallbein
accordancewiththefollowingguidelines(seealsoFig12.8.1).
1. Thetestspecimenshallbepreparedbyembeddingbothendsofarectangularcouponofmeshinmortar
over a length at least equal to the width of the sample. The mortar embedded ends shall serve as pads for
gripping.Thefree(notembedded)portionofthemeshshallrepresentthetestsample.
2. Thewidthofthetestsampleshallbenotlessthansixtimesthemeshopeningorwirespacingmeasuredat
rightanglestotheloadingdirection.
3. Thelengthofthetestsampleshallbenotlessthanthreetimesitswidthor150mm,whicheverislarger.
4. Measurements of elongations (from which strains are to be computed) shall be recorded over half the
lengthofthemeshsample.
5. Yieldstrainofmeshreinforcementshallbetakenasthestrainattheintersectionofthebeststraightlinefit
oftheinitialportionofthestressstraincurveandthebeststraightlinefitoftheyieldedportionofthestress
straincurve,asshowninFig12.8.1.Theyieldstressshallbetakenasthestresspointontheoriginalstressstrain
curveattheyieldstrainfoundabove.TheprocedureisdemonstratedinFig12.8.1.
Fig.12.8.1SchematicDescriptionofMeshTensileTestSampleandCorrespondingStressStrainCurve
12.8.2.4 TensileTestofFerrocement:
Direct tensile tests of ferrocement elements shall be made using rectangular specimens satisfying the same
minimumsizerequirementasthosesetinSec12.8.2.3forthemeshreinforcement.Thetestspecimensshallbe
additionallyreinforcedattheir ends forgripping. Themiddlehalf of thenongripped(free) portion ofthe test
specimenshallbeinstrumentedtorecordelongations.Aplotoftheloadelongationcurveuptofailureshallbe
6713
Part6
StructuralDesign
usedtoestimatetheeffectivemodulusofthemeshsystemaswellasitsyieldstrength,ultimatestrength,and
efficiency factor. The yield strain and corresponding stress shall be determined in accordance with the
proceduredescribedinSec12.8.2.3.
RelatedAppendices
Appendix6.12.ACalculationofVolumeFractionofReinforcement
Appendix6.12.BCommonTypesandSizesofSteelMeshesUsedinFerrocement
6714
Vol.2
Chaptter 13
SteelConcreeteCom
mpositteStru
ucturalMemb
bers
13.1
GeneralP
ProvisionsforSteelC
ConcreteCo
ompositeSttructuralM
Members
This sectio
on states the scope of thee specification
n, summarizess referenced specificationss, codes and standard
s
documenttsandprovideerequirementtsformateriaalsforsteelco
oncretecomp
positemembe
ers.Generalprovisions
forcompo
ositesectionsaandshearcon
nnectorsarealsoincluded.
13.1.1 Scope
The guideelines included
d in chapter 13
1 of part 6 o
of this code presents
p
the d
design guidelin
nes for steel concrete
compositeemembersfreequentlyused
dinmediumto
ohighrisebuildings.Thischaptermainlyyaddressesco
omposite
columnsccomposedofrrolledorbuiltupstructurallsteelshapesorHSS,andsstructuralcon
ncreteactingttogether,
and steel beams suppo
orting a reinfforced concreete slab so in
nterconnected
d that the beaams and the slab act
together to
t resist bending. Simple and continuo
ous composite beams with shear conn
nectors and concrete
c
encased beams,
b
constrructed with or
o without teemporary sho
ores, are inclu
uded. Seismicc provisions for
f steel
concreteccompositemeembersarealssoprovided.
13.1.2 Referenced
R
Specificatiions,CodessandStand
dards
Thedocum
mentsreferen
ncedinthese provisionsshaallincludetho
oselistedinPart6Chapter 10Section2 withthe
followingaadditionsandmodificationss:
AmericanSocietyofCivvilEngineers
alDesignofCo
ompositeSlabss
ASCE391StandardfortheStructura
AmericanWeldingSocieety
AWSD1.104StructurallWeldingCod
deSteel
AWSD1.498StructurallWeldingCod
deReinforcingSteel
CanadianStandardsAsssociation
CSAS160
01DesignofStteelStructuress
13.1.3 MaterialLim
M
mitations
Concreteaandsteelreinfforcingbarsin
ncompositesyystemsshallb
besubjecttothefollowinglimitations.
a)) Forthedetterminationofftheavailableestrength,concreteshallhaaveacompressivestrength
h of
notlessthaan21MPanormorethan770MPafornormalweightconcreteandn
notlessthan221MPa
c
normorethan42MPaforlightweighttconcrete.
b)) Thespecifieedminimumyyieldstressofstructuralsteelandreinforrcingbarsused
dincalculatingthe
strengthoffacompositecolumnshalln
notexceed52
25MPa.
Highermaaterialstrengthsarepermitttedwhentheiiruseisjustifiedbytestingoranalysis.
13.1.4 GeneralPro
G
ovisions
In determ
mining load efffects in mem
mbers and connections of a structure tthat includes composite members,
m
considerattionshallbeggiventotheeeffectivesectio
onsatthetim
meeachincrem
mentofloadiisapplied.Theedesign,
detailing and material properties related to tthe concrete and reinforccing steel po
ortions of co
omposite
construction shall comp
ply with the reinforced
r
con
ncrete and reeinforcing bar design speciffications stipu
ulated by
theprovisionsinPart6Chapter5.
Partt6
Stru
ucturalDesign
13.1.4.1 ResistaancePriortoC
CompositeAcction
The
efactoredresiistanceofthesteelmembeerpriortotheattainmento
ofcompositeaactionshallbeedeterminedin
accordancewithChapter10offPart6.
13.1.4.2 Nomin
nalStrengthofCompositeSSections
Two
o methods arre provided for
f determining the nomin
nal strength of composite sections: thee plastic stress
disttributionmeth
hodandthesttraincompatibilitymethod.
The
e tensile strength of the concrete shall be neglected in the de
etermination of the nomin
nal strength of
com
mpositememb
bers.
13.1.4.2.1
PlastticStressDistributionMeth
hod
For the plastic stress distrib

bution method, the nomin
nal strength shall be com
mputed assum
ming that steeel
com
in
mponents havve reached a
a stress of Fy in either teension or com
mpression an
nd concrete components
c
com
mpression havve reached a stress of 0.8
85 fc . For ro
ound HSS fille
ed with concrete, a stress of 0.95 fc is
perrmittedtobe usedforconccretecompon
nentsinuniformcompressiiontoaccoun
ntfortheeffe
ectsofconcrete
con
nfinement.
13.1.4.2.2
StrainCompatibilityMethod
Forthestraincom
mpatibilitymeethod,alineardistribution ofstrainsacrossthesectio
onshallbeassumed,withth
he
maxximumconcreetecompressivestrainequ
ualto0.003m
mm/mm(in/in
n).Thestressstrainrelation
nshipsforsteeel
and
dconcreteshaallbeobtained
dfromtestsorfrompublish
hedresultsforrsimilarmaterials.
13.1.4.2.3
SheaarConnectorss
uds not less th

han four stud
d diameters in
n length after installation, or
o
Sheear connectorss shall be heaaded steel stu
hottrolled steel channels.
c
She
ear stud desiggn values shalll be taken ass per Sectionss 13.2.1.7 and
d 13.3.2.4. Stu
ud
con
nnectors shall conform totthe requiremeentsofSection 13.3.2.4(3) Channelconn
nectors shall conformto
c
th
he
requirementsofSection13.3.2
2.4(4).
13..2
DesiignofCompositeAxia
alMemberss
Thiss section states the design

n guidelines fo
or two types of composite axial membeers. These include encaseed
com
mpositecolum
mnsandconcreetefilledhollo
owstructuralsections.
13.2.1 Encase
edComposiiteColumn
ns
13.2
2.1.1 Scope
Thisssectionappliestodoublysymmetricsteeelcolumnsencasedinconcrete,provideedthat
(1)thesteelshap
peisacompacctornoncom
mpactsection;
(2)thecrosssecttionalareaofthesteelcore
ecomprisesattleast1perce
entofthetotalcompositecrosssection.
(3) concrete enccasement of the
t steel core
e is reinforced
d with continuous longitud
dinal bars and
d lateral ties or
o
spirrals.Theminim
mumtransverrsereinforcem
mentshallbeatleast6mm2permmoftieespacing.
(4)Theminimum
mreinforcementratioforco
ontinuouslonggitudinalreinfforcing,
sr,shallbe0.00
04,wheresrisgivenby:
sr =
Asr
Ag
13.2.1
Wh
here
ntinuousreinfforcingbars,m
mm2
=areaofcon
Ag=grossareaofcompositemember,mm
m2
SteelConcreeteCompositeSStructuralMemb
bers
C
Chapter13
Thedesign
ncompressiveestrength,cPn,andallowa
ablecompresssivestrength, Pn c ,foraaxiallyloadedencased
compositeecolumnsshallbedetermin
nedforthelim
mitstateoffllexuralbucklin
ngbasedonccolumnslendeernessas
follows:
c=0.75(LR
RFD)
(a) When Pe 0.44 Po
c=2.00(A
ASD)
Po
Pn = Po 0.658 e
13
3.2.2
(b) When Pe < 0.44 Po
Pn = 0.87
77 Pe
13
3.2.3
Where
Po = As Fy + Asr Fyr + 0.85 Ac f c

Pe =
2 ( EI
E eff )
13
3.2.4
13
3.2.5
(KL)
andwheree
As=areaaofthesteelssection,mm2
Ac=areaaofconcrete,,mm2
Asr=areaaofcontinuou
usreinforcingbars,mm2
Ec=mod
dulusofelasticityofconcre
ete
1.5
0.043 wc
f c MPa
Es=mod
dulusofelasticityofsteel=210MPa
f
=speecifiedcompreessivestrengthofconcrete,,MPa
Fy=speccifiedminimum
myieldstressofsteelsectio
on,MPa
Fyr=speccifiedminimumyieldstresssofreinforcinggbars,MPa
Ic=mom
mentofinertiaaoftheconcrretesection,m
mm4
Is=mom
mentofinertiaofsteelshap
pe,mm4
Isr=mom
mentofinertiaofreinforcin
ngbars,mm4
K=theeffectivelenggthfactordeteerminedinacccordancewith
hChapter10P
Part6
dlengthoftheemember,mm
m
L=laterallyunbraced
wc2500kg/m3
wc=weigghtofconcretteperunitvollume1500w
Where
EIeff=effecctivestiffnessofcompositeesection,Nmm2
EIeff=EsIs+0.5EsIsr+C1EcIc
133.2.6
Where
As
0.3
C1 = 0.1 + 2
Ac + As
13
3.2.7
Partt6
Stru
ucturalDesign
13.2
2.1.3 Tensile
eStrength
The
edesigntensillestrength, tPn,andallowabletensile strength,Pn//t,forencassedcompositeecolumnsshaall
bed
determinedfo
orthelimitstaateofyielding
gas
Pn = As Fy + Asr Fyry
13.2.8
0.90(LRFD)
1.67(ASD)
13.2
2.1.4 ShearSStrength
The
eavailablesheearstrengthsshallbecalculaatedbasedon
neitherthesh
hearstrength ofthesteelssectionalone as
spe
ecifiedinSection10.7plusttheshearstreengthprovided
dbytiereinfo
orcement,ifpresent,ortheeshearstrengtth
oftthereinforced
dconcreteporrtionalone.
13.2
2.1.5 LoadT
Transfer
Loa
adsappliedtoaxiallyloaded
dencasedcom
mpositecolum
mnsshallbetransferredbettweenthesteeelandconcrete
inaaccordancewiththefollowingrequireme
ents:
othesteelsecction,shearco
onnectorsshalllbeprovided
a) Wheentheexternaalforceisapplieddirectlyto
totrransferthereq
quiredshearfforce,V,asffollows:
AF
V = V 1 s y
Po
13.2.9
Wh
here
V==requiredshe
earforceintro
oducedtocolu
umn,N
As=areaofsteelcrosssection
n,mm2
Po=nominalaxia
=
alcompressiveestrengthwith
houtconsiderrationoflengttheffects,N
Wh
hentheextern
nalforceisap
pplieddirectlytotheconcreeteencaseme
ent,shearcon
nnectorsshall beprovidedtto
tran
nsfertherequ
uiredshearforrce, ,asfo
ollows:
AF
V =V s y
Po
13.2.10
b) Wheenloadisappliedtothecon
ncreteofanencasedcompo
ositecolumnbydirectbearringthedesign
n
bearringstrength,BPp,andtheallowablebeearingstrengtth,Pp/B,oftheconcreteshallbe:
Pp=1.7fAB
Where
B=0.65(LRFD)
13.2.11
B=2.31(ASD)
where
AB=loadedareaoffconcrete,mm
m2
13.2
2.1.6 DetailingRequireme
ents
13.2
2.1.6.1
LonggitudinalBars
The
e concrete en
ncasement sh
hall be reinforced with lon
ngitudinal bars and lateraal ties extending completeely
aroundthestructuralsteelcorre.Theclearccovershallnottbelessthan40mm.
elongitudinalbarsshall
The
a)
b)
c)
d)
Beccontinuousatfframedlevelswhenconsideeredtocarrylload;
Have
eanareanotlessthan0.01
1timesthetottalgrosscrossssectionalareea;
Belo
ocatedateach
hcorner;and
Spaccedonallside
esnotfurtherapartthan5225t/fytimeson
nehalftheleaastdimensionofthe
com
mpositesection
n.
bers
13.2.1.6.2
C
Chapter13
Lateraltiess
Thelateraltiesshall
a)) Be15Mbars,exceptthat10Mbarsmaybeusedwh
hennosidediimensionofth
hecompositesection
exceeds50
00mm;and
b)) Haveavertticalspacingn
notexceedingtheleastofth
hefollowing:
i)
Twothirdso
oftheleastsid
dedimensiono
ofthecrossseection;
ii)
16longitudin
nalbardiametters;or
iii)
500mm.
Wherereq
quired,shear connectorstrransferringtheerequiredshe
earforceshalllbedistributeedalongthellengthof
thememb
beratleastad
distanceof2.5
5timesthewidthofarectaangularHSSor2.5timesthediameteroffaround
HSSbothaaboveandbellowtheloadttransferregion
n.Themaximu
umconnectorrspacingshallbe405mm.
13.2.1.6.3
ShearConn
nectors
Shearconnectorsshall beprovidedttotransfertheerequiredsheearforceSecttionspecified in13.2.2.5.TTheshear

connectorrsshallbedisttributedalonggthelengthoffthememberratleastadisstanceof2.5ttimesthedepthofthe
encasedcompositecolu
umnabovean
ndbelowthelloadtransferregion.Them
maximumconn
nectorspacinggshallbe
t transfer axxial load shall be placed on at least two
t
faces of the steel shaape in a
405 mm. Connectors to
configurattionsymmetricalaboutthesteelshapeaxes.
13.2.1.6.4
Columnsw
withMultipleB
BuiltupShapees
mposite crosss section is built

b
up from
m two or mo
ore encased ssteel shapes, the shapes shall be
If the com
interconneected with la
acing, tie platees, batten pla
ates or similar components to prevent buckling of in
ndividual
shapesduetoloadsapp
pliedpriortoh
hardeningofttheconcrete.
nnectors
13.2.1.7 StrengthofSttudShearCon
Thenomin
nalstrengthoffonestudshe
earconnectorembeddedin
nsolidconcretteis:
Qn = 0.5 Ascc
f cEc Ascc Fu
13
3.2.12
where
osssectionalareaofstudsh
hearconnector,mm2
=cro
=speecifiedminimu
umtensilestreengthofastudshearconneector,MPa
13.2.2 ConcreteFillledHollow
wStructura
alSection
13.2.2.1 Scope
Section 13
3.2.2 applies to compositee members co
onsisting of stteel hollow sttructural secttions completely filled
withconcrrete,provided
dthat
a)) ThecrossssectionalareaofthesteelH
HSSshallcomp
priseatleast11percentofth
hetotalcomposite
crosssectio
on.
b)) Thewidthtothicknessrratioofthewaallsofrectangularhollowsttructuralsectio
onsdoesnoteexceed
1350 F y
c)) Theoutside
ediameterto
othicknessrattionofcircularrhollowstructuralsectionsdoesnotexceeed
28000/Fy
d)) Theconcre
etestrengthisbetween20aand80MPafo
oraxiallyloadedcolumnsan
ndbetween2
20and40
MPaforco
olumnssubjecttedtoaxialco
ompressionan
ndbending.
The design
n compressivee strength, c Pn and allowable compreessive strengtth, Pn /c , fo
or axially load
ded filled
compositeecolumnsshaallbedetermiinedforthelimitstateoffflexuralbuckllingbasedon Section13.2.1.2with
thefollow
wingmodifications:
Part6
StructuralDesign
Po = As Fy + Asr Fyr + C2 Ac f c
13.2.13
C2=0.85forrectangularsectionsand0.95forcircularsections
EI eff = Es I s + Es I sr + C3 Ec I c
13.2.14
As
0.9
C3 = 0.6 + 2
Ac + As
13.2.15
13.2.2.3 TensileStrength
Thedesigntensilestrength, tPn,andallowabletensilestrength,Pn/t ,forfilledcompositecolumnsshallbe
determinedforthelimitstateofyieldingas:
Pn = As Fy + Asr Fyr
13.2.16
t=0.90(LRFD) t=1.67(ASD)
13.2.2.4 ShearStrength
Theavailableshearstrengthshallbecalculatedbasedoneithertheshearstrengthofthesteelsectionaloneas
specified in Chapter 10 or the shear strength of the reinforced concrete portion alone. The shear strength of
reinforcedconcreteportionmaybedeterminedaccordingtoChapter6ofPart6.
13.2.2.5 LoadTransfer
Loads applied to filled composite columns shall be transferred between the steel and concrete. When the
external force is applied either to the steel section or to the concrete infill, transfer of force from the steel
section to the concrete core is required from direct bond interaction, shear connection or direct bearing. The
forcetransfermechanismprovidingthelargestnominalstrengthmaybeused.Theseforcetransfermechanisms
shallnotbesuperimposed.
When load is applied to the concrete of an encased or filled composite column by direct bearing the design
bearingstrength,BPp,andtheallowablebearingstrength,Pp/B,oftheconcreteshallbe:
Pp = 1.7 f cAE
13.2.17
B=0.65(LRFD) B=2.31(ASD)
where
ABistheloadedarea,mm2
13.2.2.6 DetailingRequirements
Whererequired,shearconnectorstransferringtherequiredshearforceshallbedistributedalongthelengthof
thememberatleastadistanceof2.5timesthewidthofarectangularHSSor2.5timesthediameterofaround
HSSbothaboveandbelowtheloadtransferregion.Themaximumconnectorspacingshallbe405mm.
13.3
DesignofCompositeFlexuralMembers
This section applies to composite beams consisting of steel sections interconnected with either a reinforced
concreteslaborasteeldeckwithaconcretecoverslab.Thesteelbeamsandthereinforcedconcreteslabareso
interconnected that the beamsand the slabacttogetherto resist bending.Simple and continuouscomposite
beamswithshearconnectorsandconcreteencasedbeams,constructedwithorwithouttemporaryshores,are
included.Designphilosophyforcompositecolumnssubjectedtobendingmomentsisalsostated.
6720
Vol.2
SteelConcreteCompositeStructuralMembers
Chapter13
13.3.1 General
13.3.1.1 Deflections
Calculation of deflections shall take into account the effects of creep of concrete, shrinkage of concrete, and
increased flexibility resulting from partial shear connection and from interfacial slip. These effects shall be
established by test or analysis, where practicable. Consideration shall also be given to the effects of full or
partialcontinuityinthesteelbeamsandconcreteslabsinreducingcalculateddeflections.
Inlieuoftestsoranalysis,theeffectsofpartialshearconnectionandinterfacialslip,creep,andshrinkagemay
beassessedasfollows:
a) Forincreasedflexibilityresultingfrompartialshearconnectionandinterfacialslip,thedeflections
shallbecalculatedusinganeffectivemomentofinertiagivenby
13.3.1
0.25 ( I I )
t
s
le = l s + 0.85 p
Where
Is =moment of inertia of a steel beam, or of a steel joist or truss adjusted to include the effect of
sheardeformations,whichmaybetakenintoaccountbydecreasingthemomentofinertiabasedon
thecrosssectionalareasofthetopandbottomchordsby15%orbyamoredetailedanalysis
P=fractionoffullshearconnection
=1.00forfullshearconnection
It=transformedmomentofinertiaofcompositebeambasedonthemodularrationn=E/Ec
b) Forcreep,elasticdeflectionscausedbydeadloadsandlongtermliveloads,ascalculatedinItem
(a),needtobeincreasedby15%and
c) Forshrinkageofconcrete,usingaselectedfreeshrinkagestrain,straincompatibilitybetweenthe
steelandconcrete,andanageadjustedeffectivemodulusofelasticityofconcreteasitshrinksand
creeps,thedeflectionofasimplysupportedcompositebeam,joist,ortrussshallbecalculatedas
follows:
s =
L2
L2 f Ac y
=
c
nsles
8
8
13.3.2
Where
L=spanofthebeam,joist,ortruss
=curvaturealonglengthofthebeam,joist,ortrussduetoshrinkageofconcrete
c=empiricalcoefficientusedtomatchtheorywithtestresults(accountingforcrackingofconcrete
intension,thenonlinearstressstrainrelationshipofconcrete,andotherfactors)
=freeshrinkagestrainofconcrete
Ac=effectiveareaofconcreteslab
Y = distance from centroid of effective of effective area of concrete slab to centroidal axis of the
compositebeam,joist,ortruss
ns=modularration,E/Ec
where
13.3.3
Ec ' = Ec (1 + )
=ageadjustedeffectivemodulusofelasticityofconcrete
Where
=agingcoefficientofconcrete
=creepcoefficientofconcrete
I es = I s + 0.85 p 0.25 (I ts I s )
13.3.4
6721
Partt6
Stru
ucturalDesign
=effectiveemomentofin
nertiaofcomp
positebeam,truss,orjoistbaasedonthemo
odularrations
Where
W
Its=transforme
edmomentofinertiabasedo
onthemodularrations
13.3
3.1.2 Design
nEffectiveWid
dthofConcre
ete
The
eeffectivewid
dthoftheconcreteslabistthesumoftheeeffectivewid
dthsforeach sideofthebe
eamcenterline,
eacchofwhichshallnotexceed
d:
a) oneeighthofthebeamspan,ccentertocentterofsupports;
b) onehalfthedistaancetothecen
nterlineoftheeadjacentbeaam;or
c) thed
distancetotheedgeoftheslab.
13.3
3.1.3 ShearSStrength
The
e available sheear strength of
o composite beams with shear
s
connecttors shall be determined based
b
upon th
he
propertiesofthe steelsectionaaloneinaccord
dancewithParrt6Chapter10
0Section10.7
7.Theavailableeshearstrengtth
c
sed and filled composite members
m
shall be determineed based upon
n the properties of the steel
of concreteencas
secttionaloneinaaccordancewitthPart6Chap
pter10Section
n10.7orbaseedupontheprropertiesofth
heconcretean
nd
longgitudinalsteelreinforcementt.
13.3
3.1.4 StrenggthduringCon
nstruction
Wh
hentemporaryyshoresaren
notuseddurin
ngconstructio
on,thesteelseectionalonesshallhaveadeequatestrengtth
tossupportallloa
adsappliedprriortothecon
ncreteattainin
ng75percentofitsspecifieedstrength .Theavailab
ble
c
accordingtoPart6Chapter10Section1
flexxuralstrengthofthesteelseectionshallbe
edetermined
10.6.
13.3.2 Streng
gthofComp
positeBeam
mswithShe
earConnecctors
13.3
3.2.1 PositivveFlexuralStrrength
The
e design posittive flexural strength,
s
b Mn and the allowable
a
possitive flexural strength, Mn /b , shall b
be
determinedforthelimitstateofyieldingasfollows:
b=0.90(LRFD)b==1.67(ASD)
a)
For h
tw
3.76 E
Fy
Mnshallbedeterm
minedfromtheplasticstressd
distributionon
nthecompositte
sectio
onforthelimittstateofyieldiing(plasticmo
oment).
b) For h
tw
> 3.76 E
Fy
Mnsh
hallbedeterm
minedfromtheesuperposition
nofelasticstreesses,considerringtheeffecttsofshoring,for
thelimitstateofyieelding(yieldm
moment).
3.2.2 NegatiiveFlexuralSttrength
13.3
The
e design nega
ative flexural strength,
s
b Mn , and the allowable neggative flexuraal strength, Mn /b , shall be
b
determinedforthesteelsectio
onalone,inacccordancewitththerequirementsofPart6Chapter10Section10.6.
Alteernatively,theeavailableneggativeflexuralstrengthshaallbedeterminedfromthe plasticstressdistributiono
on
thecompositeseection,forthelimitstateofyielding(plasticmoment),with
b=0
0.90(LRFD)b=1.67(ASD)
providedthat:
a) ThesteelbeamiscompactandisadequatelyybracedaccorrdingtoSectio
on10.6.
arconnectorsconnectthesslabtothesteelbeamintheenegativemo
omentregion.
b) Shea
c) Theslabreinforceementparalleltothesteelb
beam,withinttheeffectivew
widthofthesllab,isproperlyy
deveeloped.
Chapter13
13.3.2.3 StrengthofCompositeBeamswithFormedSteelDeck
(1)General
The available flexural strength of composite construction consisting of concrete slabs on formed steel deck
connectedtosteelbeamsshallbedeterminedbytheapplicableportionsofSection13.3.2.1and13.3.2.2,with
thefollowingrequirements:
a) Thissectionisapplicabletodeckswithnominalribheightnotgreaterthan75mm.Theaverage
widthofconcreteriborhaunch,wr,shallbenotlessthan50mm,butshallnotbetakenin
calculationsasmorethantheminimumclearwidthnearthetopofthesteeldeck.
b) Theconcreteslabshallbeconnectedtothesteelbeamwithweldedstudshearconnectors19mm
orlessindiameter(AWSD1.1).Studsshallbeweldedeitherthroughthedeckordirectlytothe
steelcrosssection.Studshearconnectors,afterinstallation,shallextendnotlessthan38mm
abovethetopofthesteeldeckandthereshallbeatleast13mmofconcretecoverabovethetop
oftheinstalledstuds.
c) Theslabthicknessabovethesteeldeckshallbenotlessthan50mm.
d) Steeldeckshallbeanchoredtoallsupportingmembersataspacingnottoexceed460mm.Such
anchorageshallbeprovidedbystudconnectors,acombinationofstudconnectorsandarcspot
(puddle)welds,orotherdevicesspecifiedbythedesigner.
(2)DeckRibsOrientedPerpendiculartoSteelBeam
Concretebelowthetopofthesteeldeckshallbeneglectedindeterminingcompositesectionpropertiesandin
calculatingAcfordeckribsorientedperpendiculartothesteelbeams.
(3)DeckRibsOrientedParalleltoSteelBeam
Concretebelowthetopofthesteeldeckmaybeincludedindeterminingcompositesectionpropertiesandshall
beincludedincalculatingAc.
Formed steel deck ribs over supporting beams may be split longitudinally and separated to form a concrete
haunch.
Whenthenominaldepthofsteeldeckis38mmorgreater,theaveragewidth,wr ,ofthesupportedhaunchor
rib shall be not less than 50 mm for the first stud in the transverse row plus four stud diameters for each
additionalstud.
13.3.2.4 ShearConnectors
(1)LoadTransferforPositiveMoment
Theentirehorizontalshearattheinterfacebetweenthesteelbeamandtheconcreteslabshallbeassumedto
be transferred by shear connectors, except for concreteencased beams as defined in Section 10.9.3.3. For
compositeactionwithconcretesubjecttoflexuralcompression,thetotalhorizontalshearforce,V,between
the point of maximum positive moment and the point of zero moment shall be taken as the lowest value
accordingtothelimitstatesofconcretecrushing,tensileyieldingofthesteelsection,orstrengthoftheshear
connectors:
Concretecrushing
V = 0.85 f cAc
13.3.5a
Tensileyieldingofthesteelsection
V = Fy As
13.3.5b
Strengthofshearconnectors
V = Qn
13.3.5c
where
Ac=areaofconcreteslabwithineffectivewidth,mm2
6723
Partt6
Stru
ucturalDesign
As=areaofsteeelcrosssectiion,mm2
momentandth
he
Qn =sumofnoominalstrenggthsofshearcconnectorsbeetweenthepoointofmaximuumpositivem
pointofzeromoment,N
(2)LoadTransferrforNegativeMoment
c
bea
ams where longitudinal rreinforcing steel in the negative mom
ment regions is
In continuous composite
con
nsidered to acct compositely with the steel beam, th
he total horizzontal shear fforce betweeen the point of
maxximumnegatiivemomentaandthepoint ofzeromom
mentshallbettakenasthelowervalueaccordingtoth
he
limiitstatesofyieeldingofthestteelreinforcementinthesllab,orstrengtthoftheshearconnectors:
a) Tenssileyieldingofftheslabreinforcement
V = Ar Fyr
13.3.6a
wheere
Ar = area of adequately
a
de
eveloped longgitudinal reinfforcing steel within
w
the effe
fective width of
o the concrete
slab
b,mm2
Fyrr =specifiedminimumyielldstressofthe
ereinforcingssteel,MPa
b) Strengthofshearconnectors
V = Qn
13.3.6b
(3)StrengthofSttudShearCon
nnectors
The
enominalstreengthofonesttudshearconnectorembed
ddedinsolidcconcreteorinacompositesslabis
Qn = 0.5 Asc
f c Ec R g R p Asc Fu
13.3.7
wheere
nnector,mm2
=crosssecttionalareaofsstudshearcon
1.5
=moduluso
ofelasticityoffconcrete= 0.043
0
wc
f c ,MPa
=specifiedm
minimumtenssilestrengtho
ofastudshearrconnector
=1.0;(a)fo
oronestudw
weldedinasteeeldeckribwiththedecko
orientedperpendiculartotthesteelshap
pe;
berofstudsw
weldedinarow
wdirectlytothesteelshape;(c)forany numberofstu
udsweldedin
na
(b)foranynumb
row
wthroughsteeeldeckwithth
hedeckorientedparallelto
othesteelshaapeandtheratiooftheavverageribwidtth
torribdepth1.5
5
=0.85;(a)fo
ortwostudsw
weldedinastteeldeckribw
withthedecko
orientedperp
pendiculartotthesteelshap
pe;
(b)foronestudw
weldedthrougghsteeldeckw
withthedeckorientedparaalleltothesteeelshapeandtheratioofth
he
ave
erageribwidth
htoribdepth<1.5
=0.7forthrreeormoresstudswelded inasteeldecckribwiththeedeckorienteedperpendicu
ulartothesteeel
shape
ords,notthrou
ughsteeldeckorsheet)an
nd
=1.0forsstudswelded directlytothesteelshape(inotherwo
otmorethan5
50percentofthetopflangeecoveredbyd
deckorsheetsteelclosuress
havvingahaunchdetailwithno
=0.75;(a)fo
orstudsweldedinacompo
ositeslabwith
hthedeckorieentedperpendiculartothebeamandemid
m
forstudsweld
dedthroughstteeldeck,orssteelsheetussedasgirderffillermaterial andembeddeed
ht 50mm;(b)f
inaacompositeslaabwiththede
eckorientedp
paralleltothebeam
=0.6forstudsweldedinacompositteslabwithdeckorientedp
perpendicularrtothebeamandemidht<5
50
mm
m
emiddht=distanceefromtheed
dgeofstudsh
hanktothesteeldeckweb,measuredattmidheighto
ofthedeckrib,
and
dintheloadb
bearingdirectiionofthestud(inotherwo
ords,inthediirectionofmaaximummome
entforasimp
ply
sup
pportedbeam),mm
wc=weightofconcreteperunitvolume(1500wc2500kg/m3)
bers
C
Chapter13
(4)StrengtthofChannelShearConnecctors
Thenomin
nalstrengthoffonechannelshearconnecctorembedde
edinasolidco
oncreteslabis
Q n = 0.3(t f + 0.5t w ) Lc
f c Ec
113.3.8
where
=flan
ngethicknesso
ofchannelsheearconnectorr,mm
=web
bthicknessoffchannelsheaarconnector,m
mm
=lenggthofchannelshearconnector,mm
Thestrenggthofthechannelshearconnectorshallbedeveloped
dbyweldingth
hechanneltothebeamflangefora
forceequaalto
,conssideringeccen
ntricityontheeconnector.
(5)RequiredNumberoffShearConneectors
The numb
ber of shear connectors reequired betw
ween the secttion of maxim
mum bending moment, po
ositive or
negative,aandtheadjacentsectionoffzeromomen
ntshallbeequ
ualtothehoriizontalshearfforceasdeterminedin
Sections1
10.9.3.2d(1)and10.9.3.2d(2)dividedby thenominal strengthofo
oneshearcon
nnectorasdettermined
fromSectiion10.9.3.2d((3)orSection10.9.3.2d(4).
(6)ShearC
ConnectorPlaacementandSSpacing
Shearconnectorsrequiiredoneachssideofthepo
ointofmaximumbendingm
moment,posiitiveornegative,shall
buted uniform
mly between that point and the adjaccent points of zero mome
ent, unless otherwise
be distrib
load and thee nearest
specified. However, thee number of shear connecctors placed between
b
any concentrated
c
pointofzeromoment shallbesufficcienttodevellopthemaxim
mummomenttrequiredatttheconcentra
atedload
point.
orsinstalledin
ntheribs
Shearconnectorsshall haveatleast 25mmoflateeralconcrete cover,excepttforconnecto
dsteeldecks.TThediameter ofstudsshalllnotbegreatterthan2.5ttimesthethicknessofthefflangeto
offormed
whichtheyarewelded,,unlesslocateedovertheweb.Theminim
mumcenterto
ocenterspaciingofstudconnectors
shall be six
s diameters along the lo
ongitudinal axis of the su
upporting com
mposite beam
m and four diameters
transverse
etothelongitudinalaxisofthesupportin
ngcompositebeam,exceptthatwithinth
heribsofform
medsteel
decksorie
entedperpend
diculartothe steelbeamtheminimum centertocen
nterspacingsh
hallbefourdiameters
inany dire
ection. The maximum
m
centtertocenter spacing of shear connectors shallnot exceed eighttimes the
totalslabtthicknessnor900mm.
13.3.3 SlabReinforrcement
13.3.3.1 General
Slabs shall be adequattely reinforce
ed to support all loads an
nd to control both crackiing transversee to the
compositeebeamspanaandlongitudin
nalcrackingovverthesteelssection.Reinfo
orcementshalllnotbelesstthanthat
requiredb
bythespecifieedfireresistan
ncedesignofttheassembly..
13.3.3.2 Parallelreinfo
orcement
Reinforcem
mentparalleltothespano
ofthebeamin
nregionsofne
egativebendingmomentofthecompositebeam
shallbean
nchoredbyem
mbedmentin concretethatisincompreession.Thereinforcemento
ofslabsthataaretobe
continuou
us over the en
nd support off steel section
ns or joists fittted with flexible end connections shall be given
specialatttention.Reinforcementatttheendsofbeeamssupporttingribbedslaabsperpendiculartothebeeamshall
benotlesssthantwo15Mbarsorequ
uivalent.
13.3.3.3 Transversere
einforcementconcreteslab
bonmetaldeck
Unlessitissknownfrom
mexperiencethatlongitudin
nalcrackingcaausedbycompositeactiondirectlyoverthesteel
section is unlikely, additional transsverse reinforrcement or other
o
effectivve means shaall be provideed. Such
ntshallbeplaacedinthelo
owerpartoftheslabandaanchoredsoastodevelopttheyield
additionalreinforcemen
ofthereinforccement.Theaareaofsuchrreinforcementtshallbenot lessthan0.00
02timesthe concrete
strengtho
areabeinggreinforcedandshallbeun
niformlydistrib
buted.
Part6
StructuralDesign
13.3.3.4 TransversereinforcementRibbedslabs
a) Wheretheribsareparalleltothebeamspan,theareaoftransversereinforcementshallbenot
lessthan0.002timestheconcretecoverslabareabeingreinforcedandshallbeuniformly
distributed.
b) Wheretheribsareperpendiculartothebeamspan,theareaoftransversereinforcementshallbe
notlessthan0.001timestheconcretecoverslabareabeingreinforcedandshallbeuniformly
distributed.
13.3.4 FlexuralStrengthofConcreteEncasedandFilledMembers
The nominal flexural strength of concreteencased and filled members shall be determined using one of the
followingmethods:
a) Thesuperpositionofelasticstressesonthecompositesection,consideringtheeffectsofshoring,
forthelimitstateofyielding(yieldmoment),where
b=0.90(LRFD) b=1.67(ASD)
b) Theplasticstressdistributiononthesteelsectionalone,forthelimitstateofyielding(plastic
moment),where
b=0.90(LRFD) b=1.67(ASD)
c) IfshearconnectorsareprovidedandtheconcretemeetstherequirementsofSection10.9.1.2,the
nominalflexuralstrengthshallbecomputedbasedupontheplasticstressdistributiononthe
compositesectionorfromthestraincompatibilitymethod,where
b=0.85(LRFD) b=1.76(ASD)
13.3.5 CombinedAxialForceandFlexure
Theinteractionbetweenaxialforcesandflexureincompositemembersshallaccountforstabilityasrequiredby
ChapterC.Thedesigncompressivestrength, cPn,andallowablecompressivestrength,Pn/c andthedesign
flexuralstrength,bMnandallowableflexuralstrength,Mn/b,aredeterminedasfollows:
c=0.75(LRFD)c=2.00(ASD)
b=0.90(LRFD)b=1.67(ASD)
(1)Thenominalstrengthofthecrosssectionofacompositemembersubjectedtocombinedaxialcompression
and flexure shall be determined using either the plastic stress distribution method or the straincompatibility
method.
(2)Toaccountfortheinfluenceoflengtheffectsontheaxialstrengthofthemember,thenominalaxialstrength
ofthemembershallbedeterminedbySection10.9withPotakenasthenominalaxialstrengthofthecross
sectiondeterminedinSection10.9.4(13)above.
13.3.6 SpecialCases
When composite construction does not conform to the requirements of Section 13.2 and Section 13.3, the
strengthofshearconnectorsanddetailsofconstructionshallbeestablishedbytesting.
13.4
CompositeConnections
ThisSectionisapplicabletoconnectionsinbuildingsthatutilizecompositeordualsteelandconcretesystems.
Composite connections shall be demonstrated to have Design Strength, ductility and toughness that is
comparable to that exhibited by similar structural steel or reinforced concrete connections that meet the
requirementsinPart6Chapter10andChapter5,respectively.Methodsforcalculatingtheconnectionstrength
shallmeettherequirementsinthisSection.
6726
Vol.2
Chapter13
13.4.1 General
Connections shall have adequate deformation capacity to resist the critical Required Strengths at the Design
Story Drift. Additionally, connections that are required for the lateral stability of the building under seismic
forcesshallmeettherequirementsinSection13.5baseduponthespecificsysteminwhichtheconnectionis
used.WhentheRequiredStrengthisbaseduponnominalmaterialstrengthsandnominalmemberdimensions,
thedeterminationoftherequiredconnectionstrengthshallaccountforanyeffectsthatresultfromtheincrease
intheactualNominalStrengthoftheconnectedmember.
13.4.2 NominalStrengthofConnections
The Nominal Strength of connections in composite Structural Systems shall be determined on the basis of
rational models that satisfy both equilibrium of internal forces and the strength limitation of component
materials and elements based upon potential limit states. Unless the connection strength is determined by
analysisandtesting,themodelsusedforanalysisofconnectionsshallmeetthefollowingrequirements:
(1)Whenrequired,forceshallbetransferredbetweenstructuralsteelandreinforcedconcretethroughdirect
bearingofheadedshearstudsorsuitablealternativedevices,byothermechanicalmeans,byshearfrictionwith
the necessary clamping force provided by reinforcement normal to the plane of shear transfer, or by a
combination of these means. Any potential bond strength between structural steel and reinforced concrete
shallbeignoredforthepurposeoftheconnectionforcetransfermechanism.
(2) Thenominalbearingand shearfriction strengthsshallmeet the requirements in Part6 Chapter 6 and10,
except that the strength reduction (resistance) factors shall be as given in Part 6 Chapter6. Unless a higher
strengthissubstantiatedbycyclictesting,thenominalbearingandshearfrictionstrengthsshallbereducedby
25percentforthecompositeseismicsystems.
(3) The Design Strengths of structural steel components in composite connections, as determined in Section
13.2andSection13.3andtheLRFDSpecification,shallequalorexceedtheRequiredStrengths.Structuralsteel
elementsthatareencasedinconfinedreinforcedconcretearepermittedtobeconsideredtobebracedagainst
out of plane buckling. Face Bearing Plates consisting of stiffeners between the flanges of steel beams are
requiredwhenbeamsareembeddedinreinforcedconcretecolumnsorwalls.
(4) The nominal shear strength of reinforcedconcreteencased steel Panel Zones in beamtocolumn
connections shall be calculated as the sum of the Nominal Strengths of the structural steel and confined
reinforcedconcreteshearelementsasdeterminedinPart6Chapter10andPart6Chapter5,respectively.The
strengthreduction(resistance)factorsforreinforcedconcreteshallbeasgiveninPart6Chapter6.
(5) Reinforcement shall be provided to resist all tensile forces in reinforced concrete components of the
connections.Additionally,theconcreteshallbeconfinedwithtransversereinforcement.Allreinforcementshall
befullydevelopedintensionorcompression,asappropriate,beyondthepointatwhichitisnolongerrequired
toresisttheforces.DevelopmentlengthsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithPart6Chapter6.Connections
shallmeetthefollowingadditionalrequirements:
(a)Whentheslabtransfershorizontaldiaphragmforces,theslabreinforcementshallbedesignedandanchored
tocarrytheinplanetensileforcesatallcriticalsectionsintheslab,includingconnectionstocollectorbeams,
columns,bracesandwalls.
(b) For connections between structural steel or Composite Beams and reinforced concrete or Reinforced
ConcreteEncased Composite Columns, transverse hoop reinforcement shall be provided in the connection
regiontomeettherequirementsinChapter6ofPart6exceptforthefollowingmodifications:
(i) Structural steel sections framing into the connections are considered to provide confinement over a width
equaltothatoffacebearingstiffenerplatesweldedtothebeamsbetweentheflanges.
(ii) Lap splices are permitted for perimeter ties when confinement of the splice is provided by Face Bearing
Platesorothermeansthatpreventsspallingoftheconcretecover.
(c) The longitudinal bar sizes and layout in reinforced concrete and Composite Columns shall be detailed to
minimize slippage of the bars through the beamtocolumn connection due to high force transfer associated
withthechangeincolumnmomentsovertheheightoftheconnection.
6727
Part6
StructuralDesign
13.5
SeismicProvisionsforCompositeStructuralSystems
These Provisions are intended for the design and construction of composite structural steel and reinforced
concrete members and connections in the Seismic Load Resisting Systems in buildings for which the design
forces resulting from earthquake motions have been determined on the basis of various levels of energy
dissipationintheinelasticrangeofresponse.
13.5.1 Scope
ProvisionsshallbeappliedinconjunctionwiththeAISCLoadandResistanceFactorDesign(LRFD)Specification
forStructuralSteelBuildings,hereinafterreferredtoastheLRFDSpecification.Allmembersandconnectionsin
theSeismicLoadResistingSystemshallhaveaDesignStrengthasrequiredintheLRFDSpecificationandshall
meettherequirementsintheseProvisions.TheapplicablerequirementsinPart6Chapter10shallbeusedfor
the design of structural steel components in composite systems. Reinforcedconcrete members subjected to
seismicforcesshallmeettherequirementsinChapter5and10ofPart6exceptasmodifiedintheseprovisions.
When the design is based upon elastic analysis, the stiffness properties of the component members of
compositesystemsshallreflecttheirconditionattheonsetofsignificantyieldingofthebuilding.
13.5.2 SeismicDesignCategories
The Required Strength and other seismic provisions for Seismic Design Categories, Seismic Use Groups or
SeismicZonesandthelimitationsonheightandirregularityshallbeasstipulatedinthePart6Chapter10.
13.5.3 Loads,LoadCombinations,andNominalStrengths
The loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated by the Applicable Building Code. Where Amplified
SeismicLoadsarerequiredbytheseprovisions,thehorizontalearthquakeloadE(asdefinedinPart6Chapter
10)shallbemultipliedbytheoverstrengthfactoroprescribedbythePart6Chapter10.
13.5.4 Materials
13.5.4.1 StructuralSteel
StructuralsteelusedincompositeSeismicLoadResistingSystemsshallmeettherequirementsinSection10.20
ofPart6inadditionSection13.1ofPart6.Thestructuralsteelsthatareexplicitlypermittedforuseinseismic
design have been selected based upon their inelastic properties and weld ability. In general, they meet the
following characteristics: (1) a ratio of yield stress to tensile stress not greater than 0.85; (2) a pronounced
stressstrainplateauattheyieldstress;(3)alargeinelasticstraincapability(forexample,tensileelongationof
20percentorgreaterina2in.(50mm)gagelength);and(4)goodweldability.Othersteelsshouldnotbeused
withoutevidencethattheabovecriteriaaremet.
13.5.4.2 ConcreteandSteelReinforcement
Concrete and steel reinforcement used in composite Seismic Load Resisting Systems shall meet the
requirementsinPart6Chapter5,andthefollowingrequirements:
(1)Thespecifiedminimumcompressivestrengthofconcreteincompositemembersshallequalorexceed2.5
ksi(17MPa).
(2) For the purposes of determining the Nominal Strength of composite members, fc shall not be taken as
greaterthan10ksi(69MPa)fornormalweightconcretenor4ksi(28MPa)forlightweightconcrete.
Concrete and steel reinforcement used in the composite Seismic Load Resisting Systems described shall also
meettherequirementsinPart6Chapter6.
13.5.5 CompositeMembers
13.5.5.1
CompositeFloorandRoofSlabs
The design of composite floor and roof slabs shall meet the requirements of ASCE 391. Composite slab
diaphragmsshallmeettherequirementsinthisSection.
DetailsshallbedesignedtotransferforcesbetweenthediaphragmandBoundaryMembers,CollectorElements,
andelementsofthehorizontalframingsystem.
6728
Vol.2
Chapter13
Thenominalshearstrengthofcompositediaphragmsandconcretefilledsteeldeckdiaphragmsshallbetaken
asthenominalshearstrengthofthereinforcedconcreteabovethetopofthesteeldeckribsinaccordancewith
Part6Chapter5.Alternatively,thecompositediaphragmdesignshearstrengthshallbedeterminedbyinplane
sheartestsofconcretefilleddiaphragms.
13.5.5.2 CompositeBeams
CompositeBeamsshallmeettherequirementsinSection13.3.CompositeBeamsthatarepartofCSMFshall
alsomeetthefollowingrequirements:
(1)Thedistancefromthemaximumconcretecompressionfibertotheplasticneutralaxisshallnotexceed:
Ycon + db
1700 Fy
1 +
Es
13.5.1
where
Ycon=distancefromthetopofthesteelbeamtothetopofconcrete,mm
db=depthofthesteelbeam,mm
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstrengthofthesteelbeam,MPa
Es=modulusofelasticityofthesteelbeam,MPa
(2) Beam flanges shall meet the requirements in Part 6 Section 10.20.9.4.2, except when fully reinforced
concreteencased compression elements have a reinforced concrete cover of at least 2 in. (50 mm) and
confinement is provided by hoop reinforcement in regions where plastic hinges are expected to occur under
seismicdeformations.HoopreinforcementshallmeettherequirementsinPart6Chapter6.
13.5.5.3 ReinforcedConcreteEncasedCompositeColumns
This Section is applicable to columns that: (1) consist of reinforcedconcrete encased structural steel sections
withastructuralsteelareathatcomprisesatleast4percentofthetotalcompositecolumncrosssection;and
(2) meet the additional limitations in Section 13.2.2.1. Such columns shall meet the requirements in Section
13.2.2, except as modified in this Section. Additional requirements, as specified for intermediate and special
seismicsystemsinSections13.5.5.3.2and13.5.5.3.3,shallapplyasrequired.
Columns thatconsist of reinforcedconcreteencased structuralsteel sectionswith a structuralsteel area that
comprises less than 4 percent of the total composite column crosssection shall meet the requirements for
reinforcedconcretecolumnsinPart6Chapter5exceptasmodifiedfor:
(1)ThesteelshapeshearconnectorsinSection13.5.4.3.1(2).
(2)Thecontributionofthereinforcedconcreteencasedstructuralsteelsectiontothestrengthofthecolumnas
providedinPart6Chapter6.
(3)Theseismicrequirementsforreinforcedconcretecolumnsasspecifiedinthedescriptionofthecomposite
seismicsystemsinSections13.5.5.3.1through13.5.5.3.3.
13.5.5.3.1
OrdinarySeismicSystemRequirements
The following requirements for ReinforcedConcreteEncased Composite Columns are applicable to all
compositesystems:
(1) The nominal shear strength of the column shall be determined as the nominal shear strength of the
structural shape plus the nominal shear strength that is provided by the tie reinforcement in the reinforced
concrete encasement. The nominal shear strength of the structural steel section shall be determined in
accordance with Section 10.20 of Chapter 6. The nominal shear strength of the tie reinforcement shall be
determinedinaccordancewithPart6Chapter5.InPart6Chapter5,thedimensionbwshallequalthewidthof
theconcretecrosssectionminusthewidthofthestructuralshapemeasuredperpendiculartothedirectionof
shear. The nominal shear strength shall be multiplied by v equal to 0.75 to determine the design shear
strength.
(2)CompositeColumnsthataredesignedtosharetheappliedloadsbetween the structuralsteelsectionand
reinforcedconcreteshallhaveshearconnectorsthatmeetthefollowingrequirements:
6729
Part6
StructuralDesign
(a) If an external member is framed directly to the structural steel section to transfer a vertical reaction Vu,
shearconnectorsshallbeprovidedtotransfertheforceVu(1AsFy/Pn)betweenthestructuralsteelsection
and the reinforced concrete, where As is the area of the structural steel section, Fy is the specified minimum
yield strength of the structural steel section, and Pn is the nominal compressive strength of the Composite
Column.
(b)IfanexternalmemberisframeddirectlytothereinforcedconcretetotransferaverticalreactionVu,shear
connectors shall be provided to transfer the force Vu As Fy /Pn between the structural steel section and the
reinforcedconcrete,whereAs,FyandPnareasdefinedabove.
(c)Themaximumspacingofshearconnectorsshallbe16in.(406mm)withattachmentalongtheoutsideflange
facesoftheembeddedshape.
(3)Themaximumspacingoftransversetiesshallbetheleastofthefollowing:
(a)onehalftheleastdimensionofthesection
(b)16longitudinalbardiameters
(c)48tiediameters
Transversetiesshallbelocatedverticallywithinonehalfthetiespacingabovethetopofthefootingorlowest
beam or slab in any story and shall be spaced as provided herein within onehalf the tie spacing below the
lowestbeamorslabframingintothecolumn.
Transverse bars shall have a diameter that is not less than onefiftieth of greatest side dimension of the
compositemember,exceptthattiesshallnotbesmallerthanNo.3barsandneednotbelargerthanNo.5bars.
Alternatively, welded wire fabric of equivalent area is permitted as transverse reinforcement except when
prohibitedforintermediateandspecialsystems.
(4)AllLoadCarryingReinforcementshallmeetthedetailingandsplicerequirementsinPart6Chapter5.Load
CarryingReinforcementshallbeprovidedateverycornerofarectangularcrosssection.Themaximumspacing
ofotherloadcarryingorrestraininglongitudinalreinforcementshallbeonehalfoftheleastsidedimensionof
thecompositemember.
(5) Splices and end bearing details for reinforcedconcreteencased structural steel sections shall meet the
requirementsinChapter5ofPart6.Ifadversebehavioraleffectsduetotheabruptchangeinmemberstiffness
and nominal tensile strength occur when reinforcedconcrete encasement of a structural steel section is
terminated, either at a transition to a pure reinforced concrete column or at the Column Base, they shall be
consideredinthedesign.
13.5.5.3.2
IntermediateSeismicSystemRequirements
ReinforcedConcreteEncased Composite Columns in intermediate seismic systems shall meet the following
requirementsinadditiontothoseinSection13.5.5.3.1:
(1)Themaximumspacingoftransversebarsatthetopandbottomshallbetheleastofthefollowing:
a)
b)
c)
d)
onehalftheleastdimensionofthesection
8longitudinalbardiameters
24tiebardiameters
12in.(305mm)
These spacings shall be maintained over a vertical distance equal to the greatest of the following lengths,
measuredfromeachjointfaceandonbothsidesofanysectionwhereflexuralyieldingisexpectedtooccur:
a) onesixththeverticalclearheightofthecolumn
b) themaximumcrosssectionaldimension
c) 18in.(457mm)
(2)Tiespacingovertheremainingcolumnlengthshallnotexceedtwicethespacingdefinedabove.
(3)Weldedwirefabricisnotpermittedastransversereinforcementinintermediateseismicsystems.
13.5.5.3.3
SpecialSeismicSystemRequirements
Reinforcedconcreteencased columns for special seismic systems shall meet the following requirements in
additiontothoseinSections13.5.4.3.2andSections13.5.4.4.3:
(1) The required axial strength for ReinforcedConcreteEncased Composite Columns and splice details shall
meettherequirementsinSection13.2.
6730
Vol.2
Chapter13
(2)LongitudinalLoadCarryingReinforcementshallmeettherequirementsinPart6Chapter6.
(3) Transverse reinforcement shall be hoop reinforcement as defined in Part 6 Chapter 6 and shall meet the
followingrequirements:
a) TheminimumareaoftiereinforcementAshshallmeetthefollowingrequirement:
Fy As
Ash = 0.09hcc s1
Pn
f c'
F
yh
13.5.2
where
hcc = crosssectional dimension of the confined core measured centertocenter of the tie reinforcement,
mm
s=spacingoftransversereinforcementmeasuredalongthelongitudinalaxisofthestructuralmember,mm
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstrengthofthestructuralsteelcore,MPa
As=crosssectionalareaofthestructuralcore,mm2
Pn=nominalaxialcompressivestrengthoftheCompositeColumncalculatedinaccordancewiththeLRFD
Specification,N
fc=specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete,MPa
Fyh=specifiedminimumyieldstrengthoftheties,MPa
Equation13.5.2neednotbesatisfiediftheNominalStrengthofthereinforcedconcreteencasedstructural
steelsectionaloneisgreaterthan1.0D+0.5L.
b) Themaximumspacingoftransversereinforcementalongthelengthofthecolumnshallbethe
lesserof6longitudinalloadcarryingbardiametersand152mm(6in.).
c) WhenspecifiedinSections13.5.5.3.3(4),(5)or(6),themaximumspacingoftransverse
reinforcementshallbethelesserofonefourththeleastmemberdimensionand102mm(4in.).
Forthisreinforcement,crossties,legsofoverlappinghoops,andotherconfiningreinforcement
shallbespacednotmorethan355mm(14in.)oncenterinthetransversedirection.
(4)ReinforcedConcreteEncasedCompositeColumnsinBracedFrameswithaxialcompressionforcesthatare
largerthan0.2timesPoshallhavetransversereinforcementasspecifiedinSection13.5.5.3.3(3),overthetotal
element length. This requirement need not be satisfied if the Nominal Strength of the reinforcedconcrete
encasedsteelsectionaloneisgreaterthan1.0D+0.5L.
(5)CompositeColumnssupportingreactionsfromdiscontinuedstiffmembers,suchaswallsorBracedFrames,
shallhavetransversereinforcementasspecifiedinSection13.5.5.3.3(3)(c)overthefulllengthbeneaththelevel
atwhichthediscontinuityoccursiftheaxialcompressionforceexceeds0.1timesPo.Transversereinforcement
shall extend into the discontinued member for at least the length required to develop full yielding in the
reinforcedconcreteencasedstructuralsteelsectionandlongitudinalreinforcement.Thisrequirementneednot
besatisfiediftheNominalStrengthofthereinforcedconcreteencasedstructuralsteelsectionaloneisgreater
than1.0D+0.5L.
(6) ReinforcedConcreteEncased Composite Columns that are used in CSMF shall meet the following
requirements:
a) Transversereinforcementshallmeettherequirementsin13.5.5.3.3(3)(c)atthetopandbottomof
thecolumnovertheregionspecifiedinSection6.4b.
b) Thestrongcolumn/weakbeamdesignrequirementsinshallbesatisfied.ColumnBasesshallbe
detailedtosustaininelasticflexuralhinging.
c) TheminimumrequiredshearstrengthofthecolumnshallmeettherequirementsinPart6Chapter
5.
(7)Whenthecolumnterminatesonafootingormatfoundation,thetransversereinforcementasspecifiedin
thissectionshallextendintothefootingormatatleast305mm(12in.).Whenthecolumnterminatesonawall,
thetransversereinforcementshallextendintothewallforatleastthelengthrequiredtodevelopfullyieldingin
thereinforcedconcreteencasedstructuralsteelsectionandlongitudinalreinforcement.
(8)Weldedwirefabricisnotpermittedastransversereinforcementforspecialseismicsystems.
6731
Part6
StructuralDesign
13.5.5.4 ConcreteFilledCompositeColumns
This Section is applicable to columns that: (1) consist of concretefilled steel rectangular or circular hollow
structuralsections(HSS)withastructuralsteelareathatcomprisesatleast4percentof thetotalcomposite
columncrosssection;and(2)meettheadditionallimitationsinSection13.2.Suchcolumnsshallbedesignedto
meettherequirementsinSection13.2,exceptasmodifiedinthisSection.
The design shear strength of the Composite Column shall be the design shear strength of thestructuralsteel
sectionalone.
Inthespecialseismicsystemsdescribedin,membersandcolumnsplicesforConcreteFilledCompositeColumns
shallalsomeettherequirementsinPart6Section10.20.
ConcreteFilledCompositeColumnsusedinCSMFshallmeetthefollowingadditionalrequirements:
(1)TheminimumrequiredshearstrengthofthecolumnshallmeettherequirementsinPart6Chapter5.
(2)Thestrongcolumn/weakbeamdesignrequirementsshallbemet.ColumnBasesshallbedesignedtosustain
inelasticflexuralhinging.
(3)TheminimumwallthicknessofconcretefilledrectangularHSSshallequal b F y / (2 Es ) fortheflatwidthb
ofeachface,wherebisasdefinedinPart6Chapter10Table10.2.1.
13.5.6 CompositeSteelPlateShearWalls(CSPW)
13.5.6.1 Scope
ThisSectionisapplicabletostructuralwallsconsistingofsteelplateswithreinforcedconcreteencasementon
one or both sides of the plate and structural steel or composite Boundary Members. CSPW shall meet the
13.5.6.2 WallElements
13.5.6.2.1
NominalShearStrength
The nominal shear strength of CSPW with a stiffened plate conforming to Section 13.5.4.2.2 shall be
determinedas:
Vns = 0.6 Asp Fy
13.5.3
where
Vns=nominalshearstrengthofthesteelplate,N
Asp=horizontalareaofstiffenedsteelplate,mm2
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstrengthoftheplate,MPa
The nominal shear strength of CSPW with a plate that does not meet the stiffening requirements in Section
13.5.4.2.2shallbebaseduponthestrengthoftheplate,excludingthestrengthofthereinforcedconcrete,and
meettherequirementsinthePart6Chapter10,includingtheeffectsofbucklingoftheplate.
13.5.6.2.2
DetailingRequirements
Thesteelplateshallbeadequatelystiffenedbyencasementorattachmenttothereinforcedconcreteifitcan
bedemonstratedwithanelasticplatebucklinganalysisthatthecompositewallcanresistanominalshearforce
equal to Vns . The concrete thickness shall be a minimum of 102 mm (4 in.) on each side when concrete is
providedonbothsidesofthesteelplateand200mm(8in.)whenconcreteisprovidedononesideofthesteel
plate.Headedshearstudconnectorsorothermechanicalconnectorsshallbeprovidedtopreventlocalbuckling
andseparationoftheplateandreinforcedconcrete.Horizontalandverticalreinforcementshallbeprovidedin
the concrete encasement to meet the detailing requirements in Part 6 Chapter 5. The reinforcement ratio in
bothdirectionsshallnotbelessthan0.0025;themaximumspacingbetweenbarsshallnotexceed455mm(18
in.).
ThesteelplateshallbecontinuouslyconnectedonalledgestostructuralsteelframingandBoundaryMembers
withweldsand/orslipcriticalhighstrengthboltstodevelopthenominalshearstrengthoftheplate.TheDesign
StrengthofweldedandboltedconnectorsshallmeettheadditionalrequirementsinPart6Chapter10.
6732
Vol.2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 7
CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AND SAFETY
Chapter 1
CONSTRUCTIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND PRACTICES
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.2 SCOPE
1.3 TERMINOLOGY
1.4 PLANNING
1.4.1 Responsibilities
1.4.2 First Aid Attendant
1.4.3 Temporary Construction
1.4.4 Preconstruction Phase
1.4.5 Construction Phase
1.5 CONSTRUCTION CONTROL
1.5.1 General
1.5.2 Professional Services and Responsibilities
1.5.3 Construction of all Elements
1.5.4 Construction Using Bamboo
1.5.5 Low Income Housing
1.5.6 Site Preparation
1.5.7 Use of New /Alternative Construction Techniques
1.5.8 Permits
1.5.9 Tests and Inspections
1.6 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
1.6.1 Time Management
1.6.2 Quality Management
1.6.3 Health, Safety and Environment
1.6.4 Cost Management
1.7 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND WORKERS
1.7.1 General
1.7.2 Adjoining Property
1.7.3 Protective Fences and Railings
1.7.4 Canopies, Overhangs and Platforms
1.7.5 Protection of Utilities
1.7.6 Use of Road and Footpath
1.7.7 Protective Devices
1.7.8 Notices and Signs
1.7.9 Watchman and Auditory Signal
1.7.10 Safe Load
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
1.8.1 Protection of Existing Drainage Systems and Utilities
1.8.2 Protection of Soil, Aquifers, and Water Channels against Pollution
1.8.3 Protection of Air Quality from Obnoxious Emissions
1.8.4 Protection from Sound Pollution
7-i
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-8
7-8
7-8
7-9
7-9
7-9
7-10
7-10
7-10
7-10
7-10
7-10
7-11
7-11
7-11
Vol. 2
Part 7
7-12
Chapter 2
STORAGE, STACKING AND HANDLING PRACTICES
2.1 GENERAL PRACTICES
2.1.1 General Requirements and Restrictions on Storage and Handling:
2.1.2 Manual Handling
2.1.3 Protection against Fire
2.1.4 Housekeeping
2.2 STORAGE REQUIREMENT BY CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS
2.2.1 Climatically Sensitive Materials
2.2.2 Durable Materials
2.2.3 Materials Vulnerable to Rough Handling
2.2.4 Inflammable and/or Fire-Sensitive Materials
2.2.5 Hazardous Materials
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS
2.4 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
2.5 LOADING AND UNLOADING OF MATERIALS
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-14
7-14
7-14
7-16
7-18
7-21
7-22
7-25
7-25
7-26
Chapter 3
SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
3.1.2 Safety Management
3.2 TERMINOLOGY
3.2.1 Safety of Workmen
3.2.2 Site Precautions
3.2.3 Site Amenities
3.3 EXCAVATION AND FOUNDATION WORK
3.3.1 General
3.3.2 Excavating Machinery and Tools
3.3.3 Excavated Materials and Surcharges
3.3.4 Ground Water
3.3.5 Ground Condition
3.3.6 Overhang, Slopes and Cavities
3.3.7 Blasting and Vibration
3.3.8 Health Hazards during Excavation
3.3.9 Safety of Materials
3.3.10 Piling and Deep Foundation
3.3.11 Working in Compressed Air
3.3.12 Adjoining Properties and Service Lines
3.4 PILE RIG
3.4.1 Erection of Pile Rig
3.4.2 Operation of Pile Rig
3.4.3 Piles
3.4.4 Inspection and Tests
3.5 CONSTRUCTION OF WALLS
3.5.1 General
3.5.2 Scaffold
7-27
7-27
7-27
7-27
7-28
7-28
7-28
7-28
7-28
7-29
7-29
7-29
7-29
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-31
7-31
7-32
7-32
7-32
7-32
7-33
7-33
7-33
7-33
7-33
1.8.5
7-ii
Site Reinstatement
Vol. 2
Part 7
3.5.3 Ladders
3.5.4 Opening in Walls
3.5.5 Projection from Walls
3.5.6 Common Hazards During Walling
3.6 CONSTRUCTION OF FLOORS
3.6.1 General
3.6.2 Use of Sheets
3.6.3 Platforms
3.6.4 Flat Roof
3.6.5 Openings and Holes
3.6.6 Skeleton Construction
3.7 CONCRETE WORK
3.7.1 General
3.7.2 Prestressed Concrete
3.7.3 Concrete Mixers
3.7.4 Concrete Truck and Buckets
3.8 FORMWORK AND SCAFFOLD
3.8.1 Scaffold and Centering Materials
3.8.2 Formwork for Concrete
3.8.3 Load Capacity
3.8.4 Bamboos
3.8.5 Timber Posts
3.8.6 Steel Centering
3.9 ERECTION OPERATIONS
3.9.1 Erection and Hoisting
3.9.2 Small Articles
3.9.3 Hoist Protection
3.9.4 Lifting Gear
3.9.5 Cranes
3.9.6 Slings
3.9.7 Inspection
3.10 ELECTRIFICATION, EQUIPMENT AND OPERATIONS
3.10.1 Wiring System
3.10.2 Guarding of Cables
3.10.3 Lifts
3.10.4 Construction Machinery
3.10.5 Heating of Bitumen and Tar
3.10.6 Flame Cutting and Welding
3.10.7 Riveting Operation
3.11 CONSTRUCTION HAZARDS
3.11.1 General
3.11.2 Fire Hazards
3.11.3 Health Hazards
3.11.4 Skin Hazard
3.11.5 Noise Hazard
3.12 ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION OF CONCRETE FRAMED
7-iii
7-34
7-34
7-34
7-35
7-35
7-35
7-35
7-36
7-36
7-36
7-36
7-36
7-36
7-36
7-37
7-37
7-37
7-37
7-38
7-38
7-38
7-39
7-39
7-39
7-39
7-40
7-40
7-40
7-41
7-41
7-41
7-42
7-42
7-42
7-42
7-42
7-42
7-43
7-44
7-44
7-44
7-44
7-46
7-46
7-46
7-47
Vol. 2
Part 7
STRUCTURES (HIGH RISE BUILDINGS)
3.12.1 Handling of Plant

3.12.2 Formwork
3.12.3 Ramps and Gangways
3.12.4 Materials Hoists
3.12.6 Erection of Prefabricated Members
3.12.7 Heated Concrete
3.12.8 Structural Connections
3.13 MISCELLANEOUS
3.13.1 Stair , Ramp and Gangway
3.13.2 Fragile Fixture
3.13.3 Hand Tools
3.13.4 Steel Structure
3.13.5 Finish Works
7-47
7-47
7-48
7-48
7-49
7-50
7-50
7-50
7-50
7-50
7-51
7-51
7-51
7-52
Chapter 4
DEMOLITION WORK
4.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURE
4.1.1 General
4.1.2 Planning
4.1.3 Protection of Adjoining Property
4.1.4 Precautions prior to Demolition
4.1.5 Protection of Public
4.1.6 Sidewalk Shed and Canopies
4.2 PRECAUTIONS DURING DEMOLOTION
4.2.1 General
4.2.2 Sequence of Demolition Operation
4.2.3 Wall
4.2.4 Floor
4.2.5 Special Elements
4.2.6 Mechanical Demolition
4.2.7 Miscellaneous
4.3 BLASTING OPERATION AND USE OF EXPLOSIVES
4.3.1 General
4.3.2 Code of Signal
4.3.3 Supervision and Responsibility
4.3.4 Protection of site Personnel and Installations
4.3.5 Safety of Third Parties
4.3.6 Use of Explosives
4.3.7 Blasting Accessories
4.4 LOWERING, REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
4.4.1 General
4.4.2 Use of Chutes
4.4.3 Removal of Debris
4.4.4 Disposal of Materials
4.4.5 Regularization of Plots
7-53
7-53
7-53
7-53
7-53
7-54
7-54
7-54
7-54
7-54
7-55
7-56
7-56
7-58
7-58
7-58
7-58
7-58
7-58
7-59
7-59
7-59
7-60
7-60
7-60
7-60
7-61
7-61
7-61
7-iv
Vol. 2
Part 7
Chapter 5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT, REPAIRS, RETROFITTING AND

STRENGTHENING OF BUILDINGS
MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT
TERMINOLOGY
BUILDING MAINTENANCE
5.3.1 General
5.3.2 Factors Affecting Maintenance
5.3.3 Maintenance Policy
5.3.4 Maintenance Work Programmes
5.3.5 Maintenance Guides
5.3.6 Planning of Maintenance Work
5.3.7 Feed Back
5.3.8 Means of Effecting Maintenance
ACCESS
5.4.1 General
5.4.2 Access Facilities
5.4.3 Access to Confined Spaces
RECORDS
5.5.1 General
5.5.2 Use of Building Records
5.5.3 Mechanical Records
5.5.4 Electrical Records
INSPECTIONS
5.6.1 General
5.6.2 Frequency of Inspection
5.6.3 Inspection of Engineering Services

5.7 MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES
5.7.1 Planning of Maintenance Work
5.8 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
5.9 PREVENTION OF CRACKS
5.10 REPAIRS AND SEISMIC STRENGTHENING OF BUILDINGS
5.10.1 Non-structural/Architectural Repairs
5.10.2 Structural Repairs
5.10.3 Seismic Strengthening
5.10.4 Seismic Retrofitting
5.10.5 Strengthening or Retrofitting Versus Reconstruction
5.11 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7-v
7-63
7-63
7-63
7-63
7-64
7-64
7-65
7-65
7-65
7-65
7-66
7-66
7-66
7-66
7-66
7-67
7-67
7-67
7-68
7-68
7-69
7-69
7-69
7-69
7-70
7-70
7-71
7-71
7-71
7-71
7-72
7-72
7-73
7-73
7-73
Vol. 2
Chapter 1
1.1
CONSTRUCTIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND

PRACTICES
INTRODUCTION
This part of the Code provides the minimum requirements for safe constructional operations, constructional
planning, management and practices in buildings; as well as for storage, stacking and handling of materials and
resources used in buildings. It describes precautionary measures to be adopted to ensure the safety of public,
environment & infrastructure, property, workmen, materials, services, plant and equipment. It also covers
guidelines relating to maintenance management, repairs, retrofitting and strengthening of buildings.
1.2
SCOPE
The regulations stated in this part cover the constructional responsibilities and practices in building sites; safe
storing, stacking and handling of materials, equipments and other resources; and safety of personnel during
construction operations. The provisions of this part shall apply to all construction operations viz. erection,
alteration, repair, removal or demolition of buildings and structures.
Nothing herein contained shall be construed to nullify any rules, regulations, safety standards or those
contained in the various act of the Government of Bangladesh, statutes governing the protection of the public
or workers from any hazard involved in manufacturing, mining and other processes and operations which
generate toxic gases, dust or other elements dangerous to the respiratory system, eye sight or health.
1.3
TERMINOLOGY
This section provides an alphabetical list of the terms used in and applicable to this part of the Code. In case of
any conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in any other part, without
prejudice to provisions arising from laws, statutes and recourses provided under such laws, statutes and
covenants of GOB and trade bodies. The meaning provided in this part shall govern for interpretation of the
provisions of this part. References shall be made to other part of this Code for terms not defined in this section.
AUTHORITY: The Authority which has been created by a statute and which, for the purpose of administering this
Code or part thereof, may authorize a committee or an official to act on its behalf. (This definition of Authority
shall apply to all appearances of the term in this Code written with a capital A).
EMPLOYER: The Employer is the party named who employs the Consultant and/or Contractor to carry out the
Works
CONSULTANT: The Consultant is the organisation/person whose proposal to perform the Services like design,
supervision or other technical and/or management services has been accepted by the Owner/Client and has a
Contract Agreement to execute the service.
PROFESSIONALS: Professionals means technical personnel and support staff provided by the Consultant or by
any Sub-Consultant and assigned for supervising the execution and completion of the Works and administering
the Contract
CONTRACTORS: Contractor means the natural person, private or government enterprise, or a combination of
the above, whose Tender to carry out the Works has been accepted by the Employer and is named as such in
the Contract Agreement, and includes the legal successors or permitted assigns of the Contractor.
Part 7
Construction Practices and Safety
7-1
Part 7
WORKMEN/ LABOURERS: Workmen means any natural person, who has a Contract with the Contractor to carry
out a part of the work in the Contract, which includes work on the Site.
AUTHORIZED OFFICER: An officer appointed by the Government by notification in the Official Gazette to
BLAST AREA: The area in which danger may arise during or prior to demolition including the potential area
affected by preparation, handling and use of explosives.
BLASTING: The operation of disintegrating rock, structure etc. by firing an explosive charge.
CARTRIDGE: A wrapped or otherwise protected cylinder of defined size of a homogeneous explosive material.
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT: All equipment, machineries, tools and temporary retaining structures and working
platforms, such as derricks, concrete pump, staging, scaffolds, runways, ladders and all material handling
equipment including safety devices.
DETONATOR: An instantaneous or delay initiator for explosive materials and containing a charge of high
explosive fired by means of a flame, spark or electric current.
EXPLOSIVE: Any substance, whether or not contained in a device, used or manufactured with a view to
producing an effect by explosion.
FLOOR HOLE : An opening in any floor, platform, pavement, or yard, measuring less than 300 mm but more than
25 mm in its least dimension, through which materials but not persons may fall; e.g. a belt hole, pipe opening or
slot opening.
FLOOR OPENING : An opening in any floor, platform, pavement or yard bigger than a floor hole measuring 300
mm or more in its least dimension, through which a person may fall; e.g. hatchway, stair or ladder opening,
hopper mouth pit or large manhole.
GUARD RAILING: A barrier erected along exposed edges of an open side, floor opening, wall opening, ramp,
platform or catwalk or balcony, etc. to prevent the fall of persons.
HOISTS: A platform, bucket or similar enclosure made of steel frames, struts and timber planks used for the
lifting or lowering of construction material and workmen, the hoists being operated from a point outside the
conveyance.
MAGAZINE: Any building or structure used for the storage of explosives with approval of the Authority.
PILE RIG: The complete pile driving equipment comprising piling frame, leader, hammer, extractor, winch and
power unit. Complete pile driving rig may be mounted on rafts or pontoon or rails. Pile rig may also be a mobile
unit mounted on trailers or trucks, or a special full revolving rig for raking piles.
PLATFORM: A working space for persons, elevated above the surrounding floor or ground, e.g. balcony or
platform for the operation of machinery and equipment.
PRIMER: A cartridge cord or container of explosive into which a detonator or detonating cord is inserted or
attached and is designed to initiate a larger charge.
SALVAGE: An act of saving and utilization of reusable scrap materials conforming to the requirements of this
Code.
SCAFFOLD: A temporary erection of timber or metal work used to support or to allow the hoisting and lowering
of workmen, tools and materials during construction, alteration or demolition of a building
SHOTFIRER: The person in immediate control of the use of explosives.
TOE BOARD: A vertical barrier erected along exposed edge of a floor opening, wall opening, platform, catwalk or
ramp at floor level to prevent fall of materials or persons.
WALL HOLE: An opening in any wall or partition having a height of more than 25 mm to less than750 mm and
having no restriction in width.
WALL OPENING: An opening in any wall or partition having a height of at least 750 mm and a width of at least
450 mm.
7-2
Vol. 7
Construction Responsibilities and Practices
1.4
Chapter 1
PLANNING
Construction planning aspects aim to identify and develop various stages of project execution on site which shall
be consistent with the management considerations. Planning aspects evolve out of the objectives of project and
requirements of the final completed constructed facility. These objectives can relate to the final constraints,
cost considerations, quality standards, safety standards as well as both environmental and health
considerations. Construction practices shall, then have to satisfy these objectives during construction phase of
the project. Having established objectives of the construction phase, planning determines processes, resources
(including materials, equipments, human and environmental) and monitoring system to ensure that the
practices are appropriately aligned. Adequate knowledge about pre-construction phase evolution of project,
especially related to customers requirements, is an essential prerequisite for construction planning.
1.4.1
Responsibilities
In a construction or demolition work, the terms of contract between the owner and the contractor, and
between a consultant and the owner, shall be clearly defined and put in writing. These, however, will not
absolve the owner from any of his responsibilities under the various provisions of this Code, and other
applicable regulations and byelaws.
The terms of contract between the owner and the contractor will determine the responsibilities and liabilities of
either party in the concerned matters, within the provisions of the relevant acts and codes (e.g. the Employer's
Liability Act 1938, the Factories Act 1965, the Fatal Accident Act 1955 and Workmen's Compensation Act 1923).
The owner, or the professional appointed by him to supervise the work, shall ensure the quality of materials
used, soundness of the work and observance of all precautionary measures.
1.4.2
First Aid Attendant
Depending on the scope and nature of the work, at least one person trained in first aid for every 100 workers
shall be available at work site to render and direct first aid to casualties. The first aid attendant shall have a
refresher course every five years and certificates renewed.
A telephone shall be made available to first aid assistant with emergency telephone numbers prominently
displayed. Record/reports of all accidents and actions taken thereon shall be kept by the first aid attendant and
forwarded to appropriate authorities when asked.
1.4.3
Temporary Construction
Plan, layout, design and specification of all temporary constructions, e.g. workers' shed, toilet, site store, site
office, runway, trestle, foot bridge, guard shed etc., which are likely to interfere with right-of-way or utility
services provided by various agencies, shall be submitted to the respective authorities for approval before
commencement of any construction operation.
Temporary structures shall be constructed from inflammable materials, but they shall be so located as not to
cause any fire hazard to adjoining structures or works and neighboring properties.
1.4.4
Preconstruction Phase
Besides the design aspects, preconstruction phase should also address all the issues related to the
implementation of the design at the site through suitable construction strategy. During the design stage, the site
conditions should be fully understood with anticipated difficulties and avoid the risk of subsequent delays and
changes after the construction has started.
The selection of construction methods, building systems and materials, components, manpower and
equipments and techniques are best done in the preconstruction phase. Such selection is influenced by the local
conditions like terrain, climate, vulnerability for disasters, etc.
Construction in busy localities of cities needs special considerations and meticulous planning due to restricted
space, adjoining structures, underground utilities, traffic restrictions, noise and other environmental pollution
and other specific site constraints,
7-3
Part 7
The constructability aspects of the proposed construction methods needs to be carefully evaluated at the
planning stage to ensure ease of construction besides optimizing the construction schedule and achieving
quality, reliability and maintainability of the constructed facilities.
Constructional practices in hilly regions needs to take into considerations the problem of landslides, slope
stability, drainage, etc, besides ensuring no adverse impact on the fragile environmental conditions.
Durability of constructions in corrosive atmospheric conditions like coastal regions and aggressive ground
situations with high chlorides and sulphates should also be taken care of with appropriate constructional
practices.
Constructional practices in disaster prone areas need specific planning. The type of construction, use of
materials, construction techniques require special considerations in such areas.
Adverse weather conditions have strong bearing on construction phase. Situations wherein constructions are to
be carried out in adverse weather conditions, such as heavy and continuous rain fall, extreme hot or cold
weather, dust storms, etc, the practices have to address the relevant aspects. Accordingly, suitable design and
field operations should be adapted or redefined in anticipation of these aspects. Some of these aspects are:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Site layout which enables accessibility in adverse weather.

Adequate protected storage for weather sensitive materials/equipments.
Protections to personnel from extreme hot/control conditions.
Scheduling to allow maximization of outdoor activities during fair weather conditions.
Special design and construction provisions for activities in extreme temperature conditions like hot
or cold weather concreting, staple of false work in extreme wind conditions (gusts).
f) Adequate lighting for shorter days in winter/night work.
g) Design for early enclosure.
h) Adjacent historically important structure shall be given highest care against any damage during
construction process.
All sanitary facilities shall be kept in a hygienic condition. Temporary toilets shall be enclosed, screened and
weather proofed and shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the relevant part of the Code.
1.4.5
1.4.5.1
Construction Phase
Organizational structure
The site management should be carried out through suitable site organization structure with roles and
responsibilities assigned to the construction personnel for various construction related functions. Safety
management is one of the important components of site management.
1.4.5.2
Site layout
The layout of the construction site shall be carefully planned keeping in view the various requirements to
construction activities and the specific constraints in terms of its size, shape, topography, traffic and other
restrictions, in public interest. The site layout shall take into considerations the following factors:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Easy access and exit, with proper parking of vehicle and equipments during construction.
Properly located material stores for easy handling and storage
Adequate stack areas for bulk construction materials.
Optimum location of plants and equipments (batching plants, etc).
Layout of temporary services (water, power, power suppression unit, hoists, cranes, elevators, etc).
Adequate yard lighting and lighting for night shifts.
Temporary buildings; site office and shelter for workforce with use of noncombustible materials as
far as possible including emergency medical aids
h) Roads for vehicular movement with effective drainage plan.
i) Construction safety with emergency access and evacuations and security measures.
j) Fabrication yards for reinforcement assembly, concrete casting and shattering materials.
k) Fencing, barricades and signage.
7-4
Vol. 7
Chapter 1
Access for firefighting equipment vehicles
1.4.5.3
Access for firefighting equipment shall be provided to the construction site at the start of construction and
maintained until all construction work is completed.
Free access from the street to fire hydrants/static water tanks, where available, shall be provided and
maintained at all times.
No materials for construction shall be placed within 3m of hydrants/static water tanks.
During building operations, free access to permanent, temporary or portable firstaid firefighting equipment
shall be maintained at all times.
In all buildings over two stories high, at least one stairway shall be provided in usable condition at all times. This
stairway shall be extended upward as each floor is completed. There shall be a handrail on the staircase.
Construction strategy and construction sequence
1.4.5.4
Construction strategy and construction methods are to be evolved at the planning and design stage specific to
the conditions and constraints of the project site and implemented by the site management personnel to ensure
ease of construction and smooth flow of construction activities.
Sites of high water table conditions with aggressive chemical contents of subsoil needs special design
considerations. Buildings with basement in sites of high water table should be planned with dewatering scheme
with appropriate construction sequence, Duration of dewatering shall continue till sufficient dead loads are
achieved to stabilize the buoyancy loads with adequate factor of safety. The construction sequence should be
planned taking into consideration the following aspects:
a) Availability of resources (men, material and equipment);
b) Construction methods employed including prefabrication;
c) Planned construction time;
d) Design requirements and load transfer mechanism;
e) Stability of ground like in hilly terrain;
f) Ensuring slope stability with retaining structure before the main construction;
g) Installation and movement of heavy equipments like cranes and piling equipments;
h) Effect of weather; and
i)
j)
1.5
1.5.1
Minimum time to be spent below ground level working.

Protection against ground water seepage.
CONSTRUCTION CONTROL
General
All construction including extension, alteration and demolition shall require a permit from the Authority.
Permits shall also be obtained from relevant organizations for service connections and other facilities. The
construction work shall conform to the plan approved by the Authority.
The owner shall make arrangements for obtaining the required approvals.
All new work or alteration shall be planned, designed, supervised and executed by competent professionals of
relevant discipline.
1.5.2
Professional Services and Responsibilities
The responsibility of professionals with regard to planning designing and supervision of building construction
work, etc and that of the owner shall be in accordance with the relevant part of the Code and professional
practice. Employment of trained workers shall be encouraged for building construction activity.
7-5
Part 7
1.5.3
Construction of all Elements
Construction of all elements of a building shall be in accordance with good practice. It shall also be ensured that
the elements of structure satisfy the appropriate fire resistance requirements as specified in Part 4 Fire
Protection, and quality of building materials/components used shall be in accordance with Part 5 Building
Materials.
1.5.4
Construction Using Bamboo
Bamboo being a versatile resource characterized by high strength, low mass and ease of working with simple
tools, it is desirable to increasingly make appropriate use of this material. Design of structures using bamboo
shall be done in accordance with Part 6 Structural Design, Section 4 Bamboo, Chapter 11 Timber.
For construction using bamboo, some of the important constructional provisions given below shall be followed.
Bamboo can be cut and split easily with very simple hand tools. Immature bamboos are soft, pliable and can be
molded to desired shape. It takes polish and paint well.
While it is possible to work with bamboo simply using a machete, a few basic tools, such as, machete, hack saw,
axe, hatchet, sharpening tools, adze, chisel (20 mm), chill, wood rasps, steel rod, and pliers, will greatly increase
the effectiveness of the construction process.
For providing safety to the structure against fire, bamboo may be given fire retardant treatment using following
chemicals; a few drops of concentrated HCL shall be added to the solution to dissolve the precipitated salts:
Ammonium phosphate
3 parts
Boric acid
3 parts
Copper sulphate
1 part
Zinc chloride
5 parts
Sodium dichromate
3 parts
Water
100 parts
Bamboo indirect contact with ground, bamboo on rock or preformed concrete footing, bamboo incorporated
into concrete or bamboo piles may form the foundation structure.
The floor of bamboo may be at ground level with covering of bamboo matting, etc. In elevated floors, bamboo
members become an integral part of structural framework of building. The floor will comprise structural
bamboo elements and bamboo decking.
The jointing techniques in construction using bamboo shall be in accordance with Part 6 Structural Design,
Section 4 Bamboo, Chapter 11 Timber.
1.5.5
Low Income Housing
For low income housing, appropriate planning and selection of building materials and techniques of
construction have to be judiciously done and applied in practice. Requirements of low income housing specified
in Part 3 General Building Requirements, shall be followed. However, all requirements regarding structural
safety, health safety and fire safety shall be in accordance with this Code.
1.5.6
Site Preparation
While preparing the site for construction, bush and other wood, debris, etc, shall be removed and promptly
disposed of so as to minimize the attendant hazards. Temporary buildings for construction offices and storage
shall be so located as to cause the minimum fire hazards and shall be constructed from noncombustible
materials as far as possible.
7-6
Vol. 7
1.5.7
Chapter 1
Use of New /Alternative Construction Techniques
The provisions of this part are not intended to prevent use of any construction techniques including any
alternative materials, nonspecifically prescribed by the Code, provided any such alternative has been approved.
The Authority may approve any such alternative such as ferrocement construction, row-lock (rat trap) bond in
masonry, stretcher bond in filler slab and filler slab provided; that the proposed alternative is satisfactory and
conforms to the provisions of relevant parts regarding material, design and construction of this Code. The
material or method or work offered as alternative is, for the purpose intended, at least equivalent to that
prescribed in the Code in quality, strength, compatibility, effectiveness, fire and water resistance, durability and
safety.
1.5.8
Permits
The owner of a building shall obtain permission from the Authority for the work to be undertaken in accordance
with the provisions of the relevant part of this Code.
Special permits shall be obtained from relevant authorities before commencement of a particular construction
work for the following items and for any other item as decided by the Building Official:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
1.5.9
storing materials on roads and sidewalks;

using water, electricity, gas, sewerage or other public utilities;
digging roads or interfering with the drainage system;
storing and handling of explosives; and
affecting any structure having historical association and antiquity.
Tests and Inspections
The Authority shall notify both the owner and the contractor of any unsafe, unlawful or unethical situation
discovered during inspection and direct them to take necessary remedial measures to remove the hazard or
rectify the violation.
Where the strength or adequacy of any scaffold or other device or construction equipment is in doubt, or where
any complaint is lodged, the Authority shall inspect such equipment and shall prohibit its use until tested safe or
until all danger is removed.
1.6
CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
Employer and Management shall be responsible for optimizing Construction Planning, resource utilization, and
scope, time, quality, health, safety and environment and cost for implementation, monitoring and control for
their effectiveness. This may be preferably in line with proven National/International documentation system
covering all aspects of monitoring and controls. Various parameters to be managed during construction are as
below.
1.6.1
Time Management
The project shall be completed in the defined time schedule to get its fruitful benefits. The system planned shall
cover total schedule of completion with one or more construction agencies, number of vendors, identification of
total resources, timely availability of all inputs, including critical ones, its processing during construction of a
project. The system shall include a periodic review of a project with all parameters as well as catch up plans in
case of delay identified for controls and reporting from time to time. The system planned shall preferably be
computer friendly and simple to follow for implementation, monitoring and controls and for reporting from
time-to-time.
1.6.2
Quality Management
Quality of a project shall be planned for all activities from inception to completion. It is desirable that the system
planned gives adequate assurance and controls that it shall meet project quality objectives. The system shall
cover review of existing requirements, subcontracting, materials, processes and controls during process,
auditing, training of personnel, final inspection and acceptance. All activities shall be planned and controlled.
Quality systems approach may be referred for planning, suitable to a particular project for implementation.
7-7
Part 7
1.6.3
Health, Safety and Environment
Each project affects the safety and health of the workmen and surroundings during construction. Various
activities having impact on health, safety and environment need to be identified with their likely effect and
proposed preventive corrective actions, together with the concerned statutory obligations. The system planned
for health, safety and environment shall address and cover the above including use of personnel protective
equipments by all concerned and reporting on their monitoring and controls during project implementation.
1.6.4
Cost Management
To keep the project under viable proposition, it is desired that cost of the project during construction are
monitored and controlled through a documentation system. The various parameters which may affect the basic
cost, escalations, cost due to variation in scope and quantities, etc need to be monitored at a defined frequency.
The system planned shall be in line with a proven cost control method or similar in nature and cost incurred visa-vis cost sanctioned and cost anticipated to be reported and controlled from time to time.
1.7
1.7.1
PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND WORKERS

General
Erection, alteration, renovation, remodeling, repairing, removal or demolition of a building or structure shall be
conducted in a safe manner. Suitable protection for the general public and workers employed thereon shall be
provided according to the various provisions of this Code.
All existing and adjoining public and private property shall be protected from any damage due to construction
operations. Whenever requested, site plans, construction details, and specification shall be submitted for review
by the concerned agency.
All equipment and safeguard required for the construction work such as temporary stair, ladder, ramp, scaffold,
hoist, runway, barricade, chute, lift etc. shall be substantially constructed and erected so as not to create any
unsafe situation for the workmen using them or the workmen and general public passing under, on or near
them.
Public walkway shall not be occupied to carry out work under a building permit unless the pedestrians are
protected as specified in this section. Any material or structure temporarily occupying public property, including
fences and walkways, shall be adequately lighted at night.
1.7.2
Adjoining Property
The owner of the building shall preserve all adjoining structures and walls from damage. He shall support the
adjoining building or structure by proper foundations to comply with the Code.
Necessary permissions to preserve and protect the adjoining plot, building or structure shall be obtained by the
owner of the building to be constructed. Adjoining property shall be completely protected from any damage
due to the building operation when the owner of the adjoining property permits free access to the adjoining site
and building.
If required, the owner of the adjoining plot, building or structure shall be granted necessary permission to enter
the construction site to make his own property safe.
No part of any structure, except signs, shall project beyond the property line of the site. Sidewalk sheds,
underpinning and other temporary protective guards and devices may project beyond the property lines if
approved by the Authority. Where necessary, the permission of the adjoining property owner shall also be
obtained.
Where a construction or demolition is undertaken at a level higher than the adjacent structure, the roof, roof
outlets, skylights and other roof structures of adjoining buildings shall be protected against damage. This shall
be ensured by the owner of the construction site at his own expense.
Where the grade of the adjoining plot is lower than the site level, a retaining wall shall be erected, if necessary,
at the owner's expense and on his site. Design and construction of retaining wall shall conform to the structural
7-8
Vol. 7
Chapter 1
requirements for such walls, and may have a railing or fence at the top to provide a total height of not less than
1 m above the finished grade of the higher plot.
If the owner, lessee or tenant of the adjoining building refuses permission to have the roofs and skylights of the
adjoining building protected, the responsibility and expense for the said protection shall transfer to the person
refusing such permission.
During any demolition or excavation work, the structure or the wall shall be maintained structurally safe by
adequate temporary props and lateral supports.
1.7.3
Protective Fences and Railings
Pedestrian traffic on the adjacent road or footpath, or the walkway constructed shall be protected by a railing or
fence. Protective railing or fence shall also be placed adjacent to excavations. Railings shall be at least 1m in
height and when adjacent to excavations, shall be provided with a mid-rail.
All construction work within 1.5 m from the road shall be enclosed with a fence not less than 2.4 m high from
the grade. If the work is more than 1.5 m away from the road, a fence or other barriers shall be erected at least
on the side of the site nearest to the footpath/road. The fence shall extend over the entire length of the side.
Openings in fences may have doors which normally shall be kept closed.
All fences shall be of adequate strength to resist wind pressure and other load as specified in relevant part of
the Code. All fences shall be well braced. The side of any fence/handrail adjacent to a road or sidewalk shall be
kept smooth. Fences, barriers, or temporary structures of any kind located on public roads shall not obstruct
vision at the intersection of streets.
1.7.4
Canopies, Overhangs and Platforms
Protective canopy shall have a clear height of 2.4 m over the walkway. Walkways under the canopy shall be not
less than 1.2 m wide in the clear. However, the Building Regulatory Authority may instruct differently regarding
the clear width in congested areas.
Every canopy shall have a fence built along its entire length on the construction side. If materials are stored or
work is done on the roof of the canopy, edges of the canopy roof shall have a tight curb board not less than 200
mm high and a railing not less than 1 m high. The entire structure shall be designed to carry the loads to be
imposed.
The posts or other supporting members of any temporary structure on the road side shall be designed for the
load due to vibration generated by the street traffic. The framework supporting the covering shall be well
braced and designed to support at least 7 kpa. However the top deck shall be designed to carry load not less
than 10 kpa.
The roof covering shall be of a width sufficient to cover the entire walkway or side walk and shall be made
watertight. Covered walkways shall be provided with adequate lights at all times.
Cantilevered platforms or other substitute protection in lieu of sidewalk sheds shall not be used unless
approved by the authority and deemed adequate to insure public safety.
Materials shall not be stored on overhangs unless these are designed for the load. Such storage shall in no case
exceed a day's supply. All materials shall be piled in an orderly manner and height to permit removal without
endangering the stability of the pile and canopy.
1.7.5
Protection of Utilities
Protective frame and boarding shall be built around and over every street lamp, utility box, fire and police alarm
box, fire hydrant, catch basin and manhole that may be damaged by any construction work. The protection shall
be maintained while such work is being done; and shall not obstruct the normal functioning of the device.
Building material, fence, shed etc. shall not obstruct free access to any fire hydrant, lamppost, manhole, fire
alarm box, or catch basin, or interfere with the drainage of the site. Protective covers shall be provided to such
utility fixtures during the progress of the work without obscuring their identity.
Precaution shall be taken during construction to prevent concrete, mortar washing or any other material from
entering and blocking a sewer.
7-9
Part 7
1.7.6
Use of Road and Footpath
Road and footpath spaces may be used only temporarily during construction subject to the following conditions:
a) permissions shall be obtained from relevant authorities for all such uses;
b) the allocated space or any portion thereof shall be more than 1.5 m away from a railway track;
c) a walkway shall be constructed in the outer portion of the road space permitted to be occupied in
conformity with Sec 1.4.2 and 1.4.3;
d) an 1 m clear passage shall be maintained along the building site;
e) person(s) who has been issued a permit to use road and footpath spaces shall furnish a bond with
the relevant authority of such type and amount as may be deemed advisable by the authority as
protection from all liabilities;
f) the permittee shall repair any damages done to the adjacent road due to its use for construction
work at his own expense; the bond money shall stand forfeited if the permittee fails to comply with
this requirement; and
g) it shall be used in a manner that will not deface it or create a nuisance. The owner, upon the
completion of the building, shall immediately remove all temporary walkways, debris and all other
obstruction and leave such public property in as good a condition as it was before such work
commenced.
1.7.7
Protective Devices
No structure, fire protection or sanitary safeguard or device shall be removed or made inoperative unless
instructed by the Authority. Pedestrian protection required by all relevant regulations shall be maintained in
place and kept in good order as long as pedestrians may be endangered. Every protection, fence, canopy and
other protective devices shall be removed within 7 days after such protection is no longer required.
1.7.8
Notices and Signs
Every walkway adjacent to a construction, demolition or excavation site shall be kept well-lighted at night. The
outer edge of the occupied space of the street or footpath shall have red lights placed thereon which shall flash
continuously day and night.
Boards with caution signs, along with safety regulations and emergency instructions painted in bright colour,
preferably red, shall be erected near the entry and in prominent places of the site. It shall describe appropriate
measures for the elimination or control of the danger and the conduct and course of action to be taken. Red
caution marks shall also be placed on the building, equipment and utility connections.
1.7.9
Watchman and Auditory Signal
A watchman shall be employed to warn the general public when intermittent hazardous operations are
conducted. Audible signal shall be used in case of extreme danger. It shall be such that any person in the
reception area can recognize and react to the signal as intended. An auditory emergency evacuation signal shall
take precedence concerning recognition over all auditory signals.
1.7.10 Safe Load
No structure, temporary support, scaffolding, sidewalk, footpath and drain covers, shed, other devices and
construction equipment shall be loaded in excess of its safe working capacity.
Whenever the structural quality or strength of scaffolding plank or other construction equipment is in doubt,
these shall be replaced or be subject to a strength test to two and half times the superimposed live load; the
member may be used if it sustains the test load without failure.
Requirements of Sec 3.8 shall be observed regarding design loads in scaffolds.
1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
The following provisions shall be met during construction for environmental protection.
7-10
Vol. 7
Chapter 1
The construction and operation of the work/project shall comply with relevant national environmental
legislation including environmental quality standards. The basic responsibility of the contractor/owner towards
the environment shall be:
a) requires the Contractor/Owner to take all reasonable steps to protect the environment and avoid
damage and nuisance arising because of his/her operations.
b) the Contractor/Owner to comply with all status and regulations concerning the execution of works
c) the Contractor/Owner shall be responsible for familiarizing himself with all legislation relating to
environmental protection that is relevant to his activities. Reference to national environmental
quality guidelines shall be made.
d) the Contractor/Owner shall be responsible for the costs of cleaning up any environmental pollution
resulting from his/her activities during construction.
1.8.1
Protection of Existing Drainage Systems and Utilities
During construction work all excavation and/or filling work shall be taken as to ensure safety to the existing
underground utility lines and drainage system. The Contractor/Owner shall obtain written permission from the
respective authorities before excavation or filling in such areas.
1.8.2
Protection of Soil, Aquifers, and Water Channels against Pollution
Construction activities are likely to generate waste in various forms. This shall be dealt with adequately to avoid
pollution. The following measures shall be taken during construction of work:
a) The Contractor/Owner shall, all times, maintain all sites under his control in a clean and tidy
condition and shall provide appropriate and adequate facilities for the temporary storage of all
wastes before disposal.
b) The Contractor/Owner shall be responsible for the safe transportation and
disposal of all wastes generated because of his/her activities in such a manner as to not cause
environmental pollution or hazards to health in any form. In the event of any third party being
employed to dispose of wastes, the Contractor/Owner shall be considered to have discharged
his/her responsibilities from the time the wastes leave sites under his/her control, providing that
he/she has exercised due diligence in ascertaining that the proposed transport and disposal
arrangements are such as to not cause pollution or health hazards.
c) The Contractor/Owner shall not allow waste oils or other petroleum derived wastes to be used as
dust suppressants and that all reasonable precautions shall be taken to prevent accidental spillage
of petroleum products, their contact with soil or discharge into water courses.
d) The Contractor/Owner shall be responsible for the provision of adequate sanitary facilities for the
construction workforce (including those employed under subcontracts) at all construction and
camp sites. The Contractor/Owner shall not knowingly allow the discharge of any untreated
sanitary wastes to ground water or surface water. Before mobilization of the construction
workforce, the Contractor/Owner shall provide details of sanitary arrangements. The detail shall
include maintenance and operation plans and generally be sufficient to assess whether the
proposed facilities are adequate.
e) where abstraction from a borehole by the Contractor/Owner results in adverse effects on
groundwater, which at the time of commencement of the contract was being used by local people,
the Contractor/Owner shall arrange supplies of equivalent quality and quantity of water to that
previously available.
1.8.3
Protection of Air Quality from Obnoxious Emissions
To cover the unlikely event that dust blow becomes a nuisance, to the following effect shall be taken:
The Contractor/Owner shall take all reasonable measures to minimize dust-blow arising from any sites under
his/her control by regular watering of any stockpiles, bare soil, and haul roads. Unsurpassed traffic areas and
any sources of fugitive dust, when conditions require dust suppression.
7-11
Part 7
1.8.4
Protection from Sound Pollution
The management shall be responsible for confining all construction and transportation activities in Residential
and mixed Residential Areas strictly to normal business hours, so as not to cause emission of such sound and
noise which is considered detrimental to human health. Such noisy activities shall not be carried out from 1800
hours in the evening to 0600 hours in the morning and on non-working days and holidays.
Noise nuisance shall be minimized through adequate machine maintenance and good site practices. However, a
degree of unavoidable noise nuisance from construction is expected. Control vibration from piling operations is
not possible without incurring an unreasonable financial cost.
The following noise control measures shall be taken during construction work:
a) All vehicles and plant operated by the contractor or (including subcontractors) shall be maintained
according to the original manufacturer's specifications and manuals, with particular regard to the
control of noise emissions The Consultant/Authority shall have the right to require the Contractor
to replace or rectify any vehicle or plant that he thinks emits excessive noise, within 48 hours of
notice in writing.
b) The contractor shall make every reasonable effort to reduce noise nuisance caused by construction
activities, including suing of crusher and ancillary plant in locations where the distance between
them and residential areas is such that it results in attenuation of noise at existing residential areas.
1.8.5
Site Reinstatement
The construction sites-shall be reinstated to an acceptable level to the following effect shall be included:
Upon completion of construction the contractor/owner shall remove equipment, surplus material, rubbish and
temporary works of every kind, and the site in clean condition to the satisfaction of the appropriate authority.
7-12
Vol. 7
Chapter 2
2.1
2.1.1
STORAGE, STACKING AND HANDLING

PRACTICES
GENERAL PRACTICES
General Requirements and Restrictions on Storage and Handling
Materials required in construction operations shall be stored, and handled in a manner to prevent deterioration
and damage to the materials, ensure safety of workmen in handling operations and non-interference with
public life including safety of public, prevention of damage to public property and natural environment.
Materials shall be stored and placed so as not to endanger the public, the workers or the adjoining property.
Materials shall be stacked on well
drained, flat and unyielding surface. Material stacks shall not impose any
undue stresses on walls or other structures.
Materials shall be separated according to kind, size and length and placed in neat, orderly piles. High piles shall
be staggered back at suitable intervals in height. Piles of materials shall be arranged so as to allow a minimum
800 mm wide passageway in between for inspection and removal. All passageways shall be kept clear of dry
vegetation, greasy substance and debris.
For any site, there should be proper planning of the layout for stacking and storage of different materials,
components and equipments with proper access and proper maneuverability of the vehicles carrying the
material. While planning the layout, the requirements of various materials, components and equipments at
different stages of construction shall be considered.
Stairways, passageways and gangways shall not become obstructed by storage of building materials, tools or
accumulated rubbish.
Materials stored at site, depending upon the individual characteristics, shall be protected from atmospheric
actions, such as rain, sun, winds and moisture, to avoid deterioration.
Special and specified care should be taken for inflammable and destructive chemicals and explosive during
storage.
2.1.2
Manual Handling
When heavy materials have to be handled manually each workman shall be instructed by his foreman or
supervisor for the proper method of handling such materials. Each workman shall be provided with suitable
equipment for his personal safety as necessary. Supervisors shall also take care to assign enough men to each
such job depending on the weight and the distance involved.
2.1.3
Protection against Fire
Timber, Bamboo, coal, paints and similar combustible materials shall be kept separated from each other. A
minimum of two dry chemical powder (DCP) type fire extinguishers shall be provided at both open and covered
locations where combustible and flammable materials are stored.
Flammable liquids like petrol, thinner etc., shall be stored in conformity with relevant regulations.
Explosives like detonators, gun powder etc. shall be stored in conformity with the fire protection provisions set
forth in this Code so as to ensure desire safety during storage. Stacks shall not be piled so high as to make them
unstable under fire fighting conditions and in general they shall not be more than 4.5 m in height.
Materials which are likely to be affected by subsidence of soil like precast beams, slabs and timber of sizes shall
be stored by adopting suitable measures to ensure unyielding supports.
Part 7
7-13
Part 7
Materials liable to be affected by floods, tides, etc shall be suitably stored to prevent their being washed away
or damaged due to floods, tides, etc.
Housekeeping
2.1.4
Stairways, walkways, scaffolds, gangways and access ways shall be kept free of building material, tools,
accumulated rubbish and obstructions.
Materials or equipment stored on the street, footpath and other public places with permission from the proper
Authority, and conforming to Sec 1.5.3, shall not interfere with vehicular traffic or pedestrians on the highway
or street. The piles shall be arranged to leave a safe walkway unobstructed for its full length, and adequately
lighted at night and at all other necessary times.
Material and equipment shall not be located within 7.5 m of a street intersection. These shall neither be so
placed as to obstruct normal observation of traffic signals nor to hinder the use of public transit loading
platforms.
2.2
STORAGE REQUIREMENT BY CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS
Stored materials shall be separately stored under following classifications, with appropriate care necessary
precautions to each Classification:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Climatically Sensitive Materials

Durable Materials
Materials Vulnerable to Rough Handling
Inflammable and/or Fire Sensitive Materials
Hazardous Materials
Under each classification a list of commonly used materials are listed below. Other materials used but not
mentioned here shall be treated under one or more of the above listed classifications which most closely match
the unlisted material.
2.2.1
Climatically Sensitive Materials
Such material shall be stored in properly constructed sheds which must be stored in cool dry and well ventilated
and confines, ensuring its storage without deterioration and without contact to ground and structural members,
without exposure to moisture and heat, and away from direct sun.
Materials requiring breathing, such as timber and other natural products, shall be allowed ample air flow
between successive layers of stacking.
Materials subject to deformation under stress shall be supported uniformly so as not to subject it to bending
load or excessive vertical load.
Materials subject to loss of quality through moisture shall be kept within impermeable wrapping, if not used
within a reasonable period.
2.2.1.1
Cement
Cement shall be stored at the work site in a building or a shed which is dry, leak proof and moisture proof. The
building or shed shall have minimum number of windows and close fitting doors which shall be kept closed at all
times except during loading and unloading.
Cement received in bags shall be prevented from coming into contact with any dampness or moisture. Cement
bags shall be stacked on wooden planks maintaining a minimum clearance of 200 mm from the floor. A
minimum clear space of 450 mm shall be provided between the stacks and any exterior wall.
Maximum height of the stack shall be 15 bags and the width not more than four bags or 3m. In stacks more than
8 bags high, the bags shall be arranged alternate length and crosswise. The bags shall be stacked closely as to
minimize the surface area exposed to air.
7-14
Vol. 7
Storage, Stacking and Handling Practices
Chapter 2
During monsoon and for storage for more than 2 months, the stack shall be kept completely enclosed by a
waterproofing membrane such as polyethylene sheet which shall close on top of the sack. Care should be taken
to see that waterproofing membrane is not damaged any time during the use.
Heavy containers of cement shall not be stacked more than two tiers high. Cement shall be used in the order
they are received; storage shall facilitate this requirement.
Hooks shall not be used for handling cement bags unless permitted by the supervisor. Workers handling cement
shall put on protective hand and face coverings and use skin protective. They shall be instructed to the need of
cleanliness from time to time.
When entering a silo or bin for any purpose, the workman shall wear a lifeline attended by another workman
outside. The ejection system shall be shut down and locked out during such operation.
In case cement is received in silos, the silos shall be placed near the concrete batching plan. Proper access shall
be provided for the replacement of silos.
Different types of cements shall be stacked and stored separately. In similar manner cements in gunny bags,
paper bags and polythene sheets shall be stored separately.
2.2.1.2
Lime
Quicklime shall be slaked as soon as possible. If unavoidable, it may be stored in compact heaps having only the
minimum of exposed area. The heaps shall be stored on a suitable platform under a roof protected from rain
and wind. A minimum space of 300 mm shall be provided all-round the heaps to avoid bulging of walls.
Unslaked lime shall be stored in a watertight place and shall be separated from combustible materials.
Hydrated lime shall be supplied either in containers or sacks, such as jute bags lined with polyethylene or high
density polyethylene woven bags lined with polyethylene or craft paper bags.
It shall be stored in a dry room to protect the lime from dampness and to minimize warehouse deterioration.
The building should be with a concrete floor and having least ventilation to eliminate draughts through the walls
and roof. In general, the recommendations given in storing of cement shall be applicable for hydrated lime.
When air movement is reduced to a practical minimum, hydrated lime can be stored for up to three months
without appreciable change.
When dry slaked lime is to be used within a few days, it shall be stored on a covered platform and protected
from rain and wind. It shall be kept in a dry and air-tight go down when immediate use is not required.
However, it shall never be stored for more than two months.
Workmen handling bulk lime shall wear protective clothing, respirators, and goggles, shall be instructed in the
need of cleanliness to prevent dermatitis, and shall be provided with hand cream, petroleum jelly, or similar
protectors.
a) Handling of Cement and Lime
Bulk cement stored in silos or bins may fail to feed to the ejection system. When necessary to enter a silo or
bin for any purpose, the ejection system employed shall be shutdown and locked out electrically as well as
mechanically, when necessary for a workman to enter such storage area, he shall wear line,
a life with
another workman outside the silo or hopper attending the rope.
Workmen, handling bulk cement or lime shall wear protective clothing, respirators, and goggles; shall be
instructed in the need of cleanliness to prevent dermatitis, and shall be provided with hand cream,
petroleum jelly, or similar preparation for protection of exposed skin.
2.2.1.3
Timber
Timber shall be stored in stacks on well treated and even surfaced beams, sleepers or brick pillars so as to be at
least 200 mm above the ground level. Contact with water shall be avoided under all circumstances. Members
shall be stored separately in layers according to lengths and materials of equal lengths shall be piled together in
layers with crossers or wooden battens of sound wood, straight and uniform thickness.
7-15
Part 7
In any layer a 25 mm air space shall be kept between adjacent members. The longer pieces shall be placed in the
bottom layers and shorter pieces in the top layers. At least one end of the stack shall be in true vertical
alignment. The crossers themselves in different layer shall be in vertical alignment.
The recommended width and height of a stack are 1.5 m and 2.0 m respectively. Minimum distance between
two stacks shall be 800 mm. In case stacking with battens is not possible, the timber may be close piled in
heaps, and the precautions specified above observed.
All timbers to be stored for a year or more, the ends of members shall be coated with coal tar, aluminum leaf
paints (hardened gloss oil), microcrystalline wax or other suitable material.
The stacks of timbers shall be protected from hot dry wind, direct sun and rain. Heavy weights may be placed on
top of the stacks to prevent warping of timber. Nails, metal straps, etc. attached to used timber, particularly
planks and formwork for shuttering shall be removed before stacking.
Care must be taken that handler or workmen are not injured by rails, straps, etc, attached to the used timber.
This applies particularly to planks and formwork for shuttering.
2.2.1.4
Bamboo
The site shall be properly inspected and termite colonies or mounds if detected shall be destroyed. All refuse
and useless cellulosic materials shall be removed from the site. The ground may then be disinfected by suitable
insecticides. The area should have good drainage.
Bamboo may preferably be stacked on high skids or raised platform at least 300 mm above ground, Storage
under cover reduces the liability to fungal attack. Good ventilation and frequent inspection are important.
Bamboo dries by air-seasoning under cover in the storage yards from 6 to 12 weeks time.
Prophylactic treatment of bamboo during storage prevents losses due to fungi and insects even under open
storage. Following chemicals are found suitable at the coverage rate of 24 liters per ton.
Sodium pentachlorophenate
: 1 percent solution
Boric acid + borax (1:1)
: 2 percent solution
Sodium pentachlorophenate + boric

acid + borax (5:1:1)
: 2.5 percent solution
A mixture of these compounds yields the best results.

NOTE for better protection of structural bamboo, (if stored outside) repetition of the treatment after four to
six months is desirable.
2.2.1.5
Particle Board
See Article 2.2.3.9

2.2.2
2.2.2.1
Durable Materials
Steel Bars and Sections
Steel reinforcement bars and structural steel shall be stored in a way to prevent distortion, corrosion, scaling
and rusting. Reinforcement bars and structural steel sections shall be coated with cement wash before stacking,
especially in humid areas. In case of long time storage or storage in coastal areas, reinforcement bars and steel
sections shall be stacked at least 200 mm above ground level.
Steel sections shall be stacked upon platforms, skids or any other suitable supports. Bars of different types, sizes
and lengths and structural steel sections shall be stored separately to facilitate issues in required sizes and
lengths without cutting from standard lengths. Ends of bars and sections of each type shall be painted with
separate designated colors.
7-16
Vol. 7
Chapter 2
Tag lines shall be used to control the load in handling reinforcing bars or structural steel when a crane is used.
Heavy steel sections and bundles of reinforcing bars shall be lifted and carried with the help of slings and
tackles.
2.2.2.2
Bricks and Masonry Blocks
Bricks shall be stacked on dry firm ground in regular tiers. For proper inspection of quality and ease in counting,
the stacks shall be 50 bricks long and 10 bricks high and not more than 4 bricks in width, being placed on edge
two at a time along the width of the stack. Clear distance between adjacent stacks shall be not less than 800
mm.
Bricks of each truckload shall be put in one stack. Bricks of different types, such as, clay bricks, clay fly ash bricks,
fly ash lime bricks, sand lime (calcium silicate) bricks shall be stacked separately.
Bricks of different classifications from strength consideration and size consideration (such as, conventional and
modular) shall be stacked separately. Also bricks of different types, such as, solid, hollow and perforated shall be
stacked separately.
Bricks made of clay containing lime shall be thoroughly soaked in water (docked) while in stack.
Bricks of different types shall be stacked separately. Concrete blocks, stone blocks and other masonry blocks
shall be stored in stacks of such height as not to damage the blocks in the lower layers or topple.
Bricks shall be loaded or unloaded with care, and shall not be thrown or dumped. They shall be carried from the
stack to the site of placement in small batches as and when necessary.
Brick stacks shall be placed close to the site of work so that least effort is required to unload and transport the
bricks again by loading on pallets or in barrows. Unloading of building bricks or handling in any other way likely
to damage the corners or edges or other parts of bricks shall not be permitted.
Blocks are available as hollow and solid concrete blocks, hollow and solid light weight concrete blocks, autoclave
aerated concrete blocks, concrete stone masonry blocks and soil based blocks. Blocks shall be unloaded one at a
time and stacked in regular tiers to minimize breakage and defacement. These shall not be dumped at site. The
height of the stack shall not be more than 1.2 m, the length of the stack shall not be more than 3.0 m, as far as
possible and the width shall be of two or three blocks. Normally blocks cured for 28 days only should be
received at site. In case blocks cured for less than 28 days are received, these shall be stacked separately. All
blocks should be water cured for 10 to 14 days and air cured for another 15 days; thus no blocks with less than
28 days curing shall be used in building construction. Blocks shall be placed close to the site of work so that least
effort is required for their transportation. The date of manufacture of the blocks shall be suitably marked on the
stacks of blocks manufactured at factory or site.
2.2.2.3
Stones
Stones of different sizes, types and classification shall be stored separately. Stones shall be stacked on dry firm
ground in a .regular heap not more than 1 m in height.
Veneering stones shall be stacked against vertical support on a firm dry ground in tiers up to a height of 1.2 m. A
distance of about 0.8 m shall be kept between two adjacent stacks.
2.2.2.4
Aggregates
Aggregates shall be stored at site on a hard, dry and level ground. If such a surface is not available, a platform of
planks or old corrugated iron sheets, or a floor of bricks, or a thin layer of lean concrete shall be used. Contact
with clay, dust, vegetable and other foreign matters shall be avoided.
Fine and coarse aggregates shall either be stored separately or heaps be separated by dividing walls. Fine
aggregate shall be stored in a place and manner where loss due to the effect of wind is minimum, viz. in the
leeward side behind a wall, or by covering with a polyethylene sheet.
On a large job it is desirable to construct dividing walls to give each type of aggregates its own compartment.
Fine aggregates shall be stacked in a place where loss due to the effect of wind is found minimum.
When withdrawals are made from heaps, no overhang in the original heap shall be permitted. Employees
required to enter hoppers shall be equipped with safety belts and lines,
life attended by another person.
7-17
Part 7
Machine driven hoppers, feeders, and loaders shall be locked in the off position prior to entry electrically as well
as mechanically.
2.2.2.5
Water
Water to be used in construction shall be stored in tanks, bottom and the sides of which shall be constructed
with brick or concrete. Contact with any organic impurities shall be prevented.
The total capacity of the storage tank shall be determined after taking into account the water required for fire
fighting. Also See Part 4, Sec 4.2.
The tank shall be so located as to facilitate easy storage and filling in, and supply both for construction work and
for fire fighting. Passage of water to the water tank shall not be blocked at any time.
2.2.3
2.2.3.1
Materials Vulnerable to Rough Handling

Aluminum Sections
Aluminum sections of different classification, sizes and lengths shall be stored separately, on a level platform
under cover.
The aluminum sections shall not be pulled or pushed from the stack nor shall be slided over each other, to
protect the anodizing layer.
2.2.3.2
Pulverized Fuel Ash/Fly Ash
Fly ash shall be stored in such a manner as to permit easy access for proper inspection and identification of each
consignment. Fly ash in bulk quantities shall be stored in stack similar to fine aggregates, avoiding any intrusion
of foreign matter. Fly ash in bags shall be stored in stacks not more than 10 bags high.
Handling: See Sec. 2.2.1.2
2.2.3.3
Cinder
Cinder shall be stored in bulk quantities in stacks similar to coarse aggregates avoiding any extrusion of foreign
matter.
2.2.3.4
Pipes and Tubing
Pipes shall be stored in stacks with stoppers provided at the bottom layer to keep the pipe stack stable. The
stack, particularly of smaller diameter pipes, shall be in pyramid shape. Pipes shall not be stacked more than 1.5
m high.
Each stack shall have pipes of the same type and size only. Removal of pipes shall start from the top layer and by
pulling from one end. A pipe shall not be stored inside another pipe. The pipes may also be placed alternately
length and crosswise.
Asbestos cement pipes shall be unloaded at location, for example near trenches. Cast iron detachable joints and
fittings shall be stacked under cover and separated from the asbestos cement pipes and fittings. Rubber rings
shall be kept clean and away from grease, oil, heat and light.
Pipe shall be carried one at a time on shoulders by at least two workmen. Pipe fittings and joints shall be
handled individually.
Black polyethylene pipes may be stored either under cover or in the open. However, natural coloured
polyethylene pipes shall be stored under cover only and protected from direct sunlight.
Coils of tubing shall be stored either on edge or stacked flat one on top of the other; in either case they shall not
be allowed to come into contact with hot water or steam pipes and should be kept away from hot surface.
Straight lengths of unplasticized PVC pipes shall be stored on horizontal racks supported throughout their
lengths on a reasonably flat surface free from stones and sharp projections. Pipes shall not be stacked in large
piles, especially under warm conditions. Socket and spigot pipes shall be stacked in layers with sockets placed at
alternate ends of the stack to avoid top sided stack.
7-18
Vol. 7
Chapter 2
PVC pipes shall be stored in a shaded area. The ends of pipe, particularly those specially prepared for jointing,
shall be protected from abrasion. Damaged portion of a pipe shall be cut out completely.
11 KV and below
1.40 m
Above 11 KV and below 33 KV
3.60 m
4.70 m
5.70 m
Above 275 and below 400 kV
6.50 m
Pipes of conducting materials shall be stacked on solid level sills and contained in a manner to prevent spreading
or rolling of the pipe. For storage in large quantity, suitable packing shall be placed between the layers. During
transportation, the pipes shall be so secured as to prevent displacement/rolling.
In stacking and handling of pipes and other conducting materials, the following minimum vertical safety
distances from overhead power lines shall be provided
Handling - Removal of pipes from a pile shall be accomplished by working from the ends of the pipe. During
transportation, the pipes shall be so secured as to ensure against displacement.
2.2.3.5
Timber Piles and Poles
Piles and poles shall be stacked on solid and level sills so as to prevent rolling or spreading of the stack. The
storage area shall be maintained free of vegetation and flammable materials.
Removal of piles and poles shall start from the top layer and by pulling from one end. Tag lines shall be used to
control movement of piles and poles. In stacking and handling of piles and poles, precautions as laid down in Sec
2.2.3.4 shall be followed.
2.2.3.6
Sanitary Appliances
All sanitary appliances shall be stored under cover to prevent damage. In receiving and storing appliances
consideration shall be given to the sequence of removal from the store to the assembly positions. Vitreous
fittings shall be stacked separately from the metal ones.
Bigger sanitary appliances shall be handled one at a time. Traps, water seals and gullies shall be handled
separately. Sanitary fittings shall be protected from any oil spillages; hands of the workers shall be free of any
oily substance. The supporting brackets, pedestals etc. shall be checked before lowering the appliances in their
position.
2.2.3.7
Doors, Windows, Ventilators and Grilles
Metal and plastic doors, windows and ventilators shall be stacked upright (on their sills) on level ground
preferably on wooden battens and shall not come in contact with dirt or ashes. If received in crates they shall be
stacked according to manufacturers instructions and removed from the crates as and when required for the
work. Metal and plastic frames of doors, windows and ventilators shall be stacked upside down with the kick
plates at the top. These shall not be allowed to stand for long in this manner before being fixed so as to avoid
the door frames getting out of shape and hinges being strained and shutters drooping. During the period of
storage of aluminum doors, windows and ventilators, these shall be protected from loose cement and mortar by
suitable covering, such as tarpaulin. The tarpaulin shall be hung loosely on temporary framing to permit
circulation of air to prevent moisture condensation. All timber and other lignocellulosic material based frames
and shutters shall be stored in a dry and clean covered space away from any infestation and dampness. The
storage shall preferably be in well-ventilated dry rooms. The frames shall be stacked one over the other
distances to keep the stack vertical and straight. These cross battens should be of uniform thickness and placed
vertically one above the other. The door shutters shall be stacked in the form of clean vertical stacks one over
7-19
Part 7
the other and at least 80 mm above ground on pallets or suitable beams or rafters. The top of the stack shall be
covered by a protecting cover and weighted down by means of scantlings or other suitable weights. The shutter
stack shall rest on hard and level surface. If any timber or other lignocellulosic material based frame or shutter
becomes wet during transit, it shall be kept separate from the undamaged material. The wet material may be
dried by stacking in shade with battens in between adjacent boards with free access of dry air. Separate stacks
shall be built up for each size, each grade an each type of material. When materials of different sizes, grades and
types are to be stacked in one stack due to shortage of space, the bigger size shall be stacked in the lower
portion of the stacks. Suitable pallets or separating battens shall be kept in between the two types of material.
Precast concrete door and window frames shall be stored in upright position adopting suitable measures against
risk of subsidence of soil support.
While unloading, shifting, handling and stacking timber or other lignocellulosic material based, metal and plastic
door and window frames and shutters, care shall be taken that the pieces are not dragged one over the other as
it may cause damage to their surface particularly in case of the decorative shutters. The pieces should be lifted
and carried preferably flat avoiding damage to corners or sides.
Metal frames of doors, windows and ventilators shall be stacked with the kick plates at the top. They shall not
be kept in this manner for long, and should be taken to the fixing position as soon as possible.
2.2.3.8
Floors, Wall and Roof Tiles
Floor, wall and clay roof tiles of different types, such as, cement concrete tiles (plain, colored and terrazzo) and
ceramic tiles (glazed and unglazed) shall be stacked on regular platform as far as possible under cover in proper
layers and in tiers and they shall not be dumped in heaps. In the stack, the tiles shall be so placed that the
mould surface of one faces that of another. Height of the stack shall not more than 1000 mm. Tiles of different
quality, size and thickness shall be stacked separately to facilitate easy removal for use in work. Tiles when
supplied by manufacturers packed in wooden crates shall be stored in crates. The crates shall be opened one at
a time as and when required for use.
Ceramic tiles and roof tiles are generally supplied in cartons which shall be handled with care to avoid breakage.
It is preferable to transport these at the site on platform trolleys.
2.2.3.9
Sheets and Boards
For storing and handling of sheets and boards, such as asbestos sheets, CGI sheets, particle boards, gypsum
boards etc., the following requirements shall be fulfilled:
a) sheets and boards shall be stacked to a height of not more than 1 m on dry, clean, firm and level
ground with timber or other packing beneath them;
b) bottom of the stack shall be raised adequately from the ground level where there is a risk of water
coming on the floor;
c) sheets and boards shall be stacked under cover and protected from damage due to wind, rain and
sun;
d) at least one edge of the stack shall be in true vertical alignment; the top sheet in each stack shall be
suitably weighed down;
e) damage to the corners and surface of sheets and boards shall be prevented and damaged sheets
shall not be stacked with sound materials;
f) sheets shall not be pushed forward against the lower sheet for more than one-fourth of the sheet
length;
g) they shall be lifted into position by two workmen, if necessary;
h) sheets and boards shall be lowered or raised gently and not thrown; and suitable hand protection
like gloves, jelly etc. shall be provided to the workmen wherever necessary.
CGI sheets shall be stacked in not more than 100 bundles per stack built solidly. Corrugations of sheets in one
stack shall run in the same direction. One end of the stack shall be raised by at least 100 mm to drain
accumulated water, if any. Sheets not for immediate use shall be stacked under roof.
Plywood, fiber board, particle board, block board etc. shall be stacked on a flat dunnage on top of which a
wooden frame shall be constructed with battens of suitable size in such a way that it supports all four corners
and edges of the boards. For boards up to a length of 2 m, minimum of one intermediate batten and for boards
longer than 2 m, at least two intermediate battens shall be provided to avoid warping.
7-20
Vol. 7
Chapter 2
Decorative plywood and laminated and decorative boards shall be stacked in pairs facing each other. Sheets
shall not be dragged one over another.
Specification laid out in BDS 1159 shall be followed for packaging of plywood, particle board, hard board and
flush doors.
2.2.3.10 Cast Iron, Galvanized Iron and Asbestos Cement Pipes and Fittings
The pipes shall be unloaded where they are required, when the trenches are ready to receive them. Storage
shall be provided at the bottom layer to keep the stack stable. The stack shall be in pyramid shape or the pipes
placed length-wise and cross-wise in alternate layers. The pyramid stack is advisable in smaller diameter pipes
for conserving space in storing them. The height of the stack shall not exceed 1.5 m. Each stack shall contain
only pipes of the same class and size. Each stack shall contain only pipes of same class and size, with
consignment or batch number marked on it with particulars or suppliers wherever possible. Cast iron
detachable joints and fittings shall be stacked under cover and separated from the asbestos cement pipes and
fittings. Rubber rings shall be kept clean, away from grease, oil, heat and light.
Pipes in the top layer shall be handled first. At a time only one pipe shall be handled by two laborers while
conveying to the actual site and shall be carried on shoulders. Fittings shall be handled individually.
2.2.3.11 Glass Sheets
All glass sheets shall be kept dry and stored in a covered space. Glass sheets shall be lifted and stored upright on
their long edges and put into stacks of not more than 25 sheets. They shall be supported at two points at about
300 mm from each end by fillets of wood.
The bottom of each stack shall be about 25 mm clear from the base of the wall and other support against which
the stack rests. The whole stack shall be as close to upright as possible. Smooth floors shall be covered with
gunny bags.
Workmen handling glass sheets, remnants and waste glass pieces, and fibre glass shall be provided with gloves,
jelly and other suitable hand protections. In removing glass sheets from crates, great care shall be taken to avoid
damages from breakage. Glass edges shall be covered or protected to prevent injuries to workmen.
2.2.4
Inflammable and/or Fire-Sensitive Materials
Materials under this classification shall be stored within fire-preventive confines, furnished with fire fighting
provisions. Buckets containing sand shall be kept ready for use. A 5 kg dry powder fire extinguisher conforming
to accepted standards shall be kept at an easily accessible position. Besides the areas shall be close to fire
hydrants.
2.2.4.1
Plastic and Rubber sheets
Plastic and rubber sheets shall be stored within fire proof confines according to manufacturer's instructions.
Sheets shall be stored in the coolest of the store rooms available. The room shall be well ventilated and kept
dark; direct sun light shall not be allowed to fall on the stored sheets.
The sheets shall be stored away from electric generators, electric motors, switchgears and other such electrical
equipment.
Contamination of the sheets with vegetable and mineral oil, grease, organic solvents, acid and their fumes,
alkalis, dust and grit shall be prevented. All greasy contamination shall be removed immediately with kerosene
or similar liquid, and the sheets thoroughly wiped dry and dusted with French chalk.
Undue stretch and strain, kinks, sharp bends or folds of the sheets shall be avoided in case of long time storage.
The sheets shall be turned over periodically and treated with fresh chalk.
In addition, safety precautions common for all types of sheets, as laid down in Sec 2.2.3.9, shall be followed.
2.2.4.2
Paints, Varnishes, Thinners, Bitumen and Road Tar
Paints, varnishes, lacquers, thinners and other inflammable materials shall be kept in properly sealed or closed
containers. The containers shall be kept in a well ventilated location, free from excessive heat, smoke, sparks or
flame. The floor of the paint store shall have 100 mm thick loose sand on it.
7-21
Part 7
Paint materials in quantities other than required for daily use shall be kept stocked in the regular storage place.
The manner of storage shall facilitate removal and use of lots in the same order in which they are received.
Temporary electrical wiring and fittings shall not be installed in the paint store. When electric lights, switches or
electrical equipment are necessary to be stored or used in the same room, the room shall be designed in a way
to reduce explosion risk.
Sources of ignition, such as open flame and exposed heating elements, shall not be permitted in paint store, nor
shall smoking be allowed there.
Drums or containers containing bitumen, road tar, asphalt, etc. shall be stacked vertically on their bottoms in up
to 3 tiers. Leaky drums shall be either totally removed or separated. Empty drums shall be stored in pyramidal
stacks neatly in rows.
Bituminous roofing felts shall be stored away from other combustible or flammable materials. They shall be
handled gently to prevent cracking and damages.
Workers engaged on jobs involving handling of hot bitumen, tar, and bituminous mixtures shall use protective
wears, such as boots and gloves, preferably of asbestos or otherwise of rubber, goggles and helmet. No workers
shall be permitted to handle such materials without wearing the needed protective covering.
Bitumen/tar shall not be heated beyond the temperature recommended by the manufacturer of the product.
While discharging heated binder from the boiler, workers shall not stand opposite to the jet so as to avoid the
possibility of hot binder falling on them. The container shall be handled only after closing the control valve.
While handling hoi bitumen/tar, workers shall exercise scrupulous care to prevent accidental spillage thereof.
The buckets and cans in which the hot material is carried from boiler shall be checked before use to ensure that
they are intact and safe. Mops and other applicators contaminated with bituminous materials shall not be
stored inside buildings.
Outdoor storage of drums containing flammable materials like hydraulic brake and transmission fluid, gasoline
and lubricants shall be such that contamination from moisture and dirt is avoided.
The storage shall be free of spilled products, debris and other hazardous material.
Compressed gases and petroleum products shall not be stored in the same building or close to each other.
Proper identification by markings, tags etc. shall be used for petroleum products delivered to the job site and
stored there in drums.
Highly flammable liquids shall be stored in fire resisting containers in a special store room secluded from the
main working site. For uses of up to 50 litres, liquids can be stored in the workroom in fire resistant cupboards
or bins. Stores of liquids shall be clearly marked highly flammable. All empty containers shall be returned to the
store.
The workmen shall dispose off any clothing or apparel spilled over by or soaked in flammable materials
immediately. They shall not be allowed to continue work unless affected clothing and apparels are changed.
2.2.5
Hazardous Materials
Materials under this category are (a) those posing health hazard through breathing, such as asbestos, glass fibre,
etc. or injurious and/or intoxicating fluids of various kinds, (b) materials corrosive to living bodies and (c)
materials likely to explode under heat or pressure. These should be stored in a manner specific to its properties,
so as to prevent hazards of all kinds.
2.2.5.1
Asbestos-based Materials
Whenever possible, materials which do not contain asbestos shall be used. Special precautions as specified by
the following subsections shall be taken while handling asbestos containing materials to minimize the risk of
inhaling asbestos. Handling shall be limited to as few workers as possible.
a) Handling of Asbestos-based Materials:
When cutting, sawing or machining takes place in confined place efficient local dust extraction
equipment shall be installed. Alternatively, a wet method of machining by water type dust suppressed
powered tools shall be used.
7-22
Vol. 7
Chapter 2
The best standards of good housekeeping and hygiene shall apply to cutting areas which shall be
segregated and used for no other purpose. Waste materials and dust shall not be allowed to
accumulate in working area or store.
A vacuum cleaning device with a high efficiency filter shall be used to keep floors, walls and fixtures
free from dust accumulation. Alternatively all surfaces shall be cleaned with a wet rag and floors
washed by gently spraying water. Dry sweeping or compressed air blowing shall never be used.
Asbestos insulation boards shall preferably be supplied precut and drilled from the workshop using a
suitable dust control equipment. On-site preparations shall be performed in the open.
Polyethylene sheet shall be used to screen a work area in an enclosed space. Only authorized workers
shall be allowed access to such areas. Appropriate signs shall mark an asbestos working area and warn
against inhaling asbestos dust.
A guillotine or knife die cutter shall be used to cut sheets. The use of hammer and chisel shall be
avoided.
At the end of each work shift, dust shall be either collected by a vacuum cleaner or swept up after
being wetted. The dust shall then be put into a sealable container. Any rejected material shall also be
placed in an impermeable bag.
b) Removal and disposal Asbestos-based Materials:
Spray method shall be used for removal of asbestos
based materials which is not covered or coated
by other materials. For removing thick asbestosbased materials, soaking method with total saturation
shall be used. Dry method shall only be used where the spray or soaking method cannot be used.
All moveable furniture and fittings shall be removed from the work area and other nonremovable
items covered with plastic sheets. Air conditioning systems shall either be isolated from the asbestos
removal area or closed down.
Before removal or stripping the asbestos, insulation coatings shall be thoroughly soaked with water or
steam. In case of dry demolition of asbestos, a portable exhaust extraction plant shall be used.
Transport and storage containers shall be labeled of the contents. Waste shall be kept in strong
enclosed containers or in strong sealed impervious bags. These shall not be overfilled; care shall be
taken to avoid damage or spillage before disposal.
The filter bags used in a dust extracting system shall be impermeable and capable of being readily
sealed and disposed off without further treatment.
c) Protective Clothing and Equipment:
Workmen engaged in works using asbestos-based material, shall wear a full body coveralls with
pockets, and close fitted cuffs and necks together with a head cover. Protective clothing shall also be
worn by all persons in an area into which asbestos dust is liable to escape.
The clothing shall be made of synthetic fiber. Wet weather overalls which can be hosed down may be
used.
The use of suitable working clothing shall not be necessary when minor handling of asbestos
containing insulation is carried out provided adequate dust control techniques are employed.
Whenever, work methods create asbestos dust, suitable protective respirator shall be used.
Respiratory protective equipment shall be properly maintained and regularly cleaned and serviced.
Every person required to use protective equipment shall be fully instructed and trained in its use.
Protective clothing and equipment shall be regarded as the means of last resort and used as a back-up
of other techniques, or where effective asbestos dust control cannot be achieved by other means.
7-23
Part 7
d) Personal Hygiene:
Changing room and shower facilities shall be provided for the exclusive use of persons working in an
asbestos working area. Locker accommodation shall be provided for every person required to wear
respirators and coveralls.
Lockers for work clothes shall be separated from others. Contaminated clothing shall be placed in a
dustproof container immediately on removal. Contaminated clothing or belongings shall not be
shaken or brushed. These shall be superficially cleaned by vacuum cleaning or hosing down with
water.
Food and drinks shall not be handled, stored or consumed in the asbestos work area. Smoking shall be
prohibited.
Workmen shall take shower before changing back into their own clothing; work clothing shall not be
taken home. Parts of the body exposed to asbestos dust shall be thoroughly washed after completion
of the job or before taking any meal.
Asbestos workers shall have a full size chest X-ray before commencement of work and also yearly. The
reports shall be kept properly by the contractor for ready reference.
Acids and Other Corrosive Materials Working with Acid/Chemicals
2.2.5.2
When working with acids, bases, or other chemicals, one shall wear the proper clothing. The following are the
five clothing items that shall be used while working with chemicals.
a) Safety glasses/goggles: Should completely cover your eye at all times.
b) Safety face shield: Wear over the top of any safety glasses or goggles.
c) Full-length acid smock: Wear over the clean-room clothing.
d) Rubber gloves: Wear with a two-inch cuff. This prevents acid from running down your arm. Also,
inflate with nitrogen and submerse in water to check for pinhole leaks before using.
e) Hard leather or other non-porous shoes
2.2.5.2.1
Transporting Acid/Chemical
The acid/chemicals used in work shall be stored in glass or plastic bottles. Transport of these chemicals shall be
made by hand in a rubber or plastic bucket. If the bottle breaks or the lid leaks, the chemical will be contained in
the bucket.
While transporting Acid/Chemical following rules shall be followed:
a) DO
Use the appropriate size container for the job.
Get help when needed.
Clean containers after use with deionized water.
Work under a fume hood
Use a funnel when pouring chemicals into a small container.
Open bottles slowly to avoid spilling and allow vapors to escape.
Know what type of reactions to expect.
Remember to triple-A (AAA): Always Add Acid to water.
b) DON'T
Reuse containers (adverse chemical reaction may occur).
Eat, drink, smoke, or touch any body part before washing your hands when working with chemicals.
Be afraid to ask questions.
Pour leftover chemicals back in its source container, contamination may result.
7-24
Vol. 7
Chapter 2
Put your face close to the bottle when pouring.

Puncture cap or lid of any bottle.
2.2.5.2.2
Storage of Acid/Chemical
Proper storage of the acid/chemicals will ensure everyones safety. Therefore when storing acid/chemical the
following care shall be taken:
a) Store acids and bases in separate cabinets.
b) Keep acids and solvents in different cabinets.
c) Label shelves for quick chemical identification.
d) Make sure that incompatibles are not stored on the same shelf.
e) Keep same shaped bottles on the same shelf to conserve shelf space.
f) Never store chemical containers anywhere except in designated cabinets.
When need to use the acid/chemicals:
a) Take the oldest container whose shelf life has not expired.
b) Make sure the container is sealed when you return it.
c) Always return the container to its labeled shelf.
2.2.5.3
Explosives
a) Transportation of Explosive:
Loading, unloading and handling of explosives will be supervised by competent personnel. The safety
provisions of Chapter 4, Sec 4.1 and Sec 4.3 also apply for the present case.
Where the magazine is located near the construction site and blasting operations continue daily,
actual requirements of explosives shall be issued from the magazine and transported to the site.
Any leftovers shall be returned to the magazine after every use.
For carrying up to 5 kg of explosives, insulated containers constructed of minimum 50 mm thick
finished wood or 6 mm thick plastic or 10 mm thick pressed fiber shall be used. The containers shall
have no metal parts, be waterproof and provided with a lid and nonconductive carrying device.
Vehicles transporting explosives shall have a wooden or nonsparking metal floor with high sides and
ends. In open-bodied vehicles, the explosives shall be covered with a waterproof and fire-resistant
tarpaulin. Electric wiring in vehicle shall be fully insulated. The nature of cargo in the vehicle shall be
properly indicated on its body.
Metal, flammable, or corrosive substances shall not be transported with explosives. Explosive and
detonators or blasting caps shall not be transported in the same vehicle; they shall be transported in
original containers or in securely locked separate nonmetallic containers.
Smoking shall be prohibited in the vehicle carrying explosives.
b) Storage of Explosives:
Explosives shall only be stored in remote and isolated structures of substantial construction and blastrelease isolated yards. The storage area shall be clean, dry, well ventilated, and cool. The material
shall not be stored near oil, gasoline, cleaning solutions, radiators, steam pipes, or other sources of
heat.
Storage shall require bullet and fire-resistant magazine. Blasting caps or primers shall not be stored
with explosives.
Smoking, matches, fire or flame shall not be allowed near a magazine. No leaves, grass, bush or debris
shall be allowed to accumulate within 8 m of an explosive magazine. No sparking metal or tools shall
be stored in a magazine. Persons shall put off shoes with metal nails before entering a magazine.
7-25
Part 7
If nitroglycerine leaks down on the floor, the floor shall be immediately desensitized by washing
thoroughly with an agent obtained beforehand from the supplier of the explosives.
c) Handling of Explosives:
No package containing explosives shall be dragged, dropped or handled roughly. These shall be
opened only at a safe distance and properly shielded from the packages of explosives in bulk storage.
The covers of the explosive cases or packages shall be replaced every time after taking out part of the
contents.
Sparking metal tools shall not be used to open kegs or cases of explosives. Smoking or carrying
matches, fire, flame or devices capable of producing fire or flame, shall not be permitted while
handling or using explosives. Explosives shall not be carried in the pockets of any clothing or on any
person.
d) Disposal of Explosives:
No explosives shall be abandoned. They shall be disposed off in accordance with the approved
methods; manufacturers or the appropriate authority shall be consulted in this matter.
Explosives caps or packing shall not be left lying around. Paper of fiber materials used in packing
explosives shall not be put in any subsequent use. Such materials shall be destroyed by burning.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS
Small articles like screws, bolts, nuts, door and window fittings, polishing stones, protective clothing, spare parts
of machinery, linings, packing, water supply and sanitary fittings, and electrical fittings, insulation board. etc.
shall be kept in suitable and properly protected containers, boxes or store rooms.
Valuable small materials shall be kept under lock and key.
Polymeric materials such as coating, sheeting, reflective surfacing/sheeting, etc shall be stored as per the
manufacturers instructions. Special precautions shall be taken in case of storage, handling and usage of toxic
materials.
2.4
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
Materials constantly in use shall be relatively nearer the place of use.

Heavy units like precast concrete members shall be stacked near the hoist or the ramp.
Materials which normally deteriorate during storage shall be kept constantly moving, by replacing old materials
with fresh stocks. Freshly arrived materials shall never be placed over materials which had arrived earlier.
Appropriate types of fire extinguishers shall be provided at open sites where combustible materials are stored
and for each storage shed room where flammable/combustible materials are stored. For guidance regarding
selection of the appropriate types of fire extinguishers reference may be made to good practice. It is desirable
that a minimum of two extinguishers are provided at each such location.
Workers handling excavated earth from foundation, particularly if the site happens to be reclaimed area or
marshy area or any other infected area, shall be protected against infection affecting their exposed body
portions.
2.5
LOADING AND UNLOADING OF MATERIALS

a) Loading and Unloading Rail Road Wagons and Motor Vehicles
Each workman shall be instructed for the proper method of loading and unloading from rail wagons
and motor vehicles, and provided with necessary equipment for safety. Supervisors shall ensure that
the required number of workmen based on the weight and the distance involved in each job is
available and engaged for the particular job.
7-26
Vol. 7
Chapter 2
Warning signals shall be displayed to indicate that the rail-wagons must not be coupled or moved
while loading and unloading are carried out. The wheels of wagons and vehicles shall always be
sprigged or chained while these are being unloaded; brakes alone shall not be relied upon.
Special lever bars, rather than ordinary crowbars, shall be used for moving rail wagons. Where
gangplanks are used, either cleats at lower end of gangplank or pin through end of gangplanks shall be
used to prevent sliding and slipping. If the gangplank is on a slope, cleats or abrasive surface shall be
provided for the entire length.
When rail road wagons and motor vehicles are being loaded or unloaded near passageways or
walkways, adequate warning signals shall be placed on each end of the way.
b) Manual Handling
Loading and unloading of heavy items shall be done with cranes or gantries, if available. The workmen
shall stand clear of the path of the material being moved by mechanical equipment. The slings and the
ropes used shall be of adequate load carrying capacity.
For loading heavy and long components manually into motor vehicles, rail wagons, trailer etc., either
wooden sleepers or steel rails of sufficient length and properly secured in position shall be put against
the body of the wagon/vehicle at three or four places. The slope of such makeshift ramp shall be less
than 30o with horizontal.
Long items shall be dragged, one by one, gently and uniformly along the ramps by means of ropes
(tag). Workmen pulling long items shall anchor their feet against a firm surface.
Loaded items may be shifted by crowbars and other suitable leverage mechanism in their right
position. These shall not be pushed or moved by hand. Similar procedures as outlined above shall be
followed for manual unloading of long or heavy items.
For regular and frequent handling, the maximum load a single workman is subject to carry shall be
limited to 20 kg. Workmen to carry heavier loads shall be specially selected, and if necessary, trained.
While lifting a load, the body shall be kept upright; weight shall be distributed evenly and supported
on the bone structure, and held close to the body. Advantage shall be taken of any device provided
for assistance.
7-27
Chapter 3
3.1
3.1.1
GENERAL
SAFETY DURING CONSTRUCTION
Scope
The provisions of this chapter shall apply to the safety of life and property during construction
/erection/alteration of various parts of a building or any other structures. Nothing stated herein shall be
construed to nullify any rules, regulations, safety standards or statutes of the local authority, Corporations, or
those contained in the various Acts of the Government of Bangladesh. The specific rules, regulations and acts
pertaining to the protection of the public or workmen from health and other hazards wherever specified by the
local Authority/Corporation etc. or by the Act/Ordinance of the Government shall take precedence over
whatever is herein specified.
3.1.2
Safety Management
The safety of personnel engaged in building construction shall be ensured through a well planned and well
organized mechanism. For this, depending on the size and complexity of building construction project, safety
committee shall be constituted to efficiently manage all safety related affairs. The site in-charge or his nominee
of a senior rank shall head the committee and a safety officer shall act as Member Secretary. The safety
committee shall be organized a training program for the personals and workers to train up them about safety
issues involved in the construction process and also organize meeting of the committee regularly say fortnightly
or monthly depending on the nature of the project, however, emergency meetings shall also be called as and
when required. The safety committees shall deal with all the safety related issues through well structured
agenda, in the meetings and all safety related measures installed at the site and implementation thereof shall
be periodically reviewed.
3.2
TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of this Part the following definitions shall apply.
Authority Having Jurisdiction: The Authority which has been created by a statute and which for the purpose of
administering the Code/Part, shall authorize a committee or an official to act on its behalf; hereinafter called the
Authority.
Construction Equipment: All equipment, machinery, tools and temporary retaining structures and working
platforms, that is, tools, derricks, staging, scaffolds, runways, ladders and all material, handling equipment
including safety devices.
Floor Hole: An opening measuring less than 300 mm but more than 25mrn in its least dimension, in any floor,
platform, pavement, or yard, through which materials but not persons may fall; such as, a belt hole, pipe
opening or slot opening.
Floor Opening: An opening measuring 300 mm or more in its least dimension, in any floor, platform, pavement
or yard through which person may fall; such as hatch way, stair or ladder opening, pit or large manhole.
Guard Railing: A barrier erected along exposed edges of an open side floor opening, wall opening, ramp,
platform, or catwalk or balcony, etc, to prevent fall of persons.
Materials Handling Hoists: A platform, bucket or similar enclosure exclusively meant for the lifting or lowering of
construction material the hoists being operated from a point outside the conveyance.
Part 7
7-29
Part 7
Pile Rig: The complete pile driving equipment comprising piling frame, leader, hammer, extractor winch and
power unit. Complete pile driving rig shall be mounted on rafts or pontoon or rails. Pile rig shall also be a mobile
unit mounted on trailers or trucks, or a special full revolving rig for raking piles.
Platform: A working space for persons, elevated above the surrounding floor or ground, such as balcony or
platform for the operation of machinery and equipment.
Scaffold: A temporary erection of timber, bamboo or metal frame work used in the construction, alteration or
demolition of a building, to support or to allow the hoisting and lowering of workmen, their tools and materials.
Toe Board: A vertical barrier erected along exposed edge of a floor opening, wall opening, platform, catwalk or
ramp to prevent fall of materials or persons.
Wall Hole: An opening in any wall or partition having height of less than 750 mm but more than 25 mm and
width unrestricted.
Wall Opening: An opening in any wall or partition having both height of at least 750 mm and width of at least
450 mm.
3.2.1
Safety of Workmen
Helmets conforming to BDS 1265 and BDS 1266 shall be worn by the workmen and other personnel at all times
during the work. Safety goggles of accepted standard (BDS 1360) shall be used by individuals engaged in drilling,
cutting, welding and all such works which cause hazard to the eye. The welders and gas cutters shall be
equipped with proper protective equipment like gloves, safety boots, aprons and hand shields having filter glass
of accepted standard and suitable to the eyes of the particular worker.
3.2.2
Site Precautions
Construction site shall be delineated, in absence of boundary walls, by fences. During the erection of tall
buildings, nylon net shall be put around the building periphery 3 to 4 meters below the working level.
Warning signs shall be displayed, where necessary, to indicate hazardous areas like high voltage zone, area of no
smoking etc. Hand lamps shall be of low voltage, preferably 24V. All electrically operated hand tools shall be
provided with double earthing.
3.2.3
Site Amenities
Toilet facilities shall be provided at all construction sites. If sewer connection is not available, temporary wells
shall be used. The wells shall be provided with proper covers, bad smell protector and have to clean regularly.
Men and women workers shall be provided with separate sanitary and washing facilities.
The toilet facilities shall be located at a corner of the site so as to avoid any obstruction. Protection from bad
weather and falling object, and proper privacy shall be provided to the toilet users.
Temporary toilets shall be dismantled, all wells filled up, and the whole area made level, dressed and restored
back to proper grade at the end of the project. All temporary sewer connections shall be removed and the
sewer capped.
Washing facilities provided at the site shall be connected to the available running water supply.
Drinking water shall be supplied to the site. In absence of any water supply facility at the site, hand tube wells
shall be sunk to meet the requirements of drinking and washing.
Numbers of the sanitary and plumbing facilities required in a construction site shall be regulated by the 1965
Factories Act, and Part 8 Chapters 5 and 6.
Proper accommodation for taking meals and for taking shelter during interruption of work in night time and due
to adverse weather condition with amenities of sleeping bed including provision for lights and fans have to
provide.
7-30
Vol. 7
Safety During Construction
3.3
3.3.1
Chapter 3
EXCAVATION AND FOUNDATION WORK

General
The requirements of this section shall be satisfied in addition to those of Sec 3.12 of Part 6 for all excavation and
foundation works.
The distribution of the supporting foundation shall be such as to avoid any harmful differential settlement of the
structure. The type and design of the foundation adopted shall ensure safety to workmen during construction
and residents of the neighboring property. Sufficient care shall be taken in areas, where withdrawal of ground
water from surrounding areas could result in damages to such foundations. During the construction of the
foundation, it shall be ensured that the adjoining properties are not affected by any harmful effects.
The process of excavation, filling in, pumping etc. shall avoid endangering the strength or stability of the
partially completed structure. The partially completed structure shall be capable of carrying loads previously
taken by temporary works which, as part of the construction procedure, have to be transferred before the
completion of the work.
Excavation with intervals on any site shall be avoided. If such excavation is unavoidable, the excavated site shall
be properly fenced and warning signals.
Excavation of interrupted or temporarily suspended construction shall be either backfilled or barricaded.
During construction, inspection shall be made by the engineer-in-charge to ensure that all protective works
carried out to safe-guard the adjoining property are sufficient and in good order to ensure safety.
Arrangements for safe movement of workers and inspectors in the trench have to be planned and provided.
Before carrying out any excavation work/pile driving, the position, depth and size of underground structures,
such as water pipes, mains, cables or other services in the vicinity to the proposed work, shall be obtained from
the appropriate Authority to prevent accidents to workmen engaged in excavation work and calamities for the
general public. Prior to commencement of excavation detailed data of the type of soils that are likely to be met
with during excavation shall be obtained and the type of protective works by way of shoring timbering, etc, shall
be decided upon for the various strata that are likely to be encountered during excavation. For detailed
information regarding safety requirements during excavation reference shall be made to good practice.
3.3.2
Excavating Machinery and Tools
Heavy equipment, such as excavating machinery, shall be kept away from the trenches by a distance at least
equal to the depth of trench to a maximum of 6 meters. All excavating tools shall be kept far away from the
edge of trench.
3.3.3
Excavated Materials and Surcharges
Excavated materials shall be kept away from the edges of the trench to provide a clear berm of safe width.
Where this is not feasible, the design of protection for the trenches shall include the additional load due to the
materials.
Proximity of buildings, piles of lumber, crushed rocks, sand and other construction materials, large trees, etc.
may impose surcharges on the side of the trench to cause bulging, sliding, etc.
Additional protective measures shall be taken to support the sides of the trenches under these conditions. The
objects creating such threat shall be removed if possible before excavation starts.
3.3.4
Ground Water
Where deep excavation is required, the location of water-bearing strata shall be determined and the water
pressure observed to take necessary precautions. Direction of natural drainage shall be determined to facilitate
the design of intercepting drains to prevent the influx of ground water.
In areas where the ground water or soil contains constituents in amounts sufficient to cause damage to cement
or buried metals, a chemical analysis of samples of ground water and soil shall be obtained and necessary
precautions taken.
7-31
Part 7
Basements or pits below ground water level, which rely on the weight the superstructure for their stability
against floatation, shall be pumped day and night. Protective filters shall be used during heavy pumping in
excavations. The water shall be drawn away from the excavation rather than through the ground towards the
excavation.
3.3.5
Ground Condition
Adequate precautions, depending upon the type of strata met with during excavation (like quick sand, loose fills
and loose boulder) shall be taken to protect the workmen during excavation. Effect of climatic variations and
moisture content variations on the materials under excavation shall be constantly watched and precautions
taken, where necessary, immediately to prevent accidents at work site.
Where portions of the foundation are underlain by soft materials or where the layers of such materials vary in
thickness, the assessment of allowable bearing pressure shall require a settlement analysis.
Site investigations shall be sufficiently extensive to ensure that significant variations in strata thickness are
detected. If required, either the resistance of the inclined or jointed strata shall be increased or the foundations
shall be carried deep enough to prevent sliding.
Precautions, against pockets of poisonous/dangerous gases including protection to the workmen, shall be taken
during deep excavation. Effect of climatic variations and variation in moisture content of the soil shall be
constantly monitored and precautions taken immediately, when necessary.
3.3.6
Overhang, Slopes and Cavities
Overhangs in the trenches shall be supported by props. Use of heavy machinery shall be avoided under or over
this area.
Where climatic or other conditions may result in deterioration of the sides of excavation, consideration shall be
given to their support and protection. During excavation, adequate protections justified by established method
of analysis shall be taken to prevent slope instability.
3.3.7
Blasting and Vibration
Blasting for foundation of buildings is prohibited unless special permission is obtained from the Authority.
Where blasting technique is to be used, an analysis for the stability of slopes shall be carried out and steps be
taken accordingly.
Attention shall be given to the geological strata of the site to ensure that it is not liable to transmission of
ground vibration to areas where it may cause damage to property or the ground.
After blasting, overhangs or loose boulders shall be cleared off the site. In all excavation works, precautions shall
be taken to eliminate/reduce vibration generated by adjacent machinery, vehicles, railroads, blasting, piling and
other sources.
Appropriate authorities shall be notified in advance of any blasting operations when these are to take place
close to public roads and railways. Also see Sec 4.3.
3.3.8
Health Hazards during Excavation
Mechanical ventilation shall be provided where gases or fumes are likely to be present in trenches.
All personnel working there shall be provided with protective respiratory equipment. All trenches/tunnel shall
be provided with emergency exits (see Sec 3.11.2 and Sec 3.11.3).
The precautionary measures provided shall meet the requirements of the local health authority.
The owner shall ensure that all precautionary measures have been taken and been inspected by the appropriate
Authority prior to commencement of such work.
3.3.9
Safety of Materials
Materials required for excavation, like ropes, planks for gangways and walkways, ladders, etc, shall be inspected
by the Engineer-in-charge who shall ensure that no accident shall occur due to the failure of such materials (see
Part 5 Building Materials).
7-32
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
a) Fencing, Warning Signs and Watchman

Where excavation is going on, for the safety of public and the workmen, fencing shall be erected.
Sufficient number of notice boards and danger sign lights shall be provided in the area to avoid any member
of public from inadvertently falling into the excavation. When excavations are being done on roads,
diversion of the roads shall be provided with adequate notice board and lights indicating the diversion well
ahead. Where necessary, recourse shall be had for additional precautionary measures by way of watchmen
to prevent accident to the general public, especially during hours of darkness. If necessary, watchmen shall
be employed as an additional precautionary measure to prevent any accident, especially during the night.
b) Vibrations from Nearby Sources
Vibration due to adjacent machinery, vehicles, railroads, blasting, piling and other sources require
additional precautions to be taken.
c) Precautions While Using Petroleum Powered Equipment
At the site of excavation, where petroleum powered equipment is used, petroleum vapors are likely to
accumulate at lower levels and may cause fire explosion under favorable circumstances.
Care shall, therefore, be taken to avoid all sources of ignition in such places.
3.3.10 Piling and Deep Foundation
All piling and deep foundation operations shall be supervised by a competent foreman. He shall also be
responsible for the precautionary measures to be taken.
For work during night, lighting of at least 100 lux intensity shall be provided at the work site. In excavations
deeper than 1.5 m, ladders, ramps or other means of escape, and staging shall be provided.
Every crane driver or hoisting appliance operator shall be competent to the satisfaction of the engineer-incharge and no person under the age of 21 years shall be in-charge of any hoisting machine including any
scaffolding winch, or give signals to operator.
3.3.11 Working in Compressed Air
Working in compressed air, in case of deep foundations, requires several precautions to be observed to
safeguard the workmen against severe hazards to life, compressed air disease and related ailments.
Filtered compressed air shall be supplied to a working chamber sufficient to provide 0.3 m3 of fresh air per
minute per person at the pressure in the chamber. Means for the escape of foul air, as well as circulation of
fresh air in the chamber, shall be ensured.
Hot drinks shall be supplied to workmen employed in compressed air after leaving the chamber. No person shall
carry any flammable materials inside the air-lock and nobody shall be allowed to smoke inside. Only approved
type of lamps and torches shall be used. Lighting of at least 4.5 lux intensity shall be provided.
Methanometer shall be used to detect hazardous gases. Samples of air inside the well shall be taken every eight
hours and tested for the presence of hazardous gases and for deficiency of oxygen. In case any hazardous gas is
detected, it shall be immediately reported to the engineer and the work in the compressed air stopped.
The pressure in the chamber, in the first minute, after starting compression shall be increased to 35 kPa. It shall
not be further increased until the lock attendant has checked whether or not there are complaints of
discomfort. The pressure shall then be increased at a rate of 65 kPa/min. If any person complains of discomfort,
the proceeding compression shall be immediately stopped and the person evacuated unless he feels
comfortable again in a reduced pressure.
In case of airlocks where blasting is done, the workmen shall be permitted to start work only after an inspection
by a competent professional found it to be safe. Air required for pneumatic tools shall be cooled and purified in
the same way as air for working chamber.
Every man lock shall have a minimum head room of 1.8 m and at least 0.85 m3 of space per person. It shall be
suitably equipped with an accurate pressure gauge, clocks, and efficient means to convey visible or nonverbal
signals to the lock attendant outside. All electrical installations inside the airlock shall be of flame proof type.
7-33
Part 7
All equipment shall be thoroughly inspected after every 45 days of working and every time it is shifted and
reinstalled, and certified to be in a safe working condition by a competent person. A record of all such
inspections shall be kept in a register.
The receiver shall be capable of maintaining the working pressure for at least four hours. Adequate access
through the bulk heads and sufficient ladders shall be provided. Escape routes in tunnels shall be in the corner.
Whilst any person is in a working chamber, the door between such chamber and any man-lock providing egress
towards a lower pressure shall be kept open.
No person shall be in a working chamber under pressure where the wet bulb temperature exceeds 29C
measured by a thermometer using nontoxic materials.
No person shall be employed on work in compressed air unless under the supervision of a person experienced in
such work. No person shall be employed where the pressure exceeds 120 kPa unless he has, within the previous
four weeks been examined and certified to be fit for employment in compressed air. If a person is suffering from
cold in head, sore throat, earache etc., he/she shall not be employed in compressed air. Finally work in
compressed air shall carried out only by workers whose physical aptitude for such work has been established by
a medical examination and when competent person is present to supervise the conduct of the operations.
Where the pressure exceeds, a suitably constructed medical-lock shall be provided. It shall have two chambers,
and doors fitted with bulls eyes and air valve. The lock shall have couch, blanket, dry woolen garments, food
etc. The medical lock shall be supplied with air, free of oil and carbon monoxide, and capable of raising the
pressure from 0 to 520 kPa in 5 minutes.
3.3.12 Adjoining Properties and Service Lines
Where bored or driven piling works are to be carried out in the vicinity of old structures which are likely to be
damaged, tell-tales shall be fixed on such structures to monitor their behavior while piling is in progress; timely
precautions shall be taken against any adverse effect.
Steps shall be taken, if necessary, to increase the general stability of the construction site or the adjoining
site(s), before new structures are erected. In all cases, the possible effect of slopes and excavation of foundation
stability shall be carefully investigated.
Before excavation or pile driving, information on the location of underground utility connections shall be
obtained from the relevant authorities. Probable extent of all damages due to pile driving to adjoining
structures or service lines shall be ascertained in advance of operation; pile driving shall be planned accordingly,
especially in the case of pre-cast pile driving.
If excavation involves cutting through existing land drains, they shall be carefully diverted into the ground
drainage system. In addition, all other precautionary measures required by Sec 1.5 shall also be taken.
3.4
3.4.1
PILE RIG
Erection of Pile Rig
The frame of the rigs shall be structurally safe for all anticipated dead, live and wind loads.
Whenever the structural strength is in doubt, suitable test shall be carried out by the engineer and the results
recorded. No pile driving equipment shall be used until it has been inspected and found safe.
When two or more pile drivers are used at the same location, they shall be separated by a distance at least
equal to the longest leg of either rig.
Pile drivers shall be firmly supported on heavy timber sills, concrete beds or other secure foundations. If
necessary, pile drivers shall be adequately guyed. Rigs not in use shall be supported by at least three guys to
withstand wind, storm, gales and earthquake.
3.4.2
Operation of Pile Rig
Access to working platforms and top of pulley shall be provided by ladders. Working platforms shall be
protected from wind and rain. Ladder in regular use in tall driven piling rigs, or rigs of similar nature, shall be
securely fastened and extended for the full height of the rig.
7-34
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
Exposed gears, flywheels, etc. shall be fully enclosed. Motor gearing, transmission, electrical wiring and other
parts of a hoisting machine which are sources of hazard shall have proper safeguards.
To operate energized electrical installations, insulating mats and wearing apparel, such as gloves, etc. shall be
used. Sheaves on pile drivers shall be guarded against workers drawn into them accidentally.
No steam or air driven equipment shall be repaired while it is in operation or under pressure.
Steam and air lines shall be controlled by easily accessible shut-off valves. These lines shall consist of armoured
hose or its equivalent.
The hose of steam and air hammers shall be securely lashed to the hammer so as to prevent it from whipping if
a connection breaks. Couplings of sections of hose shall be additionally secured by ropes or chains. When not in
use, the hammer shall remain in dropped position held in place by a cleat, timber or other suitable means.
Hoisting appliances shall be provided with means to reduce the risk of accidental descent of the load. Adequate
precautions shall also be taken to reduce the risk of any part of suspended load becoming accidentally
displaced. Care shall be taken to prevent the hammer from missing the pile.
Loads shall be adequately counter-balanced, and the tilting device secured against slipping.
Precautions in the form of securing the legs shall be taken to prevent a pile driver from overturning if a wheel
breaks. Stirrups or other means shall be provided to prevent the rope from coming out of the top pulley or
wheel. Hoisting ropes on pile drivers shall be made of galvanized steel.
Pile drivers shall not be erected in proximity to electric conductors. When electricity is used as power for piling
rig, only armored cable conforming to BDS 901 and other relevant standards shall be used. The cable shall be
thoroughly waterproofed.
3.4.3
Piles
Piles shall be prepared at a distance at least equal to twice the length of the longest pile, from the pile driver.
Workers employed in the vicinity of pile drivers shall wear helmets conforming to BDS 1265. No steam or air
shall be released until all workers are at a safe distance.
Piles shall be so slung that they do not swing or whip round. A hand rope shall be fastened to a pile hoisted to
control its movement. Long piles and heavy sheet piling shall be secured against falling. While a pile is being
guided into position in the leads, workers shall not put their hands or arms between the pile and the inside
guide or on top of the pile. Inclined piles shall rest in a guide while driven.
Maximum length of ballies (wooden piles) shall be 9 m. Ballies shall not be less than 50 mm in diameter at any
place and shall spread to 75-200 mm in diameter at the top depending on the class of ballies. Each ballie shall be
legibly and indelibly marked with information on the species of timber, suppliers name, class of ballie etc.
Whenever required, butt ends of ballies shall be preserved with creosote-fuel oil mixture 50:50.
The driving end of a ballie post shall be provided with an iron ring or cap. When creosoted ballies are driven,
adequate precautions, such as the provision of personal protective equipment and barrier creams, shall be
taken to prevent injury from splashes of creosote.
3.4.4
Inspection and Tests
Pile driving equipment shall be inspected by an engineer at regular intervals not exceeding three months. A
register shall be maintained at the site for recording the results of such inspection. Pile lines and pulley blocks
shall be inspected by the foreman before the beginning of each shift for any excess wear or other defects.
Defective parts of pile drivers, such as sheaves, mechanism slings and hose shall be repaired by only competent
technicians and duly inspected by foreman in-charge of the rig. The findings of such inspection shall be recorded
in the register.
For every hoisting machine, chain, rig, hook, shackle, swivel and pulley block used in hoisting or suspending, the
safe working loads shall be ascertained. Every hoisting machine and all gears shall be marked with the safe
working loads and the conditions under which it is applicable.
Tests shall be performed in case of doubt and half of the tested load shall be taken as the safe working load. No
part of any machine or any gear shall be loaded beyond the safe working load.
7-35
Part 7
3.5
3.5.1
CONSTRUCTION OF WALLS
General
The height of wall constructed per day shall be restricted to ensure that the newly constructed wall does not
collapse due to the lack of strength in the lower layers. Adequate number of expansion joints shall be provided
in long walls to prevent crumpling.
3.5.2
Scaffold
Properly designed and constructed scaffolding built by competent workmen shall be provided during the
construction of the walls to ensure the safety of workers. The scaffolding shall be of timber, metal or bamboo
sections and the materials in scaffolding shall be inspected for soundness, strength, etc, at site by the Engineerin-charge prior to erection of scaffolds. Steel scaffolds intended for use in normal building construction work
shall conform to accepted BDS standards. Bamboo and timber scaffolds shall be properly tied to the junctions
with coir ropes of sufficient strength or mechanical joints to ensure that joints do not give way due to the load
of workmen and material. Joining the members of scaffolds only with nails shall be prohibited as they are likely
to get loose under normal weathering conditions. The scaffold has to check after every 15 days in rainy season
and 30 days in dry season. In the erection or maintenance of tall buildings, scaffoldings shall be of
noncombustible material especially when the work is being done on any building in occupation. After initial
construction of the scaffolding, frequent inspections of scaffolding shall be made by the Engineer-in-charge. The
platforms, gangways and runways provided on the scaffoldings shall be of sufficient strength and width to
ensure safe passage for the workmen working on the scaffolding. The joints provided in these gangways,
platforms, etc, shall be such as to ensure a firm foot-hold to the workmen. Where necessary cross bars shall be
provided to the full width of gangway or runway to facilitate safe walking.
The Engineer-in-charge shall ensure by frequent inspections that gangways of scaffolding have not become
slippery due to spillage of material. Loose materials shall not be allowed to remain on the gangways. Where
necessary, because of height or restricted width, hand-rails shall be provided on both sides. Workers shall not
be allowed to work on the scaffolding during bad weather and high winds.
In the operations involved in the erection or maintenance of outside walls, fittings, etc, of tall buildings, it is
desirable to use one or more net(s) for the safety of the workmen when the workmen are required to work on
scaffoldings.
3.5.3
Ladders
Setting of Ladders: Rails of ladders shall extend at least 1m above the landing and shall be secured at the upper
end. As an alternative, there shall be adequate handhold at landing or side guys with anchorage at the bottom.
To prevent slipping, a ladder shall be secured at the bottom end or held by a person at the time of use. A leanto-ladder shall have a maximum angle of 75 with the horizontal. Ladders shall be provided with nonslip bases
on slippery or sloping floors. Ladders used in strong wind shall be securely lashed in position.
A ladder shall neither be placed against window pane, sashes or such other fragile or easy yielding objects, nor
in front of doors opening towards it. If set up in driveways, passageways or public walkways, it shall be
protected by barricades. Ladders shall not be supported on any insecure base, e.g. scaffold, planking over
trenches etc.
Use of Ladders: All ladders shall be constructed of sound material, and shall be capable of carrying the design
loads. No ladder with a missing or defective rung, or supported on nails only, shall be used. A dropped ladder
shall be inspected prior to reuse.
Ladders shall not be used as guys, braces or skids or in horizontal position as runways and catwalk. They shall
not be generally overcrowded. Ladders shall not be spliced; when unavoidable, splicing shall be done only under
the supervision of a foreman.
A user shall place his feet near the ends of the rungs rather than near the middle, and face the ladder when
using it. Both the hands shall be used in climbing a ladder.
Leaning more than 300 mm from the side in order to reach another area from a single setting of the ladder shall
not be allowed; the ladder shall be shifted to the required position.
7-36
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
All joints in the ladder shall be properly constructed. Where necessary, handrails shall be provided to the
ladders. A brace shall be attached at the middle and supported from a non yielding fixed object if a ladder shows
tendency to spring. Excessive deflection of ladders shall be prevented by stiffeners.
Metal ladder shall not be used close to electrical equipment or circuits. They shall be marked with 'CAUTION DO
NOT USE NEAR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT' signs. Overhead protection shall be provided for workers working
under a ladder.
Wooden ladders shall be inspected at least once in 6 weeks for damage and deterioration. Close visual
inspection is recommended in preference to load testing. This condition is particularly applicable to rope and
bamboo ladders where fraying of ropes and damage to bamboo is likely to occur.
3.5.4
Opening in Walls
Before making an opening in an existing wall, adequate supports against the collapse or cracking of the wall
portion above the opening or roof or adjoining walls shall be provided. Staging shall be of full length of the wall
opening.
Wall opening barriers and screens shall be capable of withstanding the intended load. Every chute, wall opening
or any other wall opening from which there is a vertical drop of more than 1200 mm shall be guarded by
barriers.
The guard shall be removable, hinged or otherwise mounted. The guards shall be kept in position regardless of
the use of the opening. In addition, a grab handle shall be provided on each side of the opening. The opening
shall have a minimum 25 mm high sill.
3.5.5
Projection from Walls
Formwork provided for horizontal projections out of the wall shall not be removed till walls, or other stabilizing
construction, over the supporting edge of the projecting slabs providing protection against overturning are
constructed.
3.5.6
3.5.6.1
Common Hazards During Walling

Lifting of Materials for Construction
Implements used for carrying materials to the top of scaffoldings shall be of adequate strength and shall not be
overloaded during the work. Where workmen have to work below scaffoldings or ladder, overhead protection
against the falling materials shall be provided. Care shall be taken in carrying large bars, rods, etc, during
construction of the walls to prevent any damage to property or injury to workmen.
3.5.6.2
Haulage of Materials
In case of precast columns, steel beams, etc, proper precautions shall be taken to correctly handle, use and
position them with temporary arrangement of guys till grouting of the base.
Manila or sisal rope shall not be used in rainy season for hoisting of heavy materials as they lose their strength
with alternate wetting and drying.
3.5.6.3
Electrical Hazards
No scaffolding, ladder, working platform, gangway runs, etc, shall exist within 3 m from any uninsulated electric
wire. The distance from high tension line for those features would be as per specification of PDB.
3.5.6.4
Fire Hazards
Gangways and the ground below the scaffolding shall be kept free from readily combustible materials including
waste and dry vegetation at all times.
Where extensive use of blow torch or other flame is anticipated scaffoldings, gangways, etc, shall be
constructed with fire resistant materials. A portable dry powder extinguisher of 3 kg capacity shall be kept
handy.
7-37
Part 7
3.5.6.5
Mechanical Hazards
Care shall be taken to see that no part of scaffolding or walls is struck by truck or heavy moving equipment and
no material shall be dumped against them to prevent any damage. When such scaffoldings are in or near a
public thoroughfare, sufficient warning lights and boards shall be provided on the scaffoldings to make them
clearly visible to the public.
3.5.6.6
Fragile Materials
During glazing operations, adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that the fragments of fragile materials
do not cause any injury to workmen or general public in that area by way of providing covering to such material,
side protection at work site, etc.
3.6
3.6.1
CONSTRUCTION OF FLOORS
General
Platforms, catch ropes, nets etc. shall be provided during the construction of roofs. Precautions shall be taken to
employ the correct technique of hoisting materials, to use hoists of sufficient strength for the quantity of stores
to be hoisted, and to prevent overloading and overturning of hoists or buckets, etc.
Where, the floor of one storey is to be used for storage of materials for the construction of roof, it shall be
ensured that the total load does not exceed the capacity of the floor.
3.6.2
Use of Sheets
It shall be ensured that joints in corrugated galvanized iron or asbestos cement sheets are kept secured in
position and sheets do not slip. Walking on asbestos cement sheets shall not be allowed.
Tiles shall not be left loose on the roof.
Injury to passers-by due to breakage of glass or plastic sheets shall be prevented. During wet conditions, work
on sloped roof shall not be allowed unless the foreman decides that the roof is not as slippery as to pose any
risk. In slopes of more than 30 to the horizontal, ladders, waist-tie etc. shall be used.
3.6.3
Platforms
Working platform required according to the type of roof shall be provided. Additional precaution shall be taken
to construct the platform with sound material secured and fixed, and checked from time to time throughout the
period of construction.
3.6.4
Flat Roof
Formwork provided for flat concrete roof shall be designed and constructed for the anticipated loads.
During the construction of the roof, the formwork shall be frequently inspected for defects. Enough walking
platforms shall be provided in the reinforcement area to facilitate safe walking to the concreting area. Loose
wires and unprotected rod ends shall be avoided.
Formwork supporting cast-in-place reinforced and pre stressed concrete floors and roofs shall be adequately
tied or braced together to withstand all loads until the new construction has attained the required strengths.
3.6.5
Openings and Holes
Every temporary floor opening shall either have railing of at least 900 mm height, or shall be constantly
attended. Every floor hole shall be guarded by either a railing with toe board, or a hinged cover. Alternatively,
the hole shall be constantly attended or protected by a removable railing.
Every stairway floor opening shall be guarded by a railing at least 900 mm high on the exposed sides except at
entrance to stairway. Every ladder way floor opening or platform shall be guarded by a guard railing with toe
board except at entrance to opening.
7-38
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
Every open sided floor or platform 1.2 m or more above adjacent floor or ground level shall be guarded by a
railing on all open sides, except where there is entrance to ramp, stairway or fixed ladder. Such entrances shall
be either guarded with a swinging gate, or so offset that a person is prevented from walking directly into the
opening. The railing shall be accompanied by a toe board at least 200 mm high.
The above precautions shall also be taken near the open edges of floors and roofs. Requirements of Sec 1.7.3
and 1.7.4 shall also be met.
3.6.6
Skeleton Construction
Temporary flooring of skeleton construction shall be provided with tightly planked timber over timber supports
to withstand all loads. The temporary flooring can also be made of metal sheet supported on timber or tubular
steel frame. No end of the timber plank or metal sheet shall remain unsupported.
A temporary safety platform or tier shall be maintained within two stories or 6 m, whichever is less, below and
directly under the portion where erection of steel or precast concrete member is required. Tiers shall extend 2.5
m beyond the edge of the work area.
3.7
3.7.1
CONCRETE WORK
General
All workmen involved in concrete work shall be provided with helmet and hand gloves, especially when
concrete pumps, concrete trucks or concrete precast elements are used. Precast piles shall be lifted and driven
by skilled workmen under the supervision of a foreman.
Temporary fencing, either with bamboo or C.I. sheet, shall be erected around heavy equipment delineating the
danger zone. All centering and shuttering materials shall be kept stacked at site before and after use.
3.7.2
Prestressed Concrete
Operating, maintenance and replacement instructions of the supplier of the prestressing equipment shall be
strictly adhered to in all relevant operations. During the jacking of any tension element, the anchor shall be kept
turned up close to anchor plate.
Thread on bolts and nuts shall be frequently checked for deterioration; choked units shall be cleaned. Hydraulic
jacks/rams, pulling-headers and other temporary anchoring devices shall be inspected before use. The
prestressing jacks shall be periodically examined for wear and tear.
No person shall stand in line with the tensioning elements and jacking equipment during the tensioning
operation. Also no one shall be directly over the jacking equipment when deflection is done. Workmen shall be
prevented from working behind the jacks when the tensioning operation is in progress by putting signs, barriers,
or protective shields.
3.7.3
Concrete Mixers
All gears, chains and rollers of mixer plants shall be guarded. If the mixer has a charging skip, the operator shall
ensure that the workmen are at safe distance before the skip is lowered. Barriers shall be provided to prevent
walking under the skip while it is being lowered.
All cables, clamps, hooks, wire ropes, gears, clutches, etc. of the mixer shall be checked and serviced once a
week. A trial run of the mixer shall be made and defects rectified before using a mixer.
While cleaning inside of the mixing drums, the power shall be shut and fuses removed.
3.7.4
Concrete Truck and Buckets
A reasonably smooth traffic surface shall be provided for concrete trucks. If possible, a loop road shall be
provided to allow continuous operation. An easy turnout shall be provided if a loop is not possible to provide.
Workmen and moving plants shall not cross the truck lines as far as practicable.
7-39
Part 7
Concrete buckets conveyed by crane or overhead cableway shall be suspended from deep throated hooks,
preferably equipped with swivel and safety latch. Closing and locking of the exit door of the concrete bucket
shall always be checked.
3.8
FORMWORK AND SCAFFOLD
3.8.1
Scaffold and Centering Materials
Scaffolds shall be made from strong bamboo poles, wooden posts, steel pipes or any other suitable materials.
They shall be adequately tied to vertical members resting on firm floor. Strong ropes shall be used to tie up
bamboo poles. In addition, cross-bracing with bamboo or wooden posts shall be provided along with ties or guys
of steel wire or rod not less than 6 mm in diameter.
Wooden planks or steel sheets shall be placed across horizontal poles to provide suitable footrest and carry
construction materials. The whole assembly shall be securely lashed together.
Deterioration of tying ropes and rotting planks shall be checked from time to time during the construction
period and changed if required.
Scaffold shall be dismantled after use piece by piece. Holes in the wall shall be filled up with the same materials
as that of the wall. Filled up holes shall have uniformity in texture and color with the surrounding surface. Crash
striking shall not be allowed.
Triangular wooden wedges shall be put under the posts for easy dismantling of the members.
Timber planks or steel sheets covering several posts at a time shall be placed below the vertical or inclined
posts.
Horizontal and inclined bracings shall be provided for posts higher than 3 meters. Spans of beam bottoms shall
be supported by posts at most 1 m apart if steel is used; instructions from the manufacturer/supplier shall be
strictly followed. Spacing of props under beams shall consider the increased load, and shall be posted closer
than those under the floor slab.
All scaffolding exceeding 20 m or six stories in height shall be constructed of noncombustible or fire-retardant
materials. Centering layout shall be planned by the Engineer, bearing capacity of the soil and the effect of
weather shall be considered in the planning.
All nails and similar projecting objects shall be removed or hammered down into the timber component of the
centering and shuttering materials immediately after stripping off.
3.8.2
Formwork for Concrete
The formwork shall be strong and rigidly braced so as not to bulge or sag when concrete is placed.
It shall be constructed in such a way that it can be dismantled without causing damage to the concrete or
disturbing the centering and shuttering of other elements.
Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has developed sufficient strength to support all predicted loads.
Workers removing formwork shall wear helmets, gloves, heavy soled safety shoes and belts if adequate footing
is not available above 2 m. In case of removal of roof shuttering, staging has to provide below the roof. While
cutting any tying wires in tension, care shall be taken against backlash.
Bolts and nuts in vertical concrete walls shall be loosened and withdrawn before initial setting of concrete. The
resulting hole shall be filled with rich mortar. The supports shall be dismantled in the order instructed by the
Engineer.
All walls, columns, slabs etc. shall have plastic or mortar spacers (round for vertical structures and flat for slab)
to be placed with the reinforcement to provide clear cover as per design. Top layers of slab reinforcement shall
be held in position by steel chairs.
The formwork shall be water-tight especially for the roof slab. Bamboo matting shall be placed on planks or
steel sheets to provide a rough surface after stripping of the formwork. Alternatively, ceilings shall be
roughened up by chiseling immediately after stripping off the formwork.
7-40
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
Suitable camber shall be provided in the formwork for horizontal members. The camber for beams and slabs
shall be 1 in 250, and for cantilevers, 1 in 50 of the projected length.
Half-seasoned soft-wood, laminated board or other smooth sheet shall be used for formwork for a Fair-faced
finish. The upper surface of the formwork shall be covered with oiled soft building board or veneered particle
board. Oiled paper or polythene sheet shall never be used.
The formwork made of materials liable to absorb water shall always be sprinkled with water before laying
concrete. Water shall not be profusely used; the formwork shall be in a saturated surface dry condition.
All the forms shall be tested both individually and in combination before final use to detect any flaw or defect.
Measures shall be taken immediately to remedy any faults, if detected, before the formwork is ready for use.
The frame and its joints shall be checked from time to time for the decay in ropes, bamboos, planks etc. The
defective parts shall be replaced before the formwork is used.
3.8.3
Load Capacity
Scaffolds, formwork and components thereof shall be capable of supporting without failure, at least two times
the maximum intended load. The following loads shall be used in designing the formwork:
a) weight of wet concrete : 20 kN/m3;
b) live load due to workmen and impact of ramming or vibrating : 1.5-4.0 kPa (light duty for
c) carpenter and stone setters, medium duty for bricklayers and plasterers, heavy duty for stone
masons);
d) allowable bending stress (flexural tensile stress) in soft timbers : 8,000 kPa.
The sizes for formwork elements specified in Table 7.3.1 are applicable for spans of up to 5 m and height of up
to 4 m. In case of longer span and height, formwork and support sizes shall be determined by calculating the
load and approved by the engineer before use.
All formworks and scaffolds shall be strong, substantial and stable. All centering and props shall be adequately
braced to ensure lateral stability against all construction and incidental loads, especially in the case of floor
height more than 3.3m.
The space under the scaffold or formwork shall not be used as a working or living space. The space shall not be
used as a shelter or refuge during inclement weather or at any other time.
3.8.4
Bamboos
Good, sound and uniform bamboo shall be collected in sufficient quantities for providing scaffolding, propping,
temporary staging, ramp etc. The bamboos shall be free from any defects, firmly tied to each other and joints
made smooth. Joining members only with nails shall be prohibited.
Bamboos for vertical support shall not be less than 75 mm in diameter, and shall be straight as far as possible.
Bamboos shall be used as vertical support for up to a height of 4 meters if horizontal bracings are provided at
the centre. Splicing shall be avoided.
After stripping the formwork, the bamboo posts shall be cleaned and stacked vertically in shade protected from
rain and sun. Defective or damaged bamboo posts shall be removed from the site.
Table 7.3.1 Sizes of Timber and other Sections for Formwork
Types of Formwork
Members Size in mm
Flat sheetings for slab bottoms, columns

and beam side
Beam bottoms
Vertical posts
Bamboo posts
Ballies
25 to 50
75x100 to 150x150
75x100 to 150x150
Minimum 75 dia
Not less than 100 dia at mid-length
and 80 dia at thin end
7-41
Part 7
Joist and ledgers supporting sheetings of slab
Studs for supporting vertical wall sheetings Columns yokeshorizontal cross,
pieces supporting vertical sheetings
3.8.5
50 x 100 to 75 x 200
50 x 100 to 150 x 150
50 x 100 to 100 x 100
Timber Posts
Timber posts shall be used in supporting formwork up to a height of 6 m. The posts shall not be less than 80mm
in diameter at any place and shall spread to at least 150mm in diameter at the top.
The timber posts shall be supported on timber planks at the bottom. Either the bottom or the top of the posts
shall be wedged with a piece of triangular wood peg for easy removal. Adequate horizontal and inclined braces
shall be used for all timber centering.
All timber posts shall be carefully inspected before use and members with cracks and excessive knots and
crookedness shall be discarded. The joints shall normally be made with bolts and nuts.
No rusted or spoilt threaded bolts and nuts shall be used.
3.8.6
Steel Centering
Steel centering shall be used for any height. In case of patented material, the instructions of the manufacturer
regarding the load carrying capacities shall be followed.
Post to post supports shall be provided with wooden planks. When tubular steel and timber centering is to be
used in combination, necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid any unequal settlement.
Tubular steel centering shall be thoroughly inspected before erection. Defective members shall be discarded
and coupling pins aligned to frames. Adjustment screws shall be set to their approximate final adjustment after
assembling the basic unit, and the unit shall be level and plumb.
The centering frames shall be braced to make a rigid and solid unit. Struts and diagonal braces shall be in proper
position and secured. As erection progresses, all connecting devices shall be in place, and fastened for full
stability of joints and units.
3.9
3.9.1
ERECTION OPERATIONS
Erection and Hoisting
The erection and striking off, especially of steel structural frame, shall be done by skilled workers.
Built-up, swinging and suspended scaffolds shall also be erected by competent workers.
Care shall be taken to keep fire alarms, hydrants, cable tunnels etc. unobstructed during the construction of
scaffolding and placement of ladders etc.
Anchors for guys or ties shall be checked for proper placement. The weight of concrete in which the anchors are
embedded shall be checked for uplift and sliding. In a tall and heavy guy derrick, tension in guys shall be
controlled by hand winches.
Enough number of bolts shall be used in connecting each piece using a minimum of two bolts in a pattern to
ensure that the joint will not fail. All splice connections in columns, crane girders etc. shall be completely bolted
or riveted or welded before erection as specified in the drawings.
The top flange of a truss, girder or long beam shall be temporarily reinforced with a flat bar on top of the
member. On deep girders and large trusses, a safety bar running their full length shall be provided. The bar can
be a single 16 mm diameter wire rope through vertical stiffeners of each member about one meter above the
bottom flange and clamped at the ends with wire rope clamps. If holes cannot be provided, short eye bolts can
be welded to the webs of the girder at intervals. The bolts shall be removed, and the surface chipped to leave it
smooth after the erection is completed.
The first load lifted by a guy derrick shall be hanged at a low height for 10 minutes and the anchor inspected for
any signs or indications of failure. No load shall be allowed to rest on wire ropes.
7-42
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
Ropes in operation shall not be touched. Each truss or deep girder loaded in a vehicle shall be tied back or
braced together with other trusses or girders already loaded.
The ropes shall be chemically treated to resist dew and rotting. They shall not be tied on sharp edges of steel
structures. They shall not be tied beyond the reach of safety belts complying to BDS 1359.
The proper size, number and spacing of wire rope clamps, depending on the diameter of the wire rope, shall be
used. They shall be properly fixed and checked as soon as the rope has been stretched, particularly if new. The
clamps shall be promptly tightened when expansion in rope is detected. Clamps and ropes shall be inspected
frequently to be sure that they are secured at place.
3.9.2
Small Articles
Adequate supply of bolts, washers, rivets, pins etc. of required sizes shall be maintained at all times. Foot boxes
on a guy derrick or climbing crane, shall be moved to the new working floor each time the rig is changed. On a
mobile crane, the boxes shall be moved as soon as the crane is moved.
Bolt baskets or similar containers with handles shall be provided on floats or scaffolds where small material,
such as bolts and drift pins are used. Small tools shall be gathered up and put away in tool boxes when not in
use. Rivet heaters shall have safe containers or buckets for unused hot rivets.
Materials shall not be dumped overboard when a scaffold is to be moved.
3.9.3
Hoist Protection
A material hoist shall not be used to transport workers; temporary elevators shall be installed, if necessary.
Proper protection by way of railing, footboard etc. shall be provided to the hoists.
Railing shall have a minimum height of 1 m while the toe board shall be at least 200 mm high.
Where erected on the outside of a building over 20 m or six stories in height, the hoist structure shall be built of
noncombustible or fire retardant materials. Interlocking or any other safety device shall be installed at all
stopping points of the hoists. The hoists shaft way shall be fenced in accordance with Sec 3.6.5.
No part of scaffolding or walls and openings shall be hit by crane, truck or heavy moving equipment.
3.9.4
Lifting Gear
Lifting gears shall be of good construction, sound material and adequate strength. Lifting gears must be tested
and examined by a competent person. Chains, ropes and lifting tackle shall be thoroughly examined by a
competent person every 6 months.
Special devices like cleats and hooks shall be used in erecting girders and other heavy structural members.
These shall be shop-assembled, bolted, riveted or welded to the piece and left permanently in place after the
work. A balance beam shall be used to lift laterally imbalanced pieces. Alternatively, a pair of bridle slings shall
be used at safe lifting points.
Table of safe working loads shall be posted in the tackle store and in prominent positions. No chain, rope or
lifting tackle shall be used for loads exceeding the safe working load. Wrought iron gear shall be effectively heat
treated.
All lifting gear shall be obtained from reliable manufacturers. No home-made or improvised gear shall be used.
3.9.5
Cranes
All parts of a crane must be of good construction free from defects and properly maintained.
Before the crane is used for the first time, it must be thoroughly examined and tested by a competent person.
Crane rails shall be installed and secured on firm ground. In tower cranes, the level difference between the two
rails shall remain within the limits prescribed by the manufacturer.
The safe working load shall be clearly shown on the crane; no crane shall be loaded beyond this limit. Nobody
shall be allowed to work on the wheel tracks within 6 m of a crane, or under crane where he might be struck,
unless effective steps are taken to warn him.
7-43
Part 7
Electrical wires within the site which can possibly touch the crane or any member being lifted shall be removed
or made dead. Cranes shall not be operated in proximity to a live overhead power line.
If it becomes necessary to operate the crane crossing the safe clearance from power line, the overhead power
lines shall be shut off.
Cranes shall be thoroughly examined, at least once in 9 months and the results entered in a register. The crane
operator shall not violate the safe reach limit of the crane as specified by the manufacturer. Cranes shall not be
operated at a speed which causes the boom to swing.
No person shall be lifted or transported by the crane on its hook or boom. Toe boards and limit stops shall be
provided for wheel barrows on the loading and unloading platforms. Material shall be loaded securely on the
platform with no projection.
Every crane driver or hoisting machine operator shall be competent to the satisfaction of the engineer and no
person under the age of 21 years shall be allowed to operate any hoisting machine and scaffolding winch, or
give signals to the operator. The crane driver shall have the full knowledge of controls, signals, loading, misuse,
ground and emergency regulations.
When the bucket or other members being lifted are out of sight of the crane operator, a signalman shall be
posted in clear view of the loading and unloading areas, and the crane operator. Standard hand signals shall be
used in controlling the movements of the crane; both the operator and the signalman shall be familiar with the
signals.
The crane operator shall respond to signals only from the assigned signalman but shall obey stop signal at any
time from anybody both inside and outside the site.
If a gantry crane is used, a warning bell which sounds automatically during the movement of the crane shall be
given to avoid accidents to workmen crossing or standing in the path of the moving loads.
3.9.6
Slings
Chains shall not be joined by bolting or wiring links together. Shortening the chains by tying knots shall be
prohibited. The chain shall be made free of twists and kinks. Proper eye splices shall be used to attach the chain
hooks.
Chains with locked or stretched links and which do not move freely shall not be used. Ropes shall move freely in
the sheave grooves. Sharp bends in wire ropes shall be avoided; pulley shall be used for these.
Idle and loaded slings shall not be carried together on the crane hook. In multi-legged slings, each leg shall be
evenly loaded. The slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid wide angle between the legs.
3.9.7
Inspection
Materials and joints in scaffolding shall be inspected from time to time both before and after erection for the
soundness, strength, damage due to weathering etc. Inspections shall be made for spillage of material or liquids,
loose material lying on the gangways, and proper access to the platform.
The scaffold shall be secured to the building at enough places; no ties shall be removed. Warning sign
prohibiting the use of any defective or incomplete scaffold and working in bad weather and high wind shall be
posted in a prominent place. Inspections shall be made for the observance of these requirements.
3.10 ELECTRIFICATION, EQUIPMENT AND OPERATIONS

3.10.1 Wiring System
All temporary and permanent wiring systems shall be designed by an engineer. All temporary wiring shall be
done by an electrician holding relevant license.
No scaffolding, ladder, working platform, gangway, runway, etc. shall be placed within 3 meter of an uninsulated live electric wire. Overhead wires/cables shall be so laid that clearances as required by Sec 2.2.3.4 are
maintained.
7-44
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
Protection shall be provided for all electrical wiring laid on floor which shall have to be crossed over. All flexible
wiring connecting the electrical appliances shall preferably be enclosed in a flexible metal sheath. Frayed and
bare wires shall not be used for any temporary or permanent electrical connection.
All electrical circuits, other than those required for illuminating the site at night, shall be switched off daily at
the end of the work. The main switch board shall be located in an easily accessible and prominent place. No
clothing or stores shall be kept near it. One 3 kg-4.5 kg CO2 extinguisher, or one 5-kg dry powder extinguisher,
shall be provided near the switch board.
3.10.2 Guarding of Cables
All cables and signal cords shall be guarded wherever such cables and cords pass through or cross working
spaces. Location of underground cables, if any, as well as overhead cables, shall be identified and the scaffolds,
hoists etc. shall be installed after providing proper guards to such cables.
Respective agencies shall be consulted for the proper method of providing protection to such cables, distance to
be maintained to avoid all hazards etc. Cables, especially underground, and their routes shall be marked for
future reference and use.
3.10.3 Lifts
Lifts shall be installed as per instruction of the manufacturer and under proper guidance. If necessary, guards
shall be stationed at the installation site. Building materials shall preferably not be carried in a lift.
Entry to the empty lift well shall be blocked; the blockade shall be capable of withstanding bumping of an
individual against it. Notices/signs shall be displayed in the lift lobby when the lift is not in operation.
3.10.4 Construction Machinery
Construction machinery shall conform to standards specified in the specification of works, or determined as
required on site and approved by the engineer. They shall be in running condition without any defect.
The machinery shall be operated by competent operators only. The machinery will be checked thoroughly for
any defect periodically, as well as each day before use.
Every moving part of or prime mover, and every part of electric generators, motors and rotary converters shall
be securely fenced. Fencing shall be of substantial construction, maintained in efficient working order, and kept
in position when the machine is in motion.
If machines need to be examined, oiled or adjusted while in motion, it shall be approached by certified
mechanics only. Approach to unfenced machinery is allowed only when examination, lubrication etc. cannot be
done with machinery at rest, or when machinery cannot be stopped without serious interference with the
ongoing process.
Exhaust of petrol or diesel powered air compressors, hoists, derricks, pumps and all such machinery shall be well
away from combustible materials. Exhausts opening outside the building shall have a minimum clearance of 200
mm from combustible materials. All sources of ignition like naked flame shall be banned near petroleum- fired
equipment.
3.10.5 Heating of Bitumen and Tar
Bitumen and Tar Vessels: Tanks, vats, kettles, pots, drums and other vessels for heating tar, bitumen and other
bituminous materials shall be made resistant to damage due to transportation, excessive heating etc. All such
vessels shall be capable of holding a full load without danger of collapse, bursting or distortion. They shall be
provided with a close-fitting cover suitable for smothering a fire in the vessel preventing spillage or protecting
the bituminous material from rain.
Buckets for hot bitumen, bituminous material or tar shall have the bail or handle firmly secured, and a second
handle near the bottom for tipping. Bitumen or tar boilers shall be mounted on wheels for easy transportation
or towing, and provided with hand pumps for spraying purposes.
Heated vessels shall not be left unattended. Only vessels using electricity for heating shall be used inside
buildings. Tar boilers shall never be used on a roof constructed of combustible materials.
7-45
Part 7
Bituminous material shall not be thrown into the hot vessels. Vessels shall be kept closed when not in use.
Containers shall not be filled to the brim with hot bitumen or tar. Enough space shall be left in vessels for
expansion of heated binder.
The vessel shall be leak-proof, and provided with controllable outlets. The buckets and cans in which the hot
material is carried shall be checked for any defect before use.
Heating of Bitumen and Tar: Gas and oil-fired bitumen and tar kettles or pots shall be equipped with burners,
regulators and safety devices. Heating appliances for vessels shall distribute the heat uniformly over the heating
surface. If bituminous mixtures have mineral aggregate filler, some means for stirring shall be provided.
Vessels filled with bituminous materials shall be kept at a distance from combustible materials.
When vessels are used in confined spaces, the gases, fumes and smoke generated shall be removed by exhaust
or forced ventilation.
No naked light shall be used near heated boilers. If a burner stops burning, the fuel supply shall be cut-off
immediately and the heating tube shall be thoroughly blown out by the fan.
Cutbacks shall not be heated over an open flame unless a water jacket is used. While they are being heated, the
vessel shall be kept open. Blow-lamps or similar devices shall be used for warming pipes instead of burning rags.
Bitumen and tar shall not be heated beyond the temperature recommended by the manufacturer of the
product.
Other Precautions: Indicator gauges shall be used to ascertain level and temperature of the material in the
boiler; nobody shall be allowed to peep into the boiler to ascertain the level. In small plants, dipstick shall be
used to gauge the levels in the boiling pot.
Bitumen and tar shall be kept dry. Boiler shall either have a device that prevents foam from reaching the
burners, or anti-foaming agents shall be used to control foaming. The heating shall be at low temperature till
the water entrapped, if any, is completely evaporated. Any water present in the boiler shall also be drained out
before using it.
Bitumen or tar spilled around boilers shall be promptly cleaned up. When tanks are cleaned by steam, buildingup of pressure shall be prevented. No inspection shall be made while the boiler is under use, or is pressurized.
While discharging heated binder from the boiler, workers shall not stand opposite to the jet. The container shall
be handled only after closing the valve. Bitumen and tar shall be handled in a way as not to spill.
Mops and other applicators covered with bituminous materials shall not be stored inside buildings.
3.10.6 Flame Cutting and Welding
For all arc welding work, either a helmet or a hand-held face shield conforming to BDS 1360 shall be used. See
also Sec 3.2.1.
All welding and flame-cutting operations shall be performed in protected areas; closed spaces shall be properly
ventilated. Suitable protection against the rays of the electric arc shall be provided where arc welding
operations might be viewed within normal range by persons other than the welding operators and inspectors.
When working on aluminum structures, or close to other welders, protection for the back of the head shall be
arranged. When slag is being removed from weld by clipping, the eyes shall be protected by goggles conforming
to BDS 1360.
Leather gauntlet gloves with canvas or leather cuffs, shall be worn by welders. Any visible foam near the arc
shall be rapidly dispersed. Where argon or carbon dioxide is being used as the shielding gas, particularly in
confined spaces, breathing apparatus of the airline type shall be worn.
Gas cylinders shall be kept in the upright position, and conveyed in trolleys. While being carried by cranes, the
gas cylinders shall be put in cages. The cylinder shall be marked 'full' or 'empty' as the case may be.
Gas cylinders shall be stored away from open flames and other sources of fire. Oxygen cylinders shall not be
stored near oil, grease, sources of gas and similar combustible materials.
7-46
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
When the cylinders are in use, cylinder valve key or wrench shall be placed in position. Cylinder valve shall be
closed before a cylinder is moved, when the torches are being replaced or welding is stopped for some reason.
The cylinder valve and connection shall not be lubricated.
A 5 Kg CO2 or DCP type fire extinguisher must be kept where gas cutting and welding works are done. Acetylene
cylinder which has been subject to heat must be kept completely submerged in water at least for 12 hours
before further use.
Gas cutting and welding torches shall be lighted by special lighters, not with matches. The cables from welding
equipment shall not be run over by traffic. Double earthing shall be provided to the welding machines.
If welding is to be done near combustible materials, suitable blanket shall be provided and fire extinguishers
kept nearby. Welding shall not be done in areas where flammable liquids and gases are stored.
Gas lines and compressed air lines shall be marked differently by suitable color codes. Facilities shall be provided
in approved closed containers for housing the necessary vision, respiratory and protective equipment required
in welding operations.
3.10.7 Riveting Operation
Rivets shall be carefully handled to prevent accidental fall; wooden bottom shall be provided in rivet catchers.
Chains shall not be used in riveting dollies; leather, canvas or rope sling shall be used.
Snap and plunger shall be prevented from dropping out of place by securing the pneumatic riveting hammer.
Nozzle of the hammer shall be inspected from time to time. Torn or worn wire attachment shall be renewed.
Water shall be kept ready for putting out fire during riveting operations.
Snap and plunger shall be prevented from dropping out of place by securing the pneumatic riveting hammer.
Nozzle of the hammer shall be inspected from time to time. Torn or worn wire attachment shall be renewed.
Water shall be kept ready for putting out fire during riveting operations.
3.11 CONSTRUCTION HAZARDS

3.11.1 General
Implements used for carrying materials to the top of scaffolding shall be of adequate strength and shall not be
overloaded during the work. Overhead protection against falling materials shall be provided under scaffoldings
and ladders. Care shall be taken in carrying long and heavy bars, rods, angles and other such materials.
Precautions shall be taken to correctly handle, use and position precast RC columns, piles, steel beams, joists,
angles and other heavy elements. Temporary supports with guys and props shall be provided in handling heavy
elements till the member is properly and permanently secured in position. Manila or Sisal rope shall not be used
in rainy season for hoisting heavy materials.
People suffering from asthma, chronic bronchitis, pulmonary fibrosis, or pneumoconiosis shall be screened out
from being employed in works involving the use of paints, varnishes, plastic foam, rubber, adhesives, etc. Those
having impaired lung function, hay fever, eczema, dermatitis etc. shall also be advised to avoid such work.
All construction sites shall have sufficient general and local ventilation unless otherwise required.
Adequate number of Absorptive respirators shall be provided to sites with inhalation hazard. Full breath
apparatus shall be used for works of limited period in dangerous situations.
The workers shall be made aware of personal hygiene. Regular health check up shall be arranged for works
requiring high physical fitness for prolonged period.
3.11.2 Fire Hazards
Gangways and the ground below the scaffolding shall be kept free from readily combustible materials including
waste, debris and any vegetation at all times.
Scaffoldings, gangways, etc. shall be constructed with fire resistant materials when blow torch or other
equipment producing flame is extensively used near it. A portable dry powder extinguisher of 3 kg capacity shall
7-47
Part 7
be kept near all flame producing equipment. Sec 2.1.3, Sec 2.2.4 and Sec 2.2.5.3 shall also be followed in
addition to the following requirements.
Fire Protection: Fire extinguishers, preferably of water type, shall be placed at strategic points.
Extinguishers shall always be placed in cranes, hoists, compressors and similar places. Where electrical
equipment is used, CO2 or dry powder extinguishers shall be provided.
In addition to fire extinguishers, other fire extinguishing equipment, e.g. sprinklers and hydrants shall also be
provided and conveniently located both within the building under construction and at the building site. All
extinguishers shall be maintained in a usable condition at all times in accordance to the instructions of the
manufacturer.
All workmen and supervisory staff shall be clearly briefed on the use of fire extinguishers provided at the
construction site. Free access shall be provided and maintained at all times to all firefighting equipment
including fire hose, extinguishers, sprinkler valves and hydrants.
Where the project itself requires the installation of fixed firefighting equipment, such as hydrants, stand pipes,
sprinklers and underground water mains or other suitable arrangements for the provision of water, it shall be
installed and made available for permanent use as soon as possible, in no case later than the scheduled time.
A permanent hydrant system shall be made available before the building has reached the height of 20 m. This
shall be extended with every increase in the number of floors, and securely capped at the top. Top hose outlets
shall be at all times not more than one floor below the floor under construction. All construction sites with a fire
risk shall have at least two exits.
Temporary stand pipes with required pumps shall be provided in place of permanent systems if they are
designed to furnish 400 liters of water per minute at 450 kPa pressure with a standpipe size of not less than 100
mm.
A metal box of substantial size preferably to be kept open, shall be provided and maintained near each hose
outlet. It shall contain adequate length of hose fitted with 12 or 20 mm nozzle to reach all parts of the floor.
Free access from the street to such stand pipe shall be maintained at all times. Materials shall not be stored
within 1.5 m of any fire hydrant or in the roadway between such hydrant and the centre line of the street.
Contact shall be established and maintained with the local fire authority during construction of all buildings
above 20 m in height and buildings of special occupancies like educational, assembly, institutional, industrial,
storage, hazardous and mixed occupancies having areas in excess of 500 sqm on each floor.
Telephone or other means of inter-communication system within the site shall be provided during the
construction of all buildings over 20 m in height or buildings with a plinth area in excess of 1000 sqm.
All waste, such as scrap timber, wood shavings, sawdust, paper, packing materials and oily substance,
particularly in or near vertical shaft openings like stairways, lift shaft etc. shall be collected and disposed off
safely at the end of each day's work.
An independent water storage facility shall be provided before the commencement of construction operations
for fire-fighting purposes. The tank shall be kept filled up at all times. Sec 2.2.5 shall also be followed.
Flammable Materials and Explosives: Highly flammable materials, such as gasoline, oil, paints etc. shall be stored
in approved containers. Storage of large quantities shall not be allowed unless stored in separate compartments
or enclosures of noncombustible construction.
Where cellulose or other highly flammable paint is sprayed, flame-proof exhaust ventilation equipment shall be
provided. Smoking shall be strictly controlled where highly flammable liquids are used.
Explosives like detonators, gunpowder etc. shall be stored in conformity with relevant regulations for storage
and handling of explosives. Combustible materials shall not be stored on any floor under construction until all
combustible form works are removed from the tier immediately above.
Temporary Heating: When temporary heating is used, all regulations as to the maximum temperature, distance
from combustible materials, spark arrestors, removal of noxious gases and other similar requirements shall be
fully observed. Temporary enclosure shall be provided where the source of temporary heat includes open-flame
devices.
7-48
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
Steam Boiler: All temporary or permanent high pressure steam boilers shall be operated only by licensed
operators. Where located within a building or within 3 meters of combustible materials or electric power lines,
all such boilers shall be enclosed with approved noncombustible covers. Safety valves shall be adjusted to
exactly 70 kPa in excess of working pressure. Two dry chemical power (DCP) type fire extinguishers of 5 kg
capacity each shall be kept at easily accessible locations.
House Keeping: Rubbish, trash, nuts, bolts and small tools shall not be allowed to accumulate on the site and
shall be removed as soon as conditions warrant. Combustible rubbish shall be removed daily. Rubbish shall not
be burnt on the premises or in the immediate vicinity. The entire premises and area adjoining and around the
construction site shall be kept in a safe and sanitary condition.
Fire Exits: All construction sites with a fire-risk shall have at least two clearly marked fire exits.
Other means of escape as required by various sections of this Code shall be provided in a construction site. Fire
exits shall be easily operable; stores, packing materials or rubbish shall not obstruct the exit.
Fire walls and exit stairways required for a building shall be given priorities in construction schedule. Where fire
doors, with or without automatic closing devices, are to be set in the building, they shall be hung as soon as
practicable, and before fire risk is increased by way of greater use of combustible material.
3.11.3 Health Hazards
Emission: Precautionary measures shall be taken against the emission of dust, small particles, toxic gases and
other harmful substances in quantities hazardous to health. Such measures shall include local ventilation, use of
protective devices, medical check-up etc. Exhaust ventilation shall be employed in enclosed spaces.
Clothing: Clothes worn by the workmen shall not be of such nature and materials as to increase the chances of
inflicting injuries to themselves or others. Wearing of loose garments shall be strictly avoided.
Workmen using naked flames (such as in welding) shall not wear clothing of synthetic fibre or similar materials
which increases the risk of fire hazards.
Removal of Dust: Spread of dust, sand blasts and other harmful materials and chemical agents shall be
controlled at or near the source to prevent overspill to adjoining premises or streets.
Proper gear and protection as required by regulations shall be provided to the workmen.
Proper methods of handling and transportation shall be followed. Places prone to generate dust shall be
frequently cleaned. Machinery and plants shall be designed for easy cleaning.
First Aid and Ambulance: A copy of all pertinent regulations and notices concerning accidents, injury and first aid
shall be prominently displayed at the work site.
A first aid box or cupboard shall be provided for every 150 workmen and be accessible. The provision shall also
include a stretcher and cot with accessories for every 300 workmen.
In case of a site where more than 600 workmen are employed at any one time, or in which more than 300
workmen are employed at any one time and is 15 km from the nearest health service facility, provision of an
ambulance shall be made.
3.11.4 Skin Hazard
Workmen engaged in works which may splash liquid or other materials liable to injure the skin shall have
enough protective clothing to cover the body and limbs.
Whenever epoxy resins are mixed indoor, the place shall be adequately ventilated. Damaged protective gears
shall not be used, and shall be replaced. Containers of hazardous chemicals shall be kept in a clearly marked-off
area of the work space.
Spillage on and contamination of tools, equipment, or the outside of the containers shall be avoided. If spillage
or contamination occurs, the affected area shall be cleaned up immediately.
Contaminated skin/part of the body shall be washed immediately with warm soapy water. Proper barrier
creams shall be used. All contamination on part of the body shall be regularly and efficiently removed during
breaks and after finishing time.
7-49
Part 7
3.11.5 Noise Hazard

Noise shall be controlled, if possible, by soundproof shields, baffles or absorbent lined booths being fitted near
or around the source. Other general methods of control shall include silencing of machine exhaust, choice of
quite machines etc.
Protective measures shall be taken if the continuous noise level at the construction site exceeds 90 dB. For
levels up to 110 dB, properly fitted ear plugs of plastic, rubber or glass wool shall be provided. For levels up to
120 dB, ear muffs shall be used; for levels exceeding 120 dB, noise protection helmets shall be provided.
All noise control equipment shall be regularly inspected and maintained by adequately trained personnel. Care
shall be taken to prevent noise becoming a nuisance to neighbouring property.
Other precautions as specified in Part 8 Chapter 4 shall also apply.
3.12 ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION OF CONCRETE FRAMED

STRUCTURES (HIGH RISE BUILDINGS)
Workmen working in any position where there is a falling hazard shall wear safety belts or other adequate
protection shall be provided.
3.12.1 Handling of Plant
3.12.1.1 Mixers
All gears, chains and rollers of mixers shall be properly guarded. If the mixer has a charging skip the operator
shall ensure that the workmen are out of danger before the skip is lowered. Railings shall be provided on the
ground to prevent anyone walking under the skip while it is being lowered.
All cables, clamps, hooks, wire ropes, gears and clutches, etc, of the mixer, shall be checked and cleaned, oiled
and greased, and serviced once a week. A trial run of the mixer shall be made and defects shall be removed
before operating a mixer.
When workmen are cleaning the inside of the drums, operating power of the mixer shall be locked in the off
position and all fuses shall be removed and a suitable notice hung at the place.
3.12.1.2 Cranes
See Sec 3.9.5
3.12.1.3 Trucks
When trucks are being used on the site, traffic problems shall be taken care of. A reasonably smooth traffic
surface shall be provided. If practicable, a loop road shall be provided to permit continuous operation of
vehicles and to eliminate their backing. If a continuous loop is not possible, a turnout shall be provided. Backing
operations shall be controlled by a signalman positioned so as to have a clear view of the area behind the truck
and to be clearly visible to the truck driver. Movement of workmen and plant shall be routed to avoid crossing,
as much as possible, the truck lanes.
3.12.2 Formwork
The Formwork shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions as shown on the plans, and be so constructed
as to remain sufficiently rigid during the placing and compacting of the concrete, and shall be sufficiently tight to
prevent loss of liquid from the concrete.
Formwork shall be designed after taking into consideration spans, setting temperature of concrete, dead load
and working load to be supported and safety factor for the materials used for formwork.
All timber formwork shall be carefully inspected before use and members having cracks and excessive knots
shall be discarded.
As timber centering usually takes an initial set when vertical load is applied, the design of this centering shall
make allowance for this factor.
7-50
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
The vertical supports shall be adequately braced or otherwise secured in position that these do not fall when
the load gets released or the supports are accidentally hit.
Tubular steel centering shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. When tubular steel
and timber centering is to be used in combination necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid any unequal
settlement under load.
A thorough inspection of tubular steel centering is necessary before its erection and members showing evidence
of excessive resting, kinks, dents or damaged welds shall be discarded. Buckled or broken members shall be
replaced. Care shall also be taken that locking devices are in good working order and that coupling pins are
effectively aligned to frames.
After assembling the basic unit, adjustment screws shall be set to their approximate final adjustment and the
unit shall be level and plumb so that when additional frames are installed the tower shall be in level and plumb.
The centering frames shall be tied together with sufficient braces to make a rigid and solid unit. It shall be
ensured that struts and diagonals braces are in proper position and are secured so that frames develop full load
carrying capacity. As erection progresses, all connecting devices shall be in place and shall be fastened for full
stability of joints and units.
In case of timber posts, vertical joints shall be properly designed. The connections shall normally be with bolts
and nuts. Use of rusted or spoiled threaded bolts and nuts shall be avoided.
Unless the timber centering is supported by a manufacturers certificate about the loads it can stand, centering
shall be designed by a competent engineer.
Centering layout shall be made by a qualified engineer and shall be strictly followed. The bearing capacity of the
soil shall be kept in view for every centering job. The effect of weather conditions shall be considered as dry clay
may become very plastic after a rainfall and show marked decrease in its bearing capacity.
Sills under the supports shall be set on firm soil or other suitable material in a pattern which assures adequate
stability for all props. Care shall be taken not to disturb the soil under the supports.
Adequate drainage shall be provided to drain away water coming due to rains, washing of forms or during the
curing of the concrete to avoid softening of the supporting soil strata.
All centering shall be finally, inspected to ensure that:
a) footings or sills under every post of the centering are sound.
b) all lower adjustment screws or wedges are sung against the legs of the panels.
c)
d)
e)
f)
all upper adjustment screws or heads of jacks are in full contact with the formwork.
panels are plumb in both directions.
all cross braces are in place and locking devices are in closed and secure position.
In case of balconies, the props shall be adequate to transfer the load to the supporting point.
During pouring of the concrete, the centering shall be constantly inspected and strengthened, if required,
wedges below the vertical supports tightened and adjustment screws properly adjusted as necessary. Adequate
protection of centering shall be secured from moving vehicles or swinging loads.
Forms shall not be removed earlier than as laid down in the specifications and until it is certain that the concrete
has developed sufficient strength to support itself and all loads that will be imposed on it. Only workmen
actually engaged in removing the formwork shall be allowed in the area during these operations. Those engaged
in removing the formwork shall wear helmets, gloves and heavy soled shoes and approved safety belts if
adequate footing is not provided above 2 m level. While cutting any tying wires in tension, care shall be taken to
prevent backlash which might hit a workman.
The particular order in which the supports are to be dismantled shall be followed according to the instructions
of the site engineer.
3.12.3 Ramps and Gangways
Ramps and gangways shall be of adequate strength and evenly supported. They shall either have a sufficiently
flat slope or shall have cleats fixed to the surface to prevent slipping of workmen.
7-51
Part 7
Ramps and gangways shall be kept free from grease, mud, snow or other slipping hazards or, other obstructions
leading to tripping and accidental fall of a workman.
Ramps and gangways meant for transporting materials shall have even surface and be of sufficient width and
provided with skirt boards on open sides.
3.12.4 Materials Hoists
The hoist shall be erected on a firm base, adequately supported and secured. All materials supporting the hoist
shall be appropriately designed and strong enough for the work intended and free from defects.
The size of the drum shall match the size of the rope. Not less than two full turns of rope shall remain on the
drum at all times. Ropes shall be securely attached to the drum.
All ropes, chains and other lifting gear shall be properly made of sound materials, free from defects and strong
enough for the work intended. They shall be examined by a competent person who shall clearly certify the safe
working load on each item and the system.
Hoist ways shall be protected by a substantial enclosure at ground level, at all access points and wherever
persons may be struck by any moving part.
Gates at access points shall be at least 2 m high wherever possible. Gates shall be kept closed at all times except
when required open for immediate movement of materials at that landing place.
All gates shall be fitted with electronic or mechanical interlocks to prevent movement of the hoist in the event
of a gate being opened.
Winches used for hoists shall be so constructed that a brake is applied when the control lever or switch is not
held in the operating position (dead-mans handle).
The hoist tower shall be tied to a building or structure at every floor level or at least every 3 m. The height of the
tower shall not exceed 6 m after the last tie or a lesser height as recommended by the manufacturer. All ties on
a hoist tower shall be secured using right angled couples.
The hoist shall be capable of being operated only from one position at a time. It shall not be operated from the
cage. The operator shall have a clear view of all levels or, if he has not, a clear and distinct system of signaling
shall be employed.
All hoist platforms shall be fitted with guards and gates to a height of at least 1 m, to prevent materials
rolling/falling from the platform.
Where materials extend over the height of the platform guards, a frame shall be fitted and the materials
secured to it during hoisting/lowering. (Care shall be taken to ensure that neither the frame nor materials
interfere or touch any part of the hoisting mechanism.)
The platform of a goods hoist shall carry a notice stating:
a) the safe working load; and
b) that passengers shall not ride on the hoist.
All hoist operators shall be adequately trained and competent, and shall be responsible for ensuring that the
hoist is not overloaded or otherwise misused.
All hoists shall be tested and thoroughly examined by a competent person before use on a site, after substantial
alteration, modification or repair of hoists, and at least every 6 months.
Every hoist shall be inspected at least once each week by a competent person and a record of these inspections
kept.
In pre-stressing operations, operating, maintenance and replacement instructions of the supplier of the
equipment shall be strictly adhered to.
Extreme caution shall be exercised in all operations involving the use of stressing equipment as wires/strands
under high tensile stresses become a lethal weapon.
7-52
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
During the jacking operation of any tensioning element(s) the anchor shall be kept turned up close to anchor
plate, wherever possible, to avoid serious damage if a hydraulic line fails.
Pulling-headers, bolts and hydraulic jacks/rams shall be inspected for signs of deformation and failure. Threads
on bolts and nuts shall be frequently inspected for diminishing cross section.
Choked units shall be carefully cleaned.
Care shall be taken that no one stands in line with the tensioning elements and jacking equipment during the
tensioning operations and that no one is directly over the jacking equipment when deflection is being done.
Signs and barriers shall be provided to prevent workmen from working behind the jacks when the stressing
operation is in progress.
Necessary shields shall be put up immediately behind the prestressing jacks during stressing operations.
Wedges and other temporary anchoring devices shall be inspected before use.
The pre-stressing jacks shall be periodically examined for wear and tear.
3.12.6 Erection of Prefabricated Members
A spreader beam shall be used wherever possible so that the cable can be as perpendicular to the members
being lifted as practical. The angle between the cable and the members to be lifted shall not be less than 60.
The lifting wires shall be tested for double the load to be handled at least once in six months. The guy line shall
be of adequate strength to perform its function of controlling the movement of members being lifted,
Temporary scaffolding of adequate strength shall be used to support precast members at predetermined
supporting points while lifting and placing them in position and connecting them to other members.
After erection of the member, it shall be guyed and braced to prevent it from being tipped or dislodged by
accidental impact when setting the next member.
Precast concrete units shall be handled at specific picking points and with specific devices. Girders and beams
shall be braced during transportation and handled in such a way as to keep the members upright.
Methods of assembly and erection specified by the designer shall be strictly adhered to at site.
Immediately on erecting any unit in position, temporary connections or supports as specified shall be provided
before releasing the lifting equipment. The permanent structural connections shall be established at the earliest
opportunity.
3.12.7 Heated Concrete
When heaters are being used to heat aggregates and other materials and to maintain proper curing
temperatures, the heaters shall be frequently checked for functioning and precautions shall be taken to avoid
hazards in using coal, liquid, gas or any other fuel.
3.12.8 Structural Connections
When reliance is placed on bond between precast and in-situ concrete the contact surface of the precast units
shall be suitably prepared in accordance with the specifications.
The packing of joints shall be carried out in accordance with the assembly instructions.
Leveling devices, such as wedges and nuts which have no load bearing function in the completed structure shall
be released or removed as necessary prior to integrating the joints.
If it becomes necessary to use electric power for in-situ work, the same shall be stepped down to a safe level as
far as possible.
7-53
Part 7
3.13 MISCELLANEOUS
3.13.1 Stair , Ramp and Gangway
Buildings higher than two stories shall have at least one stair in usable condition at all times. This shall be
extended upward with each completed floor. Till the permanent handrails are provided, temporary provisions
like ropes, bamboo poles etc. shall be provided on stair.
Suitable precautions by way of support, formworks, etc. shall be taken to prevent any collapse of the stair
during its construction. No person shall be allowed to use such stair until they are tested by the engineer and
found fit for usage.
Where a building has been constructed to a height greater than 14 m or four stories, or where an existing
building higher than 14 m is altered, at least one temporary lighted stairway shall be provided unless one or
more of the permanent stairways are erected as the construction progresses.
Ramps and gangways shall be of adequate strength and evenly supported. They shall either have a sufficiently
flat slope (maximum 15o to horizontal), or shall have cleats fixed to the surface. They shall be kept free from
slipping hazards and obstructions.
Ramps for transporting materials shall have even surfaces, be of sufficient width and provided with 200 mm
high toe boards on open sides.
Requirements as set in Sec 3.11.2 shall also be observed.
3.13.2 Fragile Fixture
It shall be ensured that sufficient number of workmen and equipment are provided to carry the fragile fixtures
in the site like sanitary fittings, glass sheets, etc. Fragile fixtures shall be stored in a safe place away from the
normal circulation path of people, equipment and vehicle.
See Sec 2.2 for additional requirements for safe handling of fragile fixtures and materials.
3.13.3 Hand Tools
Correct tools in good condition shall be used for each type of job. All tools, particularly at heights, shall be
stowed. Wooden handles shall be made of good quality straight-grained materials. Hand tools shall be issued
through a tool room where they are stored safely and inspected periodically by competent people.
Hammer head shall be securely attached to the shaft. The head shall be in good condition and the face free
from chipped edges and not rounded from wear. The hammer shall not be used if the shaft is split, broken or
loose.
Set spanners with splayed jaws, or box spanners showing signs of splitting shall not be used. A fixed spanner of
correct size shall be preferred over an adjustable spanner. A tube shall not be used to obtain extra leverage; end
of a spanner shall never be hammered. A spanner shall not be used as a hammer, nor as a wedge.
A chisel with a mushroom head shall never be used. A chisel shall be used to cut in a direction away from the
body. Screwdriver handle shall be properly secured. A screwdriver shall never be used as a chisel.
Use of files with an exposed tang shall be avoided. Files shall not be used as levers or toggle-bar.
When a knife is used to cut greasy materials, the handle shall be such that it offers a firm grip and a shield shall
be fitted between the handle and the blade. The cut shall always be made away from the body.
3.13.4 Steel Structure
Riding on trusses while hauling them to their final position, shall not be allowed. The hauling ropes shall be load
tested before use.
Once in position, the trusses shall be kept secured with adequate temporary measures till the final fixing is
carried out. Standard safety belts conforming to BDS 1359 shall be used while fixing purlins on the trusses.
In steel construction, the entire tier of iron or steel beams shall be planked over, with the exception of
necessary hoist ways and permanent openings. Steelwork shall not advance more than six floors ahead of the
permanent floor construction.
7-54
Vol. 7
Chapter 3
The proposed erection scheme of a steel work shall be analyzed and checked for safety measures undertaken;
the scheme shall cover safety aspects at all stages.
3.13.5 Finish Works
Painting: The quantity of paint and thinner required only for the day's work shall be issued from the store. All
unused containers of paint and thinner shall be closed with tight-fitting lids, and kept at a safe place away from
the work site.
Metal receptacles with pedal operated metal lids shall be kept at the work site for depositing used cotton rags
and waste. The contents of such receptacles shall be disposed off daily at a safe place, preferably by burning
under proper supervision.
All containers of paint shall be deposited in the paint store after use. Used paint brushes shall be cleaned and
deposited in the store. A 5 kg dry powder fire extinguisher shall be kept near the paint store (see Sec 2.2.16).
Adequate ventilation to prevent the accumulation of flammable vapour to hazardous level of concentration
shall be provided in all areas where painting is done. When painting is done in confined spaces where flammable
or explosive vapour may develop, required heat and power shall only be provided through covered ducts
remote from the likely source of flame.
Sources of ignition, such as open flame and exposed heating elements, shall not be permitted in areas or rooms
where spray painting is done, nor shall smoking be allowed there.
Polishing: Extra care shall be taken while handling polish consisting of acid and other chemical ingredients. Only
the quantity of polish required for the day's work shall be kept at the work spot.
All containers of polish shall be kept closed with tight fitting lids in a safe place.
Protective clothing, gloves, respiratory equipment, etc. shall be provided to the workmen applying polishes. Sec
2.2.4 shall be observed as additional requirement.
Pavements: Pavement risers shall not be higher than 225 mm. All undulating surfaces shall be smoothed. At
least a 1 m x 0.5 m area of the pavement adjacent to a vehicular road crossing shall have a checkered surface
preferably of a texture and colour different from those of the surrounding surface.
Terracing: Protective clothing, gloves and shoes shall be used in terracing work, especially while handling lime
and other ingredients. Lime and mortar stuck on the body shall be thoroughly cleaned. Other requirements for
handling lime shall be as specified in Sec 2.2.1.2.
7-55
Chapter 4
4.1
4.1.1
PRELIMINARY PROCEDURE
DEMOLITION WORK
General
The safety provisions specified in this chapter shall apply to demolition and dismantling of all types of buildings
and structures in addition to the safety requirements mentioned in Chapter 3.
4.1.2
Planning
Before commencing the demolition work, a detailed survey and study shall be made of the structure to be
demolished and the structures in its surroundings. This shall include the manner in which the various parts of
the building to be demolished are supported and how far the demolition will affect the safety of the
surrounding structures. Planning for demolition and safety of adjoining structures shall be made accordingly.
The sequence of operations shall be planned by an Engineer-in-charge recognized by the Authority as having
experience in demolition work of similar magnitude. No deviation from the approved plan shall be permitted
without the approval of the Engineer-in-charge. Before the commencement of each stage of demolition, the
foreman shall brief the workmen in detail regarding the safety aspects to be kept in view.
Demolition of buildings and structures shall be carried out under supervision of qualified Engineer and with prior
notification to the AUTHORITY as prescribed by the latter.
The Authority may require the permittee to submit the plans and a schedule of demolition. Neighbors and
public shall be notified of the intended demolition through newspaper or other media. The extent, duration and
time of the demolition shall be clearly specified in the notice.
4.1.3
Protection of Adjoining Property
A written notice shall be delivered to the owner of each potentially affected plot, building or structure at least a
week in advance of the commencement of work. The notice shall request written permission to enter the plot,
building or structure prior to the commencement of work and as and when required during the work to inspect
and preserve them from damage.
Owner of the structure to be demolished or dismantled shall under all circumstances preserve and protect the
adjoining lot, building or structure from damage or injury. This shall be done at his own expense.
In case damage to the adjoining property is imminent, the demolition operation shall be stopped forthwith and
shall not be restarted until the necessary measures to prevent such damage have been taken. All waste
materials and debris from the demolition shall be removed immediately.
If the owner of the property to be demolished is denied entry to an adjoining structure, he shall immediately
notify the Authority in writing of such denial. In this situation, the Authority may hold the adjoining property
owner fully responsible for any damage to his property.
4.1.4
Precautions prior to Demolition
Demolition of any building shall not commence until the required pedestrian protection structures in
accordance with 4.1.5 have been built. Building or structure damaged by fire, flood, explosion or earthquake,
shall be protected from collapse by way of bracing, shoring etc. before demolition is commenced.
Permission shall be secured from the Authority for using explosives. General public and owners of the adjoining
properties shall be notified beforehand of such use. All precautions as required by Sec 2.2.5.3 and Sec 4.3 shall
have to be ensured before, during and after the use of the explosives.
Part 7
7-57
Part 7
Danger signs shall be posted round the property; this shall conform to the relevant sections of Part 10. All
entrances shall be barricaded or manned. At least two independent exits shall be provided at night; warning
lights shall be placed above all barricades during the night and dark hours. Even when work is not in progress,
watchmen shall be provided to prevent unauthorized entry of the public in the danger zone.
4.1.5
Protection of Public
Safe distances shall be clearly marked and prominent signs posted. Every sidewalk and road adjacent to the site
shall be either closed or protected. All public roads shall be kept open and unobstructed at all times unless
unavoidable circumstances arise.
If a covered walk is not necessary in the opinion of the Engineer-in-charge he shall issue a permit to block off
part of the sidewalk and have a temporary walk provided. Pedestrians shall be provided with diversion roads or
alternate protection as specified in Sec 1.7 and Table 7.4.1.
All utility lines shall be disconnected upon the approval of the concerned Authorities. Temporary service
connection for the demolition work shall be taken separately. See Sec 3.3.9 and 3.3.12 for other requirements.
Workmen shall be provided with all necessary safety appliances as specified in the following sections and in
Chapter 3 prior to the start of work. Safety precautions for fire shall be provided.
The site shall be thoroughly cleaned of combustible materials and debris before commencement of demolition.
4.1.6
Sidewalk Shed and Canopies
A toe board at least 1 m high above the roof of the shed shall be provided on the outside edge and ends of the
sidewalk shed. Such boards may be vertical or inclined outward at no more than
450 angle with the vertical. The side of the shed adjacent to the building shall be completely blocked by
planking/sheeting.
The roof of sidewalk sheds shall be capable of sustaining a load of 7 kPa. Impact of falling debris shall be
considered in designing and constructing the shed. Maximum load on the roof of the shed shall be maintained
below 12 kPa.
The flooring of the sidewalk shed shall consist of closely laid planks with a minimum thickness of 50 mm made
watertight. Only in exceptional cases, temporary storage on the sidewalk shed may be permitted; in such
situation, the roof of the shed shall be designed for sustaining 14 kPa.
Entrances to the building shall be protected by canopies extending at least 2.5 m from the building facade. Such
overhead protection shall be at least 600 mm wider than the entrance, and 2.5 m in height.
4.2
4.2.1
PRECAUTIONS DURING DEMOLOTION

General
The owner shall provide protection against all damages or loss of life and property during demolition. Constant
supervision shall be provided during a demolition work by a competent and experienced engineer.
The demolition site shall be provided with natural and artificial lighting and ventilation.
All existing features required during demolition operations shall be well protected with substantial covering to
the entire satisfaction of the rules and regulations of the undertakings or they shall be temporarily relocated.
For a building or structure more than 8 m or two stories high, all windows and exterior wall openings that are
within 6 m of floor opening used for the passage of debris from floors above, shall be solidly boarded. Openings
in floors below the level of demolition, not used for removal of materials or debris, shall be barricaded or
covered by planks.
4.2.2
Sequence of Demolition Operation
The demolition shall proceed in descending order and storey by storey. All work in the upper floor shall be
completed and approved by the engineer prior to disturbing any supporting member on the lower floor.
7-58
Vol. 7
Demolition Work
Chapter 4
Demolition of the structure in sections may be permitted in exceptional cases only if necessary precautions are
ensured. The demolition work shall proceed within such a way that:
it causes the least damage and nuisance to the adjoining building and the members of the public, and
it satisfies all safety requirements to avoid any accidents.
Table 7.4.1: Type of Protection Required for Pedestrians near a Demolition Site
Horizontal Distance from inside
Height* to Horizontal
Type of Minimum
of the Sidewalk to the Structure
Distance Ratio
Less than 3m
6:1 or more
4:1 to 6:1
3:1 to 4:1
2:1 to 3:1
up to 2:1
Protection Required
Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D
Type E
Over 3 m to less than 4.5 m
10:1 or more
6:1 to 10:1
4:1 to 6:1
3:1 to 4:1
up to 3:1
Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D
Type E
15:1 or more
10:1 to 15:1
6:1 to 10:1
4:1 to 6:1
up to 4:1
Type A
Type B
Type C
Type D
Type E
15:1 or more
10:1 to 15:1
6:1 to 10:1
up to 6:1
Type B
Type C
Type D
Type E
10:1 or more
up to 10:1
Type D
Type E
Over 4.5 to less than 7.5 m
Over 7.5 m to less than 12 m
12 m and more
Type A: Total blockade of the road;

Type B: Temporary diversion over the entire length of the footpath adjacent to the structure;
Type C: A sidewalk shed for the entire length, in accordance with Sec 4.1.6;
Type D: A fence of tightly seated 25 mm planks, minimum height 2.5m;
Type E: A railing at least 1.5m high with mid rail and cross bracing.
* Height of the building or portion thereof to be demolished
4.2.3
Wall
Walls shall be removed part by part in reasonably level courses. No wall or any part of the structure shall be left
in a condition that may collapse or be toppled by wind, vibration etc.
Fall of the demolished wall in large chunks, which endangers the adjoining property or exceeds the safe load
capacity of the floor below, shall be avoided. Debris shall be removed at frequent intervals to avoid piling up
and overloading of any structural member.
Platforms shall be provided for demolition of walls less than one and half brick thick. Lateral bracing shall be
provided for sections of walls having a height more than 22 times its thickness, or otherwise considered
unsound. No workman shall stand on any wall to remove materials; staging or scaffold shall be provided at a
maximum of 3.5 m below the top of the wall.
7-59
Part 7
At the end of each days work, all walls shall be left stable to avoid any danger of getting overturned.
Foundation walls which serve as retaining walls shall not be demolished until the adjoining structure has been
underpinned or braced and the earth removed.
4.2.4
Floor
Support/centering shall be provided prior to removal of masonry or concrete floor. Planks of sufficient strength
shall be used in shuttering. No person shall be allowed to work in an area underneath a floor being removed;
such areas shall be barricaded.
The total area of a hole cut in any intermediate floor for dropping debris shall not exceed 25% of that floors'
area. No barricades or rails for guarding the floor hole shall be removed until the storey immediately above has
been demolished down to the floor line and all debris cleared from the floor.
In cutting holes in a floor which spans in one direction, at first, a maximum 300 mm wide slit shall be cut along
the entire length of the slab; the slit shall be increased gradually thereafter.
Planks of sufficient width, not less than 50 mm thick, 250 mm wide and 2 m long shall be provided at spacing
not greater than 400 mm for the workmen to work. These shall be so spaced as to firmly support the workmen
against any floor collapse.
4.2.5
4.2.5.1
Special Elements
Catch Platform
Catch platform shall be provided during demolition of exterior walls of structures more than 20 m in height.
These shall be constructed and maintained not more than three storeys below the storey from which exterior
wall is being demolished.
Catch platform shall not be used for storage or dumping of materials. These shall be capable of sustaining a
minimum live load of 7 kPa. The out-riggers shall not be placed more than 3 m apart.
Additional requirements of Sec 1.4.3 and Sec 4.1.6 shall also be followed.
4.2.5.2
Stairs, Passageways and Ladders
Make-shift stairs with railings, passageways, and ladders shall be left in place as long as possible, and
maintained in a safe condition. They shall not be removed from their position unless instructed by the foreman.
See also Sec 3.5.3 and Sec 3.13.1 for additional requirements.
4.2.5.3
Roof Trusses and Steel Structures
Structural frame of a pitched roof shall be removed to wall plate level by hand methods. Sufficient purlins and
bracing shall be retained to ensure stability of the remaining roof truss while each individual truss is removed
progressively. The bottom tie of roof trusses shall not be cut until the principal rafters are secured against
making outward movement.
Temporary bracing shall be provided, where necessary, to maintain stability. All trusses except the one being
dismantled shall be independently and securely guyed in both directions before work starts.
Hoisting gear suitable for the loads to be lifted shall be provided. A truss or a part thereof shall not be put on a
floor; it may be allowed to rest only temporarily on the floor below if it can be ensured that the floor is capable
of taking the load.
The steel frame may be left in place during demolition of masonry work. All steel beams/girders shall be cleared
of all loose materials as the demolition of masonry work progresses downward provided it is still strong enough
to stand as an independent structure.
4.2.5.4
Heavy Floor Beam
Heavy timber and steel beams shall be supported before cutting at the extremities. Beams shall be lowered
gently and kept in a distant place without obstructing any passageway.
7-60
Vol. 7
Demolition Work
4.2.5.5
Chapter 4
Jack Arch
Arches shall be demolished by standing on scaffolding clear of the arch. Tie rods between main supporting
beams shall not be cut until the arch or series of arches have been removed. The floor shall be demolished in
strips parallel to the span of the arch rings at right angles to the main floor beam.
4.2.5.6
Brick Arch
Abutments shall not be removed before the dead load of the spandrel fall and the arch rings are removed. A
single span arch can be demolished by hand cutting narrow segments progressively from each springing parallel
to the span of the arch until its width has been reduced to a minimum.
The remainder of the arch can then be collapsed.
The crown may be demolished by the demolition ball method progressively from edges to the centre. Explosives
may be used for a complete collapse of the structure by inserting charges into bore holes drilled in both the arch
and the abutments.
In multi-span arches, lateral restraint shall be provided at the springing level before individual arches are
removed. Demolition procedures as for single span may then be applied. Special temporary support shall be
provided in the case of skew bridges.
No partial demolition leaving unstable portion standing shall be allowed. Where debris cannot be allowed to fall
to the ground, centering capable of carrying load of the debris shall be designed and provided accordingly.
4.2.5.7
Cast-in-Situ RC
Before commencing demolition, the nature and condition of concrete and position of reinforcement and the
possibility of lack of continuity of reinforcement shall be ascertained.
Demolition of cast-in-situ RC members shall start by removing partitions and external non load bearing cladding
and other decorative features.
Reinforced concrete beams shall be demolished one at a time after the slabs have been removed.
Ties shall be attached to the beam to support the beam when suspended.
The reinforcement near the supports shall first be exposed by drilling with pneumatic drill and removing the
concrete. The reinforcement shall then be cut at both supports in such a way as to allow the beam to be
lowered to the floor or the ground under control.
RC columns and any other supporting columns of one level shall only be demolished after all other building
elements of that level have been completely removed.
The reinforcement in columns shall be exposed at the base after restraining wire guy ropes have been placed
round the member at the top. The reinforcement shall then be cut in a way to allow it to be pulled down to the
floor or the ground under control.
Reinforced concrete walls shall be cut into strips and demolished in the same way as concrete columns.
4.2.5.8
Precast RC
Supports and joints of precast RC blocks shall be removed and the member lowered to the ground or floor
below before demolition is performed. Precautions in the form of providing temporary supports or balancing
weights shall be taken to avoid toppling over of prefabricated units or any other part of the structure.
4.2.5.9
Suspended Floor, Roof and Cantilevered Structure
Suspended floor and roof slabs shall be cut into strips parallel to the main reinforcement and demolished strip
by strip. For ribbed floors, the principle of design and method of construction shall be considered and
procedures determined accordingly.
Ribs and beams shall never be cut at their mid-span and without securing by ties. Cantilevered portions,
canopies, cornices, staircases and balconies shall be demolished after providing support to the portion before
demolition of the main structure.
7-61
Part 7
4.2.6
Mechanical Demolition
Mechanical demolition shall be restricted to a height of 25 m. When mechanical devices, such as weight ball and
power shovels are used in demolition work, the area shall be barricaded up to a minimum distance of one and a
half times the height of the wall in addition to the requirements laid out in Table 7.4.1.
While the mechanical device is in operation, no person shall be allowed to enter the building.
Location of the devices shall be such that it is neither hit by falling debris nor it causes any damage to adjacent
structure, power line, etc.
4.2.7
Miscellaneous
No demolition work shall be carried out at night, or during storm or heavy rain. If demolition has to be done at
night, precautions in the form of red warning signals, sirens, working lights and watchmen shall be provided.
Auditory warning devices shall be installed at the demolition site.
Safety devices like industrial safety helmets (BDS 1265, BDS 1266), boots, gloves, goggles made of celluloid lens
(BDS 1360), safety belts (BDS 1359) etc. shall be used by the workmen.
First aid box shall be made available at all demolition sites. In fire-risk area, appropriate portable fire fighting
appliances shall be kept at hand. See also Sec 3.11.2 and Sec 3.11.3.
4.3
4.3.1
BLASTING OPERATION AND USE OF EXPLOSIVES

General
Before any work involving the use of explosives is started, a detailed survey and examination of the site,
buildings or structures and adjoining areas and property shall be made. Due care shall be taken to avoid
disruptions or damage to underground wells, tunnels, storage tanks etc.
Proximity of underground and over ground services shall be carefully considered before blasting operations are
carried out. Relevant authorities responsible for concealed underground works shall be duly consulted. Special
attention shall be paid to the presence of power cables, radio and television transmitting stations sited within 3
km of the site.
Experts shall be consulted before proceeding with any work where sources of danger like flammable gases or
liquids, sewage and drainage, unexploded missiles or mines, waste, explosive etc. are likely to be found. Also see
Sec 4.1.
4.3.2
Code of Signal
Before any blasting commences on the construction or demolition site, both audible and visual signaling
systems giving warning of blasting operations shall be established. These shall be such that they can be clearly
heard and seen by site personnel working within the site areas, and also by the general public who may be
affected.
Audible warnings shall comprise a series of readily recognizable signals with a distinctive tone. The Code of
signals, once established for a particular site, shall not be altered without good reason and adequate warning to
personnel.
Visual signs shall comprise clearly painted notices posted on all access roads to the site. Sentries shall be posted
at the entries at blasting times with clear instructions; if necessary, they shall warn personnel who failed to hear
warning signals or see signs.
4.3.3
Supervision and Responsibility
Only competent persons shall be employed as shot firers. When subcontractors are taking part in the work on
same site, the main contractor shall ensure a close liaison and collaboration with other contractors.
All site personnel present during blasting operations shall come under the control of the shotfirer.
All explosives shall be under the control of the shotfirer.
7-62
Vol. 7
Demolition Work
Chapter 4
The handling of explosives on the site shall be restricted to personnel who are required to do so in the discharge
of their duties and who are authorized in writing by the engineer. All site personnel shall be warned against
maltreatment of explosives and blasting accessories.
4.3.4
Protection of site Personnel and Installations
The contractor shall provide all tools and equipment used in charging and firing blasts. The shotfirer shall inform
the engineer the necessity of replacing any item. Shot firing cables shall be examined before use for cuts or
abraded insulation.
Circuit testers and exploders shall be handled with care and used and maintained according to the
manufacturer's instructions; any malfunction shall immediately be reported and repair shall be carried out only
by a competent person.
The area where explosives are to be used shall be defined before the charging of blasts. Vehicles and other
mobile equipment shall be prohibited from entering the defined blast area, except as required to deliver or
remove explosives.
All personnel shall be instructed as to what places of shelter they are to take up during blasting operations.
Mobile plant and equipment shall be moved to a place of shelter and switched off when a blast is to be fired.
After a blast, no personnel shall be allowed to return to the danger area until the shotfirer has conducted a
general examination and declared the site safe. The shotfirer shall not return to the blasting site until at least 5
min has elapsed after firing.
Electric detonators shall only be carried in boxes made of non conducting materials, with a lid and catch. The
shotfirer shall maintain a check on the number of detonators used against number issued. The boxes shall be
kept locked until detonators are needed.
Blasting shall not be carried out in confined spaces without adequate ventilation; positive ventilation at the
working face shall be maintained at all times.
No members shall be cut until precautions have been taken to prevent it from swinging freely. All structural
steel members shall be lowered from the building and shall not be allowed to drop.
4.3.5
Safety of Third Parties
The safety of persons who reside or work in the vicinity of the site shall be considered. Where necessary, they
shall be advised to vacate their homes or offices during blasting operations. In addition to notices giving warning
of blasting on all roads and paths approaching the site, sentries shall be posted to maintain surveillance around
the site when blasting is in progress.
Blasts shall normally be fired during the hours of daylights. The blasting technique and period shall be chosen so
that any annoyance to the general public from noise, ground vibration, dust etc. is reduced to a minimum.
In heavily built-up areas, small-scale short delay blasting techniques employing light charges in small diameter
holes shall be adopted. In such situations, short holes shall be carefully placed and charge weights correctly
chosen. Sand bags, blasting mats or other screening material of suitable construction shall be placed over the
top of each hole.
4.3.6
Use of Explosives
A sketch plan with sufficient duplicate copies shall be prepared for each blast. Before the explosive is deposited
at the point of use, a check shall first be made of the depth of each shot hole. The engineer shall be informed of
any departure from the planned arrangement.
Exposure to any compressive action or severe effect of a similar kind shall be avoided and grinding, scouring or
rubbing actions eliminated. The vigorous use of stemming rods to force explosives into a hole shall be avoided.
There shall be adequate clearance to allow easy insertion of the cartridges into the shot holes. The wrapping of
the explosive cartridge shall not be removed, nor the cartridge be cut.
Primers shall not be made up in a magazine, or near excessive quantity of explosives, or in excess of immediate
use. No attempt shall be made to use fuses, blasting caps, or explosives which have been water soaked. No
attempt shall be made to soften hard set explosives by heating or rolling.
7-63
Part 7
A bore hole shall not be loaded with explosives after springing unless it is cool and does not contain any hot
metal. Temperature in excess of 65oC is dangerous. A bore hole near another hole loaded with explosives shall
not be sprung.
No attempt shall be made to slit, drop, deform or abuse the primer. No metallic device shall be used in tamping.
Wooden tamping tools with no exposed metal parts except non sparking metal connectors for jointed poles
shall be used.
4.3.7
Blasting Accessories
No person shall attempt to uncoil the wires and open out the short circuited bare leading wires of the electric
blasting cap during approach of dust storm, or near sources of large charge of static electricity or near a radio
transmitter. Firing circuit shall be kept completely insulated from the ground, other conductors, paths or stray
current.
Except at the time and for the purpose of firing the blast, there shall be no electric live wires or cables near
electric blasting caps or other explosives. All wire ends to be connected shall be bright and clean. The electric
cap wires or leading wires shall be kept short-circuited until ready to fire.
All electric blasting caps shall be tested both singly and when connected to a circuit. Electrical blasting caps
made by more than one manufacturer or electric blasting caps of different design or function, even if made by
the same manufacturer, shall not be used in the same circuit. These shall not be fired by less than the minimum
current specified by the manufacturer.
Where energy for blasting is taken from power circuits, the voltage shall not exceed 220 V. A safety switch, the
same type as the blasting switch, shall be installed between the blasting switch and the firing circuit and lead
lines at a distance not exceeding 1800 mm from the blasting switch.
Both safety switch and blasting switch shall be locked in the open position immediately after firing the shot. Key
to the switches shall remain with the shotfirer at all times. Blasting shall be carried out using suitable exploder
with 25% excess capacity.
Rubber covered or other adequately insulated copper wires shall be used for firing lines; sufficient firing line
shall be provided. Single conductor lead lines shall be used. All holes loaded on a shift shall be fired on the same
shift.
In very cold weather, the safety fuse shall be slightly warmed before using. Short fuse shall not be used. The
length of a fuse shall be at least 1200 mm and the maximum burning rate 600 mm/min.
A fuse shall not be cut until the blasting cap is ready. The fuse shall be cut squarely across about 50mm with a
clean and sharp blade to ensure a dry end.
The fuse shall not be twisted after it has been seated lightly against the cap charge. Blasting caps shall not be
crimped except by a cap crimper designed for the purpose. The cap shall be squarely crimped to the face.
The fuse shall be lighted with a fuse lighter designed for the purpose. It shall not be lighted until sufficient
stemming has been placed over the explosives. The explosives shall not be held in hands when lighting the fuse.
In case of firing with safety fuse, the number of loud reports shall be counted; in the event of misfire, no person
shall be allowed to the blasting site for at least 30 minutes. An inspection for remaining of un-detonated
explosives shall be made; all misfired shot holes shall be marked.
If the misfire is due to faulty wiring or connection, the defect shall be remedied and the shot fired.
The stemming shall be floated out by using hose water until the hole has been opened to within 600 mm of the
charge; the water shall be siphoned out thereafter and a new charge placed or, a new hole drilled 600 mm away
from the old bore and parallel to it and about 300 mm less in depth and the new hole charged and duly fired.
7-64
Vol. 7
Demolition Work
4.4
4.4.1
Chapter 4
LOWERING, REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS

General
No material shall be dropped or thrown on the ground or outside the exterior walls. They shall be lowered
either in containers or by ropes, tackles, properly designed wood or metal chutes etc.
When the removal of any material causes an excessive amount of dust, it shall be wet before lowering or
dropping, if feasible. Tag lines shall be used on all materials being lowered or hoisted up and a standard signal
system shall be used and the workmen instructed on the signals. No person shall be permitted to ride the load
line.
4.4.2
Use of Chutes
Chutes, if provided, shall be at the centre of the building. It shall have an angle of more than 45o with the
horizontal, and shall be entirely closed on all sides except at the opening for receiving the material. The chute
opening shall be kept locked. The top opening of chute shall be protected with guard rails.
Debris may be dropped through holes in the floor, if absolutely necessary. Precautions shall be taken to avoid
overloading of the floor with debris. The debris dropping area shall be protected by rails.
4.4.3
Removal of Debris
Temporary stacking of demolished materials at the site shall be done in a manner ensuring fire prevention and
orderly removal. Debris shall be removed from the site as soon as possible. Materials like glass, nails, etc. shall
not be strewn about. Standard precautions to prevent fire from debris shall be taken.
4.4.4
Disposal of Materials
Demolished materials shall be disposed off according to their salvage value. Materials, which can be re-used,
shall be salvaged and re-used with the approval of the owner.
Rubbish having no salvage value shall be removed from the site and disposed off according to the local statutory
rules and regulations. Rubbish of combustible materials shall be disposed off immediately. All such operations
shall have the approval of the owner.
4.4.5
Regularization of Plots
If there is no immediate construction planned on the plot vacant after demolition, it shall be filled, graded and
maintained in conformity to the established street grades at curb level. The plot shall be maintained free from
the accumulation of rubbish and water, and all other unsafe and hazardous conditions.
Provisions shall be made to prevent damage to any foundation on the premises or on the adjoining property. All
previous service connections shall be capped.
7-65
Chapter 5
5.1
MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT, REPAIRS,

RETROFITTING AND STRENGTHENING OF
BUILDINGS
MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT
Maintenance management of building is the art of preserving over a long period what has been constructed.
Whereas construction stage lasts for a short period, maintenance continues for comparatively very large period
during the useful life of building. Inadequate or improper maintenance adversely affects the environment in
which people work, thus affecting the overall output and also the overall service life of the building. In the post
construction stage the day to day maintenance or upkeep of the building shall certainly delay the decay of the
building structure. Though the building shall be designed to be very durable it needs maintenance to keep it in
good condition.
5.2
TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of this Section, the following definitions shall apply.
Maintenance: The combination of all technical and associated administrative actions intended to retain an item
in or restore it to a state in which it can perform its required function.
Maintenance Management: The organization of maintenance within an agreed policy. Maintenance can be seen
as a form of steady state activity.
Building Fabric: Elements and components of a building other than furniture and services.
Building Maintenance: Work undertaken to maintain or restore the performance of the building fabric and its
services to provide an efficient and acceptable operating environment to its users.
Housekeeping: The routine recurring work which is required to keep a structure in good condition so that it can
be utilized at its original capacity and efficiency along with proper protection of capital investment, throughout
its economic life.
Owner: Person or body having a legal interest in a building. This includes freeholders, leaseholders or those
holding a sub-lease which both bestows a legal right to occupation and gives rise to liabilities in respect of safety
or building condition.
In case of lease or sub-leaseholders, as far as ownership with respect to the structure is concerned, the
responsibility of structure of a flat or structure on a plot belongs to the allotee/lessee during the leasehold.
Confined Space: Space which is inadequately ventilated for any reason and may result in a deficiency of oxygen,
or a build-up of toxic gases, e.g. closed tanks, sewers, ducts, closed and unventilated rooms, and open topped
tanks particularly where heavier than air gases or vapors may be present.
Provisions of Sec 8.1 and 8.2 of Chapter 8 Part 6 shall apply for detailing of reinforced concrete members, in
general. For reinforced concrete structures, subject to earthquake loadings in zone 2 and zone 3, special
provisions contained in Sec 8.3 of this chapter shall apply.
Part 7
7-67
Part 7
5.3
BUILDING MAINTENANCE
5.3.1
General
Any building (including its services) when built has certain objectives and during its total economic life, it has to
be maintained. Maintenance is a continuous process requiring a close watch and taking immediate remedial
action. It is interwoven with good quality of housekeeping. It is largely governed by the quality of original
construction. The owners, engineers, constructors, occupants and the maintenance agency are all deeply
involved in this process and share a responsibility. Situation in which all these agencies merge into one is ideal
and most satisfactory.
There are two processes envisaged, that is, the work carried out in anticipation of failure and the work carried
out after failure. The former is usually referred to as preventive maintenance and the latter as corrective
maintenance. The prime objective of maintenance is to maintain the performance of the building fabric and its
services to provide an efficient and acceptable operating environment to its users.
Maintenance in general term can be identified in the following broad categories.
a) Cleaning and servicing This is largely of preventive type, such as checking the efficacy of rain
water gutters and servicing the mechanical and electrical installations. This covers the house
keeping also.
b) Rectification and repairs This is also called periodical maintenance work undertaken by, say,
annual contracts and including external re-plastering, internal finishing etc.
c) Replacements This covers major repair or restoration such as reproofing or re-building defective
building parts.
5.3.2
Factors Affecting Maintenance
Maintenance of the buildings is influenced by the following factors:

a) Technical factors These include age of building, nature of design, material specifications, past
standard of maintenance and cost of postponing maintenance.
b) Policy A maintenance policy ensures that value for money expended is obtained in addition to
protecting both the asset value and the resource value of the buildings concerned and owners.
c) Environmental All buildings are subject to the effects of a variety of external factors such as air,
wind precipitation, temperature etc. which influence the frequency and scope of maintenance.
The fabric of building can be adversely affected as much by the internal environment as by the
elements externally. Similar factors of humidity, temperature and pollution shall be considered.
Industrial buildings can be subject to many different factors subject to processes carried out within.
Swimming pool structures are vulnerable to the effects of chlorine used in water.
d) User The maintenance requirements of buildings and their various parts are directly related to
the type and intensity of use they receive.
5.3.2.1
Influence of design
The physical characteristics, the life span and the aesthetic qualities of any building depend on the
considerations given at the design stage. All buildings, however well designed and conscientiously built, will
require repair and renewal as they get older. However, for better performance of the building envelop, the
following are the ways to minimize troubles at the later stage:
a) Minimize defects during construction and design,
b) Detail and choose materials during construction so that the job of maintenance is less onerous
In addition to designing a building for structural adequacy, consideration shall also be given to environmental
factors such as moisture, natural weathering, corrosion and chemical action, user wear and tear, pollution,
flooding, subsidence, earthquake, cyclones etc.
7-68
Vol. 7
Maintenance Management, Repairs, Retrofitting and Strengthening of Buildings
5.3.3
Chapter 5
Maintenance Policy
The policy shall cover such items as the owners anticipated future requirement for the building taking account
of the buildings physical performance and its functional suitability. This shall lead to decisions regarding:
a) the present use of the building anticipating any likely upgrading and their effect on the life cycles of
existing components or engineering services; and
b) A change of use for the building and the effect of any conversion work on the life cycles of existing
components or engineering services.
5.3.4
Maintenance Work Programmes
The programming of maintenance work can affect an owner or his activities in the following ways:
a) Maintenance work shall be carried out at such times as are likely to minimize any adverse effect on
output or function and with due consideration to the comforts of the occupants and public and
Third Party stakeholders.
b) Programme shall be planned to obviate as far as possible any abortive work. This may arise if
upgrading or conversion work is carried out after maintenance work has been completed or if work
such as rewiring is carried out after redecoration.
c) Any delay in rectifying a defect shall be kept to a minimum only if such delay is likely to affect
output or function. The cost of maintenance increases with shortening response times.
d) Maintenance work, completed or being carried out shall comply with all statutory and other legal
requirements.
5.3.5
Maintenance Guides
An owner responsible for a large number of buildings has to established procedures for maintenance. When an
owner is responsible for the maintenance of only one building or a small number of buildings, the preparation of
a guideline manual tailored to suit each particular building, can offer significant advantages. Such a manual shall
take into account the following:
a) type of construction and residual life of the building, and
b) environment and intensity of use (see 5.3.2).
The guide shall form part of a wider manual covering operational matters.
5.3.6
Planning of Maintenance Work
Work shall take account of the likely maintenance cycle of each building element and be planned logically, with
inspections being made at regular intervals. Annual plans shall take into account subsequent years
programmed to incorporate items and to prevent additional costs. It shall be stressed that the design of some
buildings can lead to high indirect costs in maintenance contracts and therefore, careful planning can bring
financial benefits. Decisions to repair or replace shall be taken after due consideration.
5.3.7
Feed Back
Feed back is normally regarded as an important procedure of providing information about the behaviour of
materials and detailing for the benefit of the architect and engineer designing new buildings, which will result in
lessening maintenance costs. It is an equally valuable source of information for the persons responsible for
maintenance. Every maintenance organization shall develop a sample way of communicating its know-how,
firstly for benefit of others in the organization and secondly for the benefit of the building industry as a whole.
There shall be frank and recorded dialogue on an on-going basis between those who occupy and care for
buildings and those who design and construct them.
Feedback shall aim at the following:
a) User satisfaction,
b) Continuous improvement, and
c) Participation by all.
7-69
Part 7
The information on feed back can be obtained from the following:

a)
b)
c)
d)
5.3.8
Occupants,
Inspections,
Records, and
Discussions.
Means of Effecting Maintenance
Some maintenance work will be carried out by the occupier of a building or by the occupiers representative. In
the case of leasehold or similar occupation not all maintenance shall be the responsibility of occupier. The
regular maintenance shall be clearly mentioned in the tenancy agreement. Responsibility of common areas shall
be clearly defined.
Maintenance work sub-divided into major repair, restoration, periodical and routine or day-to-day operations
will be undertaken by one of the following:
a) Directly employed labour,
b) Contractors, and
c) Specialist contractors under service agreement or otherwise.
The merits of each category for typical maintenance work must be considered because optimum use of
resources appropriate to tasks in a given situation is an important element of policy.
The success of contracting out depends on the nature of the services, conditions in which contracting is
undertaken (the tendering process), how the contract is formulated and subsequent monitoring of service
quality. The important consideration in the decision to contract out is whether a contractor can ensure a socially
desirable quantity and quality of service provision at, a reasonable cost to the consumers.
5.4
5.4.1
ACCESS
General
All maintenance activities including any preliminary survey and inspection work require safe access and in some
situations this will have to be specially designed. Maintenance policy, and maintenance costs, will be much
influenced by ready or difficult access to the fabric and to building services. Special precautions and access
provisions shall also need to be taken for roof work or for entry into confined spaces such as ducts or voids.
5.4.2
Access Facilities
Permanent accessibility measures shall be provided at the design stage only for all the areas for safe and proper
maintenance. It is a matter on which those experienced in the case of the building can make an important
contribution at design stage in the interest of acceptable maintenance costs.
A wide variety of temporary access equipment shall appropriately be provided for maintenance work, ranging
from ladders to scaffoldings or powered lift platforms.
Wherever possible it is better to provide permanent access facilities such as fixed barriers, ladders, and
stairways. When such permanent access facilities are provided necessary arrangement shall be included in
maintenance plans for their regular inspection, maintenance and testing.
All personnel employed for carrying out maintenance shall be provided with the necessary protective clothing
and equipment and instructed in its use.
When physical access is not possible in situations such as wall cavities, drains etc, inspections shall be made with
the aid of closed circuit television or optical devices such as endoscopes.
7-70
Vol. 7
Chapter 5
Access to Confined Spaces
5.4.3
Ventilation
5.4.3.1
Good ventilation shall be necessary in order that maintenance work can be carried out safely. This is especially
important in confined spaces. When the normal ventilation is inadequate it shall be supplemented by temporary
and forced ventilation installations. These shall provide general and spot ventilation as appropriate.
Special precautions need to be taken when entering a confined space. Such confined spaces shall be adequately
ventilated and trapped gas removed, particularly before being entered, to ensure that they are free from
harmful concentrations of gases, vapors other airborne substances and that the air is not deficient in oxygen.
Lighting
5.4.3.2
Good lighting is necessary in order that maintenance work can be carried out satisfactorily. This is particularly
important in confined spaces. When the normal lighting is inadequate it shall be supplemented by temporary
installations. These shall provide general and spot illumination as appropriate.
5.5
RECORDS
5.5.1
General
Good records can save owners and users/occupiers much unnecessary expense and reduce potential hazards in
exploration work when faults arise.
5.5.2
Use of Building Records
All personnel involved in the maintenance of the building shall be made aware of the existence of the building
records.
Known hazardous areas shall be explicitly marked on the records as well as being marked on site and shall be
pointed out to such personnel together with any system of work adopted for use in such areas.
Records are of value only if they are kept up to date and arrangements for this shall be included in any provision
that may be made for records.
Records shall be readily accessible for use and the place of storage shall take into account the form of the
records and the conditions needed to keep them from damage of any kind. It is recommended that a duplicate
set of records is kept in a secure place other than building itself and is kept up to date.
Following shall be typical contents of the maintenance records:
a) A brief history of property, names and addresses of consultants and contractors.
b) Short specifications, constructional processes, components, material finishes, hidden features,
special features etc.
c) As built plans and as subsequently altered with sections, elevations and other detailed drawings.
d) Foundation and structural plans/sections such as concrete reinforcement drawings.
e) Detail specification of all materials incorporated, for example, concrete mix, species and grades of
timber etc. Potentially hazardous materials and types or methods of construction that under some
circumstances may become hazardous shall be identified.
f)
Information on housekeeping and routine maintenance with details of internal and external
surfaces and decorations, schedule of cleaning, inspection and maintenance.
g) Means of operating mechanical, electrical and plumbing installations.
h) Description of renovations, extensions, adaptations and repair to each element.
i) All plant, machinery and propriety articles including manufacturers
trade
instructions for installation, use and maintenance.
j) Methods of work used in construction such as assembly of prefabricated units.
literature and
7-71
Part 7
k) All information related to fire such as:

i.
Location and service arrangements of all fire alarm and call points;
ii. Location and service arrangements of all extinguishers, hose reels and other fire fighting
installations;
iii. Location of all fire compartment walls, doors, floors and screens;
iv. Location of all areas of exceptional fire hazard;
v. Fire escape routes;
vi. Details of application of any tire protection treatment; and
vii. Location details and description of any installation for smoke control or protection of escape
routes.
l)
There shall be a wall chart showing at a glance the various operations which have to be undertaken.
Line drawings of buildings are always to be there.
m) Records of security measures shall be known to Authorized personnel only.
n) Where no records exist, information shall be slowly built up as it becomes available during the
course of maintenance work.
o) Use of computers for storing information shall be compulsory.
5.5.3
5.5.3.1
Mechanical Records
Documentation
Documentation shall record the following as installed:

a) the location, including level if buried, of all public service connections (for example, fuel gas and
cold water supplies) together with the points of origin and termination, size and materials of pipes,
line pressure and other relevant information;
b) the layout, location and extent of all piped services showing pipe sizes, together with all valves for
regulation, isolation and other purposes as well as the results of all balancing, testing and
commissioning data;
c) the location, identity, size and details of all apparatus and all control equipment served by, or
associated with, each of the various services together with copies of any test certificates for such
apparatus where appropriate. The information with respect to size and details shall be presented in
schedule form;
d) the layout, location and extent of all air ducts showing dampers and other equipment, acoustic
silencers, grilles, diffusers or other terminal components. Each duct and each terminal component
shall be marked with its size, the air quantity flowing and other relevant balancing data, and
e) The location and identity of each room or space housing plant, machinery or apparatus.
5.5.3.2
Drawings
Drawings shall record the following as installed:

a) detailed general arrangements of boiler houses, machinery spaces, air handling plants, tank rooms
and other plant or apparatus, including the location, identity, size and rating of each apparatus, The
information with respect to the size and rating can be presented in schedule form;
b) isometric or diagrammatic views of boiler houses, plant rooms, tank rooms and similar machinery,
including valve identification charts. It is useful to frame and mount a copy of such drawings on the
wall of the appropriate room, and
c) comprehensive diagrams that show power wiring and control wiring and /or pneumatic or other
control piping including size, type or conductor or piping used and identifying the terminal points of
each.
7-72
Vol. 7
5.5.4
Chapter 5
Electrical Records
Documentation shall record the following including locations, as installed:

a) main and sub main cables, showing origin, route, termination, size and type of each cable; cables
providing supplies to specialist equipment, for example, computers, shall be identified separately;
and
b) lighting conduits and final sub circuit cables, showing origin, route, termination and size of each,
together with the number and size of cables within each conduit. The drawings shall indicate for
each conduit or cable, whether it is run on the surface or concealed, for example, in a wall chase, in
a floor screed, cast in-situ, above a false ceiling etc.
These drawings shall also indicate the locations of lighting fittings, distribution boards, switches, draw-in-boxes
and point boxes, and shall indicate circuitry:
a) Location and purpose of each emergency lighting fitting including an indication of the circuit to
which it is connected;
b) single and three phase power conduits and final sub circuit cables showing locations of power
distribution boards, motors, isolators, starters, remote control units, socket outlets and other
associated equipment;
c) Other miscellaneous equipment, conduits and cables;
d) Lightening conductor, air terminals, conductors, earth electrodes and test clamps;
e) Location of earth tapes, earth electrodes and test points other than those in(f); and
f) Cables providing earth circuits for specialist equipment, for example computers, shall be identified
separately,
Documentation shall also include, when applicable.
a) Distribution diagrams or schedules to show size, type and length (to within 1 m) of each main and
sub main cable, together with the measured earth continuity resistance of each;
b) Schedule of lighting fittings installed stating location, manufacturer and type or catalogue number
together with the type or manufacturers reference, voltage and wattage of the lamp installed;
c) Schedule of escape and emergency lighting fittings installed stating location, manufacturer, type or
catalogue number together with the type or manufacturers reference, voltage and wattage of the
lamp installed. For battery systems the position of the battery, its ampere hour rating and battery
system rated endurance in hours shall be stated;
d) Records of smoke detectors, sprinklers, fire precautions;
e) Incoming supply details; the type of system, voltage, phases, frequency, rated current and short
circuit level, with the details of the supply protection and time of operation as appropriate;
f) Main switchgear details; for purpose made equipment this shall include a set of manufacturers
drawings and the site layout;
g) Transformer, capacitor and power plant details; the leading details shall be given, for example, for
transformers the V.A rating, voltages and type of cooling; and
h) Completion certificate, according to the Bangladesh Electricity Act.
5.6
5.6.1
INSPECTIONS
General
Regular inspections are actual part of the procedures for the maintenance of buildings. They are needed for a
variety of purposes and each purpose requires a different approach if it is to be handled with maximum
economy and efficiency. A more detailed inspection covering all parts of a building is needed to determine what
work shall be included in cyclic and planned maintenance programme.
5.6.2
Frequency of Inspection
Inspection shall be carried out at the following frequencies:
7-73
Part 7
a) Routine Continuous regular observations shall be undertaken by the building user as part of the
occupancy of building. Feedback resulting from this type of observation shall be recorded in record
book.
b) General Visual inspections of main elements shall be made annually under the supervision of
suitably qualified personnel at appropriate times.
c) Detailed The frequency of full inspection of the building fabric by suitably qualified personnel
shall not normally exceed a 5 year period.
5.6.2.1
Inspection schedule
The preparation of a specific inspection schedule shall formulated at the beginning. Once prepared, it shall be
used for subsequent inspections.
Inspection of Engineering Services
5.6.3
Engineering services generally have a shorter life expectancy than building fabric and because of their dynamic
function shall be subjected to more frequent inspections and maintenance.
Inspection of services shall be carried out for three purposes as follows:
a) to check if maintenance work is required,
b) to check if maintenance work is being adequately carried out, and
c) for safety reasons to comply with statutory requirements and if required, with recommendations of
other relevant organizations.
The frequency of inspections for purpose
a) will depend upon types of plant and system manufacturers recommendations and subjective
judgment. Frequencies for purpose
b) shall be carried out on an annual basis.
5.6.3.1
Method of inspection
The limited life of building services means it is important to record their residual life so that their replacement
can be budgeted for, and inspection methods shall be arranged accordingly.
A checklist of items of plant to be inspected shall be considered. Detailed specifications of how inspections shall
be carried out are necessary because a simple visual inspection is unlikely to show whether plant is operating
correctly and efficiently.
Inspections frequently necessitate the use of appropriate instruments by competent persons. An example of
this is the inspections carried out to check compliance with statutory requirements.
When instruments are used it is important that adequate training is provided in the use of the instruments and
the interpretation of the results.
Records of all inspections shall be kept in suitable locker.
5.7
5.7.1
MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES

Planning of Maintenance Work
If the authorized person has complete knowledge of the electrical appliances to be worked upon, then safety
will be more assured. If the person attending to the job is not technically competent to handle the job then
more careful planning is required before hand.
Repetitive nature of jobs involves little or no pre-planning whereas infrequent nature of jobs shall need careful
planning even if the person attending the job is technically competent.
Planned routine maintenance will facilitate continued safe and acceptable operation of an electrical system with
a minimum risk of breakdown and consequent interruption of supply.
7-74
Vol. 7
Chapter 5
As far as the electrical equipments/ installations are concerned, it is not possible to lay down precise
recommendations for the interval between the maintenance required. The recommendation for frequency of
maintenance in this regard from the manufacturer is more relevant. The manufacturer shall be requested to
specify minimum maintenance frequency under specified conditions. These intervals depend greatly upon the
design of the equipment, the duty that it is called on to perform and the environment in which it is situated.
Following two types of maintenance are envisaged.
5.7.1.1
Routine maintenance
Routine maintenance of the electrical equipments goes along with the regular inspections of the equipments.
Inspections shall reveal the undue damage and excessive wear to the various components. Examination of the
equipment shall reveal any need for conditioning of the contact system, lubrication and adjustment of the
mechanisms.
5.7.1.2
Post fault maintenance
When there is a breakdown in the system and certain parts are identified for the replacement and then the
maintenance/repair of the defective part away from the operating environment is covered under post fault
maintenance.
5.7.1.3
Guidelines for the Maintenance of Electrical Appliances
Uninterrupted and hazard free functioning of the electrical installations are the basic parameters of
maintenance. The equipment shall be restored to correct working conditions. Special attention shall be paid to
the items and settings that might have been disturbed during the operational phase. Loose and extraneous
equipment or wiring gives rise to potential safety hazards. All covers and locking arrangements shall be properly
checked and secured to achieve original degree of protection.
Guidelines to be followed for the maintenance of electrical equipments to ensure their smooth functioning are
given in Appendix 7.A.
5.8
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The engineering services within buildings frequently are dynamic, involving complex systems of integrated plant
items. Operation of such plant can require detailed knowledge and direction. Maintenance can also require
extensive information to be available. It is, therefore, important to have suitable operating and maintenance
manuals to provide the necessary guidance. These shall be included as part of the contractual requirements for
new installations and shall ideally be prepared as reference documents for existing installations where no such
information exists.
For details on labor management concerning building maintenance, reference shall be made to good practice.
For details on financial management concerning building maintenance, reference shall be made to good
practice.
5.9
PREVENTION OF CRACKS
Cracks in buildings are of common occurrence. A building component develops cracks whenever stress in the
component exceeds its strength. Stress in a building component could be caused by externally applied forces,
such as dead, imposed, wind or seismic loads, or foundation settlement or it could be induced internally due to
thermal movements, moisture changes, chemical action, etc.
Cracks could be broadly classified as structural or non-structural. Structural cracks are those which are due to
incorrect design, faulty construction or overloading and these may endanger the safety of a building. Extensive
cracking of an RCC beam is an instance of structural cracking. Non-structural cracks are mostly due to internally
induced stresses in building materials and these generally do not directly result in structural weakening. In
course of time, however, sometime non-structural cracks may, because of penetration of moisture through
cracks or weathering action, result in corrosion of reinforcement and thus may render the structure unsafe.
7-75
Part 7
Vertical cracks in a long compound wall due to shrinkage or thermal movement is an instance of non-structural
cracking. Non-structural cracks, normally do not endanger the safety of a building, but may look unsightly, or
may create an impression of faulty work or may give a feeling of instability. In some situations, cracks may,
because of penetration of moisture through them, spoil the internal finish, thus adding to cost of maintenance.
It is, therefore, necessary to adopt measures of prevention or minimization of these cracks.
For complete details on causes and prevention of non-structural cracks, reference shall be made to good
practice SP 25:1984 Handbook on causes and prevention of cracks in buildings.
5.10 REPAIRS AND SEISMIC STRENGTHENING OF BUILDINGS

5.10.1 Non-structural/Architectural Repairs
The buildings affected by earthquake may suffer both non-structural and structural damages. Nonstructural
repairs may cover the damages to civil and electrical items including the services in the building. Repairs to nonstructural components need to be taken up after the structural repairs are carried out. Care shall be taken about
the connection details of architectural components to the main structural components to ensure their stability,
Non-structural and architectural components get easily affected/dislocated during the earthquake. These
repairs involve one or more of the following:
a) Patching up of defects such as cracks and fall of plaster;
b)
c)
d)
e)
Repairing doors, windows, replacement of glass panes;

Checking and repairing electric conduits/ wiring;
Checking and repairing gas pipes, water pipes and plumbing services;
Re-building non-structural walls, smoke chimneys, parapet walls, etc;
f)
Re-plastering of walls as required;
g) Rearranging disturbed roofing tiles;

h) Relaying cracked flooring at ground level; and
i) Redecoration whitewashing, painting, etc.
The architectural repairs as stated above do not restore the original structural strength of structural
components in the building and any attempt to carry out only repairs to architectural/non-structural elements
neglecting the required structural repairs may have serious implications on the safety of the building. The
damage would be more severe in the event of the building being shaken by the similar shock because original
energy absorption capacity of the building would have been reduced.
5.10.2
Structural Repairs
Prior to taking up of the structural repairs and strengthening measures, it is necessary to conduct detailed
damage assessment to determine:
a) the structural condition of the building to decide whether a structure is amendable for repair;
whether continued occupation is permitted; to decide the structure as a whole or a part require
demolition, if considered dangerous;
b) if the structure is considered amendable for repair then detailed damage assessment of the
individual structural components (mapping of the crack pattern, distress location; crushed
concrete, reinforcement bending/yielding, etc). Non-destructive testing techniques could be
employed to determine the residual strength of the members; and
c) to work out the details of temporary supporting arrangement of the distressed member so that
they do not undergo further distress due to gravity loads.
After the assessment of the damage of individual structural elements, appropriate repair methods are to be
carried out component wise depending upon the extent of damage. The repair shall consist of the following:
a) Removal of portions of cracked masonry walls and piers and rebuilding them in richer mortar. Use
of non-shrinking mortar will be preferable.
7-76
Vol. 7
Chapter 5
b) Addition of reinforcing mesh on both faces of the cracked wall, holding it to the wall through spikes
or bolts and then covering it, suitably, with cement mortar or micro-concrete.
c) Injecting cement or epoxy like material which is strong in tension, into the cracks in walls.
d) The cracked reinforced cement elements shall be repaired by epoxy grouting and could be
strengthened by epoxy or polymer mortar application like shotcreting, jacketing, etc.
5.10.3 Seismic Strengthening
The main purpose of the seismic strengthening is to upgrade the seismic resistance of a damaged building while
repairing so that it becomes safer under future earthquake occurrences. This work shall involve some of the
following actions:
a) Increasing the lateral strength in one or both directions by increasing column and wall areas or the
number of walls and columns.
b) Giving unity to the structure, by providing a proper connection between its resisting elements, in
such a way that inertia forces generated by the vibration of the building can be transmitted to the
members that have the ability to resist them. Typical important aspects are the connections
between roofs or floors and walls, between intersecting walls and between walls and foundations.
c) Eliminating features that are sources of weakness or that produce concentration of stresses in
some members. Asymmetrical plan distribution of resisting members, abrupt changes of stiffness
from one floor to the other, concentration of large masses and large openings in walls without a
proper peripheral reinforcement are examples of defects of this kind.
d) Avoiding the possibility of brittle modes of failure by proper reinforcement and connection of
resisting members.
5.10.4 Seismic Retrofitting
Many existing buildings do not meet the seismic strength requirements of present earthquake codes due to
original structural inadequacies and material degradation due to time or alterations carried out during use over
the years. Their earthquake resistance can be upgraded to the level of the present day codes by appropriate
seismic retrofitting techniques, such as mentioned in 5.10.3.
5.10.5 Strengthening or Retrofitting Versus Reconstruction
Replacement of damaged buildings or existing unsafe buildings by reconstruction is, generally, avoided due to a
number of reasons, the main ones among them being;
a) higher cost than that of strengthening or retrofitting,
b) preservation of historical architecture, and
c) maintaining functional social and cultural environment.
In most instances, however, the relative cost of retrofitting to reconstruction cost determines the decision. As a
thumb rule, if the cost of repair and seismic strengthening is less than about 50 percent of the reconstruction
cost, the retrofitting is adopted. This shall also require less working time and much less dislocation in the living
style of the population. On the other hand reconstruction may offer the possibility of modernization of the
habitat and may be preferred by well-to-do communities.
Cost-wise the building construction including the seismic code provisions in the first instance, works out the
cheaper in terms of its own safety and that of the occupants. Retrofitting an existing inadequate building may
involve as much as 4 to 5 times the initial extra expenditure required on seismic resisting features. Repair and
seismic strengthening of a damaged building may even be 5 to 10 times as expensive. It is, therefore, very much
safe as well as cost-effective to construct earthquake resistant buildings at the initial stage itself according to
the relevant seismic codes.
5.11 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The Consultant/Engineer shall prepare a Maintenance Manual prior to handing over of the competed project
and furnish this to the EMPLOYER, which must contain following items:
7-77
Part 7
a) As-built drawings for the completed project;

b) Sources of all items of work including materials, furnishes equipments and fixed furniture,
containing names and addresses of suppliers, catalogue numbers, technical information &
specifications and warranty documents for respective items.
c) Frequency of routine Preventive Maintenance and the procedure thereof, including information on
available local and foreign after-sales service sources.
d) Corrective Maintenance procedure and sources of available
7-78
Vol. 7
Appendix 7.A
7.A.1
GUIDELINES FOR MAINTENANCE OF

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTS
In case of electrical appliances, manufacturers instructions for the usage and maintenance of the equipment
should be strictly followed.
7.A.2
The detailed/working drawings of all the components of electrical installations should always be available with
the maintenance unit. Following records should be available.
a) Manufacturers name
b) Nameplate of the equipment and its sailent features such as capacity, rating etc.
c) Manufacturer's recommendations regarding availability/usage of spare parts.
d) Manufacturer's recommendations for periodical maintenance and post fault maintenance.
e) Details of the maintenance operations performed in the past.
7.A.3
Care should be taken while selecting replacement parts. The spare parts should be correct and suitable,
preferably as recommended by the manufacturer of the installation. During the placement of order for the
supply of spare parts, nameplate particulars and serial number should be quoted.
7.A.4
The space where the equipment is kept should be clean and properly ventilated. Equipment should not be
disturbed needlessly. Before cleaning, the equipment should be made dead. For internal cleaning a section
cleaner should be used.
7.A.5
Covers and doors should not be left open unnecessarily during maintenance. Afterwards they should be
promptly and correctly closed and locked.
7.A.6
Before removing the covers and connections, all covers and cable terminations should be marked to ensure
correct replacements. Disturbed connections and temporary connections should be marked to facilitate reconnection. Temporary connections and markings should be removed before the installation is put to use.
Part 7
7-75
Part 7
7.A.7
Those connections which have not been disturbed should also be checked for soundness and overheating.
7.A.8
All insulations should be regularly checked. Solid insulations should be checked for cracks and other defects.
Fibrous and organic insulations should be checked for sign of blistering, delamination and mechanical damage.
For insulating oils the interval between tests should be carried out as per the recommendations of the
manufacturer and keeping the adverse environmental conditions in mind.
7.A.9
It should be ensured that the earthing connections are sound and all contact screws are tight.
7.A.10
During the examination of interlocks it is necessary to take precautions to prevent danger to plant or persons in
the event of malfunction or inadvertent operation. A person responsible for checking and maintaining any
interlock system should have thorough knowledge of the extent, nature and function of the interlock.
7.A.11
If the equipment is ventilated then it should be ensured that the airflow is smooth and not restricted. If filters
are provided, they should be cleaned or replaced as necessary.
7.A.12
The standby system for tripping and closing supplies should always be kept in good order. Indicators and alarms
should be maintained in time with the manufacturer's instructions.
7.A.13
Tools, spares and instruments should be stored near to the installation. These should be regularly checked
against an inventory.
7.A.14
Before the start of maintenance of the circuit switches it should be ensured that all incoming and outgoing main
auxiliary circuits are dead and remain so during the maintenance. Over heating of the circuit switches is the root
cause for faults. Overheating may be caused by inadequate ventilation, overloading, loose connection,
insufficient contact force and malalignment.
7.A.15
Some circuit breakers are not intended to be maintained, such as miniature circuit breakers (MCBs). Such items
should not be dismantled for maintenance. These should be renewed periodically.
7-76
Vol. 2
Part 7
7.A.16
For the maintenance of fuses periodical inspection should be done for correct rating, security, overheating and
correct location/orientation. Element of renewable fuses should be renewed when the deterioration is
apparent. The availability and correct replacement of fuse links should be ensured.
7.A.17
If a fuse link of certain rating has failed and is replaced, then all fuse-links of same rating apparently subjected to
the fault should be destroyed and replaced by new fuse links.
7.A.18
In order to be reasonably sure that circuit breaker is capable of operation when required, these should be
tripped and reclosed at regular intervals. Tripping should be proved manually and where possible electrically via
the protective relay contacts. The leakage of oil, sign of corrosion, and any unusual smell which may indicate
over-heating should be detected through inspections.
7.A.19
Timing devices are mostly designed for specialist maintenance. These should not be dismantled for maintenance
or overhaul purposes unless specifically recommended by the manufacturers'. Actual timing periods should be
verified with set values and application requirements.
7.A.20
In case of cable boxes and terminations, security of mounting and earthing should be examined. Exposed tails
should be inspected for good conditions of insulation and freedom from moisture.
7.A.21
Battery cells should be inspected for shedding of active material, sedimentation and buckling of plates. Level of
electrolyte should be regularly checked and the level should be corrected with distilled water.
7-77
Vol. 2
Chapter 1
ElectricalandElectronicEngineeringServicesfor
Buildings
1.1
Introduction
1.1.1 AimofthissectionofCodesofElectricalandElectronicEngineeringInstallations
inBuildings
TheaimofthecodesforElectricalandElectronicEngineeringServicesforBuildingspresentedinthissectionisto
ensure that the related installation work becomes perfect safe for the persons residing in and around the
building.Thetermsafemeanssafeforthepersonsandsafefortheproperties.
ThecodesinthissectionhavebeenpresentedtosetminimumstandardsforElectricalandElectronicEngineering
Installations in Residential Buildings, Multistoried Apartment Buildings, Commercial Buildings, Office Buildings,
RailStations,AirportBuildings,FactoryBuildings,Warehouses,Jetties,ContainerYards,OtherYards,Parkinglots
andsimilarplaces.Allthesystemsandequipmentintendedforthesupplyofnormalpowerandstandbypowerto
alltheseplacesarecoveredbythesecodes.ElectricalandElectronicEngineeringInstallationsincludeLightingand
Illumination,FansCooling/Heatingsystem,NormalandStandbypowersupplysystem,SupplysystemfortheLifts,
TelecommunicationsSystems,DataCommunicationSystems,FireAlarmSystem,CCTVmonitoringSystem,Cable
TelevisionDistributionSystem,ElectronicAccessControlSystem,BurglarAlarmSystem.
Electricalwiring/cablingformamajorpartintheabovementionedinstallationworks.Electricalwiring/cabling
must be reasonably safe to persons and property. Installations, alteration, or extension of Electrical wiring /
cablingsystemsconformingtotheprovisionsofthiscodeshallbedeemedtobereasonablysafetopersonsand
property.
1.1.2 GuidingSourcesoftheCodesofElectricalandElectronicEngineeringInstallations
Significant Modification, Upgradation and Additions of the Previous Electrical Engineering Section of BNBC of
1993havebeenincorporatedinthisupdatedversion.
Whilemakingchangesandadditions,thefollowingdocuments/regulations/codeshavebeentakenasreference/
guidingsources:
a) BangladeshElectricityAct.
b) IEEwiringRegulation(17thedition)BS:76712008includingallparts.
c) BritishStandards(BS).
Inadditiontothese,thefollowingdocuments/regulations/codeshavealsobeentakenasreferencesasrequired:
a) NationalBuildingcodeofIndia2005.
b) BuildingcodeofPakistanlatestversion.
c) NationalElectricalCodeofUSAwithnecessarymodificationsforBangladesh.
d) International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards for International Standards for all electrical,
electronicandrelatedtechnologiesasapplicabletoBangladesh.
e) ISO50001standardforEnergymanagementSystem.
f)
InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission(IEC)specifiesthestandardsrelatedtoenergyproductionand
distribution, electronics, magnetics and electromagnetics, electroacoustics, multimedia and
telecommunication, as well as associated general disciplines such as terminology and symbols,
electromagneticcompatibility,measurementandperformance,dependability,designanddevelopment,
safetyandtheenvironment.
Part8
BuildingServices
81
Part8
BuildingServices
g) VerbandDeutscherElektrotechniker(AssociationofGermanElectricalEngineers)(VDE).
However,effortshavebeenbegiventoacceptasignificantpartofrulesandpracticesmentionedinIEEwiring
Regulation (17th edition) BS: 7671 2008 including all parts with necessary modifications for our system and
suitableforourcountry.
Whilepreparingthisdocumentthefollowingstandardsandpracticesarekeptinmind.
a) For having safe domestic electrical systems, domestic electrical installations shall be designed and
installedaccordingtothe"fundamentalprinciples"giveninBritishStandardBS7671Chapter13.These
aresimilartothefundamentalprinciplesdefinedininternationalstandardIEC603641.Itisnecessaryto
applyBritishStandardBS7671(the"WiringRegulations"),includingcarryingoutadequateinspectionand
testingtothisstandardofthecompletedworks.
i.
Tomeettheabovementionedrequirementsthefollowingrulesandguidanceshallbefollowed.
ii.
TherulesoftheIEEwiringregulations(BS7671),colloquiallyreferredtoas"theregs"(BS7671:
2008,17thEdition).;
iii. The rules of an equivalent standard approved by a member of the European Economic Area
(e.g.,DIN/VDE0100);
b) Guidance given in installation manuals that are consistent with BS7671, such as the IEE OnSite Guide
andIEEGuidanceNotesNos1to7.
c) Installations in commercial and industrial premises must satisfy the requirements set in Electricity at
Work Regulations 1989 (UK) and must follow recognised standards and practices, such as BS7671
"WiringRegulations".
Apart from these, some modifications had to be made considering the weather and other local conditions,
practicesandpreviousexperiencesinthiscountry.
1.1.3 DesigninganElectricalandElectronicEngineeringInstallationsinBuildingsand
relatedstructures
The codes presented in this section are not meant to provide adequate information to design Electrical and
ElectronicEngineeringInstallationsandSystemsinBuildingsandrelatedstructures.Theseshouldnotbetakento
beadequateorcompletefortheefficientdesignworkofinstallations.
Such design work, the required features, detailed technical specifications, schedule of items etc., should be
obtainedthroughtheservicesofanengineeradequatelyqualifiedinthisarea.Energyefficientappliancesshould
beconsideredduringelectricaldesigning.
1.2
LightingandIllumination
1.2.1 Determination of Illumination Levels for Different Application (Principle of

Lighting)
Theessentialfeaturesofanefficientlightingsystemare:
a) visualcomfortthroughadequateilluminationoftheworkingsurface,
b) preventionofglare,
c) avoidanceofshadows,and
d) easeofmaintenance.
Thedesignofalightingsystemshallinvolve:
a) carefulplanningofthebrightnessandcolourpatternwithinboththeworkingareasandthesurroundings
so that attention is drawn naturally to the important areas, so that details can be seen quickly and
accurately,andsothattheappearanceinsidetheroomisfreefromanysensemonotony,
b) useofdirectionallightingtoassistperceptionoftaskdetail,
c) controllingdirectandreflectedglarefromlightsourcestoeliminatevisualdiscomfort,
d) minimizingflickerfromcertaintypesoflampsandpayingattentiontothecolourrenderingpropertiesof
thelight,
82
Vol.3
ElectricalandElectronicEngineeringServicesforBuildings
Chapter1
e) the correlation of lighting throughout the building to prevent excessive differences between adjacent
areas,soastoreducetheriskofaccidents,and
f)
theinstallationofemergencylightingsystems,wherevernecessary.
Table8.1.1showsthegeneralimpressionsassociatedwithdifferentilluminanceandcolourappearancesoflight.
Table8.1.2givesthevariouscolourrenderinggroupswithexamplesofuse.
Table8.1.1GeneralImpressionsAssociatedwithDifferentIlluminanceandColourAppearances
Illuminance
AssociatedImpression
(lux)
(ColourAppearance)
Warm
Intermediate
Cool
500
pleasant
neutral
cool
5001000
pleasanttostimulating
neutraltopleasant
cooltoneutral
10002000
stimulating
pleasant
neutral
20003000
stimulatingtounnatural
pleasanttostimulating
neutraltopleasant
3000
unnatural
stimulating
pleasant
TABLE8.1.2LampColourRenderingGroups
Colour
Rangeof
Colour
rendering
Group
IndexRa
Appearance
ExamplesofUse
Cool
Textileindustries,paintandprintingindustries
Ra85
Intermediate
Shops,hospitals
Warm
Homes,hotels,restaurants
70Ra<85
Intermediate
Offices,schools,departmentstore,fineindustrial
work
40Ra<70
Interiorswherecolourrenderingisofcomparatively
minorimportance
Note: Certainapplications,e.g.colourmatching,maybeextremelycriticalwithregardtothecolour
renderingpropertiesofthelampsused.Here,theminimumcolourrenderingindexusedshallbe90.
1.2.2 PlanningtheBrightnessPattern
The brightness pattern seen within an interior is composed of three parts (i) brightness of the task itself, (ii)
brightness of the immediate background of the task and (iii) brightness of the general surroundings of walls,
ceiling,floor,equipment,furnishingetc.
1.2.2.1
Theilluminationofallworkareaswithinabuildingshallbeaminimumof150lux.
1.2.2.2
Where work takes place over the whole utilizable area of a room, the general illumination over that
areashallbereasonablyuniformandthediversityratioofminimumtomaximumilluminationshallnot
be less than 0.7. This diversity ratio does not however take into account of the effects of any local
lightingprovidedforspecifictasks.
1.2.2.3
When thebrightness appropriate to an occupation has been determined, thebrightness of the other
parts of the room shall be planned to give proper emphasis to visual comfort and interest. The
recommendedbrightnessratiosareshowninTable8.1.3.
83
Part8
BuildingServices
1.2.3 LightingCalculations
1.2.3.1
Inordertodeterminethenecessarynumberoflampsandluminairesforaspecifiedilluminationlevel
ortheaverageilluminanceobtainedfromaparticularlightingdesign,theLumenMethodofcalculation
shallbeemployed.
1.2.3.2
Unless the reflection factors are known to the lighting designer, the triplet 0.7/0.5/0.3 for the
reflectances of ceiling, walls and working plane respectively shall be used for offices and the triplet
0.7/0.5/0.1forotherpremises.TypicalreflectionfactorsofsmoothcolouredsurfacesaregiveninTable
8.1.4.
Table8.1.3BrightnessRatiosBetweenTask,AdjacentSourcesandSurroundings
Forhightaskbrightness(above100cd/m2):
Maximumratiobetweentaskbrightnessandtheadjacent
3to1
sourcesliketabletops
Maximumratiobetweentaskbrightnessandilluminationof
10to1
theremoteareasoftheroomnotbeingusedasworkareas
Forlowandmediumtaskbrightness(below100cd/m2)
Thetaskmustbebrighterthanboththe
backgroundandthesurroundings;thelowerthe
taskbrightness,thelesscriticalisthe
relationship.
Table8.1.4ReflectionFactorsofSmoothColouredSurfaces
Colour
ReflectionFactor
Colour
ReflectionFactor
Flatwhite
0.750.85
Lightgreen
0.400.50
Ivory
0.700.75
Grey
0.300.50
Buff
0.600.70
Blue
0.250.35
Yellow
0.550.65
Red
0.150.20
Lighttan
0.450.55
Darkbrown
0.100.15
1.2.4 RecommendedIlluminationValues
The recommended values of illumination required for buildings of different occupancies, based on activity, are
giveninTables1.5through1.11.Theinitialilluminanceshouldbehigherthantherecommendedvaluetoallow
for the fact that the illuminance will inevitably drop below this value by the end of the cleaning and replacing
period.
Agradualtransition(ratherthanasuddenchange)ofbrightnessfromoneportiontoanotherwithinthefieldof
visionisrecommendedsoastoavoidorminimizeglarediscomfort.
1.2.5 ArtificialLightingtoSupplementDaylight
Supplementarylightingshallbeusedwhenilluminationfromdaylightfallsbelow150luxontheworkingplane.
For providing supplementary artificial lighting when daylight availability becomes insufficient, cool daylight
fluorescent tubes with semidirect luminaires are recommended. To ensure a good distribution of illumination,
themountingheightshouldbebetween1.5and2.0mabovetheworkplanewithaseparationof2.0to3.0m
betweentheluminaires.
1.2.6 SelectionofAppropriateLightFittings
1.2.6.1
LightFitting
An electric lamp and its fitting accessories, reflector, diffuser, mounting brackets, suspenders etc., shall be
regardedasoneunit;theyshallbedesignedtomatcheachotherandtogivethedesireddistributionoflight.Any
84
Vol.3
Chapter1
focusingfittingsusedwhichenablethelightdistributiontobevariedbyadjustmentofthelamppositionshallalso
bedesignedforthetypeandsizeoflamptobeused.
1.2.6.2
ClassificationofLightFittings
Light fittings shall be classified into five categories according to the proportion of the total light output in the
lowerhemisphere.Theseare:
a) Directfittings,giving90100percentlightdownwards;
b) Semidirectfittings,giving6090percentdownwards;
c) Generaldiffusingfittings,giving4060percentlightdownwards;
d) Semiindirectfittings,giving1040percentlightdownwards;
e) Indirectfittings,giving010percentlightdownwards.
1.2.6.2.1 Directfittings
Directfittingsshallbeusedinsituationswhereefficiencyofilluminationisthemajorcriterion,whilecontractof
thelightsourcewiththesurroundings,shadows,anddirect/reflectedglaremaybeconsideredtobeofrelatively
minorimportance.
1.2.6.2.2 Semidirectfittings
Semidirect fittings shall be used in areas where it felt that the reduction of contrast resulting from the small
indirectcomponentoflightdirectedtowardstheceilingshallbesufficientforthepurpose.
1.2.6.2.3 Generaldiffusingfittings
General diffusing fittings shall be used where, in addition to a substantial indirect component of light aiding
materially to the diffused character of the general illumination, an upward component providing a brighter
backgroundagainstwhichtoviewtheluminance,especiallyforinteriorswithlightcolouredceilingandwalls,is
desirable.
1.2.6.2.4 Semiindirectfittings
Semiindirectfittingsshallbeusedwhenacomfortablebrightnessratiobetweentheceilingandtheluminaireis
desirablebutanefficiencyofillumination,higherthanthatobtainablefromindirectfittingsisrequired.
1.2.6.2.5 Indirectfittings
Indirect fittings shall be used in situations where an environment of evenly distributed illumination is to be
achieved,efficiencyofilluminationnotbeingadominantfactor.
1.2.6.2.6 AngleLighting
Forgoodlightingonverticalsurfaces,avoidingshadows,creatingshadowsusingconcentratedsourceoflighting
forinteriororexteriorlighting
Table8.1.5RecommendedValuesofIlluminationforResidentialBuildings
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
Dwellinghouses
Bedrooms
General
70
Bedhead,Dressingtable
250
Kitchens
200
Diningrooms(tables)
150
Bathrooms
General
100
Shaving,makeup
300
Stairs
100
Lounges
100
Garages&Porches
100
85
Part8
BuildingServices
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
BasementCarPark
100
Porches,Entrances
70
Sewinganddarning
600
Reading(casual)
150
Homeworkandsustainedreading
300
Hotels
Entrancehalls
150
Receptionandaccounts
300
Diningrooms(tables)
150
Lounges
150
Bedrooms
General
100
Dressingtables,bedheads,etc.
250
Writingrooms(tables)
300
Corridors
70
Stairs
100
Laundries
200
Kitchens
Foodstores
100
Workingareas
250
Goodsandpassengerlifts
70
Cloakroomsandtoilets
100
Bathrooms
100
Abovemirrorinbathrooms
300
Table8.1.6RecommendedValuesofIlluminationforEducationalBuildings
86
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
SchoolandCollegeAssemblyhalls
General
150
Whenusedforexaminations
300
Platforms
300
ClassandLectureRooms
Desks
300
Blackboards
250
Embroideryandsewingrooms
500
Laboratories
300
Artrooms
400
Offices
300
Staffroomsandcommonrooms
150
Corridors
70
Stairs
100
Gymnasia
General
150
Matches
300
Library
seeTable8.1.8
Livingquarters
seeTable8.1.5
Vol.3
Chapter1
Table8.1.7RecommendedValuesofIlluminationforHealthCareBuildings
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
HospitalsandClinics
Receptionandwaitingrooms
150
Outpatientdepartment
150
Wards
General
100
Beds
150
Operatingtheatres
General
300
Tables(withadjustableoperationlamplighting)
Minor
2000
Major
5000
Doctor'sexaminationrooms
150
Radiologydepartments
100
Casualty
150
Stairsandcorridors
100
Dispensaries
250
Table8.1.8RecommendedValuesofIlluminationforAssemblyBuildings
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
Cinemas
Foyers
150
Auditorium
70
Corridors
90
Stairs
150
Libraries
Shelves(stacks)
100
Readingrooms(newspapersandmagazines)
200
Readingtables
300
Bookrepairandbinding
300
Cataloguing,sortingandstockrooms
150
MuseumsandArtGalleries
Museums
General
200
Displays
speciallighting
Artgalleries
General
250
Paintings
250
Restaurant
Diningrooms
100
Cashdesks
300
Selfcarryingcounters
300
Kitchens
200
Cloakroomsandtoilets
100
Theatres
Foyers
150
Auditorium
70
87
Part8
BuildingServices
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
Corridors
90
Stairs
150
IndoorSportsCentre
Halls
200
Swimmingpools
250
Lawnortabletennis,badminton,volleyball
Tournament
300
Club
200
Recreational
150
Shootingranges
Ontarget
300
Firingpoint
200
Range
100
Football
500
TABLE8.1.9RecommendedValuesofIlluminationforBusinessandCommercialBuildings
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
AirportBuilding
Receptionareas(desks)
300
Baggage,customsandimmigrationhalls
300
Circulationareas,lounges
200
Banks
Counter,typingandaccountingbookareas
300
Publicareas,lobby
150
Offices
200
Bookbinding
Pasting,punchingandstitching
200
Bindingandfoldingandmiscellaneousmachines
300
Finishing,blockingandinlaying
300
DentalSurgeries
Waitingrooms
150
Surgeries
General
300
Chairs
speciallighting
Laboratories
300
Doctor'sSurgeries
Waitingroomsandconsultingrooms
150
Corridors
70
Stairs
100
Eyesighttesting(acuity)wallchartsandnearvisiontypes
450
Jewelleryandwatchmaking
Fineprocesses
700
Minuteprocesses
3000
Gemcutting,polishingandsetting
1500
Laundriesanddrycleaningworks
Receiving,sorting,washing,drying,ironing
(calendering)anddespatch
88
200
Vol.3
Chapter1
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
Drycleaningandbulkmachinework
200
Finehandironing,pressing,inspection,mendingandspotting
300
Offices
Entrancelobbyandreceptionareas
150
Conferenceroomsandexecutiveoffices
300
Generaloffices
300
Businessmachineoperation
450
Drawingoffice
General
300
Boardsandtracing
450
Corridorsandliftcars
70
Stairs
100
Liftlandings
150
Telephoneexchanges
Manualexchangerooms(ondesk)
200
Maindistributionframeroom
150
ShopsandStores
Generalareas
150to300
Stockrooms
200
Displaywindows
500
Table8.1.10RecommendedValuesofIlluminationforIndustrialBuildingsandProcesses
AreaorActivity
AircraftFactoriesandMaintenanceHangars
Illuminance(lux)
Stockpartsproductions
450
Drilling,riveting,screwfastening,sheetaluminiumlayoutandtemplatework,wing
300
sections,cowing,welding,subassembly,finalassemblyandinspection
Maintenanceandrepair(hangars)
300
AssemblyShops
Roughwork,forexampleframeassemblyandassemblyofheavymachinery
150
Mediumwork,forexamplemachinedparts,engineassembly
300
Finework,forexampleradioandtelephoneequipment,typewriter
700
andofficemachineryassembly
Veryfinework,forexampleassemblyofverysmallprecision
1500
mechanismsandinstruments
AutomobileManufacturing
Frameassembly
200
Chassisassemblyline
300
Finalassemblyandinspectionline
600
Bodymanufacturing
Parts
200
Assembly
300
Finishingandinspection
700
89
Part8
BuildingServices
AreaorActivity
AutomobileServiceGarages
Illuminance(lux)
Repairs
250
Activetrafficareas
100
Storage
25
Bakeries
Generalworkingarea
150
Decoratingandicing
250
BreweriesandDistilleries
Generalworkingareas
150
Brewhouse,bottlingandcanningplants
200
Bottleinspection
speciallighting
CarpetFactories
Windingandbeaming
200
Designing,Jacquardcardcutting,settingpattern,tufting,topping,cutting,
300
hemmingandfringing
Weaving,mendingandinspection
450
ChemicalWorks
Handfurnaces,boilingtanks,stationarydriers,stationaryandgravity
crystallizers
150
Mechanicalfurnaces,evaporators,filtration,mechanicalcrystallizers,bleaching
200
Tanksforcooking,extractors,percolators
200
ChocolateandConfectioneryFactories
Mixing,blendingandboiling
150
Chocolatehusking,winnowing,fatextraction,crushingandrefining,
200
feeding,beancleaning,sorting,millingandcreammaking
Handdecorating,inspection,wrappingandpacking
ClayProductsandCements
300
Grinding,filterpresses,kilnroomsmoulding,pressing,cleaningandtrimming
150
Enameling
150
Colourandglazingroughwork
400
Colourandglazingfinework
750
ClothingFactories
Matchingup
450
Cutting,sewing
300
Light
450
Medium
700
Dark
Inspection
810
Light
450
Medium
1000
Dark
1500
Vol.3
AreaorActivity
Handtailoring
Chapter1
Illuminance(lux)
Light
450
Medium
1000
Dark
1500
Pressing
300
Dairies
Generalworkingareas
200
Fillingandbottleinspection
450
Coolingequipment
150
Laboratories
450
Pasteurizers
150
Separators
150
ElectricalIndustries
Impregnating
250
Windingandinsulating
500
Assemblyworks
Fine
500
Veryfine
750
Testing
500
ElectricityGeneratingStations(IndoorLocations)
Turbinehalls
150
Auxiliaryequipment,batteryrooms,blowers,auxiliarygenerators,switchgearand
150
transformerchambers
Boilerhouse(includingoperatingfloors)platforms,coalconveyors,pulverizers,
feeders,precipitators,sootandslag
Boilerhouseandturbinehouse
100to150
150
Basements
100
Conveyorhouse,conveyorgantriesandjunctiontowers
Emergencylightingallareas
80to100
30
Controlrooms
Verticalcontrolpanels
200to300
Controldesks
300
Rearofcontrolpanels
150
Switchhouses
150
ElectricityGeneratingStations(OutdoorLocations)
Switchyard
Conveyors
70
70
Fueloildeliveryheaders
70
Oilstoragetanks
70
Catwalks
70
Platforms,boilerandturbinedecks
70
Transformerandoutdoorswitchgear
100
Emergencylightingallareas
50
811
Part8
BuildingServices
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
FlourMills
Rolling
150
Sifting
150
Packing
150
Purifying
150
Productcontrol
300
Cleaningscreens,manlifts,aislewaysandwalkways,binchecking
100
ForgeShopsandFoundries
Forgeshop
150
Annealing(furnaces)
150
Cleaning
100
Coremaking(fine)
300
Coremaking(medium)
150
Grindingandchipping
200
Inspection(fine)
1000
Inspection(medium)
300
Moulding(medium)
300
Moulding(large)
150
Pouring
150
Sorting
200
Cupola
100
Shakeout
150
Garages
Parkingareas(interior)
70
Washingandpolishing,greasing,generalservicingandpits
200
GasWorks
Retorthouses,oilgasplants,purifiers,cokescreeningandcokehandling
plants(indoor)
70
Governor,meter,compressor,boosterandexhausterhouses
100
Opentypeplants
20
Catwalks
50
Platforms
GlassWorks
Furnacerooms,bending,annealinglehrs
100
Mixingrooms,forming(blowing,drawing,pressingandrolling)
150
Cuttingtosize,grinding,polishingandtoughening
200
Finishing(bevelling,decorating,etchingandsilvering)
Brilliantcutting
General
200
Fine
500
Inspection,etchinganddecorating
500
GloveMaking
Pressing,knitting,sortingandcutting
812
300
300
Vol.3
Chapter1
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
Sewing
Light
300
Medium
450
Dark
700
Inspection
Light
450
Medium
1000
Dark
1500
HosieryandKnitwear
Circularandflatknittingmachines,universalwinders,cuttingout,folding
andpressing
300
Lockstitchandoverlockingmachines
Light
300
Medium
450
Dark
700
Mending
1500
Examiningandhandfinishing,light,mediumanddark
700
450
Linkingorrunningon
IronandSteelWorks
Manufacturingbyopenhearth
Stockyard
20
Chargingfloor
100
Slagpits
100
Controlplatforms
100
Mouldyard
25
Hottop
100
Hottopstorage
100
Strippingyard
100
Scrapstockyard
20
Mixerbuilding
100
Calciningbuilding
50
Rollingmills
Blooming,slabbing,hotstrip,hotsheet
Coldstrip,plate
100
150
Pipe,rod,tube,wiredrawing
200
Merchantandshearedplate
100
Tinplatemills
Tinningandgalvanizing
200
Coldstriprolling
200
Motorroom,machineroom
150
Sheetmetalworks
Miscellaneousmachines,ordinarybenchwork
200
Pressing,folding,stamping,shearing,punchingandmediumbenchwork
200
813
Part8
BuildingServices
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
Tinplateandgalvanizedsheetinspection
500
StructuralSteelFabrication
Fabricationandgeneralwork
150
Markingandcutting
300
Platingshops
Vat,baths,buffingandpolishing
200
Finalbuffingandpolishing
500
LeatherManufacturing
Cleaning,tanningandstretching,vats
150
Cutting,fleshingandstuffing
200
Finishingandscarfing
200
Machineshops
Roughbenchandmachinework
150
Mediumbenchandmachinework,ordinaryautomaticmachines,roughgrinding
300
mediumbuffingandpolishing
Finebenchandmachinework,fineautomaticmachines,mediumgrinding,
finebuffingandpolishing
Extrafinebenchandmachinework,grindingfinework
1000
PaintWorks
General,automaticprocesses
Specialbatchmixing
200
450
Colourmatching
700
PaperManufacturing
Beaters,grinding,calendering
150
Finishing,cutting,trimming,papermakingmachines
200
Handcounting,wetendofpapermachine
Papermachinereel,paperinspectionandlaboratories
350
Rewinder
500
500
Paperboxmanufacturing
200
PharmaceuticalsandFineChemicalWorks
Rawmaterialstorage
200
Grinding,granulating,mixinganddrying,tableting,sterilizing,
300
preparationofsolutions,filling,labelling,capping,wrappingandcartoning
Controllaboratoriesandtesting
300
Finechemicalprocessing
200
Finechemicalfinishing
814
700
300
PrintingIndustries
Photoengraving
Blockmaking,etchingandstaging
200
Finishing,routingandproofing
300
Maskingandtintlaying
300
Vol.3
AreaorActivity
Chapter1
Illuminance(lux)
ColourPrinting
Inspectionarea
700
Typefoundries
Matrixmaking,dressingtype
250
Frontassemblyandsorting
200
Handcasting
300
Machinecasting
200
Printingplants
Machinecompositionandimposingstones
200
Presses
300
Compositionroom
450
Proofreading
300
Colourinspectionandappraisal
1000
Electrotyping
Blockmaking,electroplating,washingandbaking
200
Moulding,finishingandrouting
300
RubberTyreandTubeManufacturing
Stockpreparation
Plasticating,milling
100
Calendering
150
FabricPreparation
Stockcutting,beadbuilding
250
Tubetubingmachines
250
Treadtubingmachines
250
Tyrebuilding
Solidtyre
Pneumatictyre
150
250
Curingdepartment
Tubingcuring,casingcuring
350
FinalInspection
Tube,casing
1000
Wrapping
200
ShoeManufacturing(Leather)
Cuttingandstitching
Cuttingtables
450
Marking,buttonholingskiving,sortingandcounting
450
Stitching
Lightmaterials
300
Darkmaterials
1000
Makingandfinishing
Nailers,solelayers,weltbeatersandscarfers,trimmers,welters,
600
lasters,edgesetters,sluggers,randers,wheelers,treers,cleaning,
spraying,buffing,polishing,embossing
815
Part8
BuildingServices
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
ShoeManufacturing(Rubber)
Washing,coating,millruncompounding
100
Varnishing,vulcanizing,calendering,upperandsolecutting
300
Solerolling,lining,makingandfinishingprocess
500
SoapFactories
Kettlehousesandancillaries,glycerineevaporationanddistillationandcontinuous
indoorsoapmaking
Generalareas
150
Controlpanels
200to300
Batchorcontinuoussoapcooling,cuttinganddrying,soapmillingandplodding
Generalareas
150
Controlpanelsandkeyequipment
200to300
Soapstamping,wrappingandpacking,granulesmaking,granulesstorageand
handling,fillingandpackinggranules
Generalareas
150
Controlpanelsandmachines
200to300
Edibleproductsprocessingandpacking
200
TextileMills(Cotton)
Balebreakingandpicking
150
Cardinganddrawing
Slubbing,roving,spinning,spooling
200
200
Beamingandslashingoncomb
Greygoods
200
Denims
300
Weaving
Patternedclothandfinecounts,light
300
Patternedclothandfinecounts,dark
500
Plaingreycloth
200
Clothinspection
700
TextileMills(SilkandSynthetics)
Manufacturing
Soaking,fugitivetinting,conditioning,settingortwist
Winding,twisting,rewindingandcoining,quiltingandslashing
200
Lightthread
200
Darkthread
300
Warping(silkorcottonsystem)oncreel,onrunningends,onreel,onbeam,
300
onwarpatbeaming
Healding(drawingin)
700
Weaving
300500
Inspection
1000
TextileMills(WoollenandWorsted)
816
Vol.3
Chapter1
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
Scouring,carbonizing,testing,preparing,raising,brushing,pressing,backwashing,
gilling,crabbingandblowing
150
Blending,carding,combing(white),tentering,dryingandcropping
200
Spinning,roving,winding,warping,combing(coloured)andtwisting
450
Healding(drawingin)
700
Weaving
Fineworsteds
700
Mediumworstedsandfinewoollens
450
Heavywoollens
300
Burlingandmending
700
Perching
Grey
700
Final
2000
WoodWorking
Roughsawingandbenchwork
150
Sizing,planing,roughsanding,mediummachineandbenchworkglueing,veneering
200
Finebenchandmachinework,finesandingandfinishing
300
Table8.1.11RecommendedValuesofIlluminationforStorageBuildings
AreaorActivity
StorageRoomsofWareHouse
Illuminance(lux)
Inactive
50
Roughbulky
50
Medium
100
Fine
250
Table8.1.12RecommendedValuesofIlluminationforOutdoorStadiumsforColourTVbroadcasting
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
FootballStadium
1700
CricketStadium
2200
Table8.1.13RecommendedValuesofIlluminationforOutdooropenyards
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
OutdoorCarParkingLot
100
AirportApron
200
ContainerYard
200
Jetty
250
Table8.1.14RecommendedValuesofIlluminationforRoads
AreaorActivity
Illuminance(lux)
RoadsinsideaHousingArea
50100
817
Part8
BuildingServices
RoadsinaCongestedTown/CityArea
50100
WideRoadswithdividers
100120
Avenues
100120
1.2.7 IlluminationofExitSignsandMeansofEscape
1.2.7.1
ExitSigns
1.2.7.1.1
All required exit signs shall be illuminated at night, or during dark periods within the area
served.
1.2.7.1.2
Exitsignsmaybeilluminatedeitherbylampsexternaltothesignorbylampscontainedwithin
thesign.Thesourceofilluminationshallprovidenotlessthan50luxattheilluminatedsurface
with a contrast of not less than 0.5. Approved selfluminous signs which provide evenly
illuminatedlettershavingaminimumluminanceof0.2cd/m2mayalsobeused.
1.2.7.1.3
Exitsignswithinanareawherethenormallightingmaybedeliberatelydimmedorextinguished,
suchasplacesofentertainment,shallbeilluminatedeitherbylampscontainedwithinthesignor
byapprovedselfluminoussigns.
1.2.7.2
MeansofEscapeLighting
1.2.7.2.1
Themeansofescapeandexitaccessinbuildingsrequiringmorethanoneexitshallbeequipped
with artificial lighting. The lighting facilities so installed shall provide the required level of
illuminationcontinuouslyduringtheperiodwhentheuseofthebuildingrequirestheexitstobe
available.
1.2.7.2.2
Theintensityofilluminationatfloorlevelbymeansofescapelightingshallnotbelessthan10
lux, except that the minimum required floor level illumination of aisles in assembly halls,
theatres and cinema during projection of motion or still pictures by directed light shall not be
lessthan2lux.
1.2.7.2.3
The illumination of exit signs and the lighting of the means of escape and exit access shall be
poweredbyanalternateoremergencyelectricalsystemtoensurecontinuedilluminationfora
durationofnotlessthan30minutesafterthefailureofprimarypowersupply.
1.2.8 SelectionofAppropriateTypeofLamp
It is important to select appropriate types of lamps for each purpose. The lamps which are used for various
purposesare:
(i) GeneralServiceLamps(GLS)/IncandescentLamps
GeneralServiceLamps(GLS)arewellknownIncandescentLamps.Theseareavailableinanumberofwattratings.
However,mostcommonlyusedratingsare40W,60W,100W.150W&200Wratedlampsarealsousedforspecial
applications. These types of lamps are inefficient and should be avoided in design consideration. For Kitchen,
Cooking Areas of a Hotel, Serving Counters of a Food Shop or Hotel, Porche, Living Room, Toilet, Corridor,
Veranda,BedRoomthefollowinglampsperformbetterintermsoflightoutputtowattsratio.Thistypeoflamp
may be used for almost all interior and exterior applications but from energy saving point of view other lamps
performbetterintermsoflightoutputtowattsratio.
(ii) FluorescentLamps(FL):
These are available in 20W and 40W ratings. These lamps are strongly recommended for Reading Room,
Educational buildings, Laboratories, Office Room, Commercial Space applications, Factory illumination,
IlluminationofareasaroundIndustrialPlantandMachineries,ExteriorLightingapplications.
40W FL should be used wherever possible because a 40W FL is more energy efficient compared to a 20W FL.
Thesearelonglifelamps,havewideapplicationsandareadvantageousinmanyrespects.
(iii) CompactFluorescentLamp(CFL)EnergySavingLamps:
818
Vol.3
Chapter1
CFL Lampsare available ina number of watts ratingse.g., 4W, 7W, 11W,14W & 24W. CFLs have been finding
wideapplicationforalmostallapplicationsbecauseoftheirhighLightoutputtowattsratioandalsobecauseof
theattractivelightcolour.CFLlamps,therefore,shouldbewidelyusedforenergysavingpurpose.
However, for Reading areas, Library areas, Educational buildings, Laboratories Fluorescent Lights give better
serviceandthusshouldbeselectedforthesepurposes.ItisworthwhilementioningthatFluorescentlampswith
highqualityballastsmeettheenergysavingpurpose.
(iv) LEDLights:
CompactlightfittingformedusingaclusterofwhiteLEDiscurrentlyusedtoreplaceaconventionallamp.An
LEDoperatesatverysmallamountofvoltage.Theseare goodforlighting, EnergyEfficient,havealmost
negligible heat dissipation. These are good for relaxed environment interior lighting. LED lights are
becoming more and more popular because of much lower power consumption compared to other
lamps.
(v) Halogenlamp:
Halogen Lamps are used for Spot Lights, Decorative lights in shops and commercial spaces, Inside Show Cases,
StageLighting,Projectionlights.DuetoHightemperatureriseandUVlightoutputtheseshouldbeavoidedfor
interiorlightingunlessneeded.
(vi) MercuryVapourLamp
These have been widely used for Shops, Streets, For High Bay Lighting, Warehouse Lighting and similar special
lighting.Mostlikely,thistypeoflampwillbediscontinuedwithinnextfivetosixyearsduesomeofitsilleffects.
MetalHalideLampiscomingupasabetteralternativetoMercuryVapourLamp.
(vii) MetalHalideLamp:
These are available in a number of watts ratings e.g., 150W, 200W, 250W, 500W, 1000W, 2000W. Good for
exterior lighting, indoor and out door athletic facilities, for High Bay Lighting, Warehouse Lighting. These are
requiredwheremassiveFloodLightingisrequiredfromhighaltitudesforcoverageoflargeareas.
(viii)
HPSodiumLamp:
Theseareavailableinanumberofwattsratingse.g.,40W,50W,70W,100W,150W,250W,400W,1000W.Good
forexteriorlighting,Lightingforareaswherehigherconcentrationofvehiclesandpeopleexisteg.StreetLighting,
BuildingExteriorLighting,SecurityLighting.
(ix) LowPressureSodiumLamp:
For outdoor lighting such as street lights and security lighting where faithful color rendition is considered
unimportant.Maybeusedforstreetlights,observatory,parkinglotandsimilartypesofareas.
(x) SolarPowerLEDStreet/SecurityLight:
Foroutdoorlightingsuchasstreetlights,securitylighting,Parkingareaetcthistypesoflampsmaybeused.These
lightsareenergyefficientandenvironmentfriendly.
1.3
ElectricalandElectronicInstallationsinBuildings
1.3.1 AimoftheCodesofthisSection
The aim of the codes andguidelines presentedinthissection isto makesure thatthe ElectricalandElectronic
installations in buildings are safe (i) for persons, (ii) for the buildings and (iii) for the contents of the buildings,
from electrical hazards arising from the use of electricity for light, heat, power, automation, control,
communicationsandsimilarotherpurposes.
The codes and guidelines presented in this section are set for ensuring minimum standards for electric and
electronic wiring and for the installation of equipment within / in public and private buildings, industries and
othersimilarpremises.
1.3.2 Scope
Thissectioncovers:
a) installationofelectricalcables/conductorsandequipmentinpublicandprivatebuildings,industriesand
othersimilarpremises,
819
Part8
BuildingServices
b) installationofswitches,sockets,otheraccessoriesinabuilding,
c) installationofcablesandconductorsinabuildingthatconnecttothesupplyofelectricity,
d) installationofelectricalprotectionsysteminabuilding,
e) installationofearthingsystemofanelectricalinstallationofabuilding,
f)
installationoflightningprotectionofabuildinganditselectricalinstallation,
g) installationofFireAlarmSysteminabuilding,
h) installationoffeederanditsprotectionforliftinabuildingand
i)
installation of Multimedia Communications, Data Communications and telecommunications in a

building,
1.3.3 VoltageRatings
The provisions of the Code specified in this chapter covers installations utilizing nominal voltage not exceeding
415 V AC between conductors or 240 V AC to earth. The nominal voltage in Bangladesh is 230 volts AC single
phaseand400voltsAC3phase.
1.3.4 ExclusionfromScope
The provisions of this chapter do not cover Installations in ship, water craft, railway rolling stock, aircraft, or
automotivevehiclesandrecreationalvehicles,
1.3.5 TerminologyandDefinitions
ThissectionprovidesanalphabeticallistofthetermsusedinandapplicabletothischapteroftheCode.Incaseof
anyconflictorcontradictionbetweenadefinitiongiveninthissectionandthatinPart1,themeaningprovidedin
thissectionshallgovernforinterpretationoftheprovisionsofthischapter.
ACCESSORY:Adeviceassociatedwithcurrentusingequipmentorwiththewiringofaninstallation;forexample,
aswitch,aplug,asocketoutlet,alampholder,oraceilingrose.
ALIVE:SeeLIVE.
APPARATUS:ApparatusmeansEnergyEfficientApparatus.Electricalapparatusincludingallmachines,appliances
andfittingsinwhichconductorsareusedorofwhichtheyformapart.
APPLIANCE:AppliancemeansEnergyEfficientAppliance.Anitemofelectriccurrentusingequipmentotherthana
luminariesoranindependentmotor.
BDB:BranchDistributionBoardlocatedinthesamefloorofabuildingandconnectedtooneoftheSDBsinthe
samefloor:
BRANCHCIRCUIT,APPLIANCE:Abranchcircuitsupplyingenergytooneormoreoutletstowhichappliancesare
tobeconnected;suchbranchcircuitsdonothaveanypermanentlyconnectedlightingfixturesexceptthose
thatareintegralpartsoftheappliancesthemselves.
BRANCH CIRCUIT, GENERAL PURPOSE: A branch circuit that supplies a number of outlets for lighting and/or
appliance.
BRANCHCIRCUIT,INDIVIDUAL:Abranchcircuitthatsuppliesonlyoneutilizationequipment.
BUNCHED:Cablesaresaidtobebunchedwhentwoormoreareeithercontainedwithinasingleconduit,duct,
ducting,ortrunkingor,ifnotenclosed,arenotseparatedfromeachother.
CABLE:PVCinsulatedcoppercableshavingcoppercrosssectionof1mm2andabove.Alengthofsingleinsulated
conductor (solid or stranded), or two or more such conductors, each provided with its own insulation. The
insulatedconductororconductorsmayormaynotbeprovidedwithanoverallmechanicalprotectivecovering.
CELINGROSE:AceilingroseisusedforterminatingthepointwiringforaLightoraFanintheceiling.Ithasbrass
terminalsinwhichincomingcablesareterminatedusingbrassscrewsontheterminalsandtheoutgoingflexible
cablesgetconnectionthroughthescrewconnections.
CIRCUIT:Anassemblyofelectricalequipmentsuppliedfromthesameoriginandprotectedagainstovercurrent
bythesameprotectivedevice.
SUBCIRCUIT,FINALCIRCUIT:Anoutgoingcircuitconnectedtoonewayofadistributionboardorafuseboard
and intended to supply electrical energy, to one or more points, to current using appliances without the
820
Vol.3
Chapter1
intervention of a further distribution fuse board other than a oneway board. It includes all branches and
extensionsderivedfromthatparticularwayinthedistributionboardorfuseboard.
CIRCUITBREAKER:Adevicedesignedtoopenandcloseacircuitbynonautomaticmeansandtoopenthecircuit
automaticallyonapredeterminedovercurrent,withoutinjurytoitselfwhenproperlyappliedwithinitsrating.
CIRCUIT BREAKER: A device used to break a circuit during over current or short circuit condition. An LV Circuit
BreakerisusedinalowvoltagedistributionsystemandanHVCircuitBreakerisusedinahighvoltagedistribution
system.
CORD, FLEXIBLE CABLE: A flexible cable having large number of strands of conductors of small crosssectional
areawithasoftPVCinsulation.Twoflexiblecordstwistedtogethermaybetermedastwinflexiblecord.However,
some flexible cords are made following thestyle of a twin core PVC insulated copper cables but much soft and
flexible.
CUTOUT:Anyapplianceforautomaticallyinterruptingthetransmissionofenergythroughaconductorwhenthe
currentrisesabovesomepredeterminedvalue.Acutoutcontainsapartforholdingeitherfusewire(rectangular
crosssectiontype)orapartforholdingtubularfuse(cylindricalbodyrectangularcrosssectiontype).(seeFuse)
DB:DistributionBoard.Thismaybetheboxwherethemainincomingcableentersandterminatesfromthemain
servicefeedconnection.TheSDBsgetfeedfromaDB.
DEMANDFACTOR:Theratioofthemaximumdemandofasystem,orpartofasystem,tothetotalconnected
loadofthesystemorthepartofthesystemunderconsideration.
DUCT:Aclosedpassagewayformedundergroundorinastructureandintendedtoreceiveoneormorecables
whichmaybedrawnin.
EARTH:Theconductivemassoftheearth,whoseelectricpotentialatanypointisconventionallytakenaszero.
EARTH ELECTRODE: A metal plate, pipe or other conductor electrically connected to the general mass of the
earth.
EARTHLEADWIRE:Thefinalconductorbywhichtheconnectiontotheearthelectrodeismade.
EARTHCONTINUITYCONDUCTOR(ECC):Theconductor,includinganyclamp,connectingtotheearthingleador
toeachother,thosepartsofaninstallationwhicharerequiredtobeearthed.Itmaybeinwholeorinpartthe
metal conduit or the metal sheath or armour of the cables, or the special continuity conductor of a cable or
flexiblecordincorporatingsuchaconductor.ECCsofappropriatesizemustrunfromanMDBtoitsDBs,froma
DBtoitscorrespondingSDBs,fromanSDBtotheSwitchBoardsunderthisSDB,fromanSDBtotheBDBsifthere
areany,fromaBDBtotheSwitchBoardsunderthisBDB,fromanSDBoraBDBtotheSocketsunderthisSDBor
BDB.
EDB:EmergencyDistributionBoard.ThismaybetheboxwherethemainincomingcablefromtheEmergencyor
StandbyGeneratorPanelentersand.TheESDBsgetfeedfromaEDB.
EFDB:EmergencyFloorDistributionBoardlocatedineachofthefloorsofamultistoriedbuilding.TheEDBsget
feedfromEFDB.
ENGINEERINCHARGE: An engineer responsible for implementation /execution of the work of a building or a
project. Such an engineer is expected to have significant knowledge in Electrical Engineering, Electrical
Construction,Measurement,CodesandPracticesofsuchworkandavailabilityofdifferentmaterialsneededfor
theconstruction.
FDB:FloorDistributionBoardlocatedineachofthefloorsofamultistoriedbuilding.TheDBsgetfeedfromFDB.
FUSE:Adevicethat,bythefusionofoneormoreofitsspeciallydesignedandproportionedcomponents,opens
thecircuitinwhichitisinsertedwhenthecurrentthroughitexceedsagivenvalueforasufficienttime.Fuseis
generally made of fusible wires of appropriate ratings which is either mounted inside glass tubes or porcelain
tubesoronatwoterminalcutout.
FUSE SWITCH: A composite unit, comprising a switch with the fuse contained in, or mounted on, the moving
memberoftheswitch.
LIGHTING FITTING: A device for supporting or containing a lamp or lamps (for example, fluorescent or
incandescent)togetherwithanyholder,shade,orreflector;forexample,abracket,apendantwithceilingrose,
oraportableunit.
INSULATION:Suitablenonconductingmaterial,enclosing,surroundingorsupportingaconductor.UsuallyPVC,
polymer,speciallytreatedrubber.
LIVE:Electricallychargedsoastohaveapotentialdifferentfromthatofearth.AlsoknownasALIVE.
821
Part8
BuildingServices
LUMINAIRE:Acompletelightfittingconsistingoflamp,holder,startinggears,reflectors,housingandmounting
accessories.
LT/LVandHT/HV:LTorLVinthisdocumentindicates230Voltsinglephaseand400volt3phase.HTorHVin
thisdocumentindicates11KVLinetoline3phasesystem.
MDB:MainDistributionBoard.Thisisthedistributionboxwherethemainincomingcableentersandterminates
fromthemainservicefeedconnectionofalargebuilding.TheFDBsgetfeedfromMDB.
OVERCURRENT:Acurrentexceedingtheratedcurrent.Forconductors,theratedvalueisthenominalcurrent
carryingcapacity.
PANEL BOARD : A single panel or a group of panel units designed for assembly in the form of a single panel
including buses, automatic overcurrent devices, and with or without switches for the control of light, heat, or
power circuits, designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box placed in or against a wall or partition and
accessibleonlyfromthefront.
PLUG : A device carrying metallic contacts in the form of pins, intended for engagement with corresponding
socketcontactsandarrangedforattachmenttoaflexiblecordorcable.Aplugmaycontaintubularfuseinsideit
althoughsomeplugsdonotcontainfuse.
POINT(inwiring):Aterminationofthefixedwiringintendedfortheconnectionofcurrentusingequipmente.g.,
aLight,afan,anexhaustfan.
SDB:SubDistributionBoardlocatedinthesamefloorofabuildingandconnectedtotheDB.TheBDBsgetfeed
fromSDB.
SERVICE:Theconductorsandequipmentrequiredfordeliveringenergyfromtheelectricsupplysystemtothe
wiringsystemofthepremisesserved.
SWITCH:Amanuallyoperateddeviceforclosingandopeningorforchangingtheconnectionofacircuit.A5A
SPSTswitchisusedforthecontrolofaLightorFanpoint.A5ASPDTswitchisalsousedforthecontrolofaLight
orFanpoint.
SWITCHBOARD:Anassemblageofswitchgearwithorwithoutinstruments;theterm,however,doesnotapplyto
agroupoflocalswitchesonafinalsubcircuitwhereeachswitchhasitsowninsulatingbase.
SWITCHGEAR:Mainswitches,cutouts orfuses,conductorsandotherapparatusinconnectiontherewith, used
forthepurposeofcontrollingorprotectingelectricalcircuitsormachinesorothercurrentusingappliances.
1.3.6 ListofSymbolsusedforElectricalDrawings
AlistofgeneralgraphicalsymbolsusedforelectricaldrawingsisgiveninTable2.13.Thesearegivenasguideline.
Incaseofjustifiedreasonsadesignermaymodifycertainsymbol.
Table8.1.15SymbolsusedforElectricalDrawings
SerialNo.
Description
MainDistributionBoard(MDB)
FloorDistributionBoard(FDB)
DistributionBoard(DB)
SubdistributionBoard(SDB)
BranchDistributionBoard(BDB)
SwitchBoard(SB)
TelephoneOutlet(PSTN)
Symbol
TelephoneOutlet(PABX)
Changeoverswitch
822
Vol.3
SerialNo.
Description
10
Energymeter
Chapter1
Symbol
11
12
Ammeter
Voltmeter
13
Powerfactormeter
14
Circuitbreaker
15
Fuse
16
CeilingmountedIncandescentlightfitting
P.F
17
Wallmountedbracketlightfitting
18
Ceilingfan
19
Exitlightpendant
20
Exitlightwallmounted
21
2pinsocketOutlet(singlephase)
22
3pin13AswitchedsocketOutlet(singlephase)
23
Weatherproofandwaterproofsocketoutlet
24
SPSTSinglepole,onewayswitch
25
DPSTTwopole,onewayswitch
26
TPSTThreepole,onewayswitch
27
SPDTTwowayswitch
28
Pushbuttonswitch
29
Buzzer
Singlefluorescentlamponceiling
30
Doublefluorescentlamponceiling
823
Part8
BuildingServices
SerialNo.
Description
31
Doublefluorescentlamponwall
32
Spotlight
33
WallMountedBracketfan
34
Exhaustfan
35
Pullbox
36
TVsocketoutlet
37
FireAlarmbell
38
Firedetector
39
Smokedetector
40
Speaker
41
Microphone
42
Conduit,concealedinceilingorinwall
43
Conduit,concealedinfloororthroughunderground
44
Telephoneconduit
Symbol
45
Televisionantennaconduit
46
EarthElectrode
1.3.7 Estimatingtheloadofabuilding/acomplex
Estimatingthetotalloadofabuildinghastobestartedwiththelistingoftheconnectedloadsinabuilding.The
stepsaretolisttheloadsineachoftherooms,ineachoftheflats/officesofafloor,ineachofthefloorsandthe
loadofthetotalbuilding.Inthiswayanaccountofthetotalbuildingarea/thetotalcomplexhastobeprepared.
LoadsoftheLift(s),waterpump(s),bulkventilatingsysteminthebasementandanyotherequipmentinstalledin
the building must also be added. For completing the load calculation, practical value of appropriate diversity
factorswillhavetobeappliedateachstage.
Estimatingthetotalloadofacomplexconsistingofanumberofbuildinghastobestartedwiththelistingofthe
connectedloadofeachofthebuildings,thearelightingload,thewaterpumpandanyotherequipmentinstalled
in the complex. For completing the load calculation, practical value of appropriate diversity factors among the
buildingswillhavetobeapplied.
1.3.7.1
MaximumDemandandDiversity
Twoitemsneedtobedetermined,whichare:(i)MaximumDemandand(ii)DiversityFactor.Theseareneededin
completingtheloadcalculationandinthecomputationofcurrent.
In determining the maximum demand of an installation or parts thereof, diversity shall be taken into account.
AppendixAgivessomeinformationonthedeterminationofthemaximumdemandofaninstallationandincludes
thecurrentdemandtobeassumedforcommonlyusedequipmenttogetherwithguidanceontheapplicationof
allowancesfordiversity.
824
Vol.3
1.3.7.2
Chapter1
EstimationofLoadinKW,inKVAandinAmperes
Anestimationofloadsisnecessaryinitiallyfordesignpurposeandlaterforkeepingatrackofthegrowthofload.
Estimation of loads means estimation of watts or kilowatts in small scale. In bigger scale the KVA is assessed
togetherwiththepowerfactor.Acalculationofcurrentisthentobeperformedfortheselectionofbreakers/
fusesandthecurrentcarryingcables.
1.3.7.3
EstimationofElectricalLoadinWatts
Energy efficient and energy saving should be considered in estimating the electrical load, the watts rating of
individualequipment/fittingsconnectedtothesystemneedtobelistedandadded.Typicalwattratingsofsome
oftheequipment/fittingsareTable8.1.14whichmaybeusedforestimationiftheactualvaluesarenotknown
orspecified.
Table8.1.16EstimatedLoadforDifferentFittings/Fixtures
TypeofFitting/Fixture
RatingsinWatts
CFL
4W24W
LED
SolarPowerLEDSecurity/StreetLights
1.3.7.4
Fluorescentlampwithaccessories:
Nominallength
600mm20
Nominallength
1200mm40
Photocopiers
12001500
Ceilingfans
100(Maximum)
Electric
1500
Tablefans
85(Maximum)
Pedestalfans
120(Maximum)
Exhaustfans
100(Maximum)
5Asocketoutlets
300
15Asocketoutlets
1500
MicrowaveOven(domestic)
12001500
Washingmachine(domestic)
350500
Television(Mediumsize)
120200
Computer(withoutprinter)
200
Computerwithprinter
700800
WindowtypeA.C.Machine(12000BTU/hr)
1500
SplittypeA.C.Machine(12000BTU/hr)
1300
Geyser(waterheater,domestic)
10001200
Toaster(domestic)
8001000
ElectricCalendar
7001000
CalculationofCurrent
Forthecalculationofcurrent(fortheselectionofcablesandbreakers)oftheFluorescentLampstheratingsareto
bemultipliedbyafactorof1.65totakecareofthepowerfactorandthestartingcurrentsituation.
Forthecalculationofcurrent(fortheselectionofcablesandbreakers)oftheCelingfans,TableFans,Pedestal
Fans,ExhaustFanstheratingsaretobemultipliedbyafactorof1.65totakecareofthepowerfactorandthe
startingcurrentsituation.
825
Part8
BuildingServices
Forthecalculationofcurrent(fortheselectionofcablesandbreakers)ofthesmallinductiveloads(upto1.0KW)
the ratings are to be multiplied by a factor of 1.65 to take care of the power factor and the starting current
situation.
Thefactorshallbehigherforhigherratedmotors.
1.3.7.5
MinimumLoadDensities
While estimating the electrical load, the minimum load densities to be considered are those shown in Table
8.1.17.
Table8.1.17MinimumLoadDensities
UnitLoad(Watts/m2)
TypeofOccupancy
NonA/C
A/C
Residence/Dwelling:
singlefamily
20
75
Residence/Dwelling:
multifamily(otherthanhotels)
20
75
32
80
Hotels,includingapartmenthouse(excludinganyprovisionsforelectric 24
cooking)
75
Officeandcommercialmultistoreyedbuildings
28
75
Industrialbuilding(excludingtheloadsformachines)
16
Departmentalstores
28
75
Banks
20
75
Restaurants(excludinganyprovisionsforelectriccooking)
16
75
Barbershopsandbeautyparlours
32
75
SchoolsandColleges
12
70
Parkingareaincommercialbuildings
Warehouses,largestorageareas
Hospitals
1.3.8 Fittings,FixturesandAccessories
Switch Boards with back boxes and cover plates, Ceiling Roses, Socket Outlets with back boxes, Plugs, Light
Fittings, Fans, pull boxes with cover plates have been put in this category, although there may be other items
whichmaybeincludedunderElectricalAccessoriesrelatedtoelectricalandelectronicinstallationsinbuildings.
1.3.8.1
SwitchBoards
Tumbler Switches have been used for surface wiring and Piano Switches have been used for concealed wiring.
Nowadaypianoswitchesarealsousedwithsurfacewiring.PianoSwitchesaremountedoneitheraplasticback
box or a metal back box. These piano switches are available in gangs. The other alternative is to have piano
switchesmountedonaPerspexorEbonitesheetwhichisthenmountedonametalbackbox.
TheSwitchesmustconformtotherelevantBSstandard.Theminimumampereratingofswitchshallnotbebelow
5A.
SwitchesmaybeSinglePoleSingleThrow(SPST)orSinglePoleDoubleThrow(SPDT)dependingontheoperation.
ForsomeapplicationDoublePoleSingleThrow(DPST)andDoublePoleDoubleThrow(DPDT)arealsoavailable.
UsuallytheDPSTswitchesaremadefor10A,15Aand20Arating.
Thephase(Live)wire(RedPVCinsulatedcable)connectiontothepointmustgothroughtheswitch.
The metal / sheet steel back boxes of a switch board must have an earthing terminal to terminate the Earth
ContinuityConductor(ECC)comingfromaBDBoranSDB.
1.3.8.2
SocketOutletsandPlugs:
Ingeneral,allsocketoutletsmustbeswitched(combined)andshuttered.
826
Vol.3
Chapter1
1.3.8.2.1 GeneralRequirementsofSocketOutlets
SocketOutletsshallbe13Aswitchedshuttered3pinflatpintype.
All socket outlets must be switched (combined) and shuttered and shall be for 3 pin Flat pin type
(rectangularcrosssection)13Aplugsfittedwithtubularfuse.
Thecorrespondingplugsmustbefittedwithfuse.Themaximumfuseratingshallbe13Afor13ASockets.
Thefuseratingmaybesmallerdependinguponthecurrentratingoftheappliancesused.
Thephasewire(Redcable)shallbeconnectedtotheLterminalofthesocketoutletthroughthecombinedswitch
and the neutral wire (Black cable) shall be directly connected to the N terminal of the socket. Earth Continuity
Conductor(ECC)(Yellow+Greenbicolourcable)forsuchasocketoutletshallbeconnectedtotheEarthterminal
ofthesocket.
Theplugforeach13Asocketoutletprovidedinabuildingfortheuseofdomesticappliancesshallbeprovided
withitsownindividualfuse.Thefeedcablesforsuchacircuitmusthavefuseorminiaturecircuitbreaker(MCB)
attheoriginatingpointintheDistributionBoardorSubDistributionBoardorBranchDistributionBoard.Forsome
highcurrentapplications,additionalfuses/circuitbreakersadjacenttothesocketsarerecommended.
Each socket outlet shall also be controlled by a switch which shall normally be located immediately adjacent
theretoorcombinedtherewith.
Thephase(Live)wire(RedPVCinsulatedcable)connectiontothesocketoutletmustbethroughtheswitch.
CoppersizeoftheEarthContinuityConductor(ECC)forsuchasocketoutletshallnotbesmallerinsizethan1.5
mm2PVCinsulatedcable.
1.3.8.2.2 15A /20A rated Round Pin socket outlets may be used for Air Conditioner Outlets and
WaterHeaterOutlets
Under special circumstances, for Air Conditioner Outlets (requiring 15A or 20A), 15A / 20A rated socket
outletsforRoundPinPlugsmaybeusedalongwithacircuitbreakerorfuseprotectioninaboxadjacent
tothesockets..
Each 15A/ 20A socket outlet provided in a building for the use of domestic appliances such as airconditioner,
watercooler,etc.shallbeprovidedwithitsownindividualfuse.Thefeedcablesforsuchacircuitmusthavefuse
orminiaturecircuitbreaker(MCB)attheoriginatingpointintheDistributionBoardorSubDistributionBoardor
BranchDistributionBoard.Forsomehighcurrentapplications,additionalfuses/circuitbreakersadjacenttothe
socketsarerecommended.
Eachsocketoutletshallalsobecontrolledbyaswitchwhichshallnormallybelocatedimmediatelyadjacentto
theSocketorshallbecombinedwiththeSocket.
Thecorrespondingplugsfor15Ashouldbefittedwithfuse.Themaximumfuseratingshallbe15Afor15A
Sockets.Fora15Aratedsocketoutleta15Aratedfuseora15Acircuitbreakermustbeplacedadjacenttothe
socket.
Fora20Aratedsocketoutleta20Aratedfuseora20Acircuitbreakermustbeplacedadjacenttothesocket.
Wiringforsocketsshallberadialtypeofwiring.However,ringtypewiringmaybeusedbystrictlyfollowingthe
rulesgiveninIEEWiringregulationsBS7671:2008,17thEditionandbyusingappropriatesizeofcable.
1.3.8.2.3 EarthContinuityConductor(ECC)foraSocket
TheECCforasocketoutletshallnotbesmallerinsizethan1.5mm2PVCinsulatedannealedcoppercable.The
colouroftheECCcableinsulationshallbeYellow+Greenbicolour.
1.3.8.2.4 MountingHeightofaThreepinSwitchedSocketoutlet
Three pin Switched Shuttered Socket outlets shall be mounted on a wall at a height 254mm above floor level.
SwitchedShutteredSocketoutletsareessentialforsafetyinparticularforthesafetyofinfants.
Forcertainapplicationslikecomputers,printers,UPS,IPSsuchsocketsmaybemountedatahigherlevelforthe
easeofoperation.
1.3.8.2.5 RestrictiononmountingSocketOutletsinwetplaces
NosocketoutletsshallbeprovidedinsideBathRooms/Toiletsoranyotherplacewherethefloormayremain
wet.
827
Part8
BuildingServices
1.3.8.2.6 5Arated2Pinsocketoutlets
5Arated2PinsocketoutletsmaybeusedalongwiththeLightandFanSwitchBoardsonly.Suchsockets
shallnotbeusedassocketoutletsattheskirtlevel.
1.3.8.2.7 NumberofSocketOutletsinaRoom/inaBuilding
Thenumberofsocketoutletsinabuildingdependsuponthespecificrequirementsofoccupantsandthetypeof
building.Adequatenumberof13Aswitchedflatpin(rectangularcrosssectionpin)shutteredsocketoutletsshall
beprovidedandarrangedaroundthebuildingtocatertotheactualrequirementsoftheoccupancy.
15Aroundpin(rectangularcrosssectionpin)socketoutletsshallbeprovidedforspeciallyAirconditionersand
waterheatersofsuchratingsonly.
For residential buildings, the minimal guidelines given in Table 2.18 shall be used to determine the required
number of 13 A switched flat pin (rectangular cross section pin) shuttered socket outlets, when actual
requirementscannotbeascertained.
AllsocketoutletsshallconformtoBDS115.
Table8.1.18MinimumNumberof13AflatpinSocketOutlets
Location
No.ofSwitchSocketOutlets
Bedroom
Livingroom
Drawingroom
Diningroom
Toaster/SnackToaster
Kitchen
Bathroom
Verandah
Refrigerator
Airconditioner
oneforeachroom
1.3.8.2.8 Restrictiononinstallationoftwosocketoutletsinroomfedfromtwophases
Installationoftwosocketoutletsinaroomfedfromtwodifferentphasesshouldbeavoidedasfaraspossible.
However,inunavoidablecases,theminimumdistancebetweentwosuchsocketoutletsinaroomfedfromtwo
differentphasesmustnotbelessthan2munderanycircumstances.
1.3.8.2.9 Exterior/outdoorsockets
Socketoutletsinexposedplaceswherechancesofdripping/fallingrainwaterexistshouldnotbeplaced.
In case of necessity, weather proof/ waterproof covered socket outlets may be mounted with appropriate
precautions.InsuchacasethebackboxshouldpreferablybeofbakeliteorAcrylicorplasticmaterial.
1.3.8.2.10 Exterior/outdoorswitches
Switchesinexposedplaceswherechancesofdripping/fallingrainwaterexistshouldnotbeplaced.
Incaseofnecessity,weatherproof/waterproofcoveredswitchesmaybemountedwithappropriateprecautions.
InsuchacasethebackboxshouldpreferablybeofbakeliteorAcrylicorplasticmaterial.
1.3.8.3
CeilingRose
AceilingroseisneededforterminatingthepointwiringforaLightoraFanintheceiling.
828
Vol.3
Chapter1
1.3.8.3.1
Aceilingroseshallnotbeinstalledinanycircuitoperatingatavoltagenormallyexceeding250
volts.
1.3.8.3.2
Normally, a single pendant be suspended from only one ceiling rose using a flexible cord. A
ceilingroseshallnotbeusedfortheattachmentofmorethanoneoutgoingflexiblecordunlessit
isspeciallydesignedformultiplependants.
1.3.8.3.3
Aceilingroseshallnotcontainafuseterminalasanintegralpartofit.
1.3.8.3.4
TheceilingroseshallconformtoBS67.
1.3.8.3.5
Luminairesupportingcouplersaredesignedspecificallyforthemechanicalsupportaswellasfor
the electrical connection of luminaires and shall not be used for the connection of any other
equipment.
1.3.8.4
LightFitting
Switchesshallbeprovidedforthecontrolofeverylightfitting.Aswitchmaycontrolanindividuallightpointora
groupoflightpoints.
Wherecontrolatmorethanonepositionisnecessaryforalightingfittingoragroupoflightingfittings,asmany
twowayorintermediateswitchesmaybeprovidedastherequirednumberofcontrolpositions.
In industrial premises light fittings shall be supported by suitable pipe/conduits, brackets fabricated from
structural steel, steel chains or similar materials depending upon the type and weight of the fittings. Where a
lightingfittingistobesupportedbyoneormoreflexiblecords,themaximumweighttowhichthetwinflexible
cordsmaybesubjectareshowninTable8.1.19.
Table8.1.19MaximumPermissibleWeighttowhichTwinFlexibleCordsmaybeSubject
NominalCrosssectionalArea
ofTwinFlexibleCord(mm2)
NumberandDiameter
(mm)ofWires
MaximumPermissible
Weight(kg)
0.5
16/0.2
0.75
24/0.2
1.0
32/0.2
1.5
48/0.2
5.3
2.5
80/0.2
8.8
128/0.2
14
ForaLightfittingwithshade,noflammableshadeshallformpartofthelightfittingandtheshadeshallbewell
protectedagainstallrisksoffire.Celluloidshadeorlightingfittingshallnotbeusedunderanycircumstances.
1.3.8.4.1 LightingPoint
Ateachfixedlightingpointoneofthefollowingaccessoriesshallbeused
aceilingrosetoBS67
aluminairesupportingcouplertoBS6972orBS7001
abattenlampholdertoBS7895,BSEN60238orBSEN61184
aluminairedesignedtobeconnecteddirectlytothecircuitwiring
asuitablesocketoutlet
aconnectionunittoBS5733orBS13634.
A lighting installation shall be appropriately controlled e.g., by a switch or combination of switches to BS 3676
and/orBS5518,orbyasuitableautomaticcontrolsystem,whichwherenecessaryshallbesuitablefordischarge
lightingcircuits.
829
Part8
BuildingServices
1.3.8.4.2 Wires/CablesusedinsideLightFittingsandanyotherFitting
Wires/cablesusedinsidealightfittingoranyotherfittingsaremostlyflexibletypes.Insomecasessinglecore
PVCinsulatedwiringcablesmostly1mm2or1.5mm2areused.Insuchcasesthecablesmustbeofhighqualityin
terms of insulation and must have appropriate copper cross section. Such cables are usually terminated in a
ceilingrose.
1.3.8.5
Fans
1.3.8.5.1 CeilingFan
CeilingfansincludingtheirsuspensionshallconformtoBDS818.
Withrespecttothepositionofalightingfitting,placingafaninawaythatshadowsarethrownontheworking
planesisnotacceptable.
Whereceilingfansareprovidedinlargebuildings,thechosenunitmoduleare(size)alsoplayanimportantpart.
Ingeneral,fordomestic,officeandcommercialbuildings,foreverypartofamoduletobeservedbytheceiling
fans, it is necessary that the unit module area shall be so chosen that the required number of fans could be
suitablylocatedinit,toavoidcreationofpocketsreceivinglittleornoaircirculation.
Ingeneral,fansinlargehallsmaybespacedat3to3.5minboththedirectionsinthehorizontalplane.Ifbuilding
modulesdonotlendthemselvestoproperpositioningoftherequirednumberofceilingfans,othertypesoffans,
such as air circulators or wall mounted bracket fans shall have to be installed for the areas uncovered by the
ceilingfans.Insuchcases,necessaryelectricaloutletsshallhavetobeprovidedforthepurpose.
Table8.1.20givestherecommendedareastobeservedbydifferentsizesofceilingfanswheretheheightoffan
bladesisat2.5mabovethefinishedfloorlevel.
Table8.1.20RecommendedFanSizesinRooms
RoomArea(m2)
FanSweep
Upto6
915mm
Over6to9
1220mm
Over9to12
1442mm
Wiringforaceilingfanoutletfromtheswitchboarduptotheceilingfanoutletshallbedonethrough
prelaid 18 mm dia PVC conduits using 1.5 mm2 PVC insulated 2 cables of Red and Black insulation. A
highqualityceilingroseistobeinstalledattheceilingfanpointfortheterminationofthewiringandthe
connectionofthetwowiresoftheFan.
Afanhookisrequiredtobeplacedduringcastingoftheroof.Thefanhookistobemadeusinga12.7mmdiaMS
rodhavingatleast600mmonbothsidesandshallbeplacedabovetheMSrodmeshoftheroofslab.
1.3.8.5.2 WallMountedBracketFan
ForWallmountedbracketfansshallbemountedonthewallusingappropriaterowelbolts.Wiringfora
WallmountedbracketfanoutletfromtheswitchboarduptotheWallmountedbracketfanoutletshall
be done through prelaid 18 mm dia PVC conduits using 1.5 mm2 PVC insulated 2 cables of Red and
Blackinsulation.Ahighqualityceilingroseistobeinstalledattheceilingfanpointfortheterminationof
thewiringandtheconnectionofthetwowiresoftheFan.
1.3.8.5.3 PedestalFansandTableFans:
Theseitemsaremovable.Asaresultnofixedconnectionsarenecessary.Socketswillbeusedtoenergizethese
fans.
1.3.8.5.4 Installation/MountingofVentilatingFansorExhaustFans
Exhaustfansarenecessaryforspaces,suchastoilets,kitchens,canteensandgodownstoprovidetherequiredair
changes.Sincetheexhaustfansarelocatedgenerallyontheouterwallsofaroom,appropriateopeningsinsuch
wallsshallbeprovidedrightfromtheplanningstage.Thesizesandtherpmoftheexhaustfanswillvaryaccording
totheapplicationandthevolumeforwhichafanused.Insomeapplications(suchassomeindustries,bigsizegas
generator room etc.) high rpm fans are essential. In all cases appropriate types of fan need to be chosen and
appropriatearrangementneedtobemadesothatrainwatercannotgetinsidetherooms.
830
Vol.3
Chapter1
1.3.8.5.5 Installation/MountingofCeilingFans
CeilingFansshallbesuspendedfromFanhooks.Fanhooksaretobeplacedinpositionduringthecastingofthe
Roof.
1.3.8.5.6 Fanhooks
Fanhooksmaybeconcealed(hidden)ormaybeexposedtype.FanhooksshallbemadeusingMSrodsof12.7
mmdiameter.Thediameterofthisrodshallnotbebelow9.53mmunderanycircumstances.
1.3.8.5.7 CeilingRosesforFanPoints
AppropriatetypeofceilingrosesmustbeprovidedattheFanpointsfortheterminationoftheFanpointwiring
cables.ConnectiontotheCeilingFanswillgofromtheceilingroses.
1.3.8.5.8 CutoutBox/CircuitBreakerBox
If the BDB or the SDB from which a 3pin switched shuttered socket receives power is at a significant
distance away and the load connected to the socket needs special care an additional cutout box or a
circuitbreakerboxmaybeplacedadjacenttothesocket.SuchacutoutBoxoraCircuitBreakerboxshall
beplacedinsidea18SWGSheetSteel(coatedwithtwocoatsofsyntheticenamelpaint)ofappropriate
sizewithappropriatePerspexcoverplate.Suchaboxmaybesurfacefittedormaybeconcealedfitted.
TheboxshallhaveabrassterminalfortheterminationoftheECC.
1.3.9 DistributionWiringinaBuilding
1.3.9.1
General
Loadsareseparatedintoknownandunknownloads.
Generalilluminationisaknownload,whetherderivedfromdetailedlightinglayout,ordevelopedfromwattsper
squaremetercalculation.Similarlyfansarealsoknownloads.Besidesthesetwotypes,theremaybesomeother
knownloads.
Number,ratingandlayoutofoutletsforgeneralillumination,fansandotherknownloadsshouldaccuratelybe
distributedamong a number of branchcircuits.These branchcircuits shouldthenbecarefully loaded withdue
regardtovoltagedrop,operatingvoltageandpossibleincreaseinlightinglevelsinfuture.Ontheotherhandthe
socketsareunknownloads.Socketloadswillbedeterminedfromprojectionsbasedontheutilityofthebuilding
andtypeofapplications.
Everyinstallationshallbedividedintosmallcircuits(followingtherulesgiveninthisdocument)toavoiddangerin
caseofafault,andtofacilitatesafeoperation,inspection,maintenanceandtesting.Fortheestablishmentofthe
circuits appropriate type of wiring is needed and appropriate terminations / connections / junctions of these
circuits are needed. At the same time appropriate types of protection against faults must be given at different
levels.Thesearetobeachievedthroughinstallationofappropriatedistributionwiringinthebuilding.
1.3.9.2
DistributionBoard
A Distribution Board is the junction point of the incoming line and the outgoing lines for the distribution of
Electricity throughout the building. The incoming as well as the outgoing lines must have Circuit Breaker
protection or Fuse protection. The junctions and terminations of the incoming and outgoing cables are made
through copper bars containing bolts and nuts for cable lugs known as busbars. A Distribution board may be
namedasMDBorFDBorDBorSDBorBDB.
a) MDB stands for Main Distribution Board. This is the distribution box where the main incoming cable
entersandterminatesfromthemainservicefeedconnectionofalargebuilding.TheFDBsgetfeedfrom
MDB.
b) FDBstandsforFloorDistributionBoardlocatedineachofthefloorsofamultistoriedbuilding.TheDBs
getfeedfromFDB.UsuallymorethanoneFDBsareneeded.
c) DBistheabbreviationforDistributionBoard.Thismaybetheboxwherethemainincomingcableenters
andterminatesfromthemainservicefeedconnection.TheSDBsgetfeedfromaDB.
d) SDBisusedtorepresentSubDistributionBoard.Thisboardislocatedinthesamefloorofabuildingand
connectedtotheDB.UsuallymorethanoneSDBsareneeded.TheBDBsgetfeedfromSDB.
831
Part8
BuildingServices
e) BDBstandsforBranchDistributionBoardlocatedinthesamefloorofabuildingandconnectedtothe
SDB.UsuallymorethanoneBDBsareneeded.
f)
EDB,EFDF,ESDB,EBDBSectionsofDB,FDB,SDB,BDBreceivingfeedfromtheEmergencyBusbarwhich
inturnisgettingfeedfromStandbyGeneratorthroughchangeoverswitch.ThesemaybeseparateDBs
placedbythecorrespondingnormalsupplyDBs.
Each of these distribution boards must have bus bars for Line, Neutral and Earthing for a single phase
box.A3phasedistributionboardmusthavebusbarsforLine1,Line2,Line3,NeutralandEarthing.
Theseboxesshallbemadewithsheetsteelofnotlessthan18SWGthicknessandmustbeappropriately
paintfinishedtomatchthewallpaint.
1.3.9.3
CircuitWiring
1.3.9.3.1 Separatebranchcircuitsforseparatecontrol
Separate branch circuits shall be provided for different parts of a building area which need to be separately
controlled. A branch circuit should be independently working and should not be affected due to the failure of
anotherbranchcircuit.
Thenumberoffinalcircuits(alsotermedassubcircuitsorcircuits)requiredandthepointssuppliedbyanyfinal
circuitsshallcomplywith
a) therequirementofovercurrentprotection,
b) therequirementforisolationandswitching,and
c) theselectionofcablesandconductors.
Allfinalcircuitsshallbewiredusingloopwiringsystem;nojointboxshallbeused.
Sufficientnumberof18SWGsheetsteelmade(paintedwithtwocoatsofgreysyntheticenamelpaint)pullboxes,
with ebonite / perspex sheet cover plate, must be given on the walls near the ceiling. If brick walls are not
available,pullboxesmustbegivenintheceilings.
1.3.9.3.2 ForDomesticandOfficeBuildings
5ALight/FanCircuitsmustbeusedforallDomesticandResidentialbuildings.5ALight/FanCircuitsarealsoto
beusedforOfficeandcommercialBuildings.ThecorrespondingcircuitwireintheBDB/SDB/DBthenshallbenot
lessthan1.5mm2.
1.3.9.3.3 ForOfficeandCommercialBuildingshavinglargeopenfloorareas
Under unavoidable circumstances, in case of difficulties in forming 5A Light / Fan Circuits for Office and
commercial Buildings having large open floor areas, 10A Light / Fan Circuits may be used. The corresponding
circuitwireintheBDB/SDB/DBthenshallbenotlessthan2.5mm2.
Howeveruseof5ALight/FanCircuitsisstillemphasized.
1.3.9.3.4 ForIndustrial/FactoryBuildingshavinglargeopenfloorareas
ForIndustrial/FactoryBuildingshavinglargeopenfloorareas,10ALight/FanCircuitsmaybeused.
1.3.9.3.5 ForIndustrial/FactoryBuildings/Warehouseshavingtoolargeopenfloorareas
For Industrial / Factory Buildings / Warehouses having large open floor areas, efforts should be given to use
circuitsnotexceeding10A.ThecorrespondingcircuitwireintheBDB/SDB/DBthenshallbenotlessthan2.5
mm2.
For Industrial / Factory Buildings having very large open floor areas, 15A Light / Fan Circuits may be used as
exceptionalcasesonly.ThecorrespondingcircuitbreakerintheBDB/SDB/DBthenshallbenotlessthan4mm2.
Increase in the sizes of the above mentioned cables may be required if the distance is too long. Voltage drop
calculationwillgivetheguidanceinthatcase.
1.3.9.3.6 Separatebranchcircuitsfromminiaturecircuitbreaker(MCB)
Separatebranchcircuitsshallbeprovidedfromminiaturecircuitbreaker(MCB)ofaBDBD/SDBorfuseofthe
Fusedistributionboards(FDB)forLight/Fan.
832
Vol.3
Chapter1
Separatebranchcircuitsshallbeprovidedfromminiaturecircuitbreaker(MCB)ofaBDBD/SDBorfuseofthe
Fusedistribution boards (FDB)forautomatic andfixedapplianceswitha load of500watt or more andsocket
outlets.Eachautomaticorfixedapplianceshallbeservedbyaprotectedsocketcircuit.
1.3.9.3.7 Lessthan50%loadingofCircuitswithmorethanoneoutlet
Circuitswithmorethanoneoutletshallnotbeloadedinexcessof50%oftheircurrentcarryingcapacity.
1.3.9.3.8 Branchcircuitsmusthavesparecapacitytopermitatleast20%increaseinload
Each branch circuit running between a DB and a SDB, between a SDB and a BDB must have spare capacity to
permitatleast20%increaseinloadbeforereachingthelevelofmaximumcontinuousloadcurrentpermittedfor
thatcircuit
1.3.9.3.9 Onesparecircuitmustbeallowedinthedistributionboardforeachfivecircuitsinuse.
Atleastonesparecircuitmustbeallowedinthedistributionboardforeachfivecircuitsinuse.
Additionalspace fora circuit breaker alongwiththe provisionforconnectinga pair of outgoingcables shall be
kept.
1.3.9.3.10 Eachfinalcircuitshallbeconnectedtoaseparatewayinadistributionboard
Where an installation comprises more than one final circuit, each final circuit shall be connected to a separate
wayinadistributionboard.Thewiringofeachfinalcircuitshallbeelectricallyseparatefromthatofeveryother
finalcircuit,soastopreventunwantedenergizationofafinalcircuit.
1.3.9.3.11 Size of cables in a branch circuit shall be at least one size larger than that needed for the
computedloadcurrent
Sizeofcablestobeusedinabranchcircuitshallbeatleastonesizelargerthanthatcomputedfromtheloading
ifthedistancefromtheovercurrentprotectivedevicetothefirstoutletisover15m.
1.3.9.3.12 4mm2(7/0.036)and6mm2(7/0.044)wiringcablefora15Asocketoutletbranchcircuit
Theminimumsizeofwiringcableusedfora15Asocketoutletbranchcircuitshallbe4mm2(7/0.036).Whenthe
distancefromtheovercurrentprotectivedevicetothefirstsocketoutletonareceptaclecircuitisover30mthe
minimumsizeofwireusedfora15Abranchcircuitshallbe6mm2(7/0.044).
1.3.9.3.13 Lengthofalightingcircuit
Thelengthofalightingcircuitshallbelimitedtoamaximumof30m,unlesstheloadonthecircuitissosmallthat
voltagedropbetweentheovercurrentprotectivedeviceandanyoutletisbelow1%.
1.3.9.3.14 Useofcommonneutralformorethanonecircuitisprohibited
Each circuit must have its own neutral cable. Use of common neutral cable for more than one circuits is not
permitted.
1.3.9.3.15 FollowingCorrectcolourcodesofcables
Duringwiring,correct colour codes of the insulation of thecables must be used. For asinglephase circuit Red
colourinsulatedcablemustbeusedforthelivewireandtheBlackcolourinsulatedcablemustbeusedforthe
neutralandgreen+yellowbicolourinsulatedcablemustbeusedfortheECC.ForathreephasecircuitRedcolour
mustbeusedforthelive(L1),Yellowcolourforthelive(L2),Blueclourforthelive(L3)wireandtheBlackcolour
fortheneutralandgreen+yellowbicolourmustbeusedfortheECC.
Theabovementionedcolourcodingmustbeindicatedinthedesigndrawing.Thisshouldalsobementionedin
thespecification.
Table8.1.2ColourCodesofCableswhichshallbeusedforwiring
Protectiveearth(PE)
orECCorEarthLeadWire
Neutral(N)
Pre2004IEEStandard
Green+yellowbicolour
Black
833
Part8
BuildingServices
Singlephase:Live(L)
Threephase:L1
Red
Threephase:L2
Yellow
Threephase:L3
Blue
1.3.9.3.16 BalancingofcircuitsinthreephaseSDBs,DBs,FDBs,andMDBs.
Ina3phasedistributionsystemspecialcaremustbetakenduringwiringtoobtainbalancingofloadsamongthe
threephases.
Ina3phaseSDB,DB,FDB,MDBconnectionsofthecircuitstothebusbarsmustbemadeinsuchawaysothat
theloadcurrentremainsbalancedamongthethreelinesduringlowloadaswellasfullload.Aftercompletingthe
installationbalancingshouldbecheckedbyclampmetercurrentmeasurementofeachphase.
The above mentioned current balancing must be indicated in the SDB (if 3 phase), DB, FDB, and MDB circuit
diagramofdesigndrawing.Thisshouldalsobementionedinthespecification.
1.3.10 ElectricalLayoutandInstallationDrawings
An electrical layout drawing shall be prepared after proper locations of all outlets for lamps, fans, fixed and
transportable appliances, motors etc. have been selected. This is the beginning of the electrical distribution
designwork.Thisjobmustbedonewithdueimportancepriortostartingtheconstructionandinstallationwork.
Strongemphasisisgivenonthisworkinthisdocument.
1.3.10.1 Locatingpositionsofthepointsontheplanofthebuilding
Atthebeginning,theLightpoints,Fanpoints,Socketpoints,SwitchBoards,BDBs,SDBs,FDBs.DBsandMDBsshall
belocatedoneachplanbasedonconvention,suitability,applicationandsafetyviewpoint.
Conduitlayoutandcablelayoutshallthenbeshownonthedrawing.
1.3.10.2 LightandFancircuitsmustnotbemixedwiththeSocketCircuits
Indesigningthewiringlayout,power(socket)andheating(socket)subcircuitsshallbekeptseparateanddistinct
fromlightandfansubcircuits.
Allwiringshallbedoneonthedistributionsystemwithmainandbranchdistributionboardsplacedatconvenient
positionsconsideringbothphysicalaspectsandelectricalloadcentres.Alltypesofwiringwhetherconcealedor
surface,shallbeasneartheceilingaspossible.Inalltypesofwiringdueconsiderationshallbegiventoneatness
andgoodappearance.
1.3.10.3 BalancingofcircuitsinthreephaseDistributionBoxesisamust
Balancingofcircuitsinthreephaseinstallationsshallbearrangedinthedrawingandalsomustbedoneduring
physicalconnection.
1.3.10.4 Singlephasesocketoutletsreceivingconnectionfromtwodifferentphases
Single phase socket outlets receiving connection from two different phases located in the same room is to be
avoided.However,ifitisessentialtohavesuchsocketconnectionthesemustbelocated2mormoreapart.
1.3.10.5 ElectricalLayoutdrawingsforindustrialpremises
Electrical Layout drawings for industrial premises shall indicate the relevant civil structure /barrier / duct and
mechanicalequipment/duct.
1.3.10.6 Preparationofdetailedcircuitdiagram
CircuitdiagramsofeachoftheLightandFancircuitsmustfirstbepreparedbasedontheselectionwhtheritis5A
or 10A circuit. The cable size of each of the circuits size of the ECC must be shown in the drawing. The circuit
diagramsoftheBDBs,SDBs,DBs,FDBs,MDBsetc.arethentobepreparedandpresentedintheformofsingle
line drawings indicating the cable sizes of each interconnection and the sizes of the ECCs. The distribution of
BDBs,SDBs,DBs,FDBs,MDBsetc.aretwobeshowninadistributiondrawingindicatingthecablesizesofeach
interconnectionandthesizesoftheECCs.
834
Vol.3
Chapter1
1.3.10.7 PreparationofElectricalDistributionandWiringDesigndrawingbyanexperiencedEngineer
Electrical Distribution and Wiring Design drawing of building must be prepared by an Engineer who is
knowledgeable and preferably experienced in this subject. For big and multistoried building experience is of
utmostimportance.
1.3.11 ElectricalWiringintheInteriorofBuildings
1.3.11.1 SurfaceWiringorExposedWiring
Wiring run over the surface of walls and ceilings, whether contained in conduits or not, is termed as
surfacewiringorexposedwiring.
SinglecorePVCinsulatedcupperthroughPVCChannelsorthroughPVCconduitsorthroughGIpipesofapproved
qualitymaybeusedforsurfacewiring.
Surfacewiring usingtwincoreflat PVC insulated cupper onwooden battensused to be used long back.This is
almostdiscontinuedanddiscouragednowaday.
PVCconduitsorGIpipes,whenusedforsurfacewiring,shallbeclampedwithsaddlesataspacingnotexceeding
600mm,tothewallorceilingusingplasticrowelplugswithcountersunkgalvanizedscrews.
1.3.11.1.1 SurfaceWiringusingWoodBattens
Surface wiring using wood battens is very rare now a day because of evolution of other decent techniques of
surfacewiring.Thismethodisdiscouraged.However,incaseofextremenecessitythismaybeused.
Thewoodbattensusedinthismethodshallbemadewithgoodqualitywoodhavingaminimumthicknessof12
mm.Theyshallbeinstalledexposedandrunstraightontheceilingorwallsurfaces.Battensonwallsshall
beruneitherhorizontallyorvertically,andneveratanangle.Battensonceilingsshallberunparallelto
theedgesineitherorthogonaldirection,andnotatanangle,Theyshallbefixedtothewallorceilingby
rowel plugs and countersunk galvanized screws. The wires shall be fixed to the battens by using
galvanizedsteelclipsorbrasslinkclipsofrequiredsizeataspacingnotexceeding100mm.
Thismethodisnolongerusedbecauseoftheavailabilityofothersurfacewiringmethodspresentedbelow.
1.3.11.1.2 SurfaceWiringusingPVCConduits
PVCconduitsorGIpipes,whenused for surfacewiring,shallbeclampedwithsaddlesata spacingnot
exceeding600mm,tothewallorceilingusingplasticrowelplugswithcountersunkgalvanizedscrews.
Theconduitsplacedconcealedinsiderooforinwallmusthave20SWGGIpullwiresplacedduringlayingofthe
pipesforpullingthecableslater.
1.3.11.1.3 SurfaceWiringusingPVCChannels
Surface wiring may be done using single core PVC insulated cables placed inside surface fixed PVC channels of
appropriatesize.Fixingofchannelsmustbedoneusingscrewsinrowelplugsinsertedintodrilledholesonthe
walls/ceilings.Thechannelsmustbeplacedinastraightlinewithadequatenumberofscrewssothatnosagis
observed. Cables must not be stressed in the bends. Adequate space must exist inside the channel to put the
cablesinpositionwithoutdifficulty.
Surfacewiringusingflexiblechords,clipsandnailsshallnotbeusedingeneral.
1.3.11.1.4 SurfaceWiringusingRoundcoreflexiblecablewithplasticclipsandnails
Surface Wiring using exposed Round core flexible cable with plastic clips and long nails have been used for
extendingapointwiring,forextendingasocketwiringduetoshift,foraddacircuitwiring.
Thisisnotrecommendedforregularwiring.Insteadofusingthismethod,oneshouldgofortherecommended
surfacewiringusingsinglecorePVCcableswithPVCchannelsorsinglecorePVCcableswithPVCconduitsas
mentionedaboveinthisdocument.
Foralengthofnotexceeding1mthismaybeusedonlyforshiftinganexistingLight/Fanpointorforshifting
anexistingsocketpointonlyunderunavoidablecircumstances.
1.3.11.2 ConcealedWiring
835
Part8
BuildingServices
ThewiresinthistypeofwiringshallbeplacedinsideGIconduitsorPVCconduitsthatareburiedinroofsandin
brick/concretewalls.Theconduitsinthewallsshallberunhorizontallyorvertically,andnotatanangle.
Conduits in concrete slabs shall be placed at the centre of thickness and supported during casting by mortar
blocksor'chairs'madeofsteelbarsoranyotherapprovedmeans.Allconduitsshallbecontinuousthroughout
theirlengths.
Appropriateplanningshouldbemadeinwhichthereshallbeadequatesparecapacityintheconduitsplacedin
roofslabssothatunforeseensituationduringexecutionoftheinstallationcanbetakencareof.Conduitswillrun
throughtheroofandthenbenddownwardforgoinguptotheoutlets,DBs,SwitchBoards,Sockets.
Inacolumnstructurebuildinghavingnopermanentwalls,SwitchBoardsandSocketBoards,PullBoxesshallbe
placedinColumnsandmustbedoneduringthecastingofcolumns.
ConcealedwiringthroughfloorsandupwardmountingofPVC/GIpipesfromthefloorisstronglydiscouraged
becauseoftheoccurrenceofcondensationandaccumulationofwaterfromcondensationeventuallyleadingto
damagingofthesimplePVCinsulatedcableinsulation.Thismethodshouldnotbefollowedasageneralpractice.
Undergroundcablesforelectricaldistributioninthepremises/garden/compoundofthebuildingshallbeencased
inGIorPVCpipesandlaidinearthtrenchesofsufficientdepth.Armouredcablesneednotbeencasedinconduits
exceptforcrossingsunderroad,footpath,walkwayorfloors.
Theconduitsplacedconcealedinsiderooforinwallmusthave20SWGGIpullwiresplacedduringlayingofthe
pipesforpullingthecableslater.
1.3.11.3 WiringinsideSuspendedCeilings(FalseCeilings)
WiringinsideSuspendedCeilings(FalseCeilings)shallbesurfacewiringthroughconduitsorthroughPVCchannels
mentionedundertheheadingofSurfaceWiringMethods.
Cables shall not be placed loosely and haphazardly on the suspended ceilings. Placing naked cables inside the
suspendedceilingisnotpermitted.
Cable joints with PVC tape wrapping is not allowed for connection of a fitting from the ceiling rose or from a
junctionboxinsidethegapspace.
1.3.11.4 WiringthroughCabletray
Wiringforconnectionstosomemachinesmaybecarriedthroughacabletraysuspendedfromtheceiling.Thisis
veryrareforadomesticbuilding.Howeverinacommercial/officeorindustrialbuildingthistechniquemaybe
needed. In special circumstances Cables may be pulled through pre laid GI/ PVC pipes under the floor where
therewillbenochancesofwateraccumulationinthefloororcondensation.
1.3.11.5 MountingHeightofLightandFanSwitchBoards
Light and Fan Switch Boards shall be placed 1220mm above floor level in the Domestic Buildings (i.e, the
clearancebetweenthefloorandthebottomoftheSwitchBoardshallbe1220mm).
Thisabovementionedheightshallbe1300mmabovefloorlevelintheOfficeBuildings,CommercialBuildingsand
IndustrialBuildings.However,theminimumheightshallnotbebelow1220mm.
1.3.11.6 RestrictionontheuseofPlastic/PVCInsulatedFlexibleChords/Cables
Plastic/PVCInsulatedFlexibleChords/Cablesshallnotbeusedforwiringoflight/fanpointsorforwiringof
Sockets,orforwiringofanysubcircuits.
1.3.11.7 CableJointsandCableJointBoxesinConcealedandsurfacewiring
BoththeRed(L)andBlack(N)cablesofafinalcircuitshallrunfromaBDB/SDBuptotheSwitchboardwithouta
joint.Similarly,boththeRed(L)andBlack(N)cablesofapointshallrunfromthepointuptotheswitchboard.
Cablejointsaretobemadeintheswitchboardbackbox.Circumstancesmightarisewherethisisnotpossible.
Underthosecircumstances,jointsshallbemadeusingapprovedcablejointmethods.
1.3.12
MethodsofPointWiringandCircuitWiring
1.3.12.1 MethodsofPointWiring
836
Vol.3
Chapter1
WiringbetweenaLight/fanpointanditscorrespondingswitchboardistermedasPointWiring.Itisassumed
thattheloadofsuchapointisnotinexcessof100wattsingeneralinspecialthismaybeupto200watts.Wiring
foraLight/Fanpointshallbemadeusingoneofthemethodsi.e,(i)SurfaceWiringor(ii)ConcealedWiring.For
wiring of a point one Red and one Black PVC insulated copper cable shall run between a point and its switch
board. Cable joints inside conduits or within channels are forbidden. The current carrying capacity for such a
circuitshallnotbemorethan5Aforadomesticoracommercialbuilding.Theminimumsizeofacableforsuch
wiringshallbe1.5mm2.
Commonneutralshallnotbeusedunderanycircumstances.
1.3.12.2 MethodsofCircuitWiring
WiringbetweenaswitchboardandaBDB/SDB/DBwillbecalledCircuitWiring.Circuitwiringshallbedonewith
alivecableaneutralcableandanECCcableforasinglephasecircuit.Sometimesthiscircuitisalsoreferredtoas
subcircuit.
An ECC must be provided with each circuit. The ECC at the Switch Board end shall be terminated in the earth
terminalofthemetalpartoftheSwitchBoardusingabrassscrew/boltandanut.TheBDB/SDB/DBendofthe
ECCshallbeterminatedintheEarthingBusbaroftheBDB/SDB/DB.
The ECC in this case shall be PVC insulated copper cable of appropriate size but with yellow+Green bicolour
insulation.
Foreachcircuit,thelivewiremustbedrawnusingredcolourinsulatedPVCcableandtheNeutralWireshallbe
drawnusingblackcolourinsulatedPVCcable.
Commonneutralshallnotbeusedunderanycircumstances.
Theminimumsizeofcablefora5Acircuitprotectedbya5Acircuitbreakerorfuseshallnotbebelow1.5mm2
Theminimumsizeofcablefora10Acircuitprotectedbya10Acircuitbreakerorfuseshallnotbebelow2.5mm2
.
Theminimumsizeofcablefora15Acircuitprotectedbya15Acircuitbreakerorfuseshallnotbebelow4mm2.
Theminimumsizeofcablefora20Acircuitprotectedbya20Acircuitbreakerorfuseshallnotbebelow6mm2.
Theabovementionedsizesmustbeincreasedforlongcablesasmentionedelsewhereinthisdocument.
In general, the minimum size of cable for a particular circuit shall depend on the rating of the fuse or circuit
breakerusedfortheprotectionofthatcircuit.Avoltagedropcheckistobemadeforeachlengthofthecircuitto
ensurethatthevoltagedropatthefarthestendoftheloadfromthemaindistributionpointdoesnotexceed2.5
percent.
Sockets shall get direct connection from the BDB/ SDB through breaker/ fuse protection. Depending on the
assessed requirements sockets may be grouped / looped at the socket end. Such grouping shall not exceed 3
numbersofsocketsinonecircuit.
1.3.13 FeederWiringbetweenSDBandBDB,DBandSDB,FDBtoDB,MDBtoFDBetc.
Wiring between a BDB and an SDB, an SDB and a DB, a DB and an FDB, an FDB and an MDB needs special
attentionandtherulesaresimilartoCircuitWiring.ECCmustbepresentforeachofthefeedconnections.The
ECC in this case also shall be PVC insulated copper cable of appropriate size but with Green+ Yellow biclour
insulation.
AtbothendstheECCmustbeterminatedattheEarthingBusBar.
Appropriatecablelugs/cablesocketsmustbeusedforterminatingtheL1,L2,L3,NandEconnectionsonthe
busbarsofboththeboards.Thesizesofthecablesmustbechosentomatchwiththeratingofthecircuitbreaker
/fuseratingsasmentionedabove.
Circuitbreakers/fusesmustbeprovidedattheoutgoingandincomingsidesofeachofthebusbarsofeachBDB/
SDB/DB/FDBboxes.
1.3.14 Conduits,Channels,Cables,ConductorsandrelatedAccessories
Conduits,Cables,ConductorsandAccessoriesareimportantpartsofanelectricaldistributioninstallation.
1.3.14.1 ConduitsandConduitFittings
837
Part8
BuildingServices
Cables of an electrical distribution installation are drawn through Electrical Conduits. For the installation of
Conduits various types of Conduit Fittings are needed. At present, two types of conduits are used e.g., (i) PVC
Conduits and (ii) Metal Conduits. Of these, due to the availability ofgood quality PVC pipe and for the ease of
installation,PVCConduitsarewidelyused.
1.3.14.1.1 PVCConduits
PVCconduitsandconduitfittingsshallbeofheavywallwatergradetype.Allbendsshallbelargeradiusbends
formedbyheatorbymechanicalbendingmachine.Thecrosssectionoftheconduitshallremaincircularatthe
bendandtheinternaldiametershallnotbereducedduetobending.PVCpipefittingsshallbesealedwithPVC
solventcementoradhesiveforPVCofapprovedquality.
Conduitsinstalledinfloors,ifinstalled,shallhaveaslopeofat least1:1000towardsfloormountedpullbox or
cableduct.
Conduitsplacedconcealedinsiderooforinwallmusthave20SWGGIpullwiresplacedduringlayingofthepipes
forpullingthecableslater.
Water grade PVC conduits must be used for both concealed and surface wiring. Water grade PVC conduits of
differentdiametersshallbeusedaspernecessity.
AppropriatehighgradebendsandcircularboxesmustbeusedwiththePVCpipes.
18SWGmetalsheetmadeandsyntheticenamelpaintcoatedqualityboxesofmatchingsizesshallbeusedaspull
boxesandjunctionboxes.AppropriatepullboxcoversofeboniteorperspexsheetshallbefittedwithGImachine
screwandwasher.
ThePVCconduitsplacedconcealedinsiderooforinwallmusthave20SWGGIpullwiresplacedduringlayingof
thepipesforpullingthecableslater.
1.3.14.1.2 PVCChannels
PVCchannelsshouldbeusedonlyforextensionworkinanalreadyinstalledbuilding.Adesigndrawingshouldnot
show use of such wiring except inside a false ceiling. Even inside the false ceiling this item should be used for
lengths.ForlongdistancesPVCconduitsshouldbeused.HighqualityPVCchannelsofsufficientthicknessshould
beusedandfixedinaneatmanner.ForlargenumberofcablesandforthickcablesPVCchannelsshouldnotbe
used.
1.3.14.1.3 PVCFlexiblepipes/Conduits
PVCflexibleconduitsshallbeusedwithsurfacewiringonlyandonlyinplaceswherePVCbendscannotbeused.
ExceptspecialcircumstancesflexiblePVCconduitsshallnotbeused.
1.3.14.1.4 Metal/SteelConduits
GI Steel Conduits shall be made using at least 16 SWG sheet. The conduits shall have seamless joint along the
length and must be suitable for making bends. No projections are allowed inside the conduits. Metal conduits
mustbethreadedforendtoendjointsusingsockets.Incaseofnecessity,threadswillbecutattheendofshort
pieces.Sharpedgesattheendsmustbeproperlytreatedso thatcableinjurydoesnot takeplaceduringcable
pulling.
1.3.14.1.5 PullBoxes
Pullboxes/Jointboxesmustbeplacedclosedtotheceilingwhereconduitsfromtheceilingaregoingdownward
towardaswitchboxoraregoingtowardasocketboxoraregoingtowardaBDB/SDB/DB/FDB.
Pull boxes are extremely essential for pulling the cables without injuring the cables and thus should not be
avoidedunderanycircumstances.Thesearealsoessentialforfuturemaintenanceandextensionwork.
Pullboxes/Jointboxesmustbeplacedintheceilingofoffice/factorybuildingwhereconduitsarerunningovera
longdistancebetweentwowalls(terminalpoints)andwherefixedwallsarenotavailableandalsowhereheavy
beamsareused.Incaseofbigcrosssectionbeamspullboxes/jointboxesshallbeplacedclosedtothebeams.
Pull boxes /Joint boxes mustbe madewith18 SWGGIsheetorwith 18 SWG MSsheetbut coatedwithtwo
coatsofGreySyntheticEnamelpaint.
CoversofPullboxesshouldbeeboniteorPerspexsheetofnotlessthan1/8inchthickness.
838
Vol.3
Chapter1
1.3.14.1.6 MetalBoxesforSwitchBoards
MetalBoxesforSwitchBoardsmustbemadewith18SWGGIsheetorwith18SWGMSsheetbutcoatedwith
twocoatsofGreySyntheticEnamelpaint.ASwitchBoardMetalBoxmusthaveasmallCopper/Brassearthing
busbarforterminatingtheECCs.
1.3.14.1.7 SwitchesforoperatingLightandFanpoints
SwitchesforoperatingLightandFanpointsmustbeof5Arating.TheseswitchesareusuallySPSTtype.However,
forspecialapplicationslikestairsandsomeotherplacesthesemaybeSPDTtype.
SwitchesforoperatingLightandFanpointsmaybeofGangtypeormaybeisolatedtype.Theisolatedtypesare
to be mounted on an ebonite top plate which is again fitted on the above mentioned Metal boxes for Switch
Boards.
1.3.14.1.8 MountingRegulatorsofCeilingFans
MetalBoxesforMountingInductorRegulatorsofCeilingFansmustbemadewith18SWGGIsheetorwith18
SWGMSsheetbutcoatedwithtwocoatsofGreySyntheticEnamelpaint.AMetalBoxesforMountingRegulators
ofCeilingFansmusthaveasmallCopper/BrassearthingbusbarforterminatingtheECCs.
However,suchregulatorsmaybeplacedinsidethe18SWGGIsheetorMSsheetmadeMetalBoxesforSwitch
Boards.InsuchacasearrangementsmustbemadesothatthePVCinsulatedpointandcircuitwiringcablesand
their joints inside the switch board do not touch a regulator. This may be done by appropriately dressing the
cablesandfasteningthecablesbyusingpolymercablefasteners.
1.3.14.2 CablesandConductors
Forapplicationinbuildingwiring,PVCinsulatedstrandedcablesshallbeusedforLiveandNeutralWiresforsingle
phase and3lines (L1, L2, L3) and one neutral for 3phase. For ECC also PVC insulated stranded cables shall be
used.Asaresult,useofbareconductorsisnonexistent.
1.3.14.2.1 Cables
ConductorsofaPVCinsulatedcable,thinorthick,shallbecopper.CablecontainingAluminumconductorsmaybe
usedforthickcableofsizemorethan16mm2.
Cables for power and lighting circuits shall be of adequate size to carry the designed circuit load without
exceeding the permissible thermal limits for the insulation. The voltage drop shall also be within the specified
limitof2.5percentfromadistributionpointuptotheirfarthestendoftheloadpoint.
Table8.1.22RecommendedSizesofCopperconductorsinaCable
Cablesize
2
1mm
1.5mm2
2
2.5mm
2
4mm
6mm2
10mm2
2
16mm
2
25mm
35mm2
50mm2
2
70mm
2
95mm
120mm2
2
150mm
2
185mm
240mm2
839
Part8
BuildingServices
Cablesize
300mm2
2
400mm
2
500mm
630mm2
800mm2
2
1000mm
Forfinalcircuit/subcircuitandforLight/fanpointwiringthecablenominalcrosssectionofthecableshallnot
belessthan1.5mm2forcopperconductors.
Standard copper conductor sizes of cables which should be used for Electrical Installations / Distribution in
buildingsaregivenbelow.Conductorsofsizesotherthanthesizeslistedbelowarenotrecommended.
1.3.14.2.2 Phaseandneutralcablesshallbeofthesamesize
Inthewiringofthesubcircuit/circuitandallothercircuitsinsideabuildingthePhasecableandtheneutralcable
shallbeofthesamesize.
1.3.14.2.3 FlexibleCables/FlexibleCords
The minimum crosssectional area of conductors of flexible cables / flexible cords shall be 0.5mm2 for copper
conductors. Flexible cable or cords shall not be used as fixed wiring unless contained in an enclosureaffording
mechanicalprotection.
Flexible cables / flexible cords may be used for connections to portable equipment. For the purpose of this
regulation an electric cooker of rated input exceeding 3 kW is not considered to be portable. The flexible cord
shallbeofsufficientlengthsoastoavoidundueriskofdamagetotheoutlet,cordorequipmentandofbeinga
hazardtopersonnel.
1.3.14.2.4 TreatmentofCableEnds/CableTerminations
All stranded conductors must be provided with cable sockets / cable lugs of appropriate size fitted using
appropriatehandpresstoolorhandcrimptoolorhydraulicpresstooldependingonthesizeofthecable.Thisis
necessaryforterminationofthecableendsonbusbars.
1.3.14.2.5 JointingofCablesinwiring
CablejointsforthePVCinsulatedcablesusedincircuitwiring(thincables)aretobemadethroughporcelain/PVC
connectorswithPIBtapewoundaroundtheconnectorbeforeplacingthecableinsidetheboxjoint/pullbox.
1.3.15 ConduitsthroughtheBuildingExpansionJoints
Conduitsshallnotnormallybeallowedtocrossexpansionjointsinabuilding.Wheresuchcrossingisfoundtobe
unavoidable, special care must be taken to ensure that the conduit runs and wiring are not in any way put to
strainorarenotdamagedduetoexpansion/contractionofthebuildingstructure.InunavoidablesituationsPVC
conduitsthroughanoversizeFlexiblePVCconduitsmaybeusedwithpullboxesonbothsidesoftheexpansion
joints.
1.3.16 TypesofElectricalWiringforExteriorLightingandotherexteriorpurposes
1.3.16.1 ElectricalWiringforGardenLighting
ForgardenlightingPVCinsulatedPVCsheathedundergroundcablesshallbeused.Forprotectionpurposethese
may be drawn through PVC pipe of appropriate dimension so that adequate clearance remains for the ease of
pulling.Ingeneral,no junctionofcablesshall be provided in underground level.However,incaseofnecessity,
metalsleevecableferrulejointsusingCrimpToolorhydraulicpressandheatshrinkinsulatedsleeveshallbeused
ontop.
1.3.16.2 ElectricalWiringforStreetLighting
840
Vol.3
Chapter1
ForstreetlightingPVCinsulatedPVCsheathedundergroundcablesshallbeused.Forprotectionpurposethese
may be drawn through PVC pipe of appropriate dimension so that adequate clearanceremains for the ease of
pulling.Ingeneral, nojunction of cables shallbeprovidedinunderground level.However, in case of necessity,
metalsleevecableferrulejointsusingCrimpToolorhydraulicpressandheatshrinkinsulatedsleeveshallbeused
ontop.Joiningthecablesatthebottomofastreetpolemustbedoneinsideametaljointboxlocatedsufficiently
abovethestreetlevelsothatwatercannotreachtheboxevenduringtheworstrain/floodsituation.
1.3.16.3 ElectricalWiringforBoundaryLight
For boundary lighting PVC insulated PVC sheathed underground cables shall be used. For protection purpose
thesemaybedrawnthroughPVCpipeofappropriatedimensionsothatadequateclearanceremainsfortheease
ofpulling.Ingeneral,nojunctionofcablesshallbeprovidedinundergroundlevel.However,incaseofnecessity,
metalsleeveorcableferrulejointsusingCrimpToolorhydraulicpressandheatshrinkinsulatedsleeveshallbe
used on top. However, for the portion of the cable running concealed through a wall, PVC insulated cables
throughPVCconduitsmaybeused.
1.3.17 Branch Distribution Boards, Subdistribution Boards, Distribution Boards, FDBs

andMDBs
1.3.17.1 Enclosure/Box
Enclosures for subdistribution boards located inside the building shall be dustproof and verminproof using
sheetsteelfabricationofaminimumthicknessof20SWG.Theboardsshallbesafeinoperationandsafeagainst
spreadoffireduetoshortcircuit.
1.3.17.2 SizeoftheEnclosureofaBDB/SDB/DB/FDB/MDB
Table 8.1.23 provides a guidance of sizes of enclosures for subdistribution boards containing miniature circuit
breakersorfuses.However,thesizewilldependonthenumberandsizeofthecircuitbreakersorthefusesthe
numberofoutgoingcablesandtheirsizes,thesizeofthebusbarsandthetypeofinsulatorsusedforthebusbars.
Table8.1.23RecommendedEnclosureSizesforMCB'sandFuses
Dimensions(mm)
No.ofMCB'sorFuses
Height
Width
Depth
350
390
120
upto12
480
390
120
upto24
610
390
120
upto36
740
390
120
upto48
1.3.17.3 Location
ASubdistributionboardshallbelocatedascloseaspossibletotheelectricalloadcentreforthatSDB.Thisisalso
applicablefordeterminingthelocationsofFDBs,DBandBDBs.Theseboardsshallneverbelocatedonawater
soakedordampwall.
1.3.17.4 WiringofSubdistributionBoards
(a) Inwiringasubdistributionboard,totalloadoftheconsumingdevicesshallbedistributed,asfaraspossible,
evenlybetweenthenumberofwaysoftheboard,leavingthespareway(s)forfutureextension.
(b) Allconnectionsbetweenpiecesofapparatusorbetweenapparatusandterminalsonaboardshallbeneatly
arrangedinadefinitesequence,followingthearrangementsoftheapparatusmountedthereon,avoiding
unnecessarycrossings.
(c) Cablesshallbeconnectedtoterminalsonlybysolderedorweldedlugs,unlesstheterminalsareofsuchform
thatitispossibletosecurelyclampthemwithoutcuttingawaythecablestrands.
1.3.18 ElectricalServicesShafts,BusDucts,L.T.RiserCablesandL.T.BusbarTrunking
1.3.18.1 VerticalServiceShaftforElectricalRisers
841
Part8
BuildingServices
Forbuildingsoversixstoreyor20mhighthereshall,ingeneral,beaminimumofoneverticalelectricalservice
shaftof200mmx400mmsizeforevery1500m2floorarea.Theelectricalserviceshaftshallexclusivelybeused
forthefollowingpurposes:
Electricsupplyfeedercablesorrisermains,
BusbarTrunking,
telephonecables,
DataCables,
firealarmcables,
CCTVcables,
Othersignalcables,
Areafuse/circuitbreakers,
FloorDistributionboard/subdistributionboardsforindividualfloors.
Theconstructionofthefloorsoftheductareashallbeconstructedinsuchawaysothattheemptyspaceafter
puttingthecables/busartrunking/pipes/conduitsinpositiontheremainingopenspaceisfilledupwithRCC
slab(s)oranyothernoninflammablematerialsothatfireormoltenPVCcannotfallfromonefloortothenext
lowerfloor(s).Forthispurposearrangementsneedtobemadeduringthemainfloorcasting.
Freeandeasyaccesstotheelectricalshaftroomineachfloormustbeavailableforoperation,maintenanceand
emergencyshutdowns.
Verticalcablesotherthanelectricalcablesshallbeplacedatasufficientdistancefromthenearestelectricalcable.
Averticalseparatingbrickwallbetweenelectricalandnonelectricalwallispreferable.
VerticalServiceShaftforElectricalRisersasmentionedabovemustnotbeplacedadjacenttotheSanitaryShafts.
They should be placed at significant separation in order to ensure that the Vertical Service Shaft for Electrical
Risersremainsabsolutelydry.
1.3.18.2 L.T.RiserMainCables
ForlowrisebuildingRiserMainCableswillservetobringL.T.connectiontotheFloorDistributionBoards(FDBs)
ofeachfloorfromtheMainDistributionBoard.Fora5storiedbuildingorlesserhavingafloorspaceoflessthan
600m2ineachfloortherisercablesmaybePVCinsulatedcablesthroughPVCorGIpipes.
Forbringing the riser maincables a common verticalwall and holes orslots in thefloors mustbegivenbythe
buildingconstructionpeople.
However, forlargerfloor area orfor higherbuildingsPVC insulatedPVCsheathed underground cables mustbe
usedwithprotectionandspacing.
For more than 9 storied building Busbar preferably sandwiched copper Busbar. Trunking should be used for
safetyreasons.
PVCinsulatedPVCSheathedundergroundcablesmustbeusedasRiserMainCables.Thesecablesshallbeplaced
inorpulledthroughaPVCpipeofhigherdiametersothatthecablecanbeeasilypulledthroughit.ThePVCpipes
must be fixed vertically in a straight line on the wall of the shaft using appropriate saddles. However, in some
casesPVCinsulatedPVCSheathedundergroundcablesmaybedirectlyfixedonthewallusingappropriatesaddles
with37mmspacingbetweentwoadjacentcables.SheetmetalmadeJointBoxes(withebonitecoverplates)must
beplacedateachfloortappingpoint.
Thecableworkshallbedoneneatlysothatnosuspendedcablesareseenaroundtheplaceandnosuspended
flexiblepipesareseen.
Eachrisercablemusthaveappropriatefuseorcircuitbreakerprotectionatthesourcebusburjunctionand
alsoatthetapoffpoint.
1.3.18.3 L.T.BusbarTrunking
Forhighrisebuildings,LT(0.4KVTP&N)busbartrunkingsytemisusedinsteadofrisermaincablestominimize
space in the vertical electrical shaft, to minimize the risk of spreading of fire from one floor to another due to
electricalshortcircuitinoneofthecablesorsparks,tohaveaneatdistributionsystem.MostpartoftheBusbar
Trunking are installed vertically. The horizontal portion of the Busbar Trunking usually connects the vertical
portionwiththeSubstationLTpanel.
842
Vol.3
Chapter1
a) BusbarTrunkingarespeciallyusefultominimizevoltagedroponaccountofhighamperageintermittent
loads. The conductors supported by insulators inside the busbar trunking shall be copper of solid
rectangular crosssection. The copper bars are insulated. A busbar trunking system shall be laid with
minimumnumberofbendsfordistributionsystem.Typicalratingoffeederbusbartrunkingfor3phase
3wire or 3phase 4wire system shall range from 200 amperes to 3000 amperes although lower
amperesarenotimpossible.
b) Horizontalbusbartrunkingofsuitablesizemaybeprovidedalongtheroadsforagroupofbuildingstobe
fed by a single substation but with heavy weather protection and covered with appropriate weather
resistant water proof material. Extreme care need to be taken in these cases for protection against
moisture,waterandoutsideweather.
c) BusbarTrunkingmustnotbeplacedinplaceswhichisevenslightlyexposedtoweather/moisture/spray
orsprinkleofwater.
1.3.18.4 L.T.Busducts
Incertainapplications,especiallyinfactorylightingandfactorypowerdistributionoflargeareafactoriesBusducts
areused.Inmostcases,theseBusductsaresuspendedfromceiling.Busductsoffersafe,reliable,neatdistribution
system in these cases. The choice will depend on the floor area, type of machineries, type of jobs and other
factors.
Appropriate circuit protection using adequate number of circuit breakers of appropriate rating are needed. In
mostcasesthesebusductsarehorizontallymounted/suspended.Thebusbarsshallbecopper.Theratingshall
dependonthecurrentoneachsegmentandthecurrentcarriedbyeachsegment.
1.3.19 L.T.MainIncomingCableandServiceConnection
1.3.19.1 OverheadserviceconnectiontoabuildingshallbeachievedwithPVCinsulatedCableswithGIsupport
wire(similartocateneray)orcatenarywire(mainlyforsinglephaseconsumers).Theoverheadservice
connectionshallbeledintobuildingsviaroofpolesorservicemastsmadeofGIpipeatleast38mmin
diameterhavingagooseneckbendatthetopandinstalledontheouterwall.Thisisonechoice.The
alternativeistohaveundergroundcableconnection.
1.3.19.2 UndergroundCablesforusingasMainIncomingCable
Underground PVC insulated PVC sheathed water proof cables shall be placed in underground cable trench or
pulled through a PVC pipe of higher diameter placed in a cable trench so that the cable can be easily pulled
throughit.PVCinsulatedstrandedannealedcopperECCcablesmatchingwiththemaincablesizeshallrunalong
theMainincomingcablewithterminationattheearthingbusbaratbothend.
Each of the PVC pipes must have 18 SWG GI pull wires placed during laying of the pipes for pulling the cables
later.
1.3.19.3 JointingofundergroundCablesandMainIncomingCables
For main incoming thick underground cables joints are strongly discouraged and should be avoided as far as
possible.
However, for unavoidable cases joints must be made through sleeve or ferrule of appropriately matched size
fitted with hydraulic press following neat processing of the cable ends. Appropriate fusible heat shrink cover
mustbeusedoversuchjunction.
Forthickcablesrunningthroughconduitsasverticalrisers,thesejointsmustbeputinsidemetaljoint/pullboxes
withcovers.
1.3.19.4 FlameproofenclosureofIncomingcablesandrisercables
Special forms of construction, such as flame proof enclosures, shall be adopted where risk of fire or explosion
existsnearaplacewherethickincomingcableorrisercablesareplaced.
1.3.19.5 Underground service cables shall be laid in conformity with the requirements of Sec 1.3.29 titled
LayingofLTundergroundCables.
843
Part8
BuildingServices
1.3.19.6 Power and telecommunication or antenna cables must be laid separately maintaining sufficient
distance.
1.3.19.7 Fire alarm and emergency lighting circuits shall be segregated from all other cables and from each
other in accordance with BS 5839 and BS 5266. Telecommunication circuits shall be segregated in
accordancewithBS6701asappropriate.
1.3.19.8 Proximitytononelectricalservices
Whereawiringsystemislocatedincloseproximitytoanonelectricalserviceboththefollowingconditionsshall
bemet:
thewiringsystem shall besuitably protected against thehazardslikelyto arisefrom thepresenceof the other
serviceinnormaluse,andappropriateprotectionagainstindirectcontactshallbetaken.
1.3.19.9 Awiringsystemshallnotbeinstalledinthevicinityofaservicewhichproducesheat,smokeorfume
likelytobedetrimentaltothewiring,unlessprotectedfromharmfuleffectsbyshieldingarrangedsoas
nottoaffectthedissipationofheatfromthewiring.
1.3.19.10 Whereawiringsystemisroutednearaserviceliabletocausecondensation(suchaswater,steamor
gasservices)precautionsshallbetakentoprotectthewiringsystemfromdeleteriouseffects.
1.3.19.11 Nocableshallberuninalift(orhoist)shaftunlessitformspartoftheliftinstallationasdefinedinBS
5655.
1.3.20 DesignforElectricalWiring
DesignofElectricalwiringmustbedonefollowingthecodesprovidedinthisdocument.DetailedDesigndrawings
mustbepreparedbyadesignerforcompleteexecutionoftheelectricalworksmentionedinthisdocumentand
anyothernewitemsarisingbecauseoftheevolutionofnewtechnologiesinthenearfuture.
Typically, there must be conduit layout drawing(s) indicating the conduit layouts, the locations of the switch
boards,locationsofthesockets,locationsoftheBDBs,locationsoftheSDBs,locationsoftheDBs,locationsofthe
FDBs,locationoftheMDB,locationoftheMainincomingcable.
AdistributiondiagramoftheBDBs,SDBsuptoMDBsasapplicableindicatingtheampereratingoftheincoming
MCB/MCCB,interlinkingcablesizesandtheECCsmustbepresented.
DetailedCircuitDiagramsofthecircuitsandtheBDBs,SDBsMDBsasapplicablemustbepresented.
Detaileddrawingsofearthingandearthinspectionpitsandanyothercomplicatedpartsmustbepresented.The
contractorshallprepareasbuiltdrawingsaftercompletingaproject.
1.3.20.1 DesignforElectricalWiringinBedroomsandDrawingRooms
Thelocationofaswitchboardmustbeneartheentrancedoorofabedroomlikeanyotherroom.Thelocationof
thewallmountedlightfittingsmustbechosenbasedonthepossiblelocationsoffurniturewhichisalsoneededin
otherrooms.Sufficientnumberof3pin13Aswitchedshutteredflatpinsocketsmustbeprovidedinabedroom.
ThesameideasareapplicableforaLivingroom.
Designmustbemadeinsuchawaythatsufficientclearance(space)isleftinsidetheconcealedconduits(i)forthe
easeofpullingthecablesandalsoforaddingfewmorecablesincaseofnecessityduringfuturemodification.
ForBedroomsandDrawingRoomstheLight+Fansubcircuitsforshallnotbeofmorethan5Arating.
Generally, Single core PVC insulated Stranded Electrolytic Annealed Copper Cables shall be used for wiring by
usingtheconcealedwiringtechniqueortheothertwomethodsmentionedinthewiringsection.
1.3.20.2 Design for Electrical Wiring in a Kitchen especially providing 3 pin sockets near Kitchen sink (the
clearance).
Thesensitiveiteminakitchenisplacing3pin13Aswitchedshutteredflatpinsocketsonwallofthekitchenside
tablenearthewall.Gooddistancemustbemaintainedbetweenthekitchenwatertapandthesocket.TheSocket
fortheRefrigerator(ifany)shallalsobea3pin13Aswitchedshutteredflatpinsocket,andmaybeplacedatthe
844
Vol.3
Chapter1
samelevelastheothersocket.Fortheeaseofoperationa3pin13Aswitchedshutteredflatpinsocketforthis
purpose may be placed at the bottom level height of a switch board provided this is acceptable in terms of
aesthetics.
ForKitchens,theLight+Fansubcircuitsforshallnotbeofmorethan5Arating.
1.3.20.3 SwitchesforToiletsandBathRooms
Switches for toilet lights and toilet ventilating fansmust be placed outside the toilets adjacent to the entrance
doorbutmustnotbeplacedinsidetheToilet.ThesameruleshouldbefollowedforBathRooms.Usingceiling
mountedchordswitchattheentrancepathofthedoorofatoiletisagoodideaforsmalltoiletsattachedtobed
rooms.Ceilingmountedchordswitchesmaybeusedwithachordsuspendedfromtheceilingneartheopeningof
thedoor
1.3.20.4
DesignforElectricalWiringinOfficeRooms
Thelocationofaswitchboardmustbeneartheentrancedoorofanofficeroom.Thelocationofthelightfittings
mustbechosenbasedonthepossiblelocationsofworktable,furniture.Sufficientnumberof3pin13Aswitched
shutteredflatpinsocketsmustbeprovidedineachofficeroom.Inthisregardspecialconsiderationneedtobe
givenonthepossiblelocationofcomputersandotherofficeequipment.
Sufficientconduitsandcablesmustbeleftforfuturemodificationasoftenrearrangementoftablesneedtobe
made.
Generally, Single core PVC insulated Stranded Electrolytic Annealed Copper Cables shall be used for wiring by
usingtheconcealedwiringtechniqueortheothertwomethodsmentionedinthewiringsection.
Incaseofspecialrequirements,PVCinsulatedPVCsheathedStrandedElectrolyticAnnealedCopperCablesmay
beusedforwiringthroughconduitsorothermethods.
ForOfficesthesubcircuitsforshallnotbeofmorethan5Arating.
1.3.21 TemporaryElectricalConnectionforaBuildingConstructionSite
Temporaryconnectionsareneededforabuildingconstructionsite.AFuseDistributionboardcontainingincoming
cutoutfuse,outgoingcutoutfusesplusbusbarsoraDistributionboardscontainingincomingcircuitbreakers,
outgoingcircuitbreakersplusbusbarsofappropriateratingmustbeinstalledforsuchconnections.Suchboards
shallbeinstalledinadryplacesothatrainwaterorwaterscomingfromaconstructionzonecannotreachsuch
boards.
1.3.22 TemporaryElectricalConnectionforanoutdoorconcert
Temporaryconnectionsareneededforanoutdoorconcertstageforspeciallighting,forvariousdisplaysystems,
forhighpoweraudiosystems.AFuseDistributionboardcontainingincomingcutoutfuse,outgoingcutoutfuses
plusbusbarsoraDistributionboardcontainingincomingcircuitbreakers,outgoingcircuitbreakersplusbusbars
ofappropriateratingmustbeinstalledforsuchconnections.Suchboardsshallbeinstalledinadryplaceandshall
bemountedatasafeheightabovegroundsothatrainwaterorwaterscomingfromanywherecannotreachsuch
boards.Suchboardsshallnotbeinstallednearflammablematerials.
Cablesofappropriatetypesandappropriateratingsmustbeusedforsuchapplications.
Appropriatetypeofsockets,preferablyflat3pinswitchedshuttered13Asocketsshouldbeusedfordistribution.
1.3.23 11KV/0.4KVElectricalSubstationinaBuilding
1.3.23.1 General
According to the rule of the distribution companies of Bangladesh, 11KV/ 0.4KV Electrical substations shall be
required for a building if the load requirement of the building exceeds 50KW. In most cases, substations are
required for Multistoried residential, Multistoried Commercial buildings, Multistoried Office building and
Industries.
Todeterminetheratingofthesubstationrequired,aloadfactorofatleast80%shallbeappliedtotheestimated
loadofthebuilding.Thefutureexpansionrequirementsshoulddefinitelybetakenintoconsideration.
1.3.23.2 LocationofanElectricalSubstation
845
Part8
BuildingServices
Inamultistoriedbuilding,thesubstationshallpreferablybeinstalledonthelowestfloorlevel,butdirectaccess
fromthestreetforinstallationorremovaloftheequipmentshallbeprovided.Thefloorlevelofthesubstationor
switchroomshallbeabovethehighestfloodlevelofthelocality.Suitablearrangementsshouldexisttoprevent
theentranceofstormorfloodwaterintothesubstationarea.
The location of a substation will depend on (i) the feed point of the 11 KV Supply Authority line and (ii) the
locationoftheLTverticalrisercables.
Itispreferabletolocatetheairconditioningplantroom(ifany)adjacenttotheelectricalsubstationinsuchaway
that the distance from the controlling switchboard of the airconditioning plant rooms and corresponding
switchesintheelectricalsubstationarekeptminimum.
Incaseofabuildingcomplex,oragroupofbuildingsbelongingtothesameorganization,thesubstationshould
preferablybelocatedina separatebuildingandshouldbeadjacenttothegeneratorroom,ifany.Locationof
substationinthebasementfloorandonthefloorsabovegroundfloorlevel(GFL)preferablybeavoided.IfSub
Station it to be installed on the basement floor or the floors above ground floor level (GFL) special safety
measuresistobetakenbytheuserorowner.Measuresareasfollows:
(i)
No objection certificate stating the SubStation safe by the Fire Service and Civil Defense
Department.
(ii)
Certification of the building consultant stating safe, Proper ventilation, Easy entrance and exit and
safeloadbearingcapacityofthefloorsabovethegroundfloorlevel(GFL).
(iii)
ProperundertakingoftheSubStationuserorownerasthecasemaybe,Statingsafetyandliability
willbeensuredbythem.
In case the electric substation has to be located within the main building itself for unavoidable reasons, it
should be located on ground floor or Basement floor or the floors above the ground floor (GFL) with easy
accessfromoutside.
1.3.23.3 Height,Area,FloorLevelandotherrequirementsofaSubstationRoom
a) The minimum height of a substation room should be 3.0m to 3.6m depending upon the size of the
transformer.
b) The minimum area required for substation and transformer room for different capacities are given in
Table8.1.24.
c) Fortransformershavinglargeoilcontent(morethan2000litres),soakpitsaretobeprovided.
The areas given in Table 8.1.24 hold good if they are provided with windows and independent access doors in
accordancewithlocalregulations.
Alltheroomsshallhavesignificantventilation.Specialcareshouldbetakentoventilatethetransformerrooms
andwherenecessarylouversatlowerlevelandexhaustfansathigherlevelshallbeprovidedatsuitablelocations
insuchawaythatcrossventilationismaintained.Fansshouldbeprovidedsothatthetransformergetsairsupply
fromthefans.
Thefloorlevelofthesubstationshouldbehigh.Arrangementshallbemadetopreventstormwaterenteringthe
transformerandswitchroomsthroughthesoakpits,iffloorlevelofthesubstationislow.
SubStationofhighervoltagemayalsobeconsideredtothebasementfloorhavingproper&safebuildingdesign.
Table8.1.24AreaRequiredforTransformerandRecommendedMinimumAreaforSubstationofDifferentCapacities
846
Capacityof
Transformer
TotalSubstationArea(withHT,LTPanels&TransformerRoom
Transformer
Area
butwithoutGenerators)
(kVA)
(m2)
(m2)
1x150
12
45
1x250
13
48
2x250
26
100
1x400
13
48
2x400
30
100
3x400
40
135
Vol.3
Chapter1
2x630
26
100
3x630
40
190
2x1000
40
180
3x1000
45
220
1.3.23.4 11KV/0.4KVDistributionTransformerfortheSubstationofaBuilding
An11KV/0.4KVindoordistributionTransformerisamajorpartofanindoorsubstation.TheseSubstationsmay
beinstalledinsidethebuildingitselformaybehousedinaseparatebuildingadjacenttothebuilding.
Forsmalltomoderatepowerratingupto2MWtwotypesofindoortransformershavebeenwidelyusedinrecent
years.Theseare(i)OilTypeNaturalCooledtransformerand(ii)CastResinDryTypeNaturalCooledtransformers.
InmostcasesOilTypeNaturalCooledtransformermaybeusedforsubstationsifadequatespaceisavailableto
accommodatethetransformer.
CastResinDryTypeNaturalCooledtransformersshouldbeused(i)inplaceswherestringentprotectionagainst
spreadoffireisneededand(ii)inplaceswherespacesavingisofutmostimportance.
1.3.23.4.1 ChoiceofOiltypeorDrytypetransformers
Drytypetransformershouldbeinstalledwhereriskofspreadingoffireishighandwhereflammablematerialsare
tobekeptaroundthesubstation.
ForHospitalbuildings,MultistoriedShoppingCentersDrytypetransformersshouldbeusedtoforminimizingfire
risks.
An Industrial buildings containing inflammable materials, Chemical and having the substation in the same
buildingDrytypetransformersshouldbeusedforminimizingfirerisks.
1.3.23.5 TypeofconnectionbetweenaSubstationTransformeranditsLTpanel
ConnectionbetweenaSubstationTransformeranditsLTpanelcanbeestablisheda)byusingNYYunderground
LTCablesorb)byusingCeilingSuspendedBusbarTrunking.Forsmallsizetransformersthefirstmethodshould
be used although there is no restriction in using the second method. However, for big substations the second
methodissaferandatthesametimegivesaneatsolution.
1.3.23.6 VentilationofaSubstation
In an Electrical Substation significant amount of forced ventilation is very much needed apart from natural
ventilation.ExhaustFans(minimum18dia)mustbeprovidedinsufficientnumbersonallsidesofthesubstation
above the lintel level. Grill fitted Windows having window panes must be provided on all sides for natural
ventilation.Thewindowsmusthavesunshedstoensurethatnorainwatercancomeinsidethesubstation.
If due to space constraint or due to any other difficulties, sufficient number of windows and ventilating fans
cannotbeinstalled,highvelocityforcedventilationusingductsmustbeprovided.
1.3.23.7 LayoutofaSubstation
In general, the Substation HT to LT Transformer shall be placed in one corner of the room so that the HT side
remainsawayfromthepassageofthepersons.
TheHTMeteringpanelshallbelocatedneartheexteriorofthesubstationroomneartheexitgateandalsoshall
beconvenientfortheHTcableentry.
TheHTPanelshallbelocatedneartheexterior,justafteroradjacenttotheHTpanel.
LTPanelshallremainatasufficientdistancefromtheTransformerbutnottoofarawayfromtheTransformer.On
theotherhand,thelocationoftheLTpanelshouldsuchthattherisermaincablecanhavetheirwayupwardor
outwardwithinveryshortdistance.
Inallocatingtheareaswithinasubstation,itistobenotedthattheflowofelectricpowerisfromsupplycompany
networktoHTroom,thentotransformerandfinallytothelowvoltageswitchgearroom.Thelayoutoftherooms
shallbeinaccordancewiththisflow.
Alltheroomsshallhavesignificantventilation.Specialcareshouldbetakentoventilatethetransformerrooms
andwherenecessarylouvresatlowerlevelandexhaustfansathigherlevelshallbeprovidedatsuitablelocations
847
Part8
BuildingServices
insuchawaythatcrossventilationismaintained.Ceilingfansmustbeprovidedsothatthetransformergetsair
supplyfromtheceilingfans.
1.3.24 StandbyPowerSupply
1.3.24.1 ProvisionforStandbyPowerSupply
Provisionshouldbemadeforstandbypowersupply,inbuildings,whereinterruptionofelectricalpowersupply
wouldcausesignificantdiscomfort,resultininterruptionofactivities,majorproductionloss,causehazardtolife
andpropertyandcausepanic.TheStandbyPowerSupplymaybeaPetrolEngineorDieselEngineorGasEngine
GeneratororanIPSoraUPS.
1.3.24.2 CapacityofaStandbyGeneratingSet
The capacity of standby generating set shall be chosen on the basis of essential light load, essential air
conditioningload,essentialequipmentloadandessentialservicesload,essentiallift(s),oneorallwaterpumps
andotherloadsrequiredasessentialload.Table8.1.25showsminimumgeneratorroomarearequirementsfor
differentsizesofgenerators.
1.3.24.3 TheGeneratorRoom
The generating set should preferably be housed in the substation building or should be placed adjacent to the
substationroomtoenabletransferofelectricalload(Changeover)withnegligiblevoltagedropaswellastoavoid
transfer of vibration and noise to the main building. The generator room should have significant amount of
ventilationandfittedwithanumberofceilingfans.Appropriatetypeandnumberoffirefightingequipmentmust
beinstalledinsidethegeneratorroom.Thegeneratorengineexhaustshouldbeappropriatelytakenoutof the
buildingandshouldpreferablybetakenoutthroughanyothersideexceptSouth.ThegeneratorOiltankshould
be place away from the control panel side. In case of gas engine generator extra precaution must be taken
regardingventilation,leakagetopreventexplosion.
1.3.24.4 ChangeoverSwitchofaStandbyGenerator
Astandbygenerator,ifneeded,istobeconnectedatthesupplyinputpointaftertheEnergymeterandafterthe
Main Incoming Switch or the Main Incoming Circuit Breaker, but through a Changeover Switch of appropriate
rating.Theratingofsuchaswitchshallbeatleast1.25timestheratingoftheMainIncomingCircuitBreaker.The
ChangeoverSwitchshallbeofsuchatypesothatwhenmovedtothemainsposition,thereisnochancethatthe
generatorwillbeconnectedandviceversa.
The Changeover Switch may be manual type with knife switch type switching or may be automatic type with
magneticcontactors.InboththecasestheChangeoverSwitchshallbeproperlymadesothatthereisnochance
oflooseconnectionorspark.
Thewiringforthispurposeshallbemadefollowingthestandardpracticesmentionedundertheheadingofwiring
usingcablesofappropriatesize.
Table8.1.25AreaRequirementsforStandbyGeneratorRoom
Capacity
Area
(kW)
(m2)
1x25
20
1x48
24
1x100
30
1x150
36
1x300
48
1x500
56
1.3.24.5 InstallationofanIPSoraUPS
ForsafetypurposesizeofaUPSshouldbekeptassmallaspossible.
For the installation of a 200 600 VA IPS a 5A circuit must be made with the light points and fan points of
differentroomstobebroughtunderthecontroloftheIPS.Thiscircuitmusthave3AFuseprotectionusingfuse
848
Vol.3
Chapter1
cutoutbox.Wiringandconnectionhastobemadefollowingthewiringrulesgiveninthewiringsectionsofthis
document.Cablesofappropriatesizemustbeusedforwiring.
For the installation of a 600 700 VA IPS a 5A circuit must be made with the light points and fan points of
differentroomstobebroughtunderthecontroloftheIPS.Thiscircuitmusthave5AFuseprotectionor5Acircuit
breakerprotection.Wiringandconnectionhastobemadefollowingthewiringrulesgiveninthewiringsections
ofthisdocument.Cablesofappropriatesizemustbeusedforwiring.
FortheinstallationofaIPSofhighercapacity,aBDBwithmultipleoutgoingcircuitseachnotexceeding5Ashall
be used with cutout fuse protectionat bothincoming and outgoing sides. Cables ofappropriate size must be
usedforwiringofeachcircuit.
Batterymaintenance(checkingwaterlevel,temperatureriseandtheconditionoftheterminals)shouldbedone
atleastevery15days.ConnectionoftheBatteryterminalsshouldbemadeproperlyandcheckedperiodicallyfor
looseconnectionanddepositionofsulphate.BatteryofanIPSmustbekeptinasafeplacesothatshortcircuit
betweenthebatteryterminalsdoesnotoccur.InflammablematerialsmustnotbekeptinthevicinityoftheIPSor
battery.
SafetyissuemustbetakenintoconsiderationinplacinganIPSinaroom.
SamepointsapplyfortheinstallationofanUPS.
1.3.24.6 InstallationofaSolarPhotovoltaicSystemontopofaBuilding
Buildingshouldbeprovidedwithsolarphotovoltaicsystem.ForinstallationSolarPhotovoltaicsystemnecessary
precautionneedtobetaken.Separatewiringandprotectionsystemmayalsobeensured.
Installationofsolarwaterheatersontherooftopsoftheresidentialandcommercialbuildings:Thebuildingsor
apartmentswherehotwaterwillberequiredandforthatpurposeinstallationofgeezersorelectrickettlesshould
be considered and use of solar water heaters instead of electric and gas water heaters should be made
mandatory.Flatplateheatcollectorsorvacuumtubesolarwaterheatersofvariouscapacitiesareavailableinthe
market.Thesedevicesarerelativelycheapanenvironmentfriendly.
TheintegralpartsofaconventionalSolarPhotovoltaicSystemare
a) SolarPhotovoltaicPanel(s)
b) BatteryChargeController
c) Inverter
d) CablesbetweentheSolarPhotovoltaicPanel(s)andtheBatteryChargeController
e) CablesbetweentheBatteryandtheBatteryChargeController
f)
CablesbetweentheInverterandtheDistributionBoard(DB/SDB/BDB)
g) Othercablesandaccessories.
FortheinstallationofaSolarPhotovoltaicSystemofhighercapacity,aDBwithmultipleoutgoingcircuitseachnot
exceeding5Ashallbeusedwithcutoutfuseprotectionatbothincomingandoutgoingside.CopperCablesof
appropriatesizemustbeusedforwiringofeachcircuit.
Batterymaintenance(checkingwaterlevel,temperatureriseandtheconditionoftheterminals)shouldbedone
atleastevery15days.ConnectionoftheBatteryterminalsshouldbemadeproperlyandcheckedperiodicallyfor
looseconnectionanddepositionofSulphate.
Batteries of a Solar Photovoltaic System must be kept in asafe place so that short circuit between the battery
terminals doesnot occur.Inflammable materialsmust not be kept in thevicinity of the IPSor battery.In most
cases forrooftop SolarPanels, thebatteryroomshall be placed insidearoof toproom withadequate natural
ventilationandforcedcoolingusingceilingfans.BecauseoftherooftoplocationoftheSolarpanels,theroom
temperatureisexpectedtobehigher.
SafetyissuemustbetakenintoconsiderationinplacingthebatteriesofaSolarPhotovoltaicSystem.
Foraresidentialflatsystembuilding,oneortwocircuitsforeachflatshallcomefromtheDBofthePhotoVoltaic
Source at roof top to each flat depending on the requirement. Connection to load in each flat will be done
throughachangeoverswitchforeachcircuit.
ForaCommercial/OfficeBuilding,oneortwocircuitsforeachoffice/OfficeareashallcomefromtheDBofthe
PhotoVoltaicSourceatrooftoptoeachflatdependingontherequirement.Connectiontoloadineachflatwill
bedonethroughachangeoverswitchforeachcircuit.
849
Part8
BuildingServices
Conduitbasedrisersystemmustcarefullybeinstalled,separatelyforthissystemonly,duringtheconstructionof
thebuildingtobringdownthecablesfromtherooftopDBroomuptoeachflat/office/officearea.Specialcare
mustbetakenduringinstallationsothatrainwatercanundernocircumstancesgetintotheconduitandcable
system.
1.3.24.7 InstallationofaSolarPhotovoltaicSystemontheexteriorGlassofaBuildinghavingLargeGlassarea
Facade
For semitransparent solar panels mounted on exterior glass of multistoried building similar process and
precautionsmentionedabovemustbefollowed.
1.3.25 ElectricalDistributionSystem
1.3.25.1 Design,selectionandChoiceofthetypeofConnection
a) In the planning and design of an electrical wiring installation, due consideration shall be given to
prevailing conditions. Advice of a knowledgeable and experienced electrical design engineer must be
soughtfromtheinitialstageuptothecompletionoftheinstallationwithaviewtohaveaninstallation
thatwillproveadequateforitsintendedpurpose,andwhichwillbesafeandwillbeefficient.
b) All electrical apparatus shall be suitable for the voltage and frequency of supply of this country
mentionedearlier.
c) Thenumberandtypesofconnectionrequirede.g.,singlephasetwowireACorthreephasefourwire
AC shall be assessed, both for the supply source and for the internal circuits needed within the
installation.
d) Thefollowingcharacteristicsofthesupplyshallbeascertained:
i.
nominalvoltage(s),
ii.
currentandfrequency,
iii. prospectiveshortcircuitcurrentattheoriginoftheinstallation,
iv. typeandratingoftheovercurrentprotectivedeviceactingattheoriginoftheinstallation,
v.
suitabilityfortherequirementsoftheinstallation,includingthemaximumdemand,
vi. expectedmaximumvalueoftheearthloopimpedanceofthatpartofthesystemexternaltothe
installation.
e) Incaseofconnectedloadsof50KWandabove,HT11KVthreephasesupplylinewithsubstationmustbe
installed because of the requirement of the distribution companies although the use of HT supply will
involve higher expenses due to installation of a distribution transformer, HT Metering Panel, HT Panel
andLTPanelattheconsumer'spremises.
Inthisrespect,therulesoftheelectricaldistributionauthoritieswillbetheultimatedecidingfactor.
1.3.25.2 EquipmentandAccessories
a) HighVoltageSwitchgear
Theselectionofthetypeofhighvoltageswitchgearforanyinstallationshouldconsiderthefollowing:
i.
voltageofthesupplysystem,
ii.
theprospectiveshortcircuitcurrentatthepointofsupply,
iii. thesizeandlayoutofelectricalinstallation,
iv. thesubstationroomavailable,and
v.
thetypesmachineriesoftheindustry(ifapplicable).
b) GuidelinesonVariousTypesofSwitchgearInstallation
i.
Banksofswitchgearsshallbesegregatedfromeachotherbymeansoffireresistantbarriersin
ordertopreventtheriskofdamagebyfireorexplosionarisingfromswitchfailure.Whereabus
sectionswitchisinstalled,itshallalsobesegregatedfromadjoiningbanksinthesameway.
ii.
In the case of duplicate or ring main supply, switches with interlocking arrangement shall be
providedtopreventsimultaneousswitchingoftwodifferentsupplysources.
c) LowVoltageSwitchgear
850
Vol.3
Chapter1
i.
Switchgearandfusegearmusthaveadequatebreakingcapacityinrelationtothecapacityofthe
transformers.
ii.
Isolation and protection of outgoing circuits forming the main distribution system may be
effected by means of circuit breakers, or fuses or switch fuse units mounted on the main
switchboard.Thechoicebetweenalternativetypesofequipmentwilltakethefollowingpoints
intoconsideration:
iii. Incertaininstallationssuppliedwithelectricpowerfromremotetransformersubstations,itmay
be necessary to protect main circuits with circuit breakers operated by earth leakage trips, in
ordertoensureeffectiveearthfaultprotection.
iv. Wherelargeelectricmotors,furnacesorotherheavyelectricalequipmentareinstalled,themain
circuits shall be protected by metal clad circuit breakers or conductors fitted with suitable
instantaneous and time delay overcurrent devices together with earth leakage and backup
protectionwherenecessary.
v.
In installations other than those mentioned above or where overloading of circuits may be
considered unlikely, HRC type fuses will normally afford adequate protection for main circuits
separatelyasrequired;thefusesshallbemountedinswitchfuseunitsorwithswitchesforming
partofthemainswitchboards.
vi. Whereitisnecessarytoprovidesuitableconnectionforpowerfactorimprovementcapacitorsat
thesubstationbus,suitablecapacitorsshallbeselectedinconsultationwiththecapacitorand
switchgearmanufacturerandnecessaryswitchgear/feedercircuitbreakershallbeprovidedfor
controllingthecapacitorbank(s).
1.3.26 Transformers
a) WheretwoormoretransformersaretobeinstalledinasubstationtosupplyanLTdistributionsystem,
thedistributionsystemshallbedividedintoseparatesectionseachofwhichshallnormallybefedfrom
onetransformeronlyunlesstheLTswitchgearhastherequisiteshortcircuitcapacity.
b) Provisionmay,however,bemadetointerconnectBusbarsectionsthroughbuscouplerstocaterforthe
failure or disconnection of one transformer which need to be executed with much care using locking
system.
c) The transformers, which at any time operate in parallel, shall be so selected as to share the load in
proportion to their respective ratings. Appropriate protection must be provided and appropriate
arrangementsneedtobemade.
d) Whenastepuptransformerisused,alinkedswitchshallbeprovidedfordisconnectingthetransformer
fromallpolesofthesupply,includingtheneutralconductor.
1.3.27 PrecautionsregardingRotatingMachines
a) All equipment including cables, of every circuit carrying the starting, accelerating and load currents of
motors,shallbesuitableforacurrentatleastequaltothefullloadcurrentratingofthemotor.Whenthe
motorisintendedforintermittentdutyandfrequentstoppingandstarting,accountshallbetakenofany
cumulativeeffectsofthestartingperiodsuponthetemperatureriseoftheequipmentofthecircuit.
b) Theratingofcircuitssupplyingtherotorsofslipringorcommutatorofamotororaninductionmotor
shallbesuitableforboththestartingandloadedconditions.
c) Every electric motor having a rating exceeding 0.376 kW shall be provided with control equipment
incorporatingmeansofprotectionagainstovercurrent.
d) Everymotorshallbeprovidedwithmeanstopreventautomaticrestartingafterastoppageduetodrop
involtageorfailure.Thisrequirementdoesnotapplytoanyspecialcaseswherethefailureofthemotor
tostartafterabriefinterruptionofthesupplywouldbelikelytocausegreaterdanger.Italsodoesnot
preclude arrangements for starting a motor at intervals by an automatic control device, where other
adequateprecautionsaretakenagainstdangerfromunexpectedrestarting.
851
Part8
BuildingServices
1.3.28 LTEnergyMeters
LTEnergymetersshallbeinstalledinresidentialbuildingsatsuchaplacewhichisreadilyaccessibletotheowner
ofthebuildingandtheAuthority.InstallationofDigitalEnergyMetersattheuserspremisesisarequirementof
thedistributionCompanies.
LTEnergymetersshouldbeinstalledataheightwhereitisconvenienttonotethemeterreadingbutshouldnot
beinstalledatalevellessthan1.5meterabovetheground.
Theenergymetersshouldeitherbeprovidedwithaprotectivecovering,enclosingitcompletelyexcepttheglass
windowthroughwhichthereadingsarenoted,orshallbemountedinsideacompletelyenclosedpanelprovided
withhingedorslidingdoorswitharrangementforlocking.Earthingterminalmustbeprovidedifametalboxis
used.SuchanearthingterminalmustbeconnectedtotheECC.
1.3.29 LayingofLTundergroundCables
PVCPVCNYYundergroundLTcablesshallbelaidusingoneofthethreemethods.
In the first method, brick wall prepared 915mm deep trenches with cover plates shall be used for placing the
cablesatthebottomofthetrench.
Inthesecondmethod,915mmdeeptrenchespreparedbygroundexcavation(undergrounddirectburialmethod)
shallbeusedforplacingthecablesontopofa75mmsandlayer..Inthissecondmethod(undergrounddirect
burialmethod),twolayersofbrickontop,markingtapeandthenbackfillingthetrenchwillhavetobedone.The
depthofthetrenchingeneralshallbe915mm.
Inthethirdmethod,prelaidPVCpipeshavingsufficientclearancecomparedtothecablesize(s)mayberequired
atplaces.ThePVCpipesmustbelaidintrenchesofthe915mmdepth.ForprelaidPVCpipeducts,Brickwall
made underground inspection pits will be required at an interval of at least 9.15 meter for cable pulling and
futureextensionsoralterations.
1.3.30 LayingofHTundergroundCables
TheHTundergroundarmouredcablesshallbelaidusingoneofthethreemethods.
Inthefirstmethod(i)brickwallprepared915mmdeeptrencheswithcoverplatesshallbeusedforplacingthe
cablesatthebottomofthetrench.
Inthesecondmethod,915mmdeeptrenchespreparedbygroundexcavation(undergrounddirectburialmethod)
shallbeusedforplacingthecablesontopofa75mmsandlayer..Inthissecondmethod(undergrounddirect
burialmethod),twolayersofbrickontop,markingtapeandthenbackfillingthetrenchwillhavetobedone.The
depthofthetrenchingeneralshallbe915mm.
Inthethirdmethod,prelaidPVCpipeshavingsufficientclearancecomparedtothecablesize(s)mayberequired
atplaces.ThePVCpipesmustbelaidintrenchesofthe915mmdepth.
ForprelaidPVCpipeducts,Brickwallmadeundergroundinspectionpitswillberequiredatanintervalofatleast
9.15meterforcablepullingandfutureextensionsoralterations.
PVCpipehavingsufficientclearancemaybeusedforbringingthecableuptothetrenchoftheMeteringPanelor
HTpanel.
ThePVCpipesmusthave18SWGGIpullwiresplacedduringlayingofthepipesforpullingthecableslater.
Differentwaysofinstallationofcables
MethodsofinstallationofcablesandconductorsincommonusearespecifiedinTable8.1.26.
Table8.1.26DifferentwaysofInstallationofCablesandConductorsinCommonUse
Type
A
852
Description
Example
Cablesenclosedinconduit
Singlecore
Multicore
Vol.3
Type
B
Chapter1
Description
Example
Cablesenclosedintrunking
Single-core
C
Cablesenclosedinunderground
conduit,ducts,andcableducting.
Multi-core
Multi-core
Single-core
D
Twoormoresinglecorecables
containedinseparateboresofamulti
coreconduitandintendedtobesolidly
embeddedinconcreteorplasteror
generallyincorporatedinthebuilding
structure.
Sheathedcablesclippeddirecttoa
nonmetallicsurface.
Multi-core
Single-core
F
Sheathedcablesonacabletray.
Single-core
G
Multi-core
Sheathedcablesembeddeddirectin
plaster.
Single-core
H
Sheathedcablessuspendedfromor
incorporatingacatenarywire.
Multi-core
Multi-core
853
Part8
BuildingServices
Type
J
Description
Sheathedcablesinfreeair.
Example
Vertical surface of a wall

or open cable trench
20 mm min.
20 mm min.
Single-core
Multi-core
Forcablesinwhichtheconductorcrosssectionalareadoesnotexceed
185mm2,Sisequaltotwicetheoveralldiameterofthecable.For
cablesinwhichtheconductorcrosssectionalareaexceeds185m2,Sis
about90mm.Fortwocablesinhorizontalformationonbracketsfixed
toawall,Smayhaveanylesservalue.
Singleandmulticorecablesin
enclosedtrench450mmwideby600
mmdeep(minimumdimensions)
including100mmcover.
Twosinglecorecableswith
surfacesseparatedbyadistance
equaltoonediameter;three
singlecorecablesintrefoiland
touchingthroughout.Multicore
cablesorgroupsofsinglecore
cablesseparatedbyaminimum
distanceof50mm.
854
L Singleandmulticorecablesin
Singlecorecablesarrangedinflat
groupsoftwoorthreeonthe
verticaltrenchwallwithsurfaces
separatedbyadistanceequalto
onediameterwithaminimum
separationof50mmbetween
groups.Multicorecables
installedsinglyseparatedbya
minimum*distanceof75mm.All
cablesspacedatleast25mmfrom
thetrenchwall.
Vol.3
Type
M
Description
Singleandmulticorecablesin
Chapter1
Example
Singlecorecablesarrangedin
groupsoftwoorthreeinflat
formationwiththesurfaces
separatedbyadistanceequalto
onediameterorintrefoil
formationwithcablestouching.
Groupsseparatedbya
minimum*distanceof50mm
eitherhorizontallyorvertically.
Multicorecablesinstalledsingly
separatedbyaminimum*
distanceof75mmeither
horizontallyorvertically.Allcables
spacedatleast25mmfromthe
trenchwall.
*Largerspacingtobeusedwherepracticable.
1.3.31 MainSwitchandSwitchboards
1.3.31.1 MetalCladEnclosedType
Allmainswitchesshallbeeithermetalcladenclosedtypeorofanyotherinsulatedenclosedtypeandthecircuit
breakersshallbefixedatcloseproximity.
1.3.31.2 CircuitBreakersonEachLiveConductor
Thereshallbecircuitbreakersorminiaturecircuitbreakersorloadbreakswitchfusesoneachliveconductorof
thesupplymainsatthepointofentry.Thewiringthroughouttheinstallationshallbesuchthatthereisnobreak
intheneutralwireintheformofaswitchorfuseunitorotherwise.
1.3.31.3 Location
a) Thelocationofthemainboardshallbesuchthatitiseasilyaccessibleforfiremenandotherpersonnelto
quicklydisconnectthesupplyincaseofemergencies.
b) Main switchboards shall be installed in boxes or cupboards so as to safeguard against operation by
unauthorizedpersonnel.
c) Opentypeswitchboardsshallbeplacedonlyindrylocationsandinventilatedroomsandtheyshallnot
beplacedinthevicinityofstoragebatteriesorexposedtochemicalfumes.
d) In damp situation or where inflammable or explosive dust, vapour or gas is likely to be present, the
switchboard shall be totally enclosed or made flame proof as may be necessitated by the particular
circumstances.
e) Switchboardsshallnotbeerectedabovegasstovesorsinks,orwithin2.5mofanywashingunitinthe
washingroomsorlaundries.
f)
In case of switchboards being unavoidable in places likely to be exposed to weather, to drip, or in

abnormallymoistatmosphere,theoutercasingshallbeweatherproofandshallbeprovidedwithglands
orbushingsoradaptedtoreceivescrewedconduit.
g) Adequateilluminationshallbeprovidedforallworkingspacesabouttheswitchboards,wheninstalled
indoors.
1.3.32 MountingofMetalcladswitchgear
AMetalcladswitchgearshallbemountedonhingedtypemetalboardsorfixedtypemetalboards.
855
Part8
BuildingServices
a) Hingedtypemetalboardsshallconsistofaboxmadeofsheetmetalnotlessthan2mmthickandshall
beprovidedwithahingedcovertoenabletheboardtoswingopenforexaminationofthewiringatthe
back.Thejointsshallbewelded.Theboardshallbesecurelyfixedtothewallbymeansofragboltplugs,
orwoodenplugsandshallbeprovidedwithlockingarrangementandanearthingstud.Allwirespassing
throughthemetalboardshallbeprotectedbyarubberorwoodenbushattheentryhole.Theearthstud
shouldbecommensuratewiththesizeoftheearthlead(s).
b) Fixedtypemetalboardsshallconsistofanangleorchannelsteelframefixedonthewallatthetop,if
necessary.
c) Thereshallbeaclearanceofonemeteratthefrontoftheswitchboards.
1.3.33 WoodenBoardsasmainboardsorsubboardscontainingfusedcutoutsandmain
switches
UseofWoodenBoardisdiscouragedbecauseofthefearofbreakoutoffirefromasparkorfromanoverheated
cable.
However, for small installations, not exceeding 15A SP, connected to a singlephase 230 volts supply, wooden
boards may be used as main boards or subboards containing fused cutouts and main switches of appropriate
ratingsmaybeused.
Suchaboardshallbemadeusingseasonedteakorotherapprovedqualitytimber.
1.3.34 LocationofDistributionBoards
Thedistributionfuseboardsshallbelocatedasnearaspossibletothecentreoftheloadtheyareintendedto
control.
a) They shall be fixed on suitable stanchion or wall and shall be accessible for replacement of fuses, and
shallnotbemorethan2mfromfloorlevel.
b) Theyshallbeeithermetalcladtype,orallinsulatedtype.Butifexposedtoweatherordampsituations,
theyshallbeoftheweatherprooftypeandifinstalledwhereexposedtoexplosivedust,vapourorgas,
they shall be of flame proof type. In corrosive atmospheres, they shall be treated with anticorrosive
preservativeorcoveredwithsuitableplasticcompounds.
c) Wheretwoormoredistributionfuseboardsfeedinglowvoltagecircuitsarefedfromasupplyofmedium
voltage,thesedistributionboardsshallbe:
i.
fixednotlessthan2mapart,or
ii.
arrangedsothatitisnotpossibletoopentwoatatime,namely,theyareinterlocked,andthe
metalcaseismarked"Danger415Volts"andidentifiedwithproperphasemarkinganddanger
marks,or
iii. installedinroomsorenclosuresaccessibletoauthorizedpersonsonly.
d) All distribution boardsshall be marked "Lighting" or "Power", as the case may be, andalso be marked
with the voltage and number of phases of the supply. Each shall be provided with a circuit list giving
diagramofeachcircuitwhichitcontrolsandthecurrentratingforthecircuitandsizeoffuseelement.
1.3.35 OvercurrentandShortCircuitProtectionofCircuits
1.3.35.1 Appropriate protection shall be provided at the distribution boards for all circuits and subcircuits
againstshortcircuitandovercurrent.Theinstalledprotectivedevicesshallbecapableofinterrupting
anyshortcircuitcurrentthatmayoccur,withoutcausinganydanger.Theratingsandsettingsoffuses
andtheprotectivedevicesshallbecoordinatedsoastoobtainabsolutecertaindiscriminationofthe
faultyareaonlyduringafault.
1.3.35.2 Where circuit breakers are used for protection of main circuit and the subcircuits, discrimination in
operation shall be achieved by adjusting the protective devices of the submain circuit breakers to
operateatlowercurrentsettingsandshortertimelagthanthemaincircuitbreaker.
1.3.35.3 Afusecarriershallnotbefittedwithafuseelementlargerthanthatforwhichthecarrierisdesigned.
856
Vol.3
Chapter1
1.3.35.4 The current rating of fuses shall not exceed the current rating of the smallest cable in the circuit
protectedbythefuse.
1.3.36 Firealarmandemergencylightingcircuits
Fire alarm and emergency lighting circuits shall be segregated from all other cables and from each other in
accordance with BS 5839 and BS 5266. Telecommunication circuits shall be segregated in accordance with BS
6701asappropriate.
1.3.37 Earthing
1.3.37.1 General
Theobjectofanearthingsystemistoprovideasystemofconductors,asnearlyaspossibleatauniformandzero,
orearth,potential.Thepurposeofthisistoensurethat,ingeneral,allpartsofequipmentandinstallationother
thanlivepartsshallbeatearthpotential,thusensuringthatpersonscomingincontactwiththesepartsshall
alsobeatearthpotentialatalltimes.
1.3.37.2 EarthingusedinElectricalInstallationforBuildings
The usual method of earthing is to join the exposed metal work to earth via a system of Earth Continuity
Conductors(ECC)connectedtoanEarthElectrodeburiedinthegroundthroughasystemofEarthLeadWires.In
conjunctionwithafuse,orothersimilardevice,thisthenformsaprotectivesystem.
Thus, if a live conductor accidentally comes into contact with an exposed metal, the fuse or protective device
operates.Aslongastheoverallresistanceoftheprotectivesystemislow,alargefaultcurrentflowswhichblows
the fuse. This cuts off the supply and isolates the faulty circuit, preventing risk of shock, fire, or damage to
equipment/installation.
InElectricalInstallationforBuildinngs,followingtypesofearthingarerequiredtobeinstalled.
L.T.Circuit/SystemEarthing,
EquipmentEarthing(LTside),
SubstationNeutralEarthing,
SubstationLTSystemEarthing,
H.T.CircuitearthingforaSubtation
1.3.37.2.1 ThepurposeofL.T.Circuit/SystemEarthingistolimitexcessivevoltagefromlinesurges,from
crossovers with higher voltage lines, or from lightning, and to keep noncurrent carrying
enclosuresandequipmentatzeropotentialwithrespecttoearth.
Earthingthesystemhelpsfacilitatetheopeningofovercurrentprotectiondevicesincaseofearth
faults. Earthing associated with current carrying conductors is normally essential for the
protection and safety of the system and is generally known as circuit/ system earthing, while
earthingofnoncurrentcarryingmetalworkandconductorisessentialforthesafetyofhuman
life,animals,andpropertyanditisgenerallyknownasequipmentearthing.
857
Part8
BuildingServices
1.3.37.2.2
Theearthingarrangementsshallbesuchthat:
Thevalueofresistancefromtheconsumer'smainearthingterminaltotheearthedpointofthe
supply, or to earth, is in accordance with the protective and functional requirements of the
installation,andexpectedtobecontinuouslyeffective,
1.3.37.2.3 Tarth fault currents and earth leakage currents likely to occur are carried without danger,
particularly from the point of view of thermal, thermomechanical and electromechanical
stresses.
1.3.37.2.4 Where a number of installations have separate earthing arrangements, protective conductors
running between any two of the separate installations shall either be capable of carrying the
maximum fault current likely to flow through them, or be earthed within one installation only
andinsulatedfromtheearthingarrangementsofanyotherinstallation.
1.3.37.3 IntegralpartsofanEarthingSystem
TheintegralpartsofanEarthingSystemare:
a) EarthElectrode(s)buriedundertheground
b) EarthLeadCables/WiresconnectingtheEarthElectrode(s)withtheEarthingBusbarSystem.EarthLead
Cables/ Wiresarealso need tointerconnectthe Earth Electrodeswhen therearemore than oneEarth
Electrode.
c) Earth Continuity Conductors (ECC) for linking Earthing Busbar at the Substation LT panel or main
distributionDBofabuilding.
d) EarthElectrodeClamp.
Connectionsof(i)EarthContinuityConductors(ECC),(ii)EarthLeadCables/Wiresand(iii)EarthElectrode(s)must
bemadeinappropriateandlonglastingmannerbecausepoorconnectionorlossofconnectionwillrenderthe
earthingsystemineffective.
1.3.37.3.1 EarthContinuityConductors(ECC)
ECCrunsalongthecircuits/subcircuits,socketcircuits,interlinkingcircuitsbetweenaBDBandaSDB,betweena
SDBandaDB,betweenaDBandaFDB,betweenaFDBandaMDB,betweenaMDBandtheLTPanelEarthing
BusbaroftheSubstation.AteachpointanECCshallbeterminatedinacopperearthingbusbar.Inmetalswitch
boards back boaxes and in metal socket back boxes appropriate copper or brass bolt nut termination shall be
provided.
ECCofanearthingsystemjoinsorbondstogetherallthemetalpartsofaninstallation.
PVCinsulatedwiringcoppercablesofappropriatesizehavingGreen+Yellowbicolourinsulationshallbeusedas
ECC.
The minimum size of the ECC shall be 4.0mm2 PVC insulated wiring copper cables of appropriate size having
Green+Yellowbicolourinsulation.
1.3.37.3.2 EarthLeadCable/Wire
EarthLeadCable/WirerunsbetweenanEarthElectrodeandtheEarthingBusbaroftheMDB/DBorbetweenan
EarthElectrodeandtheLTPanelEarthingBusbaroftheSubstation.
OftenmorethanoneEarthElectrodesareneeded.InsuchacaseduplicateEarthLeadCables/Wiresfromeach
Earth Electrode must be brought to the MDB /DB or to the LT Panel Earthing Busbar of the Substation and
properlyterminated.Inaddition,inthecaseofmultipleEarthElectrodes,theEarthElectrodesmustbeinterlinked
byadditionalEarthLeadCables/Wires.
PVCinsulatedwiringcoppercablesofappropriatesizehavingGreen+Yellowbicolourinsulationshallbeusedas
EarthLeadWire.AtbothendsoftheEarthLeadCable/Wire,coppercablelugsmustbefittedusingcrimptoolsor
hydraulicpress.
TheminimumsizeoftheEarthLeadWireshallbe2numbersof1.5mm2PVCinsulatedwiringcoppercablesof
appropriatesizehavingGreen+Yellowbicolourinsulation.
Theendsoftheearthleadwiresshallbeterminatedusingcrimptoolfittedcablelugsforfittingonthebusbaror
withtheEarthElectrodeClamp.
858
Vol.3
Chapter1
a) An Earth Lead Cable/ Wire establishes connection between the main Earthing Bus Bar and the earth
electrode(s). The Earth Lead Wire shall be brought to one or more connecting points (Earthing Bus),
according to size of installation; the copper wire earthing leads shall run from there to the electrodes.
UsuallymorethanoneEarthLeadWiresareneededforoneEarthElectrodetomakesurethatthislink
neverfails.
b) EarthLeadCable/Wiresshalloneofthefollowingtypes:
i.
PVCinsulatedcable
ii.
strandedcoppercableswithoutinsulation
iii. copperstrips(copperbars)
iv. PVCinsulatedcableispreferableinmostcases.
v.
EarthLeadWiresshallrunthroughPVCpipefromtheEarthElectrodeuptotheEarthingBusbar
oftheMDB/DBorLTPanel.
c) EarthLeadCables/Wiresshallrun,atleast,2inparallel(atleast)downtotheearthelectrodesoasto
increase the safety factor of the installation. The two cablesshall be terminated in two seperate cable
lugs and bolts at both ends. Copper wire used as earthing lead must not be smaller than single core
stranded2x4mm2PVCinsulatedcables(i.e.2nos.ofsinglecore4mm2PVCinsulatedcablesinparallel).
DependingonthecurrentcapacityoftheMainincominglinethesizewillhavetoberaised.
EarthLeadCables/WiresshallbepulledfromtheEarthelectrodeuptotheterminatingEarthingBusbarthrough
PVCconduitsorGIpipesofappropriatedimension.
Table8.1.27MinimumCrosssectionalAreaofCopperECCsinRelationtotheAreaofAssociatedPhaseConductors
CrosssectionalAreaofPhase
Conductor(s)
MinimumCrosssectionalAreaofthe
CorrespondingEarthConductor
(mm2)
(mm2)
Sameascrosssectionalareaofphaseconductor
butnotlessthan4mm2
Lessthan16
16mm2
16orgreaterbutlessthan35
Halfthecrosssectionalareaofphaseconductor
35orgreater
1.3.37.3.3 EarthElectrodesandtheirinstallation
TheEarthElectrodeshall,asfaraspracticable,penetrateintomoistsoil(whichwillremainmoistevenduringthe
dryseason)preferablybelowgroundwatertable.TheresistanceofanEarthingsystemaftermeasuredafterthe
installationofEarthelectrodes(individuallyorcombinedasasinglegroup)shallbearoundoneohm.
FollowingtypesofearthelectrodesaretobeusedforEarthingofElectricalInstallationsofaBuilding
CopperRods,
CopperPlates,
GalvanizedIron(GI)pipes.
EarthElectrodesandtheirsizesshallbeasfollows:
ACopperRodEarthElectrodeshallhaveaminimumdiameterof12.5mmofminimumlengthof3.33m.Multiple
Copper Rod Earth Electrodes may have to be installed to achieve an acceptable value of earthing resistance of
around1ohm.
ACopperPlateEarthelectrodeshallbe600mmx600mmx6mmminimum.Thecopperplateshallbeburiedat
least2mbelowthegroundlevel.MultipleCopperplateearthelectrodesmayhavetobeinstalledtoachievean
acceptablevalueofearthingresistanceofaround1ohm.
GIpipesforGIPipeEarthingshallhaveaminimumdiameterof38mmandofminimumlengthof6.5m.Multiple
GIpipesEarthElectrodemayhavetobeinstalledtoachieveanacceptablevalueofearthingresistanceofaround
1ohm.
DetailsoftypicalCopperRodEarthing,CopperPlateEarthing,GIPipeEarthingsystemareshowninFig1.1and
1.2.
859
Part8
BuildingServices
ForinstallingaCopperRodEarthElectrode,a38mmGIpipeshallbedrivenbelowgrounduptoadepthof4mand
shallbewithdrawn.The12.5mmdiaCopperRodEarthElectrodeshallthenbeeasilydrivenintothatholeuptoa
depthof3mand0.33metershallbeleftforplacinginsidetheearthingpitdescribedbelow.
Forinstallinga600mmx600mmx6mmCopperplate2mbelowthegroundlevelearthexcavationwillhaveto
bedone.Theearthleadwireshallcomeviaanearthingpit.
ConsideringthepracticalsituationinthiscountryandGIPipeEarthElectrodesdrivenbytubewellsinkingmethod
are suggested. For this purpose 38 mm dia GI pipes are recommended for domestic buildings. For large plinth
areabuildingsandmultistoriedbuildings50mmdiaGIpipesarerecommended.
The length of GI pipe to be driven below the ground level depends on the earthing resistance which in turn
dependsontheavailabilityofwatertableduringthedryseasoninthiscountry.However,exceptthehighland
andmountains,thisdepthvariesbetween12.19meterto24.38meter.
Multiple number of GI Pipe Earth Electrodes need to be used and connected in parallel in order to lower the
earthingresistancemeasuredwithanearthresistancemeasuringmeter.
Fig8.2.1and8.2.2
Fig.8.2.1PlateEarthing
860
Vol.3
Chapter1
Fig.8.2.2PipeEarthing
1.3.37.3.4 BrassClamps/TerminalsonEarthElectrodes(EarthElectrodeClamp)
ABrassClampmustbefittedontopofaGIPipeEarthElectrodetoterminatetheEarthleadwireandtomaintain
electricalcontactwiththeearthelectrode.Thisisneededtoestablishlonglastingandfirmconnectionbetween
the Earth Electrode and Earth Lead Wire, which in turn means connection between the Earth Electrode and
EarthingBusbarofanLTPanelorMDB/DB.ThisisextremelyimportantpartforanEarthingSystemwhichneeds
craftsmanshipandextracare.TheBrassclampshallbemadeusingatleast9.5mmthickandatleast50mmwide
861
Part8
BuildingServices
Brass plate bent and shaped properly to fit tightly around the GI pipe earth electrode and shall have sufficient
length(atleast35mm)onbothsidesforfixingboltsandcablelugs.Thisclampshallhavetwohexagonalhead9.5
mmboltsononesideandtwohexagonalhead9.5mmboltsontheotherside.Sufficientspaceshouldbeavailable
forfixingthecablelugsoftheEarthLeadWires.AfterfittingthelugsoftheEarthLeadCablestheBrassclampand
theGIpipeheadshouldbecoatedwithtwocoatsofsyntheticenamelpaintontopofoneundercoatpaintlayer.
1.3.37.3.5 EarthingBusbars
ACopperEarthingBusbarmustbeprovidedinsidetheLTPanelorMDB/DBofabuilding.TheEarthLeadWire
comingfromtheEarthElectrode(s)shallbeterminatedonthisbusbarusingcablelugs(cablelugsmustbefitted
usingcrimptoolsorhydraulicpress)andbrassboltsandnuts.
CopperEarthingBusbarmustalsobeprovidedinsidetheDBs,FDBs,SDBsandBDBs.HexagonalHeadbrassscrew,
nutsandwashersareneededforfixingtheECCandEarthLeadcableswiththisbusbar
1.3.37.3.6 EarthingPit
AnEarthingPitmustbeconstructedaroundthetopoftheEarthElectrode,belowthegroundlevelusing254mm
brick walls on a CC floor with a 152mm thick RCC slab cover on top having lifting hooks. The top of the Earth
electrode (in case of pipe earthing) shall remain 380mm above the top of the bottom CC floor of the pit. The
minimuminsidedimensionoftheEarthingPitshallbe610mmX610mmX610mm.Theoutsideaswellasthe
inside of the walls of the pit and the floor of the pit shall be cement mortar plastered. The inside shall be net
cementfinished.ThetopoftheRCCslabpitcovershallremain38mmabovethegroundlevel.Thepitshallbe
madeinsuchawaythatwatercannotgetintothepit.OneEarthingPitisneededforoneEarthElectrode.
1.3.38 LightningProtectionofBuildings
1.3.38.1 General
Whetherabuildingneedsprotectionagainstlightningdependsontheprobabilityofastrokeandacceptablerisk
levels.Assessmentoftheriskandofthemagnitudeoftheconsequencesneedtobemade.Asanaidtomakinga
judgement,asetofindicesisgiveninTable8.1.28belowforthevariousfactorsinvolved.
1.3.38.1.1 ImportanceofStructure
Thelightninghazardtohumanbeingswithinastructureorabuildingisaveryimportantfactorindecidinghow
fartogoinprovidinglightningprotection.Schools,hospitals,auditoriums,railwaystations,etc.,areplaceswhere
alargenumberofpeoplecongregateand,therefore,wouldingeneralbestructuresofgreaterimportancethan
smallbuildingsandhouses.
1.3.38.1.2 TypeofConstruction
Thetypeofconstructionofthestructurehasalargeinfluenceupontheextentofprotection tobeprovided.A
steelframedbuildingtosomeextentisselfprotectingandmaynotgenerallyrequireadditionalprotection,while
brickbuildingsorbuildingswiththatchedroofrequiregreaterdegreeofprotection.
1.3.38.1.3 FireandLossduetoLightning
In addition to direct loss due to destruction of buildings by lightning, fire resulting from lightning, killing of
livestock,etc.theremaybeindirectlosseswhichsometimesaccompanythedestructionofbuildingsandtheir
contents.Aninterruptiontobusinessortofarmingoperations,specially,atcertaintimesoftheyear,mayinvolve
lossesquitedistinctfrom,andinadditionto,thelossesarisingfromthedirectdestructionofproperty.Thereare
alsocaseswherewholecommunitydependsforsafetyandcomfortinsomerespectontheintegrityofasingle
structure, as for instance on the brick chimney of a water pumping plant. A lightning strike to it may have a
serious consequencedue to disruption of sanitaryfacilities, drinking water,waterfor irrigation,fire protection,
etc. The contents of buildings should also be considered as to whether they are replaceable, explosive,
combustible, flammable vapour or explosive dust. These may present a hazard in a building that is otherwise
immunetolightning.Protectionmeasuresareextremelynecessaryforhouseswhereitemslikehayorcottonare
stored.
1.3.38.1.4 DegreeofIsolation
Therelativeexposureofaparticularbuildingwillbeanelementindeterminingwhethertheexpenseoflightning
protectioniswarranted.Incloselybuiltuptownsandcities,thehazardisnotasgreatasintheopencountry.
862
Vol.3
Chapter1
Table8.1.28IndexFiguresAssociatedwithLightningProtectionDesign
IndexA:UseofStructure
Index
Housesandsimilarbuildings
Housesandsimilarbuildingswithoutsideaerial
Smallandmediumsizefactories,workshopsandlaboratories
Big industrial plants, telephone exchanges, office blocks, hotels,

blocksofflats
Places of assembly, for example, places of workshop, halls,

theatres, museums, exhibitions, department stores, post offices,
stations,airports,stadiums
Schools,hospitals,children'shomesandothersuchstructures
10
IndexB:TypeofConstruction
Steelframedencasedwithnonmetalroofa
Reinforcedconcretewithnonmetalroof
Brick,plainconcrete,ormasonrywithnonmetalroof
Steelframedencasedorreinforcedconcretewithmetalroof
Timberformedorcladwithanyroofotherthanmetalorthatch
Anybuildingwithathatchedroof
10
aA structure of exposed metal which is continuous down to

groundlevelisexcludedfromthetableasitrequiresnolightning
protectionbeyondadequateearthingarrangements.
IndexC:ContentsorConsequentialEffects
Ordinarydomesticorofficebuilding,factoriesandworkshopsnot
containingvaluablematerials
Industrial and agricultural buildings with specially susceptibleb

contents
Powerstations,gasworks,telephoneexchanges,radiostations
Industrial key plants, ancient monuments, historic buildings,

museums,artgalleries
Schools,hospitals,children'sandotherhomes,placesofassembly
10
b This means specially valuable plant or materials vulnerable to
fireortheresultsoffire.
IndexD:DegreeofIsolation
Structure located in a large area having structures or trees of

similarorgreaterheight,e.g.alargetownorforest
Structurelocatedinanareawithafewotherstructuresortrees
ofsimilarheight
Structure completely isolated or exceeding at least twice the

heightofsurroundingstructuresortrees
10
863
Part8
BuildingServices
IndexE:TypeofTerrain
Flatterrainatanylevel
Hillyterrain
Mountainousterrain300mandabove
IndexF:HeightofStructure
Upto9m
915m
1518m
1824m
2430m
11
3038m
16
3846m
22
4653mc
30
cStructureshigherthan53mrequireprotectioninallcases
IndexG:LightningPrevalence
Numberofthunderstormdaysperyear:
Upto3
46
79
1012
11
1315
14
1618
17
1921
20
Over21
21
1.3.38.1.5 TypeofTerrain
In hillyor mountainous areas, buildingsare moresusceptibleto damage dueto lightning thanbuildings in the
plainsorflatterrain.Inhillyareas,abuildinguponhighgroundisusuallysubjecttogreaterhazardthanoneina
valleyorotherwiseshelteredarea.
1.3.38.1.6 HeightofStructure
Heightofthestructureisanimportantfactorforthepurposeoflightningprotection.Tallerstructuresaresubject
togreaterhazardsthansmallerstructuresand,therefore,lightningprotectionismoredesirablefortallstructures.
1.3.38.1.7 LightningPrevalence
The number of thunderstorm days in a year varies in different parts of a country. However, the severity of
lightningstorms,asdistinguishedfromtheirfrequencyofoccurrence,isusuallymuchgreaterinsomelocations
864
Vol.3
Chapter1
than others. Hence, the need for protection varies from place to place, although not necessarily in direct
proportiontothethunderstormfrequency.
1.3.38.2 RiskAssessment
"RiskIndex"isthesumoftheindicesforallthefactors,asgiveninTable8.1.28.Afewexamplesofcalculationof
RiskIndexaregiveninTable8.1.29,basedonamarginalRiskIndexof40.
1.3.38.3 IntegralpartsofaLightningProtectionSystem
A smallest complete lightning protection system shall consist of (i) an Air Spike or Air Terminal, (ii) a Down
Conductor, (iii) a Roof Conductor and (iv) an Earth Electrode. An Air Spike or Air Terminal is that part which is
intendedtointerceptlightningdischarges.Itconsistsofaverticalthickconductorofroundcrosssectionmounted
onthehighestpartofthebuildingtoprotecttherequiredarea.However,ingeneraltheremaybemorethanone
Air Spike or Air Terminal. In such a case roof conductors (made with copper strips or PVC insulated Annealed
Stranded copper cables) need to be used to interconnect the Air Spikes or AirTerminals. Usually, for each Air
Spike or Air Terminal there shall be one down conductor (made with copper strips or PVC insulated Annealed
Stranded copper cables) going down up to the Earth Electrode pit and connected to the Earth Electrode. In all
junctions, appropriate type of copper or brass junction plates or brass clamps must be used to ensure low
resistance,firmandlonglastingconnection.
(i)AirSpike/AirTerminal
AnAirSpikeorAirTerminalshallbemadewithcopperrodofminimum12mmdiameterwithtincoatingontop.
Theterminalshallhaveacopper/brassbaseplateformountingontopofroof,column,parapetwallusingrowel
bolts.Theminimumdimensionofsuchabaseplateshallbe152mmx152mmx13mm.Thelengthandwidthmay
needtobeincreaseddependingonthenumberofconnectionofthedownconductorsandtheroofconductors.
Such connections are to be made using hexagonal head brass bolts and nuts of 10mm diameter with brass
washers.
(ii)DownConductor
ADownConductorshallbemadewithcopperstriporStrandedPVCinsulatedannealedcoppercable.
(iii)RoofConductor
ARoofConductorshallbemadewithcopperstriporStrandedPVCinsulatedannealedcoppercable.Thisshallrun
alongtheperipheryoftherooftolinkallairspikesandalldownconductorsinstalledontopofabuilding.The
jointsshallbemadeusingclampsmadeofcopperstrips(of1/8inchminimumthickness)andappropriatebrass
boltsandwashersof3/8inchminimumdiameter.
(iv)EarthElectrode
The Earth Electrode is exactly of the same type as the Earth Electrode of the Electrical Distribution (Electrical
Installation for Buildings) system described earlier in this document. Considering the practical situation in this
countryandPipeEarthElectrodesaresuggested.ForeachAirspikeoneEarthElectrodeisanidealsolution.
(iv)EarthInspectionBoxes
A18SWGGIsheetmadeEarthInspectionBoxmustbeprovidedforeachdownconductor1000mmabovethe
plinth level of the building (concealed inside the wall) which will contain a copper strip made clamp on the
insulation peeled down conductor to check the continuity of the Earth Lead Down Conductor and the Earth
ElectrodeandalsotomeasuretheEarthResistanceofthesystem.TheboxshallhaveaGIsheetmadecoverplate.
(v)EarthingPit
EarthingPitsshallbeprovidedasdescribedintheEarthingtopicabove.
1.3.38.3.1 NumberofLightningArrestorsRequiredandtheirInstallation
NumberofLightningProtectionAirSpikesinabuildingwilldependonthenatureoftherooftop,onthetotalarea
oftherooftop,ontheheightofthebuilding,heightoftheadjectbuildings,heightofthenearbytowersorother
similarstructures.However,asathumbrule,forevery80m2areaatleastoneairspikeshouldbechosenatthe
beginning.Duringplacementoftheairspikesthetotalnumbermayhavetobeincreasedoradjusted.
1.3.38.3.2 ProtectionZone
The zone of protection is the space within which an air spike provides protection by attracting the stroke to
itself. It has been found that a single vertical conductor attracts to itself strokes of average or above average
intensitywhichintheabsenceoftheconductorwouldhavestruckthegroundwithinacirclehavingitscentreat
865
Part8
BuildingServices
theconductorandaradiusequaltotwicetheheightoftheconductor.Forweakerthanaveragedischargesthe
protected area becomes smaller. For practical design it is therefore assumed that statistically satisfactory
protectioncanbegiventoazoneconsistingofaconewithitsapexatthetopoftheverticalconductorandabase
radiusequaltotheheightoftheconductor.ThisisillustratedinFig8.2.3.
Fig.8.2.3ProtectedZoneforVerticalConductors
Fig.8.2.4ProtectedZoneforHorizontalConductors
866
Vol.3
Chapter1
1.3.38.3.3 Ahorizontalconductorcanberegardedasaseriesofapexescoalescedintoaline,andthezone
ofprotectionthusbecomesatentlikespace(Fig8.2.4).
Table8.1.29ExampleofCalculationofRiskIndex
Example
Small residential building in

a thickly populated locality
2
(heightlessthan10m)
Total
Index
Figure
21
35
Office building in a locality

(height20m)
7
Recommen
dations
No protection
needed,
in
general
21
41
As the figure is
around 40, need
ofprotectionwill
dependuponthe
importance of
thebuilding
Hotel building (height 31m)

exceeding twice the height
7
ofsurroundingstructures
10
16
21
60
10
30
21
83
Protection
essential
Building
of
historical
importance
completely
8
isolated (height exceeding
55m)
Protection
essential
Structure of high historical

importance
(height
exceeding55m)
Protection
essential as the
height exceeds
53m
Structure, such as hydro

electric power stations,
7
sufficiently protected by
means of surrounding
structures, for example,
high vertical cliffs, high
metallic structures or earth
wireoftransmissionsystem
(height15m)
21
48
Protected
by
surroundings
867
Part8
BuildingServices
1.3.38.3.4 Whenthereareseveralparallelhorizontalconductorstheareabetweenthemhasbeenfoundby
experiencetobebetterprotectedthanonewouldexpectfromtheaboveconsiderationsonly.The
recommended design criterion is that no part of the roof should be more than 9 m from the
nearesthorizontalconductorexceptthatanadditional0.3mmaybeaddedforeach0.3morpart
thereofbywhichtheparttobeprotectedisbelowthenearestconductor.
1.3.38.3.5 The earth termination is that part which discharges the current into the general mass of the
earth. In other words, it is one or more earth electrodes. Earth electrodes for lightning
protectionarenodifferentfromearthelectrodesforshortcircuitprotectionsystems.Thetotal
resistanceofanelectrodeforalightningprotectionsystemmustnotexceed2ohms.
1.3.38.3.6 The down conductor is the conductor which runs from the air termination to the earth
termination.Abuildingwithabaseareanotexceeding100m2shallbeprovidedwithonedown
conductor.Foralarger building, there shall be onedown conductorforthe first 80m2plus a
furtheroneforevery100m2orpartthereofinexcessofthefirst80m2.Alternatively,foralarger
building one down conductor may be provided for every 30 m of perimeter. Ideally, every air
spikeshouldhaveadownconductorgoingdownuptotheearthelectrode.
1.3.38.3.7 Thematerialusedforlightningconductorsmustbecopper.Thecriterionfordesignistokeep
theresistancefromairterminationtoearthelectrodetoanegligiblevalue.
1.3.38.3.8 Recommended dimensions for various components of lightning arrester are given in Table
8.1.30. Larger conductors should however be used if the system is unlikely to receive regular
inspectionandmaintenance.
Table8.1.30SizesoftheComponentsofLightningProtectionSystems
Components
MinimumDimensions
AirTerminals
12mmdia
copperstrip
20mmWx3mmT
copperandphosphorbronzerods
12mmdia
PVCinsulatedstrandedannealedcoppercable(minimumsize)
19strandsof1.8mmdia
DownConductors
20mmx3mm
copperstrip
19strandsof1.8mmdia
PVCinsulatedstrandedannealedcoppercable(minimumsize)
EarthElectrode
Harddrawncopperrodsfordrivingintosoftground
12mmdia
Harddrawnorannealedcopperrodsforindirectdrivingorlayingin 12mmdia
ground
Phosphorbronzeforhardground
12mmdia
Coppercladsteelforhardground
50mmdia
GIpipe
1.3.38.3.9
External metal on a building should be bonded to the lightning conductor with bonds at least as large as the
conductor.
1.3.38.3.10 When a lightning conductor carries a stroke to earth, it is temporarily raised to a potential
considerablyabovethatofearth.Thereis,therefore,ariskthatthedischargewillflashoverto
nearbymetalandcausedamagetotheinterveningstructure.Thiscanbepreventedbyeither(i)
providing sufficient clearance between conductor and other metal or (ii) by bonding these
together to ensure that there can be no potential difference between them. The necessary
clearanceisobtainedfrom:
D = 0.3R +
868
H
15n
2.9.1
Vol.3
where,
D=clearanceinmetres
R=resistancetoearthinohms
H=heightofbuildinginmetres
n=numberofdownelectrodes
Chapter1
Since it is often impracticable to provide the necessary clearance, the alternative technique of bonding is
preferred.
1.3.38.3.11 SurgeArresterSelection
A surge arrester is a protective device for limiting surge voltages by discharging, or bypassing, surge current
throughit.Italsopreventscontinuedflowoffollowthroughcurrentwhileremainingcapableofrepeatingthese
functions.Itisusedtoprotectoverheadlines,transformersandotherelectricalapparatusmostlyinanoutdoor
substationfromlightningvoltagestravelingthroughtheoverheadlines.
1.3.38.3.12 Horngaplightningarresters
Horngap lightning arresters are commonly used for low and medium voltage overhead lines. The rating of the
surge arrester shall be equal to or greater than the maximum continuous phase to ground power frequency
voltageavailableatthepointofapplication.
1.3.39 TelecommunicationsinBuildings
1.3.39.1 General
Placing concealed 2 pair indoor cables is needed to get (ii) telephone lines of the Wired Telphone Companies
insideroomsofabuildingand(ii)togetthePABXlinesofthebuilding/officesinthebuildingtotherespective
roomsunderthePABXs.Inadditiontothis,10pair/20pair/50pairtelephonecablesarerequiredtobebrought
intothePABXroom(s)ofthebuilding.Conduitsaretobeinstalledforbothofthesetwocategories.Fortheentry
of10pair/20pair/50paircables,conduitsthroughstraightandeasypath(inmostcases,throughonesideof
theverticalelectricalduct)needtobebroughtin.
1.3.39.2 ConcealedTelecommunicationCableWiring
2pairPVCinsulatedPVCsheathedannealedcoppertelecommunicationcableshallbedrawnthroughsufficient
number of prelaid 19mm / 25mm / 38mm PVC conduits to establish Telecommunication Network inside a
building.Aclearanceofatleast40%mustbemaintainedinsidethePVCconduits.Sufficientnumberof18SWGGI
sheetmadepullboxes(withPerspexsheet/ebonitesheetcoverplates)atallsuitableplacesmustbeplacedfor
theeaseofpullingthesecables.
2pairPVCinsulatedPVCsheathedannealedcoppertelecommunicationcableshallbeusedforwiringbetweena
TelephoneDP/PatchpanelandaTelecommunicationoutlet.Theextrapairshallremainforfuturemaintenance.
Theminimumsizeofthecopperwireofthiscableshallbe0.5mm.Thecoppershallbepreferablytinned.
1.3.39.3 SurfaceTelecommunicationCableWiring
Surface wiring should not be a choice during designing a building wiring. However, if the building is already
constructed or under compulsory conditions or for extension of an existing network one may go for surface
wiring.Thesame2pairPVCinsulatedPVCsheathedannealedcoppertelecommunicationcableshallbeusedfor
this purpose. Wiring shall be done either by using channels or by using PVC conduits following the power line
surfacewiringmethodsmentionsearlier.
1.3.39.4 TelecommunicationsOutlets
Wall mounted Telecommunication outlets shall contain RJ11 or RJ45 connectors / jacks (shuttered). For simple
telephone connection RJ11 shuttered jacks are sufficient. The outlet box shall have a backbox which may be
made of the same polymer material as the front panel or shall be made using18 SWG GI sheet or 18 SWGMS
sheetbutpaintedwithtwocoatsofsyntheticenamelpaint.
1.3.39.5 TelephoneDProom,PatchPanelRoomandDigitalPABXroom
Telephone DP room, Patch Panel Room and PABX room should be located near the vertical riser duct of the
buildingsothattheincoming50pairor100pairundergroundTelephonecablecanbeterminatedintheDP/MDF
869
Part8
BuildingServices
or Patch Panel for distribution among the Flats of aMultistoried Residential Building or among the offices of a
MultistoriedCommercial/Officebuilding.
If a Digital Telephone PABX is to be installed then this can be installed in the same room. A separate Earth
ElectrodewithearthleadwirewillberequiredforthePABX.
1.3.40 TelevisionAntennas/CableTelevisionsystem
Inamultistoriedresidential/Officebuilding,televisionantennasshallbeplacedatonesuitablysitedantenna
location on roof top and connect these to individual flats/ residences/ Offices in the same building by coaxial
cablesthroughconcealedconduits.
1.3.40.1 CableworkforTelevisionAntennas/CableTelevisionsystem
Verticalductandeasyentrytoeachflats/officesmustbeprovidedassharpbendingofthesecablesisdifficult
andharmfultothecables.Thesecablesmustnotbeplacedinthesameconduitwithpowercables.Adistanceof
atleast350mmmustbemaintainedifaportionrunsinparallelwiththepowercableconduits.
RF and Video cables shall be PVC sheathed Coaxial Cables shall be made with solid Copper centre conductor,
foamedpolytheneinsulatedandfurthersealedAlluminiumfoiltapedandCopperwirebraided.
1.3.40.2 TelevisionAntennaOutlets/CableTelevisionsystemoutlets
WallmountedTelevisioncoaxialcableoutletsshallcontainhighqualitycoaxialconnectors/jacks.Theoutletbox
shallhaveabackboxwhichmaybemadeofthesamepolymermaterialasthefrontpanelor18SWGGIsheetor
18SWGMSsheetmadebutpaintedwithtwocoatsofsyntheticenamelpaint.
1.3.41 DataCommunicationNetworkforLANandInternetServicesinsideaBuilding
Data Communication Network for LAN and Internet Services inside a Building may be installed using Cat 6
unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cables in a concealed manner following the concealed wiring power cables
installation procedure mentioned in the wiring methods section of this document. Each of the cables will be
terminatedatoneendatthe8P8C(RJ45)connectorbaseddatasocketoutletboardintherequiredroomsatthe
powersocketlevel.Ontheotherend,thecablewillbeterminatedinthepatchpanel.Fromthepatchpanelupto
the data socket outlet the cable shall be in one piece i.e., no joints will be allowed. As a result the concealed
conduit work needs to be done carefully to have a straight line path and without any bend in the roof slab.
Sufficientpullboxeswillberequiredintheroofslab.Pullboxwillalsobeneededclosetotheverticalbendnear
thebendandceilingatanydownwarddropoftheconduit.Theconduitsmusthave20SWGGIpullwiresduring
layingforpullingthecableslater.
Because of the nature of these cables more clearances are needed inside the PVC conduits compared to the
powercables.
If the conduits are running parallel to the power cables then there should be at least a distance of 410mm
betweenthesetwo.
RecentlyCat.7cablesareemergingasabetterchoiceinplaceofCat.6cables.
1.3.42 FireDetectionandAlarmSysteminsideaBuilding
ThemajorpartsofaFireDetectionandAlarmSysteminsideaBuildingmaybelistedas
a) AnumberofdifferenttypesofFireDetectors/detectiondeviceswiredinanumberofradialcircuits
b) ManualCallpoints
c) AcentralcontrolpanelforFireDetection
d) Anumberofalarmsounders/alarmdeviceswiredinanumberofradialcircuits
e) CablesforwiringtheFireDetectors/detectiondevices
f)
Cablesforwiringthealarmsounders/alarmdevices
ControlPanel
Thecontrolpanelwillindicateinwhichdetectioncircuit(zone)analarmorfaultconditionhasbeengenerated
andwilloperate commonor zonalsounders and auxiliarycommands (for example doorrelease orFireBrigade
signaling).
Detectors
870
Vol.3
Chapter1
A number of types of Detectors (smoke detectors, heat detectors, ionisation smoke detectors, Optical beam
smokedetectors,Optoheatdetectors)Fortheinstallation
AlarmDevices
Alarmdevicesfallintotwotypes,audibleandvisual.Theaudibletypesaremostcommon,withavarietyoftypes
being available from bells to all kinds of different electronic sounders including those containing prerecorded
spokenmessages.Thechoiceofdeviceisdependentonlocalpreference,legalrequirementandtheneedtohave
atonedistinctfromallotherbuildingaudiblealarms.
SpeechalarmsorlinkstoPAsystemsovercomesomeofthecomplacentresponsestowarningtonesandcanbe
usedtogoodeffectwhencarryingoutregularfiretestsinbuildingswheretherearemanypeopleunfamiliarwith
the regular routines such as hotels. Finally visual alarms are to be used where the hard of hearing may be
occupyingabuildingorwheretheambientnoiseissuch(above90dBA)thataudiblewarningmaynotbeheard,
wherehearingprotectorsareinuseorwherethesounderlevelswouldneedtobesohighthattheymightimpair
thehearingofthebuildingoccupant.
AudibleandVisualAlarmDevices
The audible types are most common, with a variety of types being available from bells to all kinds of different
electronicsoundersincludingthosecontainingprerecordedspokenmessages.Thechoiceofdeviceisdependent
onlocalpreference,legalrequirementandtheneedtohaveatonedistinctfromallotherbuildingaudiblealarms.
Cablesforfiredetectors
BS58391:2002introducedmoreonerousrequirementsforthetypesofcablesusedinfiredetectionandalarm
systems. Fireproof cables should now be used for all parts of the system and enhanced fire resistance cables
shouldbeusedwherethereisarequirementtoensurecableintegrityoveralongerperiodoftime.Forexample
whenconnectingtoalarmsoundersorwheretheconnectionbetweensubpanelsprovidesanypartofthealarm
signalpath.
Fire alarm cables should be segregated from the cables of other systems; they should be clearly marked,
preferablycolouredredandshouldberoutedthroughpartsofthebuildingthatprovideminimumrisk.Thislatter
pointisparticularlyrelevantwheretheuseofthebuildingisbeingchangedforexampleifafuelstoreisbeing
moved.
SpecificAreasofApplicationforFireDetectionandAlarmEquipment
The BS5839 suite of standards relate to specific areas of application for fire detection and alarm equipment.
Specifically part 1 relates to public premises and part 6 relates to residential premises. BS58391 is a
comprehensive code of practice for fire detection and alarm systems, the requirements relate to both life and
property protection and the standard includes much advice and comment with is very useful in informing the
buildingownerorsystemspecifierofthebackgroundtotherequirements.
CodesofPracticeForDifferentTypesOfFireProtectionSystems
The parts of BS7273 are codes of practice for different types of fire protection systems. Generally this is
consideredseparatelytofirealarmsystemsbuttheremaybeoccasionswhereatradeoffcanbemadebetween
thetwosystems,orwherethetwosystemsinteractandmustbeinterfaced.
Standards Relates To The Design And Performance of Items of Equipment That Make up a Fire Detection And
AlarmSystem
The EN54 suite of standards relates to the design and performance of items of equipment that make up a fire
detection and alarm system. Each part relates to a different piece of equipment, for example part 3 relates to
alarmdevices,part11tocallpoints,part4topowersuppliesetc.
FireDetectionZones
Fire detection zones are essentially a convenient way of dividing up a building to assist in quickly locating the
positionofafire.BS58391hassomespecificrecommendationswithrespecttodetectionzones.
Wiring of the fire Detection and alarm system will be done using the concealed wiring and the surface wiring
methodsdescribedinthepowerlinewiringsectionofthisdocument.
1.3.43 CCTVSysteminsideaBuilding
InstallationofCablenetworkforCCTVSysteminsideaBuildingshallbedonefollowingtheguidelinesgivenfor
CableworkforTelevisionAntennas/CableTelevisionsystemearlierinthisdocument.
871
Part8
BuildingServices
ForwiringofthepowerlinesrequiredfortheInstallationofCCTVSysteminsideaBuildingwillbedoneusingthe
concealedwiringandthesurfacewiringmethodsdescribedinthepowerlinewiringsectionofthisdocument.
1.3.44 DesignandInstallationofAccessControlSystem
WiringoftheInstallationofAccessControlSystemswillbedoneusingtheconcealedwiringandthesurfacewiring
methodsdescribedinthepowerlinewiringsectionofthisdocument.
1.3.45 InstallationofElectronicSecuritySystems
WiringoftheInstallationofElectronicSecuritySystemswillbedoneusingtheconcealedwiringandthesurface
wiringmethodsdescribedinthepowerlinewiringsectionofthisdocument.
1.3.46 QualificationoftheContractorofElectricalandElectronicEngineeringWorksina
Building
A Contractorwho will be working with the Electrical and Electronic Engineering Works in a Building must have
appropriateabclicensefromtheElectricalLicensingBoardofGovernmentofBangladesh.
Thecontractormusthavesufficientnumberofwelltrainedandexperiencedtechnicianstoexecutethejob.For
bigvolumeofwork,thecontractormusthaveatleastoneGraduateElectricalEngineerassignedforthejob.
1.3.47 InspectionandTesting
1.3.47.1 General
Everyinstallationshall,oncompletionandbeforebeingenergized,beinspectedandtested.Themethodsoftest
shallbesuchthatnodangertopersonsorpropertyordamagetoequipmentoccursevenifthecircuittestedis
defective.
1.3.47.2 Periodicinspectionandtesting
Periodicinspectionandtestingshallbecarriedoutinordertomaintaintheinstallationinasoundconditionafter
puttingitintoservice.Whereanadditionistobemadetothefixedwiringofanexistinginstallation,thelatter
shallbeexaminedforcompliancewiththerecommendationsoftheCode.
1.3.47.3 CheckingtheconformitywiththeBangladeshStandard
The individual equipment and materials which form part of the installation shall generally conform to the
relevantBangladeshStandard(BDS)whereverapplicable.IfthereisnorelevantBangladeshstandardspecification
foranyitem,theseshallbeapprovedbytheappropriateauthority.
1.3.47.4
Inspectionofthecolouridentificationofcablesofwiring
For single phase, Red for Live, Black for Neutral, Gree+Yellow bicolour for ECC. For three phase, Red for L1,
YellowforL2,BlueforL3,BlackforNeutralandGree+YellowbicolourforECCandEarthLeadWire.
1.3.47.5
InspectionofEarthingTerminal,EarthingBus
InspectionshouldbemadetocheckwhetherBrassmadeEarthingTerminalshavebeenprovidedinsidethemetal
backboxesoftheswitchboardsandsocketboards(weldedorscrewedtothemetalbackbox)andwhetherthe
ECCsofthesubcircuithavebeenterminatedintheseterminals.Inspectionshouldbemadetocheckwhetherat
leastonecopperEarthingBusBarhasbeenprovidedintheBDBs,SDBs,FDBs,DBs,MDBsandtheLTpaneland
whether ECCs have been appropriately terminated in these Busbars using hexagonal head brass bolt and nuts.
AlsoitshouldbecheckedwhethertheEarthLeadWireshavebeenproperlyterminatedintheLTPanel/MDB/DB
asappropriate.
1.3.47.6
InsulationTests
InsulationtestisoneofthemostimportanttestsforElectricalInstallationsinaBuilding.
1.3.47.6.1
Insulationresistancetestshallbemadeonallelectricalequipment,usingaselfcontainedinstrumentsuchasthe
directindicatingohmmeterofthegeneratortype.DCpotentialshallbeusedinthesetestsandshallbeasfollows
oranappropriateMeggar:
872
Vol.3
Chapter1
Circuitsbelow230volts 500voltsMeggar
Circuitsbetween230voltsto400volts
1000voltsMeggar
1.3.47.6.2
Theminimumacceptableinsulationresistancevalueis5megaohmsforLTlines.Beforemakingconnectionsat
the ends of each cable run, the insulation resistance measurement test of each cable shall be made. Each
conductor of a multicore cable shall be tested individually to all other conductors of the group and also to
earth.Ifinsulationresistancetestreadingsarefoundtobelessthanthespecifiedminimuminanyconductor,the
entirecableshallbereplaced.
1.3.47.6.3
Alltransformers,switchgearsetc.shallbesubjecttoaninsulationresistancemeasurementtesttogroundafter
installationbutbeforeanywiringisconnected.Insulationtestsshallbemadebetweenopencontactsofcircuit
breakers,switchesetc.andbetweeneachphaseandearth.
1.3.47.7
EarthResistanceTestandtheContinuityResistanceTest
1.3.47.7.1
Earth resistance tests shall be made on the system, separating and reconnecting each earth connection using
earthresistancemeter.
1.3.47.7.2
The electrical resistance of the Earth Continuity Conductor of different segment shall be measured separately
usingsensitivedigitalOhmmeterorbymeansofresistancebridgeinstrument.TheresistanceoftheEarthLead
Wire shall be measured from the Earthing Busbar of the LT Panel / MDB /DB and the Earth Electrode(s). The
electricalresistanceofanysectionshallnotexceed1ohm.
1.3.47.7.3
Wheremorethanoneearthingsetsareinstalled,theearthresistancebetweentwosetsshallbemeasuredby
meansofsensitivedigitalOhmmeterorbymeansofresistancebridgeinstrument.Theearthresistancebetween
twosetsshallnotexceed1ohm.
1.3.47.7.4 OperationTests
Current load measurement shall be made on equipment and on all power and lighting feeders usingClampon
Ammeters.
Thecurrentreadingshallbetakenineachphasewireandineachneutralwirewhilethecircuitorequipmentis
operatingunderactualloadconditions.
ClamponAmmetersarerequiredtotakecurrentreadingswithoutinterruptingacircuit.
All light fittings shall be tested electrically and mechanically to check whether they comply with the standard
specifications.
Fluorescentlightfittingsshallbetestedsothatwhenfunctioningnoflickeringorchokesingingisfelt.
1.3.47.8
InspectionoftheInstallation
Oncompletionofwiringageneralinspectionshallbecarriedoutbycompetentpersonnelinordertoverifythat
theprovisionsofthisCode andthat of theElectricityAct ofBangladeshhavebeencomplied with.Acertificate
maybeissuedonsatisfactorycompletionoftheworkinaformatasshowninAppendixC.Itemstobeinspected
aredetailedinthefollowingsections.
1.3.47.8.1 InspectionofSubstationInstallations
Insubstationinstallations,itshallbecheckedwhether:
a) Theinstallationhasbeencarriedoutinaccordancewiththeapproveddrawings;
b) Phasetophaseandphasetoearthclearancesareprovidedasrequired;
c) All equipment are efficiently earthed and properly connected to the required number of earth
electrodes;
d) Therequiredgroundclearancetoliveterminalsisprovided;
873
Part8
BuildingServices
e) Suitablefencingisprovidedwithgatewithlockablearrangements;
f)
The requirednumber of caution boards,firefighting equipment, operatingrods,rubber mats,etc., are

keptinthesubstation;
g) Incaseofindoorsubstationsufficientventilationanddrainingarrangementsaremade;
h) Allcabletrencheshavecoversofnoninflammablematerial;
i)
Freeaccessibilityisprovidedforallequipmentfornormaloperation;
j)
Allnameplatesarefixedandtheequipmentarefullypainted;
k) Allconstructionmaterialsandtemporaryconnectionsareremoved;
l)
Oillevel,busbartightness,transformertapposition,etc.areinorder;
m) Earthpipetroughsandcoverslabsareprovidedforearthelectrodes/earthpitsandtheneutralandLA
earthpitsaremarkedforeasyidentification;
n) EarthelectrodesareofGIpipesorCIpipesorcopperplates.Forearthconnections,brassboltsandnuts
withleadwashersareprovidedinthepipes/plates;
o) Earth pipe troughs and oil sumps/pits are free from rubbish, dirt and stone jelly and the earth
connectionsarevisibleandeasilyaccessible;
p) HTandLTpanelsandswitchgearsareallverminanddampproofandallunusedopeningsorholesare
blockedproperly;
q) Theearthbusbarshavetightconnectionsandcorrosionfreejointsurfaces;
r)
Controlswitchfusesareprovidedatanaccessibleheightfromground;
s)
Adequateheadroomisavailableinthetransformerroomforeasytoppingupofoil,maintenance,etc.;
t)
Safetydevices,horizontalandvertical barriers, bus barcovers/shrouds, automaticsafety shutters/door

interlock,handleinterlocketc.aresafeandinreliableoperationinallpanelsandcubicles;
u) Clearancesinthefront,rearandsidesofthemainHTandLTandsubswitchboardsareadequate;
v) The switches operate freely; the 3 blades make contact at the same time, the arcing horns contact in
advance;andthehandlesareprovidedwithlockingarrangements,
w) Insulatorsarefreefromcracks,andareclean;
x) Intransformers,thereisnooilleak;
y) Connectionstobushingintransformersarelightandmaintaingoodcontact;
z)
Bushingsarefreefromcracksandareclean;
aa) Accessoriesoftransformerslikebreathers,ventpipe,buchholzrelay,etc.areinorder;
bb) Connectionstogasrelayintransformersareinorder;
cc) Intransformers,oilandwindingtemperaturearesetforspecificrequirementstopumpout;
dd) Incaseofcablecellars,adequatearrangementsexisttopumpoffwaterthathasenteredduetoseepage
orotherreasons;and
ee) AllincomingandoutgoingcircuitsofHTandLTpanelsareclearlyandindeliblylabeledforidentifications.
1.3.47.8.2 InspectionofLowTension(LT)Installation
InLowTension(LT)orMediumVoltage(MV)Installations,itshallbecheckedwhether:
a) All blocking materials that are used for safe transportation in switchgears, contactors, relays, etc. are
removed;
b) Allconnectionstotheearthingsystemhaveprovisionsforperiodicalinspection;
c) Sharpcablebendsareavoidedandcablesaretakeninasmoothmannerinthetrenchesoralongsidethe
wallsandceilingsusingsuitablesupportclampsatregularintervals;
d) Suitablelinkedswitchorcircuitbreakerorlockablepushbuttonisprovidednearthemotors/apparatus
forcontrollingsupplytothemotor/apparatusinaneasilyaccessiblelocation;
e) Twoseparateanddistinctearthconnectionsareprovidedforthemotorapparatus;
f)
874
Control switch fuse is provided at an accessible height from ground for controlling supply to overhead
travellingcrane,hoists,overheadbusbartrunking;
Vol.3
Chapter1
g) The metal rails on which the crane travels are electrically continuous and earthed and bonding of rails
andearthingatbothendsaredone;
h) Fourcorecablesareusedforoverheadtravellingcraneandportableequipment,thefourthcorebeing
usedforearthing,andseparatesupplyforlightingcircuitistaken;
i)
Ifflexiblemetallichoseisusedforwiringtomotorsandotherequipment,thewiringisenclosedtothe
fulllengths,andthehosesecuredproperlybyapprovedmeans;
j)
Thecablesarenottakenthroughareaswheretheyarelikelytobedamagedorchemicallyaffected;
k) Thescreensandarmoursofthecablesareearthedproperly;
l)
Thebeltsofbeltdrivenequipmentareproperlyguarded;
m) Adequateprecautionsaretakentoensurethatnolivepartsaresoexposedastocausedanger;
n) InstalledAmmetersandvoltmetersworkproperlyandaretested;and
o) Therelaysareinspectedvisuallybymovingcoversfordepositsofdustsorotherforeignmatter.
1.3.47.8.3 InspectionofOverheadLines
Foroverheadlines,everycaremustbetakensothat:
a) Allconductorsandapparatusincludinglivepartsthereofareinaccessible;
b) Thetypesandsizeofsupportsaresuitablefortheoverheadlines/conductorsusedandareinaccordance
withapproveddrawingandstandards;
c) Clearances from ground level to the lowest conductor of overhead lines, sag conditions, etc. are in
accordancewiththerelevantstandard;
d) Whereoverheadlinescrosstheroadssuitablegroundedguardingshallbeprovidedatroadcrossings,
e) Whereoverheadlinescrosscrosseachotherorareinproximitywithoneanother,suitableguardingshall
beprovidedatcrossingstoprotectagainstpossibilityofthelinescomingincontactwithoneanother;
f)
Everyguardwireshallbeproperlygrounded/earthed;
g) Thetype,sizeandsuitabilityoftheguardingarrangementprovidedshallbeadequate;
h) Stays cables must be provided suitably with the overhead line carrying poles as required and shall be
efficientlyearthedatthebottomandandshallbeprovidedwithsuitablestayinsulatorsofappropriate
voltages;
i)
AnticlimbingdevicesandDangerBoard/CautionBoardNoticesareprovidedonallHTsupports;
j)
Clearances along the route are checked and all obstructions such as trees/branches and shrubs are
clearedontheroutetotherequireddistanceoneitherside;
k) Clearancebetweentheliveconductorandtheearthedmetalpartsareadequate;and
l)
For the service connections tapped off from the overhead lines, cutouts of adequate capacity are
provided.
1.3.47.8.4 InspectionofLightingCircuits
Thelightingcircuitsshallbecheckedtoseewhether:
a) Woodenboxesandpanelsareavoidedinfactoriesformountingthelightingboards,switchcontrols,etc.;
b) Neutrallinksareprovidedindoublepoleswitchfuseswhichareusedforlightingcontrol,andnofuseis
providedintheneutral;
c) Theplugpointsinthelightingcircuitareall3pintype,thethirdpinbeingsuitablyearthed;
d) Tamperproofinterlockedswitchsocketandplugareusedforlocationseasilyaccessible;
e) Lightingwiringinfactoryareaisenclosedinconduitandtheconduitisproperlyearthed,oralternatively,
armouredcablewiringisused;
f)
Aseparate earth wire isruninthe lightinginstallationto provideearthing for plug points,fixturesand

equipment;
g) Proper connectors and junction boxes are used wherever joints are in conductors or cross over of
conductorstakesplace;
h) Cartridgefuseunitsarefittedwithcartridgefusesonly;
875
Part8
BuildingServices
i)
Clearandpermanentidentificationmarksarepaintedinalldistributionboards,switchboards,submain
boardsandswitchesasnecessary;
j)
The polarity has been checked and all fuses and single pole switches are connected on the phase
conductoronlyandwiringiscorrectlyconnectedtosocketoutlets;
k) Spareknockoutsprovidedindistributionboardsandswitchfusesareblocked;
l)
Theendsofconduitsenclosingthewiringleadsareprovidedwitheboniteorothersuitablebushes;
m) Thefittingsandfixturesusedforoutdooruseareallofweatherproofconstruction,andsimilarly,fixtures,
fittingsandswitchgearsusedinthehazardousareaareofflameproofapplication;
n) Proper terminal connectors are used for termination of wires (conductors and earth leads) and all
strandsareinsertedintheterminals;
o) Flatendedscrewsareusedforfixingconductortotheaccessories;
p) Flatwashersbackedupbyspringwashersareusedformakingendconnections.
1.3.47.8.5 AccessibilityofConnectionsandCablejointsforInspection
Exceptforthefollowing,everyconnectionandjointshallbeaccessibleforinspection,testingandmaintenance:
a) acompoundfilledorencapsulatedjoint
b) aconnectionbetweenacoldtailandaheatingelement(e.g.aceilingandfloorheatingsystem,apipe
traceheatingsystem)
c) ajointmadebywelding,soldering,brazingorcompressiontool
d) ajointformattingpartoftheequipmentcomplyingwiththeappropriateproductstandard.
RelevantAppendices:
Appendix8.1.A MaximumDemandandDiversity
Appendix8.1.B UsefulTablesRelatingtoConductorSizes
Appendix8.1.C CompletionCertificateForm
876
Vol.3
Chapter 2
AIRCONDITIONING,HEATINGAND
VENTILATION
2.1
GENERAL
2.1.1
Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to provide minimum standards for regulating and controlling the design,
construction, installation, quality of materials, location, operation, performance, maintenance and use of air
conditioning,heatingandventilationsystemstoensureacceptableconditionsofairinsidethebuildingrequired
forhumanhealth,safetyandwelfarewithenergyconservation.
2.2
Scope
2.2.1
The provisions of this Code shall apply to erection, installation, alteration, repair, relocation, replacement,
additionto,useandmaintenanceofanyairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystems.
2.2.2
Additions,alterations,repairsandreplacementofequipmentorsystemsshallcomplywiththeprovisionsfornew
equipmentandsystemsexceptasotherwiseprovidedinSec2.2.2.1.
2.2.3
Where,inanyspecificcase,differentsectionsofthisCodespecifydifferentmaterials,methodsofconstructionor
other requirements, the most restrictive one shall govern. Where there is a conflict between a general
requirementandaspecificrequirement,thespecificrequirementshallbeapplicable.
2.2.4
TheregulationsofthisCodearenotintended,andshallnotbeunderstoodtopermitviolationoftheprovisionsof
otherordinances,regulationsorofficialrequirementsinforce.
2.3
Application
Itshallbeunlawfultoinstall,extend,alter,repairormaintainairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemsin
oradjacenttobuildingsexceptincompliancewiththisCode.
2.3.1
ExistingSystems
a) Existing Installations: Airconditioning, heating and ventilation systems in existence at the time of
adoptionofthisCodemayhavetheiruse,maintenanceorrepaircontinuedif theuse,maintenanceor
repair is in accordance with original design and location and no hazard to life, health or property has
beencreatedbysuchsystem.
b) Additions,AlterationsorRepairs:Additions,alterationsorrepairsmaybemadetoanyairconditioning,
heatingorventilationsystemwithoutrequiringtheexistingsystemtocomplywithalltherequirements
ofthisCode,providedtheaddition,alterationorrepairconformstotherequirementsofanewsystem.
Part8
BuildingServices
875
Part8
BuildingServices
Additions,alterationsorrepairsshallnotmakeanexistingsystemunsafe,createunhealthyoroverloaded
conditions.
c) ChangesinBuildingOccupancy:Airconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemswhichareapartofany
building or structure undergoing a change in use or occupancy, as defined in the Building Code, shall
complywithallrequirementsofthisCodewhichmaybeapplicabletothenewuse,oroccupancy.
d) Maintenance: All airconditioning, heating and ventilation systems, materials and appurtenances, both
existingandnew,andallpartsthereofshallbemaintainedinproperoperatingconditioninaccordance
with the original design and in a safe and hazard free condition. All devices or safeguards which are
required by this Code shall be maintained in conformance with this Code. The owner or the owner's
designatedagentshallberesponsibleformaintenanceofthesystemsandequipment.
e) Moved Buildings: Airconditioning, heating and ventilation systems or equipment which is a part of
buildingsorstructuresmovedtoanotherpremisesshallcomplywiththeprovisionsofthisCodefornew
installations.
2.3.2
AlternativeMaterialsandMethodsofConstruction
The provisionsofthis code are not intended toprevent the use of anymaterialormethod of constructionnot
specifically prescribed by this Code, provided any such alternative material and/or method of construction has
beenapprovedandtheuseauthorizedbytheAuthority.
The Authority shall require that sufficient evidence or proof be submitted to substantiate any claims made
regardingtheuseofalternatives.
2.3.3
Modifications
WhenevertherearepracticaldifficultiesinvolvedincarryingoutanyoftheprovisionsofthisCode,theAuthority,
withinthelimitationssetforthinPart2mayallowmodificationsforindividualcases.Themodificationsshallbein
conformitywiththeintentandpurposeofthisCodeandthatsuchmodificationshallnotlessenhealth,lifeand
firesafetyrequirements.
2.4
Terminology
ThissectionprovidesanalphabeticallistofthetermsusedinandapplicableinthischapteroftheCode.Incaseof
thissectionshallgovernforinterpretationoftheprovisionsofhischapter.
ABSORPTION: A process whereby a material extracts one or more substances present in an atmosphere or
mixtureofgasesorliquidsaccompaniedbythematerialsphysicaland/orchemicalchanges.
ABSORPTION REFRIGERATING SYSTEM: A refrigerating system in which refrigerant gas evaporated in the
evaporatorisabsorbedintheabsorberbyanabsorbentsolution.Thisalsoincludesageneratorforseparationof
refrigerantfromtheabsorbentsolution,acondensertoliquefytherefrigerantandanexpansiondevice.
ADSORPTION: The action, associated with the surface adherence, of a material in extracting one or more
substances present in an atmosphere or mixture of gases and liquids, unaccompanied by physical or chemical
change.
AIR CHANGE: Introducing new, cleansed, or recirculated air to conditioned space, measured by the number of
completechangesperunittime.
AIR TERMINALS: A round, square, rectangular, or linear air outlet or inlet device used in the air distribution
system.
AIR,OUTSIDE:Externalair;atmosphereexteriortorefrigeratedorconditionedspace;ambient(surrounding)air.
AIR, RECIRCULATED: The part of return air passed through the airconditioner before being resupplied to the
conditionedspace.AlsoknownasAIR,RETURN.
AIR,RETURN:SeeAIR,RECIRCULATED.
AIRCONDITIONING:Theprocessoftreatingairsoastocontrolsimultaneouslyitstemperature,humidity,purity,
distribution,pressureandairmovementtomeetthethermalrequirementsofthespace.
AIRHANDLINGUNIT:Anequipmentcomprisedofcoolingand/orheatingcoilandablowerorfanwithelectric
motorusedforthepurposeofcooling/heatinganddistributingsupplyairtoaroom,spaceorarea.
876
Vol.3
Airconditioning,HeatingandVentilation
Chapter2
BLOWER:Afanusedtoforceairunderpressure.
BOILER:Aclosedvesselinwhichaliquidisvaporized.
BRINE:Anyliquidcooledbytherefrigerantandusedfortheheattransmissionwithoutachangeinitsstate.This
alsoincludeschilledwater.
CHIMNEY:Primarilyaverticalshaftenclosingatleastoneflueforconductingfluegasestotheoutdoors.
COIL:Acoolingorheatingelementmadeofpipeortubing.
CONDENSER (Refrigerant): A heat exchanger in which the refrigerant, compressed to a suitable pressure, is
condensedtoliquidbyrejectingheattoanappropriateexternalcoolingmedium.
Whenthecondenserrejectsheattoair,thecondenseristermedasaircooedcondenser.
Whenthecondenserrejectsheattowater,thecondenseristermedaswatercooledcondenser.
Whenthecondenserrejectsheattoglycol(brine),thecondenseristermedasglycolcooledcondenser.
CONDENSING UNIT: A condensing unit is a completeset consisting of compressor(s) and condenser(s) with or
withoutreceiver.Itmaybeaircooledorwatercooled.
CONTROL:Anydeviceforregulatingasystemorcomponentinnormaloperation,manualorautomatic.
COOLINGTOWER:Anencloseddeviceforevaporativelycoolingwaterbycontactwithair.
DAMPER:Adeviceforregulatingtheflowofairorotherfluid.
DEHUMIDIFICATION:Condensationofwatervapourfromairbycoolingbelowthedewpoint.
DEWPOINTTEMPERATURE:Thetemperatureatwhichcondensationofmoisturebeginswhentheairiscooledat
samepressure.
DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: The temperature of air as registered by a thermometer, taken in such a way as to
avoiderrorsduetoradiation.
DUCTSYSTEM:Acontinuouspassagewayforthetransmissionofairwhich,inadditiontotheducts,mayinclude
ductfittings,dampers,plenums,grillesanddiffusers.
ENERGYEFFICIENCYRATIO:Theratiobetweenrefrigerationcapacityofacompleteairconditioningunitinbtu/hr
withthepowerconsumptioninwatt.
ENTHALPY:Athermalpropertyindicatingquantityofheatintheairaboveanarbitrarydatum,inkilojoulesper
kgofdryair(orbtuperpoundofdryair).
EVAPORATIVE AIR COOLING: The removal of sensible heat from the air by the adiabatic exchange of heat
betweenairandawatersprayorwettedsurface,whereintheevaporatingwaterabsorbsthesensibleheatofair.
EVAPORATOR(refrigerant):Aheatexchangerinwhichliquidrefrigerant,afterreducingitspressure(expansion),
isevaporatedbyabsorbingheatfromthemediumtobecooled.
EXFILTRATION:Thephenomenonofinsideairleakingoutofanairconditionedspace.
FAN:Anairmovingdevicecomprisingofawheelorblade,andhousingororificeplate.
FAN,TUBEAXIAL:Apropellerordisctypewheelwithinacylinderandincludingdrivingmechanismsupportsfor
eitherbeltdriveordirectconnection.
FILTER:AdevicetoremoveTypeequationhere.solidparticlesfromafluid.
FIREDAMPER:Aclosurewhichconsistsofanormallyheldopendamperinstalledinanairdistributionsystemor
in a wall or floor assembly and designed to close automatically in the event of a fire in order to isolate the
conditionedspacefromthefirezone.
FIRESEPARATION:Aconstructionassemblythatactsasabarrieragainstspreadoffireandmaynotberequired
tohaveafireresistanceratingorfireprotectionrating.
GLOBAL WARMING POTENTIAL (GWP): Global warming potential of a chemical compound is its relative
contributiontoglobalwarmingcomparedtoCarbonDioxide(CO2).
Global warming can make our planet and its climate less hospitable and more hostile to human life. Thus it is
necessary to reducereductionin emission of greenhouse gases such asCO2, SOx, NOx andrefrigerants. Long
atmosphericlifetimeofrefrigerantsresultsinglobalwarmingunlesstheemissionsarecontrolled.
GWPvaluesofsomeoftherefrigerantsaregivenbelow:
877
Part8
BuildingServices
Sl.No.
(i)
Refrigerant
R11
GWPvalues
4,000
(ii)
R12
2,400
(iii)
R22
1,700
(iv)
R123
0.02
(v)
R134a
1,300
(vi)
R407A
2,000
(vii)
R407C
1,600
(viii)
R410A
1,890
(ix)
R744(CO2)
1.00
Thevaluesindicatedaboveareforanintegrationperiodof100years.
HUMIDITY:Watervapourwithinaspace.
HUMIDITY,RELATIVE:Theratioofthepartialpressureordensityofthewatervapourintheairtothesaturation
pressureordensity,respectively,ofwatervapouratthesametemperature.
HYDRONIC:Of,relatingto,orbeingasystemofheatingorcoolingthatinvolvestransferofheatbyacirculating
fluid(aswaterorvapour)inaclosedsystemofpipes.
INDOORAIRQUALITY(IAQ):Airqualitythatreferstothenatureofconditionedairthatcirculatesthroughoutthe
space/areawhereoneworks,lives,thatis,theaironebreatheswhenindoors.
It not only refers to comfort which is affected by temperature, humidity, air movement and odors but also
harmful biological contaminants and chemicals present in the conditioned space. Poor IAQ may be a cause of
serioushealthhazard.Carbondioxidehasbeenrecognizedasthesurrogateventilationindex.
INFILTRATION:Thephenomenonofoutsideairleakingintoanairconditionedspace.
INSULATION,THERMAL:Amaterialhavingarelativelyhighresistancetoheatflowandusedprincipallytoretard
heatflow.
INTEGRATED PART LOAD VALUE (IPLV): It is the partload efficiency figure of the chiller at the ARI 550/590
standardratingpoint,measuredinkW/ton,accordingtothefollowingstandardformula:
1
0.01 0.42 0.45 0.12
where,A=kW/tonat100%load
B=kW/tonat75%load
C=kW/tonat50%load
D=kW/tonat25%load
MECHANICALREFRIGERATIONEQUIPMENT:Arefrigeratingsysteminwhichthegasevaporatedintheevaporator
iscompressedbymechanicalmeansusuallybyacompressor.Thisalsoincludescondenserandexpansiondevice.
NONSTANDARD PART LOAD VALUE (NPLV): It is the partload efficiency figure of the chiller at the rating
conditions other than the ARI standard rating point but within prescribed limits. The rating points are actually
valuesatwhichthechillerwillactuallybeoperating.
OVERALLHEATTRANSFERCOEFFICIENT(U):Thetimerateofheatflowperunitarea(normaltotheflow)from
thefluidonthewarmsideofabarriertothefluidonthecoldside,perunittemperaturedifferencebetweenthe
twofluids.
OZONE DEPLETION POTENTIAL (ODP): Ozone depletion potential of a chemical compound is its relative
contributiontothedepletionoftheozonelayercomparedtoCFC11.
ODPvaluesofsomeoftherefrigerantsareasfollows:
878
Vol.3
Chapter2
Sl.No.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
Refrigerant
R11
R12
R22
R123
R134a
R407A
R407C
R410A
ODPvalues
1.000
1.00
0.050
0.02
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONER: An encased assembly of equipment/machinery for thermal conditioning

(cooling/heating)ofairalongwithcleaningandcirculationofairtomaintaininternalthermalenvironmentofan
airconditionedspace.Itincludesaprimesourceofrefrigerationforcoolinganddehumidificationwithorwithout
internalandexternalairdistributionducting.Itmayalsoincludemeansforheating,humidifyingandventilating
air.Theseunitsmaybefloormounted,wallmountedorceilingmountedtype.Theymayprovidefreedeliveryor
ducteddeliveryofconditionedair.
Thesemachinesareequippedwithaircooledorwatercooledcondenser(s).Thesemachinesareequippedwith
reciprocating,rotaryorscrollcompressor(s).
PLENUM:Anaircompartmentorchambertowhichoneormoreductsareconnectedandwhichformspartofan
airdistributionsystem.
POSITIVEVENTILATION:Thesupplyofoutsideairbymeansofamechanicaldevice,suchasafan.
PSYCHROMETRY: The science involving thermodynamic properties of moist air and the effect of atmospheric
moistureonmaterialsandhumancomfort.Italsoincludesmethodsofcontrollingpropertiesofmoistair.
PSYCHROMETRICCHART:Achartgraphicallyrepresentingthethermodynamicpropertiesofmoistair.
REFRIGERANT:Thefluidusedforheattransferinarefrigeratingsystem,whichabsorbsheatatalowtemperature
andalowpressureofthefluidandrejectsheatatahighertemperatureandahigherpressureofthefluid,usually
involvingchangesofphaseofthefluid.
REHEATING:Theprocessbywhichair,whichhasbeencooleddowninordertocondenseoutpartofthemoisture
itcontains,isheatedagaininordertoraiseitstemperaturetoasuitablelevel.
RETURN AIR GRILLE: These are fittings fixed at the openings through which air is taken out from the air
conditionedenclosurebyanairconditioningplantorunit.
ROOM AIRCONDITIONER: A factory made, encased assembly designed as a selfcontained unit primarily for
mountinginawindoworthroughthewallorasaconsole.Itisdesignedtoprovidefreedeliveryofconditionedair
toanenclosedspace,roomorzone(conditionedspace).Itincludesaprimesourceofrefrigerationforcoolingand
dehumidification and means for the circulation and cleaning of air. It may also include means for heating,
humidifying,ventilatingorexhaustingair.
SHADEFACTOR:Therationofinstantaneousheatgainthroughfenestrationwithshadingdevicetothatthrough
thefenestrationwithoutshadingdevice.
SUPPLYAIR:Theairthathasbeenpassedthroughtheconditioningapparatusandtakenthroughtheductsystem
anddistributedintheconditionedspace.
SPLITAIRCONDITIONER:Asplitpackageairconditionerissameasthepackagedairconditionerexceptingthat
the condenser or the condensing unit is built as a separate package for remote field installation and
interconnectingrefrigerantpipesbetweenindoorunitandoutdoorunitisconsideredasapackage.
SUPPLYAIRDIFFUSERS/GRILLES:Thesearefittingsfixedattheopeningsthroughwhichairisdeliveredintothe
airconditionedenclosurebyanairconditioningplantorunit.
TEMPERATURE,DRYBULB:Thetemperatureofairasregisteredbyathermometer.
TEMPERATURE, WET BULB: The temperature at which water, by evaporating into air, may bring the air to
saturation adiabatically at the same temperature. Wetbulb temperature (without qualification) is the
temperatureindicatedbyawetbulbpsychrometerconstructedandusedaccordingtospecifications.
879
Part8
BuildingServices
THERMAL TRANSMITTANCE: Thermal transmission per unit time through unit area of the given building unit
dividedbythetemperaturedifferencebetweentheairorsomeotherfluidoneithersideofthebuildingunitin
steadystateconditions.
THERMAL ENERGY STORAGE: Storage of thermal energy, sensible, latent or combination thereof for use in
centralsystemofairconditioningorrefrigeration.Itusesaprimarysourceofrefrigerationforcoolingandstoring
thermalenergyforreuseatpeakdemandorforbackupasplanned.
VARIABLEREFRIGERATIONSYSTEM:Arefrigeratingsystemwhererefrigerantflowthroughevaporator(s)is(are)
variable. The system is usually comprised of digital scroll compressor(s)/variable speed scroll compressor(s),
condenser(s),evaporator(s),expansiondevice(s)andcontrols.
VENTILATION: The process of supplying and/or removing air by natural or mechanical means to or from any
space.Suchairmayormaynothavebeenconditioned.
WATER CONDITIONING: The treatment of water circulating in a hydronic system, to make it suitable for air
conditioningsystemduetoitseffectontheeconomicsoftheairconditioningplant.
Untreated water used in air conditioning system may create problems such as scale formation, corrosion and
organicgrowth.Appraisalofthewatersupplysourceincludingchemicalanalysisanddeterminationofdissolves
solidsisnecessarytodeviseaproperwaterconditioningprogram.
2.5
GeneralProvisions
2.5.1
Air conditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be designed, constructed, installed, operated and
maintainedinaccordancewithgoodengineeringpracticesuchasdescribedintheASHRAE(AmericanSocietyof
Heating, Refrigerating and Airconditioning Engineers) Handbooks, HI (Hydraulic Institute of USA) manuals and
relevantchaptersoflatestBNBC.
2.5.2
All electrical work in connection with airconditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be carried out in
accordancewiththeprovisionsoflatestBangladeshElectricityActandtheprovisionsofanyofitsregulationsand
byelaws,andshallalsocomplywiththerequirementsofChapter1ofPart8.
2.5.3
All plumbing work in connection with airconditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be carried out in
accordancewiththeprovisionsandguidelinesofASHRAEhandbooksandHImanuals.
2.5.4
Allgasandfuelpipinginconnectionwithairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemshallbecarriedoutin
accordancewiththeprovisionsofChapter8ofPart8.
2.5.5
FireSafety
Installationsofequipmentofairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemshallconformtotherequirements
ofPart4.
2.6
PLANNING
2.6.1
General
2.6.1.1
880
All relevant aspects of airconditioning, heating and ventilation system installations shall be
analyzedandevaluatedproperlyduringtheplanningstageofthebuildinginordertodetermine
thenecessaryprovisionstobekeptinthebuildingforproper andsafeinstallationofthesystem
machinery,equipmentandotherfacilities.
Vol.3
2.6.1.2
Chapter2
Necessaryparticularsofelectricalrequirementsofairconditioning,heatingorventilationsystem
shall be determined early in the planning stage to include it in the electrical provisions of the
building.
2.6.1.3
Where necessary, all plans, calculations, specifications and data for airconditioning, heatingand
ventilationsystemservingallbuildingsandalloccupancieswithinthescopeoftheCodeshallbe
suppliedtotheAuthority,forreviewpurposes.
2.6.1.4
Designairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemtakingconsiderationforenergyefficiency
and energy conservation. Provide data to design architect to keep provisions in the building for
reductionofenergyusagerequiredforoperationofairconditioningsystem.Optimizethedesign
bycoordinatingthedesignwiththedesignarchitectattheearlystagei.e.intheschematicdesign
phaseandcontinuallyimprovedesignduringthedesigndevelopmentprocess.
2.6.2
BuildingPlanning
2.6.2.1 OrientationofBuilding
Effectoforientationofbuildingandarrangementofrooms/spacesshallbeanalyzedintheplanningstageofthe
building to find out the most effective plan of the building in terms of building use, application of air
conditioning,heatingandventilationsystemandreductionofenergyconsumption.
2.6.2.2 BuildingDesignandUseofMaterials
Analysisshallbecarriedoutinthedesignstageforselectionofappropriateshadingdevicesandothermaterials
as set forth in Sec 2.4.1 so as to take advantage of reduction in energy consumption related airconditioning,
heatingandventilationsystem.
2.6.2.3 EquipmentSpace
Requirementsofspaceforerectionandinstallationofairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemequipment
and machinery (ducting, cooling, heating and airconditioning equipment; refrigerating machinery, boiler etc.)
shall be determined during the planning stage of the building so that it can be incorporated in the building
planning effectively. Requirements of equipment/machinery space shall be determined taking consideration of
actual equipment and machinery space; clearance space for operation; maintenance and fire prevention
requirement; access space and other requirements of this Code. Building plan shall also include adequate
provisionsfortransportationofequipmentandmachinerytoandfromequipment/machineryroom,installation
of outdoor air inlets and exhaust air outlets. Planning for equipment space shall take into consideration of
differentparametersdescribedinsection2.5and2.6.
a)EquipmentSpacePlanningforCentralAirConditioningPlant:
i)Inselectingthelocationforplantroom,theaspectsofefficiency,economyandgoodpracticeshouldbe
consideredandwhereverpossibleitshallbemadecontiguouswiththebuilding.Thisroomshallbelocatedas
centrally as possible with respect to the area to be air conditioned and shall be free from obstructing
columns.
ii)Inthecaseoflargecapacitywatercooledchillerinstallations(500TRandabove),itisadvisabletohavea
separate isolated equipment room where possible. The clear headroom below soffit of beam should be
minimum4.5mforcentrifugalchillers,andminimum3.6mforreciprocatingandscrewtypechillers.
iii)Thefloorsoftheequipmentroomsshouldbelightcoloredandfinishedsmooth.Forfloorloading,theair
conditioningengineershouldbeconsulted.
iv)Supportingofpipewithinplantroomspacesshouldbenormallyfromthefloor.However,outsideplant
roomareas,structuralprovisionsshallbemadeforsupportingthewaterpipesfromthefloor/ceilingslabs.All
floorandceilingsupportsshallbeisolatedfromthestructuretopreventtransmissionofvibrations.
v) Equipment rooms, wherever necessary, shall have provision for mechanical ventilation. In hot climate,
evaporativeaircoolingmayalsobeconsidered.
vi)Plantmachineryintheplantroomshallbeplacedonplain/reinforcedcementconcretefoundationand
providedwithantivibrationsupports.Allfoundationsshouldbeprotectedfromdamagebyprovidingepoxy
coatedanglenosing.RequirementsofSeismicRestraintSupportsmayalsobeconsidered.
881
Part8
BuildingServices
vii)Equipmentroomshouldpreferablybelocatedadjacenttoexternalwalltofacilitateequipmentmovement
andventilation.
viii) Wherever necessary, acoustic treatment should be provided in plant room space to prevent noise
transmissiontoadjacentoccupiedareas.
ix)Airconditioningplantroomshouldpreferablybelocatedclosetomainelectricalpanelofthebuildingin
ordertoavoidlargecablelengths.
x)Incasetheairconditioningplantroomislocatedinbasementfloor,equipmentmovementrouteshallbe
plannedtofacilitatefuturereplacementandmaintenance.Servicerampsorhatchingroundfloorslabshould
beprovidedinsuchcases.
xi) Floor drain channels or dedicated drainpipes in slope shall be provided within plant room space for
effectivedisposalofwastewater.Freshwaterconnectionmayalsobeprovidedintheairconditioningplant
room.
xii)Thermalenergystorage:
Incaseofcentralplants,designedwiththermalenergystorageitslocationshallbedecidedinconsultation
withtheairconditioningengineer.Thesystemmaybelocatedinplantroom,onrooftop,inopenspacenear
plantroomorburiedinopenspacenearplantroom.Forrooftopinstallations,structuralprovisionshalltake
into account load coming due to the same. For open area surface installation horizontal or vertical system
optionsshallbeconsideredandapproachladdersformanholesprovided.Buriedinstallationshalltakeinto
account loads due to movement above, of vehicles, etc. Provision for adequate expansion tank and its
connectiontothermalstoragetanksshallbemade.
b)SpacePlanningforAirCooledChillers:
i)AirCooledchillershallbeinstalledwhereadequateopenspaceisavailableforheattransferofaircooled
condensersofthechiller.
ii)Wheresuchspaceisavailableonground,itcanbeinstalledongroundprovidednoiseandhotairfromthe
chillerdonotcreateanyproblemtotheadjoiningbuilding.
iii)Roofofthebuildingisasuitablelocationforinstallationofaircooledchiller.Whenitisintendedtoinstall
aircooledchilleronroof,priorplanningisamust.Theroofshallbestructurallystrongenoughtowithstand
the dynamic load of the chiller along with chilled water pumps, pipes, valves and associated equipment
requiredforthispurpose.Advicefromanairconditioningengineershallbetakenattheplanningstage.
iv)Vibrationfromthemachineshallnottransmittotheroofstructure.Chillershallbeinstalledonseismic
restrainttypevibrationisolators.
v)Noiseoftheaircooledchillershallbeattenuatedsothatitdoesnottransmittotheoccupiedarea.Alow
speedcondenserfanwithacousticallytreatedfancylindershallbepreferable.Similarlyacousticallyencased
compressorsshallalsobepreferable.
c)PlanningEquipmentRoomforAirHandlingUnitsandPackageUnits:
i)Thisshallbelocatedascentrallyaspossibletotheconditionedareaandcontiguoustothecorridorsorother
spacesforcarryingairducts.Forfloorloading,airconditioningengineershallbeconsulted.
ii) In the case of large and multistoried buildings, independent air handling unit should be provided for each
floor. The area tobeserved bythe airhandling unit shouldbedecideddependingupon the provisionoffire
protection measures adopted. Air handling unit rooms should preferably be located vertically one above the
other.
iii) Provision should be made for the entry of fresh air. The fresh air intake shall have louvers having rain
protectionprofile,withvolumecontroldamperandbirdscreen.
iv)Inallcasesairintakesshallbesolocatedastoavoidcontaminationfromexhaustoutletsortothesourcesin
concentrationsgreaterthannormalinthelocalityinwhichthebuildingislocated.
v)Exterioropeningsforoutdoorairintakesandexhaustoutletsshallpreferablybeshieldedfromweatherand
insects.
vi) No air from any dwelling unit shall be circulated directly or indirectly to any other dwelling unit, public
corridororpublicstairway.
vii)Allairhandlingunitroomsshouldpreferablyhavefloordrainsandwatersupply.Thetrapinfloordrainshall
provideawatersealbetweentheairconditionedspaceandthedrainline.
882
Vol.3
Chapter2
viii)Supply/returnairductshallnotbetakenthroughemergencyfirestaircase.
Exception:DuctscanbetakenInsidethefirestairprovidedfireisolationofductsatwallcrossingsis(are)carried
out.
x)Waterproofingofairhandlingunitroomsshallbecarriedouttopreventdamagetofloorbelow.
xi)Thefloorshouldbelightcolored,smoothfinishedwithterrazzotilesortheequivalent.Suitablefloorloading
shouldalsobeprovidedafterconsultingwiththeairconditioningengineer.
xii)Wherenecessary,structuraldesignshouldavoidbeamobstructiontothepassageofsupplyandreturnair
ducts.Adequateceilingspaceshouldbemadeavailableoutsidetheairhandlingunitroomtopermitinstallation
ofsupplyandreturnairductsandfiredampersatairhandlingunitroomwallcrossings.
xiii)Theairhandlingunitroomsmaybeacousticallytreated,iflocatedincloseproximitytooccupiedareas.
xiv) Access door to air handling unit room shall be single/double leaf type, airtight, opening outwards and
should have a sill to prevent flooding of adjacent occupied areas. It is desired that access doors in air
conditionedspacesshouldbeprovidedwithtightsealing,gasketsandselfclosingdevicesforairconditioningto
beeffective.
xv)Airhandlingunitroomsshallbeseparatedfromtheairconditionedspaceby4hourfireratedwallsand2
hourfirerateddoor.Fire/smokedampersshallbeprovidedinsupply/returnairductatairhandlingunitroom
wallcrossingsandtheannularspacebetweentheductandthewallshouldbefiresealedusingappropriatefire
resistanceratedmaterial.
xvi)Fireisolationshallbeprovidedforverticalfreshairduct,connectingseveralairhandlingunits.
d)PlanningofPipeShafts
i)Theshaftscarryingchilledwaterpipesshouldbelocatedadjacenttoairhandlingunitroomorwithinthe
room.
ii) Shaft carrying condensing water pipes to cooling towers located on roof/terrace should be vertically
aligned.
iii)Allshaftsshallbeprovidedwithfirebarrieratfloorcrossingsinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofchapter
4.
iv)Accesstoshaftshallbeprovidedateveryfloor.
e)PlanningforSupplyAirDuctsandReturnAir
i)Ductsupports,preferablyintheformofanglesofmildsteelsupportedusingstudanchorsshallbeprovided
on the ceiling slab from the drilled hole. Alternately, duct supports may be fixed with internally threaded
anchorfastenersandthreadedrodswithoutdamagingtheslabsorstructuralmembers.
ii)Iffalseceilingisprovided,thesupportsfortheductandthefalseceilingshallbeindependent.Collarsfor
grillesanddiffusersshallbetakenoutonlyafterfalseceiling/boxingframeworkisdoneandframesforfixing
grillesanddiffusershavebeeninstalled.
iii) Where a duct penetrates the masonry wall itshall either be suitably coveredon the outside to isolate it
from masonry or an air gap shall be left around it to prevent vibration transmission. Further, where a duct
passes through a fire resisting compartment/barrier, the annular space shall be sealed with fire sealant to
preventsmoketransmission(seealsoPart4FireandLifeSafety).
f)SpacePlanningforCoolingTower
i) Cooling towers are used to dissipate heat from water cooled refrigeration, air conditioning and industrial
processsystems.Coolingisachievedbyevaporatingasmallproportionofrecirculatingwaterintooutdoorair
stream.Coolingtowersareinstalledataplacewherefreeflowofatmosphericairisavailable.
ii)Coolingtowersshallbeinstalledatleast3mabovethebasesofthechillers.Coolingtowershallpreferably
be installed on the roof of the concerned building. In special cases it may be installed on ground or on any
elevatedplatformorontheroofoftheadjacentbuildingprovidedthemoistureladendischargeairfromthe
coolingtowersdonotposeanyproblemtootherbuildings.Coolingtowershouldbesolocatedastoeliminate
nuisancefromdrifttoadjoiningstructures.
iii)Anyobstructiontofreeflowofairtothecoolingtowershallbeavoided.
iv)Structuralprovisionsforthecoolingtowershallbetakenintoaccountwhiledesigningthebuilding.Wind
speedshallbetakenintoconsiderationwhiledesigningthefoundations/supportsforcoolingtowers.Vibration
isolationshallbeanimportantconsiderationinstructuraldesign.
883
Part8
BuildingServices
v) Specialdesignrequirements are necessary where noise to theadjoiningbuilding is to be avoided.Special

provisionsshallbeincludedinthedesigntoreducewaterdropletnoise.
vi)Provisionformakeupwatertanktothecoolingtowershallbemade.Makeupwatertanktothecooling
towershallbeseparatefromthetankservingdrinkingwater.
vii) Makeup water having contaminants or hardness, which can adversely affect the refrigeration plant life,
shallbetreated.
2.6.2.4 BuildingStructure
Structuraldesignrequirementsviz.loadonthefloororceiling;punchesintheroof,floorandwalls;verticalshaft
forpiperisersandductrisers;concreteductsetc.shallbedeterminedintheplanningstagetomakeadequate
provisionsinthestructuraldesignandtokeepsuchprovisionsinthebuilding.Thestructuraldesignshallconsider
staticanddynamicloadsofequipmentandmachineryincludingvibrationofmachinery.
2.6.2.5 DesignDrawings
For the purpose of effective installation of airconditioning, heating and ventilation system, working drawings
showing layout of machinery, equipment, ducts, pipes etc., details of builders' works, holes and/or punches in
roof,floors,walls,supportsformachinery/equipmentetc.shallbepreparedpriortofinalizationofbuildingdesign
drawings.Suchdrawings/documentsshallbeproperlystoredforfuturereference.
2.7
AirConditioningSYSTEMDESIGN
2.7.1
BuildingDesignRequirements
2.7.1.1 Glazing
a)
Buildingdesignshallconsideralltheaspectsforreductionofheattransferthroughtheglazing.Building
orientation shall be such that, if possible, glazing in walls subject to direct and intensive sun exposure shall be
avoided.Incasewhereitisnotpossibletodoso,necessaryprotectivemeasuresshallbetakentoreduceheat
transferthroughtheglazing.Suchprotectivemeasuresmaybeintheformofsunbreakers,doubleglazing,heat
resistantglassorapplicationofothershadingdevices.
b)
When sun breakers are used, it shall preferably be 1m away from the wall face, with free ventilation,
particularly from bottom to top, being provided for cooling of sun breakers and window by free convection.
Conductionfromsunbreakerstomainbuildingshallbeminimum.Sunbreakersshallshadethemaximumglazed
areapossible,especiallyforthealtitudeandazimuthangleofthesun.Sunbreakersshallpreferablybelightand
brightincoloursoastoreflectbackasmuchofthesunlightaspossible.
c)
Wheretheaboveprotectionisintheformofreflectivesurfaces,adequatecareshallbetakentoavoid
anyhazardtothetrafficsurroundingthebuildingandpeopleontheroadbecauseofthereflectedlightfromthe
surfaces.
d)
Applicationofanyprotectionshallnotrestrictentryoflighttoalimitdemandingartificiallights.
2.7.1.2 RoofInsulation
a) Construction of exposedroofs shallbe such that the heat transmissionthroughthe roof is notexcessive.
Whererequiredtheoverallheattransfercoefficient(U)oftheroofexposedtosunshallbereducedeffectivelyby
using appropriate construction materials and/or proper type of insulation material (s). The overall thermal
transmittancefromtheexposedroofshouldbekeptasminimumaspossibleandundernormalconditions,the
desirablevalueshouldnotexceed0.58W/(mC).
b) Underdeck or overdeck insulation shall be provided for exposed roof surface using suitable Insulating
materials.Overdeckinsulationshallbeproperlywaterproofedtopreventlossofinsulatingproperties.
c)Theceilingsurfaceoffloorswhicharenottobeairconditionedmaybesuitablyinsulatedtogiveanoverall
thermaltransmittancenotexceeding1.16W/(mC).
884
Vol.3
Chapter2
2.7.2
DesignConditions
2.7.2.1 InsideDesignConditions
a)
Forcomfort airconditioning, the inside designconditions shallbeselected with an objective to reduce
energyconsumptionintheoperationoftheairconditioningsystem.Acceptablevaluesofinsidedesignconditions
for summer are provided in Table 8.2.1. Unless otherwise specifically required, the design calculations shall be
basedonthenormalpracticevaluesofTable8.2.1.
b)
Toavoidthermalshock,thedifferencebetweenthedrybulbtemperaturesofoutdoorairandindoorair
shallnotexceed11oC.Ifitisabsolutelynecessarytohaveadifferencemorethan11oC,thereshallhaveadequate
provisionforanteroomtoreducetheeffectofthermalshock.
c)
For airconditioning systems other than comfort airconditioning, design conditions required by the
specificprocessesinvolvedorapplicationsmaybeadopted.Whenrequired,properprotectivemeasuresshallbe
takenforpersonsworkingtherein.
d)
Velocityofairinanairconditionedspace,inthezonebetweenthefloorlevelandthe1.5mlevel,shall
bewithin0.12m/sand0.25m/sforcomfortapplicationsforcommercialbuildings,andforotherapplicationsit
shallnotexceed0.5m/s.
Table8.2.1InsideDesignConditionsofSomeofApplicationsforSummera
Sl.No. UseCategoryofSpace
IndoorDesignConditions
DryBulbTemperature RelativeHumidity
(%)
(C)
55 ~ 60
1.
Restaurants, Cafeteria and Dining Hall
23 ~ 26
2.
Kitchens
28 ~ 31
-3.
Office buildings
23 ~ 26
50 ~ 60
4.
Bank/Insurance/ Commercial building
23 ~ 26
45 ~ 55
5.
Departmental stores
23 ~ 26
50 ~ 60
6.
Hotel guest rooms
23 ~ 26
50 ~ 60
7.
Ball room/meeting room
23 ~ 26
40 ~ 60
8.
Class rooms
23 ~ 26
50 ~ 60
9.
Auditoriums
23 ~ 26
50 ~ 60
10.
Recovery rooms
24 ~ 26
45 ~ 55
11.
Patient rooms
24 ~ 26
45 ~ 55
12.
Operation theatres
17 ~ 27
45 ~ 55
20 ~ 23
13.
Delivery room
45 ~ 55
20 ~ 23
14.
ICU/CCU
30 ~ 60
22.5 ~ 25.5
15.
New born Intensive care
30 ~ 60
23 ~ 25
16.
Treatment room
30 ~ 60
17 ~ 27
17.
Trauma room
45 ~ 55
20 ~ 23
18.
Endoscopy / Bronchoscopy
30 ~ 60
25.5 ~ 27
19.
X-ray (diagnostic & treatment)
40 ~ 50
X-ray (surgery/critical area and
21 ~ 24
20.
30 ~ 60
22.5 ~ 24.5
21.
Laboratory (diagnostics)
30 ~ 60
17 ~ 22
22.
Art Galleries/Museums
40 ~ 55
20 ~ 22
23
Libraries
45 ~ 55
23 ~ 26
24.
Radio studio/Television studio
45 ~ 55
22 ~ 26
25.
Telephone terminal rooms
40 ~ 50
23 ~ 26
26.
Airport terminal/ bus terminal
50 ~ 60
Note:
a
The room design dry bulb temperature should be reduced when hot radiant panels are adjacent to the occupant and
increasedwhencoldpanelsareadjacent,tocompensatefortheincreaseordecreaseinradiantheatexchangefromthebody.Ahot
orcoldpanelmaybeunshadedglassorglassblockwindows(hotinsummer,coldinwinter)andthinpartitionswithhotor cold
spacesadjacent.Hottanks,furnaces,ormachinesarehotpanels.
885
Part8
BuildingServices
2.7.2.2 OutsideDesignConditions
a)
The outside design conditions for summer months for different cities are provided in Table 8.2.2.
Selectionofoutsidedesignconditionsfromthistableshallbebasedonrequirementsoftheapplicationandthe
percentoftimetheoutsideairtemperatureisallowedtoexceedtheoutsidedesignconditions.
b)
In case of stringent design conditions a meteorologist with experience in applied climatology may be
consulted to evaluate conditions such as; the formation of heat sinks in urban areas; the duration of extreme
temperatures;projectsiteslocatedremotelyfromreportingstations.
2.7.2.3 VentilationAir
a)
Everyspaceservedbytheairconditioningsystemshallbeprovidedwithoutsidefreshairnotlessthan
theminimumamountmentionedinTable8.2.3.Ifadequatetemperatureregulationalongwithefficientfiltration
of air and absorption of odour and gas are provided, the amount of fresh air requirement may be reduced.
However,innocasetheoutdoorairquantityshallbelowerthan2.5l/sperperson.
b)
In hospital operation theaters, a large quantity of outdoor air supply is recommended to overcome
explosionhazardofanestheticsandtomaintainsterileconditions.However,ifadequatefiltrationwithefficient
absorption of anesthetics and laminar flow of supply air is provided, the outside air requirement may be
substantiallyreduced.RecirculationofairshallcomplywiththerequirementsofSec2.11.3.6(b).
2.7.3
NoiseandVibration
2.7.3.1 General
Airconditioning, heating and ventilation system design and installations shall consider all the aspects of noise
andvibration control related to thesystemand shallconformto the requirements of Chapter3: Acoustics and
NoiseControl.Selectionandinstallationofequipmentforairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemshallbe
suchthatnoiseandvibrationtransmittedtothespaceservedbythesystemshallnotexceedtherecommended
valueforthespaceserved.
2.7.3.2 EquipmentRoom
Equipmentroomforinstallationofairhandlingunits,refrigerationmachinery,pumps,boilers,blowersandother
equipment, which produce noise and vibration, shall not preferably be located adjacent to any acoustically
sensitivearea.Locationoftheequipmentroomshallbesuchthatdirecttransmissionofnoiseandvibrationfrom
theequipmentroomtoacousticallysensitiveareasdonotoccur.Wherenecessary,appropriatelydesignedsound
barriersshall be usedto restrict transmission of noise from equipment roomto any acousticallysensitivearea.
Similarlyadequatemeasuresshallbetakentorestricttransmissionofvibrationfromequipmentroomtoother
rooms.
2.7.3.3 SelectionofEquipment
Where possible, the equipment shall be selected which produce low sound power level consistent with the
requiredperformanceandensuringoperationatmaximumefficiency.Ifnecessarynoiselevelsshallbereduced
byappropriateshroudingoftheequipment.Equipmentshallbesoorientedthatthenoisewillberadiatedaway
fromthelikelyareasofcomplaint.
2.7.3.4 NoiseControl
a) AirDucts:Airductsshallbesodesignedandinstalledtoavoidanytransmissionofnoiseandvibrationwhich
maybepickedupbytheductsystemfromequipmentroomoradjoiningrooms.Ductsystemshallnotallow
crosstalkornoisetransferfromoneoccupiedspacetoanother.
Duct system shall be appropriately designed, constructed and installed to obtain adequate attenuation of
noiserequiredtomaintainrecommendednoiselevelintheairconditionedspace.
Duct construction and installation shall be such that drumming effect of duct walls and noise transmission
throughtheductwallscanbeminimizedtoapprovedlevel.
b) Plenum Chamber: If required, properly designed plenum chamber, lined with approved sound absorbed
material,and/orsoundattenuatorsshallbeusedforattenuationofnoise.
c) FlowControlDevices:Airdampersandotherflowcontroldevicesshallbesoselectedthatnoisegeneration
doesnotexceedapprovedlevels.
886
Vol.3
Chapter2
d) AirTerminals:Airterminalsshallbeselectedfortheapprovednoisegenerationcharacteristics.
e) Piping:Velocityoffluidsinpipingshallbesoselectedthatnoisegenerationdoesnotexceedapprovedlevels.
f) Chiller and Refrigeration Equipment: Chiller(s) and refrigeration equipment(s) shall be so selected and
installedthatthecombinedeffectofnoiseleveldoesnotexceed65dBAorapprovedlevelsattheproperty
boundary line. Where ever possible refrigerant compressors may be encaged in acoustically treated
enclosurestoreducenoisetransmission.Similarly,lowspeedcondenserfansmaybeusedtohavereduced
noisegeneration.Fancylindersmaybeacousticallytreatedtoreducenoisetransmission.
g) Cooling Tower: Cooling Towers(s) shall be so selected and installed that the combined effect of noise
generationdoesnotexceed65dBAorapprovedlevelsattheproperboundarylevel.Whereeverpossible,fan
cylindersshallbeacousticallytreatedtoreducenoisetransmission.Floatingmatsmayalsobeusedtoreduce
waterdropletnoise.
2.7.3.5 VibrationControl
a) Appropriately designed vibration isolators shall be installed under the machinery to restrict vibration
transmission to structures. Similarly vibration isolators shall also be used between a machinery and all
pipeworkandductworkincludingthesupportswhenapplicable.
b) Where ever necessary Inertia Block with spring vibration isolators shall be used to restrict vibration
transmissiontostructures.
c) Springvibrationisolatorsshallbeearthquakerestrainttype.
2.8
AIRDISTRIBUTIONSYSTEM
2.8.1
DuctWork
2.8.1.1 General
a)
Supply air, return air and outside air for airconditioning, heating and ventilation systems shall be
conductedthroughductsystems.Ductsandplenumsshallbeofindependentconstructionorshallbeformedby
partsofthebuildingstructure.
b)
Supply and return air plenums shall be limited to uninhabited crawl spaces, areas above a ceiling or
below the floor, or attic spaces. Plenums shall be limited to one fire area. Fuelfired equipment shall not be
installed within a plenum. Venting systems and exhaust ducts shall not be extended into or through ducts or
plenums.
c)
ProhibitedUse:Exitsandexitaccesscorridorsshallnotbeusedassupplyorreturnairductsorplenums.
Exception: The restriction on the use of the space between the corridor ceiling and the floor or roof structure
above as return air plenum shall not apply when the corridor is not required to be of fire resistance rated
constructionorisseparatedfromtheplenumbyfireresistanceratedconstructionorislocatedwithinadwelling
unit.
d)
FloodProofing:Forbuildinglocatedinafloodhazardzone,plenumspacesshallbeeitherplacedabove
thebasefloodelevationorprotectedsoastopreventwaterfromenteringoraccumulatingwithintheplenum
spaceduringfloodsuptothebasefloodelevation.
2.8.1.2 Material
a)
All ducts, duct connectors, associated fittings and plenums used to convey supply air, return air, and
outdoorairforairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemshallbeconstructedofsteel,aluminumalloyor
someotherapprovedmetal.Ducts,plenumsandfittingsmaybeconstructedofconcrete,clayorceramicswhen
installedinthegroundorinaconcreteslab,providedthejointsaretightlysealed.
b)
Whengypsumproductsareexposedinductsorplenums,theairtemperatureshallneitherbelowerthan
o
10 C nor be higher than 52oC and the moisture content shall be controlled so as not to adversely affect the
material.Gypsumproductsshallnotbeexposedinductsservingevaporativecoolers.
887
Part8
BuildingServices
Table8.2.2OutsideDesignConditionsforDifferentStationsa
b
CoolingDB/MWB
Evaporation,WB/MDBc
DB
MWB
DB
MWB
DB
MWB
WB
MDB
WB
MDB
WB
MDB
Range
of
DBd
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Barisal
35.5
28.5
34.5
28.5
34
28
30
33
29.5
33
29
32
Bogra
36.5
28.5
35.5
28.5
34.5
28
31.5
33.5
30
33
29
33
5.5
Chandpur
35.5
28.5
34.5
28.5
34
28
29.5
33
29.5
33
29
32.5
Chittagong
34
28.5
33.5
28.5
33
28
29.5
32.5
29
32.5
28.5
32
4.5
Comilla
35
27.5
34.5
27.5
34
27.5
29
33
28.5
32.5
28
32
5.5
CoxsBazar
34
27.5
33.5
27.5
33
27.5
29
31
29
30
29
30
Dhaka
35.55
27.5
35
27
34.5
27
29
33
28.5
29
28.5
29
Dinajpur
36
28.5
35
28
34.5
28
30
32.5
29
33
29
33
5.5
Faridpur
36.5
28.5
35.5
28
34.5
28
29.5
33
29
33
29
33
Ishurdi
37.5
27
36.5
27
35.5
28
30
34.5
29
33.5
29
33.5
Jessore
38
28.5
37
28.5
36
28
30
35
30
35
29.5
34
6.5
Khulna
36.5
29
36
28
35.5
28
30
34
30
34
29.5
33.5
Mongla
37
31
36
30.5
35
30
33
34
32.5
34
32
33.5
Mymensingh
35
28
34
28
33.5
27.5
29.5
33
29
32.5
28.5
32
4.5
Station
0.4%
888
1%
2%
0.4%
1%
2%
Vol.3
Chapter2
CoolingDB/MWBb
Station
Evaporation,WB/MDBc
DB
MWB
DB
MWB
DB
MWB
WB
MDB
WB
MDB
WB
MDB
Range
of
DBd
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Patuakhali
35.5
28.5
35
28.5
34.5
28.5
30
33
30
33
29.5
32.5
Rajshahi
35.5
29
34.5
28.5
34
29
31.5
33
31
32.5
30
31.5
Rangamati
35.5
26
34.5
27
34
27.5
28.5
33.5
28
32.5
28
32.5
Rangpur
35.5
28.5
34.5
28
34
28
29.5
30.5
29.5
30
29.5
30
Sylhet
35.5
27
34.5
27
34
26.5
28.5
32.5
28
32.5
28
32.5
5.5
Tangail
36
27.5
35.5
27.5
34.5
27.5
29
33.5
28.5
33
28.5
33
5.5
0.4%
1%
2%
0.4%
1%
2%
Note: aThistablehasbeenpreparedbystatisticalanalysisofweatherdataoftenyears,recordedthreehourlybytrainedobserversof
BangladeshMeteorologicalDepartment.
bThedrybulb(DB)temperaturespresentedincolumn2,4&6representvalueswhichhaveequaledorexceededby0.4%,1%,and2%of
the total hours during the summer months of May through September. The coincident mean wet bulb temperatures (MWB) listed in
columns3,5&7arethemeanofallwetbulbtemperaturesoccurringatthespecificdesigndrybulbtemperatures.Thesevaluesshallbe
usedforcoolingloadcalculation.
cWetbulb(WB)temperaturespresentedincolumn8,10&12representvalueswhichhavebeenequaledorexceededby0.4%,1%and
2%ofthetotalhoursduringthesummermonthsofMaythroughSeptember.Thecoincidentmeandrybulbtemperatures(MDB)listedin
columns9,11&13arethemeanofalldrybulbtemperaturesoccurringatthespecificdesignwetbulbtemperatures.Thesevaluesshall
beusedforselectionofCoolingTower,evaporativecoolingequipment,freshaircoolingandothersimilarequipment.
d Mean daily range temperatures presented in column14 are the difference between the average daily maximum and average daily
minimumtemperaturesduringthewarmestmonthsateachstation.
889
TABLE8.2.3MinimumVentilationRatesforAirConditionedSpaces
OCCUPANCYCLASSIFICATION
OUTDOOR
OUTDOOR
AIRFLOWRATEIN AIRFLOWRATE
BREATHINGZONE
IN
BREATHING
ZONEa
DEFAULT
OCCUPANT
DENSITYa
EXHAUSTAIRFLOW
RATEa
l/sperperson
l/sperm2
Numberper100m2
l/sperm2
Cellswithoutplumbingfixtures
2.5
0.6
25
Cellswithplumbingfixturesg
2.5
0.6
25
5.0
Dininghalls
(seefoodandbeverageservice)
2.5
0.3
15
Dayroom
2.5
0.3
30
Booking/waiting
3.75
0.3
50
Correctionalfacilities
Guardstations
Coinoperateddrycleaner
3.75
20
Coinoperatedlaundries
3.75
0.3
20
Commercialdrycleaner
15
30
Drycleaners,laundries
Commerciallaundry
12.5
10
Storage,pickup
3.75
0.6
30
Education
Auditoriums
2.5
0.3
150
Corridors(seepublicspaces)
Mediacenter
0.6
25
Sportslockerroomsg
2.5
Music/theater/dance
0.3
35
Smokinglounges
30
70
Daycare(throughage4)
0.9
25
Classrooms(ages58)
0.6
25
Classrooms(age9plus)
0.6
35
Lectureclassroom
3.75
0.3
65
Lecturehall(fixedseats)
3.75
0.3
150
Artclassroom
10
0.9
20
3.5
Sciencelaboratoriesg
0.9
25
5.0
Wood/metalshops
0.9
20
2.5
Computerlab
0.6
25
3.75
0.3
100
1.25
Multiuseassembly
Locker/dressingroomsg
Foodandbeverageservice
Bars,cocktaillounges
3.75
0.9
100
Cafeteria,fastfood
3.75
0.9
100
Diningrooms
3.75
0.9
70
Kitchens(cooking)
3.5
Hospitals,nursingandconvalescent
homes
Autopsyrooms
2.5
Part8
BuildingServices
890
Chapter2
Medicalprocedurerooms
Operatingrooms
OUTDOOR
OUTDOOR
DEFAULT
OCCUPANT
EXHAUSTAIRFLOW
RATEa
BREATHINGZONE
IN
BREATHING
ZONEa
DENSITYa
l/sperperson
l/sperm2
Numberper100m2
l/sperm2
7.5
20
15
20
Patientrooms
12.5
10
Physicaltherapy
7.5
20
RecoveryandICU
7.5
20
2.5
0.3
120
12.5/25
Bedroom/livingroom
2.5
0.3
10
Conference/meeting
2.5
0.3
50
Dormitorysleepingareas
2.5
0.3
20
Gamblingcasinos
3.75
0.9
120
Lobbies/prefunction
3.75
0.3
30
Hotels,motels,resortsanddormitories
Multipurposeassembly
g
Bathrooms/toiletprivate
Conferencerooms
2.5
0.3
50
Officespaces
2.5
0.3
Receptionareas
2.5
0.3
30
Telephone/dataentry
2.5
0.3
60
Mainentrylobbies
2.5
0.3
10
Offices
Privatedwellings,singleandmultiple
b
Garages,commonformultipleunits
3.75
Garages,separateforeachdwellingb
50l/spercar
Kitchensb
12.5/50f
0.35ACHbutnotless
than7.5l/sper
person
Baseduponnumber
of
bedrooms.First
bedroom,
each
additionalbedroom,
1
Toiletroomsandbathrooms
10/25
Publicspaces
Corridors
0.3
Livingareas
Elevatorcar
5.0
Showerroom(pershowerhead)g
25/10f
30
70
25/30
Smokinglounges
g
Toiletroomspublic
Placesofreligiousworship
2.5
0.3
120
Courtrooms
2.5
0.3
70
Legislativechambers
2.5
0.3
50
Libraries
2.5
0.6
10
3.75
0.6
40
Museums(children's)
891
Part8
BuildingServices
OUTDOOR
OUTDOOR
Museums/galleries
Retailstores,salesfloorsandshowroom
floors
Sales(exceptasbelow)
Dressingrooms
Mallcommonareas
Shippingandreceiving
b
Smokinglounges
DEFAULT
OCCUPANT
EXHAUSTAIRFLOW
RATEa
BREATHINGZONE
IN
BREATHING
ZONEa
DENSITYa
l/sperperson
l/sperm2
Numberper100m2
l/sperm2
3.75
0.3
40
3.75
0.6
15
1.25
3.75
0.3
40
0.6
30
70
Storagerooms
0.6
Warehouses(seestorage)
7.5
3.75
0.3
25
2.5
10
0.6
25
3.0
Specialtyshops
b
Automotivemotorfueldispensingstations
Barber
Beautyandnailsalonsb
b
Embalmingroom
10.0
Petshops(animalareas)
3.75
0.9
10
4.5
Supermarkets
3.75
0.3
Disco/dancefloors
10
0.3
100
Bowlingalleys(seatingareas)
0.6
40
3.75
0.9
20
0.30
2.5
Sportsandamusement
Gamearcades
Icearenaswithoutcombustionengines
Gym,stadium,arena(playarea)
0.30
3.75
0.3
150
2.4
Healthclub/aerobicsroom
10
0.3
40
Healthclub/weightroom
10
0.3
10
Spectatorareas
Swimmingpools(poolanddeckarea)
Storage
b,d
Repairgarages,enclosedparkinggarages
3.75
Warehouses
0.3
Theaters
Auditoriums(seeeducation)
Lobbies
2.5
0.3
150
Stages,studios
0.3
70
Ticketbooths
2.5
0.3
60
Platforms
3.75
0.3
100
Transportationwaiting
3.75
0.3
100
Transportation
Workrooms
Bankvaults/safedeposit
Darkrooms
892
2.5
0.3
5.0
Vol.3
Chapter2
Copy,printingrooms
c
DEFAULT
OCCUPANT
OUTDOOR
OUTDOOR
EXHAUSTAIRFLOW
RATEa
BREATHINGZONE
IN
BREATHING
ZONEa
DENSITYa
l/sperperson
l/sperm2
Numberper100m2
l/sperm2
2.5
0.3
2.5
Meatprocessing
7.5
10
Pharmacy(prep.area)
2.5
0.9
10
Photostudios
2.5
0.6
10
Computer(withoutprinting)
2.5
0.3
4
a. Baseduponnetoccupiablefloorarea.
b. Mechanicalexhaustrequiredandtherecirculationofairfromsuchspacesisprohibited.Allairsuppliedtosuchspaces
shallbeexhausted,includinganyairinexcessofthatrequiredbythistable.
c. Spacesunheatedormaintainedbelow50Farenotcoveredbytheserequirementsunlesstheoccupancyiscontinuous.
d. VentilationsystemsinenclosedparkinggaragesshallcomplywithSection2.11.3.8.
e. Ratesareperwaterclosetorurinal.Thehigherrateshallbeprovidedwhereperiodsofheavyuseareexpectedtooccur,such
astoiletsintheaters,schoolsandsportsfacilities.Thelowerrateshallbepermittedwhereperiodsofheavyusearenot
expected.
f. Ratesareperroomunlessotherwiseindicated.Thehigherrateshallbeprovidedwheretheexhaustsystemisdesignedto
operateintermittently.Thelowerrateshallbepermittedwheretheexhaustsystemisdesignedtooperatecontinuously
duringnormalhoursofuse.
g. Mechanicalexhaustisrequiredandrecirculationisprohibitedexceptthatrecirculationshallbepermittedwherethe
resultingsupplyairstreamconsistsofnotmorethan10percentairrecirculatedfromthesespaces(seeSection2.11.3.6,
itemsaandc).
h. Fornailsalons,therequiredexhaustshallincludeventilationtablesorothersystemsthatcapturethecontaminantsandodors
attheirsourceandarecapableofexhaustingaminimumof25l/sperstation.
2.8.1.3 CombustibleswithinDuctsorPlenums
Plenums shall be constructedwithnoncombustible materials.Materialsexposedwithin ducts orplenumsshall
haveaflamespreadindexofnotmorethan25andsmokedevelopedratingofnotmorethan50whentestedin
accordancewithASTME84.
Exceptions:
a) Return air and outside air ducts, plenums and concealed spaces which serve a dwelling unit may be of
combustibleconstruction.
b) Airfiltersservingdwellingunit.
c) Airfiltersusedaswaterevaporationmediuminanevaporativecooler.
d) Charcoalfilterswhenprotectedwithanapprovedfiresuppressionsystem.
e) Exposedelectriccablesinstalledinconcealedspaceusedasplenumsexhibitaflamepropagationofnotmore
than1.5mandproducesmokehavingapeakopticaldensitynotgreaterthan0.5andaverageopticaldensity
notgreaterthan0.15whentestedinaccordancewithUL910.
f)
Nonmetallicfiresprinklerpipingintheplenumexhibitaflamepropagationofnotmorethan1.5mandshall
produce smoke having a peak optical density not greater than 0.5 and average optical density not greater
than0.15whentestedinaccordancewithUL1820.
2.8.1.4 DuctConstruction
a)
Ductsshallbeofsquare,rectangular,roundorovalcrosssection.Constructionofrequiredsizeofduct
shall be as per good practice described in ASHRAE Handbooks and SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Airconditioning
Contractors'NationalAssociation,USA)ductconstructionstandards.
b)
Jointsofductsystemsshallbemadesubstantiallyairtightbymeansoftapes,mastics,gasketingorother
meansandshallhavenoopeningotherthanthoserequiredforproperoperationandmaintenanceofthesystem.
Access openings shall be provided in the duct system for periodic cleaning of the system. Removable grilles
893
Part8
BuildingServices
requiring only the loosening of catches or screws for removal may be considered as access openings. Walk in
accessdoorsshallbesoconstructedthatthedoormaybereadilyopenedfromtheinsidewithouttheuseofkeys.
c)
Vibrationisolatorsinstalledbetweenequipmentandmetalducts(orcasings)orbetweentwosectionsof
the ducts where duct crosses building expansion joint, shall be made of an approved flame retardant fabric or
shallconsistofsleevejointswithpackingofapprovedmaterialhavingflamespreadratingofnotmorethan25
andasmokedevelopedratingofnotmorethan50whentestedinaccordancewithASTME84.Vibrationisolation
connectorsconstructedoffabricshallnotexceed250mminlength.
2.8.1.5 DuctCoverings
a)
Supplyandreturnairductsandplenumsofacoolingorheatingsystemshallbeinsulatedwithapproved
qualityinsulatingmaterialofadequatethicknessrequiredasperlocationoftheductsystemandtemperaturesof
airinsideandaroundtheductsystem.Insulationshallbeofsuchqualityandthicknesstopreventtheformation
ofcondensationontheexteriororinteriorwallsofanyduct.
b)
Materials used within the ducts and plenums for insulation, sound absorption or other purposes shall
have a mold, humidity and erosion resistant face that meets the requirements of accepted standards. These
materialswhenexposedtoairvelocitieswithintheductsinexcessof10m/sshallbefastenedwithbothadhesive
andmechanicalfasteners,andexposededgesshallhaveadequatetreatmenttowithstandtheoperatingvelocity.
c)
Duct coverings, duct linings, vapour barrier facings, tapes, adhesives used in duct system shall have a
flamespreadratingnotover25andasmokedevelopmentratingnohigherthan50whentestedasacomposite
installation:
Exceptions:
i)
Ductcoveringsshallnotberequiredtomeettheserequirementswheretheyarelocatedentirely
outsideof
abuilding,donotpenetrateawallorroof,anddonotcreateanexposurehazard.
ii)
Duct covering having a flame spread index not exceeding 50 and a smoke density not greater
than100may beusedindwellingorapartmenthouseswheretheductsystemservesnotmorethan
onedwellingunit.
d)
Ductcoverings,linings,includingassociatedtapesandadhesivesshallbeinterruptedatleast 1mfrom
heatsourceinaductsystemsuchaselectricresistanceheaters,fuelburningheatersorfurnacesandatthearea
ofafiredamperorfiredoor,wheretheductpenetratesafireseparation.Interiorinsulationandacousticallinings
shallbeplacedsoasnottointerferewithpositiveclosingoffiredampersorotherclosures.
e)
Serviceopeningsshallnotbeconcealed.
2.8.1.6 DuctInstallation
a)
An air distribution system shall be designed and installed as per good practice described in ASHRAE
HandbooksandSMACNAHandbooksoastomeettherequirementofproperdistributionofairasperprovisions
of this code. The installation of an air distribution system shall not affect the fire protection requirements
specifiedinthisCode.
b)
Ducts and all parts of the duct system shall be substantially supported and securely fastened to the
structural members of the building with approved devices of noncombustible material designed to carry the
requiredloads.Ductsupportsshallnotlessenthefireprotectionsofstructuralmembers.Ductsshallbebraced
andguyedtopreventlateralorhorizontalswing.
c)
Hangers shall have sufficient strength and durability to properly and safely support the duct work.
Hangersshallhavesufficientresistancetothecorrosiveeffectoftheatmospheretowhichtheywillbeexposed.
Hangersshallnotbeusedindirectcontactwithadissimilarmetalthatwouldcausegalvanicactioninthehanger,
duct,fastenings,orstructure.
d)
Ductsshallnotbehungfromorsupportedbysuspendedceilings.
e)
Metal ducts shall not usually be installed within 100 mm of the ground. Metal ducts not having an
approved protective coating, when installed in or under concrete slab shall be encased in at least 50 mm of
concrete. Metallic ducts having an approved protective coating and nonmetallic ducts shall be installed in
accordancewiththemanufacturer'sinstallationinstructions.
f)
Whenductspenetrateanymasonrywall,itshalleitherbelinedwithfelttoisolateitfromthemasonry,
oranairgapshallbeleftaroundit.
894
Vol.3
Chapter2
g)
All underground ducts located in a flood hazard zone shall be capable of resisting hydrostatic and
hydrodynamicloadsandstresses,includingtheeffectsofbuoyancy,duringtheoccurrenceoffloodingtothebase
floodelevation.
h)
Ducts installed in locations where they are subject to mechanical damage by vehicles or from other
causesshallbeprotectedbyapprovedbarriers.
2.8.1.7 FireDamper
a)
Firedampersshallbeprovidedatlocationswhereairdistributionsystemspenetrateassembliesthatare
requiredtobefireresistanceratedbythisCode.
Exceptions:
Firedampersarenotrequiredinthefollowingcases:
i)
Whereanexhaustductpenetratesafireresistanceratedshaftwallandthesubductextendsnot
lessthan560mmverticallyupward.
ii)
Atpenetrationsoftenantseparationandcorridorwallsinbuildingsequippedthroughoutwithan
automaticsprinklersysteminstalledinaccordancewiththeBuildingCode.
iii)
Wheretheductsareconstructedofsteelandarepartofanengineeredsmokeremovalsystem.
iv)
At penetration of corridor walls where the ducts are constructed of steel and do not have
openingswhichcommunicatethecorridorwithadjacentspacesorrooms.
v)
Atpenetrationsofaroofassemblywhereductsareopentotheatmosphere.
vi)
Inhazardousexhaustsystems.
vii)
Whereceilingdampersareinstalledinaccordancewiththebuildingcode.
viii)
Ingarageexhaustorsupplyshaftswhichareseparatedfromallotherbuildingshaftsbynotless
than2hourfireresistanceratedfireseparationassembly.
ix)
Inductedairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemspenetratingwallswitha1hourfire
resistance rating or less. Where fire dampers will interfere with the operation of the smoke
controlsystem,approvedalternativeprotectivedevicesshallbeutilized.
b)
FiredampersshallcomplywithUL555andbearthelabelofanapprovedagency.Firedampersshallbe
installedinaccordancewiththemanufacturinginstallationinstructions.
c)
Firedampersshallbeaccessible.Suitable openingswithtightlyfitted coversshall be providedto make
firedampersaccessibleforinspectionandthisshallbelargeenoughtopermitmaintenanceandresettingofthe
damper.
Ductwork shall be connected to fire damper sleeves or assemblies in such a way that collapse of the
d)
ductworkwillnotdislodgethedamper.
2.8.1.8 AutomaticShutoff
a)
Eachsingleairdistributionsystemprovidingairconditioning,heatingorventilationairinexcessof1000
l/sinGroupA,Division5;GroupB;GroupC;GroupD;GroupE,Division1,2and3;GroupF,Division1,2,3and5;
Group G, Division 2; Group H, Division 2; Group J occupancies shall be equipped with an automatic shutoff
provision activated by smoke detectors. When the system serves more than one occupancy, automatic shutoff
shallbeprovided.
Exceptions:
i)
Automatic shutoff need not be installed when all rooms have direct exit to the exterior of the
building.
ii)
Automaticshutoffneednotbeinstalledinsystemsspecificallydesignedforsmokecontrol.
b)
Smoke Detection: Smoke detectors required by Sec 2.5.1.8(a) shall be installed in the main returnair
ductaheadofanyoutsideairinletortheymaybeinstalledineachroomorspaceservedbythereturnairduct.
Detectors shall also be installed in the supply duct, downstream of the filters. Activation of any detector shall
causetheairmovingequipmenttoautomaticallyshutdown.
895
Part8
BuildingServices
2.8.2
AirTerminals
2.8.2.1 Registers,GrillesandDiffusers
Supply air registers, grilles and diffusers; and return air grills shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions. Selection and installation of registers, grilles and diffusers shall comply
withtherequirementsofairdistributionsystem.
2.8.2.2 VentilatingCeilings
Perforatedceilingsmaybeusedforairsupplyexceptinexitcorridorswhicharerequiredtobeof fireresistive
construction. Ceiling material shall be of ClassI flame spread classification on both sides in accordance with
requirements of this Code. All wiring shall be in enclosures regardless of the voltage carried. Suspended
ventilatingceilingsupportsshallbeofnoncombustiblematerials.
2.8.2.3 VisualDuctOpenings
Ductopeningsinbathrooms,toiletsandchangingroomsshallpreventvisualobservationfromadjoiningrooms.
2.8.2.4 CappedOpening
Allductopeningsshallbecappedduringconstruction.
2.8.2.5 ReturnAirIntakeandOutsideAirIntake
ReturnairandoutsideairintakeopeningsshallbelocatedinaccordancewiththerequirementsofSec2.6.2.7(b).
2.8.2.6 ExhaustOpenings
Outside exhaust openings shall be located so as not to create nuisance. Exhaust air shall not be directed onto
walkways.
2.8.2.7 OpeningProtection
Outside air intake and exhaust openings shall be protected with corrosionresistant screens, louvers or grilles.
Openingsshallbeprotectedagainstalllocalweatherconditions.Exhaustopeningsshallhaveprovisiontoprevent
backdraftunderwindconditions.
2.8.3
ExhaustAirSystems
2.8.3.1 General
a)
Exhaustairsystemsservingkitchensortoiletsand/orbathroomsshallbeindependentexhaustsystems
andshallnotbecombinedwithexhaustairductsservingotherareas,exceptatimmediatelybeforethepointof
final delivery to the outside, such as at the base of a roof ventilator or when all interconnected systems are
equippedwithsuitablebackpressuredevicestopreventpassageofodoursfromonesystemtoanotherwhenthe
fanisnotinoperation.
b)
Exhaustductsshallhaveprovisionforremovalofcondensateswherethismaybeaproblem,suchasfor
swimmingpoolsandshowerexhaustsandfortheseapplicationsductjointsshallbewatertight.
c)
Constructionandinstallationofexhaust air ductsfor toilet, bathrooms andswimmingpoolsshall be in
accordancewiththeprovisionsofSec2.5.1.
d)
Design,constructionandinstallationofexhaustairsystemsforexhaustofharmfulandhazardousgases
andindustrial/processexhaustgasesshallbeinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec2.8.4.
e)
Design,constructionandinstallationofkitchenexhaustsystemshallbeinaccordancewiththeprovisions
ofSec2.8.5.
2.9
AirConditioningEquipment
2.9.1
General
2.9.1.1 Scope
Airconditioning,heatingandventilationequipmentshallconformtotherequirementsofthisCode.
896
Vol.3
Chapter2
EquipmentshallnotbeinstalledoralteredinviolationofthisCode.Defectivematerialsorpartsshallbereplaced
insuchamannerasnottoinvalidateanyapproval.
2.9.1.2 Approval
Whenrequired each appliance shall beapproved by the building official forsafeuse orcomplywithapplicable
nationallyrecognizedstandard.Forthispurposeinstallersshallfurnishsatisfactoryevidencethattheapplianceis
constructed in conformity with the requirements of this Code. The permanently attached label of an approved
agencymaybeacceptedassuchevidence.
2.9.1.3 Labeling
Allmechanicalequipmentandappliancesshallbearpermanentandlegiblefactoryappliednameplateonwhich
shallappearconstructionandoperationdataincludingsafetyrequirements.
2.9.1.4 Testing
Whererequiredanapprovedagencyshalltestarepresentativesampleofthemechanicalequipmentorappliance
beinglabeledtothestandardorstandardspertinenttotheequipmentorappliance.Theapprovedagencyshall
maintainarecordofalltestsperformed.Therecordsshallprovidesufficientdetailtoverifycompliancewiththe
teststandard.
2.9.1.5 EquipmentInstallation
a)
General:Mechanicalequipmentandappliancesshallbeinstalledinaccordancewiththemanufacturer's
installationinstructionsforthelabeledequipment.Connectionstomechanicalequipmentorappliances,suchas
fuelsupply,electrical,hydronicpiping,ventandductsshallconformtotherequirementsofthisCode.
b)
Clearance: Appliances shall be installed with the minimum clearances to combustibles for which the
appliancehasbeentestedasspecifiedbythemanufacturer.
c)
Anchorage of Appliances: Appliances designed to be fixed in position shall be securely fastened in
position.Supportsforappliancesshallbedesignedandconstructedtosustainverticalandhorizontalloadswithin
thestresslimitationsspecifiedintheBuildingCode.
d)
NoiseandVibration:Equipmentnoiseandvibrationtransmittedtotheoccupiedspaceshallnotexceed
the recommended value for thespace.Selection and installation of equipment shall be in accordance with Sec
2.4.3.
e)
IdentificationofEquipment:Whenmorethanoneairconditioning,heating,refrigeratingorventilation
systemsareinstalledontheroofofabuildingorwithinthebuilding,eachequipmentshallbeidentifiedastothe
areaorspaceservedbytheequipment.
2.9.1.6 Access
All mechanical equipment and appliances shall be accessible for inspection, service, repair and replacement
without removing permanent construction. Unless otherwise specified not less than 750 mm of working space
andplatformshallbeprovidedtoservicetheequipmentorappliance.
Appliance controls, gauges, filters, blowers, motors and burners shall be accessible. The operating instructions
shallbeclearlydisplayedneartheappliancewheretheycanbereadeasily.
2.9.1.7 Location
a)
Remote Location: Where an appliance is located in a remote location, a walkway having a minimum
widthof600mmshallbeprovided,leadingfromtheaccessopeningtotheappliance.
b)
Hazardous Location: Appliances installed in garages, warehouses, or other areas where they may be
subjecttomechanicaldamageshallbeinstalledbehindsuitableprotectivebarriersoratasuitableheightabove
thefloororlocatedoutofthenormalpathofvehiclestoguardagainstsuchdamages.
Airconditioningorheatingequipmentlocatedinagarageandwhichgeneratesaglow,sparkorflamecapableof
ignitingflammablevapoursshallbeinstalledinsuchawaythatthepilotsandburnersorheatingelementsand
switchesareatleast450mmabovethefloorlevel.
Wheresuchappliancesinstalledwithinagarageareenclosedinaseparateapprovedcompartmenthavingaccess
onlyfromoutsideofthegaragesuchappliancesmaybeinstalledatfloorlevel,providedtherequiredcombustion
airistakenfromanddischargedtotheexteriorofthegarage.
897
Part8
BuildingServices
Heating equipment located in rooms where cellulose nitrate plastic or other explosive materials are stored or
processedshallcomplywiththerequirementsofPart4:FireProtection.
c)
Outdoor Installation: Mechanical equipment and appliance located outdoors shall be approved for
outdoorinstallation.Mechanicalequipmentandappliancesinstalledoutdoorsshallconformtotherequirements
ofSec2.6.1.5.
Whereappliancesarelocatedwithin3mofaroofedgeoropensideofadropgreaterthan600mm,guardsshall
beprovided.Heightoftheguardshallbeaminimumof900mmandamaximumof1050mmabovethesurface.
Equipment that are located outdoors and may be adversely affected by sun and/or water shall be adequately
protected. Access shall be possible under all weather conditions. All outdoor installed equipment shall be so
locatedthatthesoundlevelshallnotbemorethan65dBwhenmeasuredanywhereonthepropertyboundary
line.
2.9.1.8 ElectricalInstallations
a)
Equipment regulated by this code requiring electrical connections of more than 50 volts shall have a
positivemeansofdisconnectadjacenttoandinsightfromtheequipmentserved.A230voltACgroundingtype
receptacleshallbelocatedwithin8moftheequipmentforserviceandmaintenancepurposes.Thereceptacle
neednotbelocatedonthesamelevelastheequipment.Lowvoltagewiringof50voltsorlesswithinastructure
shallbeinstalledinamannertopreventphysicaldamage.
b)
Permanentlightingshallbeprovidedtoilluminatetheareainwhichanapplianceislocated.Forremote
locations,thelightswitchshallbelocatedneartheaccessopeningleadingtotheappliance.
Exceptions:
Lightingfixturesneednotbeinstalledwhenthefixedlightingforthebuildingwillprovidesufficientlightforsafe
servicingoftheequipment.
2.9.1.9 CondensateWastes
Condensatesfromaircoolingcoils,fuelburningcondensingappliancesandtheoverflowfromevaporativecoolers
and similar water supplied equipment shall be collected and discharged to an approved plumbing fixture and
disposal area. The waste pipe shall have a slope of not less than 1 in 100 and shall be of approved corrosion
resistantmaterialandapprovedsize.Condensateorwastewatershallnotdrainoverapublicway.
2.9.1.10 PersonnelProtection
A suitable and substantial metal guard shall be provided around exposed flywheels, fans, pulleys, belts and
movingmachinerywhichareportionsofairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystem.
2.9.2
CoolingbyRefrigeration
2.9.2.1 General
a)
Scope:Everyaircoolingsystemandequipmentusingrefrigerantcoils,chilledwatercoilsandbrinecoils
shallconformtotherequirementsofthissectionandtotheapplicablerequirementsofSec2.6.1and2.7.
b)
UseofGroup2Refrigerants:DirectrefrigerantsystemscontainingGroup2refrigerantsshallnotservean
aircoolingorairconditioningsystemusedforhumancomfort.
2.9.2.2 Installation
a)
Clearance From Ground: When cooling equipment other than ducts and piping is suspended from the
underfloorconstruction,aclearanceofatleast150mmshallbeprovidedbetweenthebaseoftheequipment
andtheground.
b)
ExteriorWallInstallation:Allequipmentmountedonexteriorwallataheightof6mormoreabovethe
groundshallbeprovidedonaplatformnotlessthan750mmindepth,with1mhighhandrailsonoperationand
controlsideoftheequipment.Theplatformshallbeaccessiblethroughcatwalknotlessthan450mmwideand
handrailof1mhighfrominsidethebuildingorfromroofaccess.
Exceptions:
Equipmentlocatedonexteriorwallbutremovablefrominsidemaynotrequireplatformandcatwalk.
898
Vol.3
Chapter2
2.9.2.3 Access
a)
CoolingUnits:Exceptforpiping,ductsandsimilarequipmentthatdoesnotrequireservicingoradjusting,
anunobstructedaccessandpassagewaynotlessthan600mminwidthand2minheightshallbeprovidedto
everycoolingunitsinstalledinsidebuildings.
Exception:
Theaccessopeningtoacoolingunitlocatedinanatticspacemaybereducedto750mminlengthandwidth,
providedtheunitcanbereplacedfromthisopeningoranotheropeningintothisspaceorarea.
b)
Attic or Furred Space Installation: Access to and working platforms for cooling units or cooling system
compressorslocatedinan attic orfurredspaceshallbeprovidedwithasolidcontinuousflooringnotlessthan
600mminwidthfromtheaccessopeningtotherequiredworkingspaceandplatforminfrontoftheequipment
whenaccessopeningislocatedmorethan1mawayfromworkingspace.
c)
Filters,FuelValvesandAirHandlers:Anunobstructedaccessspacenotlessthan600mminwidthand
750mminheightshallbeprovidedtofilters,fuelcontrolvalvesandairhandlingunits.Refrigerant,chilledwater
andbrinepipingcontrolvalvesshallbeaccessible.
Exception:
Anaccessopeningfromtheunobstructedaccessspacewhichopensdirectlytosuchequipmentmaybereduced
to 375 mm in the least dimension if the equipment can be serviced, repaired and replaced from this opening
withoutremovingpermanentconstruction.
d)
Refrigeration Machinery Room Installations: Access to equipment located in a refrigeration machinery
roomshallcomplywithSec2.7.
e)
RooforExteriorWallInstallation
i)
Equipment installed on the roof or on an exterior wall shall be accessible under all weather
conditions. A portable ladder or other portable temporary means may be used for access to
equipmentlocatedontheroof,oronexteriorwallofasinglestoreyportionofthebuilding.
ii)
Platform:Whentheroofhasaslopegreaterthan4in12alevelworkingplatformatleast750
mmindepthshallbeprovidedalongthecontrolorservicingsidesoftheunit.Sidesofaworking
platformfacingtheroofedgebelowshallbeprotectedbyasubstantialrailingofminimum1m
inheightwithverticalrailsnotmorethan525mmapart,exceptthatparapetsatleast600mmin
heightmaybeutilizedinlieuofrailsorguards.
iii)
Catwalk:Onroofshavingslopesgreaterthan4in12,acatwalkatleast400mminwidthwith
substantialcleatsspacednotmorethan400mmapartshallbeprovidedfromtheroofaccessto
theworkingplatformattheappliance.
2.9.2.4 WorkingSpace
Equipmentrequiringaccessthereto,asspecifiedinSec2.6.2.3,shallbeprovidedwithanunobstructedspaceon
thecontrolorservicingsideoftheequipmentofnotlessthan750mmindepthand2minheight.Workingspace
forequipmentlocatedinamachineryroomshallcomplywithSec2.7.
Exception:
The height of the working space may be reduced to 750 mm for an air handling unit, air filter or refrigerant,
chilledwaterpipingandbrinepipingcontrolvalves.
2.9.2.5 LightinginConcealedSpaces
Whenaccessisrequiredtoequipmentlocatedinanunderfloorspace,atticorfurredspace,apermanentelectric
lightoutletandlightingfixtureshallbeinstalledinaccordancewithSec2.6.1.8(b).
2.9.2.6 CondensateControl
When a cooling coil or cooling unit is located in the attic or furred space where damage may result from
condensate overflow, an additional water tight pan of corrosion resistant metal shall be installed beneath the
coolingcoilorunittocatchtheoverflowcondensateduetocloggedprimarycondensatedrain,oronepanwitha
standing overflow and a separate secondary drain may be provided in lieu of the secondary drain pan. The
additionalpanorthestandingoverflowshallbeprovidedwithadrainpipe,minimum19mmnominalpipesize,
discharging at a point which can be readily observed. This requirement is in addition to the requirements for
condensatewastepipingsetforthinSec2.6.1.9.
899
Part8
BuildingServices
2.9.2.7 ReturnAirandOutsideAir
a)
Source:Acoolingunitshallbeprovidedwithoutsideair,returnair,orboth.Coolingsystemsregulatedby
thisCodeanddesignedtoreplacerequiredventilationshallbearrangedtodeliverintotheconditionedspacenot
lessthantheamountofoutsideairspecifiedinBuildingCode.
b)
ProhibitedSources:Theoutsideairorreturnairforacoolingsystemorcoolingunitshallnotbetaken
fromthefollowinglocations:
i)
Closerthan3mfromanapplianceventoutlet,aventopeningoraplumbingdrainagesystemor
thedischargeoutletofanexhaustfan,unlesstheoutletis1mabovetheoutsideairinlet.
ii)
Whereitwillpickupobjectionableodours,fumesorflammablevapours;orwhereitislessthan
3 m above the surface of any abutting public way or driveway; or where it is in a horizontal
positioninasidewalk,street,alleyordriveway.
iii)
Ahazardousorinsanitarylocationorarefrigerationmachineryroom;
iv)
Anareathevolumeofwhichislessthan25percentoftheentirevolumeservedbysuchsystem,
unlessthereisapermanentopeningtoanareathevolumeofwhichisequalto25percentof
theentirevolumeserved.
v)
Aroomorspacehavinganyfuelburningappliancestherein,exceptwhen75%oftheconditioned
airisdischargedbackintothesameroomorspaceandairinletsarenotlocatedwithin3mof
fireboxordraftdiverteroffuelburningapplianceandtheroomhasavolumeexceeding1m3for
each100wattsfuelinputrateofallfuelburningappliancetherein.
vi)
Acloset,bathroom,toiletorkitchen.
c)
ReturnAirLimitation:Returnairfromonedwellingunitshallnotbedischargedintoanotherdwellingunit
throughthecoolingsystem.
2.9.2.8 AirVelocity
Cooling systems shall be designed and constructed so that velocity through filters does not exceed the filter
manufacturer'srecommendation.
2.9.2.9 Screen
Requiredoutsideairinletsshallbecoveredwithscreenhaving6mmopenings.
Exception:
An outside air inlet serving a nonresidential portion of a building may be covered with screen having opening
largerthan6mmbutnotlargerthan25mm.
2.9.2.10 DuctSystem
Ifductsarerequiredforcirculationofair,theductsystemshallbeconstructedandinstalledinaccordancewith
Sec 2.5.1. Selection and installation of registers, diffusers and grilles shall conform to the requirements of Sec
2.5.2.
2.9.3
EvaporativeCooling
2.9.3.1 General
a)
Scope: Where possible evaporative cooling system may be installed. Evaporative cooling systems shall
complywiththissection.
b)
OutsideAir:EvaporativecoolingsystemshallbeprovidedwithoutsideairasspecifiedinSec2.6.2.7
c)
AirDucts:AirductsystemsforevaporativecoolingshallcomplywithSec2.5.1.
2.9.3.2 Location
Evaporative cooler shall normally be installed outdoor. It may be installed indoor if duct is provided between
coolerandoutsideairintake.
Evaporativecoolingsystemsshallbeinstalledinamannertominimizetheprobabilityofdamagefromanexternal
source.
8100
Vol.3
Chapter2
2.9.3.3 Access
Evaporative coolers shall be accessible for inspection, service and replacement without removing permanent
construction.
Anevaporativecoolersupportedbythebuildingstructureshallbeinstalledonasubstantiallevelbaseandshall
besecureddirectlyorindirectlytothebuildingstructurebysuitablemeanstopreventdisplacementofthecooler.
Anevaporativecoolersupporteddirectlybythegroundshallrestonalevelconcreteslab.Theuppersurfaceof
theconcreteslabshallnotbelessthan75mmabovetheadjoininggroundlevel.
An evaporative cooler supported on an above ground platform shall be elevated at least 150 mm above the
adjoininggroundlevel.
Openingsintheexteriorwallsshallbeflushedinanapprovedmannerinaccordancewiththiscode.
2.9.4
HeatingEquipment
2.9.4.1 General
a)
Scope:Provisionsofthissectionshallapplytoallelectric,hotwaterorsteamairheatingsystems.
b)
OutsideAir:HeatingsystemshallbeprovidedwithoutsideairasspecifiedinSec2.6.2.7.
c)
AirDucts:AirductsforheatingsystemsshallcomplywiththeapplicableprovisionsofSec2.5.1.
2.9.4.2 Location
a)
Steamshallnotbeusedinheatingcoilofairhandlingunitwhenitislocatedinsidethebuildingbutnot
installedinamachineryroom.
b)
All fuel burning equipment such as boilers shall not be installed inside a building and shall beinstalled
insideamachineryroom.
c)
Appliancesgeneratingaglow,sparkorflamecapableofignitingflammablevapoursshallnotbelocated
inplaceswheresuchvapoursexist.
2.9.4.3 Access
All appliances shall be accessible for inspection, services, repair and replacementwithout removing permanent
construction.Anunobstructedworkingspaceofnotlessthan750mminwidthand1250mminheightshallbe
providedoncontrolandservicingside(s)oftheappliance.
AllheatingappliancesshallbeinstalledasperapplicableprovisionsofSec2.6.1.5.
2.9.4.5 Controls
a)
In case of airconditioning plants where heating or reheating is required, a safety device shall be
incorporated in the installation to cut off automatically the source of heating, such as steam, hot water or
electricity by means of a suitable thermostat or some other device, as soon as the temperature of the room
reachesapredeterminedhighlevelnotexceeding44oC,unlessahighertemperatureisrequiredforanindustrial
processcarriedoutintheairconditionedenclosure.Innocasetheoutlettemperatureoftheheatershallexceed
90oC.
b)
In the case of airconditioning plants where heating or reheating by means of an electrical heater
designed to operate in an air current is done, the system shall be equipped with a safety device to cut off the
electricity to the heating device whenever there is failure of the air flow in which the heater is required to
operate.
The surface temperature of all electrical heaters used in airconditioning systems shall be limited preferably to
400oC,andinnocasemorethan538oCwhenmeasuredinstillair.
2.9.4.6 BoilersandFurnaces
a)
Steam and hot water boilers and furnaces used for airconditioning systems shall be designed,
constructedandinstalledinconformancewiththerequirementsofacceptablestandardsinthisregardandthe
appropriateBoilerCode.
8101
Part8
BuildingServices
b)
Boilersandfurnacesshallbeinstalledinamachineryroomhaving:
i)
Asufficientlylargefloorareatopermitaccessibilityforinspectionandservicingoftheappliance
andtoprovideadequateclearancetosatisfyrequirementsoffiresafety.Thevolumeoftheroom
forhousingcentralheatingfurnacesshallbeatleast12timesthetotalvolumeofthefurnace.
Thevolumeoftheroomforhousingcentralheatingboilersshallbeatleast16timesthetotal
volumeoftheboiler.Iftheceilingheightoftheroomorspaceisgreaterthan2.5m,thevolume
shallbecalculatedonthebasisof2.5mheight.
ii)
Apermanentopeningoropeningconnectingwiththeoutdoorsorwithsomespacethatfreely
connectswithoutdoors,
iii)
Aknockoutpaneltoactasexplosionreliefpaneltopreventdamagetostructureincaseofany
explosioninboilerrooms,
iv)
Boiler rooms and furnace rooms shall be protected with an automatic fire suppression system
installedinaccordancewiththeCode.
c)
BeforecommissioningoftheboileracertificateofcompliancefromtheChiefInspectorofBoilershallbe
obtained.
2.9.5
AirHandlingUnit
2.9.5.1 General
AirhandlingunitsshallcomplywiththeapplicablerequirementsassetforthinSec2.6.1and2.6.2.
2.9.5.2 Location
Airhandlingunitroomsshall,asfaraspossible,becentrallylocatedwiththeequipmentroomcontiguoustothe
corridorsorotherspacesforrunningofairducts.
Air handling unit rooms shall be located in areas where reasonable sound levels can be tolerated. Air handling
unitroomsshallnotpreferablybelocatedadjacenttoconferencerooms,soundrecordingstudios,broadcasting
studios,bedroomsandotheracousticallysensitiveareas.Ifitisabsolutelynecessarytolocateairhandlingunit
room adjacent to the above acoustically sensitive areas, adequate acoustic treatment in the air handling units,
supplyandreturnairducts,airhandlingunitroomsshallbeprovided.Insuchcase,theaccessdoortothe air
handlingunitroomshallbeofsingleleaftypeproperlyacousticallytreatedandshallhaveadoorsill.Thedoor
shallopenoutwards.
In case of multistoried buildings and for large capacity plant, independent air handling unit room(s) shall be
providedforeachfloorwhendesigncallsforthesame.Theareaservedbyeachairhandlingunitshallconformto
thefireprotectionmeasuresadopted.
2.9.5.3 Access
Floorareaoftheairhandlingunitroomshallbesufficienttoallowproperlayoutofequipmentwithadequate
accessspaceandworkingspaceforproperoperationandmaintenance.
Air handling units shall be installed on vibration isolators to restrict transmission of vibration to the building
structure. The base of the air handling unit shall be minimum 75 mm above the adjoining floor level. All air
handlingunitroomsshallhaveproperlyinstalledfloordrains.
2.9.6
PackagedAirconditioners
2.9.6.1 General
PackagedairconditionersshallcomplywiththeapplicablerequirementssetforthinSec2.6.1and2.6.2.
2.9.6.2 ProhibitedUse
Packagedairconditionersshallnotbeusedfor,
a)
Operation theatres where provisions for 100 per cent fresh air and high quality filtration of air are
required.
b)
Special applications like sterile rooms for hospitals and clean rooms where high efficiency filtration is
required.
8102
Vol.3
Chapter2
c)
Soundrecordingstudiosandotherareaswherecriteriaforacousticsarestringent.
Exceptions:
Single package units when installed far away from the airconditioned space and are provided with properly
designedsoundattenuatorswhichcanmaintainthedesiredsoundlevelinsidetheconditionedspace.
d)
Arearequiringcloseandindependentcontroloftemperatureandrelativehumidity.
Exception:
Computerroomairconditioning.
e)
Internalzoneswherenoexposedwallisavailableforinstallationofroomairconditionersornoexternal
platformisavailableforinstallationofoutdoorinstalledunit.
f)
Thewidthoftheareaissuchthatthrowofairfromtheairconditionercannotcovertherequiredarea.
a)
Wallpunchesforroomairconditionersshallhavepropersealingandresilientpadaroundthebodyofthe
unittoavoidleakageofairandvibrationtransmission.
b)
Outdoor units shall be installed keeping adequate space for condenser air flow. The discharge of
condenserairshallnotcreateanydisturbancetotheadjacentroomsorbuildings.
c)
Refrigerantpipesandcondensatedrainpipesshallbeproperlyinstalledandshallhaveproperinsulation
toavoidcondensationonpipes.IndoorinstallationsshallcomplywiththerequirementsofSec2.6.2.6.
2.9.7
AccessoryEquipment
2.9.7.1 AirCurtain
a)
Where Required: In super markets, departmental stores, commercial buildings and other applications
where the continuous movement of people and/or equipment through the door requires that the door be
remainedopencontinuously,adequatelysizedaircurtainsmaybeusedtorestrictentryofunconditionedairto
conditionedspace.
b)
Installation: Air curtains shall be installed in such a way as to cover the whole width of the door. The
widthandvelocityofairjetshallbesufficienttorestricttheentryofunconditionedairtotheconditionedspace.
The unit shall have provisions to control the jet velocity with respect to pressure and velocity of air in the
unconditionedspace.
2.9.7.2 AirFilters
a)
Airsuppliedtoanyspaceforcooling,heatingorventilationshallbeadequatelyfilteredbeforeitspointof
dischargeintothespace.Minimumfiltrationefficiencyshallbeinaccordancewithgoodengineeringpracticefor
thespaceserved,asrecommendedinASHRAEHandbook.
b)
Access:Adequateaccesstofacilitateservicingoffiltersshallbeprovided.Doors,ladders,electriclighting
etc. shall be provided where necessary. A device for indicating differential pressure across the filter bank shall
preferablybefittedtodeterminetheneedforfilterchange.
c)
ElectrostaticFilters:Electrostaticfilterswhenused,shallbeelectricallyinterlockedsothatpowersupply
isdisconnectedwhenaccessdoorisopened.
2.9.8
PipingSystem
2.9.8.1 Material
Pipingmaterialforairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemshallbemetalliconly.
Exception:
Condensatedrainandwastewaterdrainpipingforcoolingunitsmaybenonmetallic.
2.9.8.2 SupportandAnchors
Adequatelydesignedpipingsupportsshallbeusedatapprovedspaceintervalstopreventunduestressonthe
pipe and building structure. Piping shall also be adequately anchored. Pipes shall not be supported or hanged
fromanotherpipe.
8103
Part8
BuildingServices
2.9.8.3 ExpansionandContraction
Piping shall be installed with provisions to take care of expansion and contraction of the piping because of
temperaturechangesofthefluiditconveys.
2.9.8.4
PipeCovering
a)
All pipes likely to achieve a surface temperature during normal operation exceeding 70oC and are
exposedtohumancontactorsurfacetemperaturelowerthanthedewpointtemperatureofthesurroundingair,
shall be insulated with approved material suitable for the operating temperature of the system. The insulating
materialanditsthicknessshallbeasrecommendedinASHRAEHandbook.
b)
Insulationandcoveringonpipesinwhichthetemperatureofthefluidexceeds120oC:
i)
Shallbeofnoncombustiblematerial.
ii)
Shallnotproduceflameandsmoke,gloworsmoulderwhentestedinaccordancewiththelatest
standardinthisregardatthemaximumtemperaturetowhichsuchinsulationorcoveringistobe
exposedinservice.
Combustibleinsulationandcoveringshallhaveaflamespreadratingthroughoutthematerial,notexceeding25
unitsinbuildingsofnoncombustibleconstruction,whenpipesruninahorizontalorverticalservicespace.When
pipes run in a room or space other than service space, the pipe covering shall have a flame spread rating not
exceedingthatrequiredfortheinteriorfinishoftheceilingoftheroomorspace.
Exception:
Pipecoveringsmayhaveaflamespreadratingmorethan25andsmokedevelopedindexmorethan100when
pipesareenclosedwithinwalls,floorslabsornoncombustibleracewaysorconduits.
2.9.8.5
Steam or hot water bare pipes passing through a storage space shall be protected to prevent direct contact
betweenthesurfaceofpipeandthematerialstored.
Bare pipes containing steam or fluid at temperature above 120oC and passing through a combustible floor,
ceiling or wall, shall have a sleeve of metal at least 50 mm larger in diameter than pipe, packed with
noncombustiblematerial.
Minimum clearance between bare pipe and combustible materials shall not be less than 15 mm when
temperature of steam or water in the pipe does not exceed 120oC and shall not be less than 25 mm for
temperaturesexceeding120oC.
2.9.8.6
Allpipingshallbemarkedwithapprovedmakingsfortypeoffluidcarryingwithdirectionofflow.
2.10
RefrigeratingEquipment
2.10.1
General
2.10.1.1 Scope
In addition to other provisions of this code, refrigerating systems and equipment shall conform to the
2.10.1.2 Approval
Each refrigerating equipment and its components shall comply with relevant internationally recognized
standards.Thelistingandlabelofanapprovedagencywhichisattachedtotheequipment,maybeacceptedas
evidencethattheequipmentcomplieswithapplicableinternationallyrecognizedstandards.
ArefrigeratingequipmentshallbeinstalledtoconformwiththeprovisionsofSec2.6.1andthemanufacturer's
installationinstructions.
8104
Vol.3
Chapter2
2.10.1.4 Access
AccessforrefrigeratingunitsshallbeprovidedasforcoolingunitsandcoolingsystemssetforthinSec2.6.1.6
and2.6.2.3.
2.10.1.5 WorkingSpaceandWorkingPlatform
WorkingspaceandworkingplatformshallbeprovidedasforcoolingunitsandcoolingsystemssetforthinSec
2.6.2.4.
2.10.1.6 ProhibitedLocation
Refrigeratingsystemsandportionthereofshallnotbelocatedinanelevatorshaft,dumbwaitershaftorashaft
havingmovingobjectstherein,orinalocationwhereitwillbesubjecttomechanicaldamage.
2.10.1.7 CondensateControl
Piping and fittings which convey refrigerant, brine, chilled water or coolant, which generally reach a surface
temperature below the dew point of the surrounding air and which are located in spaces or areas where
condensation could cause a hazard to the building occupants, structure, electrical or other equipment shall be
insulatedtopreventsuchdamage.
2.10.2
AbsorptionRefrigeratingEquipment
2.10.2.1 Location
Fuelburningabsorptionsystemsshallnotbeinstalledinthefollowinglocations:
a)
In any room or space less than 300 mm wider than the units installed therein, with a minimum clear
workingspaceofnotlessthan75mmalongthesides,backandtopoftheunit.
b)
Inahazardouslocation.
c)
Inasurgicaloperatingroomormedicaltreatmentroom.
d)
Inanyoccupancygroupunlessseparatedfromtherestofthebuildingbynotlessthanaonehourfire
resistiveoccupancyseparation.
Exceptions:
Aseparationshallnotberequiredforequipmentservingonlyonedwellingunit.
e)
In a room used or designed to be used as a bedroom, bathroom, closet or in any enclosed space with
accessonlythroughsuchroomorspace.
f)
Inaroomfromwherenoiseandvibrationmaybetransmittedtoacousticallysensitiveareas.
AbsorptionsystemscontainingGroup2refrigerantsshallnotbelocatedinanybuildingunlessinstalledwithina
refrigerationmachineryroomprovidedasperSec2.7.3.3.
Absorptionsystemscontainingmorethan9kgofaGroup2refrigerantshallbelocatednotlessthan6mfrom
anydoor,windoworventilatingairinlettoabuilding.
Fuel burning absorption systems located outside of a building shall be completely enclosed in a weather proof
housing of approved materials, unless approved for outdoor installation. The housing shall not be larger than
necessarytoproperlycoverandprovideaminimum150mmclearancearoundtheunitorunitsenclosedtherein,
includingallcontrolsanddraftdiverters.
Anabsorptionsystemsupportedfromthegroundshallrestonaconcreteslab.Theuppersurfaceoftheconcrete
slabshallbeatleast75mmabovetheadjoininggroundlevel.
2.10.2.3 PressureReliefDevices
An absorption system shall be equipped with a factory installed pressure relief device, either a fusible plug, a
rupturememberorapressurereliefvalve.
2.10.2.4 CombustionAir
Afuelburningabsorptionsystemshallbeprovidedwithadequatecombustionairincludingventingappliances.
8105
Part8
BuildingServices
2.10.2.5 SteamorHotWaterAbsorptionSystem
Allabsorptionsystemsusingsteamorhotwaterasenergysourceshallbeinstalledinamachineryroomunless
the manufacturer has certified it suitable for outdoor installation. The machinery room shall comply with the
provisionsofSec2.7.3.3.
2.10.3
MechanicalRefrigeratingEquipment
2.10.3.1 General
a)
Scope:MechanicalrefrigeratingequipmentshallcomplywiththeprovisionsofSec2.7.1.
Refrigerating systems and equipment, including the replacement of parts and alteration, shall comply with the
provisionsofthissection.
b)
Supports: Supports for compressors, condensing unitsand chillers shall be designed to safely carry the
equipment. Supports from buildings or parts of buildings that are of noncombustible construction shall be
noncombustible.
Acompressororportionofcondensingunitsupportedfromthegroundshallrestonaconcreteorotherapproved
base.Theuppersurfaceoftheconcretebaseshallbeatleast75mmabovetheadjoininggroundlevel.
c)
VentilationofRoomsContainingCondensingUnits:Roomsorspacesotherthanarefrigerationmachinery
room complying with the requirements of this section, in which any refrigerant containing portion of a
condensingunitislocated,shallbeprovidedwithoneofthefollowingmeansofventilation:
i)
Permanentgravityventilationopeningsofnotlessthan0.2m2 netfreeareaopeningdirectlyto
theoutsideofthebuildingorextendingtotheoutsideofthebuildingbycontinuousducts,
ii)
Amechanicalexhaustsystemarrangedtoprovideatleast3completeairchangeperhourandto
dischargetotheoutsideofthebuilding.
Exception:
Mechanicalexhaustsystemshallnotberequirediftheroomorspacehasavolumeexceeding40m3per
kW of the unit or where such room or space has permanent gravity ventilation openings of 0.2 m2
minimumtotalareatotheotherroomsorspacesexceeding40m3perkW.
d)
CompressorNearExits:Refrigerantcompressorsofmorethan4kWratingshallbelocatedatleast3m
fromanexitunlessseparatedbyaonehourfireresistiveoccupancyseparation.
2.10.3.2 Refrigerants
a)
Classification:RefrigerantslistedinTable8.2.4andTable8.2.5orotherrefrigerantsequivalentinsafety
tolife,limb,healthorpropertyshallonlybeusedinrefrigeratingequipment.
Note:
Bangladesh is a signatory to the Montreal Protocol which proclaims phasing out of the use of some
refrigerantsviewedasresponsiblefordepletionoftheozonelayerand/orcausingglobalwarming.Ifatthe
timeofusingthisCode,anyoftherefrigerantsmentionedinTable8.2.4and8.2.5isprohibitedfromuseby
theGovernment,therelevantroworrowsofthesetwotablesshallbedeemedtobedeleted.Likewise,if
any safer substitutes to these refrigerants are available and permitted by the Government, these shall be
includedinthelistofrefrigerantspermittedbythisCode.Ingeneral,preferenceshallbegiventoequipment
usingrefrigerantshavingrelativelylowerOzoneDepletionPotentialandGlobalWarmingPotential.
b)
Group1Refrigerants
i)
DirectSystems:ThemaximumamountofGroup1refrigerantsindirectsystemsshallnotexceed
thatsetforthinTable8.2.4.
ii)
IndirectSystems:TheamountofGroup1refrigerantsusedinindirectsystemsshallbeunlimited.
iii)
General: Condensing units or combinations of refrigerant interconnected condensing units

totaling 75 kW or more rating which contain a Group 1 refrigerant shall be enclosed in a
refrigerationmachineryroom.
8106
Vol.3
Chapter2
Table8.2.4GroupIRefrigerantClassification,AmountandOccupationalExposureLimit(OEL)
Refrigerant
Designatio
n
Name
R11d
Trichlorofluoromethane
Refrigerant Degrees
Classificationf
of
Hazarda
Maximum
Quantityin
Space
Intendedfor
Human
Occupancy
(g/m3)
OELe
A1
200b
6.2
1,000
R12
Dichlorodifluoromethane
A1
200
90
1,000
R13d
Chlorotrifluoromethane
A1
200b
1,000
A1
200
1,000
200
400
1,000
200
210
1,000
77
1,000
R13B1
R14
Bromotrifluoromethane
Tetrafluoromethane
A1
R22
Chlorodifluoromethane
A1
R32
Difluromethane
A2
(Methylenechloride)
R113
Trichlorotrifluoroethane
A1
200
20
1,000
R114
A1
200b
140
1,000
R115
Dichlorotetrafluoroethan
e
A1
200
760
1,000
R123
Chloropentafluoroethane
200
57
1,000
R134a
Dichlorotrifluoroethane
A1
200
210
1,000
R407C
Tetrafluoroethane
A1
200b
270
1,000
R500
R32/125/134a
A1
200
120
1,000
R502
R12/152a
200
330
1,000
R717
R22/115
B2
330
0.22
25
R744
Ammonia
A1
200b
72
5,000
B1
A1
Carbondioxide
a) Degreesofhazardareforhealth,fire,andreactivity,inaccordancewithNFPA704.
b) Reduction to 100 is allowed if analysis satisfactory to the code official shows that the maximum
concentrationforaruptureorfulllossofrefrigerantchargewouldnotexceedtheIDLH,consideringboth
therefrigerantquantityandroomvolume.
c) Forinstallationsthatareentirelyoutdoors,use310.
d) Class1ozonedepletingsubstance;prohibitedfornewinstallations.
e) OccupationalExposureLimitbasedonOSHAPEL.
f)
Thecapitalletterdesignatesthetoxicityoftherefrigerantat400PPMbyvolume.Thenumberdenotes
theflammabilityoftherefrigerant.
ClassA:Toxicitynotidentified
ClassB:Evidenceoftoxicityidentified.
Class1:Noflamepropagationinairat65Fand14.7psia.
Class 2: Lower flammability limit (LML) greater than 0.00625 lb/ft3 at 70F and 14.7 psia and heat of
combustionlessthan8174Btu/lb.
Class3:HighlyflammableasdefinedbyLFLlessthanorequalto0.00625lb/ft3at70Fand14.7psiaor
heatofcombustiongreaterthanorequalto8174Btu/lb.
Table8.2.5Group2Refrigerants
RefrigerantDesignation
Name
8107
Part8
BuildingServices
R40
Methylchloride
R611
Methylformat
R717
Ammonia
R764
Sulphurdioxide
Exception:
Therequirementshallnotapplywhenthecondensingunitislocatedoutsideofabuildingorontheroof
ofabuildingandnotlessthan6mfromadoor,windoworventilatingairopeninginabuildingorwhen
the condensing unit located in the building is exclusively used for ice making or cold storage together
withtheusualaccessoryroomsinconnectiontherewith.
c)
Group2Refrigerants:AmechanicalrefrigeratingsystemorunitrefrigeratingsystemcontainingaGroup2
refrigerant shall not be located within a building unless all refrigerant containing portions of the system are
enclosedinarefrigerationmachineryroom.Suchsystemwheninstalledoutsideofabuildingshallbelocatedat
least6mfromanexitdoor,windoworventilatingairinletinabuilding.
Exception:
Thisshallnotapplytoabuildingusedexclusivelyforicemaking,coldstorageorforthemanufacturingor
processingoffoodordrink,providedtheoccupantloaddoesnotexceedonepersonper10m2offloor
areaservedbysuchsystem.PortionsofrefrigeratingsystemscontainingGroup2refrigerantsshallnotbe
locatedinanexit.
Direct refrigeration systems containing Group 2 refrigerants shall not serve an air cooling or airconditioning
systemusedforhumancomfort.
2.10.3.3 RefrigerationMachineryRoom
a)
General:Requiredrefrigerationmachineryroomsshallbeofatleastonehourfireresistiveconstruction.
All doors shall be tight fitting. Every door shall be clearly labeled "Machinery Room". The room shall have no
openingsthatwillpermitthepassageofescapingrefrigeranttotheotherpartsofthebuilding.Thereshallbeno
direct openingbetween arefrigeration machineryroom containingGroup2refrigerant andaroomor space in
which there is an open flame, spark producing device or heating surface hotter than 426oC. A refrigeration
machineryroomcontainingGroup2refrigerantsshallhaveatleasttwomeansofescapelocatedatleastonefifth
theperimeteroftheroomapart.RefrigerationmachineryroomscontainingGroup1refrigerantshallhaveatleast
oneexitdoor.Sizeoftheexitdoorshallbeatleast1mby2m.
Arefrigerationmachineryroomdoorshallopeninthedirectionofescape.
An unobstructed working space of at least 750 mm in width and at least 2100 mm in height shall be provided
aroundtwoadjacentsidesofallmovingmachineryinarefrigerationmachineryroom.
b)
RefrigerationMachineryRoom Ventilation:Refrigeration machinery room shallbeprovidedwitheither
mechanicalorgravityventilation.
i)
ii)
Mechanical exhaust system shall be a separate and individual system of ventilation serving no
otherareaandshallexhaustairtooutdoorsattherateof12airchangesperhour.Exhaustair
outletshallnotbelocatedwithin6mfromanyexteriordoor,windoworventilationairinletin
anybuilding.Provisionsshallbemadeformakeupairtoreplacethatbeingexhausted.Control
switch for exhaust system shall be located within the machine room and shall be readily
accessible.
Area of gravity ventilation openings to outside of the building shall not be less than one
twentieth of the floor area of the machinery room but shall be more than 0.65 m2.
Approximatelyonehalfoftheopeningsshallbelocatedwithin300mmofthefloorandonehalf
within300mmoftheceilingofthemachineryroom.
c)
Equipment in a Refrigeration Machinery Room: Combustion air shall not be taken from a refrigeration
machinery room. Electrical equipment, switch or control panel other than those used exclusively for air
conditioning,heatingandventilationsystemshallnotbelocatedinarefrigerationmachineryroom.Thisprovision
shallnotapplytoelectricallightingfixturesformachineryroomandswitchesthereof.
A readily accessible single emergency refrigeration control switch shall be provided to shut off all electrically
operatedmachineriesinarefrigerationmachineryroom,excepttheexhaustventilationsystemcomplyingwith
8108
Vol.3
Chapter2
See 2.7.3.3 (b). Such switch shall be located outside the machinery room, within a distance of 3 m from the
machineryroomexit.
d)
FirstAidFacility:Eachrefrigerationmachineryroomshallbeprovidedwithfirstaidboxes.Refrigeration
machineryroomcontainingGroup2refrigerantsshallbeprovidedwithtwogasmasks.
2.10.3.4 RefrigerantPipingandEquipment
a)
Materials:Materialsusedintheconstructionandinstallationofrefrigeratingsystemsshallbesuitablefor
therefrigerantinthesystem,andnomaterialorequipmentshallbeinstalledwhichwilldeteriorateduetothe
chemicalactionoftherefrigerantorthecompressoroil,orcombinationofboth.
b)
Erection of Refrigerant Piping: Refrigerant piping and tubing shall be installed in such a way so as to
prevent excessive vibration and strains at joints and connections. Adequate type of supports shall be used at
pointsasrequiredbutnotexceeding4.5mapart.
Refrigerantpipingandtubingshallbeinstalledinsuchawaysothatitisnotsubjecttodamagefromanexternal
source.
CoppertubingcontainingotherthanGroup1refrigerantshallnotbelocatedinapublichallway,lobbyorstairway
orabuildingunlessenclosedinironorsteelpipingandfittingsorinrigidmetalconduit.
Iron or steel refrigerant piping placed underground shall be coated with sufficient asphalt paint or equivalent
materialtoinhibitcorrosion.
c)
Refrigerant Containers: A refrigerant receiver or evaporator or condenser shall be constructed in
accordancewithapprovedstandards.
d)
Valves and fittings: All valves and fittings shall be of approved type rated for the maximum operating
pressureofthesystem.
e)
Pressure Limiting Device: A pressure limiting device shall be installed on a positive displacement
refrigerantcompressorwhichisaportionof:
i)
ArefrigeratingsystemcontainingGroup2refrigerant.
ii)
AnaircooledrefrigeratingsystemcontainingGroup1refrigerantof7.5kWormorerating.
iii)
AwatercooledrefrigeratingsystemcontainingGroup1refrigerantof2.25kWormorerating.
A stop orshutoff valve shallnotbeplacedbetween apressurelimiting devicerequiredby thissection andthe

compressoritserves.
f)
Pressure Relief Valves: The following compressors of the positive displacement type shall be equipped
withapressurereliefvalve:
i)
Acompressorof15kWormoreratingwhichisaportionofarefrigerationsystemcontaining
Group1refrigerantandoperatingatapressureexceeding103kPainthehighpressuresideof
thesystem.
ii)
AcompressorwhichisaportionofarefrigeratingsystemcontainingaGroup2refrigerant.
Apressurereliefvalveshallbeconnectedtotherefrigerantdischargesideofthecompressoritserves,between
such compressor and a stop valve. A stop orshutoff valveshall not be located between a pressure reliefvalve
requiredbythissectionandthecompressoritserves.
Apressurereliefvalve,requiredbythissection,thatterminateoutside,shalldischargeatalocationatleast4.5m
abovetheadjoininggroundlevelandatleast6mfromawindow,ventilatingopeningorexitfromabuilding.
g)
PressureReliefDevicesforPressureVessels:Apressurevesselover150mmdiameterwhichmaybeshut
offbyvalvesfromotherpartsofthesystemshallbeequippedwithapressurereliefdevice(s)orrupturemember
complyingwiththerequirementsofthiscode.
h)
Manual Discharge of Group 2 Refrigerant: A refrigerating system located in a building and containing
carbon dioxide or Group 2 refrigerant shall be equipped with approved means for manual discharge of the
refrigeranttotheatmosphere.Thedischargepipeshallterminateoutsideofthebuildingnotlessthan2mabove
the highest structure on the building and at least 6 m from any window, ventilating opening or exit from a
building.
2.10.3.5 StorageofRefrigerants
Refrigerants not contained in refrigeration system regulated by the Code shall be stored in original containers
keptinmachineryroom.Thetotalamountshallnotexceed135kg.
8109
Part8
BuildingServices
A portable refrigerant container shall not be connected to the refrigerating system for a period longer than is
necessarytochargeordischargetherefrigeratingsystem.
2.10.4
CoolingTower
2.10.4.1 Location
Cooling Tower shall not be located where warm and humid air discharge from cooling tower is likely to cause
damagetobuildingstructure.
a) Cooling tower located at roof shall meet the requirements of structures as specified in this code.
Clearancesforairsuctionanddischargeshallbemaintainedinaccordancewiththerecommendationof
themanufacturerofthecoolingtower.
b) Windspeedshallbetakenintoconsiderationwhiledesigningthefoundation/supportsforcoolingtower.
c) Necessary vibration isolators shall be installed to restrict transmission of machine vibration to the
structure.
2.10.4.3 Access
Aneasyaccesstocoolingtowerlocatedatroofshallbeprovided.
2.10.4.4 WasteWaterDisposal
Cooling towers or evaporative condensers which are equipped with a positive water discharge to prevent
excessivebuildupofalkalinityandareusedforwatercooledcondensingunitsorabsorptionunitsshalldischarge
thewaterintoanapproveddisposalsystem.
2.10.4.5 PipingConnections
Water supply, waste water piping and other piping connections shall comply with the provisions of applicable
codes.
2.10.4.6 Noise
Coolingtowernoiseshallnotbemorethan65dBAorthatapprovedbythejurisdictionatthepropertyboundary
line.If necessary, thefancylinder maybecoveredwithacousticmaterialstoattenuatenoise.Similarlyfloating
typematmaybeusedtoreducethewaterdropletnoise.
2.10.4.7 Safety
a) Coolingtowerfanshallbeprotectedbyastrongmetalscreensothatnoexternalobjectand/orbirdcan
comeincontactwiththefanblades.
b) Anelectricisolatingswitchshallbeinstalled,inalockedenclosure,atasuitablelocationnearthecooling
towertodisconnectpowertothecoolingtowerfanwhenmaintenanceworksaretobecarriedout.
c) Eachcoolingtowershallbeprovidedwithasecurelyfixedladdertofacilitatemaintenanceworks.
2.11
VentilationSystems
2.11.1
General
2.11.1.1 Scope
The provisions of this section shall govern the ventilation of spaces within a building intended for human
occupancy.
2.11.1.2 WhereRequired
Every space intended for human occupancy shall be provided with ventilation by natural or mechanical means
duringtheperiodswhentheroomorspaceisoccupied.
8110
Vol.3
Chapter2
2.11.2
NaturalVentilation
2.11.2.1 Sources
Naturalventilationofanoccupiedspaceshallbethroughwindows,doors,louvers,skylightsorotheropeningsto
theoutdoor.Suchventilatingopeningsshallopentotheskyorapublicstreet,space,alley,park,highway,yard,
court,plazaorotherapprovedspacewhichcomplywiththerequirementsofthebuildingcode.
2.11.2.2 AreaofVentilatingOpenings
Theminimumventilatingopeningtotheoutdoorsshallbefourpercentofthefloorareabeingventilated.
a)
AdjoiningSpaces:Whereroomsandspaceswithoutopeningstotheoutdoorsareventilatedthroughan
adjoiningroom,theunobstructedopeningtotheadjoiningroomsshallbeatleasteightpercentofthefloorarea
oftheinteriorroomorspace,butnotlessthan2.33m2.Theventilationopeningstotheoutdoorsshallbebased
onthetotalfloorareabeingventilated.
b)
Opening Below Grade: Openings below grade shall be acceptable for natural ventilation provided the
outsidehorizontalclearspacemeasuredperpendiculartotheopeningisoneandonehalftimesthedepthbelow
theaverageadjoininggrade.
2.11.2.3 ContaminantsExhausted
NaturallyventilatedspaceshavingcontaminantspresentshallcomplywiththerequirementsofSec2.8.4.
2.11.2.4 LPgasDistributionFacilities
LPgasdistributionfacilitiesshallbeprovidedwithairinletsandoutletsarrangedsothatairmovementacrossthe
floorofthefacilitywillbeuniform.Thetotalareaofbothinletandoutletopeningsshallbeatleast0.70percent
ofthefloorarea.Thebottomofsuchopeningsshallnotbemorethan150mmabovethefloor.
2.11.3
MechanicalVentilation
Mechanical ventilation shall be provided in all occupiable rooms or spaces where the requirements for natural
ventilationarenotmet;inallroomsorspaces,whichbecauseofthenatureoftheiruseoroccupancy,involvethe
presenceofdust, fumes, gases, vapours,or othernoxiousor injurious impurities,or substances whichcreatea
firehazard;wherespacetemperatureismorethan40C;whererelativehumidityofinsideairismorethan70
percent;wherejobconditionsrequireventilation;orwhererequiredasperprovisionsofthisCode.
2.11.3.2 VentilationSystem
Mechanical ventilation shall be provided by a method of supply air and return or exhaust air. The amount of
supplyairshallbeapproximatelyequaltotheamountofreturnandexhaustair;however,thesystemshallnotbe
prohibitedfromproducinganegativeorpositivepressure.Theventilationsystemductsandequipmentshallbe
designedandinstalledinaccordancewithSec2.5.
2.11.3.3 VentilationAirQuantity
The minimum amount of air circulation rate for ventilation shall be determined based on the occupant load/
spaceareaanduseofthebuildinginaccordancewithTable8.2.6.TheaircirculationratespecifiedintheTable
8.2.6 shall be equal to the combined total of outside air and recirculated air. The occupant load shall be
determinedinaccordancewiththedataprovidedintable8.2.3.
2.11.3.4 MinimumOutdoorAir
TheminimumamountoftheoutdoorairshallbeinaccordancewithTable8.2.3.
Mandatoryrequirement:innocasetheventilationairquantityshallbelowerthan2.5l/sperperson.
2.11.3.5 Airtemperature
Thetemperaturedifferentialbetweenventilationairandairintheconditionedspaceshallnotexceed5.5oC.
Exception:
Ventilationairthatispartoftheairconditioningsystem.
8111
Part8
BuildingServices
2.11.3.6 Recirculation
a)
AmountofRecirculation:Notmorethan67percentoftherequiredventilationairspecifiedinTable
8.2.6 shall be permitted for recirculation, when the concentration of particulates is less than specified in Table
8.2.7.Airinexcessoftherequiredventilationairshallbepermittedtobecompletelyrecirculated.Airshallnotbe
recirculatedtoanotherdwellingunitoroccupancyofdissimilaruse.
Notmorethan85percentoftherequiredventilationairshallbepermittedforrecirculationwhenthesystemis
equippedwitheffectiveadsorptionorfilteringequipmentsothattheconditionoftheairsuppliedtotheroomor
spaceiswithinthequalitylimitationsofTable8.2.7.
b)
ProhibitedUseofRecirculatedAir:Airdrawnfrommortuaryrooms,bathroomsortoiletsorany
spacewhereanobjectionablequantityofflammablevapours,dust,odours,ornoxiousgasesispresentshallnot
be recirculated. Air drawn from rooms that must be isolated to prevent the spread of infection shall not be
recirculated.
Exception:
Airdrawnfromhospitaloperatingroomsmayberecirculated,ifthefollowingrequirementsaremet:
i)
Aminimumoftwentyfivetotalairchangesperhourshallbeprovided,ofwhichfiveairchanges
perhourshallbeoutdoorair.
ii)
Allfansservingexhaustsystemsarelocatedatthedischargeendofthesystem.
iii)
Outdoorairintakesshallbelocatedatleast7.5mfromexhaustoutletsofventilationsystems,
combustionequipment stacks, medical surgicalvacuum systems, plumbing vent stacks orfrom
areaswhichmaycollectvehicularexhaustandothernoxiousfumes.Thebottomofoutdoorair
intakes serving central systemsshall be located at least 2 m aboveground level, or if installed
aboveroof,atleast1maboverooflevel.
iv)
Positiveairpressureshallbemaintainedatalltimesinrelationtoadjacentareas.
v)
Allventilationorairconditioningsystemsservingsuchroomsshallbeequippedwithafilterbed
of twenty five per cent efficiency upstream of airconditioning equipment and a filter bed of
ninetynine per cent efficiency downstream of the supply fan, any recirculating spray water
systemsandwaterreservoirtypehumidifiers.Allfilterefficienciesshallbeaverageatmospheric
dustspotefficienciestestedinaccordancewiththelatestASHRAEstandard.
vi)
Duct linings shall not be used in airconditioning and ventilation systems serving such rooms
unlessterminalfiltersofatleastninetypercentefficiencyareinstalleddownstreamoflinings.
vii)
Airsuppliedshallbedeliveredatorneartheceilingsandallexhaustairshallberemovednear
floorlevel,withatleasttwoexhaustoutletsnotlessthan75mmabovethefloor.
c)
SwimmingPoolAreaRecirculation:Returnairfromaswimmingpoolanddeckareashallbepermittedto
berecirculatedinaccordancewithSec2.8.3.6(a)whensuchairisdehumidifiedtomaintaintherelativehumidity
oftheareaat60percentorless.Thereturnairshallonlyberecirculatedtotheareafromwhichitwasremoved.
2.11.3.7 VentilationinUninhabitedSpaces
Uninhabitedspaces,suchascrawlspacesorattics,shallbeprovidedwithnaturalventilationopeningsasrequired
byBuildingCodeorsuchspacesshallbemechanicallyventilated.Themechanicalventilationsystemshallbea
mechanicalexhaustandsupplyairsystem.Theexhaustrateshallbe0.1l/spersquaremetreofhorizontalarea.
Theventilationsystemshalloperatewhentherelativehumidityexceeds70percentinthespace.
2.11.3.8 VentilationinEnclosedParkingGarages:
Mechanicalventilationsystemsforenclosedparkinggaragesshallbepermittedtooperateintermittentlywhere
thesystemisarrangedtooperateautomaticallyupondetectionofvehicleoperationorthepresenceofoccupants
orsensingtheCOconcentrationlevelbyapprovedautomaticdetectiondevices.
AverageconcentrationofCOshallnotexceed35ppmwithamaximumof200ppm.Automaticoperationofthe
systemshallnotreducetheventilationairflowratebelow.25l/s.m2 ofthefloorareaandthesystemshallbe
capableofproducingaventilationairflowrateof7.6l/s.m2offloorarea.Innocasetheoutdoorairquantityshall
belowerthan5l/sperm2offloorarea.
Connecting offices, waiting rooms, ticket boothsand similarusesthat are accessorytoa public garageshall be
maintainedatapositivepressure.
8112
Vol.3
Chapter2
2.11.4
MechanicalExhaust
Allroomsandareashavingairwithdustparticlessufficientlylightenoughtofloatintheair,odours,fumes,spray,
gases,vapours,smoke,orothernoxiousorimpuritiesinsuchquantitiesastobeirritatingorinjurioustohealthor
safetyorwhichisharmfultobuildingandmaterialsorhassubstanceswhichcreateafirehazard,androomsor
areasasindicatedinTable8.2.6shallhaveairexhaustedtotheoutdoorsinaccordancewiththissection.
2.11.4.2 DesignofExhaustSystem
a)
General:Thedesignofthesystemshallbesuchthattheemissionsorcontaminantsareconfinedtothe
areainwhichtheyaregeneratedbycurrents,hoodsorenclosuresandshallbeexhaustedbyaductsystemtoa
safe location or treated to remove contaminants. Ducts conveying explosives or flammable vapours, fumes or
dustsshallextenddirectlytotheexteriorofthebuildingwithoutenteringotherspaces.Exhaustductsshallnot
extendintoorthroughductsorplenums.
Exception:
Ducts conveying vapour or fumes having flammable constituents less than 25 per cent of their lower
flammabilitylimit(LFL)maypassthroughotherspaces.
Table8.2.6RequiredMinimumAirCirculationRateforMechanicalVentilationofNonAirConditionedSpace
SINO
Application
AirChangeperHour
1.
Assemblyrooms
48
2.
Bakeries
2030
3.
Banks/buildingsocieties
48
4.
Bathrooms
610
5.
Bedrooms
24
6.
Billiardrooms
68
7.
Boilerrooms
1530
8.
Cafesandcoffeebars
1012
9.
Canteens
812
10.
Cellars
31o
11.
Churches
13
12.
Cinemasandtheatres
1015
13.
Clubrooms
12,Min
14.
Compressorrooms
1012
15.
Conferencerooms
812
16.
Dairies
812
17.
Dancehalls
12,Min
18.
Dyeworks
2030
19.
Electroplatingshops
1012
20.
Enginerooms
1530
21.
Entrancehalls
35
22.
Factoriesandworkshops
810
23.
Foundries
24.
Garages
1530
68a
25.
Glasshouses
2560
26.
Gymnasium
6,Min
27.
Hairdressingsaloon
1015
28.
Hospitalssterilizing
1525
8113
Part8
BuildingServices
SINO
Application
AirChangeperHour
29.
Hospitalwards
68
30.
Hospitaldomestic
1520
31.
Laboratories
615
32.
Launderettes
1015
33.
Laundries
1030
34.
Lavatories
615
35.
Lecturetheatres
58
36.
Libraries
35
37.
Livingrooms
36
38.
Mushroomhouses
610
39.
Offices
610
40.
Paintshops(notcellulose)
1020
41.
PhotoandXraydarkroom
1015
42.
Publichousebars
12,Min
43.
Recordingcontrolrooms
1525
44.
Recordingstudios
1012
45.
Restaurants
812
46.
Schoolrooms
57
47.
Shopsandsupermarkets
815
48.
Showerbaths
1520
49.
Storesandwarehouses
36
50.
Squashcourts
4,Min
51.
Swimmingbaths
1015
52.
Toilets
610
53.
Utilityrooms
1520
54.
Weldingshops
1530
NOTE
a:Onlyoutdoorairandnorecirculationshallbedone.
:Theventilationratesmaybeincreasedby50percentwhereheavysmokingoccursoriftheroomisbelow
ground.
Table8.2.7MaximumAllowableContaminantConcentrations
Contaminant
Annual
Average ShortTermLevel
Averaging
(arithmeticmean) (not to be exceeded more Period
g/m3
thanonceayear)g/m3
(hours)
Particulates
60
150
24
Sulfuroxides
80
400
24
Carbonmonoxide
20,000
30,000
Photochemicaloxidant
100
500
Hydrocarbons(not
includingmethane)
1,800
4,000
Nitrogenoxides
200
500
24
Odour
Essentiallyunobjectionablea
8114
Vol.3
Chapter2
Note:aJudgedunobjectionableby60percentofapanelof10untrainedsubjects.
Separateanddistinctsystemsshallbeprovidedforincompatibleexhaustmaterials.
Contaminated air shall not be recirculated to occupied areas unless contaminants have been removed. Air
contaminated with explosive or flammable vapours, fumes or dusts; flammable or toxic gases; or radioactive
materialshallnotberecirculated.
b)
ExhaustAirInlet:Theinlettotheexhaustsystemshallbelocatedintheareaofheaviestconcentrationof
contaminants.
c)
VelocityandCirculation:Thevelocityandcirculationofairinworkareasshallbesuchthatcontaminants
are captured by an air stream at the area where the emissions are generated and conveyed into a product
conveyingductsystem.Mixtureswithinworkareaswherecontaminantsaregeneratedshallbedilutedbelow25
per cent of their lower explosive limit or lower flammability limit with air which does not contain other
contaminants.
2.11.4.3 MakeUpAir
Makeupairshallbeprovidedtoreplenishairexhaustedbytheventilatingsystem.Makeupairintakesshallbe
locatedsoastoavoidrecirculationofcontaminatedairwithinenclosures.
2.11.4.4 HoodsandEnclosures
Hoodsandenclosuresshallbeusedwhencontaminantsoriginateinaconcentratedarea.Thedesignofthehood
or enclosure shall be such that air currents created by the exhaust systems will capture the contaminants and
transportthemdirectlytotheexhaustduct.Thevolumeofairshallbesufficienttodiluteexplosiveorflammable
vapours,fumesordustsassetforthinSec2.11.4.2(c).
2.11.4.5 ExhaustOutlets
Theterminationpointforexhaustductsdischargingtotheatmosphereshallnotbelessthanthefollowing:
a) Ductsconveyingexplosiveorflammablevapours,fumesordusts:9mfrompropertyline;3mfromopening
intothebuilding;2mfromexteriorwallsorroofs;9mfromcombustiblewallsoropeningsintothebuilding
whichareinthedirectionoftheexhaustdischarge;3maboveadjoininggrade.
b) Other product conveying duct outlets: 3 m from property line; 1 m from exterior wall or roof; 3 m from
openingsintothebuildings;1maboveadjoininggrade.
c) Domestickitchen,bathroom,domesticclothesdryerexhaustductoutlets:1mfrompropertyline;1mfrom
openingintothebuilding.
d) Outletsforexhauststhatexceed80oCshallbeinaccordancewiththerelevantcode.
2.11.4.6 MotorsandFans
a)
General: Motors and fans shall be sized to provide the required air movement. Motors in areas which
containflammable vapours and dustsshallbeofa type approvedfor such environments.A manually operated
remote control device shall be installed to shutoff fans or blowers in flammable vapour or dust system. Such
controldeviceshallbeinstalledatanapprovedlocation.
Electricalequipmentusedinoperationsthatgenerateexplosiveorflammablevapours,fumesordustsshallbe
interlockedwiththeventilationsystemsothattheequipmentcannotbeoperatedunlesstheventilationfansare
inoperation.Motorsforfansusedtoconveyflammablevapoursordustsshallbelocatedoutsidetheductand
shallbeprotectedwithapprovedshieldsanddustproofing.Motorsandfansshallbeaccessibleforservicingand
maintenance.
b)
Fans:Partsoffansincontactwithexplosiveorflammablevapours,fumesordustsshallbeofnonferrous
or nonsparking materials or their casing shall be lined or constructed of such material. When the size and
hardnessofmaterialspassingthroughafancouldproduceaspark,boththefanandthecasingshallbeofnon
sparking materials. When fans are required to be spark resistant, their bearings shall not be within the air
stream,andallpartsofthefanshallbegrounded.Fansinsystemshandlingmaterialsthatarelikelytoclogthe
blades,andfansinbuffingorwoodworkingexhaustsystems,shallbeoftheradialbladeortubeaxialtype.
Equipment used to exhaust explosive or flammable vapours, fumes or dusts shall bear an identification plate
statingtheventilationrateforwhichthesystemwasdesigned.
8115
Part8
BuildingServices
Fanslocatedinsystemsconveyingcorrosivesshallbeofmaterialsthatareresistanttothecorrosionorshallbe
coatedwithcorrosionresistantmaterials.
2.11.4.7 ExhaustSystemsofSpecialAreas
a)
Motor Vehicle Operation: In areas where motor vehicles operate for a period of time exceeding 10
seconds, the ventilation return air shall be exhausted. In fuel dispensing areas, the bottom of the air inlet or
exhaustopeningshallbelocatedamaximumof450mmabovethefloor.
b)
SprayPaintingandDippingRooms:Roomsboothforspraypaintingordippingshallhaveamechanical
exhaust systems which create a crosssectional air velocity of 0.5 m/s. The system shall provide a uniform
exhaustofairacrossthewidthandheightoftheroomorbooth.Theexhaustsystemshalloperatewhilespray
paintingordippingisbeingdone.
c)
MotionPictureProjectors:Projectorsequippedwithanexhaustdischargeshallbedirectlyconnectedto
a mechanical exhaust system. The exhaust system shall operate at an exhaust rate as indicated by the
manufacturer'sinstructions.
Projectors without an exhaust shall have contaminants exhausted through a mechanical exhaust system. The
exhaust rate for electric arc projectors shall be a minimum of 100 l/s per lamp. The exhaust rate for xenon
projectorsshallbeaminimumof150l/sperlamp.Thelampandprojectionroomexhaustsystems,ifcombined
orindependent,shallnotbeinterconnectedwithanyotherexhaustorreturnsystemwithinthebuilding.
d)
DryCleaningEquipment:Drycleaningequipmentshallbeprovidedwithanexhaustsystemcapableof
maintainingaminimumairvelocityof0.5m/sacrossthefaceoftheloadingdoor.
e)
LP gas Distribution Facilities: LP gas distribution facilities that are not provided with natural ventilation
shall have a continuously operating exhaust system at the rate of 5 l/s per square metre of floor area. The
bottomofairinletandoutletopeningsshallnotbemorethan150mmabovethefloor.
2.11.4.8 ExhaustSystemDucts
a)
Construction: Ducts for exhaust systems shall be constructed of materials approved for the type of
particulatesconveyedandasperlateststandardinthisregard.Ductsshallbeofsubstantialairtightconstruction
andshallnothaveopeningsotherthanthoserequiredforoperationandmaintenanceofthesystem.
b)
Supports:Spacingofsupportsforductsshallnotexceed3.7mfor200mmductsand6mforlargerducts
unless justified by the design. The design of supports shall assume that 50 per cent of the duct is full of the
particulatebeingconveyed.
c)
Explosion Venting: Ducts conveying explosive dusts shall have explosion vents, openings protected by
antiflashbackswingvalvesorrupturediaphragms.Openingstorelieveexplosiveforcesshallbelocatedoutside
thebuilding.
d)
FireProtection:Firesuppressionsystemshallbeinstalledwithinductshavingacrosssectionaldimension
exceeding250mmwhentheductconveysflammablevapoursorfumes.
e)
Clearances:Ductsconveyingflammableorexplosivevapours,fumesordustsshallhaveaclearancefrom
combustiblesofnotlessthan450mm.
2.11.5
KitchenExhaustEquipment
2.11.5.1 KitchenExhaustDucts
a)
Materials:Kitchenexhaustductsandplenumsshallbeconstructedofatleast16SWGsteelor18SWG
stainlesssteelsheet.
Jointsandseamsshallbemadewithacontinuousliquidtightweldorbrazemadeontheexternalsurfaceofthe
duct system. A vibration isolator connector may be used, provided it consists of noncombustible packing in a
metal sleeve joint of approved design. Duct bracing and supports shall be of noncombustible material securely
attached to the structure and designed to carry gravity and lateral loads within the stress limitations of the
Building Code. Bolts, screws, rivets and other mechanical fasteners shall not penetrate duct walls. Exhaust fan
housingsshallbeconstructedofsteel.
Exception:
Kitchen exhaust ducts which are exclusively used for collecting and removing steam, vapour, heat or
odourmaybeconstructedasperprovisionsofSec2.4.1.
8116
Vol.3
Chapter2
b)
Corrosion Protection: Ducts exposed to the outside atmosphere or subject to a corrosive environment
shall be protected against corrosion. Galvanization of metal parts, protection with noncorrosive paints and
waterproofinsulationareconsideredacceptablemethodsofprotection.
c)
Prevention of Grease Accumulation: Duct systems shall be so constructed and installed that grease
cannotbecomepocketedinanyportionthereof,andthesystemshallhaveaslopenotlessthan1in48towards
thehoodoranapprovedgreasereservoir.Wherethehorizontalductsexceed23minlengththeslopeshallnot
belessthan1in12.
d)
AirVelocity:Theairvelocityintheductshallbeaminimumof7.62m/sandamaximumof12.7m/s.
e)
Cleanouts and Other Openings: Duct systems shall not have openings other than those required for
properoperationandmaintenanceofthesystem.Anyportionofsuchsystemhavingsectionsinaccessiblefrom
theductentryordischargeshallbeprovidedwithadequatecleanoutopeningsofapprovedconstructionspaced
not more than 6 m apart. The cleanout shall be located on the side of the duct having a minimum opening
dimensionof300mmorthewidthoftheductwhenlessthan300mm.
f)
Duct Enclosure: The duct which penetrates a ceiling, wall or floor shall be enclosed in a fireresistant
ratedenclosurefromthepointofpenetrationinaccordancewiththeBuildingCode.Theductenclosureshallbe
sealed around the duct at the point of penetration and vented to the exterior through weatherprotected
openings.Theclearancebetweentheductenclosureandtheductshallbeatleast75mmandnotmorethan300
mm. Each duct enclosure shall contain only one exhaust duct. Approved fire rated access openings shall be
providedatcleanoutpoints.
g)
KitchenexhaustairflowrateshallbecalculatedbasedonthedataprovidedinTable8.2.8.
Table8.2.8DesignExhaustAirFlowinI/sperkWoftheKitchenEquipment
SI
KitchenEquipment
Electricitybased
Equipment
Gasbased
Equipment
(a)
(b)
(d)
1.
Cookingpot
12
2.
Pressurecookercabinet
3.
Convectionoven
10
4.
Roastingoven(salamander)
33
33
5.
Griddle
32
35
6.
Fryingpan
32
35
7.
Deepfatfryer
28
8.
Cooker/stove
32
35
9.
Grill
50
61
10.
Heatedtable/bath
30
11.
Coffeemaker
12.
Dishwasher
17
13.
Refrigerationequipment
60
14.
Ceramiccooker/stove
25
15.
Microwaveoven
16.
Pizzaoven
15
17.
Inductioncooker/stove
20
2.11.5.2 KitchenExhaustHoods
a)
Acommercialexhausthoodshallbeprovidedforeachcommercialcookingappliance.
Exceptions:
i)
Anappliancelocatedwithinadwellingunitandnotusedforcommercialpurposes.
ii)
Completelyenclosedovens.
iii)
Steamtables.
8117
Part8
BuildingServices
iv)
Auxiliary cooking equipment that does not produce grease laden vapours, including toasters,
coffeemakersandeggcookers.
b)
Domesticcookingappliancesusedforcommercialpurposesshallbeprovidedwithacommercialexhaust
hood. Domestic cooking appliances used for noncommercial purposes shall be provided with ventilation in
accordancewithSec2.8.
c)
Hood Construction: The hood and other parts of the primary collection system shall be constructed of
galvanizedsteel,stainlesssteel,copperorothermaterialapprovedbytheBuildingOfficialfortheuseintended.
The minimum nominal thickness of the galvanized steel shall be 1.2 mm (No. 18 SWG). The minimum nominal
thicknessofstainlesssteelshallbe0.93mm(No.20SWG).Hoodsconstructedofcoppershallbeofcoppersheets
weighingatleast7.33kg/m2.Allexternaljointsshallbeweldedliquidtight.Hoodsshallbesecuredinplacein
noncombustiblesupports.
d)
InteriorSurface:Theinteriorsurfacesofthehoodshallnothaveanyareasthatcanaccumulategrease.
Exception:
Greasecollectionsystemsunderfittersandtroughsontheperimeterofcanopyhoods.
e)
CanopyHoods:Canopyhoodsshallbedesignedtocompletelycoverthecookingequipment.Theedgeof
thehoodshallextendaminimumhorizontaldistanceof150mmbeyondtheedgeofthecookingsurfaceonall
opensidesandtheverticaldistancebetweenthelipofthehoodandthecookingsurfaceshallnotexceed1.22m.
f)
NoncanopyTypeHoods:Hoodsofthenoncanopytypeshallbelocatedamaximumof900mmabove
thecookingsurface.Theedgeofthehoodshallbesetbackamaximumof300mmfromtheedgeofthecooking
surface.
g)
HoodExhaust:Thehoodexhaustshallcreateadraftfromthecookingsurfaceinto thehood.Canopy
hoodsattachedtowallshallexhaustaminimumof500l/sperm2ofthehoodarea.Canopyhoodsexposedonall
sides shall exhaust a minimum of 750 l/s per m2 of hood area. Hoods of the non canopy type shall exhaust a
minimumof460l/sperlinealmetreofcookingsurface.
h)
Exhaust Outlet : An exhaust outlet within the hood shall be so located as to optimize the capture of
particulatematter.Eachoutletshallservenotmorethana3.7msectionofthehood.
2.11.5.3 MakeUpAir
Make up air shall be supplied during the operation of the kitchen exhaust system. The amount of make up air
shallbeapproximatelyequaltotheamountoftheexhaustair.Themakeupairshallbesuppliedinsuchawayas
toavoidshortcircuitingandreducingtheeffectivenessoftheexhaustsystem.Windowsanddoorsshallnotbe
usedforthepurposeofprovidingmakeupair.
2.11.5.4 GreaseRemoval
Theairexhaustedineverycommercialexhausthoodshallpassthroughapprovedgreasefiltersorgreaseremoval
devicedesignedforthespecificpurpose.Greaseremovaldevicesshallbearthelabelofanapprovedagency,and
shallbeinstalledinaccordancewiththemanufacturer'sinstructionsforthelabeledequipment.Allgreasefilters
shallbeaccessible.Greasefiltersshallbeinstalledataminimumangleof45degreestothehorizontal.Thefilters
shallbearrangedsoastocaptureanddraingreasetoapointofcollection.
2.11.5.5 Motors,FansandSafetyDevices
a)
Motors andfansshall be of sufficient capacitytoprovide requiredair movement. Electricalequipment
shallbeapprovedfortheclassofuseasprovidedintheElectricalCode.Motorsandfansshallbeaccessiblefor
servicingandmaintenance.Motorsoftheexhaustfanshallnotbeinstalledwithintheductsorunderhoods.
b)
Commercial exhaust system hoods and ducts shall have a minimum clearance to combustibles of
450mm.
c)
Fire Suppression System Required: All commercial cooking surfaces, kitchen exhaust systems, grease
removaldevicesandhoodsshallbeprotectedwithanapprovedautomaticfiresuppressionsysteminaccordance
withtheBuildingCode.
8118
Vol.3
Chapter2
2.12
ENERGYCONSERVATION
2.12.1
General
Airconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemsofallbuildingsshallbedesignedandinstalledforefficientuseof
energyashereinprovided.Calculationsofcoolingandheatingloadsshallbebasedondatawhichleadtoasystem
withoptimumenergyuse.
Generalstandardsofcomfortorparticularenvironmentalrequirementswithinthebuildingshallnotbesacrificed
in an endeavor to achieve low consumption of energy. For special applications, such as hospitals, laboratories,
thermally sensitive equipment, computer rooms and manufacturing processes, the design concepts and
parametersshallconformtotherequirementsoftheapplicationatminimumenergylevels.
2.12.2
DesignParameters
2.12.2.1 OutdoorDesignConditions
Unlessspecificallyrequired,theoutdoordesigntemperatureshallbeselectedfromcolumnsof2percentvalueof
Table8.2.2forcooling.
2.12.2.2 IndoorDesignConditions
Indoor design temperature shall not be less than 24C for cooling unless otherwise required for specific
application.
2.12.2.3 Humidity
TheactualdesignrelativehumidityshallbeselectedfromtherangeshowninTable8.2.1fortheminimumtotal
airconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemenergyuse.
2.12.3
SystemDesign
2.12.3.1 LoadVariation
Considerationshallbegiventochangesinbuildingloadandthesystemdesigned,sothatmaximumoperational
efficiencyismaintainedunderpartloadconditions.Thetotalsystemshallbeseparatedintosmallerzoneshaving
similar load requirements, so that each zone can be separately controlled to maintain optimum operating
conditionsbyreducingwastageofenergy.
2.12.3.2 TemperatureofCoolingMedia
The temperature of refrigerant, chilled water or brine circulated within the system shall be maintained at the
level necessary to achieve the required output to match the prevailing load conditions with the minimum
expenditureofenergy.
2.12.3.3 EnergyRecovery
Wherepossibleenergyrecoverysystemshallbeadopted.
2.12.4
EquipmentandControl
2.12.4.1 General
Airconditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be equipped with devices and controls to automatically
controlthecapacityofthesystemwhenthebuildingrequirementreduces.Thecontrolsystemshallhavedevices
toreduceenergyuseconsideringtheeffectofbuildingenergystorage.
2.12.4.2 CoolingwithOutdoorAir
Each air handling system shall have facility to use up to and including 100 per cent of the air handling system
capacityforcoolingwithoutdoorairautomaticallywhenevertheuseofoutdoorairwillresultinlowerusageof
energythanwouldberequiredundernormaloperationoftheairhandlingsystem.
Exception:
Coolingwithoutdoorairisnotrequiredunderanyoneormoreofthefollowingconditions:
a)
Wheretheairhandlingsystemcapacityislessthan2500l/sor40kWtotalcoolingcapacity.
8119
Part8
BuildingServices
b)
Wherethequalityofoutdoorairissopoorastorequireextensivetreatmentoftheair.
c)
Wheretheneedforhumidificationordehumidificationrequirestheuseofmoreenergythanis
conservedbyoutdooraircoolingonanannualbasis.
d)
Where the use of outdoor air cooling would affect the operation of other systems so as to
increasetheoverallenergyconsumptionofthebuilding.
2.12.4.3 MechanicalVentilation
Eachmechanicalventilationsystemshallbeequippedwithareadilyaccessiblemeansforeithershutofforvolume
reduction,andshutoffwhenventilationisnotrequired.Automaticorgravitydampersthatclosewhenthesystem
isnotoperatingshallbeprovidedforoutdoorairintakesandexhausts.
2.12.4.4 Maintenance
Heatexchangetubesshallbeperiodicallycleanedtomaintainitsheattransfercharacteristics.Maintenanceofall
equipmentshallbeperiodicallydonetomaintainitsefficiencyatsatisfactorylevel.
2.12.4.5 MinimumEquipmentEfficiencies
CoolingequipmentshallmeetorexceedtheminimumefficiencyrequirementspresentedinTables8.2.9through
8.2.10.HeatingandcoolingequipmentnotlistedhereshallcomplywithASHRAE90.120046.4.1.
Table8.2.9MinimumPerformanceofUnitaryAirConditioningEquipment
EquipmentClass
Minimum
COP
Minimum
IPLV
TestStandard
UnitaryAirCooledAirConditioner
19and<40KW(5.4and
<11tons)
3.08
ARI210/240
40to<70KW(11to
<20tons)
3.08
ARI340/360
70KW(20tons)
2.93
2.99
ARI340/360
UnitarywaterCooledAir
Conditioner<19KW
(<5.4tons)
4.10
ARI210/240
Conditioner19and<40KW
(5.4and<11tons)
4.10
ARI210/240
Conditioner<40KW
(11tons)
3.22
3.02
ARI210/240
Table8.2.10MinimumPerformanceofChillers
EquipmentClass
Sizecategory
Minimum Minimum TestStandard

COP
IPLV
AircooledChiller,
electricallyoperated
<530KW 2.90
(<150tons)
3.16
ARI550/590
1998
AircooledChiller,
530KW 3.05
(150tons)
3.32
ARI550/5901998
CentrifugalWaterCooled,
Chiller<530KW
(<150tons)
6.09
ARI550/590
8120
5.80
1998
Vol.3
Chapter2
EquipmentClass
Sizecategory
Minimum Minimum TestStandard

COP
IPLV
CentrifugalWaterCooled
Chiller,electrically
operated
530and<1050 5.80
KW
(150and<300
tons)
6.17
CentrifugalWaterCooled
Chiller,electrically
operated
1050KW(300 6.30
tons)
6.61
Reciprocating
Compressor,Water
CooledChiller,electrically
operated
AllCapacities
5.05
RotaryScrewandScroll
Compressor,Water
operated
<530KW(<150
tons)
4.70
Compressor,Water
operated
530and
<1050KW
5.40
ARI550/590
1998
ARI550/590
1998
4.20
ARI550/590
1998
5.49
ARI550/590
1998
6.17
ARI550/590
1998
(150and<300
tons)
Compressor,Water
operated
1050KW
(300tons)
5.75
6.43
ARI550/590
AircooledAbsorption,
SingleEffect
AllCapacities
0.60
ARI560
WaterCooledAbsorption,
SingleEffect
AllCapacities
0.70
ARI560
Absorption,DoubleEffect, AllCapacities
IndirectFired
1.00
1.05
ARI560
Absorption,DoubleEffect, AllCapacities
DirectFired
1.00
1.00
ARI560
1998
2.12.4.6 Controls
a)Allmechanicalcoolingandheatingshallbecontrolledbyatimeclockthat:
(i)
Canstartandstopthesystemunderdifferentschedulesforthreedifferentdaytypesperweek.
(ii)
Is capable of retaining programmingandtimesettingduring aloss of power for a period of at

least10hours,and
(iii)
Includesanaccessiblemanualoverridethatallowstemporaryoperationofthesystemforupto
2hours.
Exceptions:
Coolingsystems<28kw(8tons)
Heatingsystems<7kw(2tons)
b)Allheatingandcoolingequipmentshallbetemperaturecontrolled.Whereaunitprovidesbothheatingand
cooling, controls shall be capable of providing a temperature dead band of 3 (5F) within which the supply of
heatingandcoolingenergytothezoneisshutofforreducedtoaminimum.Whereseparateheatingandcooling
equipmentservethesametemperaturezone,thermostatsshallbeinterlockedtopreventsimultaneousheating
andcooling.
8121
Part8
BuildingServices
c)Allcoolingtowersandclosedfluidcoolersshallhaveeithertwospeedmotors,ponymotors,orvariablespeed
drivescontrollingthefans.
2.12.5
SystemBalancing
2.12.5.1 General
ConstructiondocumentsshallrequirethatallHVACsystemsbebalancedinaccordancewithgenerallyaccepted
engineeringstandards.
Construction documents shall require that a written balance report be provided to the owner or the designed
representativeofthebuildingownerforHVACsystemservicingzoneswithatotalconditionedareaexceeding500
m2(5000ft2).
a) AirSystemBalancing
Airsystemsshallbebalancedinamannertofirstminimizethrottlingloses.Then,forfanswithfansystem
powergreaterthan0.75KW(1.0hp),fanspeedshallbeadjustedtomeetdesignflowconditions.
b) HydronicSystemBalancing
Hydronicsystemsshallbeproportionatelybalancedinamannertofirstminimizethrottlingloses;thenthe
pumpimpellershallbetrimmedorpumpspeedshallbeadjustedtomeetdesignflowconditions.
Exceptions:
(i)Impellersneednotbetrimmednorpumpspeedadjustedforpumpswithpumpmotorsof7.5KW(10hp)
orless.
(ii) Impellers need not be trimmed when throttling results in no greater than 5% of the nameplate horse
powerdraw,or2.2KW(3hp),whicheverisgreater.
2.12.6
Condensers
2.12.6.1 CondenserLocations
Care shall be exercised in locating the condensers in such a manner that heat sink is free of interference from
heat discharge by devices located in adjoining spaces and also does not interfere with such other systems
installednearby.
2.12.6.2 TreatmentWaterforCondensers
Allhighrise buildingsusing centralized coolingwatersystemshalluse softwaterfor the condenser andchilled
watersystem.
2.12.7
Economizers
2.12.7.1 AirsideEconomizer
Each individual cooling fan system that has a design supply capacity over 1,200 l/s (2,500 cfm) and a total
mechanicalcoolingcapacityover22KW(6.3tons)shallincludeeither:
(a) An air economizer capable of modulating outsideair and returnair dampers to supply 100 percent of the
designsupplyairquantityasoutsideair;or
(b)Awatereconomizercapableofproviding100%oftheexpectedsystemcoolingloadatoutsideairtemperature
of10C(50F)drybulb/7.2C(45F)wetbulbandbelow:
Exception:
i)
ProjectsintheHotDryandWarmHumidclimatezonesareexempt.
ii) Individualceilingmountedfansystems<3,200l/s(6,500cfm)areexempt.
2.12.7.2
where required by 2.12.7.1 economizers shall be capable of providing partial cooling even when additional
mechanicalcoolingisrequiredtomeetthecoolingload.
8122
Vol.3
Chapter2
2.12.8
VariableFlowHydronicSystems
2.12.8.1
Chilledorhotwatersystemsshallbedesignedforvariablefluidflowandshallbecapableofreducingpumpflow
ratestonomorethanthelargerof:
(a)50%ofthedesignflowrate,or
(b)theminimumflowrequiredbytheequipmentmanufacturerforproperoperationofthechillersorboilers.
2.12.8.2
Watercooledairconditioningorheatpumpunitswithacirculationpumpmotorgreaterthanorequalto3.7KW
(5hp)shallhavetwowayautomaticisolationvalvesoneachwatercooledairconditioningorheatpumpunitthat
areinterlockedwiththecompressortoshutoffcondenserwaterflowwhenthecompressorisnotoperating.
2.12.8.3
Chilledwaterorcondenserwatersystemsthatmustcomplywitheither2.12.8.1or2.12.8.2andthathavepump
motorsgreaterthanorequalto3.7KW(5hp)shallbecontrolledbyvariablespeeddrives.
2.13
Inspection,TestingandCommissioning
2.13.1
InspectionandTesting
2.13.1.1 General
All airconditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be inspected and tested by the Authority before the
systemiscommissionedfornormaloperation.Itshouldbeensuredthatthesearecarriedoutthoroughlyandthat
all data and results are properly documented. It is recommended that whole inspection, testing and
commissioningbedoneundertheguidanceandcontrolofasingleAuthority.
2.13.1.2 Inspection
Allmachinery,equipmentandotheraccessoriesoftheairconditioning,heatingandventilationsystemshallbe
inspectedbytheAuthoritytodeterminewhetherthesystemcomponentsandthesystemasawholehasbeen
installed as per design and provisions of this Code; proper safety requirements have been maintained; and
adequatefireprotectionmeasureshavebeentaken.
Inspectionshallalsobecarriedoutonstructuralsupports,hangers,fasteningdevices,vibrationisolatorsetc.
2.13.1.3 Testing
a)
General: All machinery, equipment and other accessories shall be tested as per approved procedures.
Tests shall be conducted to determine the strength capacity of anyitem and performance of any machineand
equipment.Alltestdatashallbeproperlydocumented.
b)
Pressure Testing of Piping: All field installed refrigerant and hydronic piping system along with their
valvesandpipefittingsshallbetestedattheirapprovedtestpressurestodeterminewhetherthepipingsystem
canwithstandthetestpressures.
c)
AirDistributionSystemTesting:Allductingsystemshallbetestedtodeterminewhethertheductsystem
hasanyleakageattestpressures.Allairterminalsandairdampersshallbetestedfortheirflowcharacteristics.
d)
MachineryandEquipment:Testsshallbeconductedonmachineryandequipmenttodeterminewhether
theseoperateandfunctionproperly.Allmachineryandequipmentshallalsobetestedfortheirelectricalpower
consumption characteristics and overall performance. Before performance testing of the system all air
distributionsystemandhydronicsystemshallbeproperlybalancedbyapprovedprocedure.
e)
Safety Devices and Controls: Tests shall be carried out to determine whether the safety devices and
controlsfunctionproperly.
f)
Allairfiltersshallbetestedinaccordancewiththelateststandard.
8123
Part8
BuildingServices
2.13.2
Commissioning
If the Authority becomes satisfied regarding satisfactory installation and performance of the air
conditioning,heatingandventilationsystemaftertesting,thesystemshallbecommissionedfollowingapproved
procedure. Before complete commissioning, all air distribution systems and hydronic systems shall be properly
balancedandallthecontrolsandtheirsensorsshallbeproperlyadjusted.
2.14
OperationandMaintenance
2.14.1
General
The owner of the building wherethe airconditioning,heatingand ventilation systemis installed, shallfollow a
properlydesignedoperationprocedureandmaintenanceschedule.
2.14.2
Operation
A well sequenced operation procedure shall be followed to ensure effective operation of the airconditioning,
heating and ventilation system, safety from hazard to personnel and property. Operation procedure shall take
accountforsavinginenergyuse.
All operational data of all the machinery and equipment shall be properly recorded for determination of
performance of the machinery, equipment and the system. These data shall be properly preserved for future
referenceformaintenancepurposes.
2.14.3
Maintenance
A well designed maintenance program for the airconditioning, heating and ventilation system shall be
implementedinordertoachievethefollowing:
a)
Optimumreliabilityandcontinuityofservice.
b)
Extendedlongevityandeconomiclife.
c)
Functionaleffectiveness,wherebytheintendedperformanceofmechanicalequipmentandsystemcan
befullyattained.
d)
Minimumoperatingcost,attendantrequirements,servicingandrepairs.
e)
Safetyfromhazardtopersonnelandproperty.
Maintenanceprogramandprocedureshallcomplywiththeinstructionsofmachinery/equipmentmanufacturers
inthisregard.
8124
Vol.3
CHAPTER3
BuildingAcoustics
3.1
PURPOSE
The purpose of this chapter is to provide codes, recommendations and guidelines for fulfilling acoustical
requirements in buildings.
3.2
SCOPE
This chapter specifies planning and design codes, recommendations and guidelines on spatial, architectural
and technical aspects of acoustics within or outside buildings to ensure acoustical performance, comfort and
safety. Planning and design aspects are discussed generally and also particularly for buildings with
different occupancies.
3.3
TERMINOLOGY
This Section provides meanings and definitions of terms used in and applicable to this chapter of the Code.
The terms are arranged in an alphabetical order. In case of any contradiction between a meaning or a
definition given in this Section and that in any other part of the Code, the meaning or definition specified in
this Section shall govern for interpretation of the provisions of this Section.
Balanced Noise Criteria (NCB) Curves: L. L. Beranek developed Noise Criteria (NC) curves in 1957, which
were revised in 1988 as Balanced Noise Criteria (NCB) Curves (see Appendix D).
Bel: See Sound Pressure Level.
Cycle: See Frequency.
dBA: A sound pressure level measurement, when the signal has been weighted with a frequency response
of the A curve. The dBA curve approximates the human ear and is therefore used most in acoustics.
Decibel (dB): See Sound Pressure Level.
Direct Sound: Sound that travels directly from a source to the listener or receiver. In a room, the sequence
of arrivals is the direct sound first, followed by sound reflected from room surfaces.
Echo: Echo is a reflection of a sound wave back to its source in sufficient strength and with a sufficient time
lag to be separately distinguished. Usually, a time lag of at least 50 to 80 ms is required for hearing
discrete echoes.
Effective Perceived Noise Level in Decibel (EPN dB): The number for rating the noise of an individual
aircraft flying overhead is the Effective Perceived Noise Level in decibels (unit, EPN dB). This value
takes into account the subjectively annoying effects of the noise including pure tones and duration. In
principle, it is a kind of time-integrated loudness level.
Part 8
Building Services
8-1
Part 8
Building Services
Flutter Echo: A quick succession of echoes; it may be present as a disturbing phenomenon in small rooms
or between a pair of parallel reflectors. If the time between echoes is greater than about 30 to 50 ms, the
periodicity is audible as a distinct flutter.
Frequency: The frequency of sound is the number of vibrations per second of the molecules of air, generated
by the vibrating body. One complete movement to and fro of the vibrating body is referred to as a
'cycle'. Frequency is expressed as the number of cycles per second (cps); it is also referred to its unit as
Hertz (Hz).
Impact Isolation Class (IIC): Impact Isolation Class (IIC) is a single-number impact isolation rating for floor
construction. Tests are made with a standard tapping machine and noise level measured in 1/3-octave
bands. These are plotted and compared to a standard contour.
Intensity: Intensity at a point is the average rate at which sound energy is transmitted through a unit area
around the point and perpendicular to the direction of propagation of sound. It is also known as sound
intensity. Its units is W m-2
L10: In environmental noise assessment, the A-weighted noise level (unit dBA), with fast (F) time weighting,
that is exceeded by 10 percent of sated time period is known as L10.
LAeq,T: Symbol for Equivalent Continuous A-weighted Sound Pressure Level for airborne sounds that are
non-stationary with respect to time. It is formed by applying A-Weighting to the original signal before
squaring and averaging. Also known as Equivalent Continuous Sound Level.
Loudness: Loudness is the sensation produced in the human ear and depends on the intensity and
frequency of sound. The unit of loudness level is phon.
Noise: Noise is defined as unwanted sound. Noise conditions vary from time to time and a noise which may
not be objectionable during the day may be increased in annoying proportions in the silence of the
night, when quiet conditions are essential.
Noise Exposure Forecast (NEF): Noise exposure forecast at any location is the summation of the noise levels
in Effective Perceived Noise Level (unit EPN dBA) from all aircraft types, on all runways, suitably
weighted for the number of operations during day time and night time.
Noise Map: A noise map is a graphic representation of the sound level distribution existing in a given
region, for a defined period.
Noise Reduction (NR): Noise Reduction (NR) is a general term for specifying sound insulation between
rooms. It is more general than Transmission Loss (TL). If all boundary surfaces in the receiving room
are completely absorbent, the NR will exceed the TL by about 5 dB, i.e. NR = TL + 5dB.
Percentage Syllable Articulation (PSA): The percentage of meaningless syllables correctly written by
listeners is called Percentage Syllable Articulation (PSA).
Reverberation: The prolongation of sound, as a result of successive reflections in an enclosed space, when
the source of the sound has stopped, is called reverberation.
Reverberation Time (RT): The reverberation time of a room is defined as the time required for the sound
pressure level in a room to decrease by 60 dB after the sound is stopped, and is calculated by the
formula
0.16V
RT = A + xV
where,
RT
V
8-2
= reverberation time, s
= room volume, m3
Chapter 4
Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control

A
x
= total room absorption, m2 sabin

= air absorption coefficient
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR): Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) defined as the power ratio between a signal
(meaningful information) and the background noise (unwanted signal), which can be expressed as
SNR = (Psignal / Pnoise)
where, P is average power
SNR can be obtained by calculating the square of amplitude ratio:
SNR = (Psignal / Pnoise) = (Asignal / Anoise)2
where, A is root mean square (RMS) amplitude
In decibel, the SNR is defined as
SNRdB = 10 log10 (Psignal / Pnoise) = Psignal,dB - Pnoise,dB
which might be equivalently expressed in amplitude ratio as
SNRdB = 10 log10 (Asignal / Anoise)2 = 20 log10 (Asignal / Anoise)
Sound Focus and Dead Spot: When a sound wave is reflected by a concave surface, large enough compared
to the wavelength, it concentrates on a spot where sound pressure rises excessively. This is called a
'sound focus'. As a consequence, sounds become weak and inaudible at some other spots, called 'dead
spots'.
Sound Transmission Class (STC): To avoid the misleading nature of an average transmission loss (TL)
value and to provide a reliable single figure rating for comparing partitions, a different procedure for
single figure rating, called Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating, of a partition is determined by
comparing the 16 frequency TL curve with a standard reference contour, the sound transmission class
contour. STC ratings of some common walls and floors are given in Appendix F.
Sound Pressure Level (SPL): Sound Pressure Level or Sound Intensity Level is measured in terms of the
unit bel (B), which is defined as the logarithm of the ratio of the sound pressure to the minimum sound
pressure audible to the average human ear. The unit decibel (dB) is one-tenth of a bel (B). Thus,
I
I
Sound Pressure Level = log10 I bels = 10 log10 I decibels
o
o
where, I = Sound Pressure in watt cm2, and
Io = Sound Pressure audible to the average human ear taken as 10-16 watt/cm2.
Speech Intelligibility: The percentage of correctly received phrases is called Speech Intelligibility.
Transmission Loss: Transmission loss (TL) of a partition is a measure of its sound insulation. It is equal to
the number of decibels by which sound energy is reduced in passing through the structure. Units dB.
Wavelength: The wavelength of sound is the distance over which a complete cycle occurs. It can be found
by measuring distance between the centres of compression of the sound waves. It is dependent upon
the frequency of the sound.
3.4
BUILDING ACOUSTICS: GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS AND PROVISIONS

Generalised considerations and provisions for planning and design of building are furnished in this Section.
3.4.1
Classifications of Building Acoustics
3.4.1.1
Considering diversity of desired objectives and salient design features, building acoustics can be broadly
classified as,
a) Acoustics for Speech
b) Acoustics for Music
8-3
Part 8
Building Services
c) Acoustics for Multipurpose
Table 8.4.1 shows classifications of acoustics with brief description and examples of spaces involved.
Table 8.4.1
Classifications of Building Acoustics, Brief Description and Examples of Spaces Involved
Classifications
Brief Description
Examples of Spaces
a) Acoustics for
Speech
Relates to speech with foremost objectives of intelligibility. A

space should have relatively lower reverberation time for
speech. Generally, it covers narrow range of frequency
spectra in lower-mid level (about 170 to 4,000 Hz, for an
average dynamic range of 42 dBA).
Classroom, lecture hall,

conference hall, recital
hall, assembly hall,
courtroom, auditorium
for speech etc.
b) Acoustics for
Music
Involves music with prime objectives of liveliness or

reverberance, intimacy, fullness, clarity, warmth, brilliance,
texture, blend and ensemble. Music may include instrumental
and vocal melody, or either of the two. A space requires
relatively higher reverberation time for music. Generally, it
involves broad range of frequency spectra (about 50 to 8,500
Hz, for an average dynamic range of about 75 dBA).
Music practice booth,

rehearsal room, band
room, listening booth,
orchestra, concert hall,
symphony hall,
cathedral etc.
c) Acoustics for Includes both speech and music acoustics to fulfil objectives
Multipurpose of the both at a rationally compromised level. Acoustics
design of a multipurpose space is quite challenging as the
design objectives and measures vary remarkably for speech
and music. For example, there is a significant variation in
desired reverberation times of a space for speech and music.
Multipurpose hall,
cinema, theatre, opera
house, mosque (for
speech and melodious
recitation), church,
temple etc.
3.4.1.2
A building or a building complex is usually a group of spaces or rooms intended for various functions.
Those spaces may require involvement of different types of acoustics as stated in Table 8.4.1. For example, a
school has spaces for speech (e.g., classroom), music (e.g., music room) and multipurpose (e.g., auditorium).
Thus, a building or a building complex should not be generally classified as a whole for a particular type of
acoustics, rather its spaces or rooms shall be classified individually and appropriate acoustical design shall
be considered accordingly.
3.4.1.3
Spaces or rooms of a building or a building complex, if those even have different types of acoustical
requirements, shall be designed in such a way, so that those can coexist and work as a whole.
3.4.2
Acoustical Planning and Design Targets
3.4.2.1
A space, involving either of the acoustical types stated in Sec 4.4.1, must achieve few design targets. Some
of these important design targets are mentioned below:
a) Noise exceeding allowable limit should be controlled
b) Speech intelligibility should be satisfactory
c) Music should have liveliness, intimacy, fullness, clarity, warmth etc.
d) The desired sound level must be optimum to be heard properly
e) Diffusion of sound throughout the whole space
f) There should be no defects such as echoes, flutter echoes etc.
3.4.2.2
Necessary planning and design measures shall be taken for achieving these targets to optimum levels or
standards as dictated in this Code.
3.4.3
Factors Affecting Acoustical Planning and Design
3.4.3.1
Among many, following are the most significant factors affecting acoustical planning and design:
8-4
Chapter 4

a) Noise
b) Reverberation Time
c) Sound Level
d) Diffusion of Sound
3.4.3.2
For various types of building acoustics, as stated in Sec 3.4.1, the effects of these factors might be different.
These factors are dependant on different conditions, like noise and sound level, room volume, building
materials, surface materials, sound levels, room geometry etc.
3.4.3
General Considerations and Provisions for Planning, Design, Assessment and Construction
3.4.3.1
In Appendix D, a flow diagram summarises activities required for planning, design, assessments and
construction related to building acoustics.
3.4.3.2
Acoustical planning and design, including all parts and details, shall be performed during design phase of
any project and must comply with standards and codes as dictated in this Code.
3.4.3.3
During planning and design phase, the expected results for acoustical performance of a space or a room or
building, as dictated in different Sections of this Chapter, shall be precisely analysed and assessed through
standard practice, for example, precise computational methods based on computer analysis, simulation and
prediction techniques.
3.4.3.4
Acoustical planning and design targets and expected results shall be clearly specified and documented as a
part of the design proposal.
3.4.3.5
Acoustical planning and design measures shall be compatible with requirements of other environmental
factors including natural light, ventilation and heat for working in an overall synergy.
3.4.3.6
Acoustical planning and design measures shall be congenial to other design parameters including function,
structure and aesthetics for an overall harmony in design.
3.4.3.7
The proposal for acoustical design, materials, devices, supporting structures and construction methods shall
be safe for health during construction and post-construction occupancy.
3.4.3.8
Acoustical materials, devices and supporting structures shall be safe in case of disasters including
earthquake and fire.
3.4.3.9
The acoustical design measures and materials shall be reasonably energy efficient and compatible with
Green Building practice.
3.4.3.10 The acoustical materials shall be eco-friendly, recyclable and should require minimum maintenance. Those
shall be compliant to sustainable acoustics in particular and sustainable building practice in general.
3.4.3.11 It is recommended to conduct peer supervisions and periodic assessments at different phases of
construction process to rectify any drawback at its initial stage.
3.4.3.12 Post-construction and post-occupancy assessments shall be conducted and findings shall be compared with
expected results. Assessment shall include instrumental measurements and opinion survey of occupants. If
any discrepancy is found, the space shall be modified until it reaches reasonably close to the expected result.
3.4.3.13 Preceding provisions shall be applicable for modifications of a space to eliminate acoustical faults,
retrofitting a space for acoustical performance or any other acoustical design and construction activities.
3.4.3.14 Form K, Checklist: Acoustical Planning and Design, as shown in Appendix K, shall be filled in and signed by
the acoustical consultant for each acoustical space or room or building of any project.
3.5
PLANNING AND DESIGN FOR NOISE CONTROL
8-5
Part 8
Building Services
3.5.1
Types of Noise
3.5.1.1
Depending on location of source, noise might be of two types:

a) Outdoor Noise.
Following are some common sources of outdoor noise:
i) Traffic noise generated from air traffic, road traffic, rail traffic etc. (see Appendix E)
ii) Noise from zones and buildings within built-up areas, machinery, appliances, construction
activity, loudspeakers, people, animals etc.
b) Indoor Noise.
Following are some common source of indoor noise:
i) Household appliances, machinery, footsteps on floor, air conditioner duct etc.
ii) Activities performed by occupants, like people, pets etc.
3.5.1.2
Basing on transmission path, noise can be classified as

a) Airborne Noise
Example: Noise from appliances, car horn, telephone ring etc.
b) Structure-borne Noise
Example: Footsteps, slamming of door, furniture movement, vibrating mechanical equipments etc.
3.5.2
Design Sequence for Noise Control
3.5.2.1
In order to achieve noise control effectively, measures should be taken in the following order:
a) Suppression of noise generation at its source
b) Layout planning
c) Insulation design
d) Absorption design
3.5.3
Planning and Design for Outdoor Noise Control
3.5.3.1
Planning to control outdoor noise is an integral part of country and town planning ranging from regional to
detailed zoning and three dimensional layouts of built form and traffic routes.
3.5.3.2
Noise causes more disturbances to people at rest than those at work. For this reason, outdoor noise levels in
various zones or areas should be considered in planning and design with respect to critical hours of space
occupancy (see Table E.1, Appendix E).
3.5.3.3
Planning and design of buildings shall consider all sources of noise mentioned in Sec 3.5.1 and keep
provisions to control those from transmitting in and around buildings. For example, the orientation of
buildings might be decided in way to reduce the noise disturbance from noisy neighbourhood.
3.5.3.4
A noise survey shall be conducted and a Noise Map shall be prepared to identify source, type, intensity,
frequency and other parameters of noise in and around the site of any specific project. Noise levels should
be measured for pick and off pick hours of both working and holidays, and also for 'Day Time' and 'Night
Time' as defined in 'Noise Pollution (Control) Rules 2006' and its subsequent amendments by the
Government of the People's Republic of Bangladesh (see Table E.1, Appendix E). The noise levels shall be
analysed statistically for value of L10, LAeg,T etc.
3.5.3.5
A Noise Map shall be used to examine compliance to the permissible upper limit of noise levels set for
different land use zones in the 'Noise Pollution (Control) Rules 2006' and its subsequent amendments by the
Government of the People's Republic of Bangladesh (see Table E.1, Appendix E). As references, intensity
levels of some common noise are shown in (see Table E.3, Appendix E).
3.5.3.6
The planning should be undertaken in such a manner that the noise can be kept at a distance. Quiet zones
and residential zones should be placed with adequate setback from noise sources, like airports, highways,
8-6
Chapter 4
railway lines and factories. It might be useful to note that doubling the distance drops the sound pressure
level by about 6 dBA.
3.5.3.7
Buildings (or parts of buildings) which are considered to be especially susceptible to noise, including
hospitals, research laboratories, recording studios or the like, should not be sited near sources of noise.
3.5.3.8
It might be a preferable option to place a noise tolerant buffer zone, developing green belt, public gardens
etc. between a noisy zone and a quiet zone.
3.5.3.9
Noise barriers might be provided by placing buildings and occupancies less susceptible to noise between
the source and the more susceptible ones. Purpose built noise barriers made of bricks, concrete, fibreglass,
fibre reinforced plastic or other materials can also be used to protect buildings from noise.
3.5.3.10 If noise barriers (as stated in Sec 3.5.3.9) is neither attainable nor adequate, a building itself should have all
necessary measures to protect itself against outside noise. The following might be some options:
a) In zoning of spaces, noise tolerant spaces might be placed near a noise source, while placing lesstolerant spaces at a distance.
b) External walls or partitions should have appropriate Sound Transmission Class (STC) to reduced
external noise to the acceptable indoor background noise levels (see Table 8.3.4 to 8.3.7, Table I.1I.2, Appendix I)
c) Preferably, external walls near source of noise should not have any operable window. However, to
meet the demand of natural light, fixed widows allowing only light might be placed with proper
noise insulation measures.
d) If need for operable windows allowing natural light and ventilation are inevitable in external walls
near source of noise, special measures should be taken for restricting noise while allowing light and
ventilation. Acoustic louvers, active noise cancellation devices etc. are examples of these types of
special measures.
e) If natural ventilation is required but natural light is not required, ventilation ducts or chutes with
lining of acoustic absorbers might be designed in a manner to absorb noise while air flows through.
3.5.3.11 Following special provisions shall be applicable for air traffic noise:
a) No building for human occupancy shall preferably be constructed, where NEF value due to air
traffic noise exceeds 40 EPN dBA. As a reference, typical noise levels of some aircraft types are
shown in Table E.2, Appendix E.
b) Educational institutions, hospitals, auditoriums etc. shall preferably be located at places where the
value of NEF is less than 25 EPN dBA.
c) In areas exposed to less than 90 EPN dBA, all of the windows shall be closed and properly sealed,
having double glazing, in order to provide an acceptable interior noise environment.
d) Industrial and commercial activities generating high interior noise environments might be located
in areas exposed to noise levels greater than 90 EPN dBA.
e) In airport areas of highest noise levels, sparsely manned installations like sewage disposal plants,
utility substations and similar other facilities might be located.
3.5.3.12 Following provisions shall be applicable for road traffic noise:
a) For road traffic noise level, the value of L10 shall be limited to a maximum of 70 dBA for zoning and
planning new buildings in urban areas, while dwellings are proposed to have sealed windows.
b) The maximum permissible upper limit of L10 shall be reduced to 60 dBA when the dwellings are
proposed to have open windows.
8-7
Part 8
Building Services
c) Major new residential developments shall preferably be located in areas with L10 levels
substantially lower than those specified above.
d) Where L10 is greater than 70 dBA, design solutions such as barrier blocks, noise buffers or purpose
built noise barriers shall be utilized in order to reduce noise levels at least to that level.
e) Through traffic roads shall preferably be excluded from quiet and residential zones to avoid
excessive traffic noise.
f) In the neighbourhood of residential, educational, institutional and health care buildings, legislative
control shall be exercised for road noise particularly from vehicles as dictated in 'Noise Pollution
(Control) Rules 2006' and its subsequent amendments by the Government of the People's Republic
of Bangladesh.
3.5.3.13 Following special provisions shall be applicable for rail traffic noise:
a) No residential or public building, except for the railway station and its ancillary structures, shall
preferably be connected to the railway lines.
b) Mercantile or commercial buildings should not abut the railway lines or the marshalling yards.
Only planned industrial zones may be located beside the railway tracks.
c) In order to reduce the high noise levels, produced at the arrival and departure of trains, platforms
in railway stations shall be treated with sound absorbing materials particularly on the ceiling.
d) The main platform floor shall be separated from the station building with a minimum gap of 50
mm so that the ground or structure-borne vibrations are not transmitted to the building.
e) Windows and other openings shall preferably be placed as less as possible in the facade along the
railway tracks.
f) Greenbelts, landscaping or any other form of barrier might be developed along the railway lines.
3.5.3.14 Construction noise shall be controlled according to the 'Noise Pollution (Control) Rules 2006' and its
subsequent amendments by the Government of the People's Republic of Bangladesh.
3.5.4
Planning and Design for Indoor Noise Control
3.5.4.1
The allowable upper limits of indoor background noise levels (in dBA) are as shown in Table 8.4.2 and Fig.
F.1 in Appendix F. Design shall comply with recommended range of Balanced Noise Criteria (NCB) Curve
for different types of activity.
Table 8.4.2
Allowable Upper Limit of Indoor Background Noise Levels and Recommended Range of NCB Curves
(Source: Maekawa Z., Lord P. 1994. Environmental and Architectural Acoustics. E&FN SPON, UK)
Type of space
Broadcast and recording studios (distant microphone used)
Concert halls, opera houses, and recital halls
Large theatres and auditoriums.
Mosques, temples, churches and other prayer spaces
Television and recording studio (close microphone used)
Small theatres, auditoriums, music, rehearsal rooms, large meeting and
conference rooms
Bedrooms, hospitals, hotels, residences, apartments, etc.
8-8
dBA
NCB Curve
18
10
18-23
10-15
<28
<20
<33
<25
<38
<30
33-48
25-40
Chapter 4

Classrooms, libraries, small offices and conference rooms. Living rooms, and
drawing rooms in dwellings
38-48
30-40
Large offices, receptions, retail shops and stores, cafeterias, restaurants,

indoor stadiums, gymnasium, large seating-capacity spaces with speech
amplification
43-53
35-45
Lobbies, laboratory, drafting rooms, and general offices
48-58
40-50
Kitchens, laundries, computer and maintenance shops
53-63
45-55
Shops, garages, etc. (for just acceptable telephone conversation)
58-68
50-60
For work spaces where speech is not required
63-78
55-70
3.5.4.2
Noise generated from within a building shall not be transmitted to neighbourhood at a noise level higher
than the allowable upper limit set for that zone (see Table E.1, Appendix E).
3.5.4.3
Buildings, in which there are some sources of noise, shall have buffers separating the noise producing area
from the other areas. The less vulnerable areas of the building may be planned to act as noise buffers.
3.5.4.4
In the assessment of indoor noise levels, direct sound shall be separated from reverberant sound.
3.5.4.5
The reverberant sound transmitted from one room to another shall be cut down by employing suitable
sound absorption materials and by structural and non-structural partitions.
3.5.5
Sound Insulation
3.5.5.1
The recommended sound insulation criteria are classified in some Grades. The STC value for airborne sound
insulation is graded as stated below (see also, Fig. F.2, Appendix F):
a) Grade I
STC = 55
Apply mainly to fully residential, quiet rural and suburban areas and in
certain luxury apartment buildings
b) Grade II
STC = 52
Apply to residential spaces in relatively noisy environments, typical of

urban and suburban areas.
c) Grade III
STC = 48
Express minimal requirements applicable to very noisy locations, such as

commercial or business areas, like shop houses with dwelling units on the
upper floors, or downtown areas.
3.5.5.2
Transmission of sound should be controlled with appropriate material, assembly of building elements.
Typical STC rating for different types of building element, like stud partitions, masonry walls, doors,
windows and interior partitions are shown in Table I.1, Appendix I.
3.5.5.3
Recommended STC for partitions for specific occupancies are shown in Table I.2, Appendix I.
3.5.6
Control of Structure-borne Impact Noise
3.5.5.1
Impact noise problems can be controlled in following ways:

a) Preventing or minimising the impact by cushioning the impact with resilient materials, like floor
tiles of rubber and cork, carpeting on pads with desired Impact Isolation Class (IIC). Criteria for
airborne and impact sound insulation of floor-ceiling assemblies between dwelling unit is shown in
Table 8.3.6 and 8.3.7
b) Floating the floor for isolating the impacted floor from the structural floor by a resilient element is
extremely effective. This element can be rubber or mineral wood pads, blankets or special spring
metal sleepers.
c) Suspending the ceiling and using an absorber in the cavity.
8-9
Part 8
Building Services
d) Isolating all rigid structures, such as pipes, and caulking penetrations with resilient sealant.
3.5.6
Control of Electro-Mechanical System Noise
3.5.5.1
Mechanical noise is generated from mechanical devices like air-conditioning and air-handling systems, lifts,
escalators, pumps, electric generators etc.
3.5.5.2
Mechanical noise problems can be controlled in following ways:

i) Reducing the vibration of electro-mechanical equipments by damping and isolation.
ii) Reducing the airborne noise by decoupling the vibration from efficient radiating sources.
iii) Decoupling the vibrating source from the structure.
iv) In air-conditioning duct system, smooth transitions at changes of duct size, large radius bends,
lining with absorbing materials etc. are effective measures.
v) Active noise cancellation technique, by producing a synthesised signal exactly out-of-phase with
the original noise signal to make the resultant signal effectively zero, might be applied in special
cases.
3.5.7
Occupational Noise Exposure
3.5.7.1
Protection against the effects of noise exposure shall be provided when the sound level exceeds those shown
in Table 8.4.3.
3.5.7.2
Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed 140 dBA peak sound level.
Table 8.4.3
Permissible Noise Exposure
Sound Level
dBA (slow response)
Duration per Day

Hour - Minute
Sound Level
dBA (slow response)
Duration per Day

Hour - Minute
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
16-00
13-56
12-08
10-34
9-11
8-00
6-58
6-04
5-17
4-36
4-00
3-29
3-02
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
2-50
2-15
2-00
1-44
1-31
1-19
1-09
1-00
0-52
0-46
0-40
0-34
0-30
Notes:
a) The sound level should be measured on A scale at slow response.
b) When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or more periods of noise exposure of different levels, their
combined effect should be considered, rather than the individual effect of each. If the sum of the following fractions:
C1 /T1 + C2 /T2 + ..... Cn /Tn exceeds unity, then, the mixed exposure should be considered to exceed the limit value.
Cn indicates the total time of exposure permitted at that time.
3.6
REVERBERATION TIME, SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL AND DIFFUSION OF SOUND
3.6.1
General Considerations
a) For an overall performing, comfortable and safe acoustical environment, along with the issues of noise,
other significant aspects of acoustics should be considered. This shall include sound pressure level,
reverberation time and diffusion of sound.
8-10
Chapter 4
3.6.2
b)
Speech intelligibility is a significant parameter to achieve satisfactory acoustical design. Percentage

Syllable Articulation (PSA) is an index for assessing speech intelligibility. PSA can be expressed as
PSA = 96 ki kr kn ks (%)
(for English Language)
PSA = 93 ki kr kn ks (%)
(for Bangla Language)
Where,
ki, kr, kn and ks are the coefficient for average speech level, Reverberation Time, Noise level/ Speech
level and room shape, respectively (see Fig. G.1, Appendix G).
c)
For a PSA of 82%, almost a perfect Speech Intelligibility (nearly 100%) can be achieved. However, in
reality, there are some background noise (>20 dBA) and reverberation time in different spaces, causing
lower PSA. The minimum admissible PSA should be 75% for a satisfactory Speech Intelligibility.
Reverberation Time
Spaces for various uses should be designed for recommended optimum reverberation time to achieve a
level of intelligibility and liveliness (see Fig. 8.4.1).
Fig. 8.4.1 Recommended optimum reverberation times for spaces of various uses
Notes:
1. The optimum RT for speech is shown here for English and Bangla language. It might be noted that the recommended optimum
RT for speech in Bangla ranges from 0.5 s to 0.8 s.
2. The figure shows optimum RT for Western music and English vocals. For local music of Bangladesh, optimum RT might be
assumed from its typological similarity to that of Western music.
3.6.3
Sound Pressure Level

a) In a space with a low background noise (<20 dBA) and a minimum Reverberation Time (close to 0.0 s),
a maximum Percentage Syllable Articulation (PSA), and thus Speech Intelligibility can be achieved at
sound pressure level of speech ranging from 60 dBA to 70 dBA (see Fig. G.1, Appendix G).
b)
3.6.4
For speech halls with higher background noise (>20 dBA), the recommended Signal-to-Noise Ratio
(SNR) is +15 dBA for children and at least +6 dBA for adults.
Diffusion of Sound
8-11
Part 8
Building Services
a)
Diffusion of sound should be achieved in any space, so that certain key acoustical properties, like
sound pressure level, reverberation time etc. are the same anywhere in the space.
b)
There shall not be a difference greater than 6 dBA between sound pressure levels of any two points in
the audience area.
b)
Appropriate room geometry should be chosen to achieve diffusion of sound. Fig. I.2, Appendix I shows
recommended proportion of a space to avoid standing wave, flutter echo etc., which are obstacles to
achieve diffusion of sound.
3.7
SPEECH PRIVACY
3.7.1
Principle of Speech Privacy between Enclosed Spaces
3.7.1.1
When noise carries information, productivity and noise are related inversely. When noise does not carry
information, it can be annoying, counter productive or can be useful as a masking sound, depending upon
its frequency, intensity level and constancy.
3.7.1.2
The degree of speech privacy in a space is a function of following two factors:

a) The degree of sound isolation provided by the barriers between rooms
b) The ambient sound level in the receiving room
3.7.1.3
In case of an airtight barrier between two rooms, the sound intensity level of the source room (1) and the
receiving room (2) are related as,
IL2 = IL1 - NR
where, NR is reduction, IL2 and IL1 are sound intensity levels in the receiving and source room
respectively.
3.7.1.4
An transmitted noise level IL2 is not annoying to a majority of adults, if a properly designed background
sound is a maximum 2 dBA less than IL2. For example, a transmitted noise IL2 of 40 dBA in a room with a
background sound of at least 38 dBA will not cause annoyance to most people.
3.7.1.5
The upper intensity level of usable background masking sound is usually taken as about 50 dBA; any higher
intensity level itself will cause annoyance.
3.7.2
Sound Isolation Descriptor
3.7.2.1
For speech sound, a descriptive scale is shown in Table 8.4.4

Table 8.4.4
Relative Quality of Sound Isolation
Source: Stein, B. et al., 2006. Mechanical and Electrical Equipments for Buildings. John Wiley & Sons, New Jersey.
8-12
Ranking
Descriptor
Hearing Condition a
Total privacy
Shouting barely audible.
Excellent
Normal voice levels not audible. Raised voices barely audible but not
intelligible.
Very good
Normal voice levels barely audible. Raised voices audible but largely
unintelligible.
Good
Normal voice levels audible but generally unintelligible. Raised voices partially
intelligible.
Fair
Normal voice levels audible and intelligible some of the time. Raised voices
generally intelligible.
Chapter 4
3.7.2.2
Poor
Normal voice levels audible and intelligible most of the time.
None
Normal voice levels always intelligible.
Hearing condition in the presence of ambient noise, if any.
Relation between barrier STC and hearing condition on receiving side with background noise level at NC-25
is shown in Table 8.3.5
Table 8.3.5
Barrier STC and Hearing Condition on Receiving Side with Background Noise Level at NC-25
Source: Stein, B. et al., 2006. Mechanical and Electrical Equipments for Buildings. John Wiley & Sons, New Jersey
Barrier
STC
Hearing Condition
Descriptor
and Ranking a
Application
25
Normal speech can be understood quite easily Poor/1

and distinctly through the wall.
30
Loud speech can be understood fairly well.

Normal speech can be heard but not easily
understood.
Fair/2
Room divider where

concentration is not essential
35
Loud speech can be heard but not easily

intelligible. Normal speech can be heard only
faintly, if at all.
Very Good/4
Suitable for offices next to

quiet spaces
42-45
Loud speech can be faintly heard but not

understood. Normal speech is inaudible.
Excellent/5
For dividing noisy and quiet

areas; party wall between
apartments
46-50
Very loud sounds (such as loud singing, brass Total Privacy/6 Music room, practice room,
sound studio, bedrooms
musical instruments or a radio at full volume)
adjacent to noisy areas
can be heard only faintly or not at all.
a See
Space divider
Table 8.4.4.
3.7.2
Speech Privacy Design for Enclosed Space
3.7.2.1
Fig. J, Appendix J shows a Speech Privacy Analysis Sheet, which shall be used to determine speech privacy
rating number for design of enclosed space.
3.7.2.2
Following factors are involved in speech privacy rating of enclosed-space:

a) Space rating of source room (Room No. 1)
i) Speech effort - a measure of loudness of speech
ii) Source room factor - gives the approximate effect of room absorption on the speech level in
the source room. The scale in Fig. J, Appendix J represents average absorption. For live
rooms the factor should be raised by 2 points and for dead room the factor should be
lowered by 2 points. Factors a + b give the approximate source-room voice level.
iii) Privacy allowance-determines the measure of privacy required, such as Normal Privacy and
Confidential Privacy.
b) Isolation rating of receiving room (Room No. 2)
iv) The STC rating of the barrier (see Table I.1 and I.2, Appendix I)
v) Noise reduction factor A2/S indicates receiving room absorption, that is, the difference
between NR and TL, where A2 is the area of receiving room and S is the area of the barrier
8-13
Part 8
Building Services
between the rooms. Absorption is assumed to be average. For live rooms the factor should
be lowered by 2 points and for dead room the factor should be raised by 2 points.
vi) Recommended background noise level in the receiving room. As a reference, Table 8.4.2
might be used.
3.8
SOUND AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM
3.8.1
Objectives and Design Criteria
3.8.1.1
A well designed sound amplification system should augment the natural transmission of sound from source
to listener with adequate loudness and diffusion. It should never be used as a substitute for good building
acoustics design, because it rarely overcomes or corrects any serious deficiency; rather, it may amplify and
exaggerate the deficiency.
3.8.1.2
An ideal sound amplification system shall give the listener the desired loudness, directivity, intelligibility
and other acoustical qualities.
3.8.1.3
Spaces seating less than 500 (approximately, 1400 m3 volume) should not require any sound amplification
system if it is properly designed; since, a normal speaking voice can maintain speech level of 55 to 60 dBA in
this volume of space.
3.8.1.4
The central type amplification system is preferred, in which a loudspeaker or a cluster of loudspeakers is
placed directly above the source of sound to provide desired realism and intelligibility. In case, the ceiling
height is low and sound can not reach all listeners from a central type; a distributed system can be used with
a number of loudspeaker each serving a small area with low-level amplification. A distributed system is
particularly feasible in areas under the balcony.
3.8.1.5
A careful location of microphone should be chosen to avoid feedback of sound from loudspeaker to the
microphone.
3.9
OCCUPANCY A: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
3.9.1
Controlling Noise
Controlling measures shall have to be taken against noise coming from outdoor and indoor sources as
specified in Sec 4.4 and 3.5.
3.9.2
Space Layout
a) Quiet and noisy quarters shall be grouped and separated horizontally and vertically from each other by
rooms (or spaces) not particularly sensitive to noise such as entry, corridor, staircase, wall closets or
other built-in building components.
b)
If a living room in one apartment is located adjacent to a living room in another apartment, adequate
sound insulation should be provided in separating wall.
c)
Bedrooms shall be located in a relatively quiet part of the building.
d)
Bathrooms must be separated acoustically from living rooms both horizontally and vertically.
If bathroom fixtures are installed along walls which separate living room and bathroom, adequate
sound insulation should be provided in separating wall.
e)
3.9.2.2
8-14
Measures should be taken to avoid transmission of footstep noise through floors.
Sound Insulation Factors

a) Separation for Sound Insulation: The sound insulation criteria in residential units are to be based on
three grades:
Chapter 4
i)
Grade I criteria apply mainly to fully residential, quiet rural and suburban areas and in certain
cases to luxury apartment buildings or to dwelling units above the eighth floor of a high-rise
building.
ii)
Grade II criteria apply to residential buildings built-in relatively noisy environments typical of
urban or suburban areas.
iii)
Grade III criteria express minimal requirements applicable to very noisy locations, such as
commercial or business areas (like shop houses with dwelling units on the upper floors) or
downtown areas.
iv)
Among the above three categories, Grade II covers the majority of residential constructions and
shall therefore be regarded as a basic guide.
v)
In all grades wall constructions and floor-ceiling assemblies between dwelling units shall have
STC ratings at least equal to the values given in Table 8.3.6 and 8.3.7.
v)
An STC rating of not less than 45 dB is to be provided in walls and floors of residential
buildings, between dwelling units of the same building and between a dwelling unit and any
space common to two or more dwelling units.
vi)
Table I.2, Appendix I shows STC requirements for different spaces of specific occupancies.
Table 8.3.6
Airborne Sound Insulation of Partitions
Between Dwelling Units
Table 8.3.7
Airborne and Impact Sound Insulation of FloorCeiling between Dwelling Units
Source: Stein, B. et al., 2006. Mechanical and

Electrical Equipments for Buildings. John Wiley &
Sons, New Jersey.
Source: Stein, B. et al., 2006. Mechanical and Electrical

Equipments for Buildings. John Wiley & Sons, New Jersey.
Apt. A
Bedroom
Living room
Kitchenb
Bathroom
Corridor
Living room
Kitchenb
Bathroom
Corridor
Kitchen
Bathroom
Corridor
Bathroom
Corridor
Apt. B
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
Bedroom
Bedrooma
Bedrooma
Bedrooma
Bedrooma,c
Living room
Living rooma
Living room
Living rooma,c,d
Kitchene
Kitchen
Kitchena,c,d
Bathroom
Bathrooma,c
Grade
II
STC
52
54
55
56
52
52
52
54
52
50
52
52
50
48
For Grade I, add 3 points; for Grade III,

subtract 4 points.
a Whenever a partition wall may serve to
separate several functional spaces, the
highest criterion must prevail.
b Or dining or family or recreation room.
Apt. A
Bedroom
Living room
Kitchenb
Family room
Corridor
Bedroom
Living room
Kitchen
Family room
Corridor
Bedroom
Living room
Kitchen
Bathroom
Family room
Corridor
Bedroom
Living room
Kitchen
Bathroom
Corridor
Apt. B
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
above
Bedroom
Bedrooma
Bedrooma,c
Bedrooma,d
Bedrooma
Living roome
Living room
Living rooma,c
Living rooma,d
Living rooma
Kitchenc,e
Kitchenc,e
Kitchenc
Kitchena,c
Kitchena,c,d
Kitchena,c
Family roome
Family roome
Family roome
Bathroomc
Corridor
Grade Grade
II
II
IIC
STC
52
52
57
54
62
55
62
56
62
52
52
54
52
52
57
52
60
54
57
52
50
55
52
52
52
50
52
52
58
52
52
48
48
56
50
54
52
52
50
50
48
48
8-15
Part 8
Building Services
It is assumed that there is no entrance
door leading from the corridor to the
living unit.
d Criterion applies to the partition. Doors in
corridor partition must have the rating
of the partition, not vice versa.
e Double wall construction is recommended
to minimise kitchen impact noise.
c
For Grade I, add 3 points; for Grade III, subtract 4

points.
a This arrangement requires greater impact sound
insulation than the inverse, where a sensitive area
is above less sensitive area.
b Or dining or family or recreation room.
c It is assumed that the plumbing fixtures, appliances
and piping are insulated with proper vibration
isolation.
d The airborne STC criteria in this table apply as well
to vertical partitions between these two spaces.
e
This arrangement require equivalent airborne
sound insulation than the converse.
b)
Reduction of Airborne Noise : In case of air borne noise (between the frequency range 100-31500 Hz), a
sound insulation of 50 dB shall be provided in between the living room in one house or flat and
rooms/bed rooms in another. The value shall be 35 dB in between different rooms of the same house.
(See Appendix I for airborne sound insulation properties of walls, doors and windows).
c)
Reduction of Airborne Noise Transmitted through the Structure: Exterior walls shall be rigid and
massive and have good sound insulation characteristics with as few openings as possible. Windows
with acoustic louvers might be used to protect noise intrusion, while allowing ventilation.
Ventilation ducts or air transfer openings (ventilators), where provided, shall be designed to minimize
transmission of noise, if necessary, by installing some attenuating devices.
d)
Construction of sound insulation doors shall be of solid core and heavy construction with all edges
sealed up properly. Hollow core wooden doors and light weight construction shall be avoided because
these are dimensionally unstable and can warp, destroying the seal along the perimeter of the door.
e)
Rubber, foam rubber or foamed plastic strips, adjustable or self-aligning stops and gaskets shall be used
for sealing the edges of the doors. They shall be so installed that they are slightly compressed between
doors and stop when the door is in a closed position. In simple cases the bottom edges shall have a
replaceable strip of felt or foam rubber attached to minimize the gap between door and floor.
f)
Separation between the two faces of the door shall be carried through uninterruptedly from edge to
edge in both directions. Damping treatments shall be inserted between individual layers of the doors.
Ordinary doors with surface leather padding shall not be used.
g)
Automatic damped door closers are to be used whenever applicable and economically feasible in order
to avoid the annoying sound of doors slamming.
h)
The difference between the TL of the wall and that of the door shall not exceed 10 dB.
i)
The floor of a room immediately above the bedroom or a living room shall satisfy the Grade I impact
sound insulation.
3.10
OCCUPANCY B: EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS and OCCUPANCY C: INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
3.10.1
Sources of Noise
3.10.1.1 Outdoor Noise: Measures shall be taken in planning and design to control noise from external sources
mentioned in Sec 3.4 and Sec 3.5.
3.10.1.2 Indoor Noise:
The following sources of indoor noise shall be taken into consideration:
8-16
Chapter 4
3.10.2
a)
Wood and metal workshops, machine shops, technical as well as engineering testing laboratories, other
machine rooms, typing areas etc. which produce continuous or intermittent noises of disturbing nature,
b)
Music rooms,
c)
Assembly halls, particularly those which are attached to the main building,
d)
Practical work spaces, gymnasiums and swimming pools,
e)
School kitchen and dining spaces,
f)
Entry lobby, foyer, lounge, corridor and other circulation spaces.
Planning and Design Requirements
3.10.2.1 Site Planning: The school building shall be located as far away as possible from the sources of outdoor
noise such as busy roads, railways, neighbouring market places or adjacent shopping areas as well as local
industrial and small scale manufacturing concerns.
Where the site permits, the building shall be placed back from the street, in order to make use of the noise
reducing effect of the increased distance between street line and building line.
If adequate distance between the school/institution building and the noisy traffic route cannot be provided,
rooms which do not need windows or windowless walls of classrooms shall face the noisy road.
Car parking areas shall preferably be located in remote parts of the site.
3.10.2.2 Activities and Space Layout: The minimum requirement for sound insulation in educational buildings shall
be as specified in Table 8.4.3.
3.10.2.3 Halls and Circulation Areas: The lobby, lounge areas etc. or other circulation spaces and linking corridors
shall be separated from teaching areas, lecture galleries or laboratories. No direct window openings shall be
placed along the walls of the corridors or circulation areas.
Doors, ventilators and other necessary openings shall be designed with sufficient foam or rubber seals, so
that they are noise proof when closed.
3.10.2.4 Noise Reduction within Rooms:
Lecture halls of educational institutions (with a seating capacity of more than 100 persons) shall be designed
in accordance with the relevant acoustical principles.
Lecture halls with volumes of up to about 550 m3 or for an audience of up to about 150 to 200, shall not
require a sound amplification system, if their acoustical design is based on appropriate principles and
specifications.
A diagonal seating layout shall preferably be used for rectangular lecture rooms of the capacity mentioned
above as it automatically eliminates undesirable parallelism between walls at the podium and effectively
utilizes the diverging front walls as sound reflectors.
3.11
OCCUPANCY D: HEALTH CARE BUILDINGS
3.11.1
Sources of Disturbing Noise
3.11.1.1 Outdoor Noise: Sources of outdoor noise specified in Sec 4.4 shall be taken into consideration for planning
and design. Additionally, health care service facilities like ambulance, medicine and equipment vans, store
deliveries, laundry and refuse collection trolleys are also frequent sources of noise. Health care buildings
shall be sited away from such sources as far as practicable.
8-17
Part 8
Building Services
3.11.1.2 Indoor Noise: Indoor noise sources include mechanical and mobile equipment like X-ray and suction
machines, drilling equipment etc.
Planning and design shall take into account the following sources of noise:
3.11.2
a)
The handling of sterilizing, as well as metal or glass equipment,
b)
Wheeled trolleys used for the purpose of carrying foods and medical supplies,
c)
Mechanical equipment like mechanical and electrical motors, machineries, boilers, pumps, fans,
ventilators, transformers, elevators, air-conditioning equipment etc.
d)
Operational facilities like refrigerators, sterilizers, autoclaves etc. ,
e)
Patient service facilities including oxygen cylinders or tanks, saline stands, carrier carts and instrument
cases, etc.
f)
Maintenance work of engineering services like plumbing and sanitary fixtures or fittings, hot and cold
water and central heating pipes, air-conditioning ducts, ventilation shafts etc., and
g)
Audible calling systems, radio and television sets.
3.11.2.1 Site Planning: Site shall be selected to keep adequate distance from traffic noise from highways, main
roads, railroads, airports and noise originating from parking areas. In addition to the requirements of Sec
4.4.3, the following requirements shall be fulfilled:
a)
In the selection of a site and site planning, consideration shall be given to:
i)
ii)
iii)
Distance from exterior noise,

Effect of high buildings adjacent to the site which can act as noise reflectors, and
Traffic conditions surrounding the site.
b)
Parking areas might be carefully located at the farthest possible corners of the premises. If enough
space is not available to provide facilities for the desired number of vehicles, parking spaces shall be
provided in more than one area. Loading platforms and service entries are to be planned in such a
manner as to minimize noise in areas requiring silence.
c)
Closed courts shall preferably be avoided.
3.11.2.2 Activities and Space Layout: The following points might be given due consideration in the planning and
design of health care buildings.
8-18
a)
Rooms to be used for board meetings, conference, counselling and instructional purposes shall be
grouped near public zones of the building in such a way that spread of noise can be avoided.
b)
Long corridors might be avoided, as it may freely spread noise.
c)
The main kitchen might be housed in a separate building and connected to the wards only by service
lifts or a service stair. If this is impracticable, it shall be planned beneath the wards, rather than above
them.
d)
Mechanical plants might preferably be placed in separate buildings.
e)
Rooms housing equipment, operational facilities and patient service facilities shall be designed for
adequate sound insulation.
Chapter 4
f)
Closed courts might be avoided, unless rooms facing the court are air-conditioned with completely
sealed and air tight windows.
g)
The units which are themselves potential sources of noise for example, children's wards and outpatient
departments, shall be treated with special care regarding the protection against noise.
3.11.2.3 Noise Reduction in the Sensitive Area: In health care buildings, many sensitive areas such as operation
theatres, doctor's consultation rooms, intensive care units and post-operative areas shall be provided with
special noise control arrangements.
These rooms shall preferably be isolated in locations (or corners) surrounded by other intermediate zones
which ensure protection of the core area from outdoor noise.
A sound reduction of about 45 dBA between the consulting and the waiting rooms shall be provided in
order to weaken the transmission of sound.
A lobby like space in between the interconnecting and communicating doors shall be provided.
3.11.2.4 Sound Insulation Factors: The rooms and indoor spaces of a health care building shall be treated with
sound absorptive materials.
Different STC ratings of walls specified for separate components of buildings shall have to be considered as
follows:
a)
For airborne noise, the average STC rating of wall and floors shall be 50 dB.
b)
An STC rating of 55 dB shall be required between rooms whose occupants are susceptible to noise.
c)
In general an average STC of 45 dB is to be provided for corridor walls and for walls between patient
rooms.
d)
All doors shall be fitted with silent closers. Doors to opposite rooms might be positioned in a staggered
manner.
e)
For ward doors, a corresponding STC of 35 dB shall be provided.
f)
PVC mats, rubber mats or other resilient materials and rubber shod equipment shall be used in utility
rooms, ward kitchens and circulation areas as floor coverings.
Other finish materials like rubber tile, cork tile, vinyl tile or linoleum which can also help reduce the
impact noise substantially shall be used alternatively.
g)
Mobile equipment, such as trolleys and bed, oxygen cylinder carriers and stretchers shall be made
relatively silent by means of non-friction wheels with rubber tyre.
h)
Special treatments such as thin nonporous coverings or films over some soft absorbent materials shall
be used for good sound absorption when a washable acoustical treatment is desired.
i)
Door and window curtains or screens, as well as bed sheets etc. shall be used wherever the indoor
openings are located to help reduce reverberation in the hard surfaced surroundings. Curtain rails,
rings and runners of silent type shall be used so that they generate as little frictional noise as possible.
j)
Ventilation ducts and conduits shall be laid out in such a way that they do not open an easy by-pass for
spreading out any noise from other sources. These conduits and ducts shall be completely sealed
around the pipes where they pass through walls and floors.
8-19
Part 8
Building Services
k)
Special care shall be taken to reduce noise of plumbing equipment and fixtures. Specially made
silencing pipes and flushing fixtures shall be used to reduce the noise of water closet and cisterns in
lavatories and toilets.
Ducts carrying waste or water pipes shall be properly lined with sound insulation material to prevent
noise from the pipes passing through duct walls into the patients' wards or cabins or the spaces
susceptible to noise.
l)
Wherever available, cisterns shall be used to replace the pressure operated flushing system so that the
disturbance becomes less irritating.
3.12
OCCUPANCY E: ASSEMBLY
3.12.1
General
Buildings of Occupancy E shall be designed both for transmission of noise through the walls and openings
and also for internal acoustics. Public address systems installed in such buildings shall conform to the
standards and specifications.
3.12.2
Sources of Noise
3.12.2.1 Outdoor Noise: The following sources of noise shall be taken into account in planning and design:
a)
Traffic noise (air, road and rail) and noise from other outdoor sources entering through walls, roofs,
doors, windows or ventilation openings,
b)
Noise from any other gathering spaces, public meetings, outdoor activities and crowds, particularly
during the time of breaking of shows and performances,
c)
Noise produced from parking areas.
3.12.2.2 Indoor Noise: The following indoor noise sources shall be taken into account in planning and design:
3.12.3
a)
Noise from other adjacent halls located within the same building used for similar performance, or for
seminar, symposium or general meetings,
b)
Noise produced from ticket counters, lobby or lounge areas, rehearsal rooms, waiting areas and
corridors,
c)
Noise generated from other ancillary services located within the building, like cafeteria or snack bar, tea
shop, post office, bank or the like,
d)
Noise generated from the mechanical or electrical equipment, air-conditioning plants, ventilation
channels and ducts, plumbing and water lines etc.
3.12.3.1 Site Planning and Acoustical Requirements: The noise control of auditoria or assembly halls shall begin
with sensible site planning following the measures and precautions stated below:
a)
The auditorium shall be effectively separated from all exterior and interior noise and vibration sources
as far as practicable;
b)
The assembly halls shall be protected from vehicular or air traffic, parking or loading areas, mechanical
equipment, electrical rooms or workshops.
The following are the acoustical requirements for good hearing conditions in an auditorium which shall be
ensured in planning and design:
8-20
Chapter 4

a)
Adequate loudness shall have to be ensured in every part of the auditorium;
b)
c)
The sound energy shall be uniformly distributed in the hall;

Optimum reverberation characteristics shall have to be provided;
d)
The hall shall be free of such acoustical defects as echoes, long delayed reflections, flutter echoes, sound
concentrations, distortions, sound shadow and room resonance etc.;
e)
Noise and vibration shall be excluded or reasonably reduced in every part or the hall room.
3.12.3.2 Activities and Space Layout in Divisible and Multi-purpose Auditoria

a) A protective buffer zone of rooms between exterior noise source and auditorium proper shall be
designed.
b)
Rooms in the buffer zone (lobbies, vestibules, circulation areas, restaurants, ticket counters, offices etc.)
shall be shut off from the auditorium proper by sound insulation doors.
c)
The purposes of the subdivided spaces shall be clarified, in order to establish the predictable intensity
of the various sound programmes.
3.12.3.3 Noise Reduction within Rooms

a) There shall not be any use of continuous, unrecognizable and loud background noise.
b)
The ventilating and air-conditioning system shall be so designed that the noise level created by the
system is at least 10 dB below the permissible background noise level specified in noise criteria level.
c)
In order to protect the hall from external noise the minimum sound reduction value required in an
auditorium is 65 dB for a concert hall and 60 dB for a theatre. This reduction shall be provided on all
sides.
3.12.3.4 Sound Insulation Factors

a) Rooms in the buffer zone (lobbies, vestibules, circulation areas, restaurants, counter and issue desk
corners, office etc.) shall have sound absorbing ceilings and carpeted floor. If the rooms are to be used
for the purposes of verbal instructions only, a moderate degree of sound insulation (STC 40 to 45 dB)
shall be accomplished by the movable partitions.
b)
If audio equipment or loudspeakers are to be used, an acoustically more effective, efficient partition
system shall be used, with sound insulation of STC 45 to 50 dB.
c)
An insulation of STC 50 to 60 dB shall be provided if any section of the space is selected for the
performance of live music.
d)
All windows shall have to be eliminated from the main auditorium walls in order to exclude excessive
outdoor noises.
e)
Suspended ceilings shall accommodate the ventilating, air-conditioning and electrical services above
the room.
f)
In order to increase the effectiveness of the suspended ceilings the following measures shall be taken :
i)
The ceiling membrane shall weigh not less than 25 kg/m2;
ii)
The ceiling membrane shall not be too rigid;
iii)
Noise transmission through the ceiling shall have to be avoided by the use of a solid, airtight
membrane;
iv)
Gaps between ceiling and surrounding structure shall be sealed;
8-21
Part 8
Building Services
g)
v)
The air space between ceiling membrane and structural floor shall be increased to a reasonable
maximum;
vi)
An absorbent blanket is to be used in the air space above the ceiling;
vii)
The number of points of suspension from the structural floor above shall be reduced to a
minimum;
viii)
Hangers made of resilient substance shall be preferable to the rigid ones.
In order to improve the airborne or impact sound insulation of a ceiling the following specifications
shall be followed:
i)
The ceiling membrane shall have a minimum of 25 mm solid cement plaster layer with
completely closed, airtight and sealed joints all around;
ii)
If further reduction of undesirable noise is desired within a sound insulated room, sound
absorptive treatment shall be provided along the underside of the solid ceiling.
3.12.3.5 Masking Noise: The artificial noise produced by electronically created background noise for the purpose of
drowning out or masking unwanted noise, shall be provided. The process shall effectively suppress minor
intrusions which might interrupt the recipient's privacy.
3.12.3.5 The maximum permissible background noise levels in various occupancies are specified in terms of
Balanced Noise Criteria (NCB) curves. Each of the NCB curves is expressed by the sound pressure level
values in the important 1200-2400 Hz frequency band. The NCB levels shall be used to specify the desirable
lowest limit under which the background noise must not fall. (See Table 8.4.1 and Fig. D, Appendix D).
Note:
The general configuration of the NCB curves is quite similar to the noise rating (NR) curves established by the
International Organization for Standardization, used mostly in the European practice
3.13
OCCUPANCY F: BUSINESS AND MERCANTILE BUILDINGS
3.13.1
General
Buildings of Occupancy F shall be planned and designed to minimize noise from external and internal
sources.
3.13.2
Sources of Disturbing Noise
3.13.2.1 Outdoor Noise: The following sources of outdoor noise and those specified in Sec 4.4 shall be taken into
account in the planning and design of business and mercantile buildings:
- Traffic,
- Playgrounds,
- Market places and shopping areas,
- Crowds grouped around the buildings for business purpose or other.
3.13.2.2 Indoor Noise: The following sources of indoor noise shall be identified for noise attenuation within
buildings:
8-22
a)
Mechanical noise, caused by heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems, elevators, escalators and
pneumatic tubes etc. ;
b)
Noise produced by office equipment or machines such as typewriters, printers, teleprinters,

reproduction, tabulating and punching machines etc.;
c)
Noise produced by mechanical amplifiers, for example in seminar halls, conference rooms or staff
training rooms or the like where public address system is used;
Chapter 4
3.13.3
d)
Machine noise generated from slide rooms, projection rooms and from electrical and mechanical
machines like generators, transformers, switch rooms and electric substations etc. ;
e)
Typical office noise created by speech, voices in circulation areas, opening and closing of doors etc. ;
f)
Plumbing systems, ventilation plants, lift machineries, air-conditioning and cooling systems.
3.13.3.1 Site Planning: Rooms susceptible to noise shall be located away from the sources of noise.
3.10.3.2 Activities and Space Layout: Spaces producing noise and those susceptible to noise shall be separated as far
as practicable. The effective length of long corridors shall be minimized. Swing doors are to be provided at
intervals.
3.10.3.3 Noise Reduction in the Sensitive Areas
a) Open plan Offices
i)
The floor area may be carpeted in order to absorb airborne noise and footstep noise. The carpet
shall preferably be thick and placed on top of resilient floors.
ii)
The entire portion of the ceiling shall be treated with sound absorption materials. Such treatment
shall be applied to the screens and nearby walls also.
A highly sound absorptive ceiling with a sound absorption coefficient of 0.70 shall preferably be
used to absorb 70 per cent of the sound energy reflecting 30 per cent of it.
b)
iii)
Moderately noisy office equipment (like typewriters, telephones, computers etc.) shall be
distributed as uniformly as possible all over the office space.
iv)
Noisy office equipment shall be concentrated into specific areas of the office space. The space
shall be treated with maximum amount of sound absorptive material and visually separated
from the rest of the office.
General Offices: Sound absorbent ceiling shall be provided in corridors. Hard floor finishes and batten
floors in corridors shall be avoided. Floor ducts shall be planned on one side of corridors.
3.10.3.4 Reduction of Noise at Source: The following measures shall be undertaken to reduce noise at source
depending on the degree of noise reduction desired.
a)
The noise from slamming of doors shall be reduced by fitting automatic quiet action type door closers.
Continuous soft, resilient strip set into the door frames as well as quiet action door latches shall be
used.
b)
Machines like typewriters, calculators, printers etc. shall be fitted or installed with resilient pads to
prevent the floors or tables (on which they stand) from acting as large radiating panels.
c)
Noises from ventilating systems, from a uniform flow of traffic or from general office activities, shall be
considered to generate an artificial masking noise. In open plan offices the provision of a relatively high
but acceptable degree of background noise (from the ventilating or air-conditioning system) shall be
provided, in order to mask undesirable office noises created by typewriters, telephones, office machines
or loud conversation and to provide a reasonable amount of privacy.
The background noise masking system shall be introduced gradually without disturbing the feeling of
the occupants.
The air-conditioning system may be used to generate background masking noise if the noise level from
the ceiling fans, ducts etc. can be suitably reduced to generate the desired frequency spectrum.
8-23
Part 8
Building Services
3.10.3.5 Sound Insulation Factors: The acoustical performance of the partitions dividing rentable office spaces shall
not exceed an STC rating of 25 to 30 dB, unless the background noise is so high that it masks the sound
coming through the lightweight partition.
If lightweight partitions are employed for subdivision of large spaces into executive cabins and secretarial
areas, the following measures shall be taken to increase the insulation factors:
a)
Sound barriers shall be provided up to above the false ceiling with a noise reduction characteristic that
will not be affected by ducts, conduits or other cable lines including electricity and water pipings
installed in the ceiling space.
b)
Where construction of light weight partitions is considered essential, a double skin panel shall be
preferred.
The panels shall be installed apart from each other either by use of separate framing or by use of elastic
discontinuities in the construction. Sound absorbing materials shall be provided in the air cavity
between the panels so that more insulation can be assured.
c)
All apertures, gaps and joints at side walls, floors and ceiling junctions shall be properly sealed.
d)
A double panel hollow floor construction shall be employed with heavy sound damping materials
introduced between the panels for effective reduction of the structure-borne noise transmitted from
upper floors to the floors below, particularly when lightweight floors are provided in multi-use spaces.
Lightweight materials having high natural frequencies may resonate or vibrate due to an applied
vibratory force, which may be caused by mechanical equipment, road or rail traffic etc. These
materials, if used for specific reasons, shall be isolated from the source of noise in order to reduce the
amount of vibration transmitted to the building.
e)
The floor surfaces surrounding the office space may be lined with a carpet of high sound absorption.
f)
For sound adsorption with floor carpeting, the following characteristics shall be maintained:
i)
Fibre type carpet shall not be used, as it has practically no effect on sound absorption;
ii)
Hair, hair jute and foam rubber pads shall be used for higher sound absorption than the less
permeable rubber coated hair jute, sponge rubber etc.;
iii)
To improve sound absorption the loop-pile fabrics with increased pile height (with the density
held constant) shall be applied;
iv)
The backing shall be more permeable for higher sound absorption.
3.14
OCCUPANCY G: INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
3.14.1
General Noise Levels

In the noise control of industrial buildings the following requirements are to be fulfilled:
8-24
a)
An acceptable acoustical environment for individual workers and machine operators;
b)
Speech communication among operators to the required degree;
c)
Protection of other workers or office employees (either close to the noise source or at some other
location within the same building);
d)
Prevention of noise transmission into adjacent buildings or into the surrounding community.
Chapter 4
3.14.1.1 Intermittent Noises : Intermittent noise in the form of isolated explosions, and periodic noise related to
pressure relief valves, hammering, grinding and sawing operations etc. shall be identified for enforcing
controlling measures.
3.14.1.2 Sources of Noise: The following sources of noise in industrial buildings and manufacturing plants shall be
identified and investigated to find whether the machines are in smooth operation and producing minimal
mechanical noise.
a)
Fabrication and assembly machines;
b)
Machines used for material transport and general plant services;
c)
Noise caused by impact and coupled with resonant response of the structural members, connected to
the impacting surfaces;
d)
High frequency sounds generated from grinders;
e)
Frictional noise occurring at the time of sawing, grinding or sanding, as well as during the cutting on
lathe machines and in brakes or from bearings;
f)
Noise generated from piping systems and valves;
g)
High velocity flow of air, steam or other fluids that undergo an abrupt change in pipe diameter which
give rise to turbulence and resultant noise, and noise generated by rapid variation in air pressure
caused by turbulence from high velocity air, steam or gases;
h)
Unpleasant noise identified with rotating or reciprocating machines, which is generated due to
pressure fluctuation in the fluids inside the machines.
3.14.2
Hearing Damage Risk Criteria

When the sound level at a particular section in a factory or industrial building exceeds the specified level in
terms of magnitude and time (as shown in Table 8.4.4 below), feasible engineering control shall be applied
and implemented in order to reduce the sound to the limits shown. Personal hearing protection equipment
shall be provided and used if such control fails to reduce sound levels.
3.14.3
Interference with Communication

In industries where the operator has to follow verbal instructions during operation of the machine the
background noise shall be reduced to an acceptable level.
Precautionary measures shall be taken so that the noise generated inside may not be the cause of accidents
by hindering communication or by masking warning signals.
3.14.4
Requirements for Noise Reduction
3.14.4.1 Noise Reduction by Layout and Location: Considerable noise reduction may be achieved by a sensible
architectural layout in noisy industrial buildings following the steps mentioned below:
a)
Noisy areas shall be separated from spaces requiring silence.
b)
The office block is to be located in a separate building. If this is not possible, the office space in a factory
shall be segregated from the production area as far as practicable.
c)
The office building shall not have a common wall with the production areas. Where a common wall is
unavoidable it should be of heavy construction (not less than 375 mm thick).
d)
Electrically operated vehicles shall be used as far as practicable, since they eliminate most of the noise
normally associated with combustion engines.
8-25
Part 8
Building Services
3.14.4.2 Noise Reduction at Source: In order to suppress the noise at the source relatively silent machines and
equipment shall be installed. Additionally the following provisions shall be adhered to:
a)
Appropriate type of manufacturing process or working method shall be selected which does not cause
disturbing noise. Machine tools and equipment are to be selected carefully in order to attain lower
noise levels in the machine shop.
b)
Maintenance of vibrating and frictional machineries shall be ensured.
c)
Impact noises in general shall be reduced; soft and resilient materials shall be applied on hard surfaces
where impact noise can originate.
d)
Rubber tyres or similar other materials shall be fixed on the areas or surfaces used for the handling and
dropping of materials.
e)
The area of the radiating surface from which a noise is radiated shall be reduced to a minimum.
f)
Resilient flooring (carpeting, rubber tile, cork tile, etc.) shall be used adequately to reduce impact
transmission onto the floor.
g)
Flexible mountings, anti-vibration pads, floating floors etc. shall be used to prevent the transmission of
vibration and shock from various machines into the building or structure.
h)
Mechanically rigid connecting paths must be interrupted by resilient materials so that the transmission
of vibration and noise is reduced.
3.14.4.3 Isolator Specifications

a) Isolators shall be made of resilient materials like steel (in the form of springs), soft rubber and corks.
b)
Direct contact between the spring and the supporting structure shall be eliminated, in order to reduce
transmission of high frequencies by metal springs.
c)
Rubber or felt pads shall be inserted between the ends of the springs and the surfaces to which they are
fixed.
d)
Felt or cork shall be used under machine bases, as resilient mats or pads.
e)
If the equipment is massive like drop hammers causing serious impact vibration (in larger
manufacturing plants), it shall be mounted on massive blocks of concrete, on its own separate
foundation.
f)
The foundation shall have a weight 3 to 5 times that of the supported machines.
g)
A sound reduction of 5 to 10 dBA shall have to be realized from the vibration isolation measures.
3.14.4.4 Noise Reduction by Enclosures and Barriers: When the plant is large in which the overall noise level
results from many machines, an enclosure shall be provided.
8-26
a)
When only one or two machines are the dominant source of disturbing noise, the noisy equipment shall
be isolated in a small area of enclosure.
b)
The enclosure shall be in the form of close fitting acoustic box around the machines. The box shall be of
such character that the operator can continue with his normal work outside the box.
c)
An enclosure around the offending unit shall be impermeable to air and lined with sound absorbing
materials such that the noise generated by machines is reduced substantially.
Chapter 4

d)
e)
i)
When the industrial plant is a large one in which the resultant noise level is produced from a
number of machines, enclosures shall be used either for supervisory personnel or operators who
are engaged in monitoring the automatic machines. Such barriers may have inspection openings.
ii)
Enclosures of this type shall ensure noise reduction of at least 30 dBA, and shall be made of sheet
metal lined inside with an appropriate insulation material.
iii)
Where curtains are used to isolate the noisy equipment in a small area, they shall be of full
length i.e. from ceiling to floor and shall be made of fibreglass cloth and lead or leaded vinyl.
If the size of the machine is large and asks for more working spaces, thus not permitting close fitting
enclosures, the machine shall be housed in a separate room or enclosure.
The inside of the enclosure shall be lined with sound absorbing materials in order to reduce the
contained noise.
f)
If after all these measures are taken the noise level still remains above a tolerable degree, the workers
shall be provided with earplugs for protection.
3.15
ACOUSTICAL REQUIREMENTS OF SPECIAL OCCUPANCIES
3.15.1
Susceptible Buildings
3.15.1.1 Recording and Radio Studios: A recording studio shall present optimum acoustical conditions. A
differentiation shall be made among the numerous various purposes of studio use.
a)
Particular attention shall be given to the following requirements:

i)
An optimum size and shape of the studio shall be established following the design criteria;
ii)
A high degree of diffusion shall be secured;
iii)
Ideal reverberation characteristics shall be provided;
iv)
Noises and vibration shall be completely eliminated and acoustical defects shall be totally
prevented.
b)
The acoustical treatments shall be uniformly and proportionately distributed over the three pairs of
opposite surfaces enclosing the studio.
c)
Portable acoustic screen and a reverberation chamber shall be provided so that the desired
reverberation condition can be achieved.
d)
Variable absorbers such as hinged or sliding panels, rotatable cylinders, adjustable drapery etc. shall be
fixed on wall surfaces and ceiling areas.
e)
All surfaces shall be carefully checked for echoes, flutter echoes etc.
f)
Parallel surfaces shall be eliminated or treated with highly absorptive acoustical materials (throughout
the frequency range between 63 and 8000 Hz).
3.15.1.2 Research Laboratories

a) In the selection of site, care shall be taken to ensure that no noise generating installations exist in the
vicinity.
b)
Location of laboratories shall be secluded from the noisy zones within the building.
c)
A sound insulation of at least 35 dB shall be achieved by means of acoustic partitions where offices are
attached to the laboratory.
8-27
Part 8
Building Services
d)
Sound absorbing screens shall be used where scientists and researchers are engaged in laboratory
activities and desk work simultaneously.
e)
Transmission of noise through service ducts, pipes, lifts and staircases shall be guarded.
f)
Double glazed windows shall be provided in the noise sensitive areas. There shall be a minimum gap of
100 mm between the two glasses.
3.15.1.3 Music Rooms: The following provisions shall apply to music rooms, including rehearsal rooms,
instructional space, practice booth etc.
a)
Acoustical conditions in practice booths and listening booths shall have a reverberation time of 0.4 to
0.5 second.
b)
Adequate floor area, room height, room shape and volume must be established to achieve proper
reverberation.
c)
Sound absorbing materials shall be applied sufficiently so that the excessive sound generated by bands
or individual instruments can be soaked up.
d)
Parallelism between opposite surfaces shall be avoided.
e)
Entire surfaces of at least two adjacent walls, and all the ceiling area shall be treated with sound
absorbing materials.
3.15.1.4 Libraries: A quite and peaceful interior shall be maintained inside libraries. The following provisions are to
be adhered to in planning and design:
a)
Screening and sound insulation measures shall be undertaken in and around the reception/issue desk
and photocopying facility areas.
b)
c)
Stack rooms, store rooms and administrative offices shall be planned in such a way that the audiovisual
areas are properly isolated from external noises.
Walls enclosing the library shall have a sound reduction value of not less than 50 dB.
d)
Fanlights shall be double glazed and non-openable.
e)
Walls facing the corridors or other noisy areas shall not have fanlights or borrowed lights unless they
are double glazed.
3.15.1.5 Law Courts and Council Chambers

a) Entrance into court rooms and council chambers (especially from circulation areas and gathering
spaces) shall be through baffle lobbies, with two sets of doors fitted with silencers.
3.15.2
b)
Offices shall be planned around the court rooms or chambers for further protection against outdoor
noise and the central rooms shall have a sound insulation value of not less than 50 dB (provided by 225
mm thick brick wall) to insulate against airborne noise in the corridors.
c)
d)
The court and chamber rooms shall have floors finished with resilient materials.
Ceiling and upper parts of the walls of lobbies and circulation areas shall have sound absorbing
treatments.
Public Address System
3.15.2.1 Design of public address systems shall take care of equipment choice, positioning of the individual elements
and other precautions to obtain optimum performance of the system.
8-28
Chapter 4
3.15.2.2 Passenger terminals and other public places equipped with public address systems shall as far as practicable
avoid the use of sound reflecting surfaces like hard walls and floors. Reverberation time shall be reduced as
far as possible by using sound absorbing materials on walls and ceilings.
3.15.2.3 Reverberation built-up sound level shall not be relied upon. Direct sound shall preferably be audible in all
areas to be covered by the public address system.
3.15.2.4 Sound levels of the public address system in the areas covered shall be adequately high to overcome
background noise.
Related Appendices
Appendix D
Fig. D Activity Flow Diagram: Planning and Design in Building Acoustics
Appendix E
Table E.1 Allowable Upper Limit of Outdoor Noise Levels

Table E.2 Typical Noise Levels Generated by Aircrafts
Table E.3 Subjective Evaluation and Pressure Levels of Familiar Sounds
Appendix F
Fig. F.1 Noise Criteria (NC) and Balanced Noise Criteria (NCB) Curve
Fig. F.2 Recommended Criteria for Sound Isolation between Dwelling Units
Appendix G
Fig. G.1 Coefficients for Percentage Syllable Articulation (PSA)

Fig. G.2 Liveliness of a Room as a Function of its Volume and Total Absorption
Appendix H
Table H Octave Band Average Sound Absorption Coefficients
Appendix I
Table I.1 Typical STC Ratings for Building Elements

Table I.2 Recommended STC for Partitions for Specific Occupancies
Fig. I.1 Speech and Music in Aural Field
Fig. I.2 Recommended proportion of a space
Appendix J
Fig. J Speech Privacy Analysis Sheet
Appendix K
Form K - Checklist: Acoustical Planning and Design
8-29
Chapter 4
LIFTS,ESCALATORSANDMOVINGWALKS
4.1
GENERAL
4.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to provide minimum standards for regulating and controlling the design,
construction, installation, quality of materials, location, operation, maintenance and use of lifts, escalators and
movingwalkstoensurepublicsafetyandwelfare.
4.1.2 Scope
4.1.2.1
Theprovisionsofthischaptershallapplytotheerection,installation,alteration,repair,relocation,replacement,
additionto,operationandmaintenanceoflifts,escalatorsandmovingwalks.
4.1.2.2
Additions,alterations,repairsandreplacementofequipmentorsystemsshallcomplywiththeprovisionsfornew
equipmentandsystems.
4.1.2.3
Where,inanyspecificcase,differentsectionsofthecodespecifydifferentmaterialsorotherrequirements,the
most restrictive one shall govern. Where there is a conflict between a general requirement and a specific
requirement,thespecificrequirementshallbeapplicable.
4.1.2.4
Itshallbeunlawfultoinstall,extend,alter,repairormaintainlift,escalatorormovingwalksystemsinoradjacent
tobuildingsexceptincompliancewiththisCode.
4.1.3 Terminology
ThissectionprovidesanalphabeticallistofthetermsusedinthischapteroftheCode.Incaseofanyconflictor
contradictionbetweenadefinitiongiveninthissectionandthatinPart1,themeaningprovidedinthissection
shallgovernforinterpretationoftheprovisionsofthischapter.
Automatic Rescue Device
Adevicemeanttobringaliftstuckbetweenfloorsduetolossofpower,tothenearestlevelandopenthedoors
in order to allow trapped passengers to be evacuated. Such a device may use some form of internal auxiliary
powersourceforsuchpurpose,complyingwithallthesafetyrequirementsofaliftduringnormalrun.Thespeed
of travelis usually lower than the normal speed.Inthe case of manualdoors on reaching thelevel, the device
shallallowthedoortobeopenedandincaseofpoweroperateddoorsthedeviceshallautomaticallyopenthe
door.
Baluster
Oneoftheslenderuprightsupportsofahandrail.
Balustrade
Arowofbalustersmeantforsupportingmovinghandrails.
BasementStorey
Thelowerstoreyofabuildingbeloworpartlybelowthegroundlevel.
Part8
BuildingServices
8165
Part8
BuildingServices
BottomCarClearance
The clear vertical distance from the pit floor to the lowest structural or mechanical part, equipment or device
installedbeneaththecarplatformapronsorguardslocatedwithin300mm,measuredhorizontallyfromthesides
ofthecarplatformwhenthecarrestsonitsfullycompressedbuffers.
BottomCarRunby
Thedistancebetweenthecarbufferstrikerplateandthestrikingsurfaceofthecarbufferwhenthecarisinlevel
withthebottomterminallanding.
BottomCounterweightRunby
Thedistancebetweenthecounterweightbufferstrikerplateandthestrikingsurfaceofthecounterweightbuffer
whenthecarisinlevelwiththetopterminallanding.
Buffer
Adevicedesignedtoabsorbtheimpactofthefallingcarorcounterweightbeyonditsnormallimitoftravelby
absorbinganddissipatingthekineticenergyofthecarorcounterweight.
(a) OilBufferAbufferusingoilasamediumwhichabsorbsanddissipatesthekineticenergyofthe
descendingcarorcounterweight.
i.
OilbufferstrokeTheoildisplacingmovementofthebufferplungerorpiston,excludingthe
travelofthebufferplungeracceleratingdevice.
(b) Spring Buffer A buffer which stores in a spring the kinetic energy of the descending car or
counterweight.
i.
SpringbufferloadratingTheloadrequiredtocompressthespringbyanamountequaltoits
stroke.
ii.
Spring buffer stroke The distance, the contact end of the spring can move under a
compressiveloaduntilthespringiscompressedsolid.
CallIndicator
Avisualandaudibledeviceinthecartoindicatetotheattendanttheliftlandingsfromwhichthecallshavebeen
made.
CarBodyWork
Theenclosingbodyworkoftheliftcarwhichcomprisesthesidesandroof,andisbuiltuponthecarplatform.
CarDoorElectricContact
Anelectricdevice,thefunctionofwhichistopreventoperationofthedrivingmachinebythenormaloperating
deviceunlessthecardoorisintheclosedposition.
CarFrame
Thesupportingframetowhichtheplatformoftheliftcar,itssafetygear,guideshoesandsuspensionropesare
attached.
CarPlatform
Thepartoftheliftcarwhichformstheflooranddirectlysupportstheload.
CarSpeed
SeeRATEDSPEED(LIFT).
CombPlate
Aprongedplatethatformspartofanescalator(ormovingwalk)landingandengageswiththeCleatsofthesteps
(ortreadway)atthelimitsoftravel.
ControlSystem
The system of equipment by means of which starting, stopping, direction of motion, speed, acceleration, and
retardationofthemovingmemberarecontrolled.
(a) SingleSpeedAlternatingCurrentControlAcontrolforadrivingmachineinductionmotorwhichis
arrangedtorunatasinglespeed.
(b) TwoSpeedAlternatingCurrentControlAcontrolforatwospeeddrivingmachineinductionmotor
which is arranged to run at two different synchronous speeds either by pole changing of a single
motororbytwodifferentarmatures.
6166
Vol.3
Lifts,EscalatorsandMovingWalks
Chapter4
(c) RheostaticControlAsystemofcontrolwhichisaccomplishedbyvaryingresistanceorreactanceor
bothinthearmatureorfieldcircuitorbothofthedrivingmachinemotor.
(d) Variable Voltage Motor Control (Generator Field Control) A system of control which is
accomplishedbytheuseofanindividualgeneratorforeachliftwhereinthevoltageappliedtothe
drivingmachinemotorisadjustedbyvaryingthestrengthanddirectionofthegeneratorfield.
(e) ElectronicDevicesAsystemofcontrolwhichisaccomplishedbytheuseofelectronicdevicesfor
drivingtheliftmotoratvariablespeed.
(f) Alternating Current Variable Voltage (ACW) Control A system of speed control which is
accomplished by varying the driving and braking torque by way of voltage variation of the power
supplytothedrivingmachineinductionmotor.
(g) Alternating Current Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (ACVVVF) Control A system of speed
control which is accomplished by varying the voltage and frequency of the power supply to the
drivingmachineinductionmotor.
(h) SolidState d.c. Variable Voltage Control A solidstate system of speed control which is
accomplished by varying the voltage and direction of the power supply to the armature of driving
machined.c.motor.
CounterWeight
Aweightorcombinationofweightstocounterbalancetheweightofthecarandpartoftheratedload.
DeterminingEntranceLevel
Theinsidefloorlevelattheentrancetothebuilding.
DeflectorSheave
Anidlerpulleyusedtochangethedirectionofaropelead.
Door,CentreOpeningSliding
Adoorwhichslideshorizontallyandconsistsoftwopanelswhichopenfromthecentreandaresointerconnected
thattheymovesimultaneously.
Door,Hinged
Thehingedportionoftheliftwellenclosurewhichclosestheopeninggivingaccesstothelanding.
Door,MidBarCollapsible
Acollapsibledoorwithverticalbarsmountedbetweenthenormalverticalmembers.
Door,Multipanel
Adoorarrangementwherebymorethanonepanelisusedsuchthatthepanelsareconnectedtogetherandcan
slideoveroneanotherbywhichmeanstheclearopeningcanbemaximizedforagivenshaftwidth.Multipanels
areusedincentreopeningandtwospeedslidingdoors.
Door,SingleSlide
Asinglepaneldoorwhichslideshorizontally.
Door,TwoSpeed
A two panel door which slides horizontally in the same direction wherein each panel has different operating
speedandreachestheendssimultaneously.
Door,VerticalBiparting
Adoororshutterwhichslidesverticallyandconsistsoftwopanelsorsetsofpanelsthatmoveawayfromeach
othertoopenandaresointerconnectedthattheymovesimultaneously.
Door,VerticalLifting
Asinglepaneldoor,whichslidesinthesameplaneverticallyuptoopen.
Door,Swing
Aswingingtypesinglepaneldoorwhichisopenedmanuallyandclosedbymeansofadoorcloserwhenreleased.
DoorClose
Adevicewhichautomaticallyclosesamanuallyopeneddoor.
DoorOperator
6167
Part8
BuildingServices
Apoweroperateddeviceforopeningandclosingdoors.
DrivingMachinery
Themotorizedpowerunitfordrivingthelift,escalatorormovingwalk.
Dumbwaiter
Asmallliftwithacarwhichmovesinguidesinasubstantiallyverticaldirection,hasnetfloorarea,totalinside
height and capacity not exceeding 0.9 m2, 1.25 m and 225 kg respectively and is exclusively used for carrying
materialsandnoperson.Itmayormaynotbeprovidedwithfixedorremovableshelves.
ElectricalandMechanicalInterlock
Adeviceprovidedtopreventsimultaneousoperationofbothupanddownrelays.
ElectroMechanicalLock
Adevicewhichcombinesinoneunit,electricalcontactandamechanicallockjointlyusedforthelandingand/or
cardoors.
EmergencyStopPushorSwitch
Apushbuttonorswitchprovidedinsidethecardesignedtoopenthecontrolcircuittocausetheliftcartostop
duringemergency.
EnclosedWell
Theliftwellhavingenclosurewallsofcontinuousconstructionwithoutopeningsexceptfordoorsatlandings.
Escalator
Apowerdriven,inclined,continuouslymovingstairwayusedforcarryingpassengersfromoneleveltoanother.
EscalatorLanding
Theportionofthebuildingorstructurewhichisusedtoreceiveordischargepassengersintoorfromanescalator.
EscalatorLandingZone
Aspaceextendingfromahorizontalplane40cmbelowalandingtoaplane40cmabovethelanding.
EscalatorMachine
Themechanismandotherequipmentinconnectiontherewithusedformovingtheescalator
Floor
Thelowersurfaceinastoreyonwhichonenormallywalksinabuilding.Thegeneralterm'floor',unlessotherwise
specificallymentionedshallnotrefertoa'mezzaninefloor'.
FloorLevelingSwitch
Aswitchforbringingthecartolevelatslowspeedincaseofdoublespeedorvariablespeedmachines.
FloorSelector
A mechanism forming a part of the control equipment, in certain automatic lifts, designed to operate controls
whichcausetheliftcartostopattherequiredlandings.
FloorStoppingSwitch
Aswitchorcombinationofswitchesarrangedtobringthecartorestautomaticallyatornearanypreselected
landing.
GearedMachine
Amachineinwhichthepoweristransmittedtothesheavethroughwormorwormandspurreductiongearing.
GearlessMachine
A lift machine in which the motive power is transmitted to the driving sheave from the motor without
intermediatereductiongearingandhasthebrakedrummounteddirectlyonthemotorshaft.
GoodsLift
A lift designed primarily for the transport of goods, but which may carry a lift attendant or other persons
necessaryfortheloadingorunloadingofgoods.
Governor
A device which automatically actuates safety devices to bring the lift car and/or counter weight to rest in the
eventthespeedoftheequipmentinthedescendingdirectionexceedsapredeterminedlimit.
6168
Vol.3
Chapter4
GuideRails
Themembersusedtoguidethemovementofaliftcarorcounterweightinaverticaldirection.
GuideRailsfixing
Thecompleteassy.comprisingtheguiderailsbracketanditsfastenings.
GuideRailsShoe
Anattachmenttothecarframeorcounterweightforthepurposeofguidingtheliftcarorcounterweightframe.
HandlingCapacity
Thecapacityoftheliftsystemtocarrypassengersduringafiveminutepeakperiod,expressedasthepercentage
oftheestimatedtotalpopulationhandled.
HoistingBeam
Abeam,mountedimmediatelybelowthemachineroomceiling,towhichliftingtacklecanbefixedforraisingor
loweringpartsoftheliftmachine.
HospitalLift
A lift normally installed in a hospital, nursing home or clinic and designed to accommodate one number
bed/stretcheralongitsdepth,withsufficientspaceallaroundtocarryaminimumofthreeattendantsinaddition
totheliftoperator.
HydraulicLift
Aliftwheretheverticalmovementisdonebyhydraulicforce.
Interval
Averagetimegap(s)betweenconsecutiveliftsleavingthegroundfloororpassinganyspecificfloor.
Landing
Thatportionofabuildingorstructureusedforthereceptionanddischargeofpassengersorgoodsorbothinto
andfromaliftcar,escalatorormovingwalk.
LandingCallPushButton(Lift)
Apushbuttonfittedataliftlanding,eitherforcallingtheliftcarorforactuatingthecallindicator.
LandingDoor(Lift)
Thehingedorslidingportionofaliftwellenclosure,controllingaccesstoaliftcarataliftlanding.
LandingPlate
The portion of the landing immediately above the mechanism at either end of escalator or moving walk and
constructedsoastogiveaccesstothismechanismintheseareas.
LandingZone
Aspaceextendingfromahorizontalplane400mmbelowalandingtoaplane400mmabovethelanding.
LevelingDevice,LiftCar
Anymechanismwhicheitherautomaticallyorunderthecontroloftheoperator,movesthecarwithintheleveling
zonetowardsthelandingonly,andautomaticallystopsitatthelanding.
LevelingDevice,OneWayAutomatic
Adevicewhichcorrectsthecarlevelonlyincaseofunderrunofthecarbutwillnotmaintainthelevelduring
loadingandunloading.
LevelingDevice,TwoWayAutomaticMaintaining
Adevicewhichcorrectsthecarlevelonbothunderrunandoverrunandmaintainsthelevelduringloadingand
unloading.
LevelingDevice,TwoWayAutomaticNonMaintaining
Adevicewhichcorrectsthecarlevelonbothunderrunandoverrunbutwillnotmaintainthelevelduringloading
andunloading.
LevelingZone
Thelimiteddistanceaboveorbelowaliftlandingwithinwhichthelevelingdevicemaycausemovementofthe
cartowardsthelanding.
Lift
6169
Part8
BuildingServices
Amachinedesignedtotransportpersonsormaterialsbetweentwoormorelevelsinaverticalorsubstantially
verticaldirectionbymeansofaguidedcarorplatform.Theword"elevator"isalsosynonymouslyusedfor"lift"
LiftCar
Theloadcarryingunitwithitsfloororplatform,carframeandenclosingbodywork.
LiftLanding
Thatportionofabuildingorstructureusedfordischargeofpassengersorgoodsorbothintoorfromaliftcar.
LiftMachine
Thepartoftheliftequipmentcomprisingmotor(s)andcontrolgeartherewith,reductiongear(ifany),brake(s)
andwindingdrumorsheave,bywhichtheliftcarisraisedorlowered.
LiftPit
Thespaceintheliftwellbelowthelevelofthelowestliftlandingserved.
LiftSystem
Oneormoreliftcarsservingthesamebuilding.
LiftWell
Theunobstructedspacewithinanenclosureprovidedfortheverticalmovementoftheliftcar(s)andanycounter
weight(s),includingtheliftpitandthespacefortopclearance.
LiftWellEnclosure
Anystructurewhichseparatestheliftwellfromitssurroundings.
LiftingBeam
A beam, mounted immediately below the machine room ceiling to which lifting tackle can be fixed for raising
partsoftheliftmachine.
MachineRoom
Thecompartmentallocatedtohousetheliftmachineandassociateditems.
MachinerySpace
Thespaceoccupiedbythedrivingmachineandcontrolgearofthelift,escalatorormovingwalk.
Mezzanine
Anintermediatefloorbetweentwofloorsabovegroundlevel.
MovingWalk
Apowerdriven,horizontalorinclined,continuouslymovingconveyorusedforcarryingpassengers,horizontally
orataninclineuptoamaximumof15degree.
Newel
An upright support of the handrail at the landing of escalator/moving walk where the handrail reverses its
direction.
OpenTypeWell
Aliftwellhavingenclosurewallsofwiregrilleorsimilarconstruction.
Operation
Themethodofactuatingthecontroland/orfunctioninganyliftmachine/equipment.
(a) AutomaticOperation:Amethodofoperationinwhichbyamomentarypressureofabuttonthelift
carissetinmotionandcausedtostopautomaticallyatanyrequiredliftlanding.
(b) NonSelective CollectiveAutomaticOperation:Automaticoperationby means ofonebuttonin the
carforeachlandinglevelservedandonebuttonateachlanding,whereinallstopsregisteredbythe
momentary actuation of landing or car buttons are made irrespective of the number of buttons
actuatedorofthesequenceinwhichthebuttonsareactuated.Withthistypeofoperation,thecar
stopsatalllandingsforwhichbuttonshavebeenactuatedmakingthestopsintheorderinwhichthe
landingsarereachedafterthebuttonshavebeenactuatedbutirrespectiveofitsdirectionoftravel.
(c) SelectiveCollectiveAutomaticOperation:Automaticoperationbymeansofonebuttoninthecarfor
eachlandinglevelservedandbyupanddownbuttonsatthelandings,whereinallstopsregistered
by the momentary actuation of the car made as defined under nonselective collective automatic
6170
Vol.3
Chapter4
operation,butwhereinthestopsregisteredbythemomentaryactuationofthelandingbuttonsare
madeintheorderinwhichthelandingsarereachedineachdirectionoftravelafterthebuttonshave
been actuated. With this type of operation, all 'up' landing calls are answered when the car is
travellingintheupdirectionandall`down'landingcallsareansweredwhenthecaristravellingin
thedowndirection,exceptinthecaseoftheuppermostorlowermostcallswhichareansweredas
soonastheyarereachedirrespectiveofthedirectionoftravelofthecar.
(d) SingleAutomaticOperation:Automaticoperationbymeansofonebuttoninthecarforeachlanding
levelservedandonebuttonateachlandingsoarrangedthatifanycarorlandingbuttonhasbeen
actuated, the actuation of any other car or landing operation button will have no effect on the
movementofthecaruntiltheresponsetothefirstbuttonhasbeencompleted.
(e) GroupAutomaticOperation:Automaticoperationoftwoormorenonattendantliftsequippedwith
poweroperated car and landing doors. The operation of the cars is coordinated by a supervisory
operation system including automatic dispatching means whereby selected cars at designated
dispatchingpointsautomaticallyclosetheirdoorsandproceedontheirtripsinaregulatedmanner.
(f) Typically,itincludesonebuttonineachcarforeachfloorservedandupanddownbuttonsateach
landing(singlebuttonsatterminallandings).Thestopssetupbythemomentaryactuationofthecar
buttons are made automatically in succession as a car reaches the corresponding landings
irrespectiveofitsdirectionoftravelorthesequenceinwhichthebuttonsareactuated.Thestopsset
upbythemomentaryactuationofthelandingbuttonsmaybeaccomplishedbyanyliftinthegroup,
and are made automatically by the first available car that approaches the landing in the
correspondingdirection.
(g) CarSwitchOperation:Methodofoperationbywhichthemovementofliftcarisdirectlyunderthe
operationoftheattendantbymeansofahandle.
(h) SignalOperation:Sameascollectiveoperation,exceptthattheclosingofthedoorisinitiatedbythe
attendant.
(i) DoubleButton(ContinuousPressure)Operation:Operationbymeansofbuttonsorswitchesinthe
carandatthelandingsanyofwhichmaybeusedtocontrolthemovementofthecaraslongasthe
buttonorswitchismanuallypressedintheactuatingposition.
OperatingDevice
Acarswitch,pushbuttonorotherdeviceemployedtoactuatethecontrol.
OverheadBeams(Lift)
Themembers,usuallyofsteelorreinforcedconcrete,whichimmediatelysupporttheliftequipmentatthetopof
theliftwell.
OverheadPulley
Anidlerpulleyusedtochangethedirectionofrope.
PassengerLift
Aliftdesignedforthetransportofpassengers.
Positionand/orDirectionIndicator
Adevicewhichindicatesontheliftlandingorintheliftcarorboth,thepositionofthecarintheliftwellorthe
directionorbothinwhichtheliftcaristravelling.
PowerOperatedDoor
Adooroperatedautomaticallybyadeviceinitiatedbyamomentarypressureonthepushbuttonorbyoperation
ofthecontrolsystem.
RatedLoad
Themaximumloadwhichtheliftcar,escalatorormovingwalkisdesignedandinstalledtocarrysafelyatitsrated
speed.
RatedSpeed(Lift)
Thespeedattainedbytheliftintheupdirectionwithratedloadintheliftcar.AlsoknownasCARSPEED.
RatedSpeed(Escalator)
Thespeedatwhichtheescalatorisdesignedtooperateintheupdirection.Itistherateoftravelofthesteps,
measuredalongtheangleofinclinationwithratedloadonthestepsorcarriage.
6171
Part8
BuildingServices
RatedSpeed(MovingWalk)
Thespeedatwhichthemovingwalkisdesignedtooperateintheupdirection.Itistherateoftravelofthetread
way,measuredalongtheangleofinclinationwithratedloadonthetreadway.
RetiringCam
Adevicewhichpreventsthelandingdoorsfrombeingunlockedbytheliftcarunlessitstopsatalanding.
RopingMultiple
Asystemofropingwhere,inordertoobtainamultiplyingthefactorfromthemachinetothecar,multiplefallsof
ropearerunaroundsheaveonthecarorcounterweightorboth.Itincludesropingarrangementof2to1.3to1
etc.
SafetyGear
Amechanicaldeviceattachedtothecarframeorthecounterweighttostopandholdthecarorcounterweight
totheguidesintheeventofafreefall.Governoroperatedsafetygearsareusedtostopthecarorcounterweight
whenittravelsataspeedexceedingapredeterminedspeed.
ServiceLift
A lift designed primarily for the transport of goods, but which may carry a lift attendant or other persons
necessaryfortheloadingandunloadingofgoods.
Sheave
Aropewheel,therimofwhichisgroovedtoreceivethesuspensionropesbuttowhichtheropesarenotrigidly
attachedandbymeansofwhichpoweristransmittedfromtheliftmachinetothesuspensionropes.
SlackRopeSwitch
Switchprovidedtoopenthecontrolcircuitincaseofslackeningofrope(s)
Storey
Thespacebetweenthesurfaceofonefloorandthesurfaceoftheadjacentfloorverticallyaboveorbelowit.The
term'Floor'shallinclude'Roof'butwillexcludemezzaninefloors.
StoreysForSpecificUse
Storeyswhicharenamedaccordingtotheirfunctionsandthespecificusestheyareputto.Forexample,aduct
storeyisonethroughwhichservicepipesandelectricalconduitsmaybetaken.
SubsidiaryStorey
Astoreywhichoccursbelowthedeterminingentrancelevelbutabovethebasementstorey.
SuspensionRopes(Lift)
Theropesbywhichthecarandcounterweightaresuspended.
TerminalSlowDownSwitch
A switch when actuated shall compulsorily cut off the high speed and switch on the circuitry to run the lift in
levelingspeedbeforereachingonterminallandings.
TerminalStoppingSwitchNormal
Switchforcuttingalltheenergizingcurrentincaseofcartravellingbeyondthetopbottomlandingoraswitch
cutsofftheenergizingcurrentsoastobringthecartostopatthetopandbottomlevel.
TerminalStoppingDeviceFinal
A device which automatically cause the power to be removed from an electric lift driving machine motor and
brake, independent of the functioning of the normal terminal stopping device, the operating device or any
emergencyterminalstoppingdevice,afterthecarhaspassedaterminallanding.
TopCarClearance
The shortest vertical distance between the top of the car crosshead, or between the top of the car where no
crossheadisprovided,andthenearestpartoftheoverheadstructureoranyotherobstructionwhenthecarfloor
islevelwiththetopterminallanding.
TopCounterweightClearance
The shortest vertical distance between any part of the counterweight structure and the nearest part of the
overheadstructureoranyotherobstructionwhenthecarfloorislevelwiththebottomterminallanding.
6172
Vol.3
Chapter4
TotalHeadroom
Theverticaldistancefromthelevelofthetopliftlandingtothefloorofthemachineroom.
Travel(Lift)
Theverticaldistancebetweenthebottomandtopliftlandingsservedbytheequipment.
Vent
Anopeningprovidedintheroofortheexternalwallofaspaceforthepurposeofventilation.
4.1.4 PreliminaryDesignParticulars
4.1.4.1
Allrelevantaspectsoflift,escalatorormovingwalkinstallationsshallbeproperlyevaluatedduringtheplanning
stageofthebuildinginordertodesignthemosteffectiveconveyingsystem.
4.1.4.2
Appropriate steps shall be taken during the planning stage of the building to determine particulars of lift,
escalator or moving walk and the necessary provisions to be kept in the building structure so as to meet the
requirementsofthisCode.Discussionshallbecarriedout,duringplanningstage,withallconcernedparties,viz.
buildingowner,architect,consultingengineerand/orlift/escalator/movingwalkmanufacturertodeterminethe
extentofnecessaryprovisionstobekeptinthebuilding.
4.1.4.3
Minimumamountofinformationtobecollectedforliftsduringsuchmeetingsshallbethefollowing:
(a) number, capacity, speed and disposition of the lifts necessary to give adequate lift service in the
building;
(b) layoutandsizesofliftwell;
(c) particularsofliftwellenclosure,sizesofpunchesIntheliftwellenclosure;
(d) locationofliftmachineroom(aboveorbelow),heightofliftmachineroom;
(e) provisionofadequateaccesstotheliftmachineroomandsizeofmachineroom;
(f) totalheadroomclearance;
(g) provisionofventilationoftheliftwell;
(h) depthofliftpit;
(i) loads which the lift will impose on the building structure, and the holes to be left in the machine
roomfloorandcutoutsforwallboxesforpushbuttonsandsignals;
(j) necessityforandtypeofinsulationtominimizethetransmissionofvibrationandnoisetootherparts
ofthebuilding;
(k) requirements for fixing guide brackets to the building structure, hoisting beam for hoisting of lift
machine;
(l) requirementsandlayoutofelectricalpowerfeedersforthelift.
4.1.4.4
Minimumamountofinformationtobecollectedfortheescalatorsshallbethefollowing:
(a) Numberandsizeofeachescalator;
(b) Angleofescalactor;
(c) arrangementandlayoutofescalatorswithdimensionsoffloorpunchesrequired;
(d) minimumfloortofloorheightrequirement.
(e) dimensionsoftopandbottomescalatorlandings.
4.1.4.5
Minimumamountofinformationtobecollectedforthemovingwalksshallbethefollowing:
(a) Numberandsizeofeachmovingwalk;
6173
Part8
BuildingServices
(b) Angleofmovingwalk;
(c) arrangementandlayoutofmovingwalkswithdimensionsoffloorpunchesrequired;
(d) dimensionsoftopandbottommovingwalklandings.
4.1.4.6
For the safety considerations of lift installations and effective utilization of lift installations, locations and
arrangementofliftsshallbeinaccordancewithclause4.3.3.
4.1.4.7
Thebuildingplansubmittedwiththeapplicationforseekingpermissionofinstallationoflift,escalatorormoving
walk from theAuthority shallinclude layout of lift,escalatoror movingwalk properlyidentified in thedrawing
alongwiththedetailedparticularsasperAppendix84A.
4.1.4.8
Specificationsforlifts,escalatorsandmovingwalksshallincludedetailedparticularsasperAppendix84A.
4.1.4.9
Forthepurposeofeffectiveinstallationoflifts,escalatorsormovingwalks,workingdrawingsshowingthelayout
oflifts,escalatorsormovingwalksproperlyidentifiedinthedrawing,detailsofbuildersworks,forexample,holes
and/orpunchesinfloorsor,wallsandsupportsforlifts,escalatorsormovingwalksshallbepreparedpriortothe
finalizationofbuildingdesigndrawings.
4.1.4.10
Necessaryparticularsofelectricalrequirementsoflifts,escalatorsormovingwalksshallbedeterminedearlyin
theplanningstagetoincludeitintheelectricalprovisionsofthebuilding.
4.2
ESSENTIALREQUIREMENTSFORLIFTS
4.2.1 General
4.2.1.1
Liftsshallbeprovidedinbuildingsmorethansixstoreysor20minheight.Installationofliftsshallbecarriedout
inconformitywiththe"LiftAct"andrulesthereunder,wherevertheyareinforce.
4.2.1.2
StretcherFacilityinLifts
(a) Whenpassengerliftsareinstalledinanybuildinghavingmorethantenstoreysoraheightofmore
than 32 m, each floor served by these lifts must have access to at least one lift with a stretcher
facilityinaccordancewithSec4.2.1.2(b).
(b) AliftrequiredtohaveastretcherfacilitybySec4.2.1.2(a)shallaccommodatearaisedstretcherwith
apatientlyingonithorizontallybyprovidingaminimuminsideplatformarea1275mmwidex2000
mmlongwithaminimumclearopeningwidthof1050mm,unlessotherwisedesignedtoprovidean
equivalentfacility,toallowtheentranceandexitofanambulancestretcher(minimumsize600mm
widex2000mmlong)initshorizontalposition.Theseliftsshallbeidentifiedbytheinternationally
recognizedsymbolforemergencymedicalservices.
(c) Inanymultistoriedhospitalandhealthcarebuildingthereshallbeatleastonehospitallifthaving
stretcherfacilityinaccordancewithSec4.2.1.2(b).
4.2.1.3
StandbyPower
(a) Oneormoreliftsshallbeprovidedwithstandbypowerin
i.
Abuildingwhichhasmorethantenstoreysoraheightofmorethan32m,
ii.
Hospitalandhealthcarebuildings.
(b) Standby power shall be provided by an approved self contained generator set to operate
automaticallywheneverthereisadisruptionofelectricalpowersupplytothebuilding.
6174
Vol.3
Chapter4
(c) Theoperationofthestandbypowersystemshallbeasfollows:
4.2.1.4
i.
Whereonlyoneliftisinstalled,theliftshalltransfertostandbypowerwithin60secondsafter
failureofnormalpower.
ii.
Where two or more lifts are controlled by a common operating system, all lifts may be
transferredtostandbypowerwithin60secondsafterfailureofnormalpower,orifthestandby
power source is of insufficient capacity to operate all lifts at the same time, all lifts shall be
transferredtostandbypowerinsequence,shallreturntothedesignatedlandinganddischarge
their load. After all lifts have been returned to the designated landing, at least one lift shall
remainoperablefromthestandbypower.
ADA(AmericanDisabilitiesAct)ApprovedTypeLift
(a) AtleastoneoftheliftsofanyliftbankshallhavefeaturesasperrequirementsofADAaccessibility
guidelines.
(b) Accessible lifts shall be on an accessible route and shall comply with the ASME A17.11990, safety
codeforElevatorsandEscalactors.
(c) Lift operation shall be automatic. It shall have door safeties as per clause 4.2.3.9. It shall have self
levelingfeatureasperclause4.2.3.13.
(d) Hallcallbuttonsintheliftlobbiesandhallsshallbecenteredat1065mmabovethefloor.Suchcall
buttons shall havevisualsignals toindicate when eachcall isregistered and eachcall isanswered.
Call buttons shall be a minimum 19 mm in the smallest dimension. The button designating the up
directionshallbeonthetop.
(e) A visible and audible signal shall be provided at each hoistway entrance to indicate which car is
answering a call. Audible signal shall sound once for the up direction and twice for the down
direction or shall have verbal annunciators that say up or down. visible signals shall have the
followingfeatures:
i.
Hall lantern fixtures shall be mounted so that their centerline is at least 1830 mm above the
lobbyfloor.
ii.
Visualelementsshallbeatleast64mminthesmallestdimension.
iii. Signals shall be visible from the vicinity of the hall call button. Incar lanterns located in cars,
visiblefromthevicinityofhallcallbuttons,andconformingtotheaboverequirements,shallbe
acceptable.
(f) AlllifthoistwayentranceshallhaveraisdandBraillefloordesignationsprovidedonbothjambs.The
centerline of the characters shall be 1525 mm above finish floor. Such characters shall be 50 mm
high.Permanentlyappliedplatesareacceptableiftheyarepermanentlyfixedtothejambs.
(g) Liftdoorsshallopenandcloseautomatically.Theyshallbeprovidedwithareopeningdevicethatwill
stopandreopenacardoorandhoistwaydoorautomaticallyifthedoorbecomesobstructedbyan
object or person. The device shall be capable of completing these operations without requiring
contact for an obstruction passing through the opening at heights of 125 mm and 735 mm above
finish floor. Door reopening devices shall remain effective for at least 20 seconds. After such an
interval,doorsmaycloseinaccordancewiththerequirementsofASME17.11990.
(h) Theminimumacceptabletimefromnotificationthatacarisansweringacalluntilthedoorsofthat
carstarttocloseshallbecalculatedfromthefollowingequation:
T=D/(445mm/s)
Where,
T=totaltimeinseconds
D=distanceinmillimetersfromapointinthelobbyorcorridor1525mmdirectlyinfrontofthe
farthestcallbuttoncontrollingthatcartothecenterlineofitshoistwaydoor.Forcarswithincar
lanterns,Tbeginswhenthelanternisvisiblefromthevicinityofhallcallbuttonsandanaudible
signalissounded.Theminimumacceptablenotificationtimeshallbe5seconds.
(i) Theminimumtimeforliftdoorstoremainfullyopeninresponsetoacarcallshallbe3seconds.
6175
Part8
BuildingServices
(j) Thefloorareaofliftcarsshallprovidespaceforwheelchairuserstoenterthecar,maneuverwithin
reachofcontrols,andexitfromthecar.Theminimumwidthanddepthofthecarshallbe2000mm
and1291mm.Theclearancebetweenthecarplatformsillandtheedgeofanyhoistwaylandingshall
benogreaterthan32mm.
(k) Thelevelofilluminationatthecarcontrols,platform,andcarthresholdandlandingsillshallbeat
least53.8lux.
(l) Liftcontrolpanelsshallhavethefollowingfeatures:
4.2.1.5
i.
Buttons:Allcontrolbuttonsshallbeatleast19mmintheirsmallestdimensions.Theyshallbe
raisedorflush.
ii.
Tactile. Braille,andVisualControlIndicators : All controlbuttonsshall be designated byBraille

and by raised standard alphabet characters for letters, Arabic characters for numerals, or
standardsymbols,andasrequiredinASME17.11990.Thecallbuttonforthemainentryfloor
shallbedesignatedbyaraisedstaratleftofthefloordesignation,andasrequiredinASME17.1
1990. All raised designations for control buttons shall be placed immediately to the left of the
buttontowhichtheyapply.Appliedplates,permanentlyattached,areanacceptablemeansto
provide raised control designations. Floor buttons shall be provided with visual indicators to
showwheneachcallisregistered.Thevisualindicatorsshallbeextinguishedwheneachcallis
answered.
ResponsibilityoftheOwner
(a) It is the responsibility of the owner of the premises where the lift will be installed, to obtain
necessary permission from the Authority before the erection of lifts(s) and for the subsequent
commissioningandoperationoflift(s).
(b) Theownershallconductperiodicinspectionandmaintaintheinstallationinsafeworkingcondition
atalltimes.
(c) ConformitywiththeprovisionsofthisCodedoesnotrelievetheownerofhisresponsibilitytosatisfy
the requirements of any other Act, Regulations or Ordinances that may be in force from time to
time.
4.2.1.6
ConformitywithBangladeshElectricityAct
Allelectricalworkinconnectionwithelectricalliftsshallbecarriedoutinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthe
latestBangladeshElectricityActandtheprovisionsofanyofitsbyelawsandregulations,andshallalsocomply
withtherequirementsofChapter1ofPart8ofthisCode.
4.2.1.7
Fordetailedspecificationsoflifts,escalatorsandmovingwalksreferenceshallbemadetothelatesteditionofthe
ANSI/ASMEA17.1codeortheEuropeanEN81code.
4.2.2 SafetyConsiderations
4.2.2.1
FireProtection
(a) Necessaryprovisionsshallbekepttopreventspreadoffirethroughtheliftwell.Adequatemeasures
shallalsobetakentoreducethepossibilityofspreadoffirefromthemachineroomintotheliftwell.
(b) Lift well enclosuresandmachine roomshallbeconstructed with fire resistant materials.Incase of
fire,theliftwellenclosureshallnotgiveoffharmfulgasorfumes.
(c) Where lift enclosures are firerated, manually closing doors at the enclosure well shall have afire
rating equal to that of the enclosure well and automatically closing doors shall have a fire rating
equaltoonehalfofthatoftheenclosurewell.
4.2.2.2
FireSwitch
When required fire switch shall be provided, the function of which is to enable the fire authority to take over
completecontrolofoneormoreliftsinaninstallationbyoperatingwithafireman'skey.
6176
Vol.3
4.2.2.3
Chapter4
Fireman'sLift
For buildings having height of 15m or more at least one lift shall meet the requirements of fireman's lift as
describedbelow:
(a) Liftcarshallhavefloorareaofnotlessthan1.44sq.m.Itshallalsohavealoadingcapacityofnotless
than544kg(8persons).
(b) Liftlandingdoorsshallhaveminimumfireresistanceoftwohours.
(c) Doorsshallbeofautomaticoperationforcarandlanding.
(d) The lift speedshall be 1.0m/s ormoreso asto reachthe top floor from theground (orentrance)
floorwithin60seconds.
4.2.2.4
WarningSigns
Warningsignsagainstuseoftheliftsduringafireshallbedisplayedneareverycallbuttonforapassengerliftin
accordancewithSec4.2.10.3(c).
4.2.2.5
OverSpeedSafety
Efficient automatic devices shall be provided and maintained in each lift to stop the car by suitable braking
devicesandtocutoffpowerfromthemotorwheneverexcessivedescendingspeedisattained.
4.2.2.6
OverTravelSafety
Efficientautomaticdevicesshallbeprovidedandmaintainedineachlifttocutoffpowerfromthemotorifthecar
overtravelseitherthetoporbottomterminallanding.
4.2.2.7
ManualCrankingSystem
Thereshallhavestandardcrankingsystemoperablefromtheliftmachineroomtomovethecarmanually,during
apowerfailure,tothenearesthigherorlowerlandingforevacuationofpassengers.
4.2.2.8
EmergencyEvacuationSystem
Thereshallhavearrangementforemergencyunlockingofthelandingandliftdoorwithaspecialkeyfromany
landingforevacuationaswellasformaintenance.
4.2.2.9
ProtectionofRopeBreakage
Necessaryprotectionshallbetakenagainstbreakingofsteelrope.
4.2.2.10 SafeWorkingEnvironment
Inordertomaintainasafeworkenvironment,andtoavoidpotentialhazards,thefollowingshallbeprovided:
(a) cautionsignshallbeinstalledintheareaslistedbelowwherepotentialhazardexists:
i.
Triphazardinmachineroom;and
ii.
Cautionnoticeagainstunauthorizeduseofrescuedevices(forexample,brakereleasedevice).
(b) Useofhardhatsforentryinpitandcartopduringconstructionperiod.
(c) Warningsignshallbeprovidedonthecontrollersoalsotoeliminatethepossibilityofcontactwith
anyexposedorconcealedpowercircuit.
(d) Cartopbarricadesystemshallbeprovidedasprimaryprotectionagainstfall,oncartop.
(e) Wheneverworkiscarriedoutontheliftandliftisnotrequiredtobemovedonpower,noticeshall
beputonelectricalmainswitchindicatingrequirementofdeenergizedcondition.
(f) Duringliftinstallation/maintenance,protectionagainstfallshallbeprovidedwithsuitablebarricades
forallopenlandingentrances.
4.2.2.11 CarDoorSafeties
Liftcardoorsandlandingdoorsshallbeprovidedwithnecessarysafetiesasperclause4.2.3.9.
6177
Part8
BuildingServices
4.2.3 LiftCars
4.2.3.1
LiftcarsshallhavenetinsideareafordifferentloadingcapacitiesnotmorethanthatshowninTable8.4.1.
4.2.3.2
Liftcarframeshallbeofsteelconstructionhavingsufficientstrengthtosupportsafelytheratedload,theliftcar
andallrequisiteaccessories.
4.2.3.3
Thereshallbeprovisionsforelasticisolatorsbetweenmetalpartstoensurelowvibrationandlownoiseduring
cartravel.
Table8.4.1MaximumInsideNetPlatformAreasforVariousRatedLoads
Maximum
Numberof
RatedLoad
Maximum
Maximum
(mass)
AvailableCar
Numberof
Area(seenote)
(m2)
Passengers
(kg)
Area(seenote)
Passengers
100
0.40
975
2.35
14
180
0.50
1000
2.40
14
225
0.70
1050
2.50
15
300
0.90
1125
2.65
16
375
1.10
1200
2.80
17
400
1.17
1250
2.90
18
450
1.30
1275
2.95
18
525
1.45
1350
3.10
19
600
1.60
1425
3.25
20
630
1.66
1500
3.40
22
675
1.75
10
1600
3.56
23
750
1.90
11
1800
3.88
26
800
2.00
11
2100
4.36
30
825
2.05
12
2500
5.00
36
900
2.20
13
RatedLoad
Maximum
(mass)
AvailableCar
(kg)
(m2)
Beyond2500kg,add0.16m2foreach100kgextra
Note:
4.2.3.4
Maximumavailablecararea=(WxD)+Availableareanearthecardoor(s)insidethecar.
Where,
W=Carinsidewidth,m
D=Carinsidedepth,m
The car bodywork shall be of sufficient mechanical strength to resist accidental impact by users or goods. The
roof,solidorperforated,shallbecapableofsupportingtwopersonsoraminimumloadof150kg.Perforations
shallbesufficientlycloseinmeshnotexceeding40mmtoprovidereasonableprotectionagainstfallingarticlesto
anypersontravellinginthecar.
4.2.3.5
Thefloorshallbeasmoothnonslipsurface.Ifcarpetingisused,itshallbesecurelyattached,heavyduty,witha
tightweaveandlowprofile,installedwithoutpadding.
4.2.3.6
6178
Vol.3
Chapter4
Ahandrailshallbeprovidedonatleastonewallofthecar,preferablytherear.Therailsshallbesmoothandthe
insidesurfaceatleast38mmclearofthewallsatanominalheightof800mmfromthefloor.
4.2.3.7
Heightoftheentrancetotheliftcarshallnotbelessthan2m.
4.2.3.8
The lift car doors, shall be power operated horizontally sliding type (noncollapsible), opened and closed by
automatic means. However, if space is limited, collapsible doors may be installed in case of buildings not
exceeding8storeysor26minheight,buttheyshallnotbepoweroperated.Slidingdoorsshallbeguidedattop
andbottom.Meansshallbeprovidedtopreventallslidingdoorsfromjumpingoffthetracksandsuitablestops
shallbeprovidedtopreventthehangercarriagefromleavingtheendofthetrack.
4.2.3.9
LiftDoorSafeties
(a) Carandlandingdoorsshallopenandcloseinfullsynchronizationbeingmechanicallyconnectedto
eachother.
(b) Doorsclosedbyautomaticmeansshallbeprovidedwithdoorreopeningdevice(s)whichwillfunction
to stop and reopen a car door and adjacent landing door in case the car door is obstructed while
closing. Thereopeningdevice shallalso becapable of sensinganobject orperson in thepath ofa
closingdoorwithoutrequiringcontactforactivation.Doorreopeningdevicesshallremaineffective
foraperiodofnotlessthan20seconds.Theoperatingmechanismforthecardoorshallnotexerta
forcemorethan125N.
(c) Cardoorsshallbeequippedwithefficientinterlockingorotherdevicessothatthedoorcannotbe
openedexceptwhentheliftcarisatthelanding,andthattheliftcarcannotbemovedawayfrom
thelandinguntiltheleadingedgeofthesingleslideordoublespeeddooriswithin50mmofthe
nearestfaceofthedoorjambortheleadingedgesofthecentreopeningdoorsarewithin50mmof
contactofeachother.
4.2.3.10
Liftcardoors,whenclosed,shallcovertheopeningfullyexceptinthecaseofverticalbipartingcardoorsofgoods
lifts.
4.2.3.11
Wheretheliftcarhassolidenclosureanddoors,provisionshallbemadeforafanforadequateventilation.To
permitswitchingoffthepowersupplytotheliftwithoutswitchingoffthefanandlight,aseparateswitchshallbe
providedforfanandlight.
4.2.3.12
Anyvisionpanelinacardoorshallbefireresistingandshallbeofsafetywiredglassorsimilarmaterial.Thearea
between division bars or other supports shall not exceed 0.1 m2. The bottom rail of a framed and glazed door
shallbenotlessthan300mmdeep.Anyprojectionsonorrecesses(includingvisionpanels)inslidingcardoors
shallbekepttoaminimuminordertoavoidfingertrappingbetweenslidingpartsofthedoorandanyfixedpart
ofthestructure.
4.2.3.13
Theliftcarshallbeprovidedwithaselflevelingfeaturethatwillautomaticallybringthecartothefloorlanding
withinatoleranceof+13mmundernormalloadingandunloadingconditions.Thisselflevelingshall,withinits
zone,beentirelyautomaticandindependentoftheoperatingdeviceandshallcorrecttheovertravelorunder
travel.Thecarshallalsobemaintainedapproximatelylevelwiththelanding,irrespectiveofload.Wherenoself
levelingdeviceisprovided,thelevelingdifferencebetweenthecarandthelandingshallbewithin+40mm.
4.2.3.14
Caroperatingpanelsshallbeconvenientlylocatedonthesidenearthedoorsothatpassengerscanregistercalls
asquicklyaspossible.Thecentrelineofthealarmbuttonandemergencystopswitchshallbeatanominalheight
of 890 mm, and the highest floor button no higher than 1.37 m from the floor. Floor registration buttons,
6179
Part8
BuildingServices
exclusive of border, shall be a minimum of 18 mm in size, raised, flush or recessed. Visual indication shall be
provided to show each call registered and extinguished when the call is answered. Depth of flush or recessed
buttons when operated shall not exceed 10 mm. Markings shall be adjacent to the controls on a contrasting
colourbackgroundtotheleftofthecontrols;lettersornumbersshallbeaminimumof15mmhighandraisedor
recessed0.75mm.Signplatespermanentlyattachedshallbeacceptable.Emergencycontrolsshallbegrouped
togetheratthebottomofthepanel.
4.2.3.15
A suitable battery operated alarm system shall be installed inside the lift car so as to raise an alarm at a
convenientplaceforgettingassistanceforpassengerstrappedinsidetheliftcar.
4.2.3.16
Acarpositionindicatorshallbeprovidedabovethecaroperatingpanelorovertheopeningofeachcartoshow
thepositionofthecarintheliftwellbyilluminatedvisualindicatorcorrespondingtothelandingatwhichthecar
isstoppedorthroughwhichitispassing.
In addition, an audible signal shall preferably be installed which shall sound to tell a passenger that the car is
stopping at a floor served by the lift. A special button located with emergency controls may be provided,
operationofwhichshallactivateanaudiblesignalonlyforthedesiredtrip.
4.2.3.17
Each lift car shall be fitted with a light and the car shall be kept illuminated during the whole period the lift is
availableforuse.
4.2.3.18
In installations with more than two lifts in a bank, a telephone or other device for twoway communication
betweeneachliftcarandaconvenientpointoutsidetheliftwellshallpreferablybeprovided.Markingsorthe
internationalsymbolfortelephonesshallbeplacedadjacenttothecontrolonacontrastingcolourbackground.
4.2.4 LiftWellandLiftWellEnclosures
4.2.4.1
TheLiftwellshallonlybeusedforhousingequipmentformingpartoftheliftinstallationorforitsoperationand
maintenance.Nootherequipmentorservicesshallbeaccommodatedtherein.Forthispurpose,themainelectric
supplylineforliftmachineshallbedeemedtobepartoftheliftandtheelectriccable,iflaidalongtheliftwell
shaft,shallbeproperlyclampedtothewall.
4.2.4.2
Theliftwellshallnotformpartoftheventilationsystemofthebuilding.
4.2.4.3
In multistory residential buildings, hotels and hospitals, lift well shall be isolated from sleeping rooms (bed
rooms)bylobbiesorotherspaces.
4.2.4.4
Liftwellshallnotbelocatedaboveanyroom,passageorthoroughfare.However,whenabsolutelynecessary,this
can only be permissible with the prior approval of the competent authority and in such case the following
provisionsshallbemade:
(a) Thepitshallbesufficientlystrongtowithstandtheimpactoftheliftcarwiththeratedloadorthe
impactofthecounterweightwheneitheroftheseis descendingattheratedspeedoratgovernor
trippingspeed;
(b) Springoroilbuffersshallbeprovidedforliftcarandcounterweight;and
(c) Thecarandcounterweightshallbeprovidedwithagovernoroperatedsafetygear.
4.2.4.5
6180
Vol.3
Chapter4
When there are three or fewer lift cars in a building, they may be located within the same lift well enclosure.
Whentherearefourliftcars,theyshallbedividedinsuchamannerthatatleasttwoseparateliftwellenclosures
areprovided.Whentherearemorethanfourlifts,notmorethanfourliftcarsmaybelocatedwithinasinglelift
wellenclosure.
4.2.4.6
Theliftcaranditscounterweightshalltravelinjuxtapositiontoeachother.
4.2.4.7
TotallyEnclosedWells
Theenclosureofthetotallyenclosedwellsshallbecontinuousandshallextendonallsidesfromfloortoflooror
stair to stair. No openings except for doors at landings and necessary access panels shall be provided. The
enclosure shall be of sufficient mechanical strength to support the lift guides at appropriate intervals and to
supportintruealignmentthelandingdoorswithoperatingmechanismsandlockingdevices.
4.2.4.8
OpenTypeWells
(a) WhenLiftwellenclosuresareconstructedofwiregrilleorsimilarmaterial,themeshopeningshall
not be greater than 30 mm (except for door at landings). Such enclosures shall be of sufficient
strength to resist accidental impact by users of adjoining areas or by materials or vehicles being
movedinthevicinity.
(b) Where the clearance between the inside of an open type lift well enclosure and any moving or
movablepartoftheliftequipmentorapparatusislessthan50mm,theopeningsintheenclosure
materialshallnotbemorethan10mm.Largeropeningsupto30mmshallbepermissibleprovidedit
isfurtherprotectedbysquaremeshnettingwithapertureofnotgreaterthan10mmandwirenot
smallerthan1mmindiameter.
4.2.4.9
There shall be no opening in the lift well enclosure for access to the lift well through the space under the
counterweight.
4.2.4.10
Theinsidesurfacesoftheliftwellenclosuresfacinganycarentranceshallformasmoothcontinuousflushsurface
devoid of projections or recesses. Where projections or recesses cannot be avoided, the underside of these
projections/recessesshallbebevelledtoanangleof60degreesfromthehorizontalbymeansofmetalplatesor
otherfireresistivematerialsasshowninFig8.4.1.
4.2.4.11
Sufficient clearance space shall be provided between the guides for the car and the side walls of the lift well
enclosuretoallowsafeandeasyaccesstothepartsofthesafetygearsfortheirmaintenanceandrepairs.
4.2.4.12
Maximum clearancebetween theinnersurface of wellenclosure onthe landingdoorside and anypart ofcar
facingthesurfaceshallbe150mmexceptthat230mmand200mmclearancewillbepermissiblewhenpower
operatedverticallybipartinglandingdoorsortwospeedhorizontallyslidingdoorsareinstalledrespectively.
4.2.4.13
Eachliftwellservingmorethantwofloorsshallhavevent(s)properlylocatedatthetopoftheexteriorwall.The
ventsshallbelouveredwithbirdsscreens.Ifthewellislocatedinsuchawaythatnoexteriorwallisavailablefor
louvers,ventswithconnectingnoncombustibleductstoanoutsidewallshallbeprovided.Theareaofventshall
notbelessthan3.5%oftheareaoftheliftwell,providedthataminimumof0.3m2perliftisprovided.Ofthe
totalrequiredventareanotlessthanonethirdshallbepermanentlyopenorautomaticallyopenedbyadamper.
4.2.4.14 Bottomcarclearance,PassengerandServiceLift
When the car rests on its fully compressed buffer there shall be a vertical clearance of not less than 600 mm
betweenthepitfloorandthebufferstrikerplateortheloweststructuralormechanicalpartequipmentordevice
installed.Theclearanceshallbeavailablebeneaththewholeareaoftheplatformexceptfor:
6181
Part8
BuildingServices
(a) guideshoesorrollers,safetyjawblocks,platformaprons,guardsofotherequipmentlocatedwithin
300mmmeasuredhorizontallyfromthesidesofthecarplatform;and
(b) compensatingsheaves.
Providedthatinallthecases,includingsmallcars,aminimumclearanceof600mmisavailableoverahorizontal
areaof800mmx500mm.
Provided also that in all the cases, when the car rests on its fully compressed buffers, there shall be a vertical
clearanceofnotlessthan50mmbetweenanypartofthecarandanyobstructionofdevicemountedinthepit.
4.2.4.15 Topcarclearance,PassengerandServiceLift
The vertical clearance between the car crosshead and the nearest overhead obstruction within 500 mm
measuredhorizontallytothenearestpartofthecrossheadwhenthecarplatformislevelwiththetoplanding,
shallbenotlessthanthesumofthefollowing;
(a) Thebottomcounterweightrunby.
(b) Thestrokeofthecounterweightbufferused.
(c) Onehalfofthegravitystoppingdistancebasedon:
i.
115percentoftheratedspeedwhereoilbuffersareusedandnoprovisionismadetoprevent
thejumpofthecaratcounterweightbufferengagement;and
ii.
Governortrippingspeedwherespringbuffersareused.
NOTEThegravitystoppingdistancebasedonthegravityretardationfromanyinitialvelocitymaybe
calculatedaccordingtothefollowingformula
S=51V2
where
S=Freefallinmm(gravitystoppingdistance),and
V=Initialvelocityinm/s
(d) 600mm.
Where there is a projection below the ceiling of the well and the projection is more than 500 mm, measured
horizontallyfromthecentrelineofthecrossheadbutovertheroofofthecar,aminimumverticalclearancenot
lessthanthatcalculatedaboveshallalsobeavailablebetweentheroofofthecarandtheprojection.
Providedthattheverticalclearancebetweenanyequipmentmountedontopofthecarandthenearestoverhead
obstructionshallbenotlessthanthesumofthethreeitems(a),(b)and(c)ascalculatedaboveplus150mm
4.2.4.16 Bottom Runby for Cars and Counterweights, passenger and service lift
Thebottomrunbyofcarsandcounterweightsshallbenotlessthanthefollowing:
(a) 150mmwhereoilbuffersareused;
(b) Wherespringbuffersareused;
i.
150mmforcontrolsasin5.1.3.17(d)to5.1.3.17(h)
ii.
Notlessthanthefollowingforcontrolsasin5.1.3.17(a)to5.1.3.17.
Ratedspeed Runby
m/smm
Upto0.125 75
0.125to0.25 150
0.25to0.50
225
0.50to1 300
4.2.4.17 MaximumBottomRunby,passengerandservicelift
6182
Vol.3
Chapter4
Innocasethemaximumbottomrunbyshallexceedthefollowing:
(a) 600mmforcars;and
(b) 900mmforcounterweights.
4.2.4.18 TopCounterweightClearances,passengerandservicelift
Thetopcounterweightclearanceshallbenotlessthanthesumofthefollowingfouritems:
(a) thebottomcarrunby;
(b) thestrokeofthecarbufferused;
(c) 150mm;and
(d) onehalfthegravitystoppingdistancebasedon
i.
onehundredandfifteenpercentoftheratedspeedwhereoilbuffersareusedandnoprovision
ismadetopreventjumpofthecounterweightatcarbufferengagement;and
ii.
governortrippingspeedwherespringbuffersareused.
4.2.4.19 Topcarclearance,Goodslift
Thetopcarclearanceshallbesufficienttoavoidanyprotrudingpartfixedonthetopofthecarcomingindirect
contactwiththeceilingordivertingsheave.
The clearance shall be calculated taking into account the following and shall not be less than the sum of the
followingfouritems:
(a) Thebottomcounterweightrunby,
(b) Thestrokeofthecounterweightbufferused,
(c) Thedimensionsoftheportionofthedivertingsheavehangingunderneaththeceilingintheliftwell,
and
(d) 150mmforcompensatingforgravitystoppingdistanceandfuturerepairstotheropeconnectionsat
counterweightandatthecaroratthesuspensionpoints.
4.2.4.20 Bottomcarclearance,goodslift
Thebottomcarclearanceshallbemaintainedinsuchawaythatthecounterweightshallnotcomeincontactwith
theceilingoranyparthangingunderneaththeceiling,whenthecarcompletelyrestsonfullycompressedbuffers,
providedthebuffersarespringtypemountedonsolidconcreteorsteelbed.
Incaseofwoodenbuffersthebottomcarclearanceshallbemaintainedinsuchawaythatthetotaldownward
travel of the car from the service level of the immediate floor near the pit, shall not be more than the top
counterweightclearance,whenthewoodenbuffersarecompletelycrushed.
4.2.4.21 Topcounterweightclearance,goodslift
Thetopclearanceforthecounterweightcanbecalculatedtakingintoaccountthefollowingandshallnotbeless
thanthesumofthefollowingthreeitems:
(a) Carrunby,
(b) Compressionofthebufferspringorheightofthewoodenblockusedasbuffer,and
(c) 150 mm to compensate for gravity stopping distance for counterweight and any future repairs to
ropeconnectionsatthecounterweightatthecarendsoratthesuspensionpoints.
4.2.4.22 RunbyforCarsandCounterweights,goodslift
Thebottomrunbyforcarsandcounterweightsshallnotbelessthan150mm
4.2.4.23 Maximumbottomrunby,goodslift
Innocasethemaximumbottomrunbyshallexceed300mm.
4.2.4.24 OverheadHeight
TheoverheadheightshallnotbelessthanasshowninTable8.4.2
4.2.4.25 Liftwelldimensions
6183
Part8
BuildingServices
Recommended dimensions of lift well and its entrances are provided in Table 8.4.2(A), Table 8.4.2 (B), Table
8.4.2(C)andTable8.4.2(D).Thesedimensionsareprimarilyforarchitectsandbuildingplannersforplanningoflift
well.
4.2.5 LandingDoors
4.2.5.1
Everylanding,wherethereisaccessfromthelandingtotheliftcar,shallbefittedwithalandingdoor.Suchdoor
shallbefittedwithefficientinterlockingorotherdevicessoastoensurethatthedoorcannotbeopenedexcept
whentheliftcarisatthelandingandthattheliftcarcannotbemovedawayfromthelandinguntilthedooris
closed and locked. Where mid bar collapsible doors are used for landing entrance, they shall not be power
operated.
4.2.5.2
Wherelandingdoorsaremanuallyoperatedandnoindicatorsareprovided,visionpanelsofsimilarconstruction
asinSec4.2.3.12shallbeprovided.
Figure8.4.1:BevelledProjections/Recesses
4.2.5.3
Noautomaticfiredoororshutterwhichoperatesbymeansofafusiblelinkorotherwiseduetotheaction of
heatshallbeallowedinanylandingopeningorliftwayenclosureofanylift,ifsuchopeninggivesaccesstoany
exitfromthebuilding.
4.2.5.4
6184
Vol.3
Chapter4
Incaseofpassengerlifts,solidslidingdoorsshallpreferablybeprovidedforbuildingsabovesixstoreysor20m
inheight.Solidswingdoorsmayalsobeusedwhereslidingspaceisnotavailableparalleltotheentrancedoor.
Collapsibledoorsshallnotbeprovidedincaseofbuildingsaboveeightstoreysor26minheight.
4.2.6 GuideRails
4.2.6.1
Guiderailsshallbemadeofhighqualitysteel,straightandofproperthickness.Wherethenatureofprocesses
carried on in the building gives rise to acid fumes or corrosive substances the steel rails shall be treated for
corrosionresistance.
4.2.6.2
Carandcounterweightguiderailsshallbecontinuousthroughouttheentirelengthrightfromthebottomofthe
pit floor to the topmost floorserved plus additional lengthas may be required foroperation of safety against
overrun.Theyshallbeprovidedwithadequatebracketsorequivalentfixingdevicesofsuchdesignandspacing
thattherailsshallnotdeflectmorethan4mmundernormaloperations
4.2.6.3
For passenger and goods lifts having a rated speed of 0.5 m/s or more, the car guide rails shall have working
surfacesmachinedandsmooth.
4.2.7 LiftPits
4.2.7.1
Aliftpitshallbeprovidedatthebottomofeveryliftwell.TheminimumdepthofliftpitshallbeasshowninTable
8.4.2.
4.2.7.2
Lift pits shall be of sound construction and shall be maintained in dry and clean condition. Where necessary,
provisionshallbemadeforpermanentdrainage.
4.2.7.3
Liftpitshavingdepthmorethan1.6mshallbeprovidedwithasuitabledescendingarrangementtoreachthelift
pit.
4.2.7.4
Lightpointsshallbeprovidedinallliftpitsforfacilityofrepairandmaintenanceworks.
4.2.7.5
Incaseofagroupoftwoormoreliftwells,arrangementsshallbeprovidedtoallowinspectionofaliftpitthrough
theadjoiningone.
6185
Part8
BuildingServices
Table8.4.2MinimumPitDepths,OverheadHeightsandMachineRoomsizesforTractionLiftsOverheadMachines
Speed(m/s)
Upto
0.70
>0.70
1.00
>1.00
1.50
>1.50
1.75
>1.75
2.00
>2.00
2.50
>2.50
3.00
>3.00
4.00
1500
1500
1600
2150
2200
2500
3000
3200
4200
4250
4800
4800
5200
5400
i)PitDepth,mm
ii)OverheadHeight,mm
D+
D+
D+
D+
D+
D+
D+
D+3000
2000
2000
2000
2500
2500
2500
3000
iii)MachineroomDepth,mm
C+
C+
C+
C+
C+
C+
C+
C+
1000
1000
1200
1200
1500
1500
1800
1800
iv)MachineRoomwidth,mm
NOTES:
1.Cisliftwelldepth(mm)andDisliftwellwidth(mm).
2.Thetotaloverheadheighthasbeencalculatedonthebasisofcarheightof2300mm.
3.Dimensionsofpitdepthandoverheadheightmaydifferinpracticeasperindividualmanufacturer'sdesigndependinguponload,
speedanddrive.However,thepitdepthandoverheadheightshallbesuchastoconformtotherequirementsofbottomclearance
andtopclearanceInaccordancewiththeacceptedstandard.
Table8.4.2(A)RecommendedDimensionsofPassenger&ServiceLiftsandLiftWells
Capacity
CarDimensions
(mm)
LiftWellDimensions
(mm)
Entrance
Size(mm)
Persons
Kg
Width
Depth
Width
Depth
272
1100
700
1900
1300
700(Min)
408
1100
1000
1900
1700
700(Min)
544
1300
1100
1900
1900
800
10
680
1300
1350
1900
2100
800
13
884
2000
1100
2500
1900
900
16
1088
2000
1300
2500
2100
1000
20
1360
2000
1500
2500
2400
1000
Notes:
1.Incaseofmanuallyoperateddoors,clearentrancewillbereducedbytheamountofprojectionofhandleon
thelanding.
2.Alldimensionsgivenaboveforliftshavingcentreopeningpoweroperateddoorswithcounterweightatrear,
are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and building planners. Any variations mutually agreed
betweenthemanufacturerandpurchaserarepermitted.Howevervariationin:
(a) Car inside dimensions shall be within the maximum area limits specified in accordance with Table
8.4.1
(b) EntrancewidthonthehighersideIspermitted.
(c) Entrancewidthmaybereduceduptoamaximumof100mmsubjecttoaminimumof700mm.
Table8.4.2(B)RecommendedDimensionsofGoodsLiftsandLiftWells
Load(Kg)
500
6186
CarDimensions(mm)
LiftWellDimensions
(mm)
Width
Depth
Width
Depth
1100
1200
1900
1500
Entrance
Size(mm)
1100
Vol.3
Chapter4
1000
1400
1800
2300
2100
1400
1500
1700
2000
2600
2300
1700
2000
1700
2500
2600
2800
1700
2500
2000
2500
2900
2800
2000
3000
2000
3000
2900
3300
2000
4000
2500
3000
3400
3300
2500
5000
2500
3600
3400
3900
2500
Notes:
1.Thewidthofliftmachineroomshallbeequaltobeliftwellwidthsubjecttoaminimumof2500mm.
2.Clearentrancewidthisbasedonverticalliftingcardoorandverticalbipartinglandingdoors.Forcollapsiblemidbardoorsthe
clearentrancewidthwillbereducedby200mm(maximum1800mm).
3.Alldimensionsgivenabovearerecommendeddimensionsprimarilyforarchitectsandbuildingplanners.Anyvariationsmutually
agreedbetweenthemanufacturerandthepurchaserarepermitted.However,variationincarinsidedimensionsshallbewithinthe
maximumarealimitsinaccordancewithTable8.4.1.
4.Fordimensionsofpitdepthandoverheadheight,considerdatashowninTable8.4.2.
Table8.4.2(C)RecommendedDimensionsofHospitalLiftsandLiftWells
Capacity
CarDimensions
(mm)
LiftWellDimensions
(mm)
Entrance
Size(mm)
Persons
Kg
Width
Depth
Width
Depth
12
1020
1000
2400
1800
3000
800
20
1360
1300
2400
2200
3000
1200
26
1768
1600
2400
2400
3000
1200
Notes:
1.Inthecaseofmanuallyoperateddoors,clearentrancewillbereducedbytheamountofprojectionofhandleonthelandingdoor.
2.Although15personscapacityliftisnotstandardone,thisisincludedtocoverliftsofsmallercapacitywhichcanbeusedinsmall
hospitals.
3.Alldimensionsgivenabovearerecommendeddimensionsprimarilyforarchitectsandbuildingplanners.Anyvariationsmutually
agreedbetweenthemanufacturerandthepurchaserarepermitted.However,variationincarinsidedimensionsshallbewithinthe
maximumarealimitsinaccordancewithTable8.4.1.
4.Fordimensionsofpitdepthandoverheadheight,considerdatashowninTable8.4.2.
Table8.4.2(D)RecommendedDimensionsofDumbWaiterandLiftWells(forspeedsupto0.5m/s)
Load
(Kg)
CarInsideDimensions(mm)
LiftWellDimensions
(mm)
Entrance
Size(mm)
Width
Depth
Height
Width
Depth
100
700
700
800
1200
900
700
150
800
800
900
1300
1000
800
200
900
900
1000
1400
1100
900
250
1000
1000
1200
1500
1200
1000
Notes:
1.Entrancewidthisbasedonassumptionofprovisionofverticalbipartingdoors(nocardoorisnormallyprovided).
4.2.8 Buffers
4.2.8.1
Buffersofspringoroilshallbeusedforsafety.Buffersshallbefittedundertheliftcarandcounterweightdirectly
oronthepitfloorwithsuitableconcreteorsteelfoundation.Oilresistantrubberbuffersmaybeusedwithlifts
6187
Part8
BuildingServices
having a rated speed not exceeding 0.25 m/s. Lifts having rated speed in excess of 0.25 m/s and up to and
including 1.0 m/s, spring or oil buffers shall be used. For lifts having rated speed more than 1.0 m/s, only oil
buffersshallbeused.Woodenblockssuitablytreatedmayalsobeusedforserviceliftsforspeedsupto0.5m/s.
Buffersshallbelocatedsymmetricallywithreferenceto theverticalcentrelineofthecar/counterweightwitha
toleranceof50mm.
4.2.8.2
Theminimumstrokeofoilbuffersshallbesuchthatthecarorthecounterweightonstrikingthebuffersat115
percentofratedspeedshallbebroughttorestwithanaverageretardationofnotmorethan10m/s2.
4.2.8.3
Whenbuffersarestruckwithaninitialspeedoflessthan115percentoftheratedspeed,thepeakretardation
shallnotexceed25m/s2foradurationmorethan0.04second,withanyloadinthecarrangingfrom75kgtothe
ratedload.
4.2.9 MachineRoomandOverheadStructures
4.2.9.1
Theliftmachineroomshallonlybeusedforhousingliftmachinery,controllerandotherassociatedapparatusand
equipment.Nootherservicesorequipmentshallbeaccommodatedtherein.Ifmotorgeneratorsforcontrolling
speed of multivoltage or variable voltage machines, secondary sheaves, pulleys, governors, floor selecting
equipmentandotherassociatedequipmentareinstalledinanadjoiningroom,thisroomshallalsobereserved
forexclusiveuseofliftequipment.
4.2.9.2
Lift machine room and other associated equipment rooms shall be fire proof, weather proof and adequately
lighted.Meanstopreventspreadoffireorsmokefrommachineroomintoliftwellshallbeprovided.Machine
roomshallhavepermanentventilationopeningdirecttotheopenairhavingafreeareanotlessthan0.1m2per
lift.Theambienttemperatureofmachineroomshallbemaintainedbetween+5Cand+40C
4.2.9.3
Theheightofthemachineroomshallnotbelessthan2.30mthroughoutundertheliftingbeam(trolleybeam)to
allowanyportionofequipmenttobeaccessibleandremovableforrepairandreplacement.Anoverheadtrolley
beam of steel construction of adequate strength shall be provided in the machine room, for movement of
equipmentduringinstallation.
4.2.9.4
Themachineroomshallbeadequatelysizedandshallhavesufficientfloorarearequiredforeasyaccesstoall
parts of the machines and equipment located therein for purposes of inspection, maintenance or repair.
Clearancespaceof1mshallbeprovidedonthosesidesofcontrolpanelswheremaintenanceisrequiredtobe
carriedoutwhilethepanelisenergized,otherwise0.5mclearancespacemaybeprovided.Forplanningpurposes
theliftmachineroomsizecanbeasshownInTable8.4.2
4.2.9.5
Theroomshallbekeptclosed,excepttothosewhoareconcernedwiththeoperationandmaintenanceofthe
equipment. When the electrical voltage exceeds 220/230V dc, a danger notice plate shall be displayed
permanentlyontheoutsideofthedoorandonornearthemachinery.
4.2.9.6
Machineroomfloorshallnothaveholes/punchesinitexceptfornecessarysmallopeningsforpassageofropes
cablesetc.Ifanymachineroomfloororplatformdoesnotextendtotheenclosingwallstheopensidesshallbe
providedwithhandrailsorotherwisesuitablyguarded.
4.2.9.7
Allmachines,pulleys,overspeedgovernorsandsimilarunitsshallbesecurelyfixedonthemachineroomfloor.
6188
Vol.3
4.2.9.8
Chapter4
Adequateartificiallightshallbeprovidedinthemachineroom.A15amps3pinpoweroutletforhandoperated
toolsanda5amps2pinelectricaloutletforportablehandlampsetshallbeprovidedinthemachineroom.
4.2.9.9
AccesstoMachineRoom
(a) Themachineroomshallbeprovidedwithadirect,independentandconvenientaccess.Accesstoa
machineroomabovealiftwellmaybeeitherfromtherooforbyaninternalstaircase.
(b) Machineroomfloormaybeprovidedwithatrapdoor.Whenaccesstothemachineroomisprovided
throughthetrapdoor,thesizeofthetrapdoorshallnotbelessthan1.0mx1.0motherwiseitmay
be0.5mx0.5m.Trapdoorsshallbehinged,openingintothemachineroom,ofsoundconstruction,
balancedandtightlysecuredtominimizenoisetravel.Handrailsshallbeprovidedaroundtrapdoor
opening.
(c) Whereamachineroomentranceislessthan1.5maboveorbelowtheadjacentfloororroofsurface,
asubstantialpermanentlyattachedladdermaybeused.
(d) Where the machine room entrance is 1.5 m or more above or below the adjacent floor or roof
surface,accessshallbeprovidedbymeansofstandardstairs.
(e) Accesstoamachineroominabasementmaybeprovidedfromacorridor.
(f) Accesstoamachineroomviatheliftwellshallbeprohibited.
(g) Emergencyexitshallbeprovidedincaseoflargemachineroomhavingfourormorelifts.
4.2.9.10
The space at secondary level in which the overhead pulleys, overspeed governors and similar machinery are
housedshallhaveaclearheightofatleast1.2m.Wherepracticable,itshallhaveasubstantialplatformorfloor
and be provided with permanent and adequate artificial illumination. Safe and convenient access to secondary
level shall beprovided. Means of accessbetween a secondary floor and machine roommay be a ladder. Hand
railsshallbeprovidedatplatformandaccesstofloor.
4.2.10 HallButtons,HallLanternsandSpecialSigns
4.2.10.1 HallButtons
(a) Each landing shall have hall call buttons to register call for lift service for upward or downward
movements. The centre line of the hall call buttons shall be at a nominal height of 1 m above the
floor.
(b) Direction buttons, exclusive of borders, shall be a minimum of 18 mm in size, raised, flush or
recessed.Visualindicationshallbeprovidedtoshoweachcallregisteredandextinguishedwhenthe
callisanswered.Depthofflushorrecessedbuttonwhenoperatedshallnotexceed10mm.
4.2.10.2 HallLantern
(a) Where lifts are installed in totally enclosed wells, a visual signal shall be provided at each lift well
entranceindicatingtotheprospectivepassengerthecaransweringthecallanditsdirectionoftravel.
Anaudiblesignalmayalsobeincluded.
(b) Thevisualsignalmaybeintheformofdigitalliftpositionindicatorordirectionalindicator.Thevisual
signal for each direction/lift position shall be a minimum of 62mm in size and visible from the
proximityofthehallcallbuttons.
(c) Thecentrelineofthefixtureshallbelocatedataminimumof1.8mfromthefloor.
4.2.10.3 SpecialSigns
(a) DoorJambMarking:Thefloordesignationshallbeprovidedateachliftwellentranceonbothsides
of jamb visible from within the car and the lift lobby at a height of 1.5 m above the floor.
Designationsshallbeonacontrastingbackground50mmhighandraised0.75mm.
(b) Appliedplatespermanentlyattachedshallbeacceptable.Incaseofacompletelyenclosedliftwella
noticewiththeword'Lift'shallbeplacedoutsideofeachlandingdoor.Electriclightshallbeprovided
suchthatthissignremainsvisibleevenifthesurroundingsaredark
6189
Part8
BuildingServices
(c) Apermanentwarningsignshallbeinstalledimmediatelyaboveeachhallpushbuttonstationoneach
floorreading:INFIREEMERGENCY,DONOTUSELIFT.USEEXITSTAIRS.Thissignshallbeinletters
notlessthan12mmhigh.
The warning sign may consist of incised, inlaid or embossed letters on a metal, wood, plastic or similar plate
securelyandpermanentlyattachedtothewall,orlettersincisedorinlaiddirectlyintothesurfaceofthematerial
formingthewall.
4.2.11 ElectricalWiringandApparatus
4.2.11.1
Construction, installation and maintenance of all electrical supply lines and apparatus in connection with lift
installationshallbedonewithproperprotectionsothattheremaybenodangertopersonstherefrom.Nobare
conductorshallbeusedinanyliftcar.InstallationofelectricalwiringshallconformtotheprovisionsofChapter1.
4.2.11.2
Electricalcircuitsforlightsandventilationfans,andsupplyto3pinand2pinsocketoutletsshallbecontrolledby
aseparatemainswitchorcircuitbreaker,andshallbeindependentofmachinerypowersupplysuchthatlighting
circuitsremainalivewhenpowertomachineryisinterrupted.
4.2.11.3
Suitable cautionary notice shall be affixed near every motor or other apparatus in which energy used is at a
voltageexceeding220volts.
4.2.11.4 TravellingCable
(a) Circuitswhichsupplycurrenttothemotorshallnotbeincludedinanytwinormulticoretravelling
cableusedinconnectionwiththecontrolandsafetydevices.
(b) Atravellingcablewhichincorporatesconductorsforthecontrolcircuitsshallbeseparateanddistinct
fromthatwhichincorporateslightingandsignallingcircuitsincaseofbuildingstenstoreys(32m)or
lessinheight.Incaseofbuildingsmorethantenstoreysor32metresinheightorwherehighspeed
(1.50m/sormore)liftsareemployed,useofasingletravellingcableforlightingandcontrolcircuits
shallbepermitted,providedthatallconductorsareinsulatedforthemaximumvoltageinthecables.
4.2.11.5 SupplyCablesandSwitches
(a) Eachliftshallbeprovidedwithamainswitchorcircuitbreakerofacapacitydeterminedbythelift
manufacturerandtheincomingsupplycableshallterminateinthisswitch.Forasinglelift,thisswitch
shallbefixedadjacenttothemachineroomentrance.Inamachineroomcommontomorethanone
lift,eachmainswitchshallbeconvenientlysituatedwithrespecttotheliftitcontrols.Switchesand
fuses(whichmayformpartofadistributionswitchboard)shallbeprovidedforisolatingthesupply
powertothemachineroom.
(b) Whereasupplycableservesmorethanonelift,adiversityfactormaybeusedforthedetermination
ofconductorsize.Theactualdiversityfactortobeadoptedshallbedecidedbytheliftmanufacturer.
4.2.11.6 Earthing
Allelectricalmachinery/equipmentviz.electricmotor,windingmachine,controlpaneletc.whichnormallycarry
mains current shall be properly connected to the earthing system. Similarly all metallic cases, covers of door
interlocks,doorcontacts,callandcontrolbuttons,stopbuttons,carswitches,limitswitches,junctionboxesand
similar electrical fittings which normally carry only the control current shall also be properly connected to the
earthingsystem.Allearthingterminalandearthingconductorsinthisregardshallconformtotherequirements
ofChapter1.
6190
Vol.3
4.3
Chapter4
4.3.1 NumberofLiftsandCapacity
4.3.1.1
Thenumberoflifts,carcapacityandspeedoftheliftshallbeselectedtohavethemosteffectiveliftsystem.The
lift system shall be able to handle adequate number of passengers during peak hours and at the same time
IntervalandTravelTimeshallbewithinreasonablelimits.
4.3.1.2
TheaverageIntervalshallnotbemorethanshowninTable8.4.3.TheTravelTimeshallnotexceed150seconds.
4.3.1.3
The passenger handling capacity (H) of a lift system for different occupancies in terms of the number of
passengerstobehandledinthebuildinginafiveminutepeakperiodshallnotbelessthanthatindicatedinTable
8.4.3.
Table8.4.3RecommendedIntervaland5minuteHandlingCapacityforDifferentOccupancy
TypeofOccupancy
Office
DiversifiedTenancy
HighQuality
StandardQuality
SingleTenancy
HighQuality
StandardQuality
HotelsandMotels
HighQuality
StandardQuality
Apartments
HighCostApartments
MiddleIncomeApartments
LowIncomeApartments
Dormitories,HallsofResidence
Hospitals
PrivateHospital
GeneralHospital
LongtermNursingFacilities
EducationalInstitutions
BuildingswithAssemblyFacilities
Shopsandstores
4.3.1.4
Recommended
Interval
Recommended5min.
PassengerHandling
(Sec)
Capacity(H)%
15~29
30~39
15~24
25~35
30~50
50~70
50~70
60~80
80~120
60~80
50~60
60~70
60~70
40~50
40~50
40~50
12
14
14
16
12~15
10~12
5~7
6~8
10~11
10~11
12
14
8
25
15
5
For the purpose of population estimation, the density of people shall be based on the actual number of
occupants,butinnocaselessthanthosespecifiedinTable8.5.4.Theoccupantloadofamezzaninefloorshallbe
takenintoaccountforworkingoutthepopulationforaparticularfloortowhichthemezzaninefloordischarges
itsloads.
6191
Part8
BuildingServices
Table8.4.4OccupantLoadforEstimationofPopulation
TypeofOccupancy
PopulationFactor
Office
DiversifiedTenancy
HighQuality
StandardQuality
SingleTenancy
HighQuality
StandardQuality
HotelsandMotels
HighQuality
StandardQuality
Conventions
Apartments
HighCostApartments
MiddleIncomeApartments
LowIncomeApartments
Dormitories,HallsofResidence
Hospitals
PrivateHospital
GeneralHospital
LongtermNursingFacilities
EducationalInstitutions
BuildingswithAssemblyFacilities
Withfixedormovableseatsanddancefloor
Withoutseatingfacilitiesincludingdiningrooms
Shopsandstores
14~23m2netusableareaperpersona
10~12m2netusableareaperperson
1.3peopleperroom
1.7peopleperbedroom
1.9peopleperbedroom
1.5peopleperbedroom
2peopleperbedroom
2.5~3peopleperbedroom
20m2netusableareaperperson
3peopleperbed
3~4peopleperbed
1.75peopleperbed
4m2perstudent
0.60m2perpersonb
1.5m2perpersonb
2m2ofnetsellingareac
Notes:
Net usable area = gross area less lift shaft and lobby space, mechanical space, columns, toilets, corridor
aroundcore,airconditioningmachineryspace.
Population estimation shall be based on gross area (plinth area or covered area). The gross area shallinclude, in
addition to the main assembly room or space, any occupied connecting room or space in the same storeys or in the storey
aboveandbelow,whereentranceiscommontosuchroomsandspacesandtheyareavailableforusebytheoccupantsof
theassemblyplace.Nodeductionsshallbemadeinthegrossareaforcorridors,closetsorothersubdivisions,theareashall
includeallspaceservingtheparticularassemblyoccupancy.
4.3.1.5
Netsellingareaisareaopentothepublic.
CarSpeedandAcceleration
(a) Thecar speedfor thedifferent types of lifts in differentoccupancies shall normally be asgiven in
Table8.4.5.Ahigherorlowerspeedliftmaybeusedinspecialcaseswhenconditionswarrantuseof
suchlifts.
Thecaraccelerationordecelerationshallnotbemorethan1.2m/s2.
6192
Vol.3
Chapter4
Table8.4.5CarSpeedforLiftinDifferentKindsofUsage
BuildingType
OfficeBuilding
MinimumCarSpeed(m/s)
0to40
2.0
41to70
2.5
71to85
3.6
86to115
4.0
Above115
5.0
0to40
2.0
Hotels
41to70
2.5
71to85
3.6
86to115
4.0
Above115
5.0
Hospital
Apartments
Stores
4.3.1.6
Rise(m)
0to20
0.63
21to30
1.0
31to40
1.6
41to55
2.0
56to75
2.5
Above75
3.6
0to25
0.63
26to40
1.0
41to60
1.6
Above60
2.0
0to30
1.0
31to45
1.6
46to60
2.0
Above60
2.5
HandlingCapacityandInterval
(a) Thehandlingcapacity,forincoming/uppeakpassenger,shallbecalculatedbythefollowingformula:
H=
300 Q N 100
P T
Where
H = passengerhandlingcapacityoftheliftsystemduringfiveminutepeakperiod,expressedas
thepercentageoftheestimatedtotalpopulationhandled.
Q = averagenumberofpassengerscarriedineachcarpertrip,
N = numberofliftsinthesystem,
P = total population to be handled during peak period (it is related to the area for which a
particularbankofliftserves)
T = averageroundtriptimeinseconds,thatis,theaveragetimerequiredbyeachliftintaking
onefullloadofpassengersfromgroundfloordischargingtheminvariousupperfloorsandcoming
backtogroundfloorfortakingfreshpassengersforthenexttrip;
Note:
(a) ThevalueofQdependsonthedimensionofthecar.Itmaybenotedthatthecarisnotloaded
alwaystoitsmaximumcapacityduringeachtripandtherefore,forcalculatingTandHthevalue
ofQshallbetakenas80percentofthemaximumcapacityofthecar.
(b) Tisthesumofthetimeinsecondsrequiredinthefollowingprocess:
i.
Timeforentryofpassengersonthegroundfloororlowestliftlobby;
ii.
Timeforexitofthepassengersoneachfloorofdischarge;
6193
Part8
BuildingServices
iii.
Door operation time (opening and closing) and car start time on each floor the lift stops,
includinggroundfloor;
iv.
Accelerationanddecelerationperiods;
v.
Stoppingandlevelingperiods;
vi.
Periodsoffullratedspeedsbetweenstopsgoingupand
vii.
Periodsoffullratedspeedsbetweenstopsgoingdown.
(b) TheaverageIntervalshallbecalculatedbythefollowingformula:
I=
T
N
where,
I=Intervalofavailabilityofliftsonthelowestliftlobby.
4.3.2 ShapeandSizeofLifts
4.3.2.1
Careful analysis shall be performedduring selection ofshape andsizeoflifts so as to get full advantage of its
shapeforthemosteffectiveuseofliftsandbuildingspace.
4.3.2.2
Thedimensionsofthecarplatformshallbesuchthatthecarwillnotexceeditsratedloadwhenpackedfull.Net
insideareaoftheliftcarshallbeasperSec4.2.3.1.
Note:
i) Forthesameplatformarea,alifthavinghigherwidthtodepthratiocanaccommodatemorepassengersand
takeslesstimeforpassengertransfer.
ii) Thewidthofthecarisdeterminedbythewidthoftheentranceandthedepthofthecarisregulatedbythe
loading.
4.3.3 LocationandArrangementofLifts
4.3.3.1
Athoroughinvestigationshallbecarriedoutforassessingthemostsuitablelocationforlift(s)whileplanningthe
building.Itshalltakeintoaccountfutureexpansions,ifany.
4.3.3.2
The lifts shall be easily accessible from all entrances to the building. For maximum efficiency, they shall be
grouped near the centre of the building. Walking distance from the lift to the farthest office or suite shall not
exceed60m.
4.3.3.3
ArrangementofLifts
(a) Whenmorethanoneliftsareinstalledinagroup,theyshallbearrangedsidebysideorintworows
facingeachother.Separationofliftsinthegroupshallbeavoided.
(b) Thelift lobby in front of liftsshall be wide enough toallowsufficient space for waiting passengers
andpropervisionofhallbuttonandhalllanterns.Fig8.4.2to8.4.6giveacceptablearrangementsof
liftsinagroupwithacceptablespaceforwaitingpassengers.Morespaceshallbeallowedinfrontof
theliftsinthemainfloorthanintheupperfloors.
(c) Itispreferablethattheliftlobbyisnotusedasathoroughfare,butwhenabsolutelyneededthelift
lobbyshallbewiderenoughtotakeintoaccountofthespaceforpeoplewhoaremoving.
4.3.4 LocationofMachineRoom
4.3.4.1
Themachineroomshall,asfaraspracticable,beplacedimmediatelyabovetheliftwell.
6194
Vol.3
Chapter4
Fig8.4.2:TwoCarArrangement
Fig8.4.3:ThreeCarArrangement
6195
Part8
BuildingServices
Fig8.4.4:FourCarArrangement
6196
Vol.3
Chapter4
Fig8.4.5:SixCarArrangement
Fig8.4.6:EightCarArrangement
4.3.4.2
Ifamachineroomontheliftwellisimpracticableforarchitecturalorotherreasons,themachineroommaybe
placed below the lift well or in the basement, keeping adequate safety provisions. If the lift machine room is
locatedinthebasement,itshallbeseparatedfromtheliftwellbyaseparationwall.Alternatively,machineroom
lessliftcanbeconsideredforinstallation.
4.3.4.3
Highspeedliftswithgearlessmachineshall,inallcases,havemachineroomabovetheliftwell.
4.3.4.4
Machine room shall not be located adjacent to or above sleeping rooms (bed rooms) in residential and hotel
buildings;andpatients'rooms,intensivecareroomsandoperationtheatresofhospital/healthcarebuildings.
6197
Part8
BuildingServices
4.3.5 StructuralConsiderations
4.3.5.1
Lift well enclosures, lift pits, machine rooms and machine supports, besides conforming to the essential
requirements in Sec 4.2, shall form part of the building construction and comply with the lift manufacturer's
drawings.
4.3.5.2
MachineRoom
Machine room floor shall be strong enough to support the heaviest component of lift machinery and shall be
designedtocarryaloadofnotlessthan500kg/m2overthewholeareaandalsoanyloadwhichmaybeimposed
thereonbytheequipmentusedinthemachineroomorbyanyreactionfromanysuchequipmentduringperiods
ofbothnormaloperationandrepair.
4.3.5.3
Thetotalloadonoverheadbeamsandtheirsupportingstructuralmembersshallbeassumedtobeequaltothe
deadloadofslabsincludingloadofallequipmentrestingonthebeamsplustwicetheminimumloadsuspended
fromthebeams.
4.3.5.4
ThedeflectionoftheoverheadbeamsundertheminimumstaticloadcalculatedinaccordancewithSec4.3.5.3
1
ofthespan.
shallnotexceed 1500
4.3.5.5
Beamsatallotherfloorslabswhichcorrespondtothebeamatmachineroomfloorshallalsobemadestronger
totakethereactionfromtheguideswhentheliftismadetostopconsequenttothebreakingofthewireropesor
theapplicationofthesafetydevice.
4.3.5.6
Suitable lifting beams may be provided immediately below the machine room ceiling for carrying the tackle to
facilitate lifting of any heavy part of a heavy lift. For lower capacity lifts, suitable suspension hooks may be
provided.
4.3.5.7
Theroofofthemachineroomshallbestrongenoughtotakeupthepulleywhichcouldbeusedforliftingup
partsoftheliftmachineryforinspectionandrepair.
4.3.5.8
The equivalent dead loads imposed upon the building by the lift installations shall be shown on the lift
manufacturer'sdrawingsothatthearchitect/engineermaymakeprovisionsaccordingly.
4.3.6 ControlSystem
4.3.6.1
Thecontrolofoperationoftheliftsystem,leveling,dooropeningandclosing,responsetohallcallsetc.shallbe
fullyautomatic.Allcontrolequipmentshallbeefficientandfailsafe.
4.3.6.2
Thecontrolsystemshallbecapableofacceleratingthecarsmoothlytofullrunningspeedandstoppingthelift
withsmoothretardation.
4.3.6.3
Variationinspeedoftheliftbetweennoloadandfullloadconditionsshallnotbemorethanplusorminusfive
percent.Thecontrolsystemshallbecapableofcorrectinganytendencytooverspeedorunderspeed.Thecontrol
systemshallhavesafetydevice(s)tostoptheliftcarifitsrunningspeedexceedsitsratedspeedbytenpercent.
6198
Vol.3
4.3.6.4
Chapter4
Itshallhavefacilitytolevelorreleveltheliftcarwithinplusorminus13mm.Thelevelingsystemshallbefully
automatic and shall correct for over travel or under travel and rope stretch. The car stopping and leveling
systemshallbeunaffectedbyexternalinfluenceslikevariationinload,temperature,ropeelongationetc.
4.3.6.5
Closing and opening of car doors and landing doors shall be fully automatic and shall operate in full
synchronization with one another. Door opening and closing operations shall be so controlled as to ensure
propersafetyofpassengers.
4.3.6.6
Door opening and closing time and door hold open time shall be automatically controlled to get minimum
transfertimeinanylanding.Forlargerinstallations,transfertimesshallbeindependentlyadjustabletosuitthe
requirementsofthebuildingaswellasthecharacteristicsofthetraffic.
4.3.6.7
Independent door closing push button shall be provided in the lift car to allow instant door closing. Similarly
dooropeningpushbuttonshallbeprovidedintheliftcartoreversetheclosingmotionofthedoorsorholdthem
open.
4.3.6.8
When there are conditions that particularly affect the safety of passengers, the closing of doors shall only be
effectedbythecontinuouspressureofpushbuttonsintheliftcarorlandings.
4.3.6.9
Each lift shallhave key operated switchto transfer fromnormal passenger control to acar preferencecontrol.
Duringcarpreferencecontroltheoperationoftheliftshallbefromthecaronlyandthedoorsshallremainopen
untilacarcallisregisteredforafloordesignation.Alllandingcallsshallbebypassedandcarpositionindicators
onthelandingsforthisliftshallnotbeilluminated.
4.3.6.10
Provisions shall be made in the control system to take any car out of service still maintaining the controlled
operationoftheremainingcarsofagroupofcarsrequiredforpassengertraffic.Itisessentialthatsuchprovision
shallnotstopthefireman'scontrolfrombeingoperativeintheeventoftheliftbeingdesignatedasafireman's
lift.
4.3.6.11
Whenrequired,fireswitchshallbeprovidedinthecontrolsystemasperSec4.2.2.2.
4.4
ESCALATORS
4.4.1 General
4.4.1.1
Escalators shall be located in the main line of circulation and in such a way that most persons entering the
buildingcanseeit.Careshallbetakentoeliminateinterferencetothetrafficmovement.
4.4.1.2
Escalators shall discharge into an open area with no turns or choice of direction necessary. Ample space for
people must be provided at the entry and exit landings of an escalator, space between the newel and the
nearestobstructioninfrontoftheescalatorshallbeaminimumof3m.
4.4.1.3
6199
Part8
BuildingServices
If an unloading area is restricted, such restrictions as doors or gates shall be interlocked with the escalator to
insurethattherestrictionisremovedbeforetheescalatorcanberun.
4.4.1.4
Theescalatorshallhaveprovisiontoruninbothupwardanddownwarddirections.Howeveritshallnotrunin
onedirectionforonetripandreversedforthenext.Starting,stoppingorreversalshallbecontrolledonlybyan
attendantandwiththeassurancethatnopassengerisridingatthattime.
4.4.1.5
Minimumheadroomabovetheescalator(minimumverticalclearancebetweenthelineofstepnosingandlowest
edgeofceilingopening)shallnotbelessthan2.3m.
4.4.1.6
Near the place of escalator installation, one lift with wheel chair facility shall be installed to facilitate vertical
movementofdisabledpersons.
4.4.2 EssentialRequirements
4.4.2.1
Angleofinclineoftheescalatorshallnotbemorethan30 fromthehorizontal.Inparticularcases,anangleof
inclineupto35omaybepermittedforescalatorshavingaverticalrisenotmorethan6m.
4.4.2.2
Thespeedoftheescalator,measuredalongtheinclineshallnotbemorethan0.63m/sfor30oangleofincline
and0.50m/sfor35oangleofincline.
4.4.2.3
Balustrades
(a) Escalatorsshallbeprovidedoneachsidewithsolidbalustrades.Onthestepside(interiorpanel),the
balustradesshallbesmoothandsubstantiallyflushexceptforprotectivemoldingparalleltotherun
of the steps. Vertical moldings that cover joints of panels shall be properly bevelled and shall not
projectmorethan6.5mm.Gapsbetweeninteriorpanelsofthebalustradeshallnotbewiderthan
4mm.
(b) Thewidthbetweenbalustrades,measuredontheinclineuptoapoint680mmverticallyabovethe
noselineofthesteps,shallnotbelessthanthewidthofthestep.Itshallnotexceedthewidthofthe
stepbymorethan330mmwithamaximumof165mmoneithersideoftheescalator.
(c) There shall be no abrupt changes in the width between the balustrades on the two sides of the
escalator.Whereachangeinwidthisunavoidable,suchchangeshallnotexceed8percentofthe
greater width. In changingthe direction of the balustrades resulting from a reduction in width the
maximumallowableangleofchangeinbalustradesshallnotexceed15degreesfromthelineofthe
escalatortravel.
(d) Thebalustradeinteriorpanelingshallhaveadequatemechanicalstrengthandrigidity.Whenaforce
of500Nisappliedatananglesongapgreaterthan4mmandnopermanentdeformation.
(e) Theuseofglass for balustrade interiorpanelling ispermitted, provided it is splinter freeone layer
safety(tempered)glassandhassufficientmechanicalstrengthandrigidity.Thethicknessoftheglass
shallnotbelessthan6mm.
4.4.2.4
Theclearanceoneithersideofthestepsbetweenthestepsandtheadjacentskirtguardshallnotbemorethan
5mmandthesumoftheclearancesonbothsidesshallnotbemorethan6mm.
4.4.2.5
Wheretheintersectionoftheoutsidebalustrade(deckboard)andtheceilingorsoffitislessthan600mmfrom
thecentrelineofthehandrail,asolidguardshallbeprovidedintheintersectingangleoftheoutsidebalustrade
6200
Vol.3
Chapter4
(deckboard)andtheceilingorsoffit.Theverticalfaceoftheguardshallprojectatleast360mmhorizontally
fromtheapexoftheangle.
4.4.2.6
Handrails
(a) Each balustrade shall be provided with a handrail moving in the same direction and at the same
speedasthesteps.
(b) Eachmovinghandrailshallextendatnormalhandrailheightnotlessthan300mmbeyondthelineof
pointsofcombplateteethattheupperandlowerlandings.
(c) Handorfingerguardsshallbeprovidedatpointswherethehandrailsenterthebalustrade.
(d) Thehorizontaldistancebetweenthecentrelinesoftwohandrails,measuredontheincline,shallnot
exceed the width between the balustrades by more than 150 mm, with a maximum of 75 mm on
eithersideoftheescalator.
4.4.2.7
StepTreads
(a) The depth of any step tread in the direction of travel shall not be less than 400 mm and the rise
betweentreadsshallnotbemorethan220mm.
(b) Themaximumclearancebetweensteptreadsonthehorizontalrunshallbe4mm.
(c) Thetreadsurfaceofeachstepshallbeslottedinadirectionparalleltothetravelofthesteps.Each
slotshallnotbemorethan6.5mmwideandnotbelessthan9.5mmdeep;andthedistancefrom
centretocentreofadjoiningslotsshallnotbemorethan9.5mm.
(d) Safetyprovisionshallbeinstalledinthesystemtostoptheescalatorwhenanythingisstuckinthe
clearancebetweenthesteptreadandtheskirting.
4.4.2.8
Landings
Landingsshallbemadeofantislipmaterial.
4.4.2.9
CombPlates
There shall be comb plates at the upper and lower landings of every escalator. The comb plate teeth shall be
meshed with and set into the slots of the tread surface. Comb plates shall be adjustable vertically. Safety
provision shall be installed in the comb plate assembly so that the safety contact stops the escalator when
anythingiscaughtbetweenthecombplateandthestep.
4.4.2.10 Trusses
Thetrussshallbedesignedtosustainthedeadandliveloadsofthestepsandrunninggearinoperationsafely.In
theeventoffailureofthetracksystemitshallretaintherunninggearinitsguides.
4.4.2.11 StepWheelTracks
Theseshallbedesignedtopreventdisplacementofstepsandrunninggearifastepchainbreaks.
4.4.2.12 RatedLoad
Theescalatorshallbeselectedinsuchawaythatitdoesnotexceeditsratedloadduringoperation.
Theratedloadinkilogramonanescalatorshallbecomputedbythefollowingformula:
Ratedload=0.27WAkg
where,
W=widthbetweenthebalustrades,mm;and
A=horizontaldistancebetweentheupperandlowercombplateteeth,(m).
4.4.2.13 DesignFactorofSafety
Thefactorofsafetybasedonstaticloadshallbeatleastthefollowing:
i.
fortrussesandallstructuralmembersincludingtracks
ii.
fordrivingmachineparts:
a) wheremadeofsteelorbronze
5
8
6201
Part8
BuildingServices
b) wheremadeofcastironandothermaterials
iii. forpowertransmissionmembers
10
10
Stepchaincomposedofcaststeellinkswhich,ifthoroughlyannealed,shallbepermittedwithafactorofsafetyof
atleast20.
4.4.2.14 DrivingMachine,MotorandBrake
(a) Thedrivingmachineshallbeconnectedtothemaindriveshaftbytoothedgearing,acoupling,ora
chain.
(b) Anelectricmotorshallnotdrivemorethanoneescalator.
(c) Eachescalatorshallbeprovidedwithanelectricallyreleased,mechanicallyappliedbrakecapableof
stoppingtheupordowntravellingescalatorwithanyloaduptotheratedload.Thebrakeshallbe
locatedeitheronthedrivingmachineoronthemaindriveshaft.
Whereachainisusedtoconnectthedrivingmachinetothemaindriveshaft,abrakeshallbeprovided
onthisshaft.Itisnotrequiredthatthisbrakebeoftheelectricallyreleasedtypeifanelectricallyreleased
brakeisprovidedonthedrivingmachine.
(d) Thebrakingsystemshallhaveprovisiontobringtheescalatorautomaticallytoasmoothstopinthe
eventoffailureofelectricalpowerormechanicalparts.
(e) SpeedGovernor:Aspeedgovernorshallbeprovided,theoperationofwhichshallautomaticallyshut
downtheescalatorincaseofoverspeedorunderspeed,andpreventreversalofdirection(upor
down).
(f) Adequateilluminationshallbeprovidedatalllandings,atthecombplatesandcompletelydownall
stairways.
(g) Anemergencystopswitchshallbelocatednearthecombplateorinsomeobtrusivelocation.
(h) Allmachineryspacesshallhaveaccessdoorsorpanelsforinspectionandmaintenance.Thesepanels
shallremainlockedtopreventunauthorizedaccess.
(i) Reasonableventilationshallbeprovidedinmachineryspaces.
4.4.2.15 EscalatorCapacity
(a) Fornormalpeakperiod,therecommendedhandlingcapacityfordesignpurposesshallbetakenas
3200to6400personsperhourdependinguponthewidthoftheescalator.
(b) Thenumberofpersonsthatmaybetheoreticallycarriedbytheescalatorin1hourcanbecalculated
asfollows:
i.
FordeterminationoftheoreticalcapacityitIsassumedthatonestepwithanaveragedepthof
0.4mcancarry1personforstepwidthof0.6m,1.5personsforastepwidthof0.8mandtwo
personsforstepwidthof1m.
ii.
Thetheoreticalcapacity=3600x(vxk)/0.4
where,
v=ratedspeedofescalatorinm/s
k=1,1.5or2forstepwidthof0.6m,0.8mand1mrespectively.
4.5
MOVINGWALKS
4.5.1 EssentialRequirements
4.5.1.1
Angleofinclineofmovingwalksshallbenomorethan15o.Amovingwalkmayhaveslopingentranceandexitor
levelentranceandexit.
4.5.1.2
Theoperatingspeedsofmovingwalkatdifferentinclinationsanddifferententranceandexitconditionsshallnot
bemorethanthosegiveninTable8.4.6
6202
Vol.3
Chapter4
Table8.4.6OperatingSpeedsofMovingWalk(Basedon1000mmNominalTreadWidth)*
InclineofRamponSlope MaximumSpeedwithLevel
EntranceandExit
(m/s)
MaximumSpeedwithSloping
EntranceandExit
(m/s)
0to3o
0.9
0.9
Over3to5o
0.9
0.8
Over5to8o
0.9
0.7
Over8to12o
0.7
0.65
Over12to15o
0.7
0.63
*Highertreadwidthmaybeallowableonhorizontalruns.
4.5.2 Balustrades
(a) Moving walks shall be provided on each side with solid balustrades. On the tread way side the
balustradesshallbesmoothandsubstantiallyflush.
(b) Thewidthbetweenbalustrades,measureduptoapoint680mmverticallyabovethetreadway,shall
notbelessthanthewidthofthetreadway.Itshallnotexceedthewidthofthetreadwaybymore
than330mmwithamaximumof165mmoneithersideofthemovingwalk.
(c) Thereshallbenoabruptchangesinwidthbetweenthebalustradesonthetwosidesofthemoving
walk.Whereachangeinwidthisunavoidable,suchchangeshallnotexceed8percentofthegreater
width.Inchangingthedirectionofthebalustradesresultingfromareductioninwidththemaximum
allowable angle of change in balustrades shall not exceed 15 degrees from the line of the moving
walktravel.
4.5.3 Handrails
4.5.3.1
Each balustrade shall be provided with a handrail moving in the same direction and at the same speed as the
treadway.Onlyonehandrailmaybeallowedinamovingwalkwhentheslopeofthewalkwaydoesnotexceed
3o,operatingspeedislessthan0.35m/sorthewidthisnomorethan530mm.
4.5.3.2
Eachmovinghandrailshallextendatnormalhandrailheightnotlessthan300mmbeyondthelineofpointsof
combplateteethattheupperandlowerlandings.
4.5.3.3
Handorfingerguardsshallbeprovidedatthepointwherethehandrailsenterthebalustrade.
4.5.3.4
The horizontal distance between the centre lines of two handrails shall not exceed the width between the
balustradesbymorethan150mmwithamaximumof75mmoneithersideofthemovingwalk.
4.5.4 TreadWay
4.5.4.1
Thetreadsurfaceofthetreadwayshallbeslottedinadirectionparalleltothedirectionoftravel.
4.5.4.2
Theclearanceoneithersideofthetreadwaybetweenthetreadwayandtheadjacentskirtguardshallnotbe
morethan5mmandthesumoftheclearancesonbothsidesshallnotbemorethan6mm.Safetyprovisionsshall
bekeptinthesystemtostopthemovingwalkwhenanythingisstuckintheclearancebetweenthetreadwayand
theadjacentskirtguard.
6203
Part8
BuildingServices
4.5.5 Landings
Landingsshallbemadeofantislipmaterial.
4.5.6 CombPlates
4.5.6.1
Thereshallbecombplatesattheentranceandexitofeachmovingwalk.Thecombplateteethshallbemeshed
withandsetintotheslotsinthetreadsurface.Safetyprovisionshallbeinstalledinthecombplateassemblyso
thatthesafetycontactstopsthemovingwalkwhenanythingiscaughtbetweenthecombplateandthetread.
4.5.6.2
Anemergencystopswitchshallbelocatednearthecombplateoratsomeobtrusivelocation.
4.5.6.3
Adequateilluminationshallbeprovidedatcombplates.
4.6
INSPECTIONANDCERTIFICATION
4.6.1
Allnewlifts,escalatorsandmovingwalks,afterinstallation,shallbeinspectedandtestedbytheAuthoritybefore
theseareputintonormalservices.
TheseshallnotbebroughtintouseunlesstheAuthorityissatisfiedthattheinstallationshavebeencarriedoutas
perprovisionsofthisCodeandtestsindicatethatallthesafetydevicesoperatesatisfactorily.Itshallbeunlawful
tooperateanylift,escalatorormovingwalkwithoutacurrentcertificateofinspectionissuedbytheAuthority.
CertificatesshallnotbeissuedwhentheconveyanceispostedasunsafepursuanttoSec4.6.7.
4.6.2
All electrical lines, control lines and earthings of lift, escalator and moving walk systems shall be tested to
determine whether these have been installed properly to meet the requirements of the machine and as per
provisionsofChapter1.
4.6.3 Testing
Testsshallbecarriedouttodeterminetheoperationalandsafetyconditionsoflifts,escalatorsandmovingwalks
inaccordancewiththeprovisionsofsection:
4.6.3.1
Lift
Testsshallbeconductedtoascertainthat
(a) themotor,brakecontrolequipmentandcarlevelingmechanismfunctionproperly,
(b) thedooroperationisproperanddoorlockingdevicesfunctionproperly,
(c) thecarraisesandlowersratedload,
(d) thecarachievesatleasttheratedspeed,
(e) theliftmotorcanbeoverloadeduptoaminimumof10%abovetheratedcapacity,
(f) thesafetygearstopsthecarwiththeratedloadincaseofoverspeedand/orovertraveletc.,
(g) thebuffersfunctionproperly,and
(h) the safety gear operate and keeps operation of the lift suspended in case of the lift car is loaded
aboveitsmaximumcapacity.
4.6.3.2
EscalatorandMovingWalk
Testsonescalatorsandmovingwalksshallbeconductedtoascertainthat
(a) theautomaticcontroldevicefunctionsproperlyandbringstheescalatortoasmoothstopincaseof
failureofanymechanicalpartsorelectricalpower,
6204
Vol.3
Chapter4
(b) the automatic safety protection for over speed, under speed and direction reversal functions
properly,and
(c) Safety devices function properly and stops the escalator or moving walk when anything is caught
betweenthecombplateandthetreadsortheskirtingandthetreads.
(d) thehandrailandstepsortreadwaytravelatexactlythesamespeed.
4.6.4
Alift,escalatorormovingwalk,inwhichrepairand/ormaintenanceworkhasbeencarriedoutshallalsobeputto
therelevanttestsasprovidedforinSec4.6.3.
4.6.5
Afterpropertesting,theAuthorityshallissuecertificateregardingsuitabilityofthelift,escalatorormovingwalk
fornormalorregularservice.Alift,escalatorormovingwalkshallbeallowedtoworkonlyonissuanceofthis
certificate.
4.6.6
Thelift,escalatorormovingwalkshallbeinspectedperiodicallytoensuresafety.
4.6.7
When an inspection reveals an unsafe condition and the Authority finds that the unsafe condition endangers
humanlife,theAuthorityshallcausetobeplacedonsuchlift,escalatorormovingwalk,inaconspicuousplace,a
notice stating that such conveyance is unsafe. The owner shall see to it that such notice of unsafe condition is
legiblymaintainedwhereplacedbytheAuthority.TheAuthorityshallalsoissueanorderinwritingtotheowner
requiringtherepairsoralterationstobemadetosuchconveyancewhicharenecessarytorenderitsafeandmay
ordertheoperationthereofdiscontinueduntiltherepairsoralterationsaremadeortheunsafeconditionsare
removed.ApostednoticeofunsafeconditionsshallberemovedonlybytheAuthorityandwhensatisfiedthatthe
unsafeconditionshavebeencorrected.
4.7
4.7.1
OPERATIONANDMAINTENANCE
The owner shall be responsible for the safe operation and maintenance of each lift, escalator or moving walk
installation and shall cause periodic inspections, tests and maintenance to be made on such conveyances as
requiredinthissection.
4.7.2
Thelift,escalatorormovingwalkshallreceiveregularcleaningandlubricationofrelevantparts,andadjustment
and adequate servicing by authorized competent persons at such intervals as the type of equipment and
frequencyofservicedemand.Inorderthatthelift,escalatorormovingwalkinstallationismaintainedatalltimes
in a safe condition, a proper maintenance schedule shall be drawn up in consultation with the machine
manufacturerwhichshallbestrictlyfollowed.
4.7.3
In case of lift, periodic examination of wire ropes, components of landing and car doors, door interlocking
mechanism, brakes, gears, components of safety gears, guides, rollers, channels etc. shall be carried out as
recommendedbythemanufacturer.Innocaseshalltheintervalbetweensuchinspectionsexceedsixmonths.
4.7.4
Grooves of drums, sheaves and pulleys of lifts shall also be examined when rope replacement is made. If
necessary,thedrums,sheavesorpulleysshallbeproperlyremachined.
6205
Part8
BuildingServices
4.7.5
In case of escalators and moving walks, periodic examination of balustrades, handrail, tread way, tread way
interconnection, comb plates speed governor, drives, chains, nonreversal device, brakes, gears etc. shall be
carriedoutasrecommendedbythemanufacturer,butinnocasetheintervalshallexceedsixmonths.
4.7.6 SundryPrecautions
4.7.6.1
Adequate precaution shall be taken to guard against any possibility of a lift being operated by unauthorized
persons. Precautions shall also be taken to prevent a lift from being operated by any person when it is not
intendedforuse.
4.7.6.2
Nopersonshallremaininthepitwhiletheliftisworking.Adequateprecautionsshallbetakentoprotectpersons
workinginthepitfromaccidentalcontactwiththecounterweight.
4.7.6.3
Whiletheliftisunderexaminationorrepairs,suitablestepsshallbetakentoensurethattheliftisnotoperated
inadvertentlybyanypersoninsuchamannerasmayendangerthesafetyofpersonsworkinginthelift.
4.7.6.4
No such explosive or other inflammable material shall be carried in the lift car as may endanger the safety of
personsandproperty.
RelatedAppendix:
Appendix84A:FormatforParticularsofLifts,EscalatorsandMovingWalks
6206
Vol.3
Chapter 5
WATERSUPPLY
5.1
PURPOSEANDSCOPE
5.1.1
The purpose of this chapter of the Code is to provide minimum standards for the design, installation and
maintenanceofwatersupplyanddistributionsystemwithinabuildinganditspremises.
5.1.2
The regulations of this chapter also provide guidelines for waterrequirements for different classes of buildings
accordingtotheiroccupancyclassification.
5.1.3
The provisions stated herein do not cover the requirements of water supply for industrial plants and process,
municipaluses,viz.streetwashing,streethydrant,etc.
5.2
TERMINOLOGY
ThissectionprovidesanalphabeticallistofthetermsusedinandapplicabletothischapteroftheCode.Incaseof
thissectionshallgovernforinterpretationoftheprovisionsofthischapter.
Accessible:Whenappliedtoafixture,applianceorequipmentshallmeanhavingaccessthereto,butwhichmay
require the removal of an access panel or similar obstruction; "readily accessible" shall mean direct access
withoutthenecessityofremovinganypanel,doororsimilarobstruction.
Airgap:Theunobstructedverticaldistancethroughthefreeatmospherebetweenthelowestopeningfromany
pipeorfaucetsupplyingwatertotank,plumbingfixtureorotherdeviceandthefloodlevelrimofthereceptacle.
AvailableHead:Theheadofwateravailableatthepointofconsiderationduetomains'pressureorstoragetank
oranyothersourceofpressure.
BackSiphonage:Theflowingbackofused,contaminated,orpollutedwaterfromaplumbingfixtureorvesselinto
awatersupplypipeduetoareducedpressureinsuchapipe(seeBackflow).
Backflow:Theflowofwaterorotherliquids,mixturesorsubstancesintothedistributionpipesofapotablewater
supplyfromanysourceotherthanitsintendedsource.
BackflowConnectionorcondition:Anyarrangementwherebybackflowcanoccur.
BackflowPreventer:Adeviceormeanstopreventbackflow.
BallCock:Awatersupplyvalve,openedorclosedbymeansofafloatorsimilardevice,usedtosupplywatertoa
tankforminganapprovedairgaporvacuumbreakerandactingasanantisiphondevice.AlsoknownasFLOAT
OPERATEDVALVE.
Bedpan Washer and Sterilizer: A fixture designed to wash bedpans and to flush the contents into the sanitary
drainage system and located adjacent to a water closet or clinical sink. Such fixtures can also be provided for
disinfectingutensilsbyscaldingwithsteamorhotwater.
BRANCH:Anypartofthepipingsystemotherthanariserormain.
BRANCHCONNECTOR:AconnectorbetweenwatermainandbranchpipesbyT,Y,TY,doubleY,andVbranches
accordingtotheirrespectiveshapes.
Building Supply: The water supply pipe carrying potable water from the water meter or other source of water
supplytoabuildingorotherpointofuseordistributiononthelot.
Part8
BuildingServices
8207
Part8
BuildingServices
Contamination:Ageneraltermmeaningtheintroductionintothepotablewatersupplyofchemicals,wastesor
sewagewhichwillrenderthewaterunfitforitsintendedpurpose.
Critical LEVEL: The level at which the vacuum breaker may be submerged before backflow occurs. When the
criticallevelisnotindicatedonthevacuumbreaker,thebottomofthedeviceshallbeconsideredasthecritical
level.
CrossConnection:Anyphysicalconnectionorarrangementbetweentwootherwiseseparatepipingsystems,one
ofwhichcontainspotablewaterandtheothereitherwaterofunknownorquestionablesafetyorsteam,gas,or
chemical whereby there may be a flow from one system to the other, the direction of flow depending on the
pressuredifferentialbetweenthetwosystems(SeeBackflow).
CYLINDER: A cylindrical closed vessel capable of containingwaterunder pressure greater than the atmospheric
pressure.
DevelopedLENGTH:Lengthofapipealongthecenterlineofthepipeandfittings
DistributionPIPE:Anypipeconveyingwaterfromastoragetank/cisternorfromahotwaterapparatussupplied
fromafeedcisternunderpressurefromthatcistern.
Effective OPENING: The minimum crosssectional area at the point of water supply discharge measured or
expressed in terms of (1) diameter of a circle, (2) if the opening is not circular, the diameter of a circle of
equivalentcrosssectionalarea.(Thisisalsoapplicabletoairgap.)
FAUCET:Avalveendofawaterpipebymeansofwhichwatercanbedrawnfromorheldwithinthepipe.
FeedCISTERN:Astoragetank/cisternusedforsupplyingcoldwatertoahotwaterapparatus.
FITTING:Anythingfittedorfixedinconnectionwiththesupply,measurement,control,distribution,utilizationor
disposalofwater."Waterfitting"includespipes(otherthanmains),taps,cocks,valves,ferrules,meters,cisterns,
baths,waterclosets,soilpansandothersimilarapparatususedinconnectionwiththesupplyanduseofwater.
FIXTURE:SeePlumbingFixture.
FixtureBRANCH:Awatersupplypipebetweenthefixturesupplypipeandthewaterdistributionpipe.
FixtureSUPPLY:Awatersupplypipeconnectingthefixturewiththefixturebranch.
FixtureUnit:Aquantityintermsofwhichtheloadproducingeffectsontheplumbingsystemofdifferentkindsof
plumbingfixturesareexpressedonsomearbitrarychosenscale.
FloatOperatedVALVE:SeeBallCock.
FloodLevelRIM:Thetopedgeofareceptaclefromwhichwateroverflows.
FlushTANK:Atanklocatedabovewaterclosets,urinalsorsimilarfixturesforthepurposeofflushingtheusable
portionofthefixture.AlsoknownasFLUSHINGCISTERNandFLUSHOMETERTANK.
FLUSHVALVE:SeeFlushometerValve.
FlushingCISTERN:SeeFlushTank.
FlushometerTANK:SeeFlushTank.
FlushometerVALVE:Adevicelocatedatthebottomofthetank,andwhichdischargesapredeterminedquantity
ofwatertofixturesforflushingpurposesandisclosedbydirectwaterpressureorothermechanicalmeans.Also
knownasFLUSHVALVE.
Full FACILITIES: The modern plumbing facilities allowed to the occupants of modern dwellings or, of VIP hotels
andaccommodations.
ULLOPENVALVE:Ashutoffvalvethatinthefullpositionhasastraightthroughflowpassagewaywithadiameter
notlessthanonenominalpipesizesmallerthannominalpipesizeoftheconnectingpipe.
GEYSER:Anapparatusforheatingwaterwithsupplycontrolontheinletsideanddeliveringitfromanoutlet.
GRADE:Theslopeorfallofalineofpipewithreferencetoahorizontalplane.
HANGERS:SeeSupports.
HorizontalPIPE:Anypipeorfittingwhichisinstalledinahorizontalpositionorwhichmakesananglelessthan45
degreeswiththehorizontal.
HotWaterTANK:Avesselforstoringhotwaterunderpressuregreaterthantheatmosphericpressure.
IndividualWaterSUPPLY:Asupplyotherthananapprovedpublicwatersupplywhichservesoneormorefamilies.
LAGGING:Thematerialusedforthermaloracousticinsulation.
8208
Vol.3
WaterSupply
Chapter5
LiquidWASTE:Thedischargefromanyfixture,applianceorappurtenanceinconnectionwithaplumbingsystem
whichdoesnotreceivefecalmatter.
MAIN:Theprincipalarteryofthesystem,towhichbranchesmaybeconnected,forthepurposeofwatersupply
fromasupplytoindividualconsumers.AlsoknownasWATERMAIN.
MechanicalJoint:Aconnectionbetweenpipes,fittingsorpipesandfittingswhichisneitherscrewed,caulked,
threaded,soldered,solventcemented,brazednorwelded.
OFFSET:Acombinationofapprovedbendsinalineofpipingusedtoconnecttwopipeswhoseaxesareparallel
butnotinline.
PLUMBING: The business, trade or work having to do with the installation, removal, alteration or repair of
plumbinganddrainagesystemsorpartthereof.
Plumbing APPLIANCES:Theplumbingfixtures whoseoperation or control canbedependent upon oneor more
energizedcomponents,suchasmotors,controls,heatingelements,orpressureortemperaturesensingelements.
Plumbing APPURTENANCE: A manufactured device or prefabricated assembly of component parts, which is an
adjunct to the basic piping system and plumbing fixtures, performing some useful function in the operation,
maintenance,servicing,economyorsafetyoftheplumbingsystem.
Plumbing FIXTURE: A receptacle or device which is either permanently or temporarily connected to the water
distributionsystemofthepremises,anddemandsasupplyofwatertherefrom,ordischargesusedwater,waste
materialsorsewageeitherdirectlyorindirectlytothedrainagesystemofthepremises,orrequiresbothawater
supplyconnectionandadischargetothedrainagesystemofthepremises.AlsoknownasFIXTURE.
Plumbing System : A system of potable water supply and distribution pipes, plumbing fixtures and traps, soil
wasteandventpipes,andsanitaryandstormsewersandbuildingdrainsincludingtheirrespectiveconnections,
devicesandaappurtenanceswithinabuildingorpremises.
PotableWATER:Waterfreefromimpuritieswhichmaycausediseasesorharmfulphysiologicaleffectsandwater
whichissatisfactoryfordrinking,culinaryanddomesticpurposes.
Private/PrivateUSE:Plumbingfixturesintendedfortheuseofafamilyinresidences,orfortherestricteduseof
anindividualincommercialestablishments.
Quick closing VALVE: A valve or faucet that closes automatically when released manually or controlled by
mechanicalmeansforfastactionclosing.
Receptor:Anapprovedplumbingfixtureordeviceofsuchmaterial,shapeandcapacityastoadequatelyreceive
thedischargefromindirectwastepipes,soconstructedandlocatedastobereadilycleaned.
ResidualHEAD:Theheadavailableatanyparticularpointinthedistributionsystem.
RestrictedFACILITIES:Theminimumplumbingfacilitiesacceptablefortheoccupantsoflowincomegroup.
RIM:Anunobstructedopenedgeofafixture.
RISER: A water supply pipe which extends vertically one full storey or more to convey water to branches or
fixtures.
ROUGHINGIN: The installation of all parts of the plumbing system which can be completed prior to the
installationoffixtures.Thisincludeswatersupply,drainage,ventpipingandnecessarysupports.
ServicePIPE:Thepipethatrunsbetweenthedistributionmaininthestreetandtheriserincaseofamultistoried
buildingorthewatermeterinthecaseofanindividualhouseandissubjecttowaterpressurefromsuchmain.
SlipJOINT:Anadjustabletubingconnection,consistingofacompressionnut,africtionring,andacompression
washer,designedtofitathreadedadapterfitting,orastandardtaperpipethread.
Soldered JOINT: A joint obtained by the joining of metal parts with metallic mixtures of alloys which melt at a
temperaturebelow427oCandabove149oC.
StopVALVE:Anydevice(includingastopcockorstoptap)otherthanadrawofftap,forstoppingatwilltheflow
ofwaterinapipe.
Storage Cistern : A container, other than a flashing cistern, having a free water surface under atmospheric
pressureandusedforstorageofwater,andisconnectedtothewatermainortubewellbymeansofsupplypipe.
AlsoknownasSTORAGETANK.
STORAGETANK:SeeSTORAGECISTERN.
Supports: Hangers and anchors or devices for supporting and securing pipe, fixture and equipment to walls,
ceilings,floorsorotherstructuralmembers.AlsoknownasHANGERS.
8209
Part8
BuildingServices
TemperedWater:Thewaterrangingintemperaturefrom29oCupto43oC.
VacuumBreaker:Atypeofbackflowpreventerinstalledonopeningssubjecttonormalatmosphericpressure.
Vertical Pipe: Any pipe which is installed in a vertical position or which makes an angle of not more than 45
degreeswiththevertical.
WARMINGPIPE:Anoverflowpipesofixedthatitsoutletwhetherinsideoroutsideabuilding,isinaconspicuous
positionwherethedischargeofanywatertherefromcanbereadilyseen.
Washout Valve: A device located at the bottom of the tank for the purpose of draining a tank for cleaning,
maintenance,etc.
Water conditioning or Treating Device: A device which conditions or treats a water supply so as to change its
chemicalcontentorremovesuspendedsolidsbyfiltration.
WaterHammerArrester:Adeviceusedtoabsorbthepressuresurge(waterhammer)whichoccurswhenwater
flowissuddenlystoppedinawatersupplysystem.
WaterHeater:Anyheatingdevicethatheatspotablewaterandsuppliesittothepotablehotwaterdistribution
system.
Water Line:A linemarked insideacisterntoindicate the highest water levelatwhichthe ballvalveshould be
adjustedtoshutoff.
WATERMAIN:SeeMAIN.
WaterOutlet:Adischargeopeningthroughwhichwaterissuppliedtoafixture,intotheatmosphere(exceptinto
an open tank which is part of the water supply system), to a boiler or heating system, or to any devices or
equipmentrequiringwatertooperatebutwhicharenotpartoftheplumbingsystem.
Water Supply System : A system consisting of building supply pipe, water distributing pipes, and necessary
connecting pipes, fittings, control valves, and all appurtenances carrying or supplying potable water in or
adjacenttothebuildingorpremises.
WeldedJointsorSeam:Anyjointorseamobtainedbythejoiningofmetalpartsintheplasticmoltenstate.
5.3
PERMITFORWATERCONNECTION
5.3.1 RequirementofPermit
Nowatersupplysystemshallbeinstalledinanewbuildinguntilapermitforsuchworkhasbeenissuedbythe
Authority.Theadditionoralterationoftheexistingwatersupplyfacilitiesinabuildingshallalsorequireapermit
fortheirinstallation.
5.3.1.1
ApplicationforPermit(ObtainingPublicSupplyConnection)
Applicationforapermitforwatersupplysystemshallbemadeinwritingbythelicensedplumberandtheowner
or his appointed person(s) or agent on a prescribed form (Appendix 8.5.A). The application shall accompany
buildingdrawingsshowingthewatersupplysystemwiththefollowingdetails:
(a)Siteplansshowingthelocationofwatermain.
(b)Typicalfloorplan(s)andelevationsofthebuildingwiththepositionofdifferentplumbingfixtures
andpiping.
(c)Materials,sizesandgradients(ifany)oftheproposedinterconnectingpipingsystem.
(d)Pipes(ifany)conveyingnonpotablewater(forflushingwaterclosetsandurinals)shallbemarkedby
distinctive(durable)yellowcolor.
(e)Designcalculationsofwaterrequirement,indicatingconsiderationsofpercapitawaterrequirement
andpopulation.
8210
Vol.3
WaterSupply
5.3.1.2
Chapter5
ApplicationofPermitforBulkWaterSupply
In the case of large housing colonies or where new services are so situated that it will be necessary for the
Authoritytolaynewmainsorextendanexistingmain,fullinformationabouttheproposedhousingschemeshall
be furnished to the Authority; information shall also be given regarding their phased requirements of water
supply with full justification. Such information shall include site plans, showing the layout of roads, footpaths,
buildingandboundariesandindicatingthereonthefinishedlineandleveloftheroadsorfootpathsandwater
supplylinesandappurtenances.
5.3.1.3
ApplicationforIndividual(PermissionforDTWInstallation)WaterSupply
For private water supply facility in addition to public water main connection through installing own deep tube
well,permissionmustbesoughtsubmittingapplicationtowatersupplyAuthorityinaprescribedform.Necessity
forsuchconnectionindicatingtotalwaterrequirementshouldbementioned.
5.3.2
JustificationofRequirement
Thedesigncalculationsforwatersupplysystemofhighriseandpublicbuildingsshallbesubmittedalongwiththe
drawingsmentionedinSection5.3.1above.
PermitsandApprovals
5.3.3
TheBuildingOfficialshallexamineorcausetobeexaminedtheapplicationforapermitandamendmentsthereto
within45daysfromthedayofreceiptofsuchapplication.Iftheapplicationdoesnotconformtotheprovisionsof
this Code, it shall be rejected in writing, stating the reasons therefore. If the proposed work satisfies the
provisionsofthisCode(Section5.3.2and5.3.3),theAuthorityshallissueanontransferablepermit.
CompletionCertificate
5.3.4
Oncompletionoftheplumbingworkforthewatersupplysystem,thelicensedplumbershallgiveacompletion
certificate in the prescribed form (Appendix 8.5.B) to the Authority for getting the water connection from the
mains.
LICENSING/REGISTRATIONOFPLUMBERS
5.4
5.4.1
LicenseRequirement
Plumbing work shall be executed only by a licensed plumber under the control of the Authority and shall be
responsibletocarryoutalllawfuldirectionsgivenbytheAuthority.Noindividual,partnership,corporationorfirm
shallengageinthebusinessofinstallation,repairoralterationofwatersupplysystemwithoutobtainingalicense
fromtheAuthority.
ExaminationandCertificationofPlumber
5.4.2
TheAuthorityshallestablishaplumbersselectionandexaminationboard.Theboardwilldetermine:
a) Therequirementsofobtaininglicense,i.e.,
(i)
minimumacademicqualification
(ii)
minimumpracticalvocationalandothertraining
(iii)
minimumyearsofexperience
(iv)
totalvolumeofworksdoneand
b) Finally,establishstandardsandproceduresforexaminationoftheapplicantsforlicense.
TheAuthoritywillissuelicensetosuchapplicantswhomeetthequalificationsthereofandsuccessfullypassthe
examinationconductedbytheboard.
8211
Part8
BuildingServices
AnnulmentofLicense
5.4.3
The license of a plumber may be annulled by the Authority, if it is proved that a plumbing work has been
completed and certified by the licensed plumber violating the provisions of this Code and deliberately setting
asidetheapprovalsgiveninthepermitorwithoutreceivingthepermitfromtheAuthority.
5.5
WATERSUPPLYREQUIREMENTS
5.5.1
General
5.5.1.1
Buildingsequippedwithplumbingfixturesandusedforhumanoccupancyorhabitationshallbe
providedwiththesupplyofcoldpotablewaterintheamountsspecifiedinSection5.5.2to5.5.4and
atthepressuresspecifiedinSection5.10.4.2and5.10.4.3.Onlypotablewatershallbeaccessibleto
theplumbingfixturessupplyingwaterfordrinking,bathing,culinaryuseandfortheprocessingof
food.
5.5.1.2
Nonpotablewatermaybeusedforflushingwaterclosetsandurinalsprovidedsuchwatershallnotbe
accessiblefordrinkingorsuchotherpurposes.
WaterRequirementforDomesticUse
5.5.2
Water requirement for domestic purposes should be classified according to the socioeconomic status, type of
habitants,populationoftheareaandpublicfacilitiespresent.
Socioeconomicgroups:
(a) HighIncomegroupmonthlyIncome>1lactaka
(b) MiddleIncomegroupmonthlyIncome>30,0001lac
(c) lowincomegroupmonthlyIncome<20,000taka
TypeofHabitants/Population
(a) CityCorporationareas,bigcitiesPopulation>0.5million
(b) Smalldistricttowns,UpazilasandUrbangrowthcenterspopulation>0.1million
(c) Villageareaspopulation<0.05million
Water requirements for daily domestic use of a building shall be assessed on the basis of the one or a
combinationofthefollowingtwomethods:
(a) Number of occupants according to their occupancy classification and their water requirements as
specifiedinTable8.5.1(a).toTable8.5.1(d)
(b) PeakdemandormaximumprobableflowspecifiedinSectionP3andP4intheAppendix8.5.C.
Table8.5.1(a):WaterConsumptionforDomesticPurposes(Cities/BigDistrictTowns)[InResidentialBuildings]
8212
Cat
Socioeconomicgroup,TypeofBuilding&OtherFacilities
WaterConsumption
BigCities/CityCorporationArea/BigDistrictTowns
FullFacility
RestrictedFacility
(Population>0.5million)
(lpcd)
(lpcd)
Highincomegroup:
a1
SingleFamilyDwellingwithGarden&Carwashing
260
200
a2
BigMultiFamilyApartment/Flat(>2500sft)
200
150
Middleincomegroup:
b1
Officer'sQrt./Colony&moderateApartment(<2000sft)
180
135
b2
Smallbuilding/StaffQrt.&smallApartment(<1500sft)
120
Lowincomegroup:
Vol.3
WaterSupply
Chapter5
c1
JuniorstaffQrt./flat(<1000sft)&temporaryshade
80
c2
Standpostconnectioninthefringearea
65
c3
Commonyard(standpost)connectioninthefringearea
50
c4
Slumdwellerscollectionfromroadsidepublicstandpost
40
Table8.5.1(b):WaterRequirementforDomesticPurposes(DistrictTowns/Upazilas/UrbangrowthCentres)
[InResidentialBuildings]
Cat
WaterConsumption
Small District Towns/ Upajilas & Urban Growth Centre FullFacility

(Population>0.1million)
(lpcd)
Middleincomegroup:
a1
SingleFamilyDwellingwithGarden
150
a2
Officer'sQrt./Colony&moderateApartment(<2000sft)
135
a3
Smallbuilding/StaffQrt.&smallApartment(<1500sft)
120
Lowincomegroup:
b1
JuniorstaffQrt./flat(<1000sft)&temporaryshade
80
b2
PrivateStandpostconnectioninthefringearea
65
b3
Commonyard(standpost)connectioninthefringearea
50
b4
Slumdwellerscollectionfromroadsidepublicstandpost
40
RestrictedFacility
(lpcd)
Table8.5.1(c):WaterRequirementforDomesticPurposes(VillageAreasandSmallCommunities)[InResidentialBuildings]
Cat
VillageAreas/SmallCommunityfromhandtubewell,
dugwells,ponds&rivers(Nonpipedwatersupplysystem)
WaterConsumption
FullFacility
RestrictedFacility
(lpcd)
(lpcd)
a1
PrivateSource(OwnTubewell/dugwell&pond)
5060
a2
PublicSources(PublicTW/Dugwell/othersources)
4050
5.5.3
WaterRequirementforFireFighting
5.5.3.1
The Authority shall make provision to meet the water supply requirements for fire fighting in the
city/area,dependingonthepopulationdensityandtypesofoccupancy.
5.5.3.2
Provision shall be made by the owner of the building for water supply requirements for firefighting
purposeswithinthebuilding,dependingupontheheightandoccupancyofthebuilding,inconformity
withtherequirementslaiddowninPart4FireProtection.
5.5.3.3
Therequirementsregardingwatersupplyinstoragetanks,capacityoffirepumps,arrangementsofwet
risercumdowncomer and wet riser installations for buildings above 15 m in height, depending upon
theoccupancyuse,shallbeinaccordancewithSection4.2ofPart4.
5.5.4
5.5.4.1
WaterRequirementforSpecialEquipment
Watersupplyinmanybuildingsisalsorequiredformanyotherapplicationsotherthandomesticuse,
whichmustbeidentifiedintheinitialstagesofplanningsoastoprovidetherequisitewaterquantity,
storagecapacityandpressureasrequiredforeachapplication.
8213
Part8
BuildingServices
5.5.4.2
Insuchinstancesinformationaboutthewateruseandthequalityrequiredmaybeobtainedfromthe
users.Sometypicalusesotherthandomesticuseandfirefightingpurposesareairconditioningandair
washing, swimming pools and water bodies and gardening. The water requirement for special
equipmentlikeairconditioningorsuchothersshallbebasedonthespecificationofthemanufacturer.
Table8.5.1(d):DomesticWaterRequirementsforVariousothersOccupanciesandFacilityGroups
Classof
ForFulla
ForRestricted
Occupancy
OccupancyGroups
Facilities
Facilities
(lpcd)
(lpcd)
OccupancyA:
A1:Mess,Hostels,orBoardingHouse
135
70
Residential
A2:MinimumStandardHousing
70
A3:HotelsorLodgingHouse(Perbed)
300
135
A4:Hotel(upto4Star)
180
A5:Hotels(upto5Star)
320
A6:GardeningandSprinkling
A7:CarWashing
OccupancyB:
B1:EducationalFacilities
70
45
Educational
B2:PreschoolFacilities
50
35
OccupancyC:
C1:InstitutionforChildren'sCare
180
100
Institutional
C2:CustodianInstitutionforCapable
180
100
C3:CustodianInstitutionforIncapable
120
70
C4:PenalandMentalInstitution
120
70
OccupancyD:
D1:NormalMedicalFacilities/SmallHospitals
340
225
HealthCare
D2:BigHospitals(Over100beds)
450
250
D3:EmergencyMedicalFacilities
300
135
D4:Nurses&MedicalQuarters
250
135
Table8.5.1(d)Cont.:DomesticWaterRequirementsforVariousothersOccupanciesandFacilityGroups
OccupancyGroups
ForFulla
Facilities
(lpcd)
ForRestricted
Facilities
(lpcd)
OccupancyE:
E1:LargeAssemblywithFixedSeats(perseat)
90
45
Assembly
E2:SmallAssemblywithFixedSeats(perseat)
90
45
E3:LargeAssemblywithoutFixedSeatsb
E4:SmallAssemblywithoutFixedSeats
E5:SportsFacilities
OccupancyF:
F1:Offices
45
30
Businessand
F2:SmallShopsandMarkets
45
30
Mercantile
F3:LargeShopsandMarkets
45
30
Classof
Occupancy
8214
F4:GarageandPetrolStations
70
45
F5:EssentialServices
70
45
F6:Restaurant
70
50
OccupancyG:
G1:LowHazardIndustries
40
25
Industrial
G2:ModerateHazardsIndustries
40
25
Vol.3
WaterSupply
Chapter5
OccupancyH:
H1:LowFireRiskStorage
10
Storage
H2:ModerateFireRiskStorage
10
OccupancyJ:
J1:ExplosiveHazardBuilding
Hazardous
J2:ChemicalHazardBuilding
OccupancyKc
K1:PrivateGarage&SpecialStructure
Miscellaneous
K2:Fences,TanksandTowers
aForfullfacilityinoccupancyclassificationsA,B,CandD,thewaterrequirementvalueincludes25%hotwater.
bInthecaseofmosques,thewaterrequirementsgivenaboveshallbeadequateforablutionandotherusesof
onedevoteeperprayer.TheappropriateLPCDvaluemaybecalculatedonthisbasis.
cWaterrequirementforoccupancyKisshownasaprovisionforunknownvisitorsonly.
5.6
ESTIMATIONOFDEMANDLOAD
5.6.1
Estimatesoftotalwatersupplyrequirementsforbuildingsshallbebasedontheestimationoftotalpresentand
predictedfuturepopulationandpercapitawaterrequirementasmentionedinsection5.5.
5.6.2
Inmakingassessmentofwatersupplyrequirementsoflargecomplexes,thefutureoccupantloadshallbekeptin
view.Usemaybemadeofthefollowingmethodsforestimatingfuturerequirements
(a) demographicmethodofpopulationprojection,
(b) arithmeticprogressionmethod,
(c) geometricalprogressionmethod,
(d) methodofvaryingincrementorincrementalincrease,
(e) logisticmethod,
(f) graphicalprojectionmethod,and
(g) graphicalcomparisonmethod.
5.6.3
Forresidentialbuildings,therequirementsofwatershallbebasedontheactualnumberofoccupants;wherethis
information is not available, the number of occupants for each residential unit may be based on a family size
around 5 (five). For assessing the population in other occupants, reference may be made to Part 4 Fire
Protection.
5.6.4
Toestimateofficebuildingoccupancy,allow7.49.3sqm(80100sqft)offloorspaceperperson,dependingon
thetypeofofficebuilding,exclusiveofelevatorandstairspace,corridors,orserviceareas.
5.6.5
Todeterminethepresentandfuturewaterrequirement:
(a) Classify the total population based on the basis socioeconomic status (Higher/middle/lower income
group&slumdwellers)
(b) Determinepercapitawaterrequirementfordifferentcategories(types)ofpeople fordifferenttypeof
domestic,recreational,andcommercialuses.
(c) Multiplythepopulationwithpercapitawaterconsumptiontodeterminethepresentandfuturewater
requirement.
8215
Part8
BuildingServices
5.7
WATERSOURCESANDQUALITY
5.7.1
SourcesofWater
Theoriginofallsourcesofwaterisrainfall,Watercanbecollectedasitfallsasrainbeforeitreachestheground;
or as surface water when it flows over the ground or is pooled in lakes or ponds; or as ground water when it
percolates into the ground and flows or collects as ground water; or from the sea into which it finally flows.
Surfacewatersarephysicallyandmicrobiallycontaminatedandcannotbeusedwithouttreatment,ontheother
handgroundwatersourcesarechemicallycontaminatedandtreatmentmaybenecessaryinmanycases.
5.7.2
QualityofWater
ThequalityofwatertobeusedfordrinkingshallbemaintainedusingWHOWaterSafetyPlan(WSP)andatleast
complywiththeBangladeshStandard(ECR,1997)andWHOGuidelineValues(2004)aspresentedinTable5.Q1
ofAppendix8.5.D.Forpurposesotherthandrinking,waterifsuppliedseparately,shallbeabsolutelysafefrom
bacteriological contamination so as to ensure that there is no danger to the health of the users due to such
contaminants.
5.7.3
WasteWaterReclamation
Treatedsewageorotherwastewaterofthecommunitymaybeutilizedfornondomesticpurposessuchaswater
for cooling, flushing, lawns, parks, fire fighting and for certain industrial purposes after giving the necessary
treatmenttosuitthenatureoftheuse.Thissupplysystemshallbeallowedinresidencesonlyifproperprovision
ismadetoavoidanycrossconnectionofthistreatedwastewaterwithdomesticwatersupplysystem.
Wheneverabuildingisusedafterlongintervals,thewaterqualityofthestoredwatermustbecheckedsoasto
ensurethatthewaterissafeforuseasperwaterqualityrequirementsspecifiedinthisCode.
5.8
WATERSUPPLYSYSTEM
Eachfloororunitwithinthewatersupplysystemshallbeprovidedwithacontrolvalveinadditiontothemain
controlvalveattheentranceofthesystem.Oneofthefollowingpublicwatersupplysystemsshallbeadoptedfor
distributingwatertotheplumbingfixtureswithinthebuilding[Figures8.5.C.2(a),2(b)&2(c)ofAppendix8.5.C]
5.8.1
DirectConnectiontoWaterMain
For continuous water supply system with sufficient pressure to feed all plumbing fixtures during peak demand
period,thedirectconnectionofwaterdistributionsystemtothewatermainsmaybeadopted.However,direct
pumpingfromthepublicwatermainshouldstrictlybeprohibited.
5.8.2
SystemIncorporatingBalancingRoofTank
Forcontinuouswatersupplysystemwithinadequatepressureonlyduringpeakdemandhourorforintermittent
water supply with sufficient pressure to feed balancing tank, a balancing roof tank shall be required to feed
plumbing fixtures within the building. The connection to the balancing roof tank from the water main or from
groundtankorfromindividualwatersourcesshallbethroughanonreturnvalve.
5.8.3
SystemIncorporatingGroundTank
Forwatersupplysystemwithinadequatepressuretofeedplumbingfixturesorbalancingrooftank,thebuilding
premises shall have a ground (or underground) tank to store water. The water from the ground tank shall be
boosteduptotherooftanktofeedplumbingfixtures.Theconnectionofwatermaintothegroundtankshallbe
throughaballvalvesystem.Installationofboosterpumpdirectlyintothewatermainshallnotbeallowed.Since,
this system cannot ensure protection against possible contamination (particularly during flood), disinfection
systemshouldbeincorporated.
5.8.4
IndividualWaterSupply
In the absence of a public water supply system, or In case of need of additional supply of water, the building
premisesshallhaveindividualwatersupplyasspecifiedinSection5.23.1.Thewaterfromthesources(DTW)shall
beboosteduptotheroofstoragetanktofeedplumbingfixtures.Thesystemshallbeprotectedasspecifiedin
Section5.13.3to5.23.7.
8216
Vol.3
WaterSupply
5.9
STORAGEOFWATER
5.9.1
CapacityofStorageTank
5.9.1.1
Chapter5
Thetypeandcapacityofastoragetankshallbedeterminedconsideringthefollowingfactors:
(a) Therateandregularityofsupply;
(b) Thefrequencyofreplenishmentofthestoragetankduring24hours;
(c) Buildingoccupancyclassification;
(d) Hoursofsupplyofwateratsufficientlyhighpressuretofilluptheroofstoragetankinabsenceofaground
(orunderground)storagetank;
(e) Theamountofwaterrequiredforfirefightingandmethodoffirefightingsystem(Section4.2,Part4)
(f) Theamountofwaterrequiredbyspecialequipment(Section5.5.4).
5.9.1.2
Thesizeandvolumeofastoragetankshallbecalculatedconsideringthefollowingfactors:
a) Theamountofstoragetobeprovidedisafunctionofcapacityofthedistributionnetwork,thelocationofthe
servicestorage,andtheusetowhichitistobeput.
b) Tocomputetherequiredequalizingoroperatingstorage,amassdiagramorhydrographindicatingthehourly
rateofconsumptionisrequired.
Theproceduretobeusedindeterminingtheneededstoragevolumefollows:
a) Obtainahydrographofhourlydemandsforthemaximumday,throughastudyofavailablerecords.
b) Tabulatethehourlydemanddataforthemaximumdayanddrawacumulativedemandcurve,
c) The required operating storage is found by comparing (maximum deviation) the cumulative demand
curve(SShapedCurve)withcumulativepumpingcurve(Straightline)plottedonit..
c) Therequiredcapacityofatankvarieswiththecapacityandrunningtimeofthehouseorfillpumps,however,
followingproceduremaybefollowedtodeterminethecapacityofstoragetanksandpump:
a) Capacity of Roof Tank = x Total daily demand of water (m3) + 1 hr. reserve (m3) for firefighting
requirement(fortallbuilding).Therefore,twotimesfillingofrooftankwillmeetthedailyrequirement.
b) CapacityofDeliveryPump=Peakhourlydemandofwater,lph.Therefore,dailypumpingperiodwould
bearound78hours(23hoursinthemorning+3hoursintheafternoon+2hoursintheevening).
c) Capacity of Under Ground Reservoir = 1 x Total daily demand of water (m3) + 1 hr. reserve (m3) for
firefighting(fortallbuilding).Foremergencyrequirement23daysdailydemandofwaterissometimes
stored.
5.9.2
ConstructionofStorageTank
5.9.2.1
General
Storagetankshallbeeasilyaccessibleforinspectionandcleaning.Thetankshallbeprovidedwithadequatesize
ofvalveddrainsatitslowestpointinaccordancewithTable8.5.2.Thewatersupplyinletintothestoragetank
shallbeatanelevationthatisrequiredforanairgapinanopentankwithoverflow(Section5.18.6)or100mm
8217
Part8
BuildingServices
abovetheoverflowwhicheverisgreater.Thediameterofoverflowpipeshallnotbelessthanthesizeshownin
Table8.5.3forthespecificdischargeintostoragetank.Thestoragetankshallbeequippedwithwatertightand
verminandrodentproofcover.Thetankshallbeprovidedwithreturnbendventpipewithanopenareanotless
thanhalftheareaoftheriser(upfeedordownfeed).Allopenings(overflowpipeandventpipe)shallbeprovided
with corrosion resistant screens against the entrance of insects and vermin. There must be at least two
compartments/unitsforalternativecleaning.
Table8.5.2:SizesofStorageTankDrainagePipes
TankCapacity(V)
inLitres( )
DiameterofDrainage Pipe
(mm)
V2800
25
2800<V5500
38
5500<V11000
50
11000<V19000
63
19000<V28000
75
28000<V
100
Table8.5.3:SizesofOverflowPipesforStorageTank
MaximumDischarge(Q)of
WaterSupplyPipeintoStorageTank(l/min)
DiameterofOverflowPipe
(mm)
Q190
50
190<Q570
63
570<Q760
75
760<Q1500
100
1500<Q2650
125
2650<Q3800
150
3800<Q
200
5.9.2.2
RoofStorageTank
Theroofstoragetankshallbeconstructedwithprestressedorreinforcedconcreteorferrocementorgalvanized
steel or of the material that will resist any action by the plain or chlorinated water. The tank shall be made of
watertightwithouttheuseofputty.Tanksmadeofnongalvanizedmetalsheetsshallbecoatedinternallywitha
nontoxicmaterialwhichdoesnotimpartatasteorodor.Themetalstoragetankshallbecoatedexternallywitha
goodqualityanticorrosiveweatherresistantpaint.Theoutletofstoragetanktothedistributionsystemshallbeat
least50mmabovethetankbottom.
Toprovidesufficientpressure,thebottomofthetankmustbeelevatedsufficientlyabovethehighestfloorwater
fixtures.
Ventpipeshouldbeprovidetoavoidanyairlockandshouldbeplacedwherethehorizontalbranchpipesconnect
theverticaldownfeedpipes(notadjacenttostoragetankandatinterconnectionplacebetweenstoragetank
anddistributionpipes).
5.9.2.3
GroundorUndergroundStorageTank
The ground or underground storage tank shall be constructed of either prestressed or reinforced concrete or
ferrocement.Thetankshallbeabsolutelywaterproofandhaveawatertightcastironmanholecoversuitablefor
inspection.Theinsideandoutsideofthetankmaybecoatedwithnontoxicandwaterproofmaterials.Theground
tank shall be placed at a location so as to avoid contamination by flood water or any other sources. Each
compartment/units should be divided in two chambers with provision of sump for longer contact time with
chlorineandeasycleaning
8218
Vol.3
WaterSupply
5.10
DESIGNOFDISTRIBUTIONSYSTEM
5.10.1
RateofFlowofWater
Chapter5
Oneoftheimportantitemsthatneedstobedeterminedbeforethesizesofpipesandfittingsforanypartofthe
waterpipingsystemmaybedecidedupon,istherateofflowintheservicepipewhich,inturndependsuponthe
numberofhoursforwhichthesupplyisavailableatsufficientlyhighpressure.Ifthenumberofhoursforwhich
thesupplyisavailableisless,therewillbelargenumberoffittingsinusesimultaneouslyandtherateofflowwill
becorrespondinglylarge.
Thedatarequiredfordeterminingthesizeofthecommunicationandservicepipesare:
a) themaximumrateofdischargerequiredatpeakdemandperiod(Peakhourlydemandofwater)
Total
daily requiremen t of water
XPeakFactor(usually2.2)
Hours of water consumptio n ( usually 15 17 hours )
b) thelengthofthepipe;and
c)
theheadlossbyfrictioninpipes,fittingsandmeters.Forheadlosscalculationinpipingsystem
i)
DeterminethetotallengthofpipeandcalculatetheequivalentPipeLength(HeadLossfrombend,gatevalves,reducer
etc.)fromTables8.5.C2(a),C2(b)andC(c)ofAppendix8.5.C.
ii)
Assumetheprobablemaximumvelocityofflow(v)ortentativediameterofpipes(d),
consideringmaximumpermissibleheadlossof1.51.6m/100m
For13mmand50mmdiameterpipe:0.300.60m/sec
iii) Determinationoftotalheadloss(hf)fromHazenWilliam'sNomograph(Figure8.5.C.4ofAppendix8.5.C)orfrictionloss
4 fLv2
formula,hf= 2 gd where,f=frictionlossfactor,L=lengthofpipe,v=velocityofflowandd=diameterofpipe.
5.10.2 DischargeComputation
5.10.2.1
BasedonFixtureUnitsThedesignoftheconsumerspipesorthesupplypipetothefixturesisbasedon:
a) thenumberandkindoffixturesinstalled;
b) thefixtureunitflowrate;and
c) theprobablesimultaneoususeofthesefixtures.
Theratesatwhichwaterisdesirablydrawnintodifferenttypesoffixturesareknown.Theseratesbecomewhole
numbersofsmallsizewhentheyareexpressedinfixtureunit.Thefixtureunitsfordifferentsanitaryappliancesor
groupsofappliancesaregiveninthefollowingTable8.5.4
Table8.5.4:FixtureUnitfordifferentTypesofFixtureswithInletPipeDiameter
SlNo.
TypeofFixture
FixtureUnit(FU)
MinimumSizeof
AsLoadFactor
FixtureBranch,mm
AblutionTap
15
Bathtubsupplywithspout
15
ShowerStallDomestic
15
8219
Part8
BuildingServices
SlNo.
5.10.2.2
TypeofFixture
FixtureUnit(FU)
AsLoadFactor
MinimumSizeof
FixtureBranch,mm
ShowerinGroupperhead
15
WashBasin(DomesticUse)
15
WashBasin(PublicUse)
15
WashBasin(Surgical)
15
KitchenSink(DomesticUse)
15/20
WashingMachine
15/20
10
DrinkingFountain
0.5
15
ProbableSimultaneousDemand(HunterCurve)
Thepossibilitythatallwatersupplytapsinanysystemindomesticandcommercialusewilldrawwateratthe
same time are extremely remote. Designing the water mains for the gross flow will result in bigger and
uneconomicalpipemainsandisnotnecessary.AprobabilitystudymadebyHuntersuggeststherelationshipas
showninFigure8.5.C.1ofAppendix8.5.C,andmayalsobecalculatedfromTable8.5.5.
5.10.3
PipeSizeComputation
Commerciallyavailablestandardsizesofpipesareonlytobeusedagainstthesizesarrivedatbyactualdesign.
Therefore, several empirical formulae are used, even though they give less accurate results. The Hazen and
Williamsformulaandthechartsbasedonthesamemaybeusedwithoutanyriskofinaccuracyinviewofthefact
that the pipes normally to be used for water supply are of smaller sizes. Nomogram of Hazen and Williams
equationhasbeenprovidedinFigure8.5.C.4ofAppendix8.5.C.
5.10.4
GeneralFeaturesofDistributionSystemDesign
5.10.4.1
The water supply system shall be designed to supply minimum but requisite quantity of water to all fixtures,
devicesandappurtenancesineverysectionofthebuildingwithadequatepressure.Thedesignrequirementsofa
watersupplysystemarepresentedinTable8.5.6.
5.10.4.2
For a down feed water distribution system (roof tank supply), static pressure due to gravity increases with
increasing floor height (4.32 psi or 0.3 Bar per floor of 10 ft. height at non flow condition). Therefore, water
distributionpipeinabuildingshallbemaintainedatapressuresothatnoneoftheirfittingsshallaresubjecttoa
waterheadgreaterthan35m(approximately50psi).
Table8.5.5:ProbableSimultaneousDemand
No.of
SystemwithFlushTanks
SystemwithFlushValves
FixtureUnits
Demand(BasedonFixtureUnits)
Demand(AfterHunter)
FlowinLitre
UnitRateof
FlowinLitre
FIow )
perMinute
FIow1)
perMinute
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
20
2.0
56.6
4.7
133.1
40
3.3
93.4
6.3
178.4
60
4.3
121.8
7.4
209.5
80
5.1
144.4
8.3
235.0
100
5.7
161.4
9.1
257.7
120
6.4
181.2
9.8
277.5
140
7.1
201.0
10.4
294.5
160
7.6
215.2
11.0
311.5
180
8.2
232.2
11.6
328.5
UnitRateof
1
8220
Vol.3
WaterSupply
Chapter5
200
8.6
243.5
12.3
348.3
220
9.2
260.5
12.7
359.6
240
9.6
271.8
13.1
370.9
300
11.4
322.8
14.7
416.2
400
14.0
396.4
17.0
481.4
500
16.7
472.9
19.0
538.0
600
19.4
549.3
21.1
597.5
700
21.4
606.0
23.0
651.3
800
24.1
682.4
24.5
693.7
900
26.1
739.0
26.1
739.0
1000
28.1
795.7
Unitrateofflow=Effectivefixtureunits.
5.10.4.3
795.7
28.1
ThedistributionsystemshallbemaintainedatapressurenotlessthanthosespecifiedinTable8.5.6duringpeak
demandperiod.
5.10.4.4
TheminimumsizeofsupplypipefordifferentfixturesshallbeinaccordancewithTable8.5.6.Thefixturesupply
shallnotterminatemorethan0.76m(2.5ft)fromthepointofconnectiontothefixture.Areducedsizeflexible
waterconnectionpipeshallbeused.
5.10.4.5
Thewaterflowvelocityinthedistributionsystemshallbecontrolledtominimizethepossibilityofwaterhammer.
5.10.4.6
Thedesignofwaterdistributionsystemshallconformtoapprovedengineeringpractices.Analternativeguideto
thedesignofabuildingwaterdistributionsystemisalsopresentedinAppendix8.5.C.
Note: Thesizingofwaterdistributionpipingwithinthebuildingmaybemadeeitherbyconsideringthevelocity
of flow or by velocity of flow and pressure loss as governing parameters. The first method have limited
applicationforoneortwostoreybuildingsprovidedtheminimumavailablepressureissufficienttooperatethe
highest ormost remote fixtures duringpeakdemand period. The secondmethod provides betterestimate of
pipesizesforawaterdistributionsystem.
5.10.5
DesignofWaterDistributionPump
Thecapacityofawaterdeliverypumpcanbecalculatedfromtheestimatedmaximumrateofflow(Q)ofwaterin
gpm,andtotalhead(H=hs+hd+hf+hv)ofsupplyofwaterinftandusingthefollowingformula:
BreakHorsePower,BHP= H x Q xEfficiencyofpumpin%.
3960
Statichead,hsisthetotalsuctionliftofwater(sumofverticaldistancebetweentheundergroundreservoirand
pumplevelanddeliveryhead,hdistheverticaldistancebetweenthepumplevelandrooftankstoragepoint.
Frictional head loss, hf can be determined for whole length (vertical and horizontal) of pipe flow using the
proceduresdescribedinsection5.10.1(c).
v2
Velocityhead,hv= 2 g where,v=velocityofflowofwateratthedischargepointintherooftank.
8221
Part8
BuildingServices
5.11
WATERDISTRIBUTIONINTALLBUILDINGS
5.11.1
DistributionMethods
In tall buildings some of the fixtures at the lower level may be subject to excessive pressure. The sanitary
appliancesandfittingsintallbuildingsshallnotbesubjecttoapressureofgreaterthan350kPa.Thisshallbe
achievedbyoneoracombinationofthefollowingtwomethods:
a)ZoningFloorsbyIntermediateTank:Highrisebuildingsshallbezonedbyprovidingintermed4atetankson
differentfloors,eachfeedingazonerangingfrom56storeyssothattheplumbingfixturesarenotsubjectedto
excessive pressure.Distribution in each zone shallbethroughindependent downtakepipes from intermediate
tanksasshowninFigures8.5.C.3(a),8.5.C.3(b),8.5.C.3(c)and8.5.C.3(d)ofAppendix8.5.C.Thefloorsonwhich
anintermediatetanksarelocatedshallbefedfromthestoryaboveit.
i) SystemIncorporatingIntermediateTanksSuppliedbyStorageTankWaterrequiredforthebuilding
shall be pumped from the underground tank to the storage tank. The intermediate tanks shall be fed
fromthestoragetankthroughaseparatedowntakepipe.
ii) System Incorporating Intermediate Tanks Supplied by Independent Pumps Alternatively the
intermediatetanksmaybesuppliedfromtheundergroundtankthroughindependentpumps
Table8.5.6:WaterSupplySystemDesignRequirements
Fixture
SupplyControl
MinimumSizeof Required Flow Required

SupplyPipe
Pressure
FlowRate
(mm)
(kPa)
(lpm)
Bathroomgroup
Flushtank
55
Bathroomgroup
Flushometervalve
55
Bathtub
Faucet
13
55
15.1
Clotheswasher
13
55
Combinationfixture
Faucet
13
55
Dishwashingmachine
13
55
10.4
Drinkingfountain
Faucet
13
55
2.8
Kitchensink
Faucet
13
55
9.5
Laundrytray
Faucet
13
55
15.1
Washbasin
Faucet
19
55
Pedestalurinal
Flushtank
13
55
56.8
Pedestalurinal
Flushometervalve
19
100
56.8
Restaurantsink
Faucet
19
55
Servicesink
Faucet
13
55
11.4
Showerhead
Mixingvalve
13
55
11.4
Watercloset
Flushtank
19
55
11.4
Watercloset
Flushometertank
19
55
6.1
Watercloset
Flushometervalve
25
100
132
13
19
25
55
55
100
Forfixturenotlistedherebutmaximum
supplysizerequirement
Note:1psi=6.895kPa(1kPa=0.145psi),1gallon=3.785liter
b) SystemIncorporatingPressureReducingValves:Theexcessivepressuressufferedbydifferentfixturesshall
beminimizedbypressurereductionvalves.
c) HydroPneumatic System: This system may be adopted where the source is independent of public water
supplysystem.Inthissystemthesupplyshallbethroughapneumaticpressurevesselfittedwithaccessories
like nonreturn and pressure relief valves. The pump and compressor shall be automatically controlled
throughanelectriccontrolpaneltoprovideairandwaterasandwhenneeded.
8222
Vol.3
WaterSupply
5.11.2
Chapter5
RecirculationofWasteWater
Recirculationofcoolingwaterand/orwastewaterfromwashbasintothecisternofwaterclosetsandurinalsin
the lower floor may be provisioned only through a separate tank. No connection between the potable water
supplylineandtherecirculatedwastewaterlineshallbeallowedwithorwithoutanynonreflexornonreturn
valves.
5.12
HOTWATERSUPPLYINSTALLATION
5.12.1
HotWaterRequirements
For a residential building, hot water may be supplied to all plumbing fixtures and equipment used for bathing,
washing,cleansing,laundryandculinarypurposes.Foranonresidentialbuilding,hotwatermaybesuppliedfor
bathingandwashingpurposes.WaterrequirementforhotwatersupplyshallbeinaccordancewithSection5.5.
5.12.2
StorageTemperature
Thedesignofhotwatersupplysystemmaybebaseduponthefollowingtemperaturerequirement:
Scalding
68oC
Hotbath
41oC
Warmbath
37oC
Tepidbath
30oC
Sink
5.12.3
60oC
StorageCapacity
Thecapacityofhotwatervesselshallbebasedonthemaximumshorttimedemandofthepremises.
5.12.4
HotWaterHeater
Thehotwaterheatershallconformtothefollowingstandards:BS758,BS779,BS843,BS855,BS1250,BS2883
andthosespecifiedinPart5ofthisCode.
5.12.5
ColdWaterSupplyConnectiontoWaterHeaters
Theconnectionofcoldwatersupplypipingintowaterheatershallbemadenearitsbottom.Theminimumsizeof
coldwatersupplypipingshallbebasedontheprobablehotwaterdemandofdifferentfixturesbutnotlessthan
25mm.Thesupplypipeshalldelivercoldwaterintohotwatercylinderasfollows:
a) The water heater (electric or gas) of less than 15 liters storage capacity may be directly connected to the
watermainthroughanonreturnvalve.
b) Thestorageheaterof20to70literscapacitymaybeconnecteddirectlytothewatermainthroughanon
return valve and with an additional device that will prevent the siphonage of hot water back to the water
main.
c) Theenclosedwaterheaterwithstoragecapacitygreaterthan70litersshallbefedfromthestoragetank.This
waterheatershallnotbeconnecteddirectlytothewatermain.
d) Thewatersupplyconnectiontoanopenvesseltypewaterheatermaybemadewithanairgapofatleast15
mmabovethetopedgeofthewaterheater.Ballvalveconnectionshallnotbeusedtocontroltheflowof
waterintothiswaterheater.
5.12.6
HotWaterDistributionPiping
Theconnectionofhotwaterdistribution pipetothehotwatercylindershallbeatthetopofthecylinder.The
installationofpipingshallbesuchastoavoidairlock.Incaseofhotwaterhorizontalpipingthegradientshallnot
belessthan1in250.
8223
Part8
BuildingServices
5.12.6.1
TheprocedureforsizingmaybethesameasthatforcoldwaterdistributionsysteminSec5.10butinnocase
shallthesizebelessthanthatspecifiedinTable8.5.7.
Table8.5.7:MinimumPipeSizeforHotWaterPiping
DifferentPipes
MinimumDiameter(mm)
Thesizeofmaindistributingpipethatsupplieshotwatertothefixtures 25
inthesamestoreyofthehotwatercylinder
Thesizeofmaindistributingpipethatsupplieshotwatertothefixtures 19
notinthesamestoreyofhotwatercylinder
5.12.6.2
Branchpipesupplyinghotwatertothebathtuborshower
19
Branchpipesupplyinghotwatertothesink
19
Branchpipesupplyinghotwatertothewashbasin
19
The design consideration of hot water piping shall be such that hot water will appear quickly at the outlet of
differentfixtures.Toimprovethesituation,asecondarycirculationsystemwithflowandreturnpipefromandto
thehotwatercylinder(Fig8.5.1)maybeadopted.Thelengthofhotwaterdistributionpipemeasuredalongthe
pipefromthetopofdrawofftaptothehotwatercylinderorthesecondarycirculationpipeshallnotexceedthe
lengthprescribedinTable8.5.8.Thedrawofftapshallnotbeconnectedtotheprimaryfloworreturnpipe.
Table8.5.8:MaximumPermissibleLengthofHotWaterDrawOffPipe
5.12.7
LargestInternalDiameter(D)ofPipe
LengthofPipe(m)
D<19mm
12
20mm<D<25mm
7.5
25mm<D
VentPipe
Thepressuretypehotwaterheatershallbeprovidedwithaventpipeofnotlessthan19mmdiameter.Thevent
pipeshallriseverticallyabovethewaterlineofcoldwatertankbyatleast150mmplus1mmforevery30mm
heightofwaterlineabovethebottomofthewaterheater.
Theventpipeshallbeconnectedtothetopofthehotwatercylinder.Theventpipemaybeusedtosupplyhot
watertothepointinbetweenthecoldwatertankandthehotwatercylinder.Theventpipeshallnotbeprovided
withanyvalveorcheckvalves.
Theterminationofventpipeshallbesuchasnottocauseanyaccidentaldischargetohurtorscaldanypasserby
orpersoninthevicinity.
5.12.8
CapacityofColdWaterStorageTank
Thestoragecapacityofcoldwatercisternshallbeatleastequaltothesizeofhotwaterstoragecylinderifthe
coldwatercisternsupplieswateronlytothehotwaterheatercylinder.Thiscapacityshallbeatleasttwicethe
capacityofhotwaterheatercylinderifthecoldwaterstoragetankalsosupplieswatertothecoldwaterdrawoff
taps.
5.12.9
SafetyDevices
Thetemperaturereliefvalveorpressurereliefvalveoracombinationoftemperatureandpressurereliefvalves
shallbeinstalledfortheequipmentforheatingorstorageofhotwater.Thetemperaturereliefvalveshallbeset
atamaximumtemperatureof99oC.Themaximumpressureratingofwaterheatershallnotbemorethan1000
kPa.Thetemperaturereliefvalveshallbeplaceddirectlyabovethecylinderitservesbutinnocasemorethan75
mmawayfromthecylinder.Thelocationofpressurereliefvalveshallbeclosetotheequipmentitserves.There
shallbenovalveconnectioninbetweenareliefvalveandthehotwatercylinderitserves.
8224
Vol.3
WaterSupply
5.12.10
Chapter5
WastesfromReliefValve
Theoutletofpressure,temperatureorsuchothervalveshallnotbedirectlyconnectedtothedrainagesystem.
5.12.11
DrainCock
Adequatesizeofdraincockshallbeprovidedwithallstoragetanksfortheirpropercleaning.
5.13
MATERIALS,FITTINGS&APPLIANCES
a) Thematerialsandfittingsforwatersupplyanddistributionpipeandforstoragetankshallcomplywiththe
standardslistedinPart5'BuildingMaterials'andshallbeinaccordancewithSection2.15andthosespecified
inthissection.
b) The materials chosen shall be resistant to corrosion, both inside and outside or shall be suitably protected
againstcorrosionandfreefromalltoxicandharmfulsubstances.PolyethyleneandunplasticizedPVCpipes
shallnotbeinstallednearhotwaterpipesornearanyotherheatsource..
c) Alljointingofpipesandfittingsshallbedoneinaccordancewithacceptablestandardpractices.
5.13.1
WaterSupplyServiceandDistributionPipes
WatersupplyserviceanddistributionpipesshallconformtothestandardslistedinTables8.5.9and8.5.10.The
watersupplypipesandtubingusedoutsidethebuildingorundergroundshallhaveaminimumworkingpressure
of1.1MPaat23oC.Incaseofwatersupplyexceeding1.1MPapressure,thepipingmaterialshallhaveatleasta
rated working pressure equal to the highest available pressure. The hot water distribution piping shall have a
minimumpressureof550kPaat80oC.Differenttypes/classesofuPVC(UnplasticizedPVCpipes)areusedbothfor
serviceandinternaldistributionpipesasdescribedinTable8.5.11.However,Polyvinylchloride(PVC)plasticpipesshall
notbeusedexposedandunprotectedasriserorwaterdistributionpipe.PolytheneorunplasticizedPVCpipes
shallnotbeinstalledneartheheatersorhotwaterpiping.Leadpipesmaybeusedonlyforflushingandoverflow
purposesinawatersupplysystem.
5.13.2
PipeFittings
ThepipefittingsshallbeinaccordancewiththestandardslistedinTable8.5.12andthosespecifiedinPart5.
5.13.3
Concrete,PrestressedorFerrocementStructures
The properties of the materials used for storage tank or such other structures shall conform to the material
standardsspecifiedinPart5oftheCode.
Table8.5.9:WaterSupplyServicePipe
Materials
Standards
Acrylonitrilebutadienestyrene(ABS)plasticpipe
ASTMD1527,ASTMD2282
Brasspipe
ASTMB43
Castironwaterpipe
ASTMD377
CopperorCopperalloypipe
ASTMB42,ASTMB302
CopperorCopperalloytubing
ASTMB75,ASTMB88,ASTMB251,ASTMB447
Chlorinatedpolyvinylchloride(CPVC)pipe
ASTMD2846,ASTMF441,ASTMF442
Galvanizedsteelpipe
ASTMA53
Polybutyline(PB)plasticpipeandtubing
ASTMD2662,ASTMD2666,ASTMD3309
Polyethyline(PE)plasticpipeandtubing
ASTMD2239,ASTMD2737
PVCplasticpipe
8225
Part8
BuildingServices
Table8.5.10:WaterDistributionPipe
Material
Standard
Brasspipe
ASTMB43
CopperorCopperalloypipe
ASTMB42,ASTMB302
ASTMB75,ASTMB88,ASTMB251,ASTMB477
CPVCplasticpipeandtubing
ASTMD2846,ASTMF441,ASTMF442
Galvanizedsteelpipe
ASTMA53
PVCplasticpipe
5.14
GENERALREQUIREMENTFORPIPEWORK
5.14.1
PublicWaterMains
Thefollowingprinciplesshallapplyforthemains:
a) Servicemainsshallbeofadequatesizetogivetherequiredrateofflow.
Table8.5.11(a):WorkingPressureRangeofDifferentTypesofuPVC(UnplasticizedPVC)Pipes
Type/Class(Bar)(kg/cm2)
Material
uPVCPipe
ClassB6.06.12
uPVCPipe
ClassC9.09.19
uPVCPipe
ClassD12.012.25
uPVCPipe
ClassE15.015.30
Table8.5.11(b):AverageWallThicknessClassEuPVC(UnplasticizedPVC)Pipes
AverageWallThicknessofClassETypeuPVCPipe
3/8inch(9.5mm)
inch(13mm)
inch(19mm)
1.0inch(25mm)
1.9mm
2.1mm
2.5mm
2.7mm
Table8.5.12:PipeFittings
Material
Standard
Asbestoscement
ISO160,ISO881,ISO392
Castiron
ASMEB164,ASMEB16.12
Copperorcopperalloy
ASMEB16.15,ASMEB16.18,ASMEB1622
ASMEB16.23,ASMEB16.26,ASMEB16.29
ASMEB16.32
Greyironandductileiron
AWWAC110,ISO2531
Malleableiron
ASMEB16.3
Plastic,uPVC
ASTMD2609,ASTMF409,ASTMF437,
ASTMF438,ASTMF439
Steel
8226
ASMEB16.9,ASMEB16.11,ASMEB16.28
Vol.3
WaterSupply
Chapter5
b) Themainsshallbedividedintosectionsbymakingloopsystemandwiththeprovisionsofsluicevalvesand
othervalvessothatanypartofwatermainmaybeshutoffforrepairswithoutaffectingmajorpartofpipe
network
c) Toavoiddeadends,themainsshallbearrangedinagridformationorinanetwork.
d) Wheredeadendsareunavoidable,ahydrantshallbeprovidedtoactasawashout
e) Thewashoutvalveshallnotdischargedirectlyintoadrainorsewer,orintoamanholeorchamberdirectly
connectedtoit;aneffectivelytrappedchambershallbeinterposed,intowhichthewashoutshalldischarge.
f)
Airvalvesshallbeprovidedatallsummits,andwashoutatlowpointsbetweensummits.
g) Mainsneednotbelaidatunvaryinggradients,butmayfollowthegeneralcontouroftheground.Theyshall,
however,fallcontinuouslytowardsthewashoutandrisetowardstheairvalves.Thegradientshallbesuch
thatthereshallalwaysbeapositivepressureateverypointunderworkingconditions.
h) Thecoverforthemainsshallbeatleast900mmunderroadwaysand750mminthecaseoffootpaths.This
covershallbemeasuredfromthetopofthepipetothesurfaceoftheground.
i)
The mains shall be located sufficiently away from other service lines like electric and telegraph cables to
ensure safety and where the mains cannot be located away from such lines, suitable protective measures
shallbeaccordedtothemains.
5.14.2
InterconnectionPipesfromWaterMain
a) EverypremisesthatissuppliedwithwaterbytheAuthorityshallhaveitsownseparatecommunicationpipe.
Inthecaseofagrouporblockofpremisesbelongingtothesameownerthesamecommunicationpipemay
supplywatertomorethanonepremiseswiththepriorpermissionoftheAuthority.
b) Thecommunicationpipebetweenthewatermainandthestopcockattheboundaryofthepremisesshallbe
laidbytheAuthority.
c) Connectionsupto50mmdiametermaybemadeonthewatermainbymeansofscrewedferrules,provided
the size of the connections does not exceed onethird the size of the water main. In all other cases, the
connectionshallbemadebyaTbranchoffthewatermain.
d) Asfaraspracticable,thecommunicationpipeandtheundergroundservicepipeshallbelaidatrightanglesto
themainandinapproximatelystraightlinestofacilitatelocationforrepairs.Itisalsorecommendedthatthe
communicationpipebelaidinapipeinpipesleeveoflargerdia.Madeofnoncorrosivematerialtoprotect
thecommunicationpipe.
e) Everycommunicationpipeshallhaveastopcockandmeterinsertedinit.Thewaterwayofeachsuchfitting
shallnotbelessthantheinternalsectionalareaofthecommunicationpipeandthefittingsshallbelocated
withinthepremisesataconspicuousplaceaccessibletotheAuthoritywhichshallhaveexclusivecontrolover
it.
5.14.3
User/ConsumerPipes
a) Noconsumerpipeshallbelaidinthepremisestoconnectthecommunicationpipewithouttheapprovalof
theAuthority.
b) Theconsumerpipewithinthepremisesshallbelaidundergroundwithasuitablecovertosafeguardagainst
damagefromtrafficandextremesofweather.
c) Tocontrolthebranchpipetoeachseparatelyoccupiedpartofabuildingsuppliedbyacommonservicepipe,
astoptapshallbefixedtominimizetheinterruptionofthesupplyduringrepairs.Allsuchstopvalvesshallbe
8227
Part8
BuildingServices
fixed in accessible positions and properly protected. To supply water for drinking or for culinary purposes,
direct taps shall be provided on the branch pipes connected directly to the consumer pipe. In the case of
multistoriedbuildings,downtaketapsshallbesuppliedfromoverheadtanks.
d) Pumpsshallnotbeallowedontheservicepipe,astheycauseadropinpressureonthesuctionside,thereby
affecting the supply to the adjoining properties. In cases where pumping is required, a properly protected
storagetankofadequatecapacityshallbeprovidedtofeedthepump.
e) Nodirectboosting(byboosterpumps)shallbeallowedfromtheservicepipes(communicationandconsumer
pipes).
f)
Consumerpipesshallbesodesignedandconstructedastoavoidairlocks.Drainingtapsshallbeprovidedat
thelowestpointsfromwhichthepipingshallrisecontinuouslytodrawofftaps.
g) Consumer pipes shall be so designed as to reduce the production and transmission of noise as much as
possible.
h) Consumerpipesinroofspacesandunventilatedairspacesunderfloorsorinbasementsshallbeprotected
againstcorrosion.
i)
Consumerpipesshallbesolocatedthattheyarenotundulyexposedtoaccidentaldamageandshallbefixed
insuchpositionsastofacilitatecleaningandavoidaccumulationsofdirt.
j)
Allconsumerpipesshallbesolaidastopermitexpansionandcontractionorothermovements.
5.14.4
ProhibitedConnections
a) Aservicepipeshallnotbeconnectedintoanydistributionpipe;suchconnectionmaypermitthebackflowof
waterfromacisternintotheservicepipe,incertaincircumstances,withconsequentdangerofcontamination
and depletion of storage capacity. It might also result in pipes and fittings being subjected to a pressure
higherthanthatforwhichtheyaredesigned,andinfloodingfromoverflowingcisterns.
b) NopipeforconveyanceorinconnectionwithwatersuppliedbytheAuthorityshallcommunicatewithany
otherreceptacleusedorcapableofbeingusedforconveyanceotherthanwatersuppliedbytheAuthority.
c) Wherestoragetanksareprovided,nopersonshallconnectorbepermittedtoconnectanyservicepipewith
anydistributingpipe.
d) Noserviceorsupplypipeshallbeconnecteddirectlytoanywaterclosetoraurinal.Allsuchsuppliesshallbe
fromflushingcisternswhichshallbesuppliedfromstoragetank.
e) Noserviceorsupplypipeshallbeconnecteddirectlytoanyhotwatersystemortoanyotherapparatusused
forheatingotherthanthroughafeedcisternthereof.
5.15
5.15.1
SAFECONVEYANCEANDDISTRIBUTIONOFWATER&PREVENTIONOFBACKFLOW
BasicPrinciples
a) Wholesome water supply provided for drinking and culinary purposes shall not be liable to contamination
from any less satisfactory water. There shall, therefore, be no crossconnection whatsoever between the
distribution system for wholesome water and any pipe or fitting containing unwholesome water, or water
liable to contamination, or of uncertain quality, or water which has been used for any other purpose. The
provision of reflux or nonreturn valves or closed and sealed stop valves shall not be construed as a
permissiblesubstituteforcompleteabsenceofcrossconnection.
8228
Vol.3
WaterSupply
Chapter5
b) Thedesignofthepipeworkshallbesuchthatthereisnopossibilityofbackflowtowardsthesourceofsupply
from any cistern or appliance, whether by siphonage or otherwise. Reflux nonreturn valves shall not be
reliedupontopreventsuchbackflow.
c) Whereasupplyoflesssatisfactorywaterthanwholesomewaterbecomesinevitableasanalternativeoris
required to be mixed with the latter, it shall be delivered only into a cistern and by a pipe or fitting
dischargingintotheairgapataheightabovethetopedgeofthecisternequaltotwiceitsnominalboreand
in no case less than 150 mm.It is necessaryto maintaina definite airgap in allappliances or taps usedin
waterclosets.
d) Allpipeworkshallbesodesigned,laidorfixedandmaintainedastoremaincompletelywatertight,thereby
avoidingwastage,damagetopropertyandtheriskofcontamination.
e) Nowatersupplylineshallbelaidorfixedsoastopassintoorthroughanysewer,scouroutletordrainorany
manholeconnectedtherewithnorthroughanyashpitormanurepitoranymaterialofsuchnaturethatis
likelytocauseunduedeteriorationofthepipe,exceptwhereitisunavoidable.
f)
Wherethelayingofanypipethroughcorrosivesoilorpreviousmaterialisunavoidable,thepipingshallbe
properlyprotectedfromcontactwithsuchsoilormaterialbybeingcarriedthroughanexteriorcastirontube
or by some other suitable means as approved by the Authority. Any existing piping or fitting laid or fixed,
which does not comply with the above requirements, shall be removed immediately by the consumer and
relaidbyhiminconformitywiththeaboverequirementsandtothesatisfactionoftheAuthority.
g) Where lines have to be laid in close proximity to electric cables or in corrosive soils, adequate
precautions/protectionshouldbetakentoavoidcorrosion.
h) Undergroundpipingshallbelaidatsuchadepththatitisunlikelytobedamagedbyfrostortrafficloadsand
vibrations. It shall not be laid in ground liable to subsidence, but where such ground cannot be avoided,
specialprecautionsshallbetakentoavoiddamagetothepiping.Wherepipinghastobelaidacrossrecently
disturbed ground, the ground shall be thoroughly consolidated so as to provide a continuous and even
support.
i)
Undesigningandplanningthelayoutofthepipework,dueattentionshallbegiventothemaximumrateof
discharge required, economy in Iabour and materials, protection against damage and corrosion, water
hammer, protection from frost, if required, and to avoidance of airlocks, noise transmission and unsightly
arrangement.
j)
Toreducefrictionallosses,pipingshallbeassmoothaspossibleinside.Methodsofjointingshallbesuchasto
avoidinternalroughnessandprojectionatthejoints,whetherofthejointingmaterialsorotherwise.
k) Change in diameter and in direction shall preferably be gradual rather than abrupt to avoid undue loss of
head.Nobendorcurveinpipingshallbemadewhichislikelytomateriallydiminishoralterthecrosssection.
l)
Noboilerforgeneratingsteamorclosedboilersofanydescriptionoranymachineryshallbesupplieddirect
fromaserviceorsupplypipe.Everysuchboilerormachineryshallbesuppliedfromafeedcistern.
5.15.2
BackflowPrevention
a) The installation shall be such that water delivered is not liable to become contaminated or that
contaminationofthepublicwatersupplydoesnotoccur.
b) Thevarioustypesofpipingandmechanicaldevicesacceptableforbackflowprotectionare:
i)
Barometricloop,
ii) Airgap,
iii) Atmospherevacuumbreaker,
8229
Part8
BuildingServices
iv) Pressurevacuumbreaker,
v) Doublecheckvalve,and
vi) Reducedpressurebackflowdevice.
c)
Theinstallationshallnotadverselyaffectdrinkingwater:
i)
bymaterialsincontactwiththewaterbeingunsuitableforthepurpose;
ii) asaresultofbackflowofwaterfromwaterfittings,orwaterusingappliancesintopipeworkconnected
tomainsortootherfittingsandappliances;
iii) by crossconnection between pipes conveying water supplied by the water undertaker with pipes
conveyingwaterfromsomeothersource;and
iv) bystagnation,particularlyathightemperatures.
d) No pump or similar apparatus, the purpose of which is to increase the pressure in or rate of flow from a
supplypipeoranyfittingorapplianceconnectedtoasupplypipe,shallbeconnectedunlessthepriorwritten
permissionofthewatersupplierhasbeenobtainedineachinstance.
Theuseofsuchapumporsimilarapparatusislikelytoleadtopressurereductionintheupstreampipework
which,ifsignificant,increasetheriskofbackflowfromotherfittings.
e) Thewatershallnotcomeincontactwithunsuitablematerialsofconstruction.
f)
Nopipeorfittingshallbelaidin,onorthroughlandfill,refuse,anashpit,sewer,drain,cesspoolorrefuse
chute,oranymanholeconnectedwiththem.
g) Nopipesusceptibletodeteriorationbycontactwithanysubstanceshallbelaidorinstalledinaplacewhere
suchdeteriorationislikelytooccur.Nopipethatispermeabletoanycontaminantshallbelaidorinstalledin
anypositionwherepermeationislikelytooccur.
h) Ifaliquid(otherthanwater)isusedinanytypeofheatingprimarycircuit,whichtransfersheattowaterfor
domesticuse,theliquidshallbenontoxicandnoncorrosive.
i)
A backflow prevention device shall be arranged or connected at or as near as practicable to each point of
deliveryanduseofwater.Applianceswithbuiltinbackflowpreventionshallbecapableofpassingthetest.
All backflow prevention devices shall be installed so that they are accessible for examination, repair or
replacement.SuchdevicesshallbecapableofbeingtestedperiodicallybytheAuthoritytoensurethatthe
deviceisfunctioningefficientlyandnobackflowisoccurringatanytime.
5.16
LAYINGOFPIPESONSITE
5.16.1
ExcavationofTrenchesandRefilling
a) Thebottomsofthetrenchexcavationsshallbesopreparedthatthebarrelsofthepipes,whenlaid,arewell
beddedfortheirwholelengthonafirmsurfaceandaretruetolineandgradient.
b) Intherefillingoftrenches,thepipesshallbesurroundedwithfineselectedmaterial,wellrammedsoasto
resistsubsequentmovementofthepipes.
c) Nostonesshallbeincontactwiththepipes;whenrestingonrock,thepipesshallbebeddedonfineselected
materialor(especiallywherethereisasteepgradient)onalayerofconcrete.
d) Thewidthofexcavationtrenchshallbeatleast0.4mmorethantheoutsidediameterofthepipe.
e) The depth of ground cover shall be at least 0.9 m under roadway or 0.75 m under garden from the top
surfaceofthepipetothegroundsurface.
8230
Vol.3
WaterSupply
f)
Chapter5
Thebottomofthetrenchshallbecarefullypreparedsothatthepipewillbebeddedwellforitsentirelength
onfirmsurface.
5.16.2
LayingofPipe
a) Thepipesshallbecarefullyclearedofallforeignmatterbeforebeinglaid.
b) Inslopingground,thepipelayingshallproceedinupwarddirection.Thepipeshallbeprovidedwithanchor
blockstowithstandhydraulicpressure.
5.16.3
LayingofPipeThroughDucts,Chases,NotchesorHoles
Provisionsforlayingpipesinductsorchaseshallbemadeduringthetimeofconstruction.Whenthesewillbecut
into existing walls, they shall be large enough with smooth finishing for fixing the pipe and to accommodate
thermalexpansion.Pipingsubjecttoexternalpressureshallnotbelaidinnotchesorholes.
5.16.4
LaggedPiping
Laggedpipingshallbeentirelycoveredwithwaterproofandfireinsulatingmaterialsbeforetheirattachmentto
the walls outside the building and shall be anchored with the wall keeping a gap in between the wall and the
piping.
5.16.5
JointingofPipes
Alljointsandconnectionsshallbegastightandwatertightforthepressurerequiredbythetestinaccordance
withSec5.22.2.Thejointsbetweendifferentpipingandfittingsforwatersupplyshallconformtothestandards
citedagainsttheminTable8.5.13.Therequirementsforthejointsnotspecifiedinthetableshallbesubjecttothe
approvaloftheAuthority.
Table8.5.13:JointsBetweenDifferentPipingandFittings
Material
Standard
ABSplasticpipeandfittings
ASTM D2235, ASTM D2661, ASTM

D3139,ASTMF628ASMEB1.20.1
Asbestos,cementpipeandfittings
ASTMD1869
Brasspipeandfittings
ASMEB1.20.1
Castironpipeandfittings
ASTMC564
Copperandcopperalloypipeandfittings
ASTMB32,ASMEB1.20.1
PVCplasticpipeandfittings

F493,ASMEB1.20.1
Galvanizedsteelpipeandfittings
ASMEB1.20.1
PBplasticpipe,tubingandfittings

D3309
PEplasticpipe,tubingandfittings
ASTMD2657

D3139, ASTM D3212, ASTM F402,
ASTMF656,ASMEB1.20.1
5.16.6
SpecialCareforRatProofing
The location and installation of water meter box shall be such as not to permit the entrance of rats into the
building.Theopeningsthroughwalls,floorsorceilingsfortheinstallationofpipingshallbeclosedbyusingproper
collarstopreventtheentranceofrats.
8231
Part8
BuildingServices
5.17
HANGERSANDSUPPORT
Thepipingsystemshallbeinstalledwithproperhangersandsupporttominimizeunduestrainsandstresses.All
fixturesandfittingsshallbeprovidedwithhangersandsupporttosecurethemproperly.
5.17.1
Galvanicaction
Hangers,anchorsandstrappingmaterialsshallbestrongandductileandshallnotpromotegalvanicaction.
5.17.2
HangerSpacing
VerticalandhorizontalpipingshallbesupportedinaccordancewithTable8.5.14.
Table8.5.14:HangerSpacing
PipingMaterial
Max.Horizontal
Max.Vertical
Spacing(m)
Spacing(m)
Galvanizedsteelpipe
3.5
4.5
Copperpipeorcopperalloytubing>38mmdiameter
3.5
3.0
Copperpipeorcopperalloytubing<38mmdiameter
2.0
3.0
PVCpipeandtubing
1.0
1.0
Aluminiumtubing
3.0
4.5
Brasspipe
3.0
3.0
5.18
PROTECTIONOFPOTABLEWATERSUPPLY
5.18.1
Crossconnection
Potable water supply system shall be protected against nonpotable water sources or wastes (solid, liquid or
gases). There shall be no crossconnection between potable water distribution system and nonpotable water
distributionorwastedisposalsystem.
5.18.2
Submergedoutlet
Frompotablewatersupplysystemshallbeavoided.Connectionofpotablewatertoboilerfeedwatersystem,or
heatingorcoolingsystemshallbemadethroughproperairgap.
5.18.3
Coolingwater
Waterusedforcoolingorforotherpurposesshallnotbereturnedtothepotablewatersupplysystem.
5.18.4
Backflow
Potable water supply system shall be protected against backflow either by air gap or by back flow preventor.
Reflexnonreturnvalveshallnotbeusedforthispurpose.Detailshavebeenexplainedinsection5.15.2.
5.18.5
BackflowProtections
The connection of potable water for health care plumbing fixtures shall be protected against backflow in
accordancewithTable8.5.15.
5.18.6
AirGap
The minimum air gaps for different water supply openings or outlet shall be at least 3 times the effective
opening when they will be placed close to a wall. The minimum air gaps shall be at least 2times the effective
openingwhentheywillbelocatedawayfromawall.
8232
Vol.3
WaterSupply
Chapter5
Table8.5.15:WaterSupplyProtectionforHospitalFixtures
5.18.7
Fixtures
ProtectionsRequired
Aspirators
Vacuumbreaker
Bedpanwasher
Vacuumbreaker
Boilingtypesterilizer
Airgap
Exhaustcondenser
Vacuumbreaker
Flushfloordrain
Vacuumbreaker
Houseconnection
Vacuumbreaker
Pressuresterilizer
Vacuumbreaker
Vacuumsystem
Airgaporvacuumbreaker
(cleaningandfluidsection)
Potablewatersupplyconnectiontoanycisternorapparatuscontainingchemical(s)shallbedoneonlywiththe
specialapprovalforsuchconnectionbytheAuthorityandshallbemarkedbyatag.
5.18.8
Allpipingandfittingshallbedesigned,installedandmaintainedastobeandtoremaincompletelyairtightand
therebyavoidingwasteofwater,damagetopropertyandtoavoidtheriskofcontamination.
5.18.9
Nonpotablewatersupplysystemshallhavetobepaintedandmarkedbyatag.
5.18.10
Flushingvalveoperatedwaterclosetswheninstalledinanybuildingshallbesuppliedthroughaseparatebranch
pipewithabackflowpreventeratthestartingpointwherethebranchpipeistakenofffromthesupplypipe.
5.19
HEALTHCAREWATERSUPPLY
5.19.1
GeneralRequirement
Allhospitalsshallhaveatleasttwoservicepipesfromtheindividualwatersupplysourceorfromthewatermain
forsupplyingwaterwithoutanyinterruption.Forroofstoragesystem,thehospitalshallhaveatleasttwostorage
tanks such that each of them is capable of serving the water distribution system in absence of the other. All
specialfixturesshallbeinstalledwithoutinterferencetothetransportationandtothesafetyofpatientandstaff.
5.19.2
HotWaterSupply
Allhospitalsshallbeequippedtosupplyhotwaterasrequiredbydifferentfixturesandequipment.
5.19.3
WaterSupplyProtection
The water supply connection to all special equipment or fixtures shall be protected against backflow, flooding,
foulingandcontaminationofwatersupplysysteminaccordancewithSection5.9.
5.20
CLEANINGANDDISINFECTINGTHESYSTEM
5.20.1
General
Thenewandrepairedpotablewatersupplysystemincludingstoragetankshallbedisinfectedbeforetheiruse.
The existing water supply system shall be cleaned and disinfected depending upon the quality of water. The
storagetankshallbecleanedanddisinfectedatleastonceayear.
8233
Part8
BuildingServices
5.20.2
DisinfectionProcedure
Thefollowingproceduremaybeadoptedtodisinfecttheplumbingsystem:
a) Thewatersupplysystemorstoragetankshallbeflushedwithpotablewateruntilcleanwaterappearsatthe
outlets.
b) Thesystemorpartthereofwhichrequiresdisinfectionshallbefilledupwithchlorinatedwatercontaining50
mg/lofchlorinefor24hoursorfor3hourswithachlorinatedwaterofchlorineconcentrationof200mg/l.
c) After the period of disinfection, the system shall be flushed with potable water until the chlorine is
completelyremovedfromthewaterinthesystem.
d) The above procedureshall berepeateduntil thebacteriologicalexamination shows presence of no water
contaminationwithinthesystem.
5.21
INSPECTION,TESTINGANDCOMPLETIONCERTIFICATE
5.21.1
Inspection
Pipingandjointsshallnotbeenclosed,concealedorcovereduntiltheyhavebeeninspectedandapprovedbythe
Authority. All piping and fixtures shall be inspected for satisfactory supports and protection from damage and
corrosion.
5.21.2
Testing
After installation of the entire water supply system or part thereof, it shall be tested and approved by the
Authoritybeforeitsuse.
a) Testing of Water Mains : The section of the main to be tested shall be charged with water carefully by
providinga25mminletwithastopcocktoexpelallairfromthemain.Themainshallbeallowedtostandfull
ofwaterforafewdays.Afterthatthemainsshallbetestedtoapressureof500kPaordoublethemaximum
workingpressure,whicheverisgreaterforatleast5minutes.Thesystemshallbeabletomaintaintheabove
testpressure.
b) TestingofDistributionPipesandFixtures:Thedistributionsystemtobetestedshallbeslowlyandcarefully
chargedwithwatertoexpelallairfromthesystemandtoavoidallshocksandwaterhammer.Thepipingand
fittingsshallbeabsolutelywatertightwhenalldrawofftapsareclosed.Thesystemshallbeabletomaintain
thepressuresandflowrequiredunderworkingconditions.
c) Testing of Hot Water System : The entire hot water system shall be tested for the maximum rated
temperatureandpressureofhotwaterstoragesystem.Thesystemshallbeabletomaintaintherequired
testpressure.Allsafetydevicesshallbetestedfortheirproperoperation.
5.21.3
Thelicensedplumbershallissuecompletioncertificateinaprescribedform(Appendix8.5.B)totheAuthorityon
completionofthewatersupplysystemorpartthereofforinspectionandtesting.Aftertesting,theAuthoritywill
allowthewaterconnectionfromthewatermain(ifany)andgivethefinalapproval(Appendix8.5.B)tousethe
system.
5.22
GUIDETOMAINTENANCE
Theownerorhis/herdesignatedagentshallmaintainthewatersupplysysteminasafeoperatingcondition as
specifiedbytheCode.
8234
Vol.3
WaterSupply
5.22.1
Chapter5
FrequencyofCleaning
The storage tank shall be inspected regularly and shall be cleaned and disinfected periodically. Metal tanks
showingthesignofcorrosionshallbecoatedasspecifiedinSection5.9.2.2.
5.22.2
OverflowPipe
Theoverflowpipesofstoragetankshallbeinspectedregularlytokeeptheflowfreefromobstruction.
5.22.3
WaterQuality
Aperiodicalexaminationofwaterqualitymaybemade.
5.23
INDIVIDUALWATERSUPPLYSYSTEM
5.23.1
General
Intheabsenceofapublicwatersupply,the individualpotablewatersourceshallbeusedtosupplywaterina
distributionsystem.Thefollowingwatersourcesmaybeusedforindividualwatersupplypurposes:drilledwell,
dugwell,drivenwell,spring,infiltrationgallery.
5.23.2
WaterRequirements
ThecapacityofsourceshallbesufficienttosupplywaterasspecifiedinSection5.5.
5.23.3
QualityofWater
Water from developed well or cistern shall meet the potable water quality standard requirements specified by
theDepartmentofEnvironment,Bangladesh.
5.23.4
Chlorination
Thewellorcisternshallbechlorinatedaftertheirconstructionorrepair.
5.23.5
LocationofWaterSource
Theminimumdistanceofwatersourceandpumpsuctionlinefrompotentialsourcesofcontaminationshallbein
Table8.5.16:DistancefromPotentialSourcesofContamination
PotentialSourceofContamination
Distance(m)
Pumpfloordrainofcastiron,drainingtogroundsurface
Sewer
Farmsilo
Septictank
Subsurfacepit/Seepagepit
15
Subsurfacedisposalfield
15
Barnyard
30
Pasture
30
5.23.6
WellConstruction
5.23.6.1
LocationofWaterTable
Theindividualwatersupplyshallnotbedevelopedfromawaterbearingstratumwithwatertableatadepthless
than3mbelowthegroundsurface.
8235
Part8
BuildingServices
5.23.6.2
OutsideCasing
The outside watertight casing shall have to be installed for each well up to a depth of at least 3 m below the
groundsurfaceandshallprojectatleast150mmabovethegroundsurface.Thelowerendofthecasingshallbe
sealedinanimpermeablestratumorextendintothewaterbearingstratum.Thesizeofthecasingshallbelarge
enoughtopermittheinstallationofanindependentdroppipe.Thecasingmaybeofconcrete,tile,orgalvanized
or corrugated metal pipe. The annular space between the casing and the earth shall be filled with grout to a
minimumdepthof3m.Forfloodproneregions,topofthecasingorpipesleeveshallbeatleast300mmabove
thefloodlevel.
5.23.6.3
WellCover
Allpotablewellsshallbeequippedwithawatertightcoveroverlappingthetopofthecasingorpipesleeve.Fordugorboredwell,
theoverlapanddownwardextensionofthecovershallbeatleast50mmoutsidethewellcasingorwell.Theannularspacebetween
thecasingorpipesleeveandthedroppipeshallhaveawatertightsealing.
5.23.6.4
DrainagefromWellPlatformorPumpHouse
Theconstructionofwellplatformorpumphouseshallbesuchthatthiswilldrainawayfromthewellbygravity.
5.23.7
PumpingEquipment
Thedesign,installationandconstructionofpumpsshallbesuchthattheywillnotpermittheentranceofanycontaminatingmaterial
intothewellorwatersupplysystem.Thepumpshallbeaccessibleforinspection,maintenanceandrepair.
RelevantAppendices:
Appendix8.5.A ApplicationforPermittoConstructWaterSupplyandDistributionSystem
Appendix8.5.BCompletionCertificate(WaterSupplyWorks)
Appendix8.5.C SizingofColdWaterSupplyandDistributionPiping
Appendix8.5.D RecommendedWaterQualityforDomesticPurposes.
8236
Vol.3
Chapter 6
SanitaryDrainage
6.1
PURPOSE
Thepurposeofthischapteristosetforthprovisionsforplanning,designandinstallationofwastedisposalsystems
inandoutofbuildings
6.2
SCOPE
6.2.1
Thischapterspecifiesthegeneralrequirementsforenvironmentalsanitationfordifferentcategoriesofbuildings
accordingtotheiroccupancyclassification.
6.2.2
This chapter alsocovers the design, installation and maintenance ofdrainage systems togetherwith all ancillary
workssuchasmanholesandinspectionchambersusedwithinthebuildingandfromthebuildingtopublicsewers
ortooffsitewastedisposalsystem(i.e.intoseptictanksandseepagepitsorsubsurfacedrainagesystem).
6.2.3
Thedisposalofwastesfromindustries,nuclearplants,slaughterhouses,etc.arenotcoveredbythisCode.These
wastes shall be properly treated as specified by environmental quality standards of Bangladesh before their
disposalintopublicsewersorintonaturalbodiesofwater.
6.3
TERMINOLOGY
ThissectionprovidesanalphabeticallistofalltermsusedandapplicabletothischapteroftheCode.Incaseofany
conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in any other chapter or part of the
Code,themeaningspecifiedinthischaptershallgovernforinterpretationoftheprovisionsofthischapter.
BEDDINGFACTOR:Theratiooftheproductofdesignloadandfactorofsafetytotheminimumcrushingstrength.
BRANCH:Anypartofthepipingsystemotherthanamain,riser,orstack.
BRANCHINTERVAL:Thelengthofsoilorwastestackcorrespondingingeneraltoastoreyheight,butinnocase
less than 2.5 m within which the horizontal branches from one floor or storey of building are connected to the
stack.
BRANCHVENT:Theventconnectingoneormoreindividualventswithaventstackorstackvent.
BUILDING DRAIN : The building (house) drain is that part of the lowest piping or open channel of a drainage
systemwhichreceivesthedischargesfromsoil,waste,andotherdrainagesystemsinsidethewallsofthebuilding
andconveysthesametothebuilding(house)sewer,beginningat0.9moutsidethebuildingwall.
Part8
BuildingServices
8237
Part8
BuildingServices
BUILDING SEWER : The building (house) sewer is that part of the horizontal piping of a drainage system which
extendsfromtheendofthebuildingdrainandwhichreceivesthedischargeofthebuildingdrainandconveysitto
apublicsewer,privatesewer,individualsewagedisposalsystem,orotherpointofdisposal.AlsoknownasSEWER.
CIRCUITVENT:Ventingofbranchdrainagepipewithwhichmultiplefixturesareconnectedinbattery.
DRAIN:Adrainisanypipeoropenchannelwhichcarrieswastewaterorwaterbornewastesinabuildingdrainage
system.
DRAINAGESYSTEM:Adrainagesystem(drainagepiping)includesallthepipingwithinpublicorprivatepremises,
which conveys sewage, rain water, or other liquid wastes to a legal point of disposal, but does not include the
mainsofapublicsewersystemoraprivateorpublicsewagetreatmentordisposalplant.
DRINKINGFOUNTAIN:Afountainoratapwithpotablewatersupplyconnection.
EXISTINGWORK:Theexistingworkisaplumbingsystemoranypartthereofwhichwasinstalledpriortothedate
ofenforcementofthisCode.
FIXTUREUNIT:Afixtureunitisaquantityintermsofwhichtheloadproducingeffectsontheplumbingsystemof
differentkindsofplumbingfixturesareexpressedonsomearbitrarilychosenscale.
FLUSHVALVES:Aflushvalveisadeviceinstalledonthefixturesforthepurposeofflushingthosefixtures.
FRENCHDRAIN:Ashallowtrenchfilledwithcoarserubble,clinkerorsimilarmaterialwithorwithoutfielddrain
pipes.
GRADE:Thegradeistheslopeorfallofapipeinreferencetoahorizontalplane.Indrainageitisusuallyexpressed
asthefallinmmpermlengthofpipe.
HORIZONTALBRANCH:Ahorizontalbranchisadrainpipeextendinglaterallyfromasoilorwastestackorbuilding
drain,withorwithoutverticalsectionsorbranches,whichreceivesthedischargefromoneormorefixturedrains
andconductsittothesoilorwastestackortothebuilding(house)drain.
HORIZONTALPIPE:Ahorizontalpipeisanypipeorfittingwhichisinstalledinahorizontalpositionorwhichmakes
anangleoflessthan45degreeswiththehorizontal.
IMHOFF TANK: These are twostoreyed settling cum digestion tanks used for primary treatment of domestic
sewageinaveryanaerobicenvironment.
INDIVIDUALVENT: An individual vent is a pipe installed to vent a fixture trap and which connects with the vent
systemabovethefixtureservedorterminatesintheopenair.
INTERCEPTOR: An interceptor is a device designed and installed so as to separate and retain deleterious,
hazardous, or undesirable matter from normal wastes and permit normal or liquid wastes to discharge into the
disposalterminalbygravity.
INVERT:Thelowestpointoftheinternalsurfaceofapipeorchannelatanycrosssection.
KITCHENSINK:Sinkorwashingfacilitiesraisedaboveoratthelevelofthefloorfittedwithatap.
LEADER:Averticaldrainagepipethatcarriesrainwaterfromrooforgutterdraintobuildingstormdrainorbuilding
drainorprivatedisposalsystem.ItisalsocalledRainwaterDownPipe(RDP)
LIQUIDWASTE:Theliquidwasteisthedischargefromanyfixture,appliance,orappurtenanceinconnectionwitha
plumbingsystemwhichdoesnotreceivefaecalmatter.
LOAD FACTOR: The load factor is the percentage of the total connected fixture unit flow rate which is likely to
occuratanypointinthedrainagesystem.Itvarieswiththetypeofoccupancy,thetotalflowunitabovethepoint
beingconsidered,andwiththeprobabilityfactorofsimultaneoususe.
8238
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
LOCALVENTSTACK:Averticalpipingtowhichconnectionsaremadefromthedischargesideoftrapsandthrough
whichvapourorfoulgasisremovedfromthefixtureordeviceusedonbedpanwasher.
LOOPVENT:AlsocalledCircuitvent.SeeCIRCUITVENT.
MAIN:Themainofanysystemofcontinuouspipingistheprincipalarteryofthesystem,towhichbranchesmaybe
connected.
MAINSEWER:SeePUBLICSEWER.
MAINVENT:Themainventistheprincipalarteryoftheventingsystem,towhichventbranchesareconnected.
MANHOLE:Anopeningthroughwhichamanmayenterorleaveadrain,asewerorotherclosedstructurefor
inspection,cleaningandothermaintenanceoperations,fittedwithasuitablecover.
MANHOLECHAMBER:Achamberconstructedonadrainorsewersoastoprovideaccesstheretoforinspection,
testingortheclearanceofobstruction.
NONSERVICELATRINE:Alatrineotherthanservicelatrine.
OFFSET:Anoffsetinalineofpipingisacombinationofelbowsorbendswhichbringsonesectionofthepipeout
oflinebutintoalineparallelwiththeothersection.
PIPESYSTEM:Thesystemtobeadoptedwilldependonthetypeandplanningofthebuildinginwhichitistobe
installedandwillbeoneofthefollowing:
a) SingleStackSystem(seeFig8.6.1):Theonepipesystemwithouttrapventilationpipework.
b) OnePipeSystem(seeFig8.6.2):Theplumbingsysteminwhichthewastefromsinks,bathroomsandwash
basins,andsoilpipebranchesareallcollectedintoonemainpipeconnecteddirectlytothedrainagesystem.Gully
trapsandwastepipesarecompletelydispensedwithbutallthetrapsofwaterclosets,basins,etc.arecompletely
ventilatedtopreservethewaterseal.
c) TwoPipeSystem(seeFig8.6.3):Adischargepipesystemcomprisingtwoindependentdischargepipes,one
conveying soil directly to the drain, the other conveying waste water to the drain through a trapped gully. The
systemmayalsorequireventilatingpipes.
PLUMBING : The plumbing includes the practice, materials, and fixtures used in the installation, maintenance,
extension, and alteration of all piping, fixtures, appliances, and appurtenances in connection with any of the
following:sanitarydrainageorstormdrainagefacilities,theventingsystemandthepublicorprivatewatersupply
systems,withinoradjacenttoanybuilding,structure,orconveyance;alsothepracticeandmaterialsusedinthe
installation,maintenance,extension,oralterationofthestormwater,liquidwaste,orsewerage,andwatersupply
systemsofanypremisestotheirconnectionwithinanypointofpublicdisposalorotheracceptableterminal.
PLUMBINGFIXTURES:Theplumbingfixturesareinstalledreceptacles,devices,orapplianceswhicharesupplied
withwaterorwhichreceiveordischargeliquidsorliquidbornewastes,withorwithoutdischargeintothedrainage
systemwithwhichtheymaybedirectlyorindirectlyconnected.
PLUMBINGSYSTEM:Theplumbingsystemincludesthewatersupplyanddistributionpipes,plumbingfixturesand
traps, soil, waste and vent pipes, building drains and building sewers, including their respective connections,
devices, and appurtenances within the property lines of the premises, and water treating or water using
equipment.
PUBLICSEWER : A public sewer is a common sewer directlycontrolled by public authority. Alsoknown as MAIN
SEWER.
RELIEFVENT:Areliefventisaventtheprimaryfunctionofwhichistoprovidecirculationofairbetweendrainage
andventsystems(Fig8.6.6).
8239
Part8
BuildingServices
RISER:Awatersupplypipethatextendsverticallyonefullstoreyormoretoconveywatertobranchesorfixtures.
SANITARYSEWER:Asanitarysewerisapipewhichcarriessewageandexcludesstorm,surface,andgroundwater.
AlsoknownasSEWER.
SEEPAGEPIT:SeeSOAKPIT.
SEPTICTANK:Aseptictankisawatertightsettlingtankwhichreceivesthedischargeofadrainagesystemorpart
thereofandisdesignedandconstructedsoastoseparatesolidsfromtheliquid,digestorganicmatterthrougha
periodofdetention,andallowtheliquidstodischargeintothesoiloutsidethetankthroughasystemofopenjoint
orperforatedpipingordisposalpit(Fig8.6.15).
SERVICELATRINE:Alatrinefromwhichtheexcretaareremovedbymanualagencyandnotbywatercarriage.
SEWAGE:Thesewageisanyliquidwastecontaininganimalorvegetablematterinsuspensionorsolutionandmay
includeliquidscontainingchemicalsinsolution.
SEWER:SeeBUILDINGSEWERorPUBLICSEWERorSANITARYSEWERorSTORMSEWER.
SLUDGE : A settled portion of the sewage or waste water effluent from a sedimentation tank in semisolid
condition.
SOAKPIT:Apit,dugintopermeablesoillinedtoformacoveredperforatedchamberorfilledwithsandatthe
bottomandgravelorbrokenbricksatthetopintowhicheffluentfromseptictankorstormwaterisledandfrom
whichthesemaysoakawayintotheground.AlsoknownasSEEPAGEPITorSOAKWELL.
SOAKWELL:SeeSOAKPIT.
SOILPIPE:Asoilpipeisanypipewhichconveysthedischargeofwaterclosets,urinals,orfixtureshavingsimilar
functions,withorwithoutthedischargefromotherfixtures,tothebuildingdrainorbuildingsewer.
SOILVENT:SeeSTACKVENT.
STACK:Astackistheverticalmainofasystemofsoil,waste,orventpiping.
STACKVENT:Astackvent(sometimescalledawasteventorsoilvent)istheextensionofsoilorwastestackabove
thehighesthorizontaldrainconnectedtothestack.AlsoknownasSOILVENT.
STACKVENTING:Stackventingisamethodofventingafixtureorfixturesthroughthesoilorwastestack.
STERILIZER VENT : A separate pipe or stack, indirectly connected to the building drainage system at the lower
terminal, which receives the vapour from non pressure sterilizers or the exhaust from pressure sterilizers and
conductthevapourdirectlytotheouterair.
SUBSOILDRAIN:Asubsoildrainisadrainwhichreceivesonlysubsurfaceorseepagewaterandconveysittoa
placeofdisposal.
SULLAGE:Thedischargefromwashbasins,sinksandsimilarappliances,whichdoesnotcontainhumanoranimal
excreta.
SUMP : A sump is a tank or pit which receives sewage or liquid waste, located below the normal grade of the
gravitysystem,andwhichmustbeemptiedbymechanicalmeans.
SUPPORTS:Thesupports,hangers,andanchorsaredevicesforsupportingandsecuringpipeandfixturestowalls,
ceilings,floors,orstructuralmembers.
TRAP:Atrapisafittingordevicesodesignedandconstructedastoprovide,whenproperlyvented,aliquidseal
whichwillpreventthebackpassageofairorgaswithoutmateriallyaffectingtheflowofsewageorwastewater
throughit.
8240
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
TRAPSEAL:Thetrapsealisthemaximumverticaldepthofliquidthatatrapwillretain,measuredbetweenthe
crownweirandthetopofthedipofthetrap.
VENTPIPE:SeeVENTSYSTEM.
VENTSTACK:Aventstackisaverticalventpipeinstalledprimarilyforthepurposeofprovidingcirculationofairto
andfromanypartofthedrainagesystem.
VENTSYSTEM:Aventsystemisapipeorpipesinstalledtoprovideaflowofairtoorfromadrainagesystemorto
provideacirculationofairwithinsuchsystemtoprotecttrapsealsfromsiphonageandbackpressure.Alsoknown
asVENTPIPE.
VERTICALPIPE:Averticalpipeisanypipeorfittingwhichisinstalledinaverticalpositionorwhichmakesanangle
ofnotmorethan45degreeswiththevertical.
WASTEPIPE:Awastepipeisapipewhichconveysonlyliquidwastefreeoffaecalmatter.
YOKEVENT:Ayokeventisaventprovidedbetweendrainageandventstackstoprovidecirculationofairbetween
drainageandventsystems(Fig8.6.6).
6.4
DRAINAGEANDSANITATIONPLANS
6.4.1
RequirementofPermit
DrainageandsanitationsystemshallnotbeinstalleduntilapermitforsuchworkhasbeenissuedbytheAuthority
forexisting(onlyforadditionorforalteration)ornewbuildingorforanyotherpremises.
6.4.2
ApplicationforPermit
An application for a permit for drainage and sanitation work shall be made on a prescribed form (see Appendix
8.5.A)bythelicensedplumberandtheowner,orbyhisappointedpersonoragenttoinstallalloraselfcontained
orworkablepartofsuchwork.Theapplicationshallaccompanybuildingdrainageplansandadequatedescription
oftheproposeddrainageandsanitationinstallationinadrawing(drawntoascalenotlessthan1:100)withthe
followingdetails:
a)
plan(s)ofthebuildingwithtypicalarrangementofplumbingfixtures;
b) sanitarywastedisposalsystem;
c)
ventingsysteminthebuildingdrainagesystem;
d) materials,sizesandgradientsofallproposedpiping;
e) the position of manhole, traps, waste pipe, rainwater pipe, vent pipe, water closet, urinal,
lavatory, sink or other appliances in the premises and their connection with sewerage/drainage
system or with private waste disposal system; the following colours may be used to indicate
sewers,wastewaterpipes,rainwaterpipesandexistingworks:
proposedsanitarysewersandsanitarywastedisposalpipes:
red
proposedsanitarysewersandsanitarywastedisposalpipes:
blue
existingnetwork:
black
f)
the position of refuse chute, inlet hopper and collection chamber for buildings more than six
storeyshigh.
8241
Part8
BuildingServices
6.4.3
Inadditiontodrainageplanaseparatesiteplanofthebuildingshallbesubmittedwiththefollowingparticulars:
a)
adjoiningplotsandstreetswiththeiridentification;
b) thepositionandinvertlevelofthepublicsewers(ifany)andthedirectionofflowinit;
c)
theleveloftheproposeddrainsconnectingtothesewers(ifany);
d) thepositionandlayoutofprivatewastedisposalsystem(inabsenceofpublicsewers);and
e) thealignment,sizeandgradientsofalldrains.
6.4.4
For high rise buildings, design calculations and specifications for various items of the work involved shall be
submittedalongwiththedrawings.
6.4.5
PermitsandApprovals
Thebuildingofficialshallexamineorcausetobeexaminedallapplicationsforpermitsand,amendmentsthereto
within45days.Iftheapplicationdoesnotconformtotherequirementsofallpertinentlaws,suchapplicationshall
berejectedinwriting,statingthereasonstherefore.IftheproposedworksatisfiesalltheCoderequirements,the
Authorityshallissueanontransferablepermit.
6.5
LICENSINGOFPLUMBER
6.5.1
LicenseRequirement
No individual, partnership, corporation or firm shall engage in the business of installation, repair, alteration or
maintenanceofplumbing,drainageandsanitationworkwithoutobtainingalicensefromtheAuthority.
6.5.2
ExaminationandCertification
TheBuildingAuthorityshallestablishaplumbersexaminationboard.Theboardwilldeterminetherequirements
for the qualification and procedures for examination ofapplicants for license. The Authoritywill issue license to
such applicants who meet the qualifications therefore and successfully pass the examination conducted by the
board.
6.5.3
AnnulmentofLicense
ThelicenseofalicensedplumbermaybenullifiedbytheBuildingAuthority,ifitisprovedthataplumbingworkhas
been completed and certified by the licensed plumber violating the provisions of this Code deliberately setting
asidetheapprovalsgiveninthepermitorwithoutreceivingthepermitfromtheBuildingAuthority.
6.6
DRAINAGEANDSANITATIONREQUIREMENT
6.6.1
General
6.6.1.1
Eachfamilydwellingunitonpremisesabuttingapublicsewerorwithaprivatewastedisposalsystemshallhaveat
leastonewaterclosetandonekitchensinkorwashingfacilities.Itisrecommendedtohaveatleastonebathroom
withabathtuborshowertomeetthebasicrequirementsofsanitationandpersonalhygieneandinthatcasebath
andwaterclosetshallbeseparatelyaccommodated.
8242
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
6.6.1.2
All other structures for human occupancy or use on premises abutting a sewer or with a private waste disposal
systemshallhaveadequatesanitaryfacilitiesbutinnocaselessthanonewaterclosetandoneotherfixturefor
cleaningpurposes.
6.6.1.3
Thereshallbeonewatertapandarrangementfordrainageinthevicinityofeachwaterclosetinallbuildings.
6.6.1.4
Thereshallbeatleastonewatertapandarrangementfordrainageinthevicinityofeachurinalorgroupofurinals
inallbuildings.
6.6.1.5
There shall be separate facilities for each sex for public toilets and for public bathing places based on the
percentageofeachanticipatedsex.
6.6.1.6
Wheredrinkingwaterfountainisprovided,itshallnotbeinstalledintoiletroom.
6.6.1.7
Rooms containing water closets or urinals shall be separated by partition wall from places where food will be
preparedandserved.
6.6.1.8
Allwaterclosetsandurinalsshallbeprovidedwithflushingsystem.
6.6.2
MinimumNumberofFixtures
Table8.6.1andSec6.6.2.1and6.6.2.2providetheminimumnumberoffixturesrequiredfordifferentcategoriesof
buildingsaccordingtotheiroccupancyclassifications.Thefixturerequirementfortheoccupancynotprovidedin
thesesectionsshallbesubjecttotheapprovaloftheBuildingAuthority.
6.6.2.1
TheSizeofdrainagepipeoffixturesshallbeprovidedasshowninTable8.6.0.
Table8.6.0:Theminimuminternaldiameterforsanitaryappliancesshallbeasfollows:
SanitaryApplianceMinimumInternalDiameterofWasteOutletmm
Soilappliances
a)IndianandEuropeantypewater
100
closets
b)Bedpanwashersandslopsinks
100
c)Urinalwithintegraltraps
75
8243
Part8
BuildingServices
d)Stallurinals(withnotmorethan50
120mmofchanneldrainage)
40
e)Lippedurinalsmallhge
40
Wasteappliances
6.6.2.2
f)Drinkingfountain
25
g)Washbasin
32
h)Bidets
32
j)Domesticsinksandbaths
40
k)Showerbathtrays
40
m)Domesticbathtubs
50
n)Hotelandcanteensinks
50
p)Floortraps(outletdiameter)
65
AutomaticClothesWashers
Waste connection. The waste from an automatic clothes washer shall discharge through an air break into a
standpipein.Thetrapandfixturedrainforanautomaticclotheswasherstandpipeshallbeaminimumof2inches
(51mm)indiameter.
6.6.2.3
Floordrains
Floor drains shall have removable strainers. The floor drain shall be constructed so that the drain is capable of
beingcleaned.Accessshallbeprovidedtothedrain.
6.6.2.4
PhysicallyHandicappedPlumbingFacilities
All buildings other than residential, educational, storage and hazardous according to building occupancy
classification,havingpublictoiletfacilitieswithrequirednumberoffixturesshallhaveatleastonewaterclosetfor
each sex (or one unisex water closet facility) and one drinking fountain accessible to and usable by physically
handicapped persons. The water closet compartment for physically handicapped persons shall be in accordance
withSec6.9.4.
6.6.2.5
DrainageandSanitationRequirementsforTrafficTerminalStations
a) The minimum sanitary conveniences provided at any traffic terminal station like railway station, bus station
etc.shallconsistofnonservicetypelatrinesoneforeachsex,andonenonservicetypeurinalformalesforadaily
passengervolumeupto300persons.Forlargestationsandairports,sanitaryarrangementsshallbeinaccordance
withTable8.6.1.
b) Thereshall beadequate arrangements for satisfactory drainage ofall sewage, sullage and waste water.The
drainage shall be so designed as to cause no stagnation at the maximum discharge rate for which the different
unitsaredesigned.
8244
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
c) Adequate scavenging arrangements shall be provided to keep the stations or terminals clear of all refuse.
Refusecontainersshallbeplacedatconvenientpoints.
6.6.3
Accessibility
ThefixturesspecifiedinSec7.6.2forpublicbuildingshallbelocatednotmorethanonefloorabovenormorethan
onefloorbelowtheflooroccupiedbythepeopleforwhoseusethefixturesareintended,unlesselevatorserviceis
available, except that in buildings which are accessible to the physically handicapped, there shall be minimum
facilities as specified bythe Code.Itis desirable thatthe path of travel tothe facilitiesshall not exceedatravel
distanceof150m.
6.7
MATERIALSANDAPPLIANCES
Different sanitary appliances, materials and fittings listed in Tables 8.6.1 to 8.6.4 and 8.5.9 (Chapter 5) shall
conformtothestandardoroneofthestandardscitedagainstthem.Forotherappliances,materialsandfittings
notprovidedinTables8.6.2to8.6.5and8.5.9(Chapter5)shallbesubjecttotheapprovaloftheBuildingAuthority.
Applicable standards for different materials and appliances have also been listed in Part5.
8245
Table8.6.1:PlumbingFixturesRequirement
TypeofBuildingOccupancy
AResidentialBuildings
A1DetachedSingleFamily
Dwelling
A2FlatsorApartments
A4MinimumStandardHousing
A3Mess,BoardingHousesand
Hostels
ForResidenceand
ResidentialStaff
ForNonresidentialStaff
RoomswhereinOutsidersare
Received
WaterClosets*
Urinals**
WashBasins***
BathtubsorShower
DrinkingFountains
OtherFixtures
1perdwellingorapartment
1perdwellingor
apartment
1perdwellingor
apartment
1kitchensink
perdwelling
Males:1for8persons
Females:1for6persons
Males:1for25persons
upto150persons.
Add1fixtureforeach
additional50persons
Males:
Nilupto6persons
1for720persons
2for2145persons
3for4670persons
4for71100persons
Males:1for8persons
Males:1for8persons
1for75persons
1kitchensinkin
eachkitchen
1for100persons
Males:
1for115persons
2for1635persons
3for3665persons
4for66100persons
Females:
1for112persons
2for1325persons
3for2640persons
4for4157persons
5for5877persons
6for78100persons
Males:
1for100personsupto400
personsandadd1fixturefor
additional250persons
Females:
personsandadd1fixturefor
additional100persons.
Males:
1for50persons
Males:
1for115persons
2for1635persons
3for3665persons
4for66100persons
Females:
1for112persons
2for1325persons
3for2640persons
4for4157persons
5for5877persons
6for78100persons
Male:
1perwaterclosetand1
perurinalorgroupof
urinals
Females:
1perwatercloset
(Continuedtonextpage)
Part8
BuildingServices
8246
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
Houses
ForResidentialPublicandStaff
ForPublicRooms
ForNonresidentialStaff
WaterClosets*
1for8personsomittingthe
occupantoftheroomwith
attachedwatercloset;
minimumof2ifbothsexare
lodged.
Males:
personsandadd1for
additional250personsor
partthereof.
Females:
personsandadd1for
additional100personsor
partthereof.
Males:
1for115persons
2for1635persons
3for3665persons
4for66100persons
Females:
1for112persons
2for1325persons
3for2640persons
4for4157persons
5for5877persons
6for78100persons
Table8.6.1(Contd.)
PlumbingFixturesRequirement
Urinals**
WashBasins***
1for10personsomitting
thewashbasinsinstalled
intheroomorsuite.
Males:
1for50persons
BathtubsorShower
1for10personsomitting
theoccupantsofthe
roomwithbathinsuite.
DrinkingFountains
1for100persons
OtherFixtures
1kitchensinkin
eachkitchen
1for100persons
1for100persons
Males:
1perwaterclosetand
1perurinalorgroupor
urinals
Females:
1perwatercloset
Males:
Nilupto6persons
1for720persons
2for2145persons
3for4670persons
4for71100persons
Males:
1for115persons
2for1635persons
3for3665persons
4for66100persons
Females:
1for112persons
2for1325persons
3for2640persons
4for4157persons
5for5877persons
6for78100persons
8247
Part8
BuildingServices
BEducationalBuilding
B1EducationFacilities
Table8.6.1(Contd.)
Urinals**
WashBasins***
Males:
Males:
1for20persons
1for60personsbut
minimum2
Females:
1for40personsbut
minimum2
1for15children
WaterClosets*
Males:
1for40persons
Females:
1for25persons
B2PreschoolFacilities
1for15children
CInstitutionalBuildings
C1InstitutionforCareof
Children
Boys:1forboys
Girls:1forgirls
C2CustodialInstitutionsfor
PhysicallyCapable
C3CustodialInstitutionforthe
Incapable
1unisexfacilityor1foreach
sexfor1100persons
2unisexfacilitiesor1unisex
facilityand1foreachsexfor
100200persons.Over200
personsoneadditional
unisexfacilityor1foreach
sexforeachadditional100
persons.
1percell
C4PenalandMentalInstitutions
8248
Urinalsmaybe
providedinboystoilet
roomsinlieuofwater
closetsbutfornot
morethanofthe
requirednumberof
waterclosets
BathtubsorShower
DrinkingFountains
OtherFixtures
1for50persons
Servicesink:
1perfloor.
1for50children
Boys:1for8boys
Girls:1for6girls
1for8persons(boysor
girls)
1for50persons
(boysorgirls)
1for200persons
1for10personsbutnot
lessthat1forusebyboth
sexes.
1for100persons
Servicesink:
1perfloor
1for15persons
1for100persons
Servicesink
1percell
Vol.3
Servicesink:
1perfloor
Servicesink:1
perfloor
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
DHealthCareBuilding
D1NormalMedicalFacilities
(IndoorPatientWard)
D2EmergencyMedicalFacilities
andOutdoorPatientWard
EAssemblyBuilding
E1largeAssemblywith
FixedSeats
E2SmallAssemblywith
FixedSeats
E3LargeAssembly
withoutFixedSeats
E4SmallAssembly
withoutFixedSeats
Mosque
Table8.6.1(Contd.)
Urinals**
WashBasins***
2upto30patientsand
add1fixturefor
additional30patients
WaterClosets*
1for8patient
(maleorfemale)
Males:1for100persons
1for30persons
Males:1for50persons
1fro100persons
BathtubsorShower
DrinkingFountains
1for8patients
1for75patients
1forpersons
OtherFixtures
Servicesink:
1foreachward.
Bedpanwashing
sink:1foreach
ward.
Kitchensink:
1foreachkitchen
Servicesink:
1foreachward
1for100persons
Watertapswith
drainage
arrangement:1for
10persons
1for100persons
JunctionStations,
IntermediateStations,
TerminalStationsand
BusTerminals
Males:Min2,4for1000
personsandadd1for
Females:Min2,5for1000
personsandthenadd1for
additional1000persons
Males:Min2,4for1000
personsandadd1for
Females:Min2,6for
1000personsandthen
add1foradditional1000
persons
Male:Min2,4for1000
personsandthenadd1
foradditional1000
persons
1for300persons
8249
Servicesink:
1perfloor
Part8
BuildingServices
DomesticAirport
Minimum
for200persons
for400persons
for600persons
for800persons
for1000persons
InternationalAirport
for200persons
for600persons
for1000persons
WaterClosets*
Males:2Females:2
Males:4Females:5
Males:6Females:8
Males:8Females:10
Males:9Females:13
Males:10Females:13
Males:6Females:10
Males:12Females:20
Males:18Females:29
Cinemas,Concerthalls,
Theatres(forpublicuse)
Males:1for100persons
Upto400persons.
Add1foreachadditional250persons.
Females:3for100personsupto200
persons.
Add2foreachadditional100persons.
Males:
1for115persons
2for1635persons
Females:
1for112persons
2for1325persons
Males:1for200personsupto400
persons.
Add1foreachadditional250persons
Females:1for100personsupto200
persons.
Add1foreachadditional150persons
Cinemas,Concerthalls,
Theatres(forpermanent
employeeuse)
ArtGalleries,Libraries,
Museums(forpublicuse)
Table8.6.1(Contd.)
Urinals**
WashBasins***
2
Males:1
4
Males:2
6
Males:4
Males:5
8
Males:6
9
Males:7
10
Males:8
10
Males:22
20
Males:22
25
Males:1for25persons
1for200persons
Males:Nilupto6
persons
1for720persons
2for2145persons
Males:
1for115persons
2for1635persons
Females:
1for112persons
2for1325persons
1for200personsupto
200personsandthenadd
1foradditional250
persons
Males:1for50persons
Table8.6.1(Contd.)
8250
Vol.3
BathtubsorShower
DrinkingFountains
1per300persons
OtherFixtures
Servicesink:
1perfloor
1for300persons
Servicesink:
1perfloor
1for500persons
Servicesink1
1for500persons
1for500persons
Servicesink:1
4showerstallsinthe
femalesormalestoiletin
thetransitanddeparture
loungeandalsointhe
mainconcourse
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
ArtGalleries,Libraries,
Museums(forpermanent
employeeuse)
E5SportsFacilities
FBusinessand
MercantileBuilding
F1Offices
F4GaragesandPetrolStations
F5EssentialServices
F2SmallShopsandMarkets
F3LargeShopsandMarkets
WaterClosets*
Males:
1for115persons
2for1635persons
Females:
1for112persons
2for1425persons
Males:1for75persons
Males:1for25persons
Female:1for15persons
1for500persons
Urinals**
Males:
Nilupto5persons
1for720persons
2for2145persons
BathtubsorShower
DrinkingFountains
1for100persons
OtherFixtures
Males:1for75persons
WashBasins***
Males:
1for115persons
2for1635persons
Females:
1for112persons
2for1425persons
1for60persons
1for50persons
1for300persons
Servicesink:1
1for100persons
Servicesink:
1perfloor.
1for1000persons
Servicesink:1
Males:Nilupto6
1for25persons
persons
1for720persons
2for2145persons
3for4670persons
4for71100persons
Add@3%for101200
personsand@2.5%for
over200persons
Urinalsmaybe
1for750persons
providedintoiletroom
inlieuofwaterclosets
formenbutfornot
morethanofthe
requirednumberof
waterclosets.
8251
Part8
BuildingServices
GIndustrialBuildings
Factories
HStorageBuildings
WaterClosets*
Males:
1for115persons
2for1635persons
3for3665persons
4for66100persons
Females:
1for112persons
2for1325persons
3for2640persons
4for4157persons
5for5877persons
6for78100persons
1for100persons
Table8.6.1(Contd.)
Urinals**
WashBasins***
Males:Nilupto6
1for25persons
persons
1for720persons
2for2145persons
3for4670persons
4for71100persons
Add@3%for101200
personsand@2.5%for
over200persons
1for100persons
DrinkingFountains
1for100persons
OtherFixtures
Servicesink:
1perfloor
Provisionsforemergency 1for1000persons
Servicesink:1
shower
JHazardousBuildings
1for100persons
1for100persons
Provisionsforemergency 1for1000persons
Servicesink:1
shower
*SomeofthewaterclosetsmaybeofEuropeanstyle.Thewatercloset(s)shallnotbeorientedintheeast2estdirection.
**Theurinal(s)shallnotbeorientedintheeastwestdirection.
***Toilet(s)ofpublicuseshallhaveatleastonewatertapwithadequatedrainagearrangementforablutionpurposewhenthenumbersofdevoteesexceedtwenty.
8252
BathtubsorShower
Asrequiredbyparticular
tradesoroccupations
Vol.3
Table8.6.2SanitaryAppliances
Appliances
Standard
Ceramicwashbasinandpedestals
Ceramicwashdownwaterclosetpans
BDS116287
BS1213
Footrestvitreouschina
BDS116387parts1&4
Integratedsquattingpansvitreouschina
Metalhandrinsebasin
Metalsinkfordomesticpurpose
BDS116387parts1&5
BS1329
BS1244
Urinals(bowltype)vitreouschina
Washdownwaterclosetpans,vitreouschina
Waterclosetseatplastic
Waterclosetflushingcisternsandpipes
BDS116387parts1&3
BDS116387parts1&2
BS1254
BS1125
Table8.6.3BuildingDrainageandVentPipe
Material
Standards
Acrylonitrilebutadienestyrene(ABSplasticpipe)
Aluminumtubing
Brasspipe
Castironpipe
Galvanizedsteelpipe
Polyvinylchlorideplasticpipe
ASTMD2661,ASTMF628
ASTMB429,ASTMB745M
ASTMB43
ASTMA74
ASTMB75M,ASTMB88M,
ASTMB251M,ASTMB306
ASTMA53
ASTMD2665,ASTMD2949,
ASTMF891
Table8.6.4BuildingSewerorBuildingStormSewerPipe
Material
Standards
Acrylonitrilebutadienestyrene(ABSplasticpipe)
ASTMD2261,ASTMD2751,ASTMF628,
ASTMD2321
Bihuminizedfibrepipe
ASTMD1861,ASTMD1862
Castironpipe
ASTMA74
Concretepipe
ASTMC14M,ASTMC76M
ASTMB75,ASTMB88M,ASTMB251M
UnplasticigedPolyvinylchloride(uPVC)plasticpipe ASTMD2665,ASTMD2949,
ASTMD3034,ASTMD2321,ASTMF891
Vitrifiedclaypipe
ASTMC4,ASTMC700
Table8.6.5SubsoilDrainagePipe
Material
Standard
Bituminousfibrepipe
ASTMD2311
Castironpipe
ASTMA74
Concretepipe
ASTMC654M
Polyethyline(PE)plasticpipe
ASTMF405
UnplasticigedPolyvinylchloride(uPVC)plastic
pipe
Vitrifiedclaypipe
ASTMD2729,ASTMF891
Part8
BuildingServices
ASTMC4,ASTMC700
8253
Part8
BuildingServices
6.8
HANGERSANDSUPPORTANDPIPEJOINTING
6.8.1
HangersandSupport
Thepiping,fixturesandequipmentusedforplumbing,watersupplyanddrainagesystemshallbeprovidedwith
hangersandsupportinaccordancewithSec5.13inChapter5.
6.8.2
PipeJoints
ThejointsbetweendifferentpipingandfittingsshallconformtothestandardscitedagainsttheminTable8.6.6.
The requirements for the joints not specified in the table shall be subject to the approval of the Building
Authority.
6.9
6.9.1
Objective
Forthedesignofdrainageandsanitationsystemofdifferentbuildingsaccordingtobuildingclassification,the
objectiveshallbetosafeguardagainstfouling,depositionofsolidsandcloggingandwithadequatecleanouts
andinspectionchamberssoarrangedthatthedrainsmaybereadilycleanedwithouttheriskofhealthhazard.
6.9.2
General
a) The plumbing system shall be designed and adjusted to use the minimum quantity of water consistent
withproperperformanceandcleaning.
b)
Plumbing fixtures, devices and appurtenances shall be supplied with required volume of water at
pressuresadequatetoenablethesetofunctionproperlyandwithoutunduenoiseundernormalconditionsof
use.
6.9.3
DifferentBuildingDrainageSystems
For the design and installation for drainage piping, one of the following building drainage systems shall be
adopted:
i.
singlestacksystem,
ii.
onepipesystem,and
iii.
twopipesystem.
Table8.6.6JointsBetweenDifferentPipesandFittings
Material
8254
Standard
ABSplasticpipeandfittings

D3212,ASTMF628ASMEB1.20.1
Aluminiumtubing
Asbestoscementpipeandfittings
Brasspipeandfittings
Castironpipeandfittings
Concretepipeandfittings
CopperorCopperalloypipeandfittings
Copperalloytubingandfittings
CPVCplasticpipeandfittings
Galvanizedsteelpipeandfittings
PEplasticpipeandfittings
ASTMC564
ASTMD1869
ASMEB1.20.1
ASTMC564
ASTMC443
ASTMB32,ASMEB1.20.1
ASTMB32
ASTMF493,ASMEB1.20.1
ASMEB1.20.1
ASTMD2657
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
Material
Standard
ASTMD2657,ASTMD2855,ASTM
D3139,ASTMD3212,ASTMF402,ASTM
F656,ASMEB1.20.1
ASTMC425
Vitrifiedclaypipeandfitting
a)
Singlestacksystemmaybeusedwith100mmdiameterstackforbuildingsupto5storey
height. The fixtures in each floor shall be connected to a single stack for increasing the
rate of discharge in the downward direction. There shall be at least 200 mm vertical
distancebetweenthewastebranchandthesoilbranchconnection,whilethesoilpipewill
beconnectedtostackabovethewastepipe.Thesizeofsoilbranchshallnotbelessthan
100mm.Thehorizontalbranchdistanceforfixturesfromstackandbend(s)atthefootof
stack to avoid back pressure as well as the vertical distance between the lowest
connectionandtheinvertofdrainshallbeasshowninFig8.6.1.Therecommendeddepth
ofwatersealtrapfordifferentfixturesshallbeinaccordancewithTable8.6.7.
FIG.8.6.1SINGLESTACKSYSTEM
b) Wherealltypesofwastefromthebuildingaredesiredtobedischargedintoacommon
sewerorintosamewastedisposalsystem,onepipesystemmaybeused(Fig8.6.2).
8255
Part8
BuildingServices
Cowl
Cowl
Vent stack
Soil stack
Branch vent pipe

Wash basin
Sink
WC
Bath
Floor level
Access
Branch soil pipe

Wash basin
Sink
WC
Bath
Floor level
Access
Branch Waste Pipe
Wash basin
Sink
Urinal
WC
Bath
Floor level
Access
Branch waste pipe

Branch soil pipe
FIG.8.6.2DIAGRAMOFONE PIPESYSTEM
c)
8256
Where the sullage from kitchen and bath will be dealt with separately and where soil
waste shall be discharged into septic tank or Imhoff tank, the two pipe system shall be
used(Fig8.6.3).
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
Cowl
Cowl
Cowl
Waste water stack
Vent stack
Soil stack
Wash basin
Sink
WC
Bath
Floor level
Clean out
Wash basin
Sink
WC
Bath
Floor level
Clean out
Wash basin
Sink
WC
Urinal
Floor level
FIG.8.6.3DIAGRAMOFTWOPIPESYSTEM
6.9.4
WaterClosetCompartmentforPhysicallyHandicapped
6.9.4.1
ProvisionforWheelchairUsers
Thewaterclosetcompartmentforwheelchairusersshallhaveatleastthedimensionsandfittingsasshownin
Fig8.6.4.
8257
Part8
BuildingServices
250
32 Dia. Support Rail
450
Water tap
SECTION
32 Clearance
300
Water tap
300
650
800
150
1500
400
32 Dia.
Grab bar as
support rails
400
600
500
PLAN
(All dimensions in mm)
FIG.8.6.4WATERCLOSETCOMPARTMENTFORWHEELCHAIRUSER
6.9.4.2
ProvisionforAmbulantDisabledPeople
Theminimumdimensionforwaterclosetcompartmentandthefittingsforambulantdisabledpeopleshallbe
asshowninFig8.6.5.
8258
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
250
32 Dia. Support Rail
450
Water tap
SECTION
32 Clearance
Water tap
800
32 Dia.
Grab bar as
support rails
300mm
400
600
500
PLAN
(All dimensions in mm)
FIG.8.6.5WATERCLOSETSTALLFORAMBULANTDISABLEDPEOPLE
Table8.6.7RecommendedDepthofWaterSealTrapforDifferentFixtures
Fixture
WaterSeal(mm)
WaterClosets
FloorTraps
ForWasteBranchof75mmdiameterorMore
ForWasteBranchofLessThan75mmdiameter
6.9.5
InstallationofDrainageSystem
6.9.5.1
50
50
40
75
All plumbing fixtures shall be made of smooth and nonabsorbent materials, free from concealed fouling
surfacesandmaybelocatedinventilatedenclosures.
6.9.5.2
Wheneverpossible,alldrainagesystemshallbedrainedtothepublicsewerorprivatewastedisposalsystemby
gravity.
6.9.5.3
Horizontaldrainagepipingof75mmdiameterandlessshallbeinstalledwithafallofnotlessthan20mmper
m.
Horizontaldrainagepipinglargerthan75mmdiametershallbeinstalledwithafallofnotlessthan10mmper
m.
8259
Part8
BuildingServices
It is a good policy to design the system for the highest possible velocity. However, consideration should be
given to the fact that the high velocities in pipes with slopes greater than 20 mm per m may cause self
siphoningoftrapseal.
6.9.5.4
Whereconditionsdonotpermitbuildingdrainsandsewerstobelaidwithafallasgreatasthatspecified,a
lesser slope may be permitted provided the computed velocity in the drains will not be less than 0.6 m per
second.Themaximumrecommendedvelocitywillbe2.5mpersecond.
6.9.5.5
Thesoilpipeconveyinganysolidorliquidfilthtoadrainshallbecircularwithaminimumdiameterof100mm.
6.9.5.6
The waste branch from bath room, wash basin or sink shall be of 32 mm to 50 mm diameter and shall be
trapped immediately beneath such wash basins or sink by an efficient siphon trap with adequate means of
inspectionandcleaning.Theminimumrecommendedsizeofwastestackis75mm.
6.9.5.7
Thesoilandwastestackshallbecontinuedupwardundiminishedinsize0.6mabovetheroofsurfacewhenthe
roofwillbeusedonlyforweatherprotection.Wheretheroofwillbeusedforanypurposeotherthanweather
protection, the soil and vent stack shall run at least 2 m above the roof surface so that there shall be least
possiblenuisance.
6.9.5.8
Thesoilandwastestackshallbefirmlyattachedtothewallwithaminimumclearanceof25mmfromthewall.
6.9.5.9
Allsoil,waste,vent(antsiphoning)stacksshallbecoveredontopwithcowlofsamepipematerial.
6.9.6
InstallationofVentingSystem
6.9.6.1
Theventstackormainventshallbeinstalledinconjunctionwithasoilorwastestackinabuilding.Onevent
stackmayservenotmorethantwosoilorwastestacks.
6.9.6.2
Ventilatingpipesshouldbesoinstalledthatwatercannotberetainedinthem.Theyshouldbefixedvertically.
Wheneverpossible,horizontalrunsshouldbeavoided.Ventilatingpipeshallbecarriedtosuchaheightandin
suchapositionastoaffordbymeansoftheopenendofsuchpipeorventshaft,asafeoutletforfoulairwith
theleastpossiblenuisance.
6.9.6.3
The building with building drain shall have at least one 100 mm vent stack or stack vent carried full size to
outdoorairabovetheroofinaccordancewithSec6.9.5.7above.
8260
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
6.9.6.4
Chapter6
Thediameterofaventstackshallnotbelessthan50mm.
6.9.6.5
Thediameterofabranchventpipeonawastepipeshallnotbelessthan25mmortwothirdsofthediameter
ofthebranchwastepipeventilated.
6.9.6.6
Thebranchventpipeonasoilpipeshallnotbelessthan32mmindiameter.
6.9.6.7
Allmainventsorvent stacksshallconnectfullsizeattheirbasetothebuildingdrain ortothesoil orwaste

stackatorbelowthelevelofthelowestdrainageconnectiontothem.Allventstacksshallextendundiminished
insizeabovetherooforshallbereconnectedtoaventheaderortothestackventportionofthesoilorwaste
stack,atleast150mmabovethefloodlevelofthehighestfixtureconnectiondischargingintothesoilorwaste
stack.Wheretheroofistobeusedforanypurposeotherthanweatherprotection,theventextensionshallbe
inaccordancewiththeSec6.9.5.7.
6.9.6.8
Incaseofoffsettingofstacksareliefventshallbeprovidedatthebaseofupperstackjustabovethestartof
offsetandattopofthelowerstackportionjustbelowtheendofoffset.
6.9.6.9
Inhighrisebuildingsyokeventshallbeprovidedat10storeyintervalscountingdownfromtop.
6.9.6.10
Incasehugenumberoffixturesareinstalledinbatterytoasinglebranchdrainagepipe,circuitorloopvents
shallbeprovidedafter8fixturesintervalfor100mmdrainpipeand24fixturesintervalfor150mmdrainpipe
asshowninfig.8.6.7
Loop vent
Main vent
Floor
Level
FIG.8.6.7CIRCUITVENTFORABATTERYOFWATERCLOSETS
6.9.6.11
Offsetinthestackventportionofsoilorwastestack,offsetinventstackandconnectionofventstackatthe
bottomtosoilorwastepipeortothebuildingdrainshallbeatanangleofatleast45degreestothehorizontal.
8261
Part8
BuildingServices
6.9.6.12
All vent and branch vent pipe shall be so graded and connected that sufficient slope is provided for
condensationtodrainbacktosoilorwastepipebygravity.
6.9.6.13
Wherefixtures,otherthanwaterclosetsdischargeintothestackdownstreamofawatercloset,eachfixture
connectingdownstreamshallbeindividuallyvented.
6.9.6.14
Soilandwastestacksinabuildinghavingmorethan10branchintervalsshallbeprovidedwithareliefvent(Fig
8.6.7)ateachtenthintervalcountingfromthetopfloor.
Roof
3m
Vent stack
15th Floor
3m
14th Floor
3m
Soil stack
13th Floor
3m
12th Floor
3m
Branch drain pipe
11th Floor
3m
10th Floor
3m
Branch interval
9th Floor
3m
8th Floor
3m
7th Floor
3m
10 branch interval
6th Floor
3m
Reliet vent on 10th interval

below the top branch
5th Floor
3m
4th Floor
3m
3rd Floor
3m
2nd Floor
4m
Vent stack connection at the

base of soil stack
1st Floor
Lowest floor horizontal branch

should be connected to the soil
stack atleast 0.6 m below the offset
Ground Floor
FIG.8.6.7RELIEFVENTSFORSTACKOFMORETHANTENBRANCHINTERVALS
6.9.6.15
Incasetheadjoiningbuildingistaller,theventilatingpipeshallbecarriedhigherthantheroofoftheadjacent
building,whereveritispossible.
8262
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
6.9.6.16
Thebuildingdrainintendedforcarryingwastewaterandsewagefromabuildingshallbeprovidedwithatleast
oneventilatingpipesituatedasnearaspracticabletothebuildingandasfarawayaspossiblefromthepointat
whichthedrainemptiesintothesewerorotherearner.
6.9.7
ClearanceofBlockages
6.9.7.1
There shall be sufficient and suitable access points at every change of alignment, gradient or diameter or at
bendsandjunctionsforclearingblockagesfromdrainswhichcannotbereachedbyanyothermeans.
6.9.7.2
Incaseofstraightrunofpipes,accesspointsshallbeprovidedatintervalsof15meter.
Tables 8.6.8 and 8.6.9 show the maximum spacing and the recommended minimum dimensions for access
fittingsandchambersforthespecifieddepth.
Table8.6.8MaximumSpacingofAccessPoints
From
Startofexternaldrain
Roddingeye
Accessfitting
Inspectionchamber
Manhole
To
AccessFitting
(m)
12
22
22
22
Junction
Inspection
Chamber
(m)
22
45
22
45
45
Manhole
(m)
45
45
22
45
90
(m)
22
12
22
higherspacingmaybeusedforlargersizeaccessfitting.
Table8.6.9MinimumDimensionsforAccessPoints
Access
Points
Depth
(m)
Roddingeye
Accessfitting 0.6orless
Inspection 1.0orless
chamber
Manhole
1.5orless
over1.5
over2.7
InternalSizes
Lengthxwidth
(mmxmm)
Diameter
(mm)
min.100mmorsizeof
drains
150x100
150
450x450
450*
1200x750
1200x750
12000x840
1050
1200
1200
CoverSizes
Lengthx
width
(mmxmm)
Circula
r
(mm)
150x100
450x450
150
450*
600x600
600x600
600x600
600
600
600
*190mmdiamaybeusedfordepth0.6m
6.9.7.3
Accessshouldbeoneofthefollowingfourtypes:
i.
roddingeyescappedextensionsofthepipes,
8263
Part8
BuildingServices
6.9.7.4
ii.
access fittings small chambers (or an extension of the pipes) but not with an open
channel,
iii.
inspectionchamberschamberswithworkingspaceatgroundlevel,and
iv.
manholeslargechamberswithworkingspaceatdrainlevel.
Inspectionchambersandmanholesshallhaveremovablenonventilatingcoversofdurablematerialandbeof
suitablestrength.Inspectionchambersandmanholesinbuildingsshallhavemechanicallyfixedairtightcovers
unlessthedrainitselfhaswatertightaccesscovers.Manholesdeeperthan1mshallhavenoncorrosivesteps
orfixedladders.Fig8.6.8and8.6.9showthedetailsoftypicalmanholesatsmallerdepth(<1m)andathigher
depth(>1m)respectively.Fig8.6.9showsthedetailsofadropmanhole.Thedropmanholeisamanholethat
servesasajunctionandreceivessewerlinesattwodifferentelevations.
FIG.8.7.8DETAILOFMANHOLE(Depth1mAndBelow)
8264
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
Rendering with cement morter

(Slope 1 in 6)
DETAIL OF BENCHING
SECTIONAL PLAN (SECTION A - A)

500 mm
Dia
Cast iron frame and cover
200 mm
350 mm
Depth of
manhole
150 mm
350 mm
380 mm
Galvanized wrought iron
manhole steps
Steps
300 mm
A
Ring
arch
Concrete Base
SECTION B - B
SECTION C - C
FIG.8.6.9DETAILOFMANHOLE(Depthmorethan1m)
8265
Part8
BuildingServices
SECTIONAL PLAN (SECTION A - A)

Cast Iron Frame And Cover
200 mm
350 mm
Depth of
manhole
150 mm
350 mm
380 mm
Steps
300 mm
Ring
arch
Slope 1 in 6
Concrete Base
SECTION B - B
SECTION C - C
FIG.8.6.10DROPMANHOLE
6.9.7.5
Spacingofmanholes
Thespacingofmanholesforagivenpipesizeshouldbeasfollows:
PipeDiameter(mm)
SpacingofManhole(m)
a)
Upto300
45
b)
301to500
75
c)
501to900
90
d)
Beyond900Spacingshalldependuponlocalconditionandshallbe
gottenapprovedbytheAuthority
8266
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
6.9.8
ProtectionAgainstRodent
Holesthroughwallsshallbesuchthattheywillnotprovidepassageofrodentorotherinsectsfromroomto
roomorfromfloortofloor.Materialsusedforembeddingpipesshallberodentproof.
6.9.9
BeddingandBackfilling
Thechoiceofbeddingandbackfillingdependsonthedepthofthebed,andsizeandstrengthofthematerials.
Fig8.6.10and Table8.6.10 showtwotypes of beddingand backfillingand minimum and maximum depth of
coverforeachtypeofbeddingforrigidpipings.ThebeddingandbackfillingforflexiblepipingsisshowninFig
8.6.11.Theminimumdepthofbeddingforflexiblepipingsshallbe0.3mwheretherewillbenoextrasurcharge
loadcomingonpipeotherthanbackfilling.
Thedepthshallnotbemorethan10m.Theflexiblepipemaybelaidwithlesscoverinfieldsandgardens.The
beddingandbackfillingshallbeinaccordancewithFig8.6.12.
Type 1 : Bedding Factor 1.9
Type 2 : Bedding Factor 1.5
Minimum
150 mm
OD
min. 150 mm
OD
OD
16
OD
2
min. OD 100 mm
8
min. OD 100 mm
8
Note :
1 - Compacted granular material
2 - Carefully compacted backfill
3 - Lightly compacted backfill
OD - Outer diameter
FIG.8.6.11BEDDINGFORRIGIDPIPES
Minimum
200 mm
Minimum
100 mm
OD
1
Minimum
100 mm
FIG.8.6.12BEDDINGFORFLEXIBLEPIPES
8267
Part8
BuildingServices
Concrete Slab
min. 75 mm
OD
1
min. 100 mm
FIG.8.6.13FLEXIBLEPIPESBEDDINGUNDERCONCRETESLAB
Table8.6.10
PipeBore
6.9.10
LimitsofCover(m)forStandardStrengthRigidPipesinanyWidthofTrench
Bedding
Fieldsand
LightTraffic
HeavyTraffic
Gardens
Roads
Road
(mm)
Class
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
100
Type1
Type2
0.3
0.3
7.4
5.8
0.4
0.5
7.4
5.8
0.4
0.5
7.2
5.5
150
Type1
Type2
0.6
0.6
5.0
3.9
0.6
0.7
5.0
3.8
0.6
0.7
4.6
3.3
GreaseTraps
Oilandgreaseisfoundinwastesgeneratedfromkitchensinhotels,industrialcanteens,restaurant,butcheries,
somelaboratoriesandmanufacturingunitshavingahighcontentofoilandgreasesintheirfinalwaste.
Wasteexceedingtemperatureof60Cshouldnotbeallowedinthegreasetrap.Whensoencountereditmay
beallowedtocoolinaholdingchamberbeforeenteringthegreasetrap.
Oilandgreasestendtosolidifyastheycoolwithinthedrainagesystem.Thesolidifiedmatterclogsthedrains
andtheothermatterinthewastesticktoitduetotheadhesionpropertiesofthegrease.Oilandgreasesare
lighterthanwaterandtendtofloatonthetopofthewastewater.
Greasetrapsshallbeinstalledinbuildinghavingtheabovetypesofwastes.Inprinciplethegreaseladenwater
isallowedtoretaininagreasetrapwhichenablesanysolidstobesettledorseparatedformanualdisposal.The
retention time allows the incoming waste to cool and allow the grease to solidify. The clear waste is then
allowedtodischargeintothebuildingsdrainagesystem.
6.9.11
OilInterceptors
Oils and lubricants are found in wastes from vehicle service stations, workshops manufacturing units whose
wastemaycontainhighcontentofoils.Oils,forexample,petroleum,keroseneanddieselusedasfuel,cooking,
lubricantoilsandsimilarliquidsarelighterthanwaterandthusfloatonwaterinapipelineorinachamber
whenstored.Suchoilshavealowignitionpointandarepronetocatchfireifexposedtoanyflameoraspark
andmaycauseexplosioninsideoroutsidethedrainagesystem.Theflamesfromsuchafirespreadrapidlyifnot
confined or fire vented at the possible source. Lighter oils and lubricants are removed from the system by
passingthemthroughanoilinterceptor/petrolgully.Theyarechambersinvariouscompartmentswhichallow
the solids to settle and allow the oils to float to the top. The oil is then decanted in separate containers for
8268
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
disposalinanapprovedmanner.Theoilfreewastecollectedfromthebottomofthechamberisdisposedinthe
buildingdrainagesystem.
6.9.12
SepticTank
6.9.12.1
Septictank(s)(Fig8.6.15and8.6.16)dischargingintoeitherasubsurfacedisposalfieldoroneormoreseepage
pitsshallberequiredfortheapprovalofdrainageandsanitationplansfortheplaceswherepublicsewersare
notavailable.
MH Cover
GL
At least 100 mm
inlet pipe
300 mm
W.L
At least 100 mm
outlet pipe
300 mm
D/3
Approx
D = Liquid Depth
L
B
150
mm
13 mm thick
cement
mortar finish
Brick wall in cement mortar

C.C bed
PLAN
SECTION A - A
FIG.8.6.16TYPICALONECHAMBERBRICKSEPTICTANK
Manhole Cover
Opening At Least 2(50mm x 50 mm)
Equally Spaced
At least 150 mm
At Least 150 mm
50 mm
Inlet
Outlet
350 mm
400 mm
150 mm
150mm
Sanitary tees
top & bottom open
D
6D
2
3L
3L
Opening 75mm x 75mm

or 150mm Dia Holes at 0.5m
Centre to Centre
SECTION A - A
PLAN
FIG.8.6.17TYPICALTWOCHAMBERCONCRETESEPTICTANK
6.9.12.2
Suchdisposalmethodshallbedesignedbyalicensedprofessionalinaccordancewiththerequirementofthe
provisionsofthisCodeandregulationsoftheconcernedauthorities.
8269
Part8
BuildingServices
6.9.12.3
Thedesignofsuchsystemshallbeonthebasisoflocationwithrespecttowellsorothersourcesofwater,soil
permeability,groundwaterelevation,areaavailableandmaximumoccupancyofthebuilding.
6.9.12.4
Sullagewatershallnotbedischargedintotheseptictank.
6.9.12.5
Effluentfromseptictank(s)shallnotdischargeintoopenwatercourses.
6.9.12.6
TheminimumdistanceforvariouscomponentsofthedisposalsystemshallbeinaccordancewithTable8.6.11.
6.9.12.7
The flow into a septic tank may be calculated on the basis of plumbing fixtures discharging soil wastes
simultaneouslyintoit.Thecapacityofseptictankforresidentialbuildingsshallbedeterminedaccordingtothe
formula in Appendix 8.6.C. For other occupancies a reduction factor shall be used as shown in Table T1 in
Appendix8.6.C.
6.9.12.8
Theseptictankshallhaveaminimumliquidcapacityof2000liters,minimumwidth1mandminimumliquid
depth1m.Theminimumlengthofaseptictankshallbeatleastthriceitswidth.Itisrecommendedthatthe
maximumlengthofaseptictankshallbenotmorethan4timesitswidth.
6.9.12.9
The maximum size of a septic tank shall be limited to the number of users not exceeding 300 persons for
residentialbuildings.
6.9.12.10
The volume required for digested sludge and scum may be computed on the basis of 0.04m3/capita/year.
Thereshallbeaclearancebetweentopoftheliquidlevelandbottomofthetankcoverslabwhichshallbeat
least300mm.
6.9.12.11
Theliquidretentiontimeofaseptictankshallbeatleast1day.
6.9.12.12
Thedesludggingfrequencyofaseptictankshallbeatleast6monthsintervalandmaximumonceayear.
6.9.12.13
Itisrecommendedtousetwochamberseptictankwhenthecapacityofaseptictankexceeds3000liters.The
inlet compartment of a two chamber septic tank shall have a capacity not less than twothird of its total
capacity(Fig8.6.16).
8270
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
Table8.6.11LocationofComponentsofSewageDisposalSystem
SystemComponent
Septictank
Disposalfield
Seepagepit
Drywell
6.9.12.14
Distance(m)
Building
Foundation
1.5
3
4.5
3
Well
Stream
8
15
15
15
7.5
15
Seepage
Pit
1.5
6
6
6
DryWell
6
6
The septic tank shall be constructed of corrosion resistant material and be of permanent water tight
construction.Themanholecoverandtheroofofthetankshallbedesignedforatleast7kPaliveload.Theinlet
compartment shallbeprovidedwithamanhole.Outletcompartmentshallalsobeprovidedwithamanhole.
ThedesignguidelineofaseptictankispresentedinAppendix8.6.C.
6.9.13
Imhofftank(s)
6.9.13.1
Imhofftank(s)(Fig8.6.17)dischargingintoeitherasubsurfacedisposalfieldoroneormoreseepagepitsshallberequired
fortheapprovalofdrainageandsanitationplansfortheplaceswherepublicsewersarenotavailable.
Inlet pipe
GAS
1.2 TO 1.5 m
HOLES
IN THE
CROSS
BAFFLE
SETTLING
ZONE
1.2
1
Sludge withdrawl
pipe 20 cm dia
SLOT
G - Gas collecting
domes
SLUDGE DIGESTION
ZONE
H - height of the
cross baffle
5 TO 7
N - Neutral zone
Sludge
storage space
FIG.8.6.18CROSSSECTIONOFANIMHOFFTANK
8271
Part8
BuildingServices
6.9.13.2
Imhofftanksshallbeusedwheremorethan300peoplesofresidentialbuildingsaretobeserved.
6.9.13.3
Thesettlingchambershallbedesignedforadetentionperiodof1.5to4.0hoursandanoverflowrateof0.95
to1.4m/hr.Thedisplacementvelocityshouldnotbemorethan18m/hr.Slopingsidesofsettlingchambershall
haveinclination1.0horizontalto1.2vertical.Theslotatthebottomis0.15to0.25metermeasuredalongthe
slopeofthehopper.Thewidthofthesidespacesshouldnotbelessthan0.45meter.Thedigestionchamber
shouldhaveacapacitytostoreabout6to12monthsdigestedsludge.Capacityofthedigestionchambercanbe
foundfromthefollowingformula
C=[Vf2/3(VfVd)] t.
WhereCisthevolumeofthedigestiontankinm3/capitabelowtheneutralzonewhichis0.2mbelowtheslot.
Vfisthevolumeoffreshsludgeinm3/capitadayandVdisthevolumeofthedigestedsludgeinm3/capitaday
and t is the time required for digestion. The digestion chamber should have sloping side with a ratio of 4
horizontalto5vertical.
6.9.13.4
The Capacity found in sec. 6.9.12.3 is true for residential buildings. For other occupational buildings use a
reductionfactorasshownTable8.6.C.1inAppendix8.6.C.
6.9.14
Installation
Septic and Imhoff Tank shall be located with a horizontal distance not less than specified in Table 802.8
betweenvariouselements.Tanksinstalledingroundwatershallbesecurelyanchored.A3inchthick(76mm)
compactedbeddingshallbeprovidedforallsepticandothertreatmenttankinstallations.Thebeddingmaterial
shall be sand, gravel,granite,limerockor othernoncorrosivematerialsofsuchsize thatthematerialpasses
througha0.5inch(12.7mm)screen.
Table:Minimumhorizontalseparationdistancesfortreatmenttankselementdistance(feet)
Building
Cistern
Foundationwall
Lake,highwatermark
Lotline
Pond
Reservoir
Spring
Streamorwatercourse
Swimmingpool
Waterservice
Well
5
25
5
25
2
25
25
50
25
15
5
25
Eachcleanoutshallbeinstalledsothatitopenstoallowcleaninginthedirectionofflowofthesoilorwasteor
at right angles thereto, and except in the case of wye branch and endofline cleanouts, shall be installed
verticallyabovetheflowlineofthepipe.
Thebathtubshallbefittedwithoverflowandwastepipeofnominaldiameterofnotlessthan32mmand40
mmrespectively.
8272
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
6.9.15
Chapter6
DisposalFieldandSeepagePit
6.9.15.1
AdistributionboxshallbeprovidedtoreceivetheeffluentfromtheseptictankorImhofftanktoassureequal
distributiontoeachindividuallineofdisposalfield.Thedistributionboxshallbeconnectedtotheseptictankor
Imhofftankbyawatertightsewerlineandshallbelocatedattheupperendofdisposalfield.Fig8.6.19shows
theplansandsectionsoftypicaldistributionboxes.
Outlet
Inlet
Inlet
25 mm
min.
Outlet
Outlet
Outlet
SECTION
PLAN
Inlet
Inlet
Outlets
Outlets
PLAN
PLAN
FIG.8.6.19DISTRIBUTIONBOXES
6.9.15.2
Soilpercolationtests(atleastforthreeholes)shallbeperformedatthesiteofaproposedindividualsewage
disposalsysteminstallationtodeterminethesuitabilityofsoilandsite.
6.9.15.3
The liquid capacity (volume below inlet line) of seepage units (disposal field or seepage pit) shall be at least
twice that of a septic tank or Imhoff tank. Effective absorption area of seepage unit may be computed in
6.9.15.4
No seepage unit shall be extended into water table directly. The bottom of seepage unit shall be at least 1
meterabovethehighestwatertable.
8273
Part8
BuildingServices
6.9.15.5
Each disposal field shall have at least two outlet distribution lines from the distribution box. No portion of
disposalfieldshallbeinstalledunderanypavementoranyareawheretherewillbevehiculartrafficorparking
6.9.15.6
MinimumstandardsfordisposalfieldconstructionshallbeasshowninTable8.6.13.
Table8.6.12AbsorptiveCapacityofDisposalFieldandSeepagePit
PercolationTestRatein
MinutesforWatertoFall
25mm
2orless
5
10
30
60(notrecommended)
over60(notsuitable)
EffluentAllowanceRateofSeepageUnit
inlitreperm2perday
DisposalFieldTrenches
(bottomoftrench)
SeepagePit
(wallarea)
128
96
68
32
16
172
128
92
44
24
Table8.6.13DesignFeaturesofDisposalField
Numberoflateralbranches
Maximumlengthofbranch
Minimumdiameteroffielddistributionpipe
Maximumslopeoffielddistributionpipe
Depthoftrench
Trenchbottom,minimumabovegroundwater
Trenchbottomwidth
Depthofcoarsematerial
underpipe
overpipe
Sizeofcoarsematerial
2
20m
100mm
3.3mmperm
0.45mto9m
0.61m
0.45mto0.75m
150mm
50mm
12mmto63mm
6.9.15.7
Seepagepit(soakpit)shallbelinedwithstone,brickorconcreteblockslaidupdrywithopenjointsthatare
backedupwithatleast75mmcoarseaggregate.Thejointsabovetheinletshallbesealedwithcementmortar.
Areinforcedconcretecovershallbeprovided.Forcoverareamorethan0.75m2 thepitshallhaveanaccess
manhole.Thebottomofthepitshallbefilledwithcoarsegravel,orcrushedstone/bricktoadepthof0.3m.
Figure8.6.20providesthedetailsofaseepagepit.
8274
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
Cover
From Septic Tank
Gravel or Crushed Stone / Brick bats

Sand
Gravel or Crushed
Stone/Brick (75 mm)
Hight used
to compute
absarption area
Pit Wall (Brick)

(Open joint)
SECTION A - A
PLAN
FIG.8.6.20TYPICALSEEPAGEPIT
6.9.15.8
Largedrywellshallbeconstructedinaccordancewiththerequirementsforseepagepit(Sec6.9.12).However,
forsmalldrywellshandlinglimitedquantitiesofwastewaterthepitmayconsistofa2.0metredeepand1.0m
diameterpipefilledwithcrushedbricks/stone.
8275
Part8
BuildingServices
Roof drain
Roof
Leader
Dry wall
Minimum distance
G.L
Building
Earth
FIG.8.6.21TYPICALLOCATIONOFADRYWALL
G.L
Rainwater
from Building
Concrete Cover
Drainage slots
Pre-cast
Concrete Section
or Porous Brick Wall
Clamp
Crushed Stone/ Bricks
FIG.8.6.22INSTALLATIONDETAILSOFADRYWALL
6.9.15.9
Frenchdrainsmaybeemployedassurfacewaterdrainsfordrainageofunpavedsurfaces.
8276
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
6.10
DESIGNOFDRAINAGEANDSANITATIONSYSTEM
6.10.1
EstimationofMaximumLoadWeightofWasteWater
Chapter6
Toestimatethetotalloadweightcarriedbyasoilorwastepipe,therelativeloadweightfordifferentkindsof
fixturesareprovidedinTable8.6.14.Table8.6.15providesanapproximateratingofthosefixturesnotlistedin
Table8.6.14.
6.10.2
GradientandSizeofPipe
6.10.2.1
Thebuildingdrainsandsewershallbedesignedtodischargethepeaksimultaneousloadweightflowinghalf
full with a minimum selfcleansing velocity of 0.75 m per second. However, flatter gradient may be used if
requiredbuttheminimumvelocityshallnotbelessthan0.6mpersecond.Again,itisundesirabletoemploy
gradientsgivingavelocityofflowgreaterthan2.5mpersecond.
6.10.2.2
Themaximumnumberoffixtureunitsthatmaybeconnectedtoagivensizeofbuildingsewer,buildingdrain,
horizontalbranchorverticalsoilorwastestackshallbeprovidedasinTables8.6.16and8.6.17.
6.10.3
SizeofVentPiping
6.10.3.1
The size of vent piping shall be determined from its length and the total number of fixture units connected
theretoinaccordancewithTable8.6.21.
6.10.3.2
ThebranchventshallbesizedinaccordancewithTable8.6.22.
6.11
CONSTRUCTIONRELATINGTOCONVEYANCEOFSANITARYWASTES
6.11.1
ConveyanceofSanitaryWastes
6.11.2
Thelayoutofdrainagesystemsshallbesimple.Changeofdirectionandgradientshallbeminimizedandshall
beaseasyaspracticable.
6.11.3
Theexcavation,wherenecessary,shallbemadeinaccordancewithTable8.6.23.
8277
Part8
BuildingServices
Table8.6.14FixtureUnitsforDifferentSanitaryAppliancesorGroups
TypeofFixture
Fixture
UnitValue
asLoad
Factors
Onebathroomgroupconsistingofwatercloset,washbasinandbath
tuborshowerstall:
3
a)FlushTankwatercloset
6
b)Flushvalvewatercloset
2
Bathtub*
2
Bidet
2
Combinationsinkandtray(drainboard)
0.5
Drinkingfountain
1
Floortraps
2
Kitchensink,domestic
1
Washbasin,ordinary
2
Washbasin,surgeon's
2
Showerstall,domestic
3
Shower(group)perhead
4
Urinal,wallhung
4
Urinal,stall
3
Watercloset,tankoperated
6
Watercloset,valveoperated
*Ashowerheadoverabathtubdoesnotincreasethefixtureunitvalue.
Sizeoffloortrapshallbedeterminedbytheareaofsurfacewatertobedrained.
Washbasinwith32mmand40mmtraphavethesameloadvalue.
Table8.6.15FixtureUnitValuesforFixturesBasedonFixtureDrainorTrapSize
FixtureDrainonTrapSize
FixtureUnit
Value
1
2
3
4
5
6
30mmandsmaller
40mm
50mm
65mm
75mm
100mm
8278
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
Table8.6.16 MaximumNumberofFixtureUnitsthatcanbeConnectedtoBranchesandStacks
Diameter
ofPipe
(mm)
MaximumNumberofFixtureUnitsthatcanbeConnected
Any
OneStackof
Horizontal 3Storeysin
Fixture
Heightor3
a
Branch
Intervals
30
40
50
65
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
375
1
3
6
12
20
160
360
620
1400
2500
3900
7000
2
4
10
20
30
240
540
960
2200
3800
6000
b
Morethan3StoreysinHeight
Totalfor
TotalatOne
Stack
Storeyor
Branch
Interval
2
8
24
42
60
500
1100
1900
3600
5600
8400
b
1
2
6
9
16
90
200
350
600
1000
1500
b
Doesnotincludebranchesofthebuildingsewer.
Sizingloadbasedondesigncriteria
Table8.6.17 MaximumNumberofFixtureUnitsthatcanbeconnectedtoBuildingDrainsandSewers
Diameter
ofPipe
(mm)
MaximumNumberofFixtureUnitsthatcanbeConnectedtoany
Portion*oftheBuildingDrainortheBuildingSewerforVariousSlopes
1/200
100
150
200
1400
250
2500
300
2900
375
7000
*Includesbranchesofbuildingsewer
1/100
1/50
1/25
180
700
1600
2900
4600
8300
216
840
1920
3500
5600
10000
250
1000
2300
4200
6700
12000
8279
Part8
BuildingServices
Table8.6.18SizeofVerticalLeaders*
SizeofLeader**
MaximumProjectedRoofAreaandFlow
(m2)
(mm)
(l/min)
50
202
87
65
367
155
75
598
253
100
1287
544
125
2336
986
150
3790
1602
200
8180
3450
* Table 8.7.18 is based upon a maximum rainfall of 25 mm per hour for a 1hour
duration. The figure for drainage area shall be adjusted to local conditions (Appendix
8.6.C).
** Theequivalentdiameterofsquareleaderwillbethediameterofthatcirclewhichcan
beinscribedwithinthecrosssectionalarea.Theequivalentdiameteroftherectangular
leaderwillbetheshortdimensionoftherectangularleader.However,theratioofwidth
todepthofrectangularleadershallnotexceed3:1.
Table8.6.20SizeofSemicircularRoofGutters*
Diaof
Gutter
(mm)
75
100
125
150
175
200
250
MaximumProjectedRoofAreaforGutterofVariousSlopes
5mmperm
m
61
130
227
350
503
725
1300
l/min
25
55
96
148
210
307
555
10mmperm
20mmperm
m2
m2
87
185
320
495
710
1020
1850
l/min
36
77
136
210
300
430
785
123
260
455
700
1000
1300
2610
l/min
51
110
192
296
425
610
1110
40mmperm
m2
174
370
645
1010
1420
2040
3650
l/min
73
155
273
425
600
862
1540
*Table8.7.20isbaseduponamaximumrainfallof25mmperhourfor1hourduration.Thefigurefordrainagearea
shallbesubjecttolocalconditionsinaccordancewithAppendix8.6.C.
6.11.3.1
ThedepthofcovershallbeinaccordancewithSec6.9.8.
6.11.3.2
The pipe shall be laid to even gradients and change of gradient shall be combined with an access point (Sec
7.9.6).However,accesspointsshallbeprovidedonlyifblockagescouldnotbeclearedwithoutthem.
6.11.3.3
The joints and connection in drainage and venting system shall be gastight and watertight for the pressures
required by the test, with the exception of those portions of perforated or open joint piping which will be
installed for the purpose of collecting and conveying ground or seepage water to the underground storm
drains.
6.11.3.4
Pipingindrainageandventingsystemshallbeinstalledwithoutunduestrainsandstressesandprovisionshall
be made for expansion, contraction and structural settlement. Vertical piping shall be secured at sufficiently
closeintervalstokeepthepipeinalignmentandcarrytheweightofthepipinganditscontent.Thehorizontal
pipingshallbesupportedatsufficientlycloseintervals(Sec6.8)tokeepitinalignmentandtopreventsagging.
8280
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
6.12
REFUSECHUTESYSTEM
6.12.1
Chapter6
Allbuildingshigherthan6storeysshallbe providedwith refuse chutesystemfortransportingandcollecting

refusefromdifferentfloorsinasanitaryway.Therefuseshallbereceivedfromtherespectivefloorthroughan
inlethopperintothechutewhichconveysrefuseanddischargesintothecollectionchamber.Therefusefrom
thecollectionchambershallbeclearedatsuitableintervals.
6.12.2
The refuse chute, inlet hopper and collection chamber shall be constructed with smooth and nonflammable
materials.
6.12.3
The hopper shall be selfcleaning and shall be fitted with selfclosing shutter to prevent the passage of foul
gasesinsidethebuilding.
6.12.4
Thediameterofthechuteshallnotbelessthan300mm.Itshallbeadequatelyventilatedatthetop.Thechute
shallbeprovidedwithsuitablearrangementsforflushingwithwaterforthefulllength.
6.13
BASEMENTFLOORDRAINAGESYSTEM
6.13.1
Allbuildingshavingbasementfloorbelowthesurroundingsewersystemandareamorethan1000sqmshall
havepumpingsystemtodrainoutwastewater.
6.13.2
Allbuildingshavingbasementfloorbelowthesurroundingsewersystemandareamorethan1000sqmshall
haveonesumppitforevery1000sqm.
6.13.3
Formorethanonesumppit,pitsshallbeconnectedtoamastersumppitfromwherepumpingshallbedoneto
drainoutthewaste.Minimumdiameterofsumppitconnectiondrainpipeshallbe75mm.
6.13.4
Forwastewaterandsewagedrainagefrombasementfloorseparatedrainagesystemshallbeprovided.
8281
Part8
BuildingServices
Table8.6.21SizeandLengthofVentStacksandStackVents
Diameter Total
ofSoil Fixture
orWaste Unit
Stack
(FU)
(mm)
Connect
MaximumDevelopmentLengthofVent(m)*
forDiameter(mm)ofVentPipes
edto
fixture
30
40
40
50
50
65
75
75
75
75
100
100
100
100
125
125
125
125
150
150
150
150
200
200
200
200
250
250
250
250
300
300
300
300
375
375
375
375
*
2
8
10
12
20
42
10
21
53
102
43
140
320
540
190
490
940
1400
500
1100
2000
2900
1800
3400
5600
7600
4000
7200
11000
15000
7300
13000
20000
26000
15000
25000
38000
50000
30 40
9
15 45.5
9 30.5
9 22.5
8 15
9
12.5
9.5
8
7.5
50
61
45.5
30.5
45.5
33.5
28.5
26
10.5
8
7
6.5
65
91.5
109.5
82
70
64
26
19.5
16.5
15
8.5
6.5
5.5
4.5
75
317
247
207
189
76
61
52
45.5
25
19
16
15
10
6.5
6
100
298.5
228.5
195
176.5
97.5
76
64
58
39.5
30.5
25.5
23.5
9.5
7
6
5.5
125
301.5
231.5
204
180
122
94.5
79
73
29
22
19
17
9.5
7
6
5.5
150
305
237.5
201
183
73
58
48.5
42.5
23.5
18
15.5
14
9.5
7
6
5.5
200
286.5
219.5
186
170.5
94.5
73
61
55
36.5
28.5
24
22
12
9.5
8
7
250
292.5
225.5
192
173.5
116
91.5
76
70
39.5
29
24.5
22.5
300
286.5
219.5
186
152.5
94.5
73
61
55
Thedevelopmentlengthshallbemeasuredfromtheventconnectiontotheopenair
6.13.5
Thecollectionchambershallbeofsuitablesizeandlocatedatgroundlevel.
6.13.6
Thedesignandarrangementofthesystemshallbeinaccordancewithestablishedengineeringpractices.
8282
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
6.14
Healthcaredrainagesystem
6.14.1
General
Chapter6
Thehealthcaredrainagesystemshallcomplywithapplicabledrainageandventingrequirementsspecifiedin
thischapterandwiththissection.
6.14.2
SpecialFixturesandEquipment
The hospital shall be provided with clinical sink, bedpan washer and such other fixtures and equipment for
disposalofbedpancontentsandforthecleansinganddisinfectionofsuchfixtures.Aclinicalsinkshallnotbe
consideredasasubstituteforservicesink.
8283
Part8
BuildingServices
Table8.6.22MinimumDiameterandMaximumLengthofIndividual,Branch,andCircuitVentsfor
HorizontalDrainageBranches
Diameterof
Horizontal
Drainage
Branch(mm)
Slopeof
Horizontal
Drainage
Branch
MaximumDevelopment
LengthofVent(m)forDiameter(mm)ofVentPipe
(mm/m)
30 40 50 65 75 100 125 150 200 250
30
20
NL*
40
NL
NL NL
40
20
NL NL
40
NL NL NL
50
10
88 NL NL
20
45 115 NL
40
54 137 NL
65
10
29 73 NL NL
20
15 39 NL NL
40
75
58 NL NL NL
10
29.5 128 NL NL
20
15 67 NL NL
40
100
58 NL NL NL
10
30 94 NL NL
20
14.5 48.5 125 NL

40
58 149 NL NL
125
10
29.5 76 NL NL
20
14 39.5 NL NL
40
58 NL NL NL
150
10
29.5 76 NL NL
20
14 39.5 NL NL
40
58 NL NL NL
200
10
27.5 94.5 NL NL
20
11.5 45.5 125 NL NL
40
58 152 NL NL
10
250
26 73 NL NL
20
9.5 33.5 NL NL
40
54.5 NL NL
10
300
24 128 NL
20
61 NL
8
40
NLmeansnolimit;Actualvalueinexcessof150m.
Table8.6.23MinimumWidthatBottomofTrench
DepthofTrench(m)
Upto1.2
Above1.2
WidthofTrench(m)
Diameterofpipeplus0.4
Diameterofpipeplus0.45
Note:Trenchtopwidthshallnotbelessthan0.75mfordepthsexceeding0.9m
6.14.3
BedpanWasherandClinicalSink
Bedpanwasherandclinicalsinkshallbeconnectedtosoilbranchesandsoilstacksthroughawatersealtrap.
The bedpan washer with vapour vent connection shall be provided with additional local vent stack. The
minimumventstacksizeforbedpanwashershallbeinaccordancewithTable8.6.24.
8284
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
Chapter6
Table8.6.24MinimumVentStackSizeinBedpanDrainage
NoofBedpanWasher
Upto3bedpanwashersatdifferentfloors
4to6bedpanwashers
7to12bedpanwashers
Diameter(mm)
50
75
100
The bottom of the bedpan local vent stack (except for one bedpan washer) shall be drained indirectly into
sanitarydrainagesystemthroughtraps.Thesizeofthetrapandconnectingpipeshallbeatleastthesizeofthe
ventstack.Atleast6mmdiameterwatersupplypipingshallbetakenfromeachflushsupplyofeachbedpan
washeronthedischargesideofvacuumbreaker,trappedtoform75mmormoretrapsealandconnectedto
thelocalventstackoneachfloor.
6.14.4
SterilizerVentStack
The pressure or nonpressure sterilizer shall have vent connection to the sterilizer vent stack. This vent
connectionshallbeaccessibleforinspectionandcleaning.Thesizeofsterilizerventstackshallbeasfollows:
6.14.4.1 PressureSterilizers:
The minimum diameter for pressure sterilizer vent stack shall be 63 mm. The stack size for combinations of
pressuresterilizerexhaustshallbeinaccordancewithTable8.6.25.
6.14.4.2 PressureInstrumentWasherSterilizers:
The minimum size of sterilizer vent stack for instrument washer sterilizer shall be 50 mm for up to two
sterilizers.The75mmstackwillserveuptofoursterilizers.
6.14.4.3 NonpressureSterilizers:
Theminimumdiameterofnonpressuresterilizerventstackshallbe50mmforutensilsterilizerand38mmfor
instrumentsterilizer.MultipleinstallationsshallbesizedinaccordancewithTable8.6.26.
6.14.4.4 BedpanSteamers:
Thediameterforonebedpansteamershallbe38mm.Thestacksizeforcombinationsshallbeinaccordance
withTable8.6.26.
8285
Part8
BuildingServices
Table8.6.25PressureSterilizerVentStackSize
StackSize
(mm)
6.14.5
NumberofConnectionsPermittedforDifferent
CombinationSizes(mm)
19
25
31
38
38
38
38
38
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
75
15
75
75
75
75
75
VentExtension
TheterminationofventstackshallbeinaccordancewithSec6.9.5.7and6.9.6.6.
6.14.6
SpecialFixtureDrainage
Thedevice,appurtenanceandappliancerequiredforspecialpurposessuchasrefrigerators,iceboxes,cooling
or refrigerating coils etc. shall be protected against backflow with adequate air gap between the equipment
inletanddrainageoutlet.
Table8.6.26NonpressureSterilizerVentStackorBedpanSteamerSizes
StackSizes
(mm)
6.14.7
NoofConnectionsPermittedforDifferent
ConnectionSizes(mm)
38
50
38
50
50
50
75
75
75
100
100
100
1
2
1
4
2
8
1
1
2
2
4
4
MentalHealthCareCentreandPrisonersCell
Thepipesandtrapsusedinmentalhealthcarebuildingsandprisonercellsshallnotbeexposedandallfixtures
shallbesecurelyboltedthroughwalls.
8286
Vol.3
SanitaryDrainage
6.15
6.15.1
Inspection
Chapter6
Thenewdrainageandsanitationsystemorpartoftheexistingsystemshallnotbecoveredorenclosedorput
intooperationuntilithasbeeninspected,testedandapprovedbytheBuildingAuthority.TheAuthoritymay
examinetheappliancesandfittingsbeforetheirinstallationorduringtheprogressofthework.Aninstallation
ofplumbingwork,whetherneworexisting,whichisfoundtobedefectiveorunsafeshallnotbeallowedto
continueinuseunlesscorrectionshavebeenmadetocomplywiththeCoderequirements.
6.15.2
Testing
6.15.2.1 DrainageandVentingSystem:
Thepipingofdrainageandventingsystemshallbetestedfirstwithwater.Thefinaltestofcompleteddrainage
andventingsystemmaybedonebysmoketest.Thewaterandsmoketestsshallbeperformedasdescribed
below:
a) Water Test : The water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either for the whole
systemorpart(section)thereof.Fortheentiresystem,allopeningsinthepipingexceptthehighestopening
shall be closed, and the system filled with water to the point of overflow. For the system to be tested in
sections,eachopeningshallbetightlypluggedexceptthehighestopeningofthesectionundertestandeach
sectionshallbefilledwithwaterbutnosectionshallbetestedwithlessthana3mheadofwater.Intesting
successivesections,atleasttheupper3mofthenextprecedingsectionshallbetestedsothatnojointorpipe
inthebuilding(exceptthetopmost3mofthesystem)shallhavebeensubmittedtoatestoflessthana3m
headofwater.Thewatershallbekeptinthesystemorintheportionundertestforatleast15minutesbefore
theinspectionstarts.Thesystemorthepartofthesystemundertestshallbewatertightatallpoints.
b) SmokeTest:Thefinaltestforgasandwatertightnessofthecompleteddrainageandventingsystemmay
beperformedbysmoketest.Thetestisperformedbyfillingalltrapswithwaterandthenintroducingsmoke
intothesystemproducedbyoneormoresmokemachines.Whenthesmokeappearsatthestackopeningson
theroof,theyshallbeclosedandapressureequivalentto25mmheadofwatershallbebuiltandmaintained
for15minutesbeforeinspectionstarts.
6.15.2.2 BuildingSewer:
TheConnectionbetweenbuildingsewerandpublicsewerorindividualsewagedisposalsystemshallbeclosed
byinsertingatestplug.Thebuildingsewershallbefilledwithwaterunderapressureofnotlessthan30kPa
foratleast15minutes.Thesystemshallbeabletomaintainthetestpressure.
6.15.3
Aftertheinstallationofdrainageandsanitationsystem,thelicensedplumbershallgiveacompletioncertificate
totheauthorityinaprescribedform(Appendix8.6.D)forinspectionandtesting.Aftertesting,theAuthority
will give the final approval (as presented in completion certificate form, in the Appendix 8.6.D) to use the
system.
8287
Part8
BuildingServices
6.16
GUIDETOMAINTENANCE
6.16.1
Thedrainageandsanitationsystemshallbemaintainedinasanitaryandsafeoperatingconditionbytheowner
orhisdesignatedagent.AlldeviceorsafeguardsrequiredbytheCodeshallbemaintainedinworkingorder.
6.16.2
Thefollowingoperationsshallbecarriedoutduringperiodicalcleaningofadrainageandsanitationsystem:
a) The covers of inspection chambers and manholes shall be removed and the side benching and channels
shallbescrubbed.
b) All lengths of main and branch drains shall be rodded by means of drain rods and a suitable rubber or
leatherplunger.Afterrodding,thedrainsshallbethoroughlyflushedwithcleanwater.
c) Theladders/ringsindeepmanholesandthemanholecoversshallbepainted.
d) Allsurfacedrainsshallbecleaned.
e) Allsubsoildrainsshallbeexaminedforobstructionattheopenjoints.
f) Refusechutesystemshallbecleaned.
RelatedAppendices:
Appendix8.6.AApplicationforPermittoConstructDrainageandSanitationSystem
Appendix8.6.B OnehourRainfall
Appendix8.6.C DesignGuidelineofaSepticTank
Appendix8.6.DCompletionCertificate(DrainageandSanitationWorks)
8288
Vol.3
Chapter 7
RainwaterManagement
7.1
PURPOSE
The purpose of this chapter is to set forth provisions for planning, design and installation of rainwater
managementsystemsinbuildings.
7.2
SCOPE
7.2.1
This chapter specifies the general requirements for rain water harvesting for different categories of buildings
according totheir occupancy classification together with all ancillaryworks of ground waterrecharging suchas
perforatedpiping,pitsandinspectionchambers.
7.2.2
This chapter also covers the design, installation and maintenance of elements for rain water drainage systems
aroundthebuildingandledtopublicstormsewersortonearbysuitablesurfacewatersystem.
7.2.3
ThestormwaterdrainageongroundisnotcoveredbythisCode.
7.3
TERMINOLOGY
ThissectionprovidesanalphabeticallistofalltermsusedandapplicabletothischapteroftheCode.Incaseof
anyconflictorcontradictionbetweenadefinitiongiveninthissectionandthatinanyotherchapterorpartofthe
Code,themeaningspecifiedinthischaptershallgovernforinterpretationoftheprovisionsofthischapter.
BEDDINGFACTOR:Theratiooftheproductofdesignloadandfactorofsafetytotheminimumcrushingstrength.
BRANCH:Anypartofthepipingsystemotherthanamainorriser.
BUILDING DRAIN : The building (house) drain is that part of the lowest piping or open channel of a drainage
systemwhichreceivesthedischargesfromsoil,waste,andotherdrainagesystemsinsidethewallsofthebuilding
andconveysthesametothebuilding(house)sewer,beginningat0.9moutsidethebuildingwall.
BUILDINGSEWER:Thebuilding(house)seweristhatpartofthehorizontalpipingofadrainagesystemwhich
extendsfromtheendofthebuildingdrainandwhichreceivesthedischargeofthebuildingdrainandconveysit
to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage disposal system, or other point of disposal. Also known as
SEWER.
BUILDING STORM DRAIN : A building (house) storm drain is a building drain used for conveying rain water,
surfacewater,groundwater,subsurfacewater,condensate,coolingwater,orothersimilardischargetoabuilding
stormseweroracombinedsewer,extendingtoapartnotlessthan0.9moutsidethebuildingwall.Alsoknown
asSTORMDRAIN.
DRAIN: A drain is any pipe or open channel which carries waste water or waterborne wastes in a building
drainagesystem.
DRAINAGESYSTEM:Adrainagesystem(drainagepiping)includesallthepipingwithinpublicorprivatepremises,
which conveyssewage, rain water,or otherliquid wastes to alegalpoint of disposal, but doesnot include the
mainsofapublicsewersystemoraprivateorpublicsewagetreatmentordisposalplant.
DRINKINGFOUNTAIN:Afountainoratapraisedfromthefloorwithpotablewatersupplyconnection.
Part8
BuildingServices
8291
Part8
BuildingServices
EXISTINGWORK:Theexistingworkisaplumbingsystemoranypartthereofwhichwasinstalledpriortothedate
ofenforcementofthisCode.
FIXTUREUNIT:Afixtureunitisaquantityintermsofwhichtheloadproducingeffectsontheplumbingsystemof
differentkindsofplumbingfixturesareexpressedonsomearbitrarilychosenscale.
FLUSH VALVES: A flush valve is a device located at the bottom of the tank for the purpose of flushing water
closetsandsimilarfixtures.
FRENCHDRAIN:Ashallowtrenchfilledwithcoarserubble,clinkerorsimilarmaterialwithorwithoutfielddrain
pipes.
GRADE:Thegradeistheslopeorfallofalineofpipeinreferencetoahorizontalplane.Indrainageitisusually
expressedasthefallinmmpermlengthofpipe.
HORIZONTAL BRANCH : A horizontal branch is a drain pipe extending laterally from a soil or waste stack or
building drain, with or without vertical sections or branches, which receives the discharge from one or more
fixturedrainsandconductsittothesoilorwastestackortothebuilding(house)drain.
HORIZONTALPIPE:Ahorizontalpipeisanypipeorfittingwhichisinstalledinahorizontalpositionorwhichmakes
anangleoflessthan45degreeswiththehorizontal.
INTERCEPTOR: An interceptor is a device designed and installed so as to separate and retain deleterious,
hazardous,orundesirablematterfromnormalwastesandpermitnormalorliquidwastestodischargeintothe
disposalterminalbygravity.
INVERT:Thelowestpointoftheinternalsurfaceofapipeorchannelatanycrosssection.
LEADER : A vertical drainage pipe that carries rainwater from roof or gutter drain to building storm drain or
buildingdrainorprivatedisposalsystem.
LIQUIDWASTE:Theliquidwasteisthedischargefromanyfixture,appliance,orappurtenanceinconnectionwith
aplumbingsystemwhichdoesnotreceivefecalmatter.
LOADFACTOR:Theloadfactoristhepercentageofthetotalconnectedfixtureunitflowratewhichislikelyto
occuratanypointinthedrainagesystem.Itvarieswiththetypeofoccupancy,thetotalflowunitabovethepoint
beingconsidered,andwiththeprobabilityfactorofsimultaneoususe.
MAIN:Themainofanysystemofcontinuouspipingistheprincipalarteryofthesystem,towhichbranchesmay
beconnected.
MAINSEWER:SeePublicSewer.
MANHOLE : An opening by which a man may enter or leave a drain, a sewer or other closed structure for
inspection,cleaningandothermaintenanceoperations,fittedwithasuitablecover.
MANHOLECHAMBER:Achamberconstructedonadrainorsewersoastoprovideaccesstheretoforinspection,
testingortheclearanceofobstruction.
OFFSET:Anoffsetinalineofpipingisacombinationofelbowsorbendswhichbringsonesectionofthepipeout
oflinebutintoalineparallelwiththeothersection.
PUBLICSEWER:Apublicsewerisacommonsewerdirectlycontrolledbypublicauthority.AlsoknownasMAIN
SEWER.
RISER:Awatersupplypipethatextendsverticallyonefullstoreyormoretoconveywatertobranchesorfixtures.
SANITARY SEWER: A sanitary sewer is a pipe which carries sewage and excludes storm, surface, and ground
water.AlsoknownasSEWER.
SEEPAGEPIT:SeeSOAKPIT.
SEWAGE:Thesewageisanyliquidwastecontaininganimalorvegetablematterinsuspensionorsolutionandmay
includeliquidscontainingchemicalsinsolution.
SEWER:SeeBUILDINGSEWERorPUBLICSEWERorSANITARYSEWERorSTORMSEWER.
SLUDGE: A settled portion of the sewage or waste water effluent from a sedimentation tank in semisolid
condition.
SOAKPIT:Apit,dugintopermeablesoillinedtoformacoveredperforatedchamberorfilledwithsandatthe
bottomandgravelorbrokenbricksatthetopintowhicheffluentfromaseptictankorstormwaterisledand
fromwhichthesemaysoakawayintotheground.AlsoknownasSEEPAGEPITorSOAKWELL.
SOAKWELL:SeeSOAKPIT.
6292
Vol.3
RainwaterManagement
Chapter7
SOILPIPE:Asoilpipeisanypipewhichconveysthedischargeofwaterclosets,urinals,orfixtureshavingsimilar
functions,withorwithoutthedischargefromotherfixtures,tothebuildingdrainorbuildingsewer.
STACK:Astackistheverticalmainofasystemofsoil,waste,orventpiping.
STORMDRAIN:SeeBuildingStormDrain.
STORM SEWER: A storm sewer is a sewer used for conveying rain water, surface water, condensate, cooling
water,orsimilarliquidwastes,exclusiveofsewageandindustrialwaste.AlsoknownasSEWER.
SUBSOILDRAIN:Asubsoildrainisadrainwhichreceivesonlysubsurfaceorseepagewaterandconveysittoa
placeofdisposal.
SULLAGE:Thedischargefromwashbasins,sinksandsimilarappliances,whichdoesnotcontainhumanoranimal
excreta.
SUMP: A sump is a tank or pit which receives sewage or liquid waste, located below the normal grade of the
gravitysystem,andwhichmustbeemptiedbymechanicalmeans.
SUPPORTS: The supports, hangers, and anchors are devices for supporting and securing pipe and fixtures to
walls,ceilings,floors,orstructuralmembers.
TRAP:Atrapisafittingordevicesodesignedandconstructedastoprovide,whenproperlyvented,aliquidseal
whichwillpreventthebackpassageofairwithoutmateriallyaffectingtheflowofsewageorwastewaterthrough
it.
TRAPSEAL:Thetrapsealisthemaximumverticaldepthofliquidthatatrapwillretain,measuredbetweenthe
crownweirandthetopofthedipofthetrap.
VERTICAL PIPE: A vertical pipe is any pipe or fitting which is installed in a vertical position or which makes an
angleofnotmorethan45degreeswiththevertical.
WASTEPIPE:Awastepipeisapipewhichconveysonlyliquidwastefreeoffecalmatter.
7.4
RainwaterHarvestingRequirements
7.4.1
General
Every building proposed for constructing on plots having extent of 300 sqm or above shall have facilities for
conservingandharvestingrainwater.
7.5
RainwaterHarvestingPlans
7.5.1
RequirementofPermit
Rainwaterharvestinganddrainagesystemshallnotbeinstalleduntilapermitforsuchworkhasbeenissuedby
theBuildingAuthorityforexisting(onlyforadditionorforalteration)ornewbuildingorforanyotherpremises.
7.5.2
Anapplicationforapermitforrainwaterharvestinganddrainageworkshallbemadeonaprescribedform(see
Appendix8.6.F)bythelicensedplumberandtheowner,orbyhisappointedpersonoragenttoinstallalloraself
contained or workable part of such work. The application shall accompany building rainwater harvesting and
drainage plans and adequate description of the proposed rainwater harvesting and drainage installation in a
drawing(drawntoascalenotlessthan1:100)withthefollowingdetails:
(a) Planofthebuildingandsitelayout;
(b) Rainwaterharvesting;
(c) Groundrechargingsystem;
(d) Stormdrainagesystem;
(e) Catchmentareas;
(f) Materials,sizesandgradientsofallproposedpiping;
6293
Part8
BuildingServices
(g) The position of manhole, rainwater pipe, gutters, rainwater inlets, etc. in the premises and their
connection with storm sewer system or surface waters; the following colours may be used to indicate sewers,
rainwaterpipesandexistingworks:
Proposedstormsewersanddisposalpipes
Existingnetwork
(h) Theslopeofcatchments.
7.5.3
violet
black
Inadditiontorainwaterharvestinganddrainageplanaseparatesiteplanofthebuildingshallbesubmittedwith
thefollowingparticulars:
(a) Adjoiningplotsandstreetswiththeiridentification;
(b) Thepositionandinvertlevelofthestormsewers,(ifany),surfacedrainwaterandthedirectionofflowin
it;
(c) Theleveloftheproposeddrainagepipeconnectingtothestormsewers(ifany);
(d) Thepositionandlayoutofprivatestormdrainagesystem(inabsenceofpublicstormsewers);and
(e) Thealignment,sizeandgradientsofallharvestinganddrainagepiping.
7.5.4
For high rise and public buildings, design calculations and specifications for various items of the work involved
shallbesubmittedalongwiththedrawings.
7.5.5
PermitsandApprovals
Thebuildingofficialshallexamineorcausetobeexaminedallapplicationsforpermitsand,amendmentsthereto
within 45 days. If the application does not conform to the requirements of all pertinent laws, such application
shall be rejected in writing, stating the reasons therefore. If the proposed work satisfies all the Code
requirements,theAuthorityshallissueanontransferablepermit.
7.6
LICENSINGOFPLUMBER
7.6.1
LicenseRequirement
Noindividual,partnership,corporationorfirmshallengageinthebusinessofinstallation,repairoralterationof
rainwaterharvestinganddrainageworkwithoutobtainingalicensefromtheAuthority.
7.6.2
ExaminationandCertification
TheBuildingAuthorityshallestablishaplumbersexaminationboard.Theboardwilldeterminetherequirements
forthequalificationandproceduresforexaminationofapplicantsforlicense.TheAuthoritywillissuelicenseto
suchapplicantswhomeetthequalificationsthereforeandsuccessfullypasstheexaminationconductedbythe
board.
7.6.3
AnnulmentofLicense
ThelicenseofalicensedplumbermaybenullifiedbytheBuildingAuthority,ifitisprovedthataplumbingwork
has been completed and certified by the licensed plumber violating the provisions of this Code deliberately
settingasidetheapprovalsgiveninthepermitorwithoutreceivingthepermitfromtheBuildingAuthority.
7.7
RainwaterHarvesting
7.7.1
General
Rainwatercanbeconservedandusedinallusefulpurposesrelatedtouseofwater.Theamountofrainwaterto
be conserved depends upon the purpose of use, rainfall intensity at the locality and the available catchments
6294
Vol.3
RainwaterManagement
Chapter7
fromwhererainwatershallbecollected.Rainwatercanalsobeusedforartificialgroundwaterrecharging.Two
majoraspectsofrainwaterharvestingareasfollows.
(a) Rooftoprainwaterharvesting,and
(b) Artificialgroundwaterrecharge.
RoofTopRainwaterHarvesting
7.8
Watercanbecollectedthroughroofguttersandrainwaterdownpipes.Provisionshallbemadetodivertthefirst
rainfallafterdryspelltoavoiddust,soot,andleavesetc.inthewatertobecollectedinto thewatertank.The
capacityofthewatertankshouldbeenoughforstoringwaterrequiredforconsumptionbetweentwodryspells.
7.8.1
PrecautionsinRainwaterHarvesting
Followingprecautionsshallbewellcared
(a) Nosewageorwastewatershouldbeadmittedintothesystem.
(b) Wastewaterfromareaslikelytohaveoil,greaseorotherpollutantsshallnotbeconnectedtothesystem.
(c) Eachrainwaterseepagewellshallhaveaninletchamberwithasilttraptopreventanysiltfromfinding
itswayintothesubsoilwater.
(d) Thewellsshouldbeterminatedatleast5mabovethenaturalstaticsubsoilwateratitshighestlevelso
thattheincomingflowpassesthroughthenaturalgroundconditionandpreventscontaminationhazards.
(e) Norechargestructureorawellshallbeusedfordrawingwaterforanypurpose.
7.8.2
QualifyingRainwaterforHarvesting.
Rainwatershallbetreatedadoptingfollowingmethodsmentionedaccordingtothepurposeofuse:
(a) For using rainwater in drinking, cooking, washing utensils bathing and ablution it shall be disinfected
alongwithfiltration.
(b) Forclothwashing,floorwashing,fountain,waterfallcascadeetc,rainwatershallbefiltered.
(c) For using in sprinkler fire fighting, air conditioning etc sedimentation of suspended particles will be
required.
(d) Fortoiletflushing,gardening,cleaningartificialground,parkinglotsetcscreeningfloatingmaterialsare
needed.
7.8.3
CatchmentsareaforCollectingRainwater
Rainwatercanbecollectedfromfollowingbuiltupareasforharvesting.
(a) Rooftopsurfaces
(b) Externalwallsandotherverticalsurfaces
(c) Balconies,sunshadesetc.
(d) Metalsurfaceofplaygrounds,openyardsetc.
7.8.4
DeterminingCatchmentArea
For flat surface, the catchment area is its plan area plus 50 per cent of the adjoining vertical wall contributing
rainwateraccumulationontheconcernedcatchment.Seeappendix8.6.E.
Forslopingroof,catchmentisconsideredtobetheactualinclinedroofarea.
7.8.5
StoringRainwater
Where rainwater will be used for domestic purpose, rainwater from roof or terrace may be led straight from
conductor(orleader)tooneormorestoragetanks.Storagetanksshallbeprovidedwithventilatingcovers.An
arrangement shall be made in the rainwater leader to divert the first washings from the roof or terrace
catchments as they will contain more undesirable materials. The open end of all pipes shall be covered with
mosquito(insect)proofwirenet.
6295
Part8
BuildingServices
7.8.6 FlushingoutFirstRainwater
Beforestoringinitialrainwater,justafterstartingraining,shallbedrainedoutforaperiodasmentionedbelow.
Location
Time
Dhakametropolitanarea
20min
Sylhet
15min
Chittagong
15min
Otherurbanareas
15min
7.8.7 PrecautionsforRainwaterStorage
Followingprecautionarymeasuresshallbetakenforrainwaterstorage.
(a) Storagetankshallbemadewatertightinallrespect.
(b) Tankshallalwaysbekeptcovered.
(c) Regularcleaningatleastonceayear,preferablyatendofdryperiods,shallbedone.
(d) Disinfectionshallbedoneaftercleaningoperation.
(e) Tankshallbeventilatedandventpipeshallbecoveredbymosquitonet.
(f) Thetankmusthaveanoverflowpipeleadingtoanaturalwatercourse.
(g) Ifrawrainwaterand potablewateris tobestored inthesame storage tankseparated by aseparating
wall,thentheseparatingwallshallhavenoopenings.
7.8.8 RainwaterTreatment
Forpotablesystems,aplaingalvanizedrooforametalroofwithepoxyorlatexpaintisrecommended.Composite
orasphaltshinglesarenotadvisable,toimprovewaterquality,disinfectionshallbedoneinthefollowingway.
7.8.8.1
Chlorination
Chlorine must be present in a concentration of 1 ppm to achieve disinfection. Liquid chlorine, in the form of
laundrybleach,usuallyhas6percentavailablesodiumhypochlorite.Fordisinfectionpurposes,2fluidounces(
cup) must be added per 1,000 gallons of rainwater. Bleach products, however, not labeled cannot be used in
water treatment. A purer form of chlorine, which comes in solid form, is calcium hypochlorite, usually with 75
percentavailablechlorine.Atthatstrength,0.85ouncesbyweightin1,000gallonsofwaterwouldresultinalevel
of 1 ppm. Chlorine contact times are shown in Table 8.7.1. To filter out Giardia and Cryptosporidum cysts, an
absolute1micronfiltershallbeused.
Table8.7.1:ContactTimewithChlorine
Water
Watertemperature
o
45oF
40oForcolder
pH
50 Forwarmer
6.0
6.5
7.0
10
12
7.5
12
15
18
8.0
16
20
24
Contacttimeinminutes
7.8.9
DeterminingVolumeofRainwaterStorage
Determiningvolumeofrainwaterstorage
1000
Rainwaterstoragevolumeincum=
whereD=RainwaterdemandInliterpercapitaperday.
N=Populationnumber.
6296
Vol.3
RainwaterManagement
Chapter7
D = Number of days for which water will be stored. Consider 90 days for drinking, cooking, utensils cleansing,
bathingandablutionpurposes;210daysforotherpurposes.
7.8.10 SizingofRainwaterDownPiping
Thesizeandnumberofverticalleadersorrainwaterdownpipesshallbebasedonthemaximumprojectedroof
area according to Table 8.7.2. Minimum two drains and vertical leaders shall be provided for any independent
roofsurface.
ThesizeofsemicircularguttershallbebasedonmaximumprojectedroofareaaccordingtoTable8.7.4.
7.8.11 INLETOFLEADERS
Inletofleadersonanyopensurfacesshallbeprovidedwithdomeshapedgratings.SizeoftheInletofanyvertical
leadershallbeonesizebiggerthanthesizeofthecorrespondingverticalleader.
7.8.12 DESIGNOFRAINWATERDISTRIBUTIONSYSTEM
Thedesignofrainwaterdistributionpipingshallbeinaccordancewithsec.5.10ofchapter5.
ArtificialGroundWaterRecharge
7.9
Stormrunoffshouldbeusedforaugmentationofgroundwaterreservoirwheregroundwaterdepletionrateis
more than one meter per year. Modifying the natural movement of surface water by constructing recharge
structures(seeFig.8.8.1)hasthefollowingobjectives:
(a) Enhancement of sustainable yield in areas where there is over development and depletion of the
aquifers.
(b) Conservationandstorageofexcessundergroundwaterintheaquifers.
(c) Improvementofthequalityoftheexistinggroundwaterthroughdilution.
(d) Maintaining the natural balance of the ground water and its usage as the rainwater is a renewable
supplysource
(e) Providingconstant,dependableandsafewatersupply.
7.9.1
DesigningRechargePit
Volume of recharge pit shall be on the basis of maximum intensity of rainfall in a shorter period of at least 15
minute.Itisaboutonefourthpeakhourlyrainfall
Capacityofrechargetank=AIsf/p
Where
A=Catchmentsarea
Is=Intensityofrainfallin15minutes
f=Runoffcoefficientand
p=Porosityoffilterbed=0.5
6297
Part8
BuildingServices
GL
Inlet
Coarse sand
1.5 to 2mm
Gravel 5 to 10mm size

Boulder 5 to 20mm size
3mm slot size
Ball plug
Fig8.7.1.ARTIFICIALGROUNDWATERRECHARGESTRUCTURE
Largedrywellcanbeconstructedinaccordancewiththerequirementsforseepagepit(Sec6.9.15).However,for
smalldrywellshandlinglimitedquantitiesofrainwater,thepitmayconsistofaonemeterdepthlengthof1.0
0.45mdiameterpipefilledwithcrushedbricksstone.
7.10
DRAINAGEANDSANITATIONREQUIREMENT
7.10.1
General
Theobjectofstormwaterdrainageistocollectandcarry,theexcessrainwateraccumulatingwithinthepremises
of the building, for suitable disposal. In rainwater drainage system there shall be safeguard against fouling,
deposition of solids and clogging and with adequate inspection chambers so arranged that the drains may be
readilycleanedwithouttheriskofhealthhazard.
7.10.2
DesignFactors
Estimationofthequantityofstormwatershallbebasedonthefollowingfactors
(a) Imperviousnessofthesurface
(b) Groundslopeandtimeofconcentration
(c) Intensityoftherainfallforadesignperiodand
(d) Durationoftherainfall.
7.10.3
ImperviousnessoftheSurface
Thepercentageofimperviousnessofthedrainageareamaybeobtainedfromavailabledataforaparticulararea.
Intheabsenceofsuchdata,thefollowingvaluesmayserveasaguide:
6298
Vol.3
RainwaterManagement
Chapter7
Imperviousnessfactorfordifferenttypeofareas
Typeofarea(percent)
7.10.4
Imperviousnessfactor
Commercialandindustrialareas
70-90
Residentialareas(highdensity)
6075
Residentialareas(lowdensity)
3560
Parksandunderdevelopedareas
1020
TimeofConcentration
Time of concentration to reach the farthest point of any drainage system or the outfall under consideration
shouldbeconsideredbetween5minto30min.
7.10.5
IntensityoftheRainfall
Rainwater Intensity data for the locality of the building shall be studied to arrive at the design parameters for
rainwaterharvestinginaccordancewithAppendixS.
7.10.6
RainwaterDisposal
Rainwaterfromrooforfrombuildingpremisesshallnotbedischargedintoseptictank.Thisshallbedrainedinto
storm sewer or combined sewersystem where available or into private disposal methods, water course or dry
well,Fig8.6.21and8.6.22.
7.10.6.1 Individual rain water traps shall be installed on the rainwater drain branch serving each leader or a
singletrapshallbeinstalledinthemainrainwaterdrain(buildingstormdrain)justbeforeitsconnection
withthecombinedbuildingsewer,maindrainorpublicsewer.
7.10.6.2 No traps shall be required for rainwater drains which will be used for rainwater collection and
connectedtoasewerdrainingrainwaterexclusively.
7.10.6.3 Subsurface drainage pipings for rainwater drainage shall not be less than 100 mm in diameter. The
subsoildrainagesystemshallbeprotectedbyanaccessiblylocatedbackwatervalveincasethebuilding
is subject to backwater or flooding. Subsoil drains shall discharge to a trapped area drain, sump, dry
welloranapprovedlocationabovegrade.
7.10.6.4 Rainwaterpipesshallnotbeusedassoil,wasteorventpipes.
7.10.6.5 All roof areas, except those draining to hanging gutters, shall be equipped with roof drains with
strainersextendingnotlessthan100mmabovethesurfaceoftheroofandshallhaveanavailableinlet
areanotlessthantwotimestheareaoftheleadertowhichthedrainwillbeconnected.
7.10.6.6 Itisrecommendedtohavemorethanonerainwaterdrainagepipeforprimaryroofdrainagesystemto
minimizeblockage.
7.10.6.7 It is recommended to provide secondary rainwater drainage system at a suitable elevation from the
roofthathasbeenconsideredinthecalculationofrainwaterloadtodesignthebuildingstructure.The
secondary drainage system shall be a separate drainage piping up to a storm sewer or private waste
(rainwater)disposalsystem.Thesizeofsecondaryrainwaterdrainagepipingshallnotbelessthanthe
sizerequiredforprimaryrainwaterdrainagepiping.
7.10.6.8 Frenchdrainsmaybeemployedassurfacewaterdrainsfordrainageofunpavedsurfaces.Construction
offrenchdrains(ifused)shallbeinaccordancewithestablishedengineeringpractices.
7.10.6.9 The design of such system shall be on the basis of location with respect to wells or other sources of
water, soil permeability, ground water elevation, area available and maximum occupancy of the
building.
6299
Part8
BuildingServices
7.11
MATERIALSANDAPPLIANCES
The piping, fixtures and equipment to be used for rainwater harvesting and drainage system shall be in
accordancewithSec6.7inChapter6.
7.12
ConstructionofRainwaterStorageTank
TheconstructionofstoragetanksforrainwaterstorageshallbeinaccordancewithSec5.7inchapter5.
7.13
InstallationandConstructionofRainwaterHarvestingandDrainageSystem
7.13.1
Alljunctionsandjointsofrainwaterharvestinganddrainagepipingshallbewatertight.
7.13.2
Roofguttersshallbeofsuitablematerialofrequiredthickness.Alljointsshallbewatertight.
7.13.3
ThedepthofcovershallbeinaccordancewithSec7.9.8.
7.13.4
Thepipeshallbelaidtoevengradientsandchangeofgradientshallbecombinedwithanaccesspoint(Sec7.9.6).
However,accesspointsshallbeprovidedonlyifblockagescouldnotbeclearedwithoutthem.
7.13.5
The joints and connection in drainage and venting system shall be gastight and watertight for the pressures
required by the test, with the exception of those portions of perforated or open joint piping which will be
installedforthepurposeofcollectingandconveyinggroundorseepagewatertotheundergroundstormdrains.
7.13.6
Piping in rainwater drainage and harvesting system shall be installed without undue strains and stresses and
provisionshallbemadeforexpansion,contractionandstructuralsettlement.Verticalpipingshallbesecuredat
sufficientlycloseintervalstokeepthepipeinalignmentandcarrytheweightofthepipinganditscontent.The
horizontalpipingshallbesupportedatsufficientlycloseintervals(Sec7.8)tokeepitinalignmentandtoprevent
sagging.
7.14
HangersandSupport
The piping, fixtures and equipment used for rainwater harvesting and drainage system shall be provided with
sufficienthangersandsupportinaccordancewithSec5.13inChapter5.
7.15
PipeJoints
The joints between different piping and fittings shall conform to the standards in accordance with Sec 5.13 in
Chapter5.
6300
Vol.3
RainwaterManagement
7.16
Chapter7
ProtectionAgainstRodent
Installation of pipes through any walls ceilings etc shall be made rodent proof in accordance with sec. 6.9.8 of
chapter6.
7.17
GradientofPipes
Lesserslopeofrainwaterdrainagepipeshallbeprovided.Thecomputedvelocityinthestormwaterdrainsshall
not be less than 0.6 m per second. The maximum recommended velocity shall be 2.5 m per second. For drain
pipestobeusedforrechargingtheflowvelocityshouldbe0.6mpersecond.
7.18
InspectionChambersandManholes
InspectionchambersandmanholesshallIncorporatedandconstructedinaccordancewith6.9.7.3ofchapter6.
7.19
BeddingandBackfilling
Theoperationofbeddingandbackfillingshallbeinaccordancewithsec.6.9.9ofchapter6.
7.20
DesignofRainwaterorStormWaterDrainagePiping
Designingofrainwaterdownpipeandstormwaterdrainagepipeincludesdeterminingthenumberofrainwater
downpipeandsizesanddeterminingthesizeofdrainpipesaccordingtothefallofdrainpipe.
7.21
SizingandFindingTheNumberofRainwaterDrainagePiping
7.21.1
Thesizeandnumberofverticalleadersshallbebasedonthemaximumprojectedcatchmentareaaccordingto
Table8.7.4.Minimumtwonumbersofroofdrainsandverticalleadersshallbeprovidedforanyindependentroof
surface.
7.21.2 SizingofStormWaterDrainagePiping
Thesizeofbuildingstormdrain,stormseweroranyoftheirhorizontalbranchesshallbebasedonthemaximum
catchmentareaincludingprojectedrooforpavedareatobedrainedinaccordancewithTable8.7.3.
7.21.3
ThesizeofsemicircularguttershallbebasedonmaximumprojectedroofareaaccordingtoTable8.7.4.
Table8.7.2
SizeofVerticalLeaders*
SizeofLeader**
MaximumProjectedRoofAreaandFlow
(mm)
(m2)
(l/min)
50
202
87
65
367
155
75
598
253
100
1287
544
125
2336
986
150
3790
1602
200
8180
3450
6301
Part8
BuildingServices
*
Table8.7.2isbaseduponamaximumrainfallof25mmperhourfora1hourduration.Thefigurefor
drainageareashallbeadjustedtolocalconditions(Appendix8.6.E).
** Theequivalentdiameterofsquareleaderwillbethediameterofthatcirclewhichcanbeinscribed
withinthecrosssectionalarea.Theequivalentdiameteroftherectangularleaderwillbetheshort
dimensionoftherectangularleader.However,theratioofwidthtodepthofrectangularleadershallnot
exceed3:1.
Table8.7.3SizeofHorizontalBuildingStormDrainsandBuildingStormSewer*
Diameter
ofDrain
MaximumCatchmentAreaandFlowforVariousSlopes
(mm)
10mmperm
20mmperm
40mmperm
m2
l/min
m2
l/min
m2
l/min
75
299
125
422
177
599
252
100
668
288
965
406
1370
577
125
1215
515
1715
725
2430
1030
150
1950
823
2745
1157
3900
1645
200
4185
1765
5940
2500
8380
3540
250
7550
3185
10650
4500
15100
6370
300
12140
5100
17140
7236
24280
10250
375
21700
9120
30600
12900
43400
18300
Table8.7.3isbaseduponamaximumrainfallof25mmperhourfor1hourduration.Thefigurefor
drainageareashallbeadjustedtolocalconditionsinaccordancewithAppendix8.6.E.
Table8.7.4SizeofSemicircularRoofGutters*
Diaof
Gutter
MaximumProjectedRoofAreaforGutterofVariousSlopes
(mm)
5mmperm
l/min
10mmperm
20mmperm
40mmperm
m2
l/min
m2
l/min
m2
l/min
75
61
25
87
36
123
51
174
73
100
130
55
185
77
260
110
370
155
125
227
96
320
136
455
192
645
273
150
350
148
495
210
700
296
1010
425
175
503
210
710
300
1000
425
1420
600
200
725
307
1020
430
1300
610
2040
862
250
1300
555
1850
785
2610
1110
3650
1540
Table8.7.4isbaseduponamaximumrainfallof25mmperhourfor1hourduration.Thefigurefor
drainageareashallbesubjecttolocalconditionsinaccordancewithAppendix8.6.E.
7.22
The inspection, testing and completion certification of rainwater harvesting and drainage system or part of
existingsystemshallbeinaccordancewith7.14.
6302
Vol.3
RainwaterManagement
7.23
Chapter7
GUIDETOMAINTENANCE
Themaintenanceofrainwaterharvestinganddrainageandsystemshallbeinaccordancewithsec6.15ofchapter
6.
RelatedAppendices
Appendix8.6.B OnehourRainfall
Appendix8.6.E Determiningcatchmentsareaforaflatsurface
6303
Chapter 8
FUELGASSUPPLY
8.1
8.1.1
GENERAL
Scope
8.1.1.1
This Chapter provides the requirements aimed at safeguarding life and property in nonindustrial gas
pipingsystemsforusewithfuelgasessuchasnaturalgas(NG)andliquefiedpetroleumgas(LPG)inthe
vapourphaseusedforfuelorlightingpurposesinconsumerspremises.
8.1.1.2
This Chapter does not cover the safety requirements and rules for gas burning appliances. The
requirements of National Fuel Gas Code 2009 edition (NEPA54/ANSI Z223.1) and NFPA 582008
editionandInternationalFuelGasCode2009oftheUSAshallapplyforsuchappliances.
8.1.1.3
The requirements of this Chapter do not apply to gas piping systems for industrial installation and
applications.
8.1.1.4
This Chapter covers the aspects of design, fabrication, installation, test, operation, inspection and
maintenanceofgaspipingsystemsfromthepointofdeliverytotheconnectionswitheachutilization
device. The point of delivery is defined in this Chapter as the outlet of the service regulator or the
serviceshutoffvalvewherethereisnometer.
8.1.1.5
Piping systems covered here are limited to a maximum operating pressure of 3.45 kPa (14 inches of
watercolumnorpsig).
8.1.1.6
While applying the provisions of this Chapter, reference should also be made to the manufacturers'
instructions,gassupplycompany'sregulationsandotherapplicablecodesandstandardslistedinthis
Chapterorrequiredbytheauthorityhavingjurisdiction.
8.1.2
Terminology
ThissectionprovidesdefinitionsoftermsusedinthisChapteroftheCode.Wheretermsarenotdefinedinthis
Chapter, they shall be defined using their ordinarily accepted meanings such as the context implies. The
definitionsintheChapterarethesameasusedinNationalFuelGasCode2009edition(NFPA54/ANSIZ223.1),
InternationalFuelGasCode2009andLiquefiedPetroleumGasCode2008(NFPA58)andNationalBuildingCode
ofIndia2005.
Appliance:Anydevicethatutilizesgasasafuelorrawmaterialtoproducelight,heat,power,refrigeration,orair
conditioning.
ApplianceValve:Adevicethatwillshutoffthegassupplytoburners(s)
Approved:Acceptabletotheauthorityhavingjurisdiction
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): An organization, office, or individual responsible for enforcing the
requirementsofacodeorstandard,orforapprovingequipment,materials,andinstallation,oraprocedure.
BranchLine:Gaspipingthatconveysgasfromasupplylinetotheappliance
Burner/Cookers:Adeviceforthefinalconveyanceofgas,oramixtureofgasandair,tothecombustionzone.
ConcealedGasPiping:Gaspipingthat,wheninplaceinafinishedbuilding,wouldrequireremovalofpermanent
constructiontogainaccesstothepiping.
Part8
BuildingServices
8303
Part8
BuildingServices
Consumers/CustomersConnection:Pipingtappedontherisertosupplygastoindividualcustomer/consumer
Cylinder: A portable container designed, fabricated, tested and marked (or stamped) in accordance with a
recognizedstandard/codesuchasASME,ortheregulationsoftheUSDepartmentofTransportation(DOT)used
fortransportingorstoringLPG.Themaximumsizepermittedinsidethebuildingis320kgwatercapacity.
DiversityFactor:Ratioofthemaximumprobabledemandtothemaximumpossibledemand.
Drip:Thecontainerplacedatalowpointinasystemofpipingtocollectcondensateandfromwhichitmaybe
removed.
Equivalent: Nothing in this code is intended to prevent the use of system, methods or device of equivalent or
superiorquality,strength,fireresistance,effectiveness,durabilityandsafetyoverthoseprescribedbythiscode.
However, technical documentation shall be submitted to the authority having jurisdiction to demonstrate
equivalency; and the proposed method, system or device shall be approved for the intended use by the same
authority.
Fuel Gas: A natural gas, manufactured gas, liquefied petroleum gas or mixturesof the gases (This chapter only
recognizesnaturalgasandLPGasfuelgas).
Gases: Include natural gas, manufactured gas, liquefied petroleum (LP) gas in the vapor phase, liquefied
petroleumgasairmixturesandmixturesofthesegases,plusgasairmixtureswithintheflammablerange,with
thefuelgasortheflammablecomponentofamixturebeingacommerciallydistributedproduct.
GasFitter:Anemployeeofthegassupplyingcompany
GasManifold:Theconduitofanappliancethatsuppliesgastotheindividualburner(s).
Labeled: Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol or other identifying mark of an
organizationthatisacceptabletotheauthorityhavingjurisdictionandconcernedwithproductevaluation,that
maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or materials, and by whose labeling the
manufacturerindicatescompliancewithappropriatestandardsorperformanceinaspecifiedmanner.
Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG): Liquefied petroleum gas composed predominantly of propane, propylene,
butanesorbutylenesormixturesthereofthatisgaseousundernormalatmosphericconditionsbutiscapableof
beingliquefiedundermoderatepressureatnormaltemperatures.
Listed:Equipment,materialsorservicesincludedinalistpublishedbyanorganizationthatisacceptabletothe
authority having jurisdiction and concerned with evaluation of products or services, that maintains periodic
inspection of production of listed equipment or materials or periodic evaluation of services, and whose listing
states either that the equipment, materials, or service meets appropriate designated standards or has been
testedandfoundsuitableforaspecifiedpurpose.
Meter:Aninstrumentinstalledtomeasurethevolumeofgasdeliveredthroughit.
Outlet:Thepointatwhichgasfiredapplianceconnectstothegaspipingsystem.
Pilot:Asmallflamethatisutilizedtoignitethegasatthemainburnerorburners.
Pipe:Rigidconduitofiron,steel,copper,brass,aluminum,orplastic.
Piping System: All piping, valves and fittings from the outlet of the point of delivery from the supplier to the
outletsoftheequipmentshutoffvalves.
PressureRegulator:Equipmentplacedinagaslineforreducing,controlling,andmaintainingthepressureinthat
portionofthepipingsystemdownstreamoftheequipment.
Pressure Test: An operation performed to verify the gastight integrity of gas piping following its installation or
modification.
Purge:Tofreeagasconduitofairorgas,oramixtureofgasandair.
QualifiedAgency:Anindividual,firm,corporation,orcompanythateitherinpersonorthrougharepresentativeis
engagedinandisresponsiblefor(a)theinstallation,testing,orreplacementofgaspipingor(b)theconnection,
installation, testing, repair, or servicing of appliances and equipment; that is experienced in such work; that is
familiar with all precautions required; and that has complied with all the requirements of the authority having
jurisdiction.
Riser:Averticalpipesupplyingfuelgas
SafetyShutoffDevice:Adevicethatwillshutoffthegassupplytothecontrolledburner(s)intheeventthesource
ofignitionfails.Thisdevicemayinterrupttheflowofgastomainburner(s)onlyortopilot(s)andmainburner(s)
underitssupervision.
8304
Vol.3
FuelGasSupply
Chapter8
ServiceMeterAssembly:Thepipingandfittingsinstalledbytheservinggassuppliertoconnecttheinletsideof
themetertothegasserviceandtoconnecttheoutletsideofthemetertothecustomershouseoryardpiping.
ServiceRegulator:Apressureregulatorinstalledbytheservinggassuppliertoreduceandlimittheserviceline
gaspressuretodeliverypressure.
ServiceShutoffValve:Avalve,installedbytheservinggassupplierbetweentheservicemeterorsourceofsupply
andthecustomerpipingsystem,toshutoftheentirepipingsystem.
Shall:Indicatesamandatoryrequirement
Tubing:Semirigidconduitofcopper,steel,aluminum,CSST(corrugatedstainlesssteelstubing)orplastic
Valve:Adeviceusedinpipingtocontrolthegassupplytoanysectionofasystemofpipingortoanappliance.
Vent:Apassagewayusedtoconveyfluegasesfromappliancesortheirventconnectorstotheoutdoors.
WaterHeater:Anapplianceforsupplyhotwaterfordomesticorcommercialpurpose.
8.1.3
GeneralPrecautions
8.1.3.1
TurnGasOff:Allgaspipingworkorgasapplianceinstallationshallbeperformedwiththegasturnedoff
toeliminatehazardsfromleakageofgas.
8.1.3.2
NotificationofInterruptedService:Itshallbetheresponsibilityoftheinstallingagency,whenifthegas
supplyistobeturnedoff,tonotifyallaffectedconsumers.
8.1.3.3
Before TurningGasOff: Before turning offthe gas topremises forthe purpose ofinstallation,repair,
test,inspection,replacementormaintenanceofgaspipingorappliances,allburnersshallbeturnedoff.
Whentwoormoreconsumersareservedfromthesamesupplysystem,precautionsshallbetakento
ensurethatonlysupplytotheconcernedconsumeristurnedoff.
8.1.3.4
CheckingforGasLeaks:Soapandwatersolutionorothermaterialapprovedforthepurpose,shallbe
used in locating gas leakage. Use of matches, candles, flames or other sources of ignition shall be
prohibitedforthispurpose.
8.1.3.5
UseofLights:Artificialilluminationusedinconnectionwithasearchforgasleakageshallberestricted
tobatteryoperatedflashlights(preferablyofthesafetytype)orapprovedsafetylamps.Insearchingfor
leaks,electricswitchesshouldnotbeoperated.Ifelectriclightsarealreadyturnedon,theyshouldnot
beturnedoff.
8.1.3.6
WorkingAlone:Anindividualshallnotworkaloneinanysituationwhereworkingpracticedesiresthat
twoormorepersonsarenecessarytocarryouttheworksafely.
8.1.3.7
Handling Liquid from Drips: Liquid which is removed from a drip in an existing gas piping shall be
handledwithproperprecautions,andshallnotbeleftontheconsumers'premises.
8.1.3.8
NoSmoking:Whenworkingonpipingwhichcontainsorhascontainedgas,smokingshallbeprohibited.
8.1.3.9
Handling of Flammable Liquids: Flammable liquids used by the installer shall be handled with proper
precautionsandshallnotbeleftwithinthepremisesfromtheendofoneworkingdaytothebeginning
ofthenext.
8.1.3.10 WorkInterruption:Wheninterruptionsinworkoccur,thesystemshallbeleftinasafeandsatisfactory
condition.
8.1.3.11 CertainrequirementsrelatedtoworkonthegassupplysystemarelistedinAppendixA.
6305
Part8
BuildingServices
8.1.4 NotificationofCompletion
8.1.4.1
8.2
Whenregulationssorequire,thecompletionofinstallationshallbenotifiedtothegassupplycompany
ortheAuthority.
GASPIPINGINSTALLATION
8.2.1 PipingPlanandApproval
8.2.1.1
Plans for installation of gas piping system and gas appliances shall be prepared in accordance with
requirements of the gas supply company and the Authority. Necessary approva1s shall be obtained
from the gas supply company and the Authority before installation of the gas piping system and the
appliances.(SeeAppendixB).
8.2.1.2
Theplanshallincludeproposedlocationofthepiping,layoutandsketchofthepipingsystem,sizesof
differentbranches,andpresentandfuturegasdemands.
8.2.1.3
Approved plans shall bear the authorized seal and signatures of the gas supply company and the
Authority.
8.2.2 SizeofPipingtoGasAppliances
8.2.2.1
Gaspipingshallbeofsuchsizeandsoinstalledtoensureadequatesupplyofgastomeetthemaximum
demandwithoutunduepressuredropbetweenthemeter,orserviceregulatorwhenthereisnometer,
andtheapplianceorappliances.
8.2.2.2
Thesizeofgaspipingdependsuponthefollowingfactors:
(a) Allowablepressuredropfrommeterorserviceregulator,whenthereisnometer,toappliance
(b) Maximumgasconsumptiontobeprovided
(c) Lengthofpipingandnumberoffittings
(d) Specificgravityofthegas
(e) Diversityfactor
8.2.2.3
Thesizeofeachgaspipingsystemshallbedeterminedbystandardengineeringmethodsacceptableto
thegassupplycompanyandtheAuthority.
8.2.2.4
Gaspipessmallerthan12mmindiametershallnotbeused.
8.2.2.5
Straightlengthsofpipingshallbeusedasfaraspracticable.Wheretherearebendsinthepipeline,or
asapprovedbythegassupplycompany.Theinsideradiusofabendshallbenotlessthan6timesthe
outsidediameterofthepipe.
8.2.3 AcceptablePipingMaterials
8.2.3.1
Piping material shall be one of the materials listed in Table 8.8.1 conforming to the corresponding
standards,orothermaterialsasmaybeapprovedbythegassupplycompanyortheAuthority.Castiron
pipeshallnotbeused.
8306
Vol.3
FuelGasSupply
Chapter8
Table8.8.1FuelGasPipeMaterials
Material
Standards
Blacksteelpipe*
ASTMA106
Galvanizedsteelpipe*
ASTMA53
Wroughtsteelandwroughtironpipe*
ANSIB36.10M
Corrugatedstainlesssteeltubing
ANSILCI/CSA6.26
Copperorcopperalloytubing(TypeKorL)
ASTMB88;ASTMB280
Aluminiumpipeandtubing
ASTMB210;ASTMB241
Plasticpipeandtubing
ASTMD2513
*MinimumSchedule40
8.2.3.2
Fittings shall be of an approved type and material for gas piping systems accepted to the gas supply
company.Bushingsshallnotbeemployed.
8.2.3.3
Alljointsandconnectionsshallbeofanapprovedtypeandmaterialforgaspipingsystemacceptableto
thegassupplycompany.Jointsandconnectionsshallbegastightatthetestpressure.(seeSec8.2.9.3
and8.2.9.4)
8.2.3.4
Flexiblemetalpipesorheavyrubberpressuretubingacceptedtothegassupplycompanymaybeused
onlyfordirectconnectionstoburners.
8.2.4
FabricationofPipingforInstallation
8.2.4.1
Gas pipe or tubing and fittings shall be clean and free from cutting burrs and defects in structure or
threading and shall be thoroughly brushed with chips and scale blown. Defects in pipe or tubing or
fittingsshallnotberepairedwhendefectivepipe,tubingorfittingshavebeenidentified.Thedefective
materialshallbereplaced.
8.2.4.2
Pipe,tubing,fittingsandvalvesremovedfromanyexistinginstallationshallnotbeusedagainuntilthey
havebeenthoroughlycleaned,inspectedandascertainedtobeequivalenttonewmaterial.
8.2.4.3
Metallicpipeswiththreadswhicharedamagedordefectiveshallnotbeused.
8.2.4.4
Metallicpipesshallbethreadedinaccordancewithapprovedstandardacceptabletosupplycompany.
8.2.4.5
When used in a corrosive environment, metallic pipes and fittings shall be protected with corrosion
resistantcoating.
8.2.4.6
Foranythreadjointpropersealantshallbeusedonthemadethreadsonly.
8.2.4.7
Joints and joining compounds if used in LPG installation shall be resistant to the action of liquid
petroleumgas.
8.2.5
InstallationofGasPipes
8.2.5.1
Installation,repairandreplacementofgaspipingorappliancesshallbeperformedonlybyaqualified
installingagencyorgasfitter.
8.2.5.2
ProtectionofPiping:Pipingshallbeburiedtoaminimumdepthof1mcoveredinamannersoasto
protect the piping from physical damage. It shall be protected from physical damage when it passes
throughflowerbeds,shrubbedsandothersuchcultivatedareas.
6307
Part8
BuildingServices
8.2.5.3
ProtectionagainstCorrosion:Gaspipingincontactwithearthorothermaterialswhichwillcorrodethe
pipingshallbeprotectedagainstcorrosioninanapprovedmanner.Whendissimilarmetalsarejoined
underground, an insulating coupling or fitting shall be used. Piping shall not be laid in contact with
cinderorash.
8.2.5.4
Allthepipingwithinthepremiseswhereithastorunonthewallshallbeexposedandshouldnotbein
contactwithwalltoensurethatnocorrosiontakesplace.Epoxysealantorpolyethyleneconduitshall
beusedtoensurenocontactofpipewiththewallinthesituationofpipecrossingthewall.Uncoated
threaded orsocket welded joints shallnot be usedin piping incontact withsoil orwhereinternal or
externalcrevicecorrosionisknowntooccur.
8.2.5.5
Piping Through Foundation Wall: Underground gas piping, when installed below grade through the
outer foundation or basement wall of a building, shall be either encased in a protective sleeve or
protectedbyanapproveddeviceormethod.Thepipingorsleeveshallbesealedatthefoundationor
basementwalltoprevententryofgasorwater.
8.2.5.6
Piping Underground beneath Buildings: If the laying of gas piping underground beneath buildings
cannot be avoided, the piping shall be encased in an approved conduit designed to withstand super
imposed load. The conduit shall extend into a normally accessible portion of the building and, at the
pointwheretheconduitterminatesinthebuilding,thespacebetweentheconduitandthegaspiping
shallbesealedtopreventtheentranceofgasfromanypossibleleakage.Theconduitshallextendat
least100mmoutsidethebuilding,beventedoutdoorsabovefinishedgroundlevelandbeinstalledin
suchawayastopreventtheentranceofwaterandinsects.
8.2.5.7
Building Structure: The building shall not be weakened by the installation of any gas piping. Existing
beamsorjoistsshallnotbecutornotched.
8.2.5.8
PipingSupports:Gaspipinginbuildings,shallbesupportedwithpipehooks,metalpipestraps,bondor
hangersofanapprovedtypeandmaterialsuitableforthesizeofpiping,andofadequatestrengthand
quality and located at specified intervals so that the piping cannot be moved accidentally from the
installedposition.Gaspipingshallnotbesupportedbyotherpiping.
8.2.5.9
Piping Entrance to Buildings: When gas pipe enters a building through a wall or floor of masonry or
concrete,itshallbesealedagainsttheentranceofwater,moistureorgas.
8.2.5.10 Piping in Floors: Piping in solid floors, such as concrete, shall be laid in channels in the floor suitably
coveredtoprovideaccesstothepipingwithaminimumdamagetothebuilding.
8.2.5.11 Singlepipewithoutjointsshallbeusedforwallcrossinginanybuilding.
8.2.5.12 Changes in direction of gas pipe shallbemadeby theuseofapproved fittings, factorybendsorfield
bends.Fieldbendsshallbemadebyemployingapprovedproceduresandequipment.
8.2.5.13 Gaspipinginsideanybuildingshallnotberuninorthroughanairduct,chimneyorgasvent,ventilating
ductorelevatorshaft.Gaspipingshallnotbetakenthroughinaccessibleorconcealedareaswhereits
condition cannot be inspected and accumulation of gas due to undetected leakage may create a
dangerouscondition.
8.2.5.14 Provide Drips where Necessary: A drip shall be provided at any point in the line of pipe where
condensatemaycollect.Whencondensationisexcessive,adripshouldbeprovidedattheoutletofthe
meterwhererequiredbytheauthorityorthegassupplycompany.Thisdripshallbesoinstalledasto
constituteatrapwhereinanaccumulationofcondensatewillshutofftheflowofgasbeforeitwillrun
8308
Vol.3
FuelGasSupply
Chapter8
back into the meter. All drips installed shall be readily accessible to permit cleaning, inspection or
emptying.
8.2.5.15 Cap All Outlets: Each outlet, including a valve or cock outlet, shall be firmly closed gas tight with a
threaded plug or cap immediately after installation and shall be left closed until an appliance is
connectedthereto.Similarly,whenanapplianceisdisconnectedfromanoutletandtheoutletisnotto
beusedagainimmediately,itshallbecappedorpluggedgastight.Theoutletshallnotbeclosedwith
tincaps,woodenplugs,corksorbyotherimprovisedmeansorobjects.Useofalistedquickdisconnect
deviceisacceptable.
8.2.5.16 ProhibitedDevices:Nodeviceshallbeplacedinsidethegaspipeorfittingsthatwillreducethecross
sectionalareaorotherwiseobstructthefreeflowofgas.
8.2.5.17 BranchPipeConnection:Allbranchpipeconnectionsandoutletsshallbetakenfromthetoporsidesof
horizontallinesandnotfromthebottom.
8.2.5.18 ElectricalBondingandGrounding:Thegaspipingshallbeelectricallycontinuousthroughoutitslength
and properly earthed except in stretches where cathodic protection system is used for protection
againstcorrosion.Thepipingshallnotbeusedtogroundanyelectricalequipment.
8.2.5.19 DistancefromElectricalWiring:Thedistancebetweenthegaspipingandelectricalwiringsystemshall
be at least 60 mm. They shall be securely fixed to prevent contact due to movement. The gas piping
should be installed below the electrical wiring for heavier gas like LPG and for natural gas the piping
shouldbeabovetheelectricalwiring.
8.2.5.20 DistancefromSteamPiping:Thegaspipingandsteampiping,ifinstalledparallel,shallbeatleast150
mmapart.Thegaspipingshouldpreferablybeinstalledbelowthesteampiping.
8.2.5.21 GasPipingtobeGraded:Allgaspipingshallbegradednotlessthan1in750topreventaccumulationof
condensate or liquids in the line. All horizontal lines shall grade to risers, and from the risers to the
meter,orserviceregulatorwhenthereisnometer,ortotheappliance.
8.2.5.22 Thegaspipingshallbepaintedredinordertodifferentiateitfromotherpiping.Wherethepipingis
exposedtosunrays,itshallbepaintedsilvergray.
8.2.5.23 Documentationshallbemaintainedforallgassupplyinstallations.(SeeAppendixB).
8.2.6
PressureRegulators
8.2.6.1
Wherethepressureofgassuppliedtodomesticinstallationorotherlowpressuregaspipingsystemsin
buildingsisinexcessof3.45kPa,agaspressureregulatorofapprovedtypeandsizeshallbeinstalledin
theservicepipeofeachsuchsystemtopreventpressureinexcessof3.45kPafrombeingintroduced
intosuchabuildingpiping.Ifthebuildingpipeisofweldedconstructionthepressureregulatormaybe
locatedupstreamofthegasmeterineachconsumer'spremises.Inthesecases,thegaspressureinthe
pipingdownstreamofthegaspressureregulatorshallnotexceed3.45kPa.
8.2.6.2
Ifinstalledinsideabuilding,theregulatorshallcomplywiththefollowing:
(a) Ifanyofthediaphragmsoftheregulatorruptures,thegasshallbedirectedtoanoutletvent
pipe
made of brass or plastic in order to vent the gas out of the building. The vent pipe shall be
installed about 1m above the topmost story of the building in open air. Means shall be
employedtopreventwaterfromenteringthepipeandalsotopreventblockingitbyinsectsor
otherforeignbodies.
6309
Part8
BuildingServices
(b) Ifthegaspressureattheoutletoftheregulatorfallsbelow50percentoftheoperatinggas
pressureorrisesabovetwicetheoperatingpressure,thegassupplytothepressureregulator
shallshutoff.
(c) Intheeventofmalfunctioningofthissafetydevice,asupplementarydeviceshallconnectthe
lowpressurecircuittotheventpipeassoonastheexitpressurereaches6.90kPa.
8.2.6.3
Thegassupplycompanyshallensurethattheheatingvalueandsupplypressureofgasshallnotexceed
thestatedvaluesforthetypeofgasbeingsupplied.
8.2.7 ServiceShutoffValves
8.2.7.1
Serviceshutoffvalvesshallbeprovidedonallnewservicesincludingreplacementsandshallbeinstalled
inareadilyaccessiblelocation.
8.2.7.2
Serviceshutoffvalvesshallbelocatedupstreamofthemeterifthereisnoregulatororupstreamofthe
regulatorifthereisone.
8.2.7.3
All gas services installation operating at pressure greater than 3.45 kPa shall be equipped and with
shutoffvalveofapprovedtypeinstalledontheservicepipeoutsidethebuilding.
8.2.7.4
Underground shutoff valves shall be located in a covered durable kerb box, manhole, vault, or stand
pipewhichisdesignedtopermitreadyoperationofthevalve.Thecoverssoprovidedshallbeclearly
marked"GAS".
8.2.7.5
Everygasoutletshallhaveanindividualshutoffvalve.Theshutoffvalveshallbeaccessibleandadjacent
totheappliance.
8.2.8 ExistingWork
8.2.8.1
Nothing herein shall prohibit the continued use of an existing gas piping system without further
inspection or test unless the Authority has reason to believe that defects which make the system
dangeroustolifeorpropertyexist.
8.2.9 InspectionofServices
8.2.9.1
Nopersonshalluseorpermittheuseofanewsystemoranextensionofanoldsystemofgaspipingin
abuildingorstructurebeforethesamehasbeeninspectedandtestedtoensurethatthesystemissafe
andacertificatehasbeenissuedbytheAuthority.(SeeAppendixB).
8.2.9.2
TestofPipingforTightness:Beforeanysystemofgaspipingisfinallyputinservice,itshallbecarefully
tested to ensure that it is gas tight and safe. Where any part of the system is to be enclosed of
concealed, this test should precede the work of closing in. The test medium shall be air, nitrogen,
carbondioxideoraninertgas.OXYGENSHALLNEVERBEUSED.
8.2.9.3
Beforeappliancesareconnected,thepipingsystemsshallbetestedatapressureofatleast159mm
mercury for a period not less than 10 minutes without showing any pressure drop. The source of
pressureshallbeisolatedbeforethepressuretestsareperformed.
8.2.9.4
TheAuthorityshall,withinareasonabletimeafterbeingrequestedtodoso,inspectandtestthegas
piping system that is ready for such inspection and test. If the system is found to comply with the
requirementsofinspectionandtestaslaiddown,itshallissuethecertificate.
8310
Vol.3
FuelGasSupply
8.2.9.5
Chapter8
Itshallbeunlawfultosupplygasinabuildingbeforetherequiredcertificatehasbeenissued(seeSec
8.2.9.4above),except thatthe Authority maygive temporary permissionfor alimited timeto supply
andusegasbeforesuchaninstallationhasbeenfullycompletedandthecertificateissued.
8.2.10 CheckofLeakage
8.2.10.1 CloseAllGasOutlets:Beforeturninggasunderpressureintoanypiping,allopeningsandoutletsfrom
whichgascanescapeshallbeclosed.
8.2.10.2 Check for Leakage: No matches, flames or other sources of ignition shall be used to check for gas
leakagefrommeters,pipingorappliance.Checkingforgasleakagewithsoapandwatersolutionshall
berecommended(seeSec8.1.3.4and8.1.3.5also).
8.2.10.3 Checking for Leakage with Meter: Immediately after turning gas into the piping, the system shall be
checkedtoascertainthatnogasisescaping.Thismaybecheckedbycarefullywatchingthetestdialof
themetertodeterminewhetherthegasisflowingthroughthemeter.Undernocircumstancesshalla
leakagetestbemadeusingagasmeterunlessimmediatelypriortosuchtestithasbeendetermined
thatthemeterisinoperatingcondition.
8.2.10.4 CheckingofLeakagenotusingaMeter:Thismaybeperformedbyattachingtoanapplianceorifice,a
manometerorequivalentdevice(gauge)sothatitcanbereadinincrementsof2.5mmwatercolumn
andmomentarilyturningonthegassupplyandobservingthegaugingdeviceforpressuredropwithgas
supplyshutoff.Nodropinpressureshalloccurduringaperiodof3minutes.
8.2.10.5 WhenLeakageisIndicated:Ifthemetertesthandmovesorapressuredroponthegaugeoccurs,all
appliances or outlets supplied through the systems shall be checked to ensure that they are shut off
anddonotleak.Iftheyareshutofffirmlythereisaleakinthepipingsystem.Thegassupplyshallbe
shut offuntil the necessary repairs havebeen made, afterwhich thetest specified in Sec 8.2.10.3or
8.2.10.4aboveshallberepeated.
8.2.11 Purging
8.2.11.1 PurgingAllGasPiping:Afterpipinghasbeenchecked,allgaspipingshallbefullypurged.Pipingshall
notbepurgedintothecombustionchamberofanappliance.Asuggestedmethodforpurgingthegas
pipingtoanapplianceistodisconnectthepilotpipingattheoutletofthepilotvalve.
8.2.11.2 LightingPilots:Afterthegaspipinghasbeenfullypurged,allappliancesshallbepurgedandthepilots
lighted.Theinstallingagencyshallsatisfyitselfthatallpipingandappliancesarefullypurgedandsafe
forusebeforeleavingthepremises.
8.2.12 RulesforTurningGasOn
8.2.12.1 Aperson,whoisanemployeeofthegassupplycompanyandauthorizedbythegassupplycompany,
shallturnonthegasataserviceshutoffvalveoratanyvalvethatcontrolsthesupplyofgastomore
thanoneconsumer.
8.2.12.2 Gasshallnotbeturnedonatanymetervalvewithoutspecificpermissionfromthegassupplycompany
ortheAuthorityifanyofthefollowingconditionsarefound:
(a) If the gas piping, appliances or meter supply through the meter valve are known to leak or
otherwisebedefective;
(b) Ifrequiredinspectionofthepipingorappliancehasnotbeenperformed;
6311
Part8
BuildingServices
(c) IfthegassupplycompanyortheAuthorityhasrequestedthatthegasbeleftturnedoff;
(d) Ifthemetervalveisfoundshutoffforsomereasonnotknowntothegasfitter.
8.2.12.3 Thegasshallnotbeturnedonintheeventoffire.
8.2.12.4 GasshallnotbeturnedonatanybranchlinevalveifanyoftheconditionslistedinSec8.2.12.2above
are found. Where a branch line valve is found closed, a gas fitter shall again turn the gas on at such
valve only. If proper precautions to prevent leakage are taken and no other unsafe conditions are
createdthereby.
8.2.12.5 Gas shall not be turned on at either the meter valve or the service line unless all gas keys/ cocks or
valves installed on all outlets in the piping system are closed or all outlets in the piping system are
cappedorplugged.
8.2.13 RulesforShuttingOfftheGas
8.2.13.1 Thegasfittershallputthegasofftoanyappliance,pipeorpipingsystemandshallleavethegasturned
off,untilthecauseforinterruptionofsupplyhasbeenremovedinanyonethefollowingcases:
(a) IforderedtodosobytheAuthority;
(b) If leakage of gas is found, which appears to be sufficient to cause fire, explosion or
asphyxiation;
(c) Ifaninstallationisfoundtobesuchastoseriouslyendangerlifeandproperty;
(d) Ifanyconditionexistswhichthreatensinterruptionofgassupplythatmaycauseburnerfailure
orotherwiseleadtodangerousconditions.
8.2.13.2 Before turning off the gas at the meter, for the purpose of installation, repair, replacement, test,
inspectionormaintenanceofpipingorappliances,allburnersandpilotvalvesonthepremisessupplied
withgasthroughthemetershallbeturnedoffandthemetertesthandobservedforasufficientlength
oftimetoascertainthatthereisnoflowofgasthroughthemeter.Wherethereismorethanonemeter
onthepremises,precautionsshallbeexercisedtoensurethattheconcernedmeteristurnedoff.
8.2.14 ProvisionforMeterLocation
8.2.14.1 The meter location shall be such that the meter can be easily read and the connections are readily
accessible for servicing. Location, space requirements, dimensions and type of installation shall be
acceptabletothegassupplycompanyandbeapprovedbythesame.
8.2.14.2 Meters shall be installed in such a way that there shall be no load transfer from the pipeline to the
inlet/outletofthemeter.
8.2.14.3 Gas piping at multiple meter installations shall be clearly marked by a metal tag or other permanent
means provided by the installing agency, designating the building or the part of the building being
supplied.
8.3
USEOFLIQUEFIEDPETROLEUMGAS(LPG)
(a) Thecylindersusedforthestorageandtransportationofliquefiedpetroleumgas(LPG)shallconformto
theacceptedstandardsapprovedbytheAuthority.
8312
Vol.3
FuelGasSupply
Chapter8
(b) Thehandling,use,storageandtransportationofliquefiedpetroleumgasincylindersexceeding500mlof
water capacity shall be done in accordance with the good practice approved by the Authority and the
guidelinesofthegassupplycompany.
(c) The cylinders shall be marked as provided in the regulations, rules or code under which they are
fabricated.
8.3.1
LPGCylinderInstallation
The following recommendations apply to installations in residential, commercial, industrial, educational and
institutionalpromises.
8.3.1.1
Personnel engaged and responsible for the installation of cylinders, equipment and piping should
understandthecharacteristicsofLPGandbetrainedingoodpracticeofhandling,installing,inspection,
testandmaintenanceofinstallation.
8.3.1.2
Thejoiningcompoundsusedinthepipingsystemshallberesistanttotheactionofliquefiedpetroleum
gasandshallbedecidedbytheQualifiedInstallationAgency.Hempandsimilarmaterialsshallnotbe
usedatthejoint.Inanyjointinwhichthethreadprovidesagastightseal,joiningcompoundshallbe
usedonthemalethread.
8.3.1.3
Fire extinguishers of dry power or carbon dioxide type conforming to accepted standards shall be
provided in places where LPG cylinder installations are situated and shall be located near such
installations. Two buckets filled with sand and two with water shall also be installed nearby. The
guidelinesoftheLPGsupplycompanyandtheAuthorityshallbefollowedinthisrespect.Thenumber,
typeandsizeofthefireextinguishersshallbeasfollows:
ForinstallationwithLPG
8.3.1.4
8.3.2
8.3.2.1
Number
Type
Capacity
40kgto200kg
Drypowder
10kg
morethan200kgupto320kg
Drypowder
10kg
Liquefiedpetroleumgasshallnotbetransferredfromthecylindersinwhichitissuppliedtoanyother
container.
CylinderLocation
StationaryInstallations
(a) Stationary installation not exceeding 40 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on any floor.
Recommendedminimumfloorareaperinstallationis5m2.
(b) Stationaryinstallationseachnotexceeding40kgofLPGmaybeinstalledindoorsonanyfloor
withinthesameworkspaceprovidedtheminimumdistancebetweentwosuchinstallationsis3
m. Recommended minimum floor area per installation is 5 m2 and the aggregate of all such
installationsshouldnotexceed200kg.
(c) Stationary installation not exceeding 80 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on any floor
providedthefloorareaperinstallationisnotlessthan12m2.
(d) Stationaryinstallationseachnotexceeding80kgofLPGmaybeinstalledindoorsonanyfloor
and within the same workspace provided the minimum distance between two such
installations is 3 m. Recommended floor area per installation is 12 m2 and the aggregate
quantityofallsuchinstallationsshouldnotexceed200kg.
6313
Part8
BuildingServices
(e) Stationary installation not exceeding 320 kg of LPG may be installed indoors in an enclosed
sectionofabuildingoraroomreservedexclusivelyforthispurposeandventilatedatlowlevel
directlytotheoutsideair.
(f) Stationaryinstallationabove320kg(200kgincaseprovisionasin(e)aboveisnotpossible)but
not exceeding 1000 kg shall be installed outdoors on the ground level only. A minimum
distanceof3mshallbemaintainedbetweensuchaninstallationandanybuilding,publicplace,
roadways and other surroundings. The installation shall be protected against weathering by
sun,rain,etc.andfromtamperingbyunauthorizedpersons.Asuitableshadeofapprovedtype
and material may be provided for the purpose. Adequate ventilation at ground level to the
outside air shall be provided. The distance between any two such installations shall be 3 m
unlessseparatedbyasolidwalloffireresistantmaterialuptoatleast1mabovetheheightof
themanifoldvalve.
(g) Thepositionofthecylindersshallfacilitate:changingandquickremovalofanycylinderincase
ofnecessity,andaccesstocylindervalveconnectionsandregulatingdevices
(h) Cylindersshallbeplaceduprightwiththevalveuppermost.
(i) Cylindersshall be placed on a firm and dry base such as concrete or brick floor. For outdoor
installationsthebaseshallbeelevated.
(j) Cylinders shall not be placed close to steam pipes or any other source of heat and shall be
protectedfromtheweatheranddirectsun.Cylindersshallbeplacedatadistanceof3mfrom
anyothersourceofheatwhichislikelytoraisethetemperatureofcylindersabovetheroom
temperatureunlessseparatedbymetalsheetormasonrypartition.
(k) When cylinders are being connected or disconnected, there shall be no open flame or any
sourceofignitionnearbyandsmokingshallbeprohibited.
(l) Cylindersshallnotbeinstalledbelowgroundlevelandshallbeatleast1mawayfromdrains,
culvertsorentrancesandopeningsleadingtocellarsandotherdepressionsinwhichgasmight
accumulate.
(m) Cylindersshallnotbeinstalledataplacewheretheyarelikelytocauseanobstruction,tobe
damagedortobeexposedtoconditionslikelytoaffecttheirsafety.
(n) Cylinders which have safety relief valve or similar devices incorporated in them shall be so
positionedthatifthereliefdevicesoperates,escapinggasisnothazardous.
8.3.2.2
PortableInstallations
Whenportabilityofcylindersisdesired,thefollowingrequirementsshallbemet:
(a) Thesumtotalcapacityofthecylindersconnectedtoeachmanifoldshallnotexceed80kgof
LPG.Thetotalquantityofgasthusinstalledinaworkspaceshallnotexceed200kg.
(b) Theregulatorshallbeconnecteddirectlytothecylindervalveortoamanifoldwhichshallbe
connected to the cylinder valve by means of rigid connections to have the regulator firmly
secured.
(c) At any time the total quantity of gas at portable installations shall not exceed the limits in
proportiontothefloorareaspecifiedinSec83.2.1(a)to(f).
8314
Vol.3
FuelGasSupply
Chapter8
(d) If cylinders are mounted on a trolley shall be stable, where necessary the cylinders shall be
securedtopreventthemfromfalling.
8.3.3
ManifoldsandPressureRegulators
8.3.3.1
Ifpressureregulators,manifoldheaders,automaticchangeoverdevices,etc.areconnectedtocylinders
byflexibleorsemiflexibleconnectors,theyshallberigidlysecured.Coppertubepigtailsandreinforced
highpressurehosesareconsideredtobeflexibleorsemiflexibleconnectorsforthisapplication.
8.3.3.2
Pressureregulatorfittedwithasafetyvalveshallbeeither:
(a) Installedintheopenairor
(b) Ventedtotheopenairbymeansofametalventpipeconnectedtothesafetyvalvedischarge
line.
8.3.3.3
Precautionsshallbetakenthatsafetyvalveoutletsdonotgetblockedwithdustorothersubstances.
8.3.3.4
Suitable line shutoff valves shall be provided with each appliance or burner when more than one
applianceisconnectedtothegassupply.Bothendsoftheconnectiontoportableappliancesshallbe
firmlyattachedwithclips.HoseshallberesistanttotheactionofLPG.
8.3.3.5
The manifold headers which do not have to be taken off in normal use should be brazed or welded
usingmaterialconformingtoapprovedstandardsandhavingameltingpointnotlessthan540oC.
8.3.3.6
Allmaterials,fittings,etc.usedincylindermanifoldsystemshallcomplywiththedistributingcompanys
stipulations.
8.3.3.7
Theindividualcomponentpartsofmanifolds,thatis,piping,fittings,pigtails,etc,whicharesubjectto
cylinderpressureshallbecapableofwithstandingatestpressurewithoutburstingof2.5N/mm2orone
and half times the maximum pressure corresponding in the maximum assessed temperature of the
cylinder,whicheverismore.
8.3.3.8
Where cylinder installations are made up with service and reserve batteries of cylinders, suitable
changeoverdevicesorvalvesshallbeincorporatedinthemanifoldheadertopreventundueescapeof
thegaswhencylindersarechanged.
8.3.3.9
Itisrecommendedthatjointsinmanifoldheaderswhichdonothavetobetakeninnormaluseshould
beweldedorbrazedusingamaterialandwhichshallhavemeltingpointofatleast540oC.
8.3.3.10 Alljointsbetweenmanifoldheadersandcylinderconnectorsshallbereadilyaccessible.
8.3.3.11 Pressure regulators and other devices used to control the gas shall comply with the distributing
companysstipulationsandacceptedstandards.
8.3.3.12 Care shall be taken that safety of a metal vent pipe connected to the safety valve outlets do not
becomechokedwithdustorotherforeignmatter.
8.3.3.13 Iftheregulatorisfittedwithareliefvalve,careshouldbetakeninpositioningtheregulatortoavoid
unnecessaryhazardsifthereliefvalvefunctions.
8.3.3.14 Pressureregulatorsandothercontroldevicesshallbeadequatelysupported.
8.3.3.15 InstructionstoConsumers:Necessaryinstructionsdealingwiththefollowingaspectsshallbesupplied
bytheLPGsupplycompanytoeachconsumerintheformofamanual:
6315
Part8
BuildingServices
(a) Operationofthewholesystem;
(b) Howtorecognizeanddetectgasleakage;
(c) Actiontobetakenincaseofleakage;
(d) Actiontobetakenincaseoffire;and
(e) Actiontobetakenincaseofdamageto,orfailureofanypartoftheinstallation.
8.3.3.16 For detailed information regarding installation of LPG cylinders in commercial, educational and
institutionalpremises,theLPGsupplycompanyshallbeconsulted.
8.4
LPGBulkStorageInstallations
NFPA 58: Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code2008 edition shall be followed along with approval of the gas supply
companyandtheAuthorityhavingjurisdictionforLPGforbulkstorageinstallationswherestoragetanksover450
literswatercapacityareusedfordomesticconsumerspremises.
Themaximumcapacityanindividualtankandgroupsoftanksatdomesticpremisesshallbeasfollows:
Maximumwatercapacityofanindividualtank
20,000litre
Maximumwatercapacityofgroupoftanks
80,000litre
The LPG Bulk Storage Installations shall strictly adhere to the provisions laid down in NFPA 58: Liquefied
PetroleumGasCode2008editionoritsequivalentforthefollowings:
Locationandspacingofstoragetanks
(a) Bunding
(b) ProtectionandSafety
(c) Goodhousekeeping
(d) WarningSigns
(e) Fireprotectionandfireextinguishers
(f) Watersupply
(g) Soundengineeringpracticefordesign,layoutandoperationoftheentireinstallations
(h) Trainingofpersonnelonbothoperationsandonactiontobetakeninanemergency
(i) ThegassupplycompanyandtheAuthorityhavingjurisdictionshallapproveeveryitemmentionedaboveand
canaddanythingmorethatwillimprovesafetyoftheinstallationandpeoplelivingaroundit.
8.5
INSTALLATIONOFSPECIFICAPPLIANCES
8.5.1 General
8.5.1.1
Gasappliances,accessories,andequipmentshallbe"Approved".Listedandlabeledappliancesshallbe
installedinaccordancewiththemanufacturersinstallationinstruction.
8.5.1.2
Itshallbedeterminedwhethertheappliancehasbeendesignedforusewiththegastowhichitwillbe
connected. No attempt shall be made to convert the appliance from the gas specified on the rating
plate for use with a different gas without consulting the gas supply company or the appliance
manufacturerforcompleteinstructions.
8.5.1.3
Safety shutoff devices of the complete shutoff type shall be installed on manually controlled water
heatersandautomaticallycontrolledappliances,exceptdomesticranges.
8316
Vol.3
FuelGasSupply
Chapter8
8.5.1.4
Gasappliancesshallnotbeinstalledinanylocationwhereflammablevapoursarelikelytobepresent
oraccumulate,unlessthedesign,operationandinstallationaresuchastoeliminatethepossibilityof
ignitionoftheflammablevapours.
8.5.1.5
Appliancesshallbeventedinaccordancewiththeinstructionsoftheirmanufacturersortheprocedures
ofthegassupplycompany.
8.5.1.6
Gasappliancesshallbefirmlysupported.Theyshallnotexertunduestrainontheconnectedpipingand
connections.
8.5.1.7
The installing agency shall conform with the appliance manufacturer's specific recommendations in
completing an installation that will provide satisfactory performance and serviceability. The installing
agency shall also leave the manufacturer's installation, operating and maintenance instructions in a
readily accessible location on the premises for reference and guidance of the Authority, servicemen,
andtheconsumeroroperator.
8.5.1.8
All appliances shall be located with respect to building construction and other equipment so as to
permit ready access to the appliance. Sufficient clearance shall be maintained to permit cleaning of
heatingsurfaces,replacementofparts,adjustment,cleaningofburnersandpilotsandmaintenance.
8.5.1.9
Connecting Appliances and Equipment: Appliances and equipment shall be connected to the building
pipingsystembyoneofthefollowing:
(a) Rigidmetallicpipeandfittings
(b) Semirigid metallic tubing and metallic fittings. Aluminumalloy tubing shall not be used in
exteriorlocations.
(c) Listedapplianceconnectorsandonlyoneconnectorshallbeusedperappliance
(d) Semirigidtubinginlengthsupto2mthatareinthesameroomastheappliance
(e) Listedgashoseconnectorstobeusedasapproved.
(f) Theconnectorortubingshallbeprotectedagainstphysicalandthermaldamages.
(g) Aluminumalloy tubing and connectors shall be factory coated to protect against external
corrosion where they are in contact with masonry, plaster or insulation or are subject to
frequentwettingsbysuchliquidsaswater(exceptrainwater),detergentsorsewage.
8.5.1.10 Any appliance connected to a piping system shall have an accessible approved manual shutoff valve
withadisplaceablevalvememberoralistedgasconvenienceoutletandshallbelocatedwithin2mof
theapplianceitservesexceptaspermittedbytheAuthority.
8.5.1.11 Appliance connectors may be connected to the building piping by means of a listed quick disconnect
device, and when installed indoors, a manual shutoff valve shall be installed upstream of the quick
disconnectdevice.
8.5.1.12 Electrical connection between gas appliances and the building wiring shall conform to the approved
electricalcode.
8.5.1.13 Nodevicesusingordependentuponelectricityshallbeusedtocontrolorigniteagassupplyifofsuch
typethatfailureoftheelectricitywouldresultintheescapeofunburnedgas,orinfailuretoreducethe
supply of gas under conditions which would normally result in its reduction, unless other means are
providedtopreventthecreationofdangeroustemperatures,pressuresorthereleaseofgas.
6317
Part8
BuildingServices
8.5.2 Cookers/Burners
8.5.2.1
Domesticcookingappliancesshallbeinstalledbelistedandlabeledashouseholdtypeappliancesfor
domesticuse.Theseareinstalledinaccordancewithitslistingandthemanufacturer'sinstruction.
8.5.2.2
Listed cookers/burners when installed on combustible floors shall be set on their own bases or legs
firmly and shall be installed in accordance with their listing and the manufacturer's instructions. In
absenceofclearanceinformationtheappliancesshallbeinstalledinconsultationwiththegassupply
company.Theclearancesshallnotinterferewiththeflowofcombustionair,accessibilityforoperation
andservicing.
8.5.2.3
Unlisted appliances when acceptable with the authority shall be installed with at least a 150 mm
clearanceatthebackandsidestocombustiblematerial.Combustiblefloorsunderunlistedappliances
shallbeprotectedinanapprovedmanner.GuidelinesoftheAuthorityshallbefollowed.
8.5.2.4
Appliances shall have a vertical clearance above the cooking top of not less than 750 mm to
combustiblematerialormetalcabinets.
8.5.2.5
Appliancesshallbeinstalledsothatthetoporovenracksarelevel.
8.5.3 IlluminatingAppliances
8.5.3.1
Listed (labeled) illuminating appliances shall be installed in accordance with their listing and
manufacturer'sinstructions.
8.5.3.2
Unlisted illuminating appliances may be used when acceptable to the Authority and they shall be
installedinaccordancewiththeguidelinesoftheAuthority.
8.5.3.3
Illuminating appliances designed for wall or ceiling mounting shall be firmly attached to substantial
structuresinsuchamannerthattheyarenotdependentonthegaspipingforsupport.
8.5.3.4
Illuminatingappliancedesignedforpostmountingshallbefirmlyattachedtoapostwhichhasproper
strengthandrigidity.Postsshallberigidlyerected.
8.5.4 WaterHeaters
8.5.4.1
Waterheaterinstallationinbedroomsandbathroomsshallcomplywithoneofthefollowing:
(a) Water heaters shall be installed in a closet equipped with a weatherstripped door with no
openings and with a selfclosing device. All combustion air shall be obtained from the outdoors
through one or two permanent openings having crosssectional area 1 in2/3000 Btu/hr (700
mm2/kW).Theminimumdimensionofairopeningshallnotbelessthan3in(80mm).
(b) Waterheatershallbeofdirectventtype
8.5.4.2
Listed (labeled) water heaters shall be installed in accordance with their listing and manufacturer's
instructions.Theclearancesshallnotbesuchastointerferewithcombustionair,drafthoodclearance
andrelief,andaccessibilityforservicing.
8.5.4.3
Unlistedwaterheatersshallbeinstalledwithaclearanceof300mmonallsidesandrearandtheyshall
beinstalledwiththeapprovaloftheauthorityfollowingitsguidelines.
8.5.4.4
Water heaters shall be connected in a manner to permit observation, inspection, maintenance and
servicing.
8318
Vol.3
FuelGasSupply
8.5.4.5
8.5.5
Chapter8
Water heaters shall be fitted with limiting switches for pressure and temperature and also with
temperature, pressure and vacuum relief devices in accordance with nationally recognized standards
forsuchdevices.
StationeryGasEngineGenerators
Stationarygasenginegeneratorsforgeneratingpowertomeetemergencyneedsduringpoweroutageshallbe
installed in accordancewiththe manufacturers installation instructions and shall meet the requirementsofUL
220004(StandardforStationaryEngineGeneratorAssemblies2004)ofUSAorequivalent.
The Equipment powered by internal combustion engines and turbinesshall not be rigidly connectedto thegas
supplypiping.
Installation of stationary gas engine generators in the building shall be approved by the Authority and the gas
supplycompany;andalltheirregulationsapplicableshallbecompliedwithforinstallation,testing,operationand
maintenance.
8.6
ListofCodesandStandards
The list includes those codes and standards that are acceptable as good practice and accepted codes and
standards for complying with the requirements of this code. The latest version of a code or standard shall be
used.Thelistmaybeusedbytheauthorityasaguidetofulfilltherequirementsmentionedinthiscode.
NationalFuelGasCode2009edition(NFPA54/ANSIZ2231)
LiquefiedPetroleumGasCode2008edition(NFPA58)
InternationalFuelGasCode2009
NationalBuildingCodeofIndia2005(Part9,Section2,Gassupply)
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section; VIII; Rules for the Construction of Unfired Pressure Vessels,
2004
ASTMA53, StandardSpecificationforPipe,Steel,BlackandHotDipped,ZincCoatedWeldedandSeamless,2007
ASTMA106,
StandardSpecificationforSeamlessCarbonSteelPipeforHighTemperatureServices,2006a
ASTM A539, StandardSpecificationforElectricResistanceWeldedCoiledSteal

TubingforGasFuelOilLines,1999
ASTMB43,StandardSpecificationforSeamlessRedBrassPipe,Standardsizes
ASTMB88, StandardSpecificationforSeamlessCopperWaterTube,2003
ASTMB210,
StandardSpecificationforAluminumandAluminumAlloyDrawnSeamlessTubes,2004
ASTMB210,
StandardSpecificationforAluminumandAluminumAlloyDrawnSeamlessTubes,2004
ASTMB241,
Tube,2002
StandardSpecificationforAluminumandAluminumAlloySeamlessPipeandSeamlessExtruded
ASTMB280,
Service,2008
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field
ASTMD2513, StandardSpecificationforThermoplasticGasPressurePipe,TubingandFittings,2008a
ANSI/ASMEB36.10M,WeldedandSeamlessWroughtStealPipe,2004
ANSILC1/CSA6.26,FuelGasPipingSystemsUsingCorrugatedStainlessSteelTubing(CSST),2005
ANSIZ21.1HouseholdCookingGasAppliances,2005
NFPA37,
edition
Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines, 2006
NFPA10,
StandardforPortableFireExtinguishers,2007edition
Title49,CodeofFederalRegulations,Parts191,192and195,TransportationofHazardousLiquidsbyPipeline.
6319
Chapter 1
ApplicabilityandImplementation
1.1
General
The provisions of this part are intended to maintain or increase the current degree of public safety as well as
healthandgeneralwelfareinexistingbuildingswhilepermittingalteration,additiontoorchangeofuse.
Inaddition,certainenvironmentalmeasurestomaketheexistingbuildingstocksustainable,isalsoarequirement
thatneedstobeaddressedtomakebuildingsmoreenergyefficientandenvironmentallyresponsive.Thisconcept
isintroducedinChapter2ofthisPart.
1.2
Applicability
1.2.1
General
The provision of this part shall apply to existing buildings that will continue to be or are proposed to be in
occupancy groups A, B, E, F, H, I, M, R and S. The provisions shall not apply to buildings of historical or
architecturalvalue identifiedand classified by designatedauthorities. Forbuildingsofhistoricalor architectural
value buildings, the provisions of Sec 1.5: Historic or Architecturally Valuable Buildings, of Part 1, Sec 1.16:
BuildingsandPlacesofHistoricalorArchitecturalValue,ofPart3andchapter3:Conservationandrehabilitation
ofhistoricalandculturalheritage,ofPart9,shallbeapplicable.
Certain provisions to existing buildings and landuse even when additions, alterations or amendments are not
proposedareincludedinSection2.3:SustainabilitymeasuresforexistingbuildingsChapter2ofthisPart.
1.2.2
Changeinuse
1.2.2.1
Nochangeinuseofanyexistingbuildingshallbemadewithoutpermissionfromthepermittingauthority.
1.2.2.2
Nochangeinuseofanexistingbuildingshallbeallowediftheproposeduseisnotinconformitywithland
usepatternasreferredinPart3,Sec1.3,andwithinthepermittedoccupancyclassesofPart3,Sec1.4,as
maybedeterminedbythecityorareadevelopmentauthoritieshavingjurisdictions.
1.2.2.3
Whereanexistingbuildingischangedtoanewusegroupclassification,theprovisionsforthenewusegroup
inthisCodeshallbeusedtodeterminecompliance.
1.2.3
PartChangeinuse
1.2.3.1
Nochangeinuseofanypartofanexistingbuildingshallbemadewithoutpermissionfromthepermitting
authority.
1.2.3.2
Whereaportionofthebuildingischangedtoanewusegroupclassification,andthatportionisseparated
fromtheremainderofthebuildingwithfireseparationassemblieshavingafireresistanceratingasrequired
by Part 4, Fire Protection, for the separate uses, the portion changed shall be made to conform to the
provisionsofthisCode.
Part9
Alteration,AdditiontoandChangeofUseofExistingBuildings
91
Part9
1.2.3.3
1.2.4
Where a portion of the building is changed to a new use group classification, and that portion is not
separatedfromtheremainderofthebuildingwithfireseparationassemblieshavingafireresistancerating
asrequiredbyPart4,Fire,fortheseparateuses,theprovisionsofthisCodewhichapplytoeachuseshall
apply to the entire building. Where there are conflicting provisions, those requirements which secure the
greaterpublicsafetyshallapplytotheentirebuildingorstructure.
Additions
1.2.4.1
Noadditiontoanyexistingbuildingsshallbemadewithoutpermissionfromthepermittingauthority.
1.2.4.2
AdditionstoexistingbuildingsshallcomplywithalltherequirementsofthisCodefornewconstructionsas
setforthinPart3ofthisCodeandshallcomplywithfirerequirementssetforthinPart4ofthisCode.
1.2.4.3
Thecombinedheightandareaoftheexistingbuildingsandnewadditionsshallnotexceedtheheightand
openspacerequirementsfornewbuildingsspecifiedinPart3ofthisCode.
1.2.4.4
WhereaseparatingwallthatcomplieswithPart4,FireProtection,isprovidedbetweentheadditionandthe
existingbuilding,theadditionshallbeconsideredasaseparatebuilding.
1.2.5
Alterations
1.2.5.1
AnexistingbuildingorportionthereofwhichdoesnotcomplywiththerequirementsofthisCodefornew
construction (Part 3) shall not be altered in such a manner that results in the building being less safe or
sanitarythansuchbuildingisatpresent.
1.2.5.2
If, in the alteration the present level of safety or sanitation is to be reduced, the portion altered shall
conformtotherequirementsofthisCode.
1.2.6
Removal
1.2.6.1
Any construction within the site which does not have approval of the appropriate authority must be
removed before any new addition, alteration or change of use is carried out. All other types of existing
constructionandtheirchangesshallcomplywithsubclauses1.2.4and1.2.5ofthisPart.
1.2.6.2
Before demolishing a building of construction type 1 (Part 4: Fire Protection) the owner shall notify all
utilities having service connections within the building or plot, such as water, gas, electricity, sewer and
otherconnections.
1.2.6.3
A permit to demolish a building shall notbe issued until a clearanceis obtained from utilitiesstating that
theirrespectiveserviceconnectionsandappurtenantequipments,suchas,metersandregulatorshavebeen
removedorsealedandpluggedinasafemanner.
1.3
Implementation
1.3.1
InvestigationandEvaluation
Fortheproposedworksrelatingtoalteration,additiontoandchangeofuse,theownerofthebuildingshallcause
the existing buildings to be investigated and evaluated by competent professionals in accordance with the
provisionsofthisCode.
1.3.2
1.3.2.1
92
StructuralAnalysis
The owner shall have a structural analysis of the existing building carried out by professional experts to
determinetheadequacyofallstructuralsystemsfortheproposedalteration,additionorchangeofuse.
Vol.3
ApplicabilityandImplementation
1.3.2.2
1.3.3
Chapter1
The existingbuilding together with the addition or alterationshall be capable of supporting theminimum
loadrequirementsspecifiedinPart6:StructuralDesign,ofthisCode.
Submittal
TheresultsoftheinvestigationandevaluationasrequiredinSec.1.3.1abovealongwithallproposedcompliance
alternativesshallbesubmittedtotheBuildingOfficialforpermissiontoimplementaddition,alterationorchange
ofuse.
1.3.4
DeterminationofCompliance
TheBuildingOfficialshallexamineallrelevantdocuments,asspecifiedbytheauthorities,anddeterminewhether
the existing building, with the proposed additions, alterations or change of use, complies with the provisions
specifiedinthisCodefortheoccupancyclassificationandtypeofconstruction.
93
Chapter 2
EvaluationandCompliance
2.1 Evaluation
Theevaluationoftheexistingbuildingwiththeproposedadditions,alterationsorchangeofuse,shalltakeinto
consideration the planning requirements as well as those relating to public safety and environmental
sustainability.
2.1.1 PlanningRequirements
2.1.1.1
ThepermittingauthoritythroughbuildingofficialsshalldetermineifanyprovisionsofthisCodeareviolated
bytheproposedchangeofuse,additionoralterationworks.
2.1.1.2
Thegeneralrequirementsforbuildingsinvariousoccupancyclassesandtypesofconstructionarespecified
inPart3:GeneralBuildingRequirementsandPart8:BuildingServices,ofthisCode.Theseinclude:
a) Landuseclassificationandpermitteduse(Sec.1.3Part3)
b) Requirementofplots(Sec.1.5,Part3)
c) Meansofaccess(Sec.1.6,Part3);andstaircase(Sec.1.12.5,Part3)
d) Universal accessibility requirements of various Sections of Chapter 3 and Appendix D: universal
accessibility
e) Openspaceswithinaplot;minimumseparationofbuildingsinthesameplot;roadfront,sideand
rearopenspaces,PermittedConstructionintheMandatoryOpenSpace(Sec.1.7Part3)
f)
GeneralheightandarealimitationsbasedonFAR(Sec.1.8.2,Part3)orbasedonRoadWidth(Sec.
1.8.3,Part3)
g) Offstreet(onsite)parkingspaces(Sec.1.9,Part3andAppendixF:RoadHierarchy,Onstreetand
OnsiteParking)
h) Streetencroachment(Sec.1.10,Part3)
i)
Communityopenspaceandamenitiesforvarioustypesofbuildings(Sec.1.11,Part3)
j)
Ventilation requirements (natural: Sec. 1.17, Part 3; artificial: Chapter 3, Part 8: Air Conditioning,
HeatingandVentilation)
k) Lighting and illumination requirements (Sec 1.17, Sec 4.4.1: Electric lighting, 4.6.1: Daylighting,
4.6.2:Supplementarylightingsystem,Part3andChapter1:ElectricalandElectronicEngineering
ServicesforBuildings,Part8)
l)
Sanitationanddrainagerequirements(Sec1.18,Sec4.2.5:Sitedrainageandrunoffcoefficient,4.3:
WaterEfficiencyandmanagementofPart3andChapters5:WaterSupplyandChapter6:Sanitary
Drainage,Part8)
m) Minimumdimensionofhabitableandnonhabitablepartsofthebuildings(Sec.1.12,Part3).
2.1.1.3
The existing building with proposed alteration or addition shall conform to the requirements of new
buildingsintheproposedoccupancyclassification.Theproposedalterationoradditionshallnotmakethe
buildinglesssanitarythanpresent.
2.1.1.4
To promote the preservation of historic buildings, open space or unique architectural/ cultural resources,
the local permitting authority shall transfer development rights (TDR), as decided by the authority, to
ownersascompensation,inaccordancewithAppendixE,Part3ofthisCode.
Part9
95
Part9
2.1.2 SafetyRequirements
2.1.2.1
Additions or alterations to an existing building or structure are not to be made if such additions or
alterations cause the building or structure to be unsafe or more hazardous based on fire safety, life and
structuralsafetyorenvironmentaldegradation.
2.1.2.2
The fire safety requirement shall take into consideration the structural fire resistance, smoke and fire
detection, fire protective signaling and fire suppression system feature of the facility and satisfy the
requirementsofvariouselementsforTypes1,2and3fireresistivebuildingsshallbesatisfied.
2.1.2.3
The fire resistance of the wall used for compartmentalization of a building shall not be less than that
specifiedinsubsectionsofSec2.4,Part3ofthisCode.
2.1.2.4
Ductpenetrationsofthiswallshallnotbepermitted.Ferrousorcopperpipingandconduitshallbeallowed
to penetrate or pass through the wall if the openings around such piping and conduit are sealed with
impervious noncombustible materials sufficiently tight to prevent fire transfer of smoke or combustible
gasesfromonesideofthewalltotheothersideandaresomaintained.
2.1.2.5
Thefiredoorbetweencompartmentsservingashorizontalexitshallbesoinstalled,fittedandprovidedwith
gasketsthatsuchfiredoorwillprovideasubstantialbarriertothepassageofsmoke.
2.1.2.6
Thefloor/ceilingshallbeofsuchconstructionthatthefireresistiveintegritybetweenstoriesismaintained.
2.1.2.7
The smoke detection capability within the facility based on the location and operation of automatic fire
detectors shall be evaluated with respect to the requirements of Chapter 3: Means of Escape and 4:
EquipmentandInbuiltFacilitiesofPart4forthevariousoccupanciesinthisCode.
2.1.2.8
Where a fire protecting alarm and signaling system is provided, the capability of the system shall also be
evaluated(Part4).
2.1.2.9
Theabilityofthenaturalormechanicalventing,exhaustorpressurizationsystemtocontrolthemovement
ofsmokefromafireshallbeevaluated.
2.1.2.10 TheshaftandexitenclosuresshallsatisfytherequirementsspecifiedinPart4:FireProtection,ofthisCode.
2.1.2.11 The configuration, characteristics and support features for means of egress in the facility including the
capacity of and the number of exit routes available to the building occupants shall be evaluated and the
adequacy of the means of egress routes leading to a safe area shall be examined. The length of the exit
access travel path in which building occupants are confined to a single path of travel shall be evaluated.
Similarly the length of exit access travel to an approved exit shall be evaluated with respect to the exit
requirementsforvariousoccupanciesasdetailedinPart4:FireProtectionofthisCode.
2.1.2.12 The efficiency and effectiveness of the elevator equipments and controls that are available to the fire
department to rescue building occupants from upper floors during a fire when such an equipment is
installed,shallbeevaluated.
2.1.2.13 Thepresenceofandreliabilityofmeansofegressemergencylightingsystemshallbeevaluated.
2.1.2.14 Theabilitytosuppressfirebasedontheinstallationofautomaticsprinklerandstandpipesystemsshallbe
evaluated (chapter 4: Equipment and Inbuilt Facilities Standards and 5: Specific Requirements for Fire
DetectionandExtinguishingSystem,Part4:FireProtection).
2.1.2.15 Thelightningprotectionofthebuildingshallsatisfytherequirementsspecifiedinchapter1:Electricaland
ElectronicEngineeringServicesforBuildingsofPart8.
96
Vol.3
EvaluationandCompliance
Chapter1
2.1.3 EgressRequirements
2.1.3.1
Additiontooralterationorchangesofuseofabuildingshallnotbepermittedifsuchadditionoralteration
orchangeofusecausesviolationoftheegressrequirementsspecifiedinChapter3,MeansofEscape,Part4:
FireProtection.
2.1.3.2
Permissionsshallnotbegrantedforanysuchworkthatwillobstructorblockorhampertheexistingmeans
of egress of the building or any other building unless an equivalent and adequate means of egress is
provided.
2.1.4 StructuralRequirements
2.1.4.1
Additionsto,alterationsorchangeofuseofanexistingbuildingorstructureshallnotbepermittedifthey
causeanoverloadingorinstabilityofthestructuralelementsincludingthefoundation.
2.1.4.2
Onevaluation,ifthestructureoftheexistingbuildingisfoundinnonconformitywiththesafetyprovisions
ofthiscode,thebuildingwillbedeclaredasunsafebuildingbytheauthority.
2.1.4.3
Forallbuildingsidentifiedasanunsafebuildingtheauthoritiesshallidentifymeasuresthatremovedanger
tothestructure,lifeorpropertysothatthebuildingcanbemadesafeforoccupation.
2.1.4.4
Buildingsthatcannotbemadestructurallysafewillbedeclaredunfitforoccupationanddemolishedbythe
authorities.
2.1.5 EnvironmentalRequirements
Additionsto,alterationsorchangeofuseofanexistingbuildingorstructureshallnotbepermittedif
theycauseenvironmentaldegradationandunsustainabledevelopmentinthelocality.
2.2 Compliance
2.2.1.1
Whenanevaluationiscarriedoutasdescribedaboveandtheexistingbuildingwiththeproposedalteration,
additionand/orchangeofusesatisfytherequirementspecifiedfortherelevantoccupancyclassification,the
resultsoftheevaluationshallbeacceptedbytheBuildingOfficial.
2.2.1.2
Theownershallfullycomplywiththeresultsofsuchevaluationfortheexistingbuildingwiththeproposed
alteration, addition and/or change of use for the relevant occupancy classification and its recommended
remediesifrelevantassetforthinSec2.1.4above.
2.3 Sustainabilitymeasuresforexistingbuildings
2.3.1
Even when there are no proposals for additions, alterations or change of use, measures to make Existing
Building stock sustainable and environmentally responsive and energy efficient shall be proposed by the
authority after evaluating the condition of the existing buildings, when it is found that environmental
degradationistakingplaceorsuchisfearedbyexperts.Thesemeasuresmayinclude,butwillnotberestricted
to:
a) introductionofrenewableenergy
b) installationofrainwaterharvesting
c) installationofgroundwaterrechargesystems
d) introductionoflowenergysources
97
Part9
2.3.2
98
Any sustainability and /or energy efficiency measure suggested shall comply with relevant requirements in
Chapter4:EnergyEfficiencyandSustainability,Part3ofthisCode.
Vol.3
Chapter 3
Conservationandrehabilitationofhistorical
andculturalheritage
3.1 Scope
Historical places, buildings, objects and manifestation of cultural, scientific, symbolic, spiritual and
religious value are important expressions of the culture and heritage, identity and religious beliefs of
societies. Their role and importance, particularly in the light of the need for cultural identity and
continuityinarapidlychangingworld,needtobepromoted.
Buildings, spaces, places and landscapes charged with historical, cultural, spiritual and religious value
represent an important element of stable and humane social life and community pride. Without
appropriaterestoration/conservation,thearchitecturalevolutioninrelationtosocioculturalconceptof
acountrysheritageremainsmisinterpreted,andcanleadtovirtualdisappearance.
3.2 TerminologyandConceptualDefinitions
3.2.1 Conservation
Nationallegislationandinternationaltreatiesandregulationsaimtostrikeabalancebetweentheneed
fordevelopmentandtheneedtoconservetheenvironmentforthefuture.Conservationcanbedefined
bythefollowingconcepts:
a) Plannedmanagementofanaturalresource/ecosystemorparticularbuiltformorenvironment
to prevent exploitation, pollution, destruction or neglect to ensure the future usability of the
resource.
b) Retentionofexistingbuildingsorgroupsofbuildings,landscapesetc.takingcarenottoalteror
destroycharacterordetail,eventhoughrepairsorchangesmaybenecessary.
Conservationconventionallyisconcernedtopreserveasmuchoriginalfabricaspossible.
3.2.2 Restoration
Thisistheprocessofcarryingonalterationsandrepairstoabuildingwiththeintentionofrestoringitto
itsoriginalform,ofteninvolvingreinstatementofmissingorbadlydamagedparts,soitusuallyincludes
replication.Asfaraspossible,effortsaremadetoreplicatethematerialsandconstructiontechniquesof
theoriginalinthisendeavor.
Whileoftennecessaryafteradisaster,itisgenerallyregardedasmoredrasticthanconservation,which
suggestsretention,repairandmaintenance.
3.3 GeneralGuidelinesforHeritageBuildingsandSites
3.3.1 Conservation, rehabilitation and culturally sensitive adaptive reuse of urban, rural and architectural
heritageshallbeinaccordancewiththesustainableuseofnaturalandhumanmaderesources.Access
to culture and the cultural dimension of development is of utmost importance, benefiting all the
peoplewhohavesuchaccess.
Part9
99
Part9
3.3.2 Inordertopromotehistoricalandculturalcontinuityandtoencouragebroadcivicparticipationinall
kindsofculturalactivities,theGovernmentattheappropriatelevels,includingthelocalauthorities,
shouldundertakethefollowing:
a) Identifyanddocument,wheneverpossible,thehistoricalandculturalsignificanceofareas,
sites,landscapes,ecosystems,buildingsandotherobjectsandmanifestations
b) Establish conservation goals relevant to the cultural and spiritual development of the
society;
c) Promote awareness of heritage in order to highlight its value and the need for its
conservationandthefinancialviabilityofrehabilitation;
d) Encourage and support the local heritage and cultural institutions, association and
communities in their conservation and rehabilitation efforts and inculcate in children and
youthanadequatesenseoftheirheritage;
e) Promote adequate financial and legal support for the effective protection of cultural
heritage;
f) Promote education and training in traditional skills in all disciplines appropriate to the
conservationandpromotionofheritage.
3.3.3 Tointegratedevelopmentwithconservationandrehabilitationgoals,theGovernmentatappropriate
levels,includingMinistries,localauthoritiesandmunicipalities,shallundertakethefollowing:
a) Recognizingthathistoricalandculturalheritageisanimportantasset,strivetomaintainthe
social, cultural and economic viability of historically and culturally important sites and
communities;
b) Preserve the inherited historical settlement and landscape forms, while protecting the
integrity of the historical urban fabric and thereby guiding new construction in historical
areas;
c) Provide adequate legal and financial support for the implementation of conservation and
rehabilitation activities, in particular through adequate training of specialized human
resources;
d) Promote incentives for such conservation and rehabilitation to public, private and non
profitdevelopers;
e) Promote community based action for the conservation, rehabilitation, regeneration and
maintenanceofneighborhoods;
f) Supportpublicandprivatesectorandcommunitypartnershipfortherehabilitationofinner
citiesandneighborhoods;
g) Ensure the incorporation of environmental concerns in conservation and rehabilitation
projects;
h) Takemeasurestoreduceacidrainandothertypesofenvironmentalpollutionthatdamage
tobuildingsandotheritemsofculturalandhistoricalvalue;
i) Adopt human settlement planning policies, including transport and other infrastructure
policies,thatavoidenvironmentaldegradationofhistoricalandculturalareas;
j) Ensure that the accessibility concerns of people with disabilities are incorporated in
conservationandrehabilitationprojects.
3.3.4 Intheeventthattheownerofasite/buildingneedstobecompensatedforcurtailingdevelopment,
thetransferofunuseddevelopmentrightsshallbemadeasstipulatedinAppendixE,Part3.
3.4 CriteriaforprotectionofaHeritageBuilding/monument
3.4.1 Identification
Heritagebuildingsaretobeenlisted/identifiedbyaresponsiblecommitteetobeformedbytherelevant
departments of the Government, consisting of experts in history, culture, architecture, engineering and
other relevant fields, in consultation with the Advisory Committee to the Department of Archaeology,
Government of Bangladesh, as constituted under the Antiquities Act of 1968. Once identified, the
Government may, by notification in the official Gazette, declare any heritage building to be a protected antiquity
under this same Act.
910
Vol.3
Conservationandrehabilitationofhistoricalandculturalheritage
Chapter3
3.4.2 Categorization
Heritage buildings are to be categorized in accordance with its degree of dilapidation / dilapidated
conditions
3.4.3 Chronology
Heritagebuildingsunderconsiderationwillalsobecategorizedchronologicallyinanattempttodetermine
theirancientcharacterandage
3.4.4 Documentation
Beforeanyconservationworkisinitiated,athoroughresearchanddocumentationistobecarriedouton
theheritagebuildingsunderconsiderationbyrelevanttechnicalexpertsonhistory,culture,architecture,
engineeringandmaterialsciences,toensurethattherestorationworkisfaithfullycarriedout.
A site survey (preferably with digital equipments) shall be conducted before initiating the work of each
andindividualbuilding/structure.
In order to understand the location, dimension and depth of foundation of columns / piers or similar
structuralcomponents,partofthefootingcanbeexposedbyexcavatingtheearthworkwiththeguidance
ofexperiencedtechnicalpersonsexecutedbyexperiencedworkers.
Subsequently at every stage of the conservation work the technical aspects and process of various
activitiesaretobedocumented
3.4.5 CommunityParticipation
Inordertoensurecommunityparticipationintheconservationprocess,scaleddrawingsoftheproposed
conservation shall be appended to the site during construction so that the public may become
accustomedtotheproposalandhavetheoptionofregisteringtheiropinionregardingthesame.
If necessary the proposals shall be amended if strong public opinion is found against the proposal for
conservation/restoration.
Wherepossible,localyouthgroupsshallbeusedforfacilitatingtheconservationprocess.
3.4.6 Protectionofthebuilding/site
3.4.6.1
Aclearspacearoundeachmonumentshallbeformedasanimmediateenvironmentalprotectionto
themonument.Thisareashouldfollow,asthecasemaybe,theoriginallineoftheenclosurewall.
3.4.6.2
In rural or suburban setting no new structures / built forms of any size, shape shall be allowed to
develop within the UNESCO / UNDP suggested area of half a mile radius from the epicenter of the
monumentunderconsideration.
3.4.6.3
Inruralorsuburbansettings,aparceloflandrepresentingapproximatelyacircularareaofahalfmile
radiusofthefarmlandimmediatelysurroundingtheheritagebuilding/monumentshallbeacquired
toprotectitfromencroachment
3.4.6.4
Inurbanareasormetropolitancitiesanimmediatebufferzoneassetbythepermittingauthorities,
butnotlessthan3metersinwidth,adjacenttotheheritagebuilding,mustbekeptabsolutelyfreeof
anystructureorestablishmentofsimilarnaturesurroundingtheheritagebuildingoritspartthereof.
The adjacent buildings (proposed) should follow certain height restrictions to be imposed by the
permittingauthorityassetforthinSec3.4.5.5below.
3.4.6.5
Ingeneral,theheightofanyproposedbuildingsadjacenttoheritagebuildingsshallbekeptlimitedto
withintwotimestheheightoftheheritagebuildingunderconsideration.
3.4.6.6
Toprotectthemonumentagainsthumanimpact,movementofvisitorswithinthestructureandsite
shallbecontrolled.Climbingoverthefabricofthemonumentshallbeillegalandbepreventedatall
times.
911
Part9
3.4.6.7
Signages shall be installed within the site and building premises to guide visitors by creating
circumambulatorypathorcirculationareaaroundeachoftheheritagebuildings/monuments.
3.4.7 OriginalElements
3.4.7.1
Structures that impinge directly on the monument/s, identified to be additions, alterations or

extensions of any form or kind on to the original monument/s, shall be removed/ relocated
elsewhere,inanattempttorecognizetheoriginalform/featureofthemonument.
3.4.7.2
Alloriginalstructuresandarchitecturalelementsaretoberetainedandrestored.
3.4.7.3
Intheeventthatsuchelementshavetoberepaired,theirfeaturesaretoberetainedintact.
3.4.8 Useofbuildingmaterials
3.4.8.1
Allrepairing,restorationandrenovationworkshallbedonefollowingtheoriginaldesignanddetails
ineverystepwiththesame/similarbuildingmaterialsused
3.4.8.2
Selection and application of materials are to be made in harmony with the materials used in the
past/duringtheperiodoforiginalconstructionofthemonument/buildingunderconsideration
3.4.8.3
Sand
3.4.8.3.1
Sand used inthe makingof mortar, shall becoarsegrained, perfectly clean, sharp andyellowish
color,inorderthatasuccessfulresultmaybeobtainedforcementandlimemortar.Finegrained,
dustyanddirtysandshallnotbeusedandeachfreshconsignmentshallbecarefullyinspectedin
ordertoseethatitcorrespondswiththesampleapprovedinthefirstcase.
3.4.8.3.2
Sands, which would otherwise be of good quality, but containing lumps of foreign matter, or a
qualityofdustyparticlesmaybeused,onlyafterithasbeenthoroughlywashedandexamined.
3.4.8.3.3
Seasandcontainsaquantityofsaltwhichwillcauseefflorescencewhenthemortarisset.Ifused
forthemortar,thesaltfromthissandshallbeeliminatedbyverythoroughwashingincleanwater,
thewaterbeingrenewedateachwashing.
3.4.8.4
Brick
3.4.8.4.1
No modern bricks are to be used on any old buildings without the approval of an appropriate
technicalperson/expertofConservation.
3.4.8.4.2
Inrepairingbrickwork,bricksofthesamesizeandfabricastheoriginalshallbeused.Inabsenceof
instructions,thebricksshallbelaidinthesamebond,andthemortarjointsshallbeofthesame
thicknessandtonedtothesamecolorasintheoriginalwork.Whendesirable,themortarjoints
mayberecessedabout6.5mm12.5mmbackfromtheface.
3.4.8.5
3.4.8.5.1
3.4.8.6
3.4.8.6.1
912
Cement
Cementshallbeslowsetting,complyingwiththestandardspecificationofPortlandcement.Inthe
absence of specific instruction/s, the use of cement on any conspicuous part of a building for
pointing, plastering or other purposes shall be avoided, as if visible, it will express a noticeably
modernnotetothestructure.
Cementconcretemix
TheCementconcreteshallbevariedinaccordancewithlocalnecessities.
Vol.3
Chapter3
3.4.8.6.2
Themixforfoundationsshallbe1partofPortlandcement,3partsofsandand8partsofclean
stone,brickorgravelbrokentoapproximatelyoneandhalfinch,mixedthoroughly.
3.4.8.6.3
Themixforflooringandterracingshallbe,1partofPortlandcement,2partsofsandand5partsof
stone,brickorgraveletc.brokenapproximatelyto1inchring.
3.4.8.7
Limemortar
Limemortarofwhichthetensilestrengthislessthan100lbs.persq.inchisnottobeusedinconservation
works.Apracticalandquickwayoftestinglimemortarontheworkitselfistotakeahandfulofmortar
fromthetroughandafteraminuteortwo,towashitoffthehand.Iftheskinisleftroughafterwashing,
themortarmaybeconsideredfitforuse.
3.4.8.8
Limewash
3.4.8.8.1
The use of lime wash or paint is strictly forbidden except under special circumstances when the
permissionshallbetakenfromanappropriateauthority/expertonconservation.
3.4.8.8.2
If it is important to remove lime wash from an old surfaceof a heritageestablishment, extreme

precautionshallbetakentopreventinjurytoanyinscriptions,relieforpaintingunderneath.Lime
washmayoftenberemovedbybrushingwithsoapandwater,butacidmustnotbeusedforthe
removaloflimewashfrommarbleorlimestone,thesurfaceofwhichisliabletodamagebythe
acidwork.
3.4.9 Upgradingandadaptivereuse
3.4.9.1
Adaptive reuse shall follow logical consequence considering public requirements of the region,
touristinfluxandsocioculturalcontextoftheregionunderinfluence.
3.4.9.2
The decision of including different functions shall be made only after thorough investigation by a
committeeworkingundertheguidelineofexpertsinarchaeologyandarchitectureoftheregion.
3.4.10 Repairing,consolidationandrestoration
3.4.10.1 Inordertopreventsaltactiononthebuildings,allmaterialsusedinthemortarmixesshallbefreeof
anyimpurities.Thebricksshallbeacquiredonlyfromthebestbrickkilnsandtestedtoensurethey
arealsofreefromimpurities.Anylimeshallbepureslakedlimemadefromreallimestoneandnota
substitute.
3.4.10.2 Toprotectthestructuresfrompenetrationbyrainwater,awaterproofmembrane,suchasthinlayer
ofconcrete,shallbeplacedbetweenthearchaeologicalstructureandanygrasscoverings.
3.4.10.3 Major building features such as cornices, string courses, kiosks and/or cupolas etc. shall be
reconstructed,sothatthewaterrunningoffthemainbuiltformofthestructureisthrownclearof
thebrickwallorassociatedfaade.
3.4.10.4 Allreplacementofexternalbrickfacadesshallhaveaheavylayerofpolythenesheetbarrierplaced
between the old and the new brickwork in order to prevent the transfer of salts from the old
brickworktothenew.
3.4.10.5 Toprotectandtreatthebricksofvariousshapesandformsusedinwalls,columns,projectedeves/
corniceusedonexternalfaade,thoseshallfirstlyberecordedchronologically,andthenbecleaned
ofvegetation,particularlyalgae/weedsetc.,priortosoakingthemseveraltimesincleanwaterto
removeanysalttherein.
913
Part9
3.4.10.6 Treatment of decorative brickwork and terra cotta shall be carried out step by step; firstly by
thoroughlywashinginfreshwater.Secondly,afterallthesaltshavebeenleechedout,thebrickwork
or the terra cotta shall be treated with a consolidant chemical recommended by conservation
experts.
3.4.10.7 Inordertosecuretheplaques,insitu,thoseshallbeanchoredtothemainfabricwithstainlesssteel
clamps.
3.4.10.8 Surfacedrainsshallbeinstalledinordertodischargesurfacewaterfromthelargecourtsandalso
from the nooks and corners of the building premises and monument under consideration. Any
repairing, restoration and renovation work that this entails shall be done following the original
designanddetailsineverystepusingthesamebuildingmaterialsandtechniques.
3.4.11 Grouting
Grouting is to put a thin layer of mortar, following the required technical specification, in the spaces
betweentiles,bricksorsimilarothermaterialsusedinconservationwork.
3.4.11.1 A void which can not be thoroughly cleaned out with water can be satisfactorily filled under
pressure,sincethereareboundtobedustysurfaceswithwhichthegroutwillnotmakeasolidjoint.
3.4.11.2 Numerousholesmustbeleftinthepointingfortheescapeofairandfortheliquidgrout.
3.4.11.3 The pointing must be fairly hard and set on the outer surface before grouting is commenced. A
periodofthreetofourweekisusuallynecessaryforthistotakeplace.
3.4.11.4 Where cement has been used for filling the joints at the back of the lime pointing, then grouting
maybestartedtendaysafterwards.
3.4.11.5 Thewholebodyofthewalltobetreated(wheregroutingistobeperformed)shouldbethoroughly
washedoutwithwater(forcedunderapressureofabout15lbs.to20lbs.persquareinch)starting
fromthetopofthewallandworkingdownwards.Thewallsmust,however,bethoroughlysaturated
beforegroutingiscommenced.
3.4.11.6 Themixtureinthemachineistoconsistofnotmorethanthreepartsofsandtooneofcement,or
asnearthisratio(inordertoresistthenatureofsandtoflowinthemachine)
3.4.11.7 Thegroutingofcavitiesshouldbestartedatthebaseofthewall.Eachgroutingpointshouldbefed
twicefromthemachine.
3.4.11.8 Thepressuretobeobtainedinthemachineshould,asarule,benotlessthan25lbs.normorethan
35 lbs. per square inch; air should be pumped into to compressor until 35 lbs. per sq. inch is
attained,andthepressureshouldnotbeallowedtoreducebelow25lbs.persq.inchforordinary
cases.However,wherethewallisthinorweakthepressuremaybereducedto12lbs.or15lbsper
sq.inch.Iftheaboveprecautionsaretaken,thisshouldhavenobadeffectuponthelimepointing.
3.4.12 HandGrouting
3.4.12.1 Inhandgrouting,theproportionsofcementtosandwilldependbothuponthecharacter
of the voids to be filled and upon the degrees of fineness of the sand. If the voids are
large, one part of cement to two parts of sand may be used, but if small, then the
proportionofsandshouldnotexceedonepart.
3.4.12.2 Itisimportanttokeepthecementandsandthoroughlymixedbycontinuallyshakingthe
caninwhichthegroutisheld.
914
Vol.3
Chapter3
3.4.12.3 It is necessary to leave, above the grouting hole, another small hole for the escape of air
whilegroutisbeingpouredin.
3.4.12.4 Incaseswhereawallisweak,orathinskinoffacingmaterialisbondedtomainwall,itmust
beefficientlyboardedandstruttedintopositionbeforethegroutingworkisstarted.
3.4.13 Underpinning
3.4.13.1 Underpinning is applied to the building of new work underneath an existing structure
without disturbing its stability. Underpinning may be necessary when the foundation of a
wall of an ancient / heritage building is to be replaced with new foundation or when the
existingfoundationofawallisrequiredtobestrengthenedforsustainability.
3.4.13.2 All excavations for underpinning must be carefully and adequately planked and properly
strutted(topreventtiltingandbuckling;inordertopreventthis,thejoistsarestruttedapart
in the midspan all along the length); All the masonry work etc., immediately above the
proposedstretchofunderpinning,mustbeadequatelyheldbyrakingshoresonagoodsolid
foundation.
3.4.13.3 Wherealonglengthofwallhastobeunderpinned,theworkmustbecarriedoutinsections
about1minwidthandtothedepthindicatedintheestimate;themasonryoverheadandthe
earthatthesidesmustbethoroughlyshoredupandstrutted.
3.4.13.4 If underpinningexceeds 1m in height, themasonry istobe builtup in layers not exceeding
0.60m.Eachlayeristobeallowedtosetbeforethelayeraboveisadded.
3.4.13.5 When two sections are to be carried out together, they must not adjoin. Generally, a
minimum distance of 3.5m is to be maintained between two sections. The holes must be
keptquitefreefromwaterbypumping.
3.4.13.6 All concrete must be well rammed into a dense solid mass when possible, and where the
heightoftheholeissufficienttoramvertically,theconcretemustbewellpumpedinfrom
thefrontface.
3.4.13.7 When the footings of the wall are very loose and disintegrated, the joints should be well
washedoutandfilledwithcementgrout,ifpossible,beforetheunderpinningisstarted.
3.4.14 DecorationandDetails
3.4.14.1 Inlaywork(Pietradura)
In the repair of inlay work (pietra dura), the greatest care is necessary in order to ensure that the new
stonesarefixedexactly,andthattheedgesoftheexistinggroundworkarenotscrapped.Thisshouldbe
donestepbystepfollowingaconservationmanual.
3.4.14.2 The fret cutting should be done by means of a plain soft iron wire mounted on a split
bamboobow.Solidpatternsarecutbyworkingthebowlikeafretsaw.
3.4.14.3 Theinlayblocksarecutontheslantwithaninwardslopeofabout15degreesontheedges
tofacilitatethefitting.
915
Part9
3.5 AreaConservationforHistoricDistricts
3.5.1 IndentifyingHistoricDistricts:
Whenneighborhoods/regionsofancientheritagebuiltformsarepresentinanyurban/semiurban/rural
setting, these shall be identified as Historic districts by the Advisory Committee to the Department of
Archaeology,GovernmentofBangladesh,asconstitutedundertheAntiquitiesActof1968.Suchdistricts
willbeconsideredasrepresentingahistoricperiodoftheregion.Principlesofareaconservationshallbe
appliedfortheprotectionandpreservationofthesehistoricdistricts.
3.5.2 PlanningParametersandConservationGuidelines
3.5.2.1
Anappropriateplanshallbedrawninordertoshowtheboundaryofconservationareas,thecore
areas, the buildings to be conserved, the residential and other functional areas to be retained /
restoredandtheenvelopecontrolsites.
3.5.2.2
Theschemeshallincludearehabilitationplanforperson/sdisplacedintheConservationprocess.
3.5.2.3
Forbuildingstobeconserved,eachandeverybuildingofhistoricalimportanceistobeconserved/
restoredinaccordancewiththeconservationguidelinessetforthinSections3.3and3.4above.
3.5.2.4
Takingintoconsiderationcommunityneeds,theareashallbeassignedfunctionsthatcansustainits
existenceandcontributetotheeconomicfunctioningofthearea.
3.5.2.5
The plan and detailing of the entire area shall comply with energy efficient and sustainability
guidelinessetforthinChapter4:EnergyEfficiencyandSustainability,Part3ofthisCode.
916
Vol.3
Chapter1
ScopeandGeneral
1.1 PurposeandScope
1.1.1
ThepurposeofthispartoftheCodeistoprovideminimumstandardstosafeguardlife,health,property
and public welfare by regulating and controlling the design, location, construction and maintenance of
signsandoutdoordisplaystructures.TherequirementsoftheCodecoverthespatial,structuralandfire
safety aspects of signs located on, withinor outside the building. Official trafficsigns erectedon roads
andhighwaysarenotcoveredbythisCode.
1.1.2
Theunrestrainedplacementofadvertisingsignsmarsthelandscapewithhoardingsandadvertisingsigns
within the cityscape as well as in rural areas. Therefore, all signs and billboards shall be liable to take
permit as per guidelines of Clause 1.4 of this chapter and shall also comply with the guidelines of
chapter3part10(ref:allclausesandsubclausesof3.10to3.11).
1.1.3
The regulations of this Code are not intended, and shall not be understood to permit violation of the
provisionsofother ordinances,regulations orofficial requirementsin force at or nearrailwaystations,
roads,railways,terminalsorotherplacescontrolledbypublicagencieshavingjurisdictiontoformulate
suchregulations.
1.1.4
No sign shallbeerected ina manner thatwould confuseor obstructthe view orinterfere with official
signs,signalsordevicesinstalledforthepurposeofguidingorcontrollingroad,rail,marineorairtraffic.
1.2 Terminology
ThissectionprovidesanalphabeticallistofthetermsusedinandapplicabletothispartoftheCode.Incaseof
anyconflictorcontradictionbetweenadefinitiongiveninthissectionandthatinPart1,themeaningspecifiedin
thispartshallgovernforinterpretationoftheprovisionsofthispart.
ADVERTISINGSIGN:Anysurfaceorstructurewithcharacters,lettersorillustrationsappliedtheretoanddisplayed
inanymannerwhatsoeveroutofdoorsforpurposesofadvertisingortogiveinformationregardingortoattract
the public to any place, person, public performance, article or merchandise whatsoever, and which surface or
structureisattachedto,formspartoforisconnectedwithanybuilding,orisfixedtoatreeortothegroundorto
anypole,screen,fenceorhoardingordisplayedinspace.
ALLEY:Publicwayhavingawidthbetween2.5mand4mthathasbeendedicatedtopublicuse.
APPROVEDPLASTIC:PlasticmaterialsconformingtotherequirementofSec2.2.5
DIRECTIONSIGN:Usuallyincludedwithanarrowandusedforindicatingachangeinrouteorconfirmationtoa
correctdirection.
DISPLAYSURFACE:Theareausedtodisplaytheadvertisingmessageinasignstructure.
IDENTIFICATION SIGN: A sign that gives specific location information, identifies specific items, for example,
ParkingLotB,BuildingNo.5,FirstAid,etc.
ILLUMINATED SIGN: The display of signs, permanent or otherwise, functions of which depends upon its being
illuminatedbydirectorindirectlight,andotherthananelectricsign.
INFORMATIONAL SIGN: Used for overall information for general organization of a series of elements that is,
campusplan,busroute,buildinglayout,shoppingmallplan,etc.
MARQUEE: A roofed structure attached to and supported by a building and projecting beyond building line or
propertyline.
Part10
SignsandOutdoorDisplay
101
Part10
NONCOMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL: A material no part of which ignites or burns when subject to fire. Any material
conformingtoASTME136shallbeconsiderednoncombustible.
PUBLICPASSAGE:Apublicwayhavingawidthlessthan2.5m.
PUBLICPROPERTY:Thelandpropertywhichhasbeendedicatedordeededtothepublicforuse.
REGULATORY SIGN: Sign that gives operational requirements, restrictions or gives warnings, usually used for
trafficdelineationorcontrol,forexamplestop,Noparking,oneWay,etc.
1.3 ClassificationofSigns
ForthepurposeofthisCode,andtheregulationsandprovisionsthereof,outdoordisplaysshallbeclassifiedinto
oneofthefollowingtypesofsign.
BALCONYSIGN:Anadvertisingsignattachedto,hungfromorpostedonabalconyorverandahofabuilding.
COMBINATIONSIGN:Anoutdoorsignincorporatinganycombinationoffeaturesofothersigns.
ELECTRIC SIGN: An outdoor advertising display sign, usually animated, wired for lights or luminous tubing and
containing other electric fittings, excluding those illuminated by external light source. They shall meet the
requirementsoftheprovisionsofthisCodegoverningground,roof,wall,projecting,marqueeorothersignasset
forthbelow,dependinguponwheretheelectricsignsarebuilt.
FIN SIGN: An outdoor sign affixed to the wall or exterior surface of a building with the plane of the sign
perpendicular to or at an angle with the building surface projecting more than 300 mm from the surface, the
propertylineorthebuildingline.
GROUNDSIGN:Anoutdooradvertisingdisplaysignpaintedorotherwisedisplayedontheground,supportedbya
poleorastructureerectedindependentlyontheground,ormountedonavehicleormobilestructure.
MARQUEESIGN:Aprojectingsignattachedtoorhungfromamarqueecanopyorcoveredstructureprojecting
fromandsupportedbyabuildingandextendingbeyondthebuildinglineorpropertyline.
PROJECTINGSIGN:Anoutdoorsignotherthanawallsignaffixedtothewallorexteriorsurfaceofabuilding,with
theexposedfaceofsigninaplaneparalleltothewallsurfaceprojectingmorethan300mmfromthebuilding
surface,buildinglineorpropertyline.
ROOFSIGN:Anoutdoorsignpaintedontheroofsurfaceorerecteduponorabovearooforparapetofabuilding.
TEMPORARY SIGN: Any sign, banner, pendant or other display constructed of cloth, canvas, fabric, cardboard,
bambooorotherlightmaterial,withorwithoutastructuralframe,intendedtobedisplayedforalimitedperiod
only.Theyshallincludesignsongasfilledballoonsafloatintheair,freeoranchoredtothegroundorastructure,
signsorwordstracedbysmokeemittedbyflyingaircraftorastationarysourceandsignstiedtoaflyingaircraft.
WALLSIGN:Anoutdoorsigndirectlypaintedonorpastedorattachedtoorerectedagainstthewallorexterior
surfaceofabuilding,projectingnotmorethan300mmfromthewall.
1.4 ApplicationandPermit
RequirementofPermit
1.4.1
No sign shall be erected, reerected, constructed, altered or maintained except as provided by this Code. A
writtenpermitshallbeobtainedfromtheAuthorityforallsignsexceptthoseexemptedfromsuchpermitinSec
1.4.2.
Exemptions
1.4.2
1.4.2.1
102
Signs or alterations of signs described in this section and its subsections shall be exempted from the
requirementofapermit.Theseexemptionsshallnotbeconstruedasrelievingtheownerofthesign
fromtheresponsibilityofensuringcompliancewiththeprovisionsofthisCodeorotherregulationsor
lawspertainingtosigns.Thefollowingworksmaybeundertakenonexistingsignswithoutapermit:
a)
Changingoftheadvertisementcopyormessageonapaintedorprintedsignonly.Exceptforcinema
ortheatremarqueesignsorsimilarsignsspecificallydesignedforreplaceablecopy,electricsignsshall
notbeincludedinthisexemption.
b)
Cleaning,paintingorrepaintingofasignorsignstructurenotinvolvinganystructuralalteration.
Vol.3
ScopeandGeneral
Chapter1
1.4.2.2
Thefollowingsignsmaybeerectedwithoutawrittenpermit:
a)
Signs,thetopofwhichislessthan2mabovegrade.
b)
Signsexhibitedwithinthewindowofabuildingprovidedtheydonotaffectthelightandventilation
ofthebuilding.
c)
Signs relating to the trade or business carried on within the premises on which such signs are
displayedornoticesofmeetingorsaleetc.tobeheldwithinthepremises.
d)
Signs painted or pasted on buses or other public transport vehicles provided that no part of such
signsprojectsbeyondthebodyofthevehiclesorobstructsthevisibilityofthedriverorpassengersto
endangersaferide.
1.4.2.1
In addition, no permissionshall be required forsignscovered bythe provisions of Sections1.4.2.1.1,

1.4.2.1.2,1.4.2.1.3and1.4.2.1.4.
1.4.2.1.1
WallSigns:Wallsignslistedbelowshallnotrequireapermit:
a) Shop Signs: Signs erected over a display window or entrance of a shop or business establishment
whichannouncethenameoftheshopandthebusinesscarriedonprovidedsuchsignsarelessthan1
minheight.
b) BuildingNames:Wallsignserectedonpublicorprivatebuildingswhichannouncethenameofthe
establishmentandthenatureofoccupancy.
c) Name Plates: Any wall sign less than 0.5 m2 in area announcing the name and identity of the
occupier.
d) Boundary Signs: Any wall sign less than 0.5 m2 in area erected on boundary walls or fences
surroundingthepremises,oronotherornamentalfences,announcingtheidentityofthepremises.
1.4.2.1.2
Ground Signs Erected on or Visible from Highways: Ground signs erected on or visible from the
highwaysbearingwarning,cautionary,informative,identifyingandtemporaryadvertisingmessages
ofthefollowingdescriptionshallnotrequireapermit.Whenplacedonhighwaysthesegroundsigns
shallconformtotherequirementsofSec1.6.3.
a) Officialwarningsigns,trafficdirectionsandnoticesdisplayedonthehighwaybypublicauthoritiesor
bytherequirementofajudicialorder.
Example:
FERRYAHEAD
b) Directionindicatorstoplacesofpublicservice.
Examples:
POLICE STATION
c)
PETROL PUMP
Signsbearingnamesofplaces
Example:
SHERPURTOWN
d) Defensewarningsigns.
Example:
SHOOTINGRANGE
e) Privatewarningsignsnotmorethan0.2m2inarea.
Example:
PRIVATEROAD
103
Part10
f)
g)
Signsnotmorethan0.2m2inareaplacedsufficientlyclearofthecarriagewayshowingdirectiontoa
privateproperty.
Signs bearing identification, direction or warning messages with respect to the premises on which
theyaredisplayed,notexceeding0.2m2inarea.
Example:
MINDTHESTEP
h) Advertising signs relating to businesses,trades or professions carriedoutin the buildings on which

they are displayed, limited to one sign not exceeding 0.3 m2 in area for each business, trade or
profession.
i) Identificationsignsrelatingtoeducational,medical,social,religious,cultural,recreationalorsimilar
institutions,hotels,blocksofflats,hostels,resthousesetc.situatedonthepremisesonwhichsuch
signsaredisplayed,limitedtoonesignnotexceeding1.2m2inareaforeachsuchinstitution.
j) Temporaryadvertisementsrelatingtothesaleorrentofthepremisesonwhichtheyaredisplayed,
limitedtoonesignnotexceeding2m2inareaforeachsaleorrent.
k) Advertisements announcing sale of goods or livestock, limited to one sign not exceeding 1.2 m2 in
area,displayedonthelandorpremiseswheresuchsaleisheldorgoodsorlivestockaresituated.
l) Advertisementsrelatingtoconstructionworksinprogressonthelandonwhichthesignisdisplayed
notexceeding2m2inarea.
m) Signs announcing noncommercial local events of a religious, cultural, recreational or educational
2
character,limitedtoatotalof0.6m ofdisplayonanypremisesonwhichsucheventsaretotake
place.
1.4.2.1.3
TemporarySigns:Temporarysignsofthefollowingcharactershallnotrequireapermit:
a) Constructionsitesignsdisplayingtheownerorbuilder'sidentityortheprojectdescription.
b) Special and decorative displays used for festivities, fairs, circuses, public demonstrations or
promotionofcivicwelfareandcharitableactivities,providedsuchdisplaysdonotinvolvetheuseof
electricity.
1.4.2.1.4
Other Displays: Signs displayed on the concerned premises meeting the general requirements of
Table10.1.1andconformingtotheotherrequirementsofthisCodeshallnotrequireapermit.
1.4.3
Application for a sign permit shall be made in writing by the erector of the sign and the owner/lessee of the
premisesorsitewherethesignistobeerectedonprescribedfrom(Appendix10.1.1).Theapplicationshallbe
accompaniedbythefollowinginformation:
a) Full specification of the sign in a sketch showing the length, height and weight of the sign, and, where
applicable,numberanddispositionofelectriclightsandfittingsandwiringdiagram.
b) Alocationplanshowingthepositionofthesignonthesite,anelevationshowingthesigninrelationtothe
facadeanddetaildrawingofthesign.
c) Detaildrawingsofthesignstructureindicatingthesizeofallmembersandthefoundationand,ifrequiredby
theAuthority,designcalculationsofthestructure.
d) AnyotherinformationasmayberequiredbytheAuthority.
e) RequiredfeeasmaybedecidedbytheAuthorityfromtimetotime.
ConditionforGrantofPermit
1.4.4
Thegrantofpermitorlicensetoerectsignsshallbesubjecttothefollowingconditions:
a) AnapplicationforthegrantofpermitshallbemadetotheAuthorityinthemannerprescribedinthisCode.
b) Theapplicantsmustpossessrightovertheproperty,buildingorpremisesuponwhichthesignisproposedto
beerectedeitherbywayofownershiporbylease.
c) Thepermissionshallbegrantedatanyonetimeforaperiodnotexceedingthreeyears,onexpiryofwhichthe
Authority shall have the right to have the sign removed at the erector's expense unless a renewal of the
permithasbeenobtained.
104
Vol.3
ScopeandGeneral
Chapter1
d) A permit shall be renewed only upon continued satisfaction of all the conditions under which the original
permitwasissued.
e) ThepermissionortherenewalofpermissiongrantedbytheAuthorityshallbecomevoid,if
i.
anyadditionoralterationismadetothesignstructureexceptasmaybedirectedbytheAuthorityto
makeitsecure;
ii.
anychangeismadeinthesignorpartthereof,involvingachangeinthetypeofsign;
iii.
anyadditionoralterationismadetothebuildingwhichsupportsthesigninvolvingdisturbanceofthe
signoranypartthereof;
iv.
thesignoranypartthereoffallsduetoaccidentorothercauses;or
v.
thebuildingorstructuresupportingthesignisdemolishedordestroyedordeclared'unsafebuilding'by
theconcernedauthority.
f)
TheAuthoritymay,intheinterestofthepublic,suspendthelicensebeforeexpiryoftheperiodinwhichcase
thelicenseeshallremovethesignforthwith.
g) Thelicenseeshallmaintainthesignandthebuildingorstructuresupportingoroccupiedbythesigninsafe,
neatandsanitarycondition.
h) Thesignshallnot,intheopinionoftheAuthority,martheaestheticbeautyofthelocality.
Table10.1.1:SignsDisplayedonConcernedPremiseswhichshallnotRequireaPermit(Sec1.4.2.1.4)
Description
Identification
Example
Letters,
Symbols
etc.
Maximum
Height
Above
Electrification
Gradeto
Restriction
Topof
OtherSpecial
Requirements
Sign
FIREBRIGADE
signsof
public
Number Dimensional
Permitted
Limits
Maximum
Sizeof
Asrequired
Asrequired
Asrequired
Asrequired
Asrequired
PATHOLOGY
undertakings
800mm
Warnings,
directionor
NOPARKING
identification
ofutilities
Nolimit
(400mmin
Maximum
2
area4m
restricted
signzone*)
6m(5min
restricted
signzone)
Onlyfor
medical
servicesandto
indicatedanger
Identification
ofcompany,
trade,busi
ness,
KADER&CO
professionor
person
Nameof
buildingor
premises
CENTRALLAW
ACADEMY
Oneat
Maximum
each
area0.3m2
entrance
each
800mm
(400mmin
restricted
signzone*)
6m(5min
restricted
signzone)
Onlyfor
medical
servicesandto
indicatedanger
Oneon
Maximum
each
area1.2m2
entrance
each
800mm
(400mmin
restricted
signzone*)
6m(5min
restricted
signzone)
Onlyfor
medical
servicesandto
indicatedanger
105
Part10
No
Temporary
signsrelating
tosaleor
FORSALE
lettingof
Widthto
Shallnotbe
restriction
depthratio
displayedearlier
buttotal
2:1,totalarea
than1month
areanotto
ofallsignsnot
800mm
exceed2.4
toexceed2.4
(400mmin
propertyon
TOLET
which
displayed
restricted
signzone*)
6m(5min
Noelectri
restricted
ficationpermi
signzone)
tted
sitesigns
saleorlettingis
dueandshallbe
removedwithin
2weeksafter
conclusionof
Construction
priortodatethe
saleorletting.
SHOPPING
Onefor
CENTRE
each
Consultant
frontage
..
foreach
Contractor
contractor
800mm
Maximum
2
area4m
(400mmin
restricted
signzone*)
6m(5min
Noelectri
restricted
ficationpermi
signzone)
tted
Permittedonly
whilethe
constructionis
inprogress
Temporary
signs
announcing
events
displayedon
Shallnotbe
INTERNATIONAL
BOOKFAIR
displayedearlier
Norest
rictionbut
totalarea
notto
thepremises
exceed4
wherethese
m2
Maximum
aggregate
2
area4m
800mm
(400mmin
restricted
signzone*)
than1month
6m(5min
Electrification
priortothestart
restricted
shallrequire
ofeventand
signzone)
permission
shallbe
removedwithin
2weeksofend
takeplace
ofevent
Identifying
and
No
CDBANKLTD
advertising
signson
buttotal
ABCTRAVEL
business
premisesin
restricted
signzone
restriction
areanotto
exceed
10%of
areaof
Electrification
Maximum
shallrequire
aggregate
permission
areanotto
exceed10%of
areaofface
face
400mm
5m
exceptfor
medical
servicesandto
indicatedanger
a)
Nosignotherthanthatpertainingtothebuildingconcernedshallbeallowedtoobstructorobscurebuildings
suchashospitals,publicoffices,educationalinstitutions,placesofworship,museumsandbuildingsofnational
andhistoricimportance.
b) Nosignorhoardingshallbeallowedtoobstructlightandventilationofbuildingssituatednearit.
c) Nosignshallbearanyobjectionable,unlawfulorobscenedisplay.
d) Any hoarding or sign erected on the highways shall also require the express permission of the authority or
agencyinchargeofthehighway.
e) Inaddition,allsignsshallatalltimesconformtotherequirementsgiveninthisCode.
SanctionorRefusalofPermit
1.4.5
UponreceiptofanapplicationforpermittheAuthoritymaysanction,sanctionwithmodificationorrefusesucha
permit. The decision of the Authority shall be communicated within 30 days of the date of receipt of all
informationdesiredbythem,failingwhichthepermitshallbedeemedtohavebeensanctioned.TheAuthority
maywithdrawapermitatanytimeintheinterestofpublicsafetyandwelfare.
106
Vol.3
ScopeandGeneral
1.4.6
Chapter1
ApplicationforAlterationofSign
Afreshapplicationforpermitshallbemadeeachtimetheownershipofthesignchangesoranychangeintypeor
structureofthesignisproposed.
1.4.7
ExistingSigns
SignsinexistenceonthedateofpromulgationofthisCode,thatwouldotherwiserequireapermit,shall
beexemptedfromtherequirementofpermitforaperiodoftwoyearsafterthepromulgationoftheCode.On
expiryofthisperiodthesesignsshallrequireapermitasforanewsign.
1.5 UnsafeandUnlawfulSigns
1.5.1
ResponsibilityoftheOwner
Itshallbetheresponsibilityoftheownertoensurethesafetyandlegalityofthesignirrespectiveofanyreference
fromtheAuthority.
1.5.2
NoticeoftheAuthority
IfanysignisunlawfullyinstalledormaintainedviolatinganyoftheprovisionsoftheCode,orifanysignbecomes
insecureorunsafe,theownerofthesignshall,uponwrittennoticeoftheAuthority,makethesignconformto
the provisions of the Code orremove it, within a time period specified by the Authority which shall in no case
exceedthreedays.Iftheownerfailstocomplywithinthespecifiedtime,theAuthorityshallremovethesignand
chargetheexpensestotheowner.
1.5.3
ProhibitedSigns
AnysignwhichintheopinionoftheAuthority,fitsanyofthefollowingdescriptions,shallnotbepermittedunder
anycircumstance:
a) Signsofobscene,repulsive,vulgar,revoltingorotherwiseobjectionablecharacter,
b) Signsdisplayingmessagesprejudicialorsubversivetostatediscipline,
c) Signsproducingperniciousorinjuriouseffectonaclassofpersonsorthepublic,
d) Signsthatdisfigureanyneighbourhoodordestroyitssanctity,or
e) Signsthosearelikelytoaffectthesentimentofpublic.
1.6 Restrictions
1.6.1
RestrictedSignZone
1.6.1.1
TheAuthoritymay,intheinterestofaesthetics,moralvaluesorpublicwelfare,designateanareaasa
restrictedsignzone.Kindergartens,elementaryschools,primaryschoolsandsecondaryschools,Parks,
playgrounds, places of historical interest, places of architectural heritage, important national
monuments,animalandbirdsanctuaries,naturereservesetc.mayalsobedesignatedasrestrictedsign
zones.
1.6.1.2
Theerectionordisplayofsignswithintherestrictedsignzoneshallbeprohibitedorrestrictedinany
mannerdeemednecessarybytheAuthority.
1.6.1.3
Thewordingonanysignintherestrictedsignzoneshallbelimitedtomessagesforidentificationof,
directiontoandinformationabouttheownerofthepremises,thenatureofbusinesscarriedonwithin
thepremisesandlocationofutilitiesandservices.
1.6.1.4
Therestrictiononsignsinarestrictedsignzoneshallapplywithinadistanceof30moutsidethezone.
1.6.2
ProhibitionofAdvertisement
Theerectionofanyadvertisingsignshallbeprohibitedonasite,whenintheopinionoftheAuthority:
a) the site is unsuitable for display of advertising signs by virtue of the historic, cultural, architectural or
similarcharacteristicsofthelocality,or
107
Part10
b) thedisplayofanadvertisingsignislikelytoposeahazardforanyformoftransport.
SignsonHighwaysandRoads
1.6.3
Anyadvertisingsignatornearhighwaysorroadsshallconformtothefollowingrequirementsinadditiontothe
requirementsoftherespectiveauthority.
a) Nosignshallobscureorotherwisehinderinterpretationofofficialtrafficsigns.
b) Signsonthesidesofoverbridgesorflyoversacrossthecarriagewayshallnotprojectbeyondanyedgeof
theparapetoftheoverbridgeorflyover.
c) No sign shall be erected within the right of way of the road nor within 10 m of the edge of the
carriageway. The size of the sign erected at 10 m away from the edge of the carriageway shall not be
morethan3m2.Thislimitonsizeshallbeincreasedby0.3m2 foreachextrametreofsetbackfromthe
edgeofthecarriageway.
d) Nosignshallbeerectedinsuchmanneroratsuchplacesastoobstructorinterferewiththevisibilityof
approaching,intersectingormergingtraffic.
e) Nosignshallbeerectedwithin100mofabridge,railwaylevelcrossingorroadjunction.Forurbanroads
thisdistancemaybereducedto50m.
f) Nosignshallbeerectedinsuchawayastohindervisibilityatpedestriancrossings.
IlluminatedDisplays
1.6.4
Thefollowingilluminatedadvertisementsthatthreatentrafficsafetyshallnotbepermitted:
a) Illuminatedorelectricadvertisementsofsuchbrillianceorintensityastoproduceglareandimpairvision
ofthedriverandthepedestrians;
b) Advertisementscontainingflashingorintermittentlightsofintensebrightness;
c) Advertisements containing lights of such colour, disposition, brightness, movement or flashes as to
obscureorreduceeffectivenessofofficialtrafficlights,signals,signsordevices.
1.7 MaintenanceandInspections
Maintenance
1.7.1
Signsandtheirsupportingstructures,togetherwiththesupports,braces,guysandanchorsshallbemaintainedin
sound condition and any deterioration shall be repaired immediately. All nongalvanized and corrosion
susceptiblemetalcomponentsshallbepaintedatleastonceineverytwoyears.TheAuthoritymayorderremoval
ofsignswhicharenotmaintainedinproperorderandsuchremovalshallbeattheowner'sexpense.
Inspection
1.7.2
Every sign shall be subject to inspection by the Authority from time to time as required by the Authority. The
ownerofthesignshallensureaccessoftheinspectorandfacilitatetheinspection.
1.8 LocationRestrictions
1.8.1
Anoutdoordisplaysignshallnotbeerected,constructedormaintainedsoastoobstructanyfireescapeor
anywindowordoororopeningusedasameansofegressorsoastopreventfreepassagefromonepartofa
rooftotheother.
1.8.2
Asignshallnotbeattachedinanyform,shapeormannertoafireescape,norbeplacedinsuchmannerasto
interferewithopeningsrequiredforlightingandventilation.
108
Vol.3
ScopeandGeneral
Chapter1
1.9 ProjectionoverPublicProperty
1.9.1
No part of a sign or sign structure shall project into a private property not owned or leased by the
owner/erectorofthesign,unlessexplicitagreementhasbeenenteredintowiththeownerofthatproperty.
1.9.2
Signs and sign structures shall project neither into public property nor into roads wider than 4 m, below a
heightof2.5mabovegrade,norprojectmorethan0.3mwhenthesigniserected2.5mabovefinishedgrade.
Thesignsmayproject0.3mplus0.12mforeach0.25mofclearanceabove2.5mwhentheheightisbetween
2.5 m and 5 m above grade. Signs may not project more than 1.5 m into a public property under any
circumstance.
1.9.3
Nosignorpartthereofshallprojectintopublicpassages.Projectionofsignsandsign structuresoverpublic
alleysshallbelimitedtothevaluesprovidedinTable10.1.1.
Table10.1.1:ProjectionofSignsoverPublicAlleys
HeightAboveFinishedGrade(m)
MaximumProjection(m)
Lessthan4
Noprojectionpermitted
4to5
0.3
over5
0.6
1.10 ClearancefromPowerlines
All signs and sign structures shall maintain the clearances from overhead electrical conductors as specified in
Table10.1.2
Table10.1.2:ClearancefromPowerLines
Voltageofthe
Line
Verticaldistance(m)
HorizontalDistance(m)
LowandMedium
2.5
1.25
Volt
33KV
3.5
1.75
Over33KV
3.5Plus0.3mforeachadditional33KVor
1.75Plus0.3mforeachadditional33KVorPart
partthereof
thereof
Related Appendix - Appendix 10.1.1: Application for Permit to Erect or Alter Outdoor Signs
109
Chapter2
GeneralRequirements
2.1 Design
2.1.1 Loads
Alloutdoorsignsandsignstructuresshallbedesignedtoresistwind,gustduringstorm,seismicandotherforces
asspecifiedinChapter2:Loads,Part6ofthisCode.Combinationofwindandseismicloadsshallnotberequired.
Loadingthatproduceshigherstressesshallbeused.
2.1.2 DesignConsideration
AlloutdoorsignsandsignstructuresshallbedesignedfulfillingthedesignrequirementsassetoutinChapter1:
GeneralDesignRequirements:StructuralDesign,Part6ofthisCode.
2.2 Construction
All outdoor signs and sign structures shall be constructed and erected in accordance with the requirements of
Chapter1:ConstructionalResponsibilitiesandPractices,Part7ofthisCode.
2.2.1 UseofMaterials
AllmaterialsforoutdoorsignsandsignstructuresshallconformtothespecificationassetoutinPart5:Building
MaterialsofthisCode.
2.2.2 UseofCombustibleMaterials
Groundsignsnothigherthan6mmaybeconstructedofanymaterialthatmeetstherequirementsofthisCode.
NocombustiblematerialotherthanapprovedplasticasdefinedinSec2.2.5,shallbeusedintheconstructionof
electric signs. Roof, wall, projecting, fin, balcony, marquee and combination signs shall be constructed of
noncombustiblematerialsexceptasprovidedbelow:
a)
Onroofsofcombustibleconstruction,theroofsignmaybeconstructedofcombustiblematerials.
2
b)
Onroofsofanytypeofconstruction,roofsignsnothigherthan1.5mandnotexceeding5m inarea
maybeconstructedofcombustiblematerials.
c)
Onwallsofcombustibleconstruction,wallsignsnotinvolvingtheuseofelectricitymaybeconstructed
ofcombustiblematerials.
2.2.3 Anchorage
Foundationforallunbracedsignsshallbedesignedtoresisthorizontal,verticalandoverturningforces.Allbraced
groundsignsshallbeanchoredtoresistthespecifiedwindandseismicforcesinanydirection.Anchorsshallbe
designedforsafesoilbearingcapacityandforaneffectiveupliftforcewhichis25%morethantheforcerequired
toresistoverturning.Anchorageofsignsshallnotbeconnected toanunbracedparapetwallunlessthewallis
designedforseismicload.
Part10
1011
Part10
2.2.4 DisplaySurfaces
Display surfaces of outdoor signs maybe made of metal, glass or approved plastic. If the surface of the signis
madeofglass,thethicknessandareashallbeassetforthinTable10.2.1.
Table10.2.1:Type,SizeandThicknessofGlassPanelsUsedinSigns
MaximumSizeofGlassPanel
Anydimension
Area(m )
MinimumThickness
(mm)
TypeofGlass
(m)
0.75
0.30
Plain,PlateorWired
1.15
0.45
Plain,PlateorWired
3.65
2.30
Plain,PlateorWired
above3.65
above2.30
WiredGlass
Plasticofapprovedtypemaybeusedforwallsignsinsectionsnotexceeding20m2inarea.Plasticssectionson
wallsignsshallbeseparated1mlaterallyand2mvertically.Approvedplasticsofunlimitedareamaybeusedon
anysignotherthanwallsign,ifapprovedbytheAuthority
2.2.5 ApprovedPlastics
Plasticmaterialswhichburnataratenofasterthan65mmperminutewhentestedinaccordancewithASTMD
635shallbedeemedapprovedplastic.Onlyapprovedplasticshallbeusedforplasticdisplaysurfacesprovidedfor
inSec2.2.4above.Approvedplasticsmayalsobeusedforornamentalpurposes,decorations,lettering,facings
etc.onsignsandoutdoordisplaystructures.
2.2.6 DrainingArrangements
Signsconstructedongroundoratplaceswherepossibilityofaccumulationof waterexistsshallhaveadequate
provisionforproperdrainage.
2.3 UseofGlassinSigns
Glass when used in outdoor signs shall be at least 3 mm thick and shall conform to the requirements of Sec
2.16.14:GlassandGlazing,ofPart5ofthisCode.Theareaofeachglasspanelshallnotexceed6m2andshallbe
securely fixed with the frame independently. Appropriate protection against damage by falling objects shall be
provided to all glass panels by metal canopies or other approved means. Use of glass may be discouraged or
avoided wherever possible for signs placed overhead. For such uses, if permitted, the authority may impose
conditionofusing'temperedglass'soastoproducenosharpedgesorlargepiecesifbrokenaccidentally.
2.4 ServicingDevices
All servicing devices (ladders, platforms, hooks, rings etc.), used for cleaning, painting, repainting of sign shall
haveadequatesafetydevicesandshallbeofapprovedtypeandquality.
2.5 InterferenceBySigns
Signs shall not be placed at such locations that would obstruct the use of fire hydrants or other fire fighting
appliances.Signsinbendsandcurvesshallbeplacedinsuchalocationsoasnottoobstructtheviewoftrafficat
intersectingstreets.
1012
Vol.3
GeneralRequirements
Chapter1
2.6 HoursofOperations
Noelectricsignorothertypeofsignsusingelectricpowersource,otherthanthosenecessaryintheopinionof
the Authority in the interest of public amenity, health and safety, shall be operated between midnight and
sunrise.
1013
Chapter3
SpecificRequirementsforVariousTypesof
Signs
3.1
ElectricSigns
3.1.1
Materials
MaterialsfortheconstructionofelectricsignsshallbenoncombustibleexceptasprovidedinSec2.2.2
3.1.2
Location
Electricsignsincolourerectedataheightlowerthantwostoriesor6mabovethepavementshallbeprovided
withsuitablescreentoavoidconfusionwithtrafficsignals.Nosigninred,amberorgreencoloursshallbeerected
withinahorizontaldistanceof10mfromanytrafficsignal.
3.1.3
Installation
All electric signs including the electrical equipment in connection with the sign shall be installed in accordance
withtheprovisionsofPart8Chapter1ofthisCode.
3.1.4
Illumination
Electric signsshall notbeofsuch intenseillumination as to causeinconvenienceor disturbance toresidents of

adjacentbuildingsortothedriversonroad.
3.1.5
OperationalHours
Theoperationalhoursofelectricsignswillberestricted(asreferredinclause2.6ofchapter2ofPart10)
3.2 GroundSign
3.2.1
Material
All ground signs over 6 m in total height shall be constructed of noncombustible materials meeting the
requirementsofthisCode,orofapprovedplasticsasdefinedinSec2.2.5.Materialsusedfortheconstructionof
groundsignsupportingstructuresmaybetreatedtimber,masonry,concreteorcorrosionresistantmetal.
3.2.2
Height
Theheightofgroundsignsexcludingthelightingreflectorsshallbelimitedto9m.
3.2.3
Design
ThedesignandconstructionofgroundsignsshallconformtotherequirementsofParts6and7ofthisCode.All
groundsignsshallhaveafirmsupportandshallbeanchoredtotheground.
3.2.4
Clearance
Allgroundsignsshallbeprovidedwithaclearanceheightof0.6mfromtheground.Theinterveningspacemaybe
filledwithopenlatticework.Undernocircumstanceshallanygroundsignobstructorinterferewithentranceor
exitofabuilding.
Part10
1015
Part10
3.2.5
Visualobstruction
Allgroundsignsmustbesitedinamannersothattheydon'tposeanyvisualobstructiontothetrafficsignsorto
anyemergencysigns(e.g.hospitalentry)
3.3 RoofSigns
3.3.1
Material
All roof signs including the frames shall be constructed of noncombustible materials except as provided in Sec
2.2.2.
3.3.2
Design
DesignandconstructionofroofsignsshallconformtotherequirementsofParts6and7ofthisCode.Roofsigns
shallbeproperlysecuredandanchoredtothebuildingandthebuildingshallbedesignedtoavoidoverstressdue
tothesign.
3.3.3
Clearance
Roofsignsshallnotpreventfreepassagefromonepartoftherooftotheother.Suchpassagesshallbenotless
than1mwideand1.25mhigh.
3.3.4
Projection
Noroofsignshallprojectbeyondtheroofinanydirections.
3.4 ProjectingSigns
3.4.1
Material
All projecting signs and their supporting frames shall be of noncombustible material except as provided in Sec
2.2.2.
3.4.2
Design
The supporting frame of projecting signs and thebuilding element towhich it is anchoredshallbedesigned to
withstand,inadditiontodead,liveandwindloadscalculatedinaccordancewithPart6ofthisCode,appropriate
loadsduetoservicingpersonnelandequipment.
3.4.3
HeightandClearance
A minimum of 2.5 m clearance from the road surface shall be provided for any projecting sign. The maximum
heightofaprojectingsignshallbe15mwhenerectedagainstbuildingshavingaheightofmorethan8storeyor
36m.Forbuildings5to8storieshighbutnotexceeding36m,theheightoftheprojectingsignsshallbelimitedto
12m.Theheightofthesignshallbelimitedto9mwhenattachedtoabuildinglessthan4storeyor18mhigh.
3.4.4
Projection
Projectingsignoranypartofitssupportingstructuresshallnotprojectmorethan2mbeyondthebuilding.When
suchsignfacesthestreet,itshallnotprojectbeyondthepropertyline.Projectingsignshallnotextendabovethe
eavesoftheroofofthebuildingtowhichitisattached.Projectionoverpublicpropertyoralleyofprojectingsigns
shallbelimitedtothevaluesasspecifiedinSec1.9.
3.4.5
Attachment
All projecting signs shall be so constructed or attached to the building that movement in any direction is
preventedbyrods,anchors,brackets,chainsetc.
1016
Vol.3
SpecificRequirementsforVariousTypesofSigns
Chapter3
3.4.6
Visualobstruction
Allprojectionsignsmustbesitedinamannersothattheydon'tposeanyvisualobstructiontothetrafficsignsor
toanyemergencysigns(e.g.hospitalentry)
3.5 FinSigns
3.5.1
Material
MaterialsforfinsignshallconformtotherequirementsofSec2.2.2.
3.5.2
Design
DesignandconstructionoffinsignsshallconformtotherequirementsofParts6and7oftheCode.
3.5.3
Clearance
Fin signs shall not obstruct windows and reduce light and ventilation to such a point as the Code or other
regulationsprohibit.Suchsignsandtheirframesshallnotobstructfireescape,exitandentranceofthebuilding
towhichtheyareattached.ProjectionoffinsignsoverpublicpropertyshallconformtotherequirementsofSec
1.9.
3.6 BalconySigns
3.6.1
Materials
MaterialsforbalconysignsshallconformtotherequirementsofSec2.2.2.
3.6.2
Location
Balconysignsshall be placed above theeaves of the balcony andshall notproject beyond therear of theroof
gutter.
3.6.3
Size
Theheightofabalconysignsshallbelimitedto1m.Hangingbalconysignshallnotexceed2.5minlengthand50
mminthickness.Forhangingboxtypesignsthemaximumallowabledepthshallbe200mm.
3.6.4
Projection
Balconysignsshallnotextendbeyondthebalconyline.Hangingbalconysignsshallmaintainaclearanceheightof
2.5mfromthefinishedgroundlevel.Projectionofbalconysignoverpublicpropertyoralleyshallbelimitedto
valuesasspecifiedinSec1.9.
3.7 MarqueeSigns
3.7.1
Materials
MaterialsfortheconstructionanderectionofmarqueesignsshallconformtotherequirementsofSec2.2.2.
3.7.2
Size
Theheightofamarqueesignshallbelimitedto2m.Thelengthofsuchsignmaybeequaltothelengthofthe
marqueeandnoprojectionbeyondthefulllengthshallbeallowed.
3.7.3
Clearance
Aclearanceheightofatleast2.5mshallbeprovidedformarqueesigns.
1017
Part10
3.8 CombinationSigns
Allcombinationsignsshallmeetthegeneralandspecificrequirementsofallthecomponentclassesofsign.
3.9 TemporarySigns
Size
3.9.1
Theareaofatemporarysignshallnotordinarilyexceed10m2.Temporarysignsofalargerareamaybeerected
uponexplicitapprovaloftheAuthoritywhichshallonlybegranted,forsignsofadurationnotexceeding7days.
Temporarysignsmadeofrigidmaterialshallnotexceed3m2inarea,norshalltheyhaveaheightmorethan2m.
Suchrigidsignsshallbeanchoredtothegroundorabuildingbyarigidstructure.
Duration
3.9.2
Temporarysignsshallberemovedfromthelocationwithin60daysoffirsterection,unlessexplicitpermissionof
theAuthorityforextendingthisperiodhasbeenobtained.Innocaseatemporarysignshallbepermittedtobe
maintainedformorethan90days.
Support
3.9.3
Temporary signs shall be adequately supported andsecured in place.No part of the signshall be permitted to
dangle,swayorotherwisebecomelooseordetached.Inordertoreducewindresistanceonsignsmadeoffabric,
adequateperforationsshallbeprovided.
Location
3.9.4
AlltemporarysignsshallbesubjecttotheapprovaloftheAuthorityandshallbeerectedinsuchaplacesoasnot
toobstructanypublicway,footpathorentranceandexitofanybuilding.
Projection
3.9.5
Temporaryclothsignmayextendoverpublicproperty.Aclearanceof6mshallbemaintainedwhensuchsigns
areplacedoverapublicstreet.Othertemporarysignswhenplaced2.5mabovethegroundmayprojectnotmore
than300mmoverpublicpropertyorbeyondthelegalsetbackline.
3.10 AdditionalGuidelinesforSignsinUrbanandRuralAreas
3.10.1
Erecting, maintaining and owning signs in rural areas shall be encouraged so as to create awareness,
disseminationofinformationandtoboosteconomicstatusoftheruralpopulation.
3.10.2
Thetolerancecriteriaforthepermissiongrantedtowardsputtingupanysignsforanyurbanareashallbe
asgivenin3.10.2.1to3.10.2.4.
3.10.2.1
SmallTowns
The traffic hazards in small towns are few and the defacement due to excessive advertising signs has not
occurred.Therefore,orderlydevelopmentofsignsmayenliventhetownenvironmentandboosttheeconomy.
Thetoleranceheremaybehigh.
Thefollowingguidelinesmaybefollowedforsignage:
a)
AdvertisingSignElectricsign,groundsign,buildingsign,illuminatedsign,skysignandtemporarysign
arepermissible.
b)
Directional Sign Electric sign, ground sign, building sign, illuminated sign and temporary sign are
permissiblewhileskysignisnotpermissible.
c)
Informational Sign Electric sign, ground sign, building sign, illuminated sign and temporary sign are
d)
Identification Sign Electric sign, ground sign, building sign, illuminated sign and temporary sign are
1018
Vol.3
SpecificRequirementsforVariousTypesofSigns
Chapter3
e)
RegulatorySignElectricsign,groundsign,illuminatedsignandtemporarysignarepermissiblewhile
buildingsignandskysignarenotpermissible.
3.10.2.2
Medium(districtlevel)Towns
The traffic hazards in medium towns are few and the defacement due to excessive advertising signs has not
occurred.Properdesign,erectionandmaintenanceofthesignsshallbeencouraged.Thefollowingguidelinesmay
befollowedforsignage:
a)
AdvertisingSignElectricsign,groundsign,buildingsign,illuminatedsign,skysignandtemporarysign
arepermissible.
b)
DirectionalSignElectricsign,groundsign,illuminatedsignarepermissiblewhilebuildingsign,skysign
andtemporarysignarenotpermissible.
c)
Informational Sign Electric sign, ground sign, illuminated sign, and temporary sign are permissible
whilebuildingsignandskysignarenotpermissible.
d)
e)
RegulatorySignElectricsign,groundsign,illuminatedsignandtemporarysignarepermissiblewhile
3.10.2.3
Large(divisionallevel)Cities
Accidentrisksduetodensityandcomplexityoftrafficinlargecitiesishigh.Unplannedadvertisementsmayadd
more risk to this situation. Defacement of buildings, roads and urban spaces due to advertisements has to be
controlled.Therefore,thepermissivityandtoleranceforerectingsignsisverylow.Thefollowingguidelinesmay
befollowedforsignage:
a)
AdvertisingSignElectricsign,groundsign,illuminatedsignandskysignarepermissiblewhilebuilding
signandtemporarysignarenotpermissible.
b)
DirectionalSignGroundsign,illuminatedsignarepermissiblewhileelectricsign,buildingsign,skysign
c)
Informational Sign Ground sign, illuminated sign, building sign and temporary sign are permissible
whileelectricsignandskysignarenotpermissible.
d)
e)
Regulatory Sign Ground sign, illuminated sign and temporary sign are permissible while electric sign,
3.10.2.4
MegaandMetroCities
Thetraffichazardsinmegaandmetrocitiesaremanyandthedefacementduetoexcessiveadvertisingsignshas
marredtheurbanenvironment.Thedensityofpopulationisveryhighandthedangerofgreaterlossoflifedueto
disastersisselfevident.Therefore,thepermissivityforerectingsignsisverylowandnotoleranceexistsforlaw
breakers.Thefollowingguidelinesmaybefollowedforsignage:
a)
AdvertisingSignElectricsign,groundsign,illuminatedsignandskysignarepermissiblewhilebuilding
signandtemporarysignarenotpermissible.
b)
DirectionalSignGroundsign,illuminatedsignarepermissiblewhileelectricsign,buildingsign,skysign
c)
InformationalSignGroundsign,illuminatedsignandtemporarysignarepermissiblewhileelectricsign,
d)
Identification Sign Electric sign, ground 8sign, building sign, illuminated sign and temporary sign are
e)
RegulatorySignGroundsign,illuminatedsignandtemporarysignarepermissiblewhileelectricsign,
1019
Part10
3.11 EnvironmentalGraphicsandGraphicsforUniversalAccessibilityforCityscape
3.11.1
3.11.2
The urban environment may be susceptible to confusion and chaos due to improper graphics,
hoardings and advertisements. Therefore, the signage should be installed following requisite
guidelineskeepingthefunctional,safetyandaestheticaspectsinview.Thescaleoftheprojectshould
alsobeconsideredforimplementingsignagedesign.Inurbandesign/planningprojectsandlandscape
projects on a large scale, the following criteria should be followed for signs and outdoor display
structures:
a)
Theaestheticandharmoniousdevelopmentofthevisualenvironment.
b)
Signage for the handicapped at all grade changes, entry points to buildings and public
conveniencesandfacilities.Braillestripsusedshouldbedisplayednotabove1.5mheightforthe
benefit of the visually impaired at all important nodes, entrances and routes, Ramps for the
people on wheelchair should be highlighted with the appropriate international sign of the
wheelchair.Thesesignsareneededtobelightedadequatelyevenatnighttime.
c)
Environmental graphics should be creatively designed to cater to the basic function of

information,identityandwayfinding,withtheobjectiveofimprovementofurbanscape.
d)
Safetyaspects.
e)
Protectionoftreesandothervegetationfromharmduetosigns.
For People with disabilities or any kind of impairment all signs and symbols shall comply with the
guidelinesofClauseD.36ofAppendixDofPart3.
1020
Vol.3
APPENDIX10.1.A
ApplicationforPermittoErectorAlter
OutdoorSigns
Application for Permit to Erect or Alter Outdoor Signs
1.
Type of Sign : _____________________________________________________________________
2.
Location of Sign : _________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Details of Sign
a)
Dimension
i)
ii)
iii)
Length _________________________
Width __________________________
Thickness _______________________
m
m
mm
b)
Clearance and Projection
i)
ii)
Clearance _______________________
Projection _______________________
m
m
i)
ii)
iii)
Noncombustible
Approved plastic
Combination
4.
Type of Materials Used
5.
Details of Electrical Installations (if any) : ____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________
6.
Structural details of signs and supporting structures including foundations : _______________

__________________________________________________________________________________
7.
This application is accompanied by all required plans, drawings and other details as required by Sec 1.4.3 of
this code.
Yes _______________
No ____________
________________________
Signature of owner of
the Building/Premise
______________________
Signature of Applicant
Date _________________
Date ___________________
Name in Full __________________________
Name in Full _________________________
Address _______________________________
Address _____________________________
Part10
1021

Bangladesh National Building Code: 2012 (BNBC 2012 Draft)

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Bangladesh National Building Code: 2012 (BNBC 2012 Draft)

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SCOPE AND DEFINITION

TITLE, SCOPE AND GENERAL

1.4 EXISTING BUILDINGS

Addition and Alteration

1.5 HISTORIC OR ARCHITECTURALLY VALUABLE BUILDINGS

SETBACK LINE: See BUILDING LINE.

Bangladesh National Building Code 2012

RC: Reinforced Concrete

Bangladesh National Building Code 2012

ADMINISTRATION AND ENFORCEMENT

CODE ENFORCEMENT AGENCY

2.14 POWER TO MAKE RULES

PURPOSE AND APPLICABILITY

ORGANIZATION AND ENFORCEMENT

2.1 CODE ENFORCEMENT AGENCY

ENFORCEMENT AT THE FIELD LEVEL

2.3 BUILDING OFFICIAL

ADMINISTRATIVE JURISDICTION OF BUILDING OFFICIALS

Areas falling under the master plan control of Rajdhani Unnayan

Special areas, if any

2.5 MERGING THE JURISDICTIONS UNDER SMALL LOCAL BODIES

2.6 QUALIFICATION OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL

2.7 RESTRICTIONS ON THE BUILDING OFFICIAL

2.8 DAMAGE SUIT

Organization and Enforcement

2.9 POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL

Recognition of Professional Services

Application and Permits

Building Notices and Orders

Bangladesh National Building Code 2012

Orders to Stop Work

2.10 APPEALATE AUTHORITY

Organization and Enforcement

2.11 REQUIREMENT OF CERTIFICATION OF WORK

2.12 LIMITS OF PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT

2.13 VIOLATION AND PENALTIES

2.13.3 Obligation of Offender

Bangladesh National Building Code 2012

2.14 POWER TO MAKE RULES

PERMIT AND INSPECTIONS

g) Plastering and patch work;

Construction of sunshades on one's own land;

Re-erection of portion of buildings damaged by earthquake or cyclone or other natural calamities, to

3.2 TYPES OF PERMIT

Land use certificate

Large and specialized project permit.

Validity of Permits from the Date of Issuance

Land use certificate

Lange and specialized project permit

(unless construction upto plinth level is done)

(unless any change in use and physical properties.)

Permits Obtained Prior to Adoption of Code

3.3 CONSTITUTION OF BUILDING PERMIT COMMITTEES

3.4 APPLICATION FOR PERMIT

Notation (ISO Standard)

Operation and Maintenance of Utility Services

National Gas grid

National Power grid

Airways and Aerodromes

Electronic Broadcasting Services

Permit and Inspections

3.5 DISPOSAL OF APPLICATION